JP2023105105A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing an interest in a game.SOLUTION: There is provided displacement means displaceable to a first position in which game balls can enter second ball entry means and a second position in which game balls cannot easily enter the second ball entry means. The displacement means is displaced from the second position to the first position on the basis of satisfaction of a first condition in a specific game state occurring on the basis that a result of determination by determination means is a specific determination result, and the displacement means is displaced from the first position to the second position on the basis of satisfaction of a second condition in a situation in which the displacement means is positioned in the first position by first displacement control. When game balls enter first ball entry means, a predetermined game value is granted to a player. A first mode based on execution of determination, a second mode based on occurrence of a specific game state, and a third mode based on predetermined entry of game balls into the second ball entry means can at least occur. Accordingly, an interest in a game can be enhanced.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, aim to increase the interest of the player in the game by suggesting to the player that the lottery result is winning according to the contents of the variable performance that is executed. be.

JP-A-2006-345901

In the gaming machines as described above, there is a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the present invention comprises shooting means capable of shooting a game ball into a game area, first ball entering means capable of entering the game ball shot by the shooting means, and Acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information when a first condition that can be established based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means is established, and the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means can be stored. storage means, and determination means capable of performing determination based on the predetermined information stored in the storage means when a first execution condition is satisfied, and the result of the determination by the determination means is A means capable of generating a specific game state based on a specific determination result, and a game ball fired by the shooting means can be entered, and is different from the first ball entering means. A second ball entering means, a first position for allowing a game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and a game ball entering the second ball entering means from the first position. a first displacement control for displacing the displacement means positioned at the second position to the first position; and a second displacement control for displacing the displacement means to the second position.

Then, the displacement control means executes the first displacement control based on the establishment of a first condition that can be established in the specific game state, and the displacement means moves to the first position by the first displacement control. It is configured to execute the second displacement control based on the establishment of a second condition that can be established in the situation in which the vehicle is positioned.

Further, the gaming machine of the present invention is configured such that a predetermined value is given to the player at least when a game ball enters the first ball entering means, and It is configured such that at least a first mode based on the execution of the determination can occur.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of the present invention is constructed so that at least the second mode based on the occurrence of the specific game state can occur.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of the present invention is constructed so that at least the third mode based on a predetermined ball entering the second ball entering means can occur.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the shooting means capable of shooting the game ball to the game area, the first ball entering means capable of entering the game ball shot by the shooting means, and the first ball entering means Acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information when a first condition that can be established based on the entry of a game ball is established; Storage means capable of storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means; determination means capable of performing determination based on the predetermined information stored in the storage means when a first execution condition is satisfied, and the result of the determination by the determination means is a specific determination result. Means capable of generating a specific game state based on what happened, and second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, wherein the game ball launched by the launching means can be entered. a first position that allows a game ball to enter the second ball entering means; and a second position that makes it more difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means than the first position. a displacement means capable of being displaced between two positions; a first displacement control for displacing the displacement means positioned at the second position to the first position; and the displacement means positioned at the first position. to the second position; and displacement control means capable of executing at least:

Then, the displacement control means executes the first displacement control based on the establishment of a first condition that can be established in the specific game state, and the displacement means moves to the first position by the first displacement control. It is configured to execute the second displacement control based on the establishment of a second condition that can be established in the situation in which the vehicle is positioned.

Further, the gaming machine of the present invention is configured such that a predetermined value is given to the player at least when a game ball enters the first ball entering means, and It is configured such that at least a first mode based on the execution of the determination can occur.

This makes it possible to generate the first mode.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is constructed so that at least the second mode can occur based on the occurrence of the specific game state.

This makes it possible to generate the second mode.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is constructed so that at least the third mode based on a predetermined ball entering the second ball entering means can occur.

This makes it possible to generate the third mode.

In other words, the gaming machine of the present invention enables various aspects to occur.
Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a front perspective view of a variable winning device and a sorting device. (a) and (b) are front perspective views of a variable winning device. It is a front perspective view of a game board. It is a rear perspective view of the game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of a base plate, a variable winning device, a collection gutter, and a sorting device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the base plate, the variable winning device, the collecting gutter and the sorting device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the variable winning device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a sorting device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a sorting device. It is a front view of a receiving member and a sorting device. FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device and the sorting device taken along line XVI-XVI of FIG. 15; FIG. 16 is a sectional view of the variable winning device and the sorting device taken along line XVII-XVII of FIG. 15; FIG. 16 is a sectional view of the variable winning device and the sorting device taken along line XVIII-XVIII of FIG. 15; FIG. 16 is a sectional view of the variable winning device and the sorting device taken along line XVII-XVII of FIG. 15; FIG. 16 is a sectional view of the variable winning device and the sorting device taken along line XVIII-XVIII of FIG. 15; It is a front view of a variable winning device and a sorting device. FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the variable winning device and the sorting device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXII in FIG. 16; FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the variable winning device and the sorting device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIII in FIG. 16; (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter and the jackpot type in the special symbol and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the second winning random number counter and the winning in the normal symbol. It is the figure which showed time-measurement change of the operation|movement pattern of the opening-and-closing board of the variable winning device of the 1st round in each jackpot classification, and the operation|movement pattern of the slide displacement member of a sorting device. Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the operating unit; Fig. 10 is a rear perspective view of the operating unit; It is a front view of the operation unit showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the first operating unit; Fig. 10 is a rear perspective view of the first operating unit; 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the first motion unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operation unit; It is a front view of the 1st operation|movement unit in a production|presentation standby state. It is a back view of the 1st operation|movement unit in a production|presentation standby state. FIG. 41 is a side view of the first operation unit viewed in the direction of arrow XLII in FIG. 40; FIG. 11 is a front view of the first action unit in an intermediate effect state; FIG. 11 is a rear view of the first action unit in an intermediate rendering state; FIG. 4 is a front view of the first operation unit in an extended state; FIG. 11 is a rear view of the first operation unit in an extended state; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a displacement amount and a displacement angle of a supported member accompanying rotational displacement of a rotational member; 4(a) and 4(b) are schematic diagrams showing the magnitude relationship of the amount of displacement on the driven side of the supported member when the rotating member rotates in the tilting direction at a constant angular velocity. FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing changes in angles accompanying rotation of a rotating member; FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear case and the second operation unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear case and the second operation unit; (a) is a cross-sectional view of the second motion unit and the center frame along line LIIa-LIIa in FIG. 28, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the second motion unit and the center frame along line LIIb-LIIb in FIG. be. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the second motion unit and the center frame along line LIIIa-LIIIa in FIG. 33, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the second motion unit and the center frame along line LIIIb-LIIIb in FIG. be. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the second motion unit and the center frame taken along the LIVa-LIVa line in FIG. 30, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the second motion unit and the center frame taken along the LIVb-LIVb line in FIG. be. It is an exploded front perspective view of the up-and-down reversal effect device. It is an exploded back perspective view of the up-and-down reversal effect device. (a) and (b) are front views of a transmission device holding plate, an upside down member, an intermediate arm member, a linear motion plate member, and a shaft rotation member. 57(a) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate, the vertically reversing member, the intermediate arm member, the linear motion plate member, and the shaft rotating member taken along line LVIIIa-LVIIIa in FIG. 57(a); FIG. 3B is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate, the upside-down reversing member, the intermediate arm member, the linear motion plate member, and the shaft rotating member taken along line LVIIIb-LVIIIb of FIG. (a) to (c) are front views of the production device. FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of part of the configuration of the third operating unit; FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of part of the configuration of the third operating unit; FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of part of the configuration of the third operating unit; FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of part of the configuration of the third operating unit; (a) and (b) are rear views of an outer rotary member and an intermediate arm member. (a) and (b) are rear views of an outer rotary member and an intermediate arm member. (a) and (b) are front views of an outer rotary member and an intermediate arm member. (a) and (b) are front views of an outer rotary member and an intermediate arm member. 4 is a timing chart showing, in chronological order, an example of an arrangement of an elevating arm member, a drive mode of a drive motor, and an output of a detection sensor; FIG. 29 is a cross-sectional view of the third operating unit taken along line LXIX-LXIX in FIG. 28; (a) to (d) are schematic front views of action units for schematically explaining an example of a combined action of each action unit in chronological order. (a) to (d) are schematic front views of action units for schematically explaining an example of a combined action of each action unit in chronological order. It is a front perspective view of a sorting device. It is a front view of a variable winning device and a sorting device. FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the variable winning device and the sorting device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIII in FIG. 16; FIG. 74 is a cross-sectional view of the variable prize winning device and the sorting device along line LXXV-LXXV of FIG. 73; FIG. 76 is a cross-sectional view of the middle member, slide displacement member, lower member and detection sensor of the sorting device taken along line LXXVI-LXXVI of FIG. 75; (a) to (d) are front perspective views of an intermediate member of the sorting device. FIG. 4A is a top view of the intermediate member, the state switching device, the slide displacement member, and the lower member; (a) is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member, the slide displacement member, and the lower member taken along line LXXIXa-LXXIXa in FIG. 78, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member, the slide displacement member, and the lower member taken along line LXXIXb-LXXIXb in FIG. 79, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member, the slide displacement member, and the lower member taken along line LXXIXc-LXXIXc of FIG. 78. FIG. (a) and (b) are side views of a slide displacement member and a ball riding on the upper surface of the ball guide. (a) is a front view of the rotating member, (b) is a rear view of the rotating member, and (c) is a side view of the rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXXIc in FIG. 81(a). is. FIG. 4 is a front view of the first operating unit; Fig. 10 is a rear view of the first operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the first operating unit; Fig. 10 is a rear view of the first operating unit; (a) and (b) are rear views of the elongated guide hole, the dish-shaped lid, the detection sensor, and the extension of the transmission gear cam. (a) and (b) are rear views of the elongated guide hole, the dish-shaped lid, the detection sensor, and the extension of the transmission gear cam. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the elongated guide hole, the dish-shaped lid, the detection sensor, and the extension of the transmission gear cam; It is a front perspective view of a first decorative rotary member and a second decorative rotary member. (a) and (b) are front schematic views schematically showing a guide slot, a rectangular box portion, and an overhang decorative portion. (a) and (b) are front schematic views schematically showing a guide slot, a rectangular box portion, and an overhang decorative portion. It is a front schematic diagram which shows a guidance long hole, a rectangular-shaped box part, and an overhang decoration part typically. FIG. 86 is a cross-sectional view of the first operating unit taken along line XCIII-XCIII of FIG. 85; FIG. 11 is a front view of the second operation unit in an extended state; FIG. 95 is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit along line XCV-XCV in FIG. 94; FIG. 4 is a front view of a transmission device holding plate, an upside down member, an intermediate arm member, a direct acting plate member and a shaft rotating member; FIG. 4 is a front view of a transmission device holding plate, an upside down member, an intermediate arm member, a direct acting plate member and a shaft rotating member; It is a front perspective view of the up-and-down reversal effect device. (a) is a front perspective view of an intermediate arm member, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the intermediate arm member. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of the third motion unit, schematically showing displacements of the metal rod and the intermediate arm member; It is a front schematic diagram of a 3rd operation|movement unit. FIG. 4 is a front view of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member; (a) is a rear view of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member, and (b) is a front view of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. FIG. 11 is a front view of a third operating unit; FIG. 11 is a front view of a third operating unit; FIG. 106 is a cross-sectional view of the third operating unit taken along line CVI-CVI in FIG. 105; FIG. 105 is a cross-sectional view of the third operating unit taken along line CVII-CVII in FIG. 104; FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device in the second embodiment along the line corresponding to line XVI-XVI of FIG. 15; (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the sorting device in the third embodiment along the line corresponding to line XVII-XVII in FIG. (a) and (b) schematically shows the configuration of the downstream side of the third flow path configuration part in the fourth embodiment, the variable probability detection sensor, the normal detection sensor, and the slide displacement member. It is a top view. (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the third flow path constituting portion, the variable probability detection sensor, the normal detection sensor and the slide displacement member along the CXIa-CXIa line in FIG. ) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the third flow path constituting portion, the variable probability detection sensor, the normal detection sensor and the slide displacement member along the line CXIb-CXIb. (a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the sorting device in the fifth embodiment taken along line XVII-XVII in FIG. FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device in the sixth embodiment along the line corresponding to line XVII-XVII of FIG. 15; It is a front perspective view of the sorting device in 7th Embodiment. FIG. 115 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device taken along line CXV-CXV of FIG. 114; It is a front schematic diagram which shows typically the relationship between the guide long hole and rotation member in 8th Embodiment. It is a front schematic diagram which shows typically the relationship between the guide long hole and rotation member in 9th Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first control example. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the variable winning equipment provided in the area under the front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram in the first control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the flow-down path|route of the ball which won the variable winning device. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the first control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing display screen area division setting and effective line setting in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen in the first control example. be. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when ready-to-win is established in a normal state displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing the third It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode during execution of the normal design variation in the normal state displayed by the design display device. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the case where a general pattern per game (long open per game) is executed during the normal state displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example, (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a chance zone is set in the normal state displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the third symbol temporarily stops during the special variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example; A diagram showing an example of the display mode when the third symbol is restarted in the special variation effect executed in the state where the special figure 2 reserved ball displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example is acquired. be. A diagram showing an example of the display mode when the 3rd symbol is restarted in the special variation effect executed in the state where the special figure 2 reserved ball displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the first control example is not acquired is. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the first half of the ending period of the normal jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (b) is the first control. Of the ending period of the probability variable jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device in the example, it is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the first half period, (c) is the third symbol display device in the first control example. Of the ending period of the normal jackpot game to be displayed, it is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the second half period, (d) is the ending of the probability variable jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the second half period among the periods. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of a game state suggestion effect executed during the chance mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. (a) is the state in which the chance mode is set as the effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example, the normal state is set internally, and the period other than the high-speed fluctuation period is It is a diagram showing an example of the display mode during the period (during the normal fluctuation period), (b) is a state in which the chance mode is set as the effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a normal state is set internally and the frame button is operated during a period other than the high-speed fluctuation period (during the normal fluctuation period). (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the operation effect during the high-speed fluctuation period in the chance mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example; It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of operating a frame button during the operation production during a high-speed fluctuation period among the chance modes displayed by the 3rd pattern display apparatus in a control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the first special symbol variation is executed during the "super chance mode" displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (b) ) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the second special symbol variation is executed during the "super chance mode" displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. (a) is a timing chart showing the flow of an effect when a variation pattern in which a non-reach variation effect is executed is set as the variation effect of the third symbol in the first control example; It is a timing chart showing the flow of the effect when a variation pattern in which the reach variation effect is executed is set as the variation effect of the third symbol in the first control example. (a) is a timing chart showing the flow of the ending period production for the normal jackpot in the first control example, and (b) is the ending period production for the probability variable jackpot in the first control example. (c) is a timing chart showing the flow when the ball does not flow down the specific area (V gate) during the probability variable jackpot game in the first control example. (a) and (b) are timing charts showing the flow of the effect mode set after the end of the jackpot game in the first control example. (a) and (b) are timing charts showing the flow of the contents of the operation presentation during the chance mode in the first control example. It is the figure which showed the game flow of the pachinko machine in the 1st control example. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the first control example. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing configurations of various counters in the first control example; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the first control example, (b) is the block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main controller in the first control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of a first winning random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first control example, and (b) is the main controller in the first control example. It is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the second winning random number table set in the ROM. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first control example, (b) is set in the ROM of the main controller in the first control example is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the table for the special figure 1 jackpot, and (c) shows the specified contents of the table for the special figure 2 jackpot set in the ROM of the main controller in the first control example. It is a figure shown typically. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first control example, (b) is set in the ROM of the main controller in the first control example FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the normal table. It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the table for probability variation and time reduction set in ROM of the main control unit in the 1st control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the first control example; (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the first control example; be. It is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the normal medium special figure 2 effect selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the first control example. It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the production|presentation selection table during probability variation set to ROM of the sound ramp control apparatus in the 1st control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of a continuous advance notice execution selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the first control example; (b) is a diagram showing the sound lamp in the first control example; FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a V-notification execution selection table set in the ROM of the control device; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a button operation effect selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the first control example; (b) is a block diagram showing the structure of the sound lamp control device in the first control example; It is the figure which showed typically the prescription|regulation content of the time saving state selection table set to 1 ROM. It is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the variable probability state selection table set in the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the first control example. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device in a first control example; FIG. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a power-on image in the first control example. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a rear surface A in the first control example, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining rear surfaces BD in the first control example. FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first control example; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 7 is a flowchart showing update processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing prefetching processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example; It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 4 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first control example; 4 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in a first control example; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in a first control example; It is a flow chart showing a jackpot control process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flow chart showing a jackpot operation setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is a flow chart which shows the jackpot end processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a winning process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first control example; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing abnormality processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flow chart showing a state command reception process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; 10 is a flow chart showing winning command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; It is a flow chart showing a special figure winning information command process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing normal map-related processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows big hit related processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in the example of the 1st control. 7 is a flow chart showing ending processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; 9 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; It is a flow chart showing a special figure 1 effect mode setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 2 effect mode setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a chance mode effect setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 4 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing; 9 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example 8 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing; (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (b) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 10 is a flow chart showing number command processing. 9 is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing fluctuation stop command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; It is the flow chart which showed information command processing. (a) is a flowchart showing rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example 4 is a flow chart showing error command processing. 8 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by an MPU in the display device in the first control example; 9 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 10 is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing; 10 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the display layer formed on the pachinko machine and the display screen in the second control example, and (b) and (c) are the main symbols in the second control example. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display effect that is executed when layer display is set to OFF and sub-symbol layer display is set to ON; (a) is a schematic diagram showing image data of a main pattern for sea used when a sea image (sea background) is set in the second control example; FIG. 10C is a schematic diagram showing image data of a main mountain image used when an image (mountain background) is set, and FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing image data, and FIG. 14D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of image data corresponding to various images used as main symbols for variation in the second control example; FIG. 11 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of variable display of the third symbol (main symbol, sub symbol) in the second control example; FIG. (a) is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of variation patterns used in the production example in the second control example, and (b) schematically shows the flow of the normal production in the second control example. FIG. 9 is a timing chart, where (c) is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the reach line notice effect in the second control example; 4 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of different notice effects. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device in a second control example; FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table in the second control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list in the second control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing variation pattern command processing 2 executed by an MPU in the display control device in the second control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing rear image change command processing 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the second control example; FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the display layer formed in the pachinko machine and the display screen in the modification of the second control example, and (b) is the modification of the second control example. FIG. 12C is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the triple reach effect, and (c) shows an example of the display screen when the triple reach state is brought about by the triple reach effect in the modified example of the second control example. It is a diagram. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the third control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a structure near a specific winning opening of the variable winning device of the game board of the pachinko machine in the third control example, and (b) is a specific It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the flow-down path|route of the ball|ball which won the prize-winning opening|mouth. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a flow-down route of a ball that has won a prize in a specific prize-winning hole in the third control example; FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM of a main controller in a third control example; FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device in the third control example; It is a flowchart which shows the big-hit control process 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in a 3rd control example. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a prize winning process 4 executed by an MPU in the main controller in the third control example; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing V-round processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the third control example; It is a flow chart which shows update processing during a big hit performed by MPU in the main control unit in the example of the 3rd control. 10 is a flowchart showing a jackpot-related process 4 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the third control example; 14 is a flow chart showing effect update processing 4 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example; FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM of a main controller in a fourth control example; (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the special figure 2 jackpot 2 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the fourth control example, (b) is the main in the fourth control example FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a drop lottery table set in the ROM of the control device; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the fourth control example; (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the fourth control example; be. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a button operation effect selection 2 table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the fourth control example; (b) is a block diagram showing the sound lamp control in the fourth control example; It is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability variation state selection 2 table set in the ROM of the device. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol jackpot determination process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth control example. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing prefetching process 5 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing jackpot end processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 5 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing fall-related processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of display effect in the second control example; It is the figure which showed the modification of the game board of a pachinko machine. FIG. 20 is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the fifth control example; (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during a jackpot game executed based on winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery in the fifth control example, and (b) is a diagram in the fifth control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen displayed on the ending screen of a jackpot game. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the chance time in the fifth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an effect screen at the end of the chance time in the fifth control example. be. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed at the start of the pullback zone in the fifth control example, and (b) is a display displayed when a time reduction win is made during the pullback zone in the fifth control example. It is the figure which showed an example of a screen. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen during the extended time that is executed when the long working hours are set in the fifth control example, (b) is executed during the long working hours in the fifth control example. It is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the number of executions of the special symbol variation reaches 9900 times. It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation screen of the preparation time performed during a time saving state after the chance time completion|finish in the 5th control example. (a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the background type displayed in the pullback zone in the fifth control example and the content indicated by each background, and (b) is a suggested mode during the pullback mode in the fifth control example. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the relationship between the type of suggestion and the content of suggestion indicated by each suggestion mode. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a game flow in the fifth control example; FIG. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the fifth control example. FIG. 14 is a diagram schematically showing configurations of various counters in the fifth control example; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the fifth control example, (b) shows the configuration of the RAM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the fifth control example. is a block diagram. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the first winning random number 5 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the fifth control example, and (b) is the main controller in the fifth control example. It is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the second random number table set in the ROM, (c) shows the prescribed contents of the time saving random number 5 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the fifth control example It is a figure shown typically. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a jackpot type selection 5 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the fifth control example, (b) is a special figure 1 jackpot 5 table in the fifth control example It is a diagram schematically showing the defined content, (c) is a diagram schematically showing the defined content of the special figure 2 jackpot 5 table in the fifth control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the variation pattern selection 5 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the fifth control example, (b) is the normal/second probability variation in the fifth control example FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a Y5 table; (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the 5 tables for probability variation and time saving in the fifth control example, (b) is time saving type selection 5 set in the ROM of the main control device in the fifth control example It is the figure which showed the specification content of the table typically. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the fifth control example, and (b) is the configuration of the RAM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the fifth control example. is a block diagram showing FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a pullback mode selection table set in the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a suggestion mode selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the fifth control example; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special design determination process 5 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 5th control example. It is a flow chart which shows time reduction lottery processing 5 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the example of the 5th control. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth control example. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing update processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fifth control example; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows time saving setting processing 5 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the example of the 5th control. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing start winning process 5 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing prefetching process 5 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fifth control example; FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing a jackpot control process 5 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fifth control example. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing jackpot end processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 5 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing state command reception processing 5 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing normal state effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing pullback mode setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving state production|presentation setting process performed by MPU in an audio|voice lamp control apparatus in a 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd probability variation state production|presentation setting process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in a 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 production|presentation mode setting process 5 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 production|presentation mode setting process 5 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation setting process during chance time performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 5th control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a variable display screen when the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery is a big hit or a short time election in the normal state in the first modification of the fifth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example. In the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) in the first modification of the fifth control example, when the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery (special 1 lottery) is short-time winning It is the figure which showed an example of a display screen. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen in the time saving state when 30 seconds is set as the variable time of the special figure 1 in the normal state in the first modification of the fifth control example, (b) [Fig. 10] is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when the time saving state in the first modified example of the fifth control example ends. It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen at the time of short-time winning by special figure 2 reservation in the promotion chance zone in the 1st modification of the 5th control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the time saving per random number 5a table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first modification of the fifth control example, (b) of the fifth control example It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the time reduction classification selection 5a table set to ROM of the main controller in the 1st modification. It is a flow chart which shows time reduction lottery processing 5a performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 1st modification of the 5th example of control. It is a flow chart which shows time saving state production setting processing 5a executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first modification of the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 production|presentation mode setting process 5a performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in the 1st modification of the 5th control example. (a) is an example of the display screen during the chance time acquisition performance that is executed when winning the jackpot that gives the first time saving state in the special figure 1 lottery in the normal state in the second modification of the fifth control example. (b) is a diagram showing, (b) is a chance time acquisition effect that is executed when the second time saving state is granted in the special figure 1 lottery in the normal state in the second modification of the fifth control example and the time saving is won It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen of inside. It is the figure which showed an example of the variation pattern at the time of jackpot election in the 2nd modification of the 5th control example, and the variation pattern at the time of short-time election. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the random number 5b table per time reduction set in the ROM of the main control device in the second modification of the fifth control example, (b) of the fifth control example It is the figure which showed typically the specification content of the 5b table for big hits in a 2nd modification. It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the time reduction classification selection 5b table set to ROM of the main-control apparatus in the 2nd modification of the 5th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving state production|presentation setting process 5b performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in the 2nd modification of the 5th control example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the time saving A in the sixth control example is set, (b) is a display screen when the time saving B in the sixth control example is set It is the figure which showed an example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when the number of remaining working hours is increased, and (b) is a time saving during the working hours state in the sixth control example. It is the figure which showed an example of a display screen when winning and the number of times of time saving remaining decreased. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a game flow in the sixth control example; FIG. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the random number 6 table per time saving set in the ROM of the main controller in the sixth control example, (b) is the ROM of the main controller in the sixth control example It is the figure which showed typically the prescription|regulation content of the time saving classification selection 6 table set to. It is the figure which showed typically the specification content of the 6 big-hit tables set to ROM of the main-control apparatus in the 6th control example. It is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the sixth control example. It is a flow chart which shows time reduction lottery processing 6 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the example of the 6th control. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving state production|presentation setting process 6 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 6th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 production|presentation mode setting process 6 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 6th control example. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing mode-specific effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the sixth control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation setting processing during time saving B performed by MPU in an audio|voice lamp control apparatus in a 6th control example. FIG. 20 is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the seventh control example; It is a partial enlarged view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the seventh control example. FIG. 20 is a front perspective view of the V winning device in the seventh control example; FIG. 20 is an exploded front perspective view of the V winning device in the seventh control example; It is an operation diagram of the V winning device in the seventh control example as viewed from the rear side. (a) is a schematic plan view showing a state in which the opening/closing door is closed to the V winning opening of the V winning device in the seventh control example, and (b) is a V winning opening of the V winning device in the seventh control example. is a schematic plan view of a state in which is open. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when the time saving lottery result suggestion effect is executed during the fluctuation of the special figure 1 in the seventh control example, and (b) is a special figure 1 in the seventh control example It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in the case of suggesting time-saving election during fluctuation|variation. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when suggesting time-saving non-winning during the variation of special figure 1 in the seventh control example, (b) is a jackpot when duplicate winning is made in the seventh control example It is the figure which showed an example of the winning notification screen. (a) is a timing chart showing an example of a notification pattern in the case of double winning in the time-saving lottery and jackpot lottery in the seventh control example, and (b) is a time-saving lottery and jackpot non-winning in the seventh control example. (c) is a timing chart showing an example of the notification pattern in the seventh control example when the time saving non-winning and jackpot winning are won. FIG. 20 is a diagram schematically showing configurations of various counters in the seventh control example; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the seventh control example, (b) shows the configuration of the RAM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the seventh control example. is a block diagram. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the first per random number 7 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the seventh control example, (b) is the first special symbol random number 7 table in the seventh control example (c) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the second special symbol random number 7 table in the seventh control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a jackpot type selection 7 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the seventh control example, (b) is a special figure 1 jackpot type selection 7 table in the seventh control example (c) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 7 table in the seventh control example, (d) is the seventh control It is the figure which showed typically the prescription|regulation content of the time reduction provision 7 table set to ROM of the main control unit in an example. It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the small hitting classification selection 7 table set to ROM of the main control unit in the 7th control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the variation pattern 7 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the seventh control example, (b) is a normal variation pattern 7 table in the seventh control example It is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the provisions of. It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the variation pattern 7 table for time saving in a 7th control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the random number 7 table per time saving set in the ROM of the main controller in the seventh control example, (b) is the ROM of the main controller in the seventh control example It is the figure which showed typically the prescription|regulation content of the time saving classification selection 7 table set to. FIG. 12B is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM within the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the seventh control example, and (b) is a block showing the configuration of the RAM within the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the seventh control example; It is a diagram. FIG. 20 is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of a lottery result notification mode selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the seventh control example; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a game flow in the seventh control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the seventh control example; FIG. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh control example. It is a flow chart which shows time reduction lottery processing 7 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the example of the 7th control. It is a flowchart which shows the special design determination process 7 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 7th control example. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh control example. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing update processing 7 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the seventh control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start setting process 7 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the short-time update process 7 for small hits performed by MPU in the main controller in the 7th control example. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing V entrance passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the seventh control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing V passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the seventh control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing start-up processing 7 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the seventh control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing main processing 7 executed by an MPU in the main controller in the seventh control example; FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing a jackpot control process 7 executed by an MPU in the main controller in the seventh control example; It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process 7 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 7th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 production|presentation mode setting process 7 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 7th control example. It is a diagram showing a modified configuration of the game board 13 that the pachinko machine 10 has. FIG. 20 is a front view schematically showing the game board of the pachinko machine in the eighth control example; (a) and (b) are diagrams schematically showing the internal structure of the distribution unit 1064 of the pachinko machine in the eighth control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect screen when special figure 2 suspension is continuously acquired by overflow winning in a disadvantageous time saving state displayed on the third symbol display device in the eighth control example, (b ) is a diagram showing an example of an effect screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the eighth control example during a normal long figure winning game. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect screen in the case of suggesting the end of the disadvantageous time-saving state displayed on the third symbol display device in the eighth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the effect screen in the eighth control example It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation screen during ending in a normal jackpot game displayed on a 3rd design display device. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the ROM of the main controller in the eighth control example, and (b) is a part of the contents of the RAM of the main controller in the eighth control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed the part typically. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a jackpot type selection 8 table in the eighth control example, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a time saving random number 8 table in the eighth control example be. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the 8 table for probability variation / time saving in the eighth control example, (b) schematically shows the contents of the time saving type selection 8 table in the eighth control example It is a schematic diagram shown. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the eighth control example, and (b) is the contents of the RAM of the sound ramp control device in the eighth control example. is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a prefetch suspension mode selection table in the eighth control example; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth control example. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing variation execution determination processing 8 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the eighth control example; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows time saving lottery processing 8 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the example of the 8th control. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing update processing 8 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the eighth control example; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows time saving setting processing 8 performed by MPU in a main control unit in the example of the 8th control. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process 8 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing prefetching process 8 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 8 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing state command reception processing 8 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing normal state effect setting processing 8 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the time reduction state production|presentation setting process 8 performed by MPU in an audio|voice lamp control apparatus in the 8th control example. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing winning command processing 8 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the prize-winning information command process 8 for special figures performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 8th control example. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing ending processing 8 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a liquid crystal effect execution management process 8 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a preceding winning detection process 8 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a front view schematically showing the game board of the pachinko machine in the ninth control example; (a) to (b) are enlarged views showing the right area of the game board of the pachinko machine in the ninth control example. (a) to (b) are enlarged views showing the right area of the game board of the pachinko machine in the ninth control example. (a) to (b) are enlarged views showing the right area of the game board of the pachinko machine in the ninth control example. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game per normal pattern when the open pattern A per normal pattern in the ninth control example is set. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game per normal pattern when the open pattern B per normal pattern in the ninth control example is set. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a game flow showing transition contents of a game state in the ninth control example; (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect screen when winning a time saving symbol in a normal state displayed on the third symbol display device in the ninth control example, (b) is a ninth control example It is a diagram showing an example of the effect screen during the heaven mode displayed on the third symbol display device in . (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect screen during the space mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the ninth control example; It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation screen in challenge mode displayed. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the ROM of the main controller in the ninth control example, and (b) shows the contents of the first random number 9 table in the ninth control example. It is a schematic diagram shown typically. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 9 table in the ninth control example, (b) schematically shows the contents of the time saving per random number 9 table in the ninth control example It is a schematic diagram. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the classification selection 9 table per normal figure in the 9th control example. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the RAM of the main controller in the ninth control example; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the ninth control example, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the expectation level selection table in the ninth control example; It is a schematic diagram schematically shown. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the ninth control example; FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 9 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the ninth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing state command processing 9 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the ninth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing game state update processing 9 executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the ninth control example; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows time reduction related processing 9 performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in the example of 9th control. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a non-powered state management process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the ninth control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a front view schematically showing the game board of the pachinko machine in the tenth control example; It is an enlarged view showing the V winning device of the pachinko machine in the tenth control example. It is an enlarged view showing the V winning device of the pachinko machine in the tenth control example. It is an enlarged view showing the V winning device of the pachinko machine in the tenth control example. It is an enlarged view showing the V winning device of the pachinko machine in the tenth control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a time-saving effect screen after a special figure 1 jackpot at normal time displayed on the third symbol display device in the tenth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the time saving effect screen in the tenth control example. It is a diagram showing an example of an effect screen during a special figure 2 jackpot game displayed on the 3-symbol display device. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the final variation screen during the super chance mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the tenth control example, and (b) is a third symbol display in the tenth control example. It is a diagram showing an example of the production screen when the special figure 2 pending is accumulated to MAX during the super chance mode displayed on the device. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a treasure chest opening effect screen during the super chance mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the tenth control example, and (b) is the third symbol in the tenth control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the final variation screen in super chance mode displayed on a display apparatus. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a game flow showing transition contents of a game state in the tenth control example; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the ROM of the main controller in the tenth control example, and (b) is a part of the contents of the RAM of the main controller in the tenth control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed the part typically. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning random number 10 table in the tenth control example, and (b) is a part of the first winning random number ten table in the tenth control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 1 random number 10 table, (c) schematically shows the contents of the special symbol 2 random number 10 table which is part of the first winning random number 10 table in the tenth control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically shown. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hitting classification selection 10 table in the 10th control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the time reduction provision table in the 10th control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the tenth control example, and (b) is the contents of the RAM of the sound ramp control device in the tenth control example. is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the final variation effect selection table in the tenth control example, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the notification target selection table in the tenth control example. It is a schematic diagram. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process 10 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the tenth control example. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation pattern selection process 10 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the tenth control example. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing update processing 10 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the tenth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a pending ball count command process 10 executed by an MPU in a sound ramp control device in a tenth control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 production|presentation mode setting process 10 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the tenth control example. FIG. 20 is a front view schematically showing the game board of the pachinko machine in the eleventh control example; (a) is a diagram showing an example of a demonstration screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the eleventh control example, (b) is a normal display displayed on the third symbol display device in the eleventh control example It is the figure which showed an example of the screen during a time right hitting game. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the main controller in the eleventh control example, and (b) is a part of the contents of the RAM of the main controller in the eleventh control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed the part typically. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 2 random number 11 table in the eleventh control example, (b) schematically shows the contents of the small hit type selection 11 table in the eleventh control example 2 is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the random number 11 table per time saving in the eleventh control example, (b) schematically shows the contents of the time saving type selection 11 table in the eleventh control example It is a schematic diagram. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the eleventh control example; It is a flowchart which shows the time reduction lottery process 11 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 11th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 11 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 11th control example. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a jackpot ending process 11 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the eleventh control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the time reduction limit update process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 11th control example. FIG. 20 is a front view schematically showing the game board of the pachinko machine in the twelfth control example; FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the ROM of the main controller in the twelfth control example; FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the RAM of the main controller in the twelfth control example; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a first winning random number 12 table in a twelfth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a second winning random number 12 table in a twelfth control example. It is a figure, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a random number 12 table per time saving in the 12th control example, (d) schematically shows a small random number 12 table in the 12th control example It is a schematic diagram. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 12 table in the twelfth control example, (b) is a special figure that is part of the jackpot type selection 12 table in the twelfth control example It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of 12 tables for 1 jackpot. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of 12 tables for special-figure 2 jackpots which are a part of 12 jackpot classification selection tables in the 12th control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hitting classification selection 12 table in the 12th control example. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a variation pattern 12 table in the twelfth control example; FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a normal state variation pattern table which is part of the variation pattern 12 table in the twelfth control example; FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a time saving state variation pattern table which is part of the variation pattern 12 table in the twelfth control example; It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern table for time saving winning variation state, which is a part of the variation pattern 12 table in the twelfth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special design variation process 12 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 12th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation start process 12 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 12th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design determination process 12 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 12th control example. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation pattern selection process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the twelfth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 time reduction lottery process 12 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 12th control example. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing game state update processing 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the twelfth control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process 12 during a 1st special design variation execution performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 12th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation stop process 12 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 12th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 forced stop process 12 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 12th control example. It is a flow chart which shows time reduction setting processing 12 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 12th example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design variation start process 12 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 12th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design determination process 12 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 12th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 time reduction lottery process 12 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 12th control example. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a small winning lottery process 12 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the twelfth control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design variation pattern selection process 12 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 12th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the process 12 during a 2nd special design variation execution performed by MPU in the main controller in the 12th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design variation stop process 12 performed by MPU in the main control device in the 12th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 forced stop process 12 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 12th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 small hit stop process 12 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 12th control example. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a jackpot control process 12 executed by an MPU in the main controller in the twelfth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a jackpot ending process 12 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the twelfth control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing time saving limit update processing 12 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the twelfth control example; FIG. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a ceiling reaching suggestion effect screen displayed on the third pattern display device in the thirteenth control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a ceiling reaching fluctuation effect screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the thirteenth control example, and (b) is a diagram displayed on the third symbol display device in the thirteenth control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation screen in the ceiling which is carried out. It is the figure which showed an example of the addition effect screen in the ceiling displayed on the 3rd design display apparatus in the 13th control example. It is the transition diagram which showed the flow of the transition of each game state in the thirteenth control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the thirteenth control example; (b) is the configuration of the RAM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the thirteenth control example; is a block diagram showing (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the first per random number 13 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the thirteenth control example, (b) is the main control in the thirteenth control example It is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the second per random number 13 table set in the ROM of the device, (c) is a time saving per random number 13 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the thirteenth control example It is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the provisions of. It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the jackpot classification selection 13 table set to ROM of the main-control apparatus in the thirteenth control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a time saving type selection 13 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 13th control example, (b) is a time saving winning 13 table in the 13th control example FIG. 12C is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents, and FIG. 11C is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the ceiling 13 table in the thirteenth control example; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the thirteenth control example; (b) is the RAM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the thirteenth control example; 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of FIG. FIG. 32 is a diagram schematically showing defined contents of a ceiling reaching suggestion effect selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the thirteenth control example; It is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the effect selection table at the time of reaching the ceiling set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the thirteenth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special design variation process 13 performed by MPU in the main controller in the thirteenth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special design determination process 13 performed by MPU in the main controller in the thirteenth control example. 29 is a flowchart showing ceiling determination processing 13 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the thirteenth control example; It is a flow chart which shows time reduction lottery processing 13 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the thirteenth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special design variation pattern selection process 13 performed by MPU in the main controller in the thirteenth control example. It is a flow chart which shows time saving setting processing 13 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the thirteenth example of control. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing 13 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the thirteenth control example. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the thirteenth control example; FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 13 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the thirteenth control example; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing state command reception processing 13 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the thirteenth control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving state production|presentation setting process 13 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in the thirteenth control example. 29 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process 13 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the thirteenth control example; 29 is a flow chart showing effect mode setting processing 13 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the thirteenth control example; 29 is a flow chart showing normal mode effect setting processing 13 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the thirteenth control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a game state suggestion effect screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the first modification of the thirteenth control example; (b) is a diagram showing the first It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen after it alert|reported that the 1st time saving state is set by game state suggestion production|presentation in a modification. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the random number 13a table per time reduction set in the ROM of the main controller in the first modification of the thirteenth control example, (b) is the thirteenth control It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the 13a table for time saving election in the 1st modification of an example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the first modification of the thirteenth control example; (b) is a block diagram of the first modification of the thirteenth control example; It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM in the sound ramp control apparatus of a pachinko machine. FIG. 21 is a diagram schematically showing defined contents of a game state suggesting effect selection table 13a set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the first modification of the thirteenth control example; It is a flow chart which shows time reduction lottery processing 13a performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 1st modification of the 13th example of control. It is a flow chart which shows time saving state production setting processing 13a which is performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in the 1st modification of the 13th example of control. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing normal mode effect setting processing 13a executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first modification of the thirteenth control example; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a screen when entering the ceiling activation mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the fourteenth control example, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the screen on the third symbol display device in the fourteenth control example It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation screen in ceiling activation mode displayed. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a screen when entering the super-ceiling activation mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the fourteenth control example, and (b) is a third symbol display device in the fourteenth control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the screen at the time of the time-saving rush during the ceiling activation mode displayed on. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the fourteenth control example; (b) is the configuration of the RAM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the fourteenth control example; is a block diagram showing (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the random number 14 table per time saving set in the ROM of the main controller in the 14th control example, (b) is for the ceiling 14 in the 14th control example It is the figure which showed the specification content of the table typically. FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the fourteenth control example; FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing ceiling determination processing 14 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fourteenth control example; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows time reduction setting processing 14 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 14th example of control. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing state command reception processing 14 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing time saving state effect setting processing 14 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fourteenth control example; FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing normal mode effect setting processing 14 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fourteenth control example; (a) is a diagram showing an example of a heart-pounding zone entry screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the first modification of the fourteenth control example, and (b) is a first modification of the fourteenth control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the alerting|reporting screen which shows time-saving rushing immediately after the heart-pounding zone rushing displayed on the 3rd pattern display apparatus in an example. It is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the first modification of the fourteenth control example. It is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated content of the time saving winning 14a table in the first modification of the fourteenth control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the first modification of the fourteenth control example; (b) is a block diagram of the first modification of the fourteenth control example; It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM in the sound ramp control apparatus of a pachinko machine. FIG. 20 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a pounding zone effect selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the first modified example of the fourteenth control example; It is a flow chart which shows time reduction lottery processing 14a performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 1st modification of the 14th example of control. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing ceiling determination processing 14a executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first modified example of the fourteenth control example; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows time saving setting processing 14a performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 1st modification of the 14th example of control. It is a flow chart which shows time saving state production setting processing 14a that is executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first modification of the fourteenth control example. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing normal mode effect setting processing 14a executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first modification of the fourteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a front view schematically showing the game board of the pachinko machine in the fifteenth control example; (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect screen during the second probability variation state displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifteenth control example, and (b) is a third symbol display in the fifteenth control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation screen at the time of the 2nd probability change state completion|finish displayed on a device. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect screen during special figure 2 fluctuation in the normal state displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifteenth control example, (b) is a diagram in the fifteenth control example It is a diagram showing an example of the special figure 2 variation screen in the second probability variation state displayed on the third symbol display device. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the fifteenth control example, (b) is the second ROM set in the main controller in the fifteenth control example It is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the hit random number 15 table, (c) schematically shows the prescribed contents of the time saving random number 15 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 15th control example It is a diagram. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a jackpot type selection 15 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the fifteenth control example, (b) is a special figure 1 jackpot 15 in the fifteenth control example It is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the table, (c) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the special figure 2 jackpot 15 table in the fifteenth control example. It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the time reduction classification selection 15 table set to ROM of the main-control apparatus in the 15th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the fifteenth control example; (b) is the RAM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the fifteenth control example; 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of FIG. It is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the keep zone effect selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the fifteenth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special design variation process 15 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the fifteenth control example. It is a flow chart which shows time reduction lottery processing 15 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 15th example of control. 29 is a flow chart showing second probability variation state effect setting processing 15 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifteenth control example; It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 production|presentation mode setting process 15 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 15th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 production|presentation mode setting process 15 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 15th control example. (a) is a diagram illustrating the appearance of an island facility in a state in which a plurality of pachinko machines connected to a data display device according to the sixteenth embodiment are arranged side by side in a hall, and (b) is a diagram of the sixteenth embodiment. 2 is a diagram showing a display example of various data displayed on the data display unit of the data display device in FIG. (a) is a diagram showing the visual recognition mode of the data display device while it is in a jackpot gaming state in the sixteenth control example, and (b) is a time-saving state of normal symbols after the jackpot in the sixteenth control example. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a visual recognition mode of the data display device when shifting to . It is the figure which showed the visual recognition aspect of the data display apparatus during the 3rd time saving state set based on having reached|attained the ceiling lottery frequency|count in the 16th control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the effect of the data display device interlocking effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the sixteenth control example, and (b) is a third symbol display in the sixteenth control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation aspect of the big-hit information production|presentation linked|linked with a data display device displayed on a device. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when a small win or a special jackpot is won in the 16th control example, and (b) is a variation executed in the ceiling lottery number of times in the 16th control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the effect mode of the time-saving activation effect in the normal state displayed on the third symbol display device in the sixteenth control example, (b) is the third in the sixteenth control example It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation aspect of the time-reduction activation production|presentation linked with a data display device displayed on a design display device. (a) is a diagram showing a list of pending change modes in the 16th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing conditions for suppressing the pending change effect in the 16th control example. It is the figure which showed the transition method between each game state in the 16th control example. FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the sixteenth control example; FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a data display device and a hall computer electrically connected to a pachinko machine through an external output terminal board in a sixteenth control example; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing types of external output signals output from the external output terminal board in the sixteenth control example; It is the figure which showed an example of the signal output mode of the external output terminal board in the normal game in the 16th control example. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of a signal output mode when power is turned on in the sixteenth control example; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the sixteenth control example; (b) is the configuration of the RAM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the sixteenth control example; is a block diagram showing (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the 1st per random number 16 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 16th control example, (b) is the main control in the 16th control example It is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection 16 table set in the ROM of the device, (c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the regular 16 table in the sixteenth control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the jackpot type selection 16 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 16th control example, (b) is the main controller in the 16th control example It is the figure which showed typically the specification content of the random-number 16 table per time reduction set to ROM of this. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the sixteenth control example; (b) is the RAM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the sixteenth control example; 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of FIG. FIG. 17 is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of a holding mode selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the sixteenth control example; It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the time saving suggestion production|presentation selection table set to ROM of the sound lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in the 16th control example. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the sixteenth control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special design variation process 16 performed by MPU in the main control device in the 16th control example. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing update processing 16 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the sixteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing ceiling determination processing 16 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the sixteenth control example; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows time saving setting processing 16 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 16th example of control. (a) is a flowchart showing an outer-end output setting process executed by an MPU in a main controller in a sixteenth control example; 4 is a flow chart showing error signal processing. 29 is a flowchart showing out-ball detection signal processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the sixteenth control example; FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing start-up signal processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the sixteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing opening signal processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the sixteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the sixteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing startup signal output processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the sixteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the sixteenth control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing effect update processing 16 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the sixteenth control example; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 16 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the sixteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing state command reception processing 16 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the sixteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing winning command processing 16 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the sixteenth control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing a jackpot-related process 16 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the sixteenth control example; It is a flowchart which shows the small hit related process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in the 16th control example. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a general map-related process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the sixteenth control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing normal mode effect setting processing 16 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the sixteenth control example; FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the data display device in the sixteenth control example; FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing display device signal reception processing executed by the MPU in the data display device in the sixteenth control example; FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU of the hall computer in the sixteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing signal reception processing executed by the MPU of the hall computer in the sixteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing power recovery comparison processing executed by the MPU of the hall computer in the sixteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a front view schematically showing the game board of the pachinko machine in the seventeenth control example; (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode during the time saving state B set when the ceiling lottery number of times is reached in the 17th control example, and (b) is a time saving state in the 17th control example It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation aspect at the time of transferring to time saving state A from B. FIG. It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation mode at the time of being elected to a jackpot during time saving state B in the 17th control example. It is the figure which showed the transition method between each game state in the 17th control example. FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the seventeenth control example; It is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the seventeenth control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a jackpot type selection 17 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 17th control example, (b) is for special figure 1 jackpot 17 in the 17th control example It is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the table, (c) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the 17 table for the special figure 2 jackpot in the 17th control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the second winning random number 17 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the seventeenth control example, (b) is the main control in the seventeenth control example It is the block diagram which showed the structure of the variation pattern 17 table set to ROM of the apparatus, (c) is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the table for the 1st time reduction in the 17th control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the small winning random number 17 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 17th control example, (b) is the main control device in the 17th control example (c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection 17 table set in the ROM, and (c) is the time saving random number 17 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 17th control example It is the figure which showed the contents of regulation typically. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the time saving per type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 17th control example, (b) is the main controller in the 17th control example FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a variation pattern scenario table set in the ROM of the . FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the seventeenth control example; It is a flowchart which shows the special design variation process 17 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 17th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation start process 17 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 17th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design determination process 17 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 17th control example. 29 is a flowchart showing a small winning lottery process 17 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventeenth control example; It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation pattern selection process 17 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 17th control example. 29 is a flowchart showing ceiling determination processing 17 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the seventeenth control example; It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation stop process 17 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 17th control example. It is a flowchart which shows special figure 1 deviation stop processing performed by MPU in the main controller in the 17th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design variation start process 17 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 17th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design determination process 17 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 17th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 time reduction lottery process 17 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 17th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design variation pattern selection process 17 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 17th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design variation stop process 17 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 17th control example. It is a flow chart which shows time saving setting processing 17 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 17th example of control. It is a flowchart which shows special figure 2 deviating stop processing performed by MPU in the main controller in the 17th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the time reduction state production|presentation setting process 17 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in the 17th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 production|presentation mode setting process 17 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 17th control example. FIG. 20 is a front view schematically showing a game board of the pachinko machine in the eighteenth control example; FIG. 20 is a partially enlarged view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the eighteenth control example; FIG. 22 is a front perspective view of the V winning device in the eighteenth control example; FIG. 32 is an exploded front perspective view of the V winning device in the eighteenth control example; FIG. 20 is an operation diagram of the V winning device in the 18th control example as seen from the rear side; (a) is a schematic plan view showing a state in which the open/close door is closing the V prize opening of the V prize device in the eighteenth control example, and (b) is a V prize opening of the V prize device in the eighteenth control example. is a schematic plan view of a state in which is open. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a V-icon acquisition effect screen executed during the ending period of the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device in the eighteenth control example, and (b) is an eighteenth control. After the end of the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device in the example, it is a diagram showing an example of the battle effect screen when the V reservation is digested in the fourth variation of the special figure. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect screen when the V icon is activated during the battle effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the eighteenth control example, and (b) is an eighteenth control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation screen of a battle production|presentation when V suspension exists in the suspension displayed on the 3rd design display device in an example. FIG. 22 is a diagram schematically showing configurations of various counters in the eighteenth control example; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the eighteenth control example; (b) is the configuration of the RAM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the eighteenth control example; is a block diagram showing (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the first per random number 18 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the eighteenth control example, (b) is a special symbol 1 random number 18 table in the eighteenth control example It is the figure which showed typically the specification content of the table, (c) is the figure which showed typically the specification content of the special symbol 2 random number 18 table in the 18th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a jackpot type selection 18 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the eighteenth control example, (b) is a special figure 1 jackpot type selection in the eighteenth control example It is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated content of the 18 table, (c) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated content of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 18 table in the 18th control example, (d) It is the figure which showed typically the prescription|regulation content of the time reduction provision 18 table set to ROM of the main controller in the 18th control example. It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the small hit classification selection 18 table set to ROM of the main controller in the 18th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection 18 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the eighteenth control example, (b) is a normal variation pattern 18 table in the eighteenth control example It is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the provisions of. FIG. 21 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the working hours variation pattern 18 table in the eighteenth control example; (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the random number 18 table per time saving set in the ROM of the main control device in the eighteenth control example, (b) is the main control device in the eighteenth control example It is the figure which showed typically the prescription|regulation content of the time reduction classification|category selection 18 table set to 1 ROM. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the eighteenth control example; (b) is the RAM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the eighteenth control example; 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of FIG. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the effect mode selection 18 table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the eighteenth control example, (b) is for time saving in the eighteenth control example FIG. 20 is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the effect mode setting A table, and (c) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the time saving effect mode setting B table in the 18th control example. FIG. 32 is a diagram schematically showing defined contents of a V-icon acquisition effect setting table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the eighteenth control example; FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a game flow in the 18th control example; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing update processing 18 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the eighteenth control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the short-time update process 18 for small hits performed by MPU in the main controller in the 18th control example. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process 18 executed by an MPU in a main control device in an eighteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a prefetching process 18 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the eighteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 18 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eighteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a jackpot-related process 18 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eighteenth control example; FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing V-icon acquisition effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eighteenth control example; FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing ending processing executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the eighteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process 18 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eighteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing effect mode selection processing 18 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eighteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a time-saving performance mode setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eighteenth control example; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a V-icon acquisition effect screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the first modified example of the eighteenth control example; (b) is a first It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation screen when V icon is exercised during the special figure fluctuation|variation of small hit A winning displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a modification. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the effect screen when the V icon is activated during the special figure fluctuation of the small winning B winning displayed on the third symbol display device in the first modification of the eighteenth control example. and (b) cancels the activation of the V icon when a new V hold is acquired during the special figure fluctuation of the small winning B winning displayed on the third symbol display device in the first modification of the eighteenth control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation screen. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the first modification of the eighteenth control example; (b) is a block diagram of the first modification of the eighteenth control example; It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM in the sound ramp control apparatus of a pachinko machine. FIG. 32 is a diagram schematically showing defined contents of a V-icon display mode setting table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the first modified example of the eighteenth control example; FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a V-icon acquisition effect setting process a executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first modification of the eighteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing an ending process a executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the first modified example of the eighteenth control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation mode setting process a for time reduction performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 1st modification of the 18th control example. FIG. 32 is a front view of the pachinko machine in a state in which the upper accessory is arranged at the overhanging position in a modified example of the sixteenth control example; (a) is an example of an effect mode in a case where a data display device-linked jackpot notification effect is executed in a modified example of the sixteenth control example, and a jackpot is started in a state where the upper accessory is arranged in the overhanging position. (b) is an example of an effect mode in the case where a data display device-linked jackpot notification effect is executed in a modification of the sixteenth control example, and the timing of actually notifying the jackpot has come. It is a figure showing. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect screen during the second probability variation state displayed on the third symbol display device in the first modification of the fifteenth control example, and (b) is a fifteenth control example It is a diagram showing an example of an effect screen at the end of the second probability state displayed on the third symbol display device in . FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing state transition change discarding processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first modification of the fifteenth control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd probability variation state production|presentation setting process 15a performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in the 1st modification of the 15th control example. (a) and (b) show an example of a variable display mode executed by the third symbol display device when the lottery result corresponding to the time-saving symbol winning is obtained in the normal time special symbol lottery in the 19th control example. It is a diagram. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an additional effect executed in the third symbol display device during the chance time in the nineteenth control example; It is the figure which showed an example of the completion|finish waiting production performed in less than ten times. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of a chance time end effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the nineteenth control example; In the 19th control example, it is a diagram showing the transition of the performance mode when the time saving pattern of the time saving number of 50 times is won in the special pattern lottery executed 25 times before reaching the ceiling lottery number. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a variable display mode for showing the lottery result of the special symbol executed for the first time after reaching the ceiling lottery count in the 19th control example. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of an effect for ceiling fanning displayed on the third pattern display device in the nineteenth control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation for ceiling fanning performed after the time saving state based on the ceiling lottery frequency|count completion|finish at least 1 time in the 19th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the nineteenth control example, and (b) is the configuration of the RAM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the nineteenth control example. is a block diagram showing It is the figure which showed typically the specification content of the 1st hit random number 19 table set to ROM of the main-control apparatus in the 19th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection 19 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the nineteenth control example, and (b) is the definition of the table for ceiling fanning in the nineteenth control example FIG. 12C is a diagram schematically showing the contents, and FIG. 17C is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the ceiling reaching table in the nineteenth control example; (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the time saving type selection 19 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 19th control example, (b) is the main control in the 19th control example FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a variation pattern scenario 19 table set in the ROM of the device; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the nineteenth control example, (b) is the RAM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the nineteenth control example; 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing ceiling determination processing 19 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the nineteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the nineteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing set value control processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the nineteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing effect mode setting processing 19 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the nineteenth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing normal mode effect setting processing 19 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the nineteenth control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing a variation pattern setting process executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the nineteenth control example; 29 is a flowchart showing ceiling-related effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the nineteenth control example; (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a variable display mode when the special figure lottery result executed for the first time after power-on with RAM clear operation in the twentieth control example is a small hit. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the twentieth control example; It is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the twentieth control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern scenario 20 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the twentieth control example, and (b) defines the table for after winning in the twentieth control example It is the figure which showed the content typically. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the post-small hit table in the 20th control example, and (b) schematically shows the defined contents of the ceiling reaching table in the 20th control example. It is a diagram. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the twentieth control example; It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation pattern selection process 20 performed by MPU in the main control device in the 20th control example. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing ceiling determination processing 20 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the twentieth control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 deviation stop process 20 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 20th control example. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the twentieth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a jackpot ending process 20 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the twentieth control example; FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing normal state effect setting processing 20 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twentieth control example; It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 production|presentation mode setting process 20 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in the 20th control example. (a) is executed in the third symbol display device from the end of the chance time in the 21st control example to the end of all the reserved balls of the second special symbol held at the end of the chance time. It is a diagram showing an example of the production mode, (b) is a production mode executed by the third symbol display device within 20 special figure lottery times after the chance time is over in the 21st control example. It is the figure which showed an example. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when the ceiling lottery number of times is reached during the special mode in the twenty-first control example; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the transition of an effect mode after the chance time ends in the 21st control example; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the twenty-first control example; (b) is the configuration of the RAM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the twenty-first control example; is a block diagram showing (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection 21 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 21st control example, (b) is a time saving end notification table in the 21st control example It is the figure which showed typically the specification content, (c) is the figure which showed typically the specification content of the table for after the end of time saving in the 21st control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern scenario 21 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 21st control example, (b) is a definition of the table for after winning in the 21st control example FIG. 12C is a diagram schematically showing the content, and FIG. 14C is a diagram schematically showing the defined content of the post-ceiling table in the twenty-first control example; It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the table for after the end of time saving in the 21st control example. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the twenty-first control example; It is a flowchart which shows the special design variation pattern selection process 21 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 21st example of control. 29 is a flow chart showing update processing 21 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the twenty-first control example; FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing ceiling determination processing 21 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the twenty-first control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing a start-up process executed by an MPU in the main controller in the 21st control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing effect mode setting processing 21 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-first control example; 29 is a flowchart showing ceiling-related effect setting processing 21 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-first control example; FIG. 20 is a front view of the pachinko machine in the twenty-second control example; FIG. 20 is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 22nd control example; FIG. 20 is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the 22nd control example; (a) is a front view of the performance buttons of the pachinko machine in the 22nd control example, and (b) is a front view of the selection buttons of the pachinko machine 10 in the 22nd control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a case where the decorative movable accessory of the pachinko machine is in a retracted state in the 22nd control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the decorative movable accessory of the pachinko machine in the 22nd control example. is a schematic diagram showing a case where is in a movable state. FIG. 20 is an exploded front perspective view of the V winning device in the 22nd control example; FIG. 20 is an operation diagram of the V winning device in the 22nd control example as seen from the rear side; (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during a special figure variation in a state in which the character displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-second control example is stored; It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen 1 in the case of moving the accessory displayed on the 3rd design display apparatus in a control example, and changing a reserved color. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen 2 when the character displayed on the third symbol display device in the 22nd control example is movable and the reserved color is variable; It is a diagram showing an example of the display screen 3 when the character displayed on the third symbol display device in the 22 control example is movable and the reserved color is changed. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the character is stored after the reserved color displayed on the third symbol display device is changed in the twenty-second control example; It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen 1 in case the accessory displayed on the 3rd design display device in a control example moves, and a part of reservation color shifts to the next reservation. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen 2 when the character displayed on the third symbol display device in the 22nd control example is movable, and a part of the reserved color shifts to the next reserved, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the character is stored after changing the reserved color displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-second control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when the character object displayed on the third symbol display device moves and the reserved symbol changes independently in the twenty-second control example; It is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the accessory is stored after the reserved color displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-second control example is changed alone. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the relationship between the color of the reserved symbol and the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot in the 22nd control example, and (b) is a variable pattern of the color of the reserved symbol in the 22nd control example. It is a figure shown typically. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a demonstration screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-second control example, and (b) is the amount of light displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-second control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the adjustment screen (with a character). (a) is a diagram showing an example of an adjustment end screen when the decision button displayed on the third pattern display device in the twenty-second control example is operated, and (b) is a diagram showing the third adjustment end screen in the twenty-second control example. It is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the special figure fluctuation is started during the light amount adjustment displayed on the symbol display device. It is the figure which showed an example of the light quantity adjustment screen during the character object prohibition displayed on the 3rd design display apparatus in the 22nd example of control. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-second control example at the start of shutter closing reach, and (b) is a third symbol display in the twenty-second control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen at the time of shutter closing reach continuation displayed on an apparatus. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the fifth stage of the shutter closing reach displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-second control example, and (b) is the third symbol in the twenty-second control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen of the 6th stage of shutter closing reach displayed on a display apparatus. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when a capsule is acquired in the third stage of the shutter closing reach displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-second control example; It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen when the capsule acquired at the 5th step of the shutter closing reach displayed on the 3rd design display apparatus in a control example is opened. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when a branching effect is executed during a ready-to-win effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-second control example, and (b) is a twenty-second control. It is a diagram showing an example of the display screen at the end of the special movie when the button operation is executed during the branch effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the example. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen at the end of a special movie when no button operation is performed during the branch effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the 22nd control example; FIG. 11 is a timing chart schematically showing the relationship between the effect time of the special movie and the fluctuation time of the special figure in the 22nd control example, (a) is the case where no button operation is performed during the branch effect in the 22nd control example; and (b) is a timing chart when a button is operated during the branch effect in the 22nd control example. FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the 22nd control example; FIG. 22 is a diagram schematically showing configurations of various counters in the twenty-second control example; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the 22nd control example, and (b) is the block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main controller in the 22nd control example. FIG. 22 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the first winning random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the twenty-second control example; (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the first hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 22nd control example, (b) is the second in the 22nd control example It is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the hit random number table. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 22nd control example, (b) defines the big hit variation pattern table in the 22nd control example FIG. 13 is a diagram schematically showing the contents, (c) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table in the 22nd control example, and (d) is the 22nd control It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the fluctuation|variation pattern table for deviations in an example (probability variation. Shortening of working hours). (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the 22nd control example; (b) is the RAM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the 22nd control example; 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of FIG. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of a holding change effect lottery table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the twenty-second control example, and (b) is the twenty-second control example. is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the reserved color selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in . FIG. 24 is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the hold change scenario selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the twenty-second control example; It is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the shutter closing reach selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the 22nd control example. FIG. 24 is a diagram schematically showing defined contents of an operation scenario table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the 22nd control example; FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the twenty-second control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special design variation process 22 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 22nd example of control. 19 is a flow chart showing a special symbol jackpot determination process 22 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 22nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special design variation pattern selection process 22 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 22nd control example. 29 is a flow chart showing update processing 22 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the twenty-second control example; FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process 22 executed by an MPU in the main controller in the twenty-second control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing prefetching processing 22 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the twenty-second control example; FIG. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing 22 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 22nd control example. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing 22 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the twenty-second control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing 22 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the twenty-second control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing start-up processing 22 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the twenty-second control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the 22nd control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing a jackpot control process 22 executed by an MPU in the main controller in the twenty-second control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing a jackpot operation setting process 22 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 22nd control example; FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a jackpot ending process 22 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the twenty-second control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing notification processing 22 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the twenty-second control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing a winning process 22 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the 22nd control example; FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing processing 22 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the twenty-second control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing start-up processing 22 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the twenty-second control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-second control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 22 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-second control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing state command reception processing 22 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-second control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing winning command processing 22 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-second control example; It is a flowchart which shows the prize-winning information command process 22 for special figures performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 22nd control example. 29 is a flow chart showing a holding effect setting process 22 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-second control example; 29 is a flow chart showing a composite hold change effect setting process 22 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-second control example; FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing stop command processing 22 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-second control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing a jackpot-related process 22 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-second control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing ending processing 22 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the twenty-second control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process 22 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 22nd control example; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a variable effect setting process 22 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-second control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing normal state effect mode determination processing 22 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-second control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a change-start holding effect execution process 22 executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the twenty-second control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing 22 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-second control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing decision button operation processing 22 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-second control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing effect button operation processing 22 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 22nd control example; 29 is a flow chart showing effect update processing 22 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-second control example; (a) is an example of the display screen when the change operation to the chance-up mode is performed during the second half period of the variation effect in the state where the normal mode is set displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-third control example. (b) is a display when the mode is changed to the chance-up mode during the first half period of the variable effect in the state where the normal mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the 22nd control example is set. It is the figure which showed an example of a screen. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the mode is selected during the deviation variation displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-third control example, (b) is a diagram showing the twenty-second control It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen at the time of selecting the mode during the big-hit fluctuation|variation displayed on the 3rd design display device in an example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the production mode selection area during the loss variation in the 23rd control example, (b) is the configuration of the production mode selection area during the jackpot variation in the 22nd control example. It is a diagram schematically showing the. It is a diagram showing an example of an effect when the decision button for switching to the chance up mode is operated during the second half period of the variation effect in the big hit variation displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-third control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the character is moved during the special figure variation displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-third control example, and (b) is the twenty-third control It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen 1 when the accessory displayed on the 3rd pattern display apparatus in an example is completely closed. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of the display screen 2 when the accessory displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-third control example is completely closed; It is the timing chart which showed the flow which sets the fluctuation production|presentation during a special figure fluctuation|variation when the production|presentation custom selection operation is not performed during a special figure fluctuation|variation in the 23rd control example. Shows the relationship between the flow of setting the variable production during the special figure fluctuation and the production custom selection operation when the production custom selection operation is performed during the special figure fluctuation in the 23rd control example and the production mode is changed during the special figure fluctuation. It is a timing chart. It is a timing chart showing the relationship between the flow of setting the variable production during the special figure fluctuation and the production custom selection operation when performing the production custom selection operation during the special figure fluctuation in the 23rd control example and switching from the next fluctuation. FIG. 24 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM in the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the twenty-third control example; FIG. 22 is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the performance custom information table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the twenty-third control example; FIG. 23 is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the second half advance notice effect selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the twenty-third control example; FIG. 23 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the twenty-third control example; FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing a change-start holding effect execution process 23 executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the twenty-third control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an in-execution hold change effect setting process 23 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-third control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing 23 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-third control example; 29 is a flow chart showing effect custom selection processing 23 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-third control example; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing decision button operation processing 23 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-third control example; FIG. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing effect custom execution processing 23 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-third control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing effect update processing 23 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-third control example; FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing variation effect update processing 23 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the twenty-third control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the twenty-fourth control example; (a) to (d) are schematic diagrams schematically showing procedures for changing settings in the twenty-fourth control example, and (e) to (g) are settings confirmation in the twenty-fourth control example. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the procedure for (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect when a character corresponding to the previous stop symbol has a conversation at the start of the special figure fluctuation executed in the twenty-fourth control example, and (b) is a twenty-fourth control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the setting suggestion production|presentation when the next fluctuation|variation is started after the design stops by the special combination (7 reach loss) performed in an example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when the characters corresponding to the stop symbols are talking during the demonstration effect executed in the twenty-fourth control example, and (b) is a diagram executed in the twenty-fourth control example. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when characters talk while the voice is fixed in the demonstration effect to be performed. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a pending color change precursor display screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-fourth control example, and (b) is a diagram displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-fourth control example. (c) is a diagram showing an example of a pending color change sign display screen (at the time of special figure stop), and (c) is a chance effect display screen 1 at the time of holding shift displayed on the third symbol display device in the 24th control example FIG. 12D is a diagram showing an example of (jump), and FIG. 12D is a diagram showing an example of a hold shift chance effect display screen 2 (high speed) displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-fourth control example. . FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the twenty-fourth control example; FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the audio output device of the pachinko machine in the twenty-fourth control example; It is the figure which showed typically the specification content of the special symbol jackpot random number table set to ROM of the main controller of the pachinko machine in the 24th control example. FIG. 24 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the twenty-fourth control example; FIG. 24 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM in the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the twenty-fourth control example; FIG. 24 is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the voice command selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the twenty-fourth control example; FIG. 24 is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the pending action selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the twenty-fourth control example; FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM within the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the twenty-fourth control example; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the sound output device of the pachinko machine in the twenty-fourth control example; (b) is the configuration of the RAM in the sound output device of the pachinko machine in the twenty-fourth control example; is a block diagram showing FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing start-up processing 24 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the twenty-fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing set value control processing executed by an MPU in the main controller in the twenty-fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing start-up processing 24 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the twenty-fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing standby processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-fourth control example; FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 24 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the twenty-fourth control example; FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing state command reception processing 24 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the twenty-fourth control example; FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing stop symbol type setting processing 24 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the twenty-fourth control example; 29 is a flow chart showing stop command processing 24 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the twenty-fourth control example; FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a change-start suspension effect execution process 24 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the twenty-fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing pending action determination processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the twenty-fourth control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the twenty-fourth control example; 29 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the twenty-fourth control example; 29 is a flow chart showing audio setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the twenty-fourth control example; (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen at the start of the symbol stock reach displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-fifth control example, and (b) is a third symbol display in the twenty-fifth control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen at the time of the completion of design stock displayed on a device. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when stocked symbols displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-fifth control example temporarily disappear from the screen; It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen when the ready-to-win pattern is switched with the stocked pattern displayed on the third pattern display device. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the liquid crystal display of the third symbol display device in the twenty-fifth control example, and (b) is a preliminary layer of the third symbol display device in the twenty-fifth control example. FIG. 12C is a diagram showing an example of a display screen to be displayed, FIG. 11C is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed on the main screen of the third symbol display device in the twenty-fifth control example, and FIG. ) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed on the sub-layer of the third symbol display device in the twenty-fifth control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when the main image layer of the third pattern display device in the twenty-fifth control example is normal display and the transmittance of the auxiliary image layer is 100%; b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the main layer of the third pattern display device is displayed at scale A and the transmittance of the auxiliary layer is 0% in the twenty-fifth control example. FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM in the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the twenty-fifth control example; It is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the symbol stock reach selection table set in the ROM of the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the twenty-fifth control example. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration within the display control device of the pachinko machine in the twenty-fifth control example; FIG. 22 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list in the twenty-fifth control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing normal state effect mode determination processing 25 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-fifth control example; 29 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 25 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the twenty-fifth control example; 29 is a flow chart showing processing command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the twenty-fifth control example; 29 is a flow chart showing drawing processing 25 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the twenty-fifth control example; (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen at the start of the symbol stock reach displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-fifth control example, and (b) is a third symbol display in the twenty-fifth control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen at the time of the completion of design stock displayed on a device. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when stocked symbols displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-fifth control example are moved, and (b) is a diagram showing the third It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen when a new reach line is formed from the stocked pattern displayed on the pattern display device. (a) is a diagram showing a game machine in a movable state of a large sword role in a modification of the twenty-second control example, and (b) is a light amount adjustment displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-second control example. It is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when special figure fluctuation is started inside. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed on a third display device in a modification of the twenty-second control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during the development of the modification of the shutter closing reach, and (b) is the twenty-second control. It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen at the time of the modification development of the shutter closing reach displayed on the 3rd pattern display apparatus in the modification of an example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen at the time of branch effect of the shutter closing reach displayed on the third display device in a modification of the twenty-second control example; (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the twenty-second control example It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen when the shutter displayed on the 3rd pattern display apparatus in a modification is fully opened. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a battle effect start screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-sixth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the battle effect start screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-sixth control example. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a preemptive attack screen of a battle presentation. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a battle effect button press instruction screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-sixth example of control; It is the figure which showed an example of the screen during the battle production button repeated hitting displayed. It is the figure which showed an example of the battle production|presentation button long-pressing screen displayed on the 3rd design display apparatus in the 26th control example. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the flow of gauge reduction during button repeated operation displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-sixth control example. (a) to (d) are diagrams showing an example of the flow of gauge decrease when the button is long pressed displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-sixth control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-sixth control example at the start of the subjugation effect, and (b) is a third symbol display device in the twenty-sixth control example. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a first start screen displayed in . (a) is a diagram showing an example of the first attack screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-sixth control example, and (b) is a diagram displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-sixth control example. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a second start screen displayed; (a) is a diagram showing an example of a second attack screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-sixth example of control, and (b) is a view displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-sixth example of control. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a third start screen displayed; It is the figure which showed an example of the attack screen of the 3rd time displayed on the 3rd design display device in the 26th control example. It is a diagram showing an example of a chance-up effect screen during normal fluctuation displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-sixth control example. It is the figure which showed the special design fluctuation|variation frequency|count and the content of the chance up production|presentation performed in the 26th control example. FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM in the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the twenty-sixth control example; FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the twenty-sixth control example; FIG. 32 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a long-press effect scenario table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the twenty-sixth control example; (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the final HP selection table when out of line set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the twenty-sixth control example; (b) is the twenty-sixth control; It is the figure which showed typically the specification content of the entry lottery table set to ROM of the sound lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in an example. FIG. 32 is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of a release lottery table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the twenty-sixth control example; FIG. 24 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of an additional decrease value selection table set in the ROM of the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the twenty-sixth control example; (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a chance notice lottery table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the twenty-sixth control example; It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the chance mode selection table set to ROM of the sound ramp control apparatus of a pachinko machine. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a variable effect setting process 26 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing time-saving state effect mode determination processing 26 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-sixth control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing a variable probability state effect mode determination process 26 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-sixth control example; FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing normal state effect mode determination processing 26 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-sixth control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing subjugation ready-to-win effect determination processing 26 executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the twenty-sixth control example. 29 is a flow chart showing a chance-up effect determination process 26 executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the twenty-sixth control example; 29 is a flow chart showing effect button operation processing 26 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-sixth control example; 29 is a flow chart showing a long-press effect setting process 26 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-sixth control example; 29 is a flow chart showing effect update processing 26 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-sixth control example; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing long press process 26 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twenty-sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a front view schematically showing the game board of the pachinko machine in the twenty-seventh control example; (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a jackpot opening effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-seventh control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot opening effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the twenty-seventh control example, and (b) is a third symbol during the time-saving state in the twenty-seventh control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode displayed on a display apparatus. (a) and (b) are the figures which showed an example of the display mode of the 3rd design display apparatus when the remaining time addition production|presentation is performed during the time saving state in the 27th control example. (a) and (b) are the figures which showed an example of the display mode of the 3rd design display apparatus when the continuation rate increase production|presentation is being performed during the time saving state in the 27th control example. (a) and (b) are the figures which showed an example of the display mode of the 3rd design display apparatus when the final judge production|presentation is performed after completion|finish of the time saving state in the 27th control example. It is a diagram showing a change over time of the effect mode after winning the jackpot in the twenty-seventh control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the twenty-seventh control example; (b) is the configuration of the RAM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the twenty-seventh control example; is a block diagram showing (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the first winning random number 27 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 27th control example, (b) is the main control in the 27th control example It is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the second per random number 27 table set in the ROM of the device, (c) is a small per random number 27 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 27th control example is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of , and (d) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the direct hit table in the twenty-seventh control example. FIG. 32 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the V winning table in the twenty-seventh control example; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern 27 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 27th control example, (b) is the defined content of the S rank table in the 27th control example It is a diagram schematically showing the. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the A rank table in the 27th control example, (b) schematically shows the defined contents of the table for 1 fluctuation after the end of the time reduction in the 27th control example It is a schematic diagram. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the normal state fluctuation pattern scenario table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 27th control example, and (b) shows rush performance for each rank. It is a figure shown typically. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the twenty-seventh control example; (b) is the RAM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the twenty-seventh control example; 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of FIG. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the rank-up effect table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the twenty-seventh control example, and (b) is a diagram in the twenty-seventh control example. It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the rank-up discrimination table set to ROM of the sound ramp control apparatus of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation start process 27 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 27th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design determination process 27 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 27th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation pattern selection process 27 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 27th control example. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 1 game state update process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the twenty-seventh control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation stop process 27 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 27th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design variation start process 27 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 27th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design determination process 27 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 27th control example. 29 is a flow chart showing a small winning lottery process 27 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the twenty-seventh control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design variation pattern selection process 27 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 27th control example. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 2 game state update process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the twenty-seventh control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design variation stop process 27 performed by MPU in the main control device in the 27th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 deviating stop process 27 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 27th control example. 29 is a flowchart showing a jackpot control process 27 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the twenty-seventh control example; 29 is a flow chart showing effect update processing 27 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-seventh control example; 29 is a flow chart showing processing during final judge presentation executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the twenty-seventh control example; 29 is a flow chart showing a time-saving production setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-seventh control example; FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a jackpot-related process 27 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-seventh control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 production|presentation mode setting process 27 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in the 27th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 production|presentation mode setting process 27 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 27th control example. FIG. 20 is a front view schematically showing the game board of the pachinko machine in the twenty-eighth control example; (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device during the variable probability state in the 28th control example, (b) is during the variable probability state in the 28th control example It is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device when the special figure 1 jackpot variation is started. (a) is, in the 28th control example, the special figure 1 jackpot variation is started during the variable probability state, and the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device when the variation time of the special figure 1 jackpot variation has passed Is a diagram showing an example, (b), in the 28th control example, the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation is started during the probability variation state, before the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation passes It is a diagram showing an example of the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device when the variation time of the special figure 2 small per variation has elapsed. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the twenty-eighth control example; (b) is the configuration of the RAM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the twenty-eighth control example; is a block diagram showing (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the first winning random number 28 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 28th control example, (b) is the main control in the 28th control example It is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the jackpot type selection 28 table set in the ROM of the device, and (c) is the small hit random number 28 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 28th control example. It is the figure which showed the contents of regulation typically. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern 28 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 28th control example, (b) defines the probability variable / time saving table in the 28th control example It is the figure which showed the content typically. FIG. 24 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the twenty-eighth control example; It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation start process 28 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 28th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design determination process 28 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 28th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation pattern selection process 28 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 28th control example. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing update processing at the start of fluctuation executed by the MPU in the main controller in the twenty-eighth control example; FIG. (a) and (b) are the figures which showed the subtraction timing of the number of times of time reduction in the 28th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation stop process 28 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 28th control example. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing update processing at the time of fluctuation stop executed by the MPU in the main controller in the twenty-eighth control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design variation start process 28 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 28th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design determination process 28 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 28th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design variation stop process 28 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 28th control example. 29 is a flow chart showing a jackpot control process 28 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the twenty-eighth control example; 29 is a flow chart showing effect update processing 28 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-eighth control example; It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 production|presentation mode setting process 28 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in the 28th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 production|presentation mode setting process 28 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in the 28th control example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the 29th control example in the probability variation state and when the probability variation ratio super UP zone is set, b) is executed in the 29th control example when the special figure 2 small hit variation or the special figure 2 loss variation is performed in the probability variation ratio super UP zone, and the third symbol display when the pinch effect is performed It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of an apparatus. In the 29th control example, a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device at the end of the pinch production executed based on the execution of the special figure 2 small per variation during the probability variation ratio super UP zone is. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the twenty-ninth control example; (b) is the configuration of the RAM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the twenty-ninth control example; is a block diagram showing It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the jackpot classification selection 29 table set to ROM of the main-control apparatus in the 29th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern 29 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 29th control example, and (b) shows the defined contents of the zone table in the 29th control example. It is a figure shown typically, and (c) is a figure showing typically the content of specification of the table for probability variation / time reduction in the 29th control example. FIG. 22 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a variation pattern scenario table set in the ROM of the main controller in the twenty-ninth control example; FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the twenty-ninth control example; It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation pattern selection process 29 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 29th control example. 29 is a flow chart showing a jackpot control process 29 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the twenty-ninth control example; 29 is a flow chart showing effect update processing 29 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the twenty-ninth control example; It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 production|presentation mode setting process 29 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 29th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 production|presentation mode setting process 29 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 29th control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device during the variable probability state in the thirtieth control example, (b) is during the time saving state in the thirtieth control example It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode displayed on a 3rd pattern display apparatus. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the thirtieth control example; (b) is the configuration of the RAM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the thirtieth control example; is a block diagram showing It is the figure which showed typically the specification content of the jackpot classification selection 30 table set to ROM of the main-control apparatus in the 30th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern 30 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 30th control example, (b) is the prescribed contents of the time saving table in the 30th control example FIG. 20 is a diagram schematically showing, and (c) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the probability variation table in the thirtieth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation pattern selection process 30 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 30th control example. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a change start time update process 30 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the thirtieth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing update processing 30 at fluctuation stop executed by the MPU in the main controller in the thirtieth control example; FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a jackpot control process 30 executed by an MPU in the main controller in the thirtieth control example; FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing state command reception processing 30 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the thirtieth control example; FIG. (a) shows an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device in the time saving state set based on the occurrence of the time saving symbol winning during the normal state in the first modification of the twenty-seventh control example. (b) is a first modified example of the twenty-seventh control example, the third symbol display device in the time saving state reset based on the occurrence of time saving symbol winning during the time saving state It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device when time saving symbol winning occurs during the time saving state in the second modification of the twenty-seventh control example. . (a) and (b) are, in the second modification of the 27th control example, the rank notification effect is executed during the time saving state reset based on the occurrence of the time saving symbol winning during the time saving state It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the 3rd design display apparatus at the time of being made. FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the second modified example of the twenty-seventh control example; It is a flowchart which shows 27 A of special figure 2 production mode setting processes performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 2nd modification of the 27th control example. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing a secrecy effect setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second modified example of the twenty-seventh control example; FIG. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing non-concealing effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second modified example of the twenty-seventh control example; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a battle effect start screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the first modification of the twenty-sixth control example, and (b) is the first display of the twenty-sixth control example It is the figure which showed an example of the preemptive attack screen of the battle production|presentation displayed on the 3rd design display device in the production|presentation modification. (a) to (d) are diagrams showing display examples of the long button in the first modification of the twenty-sixth control example. It is a flow chart which shows time saving state production mode decision processing 26a performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in the 1st production modification of the 26th example of control. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an additional effect start screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the second effect modification of the twenty-sixth control example; (b) is a second effect start screen of the twenty-sixth control example; It is the figure which showed an example of the screen which shows the production|presentation result of the additional production|presentation displayed on the 3rd design display apparatus in the production|presentation modification. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a pseudo MAX jackpot effect start screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the second modification of the twenty-sixth control example, and (b) is a view of the twenty-sixth control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the screen during the production|presentation of pseudo-MAX jackpot production|presentation displayed on the 3rd design display apparatus in the 2nd production|presentation modification. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a pseudo hold continuous effect start screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the second modification of the twenty-sixth control example, and (b) is a diagram of the twenty-sixth control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the screen during the production|presentation of the pseudo|simulated holding consecutive production|presentation displayed on the 3rd design display device in the 2nd production|presentation modification. FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the second modification of the twenty-sixth control example; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a variable effect setting process 26a executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the second effect modification of the twenty-sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a jackpot-related process 26a executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the second modification of the twenty-sixth control example; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect screen in the probability changing state displayed on the third symbol display device in the 31st control example, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the effect screen in the third symbol display device in the 32nd control example It is the figure which showed an example of the jackpot production screen in the probability variation state displayed. It is a block diagram showing the configuration of a definite variable variation pattern 31 table that the ROM in the main controller of the pachinko machine in the 31st control example has. FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the 31st control example; 29 is a flow chart showing a variable probability state effect mode determination process 31 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 31st control example; FIG. 20 is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 32nd control example; FIG. 22 is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 32nd control example; FIG. 20 is a partially enlarged view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 32nd control example; FIG. 22 is a front perspective view of the V winning device of the thirty-second control example; FIG. 32 is an exploded front perspective view of the V winning device in the 32nd control example; FIG. 20 is an operation diagram of the V winning device of the 32nd control example as seen from the rear side; (a) is a schematic plan view showing a state in which the opening/closing door of the V winning device is closed in the V winning opening of the V winning device in the thirty-second control example, and (b) is a V winning device of the V winning device in the thirty-second control example. It is a schematic plan view of a state in which the winning opening is open. (a) is a front view of the effect button of the pachinko machine in the 32nd control example, and (b) is a front view of the selection button of the pachinko machine in the 32nd control example. FIG. 32 is a rear view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 32nd control example; (a) is a diagram schematically showing display screen area division setting and valid line setting in the thirty-second control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen in the thirty-second control example. be. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot effect screen after winning a normal state jackpot displayed on the third symbol display device in the thirty-second control example, and (b) is the third symbol in the thirty-second control example. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an enemy subjugation effect screen displayed on the display device; (a) is a diagram showing an example of an interval screen after the end of the second round displayed on the third symbol display device in the thirty-second control example, and (b) is the third symbol in the thirty-second control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the subjugation success screen during 6 rounds (final round) displayed on a display apparatus. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the effect screen of the third round displayed on the third symbol display device in the thirty-second control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the effect screen on the third symbol display device in the thirty-second control example. FIG. 936(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when a button is pressed in the displayed FIG. 936(a). (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the button is not pressed in FIG. 936 (a) displayed on the third symbol display device in the thirty-second control example; It is the figure which showed an example of the revival success effect screen in 6 rounds (final round) displayed with the 3rd design display apparatus in a control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen in a time saving state (during a rush) displayed on the third symbol display device in the thirty-second control example, and (b) is a third symbol in the thirty-second control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the winning screen of the time saving state (during rush) displayed with a display apparatus. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a small winning game screen in a time saving state (during rush) displayed on the third symbol display device in the 32nd control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the small winning game screen in the 32nd control example. Aim for V displayed on the 3-symbol display device and show an example of the display screen when V is won during the initial effect period. After FIG. 939(b) displayed on the third symbol display device in the thirty-second control example, it is a diagram showing an example of the display screen after the initial effect period has elapsed, aiming for V. FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the final variation (off) of the time saving state (during rush) displayed on the third symbol display device in the 32nd control example; It is the figure which showed an example of the pull-back production|presentation screen after completion|finish of a time saving state displayed with the 3rd design display apparatus in a control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a pull-back effect end screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the thirty-second control example, and (b) is a diagram displayed on the third symbol display device in the thirty-second control example. and FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a rush result display screen. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the NEXT effect screen (the second round of the jackpot during the rush) displayed on the third symbol display device in the thirty-second control example; It is the figure which showed an example of the NEXT production result screen (suspension group, no round promotion) displayed with 3 design display devices. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a NEXT effect result screen (with round promotion) displayed on the third symbol display device in the thirty-second control example, and (b) is the third symbol in the thirty-second control example. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a NEXT effect result screen (with pending series) displayed on the display device; (a) is a diagram showing an example of a small winning game screen during the holding streak state displayed on the third symbol display device in the thirty-second control example, and (b) is the third symbol in the thirty-second control example. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a NEXT effect screen (with hold stanza) displayed on the display device during the continuation rapture state; FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when the number of display rounds exceeds MAX (9 rounds) in the continuous holding train displayed on the third symbol display device in the 32nd control example; (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen in a standby state displayed on the third symbol display device in the thirty-second control example; It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation mode selection screen displayed. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a stage transition effect screen during special figure fluctuation displayed on the third symbol display device in the thirty-second control example, and (b) is the third symbol in the thirty-second control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the stage fixation operation screen during special figure fluctuation|variation displayed with a display apparatus. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a game flow of the pachinko machine in the 32nd control example; FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the 32nd control example; FIG. 22 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of various counters in the 32nd control example; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the 32nd control example, and (b) is the block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main controller in the 32nd control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a first winning random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 32nd control example; It is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the set special symbol 1 random number table, (c) schematically shows the specified contents of the special symbol 2 random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 32nd control example. It is a schematic diagram. (a) is a block diagram showing the specified contents of the jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 32nd control example, (b) is in the ROM of the main controller in the 32nd control example It is the figure which showed typically the prescription|regulation content of the set time reduction provision table. It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the small hitting classification selection table set to ROM of the main control unit in the 32nd control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 32nd control example, (b) is set in the ROM of the main controller in the 32nd control example FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a normal variation pattern table that has been created. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the time-saving variation pattern table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 32nd control example, (b) is the main controller in the 32nd control example (c) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the special time-saving variation pattern table set in the ROM, and (c) is the time-saving final variation pattern table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 32nd control example. It is the figure which showed the contents of regulation typically. FIG. 24 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a variation pattern scenario table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 32nd control example; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the 32nd control example; (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the 32nd control example; be. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the subjugation number selection table set in the ROM of the voice ramp control device in the 32nd control example, (b) is the voice ramp control in the 32nd control example FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a subjugation effect mode selection table set in the ROM of the device; FIG. 24 is a diagram schematically showing defined contents of an additional decrease value selection table set in the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the thirty-second control example; (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the performance stage data table set in the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the 32nd control example, and (b) is the sound ramp control in the 32nd control example. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a game environment data table set in the ROM of the device; 29 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the 32nd control example; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 32nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special design determination process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 32nd control example. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 32nd control example. 29 is a flowchart showing a small winning start setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 32nd control example; It is a flow chart which shows time saving update processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 32nd example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit time saving update process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 32nd example of control. 29 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the 32nd control example; 29 is a flow chart showing prefetching processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the 32nd control example; It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 32nd control example. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a through gate passing process executed by an MPU in the main controller in the 32nd control example; FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing V entrance passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the 32nd control example; 29 is a flowchart showing V passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the 32nd control example; 29 is a flow chart showing NMI processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the 32nd control example; 29 is a flow chart showing a start-up process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the 32nd control example; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the main controller in the 32nd control example; FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a jackpot control process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the 32nd control example; It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control processing performed by MPU in the main controller in the 32nd control example. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the 32nd control example; FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 32nd control example; 29 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 32nd control example; FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing hold information related processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 32nd control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing state command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the thirty-second control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing a win-related process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the thirty-second control example; 29 is a flowchart showing a jackpot-related process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 32nd control example; 29 is a flow chart showing a round effect process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 32nd control example; 29 is a flowchart showing first-time jackpot-related processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the thirty-second control example; 29 is a flow chart showing subjugation effect mode determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the thirty-second control example; FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing an effect process during the first big winning round executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the 32nd control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing an effect process during the first interval executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the thirty-second control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit related process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in the 32nd control example. 29 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 32nd control example; 29 is a flow chart showing a variable effect setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 32nd control example; 29 is a flow chart showing a time saving effect setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 32nd control example; 29 is a flow chart showing effect update processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 32nd control example; It is a flow chart showing update processing during a small winning game executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the 32nd control example. 29 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 32nd control example; 29 is a flow chart showing a fixed mode setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 32nd control example; 29 is a flow chart showing effect button operation processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 32nd control example; (a) is a diagram showing an example of a small winning game screen (in the case of special 2 reservation 0) displayed on the third symbol display device in the 33rd control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the 33rd It is a diagram showing an example of a small winning game screen (at the time of special 2 reservation acquisition) displayed on the third symbol display device in the control example. It is a flow chart which shows time saving update processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 33rd example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 33rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit time saving update process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 33rd control example. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing hold information related processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the thirty-third control example; FIG. It is a flow chart showing a small hit pending acquisition process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 33rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit related process 2 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in the 33rd control example. It is a flow chart which shows guidance mode setting processing in a small hit performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in the 33rd example of control. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the third special figure pending is obtained during the special figure 1 fluctuation displayed on the third symbol display device in the thirty-fourth control example, and (b) is , It is a diagram showing an example of a display screen in which only the action of the third special figure reserved symbol displayed on the third symbol display device in the thirty-fourth control example is shifted. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the special figure 1 stop display screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the thirty-fourth control example, (b) is the third symbol display device in the thirty-fourth control example It is the figure which showed an example of the special figure primary fluctuation start screen displayed. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a pending change action display screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the thirty-fourth control example; (c) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen at the time of holding shift displayed on the third symbol display device in the thirty-fourth control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen before changing the stage at the time of synchronization of the reserved symbol action displayed on the third symbol display device in the thirty-fourth control example; It is a diagram showing an example of a post-stage change display screen during pending symbol action synchronization displayed on the 3-symbol display device. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen before stage change at the time of pending symbol action asynchronous displayed on the third symbol display device in the thirty-fourth control example; It is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during stage change during pending symbol action asynchronous displayed on the 3 symbol display device, (c) is a pending symbol action displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the 34th control example FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen after stage change during asynchronization; FIG. 24 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the thirty-fourth control example; FIG. 22 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the pending action data table set in the ROM of the main controller in the thirty-fourth control example; FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the thirty-fourth control example; 29 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 3 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the thirty-fourth control example; 29 is a flow chart showing winning command processing 3 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the thirty-fourth control example; FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing variation effect setting processing 3 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the thirty-fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a hold state determination process 3 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the thirty-fourth control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing effect update processing 3 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the thirty-fourth control example; 29 is a flowchart showing a pending effect update process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the thirty-fourth control example; FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing varying stage transition processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the thirty-fourth control example; FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing special mode determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the thirty-fourth control example; FIG. 20 is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the thirty-fifth control example; FIG. 20 is a partially enlarged view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the thirty-fifth control example; FIG. 32 is a front perspective view of the V winning device in the thirty-fifth control example; FIG. 32 is an exploded front perspective view of the V winning device in the thirty-fifth control example; FIG. 20 is an operation diagram of the V winning device in the thirty-fifth control example as seen from the rear side; (a) is a schematic plan view showing a state in which the opening/closing door of the V winning device is closed in the V winning opening of the V winning device in the thirty-fifth control example, and (b) is a V It is a schematic plan view of a state in which the winning opening is open. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the decorative movable accessory is at the storage position in the thirty-fifth control example, and (b) is a state in which the decorative movable accessory is at the lower limit in the thirty-fifth control example. It is a schematic diagram showing. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the right middle part of the decorative movable accessory falls off in the thirty-fifth control example; It is a schematic diagram which showed the left falling state. FIG. 32 is an exploded front perspective view of the decorative movable accessory in the thirty-fifth control example; FIG. 30 is an exploded rear perspective view of the decorative movable accessory in the thirty-fifth control example; FIG. 32 is an exploded front perspective view of the bar accessory in the thirty-fifth control example; FIG. 30 is an exploded rear perspective view of the bar accessory in the thirty-fifth control example; FIG. 32 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotary accessory in the thirty-fifth control example; FIG. 32 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotator accessory in the thirty-fifth control example; (a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the third symbol row in the thirty-fifth control example, and (b) to (e) schematically show the stopping pattern of the rotating character in the thirty-fifth control example. It is a diagram. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen at the time of special figure temporary stop displayed by the third symbol display device in the thirty-fifth control example, (b) is the third symbol display in the thirty-fifth control example It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen at the time of the relief chance production|presentation start displayed on a device. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a successful rescue chance effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the thirty-fifth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a successful relief chance effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the thirty-fifth control example. It is the figure which showed an example in the case of the relief chance production|presentation failure displayed. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the thirty-fifth control example; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the thirty-fifth control example; (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the thirty-fifth control example; be. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection 4 table set in the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the thirty-fifth control example; (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the audio ramp control device in the thirty-fifth control example; FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a normal fluctuation pattern selection 4 table set in a ROM; (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the time-saving variation pattern selection 4 table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the 35th control example, and (b) is a diagram in the 35th control example. It is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the special time-saving variation pattern selection 4 table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device, (c) is set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 35th control example It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the time saving final variation pattern selection 4 table. FIG. 22 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of an operation scenario selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the thirty-fifth control example; (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the operation scenario A (vertical drive of the bar character) set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the 35th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents in the 35th control example. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of an operation scenario A (rotating body accessory left/right driving, rotating driving) set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device; (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of an operation scenario B (vertical driving of a bar character) set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the 35th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents in the 35th control example. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of an operation scenario B (rotating body accessory left/right driving, rotating driving) set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device; (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of an operation scenario C (bar character vertical drive) set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the 35th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents in the 35th control example. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of an operation scenario C (rotating body accessory left/right driving, rotating driving) set in the ROM of the audio lamp control device; (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of an operation scenario D (vertical driving of a bar character) set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the 35th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents in the 35th control example. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of an operation scenario D (rotating body accessory left/right driving, rotating driving) set in the ROM of the audio lamp control device; (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of an operation scenario E (vertical drive of a bar character) set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the 35th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents in the 35th control example. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of an operation scenario E (rotating body accessory left/right driving, rotating driving) set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device; (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the operation scenario F (vertical driving of the bar character) set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the 35th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents in the 35th control example. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of an operation scenario F (rotating body accessory left/right driving, rotating driving) set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device; (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the operation scenario G (vertical drive of the bar character) set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the 35th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents in the 35th control example. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of an operation scenario G (rotating body accessory left/right driving, rotating driving) set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device; (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the operation scenario H (vertical drive of the bar character) set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the 35th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents in the 35th control example. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of an operation scenario H (rotating body accessory left/right driving, rotating driving) set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device; FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the thirty-fifth control example; FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 4 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the thirty-fifth control example; FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing symbol determination command processing 4 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the thirty-fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process 4 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the thirty-fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing effect mode setting processing 4 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the thirty-fifth control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing a main liquid crystal effect execution management process 4 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the thirty-fifth control example; 29 is a flow chart showing a relief chance presentation start process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the thirty-fifth control example; FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing special scenario executing processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the thirty-fifth control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing a relief chance effect in-execution process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the thirty-fifth control example; (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen at the start of a relief chance effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first modification of the thirty-fifth control example, and (b) is a diagram of the thirty-fifth control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen at the time of the relief chance production|presentation success displayed with the 3rd pattern display apparatus in a 1st modification. FIG. 20 is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the thirty-sixth control example; FIG. 20 is a front view of the decorative movable accessory action unit in the thirty-sixth control example; (a) is a schematic diagram of the operation unit of the logo character in the 36th control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the operation unit of the character character in the 36th control example. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram of an operation unit of the shutter accessory in the thirty-sixth control example; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a state where the logo accessory is at the lower limit in the thirty-sixth control example; FIG. 123 is a diagram showing a state where the logo accessory falls off in the middle of the right side in the thirty-sixth control example; FIG. 142 is a diagram showing a state where the logo accessory falls off to the right middle and falls to the left in the thirty-sixth control example; FIG. 142 is a diagram showing a state where the bonus in the thirty-sixth control example is at the rising limit; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a closed state of the shutter accessory in the thirty-sixth control example; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a case where all decorative movable accessories are in a movable state in the thirty-sixth control example; FIG. 32 is an exploded front perspective view of the logo accessory in the thirty-sixth control example; FIG. 32 is an exploded rear perspective view of the logo accessory in the thirty-sixth control example; FIG. 32 is an exploded front perspective view of the bar accessory in the thirty-sixth control example; FIG. 32 is an exploded rear perspective view of the bar accessory in the thirty-sixth control example; FIG. 32 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotary accessory in the thirty-sixth control example; FIG. 32 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotary accessory in the thirty-sixth control example; FIG. 32 is an exploded front perspective view of the action unit of the character in the thirty-sixth control example; FIG. 32B is an exploded rear perspective view of the action unit of the character in the thirty-sixth control example; FIG. 32 is an exploded front perspective view of the ascending accessory in the thirty-sixth control example; FIG. 32 is an exploded rear perspective view of the ascending accessory in the thirty-sixth control example; FIG. 32 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit of the shutter accessory in the thirty-sixth control example; FIG. 32 is an exploded front perspective view of the shutter accessory in the thirty-sixth control example; FIG. 32 is an exploded rear perspective view of the shutter accessory in the thirty-sixth control example; (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen after three seconds have passed since the start of the normal pattern composite effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the thirty-sixth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the thirty-sixth control. It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen after 5 seconds progress from the start of the composite production|presentation of a normal pattern displayed with a 3rd pattern display apparatus in an example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen after seven seconds have passed since the start of the normal pattern composite effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the thirty-sixth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the thirty-sixth control. It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen 3 seconds after the production|presentation start when composite production|presentation is started during the ready-to-win production|presentation displayed with the 3rd pattern display apparatus in an example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen five seconds after the start of the composite effect of the alternative pattern 1 displayed on the third symbol display device in the thirty-sixth control example; It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen after 7 seconds progress from the composite effect start of the substitute pattern 1 displayed with the 3rd pattern display apparatus in a control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen after three seconds have passed since the start of the composite effect of the alternative pattern 2 displayed on the third symbol display device in the thirty-sixth control example; It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen 5 seconds after the composite production|presentation start of the alternative pattern 2 displayed on a 3rd design display apparatus in a control example. It is a diagram showing an example of the display screen 7 seconds after the start of the composite effect of the alternative pattern 2 displayed on the third symbol display device in the thirty-sixth control example. It is a timing chart when the composite effect is executed in the pre-reach effect period in the thirty-sixth control example. FIG. 21 is a timing chart when the composite effect of the alternative pattern 1 is executed during the ready-to-win effect period in the thirty-sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a timing chart when a composite effect of alternative pattern 2 is executed during a ready-to-win effect period in the thirty-sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the thirty-sixth control example; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the thirty-sixth example of control, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main controller in the thirty-sixth example of control. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection 5 table set in the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the thirty-sixth control example; (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the audio ramp control device in the thirty-sixth control example; FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a normal fluctuation pattern selection 5 table set in a ROM; (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the time-saving variation pattern selection 5 table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the 36th control example, and (b) is a diagram in the 36th control example. It is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the special time-saving variation pattern selection 5 table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device, (c) is set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 36th control example It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the time saving final variation pattern selection 5 table. (a) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of a composite effect operation scenario table (bar character vertical drive) set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the thirty-sixth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the thirty-sixth control. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a composite effect operation scenario table (rotating body accessory left/right drive, rotation drive) set in the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the example; (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of a composite effect operation scenario table (a character vertical drive) set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the thirty-sixth control example; (b) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the thirty-sixth control; It is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the composite effect operation scenario table (shutter accessory left and right drive) set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the example. (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first alternative operation scenario table (bar character vertical drive) set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the thirty-sixth control example; FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a first alternative operation scenario table (rotating body accessory left/right driving, rotating driving) set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the control example; (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first alternative performance operation scenario table (a character vertical drive) set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the thirty-sixth control example; FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the first alternative operation scenario table (shutter accessory left/right drive) set in the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the T.36 control example; (a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of a second alternative operation scenario table (bar character vertical drive) set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the thirty-sixth control example; FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a second alternative operation scenario table (rotating body accessory left/right driving, rotating driving) set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the control example; (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the second alternative performance operation scenario table (a character vertical drive) set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device in the thirty-sixth control example; FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a second alternative operation scenario table (shutter accessory left/right drive) set in the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the T.36 control example; 29 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the thirty-sixth control example; 29 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process 5 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the thirty-sixth control example; FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing effect mode setting processing 5 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the thirty-sixth control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing a main liquid crystal effect execution management process 5 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the thirty-sixth control example; 29 is a flow chart showing composite effect start processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the thirty-sixth control example; FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a first operation process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the thirty-sixth control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing a second operation process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the thirty-sixth control example; 29 is a flow chart showing processing during movable character object executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the thirty-sixth control example; (a) is a diagram showing an example of a composite effect of a gekiatsu effect and a character role performed by the third pattern display device in the first modification of the thirty-sixth control example; (b) is a diagram of the thirty-sixth control; It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen during execution of the gimmick effect displayed by the 3rd design display apparatus in the 1st modification of an example. (a) is a diagram showing a case where the character is in motion in the first modification of the thirty-sixth control example; It is the figure which showed the case where it is moving. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a combined effect when a character role is placed in front of the key role displayed on the third symbol display device in the first modification of the thirty-sixth control example; There is, and (b) shows an example of a combined effect when the character role is arranged on the back side of the key role displayed on the third pattern display device in the first modification of the thirty-sixth control example. It is a diagram. FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM of a main controller in a thirty-seventh control example; FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM of the main controller in the thirty-seventh control example; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 37th control example, (b) is set in the ROM of the main controller in the 37th control example FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a normal variation pattern 1 table that has been created. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the normal fluctuation pattern 2 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 37th control example, (b) is the main control in the 37th control example FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a normal variation pattern 3 table set in the ROM of the apparatus; (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the time saving variation pattern 1 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 37th control example, (b) is the main control in the 37th control example It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the fluctuation|variation pattern 2 table for time reduction set to ROM of the apparatus. FIG. 16 is a diagram schematically showing defined contents of a working hours variation pattern 3 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the thirty-seventh control example; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a state transition table set in the ROM of the main controller in the thirty-seventh control example, (b) is set in the ROM of the main controller in the thirty-seventh control example; (c) schematically shows the defined contents of the state transition 1 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the thirty-seventh control example; FIG. 14D is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the state transition 3 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the thirty-seventh control example; (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the state transition 4 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the thirty-seventh control example; FIG. 12C is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the state transition 5 table set in the ROM, and (c) schematically shows the defined contents of the state transition 6 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the thirty-seventh control example; It is a schematic diagram. It is the figure which showed typically the specification content of the jackpot transition setting table set to ROM of the main-control apparatus in the 37th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special design variation process 8 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 37th control example. 29 is a flow chart showing a special merit variation pattern selection process 8 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the thirty-seventh control example; 29 is a flow chart showing variation count subtraction processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the thirty-seventh control example; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection 9 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 38th control example, (b) is in the ROM of the main controller in the 38th control example FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a set normal main fluctuation pattern table; (A) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the time-saving main fluctuation pattern table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 38th control example, (b) is the main control in the 38th control example FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a normal addition fluctuation pattern table set in the ROM of the apparatus; FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of the main controller in the thirty-eighth control example; FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variable time counter set in the RAM of the main controller in the thirty-eighth control example; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process 9 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the thirty-eighth control example. 29 is a flow chart showing special symbol variation pattern selection processing 9 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the thirty-eighth control example. 29 is a flow chart showing a variable time update process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the thirty-eighth control example; (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen during the third symbol variation displayed by the third symbol display device in the thirty-ninth control example, and (b) is a third symbol display in the thirty-ninth control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen at the time of the delay production|presentation start displayed with a device. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the development effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the thirty-ninth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the development effect displayed by the third symbol display device in the thirty-ninth control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen of the horizontal rotation production|presentation performed. FIG. 24 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the thirty-ninth control example; FIG. 24 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a chance mode selection table set in the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the thirty-ninth control example; FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing variation effect setting processing 10 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the thirty-ninth control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing normal effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the thirty-ninth control example; 29 is a flow chart showing variation pattern command processing 10 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the thirty-ninth control example; FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of a box design displayed by the third design display device in the thirty-ninth control example; (a) is a correspondence diagram of box symbols and number symbols in the thirty-ninth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing the number-symbol row display pattern in the thirty-ninth control example. (a)-(b) are diagrams showing an example of symbol data set in the number symbol sequence in the thirty-ninth control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the thirty-ninth control example when the losing symbols are stopped, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the third symbol display device in the thirty-ninth control example. It is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the horizontal rotation effect displayed in . It is the figure which showed an example of the ending screen of the jackpot game displayed by the 3rd design display device in the 39th control example. FIG. 20 is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 40th control example; (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when time saving symbol winning occurs in the normal state in the 40th control example, (b) is the second time saving state in the 40th control example It is a diagram showing an example of the effect mode of the chance time standby effect that is executed in the period from to digest the reserved ball of the first special symbol. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when 10 times of time reduction is notified in the chance time standby effect of the 40th control example, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the effect mode of the 40th control example. It is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when a jackpot is won with the reserved ball of the first special symbol during the execution period. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the effect mode of the variable display effect when winning the normal game B during the chance time in the 40th control example, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the effect mode of the chance in the 40th control example It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation aspect of the 1st suggestion production|presentation performed during the normal figure per game when winning the normal figure per B during the time. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of an effect mode of a variable display effect corresponding to the second special symbol in the fortieth control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the effect mode of the second suggestive effect executed during the small winning game of the second special symbol in the 40th control example, (b) is a rush in the 40th control example It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation aspect set during a state. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of an effect mode when passing through a through gate during a rush state in the 40th control example. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the transition of the presentation mode before and after the chance time in the 40th control example; (a) and (b) are diagrams showing the correspondence relationship between the special symbol state and the normal symbol state during the chance time in the 40th control example. It is the figure which showed the transition method between each game state in the 40th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the 40th control example, and (b) is the block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main controller in the 40th control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the special symbol 1 random number table in the 40th control example, (b) schematically shows the specified contents of the special symbol 2 random number table in the 40th control example It is a diagram showing, (c) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 40th control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the second winning random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 40th control example, (b) is the main controller in the 40th control example is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of , and (c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal table in the 40th control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the time saving table in the 40th control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the time saving giving table in the 40th control example. be. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the small hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 40th control example, (b) is the main control device in the 40th control example (c) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the time saving type selection table set in the ROM, and (c) is the specification of the normal figure per type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 40th control example It is the figure which showed the content typically. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the 40th control example; (b) is the RAM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the 40th control example; 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the standby production|presentation selection table set to ROM of the sound lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in the 40th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special design variation processing 40 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 40th control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special design determination processing 40 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 40th control example. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a disconnection time process 40 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the 40th control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special design variation pattern selection process 40 performed by MPU in the main control device in the 40th control example. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a detachment type determination process 40 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the 40th control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a time saving update process 40 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the 40th control example; FIG. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing 40 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 40th control example. (a) is a flow chart showing a normal figure winning time process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the 40th control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the main controller in the 40th control example 10 is a flowchart showing a third termination condition determination process; FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 40 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 40th control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing state command processing 40 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the 40th control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing standby effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 40th control example; FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a jackpot-related process 40 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 40th control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit related process 40 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in the 40th control example. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing per-universal pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 40th control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a variable effect setting process 40 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 40th control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing a chance time effect setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 40th control example; 29 is a flow chart showing effect update processing 40 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 40th control example; FIG. 20 is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the forty-first control example; (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when shifting to the time saving state A after the first hit in the 41st control example, and (b) is the first variation of the second special symbol in the time saving state A FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when display is started; (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when a specified number of reserved balls of the second special symbol accumulate after the transition to the time saving state A after the first hit in the 41st control example and the time saving end condition is satisfied. , and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode during the variable display of the second special symbol executed for the first time after the time saving state B is set in the 41st control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when the MAX bonus is won in the 41st control example, and (b) is a pseudo interval effect executed during the time saving state C in the 41st control example It is a diagram showing an example of the production mode of. It is the figure which showed the correspondence relationship between the transition of the production|presentation mode after the first hit in the 41st control example, and the state of a 2nd special design. In the 41st control example, it is the figure which showed the transition of the production|presentation aspect between reaching|attaining the time reduction limit frequency|count after transfering to MAX bonus mode, and transferring to normal mode B. FIG. It is the figure which showed the transition method between each game state in the 41st control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the forty-first control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main controller in the forty-first control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the special symbol 1 random number table in the 41st control example, (b) schematically shows the specified contents of the special symbol 2 random number table in the 41st control example (c) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the forty-first control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the second winning random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 41st control example, (b) is the main controller in the 41st control example is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of , and (c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal table in the 41st control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the time saving table in the 41st control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the MAX bonus table in the 41st control example. is. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the time reduction provision table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 41st control example, (b) is the ROM of the main controller in the 41st control example It is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the small hit type selection table set to. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the forty-first control example, (b) is the ROM of the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the forty-first control example. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a set attack icon selection table; FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in the sound lamp control device of the pachinko machine in the 41st control example; It is a flowchart which shows the special design determination process 41 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 41st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special design variation pattern selection process 41 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 41st control example. It is a flow chart which shows time saving update processing 41 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 41st example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit time saving update process 41 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 41st example of control. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a starting prize winning process 41 executed by an MPU in a main control device in the 41st control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a pending ball number determination process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the 41st control example; FIG. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing 41 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 41st control example. 29 is a flowchart showing V passage processing 41 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the 41st control example; FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a jackpot control process 41 executed by an MPU in the main control device in the 41st control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a jackpot ending process 41 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 41st control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 41 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the forty-first control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing winning information command processing 41 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the forty-first control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a jackpot-related process 41 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 41st control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing ending command processing 41 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the forty-first control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a variable effect setting process 41 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the forty-first control example; FIG. It is the figure which showed the transition method between each game state in the 1st modification of the 41st control example. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM of a main controller in a first modified example of the 41st control example; (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the special symbol 2 random number table in the first modification of the 41st control example, (b) is the first modification of the 41st control example It is the figure which showed typically the specification content of the jackpot classification selection table set to ROM of the main-control apparatus. (a) is the figure which showed typically the content of the time reduction provision table set to ROM of the main-control apparatus in the 1st modification of the 41st control example. (a) and (b) are the figures which showed an example of the production|presentation mode at the time of shifting to the time saving state A after the first hit in the 2nd modification of the 41st control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when shifting to the time saving mode or the pullback mode in the second modification of the 41st control example, (b) is the second of the 41st control example After shifting to the MAX bonus mode in the modification of 1, it is a diagram showing an example of the performance mode of the hit variation performance in the time saving state C immediately before reaching the time saving limit number of times. It is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the variable display of normal symbols, the winning game of normal symbols, and the variable display of special symbols during the time saving state in the second modification of the 41st control example. It is the figure which showed the transition method between each game state in the 2nd modification of the 41st control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the special symbol 2 random number table in the second modification of the 41st control example, (b) is the main in the second modification of the 41st control example It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the 2nd winning random number table set to ROM of the control apparatus. FIG. 32 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the normal table in the second modified example of the forty-first control example; (a) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the time saving table in the second modification of the 41st control example, (b) is for MAX bonus in the second modification of the 41st control example It is the figure which showed the specification content of the table typically. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription|regulation content of the time reduction provision table set to ROM of the main-control apparatus in the 2nd modification of the 41st control example. It is a flowchart which shows special design variation processing 41B performed by MPU in the main controller in the 2nd modification of the 41st control example. It is a flowchart which shows special design determination processing 41B performed by MPU in the main control device in the 2nd modification of the 41st control example. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a process 41B when out of alignment, which is executed by the MPU in the main controller in the second modification of the forty-first control example; FIG. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation pattern selection process 41B executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second modification of the 41st control example. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing an out-time type determination process 41B executed by the MPU in the main controller in the second modification of the forty-first control example; FIG. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing 41B executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second modification of the 41st control example. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a variable effect setting process 41B executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the second modified example of the 41st control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing effect update processing 41B executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the second modification of the forty-first control example; FIG. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of an effect mode of a remaining machine stock effect executed in a jackpot game other than the first win in the 42nd control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when a rush starts in the forty-second control example, and (b) is a view of an effect mode when a reach occurs during a rush in the forty-second control example. It is the figure which showed an example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when a non-V small win is won during the rush in the 42nd control example, (b) is a diagram showing all non-V during the rush in the 42nd control example It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation mode when the remaining machine corresponding to a small hit becomes 0. FIG. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of an effect mode of a remaining life recovery effect that is executed when a condition for increasing remaining lives is satisfied during a rush in the forty-second control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode while the remaining hold of the special figure 2 after the end of the rush in the 42nd control example is digested, and (b) is the final time saving in the 42nd control example It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation aspect when winning suspension is acquired after the start of a fluctuation|variation. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode during the invincible mode in the 42nd control example; It is the figure which showed the transition method between each game state in the 42nd control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the 42nd control example, and (b) is the block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main controller in the 42nd control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the special symbol 2 random number table in the 42nd control example, (b) is a jackpot type selection set in the ROM of the main control device in the 42nd control example It is the figure which showed the specification content of the table typically. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the 42nd control example, and (b) shows the specified contents of the normal table in the 42nd control example. It is a figure shown typically. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the time saving table in the 42nd control example, (b) schematically shows the defined contents of the time saving final fluctuation table in the 42nd control example It is a diagram. It is the figure which showed typically the specification content of the time reduction provision table set to ROM of the main-control apparatus in the 42nd control example. It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the small hit classification selection table set to ROM of the main control unit in the 42nd control example. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in the sound ramp control device of the pachinko machine in the 42nd control example; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation pattern selection process 42 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 42nd control example. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a time saving update process 42 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the 42nd control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing ceiling determination processing 42 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the 42nd control example; It is a flowchart which shows the small hit time saving update process 42 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 42nd control example. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a variable effect setting process 42 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 42nd control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a time-saving production setting process 42 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the forty-second control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the non-V small hit time process performed by MPU in a sound ramp control apparatus in the 42nd control example.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 71. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

In the following description, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the front side of the paper is defined as the front (front) side, and the back side of the paper is defined as the rear (rear) side. Also, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. ) side. Further, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the drawing (see, for example, FIG. 2) indicate the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. Balls (game balls) flow down in front of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls projected to the front side and formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface, and the upper tray 17 discharges prize balls, rental balls, and the like. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. be.

The front frame 14 is provided with light-emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, an indicator lamp 34 is provided at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The display lamp 34 has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can indicate that prize balls are being paid out and that an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chromium, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to create more splendor.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to hit the ball in front of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit in front of the game board 13 with a flying distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, and a large number of nails for guiding balls (shown below the center frame 86, and in the upper half of the game area). ) and windmills (not shown), rails 61, 62, general winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 140, variable winning device 65, through gate 67, variable display unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).

The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and allows the player to visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, and the variable winning device 65 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and tapping screws or the like are installed from the front side of the game board 13. is fixed by

Note that the base plate 60 may be formed from a wooden plate member. In this case, on the outside of the center frame 86, various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side can be shielded so as to be invisible to the player.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

In front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and a shot is fired). area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the balls shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37A and 37B having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged in the lower left part of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left part in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 140.例文帳に追加Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball enters the second winning hole 140, the first The pattern display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability, the time saving mode, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state by the lighting state. Whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state, the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates the round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and depending on the combination of the emission colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when a prize is won in the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 140.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 4R probability variable jackpot, and a 4R normal jackpot are prepared. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. .

Here, the “15R probability variable jackpot” is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and the “4R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after . In addition, "4R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds, and a time-saving state during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special game state It is the state of In the high-probability state (during variable probability) in this embodiment, the probability of a big hit increases during a predetermined number of variations (100 variations in this embodiment), and the probability of a second symbol to be described later increases. It includes a game state in which the ball is likely to enter the prize winning opening 140.例文帳に追加"Low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low-probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains as it is, only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second winning port 140 It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is likely to win a prize. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it means that the game is in a state of neither variable probability nor time reduction (state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the second pattern winning probability is increased).

In this embodiment, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 of the distribution device 300 described later, in the first round of the jackpot game, the game state after the jackpot game ends varies by 100 During the number of times, it will be in a high probability state. In addition, if it is not determined that the game ball has passed through the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11, the game state after the end of the jackpot game becomes a time saving state for 100 variations.

During the probability change or the time reduction, not only the probability of winning the second symbol is increased, but also the time when the electric accessory 140a (electric accessory) attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened is changed, compared to the normal time. and a long time is set. When the electric role product 140a is in the open state (open state), the balls enter the second winning port 140 more than when the electric role product 140a is in the closed state (closed state). becomes easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 140, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 140a associated with the second winning opening 140 during the probability change or during the time saving, or in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 140a is released more than during normal times. In addition, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the electric accessory 140a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 140a associated with the second winning opening 140 is opened and when it hits once. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time when the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened, and the number of times the electric accessory 140a is opened per hit are not set. Only the probability may be changed to be higher than normal.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the winning (starting winning) to the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140 is used as a trigger, and while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the third symbol is displayed. It is composed of a third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variably displays the second pattern triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67. A second pattern display device (not shown) is provided. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

In this embodiment, the third pattern display device 81 is fastened and fixed to the rear case 510 so as to fill an opening 511a of the rear case 510, which will be described later, and the center frame 86 is arranged to frame the window of the base plate 60. is set. That is, when viewed from the front, it appears that the center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81, but in reality, the third pattern display device 81 and the center frame 86 are spaced apart in the front and rear direction. It is

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of, for example, a large liquid crystal display of 9-inch size, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, upper, middle and lower are displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be constructed using a reel or the like.

The second pattern display device alternately lights up a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. This is for variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning hole 140 is displayed for a predetermined period of time. is configured to be activated (opened) only.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the variable probability or during the time saving than during the normal gaming state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the probability change and the time reduction, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during normal times. Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given more opportunities to open the electric accessary 140a of the second winning opening 140.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 140 during the probability variation and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, other methods such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 140a for one hit, etc. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during the variable probability or during the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and one winning The opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 140a may be fixed regardless of the game state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the ball shot to the game board 13 can pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is suspended up to a total of four times, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B described above, and is displayed on the second symbol suspension lamp (not shown). is also displayed. Four second pattern holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

The variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, the maximum number of held balls to pass through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Also, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be, for example, one. Also, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right and left sides of the variable display unit 80, and may be below the variable display unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning hole 64 through which balls can win is arranged. When the ball enters the first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the first winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the first prize winning port 64 in a front view, a second prize winning port 140 through which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When the ball enters the second winning hole 140, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the second winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big win is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

Also, the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 140 are also one of the prize winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 140 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 140 are different numbers, for example, the number of balls to the first prize winning port 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball wins may be set to three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball enters the second prize winning port 140 may be set to five.

An electric accessory 140a is attached to the second prize winning port 140. - 特許庁This electric accessory 140a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 140a is in a closed state (reduced state), which makes it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 140. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 140a is in the open state (enlarged state), and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 140.例文帳に追加

As described above, during the probability variation and during the time saving, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short, so in the variation display of the second symbol "○ ' is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 140a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the electric accessory 140a is opened is also longer during the variable probability and during the time saving than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 140 during the variable probability and the shorter working hours compared to the normal time.

Here, when the ball enters the first prize winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second prize winning port 140, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of the 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning port 140 than when the ball enters the first winning port 64. is set. On the other hand, the first prize winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second prize winning port 140, and is in a state where balls can always win prizes.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessory attached to the second prize winning port 140 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second prize winning port 140. Then, a ball is shot so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by winning the first prize-winning port 64, many chances of a big winning lottery are obtained, and a big win is achieved. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning port 140 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning port 140 is in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, the ball is shot toward the second winning hole 140 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right hitting"), passes through the through gate 67, and the electric accessory is opened. In addition, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variable jackpot by winning the second prize winning port 140.例文帳に追加

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the configuration of the game board 13 is bilaterally symmetrical, it is possible to aim for the first winning hole 64 by "right-handed hitting" or to aim for the second winning hole 140 by "left-handed hitting". You can also aim. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment provides the player with information on how to shoot balls according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is in variable probability, short time, or normal). It is possible to eliminate the need to change the to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the annoyance of changing the way the ball is hit.

A variable prize winning device 65 (see FIG. 2) is arranged below the first prize winning port 64, and a specific prize winning port 65a is provided substantially in the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning in the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 140 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to cause the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B to be lit, and the third symbol display device 81 is caused to display the stop symbol corresponding to the big win, thereby indicating the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the balls are likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closure, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. You may make it form as a state. In addition, the number of the specific winning openings 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of two or more (for example, three) may be arranged. The left side of the variable display device unit 80 is not limited to the lower left side of the prize winning opening 64, for example.

An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 140 are guided through the out hole 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A pair of out ports 71 are arranged on the left and right sides of the specific winning port 65a.

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills (not shown). ).

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132, which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the setting of the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display results of the second symbol display device. to run.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controller by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the operation of the sub-controller such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the opening/closing plate 65b of the specific winning opening 65a (Fig. 11 ) is connected to a solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory. Sends various commands and control signals to

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 .

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like. Other devices 228 include drive motors 631 , 731 , 782 , 861 .

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 changes the third pattern, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, the structure around the variable winning device 65 will be described. 5 is a front perspective view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300, and FIGS. 6(a) and 6(b) are front perspective views of the variable winning device 65. FIG. FIG. 6(a) shows a closed state of the opening/closing plate 65b in which the opening/closing plate 65b is closed so as to restrict the ball from flowing down to the specific winning hole 65a. An open state of the opening/closing plate 65b is shown in which the opening/closing plate 65b is opened to allow the ball to flow down. Note that FIG. 2 will be referred to as appropriate in the description of FIGS. 5 and 6 .

The variable winning device 65 accepts a ball that lands on the opening/closing plate 65b in the open state of the opening/closing plate 65b (see FIG. 6(b)), and opens the opening/closing plate 65b so that it can be guided to the specific winning opening 65a. , the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 65b is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the rear side.

Since the electric accessory 140a is arranged above the left-right central part of the opening/closing plate 65b (see FIG. 2), the ball that lands on the opening/closing plate 65b is limited to the ball that deviates from the electric accessory 140a and flows down. . That is, the landing of the ball on the opening/closing plate 65b does not occur in the left-right central portion, but mainly occurs in the left-right outer portion of the electric accessory 140a. In other words, the placement of the ball that lands on the opening/closing plate 65b is limited to positions on the left and right outer sides of the opening/closing plate 65b.

However, the placement of the ball after landing on the opening/closing plate 65b is not limited to this. That is, depending on how the ball flows after landing on the opening/closing plate 65b, the ball may be arranged near the center position of the opening/closing plate 65b.

In particular, in this embodiment, the front design member 141 (see FIG. 2) covering the electric accessory 140a from the front side is curved so as to secure a space on the opening/closing plate 65b side (the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). ) is formed as a curved surface that protrudes downward toward the rear side from the lower end of the front end portion disposed opposite to ). It is possible to reduce the degree to which momentum is lost due to collision. As a result, it is possible to increase the possibility that the ball will be arranged near the left-right central position of the opening/closing plate 65b.

Note that the center of the radius of curvature of the curved shape of the lower portion of the front design member 141 may be arranged in either the front or rear direction. In the present embodiment, the radius of curvature in the lateral view is arranged downward on the front side, so that a larger space on the side of the opening/closing plate 65b can be secured. In addition, since the front design member 141 has a shape in which the width of the front design member 141 becomes smaller toward the lower side at the left and right ends, it is possible to easily secure a space between the front design member 141 and the opening/closing plate 65b on the left and right sides.

In the open state of the opening/closing plate 65b, the ball that has landed on the opening/closing plate 65b is guided to the specific winning hole 65a almost without omission. On the front side of the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1, an inclined flow bottom surface 163a1 that slopes downward toward the rear is disposed at a vertical position that can guide the ball to the ball passage hole 163b.

The inclined flow lower surface 163a1 is formed one step lower than the left and right end portions of the lower surface portion 163a so that the ball rolled left and right by the lower surface portion 163a can be transferred with less resistance. Guide plate portions 163a2 are formed on the left and right outer sides of the inclined flow-down surface 163a1 in order to reduce the flow resistance of the ball that has landed on the opening/closing plate 65b on the left-right outside of the inclined flow-down surface 163a1.

The guide plate portion 163a2 is a plate-like portion extending forward and inward in the left and right direction from the rear wall portion and the inner left and right wall portions of the receiving member 163, and the front end surface is formed as an inclined surface that is displaced rearward toward the inner left and right sides. It is formed.

As a result, when a ball rolling on the opening/closing plate 65b contacts the front end surface of the guide plate portion 163a2, the ball can be guided downward along the slope of the inclined surface, so that the ball can be moved downward along the inclined surface. It can be guided to 163a1 with less resistance. Therefore, when the opening/closing plate 65b starts the closing operation with a ball on the opening/closing plate 65b, the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b cannot be performed even if the ball is arranged outside the inclined flow surface 163a1 to the left and right. The degree of inhibition can be reduced.

That is, for example, the flow of the ball deteriorates and the closing of the opening/closing plate 65b is delayed, or the ball swept backward by the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b rebounds from the rear wall portion of the receiving member 163 and hits the opening/closing plate 65b again. By applying a load in the direction (front side) to open the opening/closing plate 65b, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the opening/closing plate 65b is unintentionally opened.

When the opening/closing plate 65b moves from the open state to the closed state, the opening/closing plate 65b is closed by a rising motion. That is, the ball that lands on the opening/closing plate 65b is guided (swallowed) to the specific winning hole 65a by the operation of the opening/closing plate 65b, so that the ball on the opening/closing plate 65b does not shift to the left/right position, and the ball lands on the opening/closing plate 65b. The ball on it is guided to the specific winning hole 65a almost without omission.

At this time, if the balls on the opening/closing plate 65b are arranged on the left and right outer sides or if the number of balls is large, the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b may be delayed. In contrast, in the present embodiment, the shapes of the lower surface portion 163a of the receiving member 163, the inclined flow lower surface 163a1, and the guide plate portion 163a2 are devised, so that the flow of balls guided to the specific winning opening 65a can be retained. Therefore, it is possible to keep the quickness of the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b.

Instead of devising the shape of the receiving member 163, the rolling surface of the opening/closing plate 65b on which the ball rides in the open state is formed flat (see FIG. 6(b)). Therefore, when the opening/closing plate 65b is in the open state, the ball that lands on the opening/closing plate 65b flows backward once, and then flows leftward and rightward due to the action of the shape of the receiving member 163, and is guided to the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1. Therefore, collision of the balls on the opening/closing plate 65b can be easily avoided.

That is, even if a plurality of balls land on the opening/closing plate 65b at the same time, the balls are temporarily moved backward in parallel, so that the balls can be prevented from colliding with each other on the opening/closing plate 65b. Therefore, compared to the case where the rolling surface of the opening/closing plate 65b is formed to have a laterally inclined surface like the lower surface portion 163a, and the rolling balls flow in the left/right direction, the rolling surface of the opening/closing plate 65b is reduced. Since it is possible to reduce the possibility that the ball will move irregularly, it is possible to prevent unintended malfunctions.

The receiving member 163 is formed with abutment surface portions 163a3 that abut on the tip portions of the rotation at both left and right ends of the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state of the opening/closing plate 65b to improve the reproducibility of the arrangement of the opening/closing plate 65b. there is The abutment surface portions 163a3 are formed as a pair of right and left sides, and are formed so as to allow surface contact rather than point contact due to a shape design that matches the shape of the opening/closing plate 65b. In addition, since stress concentration can be avoided by receiving the load at the time of contact, the durability can be improved.

Further, an auxiliary contact surface 163a4 is formed on the lower side of the contact surface portion 163a3 so as to be substantially parallel to the open/close plate 65b, which is arranged opposite to the contact surface portion 163a3, with a slight gap therebetween. The auxiliary contact surface 163a4 is provided as a fail-safe in the event that contact between the contact surface portion 163a3 and the opening/closing plate 65b fails for some reason.

In this embodiment, the member to be fixed 161 that restricts the flow of the ball is arranged on the near side of the contact surface portion 163a3, and is basically configured so that the ball does not collide with the contact surface portion 163a3. However, for example, if the tip of the opening/closing plate 65b that contacts the contact surface portion 163a3 is missing, there is a possibility that the reproducibility of the arrangement of the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state cannot be maintained.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when normal contact between the opening/closing plate 65b and the contact surface portion 163a3 cannot be maintained, the front and rear width portions at the left and right ends of the opening/closing plate 65b and the auxiliary contact surface 163a4 are displaced. , so as to maintain the stability of the arrangement of the opening/closing plate 65b. As a result, it is possible to improve the reproducibility of the arrangement of the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state.

The auxiliary contact surface 163a4 may be configured to contact the opening/closing plate 65b when the shape of the contact surface portion 163a3 is normal. In this case, the contact surface portion 163a3 contacts with the opening/closing plate 65b from the normal shape, so there is a disadvantage that the load is likely to be accumulated. It is possible to reduce the magnitude of the local load that the contact surface portion 163a3 receives due to the contact with the contact surface portion 163a3.

When the opening/closing plate 65b moves from the open state to the closed state, the game ball in the process of being received by the opening/closing plate 65b can be received in a state of being pushed into the opening/closing plate 65b by the shape of the front design member 141 described above. .

That is, in a state in the middle of being received (for example, in a state of being sandwiched between the turning tip of the opening/closing plate 65b and the opening frame of the specific prize winning port 65a and sliding sideways), the ball hits the lower shape of the front design member 141. When it touches, it can be made to flow down to the inside of the specific winning opening 65a by being guided by the curved shape. As a result, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the ball deviated from the opening/closing plate 65b falls on the front side of the third flow path forming part 336, so that the visibility to the third flow path forming part 336 can be easily secured. can do.

When the opening/closing plate 65b is closed, the ball does not land on the opening/closing plate 65b. Therefore, when the opening/closing plate 65b is closed, the ball flowing down the front side of the opening/closing plate 65b is positioned outside the electric accessory 140a. is limited to

Therefore, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, it is possible to limit the arrangement of the balls flowing down without being guided to the specific prize winning opening 65a in the closed state of the opening/closing plate 65b to the left and right outer positions of the electric accessory 140a. As a result, it is possible to ensure the field of view at the left and right inner positions of the left and right ends of the electric accessory 140a on the lower side of the electric accessory 140a.

Next, the configuration of the downstream side of the specific winning opening 65a (the side on which the ball passing through the specific winning opening 65a flows) will be described. 7 is a front perspective view of the game board 13, and FIG. 8 is a rear perspective view of the game board 13. FIG. 7 and 8 illustrate a state in which components other than the first winning port 64, the second winning port 140, and the variable winning device 65 are removed from the components provided on the base plate 60. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 8, on the rear side of the base plate 60, behind the variable prize winning device 65, there are a first prize winning port 64, a second prize winning port 140, and a ball entered into the general prize winning port 63 (see FIG. 2). A collecting gutter 150 is provided in which a path is formed for flowing the ball discharge passage (not shown).

The collecting gutter 150 has a groove-shaped portion that forms a flow path, and the groove-shaped portion has an open front side facing the base plate 60 . By closing this open portion with the base plate 60, a path for flowing the ball to the ball discharge path is completed.

The collecting gutter 150 includes a first flow path portion 151 that forms a flow path for balls that enter the first winning hole 64, and a second flow path part 152 that forms a path for balls that enter the second winning hole 140. and a plurality of third flow passages 153 forming flow passages for the balls entered into the general winning holes 63 arranged on both left and right sides.

The first flow path portion 151 is configured as a flow path that slopes downward and to the left from the rear position of the first prize winning port 64, and the second flow channel portion 152 is configured as a flow path that slopes downward and to the right from the rear position of the second prize winning port 140. It is configured as a flow path for The third channel portion 153 is configured as a channel extending downward from the general winning opening 63 .

Therefore, when viewed from the front, the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 140 are arranged at the left and right central positions of the game area, but the flow of the balls entering the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 140 is , and gathered to the left and right outside from the central position in the left and right by the collecting gutter 150 . Thereby, a space can be provided below the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 140, and the variable prize winning device 65 and the sorting device 300, which will be described later, can be arranged using this space.

9 is an exploded front perspective view of the base plate 60, the variable prize winning device 65, the collecting gutter 150 and the sorting device 300, and FIG. is an exploded rear perspective view of the . 9 and 10, only the lower half of the base plate 60 is illustrated, the other portions are omitted, and the other components assembled to the base plate 60 are omitted. The ground of the base plate 60 is visible. 9, the center frame 86 is shown assembled to the base plate 60 for convenience of explanation.

Fixing of the variable winning device 65, the collecting gutter 150 and the sorting device 300 will be described. The variable winning device 65 is arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like. The collecting gutter 150 is arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the back side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

The sorting device 300 has an insertion hole 311 fastened and fixed to the variable prize winning device 65 at the upper portion, and an insertion hole 331 fastened and fixed to the collecting gutter 150 at the left and right portions. That is, unlike the variable winning device 65 directly fixed to the base plate 60 and the collecting gutter 150, the presence or absence of the sorting device 300 does not affect the completion of the game board 13.

In other words, the variable prize winning device 65 and the collecting gutter 150 in this embodiment can be used as they are when the sorting device 300 is provided and when the sorting device 300 is not provided. As a result, regardless of the presence or absence of the sorting device 300, the variable winning device 65 and the collecting gutter 150 can be shared.

Next, details of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 will be described. The variable prize winning device 65 is configured to be able to receive balls from the game area through the specific prize winning port 65a, and the sorting device 300 constitutes a downflow path along which the balls received by the variable prize winning device 65 flow. In the present embodiment, control is performed so that the profit obtained by the player changes based on the detection result of the ball flowing through the flow path of the sorting device 300, but the details will be described later.

11 is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 12 is an exploded rear perspective view of the variable winning device 65. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the variable winning device 65 includes a fixed member 161 fixed by tapping screws or the like from the front side of the game board 13, and a fixed member 161 arranged on the front side of the fixed member 161. A front design member 162 fastened and fixed to 161, and a receiving member 163 arranged on the back side of the fixed member 161, fastened and fixed to the fixed member 161, and capable of receiving a ball passing through the specific winning opening 65a. , an intervening member 164 that is arranged on the back side of the receiving member 163, is fastened and fixed to the receiving member 163, and intervenes as a connection part with the sorting device 300; and a state switching device 165 which is fastened and fixed to the opening and closing plate 65b and configured to be capable of switching the open/closed state of the opening/closing plate 65b depending on the presence or absence of energization.

The member to be fixed 161 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and the shape of its front side is flat except for the through hole for inserting the screw, the fastening position with the front design member 162, and the specific winning opening 65a. . On the other hand, the shape of the rear side of the member to be fixed 161 is a three-dimensional shape that protrudes toward the rear side inside the thin-walled portion that is in surface contact with the base plate 60 in the outer peripheral portion.

In particular, the boundary portion 161a with the thin portion is formed in the shape of a horizontally elongated substantially elliptical frame, and a through-hole having a size that allows the boundary portion 161a to be disposed is formed through the base plate 60. As shown in FIG. That is, the boundary portion 161a is a portion that is inserted through the through hole of the base plate 60 .

Inside the boundary portion 161a, there is a specific winning opening 65a, and a horizontally long plate extending rearward in a horizontally long plate shape parallel to the lower edge of the specific winning opening 65a slightly below the lower edge of the specific winning opening 65a. and a pair of left and right extending support plates 161b each having a substantially T-shape and having a vertically elongated plate-shaped portion extending downward at an intermediate position of the horizontally elongated plate-shaped portion.

The extended support plate 161b functions to support both the area behind the specific winning opening 65a and the downstream path of the sorting device 300, which will be described later. A projecting support portion 161c projecting from the horizontally elongated plate portion of the extending support plate 161b, a projecting support portion 161d projecting from the vertically elongated plate portion of the extending support plate 161b, and the lower edge of the boundary portion 161a. The projecting support portion 161e projecting from the upper surface of the unit has a function as a portion for supporting the sorting device 300, and the details will be described later.

Inside the boundary part 161a, a symmetrical projecting part 161f projecting in a left-right symmetrical shape below the left-right central position of the specific winning hole 65a contacts the ball flowing down the sorting device 300 and guides the ball down. have a function.

A plurality of through holes 161g for inserting fastening screws to be screwed into the front design member 162 are arranged inside and outside the boundary portion 161a. A plurality of fastened portions 161h having female threads for screwing fastening screws inserted through the receiving member 163 are arranged inside the boundary portion 161a.

A fastened portion 161i having a female threaded portion for screwing a fastening screw to be inserted through the interposed member 164 is arranged outside the boundary portion 161a at a cut (left-right central position) of the boundary portion 161a. That is, of the through-holes formed in the base plate 60, the connecting portion between the through-hole for inserting the boundary portion 161a and the through-hole for inserting the second prize winning port 140 and the electric accessory 140a (see FIG. 9). ), the to-be-fastened portion 161i is arranged.

The front design member 162 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and the front side is formed in a flat shape so as to make the distance from the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) uniform. The sphere can flow down in the range of the back side of the front design member 162 and the front side of the fixed member 161 .

On the back side of the front design member 162, there are a plurality of female threaded portions which are disposed at positions matching the through holes 161g of the member to be fixed 161 and into which fastening screws inserted through the through holes 161g can be screwed. It has a fastened portion 162a and a plurality of extended portions 162b and 162c extending toward the rear side in such a shape as to cover the fastened portion 162a from above.

The extended portions 162b and 162c can prevent the ball flowing down between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 from directly colliding with the fastened portion 162a, thereby increasing the durability of the fastened portion 162a. can be improved.

Furthermore, by forming the upper surfaces of the extended portions 162b and 162c as inclined surfaces, it is possible to restrict the flow-down path of the ball. That is, the upper surfaces of the extension portions 162b (two locations on the left and right central sides) extending near the left and right edges of the specific winning opening 65a are formed as inclined surfaces that slope down toward the left and right outer sides. It is possible to suppress the ball on the part 162b from flowing toward the specific winning hole 65a. That is, the ball riding on the extended portion 162b falls downward on the left and right outer sides of the extended portion 162b, and then flows down toward the out port 71 along the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 2).

In addition, since the upper surfaces of the extension portions 162c (two points at both the left and right ends) extending on both the left and right ends are formed as inclined surfaces that slope downward toward the left and right inner sides, the ball flowing on the extension portions 162c is formed. The flow-down route can be summarized as the flow-down route of the ball on the extended portion 162b. As a result, compared to the number of falling balls, the range in which the falling balls are arranged can be narrowed (the density of ball placement can be increased), and the visibility is not hindered by the balls (the flowing path is non-configured space) can be reserved.

Although the front design member 162 shown in FIG. 11 is illustrated in a plain color and the visibility on the back side is good, it is not necessary to configure the front design member 162 in a plain color. For example, the front side of the front design member 162 may be decorated by sticking a sticker with an illustrated pattern or character, or a groove may be cut in the front design member 162 with a geometric pattern, and the groove may be irradiated with light. A geometric pattern may emerge and be visually recognized. Alternatively, the front design member 162 may be configured to be non-permeable after being plain or decorated as described above.

The receiving member 163 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and formed in a horizontally long frame shape (or box shape) with an open front side, and includes the guide plate portion 163a2, the contact surface portion 163a3, and the auxiliary contact surface 163a4. , a lower surface portion 163a forming a flow-down surface inside the frame, a ball passing hole 163b arranged as a through hole through which the ball flowing down the lower surface portion 163a can pass, and a position matching the fastened portion 161h of the member 161 to be fixed. A plurality of insertion holes 163c through which fastening screws fastened and fixed to the fastened portion 161h are inserted from the back side, and a female screw portion into which the fastening screws inserted through the intervening member 164 are screwed and which is located in the center of the left and right. A pair of fastened portions 163d arranged on the side and a plurality of fastened portions 163e having female screw portions into which fastening screws inserted through the state switching device 165 are screwed.

The lower surface portion 163a is formed as a laterally inclined surface that slopes downward toward the left and right outer sides with the lateral central portion as the apex, and the inclined flow slopes downward toward the rear at a position one step lower than the left and right outer end portions of the laterally inclined surface. Since the lower surface 163a1 is provided, the ball flowing down the rear end portion of the inclined flow-down surface 163a1 is disposed so as to pass through the ball passage hole 163b with little resistance.

The ball passage hole 163b is a detection hole formed in the detection sensor SE1 engaged with the back side of the receiving member 163. As shown in FIG. That is, the detection sensor SE1 detects that the ball has passed through the ball passage hole 163b.

The intervening member 164 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and includes a main body portion 164a having a light refracting surface that slopes downward toward the rear, and a fastened portion of the receiving member 163 formed through the upper portion of the main body portion 164a. A pair of insertion holes 164b through which fastening screws to be screwed into 163d can be inserted, a light-emitting substrate 164c arranged above the insertion holes 164b and having LEDs disposed thereon, and both left and right ends on the lower end side of the main body 164a. A pair of to-be-fastened portions 164d formed having a female screw portion into which a fastening screw inserted through the sorting device 300 can be screwed, and a to-be-fastened member 161 that is formed through the upper part of the main body portion 164a and is to be fastened. and an insertion hole 164e through which a fastening screw to be screwed into the portion 161i can be inserted.

The light-emitting substrate 164c is disposed with the surface on which the LEDs are arranged facing obliquely forward and upward. It is arranged just below the mouth 140 . Due to this arrangement, the light from the light emitting board 164c easily enters the field of view of the player who wants to enter the second winning hole 140 or the specific winning hole 65a and gazes obliquely backward and downward.

Therefore, when a ball entering the second winning hole 140 or the specific winning hole 65a is detected, the LED of the light emitting board 164c is controlled to light up, thereby preventing the ball from entering the second winning hole 140 or the specific winning hole 65a. It is possible to make the player easily grasp whether or not has occurred.

Due to the configuration described above, the intervening member 164 is fastened and fixed to both the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 . As a result, the member to be fixed 161 and the receiving member 163 can be firmly fixed compared to the case where the member to be fixed 161 and the receiving member 163 are only fastened and fixed. In addition, since the arrangement of the sorting device 300 connected and fixed to the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 via the intervening member 164 can be stabilized, the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 and the sorting device 300 Relative positional deviation can be suppressed.

The state switching device 165 has a plurality of insertion portions 165a through which fastening screws to be screwed into the fastening portion 163e of the receiving member 163 are inserted, and has a plurality of openings for passing wires and for heat dissipation. A lower case portion 165b formed in a deep box shape with an open top, an electromagnetic solenoid 165c housed in the lower case portion 165b, and a plunger tip of the electromagnetic solenoid 165c engaged with the plunger. A slide portion 165d that is slidably displaced is rotatably supported by the lower case portion 165b in such an arrangement that the front end portion of the rotation protrudes from the front end portion of the lower case portion 165b, and a rotation portion that rotates as the slide portion 165d is slid is displaced. It includes a moving portion 165e and an upper lid portion 165g fastened and fixed to the lower case portion 165b by fastening screws inserted through the plurality of insertion holes 165f.

The tip of the rotating portion 165e is recessed so that the rod-shaped portion can be engaged therewith. engaged. The transmission projection 65c is arranged at a position eccentric from a metal shaft rod 65d that forms a rotation axis for opening and closing the opening and closing plate 65b. With this configuration, the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b can be caused in accordance with the rotation of the rotating portion 165e.

13 and 14 are exploded front perspective views of the sorting device 300. FIG. 13 shows a perspective view of the sorting device 300 from above, and FIG. 14 shows a perspective view of the sorting device 300 from below.

As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the sorting device 300 includes an upper member 310 having a pair of insertion holes 311 through which fastening screws to be screwed into the fastening portion 164d of the interposed member 164 can be inserted. , an intermediate member 330 which is vertically fastened to the upper member 310 and has a pair of through holes 331 through which fastening screws screwed into the female screw portion of the collecting gutter 150 can be inserted; A substrate 350, which is housed between the member 330 and the upper member 310 and on which a light emitting means 351 such as an LED is arranged on the front side, and a substrate 350 which is housed between the middle member 330 and the upper member 310, depends on the presence or absence of energization. and a slide displacement member 370 arranged below the middle member 330 and slidably displaced back and forth between the front side position and the rear side position as the state of the state switching device 360 is switched, An insertion hole that is disposed below the intermediate member 330 so as to sandwich the slide displacement member 370 between the intermediate member 330 and is formed so as to allow the fastening screw that is screwed into the female screw portion of the collecting gutter 150 to be inserted. a lower member 380 having 381;

Before describing the details of the configuration of each unit, an overview of the functions of the sorting device 300 will be described. The sorting device 300 is a device that constitutes a flow path along which balls that have passed through the ball passage hole 163b (see FIG. 12) of the detection sensor SE1 flow down.

The ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 163b flows down in the order of the inside of the upper member 310, the passage forming portions 334, 335, and 336 formed between the upper member 310 and the middle member 330, and the inside of the lower member 380. Then, the balls flowing down from the lower member 380 are discharged to a ball discharge passage (not shown).

The ball flowing down inside the sorting device 300 is configured to be visually recognized by the player, and the flow-down mode provides the player with not only a mere presentation effect that pleases the player's eyes, but also the player. There is an effect related to the game profit such as causing a change in the profit.

Differences in the manner in which balls flow down inside the sorting device 300 are mainly caused by the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 . That is, the position of the slide displacement member 370 when the ball flows down from the middle member 330 toward the lower member 380 makes a difference in which part of the lower member 380 the ball passes through.

Therefore, the player's line of sight naturally tends to gather at the location where the ball flows down from the middle member 330 toward the lower member 380 (the location where the slide displacement member 370 is arranged, as will be described later). It is devised assuming the concentration of

Next, the details of the configuration of each part of the sorting device 300 will be described. The upper member 310 is a U-shaped thin member made of a light-transmitting resin material, and includes the above-described insertion hole 311, a pair of openings 312 penetrating to receive a ball, and a mark. A pair of colored (in this embodiment, red) transparent sealing members 313 attached as a pair of transparent sealing members 313, a pair of upper surface portions 314 extending from the lower edge of the opening 312 to the front side along the outer peripheral portion, and an intermediate member a plurality of insertion cylindrical portions 315 formed with through-holes through which fastening screws threaded into the intermediate member 330 can be inserted; fastening portions 316 having female threads into which the fastening screws threaded through the middle member 330 can be inserted; A pair of long front-to-rear projections 317, which are longitudinally elongated portions projected downward from the lower surface of the upper member 310 and arranged side by side, and downward from the lower surface of the upper member 310. A pair of left and right inner projecting portions 318 which are elongated portions projecting in the left and right direction and are arranged between a pair of front and rear long projecting portions 317, and downward from the lower surface of the upper member 310 A pair of left and right outer projecting portions 319 which are elongated portions projecting in the left and right direction and are arranged on the left and right outer sides of the pair of front-rear long projecting portions 317, and a size that allows the upper portion of the substrate 350 to be arranged. a receiving recess 320 formed as a recess in the

The opening 312 is a passage-shaped portion (tunnel-shaped portion) that receives the ball that has passed through the ball-passing hole 163b of the variable winning device 65 and flows it downward. 12) is cut along an inclined plane so as to be flush with the back surface of the plate. As a result, the upper front edge of the opening 312 can be brought into contact with the back surface of the detection sensor SE1.

Further, the opening 312 is formed with such an opening degree that it does not enter the inside of the opening of the ball passing hole 163b when viewed from the opening direction of the ball passing hole 163b. As a result, it is possible to reduce the flow resistance when the ball passing through the ball passage hole 163b is guided to the opening 312. FIG.

The seal member 313 receives light emitted from the light emitting means 351 of the substrate 350 and is visually recognized brilliantly, thereby functioning as a member that attracts the player's attention, the details of which will be described later.

The upper surface portion 314 is a thin plate portion that is inclined in accordance with the flow-down path of the ball below the upper member 310 . The first upper surface portion 314a disposed on the front side of the opening 312 is formed to be inclined downward toward the front side, and the second upper surface portion is connected to the front end portion of the first upper surface portion 314a and disposed on the left and right inner sides. 314b is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the left and right inner sides. Further, the left and right second upper surface portions 314b are configured so that the left and right intervals become longer toward the near side, so that the field of view of the player who visually recognizes the ball through the space between the second upper surface portions 314b can be ensured.

The insertion tube portion 315 has a counterbore formed on the upper surface thereof for receiving the screw head of the fastening screw. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the screw head of the fastening screw from being visually recognized by the player, even though the fastening screw is inserted from the upper side.

The insertion tubular portion 315 is arranged at a position that matches a fastened portion 332 d having a female screw portion formed on the intermediate member 330 . In particular, the fastened portion 332d corresponding to the left insertion tube portion 315 also serves as a support portion for supporting the rotating portion 363, the details of which will be described later.

The fastening screw to be screwed into the fastened portion 316 is arranged in such a manner that the screw portion faces upward and the screw head faces downward. Therefore, while the fastening part 316 is arranged on the near side, the screw head is made inconspicuous to the player who views it obliquely from above. As a result, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the sorting device 300 from deteriorating due to the fastening screws while the upper member 310 and the middle member 330 are firmly fixed.

The reason why the to-be-fastened part 316 is formed only on the right side is that since two insertion cylinder parts 315 are already arranged on the rear side, one fastening position on the front side is sufficient, and the screw head faces downward. The reason for this is that, although it is not conspicuous because it is laid out, the sorting device 300 looks better if it is omitted if it is not necessary. Note that the arrangement of the fastened portion 316 is not limited to this. For example, they may be arranged on the left side, or may be arranged as a pair of left and right.

The arrangement of the fastened portion 316 is set so as to avoid the falling path of the balls and to minimize the deterioration of the appearance of the sorting device 300, which will be described later in detail.

The lower surfaces of the front-rear elongated protruding portions 317, the left-right inner protruding portions 318, and the left-right outer protruding portions 319, which are formed in pairs, are curved such that the arrangement is lowered with increasing distance from the same location. formed as a plane. The curved surface has different shapes for the front-rear projection 317, the left-right inner projection 318, and the left-right outer projection 319, and the difference in shape is intended to control the flow of the ball.

The intermediate member 330 includes the pair of insertion holes 331 described above, a rear frame portion 332 formed in a frame shape (substantially box shape) having a lower bottom portion on the rear side, and a frame shape (substantially box shape) having a bottom portion on the front side. A pair of front frame-shaped portions 333 formed in a box shape, a pair of first flow path forming portions 334 recessed on the left and right outer sides of the front frame-shaped portion 333 and forming a flow-down path of the ball, and the first A pair of second flow passage forming portions 335 which are connected to the front end portion of the flow passage forming portion 334 to form a flow-down path of the sphere and which are recessed on the front side of the front frame portion 333, and the second flow pass forming portions. A pair of third flow passage forming portions 336 are connected to the left and right inner end portions of the front frame portion 333 to form a flow-down path of the ball, and are recessed on the left and right inner sides of the front frame portion 333 .

In addition, the intermediate member 330 has a left-right elongated shape on the rear side of the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336, and is formed through the lower bottom and functions as a ball discharge passage. A partition plate portion 338 formed in a plate shape elongated in the front-rear direction so as to partition the third flow path forming portion 336 into left and right, and a left and right long rectangular plate portion 338 extending from the lower surface of the rear end portion of the third flow pass forming portion 336 to the left and right. and a pair of alignment projections 339 projecting as shape projections.

The rear frame-shaped part 332 does not form a ball flow path unlike the front part which forms a ball flow path, and is mainly configured as a part that supports the substrate 350 and the state switching device 360 . The rear frame-shaped portion 332 has a placement through hole 332a formed through the front end portion of the left-right center portion in the vertical direction so that the slide displacement member 370 can be placed therein, and a through hole elongated in the left-right direction. A guide hole 332b is formed through the lower bottom portion to guide the sliding displacement of the guided portion 362c of the state switching device 360, and a plurality of female screw portions formed so that a fastening screw inserted through the lower member 380 can be screwed therein. A fastening part 332c and a columnar fastening part 332d having a female threaded portion at the upper end into which a fastening screw inserted through the insertion tube portion 315 of the upper member 310 can be screwed are provided.

The front frame-shaped part 333 is subjected to light diffusion processing on the inside of the frame and the front and back surfaces of the lower base, so that the visibility of the back side of the front frame-shaped part 333 is reduced. The front frame-shaped portion 333 is formed in a substantially square frame shape when viewed from above, and an insertion hole 333a formed as a spot facing hole through which a fastening screw to be screwed into the fastening portion 316 of the upper member 310 can be inserted. Prepare.

The first flow path forming part 334, the second flow path forming part 335, and the third flow path forming part 336 are parts that constitute the flow-down path of the sphere, and are arranged so that the flow-down direction of the sphere, the inclination angle, etc. are different. designed, but more on that later.

An open portion 335a, which is opened on the front side at the connecting position between the second flow path forming portion 335 and the third flow path forming portion 336, allows the symmetrical projecting portion 161f (see FIG. 12) of the variable winning device 65 to enter. It is a gap for That is, the symmetrical protruding portion 161f is arranged to enter the inside of the flow channel through the opening portion 335a so as to be able to come into contact with the balls flowing down the sorting device 300. As shown in FIG.

The ejection holes 337 are partitioned by a partition plate portion 338, and are formed in a pair of right and left holes, and are formed in a size that allows balls to be ejected through at least two paths. That is, it is configured with a lateral length that is at least twice the diameter of the sphere. In this embodiment, since a plurality of detection sensors SE1 are arranged side by side in the lower member 380 arranged below the discharge hole 337, the discharge hole 337 is arranged in accordance with the arrangement of the ball through holes of the detection sensors SE1. It is sufficient to design the shape of

The partition plate portion 338 functions as a guide portion that guides the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 in addition to the function of partitioning the third flow path forming portion 336 as described above, the details of which will be described later. The alignment projecting portion 339 is fitted with the projecting portion 383a of the lower member 380, and is a portion for avoiding positional deviation between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380, the details of which will be described later.

The substrate 350 is formed in an inverted T shape in which the lower portion 353 is longer in the left and right direction than the upper portion 352 , and a recess for alignment is provided in the lower end portion on the left end side of the lower portion 353 . A portion 354 is provided.

The concave portion 354 is positioned in the left-right direction by engaging with a portion corresponding to the internal shape of the intermediate member 330 , and the elongated lower portion 353 is attached to the rear frame portion 332 of the intermediate member 330 in the front-rear direction. Positioning in the front-rear direction is performed by being supported so as to be sandwiched between the upper member 310, and the upper part 352 is accommodated in the accommodation recess 320 of the upper member 310, thereby preventing the upper part 352 from falling off upward and fixing the arrangement. The details will be described later along with the intention of the arrangement of the light emitting means 351 .

The state switching device 360 is a device housed in the rear frame portion 332 of the intermediate member 330, and includes an electromagnetic solenoid 361 and a tip end of a plunger supported by the electromagnetic solenoid 361 so as to be linearly displaced in the horizontal direction. and a rotating portion 363 that is rotatably supported by being inserted into the left fastened portion 332d and that rotates as the sliding portion 362 slides. , provided.

The slide portion 362 includes a recessed portion 362a that is recessed so as to receive the disk portion 361a at the tip of the plunger of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 from above, a protruding portion 362b that protrudes rightward from the right side, and a lower side. and a guided portion 362c protruding downward from the front-rear central portion of the guide portion 362c and formed with an elongated oval cross section in the left-right direction.

Since the disk portion 361a supports the slide portion 362 from above from the direction in which the recessed portion 362a is formed, it is possible to prevent the slide portion 362 from falling upward. Therefore, the arrangement of the slide portion 362 can be maintained between the disc portion 361a and the lower bottom portion of the intermediate member 330 without fixing the slide portion 362 to the disc portion 361a with an adhesive or the like.

The guided portion 362c is inserted through the guide hole 332b of the intermediate member 330 to prevent the displacement direction of the slide portion 362 from being deviated from the horizontal direction. In particular, in the present embodiment, since it is elongated in the horizontal direction, it is possible to maintain the posture of the sliding portion 362 by engaging the guided portion 362c and the guide hole 332b. The cross-sectional shape of the guided portion 362c is not necessarily limited to this, and may be circular or rectangular, for example.

The rotating portion 363 is formed in a substantially L shape when viewed from the top, and is formed in a cylindrical shape elongated in the vertical direction at the L-shaped connecting portion, and has a through hole of a size that allows the fastened portion 332d of the middle member 330 to be inserted thereinto. A support cylindrical portion 363a having a hole, an upper cylindrical portion 363b projecting upward from the end of the L-shaped short side and inserted into a through-hole of the overhanging portion 362b, and a long side of the L-shaped portion. A lower cylindrical portion 363c projecting downward from the side tip portion and inserted into the concave portion 378 of the slide displacement member 370 is provided.

With the above-described configuration, the rotating portion 363 is configured to be rotatable around the support cylinder portion 363a as a central axis. This displacement of the rotating portion 363 is caused by a change in the state of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 . That is, when the plunger is slid and the slide portion 362 is displaced in the left-right direction by energizing the electromagnetic solenoid 361, the upper cylindrical portion 363b inserted through the through hole of the projecting portion 362b is displaced. The lower cylindrical portion 363c is displaced, and as a result, the slide displacement member 370 is displaced.

The slide displacement member 370 is supported so as to be slidably displaced in the front-rear direction between the upper and lower positions of the intermediate member 330 and the lower member 380. A thin plate portion 371 supported by being sandwiched from above and below by 380, a pair of left and right upper projecting portions 376 projecting upward from the thin plate portion 371, and a left and right center on the rear side of the upper projecting portion 376. and a recessed portion 378 which is recessed at the projecting end portion of the projecting portion projecting upward at the portion and formed so as to receive the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 .

The thin plate portion 371 has a pair of left and right supported holes 371a penetrating through the rear half portion, and the front side end portion of the left and right central portion, and the thin plate portion 371 is elongated in the front-rear direction with a width shorter than the arrangement interval of the upper projecting portion 376. A recessed portion 372 that is recessed, a pair of lower protruded streaks 373 protruding downward in the shape of a protruding line along the edge of the recessed portion 372, and projections along the left and right edges of the rear half portion. A plurality of upper and lower ridges 374 protruding in both vertical and vertical directions in a strip shape, and a columnar protrusion 375 protruding downward from the rear end portion and inserted into the guide long hole 386 of the lower member 380. Prepare.

The lower ridge portion 373 and the upper and lower ridge portions 374 are portions that are assumed to face and slide on the intermediate member 330 or the lower member 380 arranged on the upper and lower sides. It is a ridge for reducing the contact area between the member 330 and the lower member 380 . Since the displacement resistance of the slide displacement member 370 can be reduced by reducing the contact area, it is possible to prevent the displacement speed of the slide displacement member 370 from slowing down.

The upper projecting portion 376 is a substantially trapezoidal columnar portion when viewed from the front, and is arranged so as to pass through the placement through hole 332 a and enter above the lower bottom portion of the rear frame portion 332 . The width of the left and right inner gaps of the upper projecting portion 376 is designed to be slightly longer than the left and right thickness of the partition plate portion 338 of the intermediate member 330 . With this configuration, the partition plate portion 338 can guide the displacement of the upper projecting portion 376 .

In other words, the upper protruding portion 376 is arranged so as to sandwich the partition plate portion 338 in the gap on the left and right inner sides, and is configured to be prevented from being displaced in the left-right direction by coming into contact with the partition plate portion 338 . As a result, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be properly guided, and the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370 can be maintained in the front-rear direction.

The recessed portion 378 is formed as an elongated hole in the left-right direction so as to correspond to the displacement of the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 that is required to generate the front-rear displacement of the slide displacement member 370. be.

The protruding portion in which the recessed portion 378 is formed is configured to enter above the lower bottom portion of the rear frame portion 332 through the placement through hole 332a, thereby forming a lower cylindrical portion of the rotating portion 363. The portion 363c can be easily inserted into the recessed portion 378. As shown in FIG.

Thus, the shape of the placement through-hole 332a is a shape that includes the entire range in which the upper protruding portion 376 to be inserted and the protruding portion in which the recessed portion 378 is formed are arranged. Designed as a through hole.

The lower member 380 includes the above-described insertion hole 381, a plate-like portion 382 formed in a thin plate shape elongated in the left and right direction, and a plurality of (four in this embodiment) detection sensors below the plate-like portion 382. A sensor holding frame portion 389 formed in a frame shape that allows the SE1 to be arranged side by side.

The sensor holding frame portion 389 has a frame shape in which the rear side surface into which the detection sensor SE1 is inserted and the upper and lower side surfaces through which the ball passes through the through hole of the detection sensor SE1 are opened, and other portions are closed. formed in

The plate-like portion 382 has a through-hole formed at a position that matches the through-hole of the detection sensor SE1 in the same way as the sensor-holding frame portion 389 has through-holes in the vertical direction. A ridge portion 383 projecting upward in the shape of an elongated ridge in the front-rear direction at an intermediate position of SE1, and a pair of projections projecting from the front end portion of the ridge portion 383 to the left and right. A set portion 383a, a pair of guide projecting portions 384 projecting at a position behind the projecting portion 383 and capable of being inserted into the supported hole 371a of the slide displacement member 370, and the guide projecting portions 384. A pair of guide ridges 385 formed as long ridges in the front-rear direction at both positions on the left and right outer sides of the guide ridges, and a long hole-shaped guide long hole 386 extending on the same straight line as the ridge portion 383 in a top view. , a curved surface portion 387 formed in a curved surface shape that protrudes rearward on the front side surface, and an insertion hole 388 that is formed so that a fastening screw that is screwed into the fastening portion 332c of the intermediate member 330 can be inserted therethrough. .

The ridge portion 383 is formed as a ridge having a lateral thickness slightly shorter than the lateral gap width of the recessed portion 372 of the slide displacement member 370. placed. That is, the ridge portion 383 functions as a guide portion that guides the longitudinal displacement of the slide displacement member 370 .

The projecting portion 383 a is designed such that the left and right inner end portions thereof are positioned at the same positions as the left and right outer end portions of the alignment projecting portion 339 of the intermediate member 330 . That is, the left and right outer ends of the alignment protrusions 339 are fitted to the left and right inner ends of the pair of protrusions 383a, so that the middle member 330 is aligned with the lower member 380 as a reference. Directions can be positioned appropriately. At the same time, the rear side surface of the frame front portion of the lower member 380 (the portion that connects the protrusion 383 and the projecting portion 383a on the front end side) is brought into contact with the front side surface of the alignment projecting portion 339, thereby The position of the intermediate member 330 in the front-rear direction with reference to the member 380 can be determined appropriately.

Accordingly, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of positional deviation between the third flow path forming portion 336 as a structure of the intermediate member 330 and the detection sensor SE1 as a structure of the lower member 380 .

The guide projecting portion 384 is formed in a left-right long elliptical shape, is inserted into the supported hole 371 a of the slide displacement member 370 , and limits the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 . That is, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is limited to the displacement within the range where the guide projecting portion 384 is arranged inside the supported hole 371a.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the slide displacement member 370 from colliding with the ridge portion 383, so that, for example, the end of displacement in the forward direction is determined at the position where the slide displacement member 370 collides with the ridge portion 383. Compared to the configuration, the durability of the protrusion 383 can be improved. Therefore, the guiding effect of the protrusion 383 can be maintained for a long time.

Even if the guide projecting portion 384 is damaged, it does not immediately affect the operation of the slide displacement member 370 , but functions as a portion for preventing collision with the projecting portion 383 . For this reason, normally, the design is made with a strength that can be used for a set period of time (for example, three years) in a state where the guide protrusion 384 is not damaged. The strength of the guide projecting portion 384 and the projecting portion 383 may be designed in anticipation of use in a state where the sliding displacement member 370 collides. That is, the life of the guide projecting portion 384 may be set to less than a set period (for example, two years), and the strength of the projecting portion 383 may be used for the rest of the period. In this case, the degree of freedom in setting the resin material used for the lower member 380 and the degree of freedom in shape can be improved.

The guide projection 385 is arranged with a gap width slightly longer than the horizontal width of the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370 so that the thin plate portion 371 can be arranged in the gap. The displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is limited to the displacement on the left and right inner sides of the guide ridges 385 . As a result, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 in the front-rear direction can be caused with a small displacement in the left-right direction.

The guide long hole 386 is a long hole formed with a lateral width that allows the cylindrical protrusion 375 of the slide displacement member 370 to be inserted. The direction of displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is restricted in the front-rear direction by guiding the cylindrical protrusion 375 to the guide elongated hole 386 .

The curved surface portion 387 is a contact surface for guiding the flow of the sphere that flows below the intermediate member 330 . In this embodiment, the flow of the ball entering the out hole 71 is guided, but the details will be described later.

A fastening screw is inserted through the insertion hole 388 with the screw head directed downward. As a result, it is possible to avoid conspicuous visibility of the fastening screw. Further, the insertion holes 388 are arranged on the left and right outside and on the rear side of the range in which the plurality of detection sensors SE1 are arranged. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 388 blocks the view of the ball passing through the through hole of the detection sensor SE1 or near the detection sensor SE1.

As described above, the slide displacement member 370 has a plurality of portions, that is, the guide protrusion 385 for the thin plate portion 371, the guide protrusion 384 for the supported hole 371a, and the concave portion 372 and the lower protrusion 373. It is guided by the projection 383 , the guide elongated hole 386 for the cylindrical projection 375 , the partition plate 338 for the upper projection 376 , and the like, and is displaced in the front-rear direction. As a result, since the load during guidance can be distributed to a plurality of positions, it is possible to avoid the load from being applied locally, and to avoid damage to the slide displacement member 370 and the guide portion that guides the slide displacement member 370 . can be done.

As can be seen from this, the slide displacement member 370 is not guided by a single member, but is guided by a plurality of members including at least the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 . That is, the slide displacement member 370 has at least a pair of upper projecting portions 376 guided by the partition plate portion 338 of the intermediate member 330 and a recessed portion 372 guided by the projecting portion 383 of the lower member 380 .

Therefore, if the assembly between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 is poor and the dislocation is large, the movement of the slide displacement member 370 is hindered. Here, the intermediate member 330 and the lower member 380 are portions that continuously form a flow-down path of the sphere, and it is preferable to keep the displacement small. It is possible to ensure that the misalignment is small.

In other words, if the displacement of the lower member 380 with respect to the middle member 330 becomes excessively large, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is not performed satisfactorily. , the relative placement of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 may be defective and an error notification may be performed.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being continued while the relative arrangement of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 is in an unsatisfactory state.

Next, details of the internal structure of the sorting device 300 will be described. In addition, here, the configuration related to the flow of the ball inside the sorting device 300 and the configuration of entering the flow-down path side of the ball will be mainly described.

15 is a front view of the receiving member 163 and the sorting device 300, FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 taken along line XVI-XVI in FIG. 15, and FIG. 15 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 along line XVII-XVII of FIG. 15, and FIG. 18 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and sorting device 300 along line XVIII-XVIII of FIG.

15 to 18, the opening/closing plate 65b is shown in the closed state, and the slide displacement member 370 is shown in the front position. First, the details of the flow path of the balls flowing down inside the sorting device 300 will be described.

A ball that lands on the opening/closing plate 65b when the opening/closing plate 65b is in the open state (see FIG. 6(b)) rolls on the lower surface portion 163a of the receiving member 163 and is guided to the ball passage hole 163b. The ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 163 b passes through the opening 312 of the upper member 310 and is guided to the first flow path forming portion 334 of the intermediate member 330 . The first flow path forming part 334, the following second flow path forming part 335, and the following third flow path forming part 336 are all configured as inclined flow paths that slope downward, and are connected to each other. is formed in a spiral shape forming an angle of 90 degrees when viewed from above.

That is, the first flow path forming part 334 is formed as an inclined flow path that allows the ball to flow down to the front side in the front-rear direction, and the second flow path forming part 335 is based on the flowing direction of the ball flowing down the first flow path forming part 334. The third flow passage forming portion 336 is formed as an inclined flow passage that rotates 90 degrees and allows the ball to flow down in the left and right direction. It is formed as an inclined flow path that causes the ball to flow down to the back side in the front-rear direction rotated 90 degrees in the direction.

In this way, by forming the flow-down path in a spiral shape with a right angle of curvature, it is possible to reduce the extent to which the flow-down speed of the spheres increases toward the downstream side. More specifically, the sphere flowing down the first flow path forming part 334 accelerates toward the front side, and the flow direction in the following second flow path forming part 335 does not have a longitudinal component, so the first flow path It is possible to realize a flow-down mode in which the influence of the acceleration in the component 334 is suppressed. Furthermore, in the third flow passage forming portion 336 following the second flow passage forming portion 335, the flow is directed rearward in the direction opposite to the acceleration direction in the first flow pass forming portion 334, so the acceleration in the front-rear direction is received. It is possible to realize a flow-down mode with reduced influence.

Therefore, for example, it is possible to easily avoid an excessive flow speed of the ball on the downstream side, unlike the flow down mode in which the ball flows down in the same direction (for example, leftward) all the time. In other words, the flow speed of the ball can be made uniform throughout the flow path, the player's attention to the ball can be maintained at a high level, and the situation in which the player loses sight of the ball can be easily avoided. It has the effect of being able to

Further, for example, it is possible not to form the second flow path forming part 335, but forming the second flow path forming part 335 makes it easier to prevent clogging of balls and reverse flow. When the second flow path forming part 335 is not formed (when the left-right direction length of the second flow path forming part 335 is 0), that is, when the first flow path forming part 334 and the third flow path forming part 336 are When the spheres are connected, it is necessary to reverse the flowing direction of the ball from the front side flow to the rear flow by 180 degrees at the connection point. In this case, the switching angle of the ball's flow direction is large, and in particular, it is necessary to reverse the velocity direction back and forth. may occur.

On the other hand, if the switching angle of the flow direction is 90 degrees or less as in this embodiment (90 degrees in this embodiment), the speed direction of the ball does not reverse, so the ball flows smoothly. This makes it easier to avoid stagnation, clogging, and backflow of the spheres.

The shape of the flow path at the connecting ends of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 will be described. At the connection end between the second flow path forming part 335 and the third flow path forming part 336, the above-described symmetrical projecting part 161f is arranged as a part that guides the downflow of the ball in a manner that bends the downflow direction of the ball. be done.

The symmetrical protruding portion 161f is formed so that the portion arranged downstream of the sphere is more receded from the path of the sphere than the portion arranged upstream. For example, the lateral width of the symmetrical projecting portion 161f arranged to face is formed longer than the lateral width of the partition plate portion 338 arranged adjacent to it. Further, the rear end portions of the left and right ends of the symmetrical protruding portions 161f arranged to face each other are arranged closer to the front side than the flow channel side surfaces of the second flow channel forming portion 335 near the open portion 335a (FIG. 17). reference).

As a result, when the ball collides with the symmetrical protruding portion 161f, it is possible to prevent the ball from being excessively decelerated or from backflowing.

At the connection end between the second flow passage forming portion 335 and the first flow passage forming portion 334, the side wall portions 334a curved at the front left and right ends of the intermediate member 330 bend the flowing direction of the ball. It is formed as a part that guides the flow of the sphere in a manner.

In addition, at the upstream end of the first flow path forming part 334, a curved surface shape (see FIG. 16) that lowers toward the front side protrudes upward from the downstream surface of the first flow path forming part 334. A curved protrusion 334b is formed as a portion that guides the flow of the ball in a manner that bends the flow-down direction of the ball.

That is, the sphere that has passed through the opening 312 rolls on the curved projection 334b, flows down the first flow passage forming portion 334, and contacts the side wall portion 334a while flowing down, thereby switching the flow direction to the second flow path. Flowing down the flow path forming part 335 and contacting the symmetrical projecting part 161 f while flowing down, the flow direction is switched, the flow flow down the third flow path forming part 336 , and reaches the discharge hole 337 .

The side wall portion 334a is formed in a shape that can be engaged with and aligned with the projecting support portion 161d of the member 161 to be fixed. That is, the side wall portion 334a is supported so as to be sandwiched between the left and right protruding support portions 161d, and positional deviation in the left-right direction is regulated, thereby aligning the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 in the left-right direction. It can be performed.

The longitudinal inclination angles and length ratios of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 will be described. With respect to the inclination angle in the longitudinal direction, the first flow path forming part 334 has an inclination angle of about 7 degrees with respect to the horizontal, the second flow path forming part 335 has an inclination angle of about 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal, and the third flow path forming part 335 has an inclination angle of about 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal. The flow passage forming portion 336 has an inclination angle of about 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal. That is, the inclination angle is set to the maximum in the first flow path forming part 334, and is set to a slightly loose common inclination angle in the second flow path forming part 335 and the third flow path forming part 336. FIG.

Regarding the length, each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 has a front frame-shaped portion 333 formed in a square outer shape when viewed from above, which is the inner side surface, and has the same center as the center of the square formed by the front frame-shaped portion 333. It is formed to have a large square with outer sides. Here, in the present embodiment, the length of one side of the front frame portion 333 is 21 mm, and the length of one side of the large square is 45 mm. It is formed.

For this reason, the total clearance between both sides of the sphere is set to 1 mm for the commonly used sphere with a diameter of 11 mm. . Considering that the distance between the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) is defined to be about 19 mm, it can be said that this is a small clearance, and the misalignment of the falling ball can be prevented. can be suppressed.

Among the portions constituting the ends of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 arranged in a square surrounding the square front frame portion 333, the upstream end portion of the first flow path forming portion 334 is Since only the curved protrusions 334b that constitute the components are arranged inside (on the front side) the apexes of the square, the first flow path forming part 334 is formed into the second flow path forming part 335 and the third flow path forming part 336. short in comparison.

In terms of actual measurement values in top view, the flow paths formed by the second flow path forming part 335 and the third flow path forming part 336 have substantially the same length (33 mm between the centers of the spheres), and the length is It is approximately 1.5 times the length of the flow path formed by the first flow path forming member 334 (22 mm between the centers of the spheres).

It can be explained from the ratio of the longitudinal direction inclination angle and length of each of the flow passage forming portions 334 to 336 that the time required for the sphere to pass through each of the flow passage forming portions 334 to 336 is not constant. That is, the time to pass through the first flow path forming part 334 with the maximum inclination angle and the shortest flow path length is the second flow path formation part 335 with a looser inclination angle and 1.5 times the path length. and shorter than the time to pass through the third flow passage forming portion 336 .

In this embodiment, with this configuration, when passing through the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1, the arrangement shifts to the rear side, and a part of the detection sensor SE1 is hidden by the non-transmissive resin portion. The ball can be displaced to the front side at an early stage from the state in which the visibility of the ball is poor in , and the state can be switched to a state close to the player and in which the visibility of the ball is high. This makes it easier to prevent the player from losing sight of the ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 163b.

Furthermore, in a state where the visibility of the ball is high, by slowing down the flow speed of the ball, the player does not need to quickly move the line of sight toward the ball, and the game burden on the player who pays attention to the ball (movement of the eyeball) is reduced. eye fatigue) can be reduced.

When focusing on the sphere flowing down the second flow path forming part 335 and the third flow path forming part 336 with high visibility in this way, the ball flows down in the left-right direction along the second flow path forming part 335. Compared to the case in which the ball flows down in the front-rear direction along the third flow passage forming portion 336, the amount of displacement of the ball in the front view is smaller, so the game burden on the player who pays attention to the ball is reduced. , can be minimized when focusing on the sphere flowing down the third channel forming portion 336 .

In other words, since the lengths and inclination angles are equivalent, the time required for the sphere to pass through the second flow passage forming portion 335 and the time required for the sphere to pass through the third flow passage forming portion 336 are equivalent, but the amount of displacement of the sphere when viewed from the front is different. A ball flowing down the second flow passage forming part 335 is slower than a ball flowing down.

The flow path of the ball changes only at the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 where the game load is minimized and it is easy to draw attention to the ball. is common in Therefore, since the player's line of sight tends to be naturally concentrated on the rear end of the third flow path forming portion 336, the game burden on the player who concentrates the line of sight in this manner can be effectively reduced.

In addition, in order to secure the field of vision of the player who pays attention to the rear end of the third flow passage forming portion 336, an opening portion 335a is formed on the front side surface of the second flow passage forming portion 335 in this embodiment. (See FIG. 17), it is possible to avoid obstruction of the line of sight toward the third flow passage forming portion 336 by the meat portion of the second flow passage forming portion 335 .

Furthermore, the symmetrical protruding portion 161f disposed inside the open portion 335a is formed only in a portion necessary for abutting and guiding the falling ball, and the formation of shaped portions on the upper and lower sides thereof is omitted. be done. In other words, the symmetrical protruding portion 161f is formed as a vertically thin plate-like portion, and a space is secured on the upper and lower sides thereof (see FIG. 18). Therefore, compared to the case where the symmetrical projecting portion 161f is formed with a thickness in the vertical direction, the possibility that the line of sight toward the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 is obstructed by the symmetrical projecting portion 161f is reduced. It can be made low and the visibility can be improved.

In addition, it is configured such that the spheres deviating from the opening/closing plate 65b and directed toward the out port 71 gather toward the viewing side centering on the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 (see FIG. 5). In particular, in the present embodiment, a ball that enters the out port 71 flows down below the third flow path forming portion 336, contacts the curved surface portion 387 of the lower member 380, and is discharged downward.

Therefore, assuming that the ball flowing down the third flow passage forming portion 336 is viewed obliquely from the upper front side, the ball entering the out port 71 flows down the inner side of the third flow passage forming portion 336 . Therefore, the ball flowing down the third flow path forming part 336 and the ball entering the out port 71 are covered in the front and rear sides, so that the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 is observed. The total number of balls that enter the field of view increases.

In other words, regardless of whether the ball enters the specific winning port 65a and flows down the third flow path forming part 336 or the ball does not enter the specific winning port 65a but enters the out port 71, the ball enters the field of view focusing on the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 .

Therefore, irrespective of the ease with which the ball is directed to the specific winning opening 65a, that is, the structure of the nail implanted in the base plate 60 (the quality of the so-called gauge), most of the shot balls (other winning openings 63, 64, 140 (balls other than the balls that have entered the ball) gather and the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 (the portion where the player's attention is focused) is arranged at the position covered in the front-rear direction. As a result, the line of sight can be efficiently guided to the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 by the falling ball.

As described above, the visibility at the position closer to the front side has been improved. In addition, in the present embodiment, the visibility at the position closer to the back side is It is configured to lower the

For example, the inner surface of the front frame portion 333 of the intermediate member 330 is formed with a light diffusing processed surface 333b having a prism-like shape for producing light diffusing action. In FIG. 17, the saw-toothed portion is the light diffusion processing surface 333b, which is formed over substantially the entire inner circumference of the inner surface and over the top and bottom.

When the effect of light diffusion occurs, the light is diffused in multiple directions, and the entire surface is visible as if it is shining. and the visibility on the far side becomes poor. According to the present embodiment, the visibility is poor when light is emitted from the light emitting means 351 of the substrate 350, and conversely, when the light is not emitted, the visibility is at least lower than that when light is emitted. visibility can be improved.

On the other hand, if there is a shielding object between the light and the shielding object, the shadow of the shielding object will be visually recognized as a black dot, making it easier to determine its position.

A processed surface similar to the light diffusion processed surface 333b is also formed in other portions. For example, there are a light diffusion processed surface 319a formed on the back surface of the left and right outer protrusions 319, and a light diffusion processed surface 332e formed on the back surface of the frame front portion of the rear frame portion 332 (FIG. 17). reference).

The processed surface formed in the same shape is a plate-like portion extending to the rear side of the second upper surface portion 314b of the upper member 310, and is attached to the front frame-like portion 333 of the intermediate member 330 in the assembled state. Examples include a light diffusion processing surface 314c formed on the upper surface side of the lid portion, and a light diffusion processing surface 340 formed over the entire lower surface of the portion on the front side of the rear frame portion 332 of the intermediate member 330. be done.

With these configurations, in the present embodiment, light diffusion is provided on the back side, the bottom side, the inner side of the vortex, and the upper side of the vortex of the flow path formed in a spiral shape from each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336, respectively. A processed surface is formed to achieve the effect of changing visibility due to light irradiation.

In a state where the light diffusion processing surface is not irradiated with light, the direction is changed in the left-right direction from the third flow path forming part 336 with the player's eyes focused on the rear end portion of the third flow path forming part 336 from the front side. The sphere can be hidden by the front side frame-shaped part 333 to make it difficult to see immediately.

Furthermore, let's look at the ball after it has passed the detection sensor SE1 held by the sensor holding frame 389 and fallen from the player's line of sight, who visually recognizes the ball flowing down the third flow path forming part 336 obliquely from above. Even so, since the line of sight passes through the light diffusion processed surface 340, it becomes difficult to identify the sphere after it has passed through the detection sensor SE1 and fallen by irradiating the light diffusion processed surface 340 with light. .

In this embodiment, as will be described later, control is performed so that the profit obtained by the player changes depending on how the ball flows down the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 .

Therefore, it is necessary to confirm the behavior of the ball at the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 in order to grasp how the ball flows down from the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336. , the attention to the rear end portion of the third flow passage forming portion 336 can be further improved.

On the other hand, if light is emitted from the light emitting means 351, a state in which the shadow of the sphere is easily visible as a black dot can be configured. In this manner, by switching the presence or absence of light irradiation depending on the situation, the visibility of the sphere can be switched between good and bad. In addition, depending on whether or not the sphere is arranged on the front side of the black point, it is possible to construct a situation in which the black point is hidden by the sphere and a situation in which the black point is visible without being hidden by the sphere.

As described above, the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 are formed in the vicinity of the respective flow path forming portions 334 to 336. It is formed on the side surface that does not come into contact with the ball flowing down the channel.

As a result, the light diffusion processing surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 can be prevented from being scraped by contact with the spheres, so the shapes of the light diffusion processing surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 can be maintained for a long period of time. can be used, and the effect of light diffusion can be maintained.

Furthermore, by contacting the light diffusing surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 with the spheres, it is possible to prevent the spheres from being hindered from flowing down or being decelerated. In addition, by ensuring the visibility inside the flow path, the visibility of the sphere is reduced even while the sphere is flowing down the flow path formed by the flow path forming parts 334 to 336. can be avoided.

It should be noted that the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 may be intentionally formed on the channel side. In this case, depending on the size of the prism, it is possible to produce the effect of diffusing the light and the effect of decelerating the sphere by colliding with it.

In the front frame portion 333 of the intermediate member 330, the formation of the light diffusion processing surface 333b is omitted at the fastening position with the fastening portion 316 due to the difficulty of processing, and high visibility is maintained without countermeasures. there is a possibility. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the visibility is reduced by the fastening screws.

That is, by utilizing the fact that the fastening screw that is screwed into the fastening portion 316 is made of metal and is non-permeable, it is possible to hide the portion where it is difficult to form the light diffusion processed surface 333b. When the front frame portion 333 is irradiated with light, the light diffusion processed surface 333b shines brilliantly, and in the portion where the light diffusion processed surface 333b is omitted, the fastening screw reflects the light and shines, so that the light is diffused. It is possible to reduce the visibility of the back side of the front frame-shaped portion 333 in the line of sight from the front side, including the portion where the formation of the processed surface 333b is omitted.

The light diffusion processing surface 332e of the intermediate member 330 is formed on the back side of each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336. The purpose of this is to make the substrate 350 disposed on the back side in addition to shining brilliantly. and function as a blindfold for the state switching device 360 . In particular, since the state switching device 360 is arranged on the back side of the substrate 350 (see FIG. 17), the substrate 350 serves as a blindfold, making it easy to prevent the state switching device 360 from being visually recognized by the player.

The substrate 350 is accommodated in a manner supported by the rear frame portion 332 of the intermediate member 330, but is arranged with a gap from the lower bottom portion of the rear frame portion 332 in the left-right central portion, and slides into the gap. A displacement member 370 is arranged (see FIG. 18). That is, the substrate 350 is arranged at a position sandwiching the slide displacement member 370 with the lower bottom portion of the rear frame portion 332 .

More specifically, the substrate 350 is supported such that the lower portion 353 is sandwiched between the rear frame portions 332 at the left and right ends (see FIG. 17). At this support point, the lower bottom portion of the rear frame-shaped portion 332 is provided with a thick portion 332f (see FIG. 16). A slide displacement member 370 can be arranged in the gap (see FIG. 18).

As shown in FIG. 18, the upper portion 352 of the substrate 350 enters the inside of the housing recess 320 of the upper member 310 and faces the light diffusion processing surface 164f formed on the interposed member 164 in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, when light is emitted from the light emitting means 351 arranged on the upper part 352, the light diffusion processing surface 164f of the intervening member 164 can produce a brilliant effect. The visibility of the range of can be reduced.

Here, the light emitting means 351 arranged in the upper part 352 irradiates light near the lower end of the light diffusion processed surface 164f. Since it is formed in the entire vertical direction, the light emitted from the light emitting means 351 is visually recognized as light with a wide vertical width. Therefore, from the player's eye level, it is possible to make it appear as if the specific winning hole 65a is illuminated above and below.

In addition, in the field of view from the front side, the light diffusion processing surface 164f is arranged at the left-right center side position of the receiving member 163, but even if it is arranged on the back side of the detection sensor SE1, the detection sensor SE1 hinders the field of view and is good. Therefore, sufficient effects can be obtained as long as they are formed in at least the arrangement gap between the pair of detection sensors SE1.

The lower side portion 353 of the substrate 350 is arranged so as to irradiate the light toward the seal member 313 and the portion disposed therebelow where the ball flows down, the details of which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20, switching of the flow-down path of the ball that has passed through the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 and its significance will be described. 19 and 20, FIG. 15 to FIG. 18 will be referred to as needed.

19 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 along the line XVII-XVII of FIG. 15, and FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 along the line XVIII-XVIII of FIG. It is a diagram. 19 and 20, when shown, the opening/closing plate 65b is shown in the closed state, and the slide displacement member 370 is shown in the rear position.

Here, the four left and right detection sensors SE1 supported by the sensor holding frame portion 389, the flow of the ball to each detection sensor SE1, and the function of each detection sensor SE1 will be described.

Two sets of the four detection sensors SE1 are arranged bilaterally symmetrically, and include a probability variation detection sensor SE11 and a normal detection sensor SE12 having a common function. The variable probability detection sensor SE11 is arranged inside in the left-right direction, and the normal detection sensor SE12 is arranged outside in the left-right direction.

The functions of these four detection sensors SE1 are different from those of the detection sensors SE1 arranged behind the opening/closing plate 65b. The detection sensor SE1 arranged behind the opening/closing plate 65b is an entering ball sensor that causes the payout of prize balls. That is, when it is detected that a ball that has entered the specific winning hole 65a has entered the detection sensor SE1 behind it, a predetermined number of prize balls (in this embodiment, 10 balls per detection of one ball) are paid out. It is paid out to the player side by the control device 111 (see FIG. 4).

On the other hand, the detection sensor SE1 supported by the sensor holding frame 389 is not a detection sensor that causes the payout of prize balls, but a detection sensor that changes the game state after the jackpot game ends by detecting the entering ball. Function.

In addition, as will be described later, in the present embodiment, the detection sensor SE1 arranged in the sensor holding frame portion 389 is used for switching whether or not to shift to the variable probability state, but it is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, the detection sensor SE1 may function as a ball entry sensor for switching whether or not the next big win is to be won.

When the slide displacement member 370 is arranged in the front position (see FIGS. 17 and 18), the slide displacement member 370 is arranged so that the thin plate portion 371 covers the upper side of the probability variation detection sensor SE11, and the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 is prevented from passing through. Therefore, the ball passing through the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 is guided to the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12 so as to be guided by the upper projecting portion 376 of the slide displacement member.

Since the front side surface 376a of the upper projecting portion 376 facing the ball is formed in an arcuate shape with the channel side concave, the flowing ball can smoothly flow toward the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12. can be done.

On the other hand, when the slide displacement member 370 is arranged in the rear position (see FIGS. 19 and 20), the slide displacement member 370 retracts backward from above the probability variation detection sensor SE11, and the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11. Ball passage is allowed.

That is, which detection sensor SE1 the ball passes through corresponds to the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 (front position or rear position). Then, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through hole of the variable probability detection sensor SE11 during the big winning game, the game state after the big winning game is controlled to be the variable probability state. In other words, when the ball is not detected to have passed through the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11, and only passes through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12, the game state after the jackpot game is changed to the normal state (or time saving state ).

Here, in the present embodiment, as the types of jackpots, variable probability jackpots and normal jackpots are provided as described above. In order to realize this, in the present embodiment, different operation patterns are prepared as operation patterns of the slide displacement member 370 for each jackpot type.

In other words, the slide displacement member 370 is controlled to operate in an operation pattern that makes it easy for the ball to pass through the through hole of the variable probability detection sensor SE11 in the case of a variable probability big hit, and in the case of a normal jackpot, the ball moves. Although it is controlled to operate in an operation pattern such that it is difficult to pass through the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and easy to pass through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12, the details of the control will be described later.

Thus, the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 is directly related to the profit that the player can obtain, and the arrangement naturally attracts the player's attention. On the other hand, more than a few fraudulent acts of illegally switching the disposition of the slide displacement member 370 have been discovered, and measures against this are considered important.

As a premise, the disposition of the slide displacement member 370 is switched depending on whether or not the electromagnetic solenoid 361 of the state switching device 360 is energized. That is, when the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is not energized, the plunger of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 and the slide portion 362 are arranged on the right side by an urging spring (not shown), and the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 is positioned on the front side. By being placed on the side, the slide displacement member 370 is maintained in the front position.

On the other hand, when the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is energized, the plunger of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 and the slide portion 362 are moved to the left by the electromagnetic force, and the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 (see FIG. 13, the concave portion of the slide displacement member 370). The slide displacement member 370 is maintained at the rear side position by displacing the portion inserted into the installation portion 378 toward the rear side. This is the normal operation mode, and the energization of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 and the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 correspond one-to-one.

A person who commits the above-mentioned fraudulent act inserts a thin metal wire such as a piano wire into the sorting device 300 through the ball delivery opening, the gap between the outer frame 11 and the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1), etc. By pressing the thin metal wire against the slide displacement member 370 and pushing the slide displacement member 370 toward the back side, there is a possibility of illegally creating a state in which the ball can enter the variable probability detection sensor SE11. be.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the slide displacement member 370 is arranged such that the thin plate portion 371 is positioned below the lower bottom portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 (see FIG. 18). When the thin metal wire is passed through the path forming portion 336 and pressed against the slide displacement member 370 , it is difficult to press against the front end portion of the thin plate portion 371 , and the upper projecting portion 376 is pressed against it. The front side surface 376a of the upper protruding portion 376 has a curved surface shape that relieves the load to the left and right outer sides as described above, so that even if a fine metal wire is pressed against the front surface 376a, the load can be relieved to the left and right outer sides. This makes it easier to avoid a situation in which the slide displacement member 370 is improperly displaced to the rear position.

In addition to the fact that the path leading to the slide displacement member 370 is not straight but spirally wound, the slide displacement member 370 itself is arranged farther from the front side surface of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) toward the rear side. Since it is separated (about 10 cm), it can be difficult for the thin metal wire to reach the slide displacement member 370 in the first place.

These configurations also have the effect of improving the degree of freedom in designing the configuration of the state switching device 360 . That is, conventionally, in many cases, the disposition of the slide displacement member 370 is maintained by mechanical devising (displacement regulation) of the mechanism for transmitting the driving force against the fraudulent act as described above. , the configuration of the state switching device 360 is limited. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by configuring the slide displacement member 370 so that it is difficult to apply a load in the first place, the conditions required for the state switching device 360 can be partially omitted, and the state switching device 360 can be freely designed. degree can be increased.

In addition, when applying a pressing load to the slide displacement member 370 with a thin metal wire that is laid through the third flow path forming part 336, the thin metal wire itself may cause the ball to flow down the third flow path forming part 336. , it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to reach the probability variation detection sensor SE11.

As described above, depending on whether the ball passes through the through-hole of the variable probability detection sensor SE11 or through the through-hole of the normal detection sensor SE12, the profit obtained by the player changes greatly. should be avoided.

In the conventional model, it was normal to configure so as to regulate the entry to the normal detection sensor SE12 in the state where the entry to the probability variation detection sensor SE11 is allowed, but in this embodiment, the probability variation detection In the state where the ball is allowed to enter the sensor SE11 (see FIGS. 19 and 20), no movable member is provided to restrict the ball from entering the normal detection sensor SE12. It is a configuration that allows

Even with this configuration, if at least one ball passes through the through hole of the variable probability detection sensor SE11 when ten balls flow down, the variable probability state after the big winning game is ensured. Based on this idea, in the present embodiment, by omitting the arrangement of the movable member that normally opens and closes the detection sensor SE12, it is possible to reduce the material cost and the product cost. In addition, as a result of arranging no movable member, there is no need for maintenance due to failure or malfunction of the movable member, and the pachinko machine can be used longer than the life of the movable member.

On the other hand, as a device different from the movable member, as a device for guiding the ball to the detection sensor SE1 on the appropriate side, the shape of the flow path and the arrangement of the fixed protrusions 317, 318, 319 and shape have been devised. That is, a portion fixedly arranged inside the flow path (that is, a protrusion) prevents a larger ball than expected from flowing to the normal detection sensor SE12 when the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the rear side position. It is intended to be realized by the shape of the installation portions 317, 318, 319). This will be explained below.

First, the contrivance of the shape of the flow path will be described. The lower bottom surface 336a of the third flow path forming portion 336 is formed as an inclined surface that is inclined downward at an angle of 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal toward the center side in the left-right direction (partition plate portion 338 side) in the lateral direction. (See FIG. 15).

This inclination angle is set to be the same as the inclination in the longitudinal direction of the second flow path forming part 335 in terms of angle and direction. It is possible to reduce bounce of the ball when the ball flows in (bounce in the direction away from the partition plate portion 338).

Due to this inclination in the lateral direction, the arrangement of the spheres flowing down the third flow path forming portion 336 can be brought closer to the partition plate portion 338 side. Therefore, the ball flowing down from the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 toward the detection sensor SE1 side can be arranged on the side close to the partition plate portion 338, so that the slide displacement member 370 moves to the rear side position. It is possible to reduce the possibility of the ball accidentally passing through the through-hole of the normal detection sensor SE12 (the detection sensor SE1 arranged away from the partition plate portion 338) in the arranged state.

In addition, regardless of the inclination of the lower bottom surface 336a in the lateral direction, the flow path formed by the respective flow path forming portions 334 to 336 has a left-right direction path formed only by the second flow path forming portion 335. Since the direction of inclination is the left-right center side (partition plate portion 338 side), the velocity in the left-right direction is generated in the left-right inward direction. This also reduces the possibility of the ball accidentally passing through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12 (the detection sensor SE1 arranged apart from the partition plate portion 338).

Next, arrangement and configuration of the fixed projecting portions 317, 318, and 319 will be described. It is the left and right inner projecting portions 318 that the spheres that have flowed down the third flow path configuring portion 336 are first placed close to each other. The left and right inward projecting portion 318 is the smallest projecting portion among the projecting portions 317, 318, and 319, and is located on the front side of the center of the detection sensor SE1 and above the projecting portion 376 of the slide displacement member 370. Since it is arranged on the front side, it contacts the ball passing through the rear end portion of the third flow passage forming portion 336 without omission while sliding on the partition plate portion 338 .

Projecting tip surfaces of the left and right inner projecting portions 318 are configured as curved surfaces that are concave downward when viewed from the front (see FIG. 15), and the rear end side of the projecting portion is more horizontal than the front end side of the projecting portion. It is formed so that it spreads outward and downward, and its front and rear ends are connected by a concave curved surface (see FIG. 17). Therefore, the ball passing through the rear end portion of the third flow passage forming portion 336 and coming into contact with the left and right inner projecting portion 318 receives a load in a direction in which the left and right outward component and the downward component are mixed, and flows down. .

On the other hand, since the left and right inner projecting portions 318 are formed to be small, the load received from the left and right inner projecting portions 318 alone does not determine whether the ball flows downward or in the left or right outward direction. function as attachments. Since the left and right inner projecting portions 318 are arranged on the upstream side of the slide displacement member 370 , the above-described biasing force is generated regardless of the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 .

The flow of the ball after coming into contact with the left and right inner projections 318 will be described separately for each case. When the slide displacement member 370 is located at the front position, the ball rolls on the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370 while contacting the upper projecting portion 376 and the front-rear long projecting portion 317 (see FIG. 18). and flows to the normal detection sensor SE12 side.

The protruding ends of the front-to-rear protruding portion 317 have similar uses as the upper protruding portion 376 . That is, since it is formed as a curved surface for switching the flowing direction of the sphere, the radius of curvature of the curved surface is made substantially the same as the radius of curvature of the front side surface 376 a of the upper projecting portion 376 . As a guideline, the upper projecting portion 376 forms a curved surface starting from the left and right inner sides and ending at the rear position of the center position of the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 in top view (see FIG. 17), while The long protruding portion 317 has a curved surface starting from the ceiling surface of the flow path and ending at a position close to the terminal position (rear end position) of the front side surface 376a at the front side position of the slide displacement member 370 in the left-right direction view. (See FIG. 18).

Here, the upper side surface of the thin plate portion 371 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes down to the left and right outer sides, and the ball that is urged to the left and right outer sides by contact with the left and right inner projecting portions 318 utilizes the momentum. Since the ball flows down in the left-right direction, the ball can flow down smoothly.

Furthermore, the left and right outward projecting portions 319 are formed above the ball flowing down in the left and right outward direction, and by suppressing the bouncing of the ball, it is possible to smoothly form the downward flow of the ball. Since the purpose of the left and right outer protrusions 319 is not to switch the ball flow direction but to suppress ball bouncing, its shape is significantly different from the front-rear long protrusions 317, and the protruding end is a variable detection sensor. It is formed as a curved surface with a large radius of curvature extending from above SE11 to above normal detection sensor SE12.

In particular, in the present embodiment, since the left and right outer projecting portions 319 are arranged on the front side from the center of the opening of the detection sensor SE1 (that is, the center of the flow path) (see FIG. 19), the left and right outer projecting portions 319 When the provided portion 319 abuts on the sphere in the vertical direction, the center of the sphere is likely to be arranged on the rear side of the thickness center of the left and right outer projecting portions 319 . Therefore, when the left and right outer protrusions 319 and the ball come into contact with each other in the vertical direction, a load having a backward component can be easily applied to the ball, so that the ball does not flow backward to the front side. can be prevented.

With these configurations, it is possible to easily prevent ball clogging and backflow of balls when a plurality of balls flow down.

When the slide displacement member 370 is located at the rear position, the thin plate portion 371 and the upper projecting portion 376 are retracted further rearward than the longitudinally elongated projecting portion 317 . flows in contact with

The front-rear long projecting portion 317 has a projecting end portion (curved surface) having a surface shape in which the normal passes through the center of the third flow path forming portion 336, and the center of the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11. Since the center of thickness is arranged just behind the position, it is easy to apply a load with a suppressed component in the left-right direction to the ball in contact. This load functions as a load that causes the ball to flow obliquely forward and downward because the projecting tip of the longitudinally long projecting portion 317 has a concave curved surface shape (see FIG. 20).

Therefore, the ball that does not go all the way to the right due to the momentum from the left and right inner projections 318 receives the load from the front-rear long projections 317 and flows toward the probability variation detection sensor SE11.

Here, depending on where the ball collides with the front-rear projecting portion 317, there is a possibility that the ball may rebound toward the front side (reverse flow may occur). Since the contact with the setting portion 318 forces the ball to the left, right, and diagonally downward, even if the ball rebounds to the front side, the ball does not reach the rear end of the lower bottom portion of the third flow passage forming portion 336 (see FIG. 20) or the , the rear side surface of the front frame-shaped portion 333 (see FIG. 19), and the back flow in the third flow path forming portion 336 can be easily avoided.

What is unique in this embodiment is that even when the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the rear side position and the ball flows to the variable probability detection sensor SE11 side, the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the front side position and the ball flows to the normal detection sensor SE12 side. In the same way as in the case above, the sphere is displaced from the right and left inner projecting portions 318 to the left and right outer sides due to the load. This application will be described later.

The slide displacement member 370 is configured to be slidably displaceable between a front position and a rear position. When 370 makes a closing motion (moving from the rearward position to the forward position), it may apply a forward load to the sphere, and the load in the direction (forward) that causes the sphere to flow back through the third flow path forming portion 336 is applied. may be given.

In order to prevent this, it is preferable to control the displacement operation of the slide displacement member 370 . For example, if the ball is controlled to complete the closing operation before it reaches the slide displacement member 370, the possibility of the ball colliding with the slide displacement member 370 during operation can be eliminated, so the ball may flow backward. can be lessened.

In addition, the front surface of the upper protruding portion 376 of the slide displacement member 370 is formed as a curved surface facing the left and right outer sides, and the left and right inner protruding portions 318 are arranged so as to collide with the ball without omission. It is possible to produce an action of guiding the sphere that has reached the rear end portion of the flow passage forming portion 336 to the left and right outer sides. This makes it difficult for the ball to flow backward.

Also, the opening operation of the slide displacement member 370 (movement from the front position to the rear position) is not an operation in a direction facing the ball, but an operation in a direction away from the ball. Even if the movement is performed while riding on the thin plate portion 371, the load that pushes the ball back toward the front side is less likely to occur. Therefore, it is considered that even if the opening operation is performed at an arbitrary timing without considering the arrangement of the balls, the backflow of the balls will not easily occur.

When the ball rolls on the thin plate portion 371 while rotating forward on the upper surface of the slide displacement member 370 (before it flows to the left and right outside), the opening operation of the slide displacement member 370 suppresses the rotation of the ball. Since a load is applied in the direction (in the direction of backward rotation), the rotation of the ball can be stopped, and the flow of the ball can be stopped, making it easier to shift to free fall.

Therefore, when the slide displacement member 370 is opened while the ball is rolling on the thin plate portion 371, it is possible to easily avoid the ball being guided to the normal detection sensor SE12 by the force of the previous rolling. , the ball can be easily guided to the probability variation detection sensor SE11.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment equipped with the sorting device 300 described above, how the sorting device 300 looks from the player's perspective will be described. In the following, as an example, different cases will be described in which the angles of the line of sight with respect to the horizontal direction are different.

21 is a front view of the variable prize winning device 65 and the sorting device 300, FIG. 22 is a perspective view of the variable prize winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXII in FIG. 16, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIII in FIG. 16. FIG.

As a premise, the player who operates the pachinko machine 10 can play the game in a desired posture except for gripping and rotating the operating handle 51 (see FIG. 1). For example, a game is played by keeping one's head sufficiently away from the pachinko machine 10 and viewing the inside of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) with a line of sight (see FIG. 22) in a direction that is horizontal or inclined downward by about 5 degrees from the horizontal. Alternatively, a game may be played by bringing the player's head closer to the pachinko machine 10 and viewing the inside of the glass unit 16 with a line of sight (see FIG. 23) in a direction inclined downward by about 30 degrees from the horizontal. In general, the former provides a wider field of view, but makes it difficult to notice details, while the latter narrows the field of view, but makes it easier to notice details in that field of view.

FIG. 21 is illustrated as a reference, and the following description will be mainly given while comparing FIGS. 22 and 23. FIG. 21 to 23 show the opening state of the opening/closing plate 65b for the sake of convenience.

FIG. 21 shows the light emitting means 351 in phantom lines. Although the light emitting means 351 are arranged symmetrically (see FIG. 13), only the left half is shown for easy understanding. Since the function of the light emitting means 351 arranged at the top is as described above, the three light emitting means 351 in the left half arranged in the lower side part 353 will be explained here.

First, the upper light emitting means 351 emits light toward the sealing member 313 . As described above, since the seal member 313 is formed to be red transparent, when light is emitted from the light emitting means 351, the periphery of the seal member 313 is illuminated in red. As a result, the player's attention to the sealing member 313 and its surroundings can be improved. Since the seal member 313 is arranged right above the third flow path forming part 336 (see FIG. 18), the third flow path forming part 336 can be noticed.

In addition, formation of the light diffusion processing surface 332e is omitted on the front side of the upper light emitting means 351 (see FIG. 18). As a result, the light from the light emitting means 351 can be prevented from being visually stretched vertically by the light diffusion processing surface 332e, and the periphery of the sealing member 313 can be illuminated intensively.

Although the light emission control is not limited in any way, for example, during a jackpot game, control is performed to irradiate the seal member 313 with light in a situation where it is desired to draw attention to the ball flowing down the third flow path forming part 336. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the seal member 313 and naturally guide the line of sight to the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 arranged therebelow.

Next, the light emitting means 351 arranged side by side on the lower side correspond to the positions right above the variable probability detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12, respectively. That is, the control of the light emitting means 351 is such that when the ball enters the variable probability detection sensor SE11, the light emitting means 351 arranged directly above the variable probability detection sensor SE11 emits light, while the ball is normally detected by the detection sensor SE12. By controlling the light emitting means 351 arranged directly above the normal detection sensor SE12 to emit light when the ball is entered, the player can be notified of the passing point of the ball.

The light emitted from these light emitting means 351 arranged side by side on the lower side is directed to the light diffusion processing surface. That is, the light emitting means 351 on the left and right central side are arranged to face the light diffusion processed surface 332e (see FIG. 18), and the light emitting means 351 on the left and right outer sides are arranged to face the light diffusion processed surface 319a (see FIG. 17). ing. The light diffusion processed surfaces 319a and 332e are formed over the top and bottom of each part.

Therefore, the position where the light from the light emitting means 351 is visually recognized is not limited to the height position of the LED of the light emitting means 351, but is formed as a range that spreads vertically (as a vertically extending strip of light visible). Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 21 to 23, the visibility of the light from the light emitting means 351 can be improved even if the angle of the player's line of sight changes.

The downward inclination angle (5 degrees) from the horizontal in FIG. Therefore, in FIG. 22, the outer shape of the slide displacement member 370 arranged at the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 can be visually recognized. However, since the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the front-rear direction, it is difficult to grasp the change due to the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 in this field of view.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 23, when viewed at an angle of 30 degrees from the horizontal, the vertical width of the field of view at the rear end of the third flow path forming portion 336 is narrower than when viewed in the direction of FIG. As a result, the degree of difficulty in confirming the switching of the flow-down mode of the ball at the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 increases. However, in this field of view, it is easy to grasp the displacement of the upper projecting portion 376 when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

In addition, since the placement through-hole 332a of the middle member 330 is formed as an opening of a minimum size sufficient for the upper projecting portion 376 of the slide displacement member 370 to pass therethrough, the inside of the rear side frame-shaped portion 332 It is possible to hide the state switching device 360 (see FIG. 17) arranged in the position so that it is difficult to see.

During the actual jackpot game, a plurality of balls are guided to the specific prize winning port 65a during the round game, and flow down the respective flow passage forming portions 334 to 336 in order. When a plurality of spheres are arranged simultaneously in each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336, there is a possibility that the line of sight directed to the sphere on the back side is obstructed by the sphere on the front side.

For example, when a plurality of spheres are arranged in the third flow path forming portion 336, those spheres are arranged at the same position in FIG. Therefore, the ball on the front side hides the ball on the back side.

Also, when the ball normally flows toward the detection sensor SE12 side, it flows from the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 in the left and right outward direction. Since the visibility is reduced by the light diffusion processing surface 333b of the front frame portion 333 after it is detached from the third flow path forming portion 336 in the left and right direction, the movement of the ball in the process of detaching from the third flow path forming portion 336 in the left and right direction Flows from the downstream end position (the position of the sphere P1) of the second flow path forming part 335 to the upstream end position (the position of the sphere P2) of the third flow path forming part 336. If there is a sphere (a sphere that is slightly displaced in the left-right direction from the third flow path forming part 336), the sphere hides the sphere that is in the process of moving off the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 in the left-right direction.

In other words, whether the ball has flowed to the variable probability detection sensor SE11 or to the normal detection sensor SE12 is determined by determining whether the flow direction of the ball has switched to the left or right outside at the rear end of the third flow path forming portion 336. This can be done by visual inspection, and it suffices to pay attention to the inner side of the third flow path forming portion 336 and the periphery of the right edge portion. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, at the connection position between the third flow path forming part 336 and the second flow path forming part 335 on the upstream side in the direction of the line of sight, the inside and the right side of the third flow path forming part 336 It is configured so that the sphere can flow down a path that includes the edge periphery (moving from the position of sphere P1 to the position of sphere P2). Therefore, depending on the arrangement of the ball flowing down the upstream side, there may occur a situation where it is not possible to grasp whether the ball has flowed to the variable probability detection sensor SE11 or to the normal detection sensor SE12.

23, the spheres flowing through the rear end of the third flow passage forming portion 336 and the spheres flowing through the second flow passage forming portion 335 are clearly separated in the vertical arrangement. It is easy to avoid the situation where the ball of the ball is blindfolded. On the other hand, since the vertical width of the flow path that is visible at the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 is narrow, the area of the sphere that can be visually recognized from the direction is reduced.

In particular, the ball that has passed through the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336, as described above, regardless of the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370, after once flowing downward to the right, toward the probability variation detection sensor SE11 The flow route is switched between the flow route and the flow route toward the normal detection sensor SE12. Therefore, compared to the case where the flow path of the ball is switched depending on whether the ball flows straight down or the flow direction of the ball switches to the right, the area of the ball that is visually recognized at the switching position becomes smaller.

As another mode of switching, it is assumed that the switching position is arranged on the upstream side, such as the case where the flow path of the sphere is switched depending on whether it flows directly downward or switches to the right. For example, when the left and right inner projecting portion 318 is not formed and the ball toward the probability variation detection sensor SE11 flows downward from the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336, the switching position is at least the third flow path It is positioned behind the center line of the component 336 .

On the other hand, when the switching position is displaced to the right of the rear of the center line of the third flow passage forming portion 336 as in the present embodiment, the sphere moves downward from the lower bottom portion of the third flow passage forming portion 336. By dropping (falling by the vertical difference between the upper surface of the lower bottom portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 and the upper surface of the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370, see FIG. 18), the ball is formed on the third flow route forming portion 336 itself. In addition to the effect of partially hiding the sphere, the sphere is partially hidden by the front frame-shaped portion 333 by displacing the sphere to the left and right outside of the range visible through the third flow path forming portion 336 .

Therefore, since the area of the ball that has passed through the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 and is visible to the player's eyes is reduced, it is difficult to grasp which flow path the ball has flowed down. Become. As a result, it is possible to further improve attention to the ball flowing down near the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 .

As described above, according to the present embodiment, in a plurality of direction views (see FIGS. 22 and 23) described as direction views for identifying the flowing direction of the ball flowing down the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336, , both have advantages and disadvantages. As a result, the player is allowed to adjust and select his/her favorite visual recognition method instead of requesting the player to play a one-sided game even with respect to the visual recognition method of the sorting device 300, thereby providing a wide range of game modes. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game.

The field of view of the player can be secured by various methods, but in this embodiment, in particular, by forming a gap between the second upper surface portion 314b of the upper member 310, the third flow path forming portion Since the roof portion of 336 can be removed, the third flow path forming portion 336 can be easily recognized visually.

Regarding the directional views of FIGS. 22 and 23 , the visibility on the front side of the sorting device 300 will be described. Although not shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, since the member to be fixed 161 and the front design member 162 (see FIG. 5) are arranged on the front side of the sorting device 300, the thickness of the member allows the light to pass through. Visibility is obstructed due to less light coming through.

Since the range where the field of view is blocked by the front design member 162 is narrowed, it is possible that the spheres flowing down inside the sorting device 300 can be seen more easily when viewed from the direction shown in FIG. 23 than when viewed from the direction shown in FIG. have a nature.

The member to be fixed 161 and the front design member 162 are basically flat as described above, and are configured so that light is less likely to be refracted (see FIG. 12). Thereby, it can be avoided that the visibility of the sorting device 300 is deteriorated.

Even the portions that cannot be made flat from a functional point of view are formed so as to have little effect on visibility. For example, the protruding support portions 161c to 161e for positioning and engaging the sorting device 300 are arranged so that the player looking at the passage forming portions 334 to 336 does not block the line of sight of the player looking diagonally downward. outside the line of sight (upper rear, left and right outside, left and right lower).

Further, for example, the symmetrical projecting portion 161f is formed at the height of the center of the sphere, and is formed to be thin with the minimum thickness necessary for strength (see FIG. 18). As a result, even if the symmetrical projecting portion 161f is placed between the ball and the player's eyes, it is possible to prevent the entire ball from being hidden. visibility can be ensured.

Between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 , the ball that deviates from the specific prize winning opening 65 a flows down toward the out opening 71 . The influence of the ball flowing down toward the out port 71 on the field of vision will be described.

FIGS. 22 and 23 illustrate an example of the arrangement of balls flowing down toward the out port 71 with the opening/closing plate 65b opened. While the opening/closing plate 65b is open, the ball that has flowed down from above the opening/closing plate 65b rides on the opening/closing plate 65b and is guided toward the specific winning opening 65a. It becomes a ball that deviates to the left and right of 65b. These balls flow down between the extended portions 162 b and 162 c and are guided by the inner rail 61 to flow down toward the out port 71 .

As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, from the player's point of view, the balls flowing on the inner rail 61 are arranged below the respective flow path forming portions 334 to 336. It is possible to easily avoid the deterioration of the visibility of the balls flowing down the constituent parts 334 to 336 .

On the other hand, the ball flowing down the inner rail 61, like the ball flowing down the second flow passage forming portion 335, flows at a moderate angle toward the center in the left-right direction of the game area. In the same way as the ball flowing down the second flow path forming part 335, the player's line of sight is guided to the left-right central position of the game area. This effect guides the player's line of sight to the out port 71 and to the third flow path forming portion 336 . That is, since the lateral direction positions of the out port 71 and the third flow path forming part 336 are the same position (right and left central position), the player can move the line of sight up and down so that the out port 71 and the third flow path The line of sight is guided to a state in which both of the constituent parts 336 can be visually recognized.

Therefore, the ball launched toward the game area is likely to efficiently enter the specific winning hole 65a (whether the number of waste balls during the jackpot game is small), 162c, irrespective of whether or not the balls flowing down frequently occur (whether or not wasteful balls occur frequently during the jackpot game), the effect of guiding the player's line of sight to the third flow path forming part 336 by the flowing balls. can be played.

That is, when the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a, the player's line of sight can be guided to the third channel forming part 336 while flowing down the second flow path forming part 335, and the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a. , the line of sight of the player can be guided to the third flow passage forming portion 336 while flowing down the inner rail 61 .

Normally, the ball heading for the out port 71 is a useless ball and does not have any effect in the game. to the third flow passage forming portion 336 .

In addition, in the closed state of the opening/closing plate 65b, the ball flows on the front side of the opening/closing plate 65b and passes through the front side of the second flow path forming portion 335, so that the field of view of the second flow passage forming portion 335 can be lowered. have a nature.

On the other hand, the second prize winning port 140 and the electric accessory 140a are arranged above the lateral center position of the specific prize winning port 65a, and the third flow passage forming part 336 is arranged below the lateral center position of the specific prize winning port 65a. According to the configuration of the present embodiment, the ball can be prevented from flowing down by the second winning port 140 and the electric accessory 140a. can do. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the visibility of the third flow passage forming portion 336 and the periphery of the rear end thereof is lowered due to the ball flowing down the front side of the opening/closing plate 65b.

In the present embodiment, the time required for the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a to reach the slide displacement member 370 can be ensured by the length of the passage forming portions 334 to 336. We are trying to avoid increasing the space. That is, as shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the arrangement interval between the specific prize winning port 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 and the slide displacement member 370 as a guideline for the arrangement of the third flow passage forming part 336 from the player's line of sight. is formed short.

Moreover, since the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the lower rear side of the specific winning hole 65a (see FIG. 18), as shown in FIG. , it is visually recognized that the slide displacement member 370 is arranged so close to the outer shape of the specific prize winning opening 65a that it bites into it.

In addition, the ball enters the specific winning port 65a which is elongated in the left and right direction, and the ball passing through the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1 arranged at the left and right ends of the specific prize winning port 65a has a symmetrical flow path. Via the parts 334 to 336, they are collected under the left and right central sides of the specific prize winning opening 65a. As a result, the time required for the ball to reach the slide displacement member 370 can be shortened compared to the case where the ball flows down in the horizontal direction of the specific prize winning opening 65a. In addition, since the structure required for the flow-down path of the ball can be a structure in which the lateral length becomes shorter toward the lower side, it can be easily arranged near the lower edge of the curved inner rail 61 . can.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the design idea is to arrange the specific winning hole 65a close to the out hole 71, but the structure is not such that the ball flows directly downward from the left and right inner ends of the second flow path forming part 335, but the second By adopting a structure in which the ball flows backward from the left and right inner end portions of the flow path forming portion 335 by the third flow path forming portion 336, the out port 71 (the front side (upstream side) of the curved surface portion 387) is arranged. opening) can be formed directly below the second flow path forming portion 335 . As a result, the vertical interval between the specific winning opening 65a and the out opening 71 is shortened.

In this way, by shortening the vertical arrangement width and the horizontal width of the specific prize winning opening 65a and the slide displacement member 370 from the player's line of sight, in the design of the game area where the size in the front view is restricted to a certain standard, the specific Since the vertical width of the range occupied by the winning opening 65a and the slide displacement member 370 can be shortened, the degree of freedom in designing the game area can be improved.

For example, as in the present embodiment, the specific winning port 65a can be arranged near the lower end of the game area, so the variable winning device 65 can be effectively used in the symmetrical game area.

Next, an example of the flow down of the ball after hitting the sorting device 300 and the operation pattern of the movable accessories (the variable winning device 65 and the slide displacement member 370) in consideration of the flow down will be described.

First, as a premise, the ball that has passed through the opening 312 flows down the first flow path forming part 334, the second flow path forming part 335, and the third flow path forming part 336 in order (see FIGS. 16 and 17). The time required for the sphere to pass through each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 can be set arbitrarily. Designed.

That is, it takes 0.3 seconds to pass through the first flow passage forming portion 334 after entering the specific winning hole 65a, 0.3 seconds to pass through the second flow passage forming portion 335, and 0.3 seconds to pass through the third flow pass. It is configured to take 0.3 seconds to pass through configuration section 336 .

Therefore, even if the ball enters the specific prize winning port 65a immediately after the opening/closing plate 65b of the variable prize winning device 65 is opened, it is placed at the rear end of the third flow passage forming portion 336 for 0.9 seconds. It is configured so that the ball does not reach the detection sensor SE1 that is to be detected. As a result, for 0.9 seconds after the opening and closing plate 65b is opened, the ball does not move to the position of the slide displacement member 370, and the ball cannot pass through either the probability variation detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12. , the operation pattern of the slide displacement member 370 can be designed without worrying about the wrong winning of the ball.

Therefore, for example, control to release the opening and closing plate for a short time at the start of the round game R in order to prevent erroneous winning to the V winning sensor, which is commonly seen in pachinko machines equipped with V probability variable attackers. control with naturalness) can be dispensed with. As a result, the opening and closing plate for opening and closing the specific prize winning opening operates in a natural manner, thereby providing the player with an environment in which the player can enjoy the game with peace of mind.

In addition, in the pachinko machine provided with the V probability variable attacker in the above example, the ball entering the ball immediately after the V probability variable attacker is released tends to cause an erroneous winning, but in the variable winning device 65 of this case, as will be described later, Conversely, the entering ball has a favorable effect (for example, the effect of hiding the operation of the slide displacement member 370 with the ball). .

The time required for the sphere to pass through can be arbitrarily set depending on the length and inclination of each of the channel forming portions 334 to 336, the shape of the channel inner wall (whether it is smooth or uneven).

The contents of the ROM 202 (see FIG. 4) in the first control example of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24(a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 in the main controller 110, and FIG. 24(b) schematically shows the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. FIG. 24(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the second winning random number counter C4 and the winning in the normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 24(a), the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 contains a first winning random number table 202a, a first winning type selection table 202b, and a second winning random number table 202c as part of the above fixed value data. , and a variation pattern selection table 202d are stored at least.

The first winning random number table 202a is a data table that stores the jackpot determination value of the first winning random number counter that is periodically updated (for example, every 2 msec). When the value of the first winning random number counter obtained based on the start winning coincides with one of the determination values defined in the first winning random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is won.

The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 24 (b)) is a data table that stores the determination value for determining the jackpot type, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is each jackpot type. , and is defined in association with the type of winning opening that triggered the lottery of special symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first winning type selection table 202b. A jackpot type corresponding to the value of the winning type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, when the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on the ball entering the first winning port 64) results in a big hit, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 9". is defined in association with the jackpot A1 (see 202b1 in FIG. 24(b)).

When the jackpot A1 is reached, four rounds of the jackpot game are executed in the first operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 is operated in the operation pattern X (details will be described later). controlled to displace.

The value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "10 to 19" in association with the jackpot A2 (see 202b2 in FIG. 24(b)).

When the jackpot A2 is reached, four rounds of the jackpot game are executed in the first operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 is operated in the operation pattern Y (details will be described later). controlled to displace.

The value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "20 to 39" in association with the jackpot B1 (see 202b3 in FIG. 24(b)).

When the jackpot B1 is won, four rounds of the jackpot game are executed in the second operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 is operated in the operation pattern X (details will be described later). controlled to displace.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "40 to 49" in association with the big winning B2 (see 202b4 in FIG. 24(b)).

When the jackpot B2 is reached, four rounds of the jackpot game are executed in the second operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 is operated in the operation pattern Y (details will be described later). controlled to displace.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "50 to 79" in association with the jackpot C1 (see 202b5 in FIG. 24(b)).

When the jackpot C1 is won, four rounds of the jackpot game are executed in the third operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 is operated in the actuation pattern X (details will be described later). controlled to displace.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "80 to 99" in association with the jackpot C2 (see 202b6 in FIG. 24(b)).

In the case of a jackpot C2, four rounds of jackpot games are executed in the third operating pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 is operated in the operating pattern Y (details will be described later). controlled to displace.

As described above, when a big win is achieved in the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on the ball entering the first winning hole 64), the 4-round big win game is selected in any case. Therefore, it is not possible to expect a large number of prize balls compared to the case of a big win in the lottery for the special symbol 2, which will be described later. On the other hand, since the 4-round jackpot game ends in a shorter time than the 15-round jackpot game, the launching of the ball for the subsequent jackpot win can be started early.

On the other hand, when the lottery for the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the ball entering the second winning hole 140) results in a big hit, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 99". a is associated and defined (see 202b7 in FIG. 24(b)).

In the case of a jackpot a, 15 rounds of jackpot games are executed in the third operating pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 is operated in the operating pattern X (details will be described later). controlled to displace.

As described above, if the lottery for the special symbol 2 (the lottery based on the ball entering the second winning hole 140) results in a big win, 15 rounds of the big win game is selected in any case. Therefore, the player who wins the jackpot in the lottery of the special pattern 2 can obtain a large amount of payout prize balls compared to the case of winning the jackpot in the lottery of the special pattern 1, so that the player can enjoy the special pattern. It is possible to increase the motivation of playing a game for performing the lottery of 2 (a game of shooting a ball so as to enter the second winning hole 140).

In addition, since the operation pattern of the slide displacement member 370 is fixed to the operation pattern X, even if the visibility of the slide displacement member 370 is not ensured, there is little possibility that the player will be disadvantaged. Therefore, when there is a third operation pattern as an operation pattern that has the disadvantage that the visibility to the slide displacement member 370 is slightly deteriorated, but has the advantage that the ball is likely to enter the specific winning opening 65a, the special symbol 2 is drawn by lottery. By setting the operation pattern of the variable winning device 65 for the big win in the third operation pattern, the influence of the disadvantages can be reduced and only the advantage of being able to shorten the time required for the big win game can be emphasized. .

That is, since the possibility of delaying the big win game in the lottery of the special pattern 2 can be reduced, the big win game which is comfortable for the player (the time efficiency of putting out prize balls is good) can be realized.

In addition, the setting of the jackpot type of the special symbol 2 is not limited to this. For example, as the special symbol 2 jackpot type, a jackpot type in which the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is controlled by the operation pattern Y may be provided. Also, this jackpot type may be provided at a small percentage (for example, about 20%).

As a result, the player's attention to the slide displacement member 370 can be improved, so that the player can be prevented from casually playing the big winning game. In other words, the player can visually recognize the displacing motion of the slide displacing member 370, make the player happy and sad at the timing of the displacing motion, and enhance the interest of the player.

As described above, during the probability change of the special symbol, the probability of winning the normal symbol is increased, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 140a when the normal symbol is hit. It is set to be longer (1 second x 2 times). Therefore, it becomes easier to enter the ball into the second winning hole 140, so that the lottery for the special symbol 2 can be easily performed. Therefore, once it is possible to shift to the variable probability state of the special symbols, the variable probability state of the special symbols is likely to become a jackpot of the special symbols, and when it becomes a jackpot, it is easy to become a jackpot a (a jackpot with a good profit balance). This makes it easier for the player to win a large number of prize balls. As a result, the player can play the game while strongly anticipating that the special symbols will shift to the variable probability state, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 24(c)) is a data table in which hit determination values for normal symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of normal symbols, "5 to 28" is defined as the determination value for winning the normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 24(c)). In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal design, "5 to 204" is defined as the judgment value for winning the normal design (see 202c2 in FIG. 24(c)). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained based on the passing of the ball through the normal winning prize opening 67 and the second winning random number table 202c are referred to. It is determined whether or not The variation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode.

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing changes over time in the operating pattern of the opening/closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 and the operating pattern of the slide displacement member 370 of the distribution device 300 in the first round for each jackpot type.

When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines the big hit in the special figure winning determination, after the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, it starts controlling the big winning game (of the determined type). Operation control of the opening/closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 and the slide displacement member 370 of the sorting device 300, which is performed when a jackpot game is awarded, will be described below. Note that FIG. 24 will be referred to as appropriate in the description of FIG. 25 .

Incidentally, in this control example, the driving mode differs depending on the type of jackpot only in the first round, and the driving mode is common in the second and subsequent rounds. Therefore, the driving mode of the first round for each jackpot type will be described.

In the case of the jackpot A1 or jackpot A2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening/closing plate 65b operates based on the first operation pattern. When the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 operates the electromagnetic solenoid 165c so that the timer means (not shown) keeps the opening/closing plate 65b closed until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. is driven and controlled, and the first round round game R is started after the opening time OP has passed.

That is, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to open the specific winning hole 65a. The initial open state is maintained for 0.2 seconds. In the first operation pattern, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so that the opening operation for 0.2 seconds is performed at intervals of 1.0 seconds, and the opening/closing plate 65b is operated for a long period of time.

In addition, the initial opening time is longer than the period in which at least one game ball can enter the specific winning hole 65a when the game ball is continuously shot, and the specified number (10 in this embodiment) of the game ball It is set as a period shorter than the period required to enter the specific winning opening 65a.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls has won ) is satisfied, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is drive-controlled so as to displace the opening/closing plate 65b to the closed state to close the specific winning hole 65a, and the round game R of the first round ends.

The opening time of 0.2 seconds in the first operation pattern is set to limit the number of balls entering the left and right sides of the specific prize winning opening 65a to one while the opening/closing plate 65b is open. This is an opening time setting for preventing a plurality of balls from entering one side of the specific winning port 65a in a row (hereinafter also referred to as "entering balls in a row"). It is not intended to limit the number of balls to one. That is, even if the opening time is 0.2 seconds, it is possible that one ball reaches each of the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a and enters the specific winning opening 65a at once.

In the case of the jackpot A1, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern X. The drive control of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is set on the basis of the drive control of the opening/closing plate 65b. It is driven and controlled to be displaced to the rear side position.

Therefore, the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a passes through each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 (see FIG. 19), passes through the front side of the slide displacement member 370, and passes through the variable probability detection sensor SE11 (see FIG. 20). .

At this time, since the number of spheres arranged in each of the flow passage forming portions 334 to 336 on one of the left and right sides is limited to one, visibility is not lowered by other spheres. Therefore, the player can easily visually recognize the situation in which the ball passes through the variable probability detection sensor SE11.

In the case of the big hit A2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern Y. The drive control of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is set on the basis of the drive control of the opening/closing plate 65b. The slide displacement member 370 is driven and controlled to be displaced to the rear side position, and after 0.8 seconds have passed, the slide displacement member 370 is driven and controlled to be displaced from the rear side position to the front side position.

As described above, the time required for the ball to pass through each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 (see FIG. 17) is set to about 0.9 seconds, so before the ball reaches the slide displacement member 370 The slide displacement member 370 is displaced to the front position.

Therefore, a ball that enters the specific winning hole 65a passes through each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 (see FIG. 17), passes through the upper side of the slide displacement member 370, and passes through the normal detection sensor SE12 (see FIG. 17). .

At this time, since the number of spheres arranged in each of the flow passage forming portions 334 to 336 on one of the left and right sides is limited to one, visibility is not lowered by other spheres. Therefore, the player can easily visually recognize the state in which the ball passes through the normal detection sensor SE12.

0.8 second as the displacement start time of the slide displacement member 370 is based on the idea that the time is shorter than the time required for the sphere to pass through each of the flow passage forming portions 334 to 336, and that the ball is the third flow passage forming portion. It is set from the idea that it takes longer than the time it takes to reach 336.

That is, according to the present embodiment, the ball passes through the second flow path forming part 335 and reaches the third flow path forming part 336 in about 0.6 seconds after entering the specific winning hole 65a. Even if the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a just before the end of 0.2 seconds as the opening time of the opening and closing plate 65b, the slide displacement member is applied after the ball reaches the third flow path forming portion 336. 370 can be displaced.

Therefore, as long as the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a, the operation of the slide displacement member 370 can be hidden by the ball arranged in the third flow passage forming part 336 regardless of the ball entering timing ( See Figure 22). As a result, it is possible to avoid conspicuous displacement operation of the slide displacement member 370, attention to the ball flowing down each flow path configuration portion 334 ~ 336 as a ball entering the variable probability detection sensor SE11 or normal detection sensor SE12 can be improved.

Note that the displacement start time of the slide displacement member 370 is not limited to 0.8 seconds. For example, it may be set to 0.4 seconds. In this case, since the slide displacement member 370 can be displaced before the ball reaches the third flow path forming portion 336, the possibility that the ball will block the line of sight is low, and the slide displacement member 370 can be displaced. can be visually recognized by the player.

However, even in this case, since the second flow passage forming portion 335 is arranged close to the front plate portion of the fixed member 161 and is arranged on the front side of the slide displacement member 370, the line of sight of the player is tend to gather on the spheres flowing down the second flow passage forming portion 335 . That is, by drawing attention to the sphere flowing down the second flow path forming part 335 (for example, by displaying a message such as "Attention to the flowing sphere!" can be easily avoided from being visually recognized by the player.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, each flow passage forming part 334 to 336 is configured so as to be separated at the center of the left and right, so if the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a on the left or right side, the ball will enter. By paying attention to the rear side of the third flow path forming portion 336 on the side not facing, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be visually recognized without being blocked by the falling ball (see FIG. 22).

In this way, in the case of the big hits A1 and A2, the number of balls arranged in each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 on the left and right sides is limited to one, thereby improving attention to the ball. In addition, the player can easily see whether the ball passes through the variable probability detection sensor SE11 or through the normal detection sensor SE12.

In the case of the big win B1 or the big win B2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening/closing plate 65b operates based on the second operation pattern. When the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 operates the electromagnetic solenoid 165c so that the timer means (not shown) keeps the opening/closing plate 65b closed until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. is driven and controlled, and the first round round game R is started after the opening time OP has passed.

That is, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to open the specific winning hole 65a. The initial open state is maintained for 1.0 seconds. In the second operation pattern, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so that the opening operation for 1.0 seconds is performed at intervals of 1.0 seconds, and the open/close plate 65b is operated for a long time.

In addition, the initial opening time is longer than the period in which at least one game ball can enter the specific winning hole 65a when the game ball is continuously shot, and the specified number (10 in this embodiment) of the game ball It is set as a period shorter than the period required to enter the specific winning opening 65a.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls has won ) is satisfied, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is drive-controlled so as to displace the opening/closing plate 65b to the closed state to close the specific winning hole 65a, and the round game R of the first round ends.

The opening time of 1.0 seconds in the second operation pattern is set as a time during which a plurality of balls can enter one of the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a while the opening/closing plate 65b is open. This is the setting of the opening time for allowing a plurality of balls to enter one of the left and right sides of the specific winning hole 65a in a row (hereinafter also referred to as "entering a ball in succession").

In this control example, the interval between ball launches is set to 0.6 seconds, so even if the interval between balls flowing down does not change from the time of launch, the opening/closing plate 65b is opened once every 1.0 seconds. In the meantime, two balls can enter the specific winning hole 65a. On the other hand, since the opening interval of the opening/closing plate 65b is limited to every 1.0 second, the next ball reaches each flow passage forming portion 334 before the two balls pass through each flow passage forming portion 334 to 336. Entering into ~336 can be restricted.

In the case of the big win B1, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern X described above. Further, in the case of the big win B2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern Y. Therefore, in the case of the big hit B1, the ball that has passed through each flow path configuration part 334 to 336 passes through the variable probability detection sensor SE11, and in the case of the big hit B2, the ball that has passed through each flow path configuration part 334 to 336 is the normal detection sensor SE12. pass through.

At this time, the appearance of each of the flow passage forming portions 334 to 336 differs depending on whether one ball or two (or more) balls are arranged in each of the flow passage forming portions 334 to 336 on the left and right sides. When the number of balls arranged in each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 on the left and right sides is one, the visibility is not lowered by other balls as in the case of the big hits A1 and A2. A person can easily visually recognize the situation in which the ball passes through the variable probability detection sensor SE11.

On the other hand, when two (or more) balls are arranged in each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 on the left and right sides, the ball on the upstream side is arranged on the line of sight of the player who sees the ball on the downstream side. , which may reduce the visibility of the downstream ball. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention of the player who wants to know whether the ball passes the variable probability detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 to the ball flowing down the respective flow path forming parts 334 to 336. .

In the case of a big win C1, a big win C2 or a big win a, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening/closing plate 65b operates based on the third operation pattern. When the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 operates the electromagnetic solenoid 165c so that the timer means (not shown) keeps the opening/closing plate 65b closed until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. is driven and controlled, and the first round round game R is started after the opening time OP has passed.

That is, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to open the ball into the specific winning hole 65a. The opening/closing plate 65b is operated for a long period of time within the operation time T1.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls has won ) is satisfied, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is drive-controlled so as to displace the opening/closing plate 65b to the closed state to close the specific winning hole 65a, and the round game R of the first round ends.

In this control example, since the open/close plate 65b maintains the open state during the round game R of the first round, a situation may occur in which a plurality of balls enter the specific winning hole 65a in succession. On the other hand, since the opening interval of the opening/closing plate 65b is not limited, unlike the second operation pattern, the next ball is opened before the two balls pass through each of the passage forming portions 334 to 336. It is also possible for the ball to enter the passage forming portions 334 to 336 . Therefore, compared to the second operation pattern, the visibility of the ball arranged on the downstream side of each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 is improved by the ball arranged on the upstream side in the third operation pattern. It is easy for the situation to fall.

In the case of the big win C1 or the big win a, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern X described above. Further, in the case of the big win C2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern Y. Therefore, in the case of the big hit C1 or the big hit a, the ball that passed through each flow path configuration part 334 to 336 passes through the variable probability detection sensor SE11, and in the case of the big hit C2, the ball that passed through each flow path configuration part 334 to 336 is normal. It passes through the detection sensor SE12.

Thus, regardless of whether the ball is passed through the variable probability detection sensor SE11 or passed through the normal detection sensor SE12, the control mode is such that the opening/closing plate 65b is maintained in an open state. Since the time required to reach the point is controlled from the structure, the possibility of malfunction of the slide displacement member 370 due to ball engagement can be eliminated.

At this time, the appearance of each of the flow passage forming portions 334 to 336 differs depending on whether one ball or two balls are arranged in each of the flow passage forming portions 334 to 336 on the left and right sides. When the number of balls arranged in each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 on the left and right sides is one, the visibility is not lowered by other balls as in the case of the big hits A1 and A2. A person can easily visually recognize the situation in which the ball passes through the variable probability detection sensor SE11.

On the other hand, when two balls are arranged in each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 on one of the left and right sides, the ball on the upstream side is arranged on the line of sight of the player who sees the ball on the downstream side. Visibility of side balls may be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention of the player who wants to know whether the ball passes the variable probability detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 to the ball flowing down the respective flow path forming parts 334 to 336. .

In the third operation pattern, there is no restriction on the timing at which the ball can enter the specific winning hole 65a in the round game R of the first round. Arrangement of spheres tends to be disorderly. Therefore, the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is likely to deteriorate.

On the other hand, the fact that there is no limit to the timing at which the ball can be entered into the specific winning hole 65a has the effect of allowing the progress of the round game R to be performed early. That is, the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls). Winning can be easily fulfilled at an early stage, and delay of a big winning game can be avoided.

In particular, the special pattern 2 jackpot is 100% probability that the slide displacement member 370 is driven and controlled in the operation pattern X, so if the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, the ball will pass through the probability variation detection sensor SE11. is promised. In this case, the player's attention to the detection sensor SE and the slide displacement member 370 is originally low.

Therefore, even if the deterioration of the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is allowed, the disadvantage felt by the player is small. In the third operation pattern, while allowing the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 to deteriorate, priority is given to avoiding the delay of the big win game, thereby realizing the progress of the big win game in a short time. In this way, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the jackpot game.

Regardless of the jackpot type, when the round game R of the first round ends, the timer means holds the opening/closing plate 65b in a closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. 165c is driven and controlled, and after the first inter-round interval time Int1 elapses, the round game R of the second round is started.

In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the specific winning hole. The electromagnetic solenoid 165c is controlled to open the opening 65a, and the opening/closing plate 65b is operated for a long period of time. From the second round onwards, the slide displacement member 370 is always maintained at the front position, so the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a is normally discharged after passing through the detection sensor SE12 (see FIG. 17).

Then, in the second round round game R, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied, The electromagnetic solenoid 165c is drive-controlled so that the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced to the closed state to close the specific winning hole 65a, and the round game R of the second round ends.

After that, as in the second round, the round game R of the third round to the final round (fourth round) is repeated with the inter-round first interval time Int1 between each round game R, and the opening and closing plate 65b is displaced between the closed state and the open state, and the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to open and close the specific winning opening 65a.

When the final round game R ends, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven so that the timer means keeps the opening/closing plate 65b closed until the first inter-round interval time Int1 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. It is controlled, and the jackpot game ends with the lapse of the time.

In this control example, the short-open displacement operation of the opening/closing plate 65b and the drive control of the slide displacement member 370 are performed only in the first round, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be executed in all rounds, or may be executed in rounds other than the first round (for example, the 3rd round, the 8th round, the 12th round, etc.).

As described above, according to this control example, the manner in which the ball enters the opening/closing plate 65b is changed depending on the difference in the opening patterns (first operation pattern to third operation pattern) of the opening/closing plate 65b. The visibility of the detection sensor SE1 arranged on the downstream side of the passage forming portions 334 to 336 and the third passage forming portion 336 can be made different. As a result, the player who pays attention to the passage of the ball through the detection sensor SE1 arranged on the downstream side of the third flow passage forming part 336 can be motivated to devise a shooting mode of the ball.

For example, a decrease in the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 may occur when a plurality of spheres are arranged simultaneously in each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336, so if necessary (for example, the second operation pattern or By intentionally widening the shooting interval of the ball (in the jackpot type of the third operation pattern), it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the visibility of the detection sensor SE1. In addition, in the first operation pattern, since the entry of the ball into the specific winning hole 65a is restricted, it is possible to avoid deterioration of the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 regardless of the shooting mode.

On the other hand, if the ball shooting interval is extended, the period until the specified number of balls enter the specific winning hole 65a is extended, so there is a possibility that the round game R will be delayed. In other words, the player can choose how to play the round game R between the game mode in which the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is prioritized and the game mode in which avoidance of the round game R is prioritized.

For example, in order to visually recognize the displacement of the slide displacement member 370, after a certain period of time (for example, 1.0 seconds) is left after the start of the round game R, the ball is caused to enter the specific winning opening 65a. Also good. In this case, at the timing when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced (timing 0.8 seconds after the start of the round game R in the case of the operation pattern Y), the situation where the ball is arranged in the third flow path forming part 336 is avoided. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball from blocking the displacement operation of the slide displacement member 370 .

On the other hand, if the period until ball launch is set, the period until the specified number of balls enter the specific winning hole 65a is extended, so the round game R may be delayed. In other words, the player can choose how to play the round game R between the game mode in which the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is prioritized and the game mode in which avoidance of the round game R is prioritized.

For example, according to the present embodiment, the passage forming portions 334 to 336 and the slide displacement member 370 are configured symmetrically, and a ball can enter through the specific winning opening 65a from either the left or right side.

That is, for example, the above-described firing mode that widens the shooting interval of the ball and the firing mode that increases the time until the ball is fired are maintained when the ball is entered on the left side, and the ball is fired in an arbitrary firing mode when the ball is entered on the right side. The same effect as described above can be achieved even if the game is played by shooting.

Specifically, as a shooting mode in which the ball is shot toward the specific winning hole 65a separately to the left and right, at least the first ball is shot to the right, and the number of shots (for example, the second ball) is shot to the right. to the left and the remaining balls to the right.

In this case, by not paying attention to the spheres flowing down the right channel as each of the flow channel constituting parts 334 to 336, but focusing on the spheres flowing down the left channel, it is possible to avoid the line of sight being blocked by other spheres. While, it is possible to visually confirm whether or not the ball flowing down the left channel passes through the variable probability detection sensor SE11. In addition, in this case, since the balls are continuously shot toward the right side of the specific winning opening 65a, it is possible to avoid the extension of the period until the specified number of balls enter the specific winning opening 65a. It is possible to avoid delaying the round game R.

It should be noted that the purpose of this separation of firing balls to the left and right is not to make one ball enter the left channel. In particular, it suffices if the number of balls arranged in each of the left flow path forming portions 334 to 336 can be limited to one in about 0.9 seconds until the number of the balls passes through the left flow path, and other periods In , it is sufficient to separately hit the ball so that it enters the left and right channels arbitrarily.

As a result, when the opening width above the specific winning port 65a is not long as in the present embodiment (for example, the arrangement of the electric accessory 140a and the arrangement of the nails (see FIG. 2), the number of ball entry paths is small. ), it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the balls heading for the specific winning opening 65a collide with each other and one of the balls spills to the left and right outer sides of the specific winning opening 65a. Although the nail arrangement is left-right asymmetrical in FIG. 2, the nail arrangement may be left-right symmetrical.

Next, the structure of the operation unit 500 fastened and fixed to the back side of the game board 13 will be described. The operation unit 500 is a unit fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) of the game board 13 from the rear side.

26 is a front perspective view of operation unit 500, and FIG. 27 is a rear perspective view of operation unit 500. FIG. In FIG. 27, illustration of the liquid crystal display device (variable display device unit 80) arranged in the opening 511a of the rear case 510 is omitted, and the rear side can be visually recognized through the opening 511a. 26 and 27 will refer to FIG. 2 as appropriate.

The operation unit 500 includes a box-shaped rear case 510 whose front side is opened from a bottom wall portion 511 and an outer wall portion 512 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 511 . A rectangular opening 511 a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510 , so that the rear case 510 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front. The opening 511a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (that is, the display area of the third pattern display device 81 can be divided when viewed from the front).

The back case 510 extends as a plane plate along the back surface of the game board 13 (for example, arranged in parallel) at the front end of the outer wall part 512, and faces the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 2). A support plate portion 513 for supporting is provided.

The support plate portion 513 includes a positioning convex portion 513a that protrudes toward the front side in a shape that can be fitted into a fitting concave portion (not shown) formed in the base plate 60 of the game board 13, and the base plate 60. and a plurality of insertion holes 513b through which fastening screws to be fastened can be inserted.

The rear case 510 is positioned with respect to the base plate 60 by fitting the positioning projections 513a into the fitting recesses of the base plate 60, and the fastening screws are inserted through the insertion holes 513b and screwed into the base plate 60. Since the game board 13 and the action unit 500 can be integrally fixed, the rigidity of the game board 13 and the action unit 500 as a whole can be improved.

The shape of the positioning convex portion 513a is not limited at all, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, the protrusion may have an outer shape slightly smaller than the inner shape (circular or oval in this embodiment) of the fitting recess of the base plate 60, or the fitting gap may be large in consideration of workability during assembly. A protrusion having a shape (smaller outer shape) may be used. Further, when the inner shape of the fitting recess is formed in a rectangular shape, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning protrusion 513a is also formed in a rectangular shape correspondingly.

The operation unit 500 is arranged on the back side of the game board 13, and various light emitting means and various operation units are arranged inside. That is, the operation unit 500 includes a rear case 510, a first operation unit 600 arranged in the inner right part of the rear case 510, a second operation unit 700 arranged in the inner lower part of the rear case 510, and a third operation unit 800 disposed on the inner upper portion of the rear case 510 . In addition, a substrate having a light emitting means such as an LED is disposed on the left inside of the rear case 510 so as to cover the substrate from the front side and is formed of a light transmissive material. A diffusion decorative plate LB1 to be formed is provided.

Specifically, the first operation unit 600 is positioned to the right of the opening 511a, the second operation unit 700 is positioned below the opening 511a, and the third operation unit 800 is positioned above the opening 511a. It is arranged on the bottom wall portion 511 of the case 510 . First, an overview of operation control of the operation unit 500 will be described.

28 to 35 are front views of the operation unit 500 showing an example of the operation of the operation unit 500. FIG. In FIG. 28, each operation unit 600 to 800 in the effect standby state is illustrated, and in FIG. 29, the state in which the first operation unit 600 has changed from the effect standby state of each operation unit 600 to 800 to the extended state is illustrated, FIG. 30 illustrates a state in which the second operation unit 700 has changed from the presentation standby state of each of the operation units 600 to 800 to the extended state.

In FIG. 30, the second operation unit 700 is illustrated in a state in which the surface of the covering member 787 facing forward is different from that of the second operation unit 700 illustrated in FIG.

28 to 35, the inner shape of the center frame 86 is illustrated by imaginary lines. The third pattern display device 81 arranged on the back side can be visually recognized inside the center frame 86, but outside the center frame 86, the base plate 60 is made of a transparent resin member. The field of view is likely to be blocked by nails, various prize openings 63, 64, 65a, 140, etc., and through gates 67, etc. (see FIG. 2) provided on the base plate 60. Therefore, for example, in a state where the operation units 600 to 800 are arranged outside the center frame 86 as shown in FIG.

Although the frame shape of the center frame 86 is different from that of the center frame 86 shown in FIG. 2 in order to match the configuration of the operation unit 500, the roles are the same. In addition, the inner frame of the center frame 86 has a curved shape that protrudes downward on the front side of the third operation unit 800, but the outer frame of the center frame 86 is not curved downward, and the center frame 86 is curved downward. On the inner frame side of 86, a circular transparent decorative thin plate is protruded so as to cover the third operation unit 800 from the front side. Therefore, the role of rolling the ball on the upper side of the center frame 86 to the left and right sides is the same as that shown in FIG. It is arranged so as to straddle the upper side of the unit 800 from side to side.

FIGS. 31 and 32 illustrate a state in which the third operation unit 800 has changed from the presentation standby state of each of the operation units 600 to 800 to the extended state. In FIG. 31, the first decorative member 870 faces forward and the third operation unit 800 is shown separately combined, and in FIG. A coalesced state is illustrated.

31 and 32 occurs in a displacement mode combining linear motion displacement and rotational displacement. Since the collision with the decorative members 870 and 880 causes a problem, the third operation unit 800 is in the overhanging state.

In other words, in the present embodiment, the third operation unit 800 is in an extended state (or in a state in which the decorative members 870 and 880 are displaced downward to a degree sufficient to avoid the collision of the decorative members 870 and 880 from the waiting state for presentation). On the premise that the displacement of 870, 880 is allowed in the virtual circle 800F (see FIG. 32), the sound ramp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) is instructed to execute reverse displacement (switching rotation operation). The details are described later.

FIG. 33 shows the third action unit 800 in the extended state and the second action unit 700 in the intermediate effect state slightly lowered from the extended state, and FIG. 34 shows the state of FIG. 600 is shown displaced to the intermediate effect state, and in FIG. 35, from the state of FIG. illustrated.

28 to 35, the displacement trajectory of the third motion unit 800 and the displacement trajectory of the first motion unit 600 or the displacement trajectory of the second motion unit 700 partially overlap when viewed from the front. Therefore, for example, when the third operation unit 800 is in the extended state (see FIG. 31), and the state of the first operation unit 600 or the second operation unit 700 changes from the presentation standby state, there is a possibility of collision.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the state change from the effect standby state of the first operation unit 600 is controlled to be executable on the condition that the third operation unit 800 is in the effect standby state, or the third operation By controlling the state change from the effect standby state of the unit 800 to be executable on the condition that the first operation unit 600 is in the effect standby state, the first operation unit 600 and the third operation unit 800 It is possible to avoid overlapping when viewed from the front. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of arrangement of the first operation unit 600 and the third operation unit 800 (overlapping front and rear positions can be allowed).

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the state change to the extended state of the second operation unit 700 is controlled to be executable on the condition that the first operation unit 600 and the third operation unit 800 are in the presentation standby state, By setting the arrangement of the second operation unit 700 to an intermediate effect state (see FIG. 33) when the third operation unit 800 is in the overhanging state, the second operation unit 700 can be placed in front of the other operation units 600 and 800. Overlapping can be avoided. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of arrangement of the operation units 600 to 800 (overlapping front and rear positions can be allowed).

In particular, as the visual recognition state of the second operation unit 700, there are a plurality of cases where the second operation unit 700 is visually recognized in a protruded state closer to the opening 511a and in a state in which the third operation unit 800 is slightly receded from the opening 511a but is arranged close to the third operation unit 800. By constructing the states, the function of the second action unit 700 as an effect device is improved.

As shown in FIGS. 28 to 35, the first motion unit 600 performs displacement motion on the right side of the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The second decoration rotating member 660 of the first operation unit 600 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box-shaped member 661. The box-shaped member 661 has a first rendering surface 661a facing obliquely to the left in the rendering standby state, and a first rendering surface 661a. It has a second effect surface 661b formed on the back side of the surface 661a, and a third effect surface 661c as a surface adjacent to the first effect surface 661a and the second effect surface 661b. Each rendering surface 661a to 661c is optionally decorated with figures, patterns, characters, and the like.

When the first action unit 600 is in the effect standby state, the second decoration rotary member 660 is arranged at a position on the right side of the third pattern display device 81, where the visibility from the front side tends to decrease due to the arrangement of the center frame 86. However, since the first effect surface 661a is oriented obliquely toward the player side (the surface on the near side is tilted 45 degrees toward the arrow L side with reference to the arrow FB), the third effect surface 661a From the inside of the frame of the opening of the pattern display device 81 and the center frame 86, the second decorative rotary member 660 is viewed obliquely through the gap between the center frame 86 and the third pattern display device 81. The visibility of the effect surface 661a can be improved.

On the other hand, in the projecting state of the first operation unit 600, the second decoration rotary member 660 projects in front of the third pattern display device 81, thereby allowing the player who visually recognizes the inside of the center frame 86 to face it. In this case, the second decorative rotating member 660 is oriented with the second rendering surface 661b facing directly in front, so the visibility of the second rendering surface 661b from the line of sight of the player who visually recognizes the second decorative rotating member 660 is can be improved.

In this way, the second decorative rotary member 660 is configured to be able to switch the effect surfaces 661a to 661c visually recognized by the player according to the arrangement, and to change the visibility of the respective effect surfaces 661a to 661c visually recognized by the player. For the purpose of improvement, it is configured so that the posture can be switched according to the arrangement.

In other words, the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) is not limited to planar posture changes parallel to the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), but is designed to provide angle changes intended for the relationship with the line of sight of the player. That is, the closer the center frame 86 is placed to the center of the frame, the more the player's line of sight is oriented forward and backward, making it easier for the player to face the player. Since the line of sight of the player tends to become oblique as it is placed closer to the frame of the center frame 86, visibility can be improved by making the performance surface oblique so as to directly face the line of sight.

As the second decorative rotating member 660 is displaced, the overhanging decorative portion 652b is displaced in conjunction therewith. The projecting decorative portion 652b is decorated with figures, patterns, etc. on the front surface of the board, and when the first action unit 600 is in the production standby state (see FIG. 28) and the intermediate production state (see FIG. 34), the back case 510 By placing it in the upper right corner, it is hidden from the player's view.

On the other hand, when the first operation unit 600 is in the extended state (see FIG. 28), the projecting decorative portion 652b is arranged on the center frame 86 so as to overlap the right edge of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 in the front view. It is configured so that it can be visually recognized by the player by being placed inside the frame.

In this state, the right end portion of the external shape of the projecting decorative portion 652b is located on the right side of the right edge of the third pattern display device 81. As shown in FIG. Therefore, by using the decoration on the front surface of the projecting decorative portion 652b, it is possible to perform a display effect that makes the player feel as if the display area of the third pattern display device 81 is expanding.

More specifically, the right edge of the area where the display of the third pattern display device 81 can be visually recognized is defined by the first operation unit 600, and in the waiting state of the first operation unit 600 for rendering, the second decorative rotary member The left edge of the first rendering surface 661a of 660 and the region right end RE1 of the region in which the display of the third pattern display device 81 can be visually recognized approximately match.

On the other hand, in the overhanging state of the first operation unit 600, the overhang decorative portion 652b is arranged so as to extend beyond the region right end RE1 to the right. Therefore, by associating or matching the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the decoration of the plate front surface of the overhanging decorative portion 652b, the display area of the third pattern display device 81 appears as if the area right end RE1 can be made to appear to the player as if it were expanding beyond the As a result, it is possible to realize an unexpected presentation.

As an example of matching the above display and decoration, for example, a polka dot pattern is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and a similar polka dot pattern is used as the decoration on the front surface of the projecting decorative portion 652b, A certain number is written on the front surface of the projecting decorative portion 652b in the same typeface as the typeface of the numbers (for example, numbers for notifying the success or failure of the lottery) variably displayed on the third pattern display device 81. An example of doing so is illustrated.

As an example of associating the above-mentioned display with the decoration, for example, six of the seven colors forming the rainbow are displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and the plate front of the projecting decorative portion 652b remains. An example in which the third pattern display device 81 is colored in one color, and a wooden stick arranged so as to align the right end with the region right end RE1 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and a flame is modeled on the plate front of the projecting decorative portion 652b. An example is exemplified in which the first operation unit 600 is decorated in such a way that it is associated with ignition when the first operation unit 600 is extended.

Note that the presentation mode of the projecting decorative portion 652b is not limited to one type, and a plurality of types of presentation modes can be configured by controlling the brightness of the projecting decorative portion 652b. Light emitting means for changing the brightness of the portion 652b will be described later.

In addition, by disposing a small liquid crystal device having a display surface on the front side instead of the projecting decorative portion 652b, the display of the liquid crystal device can be changed in a plurality of types, so that the area beyond the right end RE1 of the region can be displayed. It is possible to avoid the limitation of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 when enlarging the display area.

Further, the object to be associated with the decoration of the projecting decorative portion 652b is not limited to display, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, the decoration of the projecting decorative portion 652b may be associated with the decoration (first decoration, second decoration) formed on the member of the second operation unit 700 (for example, the covering member 787). , the decoration of the protruding decorative portion 652b, and the decorations formed on the members of the third operation unit 800 (for example, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880) (the decoration of the first covering portion 875, the second covering decoration of the installation portion 885).

36 is a front perspective view of the first operation unit 600, and FIG. 37 is a rear perspective view of the first operation unit 600. FIG. The first operation unit 600 is configured in a complicated displacement mode in which the second decorative rotating member 660 rotates while changing its attitude. By relatively displacing on the basis of , the player can visually recognize different appearances before and after the displacement.

38 is an exploded front perspective view of the first operation unit 600, and FIG. 39 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operation unit 600. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the first operation unit 600 includes fixed means 610 fastened and fixed to the rear case 510, a rotating member 620 rotatably supported by the fixed means 610, A drive transmission device 630 that transmits a driving force for rotating the rotating member 620, and a supported member 640 whose one end is rotatably supported by the rotating tip of the rotating member 620. , a first decorative rotary member 650 rotatably disposed at the other end of the supported member 640, a second decorative rotary member 660 rotatably supported by the first decorative rotary member 650, and a decorative fixing member 670 fixed to the front side of the lower half of the fixed means 610 .

The means to be fixed 610 is arranged to face the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510 in the front-rear direction, and the base member 611 is arranged on the front side of the base member 611 while creating a space between the base member 611 and the base member 611 . and a front lid member 612 fastened to and secured to the .

The front lid member 612 includes a transmission arrangement portion 613 for arranging the drive transmission device 630, a fixing portion 614 for fixing the decorative fixing member 670 on the front side of the transmission arrangement portion 613, and a fixing portion 614 for fixing the decorative fixing member 670. A support fastening portion 615 for rotatably supporting the rotating member 620 inside the portion 614 and a guide elongated hole 616 formed as an elongated hole for guiding the other end of the supported member 640 are provided. Prepare.

The elongated guide hole 616 is formed with a unique shape in which straight portions and curved portions are mixed, the details and operation of which will be described later.

Rotating member 620 is provided at one end (lower end) of main body 621 formed in the shape of an elongated plate, and is externally supported by support fastening portion 615 of fixed means 610 . a transmission long hole 623 formed in the intermediate portion of the body portion 621 as a long hole extending in a straight line direction; A circular through-hole 624 drilled as a circular hole in a drilling direction parallel to and a gear tooth portion 625 formed in a gear tooth shape along a part of a circle centered on the circular through-hole 624 Prepare.

A torsion spring SP1 is wound around the tubular portion 622 . The torsion spring SP1 is configured such that one arm contacts the side wall of the main body 621 and the other arm contacts the projecting piece of the front cover member 612. It is configured such that an urging force is generated in the viewing clockwise direction).

In addition, in the axial support of the cylindrical portion 622 , a fastening screw is screwed into a female screw portion formed at the tip portion of the support fastening portion 615 while the support fastening portion 615 is inserted into the cylindrical portion 622 . be. As a result, the rotating member 620 is pivotally supported by the support fastening portion 615 so as not to fall off.

The long transmission hole 623 functions as a guide hole through which the cylindrical portion 634a of the drive transmission device 630 is inserted, and the circular through hole 624 functions as an insertion hole through which the cylindrical portion 642 of the supported member 640 is rotatably inserted and fixed. However, the details will be described later.

The drive transmission device 630 includes a drive motor 631 fastened and fixed to the front side of the front cover member 612, a drive gear 632 fixed to a drive shaft protruding rearward through a through hole 613a of the front cover member 612, and A transmission gear 633 pivotally supported by the tubular portion 613b of the front cover member 612 in mesh with the drive gear 632, and a transmission gear cam pivotally supported in the tubular portion 613c of the front lid member 612 in mesh with the transmission gear 633. 634;

In a state in which the transmission gear 633 and the transmission gear cam 634 are inserted into the cylindrical portions 613b and 613c, fastening screws are screwed into the female thread portions formed at the distal end portions of the cylindrical portions 613b and 613c. As a result, the transmission gear 633 and the transmission gear cam 634 are pivotally supported by the front lid member 612 so as not to fall off.

The front lid member 612 is formed with an arcuate hole 613d extending along an arc centered on the cylindrical portion 613c. A cylindrical portion 634a protruding in a cylindrical shape is inserted through.

The transmission gear cam 634 is a rotating member having a gear portion that meshes with the transmission gear 633, and includes the above-described cylindrical portion 634a and a plate-like extension extending from an angular position including the cylindrical portion 634a in the outer diameter direction. and a setting portion 634b.

The cylindrical portion 634a is inserted through the arc-shaped hole 613d, and is inserted through the long transmission hole 623 of the rotating member 620 on the front side thereof. Here, the width and length of the arc-shaped hole 613d and the transmission elongated hole 623 are designed to be slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion 634a. As a result, the sliding resistance when the cylindrical portion 634a slides in the arc-shaped hole 613d and the transmission elongated hole 623 can be reduced.

The extending portion 634b is configured to be able to enter the detection groove of the photocoupler type detection sensor KS1 fastened and fixed to the front cover member 612 . As a result, the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can grasp the attitude of the transmission gear cam 634 by reading the change in the output of the detection sensor KS1.

The supported member 640 includes a long main body portion 641, a cylindrical portion 642 projecting from the back side of the main body portion 641 and having a cylindrical cross section that can be inserted into the circular through hole 624 of the rotating member 620, and A tubular portion 643 protruding parallel to the tubular portion 642 and an intermediate gear 644 formed so as to engage with the gear tooth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 while being pivotally supported by the tubular portion 643 . , a bottomed tubular portion 645 formed in a large-diameter tubular shape having a perforated bottom on the back side of the intermediate gear 644, and an end opposite to the end where the bottomed tubular portion 645 is arranged. and an extended support portion 646 extending to the front side at the portion.

With the above-described configuration, as the rotating member 620 rotates and displaces, the gear tooth portion 625 and the intermediate gear 644 can be meshed to generate driving force transmission.

With the cylindrical portions 642 and 643 inserted through the rotating member 620 and the intermediate gear 644, the fastening screws are screwed into the female thread portions formed at the distal end portions of the cylindrical portions 642 and 643. As shown in FIG. As a result, the rotating member 620 and the intermediate gear 644 are axially supported by the body portion 641 of the supported member 640 so as not to fall off.

The bottomed tubular portion 645 has the bottom rear side arranged close to the front side edge of the front lid member 612, and the intermediate gear 644 and the gear teeth 654a of the first ornamental rotating member 650 can mesh with each other on the bottom front side. and an insertion hole 645b formed in a circular shape around the center of the cylindrical shape and through which the cylindrical support portion 651a can be inserted. Details of the shape will be described later.

The extended support portion 646 functions as a support portion for rotatably supporting the second decoration rotating member 660, and details thereof will be described later.

The first decorative rotary member 650 includes a main body member 651 forming a perpendicular rotary shaft, a front rotary member 652 pivotally supported between the main body member 651 and a bottomed cylindrical portion 645, and a front rotary member 652. A decorative substrate 653 fixed to the back side of the decorative portion 652b and having a light emitting means such as an LED disposed on the front side, a rear rotating member 654 that is coaxial with the front rotating member 652 and fastened and fixed to the rear side, A wire receiving member 655 that is fastened and fixed to the main body member 651 from the front side to form a cylindrical space through which wires pass, and a fastening screw that is arranged on the front side of the wire receiving member 655 and inserted through the main body member 651 from the rear side. It has a front decorative portion 656 that is fastened and fixed by being screwed in, and a perpendicular rotation member 657 that is externally fitted and pivotally supported in a cylindrical portion formed by the wire receiving member 655 and the main body member 651 .

The main body member 651 has a cylindrical support portion 651a extending cylindrically on the back side, and the cylindrical support portion 651a has a pair of female screw portions 651b formed at the diametrical positions of the distal end thereof. It has a notch 651c which is cut to reduce the wall on one side of a plane passing through the portion 651b.

The cylindrical support portion 651a is formed with a thickness that allows electrical wiring to be inserted therein, and the notch portion 651c functions as an opening for securing an entrance for the electrical wiring.

The cylindrical support portion 651a includes, from the base end side, the center hole of the front rotating member 652, the center hole of the rear rotating member 654, the insertion hole 645b of the bottomed cylindrical portion 645, the stepped ring-shaped collar C1, and the front lid. The member 612 is inserted through the guide elongated hole 616, and a fastening screw inserted through the dish-shaped lid portion C2 is screwed into the female threaded portion 651b at the tip of the member 612 to be fastened and fixed.

That is, the cylindrical support portion 651a, the front rotating member 652, the rear rotating member 654, the bottomed tubular portion 645, the collar C1, and the dish-shaped lid portion C2 described above are coaxially supported and guided by the axis O1 extending in the front-rear direction. It is configured to be displaceable along the slot 616 .

An opening C2a is formed in a part of the circumference of the dish-shaped lid portion C2, and the opening C2a is arranged opposite to the notch portion 651c of the main body member 651 in the assembled state to provide a path for electric wiring. to form

A part of this electrical wiring passes through the inside of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 and is guided inside the second ornamental rotating member 660 , and the terminal is connected to the connector arranged on the electrical board 662 . In addition, the other wires are formed in the gap formed between the body member 651 and the wire receiving member 655 (the upper side, that is, the side facing the body member 651 on the opposite side of the semi-cylindrical portion 655a). The terminal is guided to the back of the projecting decorative portion 652 b through the gap) and connected to the connector of the electrical decoration board 653 .

The rear rotating member 654 has gear teeth 654a formed along the circumference of the rear side end, and the gear teeth 654a and the intermediate gear 644 are formed so as to mesh with each other. It should be noted that the gear teeth 654a are formed along a portion of the circumference rather than over the entire circumference as a sufficient arrangement for the operation described below.

The front rotating member 652 includes gear teeth 652a formed as bevel gears and a projecting decorative portion 652b projecting radially outward. An electric decoration board 653 is fastened and fixed to the rear side of the decorative projection 652b, and the projection decorative part 652b is illuminated or blinked by light emitted from a light emitting means arranged on the electric decoration board 653. It is possible.

Since the front rotating member 652 is fastened and fixed to the rear rotating member 654, the rear rotating member 654 and the front rotating member 652 rotate integrally.

The axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 is rotatably supported by a circular tubular portion formed by the semi-cylindrical portion 651 d of the main body member 651 and the semi-cylindrical portion 655 a of the wiring receiving member 655 , and is the gear of the front side rotating member 652 . It includes gear teeth 657a formed as bevel gears mateable with teeth 652a.

With this configuration, the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the front rotating member 652 . That is, the front rotating member 652, the rear rotating member 654, and the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 are interlocked, and the details of the operation will be described later. Note that the gear teeth 652a, 657a are formed along a portion of the circumference rather than over the entire circumference as a sufficient arrangement for operations to be described later.

The second decorative rotary member 660 includes a box-shaped member 661 fastened and fixed to the axis-perpendicular rotary member 657 , an electric board 662 fixed to the box-shaped member 661 inside the box-shaped member 661 , and the box-shaped member 661 . and the axis-perpendicular rotation member 657 and fastened and fixed to the distal end portions of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a.

In this embodiment, as the box-shaped member 661, which will be described later, rotates, the electrical board 662 is also rotated. Where there is a possibility that the electrical wiring passing between them may be twisted or the arrangement may be disordered, the function of the wiring clamp plate 663 having a through-hole for temporarily fastening the wiring prevents the wiring from being twisted or disorderly. We are trying to avoid being placed in

In this embodiment, since the electrical wiring is fixed to the electrical board 662, twisting of the electrical wiring is unavoidable. On the other hand, the rotational displacement of the second decorative rotating member 660 is not generated by one rotation or more, but is a rotational displacement that is reversed at a rotation angle of 135 degrees. It is possible to avoid a situation where the wiring is twisted.

The second decorative rotating member 660 is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and is configured to be rotatable about a rotating shaft (rotating shaft formed by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a) parallel to the longest side of the rectangular side surface having the longest side. be.

The axis-perpendicular rotation member 657 is supported by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a so as not to fall off, with the wiring retaining plate 663 functioning as a retainer. Since the second decorative rotating member 660 is fastened and fixed to the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657, it is possible to prevent the second decorative rotating member 660 from falling out of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a.

The electrical board 662 is arranged so that the thickness direction of the plate and the thickness direction of the box-shaped member 661 are aligned. On the side surface in the thickness direction of the electrical decoration board 662, the first rendering surface 661a is illuminated by a light emitting means such as an LED arranged on the front side and whose optical axis is directed in the thickness direction, and is arranged on the back side and whose optical axis is directed in the thickness direction. The second rendering surface 661b is illuminated by light emitting means such as LEDs, and the third rendering surface 661c is illuminated by light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the back side (the side that illuminates the second rendering surface 661b) and whose optical axis is directed in the width direction. be

In this way, the light emitting means arranged on the illumination board 662 functions to illuminate each of the rendering surfaces 661a to 661c individually, but the LEDs that illuminate the third rendering surface 661c are located on the back side (the second rendering surface 661b). illuminating side), illuminates the third rendering surface 661c (the surface facing upward) in the state where the second rendering surface 661b is arranged on the front side (the extended state of the first operation unit 600). When the LED is caused to emit light, the second rendering surface 661b can be illuminated with light traveling at an angle from the optical axis of the LED.

That is, unlike the case where the LEDs are arranged behind the electrical decoration board 662, it is possible to prevent the light from being hidden by the electrical decoration board 662, so that the second rendering surface 661b is illuminated by the light that illuminates the third rendering surface 661c. can also illuminate As a result, it is possible to increase the number of types of rendering modes in which the second rendering surface 661b is illuminated, or to improve the brightness of the second rendering surface 661b during the light emitting rendering.

The decoration fixing member 670 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and has decoration characters and figures formed thereon so that the player can visually recognize it. . The arrangement of the decoration fixing member 670 is fixed on the right side of the third pattern display device 81, and the line of sight of the player with respect to the decoration fixing member 670 is always inclined to the right. That is, by inclining the direction of the light emitted from the illumination board 671 to the left, the light can be emitted to the side where the eyes of the player are likely to be arranged.

The decorative fixing member 670 has a lower edge portion and a right edge portion raised toward the back side, and a front-to-rear gap is formed between the upper edge portion and the left edge portion and the front cover member 612 . This front-rear gap functions as a gap through which the rotating member 620 is tilted and displaced.

40 is a front view of the first action unit 600 in the effect standby state, FIG. 41 is a rear view of the first action unit 600 in the effect standby state, and FIG. 42 is a view in the direction of arrow XLII in FIG. 6 is a side view of the first operating unit 600; FIG. In order to facilitate understanding of the shape, illustration of the base member 611 (see FIG. 38) and fastening screws is omitted.

In the performance standby state, the displacement start direction SD1 of the cylindrical portion 634a of the drive transmission device 630 is configured to be along the longitudinal direction of the transmission long hole 623 (for example, parallel). Thereby, the displacement resistance when the cylindrical portion 634a starts to be displaced while sliding in the transmission elongated hole 623 can be reduced. That is, at the start of displacement, inertia assistance cannot be obtained compared to the middle of displacement, and the driving force required to be generated by the drive motor 631 tends to increase. , it is possible to reduce the load on the drive motor 631 at the start of displacement.

In addition, the same thing is configured to hold for the displacement start direction SD2 of the cylindrical portion 634a in the overhanging state (see FIG. 45). That is, in the present embodiment, the displacement direction of the cylindrical portion 634a disposed in the long transmission hole 623 at both end positions of the rotating member 620 (the position in the standby state for the effect, the position in the overhanging state) The displacement of the cylindrical portion 634a (that is, the shape of the transmission gear cam 634) is designed along the longitudinal direction (eg parallel). As a result, it is possible to reduce the load on the drive motor 631 when the rotation member 620 starts to be displaced from both end positions.

As shown in FIG. 41, the gear teeth 625 of the rotating member 620 and the gear teeth 654a of the first decoration rotating member 650 mesh with the intermediate gear 644 from both sides. In this embodiment, the radius R1 of the gear tooth portion 625 and the radius R2 of the gear tooth 654a are designed to have the same length. The rotation angle of the side rotation member 654 is the same angle.

Therefore, the rotation angle of the rear rotating member 654 can be changed depending on the design of the rotation angle (angle θ) generated between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth portion 625 .

As shown in FIG. 42, the gear teeth 652a of the front rotating member 652 and the gear teeth 657a of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 mesh with each other, and the rotational driving force transmitted to the front rotating member 652 crosses the rotating shaft at right angles. It is transmitted to the second decorative rotary member 660 .

The rotation angle of the second decoration rotary member 660 is the same as the rotation angle of the gear teeth 657 a , and the rotation angle of the gear teeth 657 a is proportional to the rotation angle of the gear teeth 652 a of the front side rotation member 652 . That is, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is proportional to the rotation angle generated between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth portion 625 (see FIG. 41).

In this embodiment, the rotation angle of the gear teeth 657a and the rotation angle of the gear teeth 652a are the same (the gear ratio is 1), so the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is It is the same as the rotation angle generated between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth portion 625 .

Next, the displacement of the first action unit 600 from the effect standby state will be described in chronological order. 43 is a front view of the first action unit 600 in an intermediate effect state, and FIG. 44 is a rear view of the first action unit 600 in an intermediate effect state. 45 is a front view of first operation unit 600 in the extended state, and FIG. 46 is a rear view of first operation unit 600 in the extended state. In order to facilitate understanding of the shape, illustration of the base member 611 and fastening screws is omitted.

The rotation angle of the rotating member 620 is set to 19 degrees between the effect waiting state and the intermediate effect state, and the rotating angle of the rotating member 620 is set to 26 degrees between the intermediate effect state and the extended state. is set to

In the intermediate rendering state of the first motion unit 600, the box-shaped member 661 of the second decoration rotating member 660 is in a posture with the narrow third rendering surface 661c facing the front side. In the extended state of the first action unit 600, the second rendering surface 661b is configured to face the front side (see FIG. 45).

As shown in FIG. 44, the guide long hole 616 has a linear portion 616a formed on a straight line extending vertically from the upper end, and a curved line (substantially arc-shaped) connected to the lower end of the linear portion 616a. and a curvilinear portion 616b formed at the .

In the intermediate rendering state of the first motion unit 600, the axis O1 is located at the lower end position of the linear portion 616a, that is, at the connecting portion between the linear portion 616a and the curved portion 616b. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 46, in the extended state of the first motion unit 600, the axis O1 is arranged at the lower end position of the curved portion 616b.

Therefore, the displacement of the axis O1 between the waiting state for the effect and the intermediate effect state is a linear displacement along the linear portion 616a, and the displacement of the axis O1 between the intermediate effect state and the overhanging state is the curved portion. It is configured to have a curvilinear displacement along 616b.

The first operation unit 600 is configured to be changeable in state as described above, and the rotating member 620 is arranged on the proximal end side of the change in state. That is, the rotating member 620 is displaced by receiving the driving force from the drive transmission device 630, and the supported member 640, the first ornamental rotating member 650, and the second ornamental rotating member 660 follow the displacement of the rotating member 620. .

Therefore, if no countermeasures are taken, there is a possibility that the sliding displacement of the portion guided by the long guide hole 616 will increase the displacement resistance generated between the long guide hole 616 and the rotary member 620 in this embodiment. This is suppressed by arranging the longitudinal direction of the guide slot 616 along the direction of displacement.

For example, the displacement of the gear tooth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 from the waiting state for rendering (FIG. 41) is a downward tilting displacement, and the guide elongated hole 616 is also formed to extend downward. Further, for example, the displacement of the gear tooth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 from the overhanging state (see FIG. 46) is a displacement in which it rises obliquely upward to the right. It is

In this way, by aligning the displacement direction of the rotating member 620 with the longitudinal direction of the guide slot 616, the displacement resistance of the portion displaced inside the guide slot 616 (and the axis O1) can be reduced. can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the effect of the shape of the guide slot 616 will be described, including other effects. 47A and 47B are schematic diagrams schematically showing the displacement amount and the displacement angle of the supported member 640 accompanying the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620. FIGS. 6 is a schematic diagram showing the magnitude relationship of the amount of displacement on the driven side of the supported member 640 when the supported member 620 rotates in the tilting direction at a constant angular velocity; FIG. As for the positive and negative values, positive indicates downward displacement and negative indicates upward displacement. In FIG. 48(b), the numerical values in FIG. 48(a) are illustrated as a bar graph.

In FIG. 47 , the arrangement of the supporting positions of the supported member 640 accompanying the rotation of the rotating member 620 is illustrated at intervals of 10 degrees as the rotation angle of the rotating member 620 . Rotating member 620 in the extended state is shown in solid lines.

47, the angle θ is illustrated as an angle between a line segment connecting the axis O1 and the center of the circular through hole 624 and a line segment connecting the center of the circular through hole 624 and the center of the cylindrical portion 622. there is

The guide long hole 616 functions as a long hole that guides the end of the supported member 640 on which the axis O1 is arranged. Displacement in the guide elongated hole 616 is displacement caused by displacement of the tubular portion 642 of the supported member 640 connected to the circular through hole 624 of the rotating member 620 as the rotating member 620 rotates. Hereinafter, the cylindrical portion 642 of the supported member 640 is also referred to as the driving side of the supported member 640, and the end portion of the supported member 640 on which the axis O1 is disposed is also referred to as the driven side of the supported member 640.

An overview of the operation centering on the rotating member 620 will be described. The vertical displacement of the supported member 640 supported by the rotating member 620 is due to the vertical displacement of the tip of the rotating member 620 (the driving side of the supported member 640) due to the rotation of the rotating member 620, and the posture displacement of the supported member 640. It is generated as a result of adding up the accompanying vertical displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 .

In the performance standby state, in addition to the fact that the supported member 640 is in the vertical posture, the velocity component of the displacement of the rotating member 620 is larger in the horizontal direction than in the vertical direction (the rotation arm is positioned at 45 degrees to the left and right from the vertical). range). In other words, there are two conditions for the displacement in the vertical direction to be small.

Both of these are reversed in the overhanging state, and the conditions for increasing the displacement in the vertical direction are duplicated. Therefore, the speed is low at the start of the downward displacement and is likely to be high at the end of the downward displacement.

Next, the details of the operation centered on the rotating member 620 will be described. Displacement (tilting displacement) of the rotating member 620 from the effect standby state to the overhanging state will be described. When the rotating member 620 is tilted and displaced, the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced mainly by its own weight.

Therefore, if the guide long hole 616 is formed in the vertical direction, the driven side of the supported member 640 may drop violently. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is preferable to stop the first action unit 600 in an intermediate effect state (position in the middle of tilting displacement, see FIG. 44).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the shape of the guide long hole 616, a mode is adopted in which a curved portion 616b is combined with a linear portion 616a below. As a result, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced by its own weight in the linear portion 616a and enters the curved portion 616b, the displacement resistance applied to the driven side of the supported member 640 can be increased. As a result, it is possible to easily prevent the driven side of the supported member 640 from vigorously falling beyond the arrangement in the intermediate effect state.

Displacement of the driven member 640 in the linear portion 616a will be described. When the driven side of the supported member 640 displaces the linear portion 616a, the driving side of the supported member 640 straddles the extension line of the linear portion 616a. That is, in the standby state for the effect, the driving side of the supported member 640 is arranged on the right side of the linear portion 616a (see FIG. 41), and in the intermediate effect state, the driving side of the supported member 640 is positioned on the left side of the linear portion 616a. placed (see FIG. 44). Therefore, the driven side of the supported member 640 is vertically reciprocatingly displaced while the rotating member 620 is tilted without changing direction.

As a result, the displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 in the vertical direction can be kept small compared to the magnitude of the rotation angle of the rotating member 620, so that the driven side of the supported member 640 is a linear portion. 616a, the supported member 640 can be seen by the player in a displaced manner as if it is rotationally displaced about the driven side of the supported member 640. FIG.

According to this displacement mode, it is possible to generate sliding displacement in the left-right direction by utilizing the run-up due to the rotational displacement of the supported member 640 about the driven side. The load required for the displacement can be kept low compared to the case of sliding displacement in the left-right direction. Therefore, the load required to start the operation of the supported member 640 can be reduced, and the degree of performance required of the drive motor 631 can be reduced. Thereby, cost reduction of the drive motor 631 can be achieved.

On the other hand, while the displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 is kept small, the displacement of the driven portion of the supported member 640 is sufficiently ensured according to the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 . The rotation direction of the driven side of the supported member 640 with respect to the driving portion is maintained in the counterclockwise direction in rear view (the direction is not switched). As a result, as described above, the orientation change direction of the supported member 640 and the rotation direction of the second decorative rotary member 660 are maintained without being switched (inverted).

As a result, it is possible to avoid giving the player the impression that the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 are reciprocating (returning). The displacement mode can be a vigorous displacement mode.

Further, even in a situation in which the displacement of the main moving portion of the supported member 640 due to the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 is sufficiently ensured, the displacement direction of the main moving portion of the supported member 640 has a large horizontal component. Moreover, since the displacement is in the direction (downward) along the direction of gravity, the load required to start the displacement of the rotating member 620 can be reduced, and the degree of performance required of the drive motor 631 can be reduced. can do. Thereby, cost reduction of the drive motor 631 can be achieved.

The action produced by the curved portion 616b will be described. A state in which the driven side of the supported member 640 is arranged at the connecting portion between the linear portion 616a and the curved portion 616b is defined as an intermediate rendering state of the first motion unit 600. FIG. As described above, the rotation angle of the rotating member 620 from the effect standby state to the intermediate effect state is 19 degrees. Therefore, the state where the driven side of the supported member 640 is arranged on the curved portion 616b roughly corresponds to the angular width range of 20 degrees to 45 degrees in FIG.

First, as a premise, there is no necessity to employ a curved portion for the guide slot 616 . In other words, regardless of whether or not a bent portion is employed to increase the displacement resistance in the intermediate effect state as described above, the long guide hole 616 may be composed only of linear portions.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the use of the curved portion 616b prevents the speed of the driven member 640 from becoming excessive at the end of the displacement. This will be explained below.

Whether guided by the linear portion 616a or guided by the curved portion 616b, when the driving side of the supported member 640 connected to the rotating member 620 is displaced downward, the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced downward. Downward displacement is the same.

The difference is that when guided by the curved portion 616b, in the upper half of the curved portion 616b, the driven side of the supported member 640 displaces in the opposite direction (rightward) to the displacement direction (leftward) of the driven side of the supported member 640. ), and in the lower half of the curved portion 616b, the driven side of the supported member 640 is aligned with the displacement direction (leftward) of the driven side of the supported member 640 ( A curved portion 616b is formed so as to be displaced and guided in the leftward direction.

As a result, even before the amount of downward displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 becomes large (inclination start side), the displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 is swung left and right. A large displacement speed on the driven side of 640 can be ensured.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the displacement speed of the driven member 640 from becoming excessive at the end of the tilting displacement of the rotating member 620 . That is, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is vertically displaced along an arbitrary path from a specific initial position to the end position, if the time required for the displacement is the same, the results of integrating the vertical velocities are the same. If the displacement is slow at the start of displacement, the displacement speed increases in the final stage.

When the driven side of the supported member 640 is arranged on the imaginary axis OE1 guided on a straight line extending in the vertical direction shown for comparison in FIG. and becomes maximum at the end of displacement (lower end of displacement) of the supported member 640 . In other words, compared to the vertical displacement amount UX1 of the axis line O1 guided by the guide elongated hole 616 while the rotating member 620 rotates 10 degrees and reaches the displacement lower end, the vertical displacement amount of the imaginary axis line OE1 during the same period. The quantity UE1 becomes large.

Therefore, in the displacement state of the imaginary axis OE1, the driven side of the supported member 640 may bounce back. adversely affect performance.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by adopting the curved portion 616b in the guide slot 616, the range in which the displacement speed on the driven side of the supported member 640 increases is shifted to the displacement start side of the tilting displacement of the rotating member 620. Also, the displacement speed on the driven side of the supported member 640 is made uniform.

Uniformity in this case means not only that the velocity is brought to the same level over the entire range of displacement, but also means that the magnitude of the velocity is suppressed. In particular, in this embodiment, in the tilting displacement of the rotating member 620, the displacement speed of the driven member 640 on the driven side gradually increases on the entry start side into the curved portion 616b, and the supported member 640 enters the lower half portion of the curved portion 616b. It is configured such that the displacement speed of the driven member 640 on the driven side gradually decreases after the start.

That is, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is guided by the curved portion 616b, the displacement of the supported member 640 becomes monotonous by providing a speed difference in the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640. can be avoided.

Furthermore, by reducing the speed required for the driven side of the supported member 640 at the lower end side portion of the curved portion 616b, that is, the amount of displacement required per unit time, the rotating member 620 is moved upward (raised up). Since the amount of displacement for lifting the driven side of the supported member 640 per unit time can be reduced at the start of driving in the case of operation), the load on the drive motor 631 can be reduced.

Next, referring to FIG. 49, the rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660 accompanying the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 will be described. FIG. 49 is a schematic diagram showing changes in the angle θ [degrees] as the rotating member 620 rotates.

The angle θ can be regarded as the relative rotation angle between the rotating member 620 and the supported member 640 about the circular through hole 624 and is directly linked to the rotation of the second decoration rotating member 660 . That is, the magnitude of the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is defined according to the magnitude of the angle θ.

In this embodiment, the rotation transmission ratio between the gear tooth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 and the gear tooth 654a (see FIG. 39) of the first decorative rotating member 650, and the gear of the gear tooth 652a and the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 38) are both set to 1. Therefore, since the angle θ and the rotation angle of the rotation member 657 perpendicular to the axis are the same, the change in the angle θ can be grasped as the change in the attitude of the second decorative rotation member 660 .

The change in angle θ is 45 degrees from the waiting state of the first action unit 600 (see FIG. 41) to the intermediate effect state of the first action unit 600 (see FIG. 44). 90 degrees from the state to the extended state of the first operation unit 600 (see FIG. 46).

In the effect standby state, the second decorative rotating member 660 is in a posture in which the first effect surface 661a is tilted leftward by 45 degrees (the third effect surface 661c is tilted rightward by 45 degrees). Accordingly, every time the state is switched from the intermediate effect state to the extended state, the second decorative rotating member 660 rotates 45 degrees so that the third effect surface 661c faces the front side (see FIG. 43) and then the second effect surface 661c. The effect surface 661b faces the front side (see FIG. 45).

The setting of the angle θ is achieved by designing the elongated guide hole 616 for defining the attitude of the supported member 640 . That is, in this embodiment, the guide slot 616 is designed so as to satisfy both the arrangement of the second decoration rotating member 660 and the attitude of the second decoration rotating member 660 according to the angle θ.

As a result, even if only the sensor for detecting the arrangement of the rotating member 620 is provided as the detection sensor KS1 as in the present embodiment, the output of the detection sensor KS1 is used as the basis of the output of the second decorative rotating member 660. The placement and attitude can be determined by the audio ramp controller 113 (see FIG. 4).

That is, if the extended portion 634b of the transmission gear cam 634 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1, it can be determined that the first operation unit 600 is in the effect standby state (see FIG. 41), and the drive motor 631 is started from that state. , the rotation angle of the rotating member 620 and the arrangement and posture of the second decorative rotating member 660 can be determined.

Here, the amount of change in angle θ is not proportional to the amount of rotation angle of rotating member 620 . Therefore, when judging the arrangement and orientation of the second decorative rotating member 660 from the rotation angle of the drive motor 631, it is not necessary to calculate the numerical values from the rotation angle of the drive motor 631 by proportional calculation. Further, as a result, even when rotating the rotating member 620 at a constant speed, it is possible to avoid the rotation speed of the second decoration rotating member 660 from becoming constant. This will be explained below.

A change in the angle θ is substantially the same as a change in the amount of change in the displacement speed of the driven member 640 on the driven side. That is, the angle change from the intermediate effect state to the extended state is generally greater than the angle change from the effect standby state to the intermediate effect state (approximately 13 degrees while the rotating member 620 rotates 5 degrees). large (approximately 20 degrees during 5 degree rotation of the rotating member 620 while the driven side of the supported member 640 is disposed in the upper half of the curved portion 616b).

On the other hand, the angle change from the intermediate effect state to the extended state gradually decreases from the position where the driven side of the supported member 640 enters the lower half of the curved portion 616b, and finally changes from the effect waiting state to the intermediate effect state. below the level of angular change to state (down to about 7 degrees).

In this way, the numerical value of the angle θ with respect to the rotation per unit angle of the rotating member 620 is configured to change, so that the rotation angle of the second decoration rotating member 660 also changes. can be configured to That is, in a range where the numerical value of the angle θ is small, the rotation angle of the second decoration rotating member 660 tends to be small, and the posture can be easily maintained. The rotation angle of the member 660 is likely to increase, and a state in which the surfaces facing the player (performance surfaces 661a to 661c) can be easily changed quickly can be achieved.

With the above-described configuration, the displacement motion of the second ornamental rotating member 660 can be adjusted. In the displacing operation of the second ornamental rotating member 660, as described above, the arrangement and posture are changed due to the displacement of the supported member 640, and the center of the cylindrical portion formed by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a and rotational displacement about the rotation axis are performed simultaneously.

The rotational angle (angular velocity) of the rotational displacement around the cylindrical portion formed by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a is determined by the following: It becomes conspicuously large at the timing of entering.

That is, in the tilting displacement, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is suppressed until the intermediate effect state is reached, and the supported member 640 moves up and down (bounces back) somewhat from the position of the driven side of the supported member 640 in the intermediate effect state. However, it is possible to maintain the state in which the second decorative rotary member 660 directs the third rendering surface 661c to the front side (see FIG. 43).

On the other hand, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced downward from the intermediate effect state, the rotation speed of the second decorative rotating member 660 increases when the rotating member 620 rotates at a constant speed, and the attitude change in the rotating direction increases. conspicuously visible. That is, it is possible for the player to visually recognize that the second decorative rotating member 660 is instantaneously rotationally displaced.

In the present embodiment, the second rendering surface 661b of the second ornamental rotating member 660 faces the front side at the end of rotation (lower end of displacement) of the rotating member 620, and is placed close to the ornamental fixing member 670. In order to be visually recognized integrally (see FIG. 28), it is desirable to be able to prevent the driven side of the supported member 640 from rebounding upward from the state where the rotating member 620 is arranged at the lower end of displacement.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the curved portion 616bb of the guide slot 616 is configured as described above to equalize the displacement speed of the supported member 640 on the driven side. It is possible to prevent the supported member 640 from becoming excessively displaced on the driven side in the state of being arranged at the lower end of displacement, and prevent the supported member 640 from springing back.

In addition to the fact that the displacement speed is made uniform in this way, the arrangement of the center portions of the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotary member 660 at the end of the downward displacement of the rotary member 620 (for example, the arrangement of the cylindrical portion 643). is closest to the support fastening portion 615 as the rotation shaft of the rotating member 620 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the rotating tip of the rotating member 620 from swaying due to the weight of the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 that are supported on the rotating tip side of the rotating member 620 . Rotational displacement can be stabilized.

In addition, the lower half of the curved portion 616b bounces back around the circular through-hole 624 of the rotating member 620 on the driven side of the supported member 640 at the lower end of the displacement of the rotating member 620 (towards the upper left). is configured to preferably impede displacement of the That is, the lower half portion of the curved portion 616b is slanted in the upper left direction, and the displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 in this direction can be suppressed. Rebounding of member 640 can be prevented.

In other words, in this embodiment, the displacement direction when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced following the displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640, and the case where the driven side of the supported member 640 stops at the end of displacement. is different from the displacement direction of the driven member 640 in .

In the former case, if there is no guide, it is assumed that the supported member 640 is displaced downward to the left along the direction of displacement of the driven member 640 (rotating direction of the rotating member 620). By being guided by 616, it is slightly swung in the horizontal direction along the guide slot 616 and displaced downward.

On the other hand, the latter is a circular trajectory centered on the driving side of the supported member 640 , so the displacement direction is not along the long guide hole 616 but along the width direction of the long guide hole 616 . As a result, displacement of the supported member 640 on the driven side can be suppressed, and rebounding of the supported member 640 can be prevented.

A feature of the displacement of the rotating member 620 in the rising direction will be described. When the state of the first motion unit 600 changes from the extended state to the presentation standby state, the rotating member 620 is displaced in the rising direction.

The load (that is, the driving force generated by the drive motor 631 ) required to raise and displace the rotating member 620 mainly consists of the rotating member 620 , the supported member 640 , and the first decoration provided on the supported member 640 . It is used for upwardly displacing the rotary member 650 and the second decorative rotary member 660 and for rotating the second decorative rotary member 660 .

In other words, the smaller the rotation angle of the second decoration rotating member 660, the less the load required when the rotating member 620 is raised and displaced.

Here, as shown in FIG. 49, in this embodiment, at the time when the rotating member 620 starts rotating from the extended state of the first operating unit 600, the rotation angle is proportional to the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660. It is designed so that the value of the angle .theta. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the load required when the rotating member 620 is raised and displaced.

At the end of the upward displacement of the rotating member 620 in the rising direction, the rotation axis of the second ornamental rotating member 660 centered on the extended support portion 646 of the supported member 640 is aligned with the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 620 ( It is arranged in a posture facing up and down).

Therefore, when the rotational displacement of the second ornamental rotating member 660 is stopped at the end of the upward displacement of the rotating member 620, the load applied to the rotating member 620 as the inertia force in the rotational direction of the second ornamental rotating member 660 is The moving member 620 can be twisted about its longitudinal axis, and the rotating member 620 can withstand a slight elastic displacement locally by distributing the load in the longitudinal direction.

Therefore, compared to the case where the rotation axis of the second decorative rotating member 660 is perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 620 in a front view, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the rotating member 620 is broken. . In addition, excessive elastic displacement of the rotating member 620 is suppressed by abutment with the front lid member 612, and a load that cannot be received by the rotating member 620 is endured by elastic deformation of the front lid member 612. Therefore, damage to the rotating member 620 can be prevented.

Displacement of the projecting decorative portion 652b will be described. The projecting decorative portion 652b is a member that rotates around the axis O1, and the rotational angle thereof corresponds to the angle θ described above. Therefore, even when the change in the layout of the driven side of the supported member 640 is small, such as when the performance standby state changes to the overhanging state, the overhanging decorative portion 652b rotates as long as the angle θ changes. .

The change in angle θ from the presentation standby state to the projecting state is about 135 degrees, and the projecting decorative portion 652b is rotated by about 45 degrees. Here, if the protruding decorative portion 652b rotates counterclockwise by 45 degrees from the effect standby state, it seems to collide with the other operation units 800 (left and right fixed decorative members) in the assembled state (see FIG. 28). In the present embodiment, since the supported member 640 itself, which serves as a reference for the rotation of the overhanging decorative portion 652b, rotates clockwise, the other operating units 800 (left and right fixed decorative members) can rotate. Collisions can be avoided.

In other words, since the decorative projecting portion 652b is configured to be displaceable with respect to the supported member 640, the space required for displacing the decorative projecting portion 652b can be reduced.

For example, when the projecting decorative portion 652b is a portion that is fixedly arranged with respect to the supported member 640 in the projecting state of the first operation unit 600, the arrangement of the supported member 640 changes from the projecting state to the rendering standby state. , the projecting decorative portion 652b projects to the upper left side of the supported member 640, collides with another operation unit 800, or partially hides the projecting display on the front side of the display area of the third pattern display device 81. There is a possibility that it will have an adverse effect on the performance.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the driven side of the supported member 640 is used as a reference, and the protruding decorative portion 652b is rotationally displaced in the direction opposite to the rotational direction of the driven side of the supported member 640. When 640 protrudes toward the third pattern display device 81 side, it protrudes interlockingly, and when the supported member 640 is displaced from the third pattern display device 81 to the retracted side, it interlocks and retreats. Therefore, the projecting decorative portion 652 b in the retracted state can be arranged on the side away from the third pattern display device 81 .

The rotation angle of the overhang decorative portion 652b with respect to the supported member 640 in the player's line of sight can be obtained from the difference between the change in the angle θ and the change in the posture of the supported member 640. FIG. That is, the difference between the change width of the angle θ of about 135 degrees and the posture change angle of the supported member 640 of about 90 degrees is 45 degrees.

Here, in this embodiment, the difference between the change in the angle θ and the change in the attitude of the supported member 640 is the same regardless of the arrangement of the rotating member 620 . That is, as shown in FIG. 47, when the angle .theta. The difference between the change and the change is calculated as ((a1+b1)-(a2+b2))-(b1-b2)=(a1-a2), which is equal to the rotation angle of the rotation member 620. FIG.

Therefore, since the rotation angle of the decorative projecting portion 652b with respect to the attitude of the supported member 640 is equal to the rotation angle of the rotating member 620, when the rotating member 620 is rotated at a constant angular velocity, Although the displacement speed of the supporting member 640 is not constant, the angular speed of rotation of the overhang decorative portion 652b with respect to the attitude of the supported member 640 is constant.

Therefore, the player will feel as if the projecting decorative portion 652b arranged on the supported member 640 is driven at a constant angular velocity by a driving means different from the driving motor 631 for driving the rotating member 620. can be visually recognized.

By configuring in this way, the displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b with respect to the supported member 640 is such that there are sections where there is sliding movement and there are sections where there is rotational movement from the player's eye level. The displacement mode of the projecting decorative portion 652b can be visually recognized as a soft displacement mode as if it were not a machine.

This effect is achieved by designing the displacement of the supported member 640 by dividing it into a section in which the change in posture is large relative to the amount of displacement in the sliding direction and a section in which the change in posture is small relative to the amount of displacement in the sliding direction. be able to. That is, the decorative projecting portion 652b rotates with respect to the supported member 640 according to the rotation angle of the rotating member 620, and the displacement of the decorative projecting portion 652b corresponds to the displacement of the supported member 640 from the player's point of view. It is influenced by the side that becomes dominant as

Therefore, it is possible to visually recognize that the overhang decorative portion 652b is rotationally displaced in a section in which the posture change is large with respect to the displacement amount in the sliding direction, and is stretched in a section in which the posture change is small relative to the displacement amount in the sliding direction. It can be visually recognized as if the outward decoration portion 652b is slid.

As described above, the rotating member 620 can be rotated and displaced so as to constitute the effect waiting state, the intermediate effect state and the overhanging state, and the case of being displaced from one end of displacement to the other end of displacement has been described. However, the driving direction may be switched so as to displace in the opposite direction at an intermediate position in the displacement range.

For example, after rotating and displacing the rotating member 620 from the effect standby state to the intermediate effect state, the drive direction of the drive motor 631 may be reversed so as to return to the effect standby state. In this case, since it is necessary to stop the rotating member 620 in the middle of its descent, it may be necessary to set the rotating speed of the rotating member 620 to be low in order to set the stop position accurately.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the numerical value of the angle θ (see FIG. 49) tends to increase in the vicinity of the intermediate effect state compared to the effect standby state. The magnitude of the angle θ corresponds to the magnitude of rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660, as described above.

Therefore, in the vicinity of the intermediate effect state in which the amount of rotation of the second decoration rotating member 660 increases, the portion of the driving force allocated to the second decoration rotating member 660 increases. The amount allocated to the rotational displacement can be reduced, and the rotational displacement of the rotational member 620 can be automatically suppressed.

In other words, the rotational speed of the rotating member 620 can be reduced as the amount of rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660 increases, so the rotating speed of the rotating member 620 is set to be low in advance. Even if it is not set, the rotation member 620 can be easily stopped in the vicinity of the intermediate effect state.

Next, the second operating unit 700 will be described. The second motion unit 700 is a motion unit that is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 below the opening 511a of the rear case 510, and is the field of view of the player viewing the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 28). In order to secure the production waiting state (see FIG. 28) to retreat below the opening 511a, and the overhanging state (see FIG. 30) that is arranged on the front side of the third symbol display device 81 and attracts attention, and in between The state is mainly switched between an intermediate effect state (see FIG. 35) as the state of .

50 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear case 510 and the second operation unit 700, and FIG. 51 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear case 510 and the second operation unit 700. FIG. In FIGS. 50 and 51, mainly the members around the up/down reversal effect device 770 are illustrated in a disassembled state, and the up/down reversal effect device 770 is illustrated in a non-disassembled state.

As shown in FIGS. 50 and 51 , the second operation unit 700 includes a right front plate member 710 fastened to the lower right corner of the rear case 510 and a front plate member 710 between the right front plate member 710 and the rear case 510 . a rotating arm member 720 arranged to be rotatable about the cylindrical projecting portion 511b of the rear case 510; An elevating plate member 740 configured to be vertically displaceable by connecting the tip of the rotating arm member 720 so as to be guided, and a left rear side which is fastened and fixed to the lower left corner of the rear case 510 on the back side of the elevating plate member 740. A plate member 750 , a pair of front side support members 760 configured as a left and right pair and fastened and fixed to the front sides of the right front plate member 710 and the left rear plate member 750 , and the front side of the metal rod 702 fastened and fixed to the rear case 510 . and an up-and-down reversal effect device 770 configured to be capable of displacing the up-and-down plate member 740 and the front side support member 760 in a combination of up-and-down displacement and front-back direction displacement.

The right front plate member 710 includes a transmission support portion 711 that supports each component of the drive transmission device 730, a gap forming portion 712 that is recessed from the rear side at the left edge portion and forms a gap with the rear case 510, A plurality of (three in this embodiment) detection sensors 713 arranged to detect the arrangement of the detected portion 735 of the drive transmission device 730, and a sensor 713 that faces the front side as it goes upward on the front side of the left side. A front upper inclined portion 714 is formed so as to be inclined and formed so as to be able to guide the rotary cylinder portion 774e of the up/down reversal effect device 770, and a female screw portion into which a fastening screw inserted from the rear side of the rear case 510 is screwed is formed. and a plurality of fastened portions 718 .

The detection sensors 713 are arranged at intervals such that a plurality of photocoupler type sensors are arranged with detection grooves at positions where the detected portion 735 can enter. Each detection sensor 713 detects the position of the detected portion 735 in the production standby state of the second operation unit 700, the position of the detected portion 735 in the intermediate production state of the second operation unit 700, and the extension of the second operation unit 700. , the position of the detected portion 735 in the state.

That is, the detection sensor 713 is configured to be able to switch the output depending on whether the second operation unit 700 is in an effect standby state, an intermediate effect state, or an extended state, and the output result is used by the sound lamp control device 113 (FIG. 4) is configured to be able to grasp the state of the second operation unit 700 .

The rotating arm member 720 is pivotally supported by a cylindrical projecting portion 511b projecting from the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510 toward the front side, and is formed in a long plate shape with a V shape when viewed from the front. and a support cylinder portion 722 that protrudes rearward in a cylindrical shape from a bent portion of the main body portion 721 and has an inner peripheral side shape formed in a size that allows the cylindrical projecting portion 511b to be inserted. , a long hole portion 723 drilled along the longitudinal direction at the right end portion of the main body portion 721, and a front (projecting direction of the cylindrical projecting portion 711a) at the left end portion of the main body portion 721. (direction parallel to ), and a cylindrical fastened portion 724 having a female screw formed on the inner peripheral side, and a rearward at an intermediate position between the cylindrical fastened portion 724 and the support cylinder portion 722. Between the cylindrical fastened portion 725 which protrudes in a cylindrical shape and has a female screw formed on the inner peripheral side and the rear case 510 which is wound around the supporting cylindrical portion 722, the body portion 721 is moved upward (left side). and a torsion spring SP2 that applies an urging force in the direction of lifting the

The left side of the main body portion 721 is stepped so as to be displaced toward the front side compared to the base end side portion of the support cylinder portion 722 . 701 is provided.

The support plate 701 is a plate-like portion that is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510, and has an arc-shaped long hole portion 701a that is bored so that the cylindrical fastened portion 725 can be guided. A fastening screw inserted through the long hole portion 701a with a ring-shaped collar C3 interposed therebetween is screwed into the cylindrical portion to be fastened 725, so that the rotating arm member 720 is moved to the support plate through the cylindrical portion to be fastened 725. It is supported by 701 so that it cannot fall off.

Since the support plate 701 is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510 , the left portion of the rotating arm member 720 is restricted from moving away from the rear case 510 toward the front side. As a result, it is possible to prevent the load applied to the left side of the rotating arm member 720 from tilting the rotating arm member 720 toward the front side, thereby stably supporting the displacement of the rotating arm member 720. be able to.

The right side portion of the body portion 721 is arranged in the gap between the rear case 510 and the gap forming portion 712 . That is, the displacement of the right side portion of the main body portion 721 in the front-rear direction is restricted by the back case 510 and the gap forming portion 712 .

The elongated hole portion 723 is formed in such a shape that a straight line extending in the longitudinal direction passes through the center of the support cylinder portion 722 . Therefore, when the load applied to the long hole portion 723 is directed in the longitudinal direction of the long hole portion 723, the component of the load in the rotational direction of the rotary arm member 720 is zero.

The drive transmission device 730 is a device for transmitting a driving force through an elongated hole portion 723 of the rotating arm member 720. The drive motor 731 is fastened and fixed to the right front plate member 710 from the front side. , a transmission gear 733 meshing with the driving gear 732, and a gear cam member 734 meshing with the transmission gear 733.

The transmission gear 733 and the gear cam member 734 are pivotally supported by a plurality of cylindrical projecting portions 711a projecting cylindrically from the back side of the right front plate member 710 at corresponding positions. A female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical projecting portion 711a, and a fastening screw that is inserted through the shaft holes of the transmission gear 733 and the gear cam member 734 can be screwed therein. By screwing and fixing these fastening screws, the transmission gear 733 and the gear cam member 734 are rotatably supported by the cylindrical projecting portion 711a.

The transmission support portion 711 includes the above-described cylindrical projecting portion 711a and an arc-shaped hole 711b formed in an arc around the cylindrical projecting portion 711a that pivotally supports the gear cam member 734 .

The gear cam member 734 has a detected portion 735 projecting toward the front side in an arc shape centering on the rotating shaft portion and is formed so as to be able to be inserted into the arc-shaped hole 711b, and the gear cam member 734 is extended so as to have a longer diameter than the gear portion. and a cylindrical protruding portion 736a protruding cylindrically from the tip of the extending portion 736 to the rear side.

The detected portion 735 is formed so as to be arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 713 of the right front plate member 710, and the output from the detection sensor 713 determines the attitude of the gear cam member 734 to the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4). is configured as a part to make it detectable.

The cylindrical projecting portion 736a is formed so as to be able to be inserted into the long hole portion 723 of the rotating arm member 720, and the displacement of the cylindrical projecting portion 736a is transmitted to the rotating arm member 720 via the long hole portion 723. be done.

A female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical projecting portion 736a, and a fastening screw that is inserted through the center hole of the ring-shaped collar C3 can be screwed therein. By screwing and fixing the fastening screw, the rotating arm member 720 is connected to the cylindrical projecting portion 736a so as not to fall off.

The elevating plate member 740 is a member that moves up and down as the rotating arm member 720 rotates. It has long horizontal members 742 that are fastened and fixed on the left and right sides.

The guided member 741 is formed so that the metal rod 702 fixed to the rear case 510 in a vertical direction can be inserted through the guided member 741 , and the guided member 741 can be vertically displaced along the metal rod 702 . The tips of the protrusions protruding from the left and right sides of the guided member 741 to the rear side come into contact with the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510, thereby restricting the axial rotation of the guided member 741. The posture of the guided member 741 is stabilized.

As the posture of the guided member 741 is stabilized, the posture of the horizontal member 742 fastened and fixed to the guided member 741 is also stabilized.

The horizontally elongated member 742 has a long hole portion 743 formed in an oval shape that is long in the left and right direction with a vertical width that allows the cylindrical to-be-fastened portion 724 of the rotating arm member 720 to pass through, and an upper side of the long hole portion 743 . A cylindrical portion 744 protruding cylindrically on the front side, and a pair of guide portions 745 disposed below the bottom portion at positions equidistant from the cylindrical portion 744 to the left and right. Prepare.

A fastening screw inserted through the elongated hole portion 743 with the ring-shaped collar C3 interposed therebetween is screwed into the cylindrical portion to be fastened 724 , whereby the elevating plate member 740 is turned into a rotating arm via the cylindrical portion to be fastened 724 . It is supported by the member 720 so as not to fall off.

The cylindrical portion 744 is a portion through which the insertion cylindrical portion 773 of the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 is inserted, and supports the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 so as to be displaceable back and forth. That is, the elevation reversal effect device 770 is not fixed to the elevation plate member 740, but is arranged on the front side of the elevation plate member 740 so as to be displaceable back and forth with the elevation plate member 740 as a reference.

A coil spring CS2 is arranged so as to wind around the cylindrical portion 744 and the insertion cylindrical portion 773 . The biasing force of the coil spring CS2 acts in the direction of separating the lifting plate member 740 and the lifting/lowering reversal effect device 770 from each other.

The guide portion 745 is composed of a pair of left and right guide portions, and includes a longitudinally elongated plate portion 745a and a rotating cylinder rotatably supported by a pair of front and rear shaft portions projecting outward from the plate portion 745a to the left and right. and a portion 745b.

The rotary tube portion 745b rotates when the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 described above is displaced back and forth, and functions as a portion that guides the front and back displacement, the details of which will be described later.

The left rear plate member 750, like the front upper inclined portion 714 of the right front plate member 710, is inclined toward the front side as it goes upward on the front side of the right side, and is formed with a rotary cylinder portion 774e of the elevation reversal effect device 770. and a plurality of fastened portions 752 formed with female screw portions into which fastening screws inserted from the rear side of the rear case 510 are screwed.

The blindfold decorative member 768 has a three-dimensional decoration portion 768a formed in a three-dimensional shape from a light-transmitting resin material. , the three-dimensional decoration portion 768a is configured to be illuminated by the light emitted from the LED.

The front side support member 760 includes a fixing plate portion 761 having an insertion hole through which a fastening screw is inserted, and a fixing plate portion 761 which is arranged adjacent to the left and right inner sides of the fixing plate portion 761 and whose back surface faces upward. and a receiving inclined portion 762 which is inclined in a manner facing the front side as much as possible.

The fixing plate portion 761 is fastened and fixed to the front side of the right front plate member 710 or the left rear plate member 750 by screwing a fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole from the front side into the corresponding female screw portion. It is a plate part that

In this fixed position, the receiving slope portion 762 is arranged in front of the front upper slope portions 714 and 751 . That is, a guide path is formed by the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portions 714 and 751, and the rotating cylinder portion 774e of the up/down reversal effect device 770 is guided along this guide path, so that the up/down reversal effect device 770 moves forward and backward. It is configured to be vertically displaced while being displaced to . The vertical displacement will be described below.

52(a) is a cross-sectional view of the second motion unit 700 and the center frame 86 along line LIIa-LIIa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 52(b) is a cross-sectional view of second motion unit 700 along line LIIb-LIIb in FIG. and a cross-sectional view of the center frame 86. FIG. 52(a) and 52(b) show the effect waiting state of the second operation unit 700. FIG.

53(a) is a cross-sectional view of the second motion unit 700 and the center frame 86 along line LIIIa-LIIIa in FIG. 33, and FIG. 53(b) is a cross-sectional view of second motion unit 700 along line LIIIb-LIIIb in FIG. and a cross-sectional view of the center frame 86. FIG. In FIGS. 53(a) and 53(b), the intermediate rendering state of the second action unit 700 is illustrated.

54(a) is a cross-sectional view of the second motion unit 700 and the center frame 86 taken along line LIVa-LIVa of FIG. 30, and FIG. 54(b) is a cross-sectional view of second motion unit 700 taken along line LIVb-LIVb of FIG. and a cross-sectional view of the center frame 86. FIG. 54(a) and 54(b) illustrate the extended state of the second operation unit 700. FIG.

The up-and-down displacement of the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 of the second motion unit 700 shown in FIGS. Driving force transmission when the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 is displaced up and down will be described. In this description, FIGS. 28, 30 and 33 will be referred to as needed.

At the start of driving force transmission from the performance standby state (see FIG. 28), the displacement direction of the cylindrical projecting portion 736a (see FIG. Since it is designed to be parallel to the direction, the displacement resistance generated when the gear cam member 734 starts rotating can be suppressed. Moreover, the same thing holds true in the overhanging state as well.

On the other hand, in the intermediate effect state (see FIG. 30), the displacement direction of the cylindrical protruding portion 736a is perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the elongated hole portion 723, so that the gear cam member 734 receives from the rotating arm member 720 in the rotating direction. By maximizing the displacement resistance, the rotational displacement of the gear cam member 734 can be easily stopped.

As shown in FIGS. 52 to 54, the up/down reversal effect device 770 of the second motion unit 700 is arranged on the back side under the center frame 86, and is displaced upward toward the inside of the center frame 86. Along with this, it is configured to be displaced to the front side in the front-rear direction.

The displacement resistance of this displacement is determined by the configuration in which the rotary cylinder portion 774e of the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 is guided by the receiving slope portion 762 and the front upper slope portions 714 and 751, the first horizontal plate 774b of the up-and-down reversal effect device 770, and the 2, the lateral plate 774c is guided by the rotating cylinder portion 745b of the lifting plate member 740, and the amount of the load is reduced.

That is, the pair of rotating cylindrical portions 774e includes the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portions 714 and 751 which are arranged at symmetrical positions (the front upper inclined portion 751 is arranged on the left side not shown in FIG. 52 and shown in FIG. 56). ), and by rolling the rotary tube portion 774e around the cylindrical portion 774d, it is displaced along the receiving slope portion 762 and the front upper slope portions 714 and 751. The displacement resistance of the body member 771 can be reduced.

Furthermore, by designing the arrangement of the rotating cylinder portions 745b aligned in the front-to-rear direction, the front rotating cylinder portion 745b is arranged slightly upward. This prevents the cylindrical portion 774e from applying an excessive load to the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portions 714 and 751. As shown in FIG.

That is, in this embodiment, the center of gravity position (rotational axis position) of the effect device 780 is designed to be positioned slightly forward of the front-rear center of the main body member 771, and the main body member 771 is always tilted forward due to gravity. direction is biased. Due to the influence of this biasing force, the first horizontal plate 774b and the second horizontal plate 774c are likely to be displaced such that the front side is lowered and the rear side is raised.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front rotating cylinder portion 745b, which is closely arranged when the front side of the first horizontal plate 774b is lowered, is arranged slightly upward, and is closely arranged when the rear side of the second horizontal plate 774c is raised. The rear rotating cylinder portion 745b is arranged slightly downward. Therefore, forward tilting displacement of the main body member 771 can be effectively suppressed.

Furthermore, according to this configuration, since the front rotary cylinder portion 745b has a gap with the second horizontal plate 774c, it can stably roll with the first horizontal plate 774b. , the rear rotary cylinder portion 745b has a gap with the first horizontal plate 774b, so that it can stably roll with the second horizontal plate 774c. As a result, the rotating cylinder portion 745b can be caused to roll normally, and the displacement resistance when the main body member 771 is displaced in the front-rear direction can be reduced.

The displacement of the up/down reversal effect device 770 to the front side is caused by the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 in addition to the above-described shape guidance. Therefore, when the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 is displaced to the front side, it is possible to reduce the displacement resistance in the front-rear direction displacement as compared to when it is lowered.

The up-and-down reversal effect device 770 is vertically displaced by the driving force of the driving motor 731, and the driving force is divided into vertical displacement and longitudinal displacement. In the vertical displacement, the burden of the upward displacement is relatively large due to the need to resist gravity, but the longitudinal displacement in this case can be assisted by the urging force of the coil spring CS2. Therefore, it is possible to avoid an excessive driving force required when the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 is displaced upward.

The length of the coil spring CS2 is set so as to have a natural length in the intermediate effect state of the second action unit 700 (see FIG. 53). That is, when the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 is arranged below the arrangement of the intermediate effect state, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 displaces the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 in the front-rear direction by the driving force of the drive motor 731. While acting in the assisting direction, the urging force of the coil spring CS2 does not act on the longitudinal displacement of the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 when the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 is arranged above the arrangement of the intermediate effect state.

As a result, the arrangement of the up/down reversal effect device 770 can be easily maintained in the intermediate effect state. For example, when the drive motor 731 is controlled to be driven from the standby state of the second motion unit 700 and is controlled to stop the second motion unit 700 in the intermediate effect state, the stop timing is slightly different from the ideal. Even if it becomes faster, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 can displace the second motion unit 700 toward the intermediate effect state side.

Also, for example, when the same stop control is performed, even if the stop timing is slightly later than the ideal, the second motion unit 700 descends by its own weight, and the descent due to its own weight is caused by the biasing force of the coil spring CS2. By being suppressed, the second action unit 700 can be brought closer to the intermediate effect state side and the arrangement can be maintained.

Further, for example, when the drive motor 731 is controlled to be driven from the extended state of the second motion unit 700, and the stop control of the drive motor 731 is performed so as to stop the second motion unit 700 in the intermediate effect state, the vertical reversal effect device 770 Since the urging force of the coil spring CS2 acts as a displacement resistance when passes the intermediate effect state downward, it is possible to easily prevent a downward displacement larger than the intermediate effect state. Then, even after the drive motor 731 is controlled to stop, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 is applied, so that the second motion unit 700 can be moved toward the intermediate effect state side.

Here, the effect of displacing the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 in the front-rear direction along with the up-and-down displacement will be described. As a premise, a movable accessory is known that can be switched between a state in which it is displaced inside and outside a frame bordered by a center frame 86 to attract the player's attention and a state in which it retreats from the player's field of vision.

Most of such movable accessories are designed with emphasis on appearance when placed inside the center frame 86, and when retracted to the outside of the center frame 86, the player does not pay attention to them. Under the assumption that it will not be done, we often did not consider appearance.

Recently, however, the front-to-rear distance from the third pattern display device 81 to the center frame 86 is long. , Since the line of sight reaches the position outside the rear side of the center frame 86 (the position behind the game area), if the appearance of the movable role in the state of retreating to the position outside the rear side of the center frame 86 is bad, the player may may diminish interest.

In contrast, in this embodiment, not only the front side (the first main decorative surface 787a1 in FIG. 52) of the covering member 787, but also the back side (the second main decorative surface 787b1 in FIG. 52) and the upper and lower surfaces (FIG. 52) After forming the decorative surface on the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 and the second secondary decorative surface 787b2), the displacement direction of the up/down reversal effect device 770 is set to the player side (front side) as the base end toward the back side. The line that spreads out toward the rear (inclining downward toward the rear), that is, the displacement direction along the direction of the line of sight at the edge of the player's field of view, so that each decorative surface can easily fit in the field of view of the player. Configure.

As a result, each decorative surface of the covering member 787 can be placed within the visual field of the player without difficulty. Details of each decorative surface of the covering member 787 will be described later. 54, the first main decorative surface 787a1) and the upper side surface (first secondary decorative surface 787a2 or second secondary decorative surface 787b2, in FIG. 52 the first secondary The decorative surface 787a2) and the decorations (graphics, patterns, letters, pictures, etc.) formed thereon are formed as mutually related decorations.

In other words, the first main decorative surface 787a1 and the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 are formed as a first decoration related to each other, and the second main decorative surface 787b1 and the second secondary decorative surface 787b2 are formed as a second decoration related to each other. and the first decoration and the second decoration are formed as decorations different from each other.

The decoration formed on the upper surface is arranged in the front and rear gap between the center frame 86 and the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 26) arranged on the back side thereof when the second action unit 700 is waiting for the effect. Therefore, it is necessary to switch between a state of paying attention to the ball flowing down the game area formed outside the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) and a state of paying attention to the display effect developed by the third symbol display device 81. It is easy for the player to enter the field of view when moving the player's line of sight.

Therefore, the contents of the decoration (notification contents, for example, “chance” or “jackpot”) visible to the player through the covering member 787 in the overhanging state can be displayed on the covering member 787 even in the waiting state for the effect. It may be visible to the player through the sides.

As a result, the third pattern display device 81 is displaced to the arrangement of the performance standby state so as to be easily visually recognized, and the player's attention can be continuously attracted to the covering member 787 arranged inconspicuously.

Further, as will be described later, the covering member 787 is configured to be rotationally displaceable so as to switch the decorative surface facing the player side, so that the contents of the decorative surface visible to the player in the overhanging state are different. case can occur.

For example, if the vertical reversal effect device 770 is placed in the effect standby state before the player confirms the appearance of the covering member 787 in the overhanging state (if overlooked or if the operation speed is excessively fast), the front If the contents of the decoration surface can be grasped only from the side surface, most of the front side surface is hidden by the game board 13 in the standby state of the effect, so the player can be displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, the attention to the covering member 787 is reduced.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, when adopting a configuration in which the contents of the decorative surface can be grasped even from the upper side, the player can visually recognize the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 in the effect standby state, so that it is covered in the overhanging state. Through the setting member 787, it is possible to grasp the contents of the decoration (notification contents, such as "chance" or "jackpot") that can be visually recognized by the player.

As a result, for a player who misses the appearance of the covering member 787 in the overhanging state, the content notified by the state of the covering member 787 is displayed on the visible decorative surface of the covering member 787 even in the standby state for the effect. You can keep reporting. As a result, regardless of each state such as the effect waiting state or the projecting state, the attention force of the covering member 787 can be maintained high.

In the present embodiment, the up/down reversal effect device 770 of the second operation unit 700 is displaced in the front-rear direction from the state arranged on the back side of the rear end surface of the game area to the front of the rear end surface of the game area. Configuration as such displacement will be described.

As shown in FIG. 52, when the second motion unit 700 is in the performance standby state, the front surface of the covering member 787 and the back surface of the center frame 86 are arranged to face each other, and the center frame 86 is located on the covering member 787 side. A flow path forming portion 86a is provided so as to protrude from the .

The flow path forming portion 86a is formed by the center of the center frame 86 after a ball jumping into a warp flow path (rolling path) formed inside the center frame 86 from the left and right inlets of the center frame 86 reaches the lower edge of the center frame 86. The rear side part of the guide flow path for once swinging the ball that has flowed down the lower side rolling surface of the frame 86 backward and again forward, and guiding it toward the first prize winning port 64 arranged in the game area. (see FIG. 9). That is, the rear end surface BE1 of the game area is arranged on the rear side of the front surface of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) by the flow path forming portion 86a.

Since the ball flowing down the flow passage forming portion 86a has a high probability of entering the first winning hole 64, the flow forming portion 86a attracts a lot of attention, especially when the ball jumps inside the center frame 86. , the player's line of sight is likely to gather on the flow path forming portion 86a. To make it easy to construct a state in which the effect device 780 in the effect standby state enters the field of view of a player because the effect device 780 is arranged right behind the flow path forming part 86a in the effect standby state (see FIG. 52). can be done.

When the second motion unit 700 is in the effect waiting state, the covering member 787 is arranged on the rear side of the rear end surface BE1 (see FIG. 52(a)). The front portion is arranged on the rear end surface BE1 (see FIG. 53(a)), and in the extended state of the second operation unit 700, the front portion of the covering member 787 is arranged on the front side of the rear end surface BE1.

That is, the covering member 787 is displaced upward toward the inner side of the center frame 86, and at the same time, is displaced toward the front side so as to enter the same front and rear positions as the front and rear positions of the game area. Therefore, it is possible to make it appear to the player that the covering member 787 is riding on the center frame 86 and moving toward the front side (approaching the player side).

It should be noted that the effect device 780 is displaced in the longitudinal direction as the second motion unit 700 is vertically displaced. It is configured to match (match) the front and rear positions of the second rendering surface 661 b of the rotating member 660 .

As a result, the front and rear positions of the second effect surface 661b (see FIG. 29) of the first action unit 600 (see FIG. 29) and the effect device 780 (FIG. 30) of the second action unit 700, which are arranged close to each other in the extended state when viewed from the front. will match, and these can be made easier to visually recognize integrally.

On the other hand, the arrangement of the effect device 780 in the front-rear direction is lower in the middle effect state and the effect standby state than in the extended state, so the box-shaped member of the first operation unit 600 is lower than in the extended state. 661 and the rendering device 780 can be separated (independently) to facilitate visual recognition.

The up-and-down reversal effect device 770 includes a body member 771 connected and supported by the lift plate member 740, and a effect device 780 configured to be displaceable with the body member 771 as a reference. Next, details of the up/down reversal effect device 770 will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG.

55 is an exploded front perspective view of the up/down reversal effect device 770, and FIG. 56 is an exploded rear perspective view of the up/down reversal effect device 770. FIG. 50 and 51 will be referred to in the description of FIGS. 55 and 56 as needed.

The main body member 771 has a lower elongated portion 772 elongated in the left-right direction, and an insertion cylindrical portion 773 protruding from the left-right central position of the lower elongated portion 772 toward the back side. , a pair of guide extending portions 774 extending from the left and right ends of the lower long portion 772 toward the back side, and a vertically extending connecting portion integrally formed with the left and right central position of the lower long portion 772. An upper long part 775 formed to be long in the left-right direction, and a direct-acting plate member 784 of the production device 780 disposed on the back side from both left and right sides of the upper long part 775 can be guided in the left-right direction. a plurality of guide portions 776, a transmission device holding plate 777 that is fastened and fixed from the back side to the left and right center of the upper long portion 775 to support the drive transmission device, the lower long portion 772 and the upper long portion A light emitting means 778 fastened and fixed to the front side of the portion 775 is provided.

The insertion tubular portion 773 is a portion that is inserted through the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 744 of the elevating plate member 740, and is formed in a dimensional relationship that allows sliding on the inner periphery of the cylindrical portion 744. The member 771 is displaced in the front-rear direction. That is, by inserting the tubular portion 773 through the cylindrical portion 744, tilting displacement of the body member 771 in the front-rear direction with respect to the lift plate member 740 can be suppressed.

The guide extending portion 774 includes a vertical plate 774a whose width faces the vertical direction, a first horizontal plate 774b which is connected to the upper end of the vertical plate 774a and whose width direction faces the left-right direction, and a width of the first horizontal plate 774b. A second horizontal plate 774c that is connected to the vertical plate 774a on the lower side and whose width direction faces the horizontal direction (parallel to the width of the first horizontal plate 774b) protrudes from the left and right outer surfaces of the vertical plate 774a toward the left and right outer sides. A pair of upper and lower cylindrical portions 774d provided and a rotating cylindrical portion 774e rotatably supported by the cylindrical portions 774d are provided.

The second horizontal plate 774c has a longer width than the width direction end portions of the first horizontal plate 774b so as to extend inward in the left and right direction. In the assembled state, the widthwise expanded portion is arranged to face the lower bottom portion of the lift plate member 740 in the vertical direction. That is, by securing the width length to such an extent that the second horizontal plate 774c is arranged to face the lower bottom portion of the elevating plate member 740 in the vertical direction, the main body member 771 tilts forward with the elevating plate member 740 as a reference. can be suppressed.

A pair of the tubular portions 774d are not arranged in a vertical direction, but the upper tubular portion 774d is shifted forward compared to the lower tubular portion 774d. This deviation is set so that the inclination of the front upper inclined portions 714 and 751 and the direction of the straight line connecting the centers of the pair of cylindrical portions 774d are parallel (see FIG. 52(a)). That is, by arranging the pair of tubular portions 774d in parallel with the inclination of the front upper inclined portions 714, 751, the pair of upper and lower rotating tubular portions 774e are brought into contact with the front upper inclined portions 714, 751 or the receiving inclined portion 762 at the same time. can be brought into contact. As a result, the pair of upper and lower rotary cylinder portions 774e can be stably rolled, and localized load can be easily avoided.

The guide portions 776 are arranged on both left and right sides in a manner in which a pair of left and right guide portions 776 are arranged vertically, and a plurality of tubular portions 776a having female threads formed on the inner peripheral side are fastened and fixed so as to connect the pair of left and right tubular portions 776a. and a plurality of drop-off prevention plate portions 776b.

The drop-off prevention plate portion 776b has insertion holes drilled at positions corresponding to the plurality of cylindrical portions 776a, and fastening screws inserted through the insertion holes from the back side are screwed into the cylindrical portion 776a. It is a portion that is fastened and fixed to the cylindrical portion 776a by , and functions as a portion for preventing the linear motion plate member 784 from coming off, the details of which will be described later.

The transmission device holding plate 777 includes a motor support plate portion 777a for supporting the drive motor 782, an insertion hole 777b drilled in the motor support plate portion 777a at a position through which the drive shaft of the drive motor 782 can be inserted, and A cylindrical protruding portion 777c that protrudes cylindrically toward the front side below the insertion hole 777b, a pair of insertion holes 777d that are drilled at both upper and lower ends so that fastening screws can be inserted, and a fastening screw on the back side. and a fixed wiring retaining member 777e.

The cylindrical protruding portion 777c has a female screw formed on the inner peripheral side, and a fastening screw is screwed into the cylindrical protruding portion 777c while being inserted into the transmission gear 781b, thereby axially supporting the upside-down reversing member 781 so as not to come off. part.

A fastening screw to be screwed into a female threaded portion 775a formed in a corresponding portion of the upper long portion 775 can be inserted through the insertion hole 777d. is fastened to the

The wiring retaining member 777e is a portion for retaining and fastening the electric wiring connected to the drive motor 782 in a gap between it and the transmission device holding plate 777, and has a shape along the outer frame of the transmission device holding plate 777. , the overall rigidity of the transmission device holding plate 777 can be improved.

The light emitting means 778 consists of two left and right elongated plate-like upper and lower electrical boards 778a on which light emitting members such as LEDs are arranged on the front side, and a light transmission board arranged on the front side of the electrical decoration board 778a. and a light diffusing member 778b which is a plate member formed of a flexible resin material and on which light diffusing processing is formed.

The upper electrical board 778a is provided with a pair of upper and lower detection sensors 778d on the back side. The detection sensor 778d is a photocoupler-type detection device, and is configured to be able to detect the attitude of the upside-down reversing member 781 of the production device 780 by arranging an arcuate projecting portion 781d in the detection groove. will be described later.

The lower light diffusing member 778b has a plurality of fastened portions formed on the back side, and the fastened portions are inserted from the back side into insertion holes drilled in the lower long portion 772 at corresponding positions. The fastening screw is screwed in and fixed, thereby making the fastening screw inconspicuous.

On the other hand, the upper light diffusion member 778b has insertion holes 778c for inserting fastening screws on both left and right sides. By being screwed into the portion 775b, the upper light diffusion member 778b is fastened and fixed.

In this case, the head of the fastening screw faces the front side and may be conspicuous without countermeasures. , the head of the fastening screw fixed to the insertion hole 778c can be hidden by the covering member 787. As shown in FIG.

Therefore, even if the design is such that the head of the fastening screw faces the front side, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the head of the fastening screw is conspicuous and adversely affects the production. In other words, by designing the covering member 787 so as to hide the fastening screw, the degree of freedom in designing the insertion direction of the fastening screw can be increased.

The effect device 780 is a device configured to be displaceable by disposing an outer portion around the upper long portion 775, and is a vertically reversing member 781 pivotally supported by the cylindrical projecting portion 777c of the transmission device holding plate 777. , a drive motor 782 in which a drive gear 782a for transmitting a driving force to the transmission gear 781b of the up/down reversing member 781 is fixed to the drive shaft; a pair of intermediate arm members 783 pivotally supported by the intermediate arm members 783, a pair of linear motion plate members 784 supported by the other end of the intermediate arm members 783 and guided by a guide portion 776 for displacement in the left-right direction; A pair of shaft rotating members 785 arranged between a linear motion plate member 784 and an intermediate arm member 783 and configured to be rotatable (reversible) by a rotating shaft extending in the left-right direction, and the shaft rotating members 785 as a linear motion plate. A pair of shaft support members 786 that jointly support the member 784, a pair of end plate members 785d that are fitted and fixed to the left and right outer tip portions of the shaft rotation member 785 so as not to fall off in a state where the phase is fixed, and A covering member 787 is arranged in front and behind the end plate member 785 d and is formed with a left and right length covering the left and right sides of the upper long portion 775 .

The vertical reversing member 781 includes a main body plate portion 781a formed in a long plate shape, a transmission gear 781b protruding from the rear side of the central portion of the main body plate portion 781a, and a length of the main body plate portion 781a. A pair of cylindrical protrusions 781c protruding cylindrically from both ends in the lengthwise direction to the rear side, and a pair of cylindrical protrusions 781c protruding from the front side of the body plate portion 781a in an arc centered on the central axis of the transmission gear 781b. and an arcuate projecting portion 781d.

The transmission gear 781b has a circular hole extending in the front-rear direction at its center. The upside-down reversing member 781 is rotatably supported by the transmission device holding plate 777 via the transmission gear 781b.

The transmission gear 781b meshes with the drive gear 782a. When the drive motor 782 is energized and the drive gear 782a rotates, the transmission gear 781b also rotates in conjunction with the drive motor 782, thereby rotating the upside-down reversing member 781. That is, the upside-down reversing member 781 can be rotated by energizing the drive motor 782 .

The cylindrical projecting portion 781c pivotally supports the intermediate arm member 783. As shown in FIG. That is, the end portion of the intermediate arm member 783 where the one side support hole 783a is formed is displaced following the cylindrical projecting portion 781c that is displaced as the upside-down reversing member 781 is rotationally displaced.

The arcuate protruding portion 781d is formed so as to be arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 778d of the light emission effect means 778 . That is, the arcuate projecting portion 781d can be arranged on either of the pair of upper and lower detection sensors 778d.

Therefore, by reading the output of the detection sensor 778d, the posture of the upside-down reversing member 781 can be changed to two postures in which the arcuate protruding portion 781d is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 778d, and a posture therebetween (a pair of detection sensors 778d). A position in which the arcuate protruding portions 781d are not arranged in both of the detection grooves).

The intermediate arm member 783 is formed in a long bar shape (narrow plate shape), and has a one-side support hole 783a drilled at one end and pivotally supported by the cylindrical projecting portion 781c, A cylindrical other-side cylindrical portion 783b having an inner peripheral side penetrating at the other end opposite to the support hole 783a, and a bevel-like gear tooth (bevel gear) centered on the other-side cylindrical portion 783b. ) and a bevel tooth 783c formed as a .

A female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical projecting portion 781c, and a fastening screw that is inserted through the one-side support hole 783a from the rear side is screwed into the female screw. As a result, the intermediate arm member 783 is pivotally supported by the upside down member 781 so as not to fall off.

The linear motion plate member 784 is formed in a rectangular plate shape elongated in the left-right direction, and has a cylindrical projecting portion 784a which is inserted into the other side cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783 and protrudes. An arc-shaped plate portion 784b projecting in an arc shape centering on the central axis of the cylindrical projecting portion 784a, and an oblong shape extending parallel to the left-right direction on both upper and lower sides of the cylindrical projecting portion 784a. a pair of long hole portions 784c arranged parallel to each other between the long hole portions 784c, a pair of support plate portions 784d projecting toward the rear side, and an intermediate portion of the support plate portions 784d. A pair of projecting ridges 784e formed as ridges extending in the front-rear direction and protruding on sides facing each other, and a cylindrically-shaped opening at the end of the support plate 784d and opening on the inner peripheral side of the supporting plate 784d. Between a pair of fastened portions 784f having internal threads formed therein, an arrangement hole 784g penetrating between the cylindrical projecting portion 784a and the support plate portion 784d, and a shaft support member 786, a ring-shaped A ring holding half portion 784h having a semicircular surface capable of holding the metal member 785e, and a magnet holding half portion 784i formed in a rectangular box shape so as to be able to hold the magnet Mg between the shaft support member 786. , provided.

The cylindrical protruding portion 784a is formed with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the other side cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783, and has a protruding length slightly longer than the axial length of the other side cylindrical portion 783b. A female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side. That is, the intermediate arm member 783 cannot fall off the cylindrical projecting portion 784a by screwing a fastening screw inserted through the other cylindrical portion 783b from the rear side into the female thread of the cylindrical projecting portion 784a. pivoted on.

The arcuate plate portion 784b is formed in an arcuate shape with an inner peripheral diameter that is slightly longer than the outer peripheral diameter of the other-side cylindrical portion 783b. As a result, the arc-shaped plate portion 784b is arranged close to the other-side cylindrical portion 783b in the assembled state so as to face the other-side cylindrical portion 783b in the radial direction, thereby limiting the tilting displacement of the other-side cylindrical portion 783b with respect to the rotation axis. As a result, the rotational displacement of the intermediate arm member 783 about the other-side cylindrical portion 783b can be stabilized.

The elongated hole portion 784c is an opening through which the cylindrical portion 776a of the main body member 771 is inserted. The linear motion plate member 784 is supported by the main body member 771 so as not to fall off by screwing in the screw.

In the supported state (assembled state), the direct-acting plate member 784 can be slidably displaced along the forming direction of the long hole portion 784c. That is, the linear motion plate member 784 is configured to be slidable in the left-right direction.

The support plate portion 784d is a plate-like portion for holding the metal rod 785a of the axial rotation member 785 so as to suppress vertical displacement, and the ridge portion 784e defines the horizontal arrangement of the metal rod 785a. It functions as a ridge, the details of which will be described later.

The arranging hole 784g is an opening for avoiding interference with the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotating member 785, which will be described later in detail.

The shaft rotating member 785 is a member that is arranged in a left and right pair and is pivotally supported by the linear motion plate member 784. A recessed groove portion 785b formed in the circumferential direction at the center position of the direction, and a bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783, which is a member fixed to the metal rod 785a and disposed at the left and right inner ends of the metal rod 785a. A bevel tooth member 785c in which meshing bevel teeth (bevel gears) are formed, an end plate member 785d disposed at the left and right outer ends of the metal rod 785a and fixed to the metal rod 785a, and the end plate member 785d. A ring-shaped metal member 785e arranged around the metal rod 785a so as to be raised from the end plate member 785d, and a female screw formed inside the end plate member 785d, which is a portion projecting from the left and right inner sides of the end plate member 785d. A rotational position stabilizing portion 785f into which a metal screw is screwed and fixed is provided.

The metal rod 785a is arranged between a pair of support plate portions 784d of the linear motion plate member 784, and the ridge portion 784e is arranged to enter the recessed groove portion 785b. Here, the recessed groove portion 785b is configured in a dimensional relationship such that it is slidable with respect to the protrusion portion 784e, and is configured in a dimensional relationship such that displacement in the left-right direction is restricted with respect to the protrusion portion 784e.

That is, the groove width of the recessed groove portion 785b is set slightly longer than the horizontal width of the ridge portion 784e, and the diameter of the groove deep portion of the recessed groove portion 785b is set to be shorter than the gap length between the ridge portions 784e. The diameter of the portion where the groove 785b is not formed is set longer than the length of the gap between the ridges 784e.

As a result, the metal rod 785a can be supported on the back side of the direct-acting plate member 784 so as to be axially rotatable and restrained from being displaced in the left-right direction.

The bevel tooth member 785c is arranged so as to enter the arrangement hole 784g of the linear motion plate member 784 . In a state where the bevel tooth member 785c has partially entered the placement hole 784g, the intermediate arm member 783 moves the bevel tooth portion 783c from the opposite side (back side) of the linear motion plate member 784 so as to mesh with the bevel tooth member 785c. to be assembled.

In this assembled state, the bevel tooth member 785c is inserted into the arranging hole 784g, but since the metal rod 785a is supported by the linear motion plate member 784, it cannot fall off to the front side. and the displacement to the rear side is restricted by the intermediate arm member 783 . Therefore, the bevel tooth member 785c is supported by the linear motion plate member 784 and the intermediate arm member 783 so as not to fall off.

A tubular portion 785d1 of the end plate member 785d is formed with an inner peripheral shape corresponding to a non-circular shape (for example, a D-shaped cross section) as the tip portion of the metal rod 785a. are formed in a dimensional relationship with an interference fit, and are fitted and fixed.

The method for fixing the end plate member 785d to the metal rod 785a is not limited to this. For example, a method of fixing by using an adhesive or the like may be used. A method of fastening and fixing the end plate member 785d to the metal rod 785a may be used, or another method may be used.

The ring-shaped metal member 785e is held so as to be fitted inside the ring holding half portion 784h of the direct-acting plate member 784 . The ring-shaped metal member 785e is held, and the cylindrical portion 785d1 of the end plate member 785d supporting the metal rod 785a is in sliding contact with the inner peripheral side of the ring-shaped metal member 785e. can easily coincide with the axis passing through the rotation center of the bevel tooth member 785c, and the load generated in the axial radial direction of the metal rod 785a can be reduced.

The rotational position stabilizing portion 785f functions as a portion in which the provided metal screw is attracted to the magnet Mg.

The shaft support member 786 is a member formed in a square plate shape, and includes an insertion hole 786a formed so that a fastening screw to be screwed into the fastening portion 784f can be inserted, and a ring holding portion of the linear motion plate member 784. A ring holding half portion 786b having a semicircular surface capable of holding a ring-shaped metal member 785e between itself and the half portion 784h and a magnet holding half portion 784i of the linear motion plate member 784 capable of holding the magnet Mg. and a magnet retaining half 786c formed in the shape of a square box.

When a fastening screw is inserted through the insertion hole 786a from the back side and is screwed into the fastened portion 784f to assemble the direct-acting plate member 784 and the pivot member 786, the back side of the metal rod 785a is attached to the plate portion of the pivot member 786. The ring-shaped metal member 785e is held by the ring holding halves 784h and 786b, and the magnet Mg is held by the magnet holding halves 784i and 786c.

The covering member 787 is a pair of left and right members formed in a box-like shape with left and right inner sides opened as a pair in the front and rear. A decoration consisting of figures, patterns, letters or pictures that can be read with meaning is formed.

That is, the covering member 787 has a first main decorative surface 787a1 formed as a decorative surface to be visually recognized by the player in the overhanging state (see FIG. 54), a second main decorative surface 787b1 formed on the back surface, When the first main decorative surface 787a1 is arranged on the front side and the effect standby state (see FIG. 52) is entered, the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 is formed on the side where the player can see, and a second secondary decorative surface 787b2 formed. The second secondary decorative surface 787b2 is formed on the side that can be visually recognized by the player when the second main decorative surface 787b1 is arranged on the front side and the waiting state for effect (see FIG. 52) is reached.

The covering member 787 is a pair of left and right members formed of two front and rear members fastened and fixed to the end plate member 785d and formed into a substantially box-like shape with left and right inner sides opened in the assembled state (see FIG. 26). and a plurality of extension portions 787c extending toward the left and right members, and a recess portion 787d recessed so as to retract to the left and right outside in a portion between the extension portions 787c. .

The extending portions 787c are formed so that their ends abut or are arranged close to each other when the covering member 787 is arranged close to each other (see FIG. 26). As a result, the pair of left and right covering members 787 can be viewed integrally.

The recessed portion 787d is a circular portion arranged in the center of the light diffusion member 778b of the light emission effecting means 778 and the upper side of the upper long portion 775 in the center of the left and right when the covering member 787 is arranged close to the cover member 787 (see FIG. 26). It is a portion for opening the circular arc plate portion of , etc., and is recessed in a shape that at least avoids interference with these portions.

The covering member 787 has a state in which the first main decorative surface 787a1 faces the front side and the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 faces upward (see FIGS. 29 and 52) and the second main The state can be switched between a state in which the decorative surface 787b1 faces the front side and the second secondary decorative surface 787b2 faces upward (see FIG. 30). First, the mechanism that constitutes the displacement for switching the state of the covering member 787 will be described.

57(a) and 57(b) are front views of the transmission device holding plate 777, the upside down reversing member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the direct acting plate member 784 and the shaft rotating member 785. FIG. FIG. 57(a) shows a vertically arranged state (also referred to as an upright vertically arranged state) of the vertically reversing member 781 in which a pair of cylindrical projecting portions 781c are arranged on the same vertical line, and FIG. ) shows a state in which the upside-down reversing member 781 is rotated about 24 degrees counterclockwise in a front view about the cylindrical projecting portion 777c from the state shown in FIG. 57(a). 57(a) and 57(b), illustration of the end plate member 785d of the left shaft rotating member 785 and the right shaft rotating member 785 is omitted for easy understanding.

In the upright vertical arrangement state, the arcuate projecting portion 781d is arranged in a state of entering the detection groove of the upper detection sensor 778d (see FIG. 56). In addition, in the inverted vertical arrangement state in which the vertical reversing member 781 is rotated 180 degrees from the erect vertical arrangement state, the arcuate projecting portion 781d is arranged in a state of entering the detection groove of the lower detection sensor 778d. be.

That is, the output of the detection sensor 778d (see FIG. 56) is configured to be switched depending on whether the upside-down reversing member 781 is in the upright vertical arrangement state or the inverted vertical arrangement state. Device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine the state of rendering device 780 .

As shown in FIGS. 57(a) and 57(b), when the vertical inversion member 781 is rotationally displaced, the intermediate arm member 783 is displaced in the horizontal direction while changing its posture. The angle of this posture change corresponds to (is proportional to) the rotation angle of the shaft rotating member 785, and the lateral displacement amount of the other side cylindrical portion 783b corresponds to the lateral displacement amount of the linear motion plate member 784 and the shaft rotating member 785. corresponds to

Here, the order in which rotational displacement and lateral displacement (linear displacement) occur will be described. These displacements do not occur at the same degree at the same time, but there are arrangements in which the degree of rotational displacement is greater, and arrangement in which the degree of linear motion displacement is greater.

First, to explain the outline, the structure of the upside down reversing member 781, the intermediate arm member 783 and the direct acting plate member 784 is a known slider crank mechanism. That is, when the upside-down reversing member 781 rotates about the cylindrical projecting portion 777c, the other side cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783 pivotally supported by the cylindrical projecting portion 781c of the upside-down reversing member 781 moves toward the front. The displacement direction of the linear motion plate member 784 connected to the other side cylindrical portion 783b is regulated so that it moves parallel along the movement axis HL1 passing through the center of the cylindrical projecting portion 777c. The pair of left and right linear motion plate members 784 are simultaneously displaced in opposite left and right directions along the movement axis HL1.

As shown in FIG. 57(b), the other side cylindrical portion 783b is displaced by a length L1 in the left-right direction by the time it rotates about 24 degrees from the vertically arranged state shown in FIG. 57(a). The length L1 is half the width of the connecting portion (see FIG. 55) between the lower long portion 772 and the upper long portion 775 (the length between the left and right center and the left and right width ends). is illustrated as

57(a) to FIG. 57(b), the posture change around the other side cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783 is 5 degrees clockwise when viewed from the front. The angle is suppressed to less than half of 15 degrees, which is the angle between the adjacent teeth of the bevel tooth portion 783c.

Since the bevel tooth member 785c is arranged on the front side of the intermediate arm member 783, the transmission of the load (engagement transmission) between the bevel tooth portion 783c and the bevel tooth member 785c is performed at positions opposed to each other in the front-rear direction, that is, , occurs on the movement axis HL1 in front view.

FIG. 58(a) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate 777, the vertical reversing member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear motion plate member 784, and the shaft rotating member 785 along line LVIIIa-LVIIIa in FIG. 57(a). FIG. 58(b) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate 777, the upside-down reversing member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear motion plate member 784, and the shaft rotating member 785 along line LVIIIb-LVIIIb of FIG. 57(b).

As shown in FIG. 58(b), the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 is displaced so as to press the gear tooth of the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotating member 785 (in FIG. ). In FIG. 58(b), for ease of understanding, the bevel tooth portion 783c and the gear tooth of the bevel tooth member 785c are shown to overlap each other. and the elastic deformation of the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c.

The bevel tooth portion 783c meshes with the bevel tooth member 785c, and the shaft rotating member 785 is rotationally displaced by transmitting the driving force. While the vertical reversing member 781 rotates 180 degrees counterclockwise in front view from the state shown in FIG. Rotate in the opposite direction.

While the upside-down reversing member 781 rotates 180 degrees, the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 rotates 90 degrees around the other side cylindrical portion 783b. Rotate 180 degrees. That is, the angle at which the bevel tooth member 785c rotates around the metal rod 785a is configured to be twice the angle of rotation around the other side cylindrical portion 783b of the bevel tooth portion 783c.

58(a) to the state of FIG. 58(b), the amount of displacement of the bevel tooth member 785c that can be caused by the pressing due to the displacement is less than the thickness of the gear teeth in the circumferential direction. Not enough to reliably rotate the gear teeth of the 785c. That is, the amount of displacement until the representative tooth in contact rotates to the arrangement of the adjacent teeth (according to the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c being arranged in 12 equal parts, the displacement required for rotation of an angle of 30 degrees) amount).

The gear teeth of the bevel tooth portion 783c are displaced so as to press the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c. The accompanying displacement is absorbed by the elastic deformation of the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c, so that the attitude of the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotation member 785 in the rotation direction changes from the state shown in FIG. 57(a) to the state shown in FIG. ).

The elastic deformation of the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c causes the rotation position stabilizing portion 785f ( (See FIG. 54).

That is, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg acts to attract the metal screw of the lower rotational position stabilizing portion 785f so as to restrict the rotational displacement of the right shaft rotating member 785 in the backward rotation direction. The right shaft rotating member 785 receives an urging force in the forward rotation direction from the magnet Mg. Therefore, the attracting force of the magnet Mg acts in a direction to increase the displacement resistance of the rotational displacement of the right shaft rotating member 785 .

As for the left shaft rotating member 785, the rotational position stabilizing portion 785f is arranged on the front side of the end plate member 785d as in the right side, while the magnet Mg is arranged on the upper side opposite to the right side. (See FIG. 55). Therefore, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg acts to attract the metal screw of the upper rotational position stabilizing portion 785f, so that the left shaft rotating member 785 receives an urging force in the backward rotation direction from the magnet Mg. Therefore, the attracting force of the magnet Mg acts in a direction to increase the displacement resistance of the rotational displacement of the left shaft rotating member 785 .

In this embodiment, the attracting force of the magnet Mg is the driving force applied to the bevel tooth member 785c until the other-side cylindrical portion 783b is displaced in the left-right direction by a length L1 from the state shown in FIG. 57(a). designed to be capable of generating loads exceeding

As a result, the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c are elastically deformed so as to absorb the amount of displacement of the bevel tooth portion 783c shown in FIG. 58(b). When the displacement continues beyond the state shown in FIG. 57(b), the bevel tooth member 785c rotates beyond the attracting force of the magnet Mg, and the magnet Mg and the metal screw of the rotational position stabilizing portion 785f. As the arrangement separates, the magnetic force is extremely reduced, and the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c released from the attracting force of the magnet Mg undergo elastic recovery and rotational displacement.

Therefore, at the start of rotation, the elastic recovery increases the force in the direction of rotation of the shaft rotating member 785, so that the rotation speed at the start of rotation can be instantaneously increased. This increase in rotational speed occurs not only in the shaft rotating member 785 but also in the covering member 787 (see FIG. 55) that is fastened and fixed to the shaft rotating member 785 .

As a result, the operation of the covering member 787 can be adjusted without changing the driving speed of the driving motor 782. Therefore, the covering member 787 can be produced while reducing the burden of control design of the driving motor 782. You can improve the effect.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the timing at which the rotation of the shaft rotating member 785 is caused by the attracting force of the magnet Mg can be delayed from the timing at which the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 starts rotating. .

The rotational position stabilizing portion 785f that receives the attractive force of the magnet Mg is composed of a pair of upper and lower rotational position stabilizing portions 785f. is arranged close to the magnet Mg and receives an attractive force (see FIG. 52(b)), and when the direction is reversed and the second main decorative surface 787b1 of the covering member 787 faces the front side, the other (see FIG. 52(b) ), the upper) rotational position stabilizing portion 785f is arranged close to the magnet Mg and receives an attractive force.

That is, regardless of whether the surface facing the front side is the first main decorative surface 787a1 or the second main decorative surface 787b1, at least in the close arrangement state (see FIGS. 29 and 30), the magnetic force of the magnet Mg is the axial rotation member. It works effectively for the purpose of limiting the rotational displacement of the 785. Therefore, when the shaft rotating member 785 is displaced from the close arrangement state, the magnetic force delays the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 regardless of the direction of the rotational displacement (in both directions).

That is, between the state shown in FIG. 58(a) and the state shown in FIG. 58(b), the degree of translational displacement in the horizontal direction is greater than the degree of rotational displacement. Then, when the up-down reversing member 781 continues to rotate counterclockwise in front view beyond FIG. 57(b), the degree of translational displacement in the left-right direction settles down, and rotational displacement occurs.

According to this embodiment, since the slider-crank mechanism is employed as described above, a similar action is produced. That is, in the vicinity of the vertically arranged state, the displacement of the cylindrical projecting portion 781c is large in the horizontal direction and small in the vertical direction, so the displacement in the horizontal direction of the intermediate arm member 783 is large and the amount of rotation thereof is small. Therefore, the lateral displacement of the linear motion plate member 784 is large, and the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 is small.

On the other hand, as the longitudinal direction of the up/down reversing member 781 tilts toward the horizontal direction, the displacement of the cylindrical projecting portion 781c decreases in the horizontal direction and increases in the vertical direction. The smaller the rotation, the greater the amount of rotation. Therefore, the lateral displacement of the linear motion plate member 784 is small, and the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 is large.

Therefore, in the rotational movement of the vertically reversing member 781 that starts from the vertically arranged state and ends in the vertically arranged state, the degree of horizontal displacement of the linear motion plate member 784 first increases, and then the degree of rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 increases. Then, the degree of horizontal displacement of the direct-acting plate member 784 increases again.

Due to the linear motion displacement and the rotational displacement occurring in this order, the extended portion 787c of the covering member 787 is formed at the connecting portion (see FIG. 55) between the upper long portion 775 and the lower long portion 772. Collisions can be avoided. Next, changes in appearance of the covering member 787 will be described.

59(a) to 59(c) are front views of the effect device 780. FIG. 59(a) to 59(c) show the reversing operation of the up/down reversing effect device 770 in chronological order. FIG. 59(a) shows the rendering device 780 in the upright vertically arranged state of the vertically reversing member 781, and FIG. 59(b) shows the rendering device when the vertically reversing member 781 is rotated 90 degrees from the vertically arranged state. 780 is illustrated, and in FIG. 59(c), the production device 780 is illustrated in which the vertically reversing member 781 is vertically arranged in an inverted position.

The vertically reversing member 781 is rotated 180 degrees counterclockwise in a front view from the upright vertically arranged state (see FIG. 57(a)) to change the state to the inverted vertically arranged state. In the inverted vertical arrangement state, the posture of the covering member 787 is reversed 180 degrees with respect to the upright vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 59(a)). As a result, the decorative surface visible to the player is switched (see FIG. 59(c)).

When the vertical reversing member 781 rotates 180 degrees clockwise (counterclockwise) in front view from the inverted vertical arrangement state, it returns to the erect vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 57A). 59(a) and 59(c). ), the state can be switched repeatedly.

As described above, while the upside-down reversing member 781 is rotated 180 degrees counterclockwise in front view from the state shown in FIG. do. Here, from the rotation direction of the bevel tooth portion 783c, the right shaft rotating member 785 rotates backward, and the left shaft rotating member 785 rotates forward. That is, the pair of shaft rotating members 785 arranged on the left and right sides and the covering member 787 fastened and fixed to the end plate member 785d rotate in opposite directions.

Therefore, in the middle position, the covering member 787 on the right side faces the second secondary decorative surface 787b2 toward the front side, and the covering member 787 on the left side faces the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 toward the front side (see FIG. 59(b)). ).

As a result, during the rotational displacement of the covering member 787, the first auxiliary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second auxiliary decorative surface 787b2) of the left covering member 787 and the first auxiliary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second auxiliary decorative surface 787b2) of the right covering member 787 Alternatively, it is possible to prevent the second secondary decorative surface 787b2) from being visually recognized.

Therefore, the decorative surface of the covering member 787 during rotational displacement can be intentionally made to have different contents on the left and right sides, and the contents of the decorative surface can be configured so as to make it difficult for the player to recognize the contents of the decorative surface. The amount of information given to the player by the covering member 787 can be reduced.

As a result, the player's attention to the covering member 787 during rotational displacement can be reduced. In addition, since the decorative surfaces of the pair of left and right covering members 787 are aligned with the first main decorative surface 787a1 (or the second main decorative surface 787b1) when the rotational displacement stops, the game is played until the rotation of the covering member 787 stops. It is also possible to obtain an effect that it is easy to maintain the line of sight of the person on the covering member 787 .

Rotational displacement is executed in the extended state of the second operation unit 700 (see FIG. 54). In the state where the two main decorative surfaces 787b1) are aligned, the effect device 780 has risen to near the vertical center of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 30), and in this state the first secondary decorative surface 787a2. (or the second secondary decorative surface 787b2) is less likely to attract attention.

In particular, when the third operation unit 800 is controlled to be displaced closer to the second operation unit 700, the field of view to the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second secondary decorative surface 787b2) becomes the third movement. It will be blocked by unit 800 .

On the other hand, when the second operation unit 700 is in the production standby state (see FIG. 52) and the production device 780 is arranged below the display area of the third pattern display device 81, the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or The second secondary decorative surface 787b2) is easily visible to the player.

In this way, in the second operation unit 700, the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second secondary decorative surface 787b2) in the overhanging state is prevented from being visually recognized together during rotational displacement, and the player side is prevented from being visually recognized. It is formed as a side that can attract the player's attention in the waiting state for the effect by preventing the face from facing the other side.

As a result, the appearance of the second action unit 700 can be changed according to the arrangement, so the performance performance for the cost of placing the second action unit 700 (occupying space, burden of skillful concealment) becomes excessively low. It can make it easier to avoid the situation from occurring.

After the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 and the covering member 787, the rotational position stabilizing portion 785f is attracted to the magnet Mg (see FIG. 54(b)), thereby stabilizing the posture of the shaft rotating member 785 and the covering member 787. can be improved.

In this embodiment, the metal member attracted to the magnet Mg is composed of a metal screw, so compared to designing a dedicated metal member, it is possible to reduce member costs and improve maintainability. .

As described above, the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 and the covering member 787 is accompanied by translational displacement in the horizontal direction, so the arrangement of the rendering device 780 capable of executing rotational displacement is limited. That is, in the production standby state (see FIG. 28) and the intermediate production state (see FIG. 33) of the second operation unit 700, the right front plate member 710 and the left rear plate member arranged on the left and right are rotated by executing rotational displacement. 750 , the front support member 760 , and decorative members such as the three-dimensional decorative portion 768 a fixedly arranged on the front side thereof collide with the covering member 787 .

On the other hand, in the extended state of the second operation unit 700 (see FIG. 30), a space is secured in the left-right direction, so that the axial rotation member 785 and the covering member 787 can be rotated.

Therefore, the drive control of the drive motor 731 that causes the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 and the covering member 787 is based on the determination that the second operation unit 700 is in the overhanging state from the output of the detection sensor 713. It is controlled to be executable on the premise that As a result, the rotational displacement of the shaft rotation member 785 and the covering member 787 can be caused normally.

The extension portions 787c are arranged close to each other in the vertically arranged state of the upside down member 781, and in this state are arranged to face the connecting portion between the upper long portion 775 and the lower long portion 772 in the front and rear. Therefore, when the covering member 787 is rotationally displaced from this arrangement by the rotating shaft extending in the left-right direction, the extension part 787c collides with the connection part between the upper long part 775 and the lower long part 772, A problem occurs.

On the other hand, the configuration in which the extension portions 787c are arranged close to each other produces an effect that the pair of left and right covering members 787 can be visually recognized as a unit, and is a configuration necessary for presentation. It is preferable to be able to maintain

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the covering member 787 is configured to be translatively displaced in the left-right direction by a length L1 before being rotationally displaced (see FIG. 57). Due to the linear motion displacement of the length L1, the extension portion 787c can be retracted from the front and rear positions of the connecting portion between the upper long portion 775 and the lower long portion 772, and the extension portion 787c and the upper long portion 775 can be retracted. and the connection portion with the lower long portion 772 can be avoided.

Further, by configuring the rotational displacement in this way, the rotational displacement does not occur (or is limited) in the length L1 while the covering member 787 is displaced in the left-right direction, and the rotational displacement occurs in the remaining length L2. Therefore, the lateral displacement amount of the covering member 787 during rotation can be kept small.

As a result, compared to the case where the arrangement of the covering member 787 changes greatly during rotation, the attention force of the covering member 787 can be suppressed to a low level, and the rotational displacement can be made inconspicuous. The surfaces 787a1 to 787b2 can be designed ignoring the appearance during rotational displacement, so the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

The timing at which the covering member 787 starts rotating can be arbitrarily set by designing the attracting force of the magnet Mg. Therefore, for example, even if there is a design change to lengthen the horizontal width of the connecting portion between the lower long portion 772 and the upper long portion 775 of the main body member 771, the configuration of the effect device 780 is the same, but the magnet Mg is changed to a magnet having a large attracting force, it is possible to avoid collision between the connecting portion and the extending portion 787c as in the present embodiment.

As shown by the imaginary line in FIG. 59, the insertion hole 778c is arranged so as to be hidden by the covering member 787 at all times. As a result, it is possible to prevent the tightening screw inserted through the insertion hole 778c from being visually recognized by the player, and it is possible to avoid lowering the performance effect due to the tightening screw.

In this embodiment, the decorations (graphics, patterns, or designs) of the decorative surfaces 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, and 787b2 formed on the pair of left and right covering members 787 are not the same for the left and right covering members 787. , and the arrangement of the insertion holes 778c is left-right asymmetrical in accordance with the right and left decorations.

That is, since the insertion hole 778c is a portion through which the fastening screw is inserted, the LED cannot be arranged on the electrical board 787a at that position (see FIG. 55). In addition, since the fastening screw is made of metal and does not transmit light, it is likely to be visible in the dark during the lighting effect.

Therefore, it is desirable to arrange the insertion holes 778c in the right and left decorations, avoiding areas that are conspicuously illuminated. As a result, the arrangement of the insertion holes 778c is left-right asymmetrical.

In addition, it is naturally permitted to make the arrangement of the insertion holes 778c bilaterally symmetrical. In particular, when the decorative surfaces 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, and 787b2 of the left and right covering members 787 are identically decorated, there is no disadvantage due to the symmetrical arrangement of the insertion holes 778c, and the electrical decoration board 778a design can be facilitated.

As shown in FIG. 59(b), in this embodiment, the covering member 787 is linearly displaced left and right during the reversing operation of the up/down reversing effect device 770, and the vicinity of the central portion of the light diffusing member 778b is the extending portion 787c. Even in a state in which it is not surrounded by the two, the mechanical parts such as the upside-down reversing member 781, the intermediate arm member 783 and the linear motion plate member 784 are hidden from view.

That is, when viewed from the front, the outer shape of the upper elongated portion 775 of the main body member 771 is designed to fit within the outer shape of the light diffusing member 778b arranged on the front side, and the vertical width of the direct-acting plate member 784 is designed to fit on the front side. It is designed to have a shape that fits within the vertical width of the left and right long parts of the upper long part 775 that is arranged in the upper part 775 . In addition, the vertical inversion member 781 is designed to have a shape that fits within the outer shape of the disk portion of the upper long portion 775 arranged on the front side, and the intermediate arm member 783 is designed so that the displacement locus fits within the outer shape of the light diffusion member 778b. Designed.

As a result, the mechanical part for realizing the displacement of the effect device 780 can be hidden behind the light diffusion member 778b and made invisible, so that the effect of the appearance of the effect device 780 during the reversing operation is reduced. can be avoided.

Returning to FIG. 26, description will be made. The third operation unit 800 is arranged above the display area of the third pattern display device 81 in the standby state for effect, and is supported by the tip of a pair of left and right lifting arm members 801 (see FIG. 31) supported by the rear case 510. This is a unit configured to be vertically displaceable as the lifting arm member 801 is driven in the vertical direction.

60 is an exploded front perspective view of part of the configuration of the third operation unit 800, and FIG. 61 is an exploded rear perspective view of part of the configuration of the third operation unit 800. FIG. 60 and 61 show the parts that constitute the displacement of the third operation unit 800, and the illustration of the decorative members 870 and 880 as the decorative parts arranged outside is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the third operation unit 800 includes a held member 810 held by an elevating arm member 801 and a fixed cylinder having a cylindrical portion 821 fastened and fixed to the center of the held member 810. As shown in FIGS. A member 820, an inner rotating member 830 pivotally supported by the cylindrical portion 821 in a state in which the cylindrical portion 821 is inserted on the inner peripheral side, and a body portion 831 in a state in which the inner rotating member 830 is inserted on the inner peripheral side. A pivotally supported outer rotating member 840 , a plurality of (five in this embodiment) intermediate arm members 850 rotatably connected to the cylindrical portion 842 a of the outer rotating member 840 , and housed in the held member 810 . and a drive transmission device 860 having a plurality of gear members connected to each other and for transmitting driving force for displacing the inner rotating member 830 , the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850 .

The held member 810 includes a disk-shaped body member 811 and a perforated lid member 817 that covers the body member 811 from the front side.

The main body member 811 has a cylindrical fixing portion 812 which is recessed at the center to hold the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 and has an insertion hole for inserting a fastening screw for fixing and a through hole for inserting an electrical wiring. , a detection sensor 813 which is a photocoupler type sensor and is fixed with the detection groove facing the side capable of receiving the detected portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840, a motor holding portion 814 holding the drive motor 861, A plurality of cylindrical protruding portions 815 protruded on the front side as cylindrical portions that irremovably support the transmission gear 863, and a double cylindrical portion that irresistibly supports the load response gear 865 on the front side. and a plurality of double cylindrical protrusions 816 that protrude.

The perforated cover member 817 has a circular hole 818 drilled in the front-rear direction in the central portion. The circular hole 818 is designed with dimensions such that the transmission gear 863 and the load response gear 865 protrude inward from the inner peripheral edge when viewed in the opening direction.

The fixed cylindrical member 820 includes the above-described cylindrical portion 821, a circular plate portion 822 formed at the front end of the cylindrical portion 821, and a light emitting means such as an LED on the front side. A disc-shaped electrical board 823 to be arranged, and an umbrella-shaped (or bowl-shaped) translucent light-transmitting resin material that can cover the electrical board 823 from the front side. A decorative member 824 and a sliding member 825 formed in an annular shape with an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion 821 on the circular plate portion 822 side and configured to be slidable with the cylindrical portion 821 are provided.

The cylindrical portion 821 has a female screw formed at the tip portion on the back side, and a fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole of the tubular fixing portion 812 of the held member 810 is screwed into the female screw, whereby the fixed cylinder is fixed. A member 820 is non-rotatably fastened to the held member 810 .

The cylindrical portion 821 is axially penetrating on the inner peripheral side, and the electric wiring inserted through the through hole of the cylindrical fixing portion 812 is passed through this penetrating portion toward the front side and arranged behind the electrical board 823 . connected to the connector that

The illumination substrate 823 includes, as LEDs, inner light-emitting portions 823a arranged at the apexes of the pentagon and central positions equidistant from the vertices, and outer light-emitting portions 823b arranged at 15 locations at equal intervals on the circumference. And prepare. The inner light emitting portion 823a is composed of an LED whose optical axis faces the front side (forward), and the outer light emitting portion 823b is composed of an LED whose optical axis faces radially outward (diameter direction).

The outer light emitting portion 823b is composed of 15 LEDs arranged at equal intervals on the circumference. As will be described later, the light emitted from the outer light-emitting portion 823b is emitted to the plated portions 871a of the first decorative members 870 which are arranged in close proximity to each other at equal intervals on the circumference, so that each of the first decorations is illuminated. The member 870 will be illuminated with light from the three LEDs.

The outer light-emitting portion 823b is fixedly arranged on the electric decoration board 823, and the first decorative member 870 is configured to rotate around the center of the circle, but the outer light-emitting portion 823b and the first decorative member 870 are coaxial. , the light from the same number of LEDs (three in this embodiment) is always emitted to each of the first decorative members 870 regardless of the orientation of the first decorative member 870 in the rotational direction. can be irradiated to

As a result, it is possible to suppress the change in the light amount of the light LD1 that irradiates the first decorative member 870 during the rotating operation.

The sliding member 825 has an inner diameter side portion slidable on the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 and an outer diameter side portion slidable on the circular flange portion 831 a of the inner rotary member 830 . formed in

The sliding member 825 has a flange-shaped portion formed on the front side, and has a tubular portion projecting rearward from the inner diameter side end of the flange-shaped portion. The diameter is formed slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the circular flange-shaped portion 831a, so that it is slidably fitted inside the inner rotary member 830. As shown in FIG.

The interposition of the sliding member 825 prevents direct contact between the fixed cylindrical member 820 and the inner rotating member 830 configured to be rotatable therearound. Further, the sliding member 825 is disposed on the circular plate portion 822 side of the cylindrical portion 821 and similarly on the circular flange portion 831a side of the main body portion 831, which is advantageous in terms of strength. It is possible to reduce the possibility of damage or deformation of the fixed cylindrical member 820 and the inner rotating member 830 due to the load generated when the sliding is defective (when the displacement resistance becomes excessive unintentionally).

The inner rotary member 830 has a cylindrical body portion 831 having a circular flange-shaped portion 831a at the front end, and a longitudinal direction in the radial direction at positions where the circumference of the body portion 831 is equally divided into five in the circumferential direction. A plurality of metal rods 832 fastened and fixed to the circular flange-shaped portion 831a in a posture along which the metal rods 832 are formed to be inserted and guided by the metal rods 832 so as to be linearly displaceable. and a plurality of rotating members 834 rotatably supported on the radially outer portion of the linear motion member 833 .

The body portion 831 includes the circular flange portion 831a and a plurality of sliding projections extending rearward in a ridge shape with the circular flange portion 831a as a base end at intermediate angular positions (five locations) between the adjacent metal rods 832. It includes a ridge portion 831b and a plurality of recessed portions 831c formed at intervals in the circumferential direction at the opposite end of the circular flange portion 831a.

The sliding ridge portion 831b is a portion configured to be slidable on the inner peripheral curved surface of the body portion 841 of the outer rotating member 840, and reduces the contact area with the outer rotating member 840 to reduce contact friction. has a semicircular cross section.

The sliding protrusion 831b is arranged at an intermediate angular position between the adjacent metal rods 832 as described above. position (position shifted by 180 degrees).

As a result, the intermediate arm member 850 is displaced radially outward along the metal rod 832 in a switching rotation operation to be described later, and the load is applied so that the outer rotating member 840 on which the intermediate arm member 850 is pivotally displaced is displaced radially outward. Even if the displacement of the outer rotating member 840 is received, the displacement of the outer rotating member 840 can be received by the sliding protrusion 831b. can be kept low.

The recessed portion 831c is a portion into which the transmission projection 864a of the central annular gear 864 is inserted. The rotation angle of the central ring gear 864 and the rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830 can be matched.

The linear motion member 833 includes a pair of cylindrical protrusions 833a and 833b that are arranged side by side in the linear motion displacement direction and are cylindrically projected toward the rear, and the cylindrical protrusion 833a. , 833b, a cylindrical shaft portion 833c formed on the side away from the central axis of the main body portion 831 and inserted into the rotating member 834, and a tip portion of the cylindrical shaft portion 833c along the circumferential direction. and a recessed groove 833d that is recessed.

The recessed groove 833d is arranged on the side protruding from the rotating member 834 in the assembled state (see FIG. 28), and the projecting portions 873, 883 of the decorative members 870, 880 fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834 slide. By being externally fitted, it functions as a displacement restricting groove that prevents the rotation member 834 from falling off in the radially outward direction, the details of which will be described later.

The rotating member 834 includes a bevel tooth portion 834a formed in a bevel gear shape, and a plurality of cylindrical projecting portions 834b projecting in a cylindrical shape in parallel with the linear motion direction. The bevel tooth portion 834a is not formed over the entire circumference, but is formed over 3/4 circumference (approximately 270 degrees) required for operation.

The cylindrical protruding portion 834b has a female screw formed on the inner peripheral side, and by screwing a fastening screw inserted through the insertion holes 874, 884 of the decorative members 870, 880, the decorative members 870, 880 are attached. It functions to fasten and fix to the rotating member 834, and the details will be described later.

The outer rotating member 840 includes a cylindrical main body portion 841 and a plurality of (five in this embodiment) extending radially outward at positions where the circumference of the main body portion 841 is equally divided into five in the circumferential direction. , a gear tooth 843 formed on the outer peripheral side along the circumference of the rear end of the main body 841, and a diameter of the main body 841 that can enter the detection groove of the detection sensor 813. and a detected portion 844 extending outward.

The extended arm portion 842 has a cylindrical portion 842a extending parallel to the central axis of the main body portion 841. A female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 842a. By screwing a fastening screw into the internal thread while the cylindrical portion 842 a is inserted through the side rod portion 851 , the intermediate arm member 850 is pivotally supported by the extended arm portion 842 so as not to fall off.

The gear teeth 843 are arranged so as to be able to mesh with the load response gear 865 of the drive transmission device 860, thereby functioning as a part for switching the presence or absence of rotational displacement of the outer rotating member 840, details of which will be described later.

The intermediate arm member 850 is a member formed to be long, and includes a base end side rod portion 851 whose one end side is pivotally supported by the cylindrical portion 842a of the outer rotating member 840, and the base end side rod portion 851. A thickened portion 852 whose thickness is increased toward the front side on the end side, and a distal side rod portion 853 extending from the front side end portion of the thickened portion 852 in parallel with the longitudinal direction of the proximal side rod portion 851 . , and a rotation transmission portion 854 formed with gear teeth at the end of the tip side rod portion 853 .

The rotation transmitting portion 854 is a portion that interlocks with the direct-acting member 833 and the rotating member 834, and includes a supported hole 854a that is formed in a dimensional relationship that allows rotation with respect to each other while the cylindrical projecting portion 833a is inserted therethrough; A guide hole 854b, which is an arc-shaped elongated hole centered on the supported hole 854a and guides the cylindrical projecting portion 833b while it is inserted, and a bevel gear whose central axis is the supported hole 854a. and a bevel tooth portion 854c that is formed in a shape and meshes with the bevel tooth portion 834a of the rotating member 834 to form a bevel gear.

The drive transmission device 860 includes a drive motor 861 that is fastened and fixed to the motor holding portion 814, a drive gear 862 that is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 861, and a cylindrical protruding portion 815 that is rotatably supported and driven. A plurality of transmission gears 863 meshed so as to transmit driving force via gears 862, a central annular gear 864 meshed with the transmission gears 863, and a front side of the arrangement of the central annular gear 864. A pair of load response gears 865 that are displaced and pivotally supported by the double cylinder projecting portion 816 so as not to fall off, and the back side of the load response gear 865 is supported by the double cylinder of the double cylinder projecting portion 816. and a torque limiter 866 whose resistance is variable according to the rotational load applied to the load response gear 865 .

The central annular gear 864 is formed in an annular shape, is designed so that the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 can be inserted through its inner peripheral side, and is recessed so that it can be placed in the recessed portion 831c of the inner rotating member 830. A transmission protrusion 864a protruding from the bottom plate portion toward the front side in an arrangement and shape corresponding to the setting portion 831c, and a bottom plate having a coaxial double ring shape disposed on the inner and outer diameter sides of the transmission protrusion 864a. and a support annular portion 864b protruding from the portion toward the front side.

In the assembled state, the rear end of the main body portion 831 of the inner rotary member 830 is intermediately fitted in the gap between the support annular portions 864b in a state where the transmission protrusion 864a is inserted into the recessed portion 831c. Or they are fitted in a dimensional relationship of interference fit. Thereby, the central ring gear 864 and the inner rotating member 830 can be rotated integrally.

The arrangement of the concave portion 831c and the transmission protrusion 864a is not limited at all. For example, they may be arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, or may be arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction.

If they are equidistant, they can be assembled without considering the attitude of the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864 by aligning the positions of the transmission protrusion 864a and the recessed portion 831c. can be done. As in this embodiment, when the shapes of the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864 are symmetrical in the direction of rotation (same at 72-degree intervals), the postures of the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864 are Equal spacing is effective because it is thought that there is little effect due to the shift during assembly.

If the intervals are unequal, the number of man-hours for assembling after aligning the posture of the central annular gear 864 with respect to the inner rotary member 830 is increased by one, but the transmission protrusion 864a to the recessed portion 831c is not installed. The arrangement can be used to align the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864 .

The load response gear 865 is arranged to mesh with the gear teeth 843 of the outer rotating member 840 . Due to the torque limiter 866 engaging the load responsive gear 865, the rotational resistance between the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864 and the outer rotating member 840 causes the load responsive gear It is configured to switch between a state in which the rotation of 865 is permitted and a state in which it is restricted (restricted).

That is, the torque limiter 866 functions as a so-called safety clutch, and is configured to disconnect and cancel transmission of driving force when a load exceeding a predetermined allowable value is applied. In the present embodiment, a device (one-way torque limiter) for transmitting a driving force in one direction is configured as a set in which the transmission direction is reversed, and switching of drive transmission by the torque limiter 866 can be performed in both directions with good responsiveness. It is configured as follows.

62 is an exploded front perspective view of part of the configuration of the third operation unit 800, and FIG. 63 is an exploded rear perspective view of part of the configuration of the third operation unit 800. FIG. 62 and 63 show the decorative portion of the third motion unit 800 and omit the illustration of the portion for configuring the displacement.

As shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, the third operating unit 800 includes the inner rotating member 830 described above, and a cylindrical projecting portion 834b of the inner rotating member 830 that is fastened and fixed to one of the cylindrical projecting portions 834b. A first decorative member 870 that covers the side surface, and a second decorative member 880 that is fastened and fixed to the cylindrical projecting portion 834b and covers the cylindrical projecting portion 834b from the opposite side surface of the first decorative member 870. .

The first decorative member 870 includes a first frame portion 871 that is fastened and fixed to the cylindrical projecting portion 834b, and a first covering portion 875 that covers one side of the first frame portion 871. , provided.

The first skeleton portion 871 is entirely plated and configured to easily reflect light.

The inside of the frame of the first covering portion 875 is made of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material, and figures, patterns, and character patterns (hereinafter also referred to as “patterns, etc.”) are drawn on the surface. When the front side faces the front side, the player is made to visually recognize the pattern or the like.

In the present embodiment, independent patterns or the like are drawn on each of the plurality (five) of the first covering portions 875 . Therefore, by changing the first covering portion 875 that emits strong light under the light emission control by the illumination board 823 or by changing the arrangement of the first covering portion 875, the pattern that attracts the player's attention can be changed. can let

For example, the third symbol display device 81 executes a display effect to draw attention to which first covering portion 875 stops on the side of the third symbol display device 81 from the player's line of sight. is controlled to rotate, it is possible to continuously change the first covering portion 875 on the side of the third symbol display device 81 along with the rotation. line of sight can be focused on the first covering portion 875 .

The second decorative member 880 includes a second skeleton portion 881 formed to be fastened and fixed to the cylindrical projecting portion 834b, and a second covering portion 885 formed to cover the other side of the second skeleton portion 881. , provided.

The second skeleton portion 881 includes a holding piece 881a for holding the magnet Mg2 housed in the second covering portion 885 so as not to fall off.

A metal screw is screwed into and fixed to the second covering portion 885 at a position (close position) where the attraction force of the magnet Mg2 housed in the adjacent second covering portion 885 acts. By attracting the magnet Mg2 to the screw, the integrity of the second covering portion 885 can be ensured in the combined state (particularly, one combined state, see FIG. 32).

The second covering portion 885 has a figure, a pattern, or a character pattern (hereinafter also referred to as “pattern etc.”) drawn on the surface, and when the surface faces the front side, the pattern etc. make people see.

In the present embodiment, a pattern or the like drawn on a plurality (five in this embodiment) of the second covering portions 885 is a set of a plurality (at least two, maximum five) of the second covering portions 885. Each of the second covering portions 885 is arranged in a circular shape so that when the five second covering portions 885 are combined, they are visually recognized as a “circular body” in a front view. It is decorated to form a part of the body.

Although the pattern or the like drawn on the second covering portion 885 is not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the contents grasped from the second covering portion 885 in the one united state are the rotation direction of the second decorative member 880. It is designed as a pattern that does not cause a big difference even if the arrangement of the is different. In other words, the design is such that the pattern does not have a clear top, bottom, left, and right, and the change in the outer shape is inconspicuous even when it is rotated (in this embodiment, it is circular).

Therefore, if the plurality of second covering parts 885 can be firmly integrated, the effect performance when the second covering parts 885 are visually recognized by the player can be improved. In this respect, in the present embodiment, the attraction force of the magnet Mg2 strongly integrates the second covering portion 885 in the combined state. It is possible to improve the performance performance in the state.

In each second covering portion 885, a magnet Mg2 is arranged on one side in the width direction, and a metal screw is screwed and fixed on the other side. When the direction of the second covering portion 885 is reversed back and forth by a switching rotation operation, which will be described later, the arrangement of the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw is also reversed when viewed from the front.

Even in this case, the metal screws attracted by the magnets Mg2 are merely replaced by the metal screws screwed into and fixed to the second covering portion 885 adjacent to the opposite side. Since the portion 885 is arranged in an annular shape, there is no change in the degree of attraction when integrated.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the first covering portion 875 does not contain a magnet. As a result, the strength of the integration on the side of the first covering portion 875 is slightly weakened, but this avoids a decrease in performance performance.

That is, since independent patterns and the like are drawn on the first covering portion 875, the degree of integration in the combined state is weak, and even if the arrangement of the first decorative member 870 is slightly deviated, the game can be played. There is no possibility that the pattern or the like that the person visually recognizes cannot be recognized. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the deterioration of the rendering performance of the rendering using the pattern or the like drawn on the first covering portion 875 .

Furthermore, since the strength of the integration on the first covering portion 875 side is weakened, vibration caused by (stopping from) up-and-down displacement, and rotational displacement (stopping from) as integral rotation operation and switching rotation operation ), the arrangement of the united first covering portions 875 can be shifted. As a result, the first covering portion 875 can be displaced in a displacement manner that cannot be realized in a conventional machine in which the first covering portion 875 is not a divided body but a single circular member. The rendering effect of rendering by the covering portion 875 can be improved.

In view of the above circumstances, in the combined state in which the plurality of decorative members 870 and 880 are arranged close to each other, the state in which the first decorative member 870 faces the front side is also called the individually combined state (see FIG. 31), and the second decorative member 880 faces the front side. is also called a one-confederate state (see FIG. 32). Next, the operation for switching between the individual coalesced state and the single coalesced state will be described.

Figures 64(a), 64(b), 65(a) and 65(b) are rear views of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850, and Figures 66(a) and 66(b). ), FIGS. 67( a ) and 67 ( b ) are front views of the outer rotary member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850 .

64 to 67, the driving force of the driving motor 861 (see FIG. 60) is transmitted, and the inner rotating member 830 rotates relative to the outer rotating member 840, thereby displacing the intermediate arm member 850. are shown in chronological order.

64(a) and 66(a), the inner rotary member 830 is shown rotating by 45 degrees from the individually combined state (FIGS. 64(a) and 66(a)). .

64 to 67, the axis of the metal rod 832 is indicated as a virtual position line 832F, and the angular change in the arrangement of this virtual position line 832F corresponds to the rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830. FIG. The rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830 from the individually combined state (FIGS. 64(a) and 66(a)) is illustrated by angle θ31.

As shown in FIGS. 64 to 67, when the inner rotating member 830 rotates counterclockwise in front view (see FIG. 66) from the individually combined state (this rotating operation is hereinafter also referred to as “switching rotating operation”), the intermediate Since the arm member 850 is allowed to rotate, the inner rotating member 830 is allowed to rotate relative to the outer rotating member 840 . In this embodiment, the outer rotating member 840 is maintained in position by the resistance of the torque limiter 866 (see FIG. 60), and only the inner rotating member 830 rotates.

64 to 67, the arrangement of the cylindrical portion 842a is maintained, and the intermediate arm member 850 is rotationally displaced around the cylindrical portion 842a of the outer rotating member 840. FIG.

From the configuration between the members described above, the imaginary position line 832F is a straight line passing through the center of the supported hole 854a, and the cylindrical projecting portion 833a of the linear motion member 833 is fastened and fixed to the supported hole 854a. A change in the position of the supported hole 854 a corresponds to a change in the position of the direct-acting member 833 .

As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the rotation transmitting portion 854 is displaced in the radial direction about the rotation axis of the inner rotating member 830 and at the same time is displaced in the circumferential direction. The member 834 similarly displaces radially about the rotation axis of the inner rotating member 830 and, at the same time, displaces circumferentially. That is, in the switching rotation operation, the linear motion member 833 is displaced by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction while being displaced in the radial direction.

Since the switching rotation operation includes displacement in the circumferential direction, the arrangement of the linear motion member 833, the rotary member 834, and the decorative members 870 and 880 fastened and fixed thereto is not fixed even at the radial end position. Therefore, compared to the case where the displacement is completed only by the linear motion displacement in the radial direction (for example, the reversal motion described above in the second motion unit 700), the effect during the switching rotation motion can be improved. can be kept high.

On the other hand, in the reversing operation described above in the second operation unit 700, by generating a rotating operation with high acceleration using the elastic recovery force of the bevel tooth portion 783c and the bevel tooth member 785c (see FIG. 58), , the placement of the covering member 787 at the linear movement direction outer displacement end (see FIG. 59(b)) is intended to weaken the fixed impression.

That is, by delaying the start of rotation of the covering member 787 and not delaying the end of rotation of the covering member 787, the rotation speed of the covering member 787 is improved. Even in a situation where the period near the dead point of the slider crank continues, the rotation speed of the covering member 787 is increased to maintain a high rendering effect due to the operation of the covering member 787 .

Since the switching rotation includes displacement in the radial direction, a radial load is likely to be applied from the intermediate arm member 850 to the outer rotating member 840, and there is a possibility that the rotation axis of the outer rotating member 840 will deviate. In the embodiment, the loads in the radial direction of the intermediate arm member 850 similarly occur at equal intervals (72 degree intervals) around the axis of rotation, so that the loads cancel each other out. As a result, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the rotation axis of the outer rotating member 840, so that the switching rotation operation can be easily performed normally.

In this way, the radial displacement (enlargement/reduction displacement) in the rotational movement of the third operating unit 800 occurs with rotation in the circumferential direction. Therefore, in order to avoid collisions with surrounding decorative members, the switching rotation operation of the third operation unit 800 is performed by determining the posture of the lifting arm member 801 when the third operation unit 800 is in the overhanging state. It is controlled so that it can be executed in the state determined by the output of the sensor.

In addition, along with the above-described displacement of the rotation transmission portion 854, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834 also move radially about the rotation axis of the inner rotating member 830. displaced and, at the same time, displaced in the circumferential direction.

By rotationally displacing the intermediate arm member 850, the bevel tooth portion 854c (see FIGS. 66 and 67) meshes with the bevel tooth portion 834a (see FIG. 60) of the rotating member 834, and the rotating member 834 and the rotating member 834 are engaged. Decorative members 870 and 880 fastened and fixed to the member 834 rotate about the metal rod 832 .

The angle of this rotational displacement is proportional to the angle θ32 as the rotational angle of the intermediate arm member 850 with respect to the virtual position line 832F. In addition, the direction of rotation increases so that the angle θ32 moves away from the imaginary position line 832F in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front. ), and is set in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the radially outer side of the imaginary position line 832F.

Since the rotation member 834 assumes a posture in which either the first decorative member 870 or the second decorative member 880 faces the front side in the integrally rotated state, the maximum angle θ31E (180 in this embodiment) is the maximum value of the angle θ31. degree), and the rotation angle of the intermediate arm member 850 becomes the maximum angle θ32E (90 degrees in this embodiment), the bevel tooth portion 834a of the rotating member 834 is rotated halfway (rotated 180 degrees). ).

That is, the rotation angle of the rotating member 834 around the metal rod 832 is twice the rotation angle around the supported hole 854a of the bevel tooth portion 854c.

Here, unlike the action of the magnet Mg of the second operation unit 700 described above, the attracting force of the magnet Mg2 (see FIG. 62) causes rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880 around the metal rod 832. It does not produce an action that delays rotation with respect to

That is, the magnet Mg2 generates an attractive force with the adjacent second decorative member 880, and the decorative member 880 is displaced radially outward along the metal rod 832 as the intermediate arm member 850 rotates. As a result, a gap is generated between the second decorative members 880 adjacent to each other, and the adsorption force may be lost.

Therefore, before the rotational displacement about the metal rod 832 starts, the attracting force of the magnet Mg2 is lost. No retarding effect occurs.

Therefore, the driving force required to rotationally displace the decorative members 870 and 880 can be reduced. That is, since the driving force required for the drive motor 861 can be reduced, the size of the drive motor 861 can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880 can be quickly started and terminated early, the player's attention to the rotational displacement about the metal bar 832 can be reduced.

The quickness at the start of rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880 is also maintained by configuring the rotational angle of the decorative members 870 and 880 with respect to the rotational angle of the inner rotational member 830 to be different.

For example, in the process of rotating the intermediate arm member 850, the rotation angle of the virtual position line 832F (the rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830) from the state in which the intermediate arm member 850 is arranged with a reduced diameter and can be rotated together is 45 degrees. , the angle θ32 is 18 degrees (see FIG. 66(b)), and the angle θ32 is 27 degrees when the virtual position line 832F is rotated by an angle of 45 degrees (FIG. 67(a) reference).

That is, the angle θ32 is designed to be smaller on the rotation start side of the inner rotating member 830 from the state in which the integral rotation operation is possible than during rotation. As a result, the degree of rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880 can be suppressed when the inner rotating member 830 starts rotating.

The driving force of the driving motor 861 is used for rotating the inner rotating member 830, rotating the intermediate arm member 850, and rotating the ornamental members 870 and 880. Since the driving force required for rotating the decorative members 870 and 880 can be reduced when the inner rotating member 830 starts to rotate from the possible state, the load applied to the drive motor 861 when the inner rotating member 830 starts to rotate is not excessive. You can avoid getting bigger.

In addition, since the decorative members 870 and 880 are rotationally displaced around the metal rod 832 while being displaced in the circumferential direction when viewed from the front, the visibility of the decorative members 870 and 880 during rotational displacement can be kept low. can. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that the side portions of the decorative members 870 and 880 (for example, the connecting surfaces between the first covering portion 875 and the second covering portion 885) are visible. The degree of freedom in designing the side portion of the can be improved.

During the switching rotation operation, the middle arm member 850 overlaps the adjacent middle arm member 850 in a front view. In addition, the arrangement of the extended arm portion 842 adjacent to the extended arm portion 842 on which the cylindrical portion 842a on which the self is supported is arranged overlaps. Therefore, without countermeasures, the intermediate arm member 850 may collide with surrounding parts.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, collision is avoided by shifting the configuration of the intermediate arm member 850 forward and backward for each part. That is, by arranging the distal side rod portion 853 and the rotation transmission portion 854 on the rear side of the proximal side rod portion 851 of the intermediate arm member 850, the proximal side rod portion 851 and the distal side rod portion 851 are arranged on the rear side. The rod portion 853 and the rotation transmission portion 854 can be overlapped in the front and rear, and collision can be avoided during the switching rotation operation.

Further, by arranging the base end side rod portion 851 on the front side of the extension arm portion 842 and the distal end side rod portion 853 and the rotation transmission portion 854 on the rear side of the extension arm portion 842, switching rotation operation can be performed. In this case, the intermediate arm member 850 can be arranged in front of and behind the extended arm portion 842, and collision between the intermediate arm member 850 and the extended arm portion 842 can be avoided.

64 to 67, the rotation direction of the inner rotating member 830 with respect to the outer rotating member 840 is the direction that allows the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 (the counterclockwise direction in front view in the individually combined state, see FIG. 66). ) is explained. In this case, the gear teeth 843 are meshed with the load response gear 865 that generates resistance via the torque limiter 866, so that resistance is received, and the rotational displacement of the outer rotating member 840 is limited.

On the other hand, when the rotation direction of the inner rotating member 830 is the opposite direction (clockwise direction when viewed from the front in the individually combined state), or in a direction allowing rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 (counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front in the individually combined state). When the intermediate arm member 850 continues to rotate in the same direction even after reaching a state in which rotation is restricted due to rotation in the rotational direction (for example, reaching from the individually combined state to the single united state), the outer A load exceeding the allowable value of the torque limiter 866 that regulates the rotation of the rotating member 840 is applied to the load response gear 865 , and the load response gear 865 is released from maintaining the attitude of the load response gear 865 by the torque limiter 866 , and the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 are rotated. and rotate synchronously.

In other words, when the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted regardless of the direction of rotation, the inner rotating member 830 is driven to rotate in the direction in which the restriction of rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is continued. , the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 rotate synchronously, and the intermediate arm member 850, the first ornamental member 870 and the second ornamental member 880 rotate together while maintaining their combined state (this rotating operation will be referred to as " (Also referred to as "integral rotation operation").

The integral rotation operation occurs when the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted. In this embodiment, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are arranged close to each other and are combined.

Therefore, unlike the switching rotation motion in which the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are displaced in the radial expansion direction, there is no need to consider the collision with the surrounding decorative members, so the third motion unit 800 waits for the effect. A co-rotating motion can be performed in the state. Therefore, in this embodiment, the co-rotation motion is feasibly controlled regardless of the arrangement of the third motion unit 800 .

In the present embodiment, as described above, the driving force of a single drive motor 861 (see FIG. 60) causes the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 to undergo a switching rotation movement accompanied by displacement in the radial expansion direction, and an expansion motion. integral rotation of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 without radial displacement. However, it is not possible to immediately perform any action in any direction of rotation.

For example, from the states shown in FIGS. 64(a) and 66(a), the switching rotation operation can be executed by rotating the inner rotating member 830 counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Rotating motion can be performed, and integral rotating motion can be performed by rotating the inner rotating member 830 clockwise when viewed from the front. cannot be executed.

Further, for example, after the inner rotating member 830 is rotated counterclockwise in front view from the state shown in FIGS. When the inner rotating member 830 is rotated clockwise (counterclockwise) when viewed from the front, the switching rotation operation is executed again, and the integral rotation operation cannot be immediately performed clockwise when viewed from the front. Can not.

As described above, the operation mode of the third operation unit 800 of this embodiment depends on whether the displacement of the intermediate arm member 850 in the rotation direction of the drive motor 861 is restricted or permitted. The relative displacement of inner rotating member 830 and outer rotating member 840 changes.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sound ramp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) determines whether the displacement of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted or permitted for each rotation direction of the drive motor 861. The drive motor 861 can be driven and controlled in an appropriate driving direction based on the determination result. An example of drive control of the drive motor 861 will be described below.

FIG. 68 is a timing chart showing the arrangement of the lifting arm member 801, the drive mode of the drive motor 861, and an example of the output of the detection sensor 813 in chronological order. As shown in FIG. 68, the sound ramp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) is controlled to alternately repeat the normal effect and the reverse effect as the effect control of the third operation unit 800. FIG.

During the reversal performance, an operation including the switching rotation operation is executed, and during the normal performance, an operation not including the switching rotation operation is executed. This is to avoid collision between the decorative members 870 and 880 and surrounding decorative members during the switching rotation operation.

For the same purpose, when the power is turned on again after a sudden power outage or when the power is turned on first thing in the morning, the rotation control of the drive motor 861 is executed after the third operation unit 800 is set in the extended state. , after grasping the state of the movable portion from the output of the detection sensor 813, control is performed so as to execute the control during the normal presentation. As a result, even if the state of the movable portion cannot be grasped from the output result of the detection sensor 813 when the power is turned on, it is possible to prevent the decorative members 870 and 880 from erroneously colliding with the surrounding decorative members. .

Forward rotation and reverse rotation are described as the driving direction of the drive motor 861 . The forward rotation in FIG. 68 corresponds to a drive mode in which the inner rotating member 830 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front (a drive mode in which the integral rotation is immediately performed in the individually combined state (see FIG. 66(a))). The reverse rotation at 68 corresponds to a drive mode that rotates the inner rotating member 830 counterclockwise when viewed from the front (a drive mode that immediately executes the switching rotation operation in the individually combined state).

First, the drive control during the normal effect before reaching the time of the reversal effect will be described. During this normal effect, the third operation unit 800 is in the individual combined state, and the drive motor 861 is stopped or only forward rotation drive control is executed. Therefore, the rotating motions of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are always integrally rotating motions.

Since the switching rotation motion does not occur, collision with the surrounding decorative members cannot occur, and the arrangement of the third motion unit 800 can be switched between the presentation standby state and the projecting state at any timing. For example, by driving the driving motor 861 while the held member 810 is vertically displaced by the vertical movement of the lifting arm member 801, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are integrally rotated simultaneously with the vertical movement. It is controlled so that it can also cause motion.

Of course, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 may rotate together while the elevation arm member 801 is fixed. The lifting operation of the lifting arm member 801 may be performed while the integral rotation is stopped.

Since the driving direction of the drive motor 861 is only forward rotation, the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched every time the detected portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and the switching of this output can be determined. , the sound ramp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine the attitude of the outer rotating member 840 as the initial position. can be controlled to stop at the posture of

Next, drive control at the time of reversal effect will be described. First, during the reversal effect, the lifting arm member 801 is displaced downward, and the third motion unit 800 is brought into an overhanging state. In this state, the drive motor 861 is controlled to continue forward rotation until the detected portion 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 .

When it is determined that the detected portion 844 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 by switching the output of the detection sensor 813, the driving motor 861 is driven in reverse rotation. By driving the reverse rotation, the switching rotation operation is performed in the third operation unit 800. During this time, the rotation of the outer rotating member 840 is restricted by the resistance of the torque limiter 866, so the output of the detection sensor 813 is maintained. be.

If the drive motor 861 continues to be driven in the same rotational direction, the united state is reached, and the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are rotated together. After the integral rotation operation is started, the outer rotating member 840 also starts to rotate in conjunction with the inner rotating member 830, so the detected portion 844 is retracted from the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched. That is, the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine that the integral rotation operation of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 has started by switching the output of the detection sensor 813 .

After the integral rotation operation is started, the drive motor 861 is stopped, or only reverse rotation drive control is executed. Therefore, the rotating motions of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are always integrally rotating motions. Since the switching rotation motion does not occur, collision with the surrounding decorative members cannot occur, and the arrangement of the third motion unit 800 can be switched between the presentation standby state and the projecting state at any timing.

Since the drive motor 861 only rotates in the reverse direction, each time the detected portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched, and the sound lamp control device 113 (Fig. 4) can determine the attitude of the outer rotating member 840 .

When switching from the reversal performance to the normal performance, the elevating arm member 801 is displaced downward in advance, and the third operation unit 800 is brought into an overhanging state. In this state, the drive motor 861 is controlled to continue reverse rotation until the detected portion 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 .

When it is determined that the detected portion 844 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 by switching the output of the detection sensor 813, the drive motor 861 is driven in forward rotation. By driving the forward rotation, the switching rotation operation is performed in the third operation unit 800. During this time, the rotation of the outer rotating member 840 is restricted by the resistance of the torque limiter 866, so the output of the detection sensor 813 is maintained. be.

Then, the integral rotation motion of the first decoration member 870 and the second decoration member 880 is performed. After the integral rotation operation is started, the portion to be detected 844 is retracted from the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 by the outer rotation member 840 starting to rotate, and the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched. That is, the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine that the integral rotation operation of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 has started by switching the output of the detection sensor 813 .

After the integral rotation operation is started, the normal presentation is performed again. The restrictions on the drive control during the normal effect are the same as the restrictions on the drive control during the normal effect which are arranged before the reversal effect described above.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the single detection sensor 813 is used to determine switching of the rotation mode of the third operation unit 800 (integral rotation operation or switching rotation operation) and to determine the rotation angle of the outer rotating member 840. It can also be used for the determination of the reference. Therefore, the required number of detection sensors 813 can be reduced as compared with the case where individual detection sensors are used for each determination.

As described above, the switching rotation operation can be executed by switching the driving direction of the drive motor 861 to the opposite direction from the state where the integral rotation operation is continued or the rotation is stopped. That is, regardless of the posture of the first decorative member 870 in the individually combined state, the switching rotation operation can be performed to switch to the single combined state.

Therefore, when performing control to switch to the one union state at the timing of the announcement of the big win in the action presentation, it is possible to avoid the player's prediction of the presence or absence of the announcement of the big win from the attitude of the first decoration member 870.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, the decoration in the one union state is designed so that the content grasped by the player does not differ greatly depending on the arrangement of the second decoration member 880 in the rotational direction, as described above. That is, even if the decorative members 870 and 880 are arranged differently in the direction of rotation at the start of the switching rotation operation, the content perceived by the player as a united state at the end of the switching rotation operation is the same. can do.

Therefore, unlike the case where the patterns in the single united state are arranged differently in the rotational direction, the integral rotation operation for matching the posture after reaching the single united state can be omitted, so the first decorative member in the individually united state. Regardless of the posture of 870, the drive control up to the jackpot announcement can be the same.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to realize both the switching rotation operation and the integrated rotation operation in both forward rotation and reverse rotation as the drive direction of the drive motor 861 . Therefore, compared to the case where the operation mode is fixed between forward rotation and reverse rotation, a wide variety of presentation modes can be realized with the single drive motor 861. FIG.

69 is a cross-sectional view of the third operating unit 800 taken along line LXIX-LXIX in FIG. 28. FIG. As shown in FIG. 69, the opening of the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 penetrates from the rear end portion where the cylindrical fixed portion 812 of the held member 810 is arranged to the front end portion where the electrical board 823 is arranged. The electrical wiring is guided through this opening from the rear end to the front end, and the terminals are connected to the connector arranged on the electrical board 823 . Electricity is conducted through this electrical wiring, and the LEDs arranged on the electrical board 823 are configured to be capable of controlling light emission.

The light LH1 emitted from the inner light-emitting portion 823a of the decorative electrical board 823 acts to illuminate the bulging portion 824a that bulges toward the front side on the central side of the translucent decorative member 824. As shown in FIG. The bulging portion 824a functions as a portion visible to the player at the center of the circle around which the first decorative member 870 or the second decorative member 880 is arranged when the decorative members 870 and 880 are combined. do.

The light LD1 emitted from the outer light-emitting portion 823b of the electrical decoration substrate 823 is emitted to the inside of the decorative members 870, 880 (the first decorative member 870 in FIG. 69) arranged on the front side, and the decorative members 870, 880 Acts to illuminate from within.

In this embodiment, it is possible to switch between an individually combined state (see FIG. 69) in which the decorative member 870 is arranged on the front side and a combined state (see FIG. 32) in which the decorative member 880 is arranged on the front side. Therefore, it is possible to switch between illuminating the decorative member 870 and illuminating the decorative member 880 with the light LD1.

In the individually united state (see FIG. 69), the plated portion 871a of the first skeleton portion 871 reflects the light to the front side, thereby switching the direction of the light LD1 to the front side. As a result, most of the light LD1 can be emitted toward the first covering portion 875, and the brightness of the first covering portion 875 can be favorably increased when the light LD1 is emitted.

Here, in this embodiment, the electrical decoration substrate 823 is fixedly arranged, and the decoration members 870 and 880 are configured to rotate around it. The placement relationship can be changed by rotation of the decorative members 870,880. For example, if the center of the plated portion 871a is irradiated with the light LD1 during rotation, the light LD1 emitted from the same LED may be irradiated at a position shifted from the center of the plated portion 871a. obtain. Therefore, without countermeasures, the degree of brightness of the first covering portion 875 by the light LD1 is likely to change due to the rotation of the decorative members 870 and 880, and the decorative members 870 and 880 are integrally rotated while emitting light with a constant brightness. There is a possibility that it will be difficult to execute the production to make

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the plated portion 871a capable of reflecting the light LD1 has a concave shape, and the radius of curvature of this concave shape is formed to be smaller than the radius of the decorative substrate 823. and its center is designed to be located near the center of the first covering portion 875 when viewed from the front.

Since the light LD1 is arranged so that the optical axis is oriented in the outer diameter direction of the circle in which the outer light emitting portion 823b is arranged, the light LD1 is reflected by the concave shape of the plating portion 871a, so that the center of the radius of curvature of the plated portion 871a It moves toward the side and illuminates the vicinity of the center of each first covering portion 875 of the first decorative member 870 .

Therefore, regardless of the arrangement of the plating part 871a with reference to the outer light emitting part 823b, the plurality of lights LD1 can be reflected so as to illuminate the vicinity of the center of the first covering part 875. FIG. As a result, the vicinity of the center of the front plate portion of the first covering portion 875 can be stably irradiated with light, so that the first covering portion 875 can be visually recognized with uniform brightness even during integral rotation. be able to.

Further, the first skeleton portion 871 is a portion to be plated in the same manner as the plated portion 871a. Prepare. The light LD1 is reflected by the outer plating portion 871b as well as the plating portion 871a. The degree of light can be weakened.

This avoids a situation in which the intensity of the light seen outside the first covering part 875 is too strong, the player feels dazzled, and the visibility inside the frame of the first covering part 875 is lowered. be able to.

The electrical board 823 is sandwiched between the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 from the front and back, but the joints are not completely closed, so that all the light from the outer light emitting portion 823b is emitted to the inner side. is not irradiated to

First, the internal structure is visible in FIG. A gap VA1 of a certain degree is formed. Since the outer plated portion 871b protrudes outside the frame of the first covering portion 875 through the gap VA1, the light LD1 passing through the gap VA1 can be reflected by the outer plated portion 871b.

In addition, between the member outer end portion 875b of the first covering portion 875 and the member outer end portion 885b of the second covering portion 885, which is arranged to face the metal rod 832, there is no member interference with the metal rod 832. A large gap VA2 is formed that exceeds the area required to avoid

First, the gap VA2 avoids collision between the metal rod 832 and the decorative members 870 and 880, thereby ensuring a sufficient length of the metal rod 832. It is formed for the purpose of ensuring the function of guiding the linear motion displacement of the member 834 .

Secondly, the gap VA2 is a fastening screw that is inserted through the frame portions 871 and 881, and is screwed into the cylindrical projecting portion 834b of the rotating member 834, thereby connecting the decorative members 870 and 880 to the rotating member 834. It is formed for the purpose of securing an assembly path for a fastening screw for fastening and fixing.

Furthermore, the gap VA2 is formed thirdly for the purpose of ensuring a path for light that has passed through the transparent portions of the skeleton portions 871 and 881 to travel. Since the decorative members 870 and 880 are arranged at equal intervals on the circumference, the light traveling outward through the gap VA passes through the equally-spaced positions on the circumference and travels radially from the center of the circle. It is seen as a light that

Therefore, by integrally rotating the decorative members 870 and 880, the light passing through the gap VA2 can also be rotated. This makes it unnecessary to control the lighting mode of the light from the outer light emitting portion 823b (for example, while continuing full lighting), while the light emitted radially from the rotation center of the third operation unit 800 is emitted. It is possible to execute a light emitting effect that is visually recognized in a rotating light emitting mode.

In the united state (see FIG. 32), the entire second skeleton portion 881 is made of a translucent resin material, thereby suppressing the second skeleton portion 881 from reflecting the light LD1.

As a result, it is possible to irradiate the frame of the second covering portion 885 with the light (weak light) of the light LD1 that is distant from the optical axis. can be weakened. On the other hand, since the light in the optical axis direction of the light LD1 passes through the gap VA2, the intensity of the light radially emitted from the center of rotation of the third operation unit 800 can be increased.

The frame of the second covering portion 885 is formed of a colored (in this embodiment, an arbitrary color is set as the color of the circular body) and light-transmitting resin material, and light diffusion processing is formed on the inside. A light diffusing decorative portion 885c is arranged along the circumference. Therefore, of the light LD1, the light incident on the light diffusion decorative portion 885c is refracted, and the light diffusion decorative portion 885c as a whole acts to emit surface light.

This surface emission makes it possible to homogenize the light visually recognized through the light diffusion decorative portions 885c arranged in the circumferential direction. 885c can produce an effect that is integrally visible to the player.

Here, as described above, it is possible to improve the rendering performance when the player visually recognizes the second covering portions 885 by firmly integrating the plurality of second covering portions 885 together. This integration can be performed by visually recognizing that the light diffusion decorative portion 885c is continuously connected in the circumferential direction. Therefore, it is possible to improve the rendering performance in the combined state when the second covering portion 885 is arranged on the front side.

The member outer end portion 885b of the second covering portion 885 is formed in a concave shape facing the metal rod 832. , projecting toward the first decorative member 870 with respect to the plane on which the metal rod 832 is arranged.

As a result, when the third action unit 800 is obliquely viewed in the one union state (see FIG. 32), the first covering portion 875 of the first decorative member 870 arranged on the back side is visible to the player. The degree of entry can be lowered, and the influence on the performance can be reduced.

Accordingly, when the frame portion of the first covering portion 875 and the frame portion of the second covering portion 885 are colored in different colors, the second covering portion 885 is arranged on the front side. At times, it is possible to make it easier to prevent the color of the first covering portion 875 from entering the field of view.

In particular, when the third operation unit 800 alone is in the extended state in the one united state (see FIG. 32), compared to the case where both the other operation units 600 and 700 are in the extended state (see FIG. 32). 33, F9), there are many gaps around the third operation unit 800, and it is easy for a line of sight to see the third operation unit 800 from an oblique direction. Therefore, if no countermeasures are taken, the side of the third operation unit 800 is visible, which tends to reduce the presentation effect.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the end surface 885b1 of the second covering portion 885 is arranged rearward from the center of the front-to-rear width of the side surface in the one united state, so the third operation when viewed obliquely. Even if the side surface of the unit 800 is visible, most of the side surface can be viewed as the second covering portion 885, and the visibility of the first covering portion 875 can be reduced. As a result, the second covering portion 885 can be seen more easily than the first covering portion 875 in the one union state, and the presentation effect can be improved.

In the switching rotation operation for switching between the individually combined state and the united state, the driving force of the driving motor 861 is transmitted to the inner rotating member 830, so that the inner rotating member 830 rotates, while the outer rotating member 840 acts as a torque limiter. A load from 866 stops the rotation.

Although the contact area is reduced by the sliding protrusion 831b, the load transmitted to the outer rotating member 840 increases when the inner rotating member 830 itself has a large rotational resistance. Inevitably, the allowable value of the load transmission of the torque limiter 866 is likely to be hindered.

Therefore, it is preferable that the rotation resistance of the inner rotating member 830 can be suppressed. Therefore, the present embodiment has the following features. For example, the support points between the inner rotary member 830 and the fixed cylindrical member 820 related to the rotation are only the front end that contacts the sliding member 825 and the rear end that is supported by the central annular gear 864. , and other portions are configured to leave a gap. Thereby, the contact area between the fixed cylindrical member 820 and the inner rotating member 830 can be reduced, and the displacement resistance can be easily reduced.

For example, since the inner rotating member 830 is not fastened and fixed to the central annular gear 864, it is considered necessary to provide a stopper to suppress forward displacement with respect to the central annular gear 864. A sliding member 825 serves as this stopper. That is, the sliding member 825 can receive a load from the inner rotating member 830 in the direction of pushing forward, but the front surface of the sliding member 825 is in contact with the short-diameter annular portion 822a of the circular plate portion 822 in the front-rear direction. touch.

The short-diameter annular portion 822a is disposed on the rear surface side of the circular plate portion 822 as an annular protrusion having an outer diameter approximately equal to the outer diameter of the sliding member 825, and has a semicircular cross section at its outermost diameter portion. A protrusion 822b protruding to the side is formed in an annular shape.

Since the ridge portion 822b abuts on the front surface of the sliding member 825 in the front-rear direction, the contact area can be reduced compared to the case where the sliding member 825 and the entire rear surface of the short-diameter annular portion 822a are in contact with each other. can be done. Thereby, the displacement resistance of the inner rotating member 830 in the rotating direction can be reduced.

In addition, since no fastening screw is used between the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864, the displacement resistance of the inner rotating member 830, which is assumed when the weight of the fastening screw increases, is reduced accordingly. can be done.

Fixing of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 to the rotating member 834 will be described. 62 and 63 will be referred to when explaining this fixation.

The fixing of the first decorative member 870 to the rotating member 834 is performed by inserting a fastening screw that is inserted through the insertion hole 872 of the first skeleton portion 871 into a female screw of a fastened portion 876 formed at the rear portion of the frame of the first covering portion 875 . After the first covering portion 875 is fastened and fixed to the first skeleton portion 871 by screwing it into, the overhanging portion 873 projecting from the end of the semicircular recessed portion of the first skeleton portion 871 is This can be done by inserting a fastening screw into the recessed groove 833d (slidably fitted on the outside) and inserting it through the insertion hole 874 into the cylindrical projecting portion 834b.

The fixing of the second decorative member 880 to the rotating member 834 is accomplished by inserting a fastening screw that is inserted through the insertion hole 882 of the second skeleton portion 881 into a female screw of a fastening portion 886 formed at the rear portion of the frame of the second covering portion 885 . After the second covering portion 885 is fastened and fixed to the second frame portion 881 by screwing it into the second frame portion 881, the projecting portion 883 projecting from the end of the semicircular recessed portion of the second frame portion 881 is This can be done by inserting a fastening screw into the recessed groove 833d (slidably fitted on the outside) and inserting it through the insertion hole 884 into the cylindrical projecting portion 834b.

In this manner, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 can be fastened and fixed to the rotary member 834, and the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 870 can be fixed together as the rotary member 834 is linearly displaced or rotationally displaced. Member 880 can be configured for linear displacement or rotational displacement.

In the process of fixing, the projecting portions 873 and 883 enter the recessed groove 833d of the linear motion member 833, thereby disposing the skeleton portions 871 and 881 on the linear motion member 833 (positioning of the metal rod 832 in the longitudinal direction). ) are defined, and the skeleton portions 871 and 881 can be prevented from falling off from the direct-acting member 833 .

Since the skeletal portions 871 and 881 are fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834, the arrangement of the rotating member 834 on the linear motion member 833 (arrangement in the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 832) is similarly defined, and the rotating member 834 is rotated. It is possible to prevent the member 834 from falling off from the direct-acting member 833 .

As described above, in this embodiment, when the rotary member 834 is assembled to the linear motion member 833 , the portions that define the arrangement of the rotary member 834 on the linear motion member 833 are fixed to the rotary member 834 . , unlike the case where the portion that defines the arrangement on the direct-acting member 833 is formed on the rotary member 834 itself, the man-hours for assembly and disassembly can be reduced.

That is, at the time of disassembly, for example, by removing the fastening screws that fasten and fix the frame portions 871 and 881 to the rotating member 834, the restriction on the arrangement of the frame portions 871 and 881 on the direct-acting member 833 can be released. In addition, it is possible to cancel the restriction on the arrangement of the rotating member 834 on the direct-acting member 833 . Thereby, working efficiency can be improved.

The combined operation of each operation unit 600 to 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. FIG. FIGS. 70(a) to 70(d) and FIGS. 71(a) to 71(d) are an operation unit 500 schematically explaining examples of combined operations of the operation units 600 to 800 in chronological order. It is a schematic front view of the. Note that FIGS. 33 to 35 will be referred to as appropriate in the description of FIGS. 70 and 71. FIG.

70 and 71, each rendering surface 661a to 661c of the first operation unit 600, each decorative surface 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, 787b2 of the second operation unit 700, and each covering portion 875, 885 of the third operation unit 800 The decoration in is schematically illustrated so as to be identifiable by letters or the like.

That is, on the first effect surface 661a, the characters "NORMAL" are written vertically, on the second effect surface 661b, the characters "ACTIVE" are written horizontally, and on the third effect surface 661c, the characters are written in the longitudinal direction. A "!" symbol is shown along each line.

In addition, the first main decorative surface 787a1 has the characters "Open War", the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 has the characters "Pinch is a chance", and the second main decorative surface 787b1 has the characters "Attack". are illustrated, and the second secondary decorative surface 787b2 is illustrated with the characters "Patience!?"

In addition, different alphanumeric characters (“I” to “V”) corresponding to different characters are shown inside the frame of the first covering portion 875, and on the second covering portion 885, five digits are integrated as “○”. ” symbols are shown.

In FIG. 70(a), each of the action units 600 to 800 is placed in the effect standby state (see FIG. 28). Above the second action unit 700, a first auxiliary decorative surface 787a2 is illustrated by imaginary lines as a surface that is invisible from the front view but visible from the player's line of sight.

Also, in FIG. 70(b), the first action unit 600 is in the intermediate effect state, the second action unit 700 is in the intermediate effect state, and the third action unit 800 is in the extended state.

By executing the integral rotation motion of the third operation unit 800, the first covering portions 875 of the first decorative members 870 arranged close to the second operation unit 700 can be replaced one after another. Further, by setting the first motion unit 600 to an intermediate effect state during the continuation of the integral rotation motion or after the stop, the third effect surface 661c is protruded inside the frame of the center frame 86, and the motion units 600 to 800 are moved. You can liven up your movements.

For example, when the third effect surface 661c is visible, by controlling the effect so as to increase the degree of expectation for a big win in the lottery, it is possible to improve the interest of the player who visually recognizes the operation of the first operation unit 600. can.

When the integral rotation motion is stopped, the decoration formed on the first main decorative surface 787a1 of the second operating unit 700 and the decoration formed on the first decorative member 870 arranged close to the second operating unit 700 are displayed. can be viewed integrally.

As a result, it is possible to increase the attention to the first decorative member 870 arranged close to the second operation unit 700, and the display effect related to the decoration formed on the first decorative member 870 can be displayed by the third pattern display device. By returning the third action unit 800 to the effect waiting state while starting at 81 , the player's line of sight can be smoothly guided to the third pattern display device 81 .

The first decoration member 870 to be noticed is not limited to the first decoration member 870 arranged close to the second operation unit 700 . For example, by controlling the lighting pattern of the outer light emitting portion 823b (see FIG. 60) arranged to irradiate the first decorative member 870 with light, an LED that irradiates the light LD1 toward the first decorative member 870 to be noticed is turned on and other LEDs are turned off, it is possible to draw attention to an arbitrary first decorative member 870 .

At this time, the lighting pattern of the LEDs may be switched while the integral rotation of the first decoration member 870 is stopped, or the lighting pattern of the LEDs may be switched in accordance with the integral rotation of the first decoration member 870. .

When switching the lighting pattern of the LEDs in accordance with the integral rotation of the first decorative member 870, the LEDs to be lit are sequentially switched in the rotational direction so that the light and the first decorative member 870 are rotationally displaced along the coaxial circle. The player may be allowed to view the image as shown. In addition, the LEDs to be lit are fixed, and by utilizing the fact that the respective first decorative members 870 sequentially reach the positions where the light is emitted from the LEDs by integral rotation, the first decorations to which the light is emitted are arranged. The member 870 may be switched.

In the state shown in FIG. 70(a), both the second decoration rotating member 660 and the decoration fixing member 670 of the first operation unit 600 have vertically long decorations and can be visually recognized integrally. In particular, the front side surface of the decorative fixing member 670 is formed as a surface facing in an oblique direction in the same manner as the first rendering surface 661a in the standby state for rendering, thereby enhancing the effect of being visually recognized integrally.

On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 71(a), the lower end of the second decorative rotating member 660 is displaced away from the decorative fixing member 670 in the course shown in FIG. Since the second decorative rotary member 660 of the unit 600 has a horizontally elongated decoration, the sense of unity with the decorative fixed member 670 is lowered, and the second operation unit 700 having a horizontally elongated decoration is used. can be viewed integrally with the covering member 787.

Although FIG. 35 shows the intermediate rendering state of the second motion unit 700, if the second motion unit 700 is in the extended state as shown in FIG. The vertical distance between the two decorative rotating members 660 is further reduced, and the integrally visible effect can be enhanced.

At this time, the overhanging decorative portion 652b is overhanging in a visible position, and the above-described effect of visually making the right edge of the third pattern display device 81 expand to the right from the region right end RE1 causes the third pattern display device 81 to expand. Even if the arrangement of the second performance surface 661b is close to the right edge, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling cramped.

In addition, this allows the player to visually recognize the second effect surface 661b as if it were arranged on the center side of the third symbol display device 81, similarly to the second main decoration surface 787b1. It is possible to enhance the effect that the surface 787b1 and the second effect surface 661b are viewed integrally.

In this case, by forming the decoration of the projecting decorative portion 652b with the contents related to the decoration of the second rendering surface 661b and the decoration of the second main decorative surface 787b1 (first main decorative surface 787a1), the second The main decorative surface 787b1 (first main decorative surface 787a1), the second rendering surface 661b, and the projecting decorative portion 652b can be visually recognized integrally.

In FIGS. 70(c) and 70(d), the first action unit 600 and the third action unit 800 are in the effect waiting state, and the second action unit 700 is in the extended state. FIG. 70(d) shows the reversing operation of the second operating unit 700. In the extended state of the first operating unit 600, the second decoration rotating member 660 moves toward the left and right outside of the covering member 787 of the second operating unit 700. 59), the covering member 787 can be reversed even when the first operation unit 600 is in the extended state.

In the reversing operation of the covering member 787, the auxiliary decorative surfaces 787a2 and 787b2, which are different on the left and right sides, are directed to the front side, so that it is possible to create a state in which there is no distinguishing power, as described above, as shown in FIG. In addition, different secondary decorative surfaces 787a2 and 787b2 may be combined so that the player can identify the contents.

According to FIG. 70(d), the player can identify the contents of "Pinch!?" Therefore, the player's line of sight can be focused on the second action unit 700 .

For example, when notifying that the lottery is lost, the state of FIG. 70(d) is controlled to return to FIG. In this case, the player's line of sight can be focused on the second action unit 700 by performing control such that the state shown in FIG.

In FIG. 71(a), the first operation unit 600 and the second operation unit 700 are in the extended state, and the third operation unit 800 is in the presentation standby state. Above the second action unit 700, a second auxiliary decorative surface 787b2 is illustrated by imaginary lines as a surface that is invisible from the front view but visible from the player's line of sight.

In the state shown in FIG. 71(a), the second effect surface 661b and the second main decorative surface 787b1 are arranged close to each other, and the characters written on them are both written horizontally. easy to let In addition, since the content is a content that makes a series of meanings of "attack activation", it is even easier to visually recognize it integrally.

In the rendering standby state (see FIG. 70(a)), the first motion unit 600 has the first rendering surface 661a and the decoration fixing member 670 arranged close to each other, and the characters written on them are both vertically written. Therefore, it is easy for the player to visually recognize them integrally. In addition, since the content is a content that makes a series of meanings of "normal time", it is even easier to visually recognize it integrally.

In this way, in this embodiment, the rendering surfaces 661a and 661b of the first action unit 600 are made integral with the side surfaces of different members (for example, the second main decorative surface 787b1 or the front surface of the decoration fixing member 670). Configure. As a result, the performance effect can be improved.

In FIGS. 71(b) to 71(d), the first action unit 600 and the second action unit 700 are in the effect waiting state, and the third action unit 800 is in the extended state. The state shown in FIG. 71(b) and the state shown in FIG. 71(c) are different in the arrangement of the first decorative member 870 due to the integral rotation of the third operation unit 800 being performed. On the other hand, even if the switching rotation motion is executed from any state, it can be visually recognized by the player as the same one union state (see FIG. 71(d)).

That is, when the second decorative member 880 faces the front side, the player cannot recognize the difference in arrangement of the first decorative member 870 . As a result, as the operation control of the third operation unit 800, it is set to notify the success or failure of the big hit by executing the switching rotation operation at the end of the display performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the symbol variation. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from predicting whether or not the jackpot will be announced based on the arrangement of the first decorative member 870 .

In other words, regardless of the arrangement of the first decorative member 870 at the end of the display effect (whether in the state shown in FIG. 71(b) or the state shown in FIG. 71(c)), a game of whether or not a big win is possible. expectations can be maintained as well. Therefore, the player's attention to the third action unit 800 can be maintained at a high level.

As described above, each of the operation units 600 to 800 can form a case where the decoration is viewed alone and a case where the decoration is viewed integrally in combination. Therefore, the decorations formed in each of the action units 600-800 are designed as decorations that relate to each other between the action units 600-800 rather than being completed only by each action unit 600-800.

Whether or not the operation units 600 to 800 can be controlled is affected by their arrangement. That is, if the operation units 600 to 800 are driven at inappropriate timing, there is a possibility that member operations will collide and malfunction. controlled as

For example, the change to the extended state of the first operation unit 600 may be performed in any state of the second operation unit 700, and the third operation unit 800 is controlled to be executed when it is determined to be in the waiting state for presentation. be.

The change of the first action unit 600 to the intermediate rendering state may be any state of the second action unit 700, any vertical arrangement of the third action unit 800, and no switching rotation action for the rotating motion. Controlled to be executed if determined.

The change to the extended state of the second operation unit 700 may be any state of the first operation unit 600, and the third operation unit 800 is controlled so as to be executed when it is determined to be in the waiting state for presentation.

The change to the intermediate effect state of the second motion unit 700 can be done in any state of the first motion unit 600, in any vertical arrangement of the third motion unit 800, and as long as the rotation motion is not switching rotation motion. Controlled to be executed if determined.

In the control in which the third operation unit 800 changes to the extended state and the rotation is not executed or only the integral rotation operation occurs, the first operation unit 600 is determined to be in the intermediate effect state or the effect standby state, and the second operation unit 700 is It is executed when it is determined that it is in the intermediate effect state or the effect standby state.

The control in which the third operation unit 800 changes to the extended state and the switching rotation operation is performed is executed when it is determined that the first operation unit 600 is in the presentation standby state and the second operation unit 700 is determined to be in the presentation standby state. be done.

As described above, the drive control of each of the operation units 600 to 800 is not enabled at arbitrary timing, but is controlled after determining the arrangement of the members of other units.

Next, details of the sorting device 300 according to the first embodiment will be described. In addition, FIG. 1 to FIG. 25 are appropriately referred to in the detailed description of the sorting device 300 . First, an example of decoration applied to the front design member 162 will be described.

72 is a front perspective view of the sorting device 300. FIG. In FIG. 72, the front design member 162 is formed with a light-transmissive window 162d as a difference from the content shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 72, the front design member 162 arranged on the front side of the sorting device 300 has a front plate made of a light-transmitting resin material, and the center side range of the front plate is more flexible than the peripheral range. A window portion 162d is formed as a range with high light transmittance.

In the present embodiment, a light-transmissive seal member SL1 cut out in the central area to match the shape of the window portion 162d is attached to the front plate of the front design member 162. As shown in FIG. With this configuration, the front-rear thickness of the window portion 162d is thinner than the front-rear thickness of the range where the seal member SL1 is attached around the window portion 162d, and the degree of light transmission through the front design member 162 is differentiated. Therefore, the light transmittance of the window portion 162d can be increased.

The first purpose of the window part 162d is to improve the visibility of the sorting device 300, considering that the line of sight passes through the plate part of the front design member 162 when the player looks at the sorting device 300. In particular, it is formed for the second purpose of resolving the dissatisfaction of players that they cannot grasp how the balls flow down inside the sorting device 300 . That is, the window part 162d is formed with a shape and size that take into consideration the shape of the sorting device 300 .

Note that the means for forming the window portion 162d as a portion having a higher light transmittance than the surrounding area is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, by arranging a light guide plate on the plate portion of the front design member 162 or by forming a plurality of groove patterns so as to perform the same function as the light guide plate, the front design member 162 can be designed for each light emission pattern of a light emitting means such as an LED. The appearance of the member 162 may be changed, a pattern or pattern may be directly drawn on the front design member 162, or a range corresponding to the window portion 162d of the front design member 162 may be formed as an opening. good.

Also, the shape of the window portion 162d is not limited to the shape shown in FIG. 72, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, it may be a belt shape extending left and right with the same vertical width, or a shape in which the portion extending left and right is omitted so that the left and right width is equivalent to the left and right width of the range that extends upward It may have a pentagonal shape like a home plate), or it may have a shape along the shape of the front plate edge of the front design member 162 .

Moreover, although the window portion 162d is formed as a single range, it is not limited to this, and various modes are exemplified. For example, a range with high light transmittance may be formed by a combination of multiple locations partitioned by a lattice-like portion or a ladder-like portion, or the range may be defined by arranging a plurality of small windows, The range may be defined in such a manner that the windows are randomly arranged. Also, the shape of the window may be variable.

Moreover, the surface shape of the sealing member SL1 is not limited at all. For example, the surface may have a surface shape in which a large number of irregularities are formed, such as a surface shape formed by texturing, a large number of grooves or ridges may be formed on the surface, or the surface may be formed as a smooth surface.

The surface shape of the window portion 162d is preferably formed as a smooth surface. Various modes other than the shape similar to the surface shape of the member SL1 can be adopted.

73 is a front view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300. FIG. In FIG. 73, as a difference from the contents shown in FIG. 21, a light-transmissive window portion 162d is formed in the front design member 162. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 73, the window portion 162d is formed in a bilaterally symmetrical shape. A main window portion 162d1 that is short in the vertical direction and long in the horizontal direction, and a sub window formed continuously above the center portion of the main window portion 162d1 in the lateral direction. and a portion 162d2.

In this embodiment, the main window portion 162d1 and the sub window portion 162d2 are made of a colorless and transparent resin material, and are maintained in a state of high light transmittance. The shape of each part will be described in detail below.

The main window portion 162d1 is designed to have an outer edge shape sufficient to ensure the visibility of the second flow path forming portion 335 and the third flow path forming portion 336 when viewed from the front. That is, as shown in FIG. 73, the second flow path forming part 335 and the third flow path forming part 336 are formed to have the same vertical width as that of the ball passage, and the second flow path forming part 335 is inclined. It is formed in a V shape that is inclined upward toward the left and right outer sides.

As a result, the spheres flowing down the second flow path forming part 335 and the third flow path forming part 336 can be accommodated inside the main window part 162d1 in a front view. It is possible to improve the visibility of the sphere flowing down the flow path forming portion 336 .

The left and right ends of the main window portion 162d1 are set near the center of the left and right width of the first flow passage forming portion 334 (see FIG. 17) formed at the same left and right positions as the ball passage hole 163b. That is, the entire outer wall of the first flow path forming portion 334 cannot be seen through the main window portion 162d1, and the visibility of the side wall portion 334a is particularly low.

As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the shape of the side wall portion 334a is improved compared to the case of designing on the premise that it will be visually recognized by the player, such as when a good-looking shape is required. can do.

The sub-window portion 162d2 is designed to have an outer edge shape sufficient to ensure the visibility of the seal member 313 illuminated by the light from the light emitting means 351 when viewed from the front. That is, as shown in FIG. 73, it is formed in a rectangular shape covering the sealing member 313 .

As a result, in addition to the visibility of the ball flowing down the third flow passage forming part 336, the player can grasp the state of the sealing member 313 illuminated by the light emitting means 351 whose lighting timing is controlled based on the flow state of the ball. Since it can be configured to be easy, it is possible to provide the player with a comfortable game.

74 is a perspective view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 viewed from the direction of the arrow XXIII in FIG. 16, and FIG. 75 is a cross section of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 along the LXXV-LXXV line in FIG. It is a diagram. In FIGS. 74 and 75, the front design member 162 is provided with a light-transmitting window 162d, which is different from the contents shown in FIGS. 23 and 18 above.

As shown in FIG. 74 , when viewed in a direction looking down on the sorting device 300 (viewed in an angled direction), a part of the upper protruding portion 376 of the slide displacement member 370 arranged at the front side position is the opening/closing plate. Visible below 65b.

On the other hand, when the slide displacement member 370 moves to the rear position, the upper protruding portion 376 is hidden behind the opening/closing plate 65b when viewed in the direction of FIG. Therefore, as long as the upper protruding portion 376 is visible, the player can easily predict whether the ball flowing down the third flow path forming portion 336 will pass through the variable probability detection sensor SE11 or through the normal detection sensor SE12. can do.

The visibility toward the upper protruding portion 376 is also good because the inner side surface 314b1 of the second upper surface portion 314b of the upper member 310 is formed as an inclined surface that inclines left and right outward toward the front side. is secured to

That is, the second upper surface portion 314b functions as a ceiling surface that prevents the ball flowing down the second flow passage forming portion 335 from jumping up, and the inner surface 314b1 is formed as an inclined surface so that the upper projecting portion 376 It avoids unnecessary obstruction of the view to.

In addition, forming the inner side surface 314b1 as an inclined surface compensates for the disadvantage of forming the upper surface portion 314 as an inclined surface that slopes down toward the front. When the upper surface portion 314 is configured as an inclined surface as described above, the projected area of the upper surface portion 314 can be increased when viewed from a downward direction (viewed from an angled direction) as shown in FIG. While there is an advantage that it is easy to improve the production effect of making the light visible through the light diffusion processed surface 314c, the projection area of the upper surface part 314 becomes large, so that the player can catch the ball flowing down below. It has the disadvantage that the range to be hidden from view may increase.

In other words, constructing the upper surface portion 314 as an inclined surface that slopes down toward the front works well for light performance, but it may work against the visibility of the falling ball. .

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the inner side surface 314b1 is formed as an inclined surface that inclines toward the left and right outer sides, so that the ball enters from the second flow path forming part 335 to the third flow path forming part 336. The projected area of the upper surface portion 314 can be reduced in places, and the visibility of the ball flowing down under the upper surface portion 314 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 74 , when viewed from a direction looking down on the sorting device 300 (viewed from an angled direction), the seal member 313 is not visible inside the sub window portion 162d2. In order to visually confirm the state of the member 313, the player is forced to adjust the eye position and line-of-sight angle so that the seal member 313 can be seen, which may impede a comfortable game.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the straight line LL1 as the optical axis of the light emitting means 351 that directs the light to the sealing member 313 passes through the sealing member 313 and the sub-window portion 162d2. Part of the light reaches the sub-window portion 162d2 after passing through the seal member 313. As shown in FIG. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether or not the light emitting means 351 on the straight line LL1 is lit by looking at the sub window portion 162d2.

Since the sealing member 313 is not subjected to light diffusion processing, the action of stopping the light from the light emitting means 351 is weak, and the light can sufficiently reach the sub-window portion 162d2. As a result, when the light emitting means 351 is turned on, red light, which is the color of the seal member 313, reaches the sub-window portion 162d2, so that the sub-window portion 162d2 can be illuminated in red.

As a result, the difference from the colorless and transparent state of the sub-window portion 162d2 before the light reaches is made easy to understand, so that the player can easily grasp whether or not the light-emitting means 351 is lit. It should be noted that the sealing member 313 (or the wall on which the sealing member 313 is arranged) may be provided with light diffusion processing. In this case, the seal member 313 can be made easier to emit light uniformly.

As shown in FIG. 75 , the straight line LL1 is arranged at a position (height position) that does not overlap the sphere flowing down the third flow path forming portion 336 . That is, the straight line LL1 is arranged above the range in which the spheres flowing down the third flow path forming portion 336 can be arranged.

In addition, the straight line LL1 is arranged at a position that does not overlap the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a. That is, the straight line LL1 is arranged below the lower surface portion 163a on which the ball that enters the specific winning hole 65a rides.

Furthermore, between the member to be fixed 161 and the front design member 162, as described above, the front design member 141 (see FIG. 7) prevents the sphere from flowing down, so that the flow-down range of the sphere is limited to the front design member. It is brought to the left and right outside of the left and right width of 141 . Therefore, the ball flowing down between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 is also prevented from overlapping the straight line LL1.

Therefore, on the straight line LL1, the ball flowing down the front side of the base plate 60 (for example, the game area), the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a, the distribution device 300 (for example, the third flow path forming part 336 ) is arranged, it is possible to avoid the situation where the light is reflected and refracted by the sphere. As a result, the light emitted from the light emitting means 351 can stably reach the sub-window portion 162d2 regardless of how the sphere flows down.

It should be noted that the placement of the seal member 313 in this embodiment may benefit the player if the player can continue to make the seal member 313 difficult to see unless the player changes his or her line of sight.

For example, in a configuration in which the sealing member 313 is always visible, the light enters the player's eyes each time the light emitting means 351 emits light. By arranging it difficultly, it is possible to weaken the glare felt by the player.

In addition, although the case where the light from the light emitting means 351 reaches the sub-window portion 162d2 has been described in the present embodiment, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, light may be difficult to reach the sub-window portion 162d2 by forming light diffusion processing on the member 161 to be fixed in the range intersecting the straight line LL1.

In this case, it is necessary to change the line of sight from the state shown in FIG. can be done. Therefore, even if the player does not want to know whether or not the ball has entered the variable probability detection sensor SE11 as a preference of the game, the purpose can be achieved if the line of sight shown in FIG. 74 is maintained. Therefore, the game burden on the player can be reduced.

In this embodiment, the case where the sub-window portion 162d2 is formed with a smooth surface shape has been described, but the shape is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at least one of the front and back surfaces of the sub-window portion 162d2 may be subjected to light diffusion processing, or may be formed so as to provide an air bubble portion therein so that light can be easily diffused.

In this case, the light reaching the sub-window 162d2 is diffused, so that the area of the light visible through the sub-window 162d2 can be increased. This makes it possible for the player to easily notice that the sub window portion 162d2 is illuminated.

So far, among the LEDs constituting the light emitting means 351, the light emitted from the light emitting means 351 that directs light toward the sealing member 313, that is, the LEDs arranged on the straight line LL1 have been described. Next, among the LEDs constituting the light emitting means 351, the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs arranged at four positions on the left and right in the lowermost stage will be described.

76 is a cross-sectional view of middle member 330, slide displacement member 370, lower member 380 and detection sensor SE1 of sorting device 300 taken along line LXXVI-LXXVI of FIG. In FIG. 76, the arrangement of the light emitting means 351 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

In the following description, among the light emitting means 351, the lowermost LED arranged on the left and right inner sides will be referred to as an inner light emitting means 351c, and the lowermost LED arranged on the left and right outer sides will be referred to as an outer light emitting means 351d. .

First, as shown in FIG. 76, the optical axis (a straight line extending in the front-rear direction) of the inner light emitting means 351c is arranged inside the light diffusion processing surface 332e. Therefore, when light is emitted from the inner light emitting means 351c, a light emitting effect is performed in which the light diffusing processed surface 332e formed in a range extending from left to right is illuminated.

This light emission effect is a branching point BP1 where the flow of the ball is branched by the variable probability detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 (see FIG. 75, a long left and right space continuously connected from the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336). ) is executed on the back side of the

Therefore, in a situation where the inner light emitting means 351c is lit, when the ball flows through the branch point BP1, the part where the ball flowing in front of the light diffusion processing surface 332e emitting light in the range extending to the left and right is arranged is visually recognized as a shadow. Therefore, the player can easily grasp how the ball has flowed by visually recognizing the displacement of the shadow.

The optical axis of the inner light emitting means 351c passes through the front-rear elongated projecting portion 317 (see FIG. 75). In addition, although the optical axis does not pass through the left and right inner projecting portions 318, the arrangement allows light in the vicinity of the optical axis to pass therethrough. is curved.

Therefore, part of the light emitted from the inner light-emitting means 351 is refracted by the curved shapes of the front-rear elongated projecting portion 317 and the left-right inner projecting portion 318, and travels obliquely forward and downward. The light can reach the light diffusion processed surface 340 (see FIG. 75).

Since the light diffusion processed surface 340 is formed over the entire lower surface of the third flow path forming portion 336 (see FIG. 14), by allowing light to reach the light diffusion processed surface 340, the third flow path structure The visibility of the space below the lower bottom surface of the portion 336 can be reduced. Therefore, it is easy to distinguish between the ball flowing down the inside of the third flow path forming part 336 and the out ball passing through the out port 71 (see FIG. 75) and flowing down the lower side of the third flow path forming part 336. can do.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 76, the optical axis of the outer light emitting means 351d (a straight line extending in the front-rear direction) is outside (upper) the light diffusion processed surface 332e and inside the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a and 333b. placed. Therefore, when light is emitted from the outer light emitting means 351d, a light emitting effect is performed in which the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a and 333b are illuminated.

This light emission effect is a branching point BP1 where the flow of the ball is branched by the variable probability detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 (see FIG. 75, a long left and right space continuously connected from the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336). ) on the upper and front side.

Therefore, when the ball flows through the branch point BP1 in a situation where the outer light emitting means 351d is lit, the light diffusion processing surfaces 319a and 333b emit light above and in front of the ball, and the light flows through the branch point BP1. Since the ball is hidden by the light diffusion processing surface 333b (see FIG. 17), it becomes difficult for the player to grasp how the ball flows through the branch point BP1.

In addition, the light diffusion processing surface 333b is formed over the top and bottom, and the light diffusion processing surface 314c of the upper surface portion 314 is arranged on the upper side thereof (see FIG. 73). Therefore, in addition to the effect of making it difficult to visually recognize the branch point BP1 when viewed in the front-rear direction, the light-diffusing surface 314c can also be viewed at an angle such as when looking into the light-diffusing surface 333b from above (see FIG. 74). It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the branch point BP1 by light emission.

Further, the light diffusion processed surface 333b is formed over the upper and lower sides, and the light diffusion processed surface 340 is disposed below the light diffusion processed surface 333b. It is formed up to the side and back surfaces (see FIG. 14). Therefore, apart from the effect of making the branching point BP1 difficult to see in the front-rear direction, the lower surface of the second flow path forming part 335 is illuminated, and when the ball flows down the second flow path forming part 335, the ball By blocking the light (the light diffused by the light diffusion processing surface 340) and creating a shadow, the player can easily grasp that the ball is flowing down.

Here, the light diffusion processing surface 333b is arranged on the front side of the branch point BP1 (see FIGS. 17 and 75). Therefore, depending on the positional relationship between the outer light emitting means 351d and the light diffusion processed surface 333b, the light may be hidden by the sphere. ) is arranged outside (upper side) of the range where the sphere flows down the branch point BP1 (see FIG. 76), so that it is possible to avoid a situation in which light is blocked by the sphere arranged at the branch point BP1.

Therefore, the light-diffusing surface 333b can be illuminated brightly by causing the outer light-emitting means 351d to emit light regardless of the manner in which the spheres in the sorting device 300 flow down. When the light diffusion processing surface 333b is illuminated, the ball flowing down the second flow passage forming portion 335 (see FIG. 17) arranged in front of it blocks the light and casts a shadow. It becomes easy to grasp the flowing state of the spheres flowing down the flow passage forming part 335 .

In this embodiment, as a device for avoiding a situation in which the light is blocked by the sphere placed at the branch point BP1, a configuration for smoothing down the flow of the sphere is adopted. The configuration will be described.

The ball that reaches the branch point BP1 and flows down, in a state where the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the rear side position (see FIG. 20), flows down just below and passes through the probability variation detection sensor SE11, and the slide displacement member 370 In the state of being arranged at the front side position (see FIG. 18), it flows down to the left and right outside along the inclination of the ball guide portion 371b and passes the normal detection sensor SE12.

When the ball flows down while the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the front position, the through hole edge 382a of the plate-like portion 382 that supports the left and right outer ends of the slide displacement member 370 is positioned on the left and right outer sides of the probability variation detection sensor SE11. It is disposed so as to connect the edge portion and the left and right inner edge portions of the normal detection sensor SE12, and the upper surface is formed as an inclined surface that slopes down toward the left and right outer sides. Therefore, the ball reaching the upper surface of the through-hole edge portion 382a is configured to easily flow downward in the left-right direction.

As a result, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the ball that has started to flow down to the left and right outside along the inclination of the ball guide part 371b flows back inward in the left and right direction after being bridged by the through-hole edge part 382a, or bounces. can be used to smooth the flow of the sphere.

In addition, the light diffusion processing surface 319a is disposed inside the front-to-rear width of the branch point BP1. Therefore, a situation in which the sphere is arranged on the back side of the light diffusion processed surface 319a cannot occur, and thus the situation in which the light is hidden by the sphere regardless of the positional relationship between the outer light emitting means 351d and the light diffusion processed surface 319a is prevented. unlikely to occur.

In this way, the inner light emitting means 351c and the outer light emitting means 351d are not only arranged to be shifted to the left and right, but also the light diffusion processing surfaces 332e, 319a, 333b arranged at different front and back positions on the front side thereof. By intentionally providing a difference in the positional relationship with the optical axis of each of the light emitting means 351c and 351d and by making the light diffusion processed surfaces 332e, 319a and 333b to which the light from the light emitting means 351c and 351d reach, The front and rear positions at which the light reaches, diffuses, and is visually recognized can be made different.

In the above description, the cases where the inner light emitting means 351c and the outer light emitting means 351d are caused to emit light are explained separately, and the explanation is based on the premise that the light emitting means 351c and 351d on the opposite side are extinguished. The actual light emission control of the light emitting means 351c and 351d is not one side at a time, and a control mode such as both lighting or both lighting off may occur. The pattern of light emission control and how the internal flow path of the sorting device 300 is seen at that time will be described below.

77(a) to 77(d) are front perspective views of the middle member 330 of the sorting device 300. FIG. In FIGS. 77(a) to 77(d), for ease of understanding, streaks as shape lines of the light diffusion processed surface are omitted. A case where the combination is different is illustrated, and the range brightly illuminated by the light from the light emitting means 351c and 351d is illustrated with a hatched pattern.

That is, in FIG. 77(a), both light-emitting means 351c and 351d are turned off, and in FIG. 77(b), the inner light-emitting means 351c is turned on and the outer light-emitting means 351d is turned off. FIG. 77(c) shows an outer lighting state in which the inner light emitting means 351c is turned off and the outer light emitting means 351d is turned on, and FIG. Both lit states are shown, both lit.

In the both light-off state, as shown in FIG. 77(a), the light diffusion processing surfaces 332e, 319a, and 333b are not illuminated, and the visibility of the back side thereof is ensured, but the game gives a dull impression. give to someone. In particular, it becomes difficult to distinguish between the ball flowing above the third flow path forming part 336 and the out ball flowing down the back side (lower side) of the third flow path forming part 336 .

In the inner lighting state, as shown in FIG. 77( b ), the light diffusion processing surface 340 on the lower side of the third flow path forming portion 336 is illuminated, so that the spheres flowing above the third flow path forming portion 336 are illuminated. High visibility is maintained, and the visibility of an out ball flowing down the back side (lower side) of the third flow path forming portion 336 is reduced.

Furthermore, since the light diffusion processed surface 332e is illuminated on the back side of the branch point BP1, the visibility of the flow of balls at the branch point BP1 can be improved. Moreover, since the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a and 333b arranged on the front side of the light diffusion processed surface 332e are maintained in an unilluminated state, it is possible to avoid a situation where the branch point BP1 is blinded by light.

That is, in the inner lighting state, the range from the third flow path forming portion 336 to the branch point BP1 is illuminated with light, and the line of sight to see the branch point BP1 through the front frame portion 333 passes through the branch point. It is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the manner in which the ball flows down in BP1. In addition, since the light is illuminated on the spot where the player should pay attention to grasp the flow of the ball, it is possible to reduce the possibility of the player overlooking the spot of interest, thereby reducing the player's playing stress. can.

A light diffusion processing surface 333b is formed on the inner surface of the front frame-shaped part 333 over the entire range (see FIG. 13), making it difficult for the player to see through the front frame-shaped part 333 and see behind. is configured to be

When viewing the back through the front frame portion 333, the back is viewed through the two inner surfaces of the front frame portion 333 that are opposed to each other in the front-rear direction. Since there are many plates that need to be seen through, it is even more difficult to see the back side.

Similarly, if you try to see through the front frame portion 333 with a line of sight slanting from the left and right inner side to the left and right outer directions (a line of sight slanted from the front side left and right central position to the normal detection sensor SE12). It can also be said for players who play.

That is, in the present embodiment, the light diffusion processing surface 333b is formed along the inner side of the rectangular cylindrical shape, and on this inclined line of sight, the rear side surface of the front frame portion 333 and the left and right inner side surfaces (partition plates) are visible. 338 and the side surface opposite to the portion 338 are arranged. Therefore, since there are many plates that need to be seen through, it is even more difficult to see the back side.

In this way, according to the front frame-shaped portion 333, it is possible to make it difficult to see through the rear side of the front frame-shaped portion 333 not only when viewed in the front-rear direction but also when viewed obliquely.

In the outside lighting state, as shown in FIG. 77(c), the light diffusion processing surfaces 319a and 333b are illuminated, so that the sphere that has flowed left and right outside at the branch point BP1 is hidden by the light. becomes less visible.

On the other hand, since the light diffusion processing surface 340 formed on the back side (lower side) of the second flow path forming part 335 is illuminated, the visibility of the sphere flowing down the second flow path forming part 335 is improved. can be done. That is, in the outside lighting state, the visibility of the ball flowing on the near side is improved, which has the effect of improving the attention of the player, but the visibility of the branch point BP1 itself is lowered.

In the both lighting state, as shown in FIG. 77(d), the light diffusion processing surfaces 332e, 319a and 333b are illuminated over a wide range. The lighting conditions are a combination of inside lighting conditions and outside lighting conditions, which can have both effects, but not only assist each other in an advantageous effect.

For example, since the light diffusion processed surface 333b is illuminated, the feature that the sphere flowing to the left and right outside of the branch point BP1 is hidden by the light is inherited from the outside lighting state. Therefore, for the purpose of improving the visibility of the branch point BP1, it is optimal to maintain the inner lighting state.

Various modes are exemplified for the control modes related to the lighting/extinguishing of the light emitting means 351c and 351d. For example, in a jackpot game, in a round game in which there is a possibility that a ball may enter the variable probability detection sensor SE11 (see FIG. 76), control is performed to configure an inner lighting state so that the player can easily pay attention to the branch point BP1. However, in a round game other than that, it may be controlled to brighten the whole by configuring an outside lighting state or a both lighting state.

Further, for example, control may be performed in such a manner that the both lighting state and the both lighting state are alternately switched irrespective of the type of round game.

Also, the timing for lighting the light emitting means 351c and 351d is not limited to the round game, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be controlled to light the light emitting means 351c, 351d after the ready-to-win stands upright during the pattern variation, or it is detected that the ball has entered the winning openings 63, 64, 140, 65a or the through gate 67. Then, the light emitting means may be controlled to light 351c and 351d.

Returning from FIG. 73 to FIG. 75, the configuration for optimizing the flow of the balls in the vicinity of the specific winning opening 65a will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 73, the upper side surfaces of the extended portions 162b arranged on the left and right outer sides of the opening/closing plate 65b are formed as inclined surfaces that slope down toward the left and right outer sides.

Therefore, regardless of whether the opening/closing plate 65b is in the open state or the closed state, the ball deviating to the left/right outside of the opening/closing plate 65b and riding on the upper surface of the extension portion 162b is placed on the left/right outside (opening/closing plate). 65b is arranged), it is possible to prevent the ball riding on the extended portion 162b from flowing down through the front side of the specific prize winning port 65a.

Therefore, most of the balls flowing down to the out port 71 can be made to roll on the inner rail 61, so that the balls can be prevented from jumping up (bouncing high) in the vicinity of the out port 71. can be avoided. As a result, it is possible to prevent the main window portion 162d1 and the third flow passage forming portion 336 arranged on the inner side thereof from being hidden by the jumped ball, thereby avoiding a decrease in visibility.

As shown in FIG. 74, the upper side surface of the opening/closing plate 65b in the opened/closed state is formed in a planar shape extending in the left-right direction. On the other hand, the second flow path forming portion 335 is inclined downward toward the left-right center side (partition plate portion 338 side).

Therefore, the closer to the left-right center side, the longer the vertical distance between the opening/closing plate 65b and the second flow path forming portion 335. spheres flowing toward the third flow passage forming portion 336 can be easily distinguished.

As shown in FIG. 74, the opening/closing plate 65b is shaped so that the balls on the upper side face can be flowed into the specific prize winning opening 65a without omission. It is

For example, firstly, the guide plate portion 163a2 of the receiving member 163 is a plate-like portion that abuts on the ball flowing backward from the upper side surfaces of the left and right ends of the opening/closing plate 65b and guides the ball to the left and right inner sides. . The guide plate portion 163a2 does not have a plate-like shape extending in the horizontal direction, but has a plate-like shape extending in a downwardly inclined direction inward and leftward according to the vertical positional displacement of the ball flowing from the opening/closing plate 65b toward the receiving member 163. As shown in FIG.

That is, the front end portion of the guide plate portion 163a2 is formed as an inclined surface arranged rearward toward the left and right inner sides. The left and right inner portions with which the ball to be transferred to the receiving member 163 with a lower floor surface abuts extend in an inclined direction so that the position thereof is downward.

As a result, the contact position of the ball contacting the guide plate portion 163a2 (contact height over the entire length of the ball) can be stabilized, and the ball can be guided smoothly. In the present embodiment, the arrangement of the guide plate portion 163a2 is designed based on the relative relationship between the opening/closing plate 65b and the receiving member 163 and the floor surface so that the ball can come into contact with the ball at the central height position over the entire length of the ball. be.

For example, secondly, the height relationship between the rear end of the upper side surface of the opening/closing plate 65b (rotation base end side) and the lower surface portion 163a of the receiving member 163 is configured to be reversed in the middle. In other words, the height position of the opening/closing plate 65b is lower at the left-right central position where the height position of the lower surface portion 163a is the highest. A pair of switching positions EP1 on the outer side of the direction is configured to be inverted upside down.

In the present embodiment, the switching position EP1 has the property of switching the flow-down mode of the ball between the opening/closing plate 65b and the receiving member 163. 74) (right above the front frame-shaped portion 333 in FIG. 74).

In the left and right inner range of the switching position EP1 (the range between the pair of left and right switching positions EP1), rolling of the ball from the opening/closing plate 65b to the receiving member 163 is suppressed due to the relationship between the vertical positions of the rolling surface of the ball. On the other hand, the rolling of the ball from the receiving member 163 to the opening/closing plate 65b can occur with little resistance.

For example, even if a ball that bounces backward near the left-right central position of the opening/closing plate 65b collides with (the inner rear surface of) the receiving member 163 and bounces forward again, after the ball has stopped bouncing and begins to roll, It is possible to suppress the ball from riding on the receiving member 163 from the opening/closing plate 65b.

In addition, the ball rolling from the opening/closing plate 65b toward the receiving member 163 does not ride on the receiving member 163, but when the ball starts contacting the lower surface portion 163a, the ball moves left and right along the left and right inclination of the lower surface portion 163a. will be carried to

In addition, since the front design member 141 (see FIG. 7) prevents the ball from falling near the left-right central position of the opening/closing plate 65b, it is difficult for the ball to bounce. I can say. However, ball bouncing can occur due to collisions between balls.

In the left and right outer range of the switching position EP1 (the range of the left and right outer sides of the pair of left and right switching positions EP1 (the side where the ball passage hole 163b is arranged)), due to the vertical position of the rolling surface of the ball, from the receiving member 163 While the rolling of the ball to the opening/closing plate 65b is suppressed, the rolling of the ball from the opening/closing plate 65b to the receiving member 163 can occur with little resistance. For example, even if the ball rolling on the lower surface portion 163a moves forward due to a collision with another ball or vibration of the game machine, the ball is prevented from flowing back toward the opening/closing plate 65b. be able to.

To summarize the description of the switching position EP1, by limiting the range in which the ball can roll forward from the receiving member 163 side to the range between the pair of switching positions EP1, the backward flow of the ball near the ball passage hole 163b is prevented. By avoiding and smoothing the flow of the ball, we are trying to avoid the situation where the ball stays.

In addition, the backward rolling of the sphere from the range between the pair of switching positions EP1 is not a rolling mode in which the ball is switched to the horizontal flow after the backward flow is completed. , and the ball passing hole 163b.

In other words, the flow is not along a path that intersects at right angles as in the longitudinal direction and the lateral direction, but along the oblique side connecting the other ends of the longitudinal straight line and the lateral straight line whose one ends are arranged at the same position. Therefore, the rolling path of the sphere can be shortened (corresponding to the length of the hypotenuse being shorter than the sum of the lengths of the other two sides in a right-angled triangle).

Furthermore, compared to the case where the ball easily flows backward over the left and right positions of the opening/closing plate 65b, as in the present embodiment, the range between the pair of switching positions EP1 is configured so that the ball can easily flow forward. Therefore, even when a large number of balls enter the receiving member 163 at the same time, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the flow of balls stagnates.

As shown in FIG. 75, the receiving member 163 is not formed in the range on the left and right outer sides of the pair of switching positions EP1 (see FIG. 16), and is spaced forward in the range on the left and right central sides of the pair of switching positions EP1. It has an upper surface portion 163f that is formed in a plate-like shape that is inclined upward so as to leave a gap.

The upper surface portion 163f is designed to reduce the possibility of the ball being clogged in the range between the pair of switching positions EP1 by increasing the position of the lower surface portion 163a. The vertical width can be secured.

This prevents ball clogging in the range between the pair of switching positions EP1, and prevents balls from getting caught between the opening/closing plate 65b and the receiving member 163 when the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced to close with a ball on it. can be avoided.

The laterally extending direction of the symmetrical protruding portion 161f is the direction along the inclination angle of the second flow passage forming portion 335 (the direction inclined 5 degrees from the horizontal), and rolls on the second flow passage forming portion 335. It is disposed at a position (a position 5.5 mm higher than the floor bottom of the second flow path forming portion 335) that abuts on the ball at the central height position of the entire length of the ball.

As a result, when the formation thickness of the symmetrical protruding portion 161f is minimized for the purpose of ensuring the visibility of the branch point BP1, the sphere abuts against the symmetrical protruding portion 161f at a position deviated from the center height of the sphere. As a result, the rolling of the ball can be made smoother than in the case where the load in the direction of lifting the ball or the load in the direction of pressing the ball against the floor is applied to the ball from the symmetrical projecting portion 161f.

If it is acceptable that the visibility of the branch point BP1 is lowered, the thickness of the symmetrical projecting portion 161f is formed to be approximately the same as the total length of the sphere. The projecting portion 161f can be prevented from coming into contact with the ball.

Next, the slide displacement member 370 and its peripheral structure will be described again in detail. 78 is a top view of the middle member 330, the state switching device 360, the slide displacement member 370 and the lower member 380. FIG. In FIG. 78, to facilitate understanding, the middle member 330 is seen transparently with imaginary lines, and the slide displacement member 370 disposed below the middle member 330 is seen through.

The slide displacement member 370 is a member that is slidably displaced in the front-rear direction at the branch point BP1. A gap is maintained. The gap is formed as a gap having a size sufficiently short to prevent the ball from entering the probability variation detecting sensor SE11.

As a result, while achieving the purpose of preventing the ball from entering the variable probability detection sensor SE11, the front end of the slide displacement member 370 is scraped or deformed due to contact with the side surface of the discharge hole 337. can do.

The front end portion of the slide displacement member 370, that is, the front end portion of the thin plate portion 371 is formed to be inclined in such a manner that the arrangement thereof shifts rearward toward the left and right outer sides. As a result, it is possible to easily avoid stagnation of the ball between the front end portion of the thin plate portion 371 and the side surface of the discharge hole 337 .

That is, even if the ball is sandwiched between the front end of the thin plate portion 371 and the side surface of the discharge hole 337, the front end of the thin plate portion 371 is formed as an inclined surface, so that The resulting load has a directional component directed outwards to the left and right, so the ball can be pushed outward to the left and right. Thereby, ball clogging can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 79, a device for guiding the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 will be described. Since the position of the slide displacement member 370 can change the player's profit, reproducibility (stability) and smoothness are required for the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 .

79(a) is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member 330, the slide displacement member 370 and the lower member 380 taken along line LXXIXa-LXXIXa in FIG. 78, and FIG. 79(b) is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member taken along line LXXIXb-LXXIXb in FIG. 79(c) is a cross-sectional view of the middle member 330, the slide displacement member 370 and the lower member 380 along line LXXIXc-LXXIXc in FIG. 13 and 14 will be referred to as necessary in the description of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 79(a), the upper surface of the thin plate portion 371 on the front side of the upper protruding portion 376 is formed as an inclined surface positioned downward toward the left and right outer sides, and the ball flows along this inclination. obtain. In this embodiment, in order to stabilize the flow of balls rolling on this inclined surface, it is configured to suppress the attitude change of the slide displacement member 370 that causes the inclination of the inclined surface to change.

That is, as shown in FIG. 79( a ), the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370 is abutted and supported by the plate-like portion 382 of the lower member 380 not only at the left and right end portions but also at the lower rib portion 373 . As a result, each of the pair of ball guide portions 371b divided into left and right by the concave portion 372 can be supported on the left and right sides (supported on both sides), so that the change in posture of the slide displacement member 370 can be suppressed. can.

In other words, even if the loads applied from the balls to the pair of left and right ball guide portions 371b are different (even if the number of balls placed on the ball guide portions 371b is unbalanced), each ball guide portion 371b is supported at its left and right ends. As a result, the ball guide portion 371b and the slide displacement member 370 can be prevented from tilting to the left or right (displacement in the rotational direction about the axis extending in the front-rear direction).

In addition, upward displacement of the edge of the recessed portion 372 is restricted by the partition plate portion 338 disposed on the upper side. That is, it is possible to suppress the upward movement of the slide displacement member 370 and the tilting displacement in the backward tilting direction.

As a result, the posture of the slide displacement member 370 can be easily maintained in a proper state, the displacement resistance in the longitudinal direction displacement can be suppressed, and malfunction of the slide displacement member 370 can be prevented.

The ball guide portion 371b is a plate-like portion formed to protrude forward on the protruding base end side of the upper protruding portion 376, and the upper surface on which the ball can roll is inclined downward toward the left and right outer sides. formed as a plane.

The contact between the ball guide portion 371b and the ridge portion 383 is configured to be a point contact. That is, in this embodiment, a pair of hemispherical projecting portions 372a are projected from the recessed portion 372 toward the projecting portion 383 side, and when the gap is filled, the hemispherical projecting portions 372a and the projecting portion 372a are projected. 383 are configured to make point contact with each other.

Here, as described above, the upper surface of the ball guide portion 371b on which the ball can roll is formed as an inclined surface that slopes in the horizontal direction. It is decomposed into a directional component and a left-right direction component, and the left-right direction component can displace the slide displacement member 370 in the left-right direction (the direction crossing the front-rear direction, which is the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370).

At this time, it is preferable to make the left-right gap between the concave portion 372 of the slide displacement member 370 and the protrusion 383 small because the left-right position of the ball guide portion 371b is easily stabilized, but contact friction is likely to occur. , which may cause functional problems.

For example, when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the front-rear direction with the ball on the ball guide portion 371b, if the contact friction becomes excessively large, the front-rear displacement becomes defective (for example, no displacement occurs). there's a possibility that.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the contact between the hemispherical protruding portion 372a and the protruding portion 383 is configured to be a point contact. can be kept small. As a result, even when the ball rides on the ball guide portion 371b, the slide displacement member 370 can be displaced in the front-rear direction satisfactorily.

In particular, the longitudinal displacement of the slide displacement member 370 in the state where the ball is on the ball guide portion 371b changes the state where the ball cannot enter the variable probability detection sensor SE11, so that the ball can enter the variable probability detection sensor SE11. Since it is a displacement action for switching the state to a state of , it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by performing this displacement action satisfactorily.

Further, by increasing the displacement speed of this displacement operation, it is possible to change the rotation of the ball riding on the ball guide portion 371b when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

80(a) and 80(b) are side views of the slide displacement member 370 and the ball on the upper surface of the ball guide portion 371b. FIG. 80(a) illustrates a state in which a ball is placed on the slide displacement member 370 at the front side position, and FIG. 80(b) illustrates a state in which the slide displacement member 370 is displaced to the rear side position. In Figures 80(a) and 80(b), examples of the direction of rotation of the sphere are illustrated by arrows.

As shown in FIG. 80(a), the direction of rotation of the ball that rolls backward and reaches the sliding displacement member 370 is the forward rolling direction. When the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 13) is driven so that the slide displacement member 370 is displaced back and forth to the rear side position while the ball is on the slide displacement member 370, the load applied from the slide displacement member 370 to the ball acts to reverse the rotation direction (guiding direction) of the sphere (backward rolling direction).

As a result, the rotation of the ball can be suppressed, so that the ball can easily receive the action of gravity, and the ball can be easily dropped straight down. Therefore, when the slide displacement member 370 is driven while the ball is on the slide displacement member 370, the ball can easily flow down to the variable probability detection sensor SE11.

The front-rear long projecting portion 317 has a function of guiding the ball that has reached the branch point BP1 toward the slide displacement member 370 side. In other words, the front-rear length projecting portion 317 is not limited to the function of guiding the ball to the probability variation detection sensor SE11, but the ball is guided regardless of the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 arranged upstream of the probability variation detection sensor SE11. Constructed as a suitably guidable profile.

When the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the rear side position, the ball in contact with the front-rear length projecting portion 317 passes through the probability variation detection sensor SE11 due to the path configuration. At this time, since the curve at the end of the longitudinally long projecting portion 317 has a substantially circular arc shape in which the width in the front-rear direction is longer than the width in the vertical direction (see FIG. 18), the sphere that makes contact with the ball moves forward. A load is applied in which the downward component is greater than the directional component. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from contacting the front-rear projection 317 from rebounding back and forth in the front-rear direction and flowing backward through the third flow passage forming portion 336 .

On the other hand, when the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the front side position, the flowing direction of the ball depends on the shape of the slide displacement member 370 . In this embodiment, the front side surface 376a of the upper projecting portion 376 of the slide displacement member 370 forms a curved surface that curves outward in the left and right direction, so the ball is guided outward in the left and right direction along this curve.

Here, in a state where the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the front position, when the ball flowing in the front-rear direction collides with the slide displacement member 370 with momentum, the slide displacement member 370 is pushed rearward by the load at the collision. It is possible to switch to a state where the ball can pass through the probability variation detection sensor SE11.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the velocity direction of the ball is corrected downward by contacting the front-rear projection 317 before colliding with the upper projection 376 of the slide displacement member 370 . Therefore, since the direction of displacement of the slide displacement member 370 due to the load from the ball is mainly downward, it is possible to easily avoid the situation where the slide displacement member 370 is pushed backward.

In addition, since the load in the direction of rearward displacement of the slide displacement member 370 given by the ball is reduced, the biasing force (electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 13)) for maintaining the slide displacement member 370 in the front position is provided. The biasing force of the return spring) can be reduced, and the electromagnetic force that drives the plunger against the biasing force can be reduced.

Even when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced from the rear position to the front position while the ball is arranged at the branch point BP1, it is possible to easily avoid the backward flow of the ball.

The left and right inner projecting portion 318 abuts the ball on the front side of the front displacement end position of the upper projecting portion 376, and the force of the ball is directed downward to the left and right outside. In addition, the momentum of the ball is directed downward by the front-rear long projecting portion 317 . As a result, the velocity of the ball in the front-rear direction is reduced, so that the inertia of the ball's own weight stabilizes the arrangement, and the load applied from the slide displacement member 370 makes it difficult for the ball to flow backward.

Furthermore, the contact between the ball and the upper projecting portion 376 occurs in a state where the ball is lower than the height position at which it contacts the front-rear projecting portion 317, but the ball can contact the upper projecting portion 376. In the lowered state (see FIG. 80(a)), the ball guide portion 371b contacts with the ball, and is located at a position lower than the lower bottom surface 336a of the third flow path forming portion 336. As shown in FIG. As a result, even if the ball receives a load in the front-rear direction from the upper projecting portion 376 and is displaced forward, a considerable amount of energy is required to climb from the upper surface of the ball guide portion 371b to the lower bottom surface 336a. , the degree of regurgitation of the sphere can be reduced.

In addition, the upper projecting portion 376 has an acute-angled front end portion on the side of the partition plate portion 338, and the plane does not collide head-on with the sphere in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 78). That is, the load applied to the ball from the upper projecting portion 376 is large in the lateral direction and small in the longitudinal direction.

As a result, the ball in contact with the upper projecting portion 376 can smoothly flow in the laterally outward direction, so that the slide displacement member 370 is displaced from the rear position to the front position while the ball is placed at the branch point BP1. In this control mode, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the ball is caught between the upper projecting portion 376 and the front side surface of the discharge hole 337, resulting in malfunction.

Returning to FIG. 78, FIG. 79(b) and FIG. 79(c), description will be made. Since the slide displacement member 370 is configured to protrude toward the branch point BP1 (front side), there is a possibility that the slide displacement member 370 will be displaced forward due to the weight of the ball on the ball guide portion 371b.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front-to-rear width length of the portion formed on the rear side of the upper projecting portion 376, i.e., the portion where the upper and lower projecting portions 374 are formed on both the left and right sides in the front-to-rear direction. It is sufficiently secured and configured to be able to contact with the lower bottom portion of the rear side frame-shaped portion 332 over the front-to-rear width. As a result, tilting displacement of the slide displacement member 370 in the forward tilting direction can be prevented.

In addition, since the upper and lower protrusions 374 are elongated in the front-rear direction, only one load is applied to the rear frame-shaped portion 332 when a load is applied to tilt and displace the slide displacement member 370 in the forward tilting direction. can avoid concentrating on Thereby, the deformation of the slide displacement member 370 can be suppressed (the rigidity of the slide displacement member 370 can be increased).

In addition, when the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the front position where the ball can ride on the ball guide portion 371b, the front side surface of the projecting portion (hereinafter also referred to as the projecting portion 378a) in which the recessed portion 378 is formed is It abuts on the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338 .

In other words, the front side position of the slide displacement member 370 is set so that the front side surface of the projecting portion 378 a contacts the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338 . For this purpose, the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338 is not formed with a light diffusing surface, and a flat surface is formed on the front and rear surfaces of the projecting portion 378a so as to be able to contact each other. Thereby, the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 at the front position can be stabilized.

Since the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 is arranged inside the recessed portion 378, the driving force of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 transmitted through the lower cylindrical portion 363c is transmitted through the front meat portion of the projecting portion 378a. It is hung on the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338 via.

In this way, since the position to which the driving force is transmitted is the left-right central portion of the slide displacement member 370, the driving force can be transmitted to the slide displacement member 370 in a well-balanced manner. That is, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of positional deviation of the slide displacement member 370 in the direction of rotation about the vertical axis during the displacement in the front-rear direction.

Furthermore, by pressing the front side surface of the projecting portion 378a against the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338, the posture of the slide displacement member 370 can be easily corrected in the rotational direction about the vertical axis. .

Here, when the posture maintenance and posture restoration of the slide displacement member 370 are executed by the contact between the partition plate portion 338 and the semispherical protruding portion 372a, the contact area between the partition plate portion 338 and the semispherical protruding portion 372a is is small, a load is applied locally, and there is a possibility that the durability of the hemispherical projecting portion 372a is degraded.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, before the front side surface of the projecting portion 378a is pressed against the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338, the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the rotational direction about the vertical axis. Even if this occurs, the transmission of the driving force can eliminate the positional deviation of the slide displacement member 370 in the process in which the front side surface of the protruding portion 378a comes into surface contact with the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338. You can modify your posture.

The partition plate portion 338 abuts against the projecting portion 378a to align the slide displacement member 370 when displaced in the front-rear direction, and also functions as a portion that receives the forward tilting load applied to the slide displacement member 370. have

That is, in a state in which the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the front side position, when a load is generated in a direction to change the posture of the slide displacement member 370 in the forward tilting direction due to the self weight of the ball on the ball guide portion 371b, the slide is displaced. When the projecting portion 378 a is displaced (displaced in the forward tilting direction) within the clearance allowed by the displacement member 370 , the projecting portion 378 a is pressed against the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338 .

In this case, resistance in the opposite direction is applied to the protruding portion 378a from the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338, thereby suppressing the displacement of the protruding portion 378a. can do.

Next, the details of the operation units 600, 700, and 800, which have not been sufficiently explained, will be explained again. First, as a detailed description of the first operation unit 600, the rotating member 620 will be described.

81(a) is a front view of the rotating member 620, FIG. 81(b) is a rear view of the rotating member 620, and FIG. 81(c) is the direction of arrow LXXXIc in FIG. 6 is a side view of the rotating member 620 in perspective. FIG.

82 is a front view of the first operation unit 600, and FIG. 83 is a rear view of the first operation unit 600. FIG. 82 and 83 illustrate a state in which the dish-shaped lid portion C2 that is displaced along the guide long hole 616 is arranged at the right end of the displacement range.

As shown in FIGS. 81(a) to 81(c), the pivoting member 620 is designed with an asymmetrical shape in relation to the load applied to the pivoting member 620 during the execution of the motion. The details of the rotating member 620 and the action on the rotating member 620 will be described below.

A body portion 621 of the rotating member 620 includes a first side surface 621a, a second side surface 621b, and a third side surface 621c as flat side surfaces that receive a load when stopped. A first side surface 621 a , a second side surface 621 b , and a third side surface 621 c are formed in order from the cylindrical portion 622 .

The first side surface 621a is a side surface formed on the tilting displacement side of the rotating member 620, and faces the base end side projecting portion 617a projecting from the front cover member 612 to the front side with a U-shaped cross section. It is formed in a shape that allows abutment (the shape is designed in relation to the base-end projecting portion 617a). The displacement of the first side surface 621a is restricted by the base-end projecting portion 617a, thereby defining the displaceable range of the rotating member 620 (see FIG. 45 for the rotating member 620 at the terminal position of the displaceable range). ).

The second side surface 621b is a side surface formed on the upward displacement side of the rotating member 620, and is in contact with a distal end side projecting portion 617b projecting from the front lid member 612 to the front side with a U-shaped cross section. It is formed in a shape that can be contacted (the shape is designed in relation to the tip end side projecting portion 617b). The displaceable range of the rotating member 620 is defined by restricting the displacement of the second side surface 621b by the tip-side projecting portion 617b (see FIG. 40 for the rotating member 620 at the terminal position of the displaceable range). .

The third side surface 621c is a side surface formed on the upward displacement side of the rotating member 620, and is in contact with a rectangular box portion 618 formed in a substantially rectangular box shape on the front side of the front cover member 612. It is formed in a shape that allows contact (the shape is designed in relation to the rectangular box portion 618). The displacement of the third side surface 621c is restricted by the rectangular box portion 618, thereby defining the displaceable range of the rotating member 620 (see FIG. 40 for the rotating member 620 at the terminal position of the displaceable range).

Thus, at the end of displacement of the rotating member 620, each of the side surfaces 621a to 621c of the rotating member 620 contacts the corresponding portion of the front lid member 612, and displacement is restricted. In particular, a plurality of contact points are formed at the end of displacement on the rising side of the rotating member 620 .

The purpose of forming a plurality of contact points is to disperse the load in the rotational direction received at the time of contact at a plurality of points, and to disperse the load in the front-rear direction that may occur on the rotating member 620 at a plurality of points. This has the purpose of suppressing deformation of the rotating member 620 in the front-rear direction.

The load in the front-rear direction that can be applied to the rotating member 620 includes, for example, the load in the forward tilting direction due to the weight of the second decorative rotating member 660, and the torsion caused by the inertia when the rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660 is stopped. A directional load (a load in a rotational direction about the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 620) is exemplified.

In particular, the load in the forward tilting direction is the load in the forward tilting direction with the cylindrical portion 622 as a fulcrum. The load generated at the abutment position is reduced. The second side surface 621b and the third side surface 621c are formed at positions separated from the cylindrical portion 622 for one purpose of reducing the load generated at the contact position.

The body portion 621 of the rotating member 620 includes a recessed portion 621d recessed in a direction away from the drive motor 631 in order to avoid interference with the drive motor 631, and the recessed portion 621d. , and a thickened portion 621e that is thickened to include a range that abuts on the base-end projecting portion 617a as a rotating portion about the tubular portion 622. As shown in FIG.

Since the rotation base end side of the rotation member 620 has a narrow width due to the formation of the concave portion 621d, it is possible that the impact load may cause breakage without countermeasures, but the thickened portion 621e is formed, it is possible to offset the influence of the recessed portion 621d in terms of strength. This makes it easier to avoid breakage of the rotating member 620 .

Furthermore, since the thickened portion 621e is formed in a range including a portion where it can abut against the proximal side projecting portion 617a, the impact load that may occur between the rotating member 620 and the proximal side projecting portion 617a is reduced. It is possible to improve the durability of the rotating member 620 against.

84 is a front view of the first operation unit 600, and FIG. 85 is a rear view of the first operation unit 600. FIG. 84 and 85 illustrate a state in which the width direction end of the extension 634b of the transmission gear cam 634 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1.

The extension part 634b is formed with a width (length in the circumferential direction) that is three times or more as long as the width of the detection sensor KS1 when viewed from the rear. Here, forming the width length of the extending portion 634b sufficiently long has a structural purpose in addition to the purpose of utilizing it for detection.

That is, in this embodiment, the supported member 640 is connected to the front side of the rotating tip of the rotating member 620, and the second decoration rotating member 660 is arranged in front of the supported member 640. In addition, a load in the forward-tilting direction may be applied to the rotating member 620, and without countermeasures, the rotating member 620 may be deformed in the front-rear direction, resulting in malfunction.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, behind the cylindrical portion 634a connected to the rotating member 620, the extending portion 634b arranged to face the rear surface of the fixed means 610 is formed in a wide shape. The load applied from the extended portion 634b to the fixed means 610 via the portion 634a in the forward tilting direction of the rotating member 620 can be received in a wide angle range of the arc-shaped hole 613d (the area where the load is applied is increased). can be secured). As a result, the load received per unit area can be reduced, so that the forward tilt displacement of the rotating member 620 can be suppressed while avoiding damage to the extended portion 634b.

In this embodiment, it is possible to obtain a structurally advantageous effect by securing a long width length of the extension portion 634b. Even in a control mode in which the driving of the rotating member 620 in the rising direction is stopped in the state (see FIG. 84), the load such as inertia causes the rotating member 620 to reach the end position (see FIG. 40) on the initial position side. The structure is devised to reach

For example, firstly, the inertial force of each member is generated in the direction to displace the rotating member 620 to the end position on the initial position side. Not only the inertial force associated with the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 itself, but also the inertial force associated with the rotational displacement of the supported member 640 and the second ornamental rotating member 660 rotating clockwise about the axis O1 in the rear view. , in the direction of displacing the rotating member 620 to the end position on the initial position side (the direction of rotating the rotating member 620 counterclockwise in rear view).

For example, secondly, the center of gravity of the front rotating member 652 (this embodiment , the same as the center of the protruding decorative portion 652b) is arranged at a position left and right away from the vertical position of the axis O1 as the rotation axis of the gear tooth 654a.

Therefore, the weight of the front rotating member 652 is generated in the direction of rotating the gear teeth 654a. In the present embodiment, the gear tooth 654a receives a load in the direction of counterclockwise rotation in a rear view due to the weight of the front rotating member 652 itself.

This load is transmitted to the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth portion 625 in this order, so that a load is applied to the rotating member 620 through the gear tooth portion 625 in the direction of counterclockwise rotation when viewed from the rear. That is, as a load different from the inertia of the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620, the load in the rotating direction due to the weight of the front rotating member 652 is generated in the direction of displacing the rotating member 620 to the end position on the initial position side.

In this way, due to the inertial load generated on the rotating member 620 and the load in the rotation direction due to the weight of the front rotating member 652, there is a load that rotates the rotating member 620 even after the drive motor 631 is de-energized. configured to occur.

Therefore, in a state in which the extended portion 634b is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1 and the rotation member 620 has not reached the displacement end position as shown in FIG. Even if the cutting is controlled, the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 continues due to the load described above, and the rotating member 620 can reach the displacement end position (see FIG. 40) on the initial position side.

86(a), 86(b), 87(a), 87(b), and 88 show the elongated guide hole 616, the dish-shaped lid portion C2, the detection sensor KS1, and the extension portion of the transmission gear cam 634. 634b is a rear view of 634b.

In FIGS. 86(a), 86(b), 87(a), 87(b), and 88, the rotational motion of the transmission gear cam 634 started from the waiting state of the first motion unit 600 is time-sequential. is illustrated.

FIG. 86(a) corresponds to the effect waiting state of the first action unit 600, FIG. 86(b) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 85, and FIG. 87(a) is the first action. FIG. 87(b) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 83, and FIG. 88 corresponds to the extended state of the first motion unit 600. FIG.

Arrangement of electrical wiring passing through the opening C2a of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 will be described. An electrical wiring 618d whose end portion is fixed to a connector 618c arranged on a substrate accommodated in the rectangular box portion 618 is arranged so as to enter the second decorative rotating member 660 through the opening C2a.

The electric wiring 618d is arranged so as to bypass the lower side of a partition portion 619 projecting from the front cover member 612 toward the base member 611 (see FIG. 39) and enter the opening C2a. The electric wiring 618b has a length that takes into consideration the movement trajectory of the dish-shaped lid C2 having the opening C2a, and is arranged between the connector 618c and the opening C2a so as to bend under its own weight.

The partition portion 619 includes columnar portions 619a formed at both upper and lower end portions, and plate-like portions 619b projecting in the shape of a long plate so as to connect the columnar portions 619a. The columnar portion 619 a and the plate upper portion 619 b abut on the front side surface of the base member 611 .

A female screw is formed on the inner side of the columnar portion 619a, and a fastening screw passing through an opening formed in the base member 611 at a position corresponding to the columnar portion 619a is screwed into the base member 611 and the front lid. Member 612 is fastened. In other words, the partitioning portion 619 not only restricts the arrangement position of the electrical wiring 618d, but also secures the rigidity of the base member 611 and the front cover member 612. As shown in FIG.

Next, the arrangement of the electrical wiring 618d will be described with particular attention to the movement of the opening C2a. First, the downward displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 starting from FIG. 86(a) will be described. The dish-shaped lid portion C2 is downwardly displaced in the time series of FIGS.

In the operation from the effect standby state (see FIG. 86(a)) to the state in which the width direction end of the extension 634b is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1 (see FIG. 86(b)), the dish-shaped lid While the vertical arrangement of the portion C2 does not change significantly, the arrangement of the opening C2a is rotationally displaced counterclockwise in rear view.

As a result, the electrical wiring 618d in the vicinity of the opening C2a can be moved away from the partition 619 before the dish-shaped lid portion C2 starts full-scale downward displacement. It is possible to prevent the electrical wiring 618d from being caught between the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the partition portion 619 in the process of doing so.

In particular, at the timing when the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the partition portion 619 are closest to each other (see FIG. 87(b)), the opening C2a faces the side (downward) where the electrical wiring 618d is retracted from the partition portion 619. ing.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the electric wiring 618d from being sandwiched between the partition 619 and the electric wiring 618d. It is possible to avoid problems such as

As shown in FIGS. 86(a) to 88, the posture of the opening C2a is continuously rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the back during the downward displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2. At the lower displacement end of the dish-shaped lid portion C2, the opening C2a faces the opposite side (lower side) of the connector 618c, and the electrical wiring 618d is purposely configured to have downward slack. As a result, it is possible to avoid unnecessary slackness of the electrical wiring at the displacement end position (for example, flapping due to slackening in the front-rear direction) while ensuring the length of the electrical wiring 618d itself.

Furthermore, the length of the electrical wiring 618d is designed to be long enough not to come into contact with the extended portion 634b while the first operating unit 600 is operating. As a result, even without providing a partition between the extension 634b and the electrical wiring 618d, it is possible to prevent the electrical wiring 618d from coming into contact with the extension 634b and receiving a load.

In this embodiment, when the dish-shaped lid portion C2 is closest to the transmission gear cam 634 (see FIG. 88), the extension portion 634b is arranged away from the connector 618c (with the rotational axis of the transmission gear cam 634 as a reference). ), it is possible to secure a large range for arranging the electrical wiring 618d while avoiding contact with the extended portion 634b, thereby improving the degree of freedom in designing the length of the electrical wiring 618d. be able to.

Next, the upward displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 starting from FIG. 88 will be described. The dish-shaped lid portion C2 is displaced upward in the time series of FIGS. 88, 87(b), 87(a), 86(b), and 86(a).

During the upward displacement of the dish-shaped lid C2, the opening C2a does not face the partition 619 side until the dish-shaped lid C2 comes closest to the partition 619 from the displacement lower end position (see FIG. 88). is facing As a result, the dish-shaped lid portion C2 can be displaced upward while securing downward slack in the electrical wiring 618d.

Even after the dish-shaped lid portion C2 has passed the lower end of the partition portion 619, the direction of the opening C2a is such that it faces downward while gradually rotating (the electrical wiring 618d near the opening C2a is connected to the partition portion 619). 87(a)).

Then, in a state where the dish-shaped lid portion C2 is sufficiently separated from the partition portion 619, the opening C2a is rotated to face the partition portion 619 side (see FIGS. 86(a) and 86(b)), and the electrical wiring 618d is removed. It is arranged so as to enter (accommodate) between the partition portion 619 and the dish-shaped lid portion C2.

As a result, the electric wiring 618d can be prevented from being broken by being sandwiched between the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the partition portion 619, and the electric wiring 618d can be displaced along with the vertical displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2. It is possible to suppress the load applied to the

In other words, the arrangement of the electrical wiring 618d is restricted by changing the arrangement of the opening C2a in accordance with the arrangement relationship between the partition 619 and the dish-shaped lid C2. Since the electrical wiring 618d is prevented from being arranged between the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the partition portion 619 when the interval between the two becomes narrow, the load applied to the electrical wiring 618d can be suppressed.

Therefore, compared to the case where the electrical wiring 618d is arranged at an arbitrary position, the electrical wiring 618d and the dish-shaped lid C2 can be designed to be arranged close to each other. degree of freedom can be improved.

Also, the restriction of the arrangement of the electrical wiring 618d is realized by the opening C2a of the dish-shaped lid C2, not by using a separate member such as a binding band. As described above, the dish-shaped lid portion C2 is a member used for fastening and fixing the first decorative rotating member 650 to the main body member 651, and it also serves to limit the arrangement of the electrical wiring 618d.

This eliminates the need for a dedicated member such as a binding band for bundling the electrical wiring 618d. Furthermore, unlike a binding band, the direction of the opening C2a can be changed so that the electrical wiring 618d can be arranged on the appropriate side corresponding to the arrangement of the dish-shaped lid C2, so the electrical wiring 618d can be stretched or bent. You can easily avoid the situation.

In this embodiment, the opening C2a is formed as a fan-shaped opening with a central angle of about 110 degrees. Since the opening C2a is formed as a wide opening, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in the shape adopted as the portion (connection terminal, etc.) of the electrical wiring 618d passing through the opening C2a.

Next, the arrangement structure of the electrical wiring 618d arranged on the front side of the opening C2a will be described. 89 is a front perspective view of the first decorative rotary member 650 and the second decorative rotary member 660. FIG.

In FIG. 89, only the parts required for explanation are illustrated, and the illustration of other parts is omitted. That is, the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655 of the first decorative rotating member 650, and the electrical decoration board 662 and the wiring clamping plate 663 of the second decorative rotating member 660 are shown in solid lines, and are boxed for easy understanding. The shape member 661 is shown in phantom lines so that the inside can be visually recognized.

Also, FIG. 89 illustrates an arrangement example of the electrical wiring 618d, and illustrates a dish-shaped lid portion C2 having an opening C2a through which the electrical wiring 618d is inserted. The electric wiring 618 d is branched between the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655 by wiring connected to the terminal of the electric board 653 (see FIG. 41) and wiring connected to the terminal of the electric board 662 . The state of doing is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 89, the wiring retaining plate 663 is a disk-shaped member having a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a, and is bored in an elongated hole shape through which the electric wiring 618d can be inserted. and a pair of insertion holes 663b formed on both sides of the insertion long hole 663a as through holes through which fastening screws can be inserted.

Since the diameter of the wire clamping plate 663 is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a, the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 (see FIG. 39) is prevented from falling out of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a. This can be prevented by the wiring retaining plate 663 .

A fastening screw passing through the insertion hole 663b of the wiring retaining plate 663 is screwed into the female screw formed in each of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a. As a result, the wiring retaining plate 663 and the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a are integrally fixed.

In this way, the wiring retaining plate 663 has both a function of preventing the axis-perpendicular rotation member 657 from falling off and a function of integrally fixing the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a. In addition to this, the wiring fastening plate 663 has a function of temporarily fastening the electrical wiring 618d.

As shown in FIG. 89, the electric wiring 618d passes through the wiring insertion elongated hole 663a of the wiring retaining plate 663, and is temporarily held in such a manner that displacement is suppressed by being pinched. In the present embodiment, the rotational motion of the second decoration rotating member 660 is not one or more rotations, but a rotation motion of less than half a rotation (rotational motion of about 135 degrees) in the reciprocating direction. Therefore, it is configured so as not to twist the electric wiring 618d by rotating the second decorative rotary member 660 multiple times.

It is conceivable that the load applied to the electrical wiring 618d (the load in the twisting direction) when the second decoration rotary member 660 rotates increases near the wiring insertion long hole 663a where twisting tends to occur. Since the wiring insertion slot 663a is formed in an elongated shape, and the electric wiring 618d is temporarily held by being sandwiched between the wiring insertion slots 663a, displacement of the electric wiring 618d within the elongated hole shape is allowed. ing.

Therefore, even if the electrical wire 618d is overloaded in the twisting direction, the load can be relieved by displacing the electrical wire 618d within the wire insertion elongated hole 663a. Thereby, the durability of the electrical wiring 618d can be improved.

The relationship between the twisting direction of the electrical wiring 618d arranged inside the main body member 651 and the direction of the opening C2a of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 will be described. Since the body member 651 rotates integrally with the rotating motion of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 shown in FIGS. Torsion in the direction of rotation occurs. That is, as the rotating member 620 rotates in the tilting direction, twisting occurs in the counterclockwise direction in a rear view.

As the rotating member 620 is rotated in the tilting direction, the opening C2a of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 is also displaced counterclockwise in a rear view. The durability of the electrical wiring 618d can be improved).

The dish-shaped lid portion C2 rotates along the guide elongated hole 616 while being displaced in the vertical direction. Here, in time series from FIG. 86(a) to FIG. 88, the electrical wiring 618d changes from a state of large slack to a state of small slack between the connector 618c and the dish-shaped lid portion C2.

Corresponding to this, the electrical board 662 rotates from the state in which the terminal of the electrical wiring 618d on the electrical board 662 side is arranged on the rear side (body member 651 side) (see FIG. 89), and the terminal is It is configured as an operation to change the state to the state arranged on the front side (the side of the wiring receiving member 655). Therefore, the state change can be such that the electric wiring 618d is pulled to the front side.

86(a) to 88, the electrical wiring 618d is in a state in which the electrical wiring 618d has a large slack inside the body member 651 (a state in which the terminals on the electrical board 662 side are arranged on the back side). ) to a state in which the slack is small (a state in which the terminal on the electrical board 662 side is arranged on the front side).

Therefore, in this embodiment, the magnitude relationship of slackness is reversed (balanced) between the relationship between the connector 618c and the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the relationship inside the main body member 651. FIG. Thereby, the load applied to the electric wiring 618d due to the operation of the first operation unit 600 can be reduced.

The relationship between the twisting direction of the electric wiring 618d in the portion arranged inside the main body member 651 and the twisting direction of the electric wiring 618d in the portion arranged between the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655 will be explained. do.

86(a) to 88, the electrical wiring 618d arranged inside the body member 651 is twisted counterclockwise in a rear view, while the body member 651 and the wire receiving member 655 are twisted. The electrical wiring 618d in the portion disposed therebetween is twisted in the direction of rotation of the electrical board 662 (counterclockwise when viewed from the bottom in FIG. 89 (viewing the insertion hole 663b from the electrical board 662 side)). That is, they are twisted in mutually opposite directions.

This embodiment is designed to minimize the twisting of the electrical wiring 618d in the standby state of the first operation unit 600, and maximizes the twisting of the electrical wiring 618d in the overhanging state. there is

As a result, even if the electrical wiring 618d between the connector 618c and the opening C2a is greatly slack, the problem is unlikely to occur (standby state, see FIG. 86(a)). In a state in which it is preferable to reduce the slackness of the electrical wiring 618d between the connector 618c and the opening C2a while reducing the generated load (projection state, see FIG. 88), the main body member 651, the wiring receiving member 655, and the electric It is possible to suppress slackness of the electrical wiring 618d (suppress displacement of the electrical wiring 618d) by maximizing the twist caused by the rotational movement of the decorative substrate 662. FIG.

In this way, as means for improving the durability of the electrical wiring 618d, a state in which twisting is minimized and sufficient slack is generated, and a state in which the slack is reduced by the twisting and the surrounding member (for example, the extension portion 634b) and the electrical wiring are connected. It is configured to switch between a state of avoiding contact with the wiring 618d.

As another embodiment, in the time series operations shown in FIGS. 86(a) to 88, the direction of rotation of the electrical board 662 is reversed (bottom view in FIG. (viewing direction) and clockwise). In this case, the twisting direction of the electrical wiring 618d arranged inside the main body member 651 and the twisting direction of the electrical wiring 618d due to the rotational movement of the electrical board 662 are the same. deformation can be offset.

Next, the features of the overhang decorative portion 652b in the operation of the first operation unit 600 will be described. 90(a), 90(b), 91(a), 91(b) and 92 are front views schematically showing the guide slot 616, the rectangular box portion 618 and the projecting decorative portion 652b. It is a schematic diagram.

90(a), 90(b), 91(a), 91(b) and 92 schematically illustrate the outlines of the guide slot 616 and the rectangular box portion 618 for easy understanding. Therefore, the gear tooth 652a of the front rotating member 652 is omitted, and the displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b from the waiting state of the first action unit 600 is illustrated in chronological order.

FIG. 90(a) shows an arrangement corresponding to the effect waiting state (see FIG. 40) of the first operation unit 600, and FIG. An arrangement corresponding to the state in which the detection sensor KS1 is arranged in the detection groove (see FIG. 84) is illustrated, and FIG. FIG. 91(b) shows an arrangement corresponding to a state (see FIG. 82) in which the dish-shaped lid portion C2 displaced along the guide slot 616 is arranged at the right end of the displacement range, and FIG. , an arrangement corresponding to the extended state of the first operating unit 600 (see FIG. 45).

In the effect standby state (see FIG. 90(a)), the overhanging decorative portion 652b is arranged to the right so as to overlap with the rectangular box portion 618 in top view. As a result, the projecting decorative portion 652b can be placed outside the player's field of vision (see FIG. 28). Furthermore, in the present embodiment, since the line of sight is likely to be blocked by the outer edge member 73 by arranging the overhang decorative portion 652b behind the outer edge member 73 (see FIG. 2) in the standby state for rendering, the overhang decorative portion 652b visibility can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the decorative projecting portion 652b is displaced downward while the decorative projecting portion 652b is shifted to the right so as to overlap the rectangular box portion 618 in top view, the decorative projecting portion 652b and the rectangular box portion 618 are displaced downward. It collides with the shaped box portion 618 and causes a problem.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, prior to the downward displacement of the decorative projecting portion 652b or along with the downward displacement of the decorative projecting portion 652b, the attitude of the decorative projecting portion 652b is configured to change ( See FIGS. 90(b) and 91(a)). This posture change occurs as a rotational movement in the direction of retreating from the rectangular box portion 618 (oblique upper left direction in a front view, rotational direction about the axis O1). collision can be easily avoided.

In this embodiment, due to this posture change, after the projecting decorative portion 652b is retracted from the position above the rectangular box portion 618 (see FIG. 91(a)), the full-fledged dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the projecting decoration The downward displacement of the portion 652b is started.

The downward displacement of the projecting decorative portion 652b is caused by the downward displacement of the axis O1. ) (see FIG. 91(b)), there is a possibility that the projecting decorative portion 652b will collide with the rectangular box portion 618. As shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rectangular box portion 618 is provided with a concave portion 618 a formed along the shape of the long guide hole 616 on the left side surface. In particular, the recessed portion 618a is recessed at a position where the guide long hole 616 and the rectangular box portion 618 are closest to each other, that is, at the right end of the guide long hole 616. As shown in FIG. Thus, the design of the shape of the rectangular box portion 618 is studied with one purpose of avoiding collision between the front rotating member 652 and the rectangular box portion 618 .

Furthermore, since the posture of the decorative projection 652b continues to change as the axis O1 is displaced downward, the decorative projection 652b can be displaced in the direction away from the rectangular box portion 618. FIG. In the present embodiment, in the displacement from FIG. 91(a) to FIG. 91(b), the leftward displacement dimension XL1 (retraction distance) of the overhang decorative portion 652b corresponds to the rightward displacement dimension XR1 of the axis O1. Designed to be greater than or equal to (equal to or greater than) As a result, collision between the projecting decorative portion 652b and the rectangular box portion 618 can be avoided.

In the states shown in FIGS. 91(a) and 91(b), the lateral displacement of the axis O1 and the lateral displacement associated with the attitude change of the overhanging decorative portion 652b are opposite to each other and cancel each other out. The lateral displacement of the projecting decorative portion 652b is kept small.

On the other hand, in the states shown in FIGS. 91(b) to 92, the lateral displacement of the axis O1 and the lateral displacement accompanying the attitude change of the overhanging decorative portion 652b are the same in the lateral direction. are superimposed on each other, the lateral displacement amount of the projecting decorative portion 652b is increased.

As a result, even though the posture of the decorative projection 652b is changed by rotating around the axis O1, the player will not be able to see the decorative projection 652b from FIG. 90(a). Up to FIG. 91(b), it is displaced in the vertical direction with a small lateral displacement (narrow displacement trajectory), and from FIG. 91(b) to FIG. I can show you.

Therefore, a difference can be provided between the structure (member shape) that guides the displacement of the projecting decorative portion 652b and the structure assumed by the displacement of the projecting decorative portion 652b seen by the player. As a result, it is possible to execute an unexpected effect.

In other words, the displacement of the projecting decorative portion 652b can be seen by the player as if the projecting decorative portion 652b were popping out from the right side of the rectangular box portion 618 to the left. Therefore, in the left and right areas of the center frame 86 (see FIG. 30), where the width is narrow and sufficient displacement in the left and right direction cannot be ensured, it is possible to show the player an unexpected displacement in the left and right direction. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention to the projecting decorative portion 652b.

For the sake of convenience, the lateral displacement of the axis O1 and the lateral displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b were compared, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, since the axis O1 is a part of the rotation axis of the configuration of the first operation unit 600, the lateral displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 configured to be rotatable about the rotation axis and the lateral displacement of the axis O1 They have the same meaning. Therefore, the above description may be understood as a comparison between the lateral displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the lateral displacement of the projecting decorative portion 652b.

93 is a cross-sectional view of the first operating unit 600 taken along line XCIII-XCIII of FIG. 85. FIG. FIG. 93 shows a cross-sectional view in a plane through which the axis O1 and the rotation axis of the intermediate gear 644 pass. As shown in FIG. 93, the rear rotating member 654 is arranged in the bottomed tubular portion 645 from the front side, while the intermediate gear 644 is arranged in the main body portion 641 from the rear side, and communicates with an opening 645a formed therein. The gear tooth 654a and the intermediate gear 644 are meshed at a point.

As shown in FIG. 93, the diameter of the wiring retaining plate 663 is formed larger than the outer diameter of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a, and the inner diameter of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 is smaller than the diameter of the wiring retaining plate 663. Therefore, the axial displacement of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 can be restricted by the wiring retaining plate 663 .

In this embodiment, the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 provides a slight gap between the stepped portions formed in the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a on the axial base end side (the upper side in FIG. 93) and the wiring retaining plate 663. are placed vacantly. As a result, it is possible to prevent the axis-perpendicular rotation member 657 from coming off and to stabilize the arrangement of the axis-perpendicular rotation member 657 in the central axis direction of the cylindrical portion formed by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a.

A fastening screw passing through the insertion hole 663b of the wiring retaining plate 663 is screwed into the female screw formed in each of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a. As a result, the wiring retaining plate 663 and the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a are integrally fixed.

As shown in FIG. 93, the projecting decorative portion 652b is arranged on the rear side compared to the second decorative rotary member 660, so that the third pattern display device 81 is arranged relative to the second decorative rotary member 660. (see FIG. 2) are arranged close to each other in the front-rear direction. In other words, it is arranged close to the opening 511a (see FIG. 26) in which the third pattern display device 81 is arranged in the front-rear direction.

As a result, compared to the case where the third pattern display device 81 and the projecting decorative portion 652b are arranged apart, the projecting decorative portion 652b is arranged so as to overlap the area right end RE1 of the display area of the third pattern display device 81. is arranged (see FIG. 29), and it is possible to make it easier to cause the player to see (illusion) that the display area is expanded to the right.

In particular, when the projecting decorative portion 652b and the second decorative rotating member 660 are viewed at the same time (for example, see FIG. 29), the second decorative rotating member 660 is arranged away from the third pattern display device 81 toward the near side. Since it is easy to visually recognize independently of the display of the third pattern display device, on the contrary, the projecting decorative portion 652b arranged close to the third pattern display device 81 from the front side is used as part of the display. It can make the effect of making it look (illusory) stand out.

In other words, by preparing one particularly conspicuous object (corresponding to the second decorative rotating member 660), other configurations (corresponding to the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the projecting decorative portion 652b) can be discriminated. I am trying to keep it low. This makes it difficult to distinguish between the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the projecting decorative portion 652b.

The protruding decorative portion 652b is a portion formed from a hard resin, and the shape cannot be changed in the middle. The appearance (color, brightness, etc.) of the overhang decorative portion 652b can be changed by controlling to change the height, etc.).

Therefore, by changing the light emitting mode of the light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the electrical board 653 so as to match the moving image displayed in the display area of the third pattern display device 81, the third pattern display device 81 The projecting decorative portion 652b is arranged so as to overlap the area right end RE1 of the display area of (see FIG. 29), and the effect of giving the player the illusion that the display area is expanded to the right is easily generated. be able to.

Next, a detailed description of the second operation unit 700 will be given again. 94 is a front view of the second motion unit 700 in the extended state, and FIG. 95 is a cross-sectional view of the second motion unit 700 along line XCV-XCV in FIG. 94. FIG.

As described above, the second motion unit 700 is configured such that, in the sliding displacement, the up-down displacement and the front-rear direction displacement occur synchronously (the sliding displacement occurs in the front-rear direction when tilted obliquely). It is devised so that the displacement occurs smoothly so that the displacement is not overly noticeable.

For example, in the sliding displacement of the second motion unit 700, the oblique tilting displacement in the front-rear direction is not composed of a single displacement, but a combination of the vertical displacement and the front-rear displacement. It is configured.

That is, first, the elevating plate member 740 connected to the rotating arm member 720 is guided by the metal rod 702 at the left end so as to be vertically displaced in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction) of the metal rod 702 . At the left end, a left rear plate member 750 and blind decoration member 768 are also arranged in front of and behind the lift plate member 740 to prevent the lift plate member 740 from being freely displaced in the front-rear direction. Thereby, the displacement direction of the lifting plate member 740 can be limited to the vertical direction.

A right side portion of the lifting plate member 740 is supported by the rotating arm member 720 . The right end of the elevating plate member 740 is not supported by a fixed member (a member fixed to the back case 510), but is indirectly fixed via the production device 780 (the front upper inclined portions 714 and 751). and receiving inclined portion 762) (see FIG. 54). As a result, the right end of the lift plate member 740 is prevented from being freely displaced in the front-rear direction, and the displacement direction of the lift plate member 740 can be limited in the vertical direction.

The effect device 780 supported by the elevating plate member 740 is guided by the cylindrical portion 744 (see FIG. 50) so as to be displaced in the front-rear direction. In this way, in order to realize the sliding displacement in the front-rear direction tilted obliquely, the displacement guidance of the lifting plate member 740 and the production device 780 as the constituent members is divided into the gravity direction and the horizontal direction. It is

As a result, compared to a configuration that guides in an obliquely tilted front-rear direction, it is possible to facilitate a configuration in which displacement resistance is maintained low.

The extended state of the second operating unit 700 illustrated in FIGS. 94 and 95 is controllable to perform a displacement (see FIG. 57) that switches the state of the covering member 787 . That is, in the present embodiment, in other states of the extended state (for example, the effect standby state of the second operation unit 700 (see FIG. 28) and the intermediate effect state of the second operation unit 700 (see FIG. 33)), the The second operating unit 700 is controlled such that no displacements that switch the state of the setting member 787 occur.

By controlling in this manner, the right front plate member 710 and the left rear plate member 750 are positioned so as to overlap the left and right positions reached by the left and right ends of the covering member 787 when the covering member 787 is displaced to switch its state. Even if they are arranged, it is possible to prevent the covering member 787 from colliding with the right front plate member 710 or the left rear plate member 750 . Therefore, the degree of freedom in arrangement of the right front plate member 710 and the left rear plate member 750 can be improved.

A contrivance of the configuration of the rendering device 780 for the displacement for switching the state of the covering member 787 will be described. First, the driving motor 782 (see FIG. 56) that generates the driving force for the displacement that switches the state of the covering member 787 is positioned at the center of the production device 780 (at the center of the inserting cylindrical portion 773 that is inserted into the cylindrical portion 744). centered directly above).

As a result, not only is it possible to prevent the direction of the effect device 780 from tilting to the left or right due to the weight of the drive motor 782, but the left-right balance of the driving force generated from the drive motor 782 can be stabilized.

Furthermore, in the overhanging state of the second operation unit 700 (see FIG. 95) capable of executing displacement to switch the state of the covering member 787, the cylindrical fastened portion 724 of the rotating arm member 720 that supports the lifting plate member 740 The left and right position of is equal to the left and right center position of the production device 780 or is set to the right side.

In this way, while supporting the right side portion of the lifting plate member 740 is constituted only by the rotating arm member 720 capable of displacing the cylindrical fastened portion 724 as a supporting position in the left-right direction, the effect device 780 is particularly arranged. When it is assumed that the position of the cover member 787 is likely to change, that is, when the covering member 787 is displaced to change its state, the cylindrical to-be-fastened portion 724 is placed at the same position as the left-right center position of the effect device 780 or at the right side position. By setting, the arrangement and posture of the effect device 780 can be stabilized.

Note that the control for executing the displacement that switches the state of the covering member 787 is performed only when the second operation unit 700 is in the extended state. It is possible to control the state of the 2-operation unit 700 to change to an effect waiting state or an intermediate effect state.

That is, for example, in order to switch the state of the covering member 787 from the effect waiting state of the second motion unit 700 and bring the second motion unit 700 into the intermediate effect state, the second motion unit 700 is stretched once. After executing the displacement to switch the state of the covering member 787 as the out state, the second motion unit 700 is controlled to be displaced downward so as to change to the intermediate effect state.

As shown in FIG. 95, the light diffusing member 778b is formed long in the left-right direction to such an extent that it overlaps the inner end portions of the pair of front support members 760 when viewed in the front-rear direction. As a result, the rotary tube portion 774e (see FIG. 54) supported by the front support member 760 can be hidden from the player, so that the player can grasp the arrangement and shape of the rotary tube portion 774e. Thus, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player grasps that the effect device 780 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

Furthermore, in the extended state of the second operation unit 700, the light diffusing member 778b and the fixedly arranged three-dimensional decorative portion 768a are visible in a straight line on the left and right in a front view (see FIG. 94). In this state, the light diffusing member 778b and the three-dimensional decoration portion 768a are arranged along the lower edge of the third pattern display device 81 in front view and across the left and right length of the lower edge.

On the back side of the light diffusion member 778b and the three-dimensional decoration portion 768a, substrates to which the LEDs are fixed are arranged respectively on the front side. can be executed. By this light emitting effect, the lower edge of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 is made to look like it is separated by light, or the lower edge of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 is made brighter by light. You can direct to

Therefore, according to this embodiment, the light diffusing member 778b has a function as a member that hides the rotary cylinder portion 774e (see FIG. 54) and a function as a member that performs light emission effects jointly with the three-dimensional decoration portion 768a. It can be configured to combine

As shown in FIG. 95, the horizontally elongated member 742 is behind the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a and is covered with a front side space in a range (left range) outside the rear of the light diffusion member 778b. A setting cover 742a is provided.

The covering cover 742a is a blindfold member formed over the vertical width of the horizontal member 742, and is arranged so that the electrical wiring can be passed through the gap between the horizontal member 742 and the covering cover 742a. That is, the electric wiring for energizing the effect device 780 is guided to the effect device 780 side from behind the blindfold decorative member 768 through the gap between the covering cover 742a and the horizontally long member 742, and is guided to the drive motor 782. , the electrical board 778a, the detection sensor 778d (see FIG. 56), and the like.

At this time, not only the covering cover 742a but also the light diffusing member 778b and the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a are arranged in a folded manner in front of the electrical wiring, so that the player's line of sight is easily blocked, and the electrical wiring is It is possible to make it easier to prevent being visually recognized by the player.

In other words, the light diffusing member 778b and the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a, which are originally arranged for light production, are arranged in front of the path of the electric wiring so as to function as a blindfold for the electric wiring. The size of the covering cover 742a required for blindfolding can be minimized.

In addition, since the arrangement of the three-dimensional decoration part 768a is fixed, it does not overlap the horizontal member 742 in the standby state (see FIG. 31) or the intermediate effect state (see FIG. 33), and the electric wiring can be hidden. Not available.

Considering this, in the present embodiment, the formation range of the laterally elongated member 742 is set to the range outside the light diffusion member 778b when viewed from the front. As a result, the horizontal member 742 and the light diffusing member 778 can hide the electrical wiring. can be prevented from being viewed by the player.

96 and 97 are front views of the transmission device holding plate 777, the vertical reversing member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear motion plate member 784 and the shaft rotating member 785. FIG. FIG. 96 shows a horizontally arranged state of the up-down reversing member 781 in which a pair of cylindrical projecting portions 781c are arranged on the same straight line extending in the left-right direction, and FIG. (See FIG. 59(c)) is illustrated.

The pair of intermediate arm members 783 are not formed in the same shape, but are provided with curved portions 783d that are curved upward from the lower surface of the vertically reversing member 781 in the horizontally arranged state. The curved portion 783d is curved to protrude in a direction away from the driving gear 782a in order to avoid collision between the intermediate arm member 783 and the driving gear 782a when the upside down member 781 is vertically arranged.

FIG. 98 is a front perspective view of the up/down reversal effect device 770. FIG. In FIG. 98, the outer shape of the covering member 787 is schematically illustrated by imaginary lines so that the inside can be seen through the covering member 787 .

As shown in FIG. 98, the magnets Mg are arranged near both left and right ends, not on the side where the pair of covering members 787 are arranged close to each other. Therefore, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg acts independently on the pair of covering members 787 instead of directly joining the covering members 787 together.

As a result, for example, when one of the covering members 787 malfunctions, it is possible to prevent the other covering member 787 from malfunctioning as well.

Further, for example, when the pair of covering members 787 begin to move away from each other in the horizontal direction, it is possible to prevent the magnetic force from acting in the opposite direction of the horizontal displacement. That is, when the upside-down reversing member 781 starts rotating from the upright vertically arranged state, the timing at which the magnetic force acts can be delayed.

As a result, when the pair of covering members 787 begin to move away from each other in the horizontal direction, it is possible to suppress the change in the load applied to the covering members 787 by the magnet Mg. When the pair of covering members 787 begin to move away from each other in the left-right direction, the covering members 787 vibrate or become displaced due to a sudden change in magnetic force. It is possible to make it easier to avoid a situation in which the system becomes stable and malfunctions occur.

As shown in FIG. 98, the magnets Mg are arranged on opposite sides vertically, and the effect of this will be described. The rotational position stabilizing portion 785f to which the metal screw that abuts the magnet Mg and is loaded with magnetic force is fixed is arranged on the same side in the front-rear direction (the front side when the upside-down member 781 is vertically arranged in an upright position; 55). Therefore, the direction of the load generated on the magnet Mg in relation to the metal screw is the same in the front and back direction on both the left and right sides.

More specifically, for example, when the upside-down reversing member 781 changes from an upright vertically arranged state (see FIG. 59(a)) to an inverted vertically arranged state (see FIG. 59(c)), the covering member 781 on the left side in front view is changed. Since the member 787 rotates in the forward direction, the forward displacement of the metal screw arranged close to the magnet Mg (located above) causes the magnet Mg to move forward as a reaction to the attractive force. While a load is generated, the covering member 787 on the right side in the front view rotates in the backward direction. A forward load is generated on Mg as a reaction to the adsorption force.

Further, for example, when the upside-down reversing member 781 changes from an inverted vertically arranged state (see FIG. 59(c)) to an upright vertically arranged state (see FIG. 59(a)), the covering member 787 on the left side in the front view rotates in the direction of backward rotation, a backward load is applied to the magnet Mg as a reaction to the attractive force as the metal screw arranged close to the magnet Mg (located on the upper side) is displaced backward. On the other hand, since the covering member 787 on the right side in the front view rotates in the forward direction, the metal screw arranged close to the magnet Mg (located on the lower side) is displaced rearward, causing the magnet Mg to rotate. A rearward load is generated as a reaction to the adsorption force.

In this way, the direction of the load generated by the magnet Mg between the rotating covering member 787 and the main body member 771 and the direct-acting plate member 784 supporting the covering member 787 while maintaining its posture is It is configured to be the front and rear in the same direction.

Here, when a load in the front-rear reverse direction is generated on both the left and right sides (for example, by placing the left magnet Mg at the lower position, the left and right magnets Mg are placed at the lower position, and the left shaft rotation member 785 is placed at the lower position). When the design of the rotational position stabilizing portion 785f is changed so that it is arranged on the back side of the magnet Mg in the upright vertical arrangement state), the load generated when the magnet Mg and the metal screw are separated from the attracted state raises and lowers. A mode of displacement given to the reversal effect device 770 is a mode in which the up/down reversal effect device 770 is rotated by a rotation shaft extending in the vertical direction.

In this case, vibrations in the rotational direction of the rotating shaft extending in the vertical direction are likely to occur in the up/down reversal effect device 770 . In particular, as in the present embodiment, the bevel tooth member 785c (see FIG. 96) is elastically deformed in the process of releasing the attraction of the magnet Mg, and the elastic recovery of the bevel tooth member 785c is utilized after the attraction of the magnet Mg is released. In the configuration in which the covering member 787 is vigorously rotated, it is assumed that the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 is likely to vibrate in the rotational direction about the rotating shaft extending in the vertical direction.

Furthermore, it becomes difficult to relieve the load from the up/down reversal effect device 770, and there is a possibility that the up/down reversal effect device 770 is damaged or the durability of the up/down reversal effect device 770 is lowered. Therefore, in view of the purpose of stabilizing the displacement of the up/down reversal effect device 770 in the long term, it is considered necessary to take countermeasures.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, when the magnet Mg and the metal screw are separated from the attracted state, the cover member 787 rotates and the body member 771 supports the cover member 787 while maintaining its posture. Since the direction of the load generated between the moving plate member 784 and the moving plate member 784 is configured to be the same in the front and rear direction on both the left and right sides, the load generated when the magnet Mg and the metal screw are peeled off from the attracted state is used to produce a vertical reversal effect. The mode of displacement given to the device 770 can be a mode in which the vertical reversal effect device 770 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, the displacement of the up/down reversal effect device 770 (displacement having a component in the front-rear direction) can be easily offset, and the up/down reversal effect device 770 is damaged by the load generated when the magnet Mg and the metal screw are separated from the attracted state. can be avoided.

In the second motion unit 700, the direction of slide displacement of the rendering device 780 (the direction having a vertical component and a longitudinal component, that is, the direction in the plane orthogonal to the horizontal direction) and the covering member 787 are arranged close to each other. and the displacement start direction (horizontal direction) from the state where the vertical reversing member 781 is vertically arranged) are perpendicular to each other.

Therefore, it is possible to easily avoid the displacement of one due to the inertia of the displacement of the other. For example, when the effect device 780 is slid and displaced, it is easy to avoid a situation in which the covering members 787 are unintentionally started to displace (displace in directions away from each other) from the state in which they are arranged close to each other. be able to.

Next, a detailed description of the third operation unit 800 will be given again. First, details of the intermediate arm member 850 will be described. 99(a) is a front perspective view of the intermediate arm member 850, and FIG. 99(b) is a rear perspective view of the intermediate arm member 850. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 99( a ) and 99 ( b ), the intermediate arm member 850 has a characteristic shape in which the axial position of the long rod portion is switched at the thickened portion 852 .

As shown in FIG. 99(a), the thickened portion 852 is arranged to face the distal end side rod portion 853 of the adjacent rotating member 850, and is arranged to face the distal end side rod portion 853 and the proximal side reinforcing portion 852a. , and a concave portion 852b which is hollowed out from the front side along the axial direction.

The base-end reinforcing portion 852a is lightened in the same manner as the recessed portion 852b, but is designed to have a relatively small lightening amount and a high deformation resistance. As a result, even if contact is made with the distal end side rod portion 853 formed on the rotational distal end side of the rotating arm member 850, which is the side where the inertial force in rotation tends to increase, excessive deformation can be avoided. can do.

The recessed portion 852 b acts to weaken the resistance to elastic deformation of the thickened portion 852 . Thereby, the flexibility of the thickened portion 852 can be ensured, and the durability of the intermediate arm member 850 can be improved.

On both lateral side surfaces of the increased thickness portion 852, there are formed curved portions 852c that are concavely formed in a curved shape. The curved shape portion 852c can smoothly receive the curved shape portion 854d formed on the rotation base end side of the rotation transmission portion 854 formed on the end portion of the distal end side rod portion 853 of the adjacent intermediate arm member 850 in the combined state. formed from a shape.

In this embodiment, the rotation direction of the intermediate arm members 850 when the adjacent intermediate arm members 850 are rotated and arranged close to each other is Since they are reversed, which of the lateral side surfaces of the intermediate arm member 850 is arranged close to the curved portion 854d depends on which combined state is configured.

On this premise, since the curved portion 852c is formed on both side surfaces, the curved portion 854d can be smoothly received in any combined state. As a result, the state change to the united state can be executed smoothly.

In addition, since the curved shape portion 852c and the curved shape portion 854d are designed so that they can contact with each other at their surfaces, an excessive load is applied locally between the curved shape portion 852c and the curved shape portion 854d in the combined state. can be suppressed, and the durability of the intermediate arm member 850 can be improved.

The third operation unit 800 is configured to be vertically displaceable by the elevating arm member 801. The direction of the elevating displacement and the start of displacement of the linear motion member 833 and the rotating member 834 from the combined state of the decorative members 870 and 880 are as follows. and are not necessarily orthogonal to each other.

For example, as shown in FIG. 66(a), virtual position lines 832F recognized as displacement starting directions of the rotating members 834 are set as different directions at intervals of 72 degrees. , and the direction of vertical displacement cannot be perpendicular to each other.

Therefore, there is a possibility that the load and inertia that occur when the third operation unit 800 is vertically displaced unintentionally cause a rotation operation (an integral rotation operation or a switching rotation operation). A device for countermeasures against this malfunction will be described.

FIG. 100 is a schematic diagram of the third operation unit 800 schematically showing the displacement of the metal rod 832 and the intermediate arm member 850. FIG.

In FIG. 100, of the imaginary position lines 832F of the metal rods 832, the imaginary position line 832F extending downward in the individually combined state and the angle between the imaginary position line 832F and the longitudinal direction of the intermediate arm member 850 are 0.5 degrees. and a virtual position line 832F rotated counterclockwise in front view until changed.

That is, FIG. 100 shows a state where the angle θ51 is 45 degrees and the angle θ52 is 44.5 degrees.

As shown in FIG. 100, the intermediate arm member 850 slides the rotating member 834 along the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 832 while suppressing the rotating motion of the rotating member 834 at the start of the switching rotating motion. configured to allow

The amount of change in angles θ51 and θ52 in FIG. 100 means the rotation angle of intermediate arm member 850 with respect to metal rod 832, and corresponds to the angle at which engagement rotation of bevel teeth 834a and 854c (see FIG. 61) occurs. .

Here, backlash (clearance) is essential for the meshing of the gear teeth to be upright, and the setting of the size of this clearance changes the responsiveness of rotation. Various aspects can be selected for setting the backlash, but in this embodiment, the backlash is set at 0.5 degrees.

That is, until the angle θ51 in the combined state changes to the angle θ52, the backlash (gap) is merely filled and the engagement rotation is not started. On the other hand, the rotation tip side portion of the intermediate arm member 850 slides radially outward of the third operation unit 800 along the imaginary position line 832F.

That is, at the start of the switching rotation operation from the united state (individually united state), the rotational operation of the rotating member 834 is suppressed, and the sliding movement mainly along the metal rod 832 occurs.

101 is a schematic front view of the third operation unit 800. FIG. In the description of FIG. 101, FIG. 100 will be referred to as appropriate. In FIG. 101, the third motion unit 800 is shown in a combined state, and the torque limiter 866 and magnet Mg2 that provide resistance to displacement of the third motion unit 800 are shown.

Here, it is configured so that the rotating member 834 does not rotate when the inner rotating member 830 slightly rotates relative to the outer rotating member 840 (for example, rotating about 5 degrees (see FIG. 100)). ing.

As a result, as in the present embodiment, even if the magnet Mg2 is employed to maintain the united state of the plurality of first decorative members 870 and the second decorative members 880, and the attracting force is generated in the circumferential direction. , since the displacement of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 from the combined state can be limited to linear motion displacement, the combined state by the magnetic force of the magnet Mg2 can be easily maintained.

In other words, when the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 rotate around the metal rod 832 at the start of displacement from the combined state, the first decorative member moves in the direction perpendicular to the direction of the magnetic force. Since the 870 and the second decorative member 880 are displaced, the magnetic force is likely to disappear. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the displacement at the start of the displacement from the combined state of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 is the displacement along the plane on which the five magnets Mg2 are arranged (the metal rod 832 ), it is easy to maintain the combined state due to the magnetic force.

As a result, even if the inner rotating member 830 unintentionally rotates slightly (for example, rotates about 5 degrees) due to the influence of an unintended load, the plurality of first decoration members 870 and the second decorations 870 and 830 can rotate. The combined state of the members 880 can be easily maintained.

As shown in FIG. 101, the torque limiter 866 cuts the connection when a load exceeding a predetermined allowable value is applied in forward rotation, and reduces the resistance (idling) so as to generate switching rotation DR1. In the reverse direction rotation, idling rotation AR1 is generated so that the resistance is reduced (idling). The torque limiter 866 is composed of a pair of reversed forward and reverse rotations.

More specifically, in this embodiment, the left torque limiter 866 generates resistance in clockwise rotation when viewed from the front until the applied load reaches a permissible value, and when the permissible value is exceeded, the switching rotation DR1 causes idling. On the other hand, in the counterclockwise rotation direction when viewed from the front, it is configured to cause idling rotation AR1.

In addition, the torque limiter 866 on the right side is configured to cause idling rotation AR1 in the clockwise rotation direction as viewed from the front, while the applied load does not exceed the allowable value in the counterclockwise rotation direction as viewed from the front. It is configured to generate a switching rotation DR1 in which resistance is generated until reaching the allowable value, and idling occurs when the allowable value is exceeded.

In this manner, the pair of torque limiters 866 function as safety clutches in different rotational directions, thereby enabling switching rotational motion in both directions, as described above.

Furthermore, in a state where a load exceeding the allowable value in the rotational direction does not occur, resistance is applied to the outer rotating member 840 in both forward and reverse directions via the load response gear 865 (see FIG. 61) assembled to the torque limiter 866. , it is possible to suppress the rotational movement of the outer rotating member 840 that may be caused by unintended load (inertial force of vertical displacement and impact force when opening and closing the door). Therefore, the posture of the outer rotating member 840 can be maintained by the set of torque limiters 866 .

As shown in FIG. 101, the magnet Mg2 is fixed to one side of the second covering portion 885 in the width direction, and arranged concentrically when the five second covering portions 885 are annularly united. The magnet Mg2 generates an attractive force with the metal screw Nj2 fixed to the second covering portion 885 which is adjacently arranged.

With this configuration, when the magnets Mg2 are arranged on both sides in the width direction of the specific second covering portion 885 (that is, when the magnets Mg2 are arranged adjacent to the specific second covering portion 885 on both sides) Both of the covering portions 885 are separated from the specific second covering portion 885 in the combined state compared to the case where the magnet Mg2 receives the biasing force in the direction toward the specific second covering portion 885). It is possible to prevent the gaps between the second covering parts 885 from becoming large at different positions, and to make the gaps between all the adjacent second covering parts 885 uniform.

Further, as described above, the displacement of the second decorative member 880 from the combined state is configured as a radially outward sliding movement, and until the rotational movement about the metal rod 832 is started, the combination due to the magnetic force has not occurred. When separated to the extent that they are released (see FIG. 100), the magnetic force of the magnet Mg2 acts in the direction of shortening the circumference of the concentric circles in which the second decorative members 880 are aligned (direction facing the center of the concentric circles). It acts as a resistance to the radially outward sliding movement of the second decorative member 880 .

In addition, since this resistance force is generated in the same magnitude from each direction that divides 360 degrees into 5, it is possible to balance the load that the third operation unit 800 receives from the magnet Mg2. That is, compared to the case where the magnetic force Mg2 acts unevenly, the arrangement of the third operation unit 800 can be easily stabilized.

The five second decorative members 880 have the same shape, and the arrangement of the magnets Mg2 is also the same, so that the front and rear positions of the magnets Mg2 are the same. As a result, it is possible to prevent the second decorative member 880 from being subjected to a load having a component in the front-rear direction due to the magnetic force of the magnet Mg2. occurs in the front-rear direction, and the second decorative member 880 can be easily avoided from vibrating in the front-rear direction.

102 is a front view of outer rotating member 840 and middle arm member 850. FIG. In FIG. 102, the arrangement state corresponding to the individually combined state of the decorative members 870 and 880 is illustrated. 840 is made visible.

As shown in FIG. 102, in this embodiment, at least one portion that restricts the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 in one direction (clockwise direction in front view in FIG. 102) can be secured. In many cases, the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted at two points. A configuration for restricting the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 will be described.

First, there is a contact projecting portion 845 projecting radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the body portion 841 of the outer rotating member 840 . The contact protruding portion 845 is tapered radially outward at an intermediate angular position between the adjacent extended arm portions 842, and the inside is hollowed out in a direction parallel to the axial direction of the main body portion 841. ing.

The contact projecting portion 845 is arranged to face the intermediate arm member 850 in the rotation direction of the intermediate arm member 850, and is arranged so as to be able to contact the curved portion 852c of the thickened portion 852 of the intermediate arm member 850. , to prevent excessive rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 .

The thickened portion 852 is weakened in resistance to elastic deformation by the concave portion 852b (see FIG. 99(a)). Similarly, the contact projecting portion 845 is lightened. As a result, even if the intermediate arm member 850 is displaced at a high speed and the curved portion 852c of the thickened portion 852 collides with the abutment projecting portion 845, the load generated at that time is absorbed by the abutment projecting portion. Since elastic deformation of 845 and thickened portion 852 can be absorbed, breakage of contact projecting portion 845 and thickened portion 852 can be avoided.

The contact protruding portion 845 is not provided at all intermediate angular positions of the extended arm portion 842, but is omitted at the angular position where the detected portion 844 is formed. As a result, the contact projecting portion 845 and the detected portion 844 are displaced from each other when viewed in the axial direction, and the direction in which the outer rotating member 840 is removed from the mold can be set in the axial direction of the main body portion 841 . . Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the design of the molding die.

As described above, in this embodiment, the formation of the abutment projecting portion 845 is omitted in exchange for simplification of the design of the molding die. As a second configuration, the thickened portion 852 is formed with a base end reinforcing portion 852a.

The proximal side reinforcing portion 852a is arranged to face the distal side rod portion 853 (see FIG. 99(a)) in the rotation direction of the adjacent rotating member 850, and can abut when the distal side rod portion 853 is over-rotated. , the intermediate arm member 850 is configured to prevent excessive rotation.

The base-end reinforcing portion 852a is lightened in the same manner as the recessed portion 852b, but is designed to have a relatively small lightening amount and a high deformation resistance. As a result, even if the rotary arm member 850 comes into contact with the tip of the rotating arm member 850, which is the side where the inertial force in rotation tends to increase, it is possible to avoid an excessive amount of deformation.

The curved shape portion 852c is designed so that it can come into contact with the curved shape portion 854d on its surface, and an excessive load is not locally generated between the curved shape portion 852c and the curved shape portion 854d in the combined state. can be suppressed, and the durability of the intermediate arm member 850 can be improved.

In this way, when the contact projecting portions 845 are arranged to face each other, the displacement of the rotating arm member 850 is not only the contact with the contact projecting portion 845 but also the displacement of the adjacent rotating arm member 850 . The curved shape portion 852c and the curved shape portion 854d can be brought into contact with each other, and the base end side reinforcement portion 852a of the adjacent rotating arm member 850 can be brought into contact with the tip end side rod portion 853. , excessive rotation of the rotating arm member 850 is restricted.

On the other hand, even if the arrangement of the contact projecting portion 845 is omitted, the curved portion 852c and the curved portion 854d of the adjacent rotating arm member 850 are brought into contact with each other, or the adjacent rotating arm member Excessive rotation of the rotating arm member 850 can be restricted by a configuration in which the proximal reinforcing portion 852a of the rotating arm member 850 and the distal end rod portion 853 can be brought into contact with each other.

These abutment configurations are configured so that the five pivot arm members 850 are associated with each other (circularly arranged). Therefore, at first glance, the formation of one abutting projecting portion 845 is omitted, and since there is little configuration for restricting the rotation of only the rotating arm member 850 corresponding to the omitted portion, the load at the time of contact may be concentrated. However, in reality, the interaction of the five rotating arm members 850 can disperse the load at the time of contact.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the durability of the single rotating arm member 850 (the rotating arm member 850 corresponding to the portion where the contact projecting portion 845 is omitted) from being extremely deteriorated.

In addition, the formation of the annular plate-shaped portion 846 extending in the shape of an annular plate on one plane along the back side end portion of the contact projection portion 845 from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 841 is also the same as the contact projection portion. As with the portion 845, portions overlapping the detected portion 844 when viewed in the axial direction are omitted.

Omitting the formation of the annular plate-shaped portion 846 can be explained as compensation for simplification of the design of the molding die, similarly to the omission of the formation of the contact projecting portion 845 described above. The effect of the portion 846 is achieved by the adjacent rotating arm member 850 (the structure for supporting the same) even in a portion where the annular plate-shaped portion 846 is omitted.

That is, the effect of the annular plate-shaped portion 846 can be explained as correction of the displacement of the front-rear position of the rotating arm member 850 . That is, from the combined state (see FIG. 64(a)), the rotating arm member 850 is displaced radially outward (see FIG. 65(a)). 99(b)), the rear side surface of the base-end rod portion 851 (see FIG. 99(b)) is arranged to face the annular plate-shaped portion 846 and can come into contact therewith. As a result, the front-rear position of the rotating arm member 850 can be corrected by the abutment.

This action cannot be achieved if the annular plate-shaped portion 846 is omitted, because contact with the annular plate-shaped portion 846 does not occur. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rear side surface of the distal end side rod portion 853 of the rotating arm member 850 is arranged to face the front side surface of the extended arm portion 842, so that the distal end of the rotating arm member 850 is arranged Even if the position is shifted back and forth, the rear side surface of the distal end side rod portion 853 is arranged to face the front side surface of the extended arm portion 842 so as to be able to come into contact with the front side surface of the extended arm portion 842, so that the contact causes rotation. The fore-and-aft position of the arm member 850 can be modified.

Thus, in this embodiment, the extension arm portion 842 is configured to produce the same action as the annular plate portion 846 . As a result, the effect of correcting the front-to-rear arrangement of the rotating arm member 850 can be produced in all the rotating arm members 850 while partially omitting the formation of the annular plate-shaped portion 846 .

103(a) is a rear view of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850, and FIG. 103(b) is a front view of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850. FIG. In Figures 103(a) and 103(b), the relative positioning of the outer rotating member 840 and the middle arm member 850 in one union is illustrated.

The state illustrated in FIG. 103(a) is a state in which the virtual position line 832F has rotated from the state in FIG. 65(b) to the maximum angle θ31E (180 degrees in this embodiment) (state in which the switching rotation operation has been completed). 103(b) is a state in which the virtual position line 832F has rotated from the state in FIG. completed state).

Comparing the united state and the individually united state (see FIGS. 64(a) and 66(a)), the lateral side of the intermediate arm member 850 close to the outer rotating member 840 is reversed, so that the abutment There is a difference that the curved shape portion 852c that contacts the projecting portion 845 is on the opposite side, and the curved shape portion 852c that contacts the curved shape portion 854d is on the opposite side.

For the purpose of accommodating this difference, the contact projecting portion 845 has a line-symmetrical shape in a front view with respect to the radial direction of the main body portion 841, and the pair of curved portions 852c and 854d , with respect to the longitudinal direction line of the intermediate arm member 850 (a straight line connecting the base end of rotation and the supported hole 854a).

Further, the curved shape of the contact projecting portion 845 and the curved shape of the curved portion 854d are designed to be similar curved shapes in accordance with the shape of the curved portion 852c. As a result, the combined state can be configured with the same engagement relationship in both the individual combined state and the one combined state.

In the combined state, the thickened portion 852 of the intermediate arm member 850 is sandwiched between the contact projecting portion 845 and the curved portion 854d from both sides. As a result, the thickened portion 852 of the intermediate arm member 850 can be prevented from being displaced in any rotational direction, so that the state of the intermediate arm member 850 can be easily maintained, and the combined state can be maintained. can be made easier.

104 and 105 are front views of the third operation unit 800. FIG. FIG. 104 shows a state in which the decorative members 870 and 880 are arranged at the outermost diameter position (an intermediate state between the individual combined state and the one combined state), and FIG. 105 shows the one combined state.

106 is a cross-sectional view of the third operation unit 800 along line CVI-CVI in FIG. 105, and FIG. 107 is a cross-sectional view of third operation unit 800 along line CVII-CVII in FIG. As the configuration of the third operation unit 800, the front-rear arrangement of the metal rod 832 and the intermediate arm member 850 can be set arbitrarily.

If the intermediate arm member 850 is arranged on the front side of the metal bar 832, the player can see the metal bar 832 through the intermediate arm member 850, so that the visibility of the metal bar 832 can be lowered. On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, the metal rod 832 is arranged on the front side of the intermediate arm member 850. As shown in FIGS.

With this arrangement, the metal bar 832 as a supporting member functions as a shielding member that partially hides the intermediate arm member 850 . As a result, the intermediate arm member 850, which is not a decorative member but a functional member, can be prevented from being conspicuous, and the appearance of the third operation unit 800 can be improved.

In the exposed state (see FIG. 104), the metal bar 832 also functions as a rendering member that reflects light due to the luster of the surface. The performance effect can be improved. In other words, the metal bar 832 can be used as a reflecting member for light production.

If the intermediate arm member 850 is arranged on the front side of the metal rod 832, there is a possibility that the intermediate arm member 850 will block the light entering the player's eyes. Since it is arranged on the back side of 832, it is possible to avoid the light being blocked by the intermediate arm member 850 and the poor appearance.

As described above, in the present embodiment, light can be reflected via the metal rod 832 in the state in which the metal rod 832 is exposed (see FIGS. 104 and 107) during the switching rotation operation. , the range in which the light effect is performed can be extended. That is, it is arranged not only in the rear range of the translucent decorative member 824 where the electrical decoration substrate 823 (see FIG. 60) is arranged, but also in a front view so as to protrude radially outward of the translucent decorative member 824 . Even in the range ER1 (see FIG. 104) where the metal bar 832 is exposed and visually recognized, the reflected light can be visually recognized by the player.

As a portion that receives light, the bulging portion 824a has, on its inner peripheral surface, a light diffusion shape portion 824b (see FIGS. 106 and 107) having an annular light diffusion shape. The light emitted from the inner light emitting portion 823a can be emitted to the light diffusing shape portion 824b, and the light diffusing shape portion 824b that receives the light shines brightly in an annular shape.

As a result, not only the combined state of the decorative members 870 and 880, but also the light diffusing shape portion 824b can be visually recognized brightly in a circular shape during the switching rotation operation in which the circular arrangement of the decorative members 870 and 880 is cancelled. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain the presentation effect using the annular shape of the third operation unit 800 .

As shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, the light-transmitting decorative member 824 includes not only a bulging portion 824a that is visually recognized in the combined state, but also an extended portion that extends radially outward from the bulging portion 824a in a front view. 824c.

The extended portion 824c is hidden by the decorative members 870 and 880 in the combined state, and thus has a low function as a decorative portion. .

That is, as shown in FIGS. 104 and 107, the extended portion 824c is difficult to use for performance, such as the body portion 831 of the inner rotary member 830 and the extended arm portion 842 of the outer rotary member 840 (see FIG. 61). It is formed in a size large enough to shield and blind the mechanism part.

Since the decorative pattern is applied not only to the bulging portion 824a but also to the front side of the extended portion 824c, the decorative pattern can be visually recognized in the range where the mechanical portion is shielded and blinded. You can improve the effect.

An example of drive control of the third operation unit 800 will be described. First, the relationship between the up-and-down displacement of the third operation unit 800 due to drive control of the lift arm member 801 and the rotational displacement of the third operation unit 800 due to drive control of the drive motor 861 will be described.

According to this embodiment, the vertical displacement and rotational displacement of the third operation unit 800 are configured to be independently executable. Rotational displacement may occur in the third operation unit 800 in conjunction with this. In this case, the posture of the third operating unit 800 changes, or the combined state of the third operating unit 800 is released (the decorative members 870 and 880 are displaced radially outward against the attractive force of the magnet Mg2). As a result, there is a possibility that the production effect will decrease.

In order to avoid this, for example, the up-down displacement of the third operation unit 800 and the rotational displacement (particularly, integral rotation operation) of the third operation unit 800 may be controlled to be performed at the same time.

As a result, the rotational displacement of the third motion unit 800 during the up-and-down displacement can be shown to the player as a performance motion, so that the performance effect can be prevented from deteriorating. Furthermore, while the integral rotation operation continues, the load continues to be applied in the direction of displacing the decorative members 870 and 880 inward in the radial direction (see FIG. 101), so that the combined state of the third operation unit 800 can be canceled. can be avoided.

In addition, even if control is not performed to simultaneously execute vertical displacement and rotational displacement, the posture of the third motion unit 800 is adjusted in advance so that the rotating arm member 850 is less likely to be displaced by the vertical displacement. Control may be performed to adjust the orientation of the unit 800 in the rotational direction.

A change in the detection mode of the detected portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840 by the detection sensor 813 (see FIG. 68) means that, in this embodiment, the rotating mode of the inner rotating member 830 is executed in integral rotation. means. Therefore, it is assumed that the detection mode of the detection sensor 813 and the control of the third operation unit 800 are associated with each other and designed on the premise of this.

This premise is based on the fact that the switching rotation operation is performed in a state in which the attitude of the outer rotating member 840 is maintained (a state in which the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 are not interlocked). Therefore, it is preferable to avoid situations in which this premise may be violated.

In this embodiment, when the rotation of the inner rotating member 830 is controlled by the driving force of the driving motor 861, the resistance applied by the torque limiter 866 acts to suppress the rotation of the outer rotating member 840, thereby The posture of 840 is maintained.

Therefore, for example, the resistance between the metal rod 832, the direct-acting member 833, the rotating member 834, and the intermediate arm member 850 increases during the switching rotation operation, and the motion resistance between the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 increases. increases and exceeds the resistance exerted by the torque limiter, the outer rotating member 840 and the inner rotating member 830 may interlock, preventing the switching rotation from being performed properly.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the resistance between the metal rod 832, the linear motion member 833, the rotating member 834 and the intermediate arm member 850 is reduced.

For example, the displacement direction of the tip of the intermediate arm member 850 that displaces the linear motion member 833 and the rotary member 834 from the combined state is along the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 832 . That is, since the intermediate arm member 850 is displaced in a direction perpendicular to the direction of rotation of the metal rod 832, resistance to the rotation of the metal rod 832 is less likely to occur. and the resistance generated between the middle arm member 850 can be kept small.

In the state where the linear motion member 833 and the rotary member 834 are arranged at the radially outer end positions (see FIG. 104), the displacement direction of the rotation tip side (for example, the supported hole 854a) of the intermediate arm member 850 is the metal rod. Since it follows the rotation direction of 832, it is easy to configure a state in which the metal rod 832 and the intermediate arm member 850 move in parallel, especially when the speed is insufficient. In this case, the switching rotation operation becomes defective.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a control mode is adopted in which, once the switching rotation operation is started, the drive is continued at a sufficient speed until the united state is reached. When placed in position (see FIG. 104), the decorative members 870, 880 are subject to inertia so as to rotate about the metal rod 832. As shown in FIG.

Under the influence of this inertia, the rotary member 834 fastened and fixed to the decorative members 870 and 880 rotates, and the bevel tooth portion 834a and the bevel tooth portion 854c engage and rotate. It rotates radially inward through the radially outer end position (see FIGS. 65(b) and 67(b)).

When the intermediate arm member 850 is out of the radially outer end position, it becomes easier for the rotation tip side of the intermediate arm member 850 to be displaced in the direction along the metal rod 832, and the resistance to the rotational movement of the metal rod 832 can be easily suppressed.

As described above, in this embodiment, the resistance between the metal rod 832, the linear motion member 833, the rotating member 834, and the intermediate arm member 850 is reduced by designing the relationship between the members and the drive control. there is

During the switching rotation operation, the posture of the outer rotating member 840 is maintained, and the arrangement of the detected portion 844 does not change. I can't judge.

For example, the control to stop the drive motor 861 at the timing when the united state is reached can be realized by presetting a necessary and sufficient drive time for the switching rotation operation and controlling to stop the drive at that drive time. However, depending on the degree of resistance between the metal rod 832, linear motion member 833, rotating member 834, and intermediate arm member 850, the amount of displacement may differ even if the drive time is the same. It may stop working. In this case, there is a possibility that the performance effect will be reduced.

On the other hand, instead of the control mode of stopping the drive motor 861 at the timing when the united state is reached, the detection mode of the detected part 844 by the detection sensor 813 is changed, so that the switching rotation operation is completed and the integral rotation operation is started. It may be determined that it has started (see FIG. 68), and after this determination, the drive motor 861 may be controlled to stop. With this control, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the drive motor 861 is stopped before the decorative members 870 and 880 reach the united state after the switching rotation operation is executed.

As drive control, the switching rotation operation is performed in the extended state of the third operation unit 800 as described above, but the integral rotation operation can be performed regardless of the state of the third operation unit 800. is.

As drive control, the switching rotation operation can be executed without being influenced by the arrangement of the rotation direction of the third operation unit 800. Therefore, as described above with reference to FIG. can be avoided. That is, the state is not limited to the state in which the detected portion 844 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 (see FIG. 66A), but the state in which the detected portion 844 is not arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813. The switching rotation operation can be performed even from

On the other hand, unlike the case where the switching rotation operation is performed in a state where the detection target portion 844 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, the detection target portion 844 is positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 after the switching rotation operation is completed. Since the output of the detection sensor 813 does not change until the vehicle enters the vehicle, it is necessary to devise a control mode.

For example, regardless of the output of the detection sensor 813, the switching rotation operation may be executed in a drive period set in advance as a driving period necessary and sufficient for the switching rotation operation. The drive motor 861 may be controlled to continue driving until it enters the detection groove.

In the latter case, after the switching rotation operation is completed, the operation mode shifts to the integrated rotation operation, and the detected portion 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, so that the switching rotation operation is already completed and the decorative member 870, It can be determined that 880 is docked.

On the other hand, although the drive motor 861 is driven for a sufficient length of time to shift from the switching rotation operation to the integral rotation operation and the detected portion 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 . If the output of the detection sensor 813 does not change, it can be determined based on the output of the detection sensor 813 that the third operation unit 800 is malfunctioning.

In the latter case, the switching rotation operation is executed from an arbitrary rotation arrangement of the third operation unit 800, and in the state in which the one union state (see FIG. 32) is maintained, the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 detects Drive continues until portion 844 enters.

In the union state of the third operating unit 800, as described above, the appearance is less likely to be different even if the rotational arrangement is different. Therefore, even if the rotational displacement of the third operation unit 800 is continued until the part to be detected 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 in the one union state, it is possible to easily avoid a decrease in the performance effect.

Furthermore, when performing control to return from the reversal effect shown in FIG. The period until the output of 813 changes can be minimized. In other words, since a short driving period is enough for the detected part 844 arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 to retreat from the detection groove, the length required for the control to return from the reversal effect to the normal effect. can be minimized.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the degree of freedom of the rotation arrangement of the third operation unit 800 that starts the switching rotation operation to switch from the normal effect to the reverse effect is improved, and the normal return operation is prolonged. In some cases, the switching rotation operation from the reversal performance as the return operation to the normal performance is shortened.

That is, a part of the return operation (rotational displacement until the detected portion 844 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813) for correcting the difference in the rotational arrangement of the third operation unit 800 can be viewed even if the rotational arrangement is different. It is possible to avoid a decrease in the presentation effect of the third action unit 800 during the return action by performing the action in the one united state in which the appearance is difficult to change.

Furthermore, by performing part of the return operation in advance, it is possible to shorten the period required for the switching rotation operation as the rest of the return operation.

Among the operation units 600, 700, and 800, the configuration commonly adopted by the plurality of operation units 600, 700, and 800 will be cross-sectionally explained, including the reasons for the differences in the manner of adoption.

First, as a first cross-sectional explanation, the configuration of the detection sensors KS1, 713, 778d, and 813 that are commonly employed in each of the operation units 600, 700, and 800 will be confirmed, and the mode of adoption (number of sensors, The reason for the difference in the shape of the piece to be detected, etc.) will be explained.

The detection sensor KS1 of the first operation unit 600 is a detection device for detecting the arrangement of the first operation unit 600, and the extended portion 634b can enter the detection groove. The detection device provided in the first operation unit 600 is only one detection sensor KS1 (see FIG. 41). With respect to a plurality of displacement members including the rotating member 620, the supported member 640, the overhanging decorative portion 652b, and the second decorative rotating member 660, if the orientation of the rotating member 620 is determined, the arrangement and orientation of the other displacement members are determined. , it is possible to determine the arrangement and posture of a plurality of displacement members based on the detection result of one detection sensor KS1. This makes it possible to reduce the number of detectors to be installed.

The detection sensor 713 of the second motion unit 700 is a detection device for detecting the posture of the gear cam member 734 of the second motion unit 700, and the detected portion 735 can enter the detection groove. There are three detection devices for the second motion unit 700 to detect the posture of the gear cam member 734 (see FIG. 50), which correspond to the effect standby state, the intermediate effect state, and the extended state of the second motion unit 700, respectively. do.

A detection sensor 713 for determining the effect standby state is necessary for determining return to the initial position. The detection sensor 713 for judging the overhanging state is necessary for judging whether the upward displacement end position has been reached, and also for judging the reversing operation of the up/down reversing effect device 770 and the displacement caused by the influence of unintended load. required for The detection sensor 713 for judging the intermediate production state is necessary for judging whether the player has reached the upper or lower position in the intermediate production state, and also for judging positional deviation due to the influence of an unintended load. In the following, the reversal operation and the effects of unintended loads will be described in order.

First, the inversion operation will be explained. The second operation unit 700 is configured to enable vertical displacement of the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 caused in conjunction with the rotation of the gear cam member 734, as well as the reversal operation of the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 (see FIG. 59).

Since there is a possibility that the vertical reversal effect device 770 is displaced in the vertical direction due to the reversal operation, for example, when only a single detection sensor 713 (detection device for determining the effect standby state) is adopted, the overhang state or There is a possibility that it is not possible to determine the positional deviation in the vertical direction in the intermediate effect state, and it is not possible to execute an appropriate effect operation.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the effect standby state, the intermediate effect state, and the overhanging state of the second operation unit 700 is provided. Therefore, for example, it is possible to determine that the vertical reversal effect device 770 is displaced in the vertical direction by reversing the vertical reversal effect device 770 in the overhanging state, and based on this determination result, the posture of the gear cam member 734 can be adjusted appropriately. By rotating the drive motor 731 in the correcting direction (so as to be in the overhanging state), the arrangement of the up/down reversal effect device 770 can be properly maintained.

In this embodiment, the reversing operation is permitted only when the second operation unit 700 is in the extended state (when the gear cam member 734 is on the operation terminal side). It is easy to rotate the member 734 toward the end of the operation.

Next, the effects of unintended loads will be described. In the second operation unit 700, the elevation plate member 740 is vertically displaced in conjunction with the rotating arm member 720 rotated by the rotation of the gear cam member 734, and the front and rear positions corresponding to the vertical position of the elevation plate member 740. 52 to 54).

Therefore, as the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 is displaced in the front-rear direction by the load applied in the longitudinal width direction of the game machine, the vertical positions of the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 and the elevator plate member 740 are changed, and accordingly the gear cam. The orientation of member 734 may change. Examples of the load applied in the longitudinal width direction of the game machine include impact load when the player hits the game machine, load when the front frame 14 is opened and closed, and the like.

Since there is a possibility that the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 is displaced in the vertical direction due to the load in the front-rear width direction, for example, when only a single detection sensor 713 (detection device for determining the effect standby state) is adopted, the tension There is a possibility that the up/down reversal effect device 770 cannot be maintained in an appropriate arrangement because it is not possible to determine the positional deviation in the vertical direction in the extended state or the intermediate effect state.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the effect standby state, the intermediate effect state, and the overhanging state of the second operation unit 700 is provided. Therefore, for example, when a load in the front-rear width direction is applied to the game machine in an intermediate effect state, and the vertical positions of the up/down reversal effect device 770 and the lift plate member 740 change, the posture of the gear cam member 734 changes accordingly. , it can be determined that the vertical reversal effect device 770 has been displaced in the vertical direction, and based on this determination result, the drive motor 731 is rotated in the direction to correct the posture of the gear cam member 734 appropriately (so that it is in the intermediate effect state). Thus, the arrangement of the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 can be properly maintained.

In addition, when it is determined that the detected portion 735 of the gear cam member 734 is detached from the detection sensor 713 due to an unintended load from the state in which the detected portion 735 of the gear cam member 734 is arranged in the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the intermediate effect state, this implementation Although it cannot be determined in which direction the detected part 735 is displaced, the driving motor 731 is controlled to drive the driving motor 731 in the direction in which the effect device 780 is displaced downward first. As a result, it is possible to prevent the second operation unit 700 and the third operation unit 800 from colliding.

In this embodiment, when the detected portion 735 again enters the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the intermediate effect state due to this drive, the displacement of the detected portion 735 due to an unintended load causes the effect device 780 to move upward. If it is found that the load has occurred on the load side and the drive is stopped at that point, the effect caused by the unintended load can be canceled out.

In addition, due to this drive, when the detected part 735 does not enter the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the intermediate production state and enters the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the production standby state, the detected part 735 due to an unintended load It is found that the displacement of was occurring on the side of downward displacement of the effect device 780, and the driving is continued so as to cause the effect device 780 to be displaced upward again. By stopping the drive, the effects caused by unintended loads can be offset.

Note that the detected portion 735 entering the detection groove of the detection sensor 713 does not serve the structural purpose as described for the extended portion 634b. formed as a shape. Thereby, the resolution for detecting the posture of the gear cam member 734 can be improved.

The detection sensor 778d is a detection device for detecting the posture of the upside-down reversing member 781 of the second motion unit 700, and the arcuate projecting portion 781d can enter the detection groove. There are two detection devices for the second operation unit 700 to detect the orientation of the upside-down member 781 (see FIG. 56). and correspond to

The second operation units 700 are arranged as a left and right pair in the upright vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 59(a)) and the inverted vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 59(c)) of the upside-down reversing member 781. A combined state in which the covering member 787 is adjacent.

For example, if only a single detection sensor 778d (a detection device for reversing the upright vertical arrangement state of the upside down member 781) is employed, the posture deviation of the upside down member 781 from the upright vertical arrangement state is Since it can be determined, it is possible to drive and control the driving motor 782 so as to maintain the combined state of the covering member 787 based on the determination result. On the other hand, since it is not possible to determine the posture deviation of the upside-down reversing member 781 from the inverted vertical arrangement state, the combined state of the covering member 787 in the inverted vertical arrangement state may be affected by an unintended load, control failure, or the like. Even if there is a change, the change in state cannot be determined by the detection sensor 778d, and the state in which the combined state is canceled will continue, which is not desirable in terms of presentation.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the detection sensor 778d corresponding to the upright vertical arrangement state of the upside down reversing member 781 and the inverted vertical arrangement state of the upside down reversing member 781 is provided. Therefore, the detection sensor 778d can determine that a state change from the united state has occurred regardless of whether it is in the upright vertical orientation state or the inverted vertical orientation state, and based on the determination result, the united state can be changed. By driving and controlling the driving motor 782 on the returning side, the covering member 787 can be returned to the united state. Thereby, the rendering effect of the second operation unit 700 can be improved.

Note that the arcuate projecting portion 781d that enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 778d does not serve the structural purpose described for the extension portion 634b. is formed as a plate-like portion of Thereby, the resolution for detecting the orientation of the upside down member 781 can be increased.

The detection sensor 813 of the third operation unit 800 is a detection device for detecting the posture of the outer rotating member 840 of the third operation unit 800, and the detected portion 844 can enter the detection groove (see FIG. 60). reference). There is one detection device for the third operation unit 800 to detect the posture of the outer rotating member 840, and this single detecting device detects the rotation of the outer rotating member 840 itself and the rotation of the outer rotating member 840. It is used (also used) for determining the rotation (switching rotation operation) of the inner rotating member 830 in the closed state.

Note that the detected portion 844 that enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 does not serve the structural purpose as described for the extended portion 634b. formed as a shape. Thereby, the resolution for detecting the attitude of the outer rotating member 840 can be improved.

The detection sensor 813 is provided for the purpose of detecting the attitude of the outer rotating member 840, and the number thereof is as small as one. For example, even if a displacement occurs such that the combined state is canceled when the outer rotating member 840 is maintained in a posture in which the detected part 844 is not arranged in the detection sensor 813, the detection sensor 813 can determine it. can't.

Therefore, rather than determining the deviation from the united state and then returning to the united state, the decorative members 870 and 880 are returned to the united state (individual united state (Fig. 66(a)) at regular time intervals. )), the drive motor rotates the inner rotating member 830 clockwise when viewed from the front, and rotates the inner rotating member 830 counterclockwise when viewed from the front in the combined state (see FIG. 103(b)). A control that drives the 861 to rotate for a certain period of time (for example, a short period of time) is considered preferable.

With this control, even if the combined state of the decorative members 870 and 880 is unexpectedly canceled, the decorative members 870 and 880 can be returned to the combined state by driving the driving motor 861 at regular time intervals. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the decorative members 870 and 880 from being kept in the combined state for a long period of time.

As a second cross-sectional explanation, the action of the magnets Mg and Mg2 will be explained. As described above, in the second operation unit 700, the magnet Mg functions to maintain the attitude of the covering member 787, and in the third operation unit 800, the magnet Mg2 functions to maintain the combined state of the decorative members 870 and 880. As shown, similar techniques are adopted, but the design concept of the direction of the load generated by the magnets Mg and Mg2 is different, so it will be explained here.

The second operation unit 700 is designed so that the directions of the magnetic forces generated between the magnets Mg and the metal screws arranged on the left and right sides are aligned in the front-rear direction at both the left and right positions. In other words, the line of action of the magnetic force is designed to be parallel to the plane perpendicular to the metal rod 785a as the rotation axis of the covering member 787. As shown in FIG.

In this case, compared to the case where the magnetic force of the magnet Mg is generated in the axial direction of the metal rod 785a, the degree (magnitude) of the magnetic force generated as resistance to the sliding displacement of the covering members 787 approaching and separating from each other can be reduced. As a result, the movement resistance of the covering member 787 at the start of movement can be reduced.

On the other hand, in the third operation unit 800, the direction of the line of action of the magnetic force generated between the magnet Mg2 arranged on the decorative member 880 and the metal screw Nj2 is the five rotation axes for the rotational movement of the decorative member 880. It is designed to be arranged on a plane parallel to the plane on which the metal rod 832 is arranged (the plane orthogonal to the rotation axis of the inner rotary member 830).

In this case, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg2 can reduce the degree to which the decorative members 870 and 880 are subjected to a load in the rotational direction, so that the magnetic force can easily prevent the decorative members 870 and 880 from wobbling in the rotational direction. be able to.

As a third cross-sectional explanation, the display on the display device such as the third pattern display device 81 and the effect of visually recognizing the operation units 600, 700, and 800 integrally will be explained.

In the first operation unit 600, the projecting decorative portion 652b is arranged so as to appear to overlap with the region right end RE1 of the display region of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 29). Therefore, for example, by displaying a display corresponding to the position where the overhanging decorative portion 652b is arranged near the area right end RE1 of the display area of the third pattern display device 81, the display area and the overhanging decorative portion 652b are grouped together. It can be made easy to visually recognize as a display effect of.

In the second operation unit 700, the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 is arranged to match the height between the inner lower edge of the center frame 86 and the lower edge of the opening 511a (FIGS. 26 and 52). reference). Therefore, for example, by displaying a display corresponding to the position where the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 is arranged near the lower edge of the display area of the third pattern display device 81, the display area and the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 are one. It can be made easy to visually recognize as a grouped display effect.

In the third motion unit 800, each first covering portion 875 visible to the player in the individually combined state is decorated differently, and in the overhanging state, the third covering portion 875 surrounds the periphery in a front view. A display area of the pattern display device 81 is arranged. For this reason, for example, in a range close to the first covering portion 875 in the display area of the third pattern display device 81, by displaying a display corresponding to the position where the first covering portion 875 is arranged, the display area and the first covering portion 875 are displayed. The covering portion 875 can be easily visually recognized as a group of display effects.

Further, if the third operation unit 800 is drive-controlled so that it rotates integrally, it is possible to execute a roulette-like operation presentation in which each first covering portion 875 rotates. By moving the display so as to run parallel to the first covering portion 875 in a range close to the first covering portion 875 in the display area of the pattern display device 81, the display area and the first covering portion 875 are separated from each other. It can be made easy to visually recognize as a grouped display effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 108, a second embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the internal shape of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 is fixed was described, but in the sorting device 2300 of the second embodiment, the first flow path configuration part 2334 with a variable internal shape Prepare. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

When explaining the first flow path forming part 2334 as an alternative part of the first flow path forming part 334 in the first embodiment, the structure arranged on the right side will be illustrated and explained. The configuration can also be the first flow path configuration portion 2334 . Also, the configuration may be different between the left and right so that only one of the left and right sides is the first flow path forming portion 2334 and the other is the first flow path forming portion 334 .

FIG. 108 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 2300 in the second embodiment along line corresponding to line XVI-XVI in FIG. As shown in FIG. 108, the first flow path forming portion 2334 of the sorting device 2300 includes a through hole 2410 drilled in the front-rear direction at the lower portion of the curved protrusion 334b, and slides back and forth along the through hole 2410. It includes a slide member 2420 that is guided in a displaceable manner, and a solenoid 2430 that is arranged inside the rear frame portion 332 so as to generate a driving force for slidingly displacing the slide member 2420 .

In FIG. 108, the front side arrangement FP of the slide member 2420 in the non-excited state of the solenoid 2430 is illustrated by a solid line. When the solenoid 2430 is energized, the driving force of the solenoid 2430 slides the slide member 2420 to the rear side arrangement RP.

In this embodiment, when the slide member 2420 is arranged on the front side FP, the upper side surface of the slide member 2420 protrudes inside (upper side) than the bottom surface 2334c which is the bottom surface of the fixed flow path and on which the ball can roll. In the arrangement RP, the upper side surface of the slide member 2420 is configured so as not to protrude (retract) inside (above) the bottom surface 2334c.

That is, when the slide member 2420 is arranged on the front side FP, the ball contacts the upper surface of the slide member 2420, and when the slide member 2420 is arranged on the rear side RP, the slide member 2420 and the ball do not contact.

The upper surface of the slide member 2420 is formed as a plane parallel to the bottom surface 2334c. Therefore, even if the slide member 2420 slides while the ball is rolling on the bottom surface 2334c, it is possible to suppress the influence on the flow-down mode of the ball.

The flowing direction of the ball rolling on the bottom surface 2334c is the oblique front-back direction, and the direction of sliding displacement of the slide member 2420 is the front-back direction. Therefore, the sliding displacement of the slide member 2420 influences the strength of rotation of the ball.

Since the ball rolls forward on the bottom surface 2334c, it rotates forward in the traveling direction (forward). When the slide member 2420 is slidably displaced from the front side arrangement FP to the rear side arrangement RP by energizing the solenoid 2430 from the de-energized state (see FIG. 108) of the solenoid 2430, the upper surface of the slide member 2420 rolls. A rearward load (frictional force) is created against the lower end of the moving ball. Therefore, the rotation of the ball in the forward rolling direction is accelerated, the degree of rotation of the ball can be increased, and the rolling speed of the ball can be increased.

On the other hand, when the slide member 2420 is slidably displaced from the rear side arrangement RP to the front side arrangement FP by changing the solenoid 2430 from the energized state to the non-excited state (see FIG. 108), the bottom surface 2334b A forward load (frictional force) is generated via the upper side surface of the slide member 2420 against the lower end of the ball that is rolling. Therefore, the rotation of the ball in the forward rolling direction is decelerated, the degree of rotation of the ball can be reduced, and the rolling speed of the ball can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the vertical position of the upper surface of the slide member 2420 in the front side arrangement FP is higher than the vertical position of the bottom surface 2334b, in addition to the frictional force from the slide member 2420, the load in the direction that pushes the ball upward occurs. Therefore, the velocity in the vertical direction of the ball rolling downward can be reduced, so that the falling velocity of the ball can be reduced.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, by executing the control that causes the sliding displacement of the slide member 2420 while the ball is rolling on the bottom surface 2334b, the ball flowing down inside the sorting device 2300 The speed can be variable. This makes it possible to variably control the time from when the ball passes through the ball passage hole 163b to when it reaches the branch point BP1 (see FIG. 74).

In this embodiment, since the slide member 2420 is arranged behind the second flow passage forming part 335, it is difficult for the player to grasp the state in which the ball is affected by the slide member 2420. be able to.

That is, since the contact between the slide member 2420 and the ball is caused before the ball is introduced into the second flow passage forming portion 335, which is easily visible to the player and tends to attract attention, rotation is added to the ball. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the state of moving or displacing in the vertical direction. As a result, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort given to the player who visually recognizes the ball flowing down the second flow path forming portion 335 .

In this embodiment, a contact load is applied when the slide member 2420 is displaced when the sphere is arranged on the upper side of the bottom surface 2334c. A contact load with slide member 2420 is not applied to the ball passing through .

Therefore, the sphere placed above the bottom surface 2334c when the slide member 2420 is in operation and the sphere placed above the bottom surface 2334c while the slide member 2420 is stopped are in a flow-down mode (rotation, change in rotation, flow-down speed). , flow rate change, etc.) can be different.

Next, with reference to FIG. 109, a third embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side was described, but in the sorting device 3300 of the third embodiment, the probability variation detection sensor SE11 is arranged in a normal detection sensor By moving to the rear side of SE12, the variable probability detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side in the front-rear direction. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

As an example of changing the arrangement of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12, description will be made on the right side of the left and right center, but the configuration on the left side of the left and right can be arbitrarily designed. For example, on the left side, the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged on the left and right sides of the sorting device 3300 may be configured to be different, and also on the left side, the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged on the left and right sides of the sorting device 3300 so that they are arranged side by side as described in detail below. may be symmetrical.

109(a) and 109(b) are cross-sectional views of the sorting device 3300 in the third embodiment taken along line XVII-XVII in FIG. FIG. 109(a) shows a state in which the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) is de-energized and the slide displacement member 3370 is placed in the front position, and FIG. 109(b) shows the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is energized. A state in which the slide displacement member 3370 is arranged at the rear side position is illustrated.

In addition, in FIGS. 109(a) and 109(b), the guiding path of the ball after flowing through the third flow path forming portion 336 is illustrated by imaginary lines. Thus, the guide path of the sphere is changed by disposing the slide displacement member 3370 .

As shown in FIGS. 109(a) and 109(b), the middle member 3330 of the sorting device 3300 includes a rear frame-shaped portion 3332 that divides the ball guide path to the variable probability detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12. is configured in a shape that is open to accept a ball from the left side.

The slide displacement member 3370 is configured to be slidably displaceable between a front position and a rear position. The rear position of the slide displacement member 3370 (see FIG. 109(b)) is the right end of the front side surface 376a of the upper projecting portion 376 and the rear frame portion 3332 as a path entrance for guiding the ball to the probability variation detection sensor SE11. (or the right end of the front side surface 376a is positioned slightly forward) with the rear inner surface of the open portion 3332g formed in .

By setting the position of the slide displacement member 3370 in this way, if the slide displacement member 3370 is arranged at the front side position, the ball that has passed through the third flow path forming portion 336 will hit the front side surface 376a of the slide displacement member 3370. While in contact with the ball, it flows to the right and passes through the normal detection sensor SE12. It can be configured to flow to the right while contacting the front side surface 376a and pass through the probability variation detection sensor SE11.

That is, the flow path of the ball passing through the normal detection sensor SE12 and the flow path of the ball passing through the variable probability detection sensor SE11 are both the flow path that flows to the right after passing through the third flow path forming part 336 consists of The only difference is the front-to-rear position that flows to the right.

Therefore, it can be difficult to determine whether the ball has flowed to the variable probability detection sensor SE11 or to the normal detection sensor SE12 from the player's line of sight viewing the third flow path forming portion 336 from the front side.

The slide displacement member 3370 includes a pair of rod-shaped guide portions 3371c extending from the front end portion of the thin plate portion 371 toward the front side, an upper front projecting portion 3376b integrally formed with the upper projecting portion 376, and an upper horizontal projecting portion 3376c formed integrally with the upper projecting portion 376.

The rod-shaped guide portion 3371c has an upper surface that is flush with the upper surface of the ball guide portion 371b, and is formed in a pair of left and right sides on the left and right sides of the center of the ball flowing down the third flow path forming portion 336. through the front side surface of the third flow path forming portion 336 so as to be accommodated in the back side of the lower surface of the third flow path forming portion 336 .

That is, when the slide displacement member 3370 is arranged at the front side position, the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c is arranged on the back side of the lower surface of the third flow path forming portion 336 so that it does not contact the ball, and the slide displacement member 3370 is positioned at the rear side, the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c is arranged across the front-rear direction gap between the front side surface of the discharge hole 337 and the ball guide portion 371b.

By configuring the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c in this way, when the slide displacement member 3370 is arranged at the rear side position, the ball can be supported by the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c on the lower left and right sides of the ball, and the ball can be slid and displaced. It can span to member 3370 .

As a result, when the slide displacement member 3370 is arranged at the rear side position, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the ball flows down toward the normal detection sensor SE12. That is, the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c can easily avoid misguiding the falling ball.

In addition, since the spheres passing through the third flow passage forming portion 336 are placed on the top surface of the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c formed flush with the top surface of the sphere guide portion 371b, the sphere and the sphere guide portion 371b can be avoided from colliding head-on in the longitudinal direction. That is, due to the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c, the ball collides head-on with the ball guide portion 371b and the ball flows backward, or the ball is caught between the front side surface of the ball guide portion 371b and the front side surface of the discharge hole 337. Therefore, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the operation becomes defective.

The upper front protruding portion 3376b has the same shape as the front-rear long protruding portion 317 (see FIG. 18) described above in the first embodiment, and has the same relative position at the front position of the slide displacement member 370 in the first embodiment. This is a shaped portion integrally formed with the upper projecting portion 376 in a positional relationship of .

The upper lateral protrusion 3376c has the same shape as the left and right inner protrusions 318 (see FIG. 18) described above in the first embodiment, and has the same relative position at the front position of the slide displacement member 370 in the first embodiment. The shape portion is formed integrally with the upper front projecting portion 3376b in a positional relationship of .

As a result, the action of the upper front projecting portion 3376b and the upper lateral projecting portion 3376c on the abutting ball is the action on the ball flowing down near the upper projecting portion 376 regardless of the arrangement of the slide displacement member 3370. occur.

In other words, unlike the case where the front-rear elongated projecting portion 317 and the left-right inner projecting portion 318 (see FIG. 18) are fixedly arranged, when the slide displacement member 3370 is arranged at the rear side position, the projecting portion 3370 does not move. It is possible to eliminate the action of the portions 3376b and 3376c to force the ball that has reached the front position of the upper projecting portion 376 toward the normal detection sensor SE12 side.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 and 111. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side was described. By moving to the rear side of SE11, the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side in the front-rear direction. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

Figure 110 (a) and Figure 110 (b) schematically shows the configuration of the downstream side of the third flow path configuration portion 336 in the fourth embodiment, the third flow path configuration portion 336, probability variation detection sensor SE11, normal detection FIG. 13 is a schematic top view of the sensor SE12 and a slide displacement member 4370;

FIG. 111(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the third flow path forming portion 336, the variable probability detection sensor SE11, the normal detection sensor SE12 and the slide displacement member 4370 along the CXIa-CXIa line in FIG. 110(a), and FIG. b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the third flow path forming portion 336, the variable probability detection sensor SE11, the normal detection sensor SE12 and the slide displacement member 4370 along the line CXIb-CXIb of FIG. 110(b). In FIG. 111(b), illustration of the upper contact portion 4373 is omitted for ease of understanding.

The slide displacement member 4370 is configured to block one of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 so that the ball cannot pass through, and to open the other to allow the ball to pass, above the probability variation detection sensor SE11 It has a front slide member 4371 that slides left and right, and a rear slide member 4375 that slides left and right above the normal detection sensor SE12.

The front side slide member 4371 and the rear side slide member 4375 are slidably displaced in left and right directions opposite to each other by the driving force of the solenoid. 110(a) and 111(a) to the rear open state shown in FIGS. 110(b) and 111(b), the front slide member 4371 moves left and the rear slide member 4375 is configured to slide rightward.

The front side slide member 4371 includes a slide plate 4372 arranged so as to cover the probability variation detection sensor SE11, and an upper contact portion 4373 formed in a shape similar to the shape of the left and right inner projecting portions 318 (see FIG. 17). , and are integrally formed by a connecting portion (not shown). That is, in FIG. 110, the slide plate 4372 and the upper contact portion 4373 are integrally slidably displaced.

The upper side surface 4372a of the slide plate 4372 is flush with the lower bottom surface 336a of the third flow path forming portion 336, and is formed as an inclined plane with the same inclination in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 111(b)). Therefore, in the rear open state (see FIG. 111(b)), the inclination of the upper side surface 4372a allows the ball rolling on the upper side surface 4372a to flow toward the normal detection sensor SE12. On the other hand, in the front open state (see FIG. 111(a)), the ball that has passed through the lower bottom surface 336a contacts the upper contact portion 4373 and receives a load, so that it flows downward (downward to the right).

Therefore, when the front side slide member 4371 changes between the front open state and the rear open state, the front side slide member 4371 is configured to come into contact with the ball at different points and guide (flow) the ball in different directions. be done.

The rear-side slide member 4375 includes a slide plate 4376 arranged to cover the upper portion of the normal detection sensor SE12, and an upper contact portion 4377 formed in a shape similar to the shape of the longitudinally long projecting portion 317 (see FIG. 17). and are integrally formed by a connecting portion (not shown). That is, in FIG. 110, the slide plate 4376 and the upper contact portion 4377 are integrally slidably displaced.

An upper side surface 4376a of the slide plate 4376 is a slanted plane that is reversed from the upper side surface 4372a (see FIG. 111(a)). Therefore, in the front open state (see FIG. 111(a)), the inclination of the upper side surface 4376a allows the ball arranged on the upper side surface 4376a to flow toward the variable probability detection sensor SE11 side. On the other hand, in the rear open state (see FIG. 111(b)), the ball that has passed through the lower bottom surface 336a and the upper side surface 6372a contacts the upper contact portion 4377 and receives a load, thereby flowing downward.

Therefore, when the rear slide member 4375 changes between the front open state and the rear open state, the rear slide member 4375 contacts the ball at different points, and the state changes so as to guide (flow) the ball in different directions. Configured.

By configuring in this way, the ball after passing backward above the probability variation detection sensor SE11 returns to the upper direction of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 again and passes the probability variation detection sensor SE11. It is possible to improve the ability to pay attention to the sphere that has passed through the flow path forming portion 336 .

As a mode to return above the variable probability detection sensor SE11 again, for example, it is assumed that the solenoid is driven so that the state changes from the rear open state to the front open state at the timing when the ball passes backward through the upper side surface 4372a. be. In this case, the ball usually rides on the upper side surface 4376a before passing through the detection sensor SE12, flows backward along the inclination of the upper side surface 4376a, and returns to the probability variation detection sensor SE11 side.

In this way, when the timing at which the ball passes through the third flow passage forming portion 336 and the driving timing of the slide displacement member 4370 match, the ball is configured to return to the variable probability detection sensor SE11 side. Therefore, compared to the gaming machine configured so that the ball that has passed above the probability variation detection sensor SE11 to the downstream side does not pass the probability variation detection sensor SE11, after passing through the third flow path configuration portion 336 It is possible to improve attention to the driving timing of the sphere and the slide displacement member 4370 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 112, a fifth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the spherical flow path is shared up to the third flow path forming part 336, and the branch point BP1 is arranged behind the third flow path forming part 336. In the sorting device 5300 of this embodiment, the slide displacement member 5370 is arranged upstream of the third flow path forming part 336, and the flow path of the spheres changes on the upstream side of the third flow path forming part 336. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

112(a) and 112(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the sorting device 5300 in the fifth embodiment taken along line XVII-XVII in FIG. In FIG. 112(a), the slide displacement member 5370 is arranged at the right position, and the ball is guided to the probability variation detection sensor SE11 by the slide displacement member 5370. In FIG. 112(b), the slide displacement member 5370 is A state in which the ball is normally guided to the detection sensor SE12 by the slide displacement member 5370 is illustrated.

In addition, in FIGS. 112(a) and 112(b), the guiding path of the ball after flowing through the first flow path forming portion 334 is illustrated by imaginary lines. Thus, the guide path of the sphere is changed by disposing the slide displacement member 5370 .

The slide displacement member 5370 is configured to be slidable in the left-right direction by an electromagnetic solenoid (not shown). and an upper projecting portion 5376 .

The thin plate portion 5371 is formed so thin that a ball that has passed through the first flow path forming portion 334 can ride on it. The left side surface 5376a of the upper protruding portion 5376 facing the sphere is formed in an arc shape with a concave portion on the flow path side, so that the flowing sphere can smoothly flow backward.

According to this embodiment, like the sorting device 5300, the forward and backward width of the ball flowing down path is formed long, and the visibility of the ball flowing down the front side is higher than that of the ball flowing down the rear side. Since the slide displacement member 5370 is arranged on the front side where the visibility of the ball is high while adopting the configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the player to determine the flow-down mode (flow-down path) of the ball.

In this embodiment, when the slide displacement member 5370 is arranged on the right side, the path entrance to the normal detection sensor SE11 is not particularly blocked, and the structure is such that a ball can enter. On the other hand, the ball that normally flows down the upstream side of the path entrance to the detection sensor SE11 flows toward the front side while flowing down the first flow path forming portion 334 .

Therefore, immediately after passing through the first flow passage forming portion 334, the sphere is unlikely to move in the opposite direction to the rear, so that the sphere is unlikely to enter the path entrance to the normal detection sensor SE11. Therefore, in the present embodiment, provision of a member for closing the path entrance to the normal detection sensor SE11 is intentionally omitted, thereby reducing member costs.

Next, with reference to FIG. 113, a sixth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the left and right flow paths are separated by the partition plate portion 338 and the flow paths do not merge has been described. 336 is connected to a confluence channel 6341 extending rightward from the downstream side of the left curved protrusion 334b. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 113 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 6300 in the sixth embodiment taken along line XVII-XVII in FIG. As shown in FIG. 113, the flow path on the right side of the sorting device 6300 is formed of flow path forming portions 334 to 336 as in the first embodiment.

On the other hand, the flow path on the left side of the sorting device 6300 is formed by a confluence flow path 6341 that extends linearly to the right from a point where a space for one ball is left on the front side of the curved protrusion 334b. The channel 6341 is connected to the third channel forming portion 336 as the right channel. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the balls flowing down the right channel and the balls flowing down the left channel join at the connection point JP1 where the channels are connected, so the balls may collide with each other.

The confluence channel 6341 has a raised floor portion 6342 at the lower end of the channel. The raised floor portion 6342 is formed as a floor surface positioned higher than the lower bottom surface 336 a of the third flow path forming portion 336 . As a result, it is possible to make a difference in height position between the ball flowing into the connection point JP1 from the confluence channel 6341 and the ball flowing down the right channel and down the third channel forming part 336. It is possible to reduce the degree of backflow that occurs when they collide with each other.

Due to the contact between the spheres at the connection point JP1, the flow down of the spheres can be delayed as compared with the case where the contact between the spheres does not occur. As a result, the time required for the ball passing through the ball passage hole 163b (see FIG. 16) to reach the branch point BP1 can be changed depending on whether the balls contact each other or not.

The operation timing of the slide displacement member 370 is set by a constant operation from the opening timing of the opening/closing plate 65b regardless of the ball entry state. It is possible that the sphere can reach the bifurcation point BP1 when 370 is placed differently.

The premise of the contact between the spheres is that the spheres merge and that there is a sphere flowing down the confluence channel 6341 . If the player wants to cause the balls to come into contact with each other, the player can play the game by adjusting the launch intensity so that the balls enter the pair of left and right ball passing holes 163b (see FIG. 74). If it is desired to avoid the contact with the ball, the shooting intensity should be adjusted so that the ball enters only the ball passage hole 163b on one side (right side).

According to the present embodiment, the adjustment of the firing intensity of the ball is related to the presence or absence of contact of the ball at the connection point JP1, and is related to the state of the slide displacement member 370 at the timing when the ball reaches the branch point BP1. , directly affect the profits of the players. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's motivation to adjust the ball launch strength.

Also, according to this embodiment, the contact at the connection point JP1 is closely related to the formation of a sphere continuation. That is, the two spheres that are in contact at the connection point JP1 can flow down to the branch point BP1 while being arranged close to each other.

Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 and 115. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the flow path to the branch point BP1 is only the flow path configured by the flow path configuration units 334 to 336 has been described. It is configured such that the ball can flow down to the branch point BP1 without passing through the flow path forming part 334 and the second flow path forming part 335 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

114 is a front perspective view of a sorting device 7300 according to the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 115 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 7300 taken along line CXV-CXV of FIG. As shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, the sorting device 7300 has a ball passing hole 163b as a path through which a ball entered into the specific winning hole 65a can pass, and a ball opening formed at a substantially central position on the left and right. A passage hole 7163b is provided.

The ball passage hole 7163b is similar to the detection sensor SE1 used to detect the entry of balls into the variable winning device 65 and to detect the timing of changing the state of the opening/closing plate 65b to the closed state by determining the number of entry of a specified number of balls. is formed as a sphere passage aperture of the detection sensor SE71 having the function of .

On the downstream side of the ball passage hole 7163b, a cylindrical flow path 7164 is provided that extends in a downwardly inclined direction rearward and has a rectangular cylindrical cross section. Cylindrical channel 7164 is formed sufficiently large so that the ball can flow down inside, and its end extends up to the upper front side of branch point BP1. That is, the ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 7163b is configured to flow down inside the tubular flow path 7164 and reach the branch point BP1.

The length of time required for the sphere to pass through the cylindrical channel 7164 is set to be shorter than the length of time required for the sphere to pass through the channel forming portions 334 to 336. It is set to be equal to the length of time it takes for a sphere to pass through 334 .

Therefore, for example, when the sorting device 7300 is driven and controlled in the above-described operation pattern Y (see FIG. 25), as described above, it passes through the ball passage hole 163b and passes through the flow path forming portions 334 to 336. The ball can reach the branch point BP1 only after the slide displacement member 370 returns to the front position. is placed in the back position, the branch point BP1 may be reached.

In particular, the ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 7163b immediately after the opening/closing plate 65b has changed to the open state easily reaches the branch point BP1 while the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the rear side position.

That is, even if the drive control pattern of the slide displacement member 370 is the same, the probability variation is detected depending on whether the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a passes through the ball passing hole 163b or passes through the ball passing hole 7163b. Sensor SE11 can be configured to change whether a ball passes or not. As a result, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the flow of the ball inside the specific winning hole 65a.

As shown in FIG. 114, when viewed from a general direction during a game, the cylindrical flow path 7164 reduces the visibility of the branch point BP1, the slide displacement member 370, and the flow path forming portions 334 to 336. The arrangement of the cylindrical flow path 7164 is devised so as to avoid this.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, while maintaining high visibility of the branch point BP1, the number of flow paths for guiding the ball to the branch point BP1 is increased. It is possible to increase the types of required length of time and improve the player's attention to the specific winning hole 65a.

Next, referring to FIG. 116, an eighth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the linear portion 616a and the curved portion 616b of the guide long hole 616 of the first operation unit 600 are connected at one point, and at the connecting position, the path of the axis O1 is bent and the displacement direction of the axis O1 is changed. is switched, but in the first operation unit 8600 of the eighth embodiment, the guide elongated holes 8616 are connected at a plurality of points (two points), and the path of the axis line O1 is bent at the connecting positions to change the direction of displacement. The displacement direction of O1 is switched. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 116 is a schematic front view showing the relationship between the guide long hole 8616 and the rotating member 620 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 116, the guide slot 8616 bends left and right twice below the linear portion 616a.

That is, the guide elongated hole 8616 includes a linear portion 616a, a first curved portion 8616b connected to the lower end portion of the linear portion 616a and formed on a curve (substantially circular arc shape), and the first curved portion 8616b. A second curved portion 8616c is connected to the lower end portion of the first curved portion 8616b and is formed on a curved line (substantially arcuate shape) in which the center of the curvature radius is left-right reversed to that of the first curved portion 8616b.

In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, when the axis O1 is located at the lower end position of the linear portion 616a, that is, at the connecting portion between the linear portion 616a and the first curved portion 8616b, the axis O1 Since the displacement direction is switched, the displacement speed of the axis O1 can be reduced (dropped).

In addition, when the axis O1 is arranged at the lower end position of the first curved portion 8616b, that is, at the connecting portion between the first curved portion 8616b and the second curved portion 8616c, the displacement direction of the axis O1 is switched. , the displacement speed of the axis O1 can be reduced (dropped).

In this way, since it is possible to configure a plurality of midway positions where it is easy to stop the axis O1, the axis O1 is stopped midway to stop the second decoration rotary member 660 (see FIG. 43) that is stopped midway. The types (variations) of postures can be increased.

Next, with reference to FIG. 117, a ninth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the guide slot 616 of the first operation unit 600 has a single path. A first path composed of a curved portion 616a and a curved portion 616b and a second path connected to the right side of the first path are provided. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 117 is a schematic front view showing the relationship between the guide long hole 9616 and the rotating member 620 in the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 117, the guide slot 9616 has a linear portion 616a and a curved portion 616b in the same manner as the guide slot 616 of the first embodiment. An angle maintaining portion 9616c that extends obliquely to the right from the connection point, and a connecting portion 9616d that extends from the right end of the angle maintaining portion 9616c toward the curved portion 616b and is connected to a midway position of the curved portion 616b. .

The angle maintaining portion 9616c rotates the rotating member 620 to the tilting side from the state in which the axis O1 is located at the connection point between the linear portion 616a and the curved portion 616b (see FIGS. 43 and 44). It is formed in the same direction as the displacement trajectory of the axis O1 when it is assumed that the axis O1 is displaced while the angle θ is maintained.

In this way, the angle θ is maintained while the axis O1 is displaced in the angle maintaining portion 9616c. The facing posture (see FIG. 43) is maintained.

In other words, when the axis O1 displaces the angle maintaining portion 9616c when the rotating member 620 rotates, the box-shaped member 661 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the rotating member 620 in the tilting direction. As a rotation mode, it is possible to maintain a posture in which the third rendering surface 661c faces the front over the formation length (formation angle width) of the angle maintaining portion 9616c.

When the axis O1 displaces the connecting portion 9616d, the change in the angle θ accompanying the rotation of the rotating member 620 is allowed, so the box-shaped member 661 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the rotating member 620. .

On the other hand, even when the tilt angle of rotating member 620 is the same, the magnitude of angle θ when axis O1 is arranged in curved portion 616b and the angle when axis O1 is arranged in connecting portion 9616d are Since the magnitude of θ is different, by making the left and right paths along which the axis O1 is displaced different, the middle position of the box-shaped member 661 interlocking with the rotation of the rotating member 620 can be varied.

Also, regardless of whether the path along which the axis O1 is displaced is left or right, the angle θ when the axis O1 is disposed at the upper end of the displaceable range and the angle θ when disposed at the lower end are of one type. The attitude of the box-shaped member 661 when O1 is arranged at the upper end or lower end of the displaceable range can be maintained (see FIGS. 40 and 45).

In other words, in the present embodiment, the supported member 640 and the second ornamental rotating member 660 (Fig. 43 and FIG. 44), the displacement speed of the supported member 640 related to the displacement speed of the axis O1, and the rotation speed of the box-shaped member 661 of the second decorative rotary member 660 can be generated in a plurality of types. can.

The guide elongated hole 9616 is merely composed of a plurality of paths, and does not have a mechanism for limiting the paths over which the axis O1 can be displaced. As a result, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of malfunction due to a defect in the mechanism that restricts the path, and to reduce the product cost by simplifying the configuration.

On the other hand, the branching of the displacement path of axis O1 can be controlled by the direction of the load applied to axis O1 via rotating member 620 . This will be explained below. First, the case where the rotating member 620 is rotated in the tilting direction will be described.

First, when the axis O1 is displaced along the left path (the linear portion 616a and the curved portion 616b), the drive motor 631 (see FIG. 40) is operated so that the rotational displacement of the rotational member 620 does not stop halfway. Drive control.

In this case, the axis O1 enters the curved portion 616b due to the inertia of displacement along the extending direction (vertical direction) of the linear portion 616a, and is displaced to the lower end position of the guide long hole 9616 as it is.

Second, when the axis O1 is displaced along the path on the right side (the angle maintaining portion 9616c and the connecting portion 9616d), the turning member 620 is displaced at the stage where the axis O1 is arranged at the connection point between the linear portion 616a and the curved portion 616b. is driven and controlled to stop or decelerate halfway, and then the drive motor 631 is driven and controlled again in the same direction.

In this case, the inertia of the displacement along the direction (vertical direction) in which the linear portion 616a extends decreases, so the selection of whether the axis O1 displaces the left path or the right path results in less displacement resistance. side is chosen.

Here, when the axis O1 enters the angle maintaining portion 9616c, the magnitude of the angle θ is maintained. Also, there is no need to transmit the driving force to the members on the downstream side of the transmission of the driving force. That is, since the displacement resistance is reduced by that amount, the axis O1 can be moved toward the angle maintaining portion 9616b.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the drive control of the tilting direction of the rotating member 620, control is performed so as to select the path along which the axis O1 is displaced depending on whether the drive motor 631 is controlled to be stopped halfway or not. be able to.

In addition, when the rotating member 620 is displaced in the rising direction, the axis O1 receives a load from the rotating member 620 in an obliquely upper right direction. , the axis O1 can be displaced upward along the curved portion 616b.

In this embodiment, the connection point between the connecting portion 9616d and the curved portion 616b is set in the middle of the curved portion 616b. It is formed as an upper left inclined surface arranged on the upper right side of the arranged axis O1.

Therefore, when the axis O1 is located at the lower end position of the curved portion 616b, it is possible to prevent the axis O1 from being displaced upward (bouncing back) along the circle centered on the circular through hole 624.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the ball once flows down toward the near side by the sorting device 300 and then flows down backward, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the time required for the ball to flow down may be ensured by bending the path a plurality of times or forming a deceleration convex portion that decelerates the ball, without forming a portion that flows down toward the near side.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the lower bottom surface of the front design member 141 of the second prize winning opening 140 has a curved surface shape has been described. Any shape is acceptable as long as it can be used. For example, it may be configured in an inclined plane shape, or may be formed so that a large number of fine projections protrude from the plane so as to impart an irregular load to the colliding ball.

In the above-described first embodiment, when the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a flows down the sorting device 300, the case where it flows down exclusively through the flow path forming parts 334 to 336 in order has been described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. not a thing For example, an opening penetrating downward may be formed in the left-right central portion of the specific winning opening 65a, and the balls may be formed so as to directly flow into the third flow passage forming portion 336 through this opening.

For example, when balls enter one by one, the balls do not pass through the opening, but when a plurality of balls enter the specific winning hole 65a together, the balls can pass through the opening. Also good. In this case, the time required for the ball to reach the slide displacement member 370 can be changed depending on whether the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a passes through the opening or does not pass through the opening.

In the first embodiment described above, the detection sensors SE11 and SE12 are arranged behind the specific prize winning opening 65a, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the detection sensors SE<b>11 and SE<b>12 may be arranged directly below the downstream end of the second flow path forming part 335 . Moreover, in this case, the order of the first flow path forming part 334 and the second flow path forming part 335 may be reversed. That is, when the ball enters the detection sensors SE11 and SE12, the branch to each of the detection sensors SE11 and SE12 may occur immediately after the ball flows down in the horizontal direction, or immediately after the ball flows down in the front-rear direction (flows toward the front side). may be branched to the respective detection sensors SE11 and SE12.

In the above-described first embodiment, as features of the sorting device 300 alone, the channel directions and inclinations of the channel forming portions 334 to 336 have been described, but the features are not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the pachinko machine 10 is installed on an island, the direction and inclination of the flow path may be designed in consideration of the "sleep" that is performed on a daily basis.

Laying down means that the pachinko machine 10 is installed not in a vertical posture but in a state of being inclined in the front-rear direction. Usually, a pachinko machine is installed in a posture (nekase) lying backward about 1 degree (4/5 rins). Compared to the description of the above sorting device 300 alone (state without rest), considering the installation angle of about 1 degree, the first flow path forming part 334 and the second flow path having an inclination in the front-back direction The meaning of the inclination of the component 336 changes.

That is, in the sorting device 300 alone, as described above, the first flow path forming part 334 is tilted downward from the horizontal by 7 degrees to the front side, and the third flow path forming part 336 is tilted to the rear side by 5 degrees from the horizontal. It is designed to be inclined, but considering the installation angle together, the first flow path forming part 334 and the third flow path forming part 336 similarly form a flow path inclined downward by 6 degrees. . On the other hand, since the second flow passage forming portion 335 is inclined in the left-right direction, it is less likely to be affected by the installation angle, and can be regarded as having an inclination of about 5 degrees as described above.

In this case, the acceleration of the ball in the first flow path forming part 334 and the third flow path forming part 336 is the same for the balls flowing down in the sorting device 300, and the acceleration is slightly increased in the second flow path forming part 335. become smaller. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the flow speed of the ball in the horizontal direction, so that the player can easily see the ball flowing down the second flow path forming part 335 . In addition, since the first flow path forming part 334 is still shorter than the third flow path forming part 336, the first flow path forming part 334 is shorter than the third flow path forming part 336. can pass between

In this way, the flow of the balls inside the sorting device 300 is affected by the aging of the pachinko machine 10 because it has a flow path in the front-rear direction. Therefore, if the angle of inclination of each of the passage forming portions 334 and 336 is made smaller than the angle of rest (approximately 1 degree), the flow direction of the spheres in the passage forming portions 334 and 336 will change depending on the quality of the rest (angle setting). It is necessary to set the angle of inclination larger than the angle of the repositioning.

In addition, in the structure in which the balls flow down inside the sorting device 300 has a flow path in the front-rear direction, and the flow path is visible, a slight difference in the flow velocity of the balls flowing down the flow path can cause There is a possibility that the degree of laziness of the pachinko machine 10 can be grasped. If you dare to grasp the degree of laziness, the flow path of the sorting device 300 should be configured so that it is easy to visually recognize it.

On the other hand, in the above-described first embodiment, the fixed member 161 and the front design member are provided around the front side of each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 so that the degree of "sleep" cannot be grasped from a slight difference in the flow speed of the ball. 162 are arranged to surround, the variable winning device 65 is arranged on the upper side, and the light diffusion processing surface 340 is arranged on the lower side so as to deteriorate the visibility.

In this way, the visibility of the ball flowing down each of the flow passage forming portions 334 to 336 is made worse except for the normal player's line of sight (range of 0 degrees to about 30 degrees when viewed from the front). As a result, it is possible to avoid grasping the degree of "sleep" of the pachinko machine 10 by comparing the flow velocities of the balls flowing down the respective flow path forming portions 334 to 336 .

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the inclination of the first flow path forming portion 334 is greater than the inclination of the third flow path forming portion 336 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, this inclination relationship may be reversed, or the same inclination may be used.

Further, although each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 has been described as forming a spiral flow path by bending a linear flow path, the configuration is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a meandering channel shape or a stepwise curved channel shape may be used.

Further, although the flow paths are configured to be bent at right angles at the connection points of the respective flow path forming portions 334 to 336, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flow path may be bent at an acute angle or an obtuse angle at the connection point. Further, Krun may be employed as each of the flow passage forming portions 334 to 336 .

In the above-described first embodiment, a case was described in which the time required for the sphere to pass through the third flow path forming portion 336 was designed to be 0.3 seconds, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be designed so that the time required to pass through the third flow path forming portion 336 is 1 second (0.6 seconds or longer). As a result, even if the ball enters the sorting device 300 while maintaining the firing interval (0.6 seconds), the ball on the upstream side flowing down the third flow path forming part 336 is , the third flow passage forming portion 336 can be made to function as a blindfold for the sphere flowing down.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the passage length of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 is ensured to ensure the flow time of the sphere, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, long ridges are formed in a direction intersecting the flowing direction of the game ball from both inner walls of the route to the slide displacement member 370, and protrude alternately, and the ridges are made to collide with the game ball. It may be configured to decelerate the ball by As a result, it is possible to secure the flow-down time of the ball without increasing the path length.

The deceleration ridges may be arranged uniformly over the entire range of the path to the slide displacement member 370, or may be arranged unevenly. For example, the first flow path forming part 334 and the second flow path forming part 335 are not formed with ridges, and the ridges are formed only in the third flow path forming part 336, so that the third flow path forming part 336 It can be configured so that the spheres reach the third flow passage forming portion 336 gently while the spheres reach the flow passage 336 quickly.

In addition, the projecting direction of the ridges may be a direction in which the ridges are alternately projected from the left and right along the downward flow path of the balls, or they may be projected upward from the bottom at predetermined intervals. Any direction is fine.

In the case of projecting from the left and right direction, the load applied to the ball from the ridge has a component in the left and right direction. For example, at the position closest to the slide displacement member 370, by protruding from the left and right outer wall portions to the left and right inner sides, the load from the protrusion normally goes to the partition plate portion 338 side instead of toward the detection sensor SE12 side. By doing so, it is possible to easily avoid the erroneous guidance of the ball to the normal detection sensor SE12.

In the case of projecting upward from the bottom side, the protrusion itself may function as a blindfold for the slide displacement member 370, so it is preferable to design the formation height and formation position in consideration of the player's line of sight. .

In addition, you may form a protrusion so that it can be projected and retracted. In this case, it is possible to prevent the ball from flowing down in the extended state, and to resume the downward flow of the ball in the retracted state.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which blindfold is performed by a ball flowing down the front side of the slide displacement member 370, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a movable decorative member may be arranged in front of the sorting device 300, and the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 may be blinded by the decorative member. The cosmetic member may be driven or may operate with the weight of a sphere.

Also, when blindfolded by a ball, it is not limited to the case where the ball is arranged on the front side. For example, when a mirror is arranged on the back side of the slide displacement member 370 and the state of the slide displacement member 370 is visually recognized using the reflection of the mirror, a ball is arranged between the slide displacement member 370 and the mirror. If so, a blindfold function can occur.

In the first embodiment, the case where the ball reaching the slide displacement member 370 is blindfolded has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the first winning hole 64 may be arranged behind the game area like the detection sensors SE11 and SE12, and the first winning hole 64 may be blinded, or the other general winning holes 63 may be blinded. Anything is fine.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the flow passage forming portions 334 to 336 are linear and formed of flow passages capable of guiding spheres one by one has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed as a meandering flow path, or may be formed as a flow path in which a plurality of branches occur. may be configured.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the blinding effect is produced by the ball directed toward the slide displacement member 370 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the ejection path for ejecting balls that have entered the other winning openings 63, 64, 65, 140 is arranged on the front side of the slide displacement member 370 (for example, arranged so as to intersect on the front side), The slide displacement member 370 may be blinded by the ejection path and the balls arranged in the ejection path.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a flows exclusively through the first flow path forming part 334 to the second flow path forming part 335 side (front side) has been described. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a seesaw-shaped distribution mechanism for distributing balls is provided downstream of the specific winning port 65a, and the distribution mechanism selects the balls flowing toward the second flow path forming portion 335, The sphere may flow toward the second flow passage forming portion 335 side.

The distribution mechanism may be displaced by the ball's own weight, or may be driven by a driving device to perform a constant movement from the opening and closing of the opening/closing plate 65b, or may be driven in a predetermined pattern from the time the pachinko machine is powered on. You can control it like this.

In the case of drive control, for example, when the type of incoming ball changes, control may be performed so that the ball flows toward the second flow path forming part 335 side. For example, when the number of balls entering the specific winning hole 65a exceeds the count (10 balls/round) (excessive winning), the balls are configured to flow to the second flow passage forming part 335 side. can be In this case, the number of balls flowing down the second flow path forming part 335 side can be compared with the number of excess prize balls paid out, and the player can quickly grasp the additional profit to be obtained. In this case, the slide displacement member 370 and its downstream configuration may be maintained or omitted.

Further, for example, in a configuration in which a ball that enters the first winning port 64 flows down the sorting device 300, if the number of reserved special symbols 1 is 4 (full tank) and a ball enters, The ball may be configured to flow toward the second flow passage forming portion 335 side. In this case, the player can be made to notice that the reserved number of special symbols 1 is full by visually recognizing the balls flowing on the side of the second flow passage forming part 335 . In this case, the slide displacement member 370 and its downstream configuration may be maintained or omitted.

In the case of displacing by the ball's own weight, the predetermined movement may be repeated each time the ball reaches, or different movements may be performed depending on the number of balls that reach. For example, when one ball enters the specific winning hole 65a, it does not flow to the second flow path forming part 335 side, and when two or more balls enter the specific winning hole 65a together, The balls may flow toward the second flow passage forming portion 335 side. Also, the opposite is possible.

Further, these operation modes may be the same downstream of the pair of detection sensors SE1 arranged on the left and right sides of the specific winning hole 65a, or may be configured to be different on the left and right sides.

Here, if the ball flows down from the specific winning hole 65a to the slide displacement member 370 for a long time, the game may be delayed due to the long ball discharge time. Therefore, for example, using the above-described distribution mechanism, the number of balls entered into the specific winning opening 65a is made to flow down to the second flow path forming part 335 side, and the balls after that are distributed to the second It may be configured to discharge without passing through the flow path forming portion 335 . As a result, it is not necessary to wait for the counted number of balls to flow down the flow passage forming portions 334 to 336, so the length between rounds can be set short.

In the above-described first embodiment, the sorting device 300 is arranged under the third symbol display device 81, and the case where the ball is flowed to the near side near the lower end of the game area has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. isn't it. For example, the specific winning opening 65a is arranged above the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81, and the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 of the sorting device 300 are arranged close to the third symbol display device 81 or viewed from the front It may be configured to be arranged on the front side of the display area.

In this case, the line of sight for visually recognizing the ball flowing down the sorting device 300 can be the line of sight facing the display area side of the third symbol display device 81 . In this case, by associating the size of the profit that the player can obtain from the flow of the ball in the sorting device 300 with the contents of the notification on the liquid crystal display, the player can check the display to see whether the profit is large or small. You can easily see what you have earned.

Also, the case where the ball rolling on the inner rail 61 is visually recognized at a position shifted downward in a front view with respect to the ball rolling on the third flow path forming portion 336 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited. For example, the ball rolling on the inner rail 61 is arranged in such a positional relationship that the ball rolling on the third flow passage forming portion 336 is not vertically displaced when viewed from the front and can be visually recognized as overlapping. Also good. In this case, not only the ball entering the sorting device 300 but also the ball rolling on the inner rail 61 can function as a blindfold for the ball flowing down the third flow path forming portion 336 .

In the above-described first embodiment, as the operation pattern Y of the slide displacement member 370, the case where the slide displacement member 370 is switched to the front position at a time when the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a cannot reach has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. is not limited to For example, the slide displacement member 370 may be controlled to be switched to the front position 1.2 seconds after the opening timing of the opening/closing plate 65b.

In this case, the front flowing ball that has reached the slide displacement member 370 before 1.2 seconds has passed can be made to enter the through hole of the variable probability detection sensor SE11. On the other hand, the trailing ball that follows the leading trailing ball and reaches the slide displacement member 370 after 1.2 seconds passes normally enters the through hole of the detection sensor SE12.

Here, when the trailing ball has a positional relationship that functions as a blindfold for the trailing ball, the player sets the timing at which the flow of the trailing ball switches (downward) toward the variable probability detection sensor SE11 to the trailing ball. Hidden, it cannot be seen. In addition, since the chasing ball usually hits the detection sensor SE12, the player may assume that the ball has not hit the variable probability detection sensor SE11.

In this way, it is possible to make it look as if the ball has not entered the through-hole of the variable probability detection sensor SE11, so that the display effects of the time saving state and the variable probability state are made the same to maintain the player's expectation. In such a game machine, the presentation effect of the display presentation can be improved.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the ball that has collided with the left and right inner projecting portions 318 does not normally flow toward the detection sensor SE12 only with the load due to the collision, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flow path on the upstream side of the left and right inner protrusions 318 is configured so that the speed and rotation of the ball until it is guided to the left and right inner protrusions 318 can be configured with a plurality of types (for example, Kroon and widening the path width to increase the degree of freedom in the flow direction of the ball), and the load due to collision with the left and right inner protrusions 318 due to the difference in ball speed and rotation It may be constructed so as to be guided by the normal detection sensor SE12.

In the first embodiment, the case where the slide displacement member 370 and the projecting portions 317 to 319 are formed separately has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at least one of the projecting portions 317 to 319 may be formed integrally with the slide displacement member 370 . That is, at least one of the projecting portions 317 to 319 may project from the upper projecting portion 376 of the slide displacement member 370 .

In the first embodiment described above, the operation timing of the slide displacement member 370 is the operation pattern Y considering the possibility of being hidden by a ball, but the operation timing is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the control for causing the LED of the light emitting means 351 to emit light at the timing when it is hidden by the sphere may be interwoven.

In the first embodiment described above, the case where the displacement resistance of the axis O1 is changed by the shape of the long guide hole 616 has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the displacement resistance may be changed by changing the width and length of the guide long hole 616 to form an outer phase of the gap, or by using a magnetic force or the urging force of a coil spring to change the displacement resistance.

In the above-described first embodiment, the long guide hole 616 is formed in a shape that bends in the middle, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shape may be bent multiple times. In this case, it is possible to form a plurality of positions where the resistance to vertical displacement of the axis O1 increases.

Further, the shape of the guide slot 616 may be designed for the purpose of changing the amount of change in the angle θ during rotation of the rotating member 620 . For example, the long guide hole 616 may be formed in a shape capable of guiding the supported member 640 so as to partially form a range in which the angle θ can be maintained while the rotating member 620 is rotating.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the guide elongated hole 616 is fixed has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of guide long holes 616 are formed in which the axis O1 is movable, and the axis O1 is shifted by a predetermined switching means (for example, another driving device or a button-type switching device that is switched by coming into contact with the rotating member 620). The long guide hole 616 to be guided may be configured to be switchable, or the shape of the long guide hole 616 may be configured to be changeable.

In the above-described first embodiment, the second decorative rotating member 660 is arranged on the right side of the third pattern display device 81, and the first rendering surface 661a is directed diagonally forward and leftward. However, this is not necessarily the case. not a thing For example, it may be configured so that the effect surface is directed to the front and oblique right side in a state arranged on the left side of the third pattern display device 81, or when arranged on the lower side (upper side) of the third pattern display device 81 Alternatively, the performance surface may be directed diagonally forward (downward).

In the above-described first embodiment, the rotating member 620 is arranged on the proximal end side of the displacement, but it is not necessarily limited to this. good. On the other hand, the use of the rotating member 620 rather than the direct-acting member functions favorably to secure the rotation angles of the second decoration rotating member 660 and the projecting decoration portion 652b.

For example, when a member that slides laterally is fixed to the driving side of the supported member 640, the angle that affects the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 and the projecting decorative portion 652b is an angle above the horizontal (angle a1, etc.). is limited to On the other hand, if the rotating member 620 is used, not only the angle above the horizontal but also the angle below the horizontal (angle b1, etc.) can be used. Note that regardless of this favorable effect, a member that slides linearly may be connected to the driven side of the supported member 640 .

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the second decoration rotating member 660 is formed of a rectangular parallelepiped and has decorations on three sides that intersect at right angles has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the second ornamental rotating member 660 may be formed with a pentagonal cross section, and configured to be stop-controllable in a posture in which each side face faces forward.

In the first embodiment, the decorative fixing member 670 is a fixed decorative member, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a liquid crystal display device may be arranged. In this case, it is possible to easily switch between displays that are easy to see together with the first operation unit 600 and the second operation unit 700 .

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the rotation axis of the rotating member 620 and the second decoration rotating member 660 can intersect at right angles has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the rotation axis of the second decorative rotating member 660 may be configured with the longitudinal component as an axis (as an oblique rotation axis).

In the above-described first embodiment, the setting of the urging force of the coil spring CS2 has been described so that the second action unit 700 can be easily maintained in the intermediate effect state, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a magnet may be arranged near the long hole portion 723 of the rotating arm member 720 so as to generate an attractive force between the magnet and the magnet arranged on the right front plate member 710 . is likely to occur in the intermediate rendering state of the second motion unit 700 .

Further, for example, instead of forming the inclined portions 751 and 762 linearly, they may be formed in a curved shape such as a wave shape or a sawtooth shape. Further, when the coil spring CS2 is used, the biasing force is not limited to being generated only when the coil spring CS2 is compressed.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the posture of the shaft rotating member 785 is maintained by elastic deformation of the bevel tooth portion 783c and the bevel tooth member 785c until the attraction force of the magnet Mg is exceeded, but this is not necessarily the case. is not limited to For example, instead of the elastic deformation of the gear, a permissible value may be set for the sliding friction between the rotating shaft and the support cylinder that supports the shaft.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the covering member 787 rises from below and enters from the rear end of the game area to the front side has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, it may be possible to project forward by downward displacement. In this case, the upper edge of the center frame 86 may be passed forward from below, or the game area may be protruded forward from above the game area (for example, above the front frame 14).

In the above-described first embodiment, the cover member 787 rotates in the opposite direction, so that the sub-decorative surfaces 787a2 and 787b2 are not aligned and visually recognized, thereby reducing the distinguishability. However, this is not necessarily the case. isn't it. For example, instead of turning the secondary decorative surfaces 787a2 and 787b2 toward the front side, they may rotate while turning toward the left and right outer sides. Moreover, even if the rotation is in the same direction, the rotation angle may be shifted.

In the first embodiment described above, both the second operation unit 700 and the third operation unit 800 share the rotational angle of the link mechanism (intermediate arm member 783, intermediate arm member 850) to rotate the shaft rotating member 785 and the rotating member. 834 is configured to rotate (reverse), but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in a structure in which a metal rod 832 that guides a rotating member 834 is grooved in a unicursal pattern and a projecting piece protruding from the rotating member 834 is inserted into the groove, the rotating member may vary depending on the design of the groove. 834 rotation timing can be defined.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched from the state in which the detected part 844 is arranged in the detection sensor 813 is controlled to determine that the switching rotation operation is switched to the integral rotation operation. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, after reversing the driving direction of the drive motor 861 in a state where the detected portion 844 is not arranged in the detection sensor 813, by detecting that the detected portion 844 has entered the detection sensor 813, the switching rotation operation can be changed. It may be determined that the operation has switched to the integral rotation operation.

In the first embodiment, the configuration of the first decorative member 870 and the configuration of the second decorative member 880 are different in places, but the configuration is not necessarily limited to this. For example, magnets Mg2 may be arranged on both decorative members 870 and 880, or both decorative members 870 and 880 may be plated.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the switching rotation operation and the integral rotation operation are clearly separated by disposing the torque limiter 866 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an oil damper that produces viscous resistance may be provided. In the case of an oil damper, since resistance is always generated regardless of the switching of the operation mode, the torque limiter can reduce the displacement resistance in the rotational direction after the operation mode is switched to the integral rotation operation. This makes it easy to achieve high-speed rotation after switching to integral rotation operation.

In the first embodiment, the case where the light LD1 is reflected to the front side by the plated portion 871a has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the metal rod 832 may reflect light. During the integral rotation operation, the metal rod 832 is hidden by the linear motion member 833 by arranging the linear motion member 833 on the base end side of the metal rod 832 (the inner diameter side of the circle). When the 833 is arranged on the tip side (the outer diameter side of the circle) of the metal rod 832, it is possible to reflect the light LD1 by exposing the base end side (the inner diameter side of the circle) of the metal rod 832. is.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the bottom surface of the third flow path forming portion 336 is inclined downward to the left and right inner sides has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rolling surface (bottom surface) of the first flow path forming portion 334 may be configured to be non-inclined (parallel to the horizontal plane) along the left-right direction, or may be configured to be downwardly inclined in the left-right direction. can be The former can reduce the momentum of the ball toward the second flow path forming portion 335 compared to the latter.

Further, for example, the rolling surface (bottom surface) of the second flow passage forming portion 335 may be configured so as not to be inclined (parallel to the horizontal surface) along the front-rear direction, or may be inclined downward toward the rear. can be configured to The former can reduce the momentum of the ball toward the third flow path forming portion 336 compared to the latter.

Moreover, although the case where the rolling surface (bottom surface) of the third flow path forming portion 336 is inclined downward inward in the left-right direction has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rolling surface (bottom surface) of the third flow passage forming portion 336 may be configured to be non-inclined (parallel to the horizontal surface) along the left-right direction. In this case, since the ball is less urged toward the partition plate portion 338, the degree of damage to the partition plate portion 338 due to collision or friction with the ball can be kept low.

In the first embodiment described above, the optical axis of the outer light emitting means 351d is arranged outside the trajectory of the sphere passing through the branch point, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the optical axis of the outer light emitting means 351d may be configured so as to pass through the inside of the trajectory of the sphere passing through the branch point (located at a lower position). In this case, when the outer light emitting means 351d is turned on, the sphere passing through the branch point overlaps with the optical axis of the outer light emitting means 351d, so that the light can be reflected to the rear side. A state (dark state) in which the light does not reach the light diffusion processing surface 333b can be obtained.

That is, while the lighting of the outer light emitting means 351d continues, the sphere flows down at the branch point, and the light diffusion processed surface 333b (and the light diffusion processed surface illuminated by receiving the light diffused from the light diffusion processed surface 333b) 314c, 340) can be correlated. Since each of the light diffusion processed surfaces 314c, 333b, 340 has a larger area (projected area) in the player's line of sight than the ball, the player can easily grasp how the ball flows down at the branch point. .

In the above-described first embodiment, the timing for controlling the lighting of the light emitting means 351 is explained during the jackpot game, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light emission may be controlled based on the detection of winning in the winning openings 63, 64, 140, etc., or the light emission may be controlled due to the input operation of the frame button 22. Alternatively, light is emitted due to the occurrence of a prize exceeding a prescribed number (the number of prizes that define the end of the round game of the jackpot game, the maximum number of times of holding fluctuations based on the balls entering the prize openings 64 and 140) You may make it control.

In the first embodiment, if the operation of the slide displacement member 370 is defective, the assembly position of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 is defective, so the operation of the slide displacement member 370 is checked. Thus, the case where it is possible to determine whether the assembly of the intermediate member 330 and the lower member 380 is good or bad at the manufacturing stage has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, a detection sensor that detects the position of the slide displacement member 370 may be provided to detect the movement of the slide displacement member 370 during operation. In this case, if the positional relationship between the intermediate member 330 and the lower member 380 deviates due to repetitive operations or the influence of some external force, although it did not appear at the manufacturing stage, the occurrence of the deviation is detected by the operation of the slide displacement member 370. Defects can be determined.

In the first embodiment described above, the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370 for switching the flowing direction of the ball at the branch point BP1 is linear displacement in the front-rear direction, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be a rolling action (e.g., roulette type), or may be provided with a shape that makes the ball flow irregularly (e.g., a funnel-shaped croon) so that the ball can flow down in multiple directions. good.

In the above-described first embodiment, the sorting device 300 is adopted as a device for switching whether the ball passes through either the variable probability detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12, but it is not necessarily limited to this. do not have. For example, it may be adopted as a device for guiding the ball to the start winning opening (the winning opening 64, 140), may be adopted as a device for guiding the ball to the specific winning opening 65a, or may be adopted as another winning opening. Or you may employ|adopt as a device which guides a ball|ball to a prize-winning area.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the sorting device 300 is arranged at the lower corner of the game area has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the sorting device 300 may be arranged in the upper corner of the game area (for example, above the center frame 86), or may be arranged in the left and right corners (left and right outside of the left and right edges of the center frame 86). It may be placed on the central side of the game area. For example, when arranged in the upper corner of the game area, the line of sight of the player looking at the sorting device 300 is inclined upward with respect to the horizontal plane. The downstream sphere can be configured to hide the upstream sphere.

Further, the structure of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 may be configured to have a reverse inclination, and the variable probability detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 may be arranged near the fixed member 161.

In the first embodiment, the case where the shape of the window portion 162d is designed based on the shape of the flow passage forming portions 335 and 336 in a front view and the arrangement of the seal member 313 has been described, but the configuration is not necessarily limited to this. isn't it. For example, it may have a shape that allows (only) the slide displacement member 370 to be visually recognized from the player's line of sight (viewed obliquely downward), or may have a shape that reduces the visibility of the slide displacement member 370 . Further, the shape may be such that one of the front side position and the rear side position of the slide displacement member 370 is visible and the other side is invisible.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 are configured as a pair of left and right and are not merged, thereby reducing the number of balls entering one flow path (dispersing the entering balls). The slide displacement member 370 is adapted to switch between any paths of the balls passing through the respective flow paths, while producing an action that facilitates avoidance of ball clogging.

In this regard, the shape of the window portion 162d is such that only one of the left and right pairs of the slide displacement member 370 (eg, the ball guide portion 371b and the upper projecting portion 376) can be seen and the other cannot be seen. Any shape is fine. In this case, since the player can predict the path of the ball flowing down on the side that cannot be visually recognized, the interest of the player can be improved.

In the first embodiment, the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370 from the state where the ball can ride on the ball guide portion 371b is the backward direction (forward direction of the traveling direction of the ball flowing down the third flow path forming portion 336). A case has been described where the rotation of the ball in the forward rolling direction is suppressed by sliding, and the amount of rotation of the ball in the state immediately before it falls is suppressed, so that the player can see that the ball is temporarily stopped, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited to this.

For example, the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370 from the state in which the ball can ride on the ball guide portion 371b may be configured to be the forward direction (opposite direction to the traveling direction of the ball flowing down the third flow path forming portion 336).

That is, by displacing the ball guide portion 371b forward and allowing the ball guide portion 371b to enter the lower side of the third flow passage forming portion 336, the variable probability detection sensor SE11 can be opened. The upper projecting portion 376 is formed separately from the ball guide portion 371b, and is arranged so as to protrude toward the branch point BP1 when the ball can ride on the ball guide portion 371b. When the ball guide portion 371b is displaced to a state where the ball does not ride on the ball guide portion 371b, the upper protruding portion 376 is displaced in the front and rear reverse direction at the same timing as the displacement of the ball guide portion 371b, and the probability variation detection sensor SE11 is displaced. All you have to do is secure a path for the ball to.

In this case, the rotation of the ball in the forward rolling direction can be accelerated by the sliding movement of the ball guide portion 371b with the ball during sliding displacement. can be made to appear to the player as if it immediately fell (falls smoothly).

In the above-described first embodiment, the control of the rotating member 620 takes into consideration the inertial load applied to the rotating member 620 after the drive motor 631 is de-energized, and the extended portion 634b is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1. Although the control mode is such that the power supply to the drive motor 631 is cut off due to the fact, the control mode is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the detection sensor KS1 detects that the extended portion 634b is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1, the drive power of the drive motor 631 is reduced, and the drive motor 631 is rotated weakly for a short period of time and then stopped. Also good. As a result, the rotating member 620 can be reliably reached to the displacement end position (the position in the waiting state for the effect).

In the first embodiment described above, the grooves of the front upper inclined portions 714 and 751 and the receiving inclined portion 762 of the second operation unit 700 are formed of straight inclined grooves, but this is not necessarily the case. do not have. For example, by forming a groove having a partial curve that curves forward on the lower end side, the displacement of the effect device 780 is combined with the vertical slide displacement, the forward/backward slide displacement, and the forward/backward posture displacement. It can be a displacement mode.

As for the shape of the grooves of the front upper inclined portions 714 and 751 and the receiving inclined portion 762, various modes are exemplified. For example, it may have a doglegged shape (or inverted doglegged shape) when viewed in the left-right direction, or may have an S-curved shape.

In the above-described first embodiment, regarding the reversing operation of the second operation unit 700, by delaying the start timing of the reversing operation by magnetic force, the members (for example, the main body member 771 and the covering member 787, the drive motor 782 and the covering member, etc.) 787) has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, by setting the number of gears of the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotating member 785, a design method that avoids collision between the members may be employed.

In the above-described first embodiment, in the second operation unit 700, the case where the rotating tip of the rotating arm member 720 is arranged in the horizontal position corresponding to the horizontal center of the effect device 780 in the overhanging state as the upper end position will be described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by arranging the rotating tip of the rotating arm member 720 to the right of the left-right center of the effect device 780, the metal rod 702 that supports the left side of the elevator plate member 740 and the right side of the elevator plate member 740 are supported. It is possible to ensure a long support position interval with the rotating arm member 720 that is engaged. As a result, the lift plate member 740 can be stably supported.

In the third operation unit 800, the bulging portion 824a is configured as a portion that remains unchanged in shape and can be visually recognized by the player regardless of whether the decorative members 870 and 880 are in the individually combined state or the one combined state. Also, in the one united state, the bulging portion 824a is made visible to the player as a part (central portion), so that the bulging portion 824a, the first covering portion 875, and the second covering portion 885 are connected to each other. Although the case where the shape is designed so as to suppress discomfort has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the display device (segment display device or liquid crystal display device) may be arranged in such a positional relationship that the display section is arranged in front of the bulging portion 824a. In this case, unlike the case where the visibility of the swelling portion 824a is changed by changing the illumination mode (brightness or color) of the light from the inner light emitting portion 823a, the object visually recognized by the swelling portion 824a is displayed in the display mode of the display portion. can be changed by switching, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of production.

Further, for example, for either the first decorative member 870 or the second decorative member 880, the shape of the covering portions 875 and 885 may be changed so as to extend toward the center of the circular shape in the combined state. The extended portion may be configured to cover the bulging portion 824a. In this case, in either the individually united state or the one united state, the bulging portion 824a can be hidden so as not to be visually recognized by the player. The degree of restriction on the degree of freedom in designing the portion 885 can be reduced.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the plurality of decorative members 870 and 880 are magnetically attracted to the third operation unit 800 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the united state may be maintained by the load of the concave-convex engagement, or the united state may be maintained by the biasing force of the spring member.

In the first embodiment described above, the switching rotation operation is realized by setting the attraction force of the magnet Mg2 of the third operation unit 800 to be smaller than the resistance force of the torque limiter 866, but this is not necessarily the case. not a thing For example, by adopting an operation mode in which momentum is applied, even when the attraction force of the magnet Mg2 is greater than or equal to the resistance force of the torque limiter 866, the switching rotation operation can be realized.

As a mode of operation to give momentum, for example, rotation control in the opposite direction may be performed as a preparatory operation (preliminary operation). In this case, a reaction can be applied to the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880, and a load can be generated in the direction of throwing the intermediate arm member 850 radially outward from the arrangement in the combined state. This makes it easier to release the attraction due to the magnetic force.

In the above-described first embodiment, as a device for suppressing wobbling during the switching rotation operation of the third operation unit 800, the case where the decorative members 870 and 880 are configured to undergo radial displacement before the reversing operation has been described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the magnet Mg2 is arranged so that the line of action of the magnetic force can be drawn on the plane on which the metal bar 832 as the rotation axis of the reversing operation is arranged, the diameter of the decorative members 870 and 880 from the combined state is Even if the reversing motion occurs before the direction change, the magnetic force generated between the plurality (five) of the decorative members 870 and 880 is generated on the same plane, so the wobble that occurs in the third motion unit 800 during the switching rotation motion is suppressed. can do.

In the above-described first embodiment, the switching rotation operation is configured such that the decorative members 870 and 880 are reversed by 180 degrees, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, it may be configured so that they are reunited by a 120-degree reversal operation. In this case, before and after the switching rotation operation, while the sides of the decorative members 870 and 880 that are visible in a front view are the same, the viewing angles of the covering portions 875 and 885 are made different (for example, before the operation, the rightward direction is 60°). , and 60 degrees to the left after the action) can be executed.

Further, regarding the structure of the plurality of intermediate arm members 850, for example, by configuring the lengths to be uncommon, or by configuring the formation range and shape of the bevel tooth portions 854c to be uncommon, the switching rotation operation can be performed by 180 degrees. The decorative members 870 and 880 that reconfigure the combined state by reversing 120 degrees and the decorative members 870 and 880 that reconfigure the combined state by reversing 120 degrees may coexist. For example, among five decorative members 870 and 880, one decorative member 870 and 880 is configured to be flipped 120 degrees by switching rotation, and the other (four) decorative members 870 and 880 are configured to be switched and rotated. It may be configured to be inverted by 180 degrees.

The angle of the reversing operation in the switching rotation operation can be set arbitrarily. It can be set to 180 degrees or 120 degrees as described above, 0 degrees, 360 degrees, or any angle from 0 degrees to 360 degrees.

In the above-described first embodiment, a pair of left and right torque limiters 866 are arranged above the rotation axis of the outer rotating member 840 and in asymmetrical positions. However, this is not necessarily the case. For example, both of the pair of torque limiters 866 may be arranged on the left side, the right side, or the lower side of the outer rotating member 840, and the rotation of the outer rotating member 840 may be arranged. They may be arranged on opposite sides (opposite sides) with the axis interposed therebetween.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which a plurality of (five in the first embodiment) intermediate arm members 850 are configured to have a common shape, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by varying the shapes of the supported hole 854a in which the linear motion member 833 that slides along the metal rod 832 and the guide hole 854b are arranged, the start timing of the slide displacement along the metal rod 832 can be set by the linear motion member. A difference may be generated between 833 .

For example, by changing the design of the supported hole 854a so as to form it as an elongated hole or a hole with a large diameter, and mixing the intermediate arm member 850 with a correspondingly changed design of the guide hole 854b, the linear motion in the switching rotation operation can be achieved. A difference can be provided in the displacement start timing of the member 833 .

As a result, the decorative members 870 and 880, which are fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834 connected to the direct-acting member 833, are displaced radially outward from the united state at different timings. Therefore, the attracted portion between the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw Nj2 can be separated in the shear direction (radial direction).

In this case, the load for releasing the adsorption can be reduced, so the driving force required for the drive motor 862 can be reduced, and the arrangement of the third operation unit 800 can be stabilized.

It should be noted that it is not necessary to generate displacement in the shearing direction (radial direction) at the attracting portion between the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw Nj2 each time. For example, it is configured so that a displacement mode that causes a displacement in the shear direction occurs when the switching rotation operation is performed from the combined state (forward trip), but does not occur when the switching rotation operation leads to the combined state (return trip). can be

For example, the design of the intermediate arm member 850 can be changed from a combined state (a state in which the tip of rotation is arranged on the rotation shaft side of the inner rotary member 830) to a state in which the decorative members 870 and 880 are arranged at the outermost diameter position. The displacement mode in which the intermediate arm member 850 rotates and the displacement mode in which the intermediate arm portion i850 rotates from the state in which the decorative members 870 and 880 are arranged at the outermost diameter position to the combined state are different. , it is possible to selectively generate a displacement mode in which displacement in the shear direction (radial direction) is generated in the attracted portion between the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw Nj2.

In the first embodiment, the number of detection sensors KS1, 713, 778d, 813 has been described for each operation unit 600, 700, 800, but the number is not necessarily limited to this. For example, instead of one detection sensor KS1, a plurality of detection sensors KS1 may be arranged at positions where the extended portion 634b can be detected. Less than or four or more detection sensors 713 may be employed. As for the arrangement of the detection sensor KS1, a position where the extended portion 634b can be detected in the intermediate effect state or the extended state of the first motion unit 600 is exemplified.

Further, for example, only one of the two detection sensors 778d may be employed, and instead of the single detection sensor 813, a plurality of detection sensors 813 may be arranged at positions where the detected portion 844 can be detected. It may be configured as follows. As the arrangement of the detection sensors 813, for example, by arranging the five detection sensors 813 at equal intervals on the circumference, five types (rotational It can be determined in 5 different modes depending on the direction).

In the above-described second embodiment, the case where the balls continue to roll regardless of the arrangement of the slide member 2420 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the distance between the upper side surface of the slide member 2420 in the front side arrangement FP and the lower side surface of the upper surface portion 314 of the upper member 310 may be configured to have a length equivalent to the diameter of the sphere. In this case, when the slide member 2420 is placed on the front side FP, the ball can be sandwiched between the upper side surface of the slide member 2420 and the lower side surface of the upper surface portion 314, so the deceleration effect of the ball can be strengthened. , stagnation of the ball can be easily generated.

In the above-described second embodiment, there is no description that the ridge is formed inside the first flow path forming portion 2334, but the first flow path forming portion 2334 is provided with a ridge for decelerating the ball. It may be configured as follows. In this case, the height of the protrusions is set so as to contact either the sphere that rides on the slide member 2420 at the front side position FP or the sphere that rides on the bottom surface 2334c when the slide member 2420 is placed at the rear side BP. , may be set to a height that does not contact the other. In this case, the deceleration action by the protrusion can be generated in either the state where the slide member 2420 is arranged on the front side FP or the state where the slide member 2420 is arranged on the rear side BP.

In the third embodiment, the slide displacement member 3370 is formed by integrally forming the thin plate portion 371, the upper front projecting portion 3376b, and the upper lateral projecting portion 3376c, but it is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, in accordance with the timing when the thin plate portion 371 is arranged at the front side position and the rear side position, the upper front projecting portion 3376b and the upper lateral projecting portion 3376c as separate members appear and disappear in the vertical direction, and a state in which the ball abuts. and a non-contact state.

In addition, although the arrangement of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 is not limited at all, it is better to use the probability variation detection sensor SE11 on the rear side as in the present embodiment. Winning can be easily avoided.

In the fourth embodiment, the case where the slide plate 4372 and the upper contact portion 4373 and the slide plate 4376 and the upper contact portion 4377 are integrally formed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, these components may be configured as separate members, and may be configured to operate synchronously (interlockedly) at the same timing. In addition, you may comprise so that it may be slidably displaced in the front-back direction.

In the above-described fourth embodiment, when the sliding members 4371 and 4375 are slid at the timing when the ball passes rearward through the upper side surface 4372a of the slide plate 4372, the ball is returned forward due to the inclination of the upper side surface 4376a. , but not necessarily limited to this. For example, an additional ball entry detection sensor may be arranged behind the slide plate 4372 in the front open state.

In this case, only the ball on the slide plate 4372 when the state changes from the rear open state to the front open state can be guided to the additional ball detection sensor. Benefits obtained by the player by entering the ball into the additional ball detection sensor (for example, as a larger benefit than the right obtained by entering the ball into the probability variation detection sensor SE11, winning multiple jackpots (Acquisition of the right to transition to the variable probability state, etc.) can improve the attention to the ball that has passed through the third flow path forming part 336 .

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the flow path from the raised floor portion 6342 at the downstream end of the confluence flow path 6341 is configured as a flow path along the left-right direction has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, in the vicinity of the raised floor portion 6342, a curved flow path may be formed in which the connection point JP1 side faces rearward. As a result, both the ball entering the connection point JP1 from the raised floor portion 6342 and the ball entering the connection point JP1 from the second flow path forming portion 335 can have backward velocity components. By colliding, it is possible to prevent backflow from occurring.

Note that the connection point JP1 may be configured to be arranged at the center position of the sorting device 6300 in the left-right direction. Further, the structure of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 may be configured to have a reverse inclination, and the variable probability detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 may be arranged near the fixed member 161. In this case, it is possible to make it easier for the balls to gather at the connection point JP1 and then flow down to the near side, so that attention to the balls flowing down inside the sorting device 6300 can be improved.

In the ninth embodiment, the elongated guide hole 9616 is configured as a branched elongated hole, and the path through which the axis O1 passes through the elongated guide hole 9616 is switched depending on how the load is applied to the axis O1. has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the shape of the guide slot 9616 may be switched. That is, in the guide elongated hole 9616, only the linear portion 616a is always configured as an elongated hole, and the curved portion 616b, the angle maintaining portion 9616c, and the connecting portion 9616d are configured as elongated holes. and the case where the long hole is blocked may alternately be switched. In this case, it is possible to prevent the axis O1 from being displaced along an erroneous path, thereby preventing the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 from being displaced in an unintended manner.

For example, in the guide long hole 9616 having branches, a switch valve may be provided to limit the displacement path of the axis O1 by closing one of the paths. In this case, while the shape of the guide long hole 9616 is fixed, the displacement path of the axis O1 can be restricted by the switching valve. Unintended displacement of the member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 can be prevented.

<First control example>
A control example of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, referring to FIGS. 118 to 87, as a first control example, a control example when the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described. 118 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, FIG. 119 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 121 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 118, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 which is formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12 in the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 118). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 119) having ball entrances 63, 64, 640 and the like into which a large number of nails and balls can enter is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. Balls (game balls) flow down in front of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 137) that shoots a ball to the front area (game area) of the game board 13 and a ball shooting unit 112a that shoots the ball to the front area of the game board 13. A launch rail (not shown) or the like is attached to guide the vehicle to the target. Details of the numerous ball entrances provided on the game board 13 will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 118). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls projected to the front side and formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface, and the upper tray 17 discharges prize balls, rental balls, and the like. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 118). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 119) is to be changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is to be changed. be.

The front frame 14 is provided with light-emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win or when a predetermined reach is reached, and play a role of enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and each of the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or flashing of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED or the like and capable of displaying whether prize balls are being paid out or when an error has occurred is provided at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 118).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 119) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to create more splendor.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that could not be fully stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operation handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to hit the ball in front of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electric resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit in front of the game board 13 with a flying distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off. That is, in this control example, a shooting means for shooting the ball to the game area formed on the game board 13 and a shooting device for varying the shooting intensity based on the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the operation handle 51 are provided. and intensity variable means. As a result, the player can execute a ball shooting action using the shooting means and a shooting intensity varying action of varying the shooting intensity of the ball simply by operating the operating handle 51 . Therefore, the operation of shooting the ball toward a specific game area out of the game areas formed on the game board 13 can be executed with one hand, and the game can be executed without imposing an excessive burden on the player. be able to.

In this control example, the firing intensity is varied based on the rotational operation amount (rotating position) of the operating handle 51, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the player can select the firing intensity, for example. A shooting intensity selection button may be provided, and the shooting means may shoot a ball at a shooting intensity corresponding to the operation result (selection result) of the shooting intensity selection button.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 119, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape as seen from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding the balls, windmills, rails 61 and 62, and a general input. Ball mouth 63, first ball entrance 64, second ball entrance 640, variable prize winning device 65, normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, variable display device unit 80, etc. It is attached to the back side of the frame 12 (see FIG. 118). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general ball entrance 63, the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through-holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are used for playing games. It is fixed from the front side of the board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

The central front portion of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 118). Mainly referring to FIG. 119, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

In front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 118). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and a shot is fired). area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 137) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 119) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 119) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

A first pattern display device 37 is provided on the upper left side of the return rubber 69 . The first pattern display device 37 is arranged so as to be covered with the back surface of the game board 13 (the surface opposite to the surface forming the game area) made of a transparent resin (for example, ABS). It is configured so that the shot ball does not collide with the first pattern display device 37 .

The first pattern display device 37 is provided with a first pattern display device 37 having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display. The first symbol display device 37 displays a display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 20), and mainly displays the game state of the pachinko machine 10 . In this control example, the first symbol display device 37 is configured to operate when the ball enters (wins) the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 . That is, the first symbol display device 37 performs the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 lottery) executed when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. It is a display means for showing the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery) executed when the ball is entered. In addition, in this control example, since the pachinko machine 10 having two types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is used, the first symbol display device 37 selects two types of special symbol lottery ( For example, if the pachinko machine 10 has only one type of special symbol (first special symbol), the first symbol display device 37 displays one type of special symbol. A display area should be provided.

In addition, the first symbol display device 37 uses LEDs to indicate which of the current game states of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state), or a special symbol (first symbols) are in the process of changing (during dynamic display for stop-displaying the combination of symbols to indicate the lottery result) by the lighting state, and the stopped symbols correspond to the big wins that are advantageous to the player. Whether a pattern, a pattern corresponding to a disadvantageous big hit, or a lost pattern is indicated by a lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by a lighting state, and the number of rounds during a big hit and an error are displayed by a 7-segment display device. In addition, it is possible to indicate in the lighting state that the variation of the special symbol is temporarily stopped (suspended). A plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED emits different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and a combination of the emitted colors can suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. In this control example, various game states are notified by a combination of light emission colors of the light emitting means (7-segment display device). For example, various game states may be notified by varying the length (blinking mode) of the period in which the light emitting means is lit and the period in which it is extinguished.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery (lottery for special symbols) is conducted when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (winning a prize). Then, in the lottery of the special symbols, the success/failure determination (big hit lottery) of whether or not it is a big hit is performed. Here, based on the fact that it is determined that the jackpot has been won, a jackpot game is executed in which a privilege game state is advantageous to the player.

When the jackpot game is executed, it becomes an open state in which the balls can be easily entered into the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65, and by allowing the balls to enter the specific winning port 65a, many winning balls can be won in a short period of time. A game that can be acquired by is executed. This jackpot game is executed (in case) after the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and the opening period (specific winning opening of the variable winning device 65) for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) 65a), a round game period in which the open state is set, and a predetermined period from the end of one round game period to the start of the next round game. A period (for example, 0.5 seconds), an interval period in which the closed state is set, and an ending period in which the closed state is set for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) after the end of the last round game period. A big hit game period is set.

In this way, by setting the opening period after the lottery result of the special symbols indicating the winning of the jackpot is stopped (confirmed display), the balls are displayed in time with the opening of the specific winning opening 65a during the jackpot game. can be prepared to shoot in an arbitrary direction, so that a big win game can be smoothly performed. In addition, since this opening period can be used as a period for informing the player of the game content of the current jackpot game, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

Further, by setting the ending period as the final period of the jackpot game, it is possible to suppress the execution of a lottery of new special symbols immediately after the end of the last round game. Since it is possible to prepare for shooting the ball in an arbitrary direction toward the game to be executed, it is possible to smoothly switch the game.

Although a detailed description will be given later, in this control example, a plurality of types of jackpot games are configured to be executable, and the number of round games executed during the jackpot game (round number ) and the game state set after the end of the jackpot game are different. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make the player interested not only in the presence or absence of the big win by lottery of the special symbols, but also in the kind of the big win won and the game state at the time of winning.

In addition, the length of each period (opening period, round period, ending period) of the jackpot game that is executed when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery also depends on the game state set at the time of the jackpot win and the winning game. Different lengths may be set according to the type of the jackpot. For example, when a jackpot is won in which the game content different from the game content at the time of winning the jackpot is set as the game content to be executed after the jackpot game ends. is set so that the ending period (for example, 10 seconds) of the jackpot game is longer than the ending period (for example, 2 seconds) of other jackpot games, and during the ending period, It is preferable to configure so as to be able to perform an effect of guiding in advance the contents of the game to be executed after the end of the jackpot game. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

On the other hand, when a jackpot is won in which the game content at the time of winning the jackpot and the game content to be executed after the jackpot game is the same, the ending period (for example, 1 second) of the jackpot is changed to another jackpot game. It may be configured to be set to be shorter than the ending period (for example, 2 seconds). This allows the player to play the game efficiently.

In addition, for example, based on the type of the winning jackpot and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, without using a configuration for actually distinguishing between the game content at the time of winning the jackpot and the game content to be executed after the jackpot game is finished. Therefore, the game state to be set after the end of the jackpot game is defined in advance, and the ending period of each jackpot game may be set in advance according to the contents of the regulation.

Although a specific description will be given later, in the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, there are two states (special symbol high probability state, special symbol low probability state) in which the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery is different. Two states (high-probability state of normal patterns, low-probability state of normal patterns) with different winning probabilities in lottery of normal patterns are combined, and three kinds of game states can be set. Specifically, the normal state (low probability state of special design, low probability state of normal design), time-saving state (low probability state of special design, high probability state of normal design), and probability state (high probability of special design Probability state, high probability state of normal design) is configured to be settable. The lottery for special symbols and the lottery for ordinary symbols are configured so that winning is easier in the case of a high probability state than in the case of a low probability state, so that the pachinko machine 10 in this control example Among a plurality of game states that can be set by , the variable probability state is a game state that makes it easier to win a big hit in a special symbol lottery than other game states, and the variable probability state and the time saving state are more normal than other game states. A game state in which winning is likely to occur in the pattern lottery is brought about.

In addition, when winning in the normal symbol lottery, it is configured to execute a winning game (normal pattern winning game) that facilitates the execution of the special symbol lottery. Specifically, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is opened to provide a state in which it is easy to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640. A normal game is executed. It is configured as follows. Therefore, when the probability variable state and the time saving state, that is, the high probability state of normal symbols are set, the game state becomes easier to execute the special symbol lottery than the other game states. Furthermore, when the high probability state of the normal design is set, the period (dynamic display period) from the execution of the special design lottery to the stop display of the lottery result is the low probability of the normal design. It is configured such that it is easier to set a shorter period than when the state is set. Therefore, when the variable state and the time-saving state, that is, the high-probability state of the normal design is set, since the special design lottery can be executed in a short period of time than the other game states, a new special design is created. The game state is such that the lottery can be easily executed.

Although detailed description will be given later, in this control example, a specific area is provided in the variable winning device 65 that is opened during the jackpot game, and only when the ball passes through the specific area during the jackpot game, A high-probability state of special symbols can be set after the end of the jackpot game. Then, depending on the type of the winning jackpot, a jackpot game (advantageous jackpot game) in which the ball easily passes through the specific area during the jackpot game and a jackpot game (disadvantageous jackpot game) in which the ball hardly passes through the specific area during the jackpot game. and are configured to be executable. Hereinafter, an advantageous jackpot game, that is, a jackpot game in which a ball is likely to pass through a specific area during the jackpot game is called a probability variable jackpot game, and a jackpot in which the probability variable jackpot game is executed is called a probability variable jackpot. In addition, a disadvantageous jackpot game, that is, a jackpot game in which the ball is difficult to pass through a specific area during the jackpot game is called a normal jackpot game, and a jackpot in which the normal jackpot game is executed is called a normal jackpot.

In this control example, if a special symbol lottery does not win a jackpot, it is determined that the player is out of the game, and the player is not given a privilege. As a result of the lottery, in some cases where it is determined that it is not the above-mentioned big win but a loss, there are fewer benefits given to the player than the above-mentioned big win (for example, the benefit of opening the variable winning device 65 for only one round). It may be configured such that a winning game is executed. The first symbol display device 37 not only indicates whether or not the result of the lottery is a big win (whether or not it is a small win) as a stop symbol after the end of variation, but also indicates the type of the big win in the case of a big win. A pattern corresponding to is shown.

Returning to FIG. 119, the description continues. In the lower left side of the game area formed on the surface of the game board 13, a plurality of left general ball entrances 63a are provided through which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when balls enter. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 variably displays a special symbol executed by the first symbol display device 37 triggered by the entry of a ball into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning). While synchronizing with the third symbol display device 81 configured by a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that performs variable display of the third symbol, and the ball to the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided which is composed of an LED that variably displays a normal symbol (second symbol) with passage as a trigger. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114, which will be described later, so that, for example, three pattern rows (upper, middle, and lower) ( Z1 to Z3) are displayed (see FIG. 230(a)). The third design displayed on the display screen of the third design display device 81 (decorative design that fluctuates in response to the fluctuation display of the first special design (special design 1) or the second special design (special design 2)) is They are composed of 10 kinds of main symbols to which identification information imitating numbers "1" to "9" are added. These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbols are variably displayed (dynamically displayed) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . In the third symbol display device 81 of this control example, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 20). A decorative display corresponding to the display of the device 37 is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be constructed using a reel or the like.

As shown in FIG. 122(b), in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the main symbols sz are formed using different types of characters (fish, etc.) for each number-like identification information. In this way, by using characters corresponding to each piece of identification information, it is possible to visually inform the player of the result of the lottery of the special symbols, so that the player can play an easy-to-understand game. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when the result of the lottery by the main control device 110, which will be described later, is a big hit, the same main symbols (for example, "777") are displayed in a variable display, and the variable display is performed. It is configured so that a jackpot game occurs after the end of the game. That is, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol by the main control device 110 .

In the main display area Dm, three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed respectively on the top, middle and bottom. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 has the main symbols arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled in the horizontal direction for variable display.

Specifically, the upper symbol row Z1 is formed so that the numbers are arranged in ascending order from right to left, and is configured to be scrolled from right to left and variably displayed. The column Z2 and the lower pattern column Z3 are arranged such that the numbers are arranged in ascending order from left to right, and are scrolled from right to left to be variably displayed. Further, in each symbol row, sub-symbols (blank symbols) fz which do not indicate the lottery result of the special symbol are also formed between the main symbols sz. In FIG. 122(b), a blank pattern (secondary pattern) fz is displayed using a pattern imitating a triangle.

As shown in FIG. 122(a), the main display area Dm has three effective lines L1 to L3 formed vertically and two effective lines L4 and L5 formed obliquely. In a state where each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is stopped and displayed, the third symbol (main symbol sz) is aligned on the effective line in a combination of jackpot symbols (combination of the same main symbols in this control example). If stopped, a jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 122(a), in this control example, each effective line (L1 to L5) is formed so as to include the symbol display positions of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Until all of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed in the main display area Dm of 81 are stopped and displayed, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the lottery results of the corresponding special symbols. Therefore, until the last symbol row (in this control example, the middle symbol row V2) is stop-displayed, the variable display of the third symbol executed in the main display area Dm can be made interesting.

In this control example, among the above-described three symbol rows (Z1 to Z3), a particular symbol row (symbol row Z2), that is, a symbol row in which the variable display is stopped and displayed last among the plurality of symbol rows On the other hand, it is configured so that the number of main symbols is larger than that of other symbol rows. Specifically, the number of main symbols to which a specific number (for example, the number "4") is attached is greater than that of other symbol rows. As a result, when the identification information imitating a specific number is in a reach state, the jackpot pattern (a Since the number of pieces of identification information) can be increased, it is possible to visually predict that the player is likely to win a big win.

In addition, the mode of the variable display of the third symbols in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the one described above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbols in the row can be changed as appropriate. Also, the patterns displayed in a variable manner on the third pattern display device 81 are not limited to the above. Further, the area where the third symbol is variably displayed may be configured to be variable. For example, when a specific effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display area of the third symbol or moving the variable display area to a position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize (for example, a corner of the display screen), making it difficult for the player to understand whether the third symbol is changing. You may make it Also, during the period when the special symbol is fluctuating, the fluctuation of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and then changed again.

Furthermore, in this control example, the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol and the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol are the same (to the extent that it is difficult for the player to distinguish ), but the display mode and display area of the third symbol may be changed so as to correspond to the type of the special symbol that is fluctuating.

Next, the contents actually displayed on the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 122(b). As shown in FIG. 122(b), a small display area Dm1 is formed on the upper left of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front, and a small display area Dm2 is formed on the upper right when viewed from the front. This small display area Dm1 is an area where identification information (fourth symbol) for indicating the special symbol lottery situation (whether or not the lottery is in progress (fluctuating) and the lottery result) is displayed, 4th design (special 1 4th design) for indicating the lottery status of the 1st special design (special 1), or 4th design for indicating the lottery status of the 2nd special design (special 2) ( Special figure 2 fourth pattern) is configured to be displayed in the small display area Dm1.

In addition, the small display area Dm2 is an area where identification information for indicating the lottery status of normal symbols (whether or not the lottery is in progress (during change) and the lottery result) is displayed. ) is configured to be displayed in the small display area Dm1.

By providing the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 in this manner, the player can be notified of the lottery status of special symbols and the lottery status of normal symbols. Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the fourth pattern is displayed in a display mode imitating figures such as a circle and a cross, and the fourth pattern is displayed in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2. (See the small display area Dm1 in FIG. 122(b)) to show that the special symbol is fluctuating. 122 (b) small display area Dm2), it is configured to show the lottery result of the special pattern, but not limited to this, for example, a display mode using numbers as the fourth pattern, a plurality of colors By using the display mode showing the number and the display mode that changes the color, it shows that the special pattern is changing, and by stopping and displaying the display mode showing the specific pattern and color, the lottery result of the special pattern may be configured as shown.

Furthermore, in this control example, the fourth symbol is used to indicate the special symbol lottery situation (whether or not the lottery is in progress (during fluctuation), and the lottery result), but this is not the only option. Instead, it may be configured to notify only whether or not the special symbol is being selected (during variation). Further, as shown in FIG. 122(b), in this control example, the fourth symbol display area (small display area Dm1) in which the fourth symbol for indicating the lottery status of the special symbol is displayed is displayed in the main display area Dm. The upper left shows an example of forming a normal 4th symbol display area (small display area Dm2) in which a normal 4th symbol for indicating the lottery status of the normal symbol is formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm. However, the position and size of the fourth pattern display area may be varied according to the effect mode of the variable effect executed in the central portion of the main display area Dm.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the production effect due to the restriction of the area where the variation production is executed by the fourth pattern display area and the normal-fourth pattern display area. . In this case, the fourth pattern display area and the fourth normal pattern display area are deleted from the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and the light emitting means (LED, etc.) provided in the variable display device unit 80 is replaced. It may be configured to execute the variable display of the fourth symbol.

As shown in FIG. 122(a), a sub-display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm. The secondary display area Ds is configured to display reserved symbols corresponding to the number of acquired special symbol lottery rights (reserved storage). As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example executes a new special symbol lottery when a variable display is performed on the first symbol display device 37 or when a winning game is being performed. When the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 in such a state, the number of times the ball enters each entrance is reserved up to four times. The number of reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds is the same as the number of reserved ball entries. In this embodiment, the maximum number of held balls stored for the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is 4, and the maximum value for the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is stored. Since the maximum number of reserved balls is set to 4, a maximum of 8 reserved symbols are displayed in the sub-table display area Ds.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 122(b), the sub-display area Ds is divided into an active area Ds1a and a standby area Ds1b. The waiting area Ds1b is an area for displaying a number of reserved symbols corresponding to the number of reserved special symbols. They are displayed in order from left to right. Then, when a reserved ball with a special pattern is obtained, the reserved pattern is displayed on the pedestal with the lowest number among the eight pedestals hr1 to hr8 on which the reserved pattern is not displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 122(b), four reserved balls of the first special symbol are held and stored. Four reserved symbols (hz1 to hz4) of the display mode (white circle mark) corresponding to the ball) are displayed on the first pedestal hr1 to the fourth pedestal hr4.

The running area Ds1a is a display area in which the pending symbols displayed corresponding to the currently running special symbol variation are shifted and displayed, and the running pending symbol hz0 is displayed on the running pedestal hr0. be. That is, when a new special symbol variation is started, the reserved symbol hz1 displayed on the pedestal hr1 of the waiting area Ds1b is shifted to the pedestal hr0 of the active area Ds1a and displayed. By configuring in this way, for example, when executing the notice effect (for example, the effect of changing the display mode of the reserved pattern) indicating the expectation of winning the jackpot with respect to the reserved pattern displayed in the waiting area Ds1b. In addition, the player can easily discriminate that the special symbol variation corresponding to the reserved symbol for which the advance notice performance is performed is being performed.

In addition, by making it possible to display reserved patterns corresponding to the special pattern variation being executed, the effect of changing the display mode of the reserved patterns is also executed for the reserved patterns corresponding to the special pattern variation being executed. Therefore, the game can be played while expecting that the display mode of the reserved symbols will be changed for a longer time than when the reserved symbols corresponding to the special symbol variation being executed are not displayed.

In this control example, the displayed reserved design shows the reserved ball of the first special design by the display mode of the reserved design displayed in the waiting area Ds1b of the sub-display area Ds (special figure 1 reserved design) or a reserved pattern (special figure 2 reserved pattern) indicating the reserved ball of the second special pattern, and the special figure 1 reserved pattern is a white circle (Fig. 122 (b) reference), the special figure 2 reserved design is displayed in a black circle (see FIG. 124 (a)). As a result, it is possible for the player to grasp the current number of reserved balls for each type of special symbol, so that the number of balls to enter the first ball entrance 64 based on the display contents of the reserved symbols is determined. It is possible to facilitate the determination of whether or not to continue the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 122(b), in this control example, the number of reserved symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls corresponding to each special symbol is displayed, and the pedestal with the youngest number (the pedestal with the youngest number A special symbol lottery is executed using a reserved ball corresponding to a reserved symbol displayed on the pedestal hr1). In other words, the reserved symbols are displayed in the order of use in the special symbol lottery, but are not limited to this. It may be configured so as to attach order of consumption information for indicating the order used in the lottery. By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner which reserved ball acquired at which timing corresponds to which reserved symbol.

In addition, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 122(b), it is configured to be able to display up to 8 reserved symbols side by side, but not limited to this, the special figure 1 reserved symbol display area , and the display area of the special figure 2 reserved design may be configured to be displayed separately. In this case, for example, if the game state (normal state) in which it is difficult to acquire the special figure 2 reservation is set, the display area of the special figure 1 reserved design is displayed more conspicuously than the display area of the special figure 2 reserved design. However, if the game state (probability variable state, time saving state) that makes it easy to acquire special figure 2 reservation is set, the display area of special figure 2 reserved design is displayed more prominently than the display area of special figure 1 reserved design. It may be configured to

In the tenth control example, as described with reference to FIG. 2, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured symmetrically, and the right-handed game and the left-handed game are played. Since it is configured so that the same game result is given in the case of hitting the left, it is not displayed, but for example, depending on the set game state, the right hitting game is more likely than the left hitting game. If it is a pachinko machine 10 that can set a case where the game method is more advantageous than the left-handed game and a case where the left-handed game is more advantageous than the right-handed game, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 Alternatively, a guide display mode may be displayed to guide the player in the direction in which the ball is to be shot (game direction). With this configuration, the player can easily grasp which area of the game board the ball should be shot to by simply looking at the guide display mode displayed in the guide display area. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for players to understand.

To explain in more detail, as the guidance display area, there are a display mode of "right-handed" for guiding the player to play a right-handed game, and a display mode for making the player play a left-handed game. The display mode of ``left-handed'' for guiding is displayed, and the display mode of ``right-handed'' is a game state in which the right-handed game is advantageous to the player, for example, a probability variable state , It is displayed during the time saving state and during the jackpot game, and the display mode of "left hitting" may be configured to be displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) after the right hitting game ends. In addition, even when it is detected that a right-handed game is being executed during a game state in which a left-handed game is advantageous to the player, that is, in a normal state, "left-handed" is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). is preferably configured so that the display mode of is displayed. Also, various display modes displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 described in each of the control examples described above may be configured to be appropriately displayable.

<Regarding the effect contents of the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 123 to 131, description will be given of the characteristic effect contents out of the various effect contents executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example. do. First, with reference to FIG. 123(a), the display screen when reach is established in the normal state will be described. FIG. 123(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when the ready-to-reach state is reached in the normal state (normal state). In this control example, the variably displayed third symbols are stop-displayed in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z2. When the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z2 are stopped and displayed as a part of the third symbol combination indicating winning, a ready-to-win state is reached, and the upper symbol row Z1, The active line on which the lower symbol row Z2 is stopped is set as a ready-to-win effective line, and the middle symbol row Z2 is variably displayed. After reaching the ready-to-win state, the medium symbol row Z2 moves each identification information (third symbol) at a low speed (main symbol (third symbol imitating a number)) that is visible to the player. It is constructed so that the time required for the display is variably displayed at a rate of about 0.5 seconds).

As described above, in this control example, the middle symbol row has 10 main symbols (one each of main symbols with numbers "1" to "3", "5" to "9", and "4"). ), when the medium pattern row Z2 is variably displayed at a low speed, it takes 5 seconds (0.5× 10). Then, the medium symbol row Z2, which is variably displayed at a low speed, is stopped and displayed as it is. Alternatively, it is configured to change to a different presentation mode (ready-to-win mode) based on the establishment of a specific transition condition.

Furthermore, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 123(a), any third symbol (in FIG. 123(a), the identification information imitating "9" (the third symbol imitating a crab)) is in the reach state. Even in this case, the medium symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 122(a)) that is variably displayed during the reach is the identification information imitating the number "1" (the third symbol imitating an octopus). It is configured so that low-speed fluctuation display is executed so that it can be visually recognized immediately.

In addition, in this control example, the effect mode of the variable effect is configured to vary according to the variation mode of the middle symbol row Z2 after entering the ready-to-win state. At the timing when the symbol row Z2 makes one round (after 5 seconds have passed since the low speed fluctuation display is executed) and at the timing when it has made two rounds (after 10 seconds have passed since the low speed fluctuation display has been executed), there are different presentation modes (ready-to-win mode). It is configured so that it can be changed to Therefore, as in the present control example, by unifying the identification information of the middle symbol row Z2 that becomes visible first after entering the ready-to-win state, the player is given a different effect mode (ready-to-win mode) at any timing. It is possible to make it easy to understand whether it changes to .

In this control example, the timing of changing to a different effect mode (reach mode) is the timing when the medium symbol row Z2 makes one round or the timing when it makes two rounds after entering the ready-to-win state, but it is not limited to this. For example, the timing at which the identification information (the same identification information as the identification information that has been stopped) passes through the reach effective line and the identification information that is the combination indicating the jackpot after reaching the reach state. It may be configured to change to a different presentation mode (reach mode) at the timing when the distorted identification information passes through the reach effective line. In this way, the specific identification information corresponding to the type of the identification information that is stopped reach is changed to a different production mode (reach mode) based on passing through the reach effective line, the game It is possible to give a relationship between the timing at which the middle symbol row Z2 is stop-displayed in a combination that results in a big hit and the timing at which it changes to a different performance mode (ready-to-win mode). Specifically, after entering the ready-to-win state, the identification information (the same identification information as the identification information for which the reach is stopped), which is the combination indicating the jackpot, changes to a different presentation mode (reach mode) at the timing when the reach-to-reach effective line is passed. , the timing at which the medium pattern row Z2 is stop-displayed in a combination that results in a big win and the timing at which it is changed to a different presentation mode (ready-to-win mode) are overlapped. Therefore, when the identification information (the same identification information as the identification information for which the reach is stopped), which is a combination indicating a big hit, approaches the reach effective line, the player has a great sense of expectation and pays attention to the variable performance. can be made

Here, in this control example, as described above, even when the reach state occurs in any third pattern, the specific identification state (the third pattern imitating the number "1") is visible first. For example, the combination of the third symbols to be finally stopped and displayed is shifted by one type from the combination of the third symbols for the big win. In the case of a combination (reach 1 frame off) (when the final stop display mode is determined in advance), from reaching the reach state until all the third symbols are stopped and displayed (the final stop display mode is the stop display A new problem arises in that the period until the game is played differs depending on the type of the third symbol that is in the ready-to-win state.

Specifically, when the ready-to-win state is reached with the third symbol imitating the number "1", the middle symbol row Z2 displays the third symbol imitating the number "1" as a specific symbol at low speed fluctuation. Therefore, in order to stop and display the middle symbol row Z2 as the final stop display mode when the ready-to-win state is out by one frame, it takes 5.5 seconds (first round) and 10.5 seconds (second round) after entering the ready-to-win state. In short, when the ready-to-win state is reached with the third symbol imitating the number "6", the medium symbol row Z2 displays the third symbol imitating the number "1" as a specific symbol at a low speed. 8 seconds (first round) and 13 seconds (second round) are required after entering the ready-to-win state in order to stop and display the middle symbol row Z2 with one frame out of the ready-to-win state as the final stop display mode.

Therefore, in order to establish a ready-to-win state with the third symbol of a different type in a variation pattern in which the same variable time is set, the timing of reaching the ready-to-win state is set by calculating back from the stop display timing of the third symbol. I needed to process. In other words, there is a problem that the ready-to-win effect is executed without uniformity, which varies according to the type of the third symbol that is in the ready-to-win condition, and the effect of the effect is reduced. rice field.

On the other hand, in this control example, along with the execution of the special symbol lottery, the main controller 110 determines by lottery the fluctuation time of the first symbol for indicating the special symbol lottery result, and the determined variation The time is notified to the audio lamp control device 113 by a variation pattern command. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 selects the variable display effect of the effect period that matches the variable time notified by the variable pattern command, synchronizes with the variable display of the first pattern, and the variable display effect of the third pattern. is configured to execute The variation pattern command output from main controller 110 is composed of a basic time command indicating the basic variation time and an addition time command indicating the variation time to be added. It is configured to vary the type of the third symbol that is in the ready-to-win state based on the length of time. More specifically, when a variation pattern with a variation time of 30 seconds is determined, a command corresponding to 30 seconds is notified as the basic time command, and a command corresponding to 0 seconds is notified as the additional time. be. On the other hand, when a variation pattern with a variation time of 37 seconds is determined, a command corresponding to 30 seconds is notified as the basic time command, and a command corresponding to 7 seconds is notified as the additional time. In other words, the notification content of the addition time command allows the audio lamp control device 113 side to identify the variation type that is seven seconds longer than the basic time. As a result, it is possible to set the type of the third symbol to be in the ready-to-win state simply by confirming the contents of the addition time command.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 123(b) to 126, the contents of the effect related to the second special symbol variation (lottery) executed when the normal state is set will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 123(b), the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 during execution of the normal symbol variation that is winning in the normal state will be described. FIG. 123(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display contents displayed during execution of normal symbol variation in which winning is achieved in the normal state. As shown in FIG. 123(b), when the normal symbol variation is executed, a variation display mode (indicated by an arrow in the figure) indicating that the normal symbol variation is being performed is displayed in the small display area Dm2. . Then, a small display area Dm3 is formed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm, and an icon imitating a second ball entrance 640 including an electric accessory 640a to be opened in a normal game per game is displayed therein. At the same time, a highlighted display (indicated by six lines in the figure) is executed to inform the player that the small display area Dm3 has been formed. In the situation shown in FIG. 123(b), since the winning normal symbol variation is being executed, the icon displayed in the small display area Dm3 is the second symbol including the closed electric accessory 640a. It has a display mode imitating the ball entrance 640 . By configuring in this way, the game may soon be executed for the player. can be predicted, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in FIG. 123(b), the explanation was given by taking as an example the execution of the normal design variation that is winning, but the lottery result is part of the execution of the normal design variation that is out (for example, the deviation variation (probability of 1/100) of forming the small display area Dm3 and displaying an icon simulating the second ball entrance 640 including the electric accessory 640a (fake effect). In this case, an effect mode is set in which the small display area Dm3 disappears before the normal symbol variation (loss variation) being executed is stopped and displayed. By constructing in this way, since the performance display in which the small display area Dm3 is formed is executed even when the normal symbol lottery is not won, the normal symbol winning game is executed for the player. The game can be played while expecting that the game will be played. In addition, in FIG. 123(b), by displaying an icon simulating the second ball entrance 640 including the electric accessary 640a in the small display area Dm3, an example of an effect suggesting the start of a regular game is shown. However, without being limited to this, for example, it may be configured to display a comment suggesting the start of a game per normal pattern in a part of the sub-display area Ds or the main display area Dm.

In addition, the display mode of the third symbol variation display being executed in the main display area Dm may be used to suggest the start of the normal per figure game. In this case, only when the special symbol variation is also performed while executing the normal symbol variation, since the effect suggesting that the normal pattern per game is performed is performed, for example, the special symbol lottery The result of the normal pattern lottery is previously suggested to the player executing only the normal pattern lottery by allowing the ball to pass through a through gate 67 which makes it easier to enter the ball than the first ball entrance 64 which is the execution trigger. nothing to do. Therefore, it is possible to give a privilege (execution of an effect suggesting the result of a normal symbol lottery in advance) to a player who is playing a normal game in which both the special symbol variation and the normal symbol variation are executed. Similarly, the effect using the small display area Dm3 used in this control example is set as an execution condition that the special symbol variation is being executed or the ball shooting game is being continuously executed. You can

In addition, depending on the contents of the game being executed, the degree of expectation of the suggestion effect that suggests the start of the game per normal pattern may be varied. , When the suggestion performance suggesting the start of the normal pattern per game is executed, the general per pattern game is executed at a rate of almost 100%, and only the normal pattern lottery is executed without executing the special pattern lottery ( If you are doing a stop hitting game), that is, if you are not playing a normal game, even if the suggestion effect that suggests the start of the game per normal pattern is executed, only about 10% per normal pattern. It may be configured so that the game is not executed. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player who is executing the stop hitting game to grasp the start timing of the normal pattern per game based on the suggested performance to be executed, and to impose a penalty. can be done.

Details will be described later, but in this control example, up to four lottery rights for normal symbols can be reserved, and when a new lottery right (normal pattern reservation) is acquired, the acquired lottery right is used. The result of the normal pattern lottery that was used is configured to be able to be determined in advance. A command (information) indicating the preliminary determination result can be output to the sound lamp control device 113 . Therefore, the stage before the normal pattern variation that is winning by hitting the suggestion performance that suggests the execution of the game per normal pattern is executed, that is, the stage that acquires the normal pattern holding that the preliminary determination result is winning. It is possible to execute a suggestive effect suggesting that a normal game will be executed soon. In this case, rather than the suggestive effect shown in FIG. 123(b), it is preferable to execute the suggestive effect in an effect mode that is more difficult for the player to understand. It is configured to execute the suggestion performance in the same performance mode as the performance suggesting the result or the pre-discrimination result for the acquired special figure reservation, and the executed suggestion performance makes the situation advantageous to the player. It may also be configured to notify the player only of upcoming events.

In this way, the timing of actually executing the game per normal pattern and the execution timing of the suggestive effect diverge so that the player can understand the production mode of the suggestive effect for indicating that the game per normal pattern is executed. By making it difficult to understand that the target of the suggestive effect is the normal game, it is possible to improve the interest of the game when the suggestive effect is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 124(a), description will be given of the content of the effect when the normal pattern winning game (long open winning game) is executed during the normal state. FIG. 124(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the content of the effect displayed when the normal pattern winning game (long open winning game) is executed in the normal state (during the normal state). In this control example, in the normal state in which the low probability state of the normal design is set, the probability of winning in the normal design lottery is designed to be 1/100, and the normal executed in the low probability state of the normal design. The variation time of pattern variation is designed to be 10 seconds. Then, as described above with reference to FIG. 119, it is configured so that about half of the shot balls pass through the through gate 67 in both cases of executing a right-handed game and left-handed game. ing. In addition, it is configured to be able to store up to four lottery rights (normal pattern reservation) for normal patterns.

In other words, while the game is continued in the normal state, the normal symbol lottery is continuously executed, and the normal symbol lottery is won at a rate of about once every 1000 seconds. Furthermore, when winning a general pattern in the normal state, the electric accessory 640a is configured to be executed for a general pattern per game (long open per) in which the electric accessory 640a is opened for 5 seconds. Further, as shown in FIG. 119, since the electric accessory 640a is provided below the first ball entrance 64, simply continuing the game aiming at the first ball entrance 64 will cause the fired ball to reach the second It is constructed so that the ball can be entered into the ball entrance 640 . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player cannot enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640 in the normal pattern winning game in the low probability state of the normal pattern that occurs at a low probability. there is

In the normal state, when winning the normal symbol lottery, a combination (in the figure, two Circle), the identification information (symbol) is stopped and displayed, and a game per normal pattern is executed. Then, the comment "Aim for the electric chew" is displayed above the main display area Dm, and the open electric chew (the second entrance 640 including the electric accessory 640a) is displayed in the small display area Dm3. A mock icon is displayed. In addition, since the normal symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery are configured to be executable in parallel (overlapping), the variation display of the third symbol executed in correspondence with the special symbol variation and the small display. The variation display of the fourth symbol executed in the area Dm1 is continuously executed even during the regular pattern winning game.

In addition, in the waiting area Ds1b of the sub display area Ds, the number of second special symbol holding memories (special figure 2 holding balls) acquired based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is shown. Special figure 2 reserved design (indicated by a black circle in the figure) indicates the number of reserved memory (special figure 1 reserved ball) of the first special design that has been acquired Special figure 1 reserved design (indicated by a white circle in the figure) (on the left side of the waiting area Ds1b). In other words, in the state shown in FIG. 124(a), it is a state after four or more balls are entered into the second ball entrance 640 during normal game per game, and the special figure 2 hold is the upper limit number. It shows the state after acquiring certain four items.

In this control example, since the lottery for the second special symbol is preferentially executed over the lottery for the first special symbol, the later acquired special figure 2 reserved ball is acquired earlier. A special symbol lottery is executed with priority over the special figure 1 reserved ball. By configuring in this way, when the game per normal pattern is executed in the normal state and a plurality of special pattern 2 reserved balls are acquired, it is possible to preferentially and continuously execute the second special pattern lottery. Therefore, one period during which the lottery for the second special symbol is executed can be used as an advantageous period (chance zone) advantageous to the player, and an exclusive performance can be executed to provide the player with an easy-to-understand performance. can be done.

In this control example, the acquired special figure 1 reserved ball and special figure 2 reserved ball are displayed side by side (up to 8 pieces are displayed) in the waiting area Ds1b. When using the special figure 1 reserved ball display area that displays only the reserved ball in FIG. If the reserved ball of the second special pattern to be held is not acquired, the special figure 1 reserved ball display area is displayed so as to be more conspicuous than the special figure 2 reserved ball display area, and the reserved ball of the second special pattern is acquired. In the case of doing, it is better to switch display so that the special figure 2 holding ball display area is conspicuous than the special figure 1 holding ball display area. By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner whether the lottery for the first special symbol will be executed next or the lottery for the second special symbol will be executed next.

The display screen shown in FIG. 124(a) is continuously displayed until the end timing of the general pattern per game in the normal state or the start timing of the second special symbol variation in the normal state. It is configured as follows. That is, even during normal per game, when the second special symbol variation is started, the chance zone effect, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 124(b), is executed. On the other hand, if the second special symbol variation does not start even when the end timing of the game per normal pattern is reached, for example, a long variation time (for example, 60 seconds) is selected. While the first special symbol variation is being executed When the general pattern per game (5 seconds) is executed at 10:00 a.m., the character "waiting for the chance zone" is displayed above the main display area Dm, and when the first special symbol variation currently being executed is completed, the first 2 A standby screen is displayed to inform the player that the special symbol variation will start.

It should be noted that, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 124(a), when the general pattern per game is executed during the first special symbol variation, the main display area Dm corresponding to the first special symbol variation being executed While continuing to display the third symbol variation effect (indicated by three arrows in the figure) executed in the partial area of the main display area Dm (small display area Dm3 formed in the lower right in the figure) In this case, the display area used to display that the game per normal pattern is executed based on the lottery result of the first special symbol variation being executed It is preferable to configure the size to be variable. For example, when the first special symbol variation being executed wins a jackpot, the small display area Dm3 is formed smaller than the example shown in FIG. 124(a). Alternatively, it is preferable to configure such that the small display area Dm3 is not formed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the visibility of the third symbol variation effect indicating the winning of the jackpot due to the formation of the small display area Dm3. In addition, when the normal pattern winning game is started without forming the small display area Dm3, it is possible to notify the player that the special symbol variation (first special symbol variation) being executed is the big winning variation. Therefore, even in a state in which execution of a normal figure winning game is not notified in the small display area Dm3, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the operating state of the electric accessory 640a. When such a configuration is used, it is preferable that the same effect mode as the big win variation is executed even in a part of the case where the special symbol variation being executed is not the big win variation (it is a loss variation). .

On the other hand, when the special symbol variation being executed (first special symbol variation) is a deviation variation, or when the special symbol variation is not executed, the small display area Dm3 is larger than the example shown in FIG. It may be formed large, or the entire surface of the main display area Dm may be used to display that the normal game is executed.

In other words, in the limited area of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, when it is necessary to display a plurality of pieces of information (lottery results and winning game situations) in duplicate, information that is advantageous to the player. may be preferentially displayed, and may be displayed in various display modes based on the technical concept. In this case, the information that is advantageous to the player may differ. There are also players who consider low-rate effects to be advantageous information. Therefore, an operation means that can be operated by the player and an advantage level selection that allows the player to arbitrarily select the advantage level of various information displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 based on the operation of the operation means. means for setting a display mode corresponding to various information displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 based on the degree of advantage selected by the degree of advantage selection means. As a result, it is possible to display various information in a display mode that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

Next, the contents of the effect in the chance zone where the second special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is executed in the normal state will be described with reference to FIGS. 124(b) to 126. FIG. FIG. 124(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the contents of the effect executed when the chance zone is set. As shown in FIG. 124(b), when the second special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is executed in the normal state, the comment "entering the chance zone" is displayed above the main display area Dm. This chance zone is an advantageous period set during the period until all special 2 reservations acquired during the normal state are digested, basically after the first 2nd special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is started It is configured to be displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 until the last second special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is completed. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the current period is the advantageous period.

In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, when a jackpot is won in the chance zone, characters of ``variable probability GET high probability'' are displayed as a guide display mode for showing that the variable probability state can be obtained with a high probability. Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, the probability of winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is the same, but the probability of winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery is higher. , when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the variable probability state is more likely to be set after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, during the normal state in which the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed, the period of the chance zone in which the second special symbol lottery is executed obtains a jackpot winning that is more likely than the period other than the chance zone in the normal state. Since it is a period where it is easy to get, as shown in FIG. 124(b), the characters "variable GET high probability" are displayed as a guidance display mode to indicate that the variable definite state can be obtained with a high probability.

Although detailed explanation will be given later, in this chance zone, during one special symbol variation (second special symbol variation), a pseudo-variation production that makes it appear that multiple special symbol variations have been executed is performed. configured to run. Therefore, the display mode (see FIG. 124(a)) indicating the reserved number of special symbols displayed in the secondary display area Ds is hidden, and a small display area Ds11 is formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm. In the special figure 1 reservation number ("2" indicating that the number of special figure 1 reservations is 2 in the figure), the number of special figure 2 reservations in the small display area Ds12 (in the figure, the number of special figure 2 reservations "3" indicating that there are three is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 124(b), the display mode displayed in the small display areas Ds11 and Ds12 is more attractive than the display mode displayed in the standby area Ds1b (see FIG. 124(a)) of the sub-display area Ds. Since it is configured so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of special figure reservations during the chance zone. Therefore, when the pseudo-fluctuation performance is executed in the chance zone, the player can be made to think that the special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is actually executed a plurality of times, and the performance effect can be enhanced. In addition, in this control example, a partial area (small display areas Ds11 and Ds12) of the main display area Dm is used to display the number of special figures pending. During the zone, it may be configured so as not to notify the player of the number of special figures reserved, or in an area other than the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (for example, the LED provided in the variable display unit 80). It may be configured to notify the number of pending drawings. Furthermore, it is only necessary to make it difficult for the player to identify the number of reserved special figures. You may switch to the display mode which changes a color. When configured in this way, even if the player can easily grasp the display mode for indicating the number of reserved special figures, it is possible to suppress the current number of reserved special figures from being easily identified. Therefore, the same effect as in this control example can be obtained.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 124(b), a rabbit-like character 1801 is displayed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm to indicate that the second special symbol is currently changing. As described above, the special symbol lottery (fluctuation) and the normal symbol lottery (fluctuation) are executed in parallel (overlapping), so the period during which the normal pattern per game is executed is the first special symbol. There are cases where it overlaps with the fluctuation period (see FIG. 124(a)) and cases where it does not overlap. When the regular pattern winning game is executed overlapping with the period of fluctuation of the first special pattern, the second special pattern lottery is executed after the first special pattern fluctuation being executed is completed, and the first special pattern is drawn. When it does not overlap during the fluctuation period, the second special symbol lottery is executed immediately after the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 during the normal pattern per game (during the normal per pattern game). In other words, the execution timing of the second special symbol lottery is different according to the fluctuation situation of the first special symbol when the game per normal pattern is executed, and the special symbol variation currently being executed is the first special symbol. A problem arises in that it becomes difficult for the player to accurately determine whether it is a variation or a second special symbol variation.

On the other hand, in this control example, when the second special symbol variation is executed, the character 1801 is displayed in the main display area Dm. It is possible to inform the player whether it is the 1st special symbol variation or the 2nd special symbol variation in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, with reference to FIG. 125(a) and FIG. 126, the effect contents of the pseudo variable effect (special variable effect) among the variable effects executed during the chance zone will be described. Figure 125 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display screen when the third symbol is temporarily stopped during special variation production, Figure 125 (b) is a special figure 2 holding ball FIG. 126 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display screen when the third symbol restarts in the special variation effect executed in the acquired state, and FIG. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display screen when the third symbol is restarted in the special variation effect that is executed in the non-starting state.

Here, the contents of the special fluctuation production (pseudo-variation production) will be explained. This special variation performance is a variation performance in which the third symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) during the variation period of one second special symbol variation, and then restarted. It is a pseudo variation production that makes you think that the pattern variation has been executed. First, using the first half period (about 10 seconds) of the special variation production, reach production is executed, and at the end timing of the first half period, as shown in FIG. ”) to temporarily stop the third symbol (in the figure, the third symbol is displayed with a wavy line). At this timing, that is, at the end timing of the first half period of the special variation performance, the characters "sorry" suggesting that the result of the special symbol lottery is lost are displayed in the sub-display area Ds, and the player is given a chance. It is constructed so as to make one think that the second special symbol lottery executed during the zone was lost. In other words, in the first half period of the special variable performance, a special first half performance is executed in which the ready-to-win performance with the expectation of winning the jackpot is stopped (temporarily stopped) with the performance result indicating the failure.

After that, in the second half period (about 30 seconds) of the special variable performance, a variable performance (special second half performance) for restarting the temporarily stopped third symbol is executed. This special second half effect is configured to vary its effect mode according to the number of special figure 2 reservations that have already been acquired. , the special second half production is executed in a production mode corresponding to the second special symbol variation in the chance zone, and in a state where the special figure 2 reserved ball is not secured, as shown in FIG. 126, the chance zone A special second half performance is executed in a performance mode corresponding to the first special symbol variation which is executed after the end of. That is, in this control example, as a special variation effect, the type of special symbol variation to be executed after the second special symbol variation in execution is completed is determined based on the number of special symbol reservations, and the effect corresponding to the determination result The production mode of the special second half production is set in the mode. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think more strongly that a plurality of special symbol variations are executed during one second special symbol variation.

Furthermore, in this control example, when the special second half production is executed in the production mode corresponding to the second special symbol variation in the chance zone (see FIG. 125 (b)), the acquired special figure 2 reservation number , the number of times the third symbol is temporarily stopped during the second half period is made different. Although detailed description is omitted, when the special variation effect is executed, if neither the special figure 2 reserved ball nor the special figure 1 reserved ball is secured, the second shown in FIG. 125 (a) Without executing the temporary stop display of the 3 patterns, the fluctuation performance (variation performance without temporarily stopping and displaying the 3rd pattern even once) is executed using the entire fluctuation period of the 2nd special pattern fluctuation. It is configured as follows. As a result, the above-mentioned special variation production is executed only in the state where the number of special symbols reserved is secured, so it is more likely that multiple special symbol variations are executed during one second special symbol variation. can make you think strongly.

In addition, only when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit, a production mode is set in which the number of temporary stops of the third symbol executed during the second half period is different from the number of reserved special symbols 2 that have already been acquired. It is configured so that Therefore, for example, when the third symbol is temporarily stopped five times or more, the player can expect that the second special symbol variation being executed has won a jackpot. As described above, in this control example, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between when the third symbol is temporarily stopped and when it is stopped. hard. Therefore, the number of times of temporary stop display and the number of times of stop display are mixed to make the user think that the temporary stop display has been performed five times or more, or part of the temporary stop display is mistaken as the stop display, and the temporary stop display is actually performed five times or more. In spite of this, it is possible to make the player think that the number of times of temporary stop display has not reached 5 times, and to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the effect result.

It should be noted that a configuration other than this may be used as the effect mode of the special variation effect, for example, in order to allow the player to easily grasp the number of times the third symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed during one second special symbol variation. The number of temporary stop display times may be displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, or the third symbol temporarily stopped during one second special symbol variation. At least a part of the effect mode of the special variable effect (for example, the color of the background, the effect of the third pattern, etc.) may be changed stepwise according to the number of times. Further, it is also possible to display a display mode indicating the number of times the temporarily stopped third symbol is displayed again (for example, the first time, the second time) at the timing of redisplaying the temporarily stopped third symbol.

As shown in FIG. 126, when the special variation effect is executed in a state where the special figure 2 reserved ball is not secured, the characters "chance zone end" are displayed as a display mode indicating that the chance zone has ended. Effect that the variation display of the third symbol displayed in the display area Ds and executed in the main display area Dm becomes the variation display corresponding to the first special symbol variation (variation display in which the third symbol varies in the horizontal direction). Since the mode is executed as a special second half performance, after making the player think that the chance zone has ended, the performance result of the special variation performance, that is, the lottery result of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. Become. Therefore, it is possible to provide an unexpected performance to the player.

Although detailed description will be given later, in this control example, the above-described special variation effect is executed in part of the second special symbol variation in the normal state, and other than that, the second special symbol variation is performed once. On the other hand, it is configured so that one variation performance is executed. Therefore, when a plurality of (maximum 4) special figure 2 reserved balls are acquired in the normal figure per game, it is possible to suppress the execution of the special variation effect for an unnecessarily long time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 127, the content of the effect executed during the jackpot ending period in this control example will be described. FIG. 127(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display mode displayed in the first half period of the ending period of the normal jackpot game, and FIG. 127(b) is the ending of the probability variable jackpot game. FIG. 127(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode displayed in the first half period of the period, and FIG. 127(c) is a display mode displayed in the second half period of the ending period of the normal jackpot game. FIG. 127D is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example, and FIG. 127D is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display mode displayed in the second half period of the ending period of the probability variable jackpot game. .

In this control example, if the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won during the normal state is a jackpot game (variable probability jackpot game) in which the variable probability state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is likely to be set, the player The jackpot ending period is set longer than in the case of a jackpot game (normal jackpot game) in which the probability variable state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is difficult to set. Specifically, in the probability variable jackpot game, the jackpot ending period is set to 17 seconds, and in the normal jackpot game, the jackpot ending period is set to 15 seconds. By configuring in this way, during the ending period (before the probability change state is set), the game content changes greatly through the jackpot game (shifting from the normal state to the probability change state) to the player. It can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, the content of the game to be executed after the end of the jackpot game can be notified to the player using a long ending period.

In addition, in this control example, as described above, even when the probability variable jackpot game is executed, the winning ball of the variable winning device 65 must flow down to the specific area (V gate) 65v (see FIG. 120). It is configured so that the probability change state is not set. Therefore, when the ball cannot be made to flow down to the specific area (V gate) 65v during the probability variable big winning game, the probability variable state is not set after the probability variable big winning game ends, and the time is reduced like the normal big winning game. State (low probability state of special design, high probability state of normal design) is set.

In this case, if the notification effect indicating that the probability variable state is set during the ending period of the probability variable jackpot game is executed, the content of the effect of the notification effect and the actually set game state will be different, and the player will not be notified. There was a problem of giving dissatisfaction. Furthermore, when switching the effect mode of the notification effect executed during the ending period (17 seconds) of the probability variable jackpot game to the effect mode of the notification effect executed during the ending period (15 seconds) of the normal jackpot game, There is a problem that the length of the actual ending period and the length of the performance period of the notification performance are different, and the notification performance that makes the player feel uncomfortable is executed.

Therefore, in this control example, the jackpot ending period is divided into the first half period and the second half period, and the length of the second half period is set to be a uniform period (7 seconds) regardless of the type of the jackpot game. there is Then, the effect mode of the notification effect to be executed in the second half period is determined according to the game state set after the end of the jackpot game.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 127, when the normal jackpot game is executed, the time saving state is set for the first half period (8 seconds) as the notification effect executed during the jackpot ending period. The characters "chance mode 100 times" are displayed (see Fig. 127 (a)), and after that, for the second half period (7 seconds), when the jackpot is won during the time saving state (second special symbol lottery ), a notification effect (see FIG. 127 (c)) is executed in which the characters "Hit and Super Chance GET in Chance Mode" are displayed as a game guidance mode to indicate that the variable probability state is likely to be set. It is configured as follows.

On the other hand, when the probability variable jackpot game is executed, as a notification effect executed during the jackpot ending period, "super chance mode 100" suggesting that the probability variable state is set for the first half period (10 seconds) 127(b)), and after that, in the second half period (7 seconds), as a mode of calling attention that is not directly related to the content of the game, "Please be careful not to forget to take your cards". is configured to execute a notification effect (see FIG. 127(d)) in which the characters are displayed.

In this control example, the effect mode of the notification effect executed during the above-described jackpot ending period is configured to be set in advance at the timing when the jackpot game is executed. As a result, during the jackpot game in which various control processes are executed, there is no need to execute the process for determining the performance mode of the notification performance every time, so the processing load of the control process executed during the jackpot game is reduced. can be made

Here, the case where the ball could not flow down to the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game will be described even though the variable probability jackpot game is executed. In this case, among the display modes shown in FIG. A process of switching to the notification effect (see FIG. 127(c)) executed in the latter half period (7 seconds) of the ending period of the game is executed.

More specifically, as the display mode shown in FIG. 127(a), a display layer (display layer) in which the characters "super" are displayed and a display layer (display layer) in which the characters "chance mode 100 times" are displayed ( The display layer) is different from the display layer), and the characters "Super" are displayed based on the determination result of whether or not the ball was able to flow down to a specific gate during the jackpot game (display layer) ) can be switched between the presence and absence of a display instruction. As a result, it is possible to execute a notification effect corresponding to the determination result as to whether or not the ball can be made to flow down to the specific gate during the jackpot game by a simple control process. Furthermore, since the presentation mode is switched during the period set with the same length as the second half period of the jackpot ending period, the presentation mode of the notification presentation can be switched without making the player feel uncomfortable.

In this control example, the length of the jackpot ending period varies depending on the jackpot type, but the length of the jackpot ending period may be unified for all jackpot types without being limited to this. In addition, in this control example, the second half period of the jackpot ending period is set as a period having the same length for all the jackpot types. The length may be the same for each type. Furthermore, when there are three or more jackpot types, it is not necessary to set the same period for all the jackpot types. Thus, the jackpot type B and the jackpot type C may be configured so that the second half period of the jackpot has the same length.

In addition, in this control example, it is configured to set ending periods of different lengths according to the type of jackpot that has been won. It may be configured to have different thicknesses.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 128 to 130, the details of the effects executed during the chance mode will be described. The pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured such that the high-probability state of normal symbols is set 100 times after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, when the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game, the special symbol high probability state is set 50 times after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, although detailed description will be given later, it is possible to set the case where the V notification effect is executed to notify that the ball in the jackpot game has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v, and the case where the V notification effect is not executed. It consists of

Then, when the V notification effect is executed during the jackpot game, the variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set after the jackpot game is completed. When the effect mode (special chance mode) is set and the V notification effect is not executed during the jackpot game, that is, when the ball does not pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game, or the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v, but the V notification effect is not executed, the effect mode ( chance mode) is set.

When the chance mode is set as the effect mode, the characters "in chance mode" are displayed on the upper side of the main display area Dm, and a normal symbol high probability state is displayed in the small display area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds. A remaining period notification mode for indicating the period until the end is displayed (see FIG. 128(a)). The example shown in FIG. 128(a) shows a state in which the 20th special symbol variation is executed after the chance mode is set, and the special symbol variation is 80 times remaining as the remaining period notification mode. The characters "80 times" are displayed to indicate that the chance mode will end if executed.

In this way, when the chance mode is set as the production mode, from various display modes displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, whether the current game state is a probability variable state or a time saving state. can be made difficult for the player to comprehend, the game can be played while expecting the current game state to be a game state (probability variable state) advantageous to the player.

In addition, only when the V notification performance is not executed during the jackpot game, even if the variable probability state is set after the jackpot game ends, the chance mode can be set as the performance mode, so that the jackpot game is performed. In spite of the notification that the ball passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v, that is, that the variable probability state is set after the jackpot game is finished, the chance mode is set after the jackpot game is finished, and the game is played. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a person is confused. In addition, when a V notification effect for notifying that the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v is executed during the jackpot game, the effect for indicating that the variable probability state is set after the jackpot game ends. Since the super chance mode is set as the mode, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In this control example, if the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game but the V notification effect is not executed, the chance mode is selected as the effect mode after the jackpot game ends. Although it is configured to be set, it is not limited to this, and in some cases when the V notification effect is not executed even though the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game. , super chance mode may be set. In this case, for example, at the end of the jackpot game (after it becomes impossible (difficult) to let the ball pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game this time), during the jackpot game this time Determination of whether the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v and determination of whether the V notification effect has been executed are performed, and the result of determination that the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v and the V notification effect In the determination result that is not executed and part of the case obtained (when a specific lottery result is obtained in a predetermined lottery), the probability variable state is set during the ending period of the jackpot game 127(b) and 127(d)), and the super chance mode may be set as the effect mode after the end of the jackpot game.

By configuring in this way, even if the V notification effect is not executed during the big win game, the possibility of setting the super chance mode can be left, so that the player can continue to play until the big win game ends. can be made to play a game with a sense of anticipation.

As described above, in this control example, when the chance mode is set as the effect mode set after the end of the jackpot game, the time saving state is set as the game state, and the variable probability state is set. and will occur. Then, regardless of which game state is set, the remaining period of the period during which the high-probability state of the normal symbol continues is displayed. In other words, as a game state set after the end of the jackpot game, as an advantageous game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, a first advantageous game state (probability variable state) and a second advantageous game state (time reduction state). can be set, the first advantageous gaming state continues for a predetermined first period (the period until the special symbol variation is executed 50 times after the end of the jackpot game), and the second advantageous gaming state is A second period longer than the above-described first period (a period until the special symbol variation is executed 100 times after the end of the jackpot game) is configured to continue, and a first advantageous game state is set after the end of the jackpot game. After that, when the first period elapses, the second advantageous gaming state is set until the second period elapses, and the normal state is set when the second period elapses. In the configured game machine, regardless of whether or not the probability variable state is set after the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to execute the remaining period notification for indicating the remaining period of the period (second period) until the advantageous game state ends. It consists of

With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner of the period during which the advantageous game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state continues. Furthermore, in this control example, in the state where the remaining period of the second period (the remaining period of the chance mode) is set, to suggest to the player whether the current game state is a probability variable state or a time saving state The game state suggesting effect is configured to be executable using the notification mode (display mode) of the remaining period notification.

Here, with reference to FIG. 128(b), the contents of the game state suggestive effect executed during the chance mode will be described. FIG. 128(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display contents of the game state suggestion effect executed during the chance mode. As shown in FIG. 128(b), when the chance mode is set in a state where the variable probability state is set and the predetermined notification condition is established, the display mode of the remaining period notification displayed in the small display area Ds2 is changed. A variable game state suggestion effect (in FIG. 128(b), displayed in a white display mode) is executed. Then, in the small display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds, a comment "Expectation of big win UP" is displayed. By configuring in this way, the player is predicted which game state is set among the advantageous game states while informing the player of the period until the end of the advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player. It can provide fun to let you. Although detailed description is omitted, in this control example, the same display mode as the display mode shown in FIG. If the special figure 2 reserved ball contains information to win a jackpot, within the period in which the probability variable state can be set in the chance mode (after the jackpot game ends, special symbol fluctuation is executed 50 times) (within the period).

By configuring in this way, various information more advantageous to the player (information indicating that the variable probability state is set, Since the information about winning the jackpot) can be displayed using the same display mode, it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand. In addition, even if the time saving state is actually set, it is possible to display the display mode that is likely to be displayed when the variable probability state is set based on the jackpot winning, so it is higher than the design value. It is possible to make the player think that the variable probability state is set at a rate, and it is possible to increase the player's willingness to play.

In addition, it may be configured to execute the production during the chance mode using a technical concept different from the technical concept of this control example described above. , jackpot winning, or if the acquired special figure 2 reserved ball contains information to win a jackpot, a suggestion production for suggesting that the currently set gaming state is a time-saving state (for example, 128(a) and 128(b) (display mode in which Chinese numerals are displayed) may be executed. As a result, in the advantageous game state, the player can be made to think that he or she has won a jackpot during the time saving state which is more disadvantageous to the player than in the variable probability state, and the player's willingness to play can be enhanced. In addition, since the rate at which the variable probability state is set as the game history can be shown to be lower than the actual rate, the game can be played while making the player expect that the variable probability state will be set in the next big winning game.

As described above with reference to FIGS. 128(a) and 128(b), in the first control example, the display mode of the remaining period notification mode for indicating the period (remaining period) during which the chance mode continues is variable. A game that suggests the currently set game state to the player who is carefully watching the remaining period of the chance mode by configuring the game state to suggest the currently set game state to the player. Although it is configured to make it easy to grasp the state suggesting effect, the game state suggesting effect may be executed using a mode other than the remaining period notification mode, for example, when the variable probability state is set. The first display mode (e.g., "chance" character) that is easier to display than when the time saving state is set, and when the time saving state is set, the probability variation state is set. It may be configured to display the second display mode (for example, the characters "pinch") that are likely to be displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, or display on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 The game state suggesting effect may be executed by varying the display mode of the third symbols (main symbol sz, sub-symbol fz).

In addition, in the first control example, both the high probability state of the special symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol are configured to end when the number of executions of the special symbol variation reaches a predetermined number of times. As shown in 128 (a), (b), the display of the remaining period notification to inform the remaining period that the chance mode continues (the remaining period in which the high probability state of the special symbol or the high probability state of the normal symbol can continue) The pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to suggest the current game state by using the mode, and for example, the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the high-probability state of the special symbols continues until the next big win game is executed. , the configuration of the chance mode described above may be used. In this case, as the duration of the chance mode, if the time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set, the remaining period until the high probability state of the normal symbol ends (time saving The period until the state ends) is configured to be notified by the remaining period notification, and when the remaining period notified by the remaining period notification has passed, if the working hours reduction state is set, the normal state Execution of the production notifying that it has shifted, and when the variable probability state is set, the display mode indicating that the high probability state of the special symbol continues until the next big hit game is executed, that is, variable probability It is possible to execute an effect in which characters of "congratulations" are displayed as a display mode indicating that the remaining period in which the state continues is the period until the next big win, and during the period in which the chance mode is set, predetermined notification conditions are set. It may be configured to display the characters "Congratulations" when the is established.

In other words, the remaining period of the chance mode exists instead of the remaining period notification mode (see FIG. 128(a)) which is updated at any time corresponding to the remaining period of the chance mode which is updated each time the special symbol lottery is executed. 128(a), a remaining period notification mode that does not indicate the number of remaining lotteries for special symbols that can be executed during the chance mode. Alternatively, by varying the display mode (for example, changing the display color) in correspondence with the length of the remaining period of the chance mode, the remaining period that can roughly inform the length of the remaining period of the chance mode A notification mode may be used. Furthermore, a plurality of remaining period information modes are configured to be displayable, and by combining the display modes of the displayed plurality of remaining period information modes, the player can grasp the length of the remaining period of the chance mode. You can

Next, with reference to FIGS. 129 and 130, description will be given of the effect executed when the player operates the operation means during the chance mode. In this control example, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the frame button 22 (see FIG. 119), various effects (operation effects) can be executed based on the details of the operation and the timing of the operation. ing. Although detailed description is omitted, an operation effect of changing the background image displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and a variation effect executed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 As a part of the above, guidance information is provided for the player to operate the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the performance mode is different from when the player does not operate the frame button 22. and an operation effect for enlivening the variation effect executed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 are executed. As a result, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game other than the action of shooting the ball, thereby preventing the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

Here, among the operation effects described above, the contents of various operation effects executed during the chance mode will be described. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 18, but in this control example, when the advantageous gaming state (time saving state, variable probability state) is set, according to the number of special symbol fluctuations after the advantageous gaming state is set It is configured so that different fluctuation times can be selected at each time. Specifically, the first period (high-speed fluctuation period) in which a short fluctuation time (for example, 5 seconds) is likely to be selected during the period in which the number of special symbol fluctuations is "1st to 20th" after the advantageous gaming state is set. Therefore, the period of "21st to 49th time" is the second period in which a longer variation time (for example, 10 to 30 seconds) is likely to be set than the first period, and only the "50th time" has a specific variation time (for example, , 20 seconds) is set, and the period of "51st time to 100th time" is set to be the third period in which the same fluctuation time (for example, 10 to 30 seconds) as the second period is likely to be set. It consists of

In other words, during the predetermined period (first period) after the chance mode is set, ie, the predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game, the special symbol fluctuation is likely to be executed in a short fluctuation time. When winning, it is possible to facilitate execution of a plurality of jackpot games at short intervals. As a result, the next big winning game may have been executed as part of the previous big winning game. It is possible to make the player think that, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Then, in the second period and the third period described above, the special symbol variation with a shorter variation time is more likely to be executed than when the normal state is set, and the special symbol variation with a longer variation time than the first period is executed. It is designed to be easy. As a result, during the chance mode, it is possible to secure a period for executing a suggestive effect for suggesting whether the game state currently set during one special symbol variation is the time-saving state or the probability variable state. can. In addition, in a specific period (50th special symbol variation after the advantageous gaming state is set), a special symbol variation of a specific variation time (20 seconds) is always executed, and a probability variation state is set for the player. It is configured such that a suggestive effect for 20 seconds is executed to suggest whether or not the player is in the state of being (is) in the state.

In this way, by making it possible to select a different variation time according to the number of executions of special symbol variation, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to each number of variations using an appropriate period.

FIG. 129(a) shows a state in which the chance mode is set as the effect mode, and a normal state is set internally, and is displayed during a period other than the high-speed fluctuation period (during the normal fluctuation period). FIG. 129(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents, and FIG. 129(b) schematically shows an effect mode when the frame button 22 is operated during the display effect displayed in FIG. 129(a). It is a schematic diagram shown. In this control example, the player can arbitrarily select the background image displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 during the normal fluctuation period in the chance mode, and the player presses (operates) the frame button 22. By doing so, the sea background (sea mode) and the mountain background (mountain mode) are switched and displayed alternately.

As shown in FIG. 129(a), when the background image can be switched, an icon HR10 resembling a frame button 22 is displayed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm to indicate that it is operable ( In the drawing, an arrow pointing in the button pressing direction) is displayed, and in the small display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds, characters "sea mode" are displayed to indicate that the sea mode is currently set. there is When the player operates the frame button 22 in this state, the display is switched from the "sea mode" to the "mountain mode" as shown in FIG. 129(b).

Next, with reference to FIG. 130, the contents of the operation effect during the high-speed fluctuation period in the chance mode will be described. In this control example, when the frame button 22 is operated during the high-speed variation period (the period from when the time saving state and probability variation state are set until the 20th special symbol variation ends), the background image is not switched and displayed ( difficult). In other words, if the background image is switched and displayed during the high-speed fluctuation period in which a short fluctuation time (5 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation time of one special symbol fluctuation, it will be displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. Since the display mode changes frequently and it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the result of the special symbol lottery, the background image is configured not to be switched (difficult to display). However, if all the player's operations on the frame buttons 22 during the high-speed fluctuation period are invalidated, there is a problem that the player's desire to play is reduced.

Therefore, in this control example, when the player operates the frame button 22 during the high-speed fluctuation period, a different effect is executed instead of the switching display of the background image. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 130(a), during the high-speed fluctuation period in the chance mode, the characters "special mode" are displayed in the small display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds, and the current period is the high-speed fluctuation period. The player is notified that During this "special mode", regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery, a special symbol variation with a variation time of 5 seconds is executed, and the variation effect of the third symbol is also a variation effect exclusively for the "special mode". be done. Also during the "special mode", the icon HR10 is displayed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm, and when the player presses the frame button 22, it is displayed in the small display area Ds2 as shown in FIG. 130(b). A game state suggesting effect is executed in which the display mode of the remaining period information is varied.

In this way, even when the player performs the same operation (pressing the frame button 22), by varying the effect content of the operation effect to be executed depending on the operation timing, various effects can be given to the player. The game can be motivated to operate the frame button 22 at appropriate timing. Further, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 129(a) or FIG. 130(a), the guidance display (icon HR10) for guiding the player to operate (press) the frame button 22 is the same. When the player performs the same operation (depression of the frame button 22), the contents of the operation presentation to be executed are varied depending on the operation timing. Therefore, until the player actually operates (presses) the frame button 22, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand what kind of operation effect is to be executed, so that the player can operate the frame button 22 more willingly. can.

Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 18, in this control example, when the frame button 22 is operated during the high-speed fluctuation period, a plurality of operation effects can be executed, and each operation effect is selected. The ratio to be played is varied according to the set game state. In other words, it is possible to predict whether the currently set game state is the probability variable state or the time saving state depending on the appearance ratio of each operation effect executed during the high speed fluctuation period. Therefore, even if the same operation effect is repeatedly executed during the high-speed fluctuation period, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play.

Further, in this control example, the switching display of the background image is performed when the frame button 22 is pressed only when the predetermined condition is satisfied even during the high-speed fluctuation period. Specifically, if the second special symbol reserved ball (special figure 2 reserved ball) acquired during the high-speed fluctuation period contains information to win a jackpot, a special figure containing information to win a jackpot A special pattern variation corresponding to the 2 reserved balls and a special pattern variation that is executed before the special pattern variation of the jackpot (It was acquired before the special pattern 2 reserved ball containing the information to win the jackpot. A special pattern variation corresponding to the special figure 2 holding ball) and a special variation performance using the variation time can be executed, and the player can execute the special variation performance in a state where the conditions for executing the special variation performance are satisfied. When the frame button 22 is pressed, the background image is switched from the currently displayed background image (for example, sea mode) to a dedicated special background image (for example, space mode). That is, when the switching display of the background image is executed based on the fact that the player presses the frame button 22 during the high-speed fluctuation period, the expectation of winning the jackpot increases, and the player is actively encouraged to win. can be made to press the frame button 22 .

In addition, even during the high-speed fluctuation period, the background image can be switched and displayed by performing a special operation (long press) on the frame button 22 . This special operation (long press) is determined to have been executed when the player continuously presses the frame button 22 for two seconds. The period until it is determined that the Therefore, since it is an operation that is difficult to perform frequently compared to the normal operation (pressing), even if the background image switching display is configured to be executable, frequent switching display of the background image is suppressed. be able to. In this control example, a long-pressing operation is used as a special operation in which the operation time is longer than that of the normal operation. , and a special operation performed by operating a plurality of operation units in a predetermined order may be defined.

Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the contents of the effect executed during the "super chance mode" in which the player is informed that the variable probability state is set will be described. FIG. 131(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the effect content when the first special symbol variation is executed during the "super chance mode", and FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the content of the production|presentation when the 2nd special design variation is performed in "chance mode."

In this control example, when the variable probability state (high-probability state of special symbols, high-probability state of normal symbols) is set, the second special symbol lottery is configured to be easily executed. Then, when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the probability variable state is set with a high probability (the probability variable jackpot game in which the ball can be easily flowed down to a specific gate during the jackpot game is always executed. ). Then, the variable probability state is configured to continue until the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times).

That is, once the variable probability state is set, the jackpot winning is won in the second special symbol lottery before the special symbol lottery of the predetermined number of times (50 times) is executed (the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special symbol is 1/50). ), it is configured so that the variable state can be looped with a high probability. Therefore, the player who is playing the game in the variable probability state can be motivated to play the game so as to quickly win the big win in the second special symbol lottery.

On the other hand, even in the state where the variable probability state is set, for example, the variable probability big win is won in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, and immediately after the big win game is completed and the variable probability state is set, that is, , In the state in which the probability variable state is set, the special figure 2 reserved ball is not obtained and the special figure 1 reserved ball is obtained, the first special symbol lottery is executed. In this control example, as described above, when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the probability variable jackpot game is executed at a rate of 100%, whereas when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, 50% of the game is the probability variable jackpot game, and the remaining 50% is the normal jackpot game. In other words, even if the variable probability state is set, there is a case where the variable probability state cannot be looped when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery.

In this way, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery during the variable probability state, if the player early determines that the jackpot won is a jackpot type (normal jackpot) in which a normal jackpot game is executed. , Since the player's willingness to play will decrease, in this control example, as a variation effect corresponding to the first special symbol variation executed during the probability variation state, the third symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot (Identification information with an odd number) and the third symbol (identification information with an even number) corresponding to the normal jackpot are in a ready-to-win state at the same time. It is designed to be easy. More specifically, when winning the normal jackpot in the first special symbol lottery executed during the variable probability state, the double reach production described above is always executed (Fig. 131 (a)). reference).

As a result, only the third symbol (identification information with an even number) corresponding to the normal jackpot is in the reach state when the first special symbol lottery executed during the variable probability state wins the normal jackpot. The performance can be prevented from being executed, and the player's prediction of winning a normal jackpot during the variation period of the special symbols can be suppressed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 131(a), in this control example, the small display areas Ds11 and Ds12 are formed during the "super chance mode" in the same manner as during the above-described "chance mode". On the other hand, it is configured to make it difficult to grasp the number of special figures pending. In the upper part of the main display area Dm, characters of "under super chance mode" are displayed as a display mode for informing the player that the current state is in the variable probability state.

Here, during the super chance mode, the double reach shown in FIG. Identification information with a number of 2) and double reach performance, which is a variation performance that is in a ready-to-win state at the same time) are executed, the special symbol variation being executed is the first special symbol variation Since there is a risk that the player will easily grasp, in this control example, even in the variation performance executed in correspondence with the second special symbol variation, the double reach performance shown in FIG. 131(a) can be executed. It consists of In other words, the double reach performance using the third pattern corresponding to the normal win can be executed in the variation performance corresponding to the second special symbol lottery in which the probability variable jackpot game is always executed when the big win is won. ing.

By configuring in this way, even if the double reach production shown in FIG. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to easily discriminate.

Furthermore, in this control example, when the double ready-to-win effect is executed as the variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol lottery, the type of the third symbol to be in the ready-to-win state at the timing when the middle symbol row Z2 makes one round is selected. As shown in FIG. 131 (b), the third pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot (identification information with the number 1 and identification information with the number 9) It is configured so that the promotion performance) is executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player in advance that the probability variable big winning game will always be executed when the special symbol lottery being executed has won the big winning. In addition, even when the double reach performance is executed as the variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, the player is expected to be promoted to the probability variable double reach halfway through the game. can be done.

In addition, in this control example, as a variable condition for changing (promoting) the double reach production being executed to the probability variable double reach production, when the fluctuation mode of the middle pattern Z2 becomes a predetermined mode (one round has passed) Although the variable condition to be established is set, it is not limited to this. A variable condition may be set which is established when the symbol) passes through the reach effective line, or is established when the operation result of the operation means (frame button 22) operable by the player is a specific operation result. It may be configured to set a variable condition.

In addition, in this control example, when the variable condition is established, the type of the third symbol that is in the ready-to-win state is configured to be variable. It may be configured to increase the number of patterns. More specifically, from the double reach state shown in FIG. 131(a), the blank symbols (represented by triangle marks in the drawing) are erased, and "3.2.1" is displayed in order from the left as the upper symbol row Z1. and "1, 2, 3" are displayed in order from the left as the bottom symbol row Z3 to execute a triple ready-to-win effect. Even if it is configured in this way, the triple reach production can increase the number of reach of the third symbol corresponding to the probability variable jackpot rather than the double reach production, so the probability variable jackpot in this special symbol lottery. It is possible to visually notify the player that there is a high possibility of winning the prize.

In addition, the technical concept described above may be applied to a variable effect that is executed in the normal state, for example, only the third symbol (identification information with an even number) corresponding to the normal jackpot is in the ready-to-win state. When the variable condition is established during the normal single reach production, the type of the third pattern that is in the reach state may be switched to the type of the third pattern that corresponds to the probability variable jackpot, or the third pattern that is in the reach state may be configured to increase the number of As a result, the player can play the game while expecting a more advantageous performance result to be provided until the variable performance ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 132, the relationship between the variation pattern of the special symbol selected in this control example and the effect mode to be executed will be described. FIG. 132(a) is a schematic diagram showing the flow of production when a variation pattern in which a non-reach variation production is executed is set as the variation production of the third symbol, and FIG. It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the effect when the variation pattern in which the reach variation effect is executed is set as the variation effect of the third symbol.

A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 25, but in this control example, as a variation pattern (variation time) for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, a variation pattern obtained by adding up the basic time and the addition time is used. stipulated. A period corresponding to the basic time is set as a common variation pattern, and a period corresponding to the addition time is set as a specific variation pattern.

In other words, in this control example, as the effect mode of the third symbol variation executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 to show the result of the special symbol lottery, the third symbol is displayed after the ready-to-win state is displayed. The period until the stop display is made different according to the type of the third symbol in the ready-to-win state. Then, the third pattern corresponding to the time set as the addition time is set as the third pattern in the ready-to-win state. By configuring in this way, the third symbol variation performance (the third symbol variation performance performed corresponding to the basic time) executed during a predetermined period after the third symbol starts to fluctuate is shared. can be made

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 132(a), in the case of the non-reach variation production, since the addition time is not set, a common variation pattern corresponding to the basic time (8 seconds) is set, and the third symbol The upper symbol row Z1 is stop-displayed at the timing when a predetermined period has passed since the start of the variable performance (for example, the timing when 5 seconds have elapsed), and after 1 second, the lower symbol row Z3 stops on the effective line so as not to cause a ready-to-reach state. 2 seconds later, the medium symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed in a stopped display mode indicating that the lottery result is lost. After that, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is finally displayed after a stop display period (determined time) of 1 second.

As shown in FIG. 132 (b), when the reach fluctuation production is executed, the basic time (30 seconds) is set, and as a common fluctuation pattern for 30 seconds, until 5 seconds have passed since reaching the reach state is set. In other words, the effect mode from when the ready-to-win state is reached to when the middle symbol row Z2 makes one turn is set as the common variation pattern. After that, an effect mode (ready-to-win pattern, stop pattern) is set according to the added time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the effect mode of the ending effect executed during the ending period of the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 133(a) shows the normal jackpot, FIG. 133(b) shows the flow of the ending period for the probability variable jackpot, and FIG. 133(c) shows the ball during the probability variable jackpot game. It shows the flow when it does not flow down the specific area (V gate).

As shown in FIG. 133, in this control example, the ending period (ED period) is different between the normal jackpot and the variable probability jackpot, and the ED period of 15 seconds for the normal jackpot and 17 seconds for the variable probability jackpot is set. Configure. And, it is configured such that an ending effect divided into a first half period and a second half period is executed (see FIG. 127).

In this control example, the effect mode in the ending period is set at the start timing of the jackpot game, and the ending period ( ED period) is determined at the start timing, and the ending display mode is switched based on the determination result.

First, with reference to FIG. 133(a), the contents of the effect during the ending period of the jackpot game when the normal jackpot game is executed will be described. In this control example, in order to suppress the increase in the processing load during the jackpot game due to the complexity of the various processes executed during the jackpot game, a round game (a prize ball can be obtained) is played during the jackpot game. game) is executed (before the start of the jackpot game or during the opening period of the jackpot game), the production mode of the production (ending display production) executed during the ending period of the jackpot game is determined. It consists of

To indicate to a player that when a normal jackpot game is executed, a "chance mode" is set (a time saving state is set) after the jackpot game ends before the opening period of the jackpot game ends. Set the display mode of the ending effect (see FIGS. 127(a) and 127(c)). In the normal jackpot game, since the ball does not pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game, a preset ending effect is executed as the ending effect of the jackpot game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 133(b) and 133(c), the contents of the effect during the ending period of the jackpot game when the variable probability jackpot game is executed will be described. When the probability variable jackpot game is executed, whether or not to execute the V notification performance during the jackpot game is determined by the end of the opening period of the jackpot game, and the performance mode of the ending performance is based on the determination result. to decide. Specifically, when a round game (V round game) in which the ball easily passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v is executed, the player is allowed to pass the ball through the specific area (V gate) 65v. and a V passage notification that notifies the player that the ball has actually passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v. When it is determined that the V notification effect is to be executed, as the ending effect, a display mode (Fig. 127 (b), (d)) is set. On the other hand, when it is determined that the V notification effect is not to be executed, the display mode (the display mode in FIG. 127(b)) for showing the player that the "chance mode" is set after the end of the jackpot game as the ending effect. 127(c)) is set with the display mode in which the display of "super" is deleted.

When executing the V notification effect, the comment "Aim for V" and the position of the specific area (V gate) 65v in the variable prize winning device 65 are displayed in accordance with the start of the V round (first round) game. Guidance information is executed in which a schematic diagram shown in a circle is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 . Then, when the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v, the V passage notification is executed in which the comment "V acquired!" is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. On the other hand, if the ball has not passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v for a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) despite the guidance notification being executed, the player is notified of the specific area ( Emphasized guidance information is executed to guide the ball passing to V gate 65v with more emphasis. Then, when the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v before the end of the V-round game, the above-described V passage notification is executed, and the ball is not allowed to pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v. When the round game ends, the characters "I'm sorry I didn't win V!" are displayed.

After that, when the ending period of the jackpot game arrives, it is determined whether or not to replace the display mode of the preset ending effect based on the actual game result of the V-round game. Here, as described above, when it is determined to execute the V notification effect at the start of the jackpot game, the display mode indicating that the "super chance mode" is set as the ending effect (FIG. 127(b), ( d) reference) is set in advance, so when the ball is passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the V-round game, the ending effect is executed without switching the display mode of the ending effect. . On the other hand, if it is not possible to pass the ball through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the V round game, the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, so the display mode of the ending effect is changed to "chance Execute processing (replacement processing) to switch to the display mode to indicate that the "mode" is set, and delete the display of "super" from the display mode after replacement (the display mode of FIG. 127(b) The ending effect is executed in the displayed mode shown in FIG. 127(c)).

Further, when the V notification effect is not executed, the V notification effect is not executed during the jackpot game as in the normal jackpot game, and from the various effect displays executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 , a jackpot game is executed in which it is not possible to grasp that the V round game is being executed and that the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v. Then, regardless of whether or not the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the V-round game, the ending effect is executed in a preset display mode. As a result, it is possible to provide a state in which the "chance mode" is set after the end of the jackpot game although the variable probability state is actually set.

Furthermore, if the "chance mode" is set while the variable probability state is set, the V notification effect is not executed during the jackpot game (during the variable probability jackpot game), so the variable probability state is set by the effect during the jackpot game. It is possible to make it difficult to grasp in advance what will be done. In addition, in this control example, when the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v in the jackpot game in which the V notification effect is not executed, the jackpot game ends even though the variable probability state is actually set. Although the "chance mode" is configured to be set later, it is not limited to this. However, it is configured so that the V passage notification is not executed at a predetermined rate, and when the V passage notification is not executed in spite of the ball passing through the specific area (V gate) 65v, after the end of the jackpot game. It may be configured such that a "chance mode" is set. Also, in this case, it is preferable that the V notification effect can be executed even when the normal jackpot game is executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier to cause the event in which the V passing notification is not executed despite the execution of the V notification performance, so that after the jackpot game in which the V notification performance is executed It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the setting of the "chance mode".

Next, with reference to FIG. 134, the flow of the effect mode set after the end of the jackpot game will be described. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, the first specific period (period until the special symbol fluctuation is executed 100 times) in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is predetermined after the end of the jackpot game is set. be done. Then, when the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game, the second specific period in which the high probability state of the special pattern is predetermined after the jackpot game is completed (special pattern variation is executed 50 times) is set). And, when the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is a time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), "chance mode" is set as the production mode (Fig. 134 (b )reference). Also, if the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is a variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), Depending on), the effect mode set after the end of the jackpot game is different, and as shown in FIG. When it is notified, that is, when the display mode of entering the "super chance mode" (see FIG. 127(b)) is displayed as the ending effect, the "super chance mode" is set as the effect mode (see FIG. 134(a) ) display a), during the jackpot game (during the ending period of the jackpot game), when it is not notified that the variable probability state is set, that is, the display mode of entering “chance mode” as the ending effect (Fig. 127 (a)) is displayed, a "chance mode" is performed as the effect mode (see display b in FIG. 134(a)).

As shown in the display a of FIG. 134 (a), when the "super chance mode" is set after the end of the jackpot game, the "super chance mode" continues until the variable probability state ends, and the game state changes to the variable probability state. When moving from to the time saving state, the display is switched to "chance mode". In this case, while the "super chance mode" is set, as shown in FIG. Is displayed. As a result, the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner of the period during which the game state most advantageous to the player continues. In addition to the display contents shown in FIG. 131(a), after the variable probability state ends, even if it is configured to execute a preliminary notification effect for notifying the player in advance that the time saving state is set 50 times. Well, for example, the remaining period mode indicating the remaining period of the probability changing state displayed in the small display area Ds2 (in FIG. 131 (a), it is displayed as white "49 times") is less than or equal to a predetermined period (for example, " 10 times or less), the remaining period mode indicating the number of times (50 times) that the time saving state to be set later continues is a display mode different from the remaining period mode indicating the remaining period of the variable probability state (for example, "50 times" is displayed without black). As a result, even after the variable probability state ends, it is possible to notify the player in advance that a game state (time saving state) more advantageous than the normal state is set.

Further, when the "super chance mode" is set, the remaining period mode (50 times) indicating the remaining period of the variable probability state and the remaining period mode (100 times) indicating the remaining period of the time saving state are displayed, Each time the special symbol variation is executed, each remaining period mode may be configured to be subtracted by 1, and after the remaining period mode (50 times) indicating the remaining period of the probability variation state and the probability variation state is completed The remaining period mode (50 times) indicating the remaining period of the time saving state to be set is displayed, and the remaining period mode indicating the remaining period of the definite variable state is subtracted first, and the remaining period of the definite variable state becomes 0, It may be configured such that when the state is shifted to the time saving state, the remaining period mode indicating the remaining time period of the time saving state is subtracted. Even in the case of such a configuration, a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state is set in advance for the player who is playing the game during the variable probability state after the variable probability state ends. can be notified to

134(a) and FIG. 134(b), the effect during the chance mode will be described. In this control example, a chance mode is set as an effect mode when part of the case where the variable probability state is set and when the time saving state is set. Then, during the chance mode, as described above with reference to FIG. 128, the game state suggesting effect for changing the notification mode of the remaining period notification is executed. The game state suggesting effect is set so that the chance mode during the variable probability state has a higher appearance rate than the chance mode during the time saving state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 135, the contents of the operation presentation during the chance mode will be described. In this control example, the effect mode of the operation effect executed during the chance mode (the effect executed based on the operation of the frame button 22 (operation means) by the player) is set to ), the operation timing, the operation method, and the set game state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 135 (a), during the chance mode when the time saving state is set, when the button PUSH "normal push" is executed as the operation method, the special symbol variation is 20 During the high-speed fluctuation period until the second execution, whether or not the variable effect being executed is in a ready-to-win state, "ready-to-reach suggestion" that suggests during the third symbol change, or the currently set game state It is configured to be able to execute the operation effect of suggesting "state suggestion", and after that (after the 21st special symbol change), it is configured to be able to execute the operation effect of "background mode transition" to shift the background mode. there is In addition, as an operation method, when executing a long press "long press" of the button, during the high-speed fluctuation period until the special symbol fluctuation is executed 20 times, the operation effect of "background mode transition" to transition the background mode can be executed, and during the period (during the second period) when the number of special symbol fluctuations is from 21 to 50 times, it is possible to execute the operation effect of "state suggestion" that suggests the currently set game state. After that (after the 51st special symbol change), the game state that was set in the past (when the "chance mode" was set (after the end of the jackpot game)) was set. ” is configured to be executable.

Further, as shown in FIG. 135(b), during the chance mode in the case where the variable probability state is set, when the button PUSH "normal push" is executed as the operation method, the special symbol variation is executed 20 times. During the high-speed fluctuation period up to, whether or not the variable effect being executed will be in a ready-to-win state, "reach suggestion" to suggest during the third symbol change, "state suggestion" to suggest the currently set game state ”, Alternatively, the operation effect of “background mode transition” for transitioning the background mode is configured to be executable, and during the period from 21 times to 50 times of the special symbol fluctuation (during the second period), “background mode transition ”, or “suggestion of state” can be executed, and after that (after the 51st special symbol fluctuation frequency), the operation production of “background mode transition” can be executed. In addition, as an operation method, when the button long press "long press" is executed, regardless of the number of special symbol fluctuations, it is configured to be able to execute the operation effect of "background mode transition" to transition the background mode. .

As described above, in this control example, when the time saving state is set, or in a part of the case where the variable probability state is set, it is configured to be able to set the "chance mode" as the production mode, The duration of the chance mode (100 times of time reduction) is divided into a plurality of periods according to the number of times of special pattern fluctuations executed during the chance mode, and the player operates for each set game state and period. It is configured such that the effect mode of the operation effect executed when the means (frame button 22) is operated is made different. As a result, when the chance mode is set, it is possible for the player to predict the currently set game state based on the content of the operation effect executed by the operation effect. It is possible to execute a game for intentionally operating the operating means.

As described above, in this control example, the predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game is the high-speed fluctuation period, and even if the frame button 22 is "normally pressed", the "background mode transition" is performed. Although the operation effect is configured to be less likely to be executed than other periods, the high-speed fluctuation period (period in which it is difficult to shift to the background mode) may be set at other timings, for example, after the jackpot game ends. The period until the execution of one special symbol variation is completed is defined as a normal time-saving variation period, and the second special symbol variation after the end of the jackpot game is performed until the 20th special symbol variation is performed. may be set as the high-speed fluctuation period.

By configuring in this way, for example, during the first special symbol fluctuation period after the end of the jackpot game, as a notice mode for notifying that the high-speed fluctuation period will be set, "The background mode cannot be changed from the next fluctuation." By displaying the comment "Choose your desired background now!" Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game cannot be executed in the desired background mode and the player's desire to play is lowered. Furthermore, as a guide mode for explaining the game content of the "chance mode" to the player using one special symbol fluctuation period after the end of the jackpot game, "the chance mode may be in a variable state. Don't give up!" and the comment "If the display mode of the remaining count changes, chance!" may be displayed together.

In addition, as in the first control example, when the high-speed fluctuation period is set from the first special symbol fluctuation after the end of the big win, the game period of the jackpot game executed before the high-speed fluctuation period is set. During a period (for example, during the ending period of the jackpot game), the background mode in the "chance mode" can be selected, and when the "chance mode" is set, during a predetermined period (during the high-speed fluctuation period), It is sufficient to notify the player that the background mode cannot be changed.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description is continued. The second symbol display device displays a symbol "○" and a symbol "x" as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) each time the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67. A variable display is performed by alternately lighting up for a predetermined period of time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that a ball has passed through a normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this control example), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is displayed at a predetermined symbol. It is configured to execute a winning game (ordinary figure winning game) that is in an operating state (open state) only for a time.

The time it takes for the second symbol to fluctuate (normal pattern fluctuation time) varies depending on the set probability state of the normal pattern (low probability state, high probability state), and the low probability state of the normal pattern ( Normal state) is set, 10 seconds is set as the normal pattern fluctuation time, and 3 seconds is set as the normal pattern fluctuation time when the high probability state of the normal pattern (variable state, time saving state) is set. configured to be As a result, it is possible to largely deviate the frequency at which the normal pattern per game is executed in the normal symbol low probability state and the normal pattern per game per frequency in the normal symbol high probability state. In other words, the high probability state of the normal pattern can increase the number of normal pattern lotteries (normal pattern lottery) that can be executed per unit time by shortening the normal pattern fluctuation time compared to the low probability state of the normal pattern. In addition, it is possible to make it easier to hit and win in the normal drawing lottery that is executed. Therefore, while making it difficult to execute the normal pattern winning game when the normal pattern low probability state is set, it is made easy to execute the normal pattern winning game when the normal pattern high probability state is set. can be done.

In addition, in this control example, the normal pattern high probability state is more advantageous than the normal pattern low probability state for the set general pattern fluctuation time and the winning probability. However, without being limited to this, only one of them may be configured to be advantageous to the player. For example, regardless of the probability state of normal symbols, the normal pattern fluctuation time of the same time (for example, 3 seconds) may be set, and only the winning probability may be different. As a result, for example, in order to make it difficult for the normal pattern per game to be executed during the low probability state of the normal pattern (during the normal state), the time required for the fluctuation display of the normal pattern (normal pattern fluctuation time) is longer than during the time saving state In a pachinko machine 10 configured to be longer in a normal state, a normal pattern winning game is executed from a normal state (ordinary pattern low probability state) in which the normal pattern winning game (normal pattern winning game) is difficult to be executed. When the game state shifts to an easy time-saving state (high-probability state of normal patterns), a long-time normal pattern fluctuation executed during the normal state (normal pattern per game that is more disadvantageous to the player than during the time-saving state) ) is shifted to the time saving state during execution, and the period in which the normal symbol lottery in the time saving state is not executed is set for a long time despite the fact that the time saving state is set. .

As described above with reference to FIG. 2, in the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, various devices are arranged in the game area of the game board 13, and the ball is displayed in the left area formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80. Even if the game (left-handed game) in which the balls are made to flow down and the game (right-handed game) in which the balls are made to flow down to the right side area are executed, there is no difference in the game value obtained by the player (it is difficult to occur). A game board 13 is configured. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2, various devices are arranged symmetrically with respect to the vertical line of the central portion of the game board 13, and the ball enters the lower area of the variable display unit 80. A first ball entrance 64 that can be a lottery opportunity for the first special symbol, and a first ball entrance 64 that is provided at a lower position of the first ball entrance 64 and can be a lottery opportunity for the second special symbol by entering the ball. 2 ball entrance 640, an electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 and opened in a normal pattern winning game executed when winning in a normal symbol lottery, and its second entrance. A variable winning device 65 is provided below the ball opening 640 and is opened in a big win game executed when a special symbol lottery wins a big win.

A ball shot in a left-handed game flows down the left side area and passes through a through gate 67 provided in the left side area at a rate of 1/2. The ball also flows down toward the first ball entrance 64 provided in the lower area by a nail planted in the game board 13. - 特許庁Here, the ball that has flowed down from between the nails enters two general ball entrances 63 . In this control example, about 1/50 of the balls flowing down the left side region enter either of the two general ball entrances 63, and the ball enters the general ball entrance 63. It is configured such that 10 prize balls (privileges) are awarded when the ball is entered.

The first ball entrance 64 is configured so that one ball can enter at a rate of one ball out of fifteen balls, and when a ball enters, four balls are paid out as prize balls. It consists of In the second ball entrance 640, when the electric accessory 640a is closed (shown in white in FIG. 2), the ball hardly enters, and when the electric accessory 640a is open ( In the state shown in black in FIG. 2), a ball is launched in a left-handed game and is configured so that one ball enters at a rate of about two balls flowing down the left side area. It is constructed such that one ball is paid out as a prize ball when the ball is entered. In addition, the variable winning device 65 is configured so that almost no balls enter the ball when the jackpot game is not executed, and the balls enter the ball at a ratio of about two balls to three balls during the jackpot game. It is constructed such that 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the game.

Here, the variable winning device 65 will be described. This variable winning device 65 is variable ball entry means that is opened in a big winning game executed when a special symbol lottery wins a big win, and the ball that has won the variable winning device 65 during the big winning game is variable. By passing through a specific area (V gate) provided in the internal area of the winning device 65, a high probability state of special symbols can be set after the big winning game is over.

In addition, depending on the type of the winning jackpot, a jackpot game (probability variable jackpot game) in which the ball entering the variable prize winning device 65 easily passes through a specific area (V gate) and a jackpot game (normal jackpot game) in which it is difficult to pass. In this control example, a normal game is performed during a jackpot game in which a ball that has won a prize in the variable prize winning device 65 easily passes through a specific area (V gate), that is, a jackpot game. For example, a jackpot (game) in which the ball can easily flow down to a specific area (V gate) is a variable jackpot (game), and a jackpot game in which the ball that has won the variable winning device 65 is difficult to pass through the specific gate. A jackpot (game) in which it is difficult to pass a ball through a specific area (V gate) even if a normal game is played during the jackpot game will be referred to as a jackpot (game).

In addition, as described above, even if the probability variable jackpot game is executed, if the ball cannot pass through the specific area (V gate) during the jackpot game, a high probability of special symbols after the jackpot game ends. The state (variable probability state) is never set. That is, in this control example, at the timing when the jackpot game is executed, the game state set after the jackpot game ends is not determined. Although detailed description will be given later, in this control example, in the round game executed in the first round of the jackpot game, the round game (V round game) that makes it easier for the ball to pass through the specific area (V gate) is configured to run. Therefore, the game state set after the jackpot game ends cannot be determined until the V-round game ends. In this way, the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is determined according to the game result during the jackpot game, so that the player can enjoy various benefits (prize balls, high probability state of special symbols) in the jackpot game. can be played in order to obtain, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

On the other hand, when the above-described configuration is used, the effect mode of the notification effect (for example, the effect mode of the jackpot ending period) for informing the player of the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is set in advance (for example, the jackpot (At the start of the game), it is necessary to set the performance mode of the notification performance during the jackpot game in which the control processing related to ball delivery and the control processing related to display are executed densely. There is a problem that control processing becomes complicated.

On the other hand, in this control example, when the probability variable jackpot game is executed, in advance (at the start of the jackpot game), an effect mode indicating that the probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends is set as the effect mode of the notification effect. Determining whether or not to switch the performance mode of the notification performance based on the result of the ball passing through the specific area (V gate) immediately before the notification performance is set and executed (for example, at the start of the jackpot ending period). is executed, and if the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate), a notification effect of a preset effect mode is executed, and if the ball has not passed through the specific area (V gate) Only in this case, the effect mode of the notification effect is switched. In this way, when a normal game is played during a jackpot game, an unexpected game state is set by preliminarily setting the performance mode of the notification mode by assuming a game state that is likely to be set after the jackpot game ends. Only when it is determined that the performance mode of the notification mode is switched, the frequency of execution of the control processing for setting the performance mode of the notification performance during the jackpot game can be reduced.

Furthermore, in this control example, the length of the jackpot ending period is made different between the probability variable jackpot game and the normal jackpot game, and the probability variable jackpot game that is advantageous to the player is set to have a longer ending period than the normal jackpot game. It is configured so that Thus, it is possible to inform the player that the variable probability state is set after the end of the big winning game in an easy-to-understand manner before the variable probability state is actually set (during the big winning game). On the other hand, when the variable probability state is not set after the end of the jackpot game, even if the state is notified for a long period of time, the player only feels uncomfortable, so the ending period is shortened.

Thus, if the length of the jackpot ending period is made different between the probability variable jackpot game and the normal jackpot game, the ball cannot flow down to the specific area (V gate) during the probability variable jackpot game. In addition, simply executing the process of switching the effect mode of the jackpot ending period to the effect mode executed during the ending period of the normal winning game will cause an uncomfortable notification effect during the ending period because the length of the ending period is different. I had a problem with it running. In addition, if a special effect mode is prepared in advance that is set only when the ball cannot flow down to a specific area (V gate) in the probability variable jackpot game, image data (effect data) for that effect mode will be created. ) has to be stored in advance in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114, resulting in an increase in storage capacity.

On the other hand, in this control example, the jackpot ending period is divided into the first half period and the second half period, and the length of the second half period is configured to be a common length regardless of the jackpot type (variable jackpot, normal jackpot). However, when the ball cannot flow down to the specific area (V gate) during the probability variable jackpot game, only the performance mode corresponding to the latter half of the jackpot ending period is changed to the latter half of the ending period of the normal jackpot game. It is configured to switch to the production mode set by pressing. As a result, there is no need to provide a dedicated performance mode used only when the ball cannot flow down to a specific area (V gate) during the probability variable jackpot game, and the player is not given a sense of incongruity. A notification effect can be executed.

In addition, in this control example, the jackpot ending period is divided into the first half period and the second half period, and the length of the second half period is configured to be a common length regardless of the jackpot type. can not flow down to a specific area (V gate). By executing the notification performance during the round period, the notification performance may be executed for a period longer than the actual jackpot ending period, or during a predetermined period after the jackpot ending period is set, The round performance executed during the final round period of the jackpot game is continuously executed, and then the notification performance is executed, whereby the notification performance for a period shorter than the actual jackpot ending period is executed. Also good.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured symmetrically. It may be configured so that there is no large deviation between the case of performing a left-handed game and the case of performing a right-handed game. The number of ball entry holes 63 is made smaller than the number of ball entry holes 63, and the ratio of balls entering the first ball entry hole 64 is higher in the left-handed game than in the right-handed game. A right-handed game is more difficult to obtain a prize ball than a right-handed game, but it is easier to execute the first special symbol lottery, and a right-handed game is easier to obtain a prize ball than a left-handed game, but it is difficult to execute the first special symbol lottery. It may be configured to In the case of such a configuration, during the normal state, that is, during the execution of the game in which the ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64, the player can play the game in any game method. It is possible to make the right-handed game more advantageous to the player than the left-handed game in the game in which the ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 (the game in the time-saving state or the variable probability state). .

Returning to FIG. 2, the description is continued. The normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is assembled in both the left side area (left side area) of the variable display unit 80 and the right side area (right side area) of the variable display unit 80. The through gate 67 of the area is configured so that 1/2 of the balls flowing down the left side area of the game board 13 can pass through. Also, the through gate 67 in the right area is configured so that 1/2 of the balls flowing down the right area of the game board 13 can pass through. When the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery of the second pattern, the variable display is performed by the second pattern display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery is performed. If the result is out, an "x" symbol is displayed as a stop symbol for variable display.

The number of times the ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is reserved up to one time in total, and the number of reserved balls is displayed on the second symbol reservation lamp 84 described above. The second pattern holding lamps 84 are provided one for the maximum number of holdings, and arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

In addition, as in this control example, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, the maximum number of held balls for passing the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is not limited to one, and may be set to two or more times (for example, eight times). In addition, the number of normal symbol starting openings (through gates) 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the mounting position of the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to the left side of the variable display device unit 80, but may be the right side of the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, in this control example, most of the balls flowing down the left side area of the game board 13 due to the left-handed game are configured to pass through the through gate 67. It may be configured to pass through the through gate 67 .

Returning to FIG. 2, the description is continued. Below the variable display device unit 80 (below the electric accessory 640a), a ball that is shot in a left-handed game and flows down the left area and a ball that is shot in a right-handed game and flows down the right area can win. A variable winning device 65 having an opening width of about 50 mm is provided. In this way, by providing the variable winning device 65 having a wide opening width, the ball flowing down the left side of the electric accessory 640a in the left-handed game and the ball flowing down the right side of the electric accessory 640a in the right-handed game are also variable. A winning device 65 can be made to win a prize.

Here, a specific configuration of the variable winning device 65 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 120(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 120(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow-down path of the winning ball in the variable winning device 65. is. As shown in FIG. 120(a), inside the variable prize winning device 65, a guide member 65d is provided, and a ball that has flowed down on the opening/closing door 65b in the open state and won the specific prize winning port 65a moves in the horizontal direction. configured to flow down to

Specifically, the ball that flows down the left area and enters the specific winning hole 65a from the left side of the variable winning device 65 flows down the left guide flow path 65d1 on the left slope of the guide member 65d, and flows down the first opening 65a1. guided to. In addition, the ball that flows down the right area and enters the specific winning port 65a from the right side of the variable winning device 65 flows down the right guide flow path 65d2 on the right slope of the guide member 65d and is guided to the second opening 65a2. be done.

Below the first opening 65a1 or the second opening 65a2, ball detection sensors (65s1, 65s2) for detecting winning balls in the variable winning device 65 are provided. When balls are detected, payout control is executed to pay out 15 balls as prize balls. In this way, an opening (first opening 65a1) through which a ball that has flowed down the left area and entered the variable winning device 65 can pass, and a ball that has flowed down the right area and entered the variable winning device 65 can pass through. By providing openings (second openings 65b1) to obtain, and providing ball detection sensors for each opening, even if the player performs a left-handed game during a jackpot game, a right-handed game can be performed. Also, a game with no difference can be executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 120(b), the flow of the ball that has won the specific prize winning opening 65a will be described. As shown in FIG. 120(b), the ball passing through the first opening 65a1 passes through the first ball detection sensor 65s1 and flows down the first flow path 65e1 and the second flow path 65e2 on the guide path 65e. , the third flow path 65e3 or the fourth flow path 65e4 depending on the switching state of the switching valve 65y.

A discharge port 65h1 is provided at the downstream end of the third flow path 65e3. Although not shown, a ball detection sensor is provided in the discharge path through which balls that enter the discharge port 65h1 flow down, and is configured to be able to count the number of balls that have entered the discharge port 65h1.

A specific area (V gate) 65v is provided in the fourth flow path 65e4, and a discharge port 65h2 into which a ball that has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v enters is provided at the downstream end. A detection sensor for detecting a passing ball is provided in the specific area (V gate), and when it is detected that the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v within a predetermined period of time during the jackpot game. The detection result is stored in the machine, and when the big win game ends, the game state after the big win game ends is set by referring to the stored result.

Here, the contents of operation of the switching valve 65y during the jackpot game will be described. The switching valve 65y is a variable member driven by a V-solenoid 209a (see FIG. 137) (not shown). When the closed state (see FIG. 120(b)) for flowing down to the third flow path 65e3 is maintained and the V solenoid 209a is energized (on state), the ball flowing down the second flow path 65e2 is moved to the fourth flow path. It is configured to maintain an open state for flowing down to the flow path 65e4.

This V solenoid 209a is normally in an off state, and is drive-controlled so as to be in an on state only for a predetermined period during the jackpot game. Specifically, when a specific round game (first round game) is started among a plurality of round games executed during the jackpot game, the state is turned on, and a specific round game (first round game (round game) is completed, or when the game time of a specific round game has passed a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds), it is driven and controlled to be in an OFF state. In other words, the switching valve 65y is configured to be switched as part of the jackpot control executed during the jackpot game.

With this configuration, only when the jackpot game is executed (when the jackpot control is executed), the ball can be won in the variable prize winning device 65, and the variable prize winning device 65 wins. It becomes possible to make the sphere flow down to the specific area (V gate) 65v. In addition, the privilege given based on the ball passing through the specific area (V gate) 65v (setting of the high probability state of the special symbol) is the end timing of the jackpot game (process executed at the end of the jackpot game) Since it is configured to be granted at , even if a fraudulent act of passing the ball through the specific area (V gate) 65v is performed at a timing other than during the jackpot game, the privilege is granted to the player. There is no

In this control example, in the jackpot control process executed during the jackpot game, switching control for switching the switching valve 65y is executed according to a predetermined rule based on the timing at which a specific round game is started. However, the switching control may be executed based on other triggers, for example, the start of the jackpot game may be used as the trigger for switching control, or the jackpot may be executed. The end of the opening period of the game may be used as the trigger for switching control, or the number of winning balls in the variable prize winning device 65 is measured during the jackpot game, and the switching control is executed when the measurement result reaches a specific number. It can also be used as an opportunity to execute. In addition, when the number of winning balls in the variable winning device 65 reaches a specific number as a trigger for executing the switching control, the number of balls in the entire jackpot game may be used as the determination target, or the number of balls in the round game unit may be determined. may be used as a determination target. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing during the jackpot game the state in which the ball is likely to pass through the specific area (V gate) is set.

Furthermore, the length of the opening period set when the jackpot game is executed and the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing door 65b may be changed for each jackpot type. By configuring in this way, even if it is configured to perform the same switching control for the switching valve 65y regardless of the jackpot type, the state where the ball can easily pass through the specific area (V gate) is set, it is possible to execute a jackpot game in which the ball is likely to reach the specific area (V gate) 65v and a jackpot game in which the ball is difficult to pass.

Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the configuration of the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example will be described. FIG. 121 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. As shown in FIG. 121, the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the bottom of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 which is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 21). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with an operation knob 121 of a variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 137) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

<Regarding the game flow of the pachinko machine in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 136, the game flow in this control example will be described. FIG. 136 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game flow in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example. Pachinko machine 10 of this control example, as shown in FIG. 3 types of game states, ie, a high probability state of symbols) and a time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), are configured to be settable, and an initial state (when the pachinko machine 10 is shipped). or after the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is operated (depressed), the normal state is set.

Then, during the normal state, a game mainly including the first special symbol lottery executed by entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64 is executed. In the normal state in which the low probability state of the special symbols is set, the probability of the big win of the special symbols is set to 1/200, and when the big win is won, the type of the big win is "jackpot A" (selection rate 1/2). and "jackpot B" (selection rate 1/2) is selected. When "jackpot A" is selected, a jackpot game (probability variable jackpot game) is executed in which the ball is likely to pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game, and "jackpot B" is selected. , a jackpot game (usual jackpot game) is executed in which it is difficult for the ball to pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game.

Then, when the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game, the variable probability state is set after the jackpot game ends. In this variable probability state, when the number of executions of the special symbol lottery (variation) reaches 50 times, or when a jackpot is won, the end condition is established and the state shifts to another game state. Specifically, when the number of executions of the special symbol lottery reaches 50 times in a state where the variable probability state is set, the game state changes from the variable probability state to the execution of the 51st special symbol lottery. Moved to short-time state. In addition, in this control example, the process of shifting the game state from the probability variable state to the time saving state is configured to be executed at the timing when the special symbol variation corresponding to the 50th special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed. , The 51st special symbol lottery should not be executed in a state in which the special symbol high probability state is set, for example, immediately after the 50th special symbol lottery is executed (at the start of the 50th special symbol variation). , or just before the execution of the 51st special symbol lottery (the conditions for executing the 51st special symbol lottery are met, but the timing when the special symbol lottery is not executed). may be transferred.

Since the probability variable state is a high probability state of normal symbols, the electric accessory 640a is more likely to be opened by a normal pattern winning game than a normal state of a low probability state of normal symbols, and a game mainly based on the second special symbol lottery. is executed. In the probability variable state in which the high probability state of the special pattern is set, the probability of the special pattern jackpot is set to 1/50. Any one of the selection rate 3/10), the "jackpot D" (selection rate 4/10), and the "jackpot E" (selection rate 3/10) is selected.

“Jackpot C” is a jackpot type in which 4 rounds of variable jackpot games are executed, “jackpot D” is a jackpot type in which 7 rounds of variable jackpot games are executed, and “Jackpot E” is 16 rounds. It is a jackpot type in which the probability variable jackpot game is executed. In other words, when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the probability variable jackpot game is always executed. Therefore, the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery in terms of the execution probability of the probability variable jackpot game.

Further, the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 141, but in this control example, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the 7-round game is always executed, and the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery. In this case, an average of 8.8 rounds (4 rounds 30%, 7 rounds 40%, 16 rounds 30%) are played. Therefore, the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery in terms of the average number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game. In addition, when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, there is a possibility that a 4-round game will be executed. If you win the jackpot. Therefore, the first special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the second special symbol lottery in terms of the minimum number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game.

Next, the time-saving state (low-probability state of special symbols, high-probability state of normal symbols) will be described. When "jackpot B" is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, when the number of times of the special symbol lottery executed during the probability variable state exceeds 50 times, or during the probability variable jackpot game can not be passed to the specific area (V gate) 65v, a time saving state is set. This time-saving state is configured to disappear until the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the end of the previous big win game reaches 100 times, or when a big win is won before reaching 100 times. . That is, when the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game (when the jackpot B is elected), the time saving state is set for the period from the end of the jackpot game until the special symbol variation is executed 100 times (time saving 100 times is set). On the other hand, when the number of special symbol lotteries executed in the variable probability state exceeds 50 times, the number of times of time saving is set to 50 times after the variable probability state ends.

During this time saving state, since it is a game state in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set similarly to the variable probability state described above, the electric accessory 640a is easily opened, and the game in which the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed. state. In addition, the lottery probability of the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state is the same as in the normal state. Therefore, in the time saving state, the second special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, and the special symbol lottery is executed with the same jackpot probability as in the normal state. That is, from the point of view of the ease of execution of the second special symbol lottery, the game state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

On the other hand, in the time-saving state, the special symbol lottery is executed with a jackpot probability lower than that in the variable probability state, and the ease of execution of the second special symbol lottery is the same as in the variable probability state. That is, from the point of the jackpot winning probability by the special symbol lottery, the time saving state is a game state more disadvantageous to the player than the variable probability state. In addition, in this control example, in the variable probability state and the time saving state, it is configured so that the ease of execution of the second special symbol lottery is the same, but not limited to this, for example, during the variable probability state The variation time of the second special symbol lottery to be executed is made different from the variation time of the second special symbol lottery to be executed during the time saving state, for example, the variation time is shorter during the probability variable state than during the normal state. , it may be configured to be able to execute the special symbol variation.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 137, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 137 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the setting of the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display results of the second symbol display device. to run.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controller by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the operation of the sub-controller such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In the main control device 110, the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the display setting in the first symbol display device 37, the display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and the display setting in the third symbol display device 81 Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 138, counters and the like provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. These counters, etc. are the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the setting of the display in the first design display device 37, the setting of the display in the second design display device 83, and the setting of the display in the third design display device 81. etc., it is used in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 .

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol jackpot type. The first hit type counter C2 used for , the stop type selection counter (C3) used to select the stop type that is out of the special symbol, and the initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first hit random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used.

In addition, the second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used to set the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4, and the variation used for selecting the variation pattern of the normal symbols. A type counter CS1 is used. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 156), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 167). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . The RAM 203 has a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a corresponding to the ball entering the first ball opening 64 consisting of four holding areas (first to fourth holding areas), and four holding areas (first holding area). to fourth area), and a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is provided, and the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a includes the Each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 is stored in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, and the second special In the symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a first hit random number counter C1, a first hit type counter C2, a stop type selection counter C3, and a variation type counter CS1 are provided in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the second ball entrance 64. Each value of is stored.

Then, when the special symbol starting condition (fluctuation condition) is established, various values stored in the first reserved area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b Of the various values stored in the reservation first area, the information on the special design corresponding to the special design type for which the next lottery is executed is shifted to the special design execution area and stored. Special symbol variation based on various values is started.

In this control example, two kinds of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) are used, but the number of special symbols may be one. Then, when the starting condition (variation condition) of the first special symbol or the starting condition (variation condition) of the second special symbol is satisfied, the first reserved area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area of the corresponding special symbol type. , are shifted to the special symbol execution area, and the special symbol variation based on the stored various values is started. By configuring in this way, even in the pachinko machine 10 using a plurality of special symbol types, each special symbol variation can be executed smoothly.

Furthermore, as in this control example, if the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of special symbol types (first special symbol, second special symbol), the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are performed. It may be configured to be executable at the same time (in parallel), and in this case, each special symbol reserved ball storage area (first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b) is a special symbol. It may be configured to have an execution area. Thereby, when the starting condition of each special symbol is established, the next special symbol variation can be quickly executed.

In addition, in this control example, the lottery result of the special symbol is configured to be only a big hit and a loss, but it is not limited to this, for example, in some cases where the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, It may be constructed so that the player can win a small prize that can give the player a privilege less than that at the time of winning the jackpot (a privilege different from that at the time of winning the jackpot). With such a configuration, even if the player does not win the jackpot, an opportunity to give the player a privilege can be provided, so that the amusement of the game can be improved. In this case, a small hit type counter is provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110, and the value of the acquired small hit type counter can be stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area, and when executing the special symbol lottery. It should be configured so that it can be referenced.

In addition, in the case that a special symbol lottery is configured to allow a small win, for example, the game state transition content based on the big win win and the game state shift content based on the small win win are configured to be different. Alternatively, for example, when a jackpot is won, the game state is shifted to a normal state at the start of the jackpot game, and a new game state can be set after the jackpot game ends based on the set jackpot type. When a small win is won, the small win game may be executed while maintaining the game state at the time of winning the small win, and the game state may not be shifted even after the small win game is finished.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the presence or absence of the transition of the game state and the content of the transition according to the winning type (big win, small win), so that it is possible to provide a game rich in variations. can.

Further, the RAM 203 of the present embodiment is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to the entry (passage of the ball) into the through gate 67 consisting of four reserved areas (first reserved area). In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, each value of the second winning random number counter C4 and the normal pattern variation type counter CS2 is stored in accordance with the timing of entering the through gate 67.

Then, when the starting condition (fluctuation condition) of the normal symbol is established, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b are shifted to the normal symbol execution area, and the stored various Normal design variation based on the value is started.

Next, referring to FIG. 138, each counter will be described in detail. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 999), and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 999 in the case of a counter that can take values between 0 and 999). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 399. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 167).

The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the first special It is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 in the symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by the first winning random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is the first winning random number table. If it matches the value of the random number set by 202a as a big hit, it is determined as a special symbol big hit.

Here, the first winning random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 140(a). FIG. 140(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first winning random number table 202a. This first hit random number table 202a is a table that defines random numbers (determined values) for determining a big hit in a special symbol lottery.

Specifically, in the first hit random number table 202a, the judgment value for judging a big hit is defined differently according to the game state (probability state of special symbols). As shown in FIG. 140 (a), for the low probability state (normal state, time saving state) of the special symbol as the game state, the value of the first per random number counter C1 "0 to 4" is the jackpot determination value , and other values (“5 to 999”) are defined as deviation determination values. In addition, for the high probability state (probability variable state) of the special symbol as the game state, "0 to 19" among the values of the first hit random number counter C1 is defined as the jackpot determination value, and other values ( "20 to 999") is defined as the deviation determination value. That is, since the update range of the first random number table 202a is 1000 of "0 to 999", the probability of being determined as a big hit in the low probability state of special symbols is 1/200 (5 out of 1000). Thus, in the high probability state of the special symbol, the probability of being determined as a big hit is 1/50 (20 out of 1000).

In this control example, two types of jackpot probabilities are set according to the game state. Alternatively, three or more types of jackpot probabilities may be set. In this case, for example, the special symbol jackpot probability may be changed for each of up to four game states set by combining the special symbol state and the normal symbol state, Simply, three or more types of special symbol states, such as a high probability state, a normal probability state, and a low probability state, may be set, and a different jackpot probability may be set for each state.

In addition, in this control example, two types of lottery results, "big hit" and "loss", are determined as the lottery result of the special symbol. , and may be configured to be capable of judging a "minor win" as one type of "out". When the "small win" is won, it is preferable to execute a small win game in which the variable winning device 65 is opened for a period shorter than the "big win" (for one round). By configuring in this manner, a small amount of privilege (prize ball) can be given to the player when the big hit is not won. In addition, when the "small win" is one type of "miss", it is possible to give the player a prize ball by the small win game, but since the big win is not won, the game state is changed ( setting a game state different from the game state at the time of winning) is not executed. As a result, it is possible to clearly differentiate the privilege given to the player based on the winning of the big prize and the privilege given to the player based on the winning of the small prize.

As described above, when the configuration is such that a "small win" can be won as a special symbol lottery result, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 corresponding to the "small winning" is defined in the first winning random number table 202a. It should be configured as follows. By configuring in this way, the big winning lottery and the small winning lottery of special symbols can be executed in the same process, so compared to the case where the big winning lottery and the small winning lottery are executed in different processes, the main control The processing load of the device 110 can be reduced. In addition, in one special symbol lottery, it is possible to prohibit the winning of both a big win and a small win.

The first win type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is won, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is stored in the RAM 203 It is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 in the one special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

The value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. In this embodiment, using the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2, the first hit type selection table 202c is referred to to determine the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. Here, the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 141(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the jackpot type selection table 202d. As shown in FIG. 141(a), this jackpot type selection table 202d includes a special figure 1 jackpot table 202d1 that is referred to when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, and a lottery of the second special symbol. It has a special figure 2 jackpot table 202d2 that is referred to when a jackpot is won.

First, with reference to FIG. 141(b), the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot table 202d1 will be described. FIG. 141(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot table 202d1. As described above, this special figure 1 jackpot table 202d1 is a data table for selecting the jackpot type to be set when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, and the obtained first hit type counter C2 Different jackpot types are defined according to the values.

Specifically, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the value of the first hit type counter C2 (update range "0 to 99") is in the range of "0 to 49", the jackpot As a type, "jackpot A" is associated and defined. This "jackpot A" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 7 rounds and the probability variable jackpot game is executed. is a jackpot type in which "50" is set. If the ball does not flow down (pass through) the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the probability variable jackpot game (when not V), the probability variable counter 203ja is set after the jackpot game ends. "0" is set to the value. Furthermore, in the "jackpot A", it is defined that "17 seconds" is set as the ending period of the jackpot game.

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the special hit type counter C2, 50 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot A", so in the lottery of the first special symbol In the case of a big win, the percentage of determining "jackpot A" is 50% (50/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 241(b), "jackpot B" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "50 to 99". This "jackpot B" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 7 rounds, and the jackpot game is usually executed. is a jackpot type in which "0" is set. Furthermore, in the "jackpot B", it is defined that "15 seconds" is set as the ending period of the jackpot game.

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 50 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot B", so the first special symbol lottery. , the ratio of determining "jackpot B" is 50% (50/100).

That is, the two jackpot types (jackpot A, jackpot B) that can be set when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery have the same number of rounds of the jackpot game, but the number of rounds of the jackpot game is the same. The easiness of passage of the ball to a specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the "big win A" is different from that of the "big win B" during the big win game. It is constructed so that an easy jackpot game is executed. Therefore, the "jackpot A" is a jackpot type that is more advantageous than the "jackpot B".

Next, with reference to FIG. 241(c), the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot table 202d2 will be described. FIG. 241(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot table 202d2. This special figure 2 jackpot table 202d2 is a data table that is referred to when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery and a jackpot type is selected.

As shown in FIG. 241 (c), in the special figure 2 jackpot table 202d2 in the first control example, as the second special symbol (special figure 2) jackpot type, "jackpot C" to "jackpot E" Three jackpot types are defined.

Specifically, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 29", and "jackpot C" is defined as the jackpot type. It is This "jackpot C" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 4 rounds and the probability variable jackpot game is executed. is a jackpot type in which "50" is set. If the ball does not flow down (pass through) the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the variable probability jackpot game (when not V), the variable probability counter 203i will be set after the jackpot game ends. "0" is set to the value. Furthermore, in the "jackpot C", it is defined that "17 seconds" is set as the ending period of the jackpot game.

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the special hit type counter C2, 30 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot C", so in the lottery of the second special symbol In the case of a big win, the percentage of "jackpot C" determined is 30% (30/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 241(c), "jackpot D" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "30 to 69". This "jackpot D" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 7 rounds and the probability variable jackpot game is executed. is a jackpot type in which "50" is set. If the ball does not flow down (pass through) the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the probability variable jackpot game (when not V), the probability variable counter 203i will be counted after the jackpot game ends. "0" is set to the value. Furthermore, in the "jackpot D", it is defined that "17 seconds" is set as the ending period of the jackpot game.

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 40 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot D", so the second special symbol lottery. , the ratio of determining "jackpot C" is 40% (40/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 241(c), "jackpot E" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "70 to 99". This "jackpot E" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 16 rounds and the probability variable jackpot game is executed. is a jackpot type in which "50" is set. If the ball does not flow down (pass through) the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the variable probability jackpot game (when not V), the variable probability counter 203i will be set after the jackpot game ends. "0" is set to the value. Furthermore, in the "jackpot E", it is defined that "17 seconds" is set as the ending period of the jackpot game.

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 30 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot E", so the second special symbol lottery. , the ratio of determining the "jackpot E" is 30% (30/100).

That is, the three types of jackpots (jackpot C, jackpot D, jackpot E) that can be set when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery all execute variable jackpot games, but the number of rounds of the jackpot games is limited. The "jackpot E" in which the most round games are played is the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player, and the "jackpot A" is the jackpot type that is most disadvantageous to the player.

As described above, when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the probability variable jackpot game is always executed, so the probability variable jackpot game is executed at a rate of 50%. In terms of the game state set after the end of the jackpot game, it becomes an advantageous jackpot type. In addition, in terms of the number of round games executed during the jackpot game, that is, the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game, the maximum number that can be obtained is greater in the second special symbol lottery, and the minimum number that can be obtained. Also stipulates that the second special symbol lottery is less. In addition, the average number of prize balls that can be acquired is defined so that the number of the second special symbol lottery is larger.

Therefore, the first special symbol lottery is more advantageous in terms of the number of winning balls obtainable under the minimum conditions, and the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous in other respects. In addition, in this control example, although the jackpot type shown in FIG. 241 is defined, it is not limited to this, and various It may be configured such that the jackpot type can be set.

In this control example, when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol, the jackpot game of the same number of rounds is executed for all the jackpots. A different number of round games may be executed according to the selected jackpot type. In addition, in this control example, when a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery, the time saving state is set for the same period (100 times of time saving times) after the jackpot game is finished with all jackpots. Without limitation, it may be configured so that the time saving state is not set in part of the jackpot winning (part of the jackpot type to be set), or the number of times of time saving (time saving end condition) is changed according to the jackpot type. It can be configured as follows. Furthermore, according to the selected jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a time saving state is set at the end of the jackpot game, and a jackpot type in which a normal state is set may be provided.

Returning to FIG. 138, the description continues. The movement type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A rough display mode (fluctuation time) such as so-called short time out, long time out, normal reach, super reach is determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Determination of the display mode is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. be. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 167) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. A variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 142) storing a random value for determining one variation time of pattern variation from the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is

Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 142(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection table 202b. As shown in FIG. 142 (a), the variation pattern selection table 202b includes a normal table 202b1 used in a state where the normal state is set as the game state, and a state where the variable probability state or the time saving state is set The table 202b2 for probability variation and time reduction used in is defined. Although the details will be described later, in this control example, the data table used for selecting the variation pattern is different according to the game state, so the variation pattern (variation time) selected according to the game state is made different. be able to.

Next, detailed contents of each table defined in the variation pattern selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIGS. 142(b) and 143. FIG. FIG. 142(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the normal table 202b1. This normal table 202b1 is a data table referred to when the normal state is set as the game state, and the variation time is longer when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win than when it is a loss. , and different variation patterns are defined according to the type of special symbol lottery executed and the result of the special symbol lottery executed.

First, the normal table 202b1 will be described with reference to FIG. 142(b). FIG. 142(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of this normal table 202b1. In this normal table 202b1, various variation patterns are defined corresponding to the lottery results of the special symbols, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is assigned to each of the variation patterns. Specifically, the type of special symbol (symbol type) is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the result of the judgment is a big hit, and the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 19". , normal (reach) with a variation time of 33 seconds to 42 seconds is defined as a variation pattern. When this normal is determined, a combination command indicating either a basic time of 30 seconds or an additional time of 3 to 12 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Although detailed description is omitted, in this control example, the addition time is configured to be set in more detail in units of 0.5 seconds according to the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. When the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0", the additional time is "3 seconds", when it is "1", the additional time is "3.5 seconds", and when it is "2", it is added If the time is "4 seconds", "3", the additional time is "4.5 seconds", if "3", the additional time is "5 seconds", if "4", add If the time is "5.5 seconds", if the additional time is "5", the additional time is "6 seconds", if the additional time is "6", if the additional time is "6.5 seconds", if "7" If the added time is "7 seconds" and "8", the added time is "7.5 seconds", and if the added time is "9 to 11", the added time is "8 seconds" and "12". If the additional time is "8.5 seconds", if "13", the additional time is "9 seconds", if "14", the additional time is "9.5 seconds", "15" If , the additional time is "10 seconds", if "16", the additional time is "10.5 seconds", and if "17", the additional time is "11 seconds", "18" , the additional time is "11.5 seconds", and when "19", the additional time is "12 seconds".

Then, when a command (basic command) indicating the selected basic time (30 seconds) and a command (additional command) indicating the additional time are notified to the sound lamp control device 113, the command is included in the basic command. A variation pattern (normal reach) is set based on the information contained in the addition command, and a reach pattern (type of the third pattern) is set based on the information included in the addition command. As a result, when the ready-to-win state is reached, the type of the third symbol of the medium symbol row Z2 that is first visible to the player is always set to a specific third symbol (in this control example, the third symbol with the number 1 attached). pattern), the ready-to-win performance can be executed with various types of the third pattern without varying the period from execution of the variable performance to reaching the ready-to-win state.

Further, when the obtained value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "20 to 169", super (reach) with a variation time of 43 seconds to 52 seconds is defined as the variation pattern. When this super is determined, a combination command indicating any one of the basic time of 30 seconds and the additional time of 13 to 22 seconds is output as the variation pattern command. In this control example, the addition time is set in more detail in units of 0.5 seconds according to the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, and the details are the same as the normal pattern described above. Therefore, detailed description is omitted.

Here, in this control example, the effect mode of the ready-to-win effect is configured to be variable according to the information (the number of seconds) included in the addition command. 3 seconds to 12 seconds", the normal reach production (the production that is stopped after the middle pattern row Z2 fluctuates about one round), and in the case of "13 seconds to 22 seconds", the super reach production (medium pattern row After Z2 fluctuates about two rounds, an effect of stopping and displaying) is executed.

By configuring in this way, for example, during the first predetermined period, the variable performance is executed in the same performance mode, and after that, when the variable performance in which the performance mode diverges is executed, the same performance mode is executed. It is possible to set the period based on the basic command (command containing information indicating the basic time), and set the variable effect after branching based on the addition command (command containing information indicating the addition time). . Therefore, for example, even if the entire fluctuation time is the same, the sound ramp control device 113 can easily differ by simply changing the ratio of the basic time and the ratio of the addition time to the fluctuation time. You can set variable production.

In this control example, the basic time (30 seconds) when normal reach is performed and the basic time (30 seconds) when super reach is performed are the same, and the variable time set as the addition time Although it is configured to vary the production mode of the ready-to-win production according to the length, it is not limited to this. Alternatively, the addition time may be selected from the range of "3 to 12 seconds" only for determining the type of the third symbol.

Next, when the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "170 to 198", SP (reach) with a variation time of 90 seconds is defined as the variation pattern. When this SP is determined, a combination command indicating a basic time of 55 seconds and an additional time of 35 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Here, when the SP is determined, an effect is executed in which the variable effect of the third symbol once in the ready-to-win state is switched to another variable effect. Even if the type of the third symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 in which is visible is always a specific third symbol (the third symbol with the number 1 in this control example), Since it is possible to change the display order of the third symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 in the middle of the variation in accordance with the third symbols that are finally stopped without giving a sense of discomfort, like the above-described normal and super, There is no need to set the type of the third symbol that is in the ready-to-win state by varying the addition time.

Also, if the symbol type is special figure 1 and the result of the judgment is out, similarly, if the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 179", the variation time is 8 seconds as a variation pattern. Outliers are specified. When this deviation is determined, a combination command indicating a basic time of 8 seconds and an additional time of 0 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Here, when the loss is determined, as the variation effect of the third symbol, a variation effect is executed in which the third symbol is stop-displayed in a combination indicating the loss without entering the ready-to-win state. Therefore, there is no need to set the addition time.

Further, when the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "180 to 198", the variation pattern is defined to be out of reach with a variation time of 33 seconds to 52 seconds. When this out of reach is determined, a combination command indicating any of 30 seconds of basic time and 3 to 22 seconds of additional time is output as a variation pattern command. In this control example, the addition time is set in more detail in units of 0.5 seconds according to the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, and the details are the same as the normal pattern described above. Therefore, detailed description is omitted. That is, even when the lottery result is a loss, the same variation pattern command as when the lottery result is a win is set. In addition, when the lottery result is a loss, it is necessary to set the type of the third symbol to be stopped and displayed so that the third symbol to be finally stopped and displayed will be a combination other than a big win. On the side of the lamp control device 113, a correction process is executed so that the third symbol shifted by one from the setting contents of the third symbol type based on the addition command referred to when winning is set. Thus, when the out-of-reach performance is executed, it is possible to easily set a performance mode in which the third pattern is stop-displayed (disappearance-stop display) in the vicinity of the third pattern that is the combination of the big win.

On the other hand, if the special symbol type (symbol type) is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the result of the success/failure determination is a big hit, and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 99" defines a special reach with a variation time of 40 seconds as a variation pattern. When this special reach is determined, a combination command showing a basic time of 10 seconds and an additional time of 30 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Further, when the obtained value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "100 to 198", a special reach with a variation time of 10 seconds is defined as the variation pattern. When this special reach is determined, a command of a combination of a basic time of 10 seconds and an additional time of 0 seconds is output as a variation pattern command.

Here, in this control example, when the second special symbol lottery is executed in a state where the normal state is set, as described above with reference to FIGS. It is configured so that the production is executed. Then, when a command (basic command) indicating the basic time (10 seconds) and a command (additional command) indicating the additional time (30 seconds) are notified to the sound lamp control device 113, A variation pattern (special variation) is set based on the information included in the addition command, and a special reach is set based on the information included in the addition command. More specifically, when a basic command indicating a basic time of 10 seconds is notified as the variation pattern command of the second special symbol in a state where the normal state is set, as shown in FIG. 124(b), A performance mode of a special variable performance is set in which the third pattern fluctuates in the vertical direction. Then, at the timing when the basic time elapses, as shown in FIG. 125(a), an effect mode is set in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display). Then, when an addition command indicating an addition time of 0 seconds is received (when the variation pattern is out of special), the third pattern is fixed and displayed as it is, and the variation performance is terminated.

On the other hand, when an addition command indicating an addition time of 30 seconds is received (when the variation pattern is a special reach), as shown in FIG. 125(b) and FIG. A variable production in which the pattern restarts is set.

Next, with reference to Drawing 143, the contents of table 202b2 for probability variation and time saving are explained. FIG. 143 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variable probability/time reduction table 202b2. This probability variation/time reduction table 202b2 is a data table that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern when the probability variation state or the time reduction state is set, and the type of special symbol, the number of variations (jackpot game end Each variation pattern is defined so that a different variation pattern is selected according to the number of special symbol variations afterward), the special symbol lottery result, and the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1.

Here, in this control example, after the end of the jackpot game, the high-probability state (probability variable state or time-saving state) of normal symbols is always set. Then, the set normal pattern high probability state is configured to continue until the time saving end condition is satisfied. In this control example, as the time-saving end condition, the first time-saving end condition that is established when the number of executions of the special symbol variation after the high probability state of the normal symbol is set reaches 100 times, and the high probability of the normal symbol. A second time-saving end condition is established when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery executed in a state where the state is set, and when any of the time-saving end conditions are established, normal symbols are displayed. It is configured to shift from a high probability state to a low probability state of normal symbols.

During the high-probability state (probability variable state, short-time state) of normal symbols, a variation pattern with a shorter variation time than the low-probability state (normal state) of normal symbols is set to be easily selected. Therefore, since the number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed per unit time can be increased, it is possible to provide the player with an efficient game (special symbol lottery game).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 143, during the period when the number of special symbol fluctuations after the high probability state of the normal symbol is set is "1 time to 20 times", the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol lottery , regardless of the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1, a variation pattern (short variation) with a variation time of "5 seconds" is selected. In other words, the high-speed variation in which the special symbol lottery is executed in a shorter variation time than the other periods in the predetermined period after the high probability state of the normal symbol is set (the period until the special symbol variation is performed 20 times) period (first period). By setting this high-speed fluctuation period, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the next big winning game in a short period of time after the end of the big winning game. can be made to think that is executed, and the amusement of the game can be improved. In addition, during this high-speed fluctuation period, since the fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "5 seconds" is always selected, it is possible to easily set the production period (continuous production) over a plurality of special symbol lotteries. .

In addition, when the jackpot is won in a state where the normal state (normal pattern low probability state) is set, the second special symbol reserved ball ( Since there is a high possibility that the special figure 2 reserved ball) has not been acquired, the special design lottery (special figure 1 lottery) using the acquired first special pattern reserved ball (special figure 1 reserved ball) is easily executed. , If the jackpot is won in a normal state in which the variable state or the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) is set, at the end of the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot winning, the special figure 2 is reserved. Since the possibility of acquiring the ball is high, the special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery) using the special figure 2 reserved ball is easily executed.

Thus, immediately after the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, any special symbol lottery of any symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol) can be executed, so as shown in FIG. The same variation pattern is selected regardless of the type of symbol for a predetermined period after the high probability state of the symbol is set (a period until the special symbol variation is executed 20 times). As a result, the same special symbol variation can be executed even when the special symbol lottery of any symbol type is executed, and the performance period of the performance (continuous performance) over a plurality of special symbol lotteries is set. can be made easier.

In this control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 119, both the ball fired by the left-handed game and the ball fired by the right-handed game are set to the high probability state of normal symbols. is constructed so that one ball reaches the second ball entrance 640 at a rate of one ball out of two, so simply by continuously executing the game in which the ball is shot during the high-probability state of normal symbols, It is configured so that the special symbol lottery can be executed without interruption. Therefore, when the high probability state of the normal design is set, the period until the high-speed fluctuation period ends, that is, the period until the 20th special design fluctuation ends (5 seconds × 20 times) 100 seconds is set in advance as a high-speed fluctuation period, and a continuous performance for 100 seconds can be easily executed as a continuous performance over 20 special pattern lotteries. In this case, only when a jackpot is won during the high-speed fluctuation period, it is only necessary to execute the switching processing for switching the already set continuous production mode, simplifying the processing for executing the production during the high-speed fluctuation period. can do.

In addition, a determination means is provided for determining whether or not to temporarily stop the continuous performance for 100 seconds set during the high-speed variation period. When it is determined that the period until the special symbol variation is executed is equal to or longer than a predetermined period (for example, 1 second), that is, when it is determined that the special symbol variation is interrupted, the continuous performance during execution is temporarily suspended. It may be configured to execute a process to stop. As a result, even when the player leaves the seat during the high-speed fluctuation period, it is possible to prevent only the continuous performance from proceeding ahead. In addition, an operation means (for example, frame button 22) that can be operated by the player is provided, and when a predetermined operation is performed with respect to the operation means, a process of temporarily stopping the continuous effect being executed is executed. It may be configured to

In this control example, the same variation time (5 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern (variation time) selected during the high-speed variation period. A variation pattern in which a variation time other than seconds is set may be selected. In this case, it is preferable that the variation time of 5 seconds or more is set more easily when the special symbol lottery results in a big win than when the big win is not won. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily lengthen the period from switching the performance mode of the preset 100-second continuous performance to stop-displaying the special symbol indicating the winning of the jackpot. The winning of the jackpot can be notified in a presentation mode in which the player can fully grasp the lottery result, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In addition, instead of setting the production mode of continuous production all at once for the time (100 seconds) assumed as the high-speed fluctuation period, the high-speed fluctuation period (100 seconds) is divided into a plurality of periods. A first continuous effect to be executed during one high-speed fluctuation period (50 seconds) is set at the start timing of the high-speed fluctuation period (first high-speed fluctuation period), and a second series to be executed during the second high-speed fluctuation period (50 seconds). The effect may be set at the start timing of the second high-speed fluctuation period. By configuring in this way, for example, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a performance mode (a performance mode in the second half period of the continuous performance) that is not executed when a jackpot is won in the first half of the high-speed fluctuation period is set in advance. .

Furthermore, it is not necessary to perform continuous effects for the entire period of the high-speed fluctuation period, and a specific first period of the high-speed fluctuation period (for example, special symbol fluctuations (20 times in total) executed during the high-speed fluctuation period) Of these, the continuous effect may be executed only during the 10th to 20th fluctuation periods.

Returning to FIG. 143, the description continues. The special symbol type (symbol type) is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and the number of fluctuations (the number of special symbol fluctuations executed after the end of the jackpot game) is "21 times to 49 times (second period)". If the lottery result (lottery result of the special symbol) is "hit", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198", that is, the variation pattern with a variation time of "30 seconds" in the entire range (Hit) is defined to be selected, and if the lottery result is "loss", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 179" and the variation time is "30 seconds" is selected, and a variation pattern (short deviation) with a variation time of "5 seconds" is selected for the range of "180 to 198".

In this control example, when the high probability state (probability variable state, time saving state) of the normal design is set, the second special design lottery is mainly executed, and the high probability state of the normal design. During the second period in which the special symbol variation is executed 21 times or more after is set, the second special symbol lottery is easily executed as long as the game is continued. However, as described above with reference to FIG. 119, the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example is operated to the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 regardless of whether a left-handed game or a right-handed game is performed. Since it has a configuration of the game board 13 that allows balls to enter, for example, when the game is interrupted during the variable probability state or the time saving state, the first special symbol lottery is executed after the game is restarted. Sometimes.

As described above, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, unlike the case where the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, there is a possibility that the normal jackpot game will be executed (50% of the jackpot wins). In the gaming state (probability variable state, time saving state) in which 2 special symbol lotteries are mainly executed, when the first special symbol lottery wins the jackpot where the normal jackpot game is executed, the player wins the jackpot. An unfavorable lottery result. In addition, in this control example, in addition to the presence or absence of winning the jackpot, the type of jackpot is also suggested to the player in the variation performance (variation performance using the third symbol) executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when main symbols sz with odd numbers are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating winning of a jackpot, it suggests winning of a jackpot in which a probability variable jackpot game is executed, and even numbers When the numbered main symbols sz are stop-displayed in a combination indicating the winning of a big win, it is constructed so as to suggest the winning of a big win in which a normal big win game is executed.

Therefore, in the variable production executed during the probability variable state or the time saving state, the main symbol sz with an even number is the reach state (the main combination that indicates the jackpot winning in which the jackpot game is usually executed) When a state in which part of the symbol sz is stopped and the rest of the symbol rows are variably displayed) is created, a disadvantageous jackpot is won from before the special symbol variability is stopped and displayed. There is a problem in that the player is made to think that this is the case, and the desire to play the game is lowered. Therefore, in this control example, in the gaming state (probability variable state, time saving state) in which the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed, when the jackpot in which the normal jackpot game is executed in the first special symbol lottery is won, As shown in FIG. 131(a), both the main symbols sz with odd numbers and the main symbols sz with even numbers are in the ready-to-win state (double reach). production) is configured to be executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from thinking that he or she has won a disadvantageous jackpot before the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed.

In order to execute this double reach effect, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery during the second period, a variation pattern with a variation time of "30 seconds" is selected. In addition, if the double reach performance described above as the variable performance executed during the variable probability state or the time saving state is executed only when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the time when the double reach performance is executed. Since the player will know about the jackpot winning of the first special symbol, in this control example, a part (about 80%) of the case of winning in the first special symbol lottery and the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery A variation pattern for executing a double reach effect (30 seconds variation time ) is selected.

By configuring in this way, when the double reach performance is executed in the variable probability state or the time saving state, whether the corresponding special symbol lottery is the lottery of the first special symbol or the lottery of the second special symbol. is made difficult to understand and whether or not the result of the lottery is a big win can be made difficult to understand, and the player can play the game while having a sense of expectation until the performance result of the double reach performance is displayed.

Furthermore, since the double reach performance is executed even for the second special symbol lottery in which the probability variable jackpot game is always executed when the jackpot is won, the probability variable jackpot game is executed for the entire double reach performance. The performance result indicating that the jackpot is won (the effect result that the main symbol sz with an odd number is displayed in a combination that indicates the winning of the jackpot) is double reach performance only for the first special symbol lottery. can be made easier to create than when executing Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation for the probability variable jackpot game when the double reach effect is executed.

Returning to FIG. 143, the description is continued. When the special symbol type (symbol type) is the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the number of fluctuations (the number of special symbol fluctuations executed after the end of the jackpot game) is "50 times (specific period)", Regardless of the lottery result (lottery result of the special symbol) and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, it is defined that the variation pattern (medium variation) with a variation time of "20 seconds" is selected.

In this control example, when the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v in the variable prize winning device 65 during the jackpot game, the high probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot game ends. , As the probability variation end condition for ending the high probability state of the special symbol, the first probability variation end condition that is satisfied when the number of executions of the special symbol variation reaches 50 times, and the high probability state of the special symbol are set. A second probability variable end condition is established when a special symbol jackpot is won in a state where the second probability variable end condition is established, and when any probability variable end condition is satisfied, the special symbol low probability state is changed from the special symbol high probability state to the special symbol low probability state. It is configured to transition to a state.

That is, according to the game result during the jackpot game, after the jackpot game is over, the probability change state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set until the number of times of execution of special symbol fluctuation reaches 50 times, After that, when the time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set until the number of times of execution of special symbols reaches 50 times, and the number of times of execution of special symbol fluctuation is 100 times after the end of the jackpot game. There is a case where a time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set until it becomes.

The display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to execute a game state suggesting effect for suggesting the currently set game state to the player. When the V notification effect for notifying that the area (V gate) 65v has been passed is executed, the notification effect (super chance mode effect) for notifying the player that the current game state is a variable probability state is executed. When the performance mode during the big win game is set so that the V notification performance is not executed even if the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the big win game, the current game state is set. A common effect (chance mode effect) is executed to make it difficult to understand whether is in a variable probability state.

Then, when the super chance mode effect is executed, the probability variation state ends at the 50th special symbol variation (specific period), so "20 seconds" set at the 50th special symbol variation ' is used, the variable probability state ends, and then an effect indicating that the chance mode (shortening of working hours) is set is executed. Further, when the chance mode is executed, an effect is executed to suggest whether or not the variable probability state has been set during the specific period.

In this way, using the special symbol fluctuation period for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol in the specific period, information other than the lottery result of the special symbol (information for guiding the transition of the game state, information set in the past Information other than the lottery result of the special symbol is fixed by fixing the variation time of the selected special symbol variation when executing the information notification performance for notifying the player of information for suggesting the game state that has been played. It is possible to reduce the variation of the presentation mode (including the presentation time) of the information notification presentation for informing the player.

In addition, in this control example, the execution period of the special symbol variation (the 50th special symbol variation after the end of the jackpot) in which the probability variation state ends is set as a specific period, and the variation time of the special symbol variation is fixed to "20 seconds". However, without being limited to this, including before and after the special symbol variation that will end the probability variation state, for example, the execution period of the 45th to 52nd special symbol variation after the end of the jackpot is a specific period (fixed A period in which the selected variation time is selected), and using the variation time of the special symbol variation executed during the specific period, the information notification effect may be executed.

In addition, according to the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the specific period described above, it may be possible to vary the effect mode of the information notification effect, for example, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, the probability variable state It may be changed to a production mode that does not notify the information indicating that the is finished, or regardless of the actually set game state, the game state set in the past state) is a game state disadvantageous to the player (for example, time saving state) may be changed to an effect mode.

In addition, the timing at which the information notification effect is executed during the specific period may be varied according to the result of the special symbol lottery, for example, when the special symbol lottery wins the jackpot, it is better when the jackpot win does not occur. Rather, it is preferable that the execution timing of the information notification effect is easily delayed. As a result, the player can be interested not only in the performance contents of the information notification performance, but also in the execution timing, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Also, as in the above example, when the timing at which the information notification effect is executed during the specific period is varied according to the result of the special symbol lottery, the information notification effect is executed at the specific timing in advance. It is set, and when the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the specific period is a predetermined result (for example, a big win), the timing of executing the information notification performance is configured to be varied from the above-described specific timing. Alternatively, one execution timing is determined from a plurality of execution timings according to the result of a special pattern lottery executed during a specific period without presetting the timing for executing the information notification performance. It can be configured as follows.

Next, the special symbol type (symbol type) is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and the number of fluctuations (the number of special symbol fluctuations executed after the end of the jackpot game) is "51 times to 100 times (third period) ”And if the lottery result (lottery result of the special symbol) is “hit”, the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is “0 to 198”, that is, the variation time is “30 seconds” in the entire range. If the lottery result is "missing", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 179", and the variation time is set to " 30 seconds” variation pattern (long outlier) is selected, and the variation pattern (second super variation) with a variation time of “60 seconds” for the range of “180 to 198” is selected. .

This 3rd period is a period when a game state turns into a time saving state. That is, even if the variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game, it is a period in which the variable probability end condition is established and the time saving state is set. During this third period, as in the above-described second period, the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed, but the first special symbol lottery is executed depending on the game method to be executed. Since execution of the second special symbol lottery during the time saving state is more advantageous to the player than execution of the first special symbol lottery, the first special symbol lottery is executed during the third period. is configured to facilitate selection of a variation pattern with a long variation time. As a result, even if the first special symbol lottery is executed during the third period of the time saving state, the first special symbol variation is executed in a variation pattern in which a long variation time is set. In addition, it is possible to make it easier to acquire the reserved ball of the second special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to suppress frequent execution of the first special symbol lottery during the time saving state.

It should be noted that during this third period, as well as during the above-described second period, the double reach effect (see FIG. 131) is configured to be executed, so if a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, it will be out. A variation pattern with a variation time of '30 seconds' is selected for part of winning, part of winning a big win in the second special symbol lottery, and part of losing winning.

Next, the contents of various variation patterns defined for the second special symbol lottery when the variable probability state or the time saving state are set will be described.

As shown in FIG. 143, the special symbol type (symbol type) is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), and the number of fluctuations (the number of special symbol fluctuations executed after the jackpot game ends) is "1 to 20 times ( 1st period)”, the lottery result (lottery result of the special symbol), and regardless of the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, the variation pattern (short variation) with a variation time of “5 seconds” stipulated to be selected. That is, during the first period, the same variation pattern (5-second variation) is selected when the first special symbol lottery is executed and when the second special symbol lottery is executed.

Next, when the number of fluctuations (the number of special symbol fluctuations executed after the end of the jackpot game) is "21 times to 49 times (second period)" and the lottery result (lottery result of special symbols) is "win" , the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 149", and the fluctuation pattern (second short fluctuation) with a fluctuation time of "10 seconds" is in the range of "150 to 198" , The variation pattern (long variation) with a variation time of “30 seconds” is selected, and if the lottery result is “out”, the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is “0 to 191”. A variation pattern (second short variation) with a variation time of “10 seconds” is selected for the range of , and a variation pattern (long variation) with a variation time of “30 seconds” is selected for the range of “192 to 198”. stipulated to be selected.

During the second period, which is a high-probability state (probability variable state, time-saving state) of normal symbols in which the second special symbol lottery is mainly performed, the above-mentioned double reach effect is performed. A variation pattern with a variation time of “10 seconds” is selected, except for the variation pattern for which the In other words, the second special symbol variation is completed in a short period of time in a state in which the ball can be easily entered into the second ball entrance 640, and the second special symbol lottery is efficiently executed. there is As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a large number of balls enter the second ball entrance 640 in a state where the special figure 2 reserved balls are stored up to the upper limit, and the player feels comfortable. can be made to play a good game.

In this control example, "10 seconds" is specified as the short-time variation time, but this variation time may be specified even shorter. It is preferable to define a longer time (eg, 3 seconds) than the interval (approximately 1.2 seconds) that can reach the 2-ball entrance 640 . By constructing in this way, although the player continuously shoots the ball, the number of the special figure 2 reserved balls is reduced, and is set to have a non-priority over the second special symbol lottery. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the first special symbol lottery is executed.

Next, when the number of fluctuations (the number of special symbol fluctuations executed after the end of the jackpot game) is "50 times (specific period)", the lottery result (lottery result of special symbols) and the acquired variation type counter A variation pattern (medium variation) with a variation time of 20 seconds is selected regardless of the value of CS1. Since the variation pattern set during this specific period is the same as the variation pattern selected in response to the above-described first special symbol lottery, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the special symbol type (symbol type) is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), and the number of fluctuations (the number of special symbol fluctuations executed after the end of the jackpot game) is "51 times to 100 times (third period) ”And if the lottery result (lottery result of the special symbol) is “hit”, the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 149”, and the variation time is “10 seconds” The fluctuation pattern (second short fluctuation) is specified to select a fluctuation pattern (long fluctuation) with a fluctuation time of "30 seconds" for the range of "150 to 198", and the lottery result is " In the case of "out of", the fluctuation pattern (short fluctuation) with a fluctuation time of "5 seconds" is selected for the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 191", and the range of "192 to 198" , a variation pattern (long variation) with a variation time of "30 seconds" is selected.

As described above, in the first control example, the variation pattern selection table 202b includes the normal table 202b1 and the probability variation/time reduction table 202b2, and according to the set gaming state , different data tables to be referred to when selecting a variation pattern. As a result, the type of variation pattern to be selected can be made different according to the set game state, and the result of the special symbol lottery can be shown to the player with various variation patterns, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. can be improved.

Furthermore, when the variable probability state is set as the game state and when the time saving state is set, the same data table (variable probability/time saving table 202b2) is referred to to select the variation pattern. ing. Therefore, in the state where the "chance mode", which is a production mode that makes it difficult for the player to understand whether the time saving state is set or the variable probability state is set, is selected in response to the special symbol lottery to be executed. It is possible to prevent the player from grasping the set game state depending on the type of variation pattern that is set. In addition, in this control example, the data table referred to when selecting the variation pattern in the probability variable state and the data table referred to when selecting the variation pattern in the time saving state are the same, but this , and may be configured to refer to a different data table.

In this case, a probability variable data table that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern in the probability variable state and a time saving data table that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern in the time saving state are provided, and a small probability ( For example, as the type of variation pattern selected in 5%), it is preferable to provide a specific variation pattern defined only in one data table. As a result, the player can grasp the currently set game state based on the type of the selected variation pattern only when the specific variation pattern is selected.

In addition, the data table for probability variation and the data table for time saving may be configured to have different ratios of selecting each variation pattern. By constructing in this way, by analyzing the bias of the variation pattern selected for the special symbol lottery executed during the "chance mode", the enjoyment of making the player predict the game state currently set. can be provided.

In addition, as described above, in this control example, the data table referred to when selecting the variation pattern is configured to be different according to the game state to be set. For example, when the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the game state set when the previous jackpot was won, or the game state set when the previous jackpot was won Jackpot type (stopped display mode of special pattern), display mode of the third pattern stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and whether or not the ball passed through the specific area (V gate) 65V during the jackpot game It may be configured such that the data table referred to when selecting the variation pattern in the same time-saving state is changed based on the result of whether or not (whether V has won a prize) or the like.

In this case, when setting a command (variation pattern command) indicating the selected variation pattern, it is preferable to set a command that includes information indicating the type of the referenced data table (variation pattern selection table). . As a result, when a variation pattern command is received on the side of the sound lamp control device 113, it is possible to determine not only the type of variation pattern set this time but also how the current gaming state was set. Therefore, based on the received variation pattern command, for example, even though the probability variable jackpot game was executed, it is determined that the ball could not win V and the time saving state was set, and a dedicated production mode ( For example, "sorry mode") can be set.

Returning to FIG. 138, the description continues. The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by 1 in the range of 0 to 299, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 299). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start opening (through gate) 67. It is acquired at the same time and stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203 c of the RAM 203 .

Then, the value of the random number that becomes the winning of the normal symbol is set by the second winning random number table 202c stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is the value of the second winning random number table 202c. If it matches the value of the random number set as a hit, it is determined as a hit of the normal design (second design). In addition, this second winning random number table 202c is divided into two types, one for when the probability is low for normal symbols and one for when probability of winning is higher for normal symbols than when the probability is low, and included in each. The number of random numbers to be a jackpot is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be winning different, the probability of winning is changed between when the probability of normal symbols is low and when the probability of normal symbols is high.

The contents defined in the second winning random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 140(b). FIG. 140(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second winning random number table 202c. As shown in FIG. 140(b), in the case of the low probability state of the normal design, the second winning random number counter C4 obtained is defined as "0 to 2" for the normal design, and the high probability of the normal design. In the case of the state, the second hit random number counter C4 obtained is defined to be in the range of "0 to 149".

That is, in this control example, when the low probability state of normal symbols is set, the probability (1/100) of winning in the lottery of normal symbols is set to a low probability. As a result, in the present embodiment in which the same game method (left-handed game) is executed in the normal state, which is a low probability state of normal symbols, and the time-saving state, which is a high probability state of normal symbols, during the normal state Since it is possible to make it difficult to win the normal game, it is possible to make it difficult for the normal game to be executed during the normal state and the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the high probability state of normal symbols is set, the probability (1/2) of winning in the lottery of normal symbols is set to a high probability. As a result, it is possible to facilitate execution of the normal pattern winning game based on the normal pattern winning during the time saving state.

In addition, in this control example, it is configured such that the variation time of different length is set as the variation time of the normal symbol variation for indicating the result of the normal symbol lottery according to the set game state. A longer variation time (for example, 10 seconds) is set when the low-probability state of the pattern is set than when the high-probability state of the normal pattern is set. In this way, by varying the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery and the length of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation according to the game state, winning in the normal symbol lottery and entering the second ball entrance 640. It is possible to easily set a game state (probability variable state, time saving state) in which it is easy to enter a ball.

Furthermore, in this control example, when winning the normal symbol lottery executed in a state where the normal symbol low probability state is set, a plurality of balls are entered into the second ball entrance 640. It is configured to be able to execute a normal figure winning game in which the electric accessory 640a is opened in a possible operation mode (long open). Therefore, even in a game state (normal state) in which it is difficult to win in the normal symbol lottery, it is possible to temporarily make it easier to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640, so what kind of game state is possible. Even in the set state, the possibility of execution of the second special symbol lottery can be left for the player, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 299), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 156). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 167).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main controller 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 137, the description is continued. The ROM 202 has various data tables defined corresponding to the various counters shown in FIG. Here, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 139(a). FIG. 139(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 139(a), the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment includes a first winning random number table 202a, a variation pattern selection table 202b, a second winning random number table 202c, and a jackpot type selection table. 202d. The first winning random number table 202a, the variation pattern selection table 202b, the second winning random number table 202c, and the jackpot type selection table 202d have been described above when describing the various counters illustrated in FIG. 138, so the description thereof will be omitted. .

Returning to FIG. 137, the description is continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 138, the RAM 203 includes a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 167) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 166) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 165) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 139(b), the RAM 203 stores a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a number of first special symbol reserved balls. Counter 203d, second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, game state storage area 203g, time saving counter 203h, probability variable counter 203i, jackpot start flag 203j, jackpot middle flag 203k, probability variable setting flag 203m, It has a variable probability passage counter 203n, a winning number counter 203o, a remaining ball timer flag 203p, a remaining ball timer 203q, a variable probability effective flag 203r, a variable probability effective timer 203s, a discharge number counter 203t, and a memory area 203z.

In the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, up to the maximum number (4 in this control example), various counter values obtained based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning). is a storage area for storing

In the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, up to the upper limit number (4 in this control example), various counter values obtained based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 (start winning). is a storage area for storing

The special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area for storing various counter values for starting the variable display of the special symbols, and when the special symbols stop fluctuating, the first special symbol reserved ball is displayed. When various counter values are stored in the storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, it is a storage area in which the various counter values are shifted and stored. In this control example, since the second special symbol lottery is executed with priority over the first special symbol lottery, the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area. When various counter values are stored in any of 203b, the various counter values stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b are shifted to the special symbol reserved ball execution area and stored.

The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, and the special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) are obtained from the counter buffer (see FIG. 138) upon detection of the start winning. The values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are stored. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 156), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are retrieved from the counter buffer. are acquired and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. In addition, when detecting that the ball has entered the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are acquired from the counter buffer, and stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. Store each.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the special symbol variation (lottery), the big winning lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81 are executed. One of the data corresponding to each start winning stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (each value of counters C1 to C3, CS1) The data corresponding to the start winning prize is shifted to this special symbol holding ball execution area. It should be noted that the shift in this embodiment means moving data stored in one area to another area.

The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is a storage area for storing the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained from the counter buffer (see FIG. 138) upon detection of the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 (start winning). be. When the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (started winning) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156), the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is detected from the counter buffer. is obtained and stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has four reserved areas so that data (value of the counter C4) corresponding to one start winning can be stored (reserved) up to four times. In the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, the data of the reserved balls are stored in the order of passing through the through gate 67 (start winning) in order from the reserved area in which the order of digestion is early among the reserved areas in which the data is vacant. .

In addition, when the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) detects that it is the execution start timing of the variable display effect of the normal symbol based on the start winning, each counter value is stored, and the normal symbol winning lottery Also, it is a memory for storing data (the value of the counter C4) to be referred to in processing such as setting the display (variation pattern) of the first pattern display device 37 or the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, when the MPU 201 detects that it is the timing to start executing the variable display effect of the normal symbols, the above-described normal symbol reservation is performed in order to execute processing such as winning lottery and setting of display of the second symbol display device 83. Of the data corresponding to each start winning stored in the ball storage area 203c (the value of the second winning random number counter C4), the data corresponding to one start winning is stored in this normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). ). It should be noted that the shift in this embodiment means moving data stored in one area to another area.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is based on the winning to the first ball entrance 64 detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. It is a counter that counts up to four times the number of pending balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display effect performed by the first pattern display device 37 (the variable display effect performed by the third pattern display device 81). The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero as an initial value by the initial setting processing of the RAM 203 after power-on (see S1701 in FIG. 166). Then, each time the starting winning prize is detected and the number of held balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display effect is executed.

Also, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (that is, the number of reserved balls) is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning). When the counter value is stored in the area 203a, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the first special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. FIG. The first special symbol reserved ball number command is a command sent from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 each time the starting winning is detected and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is incremented by one. is.

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is based on the winning to the second ball entrance 640 detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. It is a counter that counts up to four times the number of pending balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display effect performed by the first pattern display device 37 (the variable display effect performed by the third pattern display device 81). The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is set to zero as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power-on (see S1701 in FIG. 166). Then, each time the starting winning prize is detected and the number of held balls displayed in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time the variable display effect is executed.

In addition, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (that is, the number of reserved balls) is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 (start winning). When the counter value is stored in the area 203b, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the second special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. FIG. The second special symbol reserved ball number command is a command sent from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 each time the start winning is detected and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1. is.

The MPU 201 stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 obtained from the counter buffer in the special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown). ) is referred to in the special symbol jackpot determination process (see S301 in FIG. 158), a jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data, and the variation pattern and stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. do. In the first symbol display device 37, under the control of the main controller 110, variation display is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern and the stop classification which are decided here are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the special figure fluctuation pattern command and the stop classification command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variable display effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f detects a ball passing through the through gate 67 during timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 156) that is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds (hereinafter referred to as "start winning"). ), it is a counter that counts the number of holding balls (number of standby times) of variable display performed by the second symbol display device 83 up to one time at maximum. This normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is a counter that stores the total number of reserved balls stored based on the ball passing through the through gate 67 . Zero is set as the initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power-on (see S1701 in FIG. 166). Then, each time the starting winning prize is detected and the number of held balls displayed in a variable display increases, 1 is added to the maximum value (see S904 in FIG. 164). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of normal symbols is executed (see S805 in FIG. 163).

The game state storage area 203g is a storage area for temporarily storing the currently set game state, and the game state set after the jackpot game ends (the setting state of the time reduction counter 203h, the setting of the probability variation counter 203i The game state corresponding to the situation) is stored. Specifically, when the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 and the value of the probability variation counter 203i is 0, the normal state is stored, and the value of the time saving counter 203h is a value greater than 0, and the probability variation counter 203i When the value is 0, the time saving state is stored, and when the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 and the probability variable counter 203i is greater than 0, the probability variable state is stored.

Furthermore, in the state where the jackpot game is being executed, there is also a winning game state (jackpot state) indicating that the jackpot game is being executed, and type information indicating the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game being executed. configured to be stored. In addition, it is configured to also store per-universal figure per game information indicating that the per-universal figure game is being executed.

A state command is set based on the information stored (memorized) in the game state storage area 203g, and the state command is output to the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. The sound lamp control device 113 receives the output state command and temporarily stores it in the sub-state setting area 223g.

The information stored in the game state storage area 203g is configured to be able to hold the information even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and is executed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. In the start-up process (see FIG. 166), a state command corresponding to the information stored in the game state storage area 203g is set.

As a result, even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, the current game state can be determined by the sound lamp control device 113 side.

The time-saving counter 203h is a counter for indicating a state in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set, and a value corresponding to a case in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set is set. A value corresponding to the winning jackpot type is set to the time saving counter 203h after the jackpot game ends (see S2103 in FIG. 170). Then, it is cleared to 0 when the jackpot game is won. As a result, since the high probability state of normal symbols is not set during the jackpot game, it is possible to suppress giving excessive benefits to the player during the jackpot game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the high probability state of the normal design is set, the value of the time reduction counter 203j is set, based on the special design lottery (fluctuation), the value of the time reduction counter 203h is subtracted, the time reduction counter 203h When the value of becomes 0, the high probability state of the normal pattern ends, and it is configured to shift to the low probability state of the normal pattern, but not limited to this, for example, the next jackpot game is executed (until the jackpot is won), the normal symbol high probability state may be continued. In this case, "10000" may be set as the value of the time saving counter 203h.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a condition for terminating the high probability state of normal symbols and a condition for subtracting the value of the time saving counter 203h, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set based on the number of special symbol lotteries (fluctuations). Although only the conditions for subtraction are set, the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted when, for example, an end condition that can be satisfied depending on the processing contents of various processes executed by the main controller 110 is satisfied without being limited to this. It may be configured to Specifically, when the lottery result of each symbol lottery executed in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set becomes a predetermined lottery result (for example, special winning election), or the normal symbol lottery Even when the result is a predetermined lottery result (for example, winning per special normal figure), the value of the time saving counter 203h may be subtracted.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the value of the time saving counter 203h is configured to be decremented by 1, but according to the type of the end condition that has been established, a plurality of values of the time saving counter 203h are collectively (for example, 2) It may be configured to be subtracted, or may be configured to be subtracted so that the value of the time saving counter 203h becomes "0" regardless of the current value of the time saving counter 203h. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the time saving state continues, and it is possible to make the player interested in the game during the time saving state.

Furthermore, the conditions for ending the time saving state may be varied according to the contents of establishment of the conditions for which the time saving state is set (jackpot type). As a result, not only the execution of the jackpot game but also the jackpot type corresponding to the executed jackpot game can be made interesting to the player, and the interest in the game can be improved. .

The variable probability counter 203i is a counter for indicating a state in which a special symbol high probability state is set, and is set to a value corresponding to a case in which a special symbol high probability state is set. A value is set in this variable probability counter 203i after the jackpot game ends based on the ball passing through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game (see S2102 in FIG. 170). Then, it is cleared to 0 when the jackpot game is won. As a result, since the high probability state of the special symbols is not set during the big win game, it is possible to suppress giving excessive benefits to the player during the big win game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the value of the probability variation counter 203i is set, based on the special symbol lottery (variation), the value of the probability variation counter 203i is subtracted, the probability variation counter 203i When the value of becomes 0, the high probability state of the special pattern is terminated, and it is configured to shift to the low probability state of the special pattern, but not limited to this, for example, the next jackpot game is executed (until the jackpot is won), the special symbol high probability state may be continued. In this case, "10000" may be set as the value of the variable probability counter 203i.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a condition for ending the high probability state of the special symbol, as a condition for subtracting the value of the probability variation counter 203i, the value of the probability variation counter 203i based on the number of special symbol lottery (variation) Although only the condition for subtraction is set, the value of the variable probability counter 203i is subtracted when, for example, an end condition that can be satisfied depending on the processing contents of various processes executed by the main controller 110 is satisfied without being limited to this. It may be configured to Specifically, when the lottery result of each symbol lottery executed in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set becomes a predetermined lottery result (for example, special winning election), or the normal symbol lottery Also when the result is a predetermined lottery result (for example, winning per special normal figure), the value of the probability variable counter 203i may be subtracted.

Furthermore, the value set in the variable probability counter 203i may be changed based on the winning jackpot type and the passing situation of the ball to the specific area (V gate) 65v, or the value of the time saving counter 203h described above is subtracted. Similar to the contents, the value of the probability variable counter 203i may be configured to be subtractable according to conditions other than the number of times of variation of the special symbol, and when the subtraction condition for subtracting the value of the probability variable counter 203i is satisfied, the probability variable The value of the counter 203i may be configured to be capable of subtracting a plurality of values at once. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for a player to grasp how long the high probability state of the special pattern continues, so that the player can watch the result of the special pattern lottery executed during the high probability state of the special pattern without getting bored. can be done.

Further, in this control example, as a condition for ending the variable probability state, that is, as a condition for subtracting the value of the variable probability counter 203i, the value of the variable probability counter 203i is subtracted based on the number of special symbol lotteries (fluctuations). Although only the conditions are set, the value of the variable probability counter 203i is subtracted when, for example, an end condition that can be satisfied depending on the processing contents of various processes executed by the main controller 110 is satisfied without being limited to this. can be configured to Specifically, when the lottery result of each symbol lottery executed in the state where the high probability state of the special symbol is set becomes a predetermined lottery result (for example, special lost winning), or normal symbol lottery Even if the result is a predetermined lottery result (for example, winning a special normal figure), the value of the probability variable counter 203i may be subtracted, or the ball may enter a specific entrance (for example, the first 1 entrance 64, second entrance 640, etc.), the value of the variable probability counter 203i may be subtracted.

In addition, in this control example, the value of the variable probability counter 203i is configured to be decremented by one, but according to the type of end condition that has been met, the value of the variable probability counter 203i is collectively set (eg, 2). It may be configured to be subtracted, or may be configured to be subtracted so that the value of the variable probability counter 203i becomes "0" regardless of the current value of the variable probability counter 203i. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the variable probability state continues, and it is possible to make the player interested in the game during the variable probability state.

Furthermore, the conditions for ending the variable probability state may be varied according to the content of establishment of the conditions for which the variable probability state is set (jackpot type). As a result, not only the execution of the jackpot game but also the jackpot type corresponding to the executed jackpot game can be made interesting to the player, and the interest in the game can be improved. .

The jackpot start flag 203j is a flag indicating whether or not to start a jackpot. If the big win start flag 203j is ON, it means that it is time to start a big win, and if it is OFF, it means that it is not time to start a big win. The big win start flag 203j is set to ON when the end timing of the variation display indicating the big win comes. Also, the jackpot start flag 203j is set to OFF when the jackpot start is set (see S1903 in FIG. 168).

The jackpot flag 203k is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot game (special game state) is in progress. If the big winning flag 203k is ON, it means that the big winning is in progress, and if it is OFF, it means that the big winning is not in progress. The big-hit flag 203k is set to ON at the same time as a big-hit game (special game state) is started (see S1903 in FIG. 168) when a special symbol lottery results in a big hit. In addition, it is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot game (special game state) (see S2105 in FIG. 170). Then, in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 157), this big-hit flag 203k is referenced to determine whether or not the big-hit is in progress (see S201 in FIG. 157).

The variable probability setting flag 203m is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the variable probability state after the jackpot game. In this pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is set to the variable probability state is determined by whether a ball enters a specific area (V gate) 65v (see FIG. 120) provided in the variable winning device 65 during a jackpot game. Determined by whether or not the ball (flowed down). Here, when it is detected that the ball has entered (flowed down) into this specific area (V gate) 65v (passing of the variable probability switch provided in the specific area (V gate) 65v), the variable probability setting flag 203m is turned on. (see S2215 in FIG. 171). On the other hand, this variable probability setting flag 203m is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot game (see S2105 in FIG. 170). The variable probability setting flag 203m is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Moreover, it is set to OFF when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized.

In addition, when the probability variation setting flag 203m is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the probability variation switch has passed before the power is turned off. may be configured to formally set to ON and return. In this case, whether or not the variable probability switch is passed before the power is turned off can be determined by determining whether the variable probability passage counter 203n, which will be described later, is greater than zero. By configuring in this way, in a state where the power is turned off, it is possible to reduce the damage on the side of the amusement arcade by determining fraud such as rewriting only the variable probability setting flag 203m to ON and turning on the power again. can.

The variable probability passage counter 203n is a counter for counting the number of balls that have passed through the variable probability switch (flowed down a specific area) in one round (one round of the jackpot in this embodiment) during the jackpot game. It is possible to determine whether or not all the winning balls have been discharged from the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 based on the sum of the probability variable passage counter 203n and the ejection number counter 203t, which will be described later. This variable probability passing counter 203n is updated by adding 1 each time the ball passes through the variable probability switch (flows down a specific area). Also, after executing the determination processing of whether or not the number of winning balls in the variable winning device 65 and the number of discharged balls match, the value is reset to "0" which is the initial value. It should be noted that the probability variable passage counter 203n is backed up when the power is turned off. It is set to 0 in the initialized state.

The winning number counter 203o is a counter for counting the number of balls that have won in the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. incremented by 1 and updated. On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of prizes won by the variable prize winning device 65 (the value of the prize number counter 203o) and the number of discharges (the total value of the discharge number counter 203t and the probability variable passage counter 203n) are the same. After it is determined whether they match, the initial value is reset to "0". The value of the winning number counter 203o is backed up when the power is turned off. It is set to 0 in the initialized state.

The remaining ball timer flag 203p is a flag indicating whether or not it is a ball sweeping period after one round is finished and the specific winning hole 65a is closed. When the remaining ball timer flag 203p is set to ON, it means that it is the ball sweeping period. While the remaining ball timer flag 203p is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203q, which will be described later, is incremented by one and updated. The remaining ball timer 203q is a counter for determining the time after the specific winning hole 65a is closed, and determines whether the time required for the game balls in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged has passed. is a counter for

The remaining ball timer 203q is the time required for the winning ball to be discharged to the variable prize winning device 65 when one preset round is completed and the specific prize winning port 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 is closed. is a counter for determining whether or not has elapsed. In this embodiment, it takes 0.5 seconds for the variable winning device 65 to discharge the winning ball. is set as the upper limit of When the remaining ball timer 203q reaches the upper limit value (0.8 seconds in this embodiment), it is determined whether or not the number of winning prizes to the variable prize winning device 65 and the number of discharged prizes match. be. If they do not match, an error command is set to notify you. Therefore, it is possible to notify early that game balls are clogged in the variable prize winning device 65.例文帳に追加

In addition, if the winning number and the discharge number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the probability variable setting flag 203m is turned on even if the game ball passes through the variable probability switch. may be configured not to be set to . By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the variable probability state from being improperly imparted.

Probability variable effective flag 203r, after the switching valve 65y is switched to an arrangement that cannot distribute the ball to the specific area (V gate) 65v, when the game ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v, the passage ( It is a flag for determining whether or not to validate the ball entry). When this variable probability effective flag 203r is set to ON, it indicates that the game ball passing through the specific area (V gate) 65v is a normal period.

The variable probability effective timer 203s is a counter for counting the time after the variable probability effective flag 203r described above is set to ON. After the switching valve 65y is switched to an arrangement in which the ball cannot flow down the specific area (V gate) 65v, the period required for the variable probability switch to pass normally can be determined by the variable probability effective timer 203s. In this embodiment, the time required for the game ball that reaches the switching valve 65y to pass through the variable probability switch is 0.3 seconds. The upper limit value of the variable probability effective timer 203s is set to a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds, and even if the vehicle passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v after that, it is determined as illegal and not determined as passing.

As a result, the game ball is illegally entered into the specific area (V gate) 65v (V area) and passed through the variable probability switch, or pushed up with a piano wire or the like from below the variable probability switch and passed It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud such as misdetection of passing by the magnetic sensor.

The discharged number counter 203t is a counter for counting the number of game balls discharged from the variable winning device 65 in one round. The discharge number counter 203t is reset to 0, which is an initial value, after it is determined that the number of winning balls in the variable winning device 65 matches the discharge number.

The other memory area 203z is set (stored) with other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, and the like.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like. The other devices 228 include various drive motors for operating drive accessories for presentation provided in the pachinko machine 10 .

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the rear image is an image displayed on the rear side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

When the frame button 22 is operated by the player, a character object drive command is transmitted to the other device 228 in order to drive a character object for performance (not shown), or a command corresponding to the operation content of the frame button 22 is sent. A sound output command for outputting sound to the sound output device 226 is set, and a lamp output command for causing the lamp display device 227 to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the operation content of the frame button 22 is set. can be configured to

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the error type. Send to device 114 . The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

Here, the contents defined in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described. In the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113, as shown in FIG. At least a table 222d, a V notification execution selection table 222e, and a button operation effect selection table 222f are stored.

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, a variation pattern of each variation pattern type (out of range, out of reach, various types of reach, etc.) is set to a counter value for selecting a variation pattern (not shown). The sound ramp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, the result of the suitability determination, and the acquired counter value for selection. This allows the audio ramp control device 113 to select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the variation time and the type of variation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode from being displayed frequently, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early.

In addition, in this control example, a variation effect (see FIG. 123) is performed in which the third symbol is variably displayed by horizontal scrolling on the third symbol display device 81 in correspondence with the executed special symbol variation. In this variation effect, the detailed variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the success/failure determination result, and the acquired counter value for selection. A game (special symbol game) can be performed while predicting whether or not the special symbol variation of this time is a big hit by visually recognizing the variation performance executed by the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

In the normal special figure 2 effect selection table 222b, the effect of the third symbol when the variation pattern with the addition time of 30 seconds is selected among the second special symbol variations executed while the normal state is set. A data table that is referenced when selecting a mode, and corresponds to the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery (result of judgment), the number of special figures 2 reserved, the number of special figures 1 reserved, and the value of the production counter 223f Different presentation modes (contents of presentation) are defined.

In this control example, when the normal symbol lottery is won in the state where the normal state is set, the normal symbol winning game in which the electric accessory 640a is open for 5 seconds is executed. Then, it is configured so that the second special symbol lottery can be executed by entering the ball into the second ball entrance 640 during the normal figure winning game. That is, in the gaming state (normal state) in which the second special symbol lottery is difficult to execute, when the predetermined execution condition is satisfied (when winning per normal pattern), during a predetermined period (per normal pattern during the game period ), it is configured to be able to easily acquire the lottery opportunity (special figure 2 reserved ball) of the second special symbol lottery (easy to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640).

In the second special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, as shown in the normal table 202b1 (see FIG. 142(b)), the variation pattern with a variation time of "10 seconds" and the variation time of "40 seconds" is selectable, and when the second special symbol lottery in which a variation pattern with a variation time of "40 seconds" is set is executed, the normal medium special figure 2 effect selection table 222b is changed. The production mode of the variable production is set with reference to the table.

Here, with reference to FIG. 145, the contents of the normal medium special figure 2 effect selection table 222b will be described. FIG. 145 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal medium special figure 2 effect selection table 222b. This normal medium special figure 2 effect selection table 222b is for the third symbol when a variation pattern with an addition time of 30 seconds is selected among the second special symbol variations executed while the normal state is set. A data table to be referred to when selecting the production mode of the variable production, the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery (response judgment result), the number of special figures 2 reserved, the number of special figures 1 reserved, the value of the production counter 223f Different presentation modes (contents of presentation) are stipulated in correspondence with each other.

As shown in the normal table 202b1 (see FIG. 142(b)), in this control example, when the second special symbol variation is executed during the normal state, a common The out-reach production is executed (see FIG. 125(a)), and then the pseudo-fluctuation production (FIG. 125(b) to 126) is configured to be executed during the addition time (30 seconds).

Specifically, if the lottery result is a big hit and the number of special figures 2 reserved is 3, the value of the production counter 223f acquired regardless of the number of special figures 1 reserved fluctuates in the range of "0 to 79" "Pseudo 3 effect" as a pattern is specified in the range of "80 to 99", "Special pseudo 2 effect" is defined as a variation pattern, and if the number of special figures 2 pending is 2, the number of special figures 1 pending Regardless, if the value of the production counter 223f acquired is in the range of "0 to 99", and the variation pattern is "pseudo 2 production", and the number of special figures 2 is 1, it is acquired regardless of the number of special figures 1. The value of the effect counter 223f is defined to be in the range of "0 to 89", "Pseudo 1 effect" as the variation pattern, and in the range of "90 to 99", "Special pseudo 4 effect" is defined as the variation pattern.

Also, if the lottery result is a big hit and the number of special 2 reservations is 0, if the number of special 1 reservations is 1 to 4, the "special end effect" will be displayed, and if the number of special 1 reservations is 0 "Pseudo no effect" is set.

If the lottery result is out, if the special figure 2 reservation number is 3, the value of the production counter 223f acquired regardless of the special figure 1 reservation number is in the range of "0 to 99", and the variation pattern is " "Pseudo 3 production" is defined, and if the number of special figures 2 reserved is 2, the value of the production counter 223f obtained regardless of the number of special figures 1 reserved is in the range of "0 to 99", and the variation pattern is " "Pseudo 2 effect", when the number of special figures 2 reserved is 1, the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 99" regardless of the number of special figures 1 reserved, "Pseudo 1 effect" as a variation pattern However, if the number of special figures 2 pending is 0, "pseudo no effect" is defined.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when setting the effect mode of the pseudo-fluctuation effect of the second special symbol, determine the presence or absence of the special figure 2 reservation number and the special figure 1 reservation number, and then executed It is configured to execute a pseudo-variation production in the production mode corresponding to the special symbol lottery. By constructing in this way, it is possible to easily make the pseudo-variation performance executed during one special symbol variation period look like a variation performance corresponding to the next special symbol variation.

In addition, since the number of pseudo fluctuations executed in the pseudo fluctuation production (the number of temporary stops of the third symbol) is configured to be the number of times corresponding to the number of acquired special figures 2 pending, during the normal state It can be made to think that all the special figure 2 reserves acquired during the normal figure per game executed are used. Therefore, when the pseudo-fluctuation effect in which the jackpot is won is executed, the player thinks that the jackpot has been won as a result of acquiring many special 2 reserves during the normal game per game executed in the normal state. can let Also, if the pseudo-fluctuation effect that is out and won is executed, after making it think that all the special 2 reservations have been consumed, the variable effect using the special 2 reservations will be executed (chance zone continues), it is possible to provide the player with an extra effect.

In addition, in this control example, since a pseudo-variation effect (special pseudo-2 effect, pseudo-4 effect) that is set only when the jackpot is won is provided, the pseudo-variation number of times executed in the pseudo-variation effect and the special figure The player can be interested in two pending numbers.

Next, with reference to FIG. 146, the contents of the effect selection table 222c during probability variation will be described. FIG. 146 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the effect selection table 222c during probability variation. In this probability variation production selection table 222c, a variation pattern with a basic time of 30 seconds is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol variation executed during the probability variation state (time saving state), that is, during the normal symbol high probability state. It is a data table that is referred to when setting the variable effect in the case. This probability variation production selection table 222c is referred to when setting the production mode of the variation production for the special symbol variation to be executed, and is executed in the variable display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182). 1 production mode setting process (see S4903 in FIG. 183), during the "super chance mode" which is the production mode for notifying the player that it is in the variable probability state (S5005 in FIG. 183: Yes), this time If the fluctuation time (basic fluctuation time) of the fluctuation pattern to be executed is "30 seconds" (S5007 in FIG. 183: Yes), or the special figure executed in the fluctuation display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182) In the 2 production mode setting process (see S4907 in FIG. 184), during the "super chance mode" which is the production mode for notifying the player of the variable probability state (S5112 in FIG. 184: Yes), this time execution If the variation time (basic variation time) of the variation pattern to be displayed is "30 seconds" (S5114 in FIG. 184: Yes), it is referred to.

In this control example, when the first special symbol lottery is executed in the high probability state of the normal symbol, the jackpot that can be won only in the first special symbol lottery (the jackpot in which the normal jackpot game is executed) is won. In order to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player grasps the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery before it is stopped and displayed, when a big win is won in the first special symbol lottery, it is usually A third pattern (third pattern with an even number attached) for indicating a jackpot winning in which a jackpot game is executed, and a third pattern (with an odd number) for indicating a jackpot winning in which a probability variable jackpot game is executed Attached 3rd pattern) and are configured to execute a double reach effect in which both are in a reach state.

Furthermore, when the above-described double reach effect is executed in the probability variable state, which is a high probability state of normal symbols, or in the time saving state, the player is informed that the special symbol lottery being executed is the first special symbol lottery. In order to make it difficult to grasp, even in the variation performance corresponding to the second special pattern lottery in which the probability variable big win game is always executed when the big win is won, the above-mentioned double reach performance is executed. In addition, the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation executed in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set are configured so that the variation pattern with the variation time of "30 seconds" can be selected. , and the double reach effect is executed when this "30 seconds" variation pattern is selected. In this way, regardless of the type of special symbol, the same variable time (30 seconds) is set, and the double reach effect that is the same variable effect is executed. Various performances executed by a pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed by making it possible to prevent a player from grasping the symbol type of the special symbol variation being executed, and by sharing performance data used for the variation performance. It is possible to suppress the volume of performance data used for

As shown in FIG. 146, the effect selection table 222c during probability variation has different effect modes depending on the symbol type (special symbol type), the lottery result (special symbol lottery result), and the value of the effect counter 223f. stipulated. Specifically, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the lottery result is a probability variable jackpot (jackpot A), the value of the production counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 49". "Variable single reach" is defined as "double reach" in the range of "50 to 99", and "double reach" is defined when it is a normal jackpot (jackpot B), and "non-reach" is defined when it is out. there is

In addition, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2) and the lottery result is a probability variable jackpot, the value of the production counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 49". "Variable probability double reach" is defined in the range of 50 to 99", and in the case of deviation, the value of the production counter 223f is "double reach" in the range of "0 to 4", "5 to 10" in the range of " "Variable double reach" is defined as "non-reach" in the range of "11 to 99".

By configuring in this way, even if the first special symbol lottery is executed in the variable probability state, even if the second special symbol lottery is executed, "double reach" (shown in FIG. 131 (a), normal hit Since the ready-to-win effect in which two or more third symbols including the third symbol corresponding to the It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the third symbol variation performance corresponding to the special symbol lottery is being executed.

Furthermore, when the "special double reach" is set, the "double reach" effect mode is set first, and then the reach effect in which the effect mode is changed to the "variable double reach" shown in FIG. 131(b). is executed. Therefore, even when ``double reach'' is executed corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, the game can be played while expecting to be promoted to ``probability variable double reach'' on the way. In this "special double reach", the timing at which the production mode of the ready-to-win production is changed is the timing when the middle symbol row Z2 makes one or two turns. You may change the production|presentation mode based on the timing which operated .

In addition, when the second special symbol variation is executed during the normal state, when the variation pattern (special out) of variation time "10 seconds (basic time 10 seconds, addition time 0 seconds)" is selected 125(a) is executed, the third symbol is stop-displayed in a display mode indicating a failure. On the other hand, when a variation pattern (special hit) with a variation time of "10 seconds (basic time of 10 seconds, additional time of 0 seconds)" is selected, after pattern variation for 10 seconds, a display mode indicating jackpot winning ( For example, at "777"), the third symbol is stopped and displayed.

In this way, as a variation performance corresponding to the second special symbol variation executed during the normal state, a special variation pattern for pseudo-executing a plurality of variation performances during one special symbol variation period, and one time It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the new second special symbol variation is executed by providing a normal variation pattern in which one variation performance is performed during the special symbol variation period. Therefore, the game can be played while expecting that the chance zone will continue.

In addition, the greater the number of variable performances (including simulated) executed in the chance zone, the higher the expectation of winning the jackpot. can be done.

In addition, in this control example, one pseudo-variation time (10 seconds) executed in a special variation pattern that performs a plurality of pseudo-variation effects during one special symbol variation period and the same time Since the variation time (10 seconds) of the normal variation pattern is defined so that, for example, after the second special symbol variation performed with the special variation pattern, the second special symbol variation performed with the normal variation pattern When executed, on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the variable effect for 10 seconds is repeatedly executed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the pseudo variation performance is repeatedly executed as the special variation pattern or whether the special variation pattern and the normal variation pattern are continuously performed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the new second special symbol variation is executed, so that the player can play while expecting the chance zone to continue.

In addition, in this control example, when a variation pattern with a variation time of "40" seconds is selected as the second special symbol variation in the normal state, it is configured to execute the variation effect of the special variation pattern. However, without being limited to this, as the variation time corresponding to the second special symbol variation executed during the normal state, a variation time other than "40 seconds" may be selectable. In addition, in this control example, the pseudo-variation time, which is part of the variation performance of the special variation pattern, is basically fixed at 10 seconds, and when the expectation of the big hit is high, the pseudo-variation performance is performed at a length other than 10 seconds. It is designed to be easy to execute. By configuring in this way, the player can play the game while anticipating that the execution period of one variable performance will be long.

Returning to FIG. 144(a), the description is continued. The continuous announcement execution selection table 222d is based on the winning information (whether or not the jackpot is won) included in the winning information command received from the main control device 110 side, continuous announcement effects that are executed across a plurality of special symbol variation periods. 2 is a data table that is referred to when determining whether or not to satisfy the execution condition of . Here, when the condition for executing the continuous advance notice effect is established, a special valid time is set for validly determining the operation of the frame button 22.例文帳に追加Then, when the frame button 22 is operated within the special valid time, the continuous announcement effect is executed.

When this continuous announcement effect is executed, it shifts to a background mode (sky mode) different from the normal background mode (sea mode, mountain mode), and a special symbol corresponding to the winning information for which the execution condition is satisfied. A continuous performance is executed using a period until the result of the lottery is displayed. Although detailed description will be given later, in the present embodiment, among the periods in which the high probability state of the normal design is set, the high-speed fluctuation period (the 20th special design fluctuation after the high probability state of the normal design is set is executed), compared to the other period, it is configured to make it difficult to shift to the background mode based on the operation of the frame button 22 . Since the background mode can be switched by operating the frame button 22 even during such a high-speed fluctuation period, the player can be motivated to operate the frame button 22 .

In addition, unlike the normal background mode transition, the background mode transition can be executed with a higher degree of expectation for winning the jackpot, so that the presentation effect can be enhanced. Furthermore, during the high-speed fluctuation period, the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation tends to be shorter than in other periods, so if the background mode is shifted like in other periods, the result of the special symbol lottery, which is important, will be overlooked. Since there is a risk that the background mode will be lost, the background mode is configured to be difficult. However, when the background mode shifts based on the execution of the continuous notice effect, since the continuous notice effect using the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is executed a plurality of times, the continuous notice immediately after the transition to the background mode The production result of the production is not displayed. Therefore, even if the transition to the background mode is executed, it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

Furthermore, in this control example, when the frame button 22 is operated during the high-speed fluctuation period, an effect (operation effect) other than the transition to the background mode can be executed, and even during the high-speed change period, the player is motivated. By operating the frame button 22, the user is prevented from becoming bored with the game early. Among them, the transition to the background mode is executed based on the fulfillment of the conditions for executing the continuous advance notice performance, thereby making it possible to provide the player with an unexpected performance and improve the interest of the game. be able to.

Here, with reference to FIG. 147(a), the contents of the continuous announcement execution selection table 222d will be described. FIG. 147(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuous announcement execution selection table 222d. As shown in FIG. 147(a), the continuous notice execution selection table 222d includes the lottery result (lottery result of the special symbol) included in the received winning information, and the number of special figures 2 reserved (second special symbol reserved ball number) and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f, it is defined whether or not the condition for executing the continuous advance notice effect is established.

Specifically, the lottery result is "big hit", the special figure 2 reservation number is "3", and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 79", the execution condition of the continuous notice effect is defined as "with continuous notice" in the range of "80 to 198", "without continuous notice" in which the condition for executing the continuous notice effect is not established. In addition, the special figure 2 pending number is "4", and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 149", and the condition for executing the continuous notice effect is satisfied. In the range of 150 to 198", "no continuous notice" is defined in which the condition for executing the continuous notice effect is not satisfied.

On the other hand, when the lottery result is "out", the special figure 2 reservation number is "3", and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 194", the execution condition of the continuous notice effect is not established. In the range of "195 to 198", "without continuous notice" is defined as "with continuous notice", which satisfies the conditions for executing the continuous notice effect. In addition, the special figure 2 pending number is "4", and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 189", and the condition for executing the continuous notice effect is not satisfied "No continuous notice" In the range of 190 to 198", "with continuous notice" is defined, which satisfies the conditions for executing the continuous notice effect.

As described above, in this control example, the larger the special figure 2 pending number, the more likely the conditions for executing the continuous notice effect will be established, and furthermore, the case where the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit is better than the case where it is out. It is configured so that the conditions for executing the continuous advance notice effect are easily satisfied. By configuring in this manner, the player can be motivated to play a game (a game in which a ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640) in order to execute the continuous advance notice effect, and the pachinko machine can be operated. 10 work can be increased. In addition, it is configured so that the greater the number of reserved special figures 2, the higher the degree of expectation for a big hit in the case where the conditions for executing the continuous advance notice performance are established. Therefore, in order to execute the continuous notice effect with a high expectation of big win, the game (the game of entering the ball into the second ball entrance 640) can be enthusiastically played, and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is enhanced. be able to.

In this control example, when a prize information command (a prize information command for a special symbol) is received from the main control device 110 side, the continuous notice execution selection table 222d is referred to, and only whether or not the condition for executing the continuous notice effect is established. is configured to determine (determine), and even if the conditions for executing the continuous notice effect are satisfied, the continuous notice effect is not executed at that time, and after the execution condition is satisfied, within a specific period When the frame button 22 is operated in , the continuous announcement effect is executed. As a result, when a plurality of balls enter the second ball entrance 640 during one special symbol variation period and a plurality of winning information commands are received, the winning information for which the execution condition is to be established is played. can be difficult for people to understand. Therefore, when the continuous advance notice performance is executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the continuous notice performance will continue, and it is possible to suppress the monotony of the performance contents of the continuous notice performance.

In addition, in this control example, as described above, the player is not notified (suggested) that the condition for executing the continuous advance notice effect has been established. may be configured to execute a notification (suggestion) effect for notifying (suggesting) to the player, for example, by displaying the characters "waiting" in the sub display area Ds, It may be configured to notify (suggest) to the player that the execution condition is met. By constructing in this way, when the notification (suggestion) performance is executed, the frame button 22 can be operated willingly to execute the continuous advance notice performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Also, in this control example, as shown in FIG. An icon HR10 imitating a frame button 22 is displayed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm as an effective period notification mode that can be notified to the user. From the display mode of the icon HR10, it is not possible (difficult to) determine whether the special valid time is set or the normal valid time is set. With this configuration, the player does not know whether the continuous announcement effect will be executed or the normal operation effect will be executed until the frame button 22 is operated, so the player tries to execute the continuous announcement effect. The frame button 22 can be voluntarily operated.

It should be noted that, unlike the configuration of this control example, the configuration is such that the player can determine whether the valid period currently set is the special valid period or the normal valid period, depending on the display mode of the icon HR10. Alternatively, the icon HR10 may be displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, and it may be determined whether the valid period currently set is the special valid period or the normal valid period. can be configured to In addition, the period in which the special valid time is set is made different from the period in which the normal valid time is set (for example, 3 seconds after the special symbol variation is started), and the special valid time is set. may be configured not to notify (suggest) to the player. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the frame button 22 should be operated to execute the continuous advance notice performance, so that the player is motivated to operate the frame button 22. can be operated. Similarly, when the player is not notified (suggested) that the special effective time is set, an effect (for example, It may be configured such that only the characters "waiting" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds) can be executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the frame button 22 from being unnecessarily operated in a state in which the condition for executing the continuous advance notice effect is not satisfied. In addition, in a state where the conditions for executing the continuous notice effect are established, and when the frame button 22 is operated outside the special effective time, the player is notified that the special effective time is now out. A notification display (for example, the display of "not now" in the sub-display area Ds) may be executed, or a guidance display for guiding the special effective time (for example, "Press again in 2 seconds" in the sub-display area Ds. display) may be executed.

Further, in this control example, when a winning information command including winning information for the second special symbol is received, the continuous announcement effect table 222d is referred to, and the process for establishing the conditions for executing the continuous announcement effect is executed. However, without being limited to this, it may be configured so that the execution condition of the continuous announcement effect is established even when the winning information command including the winning information for the first special symbol is received.

Returning to FIG. 144, description will be made. The V information execution selection table 222e is a data table referred to when determining whether or not to execute the V information effect during the jackpot game. In this control example, a specific area (V gate) 65v is provided in the variable winning device 65 that is opened during the jackpot game, and the winning ball in the variable winning device 65 passes through the specific region (V gate) 65v. Then, after the end of the jackpot game, a high probability state (probability variable state) of the special symbol is set. Then, depending on the type of the jackpot game to be executed, a jackpot game (probability variable jackpot game) in which the ball easily passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game, and a jackpot game during the jackpot game rather than the probability variable jackpot game. A jackpot game (normal jackpot game) in which a ball is difficult to pass through a specific area (V gate) 65v can be executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120(b), a switching valve 65y is provided in the variable winning device 65, and the ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 depending on the arrangement of the switching valve 65y is placed in a specific area (V gate ) 65v, and a fourth flow path 65e4, through which the specific area (V gate) 65v can be passed. The switching valve 65y is drive-controlled so as to be switched to an arrangement state in which the ball can be distributed to the fourth flow path 65e4 only during the first round game when the probability variable jackpot game is executed.

The V notification effect is a period (V period) during which the ball can pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v and a period (V period) for aiming at the specific area (V gate) 65v for the player who is executing the jackpot game. A V guide effect for guiding a game method, a V period effect for notifying that the current period is V, and a V success effect for notifying that the ball has passed through a specific area (V gate) 65v during the V period. A V failure effect informing that the ball did not pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the V period is an effect that can be executed. By executing this V notification effect, when the probability variable jackpot game is executed, it is possible to easily perform the game for passing the ball through the specific area (V gate) 65v, and ) 65v, the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the variable probability state will be set after the jackpot game ends.

Here, in this control example, after the normal jackpot game is executed, the time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set, and the time saving state is set. If it is set, the "chance mode" is set as the effect mode (see FIG. 134). Further, the "chance mode" is set even in a part of cases where the variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game. As a result, even if the "chance mode" is set after the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to leave the possibility that the variable probability state is set internally, so that the player can be informed that the variable probability state is set. The game can be played while making the player anticipate it. However, if the V notification effect is executed during the jackpot game, it can be easily grasped during the jackpot game whether or not the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game. If the ``chance mode'' is set after the end of the jackpot game even though the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v, there is a problem that people will feel distrust that the variable probability state has disappeared. . In particular, in the pachinko machine 10 having a variable probability end condition for ending the variable probability state as in this control example, which is satisfied when the special symbol variation is executed 50 times, a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery. Since the variable probability state ends without doing, there is a possibility that the variable probability state is not set even though the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v.

Therefore, in this control example, a process for determining whether or not to execute the V information effect during the big win game is executed, and based on the processing result, it is determined whether or not to perform the V information effect during the big win game. Then, when the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game in which the V notification effect is not executed (when the variable probability state is set after the jackpot game ends), after the jackpot game ends, the "chance mode is configured to set By configuring in this way, it becomes difficult for the player to determine whether or not the variable probability state is set internally, so that the player who is playing the "chance mode" feels distrustful. A game can be played while expecting that the variable probability state is set without giving.

Here, the contents of the V-notification execution selection table 222e will be described with reference to FIG. 147(b). FIG. 147(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the V-notification execution selection table 222e. This V notification execution selection table 222e determines that it is time to start the probability variable jackpot game in the jackpot-related processing (see S4218 in FIG. 180) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 174) of the sound lamp control device 113. If so (S4701 in FIG. 180: Yes), it is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the V notification effect during the current jackpot game (S4704 in FIG. 180).

As shown in FIG. 147(b), in the V notification execution selection table 222e, the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game to be executed this time (jackpot type won) and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f are associated. V notification presence/absence (determination result of whether or not to execute V notification effect) is defined. Specifically, when the jackpot type is "jackpot A" and the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 149", "V report present" indicating that the V report effect is to be executed is In the range of "150 to 198", "no V notification" is defined to indicate that the V notification effect is not executed. In addition, when the jackpot type is "jackpot C, D, E" and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 189", "V notification" is in the range of "190 to 198" , "No V notification" is stipulated.

When a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery and a jackpot type "jackpot A" in which a probability variable jackpot game is executed is set, a V notification performance is executed at a rate of about 75%. Here, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, 50% is the variable jackpot game ("jackpot A"), and the remaining 50% is the normal jackpot game ("jackpot B"). ing. Therefore, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the V notification performance is executed during the jackpot game at a rate of about 37.5%, and the V notification performance is executed during the jackpot game at a rate of about 62.5%. The performance will not be executed. In addition, it is configured such that the percentage of the probability variable jackpot game being executed is about 20% in the case where the V notification effect is not executed.

On the other hand, when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery and the jackpot type "jackpot C, D, E" in which the variable jackpot game is executed is set, the V notification effect is executed at a rate of about 90%. . Here, when the big win is won in the second special symbol lottery, it is configured to always be a probability variable big win game ("big wins C, D, E"). Therefore, in practice, a jackpot game in which the V notification effect is not executed is executed at a rate of about 10% when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery. Thus, by providing a case where the V notification performance is not executed even for the big win winning by the second special symbol lottery in which the probability variable jackpot game is always executed, when the V notification performance is not executed, i.e., the jackpot game. When the "chance mode" is set after the end, it is possible to increase the ratio of the game state to the variable probability state.

Also, as described above, when winning the jackpot ("jackpot A") in which the probability variable jackpot game is executed in the first special symbol lottery, and when the jackpot ("jackpot C") in which the probability variable jackpot game is executed in the second special symbol lottery , D, E”), the ratio of execution of the V notification effect is made different. Specifically, the first special symbol lottery in which the probability variable big winning game is difficult to be executed is more likely than the second special symbol lottery in which the probability variable big winning game is actually more likely to be executed, when the probability variable big winning game is executed. is configured to make it difficult for By configuring in this way, when a big win is won in the first special symbol lottery, the frequency of not executing the V notification performance during the big win game can be increased, so that the first special in which the normal big win game can be executed. Even when the "chance mode" is set after the end of the jackpot game based on the pattern lottery, it is possible to easily make the player have expectations.

It should be noted that, in this control example, as shown in FIG. It may be different, for example, the execution ratio of the V notification effect may be changed according to the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, or depending on the number of times the jackpot has been won without shifting to the normal state (so-called number of consecutive games). The execution ratio of the V notification effect may be varied, or the execution ratio of the V notification effect may be varied according to the operation result of the player's operation of the frame button 22 . By varying the execution ratio of the V notification effect according to various conditions in this way, it is possible to set a plurality of apparent probability change ratios (the ratio of the V notification effect to the entire jackpot winning). can improve the interest of

In this control example, the above-described V notification effect can be executed only when the probability variable jackpot game is executed, that is, when the jackpot game that allows the ball to pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the V notification effect may be executed even when a normal jackpot game is executed. In this case, in accordance with the timing (timing at which the first round round game is executed) V period (period in which the ball can pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v) is set in the probability variable jackpot game The configuration may be such that the V notification effect is executed, and finally the V failure effect for notifying that the ball did not pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the V period is executed. Furthermore, in the case where the V failure effect is executed even though the game is normally played during the jackpot game, for example, the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v in the probability variable jackpot game. It may be constructed such that the V failure performance is executed despite the fact that the player has made the game, and the "chance mode" is set after the jackpot game ends.

In addition, in this control example, it is possible to set a pattern in which the V notification effect is not executed during the probability variable jackpot game, even when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery and when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery. However, without being limited to this, for example, when a big win is won in the second special symbol lottery in which a probability variable jackpot game is always executed, the V notification performance may be executed without fail. good.

Returning to FIG. 144(a), the description is continued. The button operation effect selection table 222f selects the effect mode of the operation effect executed based on the player's operation of the frame button 22, which is the operation means, when the "chance mode" is set as the effect mode. It is a data table referred to when making a decision, and in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see S4107 in FIG. 186) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 174) of the sound lamp control device 113, the chance mode If it is determined that a valid operation has been performed on the frame button 22 during the period (S5314 in FIG. 186: Yes), it is referred to (see S5315 in FIG. 186). In this way, by varying the presentation mode of the operation presentation executed when the player operates the frame button 22 with reference to the presentation selection table 222f at the time of button operation, the player is provided with a variety of variations. It is possible to provide an operation presentation.

Here, with reference to FIG. 148(a), the contents of the effect selection table 222f at the time of button operation will be described. FIG. 148(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the button operation effect selection table 222f. As shown in FIG. 148 (a), the button operation time effect selection table 222f is referred to when the time saving state selection table 222f1 and the probability change state are set when the time saving state is set. A probability variation state selection table 223f2 is defined.

In this control example, when the time saving state is set and in a part of the case where the variable probability state is set, the "chance mode" is set as the effect mode. Then, regardless of the game state that has been set, during the "chance mode", a common variable effect is executed. Furthermore, when the probability variable state is set and when the time saving state is set, the same variation pattern table (variable probability / time saving table 202b2) is referred to Select the variation pattern (variation time) is configured as As a result, the currently set game state is the probability variable state from the special symbol variation executed during the "chance mode" and the third symbol variation performance executed corresponding to the special symbol variation. It is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether it is in the time saving state, so that the player can play the game while expecting that the current state is the variable probability state.

However, if the player who is playing the "chance mode" is not provided with information capable of suggesting the currently set game state, there is a problem that the player quickly becomes bored with the game during the "chance mode". there were. Therefore, in this control example, a plurality of types of operation effects can be executed during the "chance mode", and the execution ratio of each operation effect is made different according to the set game state. . In other words, although the types of operation effects that can be executed are the same, by making the rate of selection of each operation effect different, it is possible to predict the current game state based on a plurality of operation effects that are actually executed. It consists of Thus, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the game state.

In addition, the production mode of the operation production that is executed when the normal state is set, and the production of the operation production that is executed during the "super chance mode", which is the production mode that notifies that the variable probability state is set. Similarly, regarding the mode and the effect mode of the operation effect that is executed as part of the variable effect, one of a plurality of types of effect modes is determined and executed. Description is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 148(b), the contents of the time saving state selection table 223f1 defined in the operation effect selection table 222f will be described. FIG.148(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the time saving state selection table 223f1. This time saving state selection table 223f1 is a data table referred to when determining the effect mode of the operation effect in the "chance mode" in which the time saving state is set, and includes the timing at which the frame button 22 is operated, Effect modes of different operation effects are defined according to the type of operation method executed by the player on the frame button 22 and the value of the effect counter 223f obtained.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 148(b), the operation timing is during the high-speed fluctuation period (first period), the operation method is "normal push", and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is "0 ~ 149", "None" indicating that the operation effect is not executed, and in the range of "150 to 189", whether or not the variable effect being executed will be in the ready state. The range of "190 to 198" defines the "suggestion of ready-to-reach" that indicates an effect to be suggested inside, and the "suggestion of state" that indicates an effect for suggesting the currently set game state. In addition, when the operation method is "long press", the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 198", and "background mode transition" indicating that the background mode is to be transitioned is stipulated. .

Here, in this control example, a plurality of operation methods that can be executed by the player with respect to the frame button 22 are set, and when the state in which the frame button 22 is pressed is less than 2 ”, and “Long press” determined when the state in which the frame button 22 is pressed continues for two seconds or more are set. And, it is constructed such that different operation presentations are executed according to the operation method of the player. As a result, the player can arbitrarily select an operation method to execute various operation effects. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

In this control example, the two types of operation methods described above are used as the operation methods that can be operated by the player. For example, a second frame button) may be provided, and different operation effects may be selected according to the type of frame button pressed by the player. A plurality of operation methods may be set in correspondence with the order of operations performed on a plurality of operation means. Furthermore, when the player presses the frame button 22, it is determined as "normal pressing", and when the pressing state continues for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds), it is additionally determined as "long pressing". , may be configured to execute an operation effect dedicated to "long press".

Further, as operation means that the player can operate, in addition to the configuration of the frame button 22 that the player can press, a lever member that can be operated by the player to tilt up, down, left and right, and a rotating member that can be rotated by the player. An operating means consisting of a moving member may be provided. In addition, instead of the player directly operating the member, a proximity sensor having a predetermined detection area is provided, and the proximity sensor detects a hand that enters the detection area to determine that the predetermined operation has been performed. Any operating means (for example, a touch sensor, etc.) may be provided as long as the player can arbitrarily perform a predetermined operation and select a different operation method according to the content of the operation.

Also, in this control example, a configuration having two types of operation methods, "normal press" and "long press", has been described. , only one type of operation method may be provided. Here, if only one type of operation method is provided, it may be configured such that different operation presentations are performed according to the interval at which the operation is performed. As a result, even if the operation method itself is one type, it is possible for the player to select various operation effects.

It returns to FIG.148(b) and continues description of the content of the time saving state selection table 223f1. When the operation timing is during the normal time-saving fluctuation period (second period), the operation method is "normal push", and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 198", the background mode is shifted. "Background mode transition" is defined to indicate that In addition, when the operation method is "long press", the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 198", indicating the effect for suggesting the currently set game state "suggest state". is stipulated.

Then, when the operation timing is within a specific period (during the 50th special symbol variation), the operation effect is not executed regardless of the operation method and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f. Finally, the operation timing is during the normal time-saving fluctuation period (third period), the operation method is "normal push", and the value of the acquired production counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 198", the background mode "Background mode transition" is defined to indicate transition. In addition, when the operation method is "long press", the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is within the range of "0 to 198", in the past (when the "chance mode" is set (after the jackpot game is over)) A "past state suggestion" indicating an effect for suggesting the game state that has been set is stipulated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 149, the contents of the variable probability state selection table 223f2 defined in the operation effect selection table 222f will be described. FIG. 149 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variable probability state selection table 223f2. This variable probability state selection table 223f2 is a data table referred to when determining the effect mode of the operation effect in the "chance mode" in which the variable probability state is set, and includes the timing at which the frame button 22 is operated, Effect modes of different operation effects are defined according to the type of operation method executed by the player on the frame button 22 and the value of the effect counter 223f obtained.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 149, the operation timing is during the high-speed fluctuation period (first period), the operation method is "normal push", and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 119". In the range of "None" indicating that the operation effect is not executed, in the range of "120 to 139", it is suggested whether or not the variable effect being executed will be in the ready state during the third symbol change. In the range of "140 to 189", "suggestion of reach" indicating the effect to be performed, "suggestion of state" indicating the effect for suggesting the currently set game state, and in the range of "190 to 198", the background "Background mode transition" is defined to indicate mode transition. Further, when the operation method is "long press", the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 198", and "background mode transition" indicating that the background mode is to be transitioned is stipulated. .

In addition, when the operation timing is during the normal time-saving fluctuation period (second period), the operation method is "normal push", and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 169", the background mode is shifted. In the range of "170 to 198", "background mode transition" indicating that the game is to be played is defined as "suggestion of state" indicating an effect for suggesting the currently set gaming state. In addition, when the operation method is "long press", the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 198", indicating the effect for suggesting the currently set game state "suggest state". is stipulated.

Then, when the operation timing is within a specific period (during the 50th special symbol variation), the operation effect is not executed regardless of the operation method and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f. Finally, the operation timing is normal during the short time fluctuation period (third period), the operation method is "normal push", and the value of the acquired production counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 198", the background mode "Background mode transition" is defined to indicate transition. In addition, when the operation method is "long press", the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is within the range of "0 to 198", in the past (when the "chance mode" is set (after the jackpot game is over)) A "past state suggestion" indicating an effect for suggesting the set game state is defined.

As described above, when the "chance mode" is set as the production mode after the end of the jackpot game, the operation is performed by referring to different data tables in the case of the time saving state and the probability variable state. It is configured such that the effect mode of the effect is selected, and the rate at which each effect mode is selected is varied according to the set game state. Therefore, it is possible for the player to predict the currently set game state based on the effect mode of the operation effect to be executed, so that the player can be motivated to operate the frame button 22.例文帳に追加

In addition, at a specific operation timing, an advantageous game state (variable probability state) that is advantageous to the player is set among a plurality of game states (variable probability state, time saving state) in which the "chance mode" can be set as the production mode. As an effect mode (advantageous effect mode) that is likely to be executed when the Isn't an advantageous game state set when the "state suggestion" operation effect is executed by the "normal push" inside? The game can be played while having a sense of anticipation.

Furthermore, since the operation effect can be executed multiple times during the "first period", the more the number of times the operation effect is executed in the above-described advantageous effect mode during the "first period", the more Since it is possible to increase the degree of expectation that the advantageous game state is set, the player can be motivated to operate the frame button 22 .

In addition, at a specific operation timing, among a plurality of game states (probability variable state, time-saving state) in which the "chance mode" can be set as the production mode, an advantageous game state (probability variable state) that is advantageous to the player is set. As an effect mode (fixed effect mode) that is executed only when the It can be grasped that an advantageous game state is set when the operation presentation of "background mode shift" is executed by "normal push" during "1 period".

In addition, as the above-described advantageous rendering mode and fixed rendering mode, a rendering mode that can be selected under other conditions (for example, "normal push" during "second period") is used. More specifically, when the "state suggestion" effect mode is executed by the "normal push" during the "first period", the degree of expectation that the variable probability state is set increases, and the "second period ”, it is configured so that the degree of expectation that the time saving state is set is high. By constructing in this manner, the player is provided with the enjoyment of playing the game while analyzing which performance mode the operation performance was executed in which period during which the ``chance mode'' was set. be able to.

As described above, with reference to FIGS. 148 and 149, when the player operates the operating means (frame button 22), the contents of the presentation mode of the operation presentation that can be selected, and the presentation mode referred to when the selection is made. Although the contents of the data table (button operation selection table 222f) have been described, in the first control example, different data tables are referred to according to the set game state. In each data table, the same effect modes are defined with different selection ratios. As a result, it is difficult for the player to grasp the current game state only by the effect mode of the operation effect to be executed, and by executing the operation effect a plurality of times, the current game state can be grasped by grasping the selection ratio of each effect mode. It is possible to make it possible to grasp the game state. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game so as to execute the operation effect multiple times.

In this control example, it is configured to refer to different data tables according to the set game state. A different data table may be referred to to select the effect mode of the operation effect based on the effect mode. As a result, when the variable probability state is set, different operation effects can be executed depending on whether the "super chance mode" is set as the effect mode or the "chance mode" is set. can.

Here, when the "super chance mode" is set as the effect mode, for example, there is no need to execute the "suggest state" which is the effect mode suggesting that the current game state is set. , Instead, it indicates a specific lottery result (big win or a variation pattern in which a variation time of a predetermined time or more is set) in the effect mode of "suggestion of reach" or the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b. It is preferable to define a rendering mode of "prefetch suggestion" that suggests whether or not information is included. As a result, even in the state where the "super chance mode" is set, the player can be motivated to execute the operation presentation.

Furthermore, the type of the data table for selecting the effect mode of the operation effect (the effect selection table 222f at the time of button operation), the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the jackpot type (special symbol stop display mode), the third symbol display It may be configured to vary according to the stop display mode of the third symbol displayed on the display surface of the device 81 or the presence or absence of V winning during the jackpot game.

In this case, for example, when the time saving state is set as the gaming state and the "chance mode" is set as the production mode, the "chance mode" is set after the normal jackpot game ends, and the probability variable jackpot game The performance mode of the operation performance executed during the ``chance mode'' can be made different from the case where the ``chance mode'' is set after the end of the jackpot game without allowing the ball to win a prize during the ``chance mode''. Specifically, during the "chance mode" in which the time saving state is set after the end of the variable jackpot game, the production mode of "past jackpot type suggestion" that suggests that the previous jackpot game was a variable jackpot game. It is good to stipulate. As a result, the player can be made to think that the variable probability state is set even though the time saving state is actually set. In addition, it is also possible to define the effect mode of "past game history notification" for informing that the previous big winning game was a variable probability big winning game but the V prize could not be won. This makes it easier to change the content of the game to be executed in the future.

Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 144(b). As shown in FIG. 144(b), the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 includes a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, a special symbol variation start flag 223d, and a stop type selection flag. 223e, production counter 223f, sub-state setting area 223g, normal symbol holding ball number counter 223h, special production flag 223i, V winning flag 223j, V production execution flag 223k, V notification flag 223m, time saving medium counter 223n, special continuous notice At least a flag 223o, an effect mode storage area 223p, a continuous notice execution flag 223q, a SW effective time counter 223r, a special effective time counter 223s, an operating counter 223t, and a memory area 223z are provided.

The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until the commands are processed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 61) of the sound ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out and is read by the command determination processing. , the command is parsed and an action is taken according to the command.

Winning information storage area 223b has one execution area and four reservation areas (first area to fourth area) for special symbols. Winning information included in the output winning information command is stored in order from the first area. Based on the information stored in the prize winning information storage area 223a, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the lottery result of the reserved ball and the like before the change starts.

In this control example, a maximum of 4 reserved balls of the first special symbol and a maximum of 4 reserved balls of the second special symbol are configured to be retained and stored. Four reserved areas for the first special symbol and four reserved areas for the second special symbol are formed. In this control example, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are configured not to be executed at the same time. When executing a new special symbol lottery in the state of having both, the oldest stored winning information (winning information stored in the first area) of the second special symbol holding area is executed It is configured to transition to the area. Then, each winning information stored in the second area to the fourth area is shifted to the reserved area with the number one lower. That is, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured such that the second special symbol lottery is executed with priority over the first special symbol lottery.

In addition, unlike the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example, for example, regardless of the type of special symbols, the pachinko machine 10 (so-called winning order digestion pachinko) executes a special symbol lottery according to the order in which the reserved balls are acquired. 10), the winning information storage area 223b is provided with eight reserved areas, and the winning information contained in the winning information command output from the main controller 110 is stored in order from the first area. good. In addition, if the pachinko machine 10 (so-called simultaneous variation type pachinko machine 10) capable of simultaneously (overlapping) executing the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, the configuration of this control example is used. On the other hand, instead of one execution area, a first execution area for the first special symbol and a second execution area for the second special symbol are provided, and the first area of the reservation area corresponding to each special symbol is provided. The prize winning information stored in is transferred to the execution area corresponding to each special symbol.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is a counter for counting the value corresponding to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and is the first for counting the reserved ball number of the first special symbol. It has a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c1 and a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c2 for counting the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from main controller 110 .

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls of each special symbol based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the number of reserved balls is counted by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. It is designed to be managed.

Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the number of held balls of the first special symbol is added by the ball entering the first entrance 64, or when the main controller 110 newly draws the first special symbol When the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is subtracted in order to execute, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command ) to the audio ramp controller 113 . In addition, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is added by the ball entering the second ball entrance 640, or the second special symbol for executing a new second special symbol lottery in the main controller 110 When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command (special figure 2 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e after addition or subtraction is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 Send.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the pending ball number command (special figure 1 pending ball number command, special figure 2 pending ball number command) transmitted from the main controller 110, from the pending ball number command, the main control device The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of 110 or the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is acquired, and the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c1, second It is stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c2). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so that the first special symbol reserved ball of the main controller 110 The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e.

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is used to display reserved symbols. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, and the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of , a command for the number of pending balls for display is transmitted to the display control device 114 .

When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the reserved ball number corresponding to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 is displayed in the sub-display area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 122(b)). As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d is changed while synchronizing with the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 also changes while synchronizing with the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. can be made Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which execution of the special symbol lottery is suspended.

The special figure fluctuation start flag 223d is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is set to on when a special figure fluctuation pattern command for notifying the special symbol fluctuation pattern output from the main controller 110 is received. . On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 . In addition, the special figure fluctuation start flag 223d has a first special figure fluctuation start flag 223d1 corresponding to the first special symbol and a second special figure fluctuation start flag 223d2 corresponding to the second special symbol, On and off are set according to the type of the special symbol indicated by the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 .

The special figure stop classification selection flag 223e is set to ON when a stop classification command for notifying the special symbol fluctuation stop classification output from the main controller 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 . In addition, this special figure stop classification selection flag 223e has a first special figure stop classification selection flag 223e1 corresponding to the first special symbol and a second special figure stop classification selection flag 223e2 corresponding to the second special symbol. It is set to ON and OFF corresponding to the type of special symbol included in the stop type command (special figure stop type command) transmitted from the main control device 110.

The effect counter 223f is a counter used for selection of variation patterns, selection of various effects, etc., and is repeatedly updated within the range of "0 to 198". It should be noted that it is updated by being incremented by one each time the main process is executed. Although detailed description is omitted, the effect counter 223f is composed of a plurality of counters, each of which has a different update rule. Any of the counters is configured so that counter update processing is executed each time the main processing (see FIG. 174) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed. Then, when selecting a variation pattern or performing a plurality of selection processes of various effects within the execution interval of the main process, the values of different counters of the effect counter 223f are acquired and the process is executed. ing. As a result, even when the process using the value of the effect counter 223f is executed multiple times at the same timing (within the same period of the main process), various effects can be selected using the same value of the effect counter 223f. can be suppressed.

Data corresponding to the state command output from the main controller 110 is set in the sub-state setting area 223g. The current game state can also be determined by the sound lamp control device 113 based on the data set in the sub-state setting area 223g. The state setting command is also output from the main control unit 110 when the power is turned on, and the game state backed up can be determined by the sound lamp control unit 113 . Further, the sub-state setting area 223g includes a current game state storage area for storing the currently set game state and a past game state storage area for storing the game state set before the current game state was set. It has an area and is configured to be able to calculate what process the current game state was set through. Thereby, for example, when the time saving state is set, whether the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, or the probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends, and then the probability variable end condition is satisfied It is possible to determine whether the time saving state is set in , and to execute an effect (past state suggesting effect for suggesting the past game state to the player) based on the determination result. In addition, the subordinate state setting area 223g is configured to store game states such as a jackpot game state and a normal game state in addition to the normal state, the variable probability state, and the time saving state.

The normal pattern reserved ball number counter 223h is a counter for counting the value corresponding to the normal pattern reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the normal design of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. The value is added or subtracted in synchronization with the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f for counting the number of reserved balls. In addition, the detailed contents are omitted because they are the same except that the object is changed from the special symbol to the normal symbol with respect to the above-described special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c.

The flag 223i during special effect is a flag for indicating that the second special symbol variation is executed during the normal state, and is turned on when the condition for executing the second special symbol variation during the normal state is established. is set to Specifically, when the second special symbol variation is executed in the normal state, or when the special figure 2 reservation is acquired in the state where the first special symbol variation is performed, it is set to ON. And, when the first special symbol variation is executed in the state in which the flag 223i is set to ON during the special effect, that is, when the special figure 2 reservation is 0, it is set to OFF. In this control example, a “chance zone” effect (see FIG. 124(b)) is executed to indicate a period during which the special effect flag 223i is set to ON.

The V winning flag 223j is a flag for indicating that the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game, and is set to ON when the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v. be. Specifically, when a V winning command is set by main controller 110 (see S2216 in FIG. 171), the V winning command is transmitted. Then, when it is determined that the V winning command is received in the winning command processing (see S4212 in FIG. 177) executed in the command determination processing (see S4112 in FIG. 175) of the audio lamp control device 113 (S4407 in FIG. 177 : Yes), set to ON.

This V winning flag 112j is referenced in the ending process (see S4715 in FIG. 181) executed in the jackpot related process (see S4218 in FIG. 180) (S4801 in FIG. 181), and during the current jackpot game, the specific area ( It is determined whether the ball has passed through the V gate) 65v (whether it has won a V prize). Then, when it is determined that it is set to ON in the ending process (see S4715 in FIG. 181) (S4801 in FIG. 181: Yes), it is set to OFF.

In this control example, a V notification effect can be executed as an effect for passing a ball through a specific area (V gate) 65v (V winning) during a jackpot game. It is configured to vary the performance mode of the performance executed at the time of winning (at the end of V round) and at the time of ending of the jackpot game. Further, the effect mode at the time of V winning and the effect mode at the time of the ending of the jackpot game are made variable depending on whether or not the V notification effect is being executed. In this way, in order to enable the performance that is variably set based on the presence or absence of the V prize to be executed at a different timing (at the time of the ending) from the time of the V prize, the presence or absence of the V prize is determined according to the setting status of the V prize flag 112j. configured to be identifiable.

The V effect execution flag 223k is a flag for indicating that the V information effect is to be executed during the big win game, and is set to ON when it is determined to execute the V information effect during the big win game. Specifically, in the jackpot-related processing (see S4218 in FIG. 180), if it is determined that the jackpot start command has been received (S4701 in FIG. 180: Yes), and if this jackpot is a probability variable jackpot ( S4703 of FIG. 180: No), it is determined whether or not to execute the V notification effect by referring to the V notification execution selection table 222e. Then, when it is determined to execute the V notification effect (S4705 in FIG. 180: Yes), it is set to ON (see S4706 in FIG. 180).

Then, in the ending process (see S4715 in FIG. 181) executed in the jackpot-related process (see S4218 in FIG. 180), if the V winning flag 112j is not set to ON, that is, if the V winning occurs during the jackpot game. If it does not occur, it is referred to (S4802 in FIG. 181), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S4802 in FIG. 181: Yes), a process for switching the effect mode of the ending effect is executed ( S4804 in FIG. 181), and then set to OFF (S1804 in FIG. 181).

In this control example, when the probability variable jackpot game is executed, it is determined whether or not to execute the V notification performance during the jackpot game, and when it is decided to execute the V notification performance, the ending is performed at that time. As the effect mode during the period, it is configured to set the effect mode (see FIGS. 127(b) and (d)) for indicating that the variable probability state is set. That is, when the V notification effect is executed during the probability variable jackpot game, the player is notified to that effect at the time when the V prize is won, so even in the ending effect executed during the ending period, the player It is configured such that an effect mode (see FIGS. 127(b) and 127(d)) for indicating that the state is set is set. Therefore, when the V prize is not won during the jackpot game, the effect mode of the ending effect is switched to the effect mode (see FIGS. 127(a) and 127(c)) for indicating that the time saving state is set. Execute the process.

On the other hand, when the V notification effect is not executed during the probability variable jackpot game, even if the V prize is won, the player is not notified to that effect, and the time saving state is set as the effect mode of the ending effect. (see FIGS. 127(a) and (c)) are set in advance, so even if the V prize is not won during the jackpot game, it is necessary to execute the process of switching the effect mode of the ending effect. None.

The time saving medium counter 223n is a counter for measuring the period in which the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) is set, and when the high probability state of normal symbols is set (after the end of the jackpot game), A predetermined value (“100” in this control example) is set. Then, when the special symbol variation is executed in a state in which the value of the counter 223n during time saving is 1 or more, the value is subtracted by 1, and when the value of the counter 223n during time saving becomes "0", normal symbols are displayed. It is determined that the state has shifted to a low probability state. Moreover, based on the value of the counter 223n during time saving, it is comprised so that the detailed period in the high probability state of a normal design may be discriminate|determined.

The special continuous notice flag 223o is a flag for indicating that the condition for executing the continuous notice effect is satisfied during the high-speed fluctuation period (first period) in which the "chance mode" is set as the effect mode, and It is set to ON when the condition for executing the effect is satisfied. When the special continuation notice flag 223o is set to ON, a special effective period is set in which the operation to the operating means can be effectively discriminated, and a specific operation is performed to the operating means during the special effective period. In this case, a continuous announcement effect is executed.

Specifically, in the winning command process (see S4212 in FIG. 177), which is part of the command determination process (see S4112 in FIG. 175) of the audio lamp control device 113, the special figure winning information command (corresponding to the special symbol In the special figure winning information command processing (see S4406 in FIG. 178) executed when receiving the winning information command), the present is during the high speed fluctuation period (the value of the counter 223n during time saving is greater than 75) (S4502 in FIG. 178: Yes), when it is determined to execute the continuous announcement effect by referring to the continuous announcement execution selection table 222d (S4506 in FIG. 178: Yes), it is set to ON ( S4507 in FIG. 178).

Then, in the special figure 2 production mode setting process (see S4907 in FIG. 184) for selecting the variation production corresponding to the second special symbol variation, the chance mode executed when the "chance mode" is set In the middle effect setting process (see S5116 in FIG. 185), the setting status of the special continuous notice flag 223o is referred to (S5210 in FIG. 185), and if it is set to ON, the operation to the frame button 22 is enabled. As a distinguishable special effective period, the special effective time timer 223s is set to a value corresponding to 3 seconds (S5211 in FIG. 181) and then turned off.

In this way, a special valid period is set in which the operation to the operating means is determined to be valid only when the condition for executing the continuous advance notice effect is satisfied, and the player specifies the operating means within the special valid period. By making it possible to execute the continuous announcement performance only when the operation of (1) is executed, the player can be motivated to play the game to execute the continuous announcement performance. In addition, a plurality of information for executing the continuous notice effect (information indicating whether the conditions for executing the continuous notice effect are satisfied, information indicating the period for which the special effective period is set (set period), , information indicating the operation contents to be performed on the operation means for executing the continuous advance notice effect), by varying the notification mode of the notification effect for informing the player, the difficulty level of executing the continuous notice effect is facilitated. can be variably adjusted.

In this case, it is preferable to make it easier to establish the conditions for executing the continuous advance notice effect when the special symbol lottery wins the jackpot (when it does). As a result, the player can be motivated to play the game so as to execute the continuous advance notice effect. In addition, when the player executes a specific operation on the operating means outside the special effective period in a state where the conditions for executing the continuous advance notice effect are established, the player can set the timing at which the special effective period is set. It is preferable to configure so as to execute a guidance notification effect for guiding to. As a result, the player can be made to operate the operation means more willingly, and it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

The performance mode storage area 223p is a storage area for storing various performance modes set during the high probability state of normal symbols, and different performance modes are stored according to the value of the counter 223n during time saving. Then, when determining the current presentation mode, the stored presentation mode is read. Specifically, during the chance mode production setting process (see S5012 in FIG. 185), the value of the time saving counter 223n is read (S5201 in FIG. 185), and the production mode corresponding to the read value (high speed period ( high-speed fluctuation period), normal first period (first period), normal second period (second period)) are set and stored. Then, when the high-probability state of the normal symbol shifts to the low-probability state, the stored information is cleared.

The continuous notice execution flag 223q is a flag for indicating that the continuous notice effect is set as the variable effect of the third symbol, and is set to ON when the continuous notice effect is being executed. Then, in the chance mode production setting process (see S5012 in FIG. 185), the setting status is determined (S5208 in FIG. 185), and if it is set to ON (S5208 in FIG. 185: Yes), continuous notice An effect mode corresponding to the effect is determined. Then, it is set to OFF when the continuous announcement effect ends. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the setting of a different effect mode that does not correspond to the continuous advance notice effect in the new variable effect executed during the continuous advance notice effect.

The SW effective time timer 223r is a timer for measuring the operation effective period for validly determining the operation of the frame button 22 set within the variable display period of the third symbol, and when the operation effective period is set. , a value corresponding to the length of the operation valid period is set, and the value is decremented as time elapses. Then, when the player operates the frame button 22 during the valid operation period, the value is cleared to zero. In this way, by setting the operation effective period for validly determining the operation of the frame button 22, the effect (operation effect) executed when the operation means (frame button 22) is operated is not excessively executed. can be suppressed.

In this control example, only the frame button 22 is provided as the operation means that the player can operate. When a plurality of operation means are provided, different operation effective periods may be set for each operation means. In that case, by providing the SW effective time timer 223r for each operation means, it is possible to set the operation effective period of each operation means in duplicate.

The special effective time timer 223s is set to the frame button 22 only when the effect setting process during the chance mode (see S5012 in FIG. 185) is executed while the special continuous notice flag 223o is set to ON. is a timer for measuring the operation effective period (special operation effective period) that determines whether the operation is effective, and when the special operation effective period is set, the value It is configured so that it is set and the value is decremented as time passes. Then, in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see S4107 in FIG. 186), it is determined whether or not the special operation valid period is valid (S5306 in FIG. 186). 186 S5306: Yes), the operation of the frame button 22 is effectively handled. In this control example, when the frame button 22 is operated within the normal operation effective period (the period when the value of the SW effective time timer 223r is greater than 0), and when the special operation effective period (the value of the special effective time timer 223s is 0) A different operation effect is executed depending on whether the frame button 22 is operated within the special operation effective period. , It is constructed so that a continuous advance notice effect is executed over a plurality of special symbol variation periods from the next executed special symbol variation to the end of the target special symbol variation. Then, when the continuous announcement effect is executed, the background mode is configured to shift to a dedicated background mode (heaven mode). Therefore, during the period in which the background mode transition is suppressed by the normal operation of the frame button 22, the execution of the background mode transition can increase the player's expectation of winning the jackpot.

The in-operation counter 223t is a counter for measuring the period during which the player presses the frame button 22, and when the player measures and presses the frame button 22, The value of the counter is updated. Based on the value measured by the in-operation counter 223t, the type of operation performed by the player on the frame button 22 is determined (see S5313 in FIG. 186).

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

Returning to FIG. 137, the description is continued. The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 changes the third pattern, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 121). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 121) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the display control device in the first control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in this first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 150 to 155. FIG. FIG. 150 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238 , and the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240 . . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third pattern display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed by the third symbol display device 81 are different. Since there are models with exactly the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed so that a system reset is applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same shall apply hereinafter). is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231 . Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. The image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory generally has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed. It takes a long time before the data is output. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions that make up the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. store. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235, which is connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236 .

The character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storage and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the characters can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data is retrieved from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a, due to its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks into which data cannot be written. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and avoids bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a. data address translation.

The ROM controller 234b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including error bits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data blocks of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data blocks. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data corresponding to the designated address. is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one page of data in the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b, for example, outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while data is set in one bank, or outputs the data specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is intended to complement the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Of the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR-type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided for storing a portion of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. This allows the display control device 114 to execute various controls. The first program storage area 234d1 stores the boot program within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a), which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and instructs the bus line 240 to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 .

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and transfers the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. to specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 indicates the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. , the instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

Here, in this control example, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to read the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set the data in the buffer RAM 234c. You spend a lot of time waiting to receive your code. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Thus, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c that is stored, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred to the program storage area 233a. The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, it is unnecessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the command pointer 231a to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to be set to a first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined number in the program storage area 233a. Set to a street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processing can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for those instructions.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed so as to include the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as a first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Execute the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 187) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 187) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed by the MPU 231 to the end, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding a NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 155) transmitted from the MPU 231 to be described later, and draws one frame of a first frame buffer 236b or a second frame buffer 236c to be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 81 to display the image on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. The image controller 237 performs the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process during the one-frame image display time (20 milliseconds in this control example) on the third pattern display device 81 . parallel processing in

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 189(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, in general, a NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of a ROM, but has a slower read speed than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image is drawn by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by main controller 110 or display controller 114 are permanently resident in resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, before the drawing is performed, the display controller 114 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal-use video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 237 by the MPU 231 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not in use. , is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time with the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third pattern display device 81 from being too late.

In addition, image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, so that the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the display processing on the device 81 is not used, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 can be retained while the power is turned on without being overwritten. 235e and an error message image area 235f are provided, and at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third pattern area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is the power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In addition, in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball entering the special figure ball opening 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on varying image for displaying the results of the lottery performed by the main controller 110 in a varying effect when the selection is made.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 187).

Here, the power-on variation image will be described with reference to FIG. 151 . FIG. 151 shows the power on display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the display control device 114 is powered on. It is an explanatory view explaining a time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image shown in FIG. 151(a). The image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

At this time, when receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main controller 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 performs the command shown in FIG. 151(b). As shown in FIG. 151(c), on the display screen of the main image when the power is turned on, there is a power-on variation image with a "○" symbol at the lower right position of the screen, and a "○" as shown in FIG. 151(c). A power-on fluctuation image of an "x" pattern is alternately and repeatedly displayed at the same position as the pattern during the fluctuation period. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed by the main controller 110 is selected from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113. Judging the result, if it is a "special design jackpot", the image shown in FIG. The image shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the stop of the variable effect.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the remaining image to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加can be done.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Further, when the player starts the game while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the entry of the ball into the special-figure entrance 64 is detected, the power-on fluctuation image 151(b) and 151(c) are alternately displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to display. As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When the entry of a ball into a special symbol entrance 64 is detected while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the corresponding variation performance is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加can be done.

Returning to FIG. 150, the description continues. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. Here, with reference to FIG. 152, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c among the rear images will be described. FIG. 152 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the four types of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. 152(b) shows the back faces B to D corresponding to the "forest stage," "river stage," and "empty stage," respectively, with respect to back face A corresponding to "town stage." .

As shown in FIG. 152, the character ROM 234 prepares back images corresponding to the respective back images A to D, which are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The image controller 237 draws the image so that the back image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared for each back surface A to D (hereinafter referred to as “scrolling images”) are configured so that the back images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a' are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area, and then the third pattern display device 81 displays an image between the position a and the position a' as the display area. The background image is scrolled in a continuous manner.

When it is decided to change the back surface type based on the back surface type selection table (not shown) and the stage is changed to "town stage", "forest stage", "river stage", or "sky stage", the MPU 231 , the image controller 237 is controlled so that the initial position of the display area is set between the position a and the position a' of the corresponding rear image, and the image at the initial position is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. . Then, as time elapses, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81. When the area reaches the image between position c and position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as an image from position a to position a'. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can display the images between the positions a to c by repeatedly scrolling them in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

On the other hand, the back image on the back E is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the order of (a)→(b)→(c)→(a)→ . Specifically, on the back side E, an image of a mountain towering over an island, an image of a sandy beach at the foot of the mountain, and an image of the sea surrounding the island are displayed as the third pattern in a state where the displayed positions are fixed. It is displayed on the display device 81 . On the other hand, the color tone of an image of the sky spread over the mountains changes with the passage of time.

When the stage is changed to the "island stage", an orange sky indicating the morning glow is displayed as the initial back image of the back E. As time elapses, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to bright blue, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the bright blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, as time elapses, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from black to white and further to orange. Then, after a predetermined period of time has passed, the third pattern display device 81 displays a repeated back image that returns to the back image showing the morning glow.

Next, for each rear image, the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 152(a), the rear surface A corresponding to the street stage, which is the initial stage, has all the image data corresponding to the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, from position a to position d. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often played without changing the stage while the initial stage "town stage" is displayed. By keeping all of them resident in the back image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, the back surface B corresponding to the "forest stage", the back surface C corresponding to the "river stage", and the back surface D corresponding to the "sky stage" are shown in FIG. That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. FIG. Also, image data corresponding to the back side E corresponding to the island stage is stored in the back side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and made resident during the start-up process after the power is turned on.

Here, in order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to keep the entire range of image data for all rear images resident in the resident video RAM 235 . As such, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the back image that is displayed first when the stage is changed is fixed in the range from position a to position a', and the position from position a including the initial position is fixed. Since the image data corresponding to the image during the interval b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, fluctuations will start. When the change of the stage is decided by lottery at the time, the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is used to immediately display the initial position of the back BD with the third pattern. It can be displayed on the device 81, and can be displayed while scrolling or changing color tone over time. In addition, since only image data corresponding to a partial range of images are stored for back faces B to D, an increase in storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

After the image of the initial position is displayed, the rear faces B to D are displayed from left to right in the range from position a to position b using the image data resident in the rear face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The range from position a to position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from position b' to position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 while scrolling. As a result, the image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from position a to position b is being scrolled. After scrolling the range from position a to position b by using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b' to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the pattern display device 81 .

Similarly, after the image of the initial position is displayed on the back face E, the image data of the remaining image is displayed using the image data resident in the back face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The range of the image data is set so that the transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 can be completed. As a result, the image data corresponding to the remaining images can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the image is being displayed, so that the image is displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. After that, by using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the remaining images can be sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as time elapses.

Image data stored in normal-use video RAM 236 for rear surfaces B to E is stored in a sub-area dedicated to rear-surface images provided in image storage area 236a of normal-use video RAM 236 (see FIG. 150). As a result, the rear image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the rear image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the rear image can be reliably displayed.

In addition, in the rear faces B to D, the image data stored in the rear face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to images between position b' and position b. image data is stored redundantly. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video image is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b' on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection on the third pattern display device 81. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data in the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position a and position a' is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area. do. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 150, the description continues. The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 kinds of main patterns with numbers "0" to "9" as the third patterns are resident. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, after the ball enters the special figure entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, although the first symbol display device 37 starts the variable effect, the third symbol display device In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variable performance is not immediately started.

In addition, in the third design area 235d, as the main designs to which the numbers "0" to "9" are not attached, the main design consisting of the rear design such as a wooden box, and the rear design and characters such as planes, wrapping cloths, helmets, etc. The image data corresponding to the main pattern consisting of the accessory pattern which imitates is also resident. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the starting prize is not started even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect was stopped. be done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol with no number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols with no numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

Further, in this control example, the third pattern is displayed in a different display mode according to the set background mode (back image). Therefore, the display image data of the third pattern corresponding to the background mode after switching is stored in the third pattern area 235d every time the background mode is switched. This eliminates the need to store the image data for all the third designs corresponding to all the background modes in the third design area 235d, so that the storage capacity can be reduced.

In this control example, the background mode can be switched by the player operating the operation means (frame button 22). There is Therefore, in this control example, the image data corresponding to the background mode before switching is not erased from the third pattern area 235d for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) after switching the background mode. As a result, even if the background mode is frequently switched, it is possible to prevent the process of storing the image data in the third pattern area 235d from being complicated. Also, the third pattern storage area 235d may be configured to store image data of a plurality of third patterns corresponding to each of a plurality of background modes in advance.

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy", "old man", and "girl" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these are displayed in the character design area 235e. By being resident, when the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, it does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but stores the resident data. By reading out the image data previously resident in the character design area 235e of the video RAM 235, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. This eliminates the need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound ramp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound ramp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. Notify the display controller 114 with an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages are preliminarily resident in the error message image area 235f. By reading the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is read after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data can be overwritten and updated as needed, and has at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is predetermined.

The MPU 231 extracts image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 in the subarea provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information with the third pattern display device 81, a process for displaying the image for one frame is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers, and simultaneously , the image of one frame developed earlier can be read from the other frame buffer, and the image of the read one frame can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds of completion, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately specifying the parameters, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing for the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and a stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a background image change flag 233w, a background image determination flag 233x, a demonstration display flag 233y, and a fixed display flag 233z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main controller 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily implement diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main controller 110. For example, a variable effect, an opening effect, , round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are provided.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is off, the stop symbol indicating the failure is finally stopped and displayed, and the stop type of the variable performance is the jackpot A or the jackpot B. If it is either, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

The opening performance is a performance for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to a special game state from now on and the large opening that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round performance will start from now on. This is an effect for informing the player of the number of rounds to be played. The ending effect is a effect for informing the player of the end of the special game state.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect stopped. The third pattern composed of the main patterns with no numerals '0' to '9' is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the persons involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect and the demonstration effect. In addition, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for the variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern and a total of 32 tables.

Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 153 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this control example, 20 milliseconds) for which one frame of image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content of an image (drawing content) for one frame.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, translucency, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are changed over time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the back face type, which is information for specifying the back face image type. The type of back face is the back face A to E corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of "town stage", "forest stage", "river stage", "sky stage", and "island stage"). Information specifying whether to display one of the back images or to display a back image different from the back images A to E is described. In addition, when specifying that a back image different from back faces A to E is to be displayed, the back face type also includes information specifying which back face image is to be displayed.

When the type of back surface specifies that one of the back surfaces A to E is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back surfaces A to E as a drawing target, In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the lapse of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear image different from the rear faces A to E, the rear face image to be displayed is specified from the rear face type.

In this control example, only the back face type is specified as the drawing content of the back face image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, and the image drawing based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81) according to the back surface type. display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. information indicating whether or not the background image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Rather than directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily identified from the offset information.

In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time in which the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player does not recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described at "0000H" which is the top address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 153) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next A drawing list (see FIG. 155), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are identified in the order defined in the display data table, so the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

Here, as in a conventional pachinko machine, if a program to be executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect image becomes more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114 .

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is generated for each frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the mode of presentation. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized only when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize.

Next, with reference to FIG. 154, details of the transfer data table will be described. FIG. 154 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 for normal use from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 for normal use and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 154). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. (corresponding to address "0002H" in FIG. 154).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

It should be noted that "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table, contains "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, as in the display data table, and the end address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 154, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 155) to be described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 154, when the pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237 . On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. process.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the display data. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and is associated with an address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various effects images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c determines whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIGS. flag to indicate This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on varying image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 187) executed by the MPU 231 (see S6005 in FIG. 187). Then, when all the resident object image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S7605 in FIG. 199(b)).

The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 189(b)). If the image display flag 233c is ON, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 189(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6308 in FIG. 189(b) S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 190 to 195) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 196 to 198) are executed.

The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 199(a)), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident object image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 199(b)) is executed to transfer the resident object image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 200) is executed to transfer image data necessary for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to commands and the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on commands and the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It selects and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 155) is generated in which the content of the image drawing instruction for is described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 adds an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 155), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the drawing instruction is described. As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. is a buffer for storing When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all of the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a later-described rendering list (see FIG. 155) describing the image rendering instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. is for specifying The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, display setting processing for V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing for one frame of image is completed (see FIG. 189(b)). ), the pointer update process (see S7205 in FIG. 198) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and stores the drawing content in the drawing list described later. (see FIG. 155), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and obtains the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

In addition, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed based on the transfer data table before the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs H.237.

Here, with reference to FIG. 155, details of the drawing list will be described. FIG. 155 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., number of reserved balls pattern 1, number of reserved balls pattern 2, ..., error (pattern) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. alpha blending information, compositing with other sprites, color tone correction according to color information, and filtering according to filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, the pending number of balls to be displayed). Image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw the image for one frame, and provides the detailed information for each sprite. Create a draw list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can store the image data according to the sprite type. , the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 sets other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as defined in the display data table. copy the information as is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, .

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and overwrites the drawn sprite in the frame buffer to develop it. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

In the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, transfers the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read out and transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this control example) on the third pattern display device 81 .

Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing and display processing for one frame of image are completed, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 189(b)). )) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S7207 in FIG. 196). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 judges that the presentation displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the presentation at the end of the presentation. perform various operations to

The stored image data determination flag 233i is set to indicate whether image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data are not resident in the resident video RAM 235 are stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by initial setting processing (see S6002 in FIG. 187) executed by the MPU 231 in the main processing when power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The storage image data determination flag 233i is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set during normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 200) executed by the MPU 231. will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Also, image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in a non-stored state when the image data of one sprite is stored. Therefore, set the containment state corresponding to the other sprites to "off".

Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 200). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 200). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j selects a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") from among two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). ), and when the drawing buffer flag 233j is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 236c. The information of the specified drawing target buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 201).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information previously developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is done by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process (see S6306 in FIG. 189B) is performed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

The back image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not the type of the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is to be changed. If the back image change flag 233w is ON, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is OFF, it means that no change is made. The back image change flag 233w is set to ON when a back image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received (see S7001 in FIG. 195(a)). The back image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7709 in FIG. 200), and is set to OFF when the back image change process is executed (see S7710 in FIG. 200). As a result, the rear image corresponding to the rear image change command and the presentation mode change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

The back image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set back image type. This flag consists of, for example, 1 byte, and each bit is associated with each rear face type. If any bit of the back image determination flag 233x is on, it means that the back surface type corresponding to the bit that is on is set as the current back surface type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear image discrimination flag 233x is ON, it means that the rear surface A is set. In the rear image determination flag 233x, when a rear image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received, the bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to ON (FIG. 195(a)). ) of S7002). At this time, all other bits are set to off. With this back image discrimination flag 233x, the currently set back surface type can be easily identified.

The demonstration display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not a demonstration effect is being performed. If the demonstration display flag 233y is on, it means that the demonstration is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the demonstration is not being performed. The demonstration display flag 233y is set to ON when the demonstration display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 196) (see S7221 in FIG. 196). is set to off when a display data table other than the display data table buffer 233d is set to the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 191(a), S6705 in FIG. 192(a), S6805 in FIG. 192(b) , S6905 in FIG. 193). With this demonstration display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demonstration effect is currently being performed.

The fixed display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the fixed display effect is being executed. Here, the fixed display effect means the effect of stopping display (fixed display) of the stop symbol for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the variation pattern. If the confirmation display flag 233z is ON, it means that the confirmation display effect is being performed, and if it is OFF, it means that the confirmation display effect is not being performed. The fixed display flag 233z is set to ON when the fixed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 196) (S7214 in FIG. 196). It is set to off when another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 191(a), S6705 in FIG. 192(a), S6805 in FIG. 192(b), FIG. 193, S6905). With this confirmation display flag 233z, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the confirmation display effect is currently being performed.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main controller in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 156 to 172. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this control example). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.

In this first control example, as described above, in a state where both the lottery right of the first special symbol (special figure 1 reservation) and the lottery right of the second special symbol (special figure 2 reservation) are stored, It is configured to preferentially execute the lottery for the second special symbol. Also, while the jackpot game is being executed, by passing the ball through a specific area (V gate) 65V arranged in the variable prize winning device 65, a high probability state of special symbols is set after the jackpot game is finished. It is configured so that Furthermore, as an end condition for ending the probability variable state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, the special symbol lottery is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) in addition to the end condition that is satisfied when the special symbol lottery wins the jackpot. It is configured to provide a termination condition that is satisfied when executed.

FIG. 156 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Furthermore, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the second winning random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (999, 99, 999) are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1, C2 and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, a start winning process associated with entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) or entering the second ball entrance 640 (start winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation processing and the start winning processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 157-162.

After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is the process for performing display on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is followed by the passage of the ball. A gate passage process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 163 and 164. FIG. After executing the through-gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process ends. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is the process of deciding on/off of firing. Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 157, the special symbol variation process (S104), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 157 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). Special symbol variation processing (see S104 in FIG. 157) performs various determinations (appropriateness determination) and determination of special symbols based on each counter value acquired, and in the determined variable display mode by predetermined control, Control the first symbol display device 37 to enable variable display, set various commands for executing the variable display effect of the third and fourth symbols in the third symbol display device 81, and determine the result ( Control is executed to stop display in a display mode showing the result of judgment of success or failure). The special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 157) will be described below.

In the special symbol variation process (S104), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol big hit (during the big win game) is currently in progress (S201). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot middle flag 203k is on. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol jackpot is in progress (jackpot game is in progress) (S201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

In the processing of S201, if it is determined that the special symbols are not being hit (during the jackpot game) (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is fluctuating (S202). ), if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not fluctuating (S202: No), that is, if a new special symbol lottery (variation) can be executed, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter Obtain the value of 203d (the number of holdings of variation display based on the first special symbol lottery N1) and the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e (the number of holdings of variation display based on the lottery of the second special symbol N2). (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the sound lamp control device 113 during the external output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. sent. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Data is shifted, and the process proceeds to S208.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, when the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d acquired in the process of S203 It is determined whether (N1) is greater than 0 (S210).

In the processing of S210, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S210: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S210, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (that is, is 1 or more) (S210: Yes), the first special symbol reserved ball number The value (N1) of the counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S211), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d changed by calculation is set (S212). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the sound lamp control device 113 during the external output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. sent. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of S212, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted by the same method as the processing of S207 (S213), and the processing is changed to the processing of S208. to move to. In the process of S208 executed after the process of S207 or S213, a special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S208), then a special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S209), and then this process is terminated. Details of the special symbol jackpot determination process (S208) and the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

In the processing of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the change time has elapsed (S214). If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S214: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S215), and then this process is terminated. In the processing of S215, the value of the variable time counter for measuring the variable time of the special symbol is updated, and the display of the first symbol display device 81 is updated corresponding to the updated value of the variable time counter. A value indicating the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern selected in the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209) is set in the variation time counter at the start timing of the special symbol variation, and then the process of S215 is executed. It is updated (decremented) each time. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variable time has elapsed in the process of S214 (S214: Yes), that is, if the value of the variable time counter updated in the process of S215 is 0, the first symbol display device 37 (S216). The stop symbols are set in advance by the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209). When this special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol jackpot is determined according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and in the case of the special symbol jackpot, depending on the value of the first winning type counter C2. One of the jackpots A to E is determined.

In this control example, when the jackpot A is reached, the first symbol display device 37 turns on the blue LED, when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on, and when the jackpot C is reached. , the green LED is lit, and when the jackpot D is reached, the blue LED and the green LED are lit. In addition, when it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped.

After the process of S216 is completed, when the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether or not it is a special symbol jackpot (S217). If the lottery result of this time is a special symbol jackpot (S217: Yes), the jackpot start flag 203j is set to ON (S218), and the values of the time reduction counter 203h and probability variation counter 203i are cleared (set to 0) (S219). ), the process proceeds to S220. When the jackpot start flag 203j is set to ON by the processing of S218, when the jackpot control processing (see S1804 in FIG. 113) of the main processing executed by the main controller 110 is executed, S1901: Yes By branching, an opening command is set (S1902). As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, a big win effect is started.

In the process of S217, if the lottery result of this time is out of the special symbol (S217: No), the processes of S218 and S219 are skipped, the update process is executed (S221), and then the process proceeds to S220.

The status command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the audio lamp control device 113 during external output processing (S1801) of the main processing executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. sent to. When receiving the state command, the sound lamp control device 113 acquires the game state included in the state command. As a result, the state grasped by the sound lamp control device 113 can be matched with the actual state of the pachinko machine 10 . In the process of S220, a special figure confirmation command is set (S220), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 158, the special symbol jackpot determination process (S208), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 157), will be described. FIG. 158 is a flow chart showing this special symbol jackpot determination process (S208).

In the special symbol jackpot determination process (S208 in FIG. 158), first, each counter value stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S301). Then, based on the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 140(a)), it is determined whether or not the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 matches the jackpot determination value, and the lottery is performed. A result (determination result) is acquired (S302).

When the process of S302 is completed, it is next determined whether the current lottery result is a big win (S303), and if it is determined to be a big win (S303: Yes), the special symbol lottery result is set to a big win. (S304), based on the value of the acquired hit type counter C2, set the jackpot design of the special design to be displayed on the first design display device 37 (S305), and finish this process. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S303 that the lottery result of this time is not a big hit (S303: No), the special symbol is set in the first symbol display device 37 (S306), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 159, the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 157), will be described. FIG. 159 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209).

In the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209 in FIG. 159), first, in the special symbol jackpot determination process (S208 in FIG. 158), whether or not the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot, that is, the special symbol jackpot is set. It is determined whether or not it is set (S401).

In the process of S401, when it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is set (S401: Yes), the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIGS. 141(a) to (c)) is obtained. The jackpot type is determined based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 (S402). Next, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the special symbol execution area is acquired (S403), and the current game state (normal state, latent state, probability variable) corresponding to the information stored in the game state storage area 203g state) is read (S404).

Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 acquired in the process of S403 and the variation pattern selection table 202d read in the process of S404 (S405), and based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S405 , to set the special figure variation pattern command (S406). The special symbol variation pattern command set here includes the lottery result of the special symbol lottery, information indicating the variation time of the special symbol, and the external output process of the main process of the main control device 110 (S1801 in FIG. 167 ) to the audio lamp controller 113 .

Next, a special symbol stop type command indicating a special symbol stop symbol is set (S407), the first symbol display device 37 sets a special symbol variation start (S408), and the variation time of the selected variation pattern is indicated. The value is set to the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter (not shown) (S409), and the process is terminated. The special symbol stop type command set in the process of S407 includes information indicating the type of stop symbol indicating the result of this special symbol variation, that is, a rough type such as reach out or non-reach out. 167, and is output to the sound lamp controller 113 in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 167) of the main process (FIG. 167) of the main controller 110. FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S401, when it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol is out (S401: No), the process of S402 is skipped and the process proceeds to S403.

Next, with reference to FIG. 160, the contents of the update process (S221) executed in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 15) will be described. FIG. 160 is a flow chart showing the contents of the update process (S221). In this update process (S221), when the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation has passed (at the time of fluctuation stop), it is a process that is executed, and the remaining period of the period in which the probability fluctuation state is continuously set is updated, Processing for updating the remaining period of the period in which the time saving state is continuously set is executed.

When the update process (S221) is executed, first the value of the probability variation counter 203i is greater than 0, that is, it is determined whether the present is a high probability state of special symbols (S501), and the value of the probability variation counter 203i is 0 If it is determined to be greater than (S501: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203i is subtracted (updated) by 1 (S502), and then it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203i after updating is 0 (S503 ), when it is determined to be 0 (S503: Yes), the time saving state is set in the game state storage area 203g (S504), and the process proceeds to S505. In addition, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203i is not greater than 0 (is 0) in the processing of S501 (S501: No), the value of the probability variation counter 203i is not currently in the high probability state of the special symbol. The process of S502 to S504 described above for updating is skipped and the process proceeds to S505.

Also, in the process of S503, the value of the probability variation counter 203i is not 0, that is, the value of the probability variation counter 203i is greater than 0, even if the probability variation state (special symbol high probability state) continues (S503: No) , the process of S504 is skipped and the process proceeds to S505.

In the process of S505, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0, and if it is determined that it is greater than 0, that is, if the current is a high probability state of normal symbols (S505: Yes), time saving 1 is subtracted from the value of the counter 203h (S506), and it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h after the subtraction is 0 (S507). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 in the processing of S507, the normal state is set in the game state storage area 203g (S508), the value of the probability variation counter 203i, the value of the time saving counter 203h, the current game state is set (S509), and the process ends. Also, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not greater than 0 (is 0) in the process of S505 (S505: No), or in the process of S507 it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not 0 If so (S507: No), the process proceeds directly to S509.

Next, with reference to FIG. 161, the starting winning process (S105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 156) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 161 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S105). In the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 161), it is determined whether the ball has entered (start winning) into either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, and if the start winning is made, Up to the maximum number of reserved balls (up to 4 in the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640), each acquired counter value is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. This is the process of storing each.

Further, when each counter value obtained based on the reserved ball is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Or, based on each counter value stored in each of the second special symbol reserved ball storage areas 203b, a process (so-called pre-reading process) of predicting the result of determination in advance, the variation pattern to be selected, etc. is executed. . The starting winning process (S105 in FIG. 161) will be described below.

In the starting winning process (S105 in FIG. 161), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered (starting winning) the first ball entrance 64, which is the first starting opening (S601). Here, the entry of a ball into a ball detection switch (not shown) provided in the first ball entrance 64 is detected. It is determined that the ball entered the first ball entrance 64 (there was a starting prize) (S601: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S602), It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S603).

In other words, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls for the first ball entrance 64 at this time is less than the upper limit of 4 (that is, whether or not the number of reserved balls is stored up to the upper limit). When it is determined that the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S603: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (S604), and the voice lamp control device 113 A reservation number command for notifying the reservation number of the first ball entrance 64 (lottery right reservation number of the first special symbol) is set (S605).

Then, each value of various counter values (first per random number counter C1, first per type counter C2, variation type counter CS1) is read out (acquired) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol reserved ball execution area of RAM 203 (S606), and the process proceeds to S607.

Also, if it is determined in the process of S601 that the ball has not entered the first ball entrance 64 (S601: No), or in the process of S603, the number of currently held balls for the first ball entrance 64 is the upper limit. If it is determined to be a value (S603: No), the process of adding the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is skipped, and the process proceeds to S607.

Next, each process from S607 to S612 is the same as the process performed for the winning of the ball into the first starting hole (first ball entrance 64) executed in each process from S601 to S606. The only difference is that the processing of 1 is executed for the second ball entrance 640, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

After executing each process from S601 to S612, a prefetch process is executed (S613), and this process ends.

This look-ahead processing (S613) will be described later with reference to FIG. 162, but the success/failure determination is based on each counter value newly stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. A process for determining the result, the determined variation pattern, the stop type, and the like is executed. In addition, in this control example, it is configured to execute the process of determining the result of the determination, the determined variation pattern, the stop type, etc. based on the newly stored counter values, but it is limited to this. For example, when there is a new start winning prize, the validity of all the reserved memories stored (stored) in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b It may be configured to execute processing for determining the determination result, the determined variation pattern, the stop type, and the like.

Further, in this control example, when new information (winning information) is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, that is, the special symbol lottery right is newly acquired. However, it is not limited to this, for example, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, or when the lottery result of the normal symbol is determined. Accordingly, the content of the special symbol lottery right (winning information) may be determined in advance.

As described above, in this control example, when the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d or the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is added, information about the added prize Although it is configured to execute the prefetching process (S613) based on (winning information), it is not limited to this, for example, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is If it is determined to be the upper limit number (4) (S603: No), that is, if the ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 in a state where the number of reserved balls of the special symbol has reached the upper limit, look ahead. It may be configured so that the process (S613) can be executed. As a result, even in a state where the number of reserved balls of special symbols has reached the upper limit, the player can continue to play the game in order to execute the look-ahead process. In addition, since added value can be given when a ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 in a state where the number of reserved balls of special symbols has reached the upper limit, the number of reserved balls of special symbols is the upper limit. When the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 in the state of reaching , it is possible to suppress the decrease in motivation to play.

Next, referring to FIG. 162, the look-ahead process (S613), which is one process of the starting winning process (S105 in FIG. 161), will be described. FIG. 107 is a flow chart showing this prefetching process (S613).

In the look-ahead process (S613 in FIG. 162), first, a first hit random number, which is various counter values from the storage area newly stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. Each value of the counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 is read (S701). Then, the read data is stored in the area with the lowest winning order among the vacant storage areas in the prefetch pending storage area (S702).

Next, based on each counter value newly stored in the prefetching reservation storage area, the result of determination is determined. In addition, here, both the right/wrong determination when the special symbol is in a low probability state and the right/wrong determination when the special symbol is in a high probability state are discriminated. This is the timing when a new reserved memory is generated (the timing when a new reserved (winning information) is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b) Since there is a time lag between the timing at which the jackpot judgment is executed based on the withheld winning information, the game state ( This is because it is difficult to predict the special symbol probability state).

Next, it is determined whether or not the winning determination result is a jackpot (S703). When it is determined that the determination result is a jackpot (S703: Yes), based on the read various counter values, a winning command including information that can specify the jackpot type and variation pattern is set (S704), After that, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the determination result in the processing of S703 is not a big hit (S703: No), based on the read various counter values, a winning command including information that can specify the lost winning and the variation pattern is issued. set (S705), and then terminate this process.

Here, the winning command set in the process of S704 or S705 includes the above-described information for indicating the result of winning/failure determination (information that has a different meaning based on the result of winning/failure determination), and common information of S701. The setting includes information for indicating the values of various counter values read out by the process. Then, the winning command set in this process is output to the sound lamp controller 113 by the external output process (S1801) executed in the main process (see FIG. 167) of the main controller 110. FIG.

On the voice lamp control device 113 side, when the winning command is received, the display mode of the pending ball is varied based on various information included in the winning command (for example, the color of the pending ball is changed to a color different from usual). It is possible to execute an effect (pre-reading effect) in which a notice pattern or the like is displayed before the start of the fluctuation to suggest the result of the determination to the player.

In addition, in this control example, since there is only one probability state of the special design (low probability state of the special design), information to be set in the winning command (results of winning or not determination) can be set regardless of the game state. , For example, in a gaming machine having a plurality of probability states of special symbols (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of special symbols), the determination result in the case of the high probability state of special symbols and the low probability of special symbols It may be configured to determine the success or failure determination result in the case of the state and set the winning command based on the result of each determination, or even if the special symbol is in a high probability state or a low probability state A judgment value (value of the first winning random number counter C1) for judging a big win may be defined, and a winning command indicating a special symbol big win may be set only when the judgment value is read.

By configuring in this way, only when it is determined in advance that it is a specific jackpot to the audio lamp control device 113 side, a winning command indicating a jackpot is output, so a special symbol that does not execute a look-ahead effect It is possible to give a feeling of expectation of winning a jackpot against the fluctuation.

Furthermore, the game state when the special symbol lottery is performed based on the retention memory (winning information) stored (memorized) in the first special symbol retention ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol retention ball storage area 203b , and the winning/losing determination may be executed based on the game state. In this case, instead of changing the selection of the variation pattern depending on the number of retained balls, it is possible to determine by selecting a constant variation pattern regardless of the number of retained balls at the start of variation. When the look-ahead is executed, the game state at the time of start of variation can be determined by determining the variation order until the variation of the retained ball starts based on the information retained and stored.

Further, in this control example, when new reserved storage (winning information) is stored (stored) in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, it is based on the winning information. A configuration is used in which prefetching processing is executed and the success/failure determination is predicted in advance in the prefetching processing. Or set information indicating the content (each counter value) of the winning information (holding memory) newly stored (stored) in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b as a winning command, and received at the voice lamp control device 113 side It may be configured to predict the result of winning/failure determination based on the information included in the winning command.

With this configuration, the processing load on main controller 110 can be reduced. In addition, on the audio lamp control device 113 side, a process for determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect is executed, and when it is determined to execute the look-ahead effect, the information included in the winning command received from the main control device 110 It is preferable to configure it so as to perform analysis (prediction of acceptance/rejection determination result). As a result, when the look-ahead performance is not performed, the specific look-ahead processing (prediction of the success/failure determination result) is not performed, so that the Pachinko machine 10 can be prevented from performing useless control. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from illegally obtaining the result of the prefetching process executed without a title.

Next, with reference to FIG. 163, the normal symbol variation process (S106), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 163 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is a process for controlling the variable display of the second symbol (normal symbol), the opening time of the electric accessory 640a, etc., and various processes related to the normal symbol variation (lottery). (Processing for executing normal design variation, processing for setting variation mode (variation time) of normal design variation to be performed, processing for updating normal design variation during execution, processing for stopping normal design variation, result of normal design lottery Processing to determine the game content of the normal figure per game executed when is a hit) is executed.

In this normal symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 163), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S801). During the winning of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a is performed after the second symbol display device 83 displays the winning (after the winning symbol is stopped and displayed). Until the middle (until the winning game is completed) is included. When it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of winning (S801: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hitting (S801: No), it is determined whether the normal symbol of the second symbol display device 83 is being displayed in a variable manner (S802). If it is determined that the normal symbol variation display is not being performed, that is, if it is determined that a new normal symbol variation (lottery) is currently executable (S802: No), then the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f A value (M) is acquired (S803), and it is determined whether the value is greater than 0 (S804).

When it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 in the processing of S804 (S804: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S804: Yes), the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S805). In other words, when it is determined that the condition for executing a new normal symbol variation in the process of S804 (that winning information for use in the normal symbol variation is retained and stored) is satisfied, the retained memory is stored. 1 is subtracted from the value of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f in order to execute the normal design variation using the winning information.

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S806). In the process of S806, the data stored in the normal design reservation 1 to the normal design reservation 4 of the normal design reservation ball storage area 203c are shifted to the execution area side in order. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of normal symbol reservation 1→execution area. After shifting the data, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S807).

Next, it is determined whether or not the time-saving counter 203h is on, that is, whether or not the current state is the high-probability state of normal symbols (during time-saving) (S808), and the time-saving counter 203h is set to on. If it is determined (S808: Yes), the win/loss determination result (lottery result) is acquired based on the hit determination value of the second hit random number table 202c for high probability (see FIG. 140(b)) (S809) , S811. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time saving counter 203h is off (S808: No), the second per random number table 202c for low probability (see FIG. 140 (b)) based on the per determination value, the success or failure determination result is obtained (S810), and the process proceeds to S811.

In the process of S811, it is determined whether or not the current normal symbol variation (lottery) is a win (S811), and if it is determined to be a win (S811: Yes), the display mode of "○" at the time of the win is displayed. The display mode is set (S812), and the process proceeds to S814. On the other hand, in the process of S811, if it is determined that the current normal symbol variation (lottery) is not a win (no) (S811: No), the display mode of "x" is set as the display mode when losing. (S813), and the process proceeds to S814.

In the process of S814, it is determined whether the current game state is during time saving (high probability state of normal symbols) by referring to the value of the time saving counter 203h (S814), and during time saving (high probability state of normal symbols). If it is determined that there is (S814: Yes), the normal symbol fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds (S815), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S814 that it is not in the time saving mode (high probability state of normal symbols) (S814: No), the fluctuation time of normal symbols is set to 10 seconds (S816), and this process is finished.

In addition, in this control example, as described above, depending on the set probability state of the normal design, the variation time of the normal design is varied. , 3 seconds may be set as the variable time. By configuring in this way, at the timing when the game state is switched, specifically, from the normal state (normal pattern low probability state) in which a long variation time is easily set, a short variation time is easily set Short time. At the timing of the end of the jackpot game when the game state switches to the state (high probability state of the normal pattern), the normal pattern fluctuation of the long fluctuation time is executed, and the time saving state is set. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the normal symbol lottery is not executed.

In addition, regarding the setting method of the fluctuation time of the normal pattern, without being limited to the configuration of this control example, the fluctuation time can be changed according to the game state, or the fluctuation time can be changed according to the number of normal pattern pending balls, The variation time may be varied according to the acquired predetermined value. For example, in this control example, the variation time of the normal symbol variation is set to the normal symbol probability state (high probability state, low probability state ) and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of normal pattern reserved balls). Further, it may be configured such that the ease with which a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 varies depending on the set fluctuation time of the normal symbol.

In this way, by configuring the state of the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 to be variable according to the length of the fluctuation time of the set normal symbol, the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 can be Since the easiness of ball entry can be easily changed according to the game state, various game characteristics can be created.

On the other hand, in the process of S802, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not being changed and displayed (S802: No), the variation time of the normal symbol being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S817), and if it is determined that the variation time has not elapsed (S817: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has passed in the processing of S817 (S817: Yes), next, stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S818). In the processing of S818, when the current normal symbol lottery is a win, the second symbol display device 83 is set to stop display (illuminate display) the "O" symbol. On the other hand, when the lottery for the normal symbol is lost, the second symbol display device 83 stops displaying (lights up) the "x" symbol. That is, a setting is made to stop and display the display mode set in the processing of S812 or S813 described above.

By the process of S818, when the stop display is set, the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed in the second pattern in the display mode set by the process of S812 or the process of S813. The symbol display device 83 stops displaying (lighting display).

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current normal symbol is a hit (S819). When it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol is not winning (no) (S819: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery result of the current normal symbol is a hit (S819: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203h is checked to see if the current game state is in the time saving mode (normal symbol high probability state). Refer to and determine (S820), and when it is determined that it is in the time saving (high probability state of the normal symbol) (S820: Yes), the opening time of the electric accessary 640a is 1 as the game content of the game per normal symbol The game contents (release operation) of 2 times per second are set (S823), and the process proceeds to S822.

On the other hand, in the process of S820, when it is determined that it is not during time saving (normal symbol high probability state) (S820: No), as the game content of the normal symbol per game, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a is 5 seconds × 1 The contents of the game (release action) are set (S821), and the process proceeds to S822.

In the process of S822, based on the scenario set in the process of S821 or S823, the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessary product 640a is set (S822), and the process ends.

Next, the opening/closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a in this control example will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, based on the normal symbol probability state (high probability state, low probability state) set at the timing of determining whether the normal symbol is valid (timing of performing the processing of S808 to S811) Probability of normal symbols set at the timing (timing determined that the fluctuation time has passed in the process of S817) to set the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a by executing the judgment of normal symbols. It is configured to set the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a based on the state (high probability state, low probability state).

That is, in this control example, the variation processing (lottery processing) regarding normal symbols and the variation processing (lottery processing) regarding special symbols are configured to be executed independently, and further, the variation processing regarding special symbols ( Lottery processing) based on the result of normal design probability state (high probability state, low probability state) is configured to vary. Therefore, depending on the result of the variation processing (lottery processing) regarding the special symbols that is executed in parallel during the period when the variation processing (lottery processing) regarding the normal symbols is performed, the normal symbols are usually at the timing of judging whether the symbols is set, and at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a, there is a case where the normal symbol low probability state is set.

In such a situation, for example, based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol that is set at the timing of determining whether the normal symbol is appropriate, the opening control mode (open pattern) is set, the electric accessory 640a is long open in a state where the normal symbol low probability state is set (an open pattern executed when the normal symbol high probability state is set ) was a problem.

Therefore, in this control example, the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a is determined, and based on the determination result, the electric role It is configured to set the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the object 640a. Thereby, the electric accessory 640a can be opened in an opening pattern according to the set game state.

In addition, in this control example, the normal design success/failure determination is executed based on the probability state of the normal symbol at the timing of performing the success/failure determination of the normal symbol, and the opening control mode of the electric accessory 640a to be moved in the winning game of the normal symbol. Although it is configured to set the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a based on the probability state of the normal symbol at the timing of setting (opening pattern), it is not limited to this, for example, the normal symbol is determined. A high-probability state of normal symbols is set at the timing, and a high-probability state of normal symbols is also set at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a to be moved in the winning game of the normal symbols. The electric accessory 640a may be configured to open for a long time only when the electric accessory 640a is open. It may be configured to set

Also, although detailed description is omitted, various information (normal design lottery results, normal design fluctuation fluctuation time, normal design per scenario, etc.) determined in the normal design fluctuation process (see S106 in FIG. 108) , commands indicating the contents of various information are set, and output to the sound lamp controller 113 in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 167) of the main process (see FIG. 167) of the main controller 110.

Next, the contents of the through gate passage processing (S107) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 164 is a flow chart showing the contents of the through gate passing process (see S164). This through-gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 156) to determine whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired and stored in the execution area. In addition, using the value of the acquired normal random number counter C5, before the actual right or wrong determination is executed (normal symbol fluctuation process (see S106 in FIG. 163) right or wrong determination (see S811) is executed This is a process for obtaining the lottery results (whether or not winning judgment results) in advance.

In the through-gate passing process (S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting opening (through-gate) 67 (S901). Here, the passage of the ball in the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (S901: Yes), then the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is acquired (S902), and then , determines whether the value (M) of the acquired normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 4 (whether the normal symbol reserved ball number has reached the upper limit) (S903).

In the processing of S903, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 4 (the upper limit is 4) (S903: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not greater than 4 (S903: Yes), 1 is added to the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (S904 ), the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S905), and the lottery result is acquired in advance based on the second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 140(b)) ( S906), set the winning information command for normal drawing including the normal hit determination result (preliminary determination result acquired in the processing of S906) (S907), and terminate this processing.

The normal figure winning information command set in the process of S907 is notified to the audio lamp control device 113 by the same process as the winning information command indicating the preliminary determination result of the special symbol set in each control example described above. be. By constructing in this way, the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery corresponding to the reserved and stored normal pattern lottery right can be discriminated in advance, and the performance can be executed based on the preliminary discrimination result.

Specifically, in the state where the chance zone is set, that is, for the general pattern received in the state where the second special symbol lottery is being executed based on the normal pattern per game being executed during the normal state When the winning information command includes the information indicating winning of the normal symbol, it is possible to execute the effect of continuing the chance zone until the next normal symbol winning game is executed. In this case, even if the second special symbol lottery is all completed and the first special symbol lottery is executed before the next normal game is executed, the first special symbol lottery As the production mode of the variable production executed correspondingly, the production mode corresponding to the first special symbol lottery (for example, the production mode in which the third symbol is varied in the horizontal direction shown in FIG. 122(b)) is not used. It is preferable to configure so that an effect mode corresponding to the 2 special symbol lottery (for example, an effect mode in which the third symbol is fluctuated in the vertical direction shown in FIG. 124(b)) is set. By configuring in this way, when a game per normal pattern is executed a plurality of times within a predetermined period in a normal state, the chance zone can be set for a long period of time, and the production effect can be enhanced.

In addition, when the chance zone is not finished even though the second special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times after the chance zone is set, the player is notified that the next normal pattern winning game will be executed soon. can be grasped, the player can be interested in the number of times of the second special symbol lottery executed during the chance zone. In addition, in this control example, as a variation performance corresponding to the second special symbol lottery executed during the chance zone, a pseudo variation performance of temporarily stopping the third symbol a plurality of times is executed. That is, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting when the chance zone will end or whether the chance zone will be extended.

Next, referring to FIG. 165, NMI interrupt processing will be described. 165 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. FIG. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as power-off occurrence information setting (S1601), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout launch control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 166, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 166 is a flow chart showing this startup process.

This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 166), first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1701). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this control example) is executed. (S1702). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1703).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 121) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S1704), and if it is turned on (S1704: Yes), the process proceeds to S1712. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S1704: No), it is further determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1705), and if not stored (S1705: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case as well, the process proceeds to S1712.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1705: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1706). If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power-off, the backed-up data is destroyed. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203 . Instead of the RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be judged based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S1712, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1712). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing of RAM 203 (S1713, S1714).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM 203 is initialized (S1713, S1714).

Similarly, when power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S1713, S1714) is executed. . In the RAM initialization process (S1713, S1714), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1713), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1714). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1710.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S1704: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S1705: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S1707: Yes), while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is retained, the power failure occurrence information is cleared (S1708). Next, the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) transmits a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning to the game state at the time of drive power interruption (S1709), and the process proceeds to S1710. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S1710). After that, the interrupt is permitted (S1711), and the process proceeds to the main process which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 167, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 167 is a flow chart showing this main process. This main process is roughly divided into a counter update process and a power-off process.

In the main process (see FIG. 167), first, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 is transmitted to each control on the sub side. External output processing for transmission to the device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1801). Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 156) is determined. Send a sphere command. In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 157) and the start winning process (see FIG. 161). Furthermore, by this external output processing (S1801 in FIG. 167), various commands set by various processing of the main control device 110 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and various commands displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Information for setting effects (variation effects, decorative effects, etc.). Also, the opening command, round number command, and ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 158) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . Further, various commands set in other control processing are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . In addition, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112 when the ball is to be launched.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1802). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1803), and then in the case of a special symbol jackpot state, the voice lamp control device 113 A command setting for executing a jackpot effect and a jackpot control process for opening the specific prize winning port 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 are executed (S1804).

Details of the jackpot control process (S1804) will be described later with reference to FIGS. etc.) is opened, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the winning opening (specific winning opening 65a) has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have entered the winning opening (specific winning opening 65a). Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the prize winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a) is closed. The opening and closing of the winning opening (specific winning opening 65a) are repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In this control example, the jackpot control process (S1804) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, an electric accessory opening/closing process for controlling opening/closing of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is executed (S1806). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary product is set by the processing of S822 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 163), the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product is started. The open/close control of the electric accessory is continued until the period set by the processing of S821 and the processing of S823 in the normal symbol variation processing is completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S1807). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209 in FIG. 159), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is started in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. do. In this control example, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on. If the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Also, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209 in FIG. 159) has ended, it is executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. After finishing the variable display, the stop symbols are stopped (lighted up) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in the display mode set in S407 of the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S209 in FIG. 159). .

Furthermore, in this control example, when one of the special symbols is stopped and displayed in a display mode (jackpot pattern) indicating a big win, the other special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode (outgoing pattern) indicating an omission. A stop display for that purpose is also performed.

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1808). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S815 and the process of S816 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 163), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. . As a result, in the second pattern display device, a variable display is performed in which the second pattern "O" pattern and the "X" pattern are alternately lit. Also, in the second symbol display update process (S1808), when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S818 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 163), it is executed in the second symbol display device. 163) in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 163). display).

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1809). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this control example) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S1810). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1810: Yes), the process proceeds to S1801, and the above-described processes after S1801 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (S1810: No), during the time until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing, the second The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1811, S1812).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1811). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (999, 999 in this control example), they are cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1811 (S1812). In addition, in the process of this S1812, the value of the normal figure fluctuation classification counter CS2 is updated similarly to the value of the fluctuation classification counter CS1.

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1801 to S1808 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first per random number counter C1, the initial value of the second per random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and the values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the general figure fluctuation type counter CS2 are also randomly updated. can do. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the processing contents for updating the judgment value related to the lottery of special symbols and normal symbols, and it is possible to prevent the execution of fraudulent games aiming at the timing when the judgment value corresponding to the win is acquired. can be suppressed.

In addition, in the processing of S1809, if information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1809: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 165 has been executed, so the processing at power-off from S1813 is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (S1813), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 111 and sound lamp control device 113) power off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S1814). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1815), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1816), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area backed up in the RAM 203 .

It should be noted that the process of S1809 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in S1801 to S1808, or at the time of the end of one cycle of the processes of S1811 and S1812 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S1801. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1801, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the processing at power-off, the initial setting processing (Fig. 166, S1701) By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1801 can be started. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, with reference to FIG. 168, the contents of the jackpot control process (S1804) will be described. FIG. 168 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot control process (S1804). This jackpot control process (S1804) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 167) of the main controller 110, and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with special symbols, various It is a process for executing an effect and opening or closing the specific winning opening 65a.

In the jackpot control process (S1804), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start flag 203j is ON (S1901). When it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203j is ON (S1901: Yes), the jackpot opening command is set (S1902), the jackpot start flag 203j is set to OFF, and the jackpot middle flag 203k is set to ON (S1903). , the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1901, if it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203j is off (S1901: No), then whether the special symbol jackpot is currently on (that is, the jackpot flag 203k is on) ) or not (S1904). In the process of S1904, if it is determined that the current jackpot is not in progress (the jackpot flag 203k is off) (S1904: No), the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1904, if it is determined that the current jackpot is in progress (the jackpot flag 203k is ON) (S1904: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is time to start a new round. (S1905).

In the process of S1905, if it is determined that it is time to start a new round (S1905: Yes), a jackpot operation setting process for setting the opening/closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a according to the number of rounds is executed (S1906 ), the process ends. The details of this jackpot action setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1905 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1905: No), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending period of the round currently being executed (S1907). . Here, in this control example, when the final round of the jackpot ends, it is determined that it is time to start the ending period. If it is determined that it is time to start the ending period (S1907: Yes), an ending command is set (S1908), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 during the external output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 201. . Upon receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114 . When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 starts an ending effect indicating the end of the big win.

In this first control example, when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 141(a)) is used to execute the process of determining the jackpot type (S402 in FIG. 159), and the determination is made. It is configured to set an ending period corresponding to the type of jackpot. Therefore, in the processing of S1908, the ending command for display corresponding to the length of the ending period determined corresponding to the jackpot type is set. In addition, unlike the first control example, the length of the ending period is not set when the jackpot is won, but the presence or absence of V winning during the jackpot game (whether or not the ball passes through the specific area (V gate 65V)) The length of the ending period of the jackpot game may be determined in accordance with .

Specifically, in the jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 168), when it is determined that the ending period start timing (the end timing of the final round), whether the V prize was won during this jackpot game (probability variation setting flag 203m is set to ON), and if it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203m is set to ON, the ending display for 17 seconds indicating that the probability variation state is set (Fig. 127 (b), (d) reference) to set 17 seconds as the ending period of the jackpot game, if it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203m is not set to ON, 15 seconds indicating that the time saving state is set In order to display the ending (see FIGS. 127(a) and 127(c)), the ending period of the jackpot game may be set to 15 seconds.

By configuring in this way, in the pachinko machine 10 capable of changing the game state set after the end of the jackpot game according to the game result during the jackpot game, the ending corresponding to the game state actually set. A period can be set.

In addition, in the case of using the configuration in which the ending period of the jackpot game is changed according to the game result during the jackpot game, any time between the determination of the game result during the jackpot game and the start of the ending period For example, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example, after the round game of the first round is completed (the ball is placed in the specific area (After the round game that can be awarded to the V gate 65V) is completed), the presence or absence of the V prize is determined, and based on the determination result, the round game of the second round to the final round is executed. It may be configured to set the ending period of the jackpot game during the period.

Furthermore, in the above-described example, the length of the ending period is set based on whether or not there is a V prize during the jackpot game. The ending period of the jackpot game is set in advance based on the type of the jackpot, and specifically, the ending period of 17 seconds is set in advance when winning the variable jackpot, and 15 seconds when winning the normal jackpot. When it is necessary to change the length of the ending period based on the game result during the jackpot game, that is, to win a V prize during the jackpot game even though the probability variable jackpot game is executed. is not possible, the preset length of the ending period may be varied. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the frequency of setting the length of the ending period during the jackpot game.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1907, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the currently executed ending period (S1907: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1909). Here, the end timing of the jackpot indicates a case where the execution period of the ending effect has passed. In the process of S1909, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the big win (S1909: Yes), the big win end process for setting the game state after the end of the big win is executed (S1910), and this process is ended. The details of this jackpot ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the processing of S1909, if it is determined that it is not the timing of the end of the jackpot (S1909: No), winning processing for performing control according to the winning to the specific winning opening 65a is executed (S1911), Abnormality processing is executed to determine whether the ball entered into the prize winning opening 65a has been discharged normally (S1912), and then this processing is terminated. Details of the winning process and the abnormality process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 171 and 172. FIG.

Next, details of the jackpot operation setting process (S1906) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 169 is a flow chart showing this jackpot operation setting process (S1906). This jackpot action setting process (S1906) is executed in the jackpot control process, and as described above, is a process for setting the opening/closing action of the specific winning opening 65a according to the number of rounds.

When this jackpot action setting process (see FIG. 169) is started, first, it is determined whether it is time to start one round (S2001). In the process of S2001, when it is determined that it is the start timing of one round (S2001: Yes), the start of the operation scenario of the switching valve 65y (V solenoid 209a) is set (S2002), and the specification corresponding to the jackpot type An opening pattern of the winning opening 65a is set (S2003).

Here, although detailed description is omitted, in this control example, among the round games that are executed multiple times during one jackpot game, the contents of the round game that is executed in a specific number of rounds (first round) is different depending on the type of jackpot. Specifically, only in the case of a specific jackpot type (probability variable jackpot), the ball is made to flow down to a specific area (V gate 65V) as the first round game. It is configured so that a round game that operates the switching valve 65y is executed so as to make it easier. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the probability that the ball will flow down to the specific area (V gate 65V) only for a specific period of the jackpot game that is executed for a long period of time, so that the player loses concentration. A game can be executed during a big winning game without any trouble.

In this control example, when the first round of the probability variable jackpot game is executed, the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 causes the player to flow down the ball to a specific area (V gate 65V). As a guidance notification mode for indicating that it is a chance period, a V notification effect in which characters "Aim for V" is displayed is configured to be executable. As a result, the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner of the specific period during which the ball is likely to flow down to the specific area (V gate 65V) in the long-running jackpot game. Furthermore, based on the detecting means detecting that the ball has flowed down the specific area (V gate 65V), the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 detects that the ball has flowed down the specific area (V gate 65V). It is configured so that the characters "VGET" are displayed as a guidance notification mode for guidance. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the condition for setting the variable probability state is satisfied after the jackpot game ends.

It should be noted that the notification mode of the guidance notification described above may be varied according to the establishment of the conditions. For example, "Aim for V" based on the elapsed time or remaining time of a specific period that makes it easy for the ball to flow down to a specific gate. It is preferable to change the character color of , change the size of the display area, or change to characters with more emphasized content (for example, "Aim for V quickly"). As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player does not shoot the ball in a situation where it is easy for the ball to flow down to the specific area (V gate 65V).

In addition, in this control example, a switching valve 65y is provided as a V function for switching the flow path of the winning ball to the variable winning device 65, and by varying the operation pattern of the switching valve 65y, the ball moves to a specific gate. It is possible to set a period in which it is easy to flow down and a period in which it is difficult to flow down, but it is not limited to this. By varying the timing of the open state depending on the type of jackpot, it may be possible to set a period during which the ball is likely to flow down to the specific area (V gate 65V) and a period during which it is difficult. As a result, since the operation pattern of the switching valve 65y can be shared, even if the operation content of the switching valve 65y is grasped, the big winning game this time easily makes the ball pass through the specific area (V gate 65V). It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether or not it is a game. Further, since the contents of operation of the switching valve 65y can be standardized, the load on the V solenoid 209a can be reduced, and failure of the V function (switching valve 65y) can be suppressed.

On the other hand, in the process of S2001, if it is determined that the current round is not the first round (S2001: No), the processes of S2002 and S2003 are skipped, and the opening of the normal specific winning opening 65a is set (S2004). ), and the process proceeds to S2005. In the process of S2005, a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S2005), and this process ends.

The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and sent to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output processing (S1801) of the main processing executed by the MPU 201. sent. Upon receiving the round number command, the sound lamp control device 113 sets a display round number command for displaying the newly started round number on the third symbol display device 81 . Thereby, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 can be updated in accordance with the number of rounds of the big win.

By executing this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 169), the specific winning opening 65a can be opened in each round of the jackpot, and the ball can pass through the specific area (V gate 65V) in the first round. can be set. As a result, in the jackpots A, C to E, the ball almost certainly passes through the specific area (V gate 65V) just by shooting the ball in the first round, so after the jackpot game ends, the variable state ( High probability state of special design, high probability state of normal design) can be set.

Next, details of the jackpot ending process (S1910) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 170 is a flow chart showing this jackpot ending process (S1910). This jackpot end process (S1910) is executed in the jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 168), and as described above, is a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends.

In this jackpot end processing (S1910), first, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203m is ON (S2101). In the process of S2101, if it is determined that the variable probability setting flag 203m is on (S2101: Yes), it means that the ball has passed through the V gate (specific area) 65v during the big hit, so the value of the variable probability counter 203i is set to 50 (S2102), and the process proceeds to S2103. On the other hand, in the process of S2101, if the variable probability setting flag 203m is off (S2101: No), the process of S2102 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2103.

In the process of S2103, 100 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h (S2103), and then the state command is set based on the value of the time saving counter 203h and the probability variation counter 203i (S2104). The status command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and sent to the sound lamp control device 113 during the external output processing (S1801) of the main processing executed by the MPU 201. sent. Upon receiving the state command, the sound lamp control device 113 updates the sub-state setting area 223g according to the game state notified by the state command. Thereby, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately grasped in the sound lamp control device 113 . Then, both the flag 203k during the big hit and the variable probability setting flag 203m are set to OFF (S2105), and the process is terminated.

By executing this jackpot end processing (see FIG. 170), it is possible to accurately set the game state after the jackpot ends depending on whether or not the ball has passed through the V gate (specific area) 65v during the jackpot game. can.

Next, details of the winning process (S1911) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 171 is a flow chart showing this winning process (S1911). This prize winning process (S1911) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 168), and as described above, is a process for performing control according to winning to the specific winning hole 65a.

In the winning process (S1911), first, it is determined whether or not the current round valid period is reached (S2201). Here, the round effective period is the period during which the round game is set, that is, the period from the open state of the specific winning opening 65a to the end of the interval period. In the process of S2201, if it is not the round valid period (S2201: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2201, if it is determined that the current round valid period (S2201: Yes), then it is determined whether winning to the specific winning opening 65a is detected (S2202), If winning is detected (S2202: Yes), the value of the winning number counter 203o is updated by adding 1 (S2203), and a winning command indicating that a winning to the specific winning port 65a is detected is set. (S2204), the process proceeds to S2205. On the other hand, in the process of S2202, if winning to the specific winning hole 65a is not detected (S2202: No), the processes of S2203 and S2204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S2205.

In the processing of S2205, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203o is 10 or more (S2205). On the other hand, in the process of S2205, if it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203o is 9 or less (S2205: No), it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds) has elapsed (S2206), and the round time has elapsed. If so (S2206: Yes), the process proceeds to S2207. In addition, in the processing of this S2206, it is determined that the round time has passed when 30 seconds have passed since the start of each round game of this big win. In addition, in this control example, regardless of the jackpot type and the number of rounds, it is configured so that the end condition of the round game is established by the same round time elapsed and the number of prizes won, but not limited to this, depending on the jackpot type Depending on the number of rounds to be executed, the end conditions of the round game may be changed.

In the process of S2207, closing of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S2207), and a closing command indicating that closing of the specific winning opening 65a is set is set (S2208). Next, it is determined whether the closing of the specific winning port 65a this time is based on the end of one round (S2209), and when it is determined that it is based on the end of one round (S2209: Yes), the V solenoid 209a is turned off (S2210), and the process proceeds to S2211. On the other hand, in the processing of S2209, if it is determined that the closing of the specific winning port 65a this time is the closing due to the completion of a round other than the first round (S2209: No), the flow path solenoid (probability variable solenoid) 2665k is turned on is not set, the process of S2210 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2212.

In the process of S2211, the remaining ball timer flag 203p, the variable probability effective flag 203r, and the round end flag 203 are set to ON (S2211), and the process proceeds to S2212. Further, when it is determined in the processing of S2205 that the value of the winning number counter 203o is 9 or less (S2205: No), and in the processing of S2206 it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S2206: No), The processing of S2207 to S2211 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S2212.

In the process of S2212, it is determined whether the round end flag 203 is ON (S2212), and if the round end flag 203 is OFF (S2212: No), the process proceeds to S2213. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round end flag 203 is ON in the process of S2212 (S2212: Yes), then it is determined whether the variable probability effective flag 203r is ON (S2217). In the processing of S2217, if the variable probability effective flag 203r is off (S2217: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the probability variable effective flag 203r is on (S2217: No), add 1 to the value of the probability variable effective timer 203s (S2218), then determine whether the value of the probability variable effective timer 203s is the upper limit value ( S2219). Then, if the value of the variable probability effective timer 203s is not the upper limit value (S2219: No), the process proceeds to S2213, and the passage of the ball to the specific area (V gate 65V) is monitored to update the variable probability setting flag 203m. Execute the process. As a result, if the variable probability effective timer 203s is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate 65V), so the variable probability state can be set in consideration of the time for hitting the ball. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time that is determined to be effective, it is possible to prevent the sphere from being illegally passed through the specific area (V gate 65V) and given a variable probability state.

On the other hand, if the value of the probability variable effective timer 203s is the upper limit value (S2219: Yes), the probability variable effective flag 203r and the round end flag 203 are set to OFF (S2220), and the value of the probability variable effective timer 203s is reset (S2221 ), the process ends.

Also, in the processing of S2213, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate 65V) (S2213). End this process. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the specific area (V gate 65V) (S2213: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the variable probability passing counter 203n (S2214), and the variable probability setting flag 203m is set to ON (S2215) , V winning command is set (S2216), and this process is terminated.

Next, the abnormality processing (S1912) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 172 is a flow chart showing this abnormality processing (S1912). This abnormality process (S1912) is a process executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 168), and as described above, it is determined whether or not the ball that entered the specific winning hole 65a was discharged normally. This process is for

In the abnormality process (S1912), first, it is determined whether the current round valid period is reached (S2301), and if not (S2301: No), the present process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round is valid (S2301: Yes), then it is determined whether the ball has passed through the outlet 65h1 (S2302). In the process of S2302, it is determined whether or not a ball discharge port switch (not shown) capable of detecting a ball passing through the discharge port 65h1 (see FIG. 120(b)) detects passage of the ball.

In the process of S2302, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the discharge port 65h1 (S2302: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the discharge number counter 203t (S2303), and the process proceeds to S2304. On the other hand, in the process of S2302, if the ball has not passed through the discharge port 65h1 (S2302: No), the process of S2303 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2304.

In the process of S2304, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203p is ON (S2304). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203p is off (S2304: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the remaining ball timer flag 203p is on (S2304: Yes), it means that the ball is being swept, so the value of the remaining ball timer 203q is updated by adding 1 (S2305). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining ball timer 203q is the upper limit (S2306). On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203q is the upper limit value (S2306: Yes), then the number of discharges (the sum of the value of the probability variable passage counter 203n and the value of the discharge number counter 203t) wins a prize. It is determined whether the number (the value of the winning number counter 203o) matches (S2307).

In the processing of S2307, when it is determined that the number of discharged coins and the number of winning prizes do not match (S2307: No), an error command is set (S2308), and the process proceeds to S2309. When the error command is received by the audio lamp control device 113, an error is displayed (for example, characters indicating a winning number mismatch error are displayed), and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, during the period in which the fourth flow path 65e4 (see FIG. 120(b)) is closed (the period in which the switching valve 65y is closed), the ball is illegally flowed into the fourth flow path 65e to (V gate 65V) can be suppressed.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2307 that the number of discharged coins and the number of winning prizes match (S2307: Yes), the process of S2308 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S2309. In the process of S2309, the remaining ball timer flag 203p is set to OFF (S2309), and then the value of the remaining ball timer 203q is reset (S2310). After that, the values of the winning prize number counter 203o, the discharge number counter 203t, and the variable probability passing counter 203n are reset (S2311), and the process ends.

By executing this abnormal processing (see FIG. 172), the occurrence of a problem that the balls entering the specific winning opening 65a are not normally discharged due to clogging of the balls inside the variable winning device 65 is prevented. Early detection and notification are possible.

<Regarding control processing executed by the sound ramp control device in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 173 to 186, each control process executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into startup processing that is activated upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 173, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 173 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing in S4117 (see FIG. 174) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure"). ) is started during execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 174, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives power-off occurrence information from the main control device 110 (see S4114 in FIG. 174), it executes power-off processing in S4117. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S4117 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S4002: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S4117. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), it will transfer to S4004 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). from), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S4117 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the operation is started with the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is normal (S4003: No), and the process proceeds to S4008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S4002: Yes), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during execution of the power-off process in S4117, the sound lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S4004, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S4004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If it is determined that the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S4006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the process of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S4117 is executed (see S4116 in FIG. 119). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S4117 is executed. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S4117 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared (S4009) to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S4010), an interrupt Permission is set (S4011), and the process proceeds to main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the process of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off because the current start-up process was started after the power supply was completely shut off, for example. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009, which is processing for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4010 to set the initial value of the RAM 223 (S4010).

The reason why the clearing process of S4009 is skipped is that when the process of S4008 is reached from S4004 via the process of S4006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S4004, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, referring to FIG. 174, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 174 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has passed since the main process was started or since the process of S4101 was last executed (S4101). If the time has not elapsed (S4101: No), the process proceeds to S4112 without performing the processes of S4102 to S4111. In the processing of S4101, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed because S4102 to S4111 are processing related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). , S4112, and S4113. By executing the process of S4112 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S4112 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Based on this, the setting regarding the variable display effect can be performed without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S4103 to S4113 are sent to the display control device 114. Output processing is executed (S4102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S4108 described later (S4103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S4104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S4105 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S4105, a customer waiting effect is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed. 114.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed is monitored in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is the process of setting to perform production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated. The details of this frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S4107) will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is finished, the lamp editing processing is executed (S4108), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S4109, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S4110), and then the effect update process is executed (S4111). After executing the process of S4111, the process proceeds to S4112. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. Lamp edit processing of S4108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring processing. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S4109 is also executed at the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

After the processing of S4111, command determination processing (S4112) for performing processing according to the command received from the main controller 110 is executed, and the processing shifts to S4113. Details of this command determination process (S4112) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S4113, in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a variable pattern command for display is generated based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110, and the command is sent to the display controller 114. Executes a variable display setting process, which is a process for setting to transmit to. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S4113 is finished, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4114). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S4114 (S4114: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S4116), and the power-off processing is executed (S4117). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in-progress flag is turned off (S4118), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4114 (S4114: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4115), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4115: No), the process returns to S4101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4115: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinitely looped, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination processing (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 175 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S4112). This command determination process (S4112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 174) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. . Details of the command determination process (S4112) will be described below.

When the command determination process (S4112) is executed, it is first determined whether or not a status command has been received (S4201). End this process. This state command receiving process (S4202) receives the state command indicating the current game state, sets the mode effect mode according to the game state, and sets the corresponding effect mode on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. A display command for displaying (for example, a back image) is set. For example, when the state command indicating the variable probability state is received, the display command corresponding to the super chance mode shown in FIG. 131 is set, and when the state command indicating the time saving state is received, the chance mode shown in FIG. 128 A display command corresponding to is set. Details of the actually set game state and the switching control of the effect mode in the mode effect to be executed will be described later. The details of this status command reception processing (S4202) will be described later with reference to FIG.

If it is determined that the state command is not received in the process of S4201 (S4201: No), then it is determined whether the special figure variation pattern command is received (S4203), and if it is determined that it is received (S4203 : Yes), the special figure variation start flag 223d corresponding to the received special figure variation pattern command is set to ON (S4204), and the variation pattern command is extracted from the received command (S4205). Then, the process ends.

If it is determined that the special figure variation pattern command is not received in the process of S4203 (S4203: No), then it is determined whether the special figure stop type command is received (S4206), and if it is determined that it is received (S4206: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e (first special stop type flag 223e1, second special stop type flag 223e2) corresponding to the received special stop type command is set to ON (S4207), The stop type is extracted from the received command (S4208). Then, this processing ends.

If it is determined that the special figure stop type command has not been received in the processing of S4206 (S4206: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4209). Here, if it is determined that the command for the number of reserved balls has been received (S4209: Yes), the number of reserved balls is extracted from the received number of reserved balls command, and the corresponding value is set to the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, the normal symbol Stored in the reserved ball number counter 223h (S4210). Specifically, when a special symbol reserved ball number command is received, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110 included in the reserved ball number command (that is, the number of reserved balls for variable display of special symbols) is extracted, and the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is updated according to the extracted counter value. do.

Also, when the normal symbol reserved ball number command is received, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f of the main control device 110 included in the reserved ball number command (that is, the normal symbol reserved ball number of variable display) is extracted, and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223h provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is updated according to the extracted counter value.

Here, the pending ball number command is that a ball enters (starts winning) into various ball entrances (first ball entrance 64, second ball entrance 640, through gate 67), and the values of various pending ball counters is added, or when executing various fluctuation start processing, when the value of the various reserved ball number counters is subtracted, it is transmitted from the main controller 110, so when starting winning or fluctuation display At each setting time, the values of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c and the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223h of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed to the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, It is possible to match the values of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e and the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f.

Therefore, due to the influence of noise, etc., the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c possessed by the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the values of the various reserved ball number counters 203d, 203e, and 203d of the main control unit 110. Also, at the time of start winning, at the time of variable display setting, that is, when the number of reserved balls command is notified based on the change of the number of various reserved balls, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed. It is possible to modify and match the values of various reserved ball number counters first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, and normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f of main controller 110.

Also, in the processing of S4209, if it is determined that the command for the number of reserved balls has not been received (S4209: No), it is determined whether or not the winning command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4211). In the process of S4211, if it is determined that the winning command has been received (S4211: Yes), the winning command process is executed (S4212), and this process ends. This winning command process (S4212) analyzes the symbol type (special symbol, normal symbol) corresponding to the winning information included in the received winning information command, and the storage area corresponding to the analysis result (sound lamp control device 113 It performs processing for storing (storing) in the prize winning information storage area 223b) in the RAM 223 and processing for executing an effect (prefetch effect) based on the received prize winning information. Details of the winning command process (S4212) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S4211, if it is determined that the winning command has not been received (S4211: No), then it is determined whether or not the design determination command has been received (S4213), and if it is determined that the design determination command has been received (S4213: Yes), sets the stop display of the third symbol (S4214), and terminates this process. If it is determined that the stop command has not been received (S4213: No), then it is determined whether the general map related command has been received (S4215), and if it is determined to have been received (S4215: Yes), the general map Related processing is executed (S4216), and then this processing ends. In addition, the general figure related process is executed (S4216) and detailed explanation will be given later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S4215, if it is determined that the general figure related command is not received (S4215: No), it is determined whether the jackpot related command is received (S4217), and if it is determined that it is received (S4217: Yes ), execute a jackpot-related process (S4218), and then terminate this process. A detailed description of the jackpot related process (S4218) will be given later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot-related command has not been received (S4217: No), the process corresponding to other commands is executed (S4219), and this process ends.

Next, the state command reception process (S4202) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 176 is a flow chart showing this status command reception process (S4202). This state command reception processing (S4202) is executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 175) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is executed according to the set game state. A process for setting different display modes to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed. Details of the state command reception processing (S4202) will be described below.

When the status command reception process (S4202) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the currently set gaming status is to be changed (S4301). Here, it is determined whether or not the game state set in the sub-state setting area 223g is different from the game state indicated by the state command received this time. In the process of S4301, if it is determined that there is no change in the game state (S4301: No), this process is terminated. When it is determined that there is a change in the game state (S4301: Yes), it is determined whether the game state after the change is the normal state (S4302).

In the processing of S4302, when it is determined that the game state after the change is the normal state (when the state command received this time is a command indicating the normal state) (S4302: Yes), the display command indicating the normal mode is issued. set (S4303) and proceed to the processing of S4304.

In the processing of S4302, if it is determined that the game state after the change is not the normal state (if the state command received this time is not a command indicating the normal state) (S4302: No), then the game state after the change It is determined whether it is a time saving state (S4306), and if it is determined that the game state is a time saving state (the state command received this time is a command indicating a time saving state) (S4306: Yes), the time saving medium counter 223n A value of 100 is set (S4307), a display command indicating the chance mode is set (S4308), and the process proceeds to S4304.

In the processing of S4306, if it is determined that the gaming state is not the time saving state (S4306: No), then it is determined whether or not the V notification flag 223m is ON (S4309). When the V notification flag 223m is off (S4309: No), the process proceeds to S4308 described above. If the V notification flag 223m is ON (S4309: Yes), the V notification flag 223m is set to OFF (S4310), a display command indicating the super chance mode is set (S4311), and the process proceeds to S4304. .

In the process of S4304, the game state set in the current state area of the sub-state setting area 223g is set in the past state area (S4304), and the information indicated by the received state command is set in the current state area of the sub-state setting area 223g. The corresponding game state is set (S4305), and this processing ends.

Here, by notifying the display control device 114 of the commands set in the processing of S4308 and S4311, the variable effect display in the normal state is executed. Thus, in this control example, the audio lamp control device 113, based on the state command output from the main control device 110, the types of various display modes ( mode, background), and outputs a command indicating the type to the display control device 114 .

By configuring in this way, for example, it is possible to eliminate the need to set the display mode of the variable effect display for each game state set on the sound lamp control device 113 side. In other words, a command (type command) indicating the type of various display modes corresponding to the currently set game state and a variation pattern command (common command) corresponding to the variation display of the special symbols are output to the display control device 114. display data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a display mode corresponding to the current gaming state and the received variation pattern based on the type command received by the display control device 114 side and the common command. can be set. Therefore, the processing load of the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

In addition, as described above, when the display data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is set by combining a plurality of commands received from the sound lamp control device 113 on the display control device 114 side, Information (confirmation information) indicating the content of display data after setting is output from the display control device 114 side to the audio lamp control device 113 side, and the confirmation information received by the audio lamp control device 113 side is correct. If it is determined that the determination result is not appropriate, a simple display variation pattern command indicating appropriate information is set, and the contents of the already set display data are set. It is preferable to configure so as to rewrite to simple display data.

By configuring in this way, when appropriate display data is not set for various commands received by the audio lamp controller 113 from the main controller 110, simple display data indicating appropriate information is set. It is possible to display a variable effect display based on the simple display data. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's willingness to play due to the execution of a variable effect display with contents different from the actual game result (lottery result of special symbols). In addition, the simple display data described above includes, for example, display data for displaying a special mode (for example, black background mode) that does not correspond to any game state, and display data for executing variable display of the fourth symbol. For example, display data having a smaller amount of data than the display data used in normal variable effect display may be used.

In addition, in this control example, the configuration described above is used, but it is not limited to this, and the current game state and the received variation pattern are set by the voice lamp control device 113 side. It may be configured to

Next, with reference to FIG. 177, the contents of the winning command process (see S4212) executed in the command determination process (see S4112 in FIG. 175) will be described. FIG. 177 is a flow chart showing the details of the winning command process (S4212). This winning command process (S4212) is set when the winning command (winning information command) is set when the special symbol lottery lottery right is acquired from the main control device 110, or when the normal symbol lottery lottery right is acquired. It is a process that is executed when receiving a winning information command for a normal figure or a V winning command set when a ball flows down (passes) a specific gate (probability variable switch) during a jackpot game.

When the winning command process (S4212) is executed, first, the information of the received winning command (winning information command) is stored (set) in the corresponding area of the winning information storage area (winning information storage area) 223b (S4401). , It is determined whether the command received this time is a winning information command for normal drawing (S4402), and if it is determined to be a winning information command for normal drawing (S4402: Yes), hit information (normal (S4403) If it is determined that there is winning information (S4403: Yes), then the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0, that is, , It is determined whether the present is a high probability state of normal symbols (S4404).

Here, when it is determined that the current state is not the high probability state of the normal pattern, that is, the normal state (S4404: No), the state that has acquired the lottery right of the normal pattern lottery that wins the normal pattern during the normal state. Since there is a high possibility that a chance zone will be set, a display command for suggesting the opening of the electric churong is set (S4405), and the process proceeds to S4406. When the display command is set in the process of S4405, it is notified to the display control device 114 with the same control contents as the various display commands set in the control processing of other sound lamp control devices, and the display control device 114 is notified during the normal state. Suggestion effect suggesting that a game per normal is executed and the electric accessory 640a is opened for a long time (open for 5 seconds) (for example, a small display area Dm3 is displayed in the main display area Dm of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 A production that arouses whether or not it will be formed) is executed.

In addition, in this control example, it is configured so that the above-mentioned suggestion effect is executed only when the lottery right of the normal symbol lottery that wins per normal pattern is acquired during the normal state, but it is not limited to this. Even when it is determined that the winning information command for the normal figure includes winning information indicating a specific outlier winning, it is preferable to configure the above-described suggestive effect to be executed. As a result, it is possible to set the case where the game per normal pattern is executed when the suggestive effect is executed and the case where it is not executed, so that the player can predict the game content to be executed in the future. can let

Furthermore, in this control example, when the lottery right of the normal pattern lottery that wins per normal pattern is acquired during the normal state, it is configured so that the suggestive effect is executed. Based on the special symbol lottery or the preliminary determination result of the special symbol lottery stored in the winning information storage area 223b, the timing at which the game is actually executed, that is, the general pattern showing the winning per general pattern Execute pre-game state processing for determining whether the game state at the timing when the normal symbol lottery corresponding to the winning information command is executed (timing at which the normal pattern winning game is executed) is normal or not, and in the normal state If it is determined that there is, it may be configured to execute the above-described suggestive effect. This makes it possible to more accurately suggest that a chance zone will be set.

Returning to FIG. 177, the description continues. In the process of S4402, if it is determined that the general figure winning information command is not received (S4402: No), if it is determined that there is no hit information in the process of S4403 (S4403: No), the time saving counter in the process of S4404 If it is determined that the value of 203h is greater than 0 (S4404: Yes), the process also proceeds to S4406.

In the process of S4406, a special figure winning information command process is executed (S4406), and the process proceeds to S4407. The details of this special figure winning information command process (S4406) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S4407, the command received this time is the V winning command (command set when the ball flows down to the variable probability switch (specific gate) in the winning process (see S1911 in FIG. 171) (see S2216)). (S4407), and if it is a V winning command (S4407: Yes), the V winning flag 223j is set to ON (S4408), and the process proceeds to S4409. Also, in the process of S4407, if it is determined that the V winning command has not been received (S4407: No), the process proceeds to S4413.

In the process of S4409, it is determined whether or not the V effect execution flag 223k is ON (S4409). When the V effect execution flag 223k is ON (S4409: Yes), the V effect execution flag 223k is set to OFF (S4410), a display command for notifying of the V prize is set (S4411), and the V notification is performed. The flag 223m is set to ON (S4412), and the process proceeds to S4413. Also, in the process of S4409, when the V effect execution flag 223k is off (S4409: No), the process proceeds to S4413.

In the process of S4413, other processes are executed (S4413), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 178, the contents of the special figure winning information command process (S4406) executed in the winning command process (S4212 in FIG. 177) will be described. FIG. 178 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special figure winning information command process (S4406).

When the special figure winning information command process (S4406) is executed, first, the current game state is extracted based on the information set in the sub-state setting area 223g (S4501), and the value of the counter 223n during time saving It is determined whether or not it is greater than 75 (S4502). If it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223n is greater than 75 (S4502: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the special continuous notice flag 223o is ON (S4503). If it is determined that the special continuous notice flag 223o is off (S4503: No), the continuous notice execution selection table 222d (FIG. 147(a)) is used to select the presence or absence of continuous notice (S4504). It is determined whether or not there is an advance notice (S4505). If it is determined that the continuous notice will be executed (S4505: Yes), the special continuous notice flag 223o is set to ON (S4506), and the process proceeds to S4507.

Also, in the process of S4502, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223n is 75 or less (S4502: No), in the process of S4503, when it is determined that the special continuous notice flag 223o is ON (S4503 : No), even if it is determined in the process of S4505 that there is no execution of the continuous announcement (S4505: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4507.

In the process of S4507, a display command based on the information included in the received special figure winning information command is set (S4507), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 179, the contents of the normal figure related process (S4216) executed in the command determination process (see S4112 in FIG. 175) will be described. FIG. 179 is a flow chart showing the contents of the normal map related process (S4216). This general pattern related processing (S4216) includes a general pattern variation pattern command indicating that a normal pattern lottery has been executed from the main control device 110, a general pattern per start command indicating that a general pattern per game has started, It is a process that is executed when a normal figure per end command indicating the end of the normal figure per game is received.

When the general pattern related processing (S4216) is executed, first, it is determined whether the general pattern fluctuation pattern command is received (S4601), and if it is determined that it is received (S4601: Yes), the normal pattern fluctuation start for display A command is set (S4602), and then it is determined whether the value of the counter 223n during time saving is greater than 0, that is, whether it is in a high probability state of normal symbols (S4603). If it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223n is greater than 0 (S4603: Yes), this process is terminated as it is, and if it is determined that it is not greater than 0 (S4603: No), the general map received this time It is determined whether the variation pattern command is a normal pattern lottery corresponding to the normal pattern lottery that has been won per normal pattern (S4604), and if it is determined that it is not elected per normal pattern (S4604: No ), and the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is elected per normal pattern (S4604: Yes), it is a per normal pattern variation in which long open per is executed, so a display command indicating long open standby is set ( S4605), the process ends. By setting the display command in the process of S4605, the display mode shown in FIG. As a result, the player can easily predict that there is a high possibility that a chance zone will soon be set.

In addition, in this control example, the process of displaying the display mode (the display mode forming the small display area Dm3) shown in FIG. However, without being limited to this, the display mode shown in FIG. (display mode forming the small display area Dm3) may be displayed.

Further, the size of the display area of the small display area Dm3 may be varied according to the content of the variation effect (third symbol variation effect) corresponding to the special symbol variation being executed. When a variable performance with a high degree of expectation for a big hit (for example, reach performance) is executed in the pattern variation performance, the display area is smaller than when the variation performance with a high degree of expectation for a big hit (for example, reach performance) is not executed. It is preferable to change the display contents so that the display area of Dm3 becomes smaller. In this way, the display contents are variably controlled by providing a relationship between the variable performance suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol lottery executed independently and the variable performance suggesting the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery, To provide an easy-to-understand game by suppressing the confusion of the player due to the useless provision of a lot of game information.

Returning to FIG. 179, the description continues. If it is determined that the general pattern fluctuation pattern command is not received in the process of S4601 (S4601: No), then it is determined whether the general pattern per start command is received (S466), and the general pattern per start command is received (S4606: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 223n is greater than 0 (S4607), and if it is determined that it is not greater than 0 (S4607: No) , set a display command indicating that the button is open for a long time (S4608), and terminate this process. By setting the display command in the process of S4608, the display mode shown in FIG. As a result, the player can easily grasp that the long open win is being executed. Moreover, when it is determined in the process of S4607 that the value of the time saving counter 223n is greater than 0 (S4607: Yes), the process of S4608 is skipped and this process ends.

In the process of S4606, if it is determined that the start command per normal pattern is not received (S4606: No), it is determined whether the end command per normal pattern is received (S4609), and if it is determined that it is received ( S4609: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the counter 223n during time saving is greater than 0 (S4610), and when it is determined that the value of the counter 223n during time saving is 0 (S4610: No), then the normal design is reserved. It is determined whether the value of the ball number counter 223h is 1 or more (S4611), and if it is determined to be 1 or more (S4611: Yes), it is determined whether the special effect flag 223i is set to ON ( S4612), if it is determined that it is not set to ON (S4612: No), a display command indicating entering the chance zone is set (S4613), the special effect flag 223i is set to OFF (S4614), and this End the process. On the other hand, in the processing of S4610 to S4612, if it is determined that the determination result is other than the determination result described above, this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 180, the contents of the jackpot related process (S4218) will be described. FIG. 180 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot related process (S4218). In the jackpot-related processing (S4218), a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute the effect display corresponding to the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won. Processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from main controller 110 is executed.

In the jackpot related process (S4218), first, it is determined whether or not the command received this time is a jackpot start command (S4701). When it is determined that it is a jackpot start command (S4701: Yes), a display jackpot start command is set (S4702). The display jackpot start command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output processing (S4102) of the main processing (see FIG. 174). It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81 .

Next, it is determined whether this jackpot game is a normal jackpot (game) (S4703), and if it is determined that it is a normal jackpot (S4703: Yes), enter the chance mode (a time saving state is set). The ending display mode to be shown is set (S4708), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a normal jackpot (S4703: No), that is, if it is determined that it is a variable probability jackpot, the V notification execution selection table 222e (Fig. 147(b)) is used to determine whether or not the V notification effect is executed. is selected (S4704), and then it is determined whether or not there is a V notification effect (S4705). If it is determined that there is a V notification effect (S4705: Yes), the V effect execution flag 223k is set to ON (S4706), and an ending display mode indicating entry into the super chance mode (variable probability state is set) is set. (S4707), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4705, when it is determined that there is no V notification effect (S4705: No), the process proceeds to the above-described S4708 process.

That is, in this control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 141, the ending period of different length is set according to the set jackpot type (normal jackpot, variable probability jackpot), and the jackpot game is started. The ending display mode (see FIG. 133) corresponding to the ending period of the jackpot game to be executed this time is set in advance at the timing. By configuring in this way, various controls (variable display control of jackpot game information that is variably displayed according to the progress of the jackpot game (for example, control to display information for indicating the number of won prize balls and control during execution) Control for displaying information for indicating the number of round games) and prize ball payout control for paying out prize balls according to the number of balls that have won the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game) are frequently executed. Since there is no need to execute display control for setting the ending display mode during the jackpot game period, the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 can be reduced. In this control example, the process of setting the ending display mode is executed at the start timing of the jackpot game. The ending display mode may be set during fluctuation, or may be set using the remaining period of the main process of the sound lamp control device 113 executed during the period when the control process is small in the jackpot game period. Also good.

On the other hand, in the process of S4701, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S4701: No), then it is determined whether the round number command has been received (S4709), and the round number command has been received (S4709: Yes), a display round number command is set based on the round number (S4710), and it is determined whether the current round number is 1 (V round) (S4711). When it is determined that it is one round (V round) (S4711: Yes), it is determined whether or not the V effect execution flag 223k is ON (S4712). When it is determined that the V effect execution flag 223k is ON (S4712: Yes), a display command for guiding V winning is set (S4713), and this process is terminated. Also, in the process of S4711, the number of rounds this time is not one round (V round), that is, when it is determined that a round game other than the first round is started (S4711: No), in the process of S4712, V Also when it is determined that the effect execution flag 223k is off (S4712: No), this process is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in the process of S4709 that the round number command has not been received (S4709: No), then it is determined whether an ending command has been received (S4714). ), the ending process is executed (S4715), and the process ends. If it is determined in the process of S4786 that the ending command has not been received (S4714: No), this process ends.

Next, the ending process (S4715) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 181 is a flow chart showing the contents of the ending process (S4715). This ending process (S4715) is a process executed when it is determined that the ending command is received in the above-described jackpot related process (see S4218 in FIG. 180), and the ending display mode executed during the ending period. is to execute a process for finally determining the

When the ending process (S4715) is executed, it is first determined whether the V winning flag 223j is set to ON (S4801), and if it is determined to be ON (S4801: Yes), the V winning The flag 223j is set to OFF (S4805), execution of the ending display corresponding to the ending display mode that has already been set is set (S4804), and this processing ends. Further, when it is determined that the V winning flag 223j is not set to ON in the process of S4801 (S4801: No), it is determined whether the V effect execution flag 223k is ON (S4802), and the V effect execution flag 223k is determined. is off (S4802: No), the process proceeds directly to S4804.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4802, if it is determined that the V effect execution flag 223k is ON (S4802: Yes), a display switching command is set for switching the display mode of the latter half period (7 seconds) of the ending period. (S4803), and the process proceeds to S4804.

When the display switching command is set in the processing of S4803, it is notified to the display control device 114, and the display mode of the second half period of the ending period set corresponding to the setting of the probability changing state in advance (Fig. 236 ( d) reference) to the display mode (refer to FIG. 236(c)) corresponding to setting of the time saving state is executed. In this control example, since the display period of the display mode switched based on this display switching command is fixed (7 seconds), the display mode can be easily switched.

Next, referring to FIG. 182, the contents of the variable display setting process (S4113) will be described. FIG. 1827 is a flow chart showing the contents of the variable display setting process (S4113). This variable display setting process (S4113) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 174) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, Based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set.

In the fluctuation display setting process (S4113), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d1 provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S4901). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d1 is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S4901: No), since the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, S4905 Go to processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d1 is on (S4901: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d1 is set to off (S4902), then for notifying the display control device 114 Execute the special figure 1 effect mode setting process for generating the display variation pattern command based on the acquired variation pattern type (S4903), and shift the data corresponding to the first special symbol out of the winning information storage area 223b. (S4904), the process proceeds to S4905. Details of the special figure 1 effect mode setting process (S4903) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S4905, it is determined whether the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223d2 provided in the RAM223 is ON (S4905). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223d2 is not on (that is, it is off) (S4905: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so of S4909 Go to processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223d2 is on (S4905: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223d2 is set to off (S4906), then the special figure 2 effect mode setting process is executed Then (S4907), the data corresponding to the second special symbol among the data in the winning information storage area 223b is shifted (S4908), and the process proceeds to S4909. The details of the special figure 2 effect mode setting process (S4907) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S4909, it is determined whether the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e1 or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223e2 provided in the RAM 223 is on (S4909). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e1 or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223e2 is not on (that is, it is off) (S4909: No), the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 Since it is in a state where it has not been done, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e1 or special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223e2 is on (S4909: Yes), the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223e1 or special figure that is set to on 2 stop type selection flag 223e2 is set to OFF (S4910), then the display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command is set based on the stop type extracted from the command (S4911), and then this process is executed finish.

Next, with reference to FIG. 183, the contents of the special figure 1 effect mode setting process (S4903) will be described. Figure 183 is the flowchart which shows the contents of special figure 1 production mode setting processing (S4903). This special figure 1 effect mode setting process (S4903) is executed when setting the variable effect of the first special symbol in the variable display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182). A process for setting the effect mode of the variable effect corresponding to the game state is executed.

When the special figure 1 effect mode setting process (S4903) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 223n is greater than 0 (S5001). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223n is greater than 0 (S5001: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 223n is subtracted by 1 (S5002), and the value of the time saving counter 223n after subtraction is displayed. A command is set (S5003), and the process proceeds to S5004. In the process of S5001, when it is determined that the value of the counter 223n during time saving is 0 (S5001: No), the processes of S5002 and S5003 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S5004.

In the process of S5004, the effect mode stored in the effect mode storage area 223p is read (S5004), and then it is determined whether or not it is the super chance mode (S5005). If the super chance mode is determined (S5005: Yes), the variation time (basic time) included in the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is extracted (S5006), and the basic variation time (basic time) is 30 seconds. It is determined whether there is (S5007). If it is determined that the basic variation time is 30 seconds (S5007: Yes), the production mode (production content) is determined based on the probability variable production selection table 222c (see FIG. 29) (S5008), and the production that has been determined A display variation pattern command indicating the mode is set (S5009), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the basic fluctuation time is not 30 seconds (S5007: No), the process proceeds to S5011.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5005 that the mode is not the super chance mode (S5005: No), then it is determined whether or not the mode is the chance mode (S5010). If it is determined that the mode is not the chance mode (S5010: No), the effect mode corresponding to the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S5011), and the process proceeds to S5009 described above. In the process of S5010, when it is determined that the game is in the chance mode (S5010: Yes), the effect setting process during the chance mode is executed (S5012), and the process proceeds to the process of S5009. The details of the chance mode effect setting process (S5012) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 184, the contents of the special figure 2 effect mode setting process (S4907) will be described. Figure 184 is the flowchart which shows the contents of special figure 2 production mode setting processing (S4907). This special figure 2 production mode setting process (S4907) is executed when setting the fluctuation production of the second special symbol in the variable display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182), and is set. A process for setting the effect mode of the variable effect corresponding to the game state is executed.

When the special figure 2 effect mode setting process (S4907) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current game state is a normal state (S5101), and when it is determined that it is a normal state (S5101: Yes), A command for display indicating entering the chance zone is set (S5102), then the flag 223i during special effect is set to ON (S5103), and the effect mode is based on the normal medium special figure 2 effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 145). is determined (S5104), a display variation pattern command indicating the determined effect mode is set (S5105), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5101, if it is determined that it is not in the normal state (S5101: No), then it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 223n is greater than 0 (S5106), and the time saving counter 223n If it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S5106: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the time saving counter 223n (S5107), and a display command is set to indicate the value of the time saving counter 223n after the subtraction ( S5108), and shifts to the processing of S5109. In the process of S5106, when it is determined that the value of the counter 223n during time saving is 0 (S5106: No), the processes of S5107 and S5108 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S5109.

In the processing of S5109, the effect mode stored in the effect mode storage area 223p is read (S5109), and then it is determined whether or not it is the super chance mode (S5110). If the super chance mode is determined (S5110: Yes), the variation time (basic time) included in the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is extracted (S5111), and the basic variation time (basic time) is 30 seconds. It is determined whether there is (S5112). When it is determined that the basic variation time is 30 seconds (S5112: Yes), the production mode (production content) is determined based on the probability variable production selection table 222c (see FIG. 146) (S5113), and S5105 described above. , and terminate this process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the basic fluctuation time is not 30 seconds (S5112: No), the process proceeds to S5115.

On the other hand, in the process of S5110, when it is determined that the mode is not the super chance mode (S5110: No), the effect setting process during the chance mode is executed (S5114 (S5012)), and the process proceeds to the process of S5115. The details of the chance mode effect setting process (S5114 (S5012)) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S5115, the effect mode corresponding to the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S5115), the process of S5105 described above is executed, and the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 185, the effect setting process during the chance mode (S5012 (S5114)) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. Figure 185 shows the effect setting process during chance mode (S5012 (S5114)) executed in this special figure 1 effect mode setting process (see S4903 in Figure 183) and special figure 2 effect mode setting process (see S4907 in Figure 184) ) is a flowchart showing.

In the chance mode production setting process (S5012 (S5114)), first, the value of the time saving counter 223n is read (S5201), and it is determined whether the read value of the time saving counter 223n is 99 (S5202). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223n is 99 (S5202: Yes), a high speed period is set in the effect mode storage area 223p (S5203), and the process proceeds to S5208. In the process of S5202, if it is determined that the value of the counter 223n during time saving is not 99 (S5202: No), then it is determined whether the read value of the counter 223n during time saving is 79 (S5204). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223n is 79 (S5204: Yes), the normal first period is set in the effect mode storage area 223p (S5205), and the process proceeds to S5208. In the process of S5204, when it is determined that the value of the counter 223n during time saving is not 79 (S5204: No), it is then determined whether the read value of the counter 223n during time saving is 49 (S5206). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223n is 49 (S5206: Yes), the normal second period is set in the effect mode storage area 223p (S5207), and the process proceeds to S5208. In the process of S5206, when it is determined that the value of the counter 223n during time saving is not 49 (S5206: No), the process of S5207 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5208.

In the process of S5208, it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice execution flag 223q is ON (S5208). If it is determined that the continuous notice execution flag 223q is ON (S5208: Yes), the continuous effect mode corresponding to the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S5209), and the process proceeds to S5214. In the processing of S5208, if it is determined that the continuous notice execution flag 223q is off (S5208: No), it is determined whether or not the special continuous notice flag 223o is on (S5210). If it is determined that the special continuous notice flag 223o is ON (S5210: Yes), the special valid time timer is set to a value corresponding to 3 seconds (S5211), and the special continuous notice flag 223o is set OFF (S5212). ), the process proceeds to S5213. Also in the process of S5210, when it is determined that the special continuous notice flag 223o is off (S5210: No), the process proceeds to S5213.

In the process of S5213, the effect mode corresponding to the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S5213), and the process proceeds to S5214. In the process of S5214, a display variation pattern command indicating the determined effect mode is set (S5214), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 186, the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S4107) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 186 is a flow chart showing this frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S4107). This frame button input monitoring and production process (S4107) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 174) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is performed in the third symbol display device 81 to enhance the production effect. A display command is generated and set based on the operation of the frame button 22 in order to execute an effect (operation effect) corresponding to the player's operation.

In this control example, the player can operate the frame button 22 by a plurality of operation methods. A "long press" in which the button 22 is kept pressed for a long time (two seconds or longer) can be determined. Then, different operation presentations can be executed according to the determined operation content. As a result, the frame button 22 can be operated by various operation methods so as to execute various operation presentations for the player, so that early boredom of the game can be suppressed. In this control example, two types of operation methods are used as distinguishable operation methods, but the number of operation methods may be one, or three or more. Also, in this control example, the frame button 22 is the only type of operation means that can be operated by the player. Then, the discriminable operation method may be configured so as to be discriminated not only by operations on individual operation means but also by a combination of operation contents executed on a plurality of operation means. In addition, when a plurality of operation means are provided (for example, a first operation means and a second operation means), when the first operation is performed on the first operation means and when the second operation means is performed, It may be configured such that it is determined that the same operation has been performed (determined as the same operation method) when the second operation is performed. With this configuration, for example, when the arrangement position of the first operation means and the arrangement position of the second operation means are separated, the player can select the operation means that is easy to operate and enjoy the operation. It can be carried out.

In the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S4107 in FIG. 186), first, is the SW valid time greater than 0, that is, is the SW valid time set (whether the value of the SW valid time counter 223r is greater than 0); ) is determined (S5301). It should be noted that this SW valid time is set corresponding to each variation pattern when the variation pattern effect using the frame button 22 is selected. If it is determined that the SW valid time is set (S5301: Yes), the value corresponding to the elapsed time is subtracted from the value of the SW valid time counter 223r (S5302), and the process proceeds to S5303. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5301 that the value of the SW valid time counter 223r is 0 (S5301: No), the process of S5302 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S5303.

In the processing of S5303, it is determined whether or not the value of the special valid time timer is greater than 0 (S5303). If it is determined that the value of the special valid time timer is greater than 0 (S5303: Yes), the value of the special valid time timer is subtracted (S5304), and the process proceeds to S5305. If it is determined that the value of the special valid time timer is 0 (S5303: No), the process of S5304 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5305.

In the processing of S5305, it is determined whether or not the value of the in-operation counter 223t is greater than 0 (S5305). If it is determined that the value of the in-operation counter 223t is 0 (S5305: No), then it is determined whether or not it is within the valid time (S5306). If it is determined that it is within the valid time (S5306: Yes), then it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S5307). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S5307: Yes), a value corresponding to 2 seconds is set to the value of the in-operation counter 223t (S5308), and the process proceeds to S5309. ). If it is determined in the processing of S5306 that it is not within the effective time (S5306: No), and if it is determined in the processing of S5307 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S5307: No), the processing of S5308 is performed. Skip and move to the processing of S5309.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5305 that the value of the in-operation counter 223t is 1 or more (S5305: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is being pressed (S5310). If it is determined that the frame button 22 is being pressed (S5310: Yes), the value of the operating counter 223t is subtracted (S5312), and it is determined whether the subtracted value of the operating counter 223t is 0. (S5313). If it is determined that the decremented value of the in-operation counter 223t is 0 (S5313: Yes), the process proceeds to S5314. If it is determined that the decremented value of the in-operation counter 223t is not 0 (S5313: No), the process proceeds to S5309.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5310 that the frame button 22 is not being pressed (S5310: No), the value of the in-operation counter 223t is cleared (S5311), and the process proceeds to S5314.

In the process of S5314, it is determined whether or not the current chance mode is in progress (S5314). If it is determined that the current is in the chance mode (S5314: Yes), the effect to be executed is selected using the button operation effect selection table 222f (see FIG. 148) (S5315), and the process proceeds to S5309.

In the process of S5314, if it is determined that the current is not in the chance mode (S5314: No), the button effect corresponding to the current operation method and effect content being executed is set (S5316), and the button effect of S5309 is set. Go to processing. In the processing of S5309, other button processing (background change, etc.) is executed.

Although omitted in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S4107) described above with reference to FIG. It is configured so that the period is 0. In other words, the number of operation presentations executed during the period in which each effective time is set is one. As a result, it is possible to suppress excessive execution of the operation presentation.

Note that the processing for the remaining periods of the SW valid time and the special valid time is not limited to this. second), when the operation of the frame button 22 is received (S5310 in FIG. 186: No, S5313: Yes), it may be configured to set a new valid time during the special symbol fluctuation period. . By constructing in this way, the number of operation performances executed during one special symbol variation period can be varied depending on the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 .

<Regarding control processing of the display control device in the first control example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 187 to 201. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing for one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, with reference to FIG. 187, main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 187 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the command pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. FIG. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 . Then, the MPU 231 fetches the received instruction code from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND type flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present control example, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled, thereby speeding up the NOR ROM. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is set so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. to start.

Here, referring to FIG. 188, the boot processing (S6001) will be described. FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S6001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this control example, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed is stored. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is canceled is executed. Of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101.

By setting the command pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the command pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set command pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. Of the control programs stored, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after completion of this boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 187). By setting the top address of the program corresponding to the initializing process (see S6002 in FIG. 187) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the boot process ends.

By executing the boot process (S6001) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the work RAM 233, which is composed entirely of DRAM. It is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processing is executed using

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect part.

On the other hand, without storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot program is stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. , the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding a NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 188, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. may be part of As for the boot program transferred here, a predetermined amount of the control program including all remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the beginning of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing is further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount of part of the remaining boot program, and subsequently stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the instruction pointer 231a in step S6101. and the processing of S6102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. Using the boot program, a predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in this control example, the first program storage area 234d1 stores a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released. It may be stored in the 1-program storage area 234d1. In this case, the MPU 231 may perform the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, return to the description of FIG. 187 . After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. In addition, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the image controller 237 is initialized, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. and instructs execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color according to the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby ascertaining that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing in S6003, the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to . This transfer instruction contains the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). , and the head address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. It is transferred to the change image area 235b when the power is turned on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S6004, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 199(a)), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S7502 in FIG. 199(a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. Remains on until terminated. As a result, during this period, the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 189(b)) performs the simple command determination processing (see FIG. 189(b) S6308) and simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 189(b)) are executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Therefore, as in this main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying it on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player and the people involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed, so that the rest of the resident video RAM 235 can be resident. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the operation check efficiency by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234. FIG.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entering the special figure entrance 64 (start winning), and the command to start the variable effect is voice lamp control from the main control device 110 When received via a device 113, that is, when a display variation pattern command is received, a power-on variation image can be immediately displayed during the variation performance period, and a simple variation performance can be performed. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third pattern display device 81 continues to display the main image when the power is turned on. is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, and it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after the power is restored, Immediately after the power is turned on, even while the main image is being displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 189(a). FIG. 189(a) is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing to be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 189(b). FIG. 189(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 189(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301). If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display on the display device 81, command determination processing (S6302) is executed, and then display setting processing (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and generate a performance image corresponding to the mode. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 190 to 195. FIG.

In the display setting process (S6303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302), etc., an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. specifically identify the content of In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After the display setting process (S6303) is executed, task processing is executed (S6304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S6303) or the simple display setting processing (S6309). The type of sprite (display object) to be displayed is specified, and various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the video RAM 236 , even when a continuous notice command or a back image change command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 , the image controller 237 is continuously instructed to A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice images used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.例文帳に追加Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 199 and 200. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, based on the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S6305), , generates a drawing list shown in FIG. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list (S6306). Note that the details of the rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the stop type command for display is detected, the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A, jackpot B, front-rear out reach, reach other than front-rear out, complete out) The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop design after the variable effect displayed on the third design display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S6301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81, simple command determination processing (S6308) is executed, then simple display setting processing (S6309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S6304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 190 to 195, details of the command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 190 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 190, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401). After completing the command determination process, the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402). All unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed for their command types (S6403).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). Then, if there is a variation pattern command for display (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed (S6405), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, with reference to FIG. 191(a), the details of the variation pattern command process (S6405) will be described. FIG. 191(a) is a flow chart showing the variation pattern command process (S6405). This variation pattern command processing (S6405) executes processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the variation pattern command process, first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a time interval of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. There is a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device will actually produce a variation effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation performance according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation longer than the set display data table can be actually obtained. Even if the variable effect with time is instructed by main controller 110, after the variable effect according to display data table buffer 233d is completed, main controller 110 will send the next display for display, as will be described later. Since the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the third pattern display on the third pattern display device 81 without any discomfort. 3 You can continue to see the variation of the pattern.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S6505, the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6501 , extracts the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and specifies the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. At the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set to 1, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is stored in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. image storage area 236a.

Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h to which the time data is set by the process of S6503 is used to measure the time for the variable presentation specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable presentation in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third design display device 81 .

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (S6406), If there is a stop type command for display (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the stop type command process (S6407) will now be described with reference to FIG. 191(b). FIG. 191(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display (any one of jackpots A to G, small hits A to C, reach out, complete out, etc.) Stop type table corresponding to is determined (S6601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 189(b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device Finally, the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed in 81 is set (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each of the stop symbols, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned on. It is set to ON (S6603) and returns to the command determination processing.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started, the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified as the type information. , offset information (design offset information) from the stop design set by the processing of S6602. In the above-described task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop design set by the process of S6602 is specified from the stop design determination flag set by S6603, and the specified stop By adding the design offset information acquired by the display setting process to the design, the third design to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

It should be noted that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of fluctuation at a time interval of several seconds or more, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S6601, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more stop type commands for display are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of line, and the stop type Decide on a table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss is set by the processing of S6602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out". A stop pattern corresponding to the "big win" is displayed, and the player is misled into thinking that the pachinko machine 10 has "a special pattern big win", and there is a risk of degrading the reliability of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss, in fact, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete loss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "jackpot of special symbols", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 190, the description continues. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no stop type command for display (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an opening command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6408), and the command is displayed. If there is an opening command (S6408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the opening command process (S6409) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 192(a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing. This opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and based on the set opening display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 190, the description continues. In the process of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command in the unprocessed commands (S6410), and the If there is a round number command for use (S6410: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, with reference to FIG. 192(b), details of the round number command processing (S6411) will be described. FIG. 192(b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing. The number-of-rounds command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the number-of-rounds command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S6802).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6805), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 190, the description continues. In the processing of S6410, if it is determined that there is no command for the number of rounds for display (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6412). If there is an ending command for (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the ending command process (S6413) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing ending command processing. This ending command process is to execute the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the ending command process, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S6902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S6904). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6905), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 190, the description continues. In the processing of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display fluctuation stop command among the unprocessed commands (S6414), and display If there is a fluctuation stop command (S6414: Yes), the fluctuation stop command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, with reference to FIG. 194(a), the details of the fluctuation stop command process (S6415) will be described. FIG. 194(a) is a flow chart showing the fluctuation stop command process. This fluctuation stop command process is for executing a process corresponding to the display fluctuation stop command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

This display fluctuation stop command is the end timing of the display fluctuation pattern command set in the fluctuation display setting process (see S4112 in FIG. 182) of the audio lamp control device 113, that is, each special symbol in the main control device 110 At the end timing of the variation pattern (variation time) set in the variation pattern setting process (the timing at which the main controller 110 sets the stop command), the stop command for display output from the audio lamp control device 113 ( normal stop command).

In the fluctuation stop command process, first, the fluctuation stop data table indicated by the display fluctuation stop command is determined, and the decided fluctuation stop data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d ( S6931). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents thereof are cleared (S6932).

Next, based on the fluctuation stop data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6931, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6933), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S6934). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6935), the fluctuation stop command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 190, the description continues. In the process of S6414, if it is determined that there is no fluctuation stop command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display notification command among the unprocessed commands (S6416), and the display notification If there is a command (S6416: Yes), the notification command process is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the notification command process (S6417) will now be described with reference to FIG. 194(b). FIG. 194(b) is a flow chart showing notification command processing. In this notification command processing, processing corresponding to the notification command (for display) received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

This notification command is output to the display control device 114 among various notification commands set when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command for indicating various abnormal states set by the main controller 110. This process is executed when the display control device 114 receives the display notification command.

In the notification command process, first, the display (notification) data table corresponding to the notification mode indicated by the notification command is determined, the determined display (notification) data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and stored in the display data table buffer. 233d (S6951). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents thereof are cleared (S6952).

Next, based on the display (notification) data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6951, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6953), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6954). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the fixed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6955), the notification command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In this control example, among various notification commands set by the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 discriminates only the display command indicating that the notification target is the third pattern display device 81 (display device). However, it is not limited to this, and related commands other than the display command, such as a light emission command, a voice output command, and a character object driving command, are once received and processed by the display control device 114. It may be configured such that the related command is output to the corresponding control device in a state in which information for indicating the data content (display mode) set in 1 is added.

Returning to FIG. 190, the description continues. In the process of S6416, if it is determined that there is no display notification command (S6416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6418). If there is a change command (S6418: Yes), back image change command processing is executed (S6419), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, with reference to FIG. 195(a), details of the back image change command process (S6419) will be described. FIG. 195(a) is a flow chart showing back image change command processing. The back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag 233w for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S7503) of the change in the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S7001). ). Then, among the bits of the back image determination flag 233x provided for each back image type (back surface A, B), the bit corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is set to ON, and the other bits are set to ON. The bit corresponding to the back image type is set to OFF (S7002), the back image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag 233w set by the process of S7001 is turned on, the back image type after change is selected from the back image discrimination flag 233x set by the process of S7002. Identify.

Further, in the task processing, if it is specified to display one of the back faces A and B according to the back face type of the back face image defined in the display data table, from the back face image determination flag 233x set in S7002, The type of background image to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the background image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type ( resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for 20 milliseconds or less, two or more background image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no cases where two or more background image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It could be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7002, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S6418, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S6418: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6420). Otherwise (S6420: Yes), the error command process is executed (S6421), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the error command processing (S6421) will now be described with reference to FIG. 195(b). FIG. 195(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S7102). End the processing and return to the command determination processing.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S7102, and the error type is handled. A process is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image to be displayed.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the processing in S7102 sets on error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Now, return to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6416 that there is no error command (S6420: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S6422), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

In the process of S6401, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is again determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes ), and the processing of S6402 to S6422 is executed again. Then, the processing of S6401 to S6422 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. End the process.

Note that the simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 189(b)) is also performed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary to display the power-on image, that is, the fluctuation pattern command for display and the stop type command for display, are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. It extracts and executes fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 191(a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 191(b)), which are processing corresponding to each command, and for other commands, A process to discard the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 191(a)) executed in this case, in the processing of S6501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image which are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, the process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 196 to 198, details of the display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 196 is a flow chart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 196, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201). ), it is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination processing to be executed first, the processing of S7202 to S7204 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is ON (S7201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S7202), S7203-S7204 , the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

In the processing of S7203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S7203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S7204).

Here, with reference to FIG. 197, details of the warning image setting process will be described. FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to ON are displayed. Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third pattern display device 81 is developed (S7301).

In the task processing (S6304), based on the expanded warning image data, the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the warning image are specified, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite. Determine various parameters necessary for drawing such as

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the warning image setting process (S7204), or when it is determined in the process of S7203 that the error occurrence flag is not ON, that is, it is OFF (S7203: No), the process proceeds to S7205.

In S7205, pointer update processing is executed (S7205). Details of the pointer update processing will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is the process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to which it should be applied.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, the pointer 233f is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined after the address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S7401, it is then checked whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information. is determined (S7402). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the substance data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7403). The time data corresponding to the performance time of the display data table for demonstration set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is initialized by setting it to 1 (S7405), and this processing ends. and return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7403 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S7406), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is displayed. is always expanded, the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S7402: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, return to FIG. 196 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task processing (S6304), the type of the sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the rendering content developed in the processing of S7206 together with the previously developed warning image, etc., and each sprite , determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on. (S7209).

As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S7209: No), the confirmed display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the confirmed display effect. The transfer data table buffer 233e is set (S7210), and then the content is cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the fixed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S7214), the content of the stop symbol discrimination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), returns to V interrupt processing.

Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. You can set the drawing contents like this. In addition, only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the fixed display data table, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect. In addition, compared to the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not overloaded. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114 .

It should be noted that the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before. Until a predetermined time elapses after the start, the pattern offset information from the stop pattern of the fluctuation performance performed one before is described. In the task processing (S6304), until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, from the last stop design determination flag set by S7215, the stop design of the fluctuation production performed one before is specified, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S7209, if the fixed display flag is ON (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is ON (S7216). Then, if the demonstration display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display effect. After that, a process for displaying a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

First, the demonstration display data table is obtained and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents thereof are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the fixed display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加, you can set its drawing contents.

In the process of S7216, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S7216: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the fixed display effect is finished, and that demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is finished as it is. and return to V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

The simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 189(b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on variable images corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the stop type command for display is displayed for a predetermined time after the effect time of the power-on variable image ends. A process of setting a display data table specifying that the image is to be displayed still in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 199 and 200, details of the transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 199(a) is a flow chart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. Processing is executed (S7502), the transfer setting processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 199(b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not turned on as a result of the processing of S7501, that is, if it is turned off (S7501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video data. It has been transferred to the RAM 235 . In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, resident image transfer setting processing (S7502), which is part of the transfer setting processing (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 199(b). FIG. 199B is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been given to the image controller 237 (S7601). ), and further determines whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S7602). In the processing of S7602, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing has ended. . If it is determined by the processing in S7602 that the transfer processing has not ended (S7602: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7602: Yes), the process proceeds to S7603. Also, as a result of the processing of S7601, even if a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to S7603.

In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S7603). A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident target image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this processing ends.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information about the resident target image data that has not been transferred, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (where the data is transferred). The first address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use. , it is transferred to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235 . Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

As a result of the process of S7603, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and this process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 189(b)), the command Since determination processing (see FIGS. 190 to 195) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 196 to 198) are executed, normal image drawing is set. A normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 200) (see S7501: No in FIG. 199(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without overwriting while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in this resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 can perform image drawing processing. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third designs, character designs, and error messages, as well as main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, and display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be prevented. , high responsiveness can be maintained until the third pattern display device 81 displays some image.

Next, with reference to FIG. 200, the normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 200 is a flow chart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the previously executed display setting process (S6303) is used. Information described in the indicated address is obtained (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702). , and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S7703), furthermore, a transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data whose transfer is to be started in the ON state, is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to S7705.

In addition, in the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but Null data (S7702: No), the process of S7703 and S7704 is skipped and the process proceeds to S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S7706).

In the process of S7706, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S7706 that the transfer process has not ended (S7706: No), the image transfer process continues in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to S7707. Also, as a result of the process of S7705, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S7705: No), the process proceeds to S7707.

In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707). If the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), image data to be transferred exists, so is turned off (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S7703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the processing proceeds to S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on, but off (S7707: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709). Then, if the back image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7709: No), there is no image data to start transferring, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed. Of the back image determination flags 233x, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S7711). Furthermore, the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination ( The start address of the normal video RAM 236) is obtained (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

In the process of S7713, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The determination in the process of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is normal video If it is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

As a result of the process of S7713, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S7713 (S7713: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S7714). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 receives the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (in this case, the transfer destination). The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forward to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the processing of S7714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and this normal transfer setting processing ends. The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by substituting the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off".

By executing the normal image transfer processing in this way, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing. When the displayed stop type information is determined to be a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the image data used for the back image is stored in the back image of the resident video RAM 235 . Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in this control example, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. can be done.

Here, the transfer data table stores the image data to be transferred so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, thereby obtaining the predetermined address according to the display data table. When the sprite is drawn, the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 201, details of the drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 201 is a flow chart showing this rendering process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in task processing (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), a drawing list (FIG. 155) is generated (S7801). That is, in the processing of S7801, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in the task processing (S6304). Then, parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite that should be placed on the backmost side to the sprite that should be placed on the front side in the image for one frame. As drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which sprite image data is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the top address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored as the transfer data information is displayed at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the top address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite. , according to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the image in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information. As a result, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

When transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ), and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the head address of the storage source to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a are sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination top address of the normal video RAM 236 when the normal video RAM 236 is not in use. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 after that, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. Send to As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Also, while expanding the image drawn in one of the frame buffers, the image drawn from one of the frame buffers can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and drawing processing and display processing are simultaneously processed in parallel. be able to.

In the rendering process, after the process of S7802, the rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7803). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process of the loading process (see FIG. 189(b)) is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. is executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first half is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to perform display processing of an image for one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing processing for an image for one frame is being performed.

As described above, in the first control example, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are configured so as not to be executed in parallel (in parallel). The lottery for the second special symbol is executed with priority over the lottery for the first special symbol. Then, the lottery is executed so that the lottery for the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery for the first special symbol. Furthermore, it is configured to vary the ease of execution of the second special symbol lottery according to the set game state. Specifically, when the high probability state of the normal design is set (time saving state, variable state) than when the low probability state of the normal design is set (normal state) In order to make it easier to acquire the lottery right of the second special symbol, a ball entrance accompanied by an electric accessory 640a that is opened in a winning game (normal winning game) that is executed when winning a normal symbol. When the ball enters (the second ball entrance 640), it is configured to be able to acquire the lottery right of the second special symbol. In other words, when the game is played in the normal state, which is the initial game state, the first special symbol lottery is easier to execute than the second special symbol lottery, and the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery. Taking this opportunity, it is possible to set the high probability state of the normal design, and when the high probability state of the normal design is set, so as to execute the lottery of the second special design that is more advantageous than the lottery of the first special design. It consists of By configuring in this way, the degree of advantage to the player can be greatly varied according to the set game state, so it is expected that a game state with a high degree of advantage to the player will be set. However, it is possible to make the player voluntarily play the game.

In addition, when a win is won in a normal symbol lottery executed in a state in which a low probability state of normal symbols is set, a normal symbol winning game in which the electric accessory 640a is opened for 5 seconds can be executed. there is By configuring in this way, even in the normal state, which is a game state disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to temporarily provide a period in which the second special symbol lottery can easily be executed, so that the normal state can be maintained. A player who is playing a game can be made to execute a game aiming at winning a special symbol lottery jackpot and a game aiming at winning a winning by a normal symbol lottery, thereby preventing the player from quickly getting tired of the game. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in this control example, the production mode of the special figure 2 fluctuation production executed on the display surface of the third design display device 81 corresponding to the second special design lottery executed during the normal state is stored. It is configured to be variable based on the number of lottery rights of the second special symbol that is present, that is, the number of special symbols 2 reserved. Specifically, as a production mode of the special figure 2 fluctuation production that is executed when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit, a pseudo-loss fluctuation production showing that the lottery result is out in the first half of the fluctuation production is executed, and in the second half period, the third pattern stopped (temporarily stopped) in the pseudo-loss variation performance is restarted to execute the pseudo-win variation performance indicating that the lottery result is a big win, The number of times the third pattern is temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) in the pseudo hit variation performance is configured to be variable corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number. By constructing in this way, the variation effect of pseudo-stopping the third pattern a plurality of times until the third pattern is stop-displayed (determined display) in a combination indicating that the result of the second special pattern lottery is a big hit. can be executed. In other words, it is possible to make the player think that he or she has won a big hit after the second special symbol lottery is conducted a plurality of times.

As a result, even if the player wins the jackpot with the special figure 2 reservation used for the second special symbol lottery that is executed first among the plurality of special figure 2 reservations acquired during the normal game. On the other hand, since it can be made to think that you have won a jackpot because you have acquired multiple special 2 reservations during the normal game, you can play a game to acquire the special 2 reservation more motivated during the normal game. can be done.

Also, when the special figure 2 reservation number is 0 when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the third symbol display device 81 is displayed when the first special symbol lottery is executed as the above-described pseudo-hit variation effect. To execute a variation performance imitating the variation performance displayed on the display surface (the performance mode of the special figure 1 variation performance executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the first special symbol lottery) It consists of By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the fact that the special figure 2 fluctuation production is repeated in a situation where the special figure 2 suspension is not obtained, so that the player is given a pseudo fluctuation production. It can be difficult to identify what is being executed. In addition, after the pseudo fluctuation production imitating the special figure 1 fluctuation production is executed, the third symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in a combination indicating that the jackpot has been won in the second special symbol lottery, so the game It is possible to execute a variation performance with unexpectedness for the person.

In this control example, when the probability variable jackpot game is executed, a performance mode indicating that the probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends is set as the performance mode of the notification performance in advance (at the start of the jackpot game), Immediately before the notification effect is executed (for example, at the start of the jackpot ending period), it is determined whether or not to switch the effect mode of the notification effect based on the result of the ball flowing down to the specific gate, and the ball passes through the specific gate. When the ball is flowing down, the notification performance of the performance mode set in advance is executed, and only when the ball is not flowing down the specific gate, the performance mode of the notification performance is switched.

Furthermore, in this control example, the length of the jackpot ending period is made different between the variable probability jackpot and the normal jackpot, so that the variable probability jackpot that is advantageous to the player is set to have a longer ending period than the normal jackpot. Configure. As a result, the fact that the variable probability state is set after the end of the big winning game can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner before the variable probability state is actually set. On the other hand, when the variable probability state is not set after the end of the jackpot game, even if the state is notified for a long period of time, the player only feels uncomfortable, so the ending period is shortened.

In this way, when the length of the jackpot ending period is made different between the probability variable jackpot and the normal jackpot, if the ball cannot flow down to a specific gate during the probability variable jackpot game, the jackpot ending is performed. If the effect mode of the period is simply switched to the effect mode executed during the ending period of the normal winning game, the length of the ending period is different, so that the incongruent notification effect is executed during the ending period. I had a problem. In addition, if a dedicated performance mode that is set only when the ball cannot flow down to a specific gate in the probability variable jackpot game is set in advance, image data (performance data) for that performance mode is displayed in advance. There is a problem that the character ROM 234 of the control device 114 needs to be stored, which increases the storage capacity.

On the other hand, in this control example, the jackpot ending period is divided into the first half period and the second half period, and the length of the second half period is configured to be a common length regardless of the jackpot type, and during the probability variable jackpot game. Only the performance mode corresponding to the latter half period of the jackpot ending period is switched to the performance mode set for the latter half period of the ending period of the normal winning game when the ball cannot flow down to the specific gate. Configure. Thus, a notification performance is executed without providing a dedicated performance mode used only when the ball cannot flow down to a specific gate during the variable probability big winning game, and without making the player feel uncomfortable. can do.

In addition, in this control example, the jackpot ending period is divided into the first half period and the second half period, and the length of the second half period is configured to be a common length regardless of the jackpot type. is not limited to this, for example, from the final round period of the jackpot game By executing the notification performance, the notification performance executed for a period longer than the actual jackpot ending period may be configured to be executable, or the jackpot game is finalized for a predetermined period after the jackpot ending period is set. By continuously executing the round performance during the round period and then executing the notification performance, the notification performance may be executed for a period shorter than the actual jackpot ending period.

Since this V winning device 2650 has the same content as the V winning device 2650 (see FIGS. 194 to 196) of the eighth control example described above, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted. . Also, the configuration of the right side area of the variable display unit 80, and the ball flowing down the right side area to the through gate 67, the general ball entrance 63, the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, and the V winning device 2650 Since the rate of entering the ball is the same as that of the left area described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted. As described above, in this control example, even if the player executes the right-handed game, regardless of the set game state, and thus whether or not the jackpot game is being executed, the left-handed game It is configured so that the same privilege is granted even if Therefore, the player can play the game by any game method according to his or her mood.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 230, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is symmetrical. It may be configured so that there is no large deviation between the case of performing a left-handed game and the case of performing a right-handed game. The number of ball entry holes 63 is made smaller than the number of ball entry holes 63, and the ratio of balls entering the first ball entry hole 64 is higher in the left-handed game than in the right-handed game. A right-handed game is more difficult to obtain a prize ball than a right-handed game, but it is easier to execute the first special symbol lottery, and a right-handed game is easier to obtain a prize ball than a left-handed game, but it is difficult to execute the first special symbol lottery. It may be configured to In the case of such a configuration, during the normal state, that is, during the execution of the game in which the ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64, the player can play the game in any game method. It is possible to make the right-handed game more advantageous to the player than the left-handed game in the game in which the ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 (the game in the time-saving state or the variable probability state). .

In each of the above control examples, each time the value (N) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d in the main controller 110 is updated (that is, each time it increases or decreases), the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203 d in the main controller 110 increases, the main controller 110 transmits the reserved number command to the sound lamp controller 113 . In addition, in the voice lamp control device 113, when receiving the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, it is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by one. As a result, the number of times master controller 110 transmits a hold number command to audible lamp controller 113 and the number of times audible lamp controller 113 receives a hold number command can be reduced. The control load of the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

In each of the above control examples, the number of winnings in the first ball entrance 64 is suspended up to four times, and the passage through the through gate 67 is suspended up to one time. However, the number of times may be set to 3 times or less or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of pending balls in the variable display based on the winning to the first ball entrance 64 is displayed numerically in a part of the third pattern display device 81, or the area divided into four is displayed by the number of pending balls. It may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light-emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first pattern display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light-emitting member. can be configured to

Further, as shown in each of the above control examples, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertically scrolling the pattern as identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. The pattern may be moved and displayed in the vertical direction or along a predetermined path such as an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. It also includes the production display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol. Further, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the display mode of the dynamic display of the third symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol and the display mode of the dynamic display of the decorative symbol for indicating the lottery result of the normal symbol. For example, each display mode may be set using common image data that the display control device 114 has.

In each control example described above, the third symbol display for showing the lottery result of each symbol to the player is executed by one display means (third symbol display device 81), but other configurations may be used. For example, among the third symbols, different display means may be provided for displaying the main symbol to be displayed in an emphasized manner to the player and for displaying the sub-symbols. Also, as the configuration of the display means, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used.

In each control example described above, in the case of the game state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player, and in the case of the game state (normal state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the time saving state, the left side of the game board 13 Although it is constructed such that a left-handed game aiming at the area is executed, it may be constructed so that the area targeted by the different game board 13 is changed according to the game state. For example, in the case of the normal state, the game board A left-handed game aiming at the left side area of 13 is executed, and in the case of the time saving state, a right-handed game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 may be executed, and a left-handed game is played during the time saving state. may be executed, and a right-handed game may be executed during the normal state.

Furthermore, in each of the control examples described above, even when any game state is set and when a jackpot game is set, a left-handed game aiming at the left area of the game board 13 is executed. However, without being limited to this, when the time saving state is set and during the jackpot game, the right-handed game may be executed, and the left-handed game may be executed only during the normal state. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to easily understand whether or not the player is in an advantageous state according to the game method (right-handed game, left-handed game) to be executed.

In each of the control examples described above, the frame button 22 is used as the operating means that can be operated by the player. may be used, and an operation means configured in a lever shape that can determine whether the player has operated it by tilting it left or right or front and back, or can determine whether it has been operated by the player touching or approaching it. A touch sensor type operating means, or a wireless operating means that can determine that an operation has been performed by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like may be used. In addition, the frame button 22 is electrically connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and the frame button 22 is used to change the performance mode of the performance executed by the pachinko machine 10 based on the player's operation. However, it is only necessary to be able to change the effect mode of various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 based on the player's operation of the frame button 22. For example, the frame button 22 is displayed. It may be electrically connected to the control device 114, or an output signal from the operation means (the frame button 22) can be input, and the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113, the sound output device 226, the lamp display A controller capable of generating an effect setting signal that can be output to the device 227 may be provided. By configuring in this way, even when a plurality of operation means for effect are provided, the output signals (operation signals) output from the operation means for effect can be centrally managed. It is possible to smoothly set the effect mode for the player's operation of the means.

Furthermore, in the above-described first control example, when the advantageous gaming state (probability variable state, time saving state) is set after the end of the jackpot game, during a predetermined period (until the special symbol variation is executed 20 times), A high-speed fluctuation period in which a short-time fluctuation time is selected can be set, and during the high-speed fluctuation period, the background mode transition performance is not executed (hardly performed) when the frame button 22 is operated. there is As a result, the background mode transition effect is executed as the operation effect during the period when the short-term fluctuation time is likely to be selected, and the player grasps the stop display mode of the third symbol for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation that makes it difficult to

In addition, in the first control example, the first operation for the frame button 22 during the high-speed fluctuation period, that is, in the state where the normal state is set, the operation for executing the background mode transition effect ("normal push") ) is performed, an operation effect in a different effect mode from the background mode transition effect is executed. As a result, the player can be motivated to operate the frame button 22 even during the high-speed fluctuation period, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the first control example, by executing the second operation (“long press”) other than the above-described first operation (“normal press”) even during the high-speed fluctuation period, the transition to the background mode can be performed. The production is configured to be executable. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the background mode transition effect to the player who intends to execute the background mode transition effect even though it is difficult to grasp the stop display mode of the third symbol. can. In this first control example, the period required to determine that the second operation has been performed is longer than the period required to determine that the first operation has been performed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the frequency with which the background mode transition effect is executed, so that it is possible to suppress excessive difficulty in grasping the stop display mode of the third symbol.

It should be noted that, as in the present embodiment, when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the first operation processing executed by performing the first operation on the operating means is performed by performing the operation when the predetermined condition is satisfied. The technical idea that prevents (makes it difficult to be) executed even if the first operation is performed on the means may be used for other techniques. ), and when a liquid crystal display is used as the third pattern display device 81, a brightness adjustment process for adjusting the brightness of the liquid crystal display is applied as the above-described first operation process, and a predetermined condition is established. If not (for example, if the special symbol variation is not executed), the first operation process can be executed, and if a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, if the special symbol variation is executed) may be configured to make execution of the first operation process difficult.

Further, as the above-described predetermined conditions, not only the presence or absence of special symbol variations, but also conditions that are established when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 10, or conditions that are established during a jackpot game may be set.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, when the above-described first operation is executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied, a second operation process different from the first operation process (for example, the first processing for notifying that the operation processing will not be executed). Thereby, the player can easily grasp that the first operation process is not executed. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to execute another operation presentation that is not related to the first operation process.

In addition, even when the predetermined condition described above is satisfied, the first operation process described above is executed by executing the second operation different from the first operation, as in the present control example. good to do In addition, in the first control example, the first operation and the second operation can be performed by differentiating the operation method for one operation means (frame button 22), but the present invention is not limited to this. A plurality of operation means are provided in the pachinko machine 10, the first operation is made executable by operating the first operation means (for example, the frame button 22), and the second operation means (for example, the frame button 22) is provided in addition to the The second operation may be executed by operating the frame button). Also, in this case, it is preferable that the second operation is more difficult to execute than the first operation. 2. It is preferable to arrange the operating means on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 121), which is difficult for the player to operate.

Furthermore, when the above-described first operating means and second operating means are provided, a first operation validity determination period for validly determining an operation on the first operating means and a period for validating an operation on the second operating means The second operation validity determination period to be determined may be set uniformly, or different periods may be set. If the operation validity determination periods are unified, the validity period determination process can be simplified. In addition, when different periods are set, the period during which the operation is determined to be valid differs depending on the type of operation means to be operated, so that the game can be motivated to operate various operation means at various timings. can be done.

In the first control example described above, the normal state and a plurality of advantageous gaming states (probability variable state, time saving state) that are more advantageous to the player than the normal state can be set, and among the advantageous gaming states , when one of the game states is set, not the period until the set game state ends, but the period until the next normal state is set (remaining period) can be notified to the player. Configure.

Here, conventionally, when an advantageous gaming state (for example, probability variable state or time saving state) that is advantageous to the player is set, the period during which the advantageous gaming state continues (the number of special symbol fluctuations) is notified to the player. there is something to do Specifically, "100 times" is displayed as the remaining period display mode indicating the period during which the advantageous gaming state continues, and the value of the remaining period display mode is displayed by subtracting 1 each time a special symbol lottery is executed. be. This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp how many more special symbol lotteries can be executed during the currently set advantageous game state.

In addition, in recent gaming machines, there are some that can set a plurality of state types as advantageous gaming states that are advantageous to the player. There are some that can be set with the most advantageous game state (for example, probability variable state) that is more advantageous than the advantageous game state.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, when the game state shifts from the most advantageous game state to the normal advantageous game state, the player can display the remaining period display mode for indicating the period during which the most advantageous game state continues. After that, when the normal advantageous game state is set, the player is notified using the remaining period display mode for indicating the period during which the normal advantageous game state continues.

In other words, in a state where the most advantageous game state is set, it is possible for the player to grasp the period (remaining period) during which the most advantageous game state continues, but it is set after the most advantageous game state ends. The player cannot grasp what kind of game state the game state is and how long the game state continues after the most advantageous game state is finished. .

Therefore, when the most advantageous game state ends, the player is asked whether a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the most advantageous game state is set, or a game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the most advantageous game state. There is a problem that it is not possible to grasp whether (for example, the normal state) is set, and it is difficult to understand what the game should be aimed at during the most advantageous game state.

On the other hand, in this control example, as described above, when a plurality of types of advantageous game states are continuously set, the period until the plurality of types of advantageous game states are terminated, that is, the normal state It is configured to display the advantageous gaming state remaining period display mode for the period until is set. By configuring in this way, when advantageous gaming states of different types are set continuously, the advantageous state remaining period display mode is displayed so as to straddle the advantageous gaming states that are successively set. To allow a player to play a game with peace of mind.

Furthermore, in the first control example, when the remaining period of one advantageous game state period across a plurality of consecutively set advantageous game states (probability variable state, time saving state) is notified, the currently set It is configured so that the player can execute the performance that makes it difficult for the player to identify whether the game state is the variable probability state or the time saving state. Therefore, since the game state set during the advantageous game state period can be made difficult to understand, the player can play the game while expecting the advantageous game state to be set.

In the first control example, when the remaining period of one advantageous game state period straddling a plurality of consecutively set advantageous game states (probability variable state, time saving state) is notified, the currently set A game state or a game state set in the past can be suggested, and a suggestive effect can be executed. As a result, the player can be interested in the content of the suggestive effect executed during the game state period.

Furthermore, in the first control example, it is possible to execute operation effects in a plurality of types of effect modes during the advantageous game state period, and the selection ratio of each effect mode is made different according to the set game state. ing. Therefore, since the player can predict the current game state based on the effect mode of the operation effect executed during the advantageous game state period, the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In addition, since only the selection ratio of each effect mode is changed according to the set game state, the prediction accuracy can be improved by increasing the number of operation effects executed during the advantageous game state period. can. Therefore, the player can be motivated to operate the operating means (frame button 22). It should be noted that in this control example, as described above with reference to FIG. Is configured to execute a “reach suggestion” effect that suggests to the player whether the special symbol variation being executed is in a reach state or not, and if it is in a reach state, the reach line or reach pattern is suggested to the player. However, without being limited to this, for example, it is determined whether there is winning information that becomes a ready-to-win state in the winning information related to the second special symbol stored in the winning information storage area 223b, and based on the determination result It may be configured to inform the player that the second special symbol variation to be in the ready-to-win state is to be performed before the second special symbol variation is performed. In this way, the performance effect of the operation presentation is further enhanced by expanding not only the special pattern variation being executed but also the reserved and stored special pattern variation (special pattern variation to be executed in the future). can be done.

In addition, in the above-described first control example, when the player operates the frame button 22, the background mode transition and the effect for showing the result of the special symbol lottery are executed. Functions that can be executed by operating the operation means include, for example, a volume adjustment function for adjusting the volume output from the audio output device 226 (see FIG. 137) of the pachinko machine 10, and a third A brightness adjustment function for adjusting the brightness on the display surface of the pattern display device 81 may be used. As for the volume adjustment function and the brightness adjustment function, there is a risk of making it difficult to see the variation effect of the third pattern executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, as with the transition to the background mode described above. , When a predetermined condition is satisfied, specifically, when a period (high-speed fluctuation period) is set in which a short fluctuation time is likely to be selected as the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation, and when a period other than that is set It may be configured to be more difficult to execute.

In the first control example described above, the background mode transition can be executed even while the high-speed fluctuation period is set. Also good. In addition, in the above-described first control example, a first period during which a specific effect mode (transition to background mode) is likely to be executed as an operation effect executed by operating the operation means, and a specific effect mode (transition to background mode) are more likely to be executed than the first period. Although the second period is provided, it may be possible to set three or more periods in which the ratio of execution of operation effects in a specific effect mode is different.

<Second control example>
Next, a second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 202 to 210. FIG. This second control example differs from the above-described first control example in that the configuration for displaying various images on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 and the control details are different. . Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the above-described first control example, the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 described above with reference to FIG. 122(b) are configured to be displayed in one image layer. was On the other hand, the second control example is different in that the main symbol sz and the sub-symbol fz constituting each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in different layers. By synchronizing and controlling the display of the main symbol sz and the sub-symbol fz displayed on different layers, it is possible to variably display the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the same manner as in the first control example described above. It consists of

Here, conventionally, as the identification information for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, there has been one in which the third symbol is variably displayed. In addition, various productions (variation productions) are executed during the variable display of the third symbol, and the result of the special symbol lottery is suggested to the player, thereby allowing the player to play while expecting a big win. There was something I could do.

By the way, as a general game machine, a symbol variation display using a plurality (for example, three) of symbol rows formed by a plurality of third symbols (for example, third symbols with numbers 1 to 9) is displayed. When a predetermined third pattern is stop-displayed in the pattern rows other than the one pattern row, a performance (for example, ready-to-win performance) with a high degree of expectation for a big win is executed. However, in the conventional game machine, the variable display is executed by changing only the variable speed of the variable display without changing the order of the symbols forming the symbol row. Therefore, there is a problem that the performance effect of the variable performance using the variable display of the symbol row cannot be enhanced.

In addition, by arranging identification information (sub-design) other than identification information (main design) for indicating the result of the special design lottery in one design row, it is proposed to increase the variation of the variable display. However, even if such a configuration is used, there is a problem that the performance effect of the variable performance cannot be enhanced only by varying the variable display speed of the symbol row formed by the main symbols and the sub-symbols.

Further, a plurality of symbol rows having different arrangement and types of main symbols and sub-patterns are prepared in advance, and when a specific variable performance is executed, the performance effect of the variable performance is obtained by varying the symbol row itself. Although there is something to be improved, there is a problem that the display control becomes complicated because it is necessary to execute control to variably display different symbol rows according to the variability effect to be executed.

On the other hand, in this control example, the symbol row display is performed using a plurality of layers. Specifically, the main symbols and the sub-symbols forming the symbol row are displayed on separate layers. In normal times, the main symbols and the sub symbols are synchronized and variably displayed, so that various symbols forming the symbol row are variably displayed in a specific arrangement (see FIG. 122(b)) while the main symbols are variably displayed. By making the variable display contents and the variable display contents of the sub-symbols different, the symbol row can be variably displayed in a mode other than the specific pattern arrangement.

By configuring in this way, while using the image data of the third patterns (main pattern, sub-pattern) forming the specific pattern row, the variable display of the third pattern is easily performed in a manner other than the specific pattern arrangement. There is an effect that it is possible to enhance the production effect.

Here, with reference to FIG. 202, display contents displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 202(a) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the display layer formed in the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example and the display screen, and FIG. 202(b) is the main symbol layer sr is set to OFF and the display of the sub-symbol layer fr is set to ON, and FIG. It is a diagram showing an example of the effect result of.

As shown in FIG. 202(a), in the second control example, the main symbol layer sr displaying the main symbol sz and the sub-symbol layer fr displaying the sub-symbol fz are formed overlapping. , and the main pattern layer sr is arranged in front of the sub-pattern layer fr (on the player's line of sight). Although only the main symbol layer sr and the sub-symbol fz are shown in FIG. Layers are superimposed.

Specifically, as described in the drawing list described above with reference to FIG. effect 1, effect 2, . . . ), characters (character 1, character 2, . Layers are formed. As for the portion where the display images overlap, the display image displayed in the front layer (layer) is preferentially visible.

In the second control example configured as described above, when both the main symbol sz displayed on the main symbol layer sr and the sub-symbol fz displayed on the sub-symbol layer fr are variably displayed, , Since the main symbol sz is displayed with priority over the sub-symbol fz, the identification information (main symbol sz) for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is replaced by the identification information (sub-symbol fz ), making it difficult for the player to see the result of the special symbol lottery. In addition, since there is no need to perform variable display control so that the main symbol sz and the sub-symbol fz do not overlap in order to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the result of the special symbol lottery, the variable display control can be simplified. , making the most of the limited display area of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display of the main symbol sz can be executed.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 202(a), the main symbol layer sr is arranged on the nearer side (preferentially) than the sub-symbol layer fr, and the main symbol sz has priority over the sub-symbol fz. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the sub-symbol layer fr is displayed as the main symbol layer sr so that the sub-symbol fz is displayed with priority over the main symbol sz. It may be configured to be arranged on the front side (preferentially). By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the display mode of the main symbol sz while each symbol (main symbol sz, sub-symbol fz) is being variably displayed. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the result of the special symbol lottery until the variation of the third symbol (main symbol sz, sub-symbol fz) is stopped and displayed. can be executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 202(b) and FIG. 202(c), the variation effect executed by the display control for each pattern layer will be described. As described above, in this control example, the main symbol sz and the sub-symbol fz constituting the symbol row can be displayed independently. Further, it is possible to set whether or not to display the display image that is set to be displayed for each layer. In other words, while internally executing display control for each layer, it is possible to set whether or not to display the layer itself (on or off).

FIG. 202(b) shows an example of the display screen when the display of the main symbol layer sr is set to OFF and the display of the sub-symbol layer fr is set to ON. On the display surface of the symbol display device 81, only the sub-symbol fz among the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is variably displayed. In the sub-display area Ds, the sub-symbol fz is stop-displayed before the main symbol sz is displayed, so that the reach-line that will be effective in the current third symbol variation is announced to the player. Characters of "reach line notice start" indicating that the notice effect has been executed are displayed. After that, the effect result corresponding to the stop position of the sub symbol fz is displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 202(c), the sub symbol fz is stopped and displayed in a "diamond shape", and the sub symbol fz is displayed as a result indicating that the active line L4 and the active line L5 (see FIG. 122) are in a ready-to-reach state. Characters of "Double Reach Confirmed" are displayed in the display area Ds. Then, when this reach line notice effect is completed, the display of the main symbol layer sr is set to ON, and what is the type of the main symbol sz that is in the reach state on the effective lines L4 and L5 (see FIG. 122)? A variable effect is executed to suggest to the player whether or not it will happen, and then a double reach effect (see FIG. 131) is executed.

As described above, in the second control example, it is possible to perform the variable display of the main symbol sz and the variable display of the sub-symbol fz differently. , the player is notified of the location where the main symbol sz is stopped and displayed, and then the main symbol sz is variably displayed, thereby informing the type of the main symbol sz in the ready-to-win state. Therefore, the effect result of the third symbol variation effect for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery can be presented to the player in stages, and an easy-to-understand effect can be provided.

In addition, in the reach line notice effect explained with reference to FIGS. 202(b) and (c), the player is notified in advance of only the stop display position of the main symbol sz by the stop display position of the sub symbol fz. In addition to this, for example, the type of the main symbol sz to be stopped and displayed, that is, the result of the special symbol lottery may be indicated by the arrangement of the sub symbols fz which are stopped and displayed. Specifically, for example, when the secondary symbol fz is stopped and displayed in all areas other than the area forming the effective line L2 (see FIG. 122(a)) as the effect result of the reach line notice effect, the effective A combination of specific main symbols sz (for example, a combination of "3.4.1" from the top) may be stop-displayed on the line L2 (see FIG. 122(a)).

Here, when the combination of the specific main symbols sz is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the third symbol is restarted, and the variation performance (so-called pseudo-continuous variation performance) that increases the expectation of winning the jackpot is executed. , As it is, it is good to configure so that a winning game (a big winning game or a small winning game) is executed. By configuring in this way, when the reach line notice effect is executed, the player can be more interested in the result of the effect.

Furthermore, in the case where the reach line notice effect is executed in which only the sub pattern fz is first variably displayed, the present reach line notice effect notifies in advance only the stop display position of the main pattern sz, or is stopped and displayed. In order to make it easier for the player to understand whether the type of the main symbol sz is also notified in advance, for example, after the sub symbol fz is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 202(c)), each sub symbol fz that is stopped and displayed Depending on the type of display mode formed using the symbol fz (for example, a graphic display displayed by connecting the sub-symbols fz with a line), it is preferable to notify the effect result of the reach line notice effect this time, For example, in the state shown in FIG. 202(c) (a state in which the secondary symbol fz is stopped and displayed as a rhombus), when a rhombus figure is displayed, the effect result of this reach line notice effect is that the main symbol sz is stopped. The position is indicated in advance, and when a heart-shaped figure connecting four sub-patterns fz is displayed, the player is informed in advance that a specific main pattern sz will be stop-displayed. It is good to configure so as to notify.

In this way, after the sub-symbol fz is stop-displayed and before the main design sz is stop-displayed, an effect using the stop-displayed sub-symbol fz (pre-announcement of effect result) is executed. , Since the result of the variable performance (variable performance using the third symbol) for showing the result of the special symbol lottery can be shown to the player in stages, the player continues to be interested in the variable performance to be executed. can have

Next, with reference to FIG. 203, the contents of various patterns pre-stored in the character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 will be described. In this control example, as in the first control example described above, a back image for a sea background and a back image for a mountain background can be set as back images. Specifically, when the transition to the background mode is executed based on the player's operation of the frame button 22, the currently set background image (for example, the sea background) is changed to the background image that is not currently set. (for example, mountain background).

Furthermore, the second control example is configured to vary the display mode of the third symbol (main symbol sz) according to the type of set (displayed) back image. By configuring in this way, it is possible to variably display the main pattern sz in the display mode according to the type of the back image, so that it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the back image is switched.

Here, the contents of the image data of the main pattern sz displayed corresponding to the back image will be described with reference to FIGS. 203(a) and 203(b). FIG. 203(a) is a schematic diagram showing image data of the main design for the sea used when a sea image (sea background) is set, and FIG. 203(b) is a mountain image (mountain background). FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing image data of a mountain main image used when is set. Each of these image data is stored in advance in the character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114, and when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on or when the background mode transition is executed, the character is stored. The corresponding image data is read out from the area 234a2 and stored in the third pattern area 235d or the third pattern row area 235g of the resident video RAM 235. FIG. Since the contents of the process of reading out the image data corresponding to each pattern and the process of storing in the third pattern area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted. do.

As shown in FIG. 203(a), the image data corresponding to the sea main pattern sz includes nine types of pattern patterns (octopus, porcupine fish, turtle, shark, shrimp, monkfish, dugong, angelfish, crab), Image data (D1-D9) representing main symbols with numbers "1-9" are stored. The main pattern image data D1 to D9 are stored in advance in the character storage area 234a2 corresponding to the order in which they are actually displayed. Therefore, when reading the image data corresponding to the main pattern, it is sufficient to read the image data D1 in order and store them in the third pattern area 235d.

Further, in the second control example, the symbol row Z1 and the symbol row Z3 (see FIG. 122(a)), that is, the symbol rows that are stopped and displayed when the ready-to-win state is reached, are divided into nine main symbols (image Main symbols corresponding to data D1 to D9), while the symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 122(a)), that is, the symbol row that is variably displayed during the ready-to-win state is formed by 10 main symbols. It is configured to be formed with a pattern. Specifically, the nine main symbols (main symbols corresponding to the image data D1 to D9) forming the above-described symbol row Z1 are modified main symbols (image data The main symbols corresponding to DA) are added to form a symbol row Z2. In the symbol row Z2, after the main symbols sz with the number 9 pass, the main symbols sz with the number 4 pass, and then the main symbols sz with the number 1 pass. Configured for variable display. As a result, the main symbol sz of the specific type (the main symbol with the number 4 in this control example) can be passed a plurality of times before the variable display of the symbol row completes one round. When the ready-to-win state is established for the main symbols sz of , the possibility of winning the jackpot is high (the possibility that the main symbols sz that are the combination of the big wins are stopped and displayed on the effective line of the ready-to-win state) is high. It can be visually suggested to the user. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which type of main symbol sz establishes the ready-to-win state, and to enhance the presentation effect.

Similarly, as shown in FIG. 203(b), the image data corresponding to the mountain main pattern sz includes nine types of mode patterns (elephant, lion, dugong, rhinoceros, peacock, bear, wild boar, mouse, and snake). , image data (D1 to D9) representing main symbols with numbers "1 to 9" are respectively stored. The main pattern image data D1 to D9 are stored in advance in the character storage area 234a2 corresponding to the order in which they are actually displayed. Therefore, when reading the image data corresponding to the main pattern, it is sufficient to read the image data D1 in order and store them in the third pattern area 235d.

Then, similarly to the case where the sea background is displayed, the symbol row Z1 and the symbol row Z3 (see FIG. 122(a)), that is, nine symbol rows that are stopped and displayed in the ready-to-reach state are displayed. (main symbols corresponding to the image data D1 to D9), while the symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 122(a)), that is, the symbol row that is variably displayed during the ready-to-win state is formed. , 10 main patterns. Specifically, the nine main symbols (main symbols corresponding to the image data D1 to D9) forming the above-described symbol row Z1 are modified main symbols (image data The main symbols corresponding to DA) are added to form a symbol row Z2. In the symbol row Z2, after the main symbols sz with the number 9 pass, the main symbols sz with the number 4 pass, and then the main symbols sz with the number 1 pass. Configured for variable display. As a result, the main symbol sz of the specific type (the main symbol with the number 4 in this control example) can be passed a plurality of times before the variable display of the symbol row completes one round. When the ready-to-win state is established for the main symbols sz of , the possibility of winning the jackpot is high (the possibility that the main symbols sz that are the combination of the big wins are stopped and displayed on the effective line of the ready-to-win state) is high. It can be visually suggested to the user. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which type of main symbol sz establishes the ready-to-win state, and to enhance the presentation effect.

Further, in the second control example, the image data corresponding to the main symbol sz is read from the character storage area 234a2 and stored in the third symbol row area 235g as symbol row data for displaying the symbol row. Configure. That is, among the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, main symbol row image data corresponding to the main symbol (image data in which each main symbol sz is displayed at intervals skipping the display position of the sub symbol fz) is generated for each symbol row. and stored in the third symbol row area 235g. Then, using this main symbol row image data, the main symbol sz is variably displayed on the main symbol layer sr. With this configuration, the number of pieces of image data used for display control can be reduced compared to the case where the image data for each symbol is variably displayed, so the processing load for display control can be reduced.

Further, as described above, in the second control example, among the symbols forming the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the main symbol sz and the sub-symbol fz can be independently variably displayed. Therefore, even if a plurality of main symbols sz included in each symbol row are formed by one image data (main symbol row image data) and displayed in a variable manner, various variations can be achieved by varying the variable display mode of the sub symbols fz. A variable display can be implemented. Therefore, even if the number of pieces of image data used for display control is reduced, it is possible to prevent the production effect from deteriorating.

Further, among the third symbols forming each symbol row, the main symbol sz, which is identification information for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol, is displayed in a variable manner for each symbol row using the main symbol row image data. Since the sub-symbol fz, which is the identification information that does not indicate the lottery result of the special symbol, is configured to execute the variable display for each symbol, the main symbol sz that indicates the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed. By varying the content of the variable display of the sub symbol fz without changing the content of the variable display, various variable performances can be executed. That is, in order to diversify the variable display effect of the third symbol, the main symbol sz whose display mode of the stop display is predetermined is changed to the content of the variable display of the sub symbol fz while executing the predetermined variable display. Various variable performances can be executed by making it variable. Therefore, it is possible to make the variable display effect of the third symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol reliable and easy with rich variations.

In this second control example, one image data (main symbol row image data) has all the main symbols sz forming the symbol row. Of the symbols sz (each main symbols sz with numbers 1 to 9), a normal main that generates only a symbol row of some main symbols sz (for example, normal main symbols sz with even numbers) The symbol row image data and the probability variation main symbol row image data for generating only the symbol rows of the remaining main symbols sz (for example, probability variation main symbols sz with odd numbers attached) are stored in the third symbol row area 235g. Alternatively, the stored image data may be used to variably display the main pattern sz on the main pattern layer sr.

In this case, for example, when the lottery result of the target special symbol lottery is a probability variable jackpot, that is, when the combination indicating the jackpot is stopped using the main symbols sz with odd numbers attached, It is possible to vary the contents of the variable display using the normal main symbol row image data while executing the predetermined variable display only for the variable display using the probability variable main symbol row image data. Specifically, the variable display using the normal main symbol row image data is executed at a higher speed than the variable display using the probability variable main symbol row image data, and the player can display the probability variable main symbol sz with an odd number. It may be configured so that only the As a result, in the third symbol variation this time, only the probability variation main symbol sz is variably displayed, and only the probability variation main symbol sz is stopped and displayed, that is, the normal symbol (main symbol with an even number) is stopped and displayed. The player can be notified that the jackpot cannot normally be won without being hit.

Further, when using a configuration in which the image data forming the main symbol sz is divided into the normal main symbol row image data and the probability variation main symbol row image data, the main symbol row image data is usually used. The normal main pattern layer (layer) that displays the pattern and the probability change main pattern layer (layer) that displays the probability change main pattern using the probability change main pattern row image data are configured to be different, and the special pattern lottery Depending on the result, it is determined whether to display the main symbol sz displayed in the normal main symbol layer or the probability variable main symbol layer (whether to enable (turn on) the display of each layer). It may be configured to Further, as in the first control example described above, the variable display control may be executed using the image data for each symbol without generating the symbol row image data forming the symbol row.

Next, with reference to FIG. 203(c), the content of the image data of the sub-symbol fz will be described. FIG. 203(c) is a diagram schematically showing the image data of the sub-symbol fz pre-stored in the character storage area 234a2. This image data is stored in advance in the character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114, and when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on or when the background mode transition is executed, the character storage area The corresponding image data is read out from 234a2 and stored in the third pattern area 235d of the resident video RAM 235. FIG. The contents of the process of reading out the image data corresponding to each pattern and the process of storing in the third pattern area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 are the same as those of the first control example described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. do.

As shown in FIG. 203(c), in the character storage area 234a2 of the second control example, a normal sub-symbol fz imitating a triangular mark (see FIG. 122(b)) is stored as image data of the sub-symbol fz. image data SD1, image data SD2 of a sub-symbol fz for preview effect imitating bubbles, and image data SD3 of a special sub-symbol fz imitating the number 16 are stored at least. Although omitted in FIG. 202(c), the sub-symbol fz for the preview effect is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the set background mode. The sub-symbol fz for the advance notice effect imitating the bubble shown is the sub-symbol fz used when the sea background is set. Therefore, the image data (not shown) of the sub-symbol fz (not shown) imitating leaves for the preliminary announcement effect is stored in advance in the character storage area 234a2 as the sub-symbol fz used when the mountain background is set. stored.

Here, in the second control example, only the sub-symbol fz not showing the result of the special symbol lottery among the third symbols variably displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the sub-symbol layer fr. The sub-pattern fz is independently displayed on the main-pattern layer sr according to a predetermined fluctuation pattern (variation time, stop display position), and the sub-pattern fz is displayed on the third pattern display device. It is constructed so that it can be variably displayed on the display surface of 81 . Therefore, various variable performances using the sub-symbol fz can be easily executed without changing the variable display contents of the main symbol sz. Also, when various variable effects are executed using the sub-symbol fz, even if some of them are displayed overlapping the main symbol sz, the main symbol layer sr is preferentially displayed over the sub-symbol layer fr. Since the main symbols sz are arranged in such a manner, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the main symbols sz.

In the second control example, various variable effects are executed as variable effects using the sub-symbol fz in addition to the reach line notice effects described with reference to FIGS. 202(b) and 202(c). For example, the sub symbol fz is switched to the display mode for the advance notice effect using the image data SD2, and at the start of the variable display of the third symbol, the variation direction of the main symbol sz (for example, leftward) A notice effect at the start of fluctuation that is displayed in the opposite direction (right direction), and a part of the sub pattern fz are switched to a special display mode using image data SD3, and the third pattern (main pattern sz, sub It is possible to execute a jackpot type suggestion production that suggests a jackpot type according to the number and arrangement of sub-symbols fz (sub-symbol fz imitating the number 16) in a special display mode that are stopped when the fluctuation of the pattern fz) stops. Configure.

In this way, the identification information (sub-design fz) different from the identification information (main design sz) indicating the result of the special design lottery, and the identification information (main design sz) indicating the result of the special design lottery fluctuates. To make a player pay attention to the variably displayed sub-symbol fz by making it possible to execute various variable performances using identification information (sub-symbol fz) capable of being variably displayed during the display period. can be done.

Further, in the second control example, unlike the variable display control of the main symbol sz, the variable display control of the sub symbol fz is executed for each symbol. To easily execute control for switching the display mode of only a part (for example, only the vicinity of a main symbol sz that is finally stopped and displayed) to a display mode for variable performance among a plurality of sub-symbols fz displayed. can be done. In addition, normally, the number of sub-symbols fz displayed between the main symbols sz can be two or more, or only some of the sub-symbols fz can be prevented from being displayed. can be done.

Further, the timing of changing the display mode of the sub-symbol fz may be the start timing of the special symbol variation, or may be the timing when the special symbol indicating that the jackpot has been won is stopped and displayed.

Finally, with reference to FIG. 203(d), the contents of each image data used for the variation main symbol in the second control example will be described. FIG. 203(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of image data corresponding to various images used for the main symbol for variation. This main symbol for variation is the tenth main symbol provided in the symbol row Z2, that is, the symbol row that is variably displayed during the ready-to-win state, and is stored in the character storage area 234a2. Of the display data, it is the main pattern for which the image data DA is used.

Conventionally, when the identification information (third pattern) for indicating the result of the special pattern lottery is variably displayed, and the specific identification information is stopped and displayed, the result of the special pattern lottery is a big win. . In this case, a variable effect is executed to prompt the player whether or not the identification information stopped and displayed is the specific identification information. Here, generally, a variable performance is executed using a plurality of symbol sequences in which a plurality of types of identification information are formed in a specific order. Specifically, in a specific order, a variable effect is executed using a plurality of symbol sequences in which a plurality of identification information (for example, main symbol sz) with numbers 1 to 9 are formed.

In the gaming machine configured in this way, in order to enhance the effect of the third symbol variation, a variation effect that varies the display mode of the third symbol during the variable display is executed, but the identification information ( 3rd pattern), if the numbers 1 to 9 attached to the identification information, that is, if the specific information for indicating the result of the special pattern lottery is changed, for example, 1 to 9 In spite of the fact that the variation display was performed using the nine third symbols to which each number was attached, the third symbol to which the number of 5 was attached was replaced by the third symbol to which the number of 6 was attached during the variation. When switching to 3 patterns, the 3rd pattern to which the number 6 is attached disappears, so that the player is distrustful of changing the result of the special pattern lottery during the variable display of the 3rd pattern. There was a fear that it might give off a feeling.

Also, for example, nine third symbols with numbers 1 to 9 are used to execute the variable display, and a third third symbol with the number 6 is newly added on the way, for a total of 10 symbols. When switching to the variable display using the third symbol, it is necessary to execute display control to cope with the increase in the number of the third symbols to be displayed in a variable manner, and the control content is difficult. There was a danger that it would turn into something.

On the other hand, in this control example, 10 main symbols are formed by the main symbols numbered 1 to 9 and the change main symbols. Therefore, it is possible to change the display mode of the main symbols without changing the number of the main symbols forming the symbol row while leaving the various symbols with the numbers 1 to 9 attached. Further, even if the display mode of the main pattern for change is changed to various display modes, the number of main patterns forming the pattern row Z2 does not change, so the display control for the pattern row Z2 is easily executed. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 203(d), in the character storage area 234a2 of the second control example, the image data DA1 of the normal main symbol sz with the number 4 attached as the image data of the main symbol for change; Image data DA2 of the normal main design sz with 7, image data DA3 of the V main design sz imitating the letter V, image data DA4 of the special main design sz imitating the number 16, and disappointing main design sz imitating the number 16. At least image data DA4 of the pattern sz is stored. Although omitted in FIG. 202(d), the normal main symbol sz is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the set background mode. The normal main pattern sz imitating a "shark" and the normal main pattern sz imitating a "dugong" are main patterns sz used when a sea background is set. Therefore, in the character storage area 234a2, image data (not shown) of a normal main pattern sz (not shown) simulating a "rhinoceros" or a "wild boar" is stored as a normal main pattern sz used when a mountain background is set. not shown) are also stored in advance.

Here, in the variable display effect of the third pattern in the normal state, the main pattern for change using the image data DA1 is displayed in the pattern row Z2, and when the special pattern lottery wins the jackpot, it is displayed. In a part of the special symbol lottery, or in a very small part of the case where the special symbol lottery is lost and won, the main symbol for change using the image data DA2 is displayed in the symbol row Z2. That is, the change main symbol sz imitating a "shark" with the number 4 is displayed variably at the normal time, so that the main symbol suggesting winning a jackpot (main symbol with an even number) is 5. 5 main symbols (main symbols with odd numbers attached) indicating probability variable jackpot winning, and a total of 10 main symbols forming a pattern row Z2, when a special symbol lottery is won Or, in a small part of the case where the special symbol lottery is lost and won, the main symbol sz for change imitating the "dugong" with the number 7 is displayed variably, so that the normal jackpot is won. There are 4 main symbols (main symbols with even numbers) to suggest, 6 main symbols (main symbols with odd numbers) indicating probability variation jackpot winning, and a total of 10 main symbols. will be formed.

As a result, the special symbol lottery that is currently being executed may have won a big win (probability variable big win) that is advantageous to the player. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation. In addition, as a condition for using the change main symbol sz imitating the “dugong” with the number 7, it is more likely to be established when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win than when it is other than that (loss). It should be easy, and it may be configured not to be used when the result of the special symbol lottery is out. In addition, among the cases of winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery, the case of winning the probability variable jackpot is preferably used more easily than the case of winning the normal jackpot. As a result, it is possible to associate the different numbers (even number, odd number) of the main symbols in appearance with the rate of winning the probability variable jackpot, and to provide an easy-to-understand game.

In addition, the V main symbol sz shown in the image data DA3 is a display mode that is not normally displayed, and is used as a change main symbol when a special condition is satisfied during the variable display of the third symbol (main symbol). is what is displayed. This V main symbol sz is used as a general-purpose main symbol that is combined to indicate a big win when stopped and displayed on the active line in the ready-to-win state regardless of the type of the main symbol sz in the ready-to-win state. By using the general-purpose main symbols in this manner, for example, even when the main symbols that form a combination for winning a big hit pass on the effective line in the ready-to-win state, the symbol row Z2 does not have to wait for one more turn. , it is possible to expect that the third symbol (main symbol) will be stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot winning.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, in the variable display effect of the third symbol, the normal main symbol (main symbol sz with an even number) and the probability variable main symbol (main symbol sz with an odd number) In the double reach state, when the V main symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line of each overlapping reach state, it is indicated that the main symbol on the side advantageous to the player wins the jackpot. Good to configure. As a result, even if the V main symbol is variably displayed in the double reach state, it is possible to prevent the player from having a sense of distrust. Furthermore, in this control example, the V main symbol is used as the general-purpose main symbol, but this is not the only option, and when a combination indicating a jackpot winning using the V main symbol is stopped and displayed, it is executed this time. In addition to the jackpot game, a duplicate jackpot suggestion indicating that the right to execute at least one more jackpot game has already been acquired (there is winning information indicating jackpot winning in the reserved and stored special figure reservation) It may be used as a symbol, or it may be constructed so as to suggest that a plurality of execution rights of a big win game have already been obtained by simply displaying the V main symbol in a variable manner. With this configuration, when the V main symbol is variably displayed, the player can play the game while having a greater sense of expectation.

Next, the special main symbol sz shown in the image data DA4 and the disappointing main symbol sz shown in the image data DA5 are not used during the variable display of the third symbol, and the main symbol sz is a combination indicating a jackpot winning. It is a main pattern for change used in a promotion performance that can be executed after being stopped and displayed. Here, in this control example, when a special symbol lottery wins a jackpot, an advantageous jackpot game (probability variable jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player and a disadvantageous jackpot game that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous jackpot game ( a normal jackpot game) and, for example, a normal main symbol sz (a main pattern sz with an even number) suggesting that the normal jackpot game is executed when a variable probability jackpot is won. ), the type of the main symbol sz stopped is changed to a variable main symbol sz (main symbol sz with an odd number) It is configured to be able to execute promotion effects for changing to.

During this promotion performance, it is not a period for suggesting the result of the special pattern lottery (jackpot, loss) by using the main pattern sz, but a period for suggesting whether the jackpot won this time is a variable jackpot or a normal jackpot. Therefore, as the main symbol for change, the special main symbol sz shown in the image data DA4 indicating the probability variable jackpot, or the disappointing main symbol sz indicated in the image data DA5 indicating the normal jackpot is set. be. In this way, by varying the display mode of the main symbols for change in accordance with the timing at which the content to be notified to the player using the main symbols sz is changed, it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand. .

In addition, in the second control example, the type of the main symbol sz stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot winning by the promotion effect is configured to be promoted from the normal main symbol sz to the variable main symbol sz. However, without being limited to this, for example, the number of round games (number of rounds) to be executed during the jackpot game is changed from the main symbol showing the small number of rounds to the main symbol showing the number of rounds larger than the number of rounds. You may comprise so that the production|presentation promoted to may be performed. In this case, a plurality of image data are prepared in a display mode suggesting the number of rounds that can be executed as main symbols for change, and the main symbols for change are used according to the type of jackpot actually won. may be configured to determine the display mode of .

Further, in this control example, the main symbol row image data of the symbol row Z2 is generated using the nine main symbols sz numbered 1 to 9 and the above-described change main symbol sz, and the third symbol row is generated. Although it is configured to be stored in the area 235g, it is not limited to this. The main symbol sz for change is stored in the third symbol area 235d without being included in the main symbol row image data, and is stored in the third symbol area 235d as the sub symbol fz. Similarly, the variable display control may be executed for each symbol. With this configuration, it is possible to easily change the display mode of the main symbols for change sz in the once set symbol row Z2.

Further, apart from the main symbol layer sr on which the main symbol sz is displayed, a main symbol layer sr1 for alteration on which the main symbol sz for alteration is displayed is arranged, and the main symbol layer sr1 for alteration is used for alteration. It may be configured to display the main symbol sz. In this case, since the main pattern for change sz is displayed only in the pattern row Z2, the display area of the main pattern layer for change sr1 is set to be only the display area for the pattern row Z2, and the main pattern for change sz is displayed. should be arranged at a position where it is displayed with less priority than the main symbol layer sr and with priority over the sub-symbol layer fr. As a result, it is possible to prevent the main pattern for change sz from being hidden by the sub-symbol fz, and to display the main pattern for change sz without interfering with the display of the main pattern sz.

Each of the image data described above with reference to FIGS. 203(a) to (d) is part of the image data representing the third symbol (main symbol sz, sub-symbol fz) stored in the character storage area 234a2. and actually stores other image data. For example, each of the image data stored as the main symbol display data includes images corresponding to display modes indicating different actions (for example, a display mode in which the target creature is surprised or a display mode in which it is pleased). Data is stored, and when the result of the special symbol lottery is a specific lottery result (for example, a big win), the display mode of the stopped third symbol (main symbol sz) is changed by replacing the image data. can be changed.

Specifically, when the third symbol indicating that the jackpot has been won is stopped and displayed (when the "dugong" with the number of 7 is stopped and displayed in the normal display mode), the number of 7 is attached. It is configured to be switched to a special display mode in which the "dugong" has a surprised expression. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the winning of the jackpot even by the display mode of the third symbol. Also, the image data corresponding to this special display mode is configured to be used for a predetermined period (for example, 0.2 seconds) after the start of the third symbol variation, and immediately after the third symbol variation is started, It may be configured to execute an effect suggesting that the player has won a jackpot in the special symbol lottery.

Next, with reference to FIG. 204, the flow of variable display of the third symbol (main symbol sz, sub-symbol fz) in the second control example will be described. FIG. 204 is a diagram schematically showing the relationship between the variable display effects of the third symbols and the display contents of the symbol sequence displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. As shown in FIG. In FIG. 204, a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds indicating a big win is used as an example of the third symbol variation effect.

As shown in FIG. 204, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command indicating the start of the special symbol variation, based on the variation pattern (command) received this time, the variation display mode of the main symbol sz and the sub-symbol fz to decide. Specifically, in the variable display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182) executed in the main process (see FIG. 174) of the sound lamp control device 113, the presence or absence of the notice effect, the presence or absence of the ready-to-win effect, and the stop pattern are determined. and set the corresponding display command. After that, in the command output process (see S4102 in FIG. 174) executed in the main process (see FIG. 174) of the sound lamp control device 113, the set display command is transmitted to the display control device 114. FIG.

When the display control device 114 receives the display command set in the variable display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182), the variation pattern command executed in the command determination process of the display control device 114 (see S6302 in FIG. 190) In process 2 (see S6455 in FIG. 209), the received display command (variation pattern command) is analyzed, the variation display table is determined based on the analysis result, and the main pattern corresponding to the background mode currently set The image data of the main symbol row using sz (main symbol row image data) is read from the third symbol row area 235g, and the image data corresponding to the sub-symbol fz corresponding to the currently set background mode is read from the third symbol row. It reads out from the area 235g, generates a display image, and displays it on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Then, a normal variation period is set for 10 seconds after the third symbol variation effect is executed. This normal fluctuation period is a period in which all of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed, and is set as a period during which a transition to the background mode can be executed by the player operating the frame button 22. FIG. When the transition to the background mode is executed during the normal fluctuation period, each of the main symbols sz and the sub-symbols fz, which are displayed in a display mode corresponding to the background mode, is displayed in the background mode after the transition. Control is executed to switch to a display mode corresponding to the mode.

After that, when the pattern row Z1 and the pattern row Z3 are stopped and displayed to enter a ready-to-win state, a ready-to-win fluctuation period of 40 seconds is set, and a ready-to-win production that suggests (incites) whether the lottery result of this special pattern is a big win. is executed. During this reach fluctuation period, the transition to the background mode is not executed, and when the frame button 22 is operated, the lighting mode of various decorative LEDs mounted on the pachinko machine 10 is changed. A performance is performed. In addition, in part of the ready-to-win effect, it is configured to execute an operation effect in which an effective period (SW effective period) for validly determining the operation of the frame button 22 is set. By operating the button 22, an effect that is not performed when the frame button 22 is not operated is performed. Specifically, when the frame button 22 is operated, a confirmation notification to notify that the special symbol lottery of this time has been won as a jackpot, or a suggestive notification to indicate that there is a high possibility that the jackpot has been won is executed. configured as possible. By configuring in this way, it is possible to motivate the player who wants to grasp the lottery result of the special symbol to operate the frame button 22 willingly. In addition, since a performance that cannot be seen unless the frame button 22 is operated during the operation performance is provided, the player who wants to see various performances can be motivated to operate the frame button 22. .

As mentioned above, during the reach fluctuation period, it is configured so that the background mode transition is not executed, so the background mode during the execution of the reach production that suggests whether the lottery result of this special pattern is a jackpot is switched and the display mode of the third symbol is also switched accordingly, it is possible to suppress the ready-to-win effect that is difficult for the player to understand. In addition, since it is configured to execute the operation effect during the reach fluctuation period in which the background mode transition is not executed, for example, the variable effect (so-called hidden effect) that does not notify the player of the SW effective period set in the operation effect Even if the operation effect is settable, the player can be allowed to actively operate the frame button 22.例文帳に追加

In this case, on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, a notification mode for informing the player that it is a period in which the transition to the background mode is not executed The mode will not change" comment display), or a notification mode to notify the player that the hidden operation effect is being executed (for example, "If you press a button at some point during reach It is good to set a comment display of "A special effect will be executed." As a result, the player can be made to execute the operation performance with peace of mind.

Then, at the timing when the reach fluctuation period ends, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the normal main symbol sz (the main symbol sz with an even number) among the combinations of the main symbols sz indicating the winning of the jackpot. After that, a promotion effect is executed for promoting the normal main symbol sz that has won the jackpot to a probability variable main symbol (main symbol sz with an odd-numbered number). When this promotion effect is executed, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot winning is a probability variable jackpot, and based on the determination result, the display mode of the sub-symbol fz and the main symbol sz for change are determined. The display mode of the pattern sz is determined. Then, the promotion performance using the symbol row for promotion performance is executed using the promotion fluctuation period (10 seconds).

Here, as the symbol row for promotion effect, for example, the display mode of the main symbol sz for change is the display mode using the image data DA4 (see FIG. 203(d)), and the display mode of the sub-symbol fz is the image data SD3. (see FIG. 203(c)), in addition to the normal variable main symbol sz (main symbol sz with an odd number), an advantageous jackpot that is advantageous to the player Since a large number of symbols indicating winning can be displayed, it is possible to visually inform the player that there is a high possibility of being promoted to a probability variable jackpot in this promotion presentation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 205, the contents of the variable effect executed in the second control example will be described. FIG. 205 shows an effect example of the variation effect of the third symbol executed for the same variation pattern command, and FIG. FIG. 202(b) is a diagram schematically showing the flow of the normal effect, and FIG. 202(c) is the flow of the reach line notice effect (see FIG. 202(b)). FIG. 202(d) is a diagram schematically showing the flow of the advance notice effect in which the sub-symbol fz fluctuates in a direction different from normal.

As shown in FIG. 205 (a), when a variation pattern command indicating a variation pattern in which a variation time of 60 seconds is set is set in the main control device 110, the reach effect is performed in the voice ramp control device 113 is set. Furthermore, using the period until the ready-to-win effect is executed, various advance notice effects using the sub-symbol fz are executed. In the second control example, as described above, the main symbol sz and the sub-symbol fz forming each symbol row are configured to be independently variably displayable. By varying only the variation pattern of the sub-symbol fz while variably displaying the main symbol sz in a specific variation pattern according to a command, various variation performances (announcement performance) can be executed.

Specifically, in the effect A shown in FIG. 205(b), similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above, the main symbol sz and the sub-symbol fz are synchronized with the third symbol variation display (FIG. 202 (a) reference) is executed, and the normal pattern which becomes a reach state is shown. In this way, by controlling the display so as to synchronize the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz, which are variably displayed independently, the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz appear to fluctuate as one pattern row. It can be made to appear to be displayed.

Next, in the effect B shown in FIG. 205(c), the display of the main symbol layer sr is set off (set to non-display) for a predetermined period (15 seconds) from the start of the fluctuation of the third symbol. , during which the reach line notice effect for stopping and displaying the variable display of the sub symbol fz is executed. That is, the same display control as in 205(a) described above is executed for the main symbol sz, but the main symbol layer sr is set to non-display during the first half period (15 seconds) of the normal fluctuation period. Therefore, it is configured so that the player cannot visually recognize the variable display of the main symbol sz.

Then, using the first half period (15 seconds) of the normal fluctuation period, the sub symbol fz is variably displayed (see FIG. 202 (b)), and at the end timing of the first half period (15 seconds) of the normal fluctuation period, the sub By stopping and displaying the symbol fz, the position where the main symbol sz is stopped and displayed in the current third symbol variation display is displayed (see FIG. 202(c)). After that, in the latter half period (15 seconds) of the normal fluctuation period, the display of the main symbol layer sr is set to ON (set to be displayed), and the main symbol is displayed using the latter half period (15 seconds) of the normal fluctuation period. The variable display of sz is executed, and the reach state is reached 30 seconds after the start of the variable, as in FIG. 205(b).

That is, when the effect B shown in FIG. 205(c) is executed, that is, when the reach line notice effect is executed, the main symbol sz is stop-displayed before the main symbol sz is stop-displayed. Since it is possible to notify the player only of the position where the third symbol changes, it is possible to determine in advance whether the third symbol variation display will be a double reach, a single reach, or not a reach (from the start of the variation of the third symbol). 15 seconds later). Therefore, when the secondary symbol fz is stopped and displayed at a position where the main symbol sz cannot be in the ready-to-win state with respect to the normal pattern (see FIG. 205(b)) which takes 30 seconds to grasp whether or not to reach the ready-to-win state. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the period during which the player has excessive expectations.

Further, when the sub-symbol fz is stop-displayed at a position where the main symbol sz can be in the ready-to-win state, the player can enjoy the remaining fluctuation time while expecting which main symbol sz will cause the ready-to-win state. can let In the second control example, when the sub-symbol fz is stopped and displayed at a position where the main symbol sz can be in the ready-to-win state, the sub-symbol fz is stopped. At the display timing, it is possible for the player to easily determine whether or not the current third symbol variation is in a ready-to-win state.

Finally, in the effect C shown in FIG. 205(d), the main symbol sz is normally displayed in the same way as the effect A described above, and the sub symbol fz is displayed for a predetermined period (3 second) shows an effect pattern in which an effect different from the effect A is executed. Specifically, the display mode using the image data SD2 (see FIG. 203(c)) is set as the display mode of the sub symbol fz displayed at the start of the variation, and the variation display direction (left direction) of the main symbol is set. A sub-symbol reverse variation display is performed to variably display the sub-symbol fz in the opposite direction (right direction), and thereafter, a variation display using the normal sub-symbol fz is performed in synchronism with the variation display of the main symbol sz. It is a performance pattern.

Like the effect pattern shown in the effect C, by making the variable display direction of the main symbol sz and the variable display direction of the sub-symbol fz different at the timing when the third symbol variable display is started, the player can , the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz are formed by the same pattern row, and the player who has recognized that the fluctuation display is only in the same direction is not recognized. Since the sub-symbol fz is variably displayed in a state in which it is not displayed, it is possible to provide an unexpected effect.

As described above, in the second control example, the main symbol sz and the sub-symbol fz are configured to be independently variable and displayable, and correspond to the variation pattern command set based on the lottery result of the special symbol. The variable display mode of the main pattern sz is set by the main pattern sz, and by varying only the variable display mode of the sub-pattern fz without varying the variable display mode of the main pattern sz, various variable performances can be executed. there is By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the result of the variable display of the main symbol sz is different from the lottery result of the special symbol.

Further, when the sub-symbol fz is first variably displayed, for example, the sub-symbol fz is displayed in an enlarged manner, and variably displayed such that the sub-symbol fz covers the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. Alternatively, the variable display position of the main symbol sz and the symbol type may be varied.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the display control device in the second control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in this second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 206 to 208. FIG. FIG. 206 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example, the content of the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 is changed from that of the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example. The difference is that a third symbol row area 235g is added to the resident video RAM 235. Other than that, it is the same as the first control example described above. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the character storage area 234a2 of the second control example, as described above with reference to FIG. . are identical. The details of each image data newly stored in the second control example have been described above with reference to FIG. 203, so description thereof will be omitted.

The third symbol row area 235g reads a plurality of image data of the main symbols sz stored in the character storage area 234a2, generates one image data (main symbol row image data) as a symbol row in advance, and stores the generated main symbol. This is a storage area for storing row image data. When the main symbol sz is to be variably displayed on the main symbol layer sr, the main symbol row image data stored in the third symbol row area 235g is read out and displayed based on the drawing contents specified in the display data table. By variably setting the position coordinates, the main pattern sz is variably displayed. By configuring in this way, the number of image data used when the main symbols sz are variably displayed can be reduced compared to the case of using image data generated in units of the main symbols sz. Processing load can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 207, the contents of the display data table used in the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example will be described. FIG. 207 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this control example, 20 milliseconds) for which one frame of image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content of an image (drawing content) for one frame. In the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example, the drawing contents related to the third symbol (main symbol sz, sub-symbol fz) are added to the display data table (see FIG. 153) in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above. They are different in that they are different, and otherwise identical. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 207, in the drawing contents of the display data table, the sprite type is specified for each sprite, which is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, translucency, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are changed over time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the back face type, which is information for specifying the back face image type. The type of back surface is to display either back surface A or B corresponding to the background mode selected by the player (either "sea mode" or "mountain mode"), or to display a different back surface from A or B. Information specifying whether to display the back image is described. In addition, when specifying that a back image different from back faces A and B is to be displayed, the back face type also includes information specifying which back face image is to be displayed.

When the type of the back surface specifies that one of the back surfaces A and B is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back surfaces A and B as the object to be drawn. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the lapse of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear image different from the rear faces A and B, the rear face image to be displayed is specified from the rear face type.

In this control example, only the back face type is specified as the drawing content of the back face image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, and the image drawing based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81) according to the back surface type. display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. information indicating whether or not the background image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

Next, the types of sprites for displaying the third symbols (main symbol sz, sub-symbol fz) on the third symbol display device 81 will be described. First, the sub-symbols (sub-symbol 1, sub-symbol 2, . . . ) are set with display position coordinates indicating the stop positions of the sub-symbols fz stopped and displayed in the preceding variable effect. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop position of the sub symbol fz in the previous variable performance. Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 202(a), unlike the main symbols sz, the sub-symbols fz are not given specific numbers, and all the sub-symbols fz are displayed in a common display mode. Therefore, only by setting the display position coordinates indicating the position of each sub-symbol fz stopped and displayed in the previous variable performance, the variable performance is easily started from the stop position of the sub-symbol fz in the previous variable performance. can do.

A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. By specifying the storage location of the image data used for display in the drawing list according to the display mode of each sub-symbol fz to be displayed, each sub-symbol fz is displayed in the corresponding display mode. Here, if the display mode of each sub-symbol fz that is stopped and displayed in the previous variable effect and the display mode of the sub-symbol fz that is used in the current variable effect are different, the start timing of the variable effect, that is, , the display mode of the sub-symbol fz may be changed from the drawing information corresponding to the address "0001H" of the display data table, or the display mode of the sub-symbol fz in the previous variable effect may be used to vary. It may be configured such that the presentation is started, and the display mode of the sub-symbol fz is varied during high-speed fluctuations that make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the display mode of the sub-symbol fz.

In the former case, before the variable effect is started, that is, at the timing when the sub symbol fz is stopped, the sub symbol fz is displayed in the display mode used in the current variable effect, so the variation to be executed from now on A player can be made to grasp the performance contents of the performance in advance, and the performance effect can be enhanced. In the latter case, the display mode of the sub-symbol fz can be changed at a timing that is difficult for the player to notice, so that the display mode of the sub-symbol fz can be changed smoothly without causing the player to feel uncomfortable. can.

Next, of the types of sprites for displaying the third symbols (main symbol sz, sub-symbol fz) on the third symbol display device 81, sprites for displaying the main symbol sz will be described. The main symbol rows (main symbol row 1, main symbol row 2, etc.) store symbol row type offset information as symbol row type information for specifying the main symbol sz of the third symbol to be displayed. there is This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective main symbols sz. Instead of directly specifying the type of the main symbol sz, the offset information is specified because the display of the main symbol sz in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the previous variable effect and the variable effect to be performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

In addition, since each main symbol sz is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110 can be displayed in the main symbol sz. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to the main symbols sz, the main symbols sz to be displayed can be easily identified from the offset information.

In addition, in the symbol offset information, the main symbol sz fluctuates at high speed during a predetermined time period in which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the main symbol sz is being variably displayed at high speed, the main symbol sz is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the main pattern sz is interrupted, the player does not recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

Further, in the second control example, the image data of each main symbol sz displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be one image data (main symbol row image data) for each symbol row. there is For example, for each main pattern sz with numbers 1 to 9 that are variably displayed in the pattern row Z1, the main pattern sz with the number 3 is the head of the image data, and then the main pattern sz. A main pattern with a predetermined interval (the interval at which the sub-pattern fz is displayed) so that the numbers attached to are in the order of "3 → 2 → 1 → 9 → 8 → 7 → 6 → 5 → 4". Row image data is generated and stored in the third symbol row area 235g. By varying the display position coordinates of the main symbol row image data based on the passage of time, an image in which only the main symbols sz forming the symbol row Z1 are variably displayed is displayed on the main symbol layer sr. Configure. The size (coordinate range) of the display area formed on the main symbol layer sr is set to a size that cannot display all the images included in the main symbol row image data. ), the size is set such that a maximum of three main symbols sz can be displayed.

Therefore, based on the offset information included in the symbol row type offset information, the type of the main symbol sz to be displayed on the main symbol layer sr is specified, and the specified main symbol sz is made to correspond to the position to be displayed. A display range of the symbol row image data is determined, and each main symbol sz is displayed within the display range. In this way, when the variable display is executed without changing the arrangement relationship of the main symbols sz, as in the first control example described above, image data is provided for each main symbol sz, and the previous Based on the offset information of the stop pattern of the main pattern sz in the variable performance, the pattern type of each main pattern sz displayed when starting the current variable performance is specified, and then the content of the variable performance to be executed. Accordingly, rather than variably setting the display positions (display position coordinates) of the image data of the main symbols sz while synchronizing them, a symbol row in which a plurality of main symbols sz are defined in a predetermined order and at predetermined intervals. The load of the display control process can be reduced in the case where the image data is generated and the variation effect is executed using the symbol row image data.

When the display control method of the second control example is used, it is difficult to change the arrangement of the main symbols sz or to change the arrangement interval of the main symbols sz. As in the first control example described above, it is better to perform display control for variably displaying each main symbol sz using image data corresponding to each main symbol sz. In addition, by combining the configuration of the first control example and the configuration of the second control example described above, image data for each symbol is used only for a specific main symbol sz, and a plurality of main symbols other than the specific main symbol are used. Alternatively, the main symbol row image data may be used. In this case, for a specific main pattern, it is possible to easily perform control such as varying the image data to be used or varying the degree of change in the display position (variable display speed), and special display control. , the processing load of display control when variably displaying the plurality of main symbols sz can be reduced with respect to the plurality of main symbols sz always displayed with synchronized variable display contents.

In this second control example in which one image data (main symbol row image data) is generated for each symbol row, for each of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z2, and the symbol row Z3 (for each symbol row ) Different drawing contents are set, and for the symbol row Z2, the number 4 is attached to each main symbol sz to which the numbers 1 to 9 that are variably displayed are attached. The main pattern sz is the head of the image data, and then the numbers attached to the main pattern sz are arranged in the order of "4 → 5 → 6 → 7 → 8 → 9 → 1 → 2 → 3". Main symbol row image data with intervals (intervals at which sub-symbols fz are displayed) are generated and stored in the third symbol row area 235g. Further, for the symbol row Z3, the main symbols sz to which the number 1 is attached are at the head of the image data for each of the main symbols sz to which the numbers 1 to 9 are attached which are variably displayed. A predetermined interval (the interval at which the secondary symbols fz are displayed) is provided so that the numbers attached to the main symbols sz are in the order of "1→2→3→4→5→6→7→8→9". Main symbol row image data is generated and stored in the third symbol row area 235g.

Using the main symbol row image data corresponding to each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 constructed in this way, display control is performed so that all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed in the left direction, whereby the main symbol image layer is displayed. In sr, only the main symbols sz displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed. As described above, the main symbol sz located at the head of the main symbol row image data is different for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. As a result, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on (initial state), the central position of the third symbol display device 81, that is, on the activated line L2 (see FIG. 122(a)), "3 A main symbol sz with a number ".4.1" is stopped and displayed. In other words, in the initial state in which no variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110, each main symbol row image data is configured to have a different number attached to the main symbol sz, which is the leading position of each main symbol row image data. To stop and display a combination of main patterns sz different from a combination for a big win only by performing initial display setting so that the head position of main pattern row image data forming pattern rows Z1 to Z3 is on an effective line L2. , and the display control in the initial state can be simplified.

Next, with reference to FIG. 208, the contents of the drawing list in this second control example will be described. FIG. 208 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example. This drawing list differs from the drawing list of the above-described first control example (see FIG. 155) in that the type of pride for displaying the third symbol is changed. be. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. sub-symbol 2,...), main symbol row (main symbol row 1, main symbol row 2,...) effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), character (character 1, character 2,...) . . , reserved ball number pattern 1, reserved ball number pattern 2, . . . , error pattern). The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address.

That is, the drawing instruction content for the image of the sub-symbol fz includes information indicating the resident video RAM 235 as the RAM type in which the image data is stored, and a plurality of information corresponding to the sub-symbol fz stored in the third design area 235d. The address indicating the image data used for the current drawing instruction is described from among the image data SD1 to SD3 (see FIG. 203(c)). The drawing instruction contents for the image of the main symbol sz include information indicating the resident video RAM 235 as the RAM type in which the image data is stored, and the main symbol row stored in the third symbol row area 235g. The address indicating the image data used for the current drawing instruction from among the plurality of image data (main symbol row image data) is described.

<Regarding control processing contents in the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 209 and 210, the contents of control processing in this second control example will be described. The second control example differs from the above-described first control example at least in that the content of the control processing executed by the display control device 114 is different. In addition, the content of the type of effect mode of the variable effect set by the sound lamp control device 113 is also made different. The contents other than that are the same, and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, in the second control example, the content of the third symbol variation effect mode set by the sound ramp control device 113 is changed. Specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. Of the three patterns, only the sub-symbol fz is configured to be able to set a display command for executing various variable effects. However, the setting method of the display command corresponding to the variable effect is the same as the variable display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182) of the first control example described above, and only the specific setting contents are different. , the detailed description of which will be omitted. In addition, since the contents of various variable effects executed for the sub-symbol fz executed in the second control example have also been described above with reference to FIG. 205, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of control processing executed by the display control device 114 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing 2 (S6455). This variation pattern command process 2 (S6455) executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113, and is the display control device of the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above. For the variation pattern command process (see S6405 in FIG. 191) executed in 114, the types of the change main symbol sz and the sub symbol fz used during the current variation effect are determined, and the resident video RAM 235 The difference is that processing for storing in various storage areas is added. Since the other processing contents are the same, the same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

In the variation pattern command process 2 (S6455), first, the shaded variation pattern command (variation pattern command for display) is analyzed (S6501), and the variation pattern command (main controller (S6551). Then, when it is determined that it is a big hit change (S6551: Yes), it is then determined whether information indicating the effect mode of the promotion effect is included in the current display variation pattern command (S6552), and the promotion effect If it is determined that the information indicating the effect mode is included (S6552: Yes), the main symbol for change corresponding to the command is determined as the main symbol for variation in the dedicated symbol row for promotion, and the main symbol for change is moved to the third symbol row area. It stores and moves to S6554. Also, in the processing of S6551, if the current variation is not a big hit variation, or if it is determined that the promotion effect is not executed in the processing of S6552, then the process proceeds to S6554, and analysis is performed in the processing of S6501. Based on the received information, it is determined whether or not information for executing the notice effect (see FIG. 205) using the sub-symbol fz is included in the variation pattern received this time, and the notice effect of the sub-symbol fz is determined. If it is determined to be executed (S6554 in FIG. 209: Yes), the display mode of the sub-symbol fz used in the current sub-symbol advance notice effect is determined, and the image data corresponding to the determined display mode is stored in the character ROM 234. is read from the character storage area 234a2 and stored in the third pattern area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 (S6555).

After that, the variation display data table corresponding to the received variation pattern command is determined, the display variation pattern for 0 is set in the display, and the variation pattern command executed by the display control device 114 of the first control example described above The same processing from S6502 to S6505 as the processing (see S6405 in FIG. 191) is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 210, the contents of the back image change command process 2 (S6469) will be described. FIG. 210 is a flow chart showing the contents of back image change command processing 2 . This background image change command process 2 (S6469) is performed when the background image change flag 233w is set to ON in contrast to the above-described background image change command process (see S6419 in FIG. 195(a)). The difference is that the type of the third pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) corresponding to the back image (background mode) is determined, and processing is added to store it in the third pattern area 235d and the third pattern row area 235g. ing. Since other processes are the same, the same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

When the back image change command process 2 (S6469) is executed, first, the back image change flag 233w is set to ON (S7001), and the third symbol (main symbol sz , sub-symbol fz) is determined, and image data corresponding to the determined type is stored in the third symbol area 235d and the third symbol row area 235g (S7002). After that, the back image determination flag 223x corresponding to the changed back image type is set to ON (S7051), and the process ends.

<Regarding Modified Example of Second Control Example>
Next, a modification of the second control example described above will be described with reference to FIG. In the second control example described above, the main pattern sz constituting the third pattern is displayed (drawn) on the main pattern layer sr, and the sub-symbol fz is displayed (drawn) on the sub-symbol layer fr. By synchronizing and controlling the display contents of the main symbol layer sr and the display contents of the sub-symbol layer fr, the main symbol sz and the sub-symbol fz are regularly changed in a specific order. Further, by variably setting only the display control contents for the sub-symbol fz, various variable performances can be performed without varying the variable display contents for the main symbol sz for showing the result of the special symbol lottery. configured to be executable.

On the other hand, in this modified example, the third pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) is displayed (drawn) on one layer in the same manner as in the above-described first control example, Furthermore, it is different in that a plurality (two) of layers are provided for displaying (drawing) the third pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz). By varying the contents of the display control of the third pattern displayed with respect to the two layers (the third pattern image A, the third pattern image B), a special variable effect can be executed. There is a difference. Other contents are the same as those of the second control example described above, and detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

Figure 211 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the display layer formed in the pachinko machine 10 of the modification of the second control example and the display screen, and Figure 211 (b) is a triple reach FIG. 202(c) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the effect, and FIG. 202(c) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the triple reach state is brought about by the triple reach effect.

As shown in FIG. 211(a), in the modification of the second control example, the third pattern layer A and the third pattern layer B are formed overlappingly as the layers in which the third pattern is displayed. , and the third pattern layer A is arranged in front of the third pattern layer B (on the near side from the player's line of sight). Although only the third pattern layer A and the third pattern layer B are shown in FIG. Each layer that displays is superimposed.

By synchronizing and executing the variable display of the third pattern for the third pattern layer A and the third pattern layer B, the appearance of the first control example shown in FIG. 125 ( The same variable display as the variable display of the third symbol shown with reference to b) is configured to be executable.

In this modified example configured as described above, the third symbol displayed on the third symbol layer A and the third symbol displayed on the third symbol layer B are displayed in the same manner as in the second control example described above. , can be independently variable display controlled, for example, as shown in FIG. In this state, it is possible to continue the third symbol variation of the third symbol layer A. In this state, depending on the result of the third symbol variation in the third symbol layer A, the number of the third symbols that are in the ready-to-win state increases, so the characters "Reach! Promotion chance" are displayed in the secondary display area Ds. .

Then, as shown in FIG. 211(c), when the double reach of "1" and "9" is established in the third symbol displayed on the third symbol layer A, three third symbols appear. becomes a “triple reach” in which the is in a reach state. In this way, by overlapping and variably displaying the third symbols using a plurality of layers, when the third symbols are variably displayed in one layer, the order of the symbol rows of the respective third symbols is changed. A variable presentation requiring variable display control can be easily executed, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In this way, when the variable display of the third pattern is made different for a plurality of third pattern layers, for example, the layer (third pattern layer A) that is preferentially displayed The 3rd pattern displayed on the screen is the true 3rd pattern for indicating the result of the special pattern lottery, and the 3rd pattern displayed on the non-prioritized layer (3rd pattern layer B) is the decoration The third pattern for the third pattern layer A is based on the variation pattern (variation pattern set by the main controller 110) set based on the lottery result of the special symbol. is determined, and on the audio ramp control device 113 side, based on the variation pattern of the third symbol of the determined third symbol layer A (based on the presence or absence of jackpot winning and the type of reach), the third symbol It is preferable to configure so as to determine the content of the variation effect of the third pattern displayed on the layer B. Then, it is preferable to configure so that different variable display control is executed between the third pattern layer A and the third pattern layer B when the jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery than when it is not. .

In addition, in this modified example, the description has been given of the variation effect in which the variation display of the third symbol layer A and the variation display of the third symbol layer B are completely different. It may be configured such that the start timing is shifted by 0.2 seconds, and thereafter, the variable performance for synchronizing the variable display contents is executed during the high-speed variation of the third symbol variation. In this way, by making the variable display of the third symbol layer A and the variable display of the third symbol layer B different only during a partial period of the variable effect, it is possible to give the player a slight sense of discomfort. It is possible to allow the player to draw more variable displays.

As described above, in the above-described second control example and the modification of the second control example, a symbol string composed of symbols including the main symbol sz having identification information for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol lottery Although it is configured to execute various display controls for each of the third symbols Z1 to Z3 (main symbol sz, sub-symbol fz), the display area on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 overlaps. Any pattern other than the pattern (third pattern) of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 may be provided as long as the pattern is dynamically displayed.

For example, during the execution of the third symbol variation, the special symbols not included in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may be dynamically displayed in the display areas overlapping the display areas of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. . Further, the above-mentioned special symbols may be dynamically displayed during the period in which the third symbol variation is being executed. The special symbols may be stopped or hidden during execution of the third symbol variation.

Even in such a configuration, the variation display mode (variation pattern) of the main symbol sz may be determined based on the result of the special symbol lottery. Similarly, it is possible to set a variation pattern for production. In addition, unlike the sub-symbol fz, the above-mentioned special symbols are not symbols included in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Even without it, the player does not feel uncomfortable. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the types of variation patterns that can be set than the sub-symbol fz, and to further enhance the performance effect.

In addition, it is preferable to configure the dynamic display mode of this special symbol to be different from the dynamic display mode of the above-described third symbol. 202(a)), the dynamic display direction of the special pattern is different from the dynamic display direction of the third pattern (for example, the right direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 202(a)). Good to configure. As a result, even if the special symbols are dynamically displayed in the display area that overlaps the display area of the third symbol variation display during the period in which the third symbol variation display is being performed, the player will not be able to dynamically display the special symbols. It is possible to notify in an easy-to-understand manner that the display has been executed.

In the above-described example, the dynamic display direction of the special symbols is the direction opposite to the dynamic display direction of the third symbol. , not in the horizontal direction, but in the vertical direction (the direction of moving up and down from the viewpoint in FIG. A direction of moving toward the side) or an oblique direction (a direction of moving toward an oblique side in which the movement line indicating the movement direction is shifted by an angle of less than 90 degrees). Furthermore, in the above-described example, in order to make it easy to understand that the variable display of the special symbols is executed during the third symbol variation, the dynamic display direction of the third symbols, the dynamic display direction of the special symbols, However, without being limited to this, by making the size of the dynamically displayed third symbol and the size of the special symbol different, the variable display of the special symbol is possible during the third symbol variation. The execution may be configured to be notified in an easy-to-understand manner. Furthermore, before the execution of the third symbol variation, the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed, or the third symbol variation is stopped and displayed (including a display state in which the player is swaying to the extent that it is difficult to identify). ), the dynamic display of special symbols may be executed.

On the other hand, as a technical concept opposite to the above example, dynamic The display direction and size may be the same. With this configuration, it is not possible to grasp that the dynamic display of the special symbols has been executed unless the various variable displays executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 are observed. The player who wants to know that the dynamic display of the special symbols has been executed can continue to be interested in various variable displays executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

In addition, as described above, unlike the third design, the special design does not have to be displayed all the time. Instead, for example, when the dynamic display of the special symbols is started, it may be configured to inform the player that there is a high possibility that the lottery result of the special symbols will win the jackpot. In this manner, by varying the timing (dynamic display start timing, stop display timing) for providing information indicating the lottery result of special symbols according to the type of symbols to be dynamically displayed, dynamic Since the timing at which the player should pay attention can be varied according to the various symbols to be displayed, the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, by starting the dynamic display in this way, it is suggested that the dynamic display will be executed when using a special symbol indicating that there is a high possibility of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery. It is preferable to display at least part of the special symbols on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 as the standby display mode. For example, when a special pattern in which a plurality of fish are flocking is used as the special pattern, only the fish displayed in the vicinity of the head of the special pattern on the fluctuation direction side may be displayed. good. By configuring in this way, the player can play the game while expecting the start of the dynamic display of the special symbols. In this case, it is preferable to display not all of the special symbols but some of them on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 . As a result, when the special symbol is displayed as the standby display mode, it is possible to prevent misunderstanding that the special symbol is already dynamically displayed.

Further, in the above-described second control example, the main symbol sz and the sub-symbol fz forming the third symbol are configured to be displayed on different layers, and the content of the display control executed for each layer is determined. By making them different, the variable display mode of the main symbol sz and the variable display mode of the sub-symbol fz are configured to be different. A first sub-design layer and a second sub-design layer are provided, and the sub-design fz displayed on the first sub-design layer overlaps with the sub-design fz displayed on the second sub-design layer. may be configured to be displayed as one, or may be configured so that only one of them is displayed. In addition, display control is performed so that the stop display positions of the sub-symbols fz displayed on a plurality of display layers are different, and then the reach line notice effect shown in FIG. may be configured to further limit the position at which is stopped and displayed.

In the second control example described above, the display layers for displaying one symbol (main symbol sz) and the other symbols (sub-symbol fz) constituting each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are made different, By configuring the display control to be executable for each display layer unit, it is configured to be able to execute various variable effects. The symbols may be displayed on the same display layer as long as different display control can be executed for each symbol type (main symbol sz, sub symbol fz) forming the row. In this case, when the display targets displayed as a result of each display control are duplicated, it is necessary to define in advance which display target is to be displayed, which complicates the display control process. It is possible to achieve the same effect as each effect explained in the control example.

Further, even in the case of using a configuration in which a plurality of display control results are displayed on the same display layer, a plurality of symbol types (main symbol sz, sub-symbol fz) constituting the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed. symbols, that is, symbols other than the third symbol dynamically displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols (for example, the result of the special symbol lottery is a specific result (jackpot In order to show that there is a high possibility of winning), various displays described in the above-described second control example are targeted for various symbols including decorative symbols that are dynamically displayed during a predetermined period during special symbol fluctuations. A control process may be executed.

In the second control example described above, when the background mode transition effect is executed as the operation effect, the display mode of the main symbol sz is switched to the display mode corresponding to the background mode after switching. , When the background mode transition effect is executed, not only the display mode of the main symbol sz but also the display mode of the sub-symbol fz may be switched. In this case, the image data corresponding to each background mode is stored as the image data of the secondary symbol fz stored in the character storage area 234a2, and when the background mode is switched, the image data corresponding to the background mode after switching is stored. is read out and stored in the third pattern area 235d.

In addition, when the background mode transition effect is executed as the operation effect, the result of the special symbol lottery being executed is discriminated, and the type of the sub symbol fz to be displayed after the background mode is switched is determined based on the discrimination result. can be Specifically, when the result of the special symbol lottery being executed is that the jackpot is won, the type of the sub-symbol fz that is more likely to be determined than when the jackpot is not won is displayed in imitation of "the number 16". It is preferable to provide a mode or a display mode imitating "V". By configuring in this way, by executing the background mode transition effect and switching the background mode, it is possible to easily predict the result of the special symbol lottery before the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed. , the player can be made to actively execute the operation effect.

Furthermore, the combination of the set background mode and the type of the sub-symbol fz to be displayed may change the possibility that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot winning. mode), when the type of sub-symbol fz (display mode for the sea mode) normally used is used in the second production mode (mountain mode), the special symbol lottery being executed wins a jackpot. It may be configured to indicate that there is a high possibility that the In this way, by executing an effect combining the background mode and the type of the sub-symbol fz, various effects can be executed without increasing the types of the sub-symbol fz.

In addition, in this control example, when the background mode transition effect is executed as the operation effect, the process of varying the display mode of the third symbol (main symbol sz, sub-symbol fz) is executed. Besides, the number and position of effective lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 122(a)) formed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 may be varied.

Furthermore, the reach line notice effect shown in FIGS. 202(a) and (b) is executed, and the background mode transition effect is executed in a state where the secondary symbol fz is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 202(b)). In this case, the stop display position of the main symbol sz announced in the reach line notice effect may be varied. Alternatively, the stop display position of the main symbol sz may be changed more easily than in the case of winning a big win, or conversely, the main symbol sz is more likely to be displayed in a case other than winning a big win than in the case of winning a big win. The stop display position may be configured to be easily variable.

<Third control example>
Next, the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 212 to 222. FIG. In the first control example described above, a specific area (V gate 65v) is formed in the variable winning device 65 that is opened during the jackpot game, and when the game ball passes through the specific area (V gate 65v) during the jackpot game , the variable probability state is set after the jackpot game ends.

Then, as shown in FIG. 120, the balls that have won the wide (opening width of 50 mm) big prize opening 65a are collected in one place using the first channel 65e1 and the fifth channel 65e5, and the second channel 65e2 is allowed to flow down to reach the V gate 65v. However, in the configuration of the variable winning device 65 of the first control example described above, the ball won from the left side of the variable winning device 65 (the upstream side of the first flow path 65e1), that is, the ball fired by the left-handed game is on the left side. When winning the variable winning device 65 after flowing down the area, the ball winning from the right side of the variable winning device 65 (upstream side of the fifth flow path 65e5), that is, the ball fired by the right-handed game is the right side area Since the timing of reaching the V gate 65 differs from the timing of winning in the variable winning device 65 from the timing of winning in the variable winning device 65 after flowing down, when the probability variable jackpot game is executed, Whether a left-handed game is played or a right-handed game is played, the ball can flow down the fourth flow path 65e4 so that the ball that has entered the variable winning device 65 can reach the V gate 65v. Therefore, it was necessary to position the switching valve 65y for a long period of time. In addition, as the period during which the winning ball of the variable winning device 65 can pass through the V gate 65v is set longer, the period (V effective period) for effectively determining whether the ball passes through the V gate 65v (specific area) is lengthened. Since it is necessary to set a long time, there is also a problem that it becomes difficult to detect cheating during a jackpot game, that is, the act of passing the ball through the V gate 65V (specific area) by cheating.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present third control example, the ball shot in the left-handed game wins the variable winning device 65 after flowing down the left-hand side region, and the ball shot in the right-handed game The period until the winning ball in the variable winning device 65 passes through the specific region is almost the same as the time when the ball wins in the variable winning device 65 after flowing down the right side region. By configuring in this way, it is possible to shorten the length of the period (V effective period) for effectively determining whether the ball passes through the specific area. to the V-gate 65V (specific area) can be easily discovered.

As described above, in the third control example, the configuration inside the variable winning device 65 is changed, and the content of the switching control of the switching valve 65y provided inside the variable winning device 65 is changed. This control example is different from the first control example, but the other contents are the same. Identical contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 212, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 212 is a front view schematically showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example. As shown in FIG. 212, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example is different from the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example (see FIG. 119). The difference is that the arrangement of the nail members implanted in the lower region of 640a is different. Specifically, in the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described first control example, the ball that has flowed down in the left area or the ball that has flowed down in the right area is the opening of the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65. Nails are planted so that the prizes can be won evenly in the width direction. To the left end side of the specific prize winning port 65a and the right end side of the specific prize winning port 65a, so that the ball flowing down the right end side of the specific prize winning port 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 can easily win a prize, a plurality of V-shaped electric accessories 640a A nail member is implanted.

In other words, in the third control example, the variable winning device having the specific winning opening 65a with a wide opening width so that the ball flowing down in the left area due to the left-handed game and the ball flowing down in the right-side area due to the right-handed game can win. 65, an electric accessory 640a is provided as a prize inhibiting member above the central portion of the variable prize winning device 65 in order to suppress the winning of the ball in the vicinity of the central portion in the width direction of the opening of the specific prize winning port 65a, Further, a plurality of peg members are provided as guide members for guiding the winning of the ball near both ends in the width direction of the opening of the specific winning port 65a.

By configuring in this way, even when a right-handed game is performed during a jackpot game and a left-handed game is performed, the ball near both ends in the opening width direction of the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 Winning can be encouraged. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 213, but the internal structure of the variable winning device 65 of the third control example is left-right symmetrical. ), and by making the winning positions of the balls into the specific winning opening 65a symmetrical, the balls that have won into the specific winning opening 65a are moved to the respective areas in the variable winning device 65 (for example, It is possible to make it difficult for an error to occur in the period until passing through the specific area).

Next, referring to FIG. 213, the internal structure of the variable winning device 65 in the pachinko machine 10 of the third control example will be described. FIG. 213(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the variable winning device 65 near the specific winning opening 65a, and FIG. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the.

The variable winning device 65 of the third control example also has the configuration of the variable winning device 65 of the first control example described above (see FIG. 120), and the ball received by the open/close door 65b that is opened during the jackpot game state. However, the guiding member 65d guides the player to the first opening 65a1 or the second opening 65a2 provided at both ends of the specific prize winning opening 65a. Then, the balls flowing down the first opening 65a1 pass through the ball detection sensor 65s1 (see FIG. 213(b)), and payout control is executed such that 15 balls are paid out as prize balls. Similarly, the balls flowing down the second opening 65a2 pass through the ball detection sensor 65s2 (see FIG. 213(b)), and payout control is executed to pay out 15 balls as prize balls.

As described above with reference to FIG. 212, in the third control example, it is difficult for a ball to enter from near the center of the specific winning hole 65a. can be smoothly guided to the first opening 65a1 or the second opening 65a2. Therefore, the number of winning balls before flowing down the first opening 65a1 or the second opening 65a2 increases, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging, and the winning balls enter the specific winning opening 65a. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the prize balls are not paid out in spite of this (the balls do not pass through the ball detection sensors 65s1 and 65s2).

As shown in FIG. 213(b), the variable winning device 65 of the third control example is different from the variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 120(b)) used in the first embodiment. The major difference is that the path that guides the ball that has entered the winning hole 65a (the ball that has passed through the ball detection sensor 65s1 or the ball detection sensor 65s2) to the discharge hole 65 is bilaterally symmetrical.

First, the ball that has passed through the ball detection sensor 65s1 flows down the first flow path 65r1 toward the switching valve 65y, and as shown in FIG. in the state of protruding so as to block the flow path that is connected), it flows down the upper surface of the switching valve 65y and is guided to the first discharge port 65h1. It should be noted that the time (ta) required for the ball to flow down the first flow path 65r1 is configured to be about 2 seconds. Similarly, the ball that has passed through the ball detection sensor 65s2 flows down the second flow path 65r2 toward the switching valve 65y, and as shown in FIG. in a state where the fluid protrudes so as to block the provided flow path), it flows down the upper surface of the switching valve 65y and is guided to the second discharge port 65h2. The time (tb) required for the ball to flow down the second flow path 65r2 is also configured to be about 2 seconds, like the time ta described above.

In other words, in the third control example, the ball that has won near the left end of the specific winning opening 65a in the left-handed game and has passed through the first opening 65a1 is also near the right end of the specific winning opening 65a in the right-handed game. The winning ball that has passed through the second opening 65a2 is also configured to reach the switching valve 65y after flowing down at the same position.

Then, when the switching valve 65y is in a closed state (a state in which the ball is buried in the flow path provided with the V gate 65V), the first flow path 65r1 is opened as shown in FIG. The falling ball passes through the buried state switching valve 65y (indicated by the dotted line in FIG. 214), passes through the first V gate 65v1, and flows into the third outlet 65h3. Also, the ball flowing down the second flow path 65r2 is configured to pass through the buried state switching valve 65y, pass through the second V-gate 65V2, and flow into the fourth discharge port 65h4.

In the third control example, when the number of winning balls in the variable winning device 65 (total number of balls detected by the ball detection sensors 65s1 and 65s2) reaches a predetermined number, the switching valve 65y is closed (see FIG. 213). (b)) to the open state (see FIG. 214), and the predetermined number of balls reach the switching valve 65y after passing the ball detection sensor 65s1 or the ball detection sensor 65s2. The time (about 0.5 seconds) required for the number of balls winning the variable prize winning device 65 to reach a predetermined number and the switching valve 65y to open is shorter than the time (about 2 seconds) to It is configured to be Therefore, the above-described predetermined number of balls can pass through the V gate 65V as they are. Therefore, when the switching valve 65y is opened, the ball can reliably flow down to the specific area (V gate 65V).

The structure of the variable winning device 65 in the third control example is the same as the structure of the sorting device 300 (see FIG. 13) in the first embodiment described above, but for convenience of explanation, FIGS. It is shown in a simplified diagram as shown in . Therefore, as for the detailed configuration of the variable winning device 65 in the third control example, the content of the above-described first embodiment is of course applied, and the description thereof is omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the third control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 215 and 216, the electrical configuration in this third control example will be described. In the third control example, the content of the jackpot control executed during the jackpot game is different from that of the first control example described above, and the content of various processes based on the difference is different. They are different in one respect and otherwise identical. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Specifically, the difference is that the content of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 is partially changed, and the content of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control unit 113 is partially changed. are the same.

Here, with reference to FIG. 215, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in this third control example will be described. FIG. 215 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 215, the RAM 203 of the third control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 203 of the first control example described above (see FIG. 139(b)) in that a V period timer 203ca is added. Otherwise, they are identical. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The V period timer 203ca is for measuring the period of opening the switching valve 65y so that the ball can pass through the specific area (V gate 65v). A predetermined period of time (5 seconds) is set when a condition is established that allows the ball to pass through the gate 65v). Then, in the jackpot middle update process (see S1954 in FIG. 220) executed in the main process (see FIG. 167) in the jackpot control process 3 (see S1854 in FIG. 217), the value of the V period timer 203ca is updated, and when the V period has passed (the value of the V period timer 203ca becomes 0), the switching valve 65y is switched to the closed state.

In the third control example, the number of winning balls to the specific winning opening 65a (the number of balls detected by the ball detection sensors 65s1 and 65s2) ) is determined to be a predetermined number (two), the V condition that allows the ball to pass through the specific area (V gate 65v) is established, and the switching valve 65y is held for a predetermined period (5 seconds). It is configured to switch to an open state.

In other words, the switching valve 65y is not switched and controlled based on the passage of time after the start of the jackpot game, but is switched and controlled based on the number of balls winning the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game. It is configured to By configuring in this way, the open state period of the switching valve 65y is maintained during the period in which the ball could not be entered into the variable winning device 65 even though the game was normally played during the jackpot game. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the sphere ends and the sphere cannot pass through to the specific area (V gate 65v).

Further, in the third control example, the ball that satisfies the V condition for switching the switching valve 65y to the open state, that is, the ball that passes through the ball detection sensor 65s1 or 65s2 for the predetermined number (second) is the switching valve. The period (approximately 0.5 seconds) required for the switching valve 65y to switch to the open state after the V condition is established is shorter than the period (approximately 2 seconds) required to reach 65y. , and at least a sphere that satisfies the V condition is configured to be able to pass through the specific area (V gate 65v). With this configuration, the sphere can be reliably passed through the specific area (V gate 65v) when the V condition is satisfied.

In this control example, the condition V is satisfied and the switching valve 65y is switched to the open state for a predetermined period of time (5 seconds). That is, as the termination condition for terminating the open state of the switching valve 65y, only the period lapse termination condition that is satisfied when a predetermined period of time has elapsed is used. 65v), a V-pass end condition may be provided that is established when the V-round game is passed, or the end condition of the V-round game (first round game) is established, or the end condition of the V-round game is established. A round end condition may be provided that is established when a predetermined period of time (for example, 4 seconds required for a ball that has won a prize in the variable prize winning device 65 during the V round to reach any of the discharge ports 65h) has passed. . Various end conditions may be set in this manner, and the open state of the switching valve 65y may be switched to the closed state when one of the end conditions is satisfied first. As a result, the period during which the switching valve 65y is open can be shortened as much as possible, so that the ball can be prevented from passing through the specific region (V gate 65v) unnecessarily. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the ball will collide with the ball detection sensor provided in the V gate 65v and the ball detection sensor will be physically destroyed.

Next, referring to FIG. 216, the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 216 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the third control example. As shown in FIG. 216, the RAM 223 of the third control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 of the first control example described above (see FIG. 144(b)) in that a V timer 223ca is added. , are otherwise identical. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The V-timer 223ca is a timer for measuring the elapsed time from when the period (V-winning period) during which the ball can pass through the specific area (V-gate 65v) is set. When the voice lamp controller 113 receives the V period command set by the main controller 110 when the period becomes possible, a value corresponding to the predetermined period (3 seconds) is set. Then, the value of the V timer 223ca continues to be updated (decremented) until the ball passes through the specific area (V gate 65v), and when the value becomes 0 (when a predetermined period of time has passed), guidance for V winning is provided. Emphasized emphasis guidance information is performed.

In other words, while the V winning period is set to 5 seconds at maximum, the emphasis guide notification is executed when 3 seconds have passed since the V winning period was set. . Here, as described above, if it is normal, it is configured so that the ball that satisfies the V condition will win the V prize as it is, and the time required for the ball that satisfies the V condition to win the V prize is about 2 seconds. It is configured to be That is, when the value of the V timer 223ca reaches 0, it is conceivable that the ball satisfying the V condition did not win the V prize. Therefore, since it is necessary to aim for the V winning by using the additional balls, the configuration is such that the emphasized guidance notification is executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the V prize cannot be won due to the game content of the player despite the fact that the V prize period is set.

In this control example, it is configured to execute the emphasized guidance notification based on the elapsed time after the V condition is established. Configured to execute emphasized guidance standby notification when passing through a region (for example, a flow path having a discharge port 65h1 (see FIG. 213(b))) that does not have a specific region (V gate 65v) You can Further, in this control example, when it is detected that the ball that triggered the switching to the open state of the switching valve 65y does not pass through the specific area (V gate 65v), the above-described emphasized guidance notification is executed. However, instead of this, it may be configured to execute an abnormality notification for notifying the outside that an abnormality (for example, ball clogging) has occurred in the flow path in the variable winning device 65. good.

Further, in this control example, when the ball detection sensors 65s1 and 65s2 detect that the predetermined number (second ball) of the ball has won a prize, switching control is immediately executed to switch the switching valve 65y to the open state. However, in this case, the ball (first winning ball) that has entered the variable winning device 65 before the predetermined number (second ball) is guided to the open switching valve 65y. , may pass through a specific region (V gate 65V). Therefore, when the predetermined number (second) winning ball is detected, the waiting time (approximately 1.5 seconds), and after the waiting time has elapsed, the switching valve 65y may be controlled to switch to the open state. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the passage of only the ball that triggered the switching valve 65y to the open state to pass through the specific area (V gate 65V).

Furthermore, in this control example, the ball passes through the specific area (V gate 65v) during one big win game, and is configured to set a high probability state of special symbols after the big win game ends. Even if a plurality of balls pass through a specific area (V gate 65V) during a big win game, the privilege given to the player (provision of a high probability state of special symbols) is configured not to change. In addition to this, for example, when using the pachinko machine 10 in which the content of the privilege given to the player is changed according to the number of balls passing through the specific area (V gate 65V) during the jackpot game, the above-mentioned By setting such a waiting time, it is possible to prevent the ball from excessively passing through the specific area (V gate 65V).

In the case of using a pachinko machine 10 in which the content of the privilege given to the player is changed according to the number of balls passing through the specific area (V gate 65V) during the jackpot game, for example, the winning jackpot Depending on the type of , the number of winning prizes (V winning condition) that triggers switching the switching valve 65y to the open state is changed, or the number of winning balls that triggers switching to the open state of the switching valve 65y is a variable winning device It is preferable to vary the waiting time from winning 65 to switching the switching valve 65y to the open state, or to vary the conditions for switching the switching valve 65y from the open state to the closed state (V end condition).

Specifically, as a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player, a small number of balls is set as the V winning condition in order to make it easier for a plurality of balls to pass through a specific area (V gate 65V) during one jackpot game. good to do As a result, the period from the execution of the jackpot game to the establishment of the V winning condition can be shortened, so that the long jackpot game can be executed in a state where the V winning condition is established. sphere can be made easier to pass through to a specific area (V-gate 65V). Also, the standby time may be shortened. As a result, the ball (the ball flowing down the first flow path 65r1 and the second flow path 65r2) that has entered the variable winning device 65 before the ball that has established the V winning condition is also in the specific area (V gate 65V). can be made to pass through Furthermore, the V end condition may be established based on the elapsed time regardless of the number of balls passing through the specific area (V gate 65V). By constructing in this way, when a jackpot game advantageous to the player is executed, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game so that many balls pass through the specific area (V gate 65V). .

On the other hand, for the jackpot game that is disadvantageous to the player, it is made difficult for a plurality of balls to pass through the specific area (V gate 65V) during one jackpot game, as opposed to the above-described advantageous jackpot game. In addition, setting a large number of balls as a V prize condition, setting a long waiting time, setting a V end condition as a condition that is satisfied when one ball passes through a specific area (V gate 65V), and setting a ball to the specific area (V gate 65V).

By configuring in this way, the degree of expectation that the ball passes through the specific area (V gate 65V) during the big winning game can be greatly varied according to the type of the big winning game to be executed. Further, as ball flow paths in the variable winning device 65, a normal flow path and a special flow path capable of causing the ball to flow down toward the switching valve 65y in a shorter period of time than the normal flow path are provided. and good. Specifically, a delay means (for example, a cloon) is provided in the special channel to delay the flow of the balls, and the balls discharged from the special channel are more stringy than the balls discharged from the normal channel. It is preferable to configure so that it can be easily discharged.

In this case, when the timing at which the switching valve 65y is opened coincides with the timing at which the balls are discharged from the special flow path, it is possible to make it easier for many balls to pass through the specific area (V gate 65V). can. Furthermore, in this case, it is preferable to allow the player to select whether the winning balls in the variable prize winning device 65 are allowed to easily flow down the normal flow path or the special flow path. When a left-handed game is executed, the winning ball of the variable winning device 65 is more likely to flow down the normal flow path than the special flow path, and when a right-handed game is executed, the special flow path is more likely than the normal flow path. It is preferable to configure so that the water flows down easily. Also, in this case, using the display surface of the third symbol display device during the jackpot game, the fact that the left-handed game is a stable game that makes it easy to pass one ball to the specific area (V gate 65V), A game in which a right-handed game is a challenge game in which it is difficult to pass a ball to a specific area (V gate 65V), but a large amount of balls can pass to the specific area (V gate 65V) if the timing is right. It is better to execute guidance display. Also, in the past jackpot game, it is stored whether the left-handed game or the right-handed game was executed. is determined, a game method during the jackpot game is determined based on the determination result, and a storage means for storing the result is provided, and the game method stored in the storage means and the game result during the jackpot game (specific area (Number of balls passing through V gate 65V)) may be displayed as past history.

As a result, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of allowing the player to select the game method to be executed during the jackpot game. In the control example described above, the privilege given when passing through the specific area (V gate 65V) is the high probability state of special symbols, but it is not limited to this, and for example, it is advantageous to the player. A lottery right that tends to result in a lottery result may be given, or a second big win game different from the big win game may be given. In this case, it is preferable to provide grant right storage means capable of storing a predetermined number of rights to which the above-mentioned benefits are granted as an upper limit. As a result, even if a plurality of granted rights are acquired in a short period of time, the privilege can be reliably granted under the condition of the predetermined number. In addition, in this control example, the ball that has won the variable prize winning device 65 during the jackpot game has been explained, but it is not limited to this. 2, a small prize winning is set by opening the variable prize winning device 65 for a short period of time, and the above-described configuration is applied to the ball that wins in the variable prize winning device 65 during the small prize winning game that is executed when the small prize is won. You can use it. In addition, in the winning game that is executed when winning the lottery of normal symbols, the above-described configuration may be used for the variable ball entry means (for example, the electric accessory 640a) that allows the ball to win.

Further, in this control example, all the balls that have passed through the switching valve 65y in the open state are configured to be able to pass through the specific area (V gate 65V). A distribution member may be provided so that part of the sphere that has passed through 65y can pass through the specific area (V gate 65V). Further, in this control example, a variable means capable of changing between a first state in which it is easy for the sphere to pass through the specific area (V gate 65V) and a second state in which it is difficult to pass the sphere is provided. Although the switching valve 65y is used to switch the flowing flow path, the configuration of the variable means is not limited to this. A variable that makes it easier for the ball to pass through the specific area (V gate 65V) within the period in which the passage of the ball to the specific area (V gate 65V) is effectively determined by allowing the ball to stay for a predetermined period. You may provide means. Also, a plurality of variable means may be provided in the variable winning device 65 .

<Regarding the control processing contents of the main controller in the third control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 217 to 220, the contents of control processing of the main controller in this third control example will be described. In the third control example, the jackpot control process 3 (see S1854 in FIG. 217) is changed to the jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 168) in place of the first control example described above, and the winning process (S1911 in FIG. 171) is performed. (see S1953 in FIG. 218) instead of executing the winning process 3 (see S1953 in FIG. 218), and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same control processing contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 217, the contents of the jackpot control process 3 (S1854) will be described. FIG. 217 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot control process 3 (S1854). In this jackpot control process 3 (S1854), in contrast to the jackpot control process described above (see S1804 in FIG. 168), the control contents executed at the start of the jackpot and when the ball wins the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game The difference is that the content of the control to be executed is changed, and the content of control for updating the value of the V period timer 203ca during the jackpot game is added. Other contents are the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the jackpot control process 3 (S1854) is executed, first, it is determined whether the jackpot start flag 203j is set to ON (S1901), and if it is determined to be set to ON (S1901: Yes), Next, an opening command is set (S1902), the jackpot start flag 203j is set to OFF, the jackpot medium flag 203k is set to ON (S1903), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1901, if it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203j is not set to ON (S1901: No), then whether the jackpot game is currently in progress (if the jackpot flag 203k is set to ON) (S1904), and if it is determined that the jackpot game is not in progress (S1904: No), this process is terminated.

In the process of S1904, if it is determined that the jackpot game is in progress (the jackpot flag 203k is set to ON) (S1904: Yes), then it is determined whether it is time to start a new round ( S1905), if it is determined that it is time to start (S1905: Yes), the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S1951), a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1952), and this End the process.

On the other hand, in the process of S1905, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1905: No), S1907 to S1910, which are the same as the jackpot control process of the first control example (see S1804 in FIG. 168) Execute the process and terminate this process. Also, in the processing of S1909, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the jackpot (S1909: No), the winning process 3 is executed (S1953), then the abnormal process is executed (S1912), and then the update process during the jackpot is executed (S1954), and the process ends.

Next, the contents of the prize winning process 3 (S1953) executed in the jackpot control process 3 (see S1854 in FIG. 217) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 218 is a flow chart showing the details of the prize winning process 3 (S1953). This prize winning process 3 (S1953) differs from the prize winning process (S1911 in FIG. 171) of the first control example described above in that the contents of control processing during the V round (1 round) in which the switching valve 65y can be open are different. are different, but otherwise identical. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same contents, and the detailed description of the contents is omitted.

When the prize winning process 3 (S1953) is executed, first, the same processes of S2201 to S2204 as the winning process of the first control example (S1911 in FIG. 171) are executed, and the process of S2204 is finished, or , When it is determined that the ball has not won the specific winning hole 65a in the process of S2202 (S2202: No), the V round process is executed (S2251). Details of this V round processing (S2251) will be described later with reference to FIG. is executed.

When the V round process (S2251) is finished, next, the same processes of S2205 to S2208 and S2211 to S2221 as the winning process (see S1911 in FIG. 171) are executed, and this process ends.

Next, the contents of the V round process (S2251) executed in the winning process 3 (see S1953 in FIG. 218) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 219 is a flow chart showing the contents of the V round process (S2251).

When the V-round process (S2251) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current round is in progress (V-round) (S2401). This process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that one round is currently in progress (S2401: Yes), then the value of the winning number counter 203o is "2", that is, the variable winning device during the first round of the round game. It is determined whether or not the number of winning balls to 65 is "2" (S2402). A V period command indicating a winning period (a period during which the ball can be guided to a specific area (V gate 65V)) is set (S2404), and a value corresponding to 5 seconds is set in the V period timer 203ca. (S2405), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2402, if it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203o is not "2" (S2402: No), this process ends.

As described above, in this control example, in the specific round game executed during the jackpot game, when the number of balls winning the variable winning device 65 satisfies a predetermined condition (the number of winning , the control process is executed to switch the switching valve 65y to the open state so that the ball can easily pass through the specific region (V gate 65v). As a result, during the jackpot game, it is possible to prevent the switching valve 65y from being switched to the open state in a state in which the variable winning device 65 does not win the ball.

In addition, in this control example, only a specific round (first round) during the jackpot game is configured to be a V round in which the switching valve 65y can be switched to an open state. The round may be configured to be settable as a V round in which the switching valve 65y can be switched to the open state. In this case, in the V round process (S2251), the number of rounds of the round game to be newly executed is determined, and it is determined whether the round game of the determined number of rounds is the V round.

Then, when it is determined to be a V round, the state of the switching valve 65y may be switched and controlled based on the value of the winning number counter 203o during the V round. Further, in this case, the condition for turning on the V solenoid 209a (the condition for switching the switching valve 65y to the open state) may be varied for each of a plurality of set V rounds.

In addition, when the V-round game is being executed, a notification means may be provided to notify the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 of the game content until the condition for setting the V solenoid 209a to ON is established, For example, when the V round is started, it is necessary to indicate the number of prizes required to satisfy the conditions for setting the V solenoid 209a to ON, and the V round notification indicating that the current round game is the V round. It is preferable to configure so as to execute the notification of the number of winnings. As a result, the player can be motivated to play the game to pass the ball through the specific area.

Next, with reference to FIG. 220, the contents of the update process (S1954) during the jackpot will be described. FIG. 220 is a flowchart schematically showing the contents of the update process (S1954) during the jackpot. In this jackpot mid-update process (S1954), a process for updating the value of the V period timer 203ca set during the jackpot game is executed.

When the jackpot middle update process (S1954) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the V period timer 203ca is greater than 0, that is, whether the V solenoid 209a is set to ON (S1961). . Then, if it is determined that the value of the V period timer 203ca is not greater than 0 (it is 0) (S1961: No), this processing ends. In the process of S1961, if it is determined that the value of the V period timer 203ca is greater than 0 (S1961: Yes), then the value of the V period timer is updated (S1962), and the updated V period timer 203ca It is determined whether the value is 0 (S1963), and if it is determined that it is not 0 (S1963: No), it is not the time to turn off the solenoid 209a, so this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1963 that the value of the V period timer 203ca is 0 (S1963: Yes), the V solenoid 209a is turned off (S1964), and a command indicating the end of the V period is set ( S1965), the process ends.

<Regarding control processing contents of the audio ramp control device in the third control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 221 and 222, the contents of control processing of the audio ramp control device in the third control example will be described. In the third control example, in place of the first control example described above, the jackpot related process 3 (see S4258 in FIG. 180) is changed to the effect update process (see S4258 in FIG. 174). S4111) is replaced with effect update processing 3 (see S4151 in FIG. 222), and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same control processing contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 221, the contents of the jackpot related process 3 (S4258) will be described. This jackpot-related process 3 (S4258) is different from the jackpot-related process (S4218) of the first control example, in that the content of the control process that is executed when the V period command is received from the main controller 110 is added. are different, and otherwise identical. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the jackpot related process 3 (S4258) is executed, first, the same processes of S4701 to S1713 as the jackpot related process (see S4218 in FIG. 180) are executed. Then, in the processing of S4709, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S4709: No), then it is determined whether or not the V period command has been received (S4751), and the V period command has been received. If so (S4752: Yes), a value corresponding to 3 seconds is set in the V-timer 223ca, and this process ends.

Also, if it is determined that the V period command has not been received in the processing of S4751 (S4751: No), then the same S4714 to S1715 processing as the above-described jackpot related processing (see S4218 in FIG. 180) is executed. , the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 222, the content of effect update processing 3 will be described. FIG. 222 is a flow chart showing the content of effect update processing 3. FIG. In this effect update process 3, a process of updating the value of the V-timer 223ca set during the jackpot game and a process of setting the effect mode when the value of the V-timer 223ca becomes 0 are executed. configured as possible.

As shown in FIG. 222, when the effect update process 3 is executed, it is first determined whether the value of the V timer 223ca is greater than 0 (S5401), and if it is determined to be greater than 0 ( S5401: Yes), then the value of the V period timer 203ca is updated (S5402), and it is determined whether the updated value of the V period timer 203ca is 0 (S5403).

If it is determined in the process of S5403 that the value of the V period timer 203ca is 0 (S5403: Yes), then it is determined whether the V effect execution flag 223k is set to ON (S5404). When the V notification effect is being executed during the jackpot game currently being executed, a display command for emphasizing the guidance of the V prize is set (S5405), and the number of times of updating various counters and various timers is executed, End this process.

As described above, in the third control example, the variable winning device 65 is arranged at a place where a winning is possible whether a right-handed game or a left-handed game is performed, and furthermore, the ball can be won by any game method. Even when the ball is launched, the period from when the ball wins to when it reaches the switching valve 65y does not have a large difference. Therefore, during the jackpot game, the jackpot game can be executed smoothly without setting the period (V effective period) for effectively detecting that the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate 65v) unnecessarily long. . Also, by shortening the V effective period, it is possible to easily monitor the act of passing the ball through the specific area due to illegal play.

In addition, since it is configured to execute the switching control of the switching valve 65y based on the number of prizes won to the variable prize winning device 65, the balls may enter the variable prize winning device 65 due to ball clogging or the like occurring during the jackpot game. It is possible to suppress the switching valve 65y from being opened in a state in which it cannot be switched. In this control example, the number of winning balls is measured for each round game, and when the measurement result reaches a predetermined measurement result, the switching valve 65y is opened for a predetermined period within the round game period. However, without being limited to this, the cumulative value of the number of winnings after the start of the jackpot game, the cumulative value of the number of winnings after a predetermined measurement condition is established during the jackpot game, Alternatively, when the cumulative value of the number of prizes won in a plurality of jackpot games reaches a predetermined measurement result, the switching valve 65y may be configured to switch to the open state.

In addition, the maximum period of the length of the period in which the switching valve 65y is open is not limited to the period until the end of the round game. 65y may be configured to remain open.

Further, in the third control example, as shown in FIG. 213(b), one switching valve 65y is configured to close both the first V gate 65v1 and the second V gate 65V2, but this is not limitative. For example, when the ball detection sensor 65s1 detects a predetermined number of winnings, only the switching valve covering the first V gate 65V1 is opened. When the ball detection sensor 65s2 detects a predetermined number of winnings, only the switching valve on the side covering the second V gate 65V2 may be opened. As a result, the range of the switching valve that is in the open state can be reduced, so that unnecessary passing of the ball through the V gate 65V can be suppressed.

<Fourth control example>
Next, a fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 223 to 231. FIG. The fourth control example differs from the above-described first control example in that the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 are partially changed, and the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 and that the configuration of a part of the RAM 223 is changed. Also, the control contents executed by the MPU of the main controller 110 and the control contents executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed. The contents other than that are the same, and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the above-described first control example, after the end of the jackpot game, as an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player, the variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) or short time state (low probability of special symbols state, high probability state of normal design) was configured to be settable. Then, when the variable probability state is set after the end of the big winning game, the variable probability state continues until the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times, and then until the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times, that is, the big winning game. The time saving state is set until the number of special symbol lotteries reaches 100 after the end. On the other hand, when the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, the time saving state is continued until the special symbols are executed 100 times.

That is, in the above-described first control example, even if any advantageous gaming state (probability variable state, time saving state) is set after the end of the jackpot game, unless the special symbol lottery wins the jackpot, the special symbol lottery The advantageous game state is continued until the game is executed 100 times. And, when the advantageous gaming state (probability variable state, time saving state) is set after the end of the jackpot game, the period until the advantageous gaming state ends, that is, until the normal state disadvantageous to the player is set. It was configured to inform the player of the period (see FIG. 128(a)).

By configuring in this way, in the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of advantageous game states more advantageous to the player than the normal state, the period until the currently set advantageous game state (probability variable state or time saving state) ends. Instead, the player can grasp the period until the disadvantageous game state (normal state) that is disadvantageous to the player is set. Therefore, compared to the case of informing the player of the period until the currently set advantageous gaming state (for example, the variable probability state) ends, that is, the period until the variable probability state ends and the time saving state ends, Since the period during which the advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player continues can be grasped in advance, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

Furthermore, in the above-described first control example, the period during which the more advantageous probability variation state continues out of the plurality of advantageous gaming states (probability variation state, time saving state) is the period during which the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times. In the period from the end of the jackpot game to the execution of 50 special symbol lotteries, the player determines whether the currently set game state is a variable probability state or a time saving state. 128(b)). As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 that notifies the period until the next unfavorable game state is set in the state in which the advantageous game state is set, the currently set game state is one of the plurality of advantageous game states. It was possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting which one it is.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example, when the variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set after the end of the jackpot game, the high probability state of special symbols is set. A lottery (so-called fall lottery) for shifting to a low probability state can be executed, and when the fall lottery is won, the game state is shifted from the probability variable state to the time saving state. That is, in the above-described first control example, when the variable probability state is set, the variable probability state continues until the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times, but in the fourth control example, the special If the falling lottery is won before the symbol lottery is executed 50 times, the variable probability state ends at that point.

By configuring in this way, even if it is grasped that the variable probability state is set by the suggestive effect executed during the period in which the advantageous game state is set, the player can determine how long the variable probability state will continue. Therefore, it is possible to make the user pay more attention to the content of the suggestive effect to be executed.

In addition, in this fourth control example, as the suggestion effect executed during the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set, not only is the currently set gaming state suggested, but the probability variable state ends when the falling lottery is won. The timing is also configured to be suggestible.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the fourth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of this fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 223 to 226. FIG. This fourth control example differs greatly from the above-described first control example in that it is configured to be able to execute a lottery (drop lottery) that shifts the high-probability state of special symbols to the low-probability state. , and is different in that a configuration for executing a drop lottery is added.

First, referring to FIG. 223, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 223 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 223, the ROM 202 of the fourth control example is the ROM 202 of the first control example described above (see FIG. 139 (a)). , and a drop lottery table 202da is newly added, and the rest is the same. Identical contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, regarding the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d, differences from the first control example will be mainly described. In the fourth control example, the content of the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is different from the above-described first control example, and detailed contents Regarding will be described later with reference to FIG. 224 (a), the game state at the time of jackpot winning, and the value set to the time saving counter 203h according to the selected jackpot type, that is, the high probability state of the normal symbol is configured to vary the period for which is set. Thereby, the length of the period during which the advantageous game state (probability variable state or time saving state) set after the end of the jackpot game can be varied. Therefore, when the advantageous game state is set after the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the length of the period during which the advantageous game state continues. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the notification effect for notifying the player of the period during which the advantageous game state continues (the remaining period until the unfavorable game state is set).

Here, with reference to FIG. 224(a), in this control example, when the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery) is won, the special figure 2 jackpot to be referred to for selecting the jackpot type 2 The contents of the table 202dd will be explained. FIG. 224(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot 2 table 202dd2.

As shown in FIG. 224(a), the special figure 2 jackpot 2 table 202dd2 is set after the jackpot game ends according to the value of the acquired first hit type counter c2 and the game state at the time of winning. A jackpot type is defined in which the value of the time saving counter 203h is different. That is, the length of the period during which the advantageous game state (probability variable state or time saving state) set after the end of the jackpot game is varied according to the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won.

Specifically, as the jackpot type, the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 29", and when the game state at the time of winning is the normal state or the time saving state, "50" However, in the case of the variable probability state, "100" is set as the value of the time reduction counter 203h, and "50" can be set as the value of the variable probability counter 203i. In the range of "30 to 69", the value of the time saving counter 203h is "100" when the game state at the time of winning is the normal state or the time saving state, and "90" when the probability variable state. , and the value of the variable probability counter 203i can be set to "50" "jackpot D", the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "70 to 99", the game state at the time of winning "100" is set as the value of the time saving counter 203h in the case of the variable probability state, and "50" can be set as the value of the variable probability counter 203i. Jackpot D” is defined.

In addition, the content of the round game executed corresponding to each jackpot type, and the description of the value set in the probability variable counter 203i defined in the special figure 2 jackpot 2 table 202dd2, and the ending period (S) , Since it is the same as the special figure 2 jackpot table 202d2 described above, its detailed description is omitted.

As described above, in the fourth control example, the period during which the time saving state continues is varied according to the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won and the game state when the jackpot is won. When the jackpot D is selected as the type, "100" is set in the time saving counter 203h if the jackpot winning is in the time saving state, and "90" is set in the variable probability state. Therefore, after the end of the jackpot game executed when the jackpot D is selected, the last To allow a player to grasp whether the game state at the time of winning a jackpot was a variable probability state or a time-saving state.

By configuring in this way, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of types of advantageous game states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), and is currently set. In the pachinko machine 10 in which a notification effect capable of notifying only that an advantageous game state is set is executed without specifically notifying the game state in which the player is playing, when a jackpot is won during the advantageous game state, which It is possible for the player to grasp after the fact whether or not the jackpot has been won in the state where the game state is set. Therefore, future games can be predicted based on the past game results, and the interest in the games can be improved.

In addition, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 224(a), by varying the value set in the time reduction counter 203h according to the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot, it is displayed after the jackpot game ends. The player is made to predict the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot according to the display contents of the remaining period notification mode (the mode for notifying the remaining period until the advantageous game state ends), but this is not the only option. For example, even if different values are set for the time reduction counter 203h, the display mode of the remaining period notification mode displayed after the end of the jackpot game is made common (for example, "70" is displayed), which is advantageous. When the number of executions of the special symbol lottery during the game state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times), the display mode of the remaining period notification mode is variably displayed corresponding to the actual value of the time reduction counter 203h. may be configured.

By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to grasp the game state set at the time of winning the previous big win after a predetermined period has passed after the end of the big win game. Therefore, during an advantageous game state, the player can be made to execute a game aiming at winning a jackpot and a game for grasping the game state set in the past in duplicate. It is possible to suppress early boredom with a game during an advantageous game state.

In addition, in this control example, by varying the value set in the time reduction counter 203h according to the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot, the remaining period notification mode (advantageous game state ends) displayed after the jackpot game ends (a mode for notifying the remaining period until the player wins the jackpot), the player can predict the game state set when the jackpot is won. As long as it is a timing that can be grasped after the fact, it may be configured to be suggestible at another timing. It may be configured to inform the player of the state. In this case, an effect may be executed to directly notify the game state set when the big win is won, or an effect suggesting the duration of the advantageous game state set after the end of the big win game may be executed.

Returning to FIG. 223, the description is continued. The fall lottery table 202da is a data table that stores the judgment value of a fall lottery counter Cd1, which will be described later. The value of the falling lottery counter Cd1 acquired when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (at the time of the start winning) is either specified in the falling lottery table 202da. When it matches the judgment value of, it is set to shift to a special symbol low probability state (to fall).

Here, the contents of the fall lottery table 202da will be described with reference to FIG. 224(b). FIG. 224(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the falling lottery table 202da. As shown in FIG. 224(b), the falling lottery table 202da defines two determination values "0 and 1" as determination values for determining falling in the variable probability state of the special symbol. Here, the falling lottery counter Cd1 is a loop counter whose value is updated within the range of "0 to 999". Of the 1000 possible values of the falling lottery counter Cd1, there are two determination values for falling, so the probability of falling (moving to a low probability state of special symbols) in the variable probability state of special symbols. is 1/500.

It should be noted that, in the falling lottery table 202da in the present control example, only the determination value (determination value for the probability variation state of the special symbol) for determining whether or not to fall in the probability variation state of the special symbol is defined, and the special symbol Criteria for low-probability conditions are not specified. This is because it is useless to determine whether or not to shift to the special symbol low probability state when the special symbol low probability state has already been reached.

In this control example, the drop lottery table 202da and the drop lottery counter Cd1 that is updated periodically are compared to determine whether or not to shift (fall) from the probability variable state of the special symbols to the low probability state of the special symbols. is determined. That is, from the definite variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), which is the most advantageous advantageous state for the player, among the advantageous gaming states, it is one of the advantageous gaming states, but from the definite variable state can randomize the timing of shifting to a time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) that is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the player can play the game while expecting that the variable probability state will continue as long as possible.

In addition, in this control example, after the end of the jackpot game, the maximum duration of the high probability state of the special symbols (50 times) is defined by the value of the variable probability counter 203i, longer than the maximum duration (50 times) During the period, it is configured so that the high probability state of normal symbols continues. In other words, based on the lottery result of the fall lottery, even if the high probability state of the special design shifts to the low probability state (fall) at any timing, the high probability state of the normal design is set. Configure. Therefore, as the game state, from the probability variable state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol high probability state), it will shift to the time saving state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol high probability state). Therefore, the timing of winning the falling lottery is not grasped by the player by the execution frequency of the game per normal pattern.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the current game state is the probability variable state or the time saving state during the advantageous game state (during the normal pattern high probability state). , the player can be interested in the performance contents of the suggestive performance that post facto suggests the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot.

In this control example, a lottery (judgment) was made as to whether or not to transition (fall) from a high probability state of special symbols to a low probability state of special symbols. ). For example, it may be determined by a lottery executed for each variation whether or not the high probability state of the normal design shifts to the low probability state of the normal design. As a result, since it is possible to determine how long the advantageous game state lasts at random, it is possible to play the game hoping that the advantageous game state will continue for each variation. Further, for example, it may be possible to draw a lottery whether or not to shift from the low probability state of special symbols to the high probability state of special symbols.

Furthermore, in this control example, the falling lottery described above is configured to be executed each time a special symbol lottery is performed. Accordingly, the easiness of execution of the falling lottery may be changed, for example, when the second special symbol lottery that is mainly executed during the high probability state of the normal symbol is performed, the first special symbol lottery is better. The fall lottery may be configured to be executed more easily than when it is performed. By constructing in this way, the high probability state of the special symbols shifts to the low probability state due to the drop lottery executed based on the first special symbol lottery being performed, and the game is played in an advantageous manner to the player. It can be suppressed that it becomes difficult to perform.

Further, a frequency determining means for determining the number of execution times of the fall lottery may be provided at the execution timing of the fall lottery, and the number of times of the fall lottery to be executed when the execution trigger of the fall lottery is established may be varied. good. In this case, it is preferable to set the range of the number of times determined by the number of times determining means to be "0 to 5" and to set the average value to be one. By configuring in this way, the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed and the number of times the drop lottery is executed can be diverged, so at what timing the high probability state of the special symbol shifts to the low probability state. It can make it more difficult to understand what to do. In this case, a suggesting means capable of suggesting the number of times determined by the number of times determining means (the number of executions of the falling lottery) is provided, and the player is notified of the period during which the player is likely to fall (a plurality of times is determined by the number of times determining means). and a period during which it is difficult to fall (a period during which 0 times is determined by the number of times determining means) can be suggested. As a result, it is possible to play a game while predicting the presence or absence of a fall based on the contents of suggestion by the suggestion means.

Furthermore, in this control example, the execution of the special symbol lottery is used as the trigger for the execution of the drop lottery. Alternatively, the fall lottery may be executed when a ball enters a specific winning hole (for example, the general ball entry hole 63) provided on the game board 13. FIG.

Next, referring to FIG. 225, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. As described above, the fourth control example differs from the above-described first control example in that it has a fall lottery function. Further, the contents of various effects set by the sound lamp control device 113 are also different in that the effects based on the result of the falling lottery can be executed. Other configurations are the same, and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 225(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example, and FIG. 225(b) shows the contents of the RAM 223 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the.

First, the configuration of the ROM 222 will be described with reference to FIG. 225(a). As shown in FIG. 2254(a), in the fourth control example, in contrast to the above-described first control example, instead of the button operation effect selection table 222f (see FIG. 148), a button operation effect selection 2 table 222df is displayed. are provided, and the rest are the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 226(a), the contents of the effect selection 2 table 222df at the time of button operation will be described. FIG. 226(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the button operation effect selection 2 table 222df. As shown in FIG. 226(a), in this fourth control example, the data table referred to when the probability variation state is set after the end of the jackpot game is changed to the probability variation state selection table, in contrast to the above-described first control example. 223f2 (see FIG. 149) is changed to the variable probability state selection 2 table 222df2, and the rest is the same.

Here, with reference to FIG. 226(b), the contents defined in the probability variation state selection 2 table 222df2 will be described. FIG. 226(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the probability variation state selection 2 table 222df2. This probability variation state selection 2 table 222df2, similar to the above-described probability variation state selection table 223f2 (see FIG. 149), when the probability variation state is set after the end of the jackpot game, when selecting the effect mode to be executed as an operation effect is a data table referred to, with respect to the variable state selection table 223f2 (see FIG. 149), the point of adding the lottery result of the falling lottery to the factor for selecting the production mode of the operation production, and the lottery of the falling lottery The difference is that it is possible to select a presentation mode that can suggest information based on the result, and that the selection ratio of each presentation mode is partially changed. Other contents are the same, and detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

In the variable probability state selection 2 table 222df2, similar to the variable probability state selection table 223f2 (see FIG. 149) described above, the timing when the player operates the frame button 22 (operation means), the operation method, and the acquired production counter 223f In addition to the value, an effect mode to be executed as an operation effect is defined corresponding to the setting status of the short drop flag 223da set based on the result of the drop lottery. The details of this short fall flag 223da will be described later, but by winning the fall lottery, the duration of the probability variable state is a predetermined period (for example, the number of special symbol lotteries is within 20) A flag for indicating that it was. , and is set to ON when the variable probability state ends in a short period of time.

Among the probability variation state selection 2 table 222df2, the same content as the probability variation state selection table 223f2 (see FIG. 149) is defined in the area referred to when the short fall flag 223da is set to off. Therefore, detailed description is omitted. Here, a specific description will be given of the defined contents of the area referred to when the short fall flag 223da is set to ON.

When the short fall flag 223da is set to ON, the operation timing is the first period in which the operation timing is a high-speed fluctuation period (the number of special figure fluctuations is 1 to 20 times), and the operation method is "normal push". When the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 149", it indicates that no operation effect is executed, and in the range of "150 to 189", the variable effect being executed is The "ready-to-win suggestion" indicating the effect of suggesting whether or not the ready-to-win state occurs during the third symbol variation, and the range of "140 to 189" includes the effect for suggesting the currently set game state. The indicated "state suggestion" and the range of "190 to 198" define the "state suggestion" indicating an effect for suggesting the currently set game state. Further, when the operation method is "long press", the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 198", and "background mode transition" indicating that the background mode is to be transitioned is stipulated. .

In addition, when the operation timing is during the normal time-saving fluctuation period (second period), the operation method is "normal push", and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 189", the background mode is shifted. In the range of "190 to 198", "background mode transition" indicating that the game is to be played is defined as "suggestion of state" indicating an effect for suggesting the currently set gaming state. In addition, when the operation method is "long press", the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is within the range of "0 to 198", indicating the effect for suggesting the currently set game state "suggest state". is stipulated.

Then, when the operation timing is within a specific period (during the 50th special symbol variation), the operation effect is not executed regardless of the operation method and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f. Finally, the operation timing is normal during the short time fluctuation period (third period), the operation method is "normal push", and the value of the acquired production counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 189", the background mode In the range of "190 to 198", the "background mode transition" indicating the transition was set to a variable state after the end of the previous jackpot game, but it was elected to the falling lottery early and went to a time-saving state. "Early fall notification" is defined, which indicates an effect for notifying that the transition has been made. In addition, when the operation method is "long press", the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is within the range of "0 to 198", in the past (when the "chance mode" is set (after the jackpot game is over)) A "past state suggestion" indicating an effect for suggesting the game state that has been set is stipulated.

In addition, for various operation effects in the present fourth control example, as in the first control example described above, not only the lottery result for the special symbol variation executed this time, but also the winning prize stored in the winning prize information storage area 223b An operation effect based on the information may be executed. For example, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b is used to determine in advance the timing of winning the falling lottery, and the operation based on the determination result. The production may be configured to be executable. Specifically, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b is read in the order of execution of the special symbol lottery, and the information indicating the value of the falling lottery counter cd1 included in each winning information wins the falling lottery. Determine if it shows a value. In this case, the ROM 222 of the sound ramp control device 113 is preliminarily stored with information corresponding to the value of the drop lottery counter cd1 for winning the drop lottery, and the stored information and the winning information are included. and information indicating the value of the drop lottery counter cd1.

Among the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b, the winning information whose execution order of the special symbol lottery is fixed, that is, the second special symbol lottery has priority over the first special symbol lottery. In this control example to be executed, if the winning information for the second special symbol lottery does not include the winning information for winning the falling lottery, the remaining variation time of the special symbol variation currently being executed and the winning information The process of calculating the variation time of the special symbol variation corresponding to each of the winning information of the second special symbol lottery stored in the storage area 223b, and the period during which the fall lottery cannot be won, that is, the probability variable state determines the duration of the period (most favorable period). Then, the most advantageous period suggesting effect mode for informing the player of the determined most advantageous period may be executed as the operation effect.

With this configuration, it is possible to suggest (notify) the player the period during which he or she cannot win the drop lottery, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. In addition, as a display mode of suggesting the most advantageous period, it is preferable to display at least a part of the total time of each fluctuation time resulting as the most advantageous period. This allows the player to grasp at least the length of time during which the most profitable period lasts. In addition, by displaying the most advantageous period in terms of time, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp how many times the special symbol lottery can be executed during the most advantageous period. Even if the pachinko machine 10 is set to have a higher possibility of winning a big hit, the player is expected to expect a short variation time as the variation pattern of the special symbol variation. can provide.

As described above, when the operation effect is executed based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b, the operation effect is executed immediately after the player operates the frame button 22 (operation means). Alternatively, the player operates the frame button 22 (operating means), and the operation effect is executed at the timing when the special symbol variation is newly started in the state where the effect mode of the operation effect is decided. It may be configured to In this case, a notification means for notifying the player that the operation of the frame button 22 (operation means) by the player has been received, and a notification means for notifying that it is in the waiting period until the operation effect is executed. and should be provided. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful of the fact that the operation effect is not executed despite the operation of the frame button 22 . In addition, in the presentation for notifying the most advantageous period, the most advantageous period may be displayed by the number of executions of the special symbol variation instead of being displayed by the time as described above. If it is determined that the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b includes the winning information indicating that the falling lottery will be won, the falling lottery will be won and the special symbol will be displayed. Calculate the period until the high-probability state transitions to the low-probability state, and perform a production that suggests winning the fall lottery or a production that suggests the remaining period until the high-probability state of the special pattern ends. It may be configured as follows.

<Regarding control processing content in the fourth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 227 to 229, among the control processing contents executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in this fourth control example, points that differ from the first control example described above will be described. The pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example has the fall lottery function as described above, and changes the continuation period of the game state set after the jackpot game ends. It is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the example, and the contents of control related to this difference are different. Specifically, for the control contents of the main controller in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above, instead of the special symbol jackpot determination processing (see S208 in FIG. 158), special symbol jackpot determination processing 4 (FIG. 227) (see S258 of FIG. 162) is replaced with the prefetching process (see S613 of FIG. 162), and the prefetching process 4 (see S653 of FIG. 228) is replaced with the jackpot end process (see S1910 of FIG. 170), and the jackpot end process 4 (see FIG. 229 (see S1960 of )), but the rest is the same. Identical contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 227, the contents of the special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S258) will be described. FIG. 227 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S258). When this special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S258) is executed, the process of S301 which is the same as the special symbol jackpot determination process (see S208 in FIG. 158) is executed, and then the value of the probability variation counter 203i increases from 0. is larger (S351). Here, when the value of the probability variation counter 203i is not greater than 0, that is, when it is determined that the special symbol is not in a high probability state (S351: No), the above-described special symbol jackpot determination process (see S208 in FIG. 158) The same processing of S302 to S307 as above is executed, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S351, the value of the probability variation counter 203i is greater than 0, that is, if it is determined that the special symbol is in a high probability state (S351: Yes), then the value of the acquired falling lottery counter Cd1 and , and the values defined in the drop lottery table 202da (S352), and it is determined whether or not the drop lottery has been won (S353).

When it is determined that the falling lottery has been won (S353: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203i is reset to 0 (S354), and the falling for indicating that the high probability state of the special symbol has shifted to the low probability state. A command is set (S355), the same S302 to S307 processing as the above-described special symbol jackpot determination processing (see S208 in FIG. 158) is executed, and this processing ends. In this case, the special symbol lottery (S302) is executed in a state where the special symbol low probability state is set. On the other hand, in the process of S353, if it is determined that the falling lottery is not won (S353: No), the processes of S353 to S355 are skipped, and the above-described special symbol jackpot determination process (see S208 in FIG. 158) and The same processing of S302 to S307 is executed, and this processing ends. In this case, the special symbol lottery (S302) is executed in the normal state in which the special symbol high probability state is set.

As described above, in the fourth control example, in the state where the execution condition for the special symbol lottery is established (the state where the special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (see S258 in FIG. 227) is executed), the special symbol is actually A drop lottery is configured to be executed before the lottery is executed. With this configuration, the special symbol lottery corresponding to the lottery result of the falling lottery can be immediately executed, so that the player can be provided with a fair game.

It should be noted that the execution timing of the fall lottery and the execution timing of the special symbol lottery may be configured to be different from this control example, for example, the fall lottery may be executed after the special symbol lottery is executed. may be configured. In this case, the special symbol lottery is executed in a state in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set, and the fall lottery is executed immediately after that, so the special symbol lottery executed in the high probability state of the special symbol. By the time the lottery result is stopped and displayed (before the special symbol fluctuation is stopped and displayed), an event occurs in which the falling lottery is won and the special symbol low probability state is set. When such a state occurs, for example, the special symbol variation currently being executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 becomes the last variation in which the special symbol lottery is executed in a high probability state, It is preferable to configure so as to execute a falling notification performance for indicating that the next special symbol lottery will be executed in a low probability state of the special symbols. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the result of the special symbol variation being executed.

In addition, in this control example, when the falling lottery is won, the process of shifting the special symbol high probability state to the low probability state is executed before the next special symbol lottery is executed. However, without being limited to this, for example, when the falling lottery is won, the number of times the high probability state of the special symbol continues is subtracted by 2 or more (the value of the probability variable counter 203i is subtracted by 2 or more), or the high probability of the special symbol The remaining number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed during the probability state may be set to a predetermined number (for example, two times). Even if it is configured in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the game state (probability variable state) that is most advantageous to the player will continue by winning the drop lottery. It is possible to make the player play a game with feeling.

In this control example, when the drop lottery is not won, that is, when the high-probability state of the special symbol continues, by not executing the effect for suggesting or notifying the player of that fact, The period during which the high probability state of the special pattern continues (continued period) is configured to be difficult for the player to understand. It may be configured so as to notify the player to that effect. In this case, for example, in the drop lottery table 202da, not only the value of the drop lottery counter Cd1 determined as winning (falling) but also the value (for example, 998, 999) determined as being out of specification are defined. When it is determined to be a value, by setting a command indicating that it is out of specification, an effect may be executed to indicate to the player that the result of the fall lottery is out of specification, A command for indicating that the lottery result of the fall lottery is lost is set, and when the command for indicating that the lottery result of the fall lottery is lost is received on the voice lamp control device 113 side, the fall lottery is performed. A lottery may be conducted as to whether or not to execute an effect indicating that the lottery result is a loss, and if it is determined to execute the effect by the lottery, the loss effect may be executed.

Next, referring to FIG. 228, the content of the prefetching process 4 (S653) in the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 228 is a flow chart showing the contents of prefetching process 4 (S653). This look-ahead process 4 (S653) is different from the look-ahead process (see S613 in FIG. 162) executed in the above-described first control example. In the process of reading the various counters stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b), the difference is that the types of the various counters to be read out are different, and the rest is the same. The same processing contents are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

When the look-ahead process 4 (S653) is executed, the first hit random number counter newly stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area (first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b). C1, the first hit type counter C2, the fall lottery counter Cd1, and the variation type counter CS1 are read (S751), and then S702, which is the same as the prefetching process (see S613 in FIG. 162) executed in the first control example described above. The processing of S705 is executed, and this processing ends.

As described above, in the fourth control example, in the start winning process (see S105 in FIG. 161), when a new special symbol lottery right (special symbol reservation) is acquired (special symbol reserved ball storage area In the look-ahead process 4 (S653) executed when new winning information is stored in the memory, the value of the falling lottery counter Cd1 is also read, and a winning command including the acquired value of the falling lottery counter Cd1 is set. , to the audio lamp controller 113 . As a result, it becomes possible to determine whether or not information indicating the value of the falling lottery counter Cd1 that wins the falling lottery is included in the special figure reserved balls already acquired on the side of the voice lamp control device 113.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to make it possible to execute a suggestive effect suggesting a period until winning the falling lottery.

Next, with reference to FIG. 229, the contents of the jackpot ending process 4 (S1960) will be described. FIG. 229 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot ending process 4 (S1960). This jackpot end processing 4 (S1960) differs from the jackpot end processing (see S1910 in FIG. 170) of the first control example described above in that the processing content for setting the value of the time reduction counter 203h is different. They are different, but otherwise the contents are the same. Identical contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

When the jackpot end processing 4 (S1960) is executed, first, the same S2101 and S2102 processing as the jackpot end processing (see S1910 in FIG. 170) of the first control example described above is executed. A value corresponding to the game state and the jackpot type is set in the time saving counter 203h (S2153), and a state command is set based on the value of the variable probability counter 203i set this time and the value of the time saving counter 203h (S2104), and the jackpot The middle flag 203k and the variable probability setting flag 203m are set to OFF (S2105), and this process is terminated.

Here, the processing contents of S2153 will be described in detail. In this control example, the game state storage area 203g can temporarily store the current game state, the game state set when the previous big win was won, and the jackpot type to be selected when the big win is won. Configure. Then, when the process of S2153 is executed, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot stored in the game state storage area 203g and the jackpot type are read, and the value specified in the jackpot type selection table 202d is set to the time saving counter. 203h.

In this control example, when the jackpot ending process 4 is executed, that is, when all the round games in the jackpot game are finished, the value to be set to the time saving counter 203h is determined. By configuring in this way, establishment of a setting condition that can be established during a round game of a jackpot game, for example, establishment of a setting condition that is established when passing through a specific area (V gate 65V) during a round game (V round game) The value set to the time saving counter 203h can be varied according to the presence or absence of.

In addition, regardless of the configuration used in this control example, for example, at the start of the jackpot game or at the time of selecting the winning jackpot type, the value of the time saving counter 203h based on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is determined. , a value corresponding to the content of the determination may be set in the jackpot ending process 4 (see S1960). By configuring in this way, since it is not necessary to hold the information indicating the game state at the time of winning the big win during the period of the big win game, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity.

Next, referring to FIGS. 230 and 231, among the control processing contents executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourth control example, the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the above-described first control example Differences from the contents of the control processing executed by are explained. The fourth control example differs greatly from the above-described first control example in that a drop lottery is executed. It is different in that it performs processing related to

Specifically, the difference is that the command determination process 4 (see S4162 in FIG. 230) is executed instead of the command determination process (see S4112 in FIG. 175). Since the other contents are the same, the same reference numerals are given and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 230, the contents of command determination processing 4 (S4162) will be described. FIG. 230 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 4 (S4162). As shown in FIG. 230, in this command determination process 4 (S4162), when it is determined that the jackpot related command is not received for the command determination process of the first control example (see S4112 in FIG. 175) (S4217: No), then it is determined whether a fall command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4251), and if it is determined that a fall command has been received (S4251: Yes), fall-related processing (S4252) is executed. It is different in that Note that if it is determined in the process of S4251 that no fall command has been received (S4251: No), or after the fall-related process (S4252) has been executed, the above-described command determination process of the first control example (FIG. 175 S4219, which is the same as S4112), is executed, and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 231, the details of the fall-related processing (S4252) executed in the command determination processing 4 (see S4162 in FIG. 230) will be described. FIG. 231 is a flow chart showing details of the fall-related processing (S4252). This fall-related process (S4252) is a fall command set when it is determined that the fall lottery is won in the fall lottery (see S352 and S353 in FIG. 227) executed by main controller 110 (see FIG. 227). S355 reference) is received, and is for executing a process for determining the timing of receiving the fall command (the timing when the high probability state of the special symbol ends).

When the fall-related processing (S4252) is executed, first, the value of the time saving counter 203h is read (S5501), and it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is 80 or more (S5502). The value of the time saving counter 203h is set to a value corresponding to the number of times of time saving set after the end of the jackpot game (the number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed during the high probability state of normal symbols), and each time the special symbol lottery is executed. Since 1 is subtracted from , for example, if the number of times of time reduction is set to 100 times after the end of the jackpot game, the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the end of the jackpot game falls before reaching 20 times It is determined whether or not the lottery has been won. That is, in the process of S5502, it is determined whether or not the drop lottery is won early despite the high probability state of the special symbol being set.

In the process of S5502, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 80 or more (S5502: Yes), the short fall flag 223da is set to ON (S5503), and the time saving state is set in the secondary state setting area 223g. (S5504), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5502, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not 80 or more (S5502: No), the process of S5503 is skipped, the process of S5504 is executed, and this process ends.

By setting the short fall flag 223da to ON in the processing of S5503, in the frame button input monitoring/production processing (see S4107 in FIG. 186), it is determined that the frame button 22 was operated during the chance mode, and the probability variation state selection 2 table 222df2 (FIG. 226(b)) to select a presentation mode, the presentation mode is selected by referring to a different data table than when the short fall flag 223da is set to OFF. . Therefore, since the player can be made to grasp the result of the fall lottery after the fact by the effect mode of the operation effect to be executed, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

<Regarding the production example in the second control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 232, among the third symbol variation effects executed in the above-described second control example, the variation direction of the sub symbol fz is made different from the variation direction of the main symbol sz. The content of the reverse fluctuation display effect (see FIG. 205(d)), which is the effect, will be described. FIG. 232 is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed during the reverse fluctuation display effect.

As described above, in the second control example, the main symbol sz including the identification information for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol and the sub-symbol fz different from the main symbol sz can be displayed and controlled independently. For example, as shown in FIG. 202(b), the sub-symbol fz is variably displayed before the main symbol sz is variably displayed, and then the sub-symbol fz is stopped before the main symbol sz is stopped. By stop-displaying the fz, it is possible to execute a reach line announcement performance for notifying the player of only the stop-display position of the main symbol sz. In addition, as shown in FIG. 205(d), the sub-symbol fz is variably displayed for a predetermined period (3 seconds) in a direction different from the variable display direction of the main symbol sz in accordance with the start timing of the special symbol variation. It is configured to be able to execute the reverse fluctuation display effect.

The contents of this reverse fluctuation display effect will be described with reference to FIG. First, a variation pattern command for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is transmitted from main controller 110 . Then, when the variation pattern command is received by the audio lamp control device 113 side, the processing (variation display setting processing (FIG. 182 (see S4113))), the process of determining the effect mode (fluctuation pattern) for the main symbol sz is executed. Thus, based on the result of the special symbol lottery executed by the main controller 110, the performance mode of the main symbol sz, which is the identification information (identification symbol) for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol, can be surely set. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the stop display of the main symbol sz for indicating a lottery result different from the result of the actually executed special symbol lottery.

After that, based on the effect mode of the main symbol sz determined by the sound ramp control device 113, processing for setting the effect mode of the sub-symbol fz is executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the production mode of the ready-to-win state is set as the production mode for the main symbol sz, and when it is determined that the production mode of the ready-to-win state is set, the production mode of the sub-symbol fz is determined. is executed. In addition, when the production mode of the ready-to-win state is not set as the production mode for the main symbol sz, a variation pattern corresponding to the production mode set for the main symbol sz is set for the sub-symbol fz. It is configured as follows. As a result, the sub-symbol fz can be variably displayed in synchronism with the main symbol sz variably displayed in the effect mode (fluctuation pattern) set based on the lottery result of the special symbol. Therefore, the player can be made to feel as if the main symbols sz and the sub-symbols fz are variably displayed as a sequence of symbols arranged in a specific order.

In the above example, when the effect mode for the main symbol sz is in the reach state, the process for selecting the effect mode for the sub symbol fz is executed. For example, in the ready-to-win state, when the specific ready-to-win state (for example, super ready-to-win state) effect mode is set, the processing for selecting the effect mode of the sub symbol fz may be executed. Alternatively, the processing for selecting the effect mode of the sub-symbol fz may be executed even in a part of cases where the effect mode set for the main symbol sz is the non-reach state. That is, when the effect mode of the main symbol sz is set in the effect mode indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is likely to be a big hit, the process of selecting the effect mode of the sub-symbol fz becomes easier to execute. It should be configured as follows. By constructing in this manner, a player wins a big hit just by setting (executing) a performance mode different from a normal performance mode (a performance mode synchronized with the performance mode of the main symbol sz) as the sub-symbol fz. It can make you feel hopeful about winning.

Further, in the above example, when the process of selecting the effect mode of the sub-symbol fz is not executed, the effect mode (synchronized effect mode) corresponding to the effect mode of the main symbol sz is set for the sub-symbol fz. It is constructed in such a manner that a variable effect is executed in which the variable display of the sub symbol fz is synchronized with the variable display of the main symbol sz. As a result, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the secondary symbol fz is variably displayed so as to follow the variable display of the main symbol sz, so that the variable display of the third symbol ( The same variable display as that shown in FIG. 122(b)) is executed. Therefore, for the player, a plurality of main symbols sz and a plurality of sub symbols fz are displayed in a predetermined order (1 (main symbol sz)→triangle mark (sub) as shown in FIG. 122(b). Symbol fz)→2 (main symbol sz)→ .

Therefore, when the performance mode of the main pattern sz and the performance mode of the sub-pattern fz are set differently, the performance with unexpectedness can be provided to the player, so that the performance effect can be enhanced. In addition, since the processing for setting the effect mode for the main symbol sz and the processing for setting the effect mode for the sub-symbol fz are different, the main symbol sz and the sub-symbol fz are variably displayed in a non-synchronized pattern. can be easily performed. That is, as in the above-described first control example, the pachinko machine 10 configured to set the effect mode (variation pattern) for all the third symbols (main symbols sz and sub-symbols fz), for example , When setting the production mode (variation pattern) in which only the variable display mode of the sub-symbol fz is different, only the variable display mode of the sub-symbol fz is targeted for all the third patterns (main pattern sz and sub-symbol fz) However, as in the second control example, the production mode for the main symbol sz and the production mode for the sub-symbol fz can be set independently. By doing so, it is sufficient to variably set only the effect mode for the sub-symbol fz, and the process for setting the effect mode of the third symbol can be reduced.

Returning to FIG. 232, the description continues. When the processing for selecting the effect mode of the sub-symbol fz is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. is used to select the effect mode of the sub-symbol fz. Here, in the sub-symbol effect selection table (not shown), the result of the special symbol lottery and the effect mode set for the main symbol sz are associated with each other, and the effect mode of the sub-symbol fz is set at a predetermined ratio. is stipulated. Specifically, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit" and "double reach" is set as the production mode of the main symbol sz, "reach line notice effect" is selected at a rate of 60%. , and it is stipulated that "reverse fluctuation display effect" is selected at a rate of 20%, and "no secondary symbol effect" is selected at a rate of 20%.

Further, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big win" and "single reach" is set as the production mode of the main symbol sz, "reach line notice production" is selected at a rate of 20%, and 20 %, the "reverse fluctuation display effect" is selected, and 60%, the "no secondary symbol effect" is selected.

Furthermore, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "loss" and "double reach" is set as the production mode of the main symbol sz, "reverse fluctuation display production" is selected at a rate of 40%, and 60 %, and when "single reach" is set as the production mode of the main pattern sz, "reach line notice effect" is set at a rate of 5%. ” is selected, “reverse fluctuation display effect” is selected at a rate of 5%, and “no secondary symbol effect” is selected at a rate of 90%.

Using the sub-symbol effect selection table (not shown) defined in this way, when the "reverse fluctuation display effect" is selected, then the display mode for selecting the display mode of the sub-symbol fz Selection processing is performed. In this display mode selection process, a process for selecting the display mode of the sub-symbol fz used in the third symbol variation effect (the effect mode of the sub-symbol fz) is executed. The display mode of the sub-symbol fz is selected according to the result and the set jackpot type. The display mode of the secondary symbol fz that can be selected here is stored in the character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114, which was described with reference to FIG. The stored display mode is displayed.

That is, in the display mode selection process executed by the sound lamp control device 113, a display sub-symbol mode command (display command) for specifying the effect mode of the sub-symbol fz is set, and the set display sub-symbol When the display control device 114 receives a pattern mode command (display command), a process of reading the corresponding image data from the character storage area 234a2 is executed.

In the display mode selection process, for example, as shown in FIG. 203(c), the display mode SD1 of the "triangle mark" which is the normal display mode of the sub-symbol fz and the "bubbles" indicating the high expectation of the big win are simulated. and a display mode SD3 imitating "the number 16" indicating that an advantageous jackpot game (16-round game) advantageous to the player is executed when the jackpot is won. The display mode is configured to be selected, and when the result of this special symbol lottery is a big win, it is easier to select the display mode SD2 than when it is other than a big win (case of loss). Further, when the advantageous jackpot game is executed based on the result of the special symbol lottery executed this time, when the advantageous jackpot game is not executed (when the jackpot is not elected, the jackpot is elected) , when a jackpot game other than an advantageous jackpot game is executed), the display mode SD3 is configured to be easier to select.

By constructing in this manner, the player can be interested in both the presentation mode set for the sub-symbol fz and the display mode set for the sub-symbol fz. , there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

FIG. 232 shows a state in which the "reverse fluctuation display effect" is executed as the effect mode of the sub-symbol fz, and the display mode SD2 imitating "bubbles" is set as the display mode of the sub-symbol fz. 232, the main symbol sz is variably displayed to the left, and the sub-symbol fz is variably displayed to the right from the viewpoint of FIG. In this way, the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz are variably displayed in the opposite directions as the variable display of the third pattern (the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz) on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. With this, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected variable presentation. Furthermore, as a production mode using the sub-symbol fz, since the sub-symbol fz is variably displayed in a variable display direction different from the variably displayed direction of the main symbol sz, the effect mode of the sub-symbol fz is different from usual for the player. It is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the two are different presentation modes.

In the display screen shown in FIG. 232, all the sub-symbols fz displayed on the display surface are displayed in the display mode SD2 imitating the "bubble" selected by the display mode selection process described above. , without being limited to this, only the display mode of one of the sub-symbols fz among the plurality of sub-symbols fz may be varied. In this case, only the display mode of the sub-symbol fz arranged in the vicinity of the main symbol sz that is finally stopped and displayed is configured to be easily changed to the display mode selected by the above-described display mode selection process. Also good. Thereby, it is possible to easily predict the stop display mode of the main symbol sz based on the display mode of the sub symbol fz.

In addition, the display screen shown in FIG. 232 shows an example in which all the sub-symbols fz displayed on the display surface are of the same size. , rotation angle, translucent value, etc. may be set differently. In this case, the values defined in the display data table (see FIG. 207) for displaying each sub-symbol fz may be changed.

In addition, in FIG. 232, at the timing when the third symbol variation is started, the display mode of the sub symbol fz is switched from the normal "triangle mark" display mode SD1 to the "bubble" display mode SD2, and the reverse variation occurs. Although an example in which the display effect is executed is shown, it is not limited to this, and as the timing before the start of the third symbol variation, after the previous third symbol variation is stopped and displayed, the current third symbol variation is displayed. The display mode of the sub-symbol fz is switched during the period until the 3-symbol variation is started, and the display mode of the sub-symbol fz is switched during the period from the start of the current 3rd symbol variation to the stop. can be

In addition, when executing the process of switching the display mode of the sub-symbol fz during the period from when the last third symbol variation is stopped and displayed until the current third symbol variation is started, for example, a look-ahead process is performed. By analyzing whether it is included in the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b, and when the special symbol lottery (fluctuation) to be executed next results in a specific lottery result (for example, winning a jackpot), it is stopped and displayed. It may be configured to vary the display mode of the secondary symbol fz. In this case, before setting the production mode of the main symbol sz for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol lottery (variation) to be executed next, the display used for the variable performance of the sub-symbol fz to be executed next. Aspects will be determined. In this way, by using the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b, the timing of notifying the player of each aspect used in the third symbol variation production aspect for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery can be varied. Therefore, the player can be interested in the third symbol variation effect to be executed.

Further, when executing the process of switching the display mode of the sub-symbol fz during the period from the start of the current third symbol variation to the stop, the sub-symbol fz is switched at the time when the third symbol variation is started. It may be displayed in the display mode before switching, or may be configured to display the sub-symbol fz after the process of switching the display mode is executed.

<Regarding the switching control of the switching valve executed during the jackpot game>
In each control example described above, as described using the jackpot operation setting process (see S1906 in FIG. 169) and the V round process (see S2251 in FIG. 219), a specific round game (V round game) is started. 120(b) or FIG. 213(b)). That is, only when the jackpot game to be executed is a probability variable jackpot game, a specific round game (V round game) is configured to be executed, and when it is a normal jackpot game, a specific round (V round game) was configured so that it would not run. By configuring in this way, it was possible to suppress the ball from winning a V prize (passing to a specific area (V gate 65V)) during a normal jackpot game. Accordingly, since it is necessary to vary the contents of the control process for the switching valve 65y, there is a problem of increasing the processing load during the jackpot game.

Therefore, control processing other than the control processing content for the switching valve 65y used in each control example described above may be used. The condition for ending the game may be different from that of the variable probability jackpot game so that the ball cannot enter the variable winning device 65 during the V-round game. Further, as in the fourth control example in which the above-described V-round process (see S2251 in FIG. 219) is performed, when the switching valve 65y is switched and controlled based on the number of winning balls after the V-round game is performed. In the normal jackpot game, the number of wins of balls for switching control of the switching valve 65y is set to a number larger than the number of wins (for example, 10) for ending the V-round game. It may be configured such that the switching control of the valve 65y is not executed.

In addition, even if the control contents (switching conditions) of the switching valve 65y are set to be the same for the probability variable jackpot game and the normal jackpot game, and the ball passes through the specific area (V gate 65V) during execution of the normal jackpot game , may be configured not to effectively process its passage. That is, even if the ball passes through the specific area during the normal jackpot game, the high probability state of the special symbol may not be set during the jackpot game.

Furthermore, regardless of the type of the jackpot game, after the jackpot game is started (after the opening period of the jackpot game is set), when a predetermined period of time has passed, the switching valve 65y is kept open for a predetermined period. , and the opening pattern of the open/close door 65b in the jackpot game is changed according to the jackpot game type, thereby making the V winning probability different for each jackpot game type. good.

In the second control example and the modified example of the second control example described above, both the effect mode (variation pattern) of the main symbol sz and the effect mode (variation pattern) of the sub symbol fz are set by the sound ramp control device 113 ( selection), but without being limited to this, the display control device 114 may be configured to set the effect mode (fluctuation pattern), and in this case, the result of the special symbol lottery is displayed. It is preferable that only the presentation mode of the main symbol sz is set by the sound lamp control device 113 and the presentation mode of the sub-symbol fz is set by the display control device 114 .

The second control example and the modification of the second control example have been described above. In this case, it is sufficient if the effect mode is set independently for the type of pattern to be dynamically displayed, and the display control is executed independently, and the configuration shown in the control example described above is sufficient. Other configurations may be used.

For example, a plurality of display layers for displaying the sub-symbol fz may be provided, and the sub-symbol fz may be overlapped and variably displayed as in the modification of the second control example described above with reference to FIG. Also good.

In addition, a plurality of display layers are provided, the priority order of display is set for each layer, and when the display mode displayed on each display layer overlaps on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, has been controlled so that the display mode displayed on the layer with the highest priority can be visually recognized by the player. The display modes displayed in a plurality of display layers may be overlapped and displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 . In this case, for example, in the case of executing the "reverse fluctuation display effect" with reference to FIG. Display control (set the translucency value and magnification ratio of each sub-symbol) so that is displayed, and it is possible to suggest in advance that the display mode of the sub-symbol fz is variable from "triangle mark" to "bubble" It may be configured to display in a display mode.

As described above, in the first control example and the fourth control example described above, the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) as the game state, and the player than the normal state As an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the game, there are two types: a variable state (high probability state of special patterns, high probability state of normal patterns) and a short time state (low probability state of special patterns, high probability state of normal patterns). It is configured to be able to set the advantageous game state of. Furthermore, it is configured such that the time saving state is set after the variable probability state ends.

Then, when the advantageous gaming state is set, then the period until the normal state is set, for example, when the variable probability state is set, the time saving state set after the end of the variable probability state ends The period until the normal state is set can be notified to the player as the continuation period of the advantageous game state. With this configuration, the player can be notified of the period until the end of the advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player, not the period until the currently set game state ends. A player can play a game with peace of mind.

In addition, when notifying a period in which a plurality of advantageous game states continue continuously as the duration of one advantageous game state, depending on the contents and execution frequency of various effects executed by the third symbol display device 81, It is configured so that the player can grasp the detailed game state currently set. By constructing in this way, it is possible to perform a game while predicting the current game state while grasping the period until the normal state is set, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, in the first control example and the fourth control example described above, among the plurality of advantageous gaming states, the most advantageous gaming state (probability variable state) that is advantageous to the player is set first, and then the most advantageous gaming state is set. Although it is configured to set a normal advantageous gaming state (time saving state) that is more disadvantageous than (probability variable state), it may be configured so that a plurality of advantageous gaming states can be set in succession. As the state, in addition to the normal state, the probability variable state, and the time saving state, the latent state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is also set, and the latent state is more likely than the variable state In the pachinko machine 10 configured to be more advantageous to the player, the game state (probability variable state, time-saving state, latent probability state) in which the special pattern or the normal pattern is a high probability state is advantageous to the player. It becomes a game state. Then, the value of the variable probability counter 203i indicating the period during which the high probability state of the special symbol continues can be set to be larger than the value of the time reduction counter 203h indicating the period of continuing the high probability state of the normal symbol. .

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, for example, as the variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game, "100" can be set as the value of the variable probability counter 203i and "50" can be set as the value of the time reduction counter 203h. , After the end of the jackpot game, a variable probability state is set as an advantageous game state, and then a latent probability state is set. Even in such a case, as in the first control example and the fourth control example described above, the period in which a plurality of advantageous gaming states continue continuously, that is, the latent probability state set after the variable probability state The period until the end of is preferably reported as the continuation period of one advantageous gaming state. Also, in this case, during the continuation period of the advantageous gaming state, it is possible to execute a transition suggesting effect capable of suggesting to the player whether or not there is a possibility that the currently set gaming state will transition to another gaming state. should be configured to As a result, the player can grasp only that there is a possibility of transition to another game state during the advantageous game state. can provide. Furthermore, when there is a possibility that the currently set game state shifts to another game state during the duration of the advantageous game state, the game state after transition is a game state that is more advantageous to the player. It may be configured to be able to execute an advantageous transition suggesting effect capable of suggesting whether or not. Further, it may be configured to execute a suggestive effect suggesting the timing at which the game state shifts during the advantageous game state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to enjoy the game during the period while grasping the period until the normal state is set.

Further, in the first control example and the fourth control example described above, when the jackpot is won during the advantageous game state, the advantageous game state is terminated. A most advantageous game state (probability variable state) that is advantageous to the player is set first, and then a normal advantageous game state (time reduction state) that is more disadvantageous than the most advantageous game state (probability variable state) is set. Therefore, the player is not disadvantaged by winning a jackpot during an advantageous game state, but for example, among a plurality of advantageous game states, the normal advantageous game state (probability variable state) that is more advantageous to the player is first. A pachinko machine 10 configured to set a most advantageous game state (potential state) that is more advantageous to the player than a normal advantageous game state (probability variable state) is set after that, during the normal advantageous game state. It may be more advantageous for the player to set the most advantageous gaming state without winning the jackpot rather than winning the jackpot.

Therefore, it is constructed so as to execute the performance during the period in which the player can distinguish between the period in which winning the jackpot as a result of the special symbol lottery executed during the advantageous game state is advantageous to the player and the period in which it is disadvantageous to the player. good to do As a result, the result of the special symbol lottery can be watched closely based on the contents identified by the period presentation, so the amusement of the game can be improved. Furthermore, as jackpot types set when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player if set during a normal advantageous game state, and a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player if set during a normal advantageous game state If the pachinko machine 10 has a jackpot type that is not disadvantageous to the player, whether the jackpot winning is advantageous to the player based on the performance contents of the above-described period performance and the jackpot type set at the time of winning the jackpot. It may be configured to execute an effect suggesting whether or not. As a result, the player can be interested not only in the game aiming at winning the big win in the special pattern lottery, but also in the timing of winning the big win and the kind of big win set at the time of winning the big win.

In the above-described first control example, it is configured to set one of a plurality of types (two types) of advantageous game states (probability variable state, time saving state) after the end of the jackpot game, but it is not limited to this, It may be configured so that the normal state can be set after the jackpot game ends. By configuring in this way, the player can play the game while expecting that the advantageous game state will be set after the end of the big winning game.

Further, in the above-described first control example, an effect mode (super chance mode) for notifying that the probability variable state is set after the end of the jackpot game according to the effect result of the jackpot game effect executed during the jackpot game, A production mode (chance mode) for notifying that an advantageous game state (probability variable state or time saving state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state after the jackpot game is set is set. . As a result, in the jackpot game performance executed during the jackpot game, meaningless performance of setting the chance mode after the jackpot game is completed despite notification that the variable probability state is set after the jackpot game is completed. You can prevent it from being executed.

For the technique of the first control example configured in this way, for example, an effect mode selection means is provided that allows the player to arbitrarily select the effect mode that is set after the end of the jackpot game. By making an arbitrary performance mode selectable, the performance mode of the big win game performance executed during the big win game and the performance mode set after the end of the big win game are changed to the contents selected by the performance mode selection means. It may be configured to be set correspondingly. Specifically, by the production mode selection means, as the production mode to be set after the end of the jackpot game, "complete notification mode" for notifying the actually set game state, and only that the advantageous game state is set A ``chance notification mode'' to be notified can be selected, and the player can operate the operation means (frame button 22) during the period when the special symbol lottery is not executed in the pachinko machine 10. A production mode is configured to be selectable.

A storage means for temporarily storing the production mode selected by the player is provided, and information that can identify the production mode stored in the storage means is displayed on a part of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (for example, a secondary It is displayed in the display area Ds) so that the currently set performance mode can always be identified by the player. Then, when a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery, the presentation mode stored in the storage means is read. For example, when the "complete notification mode" is stored in the storage means, as a jackpot game effect, the effect is to guide the ball through a specific area (V gate) 65v (V winning) during the jackpot game. When the V notification effect is executed and the ball actually passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v, the ending screen is displayed in a display mode indicating that the variable probability state is set after the jackpot game ends (Fig. 127 ( b), (d)), if not passed, the ending screen is displayed in a display mode indicating that the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game (see FIGS. 127 (a), (c)) Then, when the variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the "super chance mode" (see FIG. 131 (a)) indicating that the current game state is the variable probability state is set, and after the jackpot game ends Time saving When the state is set, a "chance mode" (see FIG. 128(a)) indicating that the current game state is a time-saving state is set. With this configuration, it is possible to reliably inform the player of the game state to be set and the presence or absence of the V prize that serves as a trigger for determining the game state.

On the other hand, when the "chance notification mode" is stored in the storage means, the above-described V notification effect is not executed as the jackpot game effect, and after the jackpot game is finished, regardless of the set game state, the "chance notification mode" is stored. mode is set. With this configuration, the game can be played without informing the player of the game state to be set and the presence or absence of the V prize that serves as a trigger for determining the game state. In addition, when the performance mode is not selected by the performance mode selection means, the "initial mode" is stored in the storage means similarly to the initial state of the pachinko machine 10, and is similar to the first control example described above. Then, it is decided by lottery whether or not to execute the V notification performance during the big winning game, the big winning game performance is executed based on the lottery result, and after the big winning game is finished based on the performance result of the big winning game performance. Production mode is set.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide an arbitrary effect mode desired by the player without discomfort, so that the player can be prevented from becoming bored with the game early.

Furthermore, as a means for selecting various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10, the selection ratio of various effects modes (see FIG. 148) selected for the operation effects executed when the chance mode is selected Effect frequency selection means may be provided which allows the player to select arbitrarily. Specifically, when the probability variable state is set and when the time saving state is set, the selection ratio of the various production modes to be selected is greatly diverged, or the difference in the selection ratio is reduced. It is preferable to provide an effect frequency selection means that allows the player to select the selection ratio so that the selection ratio can be selected. Even if such a configuration is used, it is possible to provide an arbitrary performance mode desired by the player without any sense of incongruity, thereby preventing the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

As described above, in the first to fourth control examples described above, the specific area (V gate 65V) provided in the variable winning device 65 is used during the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery. The pachinko machine 10 configured to set a high probability state (probability variable state) of special symbols after the end of the jackpot game by passing is explained, but in this way, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player has been described. As a configuration that can provide the player with a special game different from the privilege game based on the fact that the ball has passed through the specific area while When a small win is won, a second privilege game (small win game) different from the privilege game (jackpot game) can be executed, and a variable ball entry means (variable winning device) opened during the second privilege game. 65, or other prize-winning devices may be separately provided), a specific area through which the entering ball can pass is provided, and when the ball passes through the specific area during the second bonus game, the second bonus is given. You may use the structure which can perform a privilege game (jackpot game) after the end of a game (small hit game).

In addition, as the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in each control example described above, as shown in FIG. The game ball can be entered into the first ball entrance 64 that can be the execution trigger, and the game ball can be entered into the second ball entrance 640 that can be the execution trigger of the second special symbol lottery by executing the right-handed game. It may be configured so that it is possible to enter the ball.

<Fifth control example>
Next, a fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 234 to 270. FIG. This fifth control example differs from the above-described first control example in that the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 and the RAM 203 are partially changed, and the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113 and that the configuration of a part of the RAM 223 is changed. Also, the control contents executed by the MPU of the main controller 110 and the control contents executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed. The contents other than that are the same, and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the first control example described above, the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), variable state ( High-probability state of special patterns, high-probability state of normal patterns) can be set, and each pattern (special pattern, normal pattern) is executed after the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot winning in the special pattern lottery. was configured to allow the probability state of to shift from a low probability state to a high probability state. Also, after the end of the above-mentioned jackpot game, and when other end conditions (for example, end conditions established when the number of executions of the special symbol lottery reaches a predetermined number) are satisfied, each symbol (special symbol, The normal pattern) probability state can be shifted from a high probability state to a low probability state.

In other words, unless a big hit is won by a special symbol lottery, the opportunity to shift the probability state of each symbol (special symbol, normal symbol) from the low probability state to the high probability state is not established. In the first control example configured in this manner, a high-probability state (a high-probability state of special symbols) in which a jackpot game in which many prize balls can be given to the player and a lottery advantageous to the player are easily executed , high-probability state of normal patterns) and are executed based on the fact that the special pattern lottery wins the jackpot, so that various benefits are given to the player who wins the jackpot in the special pattern lottery. This allows the player to enthusiastically play the game with the aim of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery.

However, in the above-described first control example, only when the special symbol lottery wins the jackpot, the probability state of each symbol can be shifted to the high probability state. There is a problem that a player who does not have a prize is not provided with a privilege, and a player who has not won a jackpot for a long period of time loses his or her desire to play.

On the other hand, in the fifth control example, as an opportunity for shifting the probability state of the normal symbols from the low probability state to the high probability state, an opportunity other than the special symbol lottery jackpot winning is provided, and the special symbol lottery is performed. In a part of the lottery result (lost) different from the jackpot winning, the opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern is established.

In other words, it is configured so that a privilege different from the big winning game can be given even to the player who did not win the big winning in the special symbol lottery. By constructing in this way, in one special symbol lottery, the player is provided separately with the lottery result in which the big win game is executed and the lottery result in which the time-saving state (high-probability state of normal symbols) is set. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the types of lottery results that are advantageous to the player.

Furthermore, in the fifth control example, the easiness of establishment of the opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal symbol is varied according to the set game state, specifically, the game state If the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set, in addition to whether or not the jackpot is won when the special symbol lottery is executed, short-time winning (high probability of normal symbols If a game state other than the normal state is set, only the presence or absence of a big win is determined when a special symbol lottery is executed. It is configured so that it can be determined.

By configuring in this way, in the state where the normal state is set, the opportunity that can be established when the high probability state of the normal pattern can be set is the opportunity that can be established when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, and the special symbol lottery. The opportunity that can be established when the short time winning is set, and in the game state other than the normal state, the opportunity that can be established when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery is set as the opportunity to set the high probability state of the normal symbol. will be set. That is, in the normal state in which the presence or absence of time-saving winning can be determined, more opportunities are set for setting the high probability state of normal symbols than in the game state other than the normal state.

Therefore, each symbol (special symbol, normal symbol) is set to a low probability state, and the normal state, which is the most difficult game state to win in each symbol lottery (game state that is disadvantageous to the player), is better than the other. A high-probability state of normal symbols can be set more easily than the game state of (1), and the player's willingness to play the game in the normal state can be enhanced.

In addition, in the fifth control example, the game state (probability variable state, time saving state) in which the high probability state of normal symbols is set is the game state in which the low probability state of normal symbols is set (normal state, The second special symbol lottery is configured to be easier to execute than the second variable state), and the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 reservation) is limited to a predetermined number (4 pieces). It is configured to be storable (possible to hold storage). And it is configured so that the second special symbol lottery is easier to win the time saving than the first special symbol lottery.

In other words, when the game state shifts from any game state (probability variable state, time saving state) in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set to the normal state (from the game state advantageous to the player to the disadvantageous game state ), during the normal state after the transition, the second special symbol lottery based on the execution right of the second special symbol lottery held and stored in the normal symbol high probability state before the transition is executed. It is configured so that it is easy to win a short-time election in some cases.

By constructing in this way, the player can receive a special symbol lottery that facilitates the return to the game state that is advantageous to the player for a predetermined period even when the game state is changed from the game state that is advantageous to the player to the game state that is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from significantly declining when the normal state, which is a game state that is disadvantageous to the player, is set. In addition, in order to execute more second special symbol lottery during the normal state, the upper limit number (4 pieces) of the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 reservation) is acquired, and the normal symbol high probability state to end the game for obtaining the special figure 2 reservation until the last moment when the high probability state of the normal pattern ends.

In the above-described first control example, the high-probability state of normal symbols can be set only based on the fact that the special symbol lottery wins the jackpot. Specifically, after the end of the jackpot game, as an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player, the variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) or time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, normal High probability state of the pattern) was configured to be settable. Then, when the variable probability state is set after the end of the big winning game, the variable probability state continues until the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times, and then until the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times, that is, the big winning game. The time saving state is set until the number of special symbol lotteries reaches 100 after the end. On the other hand, when the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, the time saving state is continued until the special symbols are executed 100 times.

On the other hand, in the fifth control example, as described above, in addition to the case where the special symbol lottery wins the jackpot, the normal symbol high probability state can be set even when the special symbol lottery wins the short time. There is a high probability state of normal patterns set based on jackpot winning (first short time) and a high probability state of normal patterns set based on short time winning (second short time) High probability of normal patterns The easiness of fulfillment of the termination condition for terminating the state is differentiated.

Specifically, it is configured so that the number of times of time saving set as the end condition of the second time saving is more likely than the number of times of time saving set as the end condition of the first time saving. In this way, when the high probability state of the normal design is set, the high probability state of the normal design in which the degree of advantage is varied according to the setting opportunity (the establishment opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal design) By making it possible to set, not only whether the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, but also the process of the game such as what trigger the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. Since it is possible to make the player interested, it is possible to facilitate the player to continue playing the game.

In addition, in the fifth control example, in order to vary the degree of advantage of the privilege given to the player in the high probability state of normal symbols, the ease of establishing the time saving end condition (time saving number of times) is different. However, without being limited to this, for example, when the first time saving is set and when the second time saving is set, the ease of acquiring the pending memory of the second special symbol lottery (electric role 640a (open pattern)), or the degree of advantage of benefits given when a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery during a high probability state of normal patterns (for example, the number of prize balls given during the jackpot game, the jackpot game The type of game state that is set after the end of the game may be changed.

First, with reference to FIG. 234, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example will be described. FIG. 234 is a front view of the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example. As shown in FIG. 234, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example is located on the left side of the game board 13 with respect to the game board 13 (see FIG. 119) of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above. The fact that the through gate 67 provided in the area (the area on the left side of the variable display unit 80) is deleted, the second ball entrance 640 to which the electric accessory 640a is attached, and at least when the jackpot game is executed The major difference is that the arrangement position of the variable winning device 65 that enables the ball to win a prize is different. Moreover, it is different in that the internal configuration of the variable winning device 65 is changed. Other contents are the same as those of the first control example described above, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 234, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example, the through gate 67, which is the ball entrance for establishing the opportunity for executing the lottery of normal symbols, is formed on the right side of the variable display unit 80. It is arranged only in the area. By configuring in this way, a game ball is shot toward the left side area formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80, and a game ball is entered into the first ball entrance (winning entrance) 64 Left hitting game While performing, it is possible to make it difficult to execute the normal symbol lottery.

The first entrance 64 is arranged below the variable display unit 80 . A variable display unit 80 is arranged so as to divide the game area on the game board 13 into right and left sides. On the right side of the display unit 80 is formed a right channel (right region) through which game balls can flow. A game ball that has flowed down the left flow path (area) does not flow down the right flow path (area), and a game ball that has flowed down the right flow path (area) does not flow down the left flow path (area). is configured to

Below the variable display unit 80, there is formed a lower area (common area) in which both game balls that have flowed down the left channel (area) and game balls that have flowed down the right channel (area) can flow down. An out port 66 is provided at the most downstream part of the side area (the lowest part of the game board 13). The first ball entrance 64 is arranged at a position where both the game ball that has flowed down the left channel and the game ball that has flowed down the right channel can enter. It should be noted that, unlike the configuration of the fifth control example, it may be configured such that only game balls flowing down the left channel can enter the first ball entrance 64 . By configuring in this way, when executing a right-handed game in which a game ball flows down to the right region, for example, when executing a game in which a game ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 by a right-handed game , it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the first special symbol lottery is executed.

The second ball entrance 640 is arranged at a position where a game ball that has flowed down the right flow path is easier to enter than a game ball that has flowed down the left flow path. The second ball entrance 640 is formed by forming a horizontally long rectangular opening in the game board 13, and forming a flow path through which the game ball can flow down. A photosensor is provided for detecting a game ball that has been hit. On the front side of the opening, an electric accessory 640a is attached as a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate capable of closing the opening, and the variable opening/closing plate is used as an axis to drive the opening/closing to the front side. and an open-mouth solenoid (not shown). The opening of the second ball entrance 640 is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. When the normal pattern (second pattern) hits, the opening solenoid is driven to tilt the electric accessory 640a to the lower side of the front to create an open state where the ball can easily enter the opening of the second ball entrance 640. It is temporarily formed, and the open state and the normal closed state are repeated a predetermined number of times determined by the game state.

Incidentally, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery (special symbol lottery) is conducted when a prize is won in the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加In the special pattern lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the jackpot is hit (big hit lottery), and determines whether the winning time is short for setting a high probability state of the normal pattern (short time lottery), and at the same time as the jackpot. When it is determined (when the jackpot is won), the jackpot type is determined, and when the time reduction type is selected, the time reduction type is determined.

In the fifth control example, the lottery opportunity is established when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the lottery opportunity is established when the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640. Different jackpot types are stipulated for the second special symbol in which is established, and 16R probability variable jackpot (jackpot A5) and 6R probability variable jackpot (jackpot B5) are regulated for the first special pattern. In addition, 16R probability variable jackpot (jackpot A5), 6R probability variable jackpot (jackpot C5), and 6R probability variable jackpot (jackpot D5) are defined for the second special symbol. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. .

Here, "16R probability variable jackpot (jackpot A5)" means that a jackpot game with a maximum number of rounds of 16 rounds is executed, and after the jackpot game ends, a probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) ) is a jackpot type that is set. In this fifth control example, different periods can be set as the period during which the high probability state of special symbols continues (special pattern high probability period) and the period during which the high probability state of normal symbols continues (normal pattern high probability period) In the jackpot A5, the period until the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is changed 60 times as a special symbol high probability period and the 60th special symbol variation is stopped is set. Then, the period until the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is varied 60 times and the 60th special symbol variation is stopped is set as the general pattern high probability period.

That is, the same condition (60th special symbol fluctuation stop) is defined for the jackpot A5 as the special pattern high probability period and the normal pattern high probability period. Therefore, when the jackpot A5 is set as the jackpot type, a variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set after the jackpot game ends, and the 60th special symbol in the probability variable state. When the fluctuation is stopped and displayed, both the special symbol high probability period and the normal symbol high probability period are terminated and the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set. By configuring in this way, the game state is directly shifted from the game state in which the high probability state of the normal design is set to the normal state, so the second special acquired during the high probability state of the normal design The second special symbol lottery based on the symbol lottery right (special figure 2 reservation) can be made easier to execute in the normal state.

“6R probability variable jackpot (jackpot B5)” means that a jackpot game with a maximum number of rounds of 6 rounds is executed, and after the jackpot game ends, a probability variable state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set. It is a jackpot type that is played. This jackpot B5 is the end condition for ending the special pattern high probability period and the normal pattern high probability period. conditions) are stipulated. That is, the jackpot B5 is a jackpot type that differs from the jackpot A5 only in the number of round games (the number of rounds) executed during the jackpot game.

As described above, in the fifth control example, it is configured so that it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 in the normal state, which is the low-probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, during the normal state, the game ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 by the left-handed game, and the left-handed game for executing the first special symbol lottery is executed. Then, when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery, either the big win A or the big win B is set as the big win type. In other words, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery that is mainly executed in the normal state, a jackpot game with a different number of rounds corresponding to the set jackpot type is executed, and after the jackpot game ends, the end condition is the same probability change. It is configured so that the state is set.

By configuring in this way, even when any jackpot type is set, the player can be made to play the game under the same conditions after the jackpot game ends. In addition, in the fifth control example, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the jackpot type can be set by changing only the number of rounds of the jackpot game. Depending on the set jackpot type, the type of game state set after the end of the jackpot game may be changed, or the end condition may be changed for the same game state. Also, the content of the jackpot game (the number of rounds, etc.) and the content of the game state (game state type, end condition) set after the jackpot game ends may be set differently.

In this case, the first privilege (jackpot game) and the second privilege (high probability state of normal symbols) given to the player based on the special symbol jackpot winning are classified as the first privilege and the second privilege. From the jackpot type corresponding to the combination that is most advantageous to the player, to the jackpot type that corresponds to the combination that the first privilege and the second privilege are most disadvantageous to the player. It may be configured so that the jackpot type is set. By configuring in this way, the degree of advantage of the privilege that can be given after winning the big win in the special symbol lottery can be greatly varied based on the type of the big win set, so that the big win set for the player. Types can be of interest. In order not to greatly differ the degree of advantage of the privilege granted based on the winning of the jackpot in the special symbol lottery, for example, the first privilege with a low degree of advantage and the second privilege with a high degree of advantage and a jackpot type combining a first privilege with a high degree of advantage and a second privilege with a low degree of advantage, that is, the first privilege and the second privilege defined for the jackpot type Only the jackpot types other than the jackpot types having high or low degree of advantage with the privilege are defined in advance, and any one of the defined jackpot types is set. It should be configured as follows.

“6R probability variable jackpot (jackpot C5)” means that a jackpot game with a maximum number of rounds of 6 rounds is executed, and after the jackpot game ends, a probability variable state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set. It is a jackpot type that is played. And, in the fifth control example, the period during which the high probability state of the special pattern continues (special pattern high probability period) and the period during which the high probability state of the normal pattern continues (normal pattern high probability period) are different periods. It is configured to be settable, and the jackpot C5 is a period until the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is changed 60 times as a special symbol high probability period and the 60th special symbol variation is stopped. is set, and the period until the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is varied 56 times and the 56th special symbol variation is stopped is set as the normal pattern high probability period.

In other words, the jackpot C5 is defined by different end conditions (probability variable end conditions) for ending the special high probability period and end conditions (shorter time end conditions) for ending the normal high probability period It is configured so that the time saving end condition is satisfied before the probability variable end condition is satisfied. Therefore, when the jackpot C5 is set as the jackpot type, the probability variation state is set after the jackpot game ends, and when the 56th special symbol variation in the probability variation state is stopped and displayed, from the special figure high probability period Also, the normal pattern high probability period ends first, and the second probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set. Then, when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed for the fourth time after the second probability variable state is set (60th time in total after the jackpot game is finished), the time-saving end condition is established, and the normal state is set. The game state transitions like this.

Here, the period in which the probability variable state is set is a gaming state in which it is easy to acquire the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 reservation) because the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, In contrast to the game period in which the player is made to play the right-handed game, the period in which the second probability variable state is set is the same as the normal state because the low probability state of the normal symbol is set. It becomes a game state in which it is difficult to acquire special figure 2 reservation. Therefore, it becomes a game period in which the player is made to play a left-handed game. That is, when the variable probability state shifts to the second variable probability state, the second special symbol lottery based on the special figure 2 reservation obtained during the variable probability state is executed during the second variable probability state. And, in the fifth control example, the second special symbol lottery is preferentially executed over the first special symbol lottery, and up to four special figure 2 reservations can be stored, Even if you move from the definite variable state to the 2nd definite variable state with the upper limit number (4) of the special 2 pending, until the 2nd definite variable state ends (until the special figure high probability period ends) In addition, since the second special symbol lottery is executed four times, the number of special figure 2 reserves stored becomes zero when the game state shifts from the second variable probability state to the normal state.

That is, when the jackpot C is set as the jackpot type, the normal pattern high probability period (probability variable state) in which the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed after the jackpot game ends is set, but during the normal pattern high probability period The second special symbol lottery based on the special figure 2 reservation acquired in the normal state is executed in a game that is difficult to execute. Therefore, the jackpot game with the same content is executed, and the special pattern high probability period and the general pattern high probability period are over than the jackpot B, which is the same jackpot type in that the probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends. , the jackpot type is more disadvantageous than the jackpot B in terms of the ease of execution of the second special symbol lottery in the state in which the normal state is set.

Although detailed description will be described later, in this fifth control example, the case where the variable probability state ends and the second variable probability state is set, and the case where the normal state is set after the variable probability state ends, is the same It is configured so that the presentation mode (pull-back mode) is set. In other words, it is configured to make it difficult for the player to grasp which game state, the second variable probability state or the normal state, is set after the variable probability state ends. By configuring in this way, the second special symbol lottery executed after the end of the normal pattern high probability period is executed during the normal state or during the second probability variable state. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether or not the executed second special symbol lottery can win the time-saving lottery (whether the time-saving lottery is executed or not).

Therefore, even when the second variable probability state is set, the game can be played while expecting the short-time winning.

In addition, in this fifth control example, after the probability variable state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol high probability state) is set, than the special symbol high probability period (the period during which the special symbol high probability state continues) Each end condition is defined so that the normal pattern high probability period (the period during which the high probability state of the normal pattern continues) ends first, and the second probability variable state (high probability state of the special pattern, low probability state of the normal pattern) It has a jackpot C5 as a jackpot type, and specifically, in the jackpot C5, the special figure 2 hold acquired during the probability variation state is the second probability variation state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol Low probability state), as the period from the end of the normal pattern high probability period to the end of the special pattern high probability period (the period during which the second probability variable state continues), special symbol fluctuation Although it is configured to set the period until it is executed 4 times, it is not limited to this, and according to the game state (normal state, second probability variable state, etc.) set after the variable probability state, acquired The game state in which the special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery) is executed based on the special figure 2 reservation is made different. That is, as a game state in which a special symbol lottery is executed based on the acquired special symbol lottery, it is possible to vary the number of executions of the special symbol lottery that can be executed in an advantageous game state (normal state) that is advantageous to the player. Any possible configuration may be used.

For example, a part of the special figure 2 reservation acquired during the probability variation state is consumed during the second probability variation state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), and the remaining special figure 2 suspension is normal state For example, a jackpot type may be provided in which 58 special symbol fluctuations are defined as the end condition of the general pattern high probability period, and 60 special symbol fluctuations are defined as the end condition of the special pattern high probability period. In this case, when the normal high probability period ends with the upper limit of the special figure 2 hold being acquired during the probability variable state and the state shifts to the second probability variable state, two special figures 2 are digested during the second probability variable state Then, the second special symbol lottery based on the remaining two special figure 2 reservations can be executed in the normal state. In this way, when specifying each end condition so that the probability variable state is set and the normal pattern high probability period ends earlier than the special pattern high probability period, just by making the difference of each end condition different The number of times of the second special symbol lottery that can be executed in the state can be varied.

Further, in the fifth control example, in the case of having both the first special symbol reserved memory (special figure 1 reserved) and the second special symbol reserved memory (special figure 2 reserved), the first Since the second special symbol lottery is configured to be executed with priority over the special symbol lottery, as described above, the second special symbol lottery based on the special figure 2 hold acquired during the variable state is the special figure. Regardless of the presence or absence of 1 reservation (whether or not there is a special figure 1 reservation that has been acquired before the special figure 2 reservation), the game state that is easy to acquire the special figure 2 reservation (normal pattern high probability state ) is completed, that is, the number of special figures 2 pending decreases immediately after the game state (low probability state of normal symbols) where it is difficult to acquire special figures 2 pending is set, but not limited to this, The first special symbol lottery based on the special figure 1 reservation and the second special symbol lottery based on the special figure 2 reservation may be configured to be executable according to the order in which each special figure reservation is acquired.

“6R probability variable jackpot (jackpot D5)” means that a jackpot game with a maximum number of rounds of 6 rounds is executed, and after the jackpot game ends, a probability variable state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set. It is a jackpot type that is played. And, in the fifth control example, the period during which the high probability state of the special pattern continues (special pattern high probability period) and the period during which the high probability state of the normal pattern continues (normal pattern high probability period) are different periods. It is configured to be settable, and the jackpot D5 is a period until the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is changed 60 times as a special symbol high probability period and the 60th special symbol variation is stopped. is set, and the period until the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is varied 65 times as the general pattern high probability period and the 65th special symbol variation is stopped is set.

In other words, the jackpot D5 defines the end condition (probability variable end condition) for ending the special pattern high probability period and the end condition (time reduction end condition) for ending the normal pattern high probability period It is configured so that the probability variable end condition is satisfied before the time saving end condition is satisfied. Therefore, when the jackpot D5 is set as the jackpot type, the probability variation state is set after the jackpot game ends, and when the 60th special symbol variation in the probability variation state is stopped and displayed, from the normal pattern high probability period Also, the special pattern high probability period ends first, and the time saving state (low probability state of special patterns, high probability state of normal patterns) is set. Then, when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed for the 5th time after the time saving state is set (the 65th time in total after the jackpot game ends), the time saving end condition is established, and the normal state is set. Game state transitions.

Here, during the period when the time saving state is set, as well as the variable state, the high probability state of the normal design is set, so the right to execute the second special design lottery (Special 2 reservation) is acquired. It is a game state that is easy to play, and it is a game period in which the player is made to play a right-handed game. In other words, when the probability variable state is shifted to the time saving state, the player is made to continuously execute the right-handed game and acquire the special figure 2 reservation. And, in the fifth control example, the second special symbol lottery is preferentially executed over the first special symbol lottery, and up to four special figure 2 reservations can be stored, The number of special figure 2 suspensions stored at the time of transition from the time saving state to the normal state with the upper limit number (4) of special figure 2 suspensions acquired is 4 pieces.

That is, when the jackpot D5 is set as the jackpot type, the normal pattern high probability period (probability variable state) in which the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed after the jackpot game is completed is set, and the normal pattern high probability period (probability variable state) is set as in the case of the jackpot B5. A game that facilitates execution of the second special symbol lottery based on the special figure 2 reservation obtained during the guaranteed period is executed in the normal state. Therefore, the jackpot game of the same content is executed, and the variable probability state is set after the jackpot game ends, and then the special figure high probability period and the general figure high probability period are ended, and the normal state is set Second in the state In terms of easiness of execution of the special symbol lottery, the degree of advantage is the same as that of the big win B5.

Here, in the time saving state, the probability of winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery is set to a low probability (1/300) compared to the variable state, so the time saving state is less likely to win the jackpot in the special symbol lottery than in the variable state. It becomes a game state. Therefore, in the big hit B5 that shifts from the variable probability state to the normal state, during the final variation period of the special symbol executed during the variable probability state, the effect (variation effect ) and the guidance notification (notification effect) to encourage the acquisition of the special figure 2 hold up to the upper limit during the variable state, and the effect of different purposes is performed repeatedly. Therefore, there is a problem that an effect that is difficult for the player to understand is executed.

On the other hand, like the jackpot D5, it moves from the probability variable state to the time saving state, and then the end condition of the special figure high probability period and the end of the normal figure high probability period so as to move from the time saving state to the normal state If the conditions are defined, during the final fluctuation period of the special symbols executed during the variable probability state, only the production (variation production) for indicating whether or not the jackpot is won in the fluctuation is executed. Therefore, for the player, the special symbol lottery executed during the high probability state of the special symbol (during the special symbol high probability period), that is, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery with high expectation of winning the jackpot It is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the variable performance for showing . Then, in the final fluctuation of the time saving state, by executing the guidance notification (notification effect) to encourage the acquisition of the special figure 2 reservation up to the upper limit, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery with high expectation of winning the jackpot It is possible to make it difficult to overlap the period in which the variable performance for showing is executed and the period in which the notification performance for encouraging the acquisition of the special figure 2 reservation to the upper limit number during the normal figure high probability period is executed. .

Therefore, the jackpot D5 is a jackpot type that is advantageous to the jackpot B5 in terms of the ease of understanding of the effect to be executed.

During the normal pattern high probability state (during the normal pattern high probability period), not only the winning probability of the second pattern is increased, but also the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is changed. , and a longer time is set than in the normal state (low probability state of normal symbols). When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 more than when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It becomes easy. Therefore, during the time-saving state, the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, and the number of times the special symbol lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, during the time saving state, instead of changing the opening time of the electric role object 640a associated with the second entrance 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the object 640a is opened compared to during the normal state. In addition, during the time-saving state, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the time during which the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit. At least one of may be changed. In addition, during the time saving state, the time for which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit are not determined, and the winning probability of the second symbol may be changed so as to be higher than normal medium.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general prize-winning holes (ball-entering holes) 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display unit 80 displays a third symbol while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, triggered by the winning of the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 (start winning). A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that performs a variable display, and the passage of a ball through a normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 as a trigger to change the second symbol. A second pattern display device (not shown) composed of LEDs for display is provided. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display of 9-inch size. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment, the display of the game state under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 242) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. It should be noted that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of the display device.

The second symbol display device 83 displays a symbol "○" and a symbol "x" as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) every time the ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67. are alternately turned on for a predetermined period of time to perform a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that a ball has passed through a normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device 83 stops and displays the symbol "O" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball 640 is displayed for a predetermined period of time. is configured to be activated (open) only.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the time saving than during the normal game state. As a result, the variable display of the second pattern is performed in a short time during the time saving, so that the winning lottery (the number of times of variable display of the second pattern) can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given more chances to open the electric accessory 640a of the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加Therefore, during the time saving, it is possible to create a state in which the ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 640 . When the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, four balls are paid out to the player as prize balls on the upper tray 17, so that the ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 640. As a result, the game can be played while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls possessed by the player, and the lottery for the special symbols can be performed for a short period of time while suppressing the investment for additionally lending the balls. can be done.

It should be noted that other methods such as increasing the probability of winning, increasing the opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 640a for one hit, etc. are also likely to win the ball into the second ball entrance 640 during the time saving. In the case of the state, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than during the normal time during the time saving, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the game state, and the electric role for one winning The opening time and number of openings of the object 640a may be fixed regardless of the game state.

The normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board in the area of the right channel of the variable display unit 80, and among the balls launched to the game board, some of the balls flowing down the left side of the game board are configured to pass through. When the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is suspended up to four times in total, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the second symbol suspension lamp. (not shown) is also illuminated. Four second pattern holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

The variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in this control example. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . In addition, the maximum number of held balls for passing the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is not limited to 4 times, but is set to 3 times or less or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). You can In addition, the number of normal symbol starting openings (through gates) 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the mounting position of the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, but may be the left side of the variable display unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 through which a ball can enter is provided. When a ball enters the first ball entrance 64, a first prize entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed by the device 110 (see FIG. 242), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A. In the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, the prize ball is not paid out. It may be configured to pay out prize balls.

In addition, the first ball entry hole 64 and the second ball entry hole 640 are also one of winning holes from which four balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 are configured to be the same. However, if the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 are different numbers, for example, the number of the first entrance The number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the ball hole 64 may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball hole 640 may be five.

The second ball entrance 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. This electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state, making it difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory is displayed. 640a is in an open state, and the ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加

As described above, during time saving, the probability of winning the second symbol is higher than during normal time, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so the symbol "○" in the variable display of the second symbol is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer during the variable probability and the shorter working hours than during the normal time. Therefore, during the time saving, it is possible to create a state in which it is easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 as compared with the normal time.

Here, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. be. However, in the second special symbol lottery executed by the game ball entering the second ball entrance 640, in a specific game state (normal state), it is possible to give a time saving state as a privilege other than winning a jackpot. Configure. In other words, as the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery, in a part of the cases other than the jackpot winning (loss), after the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, it is configured to be able to give the privilege of setting the time saving state. . Therefore, a special symbol lottery is executed in which the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery executed when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64.例文帳に追加become.

In other words, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting that the high probability state of the normal symbol is set so that the second special symbol lottery can be easily executed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 235 to 239, the contents of the characteristic effects among the various effects executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example will be described. do. In this fifth control example, as the lottery result of the special symbol lottery, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is greatly different from the above-described first control example in that short-time winning is provided in addition to the jackpot winning. I will mainly explain the performance. It should be noted that detailed descriptions of elements (display modes) having the same content as in the first control example described above will be omitted.

FIG. 235(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during a jackpot game executed based on winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery. As shown in FIG. 235(a), when a jackpot game is executed, a character 801 imitating a rabbit is displayed in the main display area Dm to congratulate the player on the fact that a privilege (jackpot game) has been awarded. A production is executed. During the jackpot game, the third symbol indicating that the jackpot has been won is continuously stopped and displayed in the small display area Dm1 formed in the upper right of the main display area Dm, and in the example shown in FIG. , and the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode of "777". This small display area Dm1 is an area in which the third symbol that is variably displayed corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed, and while the first special symbol is variably displayed, the first special symbol is variably displayed. The third pattern is variably displayed in a display mode indicating that it is displayed.

In addition, on the left side of the main display area Dm1, a small display area Dm4 for displaying a guidance notification mode for guiding the player to the game method during the jackpot game, and a current round number (round game number) are A small display area Dm5 in which the number of rounds notification mode is displayed to notify the player, and acquisition information for indicating a value corresponding to the number of winning balls acquired in games that are continuously executed without going through the normal state are displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 235(a), the small display area Dm4 is "right shot", the small display area Dm5 is "2 rounds", and the small display area Dm6 is "140P". ” is displayed.

In other words, during the jackpot game, the player is guided to execute the right-handed game, informed that the second round of the jackpot game is currently being executed, and the number of prize balls obtained in the jackpot game this time is 140. It shows that it is individual. In this way, it is possible to display the fact that the jackpot game is in progress, the game method during the jackpot game, and the information about the obtained privilege, so that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. .

Then, when all the round games during the jackpot game are completed and the ending period of the jackpot game is set, as shown in FIG. An ending screen will appear. FIG. 235(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed as the ending screen of the jackpot game. In the example shown in FIG. 235(b), the effect (chance time) corresponding to the variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game, and the period of the chance time is 56 times (56 special symbol variations). indicates a display screen on which the player is notified. In the central portion of the main display area Dm1, a display mode in which the character 801 continues to run from left to right is displayed as a display mode for notifying the player of the effect to be executed during the chance time in advance. be done.

Thus, using a partial period (during the jackpot game) before the actual variable state is set, the variable state is set after the jackpot game, the duration of the set variable state, the variable probability By informing the player of the explanation of the contents of the performance to be executed during the state, the player can grasp the contents of the game to be executed in the future in advance, so that the player can easily understand the game. can do.

Next, the contents of the chance time effect executed during the variable probability state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 236(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the chance time, and FIG. 236(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the final variation of the chance time. is. During the chance time, the character 801 continues to run in the main display area Dm1, and by getting the V-icon 801v displayed on the screen, an effect is executed in which a big win is announced. As described above, during the variable probability state, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, so the game ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 by the right-handed game to execute the second special symbol lottery (right beating game) becomes a game method advantageous to the player.

Therefore, in the small display area Dm4, "Right-handed" is displayed for guiding the right-handed game. Then, a remaining period notification mode for indicating the period until the chance time ends is displayed in the small display area Dm7. In FIG. 236(a), characters of "50 times left" are displayed as a display mode for indicating that the number of times of special symbol variation that can be executed before the chance time ends is 50 times.

Here, the chance time is an effect executed corresponding to the variable probability state, and the end timing of the chance time is the timing at which the variable probability state ends. Here, in the fifth control example, when the normal state is set after the variable probability state is completed (jackpot A5, B5) and the second There is a case where a variable probability state is set (jackpot C5) and a case where a time saving state is set (jackpot D5). Even if any jackpot type is set, during the special symbol variation (special symbol final variation in the probability variation state) where the probability variation state ends, the effect screen at the end of the chance time shown in FIG. 236 (b) Is displayed.

The example shown in FIG. 236(b) is the second definite variable state after the definite variable state ends, or the normal state, that is, with the end of the definite variable state, when the normal pattern shifts from the high probability state to the low probability state In the main display area Dm1, the main display area Dm1 shows "Pull back mode after chance time ends" for indicating that a normal symbol low probability state is set. comment is displayed. Then, as a game guidance mode that encourages to acquire the special figure 2 reservation to the upper limit during the period in which the high probability state of the normal symbol continues, that is, the period in which it is easy to acquire the special figure 2 reservation, in the sub display area Ds Along with displaying the comment "Right hit and save the hold", a small display area Dm9 is formed to show the number of acquired special figures 2 hold on the lower right side of the main display area Dm.

In the small display area Dm9, a hold icon capable of informing the player of the upper limit number of obtainable special figure 2 reservations and the number of acquired special figure 2 reservations is displayed, and the first special figure 2 reservation is displayed. Corresponding to the first reserved icon h1, the second reserved icon h2 corresponding to the second special figure 2 reservation, the third reserved icon h3 corresponding to the third special figure 2 reservation, the fourth The 4th reservation icon h4 is displayed corresponding to special figure 2 reservation. In FIG. 236 (b), since it is in a state where three special figures 2 pending are acquired, the display mode for indicating that the first pending icon h1, the second pending icon h2, and the third pending icon h3 have been acquired ( In the drawing, it is displayed in black), and the fourth pending icon h4 is displayed in a display mode (white in the drawing) to indicate that it has not been acquired. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner whether or not the special figure 2 reservation has been acquired up to the upper limit.

Although detailed description is omitted, when all the four reserved icons displayed in the small display area Dm9 have been acquired, that is, during the final variation of the special symbol in the probability variation state, the upper limit number (4) If you acquire the figure 2 reservation, you can not acquire a new special figure 2 reservation even if you continue the right-handed game any more. Since the 2 reserve is not digested, even if the right-handed game is continued any more, it will be impossible to give a privilege that is advantageous to the player. A display mode (for example, "MAX") for indicating that the upper limit number of has been acquired is displayed, and the character "Right shot" displayed in the small display area Dm4 acquires the upper limit number of the special figure 2 hold. It is configured to display a display mode in which the need for right-handed games is low (for example, the character size is reduced), which is different from the previous display mode. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to wastefully continue the right-handed game.

The pullback mode is an effect that is set corresponding to the period in which the second special symbol lottery is executed in the normal symbol low probability state (normal state, second probability variable state). In the fifth control example, it is configured so that the second special symbol lottery executed in the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) can be short-time winning. That is, during the pullback mode, not only the jackpot winning, but also the special symbol lottery with the possibility of the time saving winning is executed, so it is possible to increase the possibility that the time saving state (normal high probability state of the symbol) is set. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 237, the content of the effects executed during the pullback mode will be described. FIG. 237(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed at the start of the pullback mode, and FIG. 237(b) is an example of the display screen that is displayed when the short-time winning is made during the pullback mode. Fig. 3 shows.

When the pullback mode is set, as shown in FIG. 237 (a), the number of treasure chests 810a to 810d corresponding to the number of special figures 2 reserved that have been acquired are displayed, and the treasure chests are displayed according to the second special symbol variation. is executed. Then, an effect is executed in which a display mode for indicating the lottery result of the corresponding second special symbol appears from inside the treasure box.

At the start of the pullback mode, as a guide mode for explaining the contents of the pullback mode in the sub-display area Ds, the comment "If a 'V' comes out of the treasure box, you get a big win, and if 'Time' comes out, you get a short time." Open the treasure chest." is displayed.

In addition, in the fifth control example, the variation time of the second special symbol variation executed during the pullback mode is determined regardless of the number of second special symbol variations executed during the pullback mode. , and it is constructed such that an effect of opening one treasure box is executed for one fluctuation period of the second special symbol fluctuation. A performance for opening one treasure box can be executed by using the fluctuation time of all the second special pattern fluctuations, and even one lottery result is obtained in the second special pattern fluctuation executed during the pullback mode. It may be constructed so as to execute an effect for showing the result of the lottery when a jackpot or short-time winning is made. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the number of variations of the second special symbol variation executed during the pullback mode.

In addition, in the fifth control example, even if any gaming state of the normal state in which the time-saving lottery is actually executed and the second variable probability state in which the time-saving lottery is not executed is set, that is, from the variable probability state When the game state (normal state, second probability variable state) in which the low probability state of normal symbols is set is shifted to, the withdrawal mode is set. That is, in the pullback mode when the second variable probability state is set, an effect in which "time" does not appear from the treasure box is executed as a result of the effect.

In this way, by configuring to execute the same performance (pull-back mode) in the game state in which the time-saving lottery can be executed and the game state in which the time-saving lottery cannot be executed (hard to execute), the pull-back mode production As a result, it is possible to set in advance a pull-back mode in which the performance result indicating the time-saving winning is easily displayed and a pull-back mode in which it is difficult to be displayed. In this case, the pull-back mode set this time is a pull-back mode (advantage pull-back mode) in which the effect result indicating the time-saving winning is likely to be displayed, or a pull-back mode (disadvantageous pull-back mode) in which the effect result indicating the time-saving winning is difficult to display. It is possible to suggest to the player whether.

In this fifth control example, it is possible to indicate to the player whether or not the pull-back mode to be executed this time is the advantageous pull-back mode according to the type of background displayed during the pull-back mode. On the display screen shown in (a), a background image imitating "Heaven" is displayed as a background type for suggesting that the possibility of the advantageous pullback mode is high.

That is, in the fifth control example, without pre-reading the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the already acquired special figure 2 reservation (without prior determination), the withdrawal mode according to the set game state The background type is configured to be determinable. By constructing in this manner, even if the background image of any type of background is displayed, the possibility of short-time winning or big win winning can be easily left, so that the player's willingness to play can be enhanced.

Then, when the reduction in working hours is won during the withdrawal mode, the effect shown in FIG. 237(b) is executed. FIG. 237(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed when the time reduction is won in the third second special symbol lottery in the pullback mode, and the second special symbol variation has already occurred twice. A treasure box 810a and a treasure box 810b marked with a cross are displayed as a history display mode to indicate that the execution has been performed, and the lottery result of the second special symbol variation being executed (the third second special symbol variation) is displayed. is displayed in a treasure box 810c, the lottery result is the time-saving winning, and the number of times of time-saving given is ``10000 times'', that is, the next jackpot is won substantially. "Time"×10000" is displayed as a display mode for indicating that the time-saving state (high-probability state of normal symbols) is given. Also, on the lower right side of the main display area Dm, the remaining number of second special symbol lotteries that can be executed during the pullback mode, including the second special symbol variation being executed, can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, the contents of the performance executed when the second special symbol lottery executed during the pullback mode is won will be described. In the fifth control example, the period during which the high probability state of normal symbols continues ( It is configured so that the normal pattern high probability period) can be easily set for a long time (the normal pattern high probability period is difficult to end). Specifically, in a part of the time-saving election, it is possible to set a time-saving state (long time-saving) in which the normal pattern high probability period continues until the number of times the special symbol variation is executed reaches 10000 times without winning a jackpot. Configure.

Then, when the second special symbol lottery executed during the pullback mode is won and long working hours are set, the effect screen shown in FIG. 238(a) is displayed. FIG. 238(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during extended time which is executed when long working hours are set. When the long time reduction is set, before the number of executions of the special symbol variation reaches 10000 times, it is almost the case that the special symbol lottery wins the jackpot, so as shown in FIG. 238 (a) , When long time reduction is set, "infinite (indicated by a symbol in the figure)" is displayed small as the remaining period notification mode to indicate the remaining period of the normal pattern high probability period in which the high probability state of the normal pattern continues It is displayed in area Dm7.

By configuring in this way, the player can play the game during the time saving state without worrying about the remaining period of the normal figure high probability period, and the small display area Dm7 can be 5 as the display area. Since it is no longer necessary to provide an area capable of displaying digits, and the small display area Dm7 can be made smaller, the display area of the main display area Dm can be effectively used for other effects. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, as a guide mode for guiding the player that the time-saving state (normal pattern high probability period) will continue until the next jackpot winning, "Beat right and crispy until the next jackpot. is” is displayed.

Here, if the long time reduction is set, it is almost the case that the time reduction state continues until the time reduction state continues until the next jackpot election, but in the unlikely event that the long time reduction is set, the jackpot will be elected. If the number of special symbol variations exceeds 10,000 times, the normal pattern high probability period ends, and the content displayed on the display screen differs from the actual game content, distrusting the player. Since it gives a feeling, if the number of executions of the special symbol variation executed after the long time reduction is set exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 9850 times), the display screen during the long time reduction should be changed. It is configured so that

FIG. 238(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the execution count of the special symbol variation executed during the long time reduction reaches 9900 times. As shown in FIG. 238(b), when the number of special symbol fluctuations after the long time reduction is set exceeds a predetermined number, the remaining period for showing the remaining period of the normal pattern high probability period in the small display area Dm7 "Remaining 100 times" is displayed as the period notification mode, and an effect mode in which the character 801 runs with a tired expression is displayed in the main display area Dm. By configuring in this way, even if a normal pattern high probability period that can continue the time saving state until the next big hit is set, when a situation where the normal pattern high probability period can actually end occurs can inform the player of the specific remaining period, so that the player can be provided with a game that is easy to understand.

Next, with reference to FIG. 239, description will be given of the effect content when the time saving state is set after the end of the chance time. FIG. 239 is a diagram showing an example of a preparation time effect screen executed during the time saving state after the chance time ends. As described above, when the jackpot D5 is set as the type of the probability variable jackpot, the variable probability state shifts to the time saving state, and the game state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state. And, during the time saving state, the preparation time production is executed. This preparation time is a production that is executed during the period in which the time saving state is set, and during the period of the special design final variation in the time saving state, the special design in the probability variation state shown in FIG. 236 (b) described above. A mode that prompts you to acquire the special figure 2 hold up to the upper limit as well as the final variation is displayed.

Next, the content of the background type displayed during the withdrawal mode will be described with reference to FIG. 240(a). FIG. 240(a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the background types displayed during the pullback mode and the content indicated by each background.

As shown in FIG. 240(a), in the fifth control example, four backgrounds (heaven, night, evening, day) can be displayed as background types in the pullback mode. And, according to the type of the displayed background, it is possible to suggest to the player the degree of expectation of the benefits (jackpot, short-time winning) during the pullback mode this time.

Detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG. One mode type can be determined from four mode types based on the number of special figure 2 reservations, the type of game state after transition, and the presence or absence of jackpot winnings and short-time winnings in the reservations, and determined. A background type corresponding to the selected mode type can be displayed as a background during the pullback mode.

The mode types in the withdrawal mode are defined so that the degree of expectation of awarding of benefits is different, and there are four mode types from mode A, which is most advantageous to the player, to mode D, which is most disadvantageous to the player. there is "Mode A" is a mode in which the possibility of winning a jackpot or short-time winning is extremely high during the pullback mode, and "Heaven" is defined as the corresponding background type. In other words, if a background imitating heaven is displayed as the background during the pullback mode, the player is made to understand that there is a high possibility that some benefit will be given before the pullback mode ends. can be made easier. Next, "Mode B" is a mode with the second highest possibility of winning a jackpot or short-time winning in the pullback mode, and "Night" is defined as the corresponding background type. In other words, when the background simulating the night is displayed as the background during the pullback mode, the player is informed that the possibility of receiving some privilege is the second highest before the pullback mode ends. can be made easier to understand. "Mode C" is a mode with the third highest possibility of winning a jackpot or short-time winning in the withdrawal mode, and "Evening" is defined as the corresponding background type. In other words, if a background imitating the evening is displayed as the background during the pullback mode, the player understands that there is a slightly higher possibility that some benefit will be granted before the pullback mode ends. can be made easier. Finally, "mode D" is a mode in which the possibility of winning a jackpot or short-time winning is low during the withdrawal mode, and "daytime" is defined as the corresponding background type. In other words, if a background simulating daytime is displayed as the background during the pullback mode, the player is made to understand that there is a low possibility that some benefit will be granted before the pullback mode ends. can be made easier.

In addition, in the fifth control example, when the special figure 2 reservation number at the time of entering the pullback mode is not the upper limit number, the mode type of the high mode is configured not to be selected. Furthermore, if the number of special figures 2 pending at the time of entering the pullback mode is not the upper limit number, the mode without determining whether the time saving lottery is executed in the second special symbol lottery executed during the pullback mode It is configured to determine the type. In other words, in order to make it easier to predict the mode type of the pullback mode, it is necessary to transition to the pullback mode with the upper limit number of special figure 2 pending numbers acquired.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to motivate the game to acquire the special figure 2 reservation up to the upper limit number in the state where the variable probability state or the time saving state is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 240(b), a suggestion mode for indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol variation executed during the pullback mode will be described. FIG. 240(b) is a diagram showing the relationship between the type of suggestion mode in the pullback mode and the content of suggestion indicated by each suggestion mode. As for modes, referring to a suggested mode selection table 222db (see FIG. 251), which will be described later, the display mode of the treasure box (see FIG. 237) can be changed, or the display mode of the character 801 can be changed until the treasure box is opened. Suggestion mode (suggestion A to suggestion D) is set.

Specifically, "Suggestion A" and "Suggestion B" can be set as suggestion types according to the expectation of jackpot winning or short-time winning in the variation, and suggestion types according to the set gaming state. , "suggestion C" and "suggestion D" can be set.

When "Suggestion A" is selected, a different color (gold) is displayed as the display mode of the treasure box 810c displayed in the withdrawal mode (see FIG. 237(b)). When a golden treasure box corresponding to this "suggestion A" is displayed, it is suggested to the player that there is a high possibility of winning a jackpot or short-time winning due to the variation. When "suggestion B" is selected, a treasure box larger than usual is displayed as the display mode of the treasure box 810c displayed during the withdrawal mode (see FIG. 237(b)). When a golden treasure box corresponding to this "suggestion B" is displayed, it is suggested to the player that there is a high possibility of winning a jackpot or short-time winning due to the variation. It should be noted that the selection of "suggestion A" is configured to increase the possibility of winning a big win or short-time winning as compared to the case of selection of "suggestion B".

When "suggestion C" and "suggestion D" are selected, a display mode in which the character 801 displayed in the pullback mode (see FIG. 237(b)) is equipped with ornaments is displayed, and is different from the normal display mode. A character 801 is displayed in a different manner. Then, the currently set game state is suggested to the player according to the type of the displayed ornament.

When "suggestion C" is selected, as shown in FIG. 237(b), an ornament 801w imitating an angel's ring is displayed on the character 801, and the currently set game state is the normal state. It is suggested to the player that the possibility is high, and when "suggestion D" is selected, an icon imitating the word "chance" is displayed above the head of the character 801, indicating that the game state may be the normal state. It suggests to the player that the quality is high. It is to be noted that the possibility that the normal state is set is higher when "suggestion C" is selected than when "suggestion D" is selected.

Thus, in the fifth control example, the mode type of the pull-back mode is determined according to the game situation at the time when the pull-back mode is set, and the special symbol variation executed during the pull-back mode is suggested. is determined. By compositely determining the mode type and the suggested mode type, it becomes possible for the player to accurately predict the current game situation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the aspects of various effects being executed.

<Regarding the game flow in the fifth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 241, the game flow in this fifth control example will be described. FIG. 241 is a diagram schematically showing the game flow in the fifth control example, that is, the flow of game state transitions. As shown in FIG. 241, in the fifth control example, as the game state, normal state (special figure 1 normal, special figure 2 normal), time saving state (first time saving, second time saving), probability variable state, second probability variable The game state of the state can be set, and various game states can be set according to the result of the big hit determination in the special symbol lottery and the result of the time saving winning determination.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fifth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 242 to 251. FIG. FIG. 242 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. Note that, of the electrical configuration in the fifth control example, the description of the same electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example (see FIG. 137) will be partially omitted.

The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the setting of the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display results of the second symbol display device. to run.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controller by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the operation of the sub-controller such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In the main control device 110, the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the display setting in the first symbol display device 37, the display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and the display setting in the third symbol display device 81 Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 243, counters and the like provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 243 is a schematic diagram schematically showing counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. These counters, etc. are the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the setting of the display on the first symbol display device 37, the setting of the display on the second symbol display device 83, and the setting of the display on the third symbol display device 81. etc., it is used in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 .

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol jackpot type. The first hit type counter C2 used for , the stop type selection counter (C3) used to select the stop type that is out of the special symbol, and the initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first hit random number counter C1 A counter CINI1, a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection, and a time reduction type selection counter CC1 used for selecting the time reduction type at the time of time reduction election are used.

In addition, the second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used to set the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4, and the variation used for selecting the variation pattern of the normal symbols. A type counter CS1 is used. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 156), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 167). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . The RAM 203 has a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a corresponding to the ball entering the first ball opening 64 consisting of four holding areas (first to fourth holding areas), and four holding areas (first holding area). to fourth area), and a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is provided, and the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a includes the Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 time reduction type selection counter CC1 is stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball into the 1 ball entrance 64. In the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, in accordance with the timing of entering the second ball entrance 640, a first winning random number counter C1, a first winning type counter C2, a stop type selection counter C3, and , Each value of the variation type counter CS1 and the time saving type selection counter CC1 is stored.

Then, when the special symbol starting condition (fluctuation condition) is satisfied, various values stored in the first reserved area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b Of the various values stored in the reservation first area, the various values having special symbol information corresponding to the special symbol type for which the next lottery is executed are shifted to the special symbol execution area and stored. A special symbol variation based on various values is started.

In this control example, two kinds of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) are used, but the number of special symbols may be one. Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the first special symbol or the start condition (variation condition) of the second special symbol is satisfied, the first reserved area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area of the corresponding special symbol type. , are shifted to the special symbol execution area, and the special symbol variation based on the stored various values is started. By configuring in this way, even in the pachinko machine 10 using a plurality of special symbol types, each special symbol variation can be executed smoothly.

Furthermore, as in this control example, if the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of special symbol types (first special symbol, second special symbol), the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are performed. It may be configured to be executable at the same time (in parallel), and in this case, each special symbol reserved ball storage area (first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b) is a special symbol. It may be configured to have an execution area. Thereby, when the starting condition of each special symbol is satisfied, the next special symbol variation can be quickly executed.

In addition, in the fifth control example, the judgment value for jackpot winning and the judgment value for short-time winning are made different so that short-time winning can be won when jackpot is not won as a lottery result of special symbols. , Without being limited to this, it may be configured such that at least a part of the determination value for winning the jackpot and the determination value for the short-time winning are overlapped. By constructing in this way, the lottery result of only the jackpot winning, only the short-time winning, and the double winning of the big win and the short-time winning is provided to the player based on the obtained judgment value (the value of the first random number counter C1). can be done. In this case, it is preferable to configure the system so that the player is given a benefit that is more advantageous to the player in the case of multiple wins than in the case of winning either one of them. , it is preferable to make it more difficult to end than the time saving state set based on other winnings.

By constructing in this way, the player can play the game while expecting to win multiple prizes.

In addition, in this control example, in addition to the big win and the loss of the lottery result of the special symbol, in a part of the case where the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, the time saving state (high probability state of the normal symbol) is performed without executing the winning game. ) can be set, but not limited to this, for example, in some cases where the lottery result of the special symbol is lost, there are fewer benefits than when winning the jackpot (when winning the jackpot It may be configured so that the player can win a small prize that can be awarded to the player. With this configuration, even if the player does not win the jackpot, an opportunity to give the player a privilege can be provided, so that the interest in the game can be improved. In this case, a small hit type counter is provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110, and the value of the acquired small hit type counter can be stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area, and when executing the special symbol lottery. It should be configured so that it can be referenced.

In addition, in the case that a special symbol lottery is configured to allow a small win, for example, the game state transition content based on the big win win and the game state shift content based on the small win win are configured to be different. Alternatively, for example, when a jackpot is won, the game state is shifted to a normal state at the start of the jackpot game, and a new game state can be set after the jackpot game ends based on the set jackpot type. When a small win is won, the small win game may be executed while maintaining the game state at the time of winning the small win, and the game state may not be shifted even after the small win game is finished.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the presence or absence of the transition of the game state and the content of the transition according to the winning type (big win, small win), so that it is possible to provide a game rich in variations. can. In addition, as the lottery result of one special symbol lottery, four lottery results of jackpot winning, small winning, short-time winning, and losing may be configured to be able to win, or according to the special symbol type, a special symbol lottery You may comprise so that the privilege which can be won may be made different.

In this case, for example, as a privilege that can be granted when the first special symbol lottery is executed, a jackpot winning and a short-time winning are defined, and as a privilege that can be granted when the second special symbol lottery is executed , a jackpot win and a small win win, and when the same game state is set, the player selects the direction to shoot the game ball (left-handed game , By selecting a right-handed game), it is preferable to configure the type of special symbol lottery to be executed to be selectable. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible for the player to select the type of privilege (additional privilege) other than winning the jackpot.

Further, the RAM 203 of the present embodiment is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to the entry (passage of the ball) into the through gate 67 consisting of four reserved areas (first reserved area). In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, each value of the second winning random number counter C4 and the normal pattern variation type counter CS2 is stored in accordance with the timing of entering the through gate 67.

Then, when the normal symbol start condition (fluctuation condition) is established, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b are shifted to the normal symbol execution area, and the stored various values are shifted to the normal symbol execution area. Normal design variation based on the value is started.

Next, referring to FIG. 243, each counter will be described in detail. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 899). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 899, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 899. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the main controller 110 executes timer interrupt processing, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 167).

The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the first special It is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 in the symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by the first winning random number 5 table 202da stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is the first winning random number. 5 If it matches the value of the random number that becomes a big hit set by the table 202da, it is determined as a special symbol big win. In addition, the value of the random number that becomes the time saving winning in the special symbol lottery is set by the time saving random number 5 table 202de stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is the time saving random number. 5 If it matches with the value of the random number that becomes the time-saving election set by the table 202da, it is determined as the time-saving election.

Here, the first winning random number 5 table 202da will be described with reference to FIG. 245(a). FIG. 245(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first winning random number 5 table 202da. This first winning random number 5 table 202da is a table in which a random number value (determination value) for determining a big winning is defined in the special symbol lottery.

Specifically, in the first random number 5 table 202da, the judgment value for judging a big hit is defined by varying it according to the game state (probability state of special symbols). As shown in FIG. 245 (a), for the low probability state (normal state, time saving state) of the special symbol as the game state, the value of the first per random number counter C1 "0 to 2" is the jackpot determination value and other values (“3 to 899”) are defined as outlier determination values. In addition, for the high probability state (probability variable state) of the special symbol as the game state, "0 to 14" among the values of the first hit random number counter C1 is defined as the jackpot determination value, and other values ( "15 to 899") is defined as the deviation determination value. In other words, since the update range of the first random number 5 table 202da is 900 from "0 to 899", the probability of being determined as a big hit in the low probability state of special symbols is 1/300 (3 out of 900 ), and in the high-probability state of the special symbol, the probability of being determined as a big hit is 1/60 (15 out of 900).

In this control example, two types of jackpot probabilities are set according to the game state. Alternatively, three or more types of jackpot probabilities may be set. In this case, for example, the special symbol jackpot probability may be changed for each of up to four game states set by combining the special symbol state and the normal symbol state, Simply, three or more types of special symbol states, such as a high probability state, a normal probability state, and a low probability state, may be set, and a different jackpot probability may be set for each state.

In addition, in this control example, in addition to the two types of lottery results of "big hit" and "loss", "time saving winning" is determined as the lottery result of the special symbol. Here, with reference to FIG.245(c), random number 5 table 202de per time saving is demonstrated. Fig.245 (a) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content prescribed|regulated to random-number 5 table 202de per time saving. This time saving random number 5 table 202de is a table in which a random number value (determination value) for determining time saving winning is defined in the lottery of special symbols.

Concretely, in time saving random number 5 table 202de, the decision value which is decided to be time saving election is changed according to special design kind and game state, it has specified. As shown in FIG. 245(a), for the first special symbol as the special symbol type, the judgment value (the value of the first random number counter C1) corresponding to the time-saving winning is not defined. In addition, for the second special symbol as the special symbol type, the determination value corresponding to the time-saving winning is defined only when the game state is the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols). In the case of other gaming states (probability variable state, second probability variable state, time saving state), the determination value corresponding to time saving winning is not defined.

For the second special symbol lottery executed when the normal state is set as the game state, "51 to 200" among the values of the first winning random number counter C1 is defined as the time saving winning judgment value. , and other values (“3 to 50, 201 to 899”) are defined as deviation determination values. Although detailed description will be given later, this time saving random number 5 table 202de is referred to when the result of the big hit determination executed with reference to the first winning random number 5 table 202da is "out". Therefore, if the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery executed in the normal state is determined to be a big hit, the value of the first random number counter C1 ("0 to 2") is acquired. will be

Therefore, since the update range of the first random number 5 table 202da is 900 from "0 to 899", the probability of being judged as a big hit in the low probability state of special symbols is 1/300 (3 out of 900 ), and the probability of being determined as short-time winning is 1/6 (150 out of 900).

In other words, in the second special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, the probability of winning the jackpot is 3/900, the probability of winning the short time is 150/900, and the probability of losing is 747/900, and the first special lottery executed in the normal state It becomes a special symbol lottery that makes it difficult to win (easily gives benefits) to the symbol lottery (loss probability 897/900).

In addition, in this control example, it is a specific game state (normal state), and is configured to execute the determination of time-saving winning only in the special symbol lottery of the specific special symbol type (second special symbol). However, without being limited to this, it may be configured to be able to execute determination of time saving election for any special symbol type. Furthermore, even if a game state other than the normal state is set, it may be configured to be able to execute the determination of the time-saving election, for example, in a state where the normal symbol low probability state (second probability variable state) is set Also in the second special symbol lottery to be executed, determination of time saving winning may be configured to be executable. By configuring in this way, it is possible to always execute the determination of the time saving election (time saving lottery) in the second special symbol lottery executed during the withdrawal mode (see FIG. 237).

In this case, the time saving lottery executed during the normal state and the time saving lottery executed during the second probability variable state should be different in the probability that the time saving lottery is determined (time saving winning probability), for example, the normal state is set, it is preferable to make it easier to win the time-saving election than when the second variable probability state is set. By constructing in this way, the probability of winning a jackpot in a special pattern lottery is increased in a normal state (low probability state of special patterns) in which the probability of winning a jackpot is lower than a second variable probability state (high probability state of special patterns). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from playing an excessively disadvantageous game.

In addition, without being limited to this, the second variable probability state may be configured to increase the time reduction winning probability than the normal state. In this case, the probability of winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery is set to a high probability (high probability state of the special symbol) in the gaming state (high probability state of the special symbol), the probability of short-time winning can also be increased, so the special executed during the variable state The special pattern lottery executed during the second probability variable state can increase the probability of obtaining a lottery result (probability of not winning without winning) to which some kind of privilege (big win, time saving) is given than the pattern lottery.

Furthermore, in the fifth control example, the time-saving lottery can be executed only when a specific game state and a specific special symbol lottery is executed, so the time-saving winning probability is always fixed. However, when the time saving lottery is configured to be executed under different conditions (special symbol type, game state), the time saving winning probability may be changed according to the occasion of establishment of the time saving lottery. .

In addition, not only when the time saving lottery is established, for example, when the number of times of variation of the special symbol variation executed without changing the game state exceeds a predetermined number, it may be configured to increase the time saving winning probability. good.

In addition to this, as a result of the third lottery, it may be possible to determine a "small win" as one type of "loss". When the "small win" is won, it is preferable to execute a small win game in which the variable winning device 650 is opened for a period shorter than the "big win 5" (for one round). By configuring in this manner, a small amount of privilege (prize ball) can be given to the player when the big hit is not won. In addition, when the "small win" is one type of "miss", it is possible to give the player a prize ball by the small win game, but since the big win is not won, the game state is changed ( setting a game state different from the game state at the time of winning) is not executed. As a result, it is possible to clearly differentiate the privilege given to the player based on the winning of the big prize and the privilege given to the player based on the winning of the small prize.

In addition, in this control example, as the lottery result of the special symbol, three kinds of lottery results of "big win", "loss", and "short-time winning" are determined. As the lottery result of 4, it may be configured such that "small hit" can be determined as one type of "loss". If the "small win" is won, it is preferable to execute a small win game in which the variable winning device 650 is opened for a period shorter than the "big win" (for one round). By configuring in this manner, a small amount of privilege (prize ball) can be given to the player when the big hit is not won. In addition, when the "small win" is one type of "miss", it is possible to give the player a prize ball by the small win game, but since the big win is not won, the game state is changed ( setting a game state different from the game state at the time of winning) is not executed. As a result, it is possible to clearly differentiate the privilege given to the player based on the winning of the big prize and the privilege given to the player based on the winning of the small prize.

As described above, when the configuration is such that a "small win" can be won as a special symbol lottery result, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 corresponding to the "small winning" is defined in the first winning random number table 202a. It should be configured as follows. By configuring in this way, the big winning lottery and the small winning lottery of special symbols can be executed in the same process, so compared to the case where the big winning lottery and the small winning lottery are executed in different processes, the main control The processing load of the device 110 can be reduced. In addition, in one special symbol lottery, it is possible to prohibit the winning of both a big win and a small win.

The first win type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is won, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is stored in the RAM 203 It is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 in the one special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

The value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. In this embodiment, the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is used to refer to the first hit type selection 5 table 202dc to determine the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. Here, the contents of the jackpot type selection 5 table 202dd will be described with reference to FIG. 246(a).

FIG. 246(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the jackpot type selection 5 table 202dd. As shown in FIG. 246(a), this jackpot type selection 5 table 202dd includes a special drawing 1 jackpot 5 table 202dd1 that is referred to when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special pattern, and a second special pattern. It has a 5 table 202dd2 for a special figure 2 jackpot which is referred to when a jackpot is won in a lottery.

First, with reference to FIG. 246(b), the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot 5 table 202dd1 will be described. FIG. 246(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot 5 table 202dd1. As described above, this special figure 1 jackpot 5 table 202dd1 is a data table for selecting the jackpot type to be set when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, and the acquired first hit type counter C2 Different jackpot types are defined according to the value of . The detailed contents defined in each data table are omitted because they have been described above.

Returning to FIG. 243, the description continues. The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A rough display mode (fluctuation time) such as so-called short time out, long time out, normal reach, super reach is determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Determination of the display mode is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. be. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 167) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. A variation pattern selection 5 table 202db (see FIG. 247) storing a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. is provided.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection 5 table 202db will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 247(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection 5 table 202db. As shown in FIG. 247 (a), the variation pattern selection 5 table 202db includes the normal/second probability variation 5 table 202db1 used in the state where the normal state or the second probability variation state is set as the game state, 5 table 202db2 for probability variation and time saving used in the state of setting the probability variation state or the time saving state is defined. Although the details will be described later, in this control example, the data table used for selecting the variation pattern is different according to the game state, so the variation pattern (variation time) selected according to the game state is made different. be able to.

Next, detailed contents of each table defined in the variation pattern selection 5 table 202db will be described with reference to FIGS. 247(b) and 248(a). FIG. 247(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the normal/second probability variant 5 table 202db1. This normal/second probability variation 5 table 202db1 is a data table referred to when the normal state or the second probability variation state, that is, the normal symbol low probability state is set as the game state, and is a special symbol If the result of the lottery is a big hit, it is stipulated that the variation pattern with a longer variation time is more likely to be selected than when it is out. Different variation patterns are defined according to the result of the symbol lottery. Also, if the lottery result of the special design is a short-time winning (part of the loss), the lottery result of the special design is a big hit than if the lottery result of the special design is out (other than the short-time winning). is defined so that the same variation time as is easily selected.

First, with reference to FIG. 247(b), the normal/second probability variant 5 table 202db1 will be described. FIG. 247(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of this normal/second probability variant 5 table 202db1. In this normal/second probability variation 5 table 202db1, various variation patterns are defined corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is assigned to each of the variation patterns. It is Specifically, the type of special symbol (symbol type) is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the result of the judgment is a big hit, and the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 19". , normal (reach) with a variation time of 30 seconds is defined as the variation pattern. When this normal is determined, a command indicating a basic time of 30 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Further, when the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "20 to 169", super (reach) with a variation time of 30 seconds is defined as the variation pattern. Further, when the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "170 to 198", SP (reach) with a variation time of 55 seconds is defined as the variation pattern. That is, even if the variation time is the same as 30 seconds, different variation patterns can be selected according to the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1. By configuring the main controller 110 to be able to select different variation patterns for the same variation time in this way, the sound lamp control device 113 side that receives the command indicating the variation pattern determines the variation effect. processing can be simplified.

In addition to the basic time, it may be possible to add additional time according to the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. In the case where the additional time can be added, the basic time and the additional time are summed. The added time is set as a variable time, and a command indicating the basic time and a command indicating the added time are output. In this case, when determining the additional time to be added, the value of the variation type selection counter CS1 may be used, or the value of a dedicated counter used to select the additional time may be acquired. good. Then, when a command (basic command) indicating the selected basic time (for example, 30 seconds) and a command (additional command) indicating the additional time are notified to the sound lamp control device 113, the basic command It is preferable to set the variation pattern (normal reach) based on the information included in the addition command and set the reach symbol (type of the third symbol) based on the information included in the addition command. As a result, when the ready-to-win state is reached, the type of the third symbol of the medium symbol row Z2 that is first visible to the player is always set to a specific third symbol (in this control example, the third symbol with the number 1 attached). pattern), the ready-to-win performance can be executed with various types of the third pattern without varying the period from execution of the variable performance to reaching the ready-to-win state.

Also, if the symbol type is special figure 1 and the result of the judgment is out, similarly, if the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 179", the variation time is 8 seconds as a variation pattern. Outgoing is defined, and when the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "180 to 198", out of reach with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is defined as a variation pattern.

On the other hand, if the special symbol type (symbol type) is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the result of the judgment is a big hit, and the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 149". , super (reach) with a variation time of 30 seconds is defined as a variation pattern. When this super is determined, a command indicating a basic time of 30 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Further, when the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "150 to 198", SP (reach) with a variation time of 55 seconds is defined as the variation pattern.

If the success/failure determination result is out (time saving), that is, the success/failure determination result is a time saving election, and the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 169", the variation pattern is super with a variation time of 30 seconds (reach) is defined. When this super is determined, a command indicating a basic time of 30 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Further, when the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "170 to 198", SP (reach) with a variation time of 55 seconds is defined as the variation pattern.

If the result of the determination is out of range and the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 19", out of reach with a variation time of 30 seconds is defined as the variation pattern. Further, when the obtained value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "20 to 198", the deviation of the variation time of 8 seconds is defined as the variation pattern.

Next, with reference to Drawing 248 (a), the contents of 5 tables 202db2 for probability variation and time saving are explained. FIG. 248(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the 5 table 202db2 for probability variation/time reduction. This 5 table 202db2 for probability variation / time saving is a data table that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern in the case where the probability variation state or the time saving state is set, and the game state that is set and the special symbol Each variation so that different variation patterns are selected according to the type, the number of variations (the number of variations of special symbols after the end of the jackpot game), the lottery result of the special symbols, and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. A pattern is defined.

Here, in the fifth control example, the high-probability state (probability variable state) of normal symbols is always set after the jackpot game ends. Then, the set normal pattern high probability state is configured to continue until the time saving end condition is satisfied. In this fifth control example, as the time-saving end condition, the first time-saving end condition that is established when the number of executions of the special symbol variation after the high probability state of the normal symbol is set reaches a predetermined number of times, and the normal symbol A second time-saving end condition established when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery executed in a state where a high probability state is set is provided, and when any of the time-saving end conditions are established, a normal condition is established. It is configured to shift from the high probability state of the design to the low probability state of the normal design.

Then, according to the jackpot type, the number of executions of the special symbol variation (number of times of time reduction) set as the first time saving end condition is different, for example, when the jackpot A5, B5 is set as the jackpot type, the special symbol When the number of executions of variation reaches 60 times, the first time-saving end condition is established (time-saving number of times 60 times), and when the jackpot C5 is set, when the number of executions of special symbol variation reaches 56 times When the first time-saving end condition is satisfied (time-saving number of times 56 times) and the jackpot D5 is set, the first time-saving end condition is satisfied when the execution number of special symbol fluctuations reaches 65 times (time-saving number of times 65 times ).

In addition, in the fifth control example, in a part of the case where the special symbol lottery does not win the jackpot (in the case of loss), it is possible to set the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) (time-saving winning possible). , and the first time-saving end condition is changed depending on the time-saving type set when the time-saving election is made. For example, when time saving A is set as the time saving type, the first time saving end condition is satisfied when the number of executions of the special symbol variation reaches 10000 times (time saving number 10000 times), and time saving B is set. In the case, when the number of executions of the special symbol variation reaches 100 times, the first time saving end condition is established (time saving number of times 100 times).

And, even when the high probability state of normal symbols is set, different variation patterns are selected according to the game state and the time saving type. By configuring in this way, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the variable performance corresponding to the set game state and the type of time saving.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 248(a), the time saving type is "time saving after the jackpot", that is, when the high probability state of the normal design is set based on the jackpot winning, the number of special symbol fluctuations is " 1 times to 60 times" period, regardless of the type of special symbol, the lottery result (whether judgment result) is a hit, and the fluctuation time is "15 seconds" regardless of the value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1. It stipulates that the pattern (middle variation) is selected. In addition, for the result of the lottery (result of judgment), the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 189", and the variation pattern (short variation ), a variation pattern (middle variation) with a variation time of “15 seconds” is defined for the range of “190 to 198”.

In addition, during the period when the number of times of special symbol fluctuation is "61 times to 65 times", the variation pattern ( special variation) is stipulated.

Here, when the period of special symbol fluctuation number "61 times to 65 times" is referred to, when the jackpot D5 is set as the jackpot type, that is, after the probability change state ends, the time saving state of 5 rotations is set. is the case. During this time-saving state, it is a period during which the production of preparation time (see FIG. 239) is executed, and a constant variable time (5 seconds) is always set regardless of the success/failure determination result. Therefore, since the entire period of the preparation time can be fixed, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the remaining period until the withdrawal mode is set.

The display screen during the preparation time has been described above with reference to FIG. 239, but in addition to the display mode shown in FIG. If the number of acquired special figures 2 pending meets the conditions to end the preparation time (time saving state), the time obtained by adding 5 seconds to the number of remaining fluctuations of special symbols that can be executed during the time saving state is displayed on the display screen. Configure it to display. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player of the timing at which the preparation time ends and the withdrawal mode is set in an easy-to-understand manner.

Furthermore, when the remaining period of the preparation time can be notified, the period corresponding to the special symbol final variation in the time saving state, that is, the acquired special figure 2 hold is the time saving state It may be possible to execute an effect capable of preliminarily suggesting to the player a range corresponding to a period in which it is confirmed that the money will not be newly consumed during the period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player of the period during which the final variation of the special symbol is executed during the preparation time.

On the other hand, if the set time saving type is "time saving A" and the design type (special design type) is special 1 (first special design), the number of fluctuations (special design fluctuations), the lottery result (special design Lottery result), regardless of the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1, a variation pattern (long variation) with a variation time of "20 seconds" is defined, and if the symbol type is special figure 2 (second special symbol) , During the period when the number of special symbol fluctuations is "1 time to 99 times", the lottery result (whether judgment result) is a hit, and the fluctuation time is "15 seconds" regardless of the value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1. (middle variation) is selected. In addition, for the result of the lottery (result of judgment), the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 189", and the variation pattern (short variation ), a variation pattern (middle variation) with a variation time of “15 seconds” is defined for the range of “190 to 198”. Then, for the special symbol variation count of "100 times", regardless of the lottery result (special symbol lottery result) and the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1, the variation pattern (special variation) is specified. Furthermore, when the number of special symbol fluctuations is "101 times to 200 times", the fluctuation time is "2 seconds" regardless of the lottery result (special symbol lottery result) or the value of the acquired fluctuation type selection counter CS1. A pattern (ultra-short variation) is defined, and the number of special symbol variations is "201 times to 10000 times", regardless of the lottery result (special symbol lottery result) and the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 A variation pattern (special short variation) with a time of "0.5 seconds" is defined.

Also, if the set time saving type is "time saving B" and the design type (special design type) is special 1 (first special design), the number of fluctuations (special design fluctuations), the lottery result (special design Lottery result), regardless of the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1, a variation pattern (long variation) with a variation time of "20 seconds" is defined, and if the symbol type is special figure 2 (second special symbol) , During the period when the number of special symbol fluctuations is "1 time to 99 times", the lottery result (whether judgment result) is a hit, and the fluctuation time is "15 seconds" regardless of the value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1. (middle variation) is selected. In addition, for the result of the lottery (result of judgment), the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 189", and the variation pattern (short variation ), a variation pattern (middle variation) with a variation time of “15 seconds” is defined for the range of “190 to 198”. Then, for the special symbol variation count of "100 times", regardless of the lottery result (special symbol lottery result) and the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1, the variation pattern (special variation) is specified.

As described above, in the fifth control example, when the time saving state is set based on the time saving winning in the special symbol lottery (when the time saving state is set without going through the jackpot game), it is set Regardless of the time-saving type, the variation pattern is selected with common contents until the special symbol variation is executed 100 times. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the time saving type set based on the variation pattern of the special symbol variation executed during the time saving state. Furthermore, for the 100th special symbol variation, a variation pattern with a variation time of 10 seconds is selected regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery. Here, in the fifth control example, when the time saving is won in the special symbol lottery, the time saving type A or the time saving B can be set. When the number of times is set and the time reduction B is set, the number of times of time reduction is set to 100 times.

Then, if the time saving state is set based on the time saving winning in the special symbol lottery, the fluctuation period of the 100th special symbol change is used to determine whether the time saving state ends (time saving type is time saving A It is configured to execute an effect (continuous effect) for suggesting whether it is the time saving B). That is, even if any time-saving type is set, and even if the lottery result of the variation is any, since the variation pattern of the fixed number of seconds (10 seconds) is selected, continuous production can be made easier to implement.

In addition, when the time saving A is set, the time saving state will continue until the special symbol lottery is executed a maximum of 10000 times, but a special symbol low probability state is set during the time saving state. Therefore, the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery is the same as in the normal state. Therefore, in the time-saving state in which the special symbol lottery is easier to execute than in the normal state, the special symbol lottery may continue to be executed without winning the jackpot. In this case, during the time-saving state, game balls can be frequently entered into the second ball entrance 640 by right-handed games to obtain prize balls, so a situation in which the number of balls possessed by the player is greatly reduced occurs. Although it is difficult to do so, there is a risk that the period until the next big win will be extended, and a player who has a limited playing time will have to give up playing the game during the time saving state.

Therefore, in the fifth control example, as the number of executions of the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state increases, a variation pattern with a short variation time is more likely to be selected. By configuring in this way, it is possible to improve the time efficiency of the game when many special symbol lotteries are executed without winning a jackpot during the time saving state. In addition, during the period from when the time saving state is set until the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times), it is configured so that the shortened fluctuation time is difficult to select, so that multiple jackpot games can be played. It is possible to suppress the excessively large number of prize balls being provided to the player in a short period of time due to execution in a short period of time.

Returning to FIG. 243, the description continues. The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by 1 in the range of 0 to 299, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 299). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start opening (through gate) 67. It is acquired at the same time and stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. Since the configuration of the second winning random number table 202c is the same as that of the first control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted. .

The time saving type selection counter CC1 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the time saving type selection counter CC1 is won in the special symbol lottery. , and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the time saving type selection counter CC1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and the first It is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. - 特許庁

The value of the time reduction type selection counter CC1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. In this control example, using the acquired value of the time saving type selection counter CC1, it is configured to select the time saving type when the time saving type selection 5 table 202df is selected. Here, with reference to Drawing 248 (b), the contents of time saving classification selection 5 table 202df are explained.

Drawing 248 (b) is a figure showing the contents prescribed in time saving classification selection 5 table 202df. In this time saving type selection 5 table 202df, different time saving types are defined for the value of the obtained time saving type selection counter CC1. Specifically, the value of the acquired time saving type selection counter CC1 is defined as a time saving type "time saving A" for the range "0 to 89", and for the range "90 to 99" time saving type " Shorter working hours B” is stipulated.

Here, when "time saving A" is set as the time saving type, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 10000, and when "time saving B" is set, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 100. be done. In other words, the time saving A is in a time saving state with 10000 times of time saving, and the time saving B is in a time saving state with 100 times of time saving.

Returning to FIG. 242, the description continues. The ROM 202 has various data tables defined corresponding to the various counters shown in FIG. Here, with reference to FIG. 244(a), the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example will be described. FIG. 244(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example.

As shown in FIG. 244(a), the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example includes a first winning random number 5 table 202da, a variation pattern selection 5 table 202db, a second winning random number 5 table 202dc, and a jackpot. It has at least 5 types selection table 202dd, 5 random numbers table 202de for time saving, and 5 time saving type selection table 202df. In addition, the first hit random number table 202a, the variation pattern selection table 202b, the second hit random number table 202c, the jackpot type selection table 202d, the time saving random number 5 table 202de, and the time saving type selection 5 table 202df are various types shown in FIG. Since the counter has been described above, the description thereof is omitted.

Returning to FIG. 242, the description is continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 243, the RAM 203 includes a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 167) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 166) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 165) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

Also, as shown in FIG. 244(b), the RAM 203 has a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a first special symbol reserved ball number. A counter 203d, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, a game state storage area 203g, a time reduction counter 203h, a variable probability counter 203i, a jackpot start flag 203j, a jackpot middle flag 203k, and other memory area 203z. have. Since the contents of each storage area, each counter, and each flag described above are the same as those in the first control example described above, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like. The other devices 228 include various drive motors for operating drive accessories for presentation provided in the pachinko machine 10 .

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the rear image is an image displayed on the rear side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

When the frame button 22 is operated by the player, a character object drive command is transmitted to the other device 228 in order to drive a character object for performance (not shown), or a command corresponding to the operation content of the frame button 22 is sent. A sound output command for outputting sound to the sound output device 226 is set, and a lamp output command for causing the lamp display device 227 to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the operation content of the frame button 22 is set. can be configured to

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the error type. Send to device 114 . The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

Here, the contents defined in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described. The ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifth control example is different from the ROM 222 (see FIG. 144 (a)) of the audio ramp control device 113 in the first control example described above. Then, the variable probability effect selection table 222c, the continuous notice execution selection table 222d, the V notification execution selection table 222e, and the button operation time effect selection table 222f are deleted, and the pullback mode selection table 222da and the suggestion mode selection table 222db are changed. , and are otherwise the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same elements, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the pullback mode selection table 222da, the end condition (shortening end condition) for ending the high probability state of the normal design in the state where the variable probability state (high probability state of the special design, high probability state of the normal design) is established. A data table referred to when selecting the mode type in the pullback mode, which is a production mode executed corresponding to the game state (normal state, second variable probability state) set in the case, and is time-saving in the variable probability state. The number of special figures 2 pending when the end condition is satisfied (the number of pending memories of the second special symbol), the value of the time-saving lottery counter 223db, the presence or absence of a jackpot in the pending (in the special 2 pending), the pending (special FIG. 2 pending) Four types of mode types (background) are defined corresponding to the presence or absence of time-saving winning and the value of the effect counter 223f.

Specifically, the number of special figures 2 pending is "4", that is, the upper limit number of special figures 2 pending is acquired, the value of the time saving lottery counter 223db is "4", and the jackpot in the hold is "yes" In the case, regardless of whether or not the short-time winning is held, the value of the acquired production counter 223f is “Mode A” for the range of “0 to 49”, and “Mode B” for the range of “50 to 99”. ” is stipulated. Also, if the jackpot in the hold is "no" and the short-time winning in the hold is "yes", the value of the acquired production counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 79". 99” range is defined as “Mode A”, and if the short-time election within the hold is “None”, the value of the acquired production counter 223f is “0 to 19” for the range of “Mode B”. , “Mode C” is defined for the range “20 to 59”, and “Mode D” is defined for the range “60 to 99”.

Also, if the number of special figures 2 pending is "4", that is, the upper limit number of special figures 2 pending is obtained, the value of the time saving lottery counter 223db is "0", and the jackpot in the reservation is "yes", Regardless of the presence or absence of short-time winning in the hold, the value of the acquired production counter 223f is defined as “mode B” for the range of “0 to 59”, and “mode C” for the range of “60 to 99”. is set, and if the jackpot on hold is “no”, regardless of the presence or absence of short-time winning on hold, “Mode C” is set to the range of “0 to 79” for the value of the acquired production counter 223f. "Mode B" is defined for the range 80-99".

On the other hand, the special figure 2 reservation number is "1 to 3", that is, in a state where the upper limit number of special figure 2 reservations is not obtained, regardless of the value of the time-saving lottery number counter 223db, the jackpot in the reservation is "present". In the case of , regardless of the presence or absence of the short-time winning within the hold, the value of the acquired production counter 223f is “Mode B” for the range of “0 to 19”, and “Mode B” for the range of “20 to 59” C” is defined as “mode D” for the range of “60 to 99”, and if the on-hold jackpot is “no”, if the on-hold short-time winning is “yes”, the acquired effect "Mode B" is defined for the range of the value of the counter 223f from "0 to 49", and "Mode D" is defined for the range from "50 to 99". , "mode B" is defined for the range of "0 to 19" for the value of the obtained effect counter 223f, and "mode D" is defined for the range of "20 to 99".

Since the detailed content has been described above with reference to FIG. 240(b), the explanation thereof will be omitted. It is stipulated so that the player's expectations for granting benefits are different, and mode A is the most advantageous mode type for the player (the expectation that benefits (jackpot, short-time winning) will be granted during the pullback mode is the highest) ), and the contents of the pullback mode selection table 222da are changed so that Mode B is the next most advantageous mode type, followed by Mode C and then Mode D so that each mode type is selected so that the degree of expectation for awarding a privilege becomes lower. stipulated.

Furthermore, depending on the number of special figures 2 pending at the timing when the variable state ends, the mode type to be selected is configured to differ greatly, and the number of special figures 2 pending at the time when the variable state ends is the upper limit number If not, the mode type (mode A) that is most advantageous to the player is not selected regardless of the value of the time-saving lottery number counter 223db or the look-ahead result in the special figure 2 reservation (whether there is a big hit or a time-saving winning). It is structured so that it is difficult to be

By configuring in this way, in order to predict the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery executed during the pullback mode, the player actively hits right so that the number of special figures 2 reserved is the upper limit number. A game can be executed.

The suggested mode selection table 222db is a data table referred to when selecting the suggested mode displayed in the variation performance corresponding to the second special symbol variation executed during the pullback mode, and is a set mode type. , different types of suggestions are defined in correspondence with the lottery result of the variation and the value of the effect counter 223f.

Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 249(b). As shown in FIG. 249(b), the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 includes a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, a special symbol variation start flag 223d, and a stop type selection flag. 223e, production counter 223f, sub-state setting area 223g, normal symbol holding ball number counter 223h, time saving counter 223da, time saving lottery number counter 223db, mode type storage area 223dc, long time saving flag 223dd, initial setting flag 223de, other memory At least an area 223z is provided.

In addition, command storage area 223a, winning information storage area 223b, special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, special figure fluctuation start flag 223d, stop type selection flag 223e, effect counter 223f, sub-state setting area 223g, normal symbol reserved ball number counter Since the content of 223h is the same as the content of the first control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Time saving medium counter 223da is a counter for measuring the period in which the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) is set, and when the high probability state of normal symbols is set (after the end of the jackpot game, or , after the stop display of the special symbol variation that has been elected for short time), a predetermined value is set. Then, when the special symbol variation is executed in a state in which the value of the counter 223da during time saving is 1 or more, the value is subtracted by 1, and when the value of the counter 223da during time saving becomes "0", normal symbols are displayed. It is determined that the state has shifted to a low probability state. Further, based on the value of the counter 223da during time saving, it is configured to determine the detailed period in the high probability state of the normal symbol.

The time-saving lottery number counter 223db is the number of times of the second special symbol lottery that can be executed during the normal state, out of the second special symbol lottery that is executed during the normal symbol low probability state (normal state, second probability variable state). That is, it is a counter for measuring the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery that can be elected in a short time, and is a special figure 2 acquired when the probability state of the normal symbol shifts from the high probability state to the low probability state. A value is set based on the number of reservations and the game state (normal state, second probability variable state) set when the high probability state of the normal symbol shifts to the low probability state.

Specifically, when a state command indicating that the normal state has shifted from the high probability state of the normal symbol (variable probability state, time saving state) to the normal state (S9102 in FIG. 264: No), or from the variable probability state to the second In the pullback mode setting process (see S9104 in FIG. 265) that is executed when a state command indicating that the transition to the probability variable state is received (S9402 in FIG. 267: Yes), based on the acquired special figure 2 pending The number of times of the second special symbol lottery that is executed (can be done) during the normal state is specified, and the value indicating the specified number of times is set as the value of the time saving lottery number counter 223db. Then, the pullback mode selection table 222da is referred to when selecting the mode type of the pullback mode.

Also, when the second special symbol lottery is executed during the pullback mode, the value of the time reduction lottery counter 223db is read, and if it is determined that a value greater than 1 is set, the second special The value is subtracted by 1 each time the symbol lottery is executed (see S9607 in FIG. 269).

That is, in the fifth control example, when the special figure 2 hold obtained during the high probability state of the normal design is executed after the low probability state of the normal design is set, the same regardless of the set game state It is configured to execute the production of the mode. In other words, as the game state in which the low probability state of normal symbols is set, the normal state in which the special symbol lottery that can be short-time winning is executed, and the second probability variable state in which the special symbol lottery that can not be short-time winning is executed, A performance of the same mode (pull-back mode) is configured to be executed, and a player can easily discriminate whether or not there is a game state in which time-saving winning can be displayed as a lottery result of a second special symbol lottery being executed. It is configured to make it difficult to By configuring in this way, even if the second probability variable state is set in which a special symbol lottery that cannot be won in a short time is set, the player can play while expecting a short win. can let

Further, the number of execution times of the special symbol lottery that can actually win the time saving lottery is discriminated, and the mode type of the pullback mode can be selected based on the discrimination result. By configuring in this way, the same mode (retraction mode) is performed in the normal state in which a special symbol lottery that can be won in a short time is executed and the second probability variable state in which a special symbol lottery that can not be won in a short time is executed. Since it is possible to provide an element (mode type) for allowing the player to predict which game state is set even while the effect is being executed, the currently set game state may be a short-time winning. Since a player who wants to quickly determine whether a certain game state exists can pay attention to the content of the performance being executed, the performance effect can be enhanced.

The mode type storage area 223dc is a storage area for storing the mode type selected by referring to the pullback mode selection table 222da. The information (mode type) stored in this mode type storage area 223dc is read when determining the effect mode of the variation effect corresponding to the second special symbol variation executed during the pullback mode. Then, when the pullback mode ends, the stored information is cleared.

The long time saving medium flag 223dd is a flag for indicating that a long time saving state (10000 special symbol variations) has been set, and a long time saving state (time saving type "time saving A") has been set. is set to ON when the time saving state ends, and is set to OFF when the time saving state ends. The setting state of the flag 223dd during long time reduction is referred to when determining the display mode for indicating the number of times of remaining time reduction (the remaining period of the high probability state of the normal symbol). Specifically, in the case of determining the special figure 2 effect mode corresponding to the second special symbol variation executed during the time saving state (S9613 in FIG. 269: Yes), the long time saving flag 223dd is set to ON (S9615 in FIG. 269), and if the flag 223dd during long working hours reduction is not set to ON (S9615 in FIG. 269: No), display in the small display area Dm7 of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 A display command is set for subtracting and displaying the remaining number of times (S9614 in FIG. 269).

On the other hand, if the long time saving flag 223dd is set to ON (S9615 in FIG. 269: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 223da is less than 150 (S9616 in FIG. 269), and if less than 150 If it is determined that there is none (S9616 in FIG. 269: No), as shown in FIG. 238(a), "infinite" is displayed in the small display area Dm7, so the remaining time reduction count is subtracted and displayed. If the processing is skipped and it is determined that the value is less than 150 (S9616 in FIG. 269: Yes), the presentation mode for switching the display mode of the small display area Dm7 from "infinity" to "149" is determined (see FIG. 269: Yes). 269 S9617).

The initial setting flag 223de is a flag for indicating that the first second special symbol lottery has been executed among the second special symbol lotteries executed during the pullback mode, and is executed during the pullback mode. It is set to ON after determining the special figure 2 effect mode corresponding to the first second special symbol variation (see S9605 in FIG. 269). Then, it is referred to when setting the special figure 2 effect mode corresponding to the second special symbol variation executed during the pullback mode, and when it is determined that the first setting flag 223de is set to ON (of FIG. 269 S9602: Yes), the processing for setting the first special figure 2 production mode (S9603, S9604 in FIG. 269) is skipped.

<Regarding control processing contents in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 252 to 270, the contents of various control processes in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example will be described. In the fifth control example, for the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above, part of the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 and the control executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 The difference is that a part of the processing is changed, and the others are the same. Identical contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 252 to 261, control processing executed by main controller 110 in the fifth control example will be described. In the fifth control example, in place of the special symbol variation processing (see S104 of FIG. 157), the special symbol variation processing 5 (S104 of FIG. (S208 in FIG. 158), the special symbol determination process 5 (see S251 in FIG. 253) is replaced with the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209 in FIG. 159), and the special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (S252 in FIG. 255) is performed. ), update process 5 (S253 at time 256) instead of update process (S221 in FIG. 160), and start winning process 5 (S195 in FIG. 258) instead of starting winning process (S105 in FIG. 161). Prefetching process 5 (S653 in FIG. 259) instead of prefetching process (S613 in FIG. 162), jackpot control process 5 (see S1894 in FIG. 260) instead of jackpot control process (S1804 in FIG. 168), jackpot end process (Refer to S1910 in FIG. 170), the difference is that the jackpot ending process 5 (refer to S8403 in FIG. 261) is executed, and the rest is the same. A detailed description of the same processing contents is omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 252, the processing contents of special symbol variation processing 5 (S104 in FIG. 252) will be described. FIG. 252 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the special symbol variation processing 5 (S104). In this special symbol variation process 5 (S104), a part of the process executed when starting the special symbol variation and the variation time of the special symbol variation are compared with the above-described special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 157). The difference is that part of the processing to be executed when the time elapses has been changed.

Specifically, when the special symbol variation process 5 (S104) is executed, the same processes of S201 to S207 and S210 to S213 as the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 157) are executed. Then, when the process of S207 or the process of S213 is finished, the special symbol determination process 5 (S251) is executed, then the special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (S252) is executed, and this process is finished.

Also, when it is determined that the variation time of the special symbol variation has elapsed (S214: Yes), the same S216 to S220 processing as the above-described special symbol variation processing (see S104 in FIG. 157) is executed, and this processing ends. In addition, in the processing of S217, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not a big hit (S217: No), update processing 5 is executed (S253), and then time reduction setting processing 5 is executed (S254), The process proceeds to S220.

Next, with reference to FIG. 253, the processing contents of the special symbol determination processing 5 (S251) will be described. FIG. 253 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the special symbol determination processing 5 (S251). This special symbol determination process 5 (S251) is executed in place of the special symbol jackpot determination process (S208 in FIG. 158) of the above-described first control example, and in addition to the jackpot determination in the special symbol lottery, time-saving winning Determination (time saving lottery process 5) is executed.

When the special symbol determination process 5 (S251) is executed, first, the data of the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area is acquired (S8001), and the lottery result is acquired based on the first winning random number 5 table 202da ( S8002), when it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (S8003: Yes), the lottery result of the special symbol is set to a big hit (S8004), and the value of the acquired hit type counter (first hit type counter C2) Based on this, the jackpot design of the special design to be displayed on the first design display device 37 is set (S8005), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result is not a jackpot (S8003: No), time-saving lottery processing 5 is executed (S8006), and this processing ends.

Here, the time saving lottery process 5 (S8006) is a process for executing determination of time saving election in this special symbol lottery. That is, in the fifth control example, in the special symbol lottery, first, the judgment of the jackpot election is executed (S8003), and when the jackpot is elected, the special symbol lottery is terminated without executing the judgment of the time-saving election, It is constituted so as to execute the determination of time-saving winning only when the jackpot is not won. By constructing in this way, in one special symbol lottery, since a plurality of benefits (special symbol jackpot winning, short-time winning) are not given to the player, a game excessively advantageous to the player is provided. You can prevent it from happening.

Next, with reference to FIG. 254, the process content of the time saving lottery process 5 (S8006) is demonstrated. Figure 254 is the flowchart which shows the contents of time saving lottery processing 5 (S8006). In this time-saving lottery process 5 (S8006), it is determined whether the current game situation is a game situation in which the time-saving lottery (time-saving winning judgment) can be executed, and when it is determined that it can be executed, the time-saving winning judgment is executed. processing takes place.

When the time saving lottery process 5 (S8006) is executed, first, it is determined whether the target (lottery target) of this time is the special figure 2 (second special symbol) (S8101), and when it is determined that it is the special figure 2 (S8101; Yes), reads the current game state stored in the game state storage area (S8102), and determines whether the read game state is the normal state (S8103).

In the process of S8103, when it is determined that it is in a normal state (S8103: Yes), the lottery result (time reduction winning judgment result) is acquired based on the time reduction per random number 5 table 202de (S8104), and whether the time reduction is elected It is determined (S8105), and if it is determined that the time saving is elected (S8105: Yes), based on the value of the acquired hit type counter (first hit type counter C2), it is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 A time-saving design of a special design is set (S8106), and this process is completed.

On the other hand, in the processing of S8101, if it is determined that the current target is not the special figure 2 (the first special symbol) (S8101: No), in the processing of S8103, it is determined that the current game state is not the normal state. If (S8103: No), or if it is determined that the time-saving election is not performed in the process of S8105 (S8105: No), based on the value of the acquired hit type counter (first hit type counter C2), the A missing symbol of the special symbol to be displayed on the 1-symbol display device 37 is set (S8107), and this processing is terminated.

That is, in the fifth control example, the execution conditions for executing the time-saving winning determination in the special symbol lottery are that the special symbol lottery has not won the jackpot, the second special symbol lottery, and the normal state. It is stipulated that In this way, by providing the conditions for executing the time-saving winning judgment, depending on the execution status of the special symbol lottery, the case where only the big winning judgment is executed and the case where the big winning judgment and the time-saving winning judgment are executed are created. can do. Therefore, it is possible to vary the probability that a player is given a privilege (big hit or reduced working hours) in one special symbol lottery according to the situation.

In addition, in the fifth control example, the game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state such as the variable probability state and the time saving state ends when the number of executions of the special symbol lottery exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 60 times). It is configured to shift to the normal state. In other words, when the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times without winning the jackpot, the conditions for executing time-saving winning determination can be easily established, so that the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times without winning the jackpot. In this case, it is possible to increase the probability that the special symbol lottery will give the player a privilege (big hit or reduced working hours) in one special symbol lottery than before the predetermined number of times. By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent a player who has not won a jackpot for a predetermined period of time from being extremely motivated to play.

Next, with reference to FIG. 255, the special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (S252) will be described. FIG. 255 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (S252). In the special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (S252), first, in the special symbol determination process 5 (S251 in FIG. 253), whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, that is, the special symbol big hit is set. (S8201). In the process of S8201, when it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is set (S8201: Yes), based on the jackpot type selection 5 table 202dd and the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 Then, the jackpot type is determined (S8202). Next, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the special symbol execution area is acquired (S8203), and the current game state (normal state, second probability variable state) corresponding to the information stored in the game state storage area 203g , probability variation state) read the variation pattern selection 5 table 202db corresponding to (S8204).

Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 acquired in the process of S8203 and the variation pattern selection 5 table 202db read in the process of S8204 (S8205), and the variation pattern selected in the process of S8205 Based on, to set the special figure variation pattern command (S8206). The special symbol variation pattern command set here includes the lottery result of the special symbol lottery and the information indicating the variation time of the special symbol, and the main control device 110 Main processing External output processing Voice lamp control Output to device 113 .

Next, a special symbol stop type command indicating a special symbol stop symbol is set (S8207), the first symbol display device 37 sets the special symbol variation start (S8208), and the variation time of the selected variation pattern is indicated. The value is set to the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter (not shown) (S8209), and the process ends. The special symbol stop type command set in the process of S8207 includes information indicating the type of stop symbol indicating the result of this special symbol variation, that is, the rough type such as reach off or off that does not become reach. It is output to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output processing of the main processing of the main control device 110 .

On the other hand, in the process of S8201, if it is determined that the special symbol lottery result is out (S8201: No), then it is determined whether the time reduction lottery result (time reduction winning judgment result) is time reduction winning ( S8209), when it is determined that it is a time saving election (S8209: Yes), the time saving type is determined by referring to the time saving type selection 5 table 202df (S8210), and the process proceeds to S8203. Also, if it is determined that the time reduction election has not been made in the process of S8209 (S8209: No), the process of S8210 is skipped and the process proceeds to S8203.

Next, the processing contents of update processing 5 (S253) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 256 is a flow chart showing the details of update processing 5 (S253). In this update process 5 (S253), the same process as the above-described update process (see S221 in FIG. 160) is executed, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 257, the process content of the time saving setting process 5 (S254) is demonstrated. FIG. 257 is a flow chart showing the details of the time saving setting process 5 (S254). In this time saving setting process 5 (S254), the process for setting the time saving state is executed when the time saving winning is won by the time saving winning determination. When the time saving setting process 5 (S254) is executed, first, it is determined whether the lottery result of this time is time saving winning (S8351), and when it is determined that it is time saving winning (S8351: Yes), it was decided A value corresponding to the time reduction type is set in the time reduction counter 203h (S8352), the time reduction state is set in the game state storage area (S8353), the value of the time reduction counter 203h, the time reduction type game state (information indicating the time reduction state, setting (Information indicating the type of time saving type) is set (S8354), and the process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S8351, if it is determined that the time saving has not been won (S8351: No), this process is terminated as it is.

That is, in the fifth control example, it is configured so that the time saving state is set at different timings according to the time saving winning opportunity, and when the time saving win is made in the special symbol lottery, the timing of stopping the special symbol variation. When the time-saving state is set in , and the time-saving state is set based on the jackpot winning of the special symbol lottery, the time-saving state is set not at the timing of stopping the special symbol variation but at the timing of finishing the big winning game.

By configuring in this way, the timing at which the time saving state is set can be varied, so that it is possible to provide the player with a game that is difficult to get tired of.

Next, with reference to FIG. 258, the contents of the starting winning process 5 (S195) will be described. FIG. 258 is a flow chart showing the details of the starting winning process 5 (S195). In this starting winning process 5 (S195), the value of the time saving type selection counter CC1 is added to the type of the counter value stored in each special symbol reserved ball storage area, compared to the above-described starting winning process (see S105 in FIG. 161). The only difference is that (S651, S652) and the execution of the prefetching process 5 (S653), and the other processing contents are the same, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 259, the contents of the prefetching process 5 (S653) will be described. FIG. 259 is a flow chart showing the contents of prefetching process 5 (S653). When this look-ahead process 5 (S653) is executed, first, various counter values from the storage area newly stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, Each value of the random number counter C1 per 1, the type counter C2 per 1st, the variation type counter CS1, and the time saving type selection counter CC1 is read (S750). Then, the read data is stored in the area with the lowest winning order among the vacant storage areas in the prefetch pending storage area (S702).

Next, based on each counter value newly stored in the prefetching reservation storage area, the result of determination is determined. In addition, here, both the right/wrong determination when the special symbol is in a low probability state and the right/wrong determination when the special symbol is in a high probability state are discriminated. This is the timing when a new reserved memory is generated (the timing when a new reserved (winning information) is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b) Since there is a time lag between the timing at which the jackpot judgment is executed based on the withheld winning information, the game state ( This is because it is difficult to predict the special symbol probability state).

Next, it is determined whether or not the winning determination result is a jackpot (S703). When it is determined that the determination result is a jackpot (S703: Yes), based on the read various counter values, a winning command including information that can specify the jackpot type and variation pattern is set (S751), After that, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the determination result in the processing of S703 is not a jackpot (S703: No), then it is determined whether it is a time-saving election (S752), and if it is determined that it is not a time-saving election (S752: No) Then, based on the various counter values read out, a prize winning command including information capable of specifying the lost winning and the variation pattern is set (S705), and then the process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the time saving election is determined in the process of S752 (S752: Yes), it is determined whether the suspension fluctuation time is normal (S753), and if it is determined that it is normal (S753: Yes) , based on the read various counter values, set a winning command including information that can identify the time-saving winning and the variation pattern (S754), and terminate this process.

Here, the winning command set in the processing of S704, S705, or S754 includes, in addition to the above-described information for indicating the success/failure determination result (information that has a different meaning based on the success/failure determination result), common information: The setting includes information for indicating the values of various counter values read by the processing of S701. Then, the winning command set in this process is output to the sound lamp controller 113 by the external output process (S1801) executed in the main process (see FIG. 167) of the main controller 110. FIG.

On the voice lamp control device 113 side, when the winning command is received, the display mode of the pending ball is varied based on various information included in the winning command (for example, the color of the pending ball is changed to a color different from usual). It is possible to execute a performance (pre-reading performance) of displaying a notice pattern or the like before the start of variation and suggesting the result of winning judgment (whether a big hit, winning a short time) to the player.

In addition, in this control example, since there is only one probability state of the special design (low probability state of the special design), information to be set in the winning command (results of winning or not determination) can be set regardless of the game state. , For example, in a gaming machine having a plurality of probability states of special symbols (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of special symbols), the determination result in the case of the high probability state of special symbols and the low probability of special symbols It may be configured to determine the success or failure determination result in the case of the state and set the winning command based on the result of each determination, or even if the special symbol is in a high probability state or a low probability state A judgment value (value of the first winning random number counter C1) for judging a big win may be defined, and a winning command indicating a special symbol big win may be set only when the judgment value is read.

By configuring in this way, to the audio lamp control device 113 side, only when it is determined in advance that it is a specific jackpot or short-time winning Because it will output a winning command indicating jackpot or short-time winning, look ahead Expectation of winning a big win can be given to the special symbol variation in which the performance is not executed.

Furthermore, the game state when the special symbol lottery is performed based on the retention memory (winning information) stored (memorized) in the first special symbol retention ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol retention ball storage area 203b , and the winning/losing determination may be executed based on the game state. In this case, instead of changing the selection of the variation pattern depending on the number of retained balls, it is possible to determine by selecting a constant variation pattern regardless of the number of retained balls at the start of variation. When the look-ahead is executed, the game state at the time of start of variation can be determined by determining the variation order until the variation of the retained ball starts based on the information retained and stored.

Further, in this control example, when new reserved storage (winning information) is stored (stored) in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, it is based on the winning information. A configuration is used in which prefetching processing is executed and the success/failure determination is predicted in advance in the prefetching processing. Or set information indicating the content (each counter value) of the winning information (holding memory) newly stored (stored) in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b as a winning command, and received at the voice lamp control device 113 side It may be configured to predict the result of winning/failure determination based on the information included in the winning command.

With this configuration, the processing load on main controller 110 can be reduced. In addition, on the audio lamp control device 113 side, a process for determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect is executed, and when it is determined to execute the look-ahead effect, the information included in the winning command received from the main control device 110 It is preferable to configure it so as to perform analysis (prediction of acceptance/rejection determination result). As a result, when the look-ahead performance is not performed, the specific look-ahead processing (prediction of the success/failure determination result) is not performed, so that the Pachinko machine 10 can be prevented from performing useless control. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from illegally obtaining the result of the prefetching process executed without a title.

Next, with reference to FIG. 260, the contents of the jackpot control process 5 (S1894) will be described. FIG. 260 is a flow chart showing the details of the jackpot control process 5 (S1894). In this jackpot control process 5 (S1894), the above-described jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 168) is executed when it is determined that it is time to start a new round (S1905: Yes). (S8401), set the number of rounds command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started (S8402), and when it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1909: Yes), jackpot end processing 5 (S8403) is different in executing (S8403), and the rest is the same.

Next, with reference to FIG. 261, the processing contents of the jackpot end processing 5 (S8403) executed in the jackpot control processing 5 (see S1894 in FIG. 260) will be described. FIG. 261 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot ending process 5 (S8403). When this jackpot end processing 5 (S8403) is executed, the currently executing jackpot type is specified (S8501), and the value (time saving end condition) corresponding to the specified jackpot type is set to the probability variable counter 203i and the time saving counter 203h Set (S8502), the game state corresponding to the value of the probability variable counter 203i and the time reduction counter 203h is set in the game state storage area (S8503), the value of the set probability variable counter 203i, the value of the time reduction counter 203h, the game state A state command is set (S8504), a jackpot medium flag is set to OFF (S8505), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 262 to 270, the contents of control processing executed by the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described. In this fifth control example, in place of the command determination process (see S4112 in FIG. 175), the command determination process 5 (S4182 in FIG. 262) is replaced with the status command reception process (see S4112 in FIG. S4202 reference) instead of the state command receiving process 5 (S4282 of FIG. 263), instead of the special figure 1 effect mode setting process (see S4903 of FIG. 183), special figure 1 effect mode setting process 5 (of FIG. 268 S4983), in place of the special figure 2 effect mode setting process (see S4907 in FIG. 184), is different in that the special figure 2 effect mode setting process 5 (see S4987 in FIG. 269) is executed, and other than that are identical. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

FIG. 262 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 5 (S4182 in FIG. 262). As shown in FIG. 262, in command determination processing 5 (S4182 in FIG. 262), state command reception processing is replaced with state command reception processing 5 (S4282) in contrast to the command determination processing described above (see S4112 in FIG. 175). are different, and otherwise identical.

FIG. 263 is a flowchart showing state command reception processing 5 (S4282). As shown in FIG. 263, in this state command reception process 5 (S4282), based on the state command received from the main controller 110, the newly set game state is determined, and various effects are performed based on the determination result. is executed.

In state command reception processing 5 (S4282), first, it is determined whether or not there is a change in the game state (S9001). If it is determined that there is no change in the game state (S9001: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S9001, when it is determined that there is a change in the game state (S9001: Yes), the information set in the sub-state setting area 223g is shifted to the command received from the main controller 110 this time. The corresponding game state is set in the sub-state setting area 223g (S9002).

Next, it is determined whether the command received this time is a command indicating a change to the normal state (S9003). When it is determined that the command received this time is a command indicating a change to the normal state (S9003: Yes), normal state effect setting processing is executed (S9004), and this processing ends. A detailed description of the normal state effect setting process (S9004) will be given later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9003 that the command received this time is not a command indicating a change to the normal state (S9003: No), the process proceeds to S9005.

In the processing of S9005, it is determined whether or not the command received this time is a command indicating a change to the time saving state (S9005). When it is determined that the command received this time is a command indicating a change to the time saving state (S9005: Yes), the time saving state effect setting process is executed (S906), and this process ends. A detailed description of the time saving state effect setting process (S9006) will be given later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S9005, when it is determined that the command received this time is not a command indicating a change to the time saving state (S9005: No), the process proceeds to S9007.

In the processing of S9007, it is determined whether the command received this time is a command indicating a change to the second probability variation state (S9007). When it is determined that the command received this time is a command indicating a change to the second probability variation state (S9007: Yes), the second probability variation state effect setting process is executed (S9008), and this processing ends. A detailed description of the second probability variation state effect setting process (S9008) will be given later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S9007, when it is determined that the command received this time is not a command indicating a change to the second probability variable state (S9007: No), the process proceeds to S9009.

In the processing of S9009, it is determined whether or not the command received this time is a command indicating a change to the variable probability state (S9009). When it is determined that the command indicates a change to the variable probability state (S9009: Yes), the number of times of time saving included in the received command is set to the value of the time saving medium counter 203da (S9010), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S9009, if it is determined that the command received this time is not a command indicating a change to the probability variable state (S9009: No), this process ends.

FIG. 264 is a flow chart showing the normal state effect setting process (S9004). This normal state effect setting process (S9004) is a process executed when a state command indicating a normal state is received in the state command reception process 5 (see S4282 in FIG. 263). In this normal state effect setting process (S9004), as shown in FIG. 264, different effect modes are set depending on whether or not the game state before the normal state is set is the second probability variable state. And if it is not the second probability variable state, that is, if it is determined that the probability variable state or the time saving state has transitioned to the normal state, the pullback for setting the effect mode corresponding to the pullback mode (pullback zone). Execute mode setting processing.

In the normal state effect setting process (S9004), first, the game state before change is read out from the sub-state setting area 223g (S9101). Next, it is determined whether or not the game state before the change read in the process of S9101 is the second probability variable state (S9102). When it is determined that the game state before the change is the second variable probability state (S9102: Yes), the display command for the effect mode corresponding to the first normal mode is set (S9103), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S9102, when it is determined that the read gaming state before the change is not the second probability variable state (S9104: No), the pullback mode setting processing is executed (S9104), and this processing ends. A detailed description of the pullback mode setting process (S9104) will be given later with reference to FIG.

FIG. 265 is a flow chart showing the pullback mode setting process (S9104). In this withdrawal mode setting process (S9104), as shown in FIG. 265, various processes are executed for setting display commands for indicating the display mode (effect mode) related to the effect screen shown in FIG. be.

In the withdrawal mode setting process (S9104), first, the game state before change is read from the sub-state setting area 223g (S9201). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a reserved ball in the second special symbol (S9202). When it is determined that the second special symbol has a reserved ball (S9202: Yes), the number of lotteries for the second special symbol executed during the normal state is specified (S9203). Next, the value of the number of lotteries of the second special symbol executed during the normal state specified in the process of S9203 is set to the time reduction lottery number counter 223db (S9204).

Next, with reference to the pull-back mode selection table 222da (see FIG. 250), the mode type is determined using the number of reservations of the second special symbol, the value of the time-saving lottery number counter 223db, and the special figure 2 reservation information. (S9205), the mode type determined in the process of S9205 is stored in the mode type storage area 223dc (S9206), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S9202, if it is determined that there is no reserved ball in the second special symbol (S9202: No), the display command for the production mode corresponding to the first normal mode is set (S9207), and this process is executed. finish.

Figure 266 is the flowchart which shows the time saving state production setting processing (S9006). This time saving state production setting process (S9006) is a process executed when a state command indicating a time saving state is received in the state command receiving process 5 (see S4282 in FIG. 263). In this time saving state effect setting process (S9006), as shown in FIG. 266, if the gaming state before the time saving state is set is a probability variable state, the preparation time (see FIG. 239) corresponding to the display mode (effect mode ), and if it is in the normal state, the display mode for indicating that it has entered the time saving state, or the display mode corresponding to the extended time corresponding to the long time saving (see FIG. 238) ( A process for setting the effect mode) is executed.

In the time saving state effect setting process (S9006), first, the game state before change is executed from the sub-state setting area 223g (S9301). Next, it is determined whether or not the game state before the change read out in the process of S9301 is the variable probability state (S9302). When it is determined that the game state before the change is the variable probability state (S9302: Yes), a display command for indicating the corresponding effect mode is set during the preparation time (S9303), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the game state before the change read out in the process of S9301 is not the variable probability state (S9302: No), it is determined whether the game state before the change is the normal state (S9304). When it is determined that the gaming state before the change is not the normal state (S9304: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game state before the change is the normal state (S9304: Yes), the number of times of time saving included in the received command is set to the value of the time saving medium counter 223da (S9305), and is set this time. It is determined whether the time saving type is time saving A (S9306).

In the process of S9306, when it is determined that the time saving type set this time is time saving A (S9306: Yes), the long time saving medium flag 223dd is set to ON (S9307), and the effect mode corresponding to the extended time is set. A command for indicating is set (S9308), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time saving type set this time is not the time saving A (S9306: No), this process is terminated.

FIG. 267 is a flow chart showing the second variable probability state effect setting process (S9008). This second probability change state effect setting process (S9008) is a process executed when a state command indicating the second probability change state is received in the state command reception process 5 (see S4282 in FIG. 263). In this second probability variable state production setting process (S9008), as shown in FIG. 267, different production modes are set depending on whether the gaming state before the second probability variable state is set is the probability variable state. In the case of the probability variable state, a pullback mode setting process is executed for setting an effect mode corresponding to the pullback mode (pullback zone).

In the second probability variable state effect setting process (S9008), first, the game state before change is read out from the subsidiary state setting area 223g (S9401). Next, it is determined whether or not the game state before the change read out in the process of S9401 is the variable probability state (S9402). If it is determined that the game state before the change is the variable probability state (S9402: Yes), the pullback mode setting process (see S9104 in FIG. 265) is executed (S9403), and this process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S9402, when it is determined that the game state before the change is not the variable probability state (S9402: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

FIG. 268 is a flowchart for showing the special figure 1 effect mode setting process 5 (S4983). In this special figure 1 production mode setting process 5 (S4983), a process for setting the production mode of the variation production corresponding to the first special symbol variation to be executed is executed.

In the special figure 1 effect mode setting process 5 (S4983), first, it is determined whether the value of the counter 223da during time saving is greater than 0 (S9501). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223da is greater than 0 (S9501: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the time saving counter 223da (S9502), and the value of the time saving counter 223da after subtraction is indicated. A command for display is set (S9503), and the process proceeds to S9504. On the other hand, in the processing of S9501, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223da is not greater than 0 (S9501: No), the processing of S9502 to S9503 is skipped, and the processing of S9504 is performed. In the process of S9504, a display variation pattern command indicating the determined effect mode is set (S9504), and the process ends.

FIG. 269 is a flowchart for showing the special figure 2 effect mode setting process 5 (S4987). In this special figure 2 production mode setting process 5 (S4987), as shown in FIG. 269, according to the gaming state in which the second special symbol lottery is executed, the process for setting various production modes is executed. .

In the special figure 2 effect mode setting process 5 (S4987), first, it is determined whether the current game state is the normal state or the second probability variation state (S9601). When it is determined that the current game state is the normal state or the second variable probability state (S9601: Yes), it is determined whether the initial setting flag 223de is ON (S9602). When it is determined that the initial setting flag 223de is not ON (S9602: No), based on the value of the time saving lottery number counter 223db, the number of lotteries of the second special symbol executed during the pullback zone is determined (S9603 ), and determines an effect mode corresponding to the determined number of lotteries of the second special symbol (S9604).

Next, the initial setting flag 223de is set to ON (S9605), and the process proceeds to S9606. On the other hand, in the process of S9602, if it is determined that the initial setting flag 223de is ON (S9602: Yes), the processes of S9603 to S9605 are skipped and the process proceeds to S9606.

In the process of S9606, the suggested mode selection table 222db (see FIG. 251) is referenced to determine the suggested mode (S9606). Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the time saving lottery number counter 223db (S9607), and it is determined whether the value of the time saving lottery number counter 223db after the subtraction is 0 (S9608). When it is determined that the value of the time saving lottery number counter 223db after the subtraction is 0 (S9608: Yes), the effect mode corresponding to the pullback zone final variation is determined (S9609), and the first time setting flag 223de is set to OFF. (S9610). Then, a display command indicating the determined rendering mode is set (S9611), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S9608, if it is determined that the value of the reduced time lottery number counter 223db after subtraction is not 0 (S9608: No), the process of S9609 to S9610 is skipped, and the process of S9611 described above is executed. , the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S9601, when it is determined that it is not the normal state or the second variable probability state (S9601: No), the value of the counter 223da during time saving is subtracted by 1 (S9612). Next, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving state (S9613). If it is determined that the current gaming state is not a time saving state, that is, if it is determined that it is a variable probability state (S9613: Yes), set a display command for indicating the value of the time saving medium counter 223da after subtraction Then (S9614), the effect setting process during the chance time is executed (S9619), the process of S9611 described above is executed, and this process ends. A detailed description of the effect setting process during chance time (S9619) will be given later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S9613, when it is determined that it is in the time saving state (S9613: Yes), it is determined whether the long time saving flag 223dd is on (S9615). When it is determined that the flag 223dd during long working hours is not ON (S9615: No), the process proceeds to S9614 described above. On the other hand, when it is determined that the flag 223dd during long working hours is ON (S9615: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the counter 223da during short working hours is less than 150 (S9616).

In the process of S9616, when it is determined that the value of the time saving medium counter 223da is less than 150 (S9616: Yes), the effect mode for indicating the number of remaining time saving times is determined (S9617), and the above S9614 Go to processing. On the other hand, in the process of S9616, if it is determined that the value of the time saving medium counter 223da is not less than 150 (S9616: No) a display command indicating that the time saving state continues until the next big hit is set ( S9618), and shifts to production setting processing during chance time (S9619).

FIG. 270 is a flowchart for showing the effect setting process during chance time (S9619). This production setting processing (S9619) during the chance time is, in the special figure 2 production mode setting processing 5 (see S4987 in FIG. 269), the production of the variable production that is executed when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. As shown in FIG. 270, processing for setting the mode is executed for updating the display mode of the remaining period display.

In the chance time production setting process (S9619), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the reduced time counter 223da subtracted in the process of S9612 of the special figure 2 production mode setting process 5 (see S4987 in FIG. 269) is 0 (S9701 ). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223da after subtraction is 0 (S9701: Yes), the production mode including the guidance mode for saving the special figure 2 reservation is determined (S9702), and then, It is determined whether the flag 223dd during long working hours is ON (S9703).

In the process of S9703, if it is determined that the flag 223dd during long working hours is ON (S9703: Yes), the flag 223dd during long working hours is set to OFF (S9704), and the effect mode corresponding to the variation pattern command is determined. (S9705), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S9701, if the value of the time saving medium counter 223da after subtraction is not 0 (S9701: No), or if it is determined that the long time saving medium flag 223db is not on in the process of S9703 (S9703 : No), the process of S9705 described above is executed, and this process ends.

<First Modification of Fifth Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 271 to 277, a first modification of the fifth control example described above will be described. In the fifth control example described above, it is configured so that the time-saving election can be made only in the second special symbol lottery executed when the normal state is set. On the other hand, in the present first modification, the difference is that the first special symbol lottery, which is executed when the normal state is set, can be elected in a short time. Other configurations are the same, and detailed descriptions of the same contents are omitted.

In the fifth control example described above, the game for executing the second special symbol lottery is performed in a state where the normal symbol high probability state (probability variable state, time saving state) is set, and the second special symbol lottery is performed during the normal symbol high probability state. It was configured to be able to acquire the execution right (special figure 2 reservation) of 2 special symbol lottery. Then, when the second special symbol lottery based on the special symbol 2 reservation acquired during the high probability state of the normal symbol is executed in the normal state in which the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, in addition to the big winning lottery, the short-time lottery is performed. By configuring it so that it is also executed, for a player who has experienced a game (advantageous game) in a high probability state with normal symbols that is advantageous to the player, after the advantageous game is completed, more than usual It is possible to execute a game (pull-back game) that easily returns to an advantageous game with a high probability.

However, in the fifth control example described above, a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery) executed in the normal state, and the game (advantageous game) in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set is not executed. As long as there is no benefit from the time-saving lottery, there is a problem that the player gets bored with the game without receiving the benefit of the time-saving lottery.

On the other hand, in the first modification, since it is configured so that the time-saving lottery can be won even in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, the player can easily receive the benefits of the time-saving lottery. can do.

Furthermore, in the fifth control example described above, based on the time-saving winning in the special symbol lottery, rather than the normal symbol high-probability state (probability variable state, time-saving state) set based on the jackpot winning in the special symbol lottery In the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal pattern set by , the period during which the high probability state of the normal pattern continues (normal pattern high probability period) is likely to become longer. In other words, when the special pattern lottery wins the short-time win, the player can be provided with the privilege of facilitating the continuation of the normal pattern high probability period until the next big win win.

On the other hand, in the first modification, when the time saving is won in the first special symbol lottery, a short time (for example, time saving once) state can be set, and the short time saving state is configured. During the period in which the state is set (normal pattern high probability period), it is configured to be able to execute a game to acquire the right to execute the second special symbol lottery. In other words, in the first modified example, the pull-back game in the fifth control example described above can be executed without winning a jackpot. By configuring in this way, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the second special symbol lottery during the normal state without winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state.

Further, although detailed description is omitted, in the first modified example, a plurality of variable times can be selected as the variable pattern of the first special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state. In this first modification, when the time reduction is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, the first special symbol is displayed in a display mode (time reduction symbol) for indicating the time reduction election after the fluctuation of the predetermined variation time. is stopped and displayed, a time saving state (time saving number of times) is set, and the time saving state continues until the special symbol variation to be executed next is stopped and displayed.

That is, the length of the period during which the time saving state continues is determined corresponding to the variation time of the special symbol variation executed during the time saving state. Therefore, the longer the variation time of the special pattern variation executed during the time saving state, the easier it is to acquire many special figures 2 reserves during the time saving state, so that the time saving state advantageous to the player can be obtained.

<Regarding the production contents of the first modified example of the fifth control example>
With reference to FIGS. 271 to 273, description will be made of the characteristic effects performed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first modified example of the fifth control example.

First, in the fifth control example described above, the period during which the high probability state of the special pattern continues after the end of the jackpot game (special pattern high probability period) and the period during which the high probability state of the normal pattern continues (normal pattern high probability period) A predetermined period (for example, the period until the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is changed 60 times and the 60th special symbol variation stops) is set, and during the normal pattern high probability period, the second It is possible to acquire the lottery right of 2 special patterns (special pattern 2 reservation), and the special pattern high probability period and the normal pattern high probability period are over and the normal state (low probability state of special patterns, low probability state of normal patterns) If set, time-saving judgment only when the lottery result of the second special pattern lottery (special 2 lottery) executed based on the special 2 reservation acquired during the normal pattern high probability period is not a jackpot winning is executed, and the time saving state (low probability state of special design, high probability state of normal design) is set when time saving is elected by time saving determination.

It should be noted that the special figure 2 hold means that when the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is already fluctuating, the second special symbol This means that the lottery right of the pattern is reserved, and up to four lottery rights are reserved (reserved storage).

In the fifth control example, when the normal state is set, the normal pattern hit probability is low, so it is difficult to win in the normal pattern lottery (normal pattern lottery) compared to the time saving state, and the electric role Since it is difficult to execute a normal symbol winning game (normal symbol winning game) in which the object 640a is in an open state, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640, and in the normal state. The special figure 2 lottery is executed, as described above, during the normal figure high probability period set after the end of the jackpot game, the special figure 2 reservation is acquired, and the special figure high probability period and the general figure high probability period end It was only when there was a special figure 2 hold when the normal state was set later.

Therefore, in order to set a state that is more advantageous than the normal state (for example, a time-saving state), the jackpot must be won at least once, and the game ball has entered the first ball entrance 64. A player who cannot win a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery (special 1 lottery) executed based on will play a game in a normal state, which is a disadvantageous game state, for a long period of time, so that the willingness to play is reduced. There was a fear that it would be lost.

On the other hand, in the first modification of the fifth control example, in the normal state, even if the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery is not a big hit, the time reduction determination is executed, and if it is a time reduction election, A time saving state is set for a predetermined period (for example, a period until a special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is changed once and the variation of the special symbol stops), and a special figure 2 is set during the time saving state. It is different from the fifth control example in that the reservation can be acquired, that is, the special figure 2 reservation can be acquired even if the jackpot is not won.

Specifically, if the lottery result of the special drawing 1 lottery is not a big hit, the time saving judgment is performed, and the time saving winning probability in this case is lower than the time saving winning probability of the second special symbol (for example, the second The time saving winning probability of the special symbol is 1/6, and the time saving winning probability of the first special symbol is 1/200). In addition, if the number of times of reduced working hours given when winning the first special symbol (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) continues) When the short winning of the second special symbol less times (for example, when the second special symbol is elected to reduce the time, the special symbol is changed 10,000 times, and the period until the 10,000th special symbol variation stops, during the time when the first special symbol is elected, the special symbol is It is a period until the fluctuation of the special symbol stops after it is changed once.

Here, when the probability of short-time winning in the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery) in the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), for example, 1/200, normal pattern Even if the lottery right of the second special pattern (special figure 2 reservation) is acquired up to the maximum number (maximum 4 in the embodiment) during the high probability period, at least 1 time-saving winning in 4 special figure 2 lotteries The probability is about 2%, and when the special figure high probability period and the normal figure high probability period are over and the normal state is set, it is advantageous to win a short time in the special figure 2 lottery based on the special figure 2 reservation. Since the player hardly expects to be set again, it is difficult to make the player think that the special figure 2 lottery during the normal state is a special period. There is a risk that the player will not actively play until the last moment to acquire the special figure 2 reservation.

Therefore, the time-saving winning probability in the special figure 2 lottery during the normal state is the special figure 2 hold that is obtained up to the upper limit number (in this embodiment, up to 4 pieces) during the normal figure high probability period. It is desirable to set the probability (for example, 1/6) that short-time winning can be fully expected in the special figure 2 lottery based on FIG. The probability of winning a short time is about 50%, and even if the special high probability period and the normal high probability period are over and the normal state is set, it is advantageous to win a short time in the special 2 lottery based on the special 2 reservation. It is possible to make the player expect that the state will be set again, and by making the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state think that it is a special period, until the last moment when the normal figure high probability period ends It is possible to motivate the game to acquire many special figure 2 reservations.

On the other hand, the short-time winning probability in the first special pattern lottery (special 1 lottery) in the normal state is the same probability as the short-time winning probability in the special 2 lottery in the normal state or the short-time winning probability in the special 2 lottery. If the probability is higher than that, there is a risk that the time saving will be frequently won in the normal state, and the time saving state will be easily set, which will be excessively advantageous to the player.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the time saving winning probability in the special figure 1 lottery in the normal state is set lower than the time saving winning probability in the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state.

Also, although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the time saving is won in the special figure 1 lottery, the number of time saving times is 1 time, that is, the special symbol is changed once, and the special symbol variation is stopped. It is configured to set the period and the time saving state.

For example, if the number of times of time saving is granted two or more times, if the player is playing correctly, it is possible to acquire the special figure 2 hold up to the upper limit, but in the case of such a configuration, the time saving winning in the special figure 1 lottery If you do, you can get the special figure 2 hold up to the upper limit every time, so the ease of winning the time saving is always constant, and the game in the time saving state set based on the fact that you won the time saving in the special figure 1 lottery However, there was a risk that it would become a monotonous game just to acquire the special figure 2 hold up to the upper limit number.

On the other hand, if the number of times of reduced working hours given in the first special pattern lottery (special 1 lottery) is 1, the reduced working hours state (low probability state of special patterns, high probability state of normal patterns) is set, the variation time of the special symbol, the variation time of the normal symbol, or the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a that is opened as a privilege by winning the normal symbol lottery. It is possible to vary the number of lottery rights (special figure 2 reservation) of the second special pattern that can be acquired inside, and it is easy to win time saving without changing the probability of winning time according to the number of special figure 2 reservations that can be obtained. Since the depth can be varied, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In this way, the time-saving judgment is executed even in the special figure 1 lottery in the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), and if you win a short time, you can acquire special figure 2 reservation. By setting the time-saving state, even if the player cannot win the jackpot for a long period of time, the player can obtain the opportunity to acquire the special figure 2 reservation, so that the normal state disadvantageous to the player continues for a long period of time. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's desire to play.

As described above, in the first modification of the fifth control example, the time reduction determination is executed even in the special figure 1 lottery in the normal state, so that the game state is varied after the time reduction election, and the player's game Since the method also changes, it is necessary to inform the player of the time-saving winning in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, a time-saving state that is set when you win a time-saving lottery in the special drawing 1 lottery in the normal state, and a time-saving state that is set when you win a time-saving drawing in the second special pattern lottery (special drawing 2 lottery) in the normal state. , The contents of the game are different (in the time saving state set by the time saving winning in the special drawing 1 lottery, special drawing 2 is acquired a lot, and special drawing 2 in the normal state is executed based on the special drawing 2 holding A game aiming for short-time winning in the lottery, and a game aiming for a special symbol lottery jackpot in the short-time state set when winning the short-time lottery in the special figure 2 lottery), so that the player is not confused. , to make it easier for the player to understand which of the time-saving states is set based on the time-saving winning in which special figure lottery.

Based on the above, an example of rendering in the first modified example of the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 271 to 273. FIG.

FIG. 271(a) is an example of a variable display screen when the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery is a jackpot lottery or a time-saving lottery lottery lottery in a normal state. As shown in FIG. 271(a), when the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery in the normal state is a big win or a short time lottery, a rabbit character 801 and a treasure box 810e are displayed in the main display area Dm, In the secondary display area Ds, "If a 'V' comes out of the treasure box, you win big! ! When "time" comes out, it's a short time GET! ! Open the treasure chest." is displayed. In other words, at the time when FIG. 271(a) is displayed, it is configured so that the player does not know whether the jackpot or the time saving has been won.

By configuring in this way, when the treasure box 810e is displayed, it is possible for the player to expect that he or she has won either the big win or the time-saving win. It is possible to improve the amusement of the game by making the player predict which one of the jackpot winning or the short-time winning is won.

Figure 271 (b) shows the display screen when the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 lottery) in the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is short-time winning An example. In the main display area Dm, the treasure box 810e displayed in FIG. 271(a) is opened, and an effect is executed in which a ball tm1 described as "Time x 1" appears from inside, and "Time reduction" is displayed in the sub display area Ds. GET ONE TIME” is displayed to notify the player of the time-saving winning.

In addition, when the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery is a jackpot winning, the treasure box 810e opens in the main display area Dm of FIG. is executed, and "Congratulations! Jackpot!" is displayed in the secondary display area to notify the player of winning the jackpot.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine whether the game state set after the first special symbol during fluctuation is stopped is a jackpot game state or a time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols). It can be made easy for the player to understand.

In addition, in the embodiment, when the jackpot winning or the time saving winning is performed, the effects of FIGS. 271(a) and 271(b) may be executed in part of the case where there is an error. is empty and "Unfortunate" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds) is displayed.

In this case, by changing the display mode of the treasure box 810e displayed in FIG. In this case, there is a high possibility that you have won a wrong prize, and if a golden treasure box 810e is displayed, it indicates that there is a high possibility that you have won one of them).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game due to the fact that the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery is out for a long period of time in any determination, and the performance is not executed. can.

Although details will be described later, the small display area Dm10 is a display area for displaying the number of lottery rights (special figure 1 reservation) of the first special symbol acquired, and in FIG. Reservation h6 is displayed in black, reservation h7 and reservation h8 are displayed in white, indicating that there is a special figure 1 reservation corresponding to the number of reservations displayed in black (in the case of FIG. 271 (b) , Shows a state where there are two special 1 reservations). That is, the embodiment is an example of effect executed when special figure 1 reservation is present and time saving is won in special figure 1 lottery in normal state.

Here, when an advantageous state (for example, time-saving state) is set, the game machine is generally configured so that the second special symbol is likely to be set for a shorter variation time than the first special symbol. By configuring in this way, when the advantageous state (for example, time saving state) is set, the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery) is mainly executed, so if the lottery result is out By shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbols, the game in an advantageous state is prevented from being prolonged, and the player can comfortably play the game.

However, in the first modification of the fifth control example, the first special symbol lottery (special symbol lottery) in the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) 1 lottery), when you notify that you have won a short time as shown in FIG. From there, the player starts a game (right-handed game) in which a game ball is shot toward the second ball entrance 640 on the right side of the board surface of the gaming machine, and the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640. Based on, the variation of the second special symbol is started. In other words, the second special symbol, which is likely to be set with a shorter variation time than the first special symbol, starts to fluctuate in a state where the time saving state is set, and when the variation of the second special symbol stops, the time saving state ends. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the player will not be able to acquire the second special symbol lottery right (special symbol 2 reservation) up to the upper limit, and the player will be in a disadvantageous situation.

In addition, when the second special symbol is configured to easily set a longer fluctuation time than the first special symbol in the time saving state, when the time saving state is set based on the time saving winning in the special figure 1 lottery In addition, by varying the second special symbol, it becomes easier to acquire the special figure 2 reservation up to the upper limit, so that the lottery right of the first special symbol (special figure 1 reservation) is not acquired during the game in the normal state. There is a risk that some players will play an illegal game by shooting the balls one by one.

Therefore, if the time saving is won in the special figure 1 lottery in a situation where there is no special figure 1 reservation, even if the fluctuation of the first special symbol that is winning the time saving is stopped, it is not notified that the time saving is won (for example, the treasure box 810e is empty), and next, when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the large second ball entrance 640, when the special symbol variation is started, It is good also as composition which performs production (refer to figure 272 (a)) in a time saving state.

By configuring in this way, even if the special figure 1 lottery is short-time winning in the special figure 1 lottery in a situation where the special figure 1 reservation does not exist, the player does not know whether or not the short-time winning is won, and the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64. In order to continue the game (left-handed game) to enter the ball, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the variation by the first special pattern during the time saving state set based on the time saving winning in the special figure 1 lottery.

In addition, in order to change the first special symbol during the time saving state set based on the time saving election in the special figure 1 lottery, the first It is good also as a structure which provides the starting opening which can change a special design.

With reference to FIGS. 272(a) and 272(b), the effect executed when the time saving state is set based on the time saving winning in the special figure 1 lottery during the normal state will be described.

Although the details will be described later, in the first modification of the fifth control example, if the time reduction is elected in the special figure 1 lottery during the normal state, the first special symbol that has been elected for the time reduction is stopped. A time-saving state is set for the period until the variation of the special symbol of 1 is completed.

In addition, as described above, when the time saving state is set, the probability of winning the normal symbol is increased, and the electric accessory 640a is in the open state compared to the normal state. It becomes easier for the game ball to enter the 2 ball entrance 640, and the player can obtain the special figure 2 reservation.

And, the number of special symbols 2 reserved that the player can acquire during the time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is the variation time of special symbols, the variation time of normal symbols, the game per normal pattern It is possible to change the combination of the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a by .

For example, 30 seconds is set as the variation time of the first special symbol when the time saving state is set, the variation time of the normal symbol is 3 seconds, and the electric accessory 640a is open 1 second x 2 times as a game per normal symbol. In this case, the electric accessory 640a will be in the open state 12 times at most, so the player can draw the second special symbol lottery right (special figure 2 hold) can be obtained.

On the other hand, 5 seconds is set as the variation time of the first special symbol when the time saving state is set, the variation time of the normal symbol is 4 seconds, and the electric accessory 640a is open 1 second x 1 time as a game per normal symbol. In this case, since the game ball can be entered into the second ball entrance 640 only once at most, the player can acquire only one special figure 2 reservation.

Then, when the fluctuation of the special symbols is stopped and the time saving state is ended, a second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery) is executed based on the special figure 2 reservation acquired by the player during the time saving state.

In addition, in the embodiment, the time-saving winning probability of the second special symbol in the normal state (low-probability state of special symbols, low-probability state of normal symbols) is higher than the time-saving winning probability of the first special symbol (in the embodiment, 1 / 6), the number of times of time saving given at the time of winning time saving is also large (10000 times in the embodiment).

That is, the more special figures 2 pending acquired during the time saving, the more special figures 2 lotteries can be received, so the longer the special symbol fluctuation time when the time saving state is set, the more advantageous it is for the player. Become.

It should be noted that any of the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the time saving state is set, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, or the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a by the normal per game may be a fixed value.

In FIG. 272(a), the first special symbol won in the normal state stops, and the variation time of the first special symbol to be executed next is 30 seconds, the variation time of the normal symbol is 2 seconds, and the electric accessory 640a. It is a display screen during the time saving state when 1 second × 1 time is set as the opening pattern of.

The first special symbol is variably displayed in the small display area Dm1, and the display indicating that the second special symbol is not variably displayed is displayed in the small display area Dm8, and which special symbol is variably displayed. It is easy for players to understand.

Corresponding to the fact that the time saving state is set in the small display area Dm4, the player is urged to shoot the game ball toward the second ball entrance 640 on the right side area of the board surface of the game machine. is displayed, and in the secondary display area Ds, the message ``Right hit and accumulate reserves! are doing.

In the main display area Dm, "Collect capsules within the time limit during charging!"

The capsule is a display for notifying that the game ball has entered the second ball entrance 640. When the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the reserved symbol in the small display area Dm9 is displayed in black. When it lights up, one capsule is displayed. Here, the small display area Dm9 is a display area for indicating the number of special figures 2 reserved obtained by the player entering the game ball into the second ball entrance 640, and the second special symbol lottery If the right (special figure 2 reservation) does not exist, the reservation h1 to reservation h4 are displayed in white, and when the player acquires the special figure 2 reservation, it is lit in black in order from the reservation h1 to the youngest, and the reservation storage is the upper limit. When the number is accumulated, all of the suspension h1 to suspension h4 are lit in black.

In addition, the small display area Dm10 is a display area for indicating the number of lottery rights (special figure 1 reserved) of the first special symbol acquired by the player entering the game ball into the first ball entrance 64. When the special figure 1 reservation does not exist, the reservations h5 to the reservation h8 are displayed in white. When the hold is acquired up to the upper limit number (4 times in the embodiment), all the holds h5 to h8 are lit black.

That is, in the example shown in FIG. 272 (a), it shows that it is in a state of acquiring one special figure 1 reservation and one special figure 2 reservation. By configuring in this way, the player can easily understand the upper limit number of reserved special symbols and the current state of obtaining reserved special symbols, and when the reserved number of special symbols is obtained up to the upper limit number. Even if the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, the lottery right for each special pattern is not reserved, so depending on the reservation acquisition status, the player is asked to enter the first ball entrance 64. Alternatively, it is possible to make it easier to determine whether or not to continue the game for entering the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 .

In addition, when the reservation h4 is displayed in black based on the game ball entering the second ball entrance 640 in a state where the reservation h1 to reservation h3 are displayed in black in the small display area Dm9, that is, the special figure When four 2 reserves, which is the upper limit number, are stored, the main display area Dm displays "MAX Acquisition Complete!" inform. By configuring in this way, it becomes easy for the player to understand that the special figure 2 reservation has been acquired up to the upper limit number, and the player can be relieved.

In the small display area Dm5, the remaining time until the time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) ends, that is, the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbols during fluctuation is displayed. Dm11 displays "capsule upper limit acquisition expectation MAX". The content displayed in the small display area Dm11 corresponds to the special figure 2 pending number that can be acquired during the time saving state, and in the example shown in FIG. 2 seconds is set as the variation time of the normal pattern, and 1 second x 1 time is set as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a. Capsule upper limit acquisition expectation MAX" is displayed. On the other hand, when 5 seconds is set as the variation time of the first special symbol, 3 seconds is set as the variation time of the normal symbol, and 1 second x 2 times is set as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a, the special figure 2 is reserved. Since you can only get one at a maximum, the message "Expectation for Capsule Upper Limit Acquisition Low" is displayed.

By configuring in this way, the enjoyment of predicting the number of special figures 2 pending that the player can acquire during the time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) from the display content of the small display area Dm11 can be given, and when a short variation time is set as the variation time of the special symbol, it is possible to make the player shoot the game ball in a hurry, and the game ball is set even though the time saving state is set. It is possible to suppress the problem that the player fails to play the game in the time-saving state due to the delay in the launch of the ball.

It should be noted that the display of the upper limit expectation level of the capsule may be any display that indicates the level, and for example, the number of stars may be used to indicate the level of expectation.

In addition, in the embodiment, when the first special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 lottery) is elected during the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), the lottery right of the first special symbol (Special figure 1 suspension) exists, and the case where the variation of the first special symbol is executed based on the special figure 1 suspension during the time saving state is explained as an example, but when the time saving is won, the special figure 1 suspension If it does not exist, then the charge effect is that the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, and either the first special symbol or the second special symbol changes. Started when started. In addition, regardless of whether or not special figure 1 reservation exists, the time saving state is set at the time when the variation of the first special symbol that has been elected for time saving stops.

FIG. 272(b) is an example of the display screen displayed when the variation of the special symbol is stopped and the time saving state ends.

In the small display area Dm1, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, and in the small display area Dm5, "remaining 0 seconds" is displayed to notify that the period in which the time saving state is set has ended. there is

In the small display area Dm9, the hold h1 to hold h4 are lit black, and the letters "Total4GET" and the capsules cp1 to cp4 are displayed in the center of the main display area Dm, so that the second special symbol lottery right (special The player is notified that he has acquired four pieces of (reserved in FIG. 2). Capsule cp1-capsule cp4 correspond to hold 1-hold 4, respectively, for example, the result of pre-discriminating hold information of hold h2 (special figure 2 hold acquired second during charge production) (read-ahead result) , when the degree of expectation for the time-saving winning is high, the capsule cp2 is displayed in a display mode (black capsule) different from the other capsules.

Thereby, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that there is a reservation with a high possibility of winning a short-time win in the special figure 2 reservation, and to improve the interest of the game.

Also, in the central part of the main display area Dm, "Charge completed, enter the promotion chance zone!" ” indicates that the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery) is executed after the time saving state is finished.

It should be noted that, if the capsule could not be acquired during the above-mentioned charge production, that is, if even one special figure 2 reservation could not be acquired, the normal mode will be entered without entering the promotion chance zone after the end of the charge production. Transition.

In the embodiment, in the small display area Dm9 and the small display area Dm10, even if there is no special figure 1 reservation or special figure 2 reservation, the reservation h1 to reservation h8 are displayed in white, so that up to 4 each Although it was configured to indicate that it is possible to hold, without being limited to this, when there is no special figure 1 reservation or special figure 2 reservation, nothing is displayed in the small display area Dm9 or the small display area Dm10 , it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the reserved design is displayed when the reservation of the special design is acquired.

With this configuration, it becomes difficult for the player to understand how many lottery rights of each special symbol can be reserved, and even if the player obtains the maximum number of reservations, the player will not notice that the maximum number of reservations has been obtained. It is possible to continue shooting the game balls without doing so.

In addition, in the embodiment, when the fluctuation of the special symbols in which the time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set, the display screen of FIG. 272(b) is displayed. However, not limited to this, when the second special symbol lottery right (special figure 2 reservation) is acquired to the upper limit number with the remaining variation time remaining until the special symbol variation stops , the display screen of FIG. 272(b) may be displayed. In the case of such a configuration, when the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the display mode of the capsule changes, and the configuration that suggests the expectation of winning the jackpot with special figure 2 or the expectation of shortening the time. It is good as

By constructing in this way, the game ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 for the player who has obtained the upper limit number of the special figure 2 reserves while a lot of the special symbol variation time still remains. It is possible to continue the game in which the game ball is entered into the second ball inlet 640 until the last moment when the special symbol stops changing by making the player expect that the display mode of the capsule may change if Become.

In the embodiment, the capsules cp1 to cp4 corresponding respectively to the holds h1 to hold h4 are displayed. A configuration in which only one capsule is displayed may be used. That is, in the later-described promotion chance zone, the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery) based on hold 1 to hold 4 is notified by opening the capsule once. By constructing in this way, it becomes difficult for the player to understand how many special 2 reserves have been acquired during the charge performance, and the player can enjoy the promotion chance zone performance without worrying about the number of special 2 reserves acquired. can enjoy.

In addition, in the case of such a configuration, it is desirable that the player does not know that the special figure 2 suspension has been obtained when the special figure 2 suspension is obtained in the charge effect. When the capsule is acquired, the capsule is not displayed, and the small display area Dm9 is not displayed so that the acquisition status of the special figure 2 reservation is not known, and only when the special figure 2 reservation is acquired to the upper limit number, the main display area A configuration may be adopted in which "MAX Acquisition Completed" is displayed on Dm.

By configuring in this way, it becomes difficult to understand the acquisition status of the special figure 2 reservation, so that it is possible to suppress the player's dissatisfaction due to the fact that the special figure 2 reservation cannot be obtained as desired during the charge performance. .

FIG. 273 is an example of a display screen displayed when short-time winning is won in the special figure 2 lottery based on the special figure 2 reservation in the promotion chance zone.

In the small display area Dm1, a display indicating that the first special symbol is not variably displayed is displayed, and in the small display area Dm8, a display mode indicating that the second special symbol has been won is displayed.

In addition, since the normal state (low-probability state for special symbols, low-probability state for normal symbols) is set, the player is urged to shoot the game ball toward the first ball entrance 64 "left-handed". is displayed to prevent the player from playing with an erroneous game method.

In the center of the main display area Dm, the capsule cp1 written as "done" indicating that it has already been opened, and the special figure 2 lottery based on the lottery right of the second special symbol (special figure 2 reserved) A diamond dy1 written as "time x 10000" indicating that the result of 2 was a short time winning, an opened capsule cp2, and unopened capsules cp3 and cp4 are displayed.

In the example of FIG. 273, the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery) based on the first acquired special figure 2 reservation among the four special figure 2 reservations acquired during the charge production does not win big hits and short working hours. , It shows that it was elected in a short time in the special figure 2 lottery based on the second special figure 2 reservation.

In addition, the small display area Dm5 is displayed as "three more times", indicating that the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol based on the special figure 2 hold is three times remaining, and the display of the remaining number of times is the second special It is updated when the variable display of the pattern is started. For example, at the time when the variable display of the second special symbol based on the first special figure 2 hold is started, "4 more times" is displayed, and when the variable display based on the second special figure 2 hold is started , "3 times more" is displayed.

In addition, in the display of the small display area Dm9, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is newly started based on the special figure 2 suspension, the suspension display displayed in the suspension h1 is changed from black display to white display. However, if the hold h2 is black display, that is, if there are other special figure 2 holds, it is displayed by shifting to the hold h1, the hold h1 becomes a black display, and the hold h2 becomes a white display. At that time, if the pending h3 and the pending h4 are displayed in black, they are shifted to the pending h2 and the pending h3 respectively. In the example shown in FIG. 273, since the variation of the second special symbol based on the special figure 2 suspension has been executed twice, the two suspensions h3 and h4 are displayed in white.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand how many more times the variation of the second special symbol based on the special figure 2 reservation will be executed.

In addition, in FIG. 273, an example of production in the case of short-time winning in the special figure 2 lottery based on the special figure 2 reservation was described, but when the jackpot is won in the special figure 2 lottery based on the special figure 2 reservation, the contents of the capsule may be displayed in a different display mode (for example, a ball marked with "V") to inform the player of the jackpot winning, or the capsule itself may be displayed in a different display mode (for example, a red capsule). It is good also as a structure to carry out.

Also, if the result of the special figure 2 lottery based on the special figure 2 reservation is out in any judgment, it may be configured that the contents are empty when the capsule is opened, or from the capsule It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a display mode (for example, a piece of paper with the word “sorry” written on it) indicating the deviation is displayed.

Also, in the embodiment, as a result of pre-discriminating the hold information of the special figure 2 hold (prefetch result), if there is a high possibility of winning a short time, a capsule corresponding to the special figure 2 hold that is likely to be short are displayed in different display modes, but the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, as a result of prefetching the hold information of the third acquired special figure 2 hold, if there is a high possibility of winning a short time, in the capsule opening effect based on the second acquired special figure 2 hold, from the capsule " Next time big chance!” By making the paper appear, the special 2 lottery based on the next 2nd special pattern lottery right (special 2 reservation) (that is, the 3rd acquired special 2 reservation) It may be configured to suggest to the player that there is a high possibility of winning a jackpot or winning a short time, or "Done" displayed after the capsule opening effect based on the second acquired special figure 2 reservation is completed. A different display mode may be used instead of the display mode of the capsule written with (for example, a capsule written with "next big chance").

By configuring in this way, when a capsule with a different display mode is displayed in the promotion chance zone, the second special design based on the special figure 2 hold executed before the special figure 2 hold corresponding to the capsule In the fluctuation of , it is possible to expect that information about the special figure 2 hold that will be executed next will be displayed, and it is possible to have interest in the opening effect of the capsule displayed in the normal display mode. can.

In the promotion chance zone, the special 2 reserves are digested in the order in which they were acquired (from h1 to the youngest), and the capsules corresponding to the special 2 reserves to be digested are released in order (from capsule cp1 to the youngest). However, without being limited to this, it may be configured such that the special figure 2 reservation to be digested and the capsule to be released do not correspond. For example, when the lottery result of the second special pattern lottery (special figure 2 lottery) based on the first acquired special figure 2 reservation is short time winning, if capsule cp4 is selected instead of capsule cp1, short time winning By adopting a configuration indicating that there is a high possibility that the capsules will be released, it is possible to make the player interested not only in the display mode of the capsules but also in the order in which the capsules are opened, thereby further improving the amusement of the game.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first modified example of the fifth control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 274, the electrical configuration of the first modified example will be described. In this first modification, in contrast to the fifth control example described above, the point that the time reduction can be won in the first special symbol lottery, and the time reduction type set when the time reduction is won in the first special symbol lottery is set to the second. It is different in that it is different from the time-saving type set when the time-saving lottery is won in the special symbol lottery. Moreover, it is different in that the variation time of the first special symbol variation executed during the time saving state is varied. Other configurations are the same, and the same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG.274(a) is the figure which showed the content prescribed|regulated to random number 5a table 202dae per time saving. As shown in FIG. 274 (a), the time saving per random number 5a table 202dae is normal state (special design of Low probability state, low probability state of the normal pattern) is different in that it defines the determination value of short-time winning, other than that is the same.

Specifically, when the special symbol type is the first special symbol and the set game state is a low probability state (normal state) of special symbols and normal symbols, the acquired first random number counter C1 is defined in the range of "51 to 54".

That is, since the range that the value of the first winning random number counter C1 can take is 900, in the first special symbol lottery that is executed in the normal state, it is constructed so as to win short time with a probability of 4/900.

Next, with reference to Drawing 274 (b), the contents of time saving classification selection 5a table 202daf are explained. Drawing 274 (b) is a figure showing the contents prescribed in time saving classification selection 5a table 202daf. The time saving type selection 5a table 202daf differs from the time saving type selection 5 table 202df of the fifth control example described above in that it adds a time saving type that is set when the time saving is won in the first special symbol lottery. are otherwise identical. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

Specifically, when the special symbol type (special symbol type) is the first special symbol, regardless of the value of the acquired time saving type selection counter CC1, the time saving type "time saving C" is defined. When this time saving C is set, 1 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h. That is, the time saving state of one time of time saving is set.

<Regarding control processing in the first modification of the fifth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 275 to 277, the processing contents of the control processing in this first modified example will be described. In the first modified example, in contrast to the fifth control example described above, a part of the processing contents executed by the main controller 110, a part of the processing contents executed by the sound ramp control device 113, are different, and otherwise the same. Here, differences from the fifth control example described above will be described.

Figure 275 is the flowchart which shows the processing contents of time saving lottery processing 5a (S8021). In this time-saving lottery process 5a (S8021), the conditions for executing the time-saving lottery (time-saving winning determination) are different from those of the time-saving lottery process 5 (S8001) of the fifth control example. That is, in the fifth control example described above, the control process is executed so that the condition for executing the time saving propriety determination can be satisfied only when the type of the special symbol lottery being executed is the second special symbol (S8101 See), in this first modification, it is configured so that the conditions for executing the time-saving propriety determination can be established regardless of the special symbol type. That is, the difference is that the process of S8101 is deleted from the time saving lottery process 5 (S8001) of the fifth control example described above. Other processing contents are the same. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute time-saving adequacy determination also in the first special symbol lottery.

Figure 276 is the flowchart which shows the processing contents of time saving state production setting processing 5a (S9026). This time saving state effect setting process 5a (S9026) is set when time saving is won in the first special symbol lottery with respect to the time saving state effect setting process 5 (see S9006 in FIG. 266) of the fifth control example described above. The difference is that the processing content (S9321, S9322) when the time saving type (time saving C) is set is added, and the other is the same, so the description is omitted.

When the time saving state effect setting process 5a (S9026) is executed, the same S9301 to S9308 processing as the time saving state effect setting process 5 (see S9006 in FIG. 266) of the fifth control example described above is executed, and this process is executed. finish. On the other hand, in the process of S9306, if it is determined that the time saving type is not the time saving A (S9306: No), then it is determined whether the time saving type is the time saving C (S9321), and the time saving C is determined. If so (S9321: Yes), a display command is set to indicate the effect mode corresponding to the charge time (see FIG. 272) (S9322), and this process ends.

Figure 277 is the flowchart which shows the processing contents of special figure 1 production mode setting processing 5a (S4993). In this special figure 1 effect mode setting process 5a (S4993), for the special figure 1 effect mode setting process 5 (S4983 in FIG. 268) in the fifth control example described above, in the case of short time winning in the first special symbol lottery The difference is that the process for setting the effect mode and the process for setting the effect mode of the first special symbol variation executed during the time saving state are different.

When the special figure 1 effect mode setting process 5a (S4993) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 223da is greater than 0 (S9501), and when it is determined that it is greater than 0 (S9501: Yes), the value of the time saving medium counter 223da is subtracted by 1 (S9502), the time saving type is read from the secondary state setting area 223g (S9521), it is determined whether the read time saving type is time saving C (S9522), and the time saving C If it is, the time-saving performance mode corresponding to the remaining variation time of the special symbol this time is determined (S9523), the display variation pattern command indicating the determined performance mode is set (S9524), and this processing is terminated.

That is, the display mode for guiding the remaining period of time reduction displayed in the small display area Dm5 shown in FIG. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the remaining time in which the time saving state continues in an easy-to-understand manner.

Also, if it is determined that it is not time saving C in the process of S9522 (S9522: No), since it is a case where the first special symbol variation is executed in a state where other time saving types are set, time saving after subtraction A display command for indicating the value of the lottery number counter 223db is set (S9525), and the process proceeds to S9524.

On the other hand, in the process of S9501, if it is determined that the value of the time saving lottery number counter 223db is 0, that is, if it is determined that the present is not in the time saving state (S9501: No), then whether it is a time saving election fluctuation (S9526), and when it is determined that it is a time saving election fluctuation (S9526: Yes), the production mode for indicating time saving election is determined (S9527), and the process moves to S9524. Here, the variable performance of the short-time winning variation shown in FIG.

<Second Modification of Fifth Control Example>
A second modification of the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 278 to 282. FIG. In the fifth control example described above, it is possible to set a high probability state (first time reduction) of normal symbols based on the fact that the jackpot has been won in the special symbol lottery, and the normal symbols are based on the fact that the time reduction has been won in the special symbol lottery. It was configured to be able to set a high probability state (second time reduction). As a result, it is possible to set a high-probability state of normal symbols at a plurality of opportunities, and by increasing the variation of the game, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

In this second modification, in order to further improve the interest, the contents of the privilege given when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery executed in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set It is configured to vary according to the trigger (first time saving or second time saving) when the high probability state of the symbol is set. In other words, the contents of the privilege given when the same jackpot type is set are different between when the big win is won during the first time saving and when the big win is won during the second time saving. By configuring in this way, when the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal pattern is set, it is possible to make the player interested in which opportunity the time saving state was set, so that the game It is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

Furthermore, in the second modification, a jackpot game (2R jackpot) with a small number of rounds and a short game time per round game is executed as a jackpot game executed when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery. After the 2R jackpot game is executed, the time saving state is set. By configuring in this way, when the time saving state is set based on the jackpot winning in the special symbol lottery, that is, when the first time saving is set, the time saving state is set without executing the jackpot game. When set, that is, when the second time reduction is set, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the difference in the contents of the game to be executed.

In addition, in the second modification, the variable production executed in the process of setting the first time saving and the variable production executed in the process of setting the second time saving can be executed in the same production mode. It consists of Specifically, after the special symbol variation for indicating that the jackpot winning (2R jackpot winning) in which the first short time is set is started, the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, and then the 2R jackpot game ends. The first period until the second time reduction is set and the second period, which is the variation time of the special symbol variation to indicate that the second time reduction is set, is set to be approximately the same period. It is configured to execute an effect in a common effect mode using.

By configuring in this way, when the first time saving is set and when the second time saving is set, the period from the start of the special symbol variation to the setting of the time saving state is common. Since the performance of the performance mode can be executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand when the time saving state is set.

<Regarding the effect content in the second modified example of the fifth control example>
With reference to FIGS. 278 and 279, the characteristic effect executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 of the second modification of the fifth control example will be described.

In the fifth control example described above, although there is a difference between the number of time reductions given after the end of the jackpot game (the number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed during the high probability state of normal symbols) and the number of time reductions given by the time reduction winning , If you win a jackpot in a special symbol lottery during the time-saving state set based on the jackpot winning (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), and the time-saving state set based on the time-saving winning In the case of winning a jackpot in a special pattern lottery, if the jackpot type is the same, the privilege given (for example, the number of times of shortening the time given after the jackpot game ends) is also the same.

Therefore, even if the time-saving state is set as a trigger for either the jackpot winning or the time-saving winning, there is a difference in the ratio of the jackpot type when the jackpot is won during the time-saving state and the benefits given even if it is the same jackpot type. There is a risk that the game will become monotonous.

On the other hand, in the second modification of the fifth control example, when the jackpot is won during the time saving state set based on the jackpot winning, and when the jackpot is won during the time saving state set based on the time saving winning It is different from the fifth control example in that the ratio of the jackpot type and the privilege given even if the jackpot type is the same are different from the fifth control example.

By configuring in this way, the ratio of the jackpot type (for example, the jackpot with a large number of rounds of the jackpot game) in which advantageous benefits are given to the player by the opportunity of setting the time saving state is variable. Also, it is possible to give different benefits even for the same jackpot type, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Specifically, in the second modification of the fifth control example, the first special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 lottery) and the second special symbol in the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) In the lottery (special drawing 2 lottery), the jackpot determination and the time saving determination are performed, and the first time saving state is set based on the jackpot winning, and the second time saving state is set based on the time saving winning. It is possible. Then, for example, when the jackpot A is won in a state in which the first time saving state is set, a maximum of 100 time saving times are provided after the jackpot game ends, but the second time saving state is set. When a jackpot A is won in the state, a maximum of 10,000 times of time saving is provided after the jackpot game ends.

Thus, depending on whether the game state set when the jackpot is won is the first time saving state or the second time saving state, the benefits given to the player when the jackpot is won are different, and the second time saving state is set. When the first time saving state is set, advantageous benefits (for example, the number of times of time saving given after the jackpot game is large) are more likely to be given based on the winning of the jackpot than when the first time saving state is set. Therefore, the player plays the game expecting that the second time saving state is set rather than the first time saving state.

In addition, as will be described later, in the second modification of the fifth control example, it is possible to acquire prize balls during the jackpot game, and after the jackpot game ends, the variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) and a 2R short-time jackpot in which it is difficult to obtain prize balls during the jackpot game and the first time-shortening state is set after the jackpot game is finished.

Therefore, when the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is the 2R time-saving jackpot, the prize balls cannot be obtained even though the jackpot is won, and the second time-saving state is disadvantageous compared to the second time-saving state. Since the one-hour-shortening state is set, there is a possibility that the player who wins the 2R jackpot may lose his/her willingness to play.

Therefore, in the second modification of the fifth control example, the effect to be executed in the case of winning the 2R time saving jackpot in which the first time saving state is set and the time saving winning in which the second time saving state is set It is made the same and configured so that it is difficult for the player to discriminate whether the 2R time-saving jackpot win or the time-saving win is won.

By constructing in this way, even when winning the 2R short-time jackpot, which is disadvantageous compared to the 16R variable variable jackpot, the player can be expected to win the short-time jackpot, and when the 2R short-time jackpot is won. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's desire to play.

FIG. 278(a) is an example of the chance time acquisition effect executed when winning the jackpot to give the first time saving state in the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 lottery) in the normal state.

Two numbers "2" are displayed in the center of the main display area Dm, and a symbol "chance time" is displayed between them, and "chance time GET!!" is displayed, and it is informed that the chance time will shift after this.

Here, the chance time, after the time saving state (low probability state of special design, high probability state of normal design) is set, it shows the production mode that is displayed in the period until the time saving state ends. there is In addition, even if it is a case where the time saving state of the 1st time saving state and the 2nd time saving state is set, the production mode displayed becomes a chance time. Therefore, it is configured such that the player cannot determine which time saving state the currently set time saving state is based on the displayed production mode.

It should be noted that it is also possible to use the effect executed during the chance time to suggest the set time-saving state, for example, prepare a plurality of background images displayed during the chance time, and set the second time-saving state. It is good also as composition with which a specific background image is easy to be set compared with the case where the 1st time saving state is set up when it is set up.

By constructing in this way, it becomes possible for the player to pay attention to the display mode during the chance time in order to guess the type of the time saving state, and the interest in the game during the chance time can be improved.

The small display area Dm1 shows a display mode indicating that the first special symbol has won the 2R time-saving jackpot. Here, in FIG. 278(a), the size of the display in the small display area Dm1 is set so that the player can see it, but it is configured so that it cannot be seen by the player (for example, the small display area Dm1 is not displayed). Desirably, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to determine whether the 2R time saving jackpot win or the time saving win is made so that it cannot be visually recognized by the player.

Then, since a jackpot game is executed based on the fact that the first special symbol wins the 2R time-saving jackpot, the small display area Dm4 allows the player to play toward the specific winning opening 65a on the right side area of the game machine. "Right-handed" is displayed to indicate that the game is in the middle of a jackpot game in which balls are shot.

Here, when the 2R time-saving jackpot is won, the opening/closing plate 65b performs the opening/closing operation at high speed twice during the jackpot period in the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the short-time winning is won, the opening/closing plate 65b remains closed because the jackpot game is not executed. In other words, the player can determine whether the 2R time-saving jackpot winning or the time-saving winning is by confirming the operation status of the opening/closing plate 65b. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to suppress this, the screen is made to emit light intensely in the chance time acquisition effect so that the player can focus on the third symbol display device 81 and not the opening/closing plate 65b. are doing.

In the embodiment, the screen is made to emit light intensely so that the player does not pay attention to the opening/closing plate 65b. It may be configured to attract attention, or may be configured to install a small variable prize winning device which operates only when a jackpot game based on the 2R short time jackpot winning is executed at a position less conspicuous than the variable prize winning device 65.例文帳に追加

FIG. 278(b) is an example of a chance time acquisition effect that is executed when the short time winning is won in the first special symbol in the normal state.

The difference from the case of winning the 2R short time jackpot is that the small display area Dm1 displays a display mode to indicate that the short time win has been won, and the other displays are displayed when the 2R short time jackpot is won. It is the same as the display screen displayed.

It should be noted that even when the fluctuation of the first special symbol that has won the time saving is stopped, it is displayed in the small display area Dm4 as "Right hit", but this is because the time saving state is set, so that the player can use the gaming machine. This is a display for prompting the player to play a game in which a game ball is shot toward the second ball entrance 640 located on the right side of the board.

In this way, the chance time acquisition performance in the case of winning the 2R time-saving jackpot and the time-saving winning is made to be the same display mode, making it difficult for the player to determine which one has been won, thereby winning the 2R big time-saving win. Even in the case of doing so, it is possible to make the player expect that it will be a time-saving lottery, and it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a 2R time-saving jackpot. .

Here, when the 2R short-time jackpot is won, the jackpot game is executed during the chance time acquisition performance, but when the short-time win is won, the big win game is not executed, so when the fluctuation of the special symbol stops at the same timing. In the case of winning the 2R short time jackpot, the period from the display of the chance time acquisition performance to the start of the chance time is longer by the period during which the jackpot game is executed than in the case of the short time winning, and the chance time is acquired. There is a possibility that the player can determine whether the 2R time-saving jackpot or the time-saving winning is won depending on the length of the presentation display time.

Therefore, in the second modification of the fifth control example, the period from the start of the chance time acquisition effect to the actual stop of fluctuation of the special symbol in the case of winning the 2R time saving jackpot and the case of winning the time saving jackpot (fixed period) are different.

With reference to FIG. 279, the variation pattern of the special symbol at the time of winning the jackpot and the variation pattern at the time of winning the time saving will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 279(a) and (b), the performance mode is the same from the start of variation of the special symbols to the end of the chance time acquisition performance. However, in FIG. 279(a), the variation of the special symbol stops 1 second after the chance time acquisition effect is started, and the jackpot game is executed for 4 seconds, whereas in FIG. 279(b). , the variation of the special symbol stops about 5 seconds after the chance time acquisition effect is started.

In this way, the period (determined period) from the start of the chance time acquisition performance to the actual stop of the variation of the special symbols is set longer in the case of winning the time saving jackpot than in the case of winning the 2R time saving jackpot. Thus, the display time of the chance time acquisition performance is determined depending on whether the jackpot game is executed while the chance time acquisition performance is displayed or when the jackpot game is not performed while the chance time acquisition performance is displayed. does not change, it is difficult to determine whether the player has won the 2R short-time jackpot or the short-time win, depending on the length of the display time of the chance time acquisition presentation.

In the embodiment, different fixed periods are set for the case of winning the 2R time-saving jackpot and the case of winning the time-saving jackpot, and the configuration is such that the display time of the chance time acquisition effect is the same, but the present invention is limited to this. not a thing

For example, if you win the 2R short-time jackpot and if you win short-time, the fixed period is the same, and if you win short-time, after the change in the special design stops, the change in the next special design starts for a certain period of time. It is also possible to set the display time of the chance time acquisition effect to be the same by providing a waiting period during which the game is not performed.

In the embodiment, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the case of winning the 2R time-saving jackpot and the case of winning the time-saving prize, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the special symbol won in a short time is fluctuating, there is a lottery right for the first special symbol (special figure 1 reservation), and the result of pre-judgment based on the reservation information of the special figure 1 reservation (read-ahead result) is a jackpot winning, the display mode of the chance time acquisition performance to be executed in the changing special symbols is set to a special display mode (for example, the 'chance time' symbol is displayed in rainbow colors), It may be configured to suggest that the player wins a jackpot after winning a time-saving win.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second modification of the fifth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the second modified example of the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 280 and 281. FIG. FIG.280(a) is the figure which showed the content of random-number 5b table 202dbe per time saving. As shown in FIG. 280 (a), the time saving per random number 5b table 202dbe is the time saving per random number 5 table 202de of the fifth control example described above. is set, and the others are the same.

FIG. 280(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the jackpot 5b table 202dbd1. As shown in FIG. 280(b), the jackpot 5b table 202dbd1 refers to the contents of the jackpot type selection 5 table 202dd of the fifth control example described above in common with the first special design and the second special design. According to the game state at the time of winning the jackpot and the value of the first winning type counter C2 obtained, the jackpot type, the value of the time reduction counter 203h corresponding to each jackpot type, and the variable probability counter 203i values are specified.

In this second modification, as described above, based on the fact that the special symbol lottery jackpot has been won, the normal symbol high probability state (first time saving) can be set, and based on the fact that the special symbol lottery has won the time saving It is configured to be able to set a high probability state (second time saving) of normal symbols, and as shown in FIG. The number of times of time saving (the value set in the time saving counter 203h) set after the end of the jackpot game is different between when the time saving is set and when the second time saving is set.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 280 (b), in this second modification, the jackpot game is two rounds as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won, and the game state set after the jackpot game ends is the time saving state. The big hit B5b is configured to be selectable. Here, when the jackpot B5b is selected as the jackpot type, the effect described above with reference to FIGS. A special effect that makes it difficult is executed.

That is, the same game state (time saving state) as when the second time saving is set can be set, and a jackpot game with a short jackpot game period can be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the first time saving is set or the second time saving is set.

Drawing 281 is a figure showing the contents of time saving classification selection 5b table 202dbf. The time saving type selection 5b table 202dbf is different from the time saving type selection 5 table 202df in the fifth control example described above in terms of the time saving type defined in correspondence with the acquired value of the time saving type selection counter CC1. are different, and otherwise identical.

As shown in FIG. 281, in the second modification, the time saving end condition when the second time saving is set (the value set in the time saving counter 203h) is the time saving end condition when the first time saving is set ( 280(b)). Concretely, it is configured such that a time saving type in which one of "50", "200" and "10000" is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h is selected.

By configuring in this way, for example, after the specific effect is executed, the high probability state of the normal design is set, the number of times of special design fluctuation reaches 50 times, and the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal design is low. When shifting to the probability state (normal state), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the first time saving has been set up to now or the second time saving has been set.

<Regarding control processing in the second modification of the fifth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 282, the contents of control processing executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the second modified example will be described. Figure 282 is the flowchart which shows the contents of time saving state production setting processing 5b (S9056). In this time saving state effect setting process 5b (S9056), it is determined that the game state has shifted from the normal state to the time saving state with respect to the time saving state effect setting process (see S9006 in FIG. 266) in the fifth control example described above. The difference is that the contents of the control processing executed in the case are different. Specifically, at the time when it is determined that the time-saving election has been made, it is pre-read to determine whether there is a jackpot election in the special figure 2 reservation (S9352 ), and when it is determined that there is a special figure 2 hold including jackpot winning, a special time saving mode is configured to be executed.

In the time saving state effect setting process 5b (S9056), first, reading of the game state before change is executed from the sub-state setting area 223g (S9301). Next, it is determined whether or not the game state before the change read out in the process of S9301 is the variable probability state (S9302). When it is determined that the game state before the change is the variable probability state (S9302: Yes), a display command for indicating the corresponding effect mode is set during the preparation time (S9303), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S9302, when it is determined that the game state before the change is not the variable probability state (S9302: No), next, it is determined whether the game state before the change is the normal state (S9303). When it is determined that the gaming state before the change is the normal state (S9304: Yes), the number of times of time saving included in the received command is set to the value of the time saving medium counter 223da (S9305). Then, it is determined whether the time saving state set this time is the time saving state set with the opportunity of the time saving winning (S9351).

In the process of S9351, when it is determined that the time saving state is set with the opportunity of the time saving winning (S9351: Yes), next, it is determined whether there is a reservation for winning a jackpot in the reservation of the second special symbol. (S9352). If it is determined that there is a hold to win a big hit (S9352: Yes), a display command for showing the effect mode corresponding to the special time saving mode is set (S9353), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S9351, if it is determined that the short-time winning has not been won in this lottery (S9351: No), or in the processing of S9352, it is determined that there is no reservation to win the jackpot within the reservation of the second special symbol. If it does (S9352: No), it sets a display command for showing the effect mode corresponding to the time saving mode (S9354), and ends this process.

<Sixth control example>
Next, a sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 283 to 293. FIG. In the fifth control example and each modified example described above, it is configured to be able to win a time-saving lottery in the special symbol lottery executed in the state where the normal state is set. On the other hand, in the sixth control example, it is greatly different in that it is configured so that the special symbol lottery can win short time even in the state where the game state other than the normal state is set.

By configuring in this way, for example, in a state in which the time saving state is set, when newly winning the time saving state, it is possible to update the remaining period in which the time saving state continues. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp how long the time saving state continues.

Also, when updating the remaining period of the time saving state, if it is updated so that the period of the time saving state continues longer than the current remaining period (advantageous update), or if it is updated to be shorter (unfavorable update) ) is configured to occur. In other words, depending on the timing of winning the time-saving lottery and the number of times of time-saving (short-time) set when winning the time-saving lottery, there are cases where the time-saving lottery is an advantageous benefit for the player and a case where it is a disadvantageous benefit. It is configured to By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide a novel game property that includes a game property that expects time-saving winning and a game property that does not expect time-saving winning.

Furthermore, in the sixth control example, it is configured such that the more consecutive time-saving wins are made, the easier it is to set a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player without winning a jackpot. Specifically, a plurality of time-saving classifications with different degrees of advantage for the player are defined, and the more advantageous time-saving classifications are set as the time-saving winning is made in the time-saving state, the easier it is to set. By configuring in this way, the longer the period during which the player does not win the jackpot, the easier it is to give the player an advantageous benefit.

In addition, when the time-saving type most advantageous to the player is set, it is easier to shift to the time-saving type disadvantageous to the player than when the time-saving type more disadvantageous than the time-saving type is set. It is configured to be In other words, it has multiple stages of time-saving types with different degrees of advantage, and based on the time-saving election, a time-saving type with a high degree of advantage is gradually set, and when the highest level of time-saving type is reached, the lowest level It is configured to make it easier to fall into the time-saving type. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the time saving type advantageous to the player from continuing for an excessively long period of time.

<Regarding the effects of the sixth control example>
Here, with reference to FIGS. 283 and 284, the characteristic presentation content in the sixth control example will be described. Figure 283 (a) is a diagram showing the display screen when the time saving is elected in the normal state and the time saving A is set as the time saving type, and Figure 283 (b) shows the time saving A being set It is the figure which showed the display screen when the reduction of working hours is elected and the reduction of working hours B is set.

In addition, FIG. 284 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when winning the time saving during the time saving state and increasing the number of remaining time saving times (remaining time short time), and FIG. 284 (b) is a time saving state It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in case short working hours are elected inside and the number of times of remaining short working hours (short time remaining) decreases.

As shown in FIG. 283, in the sixth control example, even in the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state, since it is configured to be able to execute the time saving winning determination, the result of the special symbol lottery during the time saving state An effect for indicating (an effect in which an icon indicating the lottery result appears from inside the bag 863) is executed. In this case, for example, the current remaining number of reduced working hours in the reduced working hours state and the newly elected reduced working hours type are distinguished, and the number of reduced working hours set corresponding to the newly elected reduced working hours type is the current number of reduced working hours remaining (Dm7 See) if more than, as shown in FIG. 284 (a), production is executed indicating that the number of remaining time reduction in the time reduction state increases, the number of time reduction number set corresponding to the newly elected time reduction type is less than the current remaining time reduction frequency (see Dm7), as shown in FIG. 284(b), an effect indicating that the remaining time reduction frequency in the time reduction state decreases is executed.

In addition, in the sixth control example, if the time saving is won during the time saving state, it is easier to set the time saving state (time saving B) in which the time saving end condition is difficult to be satisfied (it is set more easily than when the time saving is won in the normal state. easy). Then, when the time saving B is set and the time saving is further elected, the time saving state continues until the next big win (the number of time saving is set to 10000 times) is easily given. there is

Then, when the time saving B is set, as shown in FIG. 283 (b), the player can be notified that the time saving state is set in a display mode different from the state in which the time saving A is set. display mode is displayed.

<About the game flow in the sixth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 285, the game flow in this sixth control example will be described. FIG. 285 is a diagram showing a game flow in this sixth control example. As shown in FIG. 285, in contrast to the fifth control example described above, in a game state other than the normal state, it is possible to determine whether the time saving election is executed. The difference is that the probability of winning the time saving is different, and that there are multiple types of time saving (time saving A, time saving B) that differ in the degree of advantage of the benefits at the time of winning the jackpot as the time saving state. there is

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the sixth control example>
FIG.286(a) is the figure which showed the content of random number 6 table 202ee per time saving. As shown in FIG. 286(a), the time saving per random number 6 table 202ee is the time saving per random number 5 table 202de of the fifth control example described above, and the determination value determined as the time saving winning even in the first special symbol lottery. , the point that defines the determination value of time-saving election even in the game state other than the normal state, and the range (time-saving winning probability) that is determined to be time-saving election according to the game state There is a difference.

By configuring in this way, the time saving winning probability can be varied according to the set game state and the type of the special symbol lottery to be executed.

FIG.286(b) is the figure which showed the content of the time reduction classification selection 6 table 202ef. As shown in FIG. 286(b), the time saving type selection 6 table 202ef is set for each time saving type according to the game state at the time of winning with respect to the time saving type selection 5 table 202df described above Time saving counter 203h The value of , that is, the number of times of working hours is defined to be different.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in which game state is set.

FIG. 287 is a diagram showing the contents of the jackpot 6 table 202ed. As shown in FIG. 287, in the big hit 6 table 202ed, the value of the time saving counter 203h set for each time saving type according to the game state at the time of winning the big hit for the 5 table 202dd for the big hit, that is , The number of working hours is stipulated to be different. Specifically, when the same game state (time saving state) is set, the time saving B is set, and when the time saving A is set, the number of time saving times set after the jackpot game ends is different. , When the time saving B is set, that is, when the time saving state which is easy to be set when the time saving is won during the time saving state is set, the time saving state with a large number of times of working time saving is set more easily. ing. In addition, in this sixth control example, the value of the time saving counter 203h set for each time saving type, that is, the number of time saving times is defined to be different according to the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. Without limitation, the number of rounds of the jackpot game to be executed may be changed according to the game state at the time of winning the jackpot.

FIG. 288 is a diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in this sixth control example. As shown in FIG. 288, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example differs from the fifth control example in that a time saving mode storage area 223ea is added, and the rest is the same. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

The time saving mode storage area 223ea is a storage area for storing the set time saving mode, and the time saving mode set in the time saving state production setting process 6 (see S9076 in FIG. 290) is stored (in FIG. 290 S9372). Then, it is referred to when setting the performance mode of the special symbol variation executed during the time saving state, and the variation performance is executed in the performance mode corresponding to the read time saving mode.

<Regarding control processing contents in the sixth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 289 to 293, the contents of control processing executed in this sixth control example will be described. Figure 289 is the flowchart which shows the processing contents of time saving lottery processing 6 (S8056). This time-saving lottery process 6 (S8056) is different from the above-described time-saving lottery process 5 (S8016). is different. That is, as shown in FIG. 289, in most of the special symbol lottery to be executed, time-saving winning or losing winning is executed.

In the time saving lottery process 6 (S8056), first, the lottery result is acquired based on the time saving per random number 6 table 202ee (see FIG. 286(a)) (S8154). Next, it is determined whether or not the acquired lottery result is a time-saving election (S8105). Next, when it is determined that the obtained lottery result is time saving winning (S8105: Yes), based on the value of the obtained time saving type counter CC1, the time saving design of the special design to be displayed on the first design display device 37 set (S8106), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S8105, when it is determined that the acquired lottery result is not the time saving winning (S8105: No), the first symbol display device 37 is set to the missing symbol of the special symbol (S8107), and this process is performed. finish.

Next, FIG. 290 is the flowchart which showed the content of the time saving state production|presentation setting process 6 (S9076). In this time saving state effect setting process 6 (S9076), the time saving type included in the state command received this time is set to the time saving mode storage area for the time saving state effect setting process 5 (S9056 in FIG. 282) in the fifth control example described above. 223ea, and the other points are the same, so detailed description will be omitted.

Next, FIG. 291 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 effect mode setting process 6 (S4997). This special figure 2 effect mode setting process 6 (S4997) is a process for setting the effect mode of the variation effect corresponding to the second special symbol variation, special figure 2 effect mode setting in the fifth control example described above Processing 5 (see S4987 in FIG. 269) differs in that the mode-specific production setting processing (S9651) for determining the production mode in the time saving state is executed, and the other is the same, so detailed Description is omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 292, the contents of the mode-specific effect setting process (S9651) will be described. FIG. 292 is a flow chart showing the contents of the mode-specific effect setting process (S9651). In this mode-by-mode effect setting process (S9651), the process for determining the effect mode of the various effects described above with reference to FIGS. 283 and 284 is executed.

In the effect setting process by mode (S9651), first, reading of the current time saving mode is executed from the time saving mode storage area 223ea (S9801). Next, it is determined whether the current time saving mode read from the time saving mode storage area 223ea is the time saving A (S9802). If it is determined that the current time saving mode is time saving A (S9802: Yes), it is determined whether this lottery is a time saving lottery (S9803).

When it is determined that it is a lottery to win a time saving lottery (S9803: Yes), the difference is calculated based on the number of times of time saving given based on this lottery and the value of the time saving medium counter 223da (S9804) . Next, based on the calculated difference, it is determined whether or not the remaining time reduction count decreases (S9805). If it is determined that the number of times of reduced working hours does not decrease, that is, that the number of reduced working hours increases (S9805: No), a display command is set to indicate that the number of remaining reduced hours of working hours increases (S9806), and the process proceeds to S9809. do.

On the other hand, in the processing of S9805, if it is determined that the number of remaining time reductions is reduced based on the difference (S9805: Yes), a display command for indicating that the remaining time reduction number of times is reduced is set (S9807), S9809 to process. On the other hand, in the processing of S9803, if it is determined that the lottery of this time is not a lottery for short-time winning (S9803: No), the processing of S9804 to S9807 is skipped and the processing of S9809 is performed.

On the other hand, in the process of S9802, when it is determined that the read current time saving mode is not time saving A (S9802: No), the effect setting process during time saving B is executed (S9808). A detailed description of the effect setting process during time saving B (S9808) will be given later with reference to FIG. Next, the read current time saving mode is compared with the game state set based on the lottery result (S9809), and it is determined whether there is switching of the time saving mode (S9810). When it is determined that there is switching of the time saving mode (S9810: Yes), the effect mode corresponding to the switching of the time saving mode is determined (S9811), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S9810, when it is determined that there is no switching of the time saving mode (S9810: No), the process of S9811 is skipped, and the process ends as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 293, the processing contents of the effect setting processing during time saving B (S9808) will be described. FIG. 293 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect setting process during time saving B (S9808). As shown in FIG. 293, in the time saving B medium effect setting process (S9808), the time saving type set when the time saving is won in the time saving B is determined, and other than the time saving B, that is, when the time saving A is set , A process for setting an effect mode for indicating that the time saving state ends immediately is executed (S9853).

In the production setting process during time saving B (S9808), first, it is determined whether or not the current lottery is a lottery for time saving winning (S9851). When it is determined that it is a lottery to win time saving (S9851: Yes), it is determined whether it is a lottery to win time saving B (S9852). When it is determined that it is not a lottery to win the time saving B (S9852: No), the production mode for suggesting the end of the time saving is determined (S9853), and this process is finished. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is a lottery to win the time saving B (S9852: Yes), the production mode corresponding to the time saving continuation until the next big hit is determined (S9855), and this processing is finished.

On the other hand, in the processing of S9851, if it is determined that the current lottery is not a time-saving lottery lottery (S9851: No), it is determined whether it is a jackpot lottery lottery (S9854). When it is determined that it is a lottery to win a jackpot (S9854: Yes), the processing of S9855 described above is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a lottery to win a jackpot (S9854: No), this processing is terminated.

<Seventh control example>
Next, the contents of the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 294 to 328. FIG. In contrast to the fifth control example described above, this seventh control example is configured so that a small win can be won in some cases where the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is not a big win (lost). The difference is that a big winning game can be executed by entering a game ball into a specific area during a small winning game executed based on winning.

In addition, in the fifth control example described above, it is configured to execute the determination of the time-saving election only when the special symbol lottery is not winning the jackpot, but in the present seventh control example, once It is different in that the jackpot winning and the short-time winning can be judged redundantly in the special symbol lottery.

Furthermore, in the fifth control example described above, after executing the judgment of the jackpot winning, it is configured to execute the judgment of the short-time winning, and when the short-time winning is won, the timing at which the special symbol variation for the short-time winning is stopped and displayed. In contrast, in the seventh control example, it is configured to execute the determination of the time-saving election before the judgment of the jackpot winning is executed, and the time-saving winning is performed. In this case, the time saving state is set before the judgment of the jackpot winning is executed in the special symbol lottery, and the judgment of the jackpot winning in the special symbol lottery is executed in the state where the time saving state is set, The time saving state can be ended at the timing when the special symbol variation for showing the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is executed.

Specifically, when the time saving is won in the first special symbol lottery in the normal state, as described above, for a short period of time including the timing at which the big hit determination is executed in the special symbol lottery, so that the time saving state Configure. That is, in the fifth control example described above, a game advantageous to the player (a game that facilitates execution of a special symbol lottery) toward the next big win is executed for a predetermined period (maximum 10000 times) without going through the big win game. In order to make it possible, a function (a short time setting function) is provided in the special symbol lottery, whereas in the seventh control example, in addition to the above-described short time setting function, special symbols are used in the normal state. A time-reduction state is achieved during a game (left-handed game) executed in a normal state by structuring such that the timing of execution of a big hit determination by a special symbol lottery is in a time-reduction state without facilitating the execution of a lottery. A function (special lottery function) is provided to enable execution of the jackpot determination of the special symbol lottery in .

By constructing in this way, it is possible to execute a big hit determination of the special symbol lottery in the time saving state while making it difficult for the player to grasp that the special symbol lottery has won the time saving, so that the result of the special symbol lottery. As a result, it is possible to inform the unexpected lottery result.

In addition, in the seventh control example, the privilege given when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery is different between when the jackpot is won in the normal state and when the jackpot is won in the time-saving state. It is configured such that when the jackpot is won in the time-saving state rather than in the normal state, a privilege (for example, a jackpot game with a large number of rounds) that is more advantageous to the player is given. That is, in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, when both the short-time winning and the big win are won, a more advantageous privilege is given than when only the big win is won.

In addition, in the seventh control example, as the production mode of the variable production for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, the suggestion mode (notification mode) that can suggest the presence or absence of the short-time winning and the presence or absence of the jackpot winning can be suggested. A suggestion mode (announcement mode) can be set.

In other words, by grasping the performance mode of the variable performance to be executed, it is possible for the player to predict the result of the big hit judgment executed for the special symbol lottery being executed and the result of the short-time winning judgment. Configure. Furthermore, as a variable effect, the timing of notifying the presence or absence of the short-time winning and the timing of notifying the presence or absence of the big win are configured to be different. With this configuration, in the pachinko machine 10 capable of executing the determination for giving a plurality of different benefits for one special symbol lottery, while grasping (predicting) at least one determination result, It is possible to comprehend a suggestion mode for suggesting another determination result.

Further, in the seventh control example, when the production result including the suggestion mode that can suggest the presence or absence of the time-saving winning (time-saving production) is the production result including the suggestion mode that suggests the time-saving non-winning, It is configured so that the degree of expectation for winning a big win is higher than when the time-saving performance is not executed. In this way, in a pachinko machine 10 using a configuration capable of awarding a plurality of privileges with different award judgments in one special symbol lottery, a judgment result suggestive presentation capable of suggesting the award judgment result for one privilege. is executed, the production result of the judgment result suggestion production is a production result that suggests that the privilege of 1 is not given, and other benefits are compared to the case where the judgment result suggestion production is not executed. By configuring so that the degree of expectation to be given is high, at the time when the judgment result suggesting performance is executed, compared to the case where the judgment result suggesting performance is not executed, it is easier to grant any privilege. A player can be notified of something.

The pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example will be described below, but the same reference numerals are assigned to the same contents as those of the control examples described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the structure of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 294 to 299. FIG. FIG. 294 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example, and FIG. 295 is an enlarged view of the front view lower right area of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example, 296 to 299 are schematic diagrams schematically showing the structure of the V winning device 650 provided on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example.

As shown in FIG. 294, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 which is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front. It is constructed by assembling a port 63, a first ball entry port 64, a second ball entry port 640, a first variable winning device 65, a V winning device 650, a normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, a variable display device unit 80, and the like. , and its peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first ball opening 64, the second ball opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the V winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

In front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member connecting the rails (a prize winning opening is provided and a shot is played). area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 242) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 294) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 294) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37a and 37b having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged in the upper right portion of the game area in front view (the upper right portion in FIG. 294). The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 242), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the seventh control example, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. there is Specifically, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37a operates, while when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, The first symbol display device 37b is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving mode or the normal mode by the lighting state, indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing by the lighting state, or display the stop symbol. is a pattern corresponding to the time-saving jackpot (a jackpot in which the time-saving state is set as the game state after the jackpot game is over) or a normal jackpot (a jackpot in which the normal state is set as the game state after the jackpot game is over). The presence is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the number of rounds during the jackpot and error display are performed by the 7-segment display device. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED emits a different color (e.g., red, green, blue), and by combining the emitted colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

Incidentally, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is conducted when a prize is won in the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. As the types of jackpots determined here, the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 15 rounds, and after the jackpot ends, the time saving state is given (15R time saving jackpot), and the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 5 rounds and after the jackpot ends. There are prepared a 5R time-reduction jackpot (5R time-reduction with jackpot) to which a time-reduction state is given and a 5R normal jackpot (5R time-reduction-no jackpot) in which the round number of the jackpot game is 5R and no time-reduction state is given after the big win.

In addition, in some cases where it is determined that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is not the above-mentioned jackpot but a loss, the player is given less benefits than the above-mentioned jackpot (for example, the V winning device 650 is opened only for one round). Privilege to let) A small hit is prepared. The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a big win (whether or not it is a small win) as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but also indicate the big win when the result is a big win. A pattern corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed.

Here, the “15R short-time jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a short-time state after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and the “5R short-time jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 5 rounds. It is a big hit that shifts to a time saving state. In addition, "5R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 5 rounds, and then the jackpot shifts to the normal state without shifting to the time saving state.

In other words, in the pachinko machine 10, as a jackpot game provided when a jackpot with a special pattern is won, the "15R time-saving jackpot" that can give the player the most prizes and the next most prizes can be given. ``5R time-saving jackpot'' and ``5R normal jackpot'' in which the least privilege is given to the player among the jackpot games, either jackpot game is provided. As a result, even if a big win is won in the lottery of the special symbols, the player can expect that the jackpot game with the largest number of benefits will be provided among the jackpot games with different benefits that can be given. can let

In addition, in the seventh control example, the privilege given to the player according to the number of rounds of the jackpot game (the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game) and the content of the game state set after the jackpot game ends Although the size is defined, it is not limited to this, and the size of the benefits given to the player may be defined using conditions other than the above conditions, and different benefits may be defined without defining the size of the benefits. It is also possible to simply change the content of the jackpot game so as to be granted.

In addition, the “time-saving state” is a game in which the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 as an added value (privilege) given to the player after the big win, although the probability of the big win is the same as in the normal state. state. In order to make it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, in the seventh control example, the variation time of the second symbol is set shorter than in the normal state, and the lottery result of the second symbol is won. The operation mode of the electric accessory 640a to be operated in the case is set so that the period during which the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 is longer than in the normal state. It should be noted that other configurations may be used to set the game state in which the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, only a part of the setting contents described above may be used, or the contents described above may be used. Besides, the winning probability of the second symbol may be set higher than that in the normal state.

In addition, in the seventh control example, the first special symbol lottery that can be executed when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and the game ball to the second ball entrance 640 In the second special symbol lottery in which the execution opportunity can be established when is entered, it is configured to be able to win short-time winning in addition to the above-mentioned big winning and small winning winning. Specifically, in a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery) executed in a state where the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set, It is configured so that the determination of the time-saving election is executed.

Here, when time-saving is won, a time-saving state (high-probability state of normal symbols) is set before the big hit determination is executed in the special symbol lottery, and a special symbol for showing the result of the special symbol lottery. At the timing when the fluctuation is started, a process (update process 7) for determining whether or not to terminate the time saving state is executed. For example, in the case of the time saving state set to the time saving number of times 1 (the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1), the update executed at the timing when the special symbol variation for showing the result of the special symbol lottery winning the time saving is started In process 7, the number of remaining working hours (the value of the working hours counter 203h) is updated (decremented), the working hours ending condition is established, and it is determined that the working hours saving state is terminated. On the other hand, in the case of a time saving state in which a value of a plurality of times (for example, 100 times) is set as the number of times of time saving, based on the result of updating the number of times of remaining time saving executed by the update process 7 Time saving until the end condition is satisfied condition continues.

In other words, by using the setting timing of the time saving state and the end timing of the time saving state used in the seventh control example, only the special symbol lottery jackpot determination timing (special symbol It is possible to set a time saving state (except for the fluctuation period) or to set a time saving state including the special symbol fluctuation period.

In addition, as a method of achieving the same effect, another processing timing may be set, for example, the time saving state is set at the stop timing of the special symbol variation that has been won in the same way as the fifth control example described above, and the next Before the special symbol variation to be executed is started, the update process of the time saving state (the process of determining whether or not to end the time saving state) may be configured to be executable. Even when configured in this way, the time saving state is set so that the special symbol fluctuation period is included by changing the number of time saving times to be set, or the time saving state is set so that the special symbol fluctuation period is not included. It becomes possible to In this case, if the special symbol variation with the time saving state is set is stopped and displayed, and the next special symbol lottery is not started with the time saving state set, the time saving end condition cannot be satisfied, so the time saving state will continue.

Therefore, in this case, by the time the special symbol variation that has won the time saving is stopped and displayed (before the time saving state is set), do you have the right to execute the next special symbol lottery (special figure pending)? If it is determined that the special figure reservation has been acquired, that is, after the time saving state is set, the next special pattern fluctuation will start immediately, and only if the time saving state can end. is preferably configured to notify the player. By constructing in this way, the player who grasps that the short-time winning has not executed the first special symbol lottery, performs the right-handed game, and suppresses the act of executing the second special symbol lottery. can.

Furthermore, although details will be described later, in the seventh control example, as a condition for ending the "time saving state", the first special symbol and the first special symbol and the second 2 When the number of fluctuations of special symbols (total number of fluctuations) reaches the first predetermined number of times (100 times) (first end condition), or winning a small hit in the lottery of special symbols (small winning game is executed When the number of times reaches a second predetermined number of times (for example, once) (second termination condition), when any of the termination conditions are satisfied, the game state is changed from the time saving state to the normal state. Configure. In this way, a plurality of end conditions for shifting the game state from the time saving state to the normal state are prepared, and when any one of the plurality of end conditions is satisfied, the time saving state is shifted to the normal state. By doing so, it is possible to set a plurality of timings at which the time saving state ends, and it is possible to make the player play while exciting how long the time saving state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, will continue. can.

Furthermore, in the seventh control example, a plurality of small hit types (for example, small hits A and B) are prepared as small hits that can be won in the special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery), and each small hit type are set so that the number of times that the second termination condition is met is different for each. By constructing in this way, it becomes difficult to predict whether or not the time-saving state will end based only on the number of small wins won during the time-saving state, so that the player is always given a sense of tension to reduce the time-saving state. You can play games.

On the other hand, in the seventh control example, when the time saving state (second time saving) is set based on the fact that the time saving is won in the special symbol lottery, the time saving state (first time saving) is set based on the jackpot winning. It is configured to set an end condition different from the case where it is set, and specifically, it is configured to set the number of times of time reduction "1". In other words, the first working hour reduction set based on the winning of working hour saving in the special symbol lottery utilizes the working hour saving state as a special lottery function for executing only the judgment of the big win in the special symbol lottery in the working hour saving state.

In addition, in the seventh control example, a specific area is provided in the V winning device 650 that is opened during the small winning game, and the ball passes through the specific area during the small winning game (special discharge channel that is the specific area When the V switch 650e3 provided in the 650e2 detects the ball, it is configured to be a big hit (so-called two types of hits) (see FIG. 298). In addition, although the details will be described later, the degree of expectation (V winning expectation) that the ball passes through the specific area during the small winning game is configured to differ according to the type of the small winning winning. Then, the number of times the second end condition set for each small hit type is satisfied (the number of small hits) is set so that the small hit type in which the small hit game with a high V winning expectation is executed is smaller. Configure.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to associate the V winning expectation level for winning two types of wins when a small win is won during a time-saving game with the anxiety that the time-saving state may end, The player can be motivated to play the game.

In addition, in the seventh control example, the first predetermined number of times (100 times) as described above is set as the end condition (first end condition) with respect to the number of fluctuations of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) However, other end conditions may be set for the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, for example, when the number of fluctuations of only the first special symbol reaches the third predetermined number (for example, 50 times). Or, when the number of fluctuations of only the second special symbol reaches the fourth predetermined number of times (for example, 80 times), the end condition of the time saving state may be established. Also, only a part of the numerous termination conditions described above may be used, or they may be combined as appropriate.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 from which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by the winning of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), and while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, A third symbol display device 81 configured by a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that performs variable display of the third symbol, and the passage of the ball to the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 are used as triggers. A second pattern display device (not shown) composed of LEDs for variably displaying two patterns is provided. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display of 15 inches size. One symbol row is displayed (see FIG. 122). Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the seventh control example, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 242). A decorative display is performed according to the display of the 1-symbol display devices 37a and 37b.

That is, the third pattern is variably displayed ( The third pattern is displayed as a special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the timing when the first symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing the lottery result of the special symbol on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b. The symbols are stopped and displayed in a display mode according to the lottery result of the symbols.

That is, the determination is performed by the determination means (the lottery for the special symbol is executed) based on the establishment of the determination condition (the winning of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640), and the predetermined After the identification information (third pattern) is dynamically displayed (variable display) until the dynamic display period elapses, in a display mode (combination of patterns) showing the discrimination result (lottery result of special symbols) of the discrimination means , the identification information (third symbol) is stopped and displayed. As a result, the player can grasp the lottery result of the special symbol by grasping the third design displayed on the third design display device 81 . Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In addition, the third symbol stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be a display mode according to the lottery result of the special symbol, and a part of the lottery result of the special symbol It may be a display mode corresponding to the success/failure determination result only), or it may be a display mode corresponding to the details of the special symbol lottery result (for example, the type of the winning jackpot). In addition, when there are four types of lottery results (for example, big hits, small hits, misses, and time saving) as the lottery results of special symbols, the above-mentioned three types of lottery results of special symbols are used as the display mode of the third symbol. It is also possible to use a display mode that indicates one of two specific types of lottery results (for example, a big win or a small win). In addition, in the case of duplicate winning determination (for example, stable jackpot, short time determination), it is possible to use a display mode to indicate multiple winning, or based on the fact that multiple winning If the content of the game to be executed based on the winning of the jackpot is the same as the content of the game to be executed based only on winning the jackpot, the same display mode may be used.

Further, instead of the display device used in the seventh control example, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third pattern display device 81, or the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with a plurality of display devices. .

In the seventh control example, when winning the second symbol (normal symbol) during the time-saving state, the electric accessory 640a is higher than when winning the second symbol (normal symbol) during the normal state. The operation period (the period during which the electric accessory 640a is protruded to make it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640) is configured to be long. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the time saving state.

In addition, the configuration for making it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the time-saving state is not limited to the above-described content. A configuration such as increasing the opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a may be used. In addition, when the time saving state is made to be a state where the ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 640 by changing the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is irrespective of the game state. It may be constant. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than during the normal time during the time saving, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the game state, and the electric role for one winning The opening time and number of openings of the object 640a may be fixed regardless of the game state.

Furthermore, when the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is varied according to the set game state, and the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a are varied, the variable display of the second symbol is started. The variable display time of the second symbol is determined according to the game state set at the time point, the variable display of the second symbol is stopped, and the timing at which the second symbol indicating the win is displayed (the timing of the display of the second symbol) It may be configured to determine the opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a according to the game state set in the winning game, that is, the timing of activating the electric accessory 640a. By configuring in this way, for example, when the second pattern that starts to change during the time saving state is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing the win during the normal state, the corresponding electric accessory 640a during the normal state It can be operated in an actuation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to more accurately associate the set game state with the operation pattern of the electric accessory to be executed.

The relationship between the game state, the variation time of the second symbol, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a may be specified other than the contents described above. When it is determined that the time saving state is set as the game state at either timing of the start timing, an operation pattern advantageous to the player as the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a (executed during the time saving state operation pattern) may be set.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 through which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first ball inlet 64, a first ball inlet switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball inlet switch is turned on. A lottery for a big win is made by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 242), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37a.

As shown in FIG. 294, the first ball entrance 64 is played on the left side of the variable display unit 80 so that the ball flows down (so-called left-handed game). A nail is planted on the game board 13 so that the ball can enter the game more easily than in a game in which the ball flows down (so-called right-handed game). Therefore, when a game state (normal state) in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the second ball inlet 640 is set, a left-handed game is executed to allow the ball to enter the first ball inlet 64. be.

On the other hand, a second ball entrance 640 through which a ball can enter is provided on the right side of the first ball entrance 64 in front view. When the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, a second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second ball entrance switch is turned on. A lottery for a big win is made by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 242), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37b.

In addition, the first ball entry hole 64 and the second ball entry hole 640 are also one of winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In the seventh control example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 are set to be the same. However, the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 are different numbers, for example, the first The number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the ball entrance 64 may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 may be five.

In addition, in the seventh control example, a switch (first ball entrance switch, second ball entrance switch) for detecting a ball that serves as a special pattern lottery opportunity (big hit lottery opportunity) is provided in the ball entrance. , While it is configured to acquire a special symbol lottery opportunity and win a prize ball, other configurations may be used. When a switch (detection means) for detecting a ball passing through detects the passage of the ball, it may be configured to obtain a special symbol lottery opportunity. In this case, at least some of the balls that have passed through the area (gate) that can trigger the lottery of the special symbols can enter, and when the balls enter, a predetermined number (for example, 5) of prize balls will be paid out. It is good to provide an entrance. By configuring in this way, the number of acquisition times of the special symbol lottery opportunity and the number of winning ball acquisition times can be made different, so that various game characteristics can be provided.

The second ball entrance 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. This electric accessory 640a can be changed between a protruding state (allowed state) protruding from the game board 13 to the front side (the front side from the viewpoint of FIG. 294) and a retracted state (restricted state) to the game board 13 side. Normally (when the second symbol is not won), the electric accessory 640a is in a retracted state (restricted state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. It has become. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, that is, the second symbol When winning the lottery with two symbols, the electric accessary 640a is in a protruding state (allowed state), and the ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加

Here, the ball flow to the second ball entrance 640 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example will be described. In the seventh control example, as shown in FIG. 294, the variable display device unit 80 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area of the game board 13, and the game area is set to the left side of the variable display unit 80 (left-handed area). and the right side (right hitting area), and by adjusting the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 by the player, the destination of the shot ball can be divided into the right hitting area and the left hitting area. configured as possible. Hereinafter, a game in which the player operates the operation handle 51 to shoot a ball into the left-handed area of the game area is called a left-handed game, and a game in which the player shoots a ball into the right-handed area is called a right-handed game.

In the seventh control example, as shown in FIG. 294, the second ball entrance 640, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640, and the electric accessory 640a are selected by lottery to determine whether or not to operate the electric accessory 640a. A normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 serving as a trigger is arranged in a right hitting area, and when a time saving state is set as a game state, a right hitting game is performed.

A nail is planted under the variable display device unit 80 so that the ball fired by the left-handed game does not enter the second ball entrance 640, and the second ball is entered during the left-handed game. It is configured so that the ball does not enter the mouth 640. - 特許庁By configuring in this way, in the left-handed game, the ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 in order to vary the first special symbol, and in the right-handed game, the second special symbol is varied. Therefore, it is possible to perform a game in which the ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640, and it is possible to appropriately provide different game characteristics according to the game method.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example, as shown in FIG. 294, in the right-handed area, the upper surface of the V winning device 650 inclines downward toward the lower left direction (lower left direction when viewed from the front in FIG. 294). is arranged, and each mechanism is arranged so that the ball flowing down the upper surface of the V winning device 650 passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 and flows down toward the electric accessory 640a.

Then, when the electric accessory 640a is in the retracted state, the ball flows down toward the variable winning device 65 through the electric accessory 640a in the standby state. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 640a is positioned in the projecting state, the ball that reaches the electric accessory 640a flows down in the lower right direction (the lower right direction in the front view of FIG. 2). Then, the ball that reaches the right end of the electric accessory 640a enters the second ball entrance 640, and when the electric accessory 640a changes to the retracted state before reaching the right end of the electric accessory 640a, the electric It is constructed such that the ball enters the general winning hole 63 arranged below the accessory 640a.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a transparent cover member 655 so as to cover the electric accessory 640a, the second ball entrance 640, and the general prize winning opening 63 described above. The surface of the cover member 655 is cut to diffusely reflect incident light. By providing this cover member 655, the inside of the cover member 655 is made visible to the player by various lights emitted from the light emitting means (LED etc.) provided in the pachinko machine 10 and the third pattern display device 81 during the game. can be made difficult. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the act of performing a right-handed game by planning the operation timing of the electric accessory 640a.

In addition, when a game is not being played (when the power of the gaming machine is turned off), the light incident on the cover member is suppressed, so that the inside of the cover member 655 can be easily visually recognized. Maintenance of the machine 10 can be easily performed. In the case where the cover member 655 is used to vary the visibility of the interior in this manner, the light emitting means can be shared by configuring the light emitting means for emitting light for decoration as described above. , and the number of parts constituting the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In addition, the inside of the cover member 655 may be made invisible for a predetermined period including the period during which the electric accessory 640a is operated. For example, when it is determined that the electric accessory 640a is operated (that is, controlling the light emitting means so that characters (e.g., "open") notifying that the electric accessory 640a operates on the surface of the cover member 655 (when winning a prize by lottery of normal symbols) are displayed; The displayed characters may be configured to make the inside of the cover member 655 difficult to see. As a result, it is possible to make the player understand that the electric accessory 640a is moving, and make it difficult for the player to comprehend the detailed operation timing.

Here, with reference to FIG. 295, the configuration of the right-handed area of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. As shown in FIG. 295, among the balls fired in the right-handed game, the balls that have passed through the through gate 67 flow down toward the area where the electric accessory 640a is arranged. Specifically, the electric accessory 640a has a length of 50 mm, and is composed of a plate-like member on the upper surface of which a ball can flow down, and is directed downward (lower right when viewed from the front in FIG. 295). is arranged on the game board 13 so as to be downwardly inclined toward . After passing through the through gate 67, the ball flows down to a region a (see FIG. 295) corresponding to a range of 20 mm from the left end of the electric accessory 640a.

The ball that has reached the area a passes through the electric accessory 640a and flows down toward the variable winning device 65 when the electric accessory 640a is in the retracted state. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 640a is positioned at the projecting position, the ball flows down with the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a facing the right end position. Then, when the electric accessory 640a is changed to the retracted state with the ball reaching the area b (the area corresponding to 20 mm to 40 mm from the left end of the electric accessory 640a), it is provided below the electric accessory 640a. It is configured such that the ball flows down toward the general winning hole 63 that is opened. Finally, when the ball reaches the area c (the area corresponding to 20 mm from the right end of the electric accessory 640a), the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. As shown in FIG.

In addition, in the seventh control example, the period during which the electric accessory 640a continuously operates is different in the game state (probability state of normal symbols). state) is set, when the electric accessory 640a operates in a state where the electric accessory In the state where the 640a is changed to the retracted state and the time-saving state is set, the ball flowing down on the electric accessory 640a reaches the area c (see FIG. 295), the electric accessory for a sufficient period of time. 640a is configured to be positioned at the projecting position.

Specifically, the operation period of the electric accessory 640a (the period during which it is continuously positioned in the projecting state) is configured to be 2 seconds during the short working hours state and 0.2 seconds during the normal state. Then, the electric accessory 640a is designed so that the flow period for the ball to flow down the area (range from area a to area c) shown in FIG. (0.8 seconds in the seventh control example). By configuring in this way, even if a right-handed game is played in the normal state, winning the normal symbol, and the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a in operation, Since the operation of the electric accessory 640a ends before the ball flowing down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a reaches the second ball entrance 640, it is ensured that the lottery for the second special symbol is executed in the normal state. can be prevented.

In addition, during the time saving state, the electric accessory 640a is operated for a period longer than the period (0.4 seconds) in which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reaches the second ball entrance 640. , the ball flowing down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a in the guided state (protruding state) can easily reach the second ball entrance 640, and the lottery for the second special symbol can be easily executed.

Furthermore, during the time saving state, for example, the ball that reaches the electric accessory 640a 1.5 seconds after the operation of the electric accessory 640a flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a, and at the timing when it reaches the area b The operation of the accessory 640a is completed (two seconds have passed since the electric accessory 640a was activated). As shown in FIG. 3, such balls enter the general winning hole 63 arranged below the electric accessory 640a, and 10 balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when a right-handed game is played in the time saving state, different ball entrances (second ball entrance 640 Alternatively, by configuring it so that the ball can be guided to the general winning hole 63), the player can be made to continuously play the right-handed game during the time saving state.

As described above, the configuration is such that the number of prize balls corresponding to entering the general winning hole 63 is 10, and the number of prize balls corresponding to entering the second ball inlet 640 is 5. Therefore, if the lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be executed, it is better for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 than for the ball to enter the general winning opening 63. Advantageous benefits (i.e. special figure 2 lottery and 5 prize balls) can be given, and the second special symbol (special figure 2) lottery cannot be executed (during special symbol fluctuation) If there is, it is configured so that the ball entering the general winning hole 63 rather than the second ball entering hole 640 can give the player a more advantageous privilege (that is, 10 prize balls).

As a result, depending on the game situation (whether or not there is a change in the special pattern), the ball entrance that the player wants to enter (the ball entrance where many benefits can be obtained) can be changed. The player can enjoy the right-handed game during the state. In addition, in order to enter the ball into both the second ball entry hole 640 and the general winning hole 63 during one motion of the electric accessory 640a, it is necessary to continuously execute the right-handed game. Therefore, it is possible to increase the operation of the game.

In the seventh control example, the operation period of the electric accessory 640a during the time saving state is sufficiently longer than the period (0.8 seconds) during which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reaches the second ball entrance 640. is set to a long period (2 seconds), and the ball is surely entered into the second ball entrance 640 when the electric accessory 640a is operated. The operation period of the electric accessory 640a inside is slightly longer than the period (0.8 seconds) during which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reaches the second ball entrance 640 (for example, 0.8 seconds). 9 seconds). By configuring in this way, after the ball is passed through the through gate 67 in the time saving state, the act of stopping the ball from being launched and starting to launch the ball again after confirming that the electric accessory 640a has been operated ( Since it is possible to suppress so-called stop hitting), it is possible to improve the operation of the game by continuing the right hitting game during the time saving state.

Returning to FIG. 294, the description continues. As described above with reference to FIG. 295, the ball launched by the right-handed game first reaches the V winning device 650. FIG. Next, the configuration of the V winning device 650 will be described. The V winning device 650 is configured to be variable between an open state in which a ball can win a prize and a closed state in which it is difficult to win a prize. The opening/closing door 650f1 of the device 650 is operated to change to an open state in which a ball can win in the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a.

In addition, in some of the "big wins" of the special symbols, the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 may be configured to operate in the same manner as in the case of winning the "minor wins" described above. As a result, when the open/close door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 operates, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether the special symbol "big win" or "small win" is won.

Here, the configuration of the V winning device 650 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 295 to 299. FIG. First, as shown in FIG. 295, when the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is in the closed state that closes the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a, the upper surface of the opening/closing door 650f1 in the closed state is can flow down, and the ball that reaches the V winning device 650 while the V winning device 650 is closed flows down toward the lower left side (lower left side when viewed from the front in FIG. 295) on the open/close door 650f1. , to the through gate 67 . On the other hand, when the V winning device 650 is open (that is, during the small winning game), the ball enters the V winning device 650 .

In the seventh control example, the opening period of the V winning device 650 during the small winning game is configured to be 0.1 seconds×12 times, and at the timing when the V winning device 650 opens, it flows down on the open/close door 650f1. The ball that is doing wins a prize to the V winning device 650. - 特許庁Balls that have won a prize in the V winning device 650 are arranged to flow down toward the detection port 650a1 (see FIG. 298(a)) while flowing down on the first regulating member 651 or the second regulating member 652. there is With this configuration, even if the ball flowing down on the opening/closing door 650f1 enters the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a of the V winning device 650 from any position on the opening/closing door 650f1, the ball can be smoothly released. can flow down.

In the seventh control example, the period during which the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is continuously opened is set to 0.1 seconds, but during the opening period of the opening/closing door 650f1, Any other period may be set as long as it is a period during which the ball can enter the V winning device 650 . In addition, in the seventh control example, the number of times the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is opened in one small winning game is set to 12 times, but other times may be set.

Although details will be described later, in the seventh control example, the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is opened once in the small winning game and then opened next time (opening interval period). Five seconds are set after the fifth and tenth opening operations, and 0.5 seconds are set at other timings. This is for making it easier for the V winning device 650 to win the ball during the period in which the small winning game is being played. Specifically, when it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has not detected the ball at the time when the fifth opening operation is completed during the small winning game, during the interval period between opening after the fifth opening operation is completed In addition, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a game guide display for emphasizing and prompting the player to play the game to the right.

Then, even when a right-handed game is started by grasping the game guide display displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the interval period between openings is set so that the ball can enter the V winning device 650 is set longer than usual. Also, when it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has not detected the ball when the tenth opening operation during the small winning game is completed, the same control processing is executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for a player who does not play an appropriate game during a small winning game (a player who does not play a right-handed game) to perform an appropriate game. In this way, during the specific game (small winning game) in which the opening action is executed multiple times, when it is determined that the interval period between opening is set longer than the other and it is determined that the appropriate game is not performed By making it possible to display a game guidance display for prompting proper game contents, a player who is playing a wrong game can be made to play the game without anxiety.

In the seventh control example, a longer special opening interval period than others is set after the fifth and tenth opening operations during the small winning game. In this way, by providing a plurality of timings for displaying the game guidance display to the player during one small winning game, it is possible to make the player more likely to play an appropriate game. In addition, in the case where the timing for displaying the game guidance display is provided a plurality of times, at least the notification timing for the second shift should be set to a timing that the player who is playing the game normally cannot reach. That is, although the details will be described later, in the seventh control example, by performing the right-handed game continuously during the small winning game, at least one ball is released in one opening operation of the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650. Since it is configured so that the ball can be entered, if the normal game (continuous right-handed game) is performed, the number of winning prizes (10) that is the condition for ending the small winning game during the 10th opening operation , and the small winning game is terminated.

That is, the inter-opening interval period executed after the 10th opening operation during the small winning game is a timing that cannot be reached when a normal game (continuous right-handed game) is performed. Therefore, by setting the timing for displaying the game guidance display using this timing, the interval period between special openings that is unnecessarily long for the player who is playing a normal game (continuously playing a right-handed game) It is no longer executed, and the small winning game can be smoothly executed.

It should be noted that, as in the seventh control example, when the first special opening interval period is set to the timing (after the fifth opening operation ends) reached even if a normal game (continued right-handed game) is performed is the timing at which the first inter-special opening interval period starts (fifth opening operation end timing), or the timing at which a predetermined period has elapsed since the first inter-special opening interval period started (fifth opening It is determined whether the V switch 650e3 detects the ball at the timing when the period required for the ball entered during the operation to be discharged from the V prize winning device 650 has passed, and the V switch 650e3 detects the ball. If it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has not detected a ball, a game guide is displayed as described above. should be configured to display As a result, the interval period between special openings set during the small winning game can be effectively used according to the game content.

Furthermore, during the second special opening interval period, it is preferable to display the game guidance display even when the V switch 650e3 has already detected the ball. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the small winning game ends without causing the predetermined number (10) of balls to enter the V winning device 650 during the small winning game.

Next, the structure of the V winning device 650 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 296 is an exploded perspective view of this V winning device 650. FIG. The V winning device 650, as shown in FIG. A base member 650c for screwing to the game board 13, and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 650c for lighting the front side of the pachinko machine 10 from the back side of the base member 650c. The arranged LED board 650d, the back cover body 650e sandwiching the LED board 650d with the base member 650c, and the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a formed in the opening forming member 650b. An opening/closing unit 650f having an opening/closing door 650f1, a flow path cover body 650g combined with the back side of the back cover body 650e to form a flow path, and a flow path formed by the back cover body 650e and the flow path cover body 650g. A switching member 650h that protrudes into the path and switches the flow path of the game ball, a link member 650i that is engaged with the switching member 650h, a rear surface cover body 650j that is arranged on the rear side of the flow path cover body 650g, and its rear surface. A channel solenoid 650k fixed to the back side of the cover body 650j to operate the link member 650i, and a fixing cover body 650m for covering the channel solenoid 650k from the back side and fixing it to the back cover body 650j with screws. It consists of

297 is a cross-sectional view of the V winning device 650. FIG. 297(c) is a top view of the V winning device 650, and FIG. 297(b) is a cross-sectional view of the V winning device 650 taken along the line Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 297(b), the V winning device 650 is formed with a specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a, which is an opening into which a game ball can enter. The specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a has a substantially rectangular opening above the pachinko machine 10, and the game balls passing through the opening are guided leftward in FIG. 297(b). A bottom surface that is inclined downward to the left is formed. A detection port 650a1 composed of a magnetic sensor (ball detection switch) 650c1 for detecting the winning of a game ball is arranged at the left end of the bottom surface. A game ball that has passed through the detection port 650a1 is guided to a sorting channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 650e shown in FIG. 297(a).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 297(b), the opening of the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is opened so that game balls can be entered by an opening/closing door 650f1 configured with a shutter mechanism that can be retracted from the game board 13 side. It can be changed between a state and a closed state in which it is impossible to enter the ball (difficult to enter the ball). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered with the opening/closing door 650f1, and the game ball can roll on the upper portion of the opening/closing door. In the open state, the opening/closing door 650f1 is retracted inside the base member 650c (inside the game board 13) to be retracted from the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a.

By constructing in this way, the right-handed game can be played continuously during the time-saving game, during the big win game, and during the small win game, thereby reducing the trouble of changing the game method according to the game state. be able to. Therefore, the game can be played more easily.

In addition, in the open state of the opening/closing door 650f1, the plane perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball flows down can be configured as the opening of the V winning device 650, so that the game ball can efficiently enter the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. can be made Therefore, the time required for the small winning game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

FIG. 297(a) is a cross-sectional view along La-La shown in FIG. 297(b). As shown in FIG. 297(a), the magnetic sensor 650c1 having the detection port 650a1 is fixed to the base member 650c so that the detection port 650a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 650e.

Next, with reference to FIG. 298, a description will be given of a configuration for distributing game balls guided to distribution channels of the back cover body 650e to a normal discharge channel 650e1 and a special discharge channel 650e2, which will be described later.

FIG. 298(a) is a rear view of the back cover body 650e showing a state in which the switching member 650h is operated so that game balls are distributed to the special discharge channel 650e2. As shown in FIG. 298(a), the switching member 650h has a locking hole 650h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 650i is inserted and a guiding piece 650h2 for guiding the game ball. is rotatably supported from the rear side. Here, the channel cover 650g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 650h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 650h can be rotated into the distribution channel from the back side of the channel cover 650g. It is configured so that it can be arranged as much as possible.

As shown in FIG. 298(a), the game ball guided into the sorting channel from the detection port 650a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 650h2 arranged diagonally to the left and guided to the special discharge channel 650e2. be. A game ball that has passed through the special discharge channel 650e2 is detected by a V switch 650e3 that is configured by a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a game ball provided in the special discharge channel 650e2, and is discharged out of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. be done.

Here, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example, the game ball passes through the V switch 650e3 described above during the small winning game, so that the big winning game is set after the small winning game. That is, the V switch 650e3 is configured as a trigger for starting a big winning game. In addition, the switching member 650h is a flow path (special discharge flow path 650e2) in which the ball that has won the V winning device 650 during the small win can pass through the V switch 650e3, or a flow path that cannot (difficultly) pass through the V switch 650e3. By turning on the flow path solenoid 650k, the winning ball in the V winning device 650 flows down the special discharge flow path 650e2. (see FIG. 298(b)).

In the pachinko machine 10 used in the seventh control example, the channel solenoid 650k is set to be OFF while the game is played normally, and the winning ball of the V winning device 650 flows down the normal discharge channel 650e1. It is configured as follows. Then, when a small win is won, the passage solenoid 650k is turned on according to the contents defined in the open scenario table 202g described later with reference to FIG. The flow path 650e2 is configured to be able to flow down. In this way, when the channel solenoid 650k is set to be off, the state is maintained for a long period of time in the pachinko machine 10, that is, the winning ball of the V winning device 650 flows down the normal discharge channel 650e1. The power consumption of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by providing a state in which the switching member 650h is maintained (see FIG. 298(a)).

In this way, the game state set after the small winning game is changed by the flow-down route of the game ball winning the V winning device 650 during the small winning game, so that the interest of the player is improved even during the small winning game. be able to. The time required to pass from the opening (specific winning opening) of the V winning device 650 to the entrance of the special discharge channel 650e2 (opening surface closed by the guide piece 650h2 of the switching member 650h) is 1 second at the shortest. consists of By configuring in this way, even if the switching member 650h switches the flow-down route of the ball after detecting that the opening/closing door 650f1 has been opened in spite of not winning a small prize, the ball will surely flow. It is possible to prevent the water from flowing down the special discharge channel 650e2.

In addition, a discharge confirmation switch 650e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting passage of a ball is provided at the end of the normal discharge passage 650e1. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have entered the V winning device 650 have been discharged from the sum of the output of the discharge confirmation switch 650e4 and the V switch 650e3. In addition, the end timing of the small winning game (condition for ending the small winning game (when the V winning device 650 wins a predetermined number (10 pieces), or when the opening scenario of the V winning device 650 ends) is established When all the game balls that have entered the V winning device 650 are not discharged at the timing after the small winning ending period has passed, it is determined that there is an abnormality inside the V winning device 650, and it is sent to the outside. It is preferable to configure so as to notify the abnormality or stop the game so that the jackpot game or the normal game is not started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from progressing in a state in which a part of the pachinko machine 10 has an abnormality, thereby preventing a secondary abnormality from occurring.

In this way, the game ball that has won the specific winning hole (V winning hole) 650a of the V winning device 650 is detected by the magnetic sensor 650c1, and based on this, the player receives a prize ball (one ball in the seventh control example) as a privilege. 10 prize balls) can be paid out for winning a prize. In addition, by using the game ball after being detected, it can be sorted whether or not it passes through the V switch 650e3, so that it can be sorted whether or not the big win game is executed after the small win game is finished. can be done. Therefore, there is no need to provide a dedicated prize winning port (specific area) for awarding a jackpot game separately from the V winning device 650, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

Furthermore, in the seventh control example, according to the small winning type (small winning A, B) set when winning a small winning, small winning games with different periods and timings for setting the flow path solenoid 650k to ON are performed. configured to run. By constructing in this way, the degree of expectation (V prize expectation) for the ball to pass through the V switch 650e3 during the small winning game is made different depending on the content of the small winning game executed when winning the small winning. be able to. Therefore, the player can not only win a small prize, but also play a game while expecting that a small prize game with a high V winning expectation will be executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 299, the structure of the ball flow lower surface of the opening/closing door 650f1 that opens and closes the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 will be described. FIG. 299(a) is a schematic plan view showing a state in which the opening/closing door 650f1 closes the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650. FIG. In the opening/closing door 650f1 of the seventh control example, as shown in FIG. It is configured to flow down from the right upper surface 650 y 1 of the device 650 to the left upper surface 650 y 2 via the upper surface of the opening/closing door 650 f 1 and flow toward the variable winning device 65 .

A first delay member 650fa, a second delay member 650fb, and a third delay member 650fc are provided on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 650f1 as delay members for delaying the falling of the ball. is configured so that the period of time during which the water flows down is 0.6 seconds. This flowing period (0.6 seconds) is longer than the interval (closing period (0.5 seconds)) when the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a of the V winning device 650 is opened multiple times by the small winning game. configured to be long. By configuring in this way, the ball flowing down on the opening/closing door 650f1 is configured to surely win when the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is opened by the small winning game.

In the state shown in FIG. 299(a), when the small winning game is executed and the door 650f1 is changed to the open state, the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. 299(b). FIG. 299(b) is a schematic plan view showing a state in which the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 is open. As shown in FIG. 299(b), when the opening/closing door 650f1 is in an open state, it moves so as to retract inside the game board 13, and the ball flowing down the right upper surface 650y1 enters the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. The specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is opened so that winning is possible. In addition, the ball flowing down on the opening/closing door 650f1 also enters the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a when the opening/closing door 650f1 is positioned at the retracted position.

In addition, the V winning device 650 is equipped with a third mechanism for smoothing the flow of the ball after winning regardless of the position from which the ball flowing down on the opening and closing door 650f1 enters the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. A 1 regulating member 651 and a 2nd regulating member 652 are provided (see FIG. 294). After being aligned in a line via the 2 regulating members 652, it is configured to flow down toward the detection port 650a1 having a passage width of one ball. By providing the first regulating member 651 and the second regulating member 652 in this way, even if the detection opening 650a1 is provided below the first regulating member, the ball that has won with great force from the opening/closing door 650f1 is directly detected through the detection opening 650a1. Therefore, it is possible to suppress failure of the ball detection switch 650c1 provided in the detection port 650a1. In addition, a flow path (a flow path flowing down on the first restricting member 651 and the second restricting member 652) for aligning the balls until the balls pass through the detection port 650a1 having a passage width corresponding to one ball is secured. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the balls are clogged in the V winning device 650 and the game is hindered.

As described above, in the seventh control example, the determination result of the determination means (lottery result of the special symbol) is given when the determination result (small hit) is a predetermined determination result (small hit game) The falling period (0.6 seconds) required for the ball to flow down on the variable member (opening/closing door 650f1) is longer than the open interval period (0.5 seconds) of the operating variable member (opening/closing door 650f1). Therefore, the ball flowing down on the variable member during the opening interval (timing when the open/close door 650f1 is in a closed state) during the small winning game surely enters the V winning device 650 at the next opening timing. can be made

In addition, only the balls flowing down on the variable member are allowed to enter the V winning device 650 during the small winning game so that a predetermined number (10) can be won during the small winning game. Since the number of times of opening operation in the winning game (12 times) is set more than the number of winning prizes (10 pieces) for the end condition of the small winning game, even if one opening period (0.1 seconds) is set short , a sufficient number of prizes can be secured. In addition, by setting one opening period long, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which an excessive number of balls are awarded to the V winning device 650 during the small winning game.

<Regarding the effect content in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example>
With reference to FIGS. 300 to 302, the characteristic performance contents executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example will be described.

In the fifth control example described above, the success or failure determination ( If you are out in the jackpot lottery), it was configured to execute the judgment of the short-time election (short-time lottery) to set the high probability state of the normal pattern, so if you win the jackpot, you can win the short-time election. There was no configuration.

On the other hand, the seventh control example differs from the fifth control example in that the jackpot winning and the short-time winning can overlap in the special symbol lottery.

Specifically, a time-saving lottery is executed before the jackpot lottery is executed in the first special symbol lottery in the normal state (low-probability state of special symbols, low-probability state of normal symbols). A state (low probability state of special design, high probability state of normal design) is set, and a jackpot lottery is executed during the period when the time saving state is set, the jackpot lottery ends, and the first special pattern starts to change. It is configured that the time saving state ends when it is done. In other words, the period during which the time saving state is set by the time saving election is only the period during which the jackpot lottery is executed.

Then, the ratio of the jackpot type determined when the jackpot is won is different between when the normal state is set and when the time saving state is set. For example, the normal state is set. The ratio of determining the 15R jackpot (maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds) when the jackpot is won in the period is 10%, whereas the 15R jackpot is determined when the jackpot is won in the period in which the time saving state is set. is determined at a rate of 50%. In other words, if the jackpot is won during the period when the time saving state is set based on the time saving winning, the 15R jackpot is more likely to be determined than when the jackpot is winning during the period when the normal state is set. When time-saving winning and big win winning overlap, it is advantageous to the player.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the time saving state set when the time saving is elected, the time saving state continues only for a short period from the time when the time saving is elected to the next start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol. A player cannot play a game (right-handed game) in which a game ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640, but can play a right-handed game in a time-saving state set based on the jackpot winning. .

Here, when the player is informed that the time-saving winning has been won when the jackpot has not been won, whether the game state set after the special symbol during fluctuation is stopped is the normal state or the time-saving state for the player. The player is confused, and there is a risk that the player who misunderstands that the time-saving state is set may mistakenly play a right-handed game.

On the other hand, when the time-saving winning and the jackpot winning overlap, the notification of the time-saving winning may confuse the player as to whether the normal state or the time-saving state is set after the special symbol during fluctuation is stopped. Also, by notifying that the big win has been won, the player can be made to recognize that the big win game will be executed after the special symbols are stopped.

Therefore, in the seventh control example, if the short-time winning and the jackpot win overlap in the special symbol lottery, it is notified or suggested that the short-time win is won, but if the short-time win is not won, the short-time win is made. It is configured so as not to notify or suggest to the player that he/she has done so.

By configuring in this way, when time-saving winning and jackpot winning overlap, the player can determine which game state was set for the jackpot winning, while time-saving winning is possible. It is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding the game state set after the stop of the changing special symbols and causing the player to play with an erroneous game method when the jackpot is not won even though the game is played. can.

With reference to FIGS. 300 and 301, the display screen in the case of suggesting the time saving lottery result during the variation of the first special symbol will be described.

FIG. 300(a) is an example of the display screen displayed when the time saving lottery result suggesting effect (effect for suggesting the result of the time saving lottery) is executed during the variation of the first special symbol. In this embodiment, when notifying the player of the lottery result of the time-saving lottery executed in the special symbol lottery, "Omikuji time effect" is executed. The omikuji time effect is a effect that suggests to the player whether the time saving win or the time saving win does not occur depending on the contents of the capsule cp5 displayed in the main display area Dm. In the main display area Dm, together with the closed capsule cp5, ``Is this change a time-saving winning? It is possible to make the player recognize that the effect is suggested by the content.

Here, the omikuji time performance is not performed for each change of the first special symbol, and the omikuji time performance may not be performed even when the short-time winning is won. In other words, if the omikuji time effect is not executed, the player cannot recognize whether or not the changing first special symbol wins the time reduction, and if the omikuji time effect is executed, the changing It is constructed so that the player can recognize whether the first special symbol has won the time saving or has not won the time saving.

FIG. 300(b) is an example of a display screen in the case of suggesting that the time-saving winning is made during the fluctuation of the first special symbol. In the main display area Dm, an effect is executed in which the capsule cp5 is opened and a piece of paper k1 on which "o" is written appears. The paper k1 is a display mode for indicating that the first special symbol during fluctuation has won the time-saving winning, thereby allowing the player to recognize that the time-saving winning has been won.

In addition, it is suggested to the player that the short-time winning during the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the normal state (low-probability state of special symbols, low-probability state of normal symbols) is that short-time winning and jackpot winning overlap. If the result of the jackpot lottery (judgment of whether or not it is a big hit executed in the special pattern lottery) is out, it is suggested to the player that he won the time saving even if he won the time saving. (that is, the omikuji time presentation is not executed). Therefore, when the paper k1 indicating that the time-saving winning is displayed in the omikuji time performance, the player recognizes that the big winning has been won before the third pattern of the display mode indicating that the big winning has been displayed is displayed. It becomes possible.

In addition, although it will be described later, in this embodiment, when the normal state is set, and when the time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set, the jackpot is won The ratio of the jackpot type is different when the jackpot is won in the normal state, and the ratio of determining the 15R jackpot (maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds) is 10%, while in the short time state The ratio of determining the 15R jackpot when the jackpot is won is 50%.

Therefore, in the embodiment, when the paper k1 suggesting that the short-time winning is displayed in the omikuji time production, the main display area Dm says "Super chance has arrived! If you win with this change, you have a big chance to win the 15R jackpot!" By executing the displayed "super chance arrival effect", it is suggested to the player that there is a high possibility that the fluctuating first special symbol wins the 15R jackpot, and the omikuji time effect ends. The amusement of the game can be improved by making the player expect to win the 15R jackpot during the period from when the result of the jackpot lottery is reported.

FIG. 301(a) is an example of the display screen in the case of suggesting that the time-saving non-winning was made during the variation of the first special symbol. Unlike the case of short-time winning, an effect is executed in which a paper k2 on which "x" is written appears from the capsule cp5 in the omikuji time effect. The paper k2 is a display mode for indicating that the first special symbol during fluctuation has not won the time saving, thereby allowing the player to recognize that the time saving has not been won.

It should be noted that, as will be described later, in this embodiment, it is suggested to the player that the time reduction has not been won only when the jackpot A (15R time saving jackpot) is won and when the jackpot lottery is lost and

Here, in the present embodiment, three jackpot types are defined as the jackpot types of the first special symbol in the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), and "jackpot A" is a jackpot. The number of rounds is 15 rounds, and a jackpot type in which a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set after the end of the jackpot game. It is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 5 rounds and a time-saving state is set after the jackpot game is finished, and "jackpot C" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 5 rounds and the normal state is set after the jackpot game is finished. . That is, the jackpot A has more rounds of the jackpot game given to the player than the jackpots B and C, and unlike the jackpot C, after the jackpot game ends, a time-saving state that is more advantageous than the normal state is set. It is an advantageous jackpot type.

Therefore, in the omikuji time effect, when the paper k2 indicating that the time saving was not won is displayed, the main display area Dm displays "Best or Eight! Jackpot A? Or Lost?" Execution of the high-stakes performance" suggests to the player that there is a high possibility of winning the most advantageous jackpot A, and after the omikuji time performance ends, the jackpot lottery (in the special pattern lottery) Amusement of the game can be improved by making the player expect that the jackpot A is won during the period until the result of the execution judgment of whether or not the jackpot is won is reported.

FIG. 301(b) is an example of a jackpot winning notification screen when time saving winning and jackpot winning overlap. In the small display region Dm1, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the jackpot has been won. An effect in which the written ball tm2 appears is executed. The ball tm2 is a display mode for notifying the player that the first special symbol has won the big win, and the player can recognize that the big win has been won by displaying the ball tm2.

In addition, in the main display area Dm, the result of the jackpot lottery is notified of the super chance arrival effect displaying "Super chance arrival! If you win with this variation, you have a big chance to win a 15R jackpot!" It will continue to be displayed even when

It should be noted that in the case of winning the jackpot B or C, although the time saving was not won, neither the super chance arrival effect nor the high chance effect is displayed in the main display area Dm of FIG. 301(b). An effect is executed in which the rabbit character 801 opens the treasure box 810f and the ball tm2 appears. On the other hand, if the jackpot A was won even though the time was not won, and the high-stakes production is being executed during the above-mentioned Omikuji time production, the main winning notification screen in FIG. The high-stakes effect is continuously displayed in the display area Dm, and the player can recognize that the jackpot A has been won by displaying the ball tm2.

After the jackpot winning notification screen of FIG. 301(b) is displayed, an effect of notifying the determined jackpot type is executed (not shown).

In addition, when the first special symbol during fluctuation is not winning the short time and not winning the jackpot, the omikuji time production is executed, and in the omikuji time production, the main display area Dm says "One or eight! Jackpot A? ?” is executed, the high-stakes effect is continuously displayed in the main display area Dm in FIG. 301(b) as well. In this case, the game player is notified that the jackpot has not been won by executing an effect in which a ball labeled "Unfortunate" appears from the treasure box 810f.

In the embodiment, the omikuji time effect is configured to suggest the result of the time-saving lottery (judgment of time-saving election for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern executed in the special pattern lottery), but it is limited to this. Instead, it may be configured such that the player can recognize the result of the time saving lottery by displaying a specific character or background image.

Further, for example, in the super chance coming effect shown in FIG. 300(a), the main display area Dm displays "Super chance coming! If the jackpot pattern stops during the super chance display, a big chance to win the 15R jackpot!" is displayed. If the super chance arrival effect is continuously displayed up to the jackpot winning notification screen, the 15R jackpot is confirmed and the super chance arrival effect ends before the jackpot winning notification screen is displayed. If the super chance arrival effect is not displayed in 301(b), it may be configured to suggest to the player that the possibility of the 15R jackpot is low.

By constructing in this way, the player can play the game while expecting the super chance arrival presentation to be continuously displayed during the period from the execution of the super chance arrival presentation to the display of the big win notification screen. It is possible to make it possible to perform it, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game, and when the jackpot type is not the 15R jackpot even though the jackpot winning is notified in a state where the super chance arrival performance is displayed, It is possible to suppress distrust given to the player.

In addition, in FIG. 301(b), the configuration may be such that the type of the jackpot is notified by the display mode of the ball tm2. It is good also as a structure which shows that it is a jackpot C (5R time-saving no jackpot).

Next, with reference to FIG. 302, the notification pattern when winning the time-saving lottery and the jackpot lottery will be described. Figure 302 is a time-saving lottery (judgment of time-saving election for setting a high probability state of normal symbols executed in a special symbol lottery) or a jackpot lottery (judgment of whether or not a big hit is executed in a special symbol lottery). It is a timing chart which shows an example of the notification pattern at the time of winning.

Figure 302 (a) is an example of a notification pattern when time-saving winning and jackpot winning overlap. Paper k1 (see FIG. 300(b)), which is a display mode for suggesting, and "super chance arrival effect" (see FIG. 300(b)) are displayed to suggest that the player has won a short-time win, A game player is informed that a big win has been won by displaying a jackpot winning notification screen after a ready-to-win performance period. Therefore, when the short-time winning and the big win win overlap, the player can recognize that the short-time winning and the big win win overlap.

Figure 302(b) is an example of a notification pattern when a time-saving win is made but a jackpot win is not made. 300 (a)) is not executed, so the player cannot know the result of the time-saving lottery, and after the reach production, the third symbol is displayed in a display mode to indicate that the jackpot has not been won. The player is informed that he/she has not won. Therefore, when the player wins the time saving lottery but does not win the jackpot, the player cannot know the result of the time saving lottery, and can only recognize that the jackpot has not been won.

FIG. 302(c) is a notification pattern in the case of winning a jackpot even though it was not time-saving winning. Since FIG. 300 (a)) is not executed, the player cannot know the result of the time-saving lottery in the same way as 302 (b), and the third symbol is a display mode to show that the jackpot has been won after the reach production. Only the fact that the jackpot has been won is reported by being displayed. Therefore, when the jackpot is won but the time-saving lottery is not won, the player cannot know the result of the time-saving lottery, and can only recognize that the jackpot has been won.

By configuring in this way, when time-saving winning and jackpot winning overlap, the player can determine which game state was set for the jackpot winning, while time-saving winning is possible. It is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding the game state set after the stop of the changing special symbols and causing the player to play with an erroneous game method when the jackpot is not won even though the game is played. can.

In the embodiment, the production that suggests short-time winning is executed in the pre-reach production period, but it is not limited to this. production) may be executed, or a time-saving winning suggestion production may be executed during the period in which the jackpot winning notification screen is displayed.

By configuring in this way, even if the time-saving winning suggestion production does not occur in the pre-reach production period, the time-saving winning suggestion production may be executed even on the screen informing that the jackpot has been won. It is possible to entertain the variable display of the first special pattern while making the player expect the short-time winning without disappointing the player even if the performance suggesting the short-time winning is not shown in the previous performance period, thereby improving the amusement of the game. can.

In the embodiment, if the jackpot is not won even if the short-time winning is won, the short-time winning is not notified, but it is not limited to this. Also, it is good also as a structure which alert|reports time saving election. For example, in the embodiment, the super chance arrival effect (see FIG. 300 (b)) is executed only when the short-time winning and the jackpot win overlap, so the super chance arrival effect (see FIG. 300 (b) ) occurs, the player will know that the jackpot has been won before the jackpot is announced. 300(b)), even if the super chance arrival performance (see FIG. 300(b)) occurs, the winning of the jackpot is not confirmed, and the result of the jackpot lottery is announced until the last moment. Since it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the result of the jackpot lottery, the amusement of the game can be improved.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 303, each counter of the MPU 201 of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example will be described. It should be noted that the counters used in the respective control examples described above are different in that the update ranges of the counters are partially different, but since the basic configuration is the same, a detailed description thereof will be given. omitted.

The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 999), and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 999 in the case of a counter that can take values between 0 and 999). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 999, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 999. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 314) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing 7 (see FIG. 325).

The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in the seventh control example), and the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. It is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 and the special symbol reserved ball execution area at the timing. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by the first winning random number 7 table 202fa stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is the first winning random number. 7 When it matches with the value of the random number that becomes a big hit set by the table 202fa, it is determined as a special symbol big win.

In addition, the first per random number 7 table 202fa is provided with two types of a first special symbol random number 7 table 202fa1 for the first special symbol and a second special symbol random number 7 table 202fa2 for the second special symbol. Although the number of random numbers for the big win is the same, the number of random numbers for the small win is set differently (see FIG. 305). In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that become small wins, the degree of expectation for giving benefits (big wins or small wins) to players can be increased between the lottery for the first special symbols and the lottery for the second special symbols. can be different. The first special symbol random number 7 table 202fa1 and the second special symbol random number 7 table 202fa2 are provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. FIG.

Here, the first winning random number 7 table 202fa will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 305 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first per random number 7 table 202fa, Figure 305 (b) is defined in the first special symbol random number 7 table 202fa1 FIG. 305(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second special symbol random number 7 table 202fa2. This first hit random number 7 table 202fa is set with a random number value (determination value) determined as a big hit and a random value (determination value) determined as a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is a table.

Specifically, when executing the lottery for the first special symbol, the first special symbol random number 7 table 202fa1 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 305 (b), the first special symbol random number 7 table 202fa1, among the values of the random number counter C1, "0 to 4" is defined as the jackpot determination value, and the other values are other than the jackpot ( That is, it is defined as a judgment value for "out of line". Then, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is discriminated in the lottery for the first special symbol, and when the value is any one of "0 to 4", it is discriminated as a big win.

When executing the lottery for the second special symbol, the second special symbol random number 7 table 202fa2 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 305(c), the second special symbol random number 7 table 202fa2 defines "0 to 4" as the big hit determination value among the values of the random number counter C1, and "5 to 144" is a small hit. "145 to 999" are defined as other (ie outlier) determination values. Then, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is discriminated in the lottery of the second special symbol, and when the value is any one of "0 to 4", it is discriminated as a big win, and when the value is any one of "5 to 144". In some cases, it is determined to be a small hit.

The first win type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is won, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in the seventh control example), and at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the first It is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Also, in a state in which the lottery (fluctuation) of special symbols can be executed (that is, in a state other than during fluctuation of special symbols and during a big win game or a small win game), the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 It is stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area of the RAM 203 at the timing of hitting the ball.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol reserved ball execution area is a random number determined to be a special symbol big win or small win. That is, if it is a random number determined to be out of the special symbol, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 will be the one when the special symbol is out.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol reserved ball execution area is a random number for a special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed in , is the one at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol reserved ball execution area.

The first hit random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0-999. In this first hit random number counter C1, there are five random numbers that will be the big hits in the special symbols when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are drawn. It is stored in the first special symbol random number 7 table 202fa1 and the second special symbol random number 7 table 202fa2 of the first per random number 7 table 202fa. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example has a total of 1000 random numbers, and the total number of random numbers that will result in a big win is 5. Therefore, the probability of a special symbol big win is "1/200".

The value of the first winning type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example is configured as a loop counter within the range of 0-99. In the seventh control example, the value of the acquired first winning type counter C2 is used to refer to the first winning type selection table 202b to determine the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. Here, the contents of the jackpot type selection 7 table 202fb will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 306(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the jackpot type selection 7 table 202fb. As shown in FIG. 306 (a), in the seventh control example, the special figure 1 jackpot used when determining the value of the acquired first per type counter C2 at the time of the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) It has a type selection table 202fb1 and a special figure 2 big hit type selection table 202fb2 used when determining the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 at the time of the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2). there is As a result, the jackpot type when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the special figure 1 and the jackpot type when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the special figure 2 are made different, or each of a plurality of jackpot types is selected. Since the ratio can be changed, the game using the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the game using the second special symbol (special figure 2) provide different game characteristics to the player It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202fb1 used at the time of lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) will be described with reference to FIG. 306(b). FIG. 306(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202fb1. As shown in FIG. 306(b), when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the jackpot type when the random number is one of "0 to 9" in the first winning type counter C2 is If it is "jackpot A", the jackpot type is "jackpot B" if it is any of "10 to 49", and if it is any of "50 to 99", the jackpot type is "jackpot C". . When the time-saving state is set as the game state, the jackpot type when the random number is one of "0 to 9" in the first hit type counter C2 is "jackpot D" and "10 to 49". ”, the jackpot type is “jackpot A”, and when it is any of “50 to 99”, the jackpot type is “jackpot B”.

"Jackpot A" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 15 as a jackpot game, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a time-saving state. Since the number of rounds is large and the game state after the big win is set to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, the "big win A" is the most advantageous big win type for the player. Of the 100 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 10 random numbers select "jackpot A", so the first special pattern (special pattern 1) lottery is a jackpot. When it becomes, the ratio of selecting "jackpot A" is 10%.

"Jack B" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 5 as a jackpot game, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a time-saving state. Although the number of rounds is smaller than that of the above-mentioned "jackpot A", the game state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state advantageous to the player, so the "jackpot B" is a jackpot type advantageous to the player. Of the 100 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 40 random numbers select "jackpot B", so the first special pattern (special pattern 1) lottery is a jackpot. When it becomes, the ratio of selecting "jackpot B" is 40%.

"Jackpot C" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 5 as a jackpot game, and the game state after the jackpot is set to a normal state (non-time-saving state). Since the number of rounds is small and the normal state is set after the big win, the "jackpot C" is a big win type disadvantageous to the player. Of the 100 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 50 random numbers are selected as "jackpot C", so the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery is a big hit. When it becomes, the ratio of selecting "jackpot C" is 50%.

"Jackpot D" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 15 as a jackpot game, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a time-saving state. Since the number of rounds is large and the game state after the big win is set to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, the "big win D" is the most advantageous big win type for the player. Furthermore, the "jackpot D" is configured to set a time-saving state in which it is difficult to end the "jackpot A" described above. Therefore, the jackpot type is more advantageous to the player than "jackpot A" in which the same jackpot game is executed and the same game state is set after the jackpot game ends.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example, 15 rounds at a rate of 10% in the case of winning a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) in which the normal state is set. , and 90% of the time, 5 rounds of jackpot games are selected. In addition, a jackpot is selected in which the game state after the jackpot game ends shifts to the time-saving state at a rate of 50%.

On the other hand, 15 rounds of jackpot games are selected at a rate of 50% when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) executed in the state where the time saving state is set, and the rate is 50%. , 5 rounds of jackpot games are selected. In addition, when a jackpot is won in the special figure 1 lottery during the time saving state, the time saving state is always set after the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot winning is finished.

That is, winning a jackpot in a time-saving state is more advantageous to the player than winning a jackpot in a normal state in terms of the contents of the jackpot game and the game state set after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, as the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the time-saving state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 306(c), the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202fb2 used during the lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2) will be described. FIG. 306(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202fb2. As shown in FIG. 306(c), in the first hit type counter C2, the jackpot type is "jackpot D" when the random number is any one of "0 to 99". That is, when a big win is won in the lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2), the most advantageous "big win D" for the player is always selected as the big win type.

In the seventh control example, there are four types of jackpots, but the number of types is not limited to four. Moreover, even if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, different jackpot types may be selected. By configuring in this way, for example, when a big win is made with the second special symbol, by setting a big win type in which a larger number of rounds are executed, the winning with the second special symbol can be made more appealing to the player. can be expected. Therefore, the win in the high probability game state can be made more advantageous to the player, and the amusement of the game in the high probability state can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to make the player strongly desire to shift to the high probability state, and to play the game for a longer period of time.

In addition, the types of jackpot types selected in the first special pattern and the second special pattern and the selection rate (distribution rate) of each jackpot type are made the same, and the first hit type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type is set. It may be configured so that only the range is different. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the fraudulent act of acquiring the value of the first winning type counter C2 aiming at a specific counter value in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The small hit type counter C5 determines the small hit type and determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol hits. 99), it is incremented by 1 in order, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the small hit type counter C5 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in the seventh control example), and at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the first Stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the ball is the first entering ball in the state where the lottery (variation) of the special symbol can be executed (that is, the state other than during the variation of the special symbol and during the big win game and the small win game) It is stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the mouth 64 or the second ball entrance 640. - 特許庁

The value of the small hit type counter C5 in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. Then, when the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol is a small win, the small win type selection 7 table 202ff (see FIG. 307) for determining the type of the small win to be executed is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. is set to

Here, the contents of the small hit type selection 7 table 202ff will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 307 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small hit type selection 7 table 202ff. As shown in FIG. 307, the small hit type selection 7 table 202ff defines that two types of small hits A and B are selected by the value of the small hit type counter C5 as the small hit types of the second special symbol. there is Specifically, when the value of the obtained small hit type counter C5 is "0 to 89", the small hit type becomes "small hit A (V passage time big hit A)", "90 to 99" The small hit type in the case of either is "small hit B (V passing time big hit B)".

Here, for each small winning type (small winning A, B), when the ball passes through the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650 in the small winning game, the big winning game executed after the small winning game ends type is set. In the case of the small win A, the big win A (15R time-saving big win) is set, and after the execution of the small win A, the variable winning device 65 is set to the 15R open state to execute the big win, and then the time-saving state. (Period until the special symbol changes 100 times, 1 win for the small win A, or 3 wins for the small win B) is set. In addition, in the case of the small win B, the big win B (5R time-saving big win) is set, and after the execution of the small win B, the variable winning device 65 is set to the 5R open state, and the big win is executed. It is configured to set a time-saving state (a period until the special symbol changes 100 times, or the small winning A is won once, or the small winning B is won three times).

Thus, depending on the selected small winning type, the content of the big winning game executed after the small winning game is completed and the game state set after the big winning game can be varied. Specifically, the small win A has a large number of rounds (15R) executed in the big win game, and since a time saving state that is advantageous to the player after the big win game is completed is set, it is the most advantageous for the player. It is set as a small win, and the small win B has a smaller number of rounds (5R) executed in the big win game, and is set more disadvantageously than the above-described small win A, but a time saving state is set after the big win game. be.

Although detailed description will be given later, in the seventh control example, as the end condition of the time saving state, the time saving end condition established based on the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery (the number of times of small winning A winning, or small winning The number of times of B winning etc.) or the time saving end condition established based on the number of fluctuations of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) can be set. By configuring in this way, when the jackpot is won in a state where the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern is 1 or more, and the time saving state is set after the jackpot is finished, the first special pattern (special figure 1) is set after the jackpot is finished. ) is executed, the time saving state will not end. In addition, when the variation of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is executed and a small win (small win A, small win B) that can execute a big win game is won, the number of times the special symbol changes Since the time-saving end condition is established before the time-saving end condition is established and the time-saving state can be terminated based on the time-saving end condition, the small win game is continued until an advantageous small win (small win A) is won during the time-saving state. It is possible to suppress the repeated execution of the game in which the game ball is not allowed to pass through the specific area until the second end condition is satisfied.

Next, the contents of the variation pattern 7 table 202fd will be described with reference to FIG. 308(a). FIG. 308(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern 7 table 202fd. As shown in FIG. 308(a), in the variation pattern 7 table 202fd, the normal variation pattern 7 table 202fd1 used in the state where the normal state is set as the gaming state, and the time saving state are set A working hours variation pattern 7 table 202fd2 to be used is defined. Although the details will be described later, in the seventh control example, the data table used for selecting the variation pattern is different according to the game state, so the variation pattern (variation time) selected according to the game state is different. can let

FIG. 308(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal variation pattern 7 table 202fd1 provided in the variation pattern 7 table 202fd. As shown in FIG. 308(b), in the normal variation pattern 7 table 202fd1, the pattern type, the lottery result, the value range of the variation type counter CS1, and the variation pattern are defined in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 308(b), the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the lottery result is "out", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 139". A short deviation with a fluctuation time of 7 seconds is defined in the range of , and a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is defined in the range of "140 to 149", and fluctuations in the range of "150 to 179" Various types of normal reach with a time of 40 seconds are defined in correspondence, and super reach a with a variable time of 80 seconds is defined in correspondence with the range of "180 to 198".

In addition, the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the lottery result is "jackpot", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 29", and the variation time is 40 seconds. A super reach with a fluctuation time of 80 seconds is defined in the range of "30 to 189", and a special reach with a fluctuation time of 140 seconds is defined in the range of "190 to 198". It is

Next, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2) and the lottery result is "out", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the variation time in the entire range 180 seconds long out is stipulated, and if the lottery result is "big hit or small hit", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the entire range has a variation time of 180 seconds. Long out is defined.

In this way, according to the lottery result of the special symbol, one of the variation patterns with variation time of 7 seconds to 180 seconds is set, and a command indicating this variation pattern is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. By doing so, the third symbol display device 81 executes a variable effect corresponding to the variable time.

Here, in the seventh control example, as described above, when a right-handed game is executed in a state in which the normal state is set as the game state, the ball is configured so as not to enter the second ball inlet 640. Therefore, during the normal state, a game for entering a ball into the first ball entrance 64, that is, a game for executing a lottery for the first special symbol is performed. The case where the lottery for the second special symbol is executed in the normal state configured in this way is the case where the player illegally enters the ball into the second ball entrance 640, so the normal state A variation pattern having a long variation time is selected for the variation of the second special symbol in . As a result, it is possible to suppress the situation where the second special symbol lottery is illegally performed in a short period of time. In addition, when it is determined that the second special symbol lottery (variation) is executed during the normal state, the period (180 seconds) until the lottery result is displayed is used to illegally draw the second special symbol. It may be configured to notify the outside that (variation) has been executed. In addition, when the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is executed illegally, the result of the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol that is illegally executed is forced to be the result of the lottery (variation). It may be configured to create and display.

As shown in FIG. 308(b), the variation pattern (variation time) selected in the normal variation pattern 7 table 202fd1 is 7 seconds (selection ratio is about 70%), 40 seconds (selection rate is about 15%), 80 seconds (selection rate is about 10%), and 20 seconds (selection rate is about 5%). there is Also, if the lottery result is a big hit, it is likely to be selected in the order of 80 seconds (selection rate of about 80%), 40 seconds (selection rate of about 15%), and 140 seconds (selection rate of about 5%). stipulated in

In this way, there is a relationship between the special symbol lottery result and the selected variation pattern (variation time), and the ratio of the variation time (variation pattern) selected when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, and the special It is configured to be able to suggest the degree of expectation for a big win when a specific variation time (variation pattern) is selected by the ratio of the variation time (variation pattern) selected when the lottery result of the pattern is a loss. ing. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to predict whether or not a big win is won based on the selected variation time (variation pattern).

In the seventh control example, the same variation pattern table is used irrespective of the type of jackpot won. A different variation pattern table may be used for the case of the jackpot type indicated and the case of the jackpot type indicating other jackpots (jackpot B, jackpot C). In this case, for example, the variation pattern table used when winning a jackpot type indicating an advantageous jackpot (jackpot A) is shorter than the variation pattern table used when winning a jackpot type indicating other jackpots. It is preferable to configure so that the time variation pattern is easily selected. As a result, the longer the variation time set in the variation pattern to be executed, the more advantageous the player can expect the game result, so that the player is interested in the variation time of the special symbol. be able to.

Further, the variation pattern table used when winning the jackpot type indicating the normal jackpot makes it easier to select a variation pattern with a longer variation time than the variation pattern table used when winning the jackpot type indicating the probability variable jackpot. In this way, when a jackpot is won in a short variation time, the player can be provided with an unexpected game result, even when a short variation time is selected. , can keep you hopeful until the end.

Next, referring to FIG. 309, the contents of the working hours reduction variation pattern 7 table 202fd2 provided in the variation pattern 7 table 202fd will be described. FIG. 309 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the working hours variation pattern 7 table 202fd2. As shown in FIG. 309, in the time saving variation pattern 7 table 202fd2, the pattern type, the number of variations, the lottery result, the value range of the variation type counter CS1, and the variation pattern are defined in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 309, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the number of fluctuations is 1 to 4 times, and the lottery result is "out", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, if the fluctuation time is defined as a short deviation of 2 seconds in the entire range, and the lottery result is "big hit", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198" A short hit with a variation time of 2 seconds is defined for the range, ie the entire range. If the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the number of fluctuations is 5 times or more, and the lottery result is "out", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is within the range of "0 to 198", that is, the entire range If the deviation of the fluctuation time of 20 seconds is defined in the above, and the lottery result is "big win", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the whole range of the fluctuation time is 20 seconds. is stipulated. Also, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2), the number of fluctuations is 1 or more, and the lottery result is "out", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, If the variation time is defined to be within 30 seconds for the entire range and the lottery result is "small win", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is within the range of "0 to 160" and the variation time is 10 seconds. is defined, medium and small wins with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds are defined in the range of "161 to 198", and when the lottery result is a "big win", a medium and big win with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is defined.

Returning to FIG. 303, the description continues. The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by 1 in the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). When the second winning random number counter C4 completes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In the seventh control example, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 314) is performed, and it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start opening (through gate) 67. It is acquired when it is held and stored in the second symbol reserved ball execution area of the RAM 203 .

Then, the value of the random number that is the normal winning pattern is set by the second winning random number table 202fc stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is the second winning random number 7. If it matches the value of the random number that is set by the table 202fc, it is determined as a normal design (second design). In addition, in the seventh control example, the probability of winning the normal symbol is always constant regardless of the game state of the pachinko machine 10, but other configurations may be used.

For example, as the second random number 7 table 202fc, when the probability of normal design is low (period of normal state of normal design) and when the probability of winning normal design is high than that low probability (normal design It is possible to provide two types, one for the time period in which the time is shortened. In this case, the number of winning random numbers contained in each is set to be different. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be winning different, the probability of winning can be changed between when the probability of normal symbols is low and when the probability of normal symbols is high.

When the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and it is determined whether the current game state is the time saving state, and if the game state is the time saving state, the second pattern is displayed. In the device 83, the variable display of normal symbols is executed for 3 seconds. On the other hand, if the game state is not the time-saving state, the second symbol display device 83 performs the variable display of normal symbols for 30 seconds.

If the value of the obtained second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be winning, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, it is used as a stop symbol (second symbol). A symbol of "○" is illuminated. Then, it is determined whether the game state at the time when the second symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) is the time saving state, and the time when the second symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) is the time saving state, and When the second pattern variation start time is also in the time saving state, the electric accessory 640a is controlled to operate (long opening control) so that the second ball entrance 640 is opened "2 seconds x 2 times". On the other hand, in other cases, the operation control (short opening control) of the electric accessory 640a is performed so that the second ball entrance 640 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". The opening time and number of openings of the second entrance 640 may be set arbitrarily.

In this way, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols and the operation contents of the electric accessory 640a at the time of winning (opening period of the second ball entrance 640, number of times of opening) are variable according to the set game state. When the game state at the time of starting the fluctuation of the normal symbols is the time saving state, the time of the fluctuation display is very short from ``30 seconds to 3 seconds'' compared to the case of the normal state, and further, If the lottery result of the second symbol that started to fluctuate during the period in which the time saving state is set is a hit and the time saving state is set at the time when the electric accessory 640a starts to operate, otherwise , the opening period of the second ball entrance 640 becomes very long as "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 2 seconds x 2 times", so the ball easily enters the second ball entrance 640. state. A table (not shown) storing random numbers for judging whether or not it is a normal symbol win from the value (random number) of the second winning random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202 .

In addition, in the seventh control example, depending on the game state at the start of variation of the normal symbol (second symbol) and the game state at the operation start timing of the electric accessory 640a executed based on the winning of the normal symbol. , the variation time of the second symbol, and the operation contents of the electric accessory 640a are set differently, but other configurations may be used, for example, the normal symbol (second symbol) A determination means for determining that the time saving state is continuously set is provided from the variation start timing to the operation start timing of the electric accessory 640a, and the variation time of the second pattern is used by using the determination result of the determination means. , and the operation contents of the electric accessory 640a may be set.

As described above, in the seventh control example, in order to execute the operation (long opening) that is advantageous to the player as the operation of the electric accessory 640a, the normal symbol fluctuation start time and the operation start time of the electric accessory 640a It is necessary that the time saving state is set at any timing. By configuring in this way, for example, when the second pattern, which starts to change at the timing when the normal state is set, is stopped and displayed with identification information indicating the hit at the timing when the time saving state is set, or Based on the lottery of one second pattern, such as when the second pattern that starts to change at the timing when the time saving state is set is stopped and displayed with identification information indicating the win at the timing when the normal state is set. In the case where the variation of the second symbol and the action of the electric role product 640a executed by stepping across a plurality of game states, the operation control (long opening) of the electric role product 640a that is advantageous to the player is executed. can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessively advantageous state.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see Fig. 314). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of main processing 7 (see FIG. 325).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

Next, referring to FIG. 304(a), the contents of the main controller 110ROM202 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 304(a), the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 contains, as part of the fixed value data, a first winning random number 7 table 202fa, a jackpot type selection 7 table 202fb, a second winning random number 7 table 202fc, And variation pattern 7 table 202fd, time saving provision 7 table 202fe, small hit type selection 7 table 202ff, open scenario 7 table 202fg, time saving random number 7 table 202fh, time saving type selection 7 table 202fi are stored at least.

Of the fixed value data stored in the ROM 202, the first hit random number 7 table 202fa, the big hit type selection 7 table 202fb, the second hit random number 7 table 202fc, the variation pattern 7 table 202fd, the small hit type selection 7 table 202ff has already been explained in detail, so its explanation is omitted.

The time saving 7 table 202fe is a data table that is referred to when setting a plurality of time saving end conditions for ending the time saving state differently for each jackpot type of the winning jackpot, and the jackpot game ends (the jackpot game When the ending period ends) (S1612 of FIG. 326: Yes), it is referred to, and a different time saving number of times (time saving end condition) is set according to the jackpot type.

Here, with reference to FIG.306(d), the content prescribed|regulated to the time reduction provision 7 table 202fe is demonstrated. FIG.306(d) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content prescribed|regulated to the time reduction provision 7 table 202fe. In the seventh control example, a jackpot type (jackets A, B, D) in which the time saving state is set after the jackpot ends, and a jackpot type (jackpot C) in which the time saving state is not set after the jackpot ends (normal state is set) It has, and as shown in FIG. 306(d), a plurality of time-saving end conditions are defined corresponding to each jackpot type.

In the seventh control example, the first time-saving end condition established according to the number of fluctuations of special symbols, the second time-saving end condition established according to the number of times a small hit A is won in the special symbol lottery, and the special symbol lottery. and a third time-saving end condition established according to the number of times the small win B is won.

As shown in FIG. 306 (d), the value to be set to various counters corresponding to each of the plurality of time saving end conditions is defined in the time saving 7 table 202fe, and the value to be set as the first time saving end condition described above is set to the counter 203h during time saving, the value set as the second time saving end condition is set to the small hit A counter 203fg, and the value set as the third time saving end condition is set to the small hit B counter 203fh.

Specifically, when the jackpot type is the jackpot A and B, as the time saving end condition, the time saving medium counter 203h (first time saving end condition) "100", the small hit A counter 203fg "1", the small hit It is defined to set the value of "3" to the B counter 203fh, and in the case of the big hit D, the time saving end condition is "100" to the time saving medium counter 203h (first time saving end condition), and the small hit A counter 203fg. , and a value of "10" is set to the small winning B counter 203fh.

In addition, as described above, in the seventh control example, when the jackpot type is the jackpot C, the time saving state is not set after the jackpot game ends, so the jackpot C of the time saving grant 7 table 202fe is for the various counters described above. The value to be set is not defined. In this way, by differentiating the ending condition of the time saving state set after the jackpot game ends for each jackpot type that has been won, even if it is notified in advance that the time saving state will be set after the jackpot game ends, it is possible to Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the content of the time saving, the game can be played until the end (until the time saving state ends) in a state of heightened play motivation.

In addition, in the seventh control example, in addition to the time-saving end state set using the time-saving provision 7 table 202fe, the time-saving state is also ended when a special symbol jackpot is won, but this jackpot winning. Since the time saving end condition established based on does not differ depending on the set jackpot type, it is omitted from the time saving grant 7 table 202fe, but the above-mentioned time saving end condition (based on the special figure jackpot winning You may comprise so that a value may be prescribed|regulated to the time-saving provision 7 table 202fe also about time-saving end conditions satisfied by.

Furthermore, in the seventh control example, it is configured to set the time saving state (second time saving) even when the time saving is won in the special symbol lottery, but regarding the time saving end condition set for the second time saving will be described with reference to a time saving type selection 7 table 202fi to be described later. In addition, in the seventh control example, the time saving end condition for the time saving state (second time saving) set based on the time saving winning is not the time saving grant 7 table 202fe, but the time saving type selection 7 table 202fi. Although it comprises so that it may set, you may comprise so that the time saving end conditions corresponding to 2nd time saving may be prescribed|regulated to the time saving provision 7 table 202fe, without restricting to this.

Further, in the seventh control example, as a plurality of time saving end conditions, a configuration having the above-described first time saving end condition to third time saving end condition is used, but other conditions may be set as time saving end conditions. , For example, when the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol is a predetermined number of times (eg, 50 times), the time saving end condition is established, and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is a predetermined number of times (eg, 80 times). The time-saving end condition to be established and the number of times the V winning device has been activated by winning the small win (the number of times the sum of the values of the small win A counter 203fg and the small win B counter 203fh) has reached a predetermined number (for example, 10 times). You may set the time-saving end conditions satisfied in the case.

In addition, it is possible to set a time saving end condition that is established by another factor, not based on the number of fluctuations of special symbols or the lottery result. number of times of operation) reaches a predetermined number of times, or when the number of balls entering a specific ball entrance (for example, the general winning opening 63) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50) You may comprise so that the time saving end conditions etc. which are materialized in may be preset.

As described above, a plurality of time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, are set, and the time-saving state is ended when any of the time-saving end conditions is set. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp in advance how long the time saving state will continue, so that monotonous games can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the seventh control example, control is used to end the time saving state when any one of the time saving end conditions is satisfied, but in addition to this, for example, a plurality of time saving end conditions are predetermined You may comprise so that time saving end conditions may be materialized, when number (for example, two) is materialized. In this case, the establishment number determination means for determining the number of time-saving end conditions that are satisfied, and the condition attainment determination means for determining whether the number of establishment determined by the establishment number determination means has reached a predetermined number (for example, two), is provided, and the time saving state is terminated (normal state is set) when it is determined that the condition attainment determination means has reached a predetermined number (for example, two).

Further, a content discriminating means for discriminating the content of the time-saving end condition met first is provided, and a predetermined number (for example, two) serving as a discriminating reference for the condition attainment discriminating means is varied based on the discriminating result of the content discriminating means. A discrimination reference number variable means may be provided. As a result, it is possible to set a time-saving state that is easy to end or a time-saving state that is difficult to end according to the type of the time-saving end condition that is established first, so that even after the time-saving state is set, the player is motivated. You can play games.

In addition to the above-mentioned contents, a predetermined period of time after the time saving state is set (for example, until the number of fluctuations in the special symbol reaches 10 times) is measured, and the measurement result of the predetermined period of time measurement means is measured. A result determination means for determining is provided, and when the result determination means determines that the current time is within the predetermined period, even if the above-mentioned time saving end condition is satisfied, the time saving state is terminated until the predetermined period elapses. A time-saving end delaying means for delaying may be provided, or an end condition invalidating means may be provided for invalidating the time-saving end condition established when the result determining means determines that the current time is within a predetermined period. In addition, while the result determination means determines that the current time is within a predetermined period, it determines whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied, and updates (subtracts) the values of various counters set according to each time saving end condition ) may not be executed.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to surely prevent the end of the time saving state immediately after the time saving state is set, and to set the end timing of the time saving state in a complicated manner. In addition, in the case of using the process of ending the time saving state based on the fact that a plurality of time saving end conditions are satisfied as described above, a plurality of time saving end conditions are prioritized time saving end conditions (for example, the number of fluctuations in the special symbol is Time-saving end conditions that are established when reaching 100 times) and non-priority time-saving end conditions (for example, time-saving end conditions that are established when the number of small hits reaches 3 times) are set, and priority time-saving end It is preferable that the time saving state is terminated immediately when the conditions are satisfied, and the time saving state is terminated only when a plurality of non-prioritized time saving end conditions are satisfied. By providing the preferential time-saving end condition in this way, it is possible to suppress excessively providing the time-saving state to the player.

The opening scenario 7 table 202fg is an opening pattern of the variable winning device 65 or the V winning device 650 in a winning game (big winning game, small winning game) executed when a big win or a small win is won by lottery of special symbols. A data table storing an opening scenario in which (patterns for operating various solenoids provided in each winning device) is stored, and is set to a jackpot type set to a winning jackpot or a winning small win. The contents of the open scenario are defined in correspondence with the small hit type.

In this way, the winning device (variable winning device 65, V winning device 650) and the contents of the opening operation (opening scenario ), it is possible to set the degree of advantage of the privilege game in multiple stages. can.

In the opening scenario 7 table 202fg, the start interval period during the winning game (the period from the start of the winning game to the first opening operation of the winning device) corresponding to the winning type (big win type, small winning type) ), the opening operation mode of the winning device (type of winning device to be opened, the number of seconds for one opening operation (round game), the total number of opening operations (number of rounds)), and the interval period between rounds (round game The period during which the winning device set between is closed) and the end interval period (the period from the end of all round games to the end of the winning game (the period until the start of new special symbol fluctuations is allowed) period)), and the ON/OFF switching operation mode of the flow path solenoid 650k for switching the flow path so that the winning ball of the V winning device 650 flows down the normal discharge flow path 650e1 or the special discharge flow path 650e2 are defined respectively. ing.

Specifically, corresponding to jackpot A, the winning type is "2 seconds" as the start interval period, "15 rounds" for the "variable winning device 65" as the opening operation mode of the winning device, and 1 round. As a game, an opening operation mode in which the game is opened continuously for 29 seconds is stipulated with an inter-round interval period of '1 second' and an end interval period of '4 seconds'. Therefore, when the jackpot type wins the jackpot A, a jackpot game in which the variable prize winning device 65 is opened for 15 rounds is executed, and a jackpot game in which a large number of prize balls are paid out to the player. . Furthermore, when the jackpot type is jackpot A, the jackpot is a jackpot in which a time-saving state, which is a game state that is advantageous to the player after the jackpot game is finished, is set, so that the jackpot A is given a privilege that is most advantageous to the player. It is a big hit.

Next, corresponding to jackpot types B and C, the start interval period is set to "2 seconds", the opening operation mode of the winning device is set to "5 rounds" for the "variable prize winning device 65", and one round game is set. The opening operation mode of "continuously 29 seconds" defines an inter-round interval period of "1 second" and an end interval period of "4 seconds". Therefore, when the jackpot types are jackpots B and C, a jackpot game in which the variable winning device 65 is opened for five rounds is executed, and a jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot A is played for the player. It becomes a jackpot game in which about 1/3 of prize balls are paid out. Also, when the jackpot type is jackpot B, a time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player after the jackpot game is finished, is set, and when the jackpot type is jackpot C, the time-saving state is not set after the jackpot game is finished. Since it is configured, the jackpot B becomes a jackpot to which a privilege that is more disadvantageous than the jackpot A and more advantageous than the jackpot C is given.

Corresponding to the jackpot D, the start interval period is "1 second", the "V winning device 650" is opened in the "first round" and the "variable winning device 65" is set as the opening operation mode of the winning device. is opened in the "2nd to 15th rounds", and as one round game, the first round opens "0.1 seconds open 12 times with an interval of 0.5 seconds open", 2- In the 15th round, the opening operation mode is "continuously open for 29 seconds", the inter-round interval period is "10 seconds" after the first round, otherwise "1 second", and the end interval period is "4 seconds". is stipulated.

That is, the interval period between the start of the jackpot D and the period until the second round is executed (round game contents of the first round (opening/closing operation mode), and the interval period between rounds after the end of the first round) The content is configured to be the same as the content specified in the small winning game described later. By configuring in this way, whether the winning game being executed this time is a big winning game or a small winning game is determined until the timing when the first round ends (if it is a small winning game, the small winning game ends It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand until the timing to do so). As a result, it is possible to provide an unexpected winning game to a player who has won a small winning and recognized that a small winning game is being executed.

In addition, in the seventh control example, the jackpot D is a jackpot type that is always selected when a jackpot is won by the second special symbol, and most of the second special symbol lotteries are set to win a small win. (See FIG. 305(c)). Therefore, the time-saving state is set as the game state, and during the period in which the variation of the second special symbol is mainly performed, some winning game is started after the variation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed. In this case, since the winning game is started from the same opening operation regardless of whether the player wins the big win or the small win, which win (big win or small win) is won by the player. can be difficult to grasp.

In addition, in the lottery of the second special symbols, the probability of winning the big win is set to be lower than that of winning the small win, and after the big win game corresponding to the big win D is finished. It is set to give a time saving state. Therefore, since a player who has won a big win is not provided with a privilege that is more disadvantageous than when he wins a small win, the player can play an unexpected game (a jackpot game corresponding to the big win D). Since the game can be played in an advantageous manner, the player can be more excited.

In addition, when the big win D is won and when various small wins are won, the same performance mode is executed as the variable display (variable performance) displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and In order to make it difficult for the player to identify the lottery result by the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b showing the lottery result of the special symbol, the stop display timing of the special symbol and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed. The stop display timing of the third symbol is made different, or the stop display timing of the special symbol and the stop display timing of the third symbol are synchronized, but the third symbol is displayed at the stop display timing or the period before and after that. In order to make it more difficult for the player to identify than during other periods, the display mode and display area are changed, and at the stop display timing of the special symbol, the effect displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 It is preferable to switch from the 3rd pattern to the normal pattern for production corresponding to the variable display of the normal pattern.

In addition, the winning device (V winning device 650) that opens when a winning game is executed and the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are arranged separately, and the stop display timing of the special symbol (when any winning At the timing of informing the player of the winning, the third symbol display device 81 executes a performance display to draw the player's attention to the V winning device 650, or the first symbol display device 37a as in the seventh control example. , 37b is made smaller than the display area of the third pattern display device 81 so that the first pattern is more difficult to see than the third pattern. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish whether the lottery result of this special pattern is a big win or a small win by the stop display mode of the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b, and the big win is continued even during the winning game. can be expected to be elected.

In addition to the small winning game (1 round game), the small winning game is performed by the V switch 650e3 detecting the ball during the small winning game. A release scenario of a jackpot game (2 to 15 round games) that is continuously executed after the end is also defined. As a result, it is possible to reliably associate the small winning game contents of the winning small winning type with the big winning game contents that can be executed after finishing the small winning game, so that a proper game can be provided.

Specifically, for a small win A, the start interval period is "1 second" as a small win game, and the opening operation mode of the winning device "V winning device 650" is "1 round". Round game "0.1 second open 12 times", interval period between open "0.5 seconds (interval between open 1) other than after the end of the 5th and 10th open, end of the 5th and 10th open 5 seconds (interval 2 between opening)” is defined later.

Then, the "variable prize winning device 65" as a jackpot game that can be executed after the end of the small prize game is opened in the "2nd to 15th rounds", and one round game "continuously open for 29 seconds" is the interval period between rounds. , "10 seconds" after the end of the first round, "1 second" otherwise, a start interval of "2 seconds", and an end interval period of "8 seconds" are defined.

In addition, for the small winning type B, as a small winning game, the start interval period is "1 second", and the opening operation mode of the winning device "V winning device 650" is opened for "1 round". Game "0.1 second open 12 times", interval period between open "0.5 seconds (interval between open 1) other than after the end of the 5th and 10th open, 5 seconds after the end of the 5th and 10th open (interval between opening 2)” is defined.

Then, as a jackpot game that can be executed after the end of the small win game, the "variable prize winning device 65" opens in the "2nd to 5th rounds", and one round game "continuously open for 29 seconds" is the interval period between rounds. , "10 seconds" after the end of the first round, "1 second" otherwise, a start interval of "2 seconds", and an end interval period of "8 seconds" are defined.

That is, the big winning game that can be executed after the small winning game corresponding to the small winning B is completed is set so that the number of round games is smaller than the big winning game corresponding to the small winning A described above. Further, when the small win type is a small win B, the small win B is a small win because it is configured to set a time-saving state that is a game state that is advantageous to the player after the corresponding big win game is completed. It becomes a small win in which a privilege more disadvantageous than A is given.

In the time saving random number 7 table 202fh, in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the value (determination value) of the first winning random number counter C1 determined as the time saving winning is defined corresponding to the game state. Data table. Here, with reference to Fig.310 (a), the content of random number 7 table 202fh per time saving is demonstrated. Drawing 310 (a) is a figure showing the contents prescribed to random number 7 table 202fh per time saving.

Specifically, regardless of the special symbol type, when the game state is normal (low probability state of special symbols and normal symbols), the value of the first per random number counter C1 is "3, 4, 140 to 287 , and is configured not to provide a judgment value for time-saving election for other game states.

Here, in the seventh control example, in one special symbol lottery, determination of big hit winning and determination of time saving winning can be performed in duplicate. In addition, the determination of the small hit winning and the determination of the short time winning are configured to be executed in duplicate. Therefore, for example, when the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is "3, 4", in the jackpot determination executed using the first winning random number 7 table 202fa (see FIG. 305(a)) It is determined to be a jackpot, and it is determined to be a short-time winning in the time-saving winning determination performed using the time-saving random number 7 table 202fh (see FIG. 310 (a)). . Similarly, when the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "140 to 144", in the small hit determination executed using the special symbol 2 random number 7 table 202fa2 (see FIG. 305 (c)) It is determined to be a small hit, and it is determined to be a short time winning in the short time winning determination performed using the time saving random number 7 table 202fh (see FIG. 310 (a)), so it is possible to win a small win and a short time. become.

As described above, in the seventh control example, after the determination of the time-saving election is performed, the jackpot (small hit) determination is performed. hit) will be elected. Therefore, it is possible to give a privilege advantageous to the player as compared with the case of winning the jackpot (minor win) without winning the time-saving prize.

In addition, in this seventh control example, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired in one special symbol lottery is used to determine the big hit (small hit) and the time-saving winning decision. , The value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is the winning judgment value in any judgment, it is configured so that duplicate winning can be possible, but not limited to this, for example, execution of special symbol lottery When the right is acquired, the value of the random number counter for judging the jackpot (small hit) and the value of the random number counter for short-time winning are separately obtained, and the obtained values are used to judge the jackpot (small hit). And, it may be configured to execute time-saving winning determination.

The time saving type selection 7 table 202fi is a data table referred to when setting the time saving end condition for the time saving state (second time saving) set when the time saving is won in the special symbol lottery, and is a time saving type selection counter CC1. The time-saving type is defined in correspondence with the value of

Here, with reference to Drawing 310 (b), the contents of time saving classification selection 7 table 202fi are explained. Drawing 310 (b) is a figure showing the contents prescribed in time saving classification selection 7 table 202fi. As shown in FIG. 310 (b), in the time saving type selection 7 table 202fi, the time saving type is defined in correspondence with the value of the obtained time saving type selection counter CC1, and the time saving corresponding to the defined time saving type Termination conditions are specified.

Specifically, the time saving type A is defined as the time saving type for the entire range (“0 to 99”) of the time saving type selection counter CC1 that has been obtained. And, as a time saving end condition corresponding to the time saving A, a time saving end condition in which "1" is set to the time saving counter 203h (first time saving end condition) is defined. In other words, a time saving end condition is set in which the time saving state ends when the process of updating the value of the special symbol working time saving counter 203h is executed once. Therefore, if you win the time saving in the special symbol lottery, the time saving state is set at the time of winning the time saving, and then the big hit determination in the special symbol lottery is executed, and the special symbol variation to show the result of the special symbol lottery. A time saving state will be set until it starts.

In other words, when the special symbol lottery wins the time-saving lottery, the time-saving state can be set only for executing the jackpot determination in the special symbol lottery during the time-saving state (executing the special lottery). Therefore, when the special symbol lottery wins the time saving, it is possible to execute only the big hit determination during the time saving state without the player noticing that the time saving win is made. Potential benefits (jackpot game content, time saving state after the jackpot game ends) can be given.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 310(b), in this seventh control example, when the time saving is won in the special symbol lottery, the time saving A is always set as the time saving type, but it is not limited to this. For example, according to the value of the acquired time saving type selection counter CC1, a time saving type different from the working time saving A may be configured to be selectable. In this case, for example, the value of the acquired time-saving type selection counter CC1 defines time-saving A as a time-saving type for the range of "0 to 94", and time-saving A as a time-saving type for the range of "95 to 99" is configured to define a different time saving Z, and as a time saving end condition corresponding to the time saving Z, a time saving end condition in which "100" is set to the time saving counter 203h (first time saving end condition) is preferably defined.

By constructing in this way, in a part of the case where the special symbol lottery wins the time saving, the time saving state for continuously executing the second special symbol lottery is set instead of the time saving state for executing the special lottery. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a more unexpected game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 304(b), the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example will be described. FIG. 304(b) is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example. As shown in FIG. 304(b), the RAM 203 in the seventh control example includes a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. Symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, game state storage area 203g, time reduction counter 203h, jackpot start flag 203j, jackpot middle flag 203k, small hit type storage area 203fa, small hit start flag 203fb, small hit medium flag 203fc, V passage big hit type storage area 203fd, V flag 203fe, V passage flag 203ff, small hit A counter 203fg, small hit B counter 203fh, and other memory area 203z ing.

That is, for the RAM203 (see FIG. 244 (b)) of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example described above, small hit type storage area 203fa, small hit start flag 203fb, small hit medium flag 203fc, V passage big hit type storage Area 203fd, V flag 203fe, V passing flag 203ff, small hit A counter 203fg, and small hit B counter 203fh are added, and the rest is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The small hit type storage area 203fa is a storage area for temporarily storing the small hit type set to the won small hit, and when it is determined that the small hit is won (S10306 in FIG. 317: Yes ), the acquired small hit type is temporarily stored (S10310 in FIG. 317). Then, when it is determined that the number of openings of the V winning device 650 reaches a predetermined number during the small winning game (S11707 in FIG. 327: Yes) and the V flag 203fe is not set to ON (S11708 in FIG. 327: No ), the stored small hit type is referred to (S11709 in FIG. 327), and an instruction command corresponding to the referred small hit type is set. Although detailed description is omitted, the information stored in the small hit type storage area 203fa (information for indicating the small hit type) is configured to be cleared at the end of the small hit game.

The small hit start flag 203fb is a flag indicating that it is the start timing of the small hit game. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a small hit is stopped (S10404 in FIG. 320). It is determined that the small hit start flag 203fb is ON, and when it is identified as the start timing of the small hit game, it is set to OFF (S11703 in FIG. 327). This small hit start flag 203fb is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power failure or the like occurs, the state immediately before the power failure or the like is backed up and held. configured to be

The small hit medium flag 203fc is a flag indicating that the small hit game is in progress. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a small hit is stopped (S10404 in FIG. 320). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit (when it is determined that the game of the set number of rounds of the small hit has ended), it is set to OFF (S11720 in FIG. 327). This small hit medium flag 203fc is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when power failure etc. occurs, it is held by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of power failure etc. configured to be

The V passing jackpot type storage area 203fd stores data for determining the jackpot type that is set when a ball that has won the V prize device 650 is detected by the V switch 650e3 when a small prize game is being executed. This is the storage area where the data is stored. In the V-passing jackpot type storage area 203fd, a data value corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the determined small hit type is stored when the fluctuation of the special symbol that results in a small hit is stopped (Fig. 320 S10402). When the ball flows down the special discharge channel 650e2 in the V winning device 650 and the ball is detected by the V switch 650e3, a V flag corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the data value stored in the V passing jackpot type storage area 203fd. 203fe is set to ON. At the end of the small winning game, the data value stored in the V passing big winning type storage area 203fd is cleared. This V pass jackpot type storage area 203fd is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power failure or the like occurs, the state immediately before the power failure or the like is backed up. is configured to be held by

The V flag 203fe corresponds to the type of the small winning game being executed when the ball flows down the special discharge channel 650e2 in the V winning device 650 during the small winning game and the ball is detected by the V switch 650e3. A flag corresponding to the jackpot type is set to ON. At the end of the small winning game, it is determined whether this V flag 203fe is ON (S11716 in FIG. 327), and when it is determined that the V flag 203fe is ON (S11716 in FIG. 327: Yes), it is set to ON The jackpot type to be executed is discriminated from the executed flag, and the start of the corresponding jackpot game is set (S11718 in FIG. 327). This V-flag 203fe is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as when the RAM is cleared. is configured as

The V passage flag 203ff is a flag used for determining the state in which the V flag 203fe is set to ON during the small winning game, and is set to ON when the V flag 203fe is set to ON. be done. In the seventh control example, most of the balls winning in the V winning device 650 during the small winning game are configured to flow down the special discharge channel 650e2, corresponding to the balls first winning in the special discharge channel 650e2. is set to ON in the V-passing process (see FIG. 323) (S11207 in FIG. 323).

Then, in the V passage processing (see FIG. 323), it is determined whether the V passage flag 203ff is set to ON (S11201 in FIG. 323). ), the processing of S11202 to S11208 in the V passing processing (see FIG. 323) is skipped. As a result, even when the V switch 650e3 detects a plurality of balls during one small winning game, only the V passing process corresponding to the first detected ball is executed. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the processing executed during the small winning game, and the V passing command is transmitted to the voice ramp control device 113 a plurality of times, and the V passing management on the side of the voice ramp control device 113 is complicated. can be prevented from becoming

The time saving counter 203h is a counter for measuring the number of fluctuations of the special symbol until one of the time saving end conditions set during the time saving state is established, and in the jackpot control process (S11504 in FIG. 326), the ending production (S11612 of FIG. 326: Yes), the value (100) defined in the time saving grant 7 table 202fe is set (S11614 of FIG. 326) .

Then, the value of the counter is referred to in the update process 7 (S8253 in FIG. 319) executed in the special symbol variation process 7 (S10104 in FIG. 315) (S10601 in FIG. 319), and if the value of the counter is greater than 0 If so (S10601 in FIG. 319: Yes), the value of the counter is decremented by one. When it is determined that the value of the time saving medium counter 203k after the subtraction is 0 (S10604 in FIG. 319: Yes), the normal state is set as the game state because the time saving end condition is satisfied (S10605 in FIG. 319). In addition, the seventh control example sets a plurality of time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state, and even if any of the time-saving end conditions are satisfied (for example, time-saving end based on the number of winning small wins Even if the condition is met), the value of the counter is set (reset) to 0 (S10505 in FIG. 321). Thus, even if the time saving end condition other than the time saving end condition (first time saving end condition) with reference to the value of the time saving counter 203h is satisfied among the plurality of time saving end conditions, the value of the time saving counter 203h is Since it is set (reset) to 0, it is possible to suppress the situation where the process of subtracting the value of the time saving counter 203h is continued even though the time saving state has ended. In addition, even if any of the time-saving end conditions are satisfied, the values of various counters used to determine whether the time-saving end condition is satisfied when ending the time-saving state are set to the initial value (0). Since it is configured as above, it is possible to prevent the processing after the time saving state from being complicated.

The small hit A counter 203fg is a counter for measuring the number of winning times of the small hit in which the small hit A is set as the small hit type until one of the time saving end conditions set during the time saving state is satisfied, In jackpot control processing 7 (S11504 in FIG. 326), when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (end timing of jackpot) (S11612 in FIG. 326: Yes), it is defined in the time reduction grant 7 table 202fe A value (1) is set (S11614 in FIG. 326).

Then, the small hit that was elected this time in the small hit time saving update process 7 (S10405 in FIG. 321) executed in the small hit start setting process (S10223 in FIG. 320) of the special symbol variation process 7 (S10104 in FIG. 315) When it is determined that the small hit type is the small hit A (S10502 in FIG. 321: Yes), the value of the counter is subtracted by 1. If it is determined that the value of the small hit A counter 203fg after subtraction is 0 (S10504 in FIG. 321: Yes), the time saving end condition is established, so the normal state is set as the game state (S10507 in FIG. 321). . In addition, the seventh control example sets a plurality of time saving end conditions for ending the time saving state, and even if any of the time saving end conditions are satisfied (for example, time saving end based on the number of special symbol fluctuations Even if the condition is satisfied), the value of the counter is set (reset) to 0 (S10606 in FIG. 319). Thus, among the plurality of time-saving end conditions, even if the time-saving end conditions other than the time-saving end conditions (second time-saving end conditions) referring to the value of the small hit A counter 203m are met, the small hit A counter Since the value of 203m is set to 0 (reset), it is possible to suppress the situation where the process of subtracting the value of the small hit A counter 203m is continued even though the time saving state has ended. In addition, even if any of the time-saving end conditions are satisfied, the values of various counters used to determine whether the time-saving end condition is satisfied when ending the time-saving state are set to the initial value (0). Since it is configured as above, it is possible to prevent the processing after the time saving state from being complicated.

The small hit B counter 203fh is a counter for measuring the number of winning times of the small hit in which the small hit B is set as the small hit type until one of the time saving end conditions set during the time saving state is satisfied, In the jackpot control process (S11504 in FIG. 326), when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending production (end timing of the jackpot) (S11612 in FIG. 326: Yes), the value defined in the time reduction grant 7 table 202fe (3) is set (S11614 in FIG. 326).

Then, the small hit of the small hit this time in the small hit time saving update process (S10405 of FIG. 321) executed in the small hit start setting process (S10223 of FIG. 320) of the special symbol variation process 7 (S10104 of FIG. 315) When it is determined that the winning type is a small winning B (S10510 in FIG. 321: Yes), the value of the counter is decremented by one. If it is determined that the value of the small hit B counter 203fh after subtraction is 0 (S10512 in FIG. 321: Yes), the time saving end condition is satisfied, so the normal state is set as the game state (S10507 in FIG. 321) . In addition, the seventh control example sets a plurality of time saving end conditions for ending the time saving state, and even if any of the time saving end conditions are satisfied (for example, time saving end based on the number of special symbol fluctuations Even if the condition is satisfied), the value of the counter is set (reset) to 0 (S10606 in FIG. 319). Thus, among the plurality of time-saving end conditions, even if the time-saving end conditions other than the time-saving end conditions (third time-saving end conditions) referring to the value of the small hit B counter 203fh are met, the small hit B counter Since the value of 203fh is set to 0 (reset), it is possible to suppress the situation where the process of subtracting the value of the small winning B counter 203fh is continued even though the time saving state has ended. In addition, even if any of the time-saving end conditions are satisfied, the values of various counters used to determine whether the time-saving end condition is satisfied when ending the time-saving state are set to the initial value (0). Since it is configured as described above, it is possible to prevent the process from becoming complicated after the time saving state is ended.

Next, referring to FIG. 311(a), the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example will be described. FIG. 311(a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the seventh control example. As shown in FIG. 311(a), the ROM 222 of the seventh control example has a pullback mode selection table 222da and a suggestion mode selection table, which are different from the ROM 222 of the fifth control example (see FIG. 249(a)). 222db is deleted and a lottery result notification mode selection table 222fa is added. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The lottery result notification mode selection table 222fa is a data table that is referred to when determining the performance mode of the variation performance that is executed corresponding to the variation time of the special symbol variation, and the result of the special symbol lottery (of the jackpot determination One mode is selected from a plurality of modes as a mode for suggesting (announcing) the determination result and the determination result of the time-saving winning determination. This lottery result notification mode selection table 222fa is a special figure 1 effect mode setting process 7 for setting the effect mode of the variable effect (special figure 1 variable effect) for indicating the result of the first special symbol lottery (Fig. (see S14893) (see S19502 in FIG. 328).

Here, with reference to FIG. 312, the contents defined in the lottery result notification mode selection table 222fa will be described. FIG. 312 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the lottery result notification mode selection table 222fa. As shown in FIG. 312, the lottery result notification mode selection table 222fa defines different lottery result notification modes corresponding to the game state at the time of the big win determination, the big win determination result, and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f. A performance mode for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is set using the selected notification mode.

Specifically, when the game state at the time of the jackpot determination is the normal state, that is, when the time-saving winning determination in the special symbol lottery does not win, and the jackpot determination result is "jackpot A (15R jackpot)" The value of the acquired production counter 223f is defined as “suggestion of winning time + jackpot winning notification” for the range of “0 to 64”, and “suggestion of time saving non-winning” to the range of “65 to 79” + Jackpot non-winning notification” is defined, and “jackpot winning notification” is defined for the range of “80 to 99”. In addition, when the jackpot determination result is "jackpot B, C (5R jackpot)", the value of the acquired production counter 223f is defined as "short-time winning suggestion + jackpot winning notification" for the range of "0 to 4". A "jackpot winning notification" is stipulated for the range of "5 to 99". If the jackpot determination result is "out", the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is "0 to 98", "jackpot non-winning notification" is defined, and the value of "99" is " Short-time non-winning suggestion + jackpot non-winning notification” is stipulated.

On the other hand, if the game state at the time of the jackpot determination is a time-saving state, that is, if the time-saving winning determination in the special symbol lottery is successful, and the jackpot determination result is "jackpot A, D (15R jackpot)", obtain The value of the production counter 223f is defined in the range of ``0 to 89'', ``suggestion of time saving + jackpot winning notification'', and ``jackpot winning notification'' is defined in the range of ``90 to 99''. ing. In addition, when the jackpot determination result is "jackpot B, C (5R jackpot)", the value of the obtained production counter 223f is defined as "suggestion of short-time winning + jackpot winning notification" for the range of "0 to 79". A "jackpot winning notification" is stipulated for the range of "80 to 99". If the jackpot determination result is "out", the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is defined in the range of "0 to 9" with "shorter winning suggestion + jackpot non-winning notification", and "10 to 99". "Jackpot non-winning notification" is defined for the value of.

Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 311(b). As shown in FIG. 311(b), the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, and an effect counter 223e. , Game state storage area 223f, time saving information update area 223g, temporary hit determination flag 223h, temporary time saving information update area 223i, temporary time saving end flag 223j, time saving lower limit flag 223k, semi-end condition flag 223m, time saving before end fluctuation flag 223n, At least a state effect counter 223o and a memory area 223z are provided.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), each of which stores winning information. Based on the information stored in the prize winning information storage area 223a, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the lottery result of the reserved ball and the like before the change starts. Winning information based on the winning information command transmitted from the main controller 110 is stored in the winning information storage area 223a when the winning command processing of the sound lamp control device 113 (see S4212 in FIG. 177) is executed. The winning information command transmitted from the main controller 110, which is stored in order from area 1, is set when the prefetching process 5 (S653 in FIG. 259) of the main controller 110 is executed, and the main controller It is transmitted to the sound lamp controller 113 by the external output process (S11501 in FIG. 325) executed in the main process 7 of 110 (see FIG. 325).

Each winning information stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a is displayed one by one each time the variable display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed. It is shifted (the winning information stored in the second area is transferred to the first area) (see S4904 and S4908 in FIG. 182). As a result, when the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information command transmitted from the main controller 110 is executed, the sound lamp controller 113 side can surely grasp.

In addition, since it is possible to shift the winning information (prefetch information of special symbols) transmitted by the winning information command to the execution area (area corresponding to the special symbol variation currently being executed), for example, winning Based on the reception of the information command, production using the period from the start timing of the special symbol variation to be executed next to the timing until the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information command ends (so-called look-ahead continuous effect), the winning information corresponding to the winning information command can be held until the aforementioned look-ahead continuous effect ends.

In the seventh control example, up to four pieces of winning information (information that can be acquired when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64) can be retained and stored, so the winning information storage area 223a executes In addition to the area, it is configured to have the first area to the fourth area. information) can also be retained and stored, the winning information storage area 223a includes four areas (reserved information areas) for the first special symbol and a second area for the second special symbol in addition to the execution area. It may be configured to provide four areas (reserved information areas).

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, like the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, is a variable effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81) It is a variable display), and is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the variable effect suspended in the main controller 110 up to four times. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from main controller 110 .

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110 and cannot acquire the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main controller 110, and the first special symbol is reserved by the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. It is designed to manage the number of balls.

Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of pending balls for variable display is added by entering the first ball entrance 64, or when main controller 110 executes variable display in the special symbol. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203 d after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 .

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 is acquired from the reserved ball number command. , stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b (see S4182 in FIG. 262). Thus, in the voice lamp control device 113, according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, since the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is updated, the first special symbol of the main controller 110 The value can be updated while synchronizing with the reserved ball number counter 203d.

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number symbols in the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, and stores the first special symbol reserved after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the number of balls counter 223b, a command for the number of reserved balls for display is transmitted to the display control device 114. FIG.

When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 is reserved. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of balls pattern is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81. FIG. As described above, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of pending ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol pending ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. FIG. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

The information contained in the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller may be the actual number of reserved balls, that is, the information indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a, or the special symbol reserved ball number counter. Information indicating that the value of 203a has been incremented or decremented by one may be used. When transmitting information indicating that the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203a has been incremented or decremented by 1 as the reserved ball number command, It is sufficient to provide a calculation means for calculating and managing the current number of reserved balls based on the information received.

The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S4204 in FIG. 262), and is turned off when the fluctuation display in the third symbol display device 81 is set. (See S4902 and S4906 in FIG. 182). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, a fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 Main processing 7 (see FIG. 325) External output processing (S11501 in FIG. 325) , and is transmitted to the display control device 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command is used to perform the variation display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S4207 in FIG. 262), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S4910 in FIG. 182). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, a stop type for display is set based on the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command (S4911 in FIG. 182).

The effect counter 223e is a counter used for lottery when determining the effect contents of various effects executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and although not shown, the sound lamp control device 113 is updated each time the main process 7 (see FIG. 325) executed by the MPU 221 is executed. In the seventh control example, the effect counter 223e has a plurality of loop counters (for example, counters that are repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 99), and the values of each counter are configured to be updated without synchronization. ing.

Specifically, for example, a plurality of counters having different values updated every time the main process 7 (see FIG. 325) is executed are provided so that the updated values of the counters are not synchronized. Furthermore, another value may be calculated by calculating the value of each counter, and the calculated value may be used as a value used in lottery when determining the content of various effects.

The game state storage area 223f is an area for storing the game state corresponding to the state command when a state command regarding the game state is received from the main controller 110. FIG. By referring to the information (game state) stored in the game state storage area 223f, the current game state can be identified on the sound lamp control device 113 side.

In the seventh control example, the data in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is erased when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. The information indicating the current game state that has been played is also erased. However, in the seventh control example, the state command is set in the start-up process (main controller) 7 (see FIG. 324) of the main controller 110 that is executed after the power is turned on (S11412 in FIG. 324). After that, the information indicating the game state set before the power shutdown is immediately stored in the game state storage area 223f. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the game state can always be identified on the sound lamp control device 113 side. Also, when the game state is variably set in the main controller 110, a state command indicating the game state after the variable setting is set (S10509 in FIG. 321, S10607 in FIG. 319, S11616 in FIG. 326, etc.). .

The time saving information update area 223g is the end condition of the time saving state, the progress status for each end condition (the number of times that the event targeted by the end condition (for example, the fluctuation of the special symbol, the small hit, and the big win) was executed) And is a data area for storing A state (situation) display mode Dm3a to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is selected based on the information stored in the time saving information update area 223a (end condition and progress of the time saving state). This time saving information update area 223g determines the end timing of the ending production in the time saving related command including the time saving setting information from the main control device 110, that is, the main control device 110 jackpot control processing 7 (S11504 in FIG. 326) ( S11612 in Figure 326), when the end condition of the time saving state is set (S11614 in Figure 326) When the time saving setting information command set is received, the end condition for ending this time saving state is set .

Then, in the time saving update process (see S2216 in FIG. 60) of the voice lamp control device 113, update information for updating the time saving information (variation information for indicating that the special symbol variation has been executed, and winning a small hit When it is determined that the small hit information for indicating that it has been received (S2604 in FIG. 60: Yes, S2615 in FIG. 60: Yes), the current time saving situation is updated in correspondence with the received update information .

To specifically explain the data area in the time saving information update area 223g, in the time saving information update area 223g, each item that can be the ending condition of the time saving state (for example, the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol, the second special The number of fluctuations in the design, the total number of fluctuations obtained by adding the number of fluctuations in the first special design and the number of fluctuations in the second special design, the number of winnings for each small hit type (small hits A, B) (the operation of the V winning device 600 It is formed so that information can be temporarily stored corresponding to the number of times it started), the number of winnings of the small win (total number of winnings by summing the number of winnings of each type of small win), etc.), and for each item, Stores time-saving setting information (the number of times the conditions for ending the time-saving state are satisfied) and update information for each item during the period when the time-saving state is continuously set (information indicating the number of times it was actually executed). configured to be

In the seventh control example, by using the information stored in the time saving information update area 223g, the end condition that is more likely to be satisfied than other end conditions is determined from among a plurality of end conditions, and each end condition is satisfied. It is configured to determine the number of remaining executions until the execution. Furthermore, using the time saving setting information and update information stored in the time saving information update area 223g, for example, the ratio of the value indicated by the update information to the value indicating the end condition of each item included in the time saving setting information is calculated, It may be configured to display the progress degree of time saving by a numerical value (for example, percentage).

In addition, in the seventh control example, the information stored in the time saving information update area 223g is configured to store update information (information indicating the number of times already executed (number of fluctuations, number of winnings)). Without being limited to this, it may be configured to calculate the remaining number of times until the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied, and to store information indicating the calculated remaining number of times in the time saving information update area 223g.

As described above, in the seventh control example, the time saving setting information and the update information are configured to be stored (stored) separately, but not limited to this, for example, the time saving setting information. It may be configured to update the information directly. By comprising in this way, the capacity|capacitance of 223 g of time saving information update areas can be reduced.

The provisional winning determination flag 223h is a flag for indicating that the winning information (the stored winning information) before the lottery (fluctuation) of the special symbol is executed includes the winning information for winning the jackpot. When it is set to ON, it indicates that the stored winning information includes the winning information for winning a jackpot. This tentative hit determination flag 223h is set in the winning information related process executed when the audio lamp control device 113 side receives the winning information command acquired in the look-ahead process 5 of the main controller 110. is set to ON when it is determined that there is winning information in the winning information of the winning information command received from. Then, when it is determined that it is referred to in the winning information related process and set to ON, various determination processes for the subsequently received winning information command are skipped. It is also referred to in the effect setting process executed in the variable display setting process, and when it is determined that it is set to ON, the process for setting the display state display command indicating the state display mode is skipped. It is configured as follows.

As explained above, if the winning information included in the received winning information command or the winning information retained and stored at the end of the jackpot includes the winning information for winning the jackpot, After that, it is determined whether the winning information contained in the newly received winning information command includes winning information for winning a jackpot, and whether or not the condition for ending the currently set game state is satisfied. It is configured not to perform discrimination. In other words, if it is determined that the time saving state ends due to winning the jackpot, it is not necessary to determine whether the currently set time saving state ends based on the prize information acquired after that. , configured to skip its unnecessary processing. Therefore, the processing load of the processing executed by the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

In addition, in the seventh control example, the processing for determining the contents of the winning information is executed when a new winning information command is received and when the jackpot game ends. As, for example, after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off due to power failure etc., in the start-up process (main controller) 7 (see FIG. 324) of the main controller 110, in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a A winning prize information command at the time of returning is set to indicate each stored winning information, and is configured to transmit all to the sound lamp control device 113, and the winning prize information command at the time of returning is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 side. It may be configured to execute the process of determining the content of the prize information described above when the information is received.

In addition, in the seventh control example, when a new prize information command is received or when a jackpot game ends, the processing for determining the contents of the prize information is always executed, but this is not the only option. Instead, it may be configured so that the content of the winning information is not determined when a predetermined prohibition condition is satisfied. In this case, as the predetermined prohibition conditions, for example, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of performance modes, the performance mode prohibition condition that is established when one of the performance modes is set, or the special symbol Plural special pattern variations based on the big hit lottery result (win/fail judgment result) included in the winning information and the condition for prohibition of being stuck when the lottery result is a predetermined number of times (for example, 500 times) in succession other than the big hit (loss) During the continuous performance prohibited condition that is established while the continuous performance that is executed across is being executed, and a predetermined period after the continuous performance is completed (for example, the special symbol fluctuation is executed twice) It is recommended to set a condition for prohibiting multiple occurrences, etc., which is satisfied during the period until

By configuring in this way, it is possible to set a period in which an effect (so-called prefetch effect) corresponding to the content determined in advance based on the winning information can be executed and a period in which it cannot be executed. Even if the look-ahead performance is not executed for the player, the expectation for the big win can be maintained. It should be noted that the frequency of determining the content of the winning information may be reduced when the above-mentioned prohibition condition is satisfied, or the content of the winning information may be determined without fail when the prohibition condition is not satisfied. Instead of determining, the frequency of determining the contents of the winning information may be increased. Further, it is preferable that the player does not know whether or not the prohibition condition described above is satisfied.

The provisional working hours information update area 223i is a data area for temporarily storing working hours information (temporary working hours information) updated in advance according to the winning information included in the winning information command. In the seventh control example, by referring to the provisional working hours information stored in this provisional working hours information update area 223i, the timing at which the working hours saving state ends can be determined in advance.

As described above, if the winning information included in the winning information command received satisfies the time-saving end condition, the winning information included in the winning information command newly received after that will be a big hit. It is configured so as not to determine whether winning prize information is included or whether or not the condition for ending the currently set game state is satisfied. In other words, if it is determined that the time saving state ends due to winning the jackpot, it is not necessary to determine whether the currently set time saving state ends based on the winning information acquired after that. , configured to skip its unnecessary processing. Therefore, the processing load of the processing executed by the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

The time saving lower limit flag 223k is a flag for indicating that the number of fluctuations in the special symbol has reached a predetermined number with respect to the end condition established based on the number of fluctuations in the special symbol, and is set to ON. , It is for showing that the number of times of variation of the special symbols in the time saving state has reached a predetermined number of times.

In this way, by providing a flag that is set to ON according to the progress until the time saving end condition is satisfied, and by configuring so as to vary the performance mode according to the setting state of the flag, Therefore, it is possible to predict the timing when the time saving end condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the presentation suggesting the end timing of the time saving state.

In addition, in the seventh control example, the progress until the time saving end condition is satisfied is configured to be determined in two stages, but more stages may be provided. In this case, for example, a flag (counter) that can identify the state is provided every time the variation of the special symbol is executed 10 times in the state where the time saving state is set, and the production mode is changed according to the flag (counter). It should be configured to be variable.

The quasi-end condition flag 223m is a flag for indicating that the number of fluctuations of special symbols has reached a predetermined number of times with respect to the end conditions established based on the winning of a small prize by lottery of special symbols, and is turned on. is set to indicate that the number of fluctuations of the special symbols in the time saving state has reached a predetermined number.

The time saving before end fluctuation flag 223n is a flag for indicating that the change before the time saving state ends (the time saving end condition is satisfied) is executed, and when it is set to ON, the time saving state ends This indicates that the previous variation to be executed will be executed. Specifically, among the end conditions of the time saving state that are set multiple times, when the period until the time saving end condition set based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is satisfied (number of fluctuations) is 1 time remaining set to on. By executing the variation display setting process (see FIG. 182) in a state where the time saving end before variation flag 223n is set to ON, the variation can be determined as the final variation of the time saving state, and the time saving state A production corresponding to the final variation can be executed.

In addition, in the seventh control example, in order to determine that the variation before the time saving ends is completed (executed), the time saving before end change flag 223n is set, but in addition to that, For example, a configuration is provided in which the winning prize information of the second special symbol can be retained and stored, and the prefetching process 5 (see FIG. 259) is configured to be executed even for the retained winning prize information, and the result of the prefetching process is configured to receive a winning command indicating , and based on the received winning command, the winning information of the second special symbol for winning a small hit is determined in advance. Then, based on the result of the preliminary determination, when the variation before the special symbol variation in which the small hit winning that the end condition of the time saving state is established is performed is performed, the time saving before end variation flag 223n is turned on. configuration can be added. Thus, in a gaming machine having a plurality of time saving end conditions, it is possible to reliably determine the special symbol variation immediately before the time saving end condition is established.

The state effect counter 223o is a counter used for various lotteries used when setting the effect mode of various effects executed by the sound lamp control device 113. Although not shown, the sound lamp control device 113 It is updated by one each time the main process executed by the MPU 221 is executed. The state effect counter 223o is composed of the same loop counter as the effect counter 223e described above. A detailed configuration is omitted because it is the same as the effect counter 223e described above.

In this way, in the case of selecting a specific display mode according to specific regularity (results of determination of suitability, setting status of various flags), selection is made based on a randomly updated value (value of the state effect counter 223o). By configuring so as to further classify the display mode to be displayed in detail, along with diversification of the display mode, the current game state by the selected display mode (the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81) It is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping (the update status of the time saving state).

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 313, the game flow of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example will be described. FIG. 313 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game flow of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example. As shown in FIG. 313, the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example, as described above, during the normal state (during the normal state), the left-handed game is performed and the first ball entrance 64 is aimed at the special 1 (special figure) 1) A game is executed. Here, when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the first special symbol lottery is executed, first, determination of time-saving winning is performed. Then, when it is determined that the short-time winning is not determined in the determination of the short-time winning, the jackpot determination of the first special symbol lottery is executed while the game state is the normal state. When the first special symbol jackpot is won in the normal state, the game state shifts to a different game state after the jackpot ends depending on the type of the jackpot won.

Specifically, when the jackpot type of the winning jackpot is jackpot C (50% of the total), the normal state is set again after the jackpot ends, and when the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B, the jackpot ends. Later, it shifts to a time-saving game state (time-saving state), which is a game state more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

In the normal state, a ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 and a lottery for the second special symbol is executed, and if a big win is won, the normal state is set as the game state after the big win is completed. It consists of This is because, as described above with reference to FIG. 295, the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example is in a normal state (during a normal game), even if a right-handed game is played, a ball enters the second ball entrance 640. Since it is configured so as not to (hardly) to do so, the act of executing the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state is regarded as a fraudulent act, and the player who has committed the fraudulent act is made to play an advantageous game. This is a measure to prevent As will be described later, in the seventh control example, a lottery (game) in which the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery is configured to be performed during the time saving state. Therefore, there is a risk that the second special symbol lottery may be conducted by cheating. Therefore, by taking the measures described above, it is possible to suppress the lottery for the second special symbol from being performed due to fraud.

Furthermore, in the seventh control example, since there is no configuration for holding and storing the winning information of the second special symbol (the winning information acquired when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640), for example, Winning information of the second special symbol is retained and stored during the time-saving state (while the electric accessory 640a is likely to be moved to the projecting position), and based on the retained and stored winning information, the second special symbol during the normal state is stored. A lottery (fluctuation) is never executed. As a result, when a normal game is played, it is possible to reliably prevent the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol from being executed in a state where the normal state is set as the game state.

On the other hand, if the time reduction is won in the first special symbol lottery that is executed with the normal state set (if it is determined that the time reduction is elected by the judgment of the time reduction election), the jackpot judgment is executed in the time reduction state. be done. When the jackpot is won in the jackpot determination executed in this state, the time saving state is set at a rate of 100% after the jackpot game ends. In addition, when the time reduction election is determined by the determination of the time reduction election executed in the first special symbol lottery, the time reduction state ends at the timing when the first special symbol variation for showing the result of the first special symbol lottery is started. However, since the normal state is set, the game in the normal state (left-handed game) is continued.

When the time saving state is set based on the fact that the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, the second ball entrance 640 is easily opened by the opening operation (projection operation) of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640. Since the time-saving state is set so that the time-saving state continues for a period in which the ball can be entered, a right-handed game is performed and a special 2 game aiming at the second ball entrance 640 is performed.

Here, when a small win is won (winning probability 140/1000) by the lottery of the second special symbols, the V winning device 650 is opened as a small winning game, and the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650 is turned on. is detected (by the ball passing through the specific area), a jackpot game is started. In the seventh control example, when the big winning game is set (executed) via the small winning game, after the big winning game ends, the time saving state is always set as the gaming state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player who has won the big win via the small winning game from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, in the seventh control example, the ball passes through the specific area during the small winning game according to the small winning type (small winning A, B) set when winning the small winning by lottery of the second special symbol. It is configured to execute small winning games with different possibilities (possibility of V switch 650e3 detecting a ball).

In addition, in the seventh control example, as an end condition (time-saving end condition) for ending the time-saving state set based on the jackpot election, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) (lottery number of times ) is established when the number of fluctuations reaches the specified number of fluctuations (100 times) (1st time saving end condition) and special design (2nd special design) As a result of the lottery, the number of winnings won in the small hit ( An operation count end condition (second time reduction end condition) that is established when the number of operations of the V winning device 650 operated based on the small hit reaches the specified number of operations is set.

In addition, the second time-saving end condition is further configured to be set according to a small winning type (small winning game to be executed) set when winning a small winning.

Then, in the state (situation) where the time saving state is set, before the first time saving end condition or the second time saving end condition is satisfied, the special symbol jackpot lottery is elected (per type Winning), or winning a small win in a lottery of special patterns, and passing a ball through a specific area during a small winning game according to the winning small win (small winning game according to the small winning type) to win a big win. When acquired (acquired per 2 types), the time saving state is repeatedly set.

On the other hand, in the state (situation) in which the time saving state is set, the first time saving end condition (end condition according to the number of special symbol fluctuations) or the second before acquiring one type or two types When any of the time-saving end conditions (end condition corresponding to small winning (operation of V winning device 650)) is satisfied, the game state is shifted (set) from the time-saving state to the normal state.

The pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example configured in this way has the possibility of terminating the time saving state when a small win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol executed when the time saving state is set. It is possible to provide the player with both (the possibility that the second time-saving end condition is satisfied) and the possibility of obtaining two kinds of wins. Therefore, the player's interest in the game (lottery for the second special symbol) to be executed during the time saving state can be heightened, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in the seventh control example, as shown in FIG. 313, when the time saving state is set and the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the time saving state is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. It is configured as follows. By configuring in this way, the state in which the normal state is set as the game state, that is, the state in which the left-handed game is performed, the number of reserved balls (number of reserved memories) of the first special symbol is the upper limit. A jackpot is won when the number is four (4), and a jackpot is won in ``first special symbol variation (lottery) during the time saving state'' that can be executed when the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends. Even so, it is possible to suppress providing the player with a result that is disadvantageous to the player.

<Regarding control processing executed by main controller 110 in the seventh control example>
Next, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 314 to 327. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, main processing 7 that is executed after the startup processing, and startup processing that is started periodically (every 2 milliseconds in the seventh control example). and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. The raising process (main controller) 7 and the main process 7 will be explained. Of the control processes executed by main controller 110 in the seventh control example, the same processing contents as those of the above-described fifth control process are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

314 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. FIG. Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S10101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S10102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999 in the seventh control example). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the seventh control example), it is cleared to 0, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. The value is stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203 .

Furthermore, the value of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second per random number counter C4, the small per type counter C5, the time saving type selection counter CC1 (not shown) Update Execute (S10103). Specifically, the value of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second per random number counter C4 and the small per type counter C5, the time reduction type selection counter CC1 (not shown) are incremented by 1, and are cleared to 0 when their counter values reach their maximum values (999, 99, 99, 239, and 99, respectively, in the seventh control example). Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C5 and CC1 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process 7 for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S10104). . After that, the starting winning process associated with winning (starting winning) to the first ball entrance 64 is executed (S10105). The details of the special symbol variation process 7 will be described later with reference to FIG.

After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is the process for performing display on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S10106), and the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 accompanies the passage of the ball. Through gate passage processing is executed (S10107). It should be noted that the detailed contents of the start winning process (S10105), the normal symbol variation process (S10106), and the through gate passage process (S10107) are the starting winning process, normal symbol variation process, and , through-gate passage processing, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. After executing the through gate passing process (S10107), the V entrance passing process accompanying the ball entering the V winning device 650 is executed (S10108). After that, the V passing process accompanying the winning to the V winning switch (V switch) 650e3 of the V winning device 650 is executed (S10109). Details of the V entrance passage processing and the V passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 322 and 323. FIG.

Next, the firing control process is executed (S10110), and other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S10111), and the timer interrupt process ends. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is the process of deciding on/off of firing. Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 315, special symbol variation processing 7 (S10104) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 315 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process 7 (S10104). This special symbol variation process 7 (S10104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 314), and the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the third This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third pattern performed in the pattern display device 81 and the like.

In this special symbol variation process 7 (S10104), first, it is determined whether or not the present is in the midst of a special symbol jackpot (S10201). During the special symbol jackpot includes a period during which the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81 display the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game). A period indicating the start of the jackpot game (opening period), a period during the jackpot game (round game period), and a round game period are completed, and then a lottery (fluctuation) of new special symbols is started. and a grace period (ending period).

Here, in order to determine whether or not the current jackpot is in progress, specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203k is set to ON. As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the middle of the jackpot (the flag 203k is set to ON) (S10201: Yes), this processing is finished as it is.

If it is not during the special symbol jackpot, that is, if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203k is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S10201: No), the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b It is determined whether or not the display mode is fluctuating (S10202), and if the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are not fluctuating (S10202: No), the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d The value (N1) and the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e are obtained (S10203).

Then, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S10204). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S10204: Yes), that is, if the second special symbol reserved ball for starting the variation (lottery) is secured. , the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted (S10205), and a reserved ball number command (special figure 2 pending ball number command) is set (S10206). After setting the special figure 2 reserved ball number command by the processing of S10206, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S10207). After that, time-saving lottery processing 7 (S10208), special symbol determination processing 7 (S10209), and special symbol variation pattern selection processing 7 (S10210) are executed, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S10204: No), the second special symbol reserved ball to start the variation (lottery) at the present time is selected. Since it is not secured, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S10211).

When it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S10211: No), the reserved ball of the first special symbol to start the variation (lottery) at the present time is secured. Since it is not in the state, this processing for executing the special symbol variation is terminated.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S10211: Yes), that is, in a state in which the reserved balls of the first special symbol for starting the variation (lottery) are secured. If there is, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted (S10212), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d changed by calculation ( Toku-zu 1 reserved ball number command) is set (S10213). After setting the special figure 1 reserved ball number command by the processing of S10213, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S10214). After that, time-saving lottery processing 7 (S10208), special symbol determination processing 7 (S10209), and special symbol variation pattern selection processing 7 (S10210) are executed, and this processing ends.

In the process of S10202, if the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are fluctuating (S10202: Yes), whether the variation time of the variation display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b has elapsed It is determined whether or not (S10211). The variation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command). If the variation time has not passed (S10215: No), that is, if the current period is during the variation period of the special symbol, the display of the first symbol display device is updated (S10216), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S10215, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (S10215: Yes), the display mode (stop display) corresponding to the stop symbols of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is set. (S10217). The setting of the stop display is performed in advance by the special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (S10252), which will be described later with reference to FIG. Although detailed description is omitted, in the seventh control example, the stop display set in the process of S10217 is configured to be displayed on the first symbol display device for a predetermined period (0.5 seconds). In this way, by continuously displaying the display mode (stop display) of the stop pattern for a predetermined period, unlike the case where the changing pattern is displayed momentarily, the first display is surely stop-displayed to the player. The contents of the design can be recognized.

In the seventh control example, 0.5 seconds is set as the predetermined period (determined period) for displaying the stop mode of the first symbol described above, but other configurations may be used, such as the first symbol. In the case of performing a blinking display that repeats the lighting state and the erased state to indicate that the is changing, the lighting display period (for example, 0.2 seconds) is longer A long period may be set as the fixed period described above. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to easily determine whether the first symbol is fluctuating or stopped (determined).

After the process of S10217 is completed, when the variable display of the special symbol being executed in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is started, the special symbol determined by the special symbol determination process 7 (see S10209 in FIG. 317) It is determined whether or not the symbol lottery result (this determination result) is a special symbol jackpot (S10218). When it is determined that the lottery result of this time is a special symbol jackpot (S10218: Yes), the jackpot start flag 203j and the jackpot medium flag 203k are set to ON (S10219), and the time reduction counter 203h is set to 0. (S10220), the process proceeds to S10221. In the process of S10221, a special figure confirmation command is set (S10221), and this process is terminated.

That is, in the seventh control example, as explained in the process of S10220, when the special symbol jackpot is won, after the special symbol variation is completed (the final symbol display is completed), It is configured so that the time saving state ends at the timing until the jackpot game is started. In addition, the timing of ending the time saving state based on the winning of the special symbol jackpot may be a predetermined timing, and as in the above-described seventh control example, the special symbol (first symbol ), for example, the time-saving state may be ended at the timing of the start of fluctuation of the special symbols that won the jackpot, or at the timing when the special symbols are stopped and displayed (the timing when the confirmation display starts). You may end the time saving state. In addition, the time saving state may be ended at the timing of starting the jackpot game corresponding to the winning jackpot or after a predetermined period of time after the start of the jackpot game (for example, the round game start timing at which the variable winning device 65 is opened). Then, the time saving state may be terminated at the timing when the jackpot game is completed.

In addition, the end timing for ending the time saving state based on the winning of the special symbol jackpot (timing to satisfy the time saving end condition that is established when the special symbol jackpot is won) is selected from the above-mentioned multiple timings. Only one may be set in advance, or the time saving state may be terminated at different timings according to the jackpot type of the winning jackpot.

By configuring in this way, for example, when the time saving state is ended at the timing of starting the fluctuation of the special symbol, the time saving state ends for the player (for example, the number of times the special symbol fluctuates is the specified number of times ( It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the normal state is set after reaching 100 times or the time saving state is ended by winning a jackpot during the time saving state. Therefore, the player can pay attention to the content of the performance display (variation display) of the third pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation executed when the time saving state ends, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, by setting the timing at which the time-saving end condition is satisfied for each of the multiple jackpot types (the timing at which the time-saving state ends when the jackpot is won), a special pattern based on the end timing of the time-saving state It is possible to prevent the player from grasping the lottery result (determination result). In addition, if the player identifies the timing when the time saving state ends in part of the timing when the time saving end condition set for each of the multiple jackpot types is satisfied, the lottery result (discrimination result) of this special symbol will be A timing for notifying a player of a big win, that is, a time-saving end timing dedicated to a big win at which a time-saving state ends only when a time-saving end condition established by winning a big win is established may be provided.

By configuring in this way, by grasping the timing at which the time saving state ends, it is possible to quickly know that the jackpot has been won, and the period of being immersed in a sense of superiority can be lengthened. In addition, in order to achieve such an effect more, the time saving end timing dedicated to the jackpot is set in the first half period of the variation period from the execution of the special symbol variation to the end of the special symbol variation. Good to configure.

On the other hand, in the process of S10218, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big win (S10218: No), it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small win (S10222). In the process of S10222, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a small hit (S10222: Yes), a small win start setting process 7 is executed (S10223), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S10222, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit (S10222: No), the small win start setting process 7 (S10223) is skipped, and this process ends.

As described above, in the special symbol variation process 7 (S10104 in FIG. 315) of the seventh control example, priority is given to the presence or absence of the lottery (variation) condition of the first special symbol (first), It is configured to determine whether or not the lottery (fluctuation) condition for the second special symbol is established (processing of S10204 in FIG. 315). This is because the second special symbol, which is an advantageous special symbol for the player, can be varied (easily varied) when the time-saving state is set as the game state, and cannot be varied (easily changed) when the normal state is set. This is because the second special symbol that is difficult to change) is configured to be a special symbol that is more difficult to execute a change (lottery) than the first special symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, in the unlikely event that the lottery (variation) condition for the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) condition for the second special symbol are set at the same time (timer interrupt processing of the main controller 110 (Fig. 314) (including an error of 2 milliseconds, which is the processing period of reference)), the variation of the first special symbol is started in preference to the second special symbol, which is difficult to perform variation (lottery) As a result, the player feels uncomfortable. Furthermore, in the seventh control example, the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol so that it is easier for the player to win the lottery result. ), the lottery (variation) condition for the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) condition for the second special symbol are simultaneous (timer interrupt processing of main controller 110 (see FIG. 314) (including an error of 2 milliseconds, which is the processing period of ), when the variation (lottery) is difficult to execute, the first special symbol is prioritized over the second special symbol. There was a problem that it gave more discomfort.

On the other hand, in the seventh control example, when the process of starting the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed, the value added to the player is high (the winning probability of the small hit is the first special symbol The lottery (variation) condition of the special symbol (the second special symbol in the seventh control example), which is higher than the symbol and is difficult to actually execute the lottery (variation), is configured to be preferentially (firstly) discriminated. Therefore, the occurrence of the above-described problem can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to Drawing 316, processing contents of time saving lottery processing 7 (S10208) are explained. Figure 316 is the flowchart which shows the processing contents of time saving lottery processing 7 (S10208). As shown in FIG. 316, the time saving lottery process 7 (S10208) is the condition for executing the time saving lottery with respect to the time saving lottery process 5 (see S8006 in FIG. 254) in the fifth control example described above, and the time saving lottery. The difference is that the data tables to be referred to when determining the lottery result (whether or not the short-time winning) are different, and the rest are the same. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

When the time saving lottery process 7 (S10208) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a normal state (S18103), and if it is determined that it is not a normal state (is a time saving state) (S18103: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is in the normal state (S18103: Yes), the lottery result (judgment result of time saving winning) is acquired based on the time saving random number 7 table 202fh (S18104), and it is determined whether the time saving has been won ( S18105), if it is determined that the time reduction has been elected (S18105: Yes), 1 is set to the value of the time reduction counter 203h based on the contents defined in the time reduction type selection 7 table 202fi (S18106), and the process ends do. Also, if it is determined that the time reduction has not been elected in the process of S18105 (S18105: No), this process is terminated as it is.

As described above, in the seventh control example, regardless of the special symbol type, the case where the special symbol lottery is performed in the normal state is the execution condition for time-saving winning determination. The pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example is configured to be able to set two types of game states, a normal state and a time saving state. That is, in the seventh control example, in all of the special symbol lottery executed in a state in which the time saving state is not set, it is configured so that the determination of the time saving election is executed. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to play the game while always having the possibility of setting the time saving state.

In addition, as described above, in the seventh control example, when the time saving is won in the special symbol lottery, the time saving state set based on the time saving election is the period during which the big hit determination is performed in the special symbol lottery. Since it is configured so that only the number is set, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether or not the short-time winning is won unless the jackpot is won.

Next, the processing contents of the special symbol determination processing 7 (S10209) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 317 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of special symbol determination processing 7 (S10209). The special symbol determination process 7 (S10209) is a process executed after the time saving lottery process 7 (see S10208 in FIG. 316) is executed in the above-described special symbol variation process 7 (see S10104 in FIG. 315), A process for performing big hit determination (small hit determination) in the special symbol lottery is executed.

As shown in FIG. 317, this special symbol determination process 7 (S10209) is executed when a small hit is determined with respect to the special symbol determination process 5 (see S251 in FIG. 253) in the fifth control example described above. The difference is that the processing for A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted. In addition, in FIG. 317, for convenience of explanation, different reference numerals are assigned to the same processing contents as the above-described special symbol determination processing 5 (see S251 in FIG. 253). The processing contents are the same.

When the special symbol determination process 7 (S10209) is executed, first, the data of the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area is acquired (S10301), and based on the first winning random number 7 table 202fh, the lottery result (big hit (small Win) determination result) is acquired (S10302), and it is determined whether or not the acquired lottery result is a big win (S10303). When it is determined that the jackpot is won (S10303: Yes), the lottery result of the special symbol is set to the jackpot (S10304), and based on the value of the acquired hit type counter (first hit type counter C2), the first The jackpot design of the special design to be displayed on the design display device 37 is set (S10305), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot is not elected in the process of S10303 (S10303: No), then it is determined whether the small hit is elected (S10306), and if it is determined that the small hit is elected (S10306 : Yes), the lottery result of the special design is set to a small hit (S10307), and based on the value of the acquired hit type counter (first hit type counter C2), the special design to be displayed on the first design display device 37 A small winning pattern is set (S10308), and this process is terminated.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, in the processing of S10305 and the processing of S10308, when the time reduction is elected in the special symbol lottery, and when the time reduction is not elected, different winning patterns are set. Configure. That is, on the first pattern display device 37, as a display mode of the special pattern for showing the lottery result of the special pattern lottery, the presence or absence of the time-saving winning and the presence or absence of the winning (big win, small win) are combined. It is configured so that the mode can be set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 318, the special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (S10210) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 318 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (S10210). As shown in FIG. 318, the special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (S10210) is configured to execute the update process 7 (S8253) before setting the start of the special symbol variation. By configuring in this way, the time saving state can be terminated before the special symbol variation is started.

Furthermore, in this seventh control example, after the variation pattern of the special symbol variation for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is selected, until the special symbol variation is actually started, update processing 7 (S8253). configured to run Therefore, since it is possible to select the variation pattern of the special symbol variation for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the game state at the time when the special symbol lottery is executed, the update process 7 ( S8253) is executed, even if the game state is switched, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the current game state by the variation pattern of the special symbol variation to be executed.

Further, even if the special symbol variation is executed after the time saving state is finished, if the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol variation is executed during the time saving state, the variation pattern of the special symbol variation is time saving. Since it can be determined using a data table referred to during the state, for example, in the pachinko machine 10 having a privilege that can be given only based on a special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state, the privilege Dedicated performance can be smoothly executed only by prescribing the dedicated performance for indicating that is given corresponding to the variation pattern of the special pattern variation selected during the time saving state.

It should be noted that, without being limited to this, for example, it is also possible to configure the update process 7 (S8253) to be executed before the process of S8252 in FIG. 318 is executed. By configuring in this way, since it is possible to end the time saving state before selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation, for example, different variation patterns can be selected between the normal state and the time saving state. In the selected pachinko machine 10, it is possible to suppress the determination whether or not the big hit determination of the special symbol lottery is executed during the time saving state based on the selected variation pattern.

When the special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (S10210) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, that is, whether or not a special symbol big hit is set (S8201). . In the processing of S8201, when it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is set (S8201: Yes), the jackpot type is determined by referring to the jackpot type selection 7 table 202fb (see FIG. 306(a)). (S8251), the process proceeds to S8203.

On the other hand, in the process of S8201, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery result is not a big hit (S8201: No), whether or not the special symbol lottery result is a small hit, that is, the special symbol small hit It is determined whether or not it is set (S8209). When it is determined that the small hit of the special symbol is set in the process of S8209 (S8209: Yes), the small hit type is determined with reference to the small hit type selection 7 table 202ff (see FIG. 307) (S8254 ), the process proceeds to S8203.

Also, in the process of S8209, if it is determined that the small hit of the special symbol is not set, that is, the deviation of the special symbol is set (S8209), the process of S8254 is skipped, and the process of S8203 is performed. Transition.

In the processing of S8203, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the special symbol execution area is acquired (S8203). Next, based on the information stored in the game state storage area 203g, the current game state (normal state, time saving state) is specified, and the data table corresponding to the specified game state is read from the variation pattern selection 7 table 202fd. (S8252).

Then, based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 acquired in the process of S8203 and the data table of the variation pattern selection 7 table 202fd (see FIG. 308 (a)) read out in the process of S8252, the variation pattern is selected ( S8205), based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S8205, to set the special figure variation pattern command (S8206). The special symbol variation pattern command set here includes the lottery result of the special symbol lottery and the information indicating the variation time of the special symbol, and the main control device 110 Main processing External output processing Voice lamp control Output to device 113 .

Next, a special figure stop type command indicating a special symbol stop symbol is set (S8207), and update processing 7 is executed (S8253). A detailed description of update processing 7 (S8253) will be given later with reference to FIG. Then, the first symbol display device 37 sets the start of variation of the special symbol (S8208), and ends this process. The special symbol stop type command set in the process of S8207 includes information indicating the type of stop symbol indicating the result of this special symbol variation, that is, the rough type such as reach off or off that does not become reach. It is output to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output processing of the main processing of the main control device 110 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 319, the processing contents of update processing 7 (S8253) executed in special symbol variation pattern selection processing 7 (see S10210 in FIG. 318) will be described. FIG. 319 is a flowchart showing the details of update processing 7 (S8253). In this update process 7 (S8253), similar to the update process 5 (see S253 in FIG. 256) in the fifth control example described above, for updating the information on the end condition for ending the game state (time saving state) Processing, processing for determining whether the updated information satisfies the termination condition, and processing for terminating the game state (time saving state) when it is determined that the termination condition is satisfied are executed.

As shown in FIG. 319, in this seventh control example, since the normal state and the time saving state can be set as the game state, in the update process 7 (S8253), the time saving state is terminated. It is configured to update the information on the time saving end condition and execute the processing based on the updated information. In other words, the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted, it is determined whether the time saving end condition is satisfied, and the process of ending the time saving state based on the determination result (when performing the determination of whether the time saving end condition is satisfied ) is executed to clear the values of various counters referred to.

This update process 7 (S8253) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 315) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 314), updates the number of times of time saving, and changes the game state to the normal state. This is a process for setting to

When the update process 7 (S8253) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0, that is, whether the current time is in the time saving (S10601). In the process of S10601, when the value of the time saving counter 203h is not larger than 0 (is 0), that is, when it is determined that it is not in the time saving (S10601: No), this process is finished as it is. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0, that is, if it is determined that the time saving is in progress (S10601: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted by 1 (S10602), and the process proceeds to S10603.

In the process of S10603, the remaining time reduction command which shows the value of the time reduction counter 203h changed by calculation (1 subtraction was carried out) is set (S10603). The remaining time reduction command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S11501) of the main processing 7 (see FIG. 325) described later, voice lamp control It is sent towards device 113 .

After that, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 (S10604). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 (S10604: Yes), the game state is set to the normal state (S10605), and the small hit A counter 203fg and the small hit B counter 203fh are set to 0 (S10606 ). Next, a state command indicating that the current game state is the normal state is set (S10607), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S10604, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not 0 (S10604: No), this process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 315).

As described above, in the seventh control example, whether or not the time saving end condition (change number end condition) established based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is established is determined by the update process 7 (see FIG. 319), Whether or not the time-saving end condition (winning times end condition) established based on the number of winning times of the special symbol winning is configured to be determined by the time-saving update process 7 for the small win (see FIG. 321). there is Then, in any process, if any of the time saving end conditions are established among the time saving end conditions that are set, various counters for indicating the update status of the time saving information corresponding to the other time saving end conditions is set to a value (0) for indicating a state in which the time saving end condition is satisfied. Therefore, even when any time saving end condition is satisfied, it is possible to unify the processing contents for ending the time saving state.

In addition, in the seventh control example, in order to indicate the update status of the time saving information corresponding to each time saving end condition, the value indicating each time saving end condition is set to various counters at the timing when the time saving state is set, and each time saving When the time saving information corresponding to the end condition is determined, the value of the various counters is subtracted, and when the subtracted value becomes 0, the corresponding time saving end condition is satisfied. In addition, when the time-saving state is set, the value of various counters is set to 0, and when the corresponding time-saving information is determined, the counter value is incremented by 1, and the counter value after the addition is the time-saving end. You may comprise so that a time saving state may be complete|finished when it discriminate|determines that it is the value which shows conditions. In other words, means for determining whether or not the time-saving end condition is established, and in the state where the time-saving state is set, time-saving information corresponding to various time-saving end conditions (the number of special symbol fluctuations, the number of small winnings, etc.) is updated. It is sufficient if the configuration is provided with updating means.

Next, with reference to FIG. 320, small hit start setting processing 7 (S10223) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 320 is a flow chart showing the small hit start setting process 7 (S10223). This small hit start setting process 7 (S10223) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 315) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 314), and the small hit type (small hit A, B), the start of the small winning game is set, and processing for updating the time saving information according to the winning small winning (update processing for the winning number end condition) is executed.

Here, when a small winning game is started, the pachinko machine 10 changes the V winning device 650 to an open state in which the ball can win (easy), and the winning ball of the V winning device 650 moves to a specific area (V By passing the winning switch (V switch) 650e3), the big winning game is executed (set) after the small winning game is completed.

That is, the game state in which the small winning game is executed is an advantageous state in which the ball can enter the V winning device 650 (a prize ball can be obtained), and the big winning game is executed as compared with the normal game state. It is configured to be in an advantageous state with a high probability. Although the details will be described later, in the seventh control example, different small winning games are executed corresponding to the small winning types (small winning A, B) set when winning the small winning. Possibility of the ball passing through the specific area during the small winning game is different according to each small winning type.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the possibility (expectation) of executing (setting) the big winning game (per two types) by the small winning game to be executed, so that the small winning game for the player Since it is possible to make the player interested not only in whether or not the player wins the prize, but also in the type of the small prize won, the amusement of the game can be improved.

When the small hit start setting process 7 (S10223) is executed, first, an open scenario corresponding to the small hit type is set (S10401). After that, a big hit type corresponding to the small hit type is set in the V passage big hit type storage area 203fd (S10402). More specifically, based on the small hit type and the small hit type selection table 202ff, the V passing big hit type (jackpot game set (executed) when the ball passes through the specific area during the small hit game) is determined. do. As described above, if the small hit type is A, it is determined to be a big hit A (15 rounds with a short time), and if the small hit type is B, it is a big hit B (5 rounds with a short time). Determine (see FIG. 307). That is, in the seventh control example, the contents of the jackpot game (two types of hits) that are set (executed) when the ball passes through the specific area during the small hit game, and the jackpot (one type) by lottery of special symbols In order to execute the same jackpot game as the jackpot game that is executed when winning a win), when winning two types of wins (when a ball passes through a specific area), it is set for one type. It is configured such that the type of jackpot (jackpot A or B) to be executed is set according to the type of small hit.

In this way, when two types of winning are obtained, a jackpot type is set, and a process of starting a jackpot game based on the set jackpot type is executed, thereby winning one type and two types. The processing related to the jackpot game can be shared between the case of winning and the processing, and the processing load of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

In addition, without being limited to the configuration of the seventh control example, a jackpot game that can be executed only when one type is won or only when two types are won may be set. It may be configured to execute different jackpot game processing for winning seeds and winning two seeds.

Returning to FIG. 320, the description continues. When the processing of S10402 is completed, the start of the small hit is then set based on the small hit type (S10403), and the small hit start flag 203fb and the small hit middle flag 203fc are set to ON (S10404). After that, small winning time saving update processing 7 is executed (S10405), and this processing ends. This small winning time saving update process 7 (S10405) is a process for updating the time saving information corresponding to the winning number end condition which is the end condition of the time saving state that can be established when winning a small win, and the time saving information When the conditions for ending the number of wins are satisfied by updating, the processing for shifting the game state from the time-saving state to the normal state, and for the details, refer to FIG. will be described later.

Here, with reference to FIG. 321, the small winning time saving update process 7 (S10405) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 321 is a flow chart showing the contents of the small winning time saving update process 7 (S10405). This small hit time saving update process 7 (S10405) is executed in the small hit start setting process 7 (see Figure 320) of the special symbol variation process 7 (see Figure 315) of the timer interrupt process (see Figure 314) It is a process for updating the time saving information based on the winning small hit, and updating the game state from the time saving state to the normal state when the time saving end condition is satisfied.

In the small winning working hours update process 7 (S10405), first, it is determined whether the value of the working hours counter 203h is greater than 0 (S10501). That is, it is determined whether the current state is the time saving state. In the process of S10501, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S10501: No), since it is a state in which a small hit is won in a game state other than the time saving state, the time saving This processing is entirely skipped in order to update the information, and this processing ends. In addition, in the seventh control example, it is configured so as not to win a small hit (so that the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol is not executed) except in the state where the time saving state is set. When it is determined that the time saving state is not set in the process of S10501, it may be configured to set an error command for executing error notification (abnormality notification).

On the other hand, in the process of S10501, the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0, that is, if it is determined that the time saving state is set (S10501: Yes), then the small hit that was elected this time It is determined whether the small hit type is "small hit A" (S10502). Here, in the process of S10502, the small hit type stored in the small hit type storage area 203fa in the process of S10310 of the special symbol determination process 7 (see FIG. 317) is read out and the determination is performed.

In the processing of S10502, if it is determined that the small hit type of this time is "small hit A" (S10502: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the small hit A counter 203fg (S10503), and the small hit A after subtraction It is determined whether the value of the counter 203fg is 0 (S10504), and if it is determined to be 0 (S10504: Yes), the time-saving end condition (the winning number of times end condition corresponding to the small hit A ) is established, the value of the time-saving counter 203h, which measures the period until the condition for ending the number of fluctuations is established, is set to 0 (S10505), and the conditions for ending the number of winnings are measured. Each value of the A counter 203fg and the small winning B counter 203fh is set to 0 (S10506), and the normal state is set as the game state (S10507).

By executing the processing of S10505 to S10507 described above, when one time saving end condition is satisfied among the time saving end conditions that are set in plural, for measuring the period until the other time saving end condition is satisfied Since the value of the counter can be set to a value indicating that the time saving end condition is satisfied, after the time saving end condition is satisfied (after the normal state is set as the game state), the time saving information is updated. Processing (processing for updating the values of the small winning A counter 203fg, the small winning B counter 203fh, and the time saving counter 203h) can be reliably prevented from being executed. Therefore, execution of unnecessary processing can be suppressed, and the processing load on main controller 110 can be reduced.

In addition, in the seventh control example, when any one of the plurality of time-saving end conditions is met, the values of various counters for updating the time-saving information corresponding to each of the plurality of time-saving end conditions are set to 0. Since it is only configured to be set to (value indicating that the time saving end condition is satisfied), after the time saving state ends, it is determined which time saving end condition was satisfied and ended in the previous time saving state. Although it is not possible, for example, a storage means that can store the satisfied time saving end conditions may be provided, and the type of time saving end conditions that have been met in the past and the number of times they have been met may be configured to be distinguishable.

By configuring in this way, for example, the time-saving end condition that is likely to be established is determined based on the calculation result calculated from the design value and the actual number of establishments, and the player is established based on the determined content. It can be configured to suggest (notify) an easy time-saving end condition. Furthermore, the update status of time saving information corresponding to other time saving end conditions when the time saving end condition of 1 is satisfied (for example, when the value of the time saving counter 203h becomes 0, the small hit A counter 203fg, the small hit B counter 203fh), and the time saving end condition that is most difficult to be satisfied, that is, at the time when one time saving end condition is satisfied among a plurality of time saving end conditions, it has time saving information with the largest value. It may be configured to determine the end condition.

When the processing of S10507 is finished, next, the remaining time reduction command corresponding to the value of each small hit counter that has been subtracted is set (S10508), the state command indicating the current game state is set (S10509), and this processing exit. Here, the commands set in S10508 and S10509 are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S11501) of main processing 7 (see FIG. It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . The voice lamp control device 113 manages the time saving information based on the received remaining time saving command, and sets the state display mode for suggesting (notifying) the time saving situation (period until the time saving state ends). Also, the current game state is grasped based on the received state command.

On the other hand, in the process of S10504, if it is determined that the value of the small hit A counter 203fg is not 0 (S10504: No), since the time saving state does not end by this small hit winning, S10505 for ending the time saving state ∼S10507 is skipped and the process proceeds to S10508.

Returning to the processing of S10502 described above, the description continues. In the process of S10502, when it is determined that the small hit type of the small hit won this time is not "small hit A" ("small hit B") (S10502: No), next, the small hit won this time It is determined whether the small hit type is "small hit B" (S10510), and if it is determined to be "small hit B" (S10510: Yes), the value of the small hit B counter 203fh is subtracted by 1 ( S10511), after that, it is determined whether the subtracted value of the small hit B counter 203fh is 0 (S10512).

In the process of S10512, if it is determined that the value of the small hit B counter 203fh is 0 (S10512: Yes), the time-saving end condition (winning times end condition corresponding to the small hit B) is established in this small hit election. Since it is the case where it did, it transfers to the process of S10505 mentioned above, and performs the process for ending a time saving state.

On the other hand, in the process of S10512, if it is determined that the value of the small hit B counter 203fh is not 0 (1 or more) (S10512: No), the time saving state does not end by this small hit winning, so the time saving state The process of S10505 to S10507 for ending is skipped and the process proceeds to S10508.

In the process of S10510, if the small hit type of the small hit won this time is not "small hit B" (S10510: No), the time saving state does not end due to the small win winning this time, so to end the time saving state The process of S10505 to S10507 is skipped and the process proceeds to S10508.

As described above, in the seventh control example, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol that is won in the small win has passed, the value of the counter corresponding to the small win is subtracted, and the time that is established based on the small win is reduced. It is configured to determine whether or not an end condition (winning number end condition) is established. By configuring in this way, it is possible to terminate the time saving state according to the winning times termination condition before the small winning game is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent occurrence of a large difference in the timing of ending the time saving state even when any of the time saving end conditions of the fluctuation frequency end condition and the winning number end condition are established.

Specifically, in the seventh control example, when the end condition of the number of fluctuations, that is, the time-saving end condition established based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is satisfied, the confirmation display of the special symbol (first symbol) is terminated. When the time-saving end condition is established based on the winning number of times end condition, that is, the number of times a small win is won in a special symbol lottery, the special symbol ( The time saving state is ended at the start setting timing of the small winning game after the confirmation display of the first symbol).

In other words, even if any of the time saving termination conditions are established, the time saving state is terminated immediately after the fluctuation of the corresponding special symbol is stopped. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which time saving end condition has been established and the time saving state set this time has ended. In addition, in order for the player to determine whether or not the time saving state has ended, for example, it is necessary to identify the length of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) and the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a. , For example, by setting to end the time saving state at the time of setting the small hit start (just before the small hitting game is started) as in the seventh control example, the time saving state immediately after the small hitting game is started It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not has ended.

In addition, in the seventh control example, even if any of the end conditions of the number of times of fluctuation end condition and the number of times of winning end condition is satisfied among the plurality of time saving end conditions, substantially the same timing (a degree that the player can hardly distinguish concept including the time difference), but other configurations may be used. The time saving state may be terminated immediately after the confirmation display, and when the condition for ending the winning times is established, the time saving state may be terminated after the small win game executed after the special symbol (first symbol) is confirmed and displayed. good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the time-saving state during the period in which the small winning game is being executed.

Therefore, during the small winning game, the player cannot determine whether the time saving state has ended due to the winning of this small winning game, and until the small winning game ends (whether or not the two types of winning Until the game result is notified), it is possible to make it difficult to understand whether or not the time saving state has ended. Further, as in the seventh control example, in the pachinko machine 10 having a game property capable of obtaining two kinds of wins during the small win game, the player is informed whether or not the time saving state is ended after the small win game is finished. Is it based on the small winning that this small winning game ends the time saving state by configuring like this? Since the game is played while predicting that, it is possible to always aim for two kinds of wins willingly in the small win game executed during the time saving state.

Next, the V entrance passage processing (S10108) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 322 is a flow chart showing the V entrance passing process (S10108) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 314).

In the V entrance passage processing (S10108), first, it is determined whether or not the ball passage sensor (ball detection switch) 650c1 is on (S11101). In the process of S11101, if it is determined that the ball passing sensor 650c1 is not turned on (S11101: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S11101, if it is determined that the ball passage sensor 650c1 is ON (S11101: Yes), it is determined whether or not the V winning opening 650a is open (S11102).

In the process of S11102, when it is determined that the V winning opening 650a is open (S11102: Yes), the V entrance passage command is set (S11103), and this process is terminated. The V entrance passing command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S11501) of the main processing 7 (see FIG. 325). It is sent to the audio lamp controller 113 . Upon receiving the V entrance passage command, the sound lamp control device 113 counts the number of balls that have passed through the V entrance, and transmits a command to the display control device 114 to execute an effect based on the passage of the V entrance. Thereby, it is possible to execute the effect during the small winning game based on the ball entering the V winning device 650 (see FIG. 313).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the V winning port 650a is not open (S11102: No), it means that the ball has entered the V winning device 650 even though it is not a small winning game, so an error command is issued. Set (S11104). After that, the flow path solenoid 209a is turned on (S11105), and the process ends.

Next, the V passage processing (S10109) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 323 is a flowchart showing V passage processing (S10109). This V passing process (S10109) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 314).

In the V passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the V passage flag 203ff is ON (S11201). In the process of S11201, if it is determined that the V passage flag 203ff is ON (S11201: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S11201 that the V passage flag 203ff is not ON (S11201: No), it is determined whether or not there is V passage (S11202). That is, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the V winning switch (V switch) 650e3 of the V winning device 650 or not. In the process of S11202, if it is determined that the vehicle does not pass through the V (S11202: No), the process ends.

In the processing of S11202, if it is determined that there is V passage (S11202: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is during the V passage valid period (S11203). If it is determined that it is during the V passage valid period (S11203: Yes), the V passage jackpot type value stored in the V passage jackpot type storage area 203fd is acquired (S11204), and the acquired V passage jackpot type is obtained. is set to ON (S11205). Then, the V passing command is set (S11206).

Next, the V passage flag 203ff is set to ON (S11207). After that, the time saving counter 203h is set to 0 (S11208), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S11203, if it is determined that it is not during the V passage valid period (S11203: No), an error command is set (S11209), and this process ends. If the game ball passes through the V winning switch (V switch) 650e3 when it is not during the V passing valid period, it is considered that the ball has entered the V winning switch 650e3 illegally. In this case, by setting an error command in the process of S11209, an error is output and fraud can be discovered.

Next, referring to FIG. 324, startup processing (main controller) 7 executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 324 is a flow chart showing this start-up process (main controller) 7. FIG. This start-up process (main controller) 7 is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, initial settings are executed upon power-on (S11401). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, wait processing (1 second in the seventh control example) is executed. (S11402). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S11403).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 121) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S11404), and if it is turned on (S11404: Yes), the process proceeds to S11415. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S11404: No), it is further determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S11405), and if not stored (S11405: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S11405: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S11406). If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off, the backed-up data has been destroyed. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S11515 in FIG. Instead of the RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be judged based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the processing of S11415, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S11415). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing of RAM 203 (S11416, S11417).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S11416, S11417) is executed. Also, if power failure occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization processing (S11416, S11417) is executed in the same way. . In the RAM initialization process (S11416, S11417), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S11416), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S11417). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S11410.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S11404: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S11405: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S11407: Yes), while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203, clear the power failure occurrence information (S11408). Next, the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) transmits a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning to the game state at the time of drive power interruption (S11409), and the process proceeds to S11410. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

In the processing of S11410, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the execution of various effects is permitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. FIG. Next, the value of the time saving counter 203h is read (S11411), and the state command based on the read value is set (S11412). Then, the channel solenoid 209a is turned off (S11413). After that, the interrupt is permitted (S11414), and the process proceeds to main processing 7, which will be described later.

Next, referring to FIG. 325, main processing 7 executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after startup processing (main controller) 7 described above will be described. FIG. 325 is a flow chart showing this main process 7. FIG. In this main process 7, main processes of the game are executed. As an overview, each process of S11501 to S11508 is executed as a periodical process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S11511 and S11512 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process 7 (see FIG. 325), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 are first transmitted to the sub side during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 314). (S11501). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S10101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 314) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of winning balls. Send a prize ball command to In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the special figure 1 pending ball number command set in the special symbol variation processing 7 (see FIG. 315) and the start winning process (see FIG. 161). Furthermore, by this external output processing (S11501), the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third pattern by the third pattern display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Also, the opening command (S11602), round number command (S11607), and ending command set in jackpot control processing 7 (FIG. 326, S11504) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 (S11611). In addition, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112 when the ball is to be launched.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S11502). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the seventh control example). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the updating of the variation type counter CS1 (S11502) is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S11503), and then, in the case of the special symbol jackpot state, the jackpot performance is executed. Or, a jackpot control process for opening or closing the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is executed (S11504). . In jackpot control processing 7 (S11504), the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and the corresponding winning opening is opened. The maximum opening time of (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) has elapsed, or the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or It is determined whether or not a specified number of balls have entered the V winning port 650 a of the V winning device 650 . Then, when any of these conditions are established, the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is closed. The opening and closing of the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In addition, in the seventh control example, the jackpot control process 7 (S11504) is executed in the main process 7 (see FIG. 325), but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 314).

Next, in the case of a small winning state of a special symbol, execution of various effects according to the small winning, corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of first variable winning device 65 or V winning opening of V winning device 650 650a) is executed (S11505). In the small winning control process 7 (S11505), the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is opened based on the opening scenario, and the corresponding winning opening is opened. The maximum opening time of (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) has elapsed, or the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or It is determined whether or not a specified number of balls have entered the V winning port 650 a of the V winning device 650 . Then, when any of these conditions are established, the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is closed. In addition, in the seventh control example, the small hit control process 7 (S11505) is executed in the main process 7 (see FIG. 325), but may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 314).

Next, an electric accessary product opening/closing process for controlling opening/closing of the electric accessary product 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is executed (S11506). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary product is set by the processing of S822 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 163), the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product is started. The open/close control of the electric accessory is continued until the open time and the number of open times set in the process of S821 or S823 in the normal symbol variation process are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b (see FIG. 2) is executed (S11507). In the first symbol display update process (S11507), when the variation pattern is set by the process of S8206 of the special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (see FIG. 318), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol. Start at the display devices 37a, 37b. In the seventh control example, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red The green LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on. If the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. The LED is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

Note that the main process 7 (see FIG. 325) is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. . Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Also, in the first symbol display update process (S11507), when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S8206 of the special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (see FIG. 318) ends, the first symbol display The variable display being executed in the devices 37a and 37b (see FIG. 294) is ended, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped (lighted up) on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b.

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S11508). In the second symbol display update process (S11508), when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S815 or the process of S816 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 163), the second symbol display device 83 varies. Start display. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the second symbol "O" symbol and the "X" symbol are alternately lit. Also, in the second symbol display update process (S11508), when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S818 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 163), in the second symbol display device 83 The variation display being executed is ended, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S812 or S813 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 163). Stop display (lighting display).

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S11509). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing 7 has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in the seventh control example) has elapsed since the start of the main processing 7 this time. (S11510) If the predetermined time has already passed (S11510: Yes), the process proceeds to S11501, and the above-described processes after S11501 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not passed since the start of the main process 7 this time (S11510: No), during the time until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process 7 , the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S11511, S11512).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S11511). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and each counter value is cleared to 0 when it reaches the maximum value (999, 239 in the seventh control example). do. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S11502 (S11512).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S11501 to S11508 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process 7 is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by using the remaining time to repeatedly update the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (S11511), the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI1 are updated. CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly the variation type counter CS1 can be updated randomly.

In addition, in the processing of S11509, if information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S11509: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 165 has been executed, so the processing at power-off from S11513 is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (S11513), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 111 and sound lamp control device 113) a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S11514). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S11515), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S11516), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area backed up in the RAM 203 .

It should be noted that the processing of S11509 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S11501 to S11508, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S11511 and S11512 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. , the process can be started from the process of S11501. That is, the process can be started from the process of S11501 in the same way as the initialization in the start-up process (main controller) 7. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the processing when the power is turned off, the stack pointer is saved in the initialization processing (S11401). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the processing can be started from S11501. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process 7 (S11504) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 326 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process 7 (S11504). This jackpot control process 7 (S11504) is executed in the main process 7 (see FIG. 325), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special pattern jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot, This is a process for opening or closing a winning opening (the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650).

In the jackpot control process 7 (FIG. 326, S11504), first, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the jackpot of the special symbol (S11601). Specifically, it is determined by analyzing the setting status of the jackpot start flag 203j. This jackpot start flag 203j is set to ON when the jackpot start is set by the processing of S10215 of the special symbol variation processing 7 (see FIG. 315) (S10216). In the process of S11601, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the jackpot (when it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203j is ON) (S11601: Yes), the opening command is set (S11602), then the jackpot start flag 203j is set to OFF (S11603), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S11601, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the special symbol jackpot (the jackpot start flag 203j is set to OFF) (S11601: No), next, the current jackpot is in progress. (S11604). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included, and corresponds to the period during which the above-mentioned jackpot flag 203k is set to ON. In the processing of S11604, if it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (the jackpot flag 203k is off) (S11604: No), this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S11604, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the middle of the jackpot (the flag 203k during the jackpot is set to ON) (S11604: Yes), various processes executed at a plurality of timings during the jackpot Determination processing (S11605 to S11612) is performed to determine whether it is time to execute

In the process of S11604, if it is determined that the current jackpot is in progress (S11604: Yes), then it is determined whether the current time is the start timing of a new round (S11605). In the process of S11605, it is determined whether or not the current timing is the start timing of a new round based on the opening scenario set corresponding to the current jackpot game. In the process of S11605, if it is determined that it is time to start a new round (S11605: Yes), the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a or V The V winning port 650a) of the winning device 650 is opened (S11606), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S11607). After setting the round number command, this process is terminated.

The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S11501) of the main process 7 (see FIG. 325) executed by the MPU 201, the voice It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . Upon receiving the round number command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display round number command corresponding to the round number to the display control device 114 . When the display round number command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts a new round effect.

Although detailed description is omitted, the jackpot continues (for example, when the number of special symbol fluctuations (number of lotteries) during the execution of a plurality of jackpot games is less than 50 times, or during the jackpot game) When it is executed during the period in which the time saving state is repeatedly set, the number of rounds of the jackpot game continuously executed on the side of the sound lamp control device 113 is cumulatively displayed. . That is, the sound lamp control device 113 is a period setting means for setting a period (continuous chance period) during which it is determined that the jackpot is continuously executed based on the state command and the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 And, when a new jackpot game is executed during the period set by the period setting means, the number of round games (number of rounds) in the previously executed jackpot game is added to the number of round games (round number), and a display round number command corresponding to the accumulated round number accumulated by the round number accumulating means are transmitted to the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot game. and a round cumulative number display control means for displaying on. As a result, the player can be made to recognize that the big win has continued for a long time, so that the player's interest can be improved.

On the other hand, in the process of S11605, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S11605: No), then the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of variable winning device 65 or V of V winning device 650) It is determined whether or not the conditions for closing the prize winning opening 650a are met (S11608). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after opening the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650), or When a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 in total) win the winning device 65 or the V winning device 650, it is determined that the closing condition is established.

In the processing of S11608, when it is determined that the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is established (S11608: Yes), the corresponding winning opening The opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is closed (S11609), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is not established (S11608: No), next, It is determined whether the present is the start timing of the ending effect (S11610). The start timing of the ending effect is that 15 rounds (final round game preset in this jackpot game) are completed, the open/close door 650f1 is closed, and the waiting time (in the seventh control example, , 3 seconds) has elapsed, it is determined as the start timing of the ending effect.

In the process of S11610, if it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (S11610: Yes), the ending command is set (S11611), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S11501) of the main processing 7 (see FIG. 325) executed by the MPU 201, the sound lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . Upon receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S11610, when it is determined that it is not the timing to start the ending effect (S11610: No), in the process of S11612, it is determined whether it is the timing to end the ending effect (S11612). In the processing of S11612, if it is determined that the end timing of the ending effect has not come (S11612: No), this processing ends.

In the process of S11612, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S11612: Yes), then it is determined which of the jackpot types A to D is the jackpot type being executed (S11613). In the processing of this S11613, the jackpot type stored in a storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing the set jackpot type is read.

Next, based on the read jackpot type, corresponding time saving end conditions are set using the time saving 7 table 202fe (S11614). Specifically, if the jackpot type is jackpot A (15R with short time) or jackpot B (5R with short time), set 100 to short time counter 203h, 1 to small hit A counter 203fg, and small hit B counter 203fh to 3 respectively. In addition, when the jackpot type is jackpot D (15R time-saving jackpot), 100 is set to the short-time counter 203h, 2 to the small-hit A counter 203fg, and 10 to the small-hit B counter 203fh.

In addition, if the jackpot type is the jackpot C (5R time-saving no jackpot), it is a jackpot type in which the time-saving state is not set after the jackpot ends. It is configured so that the value (time saving end condition) is not set. When the processing of S11614 described above is completed, next, a time saving setting information command for indicating information corresponding to the values of various counters indicating the time saving end conditions set in the processing of S11614 is set (S11615).

The time saving setting information command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 Main processing 7 (see FIG. 325) in the external output process (S11501), It is sent to the audio lamp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the time saving setting information command, it sets the time saving information indicating the time saving end condition of the current time saving state in the time saving information update area 223g and the temporary working time saving information update area 223i. Based on the time saving information set here and the update information of the time saving state updated based on the variation of the special pattern (lottery), the remaining number of time saving state (remaining condition) is determined, and based on the remaining number Various effects modes are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

When the processing of S11615 is completed, next, a state command corresponding to the game state set after the big win is set (S11616), the end of the big win is set (S11617), and the flag 203k during the big win is set to OFF (S11618). ), the process ends.

As described above, in the seventh control example, it is configured to be able to set different termination conditions for the time saving state according to the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won. Furthermore, in the seventh control example, compared to the case of winning the jackpot by lottery of the first special symbol, the case of winning the jackpot by lottery of the second special symbol is the termination condition of the time-saving state (time-saving end condition). It is configured to set a time-saving termination condition that is difficult to hold.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide the player with an added value when winning one type instead of two types during the right-handed game while the time saving state is set.

In addition, in the seventh control example, the same time-saving end condition is set for the jackpot types (jackpots A and B) set when the jackpot is won by lottery of the first special symbol. , For example, it may be configured to set a time-saving end condition that is less likely to be established when the jackpot type is jackpot A, without being limited to that. Also, some of the plurality of time-saving end conditions may be set so that the big win A is more likely to be established, and the other conditions are more likely to be established for the big win B.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 306(d), in the seventh control example, as the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, the change number end condition regarding the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol (end based on the value of the time saving counter 203h condition), and a lottery result of a special symbol, and a winning number end condition (end condition based on the value of each small win counter) relating to the number of times a small win is won.

In addition, it is configured to set end conditions corresponding to a plurality of small hit types set at the time of winning a small win as the end conditions for the number of times of winning. By configuring in this way, until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (100 times) for the player, which small winning game corresponding to which small winning type is executed, and how much longer It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the time saving state ends with.

In addition, in the seventh control example, it is configured to set only the number of fluctuations "100 times" of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) as the condition for ending the number of variations, but depending on the type of jackpot Different fluctuation count end conditions may be set. In addition, as the fluctuation number end condition, a first special symbol variation measuring means for measuring only the number of variations of the first special symbol is provided, and when the measurement result of the first special symbol variation measuring means becomes a predetermined result, it is established. A first special symbol variation end condition and a second special symbol variation measuring means for measuring only the number of variations of the second special symbol are provided, and established when the measurement result of the second special symbol variation measuring means becomes a predetermined result. A second special symbol variation end condition may be provided.

Furthermore, in the seventh control example, as the end condition of the winning number of times, the end condition based on the measurement result of the counter (small hit A counter 203fg, small hit B counter 203fh) corresponding to each small hit type is set. However, without being limited to this, it is possible to set a time-saving end condition that is established based on the sum of the number of times that a small win is won, or a predetermined number of a plurality of (3 or more) small win types Means for counting and measuring the number of times the (two) small winning games for which the (two) small winning types are set may be provided, and the termination condition may be set based on the measurement result of the means.

In addition, in the seventh control example, it is configured to set the time-saving end condition for all the types of small hits that can be set at the time of winning the small win, but not limited to this, how many times at the time of winning the small win Even if it is set, the small winning type Z may be settable as a small winning type for which the time saving end condition cannot be established. As a result, even if the player grasps that the small win has been won during the time saving state, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the time saving state is coming to an end due to the small win this time.

In addition, when the above-described small winning type Z is provided, it is preferable to perform a small winning game having the same contents as the small winning game in which the winning number end condition is set. By configuring in this way, even if the game contents of the small winning game executed during the time saving state are identified, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the time saving state is nearing the end due to the small winning game this time. .

In this way, by determining whether a small win has been won or by determining the game content of the small win game executed based on the winning of a small win, that is, the game of the pachinko machine 10 By discerning the content, it is difficult to grasp the progress of the time saving state (whether it is approaching the end), so that the progress of the time saving state (whether it is approaching the end) Therefore, it is possible to make the player strongly interested. In the seventh control example, the contents of the effect control performed by the third symbol display device 81 will be explained in detail in the explanation of the control processing of the sound lamp control device 113, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 327, small hit control processing 7 (S11505) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 327 is a flow chart showing this small winning control process 7 (S11505). This small winning control processing 7 (S11505) is executed in the main processing 7 (see FIG. 325), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol small winning state, execution of various effects according to the small winning , the processing for opening or closing the corresponding winning opening (V winning opening 650a of V winning device 650).

In the small hit control process 7 (FIG. 327, S11505), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit of the special symbol is started (S11701). Specifically, if the small hit start flag 203fb is set to ON by the processing of S10404 of the small hit start setting process 7 (see FIG. 320), it is determined that the small hit of the special symbol is started. In the process of S11701, when the special symbol small winning is started (S11701: Yes), an opening command is set (S11702). Then, the small hit start flag 203fb is set to OFF (S11703), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S11701, when the small winning of special symbols is not started (S11701: No), it is determined whether or not the small winning of special symbols is in progress (S11704). During the special symbol small winning, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol small winning (including during the special symbol small winning game). During the predetermined time after the end of the small hit game of the special symbol is included. Determination of S11704 is determined by analyzing whether the flag 303fc is set to ON during the small hit. In the processing of S11704, if it is determined that the special symbols are not in the middle of a small hit (S11704: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S11704, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the middle of a small hit (S11704: Yes), the process of S11705 is executed. In the processing of S11705, it is determined whether or not it is time to open the V winning opening (S11705). In the process of S11705, if it is determined that it is time to open the V winning opening (S11705: Yes), the corresponding winning opening (V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is opened based on the opening scenario table 202fg ( S11706), and it is determined whether this time is the fifth or tenth opening timing (S11707).

In the process of S11707, if it is determined that this time is not the fifth or tenth opening timing (S11707: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S11707 that this time is the fifth or tenth release timing (S11707: Yes), then in the process of S11708, it is determined whether the V flag 203fe is set to ON. (S11708), when it is determined that it is not on (is off) (S11708: No), the small hit type stored in the small hit type storage area 203fa is read (S11709), then the read small hit An instruction command corresponding to the type is set (S11710).

As the instruction command set in the processing of S11710, for example, a small hit (for example, a small hit A) in which the ball easily passes through a specific area during the small hit game as the small hit type, and a ball specified during the small hit game An instruction command is set for differentiating the display mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 depending on a small win that is difficult to pass through the area (for example, a small win B).

Returning to FIG. 327, the description continues. In the process of S11705, if it is determined that it is not the opening timing of the V winning opening 650a (S11705: No), is the closing condition of the V winning opening 650a established, that is, is it the closing timing of the V winning opening 650a? It discriminates (S11711). When it is determined that it is time to close the V winning opening 650a (S11711: Yes), the V winning opening 650a is closed (S11712), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S11711, if it is determined that the current time is not the closing timing of the V winning opening 650a (S11711: No), then it is determined whether it is time to start the ending effect (S11713). In the process of S11713, when it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (S11713: Yes), the ending command is set (S11714), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S11501) of the main processing (see FIG. 325). It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S11713, when it is determined that it is not the timing to start the ending effect (S11713: No), in the process of S11715, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the ending effect (S11715). In the process of S11715, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the ending effect (S11715: No), this process ends.

In the processing of S11715, if it is determined that it is time to end the ending effect (S11715: Yes), it is determined whether the V flag 203fe is set to ON (S11716), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S11716: Yes), sets an open scenario based on the jackpot type corresponding to the contents of the V flag 203fe (S11717), sets the jackpot start flag 203j and the jackpot middle flag 203k to ON (S11718), and sets the V flag 203fe It is set to OFF (S11719), the V passage flag 203ff is set to OFF (S11720), the small hit middle flag 203fc is set to OFF (S11721), and this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 328, the contents of control processing executed by the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example will be described. Figure 328 is the flowchart which shows the processing contents of special figure 1 production mode setting processing 7 (S14983). In this special figure 1 production mode setting process 7 (S14983), in order to set the production mode of the variable production corresponding to the first special symbol lottery in the time saving state, it was determined with reference to the lottery result notification mode selection table 222fa. A process (see S19502) using the presentation mode is executed.

When the special figure 1 effect mode setting process 7 (S14983) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the time saving state (S19501). When it is determined that the current game state is the time saving state (S19501: Yes), the lottery result notification mode selection table 222fa (see FIG. 312) is referred to determine the notification mode (S19502). Then, a display variation pattern command indicating the effect mode determined in the process of S19502 is set (S19503), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S19501, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the time saving state (S19501: No), the processing of S19502 is skipped, the processing of S19503 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

As described above, in the seventh control example, in one special symbol lottery, both the judgment of winning the jackpot and the judgment of the short-time winning are configured to be executable, and the big win and the short-time are overlapped. It has a different technical idea from the other control examples in that it is configured to be able to give a privilege that is advantageous to the player when he or she wins the game. It may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 described in other control examples. In addition, even when a game state other than the normal state is set, it may be configured to be able to execute determination of time-saving winning.

In addition, in the seventh control example, when the processing related to the special symbol lottery is executed, it is configured to be able to execute the processing of determining the time saving election before the processing of determining the jackpot winning, and when the time saving winning is performed , The time saving state is set before the judgment of the jackpot winning is executed, and the time saving state is set between the judgment of the jackpot winning and the start of the special symbol variation for showing the judgment result. configured to terminate. In other words, it is possible to set the time saving state only for the purpose of changing the game state when the determination of the jackpot winning in the special symbol lottery is executed.

By configuring in this way, like the conventional pachinko machine 10, the time saving state can be used for a purpose different from the case of setting the time saving state for the purpose of facilitating the execution of the special symbol lottery. A variety of games can be provided to the players.

In addition, a configuration other than the configuration described in the seventh control example is used as a configuration that enables setting of the time saving state only for the purpose of changing the game state when the judgment of the jackpot winning in the special symbol lottery is executed. Alternatively, for example, the time saving state is set at the timing when the special symbol variation for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed, and the time saving state is terminated after the judgment of the jackpot winning is executed in the next special symbol lottery. It may be configured to allow

In this case, when the right to execute the special symbol lottery (special figure pending) is acquired, the period in which the time saving state is set is momentary, so as in the seventh control example, the jackpot in the special symbol lottery A time-saving state can be set for the purpose of changing the game state when determination of winning is executed. On the other hand, if you have not acquired a special drawing reservation, the time saving state will continue until the next special drawing drawing is executed, so it is possible to set a period that makes it easy to execute the special drawing drawing. becomes. Therefore, the next special symbol lottery can be easily executed only for the player who cannot smoothly execute the special symbol lottery.

In addition, in this seventh control example, it is configured so that double winning of jackpot winning and short-time winning is possible in one special symbol lottery, and in the case of double winning, it is more advantageous to the player than in the case of not double winning. However, without being limited to this, it may be possible to provide a privilege that is more disadvantageous to the player in the case of double winning than in the case of non-overlapping winning.

In addition, as a determination that can be repeatedly elected, not only the determination of jackpot winning, the determination of time-saving winning, but also the determination of time-saving end condition establishment, and the determination of falling lottery winning may be used. In other words, when a plurality of types of judgments can be executed based on the establishment of a specific execution trigger, and the combination of the plurality of types of judgment results becomes a predetermined combination, a combination different from the predetermined combination is obtained. What is necessary is just to constitute so that a privilege different from the case where it becomes may be provided.

<Modified Example of Game Board Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
Next, a modified example of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. In the fifth control example to the seventh control example described above, a left-handed game is executed to enter the game ball into the first ball entrance 64 in the normal state, and when the time-saving state is set, the ball is entered. It has a game board 13 capable of executing a right-handed game for entering a game ball into a second ball entry port 640 which makes it easier to play. That is, the pachinko machine 10 having the game property of switching between the game for executing the first special symbol lottery and the game for executing the second special symbol lottery according to the game state has been described.

On the other hand, in this modification, as shown in FIG. 329, in the normal state, the game ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 by executing the left-handed game, and the first special symbol lottery is executed. By executing the right-handed game, the game ball is entered into the second ball entrance 1641, and the second special symbol lottery can be executed. By configuring in this way, when the player selects the game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) in a state where the same game state is set (operating the operation handle 21 to adjust the firing intensity By doing), since it is possible to execute a special symbol lottery of any special symbol type, it is possible to increase the willingness of the player to participate in the game.

Next, novel game features using the game board 13 shown in FIG. 329 will be described.

<Playability 1>
In the pachinko machine 10 having the playability used in the seventh control example described above, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are configured so that the jackpot is won at the same selection ratio, and in addition, the second In one special pattern lottery, determination of time-saving winning is executable in addition to big winning, and determination of small winning is executable in addition to big winning in second special symbol lottery. Then, when the time-saving state is set based on the time-saving winning, the game ball is easily entered into the second ball entrance 1640, the right-handed game is executed, and the big winning game is played by the small winning. To make a target game executable.

By configuring in this way, in the normal state, by the left-handed game, aiming to set the time saving state via the jackpot winning of the first special symbol, or via the time saving winning of the first special symbol A game (first game) aiming to set a time saving state through a game (first game) and a right-handed game aiming to set a time saving state via a jackpot winning of a second special symbol, or a second special symbol The player can select a game (second game) aiming at setting a time-saving state via winning a small prize.

In this case, for example, the time saving state (second time saving) that is set when the time saving is won makes it easier for the time saving end condition to be satisfied, and at a rate of about 50% when the second time saving is set, the second time saving , the jackpot game is executed via the small winning lottery, and the probability of short winning in the first special pattern lottery is set higher than the probability of winning the small winning in the second special symbol lottery. good.

By configuring in this way, the game determines whether to execute the first game or the second game in order to execute the game process in which the big winning game is executed via the small winning of the second special symbol lottery. It can be selected according to the taste of the person. In this case, in order to equalize the ratio of the number of winning balls in the case of shooting the prescribed number of game balls in the case of playing the left-handed game and the case of playing the right-handed game in the normal state, It is preferable to define the entrance rate of game balls into each ball entrance, the time saving winning probability, the small winning winning probability, and the execution probability of the big winning game at the time of winning the small winning. As a result, a fair game can be provided to the player regardless of which game is executed.

Furthermore, in this case, the period required for the ratio of the number of won prize balls to become equal in the case of shooting a specified number of game balls is varied between the first game and the second game, or the deviation of the number of won prize balls is set. It is good to configure it so that it is different. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a game that matches the taste of the player.

<Other playability: Depending on the type of time saving, it is possible to set a time saving state that is more disadvantageous than the normal state and a time saving state that is advantageous>
As in the fifth control example described above, the time saving state (first time saving) set via the jackpot winning in the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, and the time saving state set via the time saving winning (second time saving) and can be set, and the second time saving A advantageous to the player and the second time saving B disadvantageous to the player can be set as the time saving type set when winning the second time saving.

When the second time saving A is set, similarly to the fifth control example described above, a time saving state is set in which the electric accessory 640a opens so that the special symbol lottery is more easily executed than in the normal state. . On the other hand, when the second time reduction B is set, the electric accessory 640a is opened by an opening operation in which the game ball can enter the second ball entrance 640 only at the same ball entrance rate as in the normal state. Opening operation is controlled.

And when the second time saving B is set, that is, in a game state other than the normal state, the time saving winning determination is not executed. By configuring in this way, when the normal state is set, it becomes a game in which the jackpot winning determination and the time saving winning determination are executed in the special symbol lottery, and when the second time saving B is set, the special symbol In the lottery, the game is such that only the determination of winning the jackpot is executed. That is, since the time saving winning determination is not executed for the normal state, the second time saving B is more disadvantageous to the player.

Then, different times of special symbol lottery times (for example, 10 times, 50 times, 100 times) can be set as time saving end conditions for the second time saving B.

Further, as the selection ratio of the lottery result in the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, the probability of winning the jackpot is assumed to be 1/200, and the probability of winning the short time is assumed to be 199/200. Then, when the time saving is won, the ratio of selecting the second time saving A is set to 10%, and the ratio of selecting the second time saving B is set to 90%. That is, when the special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state, if the lottery result is other than the jackpot lottery, it is constructed so that the time-saving lottery is always won.

By configuring in this way, the timing at which the special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state is the special symbol lottery when the normal state is set when the time saving end condition of the second time saving B is established after the jackpot winning is finished, that is, , Only the special symbol lottery executed in a specific cycle. As a result, a special symbol lottery advantageous to the player (a special symbol lottery in a normal state) can be periodically executed (every time the end condition of the second time saving B is satisfied).

In addition, by configuring it so that different special symbol lottery times can be set as the time-saving end condition of the second time-saving B, it is possible to change the cycle in which the special symbol lottery that is advantageous to the player is executed, so that the player is surprised. We can provide you with exciting games.

In this case, as in the configuration of the game board 13 described above with reference to FIG. , The first special symbol lottery in the normal state and the second special symbol lottery, the probability of winning the time saving is different, the selection ratio of the time saving type set at the time of the time saving winning is different, and the second time saving B is set. It is preferable to configure so that the content of the time-saving end condition is different in each case.

By configuring in this way, the special symbol lottery (special symbol lottery in the normal state) which is periodically executed and which is advantageous to the player is advantageous to the player depending on which type of special symbol is executed. The probability that the second time saving A is set can be varied.

Also, as the time saving end condition of the second time saving B, it is not a time saving end condition that is established based on the number of executions of the special symbol lottery, but is established when the result of the special symbol lottery is a specific determination result (for example, a small hit) It is also possible to constitute so as to be able to set the time-saving end condition, and to be able to win a small win different from the big win and the time-saving win as the lottery result of the special symbol lottery. By configuring in this way, when the second time saving B is set, the novel game property of aiming for a small winning by quickly ending the second time saving B and executing the special symbol lottery in the normal state. can be provided.

<Playability 2: Combination of game machines with simultaneous fluctuation specifications and short-time winning>
The lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are configured to be executable at the same time (in parallel), and when both special symbols win the jackpot, the special symbol variation is first stopped (special A jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result of the special pattern on the side where the symbol is confirmed and displayed, and when the special symbol variation stops first (the special symbol is confirmed and displayed), depending on the jackpot type, the other special symbol variation In a game machine configured to forcibly stop display in a display mode indicating that the lottery result is lost, it is possible to execute time-saving winning determination in both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. Configure.

Then, like the fifth control example described above, a time-saving lottery (time-saving winning decision) is executed before each special symbol variation is started, and when a time-saving winning is made, a time-saving state is set at the special symbol variation stop timing. In this case, if the first special symbol lottery wins the time saving, the first benefit is set to the time saving state, and if the second special symbol lottery wins the time saving, the second benefit different from the first benefit Time saving State is set.

Furthermore, in the second special symbol lottery executed during the first special symbol variation that is winning the time reduction, when the time reduction is won, the third benefit that is more advantageous than the first benefit and the second benefit is given. Configure the state to be configurable. By constructing in this way, in the pachinko machine 10 constructed so as to be able to execute the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery at the same time (in parallel), the timing of short-time winning in each special symbol lottery is achieved. It is possible to set a time saving state in which different benefits are given accordingly.

Regarding the privilege to be granted, for example, it may be a third privilege in which the time saving end condition is less likely to be satisfied than the first privilege or the second privilege, or a special symbol lottery may be executed more easily than the first privilege or the second privilege. 3 It is good as a privilege.

Furthermore, the timing at which the time saving state of the third privilege is set may be the timing at which the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed first among the special symbol variations that are executed in parallel, or the special symbol variation is stopped later. The displayed timing is also acceptable. Also, regardless of before or after the stop display timing, it may be the timing when the previously executed special symbol variation is stop-displayed, or the timing when the later-executed special symbol variation is stop-displayed. Moreover, the timing at which a specific special symbol type is stopped and displayed may be used.

By constructing in this way, in the pachinko machine 10 capable of simultaneously (parallelly) executing lotteries for a plurality of special symbol types, a jackpot is won in each special symbol lottery, and an excessive amount is paid to the player at the same time. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a privilege (jackpot game) is awarded.

Furthermore, even if one special symbol lottery wins a big win disadvantageous to the player, the other special symbol lottery wins a big win advantageous to the player before the winning result is stopped (confirmed display). It is possible to elect. In this case, by using the variable time until the special symbol lottery result is stopped and displayed, it is preferable to execute a variable performance suggesting that the player has won a disadvantageous win. As a result, the player can be made to think that he or she has won a disadvantageous win, so that the other special symbol lottery can be executed willingly during the fluctuation time.

In addition, it may be configured such that a shorter variation time is more likely to be set when winning a jackpot that is advantageous to the player than when winning a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player. As a result, it is possible to win an advantageous win in the other special symbol lottery while one of the special symbols won in a disadvantageous win fluctuates, and to stop display (fixed display) the winning result before the winning result in the disadvantageous win. can.

<Regarding game machines that can set infinite number of times of time saving (number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed during high probability state of normal symbols)>
In the above-described first to fourth control examples, in a part of the case where the special symbol lottery wins the jackpot, the period until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times after the jackpot game ends. state) can be set, but the period during which the time saving state continues is not limited to the time when the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times, but it may be infinite. (Until winning the next jackpot) may be used.

For example, in the above-described first control example, as the number of special symbol fluctuations set as the end condition for ending the time saving state set after the end of the jackpot game, the first number of fluctuations and the second number different from the first number of fluctuations The number of fluctuations is configured to be able to set one special pattern fluctuation number from a plurality of number of fluctuations including at least the number of fluctuations, and the number of fluctuations is 100 times for the first number of fluctuations, 200 times for the second number of fluctuations, and 300 times for the third number of fluctuations. , the fourth fluctuation frequency is 500 times, and the fifth fluctuation frequency is 10000 times (until the next big hit is substantially won).

As the effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81, when the time saving state is set, "100 remaining times" is displayed regardless of which end condition is set, and the number of fluctuations of 100 or more times (for example , fourth variation count) is set, an effect (for example, "+30 times") is executed to add a predetermined number of times to the value of the remaining variation count displayed at a predetermined timing.

By configuring in this way, even if the super chance mode (high probability state (variable probability state) of special symbols for a limited time until the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times) is not set after the end of the jackpot game. Also, when the period until the special symbol variation is executed 10000 times is set as the period during which the time saving state continues, the ball enters the second winning hole 640 more than when the variable probability state is set. Since the easy state continues for a long period of time, although the probability of a big win with special symbols is low, it is possible to execute a big win lottery with more special symbols while maintaining the number of game balls acquired, and a big win can be achieved. Since the possibility of winning increases, even if the chance mode (time saving state) is set after the end of the jackpot game, the player is expected to set the time saving state for a long period of time, thereby reducing the desire to play. It is also possible to make the player interested in how long the time saving state will continue, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In addition, since the probability variable state is set by the game ball passing through the specific area during the jackpot game, and the time saving state is set when it does not pass, it becomes a high probability state of special symbols. A game in which the number of time reductions is 100 times, which is the period during which the high probability state of the pattern continues, and the low probability state of the special design is set, but the number of time reductions, which is the period during which the high probability state of the normal design continues. A player can be made to select which game state to play, a game in a time-saving state in which there is a possibility of being awarded 10000 times at maximum.

<Regarding a game machine having a configuration (so-called ST specification) in which a high probability state (probability variable state) of special symbols is set until the end condition is satisfied after the end of the jackpot game>
When a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery, a variable probability state (high probability state of special patterns, high probability state of normal patterns) is set after the end of the jackpot game, and the number of special pattern fluctuations after the probability variable state is set is a specific number. In a gaming machine having a configuration (so-called ST specification) in which a condition for ending a variable probability state is satisfied when reaching (for example, 100 times), a plurality of termination conditions are defined, and one termination condition is set from among them. Also good.

For example, as the number of special symbol fluctuations set as the end condition for ending the probability variable state set after the end of the jackpot game, a first number of fluctuations and a second number of fluctuations different from the first number of fluctuations are included at least. 1 special symbol variation frequency can be set from the variation frequency, the first variation frequency is 100 times, the second variation frequency is 200 times, the third variation frequency is 300 times, and the fourth variation frequency is 500 times. , the number of times of the fifth variation is set to 10000 times (until the next big hit is substantially won).

Then, as the effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81, when the variable probability state is set, "remaining 100 times" is displayed regardless of which end condition is set, and 100 times or more is displayed as the end condition. If the number of fluctuations (for example, the fourth number of fluctuations) is set, an effect that adds a predetermined number of times to the value of the remaining number of fluctuations displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, "+30 times") is executed. do.

By configuring in this way, it is difficult for the player to understand the remaining period in which the probability change state continues, so even if the remaining period until the displayed probability change state ends (the number of remaining fluctuations in the special symbol) is small, It is possible to make the player expect the occurrence of an additional performance, and to play the game while having the expectation that the variable probability state may continue until the last moment when the variable probability state ends.

In addition, the above configuration is applied to a gaming machine (a so-called one-type two-type mixed machine) that gives a big win when a special pattern lottery results in a big win or when a game ball enters a specific area. You can

<Regarding gaming machines with a function (limit function) that sets an upper limit to the period in which high probability states can be set continuously>
It should be noted that the above-described configuration capable of setting an infinite number of times of time saving may be applied to a game machine having a function (limit function) of setting an upper limit to a period in which a high probability state can be continuously set.

Here, the limit function means that even if you win a jackpot type that can set a high probability state (high probability state) of special patterns or normal patterns after the jackpot game ends, special patterns or normal patterns are displayed after the jackpot game ends. Usually refers to the threshold value for executing the process for setting the low probability state (low probability state) of the symbol.

For example, after the end of the jackpot game in a low probability state, the high probability state (variable state) of the special symbol is elected to the jackpot (variable jackpot) of the type that is set, and 3 times is set as the variable limit number of times, the variable state is When the probability variable jackpot is won three times consecutively after setting, the probability variable limit is reached by the third probability variable jackpot winning, and the low probability state of the special pattern is set after the jackpot game is finished.

The variable probability limit number is a value set when a jackpot is won in a low probability state of a special symbol, and a variable probability state is set after the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot is finished. In the variable probability state, after the end of the jackpot game, the jackpot for which the variable probability state is set is won, the value is updated at the end of the jackpot game executed based on the winning of the jackpot, and the variable probability limit is reached using the updated value. A determination is made as to whether or not

In a gaming machine having a conventional variable probability limit, for example, when the jackpot type distribution in the case of winning a special symbol jackpot is 90% of the probability variable jackpot and 10% of the normal jackpot, and the probability variable limit number of times is set to 3 times, When the variable probability jackpot is won in a low probability state, and after the variable probability state is set after the jackpot game ends, when the probability variable jackpot is won three times in a row, the probability variable limit is reached with the third probability variable jackpot, and the third time. A time-saving state (low probability state for special patterns, high probability state for normal patterns) is set for a predetermined period (for example, until special pattern lottery is executed 100 times) after the end of the jackpot game, and the special pattern jackpot is not won. After a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the state shifts to a normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols).

Also, even if the normal jackpot is won before reaching the probability limit, a time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, normal A high probability state of the symbol is set, and when a predetermined period elapses without winning the jackpot of the special symbol, the state shifts to the normal state. In addition, when the probability variable jackpot is won in the time saving state, the probability variable limit number of times 3 times is newly set.

In other words, in a gaming machine with a conventional variable probability limit, although the number of times the probability variable limit is canceled when the normal jackpot is won, within a limited period (for example, the period until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times) If the jackpot of the special pattern is not won in the low probability state of the special pattern, the state shifts to the normal state, so for the player, the normal jackpot is a jackpot more disadvantageous than the variable probability jackpot, and the probability variable jackpot is set after the probability variable state is set. 2 times in a row, the game state set after the jackpot game is the same regardless of whether the next jackpot is a variable probability jackpot or a normal jackpot, so the remaining number of times until the probability limit is reached is 1. There is a risk that the player's willingness to play may decrease in the variable probability state in the case of a turn.

On the other hand, by setting a normal jackpot that gives an infinite number of time-savings (until the next jackpot is won), the variable limit number of times is canceled by winning the normal jackpot after the variable state is set. Although the low probability state of the special pattern is set, the time saving state will continue until the next jackpot, so in the probability state when the remaining number of times until reaching the probability limit is 1, it is usually a jackpot rather than winning the probability variable jackpot. Winning is more advantageous to the player, and even in a variable probability state when the remaining number of times until reaching the variable probability limit is 1, the player is expected to win a normal jackpot, thereby preventing a decrease in the player's willingness to play. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if you win a normal jackpot with an infinite number of times of reduced time, a special effect that is different from when you win a variable probability jackpot (for example, the effect that the remaining number of times until reaching the displayed variable limit is rewound, etc.) may be executed.

<Big win 2 in a gaming machine that does not have a configuration (so-called simultaneous variation method) that can simultaneously (in parallel) perform the variation display based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the variation display based on the lottery of the second special symbol Concerning the configuration in which the loop can be executed>
A jackpot game in a gaming machine that does not have a configuration (so-called simultaneous variation system) capable of simultaneously (in parallel) performing variable display based on a first special symbol lottery and variable display based on a second special symbol lottery. A probability variable jackpot set until a high probability state (probability variable state) of a special pattern and a normal pattern wins the next jackpot after the end, and a special for a predetermined period after the jackpot game (for example, until the special pattern lottery is executed 100 times). A game machine (so-called probability variable loop machine) having two types of jackpots, a normal jackpot in which a low-probability state of symbols and a high-probability state of normal symbols (time-saving state) is set, is generally known.

In a conventional variable probability loop machine, when a variable probability big win is won, a variable probability state is set after the end of the big win game, and one more big win is guaranteed, but if a normal jackpot is won after winning the variable probability big win. If a jackpot is not won in a time-saving state set for a predetermined period, a normal state is set, so that two more jackpot wins cannot be promised without changing the ratio of the probability variable jackpot.

However, by making it possible to set the above-mentioned time-saving infinite times (until the next jackpot is won), if the probability variable jackpot is won without changing the probability variable jackpot ratio, two more jackpot wins are guaranteed. becomes possible.

Specifically, if you win the normal jackpot when the probability variable state is set, the time-saving state of infinite times (until the next jackpot is won) is set, and the normal state or the time-saving state is set. When winning a normal jackpot in the case where the player is present, the time saving state is set for a period shorter than the infinite number of time saving times (for example, until the special symbol lottery is executed 20 times).

By configuring in this way, when the variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game, one more big win is guaranteed no matter what kind of jackpot the next winning jackpot is, so that the probability change is performed once. By winning the jackpot, two more jackpots are guaranteed. Therefore, by winning the variable probability jackpot, the player can obtain a lot of prize balls, so that the player can enthusiastically play the game in anticipation of winning the variable probability jackpot.

<About the configuration that does not reset the time saving state even if the jackpot is won when the time saving state (normal pattern high probability state) is set>
In a conventional game machine, when a time-saving state is set for a predetermined period (for example, until a special symbol lottery is executed 100 times) after the end of a big win game, and a big win game is started based on winning a big win during the time-saving state. It is common to terminate the time saving state that has been set to , and newly set the time saving state for a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game (reset the time saving state).

In order to further improve interest in the game machine having such a configuration, when the time saving state is set, even if a jackpot is won, the time saving state is not reset within a predetermined period. A player can be entertained by seeing how many jackpots he or she can win, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Specifically, when a jackpot is won in the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), a time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends (first hit), and the time saving state ends End condition As the number of special symbol variations set as , one special symbol variation number can be set from a plurality of variation numbers including at least the first variation number and the second variation number different from the first variation number. The first variation frequency is 100 times, the second variation frequency is 300 times, the third variation frequency is 500 times, and the fourth variation frequency is 10000 times (until the next jackpot election).

Then, for example, when the third variation frequency is set as the termination condition, if the jackpot is won in the special symbol variation executed for the 20th time, the time saving state is not terminated (not reset) at the start of the jackpot game, The number of remaining fluctuations until the end condition of the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game is satisfied is 480 times.

In this way, the time saving state set based on the first hit is not terminated by winning the jackpot during the time saving state, and the time saving state set after the end of the jackpot game based on the first hit is newly executed. Since it is taken over even after the end of the jackpot game, the number of times the player can win the jackpot during the time saving state depends on how many times the number of fluctuations, which is the end condition of the time saving state set after the end of the jackpot game based on the first hit. can be made different, and a novel game can be provided.

In addition, as a condition to end the time saving state, if the number of fluctuations set as the end condition is 0 times (that is, if a predetermined number of special symbol fluctuations are executed during the time saving state) and the jackpot during the time saving state When the number of wins reaches a specific number, for example, when the time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, and when the third big win is won after the time-saving state is set, the time-saving state is terminated at the start of the jackpot game, and It is good also as a structure which newly sets a time saving state after a jackpot game is over.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a novel game of aiming for consecutive chances in order to continue a state (for example, a time saving state) that is more advantageous than the normal state, and further improve the amusement of the game. can.

<The second probability state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set rather than the first probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) Regarding game machines with an advantageous configuration>
As a game state, normal state (low probability state of special design, low probability state of normal design), time saving state (low probability state of special design, high probability state of normal design), first variable state, second variable state At least four game states can be set, and as a degree of advantage for the player in each game state, at least the second variable probability state is more advantageous to the player than the first variable probability state. It is good also as composition which performs time saving lottery (judgment of whether to set time saving state in special design lottery) in the special design lottery which did.

Specifically, the difference in the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability state and the high probability state of the special pattern is set to be small (for example, the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability state of the special pattern is 1/50.1, the high probability state 1/50 of the jackpot winning probability in the first special pattern), the ratio of determining the first probability variable jackpot (jackpot type in which the first probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends) when the jackpot is won with the first special symbol is 95%, The proportion of time-saving jackpot (jackpot type in which a time-saving state is set after the jackpot game is finished) is set to 5%, and prize balls cannot be obtained during the jackpot game.

In addition, the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed in the normal state, the time saving state, and the first variable probability state, and the second special symbol lottery is executed only in the second variable probability state.

Then, only when the second special symbol lottery does not win the big win, a small win lottery (judging whether or not the small win wins in the special symbol lottery) is executed, and the small win game executed when the small win wins. allows the player to win prize balls.

In addition, when the jackpot is not won in the special symbol lottery in the normal state, the time-saving lottery is executed, and when the time-saving lottery is won, the time-saving state is set for a predetermined period (for example, the period until the special symbol variation is executed 20 times). .

Further, when the first variable probability jackpot is won in the normal state, the first variable probability state is set after the jackpot game ends. Here, in the first probability variable state, the high probability state of the special pattern continues until the next big hit is won, but the high probability state of the normal pattern is set to the low probability state when the end condition is satisfied, and the end condition is set. As the special symbol variation frequency to be set, one special symbol variation frequency can be set from a plurality of variation frequencies including at least a first variation frequency and a second variation frequency different from the first variation frequency. For example, the first variation frequency is 1 time, the second variation frequency is 50 times, the third variation frequency is 100 times, the fourth variation frequency is 200 times, and the fifth variation frequency is 300 times.

By configuring in this way, when the end condition of the high probability state of the normal symbol is satisfied in the first probability variable state, the high probability state of the special symbol, the low probability state of the normal symbol, that is, the second advantageous to the player Since the 2 probability variable state is set, it is possible to provide the player with a novel game aimed at ending the high probability state of normal symbols without winning a jackpot in the 1st probability variable state.

In addition, when the jackpot is won with the second special symbol, the ratio of determining the second probability variable jackpot (jackpot in which the second probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends) is determined by 95%, and the ratio of time-saving jackpot is determined by 5%. and

In addition, when the time-saving state is set and the first special symbol wins the jackpot, the 100% second probability variable state is set.

In addition, it may be possible to provide an upper limit to the period in which the high probability state of the normal pattern can be set continuously (time saving limit). A second variable probability state is set after the tenth jackpot game ends. By constructing in this manner, it is possible to provide a novel game in which a more advantageous game state is set by making a succession of big wins, and to improve the interest of the player in the game.

It should be noted that the configuration may be such that a small winning lottery is executed also in the first special symbol lottery, and when a small winning lottery is won, a plurality of small winning types including a small winning type in which a second probability variable state is set at least after finishing the small winning game. It is good also as a structure by which a small hit classification is determined from classification. By configuring in this way, the opportunity to shift to the second variable probability state increases, so that the interest in the game can be further improved.

In addition, when the first probability variable state is set, even if an effect is executed to suggest to the player the number of remaining fluctuations of the special symbol until the end condition of the high probability state of the set normal symbol is satisfied. good. For example, when the fifth variation count (300 variation counts) is set as the termination condition, the message "Accumulate 300 points" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and one point is accumulated for each variation of the special symbol. , When 300 points are accumulated, the configuration may be such that the second variable probability state is set. In this case, when the jackpot is won in the first variable probability state, the acquired points are reset (that is, returned to 0).

In addition, even if, for example, the first variation count (1 variation count) is set as the end condition, the third symbol display device 81 displays "300 points to accumulate", and one variation of the special symbol is displayed. It may be configured such that 300 points can be obtained when the game ends, or the number of points given for one variation of the special symbol may be varied according to the number of variations of the set end condition.

By configuring in this way, it becomes difficult for the player to understand which number of fluctuations is set as the end condition of the high probability state of the normal symbol, so which number of fluctuations is set from the number of points to be given. It is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting and improve the amusement of the game.

<Summary of technical ideas>
Next, each technical concept described in each control example described above will be briefly described. First, when the number of executions of the special figure 2 lottery using the special figure 2 reservation acquired during the time saving exceeds a predetermined number of times, the technical idea that the probability that an advantageous privilege will be given by the special figure 2 lottery increases According to the pachinko machine 10 of the 5 control examples, when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, it has means for acquiring the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (information can be acquired possible acquisition means) and the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 reservation) up to the upper limit (4 pieces) (the information acquired by the acquisition means can be stored possible storage means). Then, the second special symbol lottery is executed based on the reserved and stored second special symbol lottery execution right (special figure 2 reservation) (determination is performed based on the information stored in the storage means discriminating means). Then, a jackpot game (specific game) is executed based on the fact that the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery is jackpot winning (first determination result). Then, after the jackpot game ends, the high probability state (specific setting) of the normal pattern that makes it easier to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 is the end for ending the high probability state of the normal pattern. It continues until the condition (time saving end condition) is satisfied. In addition, in the second special symbol lottery, it is configured to be able to execute time-saving winning judgment separately from the jackpot winning judgment, and if it is determined that time-saving winning is determined in the time-saving winning judgment (it is the second determination result If it is done), it is possible to set a high probability state (specific setting) of normal symbols without executing a jackpot game. Furthermore, in the fifth control example described above, a plurality of game states can be set, but only in the state where the normal state (specific period) is set, it is possible to execute the time-saving winning determination. be.

By constructing in this way, when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set based on the fact that the second special pattern lottery is won, it is not the stop timing of the special pattern fluctuation but the end timing of the jackpot game. When the high probability state of the normal design is set and the high probability state of the normal design is set based on the fact that the second special design lottery was short-time winning, the high probability state of the normal design is set at the stop timing of the special design fluctuation. is set. Therefore, the timing at which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set can be varied according to the timing of setting the time saving state.

In addition, since it is possible to set a period during which time-saving winning judgment can be performed (a period in which the normal state is set) and a period in which it cannot be performed (a period in which the normal state is not set), special symbol lottery The duration of execution can also be of interest to the player. In addition, in the fifth control example described above, it is configured to execute the time-saving winning determination only in the normal state, but it is sufficient to provide a period in which the time-saving winning determination can be performed and a period in which it is not performed. , In the game state (normal state, second probability variable state) in which the low probability state of the normal pattern is set, it is possible to execute the time-saving winning determination, and the game state in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set (time-saving state, probability variable It may be configured not to execute the time saving winning determination in the state).

Furthermore, instead of switching depending on the game state where the execution of the time saving success/failure judgment is set, the probability of winning the time saving in the time saving success/failure judgment may be changed according to the game state, for example, the normal state is set It may be configured so that the time saving win is won with a probability of 1/6 in the time saving propriety determination in the case where it is set, and the time saving win is won with a probability of 1/200 in other game states. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set a game state in which it is easy to win a time saving and a game state in which it is difficult to win a time saving, so that the same effect as the technical idea described above, that is, a special symbol lottery is executed. The time period can also be of interest to the player.

Furthermore, in the above-described fifth control example, the first ball entrance 64 (first ball entrance means for allowing the game ball to enter) that can trigger the execution of the first special symbol lottery by the entrance of the game ball. , A second ball entrance 640 (second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means) that can trigger the execution of the second special symbol lottery is provided, and the time-saving winning determination is the second special symbol lottery. It is configured to be executable only in

That is, in the first special symbol lottery, no matter what game state is set, time-saving winning judgment is not executed, and in the second special symbol lottery, time-saving winning judgment can be executed in a specific period (normal state). By configuring in this way, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, and eventually the game ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and the game ball entering the second ball entrance 640. , the amount of value given to the player later can be greatly different.

In addition, in the fifth control example described above, the first special symbol lottery does not execute the time-saving winning determination, and the second special symbol lottery is configured to be able to execute the time-saving winning determination during a specific period (normal state). , Without being limited to this, for example, in the first specific period (normal state), only the second special symbol lottery executes time saving winning judgment, and in the second specific period (second probability variable state) different from the first specific period may be configured so that only the first special symbol lottery can execute the time-saving winning determination. By configuring in this way, the entry of a game ball into the first ball entrance 64 is more advantageous to the player than the entry of a game ball into the second ball entrance 640 depending on the set period. and a situation in which entering a game ball into the second ball entrance 640 is more likely to impart an advantageous value to the player than entering the game ball into the first ball entrance 64; It becomes possible to create Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play a game in which a more advantageous value is likely to be awarded.

Furthermore, in this case, as in the modification shown in FIG. 329, even if any game state is set, It is preferable to configure the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 so that the degree of entry of the game ball into the ball hole 640 is the same. With such a configuration, the player can select which ball entrance the game ball is to enter, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as described in each control example, rather than the time saving state (first time saving) set based on the jackpot winning, the time saving state (second time saving) set based on the time saving winning by the time saving winning judgment It is configured such that a time saving state advantageous to the player, that is, a time saving state in which the time saving end condition is difficult to be established is easily set. That is, according to the setting opportunity of a time saving state, it comprises so that the advantageous degree of the set time saving state may be varied. As a result, it is possible to vary the period (time saving end condition) for which the time saving state (specific setting) is set depending on the determination result (setting trigger), so the game can be diversified and the interest can be increased. There is an effect that it can be improved.

In this case, depending on the game state before the time saving state is set, the second time saving is more advantageous to the player than the first time saving, and the first time saving is better than the second time saving. It is better to provide a case where the working hours are shortened which is advantageous to the person. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in which situation the time saving state was set.

More specifically, for example, when the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the end of the previous jackpot game (the number of times of addiction) exceeds a predetermined number, the time saving state is more advantageous than when it does not exceed the predetermined number. It may be configured so that it becomes easy to become

Next, in the above-described seventh control example, in one special symbol lottery, it is possible to win both the jackpot winning and the short-time winning (see FIG. 315). As a result, the jackpot winning (first discrimination result) and the short-time winning (second discrimination result) can be discriminated in duplicate, so that in one special symbol lottery, the jackpot winning and the short-time winning. , you can expect to win both a big hit and a short time, and various lottery results. Furthermore, in the seventh control example, when the time-saving winning and the jackpot winning overlap, a jackpot game more advantageous to the player than when the winning does not overlap is executed (Fig. 306). (b)). Therefore, since a specific game of a type advantageous to the player is likely to be executed due to redundant determination, the game can be diversified by providing the player with benefits corresponding to various determination results. has the effect of

It should be noted that, as a configuration for giving a privilege that is more advantageous to the player in the case of double winning than in the case of not winning multiple times, a configuration other than the above-described seventh control example may be used. The game state to be set after the game is finished may be configured to be able to set a game state (for example, variable probability state, time saving state, etc.) that is more advantageous in the case of double winning than in the case of non-overlapping winning.

In addition, in the seventh control example described above, after executing the time-saving winning determination (determining whether or not the second determination result), the jackpot determination (determining whether or not the first determination result) is performed In one special symbol lottery, when a time-saving lottery is won, the jackpot determination in the special symbol lottery can be executed in a time-saving state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the advantageous degree of the privilege game executed in the case of duplicate winning and the advantage degree of the privilege game executed in the case of non-multiple winning different.

Next, in the second modification of the fifth control example described above, the normal symbol high probability state (first time reduction) set based on the special symbol lottery jackpot winning, and the special symbol lottery time reduction winning The type of privilege given to the player when the jackpot is won in the state where the high probability state of the normal pattern is set based on the high probability state (second time reduction) and the high probability state of the normal pattern is set (jackpot The number of times of time saving given after the end of the game) is different (see FIG. 280(b)). Therefore, since the selection ratio in the type of privilege game (the content of the jackpot game and the number of times of time reduction given) is variable according to the setting type (first time reduction, second time reduction), the same normal pattern high probability state ( Effect that different benefits can be given to the player even in the second game state), and the interest in the game can be improved by diversifying the game without setting many game states. There is

In addition, in the second modification of the fifth control example described above, a difference is provided in the number of times of time saving to be given according to the setting type (first time saving and second time saving), but not limited to this, The content of the jackpot game to be executed (for example, the number of round games) may be made different.

Furthermore, in the second modification of the fifth control example described above, when the second time saving is set rather than the first time saving, that is, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set without the jackpot game being executed is configured to facilitate setting of a high probability state of normal symbols in which the end condition is difficult to be satisfied. In other words, when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set without winning the prize ball during the jackpot game, that is, the benefit given before the high probability state of the normal pattern is set than the first time reduction Since the less second time saving can lengthen the high probability state of the normal symbol, there is an effect that the privilege can be imparted fairly to the player.

Furthermore, in the second modification of the fifth control example described above, similarly to the first modification of the fifth control example and the fifth control example described above, time-saving winning determination only in the normal state (discrimination of the second determination result) is configured to be executable. In other words, except for the normal state, execution of the time-saving winning determination is regulated. Therefore, since the time-saving winning determination is not executed according to the game state, it is possible to make the player more interested in the set game state and expect the setting of the game state in which the second determination result can be determined. has the effect of

In addition, in the second modification of the fifth control example described above, to show the result of the special symbol lottery so as to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the first time saving is set or the second time saving is set (see FIGS. 278 and 279). That is, when the first time reduction is set, the specific effect (see FIG. 278 (a)) is executed for the first period obtained by adding the special symbol fluctuation time and the subsequent jackpot game period, and the second When time saving is set, it is configured to execute a specific effect (see FIG. 278(b)) for the second period which is the special symbol variation time (including fixed time).

More specifically, the fluctuation time and the jackpot game period are defined in advance corresponding to each special symbol lottery result so that the above-described first period and second period are substantially the same period, and the specific performance is performed. It is configured so that the performance period of is the same. By configuring in this way, as the effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the high probability state of the normal symbol is shown after the specific effect with the same effect period and the same effect mode is executed. A performance will be performed. Therefore, to make it difficult for the player watching the performance executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 to discriminate in which setting opportunity the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. can be done.

Next, in the sixth control example described above, it is configured to be able to execute the time-saving winning determination even during the time-saving state (second game state). , It is configured to be able to set the time saving state (second game state) of the time saving type in which the time saving end condition is difficult to be satisfied (the number of time saving times is large or the time saving winning probability is high).

Thus, the longer the period in which the time saving state is set, the easier it is to set the time saving state of the time saving type in which the time saving end condition is less likely to be satisfied, so that the privilege game can be easily executed.

In addition, in the sixth control example described above, as shown in FIG. 286(a), the time saving winning probability is changed according to the set game state, but even if the time saving winning probability is defined to be the same good. In addition, although the time-saving winning probability is varied according to the game state, the time-saving winning probability may be changed according to the number of special symbol lotteries after the last big win game is executed. In this case, when the number of special symbol lotteries after the last big winning game is executed exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 200 times), the time saving winning probability should be increased. By constructing in this way, a player who has not won a big win for a long time in the special symbol lottery can be easily provided with the privilege of short-time winning, which is different from the big win game. It goes without saying that this technical concept can be applied to other control examples.

In the gaming machine described with reference to FIG. 329, the first discrimination means (first special symbol lottery) capable of executing the first discrimination and the result of the first discrimination executed by the first discrimination means are the first A first privilege (jackpot game) can be granted based on the result of 1 discrimination (jackpot winning), and the result of the first discrimination is a second discrimination result (time saving winning) different from the first discrimination result. A first privilege giving means capable of imparting a second privilege (high probability state of normal symbols) based on that, and a second discrimination means (second special symbol lottery) capable of executing a second discrimination different from the first discrimination and the result of the second determination executed by the second determination means is the third determination result (winning the jackpot), the first privilege can be given, and the result of the second determination is the third determination result. a second privilege granting means capable of imparting a third privilege (small winning game) different from the first privilege and the second privilege based on a fourth determination result (small winning) different from the However, the third privilege is not given based on the first determination performed by the first determination means, and the second privilege is provided based on the second determination performed by the second determination means. It is configured so that there is no such thing as

As a result, different benefits can be given depending on whether the first determination is performed or the second determination, so that the player is motivated to perform different determinations. It is possible to play the game in a realistic manner, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous.

In the gaming machine related to <game property 2> described above, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are configured to be executable at the same time (in parallel), and both special symbols win the jackpot. In this case, a big hit game is executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol on the side where the special symbol variation is stopped first (the special symbol is confirmed and displayed), and the special symbol variation is stopped first (the special symbol is confirmed and displayed). Depending on the type of jackpot at the time, the game machine is configured to forcibly stop and display the other special symbol variation in a display mode indicating that the lottery result is lost. To make it possible to execute time-saving winning determination in any pattern lottery. And the first condition is established by the first determination means (time saving elected) It is determined that the first advantageous state (time saving state of the first privilege) is set by the first state setting means. A third advantageous state (third privilege time saving state) can be set. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 capable of executing the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery at the same time (parallel), different benefits are given according to the timing of short-time winning in each special symbol lottery. It is possible to set a time saving state to be done.

In <Other game characteristics> described above, a determination means capable of executing determination, a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game based on the fact that the result of the determination by the determination means is the first determination result, A game machine having game state setting means capable of setting one game state from among a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, The game state setting means provides a second determination result (second It is possible to set the second game state (second time saving B) based on the time saving B winning), and based on the establishment of the end condition (time saving end condition) in the state where the second game state is set The first game state can be set by pressing, and the result of the determination by the determination means executed in the state where the first game state is set is the third determination result (the third determination result) different from the first determination result and the second determination result It is possible to set a third game state (second time saving A) that is more advantageous to the player than the second game state based on the fact that the two time saving A win). Further, the discrimination means can perform discrimination so that the probability that the discrimination result will be the third discrimination result (selection rate 10%) is lower than the probability that the discrimination result will be the second discrimination result (selection rate 90%). .

Furthermore, as the end condition (time saving end condition of the second time saving B), the number of times of discrimination by the discrimination means executed in the state where the second game state is set (the number of times of special symbol lottery) has reached a predetermined number It is possible to set at least a first termination condition that can be established based on the above. In addition, it is possible to set a second end condition that can be established based on the fact that the result of discrimination by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result (minor winning).

In this case, as the setting type for setting the second game state by the game state setting means, the first setting (normal time saving state) that can set the second game state after the end of the privilege game execution means, and the determination means A second game state (time saving state) can be set without executing a privilege game based on the fact that the result of the performed decision is a second decision result (second time saving B winning) different from the first decision result. and a second setting, and at least a type setting means that can be set, and the game state setting means is different from the first game state (normal state) according to the setting type (time saving type) set by the type setting means It is possible to set an advantageous second game state (ordinary time saving state) which is more advantageous and a disadvantageous second game state (second time saving B) which is more disadvantageous than the first game state.

<Eighth control example>
Next, an eighth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 330 to 335. FIG. The fifth control example described above makes it difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 during the low probability state (normal state) of normal symbols, and the second ball during the high probability state (time saving state) of normal symbols. It is configured to make it easier to enter a game ball into the second ball entering means 640.例文帳に追加Furthermore, it was configured to execute the determination of the time-saving election (time-saving lottery) in the second special symbol lottery executed in the normal state. In addition, the lottery right of the second special symbol (special figure 2 reservation) was configured to be stored (reserved storage) up to a predetermined number (four pieces) as an upper limit.

In the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example configured in this way, the high-probability state of normal symbols (time-saving state) ends in the state of holding and storing the special figure 2 hold, and the low-probability state of normal symbols (normal state) is set, the second special symbol lottery based on the reserved and stored special figure 2 suspension is executed in the normal symbol low probability state (normal state), and the second executed during the normal state. When winning the time saving lottery in the 2 special pattern lottery, the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal pattern is set again.

In other words, the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal design is finished, and the low probability state (normal state) of the normal design is set for a predetermined period (the second special design lottery based on the special figure 2 reservation is executed Period) can be set as a period (retraction period) in which the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal pattern is easily set, so that the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal pattern ends. Even after playing the game, the player can be motivated to play the game.

On the other hand, in the eighth control example, in both the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state and the second special symbol lottery, the judgment of the time saving election (time saving lottery) can be executed, and the high It is constructed so as to win short working hours with a probability (most of the lost winnings), and the short working hours state (second short working hours) set based on the winning of short working hours becomes a game state more disadvantageous to the player than the normal state. They are different in terms of their structure.

In addition, in the eighth control example, the game board 13 is configured so that the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are easily executed alternately, and the above-mentioned second time-saving end condition is It is configured to set an end condition that is established when one type of special symbol lottery is continuously executed.

In the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth control example configured as described above, when the special symbol lottery executed in the state where the normal state is set does not win the jackpot (jackpot probability 1/300), , The second time saving is set by winning the time saving with a high probability (298/300). Then, the special symbol lottery is executed in the second time saving until the end condition of the second time saving is established.

In addition, as the end condition of the second time saving, the first time saving end condition that is established when the total number of special symbol lotteries executed during the second time saving reaches a specific number (100 times), and special in a predetermined order It is configured to set a second time saving end condition that is established when the pattern lottery is executed, and the second time saving end condition is established before the first time saving end condition is established. It consists of

Therefore, when the second time saving is set, the player can be motivated to play the game to satisfy the second time saving end condition in order to quickly end the second time saving.

In addition, according to the type of the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, the degree of advantage to the player is made different, and when a big win is won in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state. It is configured so that it is easier to set an advantageous game state after the end of the big win game than when the big win is won in the second special symbol lottery executed in the normal state.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in the type of the special symbol lottery executed after the second time saving is finished.

Now, with reference to FIG. 331, the configuration of the sorting unit 1064 will be described. 331(a) and (b) are diagrams showing the internal structure of the sorting unit 1064. FIG. Actually, a cover body is arranged on the front side, and the cover body is composed of a member whose inside can be seen through. It is configured so that it is difficult to visually recognize the inside.

At the top of the sorting unit 1064, a passage opening 1064b through which game balls can enter is provided. ing. A game ball that has passed through the passage port 1064b is alternately distributed by the distribution member 900 to the first ball entry port 64a and the second ball entry port 1641 arranged therebelow.

The distribution member 900 receives the game ball entered into the passage opening in the storage portion 900a or 900c of the distribution member 900. - 特許庁When a game ball is received by the storage portion 900a, the distribution member 900 rotates counterclockwise due to the weight of the game ball (see FIG. 331(a)), and moves the game ball to the first ball entrance. 64a. Here, each of the sorting members 900 is configured to be rotatable about 90 degrees in the left-right direction, and a magnet 900b is provided on the boundary wall between the storage section 900a and the storage section 900b.

On the base body provided on the rear side of the distribution unit 1064, the base-side magnet 901 is arranged at a position on the center line of the opening through which the magnet 901b of the distribution member 900 passes. The magnet 900b of the distribution member 900 and the base-side magnet 901 are configured to have polarities that repel each other. Specifically, the base-side magnet 901 is composed of a bar-shaped magnet fixed to the base body, and is configured to generate a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) at the tip. The base-side magnet 901 is arranged and fixed so that the tip thereof faces the sorting member 900 side.

The magnet 900b is also a bar-shaped magnet, similar to the base-side magnet 901, and is fixed to the sorting member 900 so that the tip thereof faces the base-side magnet 901 side. At a position where the distribution member 900 rotates and the boundary wall between the housing portion 900a and the housing portion 900b comes directly above (on the center line of the interval where about one game ball can enter the passage port), the base side magnet 901 and the magnet 900b of the sorting member 900 are closest to each other (tips face each other). Here, since the magnets are arranged to have the same polarity (for example, N pole and N pole), the magnets are repulsive and do not stop at the position where the boundary wall of the distribution member 900 faces directly upward. , left or right.

As a result, when the sorting member 900 reaches a position where the magnet 900b is on the center line of the passage port (upward position), the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901 repel each other, so that the sorting member 900 moves left or right. It rotates, and one of the storage portions 900a and 900b faces the side of receiving game balls entering the sorting unit 640 (the upper side of the gaming machine). Therefore, it is possible to prevent ball clogging from occurring as a result of a game ball entering the game ball coming into contact with the boundary wall between the housing portion 900a and the housing portion 900b.

In addition, due to the repulsion between the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901, for example, after the accommodation portion 900a receives the game ball and rotates about 90 degrees to the left, guiding the game ball to the first ball entrance 64a, It is possible to prevent the distribution member 900 from rotating to the right (accommodating portion 900a faces upward). As a result, after the game ball is guided to the first ball inlet 64a, the accommodation portion 900b faces upward, and the game ball entering the sorting unit 640 is received by the accommodation portion 900b and played. The distribution member 900 rotates about 90 degrees to the right due to the weight of the ball, and guides the game ball to the second ball entrance 1641 . In this way, the distribution member 900 can alternately guide game balls entering the distribution unit 640 to the first ball entrance 64 a and the second ball entrance 1641 . Therefore, the game balls can be equally distributed to the first ball entrance 64a and the second ball entrance 1641 to win a prize, and a lottery game (hereinafter referred to as A first lottery game) and a lottery game caused by winning a prize to the second ball entrance 1641 (hereinafter referred to as a second lottery game) can be efficiently executed.

The right second ball entrance 1640 is a ball entrance where, like the second ball entrance 1641, the lottery for the second special symbol is started when a game ball enters. In the second special symbol, the second entrance 1641 and the second entrance 1640 on the right side are combined to hold four balls.

In addition, a game ball that has passed through the right side of the variable display unit 80 and a game ball that has passed through the left side can enter the passage opening 1064b of the distribution unit 1064 (a size that allows one game ball to pass through). The right second ball entrance 1640 is configured so that only game balls that have passed through the right side can enter.

Here, FIG. 331(a) is a diagram showing a case where the sorting member 900 is stopped while being rotated to a position in which the accommodating portion 900a faces upward. In this case, when the game ball passes through the passage port 1064b, the game ball is accommodated in the accommodation portion 900a, and the distribution member 900 is rotated counterclockwise by the weight of the game ball, and the first entering ball is guided to the guide portion 900z1. A game ball is guided to the mouth 64a.

After the game ball is distributed to the first ball entrance 64a by the distribution member 900, the distribution member 900 is stopped at a position where the accommodation portion 900c faces upward, as shown in FIG. 331(b). After that, when the game ball passes through the passage port 1064b, it is housed in the housing portion 900c and distributed to the second ball entrance 1641.例文帳に追加Therefore, the balls can be alternately distributed to the first ball entrance 64 a and the second ball entrance 1641 .

Further, as shown in FIG. 331(b), among the game balls entered from the passage port 1061b of the distribution unit 1064, the distribution member 900 appropriately distributes them to the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 1641. The game balls that could not be guided to the distribution unit 1064 flow down the ball discharge path formed between the outer wall of the distribution unit 1064 and each ball entrance, and are discharged to the outside of the distribution unit 1064. Configure.

By configuring in this way, for example, game balls that flow into the passing port 1061b of the distribution unit 1064 collide with the distribution member 900 and flow down in the distribution unit 1064 without being guided by the guide portions 900z1 and 900z2. Even if such an event occurs, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of clogging of balls in the sorting unit 1064 .

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the position (rotating state) of the distribution member 900 is configured to be identifiable by a rotation sensor (not shown). Specifically, a rotation sensor capable of detecting the amount of rotation of the rotating shaft 900d of the distribution member 900 is provided, and the position of the distribution member 900 can be specified based on the detection result of the rotation sensor. Then, based on the position of the distribution member 900 specified based on the detection result of the rotation sensor, the game ball next entering the passage opening 1061b enters which ball entrance (first ball entrance 64a, second ball entrance 64a, second ball entrance 64a). It is configured so that it can be determined whether it is guided to the ball entrance 1061).

By configuring in this way, a notification effect for informing the player whether or not it is possible to continuously acquire special figure reservations of the same type, and continuous acquisition of special figure reservations of the same type Since it is possible to execute the guidance effect for making the second time saving end condition to be satisfied, the player can easily understand the game for establishing the second time saving end condition.

In the fifth control example, the rotation sensor is used to specify the position of the distribution member 900. However, the present invention is not limited to this. may be configured. Specifically, based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64a, the sorting member 900 determines that the accommodating portion 900c is facing upward, and determines that the ball is entered into the second ball entrance 1641. Based on this, the sorting member 900 is configured to identify the state in which the accommodating portion 900a faces upward. By configuring in this way, the position of the distribution member 900 can be specified without providing a dedicated sensor or the like. In addition, even if the distribution member 900 is rotated due to vibration or the like, the position of the distribution member 900 can be correctly specified by updating and determining the position each time the ball enters the entrance. can.

In the fifth control example, as described above with reference to FIG. and enter the game ball into a sorting unit 1064 when a new special figure reservation cannot be acquired based on the game ball entering each ball entrance. By varying the position of the distribution member 900, the special figure reservation of the same type can be continuously acquired without acquiring the special figure reservation, but it is not limited to this, for example, distribution Some of the game balls that have flowed into the unit 1064 are not accommodated in the distribution member 900, and can enter the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 2164. may be configured.

By configuring in this way, special figure reservation (special figure 1 reservation) corresponding to the first special symbol lottery using the distribution member 900 and special figure reservation (special figure 2 reservation) corresponding to the second special symbol lottery , and a configuration for acquiring the special figure reservation without using the distribution member 900 to acquire the special figure 1 reservation and the special figure reservation 2 in an irregular order. becomes possible. Therefore, it can be made easy to satisfy the second time saving end condition.

Returning to FIG. 330, the description continues. In the right area of the game board 13, there are a right second ball entrance 1640, an open state in which a game ball can be entered into the right second ball entrance 1640, and a game ball in the open state. An electric accessory 1640a is provided as a variable means that can be changed to a closed state where it is difficult to enter a ball.

This electric role product 1640a, like the electric role product 640a in the fifth control example described above, is executed when a normal symbol lottery is won in the normal symbol lottery executed based on the passage of the game ball through the through gate 67. It is configured to be variable from the closed state to the open state according to a predetermined variable pattern by a winning game (normal figure winning game). In addition, the technology related to the normal symbol lottery and the contents of the control process for the electric accessory 1640a executed based on winning in the normal symbol lottery are the first control example used in the above-described fifth control example. Since it is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in FIG.

That is, in the eighth control example, similarly to the above-described first control example, when winning in the normal symbol lottery, the game ball is easy to enter the right second ball entrance 1640 normal pattern winning game ( It is possible to execute a long open winning game) and a normal drawing winning game (normal open winning game) in which it is difficult to enter the game ball into the right second ball entrance 1640 than the long open winning game. In both the game state in which the normal symbol low probability state is set and the game state in which the normal symbol high probability state is set, the long opening winning game can be executed. there is

By configuring in this way, when a disadvantageous time-saving state disadvantageous to the player is set as the game state among the time-saving states, winning is won in the normal symbol lottery, and the long open winning game is executed. It is possible to enter a plurality of game balls into the right second ball entrance 1640 with . As a result, in the eighth embodiment, in which the special symbol lottery is executed according to the order of entry of the game balls, it is possible to continuously execute the special symbols of the same type (second special symbol), thereby reducing the disadvantageous time saving state. It is possible to make it easier to establish a time saving end condition (second time saving end condition) for ending.

Therefore, by winning the normal symbol lottery and executing the long open winning game, in addition to the privilege of efficiently executing the game special symbol lottery, the advantage of ending the disadvantageous time saving state can be given. A player can be interested in the result of the normal symbol lottery.

Although the detailed description will be described later, in this eighth control example, the time saving state (advantageous time saving state) that is advantageous to the player and the time saving state that is disadvantageous to the player (disadvantageous time saving state) are used as the time saving state. , and in terms of execution efficiency of the special symbol lottery, the advantageous time-saving state is configured to have higher execution efficiency than the disadvantageous time-saving state. More specifically, in the state in which the disadvantageous time saving state is set, the game ball is inserted into the right second ball entrance 1640 during the normal pattern winning game that is executed based on the winning in the normal pattern lottery. It is configured so that the degree of expectation that the ball can be thrown is about the same as in the normal state.

Furthermore, in terms of the benefits (jackpot game content, game state set after the jackpot game ends) that are given when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, the advantageous time-saving state is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantageous time-saving state. It is configured so that a privilege is given (becomes easier to be given). More specifically, the benefits given when the jackpot is won during the disadvantageous time-saving state are configured to be given (easier to be given) to the player than when the jackpot is won during the normal state. are doing.

Therefore, among the three game states of the normal state, the advantageous time-saving state, and the disadvantageous time-saving state, the advantageous time-saving state is the most advantageous game state for the player, and then the normal state is the game state that is advantageous to the player and disadvantageous. It is configured so that the time saving state is the most disadvantageous game state for the player.

In addition, in the eighth control example, the content of the time-saving end conditions for ending the advantageous time-saving state (advantageous time-saving end conditions) and the time-saving end conditions for ending the disadvantageous time-saving state (unfavorable time-saving end conditions) The contents of the regulations are different. Specifically, in both the advantageous time-saving end conditions and the unfavorable time-saving end conditions, the first time-saving end condition that is established based on the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the time-saving state is set is defined. In addition to the disadvantageous time-saving end condition, a second time-saving end condition is defined based on the execution order of the special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state.

Further, as described above, in the eighth control example, the distribution unit 1064 is configured so that game balls can easily enter the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 1641 alternately. Therefore, normally, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are alternately executed. Here, for example, when a long open winning game is executed based on winning in a normal symbol lottery, there is a game in which a game ball is entered into the right second ball opening 1640 by a right-handed game. Since it is executed, it is possible to create an event in which the second special symbol lottery is continuously executed.

Then, in the eighth control example, as the second time-saving end condition established based on the execution order of the special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state, based on the fact that the special symbol lottery of the same type is continuously executed It is configured to be able to set the second time saving end condition that is established. Therefore, the player to whom the disadvantageous time-saving state is set can be made to play a game while expecting that the long open winning game will be executed in order to satisfy the second time-saving end condition.

In addition, in order to continuously execute the special symbol lottery of the same type, even if the long opening winning game is not executed, for example, a state in which a new special symbol reservation cannot be acquired, that is, the special symbol reservation is suspended up to the upper limit number. It is conceivable to execute a game in which game balls flow into the sorting unit 1064 in the stored state. For example, in a state in which new special symbol variation is difficult to execute, for example, in a state where a left-handed game is executed during a jackpot game, and the special figure 1 reservation and the special figure 2 reservation are acquired to the upper limit number, further into the distribution unit 1064 It is conceivable to execute a game in which the position of the sorting member 900 is varied by causing the game balls to flow in.

In the eighth control example, during the jackpot game, by specifying the position of the distribution member 900, it corresponds to the special symbol of the same type based on the acquisition status (acquisition order) of the special figure 1 reservation and the special figure 2 reservation. It is configured to be executable guidance production (see Figure 333 (b)) for creating a state that can be acquired continuously the special figure reservation to be. By constructing in this way, during the jackpot game in which the right-handed game is executed, by executing the left-handed game based on the contents of the guidance effect to be executed, it is possible to make the player execute a game advantageous to the player. It is possible to provide a novel playability.

<Regarding the effect content in the eighth control example>
Here, with reference to FIGS. 332 and 333, the details of the effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth control example will be described.

In this eighth control example, the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) and variable state (High probability state of special patterns, high probability state of normal patterns) can be set, and in addition, advantageous time saving state as time saving state (time saving state set after the end of the jackpot game, and time saving when elected It is configured to be able to set a time saving state set with a low probability) and a disadvantageous time saving state (a time saving state set with a high probability when a time saving win is made).

The disadvantageous time-saving state is actually set to a high-probability state of normal symbols, but compared to the advantageous time-saving state, it is configured to make it difficult to enter the game ball into the right second ball entrance 1640, and is substantially normal. It is a time-saving state in which a game ball can be entered into the right second ball inlet 1640 only as much as the state (low probability state of normal symbols). Therefore, even if the time-saving state is set, if the disadvantageous time-saving state is set, in the same way as when the normal state is set, the right second entrance 1640 by the right-handed game It is structured so that a game in which a game ball flows into the sorting unit 1064 by a left-handed game is more advantageous to the player than a game in which the game ball enters the box.

When winning a jackpot with a special pattern in a normal state, a privilege (for example, a large number of rounds of a jackpot game, etc.) is given more advantageous than when winning a jackpot with a special pattern in a disadvantageous time-saving state. are doing. Therefore, the disadvantageous time saving state is a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the normal state. On the other hand, the advantageous time-saving state is configured so that a normal game is executed so that the game ball can be relatively easily entered into the right second ball entrance 1640, and a right-handed game is performed by the player. It is configured to be an advantageous game. Therefore, the game state becomes advantageous to the player in the order of disadvantageous time-saving state, normal state, and advantageous time-saving state.

Although the details will be described later, the disadvantageous time-saving state is a gaming state that can be set after the variable display ends when the time-saving lottery is won in the time-saving lottery executed in the special symbol lottery, and in the eighth control example, the time-saving lottery. , it is configured to be elected in a short time with a high probability (299/300). The conditions for ending the disadvantageous time-saving state differ depending on the type of special symbol that was elected in the disadvantageous time-saving state, and if the first special symbol is unfavorable time-saving election, the first special symbol is displayed once. When the variable display of one special pattern is executed continuously), or when the variable display of the first special pattern and the second special pattern is executed 100 times in total, the disadvantageous time saving state is terminated. On the other hand, when the disadvantageous time reduction is won with the second special symbol, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed once (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed continuously), or The disadvantageous time saving state is terminated when the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed 100 times in total.

As described above, in the gaming machine 13 in this control example, the game balls entered into the distribution unit 1064 (see FIG. 330) are moved by the distribution member 900 (see FIG. 331) to the first ball entrance 64a arranged below. (See FIG. 331) and the second entrance 1641 (see FIG. 331) are alternately distributed, and when the first entrance 64a (see FIG. 331) wins, the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, When the second entrance 1641 (see FIG. 331) is won, a lottery for the second special symbol is executed. The lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are executed in the order in which the game balls enter the corresponding ball entrances. For example, when winning in the order of the first entrance 64a (see FIG. 331) and the second entrance 1641 (see FIG. 331), the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are executed in that order. In this way, either the variable display for showing the lottery result of the first special symbol or the variable display for showing the lottery result of the second special symbol is difficult to be executed continuously.

Here, in this control example, an example of the case where the variable display of any special symbol type is continuously executed will be described. In the gaming machine 13, as described above, the distribution member 900 (see FIG. 331) distributes game balls to the first ball entrance 64a (see FIG. 331) and the second ball entrance 1641 (see FIG. 331). However, up to four pieces of winning information for each special symbol are reserved. Then, when the game ball newly wins the corresponding ball entrance in a state where the reserved number of each special symbol reaches the upper limit number (4 in this control example), the winning information is not reserved. (Hereinafter referred to as an overflow prize). Then, in a state where the number of reservations of both special symbols has reached the upper limit (in this control example, the number of reservations of the first special symbol and the number of reservations of the second special symbol are accumulated in total 8), the game ball When the ball enters the distribution unit 1064 (see FIG. 330), the distribution member 900 (see FIG. 331) distributes the game ball to the entrance different from the entrance corresponding to the eighth reserved special symbol type. However, it becomes an overflow winning, and the winning information is not reserved. In addition, since the distribution member 900 (see FIG. 331) changes its position by distributing the game balls, the next game ball entered in the distribution unit 1064 (see FIG. 331) is the eighth reserved special symbol. It is possible to distribute to the entrance corresponding to the type, and it is possible to continuously perform the variable display of the same type of special symbol type as the eighth hold, so that the disadvantageous time saving state can be ended. can. By constructing in this way, it is possible to motivate the player to shoot the game ball in order to save the hold in order to end the disadvantageous time saving state.

In this control example, the winning information of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured to be reserved up to four, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four, and is three. It may be set to 1 or less (for example, 2) or 5 or more (for example, 8). In addition, instead of displaying the reserved symbols in the small display area Dm19, the number of reserved balls may be indicated by a number in a part of the third pattern display device 81, or the four divided areas may be changed by the number of reserved balls ( For example, they may be displayed in different colors or lighting patterns. Further, since the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device 81 may not display the number of reserved balls.

FIG. 332(a) is an example of the display screen displayed when the second special symbol reservation is continuously obtained by overflow winning in the disadvantageous time saving state. When the disadvantageous time saving state is set, the number of remaining fluctuations until the chance fluctuation is displayed in the small display area Dm12, and when the fluctuation display of each special symbol is executed, the number is decremented by one and updated. Incidentally, the chance variation in this control example refers to the variable display of the special symbols for showing the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the normal state. In this way, the player can determine whether the current game state is the normal state or the unfavorable time saving state, and the player can easily determine whether to continue the game according to the number of remaining fluctuations until the chance fluctuation. ing.

In the small display area Dm1, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, and in the small display area Dm2, the second special symbol is being variably displayed, so that the player can easily determine which special symbol is being variably displayed. It is configured.

Reserved patterns of special patterns are displayed in the small display area Dm19, a hatched circle indicates that the first special pattern is reserved, and a black circle indicates that the second special pattern is reserved. . The display screen shown in FIG. 332(a) indicates that the number of reserved first special symbols is 3 and the number of reserved second special symbols is 4, and the reserved design hr6 and the reserved design hr7 are the Since it is a reserved design indicating winning information of two special designs, the variable display of the second special design is continuously executed. As described above, when the variable display of one of the special symbols is continuously executed, the unfavorable time-saving state ends, and the unfavorable time-saving state ends due to the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbols based on the reserved design hr7, and the reserved design. After stopping the special symbol variation based on hr7, the next special symbol variation display is the chance variation.

Here, if the display shown in the small display area Dm12 is decremented by one each time the variable display of the special symbol is executed, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the reserved symbol hr7 is executed, "until the chance variation 73 times" is displayed, and the number of remaining variations until the chance variation is actually executed does not match the number of remaining variations displayed in the small display area Dm12, causing the player to feel distrust of the game information. There is a risk of giving

Therefore, in this control example, it anticipates that the end condition of the disadvantageous time saving state as shown in FIG. (that is, the normal state is set), the effect of shortening the remaining variation count until the chance variation displayed in the small display region Dm12 is displayed in the small display region Dm17. By executing this, the number of remaining variations until the chance variation is actually executed matches the number of remaining variations displayed in the small display area Dm12, thereby providing correct game information.

In addition, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 332(a), by displaying "lucky" above the reserved pattern hr6 and the reserved pattern hr7, the player is notified in advance that the end condition of the disadvantageous time saving state is satisfied. It has a suggested configuration. By configuring in this way, the player can easily recognize in which hold the chance variation is executed, so that the player can easily understand the variation to which the player should pay attention.

In addition, in this control example, the number of remaining variations until the chance variation is displayed in the small display area Dm12, and the configuration is such that one is subtracted each time the variation display of the special symbol is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, an effect of accumulating points may be used, and a chance variation may be executed when a specific number of points (for example, 100 points) is accumulated. In this case, one point is added each time the variable display of the special symbol is executed, and when the variable display of the special symbol of the same kind is continuously executed, the points are accumulated up to the MAX. It is possible to produce a performance that does not give a sense of incongruity.

In addition, in this control example, the unfavorable time saving state ends after the variable display of the same kind of special symbols is continuously executed, and the variable display of the special symbol to be executed next is the chance variation, but this is not limited to this. Instead, when the variable display of the same type of special symbols continues, the disadvantageous time saving state may be ended at the start of the variable display of the special symbols to be executed later, and the chance may be changed.

Fig. 332(b) shows that the normal symbol win is won, and the electric accessory 1640a (see Fig. 330) attached to the right second ball entrance 1640 (see Fig. 330) is opened long as a normal symbol winning game. It is an example of a display screen displayed when there is A display mode indicating that the win of the normal symbol is won is displayed in the small display area Dm11, and when the winning game of the normal symbol is executed, the game method of the winning game of the normal symbol is displayed to the player in the small display area Dm4. "Right shot" is displayed for guidance, and the small display area dm18 indicates that the electric accessory 1640a (see FIG. 330) attached to the right second entrance 1640 (see FIG. 330) is in the open state. is displayed in the sub-display area Ds, and "Right hit and aim for an electric chew" is displayed. As a result, the player can be guided to play a game in which a game ball is shot toward the right second ball entrance 1640 (see FIG. 330) in an easy-to-understand manner, and the game can be played in a game method suitable for the game state.

Here, when the game ball wins in the right second ball entrance 1640 (see FIG. 330), the winning information of the second special symbol is reserved. In the case of FIG. 332(b), the last reserved design hr5 displayed in the small display area Dm19 is the reserved design of the second special design. is won, the variable display of the second special symbol can be continuously executed, and the disadvantageous time-saving state can be terminated. Therefore, in order to inform the player that it is advantageous to let the game ball enter the right second ball entrance 1640 (see FIG. 330), the main display area Dm displays "chance to get variable chance". be. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player strongly think that the game ball will enter the right second ball entrance 1640 (see FIG. 330), and to motivate the player to play the game.

In addition, when the last reserved design (for example, reserved design hr6) displayed in the small display area Dm19 is the reserved design of the first special design in a state where three reserved second special designs have already been accumulated. , even if a plurality of game balls are entered into the second ball entrance 1640 (see FIG. 330) on the right side, the winning information of the second special symbol is reserved only for one, so the variable display of the second special symbol is continued. I can't get it to run. Therefore, even if the game ball is won in the right second ball entrance 1640 (see FIG. 330), a different display mode (for example, "chance to accumulate hold" etc. when the end condition of the disadvantageous time saving state cannot be satisfied) ) may be displayed in the main display area Dm. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to provide appropriate game information to the player, and the reliability of the game information can be enhanced.

FIG. 333(a) is an example of a display screen displayed when suggesting that the unfavorable working hours reduction state ends. In the main display area Dm12, "three more times until the chance change" is displayed, and the change display of the first special pattern and the second special pattern after the disadvantageous time saving state is set is performed 98 times in total. is shown. In other words, when the variable display of the special symbols based on the reserved symbol hr2 ends, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed 100 times in total, and the end condition of the disadvantageous time saving state is established. In this case, since the special symbol lottery based on the reserved symbol hr3 is executed in the normal state, the reserved symbol hr3 is the first special symbol to suggest that the special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state. The reserved pattern corresponding to the winning information and the reserved pattern corresponding to the winning information of the second special pattern are displayed in a different display mode (a reserved pattern in which a star pattern is displayed in a white circle), and the upper part of the reserved pattern hr3 is displayed as "Attention". With this configuration, the player can easily recognize that the variable display of the special symbols based on the reserved symbols hr3 is the chance variation, and the player can easily recognize that the variable display based on the reserved symbols hr3 is executed. It is possible to increase the expectation for the variable display of the special symbols executed based on the reserved symbols hr3.

In addition, the main display area Dm displays "This chance change may be a lucky change", which suggests the result of pre-reading the winning information of the reserved symbol hr3. It suggests that the lottery result of the special pattern based on is likely to be a big hit. As a result, the player's expectation for the variable display of the special symbols executed based on the reserved symbols hr3 can be further enhanced.

In this control example, the prefetch result of the reserved design hr3 is suggested in the main display area Dm, and the special design lottery based on the reserved design hr3 is normally performed by the display mode of the reserved design hr3 displayed in the small display area Dm19. Although the configuration suggests execution, the configuration is not limited to this. It is also possible to suggest a look-ahead result by the display mode of the reserved symbol hr3. For example, it is also possible to notify the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot by changing the color of the reserved symbol.

FIG. 333(b) is an example of the display screen displayed during the ending period during the jackpot game based on winning the normal jackpot. In the small display area Dm, a display mode indicating that the jackpot has been won is usually displayed, and in the small display area Dm5, "Ending" is displayed to inform the player that it is the ending period of the jackpot game. ing.

Although the details will be described later, in this control example, it is configured such that winning the jackpot with the first special symbol is more advantageous to the player than winning the jackpot with the second special symbol. Then, when the jackpot game after winning the normal jackpot is completed, the first lottery for the special symbol after the jackpot game is finished is executed in the normal state. Therefore, by displaying "Lucky, normal fluctuation starts from special figure 1" in the sub display area Ds, the special symbol lottery executed first after the end of the jackpot game is advantageous to the player. By informing in advance that the game will be executed with one special pattern, the player can also be interested in the variable display of the special pattern after the end of the jackpot game. When the first special symbol lottery after the end of the jackpot game is executed with the second special symbol, a different display mode (for example, a display mode in which "Lucky" is not displayed) is displayed.

During the jackpot game, since the variable display of the special symbols is not executed, it is a period in which the player is likely to accumulate reservations. As described above, if the game ball enters the distribution unit 1640 (see FIG. 330) when the reserved number of each special symbol reaches the upper limit, the winning information is not reserved, but the distribution member 900 (see FIG. 331) Position can be changed. In this control example, the position of the sorting member 900 can be identified by a rotation sensor 990 (not shown). Therefore, in this control example, it is advantageous for the player to identify the special symbol type corresponding to the reserved symbol hr8 and the position of the distribution member 900 (see FIG. 331), and to vary the position of the distribution member by overflow winning. It is configured to notify whether or not.

Specifically, when the next winning information can be reserved, the winning information of the special symbol type similar to the special symbol type corresponding to the reserved symbol displayed at the end of the small display area dm19 is reserved. If it is not possible, that is, if the position of the sorting member 900 can be changed by overflow winning, the winning information of the same type of special symbol type can be held. As shown in the figure, the message "Put one ball in the navel before the big win ends, great chance" is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm, and the current sorting member 900 (see FIG. 331) is displayed in the small display area Dm18. By displaying the schematic diagram corresponding to the position, an effect is executed to prompt the player to enter the game ball into the sorting unit 1640 (see FIG. 330). By configuring in this way, the player can enjoy the game in which the game ball is shot even during the ending period of the big win.

In addition, when the next winning information can be reserved, the winning information of the special symbol type of the same type as the special symbol type corresponding to the reserved symbol displayed at the end of the small display area dm19 can be reserved. In the case of , the position of the distribution member 900 (see FIG. 331) is variable due to the overflow winning, so that the winning information of the same type of special symbol type can no longer be reserved, so the center of the main display area Dm There is no display of "a big chance if you put one ball in the navel before the jackpot ends" in the section.

In addition, when the next winning information can be reserved, the winning information of the special symbol type of the same type as the special symbol type corresponding to the reserved symbol displayed at the end of the small display area dm19 can be reserved. , a display mode may be displayed in the center of the main display area Dm to notify that the overflow winning is disadvantageous. By configuring in this way, it becomes easier for the player to judge whether the overflow winning is in an advantageous state or a disadvantageous state.

In this control example, the rotation sensor 990 determines the position of the distribution member 900 (see FIG. 331). The position may be determined each time. Specifically, based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64a (see FIG. 331), the sorting member 900 (see FIG. 331) assumes a state in which the accommodating portion 900c (see FIG. 331) faces upward. configured to discriminate. With this configuration, the position of the distribution member 900 (see FIG. 331) can be determined without providing a dedicated sensor or the like. Even if the distribution member 900 (see FIG. 331) is rotated due to vibration or the like, the distribution member 900 (see FIG. 331) can be correctly determined by updating the position each time the ball enters the entrance. 331) can be determined.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the eighth control example>
Next, details of the electrical configuration in the eighth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 334 to 338. FIG. In contrast to the fifth control example described above, the eighth control example includes a portion of the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, a portion of the configuration of the RAM 203, and the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. and a part of the configuration of the RAM 223 are changed. It should be noted that detailed description of the same contents as those of the fifth control example described above will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 334(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the eighth control example will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in the eighth control example replaces the ROM 202 (see FIG. 244(a)) of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example with the variation pattern selection 8 table 202gb instead of the variation pattern selection 5 table 202db. a jackpot type selection 8 table 202gd instead of the jackpot type selection 5 table 202dd; a time reduction random number 8 table 202ge instead of the time reduction per random number 5 table 202de; and a time reduction type selection 8 table instead of the time reduction type selection 5 table 202df. The difference is that 202gf is provided.

The jackpot type selection 8 table 202gd, like the jackpot type selection 5 table 202dd described above, is a data table that is referred to when selecting a jackpot type that is set when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery. In the above-described fifth control example, the special figure 1 jackpot 5 table 202dd1 is referred to when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, and the special figure 1 jackpot 5 table 202dd1 is referred to when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery. 5 table 202dd2 for special figure 2 jackpot, but in this eighth control example, since it is configured to select the jackpot type with the same distribution contents regardless of the special symbol type, the first The jackpot type selection 8 table 202gd is referred to when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery and when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery.

Here, with reference to FIG. 335(a), detailed contents of the jackpot type selection 8 table 202gd will be described. FIG. 335(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 8 table 202gd. As shown in FIG. 335(a), in the jackpot type selection 8 table 202gd, the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot and the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 are associated with the jackpot type. (Jackpot A8, jackpot B8) are defined.

Specifically, when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is normal (normal state), the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 94”, and the “jackpot A8” is “95 to 99”. "jackpot B8" is defined for the range of ". In addition, when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is other than normal (normal state), that is, in the time saving state or the variable probability state, the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49". ”, and “jackpot B8” for the range of “50 to 99”.

The jackpot type "jackpot A8" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 16 rounds and the probability variable jackpot game is executed. It is a jackpot type in which "60" is set to the value. If the ball does not flow down (pass through) the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the variable probability jackpot game (when not V), the variable probability counter 203i will be set after the jackpot game ends. "0" is set to the value.

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "jackpot A8" is 95 (0 to 94) in the normal state. Therefore, when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery in the normal state, the ratio of determining the "jackpot A8" is 95% (95/100). On the other hand, since there are 50 pieces (0 to 49) in a state other than the normal state, if a special symbol lottery wins a jackpot in a game state other than the normal state, the ratio of determining "jackpot A8" is 50% (50/100 ).

The jackpot type "jackpot B8" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 6 rounds and the probability variable jackpot game is executed. It is a jackpot type in which "60" is set to the value. If the ball does not flow down (pass through) the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the variable probability jackpot game (when not V), the variable probability counter 203i will be set after the jackpot game ends. "0" is set to the value.

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "jackpot B8" is 5 (95 to 99) in the normal state. Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery in the normal state, the ratio of determining "jackpot B8" is 5% (5/100). On the other hand, since there are 50 pieces (50 to 99) in a state other than the normal state, if a special symbol lottery wins a jackpot in a game state other than the normal state, the ratio of determining "jackpot B8" is 50% (50/100 ).

That is, in the eighth control example, when a big win is won in the special symbol lottery, the selection ratio of the big win type set according to the set game state is varied, and when a big win is won during the normal state. It is configured so that the player can more easily select a jackpot type (jackpot A8) that is advantageous to the player than when the jackpot is won in a state other than the normal state.

By configuring in this way, the player can play the game while expecting that many special symbol lotteries will be executed during the normal state.

Next, the time saving per random number 8 table 202ge is explained. This time saving random number 8 table 202ge is a data table referred to in the time saving determination executed when the result of the special symbol lottery is other than the jackpot winning (lost), and is used to determine whether or not the time saving winning has occurred. It is used.

Here, with reference to FIG.335(b), the content of random number 8 table 202ge per time saving is demonstrated. FIG. 335(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content defined in the random number 8 table 202ge per time saving. As shown in FIG. 335 (b), the time saving per random number 8 table 202ge includes a special symbol type (special symbol type) and a game state, and the first per random number counter C1 that is determined to be a time saving election in correspondence with A value (range) is specified.

Specifically, when the special symbol type is the first special symbol lottery and the game state is the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), the acquired first random number counter C1 A value range of "3 to 899" is defined as a determination value for short working hours winning. In addition, when the game state is other than the normal state, the determination value of the time-saving election is not defined (indicated by "-" in the figure). Similarly, when the special symbol type is the second special symbol lottery and the game state is the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is A range of "3 to 899" is defined as a determination value for winning short working hours. In addition, when the game state is other than the normal state, the determination value of the time-saving election is not defined (indicated by "-" in the figure).

Here, in the eighth control example, the determination of time-saving election in the special symbol lottery (time-saving lottery) is performed when the special symbol lottery does not win the jackpot, that is, when the jackpot lottery is lost and won. A range of "0 to 2" is defined as the value of the first winning random number counter C1 that is determined to have won a jackpot in the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state (the first winning random number 5 (See table 202da). Therefore, when a special symbol lottery executed in a normal state does not win a jackpot, it is configured to always win a time-saving win.

In addition, in the eighth control example, as described above, the content of the time saving random number 8 table 202ge is defined so that the time saving winning is always won when the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state is lost and won. Without being limited to this, it may be configured to define the range of judgment values for time-saving winning so as to be part of the case of losing and winning in the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state. By constructing in this way, it becomes possible to continuously execute the special symbol lottery without winning the time-saving lottery.

In addition, in the present eighth control example, as shown in FIG. 335 (b), the determination value of time-saving election is the same regardless of the special symbol type, but not limited to this, different determinations depending on the special symbol type A value may be specified. For example, when the first special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state, it may be more difficult to win the time-saving lottery than when the second special symbol lottery is executed. In this way, by varying the probability of short-time winning according to the type of the special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, the type of the special symbol lottery executed is continuously executed during the normal state. To make a player interested in which special symbol type of special symbol lottery is executed (will be executed) during a normal state, since the number of times of special symbol lottery can be easily varied. can be done.

In addition, when the probability of short-time winning is changed according to the type of special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, a special symbol lottery that is advantageous to the player during the normal state among the plurality of special symbol types (for example, the first special symbol) in which is executed (a privilege advantageous to the player is likely to be given at the time of winning the jackpot) is preferably constructed so as to make it more difficult to win the time saving. With this configuration, when the first special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state and the result of the lottery is a jackpot winning, a privilege advantageous to the player is easily given, and In the case of winning other than the big hit, the special symbol lottery can be made easier to execute again in the normal state, so that the special symbol type more advantageous to the player can be set.

In addition, as in the eighth control example, basically, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are configured to be easily alternately executed, and the second special symbol lottery is more likely than the first special symbol lottery. When the special symbol lottery that is more disadvantageous to the player is executed, the second special symbol lottery executed during the normal state is the first special lottery executed during the normal state. It may be configured so that it is more difficult to win the time-saving than the pattern lottery. By constructing in this way, even if the special symbol lottery executed first in the state where the normal state is set is the second special symbol lottery, after that, the first special symbol lottery is executed while continuing the normal state. can be made easier to implement. By configuring in this way, for example, when the disadvantageous time-saving state is ended and the normal state that is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantageous time-saving state is set, the second special symbol lottery that is disadvantageous to the player is 1. It is possible to suppress the fact that the unfavorable time saving state is set again only by executing the game once, and the player's desire to play is lowered.

Further, as shown in FIG. 335 (b), in the eighth control example, it is configured to execute the determination of the time saving election (time saving lottery) only when the normal state is set, but this is limited to Without this, even if another game state is set, it may be configured to execute the determination of the time-saving election (time-saving lottery).

For example, even if a disadvantageous time-saving state that is disadvantageous to the player (time-saving state that is set when a specific time-saving type is elected) is set among the time-saving states, determination of time-saving election (time-saving lottery) can be executed, and when short working hours are elected during a disadvantageous short working hours state, the short working hours state in which the conditions for ending the short working hours are immediately established is set. By configuring in this way, a game aiming to establish a time saving end condition and a game aiming to win a time saving in order to end the disadvantageous time saving state for the player who is playing the game in the disadvantageous time saving state, can be run in parallel.

In addition to this, when the time saving is won during the disadvantageous time saving state, it may be configured to shift to the time saving state (advantage time saving state) set after the jackpot game ends, or during the advantageous time saving state. Judgment of time-saving election (time-saving lottery) may be configured to be executable, and when time-saving election is made during an advantageous time-saving state, the system may be configured to shift to a disadvantageous time-saving state.

In this way, the determination of the time saving election (time saving lottery) is executable in the situation where the time saving state is already set, and when the time saving win is made, the advantage degree is different from the set working time saving state. By configuring it so that it can transition to a state, a period in which it is better to win short working hours (a period in which the short working hours state is set) and a period in which it is better not to win short working hours (a period in which the short working hours state is set) , can be provided. In addition, in the eighth control example, by winning the time saving during the normal state, it is configured to make it easier to set the disadvantageous time saving state than the advantageous working time saving state, so the period when the normal state is set It's a good period not to win a short time.

In this case, for example, the content of the effect for suggesting the result of the time-saving winning to the player may be configured to be different according to the set game state in addition to the result of the time-saving winning. If you win a short-time win during a good period (a period in which a short-time disadvantageous state is set), set a production mode that congratulates the player, and a period in which it is better not to win short-time (an advantageous short-time state is set) period), it is preferable to be able to set an effect mode that discourages the player. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the production in the production mode corresponding to the degree of advantage of the player for the result of the same time-saving lottery, so that the game can be provided to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. can.

Returning to FIG. 334(a), the description continues. The variation pattern selection 8 table 202gb is, like the variation pattern selection 5 table 202db in the fifth control example described above, a data table in which the variation pattern of the special symbol variation executed to show the result of the special symbol lottery is defined. And, as a game state, as a data table referred to in the state in which the variable probability state or the time saving state is set, instead of the variable probability / time saving 8 table 202db2 (see FIG. 248 (a)) 8 table 202db2 (see FIG. 336(a)). A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

Here, with reference to Drawing 336 (a), detailed contents of 8 tables 202db2 for probability variation and time saving are explained. FIG. 336(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the 8 table 202db2 for probability variation/time reduction. As shown in FIG. 336 (a), the 8 table 202db2 for probability variation / time saving has a different variation pattern of variable time depending on the number of special figures reserved (number of special figures 1 reserved, number of special figures 2 reserved) is different in that

As shown in FIG. 336(a), in the eighth control example, as in the above-described control examples, a variation pattern with different variation times is defined according to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1. However, the illustration of the variation pattern defined for each range of values of the variation type counter CS1 is omitted.

Specifically, when the time saving type is "short time after jackpot (high probability state of normal pattern set after jackpot game)", the number of special figures 1 pending (0 to 4), the number of special figures 2 pending (0 to 4), and various variation patterns are defined corresponding to the values of the acquired variation type counter CS1, and a special pattern with a variation time of “5 to 90 seconds” according to the selected variation pattern It is configured to allow variation. Although detailed explanation is omitted, similar to each control example described above, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win, it corresponds to a longer variation time (90 seconds) than when the big win is not won. Various variation patterns are defined in association with the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the result of the special symbol lottery so that the variation pattern can be easily selected.

In addition, the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the value of the number of special figures pending, so that the variation pattern corresponding to the shorter variation time (for example, 5 seconds) is more likely to be selected when the number of special figures pending is larger than when it is small. , and various variation patterns are defined in association with .

Next, when the time saving type is "time saving A8", the number of special figures 1 pending is "0 to 2", and the number of special figures 2 pending is "0 to 2", the fluctuation time of "5 to 90 seconds" Various variation patterns corresponding to are defined, and if the number of special 1 reservations is "0 to 2" and the number of special 2 reservations is "3, 4", the fluctuation time is "5 to 60 seconds" Corresponding various short fluctuation patterns are defined. Also, if the special figure 1 reservation number is "3" and the special figure 2 reservation number is "0 to 2", various short fluctuation patterns corresponding to the fluctuation time of "5 to 60 seconds" are defined, If the special figure 1 reservation number is "3" and the special figure 2 reservation number is "3, 4", a short variation pattern corresponding to the variation time of "5 seconds" is defined.

Furthermore, if the special figure 1 reservation number is "4" and the special figure 2 reservation number is "0 to 2", various short fluctuation patterns corresponding to the fluctuation time of "5 to 60 seconds" are defined There, when the special figure 1 reservation number is "3" and the special figure 2 reservation number is "3, 4", a short variation pattern corresponding to the variation time of "5 seconds" is defined.

Here, in the eighth control example, the special symbol is made to correspond to the order (winning order) in which the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 1641, and the right second ball entrance 1640. It is configured to execute a lottery, and is configured to select a variation pattern based on the acquired special figure 1 reservation number and special figure 2 reservation number, and when each special figure reservation number is small A variation pattern with a short variation time is more likely to be selected when the number of variations is larger than that of the number of variations. By configuring in this way, the state in which a large number of special figure reservations are acquired makes it easier to execute the special symbol lottery in a short fluctuation time, so the number of special figure 1 reservations and the number of special figure 2 reservations It is possible to make it difficult for any of the above to reach the upper limit.

By configuring in this way, game balls are made to flow into the distribution unit 1064 in a state where both the special figure 1 reserved number and the special figure 2 reserved number have reached the upper limit number, and the position of the distribution member 900 is variable By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to play a game in which the same type of special figure reservation is continuously acquired.

In addition, even if the special figure pending number is close to the upper limit number, it may be possible to select a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time with a low probability (eg, 1/100). By configuring in this way, it is possible to create a period in which game balls are easily made to flow into the distribution unit 1064 in a state in which the special figure reservation number has temporarily reached the upper limit number.

Next, when the time saving type is "time saving B8", it corresponds to each value of the special figure 1 reservation number (0 to 4), the special figure 2 reservation number (0 to 4), and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 Then, various variation patterns are defined, and the special symbol variation is executed with a variation time of "5 to 60 seconds" according to the selected variation pattern. Although detailed explanation is omitted, similar to each control example described above, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win, it corresponds to a longer variation time (90 seconds) than when the big win is not won. Various short fluctuation patterns are defined in association with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the result of the special symbol lottery so that the fluctuation pattern can be easily selected.

The time saving type selection 8 table 202gf is a data table that is referred to when selecting the time saving type that is set when the time saving type is won, and is the time saving type selection 5 table 202df in the above-described fifth control example (Fig. 248 (b ) is provided in place of ).

Here, with reference to Drawing 336 (b), detailed contents of time saving classification selection 8 table 202gf are explained. FIG. 336(b) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the time saving type selection 8 table 202gf.

As shown in FIG. 336(b), in this eighth control example, it is configured to be able to win a time-saving election in both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery (see FIG. 335(a)). , The selection ratio of the time saving type is configured to be different between the case of winning the time saving in the first special symbol lottery and the case of winning the time saving in the second special symbol lottery.

Specifically, when the symbol type is "Special Figure 1 (first special symbol)", the value of the acquired time saving type selection counter CC1 is in the range of "0 to 95". , The time saving type "time saving B8" is defined for the range of "96 to 99", and if the symbol type is "special figure 2 (second special symbol)", the acquired time saving type selection counter CC1 value The time saving type “time saving A8b” is defined for the range of “0 to 98”, and the time saving type “time saving B8” is defined for the value of “99”.

Here, in the eighth control example, when "time reduction A8 (time reduction A8a, time reduction A8b)" is set as the time reduction type, a disadvantageous time reduction state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the normal state is set. When "time saving B8" is set, an advantageous working time saving state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state is set. In addition, various control contents in the disadvantageous time-saving state, that is, the control contents for executing the game during the normal symbol high probability state so as to be more disadvantageous to the player than the normal state, were explained in the above-described control examples. In order to adopt each technology, the detailed description is omitted, but for example, the probability of winning in the normal pattern lottery is higher than the normal state, but the open pattern of the game per normal pattern to be executed is the game ball is executed in an open pattern that makes it difficult to enter the right second ball entrance 1640, or a variation time longer than the normal state is easily selected as the variation time of the normal symbol.

In addition, as a definition of a disadvantageous time-saving state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the normal state, the technical idea of making the special symbol lottery more difficult to execute than the normal state is disadvantageous to the player, as well as the special symbol lottery. Of course, even if the ease of execution is the same, or even if it is slightly more difficult to execute in the normal state, the technical idea that the benefits given based on the special symbol lottery that is executed is disadvantageous to the player is of course included. be

When "shortening of working hours A8a" is set, that is, 95% of the time when shorting of working hours is won in the special figure 1 lottery, a short of working hours state is set. Then, as the end condition of the disadvantageous time saving state, the first time saving end condition that is established when the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the time saving state reaches 100 times, and the special time saving condition that is executed after the time saving state is set A second time-saving end condition that is established when the symbol lottery is the special figure 1 lottery is set. In other words, when two special figure 1 reservations are obtained in succession, that is, when the special figure 1 lottery is continuously executed, the second time saving end condition is established.

By configuring in this way, when a short-time lottery is elected in a special figure 1 lottery and a disadvantageous short-time state is set, the type of special symbol lottery to be executed next to the special figure 1 lottery that is elected at that time is a special figure 1. In the case of lottery, the disadvantageous time-saving state can be terminated by the first special drawing lottery executed during the disadvantageous time-saving state, and the normal state can be set. Therefore, it is possible for the player to play the game with the aim that the second time saving end condition is met before the first time saving end condition is met.

In addition, in the present eighth control example, it is configured so that the second time saving end condition can be established according to the type of the first special figure lottery executed during the disadvantageous time saving state, but the first time saving end condition If it can be established according to the execution order of the special symbol lottery to be executed before is established, other contents may be defined as the second time saving end condition.

For example, a second time-saving end condition that is established when a plurality of special lotteries are executed according to a predetermined rule in a disadvantageous time-saving state may be defined, or the results of a plurality of consecutive special lotteries, or You may prescribe the 2nd time-saving end conditions established when each variation pattern of special design variation for showing the result of a plurality of special figure lottery corresponds to a predetermined rule. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the second time saving end condition is satisfied and the disadvantageous time saving state ends.

In other words, as shown in FIG. 336(b), in the eighth control example, if the time saving is won in the special figure 1 (first special symbol) lottery, the special figure 2 (second special symbol) lottery is short in time. It is configured to make it easier to set an advantageous time-saving state that is more advantageous to the player (it is easier to select time-saving B8) than when winning. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in the type of the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state.

FIG. 334(b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in this eighth control example. As shown in FIG. 334(b), with respect to the RAM 203 (see FIG. 244(b)) in the fifth control example described above, the variation execution flag 203ga, the variation order storage area 203gb, and the time reduction flag 203gc are added. are different. The rest is the same, and the same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The variation execution flag 203ga is a flag indicating whether the first special symbol is preferentially varied or the second special symbol is preferentially varied. It should be noted that this flag is an area that is backed up even when power is cut off, and in the initial state where the RAM is cleared, etc., the first special symbol is preferentially set.

The variable order storage area 203gb is an area for storing the winning order for each reserved data (reserved design) stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. . Eight storage areas are set in the variable order storage area 203gb, and the order is stored in the previous storage area in order of winning. In addition, the storage area is also shifted based on the start of fluctuation of the special symbol.

The time reduction flag 203gc is a flag for indicating that it is a period in which it is possible to shorten the disadvantageous time reduction state (time reduction state in which the time reduction type "time reduction A8" is set), which is a time reduction state that is disadvantageous to the player. It is set to ON when it is a period in which it is possible to shorten the disadvantageous time saving state. While the time saving flag 203gc is set to ON, a process for determining whether or not a condition (second time saving end condition) for shortening the disadvantageous time saving state is established is executed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 337 and 338, regarding the contents of the electrical configuration of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the eighth control example, focusing on the differences from the fifth control example described above, explain. It should be noted that detailed description of the same contents as those of the fifth control example described above will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 337(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the eighth control example will be described. FIG. 337(a) is a diagram schematically showing the configuration defined in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the eighth control example. As shown in FIG. 337(a), the ROM 222 in the eighth control example is different from the ROM 222 in the fifth control example described above (see FIG. 249(a)) in that a look-ahead suspension mode selection table 222ga is added. are different.

Prefetching reservation mode selection table 222ga, when selecting the display mode of the pending design in the prefetching reservation effect (see FIG. 333 (a)) executed as the effect (prefetching effect) for showing the result of prefetching for the acquired special figure reservation is a data table referenced by In the eighth control example, by executing the look-ahead processing, the special figure reservation corresponding to the special symbol lottery executed during the normal state can be specified, and the look-ahead reservation performance is executed for the special figure reservation. configured as possible.

Here, the detailed contents of the prefetch suspension mode selection table 222ga will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 338 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the prefetch suspension mode selection table 222ga. As shown in Figure 338, in the look-ahead suspension mode selection table 222ga, the special figure type corresponding to the special figure suspension to be the target of the look-ahead suspension production, the look-ahead result (preliminary determination result) corresponding to the special figure suspension, Each parameter is defined so that the display mode of the pending symbol is determined based on the obtained value of the effect counter 223f.

Specifically, when the special figure type is "special figure 1 (first special symbol)" and the look-ahead result is "jackpot", the value of the acquired production counter 223f is "0 to 79" "2 stars" for the range, "3 stars" for the range of "80 to 99" are defined as the display mode of the reserved pattern, respectively, and if the look-ahead result is "time saving B8" , "2 stars" for the range of "0 to 49" and "1 star" for the range of "50 to 99", respectively, are displayed as reserved symbols. It is defined as a mode, and if the look-ahead result is "time saving A8a" or "off", the value of the acquired production counter 223f is "1 star" for the range of "0 to 99" It is defined as a display mode of the reserved design.

In other words, as the display mode of the pending symbols to be the target of the look-ahead pending effect, it is possible to suggest to the player that the special symbol lottery, which is more advantageous to the player as the number of displayed stars increases, will be executed in the normal state. It is configured so that a look-ahead pending effect is executed.

In addition, in the eighth control example, the display mode selected using the look-ahead pending mode selection table 222ga is set to the display mode of the pending pattern to be the object, and the display mode is changed from the normal display mode. , the display mode of the pending symbol can be changed to the display mode showing the effect result of the prefetching pending effect, but without being limited to this, the display mode selected with reference to FIG. Temporarily stored as the final performance result of the performance, and as the look-ahead suspension performance, the display mode of the special figure suspension to be the target of the look-ahead suspension performance is varied stepwise so as to finally become the final performance result stored. It may be configured to execute the look-ahead suspension effect as follows. In this case, for example, every time the special symbol lottery is executed before the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol lottery that is the target of the prefetching suspension effect, the display mode of the special symbol suspension that is the target of the prefetching suspension effect is changed. In this case, many special symbol lotteries are executed from the execution of the look-ahead suspension effect to the execution of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol suspension that is actually targeted. It is preferable to make it easier to change the display mode of the reserved symbols to the display mode corresponding to the final effect result in the case of fewer cases than in the case of fewer cases.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game with the intention of always acquiring a large number of reserved special symbols. In addition, since it is possible to easily change the effect result of the prefetching pending effect based on the number of special pending effects that have already been acquired at the time the prefetching pending effect is executed, for example, according to the number of special pending effects that have already been acquired It is possible to easily execute a variety of prefetching suspension performances without determining whether or not the prefetching suspension performance is to be executed and without varying the content of performance results of the prefetching suspension performance.

If the special figure type is "special figure 2 (second special symbol)" and the look-ahead result is "jackpot", the value of the acquired production counter 223f is "0 to 99" for the range " 2 stars” is defined as the display mode of the reserved pattern, and when the look-ahead result is “time saving B8”, the value of the acquired production counter 223f is “2” for the range of “0 to 29” "star", "1 star" for the range of "30 to 99" is defined as the display mode of the reserved pattern, respectively, and if the look-ahead result is "time saving A8b" or "off" , "1 star" is defined as the display mode of the pending symbol for the range of "0 to 99" for the value of the obtained effect counter 223f.

In the eighth control example, as described above with reference to FIGS. 335(a) and 336(b), the first special symbol lottery is the second special It is configured to execute a special symbol lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the symbol lottery, and as shown in FIG. It is configured so that it is easier to obtain an effect result (a display mode with a large number of stars) that is more advantageous to the player than when the special figure 2 is reserved.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to predict the look-ahead result in more detail by referring to the performance result of the look-ahead suspension performance and the type of the special figure suspension to be the performance target.

In addition, in the eighth control example, as shown in FIG. 333, the reserved pattern corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation and the special figure 2 reservation so that the player can grasp the type of special figure reservation that has already been acquired The reserved design corresponding to the is configured to be displayed in a different display mode, but not limited to this, the reserved design corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation and the reserved design corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation may be configured to display in the same display mode or in a display mode with a difference that is difficult for the player to visually recognize. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for a player to predict at what timing the second time-saving end condition is satisfied, and to make it difficult to predict the look-ahead result based on the display mode of the look-ahead suspension performance. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player interested in the game until the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol reservation targeted for the look-ahead reservation performance is actually executed.

Furthermore, in the eighth control example, it is configured to be able to execute the look-ahead suspension effect only for the special figure suspension corresponding to the special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, but it is not limited to this, and the time saving state A performance (pseudo-read-ahead suspension performance) equivalent to the look-ahead suspension performance may be configured to be executable even for the special figure suspension corresponding to the special symbol lottery executed during (disadvantageous time-saving state).

When executing this pseudo look-ahead pending effect, the display mode is determined for a specific pending pattern in the same manner as the look-ahead pending effect, and as shown in FIG. Executes the pseudo-prefetch pending effect that has been set. Then, when the special symbol lottery corresponding to the specific reserved pattern targeted for the pseudo-prefetching suspension performance is executed, the pseudo-prediction suspension performance is executed as the performance performed during the special figure fluctuation period. It is preferable to display the effect result of the pseudo look-ahead pending effect for informing the player of.

By constructing in this way, even when the unfavorable time-saving state continues for a long time, the pseudo-read-ahead suspension performance equivalent to the look-ahead suspension performance is executed, thereby making it easy to provide the player with a game that does not get bored. be able to. Also, in this case, the reserved pattern corresponding to the special drawing reservation whose result is the jackpot winning is more likely to be the target of the pseudo-reading reservation performance than the reserved pattern corresponding to the special drawing reservation whose result is not the jackpot winning. It should be configured as follows. Thus, even when the performance result of the pseudo-prefetching suspension performance is displayed for informing the player that the pseudo-prediction suspension performance has been executed, the possibility of winning the jackpot can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from significantly decreasing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 337(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth control example will be described. FIG. 337(b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth control example.

As shown in FIG. 337(b), the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth control example is the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example RAM223 (see FIG. 249(b)) has a distribution state storage area 223ga, a pending state storage area 223gb, a flag 223gc during disadvantageous working hours are different. Identical contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The distribution state storage area 223ga is a storage area for storing information for indicating the position (distribution state) of the distribution member 900 provided in the distribution unit 1064 . In the sorting state storage area 223ga, information for specifying which of the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 1641 the game ball next flowing into the sorting unit 1064 enters is stored. be.

In the eighth control example, as shown in FIG. 331(a), a ball entry sensor 1064a is provided as a detection means for detecting game balls that have passed through the passage port 1064b of the distribution unit 1064, and voice lamp control is performed. The device 113 is configured to be able to determine the detection result of the entering ball sensor 1064a. Based on the winning command output from main controller 110 and the detection result of ball entering sensor 1064a, the position (sorting state) of sorting member 900 can be specified, and an image icon corresponding to the specified result is configured. can be displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (see display area Dm18 in FIG. 333(b)).

As a result, for the player, when the game ball is allowed to flow into the distribution unit 1064 next time, which ball entrance (first ball entrance 64, second ball entrance 1641) the game ball will enter. It is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp whether he/she will be guided.

Therefore, for example, a left-handed game is executed for causing a plurality of game balls to flow into the distribution unit 1064 during the jackpot game, and the image icon displayed according to the position (distribution state) of the distribution member 900 is changed to the following. By determining which ball entrance (first ball entrance 64, second ball entrance 1641) the game ball that has flowed into the distribution unit 1064 enters, the already acquired special figure reservation The special design type same as the special design type corresponding to the last special design reservation (special design reservation in which the winning information is stored in the 8th storage area of the storage area of the winning information storage area 223b) It is possible to facilitate the creation of a sorting state in which game balls are guided to ball entrances capable of acquiring the type of lottery right.

In addition, in the eighth control example, the position (distribution state) of the distribution member 900 can be specified based on the detection result of the entering ball sensor 1064a and the information included in the winning command, but this is not limitative. Instead, a detection means capable of directly detecting the position (distribution state) of the distribution member 900 may be provided.

The pending mode storage area 223gb is a storage area for temporarily storing the pending mode set by the prefetching pending effect, and is a pending mode (display mode) selected by referring to the prefetching pending mode selection table 222ga. ) is stored with information for identifying the corresponding special figure reservation. Then, in the pending number display update process (see S4106 in FIG. 346) executed in the main process (see FIG. 346) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, the stored information is read.

Further, although detailed description is omitted, the execution of a new look-ahead suspension effect is restricted during the period when information is stored in the suspension mode storage area 223gb. In other words, during the period when the look-ahead pending effect is being executed, the time saving state will end before all the special pending effects that have been acquired are consumed, and the normal state will be set, so it will be executed after that If the transition of the game state is predicted based on the special lottery, there is a high possibility that the result of the prediction and the actual transition of the game state are different, and a highly reliable performance is executed for the player. Because it becomes difficult, during the execution of the look-ahead suspension effect, based on the look-ahead result of the special figure suspension after the special figure suspension that is the target of the look-ahead suspension effect in progress Do not execute the process to identify the transition content of the game state Configure. As a result, the processing load on the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

The unfavorable time saving medium flag 223gc is a flag for indicating that the disadvantageous time saving state is set among the time saving states, and is set to ON when the time saving type "working time saving A8a" or "working time saving A8b" is set. be done. Then, in the winning command process 8 (see S4292 in FIG. 351), when receiving a normal figure winning information command indicating that a long opening per game is executed, the setting status of the disadvantageous time saving flag 223gc is determined ( S4451 in FIG. 351), when it is determined that it is set to ON (S4451 in FIG. 351: Yes), the effect for suggesting that the normal figure long open game (electric churong open) is executed A corresponding display command is set (S4405 in FIG. 351). As a result, as shown in FIG. 332, it is possible to notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the second time-saving end condition for ending the disadvantageous time-saving state is likely to be established. And when it determines with having received the state command which shows that the disadvantageous time saving state ended (S9051 of FIG. 348: Yes), it is set to OFF (S9052 of FIG. 348).

<About control processing contents of the main controller in the eighth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 339 to 345, among the control processing contents of main controller 110 in the present eighth control example, differences from the fifth control example described above will be mainly described. The pachinko machine 10 of the eighth control example terminates the process of determining the order of execution of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery and the time saving state with respect to the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example described above. The contents of the process of determining whether or not the time-saving end condition for the game is satisfied and the process executed when the game ball starts winning are different.

Specifically, the special symbol variation process 8 (see S10154 in FIG. 339) is replaced with the special symbol variation process 5 (see S104 in FIG. 252), and the start winning process is replaced with the start winning process 5 (see S195 in FIG. 258). The difference is that process 8 (see S10195 in FIG. 344) is executed. Other processing contents are the same, and the detailed description of the same contents is omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 339, the contents of the special symbol variation process 8 (S10154) will be described. FIG. 339 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of special symbol variation processing 8 (S10154). As shown in FIG. 339, the special symbol variation process 8 (S10154) is a process executed to start a new special symbol variation in contrast to the above-described special symbol variation process 5 (see S104 in FIG. 252). The difference is that the contents and the contents of the process executed when the special symbol variation being executed is stopped and displayed are different, but the rest is the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the special symbol variation process 8 (S10154) is executed, first, the same processes of S201 to S203 as the special symbol variation process 5 (see S104 in FIG. 252) are executed. After that, the variation execution determination process 8 (S10251) is executed. Details of this variation execution determination process 8 (S10251) will be described later with reference to FIG. 340, but a process for determining the type of special symbol variation to be newly executed is executed.

When the processing of S10251 is finished, next, it is determined whether the type of special symbol variation to be newly executed is special figure 2 (second special symbol) (S10252), and when it is determined that it is special figure 2 (S10252: Yes), the same S205 to S207 and S251, S252 as the special symbol variation process 5 (see S104 in FIG. 252) are executed, and this process is finished.

On the other hand, in the process of S10252, when it is determined that it is not special figure 2 (S10252: No), next, whether the type of special symbol variation to be newly executed is special figure 1 (first special symbol) Determined (S10253), if it is determined that it is a special figure 1 (S10253: Yes), S211 ~ S213 same as the above-mentioned special symbol variation processing 5 (see S104 in FIG. 252), and processing of S251, S252 and terminate this process. In addition, in the processing of S10253, when it is determined that it is not special figure 1 (S10253: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

Also, in the process of S202, if it is determined that it is changing (S202: Yes), update process 5 (Fig. 252 S253) of the update process 8 (S10254) is executed instead of the time saving setting process 5 (S254 in FIG. 252), the time saving setting process 8 (S10255) is executed instead, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 340, detailed description will be given of the variation execution determination process 8 (S10251) executed in the special symbol variation process 8 (see S10154 in FIG. 339). FIG. 340 is a flow chart showing the details of the variation execution determination process 8 (S10251). This variation execution determination process 8 (S10251) is to perform the special symbol variation performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area. 203b is processing for determining which execution area to execute based on the values of various counters stored.

In the variation execution determination process 8 (S10251), first, the variation execution flag 203ga is initialized by setting 0 (S10271), and the data in the variation order storage area 203gb is acquired (S10272). After that, the data in the change order storage area 203gb is shifted (S10273). In the process of S310273, the data stored in the first to eighth areas of the change order storage area 203gb are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, 1st area→execution area, 2nd area→1st area, 3rd area→2nd area, 4th area→holding 3rd area, 5th area→4th area, 6th area→ The data in each area is shifted in the order of 5th area, 7th area→reserved 6th area, 8th area→reserved 7th area, and so on. After shifting the data, it is determined whether or not the data in the execution area is special figure 1 (1) (S10274).

In the process of S10274, when it is determined that the data in the execution area is special figure 1 (1) (S10274: Yes), the variation execution flag 203ga is set to variation execution (1) in special figure 1 (S10275) , ends this process and returns to the special symbol variation process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the data in the execution area is not special figure 1 (1) (S10274: No), it is determined whether the data in the execution area is special figure 2 (2) (S10276). In the process of S10276, if it is determined that the data in the execution area is special figure 2 (2) (S10276: Yes), the variation execution flag 203gb is set to variation execution in special figure 2 (S10277), this processing and return to special symbol variation processing.

In the process of S10276, if it is determined that the data in the execution area is not the special figure 2 (2) (S10276: No), since there is no reserved ball to be executed variable, the variable execution flag 203gb remains in the initial state, this processing and return to special symbol variation processing.

As described above, by executing the variation execution determination process 8 (S10251), the various pending memories (special figure pending) stored in the variable order storage area 203gb can be varied in the order in which they are stored.

Next, with reference to FIG. 341, the process content of the time saving lottery process 8 (S8076) is demonstrated. Figure 341 is the flowchart which shows the processing contents of time saving lottery processing 8 (S8076). This time saving lottery process 8 (S8076) is the time saving lottery process 5 (see S8006 in FIG. 254) executed in the special symbol determination process 5 (see S251 in FIG. 253) of the special symbol variation process 8 (see S10154 in FIG. 339) ), and the difference is that the conditions for executing the time-saving lottery (judgment of time-saving election) are changed according to the game specifications.

Specifically, when the time saving lottery process 8 (S8076) is executed, regardless of the type of the special symbol variation to be executed this time Without executing the processing of S8101 for determining), the same processing of S8103 to S8106 as the above-described time saving lottery processing 5 (see S8101 in FIG. 254) is executed, and this processing ends.

That is, in this eighth control example, as described above with reference to FIG. Therefore, in the time saving lottery process 8 (S8076), regardless of the type of special symbol variation to be newly performed, only the game state at the time when the special symbol variation is newly performed is determined. It is determined whether or not to execute a time-saving lottery (determination of time-saving election).

Thus, in the time-saving lottery process 8 (S8076), the process of determining whether the execution conditions (time-saving lottery execution conditions) of the time-saving lottery (judgment of time-saving election) are satisfied, and the time-saving lottery execution conditions are established. It is configured to execute a process of executing a time-saving lottery (judgment of time-saving winning) when For example, in addition to the normal state, it is configured to execute the time-saving lottery even when it is set in a specific game state (for example, a disadvantageous time-saving state). In this case, a process of determining whether the flag 223gc during disadvantageous working hours is set to ON may be added to the process of S8103.

Next, referring to FIG. 342, the processing contents of update processing 8 (S273) will be described. FIG. 342 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of update processing 8 (S273). In this update process 8 (S273), a new process is added as a process for determining whether the time saving end condition is satisfied with respect to the update process 5 (see S253 in FIG. 256) in the fifth control example described above. They are different in that respect.

Specifically, when the update process 8 (S273) is executed, it is first determined whether the time saving flag 203gc is set to ON (S8351), and it is determined that the time saving flag 203gc is set to ON. If so (S8351: Yes), the time saving flag 203gc is set to OFF (S8352), then it is determined whether the time saving end condition is satisfied (S8353), and it is determined that the time saving end condition is satisfied If (S8353: Yes), reset the value of the time-saving counter 203h to 0 (S8354), determine the command indicating time-saving reduction (S8355), then update process 5 described above (see S253 in Figure 342) is the same Execute the processing of S8301 to S8306, the value of the probability variation counter 203i, the time saving counter 203h, the game state after updating various values, the state command indicating the presence or absence of time saving reduction (S8356), and end this processing .

Also, in the process of S8351, if the time saving flag 203gc is not set to ON (S8351: No), in the process of S8353, if it is determined that the time saving end condition is not satisfied (S8353: No), Move to the process of S8301, execute the process of S8301 ~ S8306 same as the update process 5 described above (see S253 of Figure 342), the probability variation counter 203i, the value of the time saving counter 203h, game state after updating the various values , set a state command indicating the presence or absence of time saving (S8356), and terminate this process.

As shown in the update process 8 (S273), in the eighth control example, when the time reduction flag 203gc is set to ON, that is, the disadvantageous time reduction state in which the time reduction type "time reduction A8" is set is set. In that case, it is configured so that a special time-saving end condition can be satisfied only for a predetermined period after the disadvantageous time-saving state is set, and whether the time-saving end condition that can be satisfied for a limited time has been satisfied are configured so that they can be identified.

Specifically, if a short-time lottery wins a short-time lottery and a disadvantageous short-time state is set, the special symbol variation of the same type as the special symbol type that won a short-time lottery is 1 after the short-time state (unfavorable short-time state) is set. It is configured so that the time-saving end condition is established when executed as the special symbol variation of the time. By configuring in this way, it is possible to shorten and end the disadvantageous time saving state, so that the player can be motivated to play the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 343, the process content of the time saving setting process 8 (S10255) will be described. FIG. 343 is a flow chart showing the contents of the time saving setting process 8 (S10255). This time saving setting process 8 (S10255) is compared to the above-described time saving setting process 5 (see S254 in FIG. 257). different, otherwise identical. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.

Specifically, after executing the processing of S8351 and S8352, which are the same as the time saving setting processing 5 (see S254 in FIG. 257), the time saving flag 203gc is set to ON (S8371), and then S8353 and S8354 Execute the process and terminate this process.

By configuring in this way, when the time saving state is set, only when the time saving is won (only when the time saving lottery is won) Since the time saving flag 203gc is set to ON, update processing 8 (Fig. 342 (See S273 of)), the determination process of whether or not the time saving end condition (second time saving end condition) for shortening the time saving state is satisfied is executed unnecessarily (the time saving type “time saving A8” is set It is possible to suppress the fact that it is executed during the time saving state (game time saving state) set based on the jackpot winning without a win.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 343, in the eighth control example, when the time saving is elected, the time saving flag 203gc is always set to ON, but not limited to this, the disadvantageous time saving state ( It is configured to determine whether or not the time-saving type "time-saving A8") has been set, and to set the time-saving flag 203gc to ON when it is determined that the disadvantageous time-saving state (time-saving type "time-saving A8") has been set. Also good.

Next, with reference to FIG. 344, the contents of the start-on process 8 (S10195) will be described. FIG. 344 is a flow chart showing the contents of the start-on process 8 (S10195). This start-up process 8 (S10195) is different from the above-described start-up prize process 5 (see S195 in FIG. 258) by adding a process of storing information in the change order storage area 203gb and the contents of the prefetch process. It is different in that it has been changed. Other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Specifically, when the start-on process 8 (S10195) is executed, the same processes of S601 to S651 as the above-described start-on winning process 5 (see S195 in FIG. 258) are executed, and after the process of S651 is completed, , Set the special figure 1 (1) to the first area of the change order storage area 203gb (S671), and move to the process of S607. In the process of S671, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d or the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is referred to, and if the total value is 1, the first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 2, the second area is the first area, if the value is 3, the third area is the first area, and if the value is 4, the fourth area is the first area. By determining the value set in the variation order storage area 203gb in the above-described variation execution determination process 8 (S10251), the starting port varies the first special symbol as in the eighth control example, Even if there are two types of variations, one that varies the second special symbol, the variations can be started in the order of winning the starting gate.

Next, the processing of S607 to S652, which is the same as the starting winning processing 5 (see S195 in FIG. 258), is executed. When the processing of S652 is finished, the special figure 2 (2) is set to the first area of the fluctuation order storage area 203gb (S672), the look-ahead processing 8 is executed (S673), and this processing is finished. In the process of S672, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d or the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is referred to, and if the total value is 1, the first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 2, the second area is the first area, if the value is 3, the third area is the first area, and if the value is 4, the fourth area is the first area. By determining the value set in the variation order storage area 203gb in the above-described variation execution determination process 8 (S10251), the starting port varies the first special symbol as in the eighth control example, Even if there are two types of variations, one that varies the second special symbol, the variations can be started in the order of winning the starting gate.

Next, referring to FIG. 345, the contents of the prefetching process 8 (S673) will be described. FIG. 345 is a flow chart showing the contents of prefetching process 8 (S673). In this look-ahead process 8 (S673), in contrast to the look-ahead process 5 (see S653 in FIG. 259) in the above-described fifth control example, the game state when the special symbol lottery corresponding to the pre-read winning information is executed. It is different in that it is configured to specify and set a winning command including the specified information (information indicating the game state at the time of the hold change), and other than that is the same, so detailed description thereof is omitted do.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 346 to 355, the contents of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the eighth control example will be described. In this eighth control example, liquid crystal effect execution management processing 8 (S4181 in FIG. 354) is executed as processing executed in the main processing (see FIG. 346) of the audio lamp control device 113 in contrast to the fifth control example described above. 355), the command determination process 8 (see S4183 in FIG. 347), and the variable display setting process 8 are executed. Other processing contents are the same, and detailed description of the same processing contents is omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 346, the processing contents of the main processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in the eighth control example will be described. FIG. 346 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the main processing. As shown in FIG. 346, in the tenth control example, liquid crystal effect execution management processing 8 (S4181 in FIG. 354) and preceding winning detection processing are performed for the main processing of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example described above. 8 (S4182 in FIG. 355), command determination processing 8 (see S4183 in FIG. 347), and variable display setting processing 8 are executed. Other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 347, the contents of the command determination process 8 (S4183) will be described. FIG. 347 is a flow chart showing the contents of the command determination process 8 (S4183). In this command determination process 8 (S4183), in place of the state command reception process 5 (S4282) in command determination process 5 (see S4182 in FIG. 262) of the fifth control example described above, state command reception process 8 (FIG. 348 S4291) is replaced with the winning command process (S4212), the winning command process 8 (see S4292 of FIG. 351) is replaced with the big win related process (S4218), and the big win related process 8 (S4293) is executed. are different, and otherwise identical. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 348, the contents of the state command reception process 8 (S4291) will be described. FIG. 348 is a flow chart showing the contents of the status command reception process 8 (S4291). As shown in FIG. 348, in state command reception processing 8 (S4291), the state command received from main controller 110 is If it is determined that the game state has been changed to the normal state based on the included information (S9003: Yes), the processing contents to be executed, and the game state based on the information included in the state command received from the main controller 110 It is different in that it is different from the processing content executed when it is determined that is changed to the time saving state (S9005: Yes). Since other processing contents are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the state command reception process 8 (S4291) is executed, the same processes from S9001 to S9003 as the state command reception process 5 (see S4282 in FIG. 265) in the fifth control example described above are executed. Then, in the processing of S9003, if it is determined that the gaming state has been changed to the normal state (S9003: Yes), then it is determined whether the flag 223gc during disadvantageous time reduction is set to ON (S9051), and ON (S9051: Yes), the unfavorable time saving flag 223gc is set to OFF (S9052), the normal state effect setting process 8 is executed (S9053), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S9051, when it is determined that the unfavorable time saving flag 223gc is not set to ON (S9051: No), the processing of S9052 is skipped and this processing ends. Details of the normal state effect setting process 8 (S9053) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S9003, if it is determined that it has not been changed to the normal state (S9003: No), then it is determined whether the game state has been changed to the time saving state (S9005), and it is determined that it has not been changed. If so (S9005: No), the same processing of S9007 to S9010 as the state command reception processing 5 (see S4282 in FIG. 265) in the fifth control example described above is executed, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S9005, when it is determined that the state has been changed to the time saving state, the time saving state effect setting processing 8 is executed (S9054), and then this processing ends. The contents of the time saving state effect setting process 8 (S9054) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 349, the processing contents of the normal state effect setting process 8 (S9053) executed in the state command reception process 8 (S4291 in FIG. 348) will be described. FIG. 349 is a flow chart showing the contents of the normal state effect setting process 8 (S9053). This normal state effect setting process 8 (S9053) is different from the above-described normal state effect setting process (S9004 in FIG. 264) in that the processing contents in the case of shifting from the disadvantageous time saving state to the normal state are added. The other processing contents are the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the normal state effect setting process 8 (S9053) is executed, first, the game state set before the game state set this time (game state before change) is read from the sub-state setting area 223g (S9101). , It is determined whether the game state before the change is a disadvantageous time saving state (S9151). In the processing of S9151, when it is determined that it is in a disadvantageous time saving state (S9151: Yes), the display command for the production mode corresponding to the chance variation is set (S9152), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S9151, if it is determined that it is not in a disadvantageous time saving state (S9151: No), the same S9102 to S9104 processing as the above-described normal state effect setting process (see S9004 in FIG. 264) is executed, and this End the process.

By setting the display command for the production mode in the process to S9152, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the display mode showing that the normal state is set based on the establishment of the time saving end condition of the disadvantageous time saving state background image is displayed. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the special symbol variation to be executed next is the special symbol variation (lottery) to be executed in the normal state.

Next, with reference to Drawing 350, processing contents of time saving state production setting processing 8 (S9054) performed in state command reception processing 8 (S4291 of Drawing 348) are explained. Figure 350 is the flowchart which shows the processing contents of time saving state production setting processing 8 (S9054). This time saving state effect setting process 8 (S9054) is different from the above-described time saving state effect setting process (see S900 in FIG. 266) in that the processing contents in the case of shifting from the normal state to the time saving state are changed. They are different, and the other processing contents are the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the time saving state production setting process 8 (S9054) is executed, first, the same S9301 to S9304 processes as the time saving state production setting process (see S900 in FIG. 266) are executed. Then, in the process of S9304, if it is determined that the game state before the change is the normal state (S9304: Yes), the number of times of shortening time included in the command received this time is set to the value of the counter 223da during shortening time (S9305) After that, it is determined whether the time saving type of the time saving state set this time is time saving A8 (S9381), and if it is determined that it is time saving A8 (S9381: Yes), the disadvantageous time saving medium flag 223gc is set to ON. (S9382), set a display command for showing the effect mode corresponding to the unfavorable time saving (S9383), and terminate this process. On the other hand, in the process of S9381, when it is determined that the time saving type of the time saving state set this time is not the time saving A8 (S9382: Yes), the processes of S9382 and S9383 are skipped and this process ends.

Next, the contents of the winning command process 8 (S4292) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 351 is a flow chart showing the contents of the winning command process 8 (S4292). This winning command process 8 (S4292) is the above-described winning command process (see S4212 in FIG. 177), the process content when receiving the winning information command for the general figure and the winning information command for the special figure The difference is that the contents of the processing in the case are changed. Other processing contents are the same, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the winning command process 8 (S4292) is executed, first, the same processes of S4401 to S4403 as the winning command process (see S4212 in FIG. 177) are executed. Then, in the process of S4403, if it is determined that there is winning information, that is, if it is determined that the winning information command for the normal pattern received this time contains the winning information indicating that the normal pattern lottery will be won (S4403 ; Yes) then determines whether the disadvantageous time saving flag 223gc is set to ON (S4451). A display command for displaying is set (S4405).

That is, in the eighth control example, information indicating that a game will be executed per normal pattern long open in the general pattern winning information acquired in the state where the disadvantageous time saving state is set (specific normal pattern If the hit information) is included, an effect is executed to suggest the player a normal pattern long open hit (electric churong open). By constructing in this way, the player who is playing the game in the disadvantageous time-saving state is given an opportunity to continuously execute the special symbol lottery of the same type (second special symbol lottery). Since it can be notified before the game is actually executed per normal pattern long open, the game can be played while expecting the disadvantageous time saving state to end (shorten).

Furthermore, as in the eighth control example, the game method (left-handed game) that is executed when the disadvantageous time-saving state is set, and the game method that is executed during the normal figure long open game (right-handed game ), in the pachinko machine 10 in which the game board 13 is configured to be different, it is determined that the normal long open winning game is executed before the normal long open open winning game is actually executed. By making it possible to notify the player, it is possible to set a grace period for the player to change the game method, so that the player can execute a game corresponding to the normal figure long open per game can be made easier.

In addition, in the eighth control example, it is configured so that an effect for suggesting a normal pattern long opening hit (electric churong opening) is executed based on the reception of the winning information command related to the normal symbol. In other words, it is possible to suggest that the game will be executed per normal pattern long open before the normal symbol lottery that wins per normal pattern long open is executed, but it is limited to this Without this, the period from the execution of the normal pattern lottery that wins per normal long open to the stop display of the lottery result (variable period per normal) is used for the player to hit the normal long open. It may be configured to be able to suggest that a game will be played.

Furthermore, every time a winning information command related to the normal pattern is received, it is determined whether information indicating that the normal pattern long open per game is executed is included, and information indicating that the normal pattern long open per game is executed When it is determined that it is included, a calculating means is provided that can calculate the period until the game is executed per normal long open, and based on the period calculated by the calculating means, open normal long It may be configured to determine the period during which an effect is executed to suggest to the player that a winning game will be executed. In this case, for example, if the normal pattern per fluctuation period is shorter than a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), the stage before the normal pattern per fluctuation is executed, for example, the normal pattern long open per game is executed It is sufficient that the production can be executed from the stage of receiving the winning information command related to the normal symbol indicating that the game will be played.

Next, with reference to FIG. 352, the processing contents of special figure winning information command processing 8 (S4451) executed in winning command processing 8 (see S4292 in FIG. 351) will be described. Figure 352 is the flowchart which shows the processing contents of winning information command processing 8 for special figure (S4451). This special figure winning information command process 8 (S4451) is a process executed when a winning information command related to a special symbol is received. Based on the information, a performance mode (prefetching performance) is set for suggesting the information included in the winning information command to the player before the special symbol lottery corresponding to the winning information is executed. process is executed.

In this eighth control example, by executing this special figure winning information command process 8 (S4451), the display mode of the pending symbol is displayed corresponding to the information for indicating the winning winning included in the winning information command. It is possible to change the display mode of the reserved design in correspondence with the information for indicating the special design type included in the winning information command.

Furthermore, in the eighth control example, in order to make it possible to suggest to the player which is the special symbol reservation corresponding to the special symbol lottery executed in a specific game state (normal state), When a winning information command is received, the game state when the special symbol lottery corresponding to the received winning information command is executed can be determined in advance.

By configuring in this way, by confirming the display mode of the special figure reservation displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special figure reservation is executed for the player. It is possible to make the player predict the game state when the game is played.

Specifically, when the special figure winning information command process 8 (S4451) is executed, first, the current game state is extracted (identified) based on the information set in the sub-state setting area 223g (S4501 ), it is determined whether the value of the counter 223da during time saving is greater than 0 (S4551). If it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223da is greater than 0 (S4551: Yes), then it is determined whether the disadvantageous time saving flag 223gc is set to ON (S4552), and is set to ON If it is determined (S4552: Yes), that is, if the winning information command received this time is the winning information command received during the disadvantageous time saving state, whether the time saving end condition for ending the disadvantageous time saving state is established is predicted (S4553), and based on the result of whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied predicted in the processing of S4553, whether the time saving end condition is satisfied (the special symbol lottery corresponding to the winning information command received this time is in the normal state (S4554).

In the processing of S4554, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state (S4554: Yes), the display mode (number of stars) of the corresponding pending symbol with reference to the look-ahead pending mode selection table 222ga is determined (S4555), and information for indicating the determined pending mode (display mode of the pending pattern) is stored in the pending mode storage area 223gb (S4556). Then, based on the information included in the received special figure winning information command (including the display command for indicating the display mode determined in the processing of S4555) is set (S4507), this processing finish.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4551, when it is determined that the value of the counter 223da during time saving is not greater than 0 (S4551: No), in the processing of S4552, it is determined that the disadvantageous time saving flag 223gc is not set to ON. When (S4552: No), in the processing of S4554, if it is determined that the time saving end condition is not satisfied (S4554: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S4507.

Next, the jackpot related process 8 (S4293) executed in the command determination process 8 (see S4183 in FIG. 347) will be described. In this jackpot related process 8 (S4293), the ending process ( 180), ending processing 8 (S4293) is executed, and otherwise the same processing is executed. Here, with reference to FIG. 353, the contents of the processing executed in ending processing 8 (S4293) will be described. FIG. 353 is a flow chart showing the contents of the ending process 8 (S4293).

In the ending process 8 (S4293), for the above-described ending process (see S4715 in FIG. 181), the type of the special symbol lottery executed for the first time after the end of the big win game (after the end of the small win game) is selected by the player. It is different in that the process for setting the production mode of the next fluctuation special figure type notification production for notification is added.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 353, when the ending process 8 (S4293) is executed, the winning information Based on the information stored in the storage area 223a, the next variation special figure type (special symbol type) is read (S4851), and a display command for indicating the read special figure type is set (S4852). Then, execution of the ending display is set (S4804), and this processing ends.

By setting the display command for indicating the special figure type read out in the processing of S4852, as shown in FIG. It is possible to display the display mode for showing to the player. Also, in the processing of S4851, if it is determined that no information is stored in the winning information storage area 223a, that is, if no special figure reservation is obtained, it is stored in the winning information storage area 223a. Since the special symbol type of the special symbol lottery executed for the first time after the end of the big win game cannot be notified to the player based on the information, the special symbol lottery executed for the first time after the end of the big win game is displayed on the ending screen. The processing for displaying the display mode for showing the special figure type to the player is skipped.

In addition, without being limited to this, for example, based on the processing result of the preceding winning prize detection processing 8 (see S4182 in FIG. 355) to be described later, the special symbol type of the special symbol lottery to be executed next is predicted, and the prediction result A display command for displaying a display mode based on the above may be set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 354, the contents of the liquid crystal effect execution management process 8 (S4181) will be described. FIG. 354 is a flow chart showing the contents of the liquid crystal effect execution management process 8 (S4181). In this liquid crystal effect execution management process 8 (S4181), based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, a value synchronized with the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. A process of updating the value of a time counter (not shown) is executed, and a process of determining the effect mode corresponding to the updated value is executed.

When the liquid crystal effect execution management process 8 (S4181) is executed, first it is determined whether the value of the variable time counter is greater than 0 (S55401). The value of the time counter is updated (S5402), the effect mode corresponding to the updated counter value is set (determined) (S55402), the update processing related to other effects is executed (S5407), and the effect mode based on the update result is changed. A display command for displaying is set (S5408), and this processing ends.

By configuring in this way, a specific effect (for example, a suggestive effect for suggesting the current game state to the player) is triggered by the passage of a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the special symbol variation is executed. can be executed. In this case, regardless of the variation time of the special symbol variation set this time, the execution opportunity of the suggestion production can be set, and the variation time of the special symbol variation set this time is the elapsed time that triggers the execution of the suggestion performance. It is preferable to configure such that the suggestive effect is executed only when the length is longer than . By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine whether or not the suggestive effect is executed according to the set variation pattern.

Further, the display area in which the suggestive performance is executed is configured to overlap the display area in which the variable performance is executed, the opportunity for executing the suggestive performance is established, and the suggestive performance is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. Depending on the performance mode of the variable performance being executed at the timing of display, it is possible to create a situation in which the player can visually recognize the performance content of the suggestive performance and a situation in which it is difficult to see (unvisible). good. By constructing in this way, it is determined whether or not the suggestive performance visible to the player is executed according to the variation time of the special symbol variation being executed and the content of the variable performance being executed. becomes possible.

Also, in FIG. 354, as the processing contents of the liquid crystal effect execution management process 8 (S4181), the value of the fluctuation time counter set with the value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is updated, and the value after the update corresponds. Although the contents of processing for setting (determining) the production mode to be performed are shown, a counter that can set a value corresponding to the passage of time other than the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is provided, and the production mode corresponding to the update content of the counter is provided. can be set (determined).

For example, a process of updating the value of a counter that can measure the elapsed time since the start of a jackpot game, or a process of updating the value of a counter that can measure the elapsed time after a specific effect is executed. , a process of setting (determining) an effect mode corresponding to the update result may be executed. In addition, in the liquid crystal effect execution management process 8 (S4181), the values of various counters are updated, and it is determined whether or not the update result satisfies the execution condition, and if the execution condition is satisfied, the execution condition is established. On the condition that the flag for indicating that the execution condition is met is set to ON, other processing (for example, the variable display setting Processing) may be configured to be able to execute processing for executing a specific effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 355, the contents of the preceding winning detection process 8 (S4182) will be described. FIG. 355 is a flow chart showing the details of the preceding winning detection process 8 (S4182). This preceding winning detection process 8 (S4182) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 346) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and as described above, the entering ball detection by the entering ball sensor 1064a If there is, a process for predicting whether the entrance into which the detected gaming ball can enter is the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 1641; The state (position) of the sorting member 900 is specified in order to indicate which ball entrance the game ball entering the sorting device 1064 next can enter when the ball enters the ball entrance. processing is executed.

In the preceding winning detection process 8 (S4182), first, whether or not the ball has entered the sorting device 1064 is determined by the entering ball sensor 1064a (S9901). If it is determined that the ball has not entered the sorting device 1064 (S9901: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball has entered the sorting device 1064 (S9901: Yes), it is predicted whether the game ball will enter the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 1641 ( S9902). As a method of predicting the destination of the incoming ball, a sensor (not shown) mounted on the shaft of the distribution member 900 for detecting the tilt is used to calculate the orientation of the distribution member 900 from the tilt. The detection of the direction of the distribution member 900 for predicting the destination of the ball may not be performed by a sensor that detects the inclination, but may be performed using, for example, a magnet and a Hall sensor. In addition, since the direction of the sorting member 900 is alternately left and right as described above, the winning destination may be predicted based on the number of winning times, in which case no sensor is required. can be done.

Next, it is determined whether or not the ball is predicted to enter the first ball entrance 64 by the processing of S9902 (S9903), and if it is predicted that the ball will not enter the first ball entrance 64 (S9903: No), the process proceeds to S9905. On the other hand, when it is predicted that the ball will enter the first ball entrance 64 (S9903: Yes), the game ball that entered the distribution device 1064 next enters the second ball entrance 1641 in the distribution state storage area 223ga. The second ball entrance side information indicating that the player can win (has a high possibility of winning) is stored (S9904), and the process proceeds to S9905.

In the processing of S9905, it is determined whether or not the ball is predicted to enter the second ball entrance 1641 by the processing of S9902 (S9905), and if it is predicted that the ball will not enter the second ball entrance 1641 ( S9905: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is predicted that the ball will enter the second ball entrance 1641 (S9902: Yes), the game ball that entered the sorting device 1064 next enters the first ball entrance 64 in the sorting state storage area 223ga. The first ball entrance side information indicating that the player can win (has a high possibility of winning) is stored (S9906), and the process ends.

As described above, in the eighth control example, determination of time-saving winning is executed by special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, and it is configured so that time-saving winning can be achieved with high probability. Therefore, it is possible to provide novel playability such that the special symbol lottery in the normal state is difficult to execute.

In addition, when the time-saving election is determined by the determination of the time-saving election, either a disadvantageous time-saving state that is more disadvantageous than the normal state or an advantageous time-saving state that is more advantageous than the normal state is set. . Then, when the disadvantageous time saving state is set, the special symbol lottery in the normal state is not executed until the time saving end condition is satisfied. Then, as the time-saving end conditions, the time-saving end condition that is established when the special symbol lottery is executed in a specific order and the time-saving end condition that is established when the number of executions of the special symbol lottery reaches a predetermined number are set. configured as possible.

Therefore, when the unfavorable time saving state is set, the more the special symbol lottery is executed, the easier it is for the time saving end condition to be established. On the other hand, it is possible to make it easier to continue the game.

In addition, in the eighth control example, as the time saving end condition for ending the disadvantageous time saving state, it is possible to set the fluctuation number end condition that is satisfied when the number of executions of the special symbol lottery reaches 100 times. However, without being limited to this, for example, it may be configured to vary the number of executions of the special symbol lottery (number of times of time reduction) set as the end condition of the number of fluctuations according to the type of time reduction to be set.

In this case, for example, it can be configured to be able to set time reduction AA8, time reduction BB8, and time reduction CC8 as time reduction types, and time reduction number "100 times" as a change number end condition for time reduction AA8, as a change number end condition for time reduction BB8 Time saving number of times "200 times". It is preferable to configure the time saving CC 8 to set the number of times of time saving "300 times" as the end condition of the number of fluctuations. By comprising in this way, the continuation period of a disadvantageous time-saving state can be varied according to the time-saving classification set.

In this case, as the number of remaining time reductions displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the number of remaining time reductions corresponding to the case where the number of time reductions "100 times" is set can be displayed as an initial display, It is preferable to configure so that the display of the number of remaining reduced working hours is increased according to the progress of the game in the disadvantageous reduced working hours state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine when the disadvantageous time saving state ends.

In the eighth control example, if the disadvantageous time-saving election is won in the second special symbol lottery, the special symbol lottery that is more disadvantageous than the normal state even in the first special symbol lottery until the disadvantageous time-saving state ends is configured to run. In other words, according to the result of one special symbol lottery, a penalty can be imposed on other special symbol lotteries.

<Ninth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 356 to 375. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example, as in the fifth control example described above, when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, a jackpot game is executed, and the game area (variable winning that is opened during the jackpot game) is executed. By entering (passing) a game ball into a specific area (V gate) provided in the device (attacker) 3650), a high probability state of special symbols is set after the jackpot game is completed. ing. Further, similarly to the fifth control example described above, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state is out, determination of the time-saving symbol winning is configured to be executable.

The pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example is configured to set a game state (second time-saving state) that is most advantageous to the player when a time-saving lottery is won in the special symbol lottery in the normal state. By constructing in this way, a player who is playing a game in a normal state wins a jackpot in a special symbol lottery, and the game is changed to a probability variable state that is more advantageous than the normal state while winning prize balls by the jackpot game. A game aiming to shift the state and a game aiming to set a game state (second time saving state) that is most advantageous to the player by winning a time saving lottery in a special symbol lottery in a normal state are performed in parallel. It can be executed, and the player's desire to play can be enhanced.

Furthermore, in the ninth control example, the opportunity to shift to the game state (second time saving state) that is most advantageous to the player is configured to be only time saving winning, and determination of time saving winning (time saving lottery) Since it is constructed so as to be executed only in the normal state, when a probability variable state more advantageous to the player than the normal state is set, the game state is shifted from the probability variable state to the second time-saving state. It is configured so that it cannot be done.

In addition, in the ninth control example, in order to make the second time saving state more advantageous to the player than the variable probability state, the type of special symbol lottery that is likely to be executed during the variable probability state and the type of special symbol lottery that is executed during the time saving state It is configured to be different from the type of special symbol lottery that is likely to be drawn.

Specifically, during the probability variable state in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the special symbol lottery is easier to execute than the normal state, and the first special symbol lottery is executed more than the second special symbol lottery. It is designed to be easy. In addition, during the time saving state in which the high probability state of normal symbols is set, the special symbol lottery is easier to execute than the normal state, and the second special symbol lottery is easier to execute than the first special symbol lottery. It consists of Then, the second special symbol lottery is configured to be able to execute a special symbol lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery.

By configuring in this way, the variable probability state and the time saving state can be set as game states more advantageous to the player than the normal state, and the time saving state more advantageous to the player than the variable probability state. It is possible to set the second time saving state as.

The pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example described above in that the configuration of the game board 13 is changed, and the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 part of the configuration of 1, part of the configuration of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and part of the contents of various control processes. It should be noted that descriptions of the same contents as those of the fifth control example described above will be omitted.

<Regarding the Board Configuration of the Pachinko Machine 10 in the Ninth Control Example>
First, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 356 to 361. FIG. The configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example is different from the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example described above. The point that various non-electrically operated openings are provided in the game area where the game ball can flow down (easy to flow down) when the is in an open state, and that the game ball enters the various non-electrically operated openings In the case, there is a big difference in that various non-electrical accessories that are activated by the entered game ball are provided, and that a ball entrance is provided that allows the ball to be entered by activating the various non-electrical accessories. there is

A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 1 entrance 3064) and a non-electric accessory (special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a) and an entry means (second entrance A non-electrical accessory (non-electrical accessory 3065a) associated with the ball mouth 3065) is provided, and any non-electrical accessory is provided with a corresponding non-electrical accessory (especially It is configured to operate when a game ball enters the non-electric opening 3073a in FIG. 1 and the non-electric opening 3073b in special figure 2).

Then, according to the type of game per normal pattern, which is likely to be executed when the high probability state (time saving state, probability variable state) of the normal pattern is set as the game state, the inside of the normal pattern electric accessory 3071 during the normal pattern per game The first normal game in which the game ball that has flowed into is easy to enter the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a, and the second normal game per game in which it is easy to enter the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b. , is configured to be executable.

Furthermore, in the ninth control example, when the high probability state of normal symbols is set, the normal pattern per game is more likely to be executed than when the low probability state of normal symbols is set (normal pattern During the winning game, it is easy to enter the game ball into the inside of the normal electric accessory 3071). A time-saving state (first time-saving state) in which a per-picture game is more likely to be executed than a second normal-performing game (first time-saving state), and a time-saving state (second Time saving state) can be determined according to the game state set when winning a normal figure.

By constructing in this way, the type of the special symbol lottery that is likely to be executed during the high probability state of the normal symbols can be varied depending on the type of the game state in which the high probability state of the normal symbols is set.

Also, in the ninth control example, the lottery is more advantageous to the player when the second special symbol lottery is executed than when the first special symbol lottery is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute games with different degrees of advantage for the player according to the game state in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, so that the normal symbol for the player It is possible to make the player interested not only in whether or not the high probability state of is set, but also in the type of the set game state.

In addition, in the ninth control example, when the time saving state is set as the gaming state in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the second special symbol lottery is likely to be executed, and the variable probability state is set. In addition, it is configured to facilitate the execution of the first special symbol lottery. Then, in a part of the case where the time saving state is set (when the second time saving state is set), a condition that is difficult to be satisfied as a time saving end condition for ending the second time saving state (time saving number of times 10000 times) is configured to set That is, when the second time-saving state is set, the time-saving state is configured to continue substantially until the next jackpot game is executed. Furthermore, when the big win is won in the second special symbol lottery which is likely to be executed during the second time saving state, the second time saving state is set after the big win game is finished with a high probability (90%). ing.

By constructing in this way, even in a time-saving state in which the probability of winning a big win in a special symbol lottery is lower than in the variable state, the player is allowed to play a game aiming at the next big win game without terminating the game state. It is possible to make it easier for the player to win, and to make the privilege given when winning a jackpot more advantageous to the player than in the variable probability state.

Here, with reference to FIG. 356, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example will be described. FIG. 356 is a front view schematically showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example. As shown in FIG. 356, the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example is different from the configuration of the game board 13 (see FIG. 234) of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example described above. And, it is different in that the configuration of the right area is different. Other configurations are the same, and the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 356, the lower area of the game board 13 formed below the variable display unit 80 is provided with a first ball entrance 64 through which the right to execute the first special symbol lottery can be obtained. In the right area of the game board 13 formed on the right side of the variable display unit 80, there are an operating device 3070, a special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a, a special figure 2 non-electric role 3065a, a through gate 67, is provided.

The actuating device 3070 has a flow path in which a game ball can flow down, and a special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a into which the game ball that has flowed down the flow path can enter, and a special figure 2 non-electric and an actuation port 3073b. An ordinary electric accessory 3071 is attached to the opening for allowing game balls to flow into the inside of the operating device 3070 .

The normal electric accessary 3071 is opened by the normal pattern winning game which is executed when winning in the normal pattern lottery (lottery executed based on the game ball passing through the through gate 67). be. In addition, the contents of the normal symbol lottery and the opening control process for the normal electric accessory 3071 based on the normal symbol winning game are the same as the contents of the opening control process for the normal electric accessory 640a in the fifth control example described above. Therefore, detailed description thereof is omitted.

The special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a is connected to the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a by an operating mechanism (not shown), and the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is closed while the special figure When a game ball enters the 1 non-electrically operated opening 3073a, the operating mechanism is operated by the weight of the entered game ball, and the special figure 1 non-electrically operated accessory 3064a is configured to be mechanically opened. ing. In other words, the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a is a means for opening the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a.

Similarly, the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b is connected to the special figure 2 non-electric role product 3065a by an operating mechanism (not shown), and while the special figure 2 non-electric role product 3065a is closed When the game ball enters the special figure 1 non-electrically operated opening 3073b, the operating mechanism is operated by the weight of the entered game ball, and the special figure 2 non-electrically operated accessory 3065a is mechanically opened. Configure. That is, the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b is a means for opening the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a.

In addition, for a detailed description of the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a and the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a that can be operated based on the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070, see FIGS. 357 to 359 will be described later.

In addition, as described above, the non-electrical accessories (special figure 1 non-electrical accessory 3064a and special figure 2 non-electrical accessory 3065a) are not electrically controlled, but by mechanical action based on the weight of the game ball. It is configured to open and close. Therefore, opening and closing control is executed by the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10, etc., like the electric accessory that is electrically controlled to open and close (for example, the normal electric accessory 3071, the opening and closing door 3650f of the variable winning device 3650, etc.). Therefore, the opening/closing status is not managed by the main controller 110 or the like.

Therefore, in the ninth control example, a detection sensor (not shown) for detecting the actual operation status of each non-electric accessory (special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a, special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a) is provided, and the operating status (opening/closing status) of each non-electric accessory (special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a, special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a) is configured to be detectable.

Then, based on the detection result of the detection sensor, the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is operating (open), or the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is operating (open ) is notified to the player by the special figure 1 non-telegram notification lamp 3064b and the special figure 2 non-telegram notification lamp 3065b. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the operation status of each non-electric accessory in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in the ninth control example, the corresponding non-electric accessory is operating (open) by the special figure 1 non-telegram notification lamp 3064b and the special figure 2 non-telegram notification lamp 3065b. Although it is configured to notify the person, a notification means that can notify other situations may be provided. A notification means capable of informing (suggesting) the player whether the non-electric accessory 3065a is likely to operate may be provided. In this case, for example, based on the normal pattern winning type set when winning in the normal pattern lottery, it is easy to operate any non-electric accessory (which non-electric opening to enter the game ball Easy) It is preferable to provide a notification means for notifying (suggesting) the player whether a game per normal pattern will be executed.

By configuring in this way, the timing before the special non-electric accessory actually operates, for example, the first time from the execution of the normal pattern lottery to the stop display of the result of the normal pattern lottery. Period, the second period from when the result of the lottery per normal pattern is stopped and displayed until the game per normal pattern is executed, the second period until the game ball flows into the operating device 3070 after the game per normal pattern is executed 3 period, the fourth period from the execution of the normal per game to the entry of the game ball into the non-electrically operated opening, the game ball enters the non-electrically operated opening after the game ball flows into the operating device 3070 Select one or a plurality of periods from the fifth period until the game ball enters the non-electrically operated opening and the sixth period from the time the game ball enters the non-electrically operated opening until the non-electrically operated accessory operates It is possible to inform the player of the type of the non-motorized accessory to be operated (released) during the combined period. Therefore, it is possible for the player to grasp (predict) the contents of the game to be executed later based on the contents suggested by the informing means, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the notification by the notification means in any period (corresponding to the above-described first period, second period, and third period) from when the lottery per normal figure is executed until the game ball flows into the operating device 3070 In the case of execution, it is possible for the player to select whether or not to allow the game ball to flow into the operating device 3070 based on the notification contents of the notification means. That is, when an advantageous game state (for example, time saving state) that makes it easy to open non-electric roles is set, any one non-electric role (for example, special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a) operates When the game ball is entered into the ball entry means (for example, the right first ball entrance 3064) (when the first special symbol lottery is executed), the advantageous game state is finished, but when another non-electric accessory (for example, special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a) is operating, it is possible to enter the ball (second entrance 3065) When the game ball is entered (when the second special symbol lottery is executed), in a state where the advantageous game state does not end, the above-described notification means can perform notification, It is possible for the player to select whether or not to continue the advantageous game state. In other words, by allowing the player to select the game method (whether or not game balls are to be shot), the results of games to be executed later can be greatly varied. As a result, it is possible to increase the willingness of the player to play a more advantageous game.

Furthermore, in this case, when a game ball is entered into one ball entering means, a game more advantageous to the player than when a game ball is entered into another ball entering means is executed. , the advantageous game state is easily ended, and the game is more disadvantageous to the player when the game ball is entered into the other ball entering means than when the game ball is entered into the first ball entering means. is executed, but the contents of the privilege (for example, special symbol lottery) given when the game ball enters each ball entry means so that it is difficult to end the advantageous gaming state, and the conditions for ending the advantageous gaming state should be the default.

Here, the detection sensor for detecting the operation status of each non-electrical accessory will be specifically described as a non-electrical opening (special figure 1 non-electrical opening 3073a, special figure 2 non-electrical opening 3073b) The operating mechanism (special figure 1 operating mechanism 3074, special figure 2 operating mechanism 3075) that operates when the game ball that enters the ball comes into contact with the operating position (position to operate (open) non-electric accessories) A detection means (proximity sensor) is provided at a location where the position can be detected, and when the detection means detects that the operating mechanism is positioned at the operating position (the detection signal output from the detection means If the determination means determines based on), it is configured to be able to specify that the non-electric accessory is open.

In addition, as a method for managing the operation status of each non-electric role product, it is possible to use a method other than the method of detecting the operation status of the actual non-electric role product 3065a as described above. A detection means for detecting the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 is provided inside, and based on the detection result by the detection means and the type of normal figure, which non-electrical opening (special figure 1 non-electrical opening 3073a, special figure 2 non-electric working opening 3073b) to determine whether the game ball has entered, based on the determination result may be configured to specify the operation status of each non-electrical accessary. In this case, by determining whether the closing condition of each non-electric role is satisfied based on the operating status of the specified non-electric role and the acquired prize information, the operation of each non-electric role It should be configured to identify the situation. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated detection means only for managing the operation status of the non-electric accessory, so the manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

Further, in this case, the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means with different easiness of entry is detected depending on whether the non-electric accessory is activated or not, and the detection result and It is preferable to provide management processing for comparing the contents specified as the operation status of the non-electric accessary product and determining whether the specified contents are normal.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 357 to 359, detailed contents of various configurations formed in the right area of the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example will be described. FIG. 357(a) is an enlarged view of the right side area of the game board 13 shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 357(a), in the right area of the game board 13, a game ball flow path is formed in the vertical direction, and a game ball shot toward the right area (shot by a right-handed game) is formed. A game ball) flows down the game ball downstream channel and finally flows into the out port 66. - 特許庁

A plurality of nails are planted in the vertical direction (vertical direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 357) in this game ball flow downstream channel. It is partitioned into a channel (a channel formed between a plurality of nails and the variable display unit 80) and a right channel (a channel formed on the right side of the plurality of nails).

As shown in FIG. 357(a), a plurality of nails for dividing the downstream flow path into the left flow path and the right flow path are used to prevent game balls flowing down the left flow path from entering the right flow path. It is planted so as to form a passage area through which a game ball can pass so that the inflow and the inflow of a game ball flowing down the right side channel into the left side channel are possible.

The actuating device 3070 is provided on the left side of the game ball downstream flow path, that is, at a position where the game balls flowing down the left flow path flow more easily than the game balls flowing down the right flow path. The special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a and the special figure 2 non-electric role 3065a are provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the right side flow path is easier to flow in than the game ball flowing down the left side flow path. It is

By forming the left side flow path and the right side flow path in this way, it is possible to provide a plurality of paths for the game balls shot by the right-handed game to flow down, so for example, a plurality of devices ( When the operating device 3070, the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a, the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a, etc.) is in a state where it is possible to enter (open state), the device provided on the upstream side of the right area To suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the progress of a game is delayed due to the fact that a game ball is entered only in a device provided on the downstream side and the game ball is hardly entered in a device provided on the downstream side. can be done.

A detailed configuration of the actuator 3070 will now be described. Actuating device 3070, when winning in the normal pattern lottery (when the normal pattern winning game is executed), the game ball is in a state where it can be entered (that is, the normal electric accessory 3071 is released), and is operated. By entering the game ball into either of the two non-electrical openings (special figure 1 non-electrical opening 3073a, special figure 2 non-electrical opening 3073b) provided inside the device 3070, The corresponding non-electric accessory (special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a, special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a) is in an open state.

The game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 flows down the first flow path 3070 a and reaches the movable piece 3072 . This movable piece 3072 is variably controlled in a predetermined opening/closing pattern when a normal game is executed, and moves the game ball flowing down the first flow path 3070a to the second flow path 3070b. and a closed position where the game ball flowing down the first flow path 300a can be received and flowed down toward the third flow path 3070c. there is In addition, in the state (non-normal game per game state), the movable piece 3072 is configured to be positioned at the closed position.

In other words, the movable piece 3072 serves as means for allowing the inflow of the game ball into the second flow path 3070b when a predetermined condition is established (when a normal game is executed). In the ninth control example, the contents of the opening operation of the normal electric accessory 3071 in the normal pattern winning game executed when winning in the normal pattern lottery are configured to vary according to the normal pattern winning type. . Specifically, the length of the period (opening period) from when the normal figure per game is executed until the normal electric accessory 3071 is in the open state is varied. On the other hand, the movable piece 3072 is configured to be variably controlled in a predetermined variable pattern after the normal pattern per game is executed regardless of the normal pattern per type.

Then, by varying the length of the opening period according to the type of normal pattern winning, the length of the period required from the execution of the normal pattern winning game until the game ball reaches the movable piece 3072 is varied. By doing so, the game ball that has reached the movable piece 3072 is likely to be guided to the second flow path 3070b, and the normal game that the game ball that has reached the movable piece 3072 is easily guided to the third flow path 3070c. A per-figure game is configured to be executable.

On the downstream side of the second flow path 8070b, a special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a is provided, and all the game balls that flow down the second flow path 8070b enter the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a. It is configured as follows. The special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a is connected to the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a via the special figure 1 operating mechanism 3074, and the game ball entered the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a. In the case, the entered game ball contacts the operation mechanism 3074, the operation mechanism 3074 is operated by the weight of the game ball, and the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a in the closed state is changed to the open state. It is configured as follows.

In addition, when the special figure 1 non-electric accessary 3064a is in the open state, the operation mechanism 3074 is operating in the open state, so the game ball entered into the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a is operated It is constructed so as not to come into contact with the use mechanism 3074 . In other words, the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a is a means for changing the special figure 1 non-electrical access material 3064a in the closed state to the open state, without using an electric drive source, the special figure 1 It is means for varying the non-electric accessory 3064a.

The special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is a non-electric accessory attached to the right first ball entrance 3064, and is in an open state in which a game ball can be entered into the right first ball entrance 3064. and a closed state in which it is more difficult to enter a game ball than in the open state. This special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is changed from a closed state to an open state by operating the operating mechanism 3074 based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 non-electrical activation opening 3073a. be. Then, after being changed to the open state, it is changed from the open state to the closed state based on two game balls entering the right first ball entrance 3064 .

Specifically, a holding means (not shown) capable of temporarily holding a ball entered into the right first ball entrance 3064 is provided inside the right first ball entrance 3064, and the holding means is provided inside the right first ball entrance 3064. When two game balls are held by the means, the game balls held by their own weight flow out to the discharge path for discharging the game balls to the outside of the game machine. A closing mechanism (not shown) is provided for contact by a playing ball being ejected into.

When the game ball comes into contact with this closing mechanism, the closing mechanism operates, and the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a that was in the open state is configured to be variable to the closed state.

As described above, the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is electrically controlled in any case, whether it is changed from the closed state to the open state or changed from the open state to the closed state. It is constructed so as to be mechanically variable using the weight of the game ball flowing down without using .

On the downstream side of the third flow path 3070c, a special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b is provided, and all the game balls that flow down the third flow path 8070c enter the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b. It is configured as follows. The special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b is connected to the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a via the special figure 2 operating mechanism 3075, and the game ball entered the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b. In the case, the entered game ball comes into contact with the special figure 2 operating mechanism 3075, and the special figure 2 operating mechanism 3075 is operated by the weight of the game ball, and the special figure 2 non-electric accessory in the closed state 3065a is configured to be variable to the open state.

In addition, when the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is in the open state, since the special figure 2 operating mechanism 3075 is operating in the open state, the ball entered the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b It is configured so that the game ball does not come into contact with the special figure 2 operating mechanism 3075. In other words, the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b is a means for varying the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a in the closed state to the open state, without using an electric drive source, the special figure 2 It is means for varying the non-electric accessory 3065a.

The special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3064b is a non-electric accessory attached to the second ball entrance 3065, and is in an open state in which a game ball can be entered into the second ball entrance 3065, It is configured to be variable between the closed state in which it is more difficult to enter a game ball than the open state. This special figure 2 non-electric accessary 3065a is opened from the closed state by operating the special figure 2 operation mechanism 3075 based on the fact that the game ball entered the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b is changed to Then, after being changed to the open state, the open state is changed to the closed state based on two game balls entering the second ball entrance 3065 .

Specifically, a holding means (not shown) capable of temporarily holding a ball that has entered the second ball entrance 3065 is provided inside the second ball entrance 3065, and the holding means When two game balls are held, the game balls held by their own weight flow out to the discharge path for discharging the game balls to the outside of the game machine. A closing mechanism (not shown) is provided for contact with the ejected game ball.

When the game ball comes into contact with this closing mechanism, the closing mechanism is activated, and the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a that was in the open state is configured to be changed to the closed state.

As described above, the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is electrically controlled in any case, whether it is changed from the closed state to the open state or changed from the open state to the closed state. It is constructed so as to be mechanically variable using the weight of the game ball flowing down without using .

Next, with reference to FIG. 357(b), the contents of the game ball flowing down during the normal game per game will be described. Figure 357 (b) is a diagram schematically showing the ball flow when the game ball enters the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a during the game per normal figure.

As shown in FIG. 357(b), when the game per normal pattern is executed, the normal electric accessory 3071 is opened in a predetermined opening pattern. Then, when the normal electric accessory 3071 is changed to the open state, the game ball guided by the normal electric accessory 3071 (see FIG. 357(b)) in the open state is positioned at the open position. Pass through 3072 and enter the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a. When the game ball enters the special figure 1 non-electrically operated opening 3073a, the special figure 1 operating mechanism 3074 operates, and the special figure 1 non-electrical accessory 3064a is in an open state (see the solid line in FIG. 357 (b)) .

When the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a is changed to the open state, the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a is variable to the position that closes the right channel, so it is fired by the right-handed game, and the right channel 3060 Most of the game balls flowing down the right channel enter the right first ball entrance 3064 .

As shown in FIG. 357(b), in this ninth control example, the normal electric accessory 3071 is provided for the left channel, the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is provided for the right channel, Furthermore, since the normal electric accessory 3071 is provided on the upstream side of the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a, the game ball to the normal electric accessory 3071 depending on the variable state of the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a There is no difference in the inflow ratio of Therefore, by changing the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a to the open state, it is not possible to flow the game ball in the game per normal figure into the operating device 3070, and the game can be smoothly progressed. It is possible to prevent an impossible situation from occurring.

In addition, while the special figure 1 non-electric accessary 3064a is variable to the open state, a normal figure per game that allows the game ball to enter the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b was executed. Even so, since the entrance of the game ball to the operating device 3070 is not restricted by the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a, it is possible to surely enter the game ball to the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b. .

In addition, in the ninth control example, since the game ball flowing down the right area 3060 is configured to flow down two flow paths (left flow path, right flow path), the normal flow path provided on the upstream side Even if the figure electric accessory 3071 is in an open state, the game ball flowing down the right channel can be made easier to reach the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a provided downstream. In other words, when both the normal figure electric accessory 3071 and the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a are in the open state, the game balls flowing down the right side region 3060 flow down one flow path Pachinko machine using the configuration 10, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to reach any accessory.

Then, when two game balls enter the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a in the open state, as shown in FIG. Object 3064a is changed from an open state to a closed state.

Here, as described above, in the ninth control example, even when the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is in the open state, it is configured to allow the game ball to enter the operating device 3070. Therefore, for example, a game ball may enter the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a while the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is open. In this case, even if the game ball enters the special figure 1 non-electrically activated opening 3073a, the special figure 1 operation mechanism 3074 is not operated by the entered game ball, so special figure 1 The non-electric accessory 3064a continues to be open. In addition, the value of the number of balls that is the closing condition of the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a in the open state is also continued as it is. In other words, even if a new game ball enters the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a while the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a remains open, the player is not given any benefits.

By configuring in this way, when the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is changed to the open state, the next game ball is before entering the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a, A game can be motivated to enter a predetermined number (two) of game balls into the right first ball entrance 3064 to which the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is attached.

In addition, in the ninth control example, as described above, in the state in which the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is changed to the open state, the game ball can be entered into the operating device 3070. However, without being limited to this, for example, when the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is downstream of the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a and the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is in the open state When it is in the closed state The operating device 3070 (ordinary electric accessory 3071) may be provided at a position that is more difficult to reach. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the winning number of game balls to the operating device 3070 during the period when the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is in the open state, than during the period when it is not in the open state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 358(a), when the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is in the open state, the ball flow of the game ball launched by the right-handed game will be described. Figure 358 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the flow when a game ball enters the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a in the open state. As shown in FIG. 358 (a), in the state where the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is variable (operating) to the open state, the game ball is easy to enter the right first ball entrance 3064 Then, when the game ball enters the right first ball entrance 3064, the closing mechanism (not shown) connected to the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a operates, and the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a changes (actuates) to the closed state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 358(b), operation contents of various mechanisms when a game ball enters the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b will be described. Figure 358 (b) is a diagram schematically showing the ball flow when the game ball enters the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b during the game per normal figure.

As shown in FIG. 358(b), when the game per normal pattern is executed, the normal electric accessory 3071 is opened in a predetermined opening pattern. Then, when the normal electric accessory 3071 is changed to the open state, the game ball guided by the normal electric accessory 3071 (see FIG. 358(b)) in the open state is positioned at the closed position. It flows down the upper surface of 3072, flows down the third flow path 3070c, and enters the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b. When the game ball enters the special figure 2 non-electrically operated opening 3073b, the special figure 2 operating mechanism 3075 operates, and the special figure 2 non-electrical accessory 3065a is in an open state (see solid line in FIG. 358 (b)) .

When the special figure 2 non-electric role 3065a is changed to the open state, the special figure 2 non-electric role 3065a is variable to the position that closes the right channel, so it is fired by the right-handed game, and the right side area 3060 Of the game balls that have flowed down, most of the game balls that flow down the right channel enter the second ball entrance 3065 .

As shown in FIG. 358(b), in this ninth control example, the normal electric accessory 3071 is provided for the left channel, the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is provided for the right channel, In addition, since the normal electric accessory 3071 is provided upstream of the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a, the game ball to the ordinary electric accessory 3071 depending on the variable state of the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a There is no difference in the inflow ratio of Therefore, by changing the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a to the open state, it is not possible to flow the game ball in the game per normal figure into the operating device 3070, and the game can be smoothly progressed. It is possible to prevent an impossible situation from occurring.

Furthermore, in the ninth control example, since the special figure 1 non-electric role product 3064a is arranged above the special figure 2 non-electric role product 3065a, for example, the special figure 2 non-electric role product 3065a is in an open state In this case, when the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is changed to the open state (operated), the game ball fired by the right-handed game is the right first than the second ball entrance 3065 It is configured so that the ball is preferentially entered into the ball entrance 3064 .

By configuring in this way, the second special symbol lottery in which the lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery is executed is excessively executed, that is, the game ball to the second ball entrance 3065. can be suppressed from entering the ball excessively. Furthermore, as long as the right first ball entrance 3064 is in the open state, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 3065, so the open state of the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is long. Since it is possible to make it easier to continue for a period, for example, when the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is variable (operated) to the open state just before the time saving state ends, the game ball to the second ball entrance 3065 Before entering the ball, the game is played so that the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a is in the open state, and the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a is changed to the open state (actuated) to save time. Even after the state ends, it is possible to maintain the open state of the special figure 2 non-electric accessary product 3065a.

Therefore, the player is motivated to play the game in order to make the game situation (opening/closing situation of the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a) advantageous to the player when the time saving state ends. can be done.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 360 and 361, the game contents of the game per normal pattern in the ninth control example will be described. Figure 360 is a diagram showing the flow of the game per normal pattern when the open pattern A per normal pattern (the open pattern that is likely to be set during the first time saving state) is set, and Fig. 361 is open per normal pattern It is a diagram showing the flow of the game per normal figure when the pattern B (open pattern that is likely to be set during the second time saving state) is set.

In this ninth control example, according to the general pattern per type (game state at the time of winning) set when winning in the normal pattern lottery, by varying the operation content of the general pattern per game, per normal pattern It is constructed so that the timing of inflow of game balls into the operating device 3070 during a game is varied. Then, according to the inflow timing of the game ball into the operating device 3070, the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 enters the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a from the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b. Easy general pattern per game (per general pattern per normal pattern A is set per general pattern per game) and per general pattern that is easier to enter the special figure 2 non-electric working opening 3073b than the special figure 1 non-electric working opening 3073a A game (a game per normal pattern in which the open pattern B per normal pattern is set) is configured to be executable.

Furthermore, when the time saving state is set as the game state, the time saving type (first time saving state) in which the opening pattern A per normal pattern is more likely to be set than the open pattern B per normal pattern as the type per normal pattern (first time saving state) and the normal pattern It is configured to be able to set a time saving type (second time saving state) in which the open pattern B per normal pattern is more likely to be set than the open pattern A.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier to enter the game ball into the operating device 3070 than in the normal state (the normal electric accessory 3071 is in the open state in the normal game per unit time) A first time-saving state (disadvantageous time-saving state) in which the first special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than the second special symbol lottery when the time-saving state is set (the period can be longer than the normal state). , a second time-saving state (advantageous time-saving state) in which the second special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than the first special symbol lottery can be set.

The game per normal pattern is a period (opening period) from when the game per normal pattern is executed until the normal electric accessory 3071 is changed to the open state (opening period), and the period during which the normal electric accessory 3071 is in the open state (open period), and the period (ending period) from the time when the end condition for ending the open state of the normal electric accessory 3071 is established, and the time from the time when the open state is changed to the closed state until the end of the game per normal figure. A predetermined time (predetermined condition) is defined in advance for each period, and the opening operation of the normal electric accessory 3071 is performed according to the defined content. Furthermore, it is configured to perform movement control to move a movable piece 3072 (see FIG. 780) provided in the actuator 3070 in a predetermined movement pattern.

First, with reference to FIG. 360, the flow of the normal pattern per game executed when the normal pattern per open pattern A is set will be described. Specifically, in the game per normal pattern that is executed when the open pattern A per normal pattern is set, as shown in FIG. 360, the opening period (OP period) is 3 seconds as the game per normal pattern, An open period of 2.5 seconds and an ending period (ED period) of 1 second per normal game are executed. After 0.5 seconds of the open period in which the movable piece 3072 is in the open state, the movable piece 3072 is controlled to be in the closed period in which the movable piece 3072 is in the closed state for 1.5 seconds. executed.

In other words, in the game per normal pattern per normal pattern A, the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 can be guided to the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b (movable piece 3072 is closed) is set. After a period (a period between 0.5 seconds and 2 seconds after the normal figure per game is executed) has passed, the opening period of the normal electric accessory 3071 is set. Therefore, the game per normal pattern per normal pattern A is executed, and the game balls that flowed into the operating device 3070 during the open period in which the normal electric accessory 3071 is in the open state are all (almost) released. It will pass through the movable piece 3072 in the state and enter the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a. When the game ball enters the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a, the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a operates to the open state, so the general figure per game of the open pattern A is, It becomes a regular pattern winning game that facilitates the execution of the first special symbol lottery.

In addition, in the ninth control example, in addition to the time end condition that is established when a predetermined time (2.5 seconds) has elapsed, as the end condition for ending the open state of the normal electric accessory 3071, It is also configured to set a ball entry end condition that is established when the number of game balls (game balls that have passed through the normal electric accessory 3071 in the open state) that has flowed into the operating device 3070 exceeds two. there is By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the flow of many game balls into the operating device 3070 in one game per normal figure, for example, the game ball is clogged in the operating device 3070 , the increase in the number of game balls colliding with the movable piece 3072 can prevent the movable piece 3072 from being easily damaged (broken).

Furthermore, when the game balls are continuously shot, the game balls can be shot up to 100 in 60 seconds, so that the right-handed game can be continuously executed during the normal game. Since it is configured so that the ball entry end condition is more likely to be satisfied than the time end condition, the normal game per game is faster when the right-handed game in which the game ball is continuously fired is executed. It is possible to terminate. Therefore, for example, in the time-saving state in which the time-saving type (time-saving B) that is easier to be executed than the general-pattern per game of the general-pattern opening pattern A per general-pattern A, which will be described later, is set. The player is continuously instructed to execute more normal symbol lotteries and to execute the second special symbol lottery as many times as possible until a time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state is established. Since it is possible to shoot the game ball, the operation of the game can be improved.

In addition, when the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is operated to the open state immediately before the time saving end condition is satisfied, after the time saving end condition is satisfied and the game state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state Since it is possible to facilitate the execution of the second special symbol lottery, until immediately before the time saving end condition is satisfied, the second A game can be played in anticipation of execution of a general pattern per open pattern B that allows a game ball to enter the non-electrically operated opening 3073b.

Next, the flow of the normal pattern per game executed when the normal pattern per open pattern B is set will be described. Specifically, in the game per normal pattern that is executed when the open pattern B per normal pattern is set, as shown in FIG. 361, as the game per normal pattern, the opening period (OP period) is 0.5 Seconds, the open period is 2.5 seconds, and the ending period (ED period) is 1 second. After 0.5 seconds of the open period in which the movable piece 3072 is in the open state, the movable piece 3072 is controlled to be in the closed period in which the movable piece 3072 is in the closed state for 1.5 seconds. executed.

That is, in the game per normal pattern per normal pattern B, the state in which the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 can be guided to the special figure 2 non-electric activation port 3073b (the movable piece 3072 is closed) is set. During the period (period between 0.5 seconds and 2 seconds after the normal figure per game is executed), the opening period of the normal electric accessory 3071 is set. Therefore, the game per normal pattern per normal pattern B is executed, and the game balls that flowed into the operating device 3070 during the open period in which the normal electric accessory 3071 is in the open state are all (almost) closed. It will flow down the upper surface of the movable piece 3072 in the state and enter the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b. When the game ball enters the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b, since the special figure 2 non-electric role 3065a operates to the open state, the general figure per game of the general figure per open pattern B, It becomes a regular pattern winning game that facilitates the execution of the second special symbol lottery.

As described above, in this ninth control example, by varying the length of the opening period in the game per normal pattern according to the type per normal pattern, flow into the operating device 3070 during the game per normal pattern It is configured to differentiate the types of special non-electric openings into which the played game ball can enter (easy to enter). In this case, even if the game contents per normal pattern other than the length of the opening period of the game per normal pattern are made common to the types per normal pattern, the game balls that flowed into the operating device 3070 during the game per normal pattern Since it is possible to reliably differentiate the types of special symbol non-electric openings that can enter (easy to enter), it is easy to execute different types of special symbol lottery when the time saving state is set. This novel game property can be executed while reducing the processing load of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

In addition, when the time saving state is set, the configuration for realizing the novel game property of making it easier to execute the special symbol lottery of different types is not limited to this, for example, according to the normal pattern per type By differentiating the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 3071 in the per-picture game, the type of the special non-electric opening into which the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 can enter (it is easy to enter) can be made different. Alternatively, by varying the movable pattern of the movable piece 3072 according to the type of normal figure, the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 can enter (it is easy to enter). It may be configured so that the types of operation ports are differentiated.

In addition, in the ninth control example, the game ball that has flowed into the actuator 3070 is configured to enter any special figure non-electrically operated opening, but is not limited to this, for example, A discharge port may be provided for discharging the game balls that have flowed into the operating device 3070 to the game area again, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may enter the operating device 3070. A winning hole for paying out prize balls may be provided, and a part of the game balls flowing into the operating device 3070 may enter the winning hole without entering the special figure non-electric working hole. .

By configuring in this way, even if the game ball flows into the operating device 3070 during the normal game, to create a pattern in which none of the special figure non-electric accessories are operated to the open state. Since it is possible, for the player, when the game per normal figure is executed, it is suppressed that a certain relationship that any special figure non-electric accessory will be in an open state is given. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

Also, as described above, due to the nature of the non-electrical accessory, there is no effect even if the game ball enters the special non-electrical opening corresponding to the case where the special non-electrical accessory is in the open state. , When the special figure non-electric accessory is in the open state, there is a possibility that the player's interest in the execution of the normal figure winning game will decrease, but the above-described winning opening is provided inside the operating device 3070 And, by providing a flow path that allows the game ball to win the winning opening, the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 only operates (varies) the special figure non-electric accessory to the open state. Instead, since there is a possibility that a prize ball is given, it is possible to make the player interested in the normal figure winning game when the special figure non-electric accessory is in the open state.

In this case, when the special figure non-electric accessory is in the open state, the game that can enter the corresponding special figure non-electric opening than when the special figure non-electric accessory is in the closed state It is good to configure so that the ball can easily enter the winning opening described above. In the case of the state, the game ball entering the special figure non-electrically operated opening contacts the operating mechanism, operates the operating mechanism, and the game ball is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. When the special figure non-electric accessory is in the open state, the game ball entering the special figure non-electric activation opening flows down toward the winning opening without coming into contact with the mechanism for operation. It should be configured as follows. By configuring in this way, when the special non-electric accessory is in the open state, more prize balls are won during the normal game than when the special non-electric accessory is in the closed state. can be made easier.

Therefore, when the special figure non-electric accessory is in the open state, the normal figure winning game can be made a game advantageous to the player in terms of winning the prize ball. Regardless, the player can be made to play while expecting that the game per normal pattern will be executed, and the player's willingness to play can be enhanced.

First, with reference to FIG. 360, the contents of the open pattern A per normal pattern will be described. As shown in FIG. 360, when the game per normal pattern is executed, the measurement of the opening period is started and the scenario for variably controlling the movable piece 3072 is updated.

The variable control of the movable piece 3072 is always defined to be constant regardless of the type of normal pattern, and the movable piece 3072 into a closed position. In other words, the scenario is defined so that the closing period of 1.5 seconds is set at a predetermined timing (0.5 seconds after the normal pattern per game is executed) every time the normal pattern per game is executed. there is

And, in the normal pattern per open pattern A, 3 seconds are defined as a period (opening period) from when the normal pattern per game is executed until the normal electric accessory 3071 is changed to the open state, and then normal 2.5 seconds are defined as a period (open period) in which the electric accessory 3071 is changed to the open state, and the period (ending period) from the end of the open period to the end of the game per normal figure. , 1 second. That is, when the open pattern A per normal pattern is set, the scenario of the game per normal pattern is defined so that the game period of the game per normal pattern is 6.5 seconds at the longest.

It should be noted that the open period (2.5 seconds) in the game per normal figure described above is configured to be able to end even by conditions other than the passage of time, specifically, to the operating device 3070 during the open period When the number of game balls that flowed in reaches a predetermined number (two) (when the conditions for ending the winning number are satisfied), the open period is terminated without waiting for the time of the open period to elapse. . In other words, when the game per normal pattern is executed, the number of inflows of game balls into the area (inside the operating device 3070) where the game ball is easier to enter than when the game per normal pattern is not executed ( It is configured so that the normal figure per game can be terminated when the number of entering balls) reaches a predetermined number. By configuring in this way, since it is possible to set an upper limit to the privilege amount that can be given to the player for one game per normal pattern, it is possible to suppress the excessive awarding of the privilege to the player. be able to.

In addition, by completing the normal pattern per game by establishing the winning number end condition, the game period of the normal pattern per game can be shortened compared to the case where the normal pattern per game is ended based on the passage of time. Therefore, as a result, it is possible to increase the number of normal symbol lotteries per unit time. Therefore, for example, in the time-saving state in which the open pattern A per normal figure that can enter the game ball mainly to the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a is likely to be set, even once before the time-saving state ends Aiming to execute a lot of second special symbol lottery (executing a normal figure per game that allows game balls to enter the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b), the player continues to play can be performed, it is possible to make it easier to improve the operation of the game.

In particular, in the time-saving state in which the open pattern A per normal figure is likely to be set, the state in which the number of reserved memories (special figure 1 reservation) of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit number (4 pieces), that is, no more, right In a state where even if a game ball is entered into the first ball entrance 3064, a new special figure 1 reservation cannot be acquired (stored), a game ball is fired in order not to shoot useless game balls. Although the act of temporarily suspending (right-handed game) is generally executed, in the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example, in order to acquire the second special symbol suspension memory (special figure 2 suspension) , the player can be made to select an action to continue the game. Therefore, the player is provided with a novel playability of allowing the player to select between a game in which the game balls are not used wastefully and a game in which the game balls are used wastefully with the aim of giving an advantageous privilege. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 360, when the opening pattern A per normal pattern is set, the opening period is set to 3 seconds, so the closing period of the movable piece 3072 ends before the opening period elapses. will do. Therefore, when the game per normal pattern in which the open pattern A per normal pattern is set is executed, the normal electric accessory 3071 is opened, and the game ball flowing into the operating device 3070 is transferred to the first flow path 3070a, It will flow down the second flow path 3070b and enter the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a (see FIG. 357 (b)).

Next, with reference to FIG. 361, the flow of the game per normal pattern when the open pattern B per normal pattern is set will be described. In this ninth control example, the opening pattern per normal pattern A and the open pattern per normal pattern B are only different in the length of the opening period of the game per normal pattern, and otherwise the same contents are normal. It is constructed so that a per-figure game is executed. A detailed description of the same content will be omitted.

As shown in Figure 361, in the open pattern B per normal pattern, 0.5 seconds are defined as the opening period of the game per normal pattern, so during the period in which the movable piece 3072 is located at the closed position A game ball that has flowed into the actuator 3070 can reach the movable piece 3072 .

As described above, in the ninth control example, the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery. Depending on the type per normal figure set in the case, the non-electric opening (special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a, special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b) where the game ball is easy to enter during the game per normal figure configured to be different.

Then, the game ball can be entered into the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b, which is the execution machine for the second special symbol lottery that is advantageous to the player. Ordinary figure per game) is configured so that the game period of the general figure per game is shorter.

By configuring in this way, as the type of the time saving state, when the time saving type B, which is a time saving type that makes it easy to enter the game ball into the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b, is set, the normal figure per game Since the game can be executed efficiently, the player can smoothly execute the game during the time saving state.

On the other hand, as a type of time saving state, a game ball can be entered into the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a, which is an execution machine for the first special symbol lottery that is disadvantageous to the player. When the time saving A that facilitates execution of the game per normal pattern A is set is set, the opening period of the game per normal pattern is longer, and the period required for one game per normal pattern is longer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an excessive increase in the number of executions of the game per normal pattern (the number of executions of the normal pattern lottery) during the time saving state.

In addition, when the open pattern A per normal pattern is set, the normal pattern electric accessory 3071 is after the period in which the game ball can be entered into the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b. Since it is configured to be opened, the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 during the normal game per normal pattern open pattern A will enter the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b. occurrence can be suppressed.

That is, according to the set open pattern per normal figure, the period during which the game ball can flow into the operating device 3070 (open period of the normal electric accessory 3071) and the period during which the movable piece 3072 is located at the closed position (movable Closing period of piece 3072) and, by differentiating the degree of overlap, the normal figure per game (advantage per normal figure per game) that allows the game ball to enter the special 2 non-electric opening 3073b, It is difficult to enter the game ball into the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b. That is, the length of the opening period of the game per normal pattern is varied according to the type per normal pattern, and the game per normal pattern in which a short opening period is set becomes an advantageous per game per normal pattern, and a long opening period is set. As a method other than the method in which the normal per game becomes a disadvantage per normal per game, the normal per per game in which a short opening period is set becomes a disadvantage per per game, and the per game in which a long opening period is set is advantageous. It may be configured to be a game per normal figure.

However, in this case, the movable piece 3072 will be positioned at the closed position at a timing later than the timing at which the game ball flows into the operating device 3070 due to the unfavorable game. Since the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 during the game stays in the game area in the operating device 3070, there is a risk that the game ball will reach the movable piece 3072 after the movable piece 3072 is positioned at the closed position. be.

On the other hand, in the technique used in the ninth control example, the closing period during which the movable piece 3072 is positioned at the closing position is before the timing at which the game ball flows into the operating device 3070 due to the game with the disadvantageous normal game. In order to end, even if the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 due to the game per disadvantageous figure stays in the game area in the operating device 3070, it will enter the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b. can be suppressed. Therefore, for example, it is possible to make it difficult to execute a fraudulent act of intentionally staying in the operating device 3070 for the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 due to a game with an unfavorable pattern.

In addition, as described above with reference to FIGS. 360 and 361, in this ninth control example, the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 during the normal game is surely transferred to the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b. It is configured to be able to set the open pattern A per normal pattern that cannot be entered and the open pattern B per normal pattern that surely enters the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b, but it is limited to this. Without, for example, when the same open pattern per normal pattern is set, the timing at which the game ball flows into the operating device 3070, and the required time until the game ball flowing into the operating device 3070 reaches the movable piece 3072 Depending on the period, the case where the ball can enter the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b and the case where it cannot be configured may be switched.

In this case, for example, the operating device 3070 during a part of the opening period (2.5 seconds) of the normal electric accessory 3071 during the normal game (first 0.5 seconds or last 0.5 seconds) It is preferable that the game ball is configured to be able to reach the movable piece 3072 located at the closed position when the game ball is flowed into. By configuring in this way, it is determined whether or not the game ball enters the special figure 2 non-electrically operated opening 3073b depending on the timing at which the game ball flows into the operating device 3070, so for the player , the timing at which the game ball enters the actuator 3070 can be made interesting.

In addition, as another configuration, for example, a plurality of flow paths through which game balls that have flowed into the actuator 3070 can flow are formed inside the actuator 3070, and a movable piece is formed according to the flow path through which the game balls flow down. 3072, and when the period required from flowing into the actuator 3070 to reaching the movable piece 3072 is within a predetermined period, it is positioned at the closed position. or can reach the movable piece 3072, or is positioned at the closed position when the period required from flowing into the actuating device 3070 to reaching the movable piece 3072 is a predetermined period or longer. It may be constructed such that it can reach the movable piece 3072 that is in contact with it. With this configuration, the player can be interested in the behavior of the game ball that has flowed into the actuator 3070 until it reaches the movable piece 3072 .

In addition, in the present ninth control example, as described above, depending on the type of game state (probability variable state, time saving state) in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the type of special symbol lottery that is likely to be executed is changed. Although it is configured, it is not limited to this, and the type of special pattern lottery that is easier to be executed by the normal pattern per type that is set when the normal pattern is won during the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal pattern. It may be configured to be different.

In addition, in the ninth control example, the type of the non-electric opening that allows the game ball to enter is determined in correspondence with the opening pattern of the normal game per game to be executed. Without being limited to, it may be configured to vary the type of the non-electric opening that makes it easier for the game ball to enter according to the open pattern of the per-normal game to be executed. In other words, even if the normal game per pattern is executed in any open pattern, it is configured so that the game ball can enter any non-electrically operated opening, and the ball can be entered into each non-electrically operated opening. The easiness of playing may be configured to be variable in correspondence with the opening pattern of the game per normal pattern.

<Regarding transition contents of the game state in the ninth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 362, the transition contents of the game state in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example will be described. FIG. 362 is a game flow showing transition contents of the game state in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example.

In this ninth control example, as the game state, normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), probability variation State (high probability state of special design, high probability state of normal design) and three game states can be set, and further, according to the opportunity (time reduction setting opportunity) that the time saving state is set. , a first time-saving state in which the time-saving end condition is relatively easily established, and a second time-saving state in which the time-saving end condition is relatively difficult to be established can be set. Specifically, if the time saving state is set based on the fact that the time saving state is set based on the fact that the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, the time saving state is set based on the time saving decision (time saving lottery). It is configured so that the second time-saving state, which is more advantageous to the player, can be easily set.

Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in not only whether or not the time saving state is set, but also whether the time saving state is set based on which time saving setting opportunity.

First, the contents of the game in the normal state will be explained. As shown in FIG. 362, the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example is formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80, that is, the game area (left-handed area) in which the game ball shot in the left-handed game can flow down. The first ball entrance 64 is provided at a position where the game ball that has flowed down the game area can enter, and when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the first special symbol lottery executed. On the other hand, even if a right-handed game is played in the normal state, in the normal state in which the low probability state of the normal pattern is set, the probability of winning in the normal pattern lottery is low (1/240), and the operating device Since it is difficult to let the game ball flow into 3070 , it becomes difficult to make the game ball enter the right first ball entrance 3064 or the second ball entrance 3065 . Therefore, during the normal state, the left-handed game becomes an advantageous game for the player.

In the first special symbol lottery, a jackpot lottery (jackpot winning judgment) is executed with a probability of 27/8192, and a short-time lottery (short-time winning judgment) is executed with a probability of 1/8192. It consists of Here, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the jackpot types are set as the jackpot A and the jackpot B, and when the jackpot A (selection rate 70%) is set. , After the jackpot game ends, a variable probability state (space mode) is set. On the other hand, when the jackpot B (selection rate 30%) is set, the first time saving state (challenge mode) is set after the jackpot game ends.

During the variable state (space mode), a high probability state of normal symbols is set, and the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is high (239/240), so the right-handed game moves to the operating device 3070. A game ball is made to enter the right first ball entrance 3064 or the second ball entrance 3065 by causing the game ball to flow in and enter one of the non-electrically operated openings. becomes easy. Therefore, during the variable probability state (space mode), the right-handed game becomes a game that is advantageous to the player.

During the variable state (space mode), the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 is configured to be easier to enter the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a, so basically the first special symbol A lottery is carried out. When the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, as described above, jackpot A and jackpot B are set as jackpot types, so when jackpot A (selection rate 70%) is set, the jackpot game ends. After that, when the variable probability state (space mode) is set again and the jackpot B (30% selection ratio) is set, the first time-saving state (challenge mode) is set after the jackpot game ends.

During the first time-saving state (challenge mode), a high probability state of normal patterns is set, and the probability of winning in the normal pattern lottery is high probability (239/240), so as in the above-mentioned variable state , By making the game ball flow into the operating device 3070 by the right-handed game, and by entering the game ball into one of the non-electrically operated openings, the right first ball entrance 3064 or the second ball entrance 3065 A state is created in which it is easy to execute a game in which a game ball is entered. Therefore, during the first time-saving state (time-saving A mode), the right-handed game becomes an advantageous game for the player.

During the first time-saving state (challenge mode), the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 is configured to be easier to enter the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b, so basically the second A special pattern lottery is executed. When the jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery, the jackpot types are set as the jackpot A and the jackpot C, and when the jackpot A (selection ratio 10%) is set, the jackpot game is played. After the end, the first time saving state (challenge mode) is set. On the other hand, when the jackpot C (90% selection ratio) is set, the second time-saving state (heaven mode) is set after the jackpot game ends.

During the second time-saving state (heaven mode), similarly to the first time-saving state (challenge mode) described above, a high probability state of normal patterns is set, and the probability of winning in the normal pattern lottery is high probability ( 239/240), similar to the probability variable state described above, the game ball is made to flow into the actuator 3070 by the right-handed game, and the game ball is entered into one of the non-electrically operated openings to make the right third. It becomes a state in which it is easy to execute a game in which a game ball is entered into the first ball entrance 3064 or the second ball entrance 3065 . Therefore, during the first time-saving state (time-saving A mode), the right-handed game becomes an advantageous game for the player.

During the second time-saving state (heaven mode), the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 is configured to be easier to enter the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b, so basically the second A special pattern lottery is executed. When the jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery, the jackpot types are set as the jackpot A and the jackpot C, and when the jackpot A (selection ratio 10%) is set, the jackpot game is played. After the end, the first time saving state (challenge mode) is set. On the other hand, when the jackpot C (90% selection ratio) is set, the second time-saving state (heaven mode) is set after the jackpot game ends.

Here, in the ninth control example, the ease of establishing the time saving end condition is different between the first time saving state and the second time saving state, and the first time saving state is better than the second time saving state is also configured so that the time-saving end condition is easily established. Specifically, in the first time saving state, as a time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, the number of executions of the first special symbol lottery and the number of times of execution of the second special symbol lottery are summed up. A time-saving end condition is set to be established when the game reaches 10 times, and when the time-saving end condition is established without executing a jackpot game, the game state shifts to a normal state.

On the other hand, in the second time saving state, as a time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, the number of times of execution of the first special symbol lottery and the number of times of execution of the second special symbol lottery are added to 10000 times. A time-saving end condition is set to be satisfied when the game is reached, and when the time-saving end condition is satisfied without executing a jackpot game, the game state shifts to a normal state. In the eighth control example, the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery is configured to be about 27/8192, so when the second time-saving state is set, substantially, time-saving until the next jackpot is won. condition will continue.

<Regarding the production content in the ninth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 363 and 364, the characteristic contents of the various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example will be described. Specifically, the contents of the time-saving winning effect for showing the time-saving winning during the normal state and the contents of the effect mode screen corresponding to each game state will be described. Note that the same reference numerals are assigned to the same effect elements as those of the above-described embodiments, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 363(a), description will be given of the contents of the effect when the time saving pattern hits (time saving winning) in the normal state. FIG. 363(a) is a diagram showing an example displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the time saving symbol is hit (time saving winning) in the normal state.

In the ninth control example, the time-saving lottery can be executed only during the normal state. Specifically, when the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the normal state is not a jackpot election (loss), it is configured to be able to determine the presence or absence of a short-time election, and the special symbol lottery is executed. It is configured to be elected in a short time with a low probability of 1/8192 in the case. Then, when the time saving is won, the time saving state (second time saving state) is set after stopping and displaying the special pattern variation for showing the result of the target special pattern lottery. Here, in the ninth control example, since the second time saving state is configured to be the most advantageous game state for the player, the player who is playing the game in the normal state can be selected by special symbol lottery It is possible to aim for short-time winning while aiming to win a jackpot.

Then, when the time-saving lottery is won in the special symbol lottery, as shown in FIG. In the eighth control example, similarly to each control example described above, when determining (selecting) the variation pattern of the special symbol variation, it is configured not to refer to the presence or absence of time-saving winning. Specifically, regardless of the presence or absence of the time-saving election, the result of the special symbol lottery is configured to determine a variation pattern corresponding to the loss.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict whether or not there will be a short-time winning from the variation pattern of the special symbol variation to be executed. In addition, as in each control example described above, when the result of the special symbol lottery is out in the normal state, since it is configured so that the variation pattern of different variation time is selected, the special symbol variation that has been elected in a short time A different variation time is set for the variation pattern of .

Furthermore, as in the ninth control example, a specific image (blackout image) is continuously displayed until a special symbol stop command is received as a variation effect corresponding to the special symbol variation indicating that the time saving has been won. By configuring as above, even if a variation pattern with a different variation time is selected, the process of determining the variation performance corresponding to the time-saving winning as the variation performance set by the voice lamp control device 113 is simplified. can be

In addition, in the present ninth control example, the display screen shown in FIG. 363(a) is always displayed as a variable effect corresponding to the time-saving winning (the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the special symbol variation). By configuring so as to reduce the processing load of the audio lamp control device 113, but not limited to this, for example, as a variable effect corresponding to short-time winning, output from the main control device 110 Set a variable effect (variable effect to indicate that the result of the special symbol lottery is lost) based on the variable pattern command (variable pattern command indicating winning), and specify during the execution period of the set variable effect From the timing (for example, the timing when 5 seconds have passed since the variable effect is executed, the timing when the effect mode of the variable effect progresses (reach display timing), and the timing at which the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the deviation), It may be configured to display a blackout image.

By configuring in this way, during the execution of the variable performance for indicating that the special symbol lottery is lost, that is, during the period when the player's willingness to play tends to decrease, it is most advantageous to the player. Since it is possible to notify that a privilege (time-saving winning) is given, the player's willingness to play is reduced even during the execution of the variable performance with a high possibility that the result of the special symbol lottery will be lost. It can be suppressed.

In addition, as a method of interrupting the effect indicating the short-time winning during the period when the normal variable effect is being executed, as described above, in addition to the method of interrupting the effect indicating the short-time winning at a predetermined specific timing For example, when an operation effect is executed to make the player operate the frame button 22, as part of the effect result of the operation effect, an effect indicating short-time winning may be interrupted. . By configuring in this way, based on the player's operation of the operation means (frame button 22), it is possible to execute an effect for notifying the presence or absence of the short-time winning, so that the player's motivation It is possible to operate the operating means effectively.

Next, with reference to Drawing 363 (b), the contents of the production in the 2nd time saving state (heaven mode) are explained. FIG.363(b) is the figure which showed an example of the display screen displayed during the 2nd time saving state (heaven mode).

As shown in FIG. 363(b), when the second time-saving state (heaven mode) is set, a rear image imitating heaven is displayed as the rear image of the main display area Dm. Then, in the small display area Dm31, when the jackpot is won, the characters "continuation rate 90%" are displayed as a guidance mode for indicating the probability (continuation rate) that the second time saving state (heaven mode) is set again. is displayed. Then, in the sub-display area, when the second time-saving state (heaven mode) is not set after winning the jackpot (if it is not continued), a guidance mode for explaining the game content is displayed. is the universe." is displayed.

In addition, in the small display area Dm32 formed on the left side of the main display area Dm, the production modes (heaven, space, normal) corresponding to each game state are displayed in order corresponding to the degree of advantage to the player. ing. In the ninth control example, the more advantageous the game state is to the player, the more distant (higher the altitude) the place from the ground becomes the background of the production mode, and the most advantageous game state to the player. The heaven mode is set for the (second time-saving state), and the space mode is set for the next advantageous game state (probability variable state) for the player.

In this way, it is determined whether or not the displayed presentation mode is advantageous to the player by configuring the aspect of the plurality of presentation modes and the degree of advantage to the player so as to be associated with each other. can be easily distinguished visually. In addition, through the guidance mode displayed in the small display area Dm32, the player can visually see the entire settable (shiftable) production modes, the currently set production mode, and the degree of advantage of each production mode. Since it is possible for the player to easily grasp the information, it is possible to easily discriminate whether it is better for the player to continue the presently set performance mode or to shift to a more advantageous performance mode. Therefore, it is possible to easily provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 363 (b), during the second time saving state (heaven mode), 10000 times are set as the number of times of time saving, and in fact, without winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery, 10000 times. The time-saving end condition is established based on the execution of the special symbol lottery, and it is configured to shift to the normal state, but 10,000 special symbol lotteries will be performed without winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery. Since the ratio of execution is very small, it is configured not to display the number of executions of the special symbol lottery (remaining time reduction number of times) until the time reduction end condition is satisfied.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to think that the second time-saving state (heaven mode) will continue until the next big win is won. In addition, in the unlikely event that the number of remaining time reductions in the second time reduction state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times), an alert image for notifying the player that the second time reduction state may end. , and the number of times of short remaining time are preferably executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused because the second time saving state ends without any warning.

Next, with reference to FIG. 364(a), the contents of the display screen during the variable probability state (space mode) will be described. FIG. 364(a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents displayed on the display screen during the variable probability state (space mode). As shown in FIG. 364 (a), during the probability variation state, the first special symbol lottery is configured to be easily executed by the right-handed game, so the first special symbol variation is in the small display area Dm1. A display mode (indicated by three arrows in the drawing) is displayed to indicate that the program is being executed. A background image simulating outer space is displayed as the background image of the main display area Dm, and characters of "outer space mode" are displayed as a guidance mode for indicating the current rendering mode.

Then, in the small display area Dm31, characters of "continuation rate 70%" are displayed as a guide mode for indicating the probability (continuation rate) that the variable probability state (space mode) will be set again after the jackpot game ends. In addition, in the small display area Dm32, a display mode is displayed to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the current game state is the variable probability state. The game state in which the space mode is set, that is, the probability variable state is configured to have a high probability (1/60) of winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery, and to continue the variable probability state until the next jackpot is won. there is That is, when the variable probability state (space mode) is set, the player continues until the next jackpot game is executed in the same way as when the above-described second time-saving state (heaven mode) is set. Since an advantageous game (a game in which the special symbol lottery can be easily executed) is executed, the game state becomes advantageous to the player.

Next, with reference to Drawing 364 (b), the contents of production performed when the 1st time saving state (challenge mode) are set are explained. Drawing 364 (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen displayed during the 1st time saving state (challenge mode). As shown in FIG. 364(b), when the first time-saving state (challenge mode) is set, the rocket 1851 is configured to perform an effect for gradually increasing the altitude (altitude). Then, a display mode is displayed in the small display area Dm8 to indicate the remaining number of times of the second special symbol lottery (10 times) executed during the first time saving state, and a comment "delivered to heaven" is displayed in the sub display area Ds. is displayed, and an effect corresponding to a game aiming at winning a jackpot is executed by the second special symbol lottery executed during the first time saving state.

In other words, during the first time-saving state, based on the result of the second special symbol lottery, a variable effect is executed in which the degree of rise of the rocket 1851 is varied, and when the jackpot is won, the effect that the rocket 1851 reaches heaven. executed. Then, when the second special symbol variation that satisfies the time saving end condition of the first time saving state, that is, the lottery result of the time saving final change is out, the rocket 1851 breaks down and usually falls to the background (for example, the ground) It is configured to guide the player that the normal state is set after the end of the first time saving state.

In addition, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the first time saving state, an effect is executed in which the rocket 1851 shifts to the space mode while wandering in space. By configuring in this way, during the challenge mode, it is possible to continuously execute the period performance over the period in which the special symbol lottery is executed a plurality of times, so that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand performance. can.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the ninth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 365 to 375. FIG. In the ninth control example, part of the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, part of the configuration of the RAM 203, and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are The difference is that part of the configuration of the ROM 222 and part of the configuration of the RAM 223 are changed, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same contents, and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

First, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 365 to 367. FIG. FIG. 365(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in this ninth control example. As shown in FIG. 365(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 in the ninth control example is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the fifth control example (see FIG. 244(a)). Instead of the 1st hit random number 9 table 202ha, instead of the 1st hit type selection 5 table 202db, a jackpot type selection 9 table 202hb is provided; The difference is that a random number table 202he is added.

The normal per pattern selection 9 table 202hf is a data table that is referred to for determining the per per normal pattern type when winning (per normal pattern) in the lottery of normal symbols. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 367(b), but when winning in the lottery of normal symbols, this normal per symbol type selection 9 table 202hf is referred to, and the game state at the time of winning And, the type per general pattern corresponding to the value of the acquired per general pattern type counter C6 is determined. The contents defined in the normal figure per type selection 9 table 202hf will be described later with reference to FIG.

Here, the per-universal figure type counter C6, like other various counters (first per random number counter C1, etc.), is periodically updated by timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. is a counter that Specifically, each time the timer interrupt process is executed, 1 is added to the value of the type counter C6 per normal figure, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (99 in this embodiment), the minimum value 0 clear to In other words, the normal figure per type counter C6, the value is updated while looping the range of "0 to 99". Then, the updated value is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 . When the general pattern is elected, the general pattern per type counter C6 stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 is read and referred to when the general pattern per type is determined.

Next, with reference to FIG. 365(b), the first winning random number 9 table 202ha in the ninth control example will be described. FIG. 365(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first winning random number 9 table 202ha in the ninth control example.

As shown in FIG. 365(b), the first winning random number 9 table 202ha is the first winning random number table 202ha that is determined to be a big hit, as opposed to the first winning random number 5 table 202da (see FIG. 245(a)). The difference is that the range of values of the counter C1 is made different. Further, in the ninth control example, the possible range of values of the first hit random number counter C1 is varied. Specifically, in the fifth control example described above, the possible range of the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is defined as 900 from "0 to 899", but in the ninth control example, "0 to 8191”. By configuring in this way, it is possible to define a determination result with a lower probability in various determinations determined by referring to the value of the first winning random number counter C1. In the ninth control example, only the range that the value of the first winning random number counter C1 can take is different. Since the configuration for storing is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Specifically, when the probability state of the special symbol is "low probability", the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is in the range of "0 to 26". 8191”, the lottery result “out” is stipulated, and in the case of “high probability”, the lottery result “ A lottery result "loss" is stipulated for the range of "137 to 8191".

That is, when the probability state of the special symbol is "low probability", the number of possible values of the first winning random number counter C1 is 8192, and the number of values judged to be a big win is 27. Therefore, the big win is won. The probability is 27/8192 (approximately 1/300). On the other hand, when the probability state of the special symbol is "high probability", the value determined as the big win is 137 while the value that the first winning random number counter C1 can take is 8192, so the big win is won. The probability is 137/8192 (approximately 1/60).

Next, with reference to FIG. 366(a), the jackpot type selection 9 table 202hb in the ninth control example will be described. FIG. 366(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the jackpot type selection 9 table 202hb. As shown in FIG. 366(a), in the jackpot type selection 9 table 202hb, two types of jackpots A9 and B9 are selected as the jackpot types corresponding to the first special pattern (special pattern 1). As a jackpot type corresponding to FIG. 2), two types of jackpots A9 and C9 are provided.

As shown in FIG. 366 (a), as the type of special symbol, for the special symbol 1 (first special symbol), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 69", "jackpot A9” is associated and defined. This "jackpot A9" is a jackpot type (9-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 9 rounds and the probability variable state is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 70 counter values are "jackpot A9", so when the first special pattern lottery results in a jackpot, "jackpot A9" is determined. ratio is 70% (70/100).

As shown in FIG. 366(a), for the first special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "70 to 99" in association with "jackpot B9". . This "jackpot B9" is a jackpot type (9th round first time reduction jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 9 rounds and the first time reduction state is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 30 counter values are "jackpot B9", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, "jackpot B9" is determined. ratio is 30% (30/100).

In addition, as the type of special design, for special design 2 (second special design), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 9", "jackpot A9" is defined to correspond. It is This "jackpot A9" is a jackpot type (9-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 9 rounds and the probability variable state is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 10 counter values are "jackpot A9", so when the second special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, "jackpot A9" is determined. ratio is 10% (10/100).

As shown in FIG. 366(a), for the second special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "10 to 99" in association with "jackpot C9". . This "jackpot C9" is a jackpot type (9 round second time saving jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 9 rounds and the second time saving state is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 90 counter values are "jackpot C9", so when the second special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, "jackpot C9" is determined. ratio is 90% (90/100).

Next, with reference to FIG.366(b), the detailed content of random number 9 table 202he per time saving is demonstrated. FIG. 366(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the random number 9 table 202he per time saving. This time saving random number 9 table 202he differs from the time saving random number 5 table 202ge in the above-described fifth control example in that the value of the first winning random number counter C1 that can win time saving is different, and the second special symbol It is different in that the value of the first winning random number counter C1 that can win short-time winning is defined in the lottery, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Specifically, when the normal state is set, it is determined that the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is "8192" in both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery as a time-saving election. The judgment value to be determined is specified. In other words, in the ninth control example, the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state is configured to win the short time prize with a probability of 1/8192. In addition, when the time saving is won, the second time saving (time saving B) is always set as the time saving type, so after the time saving winning, the second time saving state (heaven mode). .

Next, with reference to FIG. 367, the detailed contents of the per normal pattern type selection 9 table 202hf will be described. FIG. 367 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the normal figure per type selection 9 table 202hf. This general pattern per type selection 9 table 202hf is a data table that is referred to when determining the general pattern per type that is set in the case of winning in the normal pattern lottery, and the set game state and acquisition Different types per general pattern (per normal pattern A, per general pattern B) are defined in association with the value of the per general pattern type counter C6.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 367, the game state is "probability change" or "first time saving", and the value of the acquired normal figure per type counter C6 is in the range of "0 to 99", It is configured so that "per normal pattern A" is determined as the type per normal pattern, the game state is "second time saving", and the value of the acquired per normal pattern type counter C6 is "0 to 99". In the range of, it is configured so that "B" per normal pattern is determined as the type per normal pattern.

Here, the contents of the per-universal figure type will be explained. In this embodiment, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 3071 in the normal pattern per game is different between when the low probability state of the normal pattern is set and when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set. When the normal pattern low probability state is set, the normal electric accessory 3071 is in the open state in one normal pattern per game than when the normal pattern high probability state is set. It is configured to shorten the period of time. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to enter the operating device 3070 in the high-probability state of the normal symbol than in the low-probability state of the normal symbol.

As described above, inside the actuating device 3070, there is a special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a for operating the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a attached to the right first entrance 3064 from the closed state to the open state And, since the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b for operating the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a associated with the second entrance 3065 from the closed state to the open state is arranged, the operating device A lottery of special symbols is executed in a state in which it is easier to flow game balls into 3070 (high probability state of normal symbols) than in a state in which it is difficult to flow game balls into actuator 3070 (low probability state of normal symbols). Since the game state is such that it is easy to play, the game state is advantageous to the player.

Furthermore, in the ninth control example, in the time saving state in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, different time saving types can be set, and according to the set time saving type, the normal pattern lottery is won. It is configured so that the selection ratio of the type per normal figure determined when it is different. In this ninth control example, as shown in FIG. 367(b), as the general pattern per type, it is configured to be selectable from "per general pattern A" and "per normal pattern B".

Then, when "per normal pattern A" is determined as the type per normal pattern and when "per normal pattern B" is determined, the normal electric accessory 3071 is in the open state in one per normal pattern game. Without changing the length of the period, the length of the period (opening period) from the execution of the normal figure winning game to the opening of the normal electric accessory 3071 is configured to be different. That is, even if any normal pattern per type is determined, it is easier to flow the game ball into the operating device 3070 than the normal pattern per game executed in the normal state (normal pattern low probability state) A normal pattern per game is executed, but according to the determined per normal pattern type, the inflow timing of the game ball to the operating device 3070 is varied, and by varying the inflow timing, the operating device 3070 It is possible to execute a general pattern per game in which the game ball that has flowed into is easy to enter the special figure 1 non-electric working port 3073a, and a general pattern per game in which it is easy to enter the special figure 2 non-electric working port 3073b. It consists of

Specifically, when "per normal pattern A" is set as the type per normal pattern, the movable piece 3072 is opened during the period in which the game ball flowing into the operating device 3070 can reach the movable piece 3072 The opening period of the game per normal pattern is set so that it becomes easy to become a state, and when "per normal pattern B" is set, the game ball flowing into the operating device 3070 can reach the movable piece 3072. , the opening period of the game per normal pattern is set so that the movable piece 3072 is likely to be in the closed state.

In addition, in this ninth control example, as described above with reference to FIGS. The game ball that flows into the operating device 3070 enters the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b (normal figure per B However, it is not limited to this, for example, within the first period of the open period in which the normal electric accessory 3071 is in the open state by the normal game When the game ball is made to flow into the operating device 3070, it is possible to enter the game ball into the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b, and the game ball is inserted in the second period different from the first period. When it is made to flow into the operating device 3070, it is possible to enter the game ball to the special figure 1 non-electric activation port 3073a. may be configured to be executable.

By configuring in this way, the non-electric opening (special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a, special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b) in which the game ball can enter according to the set normal figure per type is determined Instead, a non-electric opening (special figure 1 non- Since the electric opening 3073a, the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b) is determined, the player can select any non-electric opening (special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a, special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b) It is possible to make it difficult to grasp which special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery) is likely to be executed until the game ball enters the ball.

In addition, in this ninth control example, as shown in FIG. 367, according to the game state that is set, the contents of the type selection 9 table 202hf per normal pattern so as to reliably change the type per normal pattern to be set However, without being limited to this, if the second time saving state is set, the second time saving state is set in the range where the type of B per normal pattern is more likely to be selected. Even if it is not, it may be configured so that B per normal pattern can be selected. By configuring in this way, it is possible to create a situation in which the second special symbol lottery is suddenly executed in the high probability state of the normal symbol where the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed, so that the player can A game with unexpectedness can be provided.

Next, with reference to FIG. 368, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in this ninth control example will be described. FIG. 368 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in this ninth control example. As shown in Figure 368, the configuration of the RAM203 in the present ninth control example, the configuration of the RAM203 in the fifth control example described above (see Figure 244 (b)), the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203pa is added The difference is that Since other configurations are the same as those of the RAM 203 in the fifth control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

The jackpot type storage area 203eb is a storage area for temporarily storing data indicating the jackpot type when a jackpot is won. In the jackpot type storage area 203eb, data corresponding to the jackpot type is stored when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery. The data stored in the jackpot type storage area 203eb is held until the end timing of the winning jackpot, and is used to set the game state after the jackpot ends according to the jackpot type. In addition, about the detailed content of jackpot classification storage area 203eb, since it is the same as the content mentioned above in 9th Embodiment, the description is abbreviate|omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 369(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the ninth control example will be described. FIG. 369(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in this ninth control example. As shown in FIG. 369(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 in the ninth control example differs from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the fifth control example described above only in that an expectation level selection table 222pa is added. ing. This expectation level selection table 222pa, in the state in which the time saving type "time saving A", that is, the time saving state in which the first special symbol lottery is mainly performed is set, the second special symbol lottery is relatively difficult to be executed "time saving A1” is set or relatively easy to execute “time saving A2” is set to the player. This is a data table that is referenced to determine the degree of expectation that

Here, as described above, in the ninth control example, "time saving A" can be set as a time saving state in which the first special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than the second special symbol lottery. Furthermore, as "time saving A", "time saving A1" in which the second special symbol lottery is relatively difficult to be executed is set, or "time saving A2" in which the second special symbol lottery is relatively easy to be executed can be set. Then, when "time saving A" is set, it is configured to execute a common mode effect (time saving A mode) regardless of which time saving type (time saving A1, time saving A2) is set. there is

By constructing in this way, the enjoyment of predicting whether the set time-saving type is 'time-saving A1' or 'time-saving A2' is provided to the player who has executed the effect of the time-saving A mode. can do. In addition, since it is configured to be able to execute the mode suggesting effect while the effect of the time saving A mode is being executed, it is actually set for the player in the state where the effect of the time saving A mode is being executed. It is possible to provide an element for predicting the time saving type (working time saving A1, working time saving A2).

Here, the details of the expectation level selection table 222pa will be described with reference to FIG. 369(b). FIG. 369(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the expectation level selection table 222pa. As shown in FIG. 369(b), this expectation degree selection table 222pa is, for each time reduction type, the type of expectation degree (expectation degree in which the time reduction type of time reduction A2 is set) and the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea. are defined in association with the range. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 369 (b), for the time saving type "time saving A1" (time saving type with a relatively low probability that the second special symbol lottery will be executed among the time saving A), the production The value of the lottery counter 223ea is defined in association with the production mode for high expectations in the range of "0 to 4", and the production mode for medium expectations is defined in association with the range of "5 to 49", The range of "50 to 99" is defined in association with the low-expectation performance mode.

Since the production lottery counter 223ea can take 100 values of "0 to 99", the production mode for high expectation, medium expectation, and low expectation is determined when the time saving type A1 is set. are 5% (5/100), 45% (45/100), and 50% (50/100), respectively.

Further, as shown in FIG. 369 (b), for the time saving type "time saving A2" (time saving type with a relatively high probability that the second special symbol lottery will be executed among the time saving A), the effect lottery counter 223ea The value of "0 to 19" is defined in association with the production mode for high expectations, and the production mode for medium expectations (not shown) is defined in the range of "20 to 79". , and the range of "80 to 99" is defined in association with the effect mode for low expectations.

Since the production lottery counter 223eka can take 100 values of "0 to 99", the production mode for high expectation, medium expectation and low expectation is determined when time saving A2 is reached. The proportions are 20% (20/100), 60% (60/100) and 20% (20/100) respectively. From these stipulations, it can be said that the production mode for the high expectation level is more likely to be selected when the time reduction A2 is set, but is less likely to be selected when the time reduction A1 is set. In addition, the production mode for the middle expectation degree is selected at a relatively high rate regardless of whether the time reduction A1 or the time reduction A2 is set, and the production mode for the low expectation degree is set to the time reduction A2. In this case, it is difficult to be selected, and it is likely to be selected when the time saving A1 is selected. Therefore, when the production mode for the high expectation degree is executed, while it is possible to suggest that there is a high possibility that the set time reduction type is the time reduction A2, for the low expectation degree When the production mode is executed, it is possible to suggest that the set time saving type is likely to be the working time saving A1. In addition, when the performance mode for medium expectation level is executed, it is possible to suggest that the set time saving type may be any of time saving A1 and time saving A2. As a result, the player can predict the execution expectation degree of the second special symbol lottery during the time saving state according to the expectation degree suggested by the performance mode, so that the player's interest in the game is improved. be able to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 370, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the ninth control example will be described. FIG. 370 is a block diagram showing the configuration of RAM 223. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 370 , the RAM 223 in the ninth control example has an effect lottery counter 223 ha, a short remaining time counter 223 hb, and a special figure 1 non-electric open flag 223 hc in contrast to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the fifth control example described above. , Special figure 2 non-electrification opening flag 223hd and initial fluctuation standby flag 223he are added.

The effect lottery counter 223ha is a counter used to select one effect mode (expectation level type) from the above-described expectation level selection table 222pa. The value of the effect lottery counter 223ha is updated within the range of "0 to 99". When selecting the effect mode (expectation level type) of the special small hit effect, the random number (counter value) defined in the expectation level selection table 222pa is compared with the value of the effect lottery counter 223ha, and the corresponding 1 is obtained. is selected. This effect lottery counter 223ha is updated, for example, every 1 ms during the main process 17 (see FIG. 807).

The remaining time reduction counter 223hb is a counter for measuring the remaining time reduction number of times during the time reduction state.

The special figure 1 non-electric opening flag 223hc is a flag for indicating that the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is operating. It is a flag that is set to ON when the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is in an open state (in operation) and is set to OFF when it is in a closed state (not in operation).

The special figure 2 non-electric opening flag 223hd is a flag for indicating that the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is operating. It is a flag that is set to ON when the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is in the open state (in operation) and is set to OFF in the case of the closed state (not in operation).

The initial variation standby flag 223he is a flag for indicating a period from the end of the big win game to the execution of the first special symbol variation, and is set to ON when the big win game ends. After the end of the jackpot game, it is set to OFF when the first special symbol variation is executed. That is, the flag is set to ON from the end of the jackpot game to the execution of the first special symbol variation.

This initial fluctuation standby flag 223he is referred to when determining a period for continuously displaying the game explanation screen displayed at the end of the jackpot game.

In addition, in this control example, regardless of the special symbol type to be executed after the end of the jackpot game, when the first special symbol lottery is executed, the initial fluctuation waiting flag 223he is set to OFF. However, without being limited to this, for example, if the time saving type of the time saving state set after the end of the jackpot game is "time saving A", until the first first special symbol variation is executed, "time saving B" In the case of , the initial variation standby flag 223he may be set to ON until the first second special symbol variation is executed. In other words, depending on the time saving type of the time saving state to be set, it may be configured to vary the special symbol variation type for setting the initial variation standby flag 223he to OFF, and it is mainly executed by the time saving type to be set. The initial variation waiting flag 223he may be set to ON until the special symbol variation corresponding to the special symbol type is executed.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the ninth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 371 to 375, characteristic contents among the contents of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the ninth control example will be described. It should be noted that detailed description of the same control processing contents as those executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example described above will be omitted. Further, among the control processes having the same content as the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifth control example described above, some of the control processing are denoted by different reference numerals for convenience of explanation. , and the detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

FIG. 371 is a flow chart showing the contents of command determination processing 9 (S54112). In this command determination process 9 (S54112), when it is determined that the state command is received for the command determination process described above (S4309: Yes), the point of executing the state command process 9 (S54301) and time saving related When it is determined that the command is received (54303: Yes), it is different in that the process of executing the time saving related process 9 (S54304) is executed. Other than that, they are identical.

Here, the content of the state command process 9 (S54301) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 372 is a flow chart showing the contents of state command processing 9 (S54301). This state command process 9 (S54301) is a process executed when a state command is included in the command received from the main controller 110, and is the game state set by the main controller 110. Processing for setting the production mode based on and processing for setting the remaining time reduction number of times (time reduction end condition) when the time reduction state is set are executed.

When the state command process 9 (S54301) is executed, it is first determined whether or not a command indicating the game state has been received (S54351). Execute (S54352) and proceed to S54353. Also, if it is determined that it has not been received (S54351: No), then it is determined whether a command indicating the setting of the number of times of working hours has been received (S54353), and if it is determined that it has been received (S54353: Yes) , Reads the time saving type stored in the gaming state storage area 223i (S54354), determines whether the read time saving type is "time saving A" (S54355), and determines that it is "time saving A" ( S54355: Yes), "10000" is set to the value of the remaining time reduction counter 223pa, and the process proceeds to S54358. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not "time saving A" ("time saving B") (S54355: No), the value of the remaining time saving counter 223hb is set to 10 (S54357), and the process proceeds to S54358.

That is, the value of the remaining time reduction counter 223hb is set to the remaining time reduction count (time reduction end condition) corresponding to the time reduction type (S54356, S54357). Here, the value of the set remaining time reduction counter 223hb is displayed as the remaining time reduction number of the small area Dm6 displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the time reduction state is set. In addition, in this 9th control example, it comprises so that the value of "10000" may be set to remaining time reduction counter 223hb as time reduction end conditions of a 2nd time reduction state. In other words, it is configured to set a time-saving end condition that is satisfied when a big hit is not won in 10,000 special symbol lotteries.

In this case, since the special symbol lottery in the time saving state wins the big win with a probability of 27/8192, the big win is almost certainly won before the time saving end condition is satisfied. Therefore, when the second time saving state is set, the remaining time saving number of times is updated on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 until the value of the remaining time saving number counter 223hb reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100). It is configured not to execute display processing, and instead, is configured to continuously display the character "∞".

By configuring in this way, during a period when the player is not interested in the number of remaining time reductions in the time reduction state (a period in which a large number of remaining time reductions remain), the number of remaining time reductions is indicated each time a special symbol lottery is executed. It is possible to save the trouble of executing the process of updating the display mode, and reduce the processing load of the audio lamp control device 113 .

In this case, after winning the jackpot, the number of executions of the special symbol lottery executed in the second time saving state may be displayed to the player as part of the result display. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to analyze the actually executed game.

In this manner, in the pachinko machine 10 capable of setting a high probability state of normal symbols in which the types of special symbol lottery to be mainly executed are different, the element for establishing the shortening of time end condition which is likely to be established mainly is the number of times of remaining time reduction counter. By setting the value of 223hb, the process for updating and displaying the number of times of reduced remaining time can be executed based on the content of updating the value of the reduced number of remaining times counter 223hb. can be simplified.

In the processing of S54358, processing corresponding to other information included in the status command is executed (S54358), and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 373, the content of the game state update process 9 (S54352) will be described. FIG. 373 is a flow chart showing the contents of the game state update process 9 (S54352). This game state update process 9 (S54352) is a process executed when a command indicating the game state is received in the state command process 9 (see S54301 in FIG. 372). , and the processing based on the game state is executed.

When the game state update process 9 (S54352) is executed, first, based on the state command received this time, information for indicating the current game state is stored in the game state storage area 223i (S4401), and the normal state is entered. It is determined whether the migration has occurred (S54401). In the processing of S54401, if it is determined that the state has shifted to the normal state, that is, if it is determined that the command indicating the normal state is included in the state command received this time (S54401: Yes), the remaining time reduction counter 223hb is cleared to 0 (S54402).

Next, it is determined whether there is a special figure 2 reservation (reservation storage of the second special symbol) (S54404), and when it is determined that there is no special figure 2 reservation (S54404: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S54404, if it is determined that there is a special figure 2 reservation (S54404: Yes), set a display command for showing the pullback effect of the number of times corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number (S54405), End this process.

That is, in the processing from S54404 to S54405, when the special figure 2 reservation is acquired at the time when the "time saving A (time saving A mode)" in which the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed ends, the transition to the normal state After that, a process for executing a dedicated effect (pull-back effect) is executed for the second special symbol lottery that is preferentially executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the player is in a special state while the pull-back effect is being executed.

In the processing of S54401, if it is determined that there is no transition to the normal state (S54401: No), then it is determined whether it is a transition to the time saving state (S54406), and it is determined that there is no transition to the time saving state If so (S54406: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined to be a transition to the time saving state (S54406: Yes), the initial fluctuation standby flag 223he is set to ON (S54407), and the display command corresponding to the time saving type is set (S54408), this End the process.

That is, in the processing of S54407 and S54408 described above, when the jackpot game ends and the time saving state is set, the display of the game explanation screen displayed during the ending period of the jackpot game is continued even after the jackpot game ends. is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 374, the content of the time-saving related process 9 (S54304) is demonstrated. FIG. 374 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving related process 9 (S54304). In this time saving related process 9 (S54304), a process for determining the effect mode based on the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state is executed.

When the time saving related process 9 (S54304) is executed, first, the current time saving type is read out from the game state storage area 223i (S54601). Next, it is determined whether the current time saving type is "time saving A" (S54602), and when it is determined that the current time saving type is "time saving A" (S54602: Yes), the received command is a special figure It is determined whether it is a command related to 2 variation (related to the execution of the second special symbol variation) (S54603).

In the processing of S54603, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation related (S54603: Yes), then 1 is added to the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223pb (S54604), and the special figure after the addition It is determined whether the value of the 2-variation number counter 203pb is greater than 5 (S54605). In the process of S54505, if it is determined that it is greater than 5 (S545605: Yes), set a display command to indicate that the special figure 2 fluctuation count has exceeded the upper limit (S54606), and move to the process of S54609 .

When the display command is set in the processing of S54606, in the time saving state in which the time saving A in which the second special symbol lottery is difficult to execute is set, the time saving end condition set for the time saving B "second special symbol A display mode is set for congratulating that the second special symbol lottery has been executed more than the number of times the lottery is executed is 5 times.

On the other hand, in the process of S54602, when it is determined that the time saving type read this time is not "time saving A" (S54602: No), this process ends as it is.

In the process of S54609, the value of the remaining short time counter 223hb is updated based on the received information (S54609), and a display command for indicating the updated value of the remaining short time counter 223hb is set (S54610). End the process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 375, the contents of the non-power status management process (S54102) will be described. FIG. 375 is a flow chart showing the contents of the non-power status management process (S54102). In this non-electric situation management process (S54102), based on the detection signal output from the detection means provided in the pachinko machine 10, the operation of the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a and the special figure 2 non-electric role 3065a Actions are taken to manage the situation.

Conventionally, a ball entry means that can execute a lottery (for example, a special symbol lottery) by entering a game ball, and a first position (open state) that allows a game ball to enter the ball entry means. ), and a second position (closed state) in which it is more difficult to enter a game ball than the first position, and a variable means (for example, an ordinary electric accessory) are provided to play a winning game (for example, A pachinko machine capable of executing a game of entering a game ball into a ball entry means by variably operating a variable means by a normal pattern winning game executed when a winning is won in a normal pattern lottery. be.

Furthermore, as a game state, a winning game is likely to be executed, or an advantageous game state in which the period in which the variable means is positioned at the first position in one winning game tends to be long, that is, the game ball is entered into the ball entry means. There is a pachinko machine configured to be able to set an advantageous game state (for example, a time-saving state) that makes it easier to hit a ball.

In the conventional pachinko machine configured in this way, when the advantageous game state is set, the ball entering means is more likely to enter than when a game state other than the advantageous game state (for example, normal state) is set. Since the game ball can be easily entered, the player can be motivated to play the game while anticipating that an advantageous game state will be set.

However, in the conventional pachinko machine, only one type of lottery is executed when a game ball is entered into the ball-entering means, so that the contents of the lottery are excessively advantageous to the player. As a result, when the advantageous gaming state is set, the player is provided with a game that is excessively advantageous. However, there is a problem that it becomes difficult to motivate players to play games with the aim of setting an advantageous game state.

In addition, it is possible to set the lottery content with a higher degree of advantage to the player and set the frequency of setting the advantageous gaming state, that is, to allow the player to easily enter the game ball into the ball entry means. It is conceivable to use a specification that reduces the frequency with which possible game states are set. There is a problem that the player who is playing the game becomes bored with the game before the advantageous game state is set.

On the other hand, in the ninth control example, when a game ball enters the ball-entering means that makes it easier for the game ball to enter due to the setting of the advantageous game state, a plurality of types of lotteries are executed. It is structured so that it is easy to Then, the degree of advantage to the player is made different for a plurality of types of lotteries that are likely to be executed.

More specifically, according to the behavior (falling result) of the game ball entering the ball entering means, the first special symbol lottery with a low degree of advantage or the second special symbol lottery with a high degree of advantage is executed ( It is configured so that it is possible to By constructing in this way, the advantageous game state (time saving state) is set to provide the player with a period during which the special symbol lottery can be easily executed for a predetermined period, and the game is executed during the period. By switching the type of special symbol lottery (making it easier to execute), it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the privilege given to the player during the advantageous game state (time saving state), so that excessive It is possible to suppress the provision of an advantageous game.

Further, detailed description is as described above with reference to FIG. 356, in this ninth control example, the area where the game ball is likely to enter during the normal pattern per game executed when winning in the normal symbol lottery Inside (inside the operating device 3070), a special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a that triggers the operation of the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a and a special figure 2 non-electric opening that triggers the operation of the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a An electric opening 3073b is provided, and the game ball is configured to be distributed to either the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a or the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b according to the operation pattern of the game per normal figure. are doing.

Then, when the game ball enters the special figure 1 non-electric opening 3073a, the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a is operated, so that the first special symbol lottery is executed. The game ball is in a state where it is easy for the game ball to enter the mouth 3064, and when the ball enters the special figure 2 non-electric opening 3073b, the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is operated, so that the second special symbol lottery. It is configured so that the game ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 3065 which is the execution trigger. Furthermore, the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery. 3065a is in operation, the game ball is configured to be difficult to reach the second ball entrance 3065.

Specifically, it is configured so that the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a in operation blocks the flow path in which the game ball can reach the second ball entrance 3065. Therefore, in a state in which both the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a and the special figure 2 non-electric role 3065a are operating, the game ball enters the first ball entrance 3064 rather than the second ball entrance 3065. It is configured to make it easier to hit the ball.

Furthermore, in the ninth control example, as the end condition for ending the advantageous game state, an end condition is set that is established when the number of executions of the special symbol lottery executed during the advantageous game state reaches a predetermined number of times. ing. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to execute a game in which only the second special symbol lottery is executed during the advantageous game state.

In addition, in the ninth control example, the through gate 67, the normal electric accessory 3071, the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a, and the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a are placed in the right area of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10. Since it is arranged, for example, it is possible to make it difficult to shoot the game ball toward the through gate 67 and the normal electric accessory 3071 without making the game ball reach each non-electric accessory. Therefore, until it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 3065 where the lottery advantageous to the player is executed (state in which the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a is operating) , it is possible to make it difficult to play a game without entering a game ball into the right first ball entrance 3064.例文帳に追加

That is, when the game ball is fired toward any one of the through gate 67, the normal electric accessory 3071, the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a, and the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a, the other It is configured so that a game ball can be entered into the device. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a player executes a game in which a game ball is entered only to a specific device.

In addition, in the ninth control example, the through gate 67, the normal electric accessory 3071, the special figure 1 non-electric accessory 3064a, and the special figure 2 non-electric accessory 3065a are all provided in the right area of the game board 13. However, without being limited to this, at least a plurality of the various devices described above may be arranged at positions where game balls that have flowed down the same flow-down path can enter.

<Tenth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 376 to 395. FIG. In the tenth control example, as in the above-described seventh control example, in some cases where the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is not a big win (lost), a small win can be won. It has a game property (so-called 1 type 2 types) that can execute a big winning game by entering a game ball into a specific area during a small winning game executed based on winning. When the time-saving state is set, the time-saving state in which it is easy to acquire the second special symbol reservation memory (special figure 2 reservation) and the time-saving state in which it is difficult to acquire can be set.

The pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example is configured to be able to store a predetermined number (four) of the special figure 2 hold with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example described above, and each game state is different in that the game state is set after the big winning game is executed based on the winning of the big winning or after the big winning game is executed based on the winning of the small winning. Furthermore, it is different in that the content of the production executed during the time saving state is changed. In the following, differences between the tenth control example and the above-described seventh control example will be mainly described. It should be noted that detailed description of the same contents as those of the seventh control example described above will be omitted.

In the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example (including each modification) described above, the game state is a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) and a time saving state (low probability state of special symbols) , a high probability state of normal symbols), and is configured to be able to set at least, and the electric role is performed by the normal pattern per game (performed when winning in the normal pattern lottery) performed during the time saving state The object 640 a is opened, and the ball is easily entered into the second ball entrance (a prize winning opening) 640 .

Then, a special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery) that is executed based on the ball entering the second ball entrance (winning hole) 640 results in a lottery other than a big win (for example, a small win). When it becomes, a small hit game is executed, and when the game ball passes through the specific area during the small hit game (at the end of the small hit game, information indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area is stored (when it is), the jackpot game was configured to be executed. In addition, the lottery opportunity of the second special symbol can be retained and stored up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) as an upper limit, so that the lottery of the second special symbol can be performed during the time saving state (normal symbol high probability state). By holding and storing the opportunity, even after the high-probability state of the normal design ends (even after shifting to the low-probability state of the normal design), the second special design lottery can be executed, for example. , Even when the time saving state ends and the game state shifts to the normal state, the game is played in the normal state (normal state in which the second special symbol lottery opportunity is retained and stored) that is more advantageous than normal. Since it is possible for a player to execute the game, a state in which the player who has finished the time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is more likely to execute the jackpot game than usual. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from significantly declining.

However, in the pachinko machine 10 in each control example described above, in order to end the time saving state in a state where the player who is normally playing the game during the time saving state has acquired the second special symbol lottery opportunity , Since it is configured to increase the probability of winning the normal pattern during the time saving state and extend the period in which the variable means is opened, the normal pattern winning game is executed, so it is acquired at the time when the time saving state ends. There is a problem that the number of lottery opportunities for the second special symbol that has already been completed (special symbol 2 reservation number) is always the same number, and it is impossible to provide a game with unexpectedness to the player.

In addition, when the number of acquired special figures 2 pending is always the same at the time the time saving state ends, in order to suppress the execution of a game that is excessively advantageous to the player, the time saving state Including the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery to be executed after finishing, prescribing low the ratio of setting the time saving state, or prescribing low the probability of winning a small prize in the second special symbol lottery. There is a need to. Therefore, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to play the game during the time saving state, and the player's willingness to play is lowered.

On the other hand, in the tenth control example, as a time saving state, a time saving state (advantageous time saving state) that is easy to acquire special figure 2 reservation, and a time saving state (disadvantageous time saving state) that is difficult to acquire special figure 2 reservation, is configured to be configurable. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier to vary the number of special figures 2 pending at the time when the time saving state ends according to the type of the time saving state that has been set. Therefore, even if the ratio of setting the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game is increased, it is possible to suppress the execution of a game that is excessively advantageous to the player. can be easily executed, and the player's desire to play can be enhanced.

Furthermore, in the tenth control example, when a big win game is executed based on the fact that the special symbol lottery wins the jackpot, a disadvantageous time saving state is set after the big win game ends, and the special symbol lottery wins the small win. When the jackpot game is executed based on the fact that the jackpot game is played, an advantageous time-saving state can be set after the jackpot game ends.

That is, according to the execution opportunity of the big winning game, it is configured to vary the advantage degree of the time saving state to be set after the end of the big winning game. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in which execution opportunity the big winning game was executed based on.

In addition, in the tenth control example, as described above, according to the execution opportunity of the jackpot game, it is configured to vary the setting ratio between the advantageous time saving state and the unfavorable time saving state, but not limited to this, For example, according to the game state at the time the jackpot game is executed (game state at the time of winning the jackpot), the setting ratio of the advantageous time saving state and the disadvantageous time saving state may be configured to be different. In this case, for example, when the jackpot game is executed in the state where the time saving state is set than when the jackpot game is executed in the state where the normal state is set as the gaming state, the advantageous time saving state is It is preferable to configure so that the set ratio is high. As a result, in the most disadvantageous game state for the player, even if the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the disadvantageous time saving state is likely to be set, so the time saving state is likely to end, but the time saving state is likely to end. When the big winning game is executed and the time saving state is set again, the advantageous working time saving state is easily set, so that the time saving state can be easily looped through the big winning game.

With this configuration, the player can be made to play games with different degrees of advantage step by step, so that the player can be motivated to play the game with the highest degree of advantage. . It should be noted that, in the tenth control example, as in each control example described above, a lottery is executed in which the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery. Therefore, the time-saving state (advantageous time-saving state) that is easy to end with the special figure 2 pending is easier than the time-saving state (disadvantageous time-saving state) that is easy to end with the special figure 2 pending. However, without being limited to this, for example, the first special symbol lottery is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the second special symbol lottery, and the special figure 2 is reserved. It may be configured so that the time saving state in which it is easy to end in the state of not acquiring the special figure 2 reservation is more advantageous to the player than the time saving state in which it is easy to end in the state of acquiring .

In the pachinko machine 10 of each control example described above, as the number of times of special symbol variation to end the time saving state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, by enabling the setting of different times according to the jackpot type, the time saving state In some cases, it is difficult for the player to understand how long the event will continue. As a result, the player can play while expecting that the time saving state will continue for a longer time.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of each control example described above, so as to end the time saving state at the stop timing of the special symbol variation in the special symbol variation of the number of times to end the time saving state (special symbol variation in which the time saving end condition is satisfied) was configured to

On the other hand, in the tenth control example, when the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state is established, the time-saving state is ended at the start timing of the corresponding special symbol variation. Furthermore, as the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, the time saving end condition established by executing the second special symbol variation once can be set. That is, when the time saving end condition established by executing the second special symbol variation once is set, the time saving state continues until the first second special symbol variation is performed during the time saving state. However, when the first second special symbol variation is executed, for example, when the time saving state is set without having the lottery right of the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 reservation), time saving When a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 during the state and the second special symbol lottery is executed, the time saving state is terminated.

By configuring in this way, when the time saving state is set, the second special symbol lottery can be surely executed, and the period for acquiring the special figure 2 reservation in the time saving state can be shortened. can be done. That is, in the tenth control example, the time saving state in which the time saving end condition is set, which is established by executing the second special symbol variation once, becomes a disadvantageous time saving state that is disadvantageous to the player.

In addition, in the tenth control example, as the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, the time saving end condition established by executing the second special symbol variation twice can also be set. In this case, since it is possible to continue the time saving state until the second second special symbol variation is started, the second entrance 640 during the variation period of the first second special symbol variation It becomes a period in which it is easy to enter a game ball. That is, in the tenth control example, the time-saving state in which the time-saving end condition established by executing the second special symbol variation twice becomes an advantageous time-saving state that is advantageous to the player.

In addition, in the tenth control example, as described above, the time saving state is ended at the start timing of the special symbol variation when the time saving end condition is established, and the first special symbol variation during the time saving state By configuring the time-saving end condition that can be established in the settable, it is possible to set a time-saving state (disadvantageous time-saving state) in which it is difficult to acquire special figure 2 suspension, but not limited to this, for example, the above In the pachinko machine 10 configured to terminate the time saving state at the stop timing of the special symbol variation when the time saving end condition is satisfied, as in each control example, the variation pattern of the special symbol variation when the time saving end condition is satisfied. A short variation pattern in which a short variation time (eg, 0.1 seconds) is set and a long variation pattern in which a long variation time (eg, 60 seconds) is set may be selectable.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to switch between an advantageous time-saving state and a disadvantageous time-saving state depending on the selected variation pattern. In other words, when the same content of the time-saving end condition is set as the time-saving end condition of the time-saving state, the easiness of acquiring the special figure 2 reservation can be varied according to the set variation pattern.

Moreover, in this case. Depending on the game state at the time of jackpot winning (small winning), different types of time saving states can be set, and depending on the time saving type to be set, the selection ratio between the above-mentioned short fluctuation pattern and long fluctuation pattern is different. Alternatively, a period in which a short variation pattern is likely to be selected and a period in which a long variation pattern is likely to be selected can be set based on the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the end of the previous big winning game. You can

By configuring in this way, since it is possible to switch between the advantageous time saving state and the disadvantageous time saving state in the period from the setting of the time saving state of 1 to the end of the time saving state, the player Until the last moment when the time saving state ends, the game can be played while expecting that the game will be executed in the advantageous time saving state.

In addition, by combining the technology of the tenth control example and the technology of each control example described above, the time saving state is terminated at various timings such as the start timing and stop timing of the special symbol variation executed in the time saving state. It may be configured so that it becomes possible. In this way, when the time saving end condition is satisfied, by configuring the timing of actually ending the time saving state to be variable, it is difficult for the player to grasp at what timing the time saving state ends. Therefore, it is possible to provide games with unexpectedness.

<Regarding the configuration of the game board 13 in the tenth control example>
First, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 376 to 380. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example is provided with a V winning device 650 that is opened during a small winning game with respect to the game board 13 (see FIG. 294) of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example described above. Changes in position and structure, changes in the arrangement positions of the through gate 67 and the second ball entrance 640, and changes in the structure of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640. , the configuration of the right side area of the game board 13 is changed, and the rest is the same. Identical contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 376, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 which is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front. Ball opening 63, first ball entrance 64, second ball entrance 640, variable winning device 65, V winning device 650, normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, variable display device unit 80, etc. The peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).

The first pattern display device 37 is provided with a first pattern display device 37 having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display. The first symbol display device 37 displays a display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110, and mainly displays the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this control example, the first symbol display device 37 is activated when the ball enters (wins) the first ball entrance 64 . That is, the first symbol display device 37 is display means for showing the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 lottery) executed when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 . The first symbol display device 37 is also activated when the ball enters (wins) the second ball entrance 640 . That is, the first symbol display device 37 is also a display means for showing the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery) executed when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. In this control example, the pachinko machine 10 with two types of special symbols is used, but the pachinko machine 10 with one type of special symbol may be used without being limited to this.

In addition, the first symbol display device 37 uses LEDs to indicate which of the gaming states (for example, normal state, time saving state, etc.) of the pachinko machine 10, or changes the special symbol (first symbol). It is indicated by the lighting state whether it is medium (during dynamic display for stopping and displaying the combination of symbols for indicating the lottery result), and whether the stopped symbol is a symbol corresponding to an advantageous win for the player or not. A pattern corresponding to winning or a missing pattern is indicated by a lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by a lighting state, and the number of rounds during a big hit and an error are displayed by a 7-segment display device. In addition, it is possible to indicate in the lighting state that the variation of the special symbol is temporarily stopped (suspended). A plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED emits different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and a combination of the emitted colors can suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. In this embodiment, various game states are notified by a combination of light emitting colors of the light emitting means (7-segment display device). For example, various game states may be notified by varying the length (blinking mode) of the period in which the light emitting means is lit and the period in which it is extinguished.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery (lottery for special symbols) is conducted when a ball enters (wins a prize) into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加Then, in the lottery for the special symbols, a win/loss determination (hit lottery) is performed as to whether or not a small hit has been won. Here, a small winning game, which is a privilege game advantageous to the player, is executed based on the determination that the small winning has been won.

During the small winning game, the V winning device 650 is opened according to a predetermined content (scenario), and a state is provided in which the V winning device 650 is easily allowed to win a ball. When the ball that has won the V winning device 650 during the small winning game wins a specific area (V winning opening 1650) described later, the big winning game is executed after the small winning game ends. During the jackpot game, the variable winning device 65 is opened according to a predetermined content (scenario), and a state is provided in which the variable winning device 65 is easily allowed to win a ball.

In this control example, the total number of prize balls that the player can acquire during the game is larger in the big win game than in the small win game. In other words, in terms of the number of prize balls that the player acquires, the big winning game is a privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the small winning game. It should be noted that the small winning game may be configured so that the total number of prize balls that the player can obtain is larger than that of the big winning game. In this way, it is possible to give a privilege having a different degree of advantage according to the privilege game to be executed, so that the player can play the game while enjoying which privilege game is to be played. .

Further, in this control example, when the jackpot game is executed, a game state (for example, normal state) different from the game state before the jackpot game is executed is set, and after the jackpot game ends, the executed jackpot game is set. A new game state can be set based on the information (for example, the small hit type (big hit type) and the game state at the time of winning (small hit winning)). On the other hand, when the small winning game is executed, the game state before executing the small winning game continues during the small winning game and continues even after the small winning game ends. In other words, during the jackpot game, which is highly advantageous to the player (the number of prize balls is large), by setting the normal state, which is a game state disadvantageous to the player, during the jackpot game, the player is given excessive It is configured not to change the game state when a small winning game having a lower degree of advantage than the big winning game is executed while suppressing the provision of the privilege.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the game state from being changed triggered by the execution of a small winning game with a low degree of advantage. In addition, without being limited to this, it may be configured such that a game state (normal state) disadvantageous to the player is set during the small winning game as in the big winning game, or based on the type of winning the small winning. , It may be configured to determine the game state after the end of the small winning game. Also, based on the game result during the winning game (during the jackpot game, during the small winning game), it may be configured to determine the game state set after the end of the winning game. ), which makes it easier to enter the ball in the variable winning device 65 or the V winning device 650 (variable ball entering means). It is preferable to determine the type of game state to be set after the end of the winning game based on the determination result. It is preferable to set a game state that is advantageous to the player, or to set a game state that is more disadvantageous to the player when the player passes through the specific area than when the player does not pass through the specific area. As a result, during the winning game, it is possible to play a game aiming at setting an advantageous game state after the winning game ends, and the player can play the game enthusiastically.

In addition, the winning game is executed in a state in which the game state (time saving state) advantageous to the player is set, and the phenomenon in which the game state (time saving state) advantageous to the player is set even after the winning game is completed. When a winning game is executed in a state of being continuously executed a predetermined number of times (for example, five times), a game state (normal state) disadvantageous to the player is forcibly set after the winning game is finished. can be configured to As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a game state advantageous to the player is excessively continued.

When the jackpot game is executed, it becomes an open state in which the balls can be easily entered into the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65, and by allowing the balls to enter the specific winning port 65a, many winning balls can be won in a short period of time. A game that can be acquired by is executed. This jackpot game is executed (in case) after the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped (confirmed display) for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds), and the opening period (variable A period in which a closed state in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the specific winning port 65a of the winning device 65 is set, a round game period in which the open state is set, and after the end of one round game period, the next round game is played. A predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) until the start of the game, an interval period in which the closed state is set, and a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) after the end of the last round game period. A jackpot game period consisting of an ending period to be played is set.

In this way, by setting the opening period in accordance with the start timing of the jackpot game, it is possible to prepare for shooting the ball in an arbitrary direction in accordance with the timing when the specific prize winning port 65a is opened during the jackpot game. Since it can be performed, a jackpot game can be performed smoothly. In addition, since this opening period can be used as a period for informing the player of the game content of the current jackpot game, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

In addition, by setting the ending period as the final period of the jackpot game, it is possible to suppress the execution of a lottery of new special symbols immediately after the end of the last round game. Since it is possible to make preparations for shooting the ball in an arbitrary direction toward the game to be executed, it is possible to smoothly switch the game.

In addition, in this control example, based on the ball entering the specific area (V winning opening 1650) during the small winning game, the big winning game can be executed after the small winning game ends. Therefore, by setting the ending period as the final period of the small winning game, the preparation period to switch from the game (left-handed game) executed during the small winning game to the game (right-handed game) executed during the big winning game can be provided, the player can smoothly switch between games.

In addition, regarding the length of each period of the jackpot game (opening period, round period, ending period), at the time of the special symbol lottery (at the time of winning the small winning), the timing when the result of the special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed, the start of the small winning game Different lengths may be set according to the type of the winning jackpot, or the game state set at any of the time, the end of the small win game, the start of the big win game, and the end of the big win game. A game content (game method) different from the game content (game method) before the jackpot game is set as the game content (game method) to be executed after the end of the game. A period (e.g., 10 seconds) is set to be longer than the ending period (e.g., 2 seconds) of other jackpot games, and is executed after the player completes the jackpot game during the ending period. It is preferable to construct an effect that guides the contents of the game in advance so that it can be executed. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

On the other hand, when a jackpot game is executed in which the game content (game method) before the start of the jackpot game and the game content (game method) executed after the jackpot game is the same are executed, the ending period of the jackpot game ( For example, 1 second) may be set to be shorter than the ending period (for example, 2 seconds) of other jackpot games. This allows the player to play the game efficiently.

In addition, without using a configuration for actually distinguishing between the game content (game method) before the jackpot game and the game content (game method) executed after the jackpot game is completed, for example, the type of the jackpot game to be executed (small game) A game state to be set after the end of the jackpot game is defined in advance based on the winning type) and the game state set before the jackpot game, and the ending period of each jackpot game is determined according to the contents of the regulation. It may be configured to set the length.

In the tenth control example, the game state is set to either the "normal state" or the "time saving state". In the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), the special symbol jackpot probability is set to (30/1000), and the normal symbol hit probability is set to low probability (3/300). The time-saving state is a game state in which the special symbol jackpot probability is set to (30/1000) and the normal symbol hit probability is set to a high probability (150/300).

In this control example, after the time saving state is set, when a predetermined end condition (time saving end condition) is satisfied, the game state is configured to shift from the time saving state to the normal state, and the time saving described above The number of times indicates a time saving end condition. In other words, the number of times of shortening time means that the termination condition of shortening of time is established when the lottery of special symbols is executed once without executing a jackpot game after setting of the shortening of time state.

Furthermore, in the tenth control example, it is possible to determine whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied at the timing of starting the special symbol variation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine how long the time saving state will continue.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, the condition (time saving number of times) regarding the number of times of special symbol lottery during the time saving state is defined, but as a time saving end condition Other configurations May be used, for example, the number of times that the result of the special symbol lottery is a specific lottery result (specific outlier) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) Time saving end condition and time saving state are set A time-saving end condition that is established when a predetermined time (e.g., 100 seconds) elapses after being played, or the ball entered a specific ball entrance (e.g., general ball entrance 63a) during the time-saving state A termination condition that is established when the number reaches a predetermined number (for example, 5) may be set.

In addition, the timing of determining whether the time saving end condition is established and the timing of ending the time saving state may be different. It is determined whether or not the time saving end condition is established, and if it is determined that the time saving end condition is established, depending on whether the specific condition is established, the time saving state is ended before the special symbol fluctuation is started, or the special symbol The time saving state may be terminated at a predetermined timing during the period from when the variation is started until it is stopped (including the stop display timing of the special symbol variation). Since the timing which performs the process for discriminating whether the time saving end conditions were satisfied by this can be unified, the control process for ending a time saving state can be simplified.

In addition, as the above-mentioned specific condition (element for determining the timing to end the time saving state when the time saving end condition is satisfied), a special symbol lottery that triggered the execution of the jackpot game (a special symbol that was elected for a small hit The type of game state (normal state or time saving state) set at the time the lottery) is executed, the set small hit type, and the type of the big hit game. For example, if the game state at the time of winning the small hit is the normal state and if it is the time saving state, the same small win type (jackpot type) is set, and the same time saving end condition is set. However, it is sufficient to configure the timing of ending the time saving state to be different.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth control example, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh control example described above, the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, the symbol "○"). When it does, the electric accessory 640a attached to the general electrical winning device 640 is configured to execute a winning game (universal figure winning game) in which the electric accessory 640a is in an operating state (open state) for a predetermined time.

The time required for the second symbol to be displayed (normal pattern fluctuation time) varies depending on the probability state of the normal pattern (low probability state, high probability state). In the low probability state, the general pattern fluctuation time of 10 seconds is set, and in the high probability state of the normal pattern, the general pattern fluctuation time of 1 second is set. As a result, it is possible to suppress the frequent execution of normal pattern per game during the normal pattern low probability state (normal state).

In addition, a configuration different from the tenth control example may be used. good. By configuring in this way, for example, in order to make it difficult to execute the normal pattern per game during the normal pattern low probability state (normal state), the time required for the normal pattern fluctuation display (normal pattern fluctuation time) In a pachinko machine 10 constituted so that the normal state is longer than the time-saving state, a normal pattern winning game (ordinary pattern winning game) is hard to be executed (ordinary pattern low probability state), and the normal pattern is changed from the normal state (low probability state of the normal pattern). When the game state shifts to a time-saving state (high-probability state of normal symbols) in which a winning game is likely to be executed, the long-term normal symbol fluctuation executed during the normal state (is more disadvantageous to the player than during the time-saving state) During the execution of the normal pattern per game), the period during which the normal pattern lottery is not executed is set for a long time despite the fact that the time reduction state is set. can be suppressed.

In this case, since the normal pattern lottery is executed once per second at the maximum in the low probability state of the normal pattern, the game per normal pattern is executed during the low probability state of the normal pattern (during the normal state). Since it becomes easier, the probability of winning per normal pattern in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal pattern should be set low.

In this control example, the game content (opening operation pattern of the electric accessary 640a) of the normal figure per game to be executed is configured to be different between the normal state and the time saving state. That is, the normal pattern per game that is executed during the time saving state is more advantageous to the player than the general pattern per game that is executed during the normal state, that is, the ball is the second ball entrance. It is configured to make it easier to enter the ball to 640. Specifically, when the normal state is set, the opening period of 0.1 seconds is set after the opening period of 4.1 seconds (the closing period of the electric accessory 640a). Normal normal per game) is executed, when the time saving state is set, through the opening period of 1 second (closed period of the electric accessory 640a), per normal per game in which the open period of 3 seconds is set (Time saving normal figure per game) is executed.

Next, referring to FIG. 376, the configuration of the electric accessory 640a will be described. The electric accessory 640a in the tenth control example is configured to be displaceable between an embedded state (restricted state) in which it is embedded in the game board 13 and a protruding state (induction state) in which it protrudes from the game board 13. It is configured to be positioned in an embedded state (closed state) when a game per normal pattern is not executed. And, when the normal figure per game is executed, it is displaced to the protruding state (induction state) for a predetermined period (up to 3 seconds) based on a predetermined variable pattern.

Here, terms for the displacement state of the electric accessory 640a will be explained. The closed state of the electric accessory 640a is a state in which the flow path for allowing the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 (the flow path formed on the electric accessory 640a) is closed. 640a is a term used to indicate a state in which the ball 640a is embedded in the game board 13. As a functional expression, the term is a restricted state (a state in which the entry of a ball into the second ball entrance 640 is restricted). is sometimes used.

In addition, the open state of the electric accessory 640a is a state in which the flow path (the flow path formed on the electric accessory 640a) for allowing the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 is opened. It is a term used to indicate a state in which the accessory 640a protrudes from the game board 13, and as a functional expression, the term induced state (state in which the ball can be guided to the second ball entrance 640) is used. In some cases.

As shown in FIG. 376, when the electric accessory 640a is in the guided state, most of the balls shot in the left-handed game are formed on the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a in the guided state. An electric accessory 640a is arranged so as to flow into the path. The flow path formed on the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a is formed with a lower spherical flow surface that slopes downward toward the second ball entrance 640, and the ball that reaches the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a enters the second entrance. It flows down to ball mouth 640 .

Although the details will be described later, in this control example, when one ball enters the second ball entrance 640 during the normal game, it is configured to end the normal game. Therefore, the maximum number of balls that can be won into the second ball entrance 640 during one game per normal pattern is one.

As described above with reference to FIG. 376, in this control example, the game method that is advantageous to the player is the same ( It is configured to be a left-handed game). In the pachinko machine 10 constructed in this manner, a normal symbol lottery opportunity is established even in the normal state (a ball passes through the through gate 67), and a normal symbol lottery is executed. Then, as a result of the normal pattern lottery, when the hit is won, the electric accessory 640a provided in the game area where the ball fired by the left-handed game can reach is controlled to be opened, so that the normal pattern per game During execution, there was a risk that the ball would enter the second ball entrance 640 .

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, even if the normal pattern winning game is executed in the normal state, the ball cannot enter the second ball entrance 640 during the normal pattern winning game. It is configured as follows. Specifically, the time required for the ball to flow down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reach the second ball entrance 640 is about 1 second, whereas in the normal state It is configured so that the period in which the electric accessory 640a is in the induced state by the normal figure winning game is 0.2 seconds.

By configuring in this way, the pachinko machine 10 having a configuration for executing the game in the same game method in the normal state (normal pattern low probability state) and the time saving state (normal pattern high probability state), that is, In the pachinko machine 10 which can win the normal game even in the normal state, it is possible to suppress the balls from entering the second ball entrance 640 during the normal state.

The normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left side area (left side area) of the variable display unit 80, and the balls shot to the game board flow down the left side area of the game board 13. Most (approximately 100%) of the spheres are configured to be passable. When the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery of the second pattern, the variable display is performed by the second pattern display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery is performed. If the result is out, an "x" symbol is displayed as a stop symbol for variable display.

The number of times the ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is reserved up to one time in total, and the number of reserved balls is displayed on the second symbol reservation lamp 84 described above. The second pattern holding lamps 84 are provided one for the maximum number of holdings, and arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

Returning to FIG. 376, the description continues. A V winning device 650 is provided on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (on the left side from the viewpoint of FIG. 376) so that the ball that is launched in the left-handed game and flows down the left side area can win. Here, with reference to FIGS. 377 to 380, the specific configuration of the V winning device 650 and the flow of winning balls in the V winning device 650 will be described. In this control example, when a small win is won in the special symbol lottery, a small win game for opening the V winning device 650 is executed. And it is configured so that a big winning game (V big winning game) is executed by winning a ball in a V winning opening 1650 provided in the V winning device 650 .

This control example is based on the ball passing (winning) through the specific area (V winning opening 1650) during the small winning game which is executed when the small winning is won without winning the big winning by the special symbol lottery. , a jackpot game is executed. In this way, by establishing the first condition (small winning) and the second condition (passing through the specific area) step by step, the privilege game (big winning game) that is advantageous to the player is executed. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a game that the player will never get tired of.

In addition to this, it may be constructed so as to win a big hit in a special symbol lottery. In this case, in addition to the execution opportunity of the jackpot game (special jackpot game) that is established when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the special symbols, the jackpot game that is established when the ball enters a specific winning port (V winning port 1650). (V jackpot game) will be executed. In this way, by providing a plurality of opportunities for executing a jackpot game, it is possible to provide the player with a game that never gets bored.

First, referring to FIG. 377, the configuration of the V winning device 650 will be described. The V winning device 650 is provided with an opening/closing door 650a that can be changed between an open state in which the ball can easily win in the V winning device 650 and a closed state in which the ball is less likely to win than in the open state. This open/close door 650a is provided at a position (see FIG. 376) where balls flowing down the left side area of the game board 13 can reach, and is changed to an open state when a small winning game is executed.

In the V winning device 650, a first flow path 650b is formed in the space between the first partition wall 650k1 and the second partition wall 650k2, through which balls that have passed through the opening/closing door 650a in the open state flow down. A reservoir valve 660a is provided at a position where the ball (falling period of 0.5 seconds) that has flowed down the path 650b reaches. A storage portion capable of storing one ball is formed on the upper surface of the storage valve 660a, and the ball that first wins the V winning device 650 during the small winning game is temporarily stored in the storage portion. are doing. A storage sensor 650s is provided above the storage valve 660a, and is configured to be able to detect that the ball is stored in the storage portion. Further, a ball detection sensor 650s2 for detecting the winning ball of the V winning device 650 is provided upstream of the first flow path 650b, and based on the detection of the ball by the ball detection sensor 650s2, a small hit is detected. The number of winning balls to the V winning device 650 is counted during the game, and prize ball payout control for the winning balls is executed. In this way, by providing the ball detection sensor 650s2 at the position where the winning ball of the V winning device 650 flows down immediately afterward, it is possible to prevent a situation in which more than a prescribed number of balls enter the V winning device 650. At the same time, the prize balls during the small win game can be immediately given to the player.

A second flow path 650c is formed so as to communicate with the first flow path 650b, and a first out port 1163a is provided downstream of the second flow path 650c. As shown in FIG. 377, the balls flowing down the first flow path 650b do not directly flow into the second flow path 650c. It is configured such that subsequent balls that have flowed down the path 650b come into contact with the balls stored in the storage portion of the storage valve 660a and are guided to the second flow path 650c. The first out port 1163a provided on the downstream side of the second flow path 650c is a ball entrance for discharging the entered ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10, and flows down the second flow path 650c ( 0.1 second), and the ball entering the first out port 1163a flows down through a ball discharge path (not shown) and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

Although detailed description will be given later, the storage valve 660a can store balls according to the progress of the small winning game (corresponding to the operation scenario in which the small winning game is executed). It is configured to be variably operated between a released state in which it is difficult to retain the ball. When the reservoir valve 660a is positioned in the released state, the first flow path 650b and the third flow path 650d communicate with each other, and the ball that has flowed down the first flow path 650b or is stored in the reservoir of the reservoir valve 660a. The sphere that was being held flows down the third flow path 650d. The third flow path 650d is a vertically linear flow path with a width of about 15 mm, which is formed in the space between the lower end side of the first partition 650k1 and the third partition 650k3.

A first movable valve 660b is arranged at a position facing the downstream side of the third flow path 650d. The first movable valve 660b has a predetermined movable pattern when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and has a guide position (protruding position) that can receive the ball flowing down the third flow path 650d, It is configured to move to a passing position (buried position) where the ball that has flowed down the third flow path 650d cannot be received. Specifically, it is connected to the input/output port 205 of the main controller 110 and configured to move according to the operation of the first movable valve solenoid 209d driven and controlled by the main controller 110. When the valve solenoid 209d is set to ON (when it is energized), the first movable valve 660b moves to a passing position (a position buried in the game board 13) where the first movable valve 660b retreats from the inside of the V winning device 650, and the first When the movable valve solenoid 209d is set to OFF (when the electricity is cut off), the first movable valve 660b moves to the guidance position (the position where it projects from the game board 13) protruding into the V winning device 650. It is configured as follows.

The first movable valve 660b positioned at the guiding position (protruding position) is configured so that a ball can flow down its upper surface, and as shown in FIG. It is configured to slope downward toward the path 650e. Therefore, the ball that has flowed down the third flow path 65d with the first movable valve 660b at the guiding position (protruding position) (falling period of 0.2 seconds) will flow through the upper surface of the first movable valve 660b into the fourth flow path. It will flow down towards 650e. A second out port 1163b is provided on the downstream side of the fourth flow path 650e, and the ball that has flowed down the fourth flow path 650e (falling period of 0.2 seconds) enters the second out port 1163b. This second out port 1163b is a ball entrance for ejecting a ball that has entered the pachinko machine 10 to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 in the same manner as the above-described first out port 1163a. The ball thus played flows down a ball discharge path (not shown) and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 .

On the other hand, when the first movable valve 660b is located at the passage position, the third flow path 650d and the fifth flow path 650f communicate with each other, and the ball flowing down the third flow path 650d (falling period 0.2 second) flows into the fifth flow path 650f (falling period 0.1 second). A V winning port 1650 is provided on the downstream side of the fifth flow path 650f. The V winning opening 1650 is a winning opening that can be a trigger for executing a jackpot game. execution right), and after the small winning game being executed ends, the big winning game is executed.

As shown in FIG. 377, the V winning device 650 is provided with a first outlet 1163a and a second outlet 1163b. By configuring in this way, a ball that has won a prize in the V winning device 650 when the reservoir valve 660a is in the reservoir state can pass through a flow path (third stream) when the reservoir valve 660a is in the released state. Flowing into the passage 650d, the fourth passage 650e, and the fifth passage 650f) can be reliably prevented. In addition, without being limited to the configuration of this control example, for example, the first outlet 1163a is eliminated, the second flow path 650c and the fourth flow path 650e are communicated, and the storage valve 660a is in the storage state. , the ball flowing down the second flow path 650c may enter the second out port 1163b. In this case, the third partition wall 650k3, which is linearly provided in the vertical direction in FIG. It is preferable to provide it so that the extension in the direction is on the right side of the fourth partition wall 650k4 (right side from the viewpoint of FIG. 377). By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the situation in which the ball flowing down the second flow path 650c flows into the fifth flow path 650f.

As described above, in this control example, the big winning game is executed when the ball enters the V winning opening 1650 during the small winning game. Hereinafter, when the jackpot games are described by classifying execution opportunities, the jackpot game executed when the player enters the V winning port 1650 will also be referred to as the V jackpot game.

As described above, the V winning device 650 of this control example enters an open state in which a ball can win a prize by executing a small winning game, and only one ball stored in the storage valve 660a is released into the third flow path 650d. , and depending on the operation status of the first movable valve 660b when the ball flowing down the third flow path 650d reaches the first movable valve 660b, whether the ball wins the V prize opening 1650 It is configured to determine whether or not

In addition, in the tenth control example, the game ball is caused to enter the V winning device 650 during the small winning game, so that the game ball can surely enter the V winning opening 1650. Although the valve 660b is configured to operate, it is not limited to this. The movable content of the first movable valve 660b may be defined so that there are cases in which the ball hits and cases in which the ball does not enter. The time during which the ball cannot enter the winning opening 1650 is 6 seconds, and the time during which the ball is positioned at the passing position (the time during which the ball can enter the V winning opening 1650) is 1 second. can be configured to As a result, the ratio of the balls flowing down the third flow path 650d to the V winning opening 1650 can be reduced to about 1/6.

Next, referring to FIGS. 378 to 380, unlike the tenth control example, a small winning game in which a game ball can enter the V winning opening 1650 and a small winning game in which a game ball cannot enter are executed. The contents of the winning ball flow in the V winning device 650 during execution of the small winning game in the possible modified example will be described. In the following description, even if a plurality of balls are won to the V winning device 650 in one small winning game, the number of balls flowing down the third flow path 650d is one. A case where the operation of the valve 660a is controlled will be described as an example. First, with reference to FIG. 378, the ball flow in the first half period of the small winning game (the period in which the reservoir valve 660a is in the reservoir state) will be described. FIG. 378 is a schematic diagram showing the ball flow in the V winning device 650 when the reservoir valve 660a is in the reservoir state in the small winning game. Although detailed description will be given later, the storage valve 660a is configured to be in a storage state from when the small winning game is executed until the V winning device 650 is closed. there is Then, when a plurality of balls wins the V winning device 650 while the reservoir valve 660a is in the reservoir state, the ball P1 that wins first is stored in the reservoir formed in the reservoir valve 660a, and the runner-up wins. The ball P2 contacts the ball P1 stored in the storage valve 660a, flows down the second flow path 650c, and enters the out port 1163a.

In this way, when the storage valve 660a is in the storage state, all winning balls (for example, balls P2) other than the ball P1 stored in the storage portion of the storage valve 660a enter the out port 1163a. Therefore, a plurality of balls will not stay in the V winning device 650. In addition, since the storage valve 660a is released from the storage state after the V opening/closing door 650a of the V winning device 650 is in the closed state (after the operation control for closing the door is executed), one operation is performed. It is possible to reliably reduce the number of balls flowing down the third flow path 650d to one in the role-winning game.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the easiness of winning the ball into the V winning opening 1650 according to the timing of winning the ball into the V winning device 650 during the small winning game and the number of winnings. Since there is no such thing, it is possible to provide a fair game to all players.

It should be noted that, without being limited to this, according to the number of prizes to be awarded to the V prize winning device 650 during the small winning game, the ease with which the ball enters the V prize opening 1650 can be varied. Alternatively, for example, a distribution member ( (Cloon, etc.). Then, only the balls stored in a specific storage part out of the six storage parts can enter the V winning port 1650 when the storage state of the storage part is canceled, and the balls other than the specific storage part can be entered. The balls (up to 5) stored in the storage are configured to enter the second out port 1163b when the storage state of each storage is released. In addition, when the next ball is sorted by the sorting member toward a storage section in which balls are already stored, it collides with the already stored ball and is stored in another adjacent storage section. A flow path is provided to communicate between the respective reservoirs.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the winning ratio to the V winning opening 1650 according to the winning number of winning balls to the V winning device 650 during the small winning game, thus motivating the player. can be made to play.

Even in the case of such a configuration, by changing the number of times of canceling the storage state of the storage unit that causes the ball to flow down to the out port during one small winning game according to the type of the small winning, The winning ratio to the V winning opening 1650 can be varied.

Next, with reference to FIG. 379, the contents of the ball flow (second half period of the game per role) when the storage valve 660a shifts from the storage state to the release state will be described. Figure 379 is a schematic diagram showing a ball flow in the small hit game, when the storage valve 660a is shifted from the storage state to the release state. As shown in FIG. 379, after the V open/close door 650a is closed and new balls cannot enter the V winning device 650, the storage valve 660a is released (indicated by a dotted line in the figure). Upon transition, the ball P1 (see FIG. 378) stored in the storage portion of the storage valve 660a flows down the third flow path 650d. In the state shown in FIG. 379, the first movable valve 660b is positioned at the guidance position, so the ball P1 rolls on the downward slope formed on the upper surface of the first movable valve 660b, and moves along the fourth flow path 650e. It flows down and enters the second out port 1163b.

On the other hand, at the timing when the ball P1 (see FIG. 378) stored in the storage portion of the storage valve 660a flows down the third flow path 650d and reaches the first movable valve 660b, the first movable valve 660b moves to the passage position. With reference to FIG. 380, the sphere flow when located at Figure 380 is a schematic diagram showing a ball flow in the small hit game, when the storage valve 660a is shifted from the storage state to the release state. As shown in FIG. 380, when the ball flowing down the third flow path 650d reaches the first movable valve 660b and the first movable valve 660b is positioned at the passage position, the fifth flow path 660f It flows down and wins to the V winning mouth 1650. - 特許庁

In addition, in the tenth control example, as described above with reference to FIGS. The game for entering the game ball into the ball opening 640 is also configured to make the player play the left-handed game, furthermore, make the player play the left-handed game even during the small winning game, and make the right-handed hitting only during the big winning game. Although it is configured to play a game, it is not limited to this, and like each control example described above, it is configured to make the player play a game in a different game method in the normal state and the time saving state. You can

<Regarding the production content in the tenth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 381 to FIG. 383, the contents of characteristic effects among various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example will be described. In this tenth control example, when the special figure 2 suspension acquired during the time saving state reaches the upper limit number (4 pieces), based on the information indicating the look-ahead result for the special figure 2 suspension, to the player , the number of times the jackpot game (jackpot game based on winning a small hit) can be executed can be notified.

Specifically, when the second special symbol lottery is executed, it is stipulated that a big win or a small win is always won, and a small win is executed based on the fact that the small win is won. It is constructed so that the game ball can surely pass through the specific area by playing the game normally during the game.

In other words, in the tenth control example, the number of special figure 2 reserves that have already been acquired, the game of the game type to acquire the right to execute the jackpot game is executed, for example, the special figure 2 reserve is 4 In the state where the pieces are acquired, it becomes possible to execute the next four jackpot games. In addition, in the tenth control example, the normal state and the time saving state can be set as the game state set after the end of the jackpot game, and further, as the time saving state, it is difficult to acquire the special figure 2 hold A disadvantageous time-saving state and an advantageous time-saving state in which the special figure 2 reservation is more likely to be acquired than the disadvantageous time-saving state can be set.

Then, when a predetermined condition (special figure 2 reservation reaches the upper limit) is established during the time saving state, based on the prefetch result of the special figure 2 reservation that has already been acquired, whether the advantageous time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends It is configured to be capable of informing the player of the number of rights with which it is possible to perform a jackpot game based on the determination result.

Thus, in addition to the number of acquired special figure 2 reservations, the game state set after the end of the jackpot game executed based on the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the acquired special figure 2 reservations is also predicted. Above, by configuring the number of times that the jackpot game can be executed (the number of times that the jackpot can be executed) can be notified, it is possible to notify the number of times that the jackpot can be executed, which is larger than the acquired special figure 2 reservation. becomes.

Furthermore, in the tenth control example, the number of times to notify the player as the number of executable jackpots is configured to vary based on the game state at the time when the special figure 2 hold reaches the upper limit and the look-ahead result. . In other words, the number of times other than the maximum number can be notified to the player as the number of times the jackpot can be executed. By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from completely grasping the content of the game to be executed later based on the reported number of executable jackpots and lowering the player's willingness to play. be able to.

In addition, in the tenth control example, during the final variation period of the time saving state that can acquire special figure 2 suspension, even if the special figure 2 suspension is not acquired to the upper limit number, the lottery result of the final variation Also, it is configured to be able to change the performance mode of the guide performance for acquiring the special figure 2 reservation based on the prefetch result of the acquired special figure 2 reservation, or to execute the performance different from the guide performance.

Here, among the conventional pachinko machines 10, in the pachinko machine 10 having the same game characteristics as the tenth control example, the special symbol final variation period ( In the time-saving final fluctuation period), a privilege given to the player during the time-saving state by executing a guidance effect to acquire the special figure 2 hold up to the upper limit (a privilege that makes it easier to acquire the special figure 2 hold) There is a game that allows a player to play a game that makes the most of the .

However, in the above-described conventional side pachinko machine 10, for example, the lottery result of the time saving final variation, the second special symbol lottery executed after the time saving final variation (corresponding to the special figure 2 hold executed during the normal state Regardless of the result of the second special symbol lottery), the guidance effect will be executed, so even if you do not acquire the number of special 2 reservations to the upper limit during this time-saving final fluctuation period, the second special that will be executed after that Based on the result of the pattern lottery, when the time saving state in which the special figure 2 reservation can be obtained is set again, the player will be forced to play a game that shoots the game ball unnecessarily, and the player will be forced to play. However, there is a problem that it is not possible to guide a proper game through the system.

On the other hand, in the tenth control example, when determining the effect mode to be executed during the time saving final variation period, the result of the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the time saving final variation and the acquired special figure 2 Based on the look-ahead result corresponding to the hold, after the time-saving final fluctuation period has elapsed, it is again determined whether the time-saving state that can acquire the special figure 2 hold is set, and based on the determination result, It is configured so that the presence or absence of execution of the guidance effect is differentiated.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a guidance effect that suppresses the player from playing a game for reaching the upper limit of the special figure 2 reservation number unnecessarily.

In addition, in the tenth control example, according to the contents of the game that can be executed after the time-saving final variation period has passed (acquisition difficulty of the special figure 2 hold), it is configured to vary the production mode of the guidance production. For example, if the lottery result of the time-saving final variation is a small winning, and the normal state is set after the jackpot game executed based on the small winning is set, the lottery result of the time-saving final variation is For a player to be in a time-saving state (disadvantageous time-saving state) in which it is difficult to obtain a special figure 2 reserve after the end of a jackpot game executed based on a small winning and a small winning. It is configured to execute a guidance performance emphasizing the guidance mode of acquiring the special figure 2 reservation.

In this way, by configuring the strength and weakness of the guidance mode as the performance mode of the guidance performance executed during the time-saving final fluctuation period, the special figure 2 hold is more effective than the case where the monotonous guidance performance is always executed. It is possible to suppress execution of a game disadvantageous to the player due to the end of the period without acquiring the special figure 2 reservation during the period in which the player is disadvantaged if not acquired.

In the tenth control example, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, after the jackpot game ends, a time-saving state (disadvantageous time-saving state) in which it is difficult to acquire the special figure 2 reservation, or acquires the special figure 2 reservation. It is configured to be able to set a time-saving state (advantageous time-saving state) that is easy to set.

Specifically, when the disadvantageous time-saving state is set, the time-saving state is terminated at the timing when the first second special symbol variation executed during the time-saving state is started, and the advantageous time-saving state is set. is set, the time saving state is terminated at the timing when the second special symbol variation executed during the time saving state is started. By configuring in this way, when the disadvantageous time-saving state is set, the time-saving state in which the second special symbol lottery is executed only once is set without acquiring the special figure 2 reservation, and the advantageous time-saving state is set. When is set, a time-saving state that can acquire the maximum number of special figures 2 pending is set.

First, with reference to FIG. 381(a), the effect contents when the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game will be described. Figure 381 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the first second special symbol variation in the time saving state (first hit state) set after winning the jackpot in the special figure 1 lottery. . As shown in FIG. 381 (a), the lottery result of the second special symbol variation being executed is the lottery result (unfavorable lottery result) in which the disadvantageous time-saving state is set, or the lottery result in which the advantageous time-saving state is set. (advantageous lottery result) is executed.

According to the example shown in FIG. 381(a), an icon 1800a imitating "V" as the display mode corresponding to the unfavorable lottery result and an icon 1800a imitating "Vx5" as the display mode corresponding to the advantageous lottery result. 1800b is displayed. Then, when the icon 1800b is selected, "super chance mode" is displayed as a guidance mode for guiding transition to the super chance mode, and the icon 1800b is selected in the secondary display area Ds. In this case, a comment "Vx5 for 5 consecutive wins" is displayed as a guide mode for guiding acquisition of 5 jackpot game execution rights (5 consecutive chances possible).

Next, referring to FIG. 381(b), the content of the effect during the big win game executed based on the result of the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state will be described. FIG. 381(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the special figure 2 jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 381(b), on the ending screen of the jackpot game, a notification effect for notifying the player in advance of the game state to be set after the jackpot game ends is executed.

Next, with reference to Drawing 382 (a), the contents of the production in an advantageous time saving state are explained. Drawing 382 (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen in super chance mode showing that it is in an advantageous time saving state. As shown in FIG. 382 (a), the super chance mode is configured so that the time saving state continues until the second special symbol variation is executed a plurality of times, and during the variation period of the second special symbol variation FIG. 2 is configured so that the hold can be acquired. Therefore, in the sub-display area Ds, "Right hit The comment "Save V" is displayed.

And, in the small display area Dm9, a V icon that increases or decreases corresponding to the acquired special figure 2 pending number is displayed. This V icon is configured to be able to display up to the same number as the special figure 2 reserve, and each time the special figure 2 reserve is acquired, the first V icon hr1 to the fourth V icon hr4 are displayed in order. In the example shown in FIG. 382(a), since two special figure 2 reserves are acquired, the first V-icon hr1 and the second V-icon hr2 are displayed.

After that, when the player acquires the special figure 2 reservation up to the upper limit number, as shown in FIG. An icon hx imitating "MAX" is displayed as a form, an effect is executed in which a treasure box 1810 appears in the center of the main display area Dm, and the characters "Treasure box appears" are displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, characters of "What is the content?" are displayed as a guidance mode for explaining the progress of the effect being executed to the player. As a result, the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the effect of opening the treasure box 1810 will be executed later.

Next, as shown in FIG. 383(a), when the treasure box 1810 is opened, an effect is executed in which the contents 1810a appear from the treasure box 1810, and the player can currently obtain The number of rights to execute the jackpot game played is reported. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 383(a), the fourth special figure 2 pending look-ahead result is a small hit winning in which the advantageous time saving state is set, so the result of the second special symbol lottery being executed Based on the jackpot game (1 time), the jackpot game (4 times) based on the result of the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the acquired special figure 2 reservation, and the second corresponding to the fourth special figure 2 reservation A big win game (once) based on the result of a second special pattern lottery executed after the end of the big win game based on the result of the special pattern lottery, and a big win game (4) corresponding to the special figure 2 reserve that can be acquired during the variation. times) and the content 1810a is displayed in the display mode "V×10" for notifying that the right to execute the jackpot game ten times is obtained.

By configuring in this way, in the tenth control example, not only the number of already acquired jackpot game execution rights, but also the game contents after the jackpot game that can be executed based on the acquired jackpot game execution rights After predicting up to, it is possible to inform the player of the information on the execution right of the jackpot game that can be acquired, so that the number of special figures 2 reserved that can be reserved and stored at one time (4) It is possible to inform the player of the number of rights to execute the jackpot game in advance. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict how the execution right of the jackpot game will be generated (whether it can be obtained), and the game can be provided without getting bored.

In addition, in the tenth control example, when a proper game (right-handed game) is executed during the small winning game, it is possible to execute the big winning game, so the player is informed in advance. On the other hand, it is possible to provide the player with the same number of jackpot games as the number of execution rights of the notified jackpot game. When the game ball cannot be entered into the specific area at this time and the jackpot game is not executed, an effect for reducing the number of rights to execute the jackpot game, which is notified in advance, is executed. .

By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the number of times of the big winning game executed has decreased according to the contents of the executed game. In this case, it is preferable to be able to inform the player of information for letting the player know how the number of rights to execute the jackpot game has decreased (the right to execute has been extinguished). As a result, when the number of rights to execute the big winning game remains, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the number of rights to execute the big winning game decreases again.

In the tenth control example, when a proper game (right-handed game) is executed during a small winning game, it is possible to execute a big winning game, so Since the player can be provided with the same number of jackpot games as the notified number of rights to execute the jackpot game, all the calculated numbers of right to execute the jackpot game are notified in advance to the player. Not only the number of rights to execute the jackpot game that has already been acquired, but also game contents after the end of the jackpot game that can be executed based on the right to execute the jackpot game that has already been acquired. It is also possible to calculate the number of execution rights of the jackpot game that can be acquired by the game, and notify the player of a part of the calculation result in advance.

As a result, for example, in the pachinko machine 10 configured to execute a jackpot game with a probability of about 1/2 when a small prize game is executed, the player can obtain the execution right of the jackpot game. When the number of 1/2 of the number calculated as a number is configured to notify the player in advance, based on the number of actually executed small winning games and the number of big winning games, advance notification is made. By making it possible to execute an update process for increasing or decreasing the number of rights to execute a jackpot game, the player can easily predict the number of times the jackpot game can be executed, and at the same time, the prediction can be performed. The reliability of the information used can be improved.

Returning to FIG. 383(b), the description continues. FIG. 383(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the final variation period of the second special symbol in the super chance mode indicating the advantageous time saving state. In the tenth control example, the period in which the advantageous time-saving state is set is configured to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second ball inlet 640 than the period in which the advantageous time-saving state is not set. During the second special symbol fluctuation period (during the final fluctuation period) in which the conditions for ending the advantageous time saving state are satisfied, as shown in FIG. Guidance notification for prompting the game ball to enter the ball is configured to be executable, but when the special symbol variation that is the final variation period is executed, the jackpot game is played in the special figure 2 reservation that has already been acquired. If there is a special figure 2 reservation corresponding to winning when the advantageous time saving state is set after the end, without executing the above-described guidance notification, as shown in FIG. 383 (b), the player It is configured so that a performance mode for congratulations is set.

In other words, during the special symbol fluctuation period in which the time saving end condition is established to end the time saving state, even if the upper limit number of special figures 2 is not acquired, if the specific condition is satisfied, special It is configured so as not to execute a guidance notification for prompting acquisition of the maximum number of FIG. 2 pending. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the player from playing a game to acquire the special figure 2 reservation up to the upper limit number unnecessarily.

<Regarding the game state transition in the tenth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 384, the game state transition contents in the tenth control example will be described. FIG. 384 is a game flow showing the transition contents of the game state. As shown in FIG. 384, in the tenth control example, as in the above-described seventh control example, the normal state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol low probability state) and the time saving state (special low-probability state of the pattern, high-probability state of the normal pattern) can be set, and the player can execute the left-handed game regardless of which game state is set. are doing.

As the initial state of the pachinko machine 10, a normal state (first normal state) is set in a state in which special figure 1 suspension and special figure 2 suspension are not acquired. In this first normal state, a game for entering a game ball into the first ball entrance 64 by a left-handed game is performed. In this first normal state, since the special symbol low probability state is set, the first special symbol lottery is executed with a probability of 30/1000 for winning the jackpot.

Here, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, "jackpot A" is set as the jackpot type. After the jackpot game in which the jackpot type "jackpot A" is set, a time saving state is set.

In the tenth control example, it is possible to set a time saving state in which the game degree to the player is different, and a second time saving state (advantageous time saving state) that is advantageous to the player A first time-saving state (unfavorable time-saving state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than (advantageous time-saving state) can be set. More specifically, by varying the ease of acquiring the special figure 2 hold during the period in which the time saving state is set, the degree of play in the time saving state is varied, and the second that is advantageous to the player When the two-time-saving state (advantageous time-saving state) is set, it is configured such that a plurality of game balls can be easily entered into the second ball entrance 640 during a short period of time. On the other hand, when the first time-saving state (disadvantageous time-saving state) is set, it is configured to make it difficult to enter a plurality of game balls into the second ball entrance 640 within a short period of time. ing.

In other words, when the first time-saving state (unfavorable time-saving state) is set and when the second time-saving state (advantageous time-saving state) is set, the ease of acquiring the special figure 2 hold ball during the time-saving state are different, the degree of advantage to the player is made different.

The pachinko machine 10 of this control example has, as a game state, a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) and a time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols). is configured to be configurable. Since the normal state is set to the low probability state of the normal pattern, it is difficult to win the normal pattern, and even if the normal pattern is won, the operation period of the electric accessory 640a is short and the second input. A game state is entered in which it is difficult (impossible) for a ball to enter the ball opening 640 . Therefore, a game in which a ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 by a left-handed game and a first special symbol lottery is executed is mainly performed.

Then, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 lottery) is executed to win the jackpot with a probability of 30/1000. When the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 lottery, the jackpot A is set as the jackpot type, and the first time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends.

Next, the content of the time saving state in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 384, in this control example, the first time saving state and the second time saving state can be set as the time saving state. Here, the difference between the first time saving state and the second time saving state will be described. The first time-saving state and the second time-saving state are both time-saving states in which a special symbol low probability state and a normal symbol high probability state are set, and the special symbol lottery winning probability and the normal symbol lottery winning probability. are identical. Furthermore, the selection ratio of the variation pattern of the special symbol variation for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is also the same.

The only difference is the timing when the time saving state ends (shifts to the normal state), and in the first time saving state, when the second special symbol lottery is executed once, the second special symbol variation The time saving state is ended at the start timing, and in the second time saving state, when the second special symbol lottery is executed twice, the time saving state ends at the start timing of the second special symbol variation. is configured as

That is, since the second time saving state can be set longer than the first time saving state by the variation period of the second special symbol variation, it can be said that the time saving state is advantageous to the player. Furthermore, in this control example, the number of balls that can be entered into the second ball entrance 640 during one normal game is one, and the second special symbol variation is Since it is configured so that the time saving end condition is established when it is executed once, when the first time saving state is set, the second special symbol holding memory (Special figure 2 holding) is acquired. It becomes easier to end the time saving state without it. On the other hand, when the second time-saving state is set, the time-saving state continues during the fluctuation period of the second special symbol variation, so the second special symbol's reservation memory (special figure 2 reservation) is acquired. Makes it easier to end the time-saving state. That is, from the point of view of the acquisition status of the special figure 2 reservation at the time the time saving state ends, it can be said that the second time saving state is a time saving state more advantageous to the player than the first time saving state.

And, although details will be described later, when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery executed in the first time saving state, a small winning game in which the second time saving state can be set at a rate of 5% is selected. It is configured as follows. That is, in the normal state, it is easier to shift to the first time saving state than in the second time saving state, and in the first time saving state, it is configured to be easier to shift to the second time saving state with a higher probability than in the normal state. . Therefore, the game state (normal state, first time saving state) in which the transition ratio to the second time saving state that is most advantageous to the player is different for the player who is playing the game in the normal state is changed step by step. Since the transition can be made, it is possible to prevent the user from becoming bored with the game before the second time saving state is set. In addition, since it is possible to make it difficult to stop the game when the game state shifts to the second time saving state more easily than the normal state, the operation of the game can be easily improved.

In the first time-saving state, the ball is passed through the through gate 67 by the left-handed game, the normal pattern lottery is executed, and the ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 during the normal pattern winning game. . Then, when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, a second special symbol lottery is executed in which a small win is won with a probability of 970/1000 and a big win is won with a probability of 30/1000. During the first time-saving state, a time-saving end condition is satisfied based on the fact that the second special symbol lottery is executed once, and a special symbol variation for indicating the result of the second special symbol lottery in which the time-saving end condition is satisfied. It is configured so that the time saving state ends at the start timing of (second special symbol variation). As a result, the time saving state is likely to end without being able to acquire the special figure 2 reservation, so after setting the time saving state, the game state becomes a game state in which the second special symbol lottery can be executed only once.

In the tenth control example, when the second special symbol lottery is executed during the time-saving state, the jackpot winning or the small winning is always won, and when the small winning game is executed. 2, when the game is executed normally, the execution right of the jackpot game (winning of the game ball to the V winning opening 1650) can be surely acquired. That is, the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery and the number of executions of the jackpot game can be the same number. Therefore, the game aiming at setting the second time saving state in which the special figure 2 reservation can be obtained is performed rather than the first time saving state.

In the time saving state, the small prize types set when the small prize is won in the special figure 2 lottery have different selection ratios, and the selection of the small prize A in which the first time saving state is set after the big prize game is finished. The ratio is 80%, the selection ratio of the small win B in which the normal state is set after the jackpot game is finished is 15%, and the selection ratio of the small win C in which the second time saving state is set after the jackpot game is finished is 5%. Configure.

That is, when the first time-saving state is set, the game for executing the second special symbol lottery can be continued until the small hit B in which the normal state is set is selected after the end of the big win game. can.

Then, when a small win is won in the second special symbol lottery executed in the first time saving state, a small winning game in which the second time saving state can be set is selected at a rate of 5%. . That is, in the normal state, it is easier to shift to the first time saving state than in the second time saving state, and in the first time saving state, it is configured to be easier to shift to the second time saving state with a higher probability than in the normal state. . Therefore, the game state (normal state, first time saving state) in which the transition ratio to the second time saving state that is most advantageous to the player is different for the player who is playing the game in the normal state is changed step by step. Since the transition can be made, it is possible to prevent the user from becoming bored with the game before the second time saving state is set. In addition, since it is possible to make it difficult to stop the game when the game state shifts to the second time saving state more easily than the normal state, the operation of the game can be easily improved.

During the second time saving state, the time saving end condition is satisfied when the second special symbol lottery is executed for the first time saving state described above, and the second special symbol variation in which the time saving end condition is satisfied. It is configured so that the time saving state ends at the start timing. In other words, since it is possible to set the time saving state during the fluctuation period of the second special symbol fluctuation until the time saving end condition is satisfied, it is possible to acquire the special figure 2 hold during the fluctuation period, and the special figure 2 hold It is possible to make it easier to end the time saving state with the acquisition of Therefore, the second time saving state becomes a game state more advantageous to the player than the first time saving state.

In addition, since it is the same as the 1st time saving state mentioned above about the transition content of the game state based on the result of the 2nd special design lottery performed during the 2nd time saving state, the detailed description is abbreviate|omitted. And when the second time saving state ends, that is, when the second special symbol variation in which the time saving end condition is established is stopped and displayed, if the special figure 2 reservation is not acquired, the above-mentioned first time saving state , the transition is made to the first normal state in the same manner as at the end of .

On the other hand, when the second special symbol variation that satisfies the time saving end condition is stopped and displayed, if the special figure 2 reservation is acquired, the second special symbol lottery is set in the normal state as the game state to the second normal state where is executed. In this second normal state, the super chance mode is continuously set.

When the second special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state, the special symbol lottery for winning a small hit is executed with the same probability (970/1000) as in the time saving state. Then, the small hit type is selected at the same selection ratio as the second special symbol lottery during the time saving state. In other words, if many special figure 2 reservations are obtained, even if the normal state is set after the jackpot game ends, it is possible to easily return to the time saving state with a high probability.

In addition, in the tenth control example, the selection ratio of the small hit type in the normal state and the selection ratio of the small hit type in the time saving state are set to be the same, but not limited to this, one game state may be configured so that it is easier for the player to select a small win type that is more advantageous to the player than in the other game state. It is preferable to make it easy to select the winning type (small winning C). By constructing in this way, the second special symbol lottery executed during the normal state is more advantageous to the player than the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state. Become. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the degree of advantage of ending the time saving state in the state of acquiring the special figure 2 suspension, it is possible to easily increase the difference in the degree of advantage between the first time saving state and the second time saving state can.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the tenth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 385 to 390. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 of the tenth control example differs from the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example described above in that the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 are partially configured, and the voice lamp The difference is that the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the control device 113 are partially changed, and the rest is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 385, the electrical configuration of main controller 110 in the tenth control example will be described. FIG. 385(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the tenth control example. As shown in FIG. 385(a), the ROM 202 of this control example replaces the first hit random number 7 table 202fa with the ROM 202 of the above-described seventh control example (see FIG. 304(a)). The random number 10 table 202ia is replaced with the small winning type selection 7 table 202ff, and the small winning type selection 10 table 202if is replaced with the time saving 7 table 202fe. is newly added, and the rest are the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted. For convenience of explanation, some of the various configurations shown in the ROM 202 (see FIG. 304(a)) of the seventh control example are omitted in FIG. 385(a). , are omitted from the drawing except for configurations that are difficult to apply.

The first winning random number 10 table 202ia differs from the above-described first winning random number 7 table 202fa (see FIG. 305(a)) in the specified value determined as a big win and the specified value determined as a small winning. The only difference is that they are the same. Detailed descriptions of the same contents are omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 386, the contents defined in the first winning random number 10 table 202ia will be described. FIG. 386(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning random number 10 table 202ia. As shown in FIG. 386(a), the first per random number 10 table 202ia is a special symbol 1 random number 10 table 202ia1 that is referred to during the winning lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and the second special symbol. It has a special symbol 2 random number 10 table 202ia2 that is referred to when executing the winning lottery of (special figure 2).

Next, with reference to FIG. 386(b), the contents defined in the special symbol 1 random number 10 table 202ia1 will be described. FIG. 386(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 1 random number 10 table 202ia1. As shown in FIG. 386(b), the "big win" is defined for the range "0 to 29" out of the range "0 to 999" that the value of the first random number counter C1 can take. That is, in the tenth control example, the probability of winning the jackpot in the lottery for the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is 3/100 (30/1000).

Next, with reference to FIG. 386(c), the contents defined in the special symbol 2 random number 10 table 202ia2 will be described. FIG. 386(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 2 random number 10 table 202ia2. As shown in FIG. 386(c), the "jackpot" is defined for the range of "0 to 29" out of the range of "0 to 999" that the value of the first random number counter C1 can take, and "30 A value of ~999” defines a “small win”. That is, in the tenth control example, the probability of winning a big win in the special drawing 2 lottery is about 3/100 (30/1000), and the probability of winning a small win is 97/100 (970/1000).

In the tenth control example, the type and number of judgment values for judging that the small winning is determined to be a constant value regardless of the game state. It may be configured to set a high probability state (special symbol high probability state) and a low probability state (special symbol low probability state). In addition, in the tenth control system, only the second special symbol lottery is configured to be determined to be a small winning, but the special symbol 1 random number 10 can also be determined to be a small winning in the first special symbol lottery. The contents of the table 202ia1 may be defined, and in this case, the odds of winning a small hit may be the same or different between the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery.

The small hit type selection 10 table 202if is a data table that is referred to when selecting the small hit type that is set when the small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery). This small hit type selection 10 table 202if differs from the small hit type selection 7 table 202ff (see FIG. 307) of the seventh control example described above in that the contents of the defined small hit type are changed. , are otherwise identical. Detailed descriptions of the same elements are omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 387, the small hit type selection 10 table 202if will be described. FIG. 387 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small hit type selection 10 table 202if. In the tenth control example, according to the set small winning type, the advantage degree of the time saving state after the end of the big winning game executed based on the establishment of the execution condition during the small winning game is varied. Configure. More specifically, it is configured to be able to set an advantageous time-saving state or a disadvantageous time-saving state according to the set small hit type.

Specifically, as the small hit type of the first special symbol, three types of the above-described small hit A, small hit B, and small hit C are set so as to be selected by the value of the small hit type counter C5. , and the value of the obtained small hit type counter C5 is defined for the range of "0 to 79" for "small hit A (5R jackpot A when passing V)", and for the range "80 to 94" "Small hit B (5R jackpot B when passing V)" is defined, and "small hit C (5R time saving jackpot C when passing V)" is defined for the range of "95 to 99" .

Here, in each small winning type, when the game ball enters the V winning opening 1650 in the small winning game, the type of the big winning game (big winning type) to be executed after that is set. For "small hit A", "jackpot A" is set as a jackpot type, for "small hit B", "jackpot B" is set, and for "small hit C" In other words, "jackpot C" is set.

In the tenth control example, even when any one of the "jackpot A" to "jackpot C" is set, a jackpot game is executed five times in which the variable winning device 65 is opened as the jackpot game. A game (five-round game) is executed, and after the jackpot game is finished, a time-saving state is set. And detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG. 388, but according to the jackpot type to be set, as a time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state, time-saving end conditions of different contents are configured to be set are doing.

In other words, it is configured to provide privilege games (jackpot games, games in a time-saving state) in which only time-saving end conditions are changed according to the small-hit type set when a small win is won. By configuring in this way, the type of the jackpot is specified by the player according to the contents of the jackpot game executed based on the winning of the jackpot, and the time saving state set later is the advantageous time saving state or the disadvantageous time saving state. It is possible to prevent the player from predicting in advance whether or not.

In addition, in the tenth control example, the content of the jackpot game executed based on the winning of the small hit is configured to be the same (5 rounds (R) jackpot game) regardless of the type of the small hit. Without being limited to this, it may be configured to be able to execute a big winning game with different contents according to the small winning type. In this case, a jackpot game with the same jackpot game content is used in at least a part of the jackpot type in which a disadvantageous time-saving state that is disadvantageous to the player is set and at least a part of the jackpot type that is set in an advantageous time-saving state that is advantageous to the player. Configure it to run.

By constructing in this way, a jackpot game that makes it difficult for a player to discriminate whether a time saving state set after the jackpot game is over is an advantageous time saving state or a disadvantageous time saving state while the jackpot game is being executed. And, a jackpot game that makes it easy for the player to determine that the time saving state set after the jackpot game is an advantageous time saving state while the jackpot game is being executed (only the jackpot type in which the advantageous time saving state is set is executed) possible jackpot game) and can be executed, it is possible to make the player interested in what kind of content the jackpot game will be executed.

The time saving provision 10 table 202ie is a data table in which the end condition of the time saving state (time saving end condition) to be set at the end of the jackpot game is defined in advance, and the time saving giving content (time saving end condition) corresponding to each jackpot type. are stipulated. This time saving provision 10 table 202ie is a data table that is referred to when setting a plurality of time saving end conditions for ending the time saving state, and is referred to when the jackpot game ends (the ending period of the jackpot game ends). Then, different times of time saving (time saving end conditions) are set according to the jackpot type.

Here, with reference to FIG. 388, the contents defined in the time saving provision 10 table 202ie will be described. FIG. 388 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the time saving provision 10 table 202ie. In this control example, the first time-saving end condition established based on the total number of times of the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation (the value set in the time-saving counter 203h) and the number of times of the second special symbol variation It is configured to be able to set the second time saving end condition established based on (value set to special figure 2 fluctuation counter).

Specifically, when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, or when the small hit type "small hit A" is set, the "jackpot A" is set as the first time saving end condition. "10" is defined as the value of the counter 203h, and "1" is defined as the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203ia as the second time saving end condition. That is, when the time saving state corresponding to "big hit A" is set, when the total number of times of execution of the first special symbol variation and the number of times of execution of the second special symbol variation reaches 10 times A time saving state is set in which the second time saving end condition is met when the one hour saving end condition is established and the number of executions of the second special symbol variation reaches one. In addition, as described above, in the tenth control example, since it is configured to end the time saving state at the start timing of the special symbol variation where the time saving end condition is established, the time saving state corresponding to "jackpot A" is set, the time saving state ends at the start timing of the first second special symbol variation after the time saving state is set. Therefore, it becomes a disadvantageous time saving state that is disadvantageous to the player.

In addition, in the tenth control example, the second time-saving end condition that can be established first when the game is normally executed in the time-saving state, and the first time-saving end condition that is less likely to be established than the second time-saving end condition configured to set. And it is prescribed|regulated so that "10" may be set to the value of the time saving counter 203h as 1st time saving end conditions. The value of this "10" is defined to be a value larger than the upper limit number "4" of the special figure 1 reservation. Therefore, the time saving state is set in the state of storing the upper limit number of special figure 1 pending, and even if all the special figure 1 pending is digested before the second special symbol variation is executed, the time saving state is never ends. In addition, when the act of executing only the first special symbol lottery is performed during the time saving state, the time saving state can be terminated at the time when the number of times of the first special symbol variation reaches 10 times. It is possible to suppress the continuous execution of a game that is not. In this control example, the same value is set as the first time saving end condition for all jackpot types for which the time saving state is set, but not limited to this, a different value It may be configured to be set.

For the "big hit B" set when the small hit type "small hit B" is set, as the first time saving end condition, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to "0", and as the second time saving end condition , "0" is defined in the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203ia. In other words, when "jackpot B" is set, the normal state is set after the jackpot game ends. In addition, as described above, in the tenth control example, it is easier to execute a game (second special symbol lottery) that is advantageous to the player when the time saving state is set than when the normal state is set. Since it is configured, "jackpot B" is the jackpot type that is the most disadvantageous to the player.

For the "big hit C" set when the small hit type "small hit C" is set, as the first time saving end condition, the value of the time saving counter 203h is "10", as the second time saving end condition , "2" is defined in the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203ia. That is, when the time saving state corresponding to "big hit C" is set, when the total number of times of execution of the first special symbol variation and the number of times of execution of the second special symbol variation reaches 10 times A time saving state is set in which the second time saving end condition is met when the one hour saving end condition is established and the number of executions of the second special symbol variation reaches two times. In addition, as described above, in the tenth control example, since it is configured to end the time saving state at the start timing of the special symbol variation where the time saving end condition is established, the time saving state corresponding to the "jackpot C" is set, the time saving state ends at the start timing of the second special symbol variation for the second time after the time saving state is set. In other words, the time saving state continues during the fluctuation period of the first second special symbol fluctuation after the time saving state is set, and the period during which it is easy to enter the game ball to the second ball entrance 640 by the normal figure per game. becomes. Therefore, it becomes an advantageous time saving state that is advantageous to the player.

In addition, in this control example, as a plurality of time saving end conditions, a configuration having the above-described first time saving end condition and second time saving end condition is used, but other conditions may be set as time saving end conditions, For example, when the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (eg 50 times), the time saving end condition is established, and when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol reaches a prescribed number of times (eg 80 times). It is also possible to set a time-saving end condition that is satisfied when a small win is won and the V winning device 650 operates a predetermined number of times (eg, 10 times).

In addition, it is possible to set a time saving end condition that is established by another factor, not based on the number of fluctuations of special symbols or the lottery result. number of times of operation) reaches a predetermined number of times, or when the number of balls entering a specific ball entrance (for example, the general winning opening 63) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50) You may comprise so that the time saving end conditions etc. which are materialized in may be preset.

As described above, a plurality of time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, are set, and the time-saving state is ended when any of the time-saving end conditions is set. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp in advance how long the time saving state will continue, so that monotonous games can be suppressed.

Furthermore, when a predetermined number (for example, two) of a plurality of time saving end conditions are established, the time saving end condition may be established. In this case, the establishment number determination means for determining the number of time-saving end conditions that are satisfied, and the condition attainment determination means for determining whether the number of establishment determined by the establishment number determination means has reached a predetermined number (for example, two), is provided, and the time saving state is terminated (normal state is set) when it is determined that the condition attainment determination means has reached a predetermined number (for example, two).

Further, a content discriminating means is provided for discriminating the content of the time-saving end condition that is established first, and a predetermined number (for example, two) serving as a discriminating reference for the condition attainment discriminating means is varied based on the discriminating result of the content discriminating means. A discrimination reference number variable means may be provided. As a result, it is possible to set a time-saving state that is easy to end or a time-saving state that is difficult to end according to the type of the time-saving end condition that is established first, so that even after the time-saving state is set, the player is motivated. You can play games.

In addition to the above-mentioned contents, a predetermined period of time after the time saving state is set (for example, until the number of fluctuations in the special symbol reaches 10 times) is measured, and the measurement result of the predetermined period of time measurement means is measured. A result determination means for determining is provided, and when the result determination means determines that the current time is within the predetermined period, even if the above-mentioned time saving end condition is satisfied, the time saving state is terminated until the predetermined period elapses. A time-saving end delaying means for delaying may be provided, or an end condition invalidating means may be provided for invalidating the time-saving end condition established when the result determining means determines that the current time is within a predetermined period. In addition, while the result determination means determines that the current time is within a predetermined period, it determines whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied, and updates (subtracts) the values of various counters set according to each time saving end condition ) may not be executed.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to surely prevent the end of the time saving state immediately after the time saving state is set, and to set the end timing of the time saving state in a complicated manner. In addition, in the case of using the process of ending the time saving state based on the fact that a plurality of time saving end conditions are satisfied as described above, a plurality of time saving end conditions are prioritized time saving end conditions (for example, the number of fluctuations in the special symbol is Time-saving end conditions that are established when reaching 100 times) and non-priority time-saving end conditions (for example, time-saving end conditions that are established when the number of small hits reaches 3 times) are set, and priority time-saving end It is preferable that the time saving state is terminated immediately when the conditions are satisfied, and the time saving state is terminated only when a plurality of non-prioritized time saving end conditions are satisfied. By providing the preferential time-saving end condition in this way, it is possible to suppress excessively providing the time-saving state to the player.

Returning to FIG. 385(b), the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example will be described. FIG. 385(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example. As shown in FIG. 385 (b), in this tenth control example, the RAM203 (see FIG. 304 (b)) in the above-described seventh control example is different in that a special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203ia is added. are otherwise identical. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The game state storage area 203g is a storage area for storing information indicating the game state contained in the state command received from the main controller 110, as in each control example described above. Based on the information stored in 203g, in addition to the set game state (normal state, time saving state), the type of the game state (unfavorable time saving state (first time saving state), advantageous time saving state (second time saving state)) is also configured to be distinguishable.

Special figure 2 variation counter 203ia is a counter referred to when determining whether the number of variations of the second special symbol variation executed during the time saving state satisfies the second time saving end condition, and the time saving state is When set, a value corresponding to the second time saving end condition is set. Then, every time the control process for starting the second special symbol variation is executed during the time saving state, the value is subtracted, and whether the value after the subtraction satisfies the second time saving end condition (is 0 or) is determined.

By configuring in this way, even if the content of the second time saving end condition is changed depending on the type of the time saving state to be set, it is set to the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203ia when setting the time saving state It suffices to change the contents of the values, and the processing load on the main controller 110 can be reduced.

Next, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the tenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 389(a). FIG. 389(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the tenth control example. As shown in FIG. 389(a), the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the tenth control example selects the lottery result notification mode selection for the ROM 222 in the above-described seventh control example (see FIG. 311(a)). The difference is that the table 202fa is deleted, and the final variation effect selection table 222ia and the notification target selection table 222ib are provided. Other configurations are the same, and the same contents are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

When the final variation performance selection table 222ia determines the performance mode of the variation performance (final variation performance) executed during the final variation of the second special symbol variation (special figure 2 time reduction final variation) executed during the time saving state It is a data table referred to when determining the variation performance pattern of the special figure 2 variation before the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state is established.

In the tenth control example, as described above, the timing to end the time saving state is the start timing of the special symbol fluctuation, so the fluctuation period of the special symbol fluctuation one before the time saving end condition is satisfied is given to the player. It will be the last chance to get a special figure 2 reservation. Therefore, in the tenth control example, the fluctuation period of the special symbol fluctuation one before the time saving end condition is established becomes the time saving final fluctuation period, and the final fluctuation effect is executed in the time saving final fluctuation period. there is

Specifically, the value of the time saving counter 203h and the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203ia are updated by the update process 10 (see FIG. 393) executed by the main controller 110, and the special figure after being updated A remaining time reduction command indicating the value of the 2 fluctuation counter 203ia is set (see S10603 in FIG. 393). Then, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the remaining time reduction command output from the main controller 110, until the time reduction end condition is satisfied for the time reduction state currently set on the audio lamp control device 113 side The remaining information (remaining time reduction number of times) is configured to be identifiable.

Here, when it is determined that the time saving end condition is satisfied by the special symbol variation executed next to the special symbol variation corresponding to the remaining time shortening number command received this time, ie, the remaining time shortening number of times is established. Specifically, when the value of the time saving counter 203h or the information indicating "1" as the value of the special figure 2 variation number counter 203ia is received as the remaining time saving number command, the corresponding special symbol variation (time saving final variation) The variable period is specified as the final variable period of time reduction, and the production mode of the final variable performance of time reduction is determined for the final variable period of time reduction.

By configuring in this way, even if the process of ending the time saving state is executed at the start timing of the special symbol variation when the time saving end condition is established, the player can acquire the special figure 2 reservation. It is possible to make it easy to secure a period for executing an effect (holding acquisition effect) to prompt the

In addition, in the tenth control example, since it is configured to end the time saving state at the start timing of the special symbol fluctuation when the time saving end condition is satisfied, during the fluctuation period of the special symbol fluctuation when the time saving end condition is satisfied , Since it becomes a game state (normal state) where it is difficult to acquire special figure 2 reservation, the time saving final variation effect is executed during the special symbol variation period one before the special symbol variation in which the time saving end condition is satisfied. However, for example, if the pachinko machine 10 defines the stop timing of the special symbol variation as the timing to end the time saving state, the variation period of the special symbol variation in which the time saving end condition is satisfied is the time saving final. It may be configured so as to specify it as a variable period and determine the performance mode of the final variable performance for the time saving final variable period.

In addition, the production period of the time saving final fluctuation production should at least overlap with at least a part of the period corresponding to the above-mentioned time saving final fluctuation period, and only a part of the time saving final fluctuation period is used as the production period. It may be configured to execute the final time-saving variation performance, or configured to execute the final time-saving variation performance across a partial period of the final time-saving variation period and a period different from the final time-saving variation period. You can

Here, with reference to FIG. 390, the contents defined in the final variation effect selection table 222ia will be described. FIG. 390 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the final variation effect selection table 222ia. In the tenth control example, as shown in FIG. 382(a) or FIG. 383(b), it is possible to set an effect mode in which different information can be given to the player as the time-saving final variable effect. For example, during the period in which the time-saving final variable production is executed, the production mode corresponding to the reservation acquisition production (see FIG. 382 (a)) that prompts the acquisition of the special figure 2 reservation, and the special figure 2 reservation that has already been acquired and an effect mode corresponding to a blessing effect (see FIG. 383(b)) for notifying that the information that can give a privilege advantageous to the player is included can be set.

As shown in FIG. 390(a), this final variation effect selection table 222ia contains the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol variation in which the time saving final variation effect is executed (result of determination) and the time saving final variation effect Special symbol 2 reservation number (value of special symbol 2 reservation ball number counter 223b1) when determining the fluctuation production of special symbol fluctuation executed, and the value of the acquired production counter 223e of the final fluctuation production Production modes are defined.

Specifically, the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol variation in which the time saving final variation production is executed (the result of the judgment result) is "big hit" or "small hit C", and the time saving final variation production is executed If the special symbol 2 reservation number (value of the special symbol 2 reservation ball number counter 223b1) when determining the fluctuation effect of the special symbol variation is "1 to 3", the value of the acquired effect counter 223e is " 0 to 69”, the effect mode is “Goal” (see FIG. 383(b)). )) are defined respectively, and the number of special symbols 2 reserved (the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b1) when determining the variable performance of the special symbol variation in which the time saving final variation performance is executed is “0 ”, the value of the obtained effect counter 223e is in the range of “0 to 69”, and the effect mode of “weak accumulation” (see FIG. 382(a)) is set to “70 to 99”. A “goal” (see FIG. 383(b)) is defined as a rendering mode for each range.

In addition, the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol variation in which the time-saving final variation effect is executed (result of judgment) is "small hit A", and the variation effect of the special symbol variation in which the time-saving final variation effect is performed. If the special figure 2 reservation number (value of special symbol 2 reservation ball number counter 223b1) at the time of determination is "0 to 3", the value of the acquired production counter 223e is "0 to 69" for the range 382(a)), and for the range of "70 to 99", "strong accumulation" is defined as the effect mode.

In addition, the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol variation in which the final time-saving variation performance is executed (result of determination) is "small hit B", and the variation performance of the special symbol variation in which the time-saving final variation performance is performed When the special figure 2 reservation number (the value of the special symbol 2 reservation ball number counter 223b1) at the time of determination is "1 to 3", the value of the acquired production counter 223e is "0 to 69" for the range Then, as the production mode, "strong accumulation" is defined for the range of "70 to 99", and "weak accumulation" (see FIG. 382 (a)) is defined as the production mode, respectively, and the time saving final fluctuation When the special symbol 2 reservation number (the value of the special symbol 2 reservation ball number counter 223b1) when determining the variable performance of the special symbol variation in which the performance is executed is "0", the value of the acquired performance counter 223e is in the range of "0 to 99", the mode of presentation is defined as "strong accumulation".

Here, in the tenth control example, when "small win C" is set as the small win type, after the big win game executed based on the small win winning, the second time saving state (advantageous time saving state ) is configured to be set. That is, when "small hit C" is elected, it is configured so that a time saving state having a period in which special figure 2 reservation can be acquired is set later. Therefore, as the performance mode of the time-saving final variation performance, a performance mode corresponding to the blessing performance ("goal") that does not prompt the player to acquire the special figure 2 reservation during the performance period of the time-saving final variation performance can be set. It is configured as follows.

By configuring in this way, in the time-saving final variation period indicating that the time-saving state ends, it is suppressed to encourage the game to shoot the game ball unnecessarily in order to acquire the special figure 2 hold for the player. be able to. Furthermore, according to the number of reserved special figures 2 that have already been acquired, the ratio of setting the production mode corresponding to the blessing production ("goal") is configured to be different, and the special figure 2 that has already been acquired It is configured such that the effect mode corresponding to the blessing effect (“goal”) is more likely to be set when the number of reservations is large than when the number is small.

In other words, when the game ball is fired to obtain the special figure 2 reservation during the final variable production period, the state in which the privilege given to the player is small (the number of newly obtainable special figure 2 reservations is small) is configured to make it more difficult for the pending acquisition effect to be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further suppress the urging of a game in which a game ball is shot unnecessarily in order to obtain the special figure 2 reservation for the player.

Furthermore, in the tenth control example, again, even in a state where there is a high possibility that the advantageous time saving state is set (a state in which the small hit C is elected), the holding acquisition effect is executed with a low probability Since it is configured, it is possible to prevent the player from surely grasping the subsequent game contents by the effect mode of the time-saving final variable effect.

On the other hand, in the tenth control example, when "small win B" is set as the small win type, the time saving state is not set after the big win game executed based on the small win winning (the normal state is configured). In other words, when "small win B" is won, it is configured so that the period during which the special figure 2 reservation can be obtained is not set later. Therefore, as the performance mode of the time saving final variation performance, it is configured to be able to set the performance mode that prompts the player to acquire the special figure 2 reservation during the performance period of the time saving final variation performance.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to surely acquire the special figure 2 reservation during the last period in which the special figure 2 reservation can be acquired. In addition, in the tenth control example, as the performance mode of the reservation acquisition effect for prompting the player to acquire the special figure 2 reservation, the weak performance mode ("save weak") to encourage the acquisition of the special figure 2 reservation , and a strong performance mode ("store strong)" that strongly encourages acquisition of the special figure 2 reservation rather than the weak performance mode, and when a disadvantageous time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends. The ratio of setting the strong performance mode as the performance mode of the pending acquisition performance between (when winning the small win A) and when the normal state is set after the end of the big win game (when winning the small win B). are configured to be different.

In other words, when the disadvantageous time saving state is set, it is difficult to newly acquire the special figure 2 reservation, but for example, the disadvantageous time saving condition is set in a state where no special figure 2 reservation is acquired When it is done, it is configured so that the second special symbol lottery can be newly executed once. That is, when the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game, and when the disadvantageous time saving state is set, it becomes a game state in which it is difficult to newly acquire the special figure 2 reservation, but the disadvantageous time saving The state becomes a game state in which the second special symbol lottery is newly executed more easily. And, since the second special symbol lottery is newly executed, there is a possibility that an advantageous time saving state is set based on the lottery result, so rather than the "small hit B" in which the normal state is set, There is a higher possibility that the "small hit C" in which the disadvantageous time-saving state is set will set the advantageous time-saving state later.

Therefore, in this 10th control example, the case of winning the small win B is stronger than the case of winning the small win A. ) is configured to be easily set.

Here, in the conventional pachinko machine 10, the player is made to acquire the special figure 2 suspension unconditionally in the final period (time saving final fluctuation period) in which the special figure 2 suspension can be acquired in the time saving state. It was configured such that an effect (holding acquisition effect) prompting the user to do so is executed. However, depending on the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the final time-saving change period, there is no advantage in acquiring the special figure 2 hold during the time-saving final change period, and only the disadvantage of firing the game ball unnecessarily occurs. there was a case.

And the situation where it is better to actually acquire the special figure 2 suspension (for example, the situation where the time saving state ends and the special figure 2 suspension cannot be newly acquired) and the merits of acquiring the special figure 2 suspension To easily acquire a special figure 2 reservation again after a jackpot game executed based on the lottery result is finished in a low situation (for example, a special symbol lottery being executed wins a jackpot (small win)). Since the same mode of pending acquisition effect is executed in the situation where the time saving state that can be set is set, when the pending acquisition effect is executed, a game that tries to acquire a new special figure 2 hold There is a possibility that a problem of gradual decline in motivation may occur.

On the other hand, in the tenth control example, as the effect mode of the hold acquisition effect, it is possible to set the effect mode in which the degree of prompting the player to acquire the special figure 2 hold is different. In a situation where it is better to acquire special figure 2 suspension (for example, a situation where the time saving state ends as it is and it becomes impossible to newly acquire special figure 2 suspension), the player acquires special figure 2 suspension It is configured to facilitate setting of a strongly urged effect mode (strong to save).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to see the pending acquisition performance executed in a performance mode that is different from the normally executed pending acquisition performance and in which the acquisition of the special figure 2 pending is strongly urged. A player can be motivated to play a game for obtaining the special figure 2 reservation.

In addition, as an effect mode that strongly encourages the acquisition of the special figure 2 hold, for example, by increasing the display area of the small display area Dm4 with respect to the effect mode of the normal hold acquisition effect shown in Fig. 382 (a) The letters ``Left-handed'' are displayed in a large size, and the comment ``Be sure to hit left-handed'' is displayed instead of ``Left-handed and accumulate V'' as a comment displayed in the secondary display area Ds. Thus, the player is strongly urged to shoot the game ball, that is, by changing the display mode of the information provided to the player in the normal holding acquisition effect, the player is strongly urged to shoot the game ball. It may be configured, and new information that is not provided to the player on the display screen shown in FIG. When finished, it may be configured to set an effect mode that can provide the player with information indicating that the period during which the special figure 2 reservation can be acquired is not set. In addition, by executing additional effects using the sound output from the pachinko machine 10 and the light emitting means (LED etc.) provided in the pachinko machine 10, the situation where it is better to actually acquire the special figure 2 hold (For example, the time saving state ends as it is, and it may be configured to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that it is a situation where the special figure 2 reservation cannot be newly acquired).

In addition, in the present tenth control example, as shown in FIG. 390 (a), the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol variation in which the time saving final variation effect is executed (result of judgment) and the acquired special figure Based on the number of 2 reservations, the performance mode of the time saving final variable performance is configured to be determinable, but the performance mode of the time saving final variable performance may be determined based on other information, For example, based on the information about the look-ahead result (preliminary determination result) for the special figure 2 suspension that has been acquired, it may be configured to be able to determine the effect mode.

In this case, based on the result of the special symbol lottery (result of judgment) and the result of prefetching for the acquired special figure 2 hold (preliminary judgment result), it is determined whether or not the advantageous time saving state will be set later. Then, based on the determination result, the effect mode of the time saving final variable effect may be determined. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to execute the time-saving final variation production with higher accuracy.

The notification target selection table 222ib indicates the effect mode (number of notifications) of the notification effect (see FIG. 383(a)) for notifying the player of the number of rights to execute the jackpot game that has already been acquired (including the number of rights to be acquired). It is a data table that is referred to when determining, and is referred to when specifying information for determining the effect mode of the notification effect when the conditions for executing the notification effect are established (see S20108 in FIG. 394).

Here, the contents defined in the notification target selection table 222ib will be described with reference to FIG. 390(b). FIG. 390(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the notification target selection table 222ib. As shown in FIG. 390(b), in the notification target selection table 222ib, the result of reading the pending storage information stored in the winning information storage area 223a (advantageous time saving state is set small hit type "small hit C ” and the number of pending storage information corresponding to the “small win C”), the target of the notification effect (notification target ) defines the pending storage information differently.

Here, as described above, the winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four reservation areas (first area to fourth area) for special symbols. is configured so that the winning information included in the winning information command output from the main controller 110 is stored as reserved storage information in order from the first area. In other words, the winning information storage area 223a is configured to store the reserved memory information in the order in which the second special symbol lottery is executed as the reserved memory information corresponding to the second special symbol.

Therefore, by reading the reserved memory information corresponding to the second special symbol stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the number of reserved memory information that wins the small win C and the reserved memory information that wins the small win C It is possible to specify the order in which the second special symbol lottery based on is executed.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the first area (area 1) of the winning information storage area 223a, the pending storage information corresponding to the second special symbol lottery to be executed next is stored, and then the second area (area 1) is stored. The reserved storage information is stored in the order of area 2), third area (area 3), and fourth area (area 4). In the tenth control example, since the special symbol lottery is configured to be executed in the order in which the winning information is acquired, the suspension memory information stored in the first area (area 1) is stored first. The reserved memory information stored in the fourth area (area 2) is the last stored reserved memory information.

As shown in Figure 390 (b), in the notification target selection table 222ib, the final small hit C reservation storage position, the number of small hit C reservations in the reservation, and the small hit C reservation to be notified in association with It is configured to The final small hit C reserved storage position is specified by specifying the reserved storage information that wins the small win C among the reserved storage information corresponding to the plurality of second special symbols stored in the winning information storage area 223a. It shows the reserved areas (first area to fourth area) in which the reserved memory information stored last among the reserved memory information is stored.

That is, when the final small winning C reservation storage position is "1", the reservation storage information (small winning C reservation ) is stored, and if the final small hit C reservation storage position is "2", the area where the final small hit C reservation is stored among the reservation areas of the winning information storage area 223a is the second area (area 2). In addition, the final small hit C reservation storage position only specifies the position of the last stored small hit C reservation, and if the final small hit C reservation storage position is "2", the first area ( There are cases where the small win C reservation is stored in the area 1) and where it is not stored.

Similarly, when the final small winning C reservation storage position is "3", the area where the small winning C reservation is finally stored among the reservation areas of the winning information storage area 223a is the third area (area 3). It is shown that. In addition, the final small hit C reservation storage position only specifies the position of the last stored small hit C reservation, and if the final small hit C reservation storage position is "3", the first area ( Area 1) or the second area (area 2) may or may not store a small winning C reservation.

In addition, when the final small hit C reservation storage position is "4", the area where the small hit C reservation is finally stored among the reservation areas of the prize information storage area 223a is the fourth area (area 4). is shown. In addition, the final small hit C reservation storage position only specifies the position of the last stored small hit C reservation, and if the final small hit C reservation storage position is "4", the first area ( Area 1), the second area (area 2), and the third area (area 3) may or may not store a small winning C reserve.

In addition, as described above, the final small hit C reservation storage position only specifies the position of the last stored small hit C reservation, and the number of acquired special figures 2 reservations (in the winning information storage area 223a It does not specify the total number of pending memory information corresponding to the stored second special symbol). Therefore, even if the number of acquired special figures 2 pending is "1" or "4", if the small hit C pending is stored only in the first area (area 1) of the pending area , the final small winning C reservation storage position is specified as "1".

The number of small winning C reservations in the reservation is the holding storage information corresponding to the small winning C reservation (holding memory for winning the small winning C information), and if the number of small winning C reservations in the reservation is "1", among the reservation storage information corresponding to the second special symbol stored in the winning information storage area 223a, When the number of pending storage information corresponding to the winning C pending is 1 and the number of small winning C pending in the pending is "2", the pending storage information corresponding to the second special symbol stored in the winning information storage area 223a Among them, there are two pieces of reservation storage information corresponding to the small winning C reservation, and if the number of small winning C reservations in the reservation is "3", it corresponds to the second special symbol stored in the winning information storage area 223a Among the holding storage information, the holding storage information corresponding to the small winning C holding is 3 pieces, and if the number of small winning C holdings in the holding is "4", the second stored in the winning prize information storage area 223a It shows that there are four pieces of pending storage information corresponding to the small hit C pending among the pending storage information corresponding to the special symbols.

Next, with reference to FIG. 390(b), the contents defined in the notification target selection table 222ib will be specifically described. As shown in FIG. 390 (b), for the final small hit C reservation storage position "1", without specifying the number of small hit C reservations in the reservation, "area 1 (first area)” is defined. That is, if the final small hit C reservation storage position is "1", since there is no other small hit C reservation, the small hit stored in "area 1 (first area)" as it is C suspension is determined as an object to be notified by the notification effect.

In addition, when the final small hit C reservation storage position is "2", if the number of C reservations in the reservation is "1", that is, only in the "second area (area 2)" of the reservation area When the winning C reservation is stored, "area 1 (first area)" is specified as the small winning C reservation to be notified. In this case, since the "area 1 (first area)" is in a state where the small winning C reservation is not stored, the number of execution rights of the big winning game on the premise that the small winning C is won as a notification effect Instead, the number of rights to execute the big hit game calculated based on the reserved memory information stored in the "area 1 (first area)" is determined as the number of notification of the notification effect.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a notification effect that diverges the number of rights to execute the jackpot game notified by the notification effect from the number of rights to execute the jackpot game that is actually acquired (including the number of rights to be acquired). Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect.

When the number of small winning C reservations in the reservation is "2", "area 2 (second area)" is specified as the small winning C reservations to be notified. In this case, since the "area 2 (second area)" stores the small winning C reservation, it is possible to set the maximum number of rights to execute the big winning game at the present time as the notification number of the notification effect. Become.

Next, when the final small hit C reservation storage position is "3", if the number of small hit C reservations in the reservation is "1", that is, only in the "third area (area 3)" of the reservation area When the small winning C reservation is stored, "area 3 (third area)" is specified as the small winning C reservation to be notified. In this case, since the last stored small winning C reservation is stored in "area 3 (third area)", the maximum number of rights to execute the big winning game at the present time is set as the notification number of the notification effect. It becomes possible to

Further, when the number of small winning C reservations in the reservation is "2", "area 2 (second area)" is specified as the small winning C reservations to be notified. In this case, the "area 2 (second area)" may or may not store the small win C reserve. Specifically, since the final small hit C reservation storage position is "3", it is clear that the small hit C reservation is stored in "area 3 (third area)" of the reservation areas. Confirmed. Then, since the number of C reservations in the reservation is "2", "area 2 (second area)" in which the reservation storage information is stored before "area 3 (third area)", or The small winning C reservation is stored in any of the "area 1 (first area)".

Here, when the small hit C reservation is stored in "area 2 (second area)", in the state where the small hit C reservation is stored in "area 2 (second area)" to be notified Therefore, the number of notifications based on the pending memory information stored in "area 2 (second area)" (the number of rights to execute the jackpot game that can be acquired during the advantageous time-saving state set based on the small win C winning number of notifications including) is set as the number of notifications of the notification effect. On the other hand, when the small winning C reservation is stored in the "area 1 (first area)", the small winning C reservation is not stored in the "area 2 (second area)" to be notified. Therefore, the notification number based on the reservation storage information (small hit A, small hit B, or big hit) stored in the "area 2 (second area)" is set as the notification number of the notification effect.

Further, when the number of small winning C reservations in the reservation is "3", "area 1 (first area)" is specified as the small winning C reservations to be notified. In this case, the "area 1 (first area)" is in a state where the small winning C reservation is surely stored. Specifically, since the final small hit C reservation storage position is "3", it is clear that the small hit C reservation is stored in "area 3 (third area)" of the reservation areas. Confirmed. Then, since the number of C reservations in the reservation is "3", "area 2 (second area)" in which the reservation storage information is stored before "area 3 (third area)", or Since only the state where two small winning C reservations are stored in "Area 1 (first area)" is applicable, "Area 1 (first area)" surely stores small winning C reservations be in a state where In this case, since the small winning C suspension is stored in the "area 1 (first area)" to be notified, based on the suspension storage information stored in the "area 1 (first area)" The reported number (the reported number including the number of rights to execute the big winning game that can be acquired during the advantageous time saving state set based on the small win C winning) is set as the reported number of the reporting performance. In this case, it is a state in which the small winning C reservation is stored in the area after "area 1 (first area)", and the reservation storage information stored in "area 3 (third area)" The notification number based on is the maximum number of execution right numbers of the big winning game that can be notified in the notification performance at the present time. In this way, a number different from the maximum number of rights to execute the jackpot game can be notified as the notification effect, so that the number of times of the jackpot game actually executed (the number of consecutive wins) can be increased to the player. It can provide predictable entertainment.

Similarly, when the final small hit C reservation storage position is "4", if the number of C reservations in the reservation is "1", that is, only in the "fourth area (area 4)" of the reservation area When the small winning C reservation is stored, "area 4 (fourth area)" is specified as the small winning C reservation to be notified. In this case, since the last stored small winning C reservation is stored in "area 4 (fourth area)", the maximum number of rights to execute the big winning game at the present time is set as the notification number of the notification effect. It becomes possible to

Further, when the number of small winning C reservations in the reservation is "2", "area 3 (third area)" is specified as the small winning C reservations to be notified. In this case, the "area 3 (third area)" may or may not store a small winning C reserve. Specifically, since the final small hit C reservation storage position is "4", it is said that the small hit C reservation is stored in "area 4 (fourth area)" of the reservation areas. Confirmed. Then, since the number of retained small hits C retained is "2", "area 3 (third area)" in which retained storage information is stored before "area 4 (fourth area)" The small winning C reservation is stored in either "area 2 (second area)" or "area 1 (first area)".

Here, when the small hit C reservation is stored in "area 3 (third area)", in the state where the small hit C reservation is stored in "area 3 (third area)" to be notified Therefore, the number of notifications based on the pending memory information stored in "area 3 (third area)" (the number of rights to execute the jackpot game that can be acquired during the advantageous time-saving state set based on the small win C winning number of notifications including) is set as the number of notifications of the notification effect. On the other hand, if the small hit C pending is stored in the "area 1 (first area)" or "area 2 (second area)", the small winning in "area 3 (third area)" to be notified Since the hit C reservation is not stored, the number of notifications based on the reservation storage information (small hit A, small hit B, or big hit) stored in "area 3 (third area)" is the notification effect is set as the notification number of

When the number of small winning C reservations in the reservation is "3", "area 2 (second area)" is specified as the small winning C reservations to be notified. In this case, the "area 2 (second area)" may or may not store the small win C reserve. Specifically, since the final small hit C reservation storage position is "4", it is said that the small hit C reservation is stored in "area 4 (fourth area)" of the reservation areas. Confirmed. Then, since the number of C reservations in the reservation is "3", "area 3 (third area)" in which the reservation storage information is stored before "area 4 (fourth area)" Small hit C reservation is stored in two areas out of "area 2 (second area)" or "area 1 (first area)".

Here, when the small winning C reservation is stored at least in the "area 2 (second area)", the state in which the small winning C reservation is stored in the "area 2 (second area)" to be notified. Therefore, the number of notifications based on the pending memory information stored in "area 2 (second area)" (the execution right of the jackpot game that can be acquired during the advantageous time saving state set based on the small hit C winning The notification number including the number) is set as the notification number of the notification effect. On the other hand, if the small hit C pending is stored in "area 1 (first area)" and "area 3 (third area)", a small Since the hit C reservation is not stored, the number of notifications based on the reservation storage information (small hit A, small hit B, or big hit) stored in "area 2 (second area)" is the notification effect is set as the notification number of

Further, when the number of small winning C reservations in the reservation is "4", "area 1 (first area)" is specified as the small winning C reservations to be notified. In this case, the "area 1 (first area)" is in a state where the small winning C reservation is surely stored. Specifically, since the final small hit C reservation storage position is "4", it is clear that the small hit C reservation is stored in "area 4 (fourth area)" of the reservation areas. Confirmed. Then, since the number of retained small hits C retained is "4", "area 3 (third area)" in which retained storage information is stored before "area 4 (fourth area)", " Since only the state in which three small winning C reservations are stored in "area 2 (second area)" and "area 1 (first area)" is applicable, "area 1 (first area)" Win C reserve is surely stored. In this case, since the small winning C suspension is stored in the "area 1 (first area)" to be notified, based on the suspension storage information stored in the "area 1 (first area)" The reported number (the reported number including the number of rights to execute the big winning game that can be acquired during the advantageous time saving state set based on the small win C winning) is set as the reported number of the reporting performance. In this case, it is a state in which the small winning C reservation is stored in the area after "area 1 (first area)", and the reservation storage information stored in "area 4 (fourth area)" The notification number based on is the maximum number of execution right numbers of the big winning game that can be notified in the notification performance at the present time. In this way, a number different from the maximum number of rights to execute the jackpot game can be notified as the notification effect, so that the number of times of the jackpot game actually executed (the number of consecutive wins) can be increased to the player. It can provide predictable entertainment.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the tenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 389(b). FIG. 389(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the tenth control example. As shown in FIG. 389(b), the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the tenth control example has a status storage area 223ia and , is different in that a time saving final variation flag 223ib and an executed flag 223ic are provided. Other configurations are the same, and the same contents are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

The tenth control example also differs in that the types of information stored in the winning information storage area 223a are increased compared to the seventh control example. Specifically, in the tenth control example, a notification effect for notifying the player of at least a part of the number of rights to execute a jackpot game that has already been acquired can be executed. 222ia, it is configured to notify the number of rights to execute the big winning game based on the reserved storage information determined with reference to 222ia. The winning information storage area 223a is configured to store information for indicating that the pending storage information determined by referring to the notification target selection table 222ia is a notification target.

By configuring in this way, even if the second special symbol lottery is executed and the storage area of the pending memory information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted, which pending memory information is to be announced. It is possible to easily determine whether or not it is.

In the tenth control example, when the notification effect for notifying the number of execution rights of the jackpot game is executed, until the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation, which is the target of the notification effect, is executed. By structuring so as not to execute a new notification performance, the player is made to think that all the numbers of rights to execute the jackpot game that have already been acquired (including those scheduled to be acquired) have been notified by the notification performance.

In this way, in order to control so as not to execute a new notification performance until the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special figure 2 suspension, which is the target of the notification performance, is executed, the suspension stored in the winning information storage area 223a It is configured to determine whether or not stored information includes information indicating a notification target of the notification performance. This makes it possible to easily determine the end timing of the notification effect.

In the tenth control example, the execution of a new notification effect is restricted during the execution period of the notification effect. may be configured. In this case, for example, when the number of execution rights of the jackpot game that has already been acquired (including those scheduled to be acquired) and is not notified by the notification effect exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 5), the additional execution condition is met. It is preferable to configure so that a new notification effect can be executed regardless of whether the notification effect is being executed or not.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to suppress the increase in the number of rights to execute a big winning game that is not notified by the notification performance, the player's interest in the notification performance, and the deterioration of the performance effect. can be done. In addition, as the additional execution condition, in addition to the condition that is established based on the number of execution rights of the jackpot game that has already been acquired (including the number of rights to be acquired) that is not notified by the notification effect, for example, it is included in the pending storage information. Specific information (for example, information indicating that a jackpot game advantageous to the player will be executed, or indicating that the game state set after the jackpot game ends will be a game state advantageous to the player) A condition may be provided that is established when it is determined that a predetermined number (for example, two) of the information indicating the information) is included.

Further, the player is configured to be able to select a notification mode for notifying the number of rights to execute the jackpot game that has already been acquired (including the number of rights to be acquired) by a notification effect, and for example, when the player selects the first notification mode. is configured to notify the player of all the numbers of rights to execute the jackpot game that have already been acquired (including those scheduled to be acquired), and when the player selects the second notification mode, this tenth control As in the example, a part of the number of execution rights is randomly selected and notified to the player, and when the player selects the third notification mode, the minimum number of execution rights, that is, Alternatively, the player may be notified of only the result of whether or not the player has the number of rights to execute the jackpot game that has already been acquired (including the number of rights to be acquired). In this case, when the first notification mode is selected, by obtaining a new special figure 2 reservation, the number of winning (including scheduled to be obtained) jackpot game execution rights notified by the notification effect is increased. Then, a new notification effect is executed.

State storage area 223ia is a storage area for temporarily storing information included in the state command output from main controller 110 . By reading the information stored in the information storage area 223a, the currently set game state and its type (advantageous time saving state, unfavorable time saving state) can be specified on the side of the sound lamp control device 113. are doing. Further, the information storage area 223a is provided with a storage area capable of storing information regarding the currently set game state and a past storage area capable of storing information regarding the game state set in the past. The past storage area has a storage area (first past storage area to third past storage area) capable of storing up to three previous game states. When a state command indicating a change is received, information corresponding to the received state command is stored in the storage area, information previously stored in the storage area is shifted to the first past storage area, and the information corresponding to the received status command is shifted to the first past storage area. The information stored in the storage area is shifted to the second past storage area, the information stored in the second past storage area is shifted to the third past storage area, and the information stored in the third past storage area is shifted. configured to be deleted.

In this way, by configuring the game state set in the past to be temporarily memorizable, an effect corresponding to the contents of transition of the game state a plurality of times, or an effect corresponding to the game state set in the past. can be executed, it is possible to provide a variety of effects to the player.

The time-saving final variation flag 223ib is a flag for indicating a special design variation period for executing the time-saving final variation performance, and the special design variation corresponding to the special design variation period for performing the time-saving final variation performance is executed. is set to ON when

In the tenth control example, since it is configured to end the time saving state at the start timing of the special symbol fluctuation when the time saving end condition is satisfied, during the fluctuation period of the special symbol fluctuation when the time saving end condition is satisfied, Since it becomes a game state (normal state) in which it is difficult to acquire FIG. It is set to ON and is set to OFF at the timing when the special symbol variation immediately before the special symbol variation that satisfies the time saving end condition is stopped and displayed.

The executed flag 223ic is a flag for indicating that the notification effect is being executed, and is set to ON when the notification effect is executed. Then, when the special symbol variation corresponding to the reserved memory information to be notified of the notification effect is executed (when the variation effect of the corresponding special symbol variation is set), it is set to OFF. In the tenth control example, while the executed flag 223ic is set to ON, a new notification effect is not executed.

<Regarding control processing of main controller 110 in the tenth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 391 to 393, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 in the tenth control example will be described. In this tenth control example, in place of the special symbol variation processing 7 (see FIG. 315), the special symbol variation processing 10 (see FIG. (See FIG. 318), the special symbol variation pattern selection process 10 (see FIG. 392) is replaced with the update process 7 (see FIG. 319), and the update process 10 (see FIG. 393) is performed. , are otherwise identical. The same processing contents are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted. It should be noted that, with respect to portions where detailed descriptions of elements that are the same as those described in each of the control examples and embodiments described above are omitted, the contents described in each of the control examples and embodiments described above are omitted. It applies. In addition, the technical ideas described in each control example and each embodiment described above are naturally applied to the tenth control example, and are described in each control example and each embodiment described above. Modified examples and additional examples are naturally applied to the tenth control example.

First, with reference to FIG. 391, special symbol variation processing 10 (S10154) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 391 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process 10 (S10154). This special symbol variation process 10 (S10154) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 314), and the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the third This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third pattern performed in the pattern display device 81 and the like.

In the special symbol variation process 10 (S10154), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the midst of a big hit (S10201). During the special symbol jackpot includes a period during which the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81 display the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game). A period indicating the start of the jackpot game (opening period), a period during the jackpot game (round game period), and a round game period are completed, and then a lottery (fluctuation) of new special symbols is started. and a grace period (ending period).

Here, in order to determine whether or not the current jackpot is in progress, specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203k is set to ON. As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the middle of the jackpot (the flag 203k is set to ON) (S10201: Yes), this processing is finished as it is.

If it is not during the special symbol jackpot, that is, if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203k is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S10201: No), the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b It is determined whether or not the display mode is fluctuating (S10202), and if the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are not fluctuating (S10202: No), the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d The value (N1) and the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e are obtained (S10203).

Then, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S10204). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S10204: Yes), that is, if the second special symbol reserved ball for starting the variation (lottery) is secured. , the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted (S10205), and a reserved ball number command (special figure 2 pending ball number command) is set (S10206). After setting the special figure 2 reserved ball number command by the processing of S10206, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S10207). After that, time saving lottery processing 7 (S10208), special design determination processing 7 (S10209), processing of special design fluctuation pattern selection processing 10 (S10251) are executed, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S10204: No), the second special symbol reserved ball to start the variation (lottery) at the present time is selected. Since it is not secured, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S10211).

When it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S10211: No), the reserved ball of the first special symbol to start the variation (lottery) at the present time is secured. Since it is not in the state, this processing for executing the special symbol variation is terminated.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S10211: Yes), that is, in a state in which the reserved balls of the first special symbol for starting the variation (lottery) are secured. If there is, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted (S10212), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d changed by calculation ( Toku-zu 1 reserved ball number command) is set (S10213). After setting the special figure 1 reserved ball number command by the processing of S10213, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S10214). Thereafter, the special symbol determination process 7 (S10209) and the special symbol variation pattern selection process 10 (S10251) are executed, and this process ends.

In the process of S10202, if the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are fluctuating (S10202: Yes), whether the variation time of the variation display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b has elapsed It is determined whether or not (S10211). The variation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command). If the variation time has not passed (S10215: No), that is, if the current period is during the variation period of the special symbol, the display of the first symbol display device is updated (S10216), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S10215, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (S10215: Yes), the display mode (stop display) corresponding to the stop symbols of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is set. (S10217). The setting of the stop display is performed in advance by the special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (S10252), which will be described later with reference to FIG. Although detailed description is omitted, in the tenth control example, the stop display set in the process of S10217 is configured to be displayed on the first symbol display device for a predetermined period (0.5 seconds). In this way, by continuously displaying the display mode (stop display) of the stop pattern for a predetermined period, unlike the case where the changing pattern is displayed momentarily, the first display is surely stop-displayed to the player. The contents of the design can be recognized.

In the tenth control example, 0.5 seconds is set as the predetermined period (determined period) for displaying the stop mode of the first symbol described above, but other configurations may be used, for example, the first symbol. In the case of performing a blinking display that repeats the lighting state and the erased state to indicate that the is changing, the lighting display period (for example, 0.2 seconds) is longer A long period may be set as the fixed period described above. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to easily determine whether the first symbol is fluctuating or stopped (determined).

After the process of S10217 is completed, when the variable display of the special symbol being executed in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is started, the special symbol determined by the special symbol determination process 7 (see S10209 in FIG. 317) It is determined whether or not the symbol lottery result (this determination result) is a special symbol jackpot (S10218). When it is determined that the lottery result of this time is a special symbol jackpot (S10218: Yes), the jackpot start flag 203j and the jackpot medium flag 203k are set to ON (S10219), and the time reduction counter 203h is set to 0. (S10220), the process proceeds to S10221. In the process of S10221, a special figure confirmation command is set (S10221), and this process is terminated.

That is, in the tenth control example, as explained in the processing of S10220, when the special symbol jackpot is won, after the special symbol variation is completed (the final symbol display is completed), It is configured so that the time saving state ends at the timing until the jackpot game is started. In addition, the timing of ending the time saving state based on the winning of the special symbol jackpot may be a predetermined timing, and the special symbol (first symbol ), for example, the time-saving state may be ended at the timing of the start of fluctuation of the special symbols that won the jackpot, or at the timing when the special symbols are stopped and displayed (the timing when the confirmation display starts). You may end the time saving state. In addition, the time saving state may be ended at the timing of starting the jackpot game corresponding to the winning jackpot or after a predetermined period of time after the start of the jackpot game (for example, the round game start timing at which the variable winning device 65 is opened). Then, the time saving state may be terminated at the timing when the jackpot game is completed.

In addition, the end timing for ending the time saving state based on the winning of the special symbol jackpot (timing to satisfy the time saving end condition that is established when the special symbol jackpot is won) is selected from the above-mentioned multiple timings. Only one may be set in advance, or the time saving state may be terminated at different timings according to the jackpot type of the winning jackpot.

By configuring in this way, for example, when the time saving state is ended at the timing of starting the fluctuation of the special symbol, the time saving state ends for the player (for example, the number of times the special symbol fluctuates is the specified number of times ( It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the normal state is set after reaching 100 times or the time saving state is ended by winning a jackpot during the time saving state. Therefore, the player can pay attention to the content of the performance display (variation display) of the third pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation executed when the time saving state ends, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, by setting the timing at which the time-saving end condition is satisfied for each of the multiple jackpot types (the timing at which the time-saving state ends when the jackpot is won), a special pattern based on the end timing of the time-saving state It is possible to prevent the player from grasping the lottery result (determination result). In addition, if the player identifies the timing when the time saving state ends in part of the timing when the time saving end condition set for each of the multiple jackpot types is satisfied, the lottery result (discrimination result) of this special symbol will be A timing for notifying a player of a big win, that is, a time-saving end timing dedicated to a big win at which a time-saving state ends only when a time-saving end condition established by winning a big win is established may be provided.

By configuring in this way, by grasping the timing at which the time saving state ends, it is possible to quickly know that the jackpot has been won, and the period of being immersed in a sense of superiority can be lengthened. In addition, in order to achieve such an effect more, the time saving end timing dedicated to the jackpot is set in the first half period of the variation period from the execution of the special symbol variation to the end of the special symbol variation. Good to configure.

On the other hand, in the process of S10218, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big win (S10218: No), it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small win (S10222). In the process of S10222, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a small hit (S10222: Yes), a small win start setting process 7 is executed (S10223), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S10222, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit (S10222: No), the small win start setting process 7 (S10223) is skipped, and this process ends.

As described above, in the special symbol variation process 10 (S10104 in FIG. 391) of the tenth control example, prioritizing (previously) whether or not the lottery (variation) condition for the first special symbol is satisfied, It is configured to determine whether or not the lottery (fluctuation) condition for the second special symbol is established (processing of S10204 in FIG. 391). This is because the second special symbol, which is an advantageous special symbol for the player, can be varied (easily varied) when the time-saving state is set as the game state, and cannot be varied (easily changed) when the normal state is set. This is because the second special symbol that is difficult to change) is configured to be a special symbol that is more difficult to execute a change (lottery) than the first special symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, in the unlikely event that the lottery (variation) condition for the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) condition for the second special symbol are set at the same time (timer interrupt processing of the main controller 110 (Fig. 314) (including an error of 2 milliseconds, which is the processing period of reference)), the variation of the first special symbol is started in preference to the second special symbol, which is difficult to perform variation (lottery) As a result, the player feels uncomfortable. Furthermore, in the tenth control example, the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery (fluctuation) of the first special symbol so that it is easier for the player to win the lottery result. ), the lottery (variation) condition for the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) condition for the second special symbol are simultaneous (timer interrupt processing of main controller 110 (see FIG. 314) (including an error of 2 milliseconds, which is the processing period of ), when the variation (lottery) is difficult to execute, the first special symbol is prioritized over the second special symbol. There was a problem that it gave more discomfort.

On the other hand, in the tenth control example, when the process of starting the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed, the value added to the player is high (the winning probability of the small hit is the first special symbol The lottery (variation) condition of the special symbol (the second special symbol in the tenth control example), which is higher than the symbol and is difficult to actually execute the lottery (variation), is configured to be preferentially (firstly) discriminated. Therefore, the occurrence of the above-described problem can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 392, special symbol variation pattern selection processing 10 (S10251) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 392 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special symbol variation pattern selection process 10 (S10251). As shown in FIG. 392, the special symbol variation pattern selection process 10 (S10251) is configured to execute the update process 10 (S8272) before setting the start of the special symbol variation. By configuring in this way, the time saving state can be terminated before the special symbol variation is started.

When the special symbol variation pattern selection process 10 (S10251) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win, that is, whether or not a special symbol big win is set (S8201). . In the process of S8201, when it is determined that a special symbol jackpot is set (S8201: Yes), the jackpot A is determined as the jackpot type (S8271), and the process proceeds to S8203.

On the other hand, in the process of S8201, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery result is not a big hit (S8201: No), whether or not the special symbol lottery result is a small hit, that is, the special symbol small hit It is determined whether or not it is set (S8209). If it is determined that the small hit of the special symbol is set in the process of S8209 (S8209: Yes), the small hit type is determined by referring to the small hit type selection 10 table 202if (see FIG. 387) (S8273 ), the process proceeds to S8203.

Also, in the processing of S8209, if it is determined that the special symbol small hit is not set, that is, the special symbol deviation is set (S8209: No), the processing of S8273 is skipped, and the processing of S8203 is skipped. Go to processing.

In the processing of S8203, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the special symbol execution area is acquired (S8203). Next, the current game state is specified based on the information stored in the game state storage area 203g, and the data table corresponding to the specified game state is read from the variation pattern selection 7 table 202fd (S8252).

Then, based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 acquired in the process of S8203 and the data table of the variation pattern selection 7 table 202fd (see FIG. 308 (a)) read out in the process of S8252, the variation pattern is selected ( S8205), based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S8205, to set the special figure variation pattern command (S8206). The special symbol variation pattern command set here includes the lottery result of the special symbol lottery and the information indicating the variation time of the special symbol, and the main control device 110 Main processing External output processing Voice lamp control Output to device 113 .

Next, a special figure stop type command indicating a special symbol stop symbol is set (S8207), and update processing 10 is executed (S8272). A detailed description of update processing 10 (S8272) will be given later with reference to FIG. Then, the first symbol display device 37 sets the start of variation of the special symbol (S8208), and ends this process. The special symbol stop type command set in the process of S8207 includes information indicating the type of stop symbol indicating the result of this special symbol variation, that is, the rough type such as reach off or off that does not become reach. It is output to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output processing of the main processing of the main control device 110 .

It should be noted that, without being limited to this, for example, it is also possible to configure the update process 10 (S8272) to be executed before the process of S8252 in FIG. 392 is executed. By configuring in this way, since it is possible to end the time saving state before selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation, for example, different variation patterns can be selected between the normal state and the time saving state. In the selected pachinko machine 10, it is possible to suppress the determination whether or not the big hit determination of the special symbol lottery is executed during the time saving state based on the selected variation pattern.

FIG. 319 is a flowchart showing the details of update processing 10 (S8272). In this update process 10 (S8272), as shown in FIG. 319, the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted, it is determined whether the time saving end condition is satisfied, and the process of ending the time saving state based on the determination result (time saving A process of clearing the values of various counters referred to when determining whether or not the termination condition is satisfied is executed.

When the update process 10 (S8272) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0, that is, whether the current time is in the time saving (S10601). In the process of S10601, when the value of the time saving counter 203h is not larger than 0 (is 0), that is, when it is determined that it is not in the time saving (S10601: No), this process is finished as it is. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0, that is, if it is determined that the time saving is in progress (S10601: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted by 1 (S10602), and the process proceeds to S10603.

In the process of S10603, the remaining time reduction command which shows the value of the time reduction counter 203h changed by calculation (1 subtraction was carried out) is set (S10603). The remaining time reduction command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S11501) of the main processing 7 (see FIG. 325), the sound lamp control device 113 sent to.

After that, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 (S10604). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 (S10604: Yes), the game state is set to the normal state (S10605), and then a state command indicating that the current game state is the normal state is set. (S10607), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S10604, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not 0 (S10604: No), this process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the special symbol variation pattern selection process 10 (see FIG. 392).

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device 113 in the tenth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 394 to 395, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound ramp control device 113 in the tenth control example will be described. This tenth control example differs from the above-described seventh control example in that the pending ball number command process 10 (see FIG. 394) and the special figure 2 effect mode setting process 10 (see FIG. 395) are executed. are otherwise identical. The same processing contents are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted. It should be noted that, with respect to portions where detailed descriptions of elements that are the same as those described in each of the control examples and embodiments described above are omitted, the contents described in each of the control examples and embodiments described above are omitted. It is adapted. In addition, the technical ideas described in each control example and each embodiment described above are naturally applied to the tenth control example, and are described in each control example and each embodiment described above. Modified examples and additional examples are naturally applied to the tenth control example.

First, with reference to FIG. 394, the pending ball number command process 10 (S20101) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 394 is a flow chart showing the contents of the pending ball count command process 10 (S20101).

When the pending ball count command process 10 (S20101) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the executed flag 223ic is ON (S20102). If it is determined that the execution completion flag 223ic is ON (S20102: Yes), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the execution completion flag 223ic is not ON (S20102: No), the hold information is extracted from the command received from the main controller 110 this time, and the corresponding value is set to the corresponding special symbol hold ball number counter. (Special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b or special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b1) (S20103).

Next, it is determined whether the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b1 is 4 (S20104). When it is determined that the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b1 is not 4 (S20104: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203b1 is 4 (S20104: Yes), the second special symbol reserved storage information is read from the winning information storage area 223a (S20105). Then, it is determined whether or not there is reserved storage information corresponding to the small hit C in the read reserved storage information (S20106). When it is determined that there is no information corresponding to the small hit C in the read reservation storage information (S20106: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S20106, if it is determined that there is information corresponding to the small hit C from the read reservation storage information in the process of S20105 (S20106: Yes), whether the current game state is the second time saving state It is determined (S20107). If it is determined that the current gaming state is the second time saving state (S20107: Yes), the notification target selection table 222ib (see FIG. 390 (b)) determines the small hit C suspension to be notified (S20108 ), and the process proceeds to S20109. On the other hand, in the process of S20107, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not in the second probability variable state (S20107: No), the last acquired small hit C suspension is determined as an announcement target (S20112), S20109 to process.

In the process of S20109, S20108, or S20112 determines the display mode indicating the number of consecutive wins corresponding to the storage position of the small winning C reservation determined (S20109), and adds the notification target information to the winning information storage area 223a. (S20110). Then, the executed flag 223ic is set to ON (S20111), and this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 395, the special figure 2 effect mode setting process 10 (S14994) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 395 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 effect mode setting process 10 (S14994).

When the special figure 2 effect mode setting process 10 (S14994) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the game state is the time saving state (S19551). When it is determined that the gaming state is not the time saving state (S19551: No), the processing of S19552 to S19555 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S19556. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game state is the time saving state (S19551: Yes), it is determined whether the current variation is the final variation of the time saving (S19552). If it is determined that the current variation is not the final variation of the time saving (S19552: No), the processing of S19553 to SS19555 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S19556.

On the other hand, in the processing of S19552, when it is determined that the current variation is the final variation of the time saving state (S19552: Yes), the time saving state is read from the state storage area 223ia (S19554). Then, it is determined whether the read time saving state is the second time saving state (S19554). The final variation effect selection table (see FIG. 390(a)) that has been read out is referred to determine the effect mode (S19555), and the process proceeds to S19556. On the other hand, when it is determined that the read gaming state is not the second time saving state (S19554: No), the process of S19555 is skipped and the process proceeds to S19556.

Next, it is determined whether or not the executed flag 223ic is on (S19556). When it is determined that the executed flag 223ic is ON (S19556: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current target variation is a notification target (S19557). If it is determined that the target variation of this time is to be notified (S19557: Yes), the executed flag 223ic is set to OFF (S19558), and a display variation pattern command indicating the determined effect mode is set (S19559 ), the process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S19556, if it is determined that the executed flag 223ic is not ON (S19556: No), or if it is determined in the processing of S19557 that the current target variation is not the notification target (S19557: No ), the processing of S19559 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

<Eleventh control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 396 to 405. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example, like the seventh control example described above, is designed so that a small win can be won in some cases where the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is not a big win (lost). It has a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type) that can execute a big winning game by entering a game ball into a specific area during a small winning game executed based on winning a small winning. are doing.

The pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example is significantly different from the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described seventh control example in that the player is in a normal state (low-probability state for special symbols, low-probability state for normal symbols). probability state), the game for executing the first special symbol lottery (left-handed game) and the game for executing the second special symbol lottery (right-handed game) can be selected. , The game property of the time saving state is differentiated between the case where the time saving state is set based on the result of the first special symbol lottery and the case where the time saving state is set based on the result of the second special symbol lottery. They are different in that respect.

In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described seventh control example, during the normal state, the left-handed game aiming at entering the game ball into the first ball entrance 64, which triggers the execution of the first special symbol lottery, is most advantageous to the player. The game board 13 is constructed so that the first special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than the second special symbol lottery in the normal state so that the game method can be as simple as possible. Then, when the time-saving state is set, the right-handed game aiming to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640, which is the trigger for executing the second special symbol lottery, is the most advantageous game method for the player. Thus, the game board 13 is configured so that the second special symbol lottery is easier to execute than the first special symbol lottery in the time saving state.

In other words, the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described seventh control example predefines a game method that is advantageous to the player according to the set game state, and the player executes a game according to the game method. was configured to With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. had the problem of getting tired of

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example executes a game (left-handed game) aiming to execute the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery in a state where the normal state is set. It is configured so that the player can select a game (right-handed game) aimed at. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to select the game method, so that the game can be executed in various game methods. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

In addition, in the eleventh control example, in the normal state, when a left-handed game is executed to execute the first special symbol lottery, and when a right-handed game is executed to execute the second special symbol lottery, it can be acquired. Although the expected value of the number of game balls (number of prize balls) is about the same, the process of obtaining the number of game balls (number of prize balls) for the expected value is different. Briefly, when a left-handed game is executed, it is relatively difficult to set a time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, but once the time-saving state is set, the time-saving state continues. When a right-handed game is executed, it is easier to set a time-saving state than when a left-handed game is executed, and the time-saving state is difficult to continue.

By configuring in this way, the player can select a game that suits his/her convenience, so that it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play.

First, referring to FIG. 396, the configuration of the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh control example will be described. FIG. 396 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh control example. As shown in FIG. 396, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh control example differs from the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example (see FIG. 294). (the area on the right side of the variable display unit 80 where the game ball fired by the right-handed game flows down) is different, and the index (display mode) is attached to the upper side of the game area formed on the game board 13. It should be noted that the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those of the seventh control example described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 396, among the game areas formed on the game board 13 (the area through which the fired game ball can pass), the upper area (above the variable display unit 80) has a game method (left-handed game , a right-handed game), a turtle-like mode k1 and a shark-like mode k2 are attached. Mode k1 is a mode corresponding to a left-handed game, and by shooting a game ball aiming at mode k1, the player can play a left-handed game. attached to the position.

On the other hand, mode k2 is a mode corresponding to a right-handed game, and by shooting a game ball aiming at mode k2, the player can play a right-handed game. attached to the other side. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to adjust the game method while following the trajectory of the actually shot game ball rather than the operation content (rotation amount) of the operation handle 22. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

It should be noted that another technique may be used as a technique for informing the player of the game method being executed. A detection means capable of detecting a game ball is provided in the left area (the game area formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80) where the ball can flow down, and a left-handed game is started based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means. Informing means for informing the player of the execution may be provided, or in the right area (game area formed on the right side of the variable display unit 80) where the game ball fired by the right-handed game may flow down A detection means capable of detecting a game ball may be provided, and notification means may be provided for notifying the player that a right-handed game is being executed based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means.

Next, referring to FIG. 396, the configuration of the right area of the game board 13 will be described. In this eleventh control example, a second ball entrance 1640 and a right second ball entrance 1641 are used as entrances (starting entrances) for executing the second special symbol lottery in the right area of the game board 13. and are arranged.

The second ball entrance 1640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 1640a that opens and closes in a winning game (normal winning game) executed based on winning in a normal symbol lottery. A state in which it is easy to enter a game ball (normal pattern high probability state) and a state in which it is difficult to enter a game ball (normal pattern low probability state) can be created according to the game state. In addition, the contents of the normal symbol lottery and the operation control contents of the electric accessory 1640a that is opened and closed in the winning game (normal game winning game) executed based on winning in the normal symbol lottery are described above. Since it is the same as the contents of the electric accessory control explained in each control example, the detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, the right second ball entrance 1641 is arranged so that the game balls fired by the right-handed game can enter at a constant rate regardless of the set game state. In the control example, the right second ball entrance 1641 is arranged so that the rate at which the game ball launched by the left-handed game enters the first ball entrance 64 and the same degree of ball entrance rate. there is By configuring in this way, the first special symbol lottery executed by the left-handed game in the normal state and the second special symbol lottery executed by the right-handed game can be executed at the same frequency. Therefore, regardless of which game method the player selects, the game can be played without discomfort.

In addition, when the time saving state is set, by executing the right-handed game, it is based on the high probability state of the normal pattern so that the game ball can be easily entered into the second ball entrance 1640. Since the normal pattern lottery and the normal pattern winning game that opens and closes the electric accessory 1640a are executed, the right-handed game is an advantageous game method for the player during the time saving state. In addition, the contents of the normal symbol lottery based on the normal symbol high probability state and the normal symbol winning game that opens and closes the electric accessory 1640a are the same as the above-described seventh control example, so a detailed description thereof will be given. omitted.

Further, below the right side area of the game board 13, a V winning device 1650 that is opened during the small winning game and a variable winning device 1065 that is opened during the big winning game are arranged. This V winning device 1650 has the same content as the second variable winning device 650 (see FIG. 294) in the seventh control example described above, and the variable winning device 1650 is the same as the variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 294) in the seventh control example described above. 294), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the eleventh control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 398 to 401. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh control example differs from the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example described above in that the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 are partially configured, and the voice lamp The difference is that the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the control device 113 are partially changed, and the rest is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 398, the electrical configuration of main controller 110 in the eleventh control example will be described. FIG. 398(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the eleventh control example. As shown in FIG. 395(a), the ROM 202 of this control example replaces the first hit random number 7 table 202fa with the ROM 202 of the above-described seventh control example (see FIG. 304(a)). The random number 11 table 202ja is replaced with the small winning type selection 7 table 202ff, the small winning type selection 11 table 202jf is replaced with the time saving random number 7 table 202fh, and the time saving random number 11 table 202jh is replaced with the time saving type selection 7 table 202fi. The difference is that a time saving type selection 11 table 202ii is provided, and the rest is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted. For convenience of explanation, some of the various configurations shown in the ROM 202 (see FIG. 304(a)) of the seventh control example are omitted in FIG. 385(a). , are omitted from the drawing except for configurations that are difficult to apply.

The first winning random number 11 table 202ja replaces the above-described first winning random number 7 table 202fa (see FIG. 305(a)) with the special symbol 2 random number 7 table 202fa2 referred to during the second special symbol lottery. The difference is that a special symbol 2 random number 11 table 202ja2 is provided, and the rest is the same. Detailed descriptions of the same contents are omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 399(a), the contents defined in the special symbol 2 random number 11 table 202ja2 will be described. FIG. 399(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 2 random number 11 table 202ja2. As shown in FIG. 399(a), the special symbol 2 random number 11 table 202ja2 is a data table referred to when executing the winning lottery for the second special symbol (special symbol 2).

Specifically, among the range of "0 to 999" that the value of the first random number counter C1 can take, the "jackpot" is defined for the range of "0 to 4", and the value of "5 to 54" A "small hit" is stipulated. That is, in the eleventh control example, the probability of winning a big win in the special drawing 2 lottery is about 1/200 (5/1000), and the probability of winning a small win is 1/20 (50/1000).

The small hit type selection 11 table 202jf is a data table referred to when selecting the small hit type set when the small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery). This small hit type selection 11 table 202jf differs from the small hit type selection 7 table 202ff (see FIG. 307) of the seventh control example described above in that the selection ratio of the defined small hit type is changed. are otherwise identical. Detailed descriptions of the same elements are omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 399(b), the small hit type selection 11 table 202jf will be described. Figure 399 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small hit type selection 11 table 202jf. The value of the obtained small hit type counter C5 is defined for the range of "0 to 4", "small hit A (V passage time jackpot A)", and "small hit for the range of "5 to 99" Hit B (jackpot B when passing V)” is defined.

Time saving random number 11 table 202jh is a data table referred to in time saving winning determination (time saving lottery) executed in a special symbol lottery, and the above time saving random number 7 table 202fh (see FIG. 310 (a)) vis-a-vis, differing in that the decision value corresponding to time saving election is made different, other than that is the same. Descriptions of the same contents are omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 400, the content defined in the random number 11 table 202jh per time saving will be described. FIG. 400 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the random number 11 table 202jh per time saving. As shown in Figure 400 (a), in the time saving per random number 11 table 202jh, the determination value of time saving winning determination is defined only for the normal state (low probability state of special symbols and normal symbols). , The value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is defined for the range of "900 to 949", the determination value for short-time winning. In other words, the number of possible values of the first per random number counter C1 is 1000, and the number of judgment values that are determined to be short-time winning is 50. Therefore, the probability of short-time winning during the normal state is 1/ 20 (50/1000). In addition, as shown in FIG. 400(a), in a game state other than the normal state, there is no time-saving winning. It should be noted that, without being limited to this, it may be constructed so as to be elected in a short time even in a game state other than the normal state with a low probability (for example, 1/1000).

The time saving type selection 11 table 202ji is a data table referred to when setting the time saving end condition for the time saving state set when the time saving is won in the special symbol lottery, and corresponds to the value of the time saving type selection counter CC1. The type of working hours is stipulated. In the eleventh control example, different types of time saving are selected depending on whether the first special symbol lottery wins the time saving lottery or the second special symbol lottery wins the time saving lottery.

Here, with reference to Drawing 400 (b), the contents of time saving classification selection 11 table 202ji are explained. Drawing 400 (b) is a figure showing the contents prescribed in time saving classification selection 11 table 202ji. As shown in FIG. 400 (b), in the time saving type selection 11 table 202ji, the time saving type is defined in correspondence with the type of the special symbol that has been won and the value of the obtained time saving type selection counter CC1. The time saving end condition corresponding to the time saving type that is being done, and the presence or absence of time saving limit setting are defined.

Specifically, when the time reduction is won in the first special symbol lottery, the time reduction A11 is defined as the time reduction type for the entire range ("0 to 99") of the acquired time reduction type selection counter CC1. Then, as a time saving end condition corresponding to the time saving A, a time saving end condition is defined in which the time saving counter 203h (first time saving end condition) is set to "200" and the time saving limit setting "none" is set. That is, a time saving end condition is set in which the time saving state ends when the process of updating the value of the special symbol working time saving counter 203h is executed 200 times.

On the other hand, when the time reduction is won in the second special symbol lottery, the time reduction B11 is defined as the time reduction type for the entire range ("0 to 99") of the obtained time reduction type selection counter CC1. Then, as a time saving end condition corresponding to the time saving B, a time saving end condition is defined in which "200" is set in the time saving counter 203h (first time saving end condition) and the time saving limit setting "yes" is set. In other words, when the process of updating the value of the special symbol time saving counter 203h is executed 200 times, the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state is set, and the number of times the time saving state is set continuously is a predetermined number of times (10 times), the time-saving limit is reached and the normal state is set.

Therefore, when the time-saving lottery is won in the special symbol lottery, the first special symbol lottery in which the time-saving limit is not set can set the time-saving state more advantageous to the player than the second special symbol lottery. Configure. As a result, in the normal state where the time-saving lottery is executed, a big winning lottery and a short-time lottery advantageous to the player are executed by playing the left-handed game, or the big winning lottery and the small winning lottery are executed by playing the right-handed game. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to select whether to execute the time-saving lottery that is disadvantageous to the player, and to provide the player with the pleasure of selecting the game method.

Returning to FIG. 398(b), the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example will be described. FIG. 398(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example. As shown in FIG. 398(b), in this eleventh control example, the RAM 203 (see FIG. 304(b)) in the above-described seventh control example differs in that a time saving limit number counter 203ja is added, Other than that, they are identical. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The time saving limit number counter 203ja is a counter for measuring the number of times the high probability state of the normal symbol is continuously set. Here, the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example does not set the low-probability state of the normal symbols except during the jackpot game, and the number of times the high-probability state of the normal symbols is continuously set (normal Continuous setting number) is configured to be measurable, and when the normal continuous setting number reaches a predetermined number (10 times) (when the time reduction limit is reached), a high probability state of normal symbols can be set. is established, the processing (shortening time limit processing) for forcibly setting the low probability state of the normal symbol can be executed, and the game state (first probability variable state) advantageous to the player ) are prevented from being excessively set continuously.

In this time-saving limit number counter 203ja, when the time-saving winning is won by the second special symbol lottery in a state where the normal symbol low probability state is set, "10" is set as an initial value (see S18182 in FIG. 402). ). Then, the counter value is decremented each time the normal continuous set number of times is updated (see S13104 in FIG. 405), and the counter value after the subtraction is referenced in the determination process of whether or not the time reduction limit has been reached (Fig. 405 S13107). Then, the value of the time saving limit number counter 203ja is cleared to 0 when the time saving limit is reached or when the jackpot type being executed sets the low probability state of normal symbols.

Information indicating the value of the time saving limit number counter 203ja is set as a state command to be output to the sound lamp control device 113 in the jackpot ending process.

In addition, in this eleventh control example, as described above, the value of the time reduction limit number counter 203ja for measuring the normal continuous setting number is set to the normal continuous setting number until the time reduction limit is reached, and the normal continuous setting number is set. is subtracted, the counter value is subtracted, but without being limited to this, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the value of the time reduction limit number counter 203ja is set to "1". After that, the value of the time saving limit number counter 203ja is incremented by 1 each time the number of normal continuous setting times is updated, and the value of the time saving limit number counter 203ja after addition reaches the time saving limit. It may be configured to determine whether it is a value (for example, 10) and to execute the time saving limit process when the determination result indicates that the time saving limit has been reached.

When configured in this way, for example, when the second special condition (for example, winning a jackpot of a specific jackpot type) is established within a period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set continuously, the time reduction limit Even if it is configured to change the establishment condition (reaching condition) of, the time saving limit is reached by simply comparing the changed establishment condition (reaching condition) with the value of the time saving limit number counter 203ja. It is possible to determine whether or not

In addition, when the special conditions in the above-mentioned example content are established, the conditions for establishment of the time reduction limit may be changed to make it more difficult to be established than before the change, or changed to be easier to be established than before the change. You can In addition, when the condition (arrival condition) of the time saving limit is changed, it is immediately determined whether the value of the time saving limit number counter 203ja at the present time satisfies the condition (arrival condition) of the time saving limit. It may be configured, and even if the establishment condition (reaching condition) of the time saving limit is changed, the judgment of whether or not the establishment condition (reaching condition) of the time saving limit number counter 203ja is satisfied is the end of the jackpot game It may be configured to run at times. In particular, in the latter case, the high probability state of the normal pattern is set while suppressing the end of the high probability state of the normal pattern immediately when the conditions for establishing the time saving limit (arrival conditions) are changed. Since the jackpot winning of the special symbol lottery is guaranteed at least (one time) during the period, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play.

In the eleventh control example, as a trigger for setting a high probability state of normal symbols, a trigger for setting a value in the time saving limit number counter 203ja (a trigger for setting a saving time limit) and a trigger for not setting (not setting a saving time limit Opportunity) and are provided. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in what trigger the time saving state was set.

Furthermore, in the eleventh control example, even if the normal pattern high probability state (time saving state) is set after the end of the jackpot game, the time saving limit number counter 203ja is set according to the trigger for the jackpot game execution. It is configured to provide a case where the value is updated (subtracted) and a case where it is not updated (subtracted). Specifically, when a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery, the value of the time saving limit number counter 203ja is updated even if the time saving state is set after the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot winning is finished. If a small win is won in a special symbol lottery without doing so, the value of the time saving limit number counter 203ja is updated (subtracted) when a time saving state is set after the big win game executed based on the small winning win is completed. ).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make a player disadvantageous to the opportunity (big win winning) which is difficult to be realized as a chance to execute the big winning game (big winning winning) and to the player who is easy to achieve (small winning). Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game while aiming to win the big win in the time-saving state in which it is easy to win the small win. In addition, it aims to establish the execution opportunity of the big winning game that is difficult to be established in a period until the execution opportunity of the big winning game that is easy to be established is executed a predetermined number of times (10 times), and eventually, the execution opportunity of the big winning game that is easy to be established. It is possible to provide the player with a novel game property of expecting that the is not established.

In addition, in the eleventh control example, as a privilege when an opportunity (jackpot winning) that is difficult to be established as an opportunity to execute a jackpot game is established, a privilege is given that does not update the value of the time reduction limit number counter 203ja. However, without being limited to this, for example, when an opportunity (jackpot election) that is difficult to be established as an opportunity to execute a jackpot game is established, the value of the time reduction limit number counter 203ja is increased or returned to the initial value. may be configured to be executable.

Next, with reference to FIG. 401, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eleventh control example will be described. FIG. 401 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the eleventh control example. As shown in FIG. 401, the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eleventh control example is the RAM 223 of the seventh control example described above (see FIG. 311 (b)). The difference is that a flag 223jb is provided. Other configurations are the same, and the same contents are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

The remaining time reduction counter 223ja is a counter in which a value corresponding to the value of the reduction time limit counter 203ja set in the main controller 110 is set, and the period until the reduction time limit is reached (normal pattern high probability state is for indicating the number of remaining times that can be set in succession).

This remaining time reduction counter 223ja sets the time reduction limit in the limit information update processing executed when a limit related command is received in the state command processing executed in the command determination processing of the sound lamp control device 113. A value (10) corresponding to when a command including information about is received is set, and when a time saving limit number of times command is received, the already set value is subtracted by 1.

The value of this remaining short time number counter 223ja is referred to when executing the processing for determining the effect mode in each game state. Then, in the state command processing of the voice lamp control device 113, it is determined that the command indicating that the low probability state of the normal symbol is set is received in the game state update processing executed when the game state command is received. value is cleared (set) to 0.

The time saving limit flag 223jb is a flag for indicating that the time saving limit has been reached, and in the state command processing executed in the command determination processing, in the limit information update processing executed when a limit related command is received , is set to ON when a time-saving limit reached command is received to indicate that the time-saving limit has been reached.

<About control processing contents of the main controller in the eleventh control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 402 to 405, the contents of the control processing executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the eleventh control example will be described. In the eleventh control example, compared to the above-described seventh control example, it is greatly possible to set an upper limit to the period in which the game state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player across the jackpot game continues. are different.

First, the contents of the time saving lottery process 11 (S10288) will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 402 is the flowchart which shows the processing contents of time saving lottery processing 11 (S10288). As shown in FIG. 402, the time saving lottery process 11 (S10288) is, for the time saving lottery process 7 described above (see S10208 in FIG. 316), when it is determined that the time saving lottery was won (S18105: Yes), this time saving lottery process It is determined whether the winning is a time-saving election in the second special symbol lottery (S18181), and when it is determined that it is a time-saving election in the second special symbol lottery (S18181: Yes), the value of the time-saving limit number counter 203ja. is set to "10" (S18182).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to set the time saving limit only when the time saving lottery in the normal state wins the time saving lottery and the special symbol type winning the time saving win is the second special symbol. becomes.

Next, with reference to FIG. 403, the contents of the jackpot control process 11 (S11574) will be described. FIG. 403 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot control process 11 (S11574). This jackpot control process 11 (S11574) is different from the jackpot control process in each of the control examples described above in that the jackpot end process 11 (S11651) is executed at the end timing of the ending effect, and the rest is the same. Therefore, detailed description is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 404, the processing contents of the jackpot end processing 11 (S11651) will be described. FIG. 404 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot ending process 11 (S11651). In this jackpot end processing 11 (S11651), which is executed when the jackpot game ends, the processing for updating the time reduction limit and the game state set after the jackpot game ends are determined, and according to the determined contents. A process for setting the game state is executed.

When the jackpot end processing 11 (S11651) is executed, first, the time saving limit update processing is executed (S13001). Details of the time saving limit update process (S13001) will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, information indicating the game state set after the end of the jackpot is stored in the game state storage area (S13002), the number of time reductions corresponding to the type of jackpot being executed is determined (S13003), and the determined number of time reductions is counted in the time reduction counter 203h. (S13004), set the time saving setting information command corresponding to the setting content (S13005), set the game state after the jackpot and the state command corresponding to the value of the time saving limit number counter 203ja (S13006), End this process.

Next, the details of the time saving limit update process (S13001), which is one process in the jackpot end 11 process (see S11651 in FIG. 404), will be described. FIG. 405 is a flow chart showing the contents of the time saving limit update process (S13001). In this time saving limit update process (S13001), based on the winning jackpot type and time saving type, the process for setting the high probability state of the normal design and the upper limit value that can continuously set the high probability state of the normal design and update the remaining number of times with respect to the set upper limit.

In the time saving limit update process (S13001), first, the big hit type of the special symbol being executed is read out (S13101). Next, it is determined whether the executed jackpot type read out in the process of S13101 is the jackpot type in which the high probability state (time saving state) of normal symbols is set after the jackpot ends (S13102). After the end of the jackpot, when it is determined that it is a jackpot type in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set (S13102: Yes), it is determined whether or not this jackpot game is a jackpot game based on a small hit (S13103). ).

In addition, in the process of S13103, the timing for executing the big winning game is determined based on the information based on the past game status stored in the game status storage area 203g. In the processing of S13103, when it is determined that it is a big winning game based on winning a small winning (S13103: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the time reduction limit number counter 203ja is greater than 0 (S13104). When the value of the time saving limit number counter 203ja is not a value greater than 0, that is, when it is determined that the probability state of the normal symbol at the time of winning the jackpot is a low probability state (S13104: No), the time saving limit number counter 203 Since the value which can set the high probability state of the normal design continuously to the value is not set, this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S13104, if it is determined that the value of the time saving limit number counter 203ja is greater than 0 (S13104: Yes), the value of the time saving limit number counter 203ja is subtracted by 1 (S13106), then , It is determined whether or not the value of the time saving limit number counter 203ja after the subtraction is 0 (S13107). When it is determined that the value of the time saving limit counter 203ja after the subtraction is 0 (S13107: Yes), the high probability state of the normal symbol has reached the upper limit value that can be set continuously, so the time saving limit reaching flag is turned on. (S13108), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S13107, if it is determined that the value of the reduced time limit number counter 203ja is not 0 (S13107: No), this processing ends.

As described above, in the eleventh control example, in a state where the normal state is set, the game (left-handed game) aiming to execute the first special symbol lottery and the execution of the second special symbol lottery are aimed. A game (right-handed game) can be selected by the player. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to select the game method, so that the game can be executed in various game methods. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

In addition, in the eleventh control example, in the normal state, when a left-handed game is executed to execute the first special symbol lottery, and when a right-handed game is executed to execute the second special symbol lottery, it can be acquired. Although the expected value of the number of game balls (number of prize balls) is about the same, the process of obtaining the number of game balls (number of prize balls) for the expected value is different. Briefly, when a left-handed game is executed, it is relatively difficult to set a time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, but once the time-saving state is set, the time-saving state continues. When a right-handed game is executed, it is easier to set a time-saving state than when a left-handed game is executed, and the time-saving state is difficult to continue.

By configuring in this way, the player can select a game that suits his/her convenience, so that it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play.

Furthermore, in the eleventh control example, when the left-handed game is executed in the normal state, the player is made to play a game aiming at winning a big hit in the special symbol lottery and a game aiming at short-time winning, and a right-handed game is played. When executed, the player is made to play a game aimed at winning a big win, a small win, or a short-time win in the special symbol lottery. That is, in terms of ease of execution of the jackpot game, the right-handed game is configured to make it easier for the player to execute the jackpot game than the left-handed game. On the other hand, when the first special symbol lottery executed by the left-handed game is won, the time-saving state is more advantageous to the player than when the second special symbol lottery executed by the right-handed game is won. Configured to be configurable. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of selecting a game method.

In the eleventh control example, an upper limit (time reduction limit) can be set to the number of times the high probability state of the normal symbol is set continuously. As a result, it is possible to suppress excessive continuation of game states that are advantageous to the player. Furthermore, in the eleventh control example, it is configured such that determination as to whether or not to set the time reduction limit is executed in accordance with the trigger that the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. That is, it is configured to be able to create a case where the time reduction limit is set and a case where it is not set by the setting opportunity of the high probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, the player can play the game while expecting that the time saving state will be set without setting the time saving limit.

Furthermore, even if the time reduction limit is set, depending on the execution opportunity of the jackpot game, the number of times that the high probability state of the normal symbol is continuously set is updated and the case of not updating. It is configured so that it can be created. Therefore, it is possible for the player to play the game expecting that the jackpot game will be executed without updating the remaining number of times until the time limit is reached.

In addition, in the eleventh control example, the upper limit (time reduction limit) can be set for the number of times that the high probability state of the normal symbol is set in succession. Another configuration may be used as a function for suppressing continuous setting. For example, if the pachinko machine 10 is capable of setting a high probability state of special symbols, the high probability state of special symbols may be set. An upper limit (probability variation limit) may be configured to be settable for the number of times set in succession.

In addition, the upper limit for the number of times that "special pattern high probability state" is set continuously (special pattern continuous setting number of times), and the number of times that "normal pattern high probability state" is set continuously (normal pattern continuous setting number ) may be configured to be updateable and manageable separately. is determined to be set, if the number of continuous special patterns reaches the upper limit (when the probability limit is reached), the "high probability state of special patterns" is changed to "low probability of special patterns state” and changed “time saving state (low probability state of special pattern, high probability state of normal pattern)”, when the number of times of normal pattern continuous setting reaches the upper limit (when reaching the time saving limit), “normal pattern ``High probability state of normal symbol'' changed to ``Low probability state of normal symbol'' ``Second probability variable state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol)'' may be configured to be settable.

In addition, the number of times that the high probability state of the special design can be set continuously (the number of times of special design continuous setting) is more than the number of times that the high probability state of the normal design can be set continuously (the number of times of normal design continuous setting) It is configured as follows. In addition, among the special pattern high probability period in which the special pattern high probability state is set continuously, the first probability variable state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol high probability state) is set 1st More prize balls may be given to the player than in the second period in which the second variable probability state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set. .

By configuring in this way, when the jackpot is elected in a state where the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set, and the first probability variable state is set, first the first A period will be set until it reaches|attains a time saving limit, and a 2nd period will be set after that.

Therefore, after the first game in which many prize balls can be given to the player is executed for the first period, the second game in which it is difficult to give prize balls can be executed for the second period. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the first game is excessively continuously executed and excessive prize balls are awarded to the player.

In addition, the length of the first period during which the first game can be executed is the period from when the first probability variable state is set until the time reduction limit is reached (until the second probability variable state is set) (10 jackpot winnings) ), and the length of the second period in which the second game can be executed may be set to the period from when the second variable probability state is set until the variable probability limit is reached (for 30 jackpot winnings). good. In this way, the length of the first period and the second period set within the special figure high probability period can be set based on the number of times the jackpot is won, so that the special figure high probability period is set. It becomes possible to manage the length of the period.

More specifically, in the first period in which the first probability variable state is set, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol lottery that is mainly executed is always constant (1 second) regardless of the result of the second special symbol lottery. The content of the jackpot game (the number of round games) to be executed when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery is always constant (10 rounds). In other words, the length of the first period may be configured so as not to differ depending on the variation pattern of the special symbol variation to be executed and the contents of the big winning game to be executed.

By constructing in this manner, the first period is set with a length corresponding to the period (number of special symbol variations) until the 10th big win is won in the high probability state of special symbols (jackpot probability 30/1000). can be done.

In addition, in the second period in which the second probability variable state is set, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol lottery that is mainly executed is always constant (0.1 seconds) regardless of the result of the first special symbol lottery, The content of the jackpot game (the number of round games) to be executed when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery is always constant (two rounds). In other words, the length of the second period may be configured so as not to differ depending on the variation pattern of the special symbol variation to be performed and the content of the big winning game to be performed.

By constructing in this way, the second period is set with a length corresponding to the period (number of special symbol variations) until the 30th big win is won in the high probability state of special symbols (jackpot probability 30/1000). can be done.

Furthermore, during the first period, which is a part of the special high probability period, it is possible to give a lot of prize balls to the player to increase the number of balls, and the second period, which is the other period of the special high probability period. During the two periods, the number of prize balls given to the player may be reduced, thereby suppressing the increase or decrease in the number of paid balls.

By configuring in this way, in the specific period in which the special figure high probability period is set, when the appropriate increase in the number of balls that can be given is configured to be biased during the first period, that is, the first period Even if it is possible to give the player an excessively large number of balls when looking at only As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being awarded an excessive amount of balls while making it possible to execute a ball-out increasing game with unexpected surprises for the player.

In addition, if the jackpot is won in the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), the second probability state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability of normal symbols) state) so that the first probability variable state can be set more easily after the jackpot game ends than when the jackpot is won. In other words, a game state in which it is difficult to win a jackpot but is easy to shift to the first game state most advantageous to the player when the jackpot is won, and a game state in which it is easy to win a jackpot but is most advantageous to the player when the jackpot is won. A game state in which it is difficult to shift to the 1 game state may be configured to be settable.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the game purpose to be aimed at by the player according to the set game state, so that it is easy to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early. can.

In the state where the first probability variation state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol high probability state) is set, if the probability variation limit is reached first, if the time limit is reached first, the probability variation limit, It may be configured such that the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is different from that when the time reduction limit is reached at the same time.

By configuring in this way, even if the jackpot of the same type (for example, the first probability variable jackpot where the first probability variable state is set) is won, a different game state can be set according to the reaching status of each limit. Since the settings can be made, it is possible to easily provide various games to the player.

In addition, by using the above-described configuration, in the case where neither limit has been reached, the ratio of setting the same game state (for example, the first probability variable state) after the end of the jackpot game is increased (always set ), the game state with a high setting ratio (for example, the first variable probability state) is set continuously for a long period of time, and the game becomes monotonous and the motivation to play decreases. It is possible to prevent the situation from occurring.

Furthermore, when the variable probability limit and the short time limit are reached at the same time, a special state (special mode) advantageous to the player may be set. In other words, when the normal state is set based on reaching the probability limit and the short time limit at the same time in the first probability variable state in which the high probability state of the special symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol are set, usually A normal state (special normal state) more advantageous to the player than the normal state of is set. By configuring in this way, even when the opportunity (each limit) to forcibly shift the probability state of each symbol from the high probability state to the low probability state is established, if the special condition is established, the game It is possible to shift to a game state that is advantageous to the player.

Therefore, the player can play a game that expects that the variable probability limit or the short time limit will not be reached and a game that expects that the limit will be reached at the same time, so that the player's interest in the game is improved. can be made

As described above, if there is an element (each limit) for determining the game state (game situation) set after the end of the jackpot game, in addition to the jackpot type that has been won, the jackpot of the same jackpot type After a game is executed, there is a problem that it is difficult for a player to grasp in advance which game state is to be set after a jackpot game ends.

On the other hand, the set game state, the remaining number of times to reach the variable probability limit (remaining number of hits), and the remaining number of times to reach the short time limit (remaining number of hits), production mode based on may be configured to be different.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to predict the future game content based on the content of the effect to be executed, so that it is possible to easily provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In addition, in a part of the case where the jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery which is mainly executed when the second probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set, after the jackpot game ends Although it is configured to be able to set the first variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), it is not limited to this, and when the jackpot is won in the state where the second variable probability state is set. Alternatively, it may be configured such that the second probability variable state is always set after the jackpot game ends.

By configuring in this way, when the second probability variable state is set during the special symbol high probability period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set, that is, when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery When the jackpot type is set in which the second probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends, or when the first probability variable state is continuously set, the time reduction limit is reached and the second probability variable state is forced after the jackpot game ends. (when the second probability variable state is set by the probability variable limit processing), the period until the probability variable limit is reached can be reliably set to the second probability variable state. Therefore, after the advantageous gaming state (first variable probability state) advantageous to the player is set, the unfavorable gaming state (second variable probability state) can be reliably and easily set for a predetermined period.

Furthermore, in this case, according to the timing when the second variable probability state is set, the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won during the second variable probability state may be configured to be different, for example, variable probability limit processing. When the second probability variable state is set by, the jackpot type in which the second probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends is set more easily than when the second probability variable state is set based on the jackpot type. can be configured to

By constructing in this way, a jackpot is won in a state in which a normal state (low probability state of special patterns, low probability state of normal patterns) is set, and a high probability state of special patterns is set after the jackpot game ends. In the case, until the probability variation limit is reached, the first probability variation state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), which is an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player, is set to the player. It is possible to suppress execution of an excessively disadvantageous game.

Furthermore, when a special symbol lottery wins a jackpot, the high probability state of the special symbol is always set after the jackpot game ends. It may be configured such that a low probability state of special symbols is set. Further, in the first embodiment, a plurality of game states can be set, and games with different degrees of advantage can be executed according to the set game states. Specifically, the degree of advantage to the player is the first variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is the most advantageous game state for the player, and then the special state (special mode ) is set normal state (low probability state of special design, low probability state of normal design), time saving state (low probability state of special design, high probability state of normal design), second variable state (high special design probability state, normal pattern low probability state), and normal state, but not limited to this, by varying the game content executed in each game state, each It may be configured such that the degree of advantage of the player in the game state is varied.

<Twelfth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 406 to 438. FIG. In the eleventh control example described above, during the period in which one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is variably displayed, the jackpot lottery for the other special symbol is not executed. On the other hand, in the twelfth control example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are configured to be executable at the same time (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous variation specification). are different.

By configuring in this way, lottery games with more special symbols can be executed within a predetermined period of time, and the probability that a player will receive a big win within the predetermined period of time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

Also, in the eleventh control example described above, the time-saving lottery is executed only in the first special symbol lottery, but in the twelfth control example, both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery Time-saving lottery is configured to be executable, and one special pattern wins time-saving than when only one of the first special pattern or second special pattern wins time-saving, and the period until the fluctuation display of that special pattern stops. However, it is different in that it is constructed so that a privilege advantageous to the player is given when the other special symbol wins the short-time winning.

Although the details will be described later, in the twelfth control example, the time saving A state is set when the first special symbol or the second special symbol wins the time saving in the normal state. On the other hand, when the first special symbol is elected in the normal state, a long time (300 seconds) variation time is set (time reduction winning variation state), until the variation of the first special symbol ends (that is, time reduction When the second special pattern wins the time-saving during the period until the first special pattern indicating the winning is stopped and displayed, a time-saving B state more advantageous to the player than the time-saving A state is set.

By configuring in this way, when one special pattern wins short time, the other special pattern also wins short time, so that a privilege advantageous to the player is given, so that one special pattern wins short time, By making the player think that the other special symbol also wants to win the short time win while the special symbol showing the time short win is fluctuating, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game and improve the interest of the game.例文帳に追加can.

In addition, even if a jackpot of a jackpot type in which a time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) can be set after the jackpot game ends, the normal state (low probability state of normal symbols) is set after the jackpot game ends. It is configured to execute processing for

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous due to the continuation of the game state (time saving state) advantageous to the player for a long period of time, and to improve the gambling spirit of the player. can be suppressed.

In addition, in a game machine with simultaneous variation specifications, when a big win (or a small win) is won in one special symbol lottery, the other special symbol's variable display is forcibly stopped (discarded) or temporarily It is common to have specifications to execute only one of stopping (interrupting), but in this twelfth control example, depending on the jackpot type (or small hit type), the other special symbol fluctuation display is forced It is configured to determine whether to stop or temporarily stop. In other words, a big hit type for forcibly stopping (discarding) the fluctuation of the other special symbol and a big hitting type for temporarily stopping (suspending) the fluctuation display of the other special symbol are defined.

By configuring in this way, when a game state disadvantageous to the player can be set by stopping and displaying one of the special symbols in a state in which a game state advantageous to the player is set, the other special symbol can be set. When winning a jackpot of a jackpot type that can cancel the fluctuation of special patterns, it is possible to prevent a disadvantageous game state from being set, but winning a jackpot of a jackpot type that interrupts other special patterns is possible. In such a case, a situation in which a disadvantageous game state can be set continues, so that when a big win is won, the player can be interested in whether or not the variation of the other special symbols can be discarded, thereby making the game interesting. can be improved.

Here, an overview of the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example will be described. The jackpot probability of the pachinko machine 10 in this twelfth control example is 1/50, which is common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In addition, the time saving winning probability is 1/50, which is common between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Also, although the small winning probability is 1/50, the small winning lottery is executed only with the second special symbol.

Although the details will be described later, the jackpot type determined when the jackpot is won is determined by different tables (see FIGS. 410 and 411) for the first special pattern and the second special pattern, and the first special pattern wins the jackpot. If so, regardless of the game state, 100% jackpot A (5R short time A jackpot) is determined. On the other hand, when the jackpot is won with the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 411, the jackpot type is determined according to the game state. As shown in FIG. 411, when the second special symbol wins the jackpot in the normal state, a 100% jackpot A is set. That is, in the normal state, the jackpot type determined when the jackpot is won with the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the same.

In addition, in the second special symbol, a small winning lottery is also executed, and a small winning is won, and when the game ball enters the specific area 1650 in the small winning game, it becomes a big winning B or C that is more advantageous than the big winning A, so the first special It can be said that the second special symbol is a special symbol more advantageous to the player than the symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, the variation time of the first special symbol and the variation time of the second special symbol in the normal state (low probability state of normal symbols) and the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) However, in the normal state, since the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set shorter than the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, the first special symbol tends to stop earlier. In the time saving state, since the variation time of the second special symbol is set shorter than the variation time of the first special symbol, the second special symbol tends to stop earlier.

By constructing in this way, the number of execution times of the second special symbol lottery is suppressed in the normal state, the player is prevented from becoming excessively advantageous, and the first special symbol is generated before the second special symbol in the time saving state. It is possible to suppress the setting of a relatively disadvantageous game state for the player due to the stopping of the symbols, and it is possible to provide a sharp game.

In the normal state, the variation time of the second special symbol is set shorter than the variation time of the first special symbol, and in the time saving state, the variation time of the first special symbol is set shorter than the variation time of the second special symbol. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which one is set to be shorter.

Here, a game state set in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example will be described. In this twelfth control example, as the game state, it is possible to set a normal state (low probability state of normal symbols) and a time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols). In the time-saving state, the time-saving A state ends when the special symbol variation is executed 5 times after the time-saving state is set, and the special symbol variation is executed 10000 times after the time-saving state is set. There are two time-saving types, the time-saving B state that ends, and when the time-saving A state is set, you can win a jackpot (jackpot winning probability: 1/50) or a small hit (small winning probability 1/50) in 5 special symbol lotteries. 50) has a low probability of winning about 18%, and when the time saving B state is set, it is possible to win a jackpot or a small hit by almost 100%, so the time saving B state is better than the time saving A state. It is a time-saving type that is advantageous for people.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the 12th control example, only the time-saving A state is set after the jackpot game ends when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is won in the normal state. In addition, the game state set when only one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol wins the time saving A state is only the time saving A state, and the time saving B state is not set.

Here, in this twelfth control example, as shown in FIG. 414, when the first special symbol is elected in the normal state, a long time (300 seconds) is set as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. there is Then, as shown in FIG. 416, during the long time variation of the first special symbol (time saving winning variation state), an extremely short variation time (0.5 seconds) is set as the variation time of the second special symbol. As a result, in the time-saving winning fluctuation state, it is possible to execute more second special symbol lotteries than in the normal state.

Then, as shown in FIG. 411, when the second special symbol wins the jackpot during the time saving winning variation state, 100% jackpot B (10R time saving B jackpot) is determined, and time saving B state is set after the jackpot game ends. be. In addition, when the second special symbol wins the short working hours during the short working hour winning fluctuation state, the short working hour B state is set.

By constructing in this way, when the first special symbol is won in time saving, as many second special symbol lotteries as possible are executed in a period until the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, and time saving B state is achieved. It is possible to motivate the player to play the game by setting the .

Although details will be described later, in the time saving winning variation state, when the second special symbol jackpot (or small winning) winning or time saving B state is set by time saving winning, the first special symbol winning time saving variation When the display is continued and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the set time saving B state is discarded and the time saving A state is newly set. That is, the time saving B state continues only until the first special symbol is stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, if the variable display of the winning first special pattern can be discarded, the game can be executed in the time saving B state until reaching the time saving limit described later, and a large amount of prize balls can be obtained. The time saving limit refers to a threshold for executing processing for setting a non-time saving state after the jackpot game ends even when winning a jackpot of the jackpot type in which the time saving state can be set after the jackpot game ends.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, even in the same time-saving B state, a large number of prize balls are obtained by playing a game aiming at discarding the first special symbol and continuously playing until the time-saving limit is reached. It is possible to provide the player with different game properties of the game aimed at, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present twelfth control example, when the first special symbol wins the time saving win, it is configured to set the time saving winning fluctuation state, but it is not limited to this, and the second special symbol wins the time saving win. Also in the case, it may be configured to set the time saving winning variation state. In this case, by making the fluctuation time of the time-saving winning variation different depending on the special symbol type, a relatively advantageous time-saving winning variation state and a relatively disadvantageous time-saving winning variation state are provided for the player according to the special symbol type. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, the time saving type set when only one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol wins the time saving A state is set, but it is not limited to this. Alternatively, it may be configured to set the time saving state of different time saving types depending on whether only the first special pattern wins the time saving and when only the second special pattern wins the time saving, for example, the second special pattern wins the time saving. In this case, it is more advantageous to the player than the time saving A state, but it may be configured to set the time saving C state (for example, the number of time saving times is 100 times) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the time saving B state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 406, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth control example will be described. FIG. 406 is a front view schematically showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth control example. As shown in FIG. 406, the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth control example has the same configuration as the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example (see FIG. 396). Description is omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the 12th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 407 to 416, the electrical configuration in this twelfth control example will be described. This twelfth control example differs from the above-described eleventh control example in that a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is changed. Other than that, they are identical. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 407, the ROM 202 possessed by the main controller 110 in the twelfth control example replaces the ROM 202 possessed by the main controller 110 in the above-described first embodiment with the first per random number 11 table 202ja. 1 random number 12 table 202ka is replaced with a jackpot type selection 7 table 202fb, the jackpot type selection 12 table 202kb is replaced with a second random number 7 table 202fc, and a second random number 12 table 202kc is replaced with a variation pattern 7 table. Instead of 202fd, instead of the variation pattern 12 table 202kd, instead of the small hit type selection 11 table 202jf, the small hit type selection 12 table 202kf, instead of the time saving random number 11 table 202jh, the time saving star random number 12 table 202kh , Instead of the time saving type selection 11 table 202ji, the point of using the time saving type selection 12 table 202ki, the point of deleting the time saving 7 table 202fe and the time saving type selection 11 table 202ji, and the small hit random number 12 table 202ke They are different in that they are added, and are otherwise the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 408 is a block diagram showing the structure of RAM 203 of main controller 110. As shown in FIG. For the eleventh control example described above, the special figure 1 fluctuation time timer 203ka, the special figure 2 fluctuation time timer 203kb, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc, the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd, and the special figure 1 fluctuation Stop flag 203ke, special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203kf, time saving election fluctuation state flag 203kg, and time saving limit reaching flag 203kh are added and differ in points. Since other configurations are the same as those of the eleventh control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Special figure 1 variable time timer 203ka and special figure 2 variable time timer 203kb are timers for timing the variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol respectively, the first special symbol and the second special When a symbol variation pattern is selected, a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set. Whether or not the fluctuation time of each special symbol has ended is determined by the timing results of the special figure 1 fluctuation time timer 203ka and the special figure 2 fluctuation time timer 203kb (see Y701 in FIG. 424 and Y901 in FIG. 433).

Special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030kc is a flag indicating a period to stop the update (subtraction) of the variation time of special figure 1, and stops the update (subtraction) of the variation time when it is set to ON, When the ON state is changed to OFF, the stopped update (subtraction) of the variable time is restarted.

This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is set to ON when the lottery result stops the variation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) that is a jackpot other than the jackpot D (Y903 in FIG. 433), and the first special It is referenced in the symbol variation in-execution process 12 (see FIG. 235) and the first special symbol variation stop process 12 (see FIG. 424, Y708). As a result of referencing, if it is set to ON, a process of updating the display of the first symbol display device corresponding to the special figure 1 in the same manner as during variation is executed. That is, while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the variable time is stopped, but the first symbol display device is in a state where the variable display is continuously executed. Become. Thereby, it is possible to notify that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is not forcibly stopped by setting the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc to ON. Then, when it is determined that it is set to ON in the first special symbol variation executing process 12 (see FIG. 423) (Y2801 in FIG. 423: Yes), it is set to OFF (Y2803 in FIG. 423). Although detailed description and illustration are omitted, this special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is the same process as when the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is a small hit. is executed and set to on.

Special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is a flag indicating a period to stop updating (subtracting) the fluctuation time of special figure 2, and stops updating (subtraction) of the fluctuation time when it is set to ON, When the ON state is changed to OFF, the stopped update (subtraction) of the variable time is restarted.

This special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set to ON when stopping the variation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) where the lottery result is a big hit (Y703 in FIG. 424), and the second special symbol variation is being executed It is referred to in processing 12 (see FIG. 432) and second special symbol variation stop processing 12 (see FIG. 43). It should be noted that the content referred to in this process is the same as the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc described above, so the description thereof will be omitted. Then, when it is determined that it is set to ON in the second special symbol variation executing process 12 (see FIG. 432) (Y2901 in FIG. 432: Yes), it is set to OFF (Y2903 in FIG. 432).

The special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ke is a flag indicating that it is time to forcibly stop the first special symbol in fluctuation. This special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ke is set to ON when the fluctuation of the big hit D or the small hit B is stopped for the second special symbol (see Y905 in FIG. 433 and Y932 in FIG. 435). On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation stop flag 203ke is on during variation of the first special symbol, it is set to off (see Y722 in FIG. 425). As a result, the first special symbol can be forcibly stopped in accordance with the timing when the variation of the big win D or the small win B of the second special symbol stops first.

The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203kf is a flag indicating that it is time to forcibly stop the second special symbol in fluctuation. This special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203kf is set to ON when the first special symbol wins short working hours and fluctuation display is started (Y405 in FIG. 421). On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203kf is on during variation of the second special symbol, it is set to off (Y632 in FIG. 434). As a result, the second special symbol can be forcibly stopped in accordance with the timing when the first special symbol is won in a short time and the variation is started.

The time-saving election fluctuation state flag 203kg is a flag indicating that the first special symbol that has been elected for time-saving is being variably displayed (that is, it is in the time-saving election fluctuation state). This time saving winning fluctuation state flag 203kg is set to ON when the result of the first special symbol lottery is time saving winning (see Y403 in FIG. 421). On the other hand, when the first special symbol winning the time saving is stopped and displayed and the time saving A state is set (see Y8352 in FIG. 426), the second special symbol wins the jackpot D or the small win B, and the first special symbol is discarded (see Y726 in FIG. 425). As a result, the time-saving winning variation state can be set in a period until the time-saving winning of the first special symbol and the end of the variation of the first special symbol.

The time saving limit reach flag 203kh is a flag for indicating that the number of times the high probability state of the normal pattern is continuously set (the number of times of normal pattern continuous setting) has reached the upper limit, and the number of times of normal pattern continuous setting is the upper limit. It is set to ON when reaching the value and forcibly changing the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state.

Next, referring to FIG. 409(a), the contents defined in the first winning random number 12 table 202ka will be described. FIG. 409(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first winning random number 12 table 202ka. In this 12th control example, as shown in FIG. 409(a), the probability of winning the jackpot is the same between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the probability of winning the jackpot is 18/900 (that is, 1/50). do.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, the probability of the jackpot is the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It may be configured to have different jackpot probabilities.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, the jackpot probability is not changed in any game state, but the invention is not limited to this, and when a specific jackpot type is determined, the jackpot game ends. It is good also as a structure which sets the high probability state (so-called probability variation state) of a special design later.

Next, referring to FIG. 409(b), the contents of the second winning random number 12 table 202kc defined in the ROM 202 will be described. FIG. 409(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the second winning random number 12 table 202kc. The second winning random number 12 table 202kc is a data table in which winning determination values for normal symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the normal design, "0 to 2" is defined as the determination value for winning the normal design. In addition, in the high probability state of the normal design, "0 to 149" is defined as the judgment value for winning the normal design. In the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained based on the ball passing through the normal winning opening 67 and the second winning random number 12 table 202kc are referred to, and the normal It is determined whether or not the pattern is hit.

Here, referring to FIG. 406, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, when the normal symbol lottery wins, the electric accessory 1640a arranged in the right area of the game board 13 opens. , and is configured to be able to enter the right second ball entrance 1640 .

Therefore, when the high-probability state (time-saving state) of the normal symbol is set, the electric accessory 1640a becomes easier to open, and the game ball easily enters the right second ball inlet 1640, so that the normal state It becomes easier to execute the second special symbol lottery than.

Next, with reference to FIG.409(c), the content of random-number 12 table 202kh per time saving is demonstrated. FIG.409(c) is the figure which showed typically the content of random number 12 table 202kh per time saving. As shown in FIG. 409(c), in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, the time saving lottery is executed for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The short-time winning probability in each special pattern is common and is 18/900 (1/50). In addition, the time-saving lottery is executed only in the normal state, and the time-saving lottery is not executed in the time-saving state.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to have the same probability of winning the short-time winning, but the invention is not limited to this, and the first special symbol is more. Also, the second special symbol may be configured so that the time saving winning probability is higher or lower.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, the time-saving lottery is executed only in the normal state, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the time-saving lottery may be executed even in the time-saving state.

Next, with reference to 409(d), the contents of the small winning random number 12 table 202ke will be described. Drawing 409 (d) is a figure showing typically the contents of small hit random number 12 table 202ke. As shown in FIG. 409(d), in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, a small winning lottery is executed only for the second special symbol. The small hit winning probability is 18/900 (1/50).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, the configuration is such that the small winning lottery for the second special symbol is executed. good.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, the jackpot winning probability, the time saving winning probability, and the small winning winning probability are all 1/50. The small winning winning probabilities may be configured with all different probabilities. For example, the jackpot winning probability may be 1/300, the time saving winning probability may be 1/30, and the small winning winning probability may be 1/100.

Next, with reference to FIG. 410(a), the contents of the jackpot type selection 12 table 202kb will be described. FIG. 410(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 12 table 202kb. In the jackpot type selection 12 table 202kb, a special figure 1 jackpot 12 table 202kb1 and a special figure 2 jackpot 12 table 202kb2 are defined.

FIG. 410(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot 12 table 202kb1 defined in the jackpot type selection 12 table 202kb. As shown in FIG. 410(b), in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, when the first special symbol wins the jackpot, the 100% jackpot A is selected. Jackpot A is a jackpot type in which 5 rounds of jackpot games are executed and a time-saving A state is set after the jackpot game ends. In addition, after the jackpot game of jackpot A is finished, 5 times is set as the counter value of the time reduction counter 203h.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, the jackpot type of the first special symbol is one type, but it is not limited to this, and a plurality of jackpot types may be set. Moreover, it is good also as a structure with which the jackpot classification selected according to a game state differs.

FIG. 411 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot 12 table 202kb2 defined in the jackpot type selection 12 table 202kb. When the jackpot is won with the second special symbol, it depends on the game state set at the time of the jackpot win, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the game state is changed, and the value of the first winning type counter CS2. to select the jackpot type. In addition, the count of the number of fluctuations is also reset, for example, when a jackpot is won in the time saving B state and the time saving B state is set again after the jackpot game ends.

First, when the game state is the normal state, there are a non-time-saving winning variation state and a time-saving winning variation state, and the non-time-saving winning variation state is a state where the time-saving winning variation state flag 20kg is off, that is, a short-time winning It is a state in which the first special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner. The time-saving winning variation state is a state in which the time-saving winning variation state flag 203kg is ON, that is, the state in which the first special symbol that has been short-time winning is being displayed in a variable manner. In the non-time-saving winning fluctuation state of the normal state, 100% jackpot A (5R time-saving A jackpot) is selected regardless of the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol, and 5 is set to the counter value of the time-saving counter 203h after the jackpot game ends. be. In the time-saving winning variation state of the normal state, regardless of the number of variations of the second special symbol, a 100% jackpot B (10R time-saving B jackpot) is selected, and 10000 is set to the counter value of the time-saving counter 203h after the jackpot game ends. .

In this way, in the normal state, only the second special symbol lottery is executed by configuring the benefits given to the player differently depending on whether or not the time-saving winning variation state flag 203kg is turned on when the jackpot is won. This prevents a player who plays a game to make a game from becoming excessively advantageous.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, the 100% jackpot A (or jackpot B) is selected regardless of the number of variations of the second special symbol in the normal state, but the configuration is limited to this. Instead, it may be configured such that a jackpot type is selected from among a plurality of jackpot types according to the number of fluctuations. For example, in the non-time-saving elected variable state of the normal state, either the jackpot A or the jackpot B is configured to be selectable, and the jackpot A is more likely to be selected than the jackpot B from the 0th to 50th rotations, and after the 51st rotation. A configuration may be adopted in which the big win B is more likely to be selected than the big win A. By constructing in this way, even if the losing winning continues in the normal state, it becomes easier for the player to select a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player, so that the player's desire to play can be suppressed. can.

Also, from the 0th to 50th spins, jackpot A is more likely to be selected than jackpot B, from 51st to 100th spins, jackpot B is more likely to be selected than jackpot A, and from 101st to 150th spins, jackpot B is more likely to be selected. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the type of jackpot that is likely to be selected in a specific period, such as A being likely to be selected, is variable. By constructing in this way, a period advantageous to the player is generated periodically, and the player can be interested in the number of variations of the second special symbol, thereby improving the amusement of the game. can.

Next, the time saving state includes a time saving A state and a time saving B state. % jackpot C (5R short time B jackpot) is selected. In the time saving B state, the jackpot type selected according to the number of fluctuations of the second special pattern is variable, 100% jackpot (10R time saving B jackpot) is selected from 0 to 50th rotation, and after the 51st rotation Jackpot B (10R short time B jackpot) is selected at 50%, and jackpot D (10R short time B jackpot) is selected at 50%. Both jackpot B and jackpot D are jackpot types in which a 10-round jackpot game and a time-saving B state are set after the jackpot game ends, but when the jackpot B is won, the first special symbol that is fluctuating is temporarily stopped. The jackpot types are different in that a process of stopping (interrupting) is executed and, when the jackpot D is won, a process of forcibly stopping (discarding) the first special pattern in fluctuation is executed. In other words, when the winning of the second special symbol continues up to a specific number of times, the variable display of the first special symbol is likely to be discarded.

By configuring in this way, even if the second special symbol is lost and won continuously in a state where the first special symbol that has been elected for short time is displayed in a variable manner, and the remaining time of the fluctuation of the first special symbol is short, the first special symbol is displayed. Since there is a high possibility that the variation of the symbols can be discarded, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to play when the second special symbols are repeatedly won.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, only in the case of the time saving B state, the jackpot type that is likely to be selected according to the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is changed. However, it is not limited to this, Also in the time-saving A state, it may be configured to vary the type of jackpot that is likely to be selected according to the number of variations of the second special symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the 12th control example, the 100% jackpot B is selected from the 0th to the 50th rotation, but it is not limited to this, and it is different even from the 0th to the 50th rotation. The configuration may be such that the jackpot type can be won, for example, the configuration may be such that the jackpot B is selected at 80% and the jackpot D is selected at 20%. By constructing in this way, the player is expected to win the jackpot D and discard the variable display of the first special symbol even in the period just after the time saving B state is set, and to play the game. becomes possible, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, it is configured to switch the jackpot type that is easy to select between "0 to 50th rotation" and "after the 51st rotation", but it is not limited to this, For example, the jackpot B is more likely to be selected than the jackpot D from the 0th to the 50th rotation, the jackpot D is more likely to be selected than the jackpot B from the 51st to the 100th rotation, and the jackpot D is more likely to be selected from the 101st to the 150th rotation. It is also possible to vary the type of jackpot that is likely to be selected in a specific period, such as B being likely to be selected. By constructing in this way, a period advantageous to the player is generated periodically, and the player can be interested in the number of variations of the second special symbol, thereby improving the amusement of the game. can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 412, the contents of the small hit type selection 12 table 202kf will be described. FIG. 412 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection 12 table 202kf. As shown in FIG. 412, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, two types of small winning types are defined. In addition, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example is configured such that a small winning lottery is executed only for the second special symbol.

The small hit A is a small hit type selected at 80% when the small hit is won, and when the specific area 1650a is passed (V passage) in the small hit game, the big hit C (5R short time B big hit) is given. be. Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, depending on the small hit type, the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is forcibly stopped (discarded) or temporarily stopped (interrupted). ), and when the small hit A is executed, the process of temporarily stopping (interrupting) the variation of the first special symbol being executed is performed.

On the other hand, the small hit B is a small hit type selected at 20% when the small hit is won, and when V passes in the small hit game, the big hit B (10R short time B big hit) is given. When the small hit B is executed, the process of forcibly stopping (discarding) the variation of the first special symbol being executed is executed. In addition, although there are two kinds of small winning types in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, the number of small winning types is not limited to this, and three or more types of small winning types may be provided.

Next, referring to FIG. 413, the contents of the variation pattern 12 table 202kd will be described. FIG. 413 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern 12 table 202kd. In the variation pattern 12 table 202kd, a normal state variation pattern 12 table 202kd1, a time saving state variation pattern 12 table 202kd2, and a time saving winning variation state variation pattern 12 table 202kd3 are defined, and each variation pattern table is a gaming state. Referenced according to

FIG. 414 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal state variation pattern 12 table 202kd1 defined in the variation pattern 12 table 202kd. In the normal state variation pattern 12 table 202kd1, a variation pattern is set based on the symbol type of the special symbol, the lottery result, and the value of the variation type counter CS1.

Specifically, when the symbol type is "first special symbol" and the result of the judgment is "off", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 139", and the variation time is 7 seconds ( 7000 milliseconds) is specified, and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "140 to 149", and the variation time is 20 seconds (20000 milliseconds). , and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "150 to 179", and "various normal reach" with a variation time of 40 seconds (40000 milliseconds) are defined, and the acquired variation type counter CS1 A “super reach” with a variable time of 80 seconds (80000 milliseconds) is defined in the range of values “180 to 189”. Also, if the result of the success/failure determination is "hit", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 29", and "normal reach" with a variation time of 40 seconds (40000 milliseconds) is defined, The value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "30 to 189", and the "super reach" with a variation time of 80 seconds (80000 milliseconds) is defined, and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is "190 ~ 198”, a “special reach” with a fluctuation time of 140 seconds (140000 milliseconds) is defined. In addition, when the success/failure determination result is "shorter working hours", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 198" and "long shorter working hours" with a variation time of 300 seconds.

On the other hand, when the symbol type is "second special symbol" and the result of the judgment is "off", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", and the variation time is 600 seconds (600000 milliseconds). ) is defined as “long out”, and if the result of the success/failure determination is “time saving winning”, the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 198”, and the variation time is 600 seconds (600000 milliseconds ) is defined as “time saving hit”, and if the result of the judgment is “big hit, small hit”, the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 198”, and the variation time is 600 seconds (600000 milliseconds) is specified.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, in the normal state, the fluctuation time for the first special symbol is likely to be set shorter than that for the second special symbol. This is a configuration in which the small winning lottery is executed only for the second special symbol, and when the small winning is won, the most advantageous time saving B state for the player is set, so the fluctuation time of the second special symbol This is to prevent the game efficiency from being deteriorated by lengthening the period, and the player who plays the game in which only the second special symbol lottery is executed is excessively advantageous.

Further, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is "time saving win", "long time saving win" is set. During the long time reduction winning variation, it becomes a time reduction winning variation state, and the pattern table 202kd3 for time reduction winning variation state is referred to until the first special symbol in which the long time reduction winning is set is stopped and displayed (or discarded). , Since the variation of the second special symbol is a short variation (0.5 seconds), the second special symbol lottery can be executed a plurality of times. In addition, during the long time-saving fluctuation (during the time-saving winning fluctuation state), the jackpot (or small win) winning, even if the time-saving state is set based on the time-saving winning, the long time-saving change continues. The pattern table 202kd3 for time saving election variation state is referred to.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present twelfth control example, when the first special symbol wins short working hours, 100% "long short working hours" is set, but it is not limited to this, multiple , based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. For example, 50% selects a "long time reduction hit" with a variation time of 300 seconds, 30% selects a "short time reduction hit" with a variation time of 200 seconds, and 20% selects a "super time reduction hit" with a variation time of 500 seconds. ” may be selected. By constructing in this way, it is possible to change the advantage or disadvantage of the player in the time-saving winning fluctuation state by the fluctuation time of the selected first special symbol, and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the 12th control example, it is configured to be in the time saving winning fluctuation state only when the first special symbol is winning time saving, but it is not limited to this, and the second special symbol is winning time saving In this case, the time-saving winning variation state may be set. In the case of the second special pattern, the variable time is 600 seconds), the time-saving winning variation state advantageous to the player and the time-saving winning variation state relatively disadvantageous to the player depending on which special pattern wins the time-saving winning. can be set, and the interest in the game can be improved.

FIG. 415 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving state variation pattern 12 table 202kd2 defined in the variation pattern 12 table 202kd. In the time saving state variation pattern 12 table 202kd2, a variation pattern is set based on the symbol type of the special symbol, the lottery result, and the value of the variation type counter CS1.

The time saving state variation pattern 12 table 202kd2 is a variation pattern 12 table referred to when the time saving state is set as the gaming state, and is common to the time saving A state and the time saving B state. In addition, as described above, when the long time saving per variation of the first special symbol is executed, the time saving winning variation state variation pattern 12 table 202kd3 is referred to instead of the time saving state variation pattern 12 table 202kd2. .

As shown in FIG. 415, in the time saving state variation pattern 12 table 202kd2, the first special symbol becomes long variation (600 seconds) and the second special symbol becomes short variation (3 to 5 seconds). As described above, when the first special symbol wins the jackpot while the time saving B state is set, the time saving A state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the time saving B state is set, so the second special symbol is easily stopped and displayed first, so that the time-saving B state, which is advantageous to the player, is easily set continuously.

FIG. 416 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern 12 table 202kd3 for the time reduction winning variation state defined in the variation pattern 12 table 202kd. In the variation pattern 12 table 202kd3 for time saving winning variation state, a variation pattern is set based on the symbol type of the special symbol, the lottery result, and the value of the variation type counter CS1.

As shown in FIG. 416, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, when the time reduction winning fluctuation state is set, the lottery result of the second special symbol is a short fluctuation (0. 5 seconds) is set. In the time-saving winning variation state, the first special symbol winning the time-saving winning variation ends when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. It is configured so that the second special symbol lottery can be executed.

In addition, in the time-saving winning variation state, the first special symbol is already changing, and when the variation of the first special symbol ends, the time-saving winning variation state also ends, so the first special symbol variation pattern is set in the time-saving winning variation state. will not be Therefore, in the variable pattern 12 table 202kd3 for time saving winning variable state, only the variable pattern of the second special symbol is selected.

In addition, as described above, even if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, during the long time saving fluctuation of the first special symbol (when the time saving winning fluctuation state flag 203kg is set to ON), the fluctuation At the time of pattern selection, the variation pattern 12 table 202kd3 for time saving winning variation state is referred to.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the twelfth control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 416 to 437. FIG. The control process of the main controller 110 in the twelfth control example is a special symbol variation process instead of the special symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 252) in contrast to the control process of the main controller 110 in the fifth control example described above. 12 (see FIG. 416), game state update processing 12 (see FIG. 422) instead of update processing 5 (see FIG. 256), jackpot control processing 12 (see FIG. 435) instead of jackpot control processing 5 (see FIG. 260) , and otherwise the same processing is executed. Note that the same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the twelfth control example, in contrast to the fifth control example described above, the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special symbol 1), which is a special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special symbol), 2 special symbols (hereinafter referred to as special symbols 2) are greatly different in that they are configured to be able to perform variable display at the same time (in parallel).

First, with reference to FIG. 417, the contents of the special symbol variation process 12 (Y104) in the twelfth control example will be described. FIG. 416 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 12 (Y104). When the special symbol variation process 12 (Y104) is executed, first, it is determined whether a big win or a small win is in progress (Y231). If it is determined that the jackpot or small hit is in progress (Y231: Yes), then it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc or the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set to ON (Y232). . In the process of Y232, it is determined whether or not the subtraction of the other special figure fluctuation time during fluctuation is suspended because one special figure is stopped and displayed in the pattern indicating the win. In the process of Y232, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc or the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set to ON (Y232: Yes), the first corresponding to the special figure that is temporarily stopped The display of the symbol display device 37 is updated (Y233), that is, the processing for continuing the variable display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed for the special symbols in which the subtraction of the variable time is interrupted, and this processing exit. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player that the special figure fluctuation is not forcibly stopped.

On the other hand, in the process of Y231, if it is determined that the current is a big hit or a small hit (Y231: No), the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time timer 203ka is greater than 0 (that is, the special figure 1 fluctuates If it is determined (Y234) and the value of the special figure 1 variation time timer 203ka is not greater than 0 (is 0) (Y234: No), the first special symbol variation start process 12 (Y237) and the same processing is performed, and then, the process proceeds to Y238 that performs the variation processing regarding the special figure 2.

In the process of Y234, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time timer 203ka is greater than 0 (Y234: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation executing process 12 (Y235) is executed. This first special symbol variation executing process 12 (Y235) executes the process during special figure 1 variation, and its detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the first special symbol variation in-execution process 12 (Y235) is finished, next, the first special symbol variation stop process 12 (Y236) is performed, and then the process proceeds to Y238.

In the process of Y238-Y241, the same process as Y234-Y237 executed for special figure 1 is executed. When the process of Y238 is executed, first, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time timer 203kb is greater than 0 (that is, whether the special figure 2 is fluctuating) is determined (Y238), special figure 2 fluctuation When it is determined that the value of the time timer 203kb is not greater than 0 (is 0) (Y238: No), the second special symbol variation start process 12 (Y239) is executed, and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Y238, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time timer 203kb is greater than 0 (Y238: Yes), the second special symbol fluctuation executing process 12 (Y240) is executed. This second special symbol variation executing process 12 (Y240) executes the process during special figure 2 variation, and its detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the second special symbol variation in-execution process 12 (Y240) is finished, next, the second special symbol variation stop process 12 (Y241) is performed, and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 418, the first special symbol variation start process 12 (Y237), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 12 (FIG. 417, Y104), will be described. FIG. 237 is a flow chart showing this first special symbol variation start process 12 (Y237).

In the first special symbol variation start process 12 (FIG. 417, Y237), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is ON (Y301). In the process of Y301, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag is ON (Y301: Yes), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Y301, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag is not ON (Y301: No), the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is acquired (Y302) and acquired It is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter is greater than 0 (Y303). In the process of Y303, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (Y303: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is Subtract 1 (Y304), and set a pending ball number command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the pending ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol pending ball number counter 203d after the subtraction (Y305). .

The pending ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (Y2001) of the main process (see FIG. 119) executed by the MPU 201, voice It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 230. 223c. Thus, in the voice lamp control device 113, according to the reservation ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, since the value of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 223c is updated, the first special symbol of the main control device 110 The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203d.

When the process of Y305 ends, next, the data in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted to the previous data (Y306). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of reservation area 1→execution area, reservation area 2→reservation area 1, reservation area 3→reservation area 2, reservation area 4→reservation area 3, and so on.

When the process of Y306 is finished, then the first special symbol determination process 12 is executed (Y307). This first special symbol determination process 12 (FIG. 418, Y307) will be described later in detail. It is a process for executing a big win determination as to whether or not a big win is made based on the set game state. Note that the game state update process 12 (Y309) may be executed before the process of Y307, and by configuring in this way, the special symbol lottery is executed after the game state is updated.

When the process of Y307 is completed, next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 12 is executed (Fig. 420, Y308). Although the details will be described later, this first special symbol variation pattern selection process 12 (Y308) includes the determination result of the first special symbol and the variation type stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. This is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on the value of the counter CS1.

When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 12 (Y308) ends, then the game state update process 12 is executed (Y309). This game state update process 12 (Y309 in FIG. 421) updates the state of the pachinko machine 10 by updating the values of various counters (time reduction counter 203h) indicating the state of the pachinko machine 10, although the details will be described later. This is a process for When the process of Y309 ends, the special figure 1 standby flag 2030i is set to OFF, and the special figure 1 standby command indicating OFF is set (Y310), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Y303, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (Y303: No), whether the special figure 1 standby flag 2030i is on It is determined (Y311), and if it is determined that it is on (Y311: Yes), this process is terminated. In the process of Y311, when it is determined that it is off (that is, not on) (Y311: No), the special figure 1 standby flag 2030i is set to on (Y312), and the special figure 1 standby command indicating on After setting (Y313), this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 419, the processing contents of the first special symbol determination processing 12 (Y307) will be described. FIG. 419 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the first special symbol determination processing 12 (Y307). This first special symbol determination process 12 (Y307) is executed in place of the special symbol determination process 5 (S251 in FIG. 253) of the fifth control example described above. Judgment of time saving election (special figure 1 time saving lottery process 12) is executed.

When the first special symbol determination process 12 (Y307) is executed, first, the data of the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area is acquired (Y8001), and the lottery result is based on the first winning random number 12 table 202ka. (Y8002), and when it is determined that the lottery result is a jackpot (Y8003: Yes), the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to a jackpot (Y8004), and the acquired hit type counter (first hit type Based on the value of the counter C2), the jackpot symbol of the special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (Y8005), the value indicating the current game state is stored in the winning state storage area (Y8006), End this process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result is not a big hit (Y8003: No), the special figure 1 hour-saving lottery process 12 is executed (Y8007), and this process is terminated.

Here, the special figure 1 time saving lottery process 12 (Y8007) is a process for executing determination of time saving election in this special symbol lottery. That is, in the twelfth control example, first, in the first special symbol lottery, the judgment of the jackpot election is executed (Y8003), and when the jackpot is elected, the special symbol lottery is terminated without executing the judgment of the time-saving election. And, it is configured to execute the determination of time-saving winning only when the jackpot is not won. By constructing in this way, in one special symbol lottery, since a plurality of benefits (special symbol jackpot winning, short-time winning) are not given to the player, a game excessively advantageous to the player is provided. You can prevent it from happening.

Next, referring to FIG. 420, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 12 (Y308), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process 12 (FIG. 418, Y237), will be described. FIG. 420 is a flow chart showing this first special symbol variation pattern selection process 12 (Y308).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 12 (FIG. 420, Y308), first, in the first special symbol determination process 12 (FIG. 419, Y307), whether the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a big hit, that is, It is determined whether or not the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (Y501).

In the process of Y501, when it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (Y501: Yes), obtained in the process of Y8005 in the above-described first special symbol determination process 12 (see FIG. 419) Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2, the jackpot type is determined from the special figure 1 jackpot 12 table 202kb (see FIG. 410(b)) (Y502), and the process proceeds to Y503.

On the other hand, in the process of Y501, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out (Y501: No), the process of Y502 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of Y503.

In the process of Y503, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a (Y503). Next, the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 413 to 416) corresponding to the game state is read out (Y504), and the process proceeds to Y505. The game state is determined based on the value of the time saving winning variation flag and the information stored in the game state storage area 203g. In the process of Y505, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (Y505), and then based on the selected variation pattern, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is set ( Y506).

When the process of Y506 is completed, a special figure 1 stop type command indicating a stop design is set (Y507). Next, the first symbol display device 37 sets the start of variation of the first special symbol (Y508), and ends this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 421, the processing content of special figure 1 time saving lottery process 12 (Y8007) is demonstrated. Figure 421 is the flowchart which shows the contents of special figure 1 time saving lottery processing 12 (Y8007).

When the special figure 1 time saving lottery process 12 (Y8007) is executed, first, the lottery result (time saving winning determination result) is acquired based on the time saving random number 12 table 202kh (Y401), and it is determined whether the time saving is elected. (Y402), when it is determined that the time reduction is elected (Y402: Yes), the time reduction election fluctuation state flag 203 kg is set to ON (Y403), and as the time reduction design of the special design to be displayed on the first design display device 37 Time saving A is set (Y404), special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag kf is set to ON (Y8105), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the time saving has not been won in the process of Y402 (Y402: No), it is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 based on the value of the acquired winning type counter (first winning type counter C2). A special symbol is set (Y406), and the process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 422, the content of the game state update process 12 (Y309) will be described. FIG. 422 is a flow chart showing the contents of the game state update process 12 (Y309).

When the gaming state update process 12 (Y309) is executed, it is first determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (Y601), and it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0. If so (Y601: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted by 1 (Y602), and a remaining time saving number command indicating the value of the time saving counter 203h is set (Y603). Next, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 (Y604), and if it is determined to be 0 (Y604: Yes), the time saving game is not given (that is, normal state). Therefore, a state command indicating the normal state is set (Y605), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Y604 that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not 0 (Y604: No), the process of Y605 is skipped and the present process is finished as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 423, the contents of the first special symbol variation executing process 12 (Y235) executed in the special symbol variation process 12 (see Y104 in FIG. 417) will be described. FIG. 423 is a flow chart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation executing process 12 (Y235). In this first special symbol variation executing process 12 (Y235), when the subtraction of the variation time of the special figure 1 is interrupted, the process of restarting the subtraction and the process of subtracting the variation time are executed.

When the first special symbol variation executing process 12 (Y235) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is set to ON (Y2801). Here, the case where this processing is executed in a state where the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is set to ON will be briefly described. The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is set to ON when the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed in a pattern indicating a specific hit (big hit A to C or a small hit A) while the special figure 1 is fluctuating. It is. Then, when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is set to ON, since the big hit flag 203k is set to ON in the process, the timer interrupt executed every 2 milliseconds by the main controller 110 When the processing loops and the next (2 milliseconds after the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is set to ON) special symbol variation processing 12 (FIG. 417) is executed, it is during the jackpot in the processing of Y231. Since it is determined that there is, the first special symbol variation executing process 12 (Y235) is not executed. Then, when the jackpot game (or small hit game) is completed and it is determined that the jackpot (or small hit) is not made in the process of Y231, the first special symbol variation in-execution process 12 (Y235) is executed. will be By configuring in this way, the state in which the first special symbol variation executing process 12 (Y235) is executed in the state where the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is set to ON is the jackpot (or small hit) game Is configured to be the timing to restart the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation that had been interrupted by the subtraction of the fluctuation time.

Returning to FIG. 423, the description continues. In the process of Y2801, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is set to ON (Y2801: Yes), then set the special figure 1 fluctuation resume command (Y2802), special figure 1 provisional The stop flag 203kc is set to OFF (Y2803), and the process proceeds to Y2804. On the other hand, in the process of Y2801, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is not set to ON (set to OFF) (Y2801: No), the processes of Y2802 and Y2803 are skipped and Y2804 to process.

In the process of Y2804, the special figure 1 fluctuation time timer 203ka is updated by subtracting 1 (Y2804), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (Y2805), and the process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 424, the first special symbol variation stop process 12 (Y236), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 12 (FIG. 417, Y104), will be described. FIG. 424 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation stop processing 12 (Y236).

In the first special symbol variation stop processing 12 (FIG. 424, Y236), first, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the variation based on the first special symbol being executed (Y701). In the process of Y701, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the variation based on the first special symbol being executed (Y701: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is set. (Y702). When it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (Y702: Yes), the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set to ON (Y703). Although illustration is omitted, when the process of Y703 is executed, a special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203kd is turned on is set.

After finishing the process of Y703, the special figure 1 stop classification command indicating the set stop classification is set (Y704). Then, a jackpot scenario based on the selected jackpot type is set (Y705). After that, a special figure 1 confirmation command for instructing the sound lamp control device 113 to confirm and stop the first special symbol is set (Y706). Then, the process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is being variably displayed by the first special symbol display device 37 is executed (Y707), and this process is finished.

On the other hand, in the process of Y702, if the jackpot of the first special symbol is not set (Y702: No), it is determined whether the time-saving winning of the first special symbol is set (Y710). In the process of Y710, when it is determined that the time saving election is set (Y710: Yes), the time saving setting process 12 (Y711) is executed, and the process proceeds to Y706. In this time saving setting process 12 (Y711), the process related to the setting of the time saving state corresponding to the winning time saving type is executed. In addition, this time saving setting process 12 (Y711) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of Y701, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the variation based on the first special symbol being executed (Y701: No), then the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc or the special figure 1 variation stop flag 203ke is on (Y708). When it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc or the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ke is off in the process of Y708 (Y708: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc or the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ke is ON in the process of Y708 (Y708: Yes), when the second special symbol is stopped with a big hit or a small hit Therefore, in order to stop (temporarily stop) the variation based on the first special symbol being executed, special figure 1 forced stop processing 12 is executed (Y709). The details of this special figure 1 forced stop processing 12 will be described later with reference to FIG.

Thus, in the first special symbol stop processing 12 (Y236), when the prescribed fluctuation time of the first special symbol during variable display has elapsed (Y701: Yes), the symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game , the process (Y703 to Y707 or Y711) of stopping the variable display is executed. Also, when the second special symbol is a symbol indicating a big hit (or a small win) and the variation is stopped, and the big win game (or small win game) of the second lottery game is executed (Y708: Yes), the variable display is performed. A process of forcibly stopping the first special symbol (Y709) is executed. In addition, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped by the symbol indicating the big win (or small win) (Y702: Yes), the fluctuation of the second special symbol during the variable display is interrupted (temporarily stopped). You may

Next, with reference to FIG. 425, special figure 1 forced stop processing 12 (Y709), which is one processing of the first special symbol variation stop processing 12 (FIG. 424, Y236), will be described. FIG. 425 is a flow chart showing this special figure 1 forced stop processing 12 (Y709).

In the special figure 1 forced stop processing 12 (figure 425, Y709), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ke is on (Y721). When it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ke is on (Y721: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ke is set to off (Y722), then the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ke Set the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating off (Y723). Then, the variation type of the first special symbol is set to be off (Y724), and it is determined whether the time reduction winning variation state flag 203kg is ON (Y725). In addition, although not shown, before the process of Y725, the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped by the off symbol, and the special figure 1 confirmation command of the first special symbol is set.

In the process of Y725, when it is determined that the time saving election fluctuation state flag 203 kg is ON (that is, when the result of the first special symbol lottery is time saving election) (Y725: Yes), the time saving election fluctuation state flag 203 kg is set to OFF (Y726), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of Y725, the time saving election fluctuation state flag 203 kg is not ON (that is, if the result of the first special symbol lottery is not time saving election) (Y725: No), Y726 is skipped, and this processing is performed. finish.

In addition, since it is only when the time saving B state is set that it is possible to win the jackpot D that can cancel the fluctuation of the first special symbol, the time saving election is based on the jackpot winning of the second special symbol in the normal state. Although the fluctuation state flag 203kg is configured not to be set to OFF, it is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured such that the jackpot D can be won in the normal state. In that case, after the process of Y725, a process of setting the special flag to ON when the jackpot D is won in the normal state is provided, and a game state (for example, a probability variable state (high special symbol) is provided that is more advantageous than the time saving B state. Probability state, high probability state of normal design)) may be configured to be set. By configuring in this way, different game states are set for the case of winning the jackpot D in the time-saving winning variation state of the normal state and the case of winning the jackpot D in the time-saving winning variation state of the time-saving state, and the game is performed. It is possible to improve interest.

On the other hand, in the process of Y721, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time flag 203ke is not on (Y721: No), since the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is on, the first special symbol A command to temporarily stop (interrupt) the fluctuation is set (Y729), and this processing is terminated.

Thus, in this twelfth control example, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc or the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ke is turned on (timing to stop the fluctuation that becomes a big hit or a small hit in the second special symbol) , Even if the fluctuation time of the first special symbol has not passed, the fluctuation is forcibly interrupted, or is forcibly stopped as a result of the determination of the deviation. Thus, even if the lottery results are variably displayed at the same time with the first special pattern and the second special pattern, it is only necessary to execute a small win or a big win for only one of the lottery results, and gambling can be suppressed. Furthermore, the efficiency of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the twelfth control example, there are cases where the fluctuation of the first special symbol is forced to stop and temporarily stopped (suspended) depending on the type of the second special symbol big win or small win. and

As described above, in the twelfth control example, the time saving A and the time saving B can be set as the types of the time saving state. Then, the time saving A has 5 times of time saving (see FIG. 411), and the probability that the second special pattern will win a big hit (winning probability 1/50) or a small win (winning probability 1/50) with 5 times of working time saving. has a low probability of about 18%, it is almost impossible to expect a big win or a small win in the second special symbol in the time saving A state. On the other hand, since the number of times of time saving B is 10000 times (see FIG. 411), when time saving B is set, the next big hit or small win can be expected with high probability. Therefore, it can be said that the time saving B state is a time saving state more advantageous to the player than the time saving A state.

Here, in the period until the first special symbol is elected for a short time, and the first special symbol indicating that the short time is elected is stopped and displayed (that is, when the short time winning fluctuation state is set), the second special symbol When the time saving B state is set by winning a big win, a small win, or a time saving win, it indicates that the time saving win was made without being able to forcibly stop the fluctuation of the first special symbol as a missing symbol. When the first special symbol is stop-displayed, the set time saving B state is discarded and the time saving A state is newly set. That is, in this case, the time saving B state continues only until the fluctuation time (in this 12th control example, 300 seconds) of the first special symbol that has been elected has passed, and before reaching the time saving limit There is a high possibility that the time saving state will end.

On the other hand, during the period until the first special symbol indicating that the first special symbol has been elected for a short time and the first special symbol indicating that the short time has been won is stopped and displayed (that is, when the short time winning fluctuation state is set), the second special symbol is When a time-saving B state is set by winning a big win, a small win, or a short-time win, a specific big win (jack D) or small win (small win B) is won, and the first special pattern is forced to change. When the game can be stopped as a target missing symbol, the time saving B state can be continued until the time saving limit is reached, and the player can win a large amount of prize balls.

Thus, in the present twelfth control example, the period until the first special symbol is elected for the time reduction and the first special symbol indicating that the time reduction is elected is stopped and displayed (that is, the time reduction election fluctuation state is set. case), when the time-saving B state is set due to the second special symbol winning a jackpot, a small winning, or a time-saving election, the first special symbol displayed in a variable manner is forcibly removed and stopped (discarded) ), it is possible to provide the player with a new game property such as whether it is possible to continue the advantageous time-saving state, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 426, the process content of the time saving setting process 12 (Y711) is demonstrated. FIG. 426 is the flowchart which showed the processing content of the time saving setting process 12 (Y711). In this time saving setting process 12 (Y711), a process for setting a time saving state is executed when working time saving is won by time saving winning determination. When the time saving setting process 12 (Y711) is executed, first, it is determined whether the time saving type is time saving A (Y8351), and when it is determined that it is time saving A (Y8351: Yes), time saving election variation The state flag 203kg is set to OFF (Y8352), the value corresponding to the determined time saving type is set in the time saving counter 203h (Y8353), the time saving state is set in the game state storage area (Y8354), and the time saving counter 203h , a state command indicating the time saving type game state (information indicating the time saving state and information indicating the set time saving type) is set (Y8355), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Y8351, when it is determined that it is not time saving A (that is, when it is time saving B) (Y8351: No), the process of Y8352 is skipped and the process of Y8353 is performed. In addition, although not illustrated, in the process of Y8353, after clearing the value of the time saving counter 203h, the value corresponding to the determined time saving classification is newly set. Therefore, when the time saving A state is set based on the time saving election, if the value corresponding to the time saving B (for example, 10000 times) is already set to the time saving counter 203h, the value corresponding to the time saving B Discard and set a value (5 times) corresponding to time saving A.

Thus, in this twelfth control example, it is configured so that the time saving state is set at different timings according to the time saving winning opportunity, and when the time saving win is made in the special symbol lottery, the special symbol variation When the time-saving state is set at the stop timing and the time-saving state is set based on the jackpot winning of the special symbol lottery, the time-saving state is set not at the stop timing of the special symbol variation but at the jackpot game end timing. .

By configuring in this way, the timing at which the time saving state is set can be varied, so that it is possible to provide the player with a game that is difficult to get tired of.

Next, with reference to FIG. 427, the second special symbol variation start process 12 (Y239), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 12 (FIG. 417, Y104), will be described. FIG. 239 is a flow chart showing this second special symbol variation start process 12 (Y239).

In the second special symbol variation start process 12 (FIG. 427, Y239), first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is ON (Y831). In the process of Y831, when it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is ON (Y831: Yes), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Y831, when it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is not ON (Y831: No), the value (N1) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is acquired (Y832), It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (Y833). In the process of Y833, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (Y833: Yes), the value (N1) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is Subtract 1 (Y834), and set a pending ball number command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the pending ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol pending ball number counter 203e after the subtraction (Y835). .

The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 201. . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 230. 223d. Thus, in the voice lamp control device 113, according to the reservation ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, since the value of the second special symbol reservation ball number counter 223d is updated, the second special symbol of the main control device 110 The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203e.

When the process of Y835 ends, next, the data in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted to the previous data (Y836). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of reservation area 1→execution area, reservation area 2→reservation area 1, reservation area 3→reservation area 2, reservation area 4→reservation area 3, and so on.

When the process of Y836 is completed, then the second special symbol determination process 12 is executed (Y837). This second special symbol determination process 12 (FIG. 428, Y837) will be described later in detail. It is a process for executing a big win determination as to whether or not a big win is made based on the set game state.

When the process of Y837 is finished, next, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 12 is executed (Fig. 431, Y838). Although the details will be described later, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 12 (Y838) includes the determination result of the second special symbol and the variation type stored in the execution area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. This is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on the value of the counter CS1.

When the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 12 (Y838) ends, then the game state update process 12 is executed (Y839 (Y309)). This game state update process 12 (FIG. 421, Y839 (Y309)) is the same process as that executed in the first special symbol, and the details have been described with reference to FIG. Description is omitted. When the process of Y839 ends, the special figure 2 standby flag is set to OFF, and the special figure 1 standby command indicating OFF is set (Y840), and this process is terminated. Incidentally, the game state update process 12 (Y839) may be executed before the process of Y837, and by configuring in this way, the special symbol lottery is executed after the game state is updated.

On the other hand, in the process of Y833, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (Y833: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 standby flag is ON. (Y841), and if it is determined that it is ON (Y841: Yes), this processing is terminated. In the process of Y841, if it is determined that it is off (that is, not on) (Y841: No), set the special figure 2 standby flag to on (Y842), set the special figure 2 standby command indicating on After (Y843), this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 428, the processing contents of the second special symbol determination processing 12 (Y837) will be described. FIG. 428 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the second special symbol determination processing 12 (Y837). In this second special symbol determination process 12 (Y837), unlike the above-described first special symbol determination process 12 (Y307 in FIG. 419), when it is determined that it is out in the big hit determination in the special symbol lottery, time saving In addition to determination of winning (special figure 2 time saving lottery process 12), determination of small winning lottery (small winning lottery process 12) is executed.

When the second special symbol determination process 12 (Y837) is executed, first, the data of the execution area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is acquired (Y8101), and a lottery is drawn based on the first winning random number 12 table 202ka. Obtain the result (Y8102), if it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (Y8103: Yes), set the lottery result of the second special symbol to a big hit (Y8104), and the acquired hit type counter (first hit Based on the value of the type counter C2), the jackpot design of the special design to be displayed on the first design display device 37 is set (Y8105), and the value indicating the current gaming state is stored in the winning state storage area (Y8107). , the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result is not a big hit (Y8103: No), the special figure 2 time-saving lottery process 12 is executed (Y8106), and this process ends.

Thus, in the present twelfth control example, when it is not a big hit determination in the big hit lottery of the second special symbol, the time saving lottery and the small lottery are executed, so in the first special symbol In comparison, many opportunities are set for the player to be in an advantageous state (time saving state), and it can be said that the second special symbol is a special symbol more advantageous than the first special symbol. In addition, as described above, the variation time of the second special symbol in the normal state is set to a long time (600 seconds), and the gaming efficiency of the player who intends to execute only the second special symbol lottery in the normal state deteriorates. It is configured as follows.

In addition, although the details will be described later, in the special figure 2 time saving lottery process 12 (Y8106), unlike the special figure 1 time saving lottery process 12 (Y8007 in FIG. 421), when the time saving is won, the time saving election fluctuation state flag 203kg The time saving type to be set is determined depending on whether it is on or not. Specifically, the time saving B state is set only when the time saving election fluctuation state flag 203kg is ON. In other words, the time saving B state is set only when the second special symbol wins the time saving during the variable display of the first special symbol indicating that the time saving has been won, and the time saving A state is set in other cases. there is By constructing in this way, even if the second special symbol wins the time reduction when it is not in the time reduction winning variation state, the time reduction B state which is the time reduction state advantageous to the player is not set, so that the first special symbol is not changed. It is possible to prevent the player who executes only the second special symbol lottery from becoming excessively advantageous.

Next, with reference to FIG. 429, the processing content of the special figure 2 time saving lottery process 12 (Y8107) is demonstrated. Figure 429 is the flowchart which shows the contents of special figure 2 time saving lottery processing 12 (Y8107).

When the special figure 2 time saving lottery process 12 (Y8107) is executed, first, the lottery result (time saving winning determination result) is obtained based on the time saving random number 12 table 202kh (Y8201), and it is determined whether the time saving is elected. (Y8202), if it is determined that the time reduction is elected (Y8202: Yes), it is determined whether the time reduction election variation state flag 203kg is ON (Y8203), and it is determined that the time reduction election variation state flag 203kg is ON If it is (Y8203: Yes), the time saving B is set as the time saving design of the special design to be displayed on the first design display device 37 (Y8205), and this processing ends.

If it is determined that the time reduction has not been elected in the process of Y8202 (Y8202: No), based on the value of the acquired hit type counter (first hit type counter C2), the special design to be displayed on the first design display device 37 (Y8206), and the process ends.

In the process of Y8203, when it is determined that the time saving election fluctuation state flag 203kg is off (Y8203: No), time saving A is set as a special time saving pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 (Y8204 ), the process ends.

In this way, in the twelfth control example, when the time reduction winning variation state flag kg is on (that is, the first special symbol has won the time reduction, and the variation display of the first special symbol indicating that the time reduction has been won is being executed Only in case), the time saving B state is set when the second special symbol wins the time saving. By constructing in this way, even if the second special symbol wins the time reduction when it is not in the time reduction winning variation state, the time reduction B state which is the time reduction state advantageous to the player is not set, so that the first special symbol is not changed. It is possible to prevent the player who executes only the second special symbol lottery from becoming excessively advantageous. In addition, within the period until the first special symbol wins the short-time winning and the first special symbol indicating that the short-time winning is stopped and displayed, a new game feature of aiming for the short-time winning of the second special symbol is given to the player. It can be provided, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 430, the small winning lottery process 12 (Y8108), which is one process of the second special symbol determination process 12 (FIG. 428, Y837), will be described. FIG. 430 is a flow chart showing this small winning lottery process 12 (Y8108).

In the small winning lottery process 12 (FIG. 430, Y8108), first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the second special symbol is determined to be a time-saving election, that is, whether the time-saving election of the second special symbol is set ( Y8301).

In the process of Y8301, when it is determined that the time-saving election of the second special symbol is set (Y8301: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of Y8301, if it is determined that the time-saving election of the second special symbol is not set, (Y8301: No), the lottery result is obtained based on the small hit random number 12 table (Y8302), When it is determined that the small hit is won (Y8304: Yes), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired, the small hit type is selected from the small hit type selection 12 table 202kf, and the first symbol display device is displayed. Set the small winning design of the special design to be displayed (Y8305). On the other hand, in the process of Y8304, when it is determined that the small hit is not won (Y8304: No), the process of Y8305 is skipped and the present process ends.

Thus, in the twelfth control example, the jackpot winning, the short-time winning, and the small winning won do not overlap in one second special symbol lottery, thereby suppressing the awarding of multiple benefits to the player, It is configured so that the player does not become excessively advantageous.

In addition, it may be possible to have a configuration in which the jackpot winning or the small winning and the short-time winning overlap. By adopting a configuration in which the time saving state is set, even when the jackpot of the same kind of jackpot type is won, the game state after the jackpot game is finished can be diversified depending on whether or not the time saving win is won. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 431, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 12 (Y838), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process 12 (FIG. 427, Y239), will be described. FIG. 431 is a flow chart showing this second special symbol variation pattern selection process 12 (Y838).

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 12 (FIG. 431, Y838), first, in the second special symbol determination process 12 (FIG. 428, Y8103), whether the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a big hit, that is, It is determined whether or not the jackpot of the second special symbol is set (Y921).

In the process of Y921, if it is determined that the jackpot of the second special symbol is set (Y921: Yes), obtained in the process of Y8105 in the above-described second special symbol determination process 12 (see FIG. 428) Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2, the jackpot type is determined from the special figure 2 jackpot 12 table 202kb2 (see FIG. 411) (Y922), and the process proceeds to Y923.

On the other hand, in the process of Y921, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is out (Y921: No), the process of Y922 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of Y923.

In the process of Y923, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the execution area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (Y923). Next, the variation pattern table (see FIGS. 413 to 416) corresponding to the game state is read out (Y924), and the process proceeds to Y925. The game state is determined based on the value of the time saving winning variation flag and the information stored in the game state storage area 203g. In the process of Y925, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern table (Y925), and then based on the selected variation pattern, the special figure 2 variation pattern command is set (Y926 ).

When the process of Y926 is completed, a special figure 2 stop type command indicating a stop design is set (Y927). Next, the first symbol display device 37 sets the start of variation of the second special symbol (Y928), and ends this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 432, the contents of the second special symbol variation executing process 12 (Y240) executed in the special symbol variation process 12 (see Y104 in FIG. 417) will be described. FIG. 432 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation in-execution process 12 (Y240). In this second special symbol variation in-execution process 12 (Y240), when the subtraction of the variation time of the second special symbol is interrupted, the process of restarting the subtraction and the process of subtracting the variation time are executed. .

When the second special symbol variation executing process (Y240) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set to ON (Y2901). Here, the case where this processing is executed in a state where the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set to ON will be briefly described. As described above, the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set to ON when the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed in a pattern indicating a win (jackpot) while the special figure 2 is fluctuating. Then, when the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set to ON, since the big hit flag 203k is set to ON in the process, the timer interrupt executed every 2 milliseconds by the main controller 110 When the process loops and the next (2 milliseconds after the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set to ON) special symbol variation process 12 (FIG. 417, Y104) is executed, the jackpot in the process of Y231 Since it is determined that it is in progress, the second special symbol variation in-execution process 12 (Y240) is not executed. Then, when the jackpot game ends and it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress in the process of Y231, the second special symbol variation in-execution process 12 (Y240) is executed. By configuring in this way, the state in which the second special symbol variation in-execution process 12 (Y240) is executed in a state where the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set to ON, the jackpot game is completed and the variation It is configured to be the timing of restarting the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation that had been interrupting the subtraction of the time.

Returning to FIG. 432, the description continues. In the process of Y2901, if it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set to ON (Y2901: Yes), then set the special figure 2 fluctuation resume command (Y2902), special figure 2 provisional The stop flag 203kd is set to OFF (Y2903), and the process proceeds to Y2904. On the other hand, in the process of Y2901, if it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is not set to ON (set to OFF) (Y2901: No), Y2902 and Y2903 are skipped and Y2904 to process.

In the process of Y2904, the special figure 2 fluctuation time timer 203kb is updated by subtracting 1 (Y2904), the display of the first symbol display device is updated (Y2905), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 433, the contents of the second special symbol variation stop processing 12 (Y241) will be described. FIG. 433 is a flow chart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation stop processing 12 (Y241). This second special symbol variation stop processing 12 (Y241) is for executing the processing when stopping the variation of the special figure 2, and for the above-described first special symbol variation stop processing (see FIG. 424) , When the lottery result of the special figure 2 is a big hit, in addition to the configuration of interrupting the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (interrupting the subtraction of the fluctuation time), the lottery result of the special figure 2 is a specific jackpot type (jackpot In the case of D), the difference is that a configuration for forcibly stopping the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is provided, and a process that is executed when the lottery result of the special figure 2 is a small hit is added. .

When the second special symbol variation stop processing 12 (Y241) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol variation time has ended (Y901). Whether or not the fluctuation time of the second special symbol has ended is determined by whether or not the counter value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time timer 203kb is 0.

When it is determined that the fluctuation time has ended in the process of Y901 (Y901: Yes), it is determined whether the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is a big hit (Y902), and it is not a big hit ( (Y902: No), then it is determined whether the lottery result of the special figure 2 is a small hit (Y912). In the process of Y910, if it is determined that it is not a small hit (Y912: No), then it is determined whether the lottery result of the special figure 2 is a time-saving election (Y914). When it is determined that it is not time-saving winning, the second special symbol confirmation command is set (Y908), the variation of the second special symbol of the first symbol display device is stopped (Y909), and this processing is terminated.

In the process of Y914, when it is determined that the time saving is won (Y914: Yes), the time saving setting process 12 is executed (Y915), and then the process of Y908 is performed. In addition, since the time saving setting process 12 is the same process as the time saving setting process 12 (Y711) executed as one process of the first special symbol variation stop process 12 (FIG. 424, Y236) described above, detailed description is omitted.

In the process of Y912, when it is determined that the small hit is won (Y912: Yes), the special figure 2 small hit stop process 12 is executed (Y913), and then the process of Y908 is performed. The special figure 2 small hit stop processing 12 (Y913) is forced to stop (discard) or temporarily stop (suspend) the fluctuation display of the first special symbol depending on the small hit type of the won small hit. , which will be detailed later with reference to FIG.

In the process of Y902, when it is determined that it is a jackpot (Y902: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot type is a jackpot D (Y903), and when it is determined that it is not a jackpot D (Y903: No) sets the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203kc to ON (Y904), sets the special figure 2 stop type command indicating the set stop type (Y906), sets the jackpot scenario (Y907), and then , Y908 and Y909.

On the other hand, in the process of Y903, when it is determined that it is a big hit D, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag ke is set to ON (Y905), and the processes of Y906 to Y909 are executed.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, when the jackpot type is the jackpot D, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag ke is set to ON, and in the case of other jackpot types, the special figure By setting the 1 temporary stop flag 203kc to ON, the case where the variation of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped (discarded) depending on the jackpot type, and the case where it is temporarily stopped (interrupted) are variable. can be made

As shown in FIG. 411, the jackpot type determined when the second special symbol hits the jackpot differs depending on the number of variations of the executed second special symbol. , is configured to be easily determined. By constructing in this way, even if the second special symbol cannot win the jackpot and winning continues (so-called addiction), it becomes easy to determine the jackpot type that is advantageous to the player. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's desire to play when he is hooked.

In the process of Y901, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the variation based on the second special symbol being executed (Y901: No), then the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd or the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203kf is turned on (Y910). When it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd or the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203kf is off in the process of Y910 (Y910: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd or the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203kf is ON in the process of Y910 (Y910: Yes), when the first special symbol is stopped with a big hit or time saving winning Since it is the case, the special figure 2 forced stop processing 12 is executed in order to stop (temporarily stop) the variation based on the second special symbol being executed (Y911). In addition, the details of this special figure 2 forced stop processing 12 will be described later with reference to FIG.

Thus, in the second special symbol stop processing 12 (Y241), when the prescribed fluctuation time of the second special symbol during variable display has elapsed (Y901: Yes), the determination result of the second special symbol lottery game A process of stopping the variable display with the indicated symbol is executed. In addition, when the first special symbol is stopped by a symbol indicating a big hit and a big hit game with the first special symbol is executed, or when the first special symbol wins short time and a short time winning fluctuation state is set ( Y910: Yes), a process (Y911) of forcibly stopping the second special symbol during variable display is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 434, special figure 2 forced stop processing 12 (Y911), which is one processing of the second special symbol variation stop processing 12 (FIG. 433, Y241), will be described. FIG. 434 is a flow chart showing this special figure 2 forced stop processing 12 (Y911).

In the special figure 2 forced stop processing 12 (figure 434, Y911), first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203kf is on (Y631). When it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203kf is on (Y631: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203kf is set to off (Y632), then the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203kf Set the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating off (Y633). Then, the variation type of the second special symbol is set to be out (Y634). In addition, although not shown, after the process of Y634, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is deviated and stopped, and the special figure 2 confirmation command of the second special symbol is set.

On the other hand, in the process of Y631, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203kf is not on (Y631: No), since the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is on, the second special symbol A command to temporarily stop (interrupt) the fluctuation is set (Y635), and this process is terminated.

Thus, in this twelfth control example, when the special figure 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is turned on (the timing at which the variation that becomes a big hit with the first special symbol stops), the variation time of the second special symbol has not elapsed Even if it is, it is forcibly interrupted and forcibly stopped. Thus, even if the lottery results are variably displayed at the same time with the first special pattern and the second special pattern, it is sufficient to execute the jackpot game for only one of the lottery results, and gambling can be suppressed. Furthermore, the efficiency of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the twelfth control example, when the first special symbol wins the short-time winning, the variation stop flag kf of the second special symbol is turned on at the start of the variation of the first special symbol. In this twelfth control example, as described above, in the normal state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to a long time (600 seconds). If the variation of the second special symbol is continued when the variation display of the symbol is started, the set time-saving winning variation state ends before the stop display of the second special symbol during variation, A problem may occur that the player cannot execute the lottery for the second special symbol in the time-saving winning fluctuation state.

Here, when the first special symbol wins the short time winning, the fluctuation stop flag kf of the second special symbol is turned on at the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol, so that the fluctuation of the first special symbol won the short working time. is started, the variation of the second special symbol during variation is discarded. It is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the lottery of 2 special symbols cannot be executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 435, special figure 2 small hitting stop processing 12 (Y913), which is one processing of the second special symbol variation stop processing 12 (FIG. 433, y241), will be described. FIG. 435 is a flow chart showing the contents of special figure 2 small hit stop processing 12 (Y913).

In the special figure 2 small per stop processing 12 (figure 435, Y913), first, it is determined whether the small per type is a small per B (Y931), and when it is determined that it is a small per B (Y931: Yes) Sets the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag ke to ON (Y932), and sets the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating ON of the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ke (Y933). Then, a small winning scenario corresponding to the selected small winning type is set (Y934), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Y931, when it is determined that it is not a small hit B (Y931: No), the special figure 1 temporary stop flag kc is set to ON, (Y937), the special figure 1 temporary stop flag kc is ON Set the special figure 1 temporary stop command indicating (Y938), and perform the process of Y934.

As described above, in the twelfth control example, it is possible to discard the first special symbol during fluctuation not only by the specific big win type but also by the specific small win type. As a result, it is possible to make the player interested in the types of small wins, and to improve the interest in the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag is set to ON at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol indicating the small winning B winning, but it is not limited to this, It is also possible to set the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag to ON at the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol that has been elected to the small hit B. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which discards a 1st special design at the time of the start of a small-hit game, and it is good also as a structure which discards at the time of the end of a small-hit game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 436, the contents of the jackpot control process 12 (Y1004) executed in the main process will be described. FIG. 436 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot control process 12 (Y1004). This jackpot control process 12 (Y1004) executes the jackpot end process 12 (Y11613) instead of the jackpot end process 11 (S11651) of the jackpot control process 11 (see FIG. 403) of the eleventh control example described above. The only difference is that other processing is the same as in the eleventh control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 437, the contents of the jackpot ending process 12 (Y11613) will be described. FIG. 437 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot ending process 12 (Y11613). When the jackpot end processing 12 is executed, first, the time saving limit update processing 12 (Y2701) is executed. A detailed description of the time saving limit update process 12 (Y2701) will be described later with reference to FIG. , performs processing for updating (subtracting) the value of the time saving limit number counter 203ja that has already been set.

Here, with reference to FIG. 438, details of time saving limit update process 12 (Y2701), which is one process in jackpot end process 12 (see Y11613 in FIG. 437), will be described. FIG. 438 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving limit update process 12 (Y2701). In this time saving limit update process 12 (Y2701), a process for setting an upper limit value that can continuously set a high probability state of normal symbols and updating the remaining number of times with respect to the set upper limit value is executed. .

In the time saving limit update process 12 (Y2701), first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving limit number counter 203ja is greater than 0 (Y3001). When the value of the time saving limit number counter 203ja is not a value greater than 0, that is, when it is determined that the probability state of the normal symbol at the time of winning the jackpot is a low probability state (Y3001: No), the time saving limit number counter 203ja Since the value that can set the high probability state of the normal design continuously is not set to the value, 10 is set to the value of the time saving limit number counter 203ja (Y3005), and the time saving flag is set to ON (Y3006). Then, this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of Y3001, when it is determined that the value of the time saving limit number counter 203ja is greater than 0 (Y3001: Yes), the value of the time saving limit number counter 203ja is subtracted by 1 (Y3002), then , it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving limit counter 203ja after the subtraction is 0 (Y3003). When it is determined that the value of the time saving limit number counter 203ja after the subtraction is 0 (Y3003: Yes), since the upper limit value for setting the high probability state of the normal symbol is reached continuously, the time saving limit reaching flag 203kh is set. It is set to ON (Y3004), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of Y3004, when it is determined that the value of the reduced time limit number counter 203ja is not 0 (Y3004: No), this process ends.

In the present embodiment, 10 times are set as the time saving limit number of times, but without being limited to this, it may be configured to be determined from a plurality of set numbers such as 20 times and 30 times. .

Returning to FIG. 437, the description continues. After executing the time saving limit update process 12 (Y2701), it is determined whether the time saving limit reaching flag 203kh is ON (Y2702), and when it is determined that the time saving limit reaching flag 203kh is ON (Y2702: Yes) stores information indicating a normal state (low probability state of normal symbols) as a game state set after the end of the jackpot game in the game state storage area 203g (Y2703), and a state command corresponding to the game state after the end of the jackpot game is set (Y2707), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of Y2702, if it is determined that the time saving limit reaching flag 203kh is not ON (Y2702: No), the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) is set as the game state set after the jackpot game ends. The information shown is stored in the gaming state storage area 203g (Y2704), and based on the jackpot type selection 12 table 202kb shown in FIGS. Set (Y2705), set the time saving setting information command corresponding to the setting content (Y2706), and perform the process of Y2707.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, the upper limit value for setting the time-saving state (high-probability state of normal symbols) continuously after the end of the jackpot game is determined, and the state advantageous to the player continues. By limiting the number of times set by , it is possible to suppress the player's gambling spirit from being excessively obtained.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, the high probability state (probability variable state) of the special symbol is not set after the jackpot game is finished, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the probability variable state is set after the jackpot game is finished. It is good also as a structure made.

Although not shown, the details of the effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example will be described. In conventional pachinko machines, when a special symbol (for example, a jackpot symbol) for indicating a specific result is stopped and displayed, a corresponding game state is generally set. For example, when a special symbol wins the jackpot, the player predicts that the special symbol wins the jackpot by the performance during the variable display of the special symbol indicating the jackpot win, and the special symbol is stopped and displayed to indicate that the jackpot win has been won. is displayed, the player can recognize that the jackpot has been won. In this case, since the player can predict in advance that a different game state will be set after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, it is possible to smoothly cope with the change in the game state.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, as described above, when the first special symbol wins short-time winning and the variation of the first special symbol starts, the short-time winning variable state is set. As shown in FIG. 406, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, the first ball entrance 64, which triggers the start of the first special symbol lottery, is when the game ball flows down the left side area of the board surface and when the game ball flows down the right side area. However, the second ball entrance 1641, which triggers the start of the second special symbol, is when the game ball flows down the right side area of the board surface. It is placed in a position where only the ball can be entered.

As a result, for example, when a player who is playing a game (so-called left-handed game) that causes the game ball to flow down the left side of the board surface and enter the ball into the first ball entrance 64 wins a time reduction winning fluctuation If the left-handed game is continued in spite of the state being set, there may occur a problem that the time-saving winning variable state ends without executing the second special symbol lottery.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, when the first special symbol is won in a short time, it is won in a short time before the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that it is in a short time winning fluctuation state. Execute the production to do.

Specifically, when the first special symbol is elected in a short time, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the pseudo symbol stops at the time when a predetermined time has passed (for example, after 10 seconds have passed), A display mode indicating that the time-saving winning variation state has been set is displayed (for example, "entering the time-saving winning variation zone"), and the player hits to the right in order to shoot the game ball aiming at the second ball entrance 1641. ” is displayed.

By displaying in this way, the player can recognize that the time-saving winning variation state has been set, and can play a game with a game method suitable for the game state. At the same time, it is preferable to perform a display to inform the player that the time saving B state is set by winning the big win (or small win) or the time saving win with the second special symbol during the time saving winning fluctuation state.

In addition, if it is determined as a result of pre-reading the winning information that there is winning information for short-time winning in the winning information of the first special symbol held in the normal state (special figure 1 reserved), time-saving Even if a configuration is added to notify that the time-saving winning variation state is set in the next variation of the first special symbol on the stop display screen of the first special symbol executed immediately before the variation of the first special symbol to be won. good. In other words, if there is a special figure 1 hold, in the fluctuation of the first special symbol immediately before the time saving election fluctuation state is set, it is notified that the next fluctuation is a time saving election fluctuation state, and the special figure 1 hold If it does not exist, it is configured to inform that the time saving winning variation state is set after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation of the first special symbol in which the time saving winning variation state is set.

In this way, if there is no special figure 1 suspension, there is a loss of variation time from the start of the time saving election fluctuation to the notification that it is in the time saving election fluctuation state, but there is a special figure 1 reservation In this case, the setting of the time-saving winning variation state is notified in advance, so that the loss of the variation time from the start of the time-saving winning variation to the notification of the time-saving winning variation state is eliminated. Therefore, the player can motivate the player to play the game by making him/her think to maintain the state in which the holding is always accumulated in order to eliminate the loss of the fluctuation time in the time-saving winning fluctuation state.

In addition, it is good also as a structure which alert|reports the fluctuation|variation time of the 1st special design in a time-saving election fluctuation|variation state to a player intelligibly.

As described above, in the twelfth control example, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel), and both special symbols win the jackpot. If so, the big hit game is executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol on the side where the special symbol variation is stopped first (the special symbol is confirmed and displayed), and the special symbol variation is stopped first (the special symbol is confirmed and displayed). In a gaming machine configured to forcibly stop and display the other special symbol variation in a display mode indicating that the lottery result is lost, depending on the jackpot type at the time of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery In any of the special symbol lotteries, it is possible to execute time-saving winning determination.

Then, like the fifth control example described above, a time-saving lottery (time-saving winning decision) is executed before each special symbol variation is started, and when a time-saving winning is made, a time-saving state is set at the special symbol variation stop timing. In this case, when only one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol wins the time saving, the time saving state as the first privilege is set. In addition, if you win the time saving in the first special symbol lottery, the time saving state (time saving A state) that will be the first benefit is set, and if you win the time saving in the second special symbol lottery, the second benefit that is different from the first benefit It is good also as composition by which the time saving state (time saving C) used as a privilege is set.

Furthermore, in the second special symbol lottery executed during the first special symbol variation that is winning the time reduction, when the time reduction is won, the third benefit that is more advantageous than the first benefit and the second benefit is given. It is configured so that the state (time saving B state) can be set. By constructing in this way, in the pachinko machine 10 constructed so as to be able to execute the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery at the same time (in parallel), the timing of short-time winning in each special symbol lottery is achieved. It is possible to set a time saving state in which different benefits are given accordingly.

Regarding the privilege to be granted, for example, it may be a third privilege in which the time saving end condition is less likely to be satisfied than the first privilege or the second privilege, or a special symbol lottery may be executed more easily than the first privilege or the second privilege. 3 It is good as a privilege.

Furthermore, the timing at which the time saving state of the third privilege is set may be the timing at which the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed first among the special symbol variations that are executed in parallel, or the special symbol variation is stopped later. The displayed timing is also acceptable. Also, regardless of before or after the stop display timing, it may be the timing when the previously executed special symbol variation is stop-displayed, or the timing when the later-executed special symbol variation is stop-displayed. Moreover, the timing at which a specific special symbol type is stopped and displayed may be used.

By constructing in this way, in the pachinko machine 10 capable of simultaneously (parallelly) executing lotteries for a plurality of special symbol types, a jackpot is won in each special symbol lottery, and an excessive amount is paid to the player at the same time. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a privilege (jackpot game) is awarded.

Furthermore, even if one special symbol lottery wins a big win disadvantageous to the player, the other special symbol lottery wins a big win advantageous to the player before the winning result is stopped (confirmed display). It is possible to elect. In this case, by using the variable time until the special symbol lottery result is stopped and displayed, it is preferable to execute a variable performance suggesting that the player has won a disadvantageous win. As a result, the player can be made to think that he or she has won a disadvantageous win, so that the other special symbol lottery can be executed willingly during the fluctuation time.

In addition, it may be configured such that a shorter variation time is more likely to be set when winning a jackpot that is advantageous to the player than when winning a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player. As a result, it is possible to win an advantageous win in the other special symbol lottery while one of the special symbols won in a disadvantageous win fluctuates, and stop display (fixed display) of the winning result prior to the winning result in a disadvantageous win. can.

In addition, in the 12th control example, the special symbols that were won in the short time period are changed to a long time, and the short time winning fluctuation state is set, but this is not the only option. By setting a big win winning fluctuation state and setting the other special symbol to have a short change during the big win winning fluctuation state, it is possible to acquire a prize ball by a small winning game.

<Thirteenth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 439 to 463. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example described above in that the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 are partially changed, and voice lamp control is performed. The difference is that the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the device 113 are partially modified. Also, the control contents executed by the MPU of the main controller 110 and the control contents executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed. The contents other than that are the same, and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the fifth control example described above, the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), variable state ( High probability state of special design, high probability state of normal design), second probability variable state (high probability state of special design, low probability state of normal design) can be set, and winning a jackpot in a special design lottery. The probability state of each pattern (special pattern, normal pattern) can be shifted from the low probability state to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot game executed based on the above. Also, after the end of the above-mentioned jackpot game, and when other end conditions (for example, end conditions established when the number of executions of the special symbol lottery reaches a predetermined number) are satisfied, each symbol (special symbol, It was configured so that the probability state of the normal symbol) can be shifted from the high probability state to the low probability state.

Furthermore, in the fifth control example described above, as an opportunity for shifting the probability state of normal symbols from a low probability state to a high probability state, an opportunity other than the special symbol lottery jackpot winning is provided, and the lottery result of the special symbol lottery In a part of the lottery result (loss) different from the jackpot winning, the opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern is established.

In other words, it is possible to provide a privilege in which a high-probability state of normal symbols is set even to a player who has not won a big hit in the special symbol lottery. By constructing in this way, in one special symbol lottery, the player is provided separately with the lottery result in which the jackpot game is executed and the lottery result in which the time-saving state (high-probability state of normal symbols) is set. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the types of lottery results that are advantageous to the player.

However, even in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example described above, due to the nature of granting benefits based on the lottery results of the special symbol lottery that is executed, even though the special symbol lottery is executed multiple times, This situation can continue for a long time, and there is a problem that the player's desire to play may be lowered depending on the result of the special symbol lottery that is executed.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example is capable of giving a benefit that is advantageous to the player when the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed (number of times of special symbol lottery) satisfies a predetermined condition. Configure. By constructing in this way, a privilege can be given to a player who has been playing a game for executing the special symbol lottery for a long time regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery, so that the player's willingness to play is reduced. You can prevent it from happening.

Here, the privilege (ceiling privilege) granted when the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed (the number of times of special symbol lottery) satisfies the predetermined conditions is the special symbol lottery where the lottery result is other than the jackpot winning (out) is continuously executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 500 times), and is configured to set a game state (third time-saving state) that makes the special symbol lottery relatively easy to execute. are doing.

In other words, in the special pattern lottery in the normal state (low probability state of special patterns, low probability state of normal patterns), if the jackpot is not won 500 times in a row (when the number of times of addiction reaches 500 times), the ceiling privilege is provided, and a game state (third time saving state) that is advantageous to the player is set. By constructing in this way, it is possible to facilitate the continuation of the game for the player who has continued the game for a long time without winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery, and to facilitate the improvement of the operation of the game. .

In addition, even if the pachinko machine 10 (so-called Hamari machine) has a large number of special symbol lotteries executed after the previous jackpot game is over, a new player who aims to receive the ceiling privilege can Since the game is executed, the operation of the game can be easily improved. In particular, in the pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to set a plurality of stages of setting values with different jackpot winning probabilities, even if the pachinko machine 10 has a set value (low setting) with a relatively low jackpot winning probability, the ceiling privilege will be increased. Since the player who aims to be awarded can continue to play the game, it is possible to suppress the operation of the pachinko machine 10 from being remarkably lowered by installing the pachinko machine 10 with low settings. .

In addition, in the present thirteenth control example, when the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set, time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols ) is set, specifically, if the time saving state set based on winning the time saving lottery is set (first time saving state), the game with almost the same content is executed, and is configured to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether the currently set game state is the normal state or the first time-saving state.

Then, according to the game state (game state at the time when the number of times of hooking reaches 500 times) at the time when the condition for giving the ceiling privilege (the third time saving state is set) is satisfied, it is given as a ceiling privilege The contents of the benefits are different. Specifically, when the ceiling privilege is granted in the state where the first time-saving state is set rather than the ceiling privilege is granted in the state where the normal state is set, the privilege that is advantageous to the player (The 3rd time-saving state which is hard to finish) is comprised so that it may be provided. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the set game state.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 in the present thirteenth control example is configured so as to be short-time winning with a high probability (1/2) when the special symbol lottery is executed, and most of the time-saving winnings occur for a short period of time. It is configured to set the first time saving state of (for one special symbol variation). By configuring in this way, the game state is frequently switched between the normal state and the first time saving state until the ceiling privilege is given. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the game state at the time when the condition for awarding the ceiling privilege is met.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example, when the special symbol lottery is executed, the game state (valid game state) in which the number of special symbol lotteries until the ceiling privilege is granted is updated It is configured to be able to set a game state (invalid game state) that is not played.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 in the present thirteenth control example is configured to be able to set the second variable probability state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), and the second variable probability state is set. If it is, the game (left-handed game) similar to the normal state and the first time-saving state is configured to be executed. That is, it is configured to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the set game state is the normal state, the first time-saving state, or the second variable probability state.

Then, the state in which the second variable probability state is set becomes an invalid gaming state, and when the special symbol lottery is executed during the second variable probability state, the number of special symbol lotteries until the ceiling privilege is granted is updated. configured to prevent

By configuring in this way, for a player who is running a left-handed game (a player who is running one of the normal state, the first time-saving state, and the second probability variable state), the current Since it is possible to make it difficult to discriminate between the valid game state and the invalid game state, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the number of special symbol lotteries required until the ceiling privilege is awarded. In addition, according to the length of the period in which the second variable probability state is set, the number of special symbol lotteries (the number of special symbol lotteries to be executed after the previous jackpot game ends) that satisfies the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege is set. Since it can be made different, even if only the same number of times (for example, 500 times) is specified as the number of special symbol lotteries for which the ceiling privilege is granted, the ceiling privilege can be granted at various timings, It is possible to provide a player who aims to receive a ceiling privilege with the pleasure of predicting the number of special pattern lotteries until the ceiling privilege is granted.

In addition, in the fifth control example described above, by shifting the normal symbol probability state from the low probability state to the high probability state, it is possible to execute a game (right-handed game) in which the special symbol lottery is relatively easily executed. However, in the thirteenth control example, in addition to the configuration used in the fifth control example described above, the special symbol lottery is performed without shifting the normal symbol probability state from the low probability state to the high probability state. It is configured so that a relatively easy game (right-handed game) can be executed.

Specifically, in the third time-saving state given as a ceiling privilege, while setting the low probability state of the normal pattern, only the variable time of the normal pattern is varied, so that the special pattern lottery is relatively easy to execute. (Right-handed game) is configured to be executable. That is, in the thirteenth control example, as a game state in which the special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, the game state (second time saving state) in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set and the low probability of the normal symbol A game state (third time saving state) in which the state is set can be set.

By configuring in this way, even in a situation where the opportunity (for example, jackpot winning) for shifting the probability state of the normal symbol from the low probability state to the high probability state is not established, the special symbol lottery is executed. Since it is possible to vary the easiness (shift from a state in which the special symbol lottery is relatively difficult to execute to a state in which the special symbol lottery is relatively easy to execute), the player can receive special prizes at various timings. It is possible to provide games with different easiness of execution of symbol lottery.

In addition, in the fifth control example described above, as a game state in which the special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than when the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set, normal symbols Since only the game state (time saving state, variable probability state) in which the high probability state is set can be set, the game state in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set is the game in which the special symbol lottery is easily executed. It was called a state (time saving state, right-handed game state), but in this thirteenth control example, as described above, in a part of the game state (first time saving state) in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set , In a part of the game state (second time saving state) in which the ease of execution of the special symbol lottery is configured to be the same as the normal state and the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the normal state It is configured to make it easier to execute the special symbol lottery.

Therefore, instead of explaining the probability state of each symbol that is actually set, when simply explaining the ease of executing the special symbol lottery, regardless of the probability state of the normal symbol, the special symbol lottery The game state (first time-saving state, second probability variable state) in which the ease of execution is the same as the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is normal state, or Called a left-handed game state, a game state (second time reduction state, third time reduction state) in which special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is a time reduction state, Alternatively, it will be described as a right-handed game state.

In addition, in the thirteenth control example, based on the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the left-handed gaming state (normal state, first time saving state, second probability variable state), the same benefits as the ceiling benefits can be given. It consists of Specifically, in a part of cases where a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery executed during a left-handed game state, a period (round game number) during which the jackpot game is executed is shorter than other jackpot wins, and After the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to set a second time-saving state in which the same time-saving end condition (time-saving number of times) as the third time-saving state that can be granted as a ceiling privilege is set. Furthermore, in a part of the case where the time reduction is won in the special symbol lottery executed during the left-handed game state, the second time reduction state can be set, and when the second time reduction state is set based on the time reduction winning. , It is configured to be able to set the same time-saving end condition (time-saving number of times) as the third time-saving state that can be given as a ceiling privilege.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to give a privilege equivalent to the ceiling privilege to the player who is playing the left-handed game before the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied. , it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the granting condition of the ceiling privilege. In addition, the event of setting the second time-saving state based on winning a jackpot or winning a time-saving lottery in a special pattern lottery is made to make the player think that the third time-saving state is set as the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege are established. Therefore, for players who believe that a small number of special symbol lotteries may be set as a condition for granting ceiling benefits, the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the previous jackpot game ends Even if the number of times is different from the number of times of special symbol lottery that satisfies the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game aiming at granting the ceiling privilege, thereby improving the performance of the game.例文帳に追加can improve performance.

Further, although detailed explanation will be given later, in this thirteenth control example, during the left-handed game, the remaining period (remaining special symbol lottery number of times) until the granting condition of the ceiling privilege is satisfied is indicated to the player. A suggestive effect (ceiling reaching suggestive effect) is configured to be executable. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to predict whether or not the condition for providing the ceiling privilege is likely to be established (soon to be established) based on the performance result of the ceiling reaching suggestion performance. , it is possible to make it easier for the player to play for a long time while expecting that the ceiling privilege will be given.

It should be noted that, when determining the production mode of this ceiling reaching suggestion production, in addition to the information until the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied, the second time saving state similar to the third time saving state that can be granted as the above-mentioned ceiling privilege It is configured such that the mode of presentation is determined in consideration of information regarding whether or not the condition for which is set is satisfied. By configuring in this way, when the conditions for setting the second time-saving state similar to the third time-saving state that can be granted as the ceiling privilege are satisfied, the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is established as the ceiling reaching suggestion effect. The same effect mode as in the case of a situation where there is a high possibility that the game will be played is determined. Therefore, the event that the second time-saving state similar to the ceiling privilege is set based on the special symbol lottery winning the jackpot or the time-saving winning is set as the third time-saving state when the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege are established. It is possible to make it easy for the player to think.

<Regarding the effect contents of the thirteenth control example>
First, with reference to FIGS. 439 to 441, the contents of characteristic effects among various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example can set a game state (right-handed game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the number of executions of the special symbol lottery, compared to the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example described above. It consists of

Specifically, when it is determined that the number of executions of the special symbol lottery has reached a predetermined number (500 times), the special symbol variation for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol lottery (500th special symbol lottery). After is displayed as a stop, the ceiling privilege can be given as a relief measure. In this thirteenth control example, as the ceiling privilege, a right-handed game state (third time-saving state) that can make it easier to execute a special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery) than a left-handed game state is set. It is configured to give benefits.

Then, when the special symbol lottery is executed in the left-handed game state (for example, the normal state or the first time-saving state), the period until the ceiling privilege is given (the number of special symbol lotteries) is predicted to the player. As an effect for causing the user to reach the ceiling, a motion suggesting that the user has reached the ceiling is configured to be executable. By structuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the period (the number of times of special pattern lottery) until the ceiling privilege is given by grasping the performance mode of the ceiling reaching suggesting performance.

In addition, since it is possible to make the player grasp that the ceiling privilege will be granted soon (that there is a high possibility that the ceiling privilege will be granted) before the ceiling privilege is actually granted, there is no foreshadowing. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the ceiling privilege is granted without the ceiling privilege and the player hardly receives the benefit of the ceiling privilege.

In the thirteenth control example, as the performance mode of the ceiling reaching suggestion performance, the performance mode of "strong suggestion" in which the expectation that the ceiling privilege is given is high, and the ceiling privilege is given rather than the "strong suggestion" production mode. At least a "weak suggestion" production mode with a low degree of expectation to be made can be set. It consists of A specific description will be given later with reference to FIG. 448, but in this thirteenth control example, when selecting the effect mode of the ceiling reaching suggestion effect, the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the previous jackpot game is completed, That is, the number of times that the special symbol lottery that the lottery result is other than the big hit (lost) is continuously executed (the number of times of addiction), the result of the special symbol lottery that is the target of the variable effect that the ceiling reaching suggesting effect is executed, It is configured to select an effect mode based on.

In this way, by configuring the performance mode to be selected based on the number of hooks, the performance mode of the ceiling reaching suggestive performance is selected based on the actual period until the ceiling privilege is given (remaining number of hooks). Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect with high reliability for the player. In addition, in this thirteenth control example, based on the result of the special symbol lottery (based on the results of the jackpot lottery and the time-saving lottery), the same privilege as the ceiling privilege can be given, and the target of the ceiling reaching suggestion effect Even if the result of the special pattern lottery may give the same benefits as the ceiling benefits, it is configured to make it easier to select the “strong suggestion” production mode, which has a high expectation that the ceiling benefits will be given. are doing.

By configuring in this way, even if the same benefits as the ceiling benefits are granted based on the results of the special pattern lottery (based on the results of the jackpot lottery and the short-time lottery), the ceiling benefits are given to the player. It can be made easy to think that it is given. Therefore, it is possible for the player to play the game while expecting that the ceiling privilege will be granted at more timing than the timing at which the predetermined condition for granting the ceiling privilege (the number of special symbol lottery times) is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

As shown in FIG. 439, in the reaching-the-ceiling suggesting effect, the character displayed in the effect mode (middle-ceiling mode) after reaching the ceiling is displayed on the display screen. 439(a) is the case where "weak suggestion" is set as the performance mode of the ceiling reaching suggestion performance, which is a performance mode that is more likely to be selected when the period until the ceiling privilege is given is longer than when the period is short. FIG. 439(b) shows an example of a display screen displayed in FIG. 439(b), as a production mode of the ceiling reaching suggestion production, a short period until the ceiling privilege is given is better than a long period. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when "strong suggestion", which is a presentation mode that is likely to be selected, is set.

439(a), a character 809 resembling an angel crosses the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. A performance is performed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "Angel found! Ceiling?..." is displayed as a guidance mode for guiding the player that the ceiling reaching suggesting effect has been executed.

Here, as described above, the production mode "weak suggestion" shown in FIG. In the 13th control example, the frequency at which the ceiling-reaching suggestion effect is executed becomes higher as the period until the ceiling privilege is given (until the ceiling is reached) becomes shorter. Therefore, even in the production mode "weak suggestion" shown in FIG. You can play games.

The display screen shown in FIG. 439(a) is a display screen during special symbol fluctuation for showing the lottery result of the 250th special symbol lottery after the end of the previous jackpot game. "250 times" is displayed in the small display area Dm7 as a mode of notifying the number of times of addiction for indicating the number of times of the special symbol lottery executed since then. That is, in the thirteenth control example, in order to make it easier for the player to grasp the cumulative value of the number of special symbol lotteries (number of times of addiction) during the period in which the left-handed game state continues, a display mode indicating the number of times of addiction is displayed. configured as possible.

By configuring in this way, the period until the ceiling privilege is given based on the effect mode of the effect suggesting reaching the ceiling to be executed and the number of hits displayed in the small display area Dm7 (the time until reaching the ceiling) period) can be made easier for the player to predict.

Further, as shown in FIG. 439(a), in the left-handed game state, the reserved icons hr1 to hr4 corresponding to the reserved memory (special figure 1 reserved) of the first special symbol lottery mainly executed are displayed in the small display area Dm9. 439(a), in the example shown in FIG. 439(a), it is in a state of acquiring three special figures 1 pending (see small display area Dm1a), so in the small display area Dm9 , three pending icons hr1 to hr3 are displayed.

On the other hand, when "strong suggestion" is set as the effect mode of reaching the ceiling suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. An effect is executed to show that the degree of expectation to be played is high.

FIG. 439(b) is a display screen during special symbol fluctuation for showing the result of the special symbol lottery which is the 499th special symbol lottery executed after the last jackpot game is finished, and the last time. "499 times" is displayed in the small display area Dm7 as a hamari times notification mode for indicating the number of times of the special symbol lottery executed after the end of the jackpot game. As a display mode for indicating that the currently executed ceiling reaching suggestion effect is "strong suggestion", a character 809z that is more gorgeous than the "weak suggestion" character 809 (see FIG. 439(a)) is displayed. Is displayed. In this way, as the effect mode of the ceiling reaching suggestion effect, the effect mode "strong suggestion" which is likely to be set when the ceiling privilege is likely to be given (the period until the ceiling privilege is given is short) is more likely to be set than the other effect mode "weak suggestion". Rather, by configuring to display a gorgeous character in terms of appearance, depending on the aspect of the character displayed when the ceiling reaching suggestion effect is executed, the ceiling privilege is easily granted (the period until it is It is possible to make it easy to visually determine whether the situation is short or not.

In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "It's an archangel! The ceiling is coming soon" is displayed as a guidance mode for guiding the player that the ceiling reaching suggestion effect executed this time is "strong suggestion". be done. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to determine whether or not the ceiling privilege is likely to be granted (the period until the award is short).

In addition, in the display screen shown in FIG. 439 (b), because it is in the state of acquiring two special figure 1 pending (see small display area Dm1a), the small display area Dm9 has two pending icons hr1, hr2 is displayed.

It should be noted that the fact that the timing for granting the ceiling privilege is approaching is not executed by the ceiling reaching suggestion effect executed in the main display area Dm of the display screen, but by the pending icon displayed in the small display area Dm9. It may be possible to suggest by changing the display mode of, for example, among the acquired special figures 1 pending, specifying means for specifying the range of special figures 1 pending digested during the left-handed gaming state The range specified by the specifying means and the range other than the specified range are provided with different display modes of the suspended icons, different sizes of the displayed suspended icons, and different displayed areas. It may be configured to

In addition, as a look-ahead effect executed using the hold icon, a display mode with a high expectation of winning a jackpot is held special figure 1 corresponding to the first special symbol lottery executed before the ceiling privilege is given. It is possible to set different display modes when set to the reserved icon and when set to the reserved icon of the special figure 1 reservation corresponding to the first special pattern lottery executed after the ceiling privilege is granted. may be configured.

Further, the pachinko machine is configured so that the contents of the privilege given based on the winning of the jackpot are different depending on whether the jackpot is won before the ceiling privilege is given and when the jackpot is won after the ceiling privilege is given. In the case of the machine 10, it is preferable to display the pending icon in a display mode capable of suggesting the content of the privilege given based on the winning of the jackpot. By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide the player with information combining the expectation level of winning the jackpot and the expectation level of granting the ceiling privilege by the look-ahead effect using the pending icon.

In addition, as a look-ahead effect, a first suggestion mode for suggesting the timing at which the ceiling privilege is given, a second suggestion mode for suggesting a jackpot winning, and a third suggestion mode for suggesting a short-time winning by a short-time lottery. and , respectively, can be set as the display modes of the pending icon, and a combined display mode combining two or more of the suggested modes described above can be displayed as the display mode of one pending icon. good. Also, in this case, it is preferable to configure so that the same display mode (concept including a difference that makes it difficult for the player to distinguish) can be set as the combination display mode corresponding to the different combination.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting the subsequent game situation based on the display mode of the pending icon displayed as the look-ahead effect. In addition, by comprehensively determining the game situation including various information (for example, the number of starts, etc.) displayed on other display screens, the subsequent game indicated by the display mode of the hold icon displayed as a prefetch effect It is possible to improve the accuracy of predicting the situation.

Next, the contents of the effect executed when the ceiling privilege is awarded will be described. FIG. 440(a) shows an example of the display screen displayed during the special symbol variation (ceiling reaching variation) in which the ceiling privilege (right-handed gaming state) is set after the special symbol variation being executed is stopped and displayed. FIG. 440(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during a right-handed game state (in-ceiling mode) given as a ceiling privilege.

Here, in the present thirteenth control example, the ceiling A privilege (right-handed game state) is configured to be settable. In addition, when the ceiling privilege is set, the content of the ceiling privilege (degree of advantage to the player) is changed according to the set game state (normal state or first time saving state). there is

Then, at least a part of the content of the ceiling privilege to be granted this time is notified to the player by the performance mode of the ceiling reaching variation performance for notifying that the ceiling privilege is to be granted. By constructing in this way, not only is it possible to inform the player that the ceiling privilege is to be awarded, but also the contents thereof can be notified at the time of awarding the ceiling privilege, thereby providing an easy-to-understand game. can do.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 440(a), when the ceiling reaching variation effect is executed, the heavenly background corresponding to the mid-ceiling mode is displayed as the background image of the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81. is displayed in the small display area Dm7 as a display mode for indicating that the player has reached (will reach) the ceiling. Then, the character 809 displayed in the reaching-the-ceiling suggestive effect congratulates that the ceiling privilege is given, and the reaching-the-ceiling variable effect is executed. In addition, the contents 810a of the treasure chest 810 are displayed in a display mode including information "100" for informing the content of the ceiling privilege of this time.

Furthermore, on the lower right side of the main display area Dm, as a guidance mode for guiding the player to the game method after the right-handed game state (third time-saving state) is set as the ceiling privilege, The comment "Yes" is displayed. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, as a notification mode for suggesting that the ceiling privilege will be given, a comment of "Ceiling Reached!! Time Reduction 100 GET!!" is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 440(a), in the ceiling reaching fluctuation effect executed during the fluctuation period of the special symbol fluctuation in which the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is established, special symbols from after the end of the previous jackpot game are displayed in the small display area Dm7. Information indicating the number of lotteries (information displayed in the small display area Dm7 in FIG. 439(a)) is configured not to be displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to easily determine the number of special symbol lotteries in which the ceiling reaching variation effect is executed. Therefore, in order to grasp the number of times of the special symbol lottery that can satisfy the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege, it is necessary to always grasp the number of times of the special symbol lottery before the ceiling reaching fluctuation effect is executed. On the other hand, it is possible to make the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 always more interesting even during the left-handed game state.

In addition, the above-mentioned ceiling reaching fluctuation effect is performed not only when the number of lotteries of the special symbol lottery executed after the end of the previous jackpot game is the number of times (500 times) that the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied, but also when the ceiling privilege If you win a jackpot where the same benefits (right-handed gaming state) are given, or if you win a specific time-saving privilege (right-handed gaming state) that is the same as the ceiling privilege (right-handed gaming state) It consists of

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether or not the privilege given this time is the ceiling privilege. In addition, when making it difficult for the player to distinguish the type of privilege that is actually granted by executing the ceiling reaching variation effect shown in FIG. It is preferable to change at least a part of the effect mode of the ceiling reaching variation effect executed according to the type of privilege. By configuring in this way, it is possible to discriminate the type of privilege given this time only to a player who can identify a slight difference in the effect mode of the ceiling reaching variation effect executed.

In addition, the performance period during which the ceiling reaching variation performance is executed, that is, the variation time of the special pattern variation during which the ceiling reaching variation performance is executed is varied without changing the performance mode of the ceiling reaching variation performance to be executed. For example, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation for which the ceiling privilege is given (the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation that is lost) is set to the basic time (for example, 10 seconds), the jackpot is won. The variation time of the special symbol variation (the variation time of the special symbol variation corresponding to the specific jackpot winning) when the ceiling reaching variation performance is executed based on 11 seconds, and the ceiling reaching variation performance is performed based on the short winning time. In this case, the variation time of the special symbol (the variation time of the special symbol variation corresponding to the specific short-time winning) may be set to 12 seconds. By configuring in this way, while executing the ceiling reaching fluctuation production in the same production mode, the performance period of the ceiling reaching fluctuation production can be varied according to the type of privilege to be given. Therefore, while suppressing an increase in the performance data for executing the ceiling reaching fluctuation production, it is possible to execute ceiling reaching fluctuation production in different modes according to the type of privilege to be granted. It is possible to discriminate the type of privilege given this time only to a player who can identify a slight difference in ceiling reaching fluctuation performance (difference in performance period).

Although detailed description is omitted, in the thirteenth control example, the ceiling reaching fluctuation effect shown in FIG. In the ceiling reaching variation effect (fake ceiling reaching effect) executed in this case, the background image (heaven image) of the mid-ceiling mode is displayed, and the character 809 appears, similarly to the display screen shown in FIG. 440(a). Then, an effect to open the treasure box 810 is executed. Then, after the display mode (contents 810a with the word "unfortunate" attached) indicating that the ceiling privilege is not granted from the treasure box 810 is displayed, the background image is switched to the normal background image. be.

During the execution period of the false ceiling reaching effect, the ceiling reward is displayed in the sub display area Ds while the effect is being executed using the same effect mode as the ceiling reward effect executed when the ceiling reward is given. is displayed as a mode indicating that there is a high possibility that is granted, and when the effect indicating the effect result of the false ceiling effect is executed, the ceiling privilege is displayed in the sub display area Ds. A comment "Unfortunately!!" is displayed as a mode indicating that it is not granted.

In this way, by configuring the false ceiling effect to be executable in a situation where the ceiling privilege is not actually given, the effect result indicating that the ceiling privilege is not given is temporarily displayed as the effect result of the ceiling reaching effect. When a performance mode (resurrection performance) in which a performance in which the ceiling privilege is not given is executed after the display is displayed, the ceiling reaching performance being executed does not actually give the ceiling privilege. It is possible to make it easy to think that it is a fake ceiling reaching effect shown.

As described above, in the thirteenth control example, even if the ceiling reaching effect (including the false ceiling reaching effect) is executed, the ceiling reward is not given, and the ceiling reward is given. It merely indicates to the player that it is likely to be done. Therefore, in the small display area Dm7 of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 shown in FIG. A display mode is displayed. In other words, among the characters "Ceiling!?" It becomes a display mode indicating that it is not something that gives a definite notification that it will be given. In this control example and other control examples as well, if a character "!?" is used to indicate

Also, in the thirteenth control example, as shown in FIGS. 439(a) and 439(b), during the left-handed game state, the number of special symbol fluctuations ( The number of start times) is displayed, and the number of special symbol fluctuations (number of remaining fluctuations) required until the ceiling privilege is granted (until the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied) is not displayed. However, without being limited to this, for example, the number of remaining fluctuations until the ceiling privilege is granted may be configured to be able to be notified. By constructing in this way, it is possible for the player to select whether or not to continue the game after grasping the number of special symbol variations required until the ceiling privilege is awarded.

In addition, when the information corresponding to the number of special symbol fluctuations (for example, the number of remaining fluctuations) required until the ceiling privilege is given (for example, the number of remaining fluctuations) can be notified to the player, the actual residual fluctuation Information for performance corresponding to a value different from the number of times (for example, the number of times greater than the remaining number of times) is configured to be displayed on the display screen, and the performance displayed on the display screen when the ceiling privilege is actually given. The information for use may be information for presentation indicating that the number of remaining fluctuations required until the ceiling privilege is granted is zero.

In this case, for example, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the ceiling privilege is given is 200 times, the display mode of "300 remaining times" is displayed as the effect information displayed on the display screen. In other words, the remaining number of times greater than the actual number of remaining fluctuations is displayed as information for effect. Then, when the variation time of the special symbol variation to be executed is long, or when the variation performance is executed in a performance mode with a high expectation of winning a big win, or when the player can operate the operation means, the operation performance is executed, Based on the establishment of update conditions such as when the player operates the operation means during the operation presentation, the value indicated by the presentation information displayed on the display screen is updated so as to approach the actual number of remaining fluctuations. (subtraction).

By configuring in this way, the remaining number of times displayed as the information for effect can be reduced more than the number of executions of the special symbol lottery, so that the effect of the effect to be executed can be provided to the player. As a result, it is possible to make the player think that the ceiling privilege has become easier to be given (the number of remaining fluctuations until the ceiling privilege is given has been shortened), and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, the remaining number of times displayed as information for performance can be reduced more than the number of executions of the special symbol lottery, so that the result of the special symbol lottery can be obtained before the ceiling privilege is granted. However, if the lottery result (jackpot C13 winning or time-saving election with the second time-saving state set) that can give the same benefits (second time-saving state) as the ceiling privilege, the result of the special symbol lottery Performance information indicating that the remaining number of times displayed as the performance information is zero until the special symbol for indicating is stopped and displayed, and the number of remaining fluctuations required until the ceiling privilege is given is 0. It is possible to make it easy to execute the effect of significantly updating (subtracting) to , without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

By configuring in this way, the content of the production executed when the ceiling privilege and the equivalent privilege (second time saving state) is granted, and the content of the production executed when the ceiling privilege is granted Since deviation can be suppressed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which privilege has been granted. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game while thinking that the ceiling privilege will be given at various timings (the number of addictive times).

Next, in the ceiling mode for indicating the period during which the ceiling privilege (right-handed game state in which the third time saving state is set) is given, as shown in FIG. 440 (b), in the main display area Dm A character 801 resembling a rabbit flies around in heaven, and the characters "in the ceiling" are displayed to indicate that the current mode is in the ceiling mode. Then, as a guidance display mode for guiding the game method to the player, the characters "Right-handed" are displayed in the small display area Dm4, indicating the remaining period until the ceiling privilege ends. As the period display mode, characters of "last 90 times" are displayed in the small display area Dm7.

In the display screen shown in FIG. 440(b), "100" indicating that 100 times of reduction in working hours are given is displayed as the content of the ceiling privilege in the ceiling reaching variation effect (see FIG. 440(a)). After that, since it is the display screen when the special symbol lottery is executed 10 times, the value of "100" indicating the content of the ceiling privilege notified to the player when the ceiling privilege is awarded is the value of the special symbol lottery. is decremented each time is executed, and "90" is displayed.

In this way, by notifying the player of the period until the ceiling privilege ends (the period during which the mid-ceiling mode continues), it is possible to prevent the ceiling privilege from suddenly ending. In addition, in the thirteenth control example, when the right-handed game state is set, the privilege (jackpot The game content and the game state set after the end of the jackpot game are configured so that advantageous benefits that are advantageous to the player can be easily given. Therefore, the sub-display area Ds displays the comment "You can win a big prize now!".

Although detailed description will be described later, in this thirteenth control example, in the left-handed game state in which the normal state and the first time-saving state are set, and the right-handed game state in which the third time-saving state is set, The special pattern lottery is configured so that the probability of winning the jackpot in the special pattern lottery is the same (5/1000), and the special pattern lottery that does not win the jackpot is performed in the left-handed game state in which the normal state and the first time-saving state are set. When the game is executed 500 times in succession, the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied, and the third time-saving state (right-handed game state) is set as the ceiling privilege. Then, it is configured so that a right-handed game state is more likely to give a privilege that is advantageous to the player when a big win is won than a left-handed game state.

In other words, during the right-handed gaming state described above, if the remaining period (number of remaining special symbol lottery times) until the ceiling privilege is granted is reduced, the special symbol lottery executed during the left-handed gaming state It is novel that the game is played while expecting that the special symbol lottery will not win the big prize instead of expecting the big win, and the player expects that the special symbol lottery will win the big prize after the right-handed game state is set. It is possible to provide great playability. Here, in the conventional type pachinko machine 10, although there is a case in which the degree of advantage is varied with respect to the privilege given based on the winning of the jackpot according to the set game state, any game state is set. Even if there is a special pattern lottery, it is more advantageous to the player in that a privilege is given to the player when the jackpot is won than when the jackpot is not won. is set, the player has a monotonous playability of aiming for a big win in a special symbol lottery.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example is configured to be able to give a privilege based on the number of lotteries instead of the lottery result of the special symbol lottery. Specifically, during the left-handed gaming state in which the normal state or the first time-saving state is set, the right-handed gaming state (second 3 o'clock short state) is set. Then, when the jackpot is won in the state where the third time saving state is set, it becomes easier to execute the jackpot game with a large number of round games than when the normal state or the first time saving state is set. It is configured as follows.

By configuring in this way, when the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the left-handed game state in which the normal state or the first time-saving state is set for the player approaches 500 times, It is possible to provide a novel game property of expecting a big win in the executed special symbol lottery. That is, it is configured so that a part of the game period during which the player executes the special symbol lottery can be set as a special period during which the player does not expect to win a big win.

Therefore, the player is provided with a game period in which the player expects to win a big win in the special symbol lottery and a game period (special period) in which the player expects to not win a big win in the special symbol lottery (lost the lottery). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game earlier than the conventional type pachinko machine 10 which always aims at winning a jackpot.

Next, with reference to FIG. 441, an effect (additional effect) when the remaining period of the ceiling mode is added will be described. FIG. 441 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during an additional effect in which information (remaining number of times) display for indicating the remaining period of the mid-ceiling mode is added (added).

In the thirteenth control example, in the ceiling reaching variation effect (see FIG. 440 (a)) executed when the ceiling privilege is granted, the content of the privilege (time reduction number) to be granted this time can be notified to the player. Although it is configured, the content of the benefits (number of times of time reduction) notified in the ceiling reaching fluctuation effect is a dedicated selection table (ceiling reaching time effect selection table 222lb), with the upper limit of the number of times of time saving set internally. It is configured to refer to and decide.

Then, if there is a difference between the content of the benefits (time saving number of times) notified in the ceiling reaching fluctuation effect and the internally set time saving number of times, during the ceiling mode, the remaining ceiling mode It is configured to execute an additional effect for increasing (adding) the period (remaining number of times displayed in the small display area Dm7 in FIG. 440(b)). With this configuration, a player who has been set in the ceiling mode can play the game with peace of mind while knowing the minimum period during which the ceiling mode continues. A game can be played while expecting that the period during which the mode continues is extended.

Furthermore, in the thirteenth control example, the content of the privilege given as the ceiling privilege is varied according to the game state set at the time the ceiling privilege is awarded. If the game state set at the timing of executing the grant determination process of the ceiling privilege at the start of the special symbol variation is the normal state, the right-handed game state (third time saving state) is set, and when the game state set at the timing of execution of the grant determination process of the ceiling privilege at the start of the special symbol variation is the first time saving state, the number of times of time saving is 300 as the ceiling privilege. It is configured so that the right-handed game state (third time-saving state) is set.

That is, it is configured such that the ceiling privilege more advantageous to the player is given when the ceiling privilege is given in the first time-saving state than when the ceiling privilege is given in the normal state. Then, as the content of the ceiling privilege (number of times of time reduction) notified in the ceiling reaching fluctuation effect, when the ceiling privilege of 300 times of time reduction is given, the content of the ceiling privilege that is disadvantageous to the player (number of times of time reduction 100 times) can be notified.

By configuring in this way, at the time when the ceiling reaching fluctuation performance is executed, the ceiling privilege given this time is the ceiling privilege advantageous to the player (time reduction number of times 300 times) or the ceiling privilege disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether it is (100 times of time saving). In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example is configured so that the content of the ceiling privilege notified by the ceiling reaching variation effect is within the range of the content of the ceiling privilege that is actually set. On the other hand, it is possible to play the game with peace of mind according to the content notified, but not limited to this, the content of the ceiling privilege (time reduction number) notified by the ceiling reaching fluctuation effect It may be configured to execute a subtraction effect for subtracting during a set period.

For example, when a ceiling privilege (time saving number of times 100 times) disadvantageous to the player is set, a ceiling privilege (time saving number of times 300 times) advantageous to the player is given in the ceiling reaching fluctuation effect Information is notified ("300 times" is displayed in the small display area Dm7), and in the ceiling mode, the information (remaining time reduction number of times) displayed in the small display area Dm7 is displayed more than the number of executions of the special symbol lottery. It may be configured to subtract more. By configuring in this way, even if any ceiling privilege is given, there is a possibility that the ceiling privilege (300 times of time reduction) advantageous to the player is set in the ceiling reaching fluctuation performance. can be comprehended by the player, the player can play the game while expecting that the ceiling privilege that is actually advantageous is given.

In addition, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the present thirteenth control example has the same content game (left-handed game) when the normal state is set and when the first time-saving state is set. It is configured to be executed, and during the left-handed game state in which the left-handed game is executed, the variable performance of the same content is configured to be executed. In other words, it is configured to make it difficult for the player to identify the game state set during the left-handed game state. Therefore, when the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied during the left-handed game state, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the content of the privilege (number of times of time reduction) to be granted as the ceiling privilege. , the contents of the ceiling privilege notified by the ceiling reaching fluctuation effect can be made interesting.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example, when the jackpot is not won in the special symbol lottery executed when the normal state and the first time saving state are set, the judgment of time saving winning (time saving Lottery) is configured to be executed, and if the result of the time-saving winning judgment (time-saving lottery) is a hit, the special symbol variation to show the result of the special symbol lottery that won the time-saving lottery is stopped and displayed. After that, the time saving state (first time saving state, second time saving state) can be set without going through the jackpot game.

Then, when the first time-saving state is set based on the result of the time-saving lottery, as a time-saving end condition for ending the first time-saving state, the time-saving end that is established when the special symbol variation is executed once Configured so that conditions are set.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example is configured such that the game state is frequently switched between the normal state and the first time-saving state during the left-handed game state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily change the game state set at the time when the condition for granting the ceiling privilege (500 times of special symbol lottery) is established, so the contents of the privilege granted as the ceiling privilege It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand (time reduction number of times).

The display screen shown in FIG. 441 is a state in which the ceiling privilege (time saving number of times 300 times) advantageous to the player is set as the ceiling privilege, and the ceiling privilege disadvantageous to the player (time saving number of times 100 times) is set in the ceiling reaching fluctuation effect ) is displayed (see FIG. 440 (a)), and 100 special symbol lotteries are executed in the ceiling mode (remaining time reduction number displayed in the small display area Dm7 is the display screen at the first time (last), and "Last" is displayed in the small display area Dm7 to indicate that it is the final period of the in-ceiling mode. Then, as an additional effect for adding the remaining period of the in-ceiling mode, an effect is executed in which an additional mode 809a is displayed in order for the character 809 to extend the remaining period of the in-ceiling mode.

In FIG. 441, "+200" is displayed as the additional aspect 809a to indicate that the remaining period of the ceiling mode is extended by 200 special symbol lotteries. Then, an additional effect is executed in which the additional mode 809a moves toward the small display area Dm7 and the remaining period displayed in the small display area Dm7 is changed to "last 200 times". In the sub-display area Ds, a guidance mode for guiding the extension of the ceiling mode and a guidance mode for indicating the details of the extension are displayed as characters "Ceiling extension!! Plus 200 times!!".

The example shown in FIG. 441 shows the display screen when the additional effect is executed in the final period of the mid-ceiling mode (the special symbol fluctuation period in which "Last" is displayed in the small display area Dm7). , The additional effect may be executed other than the final period of the ceiling mode, for example, information indicating a predetermined period (for example, 90 times of remaining time reduction times) as the remaining period of the ceiling mode is displayed in the small display area Dm7. It may be configured to execute an additional effect in the state where the player is present (see FIG. 440(b)). By constructing in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict at what timing the additional performance will be executed, so that the player can continue to be interested in the performance executed during the ceiling medium mode. be able to.

Further, as shown in FIG. 441, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example is configured so that a special effect is executed as an additional effect. It may be configured to be the same as the production mode, for example, when the result of the special symbol lottery to be targeted in the variable production for showing the result of the special symbol lottery is out, the result of the special symbol lottery is out. In addition to indicating that the remaining period of the in-ceiling mode is extended, a display mode including information indicating that the remaining period of the in-ceiling mode is extended may be displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to leave the possibility of displaying an effect result indicating that the remaining period of the in-ceiling mode is extended in various effects (variable effects, etc.) executed during the in-ceiling mode. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in various effects executed during the ceiling mode.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example is configured to execute an additional effect for extending the remaining period of the ceiling mode during the period of the ceiling mode. After the display mode is displayed, a resurrection effect in which the in-ceiling mode is set again may be executable. In this case, for example, without executing the additional effect in the final variation effect of the ceiling mode shown in FIG. After executing a production that suggests (for example, a partial production of the production that is executed when the guidance notification "Please return to the left hand" is set), it is indicated that the ceiling mode has not ended. Execution of an effect (including a guidance notification saying "Enter the ceiling mode! Please continue the right-handed game"), and as a display mode for indicating the remaining period of the ceiling mode, in the small display area Dm7 Remaining 200 times" should be displayed.

With this configuration, the player can be made to think that a new ceiling mode is set after one ceiling mode is finished, rather than the ceiling mode being simply continued. It is possible to make it difficult to understand the conditions for setting the ceiling mode (conditions for applying the third time saving state). Therefore, the player who is playing the game in the left-handed game state can continue to play while expecting that the third time-saving state (right-handed game state) will be set.

<Regarding the game state transition in the thirteenth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 442, the game state transition contents in the thirteenth control example will be described. FIG. 442 is a diagram showing transition contents of the game state in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 442, the pachinko machine 10 in this thirteenth control example aims to enter a game ball into the first ball entrance 64 (see FIG. 234) which triggers the execution of the first special symbol lottery. A left-handed game state in which a left-handed game in which a game ball is shot toward the left side area (left side of the variable display unit 80) of the game areas formed on the game board 13 is a game method advantageous to the player. , The right side area (variable A right-handed game state in which a game ball is shot toward the right side of the display unit 80 is an advantageous game method for the player, and a right-handed game state can be set.

More specifically, the normal state as the game state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), the first time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), second probability variation If the state (high probability state of special design, low probability state of normal design) is set, it becomes a left-handed gaming state, and the second time-saving state (low probability state of special design, high probability state of normal design), second When the 3 o'clock short state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set, it is configured to be a right-handed game state.

Here, the first time saving state and the second time saving state are both game states in which a special symbol low probability state and a normal symbol high probability state are set. Fluctuation time) is configured to set a normal figure fluctuation time of different length, and when the first short time state is set, it is higher than when the low probability state of the normal pattern is set. A normal pattern lottery is won with a probability, but the normal pattern fluctuation time is defined so that the game ball is difficult to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the normal pattern winning game executed based on the winning. It is Therefore, in the state where the first time-saving state is set, the left-handed game becomes a game method more advantageous to the player than the right-handed game, despite the fact that the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. .

The third time-saving state is a game state in which a low probability state of special symbols and a low probability state of normal symbols are set, but it is possible to set a dedicated variation time as a variation time of normal symbol variation. , the ratio of the game balls launched by the left-handed game entering the first ball entrance 64 is higher than the ratio of the game balls launched by the right-handed game entering the second ball entrance 640. It is a game state in which the higher is. Therefore, in the state in which the third time-saving state is set, the right-handed game is more advantageous to the player than the left-handed game, despite the fact that the low-probability state of the normal symbol is set. .

First, the game contents in the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) will be explained. The normal state is a game state in which a game (special figure 1 game) in which the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed by entering a game ball into the first ball entrance 64 by a left-handed game is performed. When the first special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state, the jackpot is won with a probability of 1/200, and when the jackpot is not won, the special pattern lottery is executed with a probability of 1/2 for short-time winning.

When a jackpot win is won in the first special symbol lottery executed in a normal state, one of four jackpot types (jackpot A13, jackpot B13, jackpot C13, jackpot D13) is set. The selection ratios of the jackpot types are defined to be 20% for the jackpot A13, 30% for the jackpot B13, 30% for the jackpot C13, and 20% for the jackpot D13.

When the jackpot A13 is set as the jackpot type, the jackpot game with 10 rounds (R) is executed, and the normal state is set after the jackpot game ends. When the jackpot B13 is set, a jackpot game with 10 rounds (R) is executed, and the second time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends. When the jackpot C13 is set, a jackpot game with two rounds (R) is executed, and the second time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends. When the jackpot D13 is set, a jackpot game with 10 rounds (R) is executed, and the second probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends.

On the other hand, in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, when the time saving is won without winning the jackpot, the time saving is performed after the special symbol variation for showing the result of the first special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed. State is set. In the thirteenth control example, when the time saving type is won in the special symbol lottery, one of the two types of time saving type is set, and the first time saving state is set. It is configured so that the selection rate of the type is 99%, and the selection rate of the time saving type in which the second time saving state is set is 1%. It should be noted that, in the diagram shown in FIG. 442, since it shows the flow of the main transition of the game state, only shows the flow to transition to the first time saving state when the time saving is elected, in fact, It shifts to the second time saving state at 1% when the time saving is elected.

Next, the 1st time-saving state set when time-saving election is carried out is demonstrated. As described above, the first time saving state is a game state in which the low probability state of the special symbol lottery and the high probability state of the normal symbol are set, but the variation time of the normal symbol is shorter than the second time saving state described later. By setting a variable time shortening (variable shortening) state in which time (0.1 seconds) is set, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 even if a right-handed game is executed. It is designed to be difficult. Therefore, similarly to the normal state, the left-handed game becomes a game state more advantageous to the player than the right-handed game.

In addition, in the present thirteenth control example, since it is a game state in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set, the term indicating the game state is referred to as the first time saving state, but in fact, the same as the normal state Since it is a game state in which a game is executed, the normal state may be referred to as a first normal mode, and the first time saving state may be referred to as a second normal mode as terms for indicating game content.

This first time-saving state is a game state set only when the time-saving is won in the special symbol lottery, and when the first time-saving state is set by the time-saving winning, the first time-saving state is terminated. "Time saving once" is set as the time saving end condition. In addition, even when the special symbol lottery is executed during the first time-saving state, the same time-saving lottery (judgment of time-saving election) as the normal state is executed, and the time-saving lottery is executed during the first time-saving state. Even when winning, it is configured so that the time saving type is selected with the same selection ratio and the same content as the normal state described above.

In other words, when the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery executed during the first time-saving state is a big hit and neither of the time-saving is won, the special symbol variation for showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. After that, the time saving end condition is established, and the normal state is set. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery executed during the first time-saving state is time-saving winning, a new first time-saving state is set at the timing when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed. , the first time saving state is repeatedly set. Therefore, when the first time saving state is set, as long as the special symbol lottery wins the time saving, the special symbol lottery in the first time saving state continues, and if the special symbol lottery does not win the time saving, in the normal state A special symbol lottery is configured to be executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to frequently switch between the normal state and the first time-saving state during the left-handed game state. In addition, in the normal state (first normal mode) in which the left-handed game is executed and in the first time-saving state (second normal mode), the variable production executed using the third symbol display device 81 is also the same production mode. is configured to be set. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp which of the normal state and the first time saving state is set.

Furthermore, in the thirteenth control example, when the number of times the special symbol lottery that the lottery result is out in the normal state or the first time saving state is continuously executed (the number of times of hamari) reaches 500 times, the ceiling It comprises so that the 3rd time saving state may be set as a privilege. Details will be described later, but when the third time-saving state is set, it is better to perform a right-handed game in which the game ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 in the same manner as the second time-saving state described above. , a right-handed game state that is more advantageous to the player than a left-handed game in which a game ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64.例文帳に追加

In addition, depending on the game state set when the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the left-handed gaming state (the number of times of addiction) reaches the number of times the ceiling privilege is granted, the contents of the ceiling privilege are changed. It is configured to be different, and it is configured to give a ceiling privilege that is more advantageous to the player when the first time-saving state is set than when the normal state is set. there is

That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth control example, the normal state and the first time saving state are frequently switched during the left-handed game state, and the game determines which of the normal state and the first time saving state is set. Since it is configured to make it difficult for people to grasp, when the third time saving state is set as a ceiling privilege, it is possible to determine from which game state (normal state, first time saving state) to the third time saving state. It can make it difficult for people to understand.

Returning to FIG. 442, the description is continued. When the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery during the first time-saving state, the same four jackpot types (jackpot A13, jackpot B13) as when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery during the normal state described above. , jackpot C13, jackpot D13), any jackpot type is set. Each jackpot type is selected at a selection rate different from that in the case of winning a jackpot in a normal state, and the selection rate of the jackpot types is 50% for the jackpot A13, 20% for the jackpot B13, and 20% for the jackpot. C13 is defined to be 10% and the jackpot D13 is defined to be a selection ratio of 20%.

The pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example is configured so that the game state set when the jackpot is won differs from the game state set after the jackpot game ends according to the set jackpot type. When the jackpot is won during the first time-saving state and the jackpot A13 is set as the jackpot type, the normal state is set after the jackpot game ends, and when the jackpot B13 and jackpot C13 are set, When the first time-saving state is set after the big win game is over and the big win D13 is set, the second probability variable state is set after the big win game is over.

That is, when the jackpot is elected in the first time saving state, the normal state is set after the jackpot game ends at a rate of 50%, the first time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends at a rate of 30%, and the time saving state is set at a rate of 20%. After the jackpot game ends, the second probability variable state is set. Therefore, in the case of winning the jackpot in the first time-saving state, a privilege disadvantageous to the player in terms of the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is given to the player, rather than in the case of winning the jackpot in the normal state. .

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example, the number of times of special symbol lottery that is executed in the normal state or the state where the first time saving state is set (the special symbol lottery that has been lost is continuously executed) reaches a specific number of times (500 times), a right-handed game that is more advantageous to the player than a left-handed game state (normal state, first time reduction state) as a ceiling privilege. The state (third time saving state) can be set, and the game state set when the ceiling privilege is given is the first time saving state rather than the normal state. A ceiling privilege (a third time-saving state in which the time-saving end condition is difficult to be satisfied) that is advantageous to the player can be set. On the other hand, as a privilege (jackpot privilege) granted when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery executed during the left-handed gaming state, the normal state is set rather than the first time-saving state is set. It is configured so that a jackpot privilege that is advantageous to the player (a privilege that a right-handed game state is likely to be set after the jackpot game ends) is more likely to be given when the player is in the game.

Therefore, as a game state set in the left-handed game state, the period in which the normal state is more advantageous to the player than the first time-saving state (the period until the number of times the ceiling privilege is given is reached) and , A period in which the first time-saving state is more advantageous to the player than in the normal state (a period in which the number of times that the ceiling privilege is given is reached) is created, so simply one of the game states is set. To improve the amusement of a game by making the type of game state expected to be set according to the game state different from the case where the player plays the game while expecting the game to be played. can be done.

Next, when a big win is won in a special pattern lottery executed in a normal state and either one of the big wins B13 and C13 is set as the big win type, a second time saving state is set after the big win game is finished. . This second time-saving state is similar to the time-saving state (low-probability state of special symbols, high-probability state of normal symbols) set in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example described above. When it is set higher than the low probability state (normal state, second probability variable state, etc.) of the normal pattern and the right-handed game is continuously executed, the game ball to the second ball entrance 640 during the normal pattern per game. The normal figure fluctuation time is set so that it is possible to enter the ball easily.

This second time-saving state is when a special symbol lottery wins a jackpot and a specific jackpot type (jackets B13, C13) is set, or although illustration is omitted in FIG. 442, when a time-saving lottery wins. It is a game state set in a part (1%). In addition, in this 13th control example, when the 2nd time saving state is set, it comprises so that a time saving lottery may not be performed. Therefore, it is suppressed that the first time-saving state, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the second time-saving state, is set by winning the time-saving lottery executed during the second time-saving state, which is advantageous to the player. be able to.

In this thirteenth control example, the content of the time saving end conditions for ending the second time saving state can be set differently according to the setting opportunity of the second time saving state, and a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery. When the jackpot B13 is set in this case, 100 times of working hours are set as the time saving end condition, and when the big win C13 is set, 300 times of working hours are set as the time saving end condition. In addition, when the second time saving state is set based on the time saving winning in the special symbol lottery, time saving 300 times is set as the time saving end condition.

In this way, depending on the setting opportunity of the second time saving state, by varying the contents of the time saving end condition for ending the second time saving state, when the second time saving state is set, until when the second time saving state It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether is continued.

The normal state or the number of times of special symbol lottery that is executed in the state where the first time saving state is set (the number of times that the special symbol lottery that has been lost is executed continuously) reaches a specific number of times (500 times) Then, the third time saving state is set. The third time-saving state is a game state set as a ceiling privilege, and is a special game state that is not set based on the result of the special symbol lottery.

The third time-saving state is a game state in which a low probability state of special symbols and a low probability state of normal symbols are set, but the percentage of game balls entering the second ball entrance 640 in the case of a right-handed game. is configured to be the same as the second time saving state described above. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth control example is such that the winning probability in the low probability state of normal symbols is slightly lower than the winning probability in the high probability state of normal symbols. There is only a difference, and in the state where the third time saving state is set and the state where the second time saving state is set, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation and the normal pattern per game are executed. It is set to be the same as the opening operation pattern of the electric accessary product. Therefore, when the second time saving state is set and when the third time saving state is set, the same game (right hitting game) is executed for the player. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player who is executing the right-handed game to grasp whether the currently set game state is the second time-saving state or the third time-saving state. .

As described above, in the thirteenth control example, the number of times the jackpot has not been won continuously in the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state or the first time saving state (the number of times of addiction) reaches the specified number of times (500 times) It is configured to be able to grant a privilege (ceiling privilege) in which a third time saving state (right-handed game state) is set as a result of doing so.

In addition, in a part of the case where the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state or the first time saving state (jackpot election in which the jackpot C13 is set), the number of rounds is smaller than that of other jackpot elections. A jackpot game (two-round jackpot) is executed, and after the jackpot game ends, a second time saving state (right hitting game state) is set to make the player perform a game (right hitting game) similar to the third time saving state. It consists of In addition, in the normal state, or part of the time-saving election in the special symbol lottery executed in the first time-saving state (time-saving election in which the second time-saving state is set), to indicate that time-saving winning After the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, a second time-saving state (right-handed game state) is set in which the player performs a game (right-handed game) similar to the third time-saving state.

In other words, when the number of executions of the special symbol lottery (the number of times of addiction) during the left-handed gaming state satisfies the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege, or the result of the special symbol lottery executed in the left-handed gaming state (whether or not the jackpot is won , presence or absence of short-time winning) is a specific lottery result, it is configured to be able to set a right-handed game state that is advantageous to the player. Then, as an effect for indicating that the right-handed game state is set, the right-handed game state is set for the player by executing an effect of the same content even when any of the above-mentioned triggers is established. It is configured to make it difficult to grasp the trigger to be set.

By configuring in this way, in the pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to set the right-handed game state with different degrees of advantage according to the establishment opportunity for setting the right-handed game state, the right-handed game state to be set is the game. It is possible to make it difficult to determine in advance whether the game state is advantageous to the player.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the thirteenth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 443 to 449. FIG. In this thirteenth example, for the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example described above, a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 possessed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, a part of the configuration of the RAM 203, and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 The difference is that a part of the configuration of the ROM 222 and a part of the configuration of the RAM 223 are changed, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same contents, and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

First, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 443 to 446. FIG. FIG. 443(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the thirteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 443(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 in the thirteenth control example is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the fifth control example (see FIG. 244(a)). Instead of the first random number 13 table 202la, the second random number table 202c, the second random number 13 table 202lc, the jackpot type selection 5 table 202dd, the jackpot type selection 13 table 202ld, the time saving random number It is different in that it replaces with 5 table 202de and replaces with time saving 13 random number tables 202le, and replaces with time saving type selection 5 tables 202df, and has provided time saving type selection 13 tables 202lf. Other elements are the same, and detailed descriptions of the same elements are omitted.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example, part of the variation pattern (variation time) defined in the variation pattern selection 5 table 202db is changed from the fifth control example described above. It is different, and instead of the normal/second probability variable 5 table 202db1 of the variation pattern selection 5 table 202db in the fifth control example, a left-handed game state 13 table (not shown) is provided. In the 13 tables for the left-handed game state, the fluctuation time is 15 seconds in any of the cases where the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot win, a short-time win, and neither a big win nor a short-time win. The variation pattern is defined so that the special variation pattern of can be selected.

In other words, regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery, the variation pattern with the same variation time (15 seconds) is selected. By configuring in this way, it is suppressed that the result of the special symbol lottery is grasped by the player by specifying the variation pattern of the special symbol variation set before the special symbols are stopped and displayed. can do.

In this thirteenth control example, a special variation pattern (variation time 15 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol variation, and the voice lamp control device 113 side receives a variation pattern command including information for indicating the selected variation pattern. In this case, it is configured to execute a ceiling reaching suggesting performance with a performance period of 15 seconds. That is, the ceiling reaching suggesting effect is an effect executed when a special variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol variation.

In this way, by making it possible to execute the variation effect (ceiling reaching suggestion effect) corresponding to the variation pattern type output from the main control device 110, the variation effect corresponding to the variation pattern received on the voice lamp control device 113 side. It is possible to reduce the processing for determining In addition, since the fluctuation time of the special pattern fluctuation for which the ceiling reaching suggesting performance is executed can be fixed to 15 seconds, the performance period of the ceiling reaching suggesting performance can be fixed to 15 seconds regardless of the lottery result of the special pattern lottery. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to easily reduce the amount of effect data corresponding to the effect mode of the ceiling reaching suggestion effect.

Next, referring to FIG. 444(a), the first winning random number 13 table 202la in the thirteenth control example will be described. FIG. 444(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first winning random number 13 table 202la in the thirteenth control example.

As shown in FIG. 444(a), the 1st random number 13 table 202la is the 1st random number determined to be a jackpot, as opposed to the 1st random number 5 table 202da (see FIG. 245(a)). The difference is that the range of values of the counter C1 is made different. Further, in the ninth control example, the possible range of values of the first hit random number counter C1 is varied. Specifically, in the fifth control example described above, the possible range of the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is defined as 900 from "0 to 899". 1000 of "999". By configuring in this way, it is possible to define a determination result with a lower probability in various determinations determined by referring to the value of the first winning random number counter C1. In the thirteenth control example, only the range that the value of the first winning random number counter C1 can take is different. Since the configuration for storing is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Specifically, when the probability state of the special symbol is "low probability state", the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is in the range of "0 to 4". The lottery result "out" is defined for the range of "~999", and if it is "high probability state", the value of the first random number counter C1 is lottery for the range of "0 to 19" The result "big hit" is specified, and the lottery result "loss" is defined for the range of "20 to 999".

That is, when the probability state of the special symbol is "low probability state", the number of possible values of the first winning random number counter C1 is 1000, and the value determined to be a big win is 5. The winning probability is 5/1000 (1/200). On the other hand, when the probability state of the special symbol is "high probability state", the number of possible values of the first winning random number counter C1 is 1000, and the value determined as a big win is 20. The winning probability is 20/1000 (1/50).

Next, with reference to FIG. 444(b), the second winning random number 13 table 202lc in the thirteenth control example will be described. FIG. 444(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the second winning random number 13 table 202lc. This second winning random number 13 table 202lc, like the second winning random number table 202c described above, is a data table that is referred to when determining the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery. For the range of values (0 to 299) to be obtained, a value determined to be hit for each probability state of normal symbols is defined.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 444(b), when the probability state of the normal symbol is "low probability state", the value of the second random number counter C4 is "0 to 298". If the lottery result is "hit" and the lottery result is "loss" for the value of "299" and the "high probability state" is established, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is set to "0 to 299" range, that is, the lottery result "win" is defined for the entire range.

That is, in the thirteenth control example, regardless of the probability state of the normal symbols, when the normal symbol lottery is executed, most of them are hit and won. By configuring in this way, according to the result of the normal design lottery (according to the execution or non-execution of the normal pattern winning game executed when winning in the normal design lottery), the probability of the currently set normal pattern It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the state is the "low-probability state" or the "high-probability state".

In addition, in this thirteenth control example, regardless of the probability state of normal symbols, the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is set high, so that the currently set probability state of normal symbols is "low probability state". Although it is difficult to determine whether it is a "high probability state", it is not limited to this. The range of values of the winning random number counter C4 may be defined to be substantially the same.

Further, although detailed description is omitted, as shown in FIG. 444(b), in this thirteenth control example, when the normal symbol "high probability state" is set, the normal symbol lottery is lost and won. When the "low probability state" of the normal pattern is set without doing so, the normal pattern lottery is configured to lose with a low probability (1/300) and win. Therefore, it becomes possible to grasp that the "low-probability state" of the normal design is set by grasping that the lottery has been lost in the normal design lottery. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery is lost.

In this case, as the variation pattern of the normal design variation, as the variation pattern set when the result of the normal design lottery is out, rather than the variation pattern set when the result of the normal design lottery is winning, It is preferable to configure so that a variation pattern with a long variation time (normal symbol variation time) is easily set. By configuring in this way, the longer the period in which the normal pattern winning game executed when winning in the normal pattern lottery is not executed, the higher the possibility that the low probability state of the normal pattern is set. It is possible to make the player who is trying to grasp the probability state of the normal pattern interested in the execution frequency of the game per normal pattern.

Next, with reference to FIG.444(c), random number 13 table 202le per time saving is demonstrated. This time saving random number 13 table 202le is a data table referred to in the time saving determination (time saving lottery) executed when the result of the special symbol lottery is other than the jackpot winning (lost), and is the time saving random number. With respect to the 5 table 202de (see FIG. 245(c)), the conditions (special symbol type, game state) in which the value (range) of the first hit random number counter C1 determined as time saving election is defined are different. There is a difference.

Specifically, the special symbol type is "common", and when the game state is the normal state or the first time saving state, the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "500 to 999". The range is defined as the judgment value of short working hours winning. In addition, when the game state is other than the normal state and the first time saving state, the determination value of the time saving election is not defined (indicated by "-" in the figure).

Here, in the present thirteenth control example, the determination of the time-saving election in the special symbol lottery (time-saving lottery) is performed when the special symbol lottery does not win the jackpot, that is, when the jackpot lottery is lost and won. When the special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state or the first time-saving state, it is configured to win the time-saving with a probability of 1/2. That is, in the present thirteenth control example, the game state (normal state, first time saving state, second time saving state, third time saving state) in which a low probability state is set as the probability state of special symbols, some games It is configured so that a short working hour lottery can be won in the state. In addition, among the game states (first time saving state, second time saving state) in which a high probability state is set as the probability state of normal symbols, in some game states, it is configured to be able to win a time saving lottery. there is

In this way, instead of defining whether or not it is possible to win a time-saving lottery in a time-saving lottery according to the probability state set for each symbol (special symbol, normal symbol), according to the set game state It is possible to make it difficult for a player to discriminate whether or not a special symbol lottery capable of winning a time-saving lottery is being executed or not, because it defines whether or not a time-saving lottery can win a time-saving lottery.

Furthermore, in this thirteenth control example, the left-handed game state (normal state, first time-saving state, second variable state), in some of the left-handed gaming states (normal state, first time-saving state), it is configured to be able to win a time-saving lottery. Then, when the second variable probability state is set in the left-handed game state, it is configured so that the short-time winning is not possible. Then, when the left-handed game state is set, it is configured so that it is difficult for the player to determine the actually set game state. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the player who is playing the game in the left-handed game state always think that the time saving lottery is being executed.

Although the detailed description will be described later, in this thirteenth control example, if a game state other than the game state in which the short-time lottery can be won is set, the short-time lottery (judgment of the short-time lottery) is executed. However, without being limited to this, it is configured so that the time-saving lottery is executed even if any game state is executed. , It may be configured not to set the judgment value for determining that the time saving lottery is determined as the result of the time saving lottery for the gaming state in which the time saving lottery cannot be won.

Next, with reference to FIG. 445, the jackpot type selection 13 table 202ld in the thirteenth control example will be described. FIG. 445 is a diagram showing the defined contents of the jackpot type selection 13 table 202ld. As shown in FIG. 445, the jackpot type selection 13 table 202ld defines a jackpot type common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In other words, when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery and when the big win is won in the second special symbol lottery, the common data table is referred to and the jackpot type is selected.

In this thirteenth control example, five types of jackpot types, namely, jackpot A13, jackpot B13, jackpot C13, jackpot D13, and jackpot E13, are provided as jackpot types set when a jackpot is won, and are set when a jackpot is won. The selection ratio of each jackpot type is varied according to the game state being played. In addition, the value of the time saving counter 203h and the type of the time saving state when the same jackpot type is set differ according to the game state at the time of winning the jackpot.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 445, when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is "normal state", the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 19", "jackpot A13" are defined in association with each other. This "jackpot A13" is a jackpot type (10-round normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 10 and the normal state is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 20 counter values are ``jackpot A13'', so ``jackpot A13'' is determined when the special pattern lottery in the normal state results in a jackpot. The percentage used is 20% (20/100).

The value of the first win type counter C2 in the range of "20 to 49" is associated with "jackpot B13" and defined for the "normal state" of the game state when the jackpot is won. This "jackpot B13" has 10 rounds, and is a jackpot type (10 rounds of time saving jackpot) in which the second time saving state (time saving 100 times) is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 30 counter values are "jackpot B13", so when a special pattern lottery in a normal state results in a jackpot, "jackpot B13" is determined. ratio is 30% (30/100).

In addition, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "50 to 79" in association with "jackpot C13". This "jackpot C13" is a jackpot type (two-round time-saving jackpot) in which the number of rounds is two and the second time-saving state (300 times of time-saving) is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first win type counter C2, 30 counter values are the "jackpot C13", so when the special pattern lottery in the normal state results in a jackpot, the "jackpot C13" is determined. ratio is 30% (30/100).

The value of the first win type counter C2 in the range of "80 to 99" is associated with the "jackpot D13" and defined for the "normal state" of the game state when the jackpot is won. This "jackpot D13" is a jackpot type (10-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 10 rounds and the second probability variable state (30 times probability variable) is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 20 counter values become a ``jackpot D13'', so when a special pattern lottery in a normal state results in a jackpot, a ``jackpot D13'' is determined. ratio is 20% (20/100).

That is, when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery in the normal state, the ratio of setting the left-handed game state (normal state, second probability variable state) after the jackpot game ends is 40%, and the right-handed game state (second short time state) is set to 60%. In addition, the jackpot types (jackpot A13, jackpot D13) in which the left-handed game state is set after the jackpot game ends are all executed with the same contents of the jackpot game (10-round jackpot game), so left-handed after the jackpot game ends. When the game state is set, it is possible to make it difficult to understand which of the normal state and the second variable probability state is set.

Further, when the jackpot C13 is determined, a jackpot game with a smaller number of rounds (two rounds) than the jackpot games corresponding to other jackpot types is executed, and the jackpot game is executed (or not) for the player. It is configured in such a way that it is difficult to grasp that Although a detailed explanation is omitted, when winning a jackpot with jackpot C13 set, it is more difficult for a player to recognize that a jackpot has been won than when winning a jackpot with other jackpot types set. It is configured such that a variable performance is executed in a performance mode. Specifically, it is configured such that a ceiling reaching suggestion effect that is executed when a ceiling privilege is given is executed.

By constructing in this way, when a part of the jackpot winning in the special pattern lottery is won, that is, when the jackpot C13 is set as the jackpot type, the ceiling privilege is given instead of the jackpot winning. It is possible to make it easy for the player to think that it is a game situation where the game is played. Therefore, by winning the jackpot where the jackpot C13 is set, a privilege equivalent to the ceiling privilege (time saving 300 times) is played without establishing a predetermined condition for granting the ceiling privilege (500 times of hooking). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the timing of granting the ceiling privilege. As a result, during the left-handed game state, it is possible to make the player think that a different number of hooks can be set as the granting condition for granting the ceiling privilege, and the game is continued while expecting the ceiling privilege to be awarded. can be done.

In addition, when the second probability variable state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the second probability variable state ends and the transition to the normal state (until the value of the probability variable counter 203i becomes 0) Even if the time-saving lottery is not executed and the special pattern lottery is executed, the number of hits for giving the ceiling privilege is not added. That is, when the second probability variable state is set, when the special symbol lottery of 530 times is executed after the jackpot game ends, the number of times of addiction reaches 500 times, and the ceiling privilege is given, so the ceiling From the point of view of granting a privilege, it is more disadvantageous to the player than the case where the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game.

In addition, during the period when the second probability variable state is set, the determination of the time saving lottery is not executed (time saving lottery). Part (0.1%) of the game aiming to set the second time saving state (300 time saving times) is not executed, so the game state is disadvantageous to the player from the viewpoint of setting the second time saving state. .

On the other hand, since the high probability state of the special symbol is set during the second variable probability state, the special symbol lottery executed during the second variable probability state wins a jackpot with a probability of 1/50. Therefore, during the period when the second variable probability state is set, the game state is more advantageous to the player than when the normal state is set, from the viewpoint of aiming for a big win in the special symbol lottery.

Next, as shown in FIG. 445, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49" for the "first time saving state (second normal mode)" when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is defined in association with “jackpot A13”. This "jackpot A13" is a jackpot type (10-round normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 10 and the normal state is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 50 counter values are "jackpot A13", so when the special pattern lottery in the first time-saving state results in a jackpot, "jackpot A13". is determined 50% (50/100).

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "50 to 69" with respect to the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot "first time saving state (second normal mode)", "jackpot B13" is associated. are stipulated. This "jackpot B13" has 10 rounds, and is a jackpot type (10-round time-saving jackpot) in which the first time-saving state (time-saving 100 times) is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, 20 counter values are "jackpot B13", so when the special symbol lottery in the first time saving state hits a jackpot, "jackpot B13" The ratio determined is 20% (20/100).

In addition, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "70 to 79" in association with "jackpot C13". This "jackpot C13" is a jackpot type (two-round time-saving jackpot) in which the number of rounds is two and the first time-saving state (300 times of time-saving) is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Among the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, the counter value that becomes "big hit C13" is 10, so when the special symbol lottery in the first time saving state (second normal mode) results in a big hit. 10% (10/100) is determined as the “jackpot C13”.

And when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is "first time saving state (second normal mode)", the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "80 to 99", and "jackpot D13" corresponds. attached and stipulated. This "jackpot D13" is a jackpot type (10-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 10 rounds and the second probability variable state (30 times probability variable) is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Among 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 20 counter values become "jackpot D13", so when the special pattern lottery in the first time-saving state (second normal mode) results in a jackpot. 20% (20/100) is determined as the "jackpot D13".

That is, when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery in the first time-saving state (second normal mode), the left-handed game state (normal state, first time-saving state, second variable state) is set after the jackpot game ends. The percentage becomes 100%. Therefore, during the first time-saving state (second normal mode), even if the jackpot is won, the right-handed game state is not set after the jackpot game ends, which makes it easier to execute the special symbol lottery than the left-handed game state. Therefore, the game state is more disadvantageous to the player than the normal state.

Further, as described above, in the normal state, the second time-saving state is set when the jackpot C13 is set is won. While it was possible to give the player the same privilege (second time saving state of 300 times of time saving), in the first time saving state, even if the jackpot C13 is set, Since the first time-saving state is set instead of the second time-saving state, a privilege (second time-saving state of 300 times of time-saving) equivalent to the ceiling privilege (the second time-saving state of 300 times) cannot be given to the player based on the jackpot winning.

Next, when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is "second time saving state (time saving mode)", the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 9", and "jackpot A13" is associated. stipulated by This "jackpot A13" is a jackpot type (10-round normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 10 and the normal state is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Among 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 10 counter values become "jackpot A13", so when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery in the second time saving state, "jackpot A13". is determined at 10% (10/100).

When the game state at the time of jackpot winning is "second time saving state (time saving mode)", the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined as "10 to 59" in the range of "10 to 59", "jackpot B13" is associated. It is This "jackpot B13" has 10 rounds, and is a jackpot type (10 rounds of time saving jackpot) in which the second time saving state (time saving 100 times) is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first per type counter C2, 50 counter values are "jackpot B13", so when the special symbol lottery in the second time saving state results in a jackpot, "jackpot B13" The ratio determined is 50% (50/100).

In addition, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "60 to 79" in association with "jackpot C13". This "jackpot C13" is a jackpot type (two-round time-saving jackpot) in which the number of rounds is two and the second time-saving state (300 times of time-saving) is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first per type counter C2, the counter value that becomes "jackpot C13" is 20, so if the special symbol lottery in the second time saving state (time saving mode) hits a jackpot " The rate at which the jackpot C13” is determined is 20% (20/100).

Then, when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is "second time saving state (time saving mode)", the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "80 to 99", "jackpot D13" is associated. are stipulated. This "jackpot D13" is a jackpot type (10-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 10 rounds and the second probability variable state (30 times probability variable) is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first per type counter C2, the counter value that becomes "jackpot D13" is 20, so if a special symbol lottery in the second time saving state (time saving mode) hits a jackpot " The rate at which the jackpot D13” is determined is 20% (20/100).

That is, when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery executed during the second time-saving state, the ratio of setting the left-handed gaming state (normal state, second probability variable state) after the jackpot game ends is 30%, right-handed The ratio of setting the game state (second time saving state) is 70%. Also, when the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal pattern is set after the end of the jackpot game, it is not the first time saving state (time saving state in which the ease of execution of the special symbol lottery is about the same as the normal state). , The second time-saving state (time-saving state in which the easiness of executing the special symbol lottery is higher than the normal state) is always set.

Therefore, the second time-saving state is a game state in which advantageous benefits are more likely to be given to the player when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery than the above-described normal state and the first time-saving state.

Next, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is defined as the "second probability variable state", and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 29", which is associated with the "jackpot A13". ing. This "jackpot A13" is a jackpot type (10-round normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 10 and the normal state is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Among 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, 30 counter values become "jackpot A13", so when the special pattern lottery in the second probability variable state results in a jackpot, "jackpot A13". is determined is 30% (30/100).

The value of the first win type counter C2 in the range of "30 to 49" is defined in association with the "jackpot B13" for the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, which is the "second probability variable state". This "jackpot B13" has 10 rounds, and is a jackpot type (10 rounds of time saving jackpot) in which the second time saving state (time saving 100 times) is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, 20 counter values are "jackpot B13", so when the special symbol lottery in the second probability state is a jackpot, "jackpot B13" The ratio determined is 20% (20/100).

In addition, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "50 to 79" in association with "jackpot C13". This "jackpot C13" is a jackpot type (two-round time-saving jackpot) in which the number of rounds is two and the second time-saving state (300 times of time-saving) is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, 30 counter values are "jackpot C13", so when the special symbol lottery in the second probability state is a big hit, "jackpot C13" The ratio determined is 30% (30/100).

Then, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the "second probability variable state", and the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "80 to 89" is defined in association with the "jackpot D13". there is This "jackpot D13" is a jackpot type (10-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 10 rounds and the second probability variable state (30 times probability variable) is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, 10 counter values are "jackpot D13", so when the special symbol lottery in the second probability state is a big hit, "jackpot D13" The percentage determined is 10% (10/100).

Furthermore, when the game state at the time of winning the big win is the "second probability variable state", the value of the first win type counter C2 is defined in the range of "90 to 99" in association with the "jackpot E13". there is This "jackpot E13" is a jackpot type (10-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 10 rounds and the second probability variable state (100-round probability variable jackpot) is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, 10 counter values are "jackpot E13", so when the special symbol lottery in the second probability state is a big hit, "jackpot E13" The percentage determined is 10% (10/100).

As described above, when the jackpot is won when the second variable probability state is set, a plurality of jackpot types for which the second variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game are configured to be selectable, and the selected jackpot type Depending on the probability variation frequency (the length of the period in which the second probability variation state continues) is configured to be different. As described above, the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the second probability variation state is not added to the value of the number of times of addiction for granting the ceiling privilege, so depending on the length of the period during which the second probability variation state continues , the period (the number of times of special symbol lottery) from the end of the previous jackpot game to the granting of the ceiling privilege can be varied. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to easily grasp the remaining period of the special symbol lottery until the ceiling privilege is awarded.

It should be noted that, as shown in FIG. 445, in this thirteenth control example, only when the second variable probability state is set, the second variable probability state with different probability variable times (the value set in the variable probability counter 203i) Although it is constructed so as to be able to win the set jackpot (jackpot D13, jackpot E13), it is not limited to this, and even when the jackpot is won in a state in which another game state is set, a different probability variable number of times. may be configured to be able to set the jackpot type for which is set.

In addition, in the thirteenth control example, the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the second variable probability state is configured not to be added to the value of the number of times of addiction for granting the ceiling privilege, but it is executed As a game state in which the number of special symbol lotteries is not added to the value of the number of times of addiction for giving the ceiling privilege, another game state may be set. It may be configured so that the number of symbol lotteries is not added to the value of the number of times of addiction.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to make it more difficult to establish the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege as the first time-saving state is set as the time-saving lottery is won in a plurality of times of special symbol lotteries executed without winning the jackpot. . In addition, in this thirteenth control example, the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the game state (second probability variable state) set after the end of the jackpot game is not added to the value of the number of times of addiction for granting the ceiling privilege. , it is possible to delay the timing at which the ceiling privilege is granted for the period during which the predetermined second probability variable state continues (the period until the value of the probability variable counter 203i becomes 0). However, since the timing at which the ceiling privilege is granted can only be delayed for a predetermined period (the period during which the second variable probability state continues), the ceiling There is a problem that it becomes easy to predict the timing at which the privilege is given.

On the other hand, when configured so that the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the first time saving state is not added to the value of the number of times of addiction, the normal state or the time saving executed during the first time saving state Depending on the result of the lottery, it is possible to vary the length of the period during which the first time-saving state is set from the end of the jackpot game to the number of times of addiction that satisfies the granting condition of the ceiling privilege. Therefore, the number of executions of the special symbol lottery that is not updated to the value of the number of times of addiction is not the predetermined number of times, but can be varied according to the result of the time-saving lottery. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the ceiling privilege is awarded.

Next, with reference to Drawing 446 (a), contents of time saving classification selection 13 table 202lf are explained. Drawing 446 (a) is a figure showing the contents prescribed in time saving classification selection 13 table 202lf. This time-saving type selection 13 table 202lf is set when the time-saving state is set without being based on the jackpot winning, specifically, when the time-saving lottery is won or when the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege are satisfied. A data table referred to when determining the type of time saving state (first time saving state to third time saving state) to be applied, and for time saving winning 13 referred to when deciding the time saving type in the case of winning time saving A table 202lf1 and a ceiling 13 table 202lf2 are defined.

Here, the contents defined in the 13 table 202lf1 for time saving election to be referred to at the time of time saving election will be described with reference to FIG. 446(b). FIG.446(b) is a figure for showing the content prescribed|regulated to 13 table 202lf1 for time saving election. As shown in FIG. 446(b), in the 13 table 202lf1 for time saving election, different time saving types are defined with respect to the value of the obtained time saving type selection counter CC1. Specifically, the time saving type "first time saving" is defined for the range of "0 to 998" for the value of the acquired time saving type selection counter CC1, and the time saving type "first time saving" for the range of "999" 2 hours short" is stipulated. Then, when the "first time saving" is selected, the first time saving state is set, and as the time saving end condition of the first time saving state, the time saving end condition that "1" is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h is set. stipulated. In addition, when the "second time saving" is selected, the second time saving state is set, and as the time saving end condition of the second time saving state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to "300". stipulated.

In other words, it is configured so that the ratio of setting the first time saving state when winning the time saving win is 99.9%, and the ratio of setting the second time saving state when winning the time saving win is 0.1%. . When the first time-saving state is set based on the time-saving election, the time-saving end condition is satisfied when the special symbol lottery is executed once. Here, in this thirteenth control example, since it is configured to be able to execute the time saving lottery even during the first time saving state, when the time saving lottery is won in the special symbol lottery executed in the state where the first time saving state is set , a new time-saving state will be set. Therefore, if the time saving is won in the special symbol lottery executed during the first time saving state, and "first time saving" is set as the time saving type, the first time saving state is set after the special symbol change is stopped and displayed. Therefore, the special symbol lottery is continuously executed in the first time saving state in which one time saving (the value of the time saving counter 203h is "1") is set as the time saving end condition.

On the other hand, when the time saving is not won in the special symbol lottery executed during the first time saving state, the first time saving state ends when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, and the normal state is set. become. Therefore, the next special symbol lottery will be executed in the normal state.

By configuring in this way, in a left-handed game period (hamari period) in which special symbol lotteries are continuously executed without winning a jackpot, the player is encouraged to play while frequently switching between the normal state and the first time-saving state. can be done. In addition, the game state in which the special symbol lottery is executed is switched according to not only the result of one time-saving lottery but also the results of a plurality of times (two times) of time-saving lotteries that are continuously executed. Therefore, it is possible to attract interest in multiple special symbol lotteries that are executed in succession.

Next, with reference to FIG. 446 (c), when the ceiling privilege is granted (when the third time saving state is set) about the contents of the ceiling 13 table 202lf2 referred to when determining the time saving type give an explanation. FIG. 446(c) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the ceiling 13 table 202lf2. This ceiling 13 table 202lf2 is a data table included in the time saving type selection 13 table 202lf, and is referred to to determine the time saving type (time saving number of times) set this time when the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied. be.

As shown in FIG. 446 (c), the 13 table 202lf2 for the ceiling, ceiling benefits of different contents (number of times of time reduction) are defined according to the game state when reaching the ceiling (when the conditions for granting the ceiling benefits are satisfied) Specifically, when the game state at the time of reaching the ceiling is the normal state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is "100", and when the game state at the time of reaching the ceiling is the first time saving state, the time saving "300" is defined as the value of the counter 203h. In addition, when the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied, the third time-saving state that becomes the right-handed game state while the low probability state of the normal pattern is set without setting the high probability state of the normal pattern is set. be.

That is, when setting the right-handed game state that makes it easier for the player to execute the special symbol lottery than the left-handed game state based on the number of executions of the special symbol lottery, the probability of various symbols (special symbols, normal symbols) A right-handed game state can be set without changing the state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for executing the process of changing the probability state of various patterns (special patterns, normal patterns) without being based on the result of the special pattern lottery (the result of the jackpot lottery, the result of the short-time lottery). can.

In addition, in the thirteenth control example, as described above, when the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied, the privilege can be granted to the player without changing the probability state of each symbol (special symbol, normal symbol). However, without being limited to this, the probability state of each pattern (special pattern, normal pattern) is changed based on the establishment of the condition for granting the ceiling privilege (the probability state that is disadvantageous to the player It may also be configured to give a privilege (variable to a probability state advantageous to the person).

In this case, it is good to constitute so that not the 3rd time-saving state but the 2nd time-saving state may be set, when the grant conditions of a ceiling privilege are satisfied. Thereby, since the game state set during the right-handed game state can be set only to the second time-saving state, the processing for managing the game state can be simplified.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 443(b). FIG. 443(b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the thirteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 443(b), the special drawing lottery counter 203la, the first ceiling standby flag 203lb, and the second ceiling standby flag 203lc are added to the RAM 203 (see FIG. 244(b)) in the fifth control example described above. The difference is that they are added. The rest is the same, and the same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special figure lottery counter 203la is a counter for measuring the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the low probability state of special symbols (the number of times of addiction), and the number of executions of the ceiling privilege special pattern lottery is the grant of the ceiling privilege. The counter value is referenced when determining whether the conditions are met.

Specifically, the special symbol in the ceiling determination process 13 (see S38051 in FIG. 452) executed in the special symbol determination process 13 (see S30251 in FIG. 451) of the special symbol variation process 13 (see S30104 in FIG. 450) If it is determined that the low probability state is set (S38102 in FIG. 452: Yes), that is, when the special symbol lottery (special symbol fluctuation) is started during the low probability state of the special symbol, the counter The value is incremented by 1 (S38103 in FIG. 452). Then, if the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit (S217 in FIG. 450: Yes), or if a ceiling privilege is given (S38351 in FIG. 455 : Yes, or S38358 of FIG. 455: Yes), the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la is cleared to 0.

In the thirteenth control example, the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the low probability state of special symbols (the number of times of addiction) is referred to when determining whether or not the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege are satisfied. When the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the low probability state of special symbols (the number of times of addiction) reaches 500 times, the ceiling privilege is given. As described above, the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la is not synchronized with the number of special symbol lotteries that have been executed, but is configured so that the value of the counter is added in synchronization with the number of times of addiction.

In addition, in the thirteenth control example, the number of times of special symbol lottery executed during the low probability state of the special symbol is added as the number of times of addiction, but the number of times of addiction is determined as the condition for granting the ceiling privilege. For example, a special design lottery for a specific special design type (first special design) out of a plurality of special design types (first special design, second special design) is executed. It may be configured to add the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la (add the number of times of addiction) only when Based on the fact that one special symbol lottery is executed when the special symbol lottery is executed when the special symbol lottery is executed when another game state (for example, the first time saving state) is set. It may be configured so that the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la to be added (the number of times of Hamari) increases. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of remaining executions of the special symbol lottery (remaining hooking number) required until the ceiling privilege is granted.

Furthermore, in the thirteenth control example, only the condition for adding the value of the special drawing lottery counter 203la is defined, and when the jackpot is won (when the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege are cleared), the ceiling privilege is granted. In the case, it is configured to clear the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la to 0. Therefore, when the number of hooks reaches 500 times and the third time saving state (time saving 100 times or 300 times) is set as a ceiling privilege, the value of the special drawing lottery counter 203la is cleared to 0, and then The value of the special symbol lottery counter 203la is added every time the special symbol lottery is executed in the 3 o'clock short state. Therefore, after the third time saving state is set as the ceiling privilege, when the number of times of hooking reaches 500 times again, that is, when the number of hookings after the end of the previous jackpot game reaches 1000 times , the ceiling privilege for the second time is given.

By constructing in this way, the ceiling privilege can be given again to the player who did not win the jackpot even during the period when the third time-saving state given as the ceiling privilege is set. In addition, in the present thirteenth control example, the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la is cleared to 0 at the timing when the ceiling privilege is granted. When the third time saving state ends, the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la becomes 100, and when the third time saving state of 300 times of time saving times is set, the special figure at the time when the third time saving state ends The value of the lottery counter 203la becomes 300. Therefore, when the game aiming at the ceiling privilege of the second time is performed, the number of times of the special symbol lottery to be executed in the left-handed game state can be easily made smaller than that of the game aiming at the ceiling privilege of the first time.

In addition, in the thirteenth control example, the number of times that the ceiling privilege is given is stipulated to be 500 times, and the ceiling privilege is given when the number of times of hooking reaches 500 times for the second and subsequent ceiling privileges. It is configured so that the conditions are established, but without being limited to this, the first ceiling privilege is given when the number of times of hooking reaches 500 times, and then the first ceiling privilege is given. reaches 300 times, that is, when the number of times of addiction after the end of the previous jackpot game reaches 800 times, the second ceiling privilege may be provided. .

By configuring in this way, for example, when the third time-saving state of 300 times the number of times of time-saving is set as the first ceiling privilege, the end condition of the third time-saving state (300 special symbol lottery) Immediately after the establishment, the second ceiling privilege can be given, the third time-saving state can be continuously set, and the player can be easily made to continue playing the game.

Further, in the thirteenth control example, when the special symbol lottery is executed, the value of the special symbol lottery counter 203la is added or not added according to the set game state. In addition to this, when the special symbol lottery to be executed satisfies a specific condition, the process of subtracting the value of the special symbol lottery counter 203la may be executable.

The first ceiling standby flag 203lb is a flag for indicating that the condition for granting the ceiling privilege has been established while the normal state is set. reaches 500). Then, in the time saving setting process 13 (S30254 in FIG. 455) that is executed when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, the setting status of the first ceiling standby flag 203lb is determined (S38351 in FIG. 455) and is set to ON. If it is determined that there is (S38351 in FIG. 455: Yes), as the content of the ceiling privilege, the privilege (time saving 100 times) corresponding to the normal state of the game at the time when the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied is granted (S38352 in FIG. 455), and then the first ceiling standby flag 203lb is set to off.

The second ceiling standby flag 203lc is a flag for indicating that the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is established while the first time saving state is set, and when the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is established (special drawing lottery is set to ON when the value of the counter 203la reaches 500). Then, in the time saving setting process 13 (S30254 in FIG. 455) executed when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, the setting status of the second ceiling standby flag 203lc is determined (S38358 in FIG. 455) and set to ON. If it is determined that there is (S38358 in FIG. 455: Yes), as the content of the ceiling privilege, the privilege corresponding to the case where the gaming state at the time when the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege are satisfied is the first time saving state (time saving 300 times) is given (S38359 in FIG. 455), and then the second ceiling standby flag 203lc is set to OFF.

In the thirteenth control example, the process (ceiling determination process) for determining whether or not the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied is executed at the start timing of the special symbol fluctuation, and the process for actually granting the ceiling privilege (time saving setting process) is configured to be executed at the stop timing of the special symbol variation. Then, the result of the ceiling determination process executed at the start timing of the special symbol variation is executed at the stop timing of the special symbol variation based on the setting status of the first ceiling standby flag 203lb or the second ceiling standby flag 203lc. It is configured to be distinguishable in the time saving setting process.

By configuring in this way, for example, the pachinko machine 10 having a game property in which the game state is switched during the execution period of the special symbol variation, and the ceiling determination process until the special symbol variation is started A pachinko machine 10 having a game property in which the game state is switched, or a pachinko machine 10 having a game property in which the game state is switched from when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed until the time saving setting process is executed is used. Even so, a proper ceiling privilege can be given.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 447 to 449, the details of the electrical configuration of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the thirteenth control example will be described, focusing on the differences from the fifth control example described above. . It should be noted that detailed description of the same contents as those of the fifth control example described above will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 447(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 included in the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the thirteenth control example will be described. FIG. 447(a) is a diagram schematically showing the configuration defined in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the thirteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 447(a), the ROM 222 in the thirteenth control example differs from the ROM 222 in the fifth control example described above (see FIG. The difference is that a time effect selection table 222lb is added.

The ceiling-reaching suggestion effect selection table 222la is referred to when selecting the effect mode of the ceiling-reaching suggestion effect when the ceiling-reaching suggestion effect is executed as a variation effect corresponding to the special symbol variation during the left-handed game state. data table. In the thirteenth control example, it is possible to execute a ceiling reaching indication effect for suggesting to the player the remaining period until the ceiling privilege is granted during the period until reaching the number of hits for which the ceiling privilege is granted. are doing.

By executing the ceiling reaching suggestion effect in this way, it is possible to predict the remaining period until the ceiling privilege is given to the player who is playing the left-handed game, and the ceiling privilege is given. The game can be played while making the player expect that In addition, in this thirteenth control example, as the ceiling reaching suggestion effect, not only the remaining period until the ceiling privilege is granted, but also the privilege equivalent to the ceiling privilege (second time saving state) based on the result of the special symbol lottery It is configured so that it can be suggested to be set. This indicates that there is a high possibility that the ceiling privilege will be given at a timing unexpected for the player (for example, timing when the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the end of the jackpot game is about 20). It is possible to provide an unexpected game in which a ceiling reaching suggesting performance is executed and a second time saving state is set after the ceiling reaching suggesting performance is executed.

By configuring in this way, the player can be made to think that a small number of times of addiction may be set as the number of times of addiction to which the ceiling privilege is given, and the player is motivated. can be made to execute a left-handed game. Furthermore, the ceiling privilege (third time saving state) is granted (set) based on the number of executions of the special symbol lottery, so that the remaining period until the ceiling privilege is granted is easy to identify, while the ceiling Since the privilege (second time saving state) equivalent to the privilege is provided (set) based on the lottery result of the special pattern, the timing of the provision is likely to be more random than the third time saving state. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to understand at what timing to shift to the right-handed game state in which the ceiling privilege (third time saving state) or a privilege (second time saving state) equivalent to the ceiling privilege is set. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the effect mode of the executed ceiling reaching suggestion effect in order to quickly grasp the timing of shifting to the right-handed game state.

Here, detailed contents of the ceiling reaching suggestion effect selection table 222la will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 448 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ceiling reaching suggestion effect selection table 2221a. As shown in FIG. 448, the ceiling reaching suggestion effect selection table 222la includes the value of the special figure lottery counter 223lc and the prefetch result (preliminary determination result) corresponding to the special figure reservation (special design reservation storage) ) and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f, two types of effect modes are defined as the effect modes of the ceiling reaching suggestion effect, respectively.

Specifically, when the value of the special drawing lottery number counter 223lc is "0 to 200" and the prefetching result includes information indicating the jackpot winning of "jackpot C13", the obtained effect counter 223f `` Ceiling suggestion (strong) '' for the range of ``0 to 79'', and ``No suggestion mode (indicated by ``-'' in the figure) for the range of ``80 to 99'' is the ceiling reaching suggestion If the look-ahead result does not include information indicating the jackpot winning of "jackpot C13" (other than that), the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is set to "0 to 99". "No suggestive mode (indicated by "-" in the figure)" for the entire range is defined as the effect mode of the ceiling reaching suggestive effect.

In addition, when the value of the special drawing lottery number counter 223lc is "201 to 460" and the information indicating the jackpot winning of "jackpot C13" is included in the look-ahead result, the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is "Ceiling suggestion (strong)" for the range of "0 to 79", "No suggestion mode (indicated by "-" in the figure)" for the range of "80 to 99", the ceiling reaching suggestion production It is defined as a production mode, and if the look-ahead result includes information indicating "time saving winning", the value of the acquired production counter 223f is "Ceiling suggestion (strong )” is “suggested mode (weak)” for the range of “20 to 39”, and “no suggested mode (indicated by “-” in the figure)” for the range of “40 to 99” If it is specified as a production mode of the arrival suggestion production, and the information indicating the "jackpot C13" jackpot winning and the "short-time winning" is not included in the look-ahead result (other than that), the acquired production counter 223f "Ceiling suggestion (weak)" for the value range of "0 to 4", "no suggestion mode (indicated by "-" in the figure)" for the range of "5 to 99", suggesting that the ceiling is reached It is specified as a production mode of production.

Furthermore, when the value of the special drawing lottery number counter 223lc is "461 to 495" and the look-ahead result includes information indicating the jackpot winning of "jackpot C13", the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is "Ceiling suggestion (strong)" for the range of "0 to 19", "no suggestion mode (indicated by "-" in the figure)" for the range of "20 to 99", the ceiling reaching suggestion production It is specified as a production mode, and if the look-ahead result contains information indicating "time saving winning", the value of the acquired production counter 223f is "0 to 39" to the range of "ceiling suggestion (weak )”, “suggestion mode (strong)” for the range of “40 to 99” is defined as the production mode of the ceiling reaching suggestion production, and the prediction result is “jackpot C13” jackpot winning, and “time saving If the information indicating "winning" is not included (other than that), the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 49", and the "ceiling suggestion (weak)" is set to "50 to 69". "Ceiling suggestion (strong)" for the range of "70 to 99" and "no suggestion mode (indicated by "-" in the figure)" are specified as the production mode of the ceiling reaching suggestion production. ing.

Finally, when the value of the special drawing lottery number counter 223lc is "496 to 500", regardless of the result of the prefetch, the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is "0 to 9" for the range "no suggestion mode (Shown as "-" in the figure)", "Suggestion of ceiling (weak)" for the range of "10 to 39", "Suggestion of ceiling (strong)" to the range of "40 to 99" It is defined as an effect mode of the arrival suggestion effect.

That is, the smaller the remaining period until the number of hits to which the ceiling privilege is given, that is, the larger the value of the special drawing lottery number counter 223lc, the easier it is to set the ceiling suggestive mode, and the smaller the remaining period as the suggestive mode. The contents of the ceiling reaching suggestion effect selection table 222la are defined so that the "ceiling suggestion (strong)" for emphasizing and suggesting is easily set. Also, if there is a special figure reservation that wins the "jackpot C13" in which a privilege (second time saving state) equivalent to the ceiling privilege is set, regardless of the value of the special figure lottery counter 223lc "Ceiling Suggestion (strong)” is defined to be easily selected. Therefore, even if the right-handed gaming state (second time-saving state) is set based on the special symbol lottery winning the jackpot, before the special symbol variation to win the jackpot is executed, that effect can be suggested to the player.

Furthermore, if the information indicating the time-saving election is included as the result of the look-ahead, there is still a slight possibility that the second time-saving state will be set based on the time-saving election, so the time-saving election as the look-ahead result It is configured to make it easier to set the ceiling suggestion mode than when the information indicating the is not included. In addition, in the present thirteenth control example, it is configured to be able to set the second time saving state (right-handed game state) in a part (0.01%) when the time saving lottery is won. Then, as the information used when selecting the performance mode of the ceiling reaching suggestion performance, instead of using the information on whether or not the second time reduction state is set by the time reduction lottery, whether or not the time reduction is won is simply used. It is configured to use this information.

By configuring in this way, when the second time saving state (right-handed game state) is not set, and when the winning is made in the time-saving state when the second time-saving state (right-handed game state) is set. In both cases, the effect mode (suggestion mode) of the ceiling reaching suggestion effect is selected at the same selection ratio. Therefore, even if the right-handed game state is not set, it is possible to execute the ceiling reaching suggesting effect (so-called fake effect) including the ceiling suggesting mode at an appropriate rate.

In addition, without being limited to the contents of the thirteenth control example, for example, when having a look-ahead result indicating that the second time saving state is elected in the time saving state is set, the second time saving state is set Even if there is no look-ahead result indicating that the game will be won in a short time, the ceiling suggestion mode may be set more easily.

The effect selection table 222lb when reaching the ceiling is a data table referred to when determining the effect mode of the effect when reaching the ceiling executed by the special symbol variation in which the condition for giving the ceiling privilege is established, and is given this time. The content of the ceiling privilege (number of times of time reduction), the result of the special pattern lottery indicated by the special pattern variation that satisfies the conditions for giving the ceiling privilege (jackpot, loss), and the value of the acquired production counter 223f. Production modes are defined.

When the ceiling reaching time production is executed, as shown in FIG. 440(a), a production mode including a mode showing that the ceiling privilege is given and a mode showing the contents of the ceiling privilege (number of times of time reduction) , the effect will be executed when reaching the ceiling. Thereby, it is possible to make the player grasp that the ceiling privilege is given (that the third time saving state is set) before actually giving the ceiling privilege.

In addition, when a jackpot is won in a special pattern variation that satisfies the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege, that is, when the jackpot game is started without granting the ceiling privilege, the ceiling is set as the performance mode of the ceiling reaching performance. It is configured such that an effect mode is set to indicate that the privilege is not granted. By configuring in this way, the jackpot game is executed without performing the right-handed game immediately after notifying that the ceiling privilege (for example, 300 times of time reduction) is given, giving the player a sense of incongruity. It can be suppressed.

In the thirteenth control example, when the value of the special drawing lottery number counter 223lc satisfies the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege (when it reaches 500), the effect at the time of reaching the ceiling is executed. Without being limited to this, when the value of the special drawing lottery counter 223lc becomes a predetermined value (for example, a multiple of 100), it is constructed so as to execute the performance at the time of reaching the ceiling, and the conditions for giving the ceiling privilege are actually established. If not, it may be configured such that an effect mode for indicating that the ceiling privilege is not given is set. By constructing in this way, when the performance at the time of reaching the ceiling is executed in a performance mode for indicating that the ceiling privilege is not given, the possibility of winning the jackpot can be left, so that the performance effect is enhanced. be able to.

Here, with reference to FIG. 449, the contents defined in the ceiling reaching effect selection table 222lb will be described. FIG. 449 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the effect selection table 222lb when reaching the ceiling. As shown in Figure 449, the effect selection table 222lb at the time of reaching the ceiling, the effect mode in association with the result of the target special pattern lottery, the value of the effect counter 223f obtained, and the ceiling privilege (time reduction number of times) (Production A to production C) are defined, and the value set in the ceiling time reduction counter 223la and the setting contents of the post-loading flag 223lb are defined in correspondence with each production mode.

Specifically, when the content of the ceiling privilege to be granted is "time saving 100", that is, when the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege are satisfied during the normal state, the result of the special pattern lottery is "jackpot" In some cases, the effect mode “effect A” is defined for the entire range of “0 to 99” for the value of the obtained effect counter 223f. In this case, a non-ceiling state indicating that the ceiling privilege is not provided is set as the performance when the ceiling is reached. Then, no value is set in the ceiling time saving counter 223la, and the post-loading flag 223lb is set to OFF (not set to ON).

Although detailed description will be described later, the ceiling time reduction counter 223la is a counter for measuring the value related to the content of the ceiling privilege (number of times of time reduction) previously notified to the player, and the production mode of the production when reaching the ceiling is Value is set if set. Then, the value is subtracted each time the special pattern variation is executed, and when the value after the subtraction becomes 0, the number of remaining time reductions in the third time reduction state granted as a ceiling privilege is determined, and the number of remaining time reductions is determined. When it exists, an effect (additional effect) corresponding to the number of remaining time reductions is executed.

The post-loading flag 223lb is a flag for indicating that the value of the ceiling time-saving counter 223la set in the ceiling reaching performance is not a value indicating the number of times of time-saving in the third time-saving state given as a ceiling privilege. , A value other than the value indicating the number of times of time saving in the third time saving state given as a ceiling privilege (value corresponding to the number of times less than the number of times of saving time in the third time saving state) is set to the value of the ceiling time saving counter 223la It is set to ON.

That is, if the result of the special symbol lottery is "big hit", it is in a state where it is not possible to execute the game in the third time-saving state given as the ceiling privilege, so the ceiling is used as the production mode of the production when reaching the ceiling. The effect mode of "effect A" indicating that the privilege is not given is set, and the value of the ceiling time reduction counter 223la is not set, and the post-loading flag 223lb remains off.

On the other hand, when the content of the ceiling privilege is "time saving 100" and the result of the special symbol lottery is "loss", the value of the acquired production counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 19". A" is set, "1" is set to the value of the ceiling time saving counter 223la, and the post-loading flag 223lb is set to ON.

In this case, in fact, the third time saving state (time saving 100 times) is given as the ceiling privilege, but as the ceiling reaching production, the production indicating that the ceiling privilege is not given is executed. After the effect is finished, an additional effect (see FIG. 441) is executed to additionally notify that the time saving of 100 times is added. In this way, even if the ceiling privilege is actually given, the effect mode of "effect A" indicating that the ceiling privilege is not given in the effect at the time of reaching the ceiling can be set. Even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery that satisfies the granting condition is the lottery result (jackpot winning) in which the ceiling privilege is not granted, it is possible to execute the performance at the time of reaching the ceiling indicating that the ceiling privilege will not be granted. Therefore, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the ceiling reaching effect in which the effect mode of "effect A" is set.

Also, the effect mode "effect B" is set for the range of the obtained value of the effect counter 223f "20 to 99". This production mode "Production B" includes a mode indicating that the ceiling privilege is given as a ceiling reaching performance, a mode indicating that the content of the privilege given as the ceiling privilege is "time saving 100 times", It is an effect mode in which an effect including is executed. In this case, since the content of the privilege (time saving 100 times) given as the ceiling privilege matches the content of the privilege (time saving 100 times) notified to the player in the ceiling reaching production, the additional production is executed. Therefore, the value of the ceiling time reduction counter 223la is set to "101", and the trailing flag 223lb is set to off.

Next, when the content of the ceiling privilege to be granted is "time saving 300", that is, when the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege are satisfied during the first time saving state, the result of the special pattern lottery is "jackpot" In some cases, the effect mode “effect A” is defined for the entire range of “0 to 99” for the value of the obtained effect counter 223f. In this case, a non-ceiling state indicating that the ceiling privilege is not provided is set as the performance when the ceiling is reached. Then, no value is set in the ceiling time saving counter 223la, and the post-loading flag 223lb is set to OFF (not set to ON).

In addition, when the result of the special symbol lottery is "out", the value of the obtained production counter 223f is set to the production mode "production A" for the range of "0 to 19", and the ceiling time reduction counter 223la is set to "1", and the trailing flag 223lb is set to ON.

In this case, in fact, the third time saving state (time saving 300 times) is given as the ceiling privilege, but as the ceiling reaching production, the production indicating that the ceiling privilege is not given is executed. After the effect is finished, an additional effect (see FIG. 441) is executed to additionally inform that the time saving of 300 times is performed. In this way, even if the ceiling privilege is actually given, the effect mode of "effect A" indicating that the ceiling privilege is not given in the effect at the time of reaching the ceiling can be set. Even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery that satisfies the granting condition is the lottery result (jackpot winning) in which the ceiling privilege is not granted, it is possible to execute the performance at the time of reaching the ceiling indicating that the ceiling privilege will not be granted. Therefore, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the ceiling reaching effect in which the effect mode of "effect A" is set.

Also, the effect mode "effect B" is set for the range of the obtained value of the effect counter 223f "20 to 49". This production mode "Production B" includes a mode indicating that the ceiling privilege is given as a ceiling reaching performance, a mode indicating that the content of the privilege given as the ceiling privilege is "time saving 100 times", It is an effect mode in which an effect including is executed. In this case, the content of the privilege given as the ceiling privilege (300 times of time reduction) and the content of the privilege (100 times of time reduction) notified to the player in the ceiling reaching production do not match, and when the ceiling is reached At the end of the ceiling mode effect (see FIG. 440 (b)) corresponding to the short time notified in the effect, the additional effect that adds the number of times of time saving 200 times is executed, so the value of the ceiling time saving counter 223la " 101” is set, and the trailing flag 223lb is set to ON.

Further, the effect mode "effect C" is set for the range of the obtained value of the effect counter 223f "50 to 99". This production mode "production C" includes a mode indicating that the ceiling privilege is given as a ceiling reaching performance, a mode indicating that the content of the privilege given as the ceiling privilege is "time saving 300 times", It is an effect mode in which an effect including is executed. In this case, since the content of the privilege (time saving 300 times) given as the ceiling privilege and the content of the privilege (time saving 300 times) notified to the player in the ceiling reaching production match, the additional production is performed. Since it is not executed, "301" is set to the value of the ceiling time saving counter 223la, and the post-loading flag 223lb is set to off.

Next, with reference to FIG. 447(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth control example will be described. FIG. 447(b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth control example.

As shown in FIG. 447(b), the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth control example is the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example described above. The difference is that the ceiling time reduction counter 223la, the post-loading flag 223lb, and the special figure lottery counter 223lc are added to the RAM223 (see FIG. 249(b)). Identical contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The ceiling time-saving counter 223la is a counter for measuring a value relating to the contents of the ceiling privilege (the number of times of time-saving) notified to the player in advance, and the value is set when the performance mode of the ceiling reaching performance is set. be done. Then, the value is subtracted each time the special pattern variation is executed, and when the value after the subtraction becomes 1, the number of remaining time reductions in the third time reduction state granted as a ceiling privilege is determined, and the number of remaining time reductions is determined. When it exists, an effect (additional effect) corresponding to the number of remaining time reductions is executed.

Since the ceiling time saving counter 223la is set when the ceiling arrival production (production corresponding to the special pattern fluctuation immediately before the third time saving state is set) is executed, the time saving number of times in the third time saving state A value obtained by adding 1 to the value notified in the effect when reaching the ceiling is set (see S34503 in FIG. 463), and the variable effect corresponding to the special symbol change is set in a state where the value of the ceiling time reduction counter 223la is set. The value is decremented by 1 each time (see S34408 in FIG. 462). As a result, the value of the ceiling time reduction counter 223la is set at the timing of setting the special symbol variation variation performance in which the number of times of remaining time reduction in the third time reduction state notified to the player in the ceiling reaching performance is 1 (last). (see S34410 in FIG. 462).

The post-loading flag 223lb is a flag for indicating that the value of the ceiling time-saving counter 223la set in the ceiling reaching performance is not a value indicating the number of times of time-saving in the third time-saving state given as a ceiling privilege. , A value other than the value indicating the number of times of time saving in the third time saving state given as a ceiling privilege (value corresponding to the number of times less than the number of times of saving time in the third time saving state) is set to the value of the ceiling time saving counter 223la It is set to ON.

This post-loading flag 223lb is set to ON (S34504 in FIG. 463) in correspondence with the content of the actually set ceiling privilege (the number of time reductions) and the effect mode of the effect when reaching the ceiling (S34504 in FIG. 463), and the ceiling time reduction counter 223la becomes 1 (S34410 in FIG. 462: Yes), the setting status of the flag is determined (S34411 in FIG. 462). As a result, whether or not the number of time reductions in the third time reduction state (the value of the ceiling time reduction counter 223la) notified to the player in the performance at the time of reaching the ceiling matches the actually set number of time reductions in the third time reduction state It can be determined whether or not, and if they do not match (when the post-add flag 223lb is set to ON), the add-on effect is executed.

The special figure lottery number counter 223lc is a counter for measuring the number of executions of the special symbol lottery (the number of times of addiction) for establishing the granting condition of the ceiling privilege, and is a special figure lottery counted by the main controller 110. When a command for indicating the value of the counter 203la is received (S9093 in FIG. 459: Yes), the value indicated by the received command is set (see S9094 in FIG. 459). Then, it is referred to when determining the rendering mode of the ceiling reaching suggestion rendering (see S34508 in FIG. 463).

<Control processing executed by main controller 110 in the thirteenth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 450 to 457, among the contents of the control processing of main controller 110 in the thirteenth control example, differences from the fifth control example described above will be mainly described. The pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth control example performs a process of determining whether or not to give a ceiling privilege based on the number of executions of the special symbol lottery, and a ceiling privilege is added, the game state in which the time-saving lottery can be executed is different, and the contents of the processing based on the normal symbol lottery are explained in detail.

Specifically, instead of special symbol variation processing 5 (see S104 in FIG. 252), special symbol variation processing 13 (see S30104 in FIG. 450), normal symbol variation processing 13 (see S30106 in FIG. 456), and standing The difference is that the raising process (see FIG. 457) is illustrated. Other processing contents are the same, and the detailed description of the same contents is omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 450, the contents of special symbol variation processing 13 (S30104) will be described. FIG. 450 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of special symbol variation processing 13 (S30104). As shown in FIG. 450, the special symbol variation process 13 (S30104) replaces the special symbol determination process 5 (S251 of FIG. 252) with respect to the special symbol variation process 5 (see S104 of FIG. 252). The special symbol determination process 13 (S30251) is replaced with the special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (see S252 in FIG. 252), and the special symbol variation pattern selection process 13 (S30252) is replaced with the time reduction setting process 5 (S254 in FIG. 252). Instead, it is different in that the time saving setting process 13 (S30254) is executed, and the rest is the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 451, the processing contents of the special symbol determination processing 13 (S30251) will be described. FIG. 451 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of special symbol determination processing 13 (S30251). As shown in FIG. 451, when the special symbol determination process 13 (S30251) is executed, first, the data of the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area is acquired (S8001), and based on the first per random number 13 table 202la. (S8002), and determines whether or not the obtained lottery result is a big hit (S8003). When it is determined that the jackpot is won (S8003: Yes), the lottery result of the special symbol is set to the jackpot (S8004), and based on the value of the acquired hit type counter (first hit type counter C2), the first The jackpot design of the special design to be displayed on the design display device 37 is set (S8005), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot has not been won in the process of S8003 (S8003: No), then the ceiling determination process 13 is executed (S38051), and then the time reduction lottery process 13 is executed (S38006), and this process exit. That is, the special symbol determination process 13 (S30251) executed in the thirteenth control example is the special symbol determination process 5 (see S251 in FIG. It is different in that determination processing 13 (S38051) is added and time saving lottery processing 13 (S38006) is provided instead of time saving lottery processing 5 (S8006 in FIG. 253). Other processing contents are the same, and the description of the same processing contents is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 452, the content of ceiling determination processing 13 (S38051) will be described. FIG. 452 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ceiling determination process 13 (S38051). In this ceiling determination process 13 (S38051), it is determined whether the special symbol lottery to be executed this time is a special symbol lottery that can update the granting condition (number of times of addiction) for granting the ceiling privilege, and based on the determination result processing to update the condition for granting the ceiling privilege (number of times of addiction), processing to determine whether the condition for granting the ceiling privilege has been satisfied based on the number of times of addiction after the update, and processing to indicate that the condition for granting the ceiling privilege has been met. is held until the ceiling privilege setting condition is satisfied.

When the ceiling determination process 13 (S38051) is executed, first, the current game state is read from the game state storage area 203g (S38101), and it is determined whether the current game state is a special symbol low probability state (S38102). ). When it is determined that the special symbol is in a low probability state (S38102: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la (S38103), and the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la after the addition has reached 500. (S38104).

In the process of S38104, if it is determined that the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la has not reached 500 (S38104: No), set the state command including information indicating the current value of the special figure lottery counter 203la ( S38105), the process ends. The state command set by the process of S38105 is output to the audio lamp control device 113 in the same manner as the other state commands set in the fifth control example described above. On the voice lamp control device 113 side, when a state command indicating the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la is received, the value of the special figure lottery number counter 223lc is updated. As a result, the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la, that is, the number of times of hooking can be determined also on the sound lamp control device 113 side.

On the other hand, in the process of S38104, if it is determined that the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la is 500, that is, if it is determined that the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied (S38104: Yes), then the current game It is determined whether the state, that is, the gaming state at the time when the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is established is the normal state (S38106), and if it is determined to be the normal state (S38106: Yes), the first ceiling standby flag 203lb is set to ON (S38107), a state command including information indicating that the ceiling is waiting and information indicating the ceiling type (first ceiling) is set (S38108), and this processing ends.

Also, in the process of S38106, the current is not the normal state, that is, if it is determined that it is the first time saving state, the second time saving state (S38106: No), the second ceiling standby flag 203lc is set to ON ( S38109), the process proceeds to S38108. On the other hand, in the process of S38102, if it is determined that the special symbol is not in a low probability state, that is, if it is determined that the condition for updating the number of times of addiction is not satisfied (S38102: No), this process is terminated.

As described above, in the thirteenth control example, when the number of executions of the special symbol lottery executed after the previous jackpot game ends (the number of times of addiction) reaches the specified value (500 times), the ceiling Instead of updating (adding) the number of times of addiction in response to all the special symbol lotteries to be executed, the special symbol lottery that satisfies the condition for updating the number of times of addiction is executed. In the case (S38102 of FIG. 452: corresponds to Yes), it is configured to update (add) the number of times of addiction (the value of the special figure lottery number counter 223lc).

By configuring in this manner, the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the end of the jackpot game can be made different from the number of times of addiction. Even if it is specified, it is possible to vary the number of special symbol lotteries executed until the number of times of addiction reaches a specific number. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict at what timing (the number of special symbol lottery times) the ceiling privilege will be given.

In addition, in the thirteenth control example, as shown in FIG. 452, when the special symbol lottery is executed during the low probability state of the special symbol, the number of hits is updated, and the special symbol is renewed during the high probability state of the special symbol. When the lottery is executed, the number of addictions is not updated. In other words, as the update condition of the number of hits, it is configured so that the low probability state of the special symbol is set as the update condition, but the update condition of the number of hits is not limited to this, for example, a specific When the game state (first time saving state) is set, it may be configured so that the update condition of the number of times of addiction is not satisfied, or a special symbol lottery (second special symbol) of a specific special symbol type (second special symbol) 2 special symbol lottery) is executed, it may be configured so that the condition for updating the number of times of addiction is not established, and when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery becomes a specific lottery result, the subsequent lottery A predetermined period (a period until the special symbol lottery is executed 10 times) may be configured so that the condition for updating the number of times of addiction is not satisfied. By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the number of special symbol lotteries executed until the number of times of addiction reaches a specific number. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict at what timing (the number of special symbol lottery times) the ceiling privilege will be given.

Further, in the thirteenth control example, as shown in FIG. 452, when the conditions for updating the number of times of addiction are established, the number of times of addiction is updated (added) by one each time the special symbol lottery is executed. However, without being limited to this, for one special symbol lottery, the number of times of addiction may be updated two times or more, or less than one time (0.5 times). However, the number of times of addiction may be subtracted from one special symbol lottery. Even when configured in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to predict at what timing (the number of times of special symbol lottery) the ceiling privilege will be given.

Next, with reference to Drawing 453, processing contents of time saving lottery processing 13 (S38006) are explained. Figure 453 is the flowchart which shows the processing contents of time saving lottery processing 13 (S38006). This time saving lottery process 13 (S38006) is executed instead of the time saving lottery process 5 (see S8006 in FIG. 254) executed in the fifth control example described above. ) is changed in accordance with the game specifications.

Specifically, when the time saving lottery process 13 (S38006) is executed, the current game state is read from the game state storage area 203g (S8102), and whether the current game state is the normal state or the first time saving state is determined (S38151). And, if it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal state or the first time saving state (S38151: Yes), since the execution conditions for the time saving lottery are satisfied, time saving based on the time saving random number 13 table 202le The lottery result of the lottery is acquired (S38152), and then the same S8105 and S8106 processes as the above-described time saving lottery process 5 (see S8101 in FIG. 254) are executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S38151, if the current gaming state is not the normal state or the first time-saving state, that is, if it is determined that it is a gaming state in which the execution conditions for the time-saving lottery are not satisfied (S38151: No), This processing is ended without executing the time saving lottery.

Next, with reference to FIG. 454, the processing contents of the special symbol variation pattern selection processing 13 (S30252) will be described. FIG. 454 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the special symbol variation pattern selection process 13 (S30252). This special symbol variation pattern selection process 13 (S30252) determines the jackpot type at the time of jackpot winning, in contrast to the special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (see S252 in FIG. 255) executed in the fifth control example described above. 202dd (see FIG. 246) to the jackpot type selection 13 table 202ld from the jackpot type selection 5 table 202dd (S38251); 202df (see FIG. 248(b)) for the data table to be referred to, the point (S38253) of executing the process changed from the time saving type selection 13 table 202lf to the time saving type selection 13 table 202lf (S38253) and selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation The difference is that the data table referenced at the time is changed from the variation pattern selection 5 table 202db (see FIG. 247) to the variation pattern selection 13 table 202db (see S38252). . The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and the description thereof is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 455, the contents of the time saving setting process 13 (S30254) will be described. FIG. 455 is the flowchart which showed the process content of the time saving setting process 13 (S30254). In this time saving setting process 13 (S30254), the above-described time saving setting process 5 (see S254 in FIG. 257), ceiling determination process 13 (see S38051 in FIG. 452) ceiling privilege grant conditions have been established When information indicating that is set (when the first ceiling standby flag 203lb or the second ceiling standby flag 203lc is set to ON), processing for setting the time saving state (third time saving state) is added The difference is that

In addition, based on the execution of the special symbol lottery of 1, establishment of the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege by the ceiling determination process 13 (see S38051 in FIG. 452) and the short-time winning by the short-time lottery overlap When the ceiling privilege Priority is set in advance for multiple time-saving state settings so that the setting of the time-saving state based on the establishment of the granting conditions is preferentially processed, and the processing for discarding the information related to the time-saving winning is executed. The difference is that

When the time saving setting process 13 (S30254) is executed, first, it is determined whether the first ceiling standby flag 203lb is set to ON (S38351), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S38351: Yes ), set the value of the time saving counter 203h to 100 (S38352), set the first ceiling standby flag 203lb to off (S38353), set the third time saving state to the gaming state storage area 203g (S38354), Clear the information on the time saving lottery (S38355), set the state command including the information indicating the third time saving state and the information indicating the number of time saving times (S38356), and clear the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la (S38357) , the process ends.

In the processing of S38351, if it is determined that the first ceiling standby flag 203lb is not set to ON (S38351: No), then it is determined whether the second ceiling standby flag 203lc is set to ON (S38358). ), when it is determined that it is set to ON (S38358: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to 300 (S38359), the second ceiling standby flag 203lc is set to OFF (S38360), and the game state Set the third time saving state in the storage area 203g (S38354), clear the information about this time saving lottery (S38355), and set the state command including information indicating the third time saving state and information indicating the number of time saving times. (S38356), the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la is cleared (S38357), and this process is terminated.

Then, in the process of S38358, if it is determined that the second ceiling standby flag 203lc is not set to ON, that is, based on the special symbol lottery executed this time, it is determined that the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege are not satisfied. If so (S38358: No), the processing of S8351 to S8354, which is the same as the time saving setting processing 5 (see S254 in FIG. 257) in the fifth control example described above, is executed, and this processing ends.

As described above, in this thirteenth control example, whether the setting conditions for the time saving state are established in the control processing (time saving setting processing 13 (S30254)) executed when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed (Whether the time saving state is a settable lottery result, or whether any of the various ceiling standby flags are set to ON) is determined, and when it is determined that the setting conditions are satisfied, the time saving state is set. Although it is configured to be set, another timing may be adopted as the timing for setting the time saving state, for example, the timing at which the special symbol variation is started (executing the process for starting the special symbol variation Timing) may be configured to determine whether or not the setting condition of the time saving state is satisfied, and to set the time saving state when it is determined that the setting condition is satisfied.

In addition, after the setting condition of the time saving state is satisfied, the time saving state may be set before the next special symbol lottery is executed, for example, when the setting condition of the time saving state is satisfied A predetermined value is set for a measurable measuring means (timer), and when the time corresponding to the value set in the measuring means has elapsed, the time saving state may be set, or the time saving state may be set. When the setting condition is satisfied (when any of the various ceiling standby flags is set to ON), a setting lottery (for example, a main process periodically executed by the main controller 110 It is also possible to configure the lottery to be executed by executing the lottery, and to set the time saving state at the timing when the set lottery is won. In this way, the time saving state can be set at various timings within the period from the establishment of the time saving state setting condition until the next special symbol lottery is executed. It is possible to make it difficult to grasp the timing at which the time saving state is set.

In addition, in the thirteenth control example, a plurality of time-saving setting conditions for setting the time-saving state are configured to be settable, and based on one special symbol lottery, a plurality of time-saving setting conditions are overlappingly established. configured to obtain Specifically, a lottery result time reduction setting condition established based on the lottery result of the special symbol lottery and a lottery times reduction setting condition established based on the number of execution times of the special symbol lottery can be set.

Then, it is possible to prioritize whether or not a time-saving setting condition (time-saving setting condition for the number of lotteries) is established so that a time-saving state (right-handed game state) that is advantageous to the player is likely to be set, and the condition for setting the number of lottery time-saving is established. When it is determined that it is, it is difficult to set a time saving state (right-handed gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. Configured to be configurable.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to preferentially set the time saving state that is advantageous to the player even when a plurality of time saving setting conditions are satisfied overlappingly, so that the player can easily set the time saving state. , it is possible to prevent a disadvantageous game from being easily executed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 configured so that a plurality of time-saving setting conditions can be established overlappingly, a method of setting a time-saving state different from the above-described thirteenth control example may be adopted. It is difficult to set the time-saving state (right-handed gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. When it is discriminated, it is configured to be able to determine whether or not a condition for shortening the number of times of lotteries is established so that a time-saving state (right-handed game state) that is advantageous to the player is likely to be set, and it is determined that the conditions for reducing the number of times of lottery are established. It may be configured to be able to set the time saving state based on establishment of the number of lottery time saving setting conditions when it does.

In other words, when a plurality of time-saving setting conditions are established overlappingly, the time-saving setting condition (lottery result time-saving setting condition) that is difficult to set the time-saving state (right-handed game state) that is advantageous for the player is established. A time-saving state advantageous to a player is established when only a time-saving setting condition (time-saving setting condition for the number of lotteries) for easily setting a time-saving state (right-handed game state) advantageous to the player is established. (Right-handed gaming state) may be configured to set a time saving state based on establishment of time saving setting conditions (lottery number of time saving setting conditions) that are likely to be set.

By constructing in this way, it is easier to set a time-saving state advantageous to a player when only a specific time-saving setting condition is met than when a plurality of time-saving setting conditions are met redundantly. can be done. In other words, it is possible to provide a novel game property that the player expects that other time saving setting conditions will not be satisfied based on the special symbol lottery for which the specific time saving setting conditions are to be satisfied.

In this case, for example, a variable effect (ceiling reaching effect) for indicating the lottery result of a special pattern lottery where a specific time saving setting condition (lottery number of time saving setting condition) is established, and a specific time saving setting condition (lottery number of time saving setting condition ) is not established, and whether other time-saving setting conditions (lottery result time-saving setting conditions) are satisfied (for example, time-saving lottery wins in time-saving lottery (whether to do or not) is preferably different, and in the ceiling reaching effect, it is easier to set a time-saving state that is advantageous as a result of not winning a time-saving election than when winning a time-saving election. If the result of the time-saving lottery is lost and won, it is easier to set a production mode that congratulates the player than if the result of the time-saving lottery is a time-saving lottery, and in the normal production, it is easier to set a time-saving lottery. Since it is easier to set the time-saving state than when it does not win, if the result of the time-saving lottery is a short-time lottery, the effect mode that congratulates the player is set rather than when the result of the time-saving lottery is lost and won. It should be configured so that it is easy to

With this configuration, the player can easily grasp whether or not a game situation advantageous to him/herself can easily be set by grasping the content of the effect to be executed. Easy game can be provided.

Moreover, you may comprise so that a special time saving state (4th time saving condition) can be set only when several time saving setting conditions overlap and are satisfied.

Next, with reference to FIG. 456, the contents of the normal symbol variation process 13 (S30106) will be described. FIG. 456 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of normal symbol variation processing 13 (S30106). This normal symbol variation process 13 (S30106) illustrates the contents of the process omitted from the above-described control examples.

In each control example including the thirteenth control example, in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the game state ( In this control example, set a second time saving state) and a game state (first time saving state in this control example) that makes it difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 during normal game per game configured as possible.

Specifically, the normal pattern high probability state (first time saving state) set based on the time saving lottery winning, and the normal design high probability state (first time saving state) set based on the jackpot winning 2 o'clock short state) and different lengths of normal design fluctuation time are set.

Then, when the first time saving state is set, as shown in S30807 of FIG. 456, a very short (0.1 second) normal symbol fluctuation time is set. By configuring in this way, after the game ball passes through the through gate 67 that triggers the execution of the normal symbol lottery, until the passing game ball reaches the electric accessory 640a, the normal symbol winning game It is possible to end the (game per normal figure), and the game ball becomes a time-saving state in which it is difficult to enter the second ball entrance 640. - 特許庁

On the other hand, when the second time saving state is set, as shown in S30805 of FIG. 456, a short (1 second) normal symbol fluctuation time is set. By configuring in this way, after the game ball passes through the through gate 67 that triggers the execution of the normal symbol lottery, the timing at which the passed game ball reaches the electric accessory 640a is the normal symbol winning game. It is possible to make it during (normal figure per game), and it becomes a time-saving state in which the game ball is easy to enter the second ball entrance 640.

Furthermore, in the thirteenth control example, in the state in which the normal symbol low probability state is set, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 to the same extent as in the second time-saving state described above. It is configured so that the third time saving state can be set. Specifically, when the third time saving state is set, as shown in S30805 of FIG. 456, a short (1 second) normal symbol fluctuation time is set. Then, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is configured to be a normal symbol low probability state (299/300) and a normal symbol high probability state (299/300).

Therefore, even if the low-probability state of the normal design is set, by setting the same length as the second time-saving state as the fluctuation time of the normal design, the game ball is moved to the second ball entrance 640. It is possible to set a game state (right-handed game state) in which it is easy to enter a ball.

In addition, in the normal state and the second probability variable state in which the low probability state of the normal design is set, as shown in S30808 of FIG. Since it is set, it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640, and it is easier to execute the special symbol lottery by entering the game ball into the first ball entrance 64 by the left-handed game. It becomes a game state (left-handed game state).

Also, as shown in S30809 and S30810 of FIG. 456, when the high probability state of the normal design is set, than when the low probability state of the normal design is set, in the game per normal pattern Although it is configured so that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state for a long time, in any case, when 1 second is set as the normal symbol variation time, the second ball entrance 640 Since the game ball can be entered into the second time-saving state and the third time-saving state, the same amount of game balls can be made to enter the second ball entrance 640 .

Next, referring to FIG. 457, the start-up processing of main controller 110 in the thirteenth control example will be described. FIG. 457 is a flow chart showing the contents of the start-up process of main controller 110 in the thirteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 457, in the start-up process of the main controller 110 in the thirteenth control example, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 has started up normally (S1707: Yes), the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la is shown. A process of transmitting a state command containing information to the sound lamp control device 113 (S31701) and a process of transmitting a state command containing information stored in the game state storage area 203g to the sound lamp control device 113 (S31702). and are different from the start-up process in each control example described above. Other than that, they are identical.

With this configuration, even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted, the information indicating the game status of the pachinko machine 10 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 when the power supply is restored. It becomes possible to Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to appropriately set an effect to be executed based on the game situation of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

<Regarding the control process of the audio ramp control device 113 in the thirteenth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 458 to 463, the contents of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the thirteenth control example will be described. This thirteenth control example differs from the above-described fifth control example in that the command determination process 13 (see S34182 in FIG. 458) and the variable display setting process 13 (see S34113 in FIG. 461) are executed. are doing. Other processing contents are the same, and detailed description of the same processing contents is omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 458, the processing contents of command determination processing 13 (S34182) will be described. FIG. 458 is a flow chart showing the contents of the command determination process 13 (S34182). In command determination processing 13 (S34182), state command reception processing 5 (S4282) is replaced with state command reception processing 5 (S4282) in command determination processing 5 (see S4182 in FIG. 262) of the fifth control example. 459 (see S34251 of 459)), and the rest is the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 459, the contents of the state command reception process 13 (S34251) will be described. FIG. 459 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of state command reception processing 13 (S34251). As shown in FIG. 459, in state command reception processing 13 (S34251), the state command received from main controller 110 is When it is determined that the game state is changed to the time saving state based on the included information (S9005: Yes) The state command including information indicating the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la and the point of changing the processing content executed The difference is that the processing when receiving is added. Since other processing contents are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the state command reception process 13 (S34251) is executed, the same processes of S9001 and S9002 as the state command reception process 5 (see S4282 in FIG. 265) in the fifth control example described above are executed. After that, the process of S9005 is executed, and if it is determined that the game state has been changed to the time saving state (S9005: Yes), the time saving state effect setting process 13 is executed (S9091), and then the process of S9093 is performed. . The contents of the time saving state effect setting process 13 (S9091) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In addition, in the processing of S9005, if it is determined that the state has not been changed to the time saving state (S9005: No), the display back image change command for indicating the back surface type corresponding to the game state after the change is set (S9092 ), and the process proceeds to S9093.

In the process of S9093, the status command received this time, information indicating the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la, that is, it is determined whether information indicating the number of times of Hamari is included (S9093), and if it is determined that it is included (S9093: Yes), sets the value corresponding to the received value to the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la (S9094), and ends this process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9093 that the information indicating the number of times of addiction is not included (S9093: No), this process ends.

Next, with reference to Drawing 460, processing contents of time saving state production setting processing 13 (S9091) performed in state command receiving processing 13 (refer to S34251 of Drawing 459) are explained. Figure 460 is the flowchart which shows the processing contents of time saving state production setting processing 13 (S9091). This time saving state effect setting processing 13 (S9091) is different from the above-described time saving state effect setting processing (see S9006 in FIG. 266), in that the processing contents in the case of shifting from the normal state to the time saving state are changed. They are different, and the other processing contents are the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the time saving state effect setting process 13 (S9091) is executed, first, the game state before the change is read from the secondary state setting area 223g (S34301), and it is determined whether the game state before the change is the normal state ( S34302). In the process of S34302, if it is determined that it is in the normal state (S34302: Yes), the information indicating the time saving type included in the command received this time is the information indicating the first time saving state It is determined (S34303) , If it is determined that it is not in the first time saving state (S34303: No), the number of time saving times included in the received command is set to the value of the time saving counter 223da (S34304), and then the time saving of the time saving state set this time It is determined whether the type is the third time saving state (S34305), and if it is determined that it is the third time saving state (S34305: Yes), the back type corresponding to the ceiling mode (See FIG. 440 (b)) is shown. A command for changing the back image for display is set (S34306), and the process ends.

Also, in the process of S34305, if it is determined that the time saving type of the time saving state set this time is not the third time saving state (S34305: No), then the time saving type of the time saving state set this time is a jackpot C13 It is determined whether it is the second time saving state set after the end of the big hit game based on (S34307), and when it is determined that it is the second time saving state set after the end of the big hit game based on the big hit C13 (S34307: Yes), The processing of S34306 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

In the processing of S34307, if it is determined that it is not the second time saving state set after the jackpot game based on the jackpot C13 (S34307: No), then it is determined whether it is the second time saving state set after the time saving election It is determined (S34308), and when it is determined that it is the second time saving state set after the time saving election (S34308: Yes), the processing of S34306 described above is executed, and this processing ends. Then, in the process of S34308, if it is determined that it is not the second time saving state set after the time saving election (S34308: No), the display back image change command for indicating the back face type corresponding to the set time saving type is set (S34309), and the process ends.

By configuring in this way, the back image of the ceiling mode executed when the ceiling privilege is given and the third time saving state is set is the second set after the jackpot game based on the jackpot type "jackpot C13". It is possible to display the second time saving state, which is set in part (0.1%) when the time saving lottery wins the time saving state, and the second time saving state is set. As a result, even when the above-described second time-saving state, which is set without satisfying the condition for granting the ceiling privilege, is set to the player, the player is made to think that the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied. Therefore, the game can be played while expecting that the ceiling privilege will be given at various timings.

Next, referring to FIG. 461, the contents of the variable display setting process 13 (S34113) will be described. FIG. 461 is a flowchart showing the details of the variable display setting process 13 (S34113). This variable display setting process 13 (S34113) is different from the above-described variable display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182) in order to set the effect mode of the variable effect. S4903), and instead of the special figure 2 production mode setting process (S4907 in FIG. 182), the difference is that the production mode setting process 13 (S4991 in FIG. 461) is configured to be executed, and the rest is the same . Identical contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In addition, in the present thirteenth control example, since the process of setting the effect mode of the variation effect of the first special symbol and the process of setting the effect mode of the variation effect of the second special symbol are the same process, any special Also when setting the effect mode of the symbol variation effect, the effect mode setting process 13 (see S4991 in FIG. 461) is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 462, the contents of the rendering mode setting process 13 (S4991) will be described. FIG. 462 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the effect mode setting process 13 (S4991). This production mode setting process 13 (S4991) is a process for setting the production mode of the variable production corresponding to the special design variation, and the result of the special design lottery that is the target for setting the production mode. Alternatively, processing for setting various effects is executed according to the game state that has been set. In addition, the display mode for showing the number of executions of the special symbol lottery on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the remaining period (remaining time reduction number of times) that a specific game state (for example, the third time reduction state) can continue is displayed, a process for updating the value indicated by the display mode is executed.

When the production mode setting process 13 (S4991) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 223da is greater than 0, that is, the second time saving state or the third time saving state. (S34401), when it is determined that it is not greater than 0 (S34401: No), the normal mode effect setting process 13 is executed (S34402), and then the display variation pattern command indicating the determined effect mode is set. (S34407), this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S34401, if it is determined that the value of the counter 223da during time saving is greater than 0 (S34401: Yes), the value of the counter 223da during time saving is subtracted by 1 (S34403), then the ceiling time saving counter 223la is greater than 0 (S34404). The value of the ceiling time saving counter 223la is not greater than 0, that is, when it is determined that it is a right-handed game state (second time saving state) in which the ceiling mode is not set (S34404: No), time saving after subtraction A display command for indicating the value of the middle counter 223da is set (S34405), an effect mode corresponding to the values of various counters is determined (S34406), the process proceeds to the above-described S34407, and this process ends.

In the process of S34404, if it is determined that the value of the ceiling time reduction counter 223la is greater than 0 (S34404: Yes), the value of the ceiling time reduction counter 223la is subtracted by 1 (S34408), and the value of the ceiling time reduction counter 223la after subtraction (S34409), and determines whether the value of the ceiling time reduction counter 223la after subtraction is 1 (S34410).

In the process of S34410, if it is determined that the value of the ceiling time saving counter 223la is not 1, that is, it is not the final change in the ceiling mode (S34410: No), the above-described S34406 and S34407 processes are executed, and this process exit. On the other hand, in the process of S34410, if it is determined that the value of the ceiling time saving counter 223la is 1 (that is, the final change in the ceiling mode) (S34410: Yes), then the post-loading flag 223lb is turned on It is determined whether it is set (S34411), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S34411: Yes), the post-loading flag 223lb is set to OFF (S34412), corresponding to the value of the counter 223da during time saving The value is added to the value of the ceiling time reduction counter 223la (S34413), the production mode of the additional production (additional production) that increases the number of remaining time reduction display is determined (S34414), the processing of S34407 described above is executed, and this processing exit.

Also, in the process of S34411, if it is determined that the post-loading flag 223lb is not set to ON (S34411: No), the third time saving state in which the ceiling mode is set, the second time saving state ends Special Since it becomes a variable effect corresponding to the pattern change, the effect mode indicating that the mid-ceiling mode (ceiling mode) ends is determined (S34415), the process of S34407 described above is executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 463, the contents of the normal mode effect setting process 13 (S34402) will be described. FIG. 463 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the normal mode effect setting process 13 (S34402). In this normal mode effect setting process 13 (S34402), when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, the effect mode of the effect when reaching the ceiling is determined to indicate that the mid-ceiling mode (ceiling mode) is set. Processing and the remaining period until the ceiling privilege is granted can be suggested to the player as a variation performance executed in response to the special symbol variation executed in the state where the left-handed game state is set. A process is executed for determining an effect mode of a possible ceiling reaching suggestion effect.

When the normal mode effect setting process 13 (S34402) is executed, first, the value of the special symbol lottery counter 223lc is 500, that is, the special symbol lottery executed this time establishes the condition for granting the ceiling privilege. (S34501). In the processing of S34501, if it is determined that the value of the special figure lottery number counter 223lc is 500 (S34501: Yes), with reference to the effect selection table 222lb when reaching the ceiling, the effect mode of the effect when reaching the ceiling is determined. (S34502), set the value corresponding to the determined effect mode to the value of the ceiling time saving counter 223la (S34503), determine the setting status of the post-loading flag 223lb corresponding to the determined effect mode (S34504), this End the process.

In addition, in the processing of S34501, the value of the special figure lottery number counter 223lc is not 500, that is, if it is determined that the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is not satisfied (S34501: No), next, this special symbol variation However, if it is determined whether it is a special symbol variation that wins the big hit C13 (S34505), and if it is determined that it is a special symbol variation that wins the big hit C13 (S34505: Yes), after the stop display of the special symbol variation Since the second time saving state that becomes the ceiling mode (ceiling mode) is set, the above-described S34502 to S34504 processing is executed, and this processing ends.

Also, in the process of S34505, if it is determined that there is no special symbol variation to win the jackpot C13 (S34505: No), then the special symbol variation of this time is the time-saving winning variation in which the second time-saving state is set. It is determined whether there is (S34506), and if it is determined that the second time saving state is set to be a time saving election variation (S34506: Yes), a pseudo ceiling mode (ceiling mode) after the stop display of the special symbol variation Since the second time saving state is set, the processing of S34502 to S34504 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

In the process of S34506, if it is determined that the second time saving state is not the time saving winning variation, that is, after the special symbol variation of this time is stopped and displayed, the ceiling mode (ceiling mode) is set. When it is determined that there is no special symbol variation (S34506: No), next, it is determined whether the special symbol variation of this time is a special variation (15 seconds variation) (S34507), special variation (15 seconds variation) If it is determined to be (S34507: Yes), the ceiling reaching suggestion effect selection table 222la is referred to determine the effect mode of the suggestive effect (S34508), and this processing ends. Also, when it is determined in the processing of S34507 that it is not the special variation (15-second variation) (S34507: No), an effect mode corresponding to the received variation pattern is determined (S34509), and this processing ends.

<Regarding the first modification of the thirteenth control example>
Next, a first modification of the thirteenth control example described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 464 to 470. FIG. In the thirteenth control example described above, when the game state is the normal state or the first time saving state, the time saving lottery is configured to be executable, and the time saving lottery wins the time saving lottery, and when the first time saving state is set. , the first time-saving state of one time of time-saving is set. Then, while the normal state or the first time saving state is set, the special pattern lottery is executed 500 times without winning the jackpot, thereby establishing the condition for giving the ceiling privilege, and the third time saving state as the ceiling privilege. was configured to be set.

In addition, according to the gaming state set when the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege are satisfied, the contents of the privilege to be granted as the ceiling privilege are configured to be different, and the ceiling privilege is set in the state where the normal state is set. When the conditions for granting the privilege are satisfied, the third time-saving state of 100 times of working hours is set, and when the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is established in the state where the first time-saving state is set, 300 times of working hours. It was configured to set the third time saving state.

In other words, in the above-described thirteenth control example, in addition to the conventional game characteristics of aiming to win the jackpot in the special symbol lottery, when the period in which the jackpot is not won continues for a long time, it is given based on the number of executions of the special symbol lottery. A player can be made to execute a game aiming at a ceiling privilege.

Furthermore, based on the results of the time saving lottery, by frequently switching between the normal state and the first time saving state, the contents of the benefits given as ceiling benefits (time saving times) are advantageous benefits for the player ( It is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict whether it will be a time saving 300 times) or a disadvantageous benefit (time saving 100 times) that is more disadvantageous than an advantageous benefit.

On the other hand, in the first modification, the probability of winning a short-time lottery in a short-time lottery is set to a low probability (1/500), and the short-time lottery is configured to be executable only in the normal state. The first time-saving state is set so that the number of times of time-saving is greater than the number of executions of the special symbol lottery (the number of times of addiction), which is the condition for granting the ceiling privilege.

That is, in the first modification, when the time saving is won in the normal state and the first time saving state is set, the first time saving state continues until the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege are satisfied unless the jackpot is won. It is configured as follows. By constructing in this way, since an advantageous privilege is given in the ceiling privilege as an added value by winning the time saving lottery, it is possible to motivate the player to execute the game aiming at the ceiling privilege. .

Furthermore, in the first modified example, during the period in which the left-handed game state is being executed, the game state currently set is normal state or for making the player predict whether it is the first time-saving state The game state suggesting effect is configured to be executable.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for a player who has been playing a left-handed game state for a long time to predict the currently set game state without winning a jackpot. It is possible to select whether or not to continue the game in consideration of the remaining period until the provision condition of is established and the current game state. In addition, even if the remaining period until the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied, the game state suggesting effect is executed in the effect mode indicating that the first time saving state is likely to be set. Since it is possible to make it easier for the player to play a game aiming at an advantageous privilege, the effect for suggesting the currently set game state is not executed during the period when the left-handed game state is being executed. Compared to the case, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be easily improved.

<Regarding the contents of the effect executed in the first modified example of the thirteenth control example>
First, with reference to FIG. 464, the contents of characteristic effects among various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the first modified example of the thirteenth control example will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in the first modification of the thirteenth control example is the first time saving state based on the result of the time saving lottery executed in the left-handed gaming state with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described thirteenth control example is set, the time-saving lottery is not executed, and the number of times of time-saving is set to 1000 times, which is higher than the number of times (500 times) in which the ceiling privilege is given as the first time-saving state. there is

Therefore, when the first time-saving state is set based on the result of the time-saving lottery executed in the left-handed gaming state, at that time, the advantageous privilege (300 times of time-saving 3rd time-saving state) is set as the ceiling privilege. It is determined that

Therefore, in the first modified example, during the left-handed game state, a game state suggestion effect for making the player predict whether or not the first time-saving state is set can be executed. Figure 464 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the effect screen of the game state suggestion effect, Figure 464 (b) is in the left-handed game state, there is a high possibility that the first time-saving state is set It is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during the suggestion effect for suggesting that to the player.

As shown in FIG. 464(a), when the game state suggestion effect is executed, a roulette wheel 861 having a plurality of areas formed in the center of the main display area Dm is rotated and displayed and stopped at a position corresponding to the indicator 863. A game state suggesting effect is executed in which the area that has been touched is a result of the effect. In the roulette 861, a first region 862a displaying a display mode of "preparation" indicating that the first time saving state is set, and "chance" suggesting the possibility that the first time saving state is set , a third area 862c displaying a "V" indicating that a jackpot has been won, and a "?" indicating no information is displayed. The four regions of the fourth region 862d are formed with different occupied ranges.

In the main display area Dm, characters of "state suggesting chance" for indicating that the game state suggesting effect is being executed are displayed, and in the sub display area Ds, the contents of the game state suggesting effect are displayed. As an explanation form for explaining to the player, the comment "Where will it stop?"

Here, in the first modified example, the execution frequency of the game state suggestive effect and the effect mode are changed based on the length of the remaining period until the ceiling privilege is granted and the result of the special symbol lottery to be executed. As the remaining period until the ceiling privilege is granted is shorter, or the special symbol lottery of the specific number (for example, multiples of 50), the actually set game state is changed. The game state suggesting effect is executed in an easily comprehensible effect mode.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player who is trying to grasp the set game state to play the game until the special symbol lottery for the next specific number of times is executed. The operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be easily improved. In addition, as shown in FIG. 464(a), in the small display area Dm7 formed in the main display area Dm, the number of times of the special symbol lottery that has been executed since the previous big win game is completed is displayed. The figure shown in FIG. 464(a) shows the special symbol fluctuation period for showing the result of the 250th special symbol lottery.

Then, when the first area 862a is stop-displayed at the position corresponding to the indicator 863 in the game state suggesting effect, the ceiling preparation mode is set as shown in FIG. 464(b). This ceiling preparation mode is a production mode for indicating that the first time saving state is set, and in the small display area Dm7, the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the end of the previous jackpot game is not displayed. , the remaining period (the number of remaining special symbol fluctuations) until the ceiling privilege is given is displayed, and a character 809 that appears during the ceiling mode (ceiling medium mode) is displayed. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, as an explanation mode for explaining the effects of the ceiling preparation mode, the characters "If you get hooked 90 more times, get 300 times shorter" are displayed. By constructing in this way, the game state suggesting effect not only suggests the currently set game state to the player, but also informs the player of the remaining period until the ceiling privilege is granted. Since it becomes possible, it is possible to motivate the player aiming at giving the ceiling privilege to play the game.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first modified example of the thirteenth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 465 to 467, the electrical configuration of this first modified example will be described. The first modification of the thirteenth control example differs from the above-described thirteenth control example in that the winning probability of the time saving lottery is changed to a low probability, and that the number of time saving times set when winning time is different. , the electrical configuration of the main controller 110 is changed by adding a data table for determining the effect mode of the game state suggestion effect, and a flag for indicating the state in which the ceiling preparation mode is set. is added, the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 is different. Other elements are the same, and the description of the same content is omitted.

First, with reference to Drawing 465 (a), the contents of random number 13a table 202lae per time saving are explained. FIG. 465(a) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the random number 13a table 202lae per time saving. This time saving random number 13a table 202lae is different from the above time saving random number 13 table 202le (see FIG. 444(c)) in that the number of determination values for winning in the time saving lottery is different. .

Specifically, when the special symbol type is "common" and the game state is normal, the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "998, 999". is defined as In addition, when the game state is other than the normal state, the determination value of the time-saving election is not defined (indicated by "-" in the figure).

By constructing in this way, the game state in which the time saving lottery can be won is only the normal state, and furthermore, it is possible to make it difficult to win the time saving lottery. Therefore, even if an advantageous privilege (third time-saving state of 300 times of time-saving) that is advantageous to the player can be given as an added value by winning the time-saving lottery, the player is excessively given an advantageous privilege. You can prevent it from being done.

Next, with reference to Drawing 465 (b), the contents of 13a table 202laf1 for time saving election are explained. Drawing 465 (b) is a figure showing the contents prescribed in 13a table 202laf1 for time saving election. As shown in FIG. 465(b), the 13a table 202laf1 for time saving election is the number of times of time saving (time saving counter 203h ) are different, and the others are the same. Descriptions of the same contents are omitted.

Specifically, when the first time saving state is set as the time saving type, the difference is that "1000 times" is set as the number of time saving times. By configuring in this way, when the first time saving state is set by winning the time saving, the first time saving state can be continuously set until the number of times of addiction is exceeded.

Next, referring to FIG. 466(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 included in the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first modification will be described. The ROM 222 possessed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first modified example is the ROM 222 possessed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth control example described above (see FIG. 447(a) ) in that a table 222laa for game state suggestion effect selection 13a is provided in place of the ceiling reach suggestion effect selection table 222la, and the rest is the same.

The game state suggesting effect selection 13a table 222laa is a data table that is referred to when determining the effect mode of the game state suggesting effect, and in the normal mode (normal state, first time saving state, second probability variable state), It is referred to when a special variation (15 seconds variation) variation pattern is selected (see S34532 in FIG. 470).

Here, with reference to FIG. 467, the contents defined in the game state suggestion effect selection 13a table 222laa will be described. FIG. 467 shows the contents defined in the table 222laa for game state suggestion effect selection 13a. As shown in FIG. 467, the game state suggestion effect selection 13a table 222laa contains the value of the special figure lottery counter 223lc, the set game state, the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the variation, and the acquired Different suggestion modes (drawing modes) are defined corresponding to the values of the effect counter 223f.

This game state suggestive effect selection 13a The effect mode of the game state suggestive effect determined by referring to the table 222laa, that is, the game state suggestive effect described with reference to FIG. Areas 862a to 862d to be stopped and displayed corresponding to the indicator 863 are determined.

Specifically, the value of the special figure lottery counter 223lc is "other than a multiple of 50 from 1 to 200", and the first normal mode (normal state) is set, and the special symbol lottery of the variation If the result is a "jackpot", the effect mode "V" is applied to the range of "80 to 99" for the value of the acquired effect counter 223f in the range of "0 to 79". ” is defined, and if the result of the special symbol lottery for the variation is “other than the big win”, the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of “0 to 89”, and the effect mode “?” An effect mode "chance" is defined for the range of "90 to 99".

In addition, the value of the special figure lottery number counter 223lc is "other than a multiple of 50 from 1 to 200", and the second normal mode (first time saving state) is set, and the result of the special symbol lottery of the variation is "jackpot", the effect mode "V" is set to the range of "80 to 99" for the value of the acquired effect counter 223f in the range "0 to 79", and the effect mode "chance" is defined, and if the result of the special symbol lottery for the variation is "other than a big hit", the value of the acquired production counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 49", and the production mode "?" 50 to 99”, the effect mode “chance” is defined.

Next, the value of the special symbol lottery number counter 223lc is "50, 100, 150, 200", the first normal mode (normal state) is set, and the result of the special symbol lottery of the change is "jackpot ', the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is set to the entire range of '0 to 99', and the effect mode 'V' is defined, and the result of the special symbol lottery for the variation is 'other than the big win'. If the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of 0 to 39, the effect mode ?? .

In addition, the value of the special figure lottery counter 223lc is "50, 100, 150, 200", the second normal mode (first time saving state) is set, and the result of the special symbol lottery of the variation is " In the case of "jackpot", the effect mode "V" is defined for the entire range of the obtained value of the effect counter 223f "0 to 99", and the result of the special symbol lottery for the variation is "other than the big win". In the case of , the effect mode "?" is defined for the range of the value of the acquired effect counter 223f "0 to 19", and the effect mode "chance" is defined for the range "20 to 99". there is

The value of the special figure lottery number counter 223lc is "other than a multiple of 50 from 201 to 490", the first normal mode (normal state) is set, and the result of the special symbol lottery of the change is "jackpot". In the case of , the effect mode "V" is defined for the range of the obtained effect counter 223f of "0 to 89", and the effect mode "chance" is defined for the range of "90 to 99". If the result of the special symbol lottery for the variation is "other than the jackpot", the effect mode "?" A production mode "chance" is defined for the range of .

In addition, the value of the special figure lottery counter 223lc is "other than a multiple of 50 from 201 to 490", and the second normal mode (first time saving state) is set, and the result of the special symbol lottery of the variation is "jackpot", the effect mode "V" is set to the range of "90 to 99" for the value of the acquired effect counter 223f in the range "0 to 89", and the effect mode "chance" is stipulated, and if the result of the special symbol lottery for the variation is "other than a big hit", the value of the acquired production counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 19", and the production mode "?" 20 to 99”, the effect mode “chance” is defined.

Next, the value of the special figure lottery number counter 223lc is "250, 300, 350, 400, 450", the first normal mode (normal state) is set, and the result of the special symbol lottery of the variation is In the case of "jackpot", the effect mode "V" is defined for the entire range of the value of the acquired effect counter 223f "0 to 99", and the result of the special symbol lottery for the variation is "other than the big win". ”, the effect mode “?” is specified for the acquired value of the effect counter 223f in the range “0 to 49”, and the effect mode “chance” is specified for the range “50 to 99”. ing.

In addition, the value of the special figure lottery number counter 223lc is "250, 300, 350, 400, 450", the second normal mode (first time saving state) is set, and the result of the special symbol lottery of the variation is a "jackpot", the effect mode "V" is defined for the entire range of the obtained value of the effect counter 223f "0 to 99", and the result of the special symbol lottery for the variation is "jackpot If the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is in the range of 0 to 49, the effect mode ``chance'' is specified, and the effect mode ``preparation'' is specified in the range of ``50 to 99''. It is

Then, when the value of the special symbol lottery number counter 223lc is "491 to 500", the first normal mode (normal state) is set, and the result of the special symbol lottery of the variation is "jackpot", The production mode "V" is defined for the range of the value of the obtained production counter 223f of "0 to 69", and the production mode "chance" is defined for the range of "70 to 99". If the result of the special symbol lottery is "other than big win", the effect mode "chance" is defined for the entire range of the obtained value of the effect counter 223f "0 to 99".

In addition, when the value of the special figure lottery number counter 223lc is "491 to 500", the second normal mode (first time saving state) is set, and the result of the special symbol lottery of the change is "jackpot" , the effect mode "V" is defined for the acquired value of the effect counter 223f in the range "0 to 79", and the effect mode "chance" is defined for the range "80 to 99", When the result of the special symbol lottery for the variation is "other than the big hit", the production mode "preparation" is defined for the range of the value of the acquired production counter 223f "0 to 98", and "99". A production mode "chance" is defined for the value of .

Here, when the effect mode "V" is determined, the area 862c where V is displayed finally stops at the position corresponding to the indicator 863 as the game state suggesting effect shown in FIG. 464(a). When the displayed effect is executed and the effect mode "chance" is determined, the chance is finally displayed at the position corresponding to the indicator 863 as the game state suggesting effect shown in FIG. 464(a). 464(a), the game state suggestion effect shown in FIG. When the effect of stop-displaying the area 862d displaying "?" is executed and the effect mode "preparation" is determined, the index At a position corresponding to 863, an effect is executed in which an area 862a displaying preparation is stopped and displayed.

As described above, in the game state suggesting effect, the larger the value of the special drawing lottery number counter 223lc, that is, the smaller the remaining period until the ceiling privilege is granted, the less the currently set game state corresponds. It is configured to facilitate the setting of suggested modes. By constructing in this way, it is possible to gradually increase the prediction accuracy of the currently set game state for the player who has been playing the left-handed game state for a long time, so that the player can continue playing the game. You can make it easier.

In addition, when the execution condition of the game state suggestive effect is satisfied at the timing when the value of the special figure lottery number counter 223lc is a specific value (multiple of 50), than when the game state suggestive effect is executed at other timing Also, it is constructed so that an effect that makes it easy to grasp the currently set game state can be easily executed. By configuring in this way, the player who is trying to grasp the currently set game state continues to execute the special symbol lottery until the value of the special symbol lottery number counter 223lc reaches a specific value. It is possible to make it easier to play a game.

Next, referring to FIG. 466(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first modified example will be described. The RAM 223 possessed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first modified example is the RAM 223 possessed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth control example (see FIG. 447(b) ) in that a notified flag 223laa is added. Identical contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The notified flag 223laa is a flag for indicating that the notification indicating that the first time saving state is set has been executed in the game state suggestive effect, and the ceiling preparation mode as the effect result of the game state suggestive effect. (See FIG. 464(b)) is set to ON (see S34534 in FIG. 470). Then, the setting status of the notified flag 223laa is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the game state suggestion effect (see S34531 in FIG. 470), and when the notified flag 223laa is set to ON (S34531 in FIG. 470: Yes), it is configured so that the new game state suggestion effect is not executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress unnecessary execution of the game state suggesting effect in a state in which it is already notified that the first time saving state has been set.

<Regarding control processing of main controller 110 in the first modification of the thirteenth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 468, the contents of the control process executed by main controller 110 in the first modified example will be described. This first modified example is different from the above-described thirteenth control example in that the conditions for executing the time saving lottery are different, and the rest is the same. A detailed description of the same processing contents is omitted.

Here, with reference to Drawing 468, the contents of time saving lottery processing 13a (S38006a) are explained. Figure 468 is the flowchart which shows the processing contents of time saving lottery processing 13a (S38006a) in this 1st modification. As shown in FIG. 468, the time saving lottery process 13a (S38006a) is different from the time saving lottery process 13 (S38006) in the thirteenth control example described above. The difference is that the data table referred to during the time saving lottery is set to the time saving random number 13a table 222iae (S38152a), and the other points are the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and the description thereof is omitted.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device 113 in the first modification of the thirteenth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 469 and 470, the contents of the control processing executed by the audio ramp control device 113 in the first modified example will be described. In the first modified example, in place of the time saving state effect setting processing 13 (see S9091 in FIG. 460), time saving state effect setting processing 13a (see S9091a in FIG. 469) is executed for the thirteenth control example described above. 463), and that the normal mode effect setting process 13a (see S34402a in FIG. 470) is executed instead of the normal mode effect setting process 13 (see S34402 in FIG. 463). Since the rest is the same, the description thereof is omitted.

First, with reference to Drawing 469, processing contents of time saving state production setting processing 13a (S9091a) are explained. Figure 469 is the flowchart which shows the processing contents of time saving state production setting processing 13a (S9091a). As shown in FIG. 469, when the time saving state effect setting process 13a (S9091a) is executed, the same S34301 to S34304 processes as the time saving state effect setting process 13 (see S9091 in FIG. 460) are executed.

Then, in the process of S34305, if it is determined to be the third time saving state (S34305: Yes), in the process of S34307, if it is determined to be the second time saving state after the jackpot C13 (S34307: Yes), the second after the time saving election When it is determined that the time saving state is determined (S34308: Yes), it is determined whether the notified flag 223laa is set to ON (S34331), and when it is determined that it is set to ON (S34331: Yes), notified The flag 223laa is set to OFF (S34332), the processing of S34306 which is the same as the above-described time saving state effect setting processing 13 (see S9091 in FIG. 460) is executed, and this processing ends.

In addition, in the processing of S34331, if it is determined that the notified flag 223laa is not set to ON (S34331: No), the processing of S34332 is skipped, and the time saving state effect setting processing 13 (S9091 in FIG. 460) is skipped. ) is executed, and the process ends. By configuring in this way, the notified flag 223laa can be reliably set to OFF.

Next, with reference to FIG. 470, the processing contents of the normal mode effect setting process 13a (S34402a) will be described. FIG. 470 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the normal mode effect setting process 13a (S34402a). This normal mode effect setting process 13a (S34402a) is different from the normal mode effect setting process 13 (see S34402 in FIG. 463) in the thirteenth control example described above. The difference is that the content of the processing for setting the effect mode is different when the mode is set, and the rest is the same. The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

When the normal mode effect setting process 13a (S34402a) is executed, first, the same processes of S34501 to S34507 as the normal mode effect setting process 13 (see S34402 in FIG. 463) in the thirteenth control example described above are executed. , when it is determined that there is a 15-second variation (special variation) in the processing of S34507 (S34507: Yes), it is determined whether the notified flag 223laa is set to ON (S34531).

In the processing of S34531, if it is determined that the notified flag 223laa is not set to ON (S34531: No), the ceiling preparation mode for informing the player that the first time saving state is set is set. Since the game state suggestive effect selection 13a table 222laa is referred to, the effect mode of the suggestive effect (game state suggestive effect) is determined (S34532), and thereafter the effect mode determined this time is the ceiling preparation mode. (S34533), and if it is determined to be the ceiling preparation mode (S34533: Yes), the notified flag 223laa is set to ON (S34534).

Then, the value of the special drawing lottery number counter 223lc is read (S34535), and the remaining number of times until the read value reaches 500, that is, the remaining number of times of addiction until the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied is calculated (S34536). ), set a display command for indicating the calculated remaining number of times (S34537), and terminate this process. When the display control device 114 receives the display command set by the processing of S34537, the remaining number of times to reach the ceiling is displayed in the small display area Dm7 on the display screen shown in FIG. 464(b). be done.

Although detailed description is omitted, the remaining number calculated by the processing of S34536 is set in a dedicated counter (remaining number counter), and the set value is subtracted by 1 each time the special symbol lottery is executed. and a display command for indicating the value after subtraction is output to the display control device 114 . As a result, when the ceiling preparation mode is set, the value indicating the remaining number of times to the ceiling is gradually reduced each time the special symbol lottery is executed, so that the player can receive the ceiling privilege. is approaching.

Also, in the processing of S34531, if it is determined that the notified flag 223laa is set to ON (S34531: Yes), since the ceiling preparation mode is already set, the game state suggesting effect is executed. , skipping the processing for and shifts to the processing of S34535.

In addition, in the processing of S34533, if it is determined that an effect mode other than the ceiling preparation mode is determined (S34533: No), the process of S34534 is skipped because the new game state suggesting effect can be executed. , S34535.

As described above, in the first modification of the thirteenth control example, the probability of winning the time saving lottery is set to a low probability (1/500), and the time saving lottery can be executed only in the normal state, In the case of short-time winning, the first short-time state is set so that the number of times of short-time is greater than the number of executions of the special pattern lottery (the number of times of addiction), which is the condition for granting the ceiling privilege, and the short-time is won in the normal state. When the first time-saving state is set, the first time-saving state is continued until the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege are satisfied unless a jackpot is won.

By constructing in this way, since an advantageous privilege is given in the ceiling privilege as an added value by winning the time saving lottery, it is possible to motivate the player to execute the game aiming at the ceiling privilege. .

In addition, in the first modification of the thirteenth control example, the time saving lottery is configured not to be executed during the first time saving state, but the time saving lottery is configured to be executable even during the first time saving state. , When winning the time-saving state during the first time-saving state, the first time-saving state is newly set with the number of time-saving times greater than the number of executions of the special symbol lottery (the number of times of addiction) that is the condition for granting the ceiling privilege. However, it may be configured such that the content of the privilege (the number of times of time saving) given as the ceiling privilege is varied according to the number of times the time saving is won until the conditions for giving the ceiling privilege are satisfied. In this case, it is preferable to configure so that the number of times of saving time given as a ceiling privilege increases as the number of times of saving time winning increases. By comprising in this way, the added value by having won the time saving lottery can be raised more. Moreover, you may comprise so that the number of times of time reduction provided as a ceiling privilege may become small.

Furthermore, in the first modified example of the thirteenth control example, as in the above-described thirteenth control example, even when the normal state and the first time saving state are switched, the number of times of addiction is continuously updated (added) However, without being limited to this, when the game state switches from the normal state to the first time saving state, or when the game state switches from the first time saving state to the normal state, the number of times of addiction It may be configured to reset.

Even if it is configured in this way, in the first modification of the thirteenth control example, when the time-saving election is made in the normal state, the special symbol lottery number of times that the ceiling privilege is given (500 times of hooking) Since the first time-saving state of the number of times of time-saving with a large value is set, the ceiling privilege can be reliably given.

In addition, in the first modification of the thirteenth control example, when the time saving is won in the normal state, the number of times of saving time having a value larger than the number of special symbol lotteries (500 times of addiction) to which the ceiling privilege is given Although it is configured to set the 1 hour reduction state, it is not limited to this, and the number of special pattern lotteries (500 times of addiction) to which the ceiling privilege is given in some cases when the reduction of working hours is won in the normal state. It may be configured to be able to set a first time saving state having a smaller time saving number of times (for example, 100 times, 150 times, etc.).

By configuring in this way, at the time when the first time-saving state is set by the timing of time-saving election in the normal state (the number of times of addiction when time-saving winning) and the time-saving state type set based on time-saving winning, It can be determined whether or not it is confirmed that the ceiling privilege is given during the first time saving state. And, in this case, as an effect executed in the normal state, the first time-saving state set when the time-saving election is set based on the selection ratio of each time-saving state type in which the first time-saving state is set when the time-saving election reaches the ceiling Suggestion production that can suggest the degree of expectation that can continue until the time, and suggestion production that can suggest the degree of expectation that the first time reduction state set this time can continue until the ceiling is reached at the time of winning the time reduction. Good to configure. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make the player play while predicting whether or not the result of the time saving lottery will be advantageous to the player for the time saving lottery executed in the normal state.

In addition, in the first modification, during the period in which the left-handed game state is being executed, the game state currently set is the normal state or the first time-saving state for the player to predict. The game state suggesting effect is configured to be executable.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for a player who has been playing a left-handed game state for a long time to predict the currently set game state without winning a jackpot. It is possible to select whether or not to continue the game in consideration of the remaining period until the provision condition of is established and the current game state. In addition, even if the remaining period until the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied, the game state suggesting effect is executed in the effect mode indicating that the first time saving state is likely to be set. Since it is possible to make it easier for the player to play a game aiming at an advantageous privilege, the effect for suggesting the currently set game state is not executed during the period when the left-handed game state is being executed. Compared to the case, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be easily improved.

<Regarding the Effect Modification Example in the 1st Modification Example of the 13th Control Example>
Next, a modification of the effect performed in the first modification of the thirteenth control example described with reference to FIG. 464(a) will be described. In the first modification of the thirteenth control example described above, in the left-handed game state, the game state suggestion for suggesting to the player whether the currently set game state is the normal state or the first time-saving state The production was configured to be executable.

As the game state suggesting effect, the effect of displaying the display screen shown in FIG. 464(a) is configured to be executable. As described above, in the game state suggesting effect executed in the first modification of the thirteenth control example, the currently set game state as the number of special symbol lotteries (the number of times of addiction), which is the condition for granting the ceiling privilege, approaches. By configuring the game state suggesting effect to be executed in a manner that the player can easily grasp, it was intended to make it easier for the player to continue playing the game. In a state where the special symbol lottery number of times (the number of times of addiction) is far, it is difficult for the player to grasp which game state is set as the effect result of the game state suggesting effect (at the position corresponding to the indicator 863 There is a problem that the production result of stopping the area 862d with "?" is likely to be executed, and the production effect is lowered.

In addition, as the effect result of the game state suggesting effect, the effect result that makes it difficult for the player to grasp which game state is set (the area 862 d with “?” attached to the position corresponding to the indicator 863 stops Even if the game state suggesting effect (result of effect) is continuously executed a plurality of times, the same effect is only repeatedly executed, and there is a problem that the effect to be executed becomes monotonous.

On the other hand, in this modified example of effect, part of the effect mode of the game state suggesting effect (mode of roulette 861) is different from the first modified example of the thirteenth control example described above. Specifically, in this modified example of effect, an "indicator" is provided for the area 862d marked with "?" in the first modified example of the thirteenth control example described above. This indicator has 10 scales, and is configured so that the display mode is variable so that the value increases in units of one scale from one end side of the region 862d (the side adjacent to the region 862c). ing.

Then, when "?" is selected as the effect result of the game state suggesting effect, when the area 862d with the "indicator" attached to the position corresponding to the indicator 863 is positioned (displayed), the area When the "indicator" attached to 862d rises by one scale, and the display mode after the variable "indicator" rises to the maximum value provided on the other end side of the region 862d (the side adjacent to the region 862d) In addition, the effect is the same as when the area 862a marked with "preparation" is positioned (displayed) at the position corresponding to the indicator 863. FIG.

In other words, as a result of a specific effect (playing state suggesting effect) executed during a specific period (period until the ceiling privilege is granted), a specific effect result (a effect result in which "?" is displayed). A storage means for storing the number of times (occurred) is provided, and based on the information stored in the storage means (the number of times of performance resulting in a specific performance result), the performance mode of the specific performance (playing state suggestive performance) is variable. configured as possible. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same rendering mode from being repeatedly executed and the rendering effect from deteriorating.

Further, when the number of times stored in the storage means satisfies a predetermined number of times, the display area for showing the specific effect result is changed to another effect result (" preparation"), the more continuously the game state suggestive effect that results in a specific effect is executed, the more frequently the game state suggestive effect that results in a different effect is executed. can be increased, and the player can expect that the game state suggesting effect will be repeatedly executed.

In this modified example of effect, when the "indicator" rises to the maximum value, the effect result of the game state suggesting effect indicated by the area 862d to which the "indicator" is attached is changed. For example, the range of the area where the value has already increased among the areas 862d to which the "indicator" is attached may be configured to be displayed as an area for indicating another effect result. . In this case, every time the value indicated by the 'indicator' increases, the area indicating the result of other effects gradually expands, so that the player expects that the game state suggesting effects are repeatedly executed. can be done.

In addition, in the first modification of the thirteenth control example and the present modification, one type of display mode (Fig. 464 (a) ), but not limited to this, based on the number of times of addiction at the time when the game state suggestion production is first executed (the number of remaining special symbol fluctuations until the ceiling privilege is granted), the game state suggestion The display mode of the roulette 961 that is displayed first during the production may be changed. By configuring in this way, before the effect result of the game state suggesting effect is displayed, based on the display mode of the displayed roulette 961, the player can determine the remaining period until the ceiling privilege is given. can be predicted.

<Regarding another technical idea regarding the thirteenth control example>
In the above-described thirteenth control example and the first modification of the thirteenth control example, as a different ceiling privilege according to the game state set at the time the ceiling privilege is granted, a third time saving with a different number of times of time saving Although the state is configured to be settable, another privilege may be provided as the contents of the ceiling privilege to be provided to the player. For example, the ceiling privilege is set at the time when it is provided. The type of the special symbol lottery that is likely to be executed during the time saving state may be changed according to the game state. For example, when the ceiling privilege is given in the normal state, the second special symbol lottery A time-saving state is set in which the first special symbol lottery is easier to execute than the first special symbol lottery, and when the ceiling privilege is given in the first time-saving state, the second special symbol lottery is better than the first special symbol lottery. You may comprise so that the time saving state which becomes easy to be performed may be set.

By configuring in this way, the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the period during which the ceiling privilege is granted may be varied according to the game state set at the time when the ceiling privilege is granted. Therefore, the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the period when the ceiling privilege is given can be made different.

Further, as another ceiling privilege, the length of the period during which the electric accessory 1640 is opened may be varied according to the game state set at the time when the ceiling privilege is granted. In this case, for example, the winning probability of the normal pattern lottery during the time saving state is set differently according to the game state set at the time when the ceiling privilege is given, or the normal pattern fluctuation during the time saving state The time is set to be different according to the game state set at the time when the ceiling privilege is given, or the length of the period in which the electric accessory 1640 is in the open state in the normal game during the time saving state. It is preferable to set the height differently according to the game state set at the time when the ceiling privilege is awarded. By configuring in this way, the number of prize balls to be paid out during the ceiling privilege can be varied depending on the contents of the ceiling privilege. Furthermore, in this case, in some of the benefits given as ceiling benefits, a time-saving state in which the number of prize balls paid out during the ceiling benefits is greater than the number of game balls fired during the ceiling benefits It may be configured to be configurable.

In addition, when a time-saving state in which the number of game balls paid out during the ceiling privilege is larger than the number of game balls fired during the ceiling privilege, the game balls can be given as a ceiling privilege. can be determined according to the number of times of hooking until the ceiling privilege is granted. Since it is used, it is preferable to configure so that about 30% of the game balls used before the ceiling privilege is given can be increased as possession balls during the ceiling privilege. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to play a game aiming at the ceiling privilege.

Furthermore, in the above-described thirteenth control example and the first modification of the thirteenth control example, as a ceiling privilege that differs according to the game state set at the time the ceiling privilege is awarded, Although it is configured to be able to grant a privilege that changes the control processing content (a privilege to set a different time saving number of times), the privilege that can be granted in the control processing range of the audio lamp control device 113 is used as a ceiling privilege. It may be provided, for example, as a variable effect executed to show the result of a special symbol lottery, a premium with a low appearance frequency that is easier to execute when a ceiling privilege is granted than when it is not granted The pachinko machine 10 having a setting function capable of setting different jackpot probabilities in a plurality of stages can suggest set values to the player. Such a setting suggesting effect may be made easier to execute when the ceiling privilege is given than when it is not given. Even in the case of such a configuration, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game on the pachinko machine 10 provided with the ceiling privilege.

Further, in the above-described thirteenth control example, since the normal state and the first time-saving state are configured to frequently switch until the ceiling privilege is given, the first of the above-described thirteenth control example As in the modified example, during the period until the ceiling privilege is granted, it is configured not to execute an effect (game state suggesting effect) that can suggest (inform) the player of the set game state. However, without being limited to this, an effect (game state suggesting effect) capable of suggesting (notifying) the set game state to the player may be executed. In this case, when it is determined that the same game state is continuously set for a predetermined period of time, it is preferable to be able to notify that effect. By configuring in this way, for example, a player who is playing an illegal game can be easily identified so as not to end the first time-saving state in which a privilege advantageous to the player is given as a ceiling privilege.

<Regarding the 14th control example>
Next, the fourteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 471 to 480. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the above-described thirteenth control example is configured to be able to give a benefit that is advantageous to the player when the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed (number of times of special symbol lottery) satisfies a predetermined condition. . By constructing in this way, a privilege can be given to a player who has been playing a game for executing the special symbol lottery for a long time regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery, so that the player's willingness to play is reduced. It was something that could be suppressed.

However, when the number of consecutive executions of the special symbol lottery where the lottery result is other than the big win (loss) (the number of times of addiction) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 500 times), the ceiling privilege is given. Therefore, there is a problem that the timing at which the ceiling privilege is given to the player is easily predicted, and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is lowered during the period when the ceiling privilege is difficult to be given.

On the other hand, in the 14th control example, after the first condition (500 times of addiction) for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied, the second A ceiling privilege can be given when the conditions are satisfied (when the prize is lost). As a result, the timing at which the ceiling privilege is given is given irregularity, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this 14th control example, after the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege (500 times of hooking) is satisfied, the period until the second condition is satisfied is a predetermined period (200 special figure fluctuations). When it exceeds, a privilege (second ceiling privilege) that is more advantageous to the player can be given.

By constructing in this way, even if the period until the second condition is satisfied after the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied, the player's desire to play the game is reduced. can be suppressed.

<Regarding the effect content in the 14th control example>
First, with reference to FIGS. 471 and 472, the content of characteristic effects among various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the fourteenth control example will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in the present 14th control example sets the second condition after the first condition (500 hooking times) for giving the ceiling privilege is established with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example described above. A ceiling activation period is set as the period until the (time reduction out) is established, and during the ceiling activation period, the winning in the time reduction lottery will be a lottery result that is advantageous to the player (ceiling activation mode ) is configured to be executable.

FIG. 471(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the ceiling activation period is set, and FIG. 471(b) shows the ceiling activation mode executed during the ceiling activation period. It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation screen.

As shown in Figure 471 (a), when the number of times of the special symbol lottery executed after the end of the previous jackpot game reaches 500 times, and the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied (500th special When the pattern variation is stopped and displayed), the main display area Dm displays the characters "Ceiling activation mode rush! Significant increase in stop probability of time saving pattern", and the next special pattern variation (501st special pattern variation) to the ceiling It is notified that the activation mode is set. In addition, in a small display area Dm4 formed in the lower right of the main display area Dm, a message "Keep left-handed" is displayed as a guide mode for guiding that the game method in the ceiling activation mode is left-handed. characters are displayed.

Here, in the conventional pachinko machine 10, a game (for example, from a left-handed game to a right-handed game) that switches the game method to be executed by the player in accordance with the timing of switching the production mode (contents of the production to be executed). A game to switch) is known. In this case, a technique is used in which the game method is switched in an easy-to-understand manner for the player by executing a guidance notification for guiding the player to switch the game method.

In the current situation where the pachinko machine 10 has become mainstream, in order to guide the player that the game method will be switched when the performance mode (contents of the performance to be executed) is switched without switching the game method. Even when the guidance information is not executed, there is a problem that the player switches the game method and executes a game disadvantageous to the player.

On the other hand, in the thirteenth control example, as shown in FIG. 471(a), a guidance mode for guiding the player that the same game method is to be continued can be notified. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from playing a game disadvantageous to the player.

In the sub-display area Ds, there is a comment "When all the time-saving patterns are complete, rush into the time-saving!" A comment "When the start exceeds 700 times... a big chance!?" is displayed.

When the ceiling activation mode is set, as shown in FIG. 471 (b), when three cards are displayed stopped in a specific combination on the effective line LZ, the corresponding benefits (jackpot, time reduction) are given. A variable effect indicating that is executed. In this control example, at least the losing cards (LL3, CL3, RL3) corresponding to the "losing" and the V card ( LL1, CL1, RL1) and time-saving cards (LL2, CL2, RL2) corresponding to the "ceiling privilege" are formed, and each card row is variably displayed from top to bottom. A performance is performed.

Then, when three time-saving cards (LL2, CL2, RL2) displayed in each pattern row are stopped and displayed on the activated line LZ, it is possible to inform that a time-saving state is given as a ceiling privilege, and each pattern. When three V cards (LL1, CL1, RL1) displayed in a row are stopped and displayed on the activated line LZ, it is possible to notify that a privilege based on winning a big win is granted.

Here, as described above, the condition for granting the ceiling privilege in the ceiling activation mode is that the time-saving lottery does not win the time-saving lottery (loss is won), so the result of the special symbol lottery is completely off (jackpot, time-saving) None of them are won), an effect is executed in which three time-saving cards (LL2, CL2, RL2) displayed in each symbol row are stopped and displayed on the activated line LZ.

Also, FIG. 472(a) is a display screen during super ceiling activation mode showing that the length of the ceiling activation period has exceeded a predetermined period (200 special figure fluctuations) and that the second ceiling privilege can be given. FIG. 472(b) is a diagram showing an example, and FIG. 472(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen in the case of losing in the time-saving lottery in the ceiling activation mode and winning.

As shown in FIG. 472 (a), when the special symbol lottery for a predetermined period is executed after the ceiling activation mode is set, when the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied, the game is played more than the normal ceiling privilege. A super-heaven activation mode is displayed to indicate that the second ceiling privilege advantageous to the player is given. Then, in the sub display area Ds, as a ceiling privilege, a comment "Time saving powers up to super time saving" is displayed to indicate that the third time saving state with many times of working time saving is set, and a time saving card ( LL2, CL2, RL2) are displayed in a display mode to which the character "super" is added.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the condition for granting the second ceiling privilege has been established.

Then, when the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the ceiling activation mode is completely out (see the small display area Dm1 in FIG. 472(b)), as shown in FIG. 472(b), each symbol row Three time-saving cards (LL2, CL2, RL2) displayed in are stopped and displayed on the effective line LZ, and a character 809 displayed when the ceiling privilege is granted is a production that congratulates the ceiling privilege. is executed.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fourteenth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 473 to 475, the electrical configuration in this 14th control example will be described. In the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, the pachinko machine 10 in the 14th control example replaces the time saving random number 13 table 202le with the time saving 14 random number table 202me in the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 for the 13th control example described above. It is different in that a time saving type selection 14 table 202mf is provided instead of the type selection 13 table 202lf, and the rest is the same.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 473(b), the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is different in that the third ceiling standby flag 203ma is newly added, and the rest is the same. Furthermore, in the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, as shown in FIG. 475, there is a difference in that a ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is newly added. Other configurations are the same, and descriptions of the same configurations are omitted.

Random number 14 table 202me per time saving, as shown in Figure 474 (a), in that the probability of winning time saving in the time saving lottery is different, random number per time saving 13 table 202le (see Figure 444 (c)) and difference. are doing. Concretely, among the range of "0 to 999" that the value of the first per random number counter C1 can take, the determination value of time saving winning is set to the range of "100 to 999". That is, in the 14th control example, when the time saving lottery is executed, the time saving lottery is configured to be won with a high probability (probability of 900/1000).

In addition, the time saving type selection 14 table 202mf is provided with a ceiling 14 table 202mf2 instead of the ceiling 13 table 202lf2 for the time saving type selection 13 table 202lf (see FIG. 446 (a)). are different. Here, with reference to FIG. 474(b), the contents of the ceiling 14 table 202mf2 will be described. FIG. 474(b) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the ceiling 14 table 202mf2.

As shown in FIG. 474 (b), the 14 table 202mf2 for the ceiling, depending on the number of hooks at the time when the ceiling privilege (third time saving state) is set, the value set to the time saving counter 203h is changed Up to 700 times, the ceiling privilege (first ceiling privilege) is the second time-saving state (time-saving number of times 300 times), and if the number of times of hooking exceeds 700 times, the ceiling privilege (second ceiling privilege ), the second time saving state (time saving number of times 1000 times) is defined to be set.

In this way, the longer the period until the ceiling privilege (third time saving state) is set, the more advantageous privilege is given to the player, thereby making it possible for the player who has not won the jackpot for a long time. It is possible to suppress a significant decrease in motivation to play.

The third ceiling standby flag 203ma is a flag for indicating that the number of times of addiction exceeds 700 times, and is set to ON when the number of times of addiction exceeds 700 times. Then, when setting the ceiling privilege, the setting status of the third ceiling standby flag 203ma is determined, and if it is determined that it is set to ON, the ceiling privilege (second ceiling privilege ) is set. Then, it is set to OFF when the ceiling privilege is awarded or when a jackpot is won.

The ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is a flag for indicating that the ceiling activation mode is on, and is set to ON when the first condition for giving the ceiling privilege (500 times of hooking) is satisfied. . Then, depending on the setting state of the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma, the effect mode in the normal mode is set (see S34571 in FIG. 480).

<Regarding control processing of main controller 110 in the fourteenth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 476 and 477, the contents of the control processing of the main controller 110 executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth control example will be described. In this 14th control example, in contrast to the above-described 13th control process, a process for determining whether the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied, and the third time reduction set based on the fact that the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied It differs from the processing for setting the state. Specifically, instead of the ceiling determination process 13 (see S38051 in FIG. 452), the ceiling determination process 14 (see S38071 in FIG. 476), instead of the time saving setting process 13 (see S30254 in FIG. 455), time saving setting process 14 (see S30274 in FIG. 477).

In the 14th control example, the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege are different from those in the 13th control example described above. It is configured so that the ceiling privilege (third time saving state) is set when both are established. By configuring in this way, compared to the case where the ceiling privilege is given based on the number of executions (the number of times of addiction) of the special symbol lottery that has been lost and won has reached a predetermined number (500 times), the ceiling It is possible to set the timing at which the privilege is granted at random.

Furthermore, as the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege, the normal first condition (500 times hooked) and the special first condition (700 times hooked) set after the normal first condition can be set. When the special first condition is satisfied without granting the ceiling privilege based on the special symbol lottery executed in the state where the normal first condition is satisfied, only the normal first condition is satisfied. It is possible to give the second ceiling privilege (3rd time saving state (1000 times saving time)) that is more advantageous to the player than when the ceiling benefit (3rd time saving state (300 times saving time)) is given in the established state. It consists of

By constructing in this way, it is possible for a player who continues for a long time to play a game that does not win in the time-saving lottery that is normally executed in a state where the first condition is satisfied, that is, a game that does not give the ceiling privilege. Therefore, it is possible to continue playing the game without lowering the player's desire to play the game.

Note that, in the fourteenth control example, the ceiling privilege is granted when the special first condition is satisfied rather than when the ceiling privilege is granted when only the normal first condition is satisfied. However, it is not limited to this, and when the ceiling privilege is granted in a state where only the first condition is normally satisfied. In this case, a ceiling privilege (second ceiling privilege) more advantageous to the player may be awarded than when the ceiling privilege is awarded while the first special condition is satisfied. By constructing in this way, the player is motivated to play the game while expecting that the ceiling privilege will be granted during the period from the establishment of the normal first condition to the establishment of the special first condition. be able to.

Also, the period during which only the normal first condition is satisfied and the period during which the special first condition is satisfied may be alternately set. Only the first condition is normally satisfied during the period, and the special first condition is satisfied during the period from "6 to 0". By configuring in this way, after exceeding 500 times of addiction at which the first condition is normally satisfied, the player can determine at what timing the second condition is satisfied (whether the time saving lottery will result in a time saving loss). can be of interest to

Furthermore, in this 14th control example, it is configured to execute determination of time-saving winning based on the lottery result of the special symbol lottery for updating the number of times of addiction. In other words, by executing the special symbol lottery, the element (the number of hooks) related to the first condition is updated, and whether or not the second condition is established (time-saving lottery result) is determined. By configuring in this way, since the game for establishing the second condition cannot be executed without updating the element (the number of times of addiction) related to the first condition, a ceiling privilege advantageous to the player is given. It is possible to suppress repeated execution of only the determination of the second condition in a situation where the special first condition is satisfied. In addition, in a situation where a ceiling privilege that is disadvantageous to the player is given (usually, only the first condition is satisfied), only the determination of the second condition is repeatedly executed, and the ceiling privilege that is disadvantageous to the player is not provided. It can be suppressed that it is granted with a high probability.

First, with reference to FIG. 476, the contents of the ceiling determination process 14 (S38071) will be described. FIG. 476 is a flow chart showing the contents of the ceiling determination process 14 (S38071). In the ceiling determination process 14 (S38071), it is determined whether or not the special first condition (700 hits) is satisfied with respect to the ceiling determination process 13 (see S38051 in FIG. 452). The difference is that the processing contents are different when the first condition is satisfied. Since other processing contents are the same, detailed description is omitted.

When the ceiling determination process 14 (S38071) is executed, the same processes of S38101 to S38109 as the ceiling determination process 13 (see S38051 in FIG. 452) are executed. Then, in the process of S38104, if it is determined that the value of the special figure lottery counter 223lc is not 500 (it is not the special symbol lottery of the 500th addiction) (S38104: No), then the special figure lottery number counter It is determined whether the value of 223lc is 700 (whether it is a special symbol lottery for the 700th addiction) (S38171).

In the process of S38171, if it is determined that the number is not 700 (S38171: No), the process proceeds to S38105 and ends. On the other hand, if it is determined to be 700, it means that the special first condition is met (S38171: Yes), so the third ceiling standby flag 203ma is set to ON (S38172), and the second ceiling standby flag 203lc is turned on. It sets to OFF (S38173), shifts to the processing of S38108, and terminates this processing.

The second ceiling standby flag 203lc or the third ceiling standby flag 203ma is stopped and displayed in a state where the third ceiling standby flag 203ma is set to ON, as a time saving state, to the type of ceiling standby flag set to ON The corresponding time saving type (time saving number of times) is set. That is, in the present 14th control example, by setting different types of ceiling standby flags to ON according to the value of the special drawing number counter 223lc, different types of time saving states are set as time saving states. are doing. By configuring in this way, different time-saving states can be set according to the number of times of addiction, so that a game can be provided in which the player does not get tired of the game early.

In addition, in the 14th control example, when the special symbol lottery loses and wins for a predetermined number of times consecutively (when the lottery result unfavorable to the player continues), the ceiling privilege can be given (the ceiling standby flag is turned on) ), but not limited to this, for example, after the end of the jackpot game, in a predetermined period after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is started, the ceiling standby flag (special ceiling standby flag ) can be set to ON.

By configuring in this way, in a state where the special period (special ceiling standby flag) is set as the game period of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to set a period during which the ceiling privilege is likely to be given, so that another period is set. It is possible to make it easier to provide a game that is more advantageous to the player than in the case where it is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 477, the process content of the time saving setting process 14 (S30274) is demonstrated. FIG. 477 is a flow chart showing the contents of the time saving setting process 14 (S30274). In this time-saving setting process 14 (S30274), in contrast to the above-described time-saving setting process 13 (see S30254 in FIG. 455), when the time-saving election is made in the target special symbol lottery, the ceiling privilege is not given. , the addition of processing when the third ceiling standby flag 203ma is set to ON, and the change in the content of the privilege given when the first ceiling standby flag 203lb is set to ON. different, otherwise identical. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

When the time saving setting process 14 (S30274) is executed, first, it is determined whether the lottery result of this time is a time saving election (S8351). The same processing of S8352 to S8354 as the setting processing 13 (see S30254 in FIG. 455) is executed, and this processing ends.

That is, in the time saving setting process 13 (see S30254 in FIG. 455) of the thirteenth control example described above, priority is given to the ceiling privilege giving that is likely to give a privilege advantageous to the player rather than the result of the time saving lottery. On the other hand, in the 14th control example, when the result of the time saving lottery is the time saving lottery, the processing based on the time saving lottery is executed in preference to the ceiling privilege grant.

By configuring in this way, even in a state where ceiling benefits can be granted (state where various ceiling standby flags are set to ON), as long as the lottery result of the special symbol lottery continues to be short-time winning, It is possible to prevent (difficult to give) the ceiling privilege. Therefore, the timing at which the ceiling privilege is granted can be randomized even after the state in which the ceiling privilege can be granted (the state in which various ceiling standby flags are set to ON) is set. The player can continue to play for a long time while expecting the ceiling privilege to be given.

In addition, in this 14th control example, when the special symbol lottery wins the time saving, it is configured so that the ceiling privilege is not given, but it is not limited to this, for example, it is set when the time saving win When a specific time saving type is set as the time saving type to be set, the process for giving the ceiling privilege is preferentially executed rather than the process of setting the time saving state based on the time saving election. good. By configuring in this way, the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege can be made more complicated, so the state in which the ceiling privilege can be granted (state in which various ceiling standby flags are set to ON) It is possible to make the timing from when is set to when the ceiling privilege is granted more random.

Furthermore, it may be configured to be able to perform processing that combines the time saving winning result and ceiling privilege grant, for example, when a specific time saving type is set as a time saving type set when time saving winning It may be configured such that a ceiling privilege that is more advantageous than the ceiling privilege that is set at the time of non-winning is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a combination of the result of the time-saving lottery and the provision of the ceiling privilege.

Returning to FIG. 477, the description continues. In the process of S8351, if it is determined that the short-time winning has not been won (S8351: No), it is determined whether the first ceiling standby flag 203lb is set to ON (S38351), and it is determined that it is set to ON. If (S38351: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 300 (S38374), the first ceiling standby flag 203lb is set to OFF (S38353), and the third time saving state is set in the game state storage area 203g (S38354), clear the information about the time saving lottery this time (S38355), set the state command including the information indicating the third time saving state and the information indicating the number of time saving times (S38356), the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la is cleared (S38357), and this processing ends.

If it is determined in the process of S38351 that the first ceiling standby flag 203lb is not set to ON (S38351: No), then it is determined whether the second ceiling standby flag 203lc is set to ON. (S38358), if it is determined that it is set to ON (S38358: Yes), set the value of the time reduction counter 203h to 300 (S38359), set the second ceiling standby flag 203lc to OFF (S38360), Set the third time saving state in the game state storage area 203g (S38354), clear the information about this time saving lottery (S38355), and issue a state command including information indicating the third time saving state and information indicating the number of time saving times Set (S38356), clear the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la (S38357), and terminate this process.

If it is determined in the process of S38358 that the second ceiling standby flag 203lc is not set to ON (S38358: No), then it is determined whether the third ceiling standby flag 203ma is set to ON. (S38371), if it is determined that it is set to ON (S38371: Yes), set the value of the time reduction counter 203h to 10000 (S38372), set the third ceiling standby flag 203ma to OFF (S38373), Set the third time saving state in the game state storage area 203g (S38354), clear the information about this time saving lottery (S38355), and issue a state command including information indicating the third time saving state and information indicating the number of time saving times Set (S38356), clear the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la (S38357), and terminate this process. Also, in the process of S38371, if it is determined that the third ceiling standby flag 203ma is not set to ON (S38371: No), that is, based on the special symbol lottery executed this time, the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege are If it is determined that the condition is not satisfied, the processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 478 to 480, control processing executed by the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth control example will be described. The control process executed by the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth control example is different from the above-described thirteenth control example in that the first condition for giving the ceiling privilege (500 times hooked) is Processing related to the period effect (ceiling activation mode) for notifying the player of the period from the establishment to the actual grant of the ceiling privilege (until the second condition to be established in the short-time non-winning is satisfied), and the ceiling It is different from the processing related to the suggestive effect for suggesting the result of the time-saving lottery to the player during the activation mode.

Specifically, instead of the state command reception processing 13 (see S34251 in FIG. 459), the state command reception processing 14 (see S34271 in FIG. 478) is changed to the normal mode effect setting processing 13 (see S34402 in FIG. 463). Instead, the difference is that the normal mode effect setting process 14 (see S34472 in FIG. 480) is executed. Since other processing contents are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 478, the contents of the state command reception process 14 (see S34271 in FIG. 478) will be described. FIG. 478 is a flow chart showing the control contents of state command reception processing 14 (see S34271 in FIG. 478). In this state command receiving process 14 (see S34271 in FIG. 478), the game state is changed to the time saving state with respect to the state command receiving process 13 (see S34251 in FIG. 459) executed in the thirteenth control example described above. As a process to be executed when it is determined, time saving state production setting processing 13 (S9091 in FIG. 460) instead of time saving state production setting processing 14 (see S39091 in FIG. 479) is executed, and for giving the ceiling privilege Period production to notify the player of the period from the establishment of the first condition (500 times addicted) to the actual grant of the ceiling privilege (until the second condition that is established when the short-time non-winning is established) In order to execute the (ceiling activation mode), the difference is that the process of determining whether the second ceiling standby flag 203lc is set to ON or the third ceiling standby flag 203ma is set to be ON can be executed. are doing. Other than that, they are the same, and the description of the same processing contents is omitted.

When the state command reception process 14 (see S34271 in FIG. 478) is executed, the same processes of S9001 to S9094 as the state command reception process 13 (see S34251 in FIG. 459) executed in the thirteenth control example described above are executed. executed. And, when it is determined that it has been changed to the time saving state in the processing of S9005 (S9005: Yes), the time saving state effect setting processing 14 is executed (S39091), and the process proceeds to S9093. The contents of this time saving state effect setting process 14 (S39091) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Also, in the process of S9093, if it is determined that there is no information indicating the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la (S9093: No), or in the process of S9093, it is determined that there is information indicating the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la Then (S9093: Yes), when the value corresponding to the received value is set to the value of the special figure lottery counter 223lc (S9094), that is, the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la measured by the main controller 110 , When the process for synchronizing the value of the special drawing lottery counter 223lc is completed, the received state command next indicates the second ceiling standby, the third ceiling standby information (second ceiling standby flag 203lc, or information indicating that the third ceiling standby flag 203ma is set to ON) (S9095). 223ma is set to ON (S9096), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S9095, the received state command is information indicating the second ceiling standby or the third ceiling standby (the second ceiling standby flag 203lc or the third ceiling standby flag 203ma is set to ON). If it is determined that it does not have the information indicating that (S9095: No), the process of S9096 is skipped and the process ends.

Thus, when the state command reception process 14 (see S34271 in FIG. 478) is executed, the first condition for giving the ceiling privilege is established based on the information included in the state command output from main controller 110. If the first condition is satisfied, the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is set to ON.

Then, when the flag 223ma during the ceiling activation mode is set to ON, a state in which the first condition for giving the ceiling privilege is currently established to the player by executing a dedicated effect. (the number of times of addiction is 500 times or more) can be notified. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the ceiling privilege is likely to be granted (a state in which the ceiling privilege is likely to be granted than when the first condition is not satisfied), so that the ceiling privilege is granted. It is possible to aim and play a game willingly.

Next, with reference to Drawing 479, control processing of time saving state production setting processing 14 (S39091) performed in state command reception processing 14 (refer to S34271 of Drawing 478) is explained. Figure 479 is the flowchart which shows the processing contents of time saving state production setting processing 14 (S39091). In this time saving state effect setting process 14 (S39091), the ceiling privilege (3rd time saving state) is given to the time saving state effect setting process 13 (see S9091 in FIG. 460) executed in the thirteenth control example described above. In the point of adding a process of setting off the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma for indicating that the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied when the ceiling privilege is set (set). are different. Other than that, they are the same, and the description of the same content is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 479, when the time saving state effect setting process 14 (S39091) is executed, S34301 which is the same as the time saving state effect setting process 13 (see S9091 in FIG. 460) executed in the thirteenth control example described above The processing of S34309 is executed. Then, in the process of S34305, if it is determined that the third time-saving state is set (ceiling privilege is granted) (S34305: Yes), it determines whether the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is set to ON (S34371), if it is determined that it is set to ON (S34371: Yes), the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is set to OFF (S34372), and the process proceeds to S34306. If it is determined in the process of S34371 that the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is not set to ON (S34371: No), the process of S34372 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S34306.

By configuring in this way, the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma continues to be set to ON even though the ceiling privilege is given, and the effect indicating that the ceiling activation mode is in progress (Fig. 471 (b )) is executed and an effect that is difficult for the player to understand is executed.

In addition, in this 14th control example, as in the 13th control example described above, it is configured to be able to grant a right-handed game state (third time-saving state) for a predetermined period as a ceiling privilege, and granted to the player A privilege (a second time-saving state in which a right-handed game state is set) whose degree of advantage is the same as the ceiling privilege can be given based on the result of the special symbol lottery. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set the right-handed game state before the first condition (the number of times of addiction) for granting the ceiling privilege is established. It is possible to make it difficult to predict the timing at which the beating game state (ceiling privilege) is provided.

Here, in the 14th control example, when the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied, it is highly likely that the ceiling privilege will be granted by setting the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma to ON. Although the period production (ceiling activation mode production) is configured to be executable, when the right-handed game state is set by another opportunity (jackpot C13 winning or time saving winning in which the second time saving state is set) Since the effect is not executed during the ceiling activation mode, there is a problem that when the right-handed game state is set depending on whether the ceiling activation mode effect is executed or not, the player predicts the trigger. there were.

In order to solve this problem, for example, when the first condition for giving the ceiling privilege is satisfied, a predetermined lottery is executed, and when the lottery result is a specific result, the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is set. should be configured to turn on. By configuring in this way, when the ceiling activation mode effect is executed, the player can easily grasp that the right-handed game state has been set due to the grant of the ceiling privilege, but the ceiling Even if the first condition for awarding the privilege is satisfied, since it is possible not to execute the ceiling activation mode effect, the right-handed game state is more likely than the pachinko machine 10 in the fourteenth control example described above. When set, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the trigger.

In addition, the information (lottery information) included in the reserved and stored special symbol lottery lottery right (special symbol lottery) can be pre-determined (previously) before the special symbol lottery is executed (pre-reading possible), and if the information for indicating the special symbol lottery result in which the right-handed game state is set is included as the preliminary determination result, the special symbol lottery in which the right-handed game state is set The effect period including at least a part of the period until the special symbol lottery including the information indicating the result is executed may be used to execute the ceiling activation mode effect.

By configuring in this way, even if the right-handed gaming state is set by a different opportunity (jackpot C13 winning, or time-saving winning when the second time-saving state is set) from the granting of the ceiling privilege, the ceiling Since it is possible to execute the activation mode effect, it is possible to make it harder for the player to predict the trigger when the right-handed game state is set than in the pachinko machine 10 in the fourteenth control example described above.

Also, in this case, the ceiling activation mode effect is executed when the right-handed game state is set by an opportunity (jackpot C13 winning or time saving winning in which the second time saving state is set) different from the granting of the ceiling privilege. It is preferable to change the ratio based on the number of special symbol lotteries (number of times of addiction) after the end of the previous jackpot game. , When the last two digits are "00", that is, when the number of times of addiction is a good number of times, it is preferable to make it easier to execute the ceiling activation mode effect than in other cases.

By configuring in this way, when the right-handed game state (second game state) is set based on the result of the special symbol lottery, the ceiling activation mode effect is executed when the number of times of hooking is good, and the ceiling is executed. A right-handed game state can be easily set through the same performance process as when a privilege is given. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the first condition for providing the ceiling privilege is satisfied or whether the ceiling activation mode effect is executed as a result of the preliminary determination.

Next, with reference to FIG. 480, the processing contents of normal mode effect setting processing 14 (see S34472 in FIG. 480) will be described. FIG. 480 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the normal mode effect setting process 14 (see S34472 in FIG. 480). In this normal mode effect setting process 14 (see S34472 in FIG. 480), the first condition (500 times The difference is that a process for setting an effect to be executed in a state in which a addictive state is established (a state in which the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is set to ON) is executed. The rest is the same, and the description of the same processing contents is omitted.

When the normal mode effect setting process 14 (see S34472 of FIG. 480) is executed, the same processes of S34501 to S34506 as the normal mode effect setting process 13 of the thirteenth control example (see S34402 of FIG. 463) are executed. Executed, in the process of S34506, if it is determined that the second time saving (second time saving state) is not a time saving winning variation that is set (S34506: No), then the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is turned on It is determined whether it is set (S34571).

In the process of S34571, if it is determined that the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is set to ON (S34571: Yes), it is determined whether the current lottery result is a jackpot (S34572), and it is determined that it is not a jackpot. If so (S34572: No), then it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this time is short-time winning (S34573). If it is determined that the time saving is not elected, that is, if the normal state is set while the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is set to ON (S34578: No), the ceiling after stopping the special symbol fluctuation Since the benefit (third time-saving state) is set, the effect mode for stopping and displaying the third pattern (decorative pattern) corresponding to the time-saving is determined as the ceiling activation mode effect (S34578), and the flag during the ceiling activation mode. 223ma is set to OFF (S34579), and this processing ends.

When the variable production based on the production mode determined in the processing of S34578 is executed, as shown in FIG. , RL2) are stopped and displayed. Thus, in the 14th control example, even if the result of the special symbol lottery is a failure (complete failure) in which neither the jackpot winning nor the short-time winning is performed, if a specific effect state is set, , the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed in a display mode for showing that a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given.

By configuring in this way, in the variable performance for showing the result of the special pattern lottery, the decorative patterns are not stopped and displayed in a combination corresponding to the result of the special pattern lottery, but the result of the executed special pattern lottery is displayed. Since the decorative symbols indicating the content of the privilege given based on the above can be stopped and displayed, it is possible to execute a variable performance that is easy for the player to understand.

In addition, in the 14th control example, it is advantageous for the player that the result of the special symbol lottery is neither a jackpot win nor a time saving win (complete loss), which is advantageous to the player (the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is turned on). set state) and a disadvantageous state (state in which the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is not set to ON), and according to the set state, the result of the special symbol lottery Although it is configured to vary the stop display mode of the decorative pattern to indicate that it is completely off, it is not limited to this, and regardless of the set state, the result of the special symbol lottery is completely off. The same display mode may be set as the stop display mode of the decorative symbols for indicating that the .

In this case, without using the stop display mode of the decorative patterns, a notification effect for indicating that a privilege (ceiling privilege) advantageous to the player is given based on the fact that the result of the special symbol lottery is completely lost is provided. Just run it. By configuring in this way, it is possible to omit the process of determining the stop display mode of the decorative design in a different manner based on the result of the special design lottery and the set state.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 472(b), it is possible to inform the player of the contents of the privilege to be given later based on the result of the special symbol lottery, not the result of the special symbol lottery, by the stop display mode of the decorative symbols. When configured, the stop display mode of the second decorative pattern (fourth pattern) different from the decorative pattern is displayed in the stop display mode ("342" in FIG. 472(b)) indicating the result of the special symbol lottery. good. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of the information indicating the result of the special symbol lottery.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 472(b), in the 14th control example, on the display surface of the third design display device 81, the stop display mode of the decorative design is higher than the stop display mode of the second decorative design. is also configured to be displayed large. By constructing in this way, it is easier for the player to understand the stop display mode of the decorative patterns than the stop display mode of the second decorative patterns, so that the decorative patterns and the second decorative patterns can be displayed. Even in this case, it is possible to execute a variable performance that is easy for the player to understand.

Returning to FIG. 480, the description continues. In the process of S34573, if it is determined that the time reduction is elected (S34573: Yes), it is determined whether the first time reduction state is set based on the time reduction election (S34574), and the first time reduction state is set If it is determined (S34574: Yes), the effect mode for stopping and displaying the third symbol (decorative symbol) corresponding to "out" is determined (S34575), and then the value of the lottery number counter 223lc is 700. (S34576), and if it is determined to be 700 (S34576: Yes), the effect mode for indicating the high ceiling activation mode is determined (S34577), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit is won in the process of S34572 (S34572: Yes), or when it is determined that a time saving state other than the first time saving state (second time saving state) is set in the process of S34574 (S34574: No ), that is, when the ceiling activation mode effect ends without giving the ceiling privilege, the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is set to OFF (S34580), the processing of S34509 is executed, and this processing is terminated. . In this case, for example, when the jackpot is won, the effect mode for stopping and displaying the third symbol (decorative pattern) corresponding to "V" is determined, and the stop display mode for indicating that the jackpot is won is determined. When the 3 patterns (decorative pattern) are stopped and displayed, the ceiling activation mode effect ends, and when the second time saving state is set based on the time saving election, the third pattern (decorative pattern) corresponding to "time saving" ) is decided, and the ceiling activation mode effect is finished after executing the variable effect as if the ceiling privilege was granted.

By constructing in this way, even if the end condition for ending the ceiling activation mode performance is satisfied before the ceiling privilege is granted during the ceiling activation mode performance, the player feels uncomfortable. It is possible to end the ceiling activation mode production without any problems.

As described above, in the 14th control example, after the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege (500 times of hooking) is satisfied, a short time lottery that wins a short time with a high probability (900/1000) , and when the second condition is established (when the winning is lost), the ceiling privilege can be given. As a result, the timing at which the ceiling privilege is given is given irregularity, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this 14th control example, after the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege (500 times of hooking) is satisfied, the period until the second condition is satisfied is a predetermined period (200 special figure fluctuations). When it exceeds, a privilege (second ceiling privilege) that is more advantageous to the player can be given.

By constructing in this way, even if the period until the second condition is satisfied after the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied, the player's desire to play the game is reduced. can be suppressed.

In addition, in the fourteenth control example, the condition for granting the second ceiling privilege (the number of times of addiction is 700) is defined in advance, but the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege is 500 times) is established, it may be configured to determine the number of hits, which is the condition for giving the second ceiling privilege, based on the result of the special lottery executed, and the result of the special lottery is the second If it is the 1st result, the number of times of addiction is 700 times, if it is the second result that is different from the first result, the number of times of addiction is 501 times, and if it is the third result that is different from the first result and the second result. may be configured to determine the number of times of addiction 800 times.

In this way, instead of prescribing the condition for granting the second ceiling privilege, it is possible to determine it during the period in which the number of hits is updated, and the condition for granting the second ceiling privilege to be determined is established. By structuring so that a grant condition that is easy to obtain (low number of addictions) and a grant condition that is difficult to establish (large number of addictions) can be set, the game in which the second ceiling privilege is easily awarded and the second ceiling privilege are combined. A game that is difficult to be given can be executed, and the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

Further, in the fourteenth control example, as described above with reference to FIGS. 471 and 472, the ceiling activation mode indicating that the first condition (500 times of hooking) for giving the ceiling privilege is satisfied. Inside, the time-saving cards (LL2, CL2, RL2) corresponding to the "ceiling privilege" are displayed, indicating that the first condition (700 times of addiction) for giving the second ceiling privilege is satisfied. During the super-ceiling activation mode, super time-saving cards (LL2, CL2, RL2) corresponding to the ``second ceiling privilege'' are displayed to inform the player of the current game situation in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition to this, in the ceiling activation mode, it is possible to display a suggestive mode that can suggest the remaining period until the first condition (700 times of addiction) for giving the second ceiling privilege is satisfied. You can

For example, the period from when the ceiling activation mode is set until the super ceiling activation mode is set (after the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege (500 times of hooking) is satisfied, the second ceiling privilege The first condition for granting (the period until the number of times of addiction of 700) is satisfied) is set to correspond to the length of the remaining period until the first condition for granting the second ceiling privilege is satisfied. It is divided into periods (first period to third period), and in the first period with the longest remaining period until the first condition for granting the second ceiling privilege is satisfied, shown in FIG. 471 (b) In a second period in which the remaining period until the first condition for executing the production and giving the second ceiling privilege is established is shorter than the first period, the production in which the super time-saving card RL2 is added to the right line RL. , and in the third period in which the remaining period until the first condition for granting the second ceiling privilege is satisfied is shorter than the second period, the right line RL and the middle line CL are super time-saving card RL2 , CL2 may be added to perform an effect.

By configuring in this way, various patterns (cards) that are variably displayed during the ceiling activation mode can be stopped in a predetermined combination (3 sets) during the super ceiling activation mode (super time saving card) can be gradually increased, the player can be made to think that the super-ceiling activation mode will be activated soon. In this case, if each pattern row that is variably displayed during the ceiling activation mode has multiple time-saving cards, switch some of the time-saving cards that are already variably displayed to super time-saving cards. can be configured to By comprising in this way, it becomes possible to carry out the variable display of a super time-saving card, without increasing the number of cards which each pattern row|line|column has.

Also, in this case, it is preferable to set a combination in which three time-saving cards or three super time-saving cards are stopped and displayed as a combination of stop symbols indicating that the ceiling privilege is given during the ceiling activation mode. By configuring in this way, without changing the variable display control of various cards during the ceiling activation mode, simply by executing the process of switching the display mode of the time-saving card to the display mode of the super time-saving card, the game can be played. It can make the person think that the super ceiling activation mode will be activated soon.

<Regarding the first modification of the fourteenth control example>
Next, a first modification of the fourteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 481 to 490. FIG. In the above-described 14th control example, after the first condition (500 times of addiction) for granting the ceiling privilege is established, the second condition is established in a time-saving lottery that wins with a high probability (900/1000). In the case where the ceiling privilege is given when the winning prize is lost (when the lottery is not won), the timing at which the ceiling privilege is given is given irregularity, and the player's interest in the game can be improved. there were.

However, it takes a long time to satisfy the second condition after the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege (500 hooking times) is established, and the ceiling privilege cannot be granted to the player. Problems could arise.

On the other hand, in the first modification of the fourteenth control example, when winning the time saving lottery in the normal state, the first time saving state with a different number of time saving times can be set, and the ceiling privilege is given. After the 1st condition (500 times of Hamari frequency|count) is materialized, the 2nd condition is materialized by complete|finishing the 1st time saving state currently set, and it comprises so that a ceiling privilege may be provided.

In other words, the period from the establishment of the first condition to the establishment of the second condition can be diversified by the number of times of time saving set as the first time saving state and the timing at which the first time saving state is set. , the upper limit can be set for the period from the establishment of the first condition to the establishment of the second condition.

By constructing in this manner, irregularity is given to the timing at which the ceiling privilege is given, and while the player's interest in the game is improved, the period from the establishment of the first condition to the establishment of the second condition is achieved. By setting an upper limit to the period of , it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play.

Further, in the first modified example, the timing at which the second condition is satisfied can be determined in advance before the first condition for providing the ceiling privilege is satisfied. Specifically, at the time when the remaining period (remaining fluctuation number) is 50 times until the timing when the first condition is satisfied (until the number of times of addiction reaches 500 times), the number of remaining time reductions in the first time reduction state is 100 times In this case, it is possible to determine in advance that the period from the establishment of the first condition to the establishment of the second condition is 50 special symbol variations.

Therefore, it is possible to execute the suggestive effect for indicating the timing at which the ceiling privilege is given before the first condition is satisfied. Furthermore, in the stage before the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege is established, the state in which the first time saving state can be newly set, that is, the time saving set as the first time saving state in the normal state It is also possible to inform the player whether the number of times is the number of time reductions in which the period from the establishment of the first condition to the establishment of the second condition is long or the number of time reductions in which the period is comparatively short.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player easily play the game while predicting the timing at which the ceiling privilege can be granted from the time when none of the plurality of conditions for awarding the ceiling privilege is satisfied. can.

<Regarding the contents of the effect in the first modified example of the fourteenth control example>
First, with reference to FIG. 481, the contents of characteristic effects among the various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the first modified example of the fourteenth control example will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in the first modification of the fourteenth control example is the first time saving state based on the result of the time saving lottery executed in the left-handed game state with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the fourteenth control example described above. is set, the time saving lottery is not executed, and a different number of times of time saving can be set as the number of times of time saving in the first time saving state.

In other words, after the first condition (500 times of Hamari) that can grant the ceiling privilege is established, the second condition for granting the ceiling privilege is the first time saving state that has been set is completed. It is constituted so that it may be materialized and a ceiling privilege may be given.

By configuring in this way, the number of remaining time reductions in the first time reduction state that is set when the first condition is satisfied is preset as the remaining period until the ceiling privilege is granted, so the above-described second As in the pachinko machine 10 in the 14 control example, it is possible to make it difficult to cause a situation in which the second condition is not satisfied for a long time even though the first condition is satisfied.

Also, like the 14th control example described above, it is possible to execute a period effect (ceiling activation mode effect) for indicating that the first condition (500 times of addiction) that allows the ceiling privilege to be given has been established. In the ceiling activation mode production, the production based on the remaining period until the ceiling privilege is given can be executed.

Here, in the first modification of the fourteenth control example, the length of the period during which the ceiling activation mode effect is executed is the remaining time of the first time saving state (remaining time saving number of times), so the length is set in advance can be discriminated. And it is configured to be able to execute an effect according to the length of the period set as the effect period of the ceiling activation mode effect. By configuring in this way, the player can be made to predict the period until the ceiling privilege is given, so that the player can easily select whether or not to continue the game. .

Further, in the first modified example of the fourteenth control example, when the period from the establishment of the first condition to the establishment of the second condition is within a predetermined period (for example, special symbol lottery four times), the As a notification mode for notifying the player that one condition has been established, a special performance mode different from the normal can be set. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the timing at which the second condition is satisfied is the timing that is advantageous to the player (timing immediately after the first condition is satisfied).

In addition, even in the first modification of the fourteenth control example, when the right-handed game state is set without the second condition being satisfied after the first condition is satisfied (based on jackpot winning or short-time winning When the second time saving state is set by the second condition), the effect mode set when the second condition is satisfied can be set for the player. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine the trigger for setting the right-handed game state.

In the first modified example of the fourteenth control example, when the ceiling activation mode effect is executed, the effect shown in FIG. 481 is executed. FIG. 481(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed in the ceiling activation mode presentation for indicating that the first condition is established, and FIG. 481(b) is a diagram showing that the first condition is established. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when it is confirmed that the second condition is satisfied at the time when the second condition is satisfied.

Therefore, in the first modified example, during the left-handed game state, a game state suggestion effect for making the player predict whether or not the first time-saving state is set can be executed. Figure 481 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the effect screen of the game state suggestion effect, Figure 481 (b) is in the left-handed game state, there is a high possibility that the first time-saving state is set It is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during the suggestion effect for suggesting that to the player.

As shown in FIG. 481(a), when the first condition (500 times of addiction) for providing the ceiling privilege is established, the heart-pounding zone is set as the ceiling activation mode effect. During this heart-pounding zone, a door 871 appears in the main display area Dm, and every time a special symbol lottery is executed, an effect is executed in which the rabbit 801 opens the door 871 using a key.

In the sub-display area Ds, a comment "Use the key to open the door, and if the door opens, rush in quickly" is displayed as a mode for explaining the content of the effect in the heart-pounding zone. When the door is opened, it is notified in an easy-to-understand manner that a privilege will be granted.

In a small display area Dm9 formed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm, reservation icons hr1 to hr4 corresponding to the acquired lottery right (special figure 1 reservation) of the first special symbol lottery can be displayed. In the diagram shown in FIG. 481(a), four pending icons hr1 to hr4 are displayed corresponding to the acquisition of four special figure 1 pending.

The pending icons hr1 to hr4 are configured to display the number corresponding to the acquired special figure 1 pending, and correspond to the first special figure 1 pending (first special figure 1 pending) The first reserved icon hr1 corresponds to the second special figure 1 reservation (second special figure 1 reservation), and the second reservation icon hr2 corresponds to the third special figure 1 reservation (third special figure 1 reservation). , and the fourth reservation icon hr4 is displayed corresponding to the fourth special figure 1 reservation (fourth special figure 1 reservation).

Then, when a new special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery) is executed during the pounding zone, an effect of opening the door 871 using the key displayed as the first reserved icon hr1 is executed. , the key displayed as the second reserved icon hr2 is shifted to the first reserved icon hr1, the key displayed as the third reserved icon hr3 is shifted to the second reserved icon hr2, and the key is shifted to the fourth reserved icon hr2. The key displayed as the icon hr4 is shifted to the third pending icon hr3, and the display screen is changed so that the fourth pending icon hr4 is not displayed. In this case, when the new special figure 1 reservation is acquired, the fourth reservation icon hr4 is displayed.

In the diagram shown in FIG. 481, only the fourth pending icon hr4 is displayed in a display manner different from that of the other pending icons (first pending icon hr1 to third pending icon hr3). The third pending icon hr3 is displayed in a display mode indicating a normal key, and the fourth pending icon hr4 is displayed in a display mode indicating a special key.

Although a detailed description will be given later, the display modes of the first pending icon hr1 to the fourth pending icon hr4 are usually set to indicate a normal key. It is configured to facilitate the setting of the display mode showing the special key for the special figure reservation corresponding to the pattern variation and the special figure reservation for winning the jackpot (time-saving winning). In the variable effect using the hold icon displayed in the display mode indicating the special key, the effect result of opening the door 871 is higher than the variable effect using the hold icon displayed in the display mode indicating the normal key. It is configured to facilitate the execution of the variable production that becomes . By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in the display mode of the pending icon.

In addition, when the second condition is satisfied immediately after the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied and the pounding zone is set, the effect shown in FIG. 481(b) can be executed instead of the special effect shown in FIG.

In the special effect shown in FIG. 481(b), an automatic door 871 is displayed instead of the door 871 (see FIG. 481(a)) displayed in the normal effect in the heart-pounding zone. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, as a guide mode for guiding the player that the ceiling privilege (third time-saving state) will be given soon, the comment "Great luck! Just approach and the door will open" is displayed. be done.

During the special effect, the rabbit 801 approaches the automatic door 871 until the special symbol variation that satisfies the second condition is displayed. is opened, and an effect for informing that the ceiling privilege is given is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually determine the length of the remaining period until the ceiling privilege is granted, depending on the type of door displayed when the heart-pounding zone is set. can.

In addition, by configuring the special effect in which the automatic door 871 is displayed to be executable, for example, when the second condition is satisfied by executing the 501st special symbol variation, the normal effect (Fig. 481 ( a) Refer to) is executed, that is, the door 871 is opened with the first key before the player grasps the contents of the normal effect, and the effect of the effect is suppressed. be able to.

As described above, in the first modification of the fourteenth control example, when the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege is met, the remaining period until the second condition is met can be determined. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect (ceiling activation mode effect) according to the length of the remaining period from the establishment of the first condition to the establishment of the second condition. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in the effect contents of the ceiling activation mode effect.

In addition, in the first modification of the fourteenth control example, when the number of hits reaches the specified number of times (500 times), the ceiling activation mode effect is executed, and the effect period of the ceiling activation mode effect (the first condition is satisfied) (remaining period until the second condition is established after starting the second condition), and the performance period of the ceiling activation mode performance is within a predetermined period (for example, within 4 special symbol lotteries). 481(b)) in which a special effect mode is set, so that when the ceiling activation mode effect is executed, which effect mode is set? It was something that could make the player interested.

However, in the first modification of the fourteenth control example, the ceiling activation mode effect is executed when the number of hits reaches the specified number of times (500 times). There is a problem that the special effect mode can be set when the second condition is satisfied due to the variation, and the special effect mode is difficult to set.

In order to solve this problem, for example, the timing for executing the ceiling activation mode effect may be determined based on the timing at which the second condition is satisfied. Even if the condition (500 times of hooking) is satisfied, the ceiling activation mode effect is not executed, and the remaining period until the second condition is satisfied is within a predetermined period (for example, within 4 special symbol lotteries). ), the ceiling activation mode effect may be configured to be executable. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily set the special effect mode as the ceiling activation mode effect. Further, by making the period during which the first condition is satisfied differ from the effect period of the ceiling activation mode effect, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to distinguish the content of the game to be executed later.

In addition, in the first modification of the fourteenth control example, when the number of hits reaches the specified number of times (500 times), the ceiling activation mode effect is executed, and the effect period of the ceiling activation mode effect (the first condition is satisfied) By setting a performance mode according to the remaining period until the second condition is satisfied after the second condition is established, it is possible to execute the performance for predicting the remaining period until the ceiling privilege is given to the player. However, during a period before the first condition is satisfied, various effects may be executed that allow the player to predict the remaining period until the second condition is satisfied.

For example, when the time saving lottery executed in the normal state is won, the number of time saving times in the first time saving state set this time and the number of remaining addictions until the first condition is satisfied are set this time. It is determined whether the first time saving state ends after the first condition is satisfied, and if it is determined that it ends after the first condition is satisfied, the first time saving state after the first condition is satisfied An effect corresponding to the length of the period until is completed (time-saving winning effect) may be configured to be executable. By configuring in this way, the ceiling privilege is likely to be awarded before the first condition is established (the period from the establishment of the first condition to the establishment of the second condition is short). It is possible for the player to predict whether or not.

Also, if it is determined that the first time saving state set this time ends before the first condition is satisfied, the remaining period from the end of the first time saving state set this time until the first condition is satisfied , and determines whether the length of the specified remaining period is longer than the smallest number of times of time saving among the number of times of time saving that can be set as the first time saving state, and the first time saving state set this time is When it is determined that the length of the remaining period from the end until the first condition is satisfied is shorter than the smallest number of times of time reduction among the number of times of time reduction that can be set as the first time reduction state, and when it is determined that it is long , and may be configured to be able to execute a different aspect of the production (production at the time of short-time winning).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the player of the information on the timing at which the next set first time saving state ends and the timing at which the first condition for giving the ceiling privilege is established. Therefore, it is possible for the player to predict whether or not the game situation is such that the ceiling privilege is likely to be awarded (the period from the first condition to the second condition being satisfied is short).

For example, based on the number of times of addiction measured in the normal state and the number of times of time saving in the first time saving state that can be set when winning time saving, a period that is likely to be advantageous to the player when winning time saving It is preferable to construct an effect capable of informing the player of the period during which the player is likely to be disadvantaged.

Specifically, in the fourteenth control example, as shown in FIG. 483, when the first time saving state is set, the number of time saving times can be set within a range from "100" to "300". Most of them are set in units of about 100 (100 times, 200 times, 300 times). And 500 addictive times is set as the first condition for giving the ceiling privilege. Therefore, the number of addictive times measured in the normal state is around 200, around 300, and around 400. The first time-saving state ends immediately after the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege is established can be set (advantageous period). On the other hand, in the period when the number of times of addiction measured in the normal state is 450 times to 499 times, the period from the establishment of the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege to the end of the first time saving state is long. It will be a period (disadvantageous period).

Therefore, the number of times of addiction measured in the normal state is set as an advantageous period for 201 to 220 times, 301 to 320 times, and 401 to 420 times. To enable execution of a performance indicating that it is an advantageous period that is likely to be advantageous to a player. More specifically, when "advantage zone" is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 as a guidance mode to indicate that the current period is an advantage period, and the special symbol lottery is executed during the advantage zone. At the same time, an effect is executed in which the rabbit 801 hits a golf ball. And if the result of the special pattern lottery is completely out (both jackpot, short time, and non-winning), "One more time" is displayed, and the effect of hitting the ball again with the effect corresponding to the next special pattern lottery is displayed. executed.

Then, when the jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, or when the second time-saving state is set by the time-saving winning, a hole-in-one effect is executed in which the golf ball hit by the rabbit 801 enters the cup and is taken out of the cup. When the icon attached to the ball is 'V', the winning of the jackpot is reported, and when the icon is 'time saving', the setting of the second time saving state based on the time saving win is notified.

Also, if you win a time saving lottery in a special pattern lottery, the number of time saving times in the first time saving state set by this time saving win, and the number of remaining hooks until the first condition for granting ceiling benefits is satisfied. If the first time-saving state ends within five special symbol variations that are executed after the first condition is established, that is, for the set advantageous zone When the optimum first time-saving state is set, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the golf ball hit near the cup is positioned, and the characters "Nice shot!! Near pin prize won" are displayed. The displayed near pin effect is executed. When this near-pin effect is executed, the trophy of the near-pin prize is continuously displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 until the ceiling privilege is given or until the jackpot game is executed. configured as follows. By constructing in this way, the game situation of the pachinko machine 10 is a game situation in which the ceiling privilege is awarded immediately after the first condition for awarding the ceiling privilege is met (within five special symbol variations). can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, the calculated difference (the difference between the number of time reductions in the first time reduction state set by this time reduction election and the number of remaining hooks until the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied) is the first If the first time saving state ends within 20 special symbol variations executed after the conditions are established, that is, if the appropriate first time saving state is set for the set advantageous zone, On the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a green-on effect is executed in which the golf ball is positioned on the green and the characters "Nice Shot!!" are displayed. When this green-on effect is executed, unlike the near-pin prize effect, the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 continues to be specified until the ceiling privilege is given or until the jackpot game is executed. It is configured so that aspects (such as trophies) are not displayed. By constructing in this way, only the player who has experienced the green-on effect is immediately after the first condition for giving the ceiling privilege as the game situation of the pachinko machine 10 is satisfied (within 20 special symbol variations). A player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner that a ceiling privilege is given.

On the other hand, the calculated difference (the difference between the number of time reductions in the first time reduction state set by this time reduction election and the number of remaining hooks until the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied) is the second If the first time saving state does not end within 20 special symbol variations executed after 1 condition is established, that is, if the first time saving state appropriate for the set advantage zone is not set Among them, when the length of the period from the establishment of the first condition to the setting of the first time-saving state is longer than 20 special symbol variations, the golf ball hit by the character 801 becomes OB. An effect is executed, and then the advantageous zone ends. When this OB effect is executed, the effect indicates that the game situation of the pachinko machine 10 is a long period from the establishment of the first condition to the end of the first time saving state, so the OB effect is performed. A player who has confirmed that the game has been executed can easily determine future game policies including moving to another pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

By configuring so that the fact that the OB effect has been executed is not displayed as a history, it is possible to provide information (whether or not there is an OB effect) that only the player who is actually playing the game can know, so that the game can be executed. It is possible to provide a player who is playing a game with information that is more advantageous than a player who is not playing a game. It should be noted that the execution of the OB effect may be configured to be able to be displayed as a history, and the presence or absence of execution of the OB effect may be confirmed later.

In addition, when the first time saving state ends before the first condition is satisfied, the golf ball is positioned on the fairway, and the first hit effect displaying the characters "next approach confrontation" is executed, End the advantage zone.

In this case, a storage means capable of storing information indicating that the first striking effect has been executed is provided, and when the next advantageous zone is set, the storing means stores that the first striking effect has been executed. If so, the approach production is executed. Then, when the first time-saving state is set by a new time-saving win in the advantageous zone, each performance is determined by the same method as the above-described method of determining the performance, and the determined performance is executed.

As described above, by executing the above-described effect, the stage before the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege is established as a suggestive effect that can suggest the timing at which the ceiling privilege is granted to the player. , different performances can be executed in the stage after the first condition is established, and the player can be made to continue playing the game easily without lowering his/her willingness to play.

In addition, depending on the various effects that are executed, the timing at which the ceiling privilege is granted is disadvantageous to the player (the period from the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege to the granting of the ceiling privilege is Since it is possible to suggest a longer timing), the player playing the pachinko machine 10 can determine at various timings whether or not to continue the game aiming at giving the ceiling privilege. . Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can be easily played while the players having different criteria for determining whether or not to continue the game aiming at the provision of the ceiling privilege are replaced, so that the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is increased. can be made easier.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first modified example of the fourteenth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 482 to 485, the electrical configuration in the first modified example of the fourteenth control example will be described. In the first modified example of the fourteenth control example, a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, a part of the configuration of the ROM 222 of the sound ramp control device 113, It is different in that it changes part of the configuration of Other configurations are the same, so description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 482, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the first modified example of the fourteenth control example will be described. FIG. 482 is a diagram showing the configuration of ROM 202 of main controller 110 in the first modification of the fourteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 482, in the first modification of the fourteenth control example, for the configuration of the ROM202 of the main controller 110 in the fourteenth control example described above (see FIG. 473 (a)), time saving type selection 14 It is different in that it replaces with table 202mf and provides time saving classification selection 14a table 202maf, and other than that is the same.

The time saving type selection 14a table 202maf is referred to when determining the time saving type when winning the time saving lottery in the time saving lottery with respect to the time saving type selection 14 table 202mf of the 14th control example. Instead of the time saving 13 table 202lf1 14a table 202maf1 for time saving election is provided. In this time saving winning 14a table 202maf1, five types of time saving types are defined as types of time saving types for which the first time saving state is set, and different times of time saving times are set according to the set time saving types. It is configured as follows.

Here, with reference to Drawing 483, the contents of 14a table 202maf1 for time saving election which time saving classification selection 14a table 202maf has are explained. Figure 483 is the figure which shows the contents which are specified in 14a table 202maf1 for time saving election. As shown in FIG. 483, in the 14a table 202maf1 for time saving winning, a total of six types of time saving types are defined, and five types of time saving types in which the first time saving state is set based on the time saving winning, One type of time saving type in which the second time saving state is set is defined.

In addition, since the selection ratio and the number of times of time saving to be set are the same as those of the fourteenth control example described above, the detailed description of the time saving type for which the second time saving state is set is omitted. On the other hand, the types of time saving types for which the first time saving state is set are increased, and according to the time saving types to be set, a maximum of 300 times and a minimum of 100 times are set. there is

Specifically, in the range of "0 to 999" that can be taken by the acquired time saving type selection counter CC1, the number of time saving times 100 (100 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h ), and the time saving type for which the first time saving state is set is in the range of “100 to 199”, the number of time saving times 101 (101 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h), and the first time saving The time saving type for which the state is set is in the range of "200 to 299", the number of time saving times 102 (the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 102), and the time saving type for which the first time saving state is set , In the range of "300 to 599", the number of times of time saving is 200 (200 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h), and the time saving type for which the first time saving state is set is the range of "600 to 899" , the number of times of time saving is 300 (the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 300), and the time saving type for which the first time saving state is set is in the range of "900 to 999". 300 is set to the value of the counter 203h), and the time saving type for which the second time saving state is set is defined respectively.

Here, as shown in FIG. 483, in the first modification of the fourteenth control example, as the number of times of time saving set in the first time saving state, a plurality of time saving types are defined with only a slight difference in the value of the last digit. ing. In the first modification of the fourteenth control example, as described above, the remaining time of the first time saving state set when the first condition (500 times of hooking) that can give the ceiling privilege is satisfied When the number of times becomes 0 and the normal state is set, the ceiling privilege can be given.

That is, the timing at which the ceiling privilege is given differs according to the number of remaining time reductions in the first time reduction state when the first condition is satisfied. In this case, if the value that can be set as the number of times of time saving in the first time saving state is specified by changing it at a predetermined interval (for example, 50 times), the number of special symbol lotteries near the end of the specific number of times of time saving ends. At that time, the timing at which the time-saving state can be ended next time is after about 50 times of the special pattern lottery.

On the other hand, in the first modification, since it is configured to be able to set the time saving type in which the number of times of time saving is slightly different, it is easy to continue playing while expecting that the ceiling privilege will be given. can do. Furthermore, in the first modified example, as in the above-described 14th control example, when the time saving lottery is won in the special symbol lottery, the first time saving state can be set, and in the time saving lottery executed in the special symbol lottery Since the probability of short-time winning is set to 990/1000, there is a possibility of not winning short-time in the first special symbol lottery after the end of the jackpot game.

In other words, after the end of the jackpot game, the measurement of the number of hooks is newly started, while the timing when the remaining time reduction count of the first time reduction state becomes 0 is set at the timing when the first time reduction state is set. It is possible to vary depending on the type of time saving in the first time saving state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily change the value of the number of remaining time reductions in the first time reduction state when the number of times of addiction satisfies the first condition (500 times). It is possible to make it difficult to predict the timing when the condition is established.

Moreover, it is configured to be able to set up to 300 times as the number of times of time saving in the first time saving state. This 300 time-saving number of times is set to a value greater than the number of special symbol lotteries required from the normal first condition (500 times of addiction) to the establishment of the special first condition (700 times of addiction). It is

By configuring in this way, the second ceiling privilege is set according to the timing when the first time saving condition is newly set before the first condition (500 times of addiction) is established, and the time saving type to be set. It is configured to be able to create a situation that is likely to be (a situation in which the first time saving state cannot (is difficult to end) ends after the normal first condition is established until the special first condition is established). Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to execute the second ceiling privilege than in the fourteenth control example described above.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 484 and 485, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the first modification of the fourteenth control example will be described. FIG. 484(a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the first modified example of the fourteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 484(a), the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the first modification of the fourteenth control example is provided with the heart-pounding zone effect selection table 222maa. The configuration is different from that of the ROM 222 of the lamp control device 113 . Other than that, since they are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The heart-pounding zone effect selection table 222maa is a data table that is referred to when determining the effect mode when the heart-pounding zone is set.

Here, with reference to FIG. 485, the contents defined in the pounding zone effect selection table 222maa will be described. FIG. 485 shows the contents defined in the pounding zone effect selection table 222maa.

As shown in FIG. 485, the pounding zone effect selection table 222maa includes the number of remaining time reductions at the time when the pounding zone is set (the number of remaining time reductions in the first time reduction state) and the acquired special figure reservation (special figure 1 reservation ) and the obtained value of the effect counter 223f, different effect modes are defined.

Specifically, when the value of the remaining number counter 223maa is "1", that is, when the second condition is satisfied in the next fluctuation of the special symbol fluctuation in which the first condition is satisfied, and the ceiling privilege is given, prefetching Regardless of the result and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f, "automatic door" is defined as the effect mode. Here, when the effect mode "automatic door" is determined, the special effect shown in FIG. 481(b) is executed.

Next, the value of the remaining counter 223maa is "2", and the prefetch result is "total out", that is, the prefetch result (preliminary As a determination result), if it is determined that information indicating jackpot winning or information indicating time saving winning in which the second time saving state is set is not included, the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is "0 to 49 ” for the range, ``Main 2 strong key'', for the range ``50 to 89'', ``normal'', for the range ``90 to 99'', ``automatic door'', respectively is defined as

Here, when the presentation mode of "Hold 2 strong key" is determined, the display mode of the special key different from the normal key for the second held icon hr2 (the display mode of the fourth held icon hr4 in FIG. 481(a) corresponding to the display mode) is displayed.

On the other hand, the prefetch result is "hit", that is, as the prefetch result (preliminary determination result) for the special figure hold (special figure 1 hold) that has been acquired at the time the pounding zone is set, information indicating jackpot winning, or , If it is determined that the information indicating the time saving election in which the second time saving state is set is included, the value of the acquired production counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 49", "automatic door" is , and the range of "50 to 99", "Hold 2 strong key" is defined as a mode of presentation, respectively.

Here, even if the look-ahead result is "hit", the "strong key" is determined for the pending icon corresponding to the value of the remaining number counter 223maa. In this case, when the special symbol lottery for "winning" is executed before the second condition is satisfied, the door 871 is opened as an effect using the normal key indicated by the reserved icon corresponding to the special symbol lottery. An opening effect is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily execute the effect of opening the door 871 even in the effect using the normal key.

In addition, when the special symbol lottery to "win" is executed after the second condition is satisfied (after the ceiling privilege is granted), the special symbol lottery to win after the end of the pounding zone is executed. Therefore, there is no sense of incongruity in the production in the heart-pounding zone.

In addition, the value of the remaining number counter 223maa is "3", and the prefetch result is "total out", that is, the prefetch result (pre-discrimination As a result), if it is determined that the information indicating the jackpot winning or the information indicating the time saving winning in which the second time saving state is set is not included, the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is "0 to 49". For the range, "Main 3 strong key", for the range "50 to 89", "automatic door", for the range "90 to 99", "Normal", respectively, as a production mode stipulated.

On the other hand, the prefetch result is "hit", that is, as the prefetch result (preliminary determination result) for the special figure hold (special figure 1 hold) that has been acquired at the time the pounding zone is set, information indicating jackpot winning, or , When it is determined that the information indicating the time saving election in which the second time saving state is set is included, the value of the acquired production counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 89", "automatic door" is , and “90 to 99”, “Normal” is defined as the presentation mode.

In addition, when the value of the remaining number counter 223maa is "4" and the result of the look-ahead is "total out", the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 49". However, for the range of "50 to 99", "automatic door" is defined as a mode of presentation. On the other hand, if the look-ahead result is "hit", the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 49", and the "H4 strong key" is in the range of "50 to 89". For example, "automatic door" is defined as a range of "90 to 99", and "normal" is defined as an effect mode.

Furthermore, when the value of the remaining number counter 223maa is "5 to 20" and the result of the look-ahead is "total out", the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 89", and the "chance" is , “90 to 99”, “random strong key” is defined as a mode of presentation, respectively. On the other hand, if the look-ahead result is "hit", that is, before the second condition is established (before the first time-saving state ends), the pounding zone is a special symbol lottery that wins. When the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 49", "normal" is set to "50 to 89". 90 to 99”, “automatic door” is specified as a mode of presentation.

Here, when "chance" is set as the effect mode, the display mode of the door 871 displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is more than the normal door (see FIG. 481 (a)). A display mode showing a slightly extravagant door (chance door) is set. By configuring in this way, the player can visually discriminate that the door is easier to open than when the normal door 871 is displayed (situation in which the second condition is easily satisfied). can be made easier.

In addition, when "random strong key" is set as the production mode, "strong key" ” is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set an effect (failure effect) in which the door 871 is not opened by the effect using the special key.

If the value of the remaining number counter 223maa is "21 to 100" and the look-ahead result is "total out", the "chance" is set to " "Normal" is defined as the mode of presentation for the range of "50 to 99". On the other hand, if the look-ahead result is "hit", that is, before the second condition is established (before the first time-saving state ends), the pounding zone is a special symbol lottery that wins. If the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 49", the value of the acquired production counter 223f is "this key", and in the range of "50 to 89", the "automatic door" is "Normal" is defined as the mode of presentation for the range of "90 to 99".

When the value of the remaining number counter 223maa is "101-300" and the result of the prefetch is "total out", the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of "0-89", "normal" "Chance" is defined as a mode of presentation for the range of "90 to 99". On the other hand, if the look-ahead result is "hit", that is, before the second condition is established (before the first time-saving state ends), the pounding zone is a special symbol lottery that wins. If the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 49", "automatic door" is set, and if the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of "50 to 89", "Normal" is defined as the mode of presentation for the range of "90 to 99".

Returning to FIG. 484(b), the description is continued. FIG. 484(b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the first modified example of the fourteenth control example. The RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the first modification of the fourteenth control example differs from the above-described fourteenth control example in that a remaining count counter 223maa and a heart-pounding flag 223mab are added. are identical. Descriptions of the same elements are omitted.

The remaining number of times counter 223maa is a counter for measuring the number of times of time saving in the first time saving state, and corresponds to the number of times of saving time set when a state command indicating that the first time saving state is set is received. value is set. The value is updated (subtracted) each time the special symbol lottery is executed during the first time saving state. The value of the remaining number counter 223maa is referred to when the first condition (500 hooking times) for giving the ceiling privilege is established, and based on the value of the remaining number counter 223maa, the ceiling privilege is given. The remaining period until the second condition (the end of the first time saving state) is satisfied is calculated. Then, the value is cleared to 0 when the first time saving state ends.

The heart-pounding flag 223mab is a flag for indicating a period in which the production mode of the pounding zone is determined and the production of the pounding zone is being executed, and is turned on when the production mode of the pounding zone is determined. set. While the heart-pounding flag 223mab is set to ON, a new processing for determining the effect mode of the heart-pounding zone is not executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute an effect that is easy for the player to understand. Then, it is set to OFF when the performance period of the heart-pounding zone ends.

<Regarding control processing in the first modification of the fourteenth control example>
Next, referring to FIGS. 486 to 490, control processing in the first modification of the fourteenth control example will be described. In the first modified example of the fourteenth control example, as the control processing executed by the main controller 110 with respect to the fourteenth control example described above, the process content for executing the time-saving lottery and the ceiling privilege are given. The processing content for setting the time saving state and the processing content for setting the time saving state are different. It is different in that the processing content for setting the variable production that is used is different.

Specifically, as the process executed by the main controller 110, instead of the time reduction lottery process 13 (see S38006 in FIG. 453) executed in the fourteenth control example described above, the time reduction lottery process 14a (FIG. 486 S38056a) is replaced with the ceiling determination process 14 (see S38071 in FIG. 476), and the ceiling determination process 14a (S38071a in FIG. 487) is replaced with the time saving setting process 14 (see S30274 in FIG. 477), time saving setting process 14a (S30274a in FIG. 488). In addition, as a process executed by the audio lamp control device 113, instead of the time saving state production setting process 14 (see S39091 in FIG. 479) executed in the above-described fourteenth control example S39091a of 489) is different in that the normal mode effect setting process 14a (see S34472a of FIG. 490) is executed instead of the normal mode effect setting process 14 (see S34472 of FIG. 480). Other processing contents are the same, and the description of the same processing contents is omitted.

First, with reference to Drawing 486, processing contents of time saving lottery processing 14a (S38056a) are explained. FIG. 486 is a flow chart showing the details of the time saving lottery process 14a (S38056a). This time-saving lottery process 14a (S38056a) is different from the time-saving lottery process 13 (see S38006 in FIG. 453) executed in the above-described 14th control example. The difference is that the data table to be referred to when determining the time-saving election is different, and the other points are the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 486, when the time saving lottery process 14a (S38056a) is executed, first, information indicating the currently set game state stored in the game state storage area 203g is read (S8102), and the current setting It is determined whether the gaming state is a normal state (S38151a), and if it is determined to be a normal state (S38151a: Yes), the lottery result based on the time-saving random number 14 table 202me (time-saving winning determination result ) is acquired (S38152a), and the same S8105 and S8106 processes as the time saving lottery process 13 (see S38006 in FIG. 453) executed in the 14th control example described above are executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S38151a, when it is determined that it is not in the normal state (S38151a: No), this process is terminated without executing the time saving lottery.

That is, in the first modification of the fourteenth control example, only the normal state is defined as the game state in which the time saving lottery can be executed, and when a game state other than the normal state is set, the time saving lottery is performed. configured not to run. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide an opportunity (time reduction lottery) that can grant a privilege (second time reduction state) that is advantageous to the player only in the normal state, which was the most disadvantageous game state for the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a player who is playing a game in the normal state from losing his/her willingness to play.

Also, unlike the 14th control example described above, since it is configured so that the time saving lottery is not executed in the state where the first time saving state is set, the first When the time saving state is set, it is possible to reliably set the normal state by completing the time saving times corresponding to the set first time saving state. Therefore, since the maximum period in which the first time saving state continues can be set in advance at the time when the first time saving state is set, it is possible for the player to play the game during the first time saving state for an unnecessarily long time. can be suppressed from being executed. In addition, the length of the period until the first time saving state ends for the player based on the length of the longest period in which the first time saving state continues, which is set in advance at the time when the first time saving state is set. It is possible to execute a production (pounding zone) that suggests.

Next, with reference to FIG. 487, the contents of the ceiling determination process 14a (S38071a) will be described. FIG. 487 is a flow chart showing the contents of the ceiling determination process 14a (S38071a). This ceiling determination process 14a (S38071a) is the first condition for giving the ceiling privilege (the number of addictions is 500) in contrast to the ceiling determination process 14 (see S38071 in FIG. The difference is that the conditions for updating the information (the number of addictions) regarding the times) are different, but the other processing contents are the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same processing contents, and the description thereof is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 487, when the ceiling determination process 14a (S38071a) is executed, the process of S38102 is deleted from the ceiling determination process 14 (see S38071 in FIG. 476) executed in the above-described fourteenth control example. control processing is executed. Specifically, after executing the process of S38101, it is configured to proceed to the process of S38103 without executing the process of S38102.

That is, in the ceiling determination process 14a (S38071a), regardless of the set game state, every time the special symbol lottery is executed, the number of hits is added. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily fix the timing at which the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege (the number of times of addiction is 500) is satisfied, so that the second condition for granting the ceiling privilege (the second It is possible to make it easier for the player to be interested in the timing at which the one-hour-short state ends).

Next, with reference to Drawing 488, the processing contents of time saving setting processing 14a (S30274a) are explained. FIG. 488 is a flow chart showing the contents of the time saving setting process 14a (S30274a). This time saving setting process 14a (S30274a) is performed in the 14th control example described above. It is different in that it is configured to be able to set a time saving state. The other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are given the same reference numerals and explanations thereof are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 488, when the time saving setting process 14a (S30274a) is executed, it is determined whether the current state is normal (S38571), and if it is determined that it is not in the normal state (S38571: No), time saving Skip the various processes for setting the state and end this process. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is in the normal state (S38571: Yes), the same S8351 to S38357 processing as the time saving setting processing 14 (see S30274 in FIG. 477) is executed, and this processing ends.

In this way, the processing for setting a new time saving state is configured to be executable only when a specific game state (normal state) is set, and whether a specific game state (normal state) is set By performing the determination of first, unnecessary processing can be made difficult to be performed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 488, in the first modification of the fourteenth control example, when the normal state is set, the setting of the time saving state based on the result of the time saving lottery is changed to the time saving state based on the ceiling privilege However, without being limited to this, the setting of the time saving state based on the ceiling privilege can be executed with priority over the setting of the time saving state based on the result of the time saving lottery. can be configured to In this case, similarly to the time saving setting process 13 (see S30254 in FIG. 455) executed in the thirteenth control example described above, the process of determining the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege (setting status of various ceiling standby flags) is executed first, and if the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege are not satisfied (when none of the various ceiling standby flags are set to ON), to set the time saving state based on the result of the time saving lottery It should be configured to execute the processing of

By configuring in this way, in a state where the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege (500 times of addiction) is satisfied, the ceiling privilege is always given when the already set first time saving state ends can be given.

Furthermore, in the first modification of the fourteenth control example, except when the normal state is set, when the conditions for setting the new time saving state are satisfied (any of the various ceiling standby flags Even if it is set to on), it is configured to carry over the right to set a new time-saving state until the normal state is set without setting a new time-saving state ( It has a time-saving carryover function).

This time-saving carry-over function may be applied to another purpose, for example, in the state where the right-handed game state such as the second time-saving state or variable probability state is set, when the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied, the current setting After the right-handed game state based on the currently played game state is completed, the right-handed game state based on the ceiling privilege may be configured to be settable. By configuring in this way, it is possible to lengthen the period in which the right-handed game state that is advantageous to the player continues, so that the player's interest in the game can be easily improved.

In addition, even if the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is established at any timing during the right-handed game state, the same privilege (ceiling privilege granted after the end of the right-handed game state) can be provided. It is possible to prevent the content of the ceiling privilege given to a person from becoming excessively advantageous or excessively disadvantageous.

Further, the time-saving lottery can be executed even during the right-handed game state, and when the time-saving type in which the second time-saving state is set is won in the time-saving lottery, the time-saving lottery is won after the right-handed game state ends. You may comprise so that the 2nd time saving state based on may be set. In this case, as in the first modification of the fourteenth control example, a pachinko machine configured to set the time saving type (advantageous time saving) in which the second time saving state is set in a part of the time saving winning In 10, it is configured so that the short-time lottery can be executed repeatedly until winning the short-time advantageous lottery (even if the short-time lottery other than the short-time advantageous lottery is won), and the short-time lottery is not executed on the condition that the short-time lottery is won. should be configured to

Further, the results of the time-saving winning may be configured to be able to be carried over, for example, when the time-saving lottery executed during the right-handed game state is won five times, the time-saving winning is based on the five times of time-saving winning. It may be configured to set the states in order.

Next, with reference to Drawing 489, processing contents of time saving state production setting processing 14a (S39091a) are explained. Figure 489 is the figure which shows the processing contents of time saving state production setting processing 14a (S39091a). In this time saving state effect setting process 14a (S39091a), for the time saving state effect setting process 14 described above (see S39091 in FIG. 479), the first time saving state is set to measure the time saving number of times set The difference is that the processing of is added, and the rest is the same. The same processing contents are assigned the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 489, when the time saving state effect setting process 14a (S39091a) is executed, the same S34301 to S34303 processes as the time saving state effect setting process 14 (see S39091 in FIG. 479) are executed, and S34303 In the process of, when it is determined that the first time saving state has been set (S34303: Yes), the number of time saving times included in the received command is set to the value of the remaining number counter 223maa (S34391), and then the time saving state described above The processing of S34305 to S34309, which is the same as the effect setting processing 14 (see S39091 in FIG. 479), is executed, and this processing ends.

Thus, in the first modification of the fourteenth control example, by measuring the number of remaining time reductions in the first time reduction state using the value of the remaining number counter 223maa, the remaining period of the first time reduction state can be determined. Configure. Thereby, it is possible to determine the period until the second condition (the end of the first time-saving state) for giving the ceiling privilege is established, and to execute an effect based on the determination result.

Next, with reference to FIG. 490, the processing contents of the normal mode effect setting processing 14a (see S34472a) will be described. FIG. 490 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the normal mode effect setting process 14a (see S34472a). In this normal mode effect setting process 14a (see S34472a), in contrast to the above-described normal mode effect setting process 14 (see S34472 in FIG. 480), if the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is set to ON, that is, , differ in that the content of the control process executed when the first condition (500 times of addiction) for giving the ceiling privilege is established is different, but other than that, they are the same. The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 490, when the normal mode effect setting process 14a (see S34472a) is executed, first, the processes of S34501 to S34571 which are the same as the normal mode effect setting process 14 (see S34472 in FIG. 480) are executed. to run.

Then, in the process of S34571, when it is determined that the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is set to ON (S34571: Yes), the value of the remaining counter 223maa is updated (S34591), and the heart-pounding zone effect selection table 222maa , the production mode of the pounding zone is determined (S34592), the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is set to OFF (S34593), the pounding flag 223mab is set to ON (S34594), and this processing ends. .

On the other hand, in the process of S34571, if it is determined that the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is not set to ON (S34571: No), then it is determined whether the pounding flag 223mab is set to ON (S34595 ), that is, if it is determined that the pounding zone has already been set (S34595: Yes), update of the pounding zone effect mode is determined (S34596), and this processing ends. Also, if it is determined in the process of S34595 that the throbbing flag 223mab is not set to ON (S34595: No), the effect mode corresponding to the variation pattern received this time is determined (S34509), and this process is terminated. .

As described above, in the first modification of the 14th control example, when the time saving lottery wins the time saving lottery, the first time saving state of a predetermined number of times (100 times to 300 times the first time saving state) can be set. , and when the first condition for giving the ceiling privilege (500 times of addiction) is satisfied, when the first time saving state ends (when the remaining time saving number becomes 0) The condition is satisfied and the ceiling privilege can be given.

By configuring in this way, the timing at which the ceiling privilege is awarded can be varied according to the timing at which the first time-saving state ends, so that it is difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the ceiling privilege is awarded. can be done.

In addition, in the first modification of the fourteenth control example, as the first time-saving end condition for ending the first time-saving state, the first time-saving end condition established based on the number of special symbol fluctuations is configured to be set. However, without being limited to this, before the first time saving end condition is established, a second time saving end condition that can be established based on the lottery result of the special symbol lottery may be provided, for example, special When the number of times that the lottery result of the pattern lottery becomes a specific lottery result (a specific lottery result other than the jackpot winning) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), the second time saving end condition is established, and the first time saving It may be configured to end the state.

By configuring in this way, the first time saving state can be ended before the special symbol variation number (time saving number of times) that satisfies the first time saving end condition is executed, so the ceiling privilege is given. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing to enter.

Furthermore, in the first modification of the fourteenth control example, the time saving lottery is configured not to be executed in the state where the first time saving state is set, but the first time saving state is set without being limited to this. The time saving lottery is configured to be executed even in the state where the first time saving state is set, and when the time saving lottery executed in the state where the first time saving state is set is won, the number of times of the time saving state newly won is the first time saving state. (set to the value of the time saving counter 203h), or the number of time saving times in the newly elected first time saving state is higher than the number of remaining time saving times in the already set first time saving state It may be configured to be able to determine whether it is small, and to determine the value of the time saving counter 203h based on the determination result. In this case, for example, as the value of the time saving counter 203h, it is preferable to determine a value corresponding to the one that is advantageous to the player. is established, the value of the time saving counter 203h may be determined in accordance with the number of times of time saving in which the value of the time saving counter 203h decreases. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the frequent occurrence of situations in which the period from the establishment of the first condition to the establishment of the second condition is unnecessarily long.

As described above, in the above-described fourteenth control example and the first modification of the fourteenth control example, the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege are the first condition (500 hooking times) and the second condition (End of the first time-saving state) is provided, and the ceiling privilege is provided when any of the conditions are satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to easily differentiate the timing when the number of special symbol lotteries (the number of addictions) set as the first condition is reached and the timing when the ceiling privilege is actually provided.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to set a different number of times as the number of times of addiction to which the ceiling privilege is given, and when the setting condition is satisfied, a complicated number of times of addiction is determined from among the different numbers of times of addiction. Ceiling benefits can be given at various timings (number of times of special pattern lottery) without executing processing.

In addition, in the above-described fourteenth control example and the first modification of the fourteenth control example, the first time saving state is set based on the result of the special symbol lottery (the result of the time saving lottery) regardless of the number of special symbol lotteries. Although it is configured to be possible, it is not limited to this, for example, when the normal state is set at the time when the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege is satisfied, the first time saving state is always set. It may be configured as follows.

Further, in the above-described fourteenth control example and the first modification of the fourteenth control example, in a state where the first time saving state is set, the third time saving state is not set as the ceiling privilege. . That is, the first time saving state can also be said to be a delay state for delaying the timing at which the third time saving state is set. Moreover, it can be said that it is a regulation state that regulates that the third time saving state is set.

In addition, the first time saving state is configured to end when the special symbol lottery is executed for the number of time saving times set in advance. In other words, the means for ending the first time saving state can also be said to be canceling means for canceling the regulation state (regulation period) in which setting of the third time saving state is regulated.

In addition, in the 14th control example and the 1st modification of the 14th control example, as a method of canceling the first time saving state (delay state, regulation state), the condition that is established based on the number of times of special symbol lottery When it is established, it is configured to cancel the first time saving state (delay state, regulation state), but not limited to this, in order to terminate the time saving state used in each control example described above You may apply time saving end conditions suitably.

<Regarding the fifteenth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 491 to 503. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the fifteenth control example is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example described above in that the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 has a partial configuration that is changed, and the sound lamp control device 113 The difference is that the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 are partially modified. Also, the control contents executed by the MPU of the main controller 110 and the control contents executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed. The contents other than that are the same, and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the fifth control example described above, as an opportunity for shifting the probability state of the normal symbol from the low probability state to the high probability state, an opportunity other than the special symbol lottery jackpot winning is provided, and a specific special symbol (second special In some of the lottery results (outliers) where the lottery result of the special pattern lottery (2nd special pattern lottery) of the pattern) is different from the jackpot winning, the time is shortened so that the opportunity to set the high probability state of the normal pattern is established. The lottery was configured to be viable.

In the pachinko machine 10 in the fifteenth control example, as in the fifth control example described above, the time saving lottery can be executed only in the second special symbol lottery, and in the normal state and the second probability variable state, at least time saving The lottery is configured to be executable.

And when the time saving state (second time saving state) is set, it is configured to make it easier to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640, and it is given priority over the second special symbol lottery. It is configured so that the first special symbol lottery is executed. In addition, in the fifteenth control example, after the end of the jackpot game, the variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set, and the high probability state of special symbols continues. It is configured so that the length of the period (probability variable period) and the period (short period of time) during which the high probability state of the normal symbol continues can be set differently.

Specifically, the duration of the variable probability period is longer than the duration of the short period of time, so that the variable probability state can be set after the jackpot game ends, and in this case, the game state after the jackpot game ends. However, as the number of executions of the special symbol lottery increases, the probability variation state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol high probability state), second probability variation state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol low probability state) , Normal state (low-probability state of special symbols, low-probability state of normal symbols) and in order.

Furthermore, the player is more likely to execute the second special symbol lottery with the normal state set than when the second special symbol lottery is executed with the second probability variable state set. It is configured so that an advantageous short-time lottery is executed.

By configuring in this way, during the variable probability state (during the right-handed game state where it is easy to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640), the acquired second special symbol is held (special figure 2 hold) However, in order not to be executed during the second variable probability state, enter the game ball into the first ball entrance 64 during the second variable probability state, and hold the first special symbol (special figure 1 reservation ) can be provided to the player with a novel game property of not being interrupted.

<Regarding the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifteenth control example>
First, referring to FIG. 491, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifteenth control example will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example described above executes a left-handed game for entering the game ball into the first ball entrance 64 in the normal state, and when the time saving state is set, it is easy to enter the ball. It had a game board 13 (see FIG. 234) capable of executing a right-handed game for entering a game ball into a second ball entrance 640. Then, as shown in FIG. 234, in the game area (right area) where the game ball fired by the right-handed game can flow down, the game ball enters the first special symbol lottery execution right (special 1 reserve) is not provided, and during the right-handed game, it is configured to be in a game state in which it is difficult to acquire a new special figure 1 reserve.

Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifteenth control example acquires the special figure 2 reservation by executing the right-handed game in the variable probability state, and a predetermined period has passed since the variable probability state ended. Until then, by executing the first special symbol lottery that is executed with priority over the second special symbol lottery, it is possible to give a privilege advantageous to the player if the special figure 2 reservation is not digested. . And, the game board 13 is configured so that the special figure 1 suspension can be newly acquired even when the right-handed game is executed in the variable probability state in which the special figure 2 suspension is easily acquired. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier to end the probability variable state while acquiring the special figure 1 reservation.

FIG. 491 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifteenth control example. The configuration of the game board 13 that the pachinko machine 10 has in the fifteenth control example is formed on the game board 13 in contrast to the configuration of the game board 13 that the pachinko machine 10 has in the fifth control example (see FIG. 234). It is different in that the configuration of various devices arranged in the right side area is different among the game areas that are played, and the special figure 1 reservation can be acquired even during the right-handed game state. The configurations other than the right side area are the same, and the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 491, in the fifteenth control example, the game ball enters the left region of the game board 13 as a ball entry means capable of acquiring the right to execute the first special symbol lottery. A first ball entrance 64 into which a ball is easier to enter than a game ball that has flowed down the right side area of the game board 13, and a game ball that has flowed down the right side area of the game board 13 is located on the left side of the game board 13. and a right first ball entrance 64b into which a game ball that has flowed down is easier to enter. The right first ball entrance 64 b is arranged in the right area of the game board 13 .

The first ball entrance 64 and the right first ball entrance 64b are configured so that four prize balls are paid out when game balls enter, and when a left-handed game is executed. , it is possible to enter about 20 game balls into the first ball entrance 64 by the time all 250 game balls are used (including the use of prize balls paid out on the way). The first ball entrance 64 is arranged so as to be.

On the other hand, when a right-handed game is executed, about 15 game balls are put into the right first ball entrance before all 250 game balls are used (including the use of prize balls paid out on the way). A right first ball entrance 64b is provided so that a ball can be entered into 64b.

Here, in the left area, a general ball entrance 63 is arranged other than the first ball entrance 64, and 10 prize balls are paid out when the game balls enter, and the game flows down the left area. Among the balls, it is configured so that prize balls are paid out even when game balls that could not enter the first ball entrance 64 enter the general ball entrance 63. In the case of executing a left-handed game rather than executing a hitting game, when a specific number of game balls are fired, a game ball can always enter the ball entrance (general ball entrance 63, first entrance It is configured so that it is easy to obtain a large number of prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the ball opening 64 and the right first ball entry opening 64b).

Therefore, in the normal state in which the high probability state of the normal symbol that makes it easier to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 is not set (the low probability state of the normal symbol is set), the right-handed game The game is more advantageous to the player when the left-handed game is executed than when the is executed.

As shown in FIG. 491, in the right area of the game board 13, there is a second ball entrance 1640 which is a ball entrance (starting ball entrance) for executing the second special symbol lottery, and a second ball entrance. An electric accessory 1640a attached to 1640, a through gate 67 capable of acquiring the execution right of the normal symbol lottery by passing (entering) the game ball, and a ball entrance for executing the first special symbol lottery. A right first ball entrance 64b (starting ball entrance) and a variable winning device 1065 that allows a game ball to enter (win) by executing a jackpot game are provided.

The second ball entrance 1640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 1640a that opens and closes in a winning game (normal winning game) executed based on winning in a normal symbol lottery. A state in which it is easy to enter a game ball (normal pattern high probability state) and a state in which it is difficult to enter a game ball (normal pattern low probability state) can be created according to the game state. In addition, the contents of the normal symbol lottery and the operation control contents of the electric accessory 1640a that is opened and closed in the winning game (normal game winning game) executed based on winning in the normal symbol lottery are described above. Since it is the same as the contents of the electric accessory control explained in each control example, the detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, a description will be given of the flow of game balls shot in a right-handed game. As shown in FIG. 491, a game ball launched by a right-handed game flows down while changing the flow direction by a plurality of nails planted in the right region of the game board 13 . Then, at a ratio of about 9 to 1, in the first flow path in which the second ball entrance 1640 is arranged, or in the second flow path in which the through gate 67 and the right first ball entrance 64b are arranged It is sorted and flows further downstream.

The inlet to the second flow path is formed by a gap su1 between two nails, and game balls that have flowed down the right side area but have not passed through the gap su1 are arranged to flow down the first flow path. It consists of Since the opening width of the gap su1 expands or contracts depending on the arrangement position of the nail forming the gap su1, for example, when the arrangement position of the nail forming the gap su1 moves in the direction of narrowing the opening width of the gap su1, A game ball that has flowed down the right side area is less likely to flow down the second flow path and more likely to flow down the first flow path. On the other hand, when the arrangement position of the nail forming the gap su1 moves in the direction of widening the opening width of the gap su1, the game ball that has flowed down the right side area is more likely to flow down the second flow path, and the first flow path. It becomes difficult to flow down the channel.

The game ball flowing down the first flow path reaches the second ball entrance 1640 accompanied by the electric accessory 1640a, and when the electric accessory 1640a is operated to the open state by the normal game, A game ball is guided to a second ball entrance 1640 by an electric accessory 1640a projecting from the game board 13, and enters the second ball entrance 1640.例文帳に追加In addition, when the normal pattern per game is not executed at the timing when the game ball reaches the second ball entrance 1640 (the electric accessory 1640a is in a closed state), the electric accessory 1640a is in the game board 13 Since it is buried inside, the game ball passes through the electric accessory 1640a and flows down toward the variable winning device 1065. - 特許庁

A game ball flowing down the second flow path passes through a third flow path provided with a through gate 67 and a fourth flow path provided with a right first ball entrance 64b by a nail planted in the second flow path. It is distributed to the channels at a ratio of about 1:1. The inlet to the fourth flow path is formed by the gap su2 between the two nails, and among the game balls flowing down the second flow path, the game balls that do not pass through the gap su2 flow down the third flow path. It is configured to Since the opening width of the gap su2 expands or contracts depending on the arrangement position of the nail forming the gap su2, for example, when the arrangement position of the nail forming the gap su2 moves in the direction of narrowing the opening width of the gap su2, A game ball that has flowed down the second flow path becomes less likely to flow down the fourth flow path and more likely to flow down the third flow path. On the other hand, if the arrangement position of the nail forming the gap su2 moves in the direction of widening the opening width of the gap su2, the game ball that has flowed down the second flow path will easily flow down the fourth flow path. It becomes difficult to flow down the third flow path.

The game balls flowing down the third channel pass through the through gate 67 and flow down toward the variable prize winning device 1065, and most of the game balls flowing down the fourth channel are the right first ball entrance. Enter the ball into 64b. In addition, a part of the game ball that has flowed down the fourth flow path may flow down toward the variable winning device 1065 without entering the right first ball entrance 64b. An outlet is provided. By configuring in this way, even if game balls stay in the vicinity of the opening of the right first ball inlet 64b (occurrence of ball clogging), the game balls that flow into the fourth flow path are prevented from entering the fourth flow path. It is possible to make it flow down.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifteenth control example, the game balls flowing down the right side area pass through the second ball entrance 1640, the through gate 67, and the right first ball entrance 64b at a predetermined rate. When 100 game balls flow down the right area, 90 of them flow down the first flow path where the second ball entrance 1640 is arranged. , and 10 flow down the second channel. Of the ten game balls that flow down the second flow path, five of them flow down the third flow path and pass through the through gate 67 . In addition, the remaining five balls are configured to flow down the fourth flow path and enter the first ball inlet 64b.

When the normal state is set, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 1640 even if the normal pattern lottery is successful. 1640a is in an open state for a short period (0.1 seconds), so that the game per normal pattern) is executed, so the right-handed game is executed in the normal state, and the game ball flows down to the right area When the game ball is entered into the right first ball entrance 64b, only prize balls (four pieces) are paid out.

Therefore, when a right-handed game is executed in the normal state, about 5% of the game balls that are shot are configured to enter the right first ball entrance 64b, so 250 games When all the balls are used (including the use of prize balls paid out on the way), it becomes possible to enter about 15 game balls into the right first ball entrance 64b.

In addition, by adjusting the arrangement position of various nails so that the opening width of the gap su1 or the gap su2 is narrowed, the game ball fired by the right-handed game enters the right first ball entrance 64b. Although it is possible to adjust the ratio to be low, when the arrangement positions of various nails are adjusted in this way, the ratio of game balls entering the second ball entrance 1640 or the through gate 67 is increased. It consists of

Here, detailed description is omitted, but in the fifteenth control example, when winning in the normal symbol lottery in the second variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), A normal pattern winning game in which a game ball is more likely to enter a second ball entrance 1640 than when winning in a normal pattern lottery in a normal state (low probability state of special patterns, low probability state of normal patterns). configured to be executable.

In other words, in order to make it difficult to end the probability variable state with the special figure 2 reservation acquired, if the arrangement position of various nails is adjusted so that it is difficult to acquire the special figure 1 reservation by right-handed games, right-handed strike Through the game, it becomes easier to enter (pass) the game ball to the through gate 67 and the second ball entrance 1640, so it is easy to acquire a new special figure 2 reservation by performing a right-handed game during the second variable state. can do.

In addition, in order to make it difficult to acquire a new special figure 2 reservation during the second probability variable state, it is made difficult to enter the game ball into the through gate 67 and the second ball entrance 1640 by the right-handed game. When the arrangement positions of various nails are adjusted, it is configured so that game balls can easily enter the right first ball entrance 64b.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifteenth control example is configured such that when a left-handed game is executed, the special figure 2 reservation cannot be acquired (became difficult), and basically, the left-handed When the game is executed, it is configured so that it is easier to acquire the special figure 1 reservation than when the right-handed game is executed, so when the probability change state ends with the special figure 2 reservation acquired , by executing a left-handed game during the second probability variable state set after the end of the probability variable state, acquire a new special figure 1 reservation, and hold the special figure 2 reservation until the second probability variable state ends Although it is intended to make the player play the game aimed at, it is possible to make the player play a wide variety of games during the second variable probability state according to the result of the right-handed game executed during the variable probability state. becomes.

For example, as the configuration of the right side area of the game board 13, if the arrangement positions of various nails are adjusted so that the game ball can enter the right first ball entrance 64b more easily than usual, the second In the variable state, a game aiming to acquire special figure 1 reservation by left-handed game and a game aiming to acquire new special figure 2 reservation although it is low probability while acquiring special figure 1 reservation by right-handed game The player can choose any of

Further, as the configuration of the right side area of the game board 13, when the arrangement positions of various nails are adjusted so that the game ball is more difficult to enter into the right first ball entrance 64b than usual, the variable probability state If the special figure 2 hold is held at the end of the , the player is made to execute a left-handed game that is easy to acquire the special figure 1 hold during the second probability change state, and the special figure 2 hold is made at the end of the probability change state. If it is not held, it is more difficult to acquire the special figure 1 reservation than the left-handed game in the second variable state, but it is possible to let the player execute a right-handed game that can acquire a new special figure 2 reservation. Become.

With this configuration, the player can play the game while trying various game methods through trial and error, so that the player can be prevented from becoming bored with the game early.

In this case, based on the number of reserved special figures 1 and the number of reserved special figures 2 acquired at the end of the probability change state, it is advantageous for the player as a game method in the second probability change state set after the end of the probability change state. A game method may be determined, and information may be notified to the player to indicate the determined game method.

Specifically, if it is determined that the special figure 2 reservation is not acquired at the end of the probability change state, the right-handed game that can acquire the special figure 2 reservation newly in the second probability change state When it is notified as a game method and it is determined that the special figure 2 reservation is acquired at the end of the probability change state, the left-handed game that is easy to acquire the special figure 1 reservation is notified as the game method in the second probability change state. It should be configured to By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the game disadvantageous to the player from being played during the second variable probability state.

As described above, in the fifteenth control example, by using the game board 13 shown in FIG. 491, the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 reservation) is easily obtained. ), the execution right (special figure 1 reservation) of the first special symbol lottery can be acquired even during the right-handed game executed in .

By constructing in this way, both the special figure 1 reservation and the special figure 2 reservation are acquired in the pachinko machine 10 in which the first special symbol lottery is executed with priority over the second special symbol lottery. It is possible to make it easier to end the probability variable state in the state of being. Therefore, even after the definite variable state ends and the game state (second definite variable state) in which it is difficult to acquire a new special figure 2 reservation than the definite variable state is set, the first special symbol lottery that is preferentially executed is continued. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the continuation of the game in a game state in which it is difficult to obtain a new special figure 2 reservation without consuming the acquired special figure 2 reservation.

In addition, as in the fifteenth control example, without using the configuration that can acquire the special figure 1 reservation by the right-handed game, another configuration can be used to create the same game property as the fifteenth control example. It may be configured, for example, when using the game board 13 (Fig. 234) that the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example described above is used, the second special symbol by executing the right-handed game during the variable probability state A lottery is made easy to execute, and a long (for example, 180 seconds) fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation time of the last special figure fluctuation (special figure final fluctuation) executed in the variable probability state, During the special figure final fluctuation, the first effect (right-handed effect) that guides the acquisition of the special figure 2 hold of the upper limit number (1 in this 15th control example) that can be stored pending, and the upper limit number that can be stored (this In the fifteenth control example, the second effect (left-handed effect) that guides the special figure 1 reservation acquisition of 4 pieces) may be executable.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 491, below the right side area of the game board 13, a variable prize winning device 1065 that is opened during the jackpot game is arranged. This variable winning device 1065 has the same content as the variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 294) in the seventh control example described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the effect content in the fifteenth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 492 and 493, the content of characteristic effects among various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the fifteenth control example will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in the fifteenth control example is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example described above, so that the second variable probability state is set after the variable probability state is completed. configured to be long.

Then, by holding the special figure 2 reservation to the normal state set after the second probability change state is completed without the special figure 2 reservation acquired during the probability change state being digested during the second probability change state, the game The second special symbol lottery advantageous to the player is configured to be executable.

Here, in the state of having the special figure 2 reservation, the effect contents of the keep zone effect executed when the second probability variable state is set will be described with reference to FIG. 492. Figure 492 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the keep zone production, Figure 492 (b) is the end screen of the keep zone production, special figure 2 pending It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen displayed when the success production|presentation which shows that a 2nd probability variable state is complete|finished in the state which is in is performed.

As shown in Figure 492 (a), when the second definite variable state is set while holding the special figure 2 hold acquired during the definite variable state, the keep zone effect is executed. When the keep zone effect is executed, the conveyor 10802 is displayed in the lower right of the main display area Dm, and the bait icons hr1 to hr5 imitating a plurality of baits placed on the upper surface of the conveyor 10802 follow the movement of the conveyor 10802. An effect that moves from right to left in conjunction is executed. A fish 10801 waiting for food discharged from the conveyor 10802 is displayed on the left side of the conveyor 10802, and an effect of eating the food discharged from the conveyor 10802 is executed.

Here, a plurality of bait placed on the upper surface of the conveyor 10802 is configured to be displayed corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation and the special figure 2 reservation, as shown in FIG. 492 (a) On the display screen, as shown in the small area Dm1a, two special 1 reserves are obtained, so two baits corresponding to the special 1 reserves (feed icons hr1, hr2) are displayed. there is Then, as shown in the small area Dm8a, since one special figure 2 reservation is acquired, one bait (bait with the letters SP attached) corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation (bait icon hr5) is displayed.

Then, as shown in the small area Dm1, since the first special symbol variation is being executed, the bait icon hr0 (the bait of the display mode corresponding to the first special symbol) for indicating the type of special symbol being executed is fish. At 10801, an eating effect is being executed.

In the fifteenth control example, since the first special symbol lottery is configured to be executed with priority over the second special symbol lottery, the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and is newly inserted. Each time a special 1 reserve is acquired, a new bait icon hr1 to hr4 is added downstream of the bait icon hr5 corresponding to the special 2 reserve on the conveyor 10802 (position closer to the fish 10801). An effect is executed in which the player 801 throws the bait onto the upper surface of the conveyor 10802 .

In the upper part of the main display area Dm, the characters "KEEP ZONE" are displayed to indicate that the keep zone effect is being executed, as a guidance mode for guiding the player to the game contents during the keep zone effect. The text "Feed the fish until it's full!" is displayed. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "Save the special figure 1 reservation so that the SP's food is not eaten" is displayed as a guidance mode for showing a more detailed game method.

Also, above the conveyor 10802, a traffic light 10803 is displayed for notifying the player of the operation status of the conveyor 10802. FIG. This traffic light 10803 has a display area of "GO" indicating that the conveyor 10802 is operating and a display area of "STOP" indicating that the conveyor 10802 is not operating (stopped). One of the display areas is illuminated corresponding to the operation status of the conveyor 10802 .

Furthermore, as a guide display area for guiding the player to the game method (left-handed game, right-handed game), "left-handed" is displayed in the small display area Dm4. In the fifteenth control example, basically, during the left-handed game, no notification is given to guide the player to the game method, and when the right-handed game is advantageous to the player, "right-handed" is selected. The display is configured to be displayed in the small display area Dm4, but during the keep zone effect, when the game ball is not shot, a game disadvantageous to the player is more likely to be executed than when a left-handed game is executed. Therefore, the small display area Dm4 is configured to display "left-handed".

In the keep zone production described above, every time one special symbol variation is completed and the next special symbol variation is started, a new bait (bait icon hr1 in the figure) is eaten by the fish 10801. In other words, the bait icon hr0 being eaten by the fish 10801 becomes a state indicating information about the special symbol variation being executed (suspended during execution), and among the baits moving on the conveyor 10802, the bait that is closest to the fish 10801 is displayed. The icon hr1 becomes a mode (first special symbol reservation) indicating information about the special symbol variation to be executed next.

In addition, the operation contents of the conveyor 10802 are configured to be determined based on the variation time of the first special symbol variation being executed and the variation time of the special symbol variation corresponding to the acquired special symbol 1 hold. , For example, if the variation time of the first special symbol variation being executed or the variation time of the special symbol variation corresponding to the acquired special symbol 1 suspension is short, that is, if the special symbol 2 suspension can be digested in a short time When the operating speed of the conveyor 10802 increases, and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol fluctuation during execution or the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the acquired special figure 1 hold is long, that is, the special figure 2 hold When there is time to spare until the timing at which the data can be consumed, the operating speed of the conveyor 10802 is reduced or the conveyor 10802 is temporarily stopped.

By configuring in this way, not only the number of remaining bait (the number of bait icons hr1 to hr4 displayed) but also the operation status of the conveyor 10802, the special figure 2 reserve is consumed (the bait icon hr5 is eaten by fish 10801) can be predicted by the player, and a left-handed game can be executed to obtain a new special figure 1 reservation based on the prediction result.

In addition, although detailed explanation is omitted, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the keep zone production, the variable probability state is set after the jackpot game ends. It becomes difficult to hold the acquired special figure 2 pending to the normal state. Therefore, when a big win is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the keep zone production, the end production for ending the keep zone production is executed.

Specifically, as the display mode of the bait icons hr1 to hr4 corresponding to the special figure 1 suspension, poisoned bait can be set, and when the fish 10801 eats the poisoned bait, it runs away far away. It is configured so that a slamming effect is executed. In addition, the bait icon imitating the poisoned bait is configured to be displayed at a low probability even when the jackpot is not won, and the bait corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation that does not have the information indicating the jackpot win. When a display mode imitating poisoned food is set as the display mode of , an effect is executed in which the fish 10801 avoids the poisoned food.

By constructing in this way, when a big win is won in the first special symbol lottery during the keep zone performance, the keep zone performance can be terminated without making the player feel uncomfortable. In addition, since the display mode (display mode showing poisoned bait) that is set when the jackpot is won can be set even for the special figure 1 reservation that has not actually won the jackpot, The bait icon can be displayed in a display mode showing poisoned bait without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Then, when it is determined that the second probability variable state ends with the special figure 2 reservation acquired, that is, the second special symbol lottery is executed with priority over the second special symbol lottery Suspended memory (special figure 1 pending) number exceeds the number of special symbol lotteries required until the second variable state ends, and if the information indicating the jackpot winning is not included in the acquired special figure 1 pending, As shown in FIG. 492(b), the effect that the fish 10801 is full and goes home satisfied is completed, the conveyor 10802 is stopped, and the traffic light 10803 indicates that the conveyor 10802 is stopped. The display area for "STOP" is illuminated.

Then, in the small display area Dm4, "Rest!?" is displayed as a guidance display mode prompting the player to temporarily stop shooting the game balls. As a result, the first special symbol lottery is executed by continuing the left-handed game even after the second variable probability state ends and the normal state in which the second special symbol lottery advantageous to the player is executed is set. (Continuing to acquire new special figure 1 reservation), it is possible to suppress the lengthening of the period in which the second special symbol lottery is not executed.

In the display screen shown in FIG. 492(b), the small display area Dm4 displays a display mode that does not have enough force to prohibit the player from shooting the game ball, but this is not limitative. Instead, it may be configured to display a display mode that directly prohibits the player from shooting game balls (for example, a display saying "Please stop shooting game balls until the SP food runs out"). good.

As shown in FIG. 492(b), when the keep zone effect is successful, as a guidance mode for guiding the next game content to the player, the secondary display area Ds displays "Great success! Remaining SP." Let's eat the bait" is displayed. When the second special symbol lottery is executed without interrupting the launch of the game ball from the state shown in FIG. 492(b) and acquiring a new special figure reservation, the production shown in FIG. executed.

FIG. 493(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the second special symbol variation is executed in the normal state. As shown in FIG. 492(b), when the bait icon hr5 corresponding to the special figure 2 suspension is left, when the mid-ceiling mode effect is completed, the rabbit 801 is placed in the special figure 2 suspension after the normal state is set. An effect of eating the corresponding food is executed. Here, when the rabbit 801 eats all the food, an effect indicating that the time saving state has been won is set as a result of the second special symbol lottery executed during the normal state.

On the other hand, when a new special figure 1 reservation cannot be acquired during the keep zone production, the special figure 2 reservation is digested, and the second special symbol variation is executed during the second probability variation state, Figure 493 (b ) is executed. FIG. 493(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the second special symbol variation is executed during the second probability variation state. As shown in Figure 493 (b), in the small display area Dm8, a display mode for indicating that the second special symbol variation is being executed (indicated by an arrow in the figure) is displayed, and in the small display area Dm8a , "0" is displayed, which indicates that the number of acquisitions of special figure 2 pending is 0. Then, in the main display area Dm, an effect is executed in which the hungry fish 10801 attacks the rabbit 801 while angrily saying "there is not enough food". The comment "End of keep zone" is displayed.

In addition, in this fifteenth control example, the period during which the second probability variation state continues is configured so that it can be varied according to the jackpot type, and the period during which the second probability variation state continues is the longest special drawing lottery It is configured to be 40 times and 1 special drawing lottery at the shortest. Therefore, in the display screen shown in FIG. 492 (a), the period during which the second probability variable state continues so as not to let the player grasp the period during which the keep zone effect continues (the period until the fish 10801 becomes full) (The remaining period of the second probability variable state) is configured not to be notified.

In addition, in the keep zone effect executed in the fifteenth control example, by varying the effect mode of the keep zone effect (for example, the display mode of the fish 10801, the speed of the conveyor 10802, etc.), the second probability variable state It is configured so that the remaining period can be suggested.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player of the duration of the keep zone production in an easy-to-understand manner, so that the player is motivated to hold the special figure 2 hold until the second probability variable state ends. be able to. In addition, instead of exclusively displaying the display mode for indicating the remaining period of the second probability variable state, for example, by making it possible to set different modes of fish 10801, the remaining period of the second probability variable state can be displayed in the game. It may be configured so that it can be suggested to a person. In this case, as the aspect of the fish 10801, it is possible to set a slightly eating aspect and a big eating aspect, and the slightly eating aspect is more likely to be set when the remaining period of the second probability variable state is short. It may be configured as follows.

In addition, unlike the keep zone effect of the fifteenth control example, the information (remaining probability change number of times) until the second probability change state ends during the keep zone effect can be displayed, and a special It may be constructed such that the number of remaining probability variations is counted down and displayed each time the symbol lottery is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner how many times the special symbol lottery is executed until the second variable probability state ends.

Further, in this case, it is configured to display information (pseudo residual probability variation number) different from remaining information (remaining probability variation number) until the second probability variation end condition for ending the second probability variation state is satisfied, A pseudo residual probability variation number update performance for updating the pseudo residual probability variation frequency by making it different from the update content of the information indicating the execution frequency of the special symbol lottery during the 2 probability variation state may be configured to be executable.

Specifically, when the remaining probability variation count until the second probability variation state ends is 40 times, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 displays a pseudo residual as information until the second probability variation state ends. When the information corresponding to the probability variation count "50 times" is displayed and the second probability variation state actually ends, the information indicated by the pseudo residual probability variation count indicates the end of the second probability variation state. ” display mode). And, as a special symbol variation time for showing the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the second probability variation state, when a variation time longer than a predetermined period (30 seconds) is set, the special symbol variation period Inside, it is configured to execute a pseudo residual probability variation count subtraction performance for updating (subtracting) the pseudo residual probability variation count by at least 2 or more.

By configuring in this way, when the pseudo residual probability variation count displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 becomes "last (0)", the second probability variation state is actually ended. However, in the initial stage when the second probability variation state is set, it is possible to display a pseudo residual probability variation number of times larger than the actual number of residual probability variations, so that the player is provided with the second probability variation state can obfuscate the length of time the period lasts.

Furthermore, based on the execution of the special symbol lottery of 1, it is possible to reduce the number of pseudo residual probability variation by 2 or more, so in the second probability variation state in which the pseudo residual probability variation frequency is displayed, the second probability variation state The player can continue to play the game while expecting the game to end quickly (the number of pseudo-remaining-probability variations will be greatly reduced).

Also, in this case, based on the preliminary determination result of the special figure 1 reservation, if it is determined to win the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery during the second probability variable state, the lottery of the first special symbol lottery to win the jackpot Using the period until the result (lottery result indicating jackpot winning) is stopped and displayed, the number of times of pseudo residual probability change displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is set to "last (0)". It is preferable to configure so that the pseudo residual probability variation count subtraction effect can be executed.

By configuring in this way, even if the second probability variable state ends at any opportunity (probability variable number of times digested or jackpot winning), after displaying "Last (0)" as the pseudo residual probability variable number , the second variable probability state can be terminated, so that the player can be provided with an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable. In addition, the pseudo residual probability variation frequency can be set to a number larger than the actual residual probability variation frequency, and when the special symbol lottery is executed once, the value of the pseudo residual probability variation frequency can be updated (subtracted) by 2 or more. Therefore, even when the jackpot is won during the second probability variation state, the number of times of pseudo residual probability variation can be greatly reduced.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fifteenth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in this fifteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 494 to 498. FIG. In the fifteenth control example, for the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example described above, a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 and a part of the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 , and a part of the configuration of the RAM 223 is changed, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same contents, and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

First, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 494 to 496. FIG. FIG. 494(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the fifteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 494(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 in the fifteenth control example is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the above fifth control example (see FIG. 244(a)) in the second winning random number table 202c. Instead, the second hit random number 15 table 202nc is replaced with the jackpot type selection 5 table 202dd, and the jackpot type selection 15 table 202nd is replaced with the time reduction per random number 5 table 202de, with the time reduction per random number 15 table 202ne. It is different in that it replaces with 202df and has provided time saving classification selection 15 table 202nf. Other elements are the same, and detailed descriptions of the same elements are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 494(b), the second winning random number 15 table 202nc in the fifteenth control example will be described. FIG. 494(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the second winning random number 15 table 202nc. This second winning random number 15 table 202nc, like the second winning random number table 202c described above, is a data table referred to when determining the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery. For the range of values (0 to 299) to be obtained, a value determined to be hit for each probability state of normal symbols is defined.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 494(b), when the probability state of the normal symbol is "low probability state", the lottery result "hit" for the entire range of the value of the second hit random number counter C4 ” is not specified, the lottery result “out” is specified for the entire range, and in the case of a “high probability state”, the value of the second random number counter C4 is A lottery result “win” is defined for the range of “0 to 149”.

That is, in the fifteenth control example, when the normal symbol low probability state is set, it is configured so as not to win the normal symbol lottery. By configuring in this way, it is ensured that the normal pattern per game is executed in a state where the low probability state of the normal pattern is set, and the event that the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 occurs. can be suppressed to

In addition, in the fifteenth control example, the contents of the second random number 15 table 202nc are defined so as not to win in the normal symbol lottery executed when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set. It suffices to suppress the frequent execution of the normal pattern winning game in the low probability state of the normal symbol, and the contents of the second winning random number 15 table 202nc may be defined so that the winning can be won with a low probability.

In addition, the technical idea used in any of the above-described control examples, the technical idea of making it difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 even when the normal game is executed. It is of course fine to divert .

Next, with reference to FIG.494(c), random number 15 table 202ne per time saving is demonstrated. This time saving random number 15 table 202ne is a data table referred to in the time saving determination (time saving lottery) executed when the result of the special symbol lottery is other than the jackpot winning (loss), and the time saving random number 15 table mentioned above. With respect to the 5 table 202de (see FIG. 245(c)), the conditions (special symbol type, game state) in which the value (range) of the first hit random number counter C1 determined as time saving election is defined are different. There is a difference.

Specifically, if the special symbol type is "second special symbol", regardless of the game state, the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is in the range of "3 to 899" as a determination value for time saving winning stipulated. In addition, for the special symbol type "first special symbol", the determination value of time-saving winning is not defined (indicated by "-" in the figure).

Next, with reference to FIG. 495, the jackpot type selection 15 table 202nd in the fifteenth control example will be described. FIG. 495(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the jackpot type selection 15 table 202nd. As shown in Figure 495 (a), the jackpot type selection 15 table 202nd is the special figure 1 jackpot 15 table 202nd1 that is referred to when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, and the jackpot win in the second special symbol lottery. It has a special figure 2 jackpot 15 table 202nd2 that is referred to when the jackpot is won, and the jackpot type is determined by referring to the data table corresponding to the special symbol type that has been won.

First, with reference to FIG. 495(b), the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot 15 table 202nd1 will be described. FIG. 495(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot 15 table 202nd1. As described above, this special figure 1 jackpot 15 table 202nd1 is a data table for selecting the jackpot type to be set when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, and the acquired first hit type counter C2 Different jackpot types are defined according to the value of .

Specifically, when the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", "jackpot A15" is used as the jackpot type, and when the value is in the range of "50 to 89", as the jackpot type "Jackpot B15" defines "jackpot C15" as the jackpot type for the range of "90 to 99".

"Jackpot A15" is a jackpot type in which a jackpot game of 6 rounds (R) is executed and a variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set after the jackpot game is completed. 100 is set to the value of the variable probability counter 203i for indicating the period, and 60 is set to the value of the short time counter 203h for indicating the short time period. That is, when the jackpot game based on the jackpot A15 is executed, the probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends, and when the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the probability variable state reaches 60 times, the game state is a jackpot type that is shifted from the probability variable state to the second probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols).

"Jackpot B15" is a jackpot type in which a jackpot game of 6 rounds (R) is executed, and a variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set after the jackpot game is completed. 80 is set to the value of the variable probability counter 203i for indicating the period, and 60 is set to the value of the short time counter 203h for indicating the short time period. In other words, when the jackpot game based on the jackpot B15 is executed, the probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends, and when the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the probability variable state reaches 20 times, the game state is a jackpot type that is shifted from the probability variable state to the second probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols).

"Jackpot C15" is a jackpot type in which a jackpot game of 6 rounds (R) is executed and a variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set after the jackpot game is completed. 61 is set to the value of the variable probability counter 203i for indicating the period, and 60 is set to the value of the short time counter 203h for indicating the short time period. That is, when the jackpot game based on the jackpot C15 is executed, the variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game, and when the number of times of the special symbol lottery executed during the variable probability state reaches one, the game state is a jackpot type that is shifted from the probability variable state to the second probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols).

Next, with reference to FIG. 495(c), the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot 15 table 202nd2 will be described. FIG. 495(c) is a flow chart showing the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot 15 table 202nd2. This special figure 2 jackpot 15 table 202nd2 is different from the above-mentioned special figure 1 jackpot 15 table 202nd1 in that the type of special symbols for which the jackpot type is set is changed, and each jackpot type is defined. However, a detailed description of the detailed setting contents will be omitted.

Next, with reference to Drawing 496, the contents of time saving classification selection 15 table 202nf are explained. FIG. 496 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the time saving type selection 15 table 202nf. As shown in FIG. 496, in the time saving type selection 15 table 202nf, different time saving types and the number of time saving times are defined corresponding to the game state at the time of winning the time saving.

Specifically, when the gaming state at the time of winning the time saving is "normal state", the value of the acquired time saving type selection counter CC1 is "0 to 99" for the whole range, as the time saving type "second Time saving" is defined, and the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to "500". Also, if the gaming state at the time of winning the time saving is the "second probability variable state", the value of the acquired time saving type selection counter CC1 is "0 to 99" for the entire range of "1st time saving " is defined, and "10000" is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h.

In other words, the special figure 2 hold acquired during the variable state is held until the normal state is set, and when the second special symbol lottery is executed during the normal state, the time saving is won with a high probability (Fig. 494 ( b) See), as a time-saving type, the second time-saving state that is a right-handed game state (rather than entering a game ball into the first ball entrance 64 by a left-handed game, the second ball entrance by a right-handed game A time-saving state in which a special symbol lottery can be executed more efficiently by entering a game ball into 640) is set with the number of times of time-saving 500.例文帳に追加

On the other hand, when the second special symbol lottery is executed during the second probability variable state, the time saving is elected with a high probability (see FIG. 494 (b)), and the time saving type is the left-handed gaming state 1st time saving state (Entering a game ball into the first ball entrance 64 by a left-handed game causes a special symbol lottery to be executed more efficiently than entering a game ball into the second ball entrance 640 by a right-handed game. time saving state) is set with 10000 times of working hours saving.

By configuring in this way, the degree of advantage to the player can be greatly varied according to the game state in which the special figure 2 reservation acquired during the variable probability state is executed. In addition, even during the second variable state and during the normal state, since the low probability state of the normal pattern that is difficult to acquire the second special symbol lottery pending memory (special figure 2 pending) is set, the variable state is Since it is not possible to acquire a new special figure 2 reservation after the end, the second special symbol lottery is executed with priority over the second special symbol lottery so that the special figure 2 reservation acquired during the variable state is not digested. A player can be motivated to play a game in order to acquire more reserved memory (special figure 1 reservation) of 1 special symbol lottery.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 497 and 498, the contents of the electrical configuration of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifteenth control example will be described, focusing on the differences from the fifth control example described above. do. It should be noted that detailed description of the same contents as those of the fifth control example described above will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 497(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifteenth control example will be described. FIG. 497(a) is a diagram schematically showing the configuration defined in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 497(a), the ROM 222 in the fifteenth control example has a keep zone effect selection table 222na added to the ROM 222 in the fifth control example (see FIG. 249(a)). are different.

The keep zone effect selection table 222na shows the effect mode of the keep zone effect set corresponding to the first special symbol variation in the second probability change state, which is executed in the state where the special figure 2 reservation is acquired. It is a data table referred to when making a decision.

Here, with reference to FIG. 498, the contents of the keep zone effect selection table 222na will be described. FIG. 498 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the keep zone effect selection table 222na. As shown in Figure 498, in the keep zone effect selection table 222na, the length of the period in which the second probability variation state continues, and the variation time of the first special symbol variation executed when determining the effect mode of the keep zone effect A different effect mode (suggestion mode) is defined in association with the length and the acquired effect counter 223f, and the keep zone effect based on the effect mode determined by referring to the keep zone effect selection table 222na is performed. executed.

Specifically, when the remaining period of the second probability variable state is "40", that is, in the keep zone effect set for the second probability variable state set when the jackpot A15 is won, the second to be executed 1 If the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is "short time (within 60 seconds)", the value of the acquired production counter 223f is within the range of "0 to 79", the conveyor 10802 moves at high speed " A "high speed" suggestion mode 1 and a "big eater" suggestion mode 2 indicating a gluttonous fish 10801 are defined, and a "high speed" suggestion mode 1 in which the conveyor 10802 moves at a high speed with respect to the range of "80 to 99". , and a "small meal" suggestive mode 2 indicating small eating fish 10801 is defined.

And, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol fluctuation to be executed is "long time (longer than 60 seconds)", the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is the entire range of "0 to 99", the conveyor 10802 A "low speed" suggestion mode 1 in which the fish moves slowly and a "small meal" suggestion mode 2 in which the fish 10801 that eats little are defined.

Also, when the remaining period of the second probability variable state is "20", that is, in the keep zone effect set for the second probability variable state set when the big hit B15 is won, the first special symbol to be executed When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation is "short time (within 60 seconds)", the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 39", and the conveyor 10802 moves at high speed, suggesting "high speed". A mode 1 and a "big eater" suggestive mode 2 indicating a gluttonous fish 10801 are defined. A "small meal" suggestion mode 2 indicating a fish 10801 is defined.

And, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol fluctuation to be executed is "long time (longer than 60 seconds)", the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is the entire range of "0 to 99", the conveyor 10802 A "low speed" suggestion mode 1 in which the fish moves slowly and a "small meal" suggestion mode 2 in which the fish 10801 that eats little are defined.

Finally, when the remaining period of the second probability variable state is "1", that is, in the keep zone effect set for the second probability variable state set when the jackpot C15 is won, the first special Regardless of the fluctuation time of the pattern fluctuation and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f, there are two types of suggestion modes: "low speed" suggestion mode 1 in which the conveyor 10802 moves at a low speed, and "premium" suggestion mode 2 in which a special gold fish 10801 is displayed. stipulated.

That is, the harder the end condition for ending the second probability variable state is established (the longer the remaining period of the second probability variable state is set), the easier it is for the fish 10801 to eat more food to be displayed, and the second probability variable state The shorter the fluctuation time of the first special symbol lottery executed during, that is, the shorter the period for acquiring a new special figure 1 reservation, the faster the conveyor 10802 moves at high speed. .

By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to grasp the difficulty of holding the special figure 2 hold in the second probability variable state set this time based on the production contents of the keep zone production.

Next, with reference to FIG. 497(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifteenth control example will be described. The RAM 223 possessed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifteenth control example is the RAM 223 possessed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example (see FIG. 249(b) ), the difference is that a second variable probability counter 223na, a keep zone effect flag 223nb, and a keep determination flag 223nc are added. Identical contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The second probability variable counter 223na is a counter for measuring the period during which the second probability variable state continues, and in the second probability variable state effect setting process 15 (see S9058 in FIG. 501), from the probability variable state to the second probability variable state When it is determined that the gaming state has shifted to (S9402 in FIG. 501: Yes), a value corresponding to the probability variation counter 203i is set (see S9451 in FIG. 501). Then, the value is subtracted by 1 each time the first special symbol lottery is executed (see S9566 in FIG. 502), and it is referred to when determining that the acquired special figure 2 reservation is not digested during the second probability variation state. (See S9573 in FIG. 502).

The keep zone effecting flag 223nb is a flag for indicating that the effect mode of the keep zone effect is set and the keep zone effect is being executed. It is set to ON when the production mode of the keep zone production is determined corresponding to one special symbol lottery. By setting the flag 223nb during keep zone production to ON, when setting the variable production corresponding to the first special symbol lottery after the second time in the second probability variable state, the production mode of the new keep zone production is set. It suppresses the execution of the determining process.

The keep determination flag 223nc is that during the keep zone production, the special figure 2 suspension is not digested during the second probability variable state (the special figure 2 suspension can be held until it shifts to the normal state). It is a flag for indicating that special figure 2 suspension is not digested during the second probability variation state (can hold special figure 2 suspension until it shifts to normal state) Turn on when it is determined set. By setting this keep determination flag to ON, a keep determination effect is executed to indicate that the special figure 2 suspension is not digested during the second probability variable state.

Here, as the keep confirmation production, for example, the food corresponding to the special figure 2 hold displayed on the display screen shown in FIG. An effect of not approaching the fish 10801 is executed, and an effect of displaying the characters "Succeeded in stocking SP bait" is executed. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the SP bait has reached a state where the fish 10801 cannot eat it.

<Regarding control processing of main controller 110 in the fifteenth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 499 and 500, among the contents of the control processing of main controller 110 in the fifteenth control example, differences from the fifth control example described above will be mainly described. The pachinko machine 10 of the fifteenth control example is configured so that the first special symbol lottery is executed with priority over the second special symbol lottery as compared with the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example described above. The difference is that the execution conditions for the time-saving lottery are different.

Specifically, the difference is that special symbol variation processing 15 (see S15104 in FIG. 499) is executed instead of special symbol variation processing 5 (see S104 in FIG. 252). Other processing contents are the same, and the detailed description of the same contents is omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 499, the contents of special symbol variation processing 15 (S15104) will be described. FIG. 499 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of special symbol variation processing 15 (S15104). As shown in FIG. 499, the special symbol variation processing 15 (S15104) is different from the above-described special symbol variation processing 5 (see S104 in FIG. 252) after finishing the processing of S203. It is determined whether the value (N1) of the counter 203d is greater than 0 (S15204), and when it is determined that it is greater than 0 (S15204: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 1 is subtracted (S15205), and the processing of S206 to S207 for executing the first special symbol lottery is executed.

Then, in the process of S15204, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not greater than 0 (S15204: No), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e ( N2) is greater than 0 (S15210), and when it is determined that it is greater than 0 (S15210: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S15211) ), the processing of S212 to S213 for executing the second special symbol lottery is executed. Since other processing contents are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the fifteenth control example, the first special symbol lottery is preferentially executed over the second special symbol lottery with respect to the fifth control example described above. By configuring in this way, by continuing the state of acquiring the special figure 1 reservation, it is possible to maintain the state of acquiring the special figure 2 reservation.

Next, with reference to Drawing 500, the contents of time saving lottery processing 15 (S8086) are explained. FIG. 500 is a flow chart showing the contents of the time saving lottery process 15 (S8086). As shown in FIG. 500, the time saving lottery process 15 (S8086) differs from the above-described time saving lottery process 5 (see S8006 in FIG. 254) in that the game state in which the time saving lottery can be executed is different, and the time saving lottery The difference is that the data tables referred to in the determination of time-saving winning in the lottery are different.

Specifically, when the time saving lottery process 15 (S8086) is executed, first, the same S8101 to S8102 processes as the time saving lottery process 5 (see S8006 in FIG. 254) are executed. Then, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the normal state or the second variable probability state (S8183), and if it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal state or the second variable probability state (S8183: Yes) , Random number 15 per time saving table 222ne is referred to and determination of time saving election is executed (S8184). After that, the processes of S8105 and S8106, which are the same as the above-described time saving lottery process 5 (see S8006 in FIG. 254), are executed, and this process ends.

As described above, in the fifteenth control example, not only in the normal state but also in the second variable probability state, the time saving lottery can be executed. And, as described above, it is configured so that the time-saving lottery executed in the normal state gives the player a benefit that is more advantageous at the time of the time-saving winning than the case where the time-saving lottery is executed in the second probability variable state. there is In this way, the time-saving lottery can be executed in a plurality of game states, and by varying the benefits given when the time-saving lottery is won according to the game state in which the time-saving lottery is executed, which It is possible to make the player interested in whether the time-saving lottery will be executed at the timing (game state).

In addition, in the fifteenth control example, by holding the special figure 2 hold acquired during the probability change state until the second probability change state ends, the second special In order to provide a novel game property aiming not to execute the pattern lottery, the time-saving lottery is executed in the normal state rather than the time-saving lottery in the second probability variable state. Although it is configured to give advantageous benefits to the player at times, it is not limited to this, for example, when the second special symbol lottery is executed during the second variable probability state, the time-saving lottery is not executed. can be configured to In the case of such a configuration, it is possible to give the player the added value of execution of a time-saving lottery by holding the special figure 2 hold acquired during the variable probability state until the second variable state ends. becomes.

<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifteenth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 501 to 503, among the control processes executed by the sound ramp control device 113 in the fifteenth control example, characteristic contents different from those in the fifth control example described above will be described. do. The control processing of the sound ramp control device 113 in the fifteenth control example differs from the above-described fifth control example in that various processing for determining the effect mode of the keep zone effect executed during the second variable probability state is executed. It is configured to perform different control processes.

First, with reference to FIG. 501, the contents of the second probability variation state effect setting process 15 (S9058) will be described. FIG. 501 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the second probability variation state effect setting processing 15 (S9058). In this second variable probability state effect setting process 15 (S9058), when the second variable probability state is set, a process for determining the effect mode of the keep zone effect is executed.

When the second variable probability state effect setting process 15 (S9058) is executed, first, the game state before the change is read from the subordinate state setting area 223g (S9401), and it is determined whether the read game state is a variable probability state ( S9402). When it is determined that the probability variable state is determined in the processing of S9402 (S9402: Yes), the probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends, the time period ends earlier than the probability variable period, and the second probability variable state is set Therefore, the value corresponding to the remaining probability variation counter 203i (the value of the probability variation counter 203i) is set to the value of the second probability variation counter 223na (S9451), and then the value of the second special symbol lottery counter 203e (N2) is greater than 0, that is, it is determined whether it is in the state of acquiring special figure 2 reservation (S9452).

In the process of S9452, if it is determined that N2 is greater than 0 (S9452: Yes), read the value of the probability variation counter 203i (S9453), refer to the keep zone effect selection table 222na, determine the effect mode ( S9454), the keep effecting flag 223nb is set to ON (S9455), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S9452, if it is determined that N2 is not greater than 0 (S9452: No), in a state in which the special figure 2 hold is not acquired during the probability variation state, it has moved to the second probability variation state Since it is the case, without executing the keep zone effect, the effect mode corresponding to the transition to the normal state is determined (S9456), and this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 502, the contents of the special figure 1 effect mode setting process (S15483) will be described. Figure 502 is the flowchart which shows the contents of special figure 1 production mode setting processing (S15483). This special figure 1 production mode setting process (S15483) is a process for determining the production mode of the variation production corresponding to the first special symbol variation, and in particular, the second in the second probability variation state The content of the processing for determining the effect mode of the variable effect corresponding to one special symbol change is different from the fifth control example described above. In addition, when the processing corresponding to the special figure 1 effect mode setting processing in the fifth control example described above and the processing content thereof are the same, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the special figure 1 effect mode setting process (S15483) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 223da is greater than 0 (S9501), and when it is determined that it is greater than 0 (S9501: Yes ), the same processing of S9502 to S9504 as in the fifth control example described above is executed as it is, and this processing ends. In addition, in the process of S9501, the value of the time saving medium counter 223da is not greater than 0, that is, if neither the probability variable state nor the second time saving state (S9501: No), then the second probability variable counter 223na is greater than 0 (S9565), and if it is determined that the value of the second probability variation counter 223na is greater than 0 (S9565: Yes), the value of the second probability variation counter 223na is subtracted by 1 (S9566). Next, it is determined whether the keep zone effecting flag 223nb is on (S9571), and if it is set to on (S9571: Yes), then it is determined whether the keep determination flag 223nc is set to on. (S9572).

In the process of S9572, if it is determined that the keep determination flag 223nc is not set to ON (S9572: No), the value of the first special symbol retention ball number counter 203d (N1) is the value of the second probability variation counter 223na It is determined whether it is greater than or equal to the value (S9573), and when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is greater than or equal to the value of the second variable probability counter 223na (S9573: Yes), Next, it is determined whether information indicating jackpot winning is included in the acquired special figure 1 pending (S9574), and if it is determined that it is not included (S9574: No), the keep zone effect is completed. The effect mode indicating that the game is to be played is determined (S9575), the keep determination flag 223nc is set to ON (S9576), and the process proceeds to S9578. On the other hand, in the process of S9573, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d (N1), when it is determined that it is less than the value of the second probability variable counter 223na (S9573: No), and the process of S9574 In, if it is determined that the information indicating the jackpot winning is included in the special figure 1 reservation that has been acquired (S9574: Yes), the production mode of the corresponding keep zone production is determined (S9577), and the process to S9578. If it is determined in the processing of S9572 that the keep determination flag 223nc is set to ON (S9572: Yes), the processing of S9573 to S9577 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S9578.

In the process of S9578, it is determined whether the value of the second probability variable counter 223na after updating has reached 0 (S9578), and if it is determined that it has reached 0 (S9578: Yes), the flag 223nb during the keep zone effect is set to OFF (S9579), a display pattern command indicating the determined effect mode is set (S9504), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S9565, when it is determined that the value of the second probability variable counter 223na is 0 (S9565: No), and when it is determined that the flag 223nb during the keep zone effect is off in the process of S9571 (S9565: No), the case processing of S9572 to S9579 is skipped, and the processing proceeds directly to S9504.

Next, with reference to FIG. 503, the contents of the special figure 2 effect mode setting process 15 (S15487) will be described. Figure 503 is the flowchart which shows the processing contents of special figure 2 production mode setting processing 15 (S15487). This special figure 2 effect mode setting processing 15 (S15487) is the normal state or the variation executed during the second probability variable state with respect to the above-mentioned special figure 2 effect mode setting processing 5 (see S4987 in FIG. 269) The difference is that the contents of the processing for determining the effect mode corresponding to the effect are different.

Specifically, when the special figure 2 effect mode setting process 15 (S15487) is executed, the same S9601 process as the special figure 2 effect mode setting process 5 (see S4987 in FIG. 269) is executed. In the process of S9601, if it is determined that it is not the normal state or the second probability variation state (S9601: No), S9611 to S9619 which are the same as the above-described special figure 2 effect mode setting process 5 (see S4987 in FIG. 269) , and terminate this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S9601, when it is determined that the current state is the normal state or the second probability variable state (S9601: Yes), it is determined whether the keep effecting flag 223nb is set to ON (S9651 ), if it is determined that the keep effecting flag 223nb is not set to ON (S9651: No), then it is determined whether the keep determination flag 223nc is set to ON (S9652), and if it is set to ON If it is determined that it is (S9652: Yes), the keep determination flag 223nc is set to OFF (S9653), the effect mode that suggests time saving is determined (S9654), the process of S9611 is executed, and this process is executed. finish.

If it is determined in the process of S9652 that the keep determination flag 223nc is not set to ON (S9652: No), the process of S9653 is skipped and the process proceeds to S9654.

On the other hand, in the processing of S9651, when it is determined that the keep effecting flag 223nb is set to ON (S9651: Yes), the effect mode corresponding to the end of the keeping effect is determined (S9655), and the keep effecting flag 223nb is set to OFF (S9656), and the process proceeds to S9611. In other words, when the second special symbol lottery is executed while the keep effect is being executed, the effect mode corresponding to the end of the keep effect is determined, and the display screen shown in FIG. 492 (b) is included. An ending effect is executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifteenth control example is configured to be able to execute a winning lottery using a plurality of symbol types, and a winning lottery using one symbol type can be executed using another symbol type. A first game state in which the winning lottery can be executed with priority over the winning lottery used and the lottery right for executing the winning lottery of other symbol types can be easily acquired, and the lottery right is acquired more than the first game state. A second game state, which is difficult to play, can be set.

Then, a storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, one) of the acquired lottery right is provided, and the lottery right of the other symbol type stored in the storage means during the first game state is stored in the second game state. The memory is continued until a predetermined period (for example, 40 winning lotteries) elapses after the game state is set, and the winning lottery of other symbol types is executed after the predetermined period elapses, so that the predetermined period does not elapse. It is constructed so that a privilege advantageous to the player can be given more easily than when a winning lottery for another symbol type is executed before.

By constructing in this way, the winning lottery using the lottery right already stored in the storage means is not executed for a predetermined period, thereby making it possible to easily obtain an advantageous privilege, which is a novel game characteristic that has never existed before. can be provided.

Further, in the fifteenth control example, a maximum of four lottery rights for one symbol type can be stored in the storage means, and the number of lottery rights for other symbol types that can be stored in the storage means is one symbol type. (only one can be stored) than the number of lottery rights. Therefore, after the first game state is completed, the right to obtain an advantageous privilege is extinguished by executing a winning lottery for another symbol type even once, so play the game with a sense of tension. can be done. In addition, since a plurality of lottery rights for one pattern type can be stored, the game for acquiring the lottery right for one pattern type can be easily continued after the second game state is set. In addition, by storing a plurality of lottery rights for one pattern type, it is possible to make it difficult to execute the winning lottery for other pattern types.

In addition, in the fifteenth control example, only one lottery right of another symbol type can be stored in the storage means, but it is not limited to this, and a plurality of lottery rights can be stored. Also good.

In addition, as the symbol variation time for indicating the result of winning lottery for one symbol type executed in the second game state, variation times with different lengths can be set. Therefore, when the symbol variation with a long variation time is executed, it is possible to lengthen the period until all the lottery rights of the one symbol type stored in the storage means are used. lottery right can be easily stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible for the player to play the game while expecting that the symbol variation for a long variation time will be executed.

Further, in the fifteenth control, it is possible to change the period from the end of the first game state and the setting of the second game state to the time when advantageous benefits are likely to be given to the player. It consists of Specifically, the first game state is set after the winning game executed when the winning lottery is won, and the first game state continues according to the winning type set when the winning is won. The length of the period and the length of the period from when the second game state is set to when it becomes easier for the player to receive an advantageous privilege can be set differently.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the period until the player is likely to be given a benefit advantageous to the player, so that it is possible to easily provide the player with a game that the player does not get tired of. can.

In addition, in addition to the game characteristics used in the fifteenth control example, the game characteristics used in the above-described fourteenth control example, that is, when a winning lottery is executed a predetermined number of times without winning, it is advantageous to the player. A game feature in which a privilege (ceiling privilege) is provided may be applied.

In this case, for example, when the number of times (the number of hits) of winning in succession in the winning lottery executed during the second game state reaches a predetermined number of times, the first game state can be set. By storing the lottery right of the other pattern type in the storage means during the first game state, the game holding the lottery right of the other pattern type can be executed again until the player is likely to be given an advantageous privilege. may be configured.

Further, by executing a winning lottery for one pattern type for a predetermined number of times while holding the right of drawing for another pattern type, a third game state can be set as a ceiling privilege, and the third game state is set. By executing a winning lottery for another symbol type, it may be possible to make it easier for the player to receive an advantageous privilege.

Furthermore, in the fifteenth control example, a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the second game state (a game state in which it is difficult to acquire the special figure 2 hold) is set (the second variable probability state ends, and the normal state is set It is configured so that a privilege (second time saving state) that is advantageous to the player is easily given by executing the second special symbol lottery after the second game state (special figure 2 reserved Hard to acquire game state) is set, when a predetermined period of time has passed (the second variable state ends and the normal state is set) when the special figure 2 hold is acquired, that is , when the right to execute the second special symbol lottery has been obtained after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the second game state was set, a privilege advantageous to the player may be given, For example, in a pachinko machine 10 that can set a plurality of set values that differ in the probability of winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery, a second game state (a game state in which it is difficult to acquire a special figure 2 reservation) is set. When the period has elapsed (the second variable state has ended and the normal state has been set), if you have acquired the special figure 2 reservation, hold to indicate the number of special figure 2 reservations that have been acquired The display mode of the pattern may be configured to be capable of executing an effect of switching to a display mode corresponding to the set value.

As described above, in the fifteenth control example described above, the first game state (the game state in which it is easy to obtain the special figure 2 reservation) ends, and the second game state (the game state in which it is difficult to obtain the special figure 2 reservation) is set. Since then, the second special symbol lottery is executed after a predetermined period of time (the second probability variable state ends and the normal state is set), so that the predetermined period elapses (the second probability variable (during the state) than when the second special symbol lottery is executed, it is configured to make it easier to give a privilege (second time saving state) that is advantageous to the player, but not limited to this, the first The second special symbol lottery is executed after the game state (the game state in which it is easy to acquire the special figure 2 reservation) is completed and the second game state (the game state in which it is difficult to acquire the special figure 2 reservation) is set. Therefore, it may be configured such that a privilege (second time-saving state) advantageous to the player is more likely to be given than when the second special symbol lottery is executed in the state where the first game state is set. .

In addition, in the fifteenth control example, as the first game state (game state in which it is easy to acquire special figure 2 suspension), the variable probability state is set as the second game state (game state in which it is difficult to acquire special figure 2 suspension), Although it is configured to be able to set the 2 probability variable state or the normal state, it is not limited to this, and the various game states set in each control example described above are set to the second game state rather than the first game state. may be appropriately set so that it is relatively easy to acquire a special figure reservation for a specific special symbol type, for example, the time saving state (second time saving state) as the first game state, the first You may comprise so that a time saving state and a normal state may be set.

In addition, in the fifteenth control example, it is configured to be able to acquire a maximum of one special figure 2 reservation, but it may be configured to be able to acquire a plurality of special figure 2 reservations, in this case, the second probability variable Compare the remaining period until the state ends (the number of special symbol fluctuations) and the total value of the acquired special figure 1 pending number and the acquired special figure 2 pending number, and the second probability variable state ends When it is determined that it is possible to determine whether the second special symbol lottery can be executed from the second special symbol lottery, and the second special symbol lottery can be executed after the second probability variation state is completed. It is only necessary to configure so that the keep confirmation effect can be executed (the keep confirmation flag 223nc is set to ON).

By configuring in this way, since it is possible to display a plurality of SP bait (food icon corresponding to the special figure 2 hold) in the keep zone production, it is possible to enhance the production effect.

<Regarding the first modification of the fifteenth control example>
Next, a modified example in which the game characteristics used in the fifteenth control example are applied to the pachinko machine 10 having different game specifications will be described. In the first modification of the fifteenth control example, in contrast to the fifteenth control example described above, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time (in parallel) (so-called , simultaneous fluctuation specifications).

By configuring in this way, lottery games with more special symbols can be executed within a predetermined period of time, and the probability that a player will receive a big win within the predetermined period of time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

In addition, since the configuration (so-called simultaneous variation specification) capable of executing the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol at the same time (in parallel) is the same as the above-described 12th control example, A detailed description thereof is omitted.

<Regarding the contents of the effect executed in the first modified example of the fifteenth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 616, among the effects executed in the first modified example of the fifteenth control example, the contents of the effects different from those of the fifteenth control example described above will be described.

First, when combining the game characteristics used in the fifteenth control example described above with a configuration capable of simultaneously (in parallel) executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol I will explain the characteristic gameplay in.

In the fifteenth control example described above, the first special symbol lottery is configured to be executed with priority over the second special symbol lottery, and the second game state (special figure 2 hold is acquired) It is advantageous to the player by executing the second special symbol lottery after a predetermined period has passed (until the second variable probability state ends and the normal state is set) after the hard game state) is set. Although it is configured to make it easier to grant a special benefit (second time saving state), in the first modification of the fifteenth control example, the result of the first special symbol lottery is determined according to the game state to be set. The variation time of the first special symbol variation for showing and the variation time of the second special symbol variation for indicating the result of the second special symbol lottery are made different according to the set game state. In the game state (first game state) in which it is easy to acquire the special figure 2 reservation, the second special symbol variation is likely to set a shorter variation time than the first special symbol variation, and the special figure 2 reservation is acquired. In a difficult game state (second game state), the first special symbol variation is configured to be easier to set a shorter variation time than the second special symbol variation.

In addition, in the first modification of the fifteenth control example, it is configured to be able to hold and store up to four special figure 2 holds.

And, before the special figure 2 reservation acquired during the first game state (variable probability state) is completely digested during the second game state (second variable state), the second game state (second probability variable state ), the number of times of the special symbol lottery executed during the game reaches a predetermined number of times (number of times of remaining probability variation), so that the second special symbol lottery that is advantageous to the player can be executed after the second probability variation state is completed. ing.

In the first modification of the fifteenth control example configured in this way, as the keep zone effect, the bait icon corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation and the special figure 2 reservation are made to correspond to the type of the special symbol lottery to be executed. The effect given to the fish 10801 is overlapped with the bait icon corresponding to . Then, until all the bait icons corresponding to the special figure 2 suspension that have been acquired are consumed, an effect aiming to fill the stomach of the fish 10801 using the bait icon corresponding to the special figure 1 suspension is executed. .

As described above, in the first modification of the fifteenth control example, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are configured to be executed in parallel. Even if the game is played without interrupting the special design 1 reservation, if the fluctuation time of the second special design fluctuation for showing the result of the second special design lottery is short, or the result of the first special design lottery If the fluctuation time of the first special symbol fluctuation for showing is long, there was a risk of digesting all the special figures 2 pending during the second probability variation state.

Therefore, in the first modified example of the fifteenth control example, the player is interested in the variation time of the special symbol variation for each special symbol type. Therefore, in the keep zone effect executed in the first modified example of the fifteenth control example, as the effect mode of the bait icon, the effect mode based on the fluctuation time of the corresponding special symbol fluctuation is changed from the fifteenth control example described above. is configured so that multiple types can be determined.

FIG. 616(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen executed during the keep zone effect executed in the first modified example of the fifteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 616(a), the keep zone effect executed in the first modified example of the fifteenth control example is different from the keep zone effect executed in the fifteenth control example described above. The effect that the fish 10801 preys on the bait icons (hr0, hr0a) at the same time is executed, the number of bait icons corresponding to the special figure 2 hold is increased, and the display mode of each bait icon is different. are different, and otherwise identical. The description of the same display mode is omitted.

In the first modification of the fifteenth control example, since the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation are configured to be executable in duplicate, food corresponding to the first special symbol variation being executed An effect is executed in which the fish 10801 collectively eats the icon hr0 and the bait icon hr0a corresponding to the second special symbol variation being executed. On the conveyor 10802, bait icon hr1 and bait icon hr2 corresponding to special figure 1 reservation, and bait icon hr1a and bait icon hr2a corresponding to special figure 2 reservation are displayed.

In the first modification of the fifteenth control example, according to the length of the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to each special figure reservation, the display mode of the corresponding bait icon is configured to be different. Specifically, as the bait icon corresponding to the special symbol variation, when the variation time is less than 10 seconds, a display mode simulating a small bait (see bait icon hr1) is displayed, and when the variation time is 180 seconds or more. , a display mode imitating hard bait is displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the player to predict the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation by grasping the display mode of the displayed bait icon.

In addition, as described above, in the first modification, when a short variation time is set as the first special symbol variation in the second probability variation state, the first special symbol variation is advantageous to the player, A game situation in which a bait icon in a display mode simulating a small bait is displayed is more advantageous to the player than when a bait icon in a display mode simulating a small bait is not displayed.

On the other hand, as the bait icon corresponding to the second special symbol variation, when the variation time is less than 30 seconds, a display mode simulating a small bait is displayed, and when the variation time is 300 seconds or more, a hard bait is displayed. A display mode (see bait icon hr1a) is displayed. By constructing in this way, the player can easily predict the variation time of the second special symbol variation by grasping the display mode of the bait icon corresponding to the second special symbol variation to be displayed.

It should be noted that, as described above, in the first modification, when the longer variation time is set as the second special symbol variation in the second probability variation state, it becomes the second special symbol variation that is advantageous to the player, A game situation in which a bait icon in a display mode imitating hard bait is displayed is more advantageous to the player than when the bait icon in a display mode imitating hard bait is not displayed.

Furthermore, among the acquired special figures 2 suspension, the total time of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the special figure 2 suspension excluding the last digested special figure 2 suspension, and the second special being executed If the total time of the remaining variation time of the symbol variation and the total time exceeds the predetermined time (the period during which the second probability variation state can be terminated by the first special symbol lottery if the game is played normally) When it is determined, it is configured to execute a special effect indicating that there is a high possibility that the special figure 2 reservation is acquired at the time when the second variable probability state ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 616(a), the bait icon hr2a corresponding to the latest special figure 2 reservation floats in the air, and the display position does not move even when the conveyor 10802 is in operation. It is configured as follows. By configuring in this way, when the special effect is executed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

It should be noted that, while this special effect is being executed, compared to the normal keep zone effect, the emphasis guide notification that emphasizes and guides the player to continue the game to acquire the special figure 1 hold is provided. configured to run. By configuring in this way, the game is temporarily interrupted during the execution of the special performance, and the period in which the first special symbol lottery is not executed continues, so that all the special figures 2 pending are digested during the second probability variable state. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where

In the above-described example, the total time of the second special symbol variation variation time corresponding to the special figure 2 suspension excluding the last digested special figure 2 suspension of the acquired special figure 2 suspension, and the execution It is configured to calculate the total time of the remaining variation time of the second special symbol variation in the middle, but there is a possibility that the special figure 2 reservation will be acquired at the time when the second probability variation state ends For example, if the remaining variation time of the second special symbol variation during execution is normally played, the first special symbol lottery will be the second probability variation state. To determine only whether it is longer than the period during which it is possible to terminate the It may be configured to determine whether or not information corresponding to a longer variation time period than the period during which the second probability variation state can be terminated by one special symbol lottery is included.

In addition, in the first modification of the fifteenth control example, when it is determined that the period during which the first special symbol variation (lottery) is not executed during the keep zone effect continues for a predetermined period, a special It is constructed so as to be able to execute a guidance effect that prompts a game to acquire the FIG. 1 hold.

Here, the display contents displayed when the first special symbol variation is not executed during the keep zone effect will be described with reference to FIG. 616(b). Fig. 616(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when time has passed from the state shown in Fig. 616(a) and the first special symbol variation is not executed during the keep zone production. is.

As shown in FIG. 616(b), when the special figure 1 reserve is lost during the keep zone production and only the second special symbol variation is executed, the special figure 1 reserve is obtained for the player. In order to emphasize the guidance for the game, a display mode (indicated by a double frame in the figure) that emphasizes the effect of guiding the game method displayed in the small display area Dm4 is displayed, and in the sub display area Ds "Special game" is displayed. There is no 1 hold! Hurry up and save the special figure 1 hold” is displayed.

In addition, on the conveyor 10802, in order to show that only the second special symbol variation is progressing, an effect is shown in which the bait icon hr1a corresponding to the special symbol 2 hold approaches the fish 10801 with respect to FIG. 616(a). executed. Note that the bait icon hr2a is displayed at the same position as in FIG. 616(a) because the special effect is being executed. By configuring in this way, the game is temporarily interrupted during the execution of the special performance, and the period in which the first special symbol lottery is not executed continues, so that all the special figures 2 pending are digested during the second probability variable state. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where

It should be noted that, from the state shown in FIG. 616(b), the state in which the special figure 1 reservation is not newly acquired continues, and the second probability variable state is When the situation becomes impossible to end, that is, the remaining time until the second special symbol variation corresponding to the bait icon hr2a is executed (remaining time until the second special symbol variation corresponding to the bait icon hr1a is completed) ), when it is determined that the number of times of the first special symbol lottery that can be executed does not reach the remaining probability variation number of times for ending the second probability variation state, the special effect ends and the bait The icon hr2a switches to a normal display that moves as the conveyor 10802 operates.

In the first modification of the fifteenth control example, it is configured to be able to hold and store a plurality of special figure 2 suspensions, and even if a situation occurs in which special figure 1 suspension is not acquired, during execution Until the second special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, a new second special symbol variation using the acquired special figure 2 reserve is not executed. That is, during the second probability variation state, in order to end the second probability variation state, the first special symbol variation with a shorter variation time is executed, and all special figures 2 pending are digested during the second probability variation state Execution of the second special symbol variation with a longer variation time is the most advantageous game content for the player.

Therefore, in the keep zone effect, the icon type that is advantageous to the player is easily set for the first special symbol variation with a short variation time. Also, for the second special symbol variation with a long variation time, it becomes easier to set icon types that are advantageous to the player.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to motivate the game to acquire more special figure 1 reserves during the keep zone production.

Here, the variation time that can be determined as the variation pattern of the special symbol variation during the second probability variation state in the first modification of the fifteenth control example will be described. Although illustration is omitted, in the first modification of the fifteenth control example, when selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation executed during the second probability variation state and the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation In addition, it is configured to refer to a dedicated fluctuation pattern table.

Although not shown, in the second probability variation pattern table referred to during the second probability variation state, a variation pattern with a relatively short variation time is likely to be selected as the first special symbol variation, and the second special symbol variation An advantageous table in which a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time is likely to be selected as the first special symbol variation, and a variation pattern with a relatively short variation time is difficult to be selected as the first special symbol variation, and a relatively long variation time as the second special symbol variation. The variation pattern is difficult to select, and has a disadvantage table, and based on the setting opportunity (jackpot type) of the second probability variation state and the result of the determination lottery for determining the variation pattern table to refer to, whichever which table is determined.

The advantageous table has a variation pattern with a variation time of 1 to 60 seconds as the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation, and a variation pattern with a variation time of 100 to 300 seconds as the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation. , is defined to be selectable. Then, a different variation pattern is selected according to the stored number (special figure 1 reservation number) of the execution right (special figure 1 reservation) of the first special symbol lottery and the value of the acquired variation pattern type counter CS1. are doing.

More specifically, the larger the special figure 1 reserved number, the easier it is for a variation pattern with a short variation time to be selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation, and the variation pattern with a long variation time as the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation. are stipulated to facilitate selection.

The disadvantage table has a variation pattern with a variation time of 1 to 45 seconds as the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation, and a variation pattern with a variation time of 30 to 300 seconds as the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation. , is defined to be selectable. Then, a different variation pattern is selected according to the stored number (special figure 1 reservation number) of the execution right (special figure 1 reservation) of the first special symbol lottery and the value of the acquired variation pattern type counter CS1. are doing.

More specifically, the larger the special figure 1 reserved number, the easier it is for a variation pattern with a short variation time to be selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation, and the variation pattern with a long variation time as the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation. are stipulated to facilitate selection.

As described above, in the first modification of the fifteenth control example, as the variation pattern of various special symbol variations executed during the second probability variation state, a variation pattern advantageous to the player is likely to be selected. , and a state in which it is difficult to be selected can be switched according to the type of the variation pattern table to be referred to. By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the success rate of the keep zone effect according to the type of the variation pattern table referred to.

In addition, in the first modification of the fifteenth control example, the type of the variation pattern table to be referred to is determined according to the gaming situation (jackpot type) when the second variable probability state is set. However, without being limited to this, for example, the scenario may be configured so that the type of the variation pattern table to be referred to is switched corresponding to the number of executions of the special symbol lottery executed during the second variable probability state.

Further, in the first modification of the fifteenth control example, the variation pattern table in which the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation and the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation are defined is referred to. However, without being limited to this, a variation pattern table specifying only the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation and a variation pattern table specifying only the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation are provided, and each variation Tables with different degrees of advantage to the player may be provided for the pattern table, and the type of the variation pattern table to be referred to may differ for each special symbol type according to the game situation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to diversify the combination of variation patterns of various special symbol variations executed during the second probability variation state, and to improve the interest of the game.

<Regarding control processing of main controller 110 executed in the first modification of the fifteenth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 617, characteristic processing contents of the control processing of main controller 110 executed in the first modification of the fifteenth control example will be described. In the first modification of the fifteenth control example, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel) with respect to the fifteenth control example described above. They are different in terms of their structure.

Also, when the game state is switched, specifically, when the second probability variation state ends based on the execution of the special symbol lottery, the process of discarding the special symbol variation being executed is executed. This is different from the 12th control example and the 15th control example described above. By configuring in this way, even if the normal state is set while the second special symbol variation is being executed for a long time, it is possible to discard the second special symbol variation for a long time on the way, It is possible to facilitate execution of a new second special symbol lottery in the normal state.

In addition, as in the first modification of the fifteenth control example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are configured to be executable at the same time (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous variation specification). The pachinko machine 10 may be configured to discard the special pattern variation being executed at the timing when the ceiling privilege is given or when the time saving lottery wins, or the special pattern variation being executed may be discarded. It may be configured to continue the special symbol variation of.

Among the differences between the first modified example of the fifteenth control example and the fifteenth control example described above, the portions where the various control processing contents described in the above-described twelfth control example can be diverted are as follows: The explanation is omitted. That is, here, when the above-described gaming state is switched, specifically, when the second probability variation state ends based on the execution of the special symbol lottery, the process of discarding the special symbol variation being executed ( State transition change discard processing) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 617 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the state change change discarding process (YS101). This state transition change discarding process (YS101) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156) executed by the MPU 101 of the main control unit 110, and is specified when the game state shifts. When the conditions are satisfied, processing for discarding the special symbol variation being executed is executed.

When the state transition change discarding process (YS101) is executed, it is first determined whether the game state has changed (YS201). exit. On the other hand, in the process of YS201, if it is determined that there is a change in the gaming state (YS201: Yes), then it is determined whether the change from the second probability variable state to the normal state (YS202), the second probability variable If it is determined that there is no change from the state to the normal state (YS202: No), this processing ends.

In the process of YS202, if it is determined that it is a change from the second probability variable state to the normal state (YS202: Yes), it is determined whether the current is in special figure fluctuation (YS203), and it is not in special figure fluctuation (YS203: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of YS203, if it is determined that the current is in the special figure fluctuation (YS203: Yes), it is determined whether the special figure fluctuation being executed is a jackpot fluctuation (YS204), and during the jackpot fluctuation If it is determined that there is no (YS204: No), the fluctuation stop flag (special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ke, special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203kf) corresponding to the special symbol type during special figure fluctuation is set to ON (YS205 ), the process ends.

By executing the process of YS205, in the special symbol variation process 12 (see Y104 in FIG. 417) to be executed next, the special symbol variation being executed is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a failure.

Also, in the process of YS204, when it is determined that the jackpot is fluctuating (YS204: Yes), a special continuation command is set (YS206), and this process ends. By receiving the special continuation command set by the processing of YS 206 on the side of the voice lamp control device 113, a blessing is given to the player to indicate that the jackpot variation is being executed at the timing of shifting from the second probability variation state to the normal state. A performance is performed.

As described above, in the first modified example of the fifteenth control example, it is possible to cancel the special symbol variation being executed at the timing when the game state changes. Therefore, the special symbol type (for example, second special symbol) in which a long-time special symbol variation is performed in the game state before the transition is easily performed in a short-time special symbol variation in the game state after the transition. By doing so, in the pachinko machine 10 capable of varying the game property based on the transition of the game state, it is possible to easily execute a new special symbol variation along with the transition of the game state, so that the game property can be improved. It is possible to make it easier to provide a proper game along.

Also, as in the twelfth control example described above, instead of discarding the special symbol variation being executed based on the start or stop of the special symbol variation, the special symbol variation is discarded based on the transition of the game state. Therefore, for example, if the game state shifts regardless of the start or stop of the special symbol fluctuation (or the game state shifts after 5 seconds from the start of the fluctuation, or the game state based on the result of the normal symbol lottery ), the special symbol variation being executed can be discarded in correspondence with the game state transition timing. In addition, even if a plurality of types of special symbols are in the process of special symbol fluctuation at the timing when the game state shifts, the special symbol variation can be discarded for all the special symbol types during the special symbol variation. can.

In addition, in the first modification of the fifteenth control example, when the game state switches from the second variable probability state to the normal state, the process of discarding the special symbol variation being executed is configured to be executable, The process of discarding the special symbol variation being executed based on the transition of the game state may be diverted to another, for example, as in the above-described 13th control example and 14th control example, the ceiling privilege is given. Based on that, it may be configured to execute a process of discarding the special symbol variation being executed.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device 113 executed in the first modification of the fifteenth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 618, characteristic processing contents of the processing for determining the effect mode of the keep zone effect executed in the first modified example of the fifteenth control example will be described. In the first modification of the present fifteenth control example, for the fifteenth control example described above, in order not to digest all the special figure 2 pending during the state in which the keep zone effect is being executed (second probability variable state) The difference is that the game method is different.

Specifically, in the fifteenth control example described above, since the first special symbol lottery is configured to be executed with priority over the second special symbol lottery, during the keep zone production, the first special symbol As long as the lottery is continuously executed (as long as the special figure 1 reservation is not interrupted), the special figure 2 reservation will not be digested (until the second variable state ends) until the keep zone production ends (the second special symbol was configured so that the lottery was not run). On the other hand, in the first modification of the fifteenth control example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are configured to be executable at the same time (in parallel). , Even in the state of always holding the special figure 1 reservation, if the variation time of the first special symbol variation to be executed is long and the variation time of the second special symbol variation to be performed is short, the second By the time the probability variation state ends, there is a risk that all the special figures 2 pending will be digested.

Therefore, in the fifteenth control example, the variation time of the special symbol variation being executed (first special symbol variation, second special symbol variation) and the acquired special symbol reservation (special symbol 1 suspension, special symbol 2 suspension) and the variation time of the special symbol variation (first special symbol variation, second special symbol variation) corresponding to . .

By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to predict the degree of difficulty of ending the keep zone performance while holding the special figure 2 reservation based on the performance mode of the keep zone performance to be executed.

FIG. 618 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the second variable probability state effect setting processing 15a (YS9058). As shown in FIG. 618, the second variable probability state effect setting process 15a (YS9058) displays a bait icon for the second variable probability state effect setting process 15 (S9058) executed in the fifteenth control example described above. The difference is that the processing for determining the mode is added, and the other processing contents are the same. The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

When the second probability variable state effect setting process 15a (YS9058) is executed, first, the same S9401 to S9456 processing as the second probability variable state effect setting process 15 (S9058) executed in the fifteenth control example described above Execute. Then, when the processing of S9455 is finished, next, the latest feature among the information stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the information stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. Read out information other than FIG. 2 hold (last stored special figure 2 hold) (YS9001), and determine the display mode of each bait icon according to the variable time included in each of the read information (YS9002) .

By the processing of YS9002, as shown in FIG. 616(a), different display modes (small bait icon, hard bait icon) can be displayed for each bait icon.

Next, the information read from the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (among the information stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the latest special figure 2 reservation (last stored special figure 2 Information other than hold) is calculated (YS9003), and the calculated variation time and the remaining time of the special figure 2 variation being executed are added (YS9004). That is, in the process of YS9004, the remaining time until the final special figure 2 suspension is digested (special symbol variation is executed) among the acquired special figure 2 suspensions is calculated.

Then, the reference time corresponding to the value of the second variable probability counter 223na (the remaining period of the second variable probability state) is read (YS9005), and the total time calculated by the processing of YS9004 is the reference read by the processing of YS9005 It is determined whether it is longer than the time (YS9006), and when it is determined that it is longer, that is, when the game is played normally, the second probability variable state ends before the last special figure 2 hold is digested. If it is determined that there is a high possibility (YS9006: Yes), the special mode is determined as the display mode of the bait icon corresponding to the latest special figure 2 hold (special figure 2 hold to be consumed last) (YS9007) . By determining the special mode in the processing of YS9007, the display mode of the bait icon hr2a shown in FIG. When the process of YS9007 is completed, a display command for indicating the display mode (effect mode) determined in this process is set (YS9009), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of YS9006 that the total time calculated in the process of YS9004 is shorter than the reference time read out in the process of YS9005, that is, when the game is played normally, the final special If it is determined that the possibility that the second probability variation state will not end before the FIG. 2 hold is digested (YS9006: No), the latest special figure 2 hold (YS9008), sets a display command for indicating the display mode (drawing mode) determined in this process (YS9009), and terminates this process. do.

As described above, in the first modification of the fifteenth control example, the second probability variation state (keep zone effect) is stored at the time of setting the special figure reservation, and the special symbol variation during execution Predicting the fluctuation time regarding, at least one of the acquired special figures 2 pending is determined whether it is easy to be digested (execution of special symbol lottery) after the end of the second probability variation state, and based on the determination result It is configured so that the keep zone effect can be executed in a different display mode.

With this configuration, the player can predict whether or not the keep zone effect to be executed this time is likely to succeed, so the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in the first modification of the fifteenth control example, as a method of determining whether or not it is likely to be digested (execution of a special symbol lottery) after the end of the second probability variation state, the remaining period of the second probability variation state (the second 2 The value of the counter 223na during the probability variation) is used, but it is not limited to this. Based on the determination result, it may be configured to determine whether or not it is likely to be digested (execution of the special symbol lottery) after the second variable probability state ends.

In addition, although detailed description is omitted, in the first modification of the fifteenth control example, a new special symbol variation is executed periodically during the second probability variation state (when a new special figure reservation is acquired In the case, when a predetermined time has elapsed), the value of the second probability variation counter 223na and new information related to the variation time (variation time information included in the acquired special figure hold, and the special symbol variation is actually executed Information indicating the difference between the fluctuation time determined when the change is made and the fluctuation time read at the time of look-ahead (preliminary determination)), and the process of updating (correcting) the production mode of the keep zone production is executed. It consists of

By executing this process, for example, in a state where a special effect (special mode) is being executed, the player interrupts the game, and a period during which the first special symbol variation is not executed occurs, or the special symbol variation When a variable time disadvantageous to a player, which can be set with a low probability as a variation pattern, is selected, it is possible to correct the effect mode of the keep zone effect. Therefore, it is possible to easily execute an effect suitable for the game state at the end of the second probability variable state that can actually occur.

<16th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 504 to 547. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the present 16th control example, as in the 13th control example described above, a lottery result (lost) other than a jackpot winning is obtained continuously in a predetermined number of special symbol lotteries (for example, 500 times). In this case, on the premise of setting a game state (third time saving state) that is advantageous to the player, various devices (data display device 262, hall computer 263, etc.) electrically connected to the pachinko machine 10 An external signal output method will be described.

Further, in the 16th control example, it is possible to execute a specific effect of the effect mode as if it were interlocked with the visual mode of a predetermined device (for example, the data display device 262) electrically connected to the pachinko machine 10. Configure. More specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixteenth control example, as a kind of effect for informing the player of the fact that the player will be in an advantageous state (for example, a big win or a time-saving state), the state is shifted to an advantageous state. It is configured to be able to execute a display device interlocking effect in a mode of effect that keeps the fact that the player has done so hidden for a predetermined period, and prompts the user to visually recognize a predetermined device (for example, the data display device 262) at a predetermined opportunity after shifting to an advantageous state. . Various data (the number of lotteries between big wins, the number of big wins, the total number of lotteries, etc.) related to the game status of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed based on various signals received from the connected pachinko machine 10, which are currently in general circulation. In the data display device 262 for doing so, when an advantageous state (jackpot game state, probability variable game state, time-saving game state, etc.) is set, it is in an advantageous state by emitting characters or decorative lamps. Since most of them are configured to be able to notify by such as, by executing the display device interlocking effect, it is very novel as if the pachinko machine 10 and the data display device 262 are interlocking and performing the effect. It is possible to realize a production mode. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this 16th control example, as a lottery result of the first special symbol that is mainly executed in the normal game state, almost no prize balls can be obtained (the number of rounds is small, and the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a in each round Also short) jackpot (special jackpot) is provided. In this special jackpot, the game state after the jackpot is set to the normal game state, so basically, the number of lotteries until the third time-saving state is set ) is responsible for resetting Furthermore, in this 16th control example, as part of the removal of the special symbol, the opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a is involved, and the opening and closing operation is common to the opening and closing operation (specific opening and closing operation) set at the time of the special jackpot. It is configured to provide a small hit lottery result. In other words, a lottery result that is difficult to distinguish from a special jackpot from the opening/closing operation of the specific winning port 65a and that the number of lotteries until the third time saving state is set is not reset is provided. With these, the player can be made to recognize that the number of lotteries until the third time saving state is given may have been reset every time the specific winning opening 65a is opened and closed by the specific opening and closing operation. Since it is difficult for a player to grasp the remaining number of lotteries until the 3 o'clock short state is granted (the remaining number of times until the award of the privilege related to the number of ceiling lottery arrivals) is made difficult, the player is provided with the game property of predicting the remaining number of lotteries. be able to.

Furthermore, in this 16th control example, the fluctuation time of the special pattern in the ceiling lottery number of times is fixed to a predetermined specific period (30 seconds) regardless of the lottery result, thereby transitioning to the third time saving state. It is configured to make it difficult to understand whether the player has won the lottery or whether the jackpot has just been won based on the number of lotteries on the ceiling. By configuring in this way, the player can continue to have a sense of expectation for the shift to the third time saving state for a longer time, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

The pachinko machine 10 in the sixteenth control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example described above in that the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main controller 110 are partially changed. , the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 is partially changed, and the sound lamp control device 113 is that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in No. 13 control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the thirteenth control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 504, the data display device 262 electrically connected to the pachinko machine 10 in the sixteenth control example will be described. FIG. 504(a) is a diagram illustrating the appearance of the island facility in a state in which a plurality of pachinko machines 10 to which the data display device 262 is connected are arranged side by side in a hall. As illustrated in FIG. 504(a), in the state where the pachinko machines 10 are installed in the hall, the data display device 262 is basically installed directly above each pachinko machine 10. FIG. The data display device 262 includes, for example, a data display section 276 for displaying various data relating to the game status of the pachinko machine 10, and a light emitting device such as an LED. 278 and an input device 277 capable of receiving an input operation by the player for switching the display contents of the data display section 276 . Various data displayed on the data display device 262 are used as criteria for judgment when a player selects a pachinko machine 10 on which to play a game or whether or not to continue a game on the pachinko machine 10 currently in play. can be provided. Although the details will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 in the 16th control example sends a jackpot signal 1 indicating that the jackpot has been won to a predetermined device such as the data display device 262, and after the jackpot ends, a normal symbol is displayed. Various signals such as a jackpot signal 2 indicating that the game has shifted to the time saving state and a jackpot signal 3 indicating that the game has shifted to the third time saving state can be externally output. The data display device 262 monitors and collects game conditions such as jackpot wins and game conditions by means of external output signals received from the connected pachinko machine 10, and displays part of the data on the data display unit 276. configured as possible.

Next, a display example of various data displayed on the data display section 276 of the data display device 262 will be described with reference to FIG. 504(b). As shown in FIG. 504(b), the data display section 276 of the data display device 262 is divided into, for example, a right display area 276R and a left display area 276L. For example, the number of first hits on the day (the number of times a jackpot was won in the normal state or the third time-saving state) is displayed. The example of FIG. 504(b) illustrates a case where the first hit occurs 12 times and the characters "first hit 12 times" are displayed in the left display area 276L. In addition, for the right display area 276R, for example, a display indicating the current number of lotteries (the number of fluctuations after the end of the previous big win), the number of lotteries at the time of winning in the first win up to five times before, and the first win The number of winning jackpots (so-called number of consecutive wins) and the like are displayed during the period from 1 to 1 to the normal state.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 504(b), below the right display area 276R are the characters "current", the characters "1", the characters "2", the characters "3", and the characters "4". and the letter "5" are displayed. Above these characters, a bar graph indicating the number of special symbol lotteries and a number indicating the number of lotteries are displayed. The bar graph and numbers displayed above the letters “current” indicate the number of special symbol lotteries after the end of the previous jackpot, and are displayed above the letters “1” to “5”. The bar graphs and numbers shown indicate the number of special symbol lotteries when winning the first hit (jackpot in the normal state or the third time saving state) 1 to 5 times before. In addition, characters displayed above the characters "1" to "5" and below the bar graph ("4 times", "1 time", "1 time", "6 times", and "1 time ”) indicates the number of consecutive winning jackpots (number of consecutive wins) from the occurrence of the first win 1 to 5 times before to the transition to the normal state. In other words, it shows the number of times that the game state (first probability variable state, second time saving state) set to the time saving state of normal symbols has been elected to the jackpot without interruption. These display contents make it possible for the player to easily grasp the tendency of the pachinko machine 10 (the tendency of the number of times the lottery wins the jackpot, the tendency of the number of consecutive wins, etc.). It is possible to provide criteria for selecting the pachinko machine 10 to be played and for determining whether or not to continue the game on the pachinko machine 10 . Therefore, convenience for the player can be improved. In the following description, for simplification of description, the display content displayed in the right display area 276R will be referred to as game history.

Further, the display contents of the data display section 276 are configured to be changeable by an input operation on the input device 277 . Here, the input device 277 is composed of at least a left input section 277a, a display switching input section 277b, a cancel input section 277c, and a right input section 277d. input operation), the display range of the game history displayed in the right display area 276R can be varied. Specifically, every time the right input portion 277d is pressed, a temporally old history (a combination of a display indicating the number of lotteries at the time of winning the first prize and characters indicating the number of consecutive wins) is displayed. That is, every time the right input section 277d is pressed in the state of FIG. 504(a), each history is shifted one by one to the left. Along with this, the history that is older in terms of time is displayed on the right end, and the display of the history that was displayed on the left end is erased. Conversely, each time the left input section 277a is pressed, each history is shifted one by one to the right, and the newer history is displayed on the left end and the display of the history displayed on the right end is erased. be. It should be noted that the game history is configured to store up to 10 previous histories.

The display switching input section 277b is an input section that can switch the display contents of the data display section 276 to the history of another day by pressing (input operation). Each time the display switching input unit 277b is pressed, the display contents of the data display unit 276 are changed to the number of first wins data and game history data one day ago, the number of first wins data and game history data two days ago, and the first win three days ago. The number of times data and the game history data, etc. are updated. Further, by pressing the cancel input portion 277c, it is possible to return to the state in which the data on the number of first hits and the game history data for the day are displayed. With these functions, it is possible to provide the player with more information about the pachinko machine 10, thereby further improving convenience for the player.

Next, referring to FIGS. 505 and 506, the visual mode of the data display device 262 (the display mode of the data display section 276 and the light emission mode of the illumination section 262) when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a specific state ) will be explained. First, FIG. 505(a) is a diagram showing a visual recognition mode of the data display device 262 electrically connected to the pachinko machine 10 when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the jackpot gaming state. When the pachinko machine 10 connected to the data display device 262 wins a big win, the pachinko machine 10 outputs a jackpot 1 signal for indicating a big win. Triggered by the reception of this jackpot 1 signal, the visual mode of the data display device 262 is set to the visual mode for the jackpot gaming state, as shown in FIG. 505(a). Specifically, for example, the game history displayed on the data display portion 276 is erased, and the characters “big win!” are displayed over the entire data display portion 276 . Also, the right illumination portion 278R and the left illumination portion 278L, which constitute the illumination portion 278, appear to emit brighter light than in the normal state (when the game history is displayed on the data display portion 276). These visual aspects (visible aspects for big win) make it easy for the player to understand that the pachinko machine 10 has shifted to the big winning gaming state. The jackpot 1 signal is configured to continue to be output until the jackpot gaming state is terminated. The data display device 262 is configured to continue the visual mode for the big win until the output of the one-big win signal is finished.

Next, a visual recognition mode of the data display device 262 electrically connected to the pachinko machine 10 when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the time-saving state of normal symbols after the end of the jackpot will be described. FIG. 505(b) is a diagram showing an example of the viewing mode of the data display device 262 when the time saving state of normal symbols (one of the first probability variable state and the second time saving state) is set after the end of the jackpot. . When the pachinko machine 10 connected to the data display device 262 shifts to the time-saving state with normal patterns after the end of the big win, the pachinko machine 10 starts outputting the jackpot 2 signal for indicating the shift to the time-saving state with normal patterns. . This jackpot 2 signal continues to be output until the time-saving state of the normal symbol ends (that is, until the jackpot is won or the time-saving number of times passes and the state shifts to the normal game state). The data display device 262 is triggered by the output of the jackpot 1 signal and the start of the jackpot 2 signal output, as shown in FIG. It is set to the visibility mode for Specifically, for example, the visual mode for a big win displayed on the data display section 276 is erased, and the characters "Continuously playing!" Also, the right illumination portion 278R and the left illumination portion 278L, which constitute the illumination portion 278, appear to emit brighter light than in the normal state (when the game history is displayed on the data display portion 276). With these visual aspects (visual appearance aspects for time saving state), it is possible to easily understand that the pachinko machine 10 has shifted to the time saving state with normal symbols after the end of the big win.

Next, the visual recognition mode of the data display device 262 when the number of lotteries of special symbols reaches the ceiling number of lotteries (500 times) and shifts to the third time saving state will be described. FIG. 506 is a diagram showing a visual recognition mode of the data display device 262 electrically connected to the pachinko machine 10 after the pachinko machine 10 has shifted to the third time saving state. When the pachinko machine 10 connected to the data display device 262 wins the third time-saving state, the pachinko machine 10 starts outputting a jackpot 2 signal indicating that the game has shifted to the time-saving state with normal symbols. In addition, a jackpot 3 signal is output for a predetermined period (0.2 seconds) to indicate that the game is moving to a time-saving state related to reaching the number of ceiling lotteries. By combining these signal outputs, the data display device 262 can easily determine the transition to the third time saving state related to the ceiling lottery number of times, so the visual mode of the data display device 262 is for the third time saving state Set to visible mode. Specifically, for example, the game history displayed on the data display section 276 is erased, and the characters "relief being activated" are displayed over the entire data display section 276 . Also, the right illumination portion 278R and the left illumination portion 278L, which constitute the illumination portion 278, appear to emit brighter light than in the normal state (when the game history is displayed on the data display portion 276). With these visual aspects (visual appearance aspects for the third time saving state), it is possible to easily understand that the pachinko machine 10 has reached the ceiling lottery number of times and has shifted to the third time saving state.

In this manner, the visual recognition mode of the data display device 262 can be varied by linking to the state of the pachinko machine 10, so that the state of the pachinko machine 10 can be notified to the player in a more comprehensible manner. Therefore, convenience for the player can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 507 to 509, a characteristic presentation mode executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixteenth control example will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 507, the data display device-linked jackpot notification effect will be described. This data display device interlocking jackpot notification performance is a performance in which a performance mode for drawing the attention of the data display device 262 is set after the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination of misalignment in the variable display performance. If a big win is won in a lottery of special symbols, a big win 1 signal is output to the data display device 262, so that the data display device 262 is set to a visual mode for big win, thereby making the player win a big win. On the other hand, if the lottery result is lost, the big win 1 signal is not output to the data display device 262, and the visual mode for big win is not set (game history remains displayed), it is possible to make the player understand that the big win was not achieved.

Fig. 507(a) shows the third symbol display during the execution of an effect that suggests to the player that there is a possibility that a data display device-linked jackpot notification effect will be executed (data display device-linked effect). 8 is a diagram showing a display mode of the device 81; FIG. This data display device interlocking effect is a variable display mode corresponding to a variable type other than complete loss (SP hit, SP reach loss, super reach, super reach loss, normal reach hit, normal reach loss). It is an effect that can be executed as a part, and is an effect that is executed from 5 seconds before the fluctuation time elapses (the special symbol is confirmed and displayed).

As shown in FIG. 507(a), when the data display device interlocking effect is executed, a character 809 resembling an angel appears in the upper right corner of the main display area. An effect is executed in which light 809L is emitted upward in the main display area Dm from the cane 809 possesses. In addition, a balloon image 809F having a vertically elongated substantially elliptical shape and having the characters "Shine!" Furthermore, the text "If the data lamp lights up, the bonus is confirmed!?" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. With these display contents, it is as if the character 809 imitating an angel emits light 809L to the data display device (data lamp) 262 installed directly above the pachinko machine 10, thereby turning the data display device (data lamp). The player can be made to think that the electric decoration part 278 of 262 is about to emit light. In addition, the player can easily understand that the jackpot game is executed (the bonus is confirmed) when the light 809L emitted by the character 809 causes the illumination portion 278 to emit light.

FIG. 507(b) shows the third symbol display in the case where the big win is actually notified after the data display device interlocking effect is executed (when the data display device interlocking type big win notification effect is executed). 8 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the device 81; FIG. As shown in FIG. 507(b), in the data display device-linked jackpot notification effect, first, at the jackpot start timing (at the start of the opening period of the jackpot), a signal (jackpot 1 signal) indicating the start of the jackpot is sent to a predetermined device. By outputting to (data display device 262, hall computer 272, etc.), the visual mode of the data display device 262 that has received the one-jackpot signal is set to the visual mode for big win. In other words, the illumination portion 278 of the data display device 262 appears to glow as suggested by the character 809 or the like in the fanning effect of the data display device-linked effect. Along with this, as shown in FIG. 507(b), from above the third symbol that was stopped and displayed in the form of being out of reach, the third symbol that was the same as the symbol that was in reach fell and stopped. An effect is executed in which the displayed middle symbol is replaced with the descending third symbol (the stopped middle symbol is pushed aside). In other words, an effect is executed as if the winning third symbol was released downward from the data display device 262 and the third symbol was replaced with the middle symbol. In addition, a balloon image 809F with the words "You did it!" is displayed on the upper left of the character 809 imitating an angel, and light appears to leak from above the main display area Dm. display mode. Further, the characters "Bonus confirmed!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. With these display modes, it is possible to realize a novel presentation mode as if the data display device 262 and the pachinko machine 10 were interlocking to form one presentation mode. In addition, it is possible to realize a novel presentation mode as if the data display device 262 rewrites the lottery result to a big win. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

At present, various devices with different specifications are widely used as the data display device 262, and the display contents of the game history and the viewing mode such as the viewing mode for the big win also vary from device to device. Therefore, even if the same data display device-linked jackpot notification effect is executed, the data display device 262 electrically connected to the pachinko machine 10 on which the data display device-linked jackpot notification effect is executed. If the type of is different, the visual mode for the big win will also be different, so that it is possible to make the player have a completely different impression. Therefore, the performance mode can be diversified according to the number of types of the data display device 262 without increasing the performance mode of the jackpot notification performance of the data display device interlocking type, so that the storage capacity of the pachinko machine 10 can be saved. , the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 508(a), the small bonus effect in the sixteenth control example will be described. Here, in the 16th control example, as described above, the lottery results of the special big win and the small win in which the specific winning opening 65a is opened and closed by the specific opening and closing operation in which the prize ball can hardly be obtained even if the ball is hit to the right are obtained. is provided. In this control example, these lottery results that are difficult for the player to distinguish from the appearance of the opening and closing operation of the specific winning port 65a will be collectively referred to as a "small bonus". On the other hand, the jackpots (jackpots A17 to E16) other than the special jackpots that allow a relatively large amount of prize balls to be obtained are referred to as "normal bonuses."

FIG. 508(a) is a diagram showing a display mode at the end of the variable display effect corresponding to the small bonus (when the third symbol is stopped). As shown in FIG. 508(a), in this 16th control example, if a small bonus (special jackpot, small win) is won, the right symbol row, middle symbol row, and left symbol row of the main display area dm A third pattern imitating the same even number is displayed in a stopped state. The example of FIG. 508(a) illustrates the case where the third symbol imitating the number "2" is stop-displayed in the right symbol row, the middle symbol row and the left symbol row. In addition, a small display area Dm4 with characters "Right shot" is formed on the upper left of the main display area Dm. Further, as shown in FIG. 508(a), the characters "small bonus" are displayed in the small display area Ds. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that the lottery result is a small bonus.

On the other hand, although illustration is omitted, when a bonus (one of the jackpots A16 to E16) is won, the third pattern imitating the same odd number is the right pattern row, the middle pattern row, and the left pattern. A stop appears in the column. Therefore, since the type of the bonus can be easily determined from the type of the third symbols stopped and displayed, convenience for the player can be improved.

In addition, as described above, when the special jackpot is won in the normal game state, the normal game state is set even after the special jackpot ends, and the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la is cleared to 0, while the small hit , the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la is maintained, so winning a small hit rather than winning a special jackpot does not reset the number of times of lottery until transition to the third time-saving state. It is advantageous for the minute player.

In the 16th control example, in the normal state, the number of lotteries after the final bonus is completed is set as a "bonus," instead of the number of lotteries for special symbols after the end of the big win, for the small display area Dm7 of the third symbol display device 81. It is configured to be displayed as the number of "between". In other words, the lottery count on the display is reset not only for the big win but also for the small win. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it more difficult to distinguish between the special big win and the small win, so that the playability of predicting the remaining number of lotteries up to the number of ceiling lotteries can be added. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 508(b), an effect mode set in the variable display effect executed in the ceiling lottery number of times (500th time) will be described. FIG. 508(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the ceiling lottery frequency (500th) variable display effect is being executed. As shown in FIG. 508(b), the ready-to-win effect is generated in the variable display effect of the ceiling lottery number (500th). Here, in the 16th control example, in order to always generate the ready-to-win effect in the variable display effect of the ceiling lottery number (500th), when the ceiling lottery number (500th) special pattern lottery is executed. is configured to set a variation time corresponding to 30 seconds of super ready-to-win variation regardless of the lottery result. As a result, it is possible to reliably secure the presentation time of the ready-to-win presentation. These display contents make it possible for the player to easily understand that there is a possibility that the ready-to-win effect will inform the player of the transition to the third time-saving state related to reaching the number of ceiling lotteries. In addition, if the lottery result of the special pattern of the ceiling lottery number (500 times) is out, basically, the combination of the third pattern (see FIG. 278) similar to the time of the time saving pattern winning is stopped and displayed. State transitions are signaled. That is, after the ready-to-win effect has occurred, the transition to the time-saving state is notified by stop-displaying the symbol with the character "chance time" attached to the middle symbol row. As a result, the player can easily understand that the transition to the third time-saving state has occurred based on reaching the ceiling lottery number of times (not the transition to the time-saving state triggered by a big win). .

Further, as shown in FIG. 508(b), a small display area Dm7 with the characters "Ceiling!?" Further, the characters "Right-handed hitting strictly prohibited! Left-handed hitting!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. By the display contents of the sub display area Ds, the player predicting that the state will shift to the third time saving state is prevented from starting hitting right before the state shifts to the third time saving state (normal game state). be able to. Here, if you start hitting to the right before shifting to the third time saving state (normal game state), the game ball passes through the through gate 67 during the normal game state and the normal symbol fluctuation display starts. There is a possibility that it will be done. And, in this 16th control example, it is configured such that the variation time of the normal symbols in the normal state (normal game state) of the normal symbols is set to 30 seconds. For this reason, for example, just before the fluctuation stop (immediately before moving to the third time saving state) the game ball passes through the through gate 67 (usually the fluctuation of the symbol is started), to the third time saving state After shifting to , it will be in a state in which it is impossible to hit the normal symbol for about 30 seconds. This is because the once set normal symbol variation time is not changed even if the game state changes during variation. For this reason, even though the transition to the third time saving state is notified, there is a possibility that the normal electric accessory 640a will be set to a disadvantageous situation in which the normal electric accessory 640a is not opened for a relatively long period of time, and the third time saving state There is a possibility that the player will feel dissatisfied with not being able to receive the benefit. On the other hand, in the 16th control example, in the variable display effect of the ceiling lottery number (500th), a display urging the player not to hit to the right can be displayed in the sub-display area Ds. , it is possible to prevent the player from hitting right before shifting to the third time-saving state. Therefore, before the transition to the third time-saving state, the variable display of the normal symbol is started, and for a relatively long period of time until the variable display ends, the benefit of the third time-saving state (the right-handed game ball It is possible to prevent the ball from being unable to receive the ball (which makes it easier to enter the second ball entrance 640).

In addition, in the 16th control example, the variable display effect of the effect mode (see FIG. 508(b)) suggesting that the number of times of the ceiling lottery has been reached (see FIG. 508(b)) is executed in addition to the variable display effect of the ceiling lottery number (500th). Sometimes. More specifically, when one or more small bonuses are won after the bonus, at least one small bonus is a special jackpot, and the number of lotteries after the last bonus won is 500 times. and when the number of lotteries reaches 500 after the end of the small bonus won after the last bonus won. That is, from the player's point of view (a point of view that cannot determine whether the small bonus is a special big win or a small win), there is a possibility that the ceiling lottery count has been reached. In other words, if the special jackpot is won after the bonus, the player cannot distinguish between the special jackpot and the small win. Since it is difficult for the player to be sure of the reset, when the number of lotteries after the end of the bonus won before the special jackpot reaches 500 times, the ceiling lottery is performed for the player. You can expect to reach the number of times. Therefore, by setting an effect mode (see FIG. 508(b)) that suggests reaching the ceiling lottery number at this timing, the player can continue to have expectations for reaching the ceiling lottery number for a longer time. can be done.

Similarly, when the number of lotteries after the bonus exceeds 500 times, it is confirmed that one of the small bonuses won during the 500 times is a special jackpot, but a plurality of small bonuses have been won. In this case, it becomes difficult for the player to identify which small bonus was the special jackpot. Therefore, until the bonus is won or the ceiling lottery number is reached, every time the lottery number of times from the winning of each small bonus reaches 500 times, the effect mode suggesting that the ceiling lottery number has been reached (Fig. 508 ( b) is configured to execute the reference). By configuring in this way, it is possible to keep the player's sense of anticipation for reaching the ceiling lottery count for a longer period of time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 509, the data display device interlocking time saving effect, which is one of the characteristic effect modes in the sixteenth control example, will be described. This time-saving activation effect linked to the data display device is an effect that notifies the transition to a time-saving state (based on reaching the time-saving pattern winning or ceiling lottery number of times) without going through the jackpot in the normal game state. There is, the pachinko machine 10 and the data display device 262 electrically connected to the pachinko machine 10 are interlocked in the same manner as the above-described data display device interlocking jackpot notification effect (see FIG. 507(b)). This is a presentation in a presentation mode as if the presentation is being executed. First, referring to FIG. 509(a), during the execution of an effect that suggests to the player that there is a possibility that a data display device interlocking time saving effect will be executed (data display device interlocking effect) It is the figure which showed the display mode of the 3rd pattern display apparatus 81 in. This data display device interlocking production effect is a production that can be executed as part of the variable display mode corresponding to the SP reach out or super reach out, and the time saving state based on the time saving pattern winning or the ceiling lottery number reaching It is a production to suggest that there is a possibility of transition to. In this data display device interlocking effect, like the data display device interlocking effect suggesting a big win (see FIG. 507(a)), a variable time elapses (the special symbol is confirmed and displayed) 5. It is a production that is executed from seconds before. Incidentally, similarly to the thirteenth control example described above, the winning lottery result also includes time-saving symbol winning. In addition, as described above, the variation pattern related to the lottery of the special symbol in the ceiling lottery number (500th) always selects the super reach fluctuation for 30 seconds, so as the ceiling lottery number (500th) Also, there is a possibility that the data display device interlocking effect will be executed.

As shown in FIG. 509(a), when the data display device interlocking effect is executed, a character 809 resembling an angel appears in the upper right corner of the main display area. An effect is executed in which light 809L is emitted upward in the main display area Dm from the cane 809 possesses. In addition, a balloon image 809F having a vertically elongated substantially elliptical shape and having the characters "Shine!" Furthermore, the text "If the data lamp lights up, chance time GET!?" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. With these display contents, it is as if the character 809 imitating an angel emits light 809L to the data display device (data lamp) 262 installed directly above the pachinko machine 10, thereby turning the data display device (data lamp). The player can be made to think that the electric decoration part 278 of 262 is about to emit light. In addition, it is possible for the player to easily understand that when the light 809L emitted by the character 809 causes the illumination portion 278 to emit light, the state shifts to the time saving state (chance time).

Figure 509 (b), after the effect of the data display device interlocking effect is executed, when the transition to the time saving state is actually notified (when the data display device interlocking time saving effect is executed) It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the 3rd pattern display apparatus 81. FIG. As shown in Figure 509 (b), in the time saving effect of the data display device interlocking type, first, at the timing of transition to the time saving state, a signal (jackpot 2 signal) indicating that it is in the time saving state, and a jackpot A signal (3 jackpot signals) indicating that the state has shifted to a time-saving state is output to a predetermined device (data display device 262, hall computer 272, etc.), so that 2 jackpot signals and 3 jackpot signals are received. The visual recognition mode of the data display device 262 is set to the visual recognition mode for the time saving state. In other words, the illumination portion 278 of the data display device 262 appears to glow as suggested by the character 809 or the like in the fanning effect of the data display device-linked effect. Along with this, as shown in FIG. 509(b), from above the third symbol that had been temporarily stopped in the form of out of reach, the third symbol described as "chance time" descends and is stopped. An effect is executed in which the middle symbol that has been displayed is replaced with the descending third symbol (the stopped middle symbol is pushed aside). In other words, an effect is executed as if the third pattern described as "chance time" is released downward from the data display device 262, and the third pattern replaces the middle pattern. In addition, a balloon image 809F with the words "You did it!" is displayed to the upper right of the character 809 imitating an angel, and light appears to leak from above the main display area Dm. display mode. Furthermore, the characters "Chance time GET!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. With these display modes, it is possible to realize a novel presentation mode as if the data display device 262 and the pachinko machine 10 were interlocking to form one presentation mode. In addition, it is possible to realize a novel performance mode as if the data display device 262 was used to shift to a time-saving state. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 510, the hold change effect in the sixteenth control example will be described. Here, the pending change effect is an effect that changes the display mode of the pending ball number pattern displayed in the small display area Dm9 according to the result of the look-ahead. As shown in FIG. 510(a), in the 16th control example, at least six types of display modes are provided as the display modes of the reserved ball number symbols. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 510(a), there is a normal (default) display mode (normal suspension) composed of a black circular pattern and a white circular pattern with an X inside. The display mode (change 1 pending), which suggests that the expectations for a relatively big hit and the expectation for a time-saving state are low, and the pattern that imitates a white circle, will be a big hit. The expectation is moderate, but the display mode (change 2 pending) that suggests that the expectation of being in a time-saving state is low, and the figure that imitates a double circle, and the expectation of a relatively big hit is high However, it is composed of a display mode (change 3 pending) that suggests that the expectation of a time-saving state is low, and a figure with a cross inside a white circle, and the expectation of a big hit is low, but it is a time-saving state. It consists of a display mode (change 4 pending) that suggests that the expectation is high, and a pattern with a figure imitating a star inside the white circle, looking ahead to either a jackpot or a time-saving state. There are six types of display mode (change 5 pending) that can be displayed only when a result is obtained.

In this 16th control example, when the start winning of the first special symbol is detected in the normal state, the lottery result is prefetched from various counter values (random numbers) acquired based on the start win, and the result is read according to the prefetch result. The lottery probability determines the display mode of the reserved ball number pattern showing the increased reserved balls based on the starting winning prize. As a result, even before the lottery of the special symbols is actually started, the player can have an expectation of a big win and an expectation of a time-saving state, so that the player's interest in the game can be enhanced. can be improved. The selection ratio of each display mode for each lottery result (variation type) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 510(b), conditions for suppressing the hold change effect in the sixteenth control example will be described. Here, as described above, in the sixteenth control example, after the initialization of the pachinko machine 10 or after the end of the jackpot, it is different from the jackpot continuously over the predetermined number of ceiling lotteries (500 times) When a lottery result (losing lottery result including time-saving pattern winning and small win winning) is obtained, it is configured to shift to the third time-saving state after the ceiling lottery number (500 times) of fluctuation display ends. In other words, before and after the ceiling lottery number of times, the game is started by executing the lottery of the second special symbol mainly by hitting from the normal game state in which the game is progressed by mainly executing the lottery of the first special symbol by hitting to the left. It switches to the 3rd time-saving state which advances. In this 16th control example, it is configured to suppress the continued display of the reserved ball number symbols (change 1 to change 5) in a display mode other than the normal hold over the switching of the game state.

Here, in the 16th control example, particularly for the first special symbol, the degree of advantage of winning a big win during the time-saving state is higher than that of winning a big win after the time-saving state ends. More specifically, when the special jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbols in the normal game state, the normal game state is set even after the jackpot ends, but when the special jackpot is won during the time-saving state, the jackpot is won. It is configured so that the time saving state is set even after the end. In addition, in this 16th control example, like the 13th control example, etc., the lottery for the second special symbol is preferentially executed over the lottery for the first special symbol. In other words, when a new lottery condition for special symbols is established in a situation where one or more reserved balls of the first special symbol and one or more reserved balls of the second special symbol are reserved (when the fluctuation display ends, or when the jackpot is completed, etc.), the special symbol lottery based on the second special symbol reserved ball is preferentially executed. Therefore, under a situation where one or more reserved balls of the first special pattern and one or more reserved balls of the second special pattern are both reserved in a time saving state, a lottery based on the reserved balls of the first special pattern is executed to some extent. A player can adjust the timing. For this reason, when the reserved ball number pattern of the first special pattern is displayed in the display mode of change 3 or change 5 with a relatively high expectation of a big hit, and the state is shifted to the third time saving state, There is a possibility that the player may be tempted to check the lottery result based on the highly anticipated reserved ball without executing the lottery for the second special symbol. In other words, in the lottery of the first special symbol in which the degree of advantage is higher if the jackpot is achieved during the time-saving state, let's execute the lottery based on the reserved ball with a high degree of expectation for the jackpot before the third time-saving state ends. It may make you think. In other words, if the change suspension is continuously displayed before and after the third time saving state, there is a risk that it will be excessively advantageous for the player.

Therefore, in the present 16th control example, the number of held ball patterns (change 1 to change 5) in a display mode other than normal hold across the timing of switching to the third time saving state continue to be displayed (and the second during the time saving state In order to suppress the execution of the pending change effect of 1 special symbol), it is configured to set a prohibition state of the pending change effect (special figure 1 prefetch effect prohibition state). More specifically, as shown in FIG. 510(b), the start winning corresponding to the lottery of the special symbol in the ceiling lottery number of times (500th) is detected, and the display mode of the pending ball number design based on the starting winning is detected. is set until the third time-saving state set based on reaching the ceiling lottery number of times (500 times) is completed, the special figure 1 pre-reading effect prohibition state is set. By configuring in this way, the first special pattern reserved ball used for the special pattern lottery after reaching the ceiling lottery number of times (after shifting to the third time saving state) is reserved before reaching the ceiling lottery number of times. Intentionally adjusting the firing interval of game balls so that the lottery execution timing is in the third time-saving state, or conversely, intentionally so that the lottery execution timing of the reserved ball of the first special symbol is not in the third time-saving state. It is possible to configure such that the game method of adjusting the shooting interval of the game balls is not established. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being overly advantageous.

Next, with reference to FIG. 511, a transition method between game states in the sixteenth control example will be described. Here, as shown in FIG. 511, in this 16th control example, four types of game states are provided as game states: normal state, first variable probability state, second time saving state, and third time saving state. As in the thirteenth control example, the normal state is set to a special symbol low probability state and a normal symbol low probability state, and is composed of a game state in which the normal symbol variation shortening function (variable short) does not operate. . In other words, the game state is disadvantageous for the player who needs to proceed with the game by executing the lottery for the first special symbol having a low degree of advantage by hitting left.

In addition, the first probability variable state is set to a high probability state of special symbols and a high probability state of normal symbols, and is composed of a game state in which a variation reduction function (variable short) of normal symbols is operated, and the probability of winning a jackpot is high. It is composed of the most advantageous game state for the player who can frequently execute the lottery of the second special symbols which are advantageous by hitting to the right. In addition, the second time reduction state is set to a low probability state of special symbols and a high probability state of normal symbols, and is composed of a game state in which the normal symbol variation reduction function (variable short) operates, so the jackpot probability is high. Although the degree of advantage is lower than that of the first variable probability state due to the low probability, the game state is composed of a higher degree of advantage than the normal state due to the frequent execution of the lottery for the second special symbol by hitting to the right.

Furthermore, the third time saving state is set to a special symbol low probability state and a normal symbol low probability state, and is composed of a game state in which a normal symbol variation reduction function (variable short) operates. In other words, compared to the second time-saving state, the degree of advantage is low due to the low probability of winning the normal symbols, but the game state is configured to have a higher degree of advantage than in the normal state. Here, in the 16th control example, as in the 13th control example, the number of random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be normal symbol hits is different by only one. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the difference in the degree of advantage (that the degree of advantage of the third time saving state is lower than that of the second time saving state). Therefore, when shifting to the third time-saving state, the player can be made to feel as if he/she has obtained the same value as when shifting to the second time-saving state, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. can be done.

First, with reference to the upper part of FIG. 511, the method of shifting from the normal state to another game state will be described. As shown in the upper part of Fig. 511 , the normal state may shift to another state when a jackpot is won, when a time-saving pattern is won, and when the ceiling lottery number of times is reached without winning a jackpot. There is Specifically, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 511, when winning the jackpot A16 determined at a rate of 80% when winning the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the most advantageous first probability variable state. In addition, if you win a jackpot B16 determined at a rate of 10% when you win a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbols in a normal state, the game state after the jackpot ends is a lower advantage than the first probability variable state. It is set to the 2 o'clock short state. Also, when the time saving design is won in the lottery of the first special design in the normal state, the second time saving state is similarly set. Furthermore, when reaching the ceiling lottery number of times in the normal state, it is set to the third time saving state. On the other hand, if a special jackpot determined at a rate of 10% is won in the case of winning a jackpot in the lottery for the first special symbol in the normal state, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the normal state again ( loop normal state). Therefore, in the normal state, basically, the player expects to win a big hit in the special symbol lottery and shift to the first probability variable state. In addition, when a certain number of lotteries have passed without winning the jackpot (so-called addiction occurs), the game can be played in anticipation of reaching the ceiling number of lotteries.

Next, referring to the central left side of FIG. 511, a method of shifting from the first variable probability state to another game state will be described. As shown on the left side of the center of FIG. 511, from the first variable probability state to another game state, either the jackpot is won or the number of probability variables set after the end of the previous jackpot has passed (the value of the variable probability counter 203i is 0 become)), there is a possibility of migration. More specifically, as shown on the left side of the center of FIG. 511, when winning the jackpot E16 determined at a rate of 20% when winning the jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol in the first variable state, the jackpot ends. The later game state is set to the second time saving state. Also, when the number of times of probability variation has passed in the first variable probability state (the value of the variable probability counter 203i becomes 0), the gaming state is set to the normal state. On the other hand, when winning a jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol in the first probability variable state, if one of the jackpots C16 and D16 determined at a rate of 80% is won, the game state after the jackpot ends will be the first again. Set to the variable probability state (loop the first variable probability state). Therefore, in the first variable probability state, the player expects to win the big win before the number of times of the variable probability elapses, and expects to win the big wins C16 and D16.

In addition, it is configured so that the lottery for the first special symbol can be executed by hitting to the left even in the second variable probability state. When a jackpot B16 or a special jackpot is determined in the lottery of the first special symbols, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the second time-saving state. On the other hand, when the jackpot A16 is determined in the lottery of the first special symbol, the first probability variable state is looped. In addition, when the time-saving design is won in the lottery of the first special design, since the time-saving state of the normal design is already set, the game state is not changed. Strictly speaking, when the time saving pattern is won, the number of times of working hours is reset to 100 times (100 is set to the time saving counter 203h). Therefore, in this case, an event occurs in which the probability variation number and the time saving number are shifted. Therefore, although omitted for illustration, only when this irregular event occurs, the situation that the time saving number of times remains even after the probability changing number of times in the first probability change state occurs, the second time saving state to move to.

Next, with reference to the right side part rather than the 1st probability variable state of FIG. 511, the transition method from a 2nd time saving state and a 3rd time saving state to another game state is demonstrated. In addition, since the transition method to another game state is almost common between the second time-saving state and the third time-saving state, the explanation is collectively performed here as the time-saving state. As shown in the central right part of Fig. 511, it is possible to shift from the time saving state to another game state when a jackpot is won or when the number of time saving times has passed (the value of the time saving counter 203h becomes 0). have a nature. More specifically, as shown in the central right part of FIG. 511, when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery in the time saving state, the jackpot C16 or D16 is determined at a rate of 80%. In the case, the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to the first probability variable state. In addition, if the jackpot E16 determined at a rate of 20% is won when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbols, the game state after the jackpot ends is again set to the second time-saving state (jackpot If the time saving state at the time of winning is the second time saving state, the second time saving state is looped, and if it is the third time saving state, it shifts to the second time saving state). In addition, when the number of times of shortening of working hours has passed, the state is directly transferred to the normal state. Although not shown in the drawings, the first special symbol lottery is executed by the player hitting left in the third time-saving state, and when the time-saving design is won, the state is shifted to the second time-saving state. .

As described above, in the 16th control example, the game state is changed at various occasions, such as when a jackpot is won, when a time-saving symbol is won, and when the ceiling lottery count is reached. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect to shift to a game state with a high degree of advantage at more timings, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Electrical Configuration in Sixteenth Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 512, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixteenth control example will be described. FIG. 512 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 512, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixteenth control example is different from the electrical configuration (see FIG. 137) in the thirteenth control example (and the first control example) described above. The only difference is that an external output terminal board 261 is connected to the input/output port 205 of the device 110 and the input/output port 215 of the payout control device 111 . Since the rest of the configuration is the same as the electrical configuration (see FIG. 137) in the thirteenth control example (and the first control example), detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the sixteenth control example, through the external output terminal board 261, information indicating the starting winning, information indicating the number of winning balls, information indicating whether or not a jackpot game is being executed, etc. Information corresponding to the situation can be output to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁Data output to the outside is received by a data display device 262 electrically connected to the external output terminal board 261 and a hall computer 263 . The data display device 262 aggregates information output from one electrically connected pachinko machine 10 and is configured to be able to display the aggregated data as a game history on the data display section 276 . Also, the hall computer 263 is electrically connected to a plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the hall, and is configured to be able to collect information output from each pachinko machine 10 individually. More specifically, the hard disk 289 (see FIG. 513) of the hall computer 263 is provided with a data storage area corresponding to each pachinko machine 10 installed in the hall. Each time the data is received, the contents of the data storage area corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 that has output the data are updated. Based on the contents stored in this data storage area, the game history of each pachinko machine 10 (the number of jackpots per day, the number of fluctuations, the ball entrance of the lottery device 700 where the game ball entered in each jackpot, etc.) It is configured so that the ball rate, operating rate, presence or absence of fraudulent acts and abnormalities, etc. can be grasped.

The external output terminal board 261 is configured to have eleven output channels CN1 to CN11. Each of these 11 channels is configured to be capable of outputting either an H output signal (eg, 5 volt output) or an L output signal (eg, 0 volt output). Each of these channels is provided with a ground pin in addition to pins for outputting game information such as game status and game status. That is, each channel consists of two pins. The ground pins are connected to the common ground of the external output terminal plate 261 and are configured to always output 0 volt. The data display device 262 and hall computer 263 compare the reference voltage of 0 volts output from the ground pin with the voltage output from the information output pin, thereby determining the output pin for information output. It is possible to easily determine whether the state of is the H output state or the L output state. Note that it is not always necessary to provide a ground pin for each channel. For example, a dedicated channel may be provided for outputting a 0 volt reference voltage. As a result, since the number of pins in each channel can be reduced by one, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by reducing the number of harnesses and the number of connectors.

Next, with reference to FIG. 513, the configuration of the gaming system composed of the pachinko machine 10, the data display device 262, and the hall computer 263 in the sixteenth control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 513, the external output terminal board 261 of the pachinko machine 10, the data display device 262 and the hall computer 263 are electrically connected. That is, signal lines leading to the external output terminal board 261 are connected to the input/output port 275 of the data display device 262 and the input/output port of the hall computer 263 .

Further, as shown in FIG. 513, the data display device 262 is equipped with an MPU 271 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 271 includes a ROM 272 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 271, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 272. A RAM 273 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. For the input/output port 275 of the data display device 262, for example, a data display unit 276 configured by a liquid crystal display or the like and capable of displaying data such as game history, and a data display unit 276 At least an input device 277 capable of receiving an input operation for switching the display contents of , and an illumination section 278 made up of a light-emitting member such as an LED are connected. Based on the data stored in the ROM 272 and RAM 273, the MPU 271 controls the display contents of the data display unit 276, monitors whether there is an input operation on the input device 277, and displays the data when an input operation is detected. The display contents of the section 276 are switched. In addition, various signals output from the external output terminal board 261 are monitored to update the game history information stored in the RAM 273, update the display mode of the data display section 276, and Update the mode. As a result, the game history of the pachinko machine 10 can be displayed on the data display section 276 without time lag, so that convenience for the player can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 513, the hall computer 263 is equipped with an MPU 281 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 281 includes a ROM 282 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 281, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 282. A RAM 283 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. For the input/output port 285 of the hall computer 263, a speaker 286 capable of outputting a predetermined sound and a display 287 composed of a liquid crystal display or the like and capable of displaying data such as game history are provided. and an input device 288 configured by a keyboard or the like and capable of accepting an input operation such as switching display contents on a display 287 is connected. Furthermore, the hall computer 263 incorporates a hard disk 289 for individually summarizing the game histories of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the hall. Based on the data stored in the ROM 282, the RAM 283, and the hard disk 289, the MPU 281 controls the display contents of the display 287, monitors whether there is an input operation on the input device 288, and when an input operation is detected, The display contents of the data display section 287 are switched. In addition, various signals output from the external output terminal board 261 are monitored to update the game history information stored in the hard disk 289, to update the display mode of the display 287, and to update the voice output from the speaker 286. to control. As a result, the game history and game status of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the hall can be displayed on the display 287 without time lag, which is convenient for the operator of the hall computer (mainly the hall clerk, etc.). can improve sexuality.

Next, the details of the signal output from the external output terminal board 261 to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 514, the external output terminal board 261 is provided with 11 channels from CN1 to CN11, and signals corresponding to game situations are output from each channel. Specifically, CN1 outputs a payout signal indicating that 10 prize balls have been paid out from the pachinko machine 10 . This payout signal is constructed such that the H output continues for 0.2 seconds every time the number of paid out prize balls reaches 10 (see S2906 in FIG. 58). The hall computer 262 is configured to be able to grasp the number of prize balls paid out from each pachinko machine 10 based on this payout signal. As a result, the ball output rate of each pachinko machine 10 and the sales of the hall can be calculated.

From CN2 of the external output terminal board 261, an inner frame open signal indicating whether or not the inner frame 12 of the pachinko machine 10 is opened is output. The output of the inner frame open signal is set to H while the inner frame 12 is open, and the output is set to L while the inner frame 12 is closed. The hall computer 263 can grasp whether or not the inner frame 12 of each pachinko machine 10 has been opened by an illegal player based on this inner frame opening signal, so that fraud can be suppressed.

A door open signal indicating whether or not the front frame 14 of the pachinko machine 10 is open is output from the CN3 of the external output terminal board 261 . The output of the door open signal is set to H while the front frame 14 is open, and the output is set to L while the front frame 14 is closed. Since the hall computer 263 can grasp whether or not the front frame 14 of each pachinko machine 10 is opened by an illegal player based on the door opening signal, it is possible to suppress illegal acts.

From CN4 of the external output terminal plate 261, a symbol stop signal indicating that the fluctuation of the special symbol has stopped is output. This symbol stop signal is set to the state of H output for 1 second based on the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbols (see S212 in FIG. 31). The hall computer 262 can grasp the number of fluctuations of the special symbols of each pachinko machine 10 based on the symbol stop signal.

From CN5 of the external output terminal plate 261, a start winning signal, which is a signal indicating that a starting winning to the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 has been detected, is output. The output of the starting winning signal is set to H each time a starting winning is detected. Also, the H output is configured to continue for 0.2 seconds. The hall computer 263 is configured to be able to grasp the starting winning of each pachinko machine 10 based on this starting winning signal.

From CN6 of the external output terminal plate 261, an out ball detection signal whose output becomes H (high output) is outputted every time the number of game balls entering the out port 66 reaches 10 balls. This out-ball detection signal is set to the L output state after being kept in the H output state for 0.2 seconds each time 10 out balls are detected. The hall computer 263 is configured to be able to grasp the number of out balls of each pachinko machine 10 based on this out ball detection signal.

CN7 of the external output terminal board 261 outputs a jackpot 1 signal indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state. The output of the jackpot 1 signal is set to H during the jackpot of the special symbol, and the output is set to L in the state other than the jackpot. The hall computer 263 can determine the number of jackpots of each pachinko machine 10 and the presence or absence of fraud based on this one jackpot signal. Specifically, when this jackpot 1 signal is set to the H output state, the hall computer 263 adds 1 to the number of jackpots of the pachinko machine 10, and is configured to be able to grasp the number of jackpots in real time. It is Based on the number of big wins, when an abnormal number of big wins have occurred, it is possible to determine that there is a possibility of an abnormality or fraudulent act, and to report the abnormality.

From CN8 of the external output terminal board 261, a jackpot 2 signal indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of normal symbols is output. The output of the jackpot 2 signal is set to H while the time saving state of the normal pattern is set, and the output is set to L in the state other than the time saving state of the normal pattern. The hall computer 263 can determine the number of consecutive wins of each pachinko machine 10 and the presence or absence of fraud based on the two jackpot signals. Specifically, when a jackpot is won and a jackpot 1 signal is output while this jackpot 2 signal is in the H output state, the hall computer 263 adds 1 to the number of consecutive games of the pachinko machine 10, It is configured so that the number of consecutive chances can be grasped in real time. Based on the number of consecutive big wins, if an abnormal number of consecutive big wins have occurred, it can be determined that there is a possibility of an abnormality or fraud, and the abnormality can be reported.

From CN9 of the external output terminal board 261, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state, jackpot 3 signals indicating the start and end times of the third time-saving state are output. In addition to setting the output of the jackpot 3 signal to H during execution of the jackpot game as with the jackpot 1 signal, the jackpot lottery number of times is reached and the third time-saving state is started, and the third Its output is set to H for 0.2 seconds when the time saving state is terminated. With this jackpot 3 signal, information indicating that it is in the jackpot gaming state, information indicating that the third time saving state related to reaching the ceiling lottery number of times has started, and information indicating that the third time saving state has ended, It is possible to output signals with different signal output modes in only one channel.

As with the jackpot 1 signal, by setting CN9 to the H output state even during execution of the jackpot game, predetermined devices (data display device 262, hall, etc.) electrically connected via the external output terminal plate 261 The information to be received can be selected according to the specifications of the computer 263). That is, the function installed in the pachinko machine 10, which shifts to the time-saving state based on the number of ceiling lotteries reached, is a very special function of shifting to an advantageous game state without going through a big win. Depending on the specs of the predetermined device, there is a possibility that the shift to the time saving state based on reaching the ceiling lottery number of times cannot be treated as normal. In other words, if a signal indicating a time saving state is received without receiving a signal indicating a jackpot, it is determined that the state has been shifted to a time saving state without a jackpot due to fraud, or an abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 10 and the output is disabled. There is a risk of being identified. Therefore, in this 16th control example, as the jackpot 3 signal, a signal that is set to the H output state not only during the execution of the jackpot game but also when the ceiling lottery number of times is reached, is provided. It is possible to treat the time-saving state, which is shifted based on reaching the number of times, as a normal state regardless of the specs of the predetermined device connected to the external output terminal board 261 . In other words, if the signal indicating the time saving state is received without receiving the signal indicating the jackpot, even if the specification determines that it is illegal or abnormal, if the 3 jackpot signals are input as the signal indicating the jackpot, the ceiling Even when the number of lotteries reaches the lottery number, it is possible to realize a signal output mode as if a shift to a time-saving state occurred in a pseudo manner after a big win. That is, the jackpot 3 signal indicating the jackpot is set to the H output state for 0.2 seconds, and the jackpot 2 signal indicating the transition to the time saving state is set to the H output state, so that the proper time saving state It can be judged as migration. Therefore, it can be suppressed that the time saving state set based on the number of ceiling lottery arrivals is determined to be illegal or abnormal. In addition, in the case of a predetermined device with specifications that can identify the time-saving state based on the number of times the ceiling lottery has been reached, by determining the output period of the 3 jackpot signals, it is possible to determine whether the H output is based on reaching the ceiling lottery number. It is possible to distinguish whether it is the H output based on winning. Therefore, regardless of the specs of the predetermined device, it is possible to treat the transition to the time saving state based on reaching the ceiling lottery number of times as justifiable.

From CN10 of the external output terminal plate 261, a winning detection signal indicating that the number of winning balls to be paid out has reached 10 based on the winning of game balls into various winning ports is output. This winning detection signal is constructed such that the H output continues for 0.2 seconds each time the number of winning balls to be paid out reaches 10. The hall computer 263 is configured to be able to grasp the number of prize balls of each pachinko machine 10 based on the winning detection signal.

Various security-related signals are output from CN11 of the external output terminal board 261 . More specifically, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the output of the CN 11 is set to H for 0.2 seconds (power-on signal). The hall computer 263 measures the period during which the CN 11 is in H output, and if the period of H output is 0.2 seconds, it can be determined that the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. . Also, based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, the output of the CN 11 is set to H for 0.4 seconds (power off signal). The hall computer 263 measures the period during which the CN 11 is in H output, and if the period of H output is 0.4 seconds, it can be determined that the pachinko machine 10 has been powered off. In this 16th control example, the hall computer 263 stores the game state when the power is cut off, and when it detects that the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the stored power cut time The game state is compared with the game state when the power is turned on. That is, when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not there is a possibility that the game state has been changed to an advantageous game state by some illegal method, and if the game states do not match, an abnormality is notified. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts of illegally changing the game state of the pachinko machine 10 to an advantageous game state (jackpot game state or first probability variable state).

If the power is cut off during the jackpot state (while the jackpot 1 signal is H output) and the power is turned on again, it was set to OFF (L output state) while the power was cut off. The jackpot 1 signal (CN7) becomes the H output state again. In this case, if the hall computer 263 adds the number of big wins, the actual number of big wins and the number of big wins grasped by the hall computer 263 will be different. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th control example, when it is determined that both the game state at the time of power-on and the game state at the time of the previous power-off are both jackpot states, It is configured not to add the number of big wins when the power is turned on by discriminating that it is in the following big win state. Therefore, the hall computer 263 can be made to accurately grasp the number of jackpots.

In addition, CN11 of the external output terminal board 261 is also set to the H output state when various abnormalities (magnetic abnormality, radio wave abnormality, switch abnormality, abnormal winning, etc.) are detected in the pachinko machine 10. . When various abnormalities are detected, the output continues to be set to H until the abnormalities are resolved. The hall computer 263 can determine that an abnormality has occurred when the H output state of the CN 11 continues for more than 0.4 seconds. can be notified to Therefore, the abnormality occurring in the pachinko machine 10 can be resolved quickly.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 in the sixteenth control example, by outputting a signal according to the game situation from each of the 11 channels CN1 to CN11 of the external output terminal board 261, The provided predetermined devices (data display device 262 and hall computer 263) are configured so that the state of the game can be grasped. The data display device 262 grasps the state of the game based on various signals output from the connected pachinko machine 10, updates the display of the game history, and visually confirms the shift to an advantageous game state. can be notified. The hall computer 263 grasps the state of the game based on various signals output from each pachinko machine 10, grasps the ball output rate of each pachinko machine 10, and determines whether or not there is fraudulent activity with respect to each pachinko machine 10. can

Next, with reference to FIG. 515, an example of the signal output mode of the external output terminal board 261 during the normal game will be described. FIG. 515 describes the signal output modes of CN4 and CN7 to CN9. As shown in FIG. 515, CN4 is set to the H output state for 1 second each time the fluctuation stop timing of the special symbols is reached until the jackpot is reached. The data display device 262 and hall computer 263 can count the number of variations of the special symbol by means of this output mode of CN4. During this period, CN7 to CN9 are maintained in the L output state. Then, as shown in FIG. 515, a special pattern lottery results in a big win, and after the timing of stopping the big win fluctuation based on the big win winning, CN4 is set to the H output state for 1 second, at the start timing of the big win game. Then, CN4 is set to the L output state, and CN7 and CN9 are set to the H output state. This H output state continues until the end timing of the jackpot. Based on these outputs of CN7 and CN9, the data display device 262 and hall computer 263 can determine that the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state.

Then, at the end timing of the jackpot (timing for setting the time-saving state of normal symbols after the jackpot), CN7 and CN9 are set to the L output state, and CN8 is set to the H output state. This state of H output of CN8 is maintained until it shifts to a jackpot state or shifts to a game state in which a normal state of normal symbols is set. That is, if the game state after the end of the big hit is the first probability variable state, the jackpot is won during the first probability variable state and the jackpot game is started, or the probability variable number of times has passed in the first probability variable state and the normal game The H output state is maintained until transition to state. In addition, if the game state after the end of the jackpot is the second time saving state, the jackpot is won during the second time saving state and the jackpot game is started, or the normal game is played after the number of time saving times has passed in the second time saving state. The H output state is maintained until transition to state. The data display device 262 and hall computer 263 can accurately grasp the so-called number of consecutive wins from the balance between the output mode of CN8 and the output modes of CN7 and CN9. That is, if CN7 and CN9 are switched to the H output state at the same time when CN8 is in the L output state, it is determined that the consecutive chance has occurred during the game state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, and the consecutive chance is determined. While 1 can be added to the number of times, if the states of CN7 and CN9 remain L output, it can be determined that the continuous game has ended. Therefore, the game history of the pachinko machine 10 can be determined accurately.

Furthermore, when the ceiling lottery count is reached during the normal game, CN8 is set to the H output state at the timing of transition to the third time saving state, and CN9 is set to the H output state for 0.2 seconds. . In other words, by outputting an H output signal of a length (significantly shorter than the opening period of the jackpot) that cannot be output in the case of transitioning to the jackpot state from CN9, the H output this time is triggered by the jackpot. It is possible to make the data display device 262 and the hall computer 263 grasp that the signal output is not the signal output. That is, the data display device 262 and the hall computer 263 can be made to grasp that the state has shifted to the time-saving state without going through the jackpot (the state has shifted to the third time-saving state due to reaching the ceiling lottery number of times).

Next, with reference to FIG. 516, an example of a signal output mode at power-on will be described. FIG. 516 is a diagram showing an example of a signal output mode when the power is turned on in the third time-saving state (time-saving state shifted based on reaching the ceiling lottery number of times). As shown in FIG. 516, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the security signal (CN11) is set to the H output state for 0.2 seconds to indicate the power on. Also, when the game state at the time of power-on is the third time saving state, the output of the jackpot 2 signal (CN8) for indicating the time saving state rises to H, indicating that it is the third time saving state. The jackpot 3 signal (CN9) for the win is set to the H output state for 0.2 seconds. By these signal output modes, it is accurately notified to the data display device 262 and the hall computer 263 that the game state at the time of power-on is a time-saving state (third time-saving state) shifted based on reaching the ceiling lottery number. can be notified to In other words, if the state at the time of power-on is a game state set to the time saving state of normal symbols, is it the time saving state (either the first variable state or the second time saving state) set after the jackpot game ends? , It is possible to distinguish and notify whether it is a time saving state (third time saving state) based on the number of ceiling lottery arrivals. Therefore, the hole computer 263 can more accurately determine whether or not there is a possibility that the game state has been changed due to fraudulent activity while the power is off, so fraudulent activity can be suppressed.

Next, details of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the sixteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 517(a). FIG. 517(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the sixteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 517(a), the ROM 202 in the 16th control example replaces the first hit random number 13 table 202la with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the 13th control example (see FIG. 443(a)). The point that the first hit random number 16 table 202pa is provided, the point that the fluctuation pattern selection 16 table 202pb is provided instead of the fluctuation pattern selection 5 table 202db, the jackpot type selection table instead of the jackpot type selection 13 table 202ld 202pd is provided, and a time saving per random number 16 table 202pe is provided instead of the time saving random number 13 table 202le. Moreover, it is different also in the point by which the time saving classification selection 13 table 202lf is deleted. Since other configurations are the same as those of the ROM 202 in the thirteenth control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 518(a), details of the first winning random number 16 table 202pa in the sixteenth control example will be described. FIG. 518(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first winning random number 16 table 202pa in the sixteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 518(a), in the first winning random number 16 table 202pa in the sixteenth control example, in addition to the random number value (counter value) determined as a big win, the random number value (counter value) determined as a small win value) are also specified. Specifically, common to the low-probability state and high-probability state of the special symbols, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is in the range of "20 to 44", and the lottery result of the small winning is defined in correspondence. ing. Of the 1000 counter values (random numbers) of "0 to 999" that can be taken by the first random number counter C1, the number of counter values (random numbers) determined as small hits is 25 of "20 to 44". Therefore, the probability of being determined as a small hit in the special symbol lottery is 1/40. This small win is a kind of winning lottery result, and as described above, it is a lottery result in which a special big win opening/closing operation (specific opening/closing operation) that is particularly difficult is set in the specific winning opening 65a. By providing the result of the small winning lottery that is particularly difficult for the special big winning, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how many times are left until the number of times of the ceiling lottery. That is, when a specific opening/closing operation is executed (a small bonus is won), a special jackpot is generated and the value of the special lottery counter 203la is reset (remaining number of times up to ceiling lottery number of times is reset to 500). It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the value of the special drawing lottery counter 203la is increased by 1 (the remaining number of times up to the ceiling lottery number of times is subtracted by 1) as a small hit, so the ceiling lottery number of times It is possible to add a game feature that allows the player to predict the remaining number of times. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. Note that the counter value (random value) determined as a big hit is the same as in the thirteenth control example described above, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

Next, with reference to FIG. 518(b), details of the variation pattern selection 16 table 202pb in the sixteenth control example will be described. FIG. 518(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection 16 table 202pb in the sixteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 518(b), the variation pattern selection 16 table 202pb in the sixteenth control example selects a variation pattern according to the special symbol lottery result when the special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state. Normal 16 table 202pb1 for doing, and when the special symbol lottery is executed in one of the first probability variable state, the second time saving state, and the third time saving state, the variation pattern according to the lottery result of the special symbol 16 tables 202pb2 for variable probability and short working hours for selecting at least.

Details of the normal 16-table 202pb1 will be described with reference to FIG. 518(c). FIG. 518(c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of this normal 16 table 202pb1. As shown in FIG. 518(c), in the normal 16 table 202pb1, various variation patterns are defined corresponding to the number of variations and the lottery results of the special symbols, and for each of the variation patterns, A range of values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated. Specifically, when the number of fluctuations (the value of the special lottery counter 203la) is 500 (that is, when the number of times of ceiling lottery is reached), regardless of the lottery result, the whole range that the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take (0 198) is associated with super reach fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds. Therefore, when the ceiling lottery frequency is reached, the variation time of 30 seconds is always set, so that the performance period for showing whether or not the ceiling lottery frequency has been reached can be surely secured.

In addition, in the number of fluctuations other than the number of ceiling lotteries, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 19", and the fluctuation time is 15 seconds as a fluctuation pattern. Normal (reach) is defined in correspondence, and super (reach) with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds as a fluctuation pattern is defined in association with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "20 to 169", fluctuation The value of the type counter CS1 is "170 to 198", and SP (reach) with a variation time of 55 seconds is defined as a variation pattern.

Also, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a special hit or a small hit (that is, a small bonus), the fluctuation time as a fluctuation pattern for the entire range (0 to 198) that the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take is defined in association with normal (reach) for 15 seconds. Therefore, when the small bonus is won, the variation time is always set to 15 seconds. As a result, a long variation time (30 seconds or 55 seconds) is set for a small bonus with a low degree of advantage, and it is possible to suppress the expectation of the transition to the bonus or the first probability variation state. Since the winning of the small bonus can be easily notified, it is possible to prevent the player from having excessive expectations.

In addition, if the lottery result of the special symbol (result of judgment) is off (shorter time), that is, if the result of the judgment is short-time winning, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 169" For the range, the variation pattern Super (reach) with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is defined in association with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "170 to 198", and SP (reach) with a fluctuation time of 55 seconds as a fluctuation pattern. are defined in association with each other. Therefore, when shifting to the advantageous second time-saving state, it is possible to set a relatively long variation time, so that when the variable display for a long variation time is executed, the player's big hit or the time-saving state is increased. Expectations for migration can be further improved.

In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol (response judgment result) is out, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 149", and the variation pattern is associated with a short deviation with a variation time of 5 seconds. , and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "150 to 189", and the variation pattern is defined to correspond to a variation time of 10 seconds, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is set to "190 to 196" is defined in association with normal reach off with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds as a fluctuation pattern, and super reach with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds as a fluctuation pattern for the value "197" of the fluctuation type counter CS1. The deviation is defined in association with the value "198" of the variation type counter CS1, and the SP reach deviation with a variation time of 55 seconds as a variation pattern is defined in association with the value "198". Therefore, when the lottery result is simply a loss, the selection rate of short loss or long loss with a short fluctuation time is extremely high. can be improved.

Although not shown, the 16 tables 202pb2 for variable probability and short working hours have a higher selection ratio of short and long out when the lottery result of the special symbol is lost than in the normal 16 tables 202pb1. is configured to As a result, the average variation time in the first probability variable state, the second time saving state and the third time saving state can be shortened, so that the game efficiency in the game state in which the advantageous normal pattern time saving state is set is improved. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the degree of advantage in the game state in which the time-saving state of normal symbols is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 519(a), details of the jackpot type selection 16 table 202pd described above will be described. This jackpot type selection 16 table 202pd is referred to to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, similar to the jackpot type selection 13 table 202ld (see FIG. 445) in the thirteenth control example. data table. As shown in FIG. 519 (a), in the jackpot type selection 16 table 202pd in the sixteenth control example, there are three types of jackpot types, jackpot A16, jackpot B16, and special jackpot, as the jackpot types of the first special symbol. stipulated. In addition, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, three jackpot types of jackpots C16 to E16 are defined.

As shown in FIG. 519 (a), as the specified contents for the first special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 79", "jackpot A16" is defined in correspondence. there is This "jackpot A16" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 4 and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the first probability variable state with a probability variable number of 80 times. That is, it is a jackpot type in which a counter value of 80 is set for both the short-time counter 203h and the variable probability counter 203i at the end of the jackpot. In the 16th control example, since the first variable probability state is configured as the most advantageous gaming state, the jackpot A16 is the most advantageous jackpot type among the jackpots of the first special symbols. Also, as for the number of rounds, it is the jackpot type with the largest number of rounds (advantageous in the prize sphere) among the jackpot types of the first special symbol, but the number of rounds is small compared to each jackpot of the second special symbol. It becomes a jackpot type (disadvantageous on the prize sphere). Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "jackpot A16" is "0 to 79 ', the ratio of determining (specifying) 'jackpot A16' as the jackpot type is 80% (80/100) when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbols.

Further, as shown in FIG. 519(a), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of "80 to 89" with "jackpot B16". This "jackpot B16" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is four and the game state after the jackpot is set to the second time-saving state with 100 times of time-saving times. That is, it is a jackpot type in which a counter value of 100 is set for the time-saving counter 203h at the end of the jackpot. In this 16th control example, the probability that the second time saving state will be a special symbol jackpot is lower than the first probability changing state (the jackpot probability of the first probability changing state is 1/50, while the second time saving state The jackpot probability is 1/200), so even if you take into account the fact that the number of times of time saving is 20 times more, the "jackpot B16" is less advantageous than the "jackpot A16" in terms of the game state after the jackpot ends ( Unfavorable) jackpot type. In addition, in terms of the number of rounds, it is the jackpot type with the largest number of rounds (advantageous in terms of prize balls) among the jackpot types of the first special pattern, along with "jackpot A16", but each jackpot of the second special pattern Compared to , it is a jackpot type with a small number of rounds (disadvantageous on the award surface). Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "jackpot B16" is "80 to 89 ', the ratio of determining (specifying) 'jackpot B16' as the jackpot type is 10% (10/100) when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbols.

Further, as shown in FIG. 519(a), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "90 to 99" in association with "special jackpot". This "special jackpot" has a jackpot type in which a specific opening/closing action common to the small win game (opening/closing action in which prize balls can hardly be obtained) is set as the opening/closing action of the specific winning hole 65a, and the game state after the jackpot ends. Is the jackpot type that is set to the normal state. Therefore, the "special jackpot" is configured as a jackpot type with the lowest degree of advantage for the player in terms of the number of rounds and the game state after the jackpot. In addition, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a game state other than the normal state (game state in which the time saving state of the normal pattern is set), the game state after the special jackpot is finished is set to the second time saving state. . This shifts to a game state in which a time-saving state of normal patterns is set in a state in which one or more reserved balls of the first special pattern exist, and then a special jackpot is obtained by lottery based on the reserved balls of the first special pattern. If the configuration is such that the state is shifted to the normal state in such a case, the player may be excessively disadvantaged. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "special jackpot" is "90 to 99 , the rate at which "special jackpot" is determined (specified) as the jackpot type is 10% (10/100) when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbols.

On the other hand, as the defined content for the second special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 49", and "jackpot C16" is defined in association. This "jackpot C16" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 10, and the game state after the jackpot is set to the first probability variable state with a probability variable number of 80 times, like the "jackpot A16". This "jackpot C16" has the largest number of rounds among all the jackpot types, and is set to the most advantageous first probability variable state even after the jackpot ends, so it is the most advantageous among all jackpots. It is an advantageous jackpot type. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "jackpot C16" is "0 to 49 ', the ratio of determining (specifying) the 'jackpot C16' as the jackpot type is 50% (50/100) when the second special symbol lottery results in a jackpot.

In addition, "jackpot D16" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "50 to 79". This "jackpot D16" has 6 rounds, and like the "jackpot A16" and "jackpot C16", the game state after the jackpot is set to the first probability variable state with a probability variable number of 80 times. is. This ``jackpot D16'' has the second largest number of rounds after the ``jackpot C16'', and the game state after the jackpot is set to the most advantageous first variable state, so that the jackpot is the second most advantageous after the ``jackpot C16''. It is a type. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "jackpot D16" is "50 to 79 , the ratio of determining (specifying) the "jackpot D16" as the jackpot type when the second special symbol lottery results in a jackpot is 30% (30/100).

In addition, "jackpot E16" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "80 to 99". This "jackpot E16" has six rounds, and is a jackpot type in which the game state after the jackpot is set to the second time-saving state with 100 times of time-savings, similar to the "jackpot B16". Like "jackpot D16," this "jackpot E16" is a jackpot type with the second largest number of rounds after "jackpot C16." It is a jackpot type with a low degree of advantage.

Next, with reference to FIG.519(b), the detail of random-number 16 table 202pe per time saving mentioned above is demonstrated. This time saving random number 16 table 202pe is similar to the time saving random number 13 table 202le (see FIG. 444 (c)) in the thirteenth control example described above. ) is defined in the data table. As shown in FIG. 519(b), in this 16th control example, the random number (the value of the first per random number counter C1) that is determined to be short-time winning in the first special symbol lottery is "998,999". Two random numbers (counter values) are associated and defined. Among the 1000 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 999" that can be taken by the first per random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be short-time winning is 2, so the 16th In the example of control, the probability of being determined as the time-saving winning when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed is 1/500 (2/1000). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 519(b), the second special symbol is not associated with a random number value (counter value) determined to be time saving election, so the second special symbol lottery is time saving. The possibility of winning is zero.

Next, details of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the sixteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 517(b). FIG. 517(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the sixteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 517(b), the RAM 203 in the 16th control example has a configuration of the RAM 203 in the 13th control example described above (see FIG. 443(b)). 203pb is added. Another difference is that the first ceiling standby flag 203lb and the second ceiling standby flag 203lc are deleted. Since other configurations are the same as those of the RAM 203 in the thirteenth control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Ceiling time saving flag 203pa is a flag for indicating whether or not the current gaming state is a time saving state (third time saving state) set based on reaching the ceiling lottery number of times. If this ceiling time saving flag 203pa is on, it means that it is in the third time saving state, and if it is off, it means that the current gaming state is not the third time saving state. This ceiling time saving flag 203pa is set to ON when the initial state is set to OFF, and the ceiling lottery number of times is reached and the third time saving state is set (see S38116A in FIG. 526). In addition, when the jackpot is won, and when the number of times of time saving (100 times) has passed without winning the jackpot during the third game state, it is set to OFF (see S8312A in FIG. 525). Since it is possible to easily identify whether it is the second time saving state or the third time saving state by the state of the ceiling time saving flag 203pa, in the second time saving state, the lottery probability corresponding to the high probability state of the normal pattern is normal While the lottery for the pattern can be executed, in the third time saving state, the lottery for the normal pattern can be executed with the lottery probability corresponding to the low probability state of the normal pattern. Therefore, it is possible to execute a lottery of appropriate normal symbols for each game state.

The out ball counter 203pb is a counter for counting the number of game balls (out balls) entering the out port 66 . The initial value of the out-ball counter 203pb is set to 0, and the value is updated by adding 1 each time an out-ball is detected (S142A in FIG. 529). Also, when the value of the out-ball counter 203pb is updated to 10 (10 out-balls are detected), the value is cleared to 0 (S144A in FIG. 529). Every time the value of the out-ball counter 203pb reaches 10, an out-ball detection signal (CN6) can be output from the external output terminal board 261. 10 can be accurately identified.

Next, with reference to FIG. 520(a), details of the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the sixteenth control example will be described. FIG. 520(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the sixteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 520 (a), the ROM 222 in the sixteenth control example is the configuration of the ROM 222 in the thirteenth control example described above (see FIG. 447 (a)), and the holding mode selection table 222pa and the time saving suggestion The difference is that the effect selection table 222pb is added. It is also different in that the ceiling reaching suggestion effect selection table 2221a and the ceiling reaching effect selection table 2221b are deleted.

First, with reference to FIG. 521, the details of the above-described holding mode selection table 222pa will be described. This holding mode selection table 222pa, when detecting a new start winning, according to the look-ahead results of various counter values obtained based on the start winning, the number of holding balls indicating the number of held balls increased by the start winning. It is a data table referred to in order to select the display mode of a design. FIG. 521 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the holding mode selection table 222pa. As shown in FIG. 521, this reservation mode selection table 222pa is, for each look-ahead result (variation type) based on various counter values (random numbers) acquired based on the new start winning, the display mode of the number of pending balls pattern The range of the determination value (the value of the effect counter 223f) determined by selecting each of the six types of display modes (see FIG. 510(a)) that can be set as , is defined in association with the range.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 521, the variation type (prefetch result) is defined for "SP reach hit", the value of the production counter 223f is "normal hold" for the range of "0 to 4" The display mode (default display mode) is defined in association with the value of the production counter 223f in the range of "5 to 19", and the display mode of "change 1" (both the expectation of the jackpot and the expectation of time reduction. A display mode that suggests that both are low) is defined in association with the value of the production counter 223f in the range of "20 to 44", and a display mode of "change 2" (medium expected jackpot, short time A display mode that suggests that the expectation is low) is defined in association, and the value of the production counter 223f is in the range of "45 to 84", and the display mode of "change 3" (high expectation of jackpot, time saving A display mode that suggests that the expectation is low) is defined in association, and the value of the production counter 223f is defined in the range of "85 to 89", and the display mode of "change 4" (low expectation of jackpot, time saving display mode suggesting that the degree of expectation is high) is associated and defined, and the value of the production counter 223f is defined in the range of "90 to 99", the display mode of "change 5" (transition to jackpot or time saving state display mode in which any one of is determined) is associated and defined. Since the production counter 223f can take 100 values of "0 to 99", the ratio of each display mode to be set when the look-ahead result is "SP reach hit" is 5% for "normal hold" and 5% for "change 1” is 15%, “change 2” is 25%, “change 3” is 40%, “change 4” is 5%, and “change 5” is 10%. In other words, when the start winning corresponding to "SP reach hit" is detected, the ratio of "change 2" and "change 3" to be selected is relatively high, while "normal hold" and "change 4" are selected. Relatively low selection rate.

Also, as shown in FIG. 521, the display mode of "normal hold" for the range of "0 to 9" for the value of the production counter 223f as the specified content for the "super reach hit" for the fluctuation type (prefetch result) is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223f in the range of "10 to 29", the display mode of "change 1" is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223f in the range of "30 to 59" The display mode of "change 2" is defined in association with the range, and the display mode of "change 3" is defined in association with the range of the value of the effect counter 223f from "60 to 89", When the value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "90 to 93", the display mode of "change 4" is defined in correspondence, and when the value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "94 to 99", the display mode of "change 5” is associated with and defined. Therefore, when the look-ahead result is "super reach hit", the percentage of each display mode set is 10% for "normal hold", 20% for "change 1", 30% for "change 2", and 30% for "change 3". " is 30%, "Change 4" is 4%, and "Change 5" is 6%. In other words, when the start winning corresponding to "super reach hit" is detected, the ratio of selecting "change 1", "change 2" and "change 3" is relatively high, while "change 4" is Relatively low selection rate. In addition, the selection rate of "Normal hold" and "Change 1" is higher than "SP reach hit".

In addition, as shown in FIG. 521, the display mode of "normal pending" is displayed for the range of "0 to 19" for the value of the production counter 223f as the specified content for the fluctuation type (prefetch result) "normal reach hit". The display mode of "change 1" is defined in association with the range of "20 to 44" in which the value of the effect counter 223f is defined, and the value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "45 to 79". , the display mode of "change 2" is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223f in the range of "80 to 96", the display mode of "change 3" is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223f, and the effect The display mode of "change 4" is defined in association with the value "97" of the counter 223f, and the display mode of "change 5" is defined for the range of the value of the effect counter 223f "98, 99". are defined in association with each other. Therefore, when the look-ahead result is "normal reach hit", the percentage of each display mode set is 20% for "normal hold", 25% for "change 1", 35% for "change 2", and "change 3". is 17%, "change 4" is 1%, and "change 5" is 2%. In other words, when the start winning corresponding to "normal reach hit" is detected, the selection ratio of "normal hold", "change 1", "change 2" compared to "sp reach hit" and "super reach hit" becomes higher, and the selection rate of "change 3", "change 4", and "change 5" becomes lower.

In addition, as shown in Figure 521, the variation type (look-ahead result) is the specified content for "SP reach time saving", the value of the production counter 223f is "0 to 4" for the range of "normal hold" display mode is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223f in the range of "5 to 19", the display mode of "change 1" is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223f in the range of "20 to 44" The display mode of "change 2" is defined in association with the range, and the display mode of "change 3" is defined in association with the range where the value of the effect counter 223f is "45 to 64", When the value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "65 to 89", the display mode of "change 4" is defined in correspondence, and when the value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "90 to 99", the display mode of "change 5” is associated with and defined. Therefore, when the look-ahead result is "SP reach time saving", the percentage of each display mode set is 5% for "normal hold", 15% for "change 1", 25% for "change 2", and "change 3 " is 20%, "change 4" is 25%, and "change 5" is 10%. That is, when the start winning corresponding to the "SP reach time saving" is detected, the selection ratio of "change 4" is significantly higher than when the starting winning corresponding to the hit variation is detected.

In addition, as shown in Figure 521, the variation type (prefetch result) is the specified content for "super reach time saving", the value of the production counter 223f is "0 to 9" for the range of "normal pending" display mode is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223f in the range of "10 to 29", the display mode of "change 1" is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223f in the range of "30 to 64" The display mode of "change 2" is defined in association with the range, and the display mode of "change 3" is defined in association with the range of the value of the effect counter 223f from "65 to 79", When the value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "80 to 93", the display mode of "change 4" is defined in correspondence, and when the value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "94 to 99", the display mode of "change 5” is associated with and defined. Therefore, when the look-ahead result is "super reach time saving", the percentage of each display mode set is "normal hold" 10%, "change 1" 20%, "change 2" 35%, "change 3 ' is 15%, 'change 4' is 14%, and 'change 5' is 6%. That is, even when the start winning corresponding to the "super reach time saving" is detected, the selection ratio of "variation 4" is higher than when the starting winning corresponding to the hit variation is detected.

In addition, as shown in Figure 521, the variation type (look-ahead result) is the specified content for "SP reach out", the value of the production counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 9", the display mode of "normal hold" is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223f in the range of "10 to 39", the display mode of "change 1" is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223f in the range of "40 to 79" The display mode of "change 2" is defined in association with the range, and the display mode of "change 3" is defined in association with the range of the value of the effect counter 223f from "80 to 98", The display mode of "change 4" is defined in association with the value "99" of the effect counter 223f. On the other hand, the value of the effect counter 223f is not associated with the display mode of "change 5". Therefore, when the look-ahead result is "SP reach out", the ratio of each display mode to be set is 10% for "normal hold", 30% for "change 1", 40% for "change 2", and "change 3 ' is 19%, 'change 4' is 1%, and 'change 5' is 0%. In other words, when the starting prize corresponding to "SP reach out" is detected, the selection ratio of "change 3" is lower than when the starting prize corresponding to SP reach hit or SP reach time reduction is detected, "Normal The rate of selection of "Hold" and "Change 1" increases. Also, "Change 5" is no longer selected. Therefore, when it develops to SP reach, if the display mode of the pending ball number pattern is "normal hold" or "change 1", the expectation of winning is relatively low, while at "change 3" In some cases, the odds of winning are relatively high. Moreover, if it is "variation 5", either a big hit or a time-saving design is decided.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 521, the display mode of "normal hold" for the range of "0 to 19" for the value of the production counter 223f as the specified content for the fluctuation type (prefetch result) "out of super reach" is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223f in the range of "20 to 74", the display mode of "change 1" is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223f in the range of "75 to 98" The display mode of "variation 2" is defined in association with the range, and the display mode of "variation 3" is defined in association with the value "99" of the effect counter 223f. On the other hand, the value of the effect counter 223f is not associated with the display modes of "change 4" and "change 5". Therefore, when the look-ahead result is "out of super reach", the percentage of each display mode set is 20% for "normal hold", 55% for "change 1", 24% for "change 2", and 24% for "change 3". ' is 1%, and 'Change 4' and 'Change 5' are 0%. In other words, when the starting prize corresponding to "super reach out" is detected, the selection ratio of "change 3" is lower than when the starting prize corresponding to the super reach hit or the super reach time reduction is detected, and the "normal The rate of selection of "Hold" and "Change 1" increases. Also, "variation 4" and "variation 5" are no longer selected. Therefore, when it develops to super reach, if the display mode of the pending ball number pattern is "normal hold" or "change 1", the expectation that it will be a win is relatively low, while at "change 3" In some cases, the odds of winning are relatively high. Moreover, if it is "variation 5", either a big hit or a time-saving design is decided.

Further, as shown in FIG. 521, the fluctuation type (prefetch result) is defined as "normal reach out" and "normal reach small hit". The display mode of "hold" is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223f in the range of "50 to 94", the display mode of "change 1" is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223f of " The display mode of "change 2" is defined in association with the range of "95 to 99". On the other hand, the display modes of "Change 3", "Change 4", and "Change 5" are not associated with the value of the effect counter 223f. Therefore, when the look-ahead results are "normal reach off" and "normal reach small hit", the ratio of each display mode is set to 50% for "normal hold", 45% for "change 1", and 5 for "change 2". %, "Change 3", "Change 4", and "Change 5" are 0%. In other words, when detecting a starting prize corresponding to "normal reach out" and "normal reach small hit", "normal hold" or "change 1 ” is higher. In addition, "variation 3", "variation 4", and "variation 5" are not selected. Therefore, when the winning of a small bonus is announced as one of "change 3" to "change 5", it is determined that the small bonus was a special jackpot.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 521, as the specified content for "super reach out" due to the number of times the ceiling lottery is reached, the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 39". The display mode of "Normal Suspension" is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223f in the range of "40 to 49", the display mode of "Change 1" is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223f. The display mode of "change 2" is defined in association with the range of "50 to 53", and the display mode of "change 3" is defined in association with the value of the effect counter 223f of "54". , and the value of the production counter 223f is in the range of "55 to 84", the display mode of "change 4" is defined in correspondence, and the value of the production counter 223f is in the range of "85 to 99", The display mode of "change 5" is associated and defined. If the lottery result of the special pattern of the ceiling lottery number is out (moves to the 3rd time saving state), it becomes a hit (does not move to the 3rd time saving state) (i.e., variation type per super reach ), the selection rate of "normal hold", "change 4", and "change 5" is significantly higher. For this reason, for the player who expects to shift to the third time saving state, the display mode of the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the special pattern lottery of the number of times of the ceiling lottery is "normal hold", "change 4", and "change 5".

In this way, in the 16th control example, by determining the display mode of the reserved ball number pattern according to the look-ahead result based on the start winning, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for big wins and the degree of reduction in working hours to the player. Therefore, the game can be played by paying attention to the display mode of the reserved ball number pattern. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 522, details of the time saving suggestion effect selection table 222pb described above will be described. This time-saving suggestive effect selection table 222pb is a data table that defines the execution ratio of the suggestive effect (see FIGS. 439(a) and (b)) that suggests shifting to the time-saving state for each of various conditions. As shown in FIG. 522, under the situation where the value of the special lottery number counter 223lc is 496 to 500, regardless of the winning situation of the small bonus, the production counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 59". Suggestion mode of time saving suggestion (strong)" is defined in correspondence, and suggestion mode of "time saving suggestion (weak)" is defined in correspondence with the range of effect counter 223f of "60 to 89". On the other hand, the range of "90 to 99" of the effect counter 223f is not associated with any suggestion mode. Therefore, in each variable display effect of the number of ceiling lotteries from 4 times before reaching the number of ceiling lotteries, "time saving suggestion (strong)" (see FIG. 429 (b)) occurs at a rate of 60%, and 30% "Time saving suggestion (weak)" (see FIG. 429(a)) occurs at a rate of .

Also, if the value of the special drawing lottery counter 223lc is a value other than 496 to 500 (the number of fluctuations until reaching the ceiling lottery number is 5 times or more), the number of lotteries after the previous bonus, and The selection ratio of the suggested mode varies according to the number of times of lottery after the end of the small bonus whose timing is the oldest among the 500 most recent lotteries of special symbols. Specifically, either the number of lotteries after the previous bonus or the number of lotteries after the end of the small bonus, which is the oldest among the last 500 special symbol lotteries, is between 496 and 500. If it is within the range (that is, under the situation where the number of fluctuations until reaching the ceiling lottery number from the player's point of view may be within 4 times), the special symbol lottery result "probable variable hit" or "time saving For "hit", the value of the production counter 223f is defined to correspond to "0 to 4" with the suggestion mode of "suggestion of time saving (weak)", and the suggestion mode is not associated with "5 to 99". . In other words, in the case of winning a bonus, a “time saving suggestion (weak)” occurs at a rate of 5%.

In addition, the value of the production counter 223f is defined in association with the value of the production counter 223f to be ``0 to 49'' and ``suggestion of time reduction (strong)'' for the lottery result of the special symbol, ``suggestion of time reduction (strong)'', and ``suggestion of time reduction (strong)'' to ``50 to 74''. (weak)” is defined in association with “75 to 99”, and no suggestive mode is associated with “75 to 99”. In other words, in the case of winning the short working hours, the "suggestion of short working hours (strong)" occurs at a rate of 50%, and the "suggestive short working hours (weak)" occurs at a rate of 25%. In addition, for lottery results other than these (small bonus or loss), the value of the production counter 223f is defined by corresponding to "0 to 4" and "suggestion of time saving (strong)", and to "5 to 49". "Working time reduction suggestion (weak)" is defined in association with "50 to 99", and no suggestion mode is associated with it. That is, in the case of a small bonus or a loss, "suggestion of time reduction (strong)" occurs at a rate of 5%, and "suggestion of time reduction (weak)" occurs at a rate of 45%.

On the other hand, both the number of lotteries after the last bonus and the number of lotteries after the end of the small bonus, which is the oldest among the last 500 special symbol lotteries, are within the range of 496 to 500. In the case where it is not (that is, there is no possibility that the number of fluctuations until the ceiling lottery number is reached from the player's point of view is within 4 times), the special pattern lottery result "probable variable hit" or "short time hit" On the other hand, when the value of the effect counter 223f is "0 to 4", the suggestion mode of "suggestion of time saving (weak)" is defined in correspondence, and "5 to 99" is not associated with the suggestion mode. In other words, in the case of winning a bonus, a “time saving suggestion (weak)” occurs at a rate of 5%.

In addition, the value of the production counter 223f is defined in association with "0 to 24" and "suggestion of time reduction (strong)" for the lottery result of the special symbol "suggestion of time reduction", and "25 to 49" is defined as "suggestion of time reduction". (weak)” is defined in association with “50 to 99”, and no suggestive mode is associated with “50 to 99”. In other words, in the case of winning the short working hours, the "suggestion of short working hours (strong)" occurs at a rate of 25%, and the "suggestive short working hours (weak)" occurs at a rate of 25%. In addition, for lottery results other than these (small bonus or loss), the value "0" of the production counter 223f is defined in association with "time saving suggestion (strong)", and "1 to 4" is defined as "time saving suggestion (weak)” is defined in association with “5 to 99”, and no suggestive mode is associated with “5 to 99”. In other words, in the case of a small bonus or a loss, "time saving suggestion (strong)" occurs at a rate of 1%, and "time saving suggestion (weak)" occurs at a rate of 4%.

As described above, in the 16th control example, even if the number of remaining times until the ceiling lottery number is 5 or more, there is a possibility that the number of times remaining until the ceiling lottery number is 4 or less from the player's point of view. The ratio of selection of suggestion mode at the time of miss and small bonus is greatly different between under the situation and under the situation where there is no possibility of less than 4 times. That is, in a situation where there is a possibility that the number of times remaining until the ceiling lottery number is four or less from the player's point of view, the suggestive mode is likely to occur. By constructing in this manner, even if there are five or more remaining times until the ceiling lottery number is actually reached, the player can have a sense of expectation for reaching the ceiling lottery number, so that the player's interest in the game is improved. Interest can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 520(b), the details of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixteenth control example will be described. FIG. 520(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in the sixteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 520(b), the RAM 223 in the 16th control example has a bonus-to-bonus counter 223pa and a bonus history storage, which is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the 13th control example (see FIG. 447(b)). The difference is that an area 223pb, a look-ahead suppression flag 223pc, a normal pattern fluctuation time timer 223pd, and an interlocking effect flag 223pe are added.

The between-bonus counter 223pa is a counter that counts the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the bonus (either the big win or the small win) ends. This counter between bonuses 223pa is updated by adding 1 each time the value of the special drawing lottery counter 203la is notified from the main controller 110 (see S9015A in FIG. 537), and winning a big hit or a small hit. is cleared to 0 (see S4724A in FIG. 539 and S4753A in FIG. 540). In synchronization with the between-bonus counter 223pa, the display number of times of lottery between bonuses in the normal state is updated. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the number of remaining times up to the number of ceiling lotteries, so that the playability of predicting the remaining number of times up to the number of ceiling lotteries can be added. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

The bonus history storage area 223pb is a storage area for storing information indicating the winning history of bonuses (regular bonuses and small bonuses) within the range of special symbol lotteries within the last 500 times. This bonus history storage area 223pb stores the information of the winning bonus each time a big win or small win (bonus) is won (see S4726A and S4727A in FIG. 539 and S4754A in FIG. 540). In addition, every time it is notified by a command that the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la has been updated on the main controller 110 side, the data is updated according to the updated counter value (see S9015A in FIG. 537). In the normal state, the number of lotteries after the end of the normal bonus or the small bonus can be determined from the data in the bonus history storage area 223pb, and the number of lotteries (normal In the situation where the special jackpot is won once or more after the bonus, the number of lotteries just before the 500th lottery after the normal bonus and the number of lotteries just before the 500th lottery after the small bonus) can be executed to suggest the possibility of the number of ceiling lotteries just around the corner. . Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

The look-ahead suppression flag 223pc is a flag indicating whether or not to suppress execution of a look-ahead effect such as a pending change effect when the start winning of the first special symbol is detected. If the look-ahead suppression flag 223pc is on, it means that the look-ahead effect should be prohibited, and if it is off, it means that the look-ahead effect is allowed. This look-ahead suppression flag 223pc is set to ON when it is determined that the ceiling lottery number of times is reached by look-ahead (the transition to the third time saving state is confirmed) (see S4428A in FIG. 538), and when the jackpot is won, And it is set to off at the end of the third time saving state (see S9013A in FIG. 537). By prohibiting the look-ahead performance of the first special pattern when the shift to the third time-saving state is confirmed, the lottery of the first special pattern is dared to be executed without hitting to the right after shifting to the third time-saving state. It is possible to make it impossible for the player to obtain the material for determining whether it is better to start the lottery for the second special symbol without executing the lottery for the first special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a large difference in the degree of advantage due to the game method between a player with deep knowledge and a player with little knowledge.

The normal pattern fluctuation time timer 223pd is a timer for counting the fluctuation time in the normal pattern fluctuation display executed in the main control device 110 . This normal pattern fluctuation time timer 223pd, when the normal pattern lottery is executed in the main control device 110 and the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determined according to the lottery result is notified by the normal pattern fluctuation pattern command, the notification A timer value indicating the fluctuation time corresponding to the normal figure fluctuation pattern is set (see S4252A in FIG. 541). During the execution of the ceiling lottery number of times (500th) variable display, the effect mode of the variable display effect being executed is varied (written replacement) is determined. That is, with reference to the value of the general pattern fluctuation time timer 223pd at a specific timing during fluctuation (for example, 5 seconds before the special symbol fluctuation time passes), a relatively long period even after the special pattern fluctuation ends (for example , 5 seconds or more) When it is determined that the variable display of normal symbols is continued, the timing of informing the transition to the third time saving state is delayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from hitting the right hand during the variable display of the normal symbols in which the normal electric accessory 640a cannot be released, and wastefully consuming game balls. can.

The interlocking production flag 223pe is a flag indicating whether or not the data display device interlocking production is set. If this interlocking effect flag 223pe is on, it means that the data display device interlocking effect (jackpot notification, time saving effect) is set, and if it is off, the data display device interlocking effect is set. indicates that it is not Every time a variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 and a variation display mode is determined according to the variation pattern command, the state of the interlocking effect flag 223pe is updated according to the determined variation display mode. (See S34520A in FIG. 542). That is, when the variable display mode linked to the data display device is determined, it is set to ON, and when it is not determined, it is set to OFF.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the sixteenth control example>
Next, various control processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the sixteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 523 to 533. FIG. Specifically, in the 16th control example, the contents of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 523) and the start-up processing (see FIG. 532) are changed from the 13th control example (first control example). differ. Since other configurations are the same as those of the thirteenth control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 523, timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the sixteenth control example will be described. FIG. 523 is a flow chart showing the contents of this timer interrupt processing. In the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 523) in this 16th control example, special symbol variation processing 13 (see FIG. 451 ) is changed to the special symbol variation process 16 (see FIG. 524), and the point that the outer end output setting process (S112A) is executed after the through gate passage process (S107) ends. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. etc.), it is a process for controlling the output of the signal to be externally output from the external output terminal board 261 . Other processing is the same as the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 156) in the thirteenth control example (and the first control example), so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 524, the special symbol variation process 16 (S111A), which is one process in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 523) in the sixteenth control example, will be described. FIG. 524 is a flow chart showing the contents of this special symbol variation process 16 (S111A). Of the special symbol variation processing 16, S201 to S207, S210 to S218, S220, and S30219, respectively, of the special symbol variation processing 13 (see FIG. 450) in the thirteenth control example, S201 to S207, S210 to The same processing as each processing of S218, S220, and S30219 is executed.

In addition, in the special symbol variation process 16 (S111A) in the sixteenth control example, when the process of S207 or S213 ends, the special symbol determination logic 13 in the thirteenth control example (see S30251 in FIG. 450) and the special symbol variation pattern Instead of the selection process 13 (see S30252 in FIG. 450), a special symbol determination process 16 (S231A) and a special symbol variation pattern selection process 16 (S232A) are executed. Although not shown, the special symbol determination process 16 (S231A) in the 16th control example is different from the special symbol determination process 13 (see FIG. 451) in the 13th control example described above, and the ceiling determination process 13 (S38051 ) is deleted. In the sixteenth control example, ceiling determination processing 16 corresponding to ceiling determination processing 13 (S38051) in the thirteenth control example is configured to be executed in update processing 16 (S233A), which will be described later. Also, although not shown, the special symbol variation pattern selection process 16 (S232A) in the 16th control example is different from the special symbol variation pattern selection process 13 (see FIG. 454) in the 13th control example described above. The difference is that the various data tables referred to in the process are replaced with the data tables for the 16th control example. That is, the difference is that the jackpot type selection 16 table 202pd is referred to instead of the jackpot type selection 13 table 202ld, and the variation pattern selection 16 table 202pb is referred to instead of the variation pattern selection 13 table 202lb. Also, in the sixteenth control example, there is only one type of time saving type (time saving pattern of 100 times of time saving times), so that each process of S8209 and S38253 is deleted.

In addition, in the special symbol variation process 16 (S111A) in the present 16th control example, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery result of this time is not a big hit in the process of S217 (S217: No), in the 13th control example Instead of update process 5 (see S253 in FIG. 450) and time saving setting process 13 (see S30254 in FIG. 450), update process 16 (S233A) and time saving setting process 16 (S234A) are executed, and the process goes to S220 and migrate. The details of this update process 16 (S233A) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 525 and 526. FIG. Further, the details of the time saving setting process 16 (S234A) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In addition, in the special symbol variation process 16 (S111A) of this control example, after executing the process of S220, the symbol stop signal is output from CN4 of the external output terminal board 261 for one second (the output of CN4 is H output for one second). ) (S235A), and the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 525, the update process 16 (S233A), which is one process in the special symbol variation process 16 (see FIG. 524) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the sixteenth control example, will be described. do. FIG. 525 is a flow chart showing the contents of this update process 16 (S233A).

Of this update process 16 (S233A), each process of S8301 to S8307 is the same as each process of S8301 to S8307 of update process 5 (see FIG. 256) in the thirteenth control example (and fifth control example). is executed. Further, in the update process 16 (S233A) in the sixteenth control example, after executing the process of S8306, it is determined whether the ceiling time reduction flag 203pa is on (S8311A), and the ceiling time reduction flag 203pa is on. When it is determined (S8311A: Yes), the ceiling time saving flag 203pa is set to off (S8312A), and then the jackpot 3 signal (CN9) is set to be output for 0.2 seconds (S8313A), processing to S8307. On the other hand, in the process of S8311A, if it is determined that the ceiling time saving flag 203pa is not on (that is, it is off) (S8311A: No), the processes of S8312A and S8313A are skipped, and the process proceeds directly to S8307 and migrate.

Also, in update processing 16 (see FIG. 525) in the sixteenth control example, ceiling determination processing 16 is executed (S8314A) after the processing of S8307 ends, and this processing ends. This ceiling determination process 16 (S8314A), like the ceiling determination process 13 (see FIG. 452) in the above-described thirteenth control example, updates the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la, the counter value corresponding to the number of ceiling lottery It is a process for setting the third time saving state when reaching (lottery number of times). This ceiling determination process 16 (S8314A) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 526 is a flow chart showing the contents of this ceiling determination process 16 (S8314A).

In the processes of S38101 to S38105 of the ceiling determination process 16 (S8314A), the same processes as the processes of S38101 to S38105 of the ceiling determination process 13 (see FIG. 452) in the thirteenth control example are executed. Further, in the ceiling determination process 16 (S8314A) in the sixteenth control example, in the process of S38104, when it is determined that the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la is 500 (S38104: Yes), 100 to the time saving counter 203h Set (S38111A), set the data indicating the third time saving state in the gaming state storage area 203g (S38112A), clear the information about the time saving lottery this time (S38113A), information indicating the third time saving state and the number of time saving times Set the state command including the information shown (S38114A), and clear the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la (S38115A). After the processing of S38115A, turn on the ceiling time saving flag 203pa (S38116A), set to output the jackpot 3 signal (CN9) for 0.2 seconds (S38117A), and end this processing.

That is, in the thirteenth control example described above, it is determined whether or not the ceiling lottery number of times has been reached at the time of fluctuation start, and when the ceiling lottery number of times is reached, the third time saving state is set at the time of fluctuation stop. However, in this 16th control example, the ceiling determination process 16 (see FIG. 526) is executed when the fluctuation stops, and the determination of whether or not the ceiling lottery number of times has been reached, and the setting of the third time saving state are summarized. It is configured to carry out By configuring in this way, control processing can be simplified.

Next, with reference to FIG. 527, the time saving setting process 16 (S234A), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 16 (FIG. 524) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the sixteenth control example, will be described. FIG. 527 is a flow chart showing the contents of this time saving setting process 16 (S234A).

Among the time saving setting process 16 (S234A), in each process of S8351 to S8354, the same process as each process of S8351 to S8354 of the time saving setting process 13 (see FIG. 455) in the thirteenth control example is executed. Moreover, in the time saving setting process 16 (S234A) in the sixteenth control example, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203h is 100 (S8361A). In the processing of S8361A, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 100 (S8361A: Yes), the ceiling determination processing 16 (see FIG. 526) executed before the time saving setting processing 16 (see FIG. 527) Since it means that the third time saving state has been set based on reaching the number of ceiling lottery times, this processing is finished as it is in order to avoid setting the time saving state redundantly by the time saving winning. On the other hand, in the process of S8361A, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not 100 (S8361A: No), the process proceeds to S8351.

Next, referring to FIG. 528(a), outer end output setting processing (S112A) which is one processing of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 523) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the sixteenth control example. explain. FIG. 528(a) is a flow chart showing the contents of this outer edge output setting process (S112A). In this outer end output setting process (S112A), first, it is determined whether or not various abnormalities have occurred in the pachinko machine 10, and an abnormality (error) is indicated from the external output terminal board 261 when an abnormality has occurred. Error signal processing for outputting the signal to the outside is executed (S121A), then the number of out-balls detected is monitored, and an out-ball detection signal is output from the external output terminal plate 261 for each specific number of out-balls. Detection signal processing is executed (S122A). When the out-ball detection signal processing (S122A) is completed, next, the start winning to the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 is monitored, and when the start winning is detected, the start entrance signal is sent to the external output terminal. Start port signal processing for external output from plate 261 is executed (S123A), then the open/close state of inner frame 12 and front frame 14 is monitored, and a signal indicating the open/close state is output from external output terminal plate 261. An open signal process for opening the door is executed (S124A), and the process ends. A detailed description of each process will be given later with reference to FIGS. 528(b) and 529 to 531. FIG.

Next, referring to FIG. 528(b), error signal processing (S121A), which is one of the outer end output setting processing (see FIG. 528), will be described. FIG. 528 is a flowchart showing error signal processing (S121A). In this error signal processing (S121A), first, it is determined whether or not various errors (magnetic anomaly, radio anomaly, switch anomaly, abnormal winning, etc.) are detected (S131A). Yes), then the output of the security signal (CN11) is started (S132A), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S131A, when various errors are not detected (S131A: No), this process is terminated as it is. When various errors are detected, the security signal continues to be output indefinitely, so that the hall computer 263 can continue to report the occurrence of the error. Therefore, the occurrence of various errors can be reliably recognized by hall staff and the like, so that various errors can be eliminated quickly.

Next, with reference to FIG. 529, the out-ball detection signal process (S122A), which is one process of the outer edge output setting process (see FIG. 528), will be described. FIG. 529 is a flow chart showing out ball detection signal processing (S122A). This out ball detection signal processing (S122A) is a process for monitoring the number of out balls detected and setting the output of the out ball detection signal (CN2) each time a specific number of out balls are detected.

In the out-ball detection signal processing (S122A), first, it is determined whether or not there is a game ball (out-ball) entering the out port 66 (S141A). : Yes), 1 is added to the value of the out ball counter 203pb (S142A). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the out-ball counter 203pb after addition is 10 (S143A), and if it is determined to be 10 (S143A: Yes), the value of the out-ball counter 203pb is set to 0. Thus, the out-ball counter 203pb is initialized (S144A), and it is determined whether or not the out-ball detection signal (CN6) is in the H output state (S145A).

In the processing of S145A, if it is determined that the out-ball detection signal (CN6) is in the H output state (S145A: Yes), the H output period of the out-ball detection signal (CN6) currently being output ends, and a predetermined After the period (0.2 seconds) has passed, processing for setting the output of the out-ball detection signal corresponding to the tenth out-ball detected this time is performed. Specifically, the remaining period until the out-ball detection signal (CN6), which is currently set to the H output state, changes to the L output state is obtained (S147A). Then, based on the obtained remaining period, a delay time is set for the out-ball detection signal to be output corresponding to the tenth out-ball detected this time (S148A), and this process is finished. For example, if it is determined that the remaining period until the out-ball detection signal (CN6) during H output becomes L output state is 0.1 second, then the out-ball detection signal (CN6) is set to H output state. A delay time of 0.3 seconds (0.1 second remaining period of H output state + 0.2 second of L output period) is set as the delay time until . By setting the L period of 0.2 seconds in this way, even if out balls are continuously detected in a short period of time, a predetermined number of times the out ball detection signal (CN2) is set to the H output state is determined. A device (hall computer 263, etc.) can accurately grasp this.

On the other hand, in the processing of S145A, if it is determined that the out-ball detection signal (CN6) is not in the H output state (that is, it is in the L output state) (S145A: No), the out-ball detection signal (CN6) is set to 0. (S146A), and the process is terminated. Even if the out-ball detection signal (CN6) is in the L output state (S145A: No), if it is within 0.2 seconds after it was set to the L output state, the L output state will be changed to 0. (2) After continuing for 2 seconds, the H output state is set. In this way, by ensuring an L period of at least 0.2 seconds between each H output period, even if an out ball is continuously detected in a short period of time, the out ball detection signal (CN6) will not cause an H output. A predetermined device electrically connected to the pachinko machine 10 such as the hall computer 263 can accurately grasp the number of times set in the state.

If an out ball is not detected in the process of S141A (S141A: No), and if the value of the out ball counter 203pb is less than 10 in the process of S143A (S143A: No), the process proceeds to S149A. to move to. In the process of S149A, it is determined whether or not there is a detection result that delays the setting of the H output state (S149A).

Then, if it is determined that there is no detection result that delays the setting of the H output (S149A: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a detection result that delays the setting of the H output (S149A: Yes), it is determined whether or not the set delay period has passed (S150A). If it is determined that it is not (S150A: No), this process is terminated. In the process of S150A, if it is determined that the delay period has passed (S150A: Yes), the out ball detection signal (CN6) is set to the H output state (S151A), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 530, the start opening signal processing (S123A), which is one of the outer end output signal processing (see FIG. 528(a)), will be described. FIG. 530 is a flow chart showing the starting port signal processing (S123A). This starting hole signal processing (S123A) monitors starting winnings to each starting hole (first ball hole 64, second ball hole 640), and generates a starting hole signal (CN5) each time a starting winning is detected. This is a process for setting the output of .

In the starting hole signal processing (S123A), first, it is determined whether or not winning (starting winning) to the first ball hole 64 or the second ball hole 640 is detected (S161A). Specifically, the detection information of various switches stored in the switch reading process (S101) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 523) is read out, and the winning to the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 is performed. It is determined whether detection information indicating is stored.

In the processing of S161A, if it is determined that the winning to the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 is detected (S161A: Yes), then the state of the starting gate signal (CN5) is the state of H output. (S162A), and if it is determined that it is in the H output state (S162A: Yes), the H output period of the starting signal (CN5) currently being output ends, and the predetermined period ( After 0.2 second) has passed, a process for setting the output of the start signal corresponding to the start winning detected this time is performed. Specifically, the remaining period until the start signal (CN5), which is currently set to the H output state, changes to the L output state is acquired (S164A). Then, based on the acquired remaining period, a delay time is set for the starting opening signal to be output in response to the starting winning detected this time (S165A), and this process is finished. For example, if it is determined that the remaining period until the start signal (CN5) during H output becomes L output state is 0.1 second, then the start start signal (CN5) is set to H output state. 0.3 seconds (remaining period of H output state: 0.1 seconds + L output period of 0.2 seconds) is set as a delay time to. By setting the L period of 0.2 seconds in this way, even if the starting winnings are continuously detected in a short period of time, the number of times the starting opening signal (CN5) is set to the H output state is counted by the hall computer. 263 or the like, which are electrically connected to the pachinko machine 10, can be accurately grasped.

On the other hand, in the process of S162A, if it is determined that the starter signal (CN5) is not in the H output state (that is, it is in the L output state) (S162A: No), the starter signal (CN5) is 0.2. The setting is made so that the H output state is set for a second (S163A), and this processing ends. Even if the start signal (CN5) is in the L output state (S162A: No), if it is within 0.2 seconds after setting to the L output state, the L output state is changed to 0.2 sec. After continuing for 2 seconds, the H output state is set. In this way, by securing an L period of at least 0.2 seconds between each H output period, even if the start winning is continuously detected in a short period of time, the start signal (CN5) is in the H output state. The external device can accurately grasp the set number of times.

In the process of S161A, if the start winning is not detected (S161A: No), it is determined whether or not there is a detection result that delays the setting of the H output state (S166A). If it is determined that there is no detection result that delays the setting of the H output (S166A: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a detection result that delays the setting of the H output (S166A: Yes), it is determined whether or not the set delay period has passed (S167A). If it is determined that it is not (S167A: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S167A that the delay period has passed (S167A: Yes), the starting port signal (CN5) is set to the H output state (S168A), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 531, the open signal processing (S124A), which is one of the outer end output signal processing (see FIG. 528(a)), will be described. FIG. 531 is a flowchart showing open signal processing (S124A). As described above, this open signal processing (S124A) is processing for setting the output of the inner frame open signal (CN2) indicating the open/closed state of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 and the door open signal (CN3). .

In this open signal processing (S124A), first, it is determined whether or not the inner frame 12 is opened (S171A). ) is set to the H output state (S172A), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S171A, if it is not detected that the inner frame 12 is opened (S171A: No), then it is determined whether or not it is detected that the inner frame 12 is closed (S173A). If it is determined that the inner frame 12 is closed (S173A: Yes), the inner frame open signal (CN2), which has been set to the H output state, is set to the L output state (S174A), and this processing ends. do.

In the processing of S173A, if it is not detected that the inner frame 12 is closed (S173A: No), then it is determined whether or not it is detected that the front frame 14 is opened (S175A). As a result of the process of S175A, when it is determined that the front frame 14 has been opened (S175A: Yes), the door open signal (CN3) is set to the H output state (S176A), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is not detected that the front frame 14 is opened (S175A: No), then it is determined whether or not it is detected that the front frame 14 is closed (S177A), and it is determined that it is closed. If so (S177A: Yes), the door open signal (CN3), which has been set to H output state, is set to L output state (S178A), and this process ends. Moreover, in the process of S177A, when it is not detected that the front frame 14 was closed (S177A:No), this process is complete|finished as it is.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixteenth control example, the outer end output signal processing (see FIG. 528(a)) is executed every 2 ms, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 523), Information corresponding to the game status of the pachinko machine 10 is output from the external output terminal plate 261 to a predetermined device such as a hall computer 263 or the like. A predetermined device such as the hall computer 263 can grasp the game status of the pachinko machine 10 in real time based on the information output from the external output terminal version 261 . As a result, it is possible to accurately manage the payout rate of each pachinko machine 10, the operation status, the presence or absence of anomalies, fraud, and the like.

Next, referring to FIG. 532, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 532 is a flow chart showing the contents of this start-up process.

Among the start-up processes, S1701-S1714, S31701 and S31702 are the same processes as S1701-S1714, S31701 and S31702 of the start-up process (see FIG. 457) in the thirteenth control example. be done. Further, in the start-up process of this control example, after executing the process of S1709, various data indicating the state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of power-on (at the time of start-up) are output from the external output terminal board 261 to a predetermined device. A start-up signal output process is executed (S1721A), and the process proceeds to S31701. Details of the start-up signal output processing (S1721A) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 533 is a flowchart showing signal output processing at startup (S1721A).

In the start-up signal output processing (S1721A), first, the security signal (CN11) is set to be output for 0.2 seconds (S1731A), and then it is determined whether or not the jackpot middle flag 203k is on. (S1732A). In the processing of S1732A, if it is determined that the jackpot middle flag 203k is on (S1732A: Yes), it means that the jackpot game is currently being executed, so the jackpot 1 signal (CN7), the jackpot 3 signal ( CN9) is started to notify the predetermined device that the jackpot game is being executed (S1733A), and the process proceeds to S1734A. On the other hand, in the process of S1732A, when it is determined that the jackpot flag 203k is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S1732A: No), it means that the jackpot game is not being executed (normal game is being played). Therefore, the process of S1733A is skipped and the process proceeds to S1734A.

In the process of S1734A, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203i is 1 or more (S1734A), and if it is determined to be 1 or more (S1734A: Yes), the process proceeds to S1736A. On the other hand, in the process of S1734A, if it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203i is not 1 or more (that is, 0) (S1734A: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 or more. However (S1735A), if it is determined that the value is not equal to or greater than 1 (that is, it is 0) (S1735A: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1735A, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 or more (S1735A: Yes), the process proceeds to S1736A. One of the value of the variable probability counter 203i and the time saving counter 203h is 1 or more (that is, it is a game state set to the time saving state of the normal symbol) In the processing of S1736A executed when it is determined, 2 signal (CN8) is started to be output (S1736A). When the process of S1736A ends, then it is determined whether the ceiling time reduction flag 203pa is on (S1737A), and the ceiling time reduction flag 203pa is on (that is, the current is set based on the ceiling lottery number of times reached 3rd time saving state) (S1737A: Yes), set so as to output the jackpot 3 signal (CN9) for 0.2 seconds (S1738A), and terminate this process. On the other hand, in the process of S1737A, when it is determined that the ceiling time saving flag 203pa is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S1737A: No), the process of S1738A is skipped and this process ends. By configuring to output the jackpot 3 signal (CN9) for 0.2 seconds only when it is in the third time-saving state in the processing of S1738A, the game state at the time of turning on the power (at the time of start-up) is set after the jackpot ends. It is possible to make a prescribed device easily grasp whether it is the time saving state of the normal pattern or the time saving state of the normal pattern set based on the reaching of the number of ceiling lottery times.

<Regarding control processing executed by the sound ramp control device in the sixteenth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 534 to 542, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 in the sixteenth control example will be described. In this 16th control example, the content of the main process is changed from the above-described 13th control example, and normal mode effect setting process 16, which is one process of effect setting process 13 (see FIG. 462), is performed. The only difference is that the content has been changed, and otherwise the same. The same processing contents are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted. It should be noted that each control example described above, and portions where detailed descriptions of the same elements as those described in each control example are omitted, are the same as those described in each control example and each control example described above. It is adapted. In addition, the control examples described above and the technical ideas described in each control example are naturally applied to the 16th control example, and the control examples described above and the technical ideas described in each control example are also applied. Modified examples and additional examples are naturally applied to the sixteenth control example.

First, with reference to FIG. 534, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixteenth control example will be described. FIG. 534 is a flow chart showing the contents of this main process. In the main process (see FIG. 534) in the 16th control example, the main process (see FIG. 174) in the 13th control example (and the first control example) is replaced with the effect update process (see FIG. 174). The only difference is that the update process 16 (S4121A) is executed, and the command determination process 16 (S4122A) is executed instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 174). Other processing is the same as in the thirteenth control example (and the first control example), so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 535, the rendering update process 16 (S4121A), which is one of the main processes, will be described. FIG. 535 is a flow chart showing the effect update process 16 (S4121A). In this effect update process 16 (S4121A), first, it is determined whether or not the variable display effect of the special symbol is being executed (S4151A), and if it is determined that the variable display effect is not being executed (S4151A: No ), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variable display effect is being executed (S4151A: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the special figure lottery counter 223lc is 500 (S4152A), and the special figure lottery number counter If it is determined that the value of 223lc is not 500 (S4152A: No), then it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol notified in the variable display effect currently being executed is a time-saving symbol (S4153A). ). In the processing of S4153A, when it is determined that the lottery result of the special figure is not the time saving design (S4153A: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S4153, when it is determined that the lottery result corresponding to the variable display effect being executed is a time saving pattern (S4153A: Yes), and in the process of S4152A, the value of the special figure lottery number counter 223lc is 500 If it is determined that there is (S4152A: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result is a lottery result corresponding to a big hit (S4154A). In the process of S4154A, when it is determined that the lottery result corresponds to a big win (S4154A: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4154A, when it is determined that the lottery result is not a lottery result corresponding to a big win (S4154A: No), it is determined whether or not the remaining variation time of the variable display effect being executed is 5 seconds. (S4155A), when it is determined that the remaining variation time of the special figure is not 5 seconds (S4155A: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S4155A, when it is determined that the remaining variation time of the variable display effect being executed is 5 seconds (S4155A: Yes), whether the remaining variation time of the normal symbol is 10 seconds or more It is determined by referring to the value of the normal pattern variation time timer 223pd (S4156A), and when it is determined that the remaining variation time of the normal pattern is not 10 seconds or more (S4156A: No), this process is terminated as it is. . On the other hand, in the process of S4156A, when it is determined that the remaining variation time of the normal symbol is 10 seconds or more (S4156A: Yes), the variable display effect currently being executed is in the variable display mode accompanied by the display device interlocking effect. It is determined whether or not there is (S4157A), and if it is determined that it is not a variable display mode with a display device interlocking effect (S4157A: No), the variable display mode is rewritten to a display device interlocking time saving effect Then (S4158A), the effect period of the time-saving activation inciting effect is set to the remaining variation time of the normal symbol (S4159A), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4157A, if it is determined that the variable display effect being executed is the variable display mode accompanied by the display device-linked effect (S4157A: Yes), this process is terminated.

Thus, in the sixteenth control example, for a relatively long time of 5 seconds or more after shifting to the time saving state, the variation of the normal pattern continues to be executed (even if hitting to the right, the second ball entrance 640 When it is determined 5 seconds before the end of the variation that the period in which the game ball cannot be entered continues for a relatively long time, the timing of notifying the transition to the time saving state is delayed. In other words, after the state in which the benefit of the time saving state is actually obtained (after it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 by hitting to the right), the configuration for executing the time saving activation effect and As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from throwing to the right unnecessarily while the normal symbols are fluctuating.

Next, with reference to FIG. 536, command determination processing 16 (S4122A), which is one processing of the main processing, will be described. FIG. 536 is a flow chart showing this command determination process 16 (S4122A). In the processing of S4201, S4203 to S4211, S4213, S4214, S4217 and S4219 of the command determination processing 16 (S4122A), S4201, S4203 to S4211 of the command determination processing 13 (see FIG. 458) in the thirteenth control example, respectively. , S4213, S4214, S4217 and S4219 are executed. In command determination processing 16 (S4122A) of this control example, if it is determined that a state command has been received in the processing of S4201 (S4201: Yes), state command reception processing 13 in the thirteenth control example (FIG. 459 ), the status command reception process 16 is executed (S4221A), and this process ends. The details of this status command reception process 16 (S4221A) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In addition, in the command determination process 16 (see FIG. 536) in the 16th control example, if it is determined in the process of S4211 that the winning command has been received (S4211: Yes), the 13th control example (and the first control example) ) is executed instead of the winning command process (see FIG. 177) (S4222A), and this process ends. In addition, in the command determination process 16 (see FIG. 536) in the sixteenth control example, in the process of S4217, when it is determined that a jackpot related command has been received (S4217: Yes), the above-described thirteenth control example (and 1 control example) in place of the jackpot-related processing (see FIG. 180), the jackpot-related processing 16 is executed (S4223A), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4217, when it is determined that the command related to the big hit is not received (S4217: No), then it is determined whether or not the command related to the lottery of normal symbols is received (S4224A). In the processing of S4224A, when it is determined that the command related to the lottery of the normal symbol is received (S4224A: Yes), the normal symbol related process for executing the control according to the type of the command related to the lottery of the normal symbol is executed. Execute (S4225A) and terminate this process. On the other hand, in the process of S4224A, when it is determined that the command related to the normal symbol lottery is not received (S4224A: No), the process proceeds to S4219. The details of the winning command process 16 (S4222A), the jackpot related process 16 (S4223A) and the normal figure related process (S4225A) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 538, 539 and 541.

Next, referring to FIG. 537, state command reception processing 16 (S4221A), which is one processing in command determination processing 16 (see FIG. 536), will be described. FIG. 537 is a flow chart showing this state command reception process 16 (S4221A).

In the processes of S9001, S9002, S9092, and S9093 of the state command reception process 16 (S4221A), S9001, S9002, S9092, and S9093 of the state command reception process 13 (see FIG. 459) in the thirteenth control example described above, respectively. are executed. In the state command reception process 16 (S4221A) in the sixteenth control example, after the process of S9092 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the received state command indicates a change to the normal state (S9011A).

In the processing of S9011A, if it is determined that the change to the normal state has been notified (S9011A: Yes), it is determined whether or not the prefetching suppression flag 223pc is on (S9012A). If it is determined that there is (S9012A: Yes), the prefetch suppression flag 223pc is set to OFF (S9013A), and the process proceeds to S9093. On the other hand, in the processing of S9011A, if it is determined that the change to the normal state has not been notified (S9011A: No), and in the processing of S9012A, if the prefetch suppression flag 223pc is not ON (that is, it is OFF). If so (S9012A: No), the process proceeds to S9093.

In addition, in the state command reception processing 16 (see FIG. 537) in the sixteenth control example, when it is determined that there is information indicating the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la in the processing of S9093 (S9093: Yes), received The value corresponding to the value is set to the value of the special lottery number counter 223lc (S9014A), the data of the between-bonus counter 223pa and the bonus history storage area 223pb are updated (S9015A), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S9093, when it is determined that the information indicating the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la is not notified (S9093: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 538, winning command process 16 (S4222A), which is one process of command determination process 16 (see FIG. 536), will be described. FIG. 538 is a flow chart showing this winning command process 16 (S4222A).

In the winning command process 16 (S4222A), the processes of S4401 and S4413 are the same as the processes of S4401 and S4413 of the winning command process (see FIG. 177) in the thirteenth control example (and the first control example). Processing is performed. In addition, in the winning command process 16 (S4222A) in the 16th control example, after executing the process of S4401, it is determined whether or not the winning information notified by the winning information command this time is the winning information of the first special symbol. Then (S4421A), when it is determined that it is the winning information of the first special symbol (S4421A: Yes), it is determined whether or not the prefetching suppression flag 223pc is on (S4422A), and the prefetching suppression flag 223pc is on If so (S4422A: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4421A, if it is determined that it is not the winning information of the special figure 1 (S4421A: No), and in the process of S4422A, the look-ahead suppression flag 223pc is not on (that is, off) and determined If so (S4422A: No), the process proceeds to S4423A.

In the processing of S4423A, the reservation mode selection table 222pa (see FIG. 521) is read out (S4423A), and then, according to the variation type indicated by the winning information to be selected by lottery, the number of reserved balls pattern corresponding to the winning information of this time is displayed. The mode is specified (S4424A), the display of the reserved ball number pattern in the specified display mode is set (S4425A), and the sum of the value of the special drawing lottery number counter 223lc and the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is 500. It is determined whether or not there is (S4426A).

In the process of S4426A, when it is determined that the sum of the value of the special symbol lottery number counter 223lc and the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is not 500 (S4426A: No), the process proceeds to S4413. On the other hand, in the process of S4426A, when it is determined that the sum of the value of the special symbol lottery number counter 223lc and the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is 500 (S4426A: Yes), the winning information storage area 223b It is determined whether or not there is winning information corresponding to the big win (S4427A), and if it is determined that there is no winning information corresponding to the big win in the winning information storage area 223b (S4427A: No), reaching the ceiling lottery number of times is determined. It means that the third time saving state is set, so the look-ahead suppression flag 223pc is set to ON (S4428A), and the process proceeds to S4413.

On the other hand, in the process of S4427A, when it is determined that there is winning information corresponding to the big win in the winning information storage area 223b (S4427A: Yes), the big win game is executed without setting the third time saving state. , the process of S4428A is skipped and the process proceeds to S4413.

By executing this prize winning command process 16 (see FIG. 538), it is possible to turn on the look-ahead suppression flag 223pc at the time when the reserved ball corresponding to the loss for which the lottery is executed in the ceiling lottery number is obtained. Therefore, even if the reserved ball of the first special symbol is acquired after that, it is possible to suppress the execution of the look-ahead effect (reserved change effect). As a result, according to the display mode of the reserved ball number pattern of the first special pattern digested after shifting to the third time saving state, the lottery corresponding to the reserved ball of the first special pattern is selected in the third time saving state. It is possible to suppress an irregular game method that allows adjustment of whether or not it is executed in between.

Next, with reference to FIG. 539, the jackpot related process 16 (S4223A), which is one process of the command determination process 16 (see FIG. 536), will be described. FIG. 539 is a flowchart showing jackpot related processing 16 (S4223A).

In each of S4701, S4709, S4710, S4714 and S4715 of the jackpot related processing 16 (S4223A), S4701 and S4709 of the jackpot related processing (see FIG. 180) in the thirteenth control example (and the first control example) , S4710, S4714 and S4715 are executed. In addition, in the jackpot related processing 16 (S4223A) in the sixteenth control example, in the processing of S4701, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has been received (S4701: Yes), whether the interlocking effect flag 223pe is on (S4721A), and when it is determined that the interlocking production flag 223pe is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S4721A: No), the opening command for display indicating the opening production corresponding to the jackpot type is set. (S4722A), and the process proceeds to S4724A. On the other hand, in the processing of S4721A, if it is determined that the interlocking production flag 223pe is ON (S4721A: Yes), the display opening command indicating the jackpot notification production of the data display device interlocking type is set (S4723A), and the processing is performed. to S4724.

In the processing of S4724A executed after the processing of S4722A or S4723A, the value of the counter between bonuses 223pa is reset (S4723A), and then it is determined whether or not the jackpot to be started this time is a special jackpot (S4725A). If it is determined to be a special jackpot (S4725A: Yes), the win information for the special jackpot this time is stored in the bonus history storage area 223pb (S4726A), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a special jackpot (S4725A: No), winning information of the normal bonus is stored in the bonus history storage area 223pb (S4727A), and this process is terminated.

Further, the processing of S4711 to S4713 of the jackpot-related processing (see FIG. 180) in the thirteenth control example (and the first control example) is deleted in this control example. In the processing of S4714, when it is determined that the ending command is not received (S4714: No), it is determined whether a command related to a small hit is received (S4728A), and it is determined that a command related to a small hit is received. In the case (S4728A: Yes), a small hit related process for performing control according to the type of various commands related to a small hit is executed (S4729A), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command related to the small hit is not received (S4728A: No), this process is terminated. Details of the small hit related process (S4729A) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 540, the small hit related process (S4729A) which is 1 process of the big hit related process 16 (refer FIG. 539) is demonstrated. FIG. 540 is a flow chart showing this small hit related process (S4729A).

In this small per related process (S4729A), first, it is determined whether or not the small per start command is received (S4751A), and when it is determined that the small per start command is received (S4751A: Yes), the small per (S4752A), reset the value of the counter between bonuses 223pa (S4753A), and store the winning information of the current small win in the bonus history storage area 223pb (S4754A). ), the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4751A, if it is determined that the small winning start command is not received (S4751A: No), then it is determined whether the small winning ending command is received (S4755A), and the small winning ending If it is determined that the command has not been received (S4755A: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the small winning ending command is received (S4755A: Yes), the display small winning ending command indicating the small winning ending effect is set (S4756A), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 541, the normal figure related process (S4225A), which is one process of the command determination process 16 (see FIG. 536), will be described. FIG. 541 is a flowchart showing the general-purpose map related process (S4225A).

In this general figure related process (S4225A), first, it is determined whether or not the general figure variation pattern command is received (S4251A), and when it is determined that the general figure variation pattern command is received (S4251A: Yes), The fluctuation time corresponding to the notified normal pattern fluctuation pattern is set to the normal pattern fluctuation time timer 223pd (S4252A), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S4251A, when it is determined that the normal pattern fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S4251A: No), the processing according to other commands is executed (S4253A), and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 542, the normal mode effect setting process 13 (see FIG. 462) is executed instead of the normal mode effect setting process 13 (see FIG. 463) in the thirteenth control example. Setting processing 16 (S34421A) will be described. FIG. 542 is a flow chart showing the normal mode effect setting process 16 (S34421A).

This normal mode effect setting process 16 (S34421A) is, like the normal mode effect setting process 13 (see FIG. 463) in the thirteenth control example, a process executed to determine the variable display mode in the normal mode. be. In the normal mode effect setting process 16 (S34421A) in the 16th control example, first, the time saving suggestion effect selection table 222pb is read (S34511A), and the value of the special figure lottery number counter 223lc and the data of the bonus history storage area 223pb The effect mode of the corresponding suggestive effect is determined (S34512A), and it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure lottery number counter 223lc is 500 (S34513A). If it is determined that the value of the special lottery number counter 223lc is not 500 (S34513A: No), the data in the bonus history storage area 223pb is read (S34514A), and whether the number of lotteries after the previous normal bonus is 500 It is determined whether or not (S34515A). When it is determined that the number of lotteries after the previous normal bonus is not 500 (S34515A: No), it is determined whether or not the number of lotteries after the oldest small bonus is 500 (S34516A). When it is determined that the number of lotteries after the small bonus is 500 (S34516A: Yes), the history of the oldest small bonus is deleted from the bonus history storage area 223pb (S34517A), and then the player is prevented from hitting right. is set (S34518A), and the process proceeds to S34519A.

On the other hand, in the processing of S34513A, when it is determined that the value of the special figure lottery number counter 223lc is 500 (S34513A: Yes), and in the processing of S34515A, it was determined that the number of lotteries after the previous normal bonus is 500 If so (S34515A: Yes), the process proceeds to S34518A. Also, in the process of S34516A, when it is determined that the number of lotteries after the oldest small bonus is not 500 (S34516A: No), the processes of S34517A and S34518A are skipped, and the process proceeds to S34519A.

After executing the processing of S34518A, the effect mode corresponding to the received variation pattern is determined (S34519A), the interlocking effect flag 223pe is updated according to the determined effect mode (S34520A), and this process ends. By executing this normal mode effect setting process 16 (see FIG. 542), in the variable display effect in which there is a possibility that the ceiling lottery count has been reached from the player's point of view, the effect of informing not to hit to the right is executed. Therefore, even if the ceiling lottery frequency has not actually been reached, the game can be played in anticipation that the ceiling lottery frequency has been reached. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

<Regarding the control process of the data display device in the sixteenth control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 271 of the data display device 262 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. First, with reference to FIG. 543, main processing executed by the MPU 271 of the data display device 262 will be described. FIG. 543 is a flow chart showing this main process. In this main processing, based on various signals received from the pachinko machine 10 electrically connected to the data display device 262, data to be displayed on the data display unit 276 (data corresponding to the game status of the pachinko machine 10). is updated, and control for changing the visual recognition mode according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is executed.

In this main process, first, an initial setting process is executed (S101D). Next, display device signal reception processing is executed (S102D). Next, display update processing for updating the display content of the data display section 276 of the data display device 262 is executed (S103D). Then, it is determined whether or not the player has performed an input operation on the input device 277, and if there is an input operation, an operation means input monitoring process for executing a process corresponding to the operation is performed (S104D). ).

Next, it is determined whether or not there is power-off occurrence information (S105D), and if there is power-off occurrence information (S105D: Yes), power-off processing is executed (S107D), and thereafter the power is completely turned off. An infinite loop continues until it is interrupted and processing cannot be executed.

In the processing of S105D, if it is determined that the power failure occurrence information is not stored (S105D: No), then, whether 1 ms has elapsed since the processing of S101H or the start of the previous processing of S102H. (S106D), and if it is determined that 1 ms has not elapsed (S106D: No), the process returns to S106D. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S106D that 1 ms has passed (S106D: Yes), the process returns to S102D, and the processes of S102D to S104D are repeatedly executed.

Next, the display device signal reception process (S102D), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 543), will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this display device signal reception processing (S102D), processing corresponding to various signals received from the pachinko machine 10 is executed.

In the display device signal reception processing (S102D), first, it is determined whether or not external output signals (various signals in the state of H output) have been received from CN1 to CN11 of the external output terminal board 261 of the pachinko machine 10 (S201D). , if the external output signal has not been received (S201D: No), this process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 543).

On the other hand, in the processing of S201D, if it is determined that an external output signal has been received (S201D: Yes), then a power-on signal has been received as the external output signal (that is, the CN 11 has been in the H output state for 0.2 s. (S202D). Then, if it is determined that the power-on signal has been received (S202D: Yes), then the current state is specified from the outputs of CN7 to CN9 (S203D), and the data display unit 276 and the illumination are displayed according to the specified state. The aspect of the part 277 is updated (S204D), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S202D, if it is determined that the power-on signal has not been received (that is, the H output signal of 0.2 has not been received from CN 11) (S202D: No), a signal other than the power-on signal (S205D), update the display contents of the data display section 276 according to the received signal (S206D), and terminate this process.

<Regarding control processing of the hall computer in the sixteenth control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 281 of the hall computer 263 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS.

First, with reference to FIG. 545, main processing executed by MPU 283 of hall computer 263 will be described. FIG. 545 is a flow chart showing this main process. In the main processing, based on various signals received from the pachinko machine 10, data corresponding to the game status of each pachinko machine 10 is updated, and whether or not there is an abnormality or fraudulent activity with respect to each pachinko machine 10 is determined. do.

In this main process, first, an initial setting process is executed (S101H). Next, a signal reception process is performed for executing a process corresponding to the signal received from each pachinko machine 10 (S102H), and then a display update process for updating the display of the display 287 provided in the hall computer 263 is performed. (S103H). Then, it is determined whether or not the operator of the hall computer 263 has performed an input operation on the input device 288 of the hall computer 263, and if there is an input operation, an operation means input monitoring process for executing a process corresponding to the operation. (S104H).

Next, when power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the game state at the time of the previous power interruption is compared with the game state at the time of the power supply this time, and power recovery comparison for determining the presence or absence of abnormality. Processing is executed (S105H). Then, it is determined whether or not there is power-off occurrence information (S106H), and if there is power-off occurrence information (S106H: Yes), power-off processing is executed (S108H), and thereafter the power is completely cut off. continue the infinite loop until the process can no longer be executed.

In the process of S106H, if it is determined that the power failure occurrence information is not stored (S106H: No), then it is determined whether or not 1 ms has passed (S107H), and it is determined that 1 ms has not passed. If so (S107H: No), the process returns to S107H. On the other hand, when it is determined that 1 ms has elapsed in the process of S107H (S107H: Yes), the process returns to S102H, and the processes of S102H to S105H are repeatedly executed.

Next, the signal reception process (S102H), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 545), will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In this signal reception processing (S102H), processing corresponding to various signals received from the pachinko machine 10 is executed.

In the signal reception process (S102H), first, external output signals (various signals in the state of H output) are received from CN1 to CN11 of the external output terminal board 261 of one of the pachinko machines 10 connected to the hall computer 263. (S201H), and if the external output signal has not been received (S201H: No), this process ends and returns to the main process (see FIG. 545).

On the other hand, in the process of S201H, if it is determined that the external output signal has been received (S201H: Yes), then the power-on signal has been received from the pachinko machine 10 to which the external output signal has been output (that is, 0.0. 2s H output signal has been received) (S202H). Then, if it is determined that the power-on signal has not been received (that is, the H output signal of 0.2 s has not been received from CN 11) (S202H: No), then the power-off signal has been received (that is, (S203H). In the processing of S203H, if it is determined that the power off signal has been received (that is, the H output signal of 0.4 seconds has been received from CN 11) (S203H: Yes), the power cut corresponding to the pachinko machine that output the signal Information corresponding to the current game state (at the time of power shutdown) is stored in the time information storage area (S204H), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S203H, if it is determined that the power off signal is not received (that is, the H output signal of 0.4 s is not received from CN11) (S203H: No), the pachinko that outputs the signal The information in the data storage area corresponding to the machine is updated (S204H), and this process ends. For example, if it is determined that the jackpot 1 signal (CN7) of the first pachinko machine 10 (1 series) installed in the hall is in the H output state and the other external output signal is in the L output state. , information indicating that the jackpot is in progress is stored in the data storage area corresponding to the first pachinko machine 10 (first series). The type (machine number) of the pachinko machine 10 that received the external output signal is specified by the type of connection terminal for the hall computer 263 (the position of the terminal that received the external output signal).

In the processing of S202H, if it is determined that the power-on signal is received (that is, the H output signal of 0.2 seconds from CN 11 is received) (S202H: Yes), then to the pachinko machine 10 that outputs the external output signal It is determined whether or not the startup flag of the corresponding data storage area (flag indicating whether or not the corresponding pachinko machine 10 is being started up based on power-on) is on (S206H). As a result of the determination by the processing of S206H, when it is determined that the start-up flag is off (S206H: No), the information in the power recovery information storage area corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 that has received the external output signal is updated ( S207H), update of the display contents of the display 287 is set (S208H), the start-up flag corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 that received the external output signal is set to ON (S209H), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 547, the power recovery comparison process (S105H) will be described. This power recovery time comparison process (S105H) is one process in the main process executed by the MPU 281, and when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the game state at the time of the previous power failure, This is a process of comparing the game state with the game state when the power is turned on this time, and determining the presence or absence of an abnormality.

In this power recovery comparison process (S105H), first, it is determined whether or not the startup flag is ON (S301H). (S301H: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S301H, if it is determined that the startup flag is ON (S301H: Yes), then the information in the power failure information storage area and the information in the power recovery information storage area are compared ( S302H), and it is determined whether or not the compared information matches (S303H).

In the process of S303H, if it is determined that the compared information does not match (S303H: No), an abnormality notification is set (S304H), and the process proceeds to S305H. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S303H that the compared information matches (S303H: Yes), the process of S304H is skipped and the process proceeds to S305H. In the process of S305H, the start-up flag is set to OFF (S305H), and the process ends.

By executing this power recovery comparison process (see FIG. 547), a power-on signal is sent to the hall computer 263 when the power is turned on for one of the pachinko machines 10 connected to the hall computer 263. is output, it is possible to compare the data indicating the game state when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off and the data indicating the game state when the power is turned on this time. When an abnormal situation occurs, the fact can be grasped on the hall computer 263 side immediately after the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent cheating such as rewriting the game state (for example, illegally setting the jackpot state) while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the sixteenth control example, the presentation mode as if it were interlocked with the visual recognition mode of a predetermined device (for example, the data display device 262) electrically connected to the pachinko machine 10 specific effect (data display device interlocking effect) can be executed. More specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixteenth control example, as a kind of effect for informing the player of the fact that the player will be in an advantageous state (for example, a big win or a time-saving state), the state is shifted to an advantageous state. It is configured to be able to execute a display device interlocking effect in a mode of effect that keeps the fact that the player has done so hidden for a predetermined period, and prompts the user to visually recognize a predetermined device (for example, the data display device 262) at a predetermined opportunity after shifting to an advantageous state. . Various data (the number of lotteries between big wins, the number of big wins, the total number of lotteries, etc.) related to the game status of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed based on various signals received from the connected pachinko machine 10, which are currently in general circulation. In the data display device 262 for doing so, when an advantageous state (jackpot game state, probability variable game state, time-saving game state, etc.) is set, it is in an advantageous state by emitting characters or decorative lamps. Since most of them are configured to be able to notify by such as, by executing the display device interlocking effect, it is very novel as if the pachinko machine 10 and the data display device 262 are interlocking and performing the effect. It is possible to realize a production mode. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this 16th control example, as a lottery result of the first special symbol that is mainly executed in the normal game state, almost no prize balls can be obtained (the number of rounds is small, and the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a in each round short) jackpot (special jackpot), and a small win in which the opening pattern (specific opening/closing operation) of the specific winning port 65a common to the special jackpot is set, and whether it was a special jackpot or a small win. is configured to be difficult for the player to distinguish. Due to these lottery results, every time the specific winning opening 65a is opened and closed by a specific opening and closing operation, the number of lotteries until reaching the ceiling lottery number (the third time saving state is given) Possibility of being reset by special jackpot winning To make it difficult for a player to grasp the number of remaining lotteries (remaining number of times until awarding of a privilege related to reaching the number of ceiling lotteries) until the third time saving state is granted, because the player can be made to recognize that there is a possibility. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game feature of predicting the number of remaining lotteries.

In addition, in this 16th control example, by fixing the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the ceiling lottery number of times to a predetermined specific period (30 seconds) regardless of the lottery result, the transition to the third time saving state It is configured to make it difficult to understand whether the player has won the lottery or whether the jackpot has just been won based on the number of lotteries on the ceiling. By configuring in this way, the player can continue to have a sense of expectation for the shift to the third time saving state for a longer time, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In addition, in the 16th control example, it is configured to suppress the execution of the holding change effect for the held ball that is held before reaching the ceiling lottery number of times and digested in the third time saving state set after the ceiling lottery number of times is reached. . By constructing in this way, the holding ball of the first special pattern that is digested after shifting to the third time saving state is dared to be digested during the third time saving state by not generating the start prize of the second special pattern. Conversely, the first special symbol is quickly obtained by acquiring the second special symbol reserved ball, and then the game is played so as not to lose the second special symbol reserved ball. It is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which the degree of advantage is increased by deliberately digesting the reserved ball with the pattern after the third time-saving state is finished.

In addition, in the present 16th control example, when shifting to the jackpot game state and when shifting to the third time saving state, the signal output mode is changed from the common signal output channel (CN9) in the external output terminal plate 261 is configured to output As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of signal output channels, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 due to an increase in the number of parts. Here, in the 16th control example, as with the jackpot 1 signal, by setting the CN9 to the H output state even during the execution of the jackpot game, the predetermined Information to be received can be selected according to the specifications of the device (data display device 262 or hall computer 263). That is, the function installed in the pachinko machine 10, which shifts to the time-saving state based on the number of ceiling lotteries reached, is a very special function of shifting to an advantageous game state without going through a big win. Depending on the specs of the predetermined device, there is a possibility that the shift to the time saving state based on reaching the ceiling lottery number of times cannot be treated as normal. In other words, if a signal indicating a time saving state is received without receiving a signal indicating a jackpot, it is determined that the state has been shifted to a time saving state without a jackpot due to fraud, or an abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 10 and the output is disabled. There is a risk of being identified. Therefore, in this 16th control example, as the jackpot 3 signal, a signal that is set to the H output state not only during the execution of the jackpot game but also when the ceiling lottery number of times is reached, is provided. It is possible to treat the time-saving state, which is shifted based on reaching the number of times, as a normal state regardless of the specs of the predetermined device connected to the external output terminal board 261 . In other words, if the signal indicating the time saving state is received without receiving the signal indicating the jackpot, even if the specification determines that it is illegal or abnormal, if the 3 jackpot signals are input as the signal indicating the jackpot, the ceiling Even when the number of lotteries reaches the lottery number, it is possible to realize a signal output mode as if a shift to a time-saving state occurred in a pseudo manner after a big win. That is, the jackpot 3 signal indicating the jackpot is set to the H output state for 0.2 seconds, and the jackpot 2 signal indicating the transition to the time saving state is set to the H output state, so that the proper time saving state It can be judged as migration. Therefore, it can be suppressed that the time saving state set based on the number of ceiling lottery arrivals is determined to be illegal or abnormal. In addition, in the case of a predetermined device with specifications that can identify the time-saving state based on the number of times the ceiling lottery has been reached, by determining the output period of the 3 jackpot signals, it is possible to determine whether the H output is based on reaching the ceiling lottery number. It is possible to distinguish whether it is the H output based on winning. Therefore, regardless of the specs of the predetermined device, it is possible to treat the transition to the time saving state based on reaching the ceiling lottery number of times as justifiable.

In the sixteenth control example, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, a signal indicating the gaming state is output from the external output terminal board 261. When it is in the normal state, it may be configured to externally output the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la. In this case, from one signal output channel (for example, CN9), it may be configured to output the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la as a signal indicating 9-bit data. More specifically, for example, in a situation where neither the jackpot 1 signal nor the jackpot 2 signal is output (neither the jackpot game state nor the time saving state), the jackpot 3 signal is output H for a predetermined period (for example, 0.4 seconds). By setting to , it is notified to the predetermined device that the jackpot 3 signal output from CN9 thereafter is the data indicating the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la. Then, the data of the 1st bit to the 9th bit of the special figure lottery counter 203la are output in order in units of 0.2 seconds. More specifically, if the target bit of the special figure lottery counter 203la is 1, the output of CN9 is set to H output for 0.2 seconds, and if it is 0, the output of CN9 is L output for 0.2 seconds set to Then, after the output is completed, by outputting an H output signal with an output period different from 0.2 seconds and 0.4 seconds (for example, 0.6 seconds), the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la is indicated. It may be configured to notify the predetermined device that the data output is completed. With this configuration, the number of lotteries at power-on can be easily grasped simply by monitoring the output of the external output terminal board 261 on the side of a predetermined device (hall computer 263, etc.).

Furthermore, in this case, even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la may be notified in a similar manner. By configuring in this way, the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la can be output to a predetermined device when the power is turned off and when the power is turned on. When a fraudulent act of illegally rewriting is performed, it can be configured so that it can be easily discovered on the side of the predetermined device. In other words, by installing a function to compare the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la when the power is turned off and the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la when the next power is turned on in a predetermined device such as the hall computer 263, Since discrepancies in the drawing lottery counter 2031a can be easily detected on the side of the predetermined device, it is possible to determine whether or not there is fraudulent activity when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts.

In this 16th control example, three jackpot signals are provided in addition to one jackpot signal. However, one jackpot signal and three jackpot signals may be output from one signal output channel (CN7). By configuring in this way, the number of signal output channels can be reduced.

In this 16th control example, the degree of advantage is differentiated depending on whether the special jackpot is won in the normal game state before the ceiling lottery number is reached or the special jackpot is won in the third time-saving state after the ceiling lottery number is reached. As a total, it was constructed so that the degree of advantage is higher when the first special pattern lottery wins after the ceiling lottery number of times has passed, but when the first special pattern lottery wins The method of varying the degree of advantage is not limited to this. For example, rather than winning the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal game state, it is possible to win the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol during the third time-saving state set after reaching the ceiling lottery number of times. It may be configured so that the ratio of the probability variable jackpot is higher (it becomes easier to shift to the second probability variable state). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player more strongly anticipate that the ceiling lottery number will be reached, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In this 16th control example, a small bonus is provided to make it difficult to understand the remaining number of lotteries up to the number of ceiling lotteries. It is not something that can be done. For example, by varying the ceiling lottery frequency after the end of the jackpot according to the jackpot type, it is possible to make it difficult to understand how many ceiling lottery frequencies are set. Also, whether the small bonus is a special big win or a small win can be grasped by visually recognizing the type of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 . Therefore, for example, at the timing when the stop symbol corresponding to the small bonus is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the display of the first symbol display device 37 may be erased, the common symbol may be temporarily displayed, or the second symbol may be temporarily displayed. The first pattern display device 37 may be hidden by moving a predetermined movable accessory in front of the one pattern display device 37 . By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it more difficult to understand whether the small bonus is a special big win or a small win, so it is possible to make it more difficult to understand the remaining number of times up to the ceiling lottery number. Also, the same control may be performed during the period from when the power is turned on until at least the first variable display is started. Here, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized when the power is turned on (the RAM clear switch 122 is pressed), the display contents of the first symbol display device 37 are also cleared, while the pachinko machine 10 is cleared when the power is turned on. is not initialized, the display content of the first pattern display device 37 is normally restored to the display content at the time of power-off. In this case, if the pachinko machine 10 is initialized by a pachinko machine 10 outside the opening hours of the hall, the player only needs to visually recognize the first pattern display device 37 on the next business day, and the number of ceiling lotteries remaining until the number of ceiling lotteries will be reached. It is possible to easily determine whether the number of lotteries has been reset or is maintained as it was at the end of business on the previous day. That is, if the display contents of the first pattern display device 37 are cleared, it is determined that the remaining number of lotteries up to the number of ceiling lotteries is reset, and the pachinko machine 10 is prevented from starting the game. There is a possibility that In order to avoid such a situation, when the power is turned on, the display of the first pattern display device 37 is erased regardless of whether or not the initialization is performed, or a common pattern is displayed regardless of whether or not the initialization is performed. The first pattern display device 37 may be hidden by temporarily displaying it or by moving a predetermined movable accessory in front of the first pattern display device 37 until the variable display of the special pattern is first started. With this configuration, it is difficult for a player to determine whether the pachinko machine 10 has been initialized or not, so that the operation rate of the initialized pachinko machine 10 is prevented from decreasing. can be suppressed.

In the sixteenth control example, as shown in FIG. 509(a), the character 809 emits light 809 upward on the third symbol display device 81, thereby indirectly drawing attention to the top of the pachinko machine 10, By making the data display device 262, which is generally installed directly above the pachinko machine 10, pay attention (visible), the result of the lottery (whether or not it shifts to an advantageous state) depends on the viewing mode of the data display device 262. ) to the player, but it is not limited to this. For example, a more direct expression to prompt attention to the data display device 262 (for example, to the third pattern display device 81, an effect such as displaying the characters "Look at the table!"). may be executed. By configuring in this way, the data display device 262 can be more reliably recognized by the player, so that the performance effect of the data display device interlocking performance can be further improved.

In the 16th control example, the holding notice effect for the holding ball (holding ball that straddles the ceiling lottery number) that is acquired before reaching the ceiling lottery number (starting winning is detected) and used for special symbol lottery after the jackpot is completed. Although it is configured to suppress execution, it is not limited to this. For example, in a state where there are a plurality of reserved balls and a display mode different from the normal reservation is set for at least one reserved ball number pattern as the reservation notice effect, the display mode different from the normal reservation is displayed. A configuration may be provided in which the set display mode of one reserved ball number pattern and the display mode of one reserved ball number pattern set to the display mode of normal reservation are exchanged. In other words, the pending change effect is once set to a pending ball number pattern different from the pending ball number pattern determined as the target of the pending change effect, and a predetermined timing after the pending change effect is executed (for example , at the start of the next fluctuation, during variable display based on the held ball determined as the target of the hold change production, etc.), the display mode of the hold ball number pattern decided as the target of the hold change production is different from the normal hold As set in the display mode, an effect may be executed in which the display mode is replaced with the number of pending balls pattern temporarily set to a display mode different from the normal suspension. In this case, the holding change effect is allowed to be executed even for the held ball straddling the ceiling lottery number, and the held ball used for the ceiling lottery number lottery is to be used before the ceiling lottery number number variation display is completed. It may be configured to replace the reserved ball number pattern and the display mode corresponding to . In other words, the reserved ball number symbols corresponding to the reserved balls digested in the ceiling lottery number are basically set to the display mode of normal reservation, and if the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern increases after that, A lottery as to whether or not the pending change performance can be executed is executed in the same manner as in the normal time, and when the pending change performance of the display mode other than the normal suspension is executed, the performance of exchanging the display mode of the pending ball number pattern is executed. Alternatively, the display mode of the reserved number of balls symbol of the first special symbol to be digested after reaching the ceiling lottery number of times may be unified to the display mode of normal suspension. By configuring in this way, similarly to the 16th control example described above, the third It is possible to start a time-saving state.

In this 16th control example, the 3rd time saving state is set based on the 2nd time saving state set based on the time saving pattern winning after the end of the big hit, and the 3rd time saving state set based on reaching the ceiling lottery number of times. Although the degree of advantage is slightly lower than that of the other, the difference in the degree of advantage is so small that it is difficult for the player to feel it, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the third time saving state may be configured so that the advantageous degree is clearly lower. Specifically, for example, the probability of the normal design in the low probability state of the normal design (normal game state, the third time saving state) to the high probability state of the normal design (the second probability variable state, the second time saving state) It may be configured significantly lower (eg, 1/100). In other words, in both the normal state and the third time-saving state, by configuring so that the lottery of the normal symbols is almost impossible, it is configured as a game state in which the game progresses by executing the lottery of the first special symbol by hitting to the left. You may Even if it is configured in this way, if it is configured so that the degree of advantage in the case of a big win in the lottery of the first special pattern is higher in the third time-saving state, it is possible to reach the number of ceiling lotteries. Expected playability can be maintained. In addition, by adopting a configuration in which a disadvantageous left-handed game is maintained even after reaching the number of ceiling lotteries, it is possible to suppress a significant change in the degree of advantage before and after reaching the number of ceiling lotteries. Therefore, the presence of the third time-saving state improves the ball putting performance of the pachinko machine 10 too much, which is excessively advantageous to the player, or the output rate in the third time-saving state is set by other factors (for example, It is possible to prevent players from being excessively disadvantageous as a result of trying to compensate for the jackpot probability, the number of payout balls for each ball entering each winning hole, the number of rounds of the jackpot, the rate of probability variation, etc.). can.

<Modified Example of Sixteenth Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 614 and 615, a modification of the sixteenth control example described above will be described. In the sixteenth control example described above, an effect for informing the player of the big win and an effect for informing the time-saving state are configured to execute an effect to encourage viewing the data display device 262 . In addition to this, in this modification, an upper role item UY that can appear and appear to a position where the data display device 262 can be physically concealed is mounted on the top of the pachinko machine 10. By concealing the viewing mode of the data display device 262, it is difficult for the player to understand whether or not the data display device interlocking effect is being executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 614, in this modified example, an upper accessory UY capable of performing haunting action is provided on the upper part of the pachinko machine 10 as part of the entertainment effect associated with the variable display effect. This upper accessory UY is normally maintained in a state (original position) housed inside the pachinko machine 10, and mainly when the variation pattern of "SP reach" with a high expectation of winning a jackpot is selected. Then, in the latter half of the variable display presentation, the data display device 262 is stopped at a position where the front surface of the data display device 262 is covered (extended position). The state in which the upper accessory UY is stopped in front of the data display device 262 is basically maintained until the variable display effect is completely finished.

In this modification, as a kind of jackpot performance, the upper accessory UY is maintained in the overhanging position until the opening period of the jackpot game, and the third pattern display device 81 stops and displays the third patterns in a combination of disengagement. (See FIG. 615(a)). Then, after executing the effect (see FIG. 507(a)) to draw attention to the data display device 262, the upper accessory UY descends to the origin position, thereby exposing the front surface of the data display device 262. Then, an effect is executed in which the visual recognition mode for big win set in the data display device 262 becomes visible. Based on the fact that the visual recognition mode for big win has become visible, the pachinko machine 10 side also notifies the big win winning in the same way as the data display interlocking effect in the 16th control example. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to confirm the visual recognition mode of the data display device 262, so even if the timing of informing the pachinko machine 10 side of the transition to the big win or the time saving state is delayed, the big win or the time saving It can be configured such that it is difficult for the user to notice the transition to the state. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the performance effect of the data display device-linked performance, and to further improve the degree of freedom of notification timing.

In the sixteenth control example and its modification described above, in the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10, a predetermined device (data display device 262, etc.) is displayed, and the pachinko machine 10 is in a predetermined advantageous state (jackpot state, time-saving state with normal symbols) in a predetermined device. A data display device interlocking effect that notifies whether or not a predetermined advantageous state has occurred depending on whether or not it is set to a predetermined visual mode (big hit visual mode, visual mode for time saving state) to indicate that Although it is configured to execute, it is not limited to this. For example, when the pachinko machine 10 receives a predetermined signal indicating that the pachinko machine 10 is in a predetermined advantageous state, the visual mode can be set to indicate that the predetermined advantageous state is reached. A predetermined device (for example, a display device set to a predetermined display mode upon receiving a predetermined signal indicating a predetermined advantageous state, a light emitting device set to a predetermined light emission mode, a predetermined displacement By causing the third pattern display device 81 to display a display mode that prompts attention (visual recognition) to a displacement device that is displaced (moved) in a manner, the predetermined device and the third pattern display device 81 It is good also as composition which performs interlocking type production. By constructing in this way, compared with the data display device 262 which is mostly installed directly above the pachinko machine 10, the degree of freedom of the installation position can be increased, so that the presentation mode can be diversified. can be done.

In the above-described 16th control example and its modification, even when a small win is won in which the remaining number of times up to the ceiling lottery number is not reset, the number of times between bonuses displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is reset. However, in the pachinko machine 10 to which a predetermined device capable of displaying the game history such as the data display device 262 described above is connected, by visually recognizing the game history displayed on the data display device 262, the previous It is possible to grasp the number of times of lottery of special symbols executed after the big win of . In other words, by visually recognizing the data display device 262, it becomes possible to grasp the remaining number of lotteries until reaching the ceiling number of lotteries. On the other hand, after providing the upper accessory UY in the modification of the 16th control example described above, the initial arrangement (origin position) of the upper accessory 262 is arranged as shown in FIG. is blocked by the upper accessory UY, making it difficult to see the data display device 262), the remaining number of lotteries up to the number of ceiling lotteries can be grasped by visually recognizing the data display device 262. It may be configured to make it physically difficult. By constructing in this way, the number of lotteries remaining until reaching the number of ceiling lotteries can be determined by the player only from the number of times between bonuses displayed on the third pattern display device 81, so that the number of ceiling lotteries can be determined. It is possible to further entertain the game property of predicting the remaining number of times until reaching .

In the 16th control example and its modification described above, the through gate 67 is provided only at the position where the game ball cannot enter unless it is hit to the right (position where it is difficult to enter), and the variable display effect of the number of times of the ceiling lottery is provided. It is configured so that the variable display of the normal pattern is not started during the variable display of the number of times of the ceiling lottery unless the right shot is intentionally started during the game, but it is not limited to this. For example, a through gate 67 or a second ball entrance 640 may be provided at a position where both a left-handed game ball and a right-handed game ball can enter. In the case of such a configuration, a situation is likely to occur in which the variable display of the normal symbols continues before and after the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbols. By shifting (delaying) the timing of informing the transition to the time saving state according to, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of wasted balls.

In the 16th control example and its modification described above, when the time saving pattern is won during the third time saving state, the second time saving state is set, and when the ceiling lottery number of times is reached in the second time saving state, the third time saving It was configured so that the state is set (the time saving state is overwritten), but it is not necessary to overwrite the time saving type. For example, if the ceiling lottery number is reached in the second time-saving state with a high degree of advantage (high probability of winning a normal pattern), while maintaining the second time-saving state, only the number of time-saving numbers is based on the number of ceiling lottery arrivals. It may be configured to update to the number of times of time saving (100 times) corresponding to the time saving state. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the degree of advantage from becoming lower than the game state before reaching the ceiling lottery regardless of the game state at the time when the ceiling lottery number of times is reached. It is possible to please the player regardless of the timing of reaching .

In the 16th control example and its modification described above, when the time saving pattern is elected during the third time saving state and the state is shifted to the second time saving state (accompanied by this, the number of time saving times increases to 100). When the ceiling lottery number of times is reached during the two hour reduction state and the state is shifted to the third hour reduction state (accompanied by this, the number of hour reduction numbers is increased to 100), a special presentation mode showing that the number of hour reduction numbers has increased. may be configured to execute Specifically, for example, in the variable display effect corresponding to the time saving pattern winning during the time saving state, and the variable display effect of the ceiling lottery number of times during the time saving state, until the time saving state displayed in the display area Dm7 ends The number indicating the remaining number of times is increased to 100 (the number of times of saving time is recovered). You may perform the content presentation as if returning. By configuring in this way, it is possible to realize more diverse presentation modes, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. In this case, it may be configured such that the setting condition of the time saving state is satisfied in a state where the remaining number of times of the time saving is smaller, the gorgeous (flashy) presentation mode is likely to be set. When the condition for setting the time saving state is established in a state where the number of times of time saving is small and the number of times of time saving is reset to 100 times, the player can be made to think that he has obtained more advantageous time saving states. In this case, by executing a more splendid presentation, the player can be made to feel greater joy and satisfaction.

In the above-described 16th control example and its modification, a state is set in which prefetching effects such as a holding change effect are prohibited based on the acquisition of a holding ball used for a special symbol lottery in the ceiling lottery number. However, the condition for setting the state in which the look-ahead effect is prohibited is not limited to this. For example, based on the fact that the reserved ball corresponding to the time-saving symbol winning is reserved, a state in which the look-ahead effect is prohibited may be set, or the reserved ball corresponding to the jackpot other than the special jackpot is reserved (i.e. , After the end of the jackpot, a state in which the look-ahead effect is prohibited may be set based on the fact that the jackpot suspension of the type that shifts to the game state in which the time saving state of the normal pattern is set is suspended). By configuring in this way, similarly to when the third time-saving state is set based on the number of ceiling lottery arrivals, when the state is shifted to the time-saving state with one or more reserved balls of the first special symbol, Since it is difficult for the player to predict whether or not the reserved ball of the first special pattern will become a big hit, the reserved ball of the first special pattern is digested during the time saving state only when it is predicted that it is likely to become a big hit. When it is predicted that a big win is not likely to occur, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which the game method is switched so that a lottery for the second special symbol is executed. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which sets the state which anticipation production|presentation is prohibited other than the case where it transfers to a time saving state. More specifically, for example, after the hold change effect set to the display mode other than normal hold (one of change 1 to change 5) is determined, the variation based on the hold ball of the display mode other than the normal hold A state in which the look-ahead effect is prohibited may be set until the display effect ends. By configuring in this way, a plurality of patterns of the number of held balls in a display mode other than the normal hold are displayed, and the player is at a loss as to which of the held balls to pay attention to. It is possible to suppress the difficulty of concentrating on the variable display effect based on the held ball.

In the sixteenth control example and its modification described above, when the reserved ball used for the special symbol lottery is reserved in the ceiling lottery number of times, the reserved ball corresponding to the first special symbol reserved ball acquired after that is reserved. Although it was configured to suppress the setting of a display mode other than normal suspension for the number of balls pattern, it is not limited to this, for example, the first special digested after shifting to the third time saving state The reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball of the pattern may be configured to be set to a specific display mode different from any of normal reserve and change 1 to change 5. Even if it is configured in this way, it is difficult for the player to predict whether or not it will be advantageous to consume it during the time-saving state. When it is predicted that the reserved ball of the first special pattern is digested and the big win is not likely to occur, it is possible to suppress the irregular game method by switching the game method so that the lottery of the second special pattern is executed. Contrary to the 16th control example and its modified example described above, the configuration may be such that the suspension change effect is permitted in the same manner as in the normal time. In this case, in addition to the display mode that suggests the possibility of winning a big hit or the possibility of winning a time-saving pattern, there is a high possibility of a big win type (special jackpot) that is advantageous if you win a big win during the time-saving state ( In other words, it is likely that the degree of advantage will be higher if digested during the time-saving state), or the one that is digested after the time-saving state ends rather than being digested during the time-saving state It is also possible to provide a display mode that suggests that there is a high possibility that the degree of advantage will increase. By configuring in this way, it is possible to digest the reserved ball of the first special symbol at the most advantageous timing for the player.

<17th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the seventeenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 548 to 575. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth control example described above, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are configured to be executable at the same time (in parallel), and the first special symbol lottery and the second In any of the special symbol lotteries, it is possible to execute time-saving winning determination. In addition, in the twelfth control example described above, a plurality of time-saving states (time-saving A, time-saving B) with different degrees of advantage (number of time-savings) are provided as the time-saving state, thereby improving the interest of the player.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present 17th control example, as the time saving state, the time saving state (second time saving state A, third time saving state A) in which the lottery of the first special symbol with a low degree of advantage is likely to be executed, A time-saving state (second time-saving state B, third time-saving state B) in which a lottery for a second special symbol with a high degree of advantage is easily executed is provided, and when the ceiling lottery number of times is reached, first, the third time-saving state. While B is set, when a big win is won in a normal state, the time saving state after the end of the big win is set to a second time saving state A with a low advantage at a high rate. By constructing in this way, the game can be played with a strong expectation that the ceiling lottery number of times will be reached, rather than winning the jackpot.

Further, in the 17th control example, when the time saving pattern is won during the time saving state, the number of time saving times corresponding to the winning time saving pattern is added. And, in the lottery for the second special symbol, the time-saving symbol is won at a higher probability (for example, at a rate of 90%) than in the lottery for the first special symbol. In addition, when shifting to the second time saving state B or the third time saving state B, the selection of special symbols for a specific number of times (for example, 10 times) is executed to move to the second time saving state A or the third time saving state A. It is configured to That is, during the second time saving state B or the third time saving state B, every time the lottery of the second special pattern is executed, the time saving pattern is elected with a high probability and the number of time saving times is added. A novel game property is realized in which the number of continuations of the second time-saving state A or the third time-saving state A that shifts after the lottery of the special symbols has passed can be varied.

The pachinko machine 10 in this seventeenth control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described twelfth control example in that the board configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is partially changed. The configuration of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main controller 110 is partially changed, the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the sound lamp controller 113 is partially changed, and the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 The only difference is that the control processing to be executed is partially changed, and the control processing to be executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the 12 control examples. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the twelfth control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 548, the board configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventeenth control example will be described. FIG. 548 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventeenth control example. As shown in FIG. 548, in the game board 13 in the 17th control example, the small winning variable winning device is placed directly below the first ball entrance 64 with respect to the game board 13 (see FIG. 406) in the 12th control example. 2650 is provided. The upper part of this small winning variable prize winning device 2650 is blocked by the first ball entrance 64 and a nail, and the game ball is arranged to make it difficult to enter. This small winning variable winning device 2650 is a variable winning device that is opened when the first special symbol lottery results in a small winning. That is, even if the lottery result of the first special symbol becomes a small hit, it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the small winning variable winning device 2650, so the first special symbol in the seventeenth control example. The small hit is almost the same value as the loss in a general gaming machine. The significance of providing the small hit of the first special symbol in this 17th control example lies in the function of forcibly stopping the long variation of the second special symbol.

Here, in this 17th control example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are configured to be executable in parallel. When one becomes a big hit or a small hit, the specification is adopted that the variable display of the other special pattern being executed is off and the symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. And, in the lottery of the first special symbol, it is configured to win a small hit with a high probability (49/50). By configuring in this way, even if the second special symbol lottery is executed by hitting right in the normal state and the long variation of 600 seconds is set, by executing the first special symbol lottery, Without waiting for 600 seconds, the long variation of the second special symbol can be forcibly stopped by the off symbol. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the lottery for the second special symbol continues to be executed endlessly.

In addition, the game board 13 in the seventeenth control example has the variable winning device 1065 removed from the game board 13 in the twelfth control example, and the V winning device 1650 has the role of the variable winning device 1065 (in each round of the jackpot). It is also different in that it also serves as a large winning opening that is open for a predetermined period of time). Thereby, the board configuration of the game board 13 can be simplified.

Furthermore, the game board 13 in the seventeenth control example replaces the right second ball entrance 1640 and the electric accessory 1640a that opens and closes the right second ball entrance 1640 in the above-described twelfth control example with the right first ball entrance. It is also different in that an electric accessory 64ra for opening and closing the ball entrance 64r and the first right ball entrance 64r is provided. Like the first ball entrance 64, the right first ball entrance 64r is configured as a kind of starting prize winning opening that triggers the lottery of the first special symbol. In addition, the electric accessary 64ra is controlled to open and close in an opening pattern according to the game state when winning the normal symbol lottery.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 549 and 550, a characteristic presentation mode in the seventeenth control example will be described. Here, as described above, in this 17th control example, the time saving state A (second time saving state A, third time saving State A) and time-saving state B in which the lottery of the second special pattern, which has a high degree of advantage (high probability of winning the time-saving pattern and substantially confirms the big win if the small win is won), is executed. (Second time saving state B, third time saving state B) and two types of time saving states are provided. Then, in this 17th control example, when the time saving pattern is won in the time saving state, the control to add the number of time saving times corresponding to the winning time saving pattern is adopted, and in the time saving state B, a specific number of times (for example, 11 times ) is executed to shift to the time saving state A by executing the lottery of the special symbols. In other words, in the time-saving state B, which is easy to win the time-saving pattern, the more time-saving times are added by the time-saving pattern winning, the more times the time-saving state A that shifts after that (after a specific number of times). , It is configured to realize novel gameplay. In other words, the time-saving state B is a state in which the lottery for the second special symbol is mainly executed with a substantially high probability of winning a jackpot (even if a small win is won, the jackpot is substantially confirmed), and the degree of advantage is extremely high. In addition to that, it is also a state for determining the number of continuations of the time saving state A to be shifted after that.

The effect mode in the time saving state B will be described with reference to FIGS. 549 and 550. FIG. Figure 549 (a) shows that the ceiling lottery number of times (150 times in this 17th control example) results in a lottery result different from the big hit (that is, the loss including the small hit), and after shifting to the third time saving state, the It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation aspect performed with the 3 design display apparatus 81. FIG. As described above, when transitioning to the third time saving state, first, the third time saving state B in which the lottery of the second special symbol is mainly executed is set, and the variable display of the special symbol of the specific number of times in the third time saving state B is executed It shifts to the 3rd time saving state A by being done. 549(a) is a diagram showing a display mode during the third time saving state B. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 549 (a), in the third time-saving state B, the characters "-addition RUSH-" are displayed above the main display area Dm, and every time the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. At the same time, an effect is executed in which a character 801 imitating a rabbit is given a privilege of being in a treasure box 810 by a character 809 imitating an angel. In FIG. 549 (a), the contents including a pattern with the number "5" indicating that the number of times of time reduction was added 5 times from the treasure box 810 (the number of times of time reduction was elected to the time saving pattern of 5 times) 810a is given to the character 801 as an example. Also, as shown in FIG. 549(a), at the upper left of the main display area Dm, there is a small display area Dm4 with the characters "Right shot" attached, and below the small display area Dm4, "Last 8 times , and a small display area Dm13 with the characters "stock 50+10 times" are formed below the small display area Dm7.

In the small display area Dm7, the display content indicating the number of times of the remaining second special symbol lottery until the time saving state B is terminated (shift to the time saving state A) is displayed, and the second special symbol lottery is displayed in the time saving state B. Each time is executed, the value is decremented by 1 and displayed. In addition, in the small display area Dm13, the display content indicating the number of times of time saving after shifting to the time saving state A is displayed. In , the number of times of time saving acquired (added) by winning time saving pattern is displayed respectively. That is, in the example of FIG. 549 (a), at the time of reaching the ceiling lottery number of times (shifted to the third time saving state B), 50 times of time saving state A is guaranteed, and further, the lottery of the second special symbol , exemplifies a situation in which the number of times of time reduction for 10 times has been successfully acquired (added) by winning the time reduction pattern. In addition, in the present 17th control example, the number of times of time saving in the third time saving state related to reaching the ceiling lottery number of times is uniformly set to 61 times. Of these, 11 times are set to the third time saving state B, and 50 times are set to the third time saving state A.

Also, in the sub-display area Ds, a text saying "Increase the number of chance times!" is displayed. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that the number of time saving times of the chance time (time saving state A) is added (stocked) every time the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. can. In the seventeenth control example, in the time-saving state, a game ball is frequently entered into both the first ball entrance 64r and the second ball entrance 1641 by hitting to the right. For this reason, if the player hits right after shifting to the third time-saving state B, not only the lottery for the second special symbol but also the lottery for the first special symbol is almost certainly executed. Here, in this 17th control example, a simultaneous variation specification is adopted in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed at the same time. It is allowed to start the variable display of symbols and to start the variable display of the second special symbols during the variable display of the first special symbols. Further, in the time saving state B, a relatively long variation time (for example, 120 seconds) is set for the first special symbol. Therefore, while the variable display of the first special symbol is performed once, the lottery game with the second special symbol can be performed for the remaining number of times until shifting to the time saving state A.例文帳に追加The number of continuous times of the time saving state B is set to 11, which is an intermediate number, because one lottery of the first special pattern and 10 lotteries of the second special pattern are totaled. As a result, the number of lotteries for the second special symbol can be set to 10 times, which is a good number of times, before shifting to the time saving state A.例文帳に追加

FIG. 549(b) is the third time saving state B in the seventeenth control example, and is a diagram showing an effect mode after the eleventh variable display is completed. When the eleventh variable display ends in the third time saving state B, an effect is executed to notify the number of time saving times of the third time saving state A to be shifted to thereafter. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 549(b), characters indicating the number of time reductions are displayed in the central portion of the main display area Dm. The example of FIG. 549 (b) illustrates a case where the characters "TOTAL 110 times" are displayed. The example shows a situation in which 60 times of working hours are added to the number of times. In addition, the characters "enter chance time" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. With these display contents, it is possible to make the player easily understand the number of time reductions in the third time reduction state A.

Next, with reference to FIG. 550, an effect mode when winning a big hit or a small hit during the time saving state B (additional RUSH) will be described. In the 17th control example, if a big win is won during the time saving state B or if a V win occurs after the small win wins and the big win is won, the game state after the big win is set to the second time saving state. In this second time-saving state, similarly to the third time-saving state based on the number of ceiling lottery arrivals, first, after the time-saving state B of 11 times is set, it shifts to the time-saving state A. Therefore, from the player's point of view, if a jackpot is won during the time saving state B (additional RUSH), it will be as if the time saving state B (additional RUSH) is restarted after the big win. Furthermore, since the number of times of time saving after the second special symbol jackpot is configured to be set to 86 times, except for 11 times digested in time saving state B, time saving state A that shifts after time saving state B The time saving state B is restarted from the beginning in a state where 75 times are guaranteed as the number of times of time saving. Therefore, since the number of times of time saving is set larger than that of the third time saving state accompanying the reaching of the number of ceiling lottery times, a big hit can be expected during the time saving state B.例文帳に追加

As shown in FIG. 550, when a big win or a small win is won during the time-saving state B, contents 810a containing a pattern with the letters “RUSH” appear from the treasure box 810, and an effect given to the character 801. is executed. In addition, the display indicating the number of times of time saving displayed in the small display area Dm13 is changed to the display content of "stock 75 times". Furthermore, the characters "Additional RUSH reset confirmed!!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. By these display contents, it is possible to make the player easily understand that the additional RUSH can be restarted from the beginning after obtaining 75 time-saving times. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 551, a method of transitioning between game states in the seventeenth control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 551, in this 17th control example, five types of game states of the normal state, the second time saving state A, the second time saving state B, the third time saving state A, and the third time saving state B as the game state is provided. The normal state is set to a low-probability state of normal symbols, and is composed of a game state in which the normal symbol variation shortening function (variable short) does not operate. In other words, the game state is disadvantageous for the player who needs to proceed with the game by executing the lottery for the first special symbol having a low degree of advantage by hitting left.

In addition, the second time reduction state A is set to a high probability state of normal symbols, and since it is configured in a game state in which the normal symbol variation reduction function (variable short) operates, right first ball entrance 64r by right hitting Although the game ball frequently enters both the second ball entrance 1641 and the second special symbol fluctuation time, an extremely long variation time (for example, 600 seconds) is set, so the right first ball entrance It is composed of a game state in which only the lottery of the first special symbol based on the ball entering 64r is executed. In addition, the second time saving state B is set to a high probability state of normal symbols similarly to the second time saving state A, and is composed of a game state in which the normal symbol variation reduction function (variable short) operates. Unlike the time saving state A, the variation time of the first special symbol is longer and the variation time of the second special symbol is significantly shorter, so the lottery of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second entrance 1641. It is configured in a game state in which only is executed. Here, since the lottery for the second special symbol has a higher degree of advantage than the lottery for the first special symbol, the second time-saving state B has a higher advantage than the second time-saving state A. .

In addition, the third time reduction state A is set to a special symbol low probability state and a normal symbol low probability state, and is composed of a game state in which a normal symbol variation reduction function (variable short) operates. In addition, as in the second time-saving state A, the game ball frequently enters the right first ball entrance 64r and the second ball entrance 1641 by hitting to the right, but the variation time of the second special symbol is extremely Since a long variation time (for example, 600 seconds) is set, it is configured in a game state in which the lottery of the first special symbol based on the ball entering the right first ball entrance 64r is executed. That is, compared to the second time-saving state A, the degree of advantage is low because the probability of winning the normal symbol is low, but the game state is configured to have a higher degree of advantage than in the normal state. Here, in the 17th control example, as in the 16th control example, the number of random numbers (counter values) determined to be normal symbol hits is different by only one. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the difference in the degree of advantage (that the degree of advantage of the third time saving state A is lower than that of the second time saving state A). Therefore, when the player shifts to the third time-saving state A, the player can be made to feel as if he/she has obtained the same value as when shifting to the second time-saving state A, so that the player's interest in the game is further improved. can be made

Furthermore, the third time saving state B is set to a normal symbol low probability state like the third time saving state A, and is composed of a game state in which the normal symbol variation reduction function (variable short) operates, but the third Unlike the time-saving state A, the variation time of the first special symbol becomes longer and the variation time of the second special symbol becomes significantly shorter, so the lottery of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second entrance 1641. It is configured in a game state in which only is executed. Therefore, the 3rd time saving state B turns into a game state with a higher advantage degree than the 3rd time saving state A.

First, referring to the upper part of FIG. 551, a method of shifting from the normal state to another game state will be described. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 551, there is a possibility of transition from the normal state to another game state when a jackpot is won or when the ceiling lottery number of times is reached without winning a jackpot. Specifically, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 551, when the jackpot A17 determined at a rate of 90% is won when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is the second. It is set to the time saving state A. In addition, if a jackpot B17 determined at a rate of 10% is won in the case of winning a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbols in the normal state, the game state after the jackpot ends is more advantageous than the second time-saving state A. The second time saving state B is set. Furthermore, when the ceiling lottery number of times (150 times) is reached without winning the jackpot in the normal state, the third time saving state B is set. The second time-saving state B and the third time-saving state B have substantially the same degree of advantage, and the second time-saving state A is constituted by a game state in which the degree of advantage is clearly lower than that of the second time-saving state B and the third time-saving state B. Therefore, in the normal state, the game is expected to reach the ceiling lottery number of times without winning the jackpot rather than the jackpot winning, which is likely to shift to the second time-saving state A with a low degree of advantage. can be done. In other words, it is possible to realize novel game characteristics in which the game is played while strongly expecting that the player will not win the jackpot, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, referring to the middle left side of FIG. 551, a method of shifting from the second time saving state A to another game state will be described. As shown in the middle left side of FIG. 551, from the second time saving state A to another game state, when the jackpot is won, when the time saving number of times has passed without winning the jackpot, and when the jackpot is not won, the ceiling There is a possibility that it will be transferred when the number of lotteries is reached. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 551, when the jackpot B17 is determined at a rate of 10% when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery in the second time saving state A, the game after the jackpot ends A state is set to the 2nd time saving state B. Further, when the number of times of time saving has passed in the second time saving state A, the game is set to a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player. Furthermore, when reaching the ceiling lottery frequency (150 times) without winning a jackpot in the second time saving state A, the second time saving state B is set. In addition, in order to reach the ceiling lottery number in the time saving state A, once transition to the second time saving state B, and in the second time saving state B, the number of times of lottery exceeding the number of times of the ceiling lottery is added. , it is necessary to shift to the time-saving state A, and reach the ceiling lottery number of times without winning a jackpot. Since the number of time reductions given at the end of the jackpot when transitioning to the second time reduction state B is 61 times or 86 times, in order to add the number of time reductions exceeding the ceiling lottery number, during the second time reduction state B It is necessary to generate at least 64 or more additions to . However, 80% of the number of time reductions added in the second special symbol lottery of 1 is 5 times, and the percentage of 10 or more time reductions added is only 20%. It becomes difficult to increase the number of times. Furthermore, since the phenomenon of reaching the ceiling lottery number of times without winning the jackpot is also a relatively unlikely phenomenon in the first place, the case of reaching the ceiling lottery number of times (150 times after the jackpot ends) while maintaining the second time saving state A is extremely rare.

On the other hand, if the jackpot A17 determined at a rate of 90% is won when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the second time saving state A, the game state after the jackpot ends is again the second time saving state. Set to A (loop the second time saving state A). Therefore, in the second time-saving state A, the game is played with the expectation that the jackpot is basically won and the jackpot B17 determined at a low rate (10% rate) is determined when the jackpot is won. It becomes a playability to perform.

Next, with reference to the lower left side of FIG. 551, a method of shifting from the second time saving state B to another game state will be described. As shown on the lower left side of Fig. 551, from the second time saving state B to another game state, a special symbol lottery of a specific number of times (6 times or 11 times) is executed without winning either a big hit or a small hit. May migrate only if Specifically, as shown in the lower left side of FIG. 551, when the lottery of the special symbols of the specific number of times (6 times or 11 times) is completed in the second time saving state B, the advantage degree is lower than the second time saving state B It shifts to the second time saving state A. On the other hand, in the second time-saving state B, a big win is won in the lottery of the second special symbols before the lottery of the special symbols is executed for a specific number of times, or the big win is substantially fixed. When the jackpot is won, the game state after the jackpot ends is again set to the second time saving state B (the most advantageous second time saving state B is looped). Therefore, in the second time-saving state B, the player expects to win a big win or a small win before the lottery of special symbols of a specific number of times is completed. The probability of winning either a big hit or a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is 1/10, and the number of times of lottery of the second special symbol is basically 5 until the lottery of the special symbols of the specified number of times is completed. times or 10 times, so the possibility of looping the second time saving state B is about 41% when the number of lotteries of the second special symbol is 5 times, and when the number of lotteries of the second special symbol is 10 times Approximately 65%. In addition, as described above, even if neither the jackpot nor the small hit is won during the second time saving state B, the number of time saving times is set to 5 with a high probability for each lottery of the second special symbol in the second time saving state B. Since it can be acquired (added) more than once, the degree of advantage (number of continuations) of the second time-saving state A, which is set after the lottery of special symbols for a specific number of times, is normally It can be higher than the second time reduction state A) set based on. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to the middle right side of FIG. 551, a method of shifting from the third time saving state B to another game state will be described. As shown in the middle right side of FIG. 551, from the third game state B to another game state, when a big win or a small win is won, and a specific number of times (11 times) without winning a big win or a small win There is a possibility of moving when the lottery of special symbols is executed. Specifically, as shown in the middle right side of FIG. 551, in the third time-saving state B, the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, or the jackpot is substantially determined and the jackpot is won. Then, the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to the second time saving state B.例文帳に追加In addition, when the lottery of the special symbols for a specific number of times (11 times) is completed in the third time saving state B, the state shifts to the third time saving state A having a lower advantage than the third time saving state B. Therefore, in the third time-saving state B, the game can be played with a strong expectation that either a big win or a small win will be won in a lottery of special symbols within a specified number of times (11 times). In addition, like the second time saving state B described above, in the third time saving state B, it is possible to acquire (add) the number of time saving times 5 times or more with a high probability for each lottery of the second special symbol, so the specific number of times It is possible to improve the degree of advantage (the number of times of continuation) of the third time-saving state A that is set after the lottery of the special symbols is finished. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to the lower right side of FIG. 551, a method of shifting from the third time saving state A to another game state will be described. As shown on the lower right side of FIG. 551, from the third time saving state A to another game state, when the jackpot is won, when the time saving number of times has passed without winning the jackpot, and when the jackpot is not won There is a possibility that it will be transferred when the number of lotteries is reached. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 551, if you win the jackpot A17 determined at a rate of 90% when you win the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol in the third time-saving state A, the game after the jackpot ends A state is set to the 2nd time saving state A. In addition, when winning the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbols in the third time saving state A, when winning the jackpot B17 determined at a rate of 10%, the game state after the jackpot is finished is set to the second time saving state B. be. Further, when the number of times of time saving has passed in the third time saving state A, the normal state disadvantageous to the player is set. Furthermore, in the third time-saving state A, when the ceiling lottery number of times (150 times) is reached without winning a jackpot, the third time-saving state B is set. As with the second time saving state A, it is extremely rare to reach the ceiling lottery number in the third time saving state A. , a phenomenon that can not occur unless you are hooked up to the ceiling lottery number of times). Therefore, in the third time-saving state A, similarly to the second time-saving state A, the jackpot is basically won, and the jackpot B17 determined at a low rate (10% rate) when the jackpot is won. It is a game property that the game is played in anticipation that is determined.

Thus, in the present 17th control example, in addition to the game property of going back and forth between the five types of game states, even in the same time saving state, the time saving state A (second time saving state A, third time saving state A ) and the time saving state B (the second time saving state B, the third time saving state B) are configured to greatly differ in the degree of advantage and game characteristics, so that the game can be sharpened. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

<Electrical Configuration in Seventeenth Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 552, the details of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the seventeenth control example will be described. FIG. 552 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the seventeenth control example. As shown in FIG. 552, the ROM 202 in the seventeenth control example replaces the jackpot type selection 12 table 202kb with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the above-described twelfth control example (see FIG. 407), the jackpot type selection 17 table 202qb is provided, a second winning random number 17 table 202qc is provided instead of the second winning random number 12 table 202kc, and a variation pattern 17 table 202qd is provided instead of the variation pattern 12 table 202kd , Small hit random number 17 table 202qe is provided instead of small hit random number 12 table 202ke, Small hit type selection 17 table 202qf is provided instead of small hit type selection 12 table 202kf, Time saving random number It is a point that random number 17 table 202qh per time saving is provided instead of 12 table 202kh, that per time saving type selection table 202qi is added, and variation pattern scenario table 202qj is added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the ROM 202 in the twelfth control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

First, with reference to FIG. 554(a), details of the jackpot type selection 17 table 202qb in the seventeenth control example will be described. FIG. 554(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the jackpot type selection 17 table 202qb in the seventeenth control example. As shown in FIG. 554(a), the jackpot type selection 17 table 202qb in the seventeenth control example includes a special figure 1 jackpot 17 table 202qb1 referred to for selecting the jackpot type of the first special symbol, and a It is configured at least with a special figure 2 jackpot 17 table 202qb2 that is referenced to select the jackpot type of the 2 special symbols.

FIG. 554(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special figure 1 jackpot 17 table 202qb1. As shown in FIG. 554(b), in the special figure 1 jackpot 17 table 202qb1 in this 17th control example, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, "jackpot A17" and "jackpot B17", 2 types are specified. That is, in the special figure 1 jackpot 17 table 202qb1, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 89", "jackpot A17" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the first hit type A "jackpot B17" is defined as a jackpot type in association with the value of the counter C2 in the range of "90 to 99".

"Jackpot A17" has 5 rounds of the jackpot, and the game state after the jackpot is set to the second time-saving state A (mainly the time-saving state in which the lottery of the first special symbol is executed) with 51 times of time-saving times. It is a jackpot of the type that is played. In addition, "jackpot B17" has 5 rounds of the jackpot, and the game state after the jackpot is the second time-saving state B with 56 times of time-saving times (mainly the time-saving state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed). It is a jackpot of the type set to . In addition, when the lottery of 11 special symbols is executed in the second time saving state B, it shifts to the second time saving state A, and after that basically, the number of time saving times has passed (end) or a big hit is won. Until, the second time saving state A is maintained. As described above, since the second time saving state B is more advantageous for the player than the second time saving state A, the "jackpot B17" is a jackpot type with a higher advantage than the "jackpot A17". In addition, while 90 random numbers out of 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the value of the first winning type counter C2 are associated with "jackpot A17", "jackpot B17" Since 10 random numbers (counter values) are associated with each other, when the lottery of the first special symbol results in a big hit, ``jackpot A17'' occurs at a rate of 90%, and ``jackpot value B17'' occurs at a rate of 10%. ”.

Next, with reference to FIG. 554(c), details of the 17 table 202qb2 for the special figure 2 jackpot described above will be described. FIG. 554(c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of this special figure 2 jackpot 17 table 202qb2. As shown in FIG. 554(c), in the special figure 2 jackpot 17 table 202qb2 in the 17th control example, as the second special symbol jackpot types, "jackpot C17", "jackpot D17", and "jackpot E17” and three types are defined. That is, in the special figure 2 jackpot 17 table 202qb2, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 84", "jackpot C17" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the first hit type When the value of the counter C2 is in the range of "85 to 89", "jackpot D17" is defined as the jackpot type, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "90 to 99". As the jackpot type, "jackpot E17" is associated and defined.

As shown in FIG. 554(c), "jackpot C17", "jackpot D17", and "jackpot E17" differ in the number of rounds of jackpots from 15 rounds, 8 rounds, and 4 rounds, respectively. As the game state after the end, the second time saving state B of 86 time saving times is commonly set. Therefore, when a big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the second time-saving state B with a high degree of advantage is set at a rate of 100%, so the lottery of the second special symbol is better than the lottery of the second special symbol. also become more advantageous. In addition, 85 random numbers out of 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the value of the first winning type counter C2 are associated with the "jackpot C17", and five random numbers are associated with the "jackpot D17". Numerical values (counter values) are associated, and "big hit E17" is associated with 10 random numbers (counter values). At a rate of "jackpot C17", at a rate of 5% it is "jackpot D17", and at a rate of 10% it is "jackpot E17".

Thus, in this 17th control example, even if the lottery of the first special symbol is a big hit, the second special symbol is transferred to the advantageous second time saving state B only at a rate of 10%. When the lottery is a big hit, the second time-saving state B, which is always advantageous, is set. can be made Therefore, since the game can be sharpened, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 555(a), details of the second winning random number 17 table 202qc in the seventeenth control example will be described. This second winning random number 17 table 202qc, like the second winning random number 12 table 202kc in the above-described twelfth control example, is referred to when performing a lottery for normal symbols, and is a random number (second This is a data table that defines the counter value of the winning random number counter C2.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 555(a), 299 random numbers of "0 to 298" are used as random numbers (counter values) determined to hit normal symbols in a low probability state of normal symbols. While the (counter value) is defined in association, 300 random numbers of "0 to 299" ( counter value) are defined in association with each other. Since the second winning random number counter C4 can take a value in the range of "0 to 299", the probability of winning the normal pattern in the low probability state of the normal pattern is 299/300, and the normal pattern in the high probability state of the normal pattern. The probability of winning the symbol is 1 (300/300). In other words, in the 17th control example, even in the low probability state of the normal symbol, it is determined that the winning is determined in the lottery of the normal symbol almost every time. This is for the purpose of almost eliminating the difference in the degree of advantage between the second time saving state and the third time saving state. By configuring in this way, the degree of advantage in the case of reaching the ceiling lottery number of times and shifting to the third time saving state can be made almost equal to the second time saving state, so reaching the ceiling lottery number of times is more likely. The game can be played with strong expectations.

Even in the normal state, if the through gate 67 is passed by hitting to the right and the normal pattern lottery is executed, the normal pattern wins with a high probability. , the opening period of the electric accessory 64ra is also shortened (for example, to 0.1 second), so even if the player continues to hit to the right, it is almost impossible to enter the game ball into the right first ball inlet 64r. . In other words, since the game efficiency is lower than when the game ball is continuously shot aiming at the first ball entrance 64 by hitting to the left, it is possible to suppress the irregular game method of hitting to the right in the normal state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 555(b), details of the variation pattern 17 table 202qd in the seventeenth control example will be described. Similar to the variation pattern 17 table 202kd in the twelfth control example, this variation pattern 17 table 202qd selects a variation pattern (variation time) according to the result of the lottery when a special symbol lottery is executed. is a data table referenced for FIG. 555(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern 17 table 202qd in the seventeenth control example.

As shown in FIG. 555(b), the variation pattern 17 table 202qd in this 17th control example is referred to to select a variation pattern (variation time) when a special symbol lottery is executed in a normal state. Variation patterns (fluctuation time) when a special symbol lottery is executed in a normal table 202qd1 and a time-saving state A (second time-saving state A, third time-saving state A) in which the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed. A special symbol lottery is executed in a special 1 time saving table 202qd2 that is referred to for selecting and a time saving state B (2nd time saving state B, 3rd time saving state B) in which the lottery of the 2nd special symbol is mainly executed. It is configured at least with a special 2 time reduction table 202qd3 that is referred to in order to select a variation pattern (variation time) when it is performed. Here, regarding the normal table 202qd1, since it has the same defined contents as the normal state variation pattern 12 table 202kd1 (see FIG. 414) in the twelfth control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted here. In addition, in the 17th control example, there is no possibility of winning the time-saving symbol in the first special symbol lottery, and the special symbol lottery is different from the 12th control example in that there is a high probability that the special symbol lottery will come off with a small hit. are doing. For this reason, the regulation contents related to the small hit of the first special symbol in the normal table 202qd1 of the seventeenth control example are the regulations related to the deviation of the first special symbol in the normal state fluctuation pattern 12 table 202kd1 of the twelfth control example. be the same as the content.

Next, with reference to Drawing 555 (c), the details of table 202qd2 for special 1 time saving which constitutes change pattern 17 table 202qd mentioned above are explained. FIG.555(c) is the figure which showed the specification content of this special 1 time reduction table 202qd2. As shown in FIG. 555 (c), the lottery result of the first special symbol is out (small hit), for the entire range (0 to 198) that can be taken by the variation type counter CS1, variation as a variation pattern A short outage of 3 seconds is associated and defined. Further, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, a short hit with a variation time of 5 seconds is defined as a variation pattern in association with the entire possible range of the variation type counter CS1.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 555 (c), the lottery result of the second special symbol is for the short-time election, the variation pattern for the full range (0 to 198) that the variation type counter CS1 can take is defined in association with a long deviation with a fluctuation time of 600 seconds. In addition, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big win or a small win, a long win with a variation time of 600 seconds is defined as a variation pattern in association with the entire range that the variation type counter CS1 can take. there is Therefore, in the second time saving state A and the third time saving state A in which the table 202qd1 for special time saving is referred to, each time the first special symbol lottery is executed by hitting to the right, a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds or less On the other hand, when the second special symbol lottery is executed, a very long variation time of 600 seconds is set regardless of the lottery result, forming a game state in which only the first special symbol lottery is executed. can do. In addition, as described above, in the seventeenth control example, when hitting to the right in the time saving state, the game ball frequently enters both the right first ball entrance 64r and the second ball entrance 1641, and Since the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, in the time saving state A, while the second special symbol is long varying, the first special symbol is displayed. lottery can be performed multiple times. That is, it is configured as a game state in which the game is progressed mainly by lottery of the first special symbols.

In addition, regarding the special 2 time saving table 202qd3, for the time saving state variation pattern 12 table 202kd2 (see FIG. 415) of the 12th control example described above, the variation time of the first special symbol is 120 seconds regardless of the lottery result Since the only difference is in that, the detailed description thereof will be omitted here. In the game state (2nd time saving state B, 3rd time saving state B) in which this special 2 time saving table 202qd3 is referred to, the 2nd special design while the long variation (120 seconds) of the 1st special design is being performed can be continuously executed for 5 seconds or less, a game state is formed in which the game proceeds mainly by lottery of the second special symbols. The variation time of the first special symbol is changed from 600 seconds to 120 seconds in the twelfth control example. It is intended to avoid a long period of time during which the lottery for the first special symbol cannot be executed because the lottery for the symbol remains for a long time. On the other hand, if the lottery time of the first special symbol is shortened too much, the lottery of the first special symbol will be executed multiple times in the second time saving state B or the third time saving state B, and the number of times of lottery of the second special symbol will increase. Since there is a possibility that it will decrease, we have set a relatively long period of 120 seconds.

Next, with reference to FIG. 556(a), details of the small hit random number 17 table 202qe will be described. This small hit random number 17 table 202qe is similar to the small hit random number 12 table 202ke (see FIG. 409 (d)) in the twelfth control example described above, and is determined to be a small hit in the special symbol lottery (first This is a data table that defines the counter value of the winning random number counter C1. Drawing 556 (a) is a figure showing the contents of regulation of small hit random number 17 table 202qe in this 17th control example. As shown in FIG. 556(a), in this 17th control example, the random number value associated with the first special symbol and the second special symbol (counter value of the first per random number counter C1) is made different. ing. That is, the probability of winning a small hit is made different between the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 556 (a), as the range of the random number (counter value) determined to be a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol, "18 to 899" is defined. , "18 to 89" is defined as the range of the random number (counter value) determined to be a small hit in the second special symbol lottery. Of the 900 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 899" that can be taken by the first random number counter C1, random numbers that are determined to be small hits in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery ( Counter values) are 882 and 72 respectively, so the probability of getting a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol is 49/50 (882/900), and the lottery of the second special symbol has a small hit. The probability is 2/25 (72/900). Considering that the probability of winning a big hit in the special symbol lottery is 1/50, the first special symbol lottery wins either a big win or a small win. Also, in the lottery for the second special symbol, a big win or a small win is won with a probability of 1/10 (2/25+1/10). Here, although the details will be described later, the small hit of the first special symbol is selected only for the disadvantageous small hit type that cannot win the jackpot (V winning cannot occur), so another control example is substantially the same as the deviation in On the other hand, as for the second special symbol small win, only the advantageous small win type that wins the big win by almost certainly generating the V prize by hitting right during the small win game is selected. Therefore, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol is not affected by the small win, so it is 1/50, whereas the jackpot probability of the second special symbol is substantially the total probability of the big win and the small win. Therefore, it becomes 1/10. Therefore, the lottery for the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery for the first special symbol.

Next, with reference to FIG. 556(b), details of the small hit type selection 17 table 202qf in the seventeenth control example will be described. This small hit type selection 17 table 202qf is similar to the small hit type selection 12 table 202kf in the twelfth control example described above, in order to determine the type of small hit when a small hit is won in a special symbol lottery. A referenced data table. Figure 556 (b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of this small hit type selection 17 table 202qf. As shown in FIG. 556(b), in the small hit type selection 17 table 202qf in the 17th control example, only one type of "small hit A17" is defined as the small hit type of the first special symbol. On the other hand, three types of "small hit B17" to "small hit D17" are defined as the small hit types of the second special symbol.

"Small win A17" is a small win for which the small win winning device 2650 is opened and closed. In other words, since the V winning device 1650 provided with the specific area 1650a that triggers the winning of the big win is not opened, it is a small winning type with no possibility of winning the big win (V winning occurs). In addition, "small win B17" to "small win D17" are all small wins of the type that the V winning device 1650 is opened, and the game ball can be easily entered into the specific area 1650a by hitting to the right. Since it can be done, it is a small hit type that substantially determines the jackpot election. In addition, "jackpot B17" is a jackpot C17 (15 round special figure 2 hour short jackpot) is executed when V winning occurs, and "jackpot C17" is a jackpot D17 (8 round special figure 2 o'clock short jackpot) is executed, and as for "jackpot D17", jackpot E17 (4 round special figure 2 o'clock short jackpot) is executed when V winning occurs. Therefore, among the small wins of the second special symbols, the "small win B17" has the highest advantage, and the "small win D17" has the lowest advantage.

As shown in FIG. 556(b), the "small hit A17" is associated with the value of the whole range (0 to 99) that the small hit type counter C5 can take. Therefore, when a small win is won in the lottery of the first special symbols, a "small win A17" that cannot generate a V prize is always determined. Therefore, the small hit of the first special symbol becomes a lottery result substantially equivalent to the loss in other control examples.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 556 (b), as the defined content for the second special symbol, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is in the range of "0 to 49", "small hit B17" is defined in association Then, the value of the small per type counter C5 is defined in association with the range of "50 to 69", "small per type C17" is defined, and the value of the small per type counter C5 is in the range of "70 to 99" , "small winning D17" is associated and defined. Therefore, when the second special symbol lottery results in a small hit, the ratio of determining the "small hit B17" is 50%, and the ratio of determining the "small hit C17" is 20%. The rate at which the small hit D17” is determined is 30%. When the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the distribution of the most advantageous "jackpot A17" is set to 85% (see Fig. 554 (c)). It can be said that the setting is such that the degree of advantage is likely to be higher in the case of winning a big win in , than in the case of winning a small win and generating a V prize. Therefore, in the time-saving state B, the game can be played with a stronger expectation of winning a jackpot with a low probability (1/50) rather than a small win with a high probability (2/25). , the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIG.556(c), the detail of random-number 17 table 202qh per time saving in this 17th control example is demonstrated. This time saving random number 17 table 202qh is, like the time saving random number 12 table 202kh in the above-described twelfth control example, a random number determined to be a time saving design winning by lottery of special symbols (counter value of the first per random number counter C1 ) is defined in the data table. FIG. 566(c) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the time saving per random number 17 table 202qh. As shown in FIG. 556 (c), in this 17th control example, as the random number (the value of the first random number counter C1 per random number counter C1) that is determined to be short-time winning in the second special symbol lottery, "90 to 899" 810 random numbers (counter values) are associated and defined. Of the 900 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 899" that can be taken by the first random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be time-saving winning is 810, so the 17th In the example of control, the probability of being determined to be short-time winning when the second special symbol lottery is executed is 9/10 (810/900). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 556(c), the first special symbol is not associated with a random number (counter value) determined to be time-saving election, so the first special symbol lottery is time-saving. The possibility of winning is zero.

Thus, in the 17th control example, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, the time saving symbol is won with a high probability (probability of 9/10). By constructing in this way, in the time saving state B where the lottery of the second special pattern is mainly executed, the number of times of time saving can be added by winning the time saving pattern almost every fluctuation in the limited number of times of lottery. Therefore, the degree of advantage in the time saving state A can be determined according to the content of the lottery in the time saving state B set before the time saving state A, so that it is possible to realize a very special and novel game property. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to Drawing 557 (a), the details of time reduction per classification selection table 202qi added to ROM202 in the 17th example of control are explained. This time saving type selection table 202qi is a data table referred to for selecting the type of time saving design when winning the time saving design. As shown in FIG. 557(a), the time saving per type selection table 202qi defines the type of time saving design (time saving per type) and the value of the first per type counter C2 in association with each other. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 557 (a), the value "0" of the first hit type counter C2 is defined by associating "time saving pattern A" with a time saving number of times of 50 times as a time saving per type. Then, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "1 to 19" in association with "time saving pattern B" with a time saving number of times of 10 times as a time saving hit type, and the first hit type counter C2 The value of "20 to 99" is defined in association with "time saving pattern C" with 5 times of time saving as a time saving per type.

Of the random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first per type counter C2, random numbers associated with "time saving pattern A", "time saving pattern B", and "time saving pattern C" (Counter value) is 1, 19, and 80, respectively, so when the time-saving design is won in the lottery of the second special design, the percentage of "time-saving design A" is determined is 1%. The rate of determining the time saving pattern B" is 19%, and the rate of determining the time saving pattern C" is 80%. Therefore, in the time saving state B (second time saving state B, third time saving state B) where the lottery of the second special pattern is executed, the number of time saving times is added 50 times at a rate of 1% when the time saving pattern is won. (Time saving pattern A is determined), the number of time saving is added 10 times at a rate of 19% (time saving pattern B is decided), and the number of time saving is added 5 times at a rate of 80% (time saving pattern C is decided ). As a result, variations can be provided for the number of times of time saving to be added to the time saving state B (during execution of the additional RUSH), so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 557(b), details of the variation pattern scenario table 202qj added to the ROM 202 in the seventeenth control example will be described. This variation pattern scenario table 202qj is a variation pattern table type (normal table 202qd1, special 1 hour reduction table 202qd2 or special 2 hour reduction table 202qd3) is defined. When the special symbol lottery is executed, the variation pattern scenario table 202qj is used to determine the type of variation pattern table referred to for selecting the variation pattern (variation time), and the determined variation pattern table is used. A variation pattern is selected with reference to it.

FIG. 557(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of this variation pattern scenario table 202qj. As shown in FIG. 557(b), this variation pattern scenario table 202qj includes the previous jackpot type, the currently set gaming state, and the number of special symbol lotteries after the jackpot ends (the value of the special lottery counter 203qa ) is defined in association with the type of the variation pattern table to be referred to.

Specifically, in a situation where the previous jackpot type is "jackpot A17" and the current game state is a normal state, the number of special symbol lotteries (the value of the special lottery counter 203qa) is in the range of 52 to 150, and 212 to A normal table 202qd1 is defined in association with the 300 range. Therefore, when the special symbol lottery is executed within these lottery times, the normal table 202qd1 is referred to and the variation pattern (variation time) is selected. On the other hand, no variation pattern table is associated with other ranges. This means that the range of 1 time to 51 times after the end of the jackpot A17 is always set to the second time saving state (51 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h at the end of the jackpot A17), and the end of the jackpot A17 The range of the last 151 times to 211 times is always set to the third time-saving state based on the reaching of the ceiling lottery number of times, so there is no possibility that the special symbol lottery will be executed in the normal state.

In addition, in the present 17th control example, when the value of the special figure lottery counter 203qa reaches 300 (when the number of lotteries of the special symbol reaches 300 times without winning the prize), the value of the special figure lottery counter 203qa The configuration is such that the value is updated to 150. That is, even when the ceiling lottery number of times is reached one or more times after the ceiling lottery number of times is reached, the third time saving state B can be set each time the ceiling lottery number of times is reached. Therefore, even if a so-called addiction occurs, it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively disadvantaged. In addition, since it is not necessary to define the scenario of the special figure lottery frequency exceeding 300 times for the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202qj, the data amount of the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202qj can be reduced. Therefore, the capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced.

As shown in Figure 557 (b), in the situation that the previous jackpot type is "jackpot A17" and the current gaming state is a time-saving state, the number of special symbol lotteries (the value of the special lottery counter 203qa) is 1 to 51. and the range of 163 to 300, the special 1 hour reduction table 202qd2 is defined in association with the number of special symbol lotteries (value of the special lottery counter 203qa) for the range of 151 to 162, A special 2 hour reduction table 202qd3 is defined in association. Therefore, the number of lotteries within 51 times after the end of the jackpot A17, and 163 times or more, as long as the time saving state continues (the number of time saving times remains), the special 1 time saving table 202qd2 is referred to, so the first special symbol Forms a time saving state A in which the lottery of is mainly executed. Moreover, since the table 202qd3 for special time saving is referred to in the lottery number of 151 times to 162 times after the end of the jackpot A17, the time saving state B is formed. Therefore, a very advantageous state is formed in which the lottery for the second special symbol is mainly executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 557(b), in the situation where the last big win type is "jackpot B17" and the current gaming state is the normal state, the same variation as when the previous big win type is "jackpot A17" A pattern scenario is specified. That is, the normal table 202qd1 is defined in association with the range of 52 to 150 and the range of 212 to 300 for the number of special symbol lotteries (the value of the special symbol lottery counter 203qa). Therefore, when the special symbol lottery is executed within these lottery times, the normal table 202qd1 is referred to and the variation pattern (variation time) is selected. On the other hand, in the situation where the jackpot type is "jackpot B17" and the current gaming state is the time saving state, the number of special symbol lotteries (the value of the special lottery counter 203qa) is in the range of 7 to 150 and 163 to 300. For the range, the special 1 time saving table 202qd2 is defined in association with the special symbol lottery number (value of the special figure lottery counter 203qa) for the range of 1 to 6 and the range of 151 to 162. A two-hour reduction table 202qd3 is associated and defined. Therefore, after the end of the jackpot B17 7 times to 150 times lottery number, and 163 times or more lottery number, as long as the time saving state continues (time saving number of times remains) special figure 1 time saving table 202qd2 is referred to Therefore, a time saving state A in which the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed is formed. In addition, after the end of the big hit B17 1 times to 6 times, and 151 times to 162 times of lottery times, since the table 202qd3 for special figure 2 time saving is referred to, time saving state B is formed. Therefore, a very advantageous state in which the lottery for the second special symbol is mainly executed is formed. In addition, unlike "jackpot A17", there is a possibility that the time saving state will continue even if the number of lotteries is in the range of 52 to 150 times. This is because there is a possibility that the number of time reductions exceeding the number of lotteries will be added.

Also, as shown in FIG. 557(b), in the situation where the previous jackpot type is any one of "jackpot C17" to "jackpot E17" and the current gaming state is the normal state, the previous jackpot type is "jackpot A17". ” and “jackpot B17” are defined. That is, the normal table 202qd1 is defined in association with the range of 52 to 150 and the range of 212 to 300 for the number of special symbol lotteries (the value of the special symbol lottery counter 203qa). Therefore, when the special symbol lottery is executed within these lottery times, the normal table 202qd1 is referred to and the variation pattern (variation time) is selected. On the other hand, in the situation where the jackpot type is one of "jackpot C17" to "jackpot E17" and the current gaming state is a time-saving state, the number of special symbol lotteries (the value of the special lottery counter 203qa) is 12 to 150. , and the range of 163 ~ 300, special 1 time saving table 202qd2 is defined in association with the number of special symbol lotteries (value of special figure lottery counter 203qa) range of 1 ~ 11, and 151 ~ The table 202qd3 for special 2 time reduction is matched with respect to the range of 162, and is prescribed|regulated. Therefore, in the number of lotteries of 12 to 150 times after the end of jackpot C17 to jackpot E17, and the number of lotteries of 163 times or more, as long as the time saving state continues (the number of time saving times remains), the special figure 1 time saving table 202qd2 Since it is referred to, the time saving state A in which the lottery of the first special symbol is mainly executed is formed. In addition, in the number of lotteries of 1 to 11 times and 151 to 162 times after the end of the jackpot C17 to jackpot E17, the time saving state B is formed because the special figure 2 time saving table 202qd3 is referred to. Therefore, a very advantageous state in which the lottery for the second special symbol is mainly executed is formed. In the same way as "jackpot B17", "jackpot C17" to "jackpot E17" also set the second time saving state B immediately after the end of the jackpot, so depending on the number of time saving times added in the second time saving state B There is a possibility that the number of times of reduction of working hours exceeding the number of ceiling lotteries will be added.

Also, as shown in FIG. 557(b), in the situation where the jackpot has not been won (situation where the jackpot has not been won even once after the pachinko machine 10 was initialized), the current game state is the normal state. , the number of special symbol lotteries (the value of the special symbol lottery counter 203qa) ranges from 1 to 150 and from 212 to 300, and is defined in association with the normal table 202qd1. Therefore, when the special symbol lottery is executed within these lottery times, the normal table 202qd1 is referred to and the variation pattern (variation time) is selected. On the other hand, in a situation where the jackpot has not been won and the current gaming state is the time saving state, the number of special symbol lotteries (the value of the special figure lottery counter 203qa) is in the range of 163 to 300. A table 202qd2 is defined in correspondence, and a table 202qd3 for special 2 hour reduction is defined in association with the range of 151 to 162 for the number of times of lottery of special symbols (value of special lottery counter 203qa). Therefore, in the lottery number of 163 times or more after the initialization of the pachinko machine 10, as long as the time saving state continues (the time saving number remains), the special figure 1 time saving table 202qd2 is referred to, so the lottery of the first special symbol forms a time-saving state A in which is mainly executed. Further, in the number of lotteries of 151 times to 162 times after the initialization of the pachinko machine 10, the special figure 2 time saving table 202qd3 is referred to, so the time saving state B is formed. Therefore, a very advantageous state is formed in which the lottery for the second special symbol is mainly executed.

Thus, in this 17th control example, the variation pattern scenario is defined by the variation pattern scenario table 202qj, and the variation pattern table is selected according to the previous big hit type, the current gaming state, and the number of lotteries of special symbols. Therefore, a relatively complicated game state transition method can be realized. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 553, details of the RAM 203 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the seventeenth control example will be described. FIG. 553 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in this seventeenth control example. As shown in FIG. 553, the RAM 203 in the seventeenth control example has a special figure lottery counter 203qa, a jackpot flag 203qb, and a special figure 1 It is different in that the small hit flag 203qc and the special figure 2 small hit flag 203qd are added. It is also different in that the small hit A counter 203fg and the small hit B counter 203fh are deleted.

The special figure lottery counter 203qa is a counter for counting the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the end of the jackpot (or after the pachinko machine 10 is initialized). This special figure lottery counter 203qa is updated by adding one value at a time to set the start of the variable display of special symbols (see S38103 in FIG. 564). By referring to the value of this special figure lottery counter 203qa, it is determined whether or not the ceiling lottery number of times has been reached, and selection processing of a variation pattern table corresponding to the lottery number of times from the variation pattern scenario table 202qj is executed.

The big hit flag 203qb is a flag that is set to ON when a special symbol lottery results in a big hit (see Y8011 in FIG. 561 and Y8111 in FIG. 568). This jackpot flag 203qb is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot (see Y727 in FIG. 565 and Y925 in FIG. 571). The jackpot flag 203qb is provided with a jackpot flag for the first special symbol and a jackpot flag for the second special symbol. When the variable display of the first special symbol ends while the variable display of the symbol is being executed, the process of forcibly stopping the second special symbol in the off symbol is executed (see Y726 in FIG. 565). Further, when the variation time of the second special symbol variation display ends while the second special symbol jackpot flag is on and the variation display of the first special symbol is being executed, the first special symbol is displayed. A process of forcibly stopping the game at the outlier symbol is executed (see Y924 in FIG. 571). As a result, when one of the lottery of the first special pattern and the lottery of the second special pattern becomes a big win and the other becomes a big win or a small win, the big win and the big win or the big win and the small win are started in duplicate. It is possible to prevent troubles that may occur.

The special figure 1 small hit flag 203qc is a flag that is set to ON when it becomes a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol (see Y8055 in FIG. 562). This special figure 1 small hit flag 203qc is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the small hit of the first special symbol (see Y759 in FIG. 566). With the special figure 1 small hit flag 203qd ON, and when the variation display of the second special symbol is being executed, when the variation time of the variation display of the first special symbol ends, the second special symbol is removed and the symbol is removed. A forced stop process is executed (see Y753 in FIG. 566). As a result, when one of the lottery of the first special pattern and the lottery of the second special pattern becomes a small hit, and the other becomes a big win or a small win, the small win and the big win or the small win and the small win overlap. It is possible to prevent a problem that is started by

The special figure 2 small hit flag 203qd is a flag that is set to ON when the second special symbol lottery results in a small hit (see Y8055 in FIG. 562). This special figure 2 small hit flag 203qd is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the small hit of the second special symbol (see Y759 in FIG. 566). With the special figure 1 small hit flag 203qd ON, and when the variation display of the second special symbol is being executed, when the variation time of the variation display of the first special symbol ends, the second special symbol is removed and the symbol is removed. A forced stop process is executed (see Y959 in FIG. 573). As a result, when one of the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol becomes a small win and the other becomes a big win or a small win, the small win and the big win or the small win and the small win overlap. It is possible to prevent a problem that is started by

Next, with reference to FIG. 558, the details of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the seventeenth control example will be described. FIG. 558 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in this seventeenth control example. As shown in FIG. 558, the RAM 223 in the 17th control example has a configuration of the RAM 223 in the 12th control example (and the 5th control example) described above (see FIG. 249 (b)). 223lc, an add-on RUSH counter 223qa, a base number counter 223qb, and an add-on number counter 223qc are added. Moreover, it is also different in that the time saving lottery number counter 223db, the mode type storage area 223dc, the long time saving medium flag 223dd, and the initial setting flag 223de are deleted.

The special figure lottery counter 223lc is a counter having the same function as the special figure lottery counter 223lc such as the thirteenth control example described above. That is, it is a counter that is updated in synchronization with the value of the special figure lottery counter 203qa provided in the RAM 223 in the main controller 110, and the value of the special figure lottery counter 203qa is notified by the state command from the main controller 110. The value is updated each time The special symbol lottery counter 223lc always makes the number of lotteries of special symbols after the end of the big win grasped by the main control device 110 and the number of times of lottery of special symbols after the end of the big win grasped by the sound lamp control device 113 side always coincide. be able to.

Counter 223qa during add-on RUSH is a counter indicating the remaining number of times until add-on RUSH (time saving state B) ends. The initial value of this additional RUSH counter 223qa is set to 0, and when the time saving state B (either the second time saving state or the third time saving state) is set, the counter value (time saving A value corresponding to the number of special symbol lotteries until transition to state A) is set. That is, in the case of transition to time saving state B based on reaching the number of ceiling lotteries (150 times), or transition to time saving state B based on winning big hits C17 to E17, the number of lotteries in time saving state B is 11 times. , 11 is set for the counter 223qa during addition RUSH (see S9314A in FIG. 574). In addition, in the case of transition to the time saving state B based on winning the big hit B17, the number of lotteries in the time saving state B is set to 6 times, so 6 is set for the counter 223qa during the addition RUSH (Fig. 574 S9317A). Also, every time a special symbol lottery is executed once in the add-on RUSH, the value is updated by subtracting one. Depending on the value of the add-on RUSH counter 223qa, the display of the remaining number of times until the end of the add-on RUSH is set.

The base number counter 223qb is already determined at the time of entering the time saving state B (additional RUSH) among the time saving times of the time saving state A that shifts after the time saving state B (additional RUSH) is completed (guaranteed It is a counter that indicates the number of times of reduced working hours (the number of reduced working hours of the base). The base number counter 223qb has an initial value set to 0, and when it shifts to the time saving state B, the number of times of lottery of special symbols between the time saving number set with the transition and the time saving state B is calculated. A reduced value is set. More specifically, when the time saving state B is set based on winning one of the big hits C17 to E17, 75 is set for this base number counter 223qb (see S9316A in FIG. 574) . In addition, when the time saving state B is set based on winning the jackpot B17, and when the time saving state B is set based on reaching the ceiling lottery number, 50 to this base number counter 223qb is set (see S9318A in FIG. 574). The value set in this base frequency counter 223qb continues to be displayed on the left side of the small display area Dm13 during the time saving state B (additional RUSH).

The number-of-additions counter 223qc is a counter for counting the number of time-savings added in the time-saving state B (additional RUSH). The initial value of this additional number counter 223qc is set to 0, and in the time saving state B (additional RUSH), the time saving pattern is elected in the lottery of the second special pattern, and the time saving number is added (for the time saving counter 203h The number of time saving times corresponding to the winning time saving pattern is added), the counter value corresponding to the added number of time saving times is added and updated (see S9629A in FIG. 575). The value set in this addition number counter 223qc continues to be displayed on the right side of the small display area Dm13 during the time saving state B (addition RUSH).

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the seventeenth control example>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the seventeenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 559 to 573. FIG. Specifically, in the 17th control example, the special symbol variation process 17 (see FIG. 559) is executed instead of the special symbol variation process 12 (see FIG. 417) in the 12th control example. Since other configurations are the same as those of the twelfth control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted. It should be noted that the change from the special symbol variation processing 12 (see FIG. 417) to the special symbol variation processing 17 (see FIG. 559) is mainly because one special symbol is displayed while the other special symbol is a big hit or a small winning symbol. This is due to the change to the specification of forcibly stopping and displaying one of the special symbols during the variable display with the deviated symbol when the symbol is stopped and displayed.

First, with reference to FIG. 559, special symbol variation processing 17 (Y111) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the seventeenth control example will be described. FIG. 559 is a flow chart showing the contents of this special symbol variation process 17 (Y111). Of this special symbol variation process 17 (Y111), each process of Y231, Y234 and Y238 is the same as each process of Y231, Y234 and Y238 of the special symbol variation process 12 (see FIG. 417) in the twelfth control example. process is executed.

Also, in the special symbol variation process 17 (Y111) of this control example, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation time timer 203ka is not a value greater than 0 (that is, it is 0) in the process of Y234 (Y234: No), instead of the first special symbol variation start processing 12 (see FIG. 418) in the twelfth control example, the first special symbol variation start processing 17 is executed (Y251), and the processing proceeds to Y238. The details of this first special symbol variation start process 17 (Y251) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of Y234, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time timer 203ka is greater than 0 (Y234: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation time timer 203ka is subtracted and updated (Y252), The display of the first special symbol on the first symbol display device is updated (Y253), and then, instead of the first special symbol variation stop processing 12 (see FIG. 424) in the twelfth control example described above, the first special symbol variation stop. Process 17 is executed (Y254), and the process proceeds to Y238. The details of this first special symbol variation stop process 17 (Y254) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In addition, in the special symbol variation process 17 (see FIG. 559) in the present 17th control example, in the process of Y238, the special figure 2 variation time timer 203kb is not a value greater than 0 (that is, 0) when it is determined that (Y238: No), instead of the second special symbol variation start processing 12 (see FIG. 427) in the twelfth control example described above, the second special symbol variation start processing 17 is executed (Y255), and this processing ends. . The details of this second special symbol variation start process 17 (Y255) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of Y238, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation time timer 203kb is greater than 0 (Y238: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation time timer 203kb is subtracted and updated (Y256), The display of the second special symbol on the first symbol display device is updated (Y257), and the second special symbol variation stop process 17 is replaced with the second special symbol variation stop process 12 (see FIG. 433) in the twelfth control example described above. is executed (Y258), and the process ends. Details of the second special symbol variation stop processing 17 (Y258) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 560, the first special symbol variation start process 17 (Y251), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 17 (FIG. 559) in the seventeenth control example, will be described. FIG. 560 is a flow chart showing the contents of this first special symbol variation start process 17 (Y251).

Of this first special symbol variation start process 17 (Y251), in each process of Y302 to Y306 and Y309, Y302 to Y306 and Y309 of the first special symbol variation start process 12 (see FIG. 418) in the twelfth control example respectively are executed. Also, in the first special symbol variation start process 17 (Y251) in the seventeenth control example, the process of Y301 in the first special symbol variation start process 12 (see FIG. 418) in the twelfth control example is deleted. Also, in the first special symbol variation start process 17 (see FIG. 560) in the seventeenth control example, after executing the process of Y306, instead of the first special symbol determination process 12 in the twelfth control example (see FIG. 419) Then, the first special symbol determination process 17 is executed (Y321), and the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 17 is executed instead of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 12 (see FIG. 420) in the twelfth control example. (Y322), the process proceeds to Y309. Furthermore, in the first special symbol variation start process 17 (see FIG. 560) in the seventeenth control example, when the process of Y309 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the ceiling lottery number of times has been reached. The ceiling determination process 17 for setting a 3rd time saving state when it reaches|attains is performed (Y323), and this process is complete|finished. Details of the first special symbol determination process 17 (Y321), the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 17 (Y322), and the ceiling determination process 17 (Y323) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 561, 563, and 564. do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 561, the first special symbol determination process 17 (Y321), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process 17 (see FIG. 560) in the seventeenth control example, will be described. FIG. 561 is a flow chart showing the contents of the first special symbol determination process 17 (Y321).

Of this first special symbol determination process 17 (Y321), in each process of Y8001 to Y8006, each process of Y8001 to Y8006 of the first special symbol determination process 12 (see FIG. 419) in the twelfth control example is the same Processing is performed. Also, in the first special symbol determination process 17 (Y321) of this control example, when it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit at Y8003, (Y8003: Yes), the big hit flag 203qb corresponding to the first special symbol is turned on (Y8011), and the process proceeds to Y8004. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result is not a big hit (Y8003: No), the small winning lottery process 17 is executed (Y8012), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 562, the small winning lottery process 17 (Y8012), which is one process of the first special symbol determination process 17 (FIG. 561) in the seventeenth control example, will be described. FIG. 562 is a flow chart showing the contents of this small winning lottery process 17 (Y8012).

In the small winning lottery process 17 (Y8012), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol of this time is the time-saving winning (Y8051). In the process of Y8051, when it is determined that the lottery result is the time-saving election (Y8051: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a time-saving winning (Y8051: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the small winning random number 17 table 202qe (Y8052), and it is determined whether the lottery result is a small winning. (Y8053), when it is determined that the lottery result is not a small hit (Y8053: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (Y8053: Yes), based on the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5, select a small hit type from the small hit type selection 17 table 202qf, A small hit pattern of the special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device is set (Y8054), a small hit flag corresponding to the special pattern won in the small hit this time is set to ON (Y8055), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Y5053, when it is determined that the lottery result is not a small hit (Y8053: No), the processes of Y8054 and Y8055 are skipped, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 563, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 17 (Y322), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process 17 (see FIG. 560) in the seventeenth control example, will be described. FIG. 563 is a flow chart showing the contents of this first special symbol variation pattern selection process 17 (Y322).

Of this first special symbol variation pattern selection process 17 (Y322), in each process of Y501 to Y503 and Y505 to Y508, Y501 of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 12 (see FIG. 420) in the twelfth control example to Y503 and Y505 to Y508 are executed. In addition, in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 17 (Y322) of this control example, after executing the process of Y503, the variation pattern scenario table 202qj is referred to and the variation corresponding to the value of the current special symbol lottery counter 203qa A pattern selection table is specified (Y511), the specified variation pattern selection table is read out (Y512), and the process proceeds to Y505.

Next, with reference to FIG. 564, the ceiling determination process 17 (Y323), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process 17 (see FIG. 560) in the seventeenth control example, will be described. FIG. 564 is a flow chart showing the contents of this ceiling determination process 17 (Y323).

In this ceiling determination process 17 (Y323), first, add 1 to the value of the special figure lottery counter 203qa (S38103), determine whether the value of the special figure lottery counter 203qa is 300 (S38121A), When it is determined that the value of the figure lottery counter 203qa is 300 (S38121A: Yes), the value of the special figure lottery counter 203qa is updated to 150 (S38122A), and information indicating the value of the special figure lottery counter 203qa is included. A status command is set (S38105), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S38121A, if it is determined that the value of the special figure lottery counter 203qa is not 300 (S38121A: No), then it is determined whether the value of the special figure lottery counter 203qa is 151. (S38123A), when it is determined that the value of the special figure lottery counter 203qa is not 151 (S38123A: No), the process proceeds to S38105.

On the other hand, in the process of S38123A, if it is determined that the value of the special figure lottery counter 203qa is 151 (S38123A: Yes), it means that the ceiling lottery number of times has been reached, so 61 to the time saving counter 203h By adding, the third time saving state is set (S38124A), and the information indicating the third time saving state is set in the game state storage area 203g (S38112A). Next, the information about this time saving lottery is cleared (S38113A), the state command including the information indicating the third time saving state and the information indicating the number of times of working time saving is set (S38114A), and this process is finished.

Next, with reference to FIG. 565, the first special symbol variation stop process 17 (Y254), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 17 (FIG. 559) in the seventeenth control example, will be described. FIG. 565 is a flow chart showing the contents of this first special symbol variation stop processing 17 (Y254).

Among the first special symbol variation stop processing 17 (Y254), in each processing of Y701 and Y704 to Y707, Y701 and Y704 to Y707 of the first special symbol variation stop processing 12 (see FIG. 424) in the twelfth control example respectively are executed. Also, in the first special symbol variation stop processing 17 (Y254) of this control example, when it is determined in the processing of Y701 that the variation time has not ended (Y701: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of Y701, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has ended (Y701: Yes), it is determined whether or not the first special symbol jackpot flag 203qb is ON (Y721), and the first special symbol When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203qb is not ON (Y721: No), it means that the lottery result of the first special symbol this time is not a jackpot. , the process ends. The details of the special figure 1 deviating stop processing (Y722) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of Y721, when it is determined that the first special symbol jackpot flag 203qb is ON (Y721: Yes), it is determined whether the special figure 2 fluctuation time timer 203kb is a value greater than 0 (Y723), when the special figure 2 fluctuation time timer 203kb is a value greater than 0 (that is, during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol) (Y723: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop Set the flag 203kf to ON (Y724), set the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating the special figure 2 fluctuation stop (Y725), remove the second special pattern of the first design display device and stop display with the design ( Y726), and the process proceeds to Y727.

On the other hand, in the process of Y723, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation time timer 203kb is 0 (that is, not during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol) (Y723: No), the process of Y724 to Y726 is performed. Skip and proceed to Y727. Next, the jackpot flag 203qb corresponding to the first special symbol is set to OFF (Y727), and the process proceeds to Y704.

Next, with reference to FIG. 566, the special figure 1 deviation stop processing (Y722), which is one processing of the first special symbol variation stop processing 17 (FIG. 565) in the seventeenth control example, will be described. FIG. 566 is a flow chart showing the contents of this special figure 1 deviating stop process (Y722).

In this special figure 1 off stop processing (Y722), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 small per flag 203qc is ON (Y751), and when it is determined that the special figure 1 small per flag 203qc is on (Y751: Yes), set a special figure 2 fluctuation stop command (Y752), stop and display the second special symbol of the first symbol display device (Y753), and set a small hit scenario (Y754 ). Next, the small hit start flag 203fb is set to ON (Y755), the small hit medium flag 203fc is set to ON (Y756), and the special figure 1 confirmation command is set (Y757). Next, the first special symbol of the first symbol display device is stopped by a small winning symbol (Y758), the special 1 small winning flag 203qc is set to OFF (Y759), and this process is finished. On the other hand, in the process of Y751, when it is determined that the special figure 1 small per flag 203qc is not on (that is, it is off) (Y751: No), the special figure 1 confirmation command is set (Y760), The first special symbol on the one-symbol display device is deviated and the fluctuation is stopped with the symbol (Y761), and this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 567, the second special symbol variation start process 17 (Y255), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 17 (FIG. 559) in the seventeenth control example, will be described. FIG. 567 is a flow chart showing the contents of this second special symbol variation start process 17 (Y255).

In each process of Y832 to Y836 and Y839 (Y309) of the second special symbol variation start process 17 (Y255), Y832 to Y832 of the second special symbol variation start process 12 (see FIG. 427) in the twelfth control example, respectively. The same processing as each of Y836 and Y839 (Y309) is executed. In addition, in the second special symbol fluctuation start processing 17 (Y255) of the present control example, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203kf is ON (Y851), and the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203kf is When it is determined that it is ON (Y851: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203kf is set to OFF (Y852), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203kf is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (Y851: No), the process proceeds to Y832.

Also, after executing the process of Y836, the second special symbol determination process 17 is executed (Y853), the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 17 is executed (Y854), then Y839 (Y309) is executed, Ceiling determination processing 17 is executed (Y855 (Y323)), and this processing ends. The details of the second special symbol determination process 17 (Y853) and the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 17 (Y854) will be described later with reference to FIGS. Also, the ceiling determination process 17 (Y855 (Y323)) has the same contents as those in FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 568, the second special symbol determination process 17 (Y853), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process 17 (FIG. 567) in the seventeenth control example, will be described. FIG. 568 is a flow chart showing the contents of this second special symbol determination process 17 (Y853).

Among the second special symbol determination processing 17 (Y853), each processing of Y8101 to Y8106 is the same as each processing of Y8101 to Y8106 of the second special symbol determination processing 12 (see FIG. 428) in the twelfth control example. Processing is performed. In addition, in the second special symbol determination process 17 (Y853) of this control example, in the process of Y8103, when it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (Y8103: Yes), the big hit flag corresponding to the second special symbol 203qb is set to ON (Y8111), and the process proceeds to Y8104. On the other hand, in the process of Y8103, if it is determined that the lottery result is not a big hit (Y8103: No), the special figure 2 time reduction lottery process 17 is executed (Y8112), and the small winning lottery process 17 is executed (Y8113 ( Y8012)), this processing ends. In addition, the details of the special figure 2 time saving lottery process 17 (Y8112) will be described later with reference to FIG. Also, the small winning lottery process 17 (Y8113 (Y8012)) has the same contents as those in FIG. 562 described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 569, the special figure 2 time reduction lottery process 17 (Y8112), which is one process of the second special symbol determination process 17 (FIG. 568) in the seventeenth control example, will be described. Figure 569 is the flowchart which shows the contents of this special figure 2 time saving lottery processing 17 (Y8112).

Of this special figure 2 time saving lottery process 17 (Y8112), each process of Y8202 and Y8206 is the same as each process of Y8202 and Y8206 of special figure 2 time saving lottery process 12 (see FIG. 429) in the twelfth control example respectively Processing is performed. Moreover, in the special figure 2 time saving lottery process 17 (Y8112) of this control example, first, the lottery result is obtained based on the time saving random number 17 table 202qh (Y8211), and the process proceeds to Y8202. In addition, in the special figure 2 time saving lottery process 17 (see FIG. 569) in the present 17th control example, in the process of Y8202, when it is determined that the lottery result is time saving winning (Y8202: Yes), the first symbol display A time-saving design is set as a special design to be displayed on the device (Y8212), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 570, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 17 (Y854), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process 17 (FIG. 567) in the seventeenth control example, will be described. Figure 570 is a flow chart showing the contents of this second special symbol variation pattern selection process 17 (Y854).

Of this second special symbol variation pattern selection process 17 (Y854), in each process of Y921 to Y928, each of Y921 to Y928 of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 12 (see FIG. 431) in the twelfth control example The same processing as the processing is executed. In addition, in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 17 (Y854) of this control example, after executing the process of Y923, the current special figure lottery with reference to the variation pattern scenario table 202qj (see FIG. 557 (b)) A variation pattern selection table corresponding to the value of the counter 203qa, the current gaming state, and the previous big hit type is specified (Y931), the specified variation pattern selection table is read out (Y932), and the process proceeds to Y924.

Next, with reference to FIG. 571, the second special symbol variation stop process 17 (Y528), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 17 (FIG. 559) in the seventeenth control example, will be described. FIG. 571 is a flow chart showing the contents of this second special symbol variation stop processing 17 (Y528).

Among the second special symbol variation stop processing 17 (Y528), Y901, Y906 to Y909, and Y914, respectively, in the second special symbol variation stop processing 12 in the twelfth control example (see FIG. 433) Y901, The same processing as each of Y906 to Y909 and Y914 is executed. In addition, in the second special symbol variation stop processing 17 (Y528) in the seventeenth control example, in the processing of Y901, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the variation time (Y901: Yes), it corresponds to the second special symbol It is determined whether or not the big hit flag 203qb is on (Y921), and when it is determined that the big hit flag 203qb corresponding to the second special symbol is on (Y921: Yes), then special figure 1 fluctuation It is determined whether or not the time timer 203ka is greater than 0 (Y922). When it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time timer 203ka is a value greater than 0 (Y922: Yes), it is the stop display timing of the jackpot pattern of the second special pattern during the fluctuation display of the first special pattern. Therefore, in order to stop and display the fluctuation of the first special symbol being executed, set the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating the fluctuation stop of special figure 1 (Y923), the first special of the first symbol display device The symbol is stopped and displayed with the missing symbol (Y924), then the jackpot flag 203qb corresponding to the second special symbol is set to OFF (Y925), and the process proceeds to Y906. On the other hand, in the process of Y922, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variable time timer 203ka is not a value greater than 0 (that is, 0) (Y922: No), the processes of Y923 and Y924 are skipped, and the process to Y925.

On the other hand, in the process of Y921, when it is determined that the jackpot flag 203qb corresponding to the second special symbol is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (Y921: No), the process of Y914 is executed, and the process of Y914 is performed. In, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is the time saving design winning (Y914: Yes), time saving setting processing 17 is executed instead of time saving setting processing 12 (see FIG. 426) in the twelfth control example. (Y926), and the process proceeds to Y908. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is not the time saving symbol winning (Y914: No), the special figure 2 out stop processing is executed (Y927), and this processing is finished. The details of the time saving setting process 17 (Y926) and the special figure 2 out stop process (Y927) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 572 and 573. FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 572, the time saving setting process 17 (Y926), which is one process of the second special symbol variation stop process 17 (FIG. 571) in the seventeenth control example, will be described. FIG. 572 is a flow chart showing the contents of this time saving setting process 17 (Y926).

This time saving setting process 17 (Y926) is similar to the time saving setting process 12 (see FIG. 426) in the twelfth control example described above, when the time saving design is won in the lottery of special symbols, the time saving state corresponding to the time saving design. This is a process for setting the . Of the time saving setting process 17 (see FIG. 572) in this 17th control example, each process of Y8354 and Y8455 is the same as each process of Y8354 and Y8455 of the time saving setting process 12 (see FIG. 426) in the 12th control example process is executed. In addition, in the time saving setting process 17 (see FIG. 572) in the seventeenth control example, first, the value corresponding to the time saving pattern won this time is added to the time saving counter 203h (Y8361), and the process proceeds to Y8354.

Thus, in the present 17th control example, every time a time saving pattern is won, the number of time saving times corresponding to the time saving pattern can be added to the time saving counter 203h. In the time saving state B in which the special pattern lottery is likely to be executed, every time the second special pattern lottery is executed, the number of times of time saving is added almost every time, thereby realizing a novel game property. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 573, the special figure 2 out stop processing (Y927), which is one processing of the second special symbol variation stop processing 17 (FIG. 571) in the seventeenth control example, will be described. This special figure 2 loss stop process (Y927) is a process for setting the stop display of the second special symbol loss (including a small hit) symbol. FIG. 573 is a flow chart showing the contents of this special figure 2 deviating stop process (Y927).

In this special figure 2 off stop processing (Y927), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 small per flag 203qd is ON (Y951), and when it is determined that the special figure 2 small per flag 203qd is on (Y951: Yes), set a special figure 1 fluctuation stop command (Y952), stop and display the first special symbol of the first symbol display device (Y953), and set a small hit scenario (Y954 ). Next, the small hit start flag 203fb is set to ON (Y955), the small hit medium flag 203fc is set to ON (Y956), and the special figure 2 decision command is set (Y957). Then, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device is stopped by the small winning symbol (Y958), the special figure 2 small winning flag 203qd is set to OFF (Y959), and the process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Y951, when it is determined that the special figure 2 small per flag 203qd is not on (that is, it is off) (Y951: No), the special figure 2 confirmation command is set (Y960), The second special symbol of the one-symbol display device is deviated and the fluctuation is stopped with the symbol (Y961), and this processing is terminated.

By executing this special figure 2 out stop processing (see FIG. 573), when winning a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol and stopping and displaying the small winning symbol based on the small winning winning, the first The variable display of the special pattern can be stopped and displayed with the off pattern. As a result, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big win or a small win, it is possible to suppress the overlapping execution of the big win and the small win or the small win and the small win.

<Regarding control processing executed by the sound ramp control device in the seventeenth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 574 to 575, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 in the seventeenth control example will be described. In this 17th control example, the content of time saving state effect setting processing 5 (S9011A) which is one processing of state command reception processing 5 (see FIG. 263) for the 12th control example (and the fifth control example) described above is changed, the difference is that the content of the special figure 2 effect mode setting process 5 (see FIG. 269) is changed, and the rest is the same. The same processing contents are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted. It should be noted that each control example described above, and portions where detailed descriptions of the same elements as those described in each control example are omitted, are the same as those described in each control example and each control example described above. It is adapted. In addition, the control examples described above and the technical ideas described in each control example are naturally applied to the 17th control example, and the control examples described above and the technical ideas described in each control example are also applied. Modified examples and additional examples are naturally applied to the seventeenth control example.

First, with reference to FIG. 574, the time saving state effect setting process 17 (S9011A) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the seventeenth control example will be described. FIG. 574 is a flow chart showing the contents of this time saving state effect setting process 17 (S9011A). In this time saving state effect setting process 17 (S9011A), first, the number of time saving times included in the received command is set to the value of the time saving medium counter 223da (S9311A), and then it is determined whether or not the time saving state B has been changed. (S9312A), when it is determined that the state has not changed to the time saving state B (S9312A: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S9312A, if it is determined that it has changed to the time saving state B (S9312A: Yes), it is determined whether it is a time saving state triggered by the big hit B17 (S9313A), and the big hit B17 is triggered If it is determined that it is not a time saving state (S9313A: No), the counter 223qa during addition RUSH is set to 11 (S9314A), and it is determined whether or not it is a time saving state triggered by reaching the ceiling (S9315A) . When it is determined that it is not the time-saving state triggered by reaching the ceiling (S9315A: No), the base number counter 223qb is set to 75 (S9316A), and the process proceeds to S9319A.

On the other hand, in S9313A, if it is determined that it is a time saving state triggered by the jackpot B17 (S9313A: Yes), 6 is set to the counter 223qa during the addition RUSH (S9317A), and 50 is set to the base number counter 223qb (S9318A), the process proceeds to S9319A. In addition, in the processing of S9315A, when it is determined that it is a time-saving state triggered by reaching the ceiling (S9315A: Yes), the processing proceeds to S9318A. Next, according to each counter value, the display of the remaining number of RUSH and the number of initial stocks is set (S9319A), and this processing is finished.

Next, with reference to Drawing 575, special figure 2 production mode setting processing 17 (S4991A) performed by MPU221 in sound lamp control device 113 in this 17th example of control is explained. Figure 575 is the flowchart which shows the contents of this special figure 2 production mode setting processing 17 (S4991A).

In the process of S9611 of this special figure 2 effect mode setting process 17 (S4991A), the same process as the process of S9611 of the special figure 2 effect mode setting process 5 (see FIG. 269) in the twelfth control example is executed. . In addition, in the special figure 2 effect mode setting process 17 (S4991A) of this control example, first, it is determined whether or not it is a time saving state (S9621A), and when it is determined that it is not a time saving state (S9621A: No) , determines the effect mode corresponding to the received variation pattern (S6922A), executes the processing of S9611, and terminates this processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is a time saving state (S9621A: Yes), it is determined whether it is a time saving state A (S9623A), and if it is determined that it is a time saving state A (S9623A: Yes), It is determined whether it is the first special figure 2 variation after the end of the add-on RUSH (S9624A), and when it is determined that it is the first special figure 2 variation after the end of the add-on RUSH (S9624A: Yes), the special figure 1 A chance time entry display (see FIG. 549(b)) that continues until the end of the remaining fluctuation time is set (S9625A), and the total number of times is the value obtained by adding the value of the base number counter 223qb and the value of the additional number counter 223qc. Display is set (S9626A), and the process proceeds to S9622A. On the other hand, in the process of S9624A, if it is determined that it is not the first special figure 2 variation after the end of the add-on RUSH (S9624A: No), the processes of S9625A and S9626A are skipped, and the process proceeds to S9622A.

On the other hand, in the processing of S9623A, when it is determined that it is not the time saving state A (S9623A: No), it is determined whether the lottery result of this special symbol is a time saving design winning (S9627A), and the time saving design winning If it is determined (S9627A: Yes), determine the variable display mode (see FIG. 549 (a)) for notifying the number of additions according to the winning time saving pattern (S9628A), corresponding to the winning time saving pattern The time saving number of times to be added is added to the counter 223da during time saving and the additional number counter 223qc (S9629A), and the process proceeds to S9611. On the other hand, in the process of S9627A, if it is determined that it is not a time-saving election (that is, a jackpot or a small hit that substantially confirms the jackpot) (S9627A: No), a variable display that informs the reset of the additional RUSH The mode (see FIG. 550) is determined (S9630A), the value of the addition number counter 223qc is cleared to 0 (S9631A), and the process proceeds to S9611.

By executing this special figure 2 production mode setting process 17 (see FIG. 575), every time the second special symbol lottery is executed in the time saving state B and the time saving pattern is won, the number of times of time saving corresponding to the time saving pattern It is possible to report a surcharge. Therefore, it is possible to realize a very novel performance mode in which the time-saving pattern is added at almost every variation, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present 17th control example, as the time saving state, the time saving state (second time saving state A, third time saving state A) in which the lottery of the first special symbol with a low degree of advantage is likely to be executed , and a time-saving state (second time-saving state B, third time-saving state B) in which the lottery of the second special pattern with a high degree of advantage is easily executed, and when the ceiling lottery number of times is reached, first, the third time-saving state is provided. While the state B is set, when a jackpot is won in the normal state, the time saving state after the end of the big win is set to a second time saving state A with a low advantage at a high rate. . By constructing in this way, the game can be played with a strong expectation that the ceiling lottery number of times will be reached, rather than winning the jackpot.

Further, in the 17th control example, when the time saving pattern is won during the time saving state, the number of time saving times corresponding to the winning time saving pattern is added. And, in the lottery for the second special symbol, the time-saving symbol is won at a higher probability (for example, at a rate of 90%) than in the lottery for the first special symbol. In addition, when shifting to the second time saving state B or the third time saving state B, the selection of special symbols for a specific number of times (for example, 10 times) is executed to move to the second time saving state A or the third time saving state A. It is configured to That is, during the second time saving state B or the third time saving state B, every time the lottery of the second special pattern is executed, the time saving pattern is elected with a high probability and the number of time saving times is added. The number of continuations of the second time-saving state A or the third time-saving state A that shifts after the elapse of the lottery of the special symbols can be varied according to the result of the lottery of the special symbols executed during the time-saving state B. Realizes playability.

In this 17th control example, only the "small hit A17" in which the V prize cannot occur is provided as the small win of the first special symbol, but even the small win of the first special symbol is partly It may be configured so that a V prize can occur. Then, if there is a lottery result of the first special symbol that can cause V winning just before the ceiling (for example, the number of lotteries remaining until reaching the ceiling lottery number is within 5 times), V winning in the small winning It may be configured to execute an effect prompting not to generate. That is, in particular, when it becomes a small hit of the type that wins the "jackpot A17" in which the second time saving state A is set by generating the V winning prize, the V winning prize is generated and the second time saving state A is shifted to. Since it is more likely that it will be more advantageous to reach the ceiling lottery number of times and move to the third time saving state B than, in such a case, a novel production that urges the player to avoid the V prize is provided. may be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the player in the game.

In this 17th control example, every time a time saving pattern is won in the lottery of the second special pattern in the time saving state B (additional RUSH), an effect is executed to add the number of time saving times corresponding to the winning time saving pattern. , but not limited to these. For example, halfway in the time saving state B (for example, until the 9th second special symbol lottery is executed), the number of additional times of the time saving number is hidden without notifying, and a predetermined notification timing (for example, the time saving state B It is also possible to collectively notify the number of times of addition in the variable display effect related to the variable display of the last second special symbol in . By constructing in this way, it is possible to realize a game property in which the player predicts how many times of time saving is added until a predetermined notification timing, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. can be done. Also, in this case, every time the lottery for the special symbol is executed, an effect suggesting the added number of times of time saving may be executed, or the information on the number of times of time saving may not be suggested at all. In the former case, it is possible to easily predict the situation of adding the number of times of time saving, and in the latter case, the game is played by paying attention to whether or not the second special symbol lottery will be a big hit until the notification timing. can be done.

In this 17th control example, it was configured to win a jackpot or a small win with a probability of 1/10 in the lottery of the second special symbols, and to win a time-saving symbol with a probability of 9/10, but it is not limited to this. do not have. It may be configured to win the time saving symbol with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 1/2). In other words, in the 17th control example, a mere lottery result of a loss is not provided, but a configuration may be provided in which a loss is provided. With this configuration, the player can be pleased only by winning the time saving pattern in the time saving state B, so that the player's interest in the game in the time saving state B can be improved.

In the above-described thirteenth to seventeenth control examples, it was configured to shift to the third time saving state when the ceiling lottery number of times was reached, but the gaming state set when the ceiling lottery number was reached is the third time saving state , but can be set to any game state. Specifically, for example, it may be configured to shift to a second time saving state more advantageous than the third time saving state, or may be configured to shift to a more advantageous second probability variable state. By configuring in this way, the degree of advantage when the ceiling lottery number of times is reached can be varied, so the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

In the above-described 13th to 17th control examples, it was configured to shift to an advantageous game state (third time saving state) when the fixed ceiling lottery number was reached, but the ceiling lottery number does not have to be fixed. . For example, the number of times that can be set as the ceiling lottery number of times (for example, 50 times, 300 times, 500 times, 1000 times, etc.) is provided, and the pachinko machine 10 is initialized (with the RAM clear switch 122 turned on) When the power is turned on at ) or at the end of the jackpot, the ceiling lottery number may be determined by lottery. By constructing in this way, it is possible to add a game property in which the game is performed in anticipation that a small number of lotteries will be selected as the ceiling number of lotteries, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. . In this case, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized (for example, during the first variable display effect after initialization) or at the end of the jackpot (for example, during the ending effect or during the first variable display effect after the end), It is good also as a structure which performs the production|presentation which suggests the ceiling lottery frequency. By constructing in this way, it is possible to further add the playability of predicting the ceiling lottery number of times from the performance suggesting the ceiling lottery number of times, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. Further, for example, the ceiling lottery frequency after the end of the jackpot may be changed for each type of jackpot. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the type of jackpot when playing the game, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. In this case, the number of rounds and the gaming state after the end of the big win may be common, and the jackpot types may be provided in which the ceiling lottery number of times after the end of the big win is different. Specifically, for example, as a 4-round short-time jackpot, a type with a ceiling lottery number of 100 times and a type with a ceiling lottery number of 1000 times are provided, or as an 8-round short-time jackpot, a type with a ceiling lottery number of 400 times and a type of 600 times may be provided. By constructing in this way, when the 4-round time-saving jackpot is won, there is a possibility that the ceiling lottery number of times is small, so that the interest of the player can be improved. In addition, when an 8-round time-saving jackpot is won, the possibility of setting an extremely large ceiling lottery number of 1000 times is eliminated, so the game can be played with peace of mind.

In the thirteenth to seventeenth control examples described above, the RAM 203 is also initialized when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, so that the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la is reset. , but not limited to these. For example, even when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la may not be reset. By configuring in this way, there is a high possibility that the player has been initialized (for example, when it is the closing time of the hall where the pachinko machine 10 is installed during the jackpot or the second probability variable state, etc. ) Since it is possible to suppress the avoidance of playing the pachinko machine 10, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved regardless of the possibility of initialization.

<18th control example>
Next, the contents of the eighteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 576 to 606. FIG. This eighteenth control example has a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b in contrast to the above-described seventh control example, and when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the special symbol already changes. If it is being displayed, the difference is that the winning information of the second special symbol (special figure 2 reservation) is configured to be able to store (hold storage) a predetermined number (up to 4 in this 18th control example). ing.

In addition, in the eighteenth control example, during the execution of the jackpot game, the lottery result of the special figure 2 reservation stored (reserved storage) in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is determined in advance (read ahead). As a result, when there is a reservation (V reservation) that is a small winning, the difference is that the effect for informing that the V reservation exists can be executed.

Specifically, when the jackpot game is started, as a result of prefetching the lottery result of the special figure 2 reservation stored in the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b (reserved storage), when V reservation exists , an effect (V-icon acquisition effect) for acquiring a "V-icon", which is a notification mode indicating the presence of the V-hold, is executed. The acquired V icon is reduced and displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 until the start of the variable display of the special symbols based on the V reserve, and is enlarged and displayed during the variable display of the special symbols based on the V reserve ( hereinafter referred to as activation of the V-icon), the player is informed that a small winning will be won by this variation.

With this configuration, the player is notified in advance that the small winning will be won in the special pattern lottery executed after the big winning game is over, so that the small winning will not be won after the big winning game is over. It is possible to suppress the player's anxiety that the number of fluctuations will be reached and the time saving state will end.

Here, as a result of prefetching the lottery result of the special figure 2 reservation stored in the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b (holding reservation storage) during the execution of the jackpot game, if there is V reservation, be sure to Assuming that the V-icon acquisition effect is executed, if the V-icon acquisition effect is not executed, in the special figure 2 reservation stored (reserved storage) in the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b It turns out that there are no V-holds (ie, they are all out), which may disappoint the player.

Therefore, in the eighteenth control example, as a result of prefetching the lottery result of the special figure 2 reservation stored (reserved storage) in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b during execution of the jackpot game, the V reservation is It is configured to execute the V-icon acquisition effect in part of the cases where it exists.

By configuring in this way, even if the V icon acquisition effect is not executed during execution of the jackpot game, the special figure 2 stored (reserved storage) in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. Until the variable display of the special symbols based on the reservation is completed, the player can be expected to win a small prize.

Further, in the eighteenth control example, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the V hold is started, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the activation of the V icon in the variable display of the special symbol. and

Specifically, when starting the variable display of the special symbol based on V reservation (reservation to win a small hit), the special figure 2 reservation stored (reserved storage) in the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b Determining whether there is another V reservation in the game, and if there is a V reservation, activates the V icon (enlarging the V icon and notifying that the small win is won). Instead, the reduction display of the V icon can be continued until the start of the variable display of the special symbol based on the V hold that will be digested later.

With this configuration, even if the V icon is not activated during the variable display of the special symbols in the state where the V icon has been acquired, there is a possibility of winning a small prize. Even if the V-icon is not activated until the end of the variable display, the player can expect to win a small prize.

In addition, by configuring in this way, for example, there was only one V reservation during the jackpot game, but the period from the end of the jackpot game to the start of the variable display of the special symbol based on the V reservation When V suspension is newly stored (holding storage) in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, it is possible to switch the activation target of the V icon to the new V holding. As a result, even if the last hold of the special figure 2 hold that is prefetched at the time when the V icon acquisition effect is executed is V hold, during the variable display of the special symbol based on the V hold, V The icon is not always activated, and the non-activation of the V icon confirms consecutive chances (continuous winning of small wins). It is possible to improve the interest of

In addition, in the eighteenth control example, a plurality of V reserves are stored (reserved storage) in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, and when the V icon is displayed, the V reserve that is digested first is to be the activation target of the V icon, or the V icon to be activated later is determined when the variable display of the special symbol based on the V retention to be digested first is started. However, it is not limited to this, for example, it is set in advance that the activation of the V icon is easily executed with the V suspension that is consumed first, or the activation of the V icon is executed with the V suspension that is consumed later. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which it is possible to select whether the setting is easy or not by operating a button according to the player's preference.

In addition, in the eighteenth control example, the rate at which the V icon acquisition effect is executed is the number of special figure 2 reservations stored (reserved storage) in the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b, and the number of V reservations. It has a different configuration depending on the position.

Specifically, when the top special figure 2 reservation (first reservation) of the special figure 2 reservation stored (reserved storage) in the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b is V reservation, the second special The smaller the number of special figures 2 reserved stored (reserved storage) in the symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the easier the V icon acquisition effect is executed. Also, when four special figure 2 reservations stored (reserved memory) stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b are stored (reserved memory), the special figure 2 reservation to be digested first is V When the special figure 2 suspension to be digested later is V suspension than when it is suspension, the ratio of execution of the V icon acquisition effect is configured to be higher.

By configuring in this way, when the activation of the V icon is executed, at the time of execution of the V icon acquisition effect that acquired the V icon, many special figures 2 reserves that have not been prefetched tend to remain, so the V icon It is possible to make it difficult to predict the lottery result of the special figure 2 pending remaining after the activation of.

In addition, in the eighteenth control example, when the first reservation is V reservation (reservation to win a small hit), the special figure 2 reservation stored (reserved storage) in the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b Although the configuration is such that the smaller the number, the easier the V-icon acquisition effect is executed, the configuration is not limited to this, and the larger the number of the special figure 2 reserves, the easier the V-icon acquisition effect is executed.

In addition, in the eighteenth control example, when four special symbols 2 hold stored (hold storage) are stored (hold storage) in the second special symbol hold ball storage area 203b, they are digested first. The ratio of executing the V icon acquisition effect is configured to be higher when the special figure 2 suspension to be consumed later is V suspension than when the special figure 2 suspension to be consumed is V suspension, but it is limited to this If the special figure 2 suspension that is digested first is V suspension rather than the case that the special figure 2 suspension that is digested later is V suspension, the rate at which the V icon acquisition effect is executed is higher. You can configure it higher.

It should be noted that the larger the number of V reservations stored (reserved storage) in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the more likely the V icon acquisition effect is executed.

In addition, in the eighteenth control example, when a plurality of V reserves are stored (reserved storage) in the second special symbol reserve ball storage area 203b, the activation of the V icon is executed in the V reserve that is digested first. Whether or not to do so is determined according to the variation pattern.

Specifically, when a plurality of V reserves are stored (reserved storage) in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, in the V reserve digested first, when a specific variation pattern is not set is configured to execute activation of the V icon, and a specific performance mode setting table having a setting ratio of the specific performance mode different from the performance mode setting table referred to when the V icon is not activated is referred to. In addition, the specific effect mode is, for example, an effect (so-called premium effect) that is executed only in the case of winning a big win or a small win, or a display mode indicating that the lottery result is out. It refers to an effect (so-called resurrection effect) that is changed to a display mode showing .

By configuring in this way, the player can easily predict whether or not the V icon will be activated from the effect mode to be executed, so it is possible to make the player interested in the effect to be executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

In the eighteenth control example, when the activation of the V icon is executed, the configuration is such that the premium effect and the resurrection effect are difficult to be executed. A simple configuration may be used. Also, for example, in a part of the case where a plurality of V reservations (reservations for winning small hits) are stored (reserved storage) in the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b, a special design based on the V reservations to be digested later. The period until the start of the variable display of the V icon may be configured so that the period during which activation of the V icon is prohibited can be set. , a display mode in which a chain is wrapped around the V icon to lock). By configuring in this way, when a performance with a high expectation of winning a small prize is executed during a period in which activation of the V icon is prohibited, the degree of expectation for winning a small prize in which the activation of the V icon is not executed is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the performance during the period in which activation of the V icon is prohibited.

It should be noted that during the variable display of one special symbol, there may be a timing at which the V icon is likely to be activated and a timing at which the V icon is difficult to be activated. For example, during the variable display of the special symbol. When the ready-to-win performance is executed, the period from the start of the variable display of the special symbols to the start of the ready-to-win performance is more likely to execute the activation of the V icon than the period from the start of the ready-to-win performance to the stop display of the special symbols. By doing so, if the activation of the V icon is not executed before the start of the ready-to-win effect, it is possible for the player to have expectations for consecutive chances, so the V icon is activated immediately after the start of the variable display of the special symbol. Even if it is not, the player can be interested in whether or not it will reach reach.

In addition, in the eighteenth control example, whether or not to execute the V icon acquisition effect during the jackpot game is determined by whether or not there is a V hold as a result of pre-reading the special figure 2 hold that is held and stored. However, it is not limited to this. Whether or not to execute the V icon acquisition performance during the jackpot game may be determined based on the prefetch result of the reserved and stored special figure 1 reservation (winning information of the first special symbol). It is good also as a structure determined by the look-ahead result of both 2 reservation and special figure 1 reservation. In addition, when there is a V reserve in the special figure 2 reserve and when there is a V reserve in the special figure 1 reserve, the display mode of the V icon displayed may be different.

The pachinko machine 10 of the eighteenth control example will be described below, but the same reference numerals will be given to the same contents as those of the control examples described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the Board Configuration of the Pachinko Machine 10 in the Eighteenth Control Example>
First, the structure of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 576 to 581. FIG. FIG. 576 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighteenth control example, and FIG. 577 is an enlarged view of the lower right area of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighteenth control example. 578 to 581 are schematic diagrams schematically showing the structure of the V winning device 650 provided on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighteenth control example.

As shown in FIG. 576, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and a number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, windmills, rails 61 and 62, and a general prize. It is constructed by assembling a port 63, a first ball entry port 64, a second ball entry port 640, a first variable winning device 65, a V winning device 650, a normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, a variable display device unit 80, and the like. , and its peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first ball opening 64, the second ball opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the V winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 576, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

In front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member connecting the rails (a prize winning opening is provided and a shot is played). area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 242) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 576) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 576) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37a and 37b having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged in the upper right portion of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right portion in FIG. 576). The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 242), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the eighteenth control example, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. there is Specifically, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37a operates, while when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, The first symbol display device 37b is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving mode or the normal mode by the lighting state, indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable display mode by the lighting state, or stop the display. The pattern is a pattern corresponding to the time-saving jackpot (a jackpot in which the time-saving state is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends) or a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot (a jackpot in which the normal state is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends) or a missing pattern The number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the number of rounds during the big hit and the error are displayed by the 7-segment display device. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and depending on the combination of the emission colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

Incidentally, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is conducted when a prize is won in the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the type of the big win when it is determined as a big win. As the types of jackpots determined here, the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 16 rounds, and after the jackpot ends, the time saving state is given (16R time saving jackpot), and the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 10 rounds, and after the jackpot ends. 10R time-saving jackpot (10R time-saving jackpot) that gives a time-saving state, 7R time-saving jackpot (7R time-saving jackpot) that gives a time-saving state after the jackpot ends in 7 rounds of the jackpot game, and the number of rounds of the jackpot game There is a 7R normal jackpot (7R no time saving jackpot) in which a time saving state is not given after the 7R jackpot ends.

In addition, in some cases where it is determined that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is not the above-mentioned jackpot but a loss, the player is given less benefits than the above-mentioned jackpot (for example, the V winning device 650 is opened only for one round). Privilege to let) A small hit is prepared. In the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, not only is it indicated whether the lottery result is a big win (whether it is a small win or not) as a stop symbol after the end of the variable display, but also if it is a big win. A pattern corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed.

Here, the “16R time-saving jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a time-saving state after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 16 rounds, and the “10R time-saving jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds. It is a jackpot that shifts to a time-saving state after that, and the “7R time-saving jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a time-saving state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 7 rounds. In addition, the “7R time-saving no jackpot” is a jackpot in which the number of maximum rounds is not changed to the time-saving state after the jackpot of 7 rounds, but is shifted to the normal state.

In other words, in the pachinko machine 10, as a jackpot game provided when winning a jackpot with a special pattern, the "16R time-saving jackpot" that can give the player the largest number of benefits, and the second highest number of benefits are provided. Possible “10R time saving jackpot”, “7R time saving jackpot” that can give the next largest number of benefits, and “7R time saving jackpot” that gives the fewest benefits to players among jackpot games. Among them, it is configured to provide any jackpot game. As a result, even when a big win is won in the lottery of the special symbols, the game is played while expecting that the jackpot game with the largest number of benefits will be offered among the jackpot games with different benefits that can be given. can let

In addition, in the 18th control example, the privilege given to the player according to the number of rounds of the jackpot game (the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game) and the content of the game state set after the jackpot game ends Although the size is defined, it is not limited to this, and the size of the benefits given to the player may be defined using conditions other than the above conditions, and different benefits may be defined without defining the size of the benefits. It is also possible to simply change the content of the jackpot game so as to be granted.

In addition, the “time-saving state” is a game in which the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 as an added value (privilege) given to the player after the big win, although the probability of the big win is the same as in the normal state. state. In order to make it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, in the eighteenth control example, the variation time of the second symbol is set shorter than in the normal state, and the lottery result of the second symbol is won. The operation mode of the electric accessory 640a to be operated in the case is set so that the period during which the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 is longer than in the normal state. It should be noted that other configurations may be used to set the game state in which the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, only a part of the setting contents described above may be used, or the contents described above may be used. Besides, the winning probability of the second symbol may be set higher than that in the normal state.

In addition, in the eighteenth control example, the first special symbol lottery that can be executed when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and the game ball to the second ball entrance 640 In the second special symbol lottery in which the execution opportunity can be established when the ball is entered, it is configured to be able to win short-time winning in addition to the above-mentioned big winning and small winning winning. Specifically, in a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery) executed in a state where the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set, It is configured so that the determination of the time-saving election is executed.

Here, when time-saving is elected, a time-saving state (high-probability state of normal symbols) is set before the big hit determination is executed in the special symbol lottery, and a special symbol for showing the result of the special symbol lottery. At the timing when the variable display of is started, a process (update process 18) for determining whether or not to terminate the time saving state is executed. For example, in the case of the time saving state set to the time saving number of times 1 (the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1), it is executed at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol for showing the result of the special symbol lottery winning the time saving is started. In the update process 18, the number of remaining working hours (the value of the working hours counter 203h) is updated (decremented), the working hours ending condition is established, and it is determined that the working hours saving state is terminated. On the other hand, in the case of a time saving state in which a value of a plurality of times (for example, 100 times) is set as the number of times of time saving, based on the result of updating the number of times of remaining time saving executed by the update process 18 Until the time saving end condition is satisfied condition continues.

In other words, by using the setting timing of the time saving state and the end timing of the time saving state used in the eighteenth control example, only the special symbol lottery jackpot determination timing (special symbol It is possible to set a time saving state (except for the fluctuation period) or to set a time saving state including the special symbol fluctuation period.

In addition, as a method of achieving the same effect, another processing timing may be set, for example, the time saving state is set at the stop timing of the special symbol variation that has been won in the same way as the fifth control example described above, and the next Before the special symbol variation to be executed is started, the update process of the time saving state (the process of determining whether or not to end the time saving state) may be configured to be executable. Even when configured in this way, the time saving state is set so that the special symbol fluctuation period is included by changing the number of time saving times to be set, or the time saving state is set so that the special symbol fluctuation period is not included. It becomes possible to In this case, if the special symbol variation with the time saving state is set is stopped and displayed, and the next special symbol lottery is not started with the time saving state set, the time saving end condition cannot be satisfied, so the time saving state will continue.

Therefore, in this case, by the time the special symbol variation that has won the time saving is stopped and displayed (before the time saving state is set), do you have the right to execute the next special symbol lottery (special figure pending)? If it is determined that the special figure reservation has been acquired, that is, after the time saving state is set, the next special pattern fluctuation will start immediately, and only if the time saving state can end, that the time saving has been won is preferably configured to notify the player. By constructing in this way, the player who grasps that the short-time winning has not executed the first special symbol lottery, performs the right-handed game, and suppresses the act of executing the second special symbol lottery. can.

Furthermore, although details will be described later, in the eighteenth control example, as a condition for ending the "time saving state", the first special symbol and the first special symbol and the second 2 When the number of times of variation of special symbols (total number of times of variation) reaches the first predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) (first end condition), or winning a small hit in the lottery of special symbols (small winning game When the number of times (executed) reaches a second predetermined number of times (for example, once) (second end condition), the game state is shifted from the time saving state to the normal state. It is configured as follows. In this way, a plurality of end conditions for shifting the game state from the time saving state to the normal state are prepared, and when any one of the plurality of end conditions is satisfied, the time saving state is shifted to the normal state. By doing so, it is possible to set a plurality of timings at which the time-saving state ends, and the player can play the game while being excited about how long the time-saving state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, will continue. can.

Furthermore, in the eighteenth control example, a plurality of small hit types (for example, small hits A, B, and C) are prepared as small hits that can be won in the special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery). The number of times the second end condition is satisfied is set differently for each type of win. By constructing in this way, it becomes difficult to predict whether or not the time-saving state will be terminated only by the number of small wins won during the time-saving state, so that the player is always given a sense of tension to save time. You can play games.

On the other hand, in the eighteenth control example, when the time saving state (second time saving) is set based on the time saving winning in the special symbol lottery, the time saving state (first time saving) is set based on the jackpot winning. It is configured to set an end condition different from the case where it is set, and specifically, it is configured to set the number of times of time reduction "1". That is, the first working hour reduction set based on the winning of the working hour reduction in the special symbol lottery is used as a special lottery function for executing only the big hit determination in the special symbol lottery in the hour saving state.

In addition, in the eighteenth control example, a specific area is provided in the V winning device 650 that is opened during the small winning game, and the ball passes through the specific area during the small winning game (a special discharge channel that is a specific area When the V switch 650e3 provided in the 650e2 detects the ball, it is configured to be a big hit (so-called two types of hits) (see FIG. 580). In addition, although the details will be described later, the degree of expectation (V prize expectation) that the ball passes through the specific area during the small winning game is configured to differ according to the type of the small winning winning. Then, the number of times the second end condition set for each small hit type is established (the number of small hits) is set so that the small hit type in which the small hit game with a high V winning expectation is executed is smaller. Configure.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to associate the V winning expectation level for winning two types of wins when a small win is won during the time saving game and the anxiety that the time saving state may end, The player can be motivated to play the game.

In addition, in the eighteenth control example, as described above, the first predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) is set as the end condition (first end condition) with respect to the number of fluctuations of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) However, other end conditions may be set for the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, for example, the number of fluctuations of only the first special symbol is the third predetermined number (for example, 50 times). or when the number of fluctuations of only the second special symbol reaches a fourth predetermined number of times (for example, 80 times), the termination condition of the time saving state may be established. Also, only a part of the numerous termination conditions described above may be used, or they may be combined as appropriate.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 from which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by the winning of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), and while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, A third symbol display device 81 configured by a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that performs variable display of the third symbol, and the passage of the ball to the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 are used as triggers. A second pattern display device (not shown) composed of LEDs for variably displaying two patterns is provided. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch large-sized liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 242), for example, upper, middle, and lower three patterns. One symbol row is displayed (see FIG. 122). Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the eighteenth control example, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 242). A decorative display is performed according to the display of the 1-symbol display devices 37a and 37b.

That is, the third pattern is variably displayed ( The third pattern is displayed as a special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the timing when the first symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing the lottery result of the special symbol on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b. The symbols are stopped and displayed in a display mode according to the lottery result of the symbols.

That is, the determination is performed by the determination means (the lottery for the special symbol is executed) based on the establishment of the determination condition (the winning of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640), and the predetermined After the identification information (third pattern) is dynamically displayed (variable display) until the dynamic display period elapses, in a display mode (combination of patterns) showing the discrimination result (lottery result of special symbols) of the discrimination means , the identification information (third symbol) is stopped and displayed. As a result, the player can grasp the lottery result of the special symbol by grasping the third design displayed on the third design display device 81 . Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In addition, the third symbol stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be a display mode according to the lottery result of the special symbol, and a part of the lottery result of the special symbol It may be a display mode corresponding to the success/failure determination result only), or it may be a display mode corresponding to the details of the special symbol lottery result (for example, the type of the winning jackpot). In addition, when there are four types of lottery results (for example, big hits, small hits, misses, and time saving) as the lottery results of special symbols, the above-mentioned three types of lottery results of special symbols are used as the display mode of the third symbol. It is also possible to use a display mode that indicates one of two specific types of lottery results (for example, a big win or a small win). In addition, in the case of duplicate winning determination (for example, jackpot determination, time saving determination), a display mode for indicating duplicate winning may be used, or based on duplicate winning If the content of the game to be executed based on the winning of the jackpot is the same as the content of the game to be executed based only on winning the jackpot, the same display mode may be used.

Further, instead of the display device used in the eighteenth control example, the third pattern display device 81 may be configured using, for example, reels or the like, or the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with a plurality of display devices. .

In this 18th control example, if the second symbol (normal symbol) is won during the time saving state, the electric accessory 640a is higher than when the second symbol (normal symbol) is won during the normal state. The operation period (the period during which the electric accessory 640a is protruded to make it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640) is configured to be longer. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the time saving state.

In addition, the configuration for making it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the time-saving state is not limited to the above-described content. A configuration such as increasing the opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a may be used. In addition, when the time saving state is made to be a state where the ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 640 by changing the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is irrespective of the game state. It may be constant. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than during the normal time during the time saving, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the game state, and the electric role for one winning The opening time and number of openings of the object 640a may be fixed regardless of the game state.

Furthermore, when the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is varied according to the set game state, and the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a are varied, the variable display of the second symbol is started. The variable display time of the second symbol is determined according to the game state set at the time point, the variable display of the second symbol is stopped, and the timing at which the second symbol indicating the win is displayed (the timing of the display of the second symbol) It may be configured to determine the opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a according to the game state set in the winning game, that is, the timing of activating the electric accessory 640a. By configuring in this way, for example, when the second pattern that starts to change during the time saving state is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing the win during the normal state, the corresponding electric accessory 640a during the normal state It can be operated in an actuation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to more accurately associate the set game state with the operation pattern of the electric accessory to be executed.

The relationship between the game state, the variation time of the second symbol, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a may be specified other than the contents described above. When it is determined that the time saving state is set as the game state at either timing of the start timing, an operation pattern advantageous to the player as the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a (executed during the time saving state operation pattern) may be set.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 through which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first ball inlet 64, a first ball inlet switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball inlet switch is turned on. A lottery for a big win is made by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 242), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37a.

As shown in FIG. 576, the first ball entrance 64 is played on the left side of the variable display unit 80 so that the ball flows down (so-called left-handed game). A nail is planted on the game board 13 so that the ball can enter the game more easily than in a game in which the ball flows down (so-called right-handed game). Therefore, when a game state (normal state) in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the second ball inlet 640 is set, a left-handed game is executed to allow the ball to enter the first ball inlet 64. be.

On the other hand, a second ball entrance 640 through which a ball can enter is provided on the right side of the first ball entrance 64 in front view. When the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, a second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second ball entrance switch is turned on. A lottery for a big win is made by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 242), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37b.

In addition, the first ball entry hole 64 and the second ball entry hole 640 are also one of winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In the eighteenth control example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 are set to be the same. However, the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 are different numbers, for example, the first The number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the ball entrance 64 may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 may be five.

In addition, in the eighteenth control example, a switch (first ball entrance switch, second ball entrance switch) for detecting a ball that serves as a special pattern lottery opportunity (big hit lottery opportunity) is provided in the ball entrance. , While it is configured to acquire a special symbol lottery opportunity and win a prize ball, other configurations may be used. When a switch (detection means) for detecting a ball passing through detects the passage of the ball, it may be configured to obtain a special symbol lottery opportunity. In this case, at least some of the balls that have passed through the area (gate) that can trigger the lottery of the special symbols can enter, and when the balls enter, a predetermined number (for example, 5) of prize balls will be paid out. It is good to provide an entrance. By configuring in this way, the number of acquisition times of the special symbol lottery opportunity and the number of winning ball acquisition times can be made different, so that various game characteristics can be provided.

The second ball entrance 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. This electric accessory 640a can be changed between a protruding state (allowed state) protruding from the game board 13 to the front side (the front side from the viewpoint of FIG. 576) and a retracted state (restricted state) to the game board 13 side. Normally (when the second symbol is not won), the electric accessory 640a is in a retracted state (restricted state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. It has become. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, that is, the second symbol When winning the lottery with two symbols, the electric accessary 640a is in a protruding state (allowed state), and the ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加

Here, the ball flow to the second ball entrance 640 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighteenth control example will be described. In the 18th control example, as shown in FIG. 576, the variable display device unit 80 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area of the game board 13, and the game area is set to the left side of the variable display unit 80 (left-handed area). and the right side (right hitting area), and by adjusting the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 by the player, the destination of the shot ball can be divided into the right hitting area and the left hitting area. configured as possible. Hereinafter, a game in which the player operates the operation handle 51 to shoot a ball into the left-handed area of the game area is called a left-handed game, and a game in which the player shoots a ball into the right-handed area is called a right-handed game.

In the eighteenth control example, as shown in FIG. 576, the second ball entrance 640, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640, and the lottery for whether or not to operate the electric accessory 640a. A normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 serving as a trigger is arranged in a right hitting area, and when a time saving state is set as a game state, a right hitting game is performed.

A nail is planted under the variable display device unit 80 so that the ball fired by the left-handed game does not enter the second ball entrance 640, and the second ball is entered during the left-handed game. It is configured so that the ball does not enter the mouth 640. - 特許庁By configuring in this way, in the left-handed game, the ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 in order to vary the first special symbol, and in the right-handed game, the second special symbol is varied. Therefore, it is possible to perform a game in which the ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640, and it is possible to appropriately provide different game characteristics according to the game method.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the eighteenth control example, as shown in FIG. 576, the V winning device 650 in the right-handed area has its upper surface inclined downward to the left (lower left when viewed from the front in FIG. 576). is arranged, and each mechanism is arranged so that the ball flowing down the upper surface of the V winning device 650 passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 and flows down toward the electric accessory 640a.

Then, when the electric accessory 640a is in the retracted state, the ball flows down toward the variable winning device 65 through the electric accessory 640a in the standby state. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 640a is positioned in the protruding state, the ball that reaches the electric accessory 640a flows down in the lower right direction (the lower right direction in the front view of FIG. 576). Then, the ball that reaches the right end of the electric accessory 640a enters the second ball entrance 640, and when the electric accessory 640a changes to the retracted state before reaching the right end of the electric accessory 640a, the electric It is constructed such that the ball enters the general winning hole 63 arranged below the accessory 640a.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a transparent cover member 655 so as to cover the electric accessory 640a, the second ball entrance 640, and the general prize winning opening 63 described above. The surface of the cover member 655 is cut to diffusely reflect incident light. By providing this cover member 655, the inside of the cover member 655 is made visible to the player by various lights emitted from the light emitting means (LED etc.) provided in the pachinko machine 10 and the third pattern display device 81 during the game. can be made difficult. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the act of performing a right-handed game by planning the operation timing of the electric accessory 640a.

In addition, when a game is not being played (when the power of the gaming machine is turned off), the light incident on the cover member is suppressed, so that the inside of the cover member 655 can be easily visually recognized. Maintenance of the machine 10 can be easily performed. In the case where the cover member 655 is used to vary the visibility of the interior in this manner, the light emitting means can be shared by configuring the light emitting means for emitting light for decoration as described above. , and the number of parts constituting the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In addition, the inside of the cover member 655 may be made invisible for a predetermined period including the period during which the electric accessory 640a is operated. For example, when it is determined that the electric accessory 640a is operated (that is, controlling the light emitting means so that characters (e.g., "open") notifying that the electric accessory 640a operates on the surface of the cover member 655 (when winning a prize by lottery of normal symbols) are displayed; The displayed characters may be configured to make the inside of the cover member 655 difficult to see. As a result, it is possible to make the player understand that the electric accessory 640a is moving, and make it difficult for the player to comprehend the detailed operation timing.

Here, with reference to FIG. 577, the configuration of the right-handed area of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. As shown in FIG. 577, among the balls launched in the right-handed game, the balls that have passed through the through gate 67 flow down toward the area where the electric accessory 640a is arranged. Specifically, the electric accessory 640a has a length of 50 mm, and is composed of a plate-shaped member on the top surface of which a ball can flow down, and is directed downward (lower right when viewed from the front in FIG. 577). is arranged on the game board 13 so as to be downwardly inclined toward . After passing through the through gate 67, the ball flows down to a region a (see FIG. 577) corresponding to a range of 20 mm from the left end of the electric accessory 640a.

The ball that has reached the area a passes through the electric accessory 640a and flows down toward the variable winning device 65 when the electric accessory 640a is in the retracted state. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 640a is positioned at the projecting position, the ball flows down with the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a facing the right end position. Then, when the electric accessory 640a is changed to the retracted state with the ball reaching the area b (the area corresponding to 20 mm to 40 mm from the left end of the electric accessory 640a), it is provided below the electric accessory 640a. It is configured such that the ball flows down toward the general winning hole 63 that is opened. Finally, when the ball reaches the area c (the area corresponding to 20 mm from the right end of the electric accessory 640a), the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. As shown in FIG.

In addition, in the eighteenth control example, the period during which the electric accessory 640a continuously operates is different in the game state (normal symbol probability state), and the game state is the normal state (normal symbol low probability state) is set and the electric accessory 640a operates, the electric accessory 640a is variable to the standby state, in the state in which the time-saving state is set, the ball flowing down on the electric accessory 640a reaches the area c (see FIG. 577), the electric accessory for a sufficient period of time 640a is configured to be positioned at the projecting position.

Specifically, the operation period of the electric accessory 640a (the period during which it is continuously positioned in the projecting state) is configured to be 2 seconds during the short working hours state and 0.2 seconds during the normal state. Then, the electric accessory 640a is designed so that the flow period for the ball to flow down the area (range from area a to area c) shown in FIG. 577 is longer than 0.2 seconds and shorter than 2 seconds. (0.8 seconds in the 18th control example). By configuring in this way, even if a right-handed game is played in the normal state, winning the normal symbol, and the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a in operation, Since the operation of the electric accessory 640a ends before the ball flowing down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a reaches the second ball entrance 640, it is ensured that the lottery for the second special symbol is executed in the normal state. can be prevented.

In addition, during the time saving state, the electric accessory 640a is operated for a period longer than the period (0.4 seconds) in which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reaches the second ball entrance 640. , the ball flowing down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a in the guided state (protruding state) can easily reach the second ball entrance 640, and the lottery for the second special symbol can be easily executed.

Furthermore, during the time saving state, for example, the ball that reaches the electric accessory 640a 1.5 seconds after the operation of the electric accessory 640a flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a, and at the timing when it reaches the area b The operation of the accessory 640a is completed (two seconds have passed since the electric accessory 640a was activated). As shown in FIG. 577, such balls enter the general winning hole 63 arranged below the electric accessory 640a, and 10 balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when a right-handed game is played in the time saving state, different ball entrances (second ball entrance 640 Alternatively, by configuring it so that the ball can be guided to the general winning hole 63), the player can be made to continuously play the right-handed game during the time saving state.

As described above, the configuration is such that the number of prize balls corresponding to entering the general winning hole 63 is 10, and the number of prize balls corresponding to entering the second ball inlet 640 is 5. Therefore, if the lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be executed, it is better for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 than for the ball to enter the general winning opening 63. Advantageous benefits (i.e. special figure 2 lottery and 5 prize balls) can be given, and the second special symbol (special figure 2) lottery cannot be executed (during special symbol fluctuation) If there is, it is configured so that the ball entering the general winning hole 63 rather than the second ball entering hole 640 can give the player a more advantageous privilege (that is, 10 prize balls).

As a result, depending on the game situation (whether or not there is a change in special symbols), the player can change the ball entrance that the player wants to enter (the ball entrance where many benefits can be obtained), which saves time. The player can enjoy the right-handed game during the state. In addition, in order to enter the ball into both the second ball entry hole 640 and the general winning hole 63 during one motion of the electric accessory 640a, it is necessary to continuously execute the right-handed game. Therefore, it is possible to increase the operation of the game.

In the eighteenth control example, the operation period of the electric accessory 640a during the time saving state is sufficiently longer than the period (0.8 seconds) during which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reaches the second ball entrance 640. is set to a long period (2 seconds), and the ball is surely entered into the second ball entrance 640 when the electric accessory 640a is operated. The operation period of the electric accessory 640a inside is slightly longer than the period (0.8 seconds) during which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reaches the second ball entrance 640 (for example, 0.8 seconds). 9 seconds). By configuring in this way, after the ball is passed through the through gate 67 in the time saving state, the act of stopping the ball from being launched and starting to launch the ball again after confirming that the electric accessory 640a has been operated ( Since it is possible to suppress so-called stop hitting), it is possible to improve the operation of the game by continuing the right hitting game during the time saving state.

Returning to FIG. 576, the description continues. As described above with reference to FIG. 577, the ball fired by the right-handed game first reaches the V winning device 650. Next, the configuration of the V winning device 650 will be described. The V winning device 650 is configured to be variable between an open state in which a ball can win a prize and a closed state in which it is difficult to win a prize. The opening/closing door 650f1 of the device 650 is operated to change to an open state in which a ball can win in the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a.

In addition, in some of the "big wins" of the special symbols, the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 may be configured to operate in the same manner as in the case of winning the "minor wins" described above. As a result, when the open/close door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 operates, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether the special symbol "big win" or "small win" is won.

Here, the configuration of the V winning device 650 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 577-578. First, as shown in FIG. 577, when the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is in the closed state that closes the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a, the upper surface of the opening/closing door 650f1 in the closed state is can flow down, and the ball that reaches the V winning device 650 while the V winning device 650 is closed flows down toward the lower left side (lower left side when viewed from the front in FIG. 577) above the open/close door 650f1. , to the through gate 67 . On the other hand, when the V winning device 650 is open (that is, during the small winning game), the ball enters the V winning device 650 .

In the eighteenth control example, the opening period of the V winning device 650 during the small winning game is configured to be 0.1 seconds x 12 times, and at the timing when the V winning device 650 opens, it flows down on the open/close door 650f1. The ball that is doing wins a prize to the V winning device 650. - 特許庁Balls that have won a prize in the V winning device 650 are arranged to flow down toward the detection port 650a1 (see FIG. 580(a)) while flowing down on the first regulating member 651 or the second regulating member 652. there is With this configuration, even if the ball flowing down on the opening/closing door 650f1 enters the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a of the V winning device 650 from any position on the opening/closing door 650f1, the ball can be smoothly released. can flow down.

In the 18th control example, the period during which the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is continuously opened is set to 0.1 seconds, but during the opening period of the opening/closing door 650f1, Any other period may be set as long as it is a period during which the ball can enter the V winning device 650 . In addition, in the eighteenth control example, the number of times the open/close door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is opened in one small winning game is set to 12 times, but other times may be set.

As in the seventh control example described above, in the eighteenth control example, in the small winning game, the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is opened once and then opened next time (open interval period). 5 seconds are set after the 5th and 10th opening operations during the winning game, and 0.5 seconds are set at other timings. This is for making it easier for the V winning device 650 to win the ball during the period in which the small winning game is being played. Specifically, when it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has not detected the ball at the time when the fifth opening operation is completed during the small winning game, during the interval period between opening after the fifth opening operation is completed In addition, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a game guide display for emphasizing and prompting the player to play the game to the right.

Then, even when a right-handed game is started by grasping the game guide display displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the interval period between openings is set so that the ball can enter the V winning device 650 is set longer than usual. Also, when it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has not detected the ball when the tenth opening operation during the small winning game is completed, the same control processing is executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for a player who does not play an appropriate game during a small winning game (a player who does not play a right-handed game) to perform an appropriate game. In this way, during the specific game (small winning game) in which the opening action is executed multiple times, when it is determined that the interval period between opening is set longer than the other and it is determined that the appropriate game is not performed By making it possible to display a game guidance display for prompting proper game contents, a player who is playing a wrong game can be made to play the game without anxiety.

In the eighteenth control example, as in the seventh control example described above, after the fifth and tenth opening operations during the small winning game, a longer special opening interval period than the others is set. In this way, by providing a plurality of timings for displaying the game guidance display to the player during one small winning game, it is possible to make the player more likely to play an appropriate game. In addition, in the case where the timing for displaying the game guidance display is provided a plurality of times, at least the notification timing for the second shift should be set to a timing that the player who is playing the game normally cannot reach. That is, as in the seventh control example described above, in the eighteenth control example, by performing the right-handed game continuously during the small winning game, at least 1 Since it is configured so that 1 balls can be entered, if a normal game (continuous right-handed game) is performed, the number of prizes that will be the termination condition of the small winning game during the 10th opening operation (10 pieces) is reached, and the small winning game is ended.

That is, the inter-opening interval period executed after the 10th opening operation during the small winning game is a timing that cannot be reached when a normal game (continuous right-handed game) is performed. Therefore, by setting the timing for displaying the game guidance display using this timing, the interval period between special openings that is unnecessarily long for the player who is playing a normal game (continuously playing a right-handed game) It is no longer executed, and the small winning game can be smoothly executed.

In addition, as in the 18th control example, when setting the first special opening interval period to the timing (after the fifth opening operation ends) reached even if a normal game (continued right-handed game) is performed is the timing at which the first inter-special opening interval period starts (fifth opening operation end timing), or the timing at which a predetermined period has elapsed since the first inter-special opening interval period started (fifth opening It is determined whether the V switch 650e3 detects the ball at the timing when the period required for the ball entered during the operation to be discharged from the V prize winning device 650 has passed, and the V switch 650e3 detects the ball. If it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has not detected a ball, a game guide is displayed as described above. should be configured to display As a result, the interval period between special openings set during the small winning game can be effectively used according to the game content.

Furthermore, during the second special opening interval period, it is preferable to display the game guidance display even when the V switch 650e3 has already detected the ball. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the small winning game ends without causing the predetermined number (10) of balls to enter the V winning device 650 during the small winning game.

Next, the structure of the V winning device 650 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 578 is an exploded perspective view of this V winning device 650. FIG. As shown in FIG. 578, the V winning device 650 is an opening forming member 650b arranged to protrude from the front side of the game board 13, and is combined with the rear side of the opening forming member 650b to form the V winning device 650. A base member 650c for screwing to the game board 13, and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 650c for lighting the front side of the pachinko machine 10 from the back side of the base member 650c. The arranged LED board 650d, the back cover body 650e sandwiching the LED board 650d with the base member 650c, and the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a formed in the opening forming member 650b. An opening/closing unit 650f having an opening/closing door 650f1, a flow path cover body 650g combined with the back side of the back cover body 650e to form a flow path, and a flow path formed by the back cover body 650e and the flow path cover body 650g. A switching member 650h that protrudes into the path and switches the flow path of the game ball, a link member 650i that is engaged with the switching member 650h, a rear surface cover body 650j that is arranged on the rear side of the flow path cover body 650g, and its rear surface. A channel solenoid 650k fixed to the back side of the cover body 650j to operate the link member 650i, and a fixing cover body 650m for covering the channel solenoid 650k from the back side and fixing it to the back cover body 650j with screws. It consists of

579 is a sectional view of the V winning device 650. FIG. FIG. 579(c) is a top view of the V winning device 650, and FIG. 579(b) is a cross-sectional view of the V winning device 650 taken along the line Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 579(b), the V winning device 650 is formed with a specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a, which is an opening into which a game ball can enter. The specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a has a substantially rectangular opening above the pachinko machine 10, and the game balls passing through the opening are guided leftward in FIG. 579(b). A bottom surface that is inclined downward to the left is formed. A detection port 650a1 composed of a magnetic sensor (ball detection switch) 650c1 for detecting the winning of a game ball is arranged at the left end of the bottom surface. A game ball that has passed through the detection port 650a1 is guided to a sorting channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 650e shown in FIG. 579(a).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 579(b), the opening of the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is opened so that the game ball can be entered by an opening/closing door 650f1 configured with a shutter mechanism that can be retracted from the game board 13 side. It can be changed between a state and a closed state in which it is impossible to enter the ball (difficult to enter the ball). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered with the opening/closing door 650f1, and the game ball can roll on the upper portion of the opening/closing door. In the open state, the opening/closing door 650f1 is retracted inside the base member 650c (inside the game board 13) to be retracted from the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a.

By constructing in this way, the right-handed game can be played continuously during the time-saving game, during the big win game, and during the small win game, thereby reducing the trouble of changing the game method according to the game state. be able to. Therefore, the game can be played more easily.

In addition, in the open state of the opening/closing door 650f1, the plane perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball flows down can be configured as the opening of the V winning device 650, so that the game ball can efficiently enter the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. can be made Therefore, the time required for the small winning game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

FIG. 579(a) is a cross-sectional view along La-La shown in FIG. 579(b). As shown in FIG. 579(a), the magnetic sensor 650c1 having the detection port 650a1 is fixed to the base member 650c so that the detection port 650a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 650e.

Next, with reference to FIG. 580, a description will be given of a configuration for distributing game balls guided to distribution channels of the back cover body 650e to a normal discharge channel 650e1 and a special discharge channel 650e2, which will be described later.

FIG. 580(a) is a rear view of the back cover body 650e showing a state in which the switching member 650h is actuated so that game balls are distributed to the special discharge channel 650e2. As shown in FIG. 580(a), the switching member 650h has a locking hole 650h1 into which the projection of the link member 650i is inserted and a guiding piece 650h2 for guiding the game ball. is rotatably supported from the rear side. Here, the channel cover 650g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 650h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 650h can be rotated into the distribution channel from the back side of the channel cover 650g. It is configured so that it can be arranged as much as possible.

As shown in FIG. 580(a), the game ball guided into the sorting channel from the detection port 650a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 650h2 arranged diagonally to the left and guided to the special discharge channel 650e2. be. A game ball that has passed through the special discharge channel 650e2 is detected by a V switch 650e3 that is configured by a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a game ball provided in the special discharge channel 650e2, and is discharged out of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. be done.

Here, as in the seventh control example described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the eighteenth control example, the game ball passes through the V switch 650e3 described above during the small winning game, so that the big winning game is set after the small winning game. be done. That is, the V switch 650e3 is configured as a trigger for starting a big winning game. In addition, the switching member 650h is a flow path (special discharge flow path 650e2) in which the ball that has won the V winning device 650 during the small win can pass through the V switch 650e3, or a flow path that cannot (difficultly) pass through the V switch 650e3. By turning on the flow path solenoid 650k, the winning ball in the V winning device 650 flows down the special discharge flow path 650e2. (see FIG. 580(b)).

In the pachinko machine 10 used in the 18th control example, the channel solenoid 650k is set to be OFF while the game is played normally, and the winning ball of the V winning device 650 flows down the normal discharge channel 650e1. It is configured as follows. Then, when a small prize is won, the channel solenoid 650k is set to ON according to the contents stipulated in the above-mentioned open scenario table 202g, and the winning ball of the V winning device 650 can flow down the special discharge channel 650e2. It is configured to be In this way, when the channel solenoid 650k is set to be off, the state is maintained for a long period of time in the pachinko machine 10, that is, the winning ball of the V winning device 650 flows down the normal discharge channel 650e1. The power consumption of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by providing a state in which the switching member 650h is maintained (see FIG. 580(a)).

In this way, the game state set after the small winning game is changed by the flow-down route of the game ball winning the V winning device 650 during the small winning game, so that the interest of the player is improved even during the small winning game. be able to. The time required to pass from the opening (specific winning opening) of the V winning device 650 to the entrance of the special discharge channel 650e2 (opening surface closed by the guide piece 650h2 of the switching member 650h) is 1 second at the shortest. consists of By configuring in this way, even if the switching member 650h switches the flow-down route of the ball after detecting that the opening/closing door 650f1 has been opened in spite of not winning a small prize, the ball will surely flow. It is possible to prevent the water from flowing down the special discharge channel 650e2.

In addition, a discharge confirmation switch 650e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting passage of a ball is provided at the end of the normal discharge passage 650e1. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have entered the V winning device 650 have been discharged from the sum of the output of the discharge confirmation switch 650e4 and the V switch 650e3. In addition, the end timing of the small winning game (condition for ending the small winning game (when the V winning device 650 wins a predetermined number (10 pieces), or when the opening scenario of the V winning device 650 ends) is established When all the game balls that have entered the V winning device 650 are not discharged at the timing after the small winning ending period has passed, it is determined that there is an abnormality inside the V winning device 650, and it is sent to the outside. It is preferable to configure so as to notify the abnormality or stop the game so that the jackpot game or the normal game is not started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from progressing in a state in which a part of the pachinko machine 10 has an abnormality, thereby preventing a secondary abnormality from occurring.

In this way, the game ball that has won the specific winning hole (V winning hole) 650a of the V winning device 650 is detected by the magnetic sensor 650c1, and based on this, the player receives a prize ball (one ball in the 18th control example) as a privilege. 10 prize balls) can be paid out for winning a prize. In addition, by using the game ball after being detected, it can be sorted whether or not it passes through the V switch 650e3, so that it can be sorted whether or not the big win game is executed after the small win game is finished. can be done. Therefore, there is no need to provide a dedicated prize winning port (specific area) for awarding a jackpot game separately from the V winning device 650, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

Furthermore, in the eighteenth control example, according to the small winning type (small winning A, B, C) set when winning the small winning, the period and timing for setting the flow path solenoid 650 k to ON are different. It is configured so that games can be played. By constructing in this way, the degree of expectation (V prize expectation) for the ball to pass through the V switch 650e3 during the small winning game is made different depending on the content of the small winning game executed when winning the small winning. be able to. Therefore, the player can not only win a small prize, but also play a game while expecting that a small prize game with a high V winning expectation will be executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 581, the structure of the ball flow lower surface of the opening/closing door 650f1 that opens and closes the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 will be described. FIG. 581(a) is a schematic plan view showing a state in which the opening/closing door 650f1 closes the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650. FIG. In the opening/closing door 650f1 of the eighteenth control example, as shown in FIG. It is configured to flow down from the right upper surface 650 y 1 of the device 650 to the left upper surface 650 y 2 via the upper surface of the opening/closing door 650 f 1 and flow toward the variable winning device 65 .

A first delay member 650fa, a second delay member 650fb, and a third delay member 650fc are provided on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 650f1 as delay members for delaying the falling of the ball. is configured so that the period of time during which the water flows down is 0.6 seconds. This flowing period (0.6 seconds) is longer than the interval (closing period (0.5 seconds)) when the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a of the V winning device 650 is opened multiple times by the small winning game. configured to be long. By configuring in this way, the ball flowing down on the opening/closing door 650f1 is configured to surely win when the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is opened by the small winning game.

In the state shown in FIG. 581(a), a small winning game is executed, and when the opening/closing door 650f1 is changed to the open state, the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. 581(b). FIG. 581(b) is a schematic plan view showing a state in which the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 is open. As shown in FIG. 581(b), when the opening/closing door 650f1 is in an open state, it moves so as to retract inside the game board 13, and the ball flowing down the right upper surface 650y1 enters the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. The specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is opened so that winning is possible. In addition, the ball flowing down on the opening/closing door 650f1 also enters the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a when the opening/closing door 650f1 is positioned at the retracted position.

In addition, the V winning device 650 is equipped with a third mechanism for smoothing the flow of the ball after winning regardless of the position from which the ball flowing down on the opening and closing door 650f1 enters the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. A 1 regulating member 651 and a 2nd regulating member 652 are provided (see FIG. 576). After being aligned in a line via the 2 regulating members 652, it is configured to flow down toward the detection port 650a1 having a passage width of one ball. By providing the first regulating member 651 and the second regulating member 652 in this way, even if the detection opening 650a1 is provided below the first regulating member, the ball that has won with great force from the opening/closing door 650f1 is directly detected through the detection opening 650a1. Therefore, it is possible to suppress failure of the ball detection switch 650c1 provided in the detection port 650a1. In addition, a flow path (a flow path flowing down on the first restricting member 651 and the second restricting member 652) for aligning the balls until the balls pass through the detection port 650a1 having a passage width corresponding to one ball is secured. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the balls are clogged in the V winning device 650 and the game is hindered.

As described above, in the 18th control example, the privilege game (small hit game) that is given when the determination result of the determination means (lottery result of the special symbol) is a predetermined determination result (small hit) The falling period (0.6 seconds) required for the ball to flow down on the variable member (opening/closing door 650f1) is longer than the open interval period (0.5 seconds) of the operating variable member (opening/closing door 650f1). Therefore, the ball flowing down on the variable member during the opening interval (timing when the open/close door 650f1 is in a closed state) during the small winning game surely enters the V winning device 650 at the next opening timing. can be made

In addition, only the balls flowing down on the variable member are allowed to enter the V winning device 650 during the small winning game so that a predetermined number (10) can be won during the small winning game. Since the number of times of opening operation in the winning game (12 times) is set more than the number of winning prizes (10 pieces) for the end condition of the small winning game, even if one opening period (0.1 seconds) is set short , a sufficient number of prizes can be secured. In addition, by setting one opening period long, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which an excessive number of balls are awarded to the V winning device 650 during the small winning game.

<Regarding the production content in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighteenth control example>
With reference to FIGS. 582 and 583, description will be given of the characteristic effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the eighteenth control example.

In the above-described seventh control example, the second special symbol winning information (winning information obtained when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640) is not stored pending. On the other hand, in the 18th control example, the winning information of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special figure 2 reservation) is configured to be retained and stored, and the special figure 2 retained and stored before the start of the jackpot game. It is possible to preliminarily discriminate (read ahead) the result of the holding lottery, and when there is a holding (V holding) for winning a small win, an effect for notifying the existence of the V holding can be executed during the jackpot game. It is different from the seventh control example in that it is configured to be possible.

Specifically, in the time-saving state (high-probability state of normal symbols), up to a predetermined number (upper limit 4 in this 18th control example) of special symbols 2 can be retained and stored in the second special symbol retention ball storage area 203b. When a jackpot game is started based on the fact that a special symbol wins a jackpot or wins a small prize, the lottery result of the reserved and stored special figure 2 reserve is read in advance, and V reserve exists therein. In this case, an effect (V-icon acquisition effect) for acquiring a V-icon indicating that there is a V-hold is executed. Then, the acquired V icon is reduced and displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 until the V suspension is completed, and the V icon is enlarged and displayed during the variable display of the special symbols based on the V suspension ( Hereinafter, this is called activation of the V icon.) By doing so, the player is notified that the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner has won a small prize before the special symbol is stopped and displayed. Therefore, during the period when the V icon is displayed in a reduced size, it is guaranteed that a small win will be won in any of the reserved and stored special figure 2 reserves, and the prescribed number of fluctuations will not be won in the big win or the small win. , and the time saving state does not end, the player can enjoy the game in the time saving state with peace of mind.

Here, the outline of the effect|presentation performed in the time saving state (high-probability state of a normal design) in this 18th control example is demonstrated. In the eighteenth control example, when the time-saving state is set, an effect is executed in which the character 802 imitating a hero advances through the dungeon, and when an enemy character 804 imitating a dinosaur is encountered, reach is achieved, and a battle effect is started. . In this battle presentation, if the character 802 wins against the enemy character 804, it is informed that the big win or the small win has been won.

With reference to FIG. 582(a), the display screen of the V-icon acquisition effect executed during the jackpot game in the eighteenth control example will be described. FIG. 582(a) is an example of the display screen when the V icon acquisition effect is executed during the jackpot game. In the eighteenth control example, when the execution of the V-icon acquisition effect is set, the V-icon acquisition effect is executed instead of the normal ending effect during the ending period of the jackpot game. By executing the V-icon acquisition effect in the ending period in this manner, it is difficult to make the player feel that the period from the end of the final round of the jackpot game to the start of the first variable display of the special symbol is prolonged. can do.

In the small display area Dm8, a display mode indicating that the special symbols have won the jackpot is displayed, and the player can recognize that the special symbols have won the jackpot. In addition, the small display area Dm4 displays "Right-handed" so that the player can easily understand the game method in the jackpot game.

In the small display area Dm14, the number of winning jackpots up to the present from the jackpot winning in the normal state (normal pattern low probability state) is displayed. Since the number of jackpot wins is displayed in large numbers, the player can be given a sense of superiority.

The number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed is displayed in the small display area Dm15. In FIG. 582(a), "ED" indicating that it is the ending period is displayed to inform the player that it is the ending period in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the small display area Dm9, a reserved symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation (winning information of the second special symbol) reserved and stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is displayed. In FIG. 582(a), the first reserved design hr1, the second reserved design hr2, and the third reserved design hr3 are each displayed as a white reserved design, and the fourth reserved design hr4 is displayed as a black reserved design. . In this 18th control example, it is configured to indicate that the possibility of winning a big win or a small win is higher with a black reserved symbol than with a white reserved symbol. Therefore, FIG. 582(a) shows a state in which the fourth reserved symbol hr4 has a higher possibility of winning the jackpot or the small prize than the first to third reserved symbols hr1 to hr3.

After the jackpot game ends, when the variable display of the special symbols is started, the reserved symbols are digested in order from the first reserved symbol hr1 to the youngest, and when the first reserved symbol hr1 is digested, the second reserved symbol hr2 is displayed. The position of the first reserved design hr1 is shifted and displayed, and the third reserved design hr3 is shifted and displayed in the space vacated by the shift of the second reserved design hr2. Similarly, the fourth reserved design hr4 is also shifted to the empty space of the third reserved design hr3 and displayed. The empty space due to the shift of the fourth reserved design hr4 becomes blank until the new special figure 2 reservation is stored, and when the new special figure 2 reservation is stored, the corresponding reserved design is displayed. be.

When the V icon acquisition effect is set, an effect is started in which the character 802 discovers the treasure box 810 in the main display area Dm during the ending period of the jackpot game, and the V sword 803 marked with "V" is displayed from the treasure box 810. The production that appears is executed. In addition, in the sub display area Ds, by displaying "V icon acquisition", the player is notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the V icon acquisition effect has been executed. This V sword 803 is a V icon for notifying the player that there is a V reservation (reservation for winning a small hit) in the reserved and stored special figure 2 reservation (winning information of the second special symbol). Also, during the period when the variable display of the special symbols is executed after the end of the jackpot game, the symbols are displayed in a reduced size in the main display area Dm.

In the eighteenth control example, only when the V-icon acquisition effect is set, the effect of finding the treasure box 810 shown in FIG. 582(a) is executed. The ending effect may also be configured to discover the treasure box 810 . In this case, a sword that is not marked with a V may appear in the treasure chest 810 . Also, depending on the display mode of the sword, it may be configured to indicate the degree of expectation of winning a big win or winning a small win in the reserve. In addition, in the eighteenth control example, the V-icon acquisition effect is executed during the ending period of the jackpot game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be executed during the opening period of the jackpot game. The configuration may be such that it is executed in a specific round. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the V-icon acquisition effect is executed at a plurality of timings, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous during the jackpot game period.

582(a) may execute an effect in which the character 802 discovers the treasure box 810 in a specific round of the jackpot game. A pattern in which a display mode (for example, a ball displaying the number of rounds to be added) appears to indicate that the number of rounds is to be added may be provided. By constructing in this way, even when the condition for executing the V icon acquisition performance is not established, the performance of finding the treasure box 810 is executed, thereby making the player expect to acquire the V icon. In addition, since the number of rounds is added when the V icon cannot be acquired, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's desire to play.

Next, referring to FIG. 582(b), this is an example of the display screen of the battle production when the V reservation (reservation for winning a small prize) is canceled in the fourth special symbol variation display after the end of the jackpot game. be.

In the small display area Dm6, the V sword 803 acquired in the V icon acquisition effect is displayed in a reduced size. is present to the player.

In the main display area Dm, a battle effect is started in which the character 802 encounters the enemy character 804, and in the sub-display area Ds, "Will you win a big win if you defeat the enemy?" Alternatively, the configuration is such that the player can easily recognize that a small prize has been won.

FIG. 583(a) is an example of the display screen when the V icon is activated during the battle effect. In this 18th control example, when the V-icon is activated, the V-sword 803 that has been displayed in reduced size in the small display area Dm6 is enlarged and displayed in the main display area Dm, and the character 802 uses the V-sword 803 to attack the enemy. An effect of winning the character 804 is executed. In this case, "V icon activated" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds to inform the player that the V icon has been activated in an easy-to-understand manner.

Thus, when the V-icon is activated (the V-sword 803 is displayed in an enlarged manner), the special symbol is always stop-displayed in a display mode indicating a small win. Therefore, when the V icon is activated, the player can recognize that the variable display of the special symbol wins a small hit before the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

Figure 583 (b) is an example of the display screen of the battle production when the variable display of the special symbol based on the V suspension is started and there is another V suspension in the remaining special figure 2 suspension. be. In this case, unlike FIG. 583(a), after the character 802 is defeated by the enemy character 804 once, a resurrection effect is executed in which the character 802 revives and wins. When the resurrection effect is executed, the character 802 defeats the character 804 using the normal sword 805 different from the V sword 803, as shown in FIG. 583(b). Therefore, the V-sword 803 continues to be displayed in a reduced size in the small display area Dm6 as it is, and continues to be displayed in a reduced size even after the big winning game executed based on the winning of the small winning of this special symbol.

In this way, when the V reservation (reservation to win a small hit) is digested, if there is another V reservation in the remaining special figure 2 reservation (winning information of the second special symbol), the V icon is not executed, it is possible to inform the player that the remaining special figure 2 hold will be a consecutive chance (continuous winning of small hits).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 582(a), the special figure 2 suspension at the end of the special figure 2 suspension that was reserved and stored at the time when the V icon acquisition effect was executed (4th reservation pattern hr4 in FIG. 582(a) ) is V pending, by not activating the V icon until the variable display of the special symbol 2 pending special symbol corresponding to the fourth pending symbol hr4 is started, corresponding to the fourth pending symbol hr4 It is clear to the player that the small winning will be won by holding the special figure 2, and since there is no change in winning the small winning no matter what kind of performance is executed in the variable display of the special symbol, Although there is a possibility that the player's interest will fade, as in the eighteenth control example, when the variable display of the special symbols based on the V hold is started, the V hold is included in the special figure 2 hold that is held and stored. If there is, it is configured so that the V icon can not be activated, and by switching the activation target of the V icon to the special figure 2 suspension that did not exist when the V icon acquisition effect was executed, the fourth suspension symbol It is possible to make the player expect that the activation of the V icon will not be executed during the variable display of the special symbol of hr4, and to make the player interested in the performance executed in the variable display.

In addition, in this 18th control example, even if there are a plurality of V reservations in the special figure 2 reservations that are reserved and stored, only one V icon is displayed, but this is not the case. It is also possible to display a plurality of V icons corresponding to the number of V pending, instead of one.

Alternatively, when a plurality of V-holds exist, after the V-icon is activated in the variable display of the special symbols based on the V-holding to be executed first, the V-icon is reduced and displayed again in the small display area Dm6. It is also possible to adopt a configuration that Alternatively, in FIG. 583 (a), if there is a V hold in the special figure 2 hold that is held and stored, the character 802 uses the V sword 803 for the period until the V hold in the hold is digested. You can continue the state you have.

In this way, the V icon activated based on the completion of one V suspension can be continuously displayed until the next V suspension is digested, so that the V icon can be displayed according to the activated V suspension. Even if a new V-icon acquisition performance is not executed during the jackpot game executed based on the above, the player can expect that the activated V-icon will continue to be displayed, It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that the type of weapon used by the character 802 (swords with different colors and shapes) and the type of enemy characters (enemy characters with different numbers and sizes of horns) suggest the degree of expectation for activating the V icon. It is good as With this configuration, the player can easily predict whether or not the V-icon will be activated, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the eighteenth control example, the configuration is such that a V icon imitating a sword is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. good.

It should be noted that the V sword 803 and the treasure box 810 displayed in the V icon acquisition effect may be displayed differently depending on whether there is only one V reserve in the reserve or when there are a plurality of V reserves. good. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which an effect mode is determined based on the number of V-holds present in the hold, from among a plurality of types of V-icon acquisition effect effects. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the V-icon acquisition effect from becoming monotonous.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighteenth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 584, each counter that the MPU 201 of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighteenth control example has will be described. Although the counters used in the control examples described above are different in that the update range of the counters is partly different, the basic configuration is the same. Description is omitted.

The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 999), and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 999 in the case of a counter that can take values between 0 and 999). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 999, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 999. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 314) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing 7 (see FIG. 325).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in the 18th control example), and the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. It is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, and the special symbol reserved ball execution area of the RAM 203 at the timing. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by the first winning random number 18 table 202ra stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is the first winning random number. When it matches with the value of the random number that becomes a big hit set by the 18 table 202ra, it is determined as a special symbol big win.

In addition, the first per random number 18 table 202ra is provided with two types of a special symbol 1 random number 18 table 202ra1 for the first special symbol and a special symbol 2 random number 18 table 202ra2 for the second special symbol. , the number of random numbers for the big win is the same, but the number of random numbers for the small win is set differently (see FIG. 586). In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that become small wins, the degree of expectation for giving benefits (big wins or small wins) to players can be increased between the lottery for the first special symbols and the lottery for the second special symbols. can be different. The special symbol 1 random number 18 table 202ra1 and the special symbol 2 random number 18 table 202ra2 are provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. FIG.

Here, with reference to FIG. 586, the first winning random number 18 table 202ra will be described. Figure 586 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first per random number 18 table 202ra, Figure 586 (b) is defined in the special symbol 1 random number 18 table 202ra1 FIG. 586(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 2 random number 18 table 202ra2. This first hit random number 18 table 202ra is set with a random number value (determination value) determined as a big hit and a random value (determination value) determined as a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is a table.

Specifically, when executing the lottery for the first special symbol, the special symbol 1 random number 18 table 202ra1 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 586(b), the special symbol 1 random number 18 table 202ra1 defines "0 to 4" as the jackpot determination value among the values of the random number counter C1, and values other than the jackpot (ie , out of range). Then, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is discriminated in the lottery for the first special symbol, and when the value is any one of "0 to 4", it is discriminated as a big win.

When executing the lottery for the second special symbol, the special symbol 2 random number 18 table 202ra2 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 586(c), the special symbol 2 random number 18 table 202ra2 defines "0 to 4" among the values of the random number counter C1 as the big hit determination value, and "5 to 144" is the small hit determination. "145 to 999" are defined as other (ie outlier) judgment values. Then, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is discriminated in the lottery of the second special symbol, and when the value is any one of "0 to 4", it is discriminated as a big win, and when the value is any one of "5 to 144". In some cases, it is determined to be a small hit.

The first win type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is won, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in the 18th control example), and at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the first It is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Also, in a state in which the lottery (fluctuation) of special symbols can be executed (that is, in a state other than during fluctuation of special symbols and during a big win game or a small win game), the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 It is stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area of the RAM 203 at the timing of hitting the ball.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol reserved ball execution area is a random number determined to be a special symbol big win or small win. That is, if it is a random number determined to be out of the special symbol, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 will be the one when the special symbol is out.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol reserved ball execution area is a random number for a special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed in , is the one at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol reserved ball execution area.

The first winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighteenth control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 999. In this first hit random number counter C1, there are five random numbers that will be the big hits in the special symbols when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are drawn. It is stored in the special symbol 1 random number 18 table 202ra1 and the special symbol 2 random number 18 table 202ra2 of the random number 18 table 202ra. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the 18th control example, the total number of random numbers for a big hit is 5 among the total number of random numbers for 1000, so the probability of a special symbol for a big win is "1/200".

The value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighteenth control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. In the 18th control example, the obtained value of the first win type counter C2 is used to refer to the jackpot type selection 18 table 202rb to determine the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. Here, the contents of the jackpot type selection 18 table 202rb will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 587(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the jackpot type selection 18 table 202rb. As shown in FIG. 587 (a), in the 18th control example, the special figure 1 jackpot used when determining the value of the acquired first per type counter C2 at the time of the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) A type selection 18 table 202rb1 and a special figure 2 jackpot type selection 18 table 202rb2 used when determining the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired at the time of the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2). are doing. As a result, the jackpot type when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the special figure 1 and the jackpot type when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the special figure 2 are made different, or each of a plurality of jackpot types is selected. Since the ratio can be changed, the game using the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the game using the second special symbol (special figure 2) provide different game characteristics to the player It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 587(b), the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 18 table 202rb1 used at the time of lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) will be described. FIG. 587(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 18 table 202rb1. As shown in FIG. 587(b), when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the jackpot type when the random number is one of "0 to 9" in the first per type counter C2 If it is "jackpot A", the jackpot type is "jackpot B" if it is any of "10 to 49", and if it is any of "50 to 99", the jackpot type is "jackpot C". . When the time-saving state is set as the game state, the jackpot type when the random number is one of "0 to 9" in the first hit type counter C2 is "jackpot D" and "10 to 49". ”, the jackpot type is “jackpot A”, and when it is any of “50 to 99”, the jackpot type is “jackpot B”.

"Jackpot A" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 16 rounds as a jackpot game, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a time-saving state. Since the number of rounds is large and the game state after the big win is set to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, the "big win A" is the most advantageous big win type for the player. Of the 100 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 10 random numbers select "jackpot A", so the first special pattern (special pattern 1) lottery is a jackpot. When it becomes, the ratio of selecting "jackpot A" is 10%.

"Jack B" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 7 as a jackpot game, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a time-saving state. Although the number of rounds is smaller than that of the above-mentioned "jackpot A", the game state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state advantageous to the player, so the "jackpot B" is a jackpot type advantageous to the player. Of the 100 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 40 random numbers select "jackpot B", so the first special pattern (special pattern 1) lottery is a jackpot. When it becomes, the ratio of selecting "jackpot B" is 40%.

"Jackpot C" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 7 rounds as a jackpot game, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a normal state (non-time-saving state). Since the number of rounds is small and the normal state is set after the big win, the "jackpot C" is a big win type disadvantageous to the player. Of the 100 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 50 random numbers are selected as "jackpot C", so the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery is a big hit. When it becomes, the ratio of selecting "jackpot C" is 50%.

"Jackpot D" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 16 rounds as a jackpot game, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a time-saving state. Since the number of rounds is large and the game state after the big win is set to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, the "big win D" is the most advantageous big win type for the player. Furthermore, the "jackpot D" is configured to set a time-saving state in which it is difficult to end the "jackpot A" described above. Therefore, the jackpot type is more advantageous to the player than "jackpot A" in which the same jackpot game is executed and the same game state is set after the jackpot game ends.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the 18th control example, 16 rounds at a rate of 10% of the jackpot winning in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) in which the normal state is set. , and 90% of the time, 7 rounds of jackpot games are selected. In addition, a jackpot is selected in which the game state after the jackpot game ends shifts to the time-saving state at a rate of 50%.

On the other hand, 16 rounds of jackpot games are selected at a rate of 50% when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) executed in the state where the time saving state is set, and the rate is 50%. A jackpot game of 7 rounds is selected with . In addition, when a jackpot is won in the special figure 1 lottery during the time saving state, the time saving state is always set after the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot winning is finished.

That is, winning a jackpot in a time-saving state is more advantageous to the player than winning a jackpot in a normal state in terms of the contents of the jackpot game and the game state set after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, as the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the time-saving state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 587(c), the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 18 table 202rb2 used at the time of lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2) will be described. Figure 587 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 18 table 202rb2. As shown in FIG. 587(c), in the first hit type counter C2, the jackpot type when the random number is one of "0 to 99" is "jackpot E". "Jack E" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 10 as a jackpot game, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a time-saving state. Although the number of rounds is smaller than that of the above-mentioned "jackpot A", the game state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state advantageous to the player, so the "jackpot E" is a jackpot type advantageous to the player. That is, when a big win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the "jackpot E" advantageous for the player is always selected as the big win type.

In the eighteenth control example, the number of types of jackpots is five, but the number of types is not limited to five, and may be four or less, or may be six or more. Moreover, even if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, different jackpot types may be selected. By configuring in this way, for example, when a big win is made with the second special symbol, by setting a big win type in which a larger number of rounds are executed, the winning with the second special symbol can be made more appealing to the player. can be expected. Therefore, the win in the high probability game state can be made more advantageous to the player, and the amusement of the game in the high probability state can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to make the player strongly desire to shift to the high probability state, and to play the game for a longer period of time.

In addition, the types of jackpot types selected in the first special pattern and the second special pattern and the selection rate (distribution rate) of each jackpot type are made the same, and the first hit type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type is set. It may be configured so that only the range is different. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the fraudulent act of acquiring the value of the first winning type counter C2 aiming at a specific counter value in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The small hit type counter C5 determines the small hit type and determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol hits. 99), it is incremented by 1 in order, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the small hit type counter C5 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in the 18th control example), and at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the first Stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the ball is the first entering ball in the state where the lottery (variation) of the special symbol can be executed (that is, the state other than during the variation of the special symbol and during the big win game and the small win game) It is stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the mouth 64 or the second ball entrance 640. - 特許庁

The value of the small hit type counter C5 in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighteenth control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. Then, when the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol is a small hit, the small hit type selection 18 table 202rf (see FIG. 588) for determining the type of the executed small hit is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. is set to

Here, the contents of the small hit type selection 18 table 202rf will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 588 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small hit type selection 18 table 202rf. As shown in FIG. 588, the small hit type selection 18 table 202rf defines that three types of small hits A, B, and C are selected by the value of the small hit type counter C5 as the small hit types of the second special symbol. It is Specifically, when the value of the obtained small hit type counter C5 is "0 to 49", the small hit type becomes "small hit A (V passage time jackpot A)", "50 to 79" The small hit type in the case of either is "small hit B (V passing time jackpot B)", and the small hit type in the case of "80 to 99" is "small hit C ( It becomes a jackpot E) when passing V.

Here, each small winning type (small winnings A, B, C) is executed after the small winning game ends when the ball passes through the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650 in the respective small winning game. The type of jackpot game is set. In the case of the small win A, the big win A (16R time-saving big win) is set, and after the execution of the small win A, the variable winning device 65 is set to the 16R open state to execute the big win, and then the time-saving state. (Period until special symbol changes 7 times, or wins 2 times for small win A, wins 5 times for small win B, or wins 3 times for small win C) is set. . In addition, in the case of the small win B, the big win B (7R time-saving big win) is set, and after the execution of the small win B, the variable winning device 65 is set to the 7R open state, and the big win is executed. A time-saving state (a period until the special symbol changes 7 times, wins the small win A twice, wins the small win B 5 times, or wins the small win C 3 times) is set. ing. In addition, in the case of the small win C, the big win E (10R time-saving big win) is set, and after the execution of the small win C, the variable winning device 65 is set to the 10R open state, and the big win is executed. A time-saving state (a period until the special symbol changes 7 times, wins the small win A twice, wins the small win B 5 times, or wins the small win C 3 times) is set. ing.

Thus, depending on the selected small winning type, the content of the big winning game to be executed after finishing the small winning game can be changed. Specifically, the small win A is set as the most advantageous small win for the player because the number of rounds executed in the big win game is large (16R), and the small win B is executed in the big win game. The number of rounds is small (7R) and is set more disadvantageously than the small hit A described above.

In addition, in the eighteenth control example, depending on each small hit type, the time saving end condition of the time saving state set after the end of the big win game via the small win game is the same, but it is not limited to this, and the small win It is good also as a structure which changes the time saving end conditions of the time saving state to be set depending on the type.

Although the detailed description will be described later, in the eighteenth control example, as the end condition of the time saving state, the time saving end condition established based on the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery (the number of times of winning a small win A, the small win B The number of times of winning, or the number of times of small win C winning, etc.) or the number of fluctuations of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) can be set. By configuring in this way, when the jackpot is won in a state where the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern is 1 or more, and the time saving state is set after the jackpot is finished, the first special pattern (special figure 1) is set after the jackpot is finished. ) is executed, the time saving state will not end. In addition, when the variation of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is executed and the small winning (small winning A, small winning B, small winning C) that can execute the big winning game is won, the special symbol Based on the number of fluctuations, the time-saving end condition is satisfied before the time-saving end condition is satisfied, and the time-saving state can be ended. It is possible to suppress repeated execution of a game in which a game ball is not allowed to pass through a specific area during a winning game until a second end condition is satisfied.

Next, the contents of the variation pattern selection 18 table 202rd will be described with reference to FIG. 589(a). FIG. 589(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection 18 table 202rd. As shown in Figure 589 (a), in the variation pattern selection 18 table 202rd, the normal variation pattern selection 18 table 202rd1 used in the state where the normal state is set as the game state and the time saving state are set A time saving variation pattern selection 18 table 202rd2 used in the state is defined. Although the details will be described later, in the 18th control example, the data table used for selecting the variation pattern is different depending on the game state, so the variation pattern (variation time) selected depending on the game state is different. can let

FIG. 589(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal variation pattern selection 18 table 202rd1 provided in the variation pattern selection 18 table 202rd. As shown in FIG. 589(b), in the normal variation pattern selection 18 table 202rd1, the pattern type, the lottery result, the value range of the variation type counter CS1, and the variation pattern are defined in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 589 (b), the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the lottery result is "out", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 139". A short deviation with a fluctuation time of 7 seconds is defined in the range of , and a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is defined in the range of "140 to 149", and fluctuations in the range of "150 to 179" Various types of normal reach with a time of 40 seconds are defined in association with each other, and super reach with a variable time of 80 seconds is defined in association with the range of "180 to 198".

In addition, the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the lottery result is "jackpot", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 29", and the variation time is 40 seconds. A super reach with a fluctuation time of 80 seconds is defined in the range of "30 to 189", and a special reach with a fluctuation time of 140 seconds is defined in the range of "190 to 198". It is

Next, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2) and the lottery result is "out", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the variation time in the entire range 180 seconds long out is stipulated, and if the lottery result is "big hit or small hit", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the entire range has a variation time of 180 seconds. A long hit is defined.

In this way, according to the lottery result of the special symbol, one of the variation patterns with variation time of 7 seconds to 180 seconds is set, and a command indicating this variation pattern is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. By doing so, the third symbol display device 81 executes a variable effect corresponding to the variable time.

As shown in FIG. 589(b), the variation pattern (variation time) selected in the normal variation pattern selection 18 table 202rd1 is 7 seconds (selected 70%), 40 seconds (selection rate of approximately 15%), 80 seconds (selection rate of approximately 10%), and 20 seconds (selection rate of approximately 5%). ing. Also, if the lottery result is a big hit, it is likely to be selected in the order of 80 seconds (selection rate of about 80%), 40 seconds (selection rate of about 15%), and 140 seconds (selection rate of about 5%). stipulated in

In this way, there is a relationship between the special symbol lottery result and the selected variation pattern (variation time), and the ratio of the variation time (variation pattern) selected when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, and the special It is configured to be able to suggest the degree of expectation for a big win when a specific variation time (variation pattern) is selected by the ratio of the variation time (variation pattern) selected when the lottery result of the pattern is a loss. ing. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to predict whether or not a big win is won based on the selected variation time (variation pattern).

In the 18th control example, the same variation pattern table is used regardless of the type of jackpot won. A different variation pattern table may be used for the case of the jackpot type indicated and the case of the jackpot type indicating other jackpots (jackpot B, jackpot C). In this case, for example, the variation pattern table used when winning a jackpot type indicating an advantageous jackpot (jackpot A) is shorter than the variation pattern table used when winning a jackpot type indicating other jackpots. It is preferable to configure so that the time variation pattern can be easily selected. As a result, the longer the variation time set in the variation pattern to be executed, the more advantageous the player can expect the game result, so that the player is interested in the variation time of the special symbol. be able to.

Further, the variation pattern table used when winning the jackpot type indicating the normal jackpot makes it easier to select a variation pattern with a longer variation time than the variation pattern table used when winning the jackpot type indicating the probability variable jackpot. In this way, when a jackpot is won in a short variation time, the player can be provided with an unexpected game result, even when a short variation time is selected. , can keep you hopeful until the end.

Next, the contents of the variation pattern selection 18 table 202rd2 for time reduction provided in the variation pattern selection 18 table 202rd will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 590 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the time reduction variation pattern selection 18 table 202rd2. As shown in FIG. 590, in the time saving variation pattern selection 18 table 202rd2, the pattern type, the number of variations, the lottery result, the value range of the variation type counter CS1, and the variation pattern are defined in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 590, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the number of fluctuations is 1 to 4 times, and the lottery result is "out", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, if the fluctuation time is defined as a short deviation of 2 seconds in the entire range, and the lottery result is "big hit", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198" A range, ie the entire range, defines a short jackpot with a variable time of 2 seconds. If the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the number of fluctuations is 5 times or more, and the lottery result is "out", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is within the range of "0 to 198", that is, the entire range If the deviation of the variation time of 10 seconds is stipulated, and the lottery result is a "big hit", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the variation time is 10 seconds in the entire range. is stipulated. Also, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2), the number of fluctuations is 1 or more, and the lottery result is "out", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, If the deviation of the fluctuation time of 10 seconds is defined in the entire range and the lottery result is "small win", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 160" There is a short and small win with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds. In the range of "161 to 198", long and small wins with a variation time of 30 seconds are specified, and when the lottery result is a "big win", a long and big win with a variation time of 30 seconds is specified.

Returning to FIG. 584, the description continues. The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In the eighteenth control example, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 314), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start opening (through gate) 67. It is acquired when it is held and stored in the second symbol reserved ball execution area of the RAM 203 .

Then, the value of the random number that becomes the winning of the normal symbol is set by the second winning random number table 202rc stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is the second winning random number 18. If it matches the value of the random number set by the table 202rc, it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) wins. In the 18th control example, the probability of winning the normal symbol is always constant regardless of the game state of the pachinko machine 10, but other configurations may be used.

For example, as the second random number 18 table 202rc, for normal design low probability (period in which normal design is normal state), and for high probability of normal design hit than low probability time (normal design It is possible to provide two types, one for the time period in which the time is shortened. In this case, the number of winning random numbers contained in each is set to be different. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be winning different, the probability of winning can be changed between when the probability of normal symbols is low and when the probability of normal symbols is high.

When the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and it is determined whether the current game state is the time saving state, and if the game state is the time saving state, the second pattern is displayed. In the device 83, the variable display of normal symbols is executed for 3 seconds. On the other hand, if the game state is not the time-saving state, the second symbol display device 83 performs the variable display of normal symbols for 30 seconds.

If the value of the obtained second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be winning, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, it is used as a stop symbol (second symbol). A symbol of "○" is illuminated. Then, it is determined whether the game state at the time when the second symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) is the time saving state, and the time when the second symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) is the time saving state, and When the second pattern variation start time is also in the time saving state, the electric accessory 640a is controlled to operate (long opening control) so that the second ball entrance 640 is opened "2 seconds x 2 times". On the other hand, in other cases, the operation control (short opening control) of the electric accessory 640a is performed so that the second ball entrance 640 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". The opening time and number of openings of the second entrance 640 may be set arbitrarily.

In this way, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols and the operation contents of the electric accessory 640a at the time of winning (opening period of the second ball entrance 640, number of times of opening) are variable according to the set game state. When the game state at the time of starting the fluctuation of the normal symbols is the time saving state, the time of the fluctuation display is very short from ``30 seconds to 3 seconds'' compared to the case of the normal state, and further, If the lottery result of the second symbol that started to fluctuate during the period in which the time saving state is set is a hit and the time saving state is set at the time when the electric accessory 640a starts to operate, otherwise , the opening period of the second ball entrance 640 becomes very long as "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 2 seconds x 2 times", so the ball easily enters the second ball entrance 640. state. A table (not shown) storing random numbers for judging whether or not it is a normal symbol win from the value (random number) of the second winning random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202 .

In addition, in the eighteenth control example, the game state at the start of variation of the normal symbol (second symbol) and the game state at the operation start timing of the electric accessory 640a executed based on the winning of the normal symbol. , the variation time of the second symbol, and the operation contents of the electric accessory 640a are set differently, but other configurations may be used, for example, the normal symbol (second symbol) A determination means for determining that the time saving state is continuously set is provided from the variation start timing to the operation start timing of the electric accessory 640a, and the variation time of the second pattern is used by using the determination result of the determination means. , and operation contents of the electric accessory 640a may be set.

As described above, in the eighteenth control example, in order to execute the operation (long opening) that is advantageous to the player as the operation of the electric accessory 640a, the normal symbol fluctuation start time and the operation start time of the electric accessory 640a It is necessary that the time saving state is set at any timing. By configuring in this way, for example, when the second pattern, which starts to change at the timing when the normal state is set, is stopped and displayed with identification information indicating the hit at the timing when the time saving state is set, or Based on the lottery of one second pattern, such as when the second pattern that starts to change at the timing when the time saving state is set is stopped with identification information indicating the win at the timing when the normal state is set. In the case where the variation of the second symbol and the action of the electric role product 640a executed by stepping across a plurality of game states, the operation control (long opening) of the electric role product 640a that is advantageous to the player is executed. can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessively advantageous state.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see Fig. 314). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of main processing 7 (see FIG. 325).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main controller 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 585(a), the contents of the main controller 110ROM202 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighteenth control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 585 (a), the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 contains, as part of the fixed value data, a first winning random number 18 table 202ra, a jackpot type selection 18 table 202rb, a second winning random number 18 table 202rc, And fluctuation pattern selection 18 table 202rd, time saving giving 18 table 202re, small hit type selection 18 table 202rf, open scenario 7 table 202fg, time saving random number 18 table 202rh, time saving type selection 18 table 202ri are stored at least.

In addition, among the fixed value data stored in the ROM 202, the first per random number 18 table 202ra, the big per type selection 18 table 202rb, the second per random number 18 table 202rc, the variation pattern selection 18 table 202rd, the small per type selection 18 table 202rf has already been explained in detail, so the explanation will be omitted.

The time saving provision 18 table 202re is a data table referred to when setting a plurality of time saving end conditions for ending the time saving state differently for each jackpot type of the winning jackpot, and the jackpot game ends (the jackpot game When the ending period ends) (S1612 of FIG. 326: Yes), it is referred to, and a different time saving number of times (time saving end condition) is set according to the jackpot type.

Here, with reference to FIG.587(d), the content prescribed|regulated to the time reduction provision 18 table 202re is demonstrated. Drawing 587 (d) is a mimetic diagram showing typically the contents prescribed in time saving provision 18 table 202re. In the 18th control example, the jackpot type (jackets A, B, D, E) in which the time saving state is set after the jackpot ends, and the jackpot type (jackpot C) in which the time saving state is not set after the jackpot ends (the normal state is set) , and as shown in FIG. 587(d), a plurality of time-saving end conditions are defined corresponding to each jackpot type.

In the 18th control example, the first time-saving end condition that is established according to the number of fluctuations of special symbols, the second time-saving end condition that is established according to the number of times a small hit A is won in the special symbol lottery, and the special symbol lottery. and a fourth time-shortening end condition established according to the number of times a small win C is won in a lottery of special symbols.

Specifically, when the jackpot types are jackpots A, B, and E, as time saving end conditions, the time saving middle counter 203h (first time saving end condition) is "7", the small hit A counter 203fg is "2", It is defined to set the value of "5" to the small hit B counter 203fh and "3" to the small hit C counter 203ra. condition), "4" to the small hit A counter 203fg, "10" to the small hit B counter 203fh, and "7" to the small hit C counter 203ra.

In addition, as described above, in the eighteenth control example, if the jackpot type is the jackpot C, the time saving state is not set after the jackpot game ends. The value to be set is not specified. In this way, by differentiating the termination conditions of the time saving state set after the jackpot game ends for each jackpot type that has been won, even if it is notified in advance that the time saving state will be set after the jackpot game ends, the specific Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the content of the time saving, the game can be played until the end (until the time saving state ends) in a state of heightened play motivation.

In addition, in the eighteenth control example, in addition to the time saving end state set using the time saving giving 18 table 202re, the time saving state is also ended when a special symbol jackpot is won, but this jackpot winning Since the time saving end condition established based on does not differ depending on the set jackpot type, it is omitted from the time saving 18 table 202re, but the above-mentioned time saving end condition (based on the special drawing jackpot winning It may be configured to define a value in the time saving provision 18 table 202re also for the time saving end condition that is satisfied.

Furthermore, in the eighteenth control example, it is configured to set the time saving state (second time saving) even when the time saving is won in the special symbol lottery, but regarding the time saving end condition set for the second time saving will be described with reference to a time saving type selection 18 table 202ri, which will be described later. In addition, in the eighteenth control example, the time saving end condition for the time saving state (second time saving) set based on the time saving winning is not the time saving grant 18 table 202re, but the time saving type selection 18 table 202ri. Although it comprises so that it may set, you may comprise so that the time saving end conditions corresponding to 2nd time saving may be prescribed|regulated to the time saving provision 18 table 202re, without restricting to this.

Further, in the eighteenth control example, as a plurality of time saving end conditions, a configuration having the above-described first time saving end condition to fourth time saving end condition is used, but other conditions may be set as time saving end conditions. , For example, when the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol is a predetermined number of times (eg, 50 times), the time saving end condition is established, and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is a predetermined number of times (eg, 80 times). The time-saving end condition to be established, the number of times the V winning device has been activated by winning a small hit (the number of times that the value of the small win A counter 203fg, the value of the small win B counter 203fh, and the value of the small win C counter 203ra are added) is a predetermined number of times ( For example, you may set the time-saving end conditions satisfied when it becomes 10 times.

In addition, it is possible to set a time saving end condition that is established by another factor, not based on the number of fluctuations of special symbols or the lottery result. number of times of operation) reaches a predetermined number of times, or when the number of balls entering a specific ball entrance (for example, the general winning opening 63) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50) You may comprise so that the time saving end conditions etc. which are materialized in may be preset.

As described above, a plurality of time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, are set, and the time-saving state is ended when any of the time-saving end conditions is set. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp in advance how long the time saving state will continue, so that monotonous games can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the eighteenth control example, control is used to end the time saving state when any one of the time saving end conditions is satisfied, but in addition to this, for example, a plurality of time saving end conditions are predetermined You may comprise so that time saving end conditions may be materialized, when number (for example, two) is materialized. In this case, the establishment number determination means for determining the number of time-saving end conditions that are satisfied, and the condition attainment determination means for determining whether the number of establishment determined by the establishment number determination means has reached a predetermined number (for example, two), is provided, and the time saving state is terminated (normal state is set) when it is determined that the condition attainment determination means has reached a predetermined number (for example, two).

Further, a content discriminating means is provided for discriminating the content of the time-saving end condition that is established first, and a predetermined number (for example, two) serving as a discriminating reference for the condition attainment discriminating means is varied based on the discriminating result of the content discriminating means. A discrimination reference number variable means may be provided. As a result, it is possible to set a time-saving state that is easy to end or a time-saving state that is difficult to end according to the type of the time-saving end condition that is established first, so that even after the time-saving state is set, the player is motivated. You can play games.

In addition to the above-mentioned contents, a predetermined period of time after the time saving state is set (for example, until the number of fluctuations in the special symbol reaches 10 times) is measured, and the measurement result of the predetermined period of time measurement means is measured. A result determination means for determining is provided, and when the result determination means determines that the current time is within the predetermined period, even if the above-mentioned time saving end condition is satisfied, the time saving state is terminated until the predetermined period elapses. A time-saving end delaying means for delaying may be provided, or an end condition invalidating means may be provided for invalidating the time-saving end condition established when the result determining means determines that the current time is within a predetermined period. In addition, while the result determination means determines that the current time is within a predetermined period, it determines whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied, and updates (subtracts) the values of various counters set according to each time saving end condition ) may not be executed.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to surely prevent the end of the time saving state immediately after the time saving state is set, and to set the end timing of the time saving state in a complicated manner. In addition, in the case of using the process of ending the time saving state based on the fact that a plurality of time saving end conditions are satisfied as described above, a plurality of time saving end conditions are prioritized time saving end conditions (for example, the number of fluctuations in the special symbol is Time-saving end conditions that are established when reaching 100 times) and non-priority time-saving end conditions (for example, time-saving end conditions that are established when the number of small hits reaches 3 times) are set, and priority time-saving end It is preferable that the time saving state is terminated immediately when the conditions are satisfied, and the time saving state is terminated only when a plurality of non-prioritized time saving end conditions are satisfied. By providing the preferential time-saving end condition in this way, it is possible to suppress excessively providing the time-saving state to the player.

Since the opening scenario 7 table 202fg is the same as the opening scenario 7 table 202fg of the seventh control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the time saving random number 18 table 202rh, in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the value (determination value) of the first winning random number counter C1 determined as the time saving winning is defined corresponding to the game state. Data table. Here, with reference to Drawing 591 (a), the contents of random number 18 table 202rh per time saving are explained. FIG. 591(a) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the random number 18 table 202rh per time saving.

Specifically, regardless of the special symbol type, when the game state is normal (low probability state of special symbols and normal symbols), the value of the first per random number counter C1 is "3, 4, 140 to 287 , and is configured not to provide a judgment value for time-saving election for other game states.

Here, in this 18th control example, in one special symbol lottery, determination of big hit winning and determination of time saving winning can be executed in duplicate. In addition, the determination of the small hit winning and the determination of the short time winning are configured to be executed in duplicate. Therefore, for example, when the value of the obtained first winning random number counter C1 is "3, 4", in the jackpot determination executed using the first winning random number 18 table 202ra (see FIG. 586 (a)) It is determined to be a jackpot, and it is determined to be a short-time winning in the time-saving winning determination performed using the time-saving random number 18 table 202rh (see FIG. 591 (a)). . Similarly, when the value of the obtained first per random number counter C1 is "140 to 144", in the small hit determination executed using the special symbol 2 random number 18 table 202ra2 (see FIG. 586 (c)) It is determined to be a small hit, and it is determined to be a short time winning in the short time winning determination performed using the time saving random number 18 table 202rh (see FIG. 591 (a)), so that the small win and the short time are duplicated. become.

As described above, in this 18th control example, after executing the judgment of the time saving election, it is configured to execute the big hit (small hit) judgment. hit) will be elected. Therefore, it is possible to give a privilege advantageous to the player as compared with the case of winning the jackpot (minor win) without winning the time-saving prize.

In addition, in this 18th control example, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired in one special symbol lottery is used to determine the big hit (small hit) and the time-saving winning decision. , The value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is the winning judgment value in any judgment, it is configured so that duplicate winning can be possible, but not limited to this, for example, execution of special symbol lottery When the right is acquired, the value of the random number counter for judging the jackpot (small hit) and the value of the random number counter for short-time winning are separately obtained, and the obtained values are used to judge the jackpot (small hit). And, it may be configured to execute time-saving winning determination.

The time saving type selection 18 table 202ri is a data table referred to when setting the time saving end condition for the time saving state (second time saving) set when the time saving is won in the special symbol lottery, and is a time saving type selection counter CC1. The time-saving type is defined in correspondence with the value of

Here, with reference to Drawing 591 (b), the contents of time saving classification selection 18 table 202ri are explained. FIG. 591(b) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the time saving type selection 18 table 202ri. As shown in FIG. 591 (b), in the time saving type selection 18 table 202ri, the time saving type is defined in correspondence with the value of the obtained time saving type selection counter CC1, and the time saving corresponding to the defined time saving type Termination conditions are specified.

Specifically, the time saving type A is defined as the time saving type for the entire range (“0 to 99”) of the time saving type selection counter CC1 that has been obtained. And, as a time saving end condition corresponding to the time saving A, a time saving end condition in which "1" is set to the time saving counter 203h (first time saving end condition) is defined. That is, the time saving end condition is set such that the time saving state ends when the process of updating the value of the time saving counter 203h is executed once. Therefore, if you win the time saving in the special symbol lottery, the time saving state is set at the time of winning the time saving, and then the big hit determination in the special symbol lottery is executed, and the special symbol variation to show the result of the special symbol lottery. A time saving state will be set until it starts.

In other words, when the special symbol lottery wins the time-saving lottery, the time-saving state can be set only for executing the jackpot determination in the special symbol lottery during the time-saving state (executing the special lottery). Therefore, when the special symbol lottery wins the time saving, it is possible to execute only the big hit determination during the time saving state without the player noticing that the time saving win is made. Potential benefits (jackpot game content, time saving state after the jackpot game ends) can be given.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 591 (b), in this 18th control example, when the time saving is won in the special symbol lottery, the time saving A is always set as the time saving type, but it is not limited to this. For example, according to the value of the acquired time saving type selection counter CC1, a time saving type different from the working time saving A may be configured to be selectable. In this case, for example, the value of the acquired time-saving type selection counter CC1 defines time-saving A as a time-saving type for the range of "0 to 94", and time-saving A as a time-saving type for the range of "95 to 99" is configured to define a different time saving Z, and as a time saving end condition corresponding to the time saving Z, a time saving end condition in which "100" is set to the time saving counter 203h (first time saving end condition) is preferably defined.

By constructing in this way, in a part of the case where the special symbol lottery wins the time saving, the time saving state for continuously executing the second special symbol lottery is set instead of the time saving state for executing the special lottery. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a more unexpected game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 585(b), the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighteenth control example will be described. FIG. 585(b) is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 585(b), the RAM 203 in the eighteenth control example differs from the above-described seventh control example in that a small hit C counter 203ra is added, and the rest is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The small hit C counter 203ra is a counter for measuring the number of winnings of the small win set with the small win C as the small win type until one of the time saving end conditions set during the time saving state is satisfied, In jackpot control processing 7 (S11504 in FIG. 326), when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (end timing of jackpot) (S11612 in FIG. 326: Yes), It is defined in the time reduction grant 18 table 202re A value (1) is set (S11614 in FIG. 326).

And, the small hit that is executed instead of the small hit time saving update process 7 (S10405 in FIG. 321) executed in the small hit start setting process (S10223 in FIG. When it is determined that the small hit type of the small hit won this time is not the small hit B (S40510 of FIG. 597: No), the value of the counter is subtracted by 1. . If it is determined that the value of the small hit C counter 203ra after subtraction is 0 (S40514 in FIG. 597: Yes), the time saving end condition is satisfied, so the normal state is set as the game state (S40507 in FIG. 597) . In addition, the eighteenth control example sets a plurality of time saving end conditions for ending the time saving state, and even if any of the time saving end conditions are satisfied (for example, time saving end based on the number of special symbol fluctuations Even if the condition is met), the value of the counter is set (reset) to 0 (S40606 in FIG. 596). Thus, among the plurality of time-saving end conditions, even if the time-saving end conditions other than the time-saving end conditions (fourth time-saving end conditions) referring to the value of the small hit C counter 203ra are met, the small hit C counter Since the value of 203fra is set to 0 (reset), it is possible to suppress the situation where the process of subtracting the value of the small hit C counter 203ra is continued even though the time saving state has ended. In addition, even if any of the time-saving end conditions are satisfied, the values of various counters used to determine whether the time-saving end condition is satisfied when ending the time-saving state are set to the initial value (0). Since it is configured as described above, it is possible to prevent the process from becoming complicated after the time saving state is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 592(a), the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighteenth control example will be described. FIG. 592(a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the eighteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 592(a), the ROM 222 of the eighteenth control example is different from the ROM 222 of the seventh control example (see FIG. The difference is that an effect setting table 222rb is added. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 593(a), the contents defined in the effect mode selection 18 table 222ra will be described. FIG. 593(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the effect mode selection 18 table 222ra. As shown in FIG. 593(a), the production mode selection 18 table 222ra includes a normal production mode setting table 222ra1, a time saving production mode setting A table 222ra2, and a time saving production mode setting B table 222ra3. It is

The normal effect mode setting 222ra1 (not shown) is a table referred to when the variable display of special symbols is executed in the normal state (low probability state of normal symbols). The effect mode is set based on the variation pattern type set in the main controller 110 and the value of the effect counter CS1.

FIG. 593(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the time saving effect mode setting A table 222ra2. The time saving effect mode setting A table 222ra2 is a table referred to when the variable display of special symbols is executed in the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols). The effect mode is set based on the variation pattern type set in the main controller 110 and the value of the effect counter CS1.

Fig. 593(c) is a diagram showing the contents of the time saving effect mode setting B table 222ra3. The time saving effect mode setting B table 222ra3 is a table that is referred to when the variable display of special symbols is executed in the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols). The effect mode is set based on the variation pattern type set in the main controller 110 and the value of the effect counter CS1.

Although the details will be described later, in this 18th control example, in the time saving state, the activation of the above-mentioned V icon (reservation (V reservation) for winning a small hit) is displayed in an enlarged manner. Informing the player that a small hit is won in the variable display of the special symbol being executed) is executed, refer to the time saving production mode setting B table 222ra3, otherwise, for time saving The rendering mode setting A table 222ra2 is referred to.

For example, in the time saving state, when "long and small hit" is set as the variation pattern type, the probability that "win" is selected in the time saving production mode setting A table 222ra3 is 150/199 (about 75%), " The probability that "Resurrection Victory" is selected is 40/199 (approximately 20%), and the probability that "Premium effect" is selected is 9/199 (approximately 5%). On the other hand, in the time-saving production mode setting B table 222ra3, the probability that "win" is selected is 190/199 (about 95%), and the probability that "revival victory" is selected is 9/199 (about 5%). , the premium effect is not selected.

By configuring in this way, it becomes easier for the player to predict whether or not the V icon will be activated depending on the effect mode, and it is possible to make the player interested in the effect mode.

In addition, in the eighteenth control example, the ratio of the effect mode selected is different between when the V icon is activated and when the V icon is not activated, but this is not the case. Instead, an effect mode may be provided that can be selected only when the V icon is activated.

Next, referring to FIG. 594, the V-icon acquisition effect setting table 222rb will be described. In the V icon acquisition effect setting table 222rb, when a big win game is started, there is a reserve (V reserve) for winning a small win among the reserved and stored special figure 2 reserves (winning information of the second special symbol). This is a table referred to for determining whether or not to execute the V-icon acquisition effect during the ending period of the jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 594, it is determined whether or not to execute the V icon acquisition effect based on the position of the V reservation, the number of reservations, and the value of the effect counter CS1. The position of the V reservation is determined by which area of the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a the V reservation is stored. For example, the special figure 2 reservation stored in the fourth area is V reservation , then the Pending 4 column is referenced.

In the 18th control example, the V icon acquisition effect is most likely to be executed when the V hold is stored in the fourth area, followed by the third area, the second area, and the first area in this order. are doing.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to give the player a period to acquire a new special figure 2 hold until the V hold is digested, so when the V icon is activated, the V that has acquired the V icon At the time of execution of the icon acquisition performance, it becomes easy to leave a large number of reserved special figures 2 that have not been prefetched, so that it is difficult for the player to predict the lottery result of the reserved special figures 2 after the V icon is activated.

Also, when the V hold is stored in the first area, the ease with which the V icon acquisition effect is executed varies depending on the number of holds, and the number of holds of 1 is higher than the number of holds of 4. Also, the V icon acquisition effect is configured to be easily executed.

With this configuration, when the V icon acquired by the V icon acquisition effect is activated during the variable display of the special symbols after the end of the jackpot game, the special symbols remaining at the time when the V icon is activated. Of the 2 reserves, it is easy to leave a lot of special 2 reserves that have not been prefetched at the time of execution of the V icon acquisition effect that acquired the V icon, so the lottery result of the special 2 reserves after the V icon is activated It can be made difficult for the player to predict.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the V icon acquisition effect is most likely to be executed when the V hold is stored in the first area, followed by the second area, the third area, and the fourth area in this order. You can Further, when the V hold is stored in the first area, the V icon acquisition effect may be less likely to be executed when the number of holds is 1 than when the number of holds is 4.

Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 592(b). As shown in FIG. 592(b), the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the eighteenth control example stores a special symbol 2 pending ball number counter 223ra and a V icon acquisition effect for the above-described seventh control example. The difference is that an execution flag 223rb and a V icon display flag 223rc are added. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The V-icon acquisition effect execution flag 223rb is set to ON in the V-icon acquisition effect setting process (see FIG. 602), and is set to OFF in the ending process (see FIG. 603), details of which will be described later.

The V-icon display flag 223rc is set to ON when the V-icon acquisition effect is executed in the ending process (see FIG. 603), and during the period set to ON, the V-icon is reduced even after the jackpot game ends. It is displayed and is set to off when the V icon is activated in the time saving effect mode setting process (see FIG. 606).

Next, with reference to FIG. 595, the game flow of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighteenth control example will be described. FIG. 595 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game flow of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 595, the pachinko machine 10 in the eighteenth control example can retain and store the second special symbol winning prize information in the second special symbol retained ball storage area 203b in contrast to the seventh control example described above. Since it is a possible configuration, when the time saving end condition is satisfied with the special figure 2 reservation (winning information of the second special symbol) in the time saving state (high probability state of the normal pattern), the normal game state ( In the low probability state of the normal pattern), it is possible to win a big hit or a small win with the special figure 2 reserved. Therefore, in such a case, it is different from the seventh control example in that the time saving state is set after the end of the big winning game and that the small winning C is added, and the rest of the game flow is the same. Therefore, detailed description thereof is omitted.

<Control processing executed by main controller 110 in eighteenth control example>
Next, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 596 to 606. FIG. It should be noted that detailed description of the same contents as those of the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the above-described seventh control example will be omitted. Further, for convenience of explanation, different reference numerals are given to some of the control processes having the same contents as those executed by the MPU 221 of the main controller 113 in the seventh control example described above. Although some parts are attached, the detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

First, update process 18 (S48253) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 596 is a flow chart showing this update process 18 (S48253). This update process 18 (S48253) is a process that is executed instead of the update process 7 (S8253) that is executed in the special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (S10210 in FIG. 318) of the seventh control example described above. It is different from the process 7 (S8253 in FIG. 319) in that a configuration related to the small winning C is added, and other processes are the same.

Specifically, after executing the processing of S40605 of FIG. 596 (corresponding to the processing of S10605 of FIG. 319 in the seventh control example), the small winning A counter, the small hitting B counter, and the small hitting C counter are set to 0. (S40606) The configuration is added.

Next, with reference to FIG. 597, the small winning time saving update process 18 (S40405) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 597 is a flow chart showing this small winning time saving update process 18 (S40405). This small winning time saving update process 18 (S40405) is executed instead of the small winning time saving update process 7 (S10405) executed in the small hitting start setting process (S10223 in FIG. 320) of the seventh control example described above. It is a process, and is different in that a process related to a small hit C is added to the small hit time saving update process 7 (S10405 in FIG. 321), and the other processes are the same.

Specifically, after executing the process of S40505 (equivalent to the process of S10505 in FIG. 321 in the seventh control example), the small hit A counter, the small hit B counter, and the small hit C counter are set to 0 (S40506). Adding configuration.

Also, in the process of S40510 (equivalent to the process of S10510 in FIG. 321 in the seventh control example), when it is determined that it is not a small hit B (S40510: No), the value of the small hit C counter 203ra is subtracted by 1 (S40513), it is determined whether the small hit C counter 203ra is 0 (S40514). In the process of S40514, if it is determined that the value of the small hit C counter 203ra is 0 (S40514: Yes), the process proceeds to S40505, in the process of S40514, the value of the small hit counter 203ra is not 0 If it is determined that there is no (S40514: No), a configuration is added to shift to the processing of S40508.

Next, with reference to FIG. 598, the contents of the starting winning process 18 (S40105) will be described. FIG. 598 is a flow chart showing the contents of the starting winning process 18 (S40105). In this starting winning process 18 (S40105), in contrast to the above-described starting winning process 5 (see S195 in FIG. 258), when the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (S40712), and the point of executing the look-ahead process 18 (S40713) instead of the look-ahead process 5 (S653). Since the processing contents are the same, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 599, the contents of the prefetching process 18 (S40713) will be described. FIG. 599 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of prefetch processing 18 (S40713). When this look-ahead process 18 (S40713) is executed, first, various counter values from the storage area newly stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, Each value of the random number counter C1 per 1, the first per type counter C2, the variation type counter CS1, and the small per type counter C5 is read (S40801). Then, the read data is stored in the area with the lowest winning order among the free storage areas in the prefetching reserve storage area (S40802).

Next, based on each counter value newly stored in the prefetching reservation storage area, the result of determination is determined. In addition, here, both the right/wrong determination when the special symbol is in a low probability state and the right/wrong determination when the special symbol is in a high probability state are discriminated. This is the timing when a new reserved memory is generated (the timing when a new reserved (winning information) is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b) Since there is a time lag between the timing at which the jackpot judgment is executed based on the withheld winning information, the game state ( This is because it is difficult to predict the special symbol probability state).

Next, it is determined whether or not the winning determination result is a jackpot (S40803). When it is determined that the determination result is a jackpot (S40803: Yes), based on the read various counter values, a winning command including information that can specify the jackpot type and variation pattern is set (S40804), After that, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the determination result in the processing of S40803 is not a big hit (S40803: No), then it is determined whether the small hit is elected (S40805), and if it is determined that the small hit is not elected (S40805: No), based on the read various counter values, set a prize winning command including information that can identify the lost win and the variation pattern (S40807), and then terminate this process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the small hit is won in the process of S40805 (S40805: Yes), based on the read various counter values, the small hit type and the variation pattern, set a winning command containing information that can be specified (S40806), this processing ends.

Here, the winning commands set in the processing of S40804, S40806, or S40807 include the above-described information for indicating the success/failure determination result (information that has a different meaning based on the success/failure determination result), as common information: Information for indicating the values of various counter values read by the processing of S40801 is also included and set. Then, the winning command set in this process is output to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S11501) executed in the main process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 325).

On the voice lamp control device 113 side, when the winning command is received, the display mode of the pending ball is varied based on various information included in the winning command (for example, the color of the pending ball is changed to a color different from usual). It is possible to perform a performance (read-ahead performance) of displaying a notice pattern or the like before the start of variation and suggesting the result of winning judgment (whether a big win, a small win, or not) to a player.

In addition, in this control example, since there is only one probability state of the special design (low probability state of the special design), information to be set in the winning command (results of winning or not determination) can be set regardless of the game state. , For example, in a gaming machine having a plurality of probability states of special symbols (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of special symbols), the determination result in the case of the high probability state of special symbols and the low probability of special symbols It may be configured to determine the success or failure determination result in the case of the state and set the winning command based on the result of each determination, or even if the special symbol is in a high probability state or a low probability state A judgment value (value of the first winning random number counter C1) for judging a big win may be defined, and a winning command indicating a special symbol big win may be set only when the judgment value is read.

By configuring in this way, to the audio lamp control device 113 side, only when it is determined in advance that it is a specific jackpot or short-time winning Because it will output a winning command indicating jackpot or short-time winning, look ahead Expectation of winning a big win can be given to the special symbol variation in which the performance is not executed.

Furthermore, the game state when the special symbol lottery is performed based on the retention memory (winning information) stored (memorized) in the first special symbol retention ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol retention ball storage area 203b , and the winning/losing determination may be executed based on the game state. In this case, instead of changing the selection of the variation pattern depending on the number of retained balls, it is possible to determine by selecting a constant variation pattern regardless of the number of retained balls at the start of variation. When the look-ahead is executed, the game state at the time of start of variation can be determined by determining the variation order until the variation of the retained ball starts based on the information retained and stored.

Further, in the eighteenth control example, when new reserved storage (winning information) is stored (stored) in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the winning information , and uses a configuration that predicts the success or failure determination in advance in the prefetching process, but is not limited to this, in the prefetching process of the main controller 110, the first special symbol reserved ball storage Information indicating the content (each counter value) of the winning information (holding memory) newly stored (stored) in the area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b is set as a winning command, and the voice lamp control device 113 side It is also possible to predict the win/loss determination result based on the information included in the winning command received in .

With this configuration, the processing load on main controller 110 can be reduced. In addition, on the audio lamp control device 113 side, a process for determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect is executed, and when it is determined to execute the look-ahead effect, the information included in the winning command received from the main control device 110 It is preferable to configure it so as to perform analysis (prediction of acceptance/rejection determination result). As a result, when the look-ahead performance is not performed, the specific look-ahead processing (prediction of the success/failure determination result) is not performed, so that the Pachinko machine 10 can be prevented from performing useless control. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from illegally obtaining the result of the prefetching process executed without a title.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 600 to 606, the contents of the control processing executed by the audio ramp control device 113 in the eighteenth control example will be described. In the eighteenth control example, in contrast to the seventh control example described above, command determination processing 18 (see FIG. 600), jackpot-related processing 18 (see FIG. 601), and variable display setting processing 18 (see FIG. 604). , and are otherwise the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

Referring to FIG. 600, command determination processing 18 (S44112) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 600 is a flow chart showing this command determination process 18 (S44112). This command determination process 18 (S44112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 174) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. This is a process for

In the command determination process, first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and a variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not (S44301). In the process of S44301, if it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S44301: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S44302), and the variation pattern type is determined from the received variation pattern command is extracted (S44303), and the process ends. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variation display setting process 18 (see FIG. 604) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, in the processing of S44301, if it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S44301: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S44304). Then, when the stop type command is received (S44304: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S44305), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S44306), and this End the process. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the later-described variable display setting process 18 (see FIG. 604) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

On the other hand, in the processing of S44304, if it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S44304: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S44307). . Then, when it is determined that the pending ball number command has been received (S44307: Yes), the value included in the received pending ball number command, that is, the first special symbol pending ball number counter 203b of the main controller 110 The value of (the number of times of holding the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol N1), or the value of the second special design holding ball number counter 203ra (the number of times of holding the variable display based on the second special symbol N2) is extracted, and this is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223e of the voice lamp control device 113 (S44308). In addition, in the processing of S44308, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223ra is set. After the process of S44308 ends, this process ends.

Here, the number-of-holding-balls command is when the game ball wins the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), or when the special symbol lottery is performed, the main controller 110 Since it is transmitted from, every time the starting winning prize is detected, or every time the special symbol lottery is performed, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 and the special symbol 2 The value of the reserved ball number counter 223ra can be matched with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 and the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e. Therefore, due to the influence of noise, etc., the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223ra of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed to the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110, And even if it deviates from the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 and the special symbol 2 reserved ball are detected when the start winning is detected or when the special symbol lottery is selected. The value of the number counter 223ra can be corrected to match the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. In addition, when the processing of S44308 is executed, the value of the updated special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223ra are notified to the display control device 114. Display reserved ball number command is set. As a result, in the display control device 114 , the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

On the other hand, in the process of S44307, if it is determined that the pending ball number command has not been received (S44307: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received (S44311). In the processing of S44311, if it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S44311: Yes), the information notified by the received winning information command (the type of entrance where the new start winning was detected, and the lottery result information) is stored in the corresponding storage area of the winning information storage area 223a (S44312), and this process ends.

In the processing of S44311, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S44311: No), then whether a command related to the jackpot (any of the jackpot start command, round number command, and ending command) has been received It is determined whether or not (S44313). Then, when it is determined that a command related to the jackpot has been received (S44313: Yes), the jackpot-related processing 18 for executing control corresponding to the type of the command related to the jackpot is executed (S44314), End this process. The details of this jackpot related process 18 (S44314) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S44313, when it is determined that the command related to the big win is not received (S44313: No), the process according to other commands is executed (S44315), and this process ends. In the process of S44315, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, the process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is processed. to the display control device 114 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 601, the jackpot related process 18 (S44314) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 601 is a flow chart showing this jackpot related process 18 (S44314).

In the jackpot related process 18, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start command is received (S42101), and if the jackpot start command is received (S42101: Yes), an opening command for display for starting the opening effect is set (S42106). The display opening command set in the process of S42106 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed in the command output process (S4112) of the main process (see FIG. 174) executed by the MPU 221. , is transmitted to the display controller 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the third symbol display device 81 starts an opening effect for notifying the start of the big win.

After the processing of S42106, it is determined whether or not the V icon display flag 223rc is on (S42107). If it is determined that the V-icon display flag 223rc is on (S42107: Yes), the processing of S42108 is skipped and this processing ends.

Although the details will be described later, in this 18th control example, when the variable display of special symbols based on V suspension (reservation to win a small hit) is started, V suspension is in the remaining special figure 2 suspension If it exists, it is configured to be able to notify the winning of a small prize without activating the acquired V icon. Therefore, when the V-icon display flag 223rc is ON at the start of the jackpot game, the V-icon is acquired in the previously executed jackpot game, and the V-icon is not activated and the small win is won. Since the player already recognizes that the V-icon is not activated, the player will have consecutive chances (continuous small winnings), so if the V-icon display flag 223rc is on, the V-icon is acquired The effect (see FIG. 582(a)) is not executed.

In the 18th control example, if the V icon is already displayed at the start of the jackpot game, the V icon acquisition effect is not executed during the jackpot game, but the present invention is not limited to this. , even when the V icon is already displayed at the start of the jackpot game, the V icon acquisition effect (see FIG. 582(a)) may be executed. For example, when the V icon is already displayed at the start of the jackpot game, and there are a plurality of V reservations in the remaining special figure 2 reservation (winning information of the second special symbol), a new A configuration may be adopted in which a V icon acquisition effect is executed and a V icon is added.

In the processing of S42107, when it is determined that the V icon display flag 223rc is not ON (S42107: No), V icon acquisition effect setting processing is executed (S42108). Details of the V-icon acquisition effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of S42101, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S42101: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S42102). If it is determined that the round number command has been received (S42102: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command, and a display round number command is set according to the extracted round number (S42104). ). The display round number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output processing (S4102) of the main processing (see FIG. 174) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect. After the processing of S42104, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S42102 that the round number command has not been received (S42102: No), then it is determined whether or not an ending command has been received from main controller 110 (S42103). Then, when it is determined that the ending command has been received (S42103: Yes), ending processing for setting the effect mode of the ending effect is executed (S42105), and this processing ends. Details of the ending process (S42105) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of S42103, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S42103: No), this processing ends. By executing this jackpot-related processing 18 (see FIG. 601), appropriate control can be executed according to various commands related to jackpots.

In the eighteenth control example, the V icon acquisition effect setting process (S42108) is executed when the jackpot game start command is received. It may be configured to be executed immediately, or may be configured to be executed when an ending command is received. By configuring in this way, the lottery result of the special figure 2 reservation acquired during execution of the jackpot game can also be read ahead.

Next, with reference to FIG. 602, the V-icon acquisition effect setting process (S42108) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 602 is a flow chart showing the V icon acquisition effect setting process (S42108). This V-icon acquisition effect setting process (S42108) is a process executed in the jackpot-related process 18 (see FIG. 601), and is used for determining whether or not to execute the V-icon acquisition effect during the ending period of the jackpot game. processing.

When the V icon acquisition effect setting process is executed, first, the winning information of the second special symbol stored in the winning information storage area 223a is acquired (S42201). Here, the winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), each of which stores winning information. Based on the information stored in the prize winning information storage area 223a, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the lottery result of the reserved ball and the like before the change starts. Winning information based on the winning information command transmitted from the main controller 110 is stored in the winning information storage area 223a when the winning command processing of the sound lamp control device 113 (see S4212 in FIG. 177) is executed. They are stored in order starting with area 1. The winning information command transmitted from main controller 110 is set when prefetching process 18 of main controller 110 (S40713 in FIG. 599) is executed, main process 7 of main controller 110 (see FIG. 325). ) is sent to the audio lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S11501 in FIG. 325).

Based on the information stored in the prize winning information storage area 223a, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the lottery result of the reserved ball and the like before the change starts. Each winning information stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a is displayed one by one each time the variable display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed. It is shifted (the winning information stored in the second area is transferred to the first area) (see S4904 and S4908 in FIG. 182). As a result, when the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information command transmitted from the main control device 110 is executed, the sound lamp control device 113 side can surely grasp.

When winning information is acquired in S42201, next, it is determined whether or not the winning information (suspension 4) stored in the fourth area is small winning (S42202). If the reservation 4 is not a small hit, or if there is no reservation 4 (that is, if the winning information is not stored in the fourth area) (S42202: No), the winning stored in the third area It is determined whether or not the information (suspension 3) is winning a small hit (S42206). If the hold 3 is not a small hit, or if there is no hold 3 (that is, if the winning information is not stored in the third area) (S42206: No), the winning stored in the second area It is determined whether or not information (suspension 2) is winning a small hit (S42207). If the reservation 2 is not a small hit, or if there is no reservation 2 (that is, if the winning information is not stored in the second area) (S42207: No), the winning stored in the first area It is determined whether or not the information (suspension 1) is winning a small hit (S42208). If Hold 1 is not a small hit, or if there is no Hold 1 (that is, if winning information is not stored in the first area) (S42208: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S42202, if it is determined that the reservation 4 is a small winning (S42202: Yes), the above-described V icon acquisition effect setting table 222rb (see FIG. 594) is referred to, V It is determined whether or not to execute the icon acquisition effect. When it is determined that Hold 4 is a small hit, V Determines presence/absence of icon acquisition effect.

Also, in the process of S42206, if it is determined that the reservation 3 is a small winning (S42206: Yes), the V icon acquisition effect setting table 222rb (see FIG. 594) described above is referred to, V It is determined whether or not to execute the icon acquisition effect. When it is determined that the reservation 3 is a small winning, the V Determines presence/absence of icon acquisition effect.

Also, in the process of S42207, if it is determined that the reserve 2 is a small hit (S42207: Yes), the above-described V icon acquisition effect setting table 222rb (see FIG. 594) is referred to, V It is determined whether or not to execute the icon acquisition effect. When it is determined that Hold 3 is a small hit, V Determines presence/absence of icon acquisition effect.

Also, in the process of S42208, if it is determined that the reservation 1 is a small winning (S42208: Yes), the V icon acquisition effect setting table 222rb (see FIG. 594) described above is referred to, and the V It is determined whether or not to execute the icon acquisition effect. When it is determined that Hold 1 is a small winning, V Determines presence/absence of icon acquisition effect.

Thus, in this 18th control example, the lottery result is determined in advance (prefetched) in order from the special figure 2 reservation (winning information of the second special symbol) that is digested most later after the jackpot game is completed, and if there is a V reservation At that time, it is determined whether or not to execute the V-icon acquisition effect. For example, when V suspension exists in suspension 2 and suspension 4, it is determined whether or not to set the V icon acquisition effect when suspension 4 is determined to be a small win. In this case, when it is decided not to execute the V-icon acquisition performance, even if the suspension 2 is V-suspension, determination of whether or not to newly execute the V-icon acquisition performance is not executed.

In the eighteenth control example, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the V hold is started, it is configured to determine whether or not to activate the acquired V icon. Even when the V-icon acquisition effect is executed based on , the V-icon can be activated when the V-holding of the holding 2 is completed.

In addition, in this 18th control example, the lottery result is determined in order from the special figure 2 reservation (winning information of the second special symbol) that is digested last after the end of the jackpot game, but it is not limited to this. It is also possible to determine the lottery results in order from the special figure 2 reservation that is consumed first after the jackpot game ends. Also, if there is even one V reservation, the lottery result of the subsequent special figure 2 reservation is not determined, but it may be configured to be determined.

After the processing of S42203 is completed, the processing of S42204 is executed. In the process of S42204, it is determined whether or not the effect mode to be executed during the ending period determined in the process of S42203 is the V-icon acquisition effect. , S42205 are skipped, and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S42204, if it is determined that there is a V icon acquisition effect (S42204: Yes), the V icon acquisition effect execution flag 223rb is set to ON (S42205), and this processing ends.

Next, the ending process (S42105) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 603 is a flow chart showing the ending process (S42105). This ending process (S42105) is a process executed in the jackpot related process 18 (see FIG. 601), and is a process for executing an effect in the ending period of the jackpot game.

When the ending process (S42105) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the V icon acquisition effect execution flag 223rb is ON (S42301). When it is determined that the V-icon acquisition effect execution flag 223rb is not ON (S42301: No), a normal ending effect execution command for display is set (S42305), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S42301, if it is determined that the V-icon acquisition effect execution flag 223rb is ON (S42301: Yes), a display V-icon acquisition effect execution command is set (S42302), and the V-icon acquisition effect execution command is set (S42302). The execution flag 223rb is set to off (S42303), the V-icon display flag 223rc is set to on (S42304), and this processing ends.

In addition, in the eighteenth control example, the configuration is such that the V icon acquisition effect is executed during the ending period of the jackpot game, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be executed when a) is passed, or may be executed during a period other than the ending period of the jackpot game. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the V-icon acquisition effect is executed during the variable display of the special symbols. In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of execution timings of the V-icon acquisition effect are set, and at which timing the effect is executed can be set at random. With this configuration, the player cannot predict at what timing the V-icon acquisition effect will be executed, so it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

Next, the variable display setting process 18 (S44113) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 604 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 18 (S44113). This variable display setting process 18 (S44113) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 174). Based on the command, a display variation pattern command is generated and set.

In the variable display setting process 18, first, it is determined whether or not the variable start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S42401). Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S42401: No), it means that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S42407. Transition. On the other hand, in the processing of S42401, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S42401: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S42402), and then the command judgment processing 18 (see FIG. 600) In the processing of S44303, the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command is obtained from the RAM 223 (S42403).

Then, the effect mode selection process 18 (S42404) for setting the effect mode of the effect executed in the third symbol display device 81 is executed. The details of this presentation mode selection process 18 (S42404) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Then, based on the rendering mode set in S42404, a display variation pattern command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S42405). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S42406), and the process proceeds to S42407. In the process of S42406, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of 1st area→execution area, 2nd area→1st area, 3rd area→2nd area, 4th area→3rd area.

In the processing of S42406, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is ON (S42407). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S42407: No), it means that the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variable display is performed. The setting process 18 (see FIG. 604) is ended, and the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is ON (S42407: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is set to OFF (S42408), and then the In the process, the stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S42409). Next, based on the stop type acquired in the process of S42409, a display stop type command is set (S42410), and this process ends. By receiving this stop type command for display, the display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to stop and display the third pattern in the stop type indicated by this stop type command for display. be done.

Next, with reference to FIG. 605, the effect mode selection process 18 (S42404) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 605 is a flow chart showing effect mode selection 18 (S42404). This effect mode selection process 18 (S42404) is a process executed in the variable display setting process 18 (see FIG. 604), and is a process for setting the effect mode of the effect executed in the third symbol display device 81. be.

When the effect mode selection process 18 (S42404) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the game state is a time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) (S42501). The current game state is determined based on the information stored in the game state storage area 223f, and when the game state is determined not to be a time saving state (that is, normal state (low probability state of normal symbols)) (S42501: No), based on the variation pattern extracted in the process of S42403 of the variable display setting process 18 (see FIG. 604), the normal effect mode setting table 222ra1 (illustrated No) is referred to set the effect mode (S42503), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S42501, when it is determined that it is in the time saving state (S42501: Yes), the production mode setting process for time saving is executed (S42502), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to Drawing 606, production mode setting processing (S42502) for time saving performed by MPU221 in sound lamp control device 113 is explained. FIG. 606 is a flow chart showing the production mode setting process for time saving (S42502). This time-saving production mode setting process (S42502) is a process executed in the production mode selection process 18 (see FIG. 605), and is executed in the third symbol display device 81 when the time-saving state is set. This is a process for setting the effect mode of the effect.

When the time saving effect mode setting process (S42502) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbols to be started from now is a small hit (S42601). If it is determined that it is not a small hit (S42601: No), the variation pattern extracted in the processing of S42403 of the variation display setting processing 18 (see FIG. 604), and the value of the production counter CS1, based on time saving An effect mode is determined from the effect mode setting A table 222ra2 (S42609), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S42601, when it is determined that the win is a small win (S42601: Yes), it is determined whether or not the V icon display flag 223rc is ON (S42602). If it is determined that the V-icon display flag 223rc is not on (that is, off), the process proceeds to S42609. A state in which the V-icon display flag 223rc is off is a state in which the V-icon has not been obtained.

In the process of S42602, if it is determined that the V icon display flag 223rc is on (S42602: Yes), the winning information in the winning information storage area 223a is acquired (S42603), It is determined whether or not there is a winning reservation (V reservation) (S42604). If there is no V hold (S42604: No), the execution of the V icon activation effect (see FIG. 583(a)) is set (S42605), the V icon display flag 223rc is set off (S42606), and the change Based on the variation pattern extracted in the process of S42403 of the display setting process 18 (see FIG. 604) and the value of the effect counter CS1, the effect mode is determined from the time saving effect mode setting B table 222ra3 (S42607), and this process exit.

On the other hand, in the processing of S42604, if it is determined that there is V pending (S42604: Yes), the variation pattern extracted in the processing of S42403 of the variation display setting processing 18 (see FIG. 604) It is determined whether or not it is a pattern (S42608), and if it is not a long and small variation pattern (S42608: No), the process proceeds to S42605. In the processing of S42608, when it is determined that it is the variation pattern of long and small hits (S42608: Yes), the process proceeds to S42609.

Thus, in this 18th control example, when the variable display of the special symbol based on V suspension is started, whether or not there is V suspension in the remaining special symbols 2 suspension, and whether V suspension exists In this case, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern of the special symbol variation to be executed is a specific variation pattern, and it is determined whether or not to activate the V icon. , and when the V icon is not activated.

In this way, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the V hold is started while the V icon is acquired, it is possible to determine whether or not to activate the V icon. The special figure 2 reservation (winning information of the second special symbol), which did not exist at the time of execution of the acquired V icon acquisition effect, can be set as the activation target of the V icon.

Here, for example, if only the special figure 2 hold (for example, hold 4) that is digested later in the special figure 2 hold that is prefetched at the time of execution of the V icon acquisition effect is V hold, that Since the V icon is not activated until the special figure 2 suspension is digested, even if the V icon is not activated, at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol based on the special figure 2 suspension of the suspension 4, the player can win this variation. However, no matter what kind of effect is executed, it is still a small winning, so there is a possibility that the player will not be interested in the effect that is executed during the variation.

However, as in the 18th control example, by making it possible to activate the V icon, the special figure 2 hold that did not exist at the time of execution of the V icon acquisition effect that acquired the V icon. , Even in the variable display of special symbols when it is known that the small win is won regardless of whether the V icon is activated as described above, if the V icon is not activated, the newly acquired Since it is found that there is a V hold in the remaining special figure 2 hold (that is, it is confirmed that consecutive chances (small hits will be consecutively won)), the V icon is activated for the player. It is possible to make the user interested in whether or not there is a change, and it is possible to make the user pay attention to the effect executed during the change.

In addition, in the eighteenth control example, different presentation mode setting tables are referred to when the V icon is activated and when the V icon is not activated. Specifically, in the time saving production mode setting B table 222ra3 that is referred to when the V icon is activated, compared to the time saving production mode setting A table 222ra2 that is referred to when the V icon is not activated, The ratio of selecting the resurrection effect in winning is set low, and the premium winning is not selected.

By constructing in this way, the player can easily predict whether or not the V icon will be activated by the executed performance mode, and even when the V icon is acquired, the execution is performed during the variable display of the special symbols. By making the player interested in the performance, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

As described above, in the eighteenth control example, during the execution of the jackpot game, the special figure 2 reservation (the winning information of the second special symbol) stored (memorized) in the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b ) as a result of preliminarily discriminating (pre-reading) the result of the lottery, if there is a reserve (V reserve) that is a small win, an effect for notifying the existence of the V reserve can be executed. Although it has a different technical concept from the other control examples in that it has a technical concept unique to the eighteenth control example, the technical concept unique to the eighteenth control example may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 described in the other control examples.

In the eighteenth control example, the configuration is such that the V icon acquisition effect is set based on the result of pre-reading the lottery result of the reserved special figure 2 reserved. It may be configured to set the V icon acquisition effect based on the result of prefetching the winning information of the first special symbol (special figure 1 reservation), or the result of prefetching both special figure 1 reservation and special figure 2 reservation It is also possible to set the V-icon acquisition effect based on the above.

In the 18th control example, the V-icon acquisition effect is executed during the jackpot game, but the present invention is not limited to this. good. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the V-icon acquisition effect is executed during the variable display of the special symbols. With this configuration, when the V icon acquisition effect is executed in the variable display of the special symbols for indicating that the lottery result is lost, the special symbols for indicating that the lottery result is lost are stopped and displayed. However, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which performs V icon acquisition production|presentation during the period when the small winning game is performed.

In addition, in the eighteenth control example, the V suspension is set as the suspension for winning the small prize, but it is not limited to this, and the suspension for winning the big prize may be set as the V suspension. Alternatively, the V reservation may be a reservation for short-time winning.

In addition, in this 18th control example, it was configured to display a "V icon" as a notification mode for indicating that V reservation exists in the reserved and stored special figure 2 reservation, but it is limited to this Instead, it may be configured to notify using a character, or may be configured to notify by changing the background, as long as it is a display mode that can notify the player that there is a V hold. good.

In addition, in the first modification, when there is a V hold in the special figure 2 hold that is held and stored, a configuration for displaying a V icon, that is, a notification mode for notifying information advantageous to the player However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to display a notification mode for notifying the player of disadvantageous information. For example, in a configuration in which the second special symbol is preferentially digested over the first special symbol, the game state (for example, , In a gaming machine (so-called V probability machine) with different ratios of setting the probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols), the probability variable jackpot (jackpot) of the first special symbol in the normal state (low probability state of special symbols) When a jackpot type in which a variable probability state is set after the end of a game) is won, a normal jackpot (a jackpot type in which a normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game) is won in the first special symbols reserved and stored. exists, a notification mode (for example, an icon displaying "DANGER") for notifying that there is a hold for winning a normal jackpot may be displayed. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible for the player to recognize that it will be disadvantageous if the reservation of the first special symbol is consumed, and the game can be played so as not to interrupt the reservation of the second special symbol. .

Moreover, it is good also as a structure which can display the alerting|reporting aspect which alert|reports in advance that any of the 2nd time saving end conditions - 4th time saving end conditions are satisfied within suspension. By configuring in this way, if the special figure 2 reservation (winning information of the second special symbol) remains after the time saving end condition is established, it is possible to expect a small hit with the remaining reservation, so within the reservation To make a player think to accumulate the special figure 2 reserve to the upper limit by the time the variable display of the special pattern satisfying the time saving end condition is finished by allowing the player to recognize in advance that the time saving end condition is satisfied. can be done.

It should be noted that, in the so-called ceiling game machine, a predetermined number of times to reach the ceiling is given to the player (for example, a time-saving state is set) when a special symbol lottery loses and wins a predetermined number of times in succession. It is good also as a structure which displays the icon (for example, time saving icon) which announces that an advantageous privilege is given before. In this case, if the time saving state is set before reaching the ceiling and the time saving state equivalent to the time saving state granted by reaching the ceiling is set, the time saving state is set without activating the time saving icon, and it is granted by the time saving winning. After the time saving state ends, the time saving state in which the time saving icon is activated may be settable. In addition, in a game machine with a specification that resets the ceiling count by a time saving win, the time saving icon displayed based on the predetermined number of times before reaching the ceiling is activated in the variable display of the special symbol for the time saving win. Also good.

Note that the introduction part of the V icon acquisition production (the production in which the character 802 discovers the treasure box 810 shown in FIG. 582(a)) and the introduction part of the round number addition production are the same production, and the V icon is acquired. An effect that can branch into an effect and an additional round number effect (for example, an effect in which either a V icon or an icon indicating the number of rounds to be added appears from inside the treasure box 810) may be executed. With this configuration, even if there is no V hold in the hold, the player can expect to acquire the V icon, and even if the V icon cannot be acquired, Since the number of rounds of the jackpot game is added, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play. Note that an effect pattern may be provided in which both the V icon and the icon indicating the number of rounds to be added appear in the treasure chest.

It should be noted that the production of the introduction part described above is not limited to this, for example, if the player executes a production prompting the player to operate the button, and the player operates the button, the V icon or the number of rounds to be added It is good also as a structure which acquires any of the icons which show.

<First Modification of Eighteenth Control Example>
Next, a first modification of the eighteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 607 to 613. FIG. In the eighteenth embodiment described above, the lottery result of the second special symbol winning information (special figure 2 reservation) stored in the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b during the jackpot game is determined in advance (prefetched). As a result, when there is a reservation (V reservation) to win a small hit, it is configured to execute the V icon acquisition effect.

On the other hand, in this first modification, as a result of pre-reading the special figure 2 reservation stored in the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b during the jackpot game, there is a V reservation and that V reservation When the total number of rounds of the jackpot game executed based on is equal to or greater than the specific number of rounds (16 rounds in the first modified example), the V-icon acquisition effect is executed.

Specifically, as a result of pre-reading the special figure 2 hold that is held and stored during the big hit game, a small hit A If there is at least one V reservation that wins the jackpot), see FIG. 588), the V icon win effect is executed. Also, even if there is no V hold to win the small win A, there is a V hold to win the small win B (jackpot B (7R time-saving big win), see FIG. 588), and If there is also a V hold that wins a small hit C (a big hit E (10R time-saving big win with V passing), see FIG. 588), the V icon acquisition effect is executed. In other words, when the V-icon acquisition effect is executed, execution of the jackpot game for at least 16 rounds is guaranteed in the reserved special figure 2 reservation.

By constructing in this way, when the lottery result of the V reservation with the V icon activated is not the most advantageous small win A win for the player, consecutive chances (continuous small win wins) are guaranteed. As a result, execution of a jackpot game of at least 17 rounds is confirmed, so that the player is not discouraged, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the player's willingness to play.

<Regarding the production contents of the first modified example of the eighteenth control example>
607 and 608, description will be made regarding the characteristic rendering contents executed in the first modified example. FIG. 607(a) is an example of the display screen of the V-icon acquisition effect executed in the first modified example. Unlike the V-icon acquisition effect in the eighteenth control example described above, an effect is executed in which the character 801 resembling a rabbit acquires a flower 806, which is a V-icon resembling a flower. In the small display area Dm9, a black first reserved design hr1, a white second reserved design hr2, a third reserved design hr3, and a fourth reserved design hr4 are displayed.

As described above, in the first modification, as a result of pre-reading the special figure 2 reservation stored in the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b during the jackpot game, there is a V reservation, and the V reservation When the total number of rounds of the jackpot game executed based on is equal to or greater than the specific number of rounds (16 rounds in the first modified example), the V-icon acquisition effect is executed. FIG. 607(a) shows a case where the first reserved symbol hr1 wins the small win A and is V reserved, and the other reserved symbols are lost. In addition, in FIG. 607(a), for the sake of convenience of explanation, the drawing result of the special figure 2 reservation and the display mode of the reserved design are different corresponding to the small hit type, but the present invention is not limited to this.

Here, the V icon in the first modified example will be described. The V icon in the first modified example has a display form imitating a flower, and is configured in a display form in which a flower 806 is surrounded by four petals 806a to 806d. These four petals 806a to 806d are digested corresponding to the winning small winning type when the variable display of the special symbol is executed based on the V reservation, and the flower 806 when all the petals are digested. The main body also disappears (that is, there is no guarantee of continuous chan).

A specific flow of activating the V icon will be described with reference to FIG. 607(b). Fig. 607(b) shows the display screen when the V icon is activated during the variable display of the special symbols when winning the small hit A (jackpot A when passing V (16R time-saving big win), see Fig. 588). An example. In FIG. 607(b), in order to win the small win A, an effect is executed in which all the petals 806a to 806d attached to the flower 806 are digested (scattered). That is, in the first modification, the player is notified that the V-icon has been activated by digesting (scattering) the accompanying petals 806a to 806d rather than the main body of the flower 806, which is the V-icon. there is

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 608(a), if the small hit type won by V holding is a small hit B (V passage time jackpot B (7R time saving big hit), see FIG. 588), only the petal 806a is digested, and the petals 806b to 806d continue to be attached to the flower 806. In this case, when the variable display of the special symbols based on the V reserve of the small winning B win is started, it is guaranteed that there is another V reserve in the remaining special figure 2 reserve.

In addition, the display mode of the second reserved pattern hr2 displayed in the small display area Dm9 of FIG. , and a display indicating that there is no special figure 2 reservation is displayed in the fourth reserved design hr4. Therefore, in the case of FIG. 608(a), during the period when the flower 806 is displayed, 7 rounds of jackpots and 10 rounds of jackpots are executed, and the total number of rounds is 17 rounds. In other words, since the total number of rounds to be executed is larger than when the jackpot A, which is most advantageous to the player, is executed, when the flower 806 is displayed, the small winning type to be won for the player It is possible to make them interested in

FIG. 608(b) is an example of a display screen when an effect of canceling activation of the V icon is executed after activation of the V icon. Although the details will be described later, as in FIG. 608(a), when the petal 806a is digested during the variable display of the special symbol based on V reservation, V reservation exists in the remaining special figure 2 reservation , when the total number of rounds of the V hold is 16 rounds or more, an effect (rewind effect) in which the petal 806a returns to the flower 806 is executed.

As a result, even when the V icon is activated immediately after the start of the variable display of the special symbols based on the V hold, the player can expect the rewind performance to occur, thereby performing the variable display of the special symbols. It is possible to draw attention to the production until the end of.

In the first modified example, the V icon is displayed in a flower display mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any display mode that can inform the player of the guaranteed number of rounds may be used. For example, an indicator may be used. It may be configured.

Also, in the first modification, when there is a V hold in the reserved and stored special figure 2 hold, and the number of rounds of the jackpot game executed based on the V hold is 16 rounds or more , the rewind effect is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the V-icon may not be activated. Further, for example, when a new V hold is obtained, a petal may be newly added.

In the 18th control example, the flower petals 806a to 806d are digested only during the period in which the variable display of the special symbol based on the V hold is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that the flower petals are consumed during the jackpot game executed based on the expiration of the V reservation, and if the petals are not completely consumed during the jackpot game, consecutive wins are determined. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player execute the big win game while expecting that the petals will not be digested, and it is possible to suppress the big win game from becoming monotonous.

In addition, in the eighteenth control example, the presence of the V hold in the hold is notified by the V icon, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is good also as a structure which alert|reports. For example, a flower displayed as "V?" For example, when a display mode indicating detachment is displayed), an effect that is digested is executed, and when all the accompanying petals are digested, the flower is also digested. It is possible to make the player expect that the ready-to-win performance will be generated immediately, and to make the player interested in the variable display of the special symbols based on the hold other than the V hold.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the first modified example of the eighteenth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 609 to 610, the electrical configuration of this first modified example will be described. The first modified example is different from the eighteenth control example described above in that a part of the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 609, the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first modified example will be described. FIG. 609(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. As shown in FIG. 609(a), the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the first modified example has the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the eighteenth control example described above. The difference is that an effect mode selection 18a table 222rd is provided instead of the mode selection 18 table 222ra, the V-icon acquisition effect setting table 222rb is deleted, and the V-icon display mode setting table 222rc is added. are otherwise identical. Identical contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The effect mode selection 18a table 222rd (not shown) is a table referred to when the variable display of special symbols is executed. An effect mode is set based on the variation pattern type set in the main controller 110 and the value of the effect counter CS1.

FIG. 610 is a diagram simulating the contents defined in the V-icon display mode setting table 222rc. A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. It is a table referred to in order to vary the display mode of the V icon based on the type of small win won in the variable display. For example, after the jackpot game in which the V icon acquisition effect is executed, when the V reservation of the small win B winning is exhausted, the execution starts from the V icon display end counter value (maximum 16 in the first modification) 7, which is the value corresponding to the number of rounds played, is subtracted, and the V-icon display end counter value becomes 9. Therefore, in this case, as the display mode of the V icon, an effect in which one flower petal is digested is executed.

When the V icon display end counter value reaches 0, all the petals 806a to 806d associated with the displayed flower 806 (see FIG. 607(a)) are digested. and the flower 806 is also hidden.

Next, with reference to FIG. 609(b), the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first modified example will be described. FIG. 609(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 609(b), the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the first modified example is V The difference is that an icon display end counter 223rd is added, and the rest is the same. Identical contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The V-icon display end counter 223rd is set to a counter value when the V-icon display flag 223rc is set to ON in the ending process a (see FIG. 612). When a small win is won based on the V reservation, the counter value is updated, and when the counter value reaches 0, the V icon display flag 223rc is set off.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device 113 in the first modification of the eighteenth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 611 to 613, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 in the first modified example will be described. In the first modified example, in place of the 18th control example described above, the V-icon acquisition effect setting process a (see FIG. 611) is replaced with the V-icon acquisition effect setting process, and the ending process a (see FIG. 612) is replaced with the ending process. ) and the production mode setting process a for time reduction (see FIG. 613) instead of the production mode setting process for time reduction, and the other processes are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 611, the V-icon acquisition effect setting process a (S42110) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the first modified example will be described. FIG. 611 is a flow chart showing the contents of the V-icon acquisition effect setting process a (S42110). The V-icon acquisition effect setting process a (S42110) is a process executed in place of the V-icon acquisition effect setting process (see S42108 in FIG. 602) in the eighteenth control example described above, and is retained and stored during the jackpot game. As a result of preliminarily discriminating (pre-reading) the winning information of the second special symbol (special figure 2 reservation), there is a reservation (V reservation) that wins a small hit, and the jackpot that is executed based on the V reservation If the total number of rounds of the game is equal to or greater than the specific number of rounds, a process for executing the V-icon acquisition effect is executed in the ending period of the jackpot game.

When the V icon acquisition effect setting process a (S42110) is executed, first, the winning information of the second special symbol in the winning information storage area 223a is acquired (S43601). Here, the winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), each of which stores winning information. Based on the information stored in the prize winning information storage area 223a, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the lottery result of the reserved ball and the like before the change starts. Each winning information stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a is displayed one by one each time the variable display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed. It is shifted (the winning information stored in the second area is transferred to the first area) (see S4904 and S4908 in FIG. 182). As a result, when the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information command transmitted from the main controller 110 is executed, the sound lamp controller 113 side can surely grasp.

After the winning information is obtained in the process of S43601, it is determined whether or not there is a reserve (V reserve) for winning a small hit in the winning information (S43602). If it is determined that there is no V hold (S43602: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a V reservation (S43602: Yes), it is determined whether or not there is a V reservation for winning a small hit A in the V reservation (S43603). When it is determined that there is a V hold for winning the small hit A (S43603: Yes), the V icon acquisition effect execution flag 223rb is set to ON (S43607), and this processing is terminated.

In addition, as described above, in the first modification, if the total number of rounds of the jackpot game executed based on the V reservation in the reserved and stored special figure 2 reservation is 16 rounds or more, the V icon is acquired. A performance is performed. Therefore, when winning the small hit A, the big hit A (16R time-saving big hit, see Fig. 588 ) is executed, if there is a V hold for winning the small win A, the V icon acquisition effect is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S43603, when it is determined that there is no V reservation to win the small hit A (S43603: No), it is determined whether or not there is V reservation to win the small hit C (S43604) . When it is determined that there is a V reservation to win the small hit C (S43604: Yes), it is determined whether or not there are at least two V reservations (S43606). If it is determined that there are two or more V reservations (S43606: Yes), the process proceeds to S43607.

As described above, in the first modification, if the total number of rounds of the jackpot game executed based on the V reservation in the reserved and stored special figure 2 reservation is 16 rounds or more, the V icon acquisition effect is performed. executed. When winning the small hit C, the big hit E (10R time-saving big hit, see FIG. 588) is executed by passing V during the small hit game, and in the first modification, the number of rounds of the jackpot game is the largest. Since 7 rounds of jackpot games are executed even with a small jackpot type, the total number of rounds is 16 rounds or more if there are two or more V holds including the V hold of the small win C winning.

On the other hand, in the process of S43604, if it is determined that there is no V hold of the small hit C winning (S43604: No), the small hit B (jackpot B (7R time-saving with big hit), see FIG. 588) winning Therefore, it is determined whether or not there are at least three V reservations (S43605). When it is determined that the number of V reservations is 3 or more (S43605: Yes), the process of S43607 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of V reservations is not 3 or more (that is, less than 3) (S43605: No), this process is terminated.

As described above, in the first modification, if the total number of rounds of the jackpot game executed based on the V reservation in the reserved and stored special figure 2 reservation is 16 rounds or more, the V icon acquisition effect is performed. executed. When winning the small hit B, the big hit B (7R time-saving big hit, see FIG. 588) is executed by passing V during the small hit game, so if there are 3 or more V reservations for the small hit B winning If so, the total number of rounds will be 16 rounds or more.

Thus, in the first modification, if the total number of rounds of the jackpot game executed based on the V reservation in the reserved and stored special figure 2 reservation is 16 rounds or more, the V icon acquisition effect is executed. It is configured to be As a result, when the V icon acquisition performance is executed, the player is guaranteed a jackpot game of at least 16 rounds with the special figure 2 suspension in the suspension.

Here, for example, when the V reservation that is first consumed after the end of the jackpot game is the V reservation that wins the small win A, 16 rounds of the jackpot game is executed based on the consumption of the V reservation. , Consecutive chances (continuous small winnings) are not guaranteed.

On the other hand, when the V reservation that is first digested after the end of the jackpot game is the V suspension that wins the small win C, even if 10 rounds of the jackpot game is executed based on the digestion of the V reservation, 16 rounds. is not reached, ream chances are guaranteed. In this case, even if the next V hold is a V hold that wins the small win B, which is relatively disadvantageous to the player, the total number of rounds is 17 rounds, which is more than the case where the player wins the small win A, which is the most advantageous to the player. Also, many jackpot game rounds will be executed.

Furthermore, when the V reservation that is first consumed after the end of the jackpot game is the V reservation that wins the small prize B, even if the jackpot game of 7 rounds is executed based on the consumption of the V reservation, 16 rounds. Since it does not reach , consecutive wins are guaranteed, and if a small win B is won even in the next V reserve, the total number of rounds will be 16 even if 7 rounds of jackpot games are executed based on the consumption of the V reserve. Since it does not reach the round, more consecutive chances are guaranteed. In this case, the total number of rounds is 21 rounds even when the small win B is won three times in a row.

Thus, in the first modification, when winning a relatively disadvantageous small winning type rather than winning the most advantageous small winning type while the V icon is displayed, the consecutive chances The degree of expectation for the game is increased, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In the first modified example, the V icon acquisition effect is executed when the total number of rounds is 16 rounds or more, but the present invention is not limited to this. The number of rounds above may be set. Alternatively, in the case of a combination of specific small winning types, for example, when there are one each of V holding for small winning A winning, V holding for small winning B winning, and V holding for small winning C winning Alternatively, the V-icon acquisition effect may be executed.

In addition, in the first modification, when the total number of rounds of the jackpot game executed based on the V reserve existing in the special figure 2 reserve is equal to or greater than the specific number of rounds, the V icon acquisition effect is always executed. However, it is not limited to this, and when the total number of rounds is a specific number In some cases where the number of rounds is equal to or greater than the number of rounds, the V-icon acquisition effect may not be executed. By constructing in this way, even when the V icon acquisition performance is not executed during the big win game, the player is expected to win the small win A by the variable display of the special symbols after the end of the big win game. be able to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 612, the ending process a (S42109) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound ramp control device 113 in the first modified example will be described. FIG. 612 is a flow chart showing the contents of the ending process a (S42109). Ending process a (S42109) sets the value of the V-icon display end counter when the V-icon display flag 223rc is set to ON for the ending process (see S42105 in FIG. 603) in the eighteenth control example described above. They are different in that respect. Since the other processes are the same, the same reference numerals are used and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the ending process a (S42109), after the process of S42304 ends, the V icon display end counter 223rd is set to "16" (S42306). This "16" is a value corresponding to the minimum guaranteed number of rounds, and when the V hold is consumed in the game after the end of the jackpot game, the counter value of the V icon display end counter 223rd is decremented. becomes "0" or less, the display of the V icon (the flower 806 (see FIG. 607(a)) in the first modified example) ends.

In addition, in the first modification, the counter value initially set to the V icon display end counter 223rd in the ending process a is fixed at "16", but it is not limited to this. It is also possible to set a value corresponding to the total number of rounds of the jackpot game executed based on the existing V reserve. For example, a small hit C (when V passes, jackpot E (10R time-saving big hit), see Figure 588) and small hit B (V-passing, jackpot B (17R time-saving big hit), see Figure 588) V hold to win are present one each, the configuration may be such that "17" is set as the counter value.

Next, with reference to Drawing 613, production mode setting processing a (S42504) for time saving performed by MPU221 in sound lamp control device 113 in the 1st modification is explained. FIG. 613 is a flow chart showing the contents of the production mode setting process for time saving a (S42504). This time-saving effect mode setting process a (S42504) is a process executed instead of the time-saving effect mode setting process (see FIG. 606) in the eighteenth control example described above. In the eighteenth control example described above, the V-icon is activated only once during the period in which the V-icon is displayed. In contrast, in the first modified example, the V-icon can be activated multiple times until the value of the V-icon display end counter 223rd becomes "0" or less.

When the time saving effect mode setting process a (S42504) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbols to be started is a small hit (S42601). If it is determined that it is not a small hit (S42601: No), the effect mode selection 18a table is referred to and the effect mode corresponding to the variation pattern type acquired in S42403 of the variable display setting process 18 (see FIG. 604) is selected. Set (S42610).

On the other hand, in the process of S42601, when it is determined that the win is a small win (S42601: Yes), it is determined whether or not the V icon display flag 223rc is set to ON (S42602). If it is determined that the V icon display flag 223rc is not ON (S42602: No), the process proceeds to S42610.

In the process of S42602, when it is determined that the V icon display flag 223rc is ON (S42602: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is a small hit A (S42611). If it is determined to be a small hit A (S42611: Yes), 16 is subtracted from the value of the V icon display end counter 223rd (S42612). After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the V-icon display end counter 223rd after the subtraction is 0 or more (S42613). 223rc is turned off (S42614), the V icon display mode setting table 222rc (see FIG. 610) is referred to, and the V icon display mode corresponding to the value of the V icon display end counter 223rd is set (S42615). On the other hand, in the process of S42613, when it is determined that the value is 0 or more (S42613: Yes), the process of S42614 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S42615.

In the process of S42611, when it is determined that it is not a small hit A (S42611: No), the winning information of the winning information storage area 223a is acquired (S42616), and the total number of rounds in the remaining special figure 2 reservation is It is determined whether or not there are 16 rounds or more (S42617). If it is determined that the number of rounds is 16 or more (S42617: Yes), the V icon rewind effect mode is set (S42621), and the process proceeds to S42610.

On the other hand, in the process of S42617, when it is determined that it is not 16 rounds or more (S42617: No), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol to be started from now is a small hit B winning (S42618 ). When it is determined to be a small hit B (S42618: Yes), the value of the V icon display end counter 223rd is subtracted by 7 (S42620), and the process proceeds to S42613.

In the processing of S42618, when it is determined that the small winning B is not won (that is, when the small winning C is won) (S42618: No), the value of the V icon display end counter 223rd is subtracted by 10 (S42619). , S42613.

Thus, in the first modification, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the V reservation is started, the value of the V icon display end counter 223rd is subtracted according to the small winning type to be won, and after the subtraction The variable display mode of the V-icon corresponding to the value of the V-icon display end counter 223rd is set.

In addition, in the first modification, when winning the small win A, the rewinding effect of the V icon is not executed, and when winning the small win B or C, the rewinding effect of the V icon can be executed. It is configured. By constructing in this way, when the player wins the most advantageous small win A while acquiring the V icon, the display of the V icon can be always ended. On the other hand, if the player wins a small win B or a small win C, which is relatively disadvantageous to the player, while the player has acquired the V icon, the period during which the V icon is displayed more continuously than when the player wins the small win A. can be lengthened. As a result, it is possible to set a small winning type in which only one small winning is guaranteed and a small winning classification in which a plurality of small winnings are guaranteed by the V icon, thereby improving the amusement of the game. be able to.

In addition, in the first modification, when the winning small hit type is a small hit A, the rewind effect is not executed, but it is not limited to this, and S42616 and The processing of S42617 may be executed to enable execution of the V-icon rewind effect.

In addition, in the first modification, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the V reservation is started, if the execution condition of the V icon acquisition effect is satisfied with the remaining special figure 2 reservation, the V Although the icon rewinding effect is executed, it is not limited to this, and the V icon is rewound in part when the execution conditions for the V icon acquisition effect are satisfied with the remaining special figure 2 pending. It is good also as a structure by which production|presentation is performed. In addition, it is also possible to change the rate at which the rewinding effect of the V icon is executed depending on the type of the special symbol to be variably displayed from now on. The V icon rewind performance may be set more easily when the variable display of the special symbol is executed based on the V hold of the small win B winning than when the display is executed.

Further, in the first modified example, the rewind effect of the V icon is set at the time when the variable display of the special symbol based on the V hold is started, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the activation effect of the V icon is executed during the variable display of the special symbols, the conditions for newly acquiring the V hold and executing the rewind effect of the V icon are set until the variable display is stopped. It may be configured such that the rewind effect of the V icon can be executed when the game is established. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make the player want to save the hold even during the variable display of the special symbol in which the V icon is activated, and the game efficiency can be improved.

Further, in the first modified example, the value of the V-icon display end counter 223rd is not incremented even when a new V-hold is obtained in a state in which the V-icon has already been obtained, but this is not the case. Instead, the value of the V icon display end counter 223rd may be incremented when a new V suspension is acquired. For example, when the value of the V-icon display end counter 223rd is "9", when the V holding of the small win B winning is newly acquired, the value of the V-icon display end counter 223rd is added by "7", "16" may be used. In this case, an effect (for example, an effect of adding flower petals) is executed to change the display mode of the displayed V icon to the display mode of the V icon corresponding to the value of the V icon display end counter after addition. It is good as

Also, in the processing of S42617, if there is a difference between the value of the counter corresponding to the display mode of the displayed V-icon and the value of the V-icon display end counter 223rd, the rewind effect is set. It is good as For example, in a state in which three flower petals are digested as a display mode of the displayed V icon (a state in which the small win B is won twice and the value of the V icon display end counter 223rd is "2"), a new "7" is added to the value of the V icon display end counter 223rd based on the fact that the V reservation for winning the small win B is obtained, and when the value of the display end counter 223rd becomes "9", it is consumed first. It is also possible to set the rewind effect of the V icon in the variable display of the special symbols based on the V hold. Alternatively, in the variable display of the special symbol based on the V hold that is executed first, the activation effect of the V icon may not be executed.

As described above, in the first modification of the eighteenth control example, during execution of the jackpot game, the lottery result of the special figure 2 reservation stored (stored) in the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b As a result of determining (pre-reading) in advance, when the total number of rounds of the jackpot game executed based on the small winning winning reservation (V reservation) in the reservation is a specific number of rounds, the jackpot game of the specific number of rounds Although it has a different technical idea from the other control examples in that it is configured to notify the player that is guaranteed, the technical idea unique to the first modification of the eighteenth control example may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 described in other control examples.

In addition, in the first modified example, the V icon acquisition effect is set based on the result of prefetching the lottery result of the reserved special figure 2 reserved, but it is not limited to this, and the reserved and stored It is good also as a structure which sets V icon acquisition production|presentation based on the result of having read ahead the prize-winning information (special figure 1 reservation) of the 1st special symbol which is in. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which sets V icon acquisition production based on the result of having prefetched both special figure 1 reservation and special figure 2 reservation.

In addition, in the first modified example, the V icon acquisition effect is executed during the jackpot game, but the present invention is not limited to this. good. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the V-icon acquisition effect is executed during the variable display of the special symbols. With this configuration, when the V icon acquisition effect is executed in the variable display of the special symbols for indicating that the lottery result is lost, the special symbols for indicating that the lottery result is lost are stopped and displayed. Even so, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's desire to play.

In addition, in the first modification, the V reservation is a reservation for winning a small prize, but the reservation is not limited to this, and the reservation for winning a big prize may be V reservation. Alternatively, the V reservation may be a reservation for short-time winning.

In addition, in the first modified example, it is configured to display a "V icon" as a notification mode for indicating that V reservation exists in the reserved and stored special figure 2 reservation, but it is limited to this Instead, it may be configured to notify using a character instead of the V icon, or may be configured to change the background, as long as the display mode allows the player to recognize the minimum number of guaranteed jackpot rounds. .

In addition, in the first modification, when there is a V hold in the special figure 2 hold that is held and stored, a configuration for displaying a V icon, that is, a notification mode for notifying information advantageous to the player However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to display a notification mode for notifying the player of disadvantageous information. For example, in the first modification, if the small hit A is won twice during the time saving state, or if the small hit C is won three times, the time saving state ends. If there are two V-holds to win, or if there are three V-holds that win a small win C, an icon (for example, a skull icon) that foretells that a time-saving end condition will be satisfied in the hold. may be configured to display .

By configuring in this way, if the special figure 2 reservation (winning information of the second special symbol) remains after the time saving end condition is established, it is possible to expect a small hit with the remaining reservation, so within the reservation To make a player think to accumulate the special figure 2 reserve to the upper limit by the time the variable display of the special pattern satisfying the time saving end condition is finished by allowing the player to recognize in advance that the time saving end condition is satisfied. can be done.

In addition, it is good also as a structure which changes the display mode of V icon by the small hit classification of V reservation which exists in reservation. For example, the number of petals attached to the flower 806 may be more likely to increase when there is a V reserve for a small win B or C win than when there is a V reserve for a small win A win. Alternatively, the color of the flower petals may be configured to suggest the degree of expectation for consecutive wins (continuous winning of small winnings).

<Nineteenth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the nineteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 619 to 636. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the 16th control example described above, when the special symbol lottery does not continuously hit the jackpot over the specified number of times (for example, 500 times), and when the time-saving symbol is won in the special symbol lottery In addition, it was configured to set the time-saving game state directly (without going through the jackpot game).

The pachinko machine 10 in the 19th control example has the following differences 1 to 3 from the pachinko machine 10 in the 16th control example. That is, as a different point 1, during the execution of the variable display effect based on the time saving symbol winning, as a kind of variable display mode, it is configured to execute the effect of notifying (suggesting) the number of time saving times. Then, the time-saving pattern is won, and the number of times of the time-saving state that is directly set based on the time-saving pattern winning (the number of fluctuations in the special design that ends the time-saving state if the jackpot is not won) is the number of ceiling lotteries If the number of lotteries remaining is greater than the number of lotteries remaining until (the number of times of the ceiling lottery is reached within the number of times of time saving in the time saving state set based on the time saving pattern winning), the number of times of time saving to be notified (suggested) will be the time saving pattern winning. It is configured to execute a special performance control that can notify the number of times of time saving that is larger than the number of times of time saving set based on. More specifically, if it is assumed that the jackpot will not be won in the time-saving state, the number of special symbol lotteries from the time-saving pattern winning until the time-saving state is actually interrupted (shift to normal state) (that is, for the time-saving design winning When the ceiling lottery frequency is reached during the time saving state based on the ceiling lottery frequency, the number of lotteries until the time saving state ends based on the ceiling lottery frequency arrival) is added to inform the apparent number of times of time saving. By configuring in this way, it is possible to generate a case in which it is possible to inform the number of times of time saving that is larger than the number of times of time saving set based on the winning of time saving symbols, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. .

Further, as a difference 2 from the above-described 16th control example, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 19th control example, even if the power is turned on with the RAM clearing operation, the remaining number of lotteries up to the number of ceiling lotteries is cleared. In addition to holding the data of the counter value for switching and setting the variation pattern group (variation pattern selection table) (holding the progress of the variation pattern scenario). By configuring in this way, even when processing such as RAM clearing is executed, a time saving state can be set when the variation of the special symbol is executed a specified number of times (the ceiling lottery number of times is reached). In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of the RAM clear operation, it is possible to set a variation pattern (variation time) using a suitable variation pattern selection table (variation pattern group) for each variation number up to the ceiling lottery number. Therefore, until the ceiling lottery number is reached, it is possible to realize a game property in which the sense of anticipation is increased step by step, regardless of whether or not the RAM clear operation is performed. In addition, even if the power is turned on with the RAM clearing operation, the remaining number of lotteries up to the ceiling lottery number does not increase, so the pachinko machine 10 with a high possibility that the RAM clearing operation was performed (for example, the previous day When the hall is closed, it is in an advantageous state other than the normal state, etc.).

Furthermore, as difference 3 from the above-described 16th control example, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 19th control example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbols reaches the specified number (the ceiling lottery number of times) without judging the jackpot. , On the premise that the time-saving game state (ceiling game state) is set without going through the jackpot game every time the variable display of the next special pattern stops, the ceiling lottery number is reached by reaching the ceiling lottery number. Configured to reset the remaining count. In other words, after reaching the ceiling lottery number of times, the lottery of special symbols for the ceiling lottery number of times is further executed to set the time-saving game state (ceiling game state) again. As a result, even if the jackpot cannot be won during the time-saving game state set based on the number of times of the ceiling lottery, and the player shifts to the normal state (falls), the number of times of the ceiling lottery can be reached again. Since the player can be made to aim for (re-execution of the ceiling), it is possible to realize a game property in which the player's motivation for the game is less likely to decrease. Along with this, in the 19th control example, the configuration is such that the variation pattern scenario is reset based on reaching the ceiling lottery count. That is, based on reaching the ceiling lottery number of times, the correspondence relationship between each variation count until reaching the next ceiling lottery number of times and the variation pattern selection table to be referred to is reset. By configuring in this way, regardless of whether the ceiling lottery number of times has not been reached or the ceiling lottery number of times has been reached one or more times and the time saving state has passed, the number of lotteries remaining until the ceiling lottery number of times is a specific number. (Remaining 150 times, 100 times, and 50 times), a special variation pattern can be selected. In other words, when the number of lotteries remaining until the number of ceiling lotteries reaches a specific number, the ceiling fan effect can be executed. It is possible to realize a game property in which the player's sense of expectation is gradually improved until the game is reached.

The pachinko machine 10 in the nineteenth control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the sixteenth control example described above in that the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main controller 110 are partially changed. , the configuration of the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 The point is that the control processing executed by is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the 16 control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the 16th control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Regarding the effect in the 19th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 619 to 622, the effect mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the difference 1 will be described. It should be noted that the main configuration of this control example will be briefly explained before the detailed explanation of the effect mode. When the ceiling lottery number of times is reached), the fluctuation in the specified number of times is completed, and at the fluctuation stop timing in the fluctuation display of the special symbol executed next, the frequency of opening the electric accessory 640a is set high and the opening period is set long. By doing so, the time-saving game state (ceiling game state), which is a game state in which the probability of entering the second ball entrance 640 is set to be high, is set continuously until the variation of the special symbol is executed up to 100 times. be. In addition, in this control example, in addition to the ceiling game state, the sudden time-saving game state that is set by winning in the lottery that is executed each time the fluctuation of the special pattern is started in the time-saving winning pattern is set even if the jackpot game is not executed. configured as possible.

Below, the performance mode executed by the third symbol display device 81 until the ceiling game state shown in FIG. 622 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 shown in FIGS. Each of the production mode and the production mode will be explained.

Figure 622 is a diagram showing the transition of the production mode when the specified number of times (ceiling lottery number of times) is reached during the time saving state based on winning the time saving pattern, and the time saving state is set redundantly. Figure 622 illustrates the case where the number of times of the time saving pattern is 50 times at the timing when the number of times of the remaining special pattern lottery reaches 25 times until the ceiling lottery number of times is reached, and the production mode and the special pattern are illustrated. The correspondence relationship with the number of lotteries is shown.

In the lottery at the start of the fluctuation of the 475th fluctuation number (the number of fluctuations without executing the jackpot game), which is 25 times remaining to the specified number of times (500 times in this control example), the time-saving pattern is elected, and the special During the variable display of the symbols (during the dynamic display), the time saving symbol winning effect shown in FIG. 619(a) is executed. FIG. 619(a) is an effect mode diagram showing an example of a time saving symbol winning effect. When the time-saving design is won, when the variation of the special symbol is started, the variation display area Dm1 of the special symbol (third symbol) is reduced and displayed on the upper right. A rabbit character 801 is displayed in the display area where the special symbols are variably displayed (display area larger than the variable display area Dm1), and the number of variations in the time-saving gaming state given above it (the number of variations in the special symbols) ) are displayed in multiple rotations. Further above it, a mode for indicating that the time-saving design has been won is displayed as ``waiting for the chance time-'', and it is configured so that the player can identify that the time-saving design has been won.

When the time-saving pattern is won and the time-saving game state (time-saving game state) is suddenly set, the number of fluctuations with the number of fluctuations being 1 is determined by lottery, and the special pattern fluctuation corresponding to the number of fluctuations is executed. The time saving game state is continuously set until it is done. In addition, if the jackpot is won before the set number of fluctuations is executed, the game state drawn by the jackpot lottery is set after the jackpot game, so rather than executing the set number of fluctuations There is a possibility that the time-saving gaming state ends before.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 619(a), in the small display area Dm4 in the upper left area of the third symbol display device 81, the character "Right shot" is displayed, and the right side of the third symbol display device 81 (Right shot) is displayed. area) is displayed to suggest that the game ball be shot to the player so that the game ball passes through. In addition, in this control example, by notifying the right hitting from the fluctuation of the special pattern winning the time saving pattern, the fact that the time saving pattern was won was notified to the player more easily, but not limited to that, the right hitting notice suddenly appeared in the time saving game It may be configured to be notified from the start of the next variation (476th time) of the special symbol in which the state is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to give more advantageous information to the player. In addition, as shown in FIG. 619(a), the display of the pending symbol is hidden in the sub-display area Ds (below the display area), and suddenly a time-saving game state of "Determine the number of chance times!" A character display is provided to suggest that the mode for suggesting the number of times of variation to be continued is determined from among the candidates.

Here, in the state in which the production mode of FIG. As shown in b), one variation number is determined among the candidates 811a to 811d for variation number of times that the sudden time-saving gaming state is continued. In the example of FIG. 619(b), the number of fluctuations of 100 is notified as the number of continuations. In addition, in this control example, the number of fluctuations notified to the player is the number of fluctuations that is actually determined (the actual number of fluctuations until the sudden time-saving game state is continued). It is configured to be reported as By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player expect that the time-saving game state will continue even when the number of fluctuations in the performance becomes 0 times, and diversify the performance modes. . When the number of times of variation in the effect that the time-saving game state is continuously executed is determined, a mode ("GET 100 times!!" character display) is displayed. In addition, the variation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small area Dm1 in a combination mode indicating the deviation.

As shown in FIG. 619 (b), suddenly from the state where the variation frequency candidates 811a to 811d on the effect of the time-saving gaming state are displayed in rotation, when it comes to the timing just before the variation time of the special symbol passes, the rabbit 801 A player jumps upward to punch, hits a variation number mode on one performance to determine it, and the variation number mode (variation number pattern) is enlarged and displayed. The other variable number modes are scattered while being reduced in the direction outside the display area, so that the determined variable number mode can be easily understood.

In this embodiment, the configuration is such that the number of times of variation is automatically determined corresponding to the variation time of the special symbol. When the valid time has passed (the timing when the valid time ends), one of the candidates 811a to 811d for the number of variations in which the sudden time-saving gaming state is continued displayed as shown in FIG. It may be configured to be determined.

Here, as shown in FIG. 622, the number of fluctuations in the special symbol that is actually won in the time saving winning symbol and the sudden time saving gaming state is continued is 50 times in the example shown here, but the variation in the effect 100 times is determined as the number mode. This is the point in time when 26 times have passed until the ceiling game state is set before the actually determined 50 times special symbols are changed, and the time-saving game state has passed 26 times as the ceiling game state. , the remaining number of times is updated to 100 times, so in reality, the time saving state will continue from the time the time saving pattern is won until the 126 special pattern fluctuation display ends, so 126 times or less This is because even if 100 times, which is the number of times of , is determined, no contradiction in presentation occurs.

By constructing in this way, even if the number of times of variation for which the actual sudden time-saving game state is continued is 50 times, in the performance for determining the number of times of variation in performance, the mode of variation frequency of candidates exceeding 50 times is determined. Therefore, it is possible to give more advantageous information to the player, and to improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, although it is an effect to be described later, even if the actual number of fluctuations is 50 times, even if 100 times are reported, the total number of fluctuations from the start of the time saving game state to the end of the ceiling game state is 126 times at maximum. As a result, it becomes more than 100 times in the notified effect, and it is possible to use up to 26 times as an additional effect as an intermediate effect. This makes it difficult for the player to understand the number of fluctuations in which the actual time-saving game state (suddenly time-saving game state or ceiling game state) is continued, and allows the player to have a sense of expectation that the remaining number of fluctuations will be infinitely added. .

Next, the number of fluctuations in Figure 622 is the 476th time (remaining time reduction number (remaining number of fluctuations in the special symbol that suddenly continues the time reduction game state) is 50 times) Effect that is executed during the sudden time reduction game state The production during the chance time will be described. FIG. 620(a) is a diagram showing an example of the aspect of the effect during the chance time. During the chance time (a period during which the time-saving game state is suddenly set), the number of times of remaining time-saving in the performance is displayed in a small area Ds7 below the small area Dm4 in which the right-handed hitting notification is executed in the display area. In FIG. 620(a), the timing when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped when the number of remaining time reductions on the production is 0 (the special symbol (second special symbol) displayed in the small area Ds1 is stopped timing). A rabbit character 801 and an angel character 809 are displayed in the main display area Dm, and an effect is executed as to whether or not the number of remaining time reductions is executed when the treasure box 810 is emptied. , an addition mode 810a indicating "10" indicating the number of remaining time reductions in the effect to be added with smoke from the middle is displayed. In the sub-display area Ds, the character "Add chance time!"

After the additional mode 810a in which the number of remaining time reductions is added is displayed, the number (10) indicating the number of time reductions of the additional mode 810a is moved to the small area Ds7, and then the remaining time reduction of the small area Ds7 is performed. The number of times is updated to 10 times. By performing in this way, it is possible to notify in an easy-to-understand manner that the displayed additional mode 810a was an effect for increasing the number of remaining time reductions. As for the effects during the chance time, the effect that the rabbit character 801 dashes is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the effect of searching for the treasure box 810 is executed while the special symbols are changing. By configuring in this way, in the sudden time-saving game state, the variation of the second special symbol is mainly executed, and the variation time is likely to be selected shorter than the normal game state, but a plurality of special symbols. can be used to provide a consistent and easy-to-understand presentation. Also, when the result of the lottery of the special symbols is a big win, a letter "V" is displayed from inside the treasure box 810 to indicate a big win. After that, the big winning game is started after the special symbols are stopped.

Also, during the chance time, if the time-saving pattern is won (lottery result in which the time-saving game state (time-saving game state) is suddenly set when the fluctuation of the special pattern is stopped without the jackpot game being executed), a new game from the treasure box 810 The number of times of continuous time reduction determined in (the number of times of special pattern fluctuations in which the ceiling game state is continued) or the number of times of continuous time reduction and the number of times of continuous time reduction with the ceiling game state set after that are discriminated. determined and notified.

In addition, in this control example, although it was configured to win the time saving pattern during the chance time, it is not limited to that, if it suddenly becomes a time saving game state (during the chance time), the time saving game state suddenly ends until the time saving game state ends It may be controlled so as not to win the symbol. In this case, it is not necessary to execute the lottery for the time saving pattern, or control may be executed to invalidate when the lottery for the time saving pattern is won.

In the production during the chance time, the production that the treasure box 810 is displayed is executed by drawing lottery on the condition that the production of the treasure box 810 is not executed at the timing of starting the fluctuation of the special symbols, and the production of the treasure box 810 is executed. It is configured to run when determined. In this case, the greater the difference between the number of times of shortening remaining time on the effect and the actual number of times of shortening remaining time, the higher the probability that the treasure box 810 effect will be determined to be set. Further, when it is determined to execute the effect of the treasure box 810, the content of the effect mode to be executed when the treasure box 810 is emptied is determined based on the difference in the number of remaining time reductions and the result of the prediction of the reserved balls. be. In this case, if no effect mode is determined, an effect is executed in which the treasure box 810 is not empty. Although the treasure box 810 is configured not to be empty when it is determined that there is no effect mode, it may be configured so that it is empty and only smoke is notified. Also, when determining the execution of the effect of the treasure box 810, it may be configured to determine whether the treasure box 810 will be emptied with a predetermined probability.

Next, the ceiling game state (continuous time reduction number of times 100 times) is set at the timing when the variation of the 501st special symbol in FIG. 622 stops. Here, the time-saving game state suddenly shifts to the ceiling game state, but as for the effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the previously explained effect during the chance time is continuously executed.

Next, in FIG. 622, when the number of variations of the special symbol is 575 times, an example is shown in which the effect mode of FIG. 620(a) described above is executed as the additional effect. Here, it is decided to execute the treasure box effect by lottery when the 575th variation of the special symbol is executed, and since 10 times is determined as the addition mode, the number of additions is increased as shown in FIG. 620(a). An extra mode indicating 10 times is executed. After that, the effect during the chance time is continuously executed from the 576th change of the special symbol. After that, at the 595th time (remaining time reduction number of times in the ceiling game state is 6 times), the end standby effect is executed in the variation of the special symbol. In this 19th control example, since it is configured to add the number of times that is a multiple of 10 as an additional effect, when the number of times of time saving on the display becomes 0 times, the remaining number of times of the actual time saving state is 10 Fractional remainders may occur. Therefore, while the fractional remaining number of time reductions is used, a display mode is set in which the number of remaining time reductions is not notified as an end standby effect. Thereby, it is possible to make the player feel a thrill of not knowing how long the time-saving state will continue.

FIG. 620(b) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in this end standby effect. In the end standby effect, after the number of times of remaining short time is updated to 0 times in a small display area Dm7 below the small display area Dm4, the number of times of short time remaining in the effect cannot be identified, and the display of "last ??? times" is displayed. is done. In addition, in the main display area Dm, a hole 812 is formed in a part of the cloud where the rabbit 801 dashes. In the upper part of the main display area Dm, there is a character mode of "~Waiting for completion~" indicating that the number of remaining time reductions in the performance is less than 0 times, and the mode of suggesting the remaining number of times is a period in which it is impossible to identify. Is displayed. In the small display area Dm1, the second special symbol is reduced and variably displayed, and in the sub-display area Ds, the ceiling game state may end each time the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. The characters "end waiting zone" are displayed to indicate that there is. By configuring in this way, the player does not end the ceiling game state even if the number of times of the remaining time reduction on the performance becomes 0 times, and continues even with the next special pattern fluctuation, and the remaining time reduction on the performance. If you feel a sense of danger that the ceiling game state will end every time the fluctuation of the special symbol stops by notifying you with the character display of "last ??? times" that makes it difficult to identify the number of times, and you do not finish. It is possible to enjoy the contrast with the sense of relief of the game, and to improve the amusement of the game.

As shown in FIG. 622, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 600 times (1 time of remaining short time in the ceiling game state), the ceiling game state ends at the timing when the fluctuation stops, and the timing of shifting to the normal game state Then, the end effect is executed while the special symbol is fluctuating. FIG. 621 is a diagram showing an example of the content of the effect mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in this end effect. In the end effect mode, an effect of the rabbit 801 dashing above the cloud with a hole is performed from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbols in the same manner as the end standby effect explained above. Then, an effect of falling from the hole 812 is executed. In addition, in the small display area Dm7, a mode in which it is difficult to identify the remaining time short number of times in the effect of "Last ??? times" is displayed. (see small display area Dm1). Further, in the sub-display area Ds, a character "Chance time is over!" is displayed to indicate that the chance time (ceiling game state (time-saving game state)) has ended. Also, in the upper portion of the main display area Dm, the characters "-end-" are displayed to indicate the end of the chance time.

In this way, if the number of remaining times of the specified number of times due to the configuration of the above-described difference 1 is less than the number of fluctuations set by winning the time saving pattern and suddenly the time saving game state is continuously set, at the time of the time saving pattern winning Then, the performance is executed as the settable number of times of time reduction, taking into account the number of times of fluctuations in which the ceiling game state set thereafter is continued. By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the number of remaining time reductions more than the number of times actually given at the timing based on the time reduction pattern winning, and the number of remaining time reductions larger than the actual number Since it is also possible to execute the additional effect so as to make it possible to make it difficult for the player to predict how many times the actual number of times will be. In addition, since the number of times the remaining time is shortened, which is unexpected for the player, is notified, it is possible to provide the player with a fresh effect.

<Regarding production in differences 2 and 3>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 623 to 625, an example of the effects displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the differences 2 and 3 will be described. In the above difference 2, even if the RAM clear operation is performed and the power is turned on, the value of the counter for counting the specified number of times the ceiling game state is set is not initialized, and the count value is held. , the variation pattern group (variation pattern scenario) for variably displaying the special symbol is switched based on the value of the count value. In addition, in the above-described difference 3, the ceiling game state is set, and after the shift to the normal game state based on the execution of the set number of times of time reduction, the variation of the special symbol of the specified number of times is executed again. When shifting to the game state, the variation pattern group (variation pattern scenario) is switched each time the game state shifts to the ceiling game state, and a specific variation pattern is made easier to be selected.

FIGS. 623(a) and 623(b) are diagrams showing an example of an effect of a variation pattern that is executed in the next first variation after the specified number of special symbol variations are stopped and displayed. Based on the stop display of the special symbol variation for the specified number of times, the variation pattern group for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol is selected from the ceiling reaching time table 202sb4 (see FIG. 628(c)). is set as The variation pattern selected from the ceiling reaching table 202sb4 (variation pattern group) is that the special symbol is reduced to the upper right small display area Ds1 of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. 623(a). A rabbit character 801 is displayed in the main display area Dm, and an angel character 809 is displayed on the upper right of the rabbit 801 holding a board on which character information is displayed. On the board, character information "trajectory to the ceiling" for indicating the game state until reaching the ceiling game state is displayed, and furthermore, the number of small winning games executed until the ceiling game state is set. (small bonus: character display twice) and the number of times of variation of special symbols (number of starts: character display 500 times) are character-displayed. In addition, in the small display area Dm7, character information is displayed to suggest that the special symbols have changed a specified number of times, such as "Ceiling!?". In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, a notification mode for indicating that the special symbols have been changed a specified number of times is displayed as character information, ``Ceiling Reached!! Chance Time GET!''.

After the mode shown in FIG. 623(a) is displayed (dynamic display) for 10 seconds, the effect mode shown in FIG. 623(b) is displayed. In the production mode shown in FIG. 623(b), which is displayed after the production mode in FIG. In Dm, the rabbit character 801 continues to be displayed, the board held by the angel character 809 is hidden, and the comment from the angel 809 is displayed in a speech bubble, "If you win during the chance time, you have a great chance!?" Then, when a jackpot lottery is drawn in the ceiling game state, a mode for suggesting that the player is more advantageous than in the normal game state is notified.

Here, in this control example, when the jackpot is won during the ceiling game state, the jackpot type that is advantageous to the player is set to be more likely to be selected than when the jackpot is won in the normal game state. As a result, by executing the performance to encourage the player to be advantageous if the jackpot wins while the 100 times special symbols for which the ceiling game state is set are drawn, it is possible to increase the chances of winning the jackpot during the ceiling game state. Interest can be improved. Furthermore, since the player can expect to shift to the ceiling game state, the player can continue to play the game for a long period of time aiming at the execution of the variation of the special symbols up to the prescribed number of times. .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 623(b), in the small display area Dm4, the characters "Right-handed" are displayed, and since the state shifts to the ceiling game state, a notice is given to suggest that the right-handed game be executed. is executed. In addition, in the small display area Dm7, characters "Last 100 times" are displayed, and the number of times the remaining time is shortened is notified. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, a notification mode for indicating that the special symbols have been changed a specified number of times is displayed as character information, ``Ceiling Reached!! Chance Time GET!''.

By configuring in this way, when the prescribed number of times (500 times in this control example) for setting the ceiling game state has passed, and the 501st time is reached, the variation pattern table is switched, so that the 501st time A dedicated variation pattern can be executed for variation, and the shift to the ceiling game state can be notified in advance, and the game method and the like in the ceiling game state can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

With reference to FIGS. 624(a) and (b), the ceiling game state executed by switching the variation pattern table based on the number of variations of the special symbols in the above-described differences 2 and 3 in this control example is set. An effect for suggesting the remaining number of times up to the prescribed number of times to be performed will be described. FIG. 624(a) is a diagram showing an example of a low-intensity production mode executed when the expectation for reaching the specified number of times for which the ceiling game state is set is low.

As shown in FIG. 624(a), in the small display area Dm1 arranged in the upper right of the display area, the special symbols are reduced and variably displayed, and the large special symbols are variably displayed in the main display area Dm as well. At the lower right of the main display area Dm, reserved symbols hr1 and hr2 (black circle symbols) are displayed to notify that the number of reserved balls is two. In the main display area Dm, an angel character 809 is displayed, and a mode for indicating the degree of expectation for the remaining number of times up to the specified number of times is displayed as a comment display of "Approaching...?". In the small display area Dm7, there is displayed a mode for suggesting the number of times the special symbols have changed since the big win game was executed, "350 times between bonuses". In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, a character display of "An angel appears!" .

In this way, the variation pattern table is determined based on the count value of the number of variations of the special symbols after the jackpot that is not initialized even if the RAM clear is performed, and the number of variations reaches the specified number of times with the predetermined number of variations. By executing the notice performance indicating the degree of expectation, the player can play the game by predicting the remaining number of times until reaching the prescribed number of times from the notice performance, and determines whether or not to continue the game. can give you pleasure.

Next, with reference to FIG. 624(b), an example of a strong effect mode in which the degree of expectation for reaching the prescribed number of times is high will be described. In the rousing performance mode, characters are displayed in the small display area Dm7 to suggest that the number of variations of the special symbol is 450 times after the big win game "450 times between bonuses" is executed. Also, in the main display area Dm, in addition to the variable display of the special symbols, an archangel character 809z different from the angel character 809 is displayed, and a ceiling game state of "Close approaching!!" is set in the comment display. A mode for suggesting that there is a high degree of expectation that the remaining number of times up to the prescribed number of times to be played is small is displayed in characters.

Although the details will be described later, in this control example, the variation pattern table is switched based on the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la for counting the number of variations of the special symbols between the big winning games that are not reset even if the ram clear is executed. set. In this control example, as defined in the fluctuation pattern scenario 19 table 202sj in FIG. 202sb3 is configured to be set. In the table for ceiling tilting, it is assigned so that the variation pattern is set by lottery, and the value of the special lottery counter 203la is closer to the specified number of times (500 times, 1000 times ...). It is set so that the ratio of determination of the strong effect mode is high. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make the player expect that the remaining number of times is small when the rousing effect mode is executed, so that the player can continue to play the game. In addition, as in the 16th control example described above, even in this 19th control example, small bonuses (special jackpots and small wins) are installed, and the number of lotteries on the display (number of lotteries between bonuses) indicates that the small bonus is won. It is configured to be reset by In other words, even if the remaining number of times up to the ceiling lottery number is not reset, the apparent number of lotteries (the number of times between bonuses) is reset to 0, so the remaining number of times up to the ceiling lottery number can be completely seen from the number of lotteries on the display. difficult to configure. Under such a situation, by setting a ceiling fanning performance in which the archangel character 809z is displayed as the number of times of the ceiling lottery approaches, the player can predict the remaining number of times until the number of times of the ceiling lottery from the performance mode. can be realized. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 625, after shifting to the ceiling game state once, the variation of the special symbol is executed up to the number of times of continuation, and after shifting to the normal game state, the jackpot game is executed again without executing the specified number of times. It is the figure which shows an example of the production|presentation aspect performed by the fluctuation|variation pattern which the ceiling fanning table 202sb3 is set, and the number of times of variation|variation of the special design which becomes 150 times remaining becomes the 850th time. As shown in FIG. 625, in addition to the variable display of the special symbols in the main display area Dm, an angel character 809 is displayed, and the comment "Approaching again...?" A mode for suggesting the remaining number of times of the specified number of times to be played is displayed in characters. In this way, when the ceiling game state is set continuously without executing the jackpot game, a performance mode different from the first ceiling swing performance mode is executed. The game can be played while recognizing that it is the degree of expectation for setting the ceiling game state again, and the player determines the probability of executing the jackpot game, etc., and decides whether to continue the game. can make judgments.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the nineteenth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 626 to 630, the electrical configuration in this 19th control example will be described. Only points different from the sixteenth control example will be described, and illustration and description of the same contents will be omitted.

FIG. 626(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the nineteenth control example. In this 19th control example, the contents of the first hit random number 19 table 202sa, variation pattern selection 19 table 202sb, time saving per type selection 19 table 202si, and variation pattern scenario 19 table 202sj are changed.

FIG. 627 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning random number 19 table 202sa. The first winning random number 19 table 202sa executes the determination (discrimination) of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired based on the game ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. Information to do is set. If the game state is a normal game state or a time-saving game state (including sudden time-saving game state and ceiling game state), the probability of judging a jackpot is set to a low probability. A setting value (judgment value) for judging a big hit is set for each of 1 to 6 as a high probability state in which the probability of judging a big hit is set higher than the low probability state. ing. As shown in FIG. 627, in the low probability state, 0 to 4 for setting 1, 0 to 5 for setting 2, 0 to 6 for setting 3, and 0 to 4 for setting 4. 7, 0 to 8 for setting 5, and 0 to 9 for setting 6 are set as judgment values, respectively. Also, if it is a high probability state, 0 to 19 for setting 1, 0 to 23 for setting 2, 0 to 27 for setting 3, 0 to 31 for setting 4, setting 5 0 to 36 for setting 6, and 0 to 39 for setting 6, respectively. Further, the determination values are set so that each value of 40 to 64 of the first winning random number counter C1 is determined as a small winning.

Next, with reference to FIG. 628, the variation pattern selection 10 table 202sb will be described. Variation pattern selection 19 table 202sb, the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired at the start of variation of the acquired special symbol, the result of determination of whether the special symbol is right or wrong, and the current number of pending balls to select the variation pattern is a selection table for determining the fluctuation pattern table (variation pattern group). The variation pattern table to be selected is 1 based on the currently set game state type (normal game state, time-saving game state, sudden time-saving game state, ceiling game state, probability variable game state) and the number of variations of special symbols. is determined. In addition, in this control example, the variation pattern table is selected as described above, but it is not limited to that, a predetermined lottery may be executed to determine the type of variation pattern table, the end timing of the jackpot game, , the result of the selection lottery executed by executing one variation pattern table with a predetermined selection probability after the execution of the small winning game, the game state, the number of fluctuations of the special pattern, the information on the number of times of the big win and the small win, and the ceiling game state. The number of remaining fluctuations, the number of times of shifting to the ceiling game state, etc., or information combining some of them may be used for selection.

FIG. 628(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection 19 table 202sb. In the variation pattern selection 10 table 202sb, 19 tables 202sb1 for normal, 19 tables 202sb2 for probability variation and short time, table 202sb3 for ceiling tilting, and table 202sb4 for ceiling reaching are set respectively.

19 tables for normal 202sb1 and 19 tables for variable probability/shorter working hours 202sb2 are not shown, but in a simplistic manner, the 19 tables for normal 202sb1 select a variation pattern when the normal gaming state is set. It is a table that is set as a table where A plurality of variation patterns are set corresponding to the result of big hit determination (hit, miss, small hit), the number of currently held balls, and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. In each variation pattern, since the variation time of the special symbol (execution period of the variation pattern) is set in advance, the selection of the variation pattern can be rephrased as the selection of the variation period (dynamic display period). . By configuring in this way, the period until the result of winning/failure determination is displayed can be set in terms of design, so it is possible to limit the number of times of lottery per time, and the game can be improved. It can be designed by adjusting the gambling nature.

19 table 202sb2 for probability variation / time reduction is selected as a variation pattern table for selecting a variation pattern in the case of the probability variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state, corresponding to each of the probability variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state Then, a plurality of variation patterns are set corresponding to the result of determination of suitability, the current number of pending items, and the value of the variation type counter CS1. In addition, the variation pattern set in the 19 table 202sb2 for probability variation/time reduction is set to have a shorter variation time than the variation pattern set in the normal 19 table, so that many lotteries can be executed in a short time. is possible.

Next, with reference to FIG. 628(b), the ceiling fan table 202sb3 will be described. FIG. 628(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this ceiling tilting table 202sb3. This table for tilting the ceiling 202sb3 has 350 times, 400 times, and 450 times the number of fluctuations of the special symbols after the execution of the jackpot game (the number of fluctuations of the special symbols from the start of the game in a gaming machine where the jackpot game is not executed). This table is selected when . In addition, determination of the number of fluctuations for selection is selected based on the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la.

Ceiling tilting table 202sb3 is assigned the value of the variation type counter CS1 corresponding to the special pattern success determination result (hit, special hit, small hit, loss (time reduction pattern winning), loss). A plurality of variation patterns are set corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1. In each variation pattern selected by the table 202sb3 for ceiling tilting, the above-described effect for ceiling tilting (FIGS. 624 and 625) is executed.

Next, the ceiling reaching table 202sb4 will be described with reference to FIG. 628(b). FIG. 628(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ceiling reaching table 202sb4. The ceiling reaching time table 202sb4 is a variation pattern selected when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches the specified number of times the ceiling game state is set, and the next special symbol variation is executed (that is, the 501st time). is a table.

Table 202sb4 for the time of reaching the ceiling is assigned a value of the variation type counter CS1 corresponding to the success/failure determination result of the special symbol (hit, special hit, other than hit and special hit), and the value of the variation type counter CS1 A plurality of fluctuation patterns are respectively set corresponding to the . In each variation pattern selected in the ceiling reaching table 202sb4, the above-described effect for ceiling reaching (FIG. 623) is executed.

Next, with reference to Drawing 629 (a), per kind selection 19 table 202si of time saving is explained. Drawing 629 (a) is a mimetic diagram showing typically the contents of classification selection 19 table 202si per time saving. This time-saving hit type selection 19 table 202si is a data table for selecting the number of fluctuations (number of times of time-saving) of the special design in which the ceiling time-saving gaming state is continuously set when the time-saving design is won in the lottery of the success/failure determination. (lottery table). The types of the time-saving patterns are set corresponding to the values of the first winning type counter C2 acquired at the time of starting winning.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 629 (a), when the value of the first per type counter C2 is 0, the time saving pattern A (time saving number of times 100 times) is selected, and the value of the first per type counter C2 When is 1 to 19, time saving pattern B (time saving number of times 50 times) is selected, and when the value of the first per type counter C2 is 20 to 99, time saving pattern C (time saving number of times 30 times) is selected. configured to be

Next, the variation pattern scenario 19 table sj will be described with reference to FIG. 629(b). FIG. 629(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern scenario 19 table sj. This variation pattern scenario 19 table sj is a data table that defines data for selecting a variation pattern table based on the number of variations of special symbols (value of special symbol lottery counter 203la) after a big win game is executed. be. In this scenario table, when the ceiling game state has not been reached, the scenario table corresponding to the ceiling not reached is stored in a scenario storage area 203sb described later, and the variation pattern is based on the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la. A type is selected. On the other hand, when the ceiling game state is reached and the set time-saving game state (ceiling game state) ends, the scenario table corresponding to the ceiling game is stored in the scenario storage area 203sb, and the special figure lottery counter 203la is displayed. A variation pattern type is selected based on the value.

As shown in FIG. 629(b), the scenario when the ceiling has not been reached is set for a normal state (normal game state) and a scenario other than the normal state. In the normal state, when the value of the special symbol lottery counter 203la (the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the jackpot game) is 1 to 349, the normal (normal 19 table 202sb1) is selected, If it is 350, the ceiling fan (ceiling fan table 203sb3) is selected; For ceiling fanning (ceiling fanning table 203sb3) is selected. Table 203sb3) is selected, and when the number is 451 to 500, the normal use (normal use 19 table 202sb1) is set to be selected. In addition, when it is other than a normal state, it sets so that 19 tables 202sb2 for probability variation and time saving may always be selected.

On the other hand, scenarios for reaching the ceiling are set for the normal state (normal game state) and other than the normal state. In the normal state, when the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la (the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the jackpot game) is 1, the ceiling reaching time (ceiling reaching table 202sb4) is selected. , 2 to 349, the normal use (normal 19 table 202sb1) is selected, and when it is 350, the ceiling tilting table (ceiling tilting table 203sb3) is selected, and when it is 351 to 399 , the normal use (19 tables for normal use 202sb1) is selected, if it is 400, the ceiling tilting use (ceiling tilting table 203sb3) is selected, and if it is 401 to 449, the normal use (normal 19 table for ceiling 202sb1) is selected, if it is 450, the table for ceiling tilting (ceiling tilting table 203sb3) is selected, and if it is 451 to 500, the normal use (normal 19 table 202sb1) is selected. is set to be In addition, when it is other than a normal state, it sets so that 19 tables 202sb2 for probability variation and time saving may always be selected.

By configuring in this way, every time the ceiling is reached (every time the number of variations of the special symbol is executed 500 times after the game of the big win), the next variation pattern can be a variation pattern dedicated to the time of reaching the ceiling. Thus, the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the game state will be shifted to the ceiling game state, and it is possible to suppress the sense of incongruity caused by the sudden transition of the game state without executing the jackpot game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 629, both the variation pattern scenario for not reaching the ceiling and the variation pattern scenario for reaching the ceiling are configured as a set of two scenarios, a scenario in a normal state and a scenario in a game state other than the normal state. ing. In other words, when setting the variation pattern scenario (storing it in the scenario storage area 223sb), the scenario in the normal state and the scenario in the game state other than the normal state are set as a set. refers to a normal state scenario among a set of scenarios to identify the type of variation pattern selection table corresponding to the number of special symbol lotteries, while a game state different from the normal state (probability variable state and time saving state), the type of the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the number of lotteries of special symbols is specified by referring to scenarios other than the normal state among a set of set scenarios. In other words, even if the game state is changed in the middle (for example, if the time-saving pattern is won in the normal state and changed to the time-saving state, etc.), the number of special symbol lotteries when referring to the variation pattern scenario (variation number of times), the variation pattern selection table can be specified by referring to the scenario for the corresponding game state out of the set of set scenarios, without shifting to another game state. Even if the normal state continues, even if the normal state is set by shifting to the time-saving state one or more times, while staying in the normal state, the special pattern from the end of the previous jackpot The correspondence relationship between the number of lotteries and the type of variation pattern selection table to be referred to can be made common. Therefore, regardless of how the normal state is set, when the remaining number of times until the ceiling lottery number reaches a specific number (150 times, 100 times, and 50 times), it is possible to select the variation pattern for ceiling tilting. It is possible to execute a production for ceiling fanning. Therefore, it is possible to suitably set the presentation mode in the normal state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 626(b), the RAM 203 of main controller 110 in the nineteenth control example will be described. The RAM 203 in the 19th control example differs from the 16th control example in the store where the ceiling time saving standby flag 203sa and the scenario storage area 203sb are added. Descriptions of the same configurations are omitted.

In addition, the special figure lottery counter 203la is not reset even if normal ram clear is executed, and is configured to hold a backed up value. This special drawing lottery counter 203la is configured to be reset by clearing the ram as a special ram clear, turning on the power, turning off the power, clearing the ram again within 5 seconds, and turning on the power.

The ceiling standby flag 203sa is a flag indicating that the number of fluctuations in the special symbol has reached the prescribed number of times for which the ceiling game state is set. It is set to ON when reaching a specified number of times, and is set to OFF when shifting to the ceiling game state.

The scenario storage area 203pb is an area for storing a scenario for not reaching the ceiling or a scenario for reaching the ceiling acquired from the fluctuation pattern scenario 19 table. Even if the RAM is cleared, the information is backed up and held until the special RAM clear is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 630, the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the nineteenth control example will be described. FIG. 630 is a block diagram showing the configuration of RAM 223. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 630, the RAM 223 in the 19th control example is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the 16th control example described above (see FIG. 520(b)). and are added.

The time saving display frequency counter 223sa is a counter that indicates the remaining number of lotteries on the display of the time saving state, and when the time saving state is set, a counter value corresponding to the number of times of the time saving state to be set is set. . Also, exceptionally, if there is a possibility of reaching the ceiling lottery number of times during the time saving state set based on the time saving pattern winning (if you do not win, you will reach the ceiling lottery number within the time saving number of times), A counter value is set according to the number of determinations from the start of the time saving state based on the time saving pattern winning to the end of the time saving state set based on the ceiling lottery number reaching (S34558A, S34559A in FIG. 636). While the time saving state continues, the number of times of time saving corresponding to the counter value of this time saving display number counter 223sa is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the remaining number of times of time saving.

The ceiling reached flag 223sb is a flag indicating whether or not the transition to the time-saving state (ceiling game state) based on reaching the number of times of the ceiling lottery has been completed one or more times after the previous jackpot is completed. If this ceiling reaching completion flag 223sb is ON, it means that the transition to the ceiling game state has been completed, and if it is OFF, it means that the ceiling game state has not been set yet. The ceiling reached flag 223sb is set to OFF as an initial value, and is set to ON when the ceiling lottery count is reached (see S34521A in FIG. 635). When the variation pattern for ceiling fanning is notified by the variation pattern command, the state of this ceiling reached flag 223sb is referred to, and the ceiling fanning effect for when the ceiling is not reached (Fig. 624(a) , (b)) or to set the effect mode (see FIG. 625) for when the ceiling game state ends one or more times (see S34573A in FIG. 637).

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the nineteenth control example>
Next, control processing executed by main controller 110 in the nineteenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. Illustrations and descriptions of the same contents as in the sixteenth control example are omitted.

FIG. 631 is a flow chart showing the contents of control processing of ceiling determination processing 19 (S8321A) executed by main controller 110 in the nineteenth control example. In this ceiling determination processing 19, it is determined whether the special figure lottery counter 203la (the number of fluctuations of the special symbols after the jackpot game) has reached the specified number of times for which the ceiling game state is set. Processing is performed to set the state.

When the ceiling determination process 19 is executed, first, the current game state is read from the game state storage area 203g (S38101), and it is determined whether the current game state is a special symbol low probability state (S38102). If it is determined that the special symbol is in a low probability state (S38102: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la (S38103), and it is determined whether the ceiling time reduction standby flag 203sa is on (S38121A ). This ceiling time saving standby flag 203sa is a flag that is set to ON when the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la becomes 500, which is the specified number of times, and the variation of the special symbol up to the specified number of times for setting the ceiling game state is executed (if it is on). When the ceiling time saving standby flag 203sa is off (S38121A: No), it is determined whether the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la after addition has reached 500 (S38104).

In the process of S38104, if it is determined that the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la has not reached 500 (S38104: No), set the state command including information indicating the current value of the special figure lottery counter 203la ( S38105), the process ends. The state command set by the process of S38105 is output to the audio lamp control device 113 in the same manner as the other state commands set in the fifth control example described above. On the voice lamp control device 113 side, when a state command indicating the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la is received, the value of the special figure lottery number counter 223lc is updated. As a result, the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la, that is, the number of hooks can be determined also on the sound lamp control device 113 side.

On the other hand, in the process of S38104, if it is determined that the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la is 500 (S38104: Yes), data indicating the third time saving state is set in the gaming state storage area 203g (S38112A), A process of clearing the information based on the time saving lottery this time is executed (S38113A), and a state command including information indicating the third time saving state and information indicating the number of time saving times (100 times) is set (S38114A). Add 1 to the value of the special lottery counter 203la and update it (S38124A), set the ceiling time reduction standby flag 203sa to ON (S38125A), and change the scenario for after reaching the ceiling to the scenario storage area 203sb Change pattern scenario 19 table 202sj and set (S38126A). It is set to output 3 jackpot signals (CN9) for 0.2 seconds (S3817A). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S38121A, if it is determined that the ceiling time saving flag 203sa is on (S38121A: Yes), the time saving counter 203h is set to 100 (S38122A), the ceiling waiting flag 203sa and the ceiling time saving flag 203pa is set to ON (S38123A), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 632, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on in the nineteenth control example will be described. FIG. 632 is a flow chart showing this startup process. It should be noted that although there is some overlap with the content described with reference to FIG. 166, it will be described again for easy understanding.

This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 632), first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1701). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this control example) is executed. (S1702). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1703).

After that, it is determined whether the setting key is turned to the ON position (S1751A). If the setting key is in the ON position, the process ends after executing the set value control process (S1752A). The set value control processing (S1752A) will be described in detail later, but if the operation of clearing the RAM is performed, after the initialization processing is performed, processing related to the gaming machine settings (1 to 6) is executed. On the other hand, if the setting key is at the OFF position, the processing of S1704 is executed. In the processing of S1704, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 121) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1704). do. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S1704: No), it is further determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1705), and if not stored (S1705: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1705: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1706). If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed-up data is destroyed. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203 . Instead of the RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be judged based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S1712, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1712). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, the area other than the special figure lottery counter 203la and the scenario storage area 203sb is initialized (cleared) in the RAM area used as the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S1753A). to run. After that, among RAM222, the initial data is set with the area other than special figure lottery counter 203la and scenario storage area 203sb as initial setting (S1754A).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed at the time of execution of the start-up process, the area other than the special drawing lottery counter 203la and the scenario storage area 203sb is initialized (cleared) out of the RAM area used as the initialization process of the RAM 203. The process (S1753A) is executed. After that, among RAM222, the initial data is set with the area other than special figure lottery counter 203la and scenario storage area 203sb as initial setting (S1754A). After that, the process of S1710 is executed.

Similarly, when power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the processing of S1710 is performed after the processing of S1712, S1753A, and S1754A is executed. Go to processing.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S1704: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S1705: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S1707: Yes), while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is retained, the power failure occurrence information is cleared (S1708). Next, the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) transmits a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning to the game state at the time of drive power interruption (S1709), and the process proceeds to S1721A. In the processing of S1721A, signal output processing at startup (S1721A) is executed. This start-up signal output process (S1721A) is the same as the process shown in FIG. 533 in the 16th control example, so illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

After the start-up signal output process (S1721A) is executed, the process (S31701) of transmitting a state command including information indicating the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la to the audio lamp control device 113, and the game state storage area 203g A process (S31702) of sending a status command containing the stored information to the audio lamp controller 113 is executed.

Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S1710). After that, the interrupt is permitted (S1711), and the process proceeds to the main process which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 633, the set value control process (S1752A), which is one process in the start-up process (FIG. 632) executed by main controller 110 in the tenth control example, will be described. FIG. 633 is a flow chart showing the control contents of this set value control process (S1752A). In the setting value control process (S1752A), mainly the process for changing and confirming the setting of the game machine is executed.

First, in the set value control process (S1752A), it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is on (operated) (S1761A). When it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is on (S1761A: Yes), a payout initialization command is sent to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device). (S1712), as initialization processing of the RAM 203, initialization (clearing) processing (S1763A) is executed for areas other than the special figure lottery counter 203la and the scenario storage area 203sb in the RAM area used. After that, among RAM222, the initial data is set with the area other than special figure lottery counter 203la and scenario storage area 203sb as initial setting (S1764A).

After that, a state command indicating the setting change state is set to indicate that the setting change is to be executed (S1765A). It is determined whether the setting switch is on (S1766A). If it is determined that the setting switch is on (S1766A: Yes), the data in the setting value storage area is updated to the set setting type (S1767A). It is determined whether the setting key is in the OFF position (S1768A), and if it is determined that the setting key is in the OFF position (S1768A: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting key is at the ON position (S1768: No), the processes of S1766A, S1767A and S1768A are repeated until the setting key is at the OFF position.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch is off in the processing of S1761A (S1761A: No), power is restored to restore the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of drive power shutdown. A time payout return command is sent (S1769A), the data in the setting value storage area is read (S1770A), the setting value corresponding to the read data is displayed on the setting display device (S1771A), and a state command indicating the setting confirmation state is set (S1772A), and it is determined whether the setting key is off (S1773A). If it is determined that the setting key is at the OFF position (S1773A: Yes), this process is terminated. If it is determined that the setting key is in the ON position (S1773A: No), the process of S1773A is repeatedly executed until the setting key is in the ON position.

Next, referring to FIGS. 634 to 637, control processing executed by the sound ramp control device 113 in the nineteenth control example will be described. Illustrations and descriptions of the same contents as in the sixteenth control example are omitted.

With reference to FIG. 634, the rendering mode setting process 19 (S5001A) executed by the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 634 is a flow chart showing the contents of the control process of the effect mode setting process 19 (S5001A).

In this production mode setting process 19 (S5001), a process for setting the production mode of the variable production corresponding to the special symbol variation is executed. Alternatively, processing for setting various effects is executed according to the game state that has been set.

When the production mode setting process 19 (S5001A) is executed, it is first determined whether the value of the time saving counter 223da is greater than 0, that is, whether the current state is the second time saving state or the third time saving state. (S34401), if it is determined that it is not greater than 0 (S34401: No), the normal mode effect setting process 19 is executed (S34431A), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S34401, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223da is greater than 0 (S34401: Yes), it is determined whether the lottery result (determination result) of the special symbol is a big hit (S34432A), and the big hit If it is determined to be (S34432A: Yes), the effect mode indicating the jackpot winning is set (S3433A), and after executing the processing of S34407, this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S34432A, if it is determined that the lottery result is other than the jackpot (S34432: No), the value of the time saving counter 223da is subtracted by 1 (S34403), and the variation pattern for reaching the ceiling is set. (S34434A), and if it is determined that the variation pattern for reaching the ceiling is set (S34434A: Yes), based on the data in the bonus history storage area 223pb, the performance mode for reaching the ceiling is changed. After setting (S34435A) and executing the processing of S34407, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a variation pattern for reaching the ceiling (S34434A: No), the value of the time reduction display number counter is a value greater than 0, that is, the number of remaining time reductions in the effect is a value greater than 0 (S34436A). When it is determined that the value of the time saving display number counter is 0 or less (S34436A: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 223da is 0 (S34437: Yes), and if it is determined to be 0 (S34437A: Yes), determines the effect mode indicating that the chance time (time-saving gaming state) ends (S34438A), executes the processing of S34407, and then ends this processing. On the other hand, in the process of S34437A, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223da is not 0 (S34437A: No), the production mode for avoiding the end of the chance time (the production mode where the rabbit character does not fall into a hole in the cloud) etc. (see FIG. 620(b))) is determined (S34439A), and after the process of S34407 is executed, this process ends.

Also, in the process of S34436A, if it is determined that the hit of the time saving display number counter 223sa is a value greater than 0 (S34436A: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the time saving display number counter 223sa, and the time saving display after subtraction A display command for indicating the value of the number counter 223sa is set (S34441A). After that, it is determined whether the value of the time saving display number counter 223sa is 0 (S34442A), and when it is determined that the value of the time saving display number counter 223sa is 0 (S34442: Yes), the value of the time saving medium counter 223da It is determined whether the value is greater than 10 (S34444A), and if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223da is greater than 10 (34444A: Yes), 10 below the value of the time saving counter as the number of times of time saving Of the multiples, the effect mode in which the maximum value is added is determined (S34448A). Then, after executing the processing of S34407, this processing ends. In the process of S34407, a variation pattern command for display indicating the determined effect mode is set.

On the other hand, in the process of S34442A, if it is determined that the value of the time saving display number counter 223sa is not 0 (S34442A: No), the production mode for chance time according to the received variation pattern is determined (S34443A), and then , and S34407, the process ends. In addition, in the processing of S34444A, when it is determined that the value of the counter 223da during time saving is 10 or less (S34444A: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the counter 223da during time saving is 0 (S34445A), and it is 0 In that case (S34445A: Yes), the effect mode indicating that the chance time (time saving game state) ends is determined (S34447A). After that, the process of S34407 is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S34445A, when it is determined that the time saving medium counter 223da is not 0 (S3445A: No), the effect mode indicating transition to the end waiting zone (see FIG. 620(b)) is determined (S3446A) . Then, after executing the processing of S34407, this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 635, the normal mode effect setting process (S34431A), which is one process in the effect mode setting process 19 (S5001: FIG. 634) described above, will be described. FIG. 635 is a flow chart showing the contents of control processing of this normal mode effect setting processing (S34431A). In this normal effect setting process (S34431A), the process for setting the effect mode executed until the ceiling game state is set is executed.

In the normal mode effect setting process 19 (S34431A), first, the time saving suggestion effect selection table 222pb is read (S34511A), and the value of the special figure lottery counter 223lc and the value of the bonus history storage area 223pb. A production mode is determined (S34512A). It is determined whether or not the value of the special figure lottery number counter 223lc is 500 indicating the specified number of times the ceiling game state is set (S3413A). When the value of the special figure lottery number counter 223lc is 500 (S34513A: Yes), since the number of fluctuations of the special symbol has reached the specified number of times for setting the ceiling game state, it is possible to shift to the ceiling game state. After setting the ceiling reached flag 223sb for indicating to ON, the process proceeds to S34518A.

On the other hand, in the processing of S34513A, if the value of the special figure lottery counter 223lc is not 500 (S34513A: No), the data in the bonus history storage area 223pb is read (S34514A), and the number of lotteries after the previous normal bonus is 500. It is determined whether there is (S34515A). When it is determined that the number of lotteries is 500 (S34515A: Yes), the process proceeds to S34518A. On the other hand, in the process of S34515A, when it is determined that the number of lotteries is not 500 (S34515A: No), it is determined whether the number of lotteries after the oldest small bonus is 500 (S34516A). If it is determined that the number of lotteries is not 500 (S34516A: No), the process proceeds to S34522. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of lotteries is 500 (S34516A: Yes), the oldest small bonus history is deleted from the bonus history storage area 223pb (S34517), and the process proceeds to S34518.

In the processing of S34518A, a display mode is set to prompt not to play the game to the right (S34518A), and the process proceeds to S34522A. In S34522A, a variation pattern setting process is executed (S34522A). After that, the interlocking effect flag 223pe is updated according to the determined effect mode (S34520A), and the process is terminated. Details of the variation pattern setting process (S34522A) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 636, the fluctuation pattern setting process (S34522), which is one process in the normal effect setting process 19 (S34431: FIG. 635) described above, will be described. FIG. 636 is a flow chart showing the contents of the control processing of this variation pattern setting processing (S34522A).

In the variation pattern setting process (S34522A), first, it is determined whether or not the success/failure determination result of the special symbol is the time-saving symbol election (S34551A). If it is determined that the success/failure determination result is a time-saving pattern winning (S34551A: Yes), the number of time-saving times corresponding to this time-saving pattern is the number of ceiling lottery times (prescribed number of times the ceiling game state is set). It is determined whether the above is satisfied (S34553A). When it is determined that it is equal to or more than the remaining number of times (S34553A: Yes), a value indicating the number of special symbol lotteries until the ceiling time saving (ceiling game state) ends is set in the time saving number counter (S34556A). It is determined whether the value of the time saving number counter is less than 150 (S34557A). When it is determined that the value of the time saving frequency counter is less than 150 (S34557A: Yes), the effect mode in which the time saving frequency of 150 times is notified is determined (S34559A), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S34557A, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter is not less than 150 (S34557A: No), the effect mode in which the number of time saving times is notified is determined (S34558A), and this process is terminated. .

Also, in the processing of S34553A, if it is determined that the number of times of time saving corresponding to the time saving pattern of this time is not more than the remaining number of times up to the ceiling lottery number of times (the specified number of times the ceiling game state is set) (S34553A: No), A performance mode in which the number of times of time saving corresponding to the time saving pattern is notified is determined (S34554A), and the value of the number of times of time saving corresponding to one of the selected time saving patterns A to C is set in the time saving number counter (S34555A). After that, this process is terminated.

In the process of S34551A, when it is determined that the time saving symbol is not elected (S34551A: No), ceiling related effect setting process is executed (S34552A).

FIG. 637 is a flow chart showing the contents of the ceiling-related effect setting process (S34552A) executed by the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. In this ceiling-related effect setting process (S34552A), when the received variation pattern command is a variation pattern for ceiling fanning, it is determined whether or not the ceiling game state has already been entered by the ceiling reached flag. , the setting for executing the corresponding effect mode is executed.

First, in the ceiling-related effect setting process (S34552), it is determined whether or not the received variation pattern command is a variation pattern for ceiling tilting (S34571A). When it is determined that the variation pattern is for ceiling fanning (S34571A: Yes), it is determined whether the ceiling reached flag 223sb indicating whether or not the ceiling game state has been transitioned is on (S34574A). When it is determined that the ceiling reached flag 223sb is ON (S34573A: Yes), the effect mode for ceiling tilting corresponding to the second ceiling is determined by lottery. Here, an effect mode as shown in FIG. 625 is determined. After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S34571A, when it is determined that the variation pattern is not for ceiling fanning (S34571A: No), the variation pattern corresponding to the received variation pattern command is selected, and this processing ends. When it is determined in the process of S34573A that the ceiling reached flag 223sb is off (S34573A: No), the effect mode (see FIG. 624) for ceiling tilting corresponding to the first ceiling is determined (S34575A). End the process.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 19th control example, when the special symbol lottery does not hit the jackpot continuously over the specified number of times (for example, 500 times), and when the special symbol lottery is used to shorten the working hours On the premise of setting the time-saving game state directly (without going through the jackpot game) when winning, during the execution of the variable display effect based on the time-saving pattern winning, the number of times of time-saving is displayed as a kind of variable display mode. It is configured to execute an effect to notify (suggest). Then, the time-saving pattern is won, and the number of times of the time-saving state that is directly set based on the time-saving pattern winning (the number of fluctuations in the special design that ends the time-saving state if the jackpot is not won) is the number of ceiling lotteries If the number of lotteries remaining is greater than the number of lotteries remaining until (the number of times of the ceiling lottery is reached within the number of times of time saving in the time saving state set based on the time saving pattern winning), the number of times of time saving to be notified (suggested) will be the time saving pattern winning. It is configured to execute a special performance control that can notify the number of times of time saving that is larger than the number of times of time saving set based on. More specifically, if it is assumed that the jackpot will not be won in the time-saving state, the number of special symbol lotteries from the time-saving pattern winning until the time-saving state is actually interrupted (shift to normal state) (that is, for the time-saving design winning When the ceiling lottery frequency is reached during the time saving state based on the ceiling lottery frequency, the number of lotteries until the time saving state ends based on the ceiling lottery frequency arrival) is added to inform the apparent number of times of time saving. By configuring in this way, it is possible to generate a case in which it is possible to inform the number of times of time saving that is larger than the number of times of time saving set based on the winning of time saving symbols, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. .

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 19th control example, even if the power is turned on with the RAM clearing operation, the remaining lottery number up to the ceiling lottery number is suppressed from being cleared, and the variation pattern group ( It is configured to also hold counter value data for switching and setting the fluctuation pattern selection table (to hold the progress of the fluctuation pattern scenario). By configuring in this way, even when processing such as RAM clearing is executed, a time saving state can be set when the variation of the special symbol is executed a specified number of times (the ceiling lottery number of times is reached). In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of the RAM clear operation, it is possible to set a variation pattern (variation time) using a suitable variation pattern selection table (variation pattern group) for each variation number up to the ceiling lottery number. Therefore, until the ceiling lottery number is reached, it is possible to realize a game property in which the sense of anticipation is increased step by step, regardless of whether or not the RAM clear operation is performed. In addition, even if the power is turned on with the RAM clearing operation, the remaining number of lotteries up to the ceiling lottery number does not increase, so the pachinko machine 10 with a high possibility that the RAM clearing operation was performed (for example, the previous day When the hall is closed, it is in an advantageous state other than the normal state, etc.).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 19th control example, when the big hit ends and a new variation pattern scenario is set as a trigger, the progress of the variation pattern scenario (number of special symbol lotteries (variations)) is managed. The counter value of a specific counter (special figure lottery counter 203la) for doing is updated every time a specific update condition (execution condition for lottery of special symbols) is satisfied, and the value of the specific counter is predetermined. When the counter value (first counter value) corresponding to the specified number of times (ceiling lottery number) is updated, control (specific control) for setting a new fluctuation pattern scenario is executed and the value of the specific counter is changed. It is configured to update to a second counter value (for example, 0) that is less than the first counter value. More specifically, the value of a specific counter is cleared to 0 each time a big win is won, a new variation pattern scenario is set, and the value of a specific counter is reset to 1 each time a lottery for special symbols is executed. The value of the specific counter is updated to 500 corresponding to the ceiling lottery frequency, the value of the specific counter is cleared to 0, and specific control is executed. In more detail, the number of fluctuations in the special design reaches the specified number of times (ceiling lottery number of times) without being judged as a big hit, and every time the fluctuation display of the next special design stops, the time-saving game state (ceiling game State) is set without going through a jackpot game, and the number of times remaining until the ceiling lottery number is reset when the ceiling lottery number of times is reached. In other words, after reaching the ceiling lottery number of times, the lottery of the special pattern for the ceiling lottery number of times is further executed to set the time saving game state (ceiling game state) again. As a result, even if the jackpot cannot be won during the time-saving game state set based on the number of times of the ceiling lottery, and the player shifts to the normal state (falls), the number of times of the ceiling lottery can be reached again. Since the player can be made to aim for (re-execution of the ceiling), it is possible to realize a game property in which the player's motivation for playing the game is unlikely to decrease. Along with this, in the 19th control example, the variation pattern scenario is reset based on reaching the ceiling lottery count. In other words, based on reaching the ceiling lottery number, the correspondence relationship between each variation count until the next ceiling lottery number is reached and the variation pattern selection table to be referred to is reset. By configuring in this way, regardless of whether the ceiling lottery number has not been reached or the ceiling lottery number of times has been reached one or more times and the time saving state has passed, the number of lotteries remaining until the number of ceiling lotteries is a specific number. (Remaining 150 times, 100 times, and 50 times), a special variation pattern can be selected. In other words, when the number of lotteries remaining until the number of ceiling lotteries reaches a specific number, the ceiling fan effect can be executed. It is possible to realize a game property in which the player's sense of expectation is improved step by step until the game is reached.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the nineteenth control example, as a variation pattern scenario (a data table that defines the correspondence between the type of variation pattern selection table for selecting a variation pattern and the number of times of lottery of special symbols), usually A scenario in a state and a scenario in a game state other than the normal state are set as a set (stored in the scenario storage area 223sb). While specifying the type of variation pattern selection table corresponding to the number of lotteries of special symbols by referring to the scenario, during the game state (variable state and time saving state) different from the normal state, one set that is set The scenario other than the normal state among the scenarios is referred to to specify the type of the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the number of lotteries of the special symbol. In other words, even if the game state is changed in the middle (for example, if the time-saving pattern is won in the normal state and changed to the time-saving state, etc.), the number of special symbol lotteries when referring to the variation pattern scenario (variation number of times), the variation pattern selection table can be specified by referring to the scenario for the corresponding game state out of the set of set scenarios, without shifting to another game state. Even if the normal state continues, even if the normal state is set by shifting to the time-saving state one or more times, while staying in the normal state, the number of times of lottery of special symbols after the end of the previous jackpot will be counted. , the corresponding relationship with the type of the variation pattern selection table to be referred to can be made common. Therefore, regardless of how the normal state is set, when the remaining number of times until the ceiling lottery number reaches a specific number (150 times, 100 times, and 50 times), it is possible to select the variation pattern for ceiling tilting. It is possible to execute a production for ceiling fanning. In other words, in the 19th control example, in the state (normal state) in which the control for specifying the variation pattern selection table is executed with reference to the variation pattern scenario for the normal state for each variation, the condition for changing the game state is established. In this case, for each variation, the variation pattern scenario corresponding to the game state after change is referred to, control is executed to identify the variation pattern selection table, and when the end condition of the game state after change is met, the game returns to the normal state again. In this case, the specification of the variation pattern selection table is restarted from the number of special symbol lotteries that takes into account the number of special symbol lotteries executed while the game state in the variation pattern scenario for the normal state is changed. . In other words, regardless of the timing and the number of lotteries set in other game states, if the normal state is set and the number of lotteries of special symbols after the previous jackpot (or reaching the ceiling lottery number) is common. , the variation pattern is selected by referring to the same variation pattern selection table. Thereby, regardless of how the normal state is set, when the remaining number of times until the ceiling lottery number becomes the specific number of times (150 times, 100 times, and 50 times), the variation pattern for ceiling fanning can be selected. It is possible to execute a production for ceiling fanning. Therefore, it is possible to suitably set the presentation mode in the normal state.

In addition, in this 19th control example, after the jackpot is finished, the time saving state is set when the ceiling lottery number of times is reached first without winning the jackpot, and when the ceiling lottery number of times is reached after the second time. Although it is configured to have exactly the same degree of advantage in the time saving state, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to have different degrees of advantage. More specifically, in the ceiling game state of the first time and the ceiling game state of the second and subsequent times, it may be configured to vary the degree of advantage by differentiating the number of times of time saving, for example, as in the seventeenth control example described above. , a time-saving state A (time-saving state in which the lottery of the first special pattern with a low degree of advantage is mainly executed) and a time-saving state B (time-saving state in which the lottery of the second special pattern with a high degree of advantage is mainly executed) are provided. Alternatively, the degree of advantage may be differentiated by differentiating the type of time saving state set in the ceiling game state for the first time and the ceiling game state for the second and subsequent times. In this case, the ceiling game state after the second time may be more advantageous than the ceiling game state of the first time, or the ceiling game state of the first time may be more advantageous. By constructing such that the degree of advantage is higher in the ceiling game state from the second time onward, even if the player shifts to the normal game state without winning the jackpot in the ceiling game state of the first time, the second time is possible. Since the player can aim for a ceiling game state with a higher degree of advantage, the player's motivation for the game can be maintained. In addition, by configuring so that the first ceiling game state has a higher degree of advantage, after passing the ceiling game state, the next ceiling lottery number of times is used as a mental support, and the game is continued until the jackpot is won. It is possible to suppress the selection of a game method that cannot be quit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively absorbed in the game.

In the 19th control example, the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la is held as it is when the power is turned off, regardless of whether the setting has been changed or not, even when the power is turned on with the RAM clearing operation. It was configured so as not to increase the remaining number of times up to the ceiling lottery number. That is, the power-on without the RAM clear operation and the power-on with the RAM clear operation share the remaining number of lotteries up to the number of ceiling lotteries after power-on. Elements other than the number of times may also be shared. Specifically, for example, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 at power-on may be made common. More specifically, for example, during the period from when the power is turned on until at least the first variable display is started, the display of the first pattern display device 37 is erased or a common pattern is temporarily displayed. Alternatively, the first symbol display device 37 may be hidden by moving a predetermined movable accessory in front of the first symbol display device 37 . By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it more difficult to determine whether the power is simply turned on or whether the power is turned on along with the RAM clearing operation. In this case, even if the power supply is interrupted while the variable display is being executed and the power is simply turned on (that is, the RAM clear operation is not performed), the variable display is not restarted and the above-mentioned (Control to erase the display of the first symbol display device 37 or control to temporarily display a common symbol) may be executed. Conversely, information indicating the state of special symbols at the time of power shutdown (for example, whether variable display is being executed or not) is held so as not to be cleared even if power is turned on with RAM clear operation. However, if it is determined that the variable display was being performed at the previous power shutdown, even if the power is turned on with the RAM clearing operation, the variable display will be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 when the power is turned on. may be configured to set a display mode as if the was resumed in a pseudo manner. Further, when it is determined that the previous power cut-off is in the jackpot game state, the first symbol display device 37 may be configured to set a display mode indicating that the jackpot game is in progress. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the power was turned on with the RAM clearing operation or not with the RAM clearing operation. , the player can predict whether or not the RAM clear operation has been performed. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

In this 19th control example, when the ceiling lottery number is reached, the value of the special lottery counter 203la is cleared to 0 to reset the variation pattern scenario up to the next ceiling lottery number and to reset the ceiling lottery number. Although the configuration resets the remaining number of times, it is not limited to this. For example, a counter for managing the progress of the variation pattern scenario is provided separately, and when the ceiling lottery number of times is reached, the counter for managing the progress of the variation pattern scenario is not cleared to 0, but a specific value (for example, return to 250, which is half the ceiling lottery number). By configuring in this way, it is possible to create a variation pattern scenario that is significantly different from the scenario up to the first ceiling lottery number reaching, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In this 19th control example, when the big hit ends and a new variation pattern scenario is set, the counter value of a specific counter (special drawing lottery counter 203la) is set to a specific update condition (special pattern lottery execution condition) is satisfied, and when the value of a specific counter is updated to a counter value (first counter value) corresponding to a predetermined specified number of times (ceiling lottery number of times), a new While executing control (specific control) to set a variation pattern scenario, the value of a specific counter is updated to a second counter value (for example, 0) that is less than the first counter value. , The specific counter is not limited to a counter for managing the progress of the variation pattern scenario, and the specific control is not limited to control for setting the variation pattern scenario, and is installed in the pachinko machine 10. The control of this 19th control example may be diverted to other counters and controls. For example, the first winning random number counter C1 for executing the special symbol lottery may be employed as a specific counter, or the variation type counter CS1 for selecting a variation pattern may be employed as a specific counter. Alternatively, it may be employed as a counter for selecting the mode of presentation on the sound lamp control device 113 side. Also, the control process for executing the winning game may be employed as specific control, the process of selecting a variation pattern may be employed as specific control, and the variation pattern command for the sound lamp control device 113 Control for determining the effect mode according to the notified variation type may be adopted as specific control, or the effect mode according to the look-ahead result notified to the audio lamp control device 113 by the winning information command You may employ|adopt the control to determine as specific control.

In this 19th control example, in the state (normal state) in which the control for specifying the variation pattern selection table is executed by referring to the variation pattern scenario for the normal state for each variation, when the condition for changing the game state is satisfied, For each variation, the variation pattern scenario corresponding to the game state after the change is referred to, and control is executed to specify the variation pattern selection table. It was configured to resume specifying the variation pattern selection table from the number of special symbol lotteries that took into account the number of special symbol lotteries executed while the game state was changed in the variation pattern scenario for the normal state. The control is not limited to the control of specifying the variation pattern selection table from the variation pattern scenario. While the first control and the second control are being executed in a predetermined order, when the conditions for executing the third control having a higher priority are satisfied, If a situation arises in which the control of 3 is preferentially executed, it can be adopted. For example, if the playback condition for a high-priority audio is satisfied during execution of control for playing back audio such as music, the volume of the originally-played music may be reduced even while the high-priority audio is being played. 0, and when the playback of the high-priority audio ends, the volume of the originally-played song is returned to normal volume, so that the output period of the high-priority audio is taken into consideration. Control may be such that the originally reproduced sound is reproduced from the continuation.

<Twentyth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the twentieth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 638 to 649. FIG. In the above-described 17th control example, as the variation pattern scenario, a scenario is defined in advance for the number of special symbol lotteries in the range up to the number of times the ceiling lottery number is reached twice (that is, 300 times). When the number of times of the ceiling lottery is reached without winning the second time, the counter value of the special figure lottery counter 203qa is updated to the counter value (that is, 150) corresponding to the number of times of the ceiling lottery of the first time. In other words, after reaching the number of ceiling lotteries once, the number of special lotteries in the variation pattern scenario is in the range of 150 to 300 times. The range of the number of times of lottery until reaching) is configured to repeat the scenario, so that the variation pattern scenario in the range where the number of times of lottery of special symbols exceeds 300 times can be omitted, and the storage capacity of the ROM 202 is reduced. was. In addition, as a counter for determining the number of special symbol lotteries when specifying the variation pattern from the variation pattern scenario, by using a special figure lottery counter 203qa for determining whether or not the ceiling lottery number has been reached. Regardless of whether or not power is turned on with RAM clear operation (that is, operation to turn on the RAM clear switch 122), the number of times of variation of special symbols and the progress of the variation pattern scenario are always matched.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 20th control example, a counter for counting the number of special symbol lotteries (special symbol lottery counter 203qa) and a special symbol lottery when specifying a variation pattern from the variation pattern scenario A counter (scenario counter 203tb) for judging the number of times is provided separately, and when power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 with the RAM clear switch 122 turned on, a special drawing lottery counter 203qa. is reset, and the value of the scenario counter 203tb is held. In other words, only the remaining number of times up to the ceiling lottery number is reset while the progress of the variation pattern scenario is maintained from the state at the time of power shutdown. In addition, in the twentieth control example, a specific lottery result (for example, A lottery result corresponding to a small hit) is set to set a variation pattern scenario over the number of lotteries up to the number of ceiling lotteries. In addition, in the twentieth control example, in order to reliably set the variation pattern scenario triggered by the first special symbol lottery after the power is turned on, the first special symbol lottery is performed in the same manner as the seventeenth control example described above. It adopts a specification that is either a big hit or a small hit. More specifically, similar to the 17th control example, the specification of a so-called 1 type 2 type mixing machine is adopted, and when the first special symbol lottery is executed, the probability of 1/50 (18/900) is a big hit. 1/49 (872/900), it is possible to obtain almost no prize balls and it is difficult (impossible) to generate a V prize. By constructing in this manner, the fluctuation pattern scenario is reset by executing the lottery for the first special symbol once after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on with the RAM clear switch 122 turned on. Therefore, it is possible to suitably execute the variable pattern performance up to the number of times of the ceiling lottery.

The pachinko machine 10 in the 20th control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the 17th control example described above in that the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main controller 110 are partially changed. , the configuration of the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 The point is that the control processing executed by is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in No. 17 control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the 17th control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 638, a characteristic presentation mode in the twentieth control example will be described. As described above, in the twentieth control example, when power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 with the RAM clear switch 122 turned on, the remaining number of times up to the ceiling lottery number of times is reset, while the fluctuation pattern The progress of the scenario is configured to be held, and after the power is turned on, based on the first small winning, the variation pattern scenario is set up to the ceiling lottery number. Further, as described above, in the twentieth control example, when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, either the big win or the small win is always won. As a result, if the first lottery for the first special symbol is a big hit after turning on the power, the remaining number of times up to the number of times of the ceiling lottery is reset in the same manner as in other control examples, and the fluctuation according to the reset remaining number of times. While the pattern scenario can be reset, even if the first lottery of the first special pattern results in a lottery result other than a big hit (that is, a small hit), the ceiling lottery number of times It is possible to set a variation pattern scenario over the number of lotteries. Fig. 638 shows an effect mode when the initial lottery for the first special symbol is a specific lottery result (that is, a small win) different from the big win and the condition for newly setting the variation pattern scenario is established. .

FIG. 638(a) is an example of a variable display mode when power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 with the RAM clear switch 122 turned on, and the first special symbol lottery result is a small hit. It is a figure showing. As shown in FIG. 638(a), when the first lottery result of the first special symbol after turning on the power becomes a small hit, the variable display of the third symbol is executed in the main display area Dm, and the main display area Dm , a futon 852, a rabbit-like character 801 sleeping in the futon 852, and an alarm clock 851 that sounds an alarm are displayed. In addition, the characters "Waiting for waking up..." are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. These display contents allow the player to easily recognize that something will happen when the rabbit character 801 wakes up.

FIG. 638(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode at the time of stopping the variation among the variation display modes when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a small hit. As shown in FIG. 638(b), when it comes to the stop timing of the variable display corresponding to the small hit of the first special symbol (that is, the lottery result which is substantially the same as the loss in other control examples), the main display area Dm In , the third pattern is displayed in a stopped state with a combination of disengagement, and a display mode in which the rabbit character 801 throws off the futon 852 is displayed. In addition, a balloon image FD imitating a balloon is displayed on the left side of the rabbit character 801, and the characters "Departure!" are displayed for the balloon image FD. Further, the text "Wake-up complete!" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. These display contents can suggest to the player that the pachinko machine 10 has completed some internal preparations. Also, when the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch 122 turned on, the RAM is cleared by generating a special effect mode in the variable display mode based on the lottery for the first special symbol. It is possible to allow the player to easily determine whether or not the game has been completed. In other words, since it is constructed so that it can be determined by the first lottery of the first special pattern whether or not the remaining number of times up to the ceiling lottery is cleared, the lottery of the special pattern is executed at least once after the power is turned on. It is possible to make the player want to try it. Therefore, it is possible to improve the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 immediately after the opening of the hall. Further, as in the 19th control example described above, if the pachinko machine 10 has a specification that can be changed to a plurality of stages of settings, by providing a production mode in which it is determined that the RAM has been cleared, the setting can be performed. It is possible to allow the player to determine whether or not there is a possibility of change. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 immediately after the opening of the hall.

In addition, in the twentieth control example, when the character 801 imitating a rabbit wakes up, it is configured not to clearly indicate what has been set inside the pachinko machine 10, but a variation pattern scenario is set depending on the presentation mode. You can specify that. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the state has shifted to some advantageous state.

<Electrical configuration in the twentieth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 639, details of the ROM 202 in the twentieth control example will be described. FIG. 639 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in main controller 110 in the twentieth control example. As shown in FIG. 639, the ROM 202 in the twentieth control example has a variation pattern scenario 20 table 202tj instead of the variation pattern scenario 17 table 202qj in the configuration of the ROM 202 in the seventeenth control example (see FIG. 552). is provided. In addition, a part of the defined contents of the variation pattern 17 table 202qd has also been changed. Since other configurations are the same as those of the 17th control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted here. Details of this fluctuation pattern scenario 20 table 202tj will be described with reference to FIGS. 641 and 642. FIG.

FIG. 641(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern scenario table 202tj in the twentieth control example. This variation pattern scenario table 202tj is a data table in which a variation pattern table to be referred to for each number of special symbol lotteries is defined in association with the variation pattern scenario 17 table 202qj in the seventeenth control example described above. As shown in FIG. 641(a), the variation pattern scenario table 202tj in the twentieth control example defines the correspondence relationship between the number of special symbol lotteries after the end of the big win and the type of variation pattern table to be referred to. table 202tj1 for after RAM, table 202tj2 for post-small hit that defines the correspondence relationship between the number of lotteries of special symbols after the first small win of the first special symbol after RAM clearing and the type of variation pattern table to be referred to, It comprises at least a ceiling reaching table 202tj3 that defines the correspondence between the number of special symbol lotteries after reaching the ceiling lottery number and the type of variation pattern table to be referred to. First, with reference to FIG. 641(b), the details of the above-described post-winning table 202tj1 will be described.

FIG. 641(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the post-hit table 202tj1. As shown in FIG. 641(b), the post-hit table 202tj1 in the twentieth control example includes the number of special symbol lotteries (scenario counter) and the current gaming state for each type of the previously executed big winning game. The type of the variation pattern table corresponding to the combination of is defined in association with it.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 641(b), in a situation where the previous big win type is "jackpot A17" and the current gaming state is the normal state, the number of lotteries for special symbols (the value of the scenario counter 203tb). 1 to 99, 101 to 139, and 141 to 150 are defined in association with the normal table 202qd1. Therefore, when the special symbol lottery is executed within these lottery times, the normal table 202qd1 is referred to and the variation pattern (variation time) is selected. On the other hand, the number of special symbol lotteries of 100 and 140 are defined in association with the ceiling tilting table 202sb3. This ceiling tilting table 202sb3 is the same data table as the ceiling tilting table 202sb3 provided in the variation pattern selection 19 table 202sb in the nineteenth control example described above. It is also added to the variation pattern 17 table 202qd in the example. In addition, as described above, the small hit of the first special symbol in the 20th control example is a lottery result corresponding to the loss in other control examples, so in the 20th control example, the small hit of the first special symbol If not, the variation pattern is selected by the sorting corresponding to the result of the losing lottery. In other words, it is configured such that either normal reach loss with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds or super reach loss with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is always selected. Therefore, when the variable display performance of the variable time of 15 seconds or 30 seconds is set, the player can be made to think that the ceiling lottery number is close, so that the player's expectation for reaching the ceiling lottery number is improved. be able to. In the twentieth control example, when the ceiling lottery count is reached, the variation pattern scenario switches to a scenario that refers to the table 202sb4 for when the ceiling is reached. only is specified.

Also, as shown in FIG. 641 (b), in the situation where the previous jackpot type is "jackpot A17" and the current game state is a time-saving state, regardless of the number of special symbol lotteries (the value of the scenario counter 203tb) , special figure 1 time saving table 202qd2 are defined in association with each other. Therefore, since the special figure 1 time saving table 202qd2 is referred to as long as the time saving state continues (the time saving number of times remains), the first special A time-saving state A is formed in which lottery of symbols is mainly executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 641(b), in the situation where the previous jackpot type is "jackpot B17" and the current gaming state is the normal state, the same variation as when the previous jackpot type is "jackpot A17" A pattern scenario is defined. That is, the normal table 202qd1 is defined in association with the range of 1 to 99, the range of 101 to 139, and the range of 141 to 150 for the number of special symbol lotteries (the value of the scenario counter 203tb). The table 202sb3 for ceiling fanning is defined in association with the number of lotteries of symbols of 100 and 140. FIG. On the other hand, in the situation where the jackpot type is "jackpot B17" and the current gaming state is the time saving state, the special symbol lottery number (value of the scenario counter 203tb) is in the range of 7 to 150, and the special figure 1 A time saving table 202qd2 is defined in correspondence, and a special figure 2 time saving table 202qd3 is defined in correspondence with the range of 1 to 6 for the number of lotteries of special symbols (the value of the scenario counter 203tb). Therefore, in the lottery number of 7 times to 150 times after the end of the jackpot B17, the special figure 1 time saving table 202qd2 is referred to as long as the time saving state continues (the number of time saving remains), so the lottery of the first special symbol forms a time-saving state A in which is mainly executed. In addition, in the number of lotteries of 1 to 6 times after the end of the big hit B17, the special figure 2 time saving table 202qd3 is referred to, so the time saving state B is formed. Therefore, a very advantageous state is formed in which the lottery for the second special symbol is mainly executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 641(b), in a situation where the previous jackpot type is "jackpot C17 to E17" and the current gaming state is the normal state, the previous jackpot type is "jackpot A17" or "jackpot B17". The same variation pattern scenario is defined as in the case of That is, the normal table 202qd1 is defined in association with the range of 1 to 99, the range of 101 to 139, and the range of 141 to 150 for the number of special symbol lotteries (the value of the scenario counter 203tb). The table 202sb3 for ceiling fanning is defined in association with the number of lotteries of symbols of 100 and 140. FIG. On the other hand, in a situation where the jackpot type is “jackpot C17 to E17” and the current gaming state is a time-saving state, the number of special symbol lotteries (the value of the scenario counter 203tb) is in the range of 12 to 150. Fig. 1 time-saving table 202qd2 is defined in correspondence, and special pattern 2 time-saving table 202qd3 is defined in association with the range of 1 to 11 for the number of times of lottery of special symbols (value of scenario counter 203tb) there is Therefore, in the number of lotteries of 12 to 150 times after the end of the jackpot C17 to E17, as long as the time saving state continues (the number of time saving remains), the special figure 1 time saving table 202qd2 is referred to, so the first special symbol form a time-saving state A in which the lottery of is mainly executed. In addition, in the number of lotteries of 1 to 11 times after the end of the big hit B17, the special figure 2 time saving table 202qd3 is referred to, so the time saving state B is formed. Therefore, a very advantageous state in which the lottery for the second special symbol is mainly executed is formed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 642(a), details of the post-small hit table 202tj2, which is one of the data tables constituting the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202tj described above, will be described. As described above, this post-small winning table 202tj2 is a data table defining a variation pattern scenario that is set when a small winning of the first special symbol is first won after the power is turned on with the RAM clearing operation. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 642(a), when the current gaming state is the normal state, the number of special symbol lotteries (the value of the scenario counter 203tb) is 1 to 99, 101 to 139, , and 141 to 150 ranges are defined in association with a normal table 202qd1, and the special symbol lottery counts of 100 and 140 are defined in association with a ceiling tilting table 202sb3. On the other hand, in the situation where the current gaming state is the time saving state, the number of special symbol lotteries (the value of the scenario counter 203tb) is associated with the entire range of 1 to 150 for the special figure 1 time saving table 202qd2. stipulated. Therefore, when the power is turned on with the RAM clearing operation and the time is shifted to the time saving state 150 times (the number of lotteries equal to or less than the ceiling lottery number), the time saving state A with a relatively low degree of advantage is formed. In addition, this 20th control example is based on the 17th control example, and since there is no allocation of time saving pattern winning in the lottery of the 1st special pattern, after turning on the power with RAM clear operation, time saving state within 150 times As a case of shifting to , it is only when winning the time-saving design in the lottery of the second special design. In other words, it is a case that basically does not occur because it is a case where an irregular game method is performed in which the second special symbol lottery is executed by striking to the right even though it is not in the time saving state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 642(b), details of the ceiling reaching table 202tj3, which is one of the data tables forming the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202tj described above, will be described. This ceiling reaching table 202tj3 is, as described above, a data table defining a variation pattern scenario that is set when the number of special symbol lotteries reaches the number of ceiling lotteries. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 642(b), when the current gaming state is the normal state, the number of special symbol lotteries (the value of the scenario counter 203tb) is 1 to 99, 101 to 139, , and 141 to 150 ranges are defined in association with a normal table 202qd1, and the special symbol lottery counts of 100 and 140 are defined in association with a ceiling tilting table 202sb3. On the other hand, in the situation that the current gaming state is the time saving state, the special symbol lottery number (the value of the scenario counter 203tb) is 1, and the ceiling reaching table 202sb4 is defined in association with the special symbol. The number of lotteries (value of scenario counter 203tb) is defined in the range of 2 to 12 in association with special figure 2 time-saving table 202qd3, and the number of lotteries of special symbols (value of scenario counter 203tb) is 13 to 12. To the range of 150, table 202qd2 for special figure 1 time saving is defined in association. Therefore, when the first special pattern lottery does not win after reaching the ceiling lottery frequency, the super ready-to-win variation with a variation time of 30 seconds is always set. That is, it is possible to ensure a sufficient performance period for performing various notifications such as a performance mode for congratulating the reaching of the ceiling lottery count, so that the performance mode can be set favorably. In addition, after reaching the ceiling lottery number, in the number of lotteries of 2 times to 12 times, since the table 202qd3 for special figure 2 time saving is referred to, the time saving state B is formed. Therefore, an extremely advantageous time-saving state B in which the lottery for the second special symbol is mainly executed is formed. Further, in the number of lotteries after the 13th time, as long as the number of times of time saving remains, a time saving state A with a comparatively low degree of advantage in which the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed is formed. In addition, when the number of times of saving time reaches 0, the scenario for the normal state is referenced, so if the 100th or 140th special pattern lottery does not win after reaching the ceiling, the effect for ceiling fanning is executed. can do. Therefore, the player can be expected to reach the ceiling lottery count again.

Thus, in the twentieth control example, the number of special drawing lots when referring to the variation pattern scenario is configured to be grasped by the value of the scenario counter 203tb, and the scenario counter 203tb is powered on with RAM clearing operation. It is configured so that the value is retained even when When the power is turned on with the RAM clearing operation and the first lottery for the first special symbol is a small hit, the after-small hit table 202tj2 is set as a variation pattern scenario. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suitably reset the variation pattern scenario up to the ceiling lottery number without initializing the scenario counter 203tb by the RAM clearing operation. Therefore, regardless of whether or not the power is turned on with the RAM clearing operation, it is possible to suitably set the effect mode up to the number of times of the ceiling lottery.

Next, with reference to FIG. 640, details of the RAM 203 in the twentieth control example will be described. FIG. 640 is a block diagram showing the configuration of RAM 203 provided in main controller 110 in the twentieth control example. As shown in FIG. 640, the RAM 203 in the twentieth control example is the configuration of the RAM 203 in the seventeenth control example described above (see FIG. 553), the ceiling time saving standby flag 203sa, the scenario storage area 203sb, the first small hit flag 203ta and a scenario counter 203tb are added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the 17th control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

The ceiling time saving standby flag 203sa is the same as the ceiling time saving standby flag 203sa that has been added to the RAM 203 in the nineteenth control example described above, and when the setting condition of the time saving state is established based on reaching the number of times of the ceiling lottery , is a flag for making the occurrence of the time saving state wait until the end of the variable display executed for the first time after the variable display of the number of times of the ceiling lottery is completed. The scenario storage area 203sb is the same as the scenario storage area 203sb added to the RAM 203 in the nineteenth control example described above, and is a storage area for storing data indicating the currently set variation pattern scenario. .

After the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch 122 turned on (after the power is turned on with the RAM clearing operation), the first small hit flag 203ta indicates whether or not the small win of the first special symbol has occurred one or more times. flag to indicate If this first small hit flag 203ta is ON, it means that the small win has already been won once or more, and if it is OFF, it means that the small win has not been won even once. The initial value of the first small hit flag 203ta is set to OFF, and is set to ON when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery (see Y773 in FIG. 646). When the first special symbol lottery results in a small hit, the state of the first small hit flag 203ta is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the first small hit is won after the RAM is cleared. In the case of the first small hit, the fluctuation pattern scenario within the range up to the ceiling lottery number of times (150 times) is overwritten.

The scenario counter 203tb is a counter for determining the current lottery number of special symbols when selecting a variation pattern table corresponding to a variation pattern scenario. The value of this scenario counter 203tb is set to 1 when the small winning of the first special symbol is first won after clearing the RAM and the variation pattern scenario (post-small winning table 202tj2) for after the small winning is set. It is set (see Y773 in FIG. 646). Also, at the end of the jackpot or the number of ceiling lotteries reached, the corresponding variation pattern scenario is set and the value is reset to 0 (see S38133A in FIG. 645 and Y2712 in FIG. 648). In addition, 1 is added to the value at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol (see Y521 in FIG. 644). By configuring the scenario counter 203tb to manage the number of special symbol lotteries, a variation pattern indicating that the number of ceiling lotteries is approaching 50 times or 10 times before reaching the number of ceiling lotteries is generated. can be set. Therefore, it is possible to preferably improve the player's sense of expectation until the ceiling lottery number.

Next, with reference to FIG. 643, the details of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the twentieth control example will be described. FIG. 643 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in the twentieth control example. As shown in FIG. 643, the RAM 223 in the twentieth control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the seventeenth control example described above (see FIG. 558) only in that a scenario set completion flag 223ta is added. ing. This scenario set completion flag 223ta is a flag indicating whether or not the variation pattern scenario has been set once or more after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on with RAM clear operation. It means that the fluctuation pattern scenario has been set one or more times, and if it is off, it means that the fluctuation pattern scenario has not been set. The initial value of the scenario set flag 223ta is set to OFF, and when the power is turned on without the RAM clearing operation, or after the power is turned on with the RAM clearing operation, the fluctuation pattern scenario is set first. 649 and S9515A in FIG. 650). When a small win is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, this scenario set flag 223ta is referred to, and when the scenario set flag 223ta is off, the variation pattern scenario can be reset by this small win. Since it means that it will be performed, it is possible to suggest to the player that some setting has been completed as internal control of the pachinko machine 10 by executing the wake-up completion effect (see FIG. 638(b)). Therefore, it is possible for the player to grasp the internal state of the pachinko machine 10 to some extent.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the twentieth control example>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the twentieth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 644 to 648. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 644, details of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 20 (Y331) in the twentieth control example will be described. This first special symbol variation pattern selection process 20 (Y331) is a process that is executed in place of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 17 (see FIG. 564) in the seventeenth control example described above. Similar to the special symbol variation pattern selection process 17 (see FIG. 564), this process is executed to select a variation pattern when the first special symbol lottery is executed.

Of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 20 (see FIG. 644) in this twentieth control example, in each process of Y501 to Y503, Y505 to Y508, and Y512, the first special symbol in the above-described seventeenth control example The same processes as Y501 to Y503, Y505 to Y508, and Y512 of the fluctuation pattern selection process 17 (see FIG. 563) are executed. In addition, in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 20 (see FIG. 644) in the twentieth control example, when the process of Y503 ends, the value of the scenario counter 203tb is updated by adding 1 (Y521), and the scenario From the fluctuation pattern scenario corresponding to the data stored in the storage area 203sb, the fluctuation pattern selection table corresponding to the updated value of the scenario counter 203tb is identified (Y522), and the process proceeds to Y512.

By executing this first special symbol variation pattern selection process 20 (see FIG. 644), the scenario counter 203tb is updated independently of the special figure lottery counter 203qa, and the independently updated special It is possible to accurately identify the corresponding variation pattern selection table from the variation pattern scenario according to the value of the drawing lottery counter 203qa.

Next, with reference to FIG. 645, the details of the ceiling determination process 20 (Y332) in the twentieth control example will be described. This ceiling determination process 20 (Y332) is a process executed in place of the ceiling determination process 17 (see FIG. 564) in the seventeenth control example described above. This is a process for determining whether or not the ceiling lottery count has been reached according to the value of the figure lottery counter 203qa. FIG. 645 is a flow chart showing this ceiling determination process 20 (Y332).

In each of the processes of S38103, S38105, S38112A to S38114A, S38123A, and S38124A of the ceiling determination process 20 (see FIG. 645) in the twentieth control example, the ceiling determination process 17 in the seventeenth control example (see FIG. 564) , S38103, S38105, S38112A to S38114A, S38123A, and S38124A are executed. Further, in the twentieth control example, the processes of S38121A and S38122A are deleted.

Also, in the ceiling determination process 20 (see FIG. 645) in the twentieth control example, when it is determined that the value of the special figure lottery counter 203qa has been updated to 151 in the process of S38123A (S38123A: Yes), the special figure lottery counter 203qa is updated to 1 (S38131A), and by storing data indicating the ceiling reaching table 202tj3 in the scenario storage area 203sb, a variation pattern scenario referring to the ceiling reaching table 202tj3 is set (S38132A). Next, the value of the scenario counter 203tb is cleared to 0 (S38133A), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 646, the details of the special figure 1 deviating stop process 20 (Y731) in the twentieth control example will be described. This special figure 1 out stop processing 20 (Y731) is a process executed instead of the special figure 1 out stop processing 17 (see FIG. 566) in the seventeenth control example described above, and special figure 1 in the seventeenth control example Similar to the stop process 17 (see FIG. 566), it is a process for setting the stop display of the lost symbol when the fluctuation time of the variable display corresponding to the loss of the first special symbol has elapsed.

Of the special figure 1 deviating stop processing 20 (see FIG. 646) in this 20th control example, in each process of Y751 to Y761, the special figure 1 deviating stop processing 17 (see FIG. 566) of the above-described 17th control example The same processing as each of Y751 to Y761 is executed. In addition, in the special figure 1 deviation stop processing 20 (see FIG. 646) in the twentieth control example, when the processing of S759 ends, it is determined whether the first small hit flag 203ta is on (Y771), and the first small If it is determined that the win flag 203ta is ON (Y771: Yes), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Y771, if it is determined that the first small hit flag 203ta is off (Y771: No), after the power is turned on with RAM clear operation, the first first special symbol small hit Since it means that the corresponding variation display has ended, a variation pattern scenario that refers to the post-small hit table 202tj2 is set by storing data indicating the post-small hit table 202tj2 in the scenario storage area 203sb ( Y772), the first small hit flag 203ta is set to ON and the value of the scenario counter 203tb is set to 1 (Y773), and this process is terminated.

By executing this special figure 1 out stop processing 20 (see FIG. 646), when the power is turned on with the RAM clearing operation, the lottery of the first special symbol is executed once, ensuring , a variation pattern scenario can be set up to the number of ceiling lotteries. Also, in the process of Y771, when the first small hit flag 203ta is ON and the small hit of the first special symbol is won under the situation where the fluctuation pattern scenario has already been set, the fluctuation pattern scenario is reset. can be suppressed, it is possible to share the setting timing of the variation pattern scenario (at the time of the first lottery after the RAM clearing operation).

Next, with reference to FIG. 647, the details of the startup process executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the twentieth control example will be described. This start-up process, like the start-up process (see FIG. 166) in the seventeenth control example (and the first control example) described above, is a process executed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. be.

In the start-up process 20 (see FIG. 647) in the 20th control example, the processes of S1701 to S1712 are respectively the processes of S1701 to S1712 of the start-up process in the 17th control example (and the first control example). The same processing is performed. In the start-up process (see FIG. 647) in the twentieth control example, when the process of S1712 ends, the memory areas other than the scenario storage area 203sb and the scenario counter 203tb are cleared from the used RAM area (S1761A). , in the RAM 203 except for the scenario storage area 203sb and the scenario counter 203tb (S1762A), and the process proceeds to S1710.

By executing the start-up process (see FIG. 647) in this twentieth control example, when the power is turned on with the RAM clearing operation, the information of the set fluctuation pattern scenario (the data in the scenario storage area 203sb ), and the progress of the variation pattern scenario (the value of the scenario counter 203tb) at the time of power-off, other data in the RAM 203 can be initialized.

Next, with reference to FIG. 648, details of the jackpot ending process 20 (Y11621) in the twentieth control example will be described. This jackpot end process 20 (Y11621) is a process executed instead of the jackpot end process 12 (see FIG. 437) in the seventeenth control example (and the twelfth control example) described above. ), it is a process for performing various settings based on the end of the jackpot.

Of the jackpot end processing 20 (see FIG. 648) in the twentieth control example, in each of the processes Y2704 to Y2707, the jackpot end processing 20 (see FIG. 437) in the above-described seventeenth control example (and the twelfth control example) The same processing as each of Y2704 to Y2707 of is executed. In addition, in the jackpot ending process 20 (see FIG. 648) in the twentieth control example, when the process of Y2707 is finished, the data indicating the variation pattern scenario corresponding to the jackpot type this time is stored in the scenario storage area 203sb ( Y2711), the scenario counter 203tb is reset to 0 (Y2712), and this processing ends.

<Control processing of the sound ramp control device in the twentieth control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the twentieth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 649 and 650. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 649, the details of the normal state effect setting process 20 (S9011A) in the twentieth control example will be described. This normal state effect setting process 20 (S9011A) is a process that is executed in place of the normal state effect setting process (see FIG. 264) in the seventeenth control example (and fifth control example) described above, and normal state effect setting. Similar to the process (see FIG. 264), this is a process for setting the effect mode when the normal state is notified by the state command as the game state.

When this normal state effect setting process 20 (see FIG. 649) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the normal state is notified as the game state when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 (S9111A), and based on the power turn on (S9111A: No), the display command for the production mode corresponding to the normal state is set (S9112A), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S9111A, if it is determined that the normal state is notified based on the power-on (S9111A: Yes), then it is determined whether the normal state has been set by the power-on accompanied by the RAM clearing operation. If it is determined (S9113A) and it is determined that the power is turned on without RAM clear operation (S9113A: No), the scenario set flag 223ta is set to ON (S9114A), and the process proceeds to S9112A.

On the other hand, in the processing of S9113A, if it is determined that the power is turned on with the RAM clear operation (S9113A: Yes), by setting the display command for the wake-up standby mode, a special symbol lottery is executed. In this case, the effect (see FIG. 638(a)) during waiting for wakeup is set to be executed (see S9115A), and this process ends. By executing the normal state effect setting process 20 (see FIG. 649), when the power is turned on with the RAM clearing operation, the scenario set completion flag 223ta remains in the OFF state and the wake-up standby mode is set. You can set the presentation mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 650, the details of the special figure 1 effect mode setting process 20 (S4991A) in the twentieth control example will be described. This special figure 1 effect mode setting process 20 (S4991A) is a process executed instead of the special figure 1 effect mode setting process 5 (see FIG. 268) in the 17th control example (and the 5th control example), Similar to FIG. 1 production mode setting process 5 (see FIG. 2689), this is a process for setting the variable display mode of the first special symbol. FIG. 650 is a flow chart showing this special figure 1 effect mode setting process 20 (S4991A).

Of the special figure 1 effect mode setting process 20 (see FIG. 650) in the 20th control example, in each process of S9501 to S9504, the special figure 1 effect mode setting process in the 17th control example (and the 5th control example) 5 (see FIG. 268) are executed. In addition, in the special figure 1 effect mode setting process 20 (see FIG. 650) in the twentieth control example, when each process of S9501 to S9503 is completed, it is then determined whether the scenario set completion flag 223ta is on. (S9511A), if the scenario set flag 223ta is on (S9511A: Yes), determine the variation display mode according to the variation pattern type notified by the variation pattern command (S9512A), and proceed to s9504 .

On the other hand, in the processing of S9511A, if it is determined that the scenario set flag 223ta is off (S9511A: No), then the current variation pattern command is a variation pattern command corresponding to the small hit It is determined whether or not Then (S9513A), when it is determined that it is not a variation pattern command corresponding to a small hit (that is, a variation pattern command corresponding to a big hit) (S9513A: No), the process proceeds to S9512A. On the other hand, in the processing of S9513A, if it is determined that it is a variation pattern command corresponding to a small hit (S9513A: Yes), a variation display mode accompanied by a wake-up completion effect (see FIG. 638 (b)) is determined ( S9514A), the scenario set completion flag 223ta is set to ON (S9515A), and the process proceeds to S9504.

By executing this special figure 1 production mode setting process 20 (see FIG. 650), after the power is turned on with the RAM clearing operation, when a small hit is obtained in the first lottery of the first special symbol, the wake-up completion production is performed. Since it can be executed, it is possible to suggest to the player that some setting has been made as internal control of the pachinko machine 10 .

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the twentieth control example, a predetermined specific Control (setting of a new variation pattern scenario) is executed, and once the specific control is executed, the execution of the specific control can be avoided (suppressed) even if the first condition is satisfied. In other words, only when the first condition is met in a situation where the specific condition is not met, execution of the specific control is allowed, and even if the first condition is met in a situation where the specific condition is met, the specific It is configured to perform characteristic control that avoids the execution of control. More specifically, in the twentieth control example, after power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 with the RAM clear switch 122 turned on (after power is turned on with RAM clear operation), a special symbol lottery is drawn. First, it is assumed that a lottery result different from a big win (for example, a lottery result corresponding to a small win) is established as a first condition, and a variation pattern scenario is set over the number of lotteries up to the number of ceiling lotteries. So, after the power is turned on with the RAM clearing operation, in the situation where you have already won a small win one or more times (under a situation where specific conditions are met), even if you win a small win, you will not be able to set the variation pattern scenario. It is configured to avoid In other words, if the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery after the power is turned on with the RAM clearing operation, the variation pattern scenario according to the jackpot type is set at the end of the jackpot, while the lottery result (small Even in the case of winning), it is configured to set a variation pattern scenario up to the number of times of the ceiling lottery. In addition, once the fluctuation pattern scenario is set, it is configured to be regulated so that the fluctuation pattern scenario is not overwritten. As a result, when the power is turned on with the RAM clearing operation, the first special symbol lottery is executed, so that the variation pattern scenario can be almost certainly set. Therefore, it is possible to suitably set a variation pattern scenario up to the ceiling lottery number regardless of whether or not power is turned on with a RAM clearing operation. Along with this, in the twentieth control example, a counter for counting the number of special symbol lotteries (special symbol lottery counter 203qa) and the number of special symbol lotteries when specifying the variation pattern from the variation pattern scenario A counter (scenario counter 203tb) for determining the Only the value is reset, and the value of the scenario counter 203tb is held.

Further, in the twentieth control example, when the power is turned on with the RAM clearing operation, the first effect mode (wake-up standby mode) is set to suggest that some setting is waiting, and the When the lottery for the first special symbol is executed during the execution of the first performance mode, the second performance mode (wake-up performance) capable of suggesting to the player that some setting has been made is executed. . With this configuration, it is possible for the player to easily understand whether or not the power has been turned on with the operation of clearing the RAM. Therefore, in order to determine whether or not the RAM clearing operation has been performed, at least one special symbol lottery is executed in the pachinko machine 10 where the first special symbol lottery has not been executed after the opening of the hall. Since it can make you think, it is possible to improve the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 after the opening of the hall.

In addition, in this twentieth control example, after the power is turned on with the RAM clearing operation, the first special symbol lottery is executed and the variation pattern scenario is set. Although it has been configured to execute the effect mode (wake-up effect), it is not limited to this. For example, on the premise that a plurality of ceiling lottery numbers can be set when the power is turned on with a RAM clearing operation, a second effect is provided to suggest to the player that the ceiling lottery number has been reset. A configuration may be adopted in which the second effect mode (wake-up effect) is executed. By configuring in this manner, the second effect mode can be configured as an effect indicating that the setting content that directly affects the player's advantage has been set. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which an effect suggesting which value is set as the ceiling lottery number of times is executed in the second effect mode. By constructing in this way, the player can be made to want to confirm the second performance mode more strongly, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 after the opening of the hall can be further improved. In addition, for example, in a specification that can be changed to any one of a plurality of settings, such as the 19th control example, when the setting is changed at power-on accompanied by RAM clearing operation, the second presentation mode is executed. It is good also as a structure which carries out. In this case, since the player can recognize that the setting has been changed by executing the second effect mode, convenience for the player can be improved.

In addition, in this twentieth control example, after the power is turned on with the RAM clearing operation, after the first small hit of the first special symbol (the first condition is established), after the small hit While setting a variation pattern scenario for specifying the variation pattern selection table with reference to the table 202tj2 and executing control (specific control) to reset the value of the scenario counter 203tb, at the time of winning the second and subsequent small hits Although the configuration is such that execution of the specific control is avoided (suppressed), the conditions for execution and avoidance of the specific control are not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to execute the specific control when the small hit of the first special symbol is won consecutively over a specific number of times (for example, 10 times) of two or more. In addition, as the execution condition (first condition) of the specific control, instead of the small hit, for example, simple deviation may be adopted, or a specific variation type (eg, short deviation, normal reach deviation, etc.) is adopted. Alternatively, a jackpot election of a predetermined jackpot type may be adopted. By permitting various controls and conditions as specific controls and first conditions in this manner, the degree of freedom in development can be improved.

In this twentieth control example, after the power is turned on with the RAM clearing operation, the small hit of the first special symbol is first achieved (the first condition is established). 202tj2 to set a variation pattern scenario for specifying a variation pattern selection table and to execute control (specific control) for resetting the value of the scenario counter 203tb, while executing the specific control at the time of the second and subsequent small hits Although it was configured to avoid (suppress) the execution of, at first the setting of a new fluctuation pattern scenario (execution of specific control) is avoided (the fluctuation pattern scenario at the time of power shutdown and the progress of the scenario are inherited) is set, and when a predetermined cancellation condition is met (for example, after turning on the power with a RAM clear operation, a special pattern lottery is executed a specific number of times (for example, 100 times) less than the ceiling lottery number), It may be configured to form a state in which execution of specific control is permitted. In this configuration, when the power is turned on with the RAM clearing operation, the remaining number of times up to the ceiling lottery number is reset, while the RAM is cleared until the special symbol lottery of 100 times is executed. Whether the power is turned on with an operation or without a RAM clearing operation, the selection tendency of the variation pattern is a common tendency, so that the player can grasp the presence or absence of the RAM clearing operation. can be configured without difficulty. In this case, the fluctuation pattern scenario set as the specific control is sufficient to prepare a scenario ranging from the number of lotteries of the special symbol of the specific number to the number of lotteries of the special symbol of the number of times of the ceiling lottery. A secondary effect of being able to reduce the storage capacity is also obtained.

In this twentieth control example, after the power is turned on with the RAM clearing operation, the small hit of the first special symbol is first achieved (the first condition is established). 202tj2 to set the variation pattern scenario for specifying the variation pattern selection table and execute control (specific control) to reset the value of the scenario counter 203tb, while avoiding when winning the second and subsequent small hits Although it is configured to avoid (suppress) the execution of the specific control by determining that the condition is established, the first condition, the specific control, and the avoidance condition are not limited to these. Other conditions that can be established in the pachinko machine 10 may be adopted as the first condition or the avoidance condition, and other mounted controls may be adopted as the specific control. For example, it may be adopted for effect control on the sound lamp control device 113 side. More specifically, for example, the setting of the pending change effect in the sixteenth control example described above may be adopted as the specific control, and the first condition may be adopted as the reception of the prize information command based on the new start prize. In this case, as the avoidance condition, for example, a state while the pending change effect is already set may be set, or a state during execution of the jackpot game may be set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suitably set the timing at which the pending change effect is executed.

<21st control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 651 to 664. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the nineteenth control example described above, the counter value of the counter (special figure lottery counter 203la) for counting the number of lotteries after the end of the jackpot determines whether or not the ceiling lottery number has been reached, and the fluctuation pattern scenario It was configured to determine the number of fluctuations (the number of special symbol lotteries) when specifying the fluctuation pattern selection table from. And, even when the power is turned on with the RAM clearing operation, the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la is not cleared and is held. In other words, even if the pachinko machine 10 is powered off or the RAM is cleared, the number of lotteries remaining up to the number of ceiling lotteries and the progress of the variation pattern scenario are not cleared and are held. Was. In the 19th control example, as the variation pattern scenario, when the jackpot ends or the ceiling lottery count is reached, the variation pattern scenario for the normal state and the variation pattern scenario for the game state other than the normal state are set as a set. If the game state is the normal state, the variation pattern selection table is specified by referring to the specified contents for the normal state among the set variation pattern scenarios, and if the game state is other than the normal state, the variation pattern selection table is specified. The variation pattern selection table was identified by referring to the stipulated contents of. In other words, by unifying the setting timing of the variation pattern scenario to the timing when the ceiling lottery count is reset, the variation pattern scenario up to the ceiling lottery count in the case of shifting to the normal state regardless of the game state after the jackpot ends. It is configured so that it can be shared. That is, when the number of lotteries remaining until the number of ceiling lotteries is 150 times, 100 times and 50 times in a normal state, a special variation pattern for tilting the ceiling is always easily selected.

On the other hand, in this 21st control example, the time saving state set based on reaching the ceiling lottery number of times, and the end of the time saving state set based on winning the time saving pattern, the variation pattern The scenario is switched, and the selection ratio of the variation pattern is made different from the normal selection ratio over the predetermined number of special symbol lotteries after the end of the time saving state. In other words, by differentiating the relationship between the lottery result and the selection ratio of the various variation patterns, the trend of the variation time is different, and the variation display mode set according to the variation time is also different, thereby creating a special effect. configured to form modes. By configuring in this way, when the time-saving state set without a big hit ends (the advantageous time-saving state ends without winning any prize balls), a special production mode is formed. , it is possible to relieve the disappointment of the player and make him/her want to continue the game until the end of the special performance mode. As a result, it is possible to improve the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 after the end of the time saving state.

The pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-first control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the nineteenth control example described above in that the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main controller 110 are partially changed. , the configuration of the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 The point is that the control processing executed by is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in No. 19 control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the 19th control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 651 and 652, a characteristic presentation mode in the twenty-first control example will be described. Here, in this 21st control example, either the time saving state activated based on winning the time saving pattern or the time saving state activated based on reaching the number of times of ceiling lottery has ended, It is configured to reset the fluctuation pattern scenario. More specifically, based on the fact that the time saving state has ended, in order to form a special production mode, a special state in which various variation patterns are selected at a selection ratio different from usual is held for a predetermined period (lottery of special symbols is formed 20 times). First, with reference to FIG. 651 (a), either the time saving state activated based on winning the time saving pattern in this 21st control example, or the time saving state activated based on reaching the ceiling lottery number of times A description will be given of the mode of presentation after the end of . In the following explanation, to simplify the explanation, the time saving state activated based on winning the time saving pattern, and the time saving state activated based on reaching the ceiling lottery number (directly without going through the jackpot) Time saving state to transition) is collectively referred to as normal working hours. In the twentieth control example, when there are one or more reserved balls of the second special symbol at the time when the normal time saving ends, until the second special symbol reserved balls are completely digested in the normal state after the normal time saving ends. It is configured to execute the effect mode indicating the end of the normal working hours state by using the period of. It should be noted that, in the normal time-saving state, by continuing to hit to the right, almost, when the normal time-saving state ends, the second special symbol holding ball is accumulated up to the upper limit number (4 pieces). Drawing 651 (a) is a figure showing an example of the production mode (ending production for normal time saving state) which shows the end of this normal time saving state.

As shown in FIG. 651(a), when the normal time-saving state ends, a character 801 imitating a rabbit appears in the central portion of the main display area Dm until the second special symbol holding ball is digested. A display mode in which the character 801 is drooping and tears are displayed, and the characters "-END-" are displayed above the character 801. FIG. Further, the characters "Chance Time End..." are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. These display modes allow the player to easily understand that the normal time saving state has completely ended. In addition, as shown in FIG. 651 (a), during the execution of the ending effect for the normal time saving state, in a relatively narrow range (range difficult for the player to recognize) in the upper right of the main display area Dm, the second special symbol is configured to perform a variable display of

Although not shown, if the second special symbol lottery hits a big hit during the execution of the ending production for the normal time saving state (normal time saving end production), a character 809 imitating an angel in the big hit change Appears to notify the rabbit character 801 of the big win, which has a relatively short duration. Also, when the second special symbol reserved ball does not exist at the end of the normal time saving state, and only the first special symbol reserved ball exists, the variable display period based on the first special symbol reserved ball Use to control to execute the ending effect for the normal time saving state. Furthermore, when neither the reserved ball of the first special pattern nor the reserved ball of the second special pattern exists at the end of the normal time reduction, the normal time reduction end performance is started at the end of the normal time reduction, and the lottery of the new special pattern is executed. It is configured to terminate the ending effect for the normal time saving state (normal time saving end effect). Thus, the ending effect for the normal time saving state (normal time saving end effect) can be executed regardless of the number of held balls at the end of the normal time saving state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 651(b), after the end of the normal time saving, until the lottery of the special symbol ends 20 times (and after the end of the normal time saving end effect) will be described. FIG. 651(b) is a diagram showing an effect mode after the end of the normal time saving until the lottery of the special symbols ends 20 times (and after the end of the normal time saving end effect). Here, the details will be described later, but in this 21st control example, the fluctuation time when the first special symbol is out during the period from the end of the normal time saving to the end of the special symbol lottery 20 times. The variation pattern scenario is set so that the rate of selecting a short variation time (for example, 5 seconds) is greatly increased (the rate of selection of a variation time of 15 seconds or more is greatly reduced). In other words, by making it difficult to select a long variation time due to a deviation, the expectation of winning a big hit or a short time pattern winning is relatively increased when the variation time is relatively long. While this special variation pattern scenario is set (after the end of normal time saving, until the lottery of 20 special symbols is completed), as shown in FIG. A production mode in which a simulated character 801 climbs a rocky mountain is displayed, and above the character 801, the characters "~training zone~" are displayed. In addition, a character saying "A big chance with reach occurrence!?" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. Depending on the contents of these displays, if a special fluctuation pattern scenario is set (a special production mode is set) and a long fluctuation time is set (a fluctuation type that causes reach is selected) It is possible to easily make the player understand that the degree of expectation for the big win is higher than usual.

Figure 652 is a production mode in the case where the transition condition to the normal time saving state is established again while the special production mode (training zone production) is set (or reaches the ceiling lottery number of times or wins the time saving pattern) It is the figure which showed an example. FIG. 652 illustrates a case where the ceiling lottery number of times is reached and 100 times of time saving number of times is given. As shown in FIG. 652, when the conditions for shifting to the normal time-saving state are established in the special production mode (training zone production), in the main display area Dm, the character 801 climbs the rocky mountain and reaches the top of the rocky mountain. A production is executed. In addition, a display mode is set in which the same cloud as the rabbit-like character 801 staying in the production during the chance time spreads around the top of the rocky mountain. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "Get 100 chance times!" are displayed. With these display contents, it is possible to make the player easily understand that the normal time saving state is entered.

Next, with reference to FIG. 653, regarding the transition of the effect mode before and after the normal time saving state ends, the case where the time saving state ends by the end of the 250th special symbol fluctuation display after the big hit will be described as an example. . As shown in FIG. 653, when the normal time saving state ends in the 250th special symbol lottery after the big hit, the 19th control described above as the effect mode in the 250th (that is, the last in the normal time saving state) variable display effect As in the example, a variable display effect is executed with an effect mode (see FIG. 621) indicating the end of the chance time (time saving state). In addition, when the last variable display performance in the normal time-saving state ends and the game state in which the drawing of the second special pattern is likely to be executed by hitting to the right ends, the second special pattern that has been reserved during the normal time-saving state is reserved. Using the period until all the variation display based on the sphere is completed, the ending effect of the normal time saving state (see FIG. 651(a)) is executed. Thereby, it is possible to emphasize that the normal time saving state has ended. Although the details will be described later, as a variation pattern scenario after the normal time saving ends, the number of times of lottery of special symbols after the time saving ends is in the range of 1 to 4 times, the variation time of the second special symbol is 1 second is configured to be immobilized at Therefore, when the second special symbol holding ball is out, the ending effect of the normal time saving state is executed in the production period of the second special symbol holding ball number × 1 second, so the normal time saving state The ending effect of is 4 seconds at maximum (situation in which 4 pending are accumulated).

Also, as shown in FIG. 653, when the second special symbol holding ball is completely consumed and the ending effect of the normal time saving state ends, the training zone effect indicating that it is a special effect mode is executed. This training zone production continues until the lottery of 20 special symbols is completed after the end of the normal time saving state. During the 20 fluctuation times during which this training zone production is executed, a fluctuation type with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds or more (variation time when reach production occurs) is selected when the first special symbol lottery is lost. significantly lower than normal. In other words, when the ready-to-win effect occurs, the degree of expectation for a big win is significantly higher than usual, so that the player can be expected to expect the ready-to-win effect to occur more strongly. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, since the game characteristics are different from usual (game characteristics that greatly increase the expectation of reach production), it is possible to make the player feel novelty, and while the training zone production is being performed, It can make you want to continue the game. Therefore, quitting the game immediately after the normal time saving state ends can be suppressed, and the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. When the lottery for the special symbols is completed 20 times and the training zone effect is completed, the state shifts to a state in which the effect for the normal mode is executed.

In this way, in the twenty-first control example, with reference to a dedicated variation pattern scenario (after the end of the time saving end table 202uj3 (see FIG. 657) to be described later), the variation pattern selection table is identified By setting the scenario), after the normal time-saving state ends and shifts to the normal state, the execution period of the ending production of the normal time-saving state is secured, or after the second special symbol holding ball is digested. , It is possible to shift to a special production mode (a game mode in which the expectation of a big hit jumps when a ready-to-win production occurs). As a result, the player's interest in the game after the normal time-saving state ends can be further improved.

In this case, without considering the remaining number of times until the ceiling lottery number, because it is configured to set a dedicated variation pattern scenario simply based on the end of the normal time saving state, as a detriment, the above-mentioned 19th control example , it is difficult to select a special variation pattern for ceiling fanning when the number of lotteries after the jackpot ends (or after the power is turned on with RAM clearing operation) is a specific number of times (350, 400, and 450). becomes. This can be arbitrarily selected depending on which control is emphasized by the developer.

<Electrical configuration in the 21st control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 654(a), the details of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the twenty-first control example will be described. FIG. 654(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the twenty-first control example. As shown in FIG. 654(a), the ROM 202 in the 21st control example replaces the variation pattern selection 19 table 202sb with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the 19th control example described above (see FIG. 626(a)). The only differences are that a fluctuation pattern selection 21 table 202ub is provided and that a fluctuation pattern scenario 21 table 202uj is provided instead of the fluctuation pattern scenario 19 table 202sj. Since other configurations are the same as those of the ROM 202 in the nineteenth control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

First, with reference to FIG. 655(a), details of the variation pattern selection 21 table 202ub in the twenty-first control example will be described. FIG. 655(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection 21 table 202ub in the twenty-first control example. As shown in FIG. 655 (a), the variation pattern selection 21 table 202ub in the twenty-first control example is a time-saving for the variation pattern selection 19 table 202sb (see FIG. 628 (a)) in the nineteenth control example described above. The difference is that an end notification table 202ub5 and an end time table 202ub6 are added. Since the rest of the configuration is the same as the variation pattern selection 19 table 202sb in the nineteenth control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

First, with reference to FIG. 655(b), the details of the time saving end notification table 202ub5, which is one of the data tables constituting the variation pattern selection 21 table 202ub in the twenty-first control example, will be described. This time-saving end notification table 202ub5 is a variation pattern selection table that is referred to within a range of 4 times or less for the number of special symbol lotteries after the end of the normal time-saving state, and is the second special symbol accumulated at the end of the normal time-saving state. 2 is a data table for fixing the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection to 1 second when digesting the retained ball.

FIG. 655(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the time saving end notification table 202ub5. As shown in FIG. 655(b), the time saving end notification table 202ub5 is associated with the range of values of the variation type counter CS1 corresponding to various variation patterns for each type of special symbol and lottery result of the special symbol. ing. Specifically, when the type of the special symbol is the first special symbol, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of 0 to 149 for the special symbol lottery result "jackpot", and the variation time is 15 seconds. A normal reach hit is defined in correspondence, and a super reach hit in the range of 150 to 198 with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is defined in correspondence. In addition, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is "special winning" and "small winning", normal reach winning with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds is defined in association with the entire range that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take. It is In addition, for the lottery result of the special symbol "time saving symbol winning", the normal reach with the variation time of 15 seconds is defined in association with the entire range that the variation type counter CS1 can take. Furthermore, for the lottery result "out" of the first special symbol, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of 0 to 196 and the short deviation of the variation time of 5 seconds is associated with the range of 197, 198. is defined in association with normal reach deviation with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds. Therefore, when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed in a situation in which the time saving end notification table 202ub5 is referred to, the rate of selecting the variation type with a variation time of 15 seconds or more in the case of loss is extremely low. (becomes 2/199). Therefore, when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, it is possible to greatly improve the expectation for the big win just by generating the ready-to-win effect.

Also, as shown in FIG. 655(b), when the type of the special symbol is the second special symbol, for the lottery result "jackpot" of the special symbol, for the entire range that the variation type counter CS1 can take Therefore, a short win with a variation time of 5 seconds is defined in association with it. On the other hand, with respect to the second special symbol lottery result "out", "ultra-short out" with a variation time of 1 second is defined in association with the entire possible range of the variation type counter CS1. For this reason, after the end of the normal time-saving state, when the lottery of special symbols within four times is executed by the second special symbol, when the lottery result becomes a big hit, a fluctuation time of 5 seconds is always set, and it is not lost. Then, a variation time of 1 second is always set. As a result, it is possible to fix the digestion time when digesting the second special symbol holding balls accumulated at the end of the normal time saving state, so that the production period of the ending production after the end of the normal time saving state can be secured. can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 655(c), the details of the table 202ub6 for after the end of time saving, which is one of the data tables constituting the variation pattern selection 21 table 202ub in the twenty-first control example, will be described. This table 202ub6 for after the end of time saving is a variation pattern selection table referred to in the range of 5 times to 20 times for the number of lotteries of special symbols after the end of the normal time saving state, and the degree of expectation of a big hit when a ready-to-win effect occurs. This is a data table that is referenced to form a special performance mode that greatly improves over normal performances. As shown in FIG. 655(c), the table 202ub for after the end of time saving is defined by the first special symbol in the time saving end notification table 202ub5 (see FIG. 655(b)). It is set as a prescribed content common to the second special symbol. Therefore, when the table 202ub6 for after the end of time saving is referred to, the rate of selecting the variation type with a variation time of 15 seconds or more in the deviation of the special symbol is extremely low (to 2/199). Therefore, when the lottery of the special symbols is executed, novel game characteristics can be realized which can greatly improve the expectation for the big win just by generating the ready-to-win performance. As a result, even after the normal time-saving state is terminated, the player can be made to think that the game will be continued at least until the lottery of the special symbols is executed 20 times, so that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. can be done.

Next, with reference to FIG. 656(a), details of the variation pattern scenario 21 table 202uj in the twenty-first control example will be described. FIG. 656(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern scenario 21 table 202uj in the twenty-first control example. As shown in FIG. 656(a), the variation pattern scenario 21 table 202uj in the 21st control example includes a table 202uj1 for after winning, which is a data table that defines a variation pattern scenario set with the end of the jackpot as a trigger, and a ceiling After reaching the ceiling table 202uj2, which is a data table that defines a variation pattern scenario set when the number of lotteries is reached, and a normal time saving state (time saving state based on time saving pattern winning, and time saving based on reaching the ceiling lottery number It is configured at least with a table 202uj3 for after the end of time saving, which is a data table that defines a variation pattern scenario set when the state) ends. First, with reference to FIG. 656(b), the details of the post-win table 202uj1 will be described. FIG. 656(b) is a block diagram showing the defined contents of the post-hit table 202uj1.

As shown in FIG. 656(b), when the current gaming state is the normal state, the number of special symbol lotteries (the value of the scenario counter 203ua) is 1 to 349, 351 to 399, 401 to 449, and 451. A normal 19 table 202sb1 is defined in association with the range of .about.500, and a table 202sb3 for ceiling fanning is defined in association with the special symbol lottery numbers of 350, 400, and 450. On the other hand, in the situation where the current game state is a game state other than the normal state, the number of times of lottery of special symbols (the value of the scenario counter 203ua) is set for the entire range of 1 to 500. are defined in association with each other. Therefore, after the end of the jackpot, if the game state is the normal state, a special variation pattern for ceiling tilting is selected each time the remaining number of times until the ceiling lottery number reaches 150 times, 100 times, and 50 times. By doing so, it is possible to execute an effect for ceiling fanning (see FIGS. 624 and 625).

Next, with reference to FIG. 656(c), details of the table 202uj2 for after reaching the ceiling will be described. FIG. 656(c) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the table 202uj2 for after reaching the ceiling. As shown in FIG. 656(c), only scenarios for game states other than the normal state are associated with the after-ceiling table 202j2. In other words, the normal working hours state of the number of working hours set based on the number of times of ceiling lottery reaches ends, or the normal working hours state set by winning the working hours pattern during the normal working hours state ends. Only scenarios are specified. This is, as described above, at the timing when the normal working hours state ends (that is, the timing of moving to the normal state), the variation pattern scenario for the normal working hours end (variation pattern scenario referring to the table 202uj3 for after the working hours ending) This is because there is no possibility of referring to the post-ceiling table 202uj2 in the normal state because it is switched.

As shown in FIG. 656(c), in a situation where the current game state is a game state other than the normal state, the number of special symbol lotteries (the value of the scenario counter 203ua) is 1, and the ceiling reaching table 202sb4 are defined in association with each other, and 19 tables 202sb2 for probability variation/time reduction are defined in association with the range of the number of lotteries of special symbols from 2 to 500. Therefore, as in the 19th control example, after reaching the ceiling lottery number of times and being set to the time saving state, the fluctuation time in the first fluctuation display can be fixed to 30 seconds in the case of loss. It is possible to sufficiently secure a presentation period for performing various notifications to be executed based on entering into the time saving state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 657, the details of the table 202uj3 for after the end of time saving described above will be described. FIG. 657 is a diagram showing the defined contents of the table 202uj3 for after the end of time saving. As shown in FIG. 657, in the situation where the current game state is the normal state, the number of lotteries for special symbols (the value of the scenario counter 203ua) is in the range of 1 to 4, and the time saving end notification table 202ub5 ( 655 (b)) is associated and described, and the number of times of lottery of special symbols (value of scenario counter 203ua) is in the range of 5 to 20, table 202ub6 after the end of time saving (see FIG. 655 (c)) are defined in association with each other, and the normal 19 table 202sb1 is defined in association with the range of the number of lotteries of special symbols after 21 times. On the other hand, in a situation where the current game state is other than the normal state, the 19 table 202sb2 for probability variation/shortening of working hours is defined in association with each other regardless of the number of lotteries of special symbols.

By setting a variation pattern scenario that refers to the table 202uj3 for after the end of the time saving state after the end of the normal time saving state, the period from the end of the normal time saving state to the digestion of all the holding balls of the second special symbol. It is possible to execute the ending production of the normal time saving state in the period. In addition, a special mode can be formed in which the degree of expectation for a big win when the ready-to-win performance is generated is greatly improved during the period from the end of the normal time-saving state to the end of the lottery of 20 special patterns. Therefore, after the end of the normal time-saving state, it is possible to make the player think to continue the game at least until the lottery of 20 times of special symbols is completed, so that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 654(b), the details of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the twenty-first control example will be described. FIG. 654(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the twenty-first control example. As shown in FIG. 654(b), the RAM 203 in this 21st control example has a scenario counter 203ua and a normal time reduction flag 203ub added to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the 19th control example described above. They differ only in respect.

Similar to the scenario counter 203tb in the twentieth control example described above, the scenario counter 203ua is a counter for determining the current number of lotteries for special symbols when selecting the variation pattern table corresponding to the variation pattern scenario. be. That is, in the 21st control example, similarly to the 20th control example described above, the special figure lottery counter 203la and the scenario counter 203tb are provided separately, and control to update them separately is adopted. Specifically, the value of the scenario counter 203tb in the twenty-first control example is reset to 0 when various variation pattern scenarios are set (see S8323A in FIG. 660 and S38131A in FIG. 661), and the special symbol variation pattern is updated by incrementing the value by one (S38263 in FIG. 659). The scenario counter 203ua is referenced to identify the corresponding variation pattern selection table from the currently set variation pattern scenario.

The normal time-saving flag 203ub is a flag indicating whether the time-saving state is the time-saving state set after the end of the jackpot or the normal time-saving state (time-saving state based on the time-saving pattern winning or time-saving state based on the ceiling lottery number of times reached). . If this normal time saving flag 203ub is on, it means that it is in the normal time saving state, and if it is off, it means that it is in the time saving state set after the end of the jackpot. The initial value of the normal working hours flag 203ub is set to OFF, and is set to ON when shifting to the normal working hours saving state (see S38132A in FIG. 661). In addition, it is set to OFF at the end of the normal working hours state (see S8322A in FIG. 660). When the normal working hours flag 203ub is ON and the working hours saving state ends, it is determined that the normal working hours saving state has ended, and the variation pattern table is reset. That is, it is possible to set a variable pattern scenario that can realize the ending effect of the normal time-saving state and the effect mode in which the reach effect is highly expected, so that the player quits the game after the normal time-saving state ends. Can be configured as hard as you want. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 658, the details of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the twenty-first control example will be described. FIG. 658 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in the twenty-first control example. As shown in FIG. 658, the RAM 223 in the twenty-first control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the nineteenth control example described above (see FIG. 630) only in that an effect mode flag 223ua is added. there is Since other configurations are the same as those of the RAM 223 in the nineteenth control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

The effect mode flag 223ua is a flag indicating the current effect mode. When determining the variable display mode according to this variation pattern command, the variable display mode corresponding to the performance mode indicated by this performance mode flag 223ua is selected.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the 21st control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the twenty-first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 659 to 662. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 659, the details of the special symbol variation pattern selection process 21 (S30261A) in the twenty-first control example will be described. This special symbol variation pattern selection process 21 (S30261A) is a process executed instead of the special symbol variation pattern selection process 13 (see FIG. 454) in the 19th control example (and 13th control example) described above. Similar to the symbol variation pattern selection process 13 (see FIG. 454), this is a process for setting a variation pattern according to the result of the lottery when a special symbol lottery is executed. FIG. 659 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation pattern selection process 21 (S30261A).

Of the special symbol variation pattern selection process 21 (see FIG. 659) in the 21st control example, in each process of S8201, S8203, and S8205 to S8209, the special symbol variation pattern selection process 19 ( 454), and the same processes as the processes of S8201, S8203, and S8205 to S8209 are executed. Also, in the special symbol variation pattern selection process 21 (see FIG. 659) in the twenty-first control example, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery result is a big hit in the process of S8201 (S8201: Yes), the big hit type selection 16 The jackpot type this time is determined from the table 202pd (S38261A), and the process proceeds to S8203.

In addition, in the special symbol variation pattern selection process 21 (see FIG. 659) in the twenty-first control example, in the process of S8209, when it is determined that the lottery result corresponds to the time saving symbol winning (S8209: Yes), time saving per The type selection 19 table 202si (see FIG. 629(a)) is referenced to specify the type per time saving (S38262A), and the process proceeds to S8203.

Furthermore, in the special symbol variation pattern selection process 21 (see FIG. 659) in the twenty-first control example, when the process of S8203 ends, the value of the scenario counter 203ua is updated by adding 1 (S38263A), and then, The currently set variation pattern scenario is read based on the data in the scenario storage area 203sb (S38264A). When the processing of S38264A ends, based on the read variation pattern scenario, the current game state, the lottery result of the special symbol, and the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the value of the scenario counter 203ua are specified (S38265A), and the processing is started. The process proceeds to S8205.

Next, update processing 21 (S241A) in the twenty-first control example will be described with reference to FIG. This update process 21 (S241A) is a process executed in place of the update process 16 (see FIG. 525) in the nineteenth control example (and the sixteenth control example) described above. Similarly, it is a process for updating the game state when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped.

Of the updating process 21 (see FIG. 660) in the 21st control example, the processes of S8301 to S8307 and S8313 are the same as those of the updating process 16 (see FIG. 525) in the 19th control example (and the 16th control example). The same processes as those of S8301 to S8307 and S8313 are executed. In addition, in the update process 21 (see FIG. 660) in the twenty-first control example, when the process of S8306 is completed, it is determined whether or not the normal time reduction flag 203ub is ON (S8321), and when it is determined that it is ON (S8321: Yes), then store the data indicating the scenario for identifying the variation pattern selection table with reference to the table 202uj3 for after the end of time saving to the scenario storage area 203sb (S8322A). When the processing of S8322A ends, the normal time saving flag 203ub is set to OFF (S8323), the value of the scenario counter 203sa is reset to 0 (S8324A), and the processing proceeds to S8313. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S8321A that the normal working hours reduction flag 203ub is off, the process proceeds to S8307.

In addition, in the updating process 21 (see FIG. 660) in the twenty-first control example, when the process of S8307 ends, the ceiling determination process 21 is executed instead of the ceiling determination process 19 (see FIG. 631) in the nineteenth control example. (S8325), and the process ends. The details of this ceiling determination process 21 (S8325) will be described later with reference to FIG.

By executing this update process 21 (see FIG. 660), when the normal time saving state ends, it is possible to set a variation pattern scenario for after the time saving end, so in the ending production and reach production of the normal time saving state It is possible to form a special mode or the like that raises expectations when developed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 661, details of the ceiling determination process 21 (S8325A) described above will be described. This ceiling determination process 21 (S8325A) is, as described above, a process executed in place of the ceiling determination process 19 (see FIG. 631) in the nineteenth control example, and is similar to the ceiling determination process 19 (see FIG. 631). , It is a process for determining whether or not the ceiling lottery number of times is reached from the lottery number of special symbols, and generating a time saving state when the ceiling lottery number is reached.

Of the ceiling determination processing 21 (see FIG. 661) in the twenty-first control example, in each of the processing of S38101 to S38105, S38112A to S38114A, S38117A, S38121A to S38123A, and S38126A, the ceiling determination processing 19 in the above-described nineteenth control example The same processes as those of S38101 to S38105, S38112A to S38114A, S38117A, S38121A to S38123A, and S38126A in (see FIG. 631) are executed.

In addition, in the ceiling determination process 21 (see FIG. 661) in the twenty-first control example, when the process of S38114A ends, the value of the special figure lottery counter 203la and the value of the scenario counter 203ua are cleared to 0 (S38131), The ceiling time reduction standby flag 203sa and the normal time reduction flag 203ub are set to ON (S38132), and the process proceeds to S38126A.

Next, with reference to FIG. 662, details of the start-up processing in the twenty-first control example will be described. This start-up process, like the start-up process in the 19th control example described above, is a process executed based on power-on of the pachinko machine 10 . FIG. 662 is a flow chart showing the start-up process in this twenty-first control example.

Of the start-up processing in the twenty-first control example, S1701-S1712, S1721A, S1751A, S1752A, S31701A, and S31702A are the steps S1701-S1712, S1712, S1712 and S1712 of the start-up processing in the nineteenth control example (see FIG. 632), respectively. The same processing as each of S1721A, S1751A, S1752A, S31701A and S31702A is executed.

In addition, in the start-up process (see FIG. 662) in the twenty-first control example, when the process of S1712 ends, the special figure lottery counter 203la, the scenario counter 203ua, and the scenario storage area 203sb other than the special figure lottery counter 203la, the scenario counter 203ua, and the scenario storage area 203sb Clear the storage area (S1761A), set the initial value for storage areas other than the special lottery counter 203la, the scenario counter 203ua, and the scenario storage area 203sb in the RAM 203 (S1762A), and proceed to S1710. Transition. As a result, even when the power is turned on with the RAM clearing operation, it is possible to maintain the remaining number of lotteries up to the number of ceiling lotteries, the progress of the variation pattern scenario, and the like.

<Regarding the control process of the sound lamp control device in the 21st control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the twenty-first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 663 and 664. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 663, the rendering mode setting process 21 (S5011A) in the twenty-first control example will be described. This effect mode setting process 21 (S5011A) is a process that is executed in place of the effect mode setting process 19 (see FIG. 634) in the nineteenth control example described above. 634), when a variation pattern command is received, it is a process for setting a variation display mode according to the variation type notified by the received variation pattern command.

In the processing of S34401, S34403, S34407, and S34431A to S34448A in the effect mode setting process 21 (see FIG. 663) in the twenty-first control example, the effect mode setting process 19 in the nineteenth control example (see FIG. 634) , S34401, S34403, S34407, and S34431A to S34448A are executed. In addition, in the effect mode setting process 21 (see FIG. 663) in the present 21st control example, when the process of S34447A ends, the effect mode flag 223ua is updated to the value for the ending effect of the normal time saving state (S34451A), and the process to S34407.

Next, with reference to FIG. 664, the details of the ceiling-related effect setting process 21 (S34561A) in the twenty-first control example will be described. This ceiling-related effect setting process 21 (S34561A) is a process executed instead of the ceiling-related effect setting process (see FIG. 637) in the nineteenth control example described above, and the ceiling-related effect setting process (see FIG. 637) in the nineteenth control example. 637), this is the process for setting the effect mode related to the ceiling.

In the processes of S34571A and S34573A to S34575A of the ceiling-related effect setting process 21 (see FIG. 664) in the twenty-first control example, the ceiling-related effect setting process (see FIG. 664) in the above-described nineteenth control example. The same processes as S34571A and S34573A to S34575A are executed. In addition, in the ceiling-related effect setting process 21 (see FIG. 664) in the twenty-first control example, when it is determined in the process of S34571A that the current variation pattern is not a variation pattern for ceiling tilting (S34571A: No), reception The effect mode corresponding to the variation pattern and the effect mode indicated by the effect mode flag 223ua is determined (S34581A), and it is determined whether or not it is time to switch the effect mode (S34582A). Specifically, the production mode is a mode for ending production after the end of the normal time saving state, and when the second special symbol holding ball becomes 0, it is updated to the state indicating the training zone, and the normal time saving state When the number of lotteries for the special symbols reaches 20 after the end of , the state is updated to show the normal presentation mode.

In the processing of S34582A, if it is determined that it is time to switch the production mode (S34582A: Yes), the production mode flag 223ua is updated to a state corresponding to the production mode after switching (S34583A), and this processing ends. . On the other hand, in the process of S34582A, when it is determined that it is not the switching timing of the effect mode (S34582A: No), the process of S34583A is skipped and the process is terminated as it is.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-first control example, the time saving state set based on reaching the ceiling lottery number of times, and the time saving state set based on winning the time saving pattern (normal time saving Triggered by the end of the state), the variable pattern scenario is switched, and the variable display mode set according to the variable time is also changed to form a special performance mode. By configuring in this way, when the time-saving state set without a big hit ends (the advantageous time-saving state ends without winning any prize balls), a special production mode is formed. , it is possible to relieve the disappointment of the player and make him/her want to continue the game until the end of the special performance mode. As a result, it is possible to improve the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 after the end of the time saving state.

In addition, in the 21st control example, at the end of the jackpot, at the time of reaching the ceiling lottery number of times, and at the end of the normal time saving state, the variation pattern scenario is reset, but it is not limited to this. Even when the time saving state set after the end of the jackpot ends, the variation pattern scenario may be reset. By configuring in this way, even when the time saving state set after the end of the jackpot ends, a special performance mode can be formed, so the game is continued while the special performance mode is set. It can be configured to make it easy to think about it. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be further improved. In addition, since the end timing of the time-saving state set after the jackpot is fixed (ends 100 times after the jackpot ends), the remaining number of times until the number of times of the ceiling lottery at the time the time-saving state and probability change state ends is every time. Common (400 times). Therefore, in the variation pattern scenario set when the time saving state after the jackpot ends, the number of lotteries after the scenario set is 250 times, 300 times, and 350 times, and the variation pattern table for ceiling tilting (ceiling tilting table 202sb3), it is possible to execute ceiling fanning effects at timings of 150 times, 100 times, and 50 times remaining until the ceiling lottery number. That is, the same behavior as in the 19th control example and the 21st control example described above can be realized.

In the 19th control example to the 21st control example described above, when the power is turned on with the RAM clearing operation, initialization of part of the data in the RAM 203 is avoided. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the address for storing data that avoids being initialized is fixed. That is, the scenario storage area 203sb and the special lottery counter 203la whose initialization is avoided in the 19th control example, the scenario storage area 203sb and the scenario counter 203tb whose initialization is avoided in the 20th control example, and in the 21st control example The special figure lottery counter 203la, the scenario storage area 203sb, and the scenario counter 203ua, which are avoidable from initialization, may be stored in a fixed address range of the RAM 203. When configured in this way, when developing a pachinko machine 10 with other specifications based on the pachinko machine 10 with one specification among the specifications of at least the 19th control example to the 21st control example, the program can be diverted. can be made easier. In other words, when the program corresponding to the start-up processing (see FIGS. 637, 647, and 662) of the main controller 110 is rewritten in accordance with the specifications of the diversion destination, the power is turned on accompanied by the RAM clearing operation. Since the address range for which initialization is avoided can be made common, there is no need to change the program for this part, and the effort of the program developer can be reduced. In addition, since it becomes unnecessary to change the program, it is possible to prevent the address from being initialized from being rewritten to an erroneous address at the stage of program development, so that the pachinko machine 10 can be prevented from malfunctioning. .

<22nd control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 665 to 734. FIG. Conventionally, some machines have a light amount adjustment function that allows the player to operate a selection button (operating means) to adjust the light amount of the pachinko machine 10 (the brightness of the LED or the brightness of the backlight of the liquid crystal display). . By using this light amount adjustment function, it is possible to perform a variable effect for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, a jackpot game effect during the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won, and a state effect for indicating the set game state. Since the player can adjust the brightness (the brightness of the decorative LED and the brightness of the backlight of the liquid crystal display used as the third pattern display device 81) to any brightness, the player desires. It was able to provide a comfortable performance. However, in the conventional pachinko machine 10, it is common to adjust the light amount during the standby period (the period during which the special symbol lottery is not executed and the winning game is not executed). At the time of adjusting the light intensity using the adjustment function, the brightness of the decorative LED that emits light and the degree of change in the brightness of the backlight of the liquid crystal display on which the standby screen is displayed are visually checked to achieve the desired light intensity. It was an adjustment.

Here, in recent years, there is an attempt to save energy in the pachinko machine 10 by suppressing the overall light intensity of the pachinko machine 10 while a standby screen (demonstration screen) is displayed when the player is not playing a game. Also, even when the player is playing the game, by varying the amount of light of the pachinko machine 10 as a whole in correspondence with the degree of expectation for the big win with respect to the performance to be executed, it is possible to execute a sharp performance for the player. At the same time, the light intensity of the whole pachinko machine 10 is increased at the timing to make the player pay attention to the content of the performance being executed (for example, the timing to inform the presence or absence of the winning of the jackpot or the timing to inform the content of the winning game). Some of them are constructed so as to prevent the player from overlooking the performance.

In the conventional pachinko machine 10 configured in this manner, the light amount adjustment operation is performed based on the light amount of the pachinko machine 10 in the standby screen, that is, the light amount different from that during the game (set lower than during the game). Therefore, when the game is actually executed, there is a problem that the player notices that the desired light amount and the set light amount are different, and causes the player to perform the light amount adjustment operation again. rice field.

On the other hand, in the 22nd control example, when the light intensity adjustment operation is performed during the standby screen, the decorative movable object (sword object Ym3) provided with a relatively high-brightness LED is moved to the light intensity adjustment position. , and the amount of light can be adjusted while the LED of the decorative movable accessory (sword accessory Ym3) is illuminated. In other words, even when the game is not executed, the light amount can be adjusted by using the decorative movable accessory (sword accessory Ym3) used for the variable presentation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to facilitate appropriate adjustment to the amount of light desired by the player.

In addition, in the twenty-second control example, the decorative movable role object (sword role object Ym3) is changed to a variable position (position covering the display surface of the third pattern display device 81) that is variable in the actual variable effect. This state is defined as the environment adjustment position, and the light emitting means (LED) provided in the decorative movable accessory (sword role Ym3) positioned at the environment adjustment position is configured to emit light.

In the conventional pachinko machine 10, as a mode of variable performance for showing the result of the special symbol lottery, the contents of the variable performance are the timing of notifying the presence or absence of winning the big win and the mode of performance with a high expectation of winning the big win. At the timing of informing whether or not to switch, the movable accessory for decoration is moved to make the player pay attention to the variable performance being executed. In this case, it is common to perform a lighting effect by increasing the amount of light emitted from decorative lighting means (LED) provided in the pachinko machine 10 .

In other words, according to the twenty-second control example, the same state as the state in which the decorative movable accessory (sword accessory Ym3) is moved is simulated in the actual variation effect, and the light amount adjustment operation is performed in that state. is configured to be executable. By configuring in this way, in order to suppress the execution of an effect that is too dazzling, the light amount adjustment operation is performed, and the effect with a relatively high light amount is used as a reference for the player who is trying to reduce the light amount. Since it is possible to adjust the amount of light, it is possible to easily adjust the amount of light to the amount desired by the player.

In addition, in this 22nd control example, not only during the standby screen, but also during the execution of the special symbol variation and while the jackpot game is being executed, that is, the game in which the player is executing the game The light quantity adjustment operation is executable even during the period, and when the light quantity adjustment operation is executed during the game period, the decorative movable accessory (sword accessory Ym3) is moved to the environment adjustment position. It is configured so that the light quantity adjustment is executed without any need. By configuring in this way, the movable accessory for decoration (sword role Ym3) is moved based on the light amount adjustment operation executed during the game period, and the movable accessory for decoration (sword Ym3) is moved as part of the variable effect. It is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the accessory Ym3) has moved.

Here, the player operates the operation handle 21 while the player is performing the light amount adjustment operation while the standby screen is being displayed, that is, the decorative movable accessory (sword role Ym3) is positioned at the environment adjustment position. However, when the game ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64, the first special symbol variation starts during the light amount adjustment operation, and the executed second symbol is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. An event occurs in which a variation effect corresponding to one special symbol variation is executed.

In this case, if the state in which the decorative movable role object (sword object Ym3) is positioned at the environment adjustment position is continued until the light amount adjustment operation is completed, the decorative movable role object (sword object Ym3) positioned at the environment adjustment position There is a problem that the object (sword object Ym3) overlaps with the variable effect being executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, providing an effect that is difficult for the player to understand. In addition, since the position where the decorative movable accessory (sword Ym3) can move is set as the environment adjustment position as part of the variable performance, the decorative movable accessory positioned at the environment adjustment position based on the light amount adjustment operation (Sword Ym3) has a problem of misleading the player if it is movable as a variable effect.

Therefore, in the twenty-second control example, when the special symbol variation is started (when the game is executed) while the decorative movable accessory (sword accessory Ym3) is positioned at the environment adjustment position, The decorative movable accessory (sword accessory Ym3) is configured to move from the environment adjustment position to the initial position (storage position) while continuing the light amount adjustment operation.

By constructing in this way, even when the special pattern variation is started while the light quantity adjusting operation is being performed in the standby screen, the player can be provided with a performance without discomfort.

More specifically, when the movable role for decoration (sword role Ym3) is moved from the environment adjustment position to the initial position (storage position) based on the execution of the special symbol variation, the decoration Execute extinguishing control to extinguish the light-emitting means (LED) of the decorative movable accessory (sword role Ym3) that has been illuminated for checking the amount of light before moving the movable accessory (sword role Ym3), It is configured to execute the movement control to move the decorative movable accessory (sword accessory Ym3) to the initial position in a state where all the LEDs are turned off.

With this configuration, the light-emitting means (LED) of the movable decorative accessory is lit while the movable decorative accessory (sword role Ym3) is being moved from the environment adjustment position to the initial position. Since it can be set to a non-movable state, the player can easily grasp that the decorative movable accessory (sword accessory Ym3) is not moving as part of the variable presentation.

Further, in the twenty-second control example, the light amount adjustment operation executed in the state where the decorative movable accessory (sword accessory Ym3) is positioned at the environment adjustment position is completed, and the decorative movable accessory (sword accessory Ym3) is completed. Ym3) is stored in the initial position (storage position), it is possible to set a period during which the sword object Ym3 is not moved for 10 seconds thereafter.

Specifically, when the light amount adjustment operation is executed again immediately after the light amount adjustment operation is completed in the standby screen, the light amount adjustment operation is performed without moving the decorative movable accessory (sword role item Ym3). A light amount adjustment operation is executed in a manner in which the screen is displayed. Further, when the special symbol variation is started (when the game is executed) while the decorative movable accessory (sword accessory Ym3) is positioned at the environment adjustment position, the special symbol variation is dealt with. As the production pattern of the variable production, a production pattern in which the decorative movable accessory (sword accessory Ym3) is not moved is determined.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the movement control of the decorative movable accessory (sword role Ym3) from being executed in a short period of time, so that the sword role Ym3 is frequently moved. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the sword object Ym3 breaks down. In addition, the movement control for the next sword object Ym3 is executed before the sword object Ym3 becomes movable, and the movement period of the sword object Ym3 may be shifted or the normal movement may not be performed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of situations in which execution is not performed.

Next, in each of the above-described control examples, a reserved pattern indicating the number of reserved balls obtained is displayed on the liquid crystal screen, and a reservation corresponding to the reserved ball is based on the result of pre-reading (preliminary determination) of the lottery result of the reserved ball. By changing the display mode of the symbols, the third symbol display device 81 alone performs an effect (suspended change effect) for informing the player of the result of the prefetching.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the 22nd control example, when this pending change effect is executed, a character other than the pending symbol to be changed displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. It is configured to hide the reserved design. By configuring in this way, it is possible to clarify to the player which reserved symbol is a change target.

More specifically, in the hold change effect in the 22nd control example, two decorative movable accessories (left change accessory Ym1 and right change accessory Ym2, see FIG. 672(b)) are displayed on the display device. The display area in which the reserved symbols are displayed can be covered, and the display area of the reserved symbols can be hidden by the player by changing the position of the decorative movable accessories (change accessories Ym1 and Ym2). It can be divided into visible and invisible parts. As a result, only the display area where the pending symbols to be changed are displayed can be made visible to the player, and the pending symbols to be changed can be easily understood by the player.

Here, conventionally, there is one that executes a hold change effect using a flashy effect to draw the player's attention to the hold change effect. For example, it is an effect of changing the display mode of the reserved design after making the reserved design to be changed intensely emit light. In such a pending change effect, when the pending pattern is displayed in addition to the pending pattern to be changed, the effect of the pending change effect overlaps with the pending pattern displayed adjacent to the pending pattern to be changed. By being displayed, there is a risk that the player may misunderstand the reserved symbol to be changed. If, among the plurality of reserved symbols displayed, it is desirable for the player to change the reserved pattern adjacent to the reserved pattern to be changed (for example, the reserved pattern to be changed is a white reserved pattern (usually reserved pattern ), and the adjacent reserved pattern is a green reserved pattern (a reserved pattern that changes to a red reserved pattern with the highest expectation for a big win when it changes), such a misunderstanding may cause the player to lose weight. There is a risk that the game will make the player happy, leading to a decrease in the player's desire to play.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-second control example, the change roles Ym1 and Ym2 are used in the pending change effect to cover the pending symbols other than the change target displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to clarify to the player which reserved pattern is to be changed, and to prevent the player from misunderstanding which reserved pattern is to be changed.

In addition, in the twenty-second control example, the decorative movable accessories (change accessories Ym1 and Ym2) are placed at the initial position (Fig. 669 ( (See a)), and when the pending change effect is started, the decorative movable accessories (change accessories Ym1 and Ym2) move from the initial position to the action position according to the action scenario.

Specifically, the decorative movable accessories (change accessories Ym1, Ym2) do not directly make the display area where the reserved symbols other than the change target are displayed difficult to see from the initial position, but gradually It is configured to perform the operation of narrowing the visually recognizable reserved symbols from 4 to 2, and from 2 to 1.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting which reserved pattern will change step by step during the period from the start of the reserved change performance to the end of the reserved change performance. Interest in the game can be improved by making the player interested in how the decorative movable accessories (change accessories Ym1 and Ym2) move.

Furthermore, in the twenty-second control example, when a plurality of reserved symbols are displayed, the display mode of the adjacent reserved symbols is reflected in the display mode of the pending symbol to be changed.

More specifically, in this 22nd control example, one color is given from all seven colors (white, blue, yellow, purple, green, red, rainbow) to one reserved symbol, and given The reserved color of the reserved symbol becomes the reserved color. In the pending change effect in the 22nd control example, it is possible to change the pending color of the pending symbol to be changed by transplanting from the pending color of the adjacent pending symbol. Blue", and if the reserved pattern displayed one before is "yellow", by transplanting "yellow" from the previous reserved pattern to the reserved pattern of the change target, the change target is changed to "green", and the previous reserved pattern is changed to "white". In this case, the reserved color "green" is a reserved color that is more likely to be displayed when the expectation of winning a jackpot is higher than the reserved colors "blue" and "white". It is a higher reserved color than white.

On the other hand, if the reserved pattern to be changed is "blue" and the previous reserved pattern is "white", even if the reserved color is transplanted, it cannot change to a higher reserved color, but the change target If the reserved color of the reserved pattern displayed next to the reserved pattern is "yellow", by transplanting "yellow" from the next reserved pattern to the reserved pattern to be changed, the reserved pattern to be changed is " It has a configuration that allows it to be green.

By constructing in this way, even if the reserved color of the displayed reserved pattern is a reserved color with a low degree of expectation for winning the jackpot, it can be changed to a higher reserved color by acquiring a new reserved pattern. It is possible to make the player think that he may be able to do so, and to motivate him to play the game in order to acquire the reserved symbols.

<Regarding the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 22nd control example>
665 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-second control example, FIG. 666 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG.

As shown in FIG. 665, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and a and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12 in the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 665). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 666) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. Balls (game balls) flow down in front of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. In addition, the inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 687) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see Fig. 665). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls which protrudes forward and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 665), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball shooting unit 112a. Also, on the upper surface of the upper plate 17, a production button 22 (see FIG. 668(a)) and a selection switch 600 (see FIG. 668(b)) are provided. The effect button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the effect or background displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 666) to be described later is varied.

The selection switches 600 include, as shown in FIG. 668(b), a determination switch 600a for determining the selection of effects, etc., an up switch 600b for instructing selection in the upward direction, and a right switch for instructing selection in the right direction. 600c, a down switch 600d for instructing selection in the downward direction, and a left switch 600e for instructing selection in the left direction.

The front frame 14 is provided with light-emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, a display lamp 34 having a built-in light-emitting means such as an LED and capable of displaying when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 665).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 666) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chromium, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to create more splendor.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to hit the ball in front of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit in front of the game board 13 with a flying distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 666, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape as seen from the front, and a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls and windmills (movable members 310 are shown). not shown), rails 61, 62, general winning port 63, first winning port 64, second winning port 640, first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device (not shown), normal symbol start It is constructed by assembling a port (through gate) 67, a variable display device unit 80, etc., and its peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 665). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device (not shown), and the variable display device unit 80 are formed on the base plate 60 by router processing. , and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like.

The front center portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 665). Mainly referring to FIG. 666, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

In front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 665). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and a shot is fired). area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 687) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 666) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 666) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37A and 37B having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged at the lower left side of the game area in front view (lower left side in FIG. 666). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 687), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the twenty-second control example, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640. . Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the first The pattern display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability, the time saving mode, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state by the lighting state. Whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state, the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates the round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and depending on the combination of the emission colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when a prize is won in the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 4R probability variable jackpot, and a 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. .

Here, the “10R probability variable jackpot” is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state with special symbols after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds, and the “3R probability variable jackpot” means that the maximum number of rounds is 3. It is a variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state of special symbols after the jackpot of the round. In addition, the "3R time-saving jackpot" shifts to a low-probability state with special symbols after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 3 rounds, and a time-saving state during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). It's about.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special game state It is the state of The high-probability state (during probability variation) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol (to be described later) is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 . "Low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low-probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second winning port 640 It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is likely to win a prize. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it means that the game is in a state of neither variable probability nor time reduction (state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the second pattern winning probability is increased).

During the probability change or the time reduction, not only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, and the time is longer than during normal. set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the balls enter the second winning port 640 more than when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). becomes easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 during the probability change or the time saving, or in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 640a is released more than during normal times. In addition, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and once. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit are not set. Only the probability may be changed to be higher than normal.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the winning (starting winning) to the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is used as a trigger, and while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the third symbol is displayed. A third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that performs variable display, and a normal pattern starting port (through gate) 67 Triggered by the passage of the ball, the second pattern is displayed in a variable manner. A second pattern display device (not shown) composed of LEDs is provided. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a 9-inch large liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 687), for example, the upper, middle, and lower three patterns. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 687). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be constructed using a reel or the like.

The second symbol display device displays a symbol "○" and a symbol "x" as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) each time the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67. A variable display is performed by alternately lighting up for a predetermined period of time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that a ball has passed through a normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning hole 640 is displayed for a predetermined period of time. is configured to be activated (opened) only.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the variable probability or during the time saving than during the normal gaming state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the probability change and the time reduction, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during normal times. Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given more opportunities to open the electric accessary 640a of the second winning opening 640.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the probability variation and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, other methods such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a for one hit, etc. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during the variable probability or during the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and one winning The opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the game state.

The normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side of the lower area of the variable display unit 80, and among the balls launched to the game board, the balls flow down the right side of the game board. is configured to be able to pass through. When the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is suspended up to four times in total, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the second symbol suspension lamp. (not shown) is also illuminated. Four second pattern holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the 22nd control example, as well as the first pattern display devices 37A, 37B and A part of the third pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . In addition, the maximum number of held balls for passing the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is not limited to 4 times, but is set to 3 times or less or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). You can In addition, the number of normal symbol starting openings (through gates) 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the mounting position of the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, but may be the left side of the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning hole 64 through which balls can win is arranged. When the ball enters the first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the first winning hole switch. (See FIG. 687), a lottery for a big win is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the right side of the first winning hole 64 when viewed from the front, a second winning hole 640 through which a ball can win is arranged. When the ball enters the second winning hole 640, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the second winning hole switch. (See FIG. 687), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640 are also one of the prize winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In the twenty-second control example, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are configured to be the same. However, if the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are different numbers, for example, the first prize winning port 64 The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins a prize may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second prize winning port 640 may be five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second prize winning port 640. - 特許庁This electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory is displayed. 640a is in an open state (enlarged state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the second winning port 640.例文帳に追加

As described above, during the probability variation and during the time saving, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short, so in the variation display of the second symbol "○ ” is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer during the variable probability and the shorter working hours than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the variable probability and the shorter working hours compared to the normal time.

Here, when the ball enters the first prize winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second prize winning port 640, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of winning a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning port 640 than when the ball enters the first winning port 64. is set. On the other hand, the first prize winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second prize winning port 640, and the ball can always win a prize.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessory attached to the second prize winning port 640 is often closed, and it is difficult to win the second prize winning port 640. Then, a ball is shot so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by winning the first prize-winning port 64, many chances of a big winning lottery are obtained, and a big win is achieved. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change and the time saving, by passing the ball through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning opening 640 Since the state is easy to win, the ball is shot toward the second winning opening 640 so that the ball passes through the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right hitting"), and the normal symbol starting opening (through gate ) 67 to open the electric accessory, and aim for a 15R probability variable jackpot by winning a prize in the second prize winning port 640, which is more advantageous for the player.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-second control example provides the player with a ball It is possible to change the way of firing to "left hitting" and "right hitting". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

A first variable prize winning device 65 is arranged on the lower right side of the first prize winning port 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific prize winning port (large open port) 65a is provided in the substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to cause the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B to be lit, and the third symbol display device 81 is caused to display the stop symbol corresponding to the big win, thereby indicating the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the balls are likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closure, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Specifically, the first variable prize winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening and closing plate covering the specific prize winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing the front side around the lower side of the opening and closing plate as an axis. It is equipped with The specific prize winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the opening/closing plate is tilted downward in the front by driving the large opening solenoid to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to enter the specific prize winning port 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state are formed. It operates to alternate between states.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. You may make it form as a state. In addition, the number of the specific winning openings 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of two or more (for example, three) may be arranged. The left side of the variable display device unit 80 is not limited to the lower left side of the prize winning opening 64, for example.

An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13. 35 (see FIG. 665).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided through the first out hole 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The first out port 71 is arranged below the first winning port 64 .

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills. In this embodiment, one of the windmills (referred to as a movable member 310) is arranged on the upper left side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, and is illustrated in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 667, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 which is provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 687). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 687) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 669, the decorative movable accessory in the twenty-second control example will be described. In this 22nd control example, the movable accessory for decoration includes a left change accessory Ym1, a right change accessory Ym2, and a sword accessory Ym3. The change accessories Ym1 and Ym2 are decorative movable accessories used in the pending change effect in the 22nd control example, and when the pending change effect is not executed, they are in a stored state, as shown in FIG. 669(a). As it is, it is stored below the third symbol display device 81 (initial position), so that the player can easily visually recognize the variation effect executed on the third symbol display device 81 .

On the other hand, when the pending change effect is executed, the change roles Ym1 and Ym2 partially overlap the display area of the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. 669(b). In the 22nd control example, the change character Ym1 and Ym2 partly overlap the display area of the third symbol display device 81, thereby hiding the pending symbol displayed in the overlapping display area and making it difficult to see. becomes possible. Note that detailed operation patterns of the change roles Ym1 and Ym2 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The sword accessory Ym3 is not only used as a part of the variable performance of the special symbols, but is also moved as an adjustment accessory when the player executes light intensity adjustment during the demonstration performance, and is stored in other cases. In the stored state, as shown in FIG. 669(a), it is stored on the right side of the third symbol display device 81 (initial position). It is configured to make it easy to visually recognize the variable production that is performed.

On the other hand, when the sword object Ym3 is in a movable state, as shown in FIG. , the player can visually recognize the sword character Ym3, and it becomes difficult to visually recognize the display area of the third symbol display device 81 on which the sword character Ym3 is superimposed. It should be noted that the variable effect mode using the sword object Ym3 in this 22nd control example is configured to be easily set when the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot winning, and the sword object Ym3 is movable during the variable effect. By being in the state, it is possible to provide a more powerful effect than the effect executed only by the third pattern display device 81, and to improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 670 is a sectional view of the first variable winning device 65. FIG. FIG. 670(c) is a top view of the first variable winning device 65, and FIG. 670(b) is an Lb-Lb sectional view of the first variable winning device 65. FIG. As shown in FIG. 670(b), the first variable winning device 65 is formed with a first specific winning opening 65a, which is an opening into which a game ball can enter. The first specific winning hole 65a has a substantially rectangular opening above the pachinko machine 10, and the game balls passing through the opening are guided leftward in FIG. 670(b). A sloped bottom surface is formed. A detection port 65a1 composed of a magnetic sensor for detecting winning of a game ball is arranged at the left end of the bottom surface. A game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to a sorting channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG. 671(b).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 670(b), the opening of the first specific prize winning port 65a is opened and closed by a door 65f1 configured by a shutter mechanism that can be retracted from the game board 13 side. It is changed to a closed state in which the ball is impossible (difficult to enter the ball). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered with the open/close door 65f1, and the game balls can roll on the top of the open/close door. In the open state, the opening/closing door 65f1 is retracted inside the base member 65c (inside the game board 13) to be retracted from the first specific winning port 65a.

By configuring in this way, when the opening of the first variable winning device 65 is closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the first variable winning device 65 to the second ball entrance 640 side. is configured to be induced. Therefore, even during the time-saving game (including during the variable probability game), it is possible to enter the game ball into the second start port 640 while keeping the right-handed state, and immediately change the game method to left-handed after the big hit game. It can reduce the time and effort required to make changes. Therefore, the game can be played more easily.

In addition, in the open state, since the surface perpendicular to the direction in which the game balls flow down can be configured as the opening of the first variable winning device 65, more game balls can efficiently win in the first specific winning hole 65a. Therefore, the time required for the jackpot game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

FIG. 670(a) is a cross-sectional view along La-La shown in FIG. 670(b). As shown in FIG. 670(a), the detection switch 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c so that the detection port 65a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 65e.

With reference to FIG. 671, a configuration will be described in which game balls guided to the distribution channel of the back cover body 65e are distributed to a normal discharge port 65e1 and a special discharge port 65e2, which will be described later.

FIG. 671(a) is a rear view of the back cover body 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is operated so that game balls are distributed to the special discharge port 65e2. As shown in FIG. 671(a), the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 65i is inserted and a guiding piece 65h2 for guiding the game ball. is rotatably supported from the rear side. Here, the channel cover 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h2 is rotated into the distribution channel from the rear side of the channel cover 65g. It is configured so that it can be arranged as much as possible.

As shown in FIG. 671(a), the game ball guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge port 65e2. . A game ball passing through the special discharge port 65e2 is detected by a probability variable switch 65e3 constituted by a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game ball provided in the special discharge port 65e2, and discharged out of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. .

Here, details will be described later, but in the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-second control example, the game ball passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 described above during the jackpot game, so that the game state after the jackpot game is a high probability game state. (probability variation gaming state) is set. That is, the variable probability switch 65e3 is configured as a winning opening for providing the variable probability gaming state. In addition, the switching member 65h is configured to distribute the game state after the big hit to a low probability game state (normal game state ST1) or a probability variable game state.

As described above, the game state set after the big win game is changed by the flow-down route of the game balls that have entered the first specific winning hole 65a during the big win game, so that the player's interest is improved even during the big win game. can be done. The time required to pass from the opening of the first variable prize winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge port 65e2 (opening surface closed by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is 1 second at the shortest. . The operation timing and the operation time of the switching member 65h are set according to the jackpot type. In this 22nd control example, when jackpot A, jackpot C, and jackpot D are won, the switching member 65h is operated for 5 seconds in accordance with the opening timing of the first variable winning device 65 at the start of the 14th round. is configured to Also, when the jackpot B or jackpot E is won, the switching member 65h is operated for 0.5 seconds in accordance with the opening timing of the first variable winning device 65 at the start of the 14th round.

Therefore, in the jackpot A, the winning game ball of the first variable winning device 65 is configured to be able to pass through the variable probability switch 65e3, but in the jackpot B, it is configured to be impossible to pass through the variable probability switch 65e3. It is Therefore, it is possible to control the probability variable grant ratio according to the jackpot type, and it is possible to prevent excessive advantage and disadvantage from occurring.

With reference to FIG. 671(b), the case where the game ball is guided to the normal discharge port 65e1 will be described. FIG. 671(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the channel solenoid 65k is inactive and the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h blocks the entrance opening of the special discharge port 65e2.

The game ball guided to the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h and guided to the normal discharge port 65e1. At the end of the normal discharge port 65e1, a ball discharge port switch 65e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting passage of game balls is provided. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls entering the first variable prize winning device 65 have been discharged from the sum of the ball discharge port switch 65e4 and the variable probability switch 65e3. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player wins in the 14th round in a state in which the game ball that won before the 14th round is not discharged, and wins even if the jackpot B is the variable probability switch 65e3.

In this way, the game ball that has entered the first specific prize winning port 65a in the first variable prize winning device 65 is detected by the detection switch 65c1, and based on this, a prize ball (in this embodiment, one ball winning prize) is given to the player as a privilege. 15 prize balls) can be paid out. In addition, by using the game ball after being detected, it is possible to distribute whether or not it passes through the variable probability switch 65e3, so that a lottery can be executed as to whether or not to give the variable probability game state. . Therefore, there is no need to provide a dedicated prize winning port for imparting variable probability game states separately from the first variable prize winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

<Regarding the effect content in the 22nd control example>
Here, with reference to FIG. 672 to FIG. 686, among the various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-second control example, the characteristic effect contents will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 672 to 677, the content of the hold change effect using the decorative movable accessories (change accessories Ym1 and Ym2) will be described. As described above, in the 22nd control example, when the pending change effect is executed, by hiding the pending symbols other than the pending symbols to be changed by the change accessories Ym1 and Ym2, which of the pending symbols is to be changed. It is configured to make it easy for the player to understand whether there is. Then, in the pending change performance, the change roles Ym1 and Ym2 act so as to hide the pending symbols other than the change object in stages, thereby providing the player with the pleasure of predicting which of the pending symbols is the change object. be able to. Specific contents of the pending change effect executed in the twenty-second control example will be described below.

FIG. 672(a) is an example of a display screen during special symbol variation in a state in which change accessories Ym1 and Ym2 are stored. As shown in FIG. 672(a), a small display area Dm1 is formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front. This small display area Dm1 is an area where identification information (fourth symbol) for indicating the special symbol lottery situation (whether the lottery is in progress (fluctuating) and the lottery result) is displayed, The 4th design (special design 1 4th design) for showing the lottery situation of the special design (special design) is configured to be displayed in the small display area Dm1.

By providing the small display area Dm1 in this manner, the player can be notified of the lottery status of the special symbols. Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-second control example, the fourth symbol is displayed in a display mode using numbers, and by variably displaying the fourth symbol in the small display area Dm1 ( Fig. 672 (a) small display area Dm1 reference) shows a situation in which the special symbol is fluctuating, and by stopping and displaying the fourth design in the small display area Dm1 (Fig. 678 (a) small display area Dm1 ), it is configured to show the lottery result of the special pattern, but it is not limited to this, for example, a display mode imitating a figure such as a circle and a cross as the fourth pattern, or a display showing a plurality of colors Using the mode, it shows that the special design is changing by the display mode that changes the number and the color, and by stopping and displaying the display mode showing the specific design and color, the lottery result of the special design is shown. can be configured to

Furthermore, in this 22nd control example, the 4th symbol is used to indicate the lottery status of the special symbol (whether or not the lottery is in progress (during fluctuation), and the lottery result). It may be configured to notify only whether or not the special symbol is in the process of lottery (fluctuation) without being limited to. Further, as shown in FIG. 672(a), in the twenty-second control example, the fourth symbol display area (small display area Dm1) in which the fourth symbol for indicating the lottery status of the special symbol is displayed is the main display area. Although an example is shown in which it is formed on the upper right side of Dm, the position and size where this fourth pattern display area is formed can be changed according to the effect mode of the variable effect executed in the central portion of the main display area Dm. It may be configured to be variable.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the fourth symbol display area from restricting the area in which the variable effect is executed and lowering the effect of the effect. In this case, the small display area Dm1 is deleted from the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and the variable display of the fourth pattern is performed using light emitting means (such as LEDs) provided in the variable display device unit 80. You can configure it to run.

Further, on the upper left side of the main display area Dm, there is formed a small display area Dm4 in which a guidance notification mode for guiding the player to the game method in the currently set game state is displayed, as shown in FIG. 672(a). In the example shown in the example, since the set game state is a normal game state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), the game for causing the player to execute the first special symbol lottery In order to guide (left-handed game), characters of "left-handed" are displayed in the small display area Dm4. In this way, by configuring the game method so that it can be displayed during the normal game state, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

In addition, if it is a variable game state (high probability state of special patterns, high probability state of normal patterns) or a short-time game state (low probability state of special patterns, high probability state of normal patterns), the player In order to guide the game (right-handed game) for executing the 2 special symbol lottery, characters of "Right-handed" are displayed in the small display area Dm4.

Further, in the upper central part of the main display area Dm, the third pattern, which is to be displayed in a decorative manner corresponding to the variable display of the fourth pattern, is variably displayed. Since the third symbol is displayed in the upper center of the main display area Dm in this way, the player does not see the fourth symbol displayed in the small display area Dm1, and the variation executed in the main display area Dm is The game can be played while watching the performance and the lottery situation of the special symbols indicated by the third symbols at the same time.

Next, a display area HR1, which is an area in which reserved symbols corresponding to the special symbols currently being executed are displayed, is formed in the lower center of the main display area Dm. In the display area HR1, characters "NOW" are displayed to indicate that the reserved symbols being executed are displayed. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the display area HR1 is an area where the reserved symbols being executed are displayed. In addition, since the pending pattern hr0 during execution is displayed, the player can easily predict the lottery result of the special symbol being executed from the display mode of the pending pattern hr0 during execution, and the pending pattern hr0 is not displayed. In this case, the player can easily understand that the special symbol lottery game is not executed.

In addition, in the 22nd control example, the currently-executed reserved symbol hr0 and other reserved symbols are displayed in different display areas, but any configuration may be used as long as the player can identify the currently-executed reserved symbol h0. It is also possible to make a configuration in which the player can distinguish by displaying in the same display area and differentiating the sizes of the reserved symbols during execution hr0 from the other reserved symbols.

Below the display area HR1, a display area HR2 is formed in which reserved symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls being obtained are displayed. Numbers 1 to 4 are displayed in order from the left in the display area HR2, and the player is notified in an easy-to-understand manner as to which reserved symbols are to be consumed in order.

The display area HR2 displays the first reserved symbol hr1 to the fourth reserved symbol hr4, each of which is given a different color. The first reserved symbol hr1 to the fourth reserved symbol hr4 are stored in the reserved balls stored in the reserved areas 1 to 4 of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203va (the second special symbol reserved ball storage area vb), respectively. Correspondingly, when the player acquires a reserved ball, the reserved patterns are displayed in order from the first reserved pattern hr1 to the youngest. The display position of the reserved pattern is variable. Specifically, when the special symbol variation corresponding to the active pending symbol hr0 is completed, the pending symbol displayed at the position of the first pending symbol hr1 is shifted to the position where the active pending symbol hr0 was displayed, The reserved design displayed at the position of the second reserved design hr2 is shifted to the position where the first reserved design hr1 was displayed. The reserved design displayed at the position of the third reserved design hr3 is the position where the second reserved design hr2 was displayed, and the reserved design displayed at the position of the fourth reserved design hr4 is the third reserved design hr3. is shifted to the position where was displayed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 677(a), the display mode of the pending symbol in the twenty-second control example will be described. FIG. 677(a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the color of the reserved symbol and the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 677(a), "Rainbow" has the highest expectation of winning the jackpot, followed by "Red" and "Green", and the expectation increases in the order of "White", "Blue", "Yellow", " Purple” has the same degree of expectation. In addition, when it is determined not to execute the pending change effect in the pending effect setting process 22 (see FIG. 722, F2504) to be described later, the pending color "white" is set. Standard hold color.

FIG. 677(b) shows an example of a variable pattern of colors of reserved symbols. As shown in FIG. 677(b), the retained color “rainbow” is a retained color that changes when combining three or more different retained color elements excluding “white”. The reserved color “red” is a reserved color that can be changed by transplanting “blue”, which is one of the elements constituting “purple” to “purple”, to another reserved pattern. The reserved color “green” is a variable reserved color by synthesizing the reserved color “blue” element and the “yellow” element. In this way, by synthesizing the colors of a plurality of reserved patterns and making it possible to change to a higher display mode (color), the currently displayed reserved patterns are all reserved patterns with a low expectation of winning a jackpot. However, since the player can expect to change to a higher reserved design by combining the elements that constitute them, the reserved design that can be changed from the display mode of the displayed reserved design It is possible to allow the player to predict the display mode of , thereby improving the amusement of the game.

As described above, in the twenty-second control example, the color elements of adjacent reserved symbols are synthesized. Therefore, for example, when the first reserved design hr1 is "purple" and the second reserved design hr2 is "blue", the color of the next reserved design (in this case, the third reserved design hr3) is "white". , ``purple'', and ``blue'' can be changed to ``rainbow'', and ``yellow'' can be changed to ``green''. It is possible to make the player interested in the colors of the reserved symbols to be displayed, and to motivate the player to play the game in order to obtain the reserved balls.

Returning to FIG. 672(a), the description continues. As described above, "white", "blue", "yellow", and "purple" have the same degree of expectation, so in the example shown in FIG. It remains unchanged. In the example shown in FIG. 672(a), the first reserved design hr1 to the fourth reserved design hr4 are displayed in different display modes (colors), but in the twenty-second control example, the display mode of the reserved design Since (color) is randomly determined based on the result of the special symbol lottery, the same color may be consecutive, for example, "white", "white", "white", and "white".

As shown in FIG. 672(a), change accessories Ym1 and Ym2 are stored below the third symbol display device 81 (initial position). The change character objects Ym1 and Ym2 are composed of a character object having the same size as the display area HR2 or a character object larger than the size of the display area HR2. It is configured so that the displayed reserved pattern is in a state where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it. In this 22nd control example, the change roles Ym1 and Ym2 become movable when the pending change effect is executed. Therefore, when the change roles Ym1 and Ym2 become movable, It is possible to notify that the pending change effect is executed. The action patterns of the change roles Ym1 and Ym2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 672(b) to 674(a).

FIG. 672(b) is an example of the display screen when the pending change effect is started and the change accessories Ym1 and Ym2 start to move. As shown in FIG. 672(b), the left change character Ym1 slides to the left and hides the first reserved symbol hr1, and the right change character Ym2 slides to the right and hides the fourth reserved symbol hr4. Each moves to a hidden position (first operation). When the first action is finished, the player does not know which of the second reserved pattern hr2 and the third reserved pattern hr3 is the reserved pattern to be changed. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting which of the reserved symbols is to be changed.

FIG. 673(a) is an example of a display screen when the second action is executed after the first action is completed. In the second action, the right change accessory Ym2 slides leftward in a front view to hide the third reserved symbol hr3. Then, in the main display area Dm, in conjunction with the action of the right change character Ym2, there is an effect to make it look as if the reserved color "blue" of the third reserved symbol hr3 has been transplanted from the display area HR2 to the second reserved symbol hr2. As shown in FIG. 673(b), "blue" of the third reserved design hr3 is transplanted to "yellow" of the second reserved design hr2, and an effect of changing to "green" is executed. In this way, the reserved symbols other than the change target displayed in the display area HR2 are hidden by the change roles Ym1 and Ym2, so that the player can easily understand the change target reserved symbols.

After that, the left change accessory Ym1 descends and then slides in the right direction in front view, and the right change accessory Ym2 descends as it is and returns to the stored state (initial position) (third operation).

FIG. 674(a) is an example of the display screen when the change accessories Ym1 and Ym2 return to their initial positions from the state of FIG. 673(b). Unlike the state of FIG. 672(a), the second reserved pattern hr2 displayed in the display area HR2 is changed from "yellow" to "green", and the third reserved pattern hr3 is changed from "blue" to "white". there is As a result, the player can predict that the reserved ball corresponding to the second reserved symbol hr2 among the reserved symbols displayed in the display area HR2 is highly expected to win the jackpot.

Here, for example, the pending change scenario 8 (see FIG. 695) is set as the pending change scenario of the second pending symbol hr2, the pending color of the first pending symbol hr1 is "yellow", and the pending color of the second pending symbol hr2 is When "blue" is displayed and the reserved color of the third reserved pattern hr3 is "red", the elements constituting the reserved colors of the first reserved pattern hr1 and the third reserved pattern hr3 are transplanted to the second reserved pattern hr2. Then, after the pending change effect that changes the reserved color to “rainbow” is executed, the reserved colors of the first reserved pattern hr1 and the third reserved pattern hr3 are left as they are (that is, the first reserved pattern hr1 is “yellow”, the third 3 reserved symbol hr3 remains "red"), in fact, although only the second reserved symbol hr2 wins the jackpot, the player receives the second reserved symbol hr2 and the third reserved symbol hr3. If the expectation of winning the jackpot is high, it will give a misunderstanding. In order to prevent this, in the twenty-second control example, when an element constituting the color of the reserved symbol is transplanted, the color corresponding to the transplantation is variably displayed.

FIG. 674(b) is an example of a display screen when part of the reserved color of a reserved design is transplanted to an adjacent reserved design. When the first action is completed, the second reserved pattern hr2 is displayed in the "purple" display mode and the third reserved pattern hr3 is displayed in the "white" display mode in the display area HR2. After that, when the second action is started, the left change character Ym1 slides to the right in the front view to perform the action of hiding the second reserved symbol hr2. At this time, in the main display area Dm, as shown in FIG. 675(a), "blue", which is one of the components of "purple" of the second reserved symbol hr2, is displayed in the third reserved symbol r3. The production that is ported to is executed. When the change accessories Ym1 and Ym2 return to their initial positions, the second reserved design hr2 is changed to "red" and the third reserved design hr3 is changed to "blue". Therefore, in this case, the second reserved symbol hr2 hidden by the change role product Ym1 has a higher expectation of winning the jackpot than the other reserved symbols.

In addition, in the twenty-second control example, only the colors forming the reserved symbols are transplanted, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the reserved symbols themselves may be transplanted. Specifically, in the state of FIG. 673(a), an effect is executed in which the reserved design displayed at the position of the third reserved design hr3 is transplanted to the second reserved design hr2, and the display after the end of the reserved change effect is executed. In the position of the third reserved design hr3 in the area HR2, the reserved design originally displayed at the position of the fourth reserved design hr4 is displayed, and the position of the fourth reserved design hr4 is left blank (no reserved design is displayed). state), and when the special symbol variation based on the reserved ball corresponding to the second reserved pattern hr2 is executed, the lottery result of the reserved ball corresponding to the second reserved pattern hr2 and the reservation corresponding to the third reserved pattern hr3 A configuration may be adopted in which ball lottery results are collectively notified. By configuring in this way, the number of times the player is informed that the player has won a missed prize can be reduced. can make you think.

In addition, in the state of FIG. 675(a), a pattern is also set in which the transplant color hr2a transplanted from the second reserved pattern hr2 is "red". It is a reserved design with a higher expectation of winning a jackpot. By constructing in this way, the player can be interested not only in the movements of the change roles Ym1 and Ym2, but also in the performance performed by the third pattern display device 81, so that the amusement of the game is improved. be able to.

Fig. 676(a) shows the state of Fig. 674(b), even if the second action is executed, the hidden reserved pattern is not transplanted, and the reserved pattern to be changed is changed alone. It is an example of a display screen. Although the second reserved symbol hr2 is hidden, the color is not transplanted, and the third reserved symbol hr3 is changed to "green". In this way, by setting various patterns of hold change, the hold change effect does not become monotonous, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

As described above, in the 22nd control example, by hiding the reserved symbols other than the changed objects using the change roles Ym1 and Ym2, the reserved symbols to be changed can be made clear to the player. . In this way, in order to hide a part of the reserved symbol display area of the third symbol display device 81 by the change roles Ym1 and Ym2, the third symbol display device 81 executes a suspended change effect using an effect such as light emission. In addition, even if the effect of the pending symbol to be changed overlaps with other pending symbols, the other pending symbols are hidden by the change roles Ym1 and Ym2, so that the player can understand which pending symbol is to be changed. can be clarified.

In this 22nd control example, it is configured to be hidden by the change character Ym1 and Ym2, but the present invention is not limited to this. The design may be hidden, or the reserved design other than the change target may be hidden by enlarging and displaying the third design.

Also, in the twenty-second control example, only the pattern of transferring the color of the second reserved design hr2 to the third reserved design hr3 and the pattern of transferring the color of the third reserved design hr3 to the second reserved design hr2 were explained. , but not limited to this, for example, a pattern may be set in which the color of the second reserved pattern hr2 is transferred to the first reserved pattern hr1, or the color of the third reserved pattern hr3 is transferred to the fourth reserved pattern hr4. You may set a pattern to

In this 22nd control example, the configuration is such that the color of the reserved pattern to be changed and the adjacent reserved pattern are combined, but the present invention is not limited to this. A configuration may be adopted in which a pattern to be transplanted to hr1 is provided.

In addition, in the 22nd control example, the configuration is such that the colors of the reserved symbols are given at random, but the configuration is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration may be adopted in which colors are given according to the number of reserved balls. Specifically, when the number of reserved balls is two, "white" is displayed in the first reserved pattern hr1 and "purple" is displayed in the second reserved pattern hr2, one reserved ball is digested, and the number of reserved balls is displayed. becomes one, the "purple" reserved design displayed in the second reserved design hr2 changes to the "white" reserved design when shifting to the first reserved design hr1. When the number of reserved balls is four, "white" is displayed in the first reserved pattern hr1, "purple" is displayed in the second reserved pattern hr2, "yellow" is displayed in the third reserved pattern hr3, and "yellow" is displayed in the fourth reserved pattern hr4. Display "blue". In this case, when the holding change effect is executed at the positions of the first holding symbol hr1 and the second holding symbol hr2, it is possible to make the player expect that one of the holding symbols will change to "red". Yes, when the pending change effect is executed at the position of the third pending symbol hr3, it is possible to make the player expect a change to "rainbow" or "green", and the fourth pending symbol hr4. When the pending change effect is executed at the position of , the player can expect a change to "green".

In this way, by adopting a configuration in which a color is given corresponding to the position where each reserved pattern is normally displayed in the display area HR2, the reserved color that varies depending on the position when the reserved pattern to be changed changes are different, the player can be interested in the position where the pending change effect is executed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 678 to 680, the details of the light amount adjustment function executed in the twenty-second control example will be described. This 22nd control example has an environment adjustment function that allows the player to adjust the gaming environment (volume and light intensity) of the pachinko machine 10, and when adjusting the light intensity during the standby screen (during the demonstration effect), , By changing the movable accessory for decoration (sword accessory Ym3) to the environment adjustment position (see FIG. 678(b)), a state similar to the state in which the movable accessory for decoration is moved in the actual variation effect. is reproduced in a pseudo manner, and the light amount adjustment operation can be executed in that state.

FIG. 678(a) is an example of a demo screen (demonstration screen) displayed during the waiting period in which the special symbols are not varied. A small display area Dm3 in which display selection buttons Sw1 to Sw5 modeled after the selection button 600 are displayed is formed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm in front view. In this small display area Dm3, a character saying "You can adjust by pressing the button" is displayed as a guidance mode for guiding the player to the operation method for adjusting the game environment. "+" is displayed, "-" is displayed on the lower display button Sw3, and "volume" is displayed on the upper side of the upper display button Sw1. A player can be informed in an easy-to-understand manner that the adjustment is possible.

In addition, "+" is displayed on the right display button Sw2, "-" is displayed on the left display button Sw4, and "light amount" is displayed on the right side of the right display button Sw2. The player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the amount of light can be adjusted by operating the button 600e.

A small sound volume gauge ga1 and a small light quantity gauge ga2, which are environmental information notification modes for showing the currently set sound volume and light quantity to the player, are displayed on the lower left side of the main display area Dm in front view. The volume gauge small ga1 and the light amount gauge small ga2 are composed of five stages, and "MIN" is displayed on the left side of each gauge, and "MAX" is displayed on the right side. In this case, the environmental setting values ga1a and ga2a are interlocked and varied, so that the difference between the player's preferred gaming environment and the current gaming environment can be easily recognized.

In the sub-display area Ds formed below the main ideographic area Dm, the characters "Demonstration in progress", which is the game information display mode for displaying the game information, are displayed, thereby changing the current special symbol. A player is notified in an easy-to-understand manner that it is in a waiting period that is not being executed.

FIG. 678(b) is an example of a light amount adjustment screen when the player operates a button for light amount adjustment during the waiting period. The example shown in FIG. 678(b) is a state in which the adjustment role (sword role Ym3) is changed to the environment adjustment position based on the player's operation of the left button 600e. In conjunction with the player's operation of the left button 600e, the light amount set value ga2a of the light amount gauge small ga2 is decreased by one step. Incidentally, the LED set value Ym3a of the LED attached to the sword character Ym3 is also configured to be variable in five steps, and is variable in conjunction with the light amount gauge small ga2.

By configuring in this way, even when a game is not being executed, it is possible to adjust the light amount using the decorative movable role (sword role Ym3) used for the variable effect, so that the amount of light desired by the player can be adjusted. It is possible to make it easier to appropriately adjust the amount of light to be used.

On the upper right side of the main display area Dm in the front view, there is a display area HR3 that displays a notification mode for notifying that the simulated movement for light amount adjustment is performed when the sword character Ym3 is changed to the environment adjustment position. It is formed. The display area HR3 displays the characters ``moving the character for light amount adjustment'' to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the current movement of the sword character Ym3 is not related to the variable performance. It is configured so as not to mislead the player.

FIG. 679(a) is an example of an adjustment completion screen when the light amount adjustment is completed and the player operates the decision button 600a. When the player operates the decision button 600a, an environment adjustment end display cm1, which is a guide mode for indicating that the environment adjustment is completed, is displayed above the light amount gauge small ga2. As a result, the player can recognize that the currently displayed light amount setting value ga2a has been set.

Also, based on the player's operation of the decision button 600a, the sword character Ym3 changes from the environment adjustment position to the initial position (see FIG. 669(a)).

Here, if the variation of the special symbol starts before the end of the light amount adjustment, the sword symbol Ym3 overlaps the third symbol display device 81 in the state where the sword symbol Ym3 is in the environment adjustment position, and the player cannot There is a problem that it is difficult to visually recognize the variation effect executed in the third symbol display device 81 .

On the other hand, in the twenty-second control example, when the special symbol starts to fluctuate during the light amount adjustment, the sword object Ym3 is moved from the environment adjustment position to the initial position while continuing the light amount adjustment. It is configured to be variable. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 679(b), the sword character Ym3 changes from the environment adjustment position to the initial position in accordance with the start of fluctuation of the special symbols, and the light gauge small ga2 changes to the light gauge large ga3. switch. By switching to the light amount gauge large ga3 in this way, the player can be made to recognize that the light amount adjustment is continuing even if the sword character Ym3 is changed to the initial position.

Also, if the movement of the sword object Ym3 to its initial position is executed during the variable production, there is a risk that the player will misunderstand that the current movement of the sword object Ym3 is part of the variable production. Therefore, in the twenty-second control example, when the sword character Ym3 is changed based on the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, unlike the case where the sword character Ym3 is changed by operating the enter button 600a, the sword character Ym3 It is configured to be variable to the initial position after all the accompanying LEDs are turned off. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to easily understand that the sword Ym3 is not moving as part of the variable presentation.

FIG. 680 is an example of the light amount adjustment screen when the movement of the sword character Ym3 is restricted. In the twenty-second control example, when the sword object Ym3 is changed from the environment adjustment position to the initial position, the movement of the sword object Ym3 is restricted for a certain period of time (10 seconds). By configuring in this way, when the effect mode of moving the sword object Ym3 is set as part of the variable effect, the execution timing of the effect becomes the period during which the environment adjustment position is changed to the initial position. As a result, it is possible to prevent the sword character Ym3 from performing unnatural motions, or from being damaged due to a load being applied to the sword character Ym3.

When the movement of the sword object Ym3 is restricted during the standby period, that is, when the player who has finished adjusting the light intensity adjusts the light intensity again, the sword object Ym3 is displayed above the center of the main display area Dm. A display area HR4 is formed to display a guidance mode indicating that the operation is restricted. In the display area HR4, by displaying the characters "Restriction of action", it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the failure of the sword role Ym3 is not due to a malfunction.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 681 to 637, the contents of the shutter closed ready-to-win effect, which is one of the ready-to-win effects to be executed in the twenty-second control example, will be described. In the shutter closing ready-to-win performance, one ready-to-reach performance is divided into six stages, and if the final stage (sixth stage) can be reached (that is, if the shutter opens and closes a predetermined number of times), it is notified that the jackpot is won. It is a reach performance. Specific contents of the shutter closing reach effect will be described below.

First, with reference to FIGS. 681 and 682, the basic pattern of the shutter closed reach effect will be described.

FIG. 681(a) is an example of the display screen at the start of the shutter closing ready-to-reach effect. Shutters St1 and St2 are displayed on the left side and right side of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front to indicate whether or not it is possible to proceed to the next stage. A display area HR4 is formed in which a guidance mode for notifying the degree of progress is displayed. Also, in the sub-display area Ds, a game information notification mode for informing success conditions of the effect is displayed. The characters "Shutter closed to continue 1/6" are displayed in the display area HR4, and the characters "If you can finish the race, you win big" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds, so that the shutter St1 displayed in the main display area Dm. , St2 are closed, the stage progresses, and when the display in the display area HR4 becomes "6/6", the player can be easily notified of the big win.

Also, in the center of the main display area Dm, two "3" symbols are displayed as the third symbols, and a downward arrow indicating that the third symbol is fluctuating is displayed. It shows that

As shown in FIG. 681(a), in the shutter closing ready-to-reach effect, the state in which the shutters St1 and St2 rattle and vibrate is a branch effect as to whether or not to proceed to the next stage. As shown in FIG. 681(b), by closing the shutters St1 and St2, the characters St1a of "continued" displayed on the shutter St1 and the characters St1a of "continued" displayed on the shutter St2 are displayed. When St2a is united, it becomes "continuation", and the player is notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the effect will continue.

In addition, when the shutters St1 and St2 are closed, the degree of progress of the effect displayed in the display area HR4 is changed from "1/6" to "2/6". The player can recognize that it has progressed to the stage of

On the other hand, although not shown, if the branch effect does not proceed to the next stage, the shutters St1 and St2 are not closed and the vibration stops, and the end mode (for example, the characters "failure") indicating the end of the effect is displayed. Is displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the ready-to-win effect has ended.

FIG. 682(a) is an example of the display screen when reaching the fifth stage of the shutter closing ready-to-reach effect. Unlike the state shown in FIG. 681(a), in the central part of the main display area Dm, the "7" symbol is displayed as the third symbol in the reach state, and the character St1a of "tsugi" displayed on the shutter St1 is changed to " The characters St1b of "Congratulations" and the characters St2a of "Continued" displayed on the shutter St2 are changed to the characters St2b of "Fuku". In this way, the characters of the shutters St1 and St2 are changed from "Continue" indicating that the character advances to the next stage to "Blessing" indicating that the big win is won. Something is reported to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

Here, in the shutter closing ready-to-reach effect of the 22nd control example, each time the shutters St1 and St2 are closed, the number of the third symbol stopped and displayed in the main display area Dm is incremented by one. . Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 682(a), since the shutters St1 and St2 are closed four times from the state of FIG. . Therefore, when the shutters St1 and St2 are closed in the fifth stage, the number of the third symbol stopped and displayed in the main display area Dm becomes the "8" symbol, and as shown in FIG. 682(b), the shutter St1 and St2 are completely opened, and a notification mode nz1 indicating that the jackpot is won is displayed between the two "8" symbols, thereby announcing the jackpot winning.

In this 22nd control example, the number of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed in the first stage of the shutter closing reach is a configuration that is randomly determined based on the judgment result of the special symbol. If the number of the third symbol stopped and displayed in the first stage of is "2" symbol, "7" symbol will be displayed when the final stage (sixth stage) is reached.

As will be described later, in this 22nd control example, the player can predict the type of the jackpot by the number of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed. , It is the third pattern type displayed only when winning the "jackpot A", which is a jackpot type in which the variable probability game state is set after the jackpot game ends, and the other patterns are the number of rounds of the jackpot game than the jackpot A. ``jackpot B'', which is a jackpot type with a small number of jackpots, and ``jackpot C,'' in which the number of rounds of the jackpot game is smaller than that of the jackpot A and the probability variable game state is not set after the jackpot game is finished.

In this way, the player can predict the number of the third symbol that will be displayed when the final stage is reached from the number of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed in the first stage. It is possible to make the player interested in the numbers of the third symbols stopped and displayed with , and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The basic pattern of the shutter closing reach effect has been described above. As described above, the basic pattern of the shutter closing ready-to-reach effect entertains the player whether or not the player can reach the final stage. However, simply showing whether or not the shutters St1 and St2 are closed in the branching effect results in a monotonous effect, causing the player to quickly become bored with the effect.

To solve this problem, in the twenty-second control example, a configuration is added in which the aspect of the effect executed in the final stage is varied depending on the aspect of the effect executed in the process of reaching the final stage. With reference to FIG. 683, an example of the special pattern of the shutter closing reach effect will be described.

FIG. 683(a) is an example of the display screen when the capsule acquisition effect is generated in the third stage of the shutter closing ready-to-reach effect. After the shutters St1 and St2 are closed in the second step branch effect of the shutter closing reach, when the third step of the shutter closing reach is started, the effect of obtaining the capsule Cp1 may be executed. This capsule Cp1 is displayed in such a manner that the content is unknown at the time of the third stage. When the capsule Cp1 is acquired, a display area HR4 for displaying a game information notification mode for notifying the number of capsules held is formed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm in front view (see FIG. 683(b)).

Then, as shown in FIG. 683(b), in the fifth-stage branch effect, the capsule Cp1 displayed in the display area HR4 is released, the HOLD ticket Cp1a jumps out of the capsule Cp1, and appears in the main display area Dm. An effect of sticking to the number of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed is executed. This HOLD ticket Cp1a does not allow the number of the currently displayed symbol to be updated even if the shutters St1 and St2 are closed. , the jackpot winning is informed by the "7" symbol.

It should be noted that the contents of the capsule Cp1 define patterns for selecting not only the HOLD ticket Cp1a but also other display modes imitating a "key". When this key is selected, the shutters St1 and St2 are completely opened at the stage when the key is successfully used, and the number of the pattern displayed at that time informs that the jackpot is won.

Even if an item such as a HOLD ticket Cp1a emerges from the capsule Cp1, there may be a case where the winning of the jackpot is not reported (that is, the case of winning without winning). , the contents of the capsule Cp1, and whether the use of the item is successful.

In this way, in the twenty-second control example, by adding a configuration in which the capsule Cp1, which is the effect variable mode for varying the effect mode of the shutter closing ready-to-win effect, can be obtained, display is performed in the first stage of the shutter closing ready-to-win effect. The number of the symbol to be drawn, the presence or absence of the capsule acquisition effect in the 3rd step, and the contents of the capsule Cp1 in the 4th and 5th steps can be interesting, so from the start to the end of the shutter closing reach effect It is possible to keep the player's attention on the performance.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 684 to 686, the movie execution ready-to-win effect, which is one of the ready-to-win effects executed in the twenty-second control example, will be described. This movie execution ready-to-win effect is divided into a first half part and a second half part, and when the first half part of the ready-to-win effect ends, a branch effect is executed as to whether or not to shift to the latter half effect. When this branch effect succeeds, a special movie, which is the second half of the ready-to-win effect, is started. Then, when the special movie ends, it is announced that the player has won the jackpot.

FIG. 684(a) is a display screen when the branch effect of the movie execution ready-to-win effect is executed. A display effect button Sw6 imitating the effect button 22 is displayed in the central portion of the main display area Dm, and an effective period gauge ga4, which is a notification mode for indicating the SW effective period, is displayed below it. This validity period gauge ga4 is composed of a remaining validity period ga4a for indicating the remaining validity period and an elapsed time ga4b for indicating the elapsed time. By increasing the display portion of the elapsed time ga4b, the player is notified of the remaining period during which the operation of the effect button 22 is valid.

Further, in the sub-display area Ds, a character "Start special movie with button PUSH?" is displayed as a guide mode for indicating game information that is a condition for success of the movie execution ready-to-win effect. In addition to displaying a display effect button Sw6 displayed in the center of the main display area Dm and a downward arrow as a suggestive mode for prompting the player to operate the effect button thereon, the sub display area By displaying the guidance mode of Ds, the player is notified in an easy-to-understand manner that there is a possibility that the performance will develop if the performance button 22 is operated.

FIG. 684(b) is an example of the display screen at the end of the special movie when the effect button 22 is operated during the branch effect. A display area HR4 for displaying a notification mode indicating that the special movie has ended is formed in the upper center of the main display area Dm. By displaying "Special Movie End" in the display area HR4, the player can easily recognize that the special movie has ended.

In the twenty-second control example, when the special movie ends, the notification mode is displayed in the display area HR4. It is acceptable as long as it can be done.

Here, in the special movie of the movie execution reach effect in the twenty-second control example, the reproduction time of the movie is set assuming that the player does not operate the effect button 22 during the SW effective period. By constructing in this way, there is no problem that the special movie does not end within the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the player does not operate the effect button 22. - 特許庁On the other hand, when the player operates the effect button 22 during the valid period of the SW, the special movie starts at the time when the player operates the effect button 22. Therefore, when the special movie ends, the special pattern variation time is Not finished. Therefore, in the twenty-second control example, if the special symbols have not finished changing at the end of the special movie, the temporarily stopped symbols are shaken and waited from the end of the special movie until the special symbols stop changing. and

Therefore, if the player does not operate the effect button 22 during the valid period of the SW, the fourth symbol displayed in the small display area Dm1 is also a big hit when the special movie ends, as shown in FIG. The game is stopped in a display mode indicating winning, the third pattern is also stopped in a display mode indicating winning in a big win, and a notification mode for indicating winning in a big win is displayed in the sub-display area Ds, so that the player can win a big win. Something is reported.

On the other hand, when the player operates the effect button 22 during the SW valid period, as shown in FIG. At the same time, the third symbol is temporarily stopped in a display mode indicating that the jackpot has been won, and a notification mode for indicating that the jackpot has been won is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. In this manner, in the movie execution ready-to-win effect, the player who has operated the effect button 22 during the SW effective period is notified of the big winning before the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbols.

FIG. 686 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the performance time of the special movie and the fluctuation time of the special symbols. As described above, when the effect button 22 is operated during the branching effect, the pattern fluctuation period is set in the period from the end of the special movie to the stop of the fluctuation, and the big win notification may be executed before the stop of the fluctuation. It is shown.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the 22nd control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 687, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 687 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the setting of the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display results of the second symbol display device. to run.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controller by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the operation of the sub-controller such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In the main control device 110, the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the display setting in the first symbol display device 37, the display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and the display setting in the third symbol display device 81 Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 688, counters and the like provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 688 is a schematic diagram schematically showing counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. FIG. These counters, etc. are the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the setting of the display in the first design display device 37, the setting of the display in the second design display device 83, and the setting of the display in the third design display device 81. etc., it is used in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 .

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol jackpot type. The first hit type counter C2 used for , the stop type selection counter (C3) used to select the stop type that is out of the special symbol, and the initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first hit random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used.

In addition, the second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used to set the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4, and the variation used for selecting the variation pattern of the normal symbols. A type counter CS1 is used. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 698), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 709). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . The RAM 203 has a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203sa corresponding to the ball entering the first ball opening 64 consisting of four holding areas (first to fourth holding areas), and four holding areas (first holding area). to the fourth area), and a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sb corresponding to the ball entering the second ball entrance 640, and the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sa includes the Each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 is stored in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, and the second special In the symbol holding ball storage area 203sb, a first hit random number counter C1, a first hit type counter C2, a stop type selection counter C3, and a variation type counter CS1 are provided in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the second ball entrance 64. Each value of is stored.

Then, when the special symbol starting condition (fluctuation condition) is satisfied, various values stored in the first reserved area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sa, or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sb Of the various values stored in the reserved first area, the special symbol information corresponding to the special symbol type for which the next lottery is executed is shifted to the special symbol execution area, and based on the stored various values Special symbol variation is started.

In addition, in this 22nd control example, the type of the special design uses the configuration of two types (first special design, second special design), but without being limited to this, even if the type of special design is one type good. Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the first special symbol or the start condition (variation condition) of the second special symbol is satisfied, the first reserved area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area of the corresponding special symbol type. , are shifted to the special symbol execution area, and the special symbol variation based on the stored various values is started. By configuring in this way, even in the pachinko machine 10 using a plurality of special symbol types, each special symbol variation can be executed smoothly.

Furthermore, as in this 22nd control example, if the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of special symbol types (first special symbol, second special symbol), the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol can be executed at the same time (in parallel), and in this case, each special symbol reserved ball storage area (first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sa, second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sb) It may be configured to have a special symbol execution area. Thereby, when the starting condition of each special symbol is satisfied, the next special symbol variation can be quickly executed.

In addition, in the 22nd control example, the lottery result of the special symbol is configured to be only a big hit and a loss, but without being limited to this, for example, some cases where the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss , it may be constructed so that the player can win a small prize that can be awarded to the player with a smaller benefit than when the big win is won (privilege different from when the big win is won). With this configuration, even if the player does not win the jackpot, an opportunity to give the player a privilege can be provided, so that the interest in the game can be improved. In this case, a small hit type counter is provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110, and the value of the acquired small hit type counter can be stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area, and when executing the special symbol lottery. It should be configured so that it can be referenced.

In addition, in the case that a special symbol lottery is configured to allow a small win, for example, the game state transition content based on the big win win and the game state shift content based on the small win win are configured to be different. Alternatively, for example, when a jackpot is won, the game state is shifted to a normal state at the start of the jackpot game, and a new game state can be set after the jackpot game ends based on the set jackpot type. When a small win is won, the small win game may be executed while maintaining the game state at the time of winning the small win, and the game state may not be shifted even after the small win game is finished.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the presence or absence of the transition of the game state and the content of the transition according to the winning type (big win, small win), so that it is possible to provide a game rich in variations. can.

Furthermore, the RAM 203 of the 22nd control example is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203vc corresponding to the entry (passage of the ball) into the through gate 67 consisting of four reserved areas (first reserved area). In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203vc, each value of the second hit random number counter C4 and the normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 is stored in accordance with the timing of entering the through gate 67.

Then, when the normal symbol start condition (fluctuation condition) is established, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203vc are shifted to the normal symbol execution area, and the stored various values are shifted to the normal symbol execution area. Normal design variation based on the value is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 688, each counter will be described in detail. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 999), and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 999 in the case of a counter that can take values between 0 and 999). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 399. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 698) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 709).

The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt process in this 22nd control example), and at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the random number counter C1 is stored in the RAM 203. The second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sa is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sb of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. - 特許庁The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by the first winning random number table 202va stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is the first winning random number table. 202va, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot when it matches the value of the random number set by 202va.

Here, referring to FIG. 690, the first winning random number table 202va will be described. FIG. 690 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first winning random number table 202va. This first hit random number table 202va is a table in which random numbers (determined values) for determining a big win are defined in a special symbol lottery.

Specifically, in the first hit random number table 202va, the judgment value for judging a big hit is defined differently according to the game state (probability state of special symbols). As shown in Figure 690, for the low probability state (normal state, time saving state) of the special symbol as the gaming state, "0 to 4" among the values of the first per random number counter C1 is defined as the jackpot determination value. Other values (“5 to 999”) are defined as outlier judgment values. In addition, for the high probability state (probability variable state) of the special symbol as the game state, "0 to 19" among the values of the first hit random number counter C1 is defined as the jackpot determination value, and other values ( "20 to 999") is defined as the deviation determination value. That is, since the update range of the first random number table 202a is 1000 of "0 to 999", the probability of being determined as a big hit in the low probability state of special symbols is 1/200 (5 out of 1000). Thus, in the high probability state of the special symbol, the probability of being determined as a big hit is 1/50 (20 out of 1000).

In the twenty-second control example, two types of jackpot probabilities are set according to the game state. It may be constructed so as to be probabilities, or it may be constructed so that three or more types of jackpot probabilities are set. In this case, for example, the special symbol jackpot probability may be changed for each of up to four game states set by combining the special symbol state and the normal symbol state, Simply, three or more types of special symbol states, such as a high probability state, a normal probability state, and a low probability state, may be set, and a different jackpot probability may be set for each state.

In addition, in this 22nd control example, two types of lottery results, "big win" and "loss", are determined as the lottery results of the special symbols. As a result, it may be possible to determine a "minor win" as one type of "loss". When the "small win" is won, it is preferable to execute a small win game in which the variable winning device 65 is opened for a period shorter than the "big win" (for one round). By configuring in this manner, a small amount of privilege (prize ball) can be given to the player when the big hit is not won. In addition, when the "small win" is one type of "miss", it is possible to give the player a prize ball by the small win game, but since the big win is not won, the game state is changed ( setting a game state different from the game state at the time of winning) is not executed. As a result, it is possible to clearly differentiate the privilege given to the player based on the winning of the big prize and the privilege given to the player based on the winning of the small prize.

As described above, when the lottery result of the special symbol is configured so as to be able to win a "small win", the value of the first winning random number counter C1 corresponding to the "small winning" is defined in the first winning random number table 202va. It should be configured as follows. By configuring in this way, the big winning lottery and the small winning lottery of special symbols can be executed in the same process, so compared to the case where the big winning lottery and the small winning lottery are executed in different processes, the main control The processing load of the device 110 can be reduced. In addition, in one special symbol lottery, it is possible to prohibit the winning of both a big win and a small win.

The first win type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is won, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this 22nd control example), and is updated in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64. is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sb of the RAM 203 at the timing of entering the second ball entrance 640 in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sa.

The value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-second control example is configured as a loop counter within the range of 0-99. In this embodiment, the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is used to refer to the first hit type selection table 202sc to determine the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. Here, the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202sb will be described with reference to FIG. 691(a).

FIG. 691(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first winning type selection table 202vb. As described above, the first hit type selection table 202vb is a data table for selecting the jackpot type to be set when the jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol or the lottery for the second special symbol. Different jackpot types are defined according to the value of the first hit type counter C2.

Specifically, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the value of the first hit type counter C2 (update range "0 to 99") is in the range of "0", as the jackpot type A "jackpot A" is associated and defined. This "jackpot A" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 10 rounds, and the variable probability jackpot game is executed. It is a jackpot type in which "120" is set to the value. If the ball does not flow down (pass through) the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable prize winning device 65 during the variable probability jackpot game (when not V), the variable probability counter 203vu after the jackpot game ends. is set to "0".

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, the random number (counter value) associated with the "jackpot A" is one, so the first special symbol lottery. , the ratio of determining "jackpot A" is 1% (1/100).

The value of the first hit type counter C2 (update range “0 to 99”) is defined in association with “jackpot B” as the jackpot type with respect to the range of “1”. This "jackpot B" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is three rounds, and the variable probability jackpot game is executed. It is a jackpot type in which "120" is set to the value. If the ball does not flow down (pass through) the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable prize winning device 65 during the variable probability jackpot game (when not V), the variable probability counter 203vu after the jackpot game ends. is set to "0".

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, the random number (counter value) associated with the "jackpot B" is one, so the first special symbol lottery. , the ratio of determining "jackpot B" is 1% (1/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 691(a), "jackpot C" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "2 to 99". This "jackpot C" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is three rounds, and a jackpot game is normally executed. It is a jackpot type in which "0" is set to the value of .

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 98 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot C", so the first special symbol lottery. , the ratio of determining "jackpot C" is 98% (98/100).

That is, the two jackpot types (jackpot B, jackpot C) that can be set when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery have the same number of rounds of the jackpot game, but the number of rounds in the jackpot game is the same. The easiness of passing the ball through a specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the game is different, and it is easier for the ball to flow down to the specific gate during the big win game in the "jackpot B" than in the "jackpot C". It is constructed so that a jackpot game is executed. Therefore, the "jackpot B" is a jackpot type that is more advantageous than the "jackpot C".

Next, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 24", and "jackpot A" is defined as the jackpot type. there is This "jackpot A" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 10 rounds, and the variable probability jackpot game is executed. It is a jackpot type in which "120" is set to the value. If the ball does not flow down (pass through) the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable prize winning device 65 during the variable probability jackpot game (when not V), the variable probability counter 203vu after the jackpot game ends. is set to "0".

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the special winning type counter C2, 25 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot A", so in the lottery of the second special symbol In the case of a big win, the ratio of determining "jackpot A" is 25% (25/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 691(a), "jackpot B" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "25 to 41". This "jackpot B" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 3 rounds, and the probability variable jackpot game is executed. It is a jackpot type in which "120" is set to the value of. If the ball does not flow down (pass through) the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable prize winning device 65 during the variable probability jackpot game (when not V), the variable probability counter 203vu after the jackpot game ends. is set to "0".

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 12 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot B", so the second special symbol lottery. , the ratio of determining "jackpot B" is 12% (12/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 691(a), "jackpot D" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "42 to 51". This "jackpot D" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is two rounds, and the variable probability jackpot game is executed. It is a jackpot type in which "120" is set to the value of. If the ball does not flow down (pass through) the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable prize winning device 65 during the variable probability jackpot game (when not V), the variable probability counter 203vu after the jackpot game ends. is set to "0".

Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, 10 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot D", so the second special symbol lottery. , the ratio of determining "jackpot D" is 10% (10/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 691(a), "jackpot E" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "52 to 68". This "jackpot E" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 4 rounds, and the probability variable jackpot game is executed. It is a jackpot type in which "120" is set to the value of. If the ball does not flow down (pass through) the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable prize winning device 65 during the variable probability jackpot game (when not V), the variable probability counter 203vu after the jackpot game ends. is set to "0".

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 17 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot B", so the second special symbol lottery. , the ratio of determining "jackpot E" is 17% (17/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 691(a), "jackpot F" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "69 to 82". This "jackpot F" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 5 rounds and the probability variable jackpot game is executed. It is a jackpot type in which "120" is set to the value of. If the ball does not flow down (pass through) the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable prize winning device 65 during the variable probability jackpot game (when not V), the variable probability counter 203vu after the jackpot game ends. is set to "0".

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, 14 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot F", so the second special symbol lottery. , the ratio of determining "jackpot F" is 14% (14/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 691(a), "jackpot G" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "83 to 90". This "jackpot G" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 6 rounds and the probability variable jackpot game is executed. It is a jackpot type in which "120" is set to the value of. If the ball does not flow down (pass through) the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable prize winning device 65 during the variable probability jackpot game (when not V), the variable probability counter 203vu after the jackpot game ends. is set to "0".

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, there are 8 random numbers (counter values) associated with the "jackpot G", so the second special symbol lottery. , the ratio of determining "jackpot G" is 8% (8/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 691(a), "jackpot H" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "91 to 97". This "jackpot H" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 7 rounds and the probability variable jackpot game is executed. It is a jackpot type in which "120" is set to the value of. If the ball does not flow down (pass through) the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable prize winning device 65 during the variable probability jackpot game (when not V), the variable probability counter 203vu after the jackpot game ends. is set to "0".

Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "jackpot H" is 7, so the second special symbol lottery. , the ratio of determining "jackpot H" is 7% (7/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 691(a), "jackpot I" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "98". This "jackpot I" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds and the probability variable jackpot game is executed. It is a jackpot type in which "120" is set to the value of. If the ball does not flow down (pass through) the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable prize winning device 65 during the variable probability jackpot game (when not V), the variable probability counter 203vu after the jackpot game ends. is set to "0".

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, the random number (counter value) associated with the "jackpot I" is one, so the second special symbol lottery. , the ratio of determining "jackpot I" is 1% (1/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 691(a), "jackpot J" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "99". This "jackpot J" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 9 rounds and the probability variable jackpot game is executed. It is a jackpot type in which "120" is set to the value of. If the ball does not flow down (pass through) the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable prize winning device 65 during the variable probability jackpot game (when not V), the variable probability counter 203vu after the jackpot game ends. is set to "0".

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, the random number (counter value) associated with the "jackpot J" is one, so the second special symbol lottery. , the ratio of determining the "jackpot J" is 1% (1/100).

That is, nine types of jackpots (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot D, jackpot E, jackpot F, jackpot G, jackpot H, jackpot I jackpot J) that can be set when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery are: In both cases, the probability variable jackpot game is executed, but the number of rounds of the jackpot game is made different, and the "jackpot A" in which the most round games are executed is the jackpot type most advantageous to the player, and the "jackpot D". is the most disadvantageous jackpot type for the player.

As described above, when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the probability variable jackpot game is always executed, so the probability variable jackpot game is executed at a rate of 2% than the first special symbol lottery. In terms of the game state set after the end of the jackpot game, it becomes an advantageous jackpot type.

Returning to FIG. 688, the description continues. The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A rough display mode (fluctuation time) such as so-called short time out, long time out, normal reach, super reach is determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Determination of the display mode is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. be. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 709), which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. A variation pattern selection table 202vc (see FIG. 692) storing a random number for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number) of the variation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is

Here, with reference to FIG. 692, the variation pattern table 202sc will be described. As shown in FIG. 692(a), this variation pattern table 202sc includes a variation pattern table 202vc1 for big hits (see FIG. 692(b)) and a variation pattern table 202sc2 for loss (normal) (see FIG. 692(c)). And, at least the fluctuation pattern table 202sc3 (see FIG. 692(d)) for deviation (probability variation/time reduction) is defined.

First, with reference to FIG. 692(b), the jackpot table 202sc1 will be described. FIG. 692(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this big winning variation pattern table 202vc1. The big win variation pattern table 202vc1 is a data table that defines the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win. As variation patterns of the jackpot, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are defined. In the big hit variation pattern table 202vc1, each variation pattern is associated with each value of the variation type counter CS1.

Specifically, as the judgment value of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the range of "0 to 50" is associated with the fluctuation pattern of various normal reach (30 seconds), and the range of "51 to 179" is associated with various super reach (60 seconds) is associated with the variation pattern, and the range of "180 to 198" is associated with various special reach (90 seconds) variation patterns. The MPU 201 of the main controller 110 selects a variation pattern in which a determination value corresponding to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 is set when selecting a variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit. Selection is made from the jackpot variation pattern table 202vc1.

FIG. 692(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202vc2. The (normal) variation pattern table 202vc2 for loss is a data table that defines the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a failure in the low probability state of the special symbol. . If the lottery result of the special symbol is out, as described above, the stop type is completely out (non-reach) from the stop type selection table (not shown) or the out of reach (common reach). It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, for example, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79" in the low probability state of the special symbol, it is set to be completely out, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", it is out. Set (front-to-back out-of-reach reach, front-to-back out-of-reach reach).

Here, when the variation pattern type is complete failure, either a short failure (7 seconds) with a relatively short variation time or a long failure (10 seconds) with a relatively long variation time is set. "0 to 98" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for short deviation (7 seconds), and "99 to 198" is set for long deviation (10 seconds).

In addition, for the outlier reach, the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 149" Normal reach (30 seconds) out of the range, "150 to 197" out of range Super reach (60 seconds), but "198" is set to a different special reach (90 seconds).

In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the stop type when the lottery result of the special symbol is lost during the normal game state, and the variation obtained from the (normal) variation pattern table 202vc2 for loss. A variation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202vc2 based on the value of the type counter CS1.

FIG. 692(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation pattern table 202sc3. This deviation (probability variation / time reduction) variation pattern table 202sc3 is a data table that defines the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the special symbol lottery is lost in the probability variation state of the special symbol. be. In this deviation (probability variation/time reduction) variation pattern table 202sc3, the value of the set variation type counter CS1 is different from the above-described deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202vc2.

In addition, as described above, when the gaming state is the probability variable gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89" according to the stop type selection table (not shown), complete loss is determined. , and within the range of “90 to 99”, the out-of-reach reach (front-rear out-of-reach reach, reach other than front-rear out-of-order reach) is determined.

In this way, when the variable probability gaming state or the time-saving gaming state is higher than the normal gaming state, the probability of becoming a reach when it is out is set low. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the fact that the fluctuation time of the loss becomes longer at the time of the probability change, and the period until the big win becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the game is slowed down in the probability variable game state in which a big win is likely to occur, and the player feels bored.

Returning to FIG. 688, the description continues. The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by 1 in the range of 0 to 299, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 299). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 698), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start opening (through gate) 67. It is acquired at the same time and stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203vc of the RAM203.

Then, the value of the random number that is the winning of the normal symbol is set by the second winning random number table 202vd stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is the value of the second winning random number table 202vd. If it matches the value of the random number that is set as a hit, it is determined as a hit of the normal design (second design). In addition, this second winning random number table 202vd is divided into two types, one for when the probability is low for normal symbols and the other for when probability of winning is higher than when the probability is low for normal symbols, and included in each table. The number of random numbers to be a jackpot is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be winning different, the probability of winning is changed between when the probability of normal symbols is low and when the probability of normal symbols is high.

The contents defined in the second winning random number table 202vd will be described with reference to FIG. 691(b). FIG. 691(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second winning random number table 202vd. As shown in FIG. 691 (b), in the case of the low probability state of the normal design, the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is defined as "0 to 2" for the normal design, and the high probability of the normal design. In the case of the state, the second hit random number counter C4 obtained is defined to be in the range of "0 to 149".

That is, in this 22nd control example, when the low probability state of normal symbols is set, the probability (1/100) of winning in the lottery of normal symbols is set to a low probability. As a result, in the present embodiment in which the same game method (left-handed game) is executed in the normal state, which is a low probability state of normal symbols, and the time-saving state, which is a high probability state of normal symbols, during the normal state Since it is possible to make it difficult to win the normal game, it is possible to make it difficult for the normal game to be executed during the normal state and the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the high probability state of normal symbols is set, the probability (1/2) of winning in the lottery of normal symbols is set to a high probability. As a result, it is possible to facilitate execution of the normal pattern winning game based on the normal pattern winning during the time saving state.

In addition, in this 22nd control example, it is configured such that the variation time of different length is set as the variation time of the normal symbol variation for indicating the result of the normal symbol lottery according to the set game state. A longer variation time (for example, 10 seconds) is set when the normal pattern low probability state is set than when the normal pattern high probability state is set. In this way, by varying the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery and the length of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation according to the game state, winning in the normal symbol lottery and entering the second ball entrance 640. It is possible to easily set a game state (probability variable state, time saving state) in which it is easy to enter a ball.

Furthermore, in this 22nd control example, when a win is won in a normal symbol lottery executed in a state where the normal symbol low probability state is set, a plurality of balls are entered into the second ball entrance 640. It is configured to be able to execute a normal figure winning game in which the electric accessory 640a is opened in an operation mode (long opening) that can be performed. Therefore, even in a game state (normal state) in which it is difficult to win in the normal symbol lottery, it is possible to temporarily make it easier to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640, so any game state is possible. Even in the set state, the possibility of execution of the second special symbol lottery can be left for the player, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 299), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see Fig. 698). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 709).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main controller 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 687, the description continues. The ROM 202 has various data tables defined corresponding to the various counters shown in FIG. Here, with reference to FIG. 689(a), the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-second control example will be described. FIG. 689(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-second control example.

As shown in FIG. 689(a), the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-second control example includes a first winning random number table 202va, a first winning type selection table 202vb, a variation pattern selection table 202vc, a 2 has at least a random number table 202vd. The first winning random number table 202va, the first winning type selection table 202vb, the variation pattern selection table 202vc, and the second winning random number table 202vd were described above when describing the various counters shown in FIG. omitted.

Returning to FIG. 687, the description continues. The RAM 203 stores the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 in addition to the various counters shown in FIG. and a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 167) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 166) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 707) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

Also, as shown in FIG. 689(c), the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203va, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203vb, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203vc, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203vd, Special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ve, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203vf, variable probability flag 203vg, variable probability setting flag 203vh, variable probability passing counter 203vi, winning number counter 203vj, operation counter 203vk, notification counter 203vm, remaining ball timer flag 203vn, It has at least a remaining ball timer 203vo, a probability variable effective flag 203vp, a probability variable effective timer 203vr, a discharge number counter 203vs, a time saving counter 203vt, a probability variable counter 203vu, and a memory area 203vz.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203va has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area) as shown in FIG. , the values of the first winning random number counter C1 and the first winning type counter C2 obtained based on winning in the first winning port 64 are stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first winning port 64 (start winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to reserved fourth area) are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a special symbol lottery is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 which are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in the other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to the reservation area with the area number 1 smaller (first reservation area to third reservation area). done. In this embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203vb is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203va only in that the counter values obtained for the winning to the second winning opening 640 are respectively stored. are the same, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203va or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203vb, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203vc has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area ). Each of these areas stores a second winning random number counter C4.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through either the left or right normal starting port 67, and the acquired data is stored in the four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). Areas) are stored in ascending order of area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas. That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203va, the data corresponding to the winning are stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203vc is shifted to the execution area ( (moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes vacant. is shifted to a reserved area with an area number smaller by one. Also, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas in which the winning data are stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203vd is a variable display (third It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of waiting times) of variable display performed by the pattern display device 81 up to a maximum of 4 times. The initial value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203vd is set to zero. are added (see F604 in FIG. 703). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203vd is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed (see F211 in FIG. 699).

The value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203vd (the number of times N of holding the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number command (F212 in FIG. 699, FIG. 703 (see F605). The special symbol 1 reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203vd is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 changes the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203vd every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203vd is changed. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of held balls displayed. As a result, the number of variable display pending balls managed by the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223vb of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed to the actual variable display pending ball number that was held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next pending ball number command received.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of pending balls based on the number of pending balls command, and every time the number of pending balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of pending balls. Send a pitch command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls pattern (reserved pattern) of the third pattern display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the number of reserved balls command for display.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ve differs from the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203vd in that the number of reserved balls that have entered the second winning opening 640 is stored. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, when the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ve is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the special symbol 2 reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203vf sets the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the normal start port 67 to a maximum of 4. It is a counter that counts up to times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203vf is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the normal starting port 67 and the number of reserved balls displayed in a variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. (See F904 in FIG. 706). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203vf is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see F805 in FIG. 705).

When the ball passes through either the left or right normal start opening 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203vf (the number of times M of fluctuation display is reserved in normal symbols) is less than 4, the second hit random number counter C4. is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203vc (F905 in FIG. 706). On the other hand, when the ball passes through either the left or right normal start opening 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203vf is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203vc ( F903 in FIG. 706: No).

The probability variation flag 203vg is a flag indicating whether or not the current gaming state is a probability variation gaming state (probability variation gaming state). When the variable probability flag 203vg is set to ON, it indicates that the gaming state is a variable probability gaming state, and when it is OFF, it indicates that it is a low probability gaming state (including a time-saving gaming state). In this 22nd control example, when the variable probability setting flag 203vh, which will be described later, is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game, the variable probability flag 203vg is set to ON (see F1304 in FIG. 712). On the other hand, it is set to OFF when a jackpot game is started. In the initialized state, it is set to OFF, and when a normal power failure occurs, the state immediately before the power failure is backed up.

The variable probability setting flag 203vh is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the gaming state to the variable probability gaming state after the jackpot game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is set to the variable probability game state is determined by whether or not the game ball has passed through the variable probability switch 65e3 (see FIG. 671(a)) during the jackpot game. Here, when the game ball passes through this variable probability switch 65e3, the variable probability setting flag 203vh is set to ON (F1242 in FIG. 714). On the other hand, the variable probability setting flag 203vh is set to OFF based on the variable probability flag 203vg being set to ON (F1306 in FIG. 712). The variable probability setting flag 203vh is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power was turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Also, it is set to off in the initialized state.

In addition, when the probability variation setting flag 203vh is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the probability variation switch 65e3 has passed before the power is turned off. 203vh may be formally set to ON and restored. In this case, whether the variable probability switch 65e3 is passed before the power is turned off can be determined by whether the variable probability passage counter 203vi, which will be described later, is greater than zero. By configuring in this way, in a state where the power is turned off, it is possible to reduce the damage on the side of the amusement arcade by determining fraud such as rewriting the probability variable setting flag 203vh to ON and turning on the power again. can.

The probability variable passage counter 203vi is for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the probability variable switch 65e3 in one round (two rounds of the jackpots A, B, D to J in this 22nd control example) during the jackpot game. is a counter. In addition, it can be determined whether or not all the game balls that have won the first variable winning device 65 have been discharged by the sum of the probability variable passage counter 203vi and the discharge number counter 203vs, which will be described later. This variable probability passing counter 203vi is updated by adding one by one when passing the variable probability switch 65e3 (F1241 in FIG. 714). In addition, after executing the process of whether or not the number of game balls that have won the first variable prize winning device 65 and the number of discharge matches, the initial value is reset to "0" (F1271 in FIG. 715). It should be noted that the probability variable passage counter 203vi is backed up when the power is turned off. It is set to 0 in the initialized state.

The prize winning number counter 203vj counts the number of game balls that have entered the specific prize winning port 65a of the first variable prize winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game (that is, the number of game balls that have entered the first variable prize winning device 65). A counter for counting. Specifically, based on the detection that the game ball has passed through the detection port 65a1 (see FIG. 671) provided in the first variable winning device 65, it is updated by adding one by one (see FIG. 77). F1233). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of prizes won by the first variable prize winning device 65 (the value of the prize number counter 203vj) and the number of discharges (the total value of the discharge number counter 203vs and the probability variable passage counter 203vi) match (F1267 in FIG. 715), the initial value is reset to "0". The value of the winning number counter 203vj is backed up when the power is turned off. It is set to 0 in the initialized state.

The operation counter 203vk is a counter for timing (counting) the time during which the flow path solenoid (probability variable solenoid) 65k is set to ON (excitation). In the pachinko machine 10, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to ON for 5 seconds based on the start of the 2nd round for the jackpot A, and the flow path solenoid 65k is set to ON for 0.5 seconds based on the start of the 2nd round for the jackpot C. set. In the operation counter 203vk, a counter value corresponding to 5 seconds is set as the start data of 2 rounds for the jackpot A, and a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set for the jackpot C (F1202 in FIG. 711). On the other hand, in the process of F1239 of the winning process 22 (FIG. 714, F1115) executed by the MPU 2011 of the main controller 110, the value is decremented by one and updated. Also, when the value of the operation counter 203vk is determined to be 0 (F1243 in FIG. 714: Yes), the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off. The operation counter 203vk is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to 0 as an initial value in the initialized state. Thus, by setting the operation counter 203vk and controlling the flow path solenoid 65k, winning to the variable probability switch 65e3 can be controlled according to the jackpot type.

The notification counter 203vm is a counter for determining the timing of outputting a notification effect (in this 22nd control example, the sound "look at the liquid crystal") for attracting the player's attention. In this 22nd control example, the notification counter 203vm corresponding to 1 second is set at the end timing of the second round (10 balls won in the first variable prize winning device 65 or 30 seconds have passed). This notification counter 203vm is decremented by one and updated by the processing of F1224 of the notification processing of main controller 110 (FIG. 713, F1114). When the notification counter 203vm becomes 0, the notification command to be output to the sound lamp control device 113 is set. Upon receiving this command, the sound lamp control device 113 executes the processing for outputting the sound described above.

With this configuration, the sound "Look at the liquid crystal" is output before the start of the second round in which the flow path solenoid 65k is operated, so that the player can see the third pattern display device corresponding to the liquid crystal. Watch 81. In the second round, the flow path solenoid 65k is activated, and when the player watches the operation, the type of jackpot being executed is determined by the operation period of the flow path solenoid 65k. In order to make the player continue to expect that the variable probability game state will be provided until the end of the jackpot game, a notification that makes it difficult for the player to see the movement of the switching member 65h (see FIG. 671 (a)). A performance is running. However, when the second round is over, there is a risk that the player will look at the switching member 65h during the interval display, so the player is notified by voice to keep an eye on the third symbol display device 81 during the interval display. A notification effect is executed. As a result, the player's attention can be attracted to the displayed display contents after the interval effect is executed, and the player's attention can be diverted from the operation of the switching member 65h.

In the twenty-second control example, the third symbol display device 81 is notified to be shown, thereby diverting the player's attention away from the switching member 65h. The motion of the switching member 65h may be reported to be hidden by the player's hand by notifying that the player's hand is held over the first variable prize winning device 65 . Also, not only the third symbol display device 81 but also the decorative lamp 34 may be notified to the player to look at, thereby diverting the player's attention. Furthermore, during the second round, a three-dimensional code or the like may be displayed to alert the player to read it with a mobile phone, thereby diverting the player's attention. In the 22nd control example, the maximum time (five seconds from the start of the second round) until the action of the switching member 65h ends is set for the distraction effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress the problem of determining whether the jackpot A or the jackpot B is determined depending on the notification time.

The remaining ball timer flag 203vn is a flag indicating that the opening/closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203vn is set to ON, it indicates that the opening/closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is set from the open state to the closed state in one round. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203vn to ON, the remaining ball timer 203vo described later is incremented by one and updated (see F1264 in FIG. 715). The remaining ball timer 203vo is a counter for determining the time after the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed, and determines whether the time required for the game balls in the first variable winning device 65 to be discharged has passed. It is a counter for

The remaining ball timer 203vo discharges the winning game balls to the first variable prize winning device 65 when the opening/closing door 65f1 of the first variable prize winning device 65 is closed after one preset round is completed. is a counter for determining whether the required time has passed. In this 22nd control example, the time required until the winning game ball in the first variable winning device 81 is discharged is 2 seconds, and in this 22nd control example, the counter value corresponding to 3 seconds remains in advance. It is set as the upper limit value of the sphere timer 203vo. Based on the fact that the remaining ball timer 203vo reaches the upper limit value (3 seconds in this 22nd control example), it is determined whether or not the winning number to the first variable winning device 65 and the discharged number match. is executed (F1267 in FIG. 715). If they do not match, an error command is set to notify you. Therefore, it is possible to notify early that game balls are clogged in the first variable winning device 65. - 特許庁Therefore, the game ball is illegally left in the first variable prize winning device 65, and an impact or the like is applied at the start timing of the second round to make the game ball reach the switching member 65h earlier than it actually is, and the big hit B is achieved. Even if there is, it is possible to suppress the illegality of passing the game ball through the variable probability switch 65e3.

In addition, if the winning number and the discharge number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the probability variation setting flag 203vh is set even if the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3. It may be configured not to be set to ON. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress that the probability variable gaming state is incorrectly given.

Probability variation effective flag 203vp is a flag for determining whether or not to validate the passage when the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 65e3 after the flow path solenoid 65k is set to be off. When this variable probability effective flag 203vp is set to ON, based on the passage solenoid 65k is ON, the gaming ball that has flowed into the special discharge port 65e2 (see FIG. 671 (a)) indicates that it is less than the time required to pass through the That is, the period in which the variable probability effective flag 203vp is ON indicates that the game ball passes through the variable probability switch 65e3 during a normal period.

The variable probability valid timer 203vr is a counter for counting the time after the variable probability valid flag 203vp is set to ON. After the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off by this variable probability valid timer 203vr, it is possible to determine (measure) the period required to normally pass through the variable probability switch 65e3. In this 22nd control example, the time required for the game ball entering the special discharge port 65e2 to pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 is 1 second. The upper limit value of the variable probability valid timer 203vr is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds, and even if the variable probability switch 65e3 is passed after that, it is determined as illegal and not determined as passing.

As a result, in a state where the switching member 65h is not guided to the special discharge port 65e2, the ball is illegally entered into the special discharge port 65e2 to pass the game ball through the variable probability switch 65e3, or the game ball is played with a piano wire or the like from below the variable probability switch 65e3. It is possible to suppress the damage caused by fraud such as pushing up the ball to pass through or misdetecting the passage of the magnetic sensor by radio waves or the like.

The discharge number counter 203vs is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (see FIG. 671(a)) in one round. This ejection number counter 203vs is reset to 0, which is the initial value, after the number of game balls winning the first variable prize winning device 65 and the ejection number are determined (F1271 in FIG. 715).

The counter 203vt during time saving is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the time saving game state. During this time saving counter 203vt, 100 is set when the variable probability setting flag is off at the end of the jackpot game. That is, in this 22nd control example, when the variable probability game state is not set after the jackpot game, the state shifts to the time saving game state of 100 times.

During probability variation counter 203vu is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in probability variation gaming state. This variable probability counter 203vu is set to 120 when the variable probability setting flag is ON at the end of the jackpot game. That is, in this 22nd control example, when the probability variation gaming state is set after the end of the jackpot game, it shifts to the probability variation gaming state of 120 times.

The other memory area 203vz is set (stored) with other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, and the like.

Returning to FIG. 687, the description continues. The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (speaker 308, etc.) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and outputs variable effects (variable display ) and the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

As shown in FIG. 687, an input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, the frame button 22A (effect button 22, selection button 600), and the drive motor group. ing. This drive motor group includes a motor 771 for a sword role, motors 773 and 774 for a change role, and other motors.

Each motor described above is composed of a stepping motor and a motor driver, and an operation command (operation (rotation) speed (pps), operation step) for setting the operation content for each motor driver from the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 A command that can specify the number and direction of movement (rotation) is output. The motor operation command output from the audio lamp control device 113 is set by referring to the contents defined in the operation scenario table 222vf stored in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 .

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22A, and when the frame button 22A is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the rear image is an image displayed on the rear side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In addition, when the frame button 22A is operated by the player, a role product driving command is transmitted to the other device 228 in order to drive a performance role product (not shown), or a command corresponding to the operation contents of the frame button 22A is sent. A sound output command for outputting sound to the sound output device 226 is set, and a lamp output command for causing the lamp display device 227 to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the operation content of the frame button 22A is set. can be configured to

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the error type. Send to device 114 . The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

Here, the contents defined in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twenty-second control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 693(a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 contains a variation pattern selection table 222va, a hold change effect lottery table 222vb, a hold color selection table 222vc, a hold change scenario selection table 222vd, At least a shutter closing reach selection table 222ve and an operation scenario table 222vf are stored.

In the variation pattern selection table 222va, a variation pattern of each variation pattern type (out of range, out of reach, various types of reach, etc.) is set to a counter value for selecting a variation pattern (not shown). The sound ramp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, the result of the suitability determination, and the acquired counter value for selection. This allows the audio ramp control device 113 to select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the variation time and the type of variation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode from being displayed frequently, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early.

In the variation pattern selection table 222va, a variation pattern of each variation pattern type (out of range, out of reach, various types of reach, etc.) is set to a counter value for selecting a variation pattern (not shown). The sound ramp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, the result of the suitability determination, and the acquired counter value for selection. This allows the audio ramp control device 113 to select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the variation time and the type of variation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode from being displayed frequently, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early.

In the holding change effect lottery table 222vb, the counter value of the first effect counter 223vf is set with the mode of the holding change effect (no execution, single hold change effect, compound hold change effect). When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a winning command for a special figure from the main control device 110, based on this pending change effect lottery table 222vb, the pending change effect is applied to the pending symbol corresponding to the winning information. Decide whether to execute or not.

Here, with reference to FIG. 694(a), the contents of the pending change effect lottery table 222vb will be described. FIG. 694(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the pending change effect lottery table 222vb. As shown in FIG. 694(a), in this 22nd control example, the reserved symbol corresponding to the winning command for the special figure received from the main controller 110 is reserved based on the counter value of the first effect counter 223vf. It decides whether or not to execute the change production.

The value of the first effect counter 223vf is defined in association with the range of "0 to 29" to "do not execute the pending change effect", and the range of "30 to 89" is defined to be "single pending change effect". The range of "90 to 98" is defined in association with "composite hold change effect".

Here, the single pending change effect means that when a winning command for a special figure is received from the main controller 110, the pending color at the start of display of the pending design is the pending color determined from the pending color selection table 222vc. This is the presentation to display. Incidentally, when the pending change effect is not executed, "white" is set as the pending color.

In addition, the composite pending change effect is a pending change effect using a plurality of pending patterns, and based on a preset pending change scenario, the reserved colors of the multiple pending patterns displayed at the start of the special pattern fluctuation It is a production that changes the

Returning to FIG. 693(a), the description continues. In the reserved color selection table 222vc, reserved colors are set to the counter values of the second effect counter 223vg. This pending color selection table 222vc is a table that is referenced to determine the pending symbol color corresponding to the winning command received from main controller 110 when the single pending change effect is executed (see FIG. 722). F2559).

Here, the contents of the reserved color selection table 222vc will be described with reference to FIG. 694(b). FIG. 694(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the reserved color selection table 222vc. As shown in FIG. 694(b), in the twenty-second control example, the reserved color of the reserved symbol is determined based on the result of the success/failure determination and the counter value of the second effect counter 223vg.

If the success or failure determination result is "hit", the value of the second effect counter 223vg is defined in association with the reserved color "white" for the range of "0 to 29", for the range of "30 to 59" , the reserved color "blue" is defined in correspondence, the reserved color "yellow" is defined in correspondence with the range of "60 to 89", and the reserved color "purple" is defined in the range of "90 to 119" is defined in correspondence, the reserved color "green" is defined in correspondence with the range of "120 to 179", and the reserved color "red" is defined in correspondence with the range of "180 to 194" , and the range of "195 to 198" are defined in association with the reserved color "rainbow". When the success/failure determination result is "hit", the flag 223vm during restriction of the pending effect is set to ON regardless of which reserved color is selected, and the pending effect information storage area 223vl indicates "hit pending". Information is stored.

The pending effect information storage area 223vl is provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the pending effect information for executing the pending change effect on the pending pattern.

The pending performance restriction flag 223vm is a flag for preventing a new pending change performance for other pending patterns from being set during the period when the pending pattern targeted for the pending change performance is displayed. As described above, in the 22nd control example, a reserved change effect is executed in which the reserved color of the target reserved symbol and the reserved colors of the preceding and subsequent reserved symbols are combined (see FIGS. 672 to 677). In this pending change effect, the left change role Ym1 and the right change role Ym2 are movable in an operation scenario corresponding to a predetermined pending change scenario. When a different pending change scenario is set for the pending pattern, the execution timing of the pending change performance overlaps, and there is a risk of giving wrong game information to the player. During the period in which the medium flag 223vm is ON, the pending change effect is not newly executed.

On the other hand, if the success/failure determination result is "off", the value of the second effect counter 223vg is defined in the range of "0 to 49" in association with the reserved color "white", and the range of "50 to 149" is defined. The reserved color "blue" is defined in association with the range "150 to 174", the reserved color "yellow" is defined in association with the range "175 to 194", and the reserved color " Purple” is defined in correspondence, the reserved color “green” is defined in correspondence with the range of “195 to 197”, and the reserved color “red” is defined in correspondence with the range of “198”. ing. When the success/failure determination result is "out", regardless of which reserved color is selected, the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to OFF, and the reserved effect information storage area 223vl corresponds to the selected reserved color. Reserved color information is stored.

As shown in FIG. 694(b), when the success/failure determination result is “hit”, the range in which the reserved colors “green” and “red” are selected is larger than when the success/failure determination result is “miss”. , and "Rainbow" can be selected. In this way, by setting a reserved color that is likely to be selected depending on whether the success/failure determination result is "hit" or "miss", the player can make a success/failure determination based on the reserved color of the displayed reserved symbol. You can predict the outcome.

In the 22nd control example, seven reserved colors are used, but the number of reserved colors is not limited to seven.

Returning to FIG. 693(a), the description is continued. The pending change scenario selection table 222vd is received from the main controller 110 based on the success/failure determination result, the previous pending color, and the value of the second effect counter 223vg when the composite pending change effect is executed. It is a table referred to in order to determine the pending effect information such as the pending color of the pending symbol corresponding to the winning command and the pending change scenario.

The contents of pending change scenario selection table 222vd will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 695 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the pending change scenario selection table 222vd. As shown in FIG. 695, the pending change scenario selection table 222vd includes the result of winning judgment included in the winning command received from main controller 110, the pending color of the pending symbol corresponding to the previous winning command, and the second effect. Based on the value of the counter 223vg, the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the received prize command is determined, and whether or not to turn on the pending change effect limiting flag 223sm and the post-holding setting flag 223vn is set. In addition, a pending effect information storage area 223vl stores information for executing an effect in which a pending change scenario is set and the pending color changes at a predetermined timing during the period until the variation of the special symbol based on the pending pattern is started. store in

The post-hold setting flag 223vn is provided in the sound lamp control device 113, and when the hold change scenario of the compound hold change effect is set, the hold color of the hold pattern corresponding to the next received winning command is set. This is a flag for forcibly deciding. Turned on when a specific pending change scenario is determined in the composite pending change effect setting process 22 (see F2517 in FIG. 723) (see F2605 in FIG. 723), and when the pending color of the next received winning command is determined It is turned off (see F2553 in FIG. 722).

Returning to FIG. 695, the description continues. If the value of the second effect counter 223vg is in the range of "0 to 49" when the success/failure determination result is "hit" and the reserved color of the previous reserved pattern is "white", the received winning command "Purple" is determined as the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to , and the reserved effect restricted flag 223vm is set to ON. In the pending effect information storage area 223vl, "purple" is stored as the pending color, and "suspended change scenario 1" is stored as the pending change scenario. In the pending change scenario 1, the reserved color of the reserved pattern immediately before the reserved color of the target reserved pattern "purple" is "white". This is a scenario where no color is transplanted and the reserved color of the reserved symbol does not change. In this case, since the reserved color for the next received winning command is not specified, the post-hold setting flag 223vn is kept off.

In this 22nd control example, when the "white" reserved pattern is hidden, the reserved color of the reserved pattern is not changed, but it is not limited to this, and the reserved pattern to be changed alone executes the reserved change effect. It is good also as a structure to carry out.

If the value of the second effect counter 223vg is in the range of "50 to 89" when the success/failure determination result is "hit" and the reserved color of the previous reserved symbol is "white", the received winning command "Purple" is determined as the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to , and the reserved effect restricted flag 223vm is set to ON. In the pending effect information storage area 223vl, "purple" is stored as the pending color, and "suspended change scenario 2" is stored as the pending change scenario. In the pending change scenario 2, since the reserved color of the reserved design immediately before the reserved color "purple" of the target reserved design is "white", when the target reserved design is hidden by the right change accessory Ym1, In this scenario, "blue" is transplanted from the target reserved pattern "purple" to the previous reserved pattern, and the target reserved pattern is changed to "red", and the previous reserved pattern is changed to "blue". In this case, since the reserved color for the next received winning command is not specified, the post-hold setting flag 223vn is kept off.

In this way, the reserved symbol hidden by the change role Ym1, Ym2 can be changed to a display mode in which the probability of winning the big win is high, so that the player can be provided with an unexpected effect. .

If the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "90 to 198" when the success/failure determination result is "win" and the reserved color of the previous reserved pattern is "white", it corresponds to the received winning command. "Blue" is determined as the reserved color of the reserved pattern to be played, and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to ON. In the pending effect information storage area 223vl, "blue" is stored as the pending color, "yellow" is stored as the pending color of the pending symbol corresponding to the next winning command, and "suspended change scenario 3" is stored as the pending change scenario. In the hold change scenario 3, the hold color of the target hold design "blue" is transplanted with the hold color of the next hold design "yellow", the target hold design is changed to "green", and the next hold design is held. This is a scenario where the color changes from 'yellow' to 'white'. In this case, since the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command is specified as "yellow", the post-hold setting flag 223vn is set to ON.

If the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "0 to 69" when the success/failure determination result is "hit" and the reserved color of the previous reserved symbol is "blue", it corresponds to the received winning command. "Yellow" is determined as the reserved color of the reserved pattern to be played, and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to ON. In the pending effect information storage area 223vl, "yellow" is stored as the pending color, and "suspended change scenario 4" is stored as the pending change scenario. In the pending change scenario 4, the pending color “yellow” of the target pending pattern is transplanted with “blue”, which is the pending color of the previous pending pattern, and the previous pending pattern is changed to “white”. This is a scenario in which the reserved color of the reserved pattern changes from "yellow" to "green". In this case, since the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command is not specified, the post-hold setting flag 223vn is kept off.

If the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "70 to 149" when the success/failure determination result is "win" and the reserved color of the previous reserved symbol is "blue", it corresponds to the received winning command. "White" is determined as the reserved color of the reserved pattern to be played, and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to ON. In addition, the pending effect information storage area 223vl stores "white" as the pending color, "purple" as the pending color of the pending symbol corresponding to the next winning command, and "suspended change scenario 5" as the pending change scenario. In the pending change scenario 5, the pending color “white” of the target pending design is transplanted from “purple” to “red”, which is the pending color of the next pending design, and the target pending design is changed to “red”. This is a scenario in which the reserved color of the reserved pattern changes from "purple" to "blue". In this case, since the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command is specified as "purple", the post-hold setting flag 223vn is set to ON.

If the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "150 to 198" when the success/failure determination result is "hit" and the reserved color of the previous reserved symbol is "blue", it corresponds to the received winning command. "Yellow" is determined as the reserved color of the reserved pattern to be played, and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to ON. In the pending performance information storage area 223vl, "yellow" is stored as the pending color, "red" is stored as the pending color of the pending symbol corresponding to the next winning command, and "suspended change scenario 6" is stored as the pending change scenario. In the pending change scenario 6, the pending color “yellow” of the target pending pattern is transplanted with “blue”, which is the pending color of the previous pending pattern, and “red”, which is the pending color of the next pending pattern, and the target In this scenario, the reserved pattern is changed to "rainbow", the reserved color of the previous reserved pattern is changed from "blue" to "white", and the reserved color of the next reserved pattern is changed from "red" to "white". In this case, since the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command is specified as "red", the post-hold setting flag 223vn is set to ON.

In this way, even if a reserved pattern (red reserved pattern) with a high probability of winning a jackpot is displayed, by transplanting to another reserved pattern, a reserved pattern with a higher probability of winning a jackpot ( rainbow reserved pattern), and even if the reserved pattern in the display mode with high expectation of winning the jackpot is displayed first, it is not known to which reserved pattern it will be transplanted until the reserved change effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the lottery game based on the reserved ball acquired before the reserved pattern of the display mode with high expectation of winning the jackpot from becoming a dead game.

If the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "0 to 149" when the success/failure determination result is "hit" and the reserved color of the previous reserved pattern is "yellow", it corresponds to the received winning command. "Blue" is determined as the reserved color of the reserved pattern to be played, and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to ON. In the pending effect information storage area 223vl, "blue" is stored as the pending color, and "suspended change scenario 7" is stored as the pending change scenario. In the pending change scenario 7, the pending color “blue” of the target pending pattern is transplanted with “yellow”, which is the pending color of the previous pending pattern, and the previous pending pattern is changed to “white”. This is a scenario in which the reserved color of the reserved pattern is variable to "green". In this case, since the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command is not specified, the post-hold setting flag 223vn is kept off.

If the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "150 to 198" when the success/failure determination result is "hit" and the reserved color of the previous reserved pattern is "yellow", it corresponds to the received winning command. "Blue" is determined as the reserved color of the reserved pattern to be played, and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to ON. In the pending performance information storage area 223vl, "blue" is stored as the pending color, "red" is stored as the pending color of the pending symbol corresponding to the next winning command, and "suspended change scenario 8" is stored as the pending change scenario. Reservation change scenario 8 transplants the reservation color of the next reserved pattern, ``red'', to the reserved color of the target reserved pattern, ``blue'', changes the target reserved pattern to ``purple'', and holds the next reserved pattern. This is a scenario where the color changes to "white". In this case, since the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command is specified as "red", the post-hold setting flag 223vn is set to ON.

As described above, in the 22nd control example, the reserved color "red" is a display mode with a higher expectation of winning the jackpot than the reserved color "purple", and the reserved pattern display mode is a lower display mode. However, in the 22nd control example, only when a jackpot is won, it is possible to change the display mode to a lower order. . By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a game with unexpectedness to the player.

If the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "0 to 99" when the success/failure determination result is "hit" and the reserved color of the previous reserved pattern is "purple", it corresponds to the received winning command. "White" is determined as the reserved color of the reserved pattern to be played, and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to ON. In the pending effect information storage area 223vl, "white" is stored as the pending color, and "suspended change scenario 9" is stored as the pending change scenario. In the pending change scenario 9, the pending color "white" of the target pending design is transplanted from the pending color "purple" of the previous pending design to "red", and the pending color of the target pending design is changed to "red". This is a scenario in which the reserved color of the previous reserved symbol is changed to "blue". In this case, since the reserved color for the next received winning command is not specified, the post-hold setting flag 223vn is kept off.

If the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "100 to 149" when the success/failure determination result is "hit" and the reserved color of the previous reserved pattern is "purple", it corresponds to the received winning command. "White" is determined as the reserved color of the reserved pattern to be played, and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to ON. In the pending effect information storage area 223vl, "white" is stored as the pending color, and "suspended change scenario 10" is stored as the pending change scenario. The pending change scenario 10 is a scenario in which the pending color "white" of the target pending pattern is changed to "green" alone. In this case, since the reserved color for the next received winning command is not specified, the post-hold setting flag 223vn is kept off.

If the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "150 to 198" when the success/failure determination result is "hit" and the reserved color of the previous reserved pattern is "purple", it corresponds to the received winning command. "Green" is determined as the reserved color of the reserved pattern, and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to OFF. In addition, "green" is stored as a reserved color in the reserved effect information storage area 223vl. In this case, the pending change scenario is not set, and the pending color of the pending symbol corresponding to the next winning command is not specified, so the post-holding setting flag 223vn is kept off.

If the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "0 to 198" when the success/failure determination result is "win" and the reserved color of the previous reserved symbol is "blue", it corresponds to the received winning command. "Yellow" is determined as the reserved color of the reserved pattern to be played, and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to ON. In addition, the pending effect information storage area 223vl stores "yellow" as the pending color, "blue" as the pending color of the pending symbol corresponding to the next winning command, and "suspended change scenario 11" as the pending change scenario. In the pending change scenario 11, the pending color “yellow” of the target pending pattern is transplanted with “red”, which is the pending color of the previous pending pattern, and “blue”, which is the pending color of the next pending pattern, and the target In this scenario, the reserved pattern is changed to "rainbow", the reserved color of the previous reserved pattern is changed from "red" to "white", and the reserved color of the next reserved pattern is changed from "blue" to "white". In this case, since the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command is specified as "blue", the post-hold setting flag 223vn is set to ON.

If the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "0 to 149" when the success/failure determination result is "out" and the reserved color of the previous reserved pattern is "white", it corresponds to the received winning command. "White" is determined as the reserved color of the reserved pattern to be played, and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to OFF. In addition, "white" is stored as a reserved color in the reserved effect information storage area 223vl. In this case, the pending change scenario is not set, and the pending color of the pending symbol corresponding to the next winning command is not specified, so the post-holding setting flag 223vn is kept off.

If the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "150 to 198" when the success/failure determination result is "out" and the reserved color of the previous reserved pattern is "white", it corresponds to the received winning command. "Blue" is determined as the reserved color of the reserved pattern to be played, and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to ON. In the pending effect information storage area 223vl, "blue" is stored as the pending color, "yellow" is stored as the pending color of the pending symbol corresponding to the next winning command, and "suspended change scenario 3" is stored as the pending change scenario. In this case, since the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command is specified as "yellow", the post-hold setting flag 223vn is set to ON.

If the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "0 to 169" when the success/failure determination result is "out" and the reserved color of the previous reserved symbol is "blue", it corresponds to the received winning command. "White" is determined as the reserved color of the reserved pattern to be played, and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to OFF. In addition, "white" is stored as a reserved color in the reserved effect information storage area 223vl. In this case, the pending change scenario is not set, and the pending color of the pending symbol corresponding to the next winning command is not specified, so the post-holding setting flag 223vn is kept off.

If the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "170 to 198" when the success/failure determination result is "out" and the reserved color of the previous reserved symbol is "blue", it corresponds to the received winning command. "Yellow" is determined as the reserved color of the reserved pattern to be played, and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to ON. In the pending effect information storage area 223vl, "yellow" is stored as the pending color, and "suspended change scenario 4" is stored as the pending change scenario. In addition, since the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command is not specified, the post-hold setting flag 223vn is kept off.

If the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "0 to 169" when the success/failure determination result is "out" and the reserved color of the previous reserved pattern is "yellow", it corresponds to the received winning command. "White" is determined as the reserved color of the reserved pattern to be played, and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to OFF. In addition, "white" is stored as a reserved color in the reserved effect information storage area 223vl. In this case, the pending change scenario is not set, and the pending color of the pending symbol corresponding to the next winning command is not specified, so the post-holding setting flag 223vn is kept off.

If the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "170 to 198" when the success/failure determination result is "out" and the reserved color of the previous reserved pattern is "yellow", it corresponds to the received winning command. "Blue" is determined as the reserved color of the reserved pattern to be played, and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to ON. In the pending effect information storage area 223vl, "blue" is stored as the pending color, and "suspended change scenario 7" is stored as the pending change scenario. In addition, since the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command is not specified, the post-hold setting flag 223vn is kept off.

If the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "0 to 129" when the success/failure determination result is "out" and the reserved color of the previous reserved pattern is "purple", it corresponds to the received winning command. "White" is determined as the reserved color of the reserved pattern to be played, and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to OFF. In addition, "white" is stored as a reserved color in the reserved effect information storage area 223vl. In this case, the pending change scenario is not set, and the pending color of the pending symbol corresponding to the next winning command is not specified, so the post-holding setting flag 223vn is kept off.

If the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "130 to 198" when the success/failure determination result is "out" and the reserved color of the previous reserved pattern is "purple", it corresponds to the received winning command. "White" is determined as the reserved color of the reserved pattern to be played, and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to ON. In the pending effect information storage area 223vl, "white" is stored as the pending color, and "suspended change scenario 9" is stored as the pending change scenario. In addition, since the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command is not specified, the post-hold setting flag 223vn is kept off.

If the value of the second production counter 223vg is "0 to 198" when the result of the judgment is "off" and the reserved color of the previous reserved pattern is other than "white, blue, yellow, purple" , "white" is determined as the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the received winning command, and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to OFF. In the pending effect information storage area 223vl, "white" is stored as the pending color, and "suspended change scenario 8" is stored as the pending change scenario. In addition, since the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command is not specified, the post-hold setting flag 223vn is kept off.

Thus, in the twenty-second control example, the pending pattern acquired after the pending change scenario of the pending change effect is set can be incorporated as a part of the pending change effect, and the next pending pattern. Since there is also a pattern in which the reserved color of the target reserved pattern is changed by acquiring , the player can be made to think to obtain the reserved pattern by making the player expect the reserved color to be changed.

Returning to FIG. 693(a), the description continues. The shutter closing reach selection table 222ve is a table referred to for setting the effect mode of the "shutter closing reach" executed as one of the special symbol variation effects in the 22nd control example. The contents of the shutter closing reach are as described above.

Here, with reference to FIG. 696, the contents of the shutter closing reach selection table 222ve will be described. FIG. 696 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the shutter closing reach selection table 222ve. This shutter closing reach selection table 222ve determines the effect mode based on the determination result of the special symbol in the variation, the hit type, and the value of the first effect counter 223vf.

If the result of the determination is "hit" and the hit type is "jackpot A", and the value of the first effect counter 223vf is "0 to 149", "closed reach 1" is determined. As for the closed reach 1, a "2" pattern is set as an initial pattern, and the pattern increases by one each time the shutter is closed. Therefore, when reaching the final stage (sixth stage), three "7" symbols are displayed.

On the other hand, when the success/failure determination result is "hit" and the hit type is "jackpot B, C", if the value of the first effect counter 223vf is "0 to 149", "closed reach 4" is determined. be done. A "3" pattern is set as an initial pattern for the closing reach 4, and the pattern increases by one each time the shutter is closed. Therefore, when reaching the final stage (sixth stage), three "8" symbols are displayed.

In the 22nd control example, only when the hit type is the jackpot A, three "7" symbols are displayed together, and when the hit types are the jackpots B and C, symbols other than the "7" pattern are displayed. It is configured to be displayed in a state in which three patterns are aligned. In this 22nd control example, since the number of rounds of the jackpot game is larger for the jackpot A than for the jackpots B and C, it is better for the player to have three "7" symbols in the shutter closing reach. , is more advantageous than other symbols are displayed. In this way, in the shutter-closed reach, the player can predict the type of win based on the type of pattern set as the initial pattern, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

If the result of the win/fail determination is "hit" and the hit type is "jackpot A", and the value of the first effect counter 223vf is "150 to 174", "closed reach 2" is determined. As for the closing reach 2, a "3" pattern is set as an initial pattern, and the pattern increases by one each time the shutter is closed. Therefore, when reaching the final stage (sixth stage), three "8" symbols are displayed. However, in Closed Reach 2, a "HOLD" capsule is granted upon reaching the third stage. This "HOLD" capsule is used when reaching the 5th stage as described above, and the pattern displayed at the time of reaching the 5th step ("7" pattern in this case) is maintained until reaching the 6th step. Therefore, in the closed reach 2, although the "3" symbol is set as the initial symbol, three "7" symbols are aligned when the final stage is reached.

Further, when the result of the success/failure determination is "hit" and the hit type is "jackpot A", if the value of the first effect counter 223vf is "175 to 198", "closed reach 3" is determined. . As for the closing reach 3, a "3" pattern is set as an initial pattern, and the pattern increases by one each time the shutter is closed. Therefore, when reaching the final stage (sixth stage), three "8" symbols are displayed. However, Closed Reach 3 grants a "key" capsule upon reaching the third stage. When this "key" capsule is granted, an effect of completely opening the shutter is executed in the fifth stage. Therefore, the symbols displayed at the time of reaching the fifth stage ("7" symbols in this case) are displayed in a state in which three are aligned. Therefore, in the closed reach 3, although the "3" symbol is set as the initial symbol, three "7" symbols are aligned.

In addition, when the result of the success/failure determination is "hit" and the hit type is "jackpot B, C", if the value of the first effect counter 223vf is "150 to 174", "closed reach 5" is determined. be done. Although "2" symbols are set as the initial symbols for the closed reach 5, the symbols remain "5" symbols from the time of reaching the 4th step to the time of reaching the 6th step, and the pattern does not change. Therefore, when reaching the sixth stage, a state in which three "5" symbols are aligned is displayed.

When the success/failure determination result is "hit" and the hit type is "jackpot B, C", if the value of the first effect counter 223vf is "175 to 198", "closed reach 6" is determined. . In the closed reach 6, a "2" pattern is set as an initial pattern, and the pattern increases by one each time the shutter is closed. Therefore, when reaching the final stage (6th stage), three "7" symbols will be displayed, but as with closed reach 3, a "key" capsule will be given when reaching the 3rd stage. Then, in the fifth step, an effect of completely opening the shutter is executed. Therefore, the symbols displayed at the time of reaching the fifth stage ("6" symbols in this case) are displayed in a state in which three are aligned. Therefore, in closed reach 6, although "2" symbols are set as the initial symbols, three "6" symbols are aligned. It should be noted that the contents of the capsules provided in closed reach 2, 3 and 6 are configured so that the player does not know until reaching the fifth stage.

If the success/failure determination result is "off" and the value of the first effect counter 223vf is "0 to 99", "closed reach 7" is determined. The closed reach 7 is set with a "2" pattern or a "3" pattern as an initial pattern, and the pattern becomes larger when the shutter is closed. However, when the second stage shifts to the third stage, a display mode indicating failure is displayed, and the presentation ends.

If the success/failure determination result is "off" and the value of the first effect counter 223vf is "100 to 159", "closed reach 8" is determined. The closing reach 8 is set with a "2" pattern or a "3" pattern as an initial pattern, and the pattern becomes larger when the shutter is closed. However, when the third stage shifts to the fourth stage, a display mode indicating failure is displayed, and the presentation ends. Also, when the third stage is reached, an effect of capsule giving failure is executed.

If the success/failure determination result is "off" and the value of the first effect counter 223vf is "160 to 169", "closed reach 9" is determined. The closing reach 9 is set with a "2" pattern or a "3" pattern as an initial pattern, and the pattern becomes larger when the shutter is closed. However, when shifting from the 4th stage to the 5th stage, a display mode indicating failure is displayed, and the presentation ends.

If the success/failure determination result is "off" and the value of the first effect counter 223vf is "170 to 179", "closed reach 10" is determined. The closing reach 10 is set with a "2" pattern or a "3" pattern as an initial pattern, and the pattern becomes larger when the shutter is closed. However, when the 5th stage is shifted to the 6th stage, a display mode indicating failure is displayed, and the presentation ends.

If the success/failure determination result is "off" and the value of the first effect counter 223vf is "180 to 189", "closed reach 11" is determined. The closing reach 11 is set with a "2" pattern as an initial pattern, and the pattern becomes larger when the shutter is closed. However, when the 5th stage is shifted to the 6th stage, a display mode indicating failure is displayed, and the presentation ends. Also, when shifting from the 4th stage to the 5th stage, the "5" pattern is not updated.

If the success/failure determination result is "off" and the value of the first effect counter 223vf is "190 to 194", "closed reach 12" is determined. The closing reach 12 is set with a "3" pattern as an initial pattern, and the pattern becomes larger when the shutter is closed. However, when the 5th stage is shifted to the 6th stage, a display mode indicating failure is displayed, and the presentation ends. Also, when reaching the 3rd stage, a "HOLD" capsule is given and used in the 5th stage, but since the 6th stage is not reached, the display mode for notifying the winning of the jackpot is not displayed.

If the success/failure determination result is "off" and the value of the first effect counter 223vf is "195 to 198", "closed reach 13" is determined. The closing reach 13 is set with a "2" pattern as an initial pattern, and the pattern becomes larger when the shutter is closed. However, when the 5th stage is shifted to the 6th stage, a display mode indicating failure is displayed, and the presentation ends. Also, when reaching the 3rd stage, a "key" capsule is given, and although it is used in the 5th stage, the effect that the key does not match is executed, and the effect of fully opening the shutter is not executed, so a display notifying that the jackpot has been won mode is not displayed.

In this way, in the shutter closing reach in the twenty-second control example, not only does the player not only know whether or not the final stage can be reached, but also the type of initial pattern at the start of the shutter closing reach, and the capsule at the third stage. It is possible to suppress early boredom of the player by making the player interested in whether or not the symbol is given or not, and whether the pattern is not updated even if the stage progresses.

Returning to FIG. 693(a), the description continues. The action scenario table 222vf is a table for setting action scenarios of the left change character Ym1 and the right change character Ym2. The action scenario type is set to an action scenario corresponding to the hold change scenario set when the compound hold change effect is executed in the hold effect execution process 22 at the time of fluctuation start (see F3109 in FIG. 730), which will be described later. .

Here, with reference to FIG. 697, the contents of the action scenario table 222vf will be described. FIG. 697 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the operation scenario table 222vf. The operation scenario table 222vf defines an operation pattern for each operation scenario type.

Operation scenario 1 is an operation scenario used when a hold change effect is executed with the second hold hr2 (see FIG. 672(a)) as a change target. As a first action, the left change role Ym1 rises from its initial position to hide the first hold hr1, and the right change role Ym2 rises from its initial position to hide the fourth hold hr4, thereby forming the second hold hr2. This is the position where only the third hold hr3 is displayed (see FIG. 672(b)). After that, as the second operation, the right change accessory Ym2 is moved leftward to hide the third reservation hr3 (see FIG. 673(a)). At this time, in the display area HR2 of the third symbol display device 81, an effect is executed in which the reserved color of the third reserved hr3 is transplanted to the second reserved hr2 based on the reserved change scenario. After that, as the third action, the left change role item Ym1 and the right change role item Ym2 descend from the second action position and return to the initial position.

Operation scenario 2 is an operation scenario used when a hold change effect is executed with the third hold hr3 (see FIG. 672(a)) as a change target. As a first action, the left change role Ym1 rises from its initial position to hide the first hold hr1, and the right change role Ym2 rises from its initial position to hide the fourth hold hr4, thereby forming the second hold hr2. This is the position where only the third hold hr3 is displayed (see FIG. 672(b)). After that, as a second action, the left change accessory Ym1 is moved rightward to hide the second hold hr2 (see FIG. 675(a)). At this time, in the display area HR2 of the third symbol display device 81, an effect is executed in which the reserved color of the second reserved hr2 is transplanted to the third reserved hr3 based on the reserved change scenario. After that, as the third action, the left change role item Ym1 and the right change role item Ym2 descend from the second action position and return to the initial position.

Operation scenario 3 is an operation scenario used when a hold change effect is executed with the second hold hr2 (see FIG. 672(a)) as a change target. As the first action, the left change role item Ym1 rises from the initial position and the right change role item Ym2 rises from the initial position to hide the fourth hold hr4, the first hold hr1, the second hold hr2 and the third hold. This is the position where hr3 is displayed (not shown). After that, as a second operation, the left change accessory Ym1 moves rightward to hide the first hold hr1, and the right change accessory Ym2 moves leftward to hide the third hold hr3 (not shown). . At this time, in the display area HR2 of the third symbol display device 81, an effect is executed in which the reserved colors of the first reserved hr1 and the third reserved hr3 are transplanted to the second reserved hr2 based on the reserved change scenario. After that, as the third action, the left change role item Ym1 and the right change role item Ym2 descend from the second action position and return to the initial position.

Thus, in this 22nd control example, by moving the left change character Ym1 and the right change character Ym2 in an operation pattern corresponding to the hold change scenario, the third symbol display device 81 and the left change character Ym1 are moved. It is configured to be able to execute a pending change effect in conjunction with the right change accessory Ym2. When the pending change performance is executed, the pending pattern that changes depending on the action pattern of the left change role Ym1 and the right change role Ym2 changes, so that the player can see the action pattern of the left change role Ym1 and the right change role Ym2. It is possible to make them interested in

Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 687(b). As shown in FIG. 687(b), the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 includes a winning information storage area 223va, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223vb, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223vc, a fluctuation start flag 223vd, and a stop Type selection flag 223ve, first effect counter 223vf, second effect counter 223vg, secondary state storage area 223vh, adjustment accessory movable flag 223vi, limit timer 223vj, environment information storage area 223vk, pending effect information storage area 223vl, pending Effect restriction flag 223vm, post-suspension setting flag 223vn, effect SW effective time storage area 223vp, time saving counter 223vq, probability variable counter 223sr, V effect execution flag 223vs, V winning flag 223vt, V notification flag 223vu, during movie flag 223vv, a shaking standby flag 223vw, an adjustment period flag 223vx, an elapsed timer 223vy, and a memory area 223vz. Details of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the twenty-second control example will be described below.

The winning information storage area 223va has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), each of which stores winning information. Based on the information stored in the prize winning information storage area 223a, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the lottery result of the reserved ball and the like before the change starts.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223vb, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203vd of the main controller 110, is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). ), which is a counter that counts up to four times the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the variable effect that is being held in the main controller 110 . That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from main controller 110 .

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203vd stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of reserved balls is counted based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223vb counts the reserved ball of the first special symbol. It is designed to manage numbers.

Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the number of pending balls of the variable display is added by the ball entering the first winning hole 64, or in the main controller 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed and suspended. When the number of balls is subtracted, a pending ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203vd after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 .

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, it acquires the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203vd of the main controller 110 from the reserved ball number command, It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223vb (see F2210 in FIG. 718). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223vb according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so that the special symbol 1 reserved ball of the main controller 110 Its value can be updated in synchronization with the number counter 203vd.

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223vb is used for the display of the reserved ball number pattern in the third symbol display device 81 . That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223 vb in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, and also stores the special symbol 1 reserved ball number after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223vb, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114 .

When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223 vb of the voice lamp control device 113 is reserved balls. Image drawing is controlled so that several patterns are displayed in the display area HR4 of the third pattern display device 81. FIG. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223vb is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203sa of the main controller 110 . Therefore, the number of pending ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol pending ball number counter 203sa of the main controller 110 . Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223vc stores the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223vb based on the reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110. The only difference is that they are different, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The fluctuation start flag 223vd is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see F2204 in FIG. 718), and is turned off when the fluctuation display in the third symbol display device 81 is set. (See F2907 in FIG. 728). When the fluctuation start flag 223vd is turned on, a fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output process (F2102) of the main process (see FIG. 717). It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223ve is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see F2207 in FIG. 718), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See F2912 in FIG. 728). When the stop type selection flag 223ve is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command.

The first effect counter 223vf is a counter used for notice effects and various lotteries. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0-198. Although not shown, it is updated by one each time the main process (see FIG. 717) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

The second effect counter 223vg is a counter used for setting the color of the pending symbol (reserved color) in the pending change effect of the 22nd control example. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0-198. Although not shown, it is updated by one each time the main process (see FIG. 717) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

The sub-state storage area 223vh stores a current state area that stores the game state corresponding to the information indicated by the state command transmitted from the main controller 110, and stores the game state that was stored in the current state area immediately before. and a previous state area. The currently set game state can be determined by the sound lamp control device 113 based on the game state stored in the current state area.

The adjustment accessory movable flag 223vi is turned on when the sword accessory Ym3 (adjustment accessory) is changed to the environment adjustment position (see F3308 in FIG. 732), and the variable display of the special symbol is started. is turned off (see F2903 in FIG. 728). By setting this adjustment role object movable flag 223vi to ON, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine that the sword role object Ym3 is in the environment adjustment position. As a result, when the variation of the special symbol is started while the sword object Ym3 is in the environment adjustment position, the process of changing the sword object Ym3 to the initial position is executed, which is executed in the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to prevent the variable display of the special symbol to be displayed from becoming difficult to see due to the sword character Ym3 in the environment adjustment position.

The limit timer 223vj keeps the sword object Ym3 movable for a certain period of time (10 seconds in this 22nd control example) when the sword object Ym3 (adjustment object) is changed from the environment adjustment position to the initial position. A timer to limit. A timer value is set when an action scenario for moving the sword object Ym3 to the initial position is set (see F2906 in FIG. 727 and F3507 in FIG. is updated by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 717) executed by is executed. When the value of this limit timer 223vj is 0 seconds or more, the effect mode of operating the sword Ym3 is excluded from the candidates of the effect mode that can be determined when setting the variable effect of the special symbols (Fig. 728). (see F3009 of ).

In this way, when the sword object Ym3 is changed from the environment adjustment position to the initial position, by restricting the movement of the sword object Ym3 for a certain period of time, the load caused by the frequent movement of the sword object Ym3 is reduced. can be reduced.

The environment information storage area 223vk is an area for storing environment information adjusted by the player's operation of the volume adjustment button or the light amount adjustment button. Since the environment information stored in the environment information storage area 223vk is updated in accordance with the details of the player's button operation (see F3311 in FIG. 731), it is possible to provide a game environment that matches the preferences of the player. can be done.

The pending effect information storage area 223vl is an area for storing information regarding the color of each pending symbol and the pending change scenario in the pending effect. When a winning command is received from the main controller 110, pending effect information corresponding to the winning command is determined and stored in the pending effect information storage area 223vl.

As described above, the pending effect information storage area 223vl stores the pending effect information for executing the pending change effect on the pending symbol.

The pending performance restriction flag 223vm is a flag for preventing a new pending change performance for other pending patterns from being set during the period when the pending pattern targeted for the pending change performance is displayed. As described above, in the 22nd control example, a reserved change effect is executed in which the reserved color of the target reserved symbol and the reserved colors of the preceding and subsequent reserved symbols are combined (see FIGS. 672 to 677). In this pending change effect, the left change role Ym1 and the right change role Ym2 are movable in an operation scenario corresponding to a predetermined pending change scenario. When a different pending change scenario is set for the pending pattern, the execution timing of the pending change performance overlaps, and there is a risk of giving wrong game information to the player. During the period in which the medium flag 223vm is ON, the pending change effect is not newly executed.

Post-suspension setting flag 223vn is a flag for forcibly determining the pending color of the pending symbol corresponding to the next received winning command when the pending change scenario of the compound pending change effect is set as described above. be. Turned on when a specific pending change scenario is determined in the composite pending change effect setting process 22 (see F2517 in FIG. 723) (see F2605 in FIG. 723), and when the pending color of the next received winning command is determined It is turned off (see F2553 in FIG. 722).

The effect SW valid time storage area 223vp is a storage area for storing a period during which the effect button 22 is determined to be valid. In the twenty-second control example, when the effect mode for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is set, the setting information of the operation effective period corresponding to the effect pattern is stored in the effect SW effective time storage area 223vp ( (See F3106 in FIG. 729).

The time saving counter 223vq is a counter for measuring the period in which the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) is set, and when the high probability state of normal symbols is set (after the end of the jackpot game), A predetermined value (“100” or “120” in this 22nd control example) is set. Then, when the special symbol variation is executed in a state in which the value of the counter 223vq during time saving is 1 or more, the value is subtracted by 1, and when the value of the counter 223vq during time saving becomes "0", normal symbols are displayed. It is determined that the state has shifted to a low probability state. Further, based on the value of the counter 223vq during time saving, it is configured to determine the detailed period in the high probability state of the normal symbol.

The variable probability state counter 223sr is a counter for measuring the period during which the variable probability state continues. (F2308 in FIG. 719: Yes), "120" is set as the counter value (see F673 in FIG. 719). Then, when the special symbol variation is executed while the value of the probability variation counter 223sr is 1 or more, the value is subtracted by 1, and when the value of the probability variation counter 223sr becomes "0", the special symbol It is determined that the state has shifted to a low probability state. Further, based on the value of the variable probability counter 223sr, it is configured to determine the detailed period in the high probability state of the special symbol.

The V effect execution flag 223vs is turned on when a jackpot start command is received from the main controller 110 and the jackpot type information included in the jackpot start command is a jackpot A (see F2706 in FIG. 725), and the V prize is won. It is turned off when a command is received (see F2406 in FIG. 720). When the V effect execution flag 223vs is ON, the V effect is executed in a specific round (2nd round in this 22nd control example) during the jackpot game. The V winning command is a command for notifying that the ball has flowed down the specific area (V gate) 65v.

The V winning flag 223vt is turned on when a V winning command is received from main controller 110 (see F2404 in FIG. 720), and turned off in ending process 22 (see F2802 in FIG. 726). This V winning flag 223vt is a flag for determining by the sound lamp control device 113 that the game ball has passed through a specific area (V gate) 65V disposed in the variable winning device 65, and execution of the V effect. The display mode of the second half period of the ending effect can be switched depending on whether the game ball passes through (V gate) 65V or not.

V notification flag 223vu is turned on when a display command for notifying V winning is set when a V winning command is received from main controller 110 (see F2408 in FIG. 720). It is turned off when a state command to change the game state to a variable probability state is received (see F2311 in FIG. 719).

The in-movie flag 223vv is turned on when the effect button 22 is operated during the effective period of the effect SW in the movie execution reach (see F3404 in FIG. 733). When this movie flag 223vv is ON at the end of the movie, it indicates that the special symbol variation time has not yet passed. Until elapses, the shaking display mode is set (see F3512 in FIG. 734).

Shake standby flag 223vw is turned on when the shake display mode is set (F3513 in FIG. 734) during the period from the end of the movie to the elapse of the fluctuation time of the special symbol in movie execution reach (F3513 in FIG. 734), and a stop command is received from main controller 110. is received (see F2653 in FIG. 724). When this shaking standby flag 223vw is on, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a stop command from the main control device 110, a display command for showing a display mode indicating a jackpot winning is set (see FIG. 724). F2652).

The adjustment period flag 223vx is turned on when the environment information adjustment screen is displayed (see F3304 in FIG. 731). This adjustment period flag 223vx is a flag for indicating that the player is currently adjusting the volume or the amount of light.

The elapsed timer 223vy is a timer set to display a display mode indicating the end of the environment adjustment when a certain period of time (10 seconds in this 22nd control example) has elapsed since the adjustment information adjustment screen started to be displayed. . The timer value of the elapsed timer 223vy is set to a timer value corresponding to when the effect button 22 or the selection button 600 is operated, and is updated by "1" each time the effect update process 22 is executed.

The other memory area 223vz also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method.

Returning to FIG. 687, the description continues. The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 changes the third pattern, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 667). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 667) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

<Regarding the control process executed by the main controller in the 22nd control example>
Next, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 698 to 715. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this control example). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.

In this 22nd control example, as described above, in a state where both the lottery right of the first special symbol (special figure 1 reservation) and the lottery right of the second special symbol (special figure 2 reservation) are stored, It is configured to preferentially execute the lottery for the second special symbol. Also, while the jackpot game is being executed, by passing the ball through a specific area (V gate) 65V arranged in the variable prize winning device 65, a high probability state of special symbols is set after the jackpot game is finished. It is configured so that Furthermore, as an end condition for ending the probability variable state which is a game state advantageous to the player, the special symbol lottery is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) in addition to the end condition established when the special symbol lottery wins the jackpot. It is configured to provide a termination condition that is satisfied when executed.

698 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. FIG. Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switch reading processes are executed (F101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (F102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Furthermore, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (F103). Specifically, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the second winning random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (999, 99, 999) are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1, C2 and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, the special symbol variation processing 22 for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (F104). . After that, the start winning process 22 associated with the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) or the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 (start winning) is executed (F105). The details of the special symbol variation process 22 and the start winning process 22 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After executing the start winning process 22, the normal symbol variation process 22, which is the process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (F106), and the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is used to pass the ball. The accompanying through gate passage processing 22 is executed (F107). Details of the normal symbol variation processing 22 and the through gate passage processing 22 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 705 and 706. FIG. After executing the through gate passage processing 22, the firing control processing is executed (F108), and further, other processing to be periodically executed is executed (F109), and the timer interrupt processing ends. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is the process of deciding on/off of firing. Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 699, special symbol variation processing 22 (F104), which is one processing of the timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 699 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process 22 (F104). Special symbol variation processing 22 (see F104 in FIG. 699) performs various determinations (appropriateness determination) and determination of special symbols based on each acquired counter value, and performs predetermined control in the determined variable display mode. , Control the first symbol display device 37 to enable variable display, set various commands for executing the variable display effect of the third symbol and the fourth symbol in the third symbol display device 81, and determine the result Control is executed to stop and display in a display mode showing (result of judgment). The special symbol variation process 22 (see F104 in FIG. 699) will be described below.

In this special symbol variation process 22 (F104), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the middle of a big win (during a big win game) (F201). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot middle flag 203vv is on. As a result of determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (during the jackpot game) (F201: Yes), this processing is finished as it is.

In the process of F201, if it is determined that the special symbols are not being hit (during the jackpot game) (F201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is fluctuating (F202). ), if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not fluctuating (F202: No), that is, if a new special symbol lottery (variation) can be executed, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter Acquire the value of 203sd (the number of holdings of variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol N1) and the value of the second special design ball number counter 203se (the number of holdings of variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol N2). (F203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203se is greater than 0 (F204). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203se is not 0 (F204: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203se is subtracted by 1 (F205) and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203se is set (F206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the sound lamp control device 113 during the external output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. sent. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203se from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223sc of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of F206, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sb is shifted (F207). In the process of F207, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203sb are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift the data and move to the process of F208.

On the other hand, in the process of F204, when the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203se is 0 (F204: No), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203sd acquired in the process of F203 It is determined whether (N1) is greater than 0 (F210).

In the processing of F210, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203sd is 0 (F210: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of F210, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203sd is not 0 (that is, is 1 or more) (F210: Yes), the first special symbol reserved ball number 1 is subtracted from the value (N1) of the counter 203sd (F211), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203sd changed by calculation is set (F212). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the sound lamp control device 113 during the external output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. sent. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203sd from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223sc of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of F212, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sa is shifted by the same method as the process of F207 (F213), and the process is changed to the process of F208. to move to. In the process of F208 executed after the process of F207 or F213, the special symbol jackpot determination process 22 is executed (F208), then the special symbol variation pattern selection process 22 is executed (F209), and then this process is terminated. do. Details of the special symbol jackpot determination process 22 (F208) and the special symbol variation pattern selection process 22 (F209) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

In the process of F202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (F202: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the change time has elapsed (F214). If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (F214: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (F215), and then this process is terminated. In the process of F215, the value of the variable time counter for measuring the variable time of the special symbol is updated, and the display of the first symbol display device 81 is updated in correspondence with the updated value of the variable time counter. A value indicating the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern selected in the special symbol variation pattern selection process 22 (F209) is set in this variation time counter at the start timing of the special symbol variation, and then the process of F215 is performed. It is updated (decremented) each time it is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variable time has elapsed in the process of F214 (F214: Yes), that is, when the value of the variable time counter updated in the process of F215 is 0, the first symbol display device 37 (F216). The stop design is set in advance by the special design variation pattern selection process 22 (F209). When this special symbol variation pattern selection process 22 (F209) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol jackpot is determined according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and in the case of the special symbol jackpot, depending on the value of the first winning type counter C2. One of the jackpots A to E is determined.

In this 22nd control example, when the jackpot A is achieved, the first symbol display device 37 lights the blue LED, when the jackpot B is achieved, the red LED is lit, and when the jackpot C is achieved. In this case, the green LED is lit, and when the jackpot D is reached, the blue LED and the green LED are lit. In addition, when it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped.

After the process of F216 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start process 22 (this lottery result) is , it is determined whether it is a jackpot of special symbols (F217). If the lottery result of this time is a special symbol jackpot (F217: Yes), the jackpot start flag 203vw is set to ON (F218), and the values of the time reduction counter 203sh and probability variation counter 203si are cleared (set to 0) (F219) ), the process proceeds to F220. When the jackpot start flag 203vw is set to ON by the processing of S220, when the jackpot control processing 22 (see F1004 in FIG. 710) of the main processing executed by the main controller 110 is executed, F1101: Yes , and an opening command is set (F1102). As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, a big win effect is started.

In the process of F217, if the lottery result of this time is out of the special symbol (F217: No), the processes of F218 and F219 are skipped, the update process 22 is executed (F221), and then the process shifts to F220. .

The status command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and sent to the audio lamp control device 113 during external output processing (F1801) of the main processing executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. sent to. When receiving the state command, the sound lamp control device 113 acquires the game state included in the state command. As a result, the state grasped by the sound lamp control device 113 can be matched with the actual state of the pachinko machine 10 . In the process of S220, a special figure confirmation command is set (F220), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 700, the special symbol jackpot determination process 22 (F208), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 22 (F104 in FIG. 699), will be described. FIG. 700 is a flow chart showing this special symbol jackpot determination process 22 (F208).

In the special symbol jackpot determination process 22 (F208 in FIG. 700), first, each counter value stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is obtained (F301). Then, based on the first winning random number table 202va (see FIG. 690), it is determined whether or not the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of F301 matches the big winning determination value, and the lottery result (determination result) is acquired (F302).

When the process of F302 is finished, it is next determined whether or not the lottery result of this time is a big win (F303), and if it is determined to be a big win (F303: Yes), the special symbol lottery result is set to a big win. (F304), based on the value of the acquired hit type counter C2, set the jackpot design of the special design to be displayed on the first design display device 37 (F305), and finish this process. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of F303 that the lottery result of this time is not a big hit (F303: No), the special symbol is set in the first symbol display device 37 (F306), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 701, the special symbol variation pattern selection process 22 (F209), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 22 (F104 in FIG. 699), will be described. FIG. 701 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation pattern selection process 22 (F209).

In the special symbol variation pattern selection process 22 (F209 in FIG. 701), first, in the special symbol big hit determination process 22 (F208 in FIG. 700), whether or not the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, that is, the special symbol big hit is set (F401).

In the process of F401, if it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is set (F401: Yes), the first hit type selection table 202vb (see FIG. 691) and the acquired first hit type counter The jackpot type is determined based on the value of C2 (F402). Next, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the special symbol execution area is acquired (F403), and the current game state (normal state, latent state, probability variable) corresponding to the information stored in the game state storage area 203sg (F404).

Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 acquired in the process of F403 and the variation pattern selection table 202vc read out in the process of F404 (F405), and based on the variation pattern selected in the process of F405 , to set the special figure variation pattern command (F406). The special symbol variation pattern command set here includes the lottery result of the special symbol lottery, information indicating the variation time of the special symbol, and external output processing of the main processing of the main control unit 110 (F1801 in FIG. 709 ) to the audio lamp controller 113 .

Next, a special symbol stop type command indicating a special symbol stop symbol is set (F407), the first symbol display device 37 sets the special symbol variation start (F408), and the variation time of the selected variation pattern is indicated. The value is set to the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter (not shown) (F409), and the process ends. The special symbol stop type command set in the process of F407 includes information indicating the type of stop symbol that indicates the result of this special symbol variation, that is, the rough type such as reach off or off that does not become reach. It is output to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output processing (see F1801 in FIG. 709) of the main processing (FIG. 709) of the main controller 110.

On the other hand, in the process of F401, when it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol is out (F401: No), the process of F402 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of F403.

Next, with reference to FIG. 702, the contents of the update process 22 (F221) executed in the special symbol variation process 22 (see F104 in FIG. 699) will be described. FIG. 702 is a flow chart showing the contents of update processing 22 (F221). In this update process 22 (F221), when the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation has passed (at the time of fluctuation stop), it is a process that is executed, and the remaining period of the period in which the probability fluctuation state is continuously set is updated. , processing for updating the remaining period of the period in which the time saving state is continuously set is executed.

When the update process 22 (F221) is executed, first the value of the probability variation counter 203si is greater than 0, that is, it is determined whether the current is a high probability state of special symbols (F501), and the value of the probability variation counter 203si If it is determined to be greater than 0 (F501: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203si is subtracted (updated) by 1 (F502), and then it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203si after updating is 0 ( F503), if it is determined to be 0 (F503: Yes), the time saving state is set in the game state storage area 203sg (F504), and the process proceeds to F505. In addition, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203si is not greater than 0 (is 0) in the process of F501 (F501: No), the current is not in the high probability state of the special symbol, so the value of the probability variation counter 203si The above-described processing of F502 to F504 for updating is skipped, and the processing shifts to F505.

Also, in the process of F503, the value of the probability variation counter 203si is not 0, that is, the value of the probability variation counter 203si is greater than 0, even if the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbols) continues (F503: No) , the process of F504 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of F505.

In the process of F505, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203sh is greater than 0, and if it is determined that it is greater than 0, that is, if the current is a high probability state of normal symbols (F505: Yes), time saving 1 is subtracted from the value of the counter 203sh (F506), and it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203sh after the subtraction is 0 (F507). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203sh is 0 in the processing of F507, the normal state is set in the game state storage area 203sg (F508), the value of the probability variation counter 203si, the value of the time saving counter 203sh, the current game state is set (F509), and the process ends. Also, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203sh is not greater than 0 (is 0) in the process of F505 (F505: No), or the value of the time saving counter 203sh is not 0 in the process of F507 In the case (F507: No), the process proceeds directly to F509.

Next, with reference to FIG. 703, start winning process 22 (F105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 698) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 703 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process 22 (F105). The start winning process 22 (F105 in FIG. 703) discriminates whether the ball has entered (start winning) either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, and if the start winning is , the obtained counter values up to the maximum number of reserved balls (up to 4 in the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640) are stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sa or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sb. , respectively.

Further, when each counter value obtained based on the reserved ball is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sa or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sb, the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sa. Or based on each counter value stored in each of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sb, a process (so-called look-ahead process) is executed to predict the result of determination in advance, the variation pattern to be selected, etc. . The starting winning process 22 (F105 in FIG. 703) will be described below.

In the starting winning process 22 (F105 in FIG. 703), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered (starting winning) the first ball entrance 64 which is the first starting opening (F601). Here, the entry of a ball into a ball detection switch (not shown) provided in the first ball entrance 64 is detected. It is determined that the ball entered the first ball entrance 64 (there was a starting prize) (F601: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203sd is acquired (F602), It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (F603).

In other words, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls for the first ball entrance 64 at this time is less than the upper limit of 4 (that is, whether or not the number of reserved balls is stored up to the upper limit). When it is determined that the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (F603: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203sd is added by 1 (F604), and the voice lamp control device 113 A reservation number command for notifying the reservation number of the first ball entrance 64 (lottery right reservation number of the first special symbol) is set (F605).

Then, each value of various counter values (first per random number counter C1, first per type counter C2, variation type counter CS1) is read out (acquired) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol reserved ball execution area of RAM 203 (F606), and the process proceeds to F607.

Also, if it is determined in the processing of F601 that the ball has not entered the first ball entrance 64 (F601: No), or in the processing of F603, the number of pending balls for the first ball entrance 64 at the present time is the upper limit. If it is determined to be a value (F603: No), the process of adding the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is skipped, and the process proceeds to F607.

Next, each process from F607 to F612 is the same as the process performed for the winning of the ball into the first starting hole (first ball entrance 64) executed in each process from F601 to F606. The only difference is that the processing of 1 is executed for the second ball entrance 640, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

After executing each process from F601 to F612, the prefetch process is executed (F613), and this process ends.

This look-ahead processing 22 (F613) will be described later with reference to FIG. A process of determining the determination result, the determined variation pattern, the stop type, and the like is executed. In addition, in this control example, it is configured to execute the process of determining the result of the determination, the determined variation pattern, the stop type, etc. based on the newly stored counter values, but it is limited to this. For example, when there is a new start winning prize, the validity of all the reserved memories stored (stored) in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sa or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sb It may be configured to execute processing for determining the determination result, the determined variation pattern, the stop type, and the like.

Further, in the twenty-second control example, when new information (winning information) is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sa or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sb, that is, the special symbol lottery right is renewed. However, it is not limited to this, for example, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, or when the normal symbol lottery Depending on the result, the content of the special symbol lottery right (winning information) may be determined in advance.

As described above, in this 22nd control example, when the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203sd or the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203se is added, the added prize Although it is configured to execute the look-ahead process 22 (F613) based on the information (winning information) related to this, for example, in the process of F603, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203sd ( N1) is the upper limit number (4) (F603: No), that is, the ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 in a state where the number of reserved balls of the special symbol has reached the upper limit. In this case, the prefetching process 22 (F613) may be executed. As a result, even in a state where the number of reserved balls of special symbols has reached the upper limit, the player can continue to play the game in order to execute the look-ahead process. In addition, since added value can be given when a ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 in a state where the number of reserved balls of special symbols has reached the upper limit, the number of reserved balls of special symbols is the upper limit. When the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 in the state of reaching , it is possible to suppress the decrease in motivation to play.

Next, with reference to FIG. 704, the look-ahead process 22 (F613), which is one process of the starting winning process 22 (F105 in FIG. 704), will be described. FIG. 704 is a flow chart showing this prefetching process 22 (F613).

In the look-ahead process 22 (F613 in FIG. 704), first, various counter values from the storage area newly stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sa or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sb, the first winning The values of the random number counter C1, the first win type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 are read (F701). Then, the read data is stored in the area with the lowest winning order among the vacant storage areas in the prefetch pending storage area (F702).

Next, based on each counter value newly stored in the prefetching reservation storage area, the result of determination is determined. In addition, here, both the right/wrong determination when the special symbol is in a low probability state and the right/wrong determination when the special symbol is in a high probability state are discriminated. This is the timing when a new reserved memory is generated (the timing when a new reserved (winning information) is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sa or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sb), and the new this time. Since there is a time lag between the timing at which the jackpot judgment is executed based on the withheld winning information, the game state ( This is because it is difficult to predict the special symbol probability state).

Next, it is determined whether or not the win/loss determination result is a jackpot (F703). When it is determined that the determination result is a jackpot (F703: Yes), based on the read various counter values, a winning command including information that can specify the jackpot type and variation pattern is set (F704), After that, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the determination result in the process of F703 is not a big hit (F703: No), based on the read various counter values, a winning command including information that can identify the lost winning and the variation pattern is issued. Set (F705), and then terminate this process.

Here, the winning command set in the process of F704 or F705 includes the above-described information for indicating the winning/failure determination result (information that has a different meaning based on the winning/failure determination result), and common information of F701. The setting includes information for indicating the values of various counter values read out by the process. Then, the prize winning command set in this process is output to the sound lamp controller 113 by the external output process (F1801) executed in the main process of main controller 110 (see FIG. 709).

On the voice lamp control device 113 side, when the winning command is received, the display mode of the pending ball is varied based on various information included in the winning command (for example, the color of the pending ball is changed to a color different from usual). It is possible to execute an effect (pre-reading effect) in which a notice pattern or the like is displayed before the start of the fluctuation to suggest the result of the determination to the player.

In addition, in the 22nd control example, since there is only one probability state of special symbols (low probability state of special symbols), the information (win/fail judgment result) to be set in the winning command can be set regardless of the game state. However, for example, in a gaming machine having a plurality of probability states of special symbols (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of special symbols), the result of judgment in the case of a high probability state of special symbols, and the special symbol It may be configured to determine the success or failure determination result in the case of a low probability state and set a winning command based on the result of each determination, or even if the special symbol is in a high probability state, in a low probability state. A determination value (value of the first winning random number counter C1) that is determined to be a big win even if there is a big win is defined, and only when the determination value is read out, a winning command indicating a special symbol big win may be set. .

By configuring in this way, only when it is determined in advance that it is a specific jackpot to the audio lamp control device 113 side, a winning command indicating a jackpot is output, so a special symbol that does not execute a look-ahead effect It is possible to give a feeling of expectation of winning a jackpot against the fluctuation.

Furthermore, the game state when the special symbol lottery is performed based on the retention memory (winning information) stored (memorized) in the first special symbol retention ball storage area 203sa or the second special symbol retention ball storage area 203sb is accurately determined. , and the winning/losing determination may be executed based on the game state. In this case, instead of changing the selection of the variation pattern depending on the number of retained balls, it is possible to determine by selecting a constant variation pattern regardless of the number of retained balls at the start of variation. When the look-ahead is executed, the game state at the time of start of variation can be determined by determining the variation order until the variation of the retained ball starts based on the information retained and stored.

Further, in this 22nd control example, when new reserved memory (winning information) is stored (stored) in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sa or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sb, the winning information , and uses a configuration that predicts the success or failure determination in advance in the prefetching process, but is not limited to this, in the prefetching process of the main controller 110, the first special symbol reserved ball storage Information indicating the content (each counter value) of the winning information (holding memory) newly stored (memorized) in the area 203sa or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203sb is set as a winning command, and the voice lamp control device 113 side It is also possible to predict the win/loss determination result based on the information included in the winning command received in .

With this configuration, the processing load on main controller 110 can be reduced. In addition, on the audio lamp control device 113 side, a process for determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect is executed, and when it is determined to execute the look-ahead effect, the information included in the winning command received from the main control device 110 It is preferable to configure it so as to perform analysis (prediction of acceptance/rejection determination result). As a result, when the look-ahead performance is not performed, the specific look-ahead processing (prediction of the success/failure determination result) is not performed, so that the Pachinko machine 10 can be prevented from performing useless control. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from illegally obtaining the result of the prefetching process executed without a title.

Next, with reference to FIG. 705, the normal symbol variation process 22 (F106), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 705 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process 22 (F106). The normal symbol variation process 22 (F106) is a process for controlling the variable display of the second symbol (normal symbol), the opening time of the electric accessory 640a, and the like, and various processes related to the normal symbol variation (lottery). Processing (processing for executing normal design variation, processing for setting variation mode (variation time) of normal design variation to be performed, processing for updating normal design variation during execution, processing for stopping normal design variation, normal design lottery The process of determining the game contents of the normal figure per game executed when the result is a hit) is executed.

In this normal symbol variation process 22 (F106 in FIG. 705), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (F801). During the winning of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a is performed after the second symbol display device 83 displays the winning (after the winning symbol is stopped and displayed). Until the middle (until the winning game is completed) is included. When it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of winning (F801: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hitting (F801: No), it is determined whether or not the normal symbol of the second symbol display device 83 is being variably displayed (F802). If it is determined that the normal symbol variation is not being displayed, that is, the current state is that a new normal symbol variation (lottery) can be executed (F802: No), then the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203vf A value (M) is acquired (F803), and it is determined whether the value is greater than 0 (F804).

When it is determined in the process of F804 that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203vf is 0 (F804: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203vf is greater than 0 (F804: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203vf is subtracted by 1 (F805). In other words, when it is determined that the conditions for executing a new normal symbol variation in the process of F804 (that the winning information for use in the normal symbol variation is retained and stored) are satisfied, the retained and stored 1 is subtracted from the value of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203vf in order to execute the normal design variation using the winning prize information.

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203vc is shifted (F806). In the process of F806, the data stored in the normal design reservation 1 to the normal design reservation 4 of the normal design reservation ball storage area 203vc are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of normal symbol reservation 1→execution area. After shifting the data, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (F807).

Next, it is determined whether or not the time saving counter 203sh is ON, that is, whether or not the current state is the high probability state of the normal pattern (time saving medium) (F808), and the time saving counter 203sh is set to ON. If it is determined (F808: Yes), the winning judgment result (lottery result) is acquired based on the hitting judgment value of the second winning random number table 202sc for high probability (see FIG. 691 (b)) (F809) , F811. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time saving counter 203sh is off (F808: No), based on the hit determination value of the second per random number table 202sc (see FIG. 691 (b)) for low probability time, the success or failure determination result is obtained (F810), and the process proceeds to F811.

In the process of F811, it is determined whether this normal symbol variation (lottery) is a hit (F811), and if it is determined to be a hit (F811: Yes), the display mode of "○" at the time of the hit. The display mode is set (F812), and the process proceeds to F814. On the other hand, in the process of F811, if it is determined that the current normal symbol variation (lottery) is not a hit (no) (F811: No), set the display mode of "x" which is the display mode at the time of loss (F813), and the process proceeds to F814.

In the processing of F814, the current game state is during time saving (high probability state of normal symbols) or not is determined by referring to the value of the time saving counter 203sh (F814), during time saving (high probability state of normal symbols) If it is determined that there is (F814: Yes), the normal symbol fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds (F815), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of F814 that the time is not shortened (high probability state of normal symbols) (F814: No), the fluctuation time of normal symbols is set to 10 seconds (F816), and this process is terminated.

In addition, in this 22nd control example, as described above, depending on the probability state of the set normal design, the variation time of the normal design is varied. Regardless, the variable time may be set to 3 seconds at all times. By configuring in this way, at the timing when the game state is switched, specifically, from the normal state (normal pattern low probability state) in which a long variation time is easily set, a short variation time is easily set Short time. At the timing of the end of the jackpot game when the game state switches to the state (high probability state of the normal pattern), the normal pattern fluctuation of the long fluctuation time is executed, and the time saving state is set. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the normal symbol lottery is not executed.

In addition, regarding the setting method of the fluctuation time of the normal pattern, without being limited to the configuration of this control example, the fluctuation time can be changed according to the game state, or the fluctuation time can be changed according to the number of normal pattern pending balls, The variation time may be varied according to the acquired predetermined value. For example, in this control example, the variation time of the normal symbol variation is set to the normal symbol probability state (high probability state, low probability state ) and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203vf (the number of normal pattern reserved balls). Further, it may be configured such that the ease with which a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 varies depending on the set fluctuation time of the normal symbol.

In this way, by configuring the state of the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 to be variable according to the length of the fluctuation time of the set normal symbol, the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 can be Since the easiness of ball entry can be easily changed according to the game state, various game characteristics can be created.

On the other hand, in the processing of F802, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not displayed in a variable manner (F802: No), the variation time of the normal symbol being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (F817), and if it is determined that the variation time has not elapsed (F817: No), this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has passed in the process of F817 (F817: Yes), next, stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (F818). In the process of F818, when the current normal symbol lottery is a win, the second symbol display device 83 is set to stop display (illuminate display) the "O" symbol. On the other hand, when the lottery for the normal symbol is lost, the second symbol display device 83 stops displaying (lights up) the "x" symbol. In other words, setting is made to stop and display the display mode set in the process of F812 or F813 described above.

When the stop display is set by the process of F818, the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed in the second symbol in the display mode set by the process of F812 or the process of F813. The symbol display device 83 stops displaying (lighting display).

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current normal symbol is a win (F819). When it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol is not winning (no) (F819: No), this processing is finished as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of the current normal pattern is a hit (F819: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203sh is checked to see if the current game state is in the time saving mode (normal pattern high probability state). Refer to and discriminate (F820), and when it is determined that it is during time saving (high probability state of normal symbols) (F820: Yes), the opening time of the electric accessary 640a is 1 as the game content of the game per normal symbol The game content (release operation) of 2 times per second is set (F823), and the process proceeds to F822.

On the other hand, in the process of F820, if it is determined that it is not during time saving (high probability state of normal symbols) (F820: No), the opening time of the electric accessory 640a is 5 seconds × 1 as the game content of the game per normal symbol. The contents of the game to be played (release action) are set (F821), and the process proceeds to F822.

In the process of F822, based on the scenario set in the process of F821 or F823, the start of the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set (F822), and this process ends.

Next, the opening/closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a in the twenty-second control example will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the 22nd control example, the normal symbol probability state (high probability state, low probability state) set at the timing of determining whether the normal symbol is correct (timing of processing F808 to F811) Based on, the normal design is determined at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a (the timing when it is determined that the fluctuation time has passed in the process of F817). The opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a is set based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state).

That is, in this 22nd control example, the variation processing (lottery processing) regarding normal symbols and the variation processing (lottery processing) regarding special symbols are configured to be executed independently, and further, the variation regarding special symbols. Based on the result of the processing (lottery processing), the normal symbol probability state (high probability state, low probability state) is configured to vary. Therefore, depending on the result of the variation processing (lottery processing) regarding the special symbols that is executed in parallel during the period when the variation processing (lottery processing) regarding the normal symbols is performed, the normal symbols are usually at the timing of judging whether the symbols is set, and at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a, there is a case where the normal symbol low probability state is set.

In such a situation, for example, based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol that is set at the timing of determining whether the normal symbol is appropriate, the opening control mode (open pattern) is set, the electric accessory 640a is long open in a state where the normal symbol low probability state is set (an open pattern executed when the normal symbol high probability state is set ) was a problem.

Therefore, in the 22nd control example, the normal symbol probability state (high probability state, low probability state) at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a is determined, and based on the determination result It is configured to set the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a. Thereby, the electric accessory 640a can be opened in an opening pattern according to the set game state.

In addition, in this 22nd control example, the normal design success/failure determination is executed based on the probability state of the normal symbol at the timing of performing the success/failure determination of the normal symbol, and the electric accessory 640a to be moved in the winning game of the normal symbol is released. Although it is configured to set the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a based on the probability state of the normal symbol at the timing of setting the control mode (opening pattern), it is not limited to this, for example, determination of whether the normal symbol The high probability state of the normal symbol is set at the timing of performing, and the high probability state of the normal symbol is set even at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a to be moved in the winning game of the normal symbol. Only when it is set, the electric accessory 640a may be opened for a long time, or the electric accessory 640a may be opened based on the game state set at the timing of judging whether the normal symbol is correct or not. It may be configured to set a pattern.

In addition, although detailed description is omitted, various information (result of normal symbol lottery, normal symbol variation variation time, scenario per normal symbol, etc.) determined in normal symbol variation processing 22 (see F106 in FIG. 705) are set with commands indicating the contents of various information, and are output to the sound lamp controller 113 in the external output process (see F1801 in FIG. 709) of the main process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 709).

Next, the contents of the through gate passage processing 22 (F107) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 706 is a flow chart showing the contents of the through gate passage processing 22 (see F660). This through gate passage processing 22 (F107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 698) to determine whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4 is obtained and stored in the execution area. In addition, using the value of the acquired normal random number counter C5, before the actual success/failure determination is executed (normal symbol variation process 22 (see F106 in FIG. 705), success/failure determination (see F811) is executed It is a process for obtaining the lottery results (whether or not determination results) in advance.

In the through-gate passing process 22 (F107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through-gate) 67 (F901). Here, the passage of the ball in the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (F901: Yes), then the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203vf is acquired (F902), and then , determines whether the value (M) of the acquired normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203vf is greater than 4 (whether the normal symbol reserved ball number has reached the upper limit) (F903).

In the processing of F903, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203vf is larger than 4 (the upper limit value is 4) (F903: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol retention ball number counter 203vf is not greater than 4 (F903: Yes), 1 is added to the value (M) of the normal symbol retention ball number counter 203vf (F904 ), the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203vc (F905), and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 707, NMI interrupt processing will be described. 707 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. FIG. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information (F1601), and terminates the NMI interruption processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout launch control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, referring to FIG. 708, start-up processing 22 executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 708 is a flow chart showing this startup process 22 .

This start-up process 22 is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In start-up processing 22 (FIG. 708), first, initial setting processing is executed upon power-on (F1701). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this control example) is executed. (F1702). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (F1703).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 667) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (F1704), and if it is turned on (F1704: Yes), the process proceeds to F1712. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (F1704: No), it is further determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (F1705), and if not stored (F1705: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (F1705: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (F1706). If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed up data is destroyed. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203 . Instead of the RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be judged based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of F1712, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (F1712). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing of RAM 203 (F1713, F1714).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during startup processing, the RAM 203 initialization processing (F1713, F1714) is executed.

Similarly, when power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (F1713, F1714) is executed. . In the RAM initialization process (F1713, F1714), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (F1713), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (F1714). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to F1710.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (F1704: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (F1705: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( F1707: Yes), while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held, the power failure occurrence information is cleared (F1708). Next, the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) transmits a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning to the game state at the time of drive power interruption (F1709), and shifts to the processing of F1710. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (F1710). After that, the interrupt is permitted (F1711), and the process shifts to the main process which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 709, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 709 is a flowchart showing this main processing. This main process is roughly divided into a counter update process and a power-off process.

In the main process (see FIG. 709), first, output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 698) is transmitted to each control on the sub side. External output processing for transmission to the device (peripheral control device) is executed (F1801). Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 698) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the prize corresponding to the number of winning balls is sent to the payout control device 111. Send a sphere command. In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation processing 22 (see FIG. 699) and the start winning processing 22 (see FIG. 703). Furthermore, by this external output processing (F1801 in FIG. 709), various commands set by various processing of the main control device 110 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and various commands displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Information for setting effects (variation effects, decorative effects, etc.). Also, the opening command, round number command, and ending command set in the jackpot control process 22 (see FIG. 710) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . Further, various commands set in other control processing are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . In addition, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112 when the ball is to be launched.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (F1802). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the 22nd control example). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (F1803), and then in the case of a special symbol jackpot state, the voice lamp control device 113 A command setting for executing a jackpot effect and a jackpot control process for opening the specific prize winning port 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 are executed (F1804).

Details of the jackpot control process 22 (F1804) will be described later with reference to FIGS. It is determined whether the maximum opening time of the winning opening (specific winning opening 65a) has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have entered the winning opening (specific winning opening 65a). Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the prize winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a) is closed. The opening and closing of the winning opening (specific winning opening 65a) are repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In this control example, the jackpot control process 22 (F1804) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, an electric accessory opening/closing process for controlling opening/closing of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is executed (F1806). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary product is set by the processing of F822 of the normal symbol variation processing 22 (see FIG. 705), the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product is started. The open/close control of the electric accessary product is continued until the period set by the processing of F821 and the processing of F823 in the normal symbol variation processing 22 ends.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (F1807). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the special symbol variation pattern selection process 22 (F209 in FIG. 701), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Start. In this 22nd control example, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red If the green LED is lit, the green LED is extinguished and the blue LED is lit, and if the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is lit. LED is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Also, the first symbol display update process is executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the special symbol variation pattern selection process 22 (F209 in FIG. 701) has ended. After finishing the variable display, the stop symbols are stopped and displayed (lighted display) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in the display mode set in F407 of the special symbol variation pattern selection process 22 (see F209 in FIG. 701). )do.

Furthermore, in this 22nd control example, when one of the special symbols is stop-displayed in a display mode (jackpot symbol) indicating a big hit, the other special symbol is stop-displayed in a display mode (loss symbol) indicating a loss. and the stop display for that purpose is also executed.

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (F1808). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of F815 and the process of F816 of the normal symbol variation process 22 (see FIG. 705), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. do. As a result, in the second pattern display device, a variable display is performed in which the second pattern "O" pattern and the "X" pattern are alternately lit. Also, in the second symbol display update process (F1808), when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of F818 of the normal symbol variation process 22 (see FIG. 705), it is executed in the second symbol display device. Terminate the variation display being performed, and stop the stop symbol (second symbol) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the processing of F812 or F813 of the normal symbol variation processing 22 (see FIG. 705). Display (lit display).

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (F1809). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this control example) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (F1810). If the predetermined time has already passed (F1810: Yes), the process moves to F1801, and the above-described processes after F1801 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (F1810: No), the second main processing is executed until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (F1811, F1812).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (F1811). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (999, 999 in this control example), they are cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of F1811 (F1812). In addition, in the process of this F1812, the value of the normal figure fluctuation classification counter CS2 is also updated like the value of the fluctuation classification counter CS1.

Here, since the execution time of each process of F1801 to F1808 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first per random number counter C1, the initial value of the second per random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and the values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the general figure fluctuation type counter CS2 are also randomly updated. can do. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the processing contents for updating the judgment value related to the lottery of special symbols and normal symbols, and it is possible to prevent the execution of fraudulent games aiming at the timing when the judgment value corresponding to the win is acquired. can be suppressed.

In the process of F1809, if the RAM 203 stores power failure occurrence information (F1809: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 165 has been executed, so the power-off processing after F1813 is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (F1813), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 111 and sound lamp control device 113) power off command indicating that the power has been cut off (F1814). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (F1815), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (F1816), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area backed up in the RAM 203 .

It should be noted that the process of F1809 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state changes performed in F1801 to F1808, or at the time of the end of one cycle of the processes of F1811 and F1812 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of F1801. That is, the processing can be started from the processing of F1801, as in the case of initialization in the start-up processing. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the processing at power-off, the initial setting processing (FIG. 708, F1701) By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), the processing of F1801 can be started. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process 22 (F1804) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 710 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process 22 (F1804). This jackpot control process 22 (F1804) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 709). This is a process for opening or closing the (large opening) 65a.

In the jackpot control process 22 (FIG. 710, F1804), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (F1101). Specifically, the process of F218 or F220 of the special symbol variation process 22 (see FIG. 699) is executed, and if the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the processing of F1101, when the special symbol jackpot is started (F1101: Yes), the opening command is set (F1102), the jackpot start flag 203vw is set to OFF, and the jackpot middle flag 203vv is set to ON. (F1103) to terminate this process.

On the other hand, in the process of F1101, if the special symbol jackpot is not started (F1101: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is in progress (F1104). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of F1103, if it is not during the special symbol jackpot (F1104: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of F1104, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the middle of winning (F1104: Yes), the process of F1105 is executed. In the process of F1105, it is determined whether it is time to start a new round (F1105). In the processing of F1105, when it is determined that it is time to start a new round (F1105: Yes), the jackpot operation setting processing 22 is executed (F1106).

Here, with reference to FIG. 711, the jackpot operation setting process 22 will be described (F1106). FIG. 711 is a flow chart showing the contents of this jackpot operation setting process 22 (F1106). In the jackpot action setting process 22 (FIG. 711, F1106), first, the opening action corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to start is read from the set opening scenario (F1201). The opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probability variable solenoid) 65k is set based on the data read in F1201 (F1202). The opening operation of the opening/closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is set by the data read in the process of F1201. After that, this process ends. In addition, in the process of F1202, the operation of the channel solenoid 65k and the operation of the open/close door 65f1 are set for each round.

In this way, each operation of the first variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, so even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the big win game, the big win game ends in the middle. Such problems can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 710, the description continues. In the processing of F1105, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (F1105: No), it is determined whether it is the operation timing of the opening/closing door 65f1 and the flow path solenoid (probability variable solenoid) 65k (F1107). When it is determined that it is time to operate (F1107: Yes), the open solenoid 65f2 is turned on (F1108). After that, the flow path solenoid (probability variable solenoid) 65k is turned on (F1109). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of F1106, if it is determined that it is not the timing for the opening operation (F1107: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to start the ending effect (F1110). The start timing of the ending production is the final round corresponding to the jackpot type determined in F402 of the special symbol variation pattern selection process 22 (see FIG. 701) is completed, the open/close door 65f1 is closed, and the ball is thrown. When a certain waiting time (three seconds in this embodiment) has passed, it is determined as the start timing of the ending effect. If it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (F1110: Yes), an ending command is set (F1111), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 during the external output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 201. . Upon receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114 . When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 starts an ending effect indicating the end of the big win.

On the other hand, in the process of F1110, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the currently executed ending period (F1110: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the jackpot (F1112). Here, the end timing of the jackpot indicates a case where the execution period of the ending effect has passed. In the processing of F1112, when it is determined that it is time to end the big win (F1112: Yes), the big win end processing 22 for setting the game state after the end of the big win is executed (F1113), and this processing ends. The details of this jackpot ending process 22 will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the processing of F1112, when it is determined that it is not the time to end the jackpot (F1112: No), the notification processing 22 is executed (F1114). Details of the notification processing 22 will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the notification process 22 (FIG. 713, F1114) is executed, the prize winning process 22 is executed (F1115) for performing control according to the winning to the specific winning hole 65a, and the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a. Abnormality processing 22 is executed to determine whether the ball has been discharged normally (F1116), and then this processing ends. Details of the winning process 22 and the abnormality process 22 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 714 and 715. FIG.

Next, details of the jackpot operation setting process 22 (F1106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 711 is a flow chart showing this jackpot operation setting process 22 (F1106). This jackpot action setting process 22 (F1106) is executed in the jackpot control process, and as described above, is a process for setting the opening/closing action of the specific winning opening 65a according to the number of rounds.

When this jackpot operation setting process 22 (see FIG. 711) is started, first, the opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds is read (F1201), the opening operation of the probability variable solenoid is set (F1202), and the variable winning device 65 The operation for opening the large opening 65c is set (F1203), and this process is terminated. Although not shown, in the process of F1201, a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set.

The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and sent to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output processing (S1801) of the main processing executed by the MPU 201. sent. Upon receiving the round number command, the sound lamp control device 113 sets a display round number command for displaying the newly started round number on the third symbol display device 81 . Thereby, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 can be updated in accordance with the number of rounds of the big win.

Here, although detailed description is omitted, in this control example, among the round games that are executed multiple times during one jackpot game, the contents of the round game that is executed in a specific number of rounds (second round) is different depending on the type of jackpot. Specifically, only in the case of a specific jackpot type (probability variable jackpot), the ball is made to flow down to a specific area (V gate 65V) as the second round game. It is configured so that a round game that operates the switching valve 65y is executed so as to make it easier. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the probability that the ball will flow down to the specific area (V gate 65V) only for a specific period of the jackpot game that is executed for a long period of time, so that the player loses concentration. A game can be executed during a big winning game without any trouble.

In addition, in the twenty-second control example, when the second round of the jackpot game is executed when the jackpot A is won, the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 displays the specific area (V gate) for the player. 65V), a V notification effect in which the characters "Aim for V" is displayed as a guidance notification mode for indicating that it is a chance period for the ball to flow down to 65V) is configured to be executable. As a result, the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner of the specific period during which the ball is likely to flow down to the specific area (V gate 65V) in the long-running jackpot game. Furthermore, based on the detecting means detecting that the ball has flowed down the specific area (V gate 65V), the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 detects that the ball has flowed down the specific area (V gate 65V). It is configured so that the characters "VGET" are displayed as a guidance notification mode for guidance. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the condition for setting the variable probability state is satisfied after the jackpot game ends.

It should be noted that the notification mode of the guidance notification described above may be varied according to the establishment of the conditions. For example, "Aim for V" based on the elapsed time or remaining time of a specific period that makes it easy for the ball to flow down to a specific gate. It is preferable to change the character color of , change the size of the display area, or change to characters with more emphasized content (for example, "Aim for V quickly"). As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player does not shoot the ball in a situation where it is easy for the ball to flow down to the specific area (V gate 65V).

In addition, in the twenty-second control example, a switching valve 65y is provided as a V function for switching the flow path of the winning ball to the variable winning device 65, and the ball is specified by varying the operation pattern of the switching valve 65y. Although it is possible to set a period in which it is easy to flow down to the gate and a period in which it is difficult to flow down, it is not limited to this. By varying the timing at which 65a is opened according to the type of big win, it may be possible to set a period during which the ball is likely to flow down to the specific area (V gate 65V) and a period during which it is difficult. As a result, since the operation pattern of the switching valve 65y can be shared, even if the operation content of the switching valve 65y is grasped, the big winning game this time easily makes the ball pass through the specific area (V gate 65V). It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether or not it is a game. Further, since the contents of operation of the switching valve 65y can be standardized, the load on the V solenoid 209a can be reduced, and failure of the V function (switching valve 65y) can be suppressed.

By executing this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 711), the specific winning opening 65a can be opened in each round of the jackpot, and the ball can pass through the specific area (V gate 65V) in the second round. can be set. As a result, in the jackpots A, C to E, the ball almost certainly passes through the specific area (V gate 65V) just by shooting the ball in the second round, so after the jackpot game ends, the variable state ( High probability state of special design, high probability state of normal design) can be set.

Next, details of the jackpot ending process 22 (F1113) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 712 is a flow chart showing this jackpot ending process 22 (F1113). This jackpot end process 22 (F1113) is executed in the jackpot control process 22 (see F1804 in FIG. 710), and as described above, is a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends.

In this jackpot end processing 22 (F1113), first, it is determined whether the variable probability setting flag 203sm is ON (F1301). In the process of F1301, if it is determined that the variable probability setting flag 203sm is on (F1301: Yes), it means that the ball has passed through the V gate (specific area) 65v during the big hit, so the variable probability counter 203vu Set the value to 120 (F1302), set the value of the time saving counter 203vt to 120 (F1303), set the variable probability flag 203vg to ON (F1304), and proceed to the process of F1305. On the other hand, in the process of F1301, if the variable probability setting flag 203sm is off (F1301: No), the value of the time saving medium counter 203vt is set to 100, and the process proceeds to S2105.

In the process of S2105, the state command is set based on the value of the counter 203vt during time saving and the value of the counter 203vu during probability variation (F1305). The status command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 and sent to the sound lamp control device 113 during the external output process (F1801) of the main process executed by the MPU 201. sent. Upon receiving the state command, the sound lamp control device 113 updates the sub-state setting area 223sh in accordance with the game state notified by the state command. Thereby, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately grasped in the sound lamp control device 113 . Then, both the flag 203vv during the jackpot and the variable probability setting flag 203vh are set to OFF (F1306), and the process is terminated.

By executing this jackpot end processing 22 (see FIG. 712), the game state after the jackpot end is accurately set according to whether or not the ball has passed through the V gate (specific area) 65v during the jackpot game. can be done.

In the notification process 22 (F1114), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the notification counter 203vm is greater than 0 (F1221). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203vm is 0 (F1221: No), it is determined whether it is time to end the second round (F1222). The end timing of the second round is determined by detecting that 10 balls have been won in the second round or by determining that 30 seconds have passed. When it is determined that it is time to end the second round (F1222: Yes), a counter value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the notification counter 203vm. After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of F1222, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the second round (F1222: No), this processing ends. Here, by setting a 2-second counter in F1223, the notification counter 203vm becomes 0 during the interval time of 3 seconds, which is the ball-scoring time after the end of the 2nd round, and the voice prompting to see the liquid crystal is heard. output. Therefore, the channel solenoid 65k operates in the second round, but since the player's attention is drawn to the liquid crystal from the interval time after the end of the second round, the movement of the switching member 65h of the first variable winning device 65 can be identified. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from identifying the jackpot type. Therefore, the player can play the game expecting that the variable probability game state will be provided until the end of the jackpot game.

In this 22nd control example, by providing the notification counter 203vm, an effect is performed to draw attention to the liquid crystal over the second round from one second before the end of the interval time. It may be executed continuously from the eyes.

On the other hand, in the process of F1221, when it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203vm is greater than 0 (F1221: Yes), the value of the notification counter 203vm is updated by -1 (F1224). It is determined whether the value of the notification counter 203vm after updating is 0 (F1225). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203vm is 0 (F1225: Yes), a notification command is set (F1226). After that, this process ends. By this notification command, the audio lamp control device 113 executes the setting of the audio output of "look at the liquid crystal".

Next, the details of the prize winning process 22 (F1115) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 714 is a flow chart showing this winning process 22 (F1115). This winning process 22 (F1115) is executed in the jackpot control process 22 (see FIG. 710), and as described above, is a process for performing control according to winning to the specific winning hole 65a.

In the prize winning process 22 (FIG. 714, F1115), first, it is determined whether or not it is the round valid period (F1231). The round valid period is the period during which the round game is set, that is, the period from the open state of the open door 65f1 to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). If it is determined that it is outside the round valid period (F1231: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is within the round valid period (F1231: Yes), it is determined whether the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed. When it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning opening 65a has been passed (F1232: Yes), the winning number counter 203vj is updated by adding 1 (F1233). After that, the process of F1234 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 is not passed (F1232: No), the process of F1234 is executed.

In the processing of F1234, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203vj is 10 or more (F1234). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203vj is 10 or more (F1234: Yes), the opening/closing door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed (F1236). After that, the remaining ball timer flag 203vn is set to ON (F1237). After that, the process of F1238 is executed. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203vn to ON, it can be determined that the ball is being swept after the opening/closing door 203n is closed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F1234 that the value of the winning number counter 203vj is less than 10, it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed (F1235). When it is determined that the round time has elapsed (F1235: Yes), the process of F1236 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (F1235: No), the process of F1238 is executed.

In the process of F1238, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203vk is greater than 0 (F1238). When it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203vk is greater than 0 (F1238: Yes), the value of the operation counter 203vk is decremented by 1 and updated (F1239). It is determined whether the game ball has passed through the variable probability switch 65e3 (F1240). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the variable probability passage switch 65e3 (F1240: Yes), the value of the variable probability passage counter 203vi is updated by adding 1 (F1241). The variable probability setting flag 203vh is set to ON (F1242), the V winning command is set (F1243), and then the process of F1244 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of F1240, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the variable probability switch 65e3 (F1240: No), the process of F1244 is executed. In the process of F1244, it is determined whether the operation counter 203vk is 0 (F1244). When it is determined that the operation counter 203vk is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off (F1245). The variable probability valid flag 203vp is set to ON (F1246). After that, this process ends. Here, when the probability variable effective flag 203vp is set to ON, even after the switching member 65h is switched, when the game ball remaining in the special flow path 65e2 passes the probability variable switch 65e3, the probability variable game can be controlled to be set.

On the other hand, in the process of F1238, when it is determined that the operation counter 203vk is 0 (F1238: No), it is determined whether the variable probability effective flag 203vp is ON (F1247). If the variable probability effective flag 203vp is off (F1247: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variable probability valid flag 203vp is ON (F1247: Yes), the variable probability valid timer 203vr is updated by adding 1 (F1248). It is determined whether the value of the variable probability valid timer is the upper limit value (1.2 s in this embodiment) (F1249). When it is determined that the variable probability valid timer 203vr is at the upper limit (F1249: Yes), the variable probability valid flag 203vp is set to OFF (F1250). The variable probability effective timer 203vr is reset to 0, which is the initial value (F1251). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of F1249, when it is determined that the variable probability effective timer 203vr is not the upper limit value (F1249: No), the process of F1240 is executed.

As a result, if the variable probability effective timer 203vr is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the variable probability switch 65e3, so the variable probability game state can be set in consideration of the time of ball blowing. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time that is determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the probability variation game state from being imparted by illegally passing the game ball through the probability variation switch 65e3.

Next, abnormality processing 22 (F1116) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 715 is a flow chart showing the contents of this abnormality processing 22 (F1116). In the abnormality process 22 (F1116), a process of monitoring whether or not the variable probability switch 65e3 is illegally passed is executed.

In the abnormality processing 22 (FIG. 715, F1116), first, it is determined whether or not it is the round effective period (F1261). If it is outside the round valid period (F1261: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is within the round effective period (F1261: Yes), it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the ball outlet switch 65e4 (F1262). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the ball outlet switch 65e4 (F1262: Yes), the value of the ball discharge number counter 203s is updated by adding 1 (F1263). After that, the process of F1264 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the ball outlet switch 65e4 (F1262: No), the process of F1264 is executed.

In the processing of F1264, it is determined whether or not the remaining ball timer flag 203n is ON (F1264). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203vn is off (F1264: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203vn is ON (F1264: Yes), it is during the ball sweeping time period, so the remaining ball timer 203vo is updated by adding 1 (F1265). The remaining ball timer 203vo determines whether or not the upper limit value (3 seconds in this 22nd control example) has passed (F1266). If it is determined that it is not the upper limit value (F1266: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined to be the upper limit value (F1266: Yes), the number of discharges (the total value of the probability variable passage counter 203vi and the discharge number counter 203vs) and the winning number (the value of the winning number counter 203vj) match. (F1267).

If it is determined that they match (F1267: Yes), the process of F1269 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (F1267: No), an error command is set (F1268). After that, the process of F1269 is executed. When the error command is received by the audio lamp control device 113, an error is displayed (for example, characters indicating a winning number mismatch error are displayed), and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress illegality such that the game ball is illegally left in the first variable winning device 65 and the game ball is passed through the variable probability switch 65e3 even if it is a big hit C.例文帳に追加

In the process of F1269, the remaining ball timer flag 203vn is set to OFF (F1269), and the remaining ball timer 203vo is reset to 0 which is the initial value (F1270). After that, the winning number counter 203vj, the discharge number counter 203vs, and the variable probability passage counter 203vi are reset to their initial values (F1271), and then this process ends.

<Regarding control processing executed by the sound ramp control device in the 22nd control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 716 to 734, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into startup processing that is activated upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 716, start-up processing executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 716 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process is executed upon power-on (F2001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether the power-off processing flag is on or not, the power-off processing of F2117 (see FIG. ) is started during execution (F2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 717, when the audio lamp controller 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 (see F2114 in FIG. 717), it executes power-off processing in F2117. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of F2117 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (F2002: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power of F2117 was turned off. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (F2003).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of F2006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed (F2003: Yes), the process proceeds to F2004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (F2003: No), the process proceeds to F2008.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). from), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (F2003: Yes), and the process proceeds to F2004. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing of F2117 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the processing is started after the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (F2003: No), and the process proceeds to F2008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (F2002: Yes), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off process of F2117, the sound lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S1404 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S2004, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (F2004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (F2005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (F2006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (F2005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (F2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the process of F2008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (F2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off processing of F2117 is executed (see F2116 in FIG. 717). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of F2117 is executed. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off processing in F2117 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (F2008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared (F2009) to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (F2010), an interrupt Permission is set (F2011), and the process proceeds to main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the reason why the process of F2008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that, for example, the current start-up process was started after the power supply was completely shut off, and the process of F2008 is performed via the processes from F2004 to F2006. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (F2008: No), skip F2009, which is processing for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, and shift the processing to F2010, set the initial value of the RAM 223 (F2010), and set interrupt permission (F2011), and shift to the main process.

The reason why the clearing process of F2009 is skipped is that when the process of F2008 is reached from F2004 via the process of F2006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of F2004, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, referring to FIG. 717, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 717 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether 1 ms or more has passed since the main process was started or after the current process of F2101 was executed (F2101), and 1 msec or more has passed. If not (F2101: No), the process proceeds to F2112 without performing the processes of F2102 to F2111. In the process of F2101, it is determined whether or not 1 ms has passed because F2102 to F2111 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). , F2112 and the variable display setting process 22 of F2113 are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the processing of F2112 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the processing of F2113 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing 22 can be prevented. Based on the command, it is possible to perform settings related to variable performance without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of F2101 (F2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of F2103 to F2113 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (F2102 ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of F2108 described later (F2103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (F2104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to F2105 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of F2105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (F2106). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. It is sent to device 114 . In the reserved number display update process, a process of lighting a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223vb is performed.

Thereafter, frame button input monitoring/effect processing 22 is executed (F2107). This frame button input monitoring and effect processing 22 monitors input as to whether or not the frame button 22A operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22A is confirmed. This is the process of setting to perform the production that was performed. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22A by the player is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22A is set for the display control device 114. FIG. Details of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 22 will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 22 ends, the lamp editing processing is executed (F2108), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (F2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of F2109, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (F2110). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. The lamp editing process of F2008 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of F2009 is also executed at the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

After the liquid crystal effect execution management process, the effect update process 22 is executed (F2111). In effect update processing 22, processing for updating the values of various counters and various timers in RAM 223 of sound lamp control device 113 is executed. Details of the rendering update process 22 will be described later with reference to FIG.

After effect update processing 22, command determination processing 22 is performed to perform processing according to the command received from main controller 110 (F2112). The details of this command determination process 22 will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the processing moves to F2113. In the process of F2113, the variable display setting process 22 is executed (F2113). In the variable display setting process 22 , a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 . As a result, the command is sent to display controller 114 . The details of this variable display setting process 22 will be described later with reference to FIG.

Then, when the variable display setting process 22 is completed, it is determined whether or not information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the work RAM 233 (F2114). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of F2114 (F2114: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (F2116), and the power-off processing is executed (F2117). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in-progress flag is turned off (F2118), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the processing of F2114 (F2114: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (F2115), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (F2115: No), the process returns to F2101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (F2115: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinitely looped, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination process 22 (F2112) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 718 is a flow chart showing this command determination process 22 (F2112). This command determination process 22 (F2112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 717) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. do.

In the command determination process 22 (FIG. 718, F2112), first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and processed by the main controller. It is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from 110 (F2201). If a status command has been received (F2201: Yes), status command reception processing 22 is executed (F2202), processing according to other commands is executed (F2217), and the process returns to the main processing. This state command reception process 22 (F2202) is a process for setting a display mode corresponding to the changed game state in the third display control device 81 when the game state is changed in the main controller 110. . Details of the status command reception process 22 will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is a command used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. A command is set so as to be transmitted to the device 114 .

On the other hand, if the state command has not been received (F2203: No), then it is determined whether or not the variation pattern command has been received from main controller 110 (F2203). Then, when the variation pattern command is received (F2203: Yes), the variation start flag 223vd is set to ON (F2204), the variation pattern is extracted from the received variation pattern command (F2205), and other commands The corresponding process is executed (F2217), and the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, if no variation pattern command has been received (F2203: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from main controller 110 (F2206). When the stop type command is received (F2206: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223ve of the RAM 223 is set to ON (F2207), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (F2208), and other command is executed (F2217), and the process returns to the main process. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variable display setting process 22 (see FIG. 727) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (F2206: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball number command has been received from main controller 110 (F2209). Then, when the pending ball number command is received (F2209: Yes), it is determined whether the received pending ball number command is the special figure 1 pending ball number command or the special figure 2 pending ball number command. , the value included in the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203vd of the main control device 110 (the number of times of holding the fluctuation display in the special symbol N1), or the special symbol 2 reservation of the main control device 110 Extract the value of the number of balls counter 203ve (the number N2 of suspension of variable display in the special symbol) and store it in the special symbol 1 suspension number of balls counter 223vb or the special symbol 2 suspension number of balls counter 223vc of the voice lamp control device 113. (F2210). In addition, in the process of F2210, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223vb and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223vc is set. After the process of F2210 ends, the process corresponding to other commands is executed (F2217), and the process returns to the main process.

Here, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command or the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (start winning), or when a lottery of special symbols is performed. Since it is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the start winning prize is detected, or each time a special symbol lottery is performed, the special symbol 1 reserved ball of the sound lamp control device 113 is processed by the processing of F2210. The values of the number counter 223vb and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223vc can be matched with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203vd and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ve of the main controller 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise, etc., the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223vb or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223vc of the voice lamp control device 113 is Even if it deviates from the value of the 2 reserved ball number counter 203ve, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223vb or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223vc of the voice lamp control device 113 at the time of detecting the start winning prize or the special symbol lottery. can be modified to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203vd or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ve of the main controller 110. In addition, when the process of F2210 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223vb and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223vc is issued. set. As a result, in the display control device 114 , the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In the process of F2209, if the command for the number of reserved balls has not been received (F2209: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning command has been received from the main controller 110 (F2211). When it is determined that the winning command has been received (F2211: Yes), the winning command process 22 is executed (F2212), the process according to other commands is executed (F2217), and the process returns to the main process. This winning command process 22 includes a winning command (winning information command) set when the special symbol lottery lottery right is acquired from the main control device 110, and a general symbol lottery lottery right set when the normal symbol lottery lottery right is acquired. It is a process executed when receiving a winning information command for illustration and a V winning command set when a ball flows down (passes) a specific gate (probability variable switch) during a jackpot game. Details of the winning command process 22 will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, in the process of F2211, if it is determined that the winning command has not been received (F2211: No), it is determined whether a stop command has been received from the main controller 110 (F2213). When it is determined that the stop command has been received (F2213: Yes), the stop command processing 22 is executed, and processing according to other commands is executed (F2217), and the process returns to the main processing. This stop command process 22 executes various processes when a stop command is received from the main controller 110, that is, at the timing of stopping the special symbols. Details of the stop command processing 22 will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of F2213, when it is determined that the stop command has not been received (F2213: No), it is determined whether a jackpot related command has been received (F2215). When it is determined that a jackpot-related command has been received (F2215: Yes), a jackpot-related process is executed (F2216), a process according to other commands is executed (F2217), and the process returns to the main process. This jackpot-related processing is to perform processing for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the jackpot game to be executed when the jackpot is won. Processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from the device 110 is executed. Details of the jackpot-related processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, state command reception processing 22 (F2202) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 719 is a flow chart showing this status command reception process 22 (F2202). This state command reception process 22 (F2202) is executed in the command determination process 22 (see FIG. 718) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. Accordingly, a process for setting different display modes to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed. Details of the status command reception process 22 (F2202) will be described below.

When the state command reception process 22 (F2202) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the currently set game state is to be changed (F2301). Here, it is determined whether or not the game state set in the sub-state storage area 223vh is different from the game state indicated by the state command received this time. In the processing of F2301, if it is determined that there is no change in the game state (F2301: No), this processing ends. When it is determined that there is a change in the game state (F2301: Yes), it is determined whether the game state after the change is the normal state (F2302).

In the processing of F2302, when it is determined that the game state after the change is the normal state (when the state command received this time is a command indicating the normal state) (F2302: Yes), the display command indicating the normal mode is issued. Set (F2303) and move to the process of F2304.

In the processing of F2302, if it is determined that the game state after the change is not the normal state (if the state command received this time is not a command indicating the normal state) (F2302: No), then the game state after the change is It is determined whether it is a time saving state (F2305), and if it is determined that the gaming state is a time saving state (the state command received this time is a command indicating a time saving state) (F2305: Yes), the time saving medium counter 223vq A value of 100 is set (F2306), a display command indicating the chance mode is set (F2307), and the process proceeds to F2304.

In the processing of F2305, if it is determined that the gaming state does not have a time saving state (F2305: No), then it is determined whether the game state after the change is a variable probability state (F2308), and the gaming state is a variable probability state (F2308: Yes) If it is determined that (the state command received this time is a command indicating the variable probability state), the value of the variable probability counter 223sr is set to 120 (F2309), and whether the V notification flag 223vu is on It is determined whether or not (F2310). If the V notification flag 223vu is off (F2310: No), the process proceeds to F2306 described above. If the V notification flag 223vu is ON (F2310: Yes), the V notification flag 223vu is set to OFF (F2311), a display command indicating the super chance mode is set (F2312), and the process proceeds to F2304. .

In the process of F2304, the game state set in the current state area of the sub-state setting area 223sh is set in the past state area (F2304), and the information indicated by the received state command is set in the current state area of the sub-state setting area 223sh. The corresponding game state is set (F2304), and this process is terminated.

Here, by notifying the display control device 114 of the commands set in the processing of F2303, F2307 and F2312, the variable effect display corresponding to the game state is executed. As described above, in the twenty-second control example, various display modes displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 based on the state command output from the main control device 110 are controlled by the sound lamp control device 113. A type (mode, background) is set, and a command indicating the type is output to the display control device 114 .

By configuring in this way, for example, it is possible to eliminate the need to set the display mode of the variable effect display for each game state set on the sound lamp control device 113 side. In other words, a command (type command) indicating the type of various display modes corresponding to the currently set game state and a variation pattern command (common command) corresponding to the variation display of the special symbols are output to the display control device 114. display data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a display mode corresponding to the current gaming state and the received variation pattern based on the type command received by the display control device 114 side and the common command. can be set. Therefore, the processing load of the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

In addition, as described above, when the display data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is set by combining a plurality of commands received from the sound lamp control device 113 on the display control device 114 side, Information (confirmation information) indicating the content of display data after setting is output from the display control device 114 side to the audio lamp control device 113 side, and the confirmation information received by the audio lamp control device 113 side is correct. If it is determined that the determination result is not appropriate, a simple display variation pattern command indicating appropriate information is set, and the contents of the already set display data are set. It is preferable to configure so as to rewrite to simple display data.

By configuring in this way, when appropriate display data is not set for various commands received by the audio lamp controller 113 from the main controller 110, simple display data indicating appropriate information is set. It is possible to display a variable effect display based on the simple display data. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's willingness to play due to the execution of a variable effect display with contents different from the actual game result (lottery result of special symbols). In addition, the simple display data described above includes, for example, display data for displaying a special mode (for example, black background mode) that does not correspond to any game state, and display data for executing variable display of the fourth symbol. For example, display data having a smaller amount of data than the display data used in normal variable effect display may be used.

In the twenty-second control example, the configuration described above is used, but the present invention is not limited to this. On the sound lamp control device 113 side, the current game state and the display variation pattern command based on the received variation pattern may be configured to set

Next, with reference to FIG. 720, the contents of the winning command process 22 (see F2212) executed in the command determination process 22 (see F2112 in FIG. 718) will be described. FIG. 720 is a flow chart showing the details of the winning command process 22 (F2212). This winning command process 22 (F2212) is set when the winning command (winning information command) is set when the special symbol lottery lottery right is acquired from the main control device 110, or when the normal symbol lottery lottery right is acquired. It is a process that is executed when receiving a winning information command for a normal figure or a V winning command set when a ball flows down (passes) a specific gate (variable probability switch) during a jackpot game.

When the winning command process 22 (F2212) is executed, first, the information of the winning command (winning information command) received this time is stored (set) in the corresponding area of the winning information storage area (winning information storage area) 223b ( F2401), a special figure winning information command process is executed (F2402). The details of the special figure winning information command process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the special figure winning information command processing is over, then the command received this time is V winning command (winning process 22 (see F1115 in Figure 714). command (see F1243)) (F2403). When the received command is the V winning command (F2403: Yes), the V winning flag 223vt is set to ON (F2406), and it is determined whether the V effect execution flag 223vs is ON (F2405). When the V effect execution flag 223vs is ON (F2407: Yes), the V effect execution flag 223vs is set to OFF (F2406), and a display command for announcing V winning is set (F2407). Then, the V notification flag 223vu is set to ON (F2408), other processes are executed (F2409), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of F2403, if the received command is not the V winning command (F2403: No), the process of F2405 to F2408 is skipped and the process proceeds to F2409.

Also, in the process of F2405, if the V effect execution flag 223vs is not ON (F2405: No), the process of F2406 to F2408 is skipped and the process proceeds to F2409.

In the process of F2409, other processes are executed (S4413), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 721, the contents of the special figure winning information command process 22 (F2402) executed in the winning command process 22 (F2212 in FIG. 720) will be described. FIG. 721 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special figure winning information command process 22 (F2402).

When the special figure winning information command process 22 (F2402) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the winning command received this time is a special figure winning command (F2501). If the received command is a special figure winning command (F2501: Yes), the current game state is extracted based on the information set in the sub-state setting area 223sh (F2502), and the normal game state (special It is determined whether or not the information indicates the low probability state of the symbol or the low probability state of the normal symbol (F2503). If it is in the normal game state (F2503: Yes), the pending effect setting process 22 is executed (F2504), and the process proceeds to F2505. This pending effect setting process 22 is a process for setting the effect content of the above-described pending changing effect. The details of the pending effect setting process 22 will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if the game is not in the normal game state (F2503: No), the process of F2504 is skipped and the process proceeds to F2505.

In addition, in this 22nd control example, when the normal game state is set as the game state, it is configured to be able to execute the pending change effect, but it is not limited to this, and the pending effect is not limited to the probability variable state and the time saving state. can be implemented.

In the processing of F2505, the display command based on the information included in the received special figure winning information command is set (F2505), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 722, the contents of the pending effect setting process 22 (F2504) executed in the special figure winning command process 22 (F2402 in FIG. 721) will be described. FIG. 722 is a flow chart showing the contents of the pending effect setting process 22 (F2504).

When the hold effect setting process 22 (F2504) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the post-hold setting flag 223vn is ON (F2551). As described above, the post-suspension setting flag 223vn is set to ON when the suspension change scenario of the compound suspension change effect is set and the color of the suspension pattern of the suspension ball acquired next to the suspension ball to be changed is specified. be done. Therefore, when the post-suspension setting flag 223vn is ON (F2551: Yes), the color of the corresponding pending design is determined based on the pending effect information stored in the pending effect information storage area 223vl (F2552). , the post-reservation flag 223sn is set to OFF (F2553), a display command for indicating the display mode (color) of the determined reservation pattern is set, and the process proceeds to F2555.

On the other hand, in the processing of F2551, when the post-suspension setting flag 223vn is not ON (F2551: No), it is determined whether the suspension effect restriction flag 223vm is ON (F2556). If the pending effect restricted flag 223vm is ON (F2556: Yes), since it is a period in which the setting of a new pending change effect is restricted, the process related to the setting of the pending change effect is skipped. , F2555.

In the processing of F2556, if the pending effect restriction flag 223vm is not ON (F2556: No), the pending change effect lottery table 222vb (see FIG. 694(a)) is referred to determine whether or not to execute the pending change effect. (F2557). Then, in the process of F2557, it is determined whether execution of the single pending change effect is determined (F2558), and if execution of the single pending change effect is determined (F2558: Yes), the pending color selection table 222vc (Fig. 694(b)), the color of the pending symbol corresponding to the winning command of this time is determined (F2559), and the determined pending effect information is stored in the pending effect information storage area 223vl (F2560). After that, the pending effect restriction flag 223vm is set corresponding to the determined content (F2561), and the process proceeds to F2554.

On the other hand, in the process of F2558, when it is determined that the single pending change effect is not executed (F2558: No), it is determined whether the execution of the combined pending change effect is determined in the process of F2557 (F2562). When the execution of the composite pending change effect is determined (F2562: Yes), the composite pending change effect setting process 22 is executed (F2563), and the process proceeds to F2554.

Here, with reference to FIG. 723, the composite pending change effect setting process 22 will be described. FIG. 723 is a flow chart showing the contents of the composite hold change effect setting process 22. FIG.

When the composite hold change effect setting process 22 (F2517) is executed, first, the hold change scenario selection table 222vd (see FIG. 695) is referred to determine the hold change scenario (F2601), and the content determined in the process of F2601. is determined (F2602). Then, the pending effect information indicating the content determined in the process of F2601 is stored in the pending effect information storage area 223vl (F2603). Thereafter, the pending effect restriction flag 223vm is set corresponding to the content determined in the processing of F2601 (F2604), and the post-holding setting flag 223vn is set corresponding to the content determined in the processing of F2601 (F2605). , returns to the pending effect setting process 22 (see FIG. 722).

Returning to FIG. 722, the description continues. In the process of F2562, when it is determined that the composite pending change effect is not executed (F2562: No), the process proceeds to F2555.

In the process of F2555, a display command based on the information contained in the special figure winning information command received this time is set (F2555), and after the end of the process of F2555, the process returns to the special figure winning information command process 22.

Next, referring to FIG. 724, the contents of stop command processing 22 (F2214) executed in command determination processing 22 (see F2112 in FIG. 718) will be described. FIG. 724 is a flow chart showing the contents of stop command processing 22 (F2214). When a stop command is received from the main controller 110, that is, various processes are executed at the timing of stopping the special symbols.

When the stop command process 22 (F2214) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the shaking standby flag 223vw is ON (F2651). When the shaking standby flag 223vw is ON (F2652: Yes), a display command for indicating the display mode indicating the winning of the jackpot (in this 22nd control example, display of "blessing") is set (F2652). , the shaking standby flag 223vw is set to OFF (F2653), and the process proceeds to F2654. On the other hand, in the process of F2651, if the shaking standby flag 223vw is not ON (F2651: No), the processes of F2652 and F2653 are skipped and the process of F2654 is executed.

In the process of F2654, the pending effect information stored in the pending effect information storage area 223vl is read (F2654), and it is determined whether there is a pending change scenario in which the pending pattern corresponding to the special symbol being executed is changed ( F2655), if there is a pending change scenario in which the pending symbol corresponding to the special symbol being changed is subject to change (F2655: Yes), the pending effect limit flag 223vm is set to OFF (F2656), and the third The stop display of the symbol is determined (F2657), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of F2655, if there is no pending change scenario that changes the pending symbols corresponding to the special symbols that are being changed (F2655: No), the processing of F2656 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the processing of F2657. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 726, the contents of the jackpot related process 22 (F2216) will be described. FIG. 726 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot related process (F2216). In the jackpot-related process (F2216), a process is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the jackpot game to be executed when the jackpot is won. Processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from main controller 110 is executed.

In the jackpot related process 22 (F2216), first, it is determined whether or not the command received this time is a jackpot start command (F2701). When it is determined that it is a jackpot start command (F2701: Yes), a display jackpot start command is set (F2702). The display jackpot start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output process (F2102) of the main process (see FIG. 717). It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81 .

Next, it is determined whether the type of the current jackpot is the jackpot C (3R time-saving jackpot) (F2703), and if it is determined to be the jackpot C (F2703: Yes), the ending display mode indicating entering the chance mode is set. (F2704), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a jackpot C (F2703: No), it is determined whether the current jackpot type is a jackpot A (10R probability variable jackpot) (F2505), and if it is not a jackpot A (F2705: No ), that is, in the case of a jackpot B (3R probability variable jackpot), the process proceeds to F2704.

Here, the chance mode in the 22nd control example is configured as a mode in which the player cannot identify whether the set gaming state is the variable probability gaming state or the time-saving gaming state. Even if the display mode set after the end of the jackpot game is not a super chance mode (a display mode set only when the variable probability game state is set), the player expects that the variable probability state is set. It is possible to suppress the decline in the desire to play.

However, during the jackpot game that is executed when the probability variable jackpot is won, the V effect (the effect for prompting the player to shoot the game ball toward the specific area (V gate) 65v) is executed. Since the players can recognize that they have won the variable probability big win, there is a possibility that the chance mode set after the end of the big win game in which the V performance is not executed is not the variable probability game state.

Therefore, in the 22nd control example, when the jackpot B, which is a variable probability jackpot, is won, the V effect is not executed during the execution of the jackpot game. By configuring in this way, it is difficult for the player to understand whether the current chance mode is the variable probability game state or the time-saving game state, and by making the player expect that the variable probability state is set, the player's desire to play is reduced. can be suppressed.

On the other hand, in the process of F2705, when it is determined that the jackpot A is (F2705: Yes), set the V effect execution flag 223 vs ON (F2706), enter the super chance mode (probability variable state is set) is set (F2707), and the process ends.

Thus, in the twenty-second control example, as described above with reference to FIG. The ending display mode corresponding to the ending period of the jackpot game to be executed this time is set in advance at the timing when the game is started. By configuring in this way, various controls (variable display control of jackpot game information that is variably displayed according to the progress of the jackpot game (for example, control to display information for indicating the number of won prize balls and control during execution) Control for displaying information for indicating the number of round games) and prize ball payout control for paying out prize balls according to the number of balls that have won the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game) are frequently executed. Since there is no need to execute display control for setting the ending display mode during the jackpot game period, the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 can be reduced. In addition, in this 22nd control example, the process of setting the ending display mode is executed at the start timing of the jackpot game. The ending display mode may be set during the jackpot fluctuation, or the remaining period of the main processing of the sound lamp control device 113 executed during the period when the control processing is small in the jackpot game period. You can

On the other hand, in the process of F2701, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (F2701: No), then it is determined whether the round number command has been received (F2708), and the round number command has been received (F2708: Yes), a display round number command is set based on the number of rounds (F2710), and it is determined whether the current number of rounds is 2 rounds (V rounds) (F2710). When it is determined that it is the second round (V round) (F2710: Yes), it is determined whether or not the V effect execution flag 223vs is ON (F2711). When it is determined that the V effect execution flag 223vs is ON (F2711: Yes), a display command for guiding the V prize is set (F2712), and this processing ends. In addition, when it is determined in the process of F2710 that the current round number is not 2 rounds (V round), that is, when it is determined that a round game other than the second round is started (F2710: No), in the process of F2711, V Also when it is determined that the effect execution flag 223vs is off (F2711: No), this process is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in the process of F2708 that the round number command has not been received (F2708: No), then it is determined whether an ending command has been received (F2713), and if it is determined that it has been received (F2713: Yes ), the ending process 22 is executed (F2714), and this process ends. If it is determined in the processing of F2713 that the ending command has not been received (F2713: No), this processing ends.

Next, the ending process 22 (F2714) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 727 is a flow chart showing the content of the ending process 22 (F2714). This ending process 22 (F2714) is a process executed when it is determined that an ending command is received in the above-described jackpot related process 22 (see F2216 in FIG. 725), and is executed during the ending period. It executes processing for finally determining the display mode.

When the ending process 22 (F2714) is executed, it is first determined whether the V winning flag 223vt is set to ON (F2801), and if it is determined to be set to ON (F2801: Yes), The winning flag 223vt is set to OFF (F2802), execution of the ending display corresponding to the ending display mode already set is set (F2805), and this processing ends. Further, when it is determined that the V winning flag 223vt is not set to ON in the process of F2801 (F2801: No), it is determined whether the V effect execution flag 223vs is ON (F2803), and the V effect execution flag 223vs is determined. is off (F2803: No), the process proceeds directly to F2804.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F2803 that the V effect execution flag 223vs is ON (F2803: Yes), a display switching command is set for switching the display mode of the second half period (7 seconds) of the ending period. (F2804), and the process moves to F2805.

When the display switching command is set in the process of F2804, it is notified to the display control device 114, and the display mode of the latter half of the ending period set in advance corresponding to the setting of the super chance mode is changed to the chance mode. A process of switching to a display mode corresponding to the setting of the mode is executed. In the twenty-second control example, the display period of the display mode switched based on this display switching command is fixed (7 seconds), so the display mode can be easily switched.

Next, referring to FIG. 728, the contents of the variable display setting process 22 (F2113) will be described. FIG. 727 is a flow chart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 22 (F2113). This variable display setting process 22 (F2113) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 717) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is executed in the third symbol display device 81 to execute the variable effect. , based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, generates and sets a variation pattern command for display.

In the variable display setting process 22 (F2113), first, it is determined whether the variable start flag 223vd provided in the RAM 223 is ON (F2901). Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223vd is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (F2901: No), it means that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to F2911. do. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223vd is ON (F2901: Yes), next, it is determined whether the adjustment accessory movable flag 223vi is ON (F2902). When the adjustment accessory movable flag 223vi is on (F2902: Yes), the adjustment movable accessory (sword role Ym3) is in the adjustment position (see FIG. 678 (b)), so the adjustment Set the role movable flag 223vi to OFF (F2903), and set a lamp control command for turning off all the LEDs associated with the adjustment role (sword role Ym3) (F2904). After that, set the accessory action scenario for moving the adjustment accessory (sword accessory Ym3) to the initial position (see FIG. 669(a)) (F2905), and set the limit timer 223vj to a value corresponding to 10 seconds. is set (F2906), and the process proceeds to F2907.

As described above, in the twenty-second control example, when the player is performing the light amount adjustment using the sword object Ym3 during the standby period in which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, the variable display of the special symbol is performed. is started, a process for storing the sword object Ym3 is executed so that the player can easily visually recognize the variable effect. Also, at this time, if the action of returning from the adjusted position to the initial position is performed while the sword Ym3 is emitting light, the player may misunderstand that the action is part of the effect in the variable effect. Therefore, in order to suppress this, all the LEDs attached to the sword character Ym3 are turned off before the sword character Ym3 returns from the adjustment position to the initial position, thereby reducing the current sword character Ym3. It is possible to make it easy for the player to understand that the action has nothing to do with the variable presentation.

In addition, if the result of the lottery for the special symbols started with the sword object Ym3 in the adjustment position is a jackpot, instead of turning off all the LEDs attached to the sword object Ym3, for example, a rainbow A configuration may be adopted in which the light is emitted in different colors and then returned to the initial position.

On the other hand, in the process of F2902, if the adjustment accessory movable flag 223vi is not ON (F2902: No), the process of F2903 to F2906 is skipped, and the process proceeds to F2907.

In the process of F2907, the fluctuation start flag 223vd is set to OFF (F2907), and then the fluctuation pattern extracted in the process of F2205 of the command determination process 22 (see F2203 in FIG. 718) is obtained (F2908). Then, the variation effect setting process 22 for generating the display variation pattern command for notification to the display control device 114 based on the acquired variation pattern type is executed (F2909), and the display variation pattern command is set. (F2910), the process moves to F2911. Details of the variable effect setting process 22 (F2909) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of F2911, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223ve provided in the RAM 223 is ON (F2911). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223ve is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (F2911: No), it means that the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this process is executed as it is. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223ve is ON (F2911: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223ve that is set to ON is set to OFF (F2912). (see S2112 of )) is acquired (F2913), and the extracted stop type is set as it is (F2914). After that, a stop type command for display is set (F2915), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 728, the contents of the variable effect setting process 22 (F2909) executed in the variable display setting process 22 (see F2113 in FIG. 727) will be described. FIG. 728 is a flow chart showing the contents of the variable effect setting process 22 (F2909). This fluctuation production setting process 22 (F2909) is executed when setting the fluctuation production of the special symbol in the fluctuation display setting process 22 (see F2113 in FIG. 727), and the set game state A process for setting the effect mode of the variable effect corresponding to is executed.

When the variable effect setting process 22 (F2909) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter 223vq during time saving is 0 or more (F3001). When the value of the counter sq during time saving is not 0 or more (F3001: No), that is, when the chance mode is set as the display mode, the processes of F3002 and F3003 are skipped, and the process proceeds to F3004. On the other hand, when the value of the time saving counter 223vq is 0 or more (F3001: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 223vq is subtracted by 1 (F3002), and the display command for indicating the value of the time saving counter 223vq after the subtraction is set (F3003), and the process proceeds to F3004.

In the processing of F3004, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable probability counter 223sr is 0 or more (F3004). If the value of the variable probability counter 223sr is not 0 or more (F3004: No), that is, if the variable probability gaming state is not set, skip the processing of F3005 to F3007 and proceed to the processing of F3008.

On the other hand, in the process of F3004, when the value of the variable probability counter 223sr is 0 or more (F3004: Yes), the value of the variable probability counter 223sr is subtracted by 1 (F3005), and then the super chance mode is set as the display mode. It is determined whether it is set (F3006). When the super chance mode is set (F3006: Yes), a display command for indicating the value of the variable probability counter 223sr after subtraction is set. On the other hand, in the process of F3006, when the super chance mode is not set (F3006: No), the process of F3007 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of F3008.

In the process of F3008, it is determined whether the value of the limit timer 223vj is 0 or more (F3008). If the value of the limit timer 223vj is equal to or greater than 0 (F3008: Yes), that is, if 10 seconds have not passed since the sword object Ym3 returned from the adjustment position to the initial position, there is a candidate for a determinable presentation mode. (F3009). On the other hand, if the value of the limit timer 223vj is not equal to or greater than 0 (F3008: No), skip the process of F3009 and proceed to F3010.

As described above, in the twenty-second control example, the effect mode for moving the sword Ym3 is not selected until a certain period of time (10 seconds) has passed after the sword Ym3 is moved. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress execution of the movement control of the sword object Ym3 in a short period of time. can be suppressed from occurring. In addition, the movement control for the next sword object Ym3 is executed before the sword object Ym3 becomes movable, and the movement period of the sword object Ym3 may be shifted or the normal movement may not be performed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of situations in which execution is not performed.

In the process of F3010, the game state stored in the secondary state storage area 223vh is read (F3010), and it is determined whether the game state is the time saving game state (F3011). If it is in the time-saving game state (F3011: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223vq is 1 (F3012). The production mode of the time saving end suggestion production is determined (F3013), and the process proceeds to F3014. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223vq is not 1 (F3012: No), the process of F3013 is skipped and the process proceeds to F3014. In the process of F3014, the effect mode corresponding to the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is determined, and the process proceeds to F3019.

In the processing of F3011, if it is determined that it is not in the time-saving gaming state (F3011: No), it is determined whether it is in the probability variation gaming state (F3013). If it is determined to be in a variable probability state (F3015: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 223vq is 1 (F3016), and if it is 1 (F3016: Yes), the effect result is super The performance mode of the time-saving end suggestion performance that is promoted to the chance mode is determined (F3017), and the process proceeds to F3014.

Thus, in this 22nd control example, when the probability variable gaming state is set based on winning the jackpot B (3R probability variable jackpot), even if the chance mode is set after the jackpot game ends, a predetermined number of times When the variable display of the special symbols is executed (100 times), the mode is promoted to the super chance mode. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player think that he may be promoted to the super chance mode in the final change of the chance mode, and when the remaining number of times of the chance mode becomes 0, the player can It is possible to suppress the decrease in motivation to play.

In the process of F3015, when it is determined that the variable probability game state is not set (F3015: No), since the normal game state is set, the normal state effect mode determination process 22 is executed (F3018). Here, with reference to FIG. 729, the contents of the normal state rendering mode determination process 22 (F3018) will be described. FIG. 729 is a flow chart showing the contents of the normal state rendering mode determination process 22 (F3018).

When the normal state effect mode determination process 22 (F3018) is executed, first, a variation pattern selection table (not shown) to determine the variable effect type (F3101). Then, it is determined whether or not the determined variable effect mode is shutter closing reach (F3102). When the shutter closing reach is determined (F3102: Yes), based on the result of the special symbol lottery and the value of the first production counter 223vf, the shutter closing reach selection table 222ve (see FIG. 696) is referred to, and the production is performed. The mode is determined (F3103), and the process moves to F3108.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F3102 that it is not the shutter closing reach (F3102: No), it is determined whether it is the movie execution reach (F3104). When it is determined that the movie execution reach is reached (F3104: Yes), the effect mode for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is determined (F3105), and the setting information of the operation effective period corresponding to the effect pattern is sent to the effect SW. Store it in the valid time storage area 223vp (F3106), and proceed to the process of F3108.

In the process of F3104, when it is determined that the movie execution reach is not reached (F3104: No), the effect mode corresponding to the determined variable effect type is determined (F3107), and the process proceeds to F3108. In the process of F3108, the holding effect execution process 22 (F3108) at the start of fluctuation is executed. The contents of the suspension effect execution process 22 at the start of fluctuation will be described later with reference to FIG. 730 . After that, a display variation pattern command indicating the determined effect mode is set, and this process is terminated.

Thus, in this 22nd control example, in the normal game state, since it is configured to be able to execute a variety of reach effects than the variable probability game state and the short time game state, the player than the variable probability game state and the short time game state It is possible to suppress early boredom of a player in a game in a normal game state which is disadvantageous to the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 730, the contents of the holding effect execution process 22 at the start of fluctuation will be described. FIG. 730 is a flow chart showing the contents of the hold effect execution process 22 at the start of fluctuation. This suspension effect execution processing 22 (F3109) at the time of fluctuation start is a process for executing a compound suspension change effect based on the suspension change scenario stored in the suspension effect information storage area 223vl.

When the pending effect setting process 22 at the start of fluctuation (F3109) is executed, first, the pending effect information stored in the pending effect information storage area 223vl is read out (F3201), and it is determined whether there is any pending change scenario information (F3202). ). If there is no hold change scenario (F3202: No), this processing is terminated because the composite hold change effect is not set. On the other hand, if there is pending change scenario information (F3202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current special symbol variation time is 10 seconds or longer (F3203). If the variation time is not 10 seconds or more (F3203: No), this process is terminated.

Thus, in the twenty-second control example, the composite hold change effect corresponding to the hold change scenario is executed only when the change time is 10 seconds or longer. This is because the pending change effect executed in the 22nd control example is the effect in which the left change role Ym1 and the right change role Ym2 are operated, so the suspension change effect is executed and the left change role Ym1 is executed. , the variation of the special symbol ends in the period from the movement of the right change accessory Ym2 to the storage state, and the next variation starts while the left change accessory Ym1 and the right change accessory Ym2 are in the movable state. This is to prevent

In the process of F3203, if the fluctuation time is 10 seconds or more (F3203: Yes), it is determined whether the stored pending change scenario is 1, 4, 7, or 9 (F3204). If the pending change scenario is one of 1, 4, 7, and 9 (F3204: Yes), it is determined whether the target pending pattern of the pending change is the third pending pattern hr3 (see FIG. 672) (F3205 ), and if it is the third reserved symbol hr3 (F3205: Yes), the character product action scenario 2 (see FIG. 697) is determined (F3206), and the process proceeds to F3207. On the other hand, when the target reserved design of the reserved change is not the third reserved design hr3, this processing is terminated.

It should be noted that all of the pending change scenarios 1, 4, 7, and 9 are scenarios in which the color of the pending pattern that precedes it is transplanted to the color of the pending pattern subject to the pending change. An operation of hiding the previous pending symbol by the left change accessory Ym1 is performed. The hold change scenario 2 is a special scenario that changes the color of the target hold by hiding the target hold of the hold change with the change accessory Ym2.

In the processing of F3204, if the pending change scenario is none of 1, 2, 4, 7, and 9 (F3204: No), the target pending pattern of the pending change is the second pending pattern hr2 (see FIG. 672). (F3210). If it is not the second reserved symbol hr2 (F3210: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the second reserved pattern hr2 (F3210: Yes), it is determined whether the post-hold setting flag 223vn is ON (F3211). If the post-reservation setting flag 223vn is ON (F3211: Yes), that is, if the next reservation ball is not obtained after obtaining the reservation ball corresponding to the target reservation pattern of the reservation change, The post-suspension setting flag 223vn is set to OFF (F3215), the suspension change scenario stored in the suspension effect information storage area 223vl is cleared (F3216), and this processing ends.

In this way, when the post-hold setting flag 223vn is ON, the configuration is such that the compound hold change effect is not executed. This is because it is a scenario in which the color of the target reserved pattern of the reserved change is transplanted into the color of the reserved pattern acquired after the target reserved pattern of , and by configuring in this way, an unnatural effect is given to the player. You can prevent it from being executed.

In the process of F3211, if the post-suspension setting flag 223vn is not ON (F3211: No), then it is determined whether the stored suspension change scenario is 5 or 9 (F3212). When it is determined that the pending change scenario is not either 6 or 11 (F3212: No), the role product action scenario 1 is determined (F3213), and the process proceeds to F3207. As described above, all of the pending change scenarios 3, 5, 8, and 10 are scenarios in which the color of the pending pattern acquired after the target pending pattern of the pending change is transplanted to the color of the target pending pattern of the pending change, The right change accessory Ym2 performs an operation of hiding the target reserved pattern of the reserved change.

On the other hand, in the process of F3212, if it is determined that it is one of the pending change scenarios 6 and 11 (F3214: Yes), the character action scenario 3 (see FIG. 697) is determined (F3214), and the process of F3207 transition to In addition, both of the pending change scenarios 6 and 11 are scenarios in which the colors of the pending symbols before and after the target pending pattern of the pending change are transplanted to the target pending pattern, so in the role product operation scenario 3, the first pending pattern hr1 is left. The operation of hiding with the change character Ym1 and hiding the third reserved pattern hr3 with the right change character Ym2 is performed.

In the process of F3207, the effect mode corresponding to the pending change scenario stored in the pending effect information storage area 223vl is determined (F3207), and the display pattern command indicating the determined effect mode is set (F3208). Then, a role product action command indicating the determined role product action scenario is set (F3209), the pending effect limiting flag 223vm is set to OFF (F3217), and this process is terminated.

Thus, in the twenty-second control example, based on a preset hold change scenario, it is determined whether or not the hold change effect corresponding to the hold change scenario can be executed in the change, and if executable, the hold change effect is determined. is configured to execute By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience caused by the end of the variation of the special symbol during execution of the pending change performance and the execution of unnatural performance for the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 731, frame button input monitoring/effect processing 22 (F2107) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 731 is a flow chart showing the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 22 (F2107). This frame button input monitoring/production process 22 (F2107) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 717) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and enhances the production effect in the third symbol display device 81. For this purpose, a display command is generated and set based on the operation of the frame button 22A in order to execute an effect according to the player's operation.

In frame button input monitoring/effect processing 22 (FIG. 731, F2107), first, the sound volume adjustment button (up button 600b or down button 600d) or the light amount adjustment button (right button 600c or left button 600e) is pressed. It is determined whether or not there is an operation (F3301). If there is an operation (F3301: Yes), determine whether the adjustment period flag 223vx is on (F3302), and if not (F3302: No), determine the display of the environment information adjustment screen ( F3303), sets the adjustment period flag 223vx to ON (F3304), and sets the elapsed timer 223vy to a value corresponding to 10 seconds (F3305).

After that, it is determined whether it is in the waiting period (F3306), and if it is determined that it is in the waiting period (F3306: Yes), the adjustment accessory (sword accessory Ym3) is set to the environment adjustment position (Fig. 678 (b )) to set the action scenario for changing to (F3307), and set the adjustment accessory movable flag 223vi to ON (F3308). Then, the mode (display of the display area HR3 in FIG. 678) for indicating that the adjusting accessory is in motion is determined (F3309), and the process proceeds to F3310.

On the other hand, in the processing of F3306, if it is determined that it is not in the waiting period (F3306: No), that is, during the variable display of the special symbols, or during the jackpot game, the processing of F3307 to F3309 is skipped. , F3310. As described above, in the twenty-second control example, when the selection button 600 is operated during a period other than the standby period, the adjustment role (sword role Ym3) is not changed to the environment adjustment position. , the adjustment accessory (sword role Ym3) overlaps the variable performance, and the player cannot visually recognize the variable performance.

In the twenty-second control example, when the selection button 600 is operated during a period other than the standby period, the adjustment accessory (sword accessory Ym3) is not changed to the environment adjustment position. However, for example, the adjustment accessory Ym3 may be changed to the environment adjustment position, and the variable performance of the special symbol may be reduced and displayed at a position that does not overlap with the adjustment accessory (sword role Ym3).

In the process of F3302, if the adjustment period flag 223vx is ON (F3302: Yes), the environment information adjustment screen has already been displayed. The information is updated in correspondence with the contents of the button operation (F3311), and the mode corresponding to the updated environment information is determined (F3312). Then, the elapsed timer 223vy is reset to a value corresponding to 10 seconds (F3313), and the process proceeds to F3310.

In the processing of F3301, if the volume adjustment button (up button 600b or down button 600d) or light intensity adjustment button (right button 600c or left button 600e) is not operated (F3301: No), It is determined whether the decision button 600a has been operated (F3314). If the OK button 600a has been operated (F3314: Yes), the OK button operation process 22 (F3315) is executed, and the process proceeds to F3310. The details of the decision button operation process 22 will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of F3314, if the decision button has not been operated (F3314: No), effect button operation process 22 is executed (F3316), and the process of F3310 is executed. In the process of F3310, a display command corresponding to the determined mode is set (F3310), and this process ends. The contents of the effect button operation process 22 will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 732, the content of decision button operation processing 22 (F3315) executed in frame button input monitoring/effect processing 22 (see F2107 in FIG. 731) will be described. 732 is a flow chart showing the contents of the decision button operation process 22. FIG.

When the decision button operation process 22 (F3315) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the adjustment period flag 223vx is ON (F3351). If it is determined that the adjustment period flag 223vx is not ON (F3351: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the adjustment period flag 223vx is ON (F3351: Yes), the value of the elapsed timer is set to 1 (F3352), and it is determined whether the adjustment accessory movable flag 223vi is ON (F3353 ). If the adjustment accessory movable flag 223vi is not ON (F3353: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the adjustment accessory movable flag 223vi is on (F3352: Yes), the adjustment accessory (sword accessory Ym3) is in the environment adjustment position, so the adjustment accessory (sword The action scenario for changing the character Ym3) to the initial position is set (F3354), and the display mode indicating the end of environment adjustment (environment adjustment end display cm1 in FIG. 679(a)) is determined (F3355). Then, the adjustment accessory movable flag 223vi is set to OFF (F3356), the limit timer 223vj is set to a value corresponding to 10 seconds (F3357), and this process is terminated.

In addition, when the adjustment accessory (sword accessory Ym3) is in the environment adjustment position, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, the process of turning off all the LEDs attached to the adjustment accessory Ym3 (Fig. 727 F2904 reference) was executed, but when the adjustment accessory (sword accessory Ym3) is changed from the environment adjustment position to the initial position in response to the operation of the enter button, the special symbol is still displayed. Since this is a state in which the variable performance is not being executed, and there is no risk of misleading the player that the action of the adjustment accessory (sword Ym3) is part of the variable performance, the adjustment accessory (sword The LEDs associated with the role item Ym3) are changed to their initial positions without being completely turned off.

By setting the value of the elapsed timer 223vy to 1 in the decision button operation process 22, the value of the elapsed timer 223vy is set to 0 when the next rendering update process 22 (see F2111 in FIG. 734) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to unify the process of setting the adjustment period flag 223vx to OFF.

Next, referring to FIG. 733, the content of the effect button operation process 22 (F3319) executed in the frame button input monitoring/effect process 22 (see F2107 in FIG. 731) will be described. FIG. 733 is a flow chart showing the contents of the effect button operation process 22 (F3319).

When the effect button operation process 22 (F3319) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the effect button 22 has been operated (F3401). If the effect button 22 has not been operated (F3401: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the effect button 22 has been operated (F3401: Yes), it is determined whether the effect SW valid period is in effect (F3402). It is set based on stored information. If it is determined that the SW for effect is valid (F342: Yes), the movie playback mode is determined (F3403), and the in-movie flag 223vv is set to ON (F3404). After that, the effect mode corresponding to pressing of the other effect button is determined (F3405), and this processing is terminated.

In the process of F3402, if it is determined that the SW for effect is not valid (F3402: No), the process of F3405 is executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 734, the contents of effect update process 22 (F2111) will be described. FIG. 734 is a flow chart showing the contents of effect update processing 22 (F2111). When the effect update process 22 (F2111) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the elapsed timer 223vy is 0 or more (F3501).

When the value of the elapsed timer 223vy is 0 or more (F3501: Yes), the value of the elapsed timer 223vy is updated (F3502), and it is determined whether the updated value of the elapsed timer 223vy is 0 (F3503). If the value of the elapsed timer 223vy is not 0 (F3503: No), the process proceeds to F3510.

On the other hand, when the value of the elapsed timer 223vy is 0 (F3503: Yes), the display mode indicating the end of the environmental adjustment (environmental adjustment end display cm1 in FIG. 679) is set (F3504), and the in-adjustment flag 223vx is set. It is set to off (F3505). Then, it is determined whether the flag 223vi during adjustment accessory movement is ON (F3506). If the adjustment accessory movable flag 223vi is not ON (F3506: No), the process proceeds to F3510. When the adjustment role object moving flag 223vi is on (F3506: Yes), an action scenario for moving the adjustment role object (sword role object Ym3) to the initial position is set (F3507), and adjustment The service item movable flag 223vi is set to OFF (F3508), the limit timer 223vj is set to a value corresponding to 10 seconds (F3509), and the process proceeds to F3510.

In the process of F3501, when the value of the elapsed timer 223vy is not 0 or more (F3501: No), that is, when the environment information adjustment screen is not displayed, the processes of F3502 to F3509 are skipped, and the process of F3510 is skipped. Go to processing.

In the process of F3510, it is determined whether the value of the limit timer 223vj is 0 or more (F3510), and if the value of the limit timer 223vj is 0 or more (F3511: Yes), the value of the limit timer 223vj is updated ( F3511), the process moves to F3512. On the other hand, in the process of F3510, if the value of the limit timer 223vj is not 0 or more (F3510), that is, if the value is not set to the limit timer 223vj, the process proceeds to F3512.

In the process of F3512, it is determined whether or not the movie execution has ended in the movie execution reach (F3512). If the movie execution has not ended (F3512: No), the process proceeds to F3517. On the other hand, if the movie execution has ended (F3512: Yes), it is determined whether the in-movie flag 223vv is on (F3513). If the in-movie flag 223vv is not ON (F3513: No), it means that the movie execution reach is not executed, so the processes of F3514 to F3516 are skipped and the process proceeds to F3517.

In the processing of F3513, if the movie flag 223vv is ON (F3513: Ye number), the shaking display mode (display mode where the third symbol is shaking as shown in FIG. 684(b)) is set (F3514 ), the shaking standby flag 223vw is set to ON (F3515), the movie flag 223vv is set to OFF (F3516), and the process proceeds to F3517.

In the process of F3517, other various counters and various timers are updated (F3517), and this process ends.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-second control example, when an effect (reserved change effect) for changing the display mode of the reserved symbols corresponding to the obtained reserved ball is executed, the reserved symbols other than the change target are hidden by decorative movable accessories (change accessories Ym1 and Ym2). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it clear to the player which of the reserved symbols to be changed is.

Further, when the decorative movable accessories (decorative movable accessories Ym1 and Ym2) perform the operation of hiding the reserved symbols other than the change target, the operation of hiding the reserved symbols other than the change target is performed step by step. By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting which reserved pattern is to be changed during the period from the start of the reserved change performance to the end of the reserved change performance.

In addition, in the 22nd control example, the configuration is such that the reserved symbols other than those to be changed are hidden by the decorative movable accessory, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the third symbol display device 81 displays the reserved symbols other than those to be changed. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a blocking mode (for example, a display mode imitating a shutter, etc.) is displayed so that the displayed display area cannot be visually recognized. Alternatively, the third symbol may be used to hide reserved symbols other than those to be changed.

<Modification of the 22nd control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 797, a modification of the second control example described above will be described. In the twenty-second control example described above, the movable accessory for decoration (sword role Ym3) has the function of adjusting the amount of light of the pachinko machine 10, and is used in the variable effect of the special symbol when adjusting the amount of light performed during the standby period. is changed to the environment adjustment position, and the light amount can be adjusted by the LED attached to the decorative movable accessory (sword accessory Ym3). On the other hand, the modified example of the 22nd control example is different in that the light amount is adjusted using the large sword character Ym4 instead of the sword character Ym3.

Here, in recent years, there has been known a pachinko machine 10 equipped with a decorative movable accessory having a size that hides most of the display area of the third symbol representation device 81 . In such a pachinko machine 10, there is one in which the decorative movable accessory is moved in accordance with the demonstration effect executed during the standby period. With this configuration, the movable accessory for decoration can be moved in the demonstration effect, thereby making it easier for the player to have an image of the variable effect executed during the game, and using the movable accessory for decoration. By making the player want to see the variable presentation, the player's willingness to play can be improved.

However, in such a pachinko machine 10, if it is attempted to adjust the amount of light during the execution of the demonstration effect, the movable accessory for decoration moves according to the operation scenario, so the indicator for adjusting the amount of light displayed on the liquid crystal display is not displayed. There is a problem that it becomes difficult to visually recognize and hinders adjustment of the amount of light. A modified example of the twenty-second control example will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 797(a) shows an example of the pachinko machine 10 in which the decorative movable accessory (large sword accessory Ym4) is in motion during the demonstration production. As shown in FIG. 797(a), when the large sword Ym4 becomes movable, most of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 becomes difficult to see. In a state where the player does not operate the selection button 600, the large sword role Ym4 operates according to the set action scenario. This operation scenario is set in the customer waiting effect process of the 22nd control example (see F2105 in FIG. 717).

On the other hand, when the player operates the selection button 600, light amount adjustment corresponding to the movement pattern of the largesword role Ym4 and the position of the largesword role Ym4 at the time of operation is executed. More specifically, in the process of F3306 of the frame button input monitoring/effect process 22 (see F2107 in FIG. 731) of the 22nd control example, if it is determined that it is in the waiting period (F3306: Yes), It is determined whether or not the position of the sword object Ym4 is the initial position (position in the stored state not overlapping the third symbol display device 81). In the case of the initial position, the light amount gauge large ga3 is displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 without changing the large sword Ym4 to the environment adjustment position a (the position shown in FIG. 751(a)). (See FIG. 679(b)) is displayed.

On the other hand, if it is not at the initial position, it is determined whether the large sword Ym4 is at the environment adjustment position a. When the largesword role Ym4 is at the environment adjustment position a, the largesword role Ym4 is stopped at the environment adjustment position, and the light amount is adjusted using the LED attached to the largesword role Ym4. process.

In the modification of the 22nd control example, when the largesword role Ym4 is not at the environment adjustment position a, the largesword role Ym4 is in operation, so the largesword role Ym4 is set to the initial position or In order to wait (delay) the start of the light amount adjustment until it is changed to the environment adjustment position a, a notification mode (for example, the large sword Ym4 and In the display area of the third pattern display device 81 which is not overlapped, a process for displaying characters "preparing for light amount adjustment") is performed.

Next, it is determined whether the motion pattern of the large sword Ym4 is a motion pattern (motion pattern A) that changes from the initial position to the environment adjustment position a. In the case of action pattern A, the large sword role Ym4 is stopped at the environment adjustment position a, the set action scenario is discarded (or interrupted), and the player waits (delays). Processing is performed to hide the notification mode for notifying that it is. On the other hand, if the motion pattern of the largesword Ym4 is not the motion pattern A, that is, if it is the motion pattern (motion pattern B) that changes from the environment adjustment position a to the initial position, the largesword Ym4 is set to the initial position. It stops at the position, performs processing to display the light amount gauge ga3 in the main display area Dm, and performs processing to hide the notification mode for notifying the player that it is waiting (delayed).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to omit the process of resetting a different action pattern for the large sword Ym4 that is moving in the action pattern in line with the action scenario.

It should be noted that it may be configured to determine whether to change to the initial position or to the environment adjustment position a according to the position of the large sword Ym4 during its action. For example, even if the action pattern A is set, if the current position of the large sword Ym4 is closer to the initial position than the environmental adjustment position a, the light amount is adjusted by changing the position to the initial position. The period of waiting for the start can be shortened.

FIG. 797(b) is an example of the display screen when the special symbol starts to change during the light amount adjustment. In the twenty-second control example described above, when the special symbol starts to change while the decorative movable accessory is in the environment adjustment position, the decorative movable accessory is changed from the environment adjustment position to the initial position. was the configuration. On the other hand, in the modification of the twenty-second control example, as shown in FIG. 797(b), the large sword Ym4 is placed at the environmental adjustment position b (FIG. 797(b)) until the light amount adjustment is completed. position), and the variation of the special pattern is reduced and displayed in the display area HR7 on the left side of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front. Then, when the player operates the enter button 600a and the light intensity adjustment is completed, the large sword Ym4 is changed to the retracted state (position not overlapping the liquid crystal display of the third symbol display device 81).

In addition, when the large sword Ym4 is in the environment adjustment position b (that is, when the light amount adjustment is being performed while the special symbols are fluctuating), for example, as a mode of special symbol fluctuation production, the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot When a variable effect mode using a high sword role Ym4 is selected, or when a variable pattern in which a ready-to-win effect with a high expectation of winning a jackpot (special reach, etc.) is selected, light amount adjustment is performed. Before the end (that is, without depending on the operation of the decision button 600a by the player), the large sword role Ym4 may be changed to the retracted state, and the display area HR7 in which the variable effect of the special symbol is displayed may be enlarged and displayed. good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking an effect with a high degree of expectation for winning a big win. In addition, since the action of the large sword Ym4 during light intensity adjustment can also be made interesting, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 798 and 799, a modification of the shutter closing reach effect executed in the twenty-second control example will be described. In the above-mentioned shutter closing reach effect (see Figures 681 to 683), the shutter is closed to proceed to the next stage, and when the final stage is reached, or the item obtained in the middle stage is used, the shutter is completely opened. It was a configuration in which it is notified that the jackpot is won when the player wins. On the other hand, in the modified example of the shutter closing ready-to-win production, it is not always notified that the jackpot is won when the final stage is reached, but it is configured to be notified that the jackpot is won at any stage. There is a big difference. Further, the color of the shutter suggests the type of pattern when the medium pattern during variation in the ready-to-reach state stops, and the number of times the shutter closes suggests the type of the third pattern to be finally stopped and displayed. More specifically, description will be made with reference to FIGS. 798 and 799. FIG.

FIG. 798(a) is an example of a display screen in the case where, when the ready-to-win state is reached, the expansion of the shutter closing ready-to-win effect variation occurs. In the center of the main display area Dm, the third symbol "11" is stopped and displayed in two of the three symbol rows, and the third symbol (final stop symbol) is displayed in the remaining one symbol row. is displayed, and a display area HR4 is formed in the upper center of the main display area Dm to display a guide mode for notifying the player of the reach state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that the game is in the ready-to-win state.

In addition, shutters St3 and St4 are displayed in a rattling manner at the left and right ends of the main display area Dm, and in a notification mode for informing the player of game information related to the effect in the sub display area Ds. A certain character "If the shutter is closed, it will develop into a shutter closing reach" is displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to easily understand that when the shutters St3 and St4 displayed in the main display area Dm are closed, a high-level ready-to-win effect (shutter closed ready-to-win effect) is developed.

In the example shown in FIG. 798(a), the third symbol is stopped and displayed as "11" in the two symbol rows in the center of the main display area Dm. It is configured to set the number based on the lottery result of the special pattern from among the numbers of ~ "8".

FIG. 798(b) is an example of the display screen in the case of development to the shutter closing reach effect. As shown in FIG. 798(b), in the main display area Dm, the shutters St3 and St4 displaying the characters St3a and St4a of "blue" for indicating that the shutters St3 and St4 are in the first display mode are closed. A performance is executed, and the characters ``Shutter closing reach start, even number pattern is a chance'' are displayed in the sub-display area Ds, which is a notification mode for notifying the game information related to the performance to the player.

Here, in the modified example of the shutter closed reach effect, the display modes of the shutters St3 and St4 are the first display mode in which the characters "blue" are displayed and the second display mode in which the characters "red" are displayed. It is configured to set either. When the first display mode is displayed, it suggests that the final stop pattern will be stopped with an even number pattern, and when the second display mode is displayed, the final stop pattern will be stopped with an odd number pattern. Suggest. In the example shown in FIG. 798(b), the characters St3a and St4a of "blue" are displayed on the shutters St3 and St4 (that is, the first display mode), so that the sub-display area Ds shows "an even-numbered pattern". A notification mode of "chance" is displayed. On the other hand, when the characters "red" are displayed on the shutters St3 and St4 (that is, in the second display mode), the notification mode of "odd symbols are a chance" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

Further, in the modified example of the shutter closing reach effect, the final stop pattern is stopped and displayed when the shutter is completely opened, and when the shutters St3 and St4 are displayed in the first display mode, the final Any one of the numbers "2, 4, 6, 8" is stop-displayed as the stop symbol, and when it is displayed in the second display mode, one of "1, 3, 7, 9" is displayed as the final stop symbol. A number is displayed stopped.

In addition, in the modified example of the shutter closing ready-to-reach effect, the shutters St3 and St4 are displayed in two types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more types may be used. For example, the third display mode of the shutters St3 and St4 displaying the characters "rainbow" may be settable. Even if the shutters St3 and St4 are completely opened, it is reported that the jackpot is won.

Further, as the display mode of the shutters St3 and St4, the characters St3a and St4a of "blue" (or "red") are not displayed, and the color of the shutters St3 and St4 is set to blue (or red). It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a person can identify which display mode it is.

On the other hand, if the development fanning (see FIG. 799(a)) of the shutter closing reach production modification fails, the final stop symbol, which is a combination indicating that the winning is lost, is stopped and displayed, and the shutter closing reach production is performed. A notification mode (for example, the characters "Failed") is displayed to indicate that the development has failed.

FIG. 799(a) is an example of the display screen when the branch effect in the shutter closing reach effect variation is being executed from the state of FIG. 798(b). In the main display area Dm, the shutters St3 and St4 are changed from the closed state (see FIG. 798(b)) to the half-open state, and the rattling vibrates to prompt whether or not the shutters should be closed again. executed.

In addition, in the central part of the main display area Dm, the third pattern is stopped at "22" in two of the three pattern rows, and the third pattern (last) is displayed in the remaining one pattern row. The ready-to-win state where the stop symbol) is variably displayed is displayed.

In addition, in the upper center of the main display area Dm, a display area HR4 in which a guide mode for indicating the currently reached stage and the final stage is displayed, "If the shutter is closed, continue 2/6" is displayed. Is displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to easily understand that the current stage is the second stage of the shutter closing ready-to-reach performance, and that the current shutter closing ready-to-reach performance is up to the sixth stage.

In addition, in the shutter closed ready-to-reach effect modification, it is possible to set either a pattern in which the final stage is the 6th stage or a pattern in which the final stage is the 5th stage.

Here, in the shutter closing ready-to-reach effect, when the shutters St3 and St4 are closed, the process proceeds to the next stage, and 1 is added to the number of the third symbol stopped and displayed in the center of the main display area Dm. In the example shown in FIG. 799(a), since the shutters St3 and St4 are closed once from the state of FIG. 1 is added to the symbol "1", resulting in "2" as shown in FIG. 799(a).

In the example shown in FIG. 799(a), since the sixth stage is the final stage, shutters St3 and St4 are closed five times before reaching the sixth stage. Therefore, when the final stage is reached, the third symbol stopped and displayed in the center of the main display area Dm becomes "66". Then, as described above, when the shutters St3 and St4 are displayed in the first display mode, the final stop symbol is an even number, so when the final stage is reached, it is notified that the jackpot is won. It suggests to the player that there is a high possibility that

On the other hand, when the display modes of the shutters St3 and St4 are displayed in the second display mode, since the final stop pattern is an odd number, it is possible to be informed that a jackpot is won when the final stage is reached. It suggests to the player that the sex is low. Therefore, in this case, if the shutters St3 and St4 are completely opened in an odd-numbered stage before reaching the final stage, it suggests to the player that there is a high possibility that a jackpot winning will be announced. .

FIG. 799(b) is an example of the display screen when the shutter is fully opened in the fourth step. In the example shown in FIG. 799(b), the characters "4/6" are displayed in the display area HR4 as a guidance mode for informing the player that the current stage is the fourth stage, and the main display area Dm is displayed. Then, an effect is executed in which the shutters St3 and St4 are completely opened from the closed state (see FIG. 798(b)). Then, the third symbol displayed in the main display area Dm is displayed in the display mode "444" for notifying that the jackpot has been won, and the sub-display area Ds indicates that the jackpot has been won. By displaying the characters ``big win'', which is the mode, the player is notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the player has won a big win by executing the performance of completely opening the shutters St3 and St4 in the fourth step.

As described above, when the lottery result of the special symbols is not a jackpot winning, the third symbol displayed in the main display area Dm is lost when the shutter is completely opened to notify that the winning has been won. (for example, "454"), and in the sub-display area Ds, a notification mode (for example, the characters "Unfortunately") is displayed for notifying that the winning has been lost.

As described above, in the modified example of shutter close reach, information about the type of the third symbol to be stopped and displayed in the central portion of the main display area Dm at the start of the shutter close reach effect and the display mode of the shutters St3 and St4 are displayed. By displaying the information of the type and the information of the final stage pattern displayed in the display area HR4 in stages, the player is provided with the pleasure of predicting the third pattern to be stopped and displayed by combining the information. be able to.

The display modes of the shutters St3 and St4 suggest an advantageous stage and a disadvantageous stage for the player, and the player expects the shutter to be completely opened in the advantageous stage, and expects the shutter to close in the unfavorable stage. As a result, it is possible to allow the player to execute the reach variation effect without getting bored until the end.

In the example shown in FIG. 799(a), the display area HR4 displays the currently reached stage and the guidance mode for indicating the final stage, but the configuration is not limited to this. A configuration may be adopted in which a number corresponding to the current number of times the shutter is closed and the maximum number of times the shutter can be closed are displayed.

Also, the configuration may be such that the effect for obtaining the capsule Cp1 described with reference to FIG. 683 is executed. For example, when the HOLD ticket Cp1a shown in FIG. 683(b) is used, the number of the third symbol currently stopped and displayed in the main display area Dm will be maintained even if the next stage is advanced. Therefore, when the third pattern corresponding to the display mode of the shutters St3 and St4 is displayed (for example, when the shutters St3 and St4 are in the first display mode, the third pattern displayed is an even number). If the HOLD ticket Cp1a is used in case ), the possibility of winning the jackpot increases. On the other hand, when a third symbol that does not correspond to the display mode of the shutters St3 and St4 is displayed (for example, when the shutters St3 and St4 are in the first display mode, the third symbol that is stopped and displayed is an odd number If the HOLD ticket Cp1a is used in the case of numbers), the possibility of winning the jackpot becomes low. In this way, the player's advantage or disadvantage can be varied depending on the timing of using the HOLD ticket Cp1a, so that the interest in the game can be further improved.

Note that, for example, the second display mode is set as the display mode of the shutters St3 and St4 (that is, when the odd-numbered third pattern is a chance), and when the fifth stage is reached, "55" appears in the main display area Dm. When the third symbol is stopped and displayed, the player recognizes that when the shutters St3 and St4 are closed, the third symbol in the reach state is "66" and the last stopped symbol is an odd number. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player will find out that he or she has lost the winning before the shutters St3 and St4 are completely opened, and the expectation of the player cannot be maintained until the end of the shutter closing reach. On the other hand, since the display mode of the shutters St3 and St4 suggests the type (even or odd) of the final stop symbol, when the shutters St3 and St4 are in the second display mode, even numbers are displayed as the final stop symbol. If the third symbol is stopped and displayed, the credibility of the information suggested by the display modes of the shutters St3 and St4 will be lost. Therefore, when the information indicated by the display modes of the shutters St3 and St4 does not correspond to the display mode for notifying that the jackpot has been won, the characters "jackpot" shown in FIG. 682(b) are displayed. By stop-displaying the drawn middle pattern nz1 as the final stop pattern, it is possible to inform the player of the lottery result with unexpectedness without giving the player a sense of incongruity, so that the player can reach the end of the shutter closing reach. It is possible to maintain the player's sense of expectation.

<Twenty-third control example>
Next, the twenty-third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 735 to 755. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-third control example, the player can arbitrarily select an effect mode in which the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot with respect to the variable effect to be executed is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described twenty-second control example. Customizable), and as a variation performance to increase the expectation that the special symbol variation being executed is a big hit, it is possible to execute a pending change performance that moves the change roles Ym1 and Ym2. It is different in that it consists of Other contents are the same, and detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine 10 capable of executing a selection operation (effect custom operation) for differentiating the degree of expectation for winning a jackpot indicated by each effect mode of the variable effect to be executed. Here, the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot indicates the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot when the variable performance in which the target performance mode is set is executed, and when the target performance mode wins the jackpot. Specified based on the ratio set as the performance mode of the variable performance (jackpot variable performance) executed at the time and the ratio set as the performance mode of the variable performance (losing variable performance) executed when the winning is lost The higher the ratio set during the big win fluctuation performance or the lower the ratio set during the loss fluctuation performance, the higher the expectation of winning the big win. On the other hand, the lower the ratio set during the big win fluctuation performance or the higher the ratio set during the loss fluctuation performance, the lower the expectation of winning the big win.

In other words, by increasing the ratio of selecting the specific production mode as the production mode of the big hit variation production or by lowering the ratio of selecting the specific production mode as the production mode of the loss variation production, the expectation of winning the jackpot for the specific production mode degree increases. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to set an effect mode in which the degree of expectation for winning a big win is set high when the big win is not won. On the other hand, it is possible to make it difficult to set an effect mode in which the degree of expectation for winning a big win is set low when a big win is won.

In the 23rd control example, as in each of the control examples described above, the probability of not winning a big win (probability of winning a miss) is higher than the probability of winning a big win in the special symbol lottery. Therefore, when the degree of expectation for winning a big prize is set lower than when the degree of expectation for winning a big prize is set high, the execution frequency can be increased by the extent that it is more likely to be executed as a loss fluctuation performance.

By configuring the performance custom operation to be executable in this manner, it is possible to vary the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot when a specific performance mode (for example, chance notice) is set, depending on the set performance mode. Therefore, for example, regardless of whether or not a big win is won, a player who wants to experience a variable effect in which a specific effect mode is set should execute the effect custom operation so as to reduce the degree of expectation of winning a big win for each effect mode. , it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the variable performance in which various performance modes are set. On the other hand, a player who pays attention to the presence or absence of winning a jackpot executes a performance custom operation so as to increase the expectation of winning a jackpot in a variable performance in which a specific performance mode (for example, chance notice) is set. , the high possibility of winning the jackpot can be grasped in advance by the content of the effect to be executed.

Here, in the conventional pachinko machine 10, when the above-described effect custom operation is executed during the special symbol variation, after the variable effect of the special symbol variation being executed is stopped and displayed, the executed effect custom operation is performed. It is common that the corresponding production mode can be set. That is, in the conventional pachinko machine 10, at the start timing of the special symbol variation, the performance mode of the variable performance to be executed during the special symbol variation period is determined, and the variable performance is executed based on the determined performance mode. Since it is configured, the performance mode cannot be switched in the middle of the variable performance being executed, and the performance mode corresponding to the performance mode set from the variable performance corresponding to the next special symbol variation is set. was common.

In this case, the timing at which the player executes the effect custom operation and the timing at which the effect mode is switched based on the execution of the effect custom operation deviate, which makes it difficult to execute the variable effect desired by the player. there were.

On the other hand, in this 23rd control example, when the effect custom operation is executed during the period during which the special symbol variation is being executed, the effect mode of the variation effect corresponding to the special symbol variation being executed is changed to the effect custom. It is configured to be able to correspond to a newly set production mode based on the operation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to solve the conventional problem that the timing at which the player executes the custom production operation and the timing at which the production mode is switched based on the execution of the custom production operation are not aligned.

Furthermore, in the twenty-third control example, the type of production mode selectable by the production custom operation is configured to vary according to the timing at which the production custom operation is executed. Specifically, it is equipped with a special production mode (premium mode) that can be selected when the production custom operation is executed during the big hit fluctuation. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to grasp whether or not the jackpot has been won by executing the effect custom operation. It is possible to make the operation voluntarily.

Furthermore, in the twenty-third control example, the special symbol variation being executed is a jackpot variation based on the execution of the determination operation (pressing of the determination button 600a) when determining a new performance mode by the performance custom operation. A notification effect capable of notifying the player of this fact is configured to be executable.

That is, in the twenty-third control example, when an operation for selecting an effect mode is executed in the effect custom operation (when the right button 600c and the left button 600e are operated), the player is notified that the big hit is fluctuating. A first notification effect that allows the player to be notified that the big hit is fluctuating when an operation to determine the effect mode is executed by the effect custom operation (when the decision button 600a is pressed). 2 notification effect and are configured to be executable.

By configuring in this way, when the first notification effect is executed, a special effect mode (premium mode) is selected as the effect mode for the special symbol variation being executed (special symbol variation for winning the jackpot). Then, it is possible for the player to choose whether to see the performance that cannot be seen normally or to watch the variable performance that is normally executed without worrying about selecting the special performance mode (premium mode). It is possible to easily provide a performance that matches the taste of the user.

In addition, since the second notification effect is executed based on the decision operation of the effect custom operation, it is possible to provide an unexpected effect to the player who has executed the decision operation to switch the effect mode.

In this 23rd control example, since the first notification effect and the second notification effect are configured to be executable in combination, the effect mode for the player who executes the effect custom operation during the special symbol fluctuation In the selection operation stage of , it is possible to notify whether or not there is a big hit change, and furthermore, even if the first notification performance indicating the big hit change is not executed in the selection operation stage of the performance mode, A second notification effect can be executed at the decision operation stage of the effect mode.

By configuring in this way, by executing the production custom operation during the special pattern fluctuation, it is possible to notify that the big hit is changing at various timings, so that the production effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, in the 23rd control example, an effect mode (chance-up mode) is determined in which the degree of expectation for winning a jackpot when a specific effect mode is set by the effect custom operation is higher than the other effect modes (normal mode). In this case, the second notification effect is more likely to be executed than when another effect mode (normal mode) is determined. In other words, when the desired performance mode type is determined by the player who wants to grasp (predict) the presence or absence of a big win as soon as possible, the second notification performance is relatively easily executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier to execute an effect that matches the taste of the player.

Next, in the twenty-third control example, as described above, when the effect pattern (ready-to-win mode) of the variable effect being executed progresses (develops) to the effect pattern with a high expectation of winning the jackpot, the reserved symbol Configured to hide the display. In other words, in order to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the effect being executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is a variation effect for showing the result of the special symbol variation being executed, reserved symbol display is performed. is configured to be hidden.

Then, as an effect mode for hiding the pending symbol, a performance mode for moving the change role products Ym1 and Ym2 is set in the same manner as in the case where the pending change effect is executed in the 22nd control example, and the change role product Ym1 is set. , Ym2 is moved, it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the pending change performance for changing the display mode of the pending symbols is executed or the performance for hiding the pending symbols is executed. It consists of

By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting which one is the target of the effect when the change accessory Ym1 and Ym2 are moved.

Furthermore, in this 23rd control example, when the effect mode of moving the change roles Ym1 and Ym2 to hide the reserved symbols is set as the variable effect, the reserved symbol display is performed in a display mode of three or more colors. When reserved symbols are displayed and when the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the variable performance to be executed is a big win, the change accessories Ym1 and Ym2 hide all the reserved symbols display, It is constituted so as to be able to execute the performance of changing the display mode of the execution pending pattern (executing pending pattern) corresponding to the special symbol variation being executed to the display mode (rainbow color) indicating the winning of the jackpot.

By configuring in this way, the function of notifying the lottery result of the special symbol variation being executed is added to the effect for simply hiding the reserved symbol display (the effect of moving the change roles Ym1 and Ym2). Since the player can hold it, it is possible to execute an unexpected performance for the player, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

<Regarding the effect content in the 23rd control example>
Here, with reference to FIGS. 735 to 740, the characteristic contents of the various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-third control example will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-third control example, the effect mode selection function (effect custom function) capable of varying the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot for the variable effect to be executed is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-second control example described above. ), and the fact that it is possible to execute the production based on the production custom operation for selecting the production mode, and the pending design display as a variable production corresponding to the special design fluctuation being executed The difference is that the presentation to be displayed is configured to be executable.

First, with reference to FIGS. 735 to 738, the contents of effects executed based on the effect custom operation will be described. Detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG. Premium mode) can be selected, and a production custom operation for selecting the production mode can be executed in a state where the special symbol variation is not executed or in a state where the special symbol variation is executed. ing.

Figure 735 (a) is a state in which the normal state is set as the gaming state, and the normal mode is set as the production mode, during the second half period of the fluctuation production corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation (reach establishment After) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the chance up mode is determined by the effect custom operation.

As shown in FIG. 735(a), when the normal state is set as the game state, similar to the 22nd control example described above, the game method guide for guiding the game method that gives the player an advantage. As a mode, the characters "left-handed" are displayed in the small display area Dm4 formed on the upper left side of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the left-handed game is played during the normal state, that is, the variable display unit 80 (Refer to FIG. 620), the player is notified that the left-handed hitting game in which the game ball is shot toward the game area (left side area) formed on the left side is an advantageous game method for the player.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, in the twenty-third control example, the small display area Dm4 in which the game method guidance mode is displayed is always at the same position (upper left position) on the display screen regardless of the set game state or whether or not there is a jackpot game. ). By constructing in this way, it is possible to always display the guidance of the game method at the same position for a player who is unfamiliar with the game of the pachinko machine 10, so that an easy-to-understand game can be provided.

In addition, in the twenty-third control example, as in the twenty-second control example described above, the game method guide mode (left-handed, right-handed) for indicating the game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) in which the player is advantageous ) is always displayed in the small display area Dm4, but it is not limited to this. A state in which the game is not played is defined as a game state in which the normal game (left-handed game) is advantageous to the player, and when a game method (right-handed game) different from the normal game is advantageous to the player, the small display area Dm4 may be configured to display the characters "Right-handed". By configuring in this way, in a game state in which the normal game (left-handed game) is advantageous to the player, there is no need to display the game method guide mode (left-handed game), so the display of the third symbol display device 81 is performed. The display area of the plane can be used for other purposes (for example, variable effects).

Further, instead of always displaying the game method guide mode in the small display area Dm4, the game method guide mode is displayed in the small display area Dm4 only when the player wants to grasp the game method that is advantageous to the player. For example, when a predetermined operation (long press) is performed on the operation means (frame button 22), the game method guidance mode may be displayed in the small display area Dm4. good. With this configuration, a game method guidance mode is displayed in the small display area Dm4 for a player unfamiliar with the game of the pachinko machine 10 so that the player can easily understand the game, and a skilled player can play the game. On the other hand, the effect of the performance can be enhanced by executing a powerful performance (a performance with a larger execution region than when the small display region Dm4 is formed) using the display area in which the game method guidance mode can be displayed. can be done. In this case, instead of switching between display and non-display of the small display area Dm4, the size of the small display area Dm4 may be changed based on the operation of the operating means.

As shown in FIG. 735(a), a small display area Dm15 is formed below the small display area Dm4, and "Normal mode is being set" as a setting mode display mode for indicating the presently set production mode. characters are displayed. Since FIG. 735(a) shows the display screen in the state where the normal mode is set as the presentation mode, the small display area Dm15 displays "NORMAL MODE SETTING" indicating that the normal mode is set. characters are displayed. It should be noted that, when the chance up mode is set, the small display area Dm15 "chance up mode setting" characters, when the variable probability notification mode is set, the small display area Dm15 "variable probability notification When the premium mode is set, the text "Premium mode is being set" is displayed in the small display area Dm15. By configuring in this way, the player can grasp the presently set production mode at a glance.

Various aspects related to the effect custom operation are displayed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm. In the twenty-third control example, by pressing the middle button 600a in a state in which the light amount adjustment operation and the volume adjustment operation are not performed, the production custom state in which the production mode can be selected and operated is set. By pressing the button 600c or the left button 600e, the effect mode can be selected. By operating (pressing down) the middle button 600a with the desired effect mode selected, the selected effect mode can be set.

When the effect custom state is set, as shown in FIG. 735(a), a display area HR6 is formed to display the selected effect mode. A small display area Dm16 is formed above the display area HR6. You can switch the mode with ." is displayed.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, until the effect custom state is set, that is, until the middle button 600a is pressed to select the effect mode, below the small display area Dm15, As a guidance mode for guiding the player on the operation method for setting the production custom state, it is configured to display the characters "When you press the middle button, the production mode selection screen will be displayed." . In other words, the operation method for changing the effect mode is displayed near the small display area Dm15 for indicating the currently set effect mode. By configuring in this way, the player who has grasped the currently set production mode is provided with a function capable of changing the production mode and an operation method for changing the production mode. It can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

When the effect custom state is set, a display mode for indicating the currently set effect mode is displayed in the display area HR6. A left arrow LY is displayed on the left side of the display area HR6, and a right arrow RY is displayed on the right side of the display area HR6. The left arrow LY and the right arrow RY are display modes for guiding a switching operation for switching the effect mode displayed in the display area HR6 to another effect mode, and the player presses the right button 600c. When operated, the right arrow RY is illuminated, and when the left button 600e is operated, the left arrow LY is illuminated.

By operating the right button 600c or the left button 600e, an effect mode different from the currently set effect mode is displayed in the display area HR6. As shown in FIG. 735(a), in the twenty-third control example, only one effect mode is displayed in the display area HR6. It is configured so that the player does not know whether the display mode indicating the effect mode is displayed in the display area HR6.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-third control example is configured so that the special effect mode (premium mode) can be selected when the effect custom operation for changing the effect mode is executed during the variation of the jackpot. . Therefore, in order to prevent the player from easily grasping the type of performance mode that can be selected in the current performance custom operation, the next performance mode is not displayed in the display area HR6 until the selection operation of the performance mode is executed. It is configured as follows. By configuring in this way, it is possible to motivate the player to perform the selection operation of the production mode in order to grasp whether or not the special production mode (premium mode) is selectable.

Note that the display content of the display area HR6 in the state in which the effect custom state is set is not limited to this. At least part of the display mode indicating the effect mode to be selected and at least part of the display mode indicating the effect mode selected when the right button 600c is operated are displayed in the display area HR6. Also good.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to allow the player who intends to select an arbitrary production mode to efficiently execute the production custom operation.

Then, by pressing the middle button 600a again in a state in which the display mode for indicating the desired effect mode is displayed in the display area HR6 by the effect custom operation, the effect mode switching operation is completed.

FIG. 735(a) shows a display screen for indicating that the production mode cannot be switched immediately when a different production mode is determined by the production custom operation. The switching operation is normally accepted, and the characters "Standby" are displayed as a standby mode for indicating that the production mode has not been switched.

By displaying this standby mode "standby", it is possible to inform the player that the switching operation of the production mode has been performed normally, so that even if the switching operation of the production mode is executed, , it is possible to suppress the misunderstanding that the pachinko machine 10 is out of order in the situation where the performance mode displayed in the small display area Dm15 is not switched.

In FIG. 735(a), by forming the preliminary display area HR6a in the vicinity of the display area HR6, the player who performs the effect mode switching operation while grasping the display contents of the display area HR6 can receive the message " The spare display area HR6a is formed in the vicinity of the small display area Dm15 or so as to overlap the display position of the small display area Dm15. You can By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player who tries to check the display contents of the small display area Dm15 in order to grasp whether or not the effect mode has been switched based on the effect mode switching operation being executed. , it is possible to make it easier for the user to grasp that the user is "on standby".

On the other hand, when the effect mode can be switched immediately at the timing when the effect mode switching operation is executed, the display screen shown in FIG. 735(b) is displayed. Figure 735 (b) is a state in which the normal state is set as the gaming state, and the normal mode is set as the production mode, during the first half period of the fluctuation production corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation (reach establishment It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen displayed when chance up mode is determined by production|presentation custom operation before).

As shown in FIG. 735(b), when the production mode is immediately switched based on the execution of the production mode switching operation, a guide for indicating that the production mode has been switched is displayed in the preliminary display area HR6a. A character "set complete" is displayed as a mode, and a character "chance up mode being set" indicating the changed effect mode is displayed in the small display area Dm15.

Although detailed explanation will be given later, in this 23rd control example, when the production custom operation is executed in a state where the special symbol variation is being executed, the timing of switching the production mode according to the progress of the variable production being executed are configured to be different. Moreover, it is configured to vary the timing of switching the production mode according to the type of the selected production mode. In addition, it is configured to vary the timing of switching the production mode according to the content of the variable production to be executed later.

In this way, when the production custom operation is executed during the special pattern fluctuation, by varying the timing of switching the production mode according to various factors, the player can understand the timing of switching the production mode and the variable production during execution. It is possible to provide a novel game property of predicting the result of the variable performance being executed by combining the contents of

Next, with reference to FIG. 736, display contents displayed during selection operation of the production mode in the production custom state will be described. FIG. 736(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the production mode is selected during the loss variation for indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss.

The display example shown in FIG. 736 (a) is a state where "chance up mode" is set as the production mode, and from the state where "probability change notification mode" is selected by production custom operation, further left button It is a display example showing a state of selecting "normal mode" by operating 600e. Accordingly, in FIG. 736(a), the characters "CHANCE UP MODE SETTING" are displayed in the small display area Dm15. Then, the left arrow LY is displayed in a manner indicating that the left button 600e has been operated, and the selected effect mode is switched from the "probability variable notification mode" to the "normal mode" in the display area HR6. As a display mode indicating that, part of the display mode indicating "probability variable notification mode" (display of "notification mode" in the figure) and part of the display mode indicating "normal mode" ("normal" display in the figure ) is displayed. The state shown in FIG. 736(a) shows a display mode in which the display mode displayed in the display area HR6 is being scrolled leftward by operating the left button 600e. The display is scrolled until "normal mode" is displayed in the display area HR6.

Note that FIG. 736(a) shows a display example when the display mode displayed in the display area HR6 is scrolled leftward by operating the left button 600e during the custom effect state. However, when the effect mode is selected by operating the right button 600c, the right arrow RY is displayed in a display mode to indicate that the right button 600c has been operated, and the display mode of the display area HR6 is displayed. is displayed by scrolling to the right.

Further, in the twenty-third control example, as shown in FIG. Unless the operating means (right button 600c, left button 600e) are operated to scroll the display mode displayed in the display area HR6, all the production modes that can be selected in the current production custom state cannot be grasped. Configure. A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 737, but in this 23rd control example, the types of selectable production modes are configured to differ according to the timing of setting the production custom state. there is

Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for a player who desires to play a game in various production modes to perform an operation (operation of the middle button 600a) for setting a custom production state at various timings. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to actively participate in the game in which the operation means is operated.

Furthermore, in this 23rd control example, in a part of the case where the performance custom state is set during the jackpot fluctuation executed when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, the selection is made when the jackpot fluctuation is not executed. A dedicated production mode (premium mode) that cannot be selected (difficult to select) is configured to be selectable. By configuring in this way, the result of the special symbol lottery is notified to the player before the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed based on the execution of the selection operation for selecting the performance mode. Therefore, a player who wants to grasp the result of the special symbol lottery as soon as possible can positively set the effect custom state.

In addition, in the twenty-third control example, when the effect custom state is set, the display mode for indicating the effect mode other than the selected effect mode is not displayed in the display area HR6. By configuring in this way, since it is not possible to grasp the other settable production modes only by setting the production custom state, the operation (middle button 600a) for setting the production custom state for the player ), as well as the operation for selecting the effect mode (the operation of the right button 600c and the left button 600e). Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to actively participate in the game in which the operation means is operated.

In the twenty-third control example, as described above, only the display mode for indicating one production mode is displayed in the display area HR6. In addition to the display mode for indicating , the effect mode selected when the right button 600c is operated and the effect mode selected when the left button 600e is operated are displayed when the player presses the right button 600c and the left button 600e. At least a part of the display mode corresponding to the display area HR6 may be displayed so that the player can grasp it before the operation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to select the desired effect mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 736(b), the content of the effect when the effect custom operation is executed in the state where the "premium mode" can be selected will be described. FIG. 736(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the production mode is selected during the big hit variation for indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is the big win. In this 23rd control example, the performance custom operation is executed during the jackpot variation when "jackpot A", which is the jackpot type in which the probability variable state, which is the game state advantageous to the player, is set after the jackpot game ends. In this case, a production mode "premium mode", which cannot be selected except during the fluctuation of the jackpot, is configured to be selectable.

Therefore, when the effect custom operation (the operation of the right button 600c and the left button 600e in the effect custom state) is executed in a state in which the "premium mode" can be selected, a display corresponding to the "premium mode" is displayed in the display area HR6. Aspects are displayed. As described above, in the twenty-third control example, the display area HR6 only displays the display mode for indicating the currently selected production mode. is operated, the display mode corresponding to the "premium mode" is displayed in the display area HR6 for the first time.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player who is executing the production custom operation for the purpose of simply changing the production mode of the result of the special symbol variation being executed. It is possible to provide an unexpected performance. In addition, it is possible to make the player who wants to quickly grasp the fluctuation result of the special symbol fluctuation under execution (the lottery result of the special symbol lottery) positively perform the performance custom operation.

Furthermore, in the twenty-third control example, the player cannot know whether or not the "premium mode" can be selected simply by setting the effect custom state. Even if the player accidentally operates the middle button 600a and the custom production state is set unintentionally, the display mode (display area) displayed based on the custom production state being set is displayed. The display mode displayed on the HR 6) can prevent informing the player of the variation result of the special symbol variation being executed.

In the display example shown in FIG. 736(b), as a display mode corresponding to the effect mode displayed in the display area HR6, identification information (characters for indicating the effect mode) for indicating the corresponding effect mode is displayed. The display modes are the same except that they are different. A display mode may be decorated to make it easier for the player to look at than the display modes corresponding to other production modes. By configuring in this way, it is possible to visually inform the player that the effect mode that is advantageous to the player can be selected, and it is possible to provide the player with an easily understandable effect.

Here, with reference to FIG. 737, the selection range of the production mode that can be selected by the production custom operation will be described. Figure 737 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the selection range of the effect mode set during the loss fluctuation for showing that the result of the special symbol lottery is out, and Figure 737 (b) , It is a diagram schematically showing the selection range of the production mode that can be set during the big hit fluctuation for indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit.

As shown in FIG. 737 (a), during the deviation fluctuation, the normal selection range (normal production mode selection area) is set, and as shown in FIG. 737(b), during the jackpot fluctuation, there are four types of production modes: "normal mode", "chance up mode", "probability change notification mode", and "premium mode". It is configured so that a selectable special selection range (special effect mode selection area) can be set.

Although detailed description will be given later, the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-third control example is provided with an effect custom information table 222wa. Effect regulation information corresponding to the effect mode and information indicating the selection order of the effect mode to be selected when the player executes the effect custom operation are defined. The production mode selection area shown in FIG. 737 schematically shows the selection order of production modes defined in this production custom information table 222wa.

In this 23rd control example, the player presses the middle button (decision button) 600a, and based on the gaming situation (whether or not the big hit is fluctuating) at the timing when the production custom state is set, the selectable production It is configured to determine the type of mode, and when the player presses the middle button (determination button) 600a and the effect custom state is set, the player is awarded the most advantageous privilege (jackpot). The number of rounds of the game is 10 rounds, and the game state after the end of the jackpot game is changed to a probability variable state. When the lottery for determination is won, the "premium mode" can be selected as the production mode.

Then, when a selectable effect mode is determined by the effect custom operation, the effect mode can be selected within the selection range according to the selection order defined in the effect custom information table 222wa. Therefore, when the right button 600c is operated as a production custom operation during the special symbol variation period for indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is lost and won, "probability change notification mode", "chance up mode", " The production modes are selected in the order of "normal mode". Further, when the right button 600c is operated while the "normal mode" is selected, the "variable probability notification mode" is selected in a rotary manner. By configuring in this manner, even if only the right button 600c or the left button 600e is operated in the effect custom state, all selectable selection modes can be reliably selected. Even a player who feels troublesome to operate a plurality of operation means (the right button 600c and the left button 600e) in the custom production state can be made to execute the custom production operation without fail.

In the twenty-third control example, when the effect custom state is set, the display mode for indicating the currently set effect mode is first displayed in the display area HR6. Therefore, for example, when the effect custom state is set during the deviation fluctuation in which the "chance up mode" is set, the display mode of the "chance up mode" is displayed in the display area HR6. Then, according to the operation contents of the right button 600c and the left button 600e, the production mode is selected according to the order shown in FIG. 737(a), and the display mode corresponding to the selected production mode is displayed in the display area HR6. be. With this configuration, the operation for changing the production mode can be executed based on the display mode displayed in the display area HR6, so that the player can perform the production custom operation in an easy-to-understand manner. can.

Also, in the state where "premium mode" can be selected, when the left button 600e is operated as a production custom operation, "normal mode", "chance up mode", "probability change announcement mode", "premium mode" in that order A presentation mode is selected. When the left button 600e is further operated while the "premium mode" is selected, the "normal mode" is selected in a rotary manner. By configuring in this manner, even if only the right button 600c or the left button 600e is operated in the effect custom state, all selectable selection modes can be reliably selected. Even a player who feels troublesome to operate a plurality of operation means (the right button 600c and the left button 600e) in the custom production state can be made to execute the custom production operation without fail.

In this twenty-third control example, as shown in FIG. 737, the player is made to select a plurality of effect modes based on a predetermined selection order. When an operation for selecting a mode is executed, one production mode may be selected at random (in no particular order) from a plurality of selectable production modes. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the types of currently selectable production modes. The means can be made easier to operate more.

Next, with reference to FIG. 738, the contents of the effect executed when the effect mode switching operation (effect custom operation) is executed (when the decision button 600a is operated) will be described. FIG. 738 is a diagram showing an example in which a notification effect (second notification effect) for informing a jackpot winning is executed when the effect mode switching operation is executed.

As described above with reference to FIG. 735 (a), normally, in the latter half of the variable production, when the production custom operation is executed, until the variable production being executed ends (special symbol being executed Until the fluctuation is stopped and displayed), the production mode is not switched, and "Standby" is displayed in the preliminary display area HR6a. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, as shown in FIG. 738, the effect mode can be switched while the variable effect is being executed.

Specifically, in the second half of the variable performance corresponding to the variation of the big hit, when the "chance up mode" is determined as the performance mode after switching by the performance custom operation, the predetermined condition is established and the variable performance is executed. It is configured so that the production mode can be switched while it is being performed. In this case, as a display mode for indicating that the production mode has been switched, "set completion" is displayed in the preliminary display area HR6a, and the speaker unit 308 connected to the voice output device 226 indicates the jackpot winning. is configured to output the speech Ke1 of "congratulations".

In this way, by configuring it so that it can be notified that it is a big hit change by the production custom operation executed during the special symbol fluctuation, benefits other than switching the production mode are given according to the timing of executing the production custom operation. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to execute the effect custom operation at various timings.

In addition, in the twenty-third control example, in the second half period of the variable performance corresponding to the big hit variation, when the "chance up mode" is determined as the performance mode after switching by the performance custom operation, a privilege is given to the player. When a predetermined condition for winning is satisfied and a voice saying "congratulations" is output, the player is given a privilege to notify the player of the winning of the jackpot. However, for example, light emitting means (LED, etc.) is provided in the operation means (such as the decision button 600a) used for the effect custom operation, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the operation means is illuminated in a specific manner (for example, rainbow colors). It may be configured to emit light.

Further, as a privilege to be granted when a predetermined condition is established by executing a performance custom operation, a privilege other than the privilege of notifying the winning of the jackpot may be granted. In order to suggest the setting value currently set if the pachinko machine 10 has a setting function (for details, refer to the 24th control example described later) that provides a privilege for notifying the state or can set different jackpot probabilities. You may comprise so that the privilege of may be provided.

By configuring in this way, in the twenty-third control example, the predetermined condition can be established only during the big hit fluctuation, but it is possible to establish the predetermined condition even in other cases, and various It is possible to give benefits based on the production custom operation at such timing.

As described above, in the twenty-third control example, it is possible to allow the player to select various performance modes. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

In addition, in the twenty-third control example, the degree of expectation of winning is made different when the performance (notice performance) is executed in the same performance mode according to the selected performance mode. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to facilitate the execution of a game according to the game content desired by the player.

Furthermore, in the twenty-third control example, when an operation (custom production operation) for switching the production mode is executed during the fluctuation of the jackpot, an operation (custom production operation) for switching the production mode is executed except during the fluctuation of the jackpot. A production mode that cannot be selected in the case of being selected is configured to be selectable. In other words, when the timing of executing the effect custom operation satisfies the predetermined condition, the effect mode that cannot be selected when the predetermined condition is not satisfied can be selected.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to execute the performance custom operation at various timings, and it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

In addition, in the twenty-third control example, as a predetermined condition for changing the selectable production mode by the production custom operation, information regarding whether or not the big win is fluctuating is used. The type of production mode selectable by the production custom operation may be changed between the state in which the pattern variation is being executed and the state in which the special pattern variation is not being executed. Depending on whether the number of executed special symbol lottery times exceeds a predetermined number of times (for example, 500 times) or not, the type of production mode selectable by the production custom operation may be changed or set. The type of production mode that can be selected by the production custom operation may be changed according to the game state being played.

Also, the types of selectable effect modes may be varied according to the history of the effect modes that have been set in the past. In this case, for example, as an initial state, production mode A, production mode B, and production mode C are configured to be selectable, and when production mode A is selected in that state, as the next selectable production mode, Effect mode A1, effect mode A2, and effect mode A3 may be configured to be selectable. By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the selectable production modes according to the history of selecting the production mode, so that various production modes are available for the player who wants to execute the game in all production modes. can be set.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 739 and 740, in the variable effect corresponding to the special symbol variation being executed, the pending symbol display is hidden using change roles Ym1 and Ym2, and only the pending symbol being executed is displayed. will be described. FIG. 739(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the pending effect during execution is started, and the change accessories Ym1 and Ym2 are moving so as to hide part of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, FIG. 739(b) is a diagram showing a state in which change character products Ym1 and Ym2 are moved so as to completely hide the display area (display area HR2) of the reserved symbol as a pending effect during execution.

In the twenty-third control example, as described above, when the effect pattern (ready-to-win mode) of the variable effect being executed progresses (develops) to the effect pattern with high expectation of winning the jackpot, the reserved symbol display is turned off. configured to display. In other words, in order to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the effect being executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is a variation effect for showing the result of the special symbol variation being executed, reserved symbol display is performed. is configured to be hidden.

Then, as an effect mode for hiding the pending symbol, a performance mode for moving the change role products Ym1 and Ym2 is set in the same manner as in the case where the pending change effect is executed in the 22nd control example, and the change role product Ym1 is set. , Ym2 is moved, it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the pending change performance for changing the display mode of the pending symbols is executed or the performance for hiding the pending symbols is executed. It consists of

By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting which one is the target of the effect when the change accessory Ym1 and Ym2 are moved.

Furthermore, in this 23rd control example, when the effect mode of moving the change roles Ym1 and Ym2 to hide the reserved symbols is set as the variable effect, the reserved symbol display is performed in a display mode of three or more colors. When reserved symbols are displayed and when the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the variable performance to be executed is a big win, the change accessories Ym1 and Ym2 hide all the reserved symbols display, It is constituted so as to be able to execute the performance of changing the display mode of the execution pending pattern (executing pending pattern) corresponding to the special symbol variation being executed to the display mode (rainbow color) indicating the winning of the jackpot.

By configuring in this way, the function of notifying the lottery result of the special symbol variation being executed is added to the effect for simply hiding the reserved symbol display (the effect of moving the change roles Ym1 and Ym2). Since the player can hold it, it is possible to execute an unexpected performance for the player, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

When the pending effect during execution is started, a movable action is executed in which the change accessories Ym1 and Ym2 are moved from the storage position to the movable position covering part of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加The suspended performance during execution is changed from a first performance mode (for example, a normal ready-to-win mode) in which the performance mode of the variable performance being executed is low in the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot to a second performance in which the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot is higher than the first performance mode. It is executed in conjunction with the timing of switching to the mode (for example, the super reach mode). In other words, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the effect mode of the variable effect being executed will be switched by moving the change accessories Ym1 and Ym2 by the pending effect during execution.

In the pending effect during execution, the change roles Ym1 and Ym2 move to cover part of the display area HR2 where the pending symbol is displayed, as in the pending change effect in the 22nd control example described above. The state shown in a) is obtained. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the movement trigger of the change accessories Ym1 and Ym2 is the pending change effect or the pending effect during execution.

The movable modes of the changeable parts Ym1 and Ym2 are configured to be different according to the number of pending symbols displayed in the display area HR2 and the display mode, as shown in FIG. 739(a). In the display example, four reserved designs are displayed in the display area HR2, and the first reserved design hr1 is "yellow", the second reserved design hr2 is "blue", and the third reserved design hr3 is "green", and the fourth reserved pattern hr4 is displayed in a "red" display mode, that is, the first reserved pattern hr1 to the third reserved pattern hr3 are displayed in three different colors, It shows an example in which only the fourth reserved symbol hr4 is hidden by the change role product Ym2.

Then, when the execution pending effect progresses, as shown in FIG. 739(b), the change roles Ym1 and Ym2 are moved to the second movable position covering the entire display area HR2, and the third On the display surface of the symbol display device 81, a decorative display (black dark display in the drawing) corresponding to the movement of the change accessories Ym1 and Ym2 to the second movable position is executed. Then, a display element (each An effect is executed in which an additional symbol corresponding to the element indicating the color of the pending symbol is released toward the active pending hr0 displayed in the display area HR1.

In FIG. 739(b), the first reserved pattern hr1, the second reserved pattern hr2, and the fourth reserved pattern hr4 displayed in the display region HR2 are released from the display region HR2 and absorbed into the running reserved pattern hr0. shows an example. As a display mode of the additional symbols released from the display area HR2 based on the movement of the change character Ym1 and Ym2 to the second movable position, as shown in FIG. The display mode of the reserved design that has been held may be used as it is, or a display mode showing only specific elements (color information) constituting the display mode of the reserved design may be used. As shown in FIG. 739(b), the display area HR1 in which the pending symbol hr0 during execution is displayed is formed above the central part of the display area HR2, and has a left change accessory Ym1 and a right change accessory Ym1. Ym2 is provided above the position where it abuts when Ym2 is moved to the second movable position. Therefore, the suspended effect during execution is executed, the effect that the change role products Ym1 and Ym2 move to the second movable position, and the reserved symbols displayed in the display area HR2 (the first reserved symbol hr1 to the fourth reserved symbol hr4 ) is released, and the player can easily understand that it is related to the effect absorbed by the pending-in-execution symbol hr0 displayed in the display area HR1.

Then, the first reserved pattern hr1, the second reserved pattern hr2 and the fourth reserved pattern hr4 displayed in the display area HR2 are absorbed into the currently reserved pattern hr0, so that as shown in FIG. The display mode of the symbol hr0 changes from "white" to "rainbow", and the pending effect during execution ends. By changing the display mode of the pending symbol hr0 during execution to "rainbow", it is possible to inform the player that the special symbol variation during execution has won a jackpot. In addition, when the effect result of the pending effect during execution is an effect result that is advantageous to the player, the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 displays a decoration mode corresponding to the effect result (in FIG. 740, a star display mode) is displayed.

The pending performance during execution is the time before the variable performance corresponding to the special symbol variation being executed informs the performance result (the performance mode of the variable performance being executed is the first performance mode with a low jackpot winning expectation (for example , normal reach mode) to a second effect mode (for example, super reach mode) with a higher expectation of winning a jackpot than the first effect mode). Regardless of the performance result of the pending performance during execution, the preset variable performance is continuously executed, and the performance mode is switched from normal reach to SP reach (super reach) in the sub display area Ds. "SP Reach", which is a display mode for notifying of, is displayed.

In other words, when a performance result advantageous to the player (a performance result in which the running pending pattern hr0 changes to a rainbow color) is displayed as the performance result of the pending performance during execution, the performance result of the variable performance is a jackpot winning. Since the variable performance can be seen in a state in which it is grasped in advance that the performance result will be shown, the player can play the game with peace of mind. In addition, since it is possible to grasp in advance that the performance result of the variable performance will be the performance result indicating the winning of the jackpot, the performance mode of the variable performance is set as low as possible in the expectation of the big win, and is experienced frequently. It is possible to play the game while expecting to be notified (displayed) of the performance result that cannot be performed.

When the pending effect during execution shown in FIG. 740 ends, the change accessories Ym1 and Ym2 move to their initial positions, and the display area HR2 becomes visible to the player. In this case, the display modes (colors) of the reserved patterns (first reserved pattern hr1 to fourth reserved pattern hr4) displayed before execution of the pending effect during execution are all the default display patterns (white). is displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player easily think that the display mode (color) added by the pending change effect executed for each pending pattern is used for the pending effect during execution. , it is possible to easily associate the pending change performance for each pending symbol with the pending performance during execution. Further, as shown in FIG. 740, when the performance result of the pending performance during execution is the performance result indicating the winning of the jackpot, the pending performance during execution continues until the third symbol indicating the winning of the jackpot is stopped and displayed. When the third symbol is stop-displayed in a display mode indicating the winning of the jackpot, the suspension performance during execution is terminated.

Therefore, the display mode of the reserved symbols corresponding to the reserved information used in the special symbol lottery executed after the end of the jackpot game can be temporarily set to the default (white) display mode. , After the end, even if the result of the special symbol lottery is changed (when the probability state of the special symbol is switched), the display mode set by the holding change effect executed before the jackpot game is the jackpot game. It is possible to suppress the execution of the advance notice effect which is continuously displayed even after the end and which is difficult for the player to understand.

Next, referring to FIGS. 741 to 743, among the execution timings of the production custom operation in the twenty-third control example, the execution timing of the production custom operation during the special symbol fluctuation period and the special effect custom operation execution timing The flow of setting the production mode of the variable production corresponding to the pattern fluctuation will be explained.

As described above, in this 23rd control example, it is configured to be able to execute the production custom operation during the special symbol fluctuation period, and according to the execution timing of the production custom operation, even during the special symbol fluctuation period, the production mode are switchable. Here, the difference between the case where the production mode can be switched during the special symbol fluctuation period and the case where it cannot be switched will be explained.

First, with reference to FIG. 741, the flow of determining the effect mode of the variable effect executed corresponding to the special symbol change period will be described. Figure 741 is the figure which shows the flow which sets fluctuation production during special figure fluctuation. In Figure 741, in order to explain the basic flow for determining the effect mode of the variable effect, it shows the flow when the effect custom operation is not executed during the special figure fluctuation.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 741(a), "normal mode" is always set as the production mode during the corresponding special figure fluctuation period. As shown in Figure 741 (b), at the start timing of the special symbol variation with a variation time of 30 seconds, as the effect mode of the corresponding variation effect, the overall effect pattern (effect A) and the first half period (10 seconds) The type (blue) of the chance-up effect (first half notice mode) to be executed is determined, and the variation effect is executed corresponding to the start of the special symbol variation. Then, as shown in FIG. 741 (c), when 6 seconds have passed since the variable production (production A) started, a 2-second first half notice is executed, and two seconds after the first half notice ends ( Elapsed timing of the first half period), that is, at the timing when 10 seconds have passed since the special symbol variation started, the type of chance-up effect (second half advance notice mode) executed in the second half period (20 seconds) (blue) is determined.

That is, in the twenty-third control example, the effect mode of the variation effect corresponding to one special symbol variation is determined at a plurality of timings. By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine at least a part of the performance mode of the variable performance being executed according to the requirements established during the variable performance period in which one variable performance is being executed. , it is possible to make it easy to determine without delay the mode of presentation corresponding to the fulfillment of the requirements.

In addition, in the twenty-third control example, one variable effect is divided into two effect periods, the first half period and the second half period, and the form of the advance notice effect executed in each effect period (advance form) is determined at different timings. However, one variable performance may be divided into three or more performance periods. Thus, the length of one performance period can be easily shortened as the variable performance is divided into a plurality of performance periods, so that the advance notice mode corresponding to the requirements established during the variable performance can be determined without delay. can be made easier.

In addition, in the twenty-third control example, at the timing when one variable performance is executed, the performance pattern (performance mode) of the variable performance to be executed over the entire one variable performance period is determined, and the variable performance period is determined. Of these, a specific period (the first notice period, which is 2 seconds after 6 seconds have passed since the variable effect started, and the second notice period, which is 2 seconds after 28 seconds have passed since the variable effect started ) can be determined at different timings. By constructing in this way, it is possible to set the mode of the advance notice performance (prediction mode) at different timings while continuously executing the performance pattern (performance mode) executed over the entire one variable performance period. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect that does not give the player a sense of incongruity.

In addition, in this 23rd control example, the production pattern (production mode) executed over the entire production period is set in advance (variation is set at the start timing of the performance), and the performance mode (notice mode) of the notice performance to be executed within the specific period of the performance period is appropriately determined at different timings, but is limited to this. A performance pattern (performance mode) to be executed over the entire performance period is set in advance (at the start timing of the variable performance) for the performance period of the variable performance executed corresponding to a plurality of special symbol variations. It may be configured to appropriately determine at different timings the effect mode (notice mode) of the notice effect to be executed within a specific period of the effect period, or a plurality of special symbol variations are executed. For an effect period to be obtained (for example, an effect period in which a state effect for indicating the set game state is executed), an effect pattern (for example, background effect) to be executed over the entire effect period is set in advance ( (at the timing when the game state is set), and the performance mode of the performance (for example, the performance mode of the variable performance) to be executed within the specific period of the performance period is appropriately determined at different timings. can be

Next, with reference to FIG. 742, the flow of setting the variable production during the special figure fluctuation and the transition of the production mode when the production custom operation is executed in the first half period of the variable production will be described. Figure 742 is the figure which shows the flow which sets fluctuation production during special figure fluctuation and the flow of production mode shift when production custom operation is executed in the first half period of fluctuation production.

742 differs from FIG. 741 in that the production custom operation is executed during the first half period of the variable production, and the production mode is switched during the variable production period. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 742(a), "normal mode" is set as the production mode when the corresponding special figure variation is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 742 (b), at the start timing of the special symbol variation with a variation time of 30 seconds, the overall effect pattern (effect A) and the first half period (10 seconds ), the type (blue) of the chance-up effect (first half announcement mode) to be executed is determined. Then, as shown in FIG. 742(c), when 6 seconds have passed since the variable effect (effect A) was started, a 2-second first half notice is executed.

Then, if the production custom operation is executed during the first half period of the variable production and the "chance up mode" is selected, the notice production executed in the second half period (second half notice mode) is performed before the first half period ) is performed. FIG. 742(b) shows an example in which (red) is determined as the second half announcement mode at the timing when the effect custom operation is executed. This second half notice mode (red) is an effect mode that can be executed when the "chance up mode" is set, so as shown in FIG. A display mode for indicating that the "normal mode" has been switched to the "chance up mode" is displayed.

On the other hand, with respect to the flow of FIG. 742, if the production custom operation is executed during the first half period of the variable production and the "chance up mode" is selected, the notice production executed in the second half period (second half notice mode) ), if (blue) is determined as the second half notice mode, this second half notice mode (blue) is an effect mode that cannot be executed when the "chance up mode" is set. , As shown in FIG. 743(a), at the timing when the production custom operation is executed, the "normal mode" is continuously displayed, and the display mode for indicating that the next variation is switched to the "chance up mode" is changed. Is displayed.

That is, in the twenty-third control example, when the effect custom operation is executed during the period in which the variable effect is being executed, the effect custom operation is performed according to the effect mode of the variable effect to be executed during the remaining remaining period. The timing of notifying that the production mode has switched is made different. Specifically, when the production custom operation is executed, if the production mode of the variable production executed during the remaining remaining period is a production mode that conforms to the production mode after the change, the production mode is immediately changed. When the switching is notified and the performance mode of the variable performance executed during the remaining remaining period is a performance mode that does not match the performance mode after the change, or the performance mode is executed in common regardless of the set performance mode. In the case of an effect mode that is likely to be played, it is configured to notify that the effect mode has been switched after the remaining period has elapsed.

By constructing in this way, when the performance custom operation is executed during the variable performance, the player can be interested in at what timing the performance mode is switched based on the performance custom operation. In addition, in the twenty-third control example, the timing of notifying that the production mode has been switched by the production custom operation is changed according to the production mode of the advance notice production that is executed after the production custom operation is executed. , In the case of setting the "chance up mode", which is a production mode that can notify that the expectation of winning a jackpot is high just by executing the advance notice production by the production custom operation, the production mode is switched during the variable production period. It is possible to make it easy for the player to predict that there is a high possibility that the variable performance being executed is the performance result indicating the winning of the jackpot just by being notified of this fact.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the twenty-third control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the twenty-third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 744 to 747. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-third control example, part of the configuration of the ROM 222 possessed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 and the configuration of the RAM 223 are different from the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-second control example described above. , and are different in that they are partly changed, and the rest of the configuration is the same. Descriptions of the same contents are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 744, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-third control example will be described. FIG. 744 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 744, this 23rd control example differs from the above-described 22nd control example in that an effect custom information table 222wa and a late notice effect selection table 222wb are added. Other configurations are the same. The same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The effect custom information table 222wa is a data table that defines information corresponding to each effect mode selectable by the player. ) is referenced when reading the information corresponding to the rendered effect mode. The information read here is stored in a custom information storage area 223wb, which will be described later, and is referred to when determining the effect mode of the variable effect.

Here, with reference to FIG. 745, the contents defined in the effect custom information table 222wa will be described. FIG. 745 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the effect custom information table 222wa. As shown in FIG. 745, the effect custom information table 222wa includes a selection condition that enables selection by a effect custom operation for four types of custom types (effect mode types) selectable by the player, and The setting contents (specified contents) of the presentation mode in the case are defined.

In this 23rd control example, by executing a production custom operation, up to four types of production mode types (custom types) can be selected, and according to the selected production mode type (custom type), It is configured so that the execution frequency of the effects to be executed (read-ahead effects, advance notice effects, etc.) and the degree of expectation for winning can be varied.

More specifically, depending on the production mode type (custom type), each production mode type (custom type) so that the execution frequency of the pending change production, the execution frequency of the probability change notification production, and the execution frequency of the late notice production are different On the other hand, the setting condition of the presentation mode is defined.

As shown in FIG. 745, for the custom type (production mode type) "normal mode", "always" is defined as a selection condition. That is, the "normal mode" is defined as a custom type (production mode type) that can always be selected by the production custom operation. Then, the execution frequency of the pending change effect is "medium", the execution frequency of the probability change notification is "medium", and the execution frequency of the second half advance notice effect is "medium". That is, when the "normal mode" is selected, various effects are executed at normal frequencies.

For the custom type (production mode type) "chance up mode", "always" is defined as a selection condition. That is, the "chance up mode" is defined as a custom type (production mode type) that can always be selected by the production custom operation. Then, the execution frequency of the pending change effect is "low", the execution frequency of the probability change notification is "medium", and the execution frequency of the late notice effect is "low". In other words, when the "chance-up mode" is selected, the execution frequency of the pending change effect and the second-half notice effect is made lower than when the "normal mode" is selected.

In the twenty-third control example, the lower the execution frequency of various effects is set, the higher the expectation of winning the jackpot when they are executed. In other words, the execution frequency of various performances is changed by changing the selection ratio of the performance mode at the time of losing the winning without changing the selection ratio of selecting the performance mode at the time of winning the jackpot. Therefore, when the ``chance-up mode'' is selected for the ``normal mode'', it is possible to increase the expectation of winning the jackpot when the pending change effect or the second half notice effect is executed.

Next, for the custom type (production mode type) "probability variable notification mode", "always" is defined as a selection condition. That is, the "variable probability notification mode" is defined as a custom type (production mode type) that can always be selected by production custom operation. Then, the execution frequency of the pending change effect is "medium", the execution frequency of the probability change notification is "high", and the execution frequency of the second half advance notice effect is "medium". That is, when the "probability variation notification mode" is selected, the pending change performance and the second half notice performance are executed at the same frequency as in the "normal mode", and the execution frequency of the probability variation notification is increased.

Finally, for the custom type (production mode type) "premium mode", "a portion of the jackpot fluctuates" is defined as a selection condition. That is, the "premium mode" is defined as a custom type (production mode type) that can be selected when the production custom operation is executed in one of the variations of the jackpot.

When this "premium mode" is selected, regardless of the remaining period of the variable effect being executed or the content of the already set effect mode, a special It is configured so that a special production (blessing production) is executed. Therefore, the pending change effect and the second half advance notice effect are not executed, and the execution frequency "-" of the hold change effect and the execution frequency "-" of the second half notice effect are defined. In addition, the "premium mode" is configured to be selectable only when the jackpot type "jackpot A" in which the probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends is set, so the "premium mode" is selected. A special dedicated effect (blessing effect) that is executed in the case of having a probability variable notification function to indicate that the probability variable state is set, so "fixed notification" is defined as the probability variable notification. .

In addition, in the twenty-third control example, the four types of effect modes described above are configured to be selectable, but the player may be configured to be able to select five or more types of effect modes as the selectable effect modes. . In this case, as a selectable production mode, for example, a production mode (silent mode) in which the production (notice production) for suggesting the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot is not executed (hardly executed) may be set. good. By providing such a performance mode, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine in advance whether or not he or she will win the big win, so that the player can always play the game while expecting to win the big win. In addition, if the pachinko machine 10 is capable of executing an effect that can gradually suggest the degree of expectation for a big win by changing the display mode of the specific identification information step by step, the display for showing the degree of expectation for the big win step by step. A production mode (happening mode) in which the aspect is exchanged may be configured so as to be settable. For example, in a pachinko machine 10 capable of executing a pending change effect that can suggest to a player the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot by gradually changing the color of the pending symbol, normally, the color of the pending symbol is "blue." → Green → Red → Rainbow”, whereas the expectation of winning a jackpot increases in the order of “Rainbow → Red → Green → Blue” by setting the above-mentioned happening mode. It is better to configure it to be higher.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the relationship between the display mode of the identification information and the degree of expectation for the big win according to the set production mode, so that normally, it is easy to lose and win. is a performance that makes it easy to win a big win, and if it is normal, the performance that makes it easy to win a big win is off, and it becomes a performance that makes it easy to win. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

The second half notice effect selection table 222wb is a data table that is referred to when determining the effect mode (notice mode) of the second half notice executed in the second half period of the variable effect, and is a data table for determining the effect pattern of the target variable effect. Correspondingly, different notice modes are stipulated, and in the variable effect update process 23 (see F3551 in FIG. 755) executed in the effect update process 23 (see F2161 in FIG. 754), at the end timing of the first half period of the variable effect If it is determined that there is (F3902 in FIG. 755: Yes), it is referred to determine the effect mode of the latter half of the advance notice effect. Also, when the effect custom operation is executed during the first half of the variable effect and the effect mode is switched (F3709 in FIG. 752: Yes), reference is made to determine the effect mode of the second half notice effect.

Here, with reference to FIG. 746, the contents defined in the second half announcement effect selection table 222wb will be described. FIG. 746 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the second half announcement effect selection table 222wb. As shown in FIG. 746, in the latter half of the advance notice effect selection table 222wb, the currently set custom type (effect mode type), and the success/fail judgment result (lottery result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the target variable effect) and , different production modes (notice modes) of the second half of the advance notice effects are defined in association with the acquired value of the first effect counter 223vf and the execution effects (target effect patterns of the variable effects).

As shown in Figure 746, there are "effect A" and "effect B" in the effect pattern executed as the variable effect, and according to the effect pattern of the variable effect to be executed, it is executed in the latter half of the variable effect period. The number of notice productions to be performed is different. Specifically, when "effect A" is set as the effect pattern, the notice effect is performed once in the second half period, and when "effect B" is set, the notice effect is performed twice in the second half period. configured to be possible. By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the number of executions of the advance notice performance to be executed in the second half period according to the performance pattern of the variable performance to be executed, and to enhance the performance effect.

Specifically, when "normal mode" or "variable probability notification mode" is set as the custom type (production mode type), that is, the custom type (production mode type) is set, and if the success/failure determination result is "win", if the effect pattern of the variable effect being executed is "effect A", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223vf For the range of "0 to 39", the second half first notice "blue" is for the range "40 to 69", and the second half first notice "green" is for the range "70 to 98". , the second half first notice "red" is defined, and if the effect pattern of the variable effect being executed is "effect B", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223vf falls within the range of "0 to 39". On the other hand, the first half notice "blue" and the second half notice "red" are in the range of "40 to 69", the second half notice "green" and the second half notice "green" are "70 98”, the first half notice “green” and the second half notice “red” are defined.

In addition, if the result of the judgment is "off", if the effect pattern of the variable effect being executed is "effect A", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223vf is in the range of "0 to 39" , the second half first notice "blue" is for the range "40 to 69", the second half first notice "green" is for the range "70 to 98", the second half first notice "red" is defined, and if the effect pattern of the variable effect being executed is "effect B", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223vf is in the range of "0 to 39", the second half first notice "blue" , The second half notice "red" is for the range "40 to 69", the first half notice "green" is for the range "70 to 98", and the second notice "green" is for the range "70 to 98". The first notice "green" and the second half notice "red" are defined.

Here, the types of each advance notice mode defined in the second half advance notice effect selection table 222wb will be described. As shown in FIG. 746, in this 23rd control example, the degree of expectation for winning a jackpot (hit) is configured to differ according to the type of each notification mode, namely, "blue", "green", and "red". It is structured so that the expectation of winning will be higher in the order of.

Specifically, in the second half of the first announcement in the case where "effect A" is executed as the effect pattern, the announcement mode "blue" is selected at a rate of 40/90 when the win/loss determination result is "hit". , is selected at 30/99 in the case of "miss", and the advance notice mode "green" is selected at a rate of 30/90 when the hit/fail judgment result is "hit", and is selected at a rate of 9/99 in the case of "miss" The selected advance notice mode "red" is selected at a rate of 29/90 when the win/loss determination result is "hit", and is not selected when it is "miss".

In other words, by making the selection ratio of each notice mode in the case of a mis-win greatly different from the selection ratio of each notice mode in the case of winning, it is possible to achieve a winning when each notice mode is set. It is configured so that the degree of expectation is different, and the prediction mode "blue" has the lowest winning expectation, followed by the notice mode "green" and the notice mode "red", so that the winning expectation is higher. It consists of

Further, in contrast to the notice modes "blue" and "green", the notice mode "red" is configured to be selected only when the player wins. By configuring in this way, if "normal mode" or "probability change notification mode" is set as the production mode type, even if the result of the judgment is "hit", even if it is "off" Second-half notice performances of various notice modes can be easily executed, and performances that prevent the player from getting tired of the game early can be provided.

On the other hand, when "chance up mode" is set as a custom type (production mode type), that is, when a custom type (production mode type) with a "low" execution frequency of the latter half of the advance notice effect is set. If the success/failure determination result is "win", if the effect pattern of the variable effect being executed is "effect A", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223vf is in the range of "0 to 59" , the second half first notice ``no'' is specified in the range of ``60 to 98'', the second half first notice ``red'' is specified, and the effect pattern of the variable effect being executed is ``effect B''. For example, when the acquired value of the first effect counter 223vf is in the range of “0 to 59”, the second half of the first notice is “none” and the second half of the notice is “none” to the range of “60 to 79”. , the first half notice ``no'' and the second half notice ``red'', and the second half notice ``red'' and the second half notice ``red'' are defined for the range of ``80 to 98''.

In addition, if the result of the judgment is "off", if the effect pattern of the variable effect being executed is "effect A", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223vf is in the range of "0 to 94" , the second half first notice ``no'' is specified in the range of ``95 to 98'', the second half first notice ``red'' is specified, and the effect pattern of the variable effect being executed is ``effect B'' , the value of the acquired first effect counter 223vf is in the range of "0 to 94", the second half of the first notice is "none", and the second half of the second notice is "none" to the range of "95 to 98", The first half notice "none" and the second half notice "red" are defined.

In other words, when the "chance up mode" is set, it is difficult to execute the second half notice effect than when the "normal mode" or "variable probability notice mode" is set (difficult to set the notice mode), At the time when the second-half announcement effect is executed (an announcement mode is set), it is possible to increase the expectation of winning. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to quickly predict whether or not the jackpot will be won.

In addition, in this 23rd control example, as described above with reference to FIG. In a ``chance-up mode'' in which the mode ``red'' is set and the latter half of the announcement effect is executed only in a specific notification mode, the notification mode ``red'' is set even when the game is not won. . In other words, when "normal mode" and "probability variable notification mode" are set, the expectation of winning is low only by executing the second half notice effect (the notice mode is set), and the specific notice mode When "red" is set, the expectation of winning is high, whereas when "chance up mode" is set, the second half notice effect is executed (the notice mode is set). While the degree of expectation for winning is high with only one winning, a specific notice mode "red" is set in a part of the case of losing winning.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the attention point regarding the second half notice effect according to the set effect mode type (custom type), so that various effect mode types (custom type) ) to make it easier to play.

Next, when "premium mode" is set as a custom type (production mode type), that is, when the jackpot is fluctuating, the production patterns of the variable production being executed are "production A" and "production B". In either case, the forewarning mode "rainbow" is always set for the second half foretelling effect that can be executed. In other words, as described above, the "premium mode" is a custom type (production mode type) that can be selected only during the jackpot fluctuation in which the jackpot type "jackpot A" in which the probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends is set. , At the time when the "premium mode" is selected, the player is notified that the jackpot is fluctuating. It is configured so that a special notice mode "rainbow" is always set to indicate that the

By configuring in this way, by setting the "premium mode", a notice form (for example, "blue") indicating the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot is given to the player who understands that the jackpot will be won. , "Green") has been executed in the second half of the announcement, and you may not have won the jackpot? It is possible to suppress the confusion.

Next, with reference to FIG. 747, the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twenty-third control example will be described. FIG. 747 is a diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the twenty-third control example. As shown in FIG. 747, in this 23rd control example, in contrast to the 22nd control example described above, an effect customizing flag 223wa, a custom information storage area 223wb, a mode change standby flag 223wc, a late notice set flag 223wd, and a late The difference is that an announcement information storage area 223we is added. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The production customizing flag 223wa is a flag for indicating that the player is executing a production custom operation for changing the production mode type, and is turned on while the production custom operation is being executed. is set to This effect customizing flag 223wa allows the player to operate (press) the decision button (middle button) 600a while the player is not performing the volume adjustment operation or the light amount adjustment operation (environment adjustment operation), and select the effect mode type. state (custom production state) is set (see F3806 in FIG. 753), it is set to ON, and in the custom production state, the determination button (middle button) 600a for determining the production mode type is operated. is set to OFF (see F3707 in FIG. 752).

In this way, by providing the effect customizing flag 223wa that can determine that the effect customizing state is set, the content of the control processing when the right button 600c and the left button 600e are operated can be changed to the setting state of the effect customizing flag 223wa. can be different depending on Specifically, in the state in which the production customizing flag 223wa is set to ON, that is, in the production customizing state, the production mode is activated based on the operation of the right button 600c or the left button 600e. The selection control for selecting the type is executed, and the right button 600c or the left button 600e is operated when the effect customizing flag 223wa is set to OFF, that is, when the effect customizing state is not set. Based on the above, selection control can be executed to select the light amount level.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute different selection controls using the same operation means (right button 600c, left button 600e). In a pachinko machine 10 capable of causing a player to execute an operation for changing the mode, etc., the types of operation means can be reduced compared to the case where dedicated operation means are provided corresponding to each change operation. can. Therefore, it is possible to easily secure an area for providing the operating means. In addition, by reducing the types of operation means provided for the same area, it is possible to design one operation means (press button) to be large, thus providing an operation means that is easy for the player to operate. can be made easier.

Furthermore, in the twenty-third control example, the change state (light amount adjustment operation state, effect custom state) for changing each game environment can be ended by the player operating the determination button (middle button) 600a. It is configured so that In other words, it is configured so that each change state can be terminated when the player decides on an arbitrary game environment. Therefore, when each change state is set, the period during which the change state is set can be shortened compared to the case where the control for ending the change state set based on the elapsed time is executed. To make it easy to change a plurality of types of game environments in a short period of time.

The custom information storage area 223wb is a storage area for temporarily storing information indicating the effect mode type (custom type) selected by the effect custom operation. 600c, 600e) to select a game mode, information for indicating the selected game mode is stored. Information stored in the custom information storage area 223wb (information indicating the selected presentation mode) is referred to when determining the presentation mode of the variable presentation.

The information stored in the custom information storage area 223wb is cleared when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and the start-up process executed when the power supply is started "normal mode ” is stored. Therefore, in the initial state when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is started, the "normal mode" is set as the effect mode type.

By constructing in this manner, the game of the pachinko machine 10 can be executed using the performance mode in which various performances are evenly executed for the player who is not interested in changing the performance mode. , it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

The mode change waiting flag 223wc is a period from when the effect custom operation is executed in the effect custom state and the effect mode different from the current one is determined until the display mode indicating that the effect mode is actually switched is displayed. It is set to ON at the timing when a production mode different from the current one is determined, and the ON state continues until the display mode for indicating that the production mode has actually switched is displayed. It consists of

In the twenty-third control example, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 waits for the effect mode change condition to be satisfied based on the fact that the mode change standby flag 223wc is set to ON. It is configured so that a “waiting” image is displayed. By configuring in this way, the production mode is not switched even though the production custom operation is normally executed, or the production custom operation is not normally executed in the first place, and the production mode is not switched. can be easily grasped by the player.

The second half advance notice set flag 223wd is a flag for indicating that the effect mode of the second half advance notice effect to be executed in the second half period of the variable effect is determined, and the variable effect is being executed and the variable effect is being executed. It is set to ON when the effect mode of the second half advance notice effect is determined based on the execution of the effect custom operation before the first half period elapses. Then, the setting state is discriminated in the first half period of the variable performance, and when it is discriminated that it is not set to ON, the performance mode of the second half notice performance is determined when the first half period of the variable performance elapses. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is set to ON, the process of determining the effect mode of the latter half notice effect when the first half period of the variable effect has passed is skipped.

In this 23rd control example, a plurality of performance modes set as one variation performance (variation performance set corresponding to one special symbol variation) are performed at one timing (for example, the start timing of the variation performance). Not all of them are determined, but some of the performance modes are configured to be determined after the variable performance is executed. Specifically, the execution period of one variable performance is divided into the first half period and the second half period, and the performance mode of the notice performance (second half notice performance) executed in the second half period is determined when the first half period has passed. are doing. By configuring in this way, the production mode corresponding to various events (for example, the change operation of the production mode, the acquisition of a new special figure reservation, etc.) that occurred in the first half period of the variable production is changed to the production form of the second half notice production. Therefore, compared to the case where all of the multiple production modes set as one variable production are determined at the start timing of the variable production, various events during the variable production (for example, the production mode When a change operation, acquisition of a new special figure reservation, etc.) occurs, it is possible to make it easier to quickly determine the performance mode corresponding to the event that occurred (during the variable performance execution period).

Furthermore, when the performance mode is changed by executing the performance custom operation before the first half period of the variable performance period elapses, the performance mode of the second half notice performance is based on the performance mode after the change at that time. is determinable. Then, when it is determined that the effect mode of the latter half of the advance notice effect matches the content of the effect mode after the change, a display mode (" Set completion") is displayed, and if it is determined that the production mode of the second half notice production does not match the content of the production mode after the change, the display form indicating that the production mode is waiting for switching (" Waiting") is configured to be displayed. By configuring in this way, the player who has executed the performance custom operation during the variable performance period is immediately switched to the performance mode without waiting for the performance mode to switch until the variable performance being executed ends. A switching display can be executed. Further, immediately after the effect mode switching display is executed, the notice effect (second half notice effect) is executed in the effect mode corresponding to the switched (changed) effect mode. It is possible to make it easier to realize.

In addition, in the twenty-third control example, when the effect custom operation is executed during the first half period of the variable effect, the effect mode (notice mode) of the effect effect executed during the variable effect period is not determined. Although it is configured to execute the process of determining the effect mode based on the changed effect mode for the effect (second half preview effect), it is not limited to this, for example, at the start timing of the variable effect, The effect mode (notice mode) of various advance notice effects to be executed during the variable effect period is determined, and at the time when the operation for switching the effect mode is executed by the effect custom operation, the notice effect that has not yet been executed is determined. to determine the content of the effect mode (notice mode) that has already been set, and if the content of the determined effect mode (notice mode) matches the effect mode after the change, perform switching display of the effect mode, If they do not match, it may be configured to execute standby display for switching the effect mode.

In other words, it is preferable to configure so as to execute the display that accepts the change of the effect mode only when the effect mode of the preset notice effect matches the content of the effect mode set based on the effect custom operation. . By configuring in this way, immediately after the switching display of the production mode is executed, the notice production (second half notice production) is executed in the production mode corresponding to the switched (changed) production mode, so that the production mode is changed. It is possible to make it easy for the player to realize that the switching has been made.

The second half notice information storage area 223we is a storage area for temporarily storing information indicating the effect mode of the second half notice effect determined during the first half of the variable effect period. When an operation is executed and a performance mode (announcement mode) of the second half notice performance is determined before the first half period elapses, information for indicating the determined performance mode (announcement mode) is stored. (See F3711 in FIG. 752). Then, when the first half period of the variable effect period has passed and the effect mode (notice mode) of the second half notice effect is determined at the timing when the effect mode (notice mode) of the second half notice effect is set ( In F3903 of FIG. 755: Yes), the information stored in the second half notice information storage area 223we is read out, and the effect mode (preview mode) based on the read information is set (F3905 of FIG. 755). .

<Regarding the control process of the audio ramp control device 113 in the twenty-third control example>
Next, referring to FIGS. 748 to 755, among the control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-third control example, control processes different from the above-described twenty-second control example. Explain the content. In the twenty-third control example, as described above, it is possible to select a plurality of effect modes with different winning expectations for the executed notice effect, and an effect (execution) of hiding the reserved symbol. 22nd control example described above in that it is configured to be able to execute the intermediate holding effect), and the control processing related to the difference is executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, This is different from the 22nd control example described above.

Specifically, instead of the holding effect execution processing 22 at the start of fluctuation (see F3109 in FIG. 730), the holding effect execution processing 23 at the start of fluctuation (see F3159 in FIG. F2107 in FIG. 731) instead of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 23 (see F2137 in FIG. 750), and enter button operation processing 23 (see F3332 in FIG. 751) in place of the enter button operation processing 22 (see F3315 in FIG. 732) (see F2111 in FIG. 734) is replaced with the effect update process 23 (see F2161 in FIG. 754), and other control processing contents are the same. be. The same control contents are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 748, the holding effect execution process 23 (F3159) at the start of fluctuation will be described. FIG. 748 is a flow chart showing the contents of the holding effect execution process 23 (F3159) at the time of fluctuation start. As shown in FIG. 748, in this 23rd control example, in contrast to the suspension effect execution process 22 at the start of variation (see F31909 in FIG. 730) of the 22nd control example described above, the suspension change scenario (F3201: No), when it is determined that there is no information indicating (F3201: No), in order to set an execution suspension change effect that changes the display mode of the execution suspension pattern (execution suspension hr0 displayed in the display area HR1 of FIG. 739) The difference is that the execution pending change effect setting process 23 (F3251) is executed. Other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 749, the processing contents of the in-execution pending change effect setting process 23 (F3251) will be described. FIG. 749 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the in-execution pending change effect setting process 23 (F3251). In this in-execution pending change effect setting process 23 (F3251), a process for setting the effect mode of the in-execution pending effect is executed.

When the execution pending change effect setting process 23 (F3251) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the effect pattern of the current variable effect is a movable effect to move the change accessories Ym1 and Ym2 (F3601). If it is determined to be an effect (F3601: Yes), the information stored in the pending effect information storage area 223vl is read (F3602), and whether the read information contains information indicating a pending change scenario, that is, , It is determined whether or not there is a pending symbol that triggers the execution of the pending change effect in the acquired pending symbols (F3603).

In the process of F3603, if it is determined that there is no information indicating the pending change scenario (F3603: No), then the acquired pending design (first pending design hr1 to fourth pending design hr4) is three or more colors It is determined whether it is displayed in the display mode (F3604). In the process of F3604, the display mode (color) of the displayed reserved design is determined based on the information (reserved color information) indicating the display mode of each reserved design stored in the reserved information storage area 223vl.

In the process of F3604, if it is determined that three or more reserved symbols are displayed (F3604: Yes), then it is determined whether the special symbol variation corresponding to this variation effect is a big hit variation ( F3605), when it is determined that it is a big hit change (F3605: Yes), a display variation pattern command for indicating a pending change effect during execution is set (F3606), and role product operation scenario 4 is determined (F3607) , sets a role product motion command indicating the determined role product motion scenario (F3608), and terminates this process.

Here, in the process of F3605, based on the information included in the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, it is determined whether or not the current variation effect is the variation effect corresponding to the big hit variation. That is, the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 includes information for indicating the variation time of the special symbol variation, information for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, and Information including at least is set.

In the twenty-third control example, similarly to the twenty-second control example described above, it is not possible for the player to grasp whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, based on the variation time of the special symbol variation. In order to suppress it, the same length of fluctuation time (variation pattern) can be set regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery, so the fluctuation pattern command (variation time) set this time is Apart from the information shown, it is configured to include information for showing the result of the special symbol lottery, but not limited to this, for example, based on the length of the set fluctuation pattern (variation time) When the result of the special symbol lottery can be discriminated on the side of the voice lamp control device 113, that is, when the special symbol lottery wins the jackpot and when the loser wins, different lengths of fluctuation time are set. If it is, there is no need to separately set information for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, and only the information indicating the length of the variation time (variation pattern) of the special symbol variation is included in the variation pattern command. do it. In this case, as a variation time (variation pattern) with a different length set based on the result of the special symbol lottery, various variation patterns set at the time of winning are different from various variation patterns set at the time of jackpot winning. It is preferable to configure the lengths to be slightly different (to the extent that it is difficult for the player to distinguish the difference). For example, when a variation pattern that can be set when a big win is won has a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds. 3, it is preferable to have a variation pattern with a variation time of 60.5 seconds as a variation pattern that can be set at the time of a lost winning.

By configuring in this way, only by including information for indicating the set variation pattern (variation time) in the variation pattern command, the variation effect set this time is the special symbol variation that is winning the jackpot. A voice lamp control device 113 side makes it easy to determine whether it is a variation performance executed in correspondence with or a variation performance executed in correspondence with a special symbol variation that is not won (lost winning). In addition, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the difference in the set fluctuation pattern (difference in fluctuation time).

In addition, since the variation time of substantially the same length can be set for the jackpot variation and the loss variation, the variation performance executed during the jackpot variation and the variation performance performed during the loss variation are different. It is possible to make it easy to execute the same variable performance except that only the performance result is different.

Here, the contents of the role product action scenario (the role product action scenario 4) set in the execution pending change effect setting process 23 (F3251) explained in FIG. 749 will be described. This role product action scenario is a scenario for operating the change role products Ym1 and Ym2 in a predetermined mode, as in the 22nd control example described above, and is defined in advance in the action scenario 23 table 222wf. . Note that, in the action scenario 23 table 222wf, in addition to the role action scenario 1 to the role action scenario 3 having the same contents as in the 22nd control example described above, the action scenario 4 that can be selected during the pending change effect during execution is displayed. When the corresponding information is stipulated and the character product action scenario 4 is set, first, of the plurality of (maximum 4) reserved symbols displayed in the display area HR2, three specific reserved symbols are displayed. The change role products Ym1 and Ym2 are moved to the first specific position that hides all but the reserved symbols of three colors (see FIG. 739(a)), and then the reserved symbols displayed in the display area HR2 (the first Move the change roles Ym1 and Ym2 to the second specific position (see FIG. 739(b)) where all the reserved symbols to the 4th reserved symbols) are hidden (see FIG. 739(b)), and then move the change roles Ym1 and Ym2 to the initial position (storage position). The change accessories Ym1 and Ym2 are movably controlled so as to move.

Then, when the pending effect during execution is executed, a suspended symbol is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in correspondence with the movable state of the change role products Ym1 and Ym2 corresponding to the above-described role product action scenario 4. is hidden, and an effect (see FIGS. 739 and 740) is executed to change the display mode of the pending design during execution.

In the twenty-third control example, the change role Ym1 and Ym2 are moved to a position where the reserved symbol display area HR2 becomes difficult to see. By using the display mode of the pending symbols displayed in the display area HR2 in accordance with the timing when the objects Ym1 and Ym2 become difficult to see, an effect is executed to change the display mode of the pending symbols during execution. The movement of the objects Ym1 and Ym2 does not simply make the reserved patterns difficult to see, but makes the player think that the change character Ym1 and Ym2 are moved to change the reserved patterns during execution. Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced.

Here, in the twenty-third control example, an example is shown in which the change roles Ym1 and Ym2 are moved to a position where the reserved symbol display area HR2 becomes difficult to see. By moving the change roles Ym1 and Ym2 to the variable display position of the third symbol executed on the display surface of the display device 81, the player's expectation of winning the special symbol being executed is increased. It may be configured to suggest a high value. In this case, in addition to the display area HR2 where the reserved symbols are displayed, the display area HR1 where the pending symbols during execution hr0 are displayed becomes difficult to see due to the movable change roles Ym1 and Ym2, and the suspended symbols during execution are displayed. There is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to predict the result of the special symbol lottery that is being executed, including the mode.

In this case, it is preferable to change the display position of the execution pending symbol (the position where the display area HR1 is formed) corresponding to the execution of the movable effect of the change accessories Ym1 and Ym2. It is preferable to form the display region HR1 outside the movable regions Ym1 and Ym2. As a result, even when the change hand objects Ym1 and Ym2 are in a movable state, the pending symbols during execution can be visually recognized with certainty, so that the player can easily predict the result of the special symbol lottery during execution. can do.

However, when the above-described configuration is used, that is, when the position of the display area HR1 in which the pending design during execution is displayed is changed while the pending design during execution is displayed, the display area after the change There is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to determine whether the pending symbols displayed in HR1 are the pending symbols during execution or the pending symbols before execution. That is, in a state in which the pending symbol hr0 during execution is displayed in the "white" display mode and the first suspended symbol hr1 is also displayed in the "white" display mode, the change roles Ym1 and Ym2 are movable. Then, when the display area HR2 displaying the first pending symbol hr1 and the display area HR1 displaying the pending symbol hr0 during execution are covered with the change character goods Ym1 and Ym2, the display area HR2 is When the display area HR1 is hidden, the display area HR1 is formed at a different display position (the display position which does not overlap with the movable change character Ym1, Ym2), and the execution pending pattern hr0 is displayed in the "white" display mode. , since the first reserved symbol hr1 is hidden in accordance with the movement of the change hand parts Ym1 and Ym2, the currently displayed reserved symbol hr0 in the display mode of "white" There is a problem that the player cannot immediately determine whether the reserved symbol hr1.

Therefore, in this case, the reserved symbols (first reserved pattern hr1 to fourth reserved pattern hr4) displayed in the display region HR2 are not displayed in correspondence with the timing when the change role products Ym1 and Ym2 cover the display region HR2. It is preferable to set an effect mode indicating that the position of the display area HR1 moves corresponding to the timing when the change character Ym1 and Ym2 cover the display area HR1. By configuring in this way, even after the display position of the reserved pattern is moved, it is easy for the player to grasp whether the displayed reserved pattern is the reserved pattern being executed or the reserved pattern before execution. can do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 750, the contents of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 23 (F2137) will be described. FIG. 750 is a flow chart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 23 (F2137). As shown in FIG. 750, in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 23 (F2137), the effect mode is changed to the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 22 (see F2107 in FIG. 731) of the 22nd control example described above. In addition to adding processing related to the production custom operation for selection (production custom selection), instead of the decision button operation processing 22 (F3315) that is executed when the decision button (middle button) 600a is pressed, decision button operation is performed. The difference is that process 23 (F3332) is executed. Other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 23 (F2137) is executed, first, the effect custom selection processing 23 is performed (F3331). (Refer to F2107 in FIG. 731), the same processing of F3301 to F3314 is executed. In the process of F3314, if it is determined that the enter button (middle button) 600a has been operated (F3314: Yes), enter button operation process 23 is executed (F3332), F3310 is executed, and this process ends. .

If it is determined in the process of F3314 that the enter button (middle button) 600a has not been operated (F3314: No), the frame button input monitoring/effect process 22 of the 22nd control example (F2107 in FIG. 731) ), the same processing of F3316 (effect button operation processing 22) is executed, then the processing of F3310 is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 751, the processing contents of the effect custom selection process 23 (F3331) will be described. FIG. 751 is a flow chart showing the details of the effect custom selection process 23 (F3331). In this effect custom selection process 23 (F3331), a process for selecting the effect mode is executed based on the operation contents of the operating means (middle button 600a, right button 600c, left button 600e) in the effect custom state. .

When the effect custom selection process 23 (F3331) is executed, first, it is determined whether the effect customizing flag 223wa is set to ON (F3701). If it is determined that it is not in the state (F3701: No), by operating the operation means (middle button 600a, right button 600c, left button 600e), other selection control (for example, light amount adjustment) is performed instead of the production mode selection control ) is executed, all processing of the effect custom selection processing 23 (F3331) is skipped, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F3701 that the effect customizing flag 223wa is set to ON (F3701: Yes), then it is determined whether the right button 600c or the left button 600e has been operated. (F3702), if it is determined that there has been an operation (F3702: Yes), the selected effect mode is updated in correspondence with the determined operation content (F3703), and the information for indicating the updated effect mode is customized. Store in the information storage area 223wb (F3704), set a display command for indicating the updated effect mode (F3705), and proceed to the process of F3706.

In correspondence with the display command set in the processing of F3705, the display mode (effect during selection display mode for indicating the mode) is determined. In this state, the change candidates for the effect mode are only displayed in the display area HR6, and the changed effect mode is not determined by the effect custom operation. In this state, when the player presses the decision button (middle button) 600a, decision processing for deciding the effect mode corresponding to the display mode displayed in the display area HR6 is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F3702 that the right button 600c or the left button 600e has not been operated (F3702: No), then it is determined whether the decision button (middle button) 600a has been operated. Then (F3706), if it is determined that there is an operation to the determination button (middle button) 600a, that is, if an operation for determining the changed production mode in the production custom state is executed (F3706: Yes ), set the production customizing flag 223wa to OFF (F3707), determine whether the current is during special figure fluctuation (during special symbol fluctuation) (F3708), and if it is determined that it is during special figure fluctuation ( F3708: Yes), it is determined whether the present is the first half period of fluctuation (the first half period of the fluctuation effect) (F3709).

In the process of F3709, if it is determined that it is the first half of the variable period (F3709: Yes), the production mode corresponding to the information stored in the custom information storage area 223wb (the production mode displayed in the display area HR6) is entered. Based on this, the second half notice effect selection table 222wb is referred to determine the effect mode of the second half notice effect (F3710), and information for indicating the determined effect mode is stored in the second half notice information storage area 223we (F3711).

As described with reference to FIG. 746, the second half notice effect selection table 222wb also defines the content indicating that the second half notice effect is not to be executed (described as "none" in the figure), ie, "none". is determined, the second half announcement effect is not executed. Therefore, in the process of F3710, the process of determining whether or not to execute the second half announcement effect and the effect mode (preview mode) in the case of execution is executed. Then, in the processing of F3711, the processing result of F3710, that is, the information indicating whether or not the second half notice effect is executed and the effect mode set as the second half notice effect is stored in the second half notice information storage area 223we. In other words, in the process of F3711, information indicating that the second half announcement effect is not executed is also stored.

When the process of F3711 is finished, next, the second half advance notice set flag 223wd is set to ON (F3712), and the effect mode of the second half advance notice effect determined in the process of F3710 matches the type of effect mode after the update. (F3713), and if it is determined to be suitable (F3713: Yes), set a display command to indicate that the production mode is changed (F3719), and end this process do.

Also, in the process of F3713, if it is determined that it is not suitable (F3713: No), from the next variation (after the special symbol variation being executed is stopped and displayed) to indicate that the production mode is changed is set (F3714), the mode change standby flag 223wc is set to ON (F3715), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of F3709, if it is determined that the present is not the first half of the fluctuation period, that is, the latter half of the fluctuation period during the special figure fluctuation (F3709: No), the special symbol fluctuation under execution is set to jackpot A. (F3716), and if it is determined to be a big hit A variation (F3716: Yes), set a display command to indicate that the production mode is changed (F3717) , sets a voice command indicating that a jackpot has been won (F3718), and terminates this process.

Finally, in the process of F3706, if it is determined that the decision button (middle button) 600a has not been operated (F3706: No), this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 752, the contents of the decision button operation process 23 (F3332) will be described. FIG. 752 is a flowchart showing the details of the decision button operation process 23 (F3332). This decision button operation process 23 (F3332) is executed based on the player's operation (pressing) of the decision button (middle button) 600a. (see F3315 of )), it is executed when the decision button (middle button) 600a is operated in a state in which the adjustment period flag 223sx is not set to ON, that is, in a state in which light intensity adjustment or volume adjustment is not being performed. The difference is that the processing for The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

When the determination button operation process 23 (F3332) is executed, first, it is determined whether the period adjusting flag 223vx is set to ON (F3351). If it is determined that the player has operated (depressed) the determination button (middle button) 600a while volume adjustment is not being performed (F3351: No), the effect custom execution process 23 is executed (F3371), and then , the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of F3351, if it is determined that the period adjusting flag 223vx is set to ON (F3351; Yes), the determination button operation process 22 (see F3315 in FIG. 732) of the 22nd control example described above is executed. The same processing of F3352 to F3357 is executed, and this processing ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 753, the processing contents of the effect custom execution processing 23 (F3371) will be described. FIG. 753 is a flow chart showing the contents of the effect custom execution process 23 (F3371). In the effect custom execution process 23 (F3371), a process for setting the effect custom state, that is, the state in which the selection operation of the effect mode can be executed is executed.

When the effect custom execution process 23 (F3371) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current jackpot A is fluctuating (F3801), and if it is determined that the jackpot A is fluctuating (F3801: Yes), the premium A lottery is executed to determine whether or not the mode can be selected (F3802), and it is determined whether or not the lottery in F3802 is won (F3803). If it is determined in the process of F3803 that the player has won the lottery (F3803: Yes), the effect custom selection target "with premium mode" (see FIG. 738(b)) that can be selected by the effect custom operation is determined (F3804). , F3806.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F3803 that the game has not been won (F3803: No), the effect custom selection target "Normal" (see FIG. 738(a)) is determined (F3805), and the process proceeds to F3806. In addition, in the process of F3801, if it is determined that the jackpot A is not fluctuating, that is, if it is determined that the condition that the "premium mode" can be selected as the production mode is not satisfied (F3801: No), the process proceeds to F3805. Then, the effect custom selection object “Normal” (see FIG. 738(a)) is determined.

Next, in the process of F3806, the effect customizing flag 223wa is set to ON (F3806), a display command for indicating that effect customizing is in progress is set (F3807), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 754, the contents of the rendering update process 23 (F2161) will be described. FIG. 754 is a flow chart showing the contents of the rendering update process 23 (F2161). This effect update process 23 (F2161) executes the update process related to the variable effect (variation effect update process 23) with respect to the effect update process 22 (see F2111 in FIG. 734) executed in the above-described 22nd control example. They are different in that they are the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the effect update process 23 (F2161) is executed, first, the same processes of F3501 to F3516 as the effect update process 22 (see F2111 in FIG. 734) are executed, and then the variable effect update process 23 is executed. (F3551), then the process of F3517 is executed, and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 755, the processing contents of the fluctuation effect update process 23 (F3551) will be described. FIG. 755 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the variable effect update process 23 (F3551). In this fluctuation production update process 23 (F3551), the process based on the elapsed time after the fluctuation production is executed is executed. In the twenty-third control example, a part of the effect mode of the variable effect (the effect mode of the advance notice effect executed in the second half period) can be set after the variable effect is executed (at the time when the first half period has elapsed). . By configuring in this way, even if a part of the condition for determining the performance mode (the performance mode type) is changed after the variable performance is executed, the part of the performance mode set to the variable performance being executed is changed. can be set in correspondence with the changed decision condition. Therefore, since it is possible to immediately execute the variable production corresponding to the changed determination condition, even though the operation for selecting the production mode (production custom operation) is executed, the production corresponding to the production mode after the change It is possible to prevent the player's desire to change the performance mode from declining due to the fact that it takes time until the mode is determined.

When the variable effect update process 23 (F3551) is executed, first, it is determined whether the effect pattern of the variable effect being executed is "effect A" or "effect B" (F3901). Here, the effect patterns "effect A" and "effect B" are effect patterns in which the effect mode of the advance notice effect in the second half period of the variable effect is determined in advance when the first half period has passed.

In the process of F3901, if it is determined that the effect patterns are "effect A" and "effect B" (F3901: Yes), then it is determined whether it is time to end the first half period (F3902), and the first half period ends. (F3902: Yes), it is determined whether the second half advance notice setting completion flag 223wd is set to ON (F3903).

In the process of F3903, if it is determined that the second half advance notice setting completion flag 223wd is set to ON, that is, during the first half period, an operation for changing the production mode (custom production operation) is executed, and the second half is already executed at the execution timing. When it is determined that the effect mode (notice mode) of the notice effect is determined (F3903: Yes), the second half notice set flag 223wd is set to OFF (F3907), and stored in the second half notice information storage area 223we. Information indicating the effect mode of the second half of the advance notice effect is read out (F3908), a display command for indicating the effect mode of the second half notice effect is set (F3906), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of F3903, if it is determined that the second half advance notice setting flag 223wd is not set to ON, that is, during the first half period, it is determined that the operation for changing the production mode (custom production operation) is not executed. If so (F3903: No), the current custom information (effect mode) is specified from the custom information storage area 223wb (F3904), and based on the specified custom information (effect mode), the second half preview effect selection table 222wb is referred to. to determine the effect mode of the latter half of the advance notice effect (F3905), set a display command for indicating the effect mode of the latter half notice effect (F3906), and terminate this processing.

In addition, in the processing of F3901, if it is determined that the production pattern is not “production A” or “production B”, that is, the production pattern of the variable production being executed is a production that can determine a new production mode during the variable production. If it is determined that it is not the pattern (F3901: No), or if it is determined that the current timing is not the end of the first half period (F3902: No), this process does not set the effect mode related to the second half preview effect. exit.

<24th control example>
Next, the twenty-fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 756 to 782. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-fourth control example has the same probability state (low-probability state or high-probability state) as the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-second control example. It has a setting change function that can be set differently, and voice data corresponding to various characters displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is stored in the voice output device 226 in advance. The major difference is that the type of sound (voice) output from the pachinko machine 10 can be switched based on the voice command output from the lamp control device 113 . Furthermore, regarding the effect to be executed, there is a setting suggestion effect that can suggest the set value set by the setting change function to the player, and a pending symbol displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (display area HR2 Execution of a hold shift effect capable of suggesting whether the target hold information includes jackpot information when the display position of the displayed first hold pattern hr1 to fourth hold pattern hr4) is shifted. It is different in that it is configured to be possible.

Conventionally, various characters have been used in the game of the pachinko machine 10, and the voice of a specific character among them is used to guide the game situation or to output lively voice. So, there is something that enhances the performance effect. However, if the sound (voice) of a specific character is always output, a player who has been playing for a long time will become accustomed to the type of voice that is output, and there is a problem that the production effect will be reduced. rice field.

In addition, when the contents (lines) of the output voice are the same, the meaning of the game indicated by the voice is always the same. There is a problem that the performance effect is lowered.

On the other hand, in the twenty-fourth control example, when the third symbol for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is stop-displayed, a different type of voice is generated based on the combination of the stop-displayed third symbols. It is configured to be able to output sound with By configuring in this way, it is possible to output various types of voices based on the result of the special symbol lottery, so that the performance effect is reduced even for players who have been playing games for a long time. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the twenty-fourth control example, it is possible to determine the contents (words) of the sound to be output based on the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed. Specifically, the combination of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed when the jackpot is won (zorome), the combination of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed when the reach is lost, and the third pattern that is stopped and displayed without entering the reach state. Depending on the combination of three patterns (separate eyes), it is possible to output sounds of different contents. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress monotony in the content (speech) of the output sound.

In addition, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a lottery result (loss) that is disadvantageous to the player, it is configured to be able to output a voice (speech) that can give a privilege (setting suggestion) to the player. By configuring in this way, even if the result of the special symbol lottery is a lottery result (loss) that is disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to give a privilege advantageous to the player, so that the player can enjoy the game. It is possible to prevent premature boredom.

Furthermore, if the jackpot is not won despite the fact that the performance with a high expectation of winning the jackpot (for example, the ready-to-win performance with a specific pattern (7 patterns)) is executed, that is, the player wins the jackpot. In spite of the execution of the performance with an extremely high possibility of winning, when the performance result is a failure, a benefit (for example, setting notification) that is more advantageous to the player can be given. By configuring in this way, even if the result of the special symbol lottery is a lottery result (loss) that is disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to give a privilege advantageous to the player, so that the player can enjoy the game. It is possible to prevent premature boredom.

In addition, in the twenty-fourth control example, identification information (number icon) for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery and the character form one third symbol, and the combination can be switched. It consists of That is, it is possible to change the type of character associated with a specific numeric icon (for example, 7). As the content of the speech output as voice, speech suggesting the character associated with the third design can be output.

By configuring in this way, even when lines suggesting the same character are output, the meaning of the lines can be greatly varied by differentiating the types of the numeric icons attached to the character. can. Therefore, it is possible to provide a player who has been playing a game for a long time with the pleasure of predicting whether or not a character suggested by the same line is an advantageous character when the same line is output. can.

In addition, in the twenty-fourth control example, the voice type is determined in correspondence with the stop display mode of the third symbol, and a specific stop display mode (the stop display mode of the third symbol indicating the winning of the jackpot) is determined. When the voice type is determined based on, the player can select whether or not to continue the voice output based on the voice type for a specific period. With this configuration, when the third pattern with the player's favorite character is stop-displayed in a display mode indicating that the player has won a jackpot, the voice output based on the voice type of the favorite character is output for a long time. It is possible to execute.

First, with reference to FIG. 756, the structure of the back side of the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-fourth control example will be described. FIG. 756 is a rear view schematically showing the configuration of the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 756, the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-fourth control example has a set value display device 110a capable of displaying set values and a setting change operation, which is different from the pachinko machine of the twenty-second control example described above. A setting key 110b that can switch between a state of accepting (and setting confirmation operation) and a state of not accepting (normal game state), and an operator (for example, a pachinko machine) in a state of accepting setting change operation (setting change state) A setting change mechanism comprising at least a setting switch 110c capable of changing the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 in accordance with the operation of the pachinko machine 10 (clerk of the hall where the pachinko machine 10 is installed) is provided in the main controller 110. There is a difference. Other configurations are the same, and the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 757, the method of changing settings using the setting change mechanism and the method of checking settings will be described in detail. First, with reference to FIGS. 757(a) to (d), the setting change procedure of the pachinko machine 10 using the setting change mechanism will be described. As shown in FIGS. 757(a) to (d), in order to change the settings of the pachinko machine 10, first, the setting key 110b is rotated clockwise while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. 757(a)). In other words, in order to change the settings, it is necessary to turn off the power of the pachinko machine 10 first. Next, while turning the setting key 110b to the ON side, the RAM clear switch 122 is turned on to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 757(b)). As a result, the state of the pachinko machine 10 after the power is turned on is set to the setting change state indicating that the setting is being changed. In the setting change state, "-" is displayed for each digit of the setting value display device 110a composed of a 4-digit 7-segment display. This display content makes it possible for the operator (for example, a hall clerk) to easily understand that the setting change state has been normally entered.

When the setting change state is entered, the setting value is switched by 1 each time the setting switch 110c is pressed (see FIG. 757(c)). In addition, in the twenty-fourth control example, three types of setting values, ie, setting values 1 to 3, are provided, and the larger the value, the higher the probability of a big win. That is, setting 1 has the lowest jackpot probability (for example, 1/262 in a low probability state, 1/65 in a high probability (variable) state), and setting 3 has the highest jackpot probability (for example, 1 in a low probability state /218, 1/55 in the high-probability state). In the setting change state, the setting is changed in the order of 1→2→3→1 . . . each time the setting switch 110c is pressed. In addition, when the setting switch 110c is pressed while the setting value is 3, the setting value is returned to 1 by a rotary type. Also, each time the setting switch 110c is pressed, a number indicating the current set value is displayed on the set value display device 110a. FIG. 757(c) is a diagram showing a display mode when the set value is set to "3". As shown in FIG. 757(c), when the setting value is switched to 3 by pressing the setting switch 110c, the number "3" indicating setting 3 is displayed for the lower digit of the setting value display device 110a. be done.

After the operator has completed the switching operation to the desired setting value, the setting change state is completed by rotating the setting key 110b counterclockwise to place the setting key 110b at the OFF position (FIG. 757). (d)). The setting key 110b is composed of a key-shaped key portion and a keyhole-shaped keyhole portion that matches the key portion, and the key portion can be removed. As a result, the key portion can be inserted into the keyhole portion only when an operator (for example, a hall clerk) performs a setting change operation, and the key portion can be removed and stored when the setting change operation is completed. can. As a result, it is possible to prevent unauthorized players from illegally changing the settings of the pachinko machine 10 during business hours, so that the hall can be prevented from suffering unexpected disadvantages. can.

When the setting change operation ends, the initial setting process of main controller 110 is resumed. In the initial setting process after restart, there is a process for transmitting a setting change completion command indicating completion of the setting change operation and a setting value command indicating the setting value determined by the setting change operation to the sound lamp control device 113 . executed. Further, a process for transmitting a command (initialization command) for resuming the initial setting process of the audio lamp control device 113, which is on standby until the setting change operation is completed, is executed.

Next, referring to FIGS. 757(e) to (g), a procedure for confirming settings (setting confirmation operation) will be described. In order to confirm the setting, first, the setting key 110b is rotated to the ON position while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, as in the setting change operation (see FIG. 757(e)). Then, by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 without turning on the RAM clear switch 122 (that is, while it is in the off state), the setting confirmation state is set (see FIG. 757(f)). When the setting confirmation state is entered, the currently set values are displayed on the setting value display device 110a. The example in FIG. 757(f) shows a state in which "3" is set as the set value. When the confirmation of the settings by the operator is completed, the setting confirmation state is terminated by turning the setting key 110b to the ON side, and the state is shifted to the state in which the normal game can be played (see FIG. 757(g)).

In the twenty-fourth control example, the configuration is such that the setting key 110b and the setting switch 110c are provided separately, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the setting switch 110c may be removed and the setting may be changed according to the amount of rotation of the setting key 110b. More specifically, every time the setting key 110b is rotated by 60 degrees, the setting changes from 1→2→3→1 . It can be configured to return. By configuring in this way, the configuration of the setting change mechanism can be simplified, so that the number of parts can be reduced. Therefore, the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In the twenty-fourth control example, as shown in FIG. 757, the setting change mechanism is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, that is, at a position that cannot be visually recognized by the player during the game. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the setting change mechanism from being operated during the game. Also, when actually changing the settings, it is necessary to open the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 in order to operate the setting keys 110b and setting switches 110c provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. , and when these are opened, the inner frame 12 and the outer frame 14 are supported only by the opening/closing shafts, resulting in a relatively unstable state. In such a situation, if the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the return operation of the ornamental accessory provided in the pachinko machine 10 is executed, an excessive load is applied to the opening/closing shaft and the like, causing damage. You may be invited.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, after the waiting process of waiting for the initial setting process of the sound lamp control device 113 is completed, the return operation of the character is performed. In other words, the configuration is such that the return operation of the role object is not executed during the setting change operation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the pachinko machine 10 is damaged due to execution of the return operation of the role during the setting change operation. In addition, since the pachinko machine 10 can be made less likely to vibrate during the setting change operation compared to the case where the return operation of the role is executed while the operator is operating the setting switch 110c, the setting switch 110c can be set. It is possible to make it difficult for the erroneous operation of 110c to occur.

In this embodiment, when the setting change operation is executed, the RAM clear switch 122 is always set to ON, so for example, while maintaining the state in which the variable probability state advantageous to the player is set Setting change operation cannot be performed. That is, the game state set after the setting change operation is executed becomes the initial state (normal state). Therefore, since the game conditions other than the difference in the big win probability based on the set value can be unified for the game executed after the setting change operation is performed, it is easy to provide the player with a fair game. can do.

<Regarding the effect content in the 24th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 758 to 760, the characteristic contents of the various effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-fourth control example will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-fourth control example, based on the combination of the display modes of the plurality of third symbols statically displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a voice effect is executed in which voice output is performed with different voice types. configured as possible. In addition, when the display position of the reserved pattern (first reserved pattern hr1 to fourth reserved pattern hr4 displayed in the display area HR2) displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is shifted and a pending shift presentation capable of suggesting whether or not the information includes jackpot information.

First, with reference to FIG. 758(a), an example of the effect at the start timing of the special symbol variation will be described. FIG. 758(a) is a diagram showing the third symbol at the start timing of the special symbol variation and the sound output from the speaker section 308. FIG. As shown in FIG. 758(a), in the twenty-fourth control example, the display mode of the third symbol used for the variable effect is the identification information for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, which is "number part (number icon) and a decorative character part (character icon). As a basic pattern, a basic third pattern is formed in which a different character icon is attached corresponding to each number part, Variation production using the basic third symbol is executed.

Specifically, the display mode of the basic third pattern will be described. A third pattern D1 with a character icon resembling an octopus is formed as the basic third pattern on the numeric icon "1", and the numeric icon "4". , a third pattern D4 with a character icon imitating a shark is formed as a basic third pattern. In addition, the display data of the basic third pattern is stored in advance in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114, and unless a dedicated command for using the special third pattern, which is a display mode other than the basic third pattern, is output. , a variable effect using the display mode of the basic third symbol is executed. With this configuration, the player can easily grasp the result of the special symbol lottery only by grasping the character icon displayed in a variable manner, so that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand presentation. can.

Here, in the twenty-fourth control example, instead of the basic third symbol, a special third symbol having a different combination of the type of the number icon and the type of the character icon can be variably displayed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 758(a), a special third pattern in which a character icon imitating an octopus is added to the number icon "3" can be displayed. By configuring in this way, the phenomenon that the type of the number icon (identification information for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery) cannot be grasped only by confirming the character icon attached to the variably displayed third symbol. can be generated, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected variation performance result.

Furthermore, in the twenty-fourth control example, a voice corresponding to the character icon type (character type) attached to the third symbol (basic third symbol, special third symbol) displayed on the display screen is generated. It is configured to be able to output, and is configured to be able to suggest to the player the character type attached to the third symbol to be stopped and displayed in the next variation using the voice. In addition, when the variable display using the special third symbol is executed, as shown in FIG. 758(a), the player is once notified of the display mode of the special third symbol, and then the variable effect is performed. is configured to start By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to predict the effect result of the suggestive effect executed by voice.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 758(a), when the variation performance is executed corresponding to the start of the special symbol variation, the third symbol corresponding to the previous special symbol variation is stopped and displayed. From the state where it is, the variable production is started. In this case, when the variable effect using the special third pattern is executed, as shown in the third pattern D3, a special third pattern with a character icon imitating a turtle attached to the number icon "3" is displayed. A variable production is executed in the displayed state. Then, from the speaker unit 308, as a suggestion effect for suggesting the stop display mode of the third pattern for indicating the effect result of the variable effect to be executed this time, "I wonder if Mr. Octopus will win next time, Mr. Turtle will go". Sound is output.

With this suggestive effect, the third pattern attached with the octopus character icon or the turtle character icon can be stopped and displayed as a stop display mode of the third pattern for showing the effect result of the variable effect to be executed this time. It is suggested to the player that the quality is high. The player can play the game while calculating (predicting) the possibility of stopping and displaying the third symbol indicating the winning of the jackpot by grasping the content of the voice output as the suggestive effect. Here, as described above, in the twenty-fourth control example, since the special third symbol is configured to be displayable, the content (character icon type that can be stopped and displayed) provided to the player by the above-described suggestive effect Based on this, it is possible to increase the number of stop display patterns of the third symbols that can be predicted, and the enjoyment of predicting future game contents (results of performance) for the player can be increased.

Furthermore, when the special third symbol is used, as shown in FIG. 758(a), before the variable effect is started, a notification effect that can notify the player that the special third symbol is used is provided. configured to be executable. Then, as a notification effect, at least a part of the display mode of the special third symbol that is actually used is configured to be able to be notified to the player. By configuring in this manner, the stop display pattern of the third symbol is predicted based on the content (character icon type that can be stopped and displayed) provided to the player by the suggestive effect, including the display mode of the special third symbol. Therefore, it is possible to easily improve the prediction accuracy.

In addition, in the diagram shown in FIG. 758(a), in order to show that the special third pattern is used, the display mode of the special third pattern that is actually used is configured to be displayable, but it is limited to this. Instead, a notification performance (for example, character display during character shuffling) only indicating that a variable performance using a special third pattern different from the basic third pattern is executed is executed. can be

Furthermore, the diagram shown in FIG. 758(a) shows an example in which one type of special third pattern is displayed, but two or more types of special third patterns may be used in one variation effect. . In this case, the display mode of the special third symbol used in one variable effect may be configured so that it can be notified to the player before the variable effect is started, or at least a part of it may be displayed to the player. may be configured to be notified to.

Further, in the twenty-fourth control example, whether or not to use the special third symbol, or the display mode of the special third symbol to be used is determined by the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10. Although it is configured to determine the special third symbol, it is not limited to this, and may be configured so that the player can generate the special third symbol in any combination.

Next, with reference to FIG. 758(b), another effect content using voice output will be described. Figure 758 (b) shows the voice effect to be executed during the next variation when the stop display mode of the third symbol indicating the result of the previous variation effect is a specific stop display mode (7 reach loss). It is a diagram. As described above, in the twenty-fourth control example, the voice effect using the sound corresponding to the character icon type (character type) attached to the third symbol stopped and displayed as a result of the previous variation effect is performed. It is configured so that it can be executed after the production is finished. Further, it is possible to provide the player with a privilege according to the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed as a result of the previous variable presentation by voice presentation.

Specifically, in FIG. 758(b), the character voice (7 reach character ) is set, while the variable effect is being executed, "Chara Voice 7 Chara" is displayed in the display area HR30 as a guidance mode for indicating the currently set voice data (character voice). is displayed. Then, from the speaker unit 308, a setting suggesting effect "Today's fortune is good luck", which is a privilege given to the player, is output as a sound effect corresponding to "7 out of reach".

By configuring in this way, even if the stop display mode of the third pattern stopped and displayed in the previous fluctuation production cannot be visually recognized due to the execution of the next fluctuation production, the character whose voice is being output It is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp which character icon the voice corresponds to.

Next, the state in which the third symbol for indicating the effect result of the variation effect executed corresponding to the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed continues, that is, the state in which the next special symbol lottery is not executed (standby state )) will be described with reference to FIG. 759(a). FIG. 759(a) is a diagram showing the contents of the voice effect executed during the standby state (during the demonstration effect). As shown in FIG. 759(a), as the effect result of the previous variable effect, a third pattern D1 in which a character icon imitating an octopus is attached to the number icon "1", and a shark is attached to the number icon "4". When a standby state is set in a state in which a third pattern D4 with a character icon and a third pattern D3 with a character icon resembling a turtle attached to the number icon "3" are stopped and displayed, normal If so, the character corresponding to the character type attached to the third symbol D1 stopped in the symbol row on the left side (the first symbol row that is stopped and displayed) among the three third symbols that are stopped and displayed. A voice (voice data) is used to perform an audio presentation during the standby state. In this way, the voice data of the sound output during the standby state is changed according to the type of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed (the third symbol that is stopped and displayed to indicate the effect result of the previous variable effect). Since it can be made different, various effects (voice effects) can be executed for the player, and the effects of the effects can be enhanced.

In the twenty-fourth control example, as described above, the type of voice data used for the sound effect to be executed can be changed according to the type of character added to the third symbol that is stopped and displayed. ing. In order to prevent the type of voice data from being switched each time the third pattern is stopped and displayed, the voice data used for voice output can be fixed until a predetermined condition is met. Specifically, when the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the jackpot is won, voice output using the voice data of the character type corresponding to the third symbol is displayed, and then the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. It is configured so that it can continue to be executed until the In other words, when the third symbol is statically displayed in a display mode indicating winning of a jackpot, the same voice data is continued as a benefit different from when the third symbol is statically displayed in a display mode other than winning a jackpot. It is configured to be able to give a privilege that can be output by

By configuring in this way, the player can play the game while anticipating a big win with the third symbol to which the player's desired favorite character type is attached. In addition, it is possible to prevent the voice data from being switched each time the special symbol lottery is executed, and the performance effect from being lowered due to the execution of the voice performance without uniformity.

As shown in FIG. 759(b), when the voice data is fixed, the display mode for showing the currently set voice data in the display area HR30 on the right side of the main display area Dm is "Chara Voice 7". "Character" is displayed, and in the display area HR31 formed above it, a display mode of "Voice fixed" is displayed to indicate that the voice data is fixed. As a result, the player can easily understand that the voice data currently corresponding to "7 characters" is fixed.

Further, in the display area HR32, a button icon imitating the effect button 22 is displayed as a display mode for guiding a game method (operation method) for canceling the fixed state of the voice data. You can release the fixed voice by pressing it." is displayed. As a result, the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the voice output based on the currently fixed voice data can be canceled.

In the example shown in FIG. 759(b), a jackpot is won with the third symbol corresponding to 7 characters, and since the voice data of "7 characters" is fixed, a special symbol lottery is executed multiple times after the jackpot game ends. , As the effect result of the previous variable effect, a third pattern D1 in which a character icon imitating an octopus is added to the number icon "1", and a third pattern D1 in which a character icon imitating a shark is added to the number icon "4". Even if the standby state is set in a state in which D4 and the third symbol D3 with a character icon resembling a turtle attached to the number icon "3" are stopped, " A voice effect using the voice data of "7 characters" is executed.

Although the details will be described later, in this control example, when a voice effect using "7 character voices" is executed, a setting suggestion effect capable of suggesting the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10 as a privilege is executed. Since it is configured to be possible, the setting suggesting effect may be executed in part of the audio effect executed during the standby state. When the setting suggesting effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 759(b), the speaker unit 308 outputs a voice saying "Today's fortune is good luck" in the same manner as in the example shown in FIG. 758(b). and informs the player that the set value is advantageous to the player.

Thus, in the twenty-fourth control example, not only is the voice effect executed with different voice data according to the stop display mode of the third symbol, but also a special privilege is given according to the type of the stop display mode of the third symbol. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect according to the display mode of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 760, of the effects (prefetching effects) using the reserved symbols in the twenty-fourth control example, a chance effect at the time of holding shift executed when the display position of the reserved symbols shifts (shifts). I will explain the contents of the production. FIG. 760(a) shows a screen (a pending change sign display screen) in which a pending symbol to be executed for the pending change effect is displayed in the display area HR2, and is displayed in a state where the special symbol variation is being executed. FIG. 760(b) is a screen (a pending change sign display screen) in which a pending symbol to be executed for the pending change effect is displayed in the display area HR2. 760(c) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed in a state where special symbol variation is not executed (a state in which special symbols are stopped and displayed), and FIG. FIG. 760(d) is a diagram showing an example of a chance effect at the time of holding shift that is executed when the display position of the pending symbol shifts the display position, and FIG. is a diagram showing an example of a chance effect at the time of holding shift, which is executed when shifting .

In the 22nd control example described above, until the pending change effect is executed, the pending symbol is displayed so that it is difficult for the player to grasp the pending symbol that is the target of the pending change effect. The display mode is the same as the display mode of the reserved pattern which is not subject to the pending change effect. On the other hand, in the twenty-fourth control example, the pending symbol to be the target of the pending change effect is displayed in a dedicated display mode (prediction) so that the player can identify it before the pending change effect is executed. display mode) can be set.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 760(a), similar to the 22nd control example described above, normal reserved symbols are colored display modes (first reserved symbol hr1, second reserved symbol hr2, fourth Although it is displayed in the reserved pattern hr4), for the reserved pattern that is the target of the reserved change effect, as a display mode different from the normal display mode, as shown in the third reserved pattern hr3, a spiral display mode It is configured to be displayed in (precursor display mode). By configuring in this way, it is possible to suggest to the player that the pending change performance may be executed before the pending change performance is executed, so that the performance effect can be enhanced. .

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 760(a), the precursor display mode is rotated clockwise while the special symbol variation is being executed, that is, while the display position of the reserved symbol does not shift. It is configured as follows. By dynamically displaying (rotating) the precursor display mode in this manner, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the difference from the normal reserved symbols that are statically displayed (stopped display).

Then, as shown in FIG. 760(b), the special symbol variation being executed is stopped and displayed, and a new special symbol variation (special symbol variation using the reserved information (winning information) corresponding to the first reserved symbol hr1). is executed, similarly to the 22nd control example described above, the display position of each reserved design is shifted (the first reserved design hr1 is displayed in the display area HR1 (see FIG. 672 ), and then the display position of each reserved symbol displayed in the display area HR2 is shifted to the left by one) effect is executed.

Here, since the variation time of the special symbol variation is configured so that various variation times are set according to the result of the special symbol lottery, the display of the omen pending symbol at the timing when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed. An event occurs that changes the mode. Specifically, if the display mode in which the precursor display mode is dynamically displayed from the first mode to the first mode through the second mode is repeatedly executed, at the timing when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, The omen pending symbol may be displayed in the first mode or may be displayed in the second mode.

In the twenty-fourth control example, the sign pending symbol to which the sign display mode dynamically (rotationally) displayed is statically (stopped) displayed at the stop display timing of the special symbol variation. Specifically, the dynamically displayed precursor display mode is configured to be displayed in a predetermined initial stop mode (first mode). Then, in the case of executing the effect of shifting the reserved pattern, it is possible to set the effect pattern in which various action effects are executed from the state of the initial stop mode (first mode) with respect to the reserved symbol of the omen display mode. It consists of

By configuring in this way, the production pattern set when executing the shift production of the reserved pattern can be only the production pattern started from the initial stop mode, so that the sign at the time of shifting to the shift of the reserved pattern Compared with the case where the effect pattern is provided corresponding to the dynamic position (operation position) of the display mode, the number of effect patterns can be reduced.

Although a detailed description will be given later, in the twenty-fourth control example, it is configured to be able to execute the chance effect during the pending shift when the omen pending pattern shifts to the shift. It is configured to be able to suggest to the player the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot and the set value according to the type. That is, the player pays more attention to the pending portent symbol at the timing when the porting pending symbol shifts than at the timing when the dynamically displayed porting pending symbol is stopped and displayed. Therefore, even if it is forcibly stopped and displayed in the initial stop mode (first mode) regardless of the mode in which the omen pending symbols are displayed at the timing when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, the player will feel uncomfortable. It can be difficult to give.

In the twenty-fourth control example, when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, the omen suspended symbol is forced to be in the initial stop mode regardless of the display mode of the omen reserved symbol at the timing when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed. It is configured to be stopped and displayed, and when the omen pending pattern shifts to the shift, it is configured to set a production pattern that starts from the initial stop mode, but is not limited to this, for example, the initial stop mode. At least two types of stop modes (first initial stop mode, second initial stop mode) can be set, and based on the display mode of the omen pending symbol at the timing when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, any An initial stop mode is configured to be set, and a performance pattern started from a first initial stop mode and a performance started from a second initial stop mode are performed when an omen pending pattern shifts to a shift. The pattern may be configured so as to be settable. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel a sense of incongruity even when the dynamically displayed omen pending symbol is stopped and displayed.

Furthermore, in the period from immediately before the special symbol fluctuation is stopped and displayed until the omen pending symbol is shift-shifted (for example, the fixed display period of the special symbol), the omen pending symbol being dynamically displayed is in the initial stop mode. When it is determined that the symbol is displayed in the first mode corresponding to , the omen pending symbol may be stopped and displayed. In other words, by shifting the stop display timing of the special symbol variation and the stop display timing of the omen pending symbol, the dynamic display of the omen pending symbol may be terminated without discomfort. In this case, the dynamic display period of the omen pending symbol (the period from the first mode to dynamic display until the first mode again) should be shorter than the fixed display period of the special symbol. . By configuring in this way, it is possible to stop and display the omen pending symbol in the first mode without discomfort during the period in which the special symbol is fixedly displayed.

FIG. 760(c) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen in the vicinity of the display area HR2 when "jump" is set as the effect mode of the chance effect during reserved shift. As shown in FIG. 760(c), when the holding shift chance effect is executed, only the omen pending symbol shifts in a different effect mode (dynamic display mode) from the other pending symbols. FIG. 760(c) shows an effect mode in which the third reserved symbol hr3, which is an omen reserved symbol, pops out above the display area HR2 and then moves to the shift destination display position. In other words, only the omen reserved symbol shows a performance mode in which the moving distance is longer than the other reserved symbols. Therefore, when "jump" is set as the effect mode of the chance effect during the pending shift, while the omen pending symbol is moving outside the display area HR2, the other pending symbols are shifted to the display position ( display area) is completed, and then an effect is executed in which the omen pending symbol is shifted to the shift destination display position (display area).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to differentiate the timing at which the shift transition of the display position (display area) is completed between the normal pending symbol and the portent pending symbol. It is possible to make the player pay more attention to the production mode of. In addition, the timing of completion of the shift transition of the display position (display area) is delayed in the portent pending symbol as compared with the normal pending symbol. That is, since the period required for the omen pending pattern to shift to the shift is configured to be longer than the period required for the normal suspended pattern to shift to the shift, the performance period of the chance performance during the pending shift is made longer. can do.

Next, FIG. 760(d) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen in the vicinity of the display area HR2 when "high speed" is set as the presentation mode of the chance presentation during the holding shift. As shown in FIG. 760(d), when the holding shift chance effect is executed, only the omen pending symbol shifts in a different effect mode (dynamic display mode) from the other pending symbols. FIG. 760(d) shows an effect mode in which the third reserved design hr3, which is an omen reserved design, moves to the display position after the shift earlier than other normal reserved designs. Therefore, when "high speed" is set as the production mode of the chance production at the time of holding shift, the omen holding pattern is shifted to the display position (display area) of the shift destination, so that (at least part of) a plurality of (two) reserved symbols are temporarily displayed in the same display position (display area). . By configuring in this way, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort and enhance the performance effect.

The display mode of the omen pending symbol in the twenty-fourth control example may be applied to the twenty-second control example described above. By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player of the pending symbol to be the target of the pending change effect in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in the twenty-fourth control example, as in the twenty-second control example described above, without using the omen pending symbol, at the timing of executing the shift chance effect, only the target pending symbol is used as the effect mode when shifting to the shift. 760(c) and FIG. 760(d) may be configured so as to be settable. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect.

In addition, in the twenty-fourth control example, only the omen pending symbol is configured to be able to execute the shift chance effect. It may be configured such that other reserved symbols are also shifted to the shift by using the effect mode of . By configuring in this way, it is possible to set a production mode ("jump", "high speed") different from usual for the plurality of reserved symbols displayed in the display area HR2, so that the player can It is possible to notify in an easy-to-understand manner that the shift-time chance presentation has been executed.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the twenty-fourth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 761, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-fourth control example will be described. FIG. 761 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 761, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-fourth control example is different from the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-second control example (see FIG. 687). A setting value display device 110a, a setting switch 110c, and a setting key 110b are connected to an input/output port 205 connected to the MPU 201 via a bus line 204. The difference is that the process of changing the set value based on the output signal and the process of displaying the set value are executed. The contents of various operations using the setting keys 110b and setting switches 110c and the contents displayed on the setting value display device 110a have been described above with reference to FIG. 757, so description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 762, the electrical configuration of the audio output device 226 in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-fourth control example will be described. FIG. 762 is a block diagram simply showing the electrical configuration of the audio output device 226. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 762, the audio output device 226 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 so that data can be transmitted and received.

As shown in FIG. 762, the audio output device 226 is equipped with an MPU 301 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 301 has a ROM 302 that stores various control programs and fixed value data (voice data) to be executed by the MPU 301, and temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 302. A RAM 203, which is a memory for

The MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 is electrically connected to the input/output port 305 and the audio synthesizing section 306 . When a command specifying audio data is received from the audio lamp controller 113 to the audio output device 226 , the command is input to the MPU 301 via the input/output port 305 . Also, the audio data specified by the audio lamp control device 113 is read from the ROM 302 and output to the channel corresponding to the audio type of the audio synthesizing section 306 .

The voice synthesizing unit 306 is composed of a known voice synthesizing LSI that synthesizes voice data input to each channel and outputs the synthesized voice data to the amplifier unit 307 . Synthesized speech data is amplified by amplifier section 307 and input to speaker section 308 . As a result, various sounds designated by the sound lamp control device 113 can be output from the speaker unit 308 . In addition, in the twenty-fourth control example, the synthesized speech data generated by the speech synthesizing section 306 is input not only to the amplifier section 307 but also to the ADC 309 configured by a known AC-DC converter. The ADC 309 is configured to convert synthesized speech data, which is analog data, into digital data and output the digital data to the MPU 301 .

More specifically, the ADC 309 has at least comparators 309a1 to 309a15 and a decoding section 309b. Each comparator 309a1-309a15 can determine whether or not the amplitude (voltage) of the received analog data is greater than the voltage corresponding to each comparator 309a1-309a15. The voltage corresponding to each of the comparators 309a1 to 309a15 is set by 1 volt in the range from 7 volts to -7 volts. Each of the comparators 309a1 to 309a15 outputs L when the voltage value of the synthesized speech data is larger than the corresponding voltage value, and outputs H when the synthesized speech data is smaller.

The decoding unit 309b identifies the range of voltage values of the current synthetic speech data from the combination of the outputs of the comparators 309a1 to 309a15, and converts it into a 4-bit digital value. That is, the digital values are converted into digital values from "0000B" to "1111B" in descending order of voltage. Specifically, for example, when the voltage value of the synthesized voice data is greater than 7 volts, "1111B" is output as the digital value. Also, for example, when the voltage value of the synthesized speech data is greater than 3 volts and less than or equal to 4 volts, "1011B" is output as the digital value.

The MPU 301 samples the synthesized audio data output from the ADC 309 over a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds) and outputs the average value (average amplitude) to the audio ramp controller 113. It is configured. The audio ramp controller 113 identifies the corresponding vibration strength (DUTY ratio) from the received average amplitude. Then, an operation command for driving a vibration imparting motor (not shown) among the drive motors 770 connected to the input/output port 225 of the sound lamp control device 113 with the specified vibration intensity (DUTY ratio) is issued. Set for the motor control IC. As a result, since the vibration intensity can be varied in accordance with the sound output from the speaker unit 308, it is possible to provide a realistic effect.

In the twenty-fourth control example, the digital value output from the ADC 309 is output to the MPU 301. However, by outputting the digital value directly to the input/output port 305, the digital value can be directly sent to the sound lamp control device 113. may be configured to output Then, when executing a variable effect accompanied by a vibration effect, the audio ramp control device 113 is configured to sample digital values over a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds) to calculate an average amplitude. may be Then, the vibration intensity (DUTY ratio) corresponding to the calculated average amplitude may be notified to the motor control IC by an operation command. Thereby, the processing load of the MPU 301 can be reduced.

In the twenty-fourth control example, the synthetic voice data is converted into the average value of the absolute values of the amplitude, and the vibration intensity (DUTY ratio) is specified based on the average value, but it is not limited to this. do not have. For example, the maximum absolute value in a predetermined sampling period (for example, 0.1 second) may be output from the audio output device 226 to the audio ramp control device 113, or the effective value (maximum amplitude A value obtained by dividing the value by the square root of 2) may be calculated and output from the audio output device 226 to the audio lamp control device 113 .

Further, the type of the operation command for driving the vibration imparting motor may be variably set in correspondence with the voice command output from the voice lamp control device 113. For example, voice data of a high range may be set. When the voice command for specifying is set, the vibration intensity corresponding to the short amplitude is set as the operation command, and when the voice command for specifying the voice data in the low range is set, the long It may be configured to set the vibration intensity according to the amplitude as the operation command.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a clearer difference in the voice output executed by making the types of voice data different.

Next, with reference to FIG. 763, the contents of the special symbol jackpot random number table 202xa in the configuration of the ROM 202 possessed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the twenty-fourth control example will be described. The ROM 202 possessed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-fourth control example determines whether or not the special symbol lottery The difference is that the data table referred to when determining the judgment (jackpot judgment) is different, and the rest is the same. Detailed descriptions of the same elements are omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 763, the contents defined in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202xa will be described. This special symbol jackpot random number table 202xa is a data table that is referred to when a special symbol lottery is executed. Defined for each value. FIG. 763 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a.

As shown in FIG. 763, 250 of "0 to 249" are set for the set value "1" as a random number value (counter value) determined as a special symbol jackpot in the special symbol low probability state, 275 items of "0 to 274" are set for the set value "2", and 300 items of "0 to 299" are set for the set value "3". On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 763, as a random number (counter value) that is determined to be a special symbol jackpot in the variable probability game state (special game state), 1000 of "0 to 999" for the set value "1" 1,100 from "0 to 1099" are set for the set value "2", and 1,200 from "0 to 1199" are set for the set value "3".

In this 24th control example, since the value that the first hit random number counter can take is 65536 kinds of "0 to 65535", the setting "1" is set, and the special symbol low probability state , the probability of winning a jackpot (jackpot probability) is about 1/262, and the jackpot probability is about 1/65 in the high-probability state of special symbols. Further, when the setting "2" is set, the probability of big win is about 1/238 in the low probability state of special symbols, and the probability of big win is about 1/60 in the high probability state of special symbols. In addition, when setting "3" is set, the probability of big win is about 1/218 in the low probability state of special symbols, and the probability of big win is about 1/55 in the high probability state of special symbols.

Therefore, setting "1" is a setting value (disadvantageous setting value) that makes it most difficult to win a big win, and setting "3" is a setting value (advantageous setting value) that makes it most likely to win a big win. And, as described above, in the twenty-fourth control example, regardless of which set value is set, the jackpot probability in the special symbol high probability state is higher than the jackpot probability in the special symbol low probability state. It is configured to be four times as large. That is, regardless of which setting value is set, when the transition from the low probability state of the special design to the high probability state of the special design, the same privilege (privilege for making it easier to win the jackpot) is configured to provide to the player. By constructing in this way, in the pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to set the set values in a plurality of stages, the privilege given when the probability state of the special symbols is switched can be made uniform regardless of the set values. , it is possible to prevent the game content from being excessively different depending on the set value.

In addition, depending on the setting value, it is possible to change the content of the privilege to be given when the special symbol low probability state transitions to the special symbol high probability state. ” may be configured to increase the degree of variation of the probability of a big win in the case of shifting from a low-probability state of special symbols to a high-probability state of special symbols. The jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special pattern is quadrupled against the jackpot probability in the low probability state, and in the case of setting "3", in the high probability state of the special pattern against the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special pattern It may be configured such that the probability of a big win is six times. With this configuration, the degree of advantage of the setting "3", which is the advantageous setting, relative to the setting "1", which is the disadvantageous setting, can be increased. The pachinko machine 10 that is in use can be made to play a game with motivation.

In the twenty-fourth control example, the set values provided in the pachinko machine 10 are set to three stages, but without being limited to this, the set values may be set to two stages, or set to four stages or more (for example, six stages). can be Furthermore, in the twenty-fourth control example, the setting difference is provided in the special symbol jackpot probability, but not limited to this, for example, the setting probability of the jackpot probability, the small hit probability, the definite variable state, and the period during which the definite variable state continues Alternatively, it may be configured to provide a setting difference for various elements capable of varying the degree of advantage of the game, such as the game contents of the jackpot game. Even in such a case, it is possible to provide different degrees of advantage to the player according to the setting values that are set. It is possible to motivate the player to play the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 764, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-fourth control example will be described. FIG. 764 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 764, the RAM 203 in the twenty-fourth control example differs from the RAM 203 in the twenty-second control example (see FIG. 689(b)) in that a set value storage area 203xa is added. are otherwise identical. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The set value storage area 203xa is a storage area for storing data corresponding to the set values of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. More specifically, if "00H" is stored as data in the set value storage area 203xa, it indicates that the set value "1" is set, and if "01H" is stored as data, This indicates that the set value "2" is set, and if "02H" is stored as data, it indicates that the set value "3" is set. When the special symbol lottery is executed, the data in the set value storage area 203xa is read out, and the special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) is executed with the lottery probability corresponding to the set value indicated by the read data. That is, among the special symbol big hit random number table 202xa (see FIG. 763), the range of random numbers corresponding to the set values indicated by the data in the set value storage area 203xa and the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area. A lottery for special symbols is executed by comparing the values. The initial value of the setting value storage area 203xa is set to "00H", and each time the setting switch 110c is pressed (operated) in the setting change state, the value changes from "01H" to "02H" and "01H". , and when the setting switch 110c is further pressed while the data is "02H", the data is updated to "01H". When the RAM clear switch 122 is pressed and the power is turned on, all data in the RAM 203 are reset (cleared) to initial values. Therefore, when only the RAM clear operation is performed, the value of the set value storage area 203g is also reset to the initial value "00H". That is, even if only the RAM clear operation is performed without executing the setting change operation, the setting can be changed to 1. Thereby, the convenience of the hall can be improved.

Next, referring to FIG. 765, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the twenty-fourth control example will be described. FIG. 765 is a diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the twenty-fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 765, the ROM 222 possessed by the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-fourth control example is the ROM 222 possessed by the sound ramp control device 113 of the twenty-second control example described above (see FIG. 693(a)). , except that a voice command selection table 222xa and a pending action selection table 222xb are added. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The voice command selection table 222xa is a data table referred to when selecting the voice type corresponding to the character of the third design displayed on the display screen of the third design display device 81. FIG. In the twenty-fourth control example, as the type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, one of the seven number icons "1" to "7" corresponding to the result of the special symbol lottery, and seven types. characters ("1 character" to "7 characters") are displayed in a stopped manner.

Basically, the number icon "1" and the character "1 character" are combined to form the "first and third pattern", and the number icon "2" and the character "2 character" are combined to form the "third pattern". The 2nd 3rd pattern” is a combination of the number icon 3 and the character 3 character, and the 3rd 3rd pattern is a combination of the number icon 4 and the character 4 character. The "fourth third pattern" is a combination of the number icon "5" and the character "5 characters", and the "fifth third pattern" is a combination of the number icon "6" and the character "6 characters". Thus, the "sixth third pattern" is formed by combining the number icon "7" and the character "seven characters" to form the "seventh third pattern".

Furthermore, the combination change condition of the third symbol (for example, the change condition that is established when the number of special symbol fluctuations reaches a predetermined number (500 times), and the number of times that the jackpot wins reach a predetermined number of times (5 times) If a change condition, etc., is established, a special third pattern can be formed in which different types of characters are combined with the numeric icons forming the third pattern.

In the twenty-fourth control example, the voice data corresponding to the character type can be used for the voice output from the voice output device 226 regardless of the type of the number icon of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed. there is By configuring in this way, every time a special symbol lottery is executed (every time a game is executed), sound using voice data of a different type is output from the pachinko machine 10, so that the player can enjoy the game. It is possible to prevent premature boredom.

Furthermore, in the twenty-fourth control example, according to the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (combination of character types), a special benefit can be given. Specifically, when the third symbol indicating the winning of the jackpot is stopped and displayed, whether or not the game is played while the voice output based on the voice data corresponding to the character type associated with the third symbol is continued. It is possible to give a privilege that the player can select, and when the third pattern is stopped and displayed in a specific combination (for example, reach loss) on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, it will be in that reach state. A setting suggestion in which a line capable of suggesting a setting value ("1" to "3") set in the pachinko machine 10 is issued by voice based on voice data corresponding to the character type attached to the third symbol. It is configured so that a privilege can be given.

By constructing in this manner, the result of the special symbol lottery while expecting that a privilege other than the winning prize will be granted to the player who has been paying attention only to the fact that the result of the special symbol lottery is the big win. (The stationary display mode of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81) can be gazed at. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

In addition, in the twenty-fourth control example, as the third pattern displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, the special third pattern in which the type of the number icon and the type of character are different from those of the normal ones is stopped. Configured to be visible. Furthermore, it is configured to be able to output by voice a line that can suggest a character associated with the third symbol that is statically displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 .

In other words, while the player can predict the type of the third symbol that will be stopped and displayed next based on the speech output by voice, the type of the number icon and the type of the character are usually set as the third symbol. Since it is configured to be able to display a special third pattern that is different from, for example, a third pattern corresponding to the number icon "1" and a third pattern corresponding to the number icon "3" for "1 character" , the third symbol corresponding to the number icon "1" is displayed to the player when the dialogue suggesting that the "1 character" is stopped is output. It is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting whether the third symbol corresponding to the number icon "3" will be displayed or stopped.

Here, with reference to FIG. 766, the contents of the voice command selection table 222xa, which is a data table referred to when determining voice data in the twenty-fourth control example, will be described. FIG. 766 shows the contents defined in the voice command selection table 222xa.

The voice command selection table 222xa corresponds to the stop display mode of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed in the stop command process 24 (see F2273 in FIG. 777) that is executed when the third symbol is stopped and displayed. It is referred to when determining a voice command (see F2672 in FIG. 777). As shown in FIG. 766, voice commands for specifying voice data corresponding to each character type are defined according to the character type associated with the stopped third symbol. In addition, a privilege according to the combination of the character types attached to the stopped third symbol is also defined.

When the voice command is determined by referring to the voice command selection table 222xa, the voice command for voice corresponding to the determined voice command is output to the voice output device 226. FIG. Then, the voice output device 226 specifies corresponding voice data based on the received voice command, and outputs common voice for game using the specified voice data. In other words, it is possible to change only the voice data of the sound that is always output from the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, when the voice command received by the voice output device 226 contains information indicating a specific line output, the corresponding line data is read and the received line is output using the received voice data. is configured to be possible. By constructing in this way, only the voice data of the sound output from the pachinko machine 10 is changed according to the stop display mode (character type) of the third pattern stopped and displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. Since it is also possible to output dedicated lines instead of the lines, it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

In addition, in the twenty-fourth control example, since lines that can suggest information advantageous to the player (for example, set value information) are included as lines dedicated to specific voice commands, various voice data can be voiced. In addition to the improvement of the production effect due to the output, it is possible to give a privilege advantageous to the player, so that the player can be interested in the change of the voice data.

Next, the contents defined in voice command selection table 222xa will be described in detail with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 766, the voice command selection table 222xa includes, as the third symbol types stopped and displayed, a third symbol type indicating jackpot winning, a third symbol type indicating reach-losing, and a complete loss (discrete eyes). and a third symbol type indicating . For each of the roughly classified third symbol types, a voice corresponding to the third symbol type (character type) actually stopped and displayed is defined.

Specifically, when the third symbol type is "big hit", that is, when three identical number icons are displayed side by side and stop-displayed, the character attached to the stopped-displayed third symbol is "one character". ”, a voice command “command 1” for specifying the selected voice “1 character” is specified, and the character attached to the third symbol that is stopped and displayed is “2 characters”. , a voice command "Command 2" for specifying the selected voice "2 characters" is defined, and the character attached to the third symbol that is stopped and displayed is the selected voice "3 characters". A voice command "command 3" for specifying "3 characters" is defined, and the character attached to the third symbol that is stopped and displayed is "4 characters", and the selected voice "4 characters" is specified. A voice command "command 4" for specifying is specified, and the character attached to the third symbol that is stopped and displayed is "5 characters", and the selected voice "5 characters" is specified. A voice command "command 5" is defined, and a voice command "command 6" is defined, and the character attached to the third symbol that is stopped and displayed is "7 character", and the voice command "command 7" for specifying the selected voice "7 character" is defined. It is

Then, when the third symbol type is "jackpot", as a special privilege to be granted, a special privilege that allows continuous setting of the set voice data is defined. In other words, when a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery, voice data corresponding to the character attached to the jackpot pattern is used to output voice regarding subsequent games (games during the jackpot and games after the jackpot game is over). It is configured so that In the twenty-fourth control example, the voice output using the same voice data is continued until the next big win is won. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the voice data corresponding to the favorite character from being immediately specified, even though the voice data corresponding to the favorite character is specified.

In addition, in the twenty-fourth control example, since the privilege of continuing the voice output corresponding to the specific voice data can be given when the jackpot is won, various game voices can be voiced to the favorite character. A player who desires data output can continue to play while expecting a big win display with a third pattern to which a specific character type is assigned.

In addition, in the 24th control example, the audio output using the voice data specified based on the jackpot winning (stop display of the jackpot pattern) is configured to continue until the next jackpot winning, but it is limited to this. Instead, the player may operate the operation means (for example, the effect button 22) to clear the special privilege provided based on the winning of the big win. With this configuration, even if the third symbol attached with the character specifying the voice data that the player does not desire is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the winning of the jackpot, the third symbol is based on the voice data. It is possible to prevent the sound output from continuing for a long time.

Furthermore, in the twenty-fourth control example, by constructing so that the voice output using the voice data specified based on the winning of the jackpot (stop display of the jackpot pattern) is continued until the next winning of the jackpot, it is possible to make the favorite character It is intended to make it easier for the player to continue playing the game until the corresponding voice data is specified, but it is not limited to this, for example, based on the number of times the jackpot has been won or the game time (the number of times of special symbol lottery). In addition, the player may arbitrarily select the character type attached to the third symbol that is stopped and displayed when the jackpot is won. By constructing in this manner, the third pattern with the favorite character is not stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the winning of the jackpot even though the player has played the game for a long time and won the jackpot many times. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the desire to play the game.

Next, as the third symbol type, "reach loss", that is, among the plurality of third symbols stopped and displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, some of the third symbols are stopped in a combination indicating a jackpot winning. After the displayed state (reach state) is displayed, if the remaining third symbols are stopped and displayed in a display mode different from the combination indicating the winning of the jackpot, the third symbol displayed in the reach state is attached. A voice command "command 8" for specifying the selected voice "reach character (7 characters)" is defined for "7 characters", and the third symbol displayed in the reach state Voice for specifying the selected voice "Reach character (1 character, 3 characters, 5 characters)" for "odd number characters excluding 7 (1 character, 3 characters, 5 characters)" Commands "command 9" to "command 11" are defined, and the characters attached to the third symbol displayed in the reach state are "even characters (2 characters, 4 characters, 6 characters)" , voice commands "command 12" to "command 14" for specifying the selected voice "reach characters (2 characters, 4 characters, 6 characters)" are defined.

Then, when the third symbol type is "reach lost", information is stipulated that a dialogue output (conversation dialogue) capable of suggesting the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10 can be given as a special privilege. Here, although detailed description is omitted, in the twenty-fourth control example, the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot is varied according to the type of the third symbol in the ready-to-win state, and the number icon "7" is attached. When ``7 ready-to-win'' is established in which the drawn third pattern is in a ready-to-reach state, the degree of expectation for winning a big win is higher than when other third patterns are in a ready-to-reach state. Specifically, it is configured so that about 90% of the time when "7 reach" is established, a jackpot is won.

By constructing in this way, it is possible for the player to predict the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot before all the third symbols are stop-displayed according to the type of the third symbols in the ready-to-win state. . Moreover, even when the variable performance (ready-to-win performance) of the same performance mode is executed, it is possible to vary the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot according to the type of the third pattern in the ready-to-win state. Therefore, it is possible to provide variable performances with different degrees of expectation for big wins using the same performance mode, so that the amount of image data (ready-to-win video data) used for variable performances can be reduced.

In the pachinko machine 10 constructed as described above, after the ready-to-win state (7 ready-to-win state) is displayed by the type of the third pattern with high expectation of winning the jackpot, the third pattern is stop-displayed in the display mode indicating the winning off. When the game is won, that is, when the player loses and wins despite the execution of the variable performance with a high expectation of winning the jackpot, there is a problem that the player's willingness to play the game is remarkably lowered.

On the other hand, in the twenty-fourth control example, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the third symbols (7 reach losing) which is stopped and displayed in the event of a winning win despite the fact that the expectation of winning the jackpot is high. In this case, it is configured to be able to provide the player with a benefit (setting suggestion) different from the winning of the jackpot. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from significantly decreasing.

In addition, in this 24th control example, according to the type of the 3rd pattern when the 3rd pattern is stopped and displayed in the combination indicating the jackpot winning, the set jackpot type (normal (time-saving) jackpot, probability variable jackpot) is set. It is configured to be able to suggest to the player, and when the type of the third symbol stopped and displayed is the number icon "odd number (1, 3, 5, 7)", the number icon "even number (2, 4)" is better. , 6)”, so that the possibility of winning a jackpot (probability variable jackpot) advantageous to the player is increased.

Therefore, in the case where the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the third symbol display device 81 in a combination indicating that the reach is lost, the reach state of the number icon "odd number" becomes the reach loss, and the reach state of the number icon "even number" is changed. The degree of decrease in the player's willingness to play differs between when the reach is lost and when the game is lost.

Here, in the twenty-fourth control example, the content of the special privilege given when the stopped and displayed third symbol type is "reach-losing" differs depending on the type of the third symbol that is "reach-losing". The higher the degree of decrease in the player's desire to play when the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode of "ready-to-lose", that is, the higher the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot is, the higher is the ready-to-win state. It is constructed so that a special privilege that is advantageous to the player is given to the player who wins the prize or loses the win in the ready-to-reach state of the third pattern in which the player is likely to be given a privilege when the jackpot is won. .

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 766, when the object of "reach loss" is "7 reach", the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10 is clearly indicated as "setting suggestion strong". A special privilege that can execute voice output (see FIG. 758(b)) is specified, and if the target of "reach loss" is "odd number reach other than 7", the setting set in the pachinko machine 10 A special privilege that can execute voice output of "weak setting suggestion" that can suggest a value is specified, and if the target of "reach loss" is "even number reach", the setting set in the pachinko machine 10 A special privilege is defined that allows for a lively audio output with no suggested value.

By configuring in this way, the player can not only know whether or not the third symbol stopped and displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is in a display mode indicating a big win, but also which third symbol. Since it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not the symbol type was stopped and displayed, it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game. In addition, since the stop display mode of the third symbols that can give a special benefit advantageous to the player is defined as "ready-to-miss", for example, regardless of the stop display mode of the third symbols, all the third symbols are stopped. At the displayed timing, in the case where the special privilege (setting suggestion) can be granted with a predetermined probability, the fact that the special privilege can be granted is indicated before the special privilege is granted (the reach state is Since the player can be made aware of the information given as the special privilege, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player fails to grasp the information given as the special privilege due to the sudden award of the special privilege. .

In addition, as a stop display mode of the third pattern that can give a special privilege advantageous to the player, "Reach Loss" is defined. It is possible to make it easier to give a special benefit when the prize is not won (when the prize is lost). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player's desire to play is excessively lowered.

In addition, in this 24th control example, "reach loss" is defined as a general classification of the third symbol type, and the contents of the special benefits given according to the third symbol type (reach type) in the reach state are different. In addition to this configuration, according to the type of the final stop 3rd pattern in the case of "reach loss", the 3rd pattern type is further subdivided, and the contents of the special benefits to be given It may be configured to be different.

In this case, for example, the reach state of the same type (for example, "5 reach") and the final stop third symbol is close to the third symbol "5" which is the reach state (for example, "4" or "6 ”), a special privilege advantageous to the player is more likely to be given than when the third symbol “5”, which is the ready-to-win state, is not close (for example, “1” or “2”). Good to configure.

That is, in the pachinko machine 10 in recent years, in the ready-to-win effect executed when the third pattern in the variable display is in the ready-to-win state, when the ready-to-win effect with high expectation of winning the jackpot (high reach effect) is executed Immediately before the performance result indicating whether or not to win the big win is displayed, the ready-to-win state is provided to prompt the player whether or not the third symbol combination ("555") corresponding to the winning of the big win will be stop-displayed. , and the third patterns ``4'' and ``6'' displayed before and after the third pattern ``5'' and the third patterns ``4'' and ``6'' displayed before and after the third pattern ``4'' and ``6'' are displayed in a stopped manner. When a ready-to-win performance with a low degree of winning expectation (low-to-win performance) is executed, the final stop third symbol at the time of ready-to-win failure is set to a ready-to-win state in order to suppress the player's excessive expectation of winning a big win. It is common to configure the pattern so as to be greatly different from the third pattern.

Therefore, by subdividing and defining "reach losing" defined as the third symbol type into "reach losing (1 frame)" and "reach losing (other than that)", the reach performance with high expectation of winning the jackpot is achieved. It is possible to make it easy to grant a special privilege when the prize is lost despite being executed.

In addition, in the twenty-fourth control example, the voice command is determined by referring to the voice command selection table 222xa shown in FIG. 766 regardless of the game state that has been set. Instead, the contents of the voice command selection table 222xa may be defined so that different voice commands are determined according to the set game state. In this case, for example, if the pachinko machine 10 has a different probability of establishing a ready-to-win state according to the set game state, it is better to set a game state in which the ready-to-win state is difficult to establish. , a game state in which the set game state is advantageous to the player ( For example, if it is a variable probability state), it is specified that it is difficult to give special benefits as a whole compared to when the set game state is a game state that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, normal state) You can do it.

Returning to FIG. 766, the description continues. When the third symbol type is "loose eyes", that is, when the third symbol is stopped and displayed in combination to indicate a win without reaching the ready-to-win state, the left stop symbol (the symbol in FIG. 758(a)) is displayed. D1), the voice data corresponding to the character type ("Octopus" in FIG. 758(a)) is specified, and the combination of the character types of the third symbol displayed stopped (in FIG. 758(a) A voice command (command 15 . In the twenty-fourth control example, the special benefits that can be given when the third pattern type "barakeme" is stopped and displayed are the special benefit of outputting a lively line by voice and the stop at the next change. It is configured to be able to provide a special privilege in which a speech is voice-output for suggesting the type of character to be displayed.

With this configuration, even if the third symbol to be stopped and displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is the "separate eyes", the stop display mode (left stop symbol) is displayed. Since it is possible to output voice using voice data corresponding to , and voice output of conversation lines corresponding to a combination of stop display modes, it is possible to prevent a player from quickly getting bored with the game. can be done. In addition, a special benefit is given for suggesting the type of stop symbol in the next variation (character type of the third symbol to be stopped and displayed) in a part of the dialogue that is voice-output based on “Barakeme”. It is possible to make the player who is trying to quickly grasp the result of the special pattern lottery be interested in the content of the voice-output conversation lines.

Furthermore, in the twenty-fourth control example, since it is configured to be able to display a special third symbol in which the numeric icon and the character type are different from the normal ones, the stop symbol type in the variation (the third symbol to be stopped and displayed) When a special privilege for suggesting a character type) is given, the type of the third symbol to be stopped (type of numeric icon) is predicted based on the character type of the third symbol to be stopped. can provide entertainment.

The pending action selection table 222xb is referred to when determining the operation pattern when moving the pending symbol displayed in the display area HR2, that is, the display mode for indicating the number of rights to execute the acquired special symbol lottery. It is a data table, which is referred to when determining an action mode (action) in shifting the display area of reserved symbols based on the start of a new special symbol variation (see F4101 in FIG. 779).

Here, in the 22nd control example described above, the reservation information including the execution right of the special symbol lottery is configured to be able to store (hold storage) up to 4 pieces for each special symbol type, and the stored reservation A reserved symbol for showing the number of information to the player can be displayed in the display area HR2 formed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Then, when a new special symbol lottery is executed, the special symbol lottery is executed based on the information contained in the reserved and stored reservation information. In other words, in the reserved information, the information (value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired) referred to when judging the big win in the special symbol lottery to be executed later is reserved and stored. Therefore, in the above-described twenty-second control example, in the pending information (holding information corresponding to the pending symbol displayed in the display area HR2 formed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81) in which the special symbol lottery is not executed The included information is discriminated in advance, and a pending change effect (see FIGS. 672 to 676) for suggesting the possibility of winning a jackpot can be executed.

However, the reserved symbols displayed in the display area HR2 are displayed in the same manner as in the 22nd control example because the display position of the reserved symbols is shifted each time a new special symbol variation is executed. In the case of executing the pending change performance of moving the change accessories Ym1 and Ym2 in a fixed position, when the special symbol fluctuation is executed in a fluctuation pattern of a predetermined period (10 seconds) or more, that is, the predetermined period Only when the condition that the display position of the reserved pattern does not change for (10 seconds) is established, the pending change performance can be executed, and when the condition is not established, the pending change performance can be executed. I had a problem that I couldn't.

On the other hand, for example, the suspension change effect used in the above-described 22nd control example, that is, the suspension change effect that specifies the pending symbol that can be changed by moving the change roles Ym1 and Ym2 is suspended. In order to be able to continue execution even when the display position of the symbol is shifted, the timing at which the display position of the reserved symbol is shifted is specified based on the variation time of the special symbol variation to be executed, and at the specified timing In addition, it is necessary to control the movable positions of the change accessories Ym1 and Ym2, and there is a problem that the contents of the control processing for executing the pending change effect become enormous. In addition, when the short-time special symbol variation is continuously executed, the special symbol using the suspension information corresponding to the suspension symbol to be subjected to the suspension variation performance while the suspension variation performance is being executed. There was a problem that the lottery was executed.

On the other hand, in the twenty-fourth control example, the execution condition of the pending change effect for varying the display mode of the pending symbol is satisfied, and the special symbol to be executed (in progress) When a short time (for example, 5 seconds) is set (set) as the fluctuation time of fluctuation, a holding action performance is executed in which the operation pattern (action) of the operation of shifting the display position of the holding pattern is changed. Thus, it is possible to notify the player of the expected degree of winning the jackpot of the reserved symbol to be the object of the reserved change performance.

By configuring in this way, even if a situation (a situation in which a short-time variation of the special symbol is executed) occurs where the reserved symbol is not maintained at a specific display position for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), the game It is possible to notify the user of the preliminary determination result for the pending information in an easy-to-understand manner.

Furthermore, in the twenty-fourth control example, the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10 is changed based on the mode of the pending action executed as the pending action effect and the result of the special symbol lottery based on the target pending information. It is structured so that it can be suggested. Specifically, even though a pending action mode (for example, a jump mode) with a high expectation of winning a jackpot is executed, the result of the special symbol lottery based on the pending information that is the target of the pending action production is lost. , it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a high possibility that a setting value (setting "3") that is advantageous to the player is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player more interested in the pending action mode executed when the display position of the pending symbol shifts.

Here, with reference to FIG. 767, the contents defined in the pending action selection table 222xb will be described. FIG. 767 shows the contents defined in the pending action selection table 222xb. As shown in FIG. 767, in the pending action selection table 222xb, there are a plurality of types of action modes (normal, high speed, jump) as action modes (normal, high speed, jump) to be executed when the pending symbol targeted for the pending action effect is shifted. Prefetch result (preliminary determination result for target hold information), the presence or absence of hold change scenario setting, the setting value, and the acquired value of the first effect counter 223vf are defined in association with each other.

Specifically, the look-ahead result (preliminary determination result) of the pending information (winning information) corresponding to the pending symbol to be the target of the pending action effect is a jackpot winning, and the pending change effect is executed for the pending symbol. When the setting value "1" is set in a state where the information (holding scenario information) for A pending action “jump” is defined, a pending action “fast” is defined for the range “60-89”, and a pending action “jump” is defined for the range “90-98”. Further, when the setting value "2" is set, the value of the acquired first effect counter 223vf is in the range of "0 to 59", and the pending action "high speed" is in the range of "60 to 89". , and a pending action "jump" is defined for the range "90-98". Further, when the setting value "3" is set, the value of the obtained first effect counter 223vf is in the range of "0 to 59", and the pending action "jump" is in the range of "60 to 89". A pending action "fast" is defined for the range "90-98", and a pending action "fast" is defined for the range "90-98".

On the other hand, the look-ahead result (preliminary determination result) of the pending information (winning information) corresponding to the pending pattern that is the target of the pending action production is a jackpot winning, and the information for executing the pending change production for the pending pattern (suspended scenario information) is not set, and if the set value "1" is set, the value of the acquired first effect counter 223vf is in the range of "0 to 59". "Normal" is defined, the pending action "Normal" is defined for the range "60-89", and the pending action "Fast" is defined for the range "90-98". Further, when the setting value "2" is set, the value of the acquired first effect counter 223vf is in the range of "0 to 59", and the pending action "normal" is in the range of "60 to 89". , and the pending action "jump" is defined for the range "90-98". Further, when the setting value "3" is set, the value of the obtained first effect counter 223vf is in the range of "0 to 59", and the pending action "jump" is in the range of "60 to 89". A pending action “fast” is defined for the range of “90-98”, and a pending action “normal” is defined for the range “90-98”.

Furthermore, the look-ahead result (preliminary determination result) of the pending information (prize information) corresponding to the pending pattern that is the target of the pending action effect is an outlier winning, and information for executing the pending change effect for the pending pattern (suspended scenario information) is set, if the set value "1" is set, the value of the acquired first effect counter 223vf is in the range of "0 to 59" pending action " High speed” is defined, pending action “normal” is defined for the range “60-89”, and pending action “normal” is defined for the range “90-98”. Further, when the setting value "2" is set, the value of the acquired first effect counter 223vf is in the range of "0 to 59", and the pending action "high speed" is in the range of "60 to 89". , and the pending action "jump" is defined for the range "90-98". Further, when the set value "3" is set, the value of the acquired first effect counter 223vf is in the range of "0 to 59", and the pending action "high speed" is in the range of "60 to 89". A pending action “jump” is defined for the range of “90-98”, and a pending action “normal” is defined for the range “90-98”.

On the other hand, the look-ahead result (preliminary determination result) of the pending information (winning information) corresponding to the pending pattern that is the target of the pending action effect is a winning win, and information for executing the pending change effect for the pending pattern (suspended scenario information) is not set, and if the set value "1" is set, the value of the acquired first effect counter 223vf is in the range of "0 to 59". "Normal" is defined, the pending action "Normal" is defined for the range "60-89", and the pending action "Fast" is defined for the range "90-98". Further, when the setting value "2" is set, the value of the acquired first effect counter 223vf is in the range of "0 to 59", and the pending action "normal" is in the range of "60 to 89". A pending action “fast” is defined for the range of “90-98”, and a pending action “normal” is defined for the range “90-98”. Further, when the setting value "3" is set, the value of the acquired first effect counter 223vf is in the range of "0 to 59", and the pending action "normal" is in the range of "60 to 89". A pending action “fast” is defined for the range of “90-98”, and a pending action “jump” is defined for the range “90-98”.

Next, with reference to FIG. 768, the configuration of the RAM 223 included in the audio lamp control device 113 in the twenty-fourth control example will be described. FIG. 768 is a diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the twenty-fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 768, the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the twenty-fourth control example is different from the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the twenty-second control example (see FIG. The difference is that a setting value storage area 223xa, a setting changing flag 223xb, and a fixed voice flag 223xc are added, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The setting value storage area 223xa is a storage area for storing a setting value based on the information about the setting value output from the main controller 110 when the information is received. Specifically, when the state command including the information about the set value is set (see S1753 in FIG. 770) in the start-up processing 24 (see FIG. 770) of the main controller 110, and the state command is received, A setting value is specified based on the information included in the state command, and information indicating the specified setting value is stored in the setting value storage area 223xa.

The information stored in the setting value storage area 223xa is referred to when determining the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect. Although detailed description will be given later, in this control example, when executing a setting change operation for changing the setting value, it is configured to always require an operation to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 10, and After the setting change operation is completed, a status command containing information about the setting value is configured to be set. Furthermore, every time the pachinko machine 10 is powered on (every time the start-up process 24 (see FIG. 770) of the main controller 110 is executed), a status command including information on the setting value is sent from the main controller 110. It is configured to be output to the audio lamp control device 113 . By configuring in this way, even if the information about the set value is output from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 only at a limited timing such as when the power is turned on, the audio lamp control device 113 side The current set value can be grasped reliably by .

In addition, by minimizing the chances of outputting information about the setting value, it is possible to prevent the illegal acquisition of the information about the setting value. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the signal indicating the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10 is not directly output to the outside, but the information about the setting value is output. Even if this is the case, it becomes difficult to specify the setting value indicated by the information, so that it is possible to suppress the act of illegally obtaining the information regarding the setting value. In addition, in the present embodiment, a part of the state command for indicating the gaming state (for example, high-order bits that are likely to be empty bits among the 8 bits for generating the state command) is used to set information about the setting value. Therefore, it is more difficult to identify the setting value indicated by the output information than when the information about the setting value is output alone. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the setting value storage area 223xa is configured to store information indicating the setting value, not the value indicating the setting value, the information stored in the setting value storage area 223xa may be illegally acquired. Even if the setting value is specified, it becomes difficult to specify the setting value indicated by the output information.

In this control example, a dedicated storage area called the setting value storage area 223xa is provided as a storage area for storing information about the setting value (information indicating the setting value). A part (empty area) of another storage area is configured to store information for indicating the setting value, and the storage area in which the information on the setting value (information for indicating the setting value) is stored It may be configured to store the address to be indicated in a specific area. In this case, it is configured to periodically or irregularly change the area for storing the information on the set value (information for indicating the set value). good to do

Further, it is preferable that the information about the setting value (information for indicating the setting value) is processed according to a predetermined rule corresponding to the specification of the storage area for storing the information about the setting value. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being illegally obtained based on the information stored in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 .

The setting changing flag 223xb is a flag for indicating that the setting is currently being changed, and is set to ON when a changing command indicating that the setting is being changed is output from the main controller 110. (See F2072 in FIG. 773). Then, when it is determined that a change completion command indicating that the setting change is completed is received, it is set to OFF (see F2074 in FIG. 773).

By providing this setting changing flag 223xb, it becomes possible for the sound lamp control device 113 to grasp the operation status of the setting changing operation executed by the main control device 110, so that until the setting changing operation is completed, The process of the standby process (see F2051 in FIG. 773) that is executed during the period can be switched according to the operation status of the setting change operation. Therefore, the processing load of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

The fixed voice flag 223xc is a flag for indicating a period in which voice data to be output as voice is not changed, and is set to ON when a period in which voice data to be output as voice is not changed is set. In the twenty-fourth control example, when the third symbol is stopped and displayed, the sound output from the pachinko machine 10 using the voice data corresponding to the character type attached to the third symbol that is stopped and displayed. type can be determined. When the third pattern for indicating that the jackpot has been won is stopped and displayed, the character type attached to the third pattern for indicating that the jackpot has been won is handled until the next jackpot is won. It is configured so that the voice output using the voice data to be executed can be continuously executed.

The fixed voice flag 223xc indicates that the third symbol to be stopped and displayed indicates a jackpot winning in the stop command process 24 (see F2273 in FIG. 777) which is executed when a stop command for stopping and displaying the third symbol is received. When it is determined that there are 3 symbols (the third symbol corresponding to the big hit winning variation), it is set to ON (F2675 in FIG. 777), and the setting status is determined each time a stop command is received (F2671 in FIG. 777). reference). Here, when it is determined that the fixed voice flag 223xc is set to ON (F2671 in FIG. 777: Yes), processing for specifying a new voice command for this third symbol stop display is executed. Skipped. Then, it is set to OFF when setting the stop type corresponding to the big hit winning variation (see F4003 in FIG. 776).

Although detailed description is omitted, in the twenty-fourth control example, the player can turn off the fixed voice flag 223xc, which has been set to on, by operating the operating means (effect button 22). configured as possible. With this configuration, when the player wins the jackpot with the third pattern to which the character type not intended by the player is attached, the voice output using the voice data corresponding to the character type unintended is continued for a long period of time. You can prevent it from happening.

Next, the configuration of the ROM 302 provided in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 in the twenty-fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 769(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 302. FIG. As shown in FIG. 769(a), the ROM 302 is provided with at least a voice file storage area 302xa.

The voice file storage area 302xa stores voice data corresponding to character types in addition to voice files (voice data) used for outputting music, sound effects, etc. in various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10. storage area. When the execution of various effects is notified by the audio lamp control device 113, the audio file corresponding to the effects is read out from the audio file storage area 302xa and output to the corresponding channel of the audio synthesizing section 306.

Further, when a voice command for voice indicating the type of voice data is notified by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice data corresponding to the voice command is read out from the voice file storage area 302xa and voice synthesized. It is output to the corresponding channel of the unit 306 .

Further, the audio file storage area 302xa stores a dedicated audio file that is output when an audio voice command is notified by the audio lamp control device 113. The audio file is used to indicate the type of voice data. When a command is notified by the voice lamp controller 113, a dedicated voice file corresponding to the voice command is read out from the voice file storage area 302xa and output to the corresponding channel of the voice synthesizing section 306.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 303 provided in the sound output device 132 will be described with reference to FIG. 769(b). FIG. 769(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 303. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 769(b), the RAM 303 has at least a command storage area 303xa and a selected voice storage area 303xb.

The command storage area 303a is an area in which various commands output from the audio lamp control device 113 to the audio output device 226 are temporarily stored until processing for the commands is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing of the voice output device 226 (see F6002 in FIG. 781) is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 303a is read, and the command determination processing is performed. parses the command and performs processing according to the command.

The selected voice storage area 303xb is a storage area for storing the type of voice data read out from the voice file storage area 302xa in response to the voice command for voice notified from the voice lamp control device 113. FIG. When an audio voice command is output from the audio lamp control device 113, the type of voice data corresponding to the audio voice command received from the audio file storage area 302xa is stored. When executing the process of outputting such voice, the voice data of the voice to be output is formed based on the information indicating the type of voice data stored in the selected voice storage area 303xb.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller 110 in the twenty-fourth control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 770, start-up processing 24 executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 770 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up processing, first, initial setting processing is executed upon power-on (F1701). In the initial setting process (F1701), a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (F1702). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (F1703).

Next, it is determined whether or not the setting key 110b is placed at the ON position (F1751). In the processing of F1751, if it is determined that the setting key 110b is placed at the ON position (F1751: Yes), it means that the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is set. A set value control process for performing corresponding control is executed (F1752), and the process proceeds to F1710, which will be described later. The details of this set value control process (F1752) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of F1751, if it is determined that the setting key 110b is not at the ON position (F1751: No), the process proceeds to F1704.

In the process of F1704, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 756) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (F1704), and if it is turned on (F1704: Yes), the process proceeds to F1712. do. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (F1704: No), it is further determined whether or not power interruption occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (F1705). If (F1705: No), there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (F1705: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (F1706). If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed up data is destroyed. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203 . Instead of the RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be judged based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of F1712, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (F1712). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing of RAM 203 (F1713, F1714).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (F1713, F1714) is executed. Similarly, when power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (F1713, F1714) is executed. . In the RAM initialization processing (F1713, F1714), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (F1713), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (F1714). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to F1710.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (F1704: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (F1705: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( F1707: Yes), while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held, the power failure occurrence information is cleared (F1708). Next, the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) transmits a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning to the game state at the time of drive power interruption (F1709), and shifts to the processing of F1710. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

In the processing of F1710, an initialization command indicating permission of effect is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the execution of various effects is permitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. FIG. Next, a status command including information indicating the current game status and information about the current set value is set (F1753), interrupt permission is set (F1712), and the process proceeds to the main process.

Next, referring to FIG. 771, the contents of the set value control process (F1752), which is one process in the start-up process 24 (see FIG. 770) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. . FIG. 771 is a flowchart showing detailed contents of the set value control process (F1752).

As shown in FIG. 771, in the set value control process (F1752), first, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 756) is turned on (F1901), and if it is turned on (F1901: Yes ), a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (F1902). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing of RAM 203 (F1903, F1904). In the RAM initialization process (F1903, F1904), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared (F1903), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (F1904). After executing the initialization processing of the RAM 203, a changing command indicating that the setting is being changed is transmitted (F1905), and the processing proceeds to F1906.

In the process of F1906, it is determined whether or not the setting switch 110c is turned on (depressed) (F1906). In the process of F1906, if it is determined that the setting switch 110c is turned on (depressed) (F1906: Yes), the data in the setting value storage area 203xa is updated by adding 1 (F1907), and the process of F1908 is performed. Move to On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F1906 that the setting switch is off (F1906: No), the process of F1907 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of F1908.

In the processing of F1908, it is determined whether or not the setting key 110b is arranged at the OFF position (F1908). If it is determined that the setting key 110b is located at the OFF position (F1908: Yes), a change completion command indicating completion of setting change is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 (F1909), and this processing ends. That is, the setting change state is ended, and the process returns to start-up processing 24 (see FIG. 770). As a result, it is possible to shift to a playable state in which a normal game can be played.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F1908 that the setting key 110b is not placed at the OFF position (F1908: No), the process returns to F1906. That is, the processes of F1906 to F1908 are repeated until it is determined in the process of F1908 that the setting key 110b is placed at the OFF position.

Also, in the process of F1901, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (F1901: No), first, the payout return command is sent to the payout control device 111 (F1910), then the set value storage area 203xa data is read (F1911). When the process of F1911 is completed, next, the setting value corresponding to the read data is displayed on the setting value display device 110a (F1912), the state command indicating the setting confirmation state is set (F1913), and the setting key 110b is pressed. It is determined whether or not it is arranged at the OFF position (F1914). In the processing of F1914, if it is determined that the setting key 110b is arranged at the OFF position (F1914: Yes), this processing ends. That is, the game is shifted to a playable state. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F1914 that the setting key 110b is not set to the OFF position (F1914: No), the process of F1914 is repeatedly executed. In other words, the setting confirmation state is continued until the setting key 110b is placed at the OFF position.

By executing this set value control process (F1752: see FIG. 771), it is possible to change the set value according to the operation of the setting switch 110c in the setting change state. In addition, in the setting confirmation state, the setting value can be continuously displayed on the setting value display device 110a until the setting switch 110b is placed at the OFF position.

<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in the twenty-fourth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 772 to 779, the contents of control processing executed by the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-fourth control example will be described. In the twenty-fourth control example, the contents of the control processing executed by the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-second control example described above are replaced with the start-up processing (see FIG. 716). 24 (see FIG. 772), executing command determination processing 24 (see F2172 in FIG. 774) instead of the command determination processing (see F2112 in FIG. 718), and status command reception processing (see F2202 in FIG. 719). (see F2271 in FIG. 775) instead of executing the state command receiving process 24 (see F2271 in FIG. 775), and when a stop type command is received from the main controller 110, the stop symbol type setting process 24 (see F2272 in FIG. 776). It is different in that it executes Other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 772, the contents of the start-up process 24 will be described. 772 is a flow chart showing the contents of the start-up process 24. FIG. As shown in FIG. 772, the start-up process 24 executes the process of F2010 for setting the initial value of the RAM in contrast to the start-up process (see FIG. 716) executed in the twenty-second control example described above. The difference is that the standby process (F2051) is executed before, and the rest is the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the standby process (F2051) executed in the startup process 24 (see FIG. 772) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 773 is a flow chart showing the contents of the standby process (F2051). In this standby process (F2051), when a setting change operation is being performed, a process for waiting the start-up process 24 by the sound lamp control device 113 until the setting change operation is completed is performed. be.

When the standby process (F2051) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not a changing command has been received (F2071). (F2072), then it is determined whether or not a change completion command has been received (F2073).

In the processing of F2073, if it is determined that a change completion command has been received, that is, if it has been determined that a command indicating that the setting change operation has been completed (F2073: Yes), the setting changing flag 223xb is turned off. Set (F2074) and move to start-up processing 24. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F2073 that the change completion command has not been received, that is, if the command indicating that the setting change operation has been completed has not been received (F2073: No), the change completion command is received. The processing of F2073 is looped until it is done. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the start-up process 24 (see FIG. 772) of the audio lamp control device 113 from ending during the setting change operation.

If it is determined in the process of F2071 that the changing command has not been received, that is, if the setting change operation has not been executed (F2071), the processes of F2072 to F2074 are skipped and the start-up process 24 is executed. Move to By configuring in this way, when the setting change operation is not executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the start-up processing of the voice lamp control device 113 is not waited unnecessarily, so the power of the pachinko machine 10 is eliminated. It is possible to make it easier to quickly complete various processes (start-up processes in each control device) that are executed at the time of turning on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 774, the contents of the command determination process 24 (F2172) in the twenty-fourth control example will be described. FIG. 774 is a flow chart showing the contents of the command determination process 24 (F2172). As shown in FIG. 774, the command determination process 24 (F2172) is different from the command determination process (see F2112 in FIG. State command reception processing 22 (see F2202 in FIG. 719) is changed to state command reception processing 24 (F2271 in FIG. 775), and when a stop type command is received, stop symbol type determination processing 24 (F2272 in FIG. ) is executed, the processing to be executed when a stop command is received is changed from stop command processing 22 (see F2214 in FIG. 724) to stop command processing 24 (see F2273 in FIG. 777), is different. Other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 775, the contents of the state command reception process 24 (F2271) will be described. FIG. 775 is a flow chart showing the contents of the status command reception process 24 (F2271). This state command reception process 24 (F2271) is the command determination process (see F2112 in FIG. 718) in the above-described 22nd control example, with the addition of a process to be executed when it is determined that the set value information has been received. They are different in one respect and otherwise identical. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the command determination process (see F2112 in FIG. 718) is executed, it is first determined whether setting value information has been received (F2371). The set value information included in the received command is stored in the set value storage area 223xa (F2372), and the process proceeds to F2301.

In the process of F2371, if it is determined that the set value information has not been received (F2371: No), or if the process of F2372 is completed, the command determination process in the above-described twenty-second control example (see F2112 in FIG. 718) and The same processing of F2301 to F2312 is executed, and this processing ends.

As described above, by storing the setting value information in the setting value storage area 223xa by the processing of F2372, when setting the setting suggestion effect for suggesting the set value, the currently set setting A performance mode based on a value can be surely set.

Next, referring to FIG. 776, the contents of the stop symbol type setting process 24 (F2272) will be described. FIG. 776 is a flow chart showing the contents of the stop symbol type setting process 24 (F2272). In this stop symbol type setting process 24 (F2272), a process for setting the type of the third symbol to be stopped and displayed this time based on the stop type command (jackpot, out of reach, loose eye) received from the main controller 110. is executed.

When the stop symbol type setting process 24 (F2272) is executed, first, the stop type selection flag is set to ON (F4001), and it is determined whether the current stop symbol type is "jackpot" (F4002). If it is determined to be a big hit (F4002: Yes), the fixed voice flag 223xc is set to ON. In other words, the privilege to be given when the jackpot is won is set (F4003).

Next, it is determined whether the jackpot type is "jackpot A", that is, the jackpot advantageous to the player (F4004). A lottery for determining the type of the third pattern (odd winning pattern) with a numeric icon indicating an odd number is determined, and the stop type corresponding to the determined third pattern type is set (F4005), and then , F4010.

On the other hand, in the process of F4004, when it is determined that the jackpot type is not "jackpot A" (F4004: No), the lottery for determining the type of the third symbol is the number icon indicating an even number. 3 symbols (symbols per even number) are determined, the stop type corresponding to the determined 3rd symbol type is set (F4005), and then the process proceeds to F4010.

In addition, in the processing of F4002, if it is determined that the current stop symbol type is not "big hit" (F4002: No), it is determined whether the received stop type is "reach out" (F4007), and "reach (F4007: Yes), the lottery for determining the type of the third symbol is used to set the stop type corresponding to reach loss (F4008), and then the process proceeds to F4010. When it is determined that it is not "out of reach" in the process of F4007 (F4007: No), the stop type of the lost symbol corresponding to the variation type is set (F4009), and the process proceeds to F4010.

That is, in the twenty-fourth control example, only when the "jackpot A" is won, the third pattern with the odd number pattern is stop-displayed in the display mode for indicating the jackpot win. Therefore, the plurality of numbers (number icons) attached to the third pattern serve as identification information capable of suggesting the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. The third symbols attached with odd numbers are more advantageous to the player than the third symbols attached with even numbers because they are associated with winning a jackpot that is advantageous to the player. It becomes the third pattern.

In the process of F4010, a character change lottery is executed (F4010), next it is determined whether or not the character change lottery has been won (F4011). The display of the special third pattern is determined (F4012), the display command corresponding to the determined content is set (F4013), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F4011 that the prize has not been won (F4011: No), this process ends.

In addition, in the twenty-fourth control example, the determination of the display of the special third symbol (the third symbol that is displayed with different numeric icon types and character types compared to the basic third symbol) is executed by lottery. However, the configuration is not limited to this and may be configured so that the player can arbitrarily select. In this case, it may be possible for the player to select whether or not to display the special third symbol, or a combination of the special third symbols (determination of the character type attached to a particular number icon, (determining the type of numeric icon attached to the character type) may also be selectable by the player. Furthermore, when the player is configured to be able to select (determine) a combination of the special third symbols, the display mode of the special third symbols selected (determined) by the player is different from the variable display of the third symbols. It is preferable to configure such that it can be displayed separately so that the player can arbitrarily check the display mode of the special third symbol.

Next, the contents of the stop command process 24 (F2273) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 777 is a flow chart showing the contents of the stop command process 24 (F2273). As shown in FIG. 777, the stop command process 24 (F2273) differs from the stop command process 22 (see F2214 in FIG. 724) in the above-described twenty-second control example in that a process related to voice data setting is added. are otherwise identical. The same processing contents are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

When the stop command process 24 (F2273) is executed, first, the same processes of F2651 to F2656 as the stop command process 22 (see F2214 in FIG. 724) of the 22nd control example are executed. After completing the process of F2656, it is determined whether the fixed voice flag 223xc is set to ON (F2671), and if it is not set to ON (F2671: No), the voice command selection table 222xa is changed. A voice command is determined by referring to it (F2672), a voice command for voice for indicating the determined voice command is set (F2673), and the process proceeds to F2674. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F2671 that the fixed voice flag 223xc is set to ON (F2671: Yes), there is no need to determine new voice data based on this stop display. The process of F2673 is skipped and the process proceeds to F2674.

In the process of F2674, it is determined whether or not the third symbol to be stopped and displayed this time is a jackpot stop (whether it is a third symbol stop corresponding to the special pattern of the jackpot winning) (F2674), and it is determined that the jackpot has been won. If so (F2674: Yes), the fixed voice flag 223xc is set to ON (F2675), the process of F2657 is executed, and this process ends. If it is determined in the process of F2674 that the jackpot is not won (F2674: No), the process of F2675 is skipped, the process of F2657 is executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 778, the processing contents of the suspension effect execution processing 24 (F3179) at the time of fluctuation start will be described. FIG. 778 is a flow chart showing the contents of the holding effect execution process 24 (F3179) at the start of fluctuation. As shown in FIG. 778, the variation start time suspension effect execution process 24 (F3179) has a variation time of less than 10 seconds with respect to the variation start time suspension effect execution process 22 (F3109) in the 22nd control example described above. (F3203: No), the pending action determination process (F3271) is executed, and the rest is the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 779, the content of the pending action determination process (F3271) will be described. FIG. 779 is a flow chart showing the contents of pending action decision processing (F3271). In this pending action determination process (F3271), the variation time of the special symbol variation to be executed is short (less than 10 seconds), and the pending change effect is maintained in the same display area (see 22nd control example). is difficult to execute, a process for setting the shift chance effect is performed.

As shown in FIG. 779, when the pending action determination process (F3271) is executed, first, the pending action is determined by referring to the pending action selection table 222xb (F4101), and the effect mode corresponding to the determined pending action is displayed. The display command shown is set (F4102), and this processing ends.

<Regarding control processing in the audio output device 226>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 780 to 782, the contents of control processing executed by the audio output device 226 in the twenty-fourth control example will be described.

First, the main processing executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIG. 780(a). FIG. 780(a) is a flow chart showing the contents of this main process.

When the main processing of the voice output device 226 is executed, first, based on the average amplitude obtained by sampling the synthesized voice data for a predetermined period (0.1 seconds) in the command determination processing (F6002) A command output process for transmitting the generated synthesized voice command to the voice lamp controller 113 is executed (F6001). Next, command determination processing is executed to perform processing according to the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 or the ADC 309 (F6002). Details of this command determination processing (F6002) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the processing of F6002, an audio setting process for reproducing audio data (audio file) corresponding to the effect is executed (F6003). Details of this audio setting process (F6003) will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of F6003 is completed, it is determined whether or not the work RAM 303 stores power-off occurrence information (F6004). If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of F6004 (F6004: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (F6006), and power-off processing is executed (F6007). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off (F6008), and then the processing is looped infinitely.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of F6004 (F6004: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 303 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 303 (F6005), and the RAM 303 is destroyed. If not (F6005: No), the process returns to F6001, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 303 is destroyed (F6005: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by MPU 301 of audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIG. 780(b). FIG. 780(b) is a flow chart showing the contents of this command interrupt processing.

This command interrupt processing (see FIG. 780(b)) is processing executed each time a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the RAM 303 (F6501), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing, which will be described later, and processing corresponding to the commands is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 781, the command determination process (F6002), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 780) executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226, will be described. FIG. 781 is a flow chart showing the contents of this command determination process (F6002).

In the command determination process (F6002), first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (F6101), and if there is no unprocessed new command (F6101: No), the command determination process is terminated. and return to main processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (F6101: Yes), the new command flag indicating that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (F6102). For all the commands of the process, the command type is analyzed (F6103).

Then, it is first determined whether or not there is an audio variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (F6104). This audio variation pattern command is issued at the timing when the detailed display mode of the variation pattern is selected (see F2910 in FIG. 727) in the variation display setting process 22 (see F2113 in FIG. 727) of the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, it is set to notify the type of sound to be reproduced and the output timing corresponding to the display mode.

In the process of F6104, when it is determined that there is a variation pattern command for voice among the unprocessed commands (F6104: Yes), the music and sound effects used during execution of the notified variation pattern command are specified (F6105 ), set the specified song, the output channel and the output timing of the sound effect (F6106), and return to the process of F6101.

In the processing of F6104, if it is determined that there is no voice variation pattern command (F6104: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a voice command (voice voice command for voice) among the unprocessed commands ( F6107). This voice command for sound is the process of determining the voice data based on the character type attached to the third symbol that is stopped and displayed in the stop command process 24 (see FIG. 777) of the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 777). 777), and output to the audio output device 226 by command output processing (F2102) of the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 717).

In the processing of F6107, if it is determined that there is a voice command for voice among the unprocessed commands (F6107: Yes), the voice data corresponding to the notified voice type is identified (obtained) (F6108), The received voice data is stored in the currently selected voice storage area 303xb (F6109), and it is determined whether or not the voice command for voice received this time contains information for giving a special privilege (F6110). If it is determined that there is a special privilege (F6110: Yes), the corresponding privilege sound is read from the sound file storage area 302xa, the output timing of the privilege sound is set (F6111), and the process returns to S6101.

Next, with reference to FIG. 782, the details of the audio setting process (F6003), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 780) executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226, will be described. FIG. 782 is a flow chart showing the contents of this audio setting process (F6003).

In the audio setting process (F6003), first, it is determined whether or not it is time to output (reproduce) music (F6201). In the process of F6201, if it is determined that it is time to output the music (F6201: Yes), the audio file corresponding to the current music is read (F6202), and the read audio file is output to the corresponding channel (F6203). ), the music output flag is set to ON (F6204), and the process proceeds to F6205. Note that the channel for outputting the audio file is predetermined for each file. For example, it is preset to output the audio file of the music used for the variable effect to channel 1.

On the other hand, in the processing of F6201, if it is determined that it is not the time to output the music (F6201: No), the processing from F6202 to F6204 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to F6205.

In the process of F6205, it is determined whether or not it is time to output a sound effect (F6205). If it is not the sound effect output timing (F6205: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is the output timing of the sound effect (F6205: Yes), the sound file corresponding to the current sound effect is read (F6206), the read sound file is output to the corresponding channel (F6207), and the bonus sound is output. It is determined whether it is the output timing (F6208). In the process of F6208, if it is determined that it is not the time to output the bonus sound (F6208: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of F6208, if it is determined that it is time to output the bonus audio (F6208: Yes), the audio file corresponding to the bonus audio this time is read (F6209), and the read audio file is output to the corresponding channel. (F6210), and the process ends.

<25th control example>
Next, the twenty-fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 783 to 794. FIG. Conventionally, a variable effect indicating that a jackpot has been won by stopping and displaying a plurality of (three) third symbols in a specific combination (same pattern), and a part of the plurality of third symbols (for example, three 2 out of 3 third symbols) are stop-displayed in a manner showing a part of a specific combination indicating winning of the jackpot, and the remaining 3rd symbols (for example, the remaining 1 out of 3 3rd symbols). is variably displayed (a so-called ready-to-win state), a variable effect (ready-to-win variable effect) is executed to prompt the player in which mode the remaining third symbols are stopped and displayed. Are known.

Then, as a ready-to-win variation performance, the player is notified of the number of types of the third symbols that can be stopped and displayed within a range limited to the number of types of the third symbols that are variably displayed, and the notified third symbol types. Among them, there is one that executes a reach variation effect that stops and displays one third symbol.

By configuring in this manner, the type of the third symbol to be stopped and displayed is predicted to the player before the third symbol (final stop symbol) displayed in a variable manner during the ready-to-win variation effect is stopped and displayed. For example, if the notified content indicates that there is a high possibility that the final stop symbol will be stopped and displayed in a combination indicating that the jackpot has been won (stop as the final stop symbol When the occupancy rate of the third pattern type indicating the winning of the jackpot is high among the third pattern types notified as the types of the third patterns that can be displayed, it reaches the player while heightening the expectation of winning the jackpot. It was possible to make the player pay attention to the variable performance, and to enhance the performance effect.

In addition, it is also known that the number of types of the third patterns that can be stop-displayed during the ready-to-win variation performance is notified in a plurality of modes in which the types of the third patterns that are displayed in a variable manner are the same. Specifically, for example, a combination of "111" and the third symbol being stopped and displayed indicates a jackpot winning, and two third symbols are left in the state of being stopped and displayed as "11". In the ready-to-win state in which one third symbol (final stop symbol) is variably displayed, two "1"s indicating a jackpot win and "2"s indicating a miss win are displayed as stop display mode candidates for the final stop symbol. There is known a system capable of notifying three candidates in total of five before the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily change the ratio of the stop display mode indicating winning to the entire stop display mode candidates of the final stop symbol, so that the effect result of the variable effect being executed can be changed. To make it easy for a player to predict in advance whether the performance result indicates a jackpot winning or the performance result indicating a losing win.

However, in the above-described reach variation effect, when the effect result is the effect result indicating the winning of the jackpot, the stop display mode indicating the winning of the jackpot occupies a high proportion as the stop display mode of the final stop symbol notified in advance. By doing so, it is possible to provide an effect that gradually raises the player's expectation of winning the jackpot, while if the result of the effect is not the winning of the jackpot, the stop display mode of the final stop pattern notified in advance. As a result, the proportion occupied by the stop display mode indicating the winning of the jackpot becomes low, and the player's willingness to play is reduced before the stop display of the reach variation effect is displayed (the final stop symbol is stop displayed). There was a problem of hoarding.

On the other hand, in the present twenty-fifth control example, in a specific ready-to-win state, the type of the third symbol displayed as the ready-to-win state is configured to be variable after notification of the stop display mode candidate of the final stop symbol. there is Specifically, after "1, 1, 1, 2, 2" is notified as a stop display mode candidate for the final stop symbol notified during the ready state of "22", the state of the ready state is changed to "22". to "11".

That is, in a specific ready-to-win state, the third symbol types in the ready-to-win state are made different so that the stop display mode of the final stop symbol indicating the winning win becomes the stop display mode of the final stop symbol indicating the winning win. ing.

By configuring in this way, even when the proportion of the stop display mode indicating winning is low at the time when the stop display mode candidate of the final stop symbol is notified, the third symbol type in the ready-to-win state is switched, Since it is possible to leave the possibility of increasing the ratio of the stop display mode indicating winning, it is possible to allow the player to execute the ready-to-reach variation presentation without getting bored until the end.

Further, in the twenty-fifth control example, after notification of the stop display mode candidate of the final stop symbol in a specific ready-to-win state, the types of the third symbols displayed in the ready-to-win state can be increased. Specifically, after "1, 1, 1, 2, 3" is notified as a stop display mode candidate for the final stop symbol notified during the ready state of "22", the state of the ready state is changed to "22". (single reach) to "11" and "22" (double reach).

By configuring in this way, even when the proportion of the stop display mode indicating winning is low when the stop display mode candidate of the final stop symbol is notified, the number of the third symbol types that are in the ready-to-win state is reduced. Since it is possible to increase the possibility of increasing the ratio of the stop display mode indicating winning, the player can be made to execute the reach variation presentation without getting bored until the end.

Conventionally, during the period when the identification information (special pattern) for indicating the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is displayed in a variable manner, the special pattern is displayed on the display screen (third pattern display device) configured by the liquid crystal display. There is a pachinko machine 10 that executes a variable performance for variably displaying a corresponding third symbol. In this conventional type pachinko machine 10, the result of the special symbol lottery is a lottery result (jackpot winning) that is advantageous to the player or a lottery result that is disadvantageous to the player (losing winning) depending on the contents of the variable performance to be executed. It is common for a player to predict whether there is a lottery before the lottery result is notified, and by making it possible to execute variable performances of different performance modes based on the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery, When the jackpot is won, it is easier to execute the fluctuation performance (advantageous fluctuation performance) than when the jackpot is not won (when the jackpot is won). It is known that a variable performance (disadvantageous variable performance) that is more likely to be executed in the case of no winning (lost winning) can be executed.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10, the probability of winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery is set lower than the probability of losing the winning due to the game characteristics that advantageous benefits are given to the player when the jackpot is won. In order to suppress the decline of the player's desire to play, even when the player continues for a long time the game in which the result of the special symbol lottery is lost and the game is won, which is common. In some cases, a wide variety of performance modes can be set as the performance mode of the disadvantageous fluctuation performance to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to the conventional type pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, the player is less likely to get bored with the game as it is configured so that more production modes can be determined as the production modes of the variable performance. There is a problem that the capacity of the display data required for executing the variable presentation increases due to the increase in the number of presentation modes, and the manufacturing cost increases.

On the other hand, in the twenty-fifth control example, by varying the scale of the display area without changing the display data set as the effect mode of the variable effect, different variable effects can be provided to the player. are doing. Specifically, by transmitting a scale command for changing the scale of the display area to the display control device 114, the display image displayed on the entire display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is reduced. is displayed in a partial area of the display screen, or the display image displayed in a partial area of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 can be enlarged and displayed so as to occupy the entire display screen. It consists of In addition to changing the scale of the displayed image, it is also possible to add a twist to the displayed image and change the three-dimensional balance in the depth direction.

By constructing in this manner, the player can experience the variable performance in many display modes without increasing the display data of the variable performance, thereby preventing the player from quickly getting bored with the game. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 10 that does not exist.

In addition, in the twenty-fifth control example, a plurality of layers are provided in order to form the display image displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, and the scale setting of the display area described above is performed. can be set for each layer. By configuring in this way, for example, among the various images displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the image layer on which the display image corresponding to the variable effect being executed is displayed, and the information on the game ( For example, the display image corresponding to the reserved information indicating the number of reserved symbols, the time saving information indicating the number of time saving, etc.) is formed differently, and the display image corresponding to the variable effect is displayed. Scaling can be performed on layers only. Therefore, by varying the scale of the display image, while providing the player with a novel effect, the display image corresponding to the information (game information) to be notified to the player (e.g. Since the pattern display) can be continuously displayed without being reduced in scale, it is possible to inform the player of the information regarding the game in an easy-to-understand manner while providing various effects to the player.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-fifth control example has a plurality of layers as layers corresponding to variable effects (variation display layers), and for example, at least the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner. It has a main layer and a sub-layer that is formed on the back side of the main layer and on which a background image with a variable effect is displayed. When the scale of the main layer is set to a normal scale, the display mode displayed on the sub-layer is configured to be difficult for the player to visually recognize.

Then, when the scale setting for reducing the display area of the main image layer is executed, the image is displayed on the main image layer in an area smaller than the display area, which is the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. Since the display image is displayed, from the area (empty display area) where the display image displayed on the reduced main image layer is not displayed in the display area which is the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, The display image displayed on the sub-layer is configured so that the player can visually recognize it.

With this configuration, not only the scale of the displayed image is reduced, but also the new display mode (the display mode displayed on the sub-layer) can be visually recognized by the player. can be enhanced.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-fifth control example is configured to be able to execute scale setting for changing the scale of the display image at various timings with respect to the variable performance that is being executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp at what timing the reduction effect for reducing the display image is executed, so that the player is prevented from becoming bored with the game early. can do.

Further, in the twenty-fifth control example, when the variable performance being executed has won a jackpot, the scale performance described above is more likely to be executed than when the jackpot has not been won. By configuring in this way, the player can play the game while expecting that the reduced-scale presentation will be executed.

In this case, when the scale effect is executed, the reduced main image among the layers (sub-layers) formed behind the layer whose display area is reduced (main layer) A display for notifying the player that the scale effect is being executed in a display area that does not overlap with the layer, that is, a display area that can be visually recognized by the player when the display area of the main layer is reduced. Mode (for example, display of "running scale effect") and display mode (for example, display of "chance") for indicating that the expectation of winning a jackpot is high. It is preferable to configure the display mode to be set in advance.

With this configuration, when the effect (reduced scale effect) of changing the scale of the display image displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is executed, the player thinks that the pachinko machine 10 is out of order. You can suppress what seems to be In addition, when the reduced-scale production is executed, it is possible to provide the player with information that is advantageous to the player as visible information. You can play games.

Here, as in the twenty-fifth control example, without changing the display data constituting the display image to be displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, the setting for reducing the display area in which the display image is displayed is performed. When configured to be executable, the scale of the display mode displayed on the display image (for example, the number icon indicating the third pattern) corresponding to the set scale is also changed. When the ratio is changed, the aspect ratio of the displayed display mode is also changed. In this case, when the scale effect is executed while the number icon (third pattern) is being displayed as a variation effect for suggesting whether or not the player has won the jackpot, the third pattern is displayed. There is a problem in that the displayed numbers are deformed and misidentified by the player.

In addition, a plurality of third symbols are stopped and displayed in the ready-to-win state, and the remaining third symbols are displayed in a variable manner. When the reduced-scale effect is executed in a state in which each third symbol fluctuates while temporarily stopping on the establishment line), the type of the third symbol that is temporarily stopped on the ready-to-reach establishment line ( There is a problem that the player misunderstands the number type).

In addition, as a variable performance, the third pattern is temporarily stopped with a combination indicating a failure during the variable performance period, and then the third pattern is variably displayed again to execute a performance (advancement performance) with a high expectation of a big win. In the pachinko machine 10 capable of executing the variable performance, when the reduced-scale performance is executed in the state where the third symbol is temporarily stopped, the temporarily stopped third symbol is deformed so that the player can move to the third symbol. There is a problem that the type of the three symbols (type of number) is misidentified.

As described above, in the event that the player misunderstands the type of the third symbols (the type of number), even if the combination of the third symbols indicating the failure is displayed, it is as if the There is a possibility that the players misunderstand that the three symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a winning of the jackpot, and give a sense of disbelief to the fact that the jackpot game is not executed.

Specifically, when the third symbol corresponding to the number "9" is in the ready-to-win state, and the remaining third symbol temporarily stops "8" on the ready-to-win establishment line, the scale effect is executed. In addition, it becomes difficult to distinguish between the display mode of the deformed "9" and the display mode of "8", and the third symbol of the same type is stopped and displayed on the established line (the third symbol is is displayed stopped), there is a risk that the player may misunderstand.

To address such a problem, in the twenty-fifth control example, all the third symbols are displayed in a stopped state (including temporary stop display) on the established line, or all the third symbols are displayed on the established line. When the reduced-scale effect is executed in a state immediately before the stop display (including the temporary stop display), at least the third symbol (the final third symbol) that is stopped and displayed last is displayed so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it. Configure the control to be executable.

Specifically, a preliminary layer with a transmittance of 100% is always provided on the front side of the main layer (layer) where the third pattern is displayed, and when the scale effect is executed, the main layer and It is configured so that the same scale setting can be executed for the preliminary layers. Then, when the reduced-scale effect is executed, the effect pattern of the variable effect being executed on the main image layer is discriminated, and the effect pattern of the variable effect being executed is the effect pattern in which the above-described problem may occur. When it is determined that the final third pattern is difficult for the player to see, the excess ratio of the display region overlapping the display region of the final third pattern in the main layer is reduced among the display regions of the auxiliary layer. It is configured to be

By configuring in this way, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the display mode of the final third symbol in a state where the scaled effect is executed, so that the third symbol that is stopped and displayed (including temporary stop display) on the establishment line is displayed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the player misunderstands the combination of symbols.

In this way, by configuring the display areas to be scaled to the same scale for the main layer and the reserve layer, even if the scale effect is executed, the display area will be displayed on the reserve layer. Any portion of the main layer can be hidden (invisible state) by using the display mode.

Furthermore, in the twenty-fifth control example, the player is shown that the expectation of winning the jackpot is high in the display area of the spare layer, which overlaps at least the display area of the final third symbol in the main layer. A display mode (for example, the characters "chance") is displayed in advance, and the transmittance of a partial area of the preliminary layer is reduced based on the execution of the reduced scale effect. In such a case, the display mode (for example, the characters "chance") for indicating to the player that the expectation of winning the jackpot displayed on the preliminary layer is high is displayed in a manner that is visible to the player. It consists of

<Regarding the effect contents in the 25th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 783 to 787, the contents of the characteristic effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-fifth control example will be described. In the twenty-fifth control example, after the ready-to-win state is displayed, a plurality of symbol icons are displayed to suggest the type of the third symbol (final stop third symbol) that is finally stopped and displayed. A symbol stock ready-to-win effect for finally stop-displaying a third symbol corresponding to any one symbol icon among a plurality of symbol icons is configured to be executable.

With this configuration, the player can be notified of the candidate that can be stopped and displayed as the final stop third symbol after the ready-to-win state is established, so that the player is made to predict the effect result of the current variable effect. can be made easier.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 783 to 784, the contents of the symbol stock reach effect will be described. FIG. 783(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed immediately after the symbol stock reach effect is started, and FIG. 783(b) shows a plurality of symbol icons displayed in the symbol stock reach effect. FIG. 784(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed at the time of stocking, and FIG. 784(a) shows the display screen when a plurality of stocked pattern icons are temporarily hidden from the display screen. FIG. 784(b) is a diagram showing an example, showing an example of the display screen showing the effect result of the symbol stock reach effect.

As shown in FIG. 783(a), above the main display area Dm, the third pattern is variably displayed in the display mode "2↓2" to indicate that the reach state is present, and the reach state is indicated. In the display area HR3 formed in the vicinity of the third symbol displayed in the display mode shown in FIG. When the ready-to-win effect is started, the sub-display area Ds displays a comment "stock the pattern" as a guidance mode for guiding the effect contents of the pattern stock ready-to-win effect, and is displayed below the main display area Dm. At , an effect is executed in which the character 801 collects pattern icons.

The example shown in FIG. 783(a) shows a state in which one pattern icon (first pattern icon 802a) has already been acquired (accumulated). The symbol icon has a display mode that allows the player to recognize the type of the corresponding third symbol. The first symbol icon 802a shown in FIG. A display mode "1" is attached to indicate compatibility. In the twenty-fifth control example, a symbol icon can be displayed as a display mode for suggesting the display mode of the final stop third symbol, and the display mode of the symbol icon indicates the type of the corresponding third symbol. It is formed in a display mode that allows the player to comprehend and that the symbol icon is not the third symbol.

Specifically, the pattern icon (first pattern icon 802a) is formed in a display mode in which a mark indicating the type (number) of the corresponding third pattern is attached in a sphere imitating a round ball. . With this configuration, when the symbol icon (first symbol icon 802a) is displayed while the third symbol is in the reach state, the symbol icon (first symbol icon 802a) is the final stop third symbol. It is possible to suppress the player from being misunderstood.

Also, as shown in FIG. 783(a), the pattern icon is displayed in a location that is significantly different from the variable display area of the third pattern. By configuring in this way, when one pattern icon (for example, the first pattern icon 802a) is displayed while the variable effect is being executed, the third pattern (two pieces) that is in the ready-to-win state. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the third symbol has been stop-displayed by combining the symbol icons (one) to indicate a big win.

Next, in the symbol stock reach effect, when a plurality of symbol icons are acquired (stocked), as shown in FIG. 783(b), a plurality of symbol icons (first symbol icon 802a to fourth symbol icon 802d) are displayed. be. In the twenty-fifth control example, the maximum stock number of pattern icons is four, so the state shown in FIG. 783(b) is the state in which the maximum number of pattern icons are stocked. Therefore, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment of "stock completed" is displayed as a guidance mode for guiding that the maximum number of pattern icons has been obtained (stocked).

With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner whether or not the number of stocked symbol icons is the maximum number during the symbol stock ready-to-win effect, so that the number of stocked symbol icons is more than this. Even in a state where there is no increase, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the user unnecessarily expects more pattern icons to be stocked.

By positioning the character 801 between the first pattern icon 802a and the second pattern icon 802b, the three pattern icons are not displayed side by side. With this configuration, the pattern icons corresponding to the same third pattern type (for example, "1") are displayed side by side with no other display modes in between, and the third pattern indicating the winning of the jackpot is stopped. It is possible to prevent the player from being misunderstood by the display.

In the example shown in FIG. 783(b), since four pattern icons are displayed on a straight line, for example, the first pattern icon 802a displayed on the right side of the character 801 and the fourth pattern icon 802d and 802d are displayed in a display mode for indicating the same third symbol type, it is likely that a new ready-to-win establishment line has been established with the first symbol icon 802a and the fourth symbol icon 802d. There is a problem that the player is misunderstood.

Therefore, when a plurality of pattern icons (first pattern icon 802a to fourth pattern icon 802d) are displayed as shown in FIG. It is preferable to determine the display position of each pattern icon. With this configuration, even if a plurality of pattern icons are displayed on the display screen, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that a new ready-to-win establishment line has been established. In addition to this, the design icons may be configured to have different display modes or different sizes. Even when such a configuration is used, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to misunderstand that a new ready-to-win establishment line has been established.

After that, when the maximum number of stocks (acquisition) is acquired in the symbol stock reach effect, the acquired symbol icon rises as shown in FIG. After that, the character 801 executes the action of displaying the acquired symbol icon on the display screen again, and the third symbol corresponding to one of the stock symbol icons is stopped and displayed as the final stop third symbol. .

Here, in the symbol stock ready-to-win effect described above, when the effect result is the effect result indicating the winning of the jackpot, the pattern icon corresponding to the third symbol indicating the winning of the jackpot is selected as the type of the symbol icon to be displayed in advance. By increasing the occupied ratio, it is possible to provide an effect that gradually raises the player's expectation of winning the jackpot. As a type, the proportion of the symbol icon corresponding to the third symbol indicating the winning of the jackpot becomes low, and before the effect result of the symbol stock reach effect is stopped and displayed (the final stop third symbol is stopped and displayed). There is a problem that the player's desire to play is lowered.

On the other hand, in the twenty-fifth control example, the type of the third symbol in which the ready-to-win state is established can be changed using the stocked symbol icons. In this case, in FIG. 784 (b), in the state shown in FIG. 784 (a), the reach state of "2 ↓ 2" was displayed, but by the pattern icon, the reach state of "1 ↓ 1" , "1" is stop-displayed as the final stop third symbol, and the third symbol is stop-displayed in combination to indicate to the player that the jackpot has been won.

That is, in the first half period of the symbol stock ready-to-win effect, the symbol icon corresponding to the final stop 3rd symbol indicating a winning win is switched to the symbol icon corresponding to the final stop 3rd symbol indicating a winning win. there is

By configuring in this way, even when the proportion of the symbol icons indicating winning is low when all the symbol icons are displayed in the symbol stock ready-to-win production, the third symbol type in the ready-to-win state is switched, Since it is possible to leave the possibility of increasing the ratio of the symbol icon indicating winning, the symbol stock ready-to-win performance can be executed to the end without getting tired of the player.

Although not shown, in the twenty-fifth control example, as the symbol stock ready-to-win effect, after all the symbol icons are displayed, the type of the third symbol displayed as the ready-to-win state is increased. configured as possible. Specifically, from the reach state of "2↓2" shown in Fig. 784 (a), it is possible to switch the reach state mode to "11" and "22" (double reach) using the symbol icon. Configure.

By constructing in this way, even when the percentage of the symbol icons indicating winning is low when all the symbol icons which are stop display mode candidates for the final stop third symbol are displayed, the ready-to-win state is reached. By increasing the number of the third pattern types, it is possible to leave the possibility of increasing the ratio of the pattern icons indicating winning, so that the pattern stock reach effect is executed until the player gets bored until the end. can be made

Next, with reference to FIGS. 785 and 786, the effect contents of the screen press effect in the twenty-fifth control example will be described. In the twenty-fifth control example, after creating a display image to be displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, processing processing for processing the display image can be executed. The processing is performed not on the entire display image, but on various sprites displayed in the display image, divided into a plurality of layer units, and the processing can be executed corresponding to each layer.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 785(a), at least a sub-layer fr, a main layer sr, a spare layer yr, and a main layer hr are provided as layers for forming a display image from the rear side. there is The display image that is normally displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and that can be visually recognized by the player includes the main image layer sr in which the main effect such as the variation effect of the third symbol is displayed, and the fourth symbol related to the game result. It is formed by the display image generated on the main layer hr to be displayed.

The sub-layer fr is always made invisible to the player by the display image displayed on the main layer sr. It becomes visible to the player only when the process is performed. Further, the spare layer yr is normally set to have a transmittance of 100%, so that the player cannot visually recognize the display image displayed on the spare layer yr. This preliminary layer yr is defined so that processing is executed in combination with the main layer sr.

In other words, when the main layer sr is processed at a reduction rate of A%, the auxiliary layer yr is also processed at a reduction rate of A%. Therefore, the display image displayed on the main layer sr and the display image displayed on the auxiliary layer yr are configured so that their display positions are always synchronized regardless of the content of processing. The preliminary layer yr is configured to be processed to vary the transmittance as a processing process. By configuring in this way, for example, when processing for changing the aspect ratio is executed on the main layer sr, the display mode of the third pattern displayed on the main layer sr is deformed. If there is a risk that the player may misidentify the type of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed, the transmissivity of the spare layer yr is reduced (to 0%) so that the deformed third symbol can be displayed. It can be hidden.

Next, the display image of the preliminary layer yr will be described with reference to FIG. 785(b). As shown in FIG. 785(b), the spare layer yr is a display area for the third symbol displayed on the main layer sr (at least the third symbol that is finally stopped is displayed). This is a layer in which a display image for blindfold is displayed in an area where the display position overlaps with the area). In the twenty-fifth control example, display processing is always performed on the preliminary layer yr, and the transmittance is set to 100%. Then, when a screen press effect in which the aspect ratio of the main layer sr is changed is executed as a variable effect with a high expectation of winning the jackpot, processing is performed to change the transmittance from 100% to 0%. . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 785(b), as a display image for blindfolding, a display image with the characters "Chance" attached is used as a display mode for indicating to the player that the expectation of winning the jackpot is high. is displayed.

Next, on the main layer sr, display images corresponding to various variable effects executed in each control example described above are displayed (see FIG. 785(c)). On the sub-layer fr, as shown in FIG. 785(b), as a variation effect with a high expectation of winning the jackpot, a screen press effect is executed in which the aspect ratio of the main layer sr is changed. Display image is always displayed. Although illustration is omitted, game information related to the game result (information indicating the result of the special symbol lottery and error display) is displayed on this layer hr. This real layer hr is a layer on which no processing is applied to the display image. By configuring in this way, important information related to the game can always be notified in the same manner even when processing to change the scale of the display image is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 786, the contents of the screen press effect will be described. FIG. 786(a) is a diagram showing a normal display screen immediately before the screen press effect is started, and FIG. 786(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen during the screen press effect. The diagram shown in FIG. 786(a) is a state in which processing has not been performed on any layer. Therefore, the display image of the sub-layer fr cannot be visually recognized, and the display image of the preliminary layer yr cannot be visually recognized. Note that even in this state, display processing is being executed for the sub-layer fr and the spare layer yr.

Then, when the screen press effect is executed, the main layer sr and the auxiliary layer yr are processed according to scale A (a scale of 1:8 for the normal aspect ratio of 1:2). is applied, and a variable effect is executed in which the display area (display image) of the main layer sr is compressed in the vertical direction compared to the normal time. In this case, since the third symbols "9" and "8" displayed on the main layer sr are visually similar to "0", the display of the third symbol shown in FIG. If the press effect is executed without changing the mode, there is a possibility that the player may misunderstand that the third symbol with "0" is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating that the player wins the jackpot. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 786(b), the main layer sr and the auxiliary layer yr are processed at scale A (normal aspect ratio is 1:2, but scale is 1:8). The processing includes processing information for setting the transmittance of the preliminary layer yr to 0%, and the display image of the preliminary layer yr is displayed at the position corresponding to the medium pattern "8". This prevents the player from erroneously recognizing that the third symbol to which "0" is attached is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that a big win has been won.

Furthermore, since the display image with the characters "Chance" attached as the display image of the spare layer yr is made visible to the player, it is possible to not only hide the third symbol but also increase the expectation of winning the jackpot. It can also be used as a display mode for indicating high.

Then, the display image of the sub-layer fr is displayed so as to be visible to the player in the empty display area generated by processing the main layer sr. A display image (arrow) is displayed on the sub-layer fr to enhance the rendering effect for the collapse of the main layer sr. In addition, the characters "Screen Press Effect Occurrence" are displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the pachinko machine 10 is out of order when the display area of the main layer sr is suddenly deformed.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 in the twenty-fifth control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 787, the configuration of the ROM 222 included in the sound lamp control device 113 of the twenty-fifth control example will be described. FIG. 787 is a diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 included in the sound ramp control device 113 of the twenty-fifth control example. As shown in FIG. 787, the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the twenty-fifth control example has the The difference is that a symbol stock reach selection table 222ya is added, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The symbol stock reach selection table 222ya is a data table that is referred to when determining the effect mode of the symbol stock reach effect, and is used to select a variable effect corresponding to the special symbol change when the normal state is set as the game state. In the normal state production mode determination processing 25 for setting (see F3098 in FIG. 791), when it is determined that the variable production type is symbol stock reach (F3191 in FIG. 791: Yes), it is referred.

Here, with reference to FIG. 788, the contents of the symbol stock reach selection table 222ya will be described. FIG. 788 shows the contents defined in the symbol stock reach selection table 222ya. As shown in FIG. 788, different effect patterns are defined according to the success/failure determination result and the acquired value of the second effect counter 223vg. Here, in the twenty-fifth control example, odd-numbered symbols are configured to make it easier to notify that the player has won a big win that is more advantageous to the player than even-numbered symbols. Therefore, as the effect mode of the symbol stock reach, each effect pattern is defined so as not to switch from the reach state of the odd number symbol "1.1" to the reach state of "2.2". By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play from declining in the process of progressing the variable presentation.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the twenty-fifth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the twenty-fifth control example will be described with reference to FIG. The display control device 114 in the twenty-fifth control example differs from the display control device 114 in the first control example in that an image processing data storage area 234a3 is provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and a work area 234a3 is provided. The difference is that the RAM 233 is provided with a processing information storage area 233aa.

The image processing data storage area 234a3 stores a display image to be displayed based on the drawing information stored in the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c based on the drawing list. This is a storage area for storing processing information (image processing data) for changing the scale and tilt of the display image for the entire display image displayed on the display surface.

In the twenty-fifth control example, the display image generated by the image controller 237 of the display control device 114 can be processed based on the processing information read from the image processing data storage area 234a3. With this configuration, it is possible to easily change the appearance of display images generated by the same drawing process. Therefore, display images with different display modes can be displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 without increasing the processing load of the drawing process.

The processing information storage area 233aa is a storage area for temporarily storing the processing information read from the image processing data storage area 234a3. When the display control device 114 executes the display process, in parallel with the process of storing the drawing information in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c based on the drawing list, the other Display processing is executed based on the drawing information already stored in the frame buffer and the processing data stored in the processing information storage area 233aa.

Next, with reference to FIG. 790, the contents of the drawing list generated by the display control device 114 in the twenty-fifth control example will be described. FIG. 790 is a diagram schematically showing a drawing list in the twenty-fifth control example.

As shown in FIG. 790, in the twenty-fifth control example, detailed drawing information (detailed information) is generated for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame, and the detailed information is rearranged for each sprite. This control example is different from the above-described first control example in that the drawing list is created with the layer types roughly classified. In other words, as in the first control example described above, when the MPU 231 generates a drawing list, the sprites to be arranged in the image for one frame are rearranged in order from the sprite to be arranged on the backmost side to the sprite to be arranged on the front side. , detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite is described, and the layer type is defined for the order of the sprites. Then, it is configured such that image processing can be executed for each layer type.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 790, sub-layer fr, main layer sr, preliminary layer yr, and main layer hr are defined as layer types in order from the back side.

<Regarding the processing contents of the audio ramp control device 113 in the twenty-fifth control example>
Next, the processing contents of the audio ramp control device 113 in the twenty-fifth control example will be described. The control processing of the sound ramp control device 113 in the twenty-fifth control example is different from the control processing of the sound ramp control device 113 in the above-described twenty-second control example. Instead, the difference is that the normal state effect mode determination process 25 (see F3098 in FIG. 791) is executed, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 791, the processing contents of the normal state rendering mode determination processing 25 (F3098) will be described. FIG. 791 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the normal state rendering mode determination processing 25 (F3098). In this normal state effect mode determination process 25 (F3098), the difference is that a control process to be executed is added depending on whether the pattern stock reach is determined or the processing reach is determined as the variable effect type. , are otherwise identical. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the normal state effect mode determination process 25 (F3098) is executed, first, the same processes of F3101 to F3106 as the normal state effect mode determination process 22 (see F3018 in FIG. 729) are executed. Then, in the processing of F3104, if it is determined that it is not the movie execution reach (F3104: No), next, it is determined whether or not the current variable effect type is the symbol stock reach (F3191), and the symbol stock reach is determined. If so (F3191: Yes), the symbol stock reach selection table 222ya is referred to determine the effect mode (F3192), and the process proceeds to F3108.

Also, in the processing of F3191, if it is determined that it is not the pattern stock reach (F3191: No), then it is determined whether the current variable effect type is the processing reach (F3193), and it is determined that it is the processing reach. If so (F3193: Yes), a corresponding processing command (a command including image processing information and information indicating an effect period for processing the image) is set (F3194), and the process proceeds to F3108. On the other hand, in the processing of F3194, if it is determined that it is not the processing reach (F3194: No), the same processing of F3107 to F3108 as the above-described normal state production mode determination processing 22 (see F3018 in FIG. 729) is executed. End the process.

The processing command set in the processing of F3194 is output to the display control device 114 by the command output processing (see F2102 in FIG. 717) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 717) of the sound lamp control device 113. . When the display control device 114 receives the processing command, the processing information for processing the displayed image from the information included in the received processing command, and the period information indicating the performance period during which the displayed image is processed are transmitted. The processing data corresponding to the specified processing information is read from the image processing data storage area, and the read processing data and period information are stored in the processing information storage area 233aa.

Then, when the display processing is executed, image processing is performed for each layer type (layer type) based on various information stored in the processing information storage area 233aa, and the display image is displayed on the display screen. By configuring in this way, only some layers (for example, the main layer sr) out of the plurality of layers forming the display image are subjected to reduction processing, so that the It is possible for the player to visually recognize the display image displayed on the formed sub-layer fr.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to display different display modes using the display image formed using the same drawing list, so that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 792 to 794, the contents of control processing executed by the display control device 114 in the twenty-fifth control example will be described. In the twenty-fifth control example, command determination processing 25 (see F6302 in FIG. 792) is performed in place of the command determination processing (S6302 in FIG. 190) for the control processing contents of the display control device 114 in the first control example described above. 794. The difference is that the drawing process is executed, and that the drawing process 25 (see F6306 in FIG. 794) is executed instead of the drawing process. Other processing contents are the same, and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 792, the processing contents of command determination processing 25 (F6302) will be described. FIG. 792 is a flow chart showing the contents of the command determination process 25 (F6302). This command determination process 25 (F6302) is different from the command determination process (see S6302 in FIG. 190) in the first control example described above in that a process to be executed when a processing command is received is added. , are otherwise identical. Note that in the command determination process 25 (F6302) shown in FIG. 792, for convenience of explanation, the letters assigned to the respective processing contents are replaced with the above-described command determination process (S6302 in FIG. 190). Although "S" is changed to "F", since the control processing with the same number has the same content, the detailed description thereof is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 792, when the command determination process 25 (F6302) is executed, first, the same processes of F6401 to F6417 as the above-described command determination process (S6302 in FIG. 190) are executed. In the process of F6416, if it is determined that there is no display notification command (F6416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a processing command in the unprocessed commands (F6451). If so (F6451: Yes), the processing command process is executed (F6452), and then the process proceeds to F6401.

On the other hand, in the processing of F6451, if it is determined that there is no processing command (F6451: No), the same processing of F6420 to F6422 as the above-described command determination processing (S6302 in FIG. 190) is executed, and then the process proceeds to F6401. Transition.

Next, the processing contents of the processing command processing (F6452) executed in the command determination processing 25 (F6302) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 793 is a flow chart showing the contents of processing command processing (F6452). In this processing command processing (F6452), the processing command output from the sound lamp control device 113 (each layer forming the display image (sub-layer fr, main layer sr, spare layer yr, main layer hr) Processing for setting processing information used when processing a display image is executed based on a command including processing information set in units and information indicating a rendering period for processing each layer.

First, when the processing command process (F6452) is executed. The processing information corresponding to the processing command received this time is read from the image processing data storage area 234a3 (F6901), and the processing information included in the read information and its execution period (performance period) are stored in the processing information storage area 233aa. Set (F6902) and terminate this process. By executing this process, when executing the display process, each layer forming the display image can be processed (scale change, tilt change, transmittance change, etc.) on a layer-by-layer basis. It becomes possible.

Next, with reference to FIG. 794, details of drawing processing 25 (F6306), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 794 is a flow chart showing this rendering process 25 (F6306). This drawing process 25 (F6306) is different from the drawing process (see S6306 in FIG. 201) in the above-described first control example in that the display process is executed based on the processing information, and the rest is the same. In the drawing process 25 (F6306) shown in FIG. 794, for convenience of explanation, the letters assigned to each process content are replaced with " S" is changed to "F", but since the control processing with the same number has the same content, the detailed description thereof is omitted.

When the drawing process 25 (F6306) is executed, first, the same processes of F7801 to F7803 as S7801 to S7803 in the drawing process (see S6306 in FIG. 201) in the first control example described above are executed. After that, it is determined whether information for processing the display image is stored in the processing information storage area 233aa (F7851). The image information developed in the frame buffer on the side different from the frame buffer where the image drawing processing was executed is processed (F7852), displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (F7853), End this process. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of F7851 that there is no information in the processing information storage area 233aa, the image is developed in a frame buffer on the side different from the frame buffer where the image drawing process is executed based on the drawing list in this process. A display process is executed to display the image information displayed as it is on the third pattern display device 81 (F7854), and this process is terminated.

With this configuration, image information developed in the frame buffer based on the same drawing list is used to execute processing based on the processing information, so that a variety of display modes can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. It is possible to display. Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in the twenty-fifth control example, since processing can be executed in units of layer types (layer types) rather than on the entire display image, a specific layer (main layer sr) can be processed. On the other hand, by executing processing to reduce the display area, the player can see the display mode of a layer (sub-layer fr) formed behind a specific layer (main layer sr). becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to display images with greatly different display modes by using the image information developed in the frame buffer based on the same drawing list.

Furthermore, when the display image of the main layer sr where the third decorative pattern (number icon) is displayed is processed to change the aspect ratio, the third symbol displayed on the main layer sr There is a risk that the aspect ratio of the symbols (number icons) will also be deformed, and the third symbols that are difficult for the player to identify may be displayed. A preliminary layer yr is provided that is processed in the same manner as sr. Therefore, the third pattern with a deformed aspect ratio is configured so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it. By constructing in this way, the third pattern for indicating that the jackpot has been won is stopped and displayed although the third pattern for indicating that the winning has been lost is stopped and displayed. It is possible to prevent the players from being misunderstood.

In addition, in the twenty-fifth control example, in the display area of the spare layer yr, the position overlaps the display position where the third symbol (final stop third symbol) is stop-displayed on the main layer sr. By arranging a display mode for making the third pattern difficult to see and always setting the transmittance of the spare layer yr to 100%, the display normally displayed on the spare layer yr can be displayed. The mode is configured so that the player cannot visually recognize it, and when the main layer sr is processed to change the aspect ratio, by setting the transmittance of the spare layer yr to 0%, the deformation can be performed. It is configured so that the player cannot visually recognize the final stop third symbol. With this configuration, it is possible to develop the display mode for hiding the deformed final stop third pattern based on the drawing list in advance, so that the drawing list differs depending on the presence or absence of processing. can be saved.

<Regarding the first modification of the twenty-fifth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 795 and 796, a first modification of the twenty-fifth control example described above will be described. The first modification of the twenty-fifth control example is different in that the effect mode of the symbol stock ready-to-win effect executed in the twenty-fifth control example is different. Since other contents are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

In the twenty-fifth control example described above, as described above with reference to FIGS. 1 pattern icon 802a to 4th pattern icon 802d) are displayed (see FIG. 783(b)), and after execution of an effect (see FIG. 784(a)) of once lifting the plurality of pattern icons out of the display area, In conjunction with the action of the character 801 (movement of swinging down the sword), the display mode of the third pattern indicated by one of the plurality of pattern icons (the first pattern icon 802a to the fourth pattern icon 802d) is finally displayed. It is configured to execute an effect of stopping and displaying the third stop symbol. In addition, along with the action of the character 801 (movement of swinging down the sword), a plurality of symbol icons (first symbol icon 802a to fourth symbol icon 802d) are used to switch to the display mode of the third symbol that is in the reach state ( (See FIG. 784(b)).

That is, in the symbol stock ready-to-win effect in the above-described twenty-fifth control example, after the player has grasped the contents of the acquired (stocked) plurality of symbol icons, they are temporarily hidden and displayed again. Either the performance of stopping and displaying only the pattern corresponding to any of the stocked pattern icons, or the performance of stopping and displaying the stocked pattern icons including the third pattern in the ready-to-reach state. was to be executed.

In this way, after the player has grasped all the stocked pattern icons, by temporarily hiding the pattern icons, it is possible to make it difficult to understand what effect results are displayed using the pattern icons. , it is possible to easily provide a performance result with unexpectedness.

Therefore, for example, when the symbol stock ready-to-win effect is executed and a large number of symbol icons having a display mode corresponding to the third symbol to win the jackpot in the current ready-to-win state are acquired as the acquired (stocked) plurality of symbol icons. , as a pattern stock ready-to-win effect, the player expects that a stop display mode effect corresponding to the symbol icon in which only the final stop third pattern is stocked is executed, and in the current ready-to-win state, it is possible to win a jackpot. Even if a large number of symbol icons with a display mode corresponding to the 3rd symbol that should not be obtained have been obtained, as a symbol stock reach effect, the stock symbol icon including the display mode of the 3rd symbol that indicates the reach state will be displayed. Since it is possible to make the player expect that the performance of the corresponding stop display mode will be executed, the performance can be entertained while expecting the jackpot winning until the performance result of the symbol stock reach performance is stopped and displayed. there were.

However, in the symbol stock ready-to-win effect executed in the above-described twenty-fifth control example, only the final stop third symbol is stop-displayed in a display mode corresponding to the symbol icon, and the type of the third symbol in the ready-to-win state. is switched and displayed to the type (display mode) corresponding to the symbol icon, and both are after the symbol icon is once hidden. There is a problem that it is difficult to vary the degree of expectation for a big hit.

On the other hand, in the symbol stock reach effect in the first modification of the twenty-fifth control example, in the effect of temporarily lifting the plurality of symbol icons out of the display area from the state in which the plurality of symbol icons are displayed, the display screen part of the plurality of pattern icons displayed in the display screen is left on the display screen, and by using the left-displayed pattern icons, the effect of increasing the type of the third pattern indicating the reach state can be executed. ing.

With this configuration, when the symbol stock ready-to-reach effect is executed, the player is first interested in the type of the acquired (stocked) symbol icon, and then the effect of lifting the symbol icon ( The effect of hiding the displayed pattern icon) can be made interesting, and finally, the effect result of the pattern stock ready-to-win effect can be made interesting. Therefore, during the performance period in which the pattern stock reach performance is executed, it is possible to set the timing at which the player pays attention to the performance contents at various timings, and the performance that keeps the player interested is executed. It is possible to enhance the performance effect.

In the first modification of the twenty-fifth control example, when the symbol stock ready-to-win effect is executed, the third symbol display during the ready-to-win state is performed in the same manner as the symbol stock ready-to-win effect in the twenty-fifth control example. A 1-symbol icon 802a is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 795, the first pattern icon 802a is displayed in the display mode "9" corresponding to the third pattern type "9". That is, in the example shown in FIG. 795, since the type of the third symbol indicating the reach state is "1", the third symbol corresponding to "9" indicated by the display mode of the first symbol icon 802a is the final stop number. When the symbols are stopped and displayed as 3 symbols, the combination of the 3rd symbols indicating that the win is lost is made.

Thus, in this modification, when the symbol stock ready-to-win effect is executed, the type of the symbol icon to be displayed first is the type of the third symbol to be won out of the third symbol in the ready-to-reach state. It is configured to be a type corresponding to With this configuration, when the first symbol icon is stopped and displayed in the symbol stock ready-to-win effect (the state shown in FIG. 795(a)), the ready-to-win state displayed on the display screen. To prevent a player from misunderstanding that he or she has won a jackpot because the display modes attached to a total of three patterns, that is, three patterns (two) and a pattern icon (one) are the same. can be suppressed.

<26th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 800 to 827. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-sixth control example adds a new variable performance as a variable performance to be executed in a state where the normal state is set as the game state to the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-second control example described above. The difference is that a new variable performance is added as a variable performance executed in the state where the time saving state is set.

Here, among the variable effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-sixth control example, the variable effects different from the above-described twenty-second control example will be briefly described.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine 10 capable of executing an operation presentation based on the operation content of an operation means (frame button 22, etc.) that a player can operate. Further, as an effect mode of the operation effect, for example, there is a effect mode of decreasing the physical strength of the enemy character (hereinafter referred to as a gauge reduction effect).

When this gauge reduction effect is executed as an effect mode of the operation effect, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is performed by allowing the player to operate the operation means (frame button 22, etc.) during a predetermined operation valid period. A performance of gradually decreasing the physical strength value (HP gauge) displayed on the screen is executed, and the performance result of the executed operation performance is advantageous to the player (for example, a performance result indicating winning of a jackpot). In this case, the physical strength value (HP gauge) of the enemy character becomes 0 and an effect to defeat the enemy character is executed. In the case of the effect result indicating winning, an effect is executed in which the enemy character counterattacks while the enemy character's physical strength (HP gauge) remains.

In other words, when the above-described gauge reduction effect is executed, the player is interested in the degree of reduction of the HP gauge during the operation valid period. However, as described above, in the conventional gauge decrease effect, the physical strength value that can be finally decreased is determined according to the result of the effect. If the decrease in the physical strength value stops in the middle of the gauge reduction effect, the effect result will be displayed to indicate that the effect result is disadvantageous to the player. There is a problem that it is easily predicted ahead of time, and the performance effect cannot be enhanced.

On the other hand, in the twenty-sixth control example, it is possible to set a non-decrease period in which the physical strength value is not decreased regardless of the result of the effect during a part of the operation effective period during which the gauge decrease effect is executed. there is By configuring in this way, even if the reduction of the physical strength value is stopped in the middle of the gauge decrease effect, the possibility of the result of the effect being advantageous to the player can be left. You can enjoy the gauge reduction effect to the end.

Specifically, each time the physical strength value is decreased based on the operation of the operating means, a rush lottery is executed to determine whether or not to set a non-decrease period, and if the rush lottery is won, the non-decrease period is set. It is configured as follows. Then, when the non-decrease period is set, an effect in which the physical strength value is not decreased is executed until a predetermined time elapses or until the cancellation lottery for whether or not to cancel the non-decrease period is won. It is configured as follows. In this way, by adding processing for varying the degree of reduction of the physical strength value even while the gauge reduction effect is being executed, the player can perform the same operation on the operation means. Even in such a case, the reduction pattern of the physical strength value in the gauge decrease performance can be increased more easily than in the case of setting only based on the predetermined performance pattern when the gauge decrease performance is executed, so that the performance effect can be enhanced. can.

In addition, in the twenty-sixth control example, the winning probability of the cancellation lottery is configured to be different based on the remaining physical strength at the time when the non-decrease period is set and the effect result of the gauge decrease effect being executed. The higher the remaining physical strength value, the higher the winning probability of the release lottery. By configuring in this way, when the non-decrease period is set at the beginning of the gauge reduction effect, it is easier to win the release lottery than when the non-decrease period is set at the end of the gauge decrease effect. Therefore, even though the gauge decrease effect was executed, the immediately set non-decrease period continues for a long time, and the physical strength value is reduced to the value that can be decreased by this gauge decrease effect. It is possible to suppress the frequent occurrence of situations that cannot be caused.

Further, the probability of winning the cancellation lottery is higher when the performance result of the gauge reduction performance being executed becomes an advantageous performance result than when the performance result becomes a disadvantageous performance result. Here, in the twenty-sixth control example, the case where the effect result of the gauge decrease effect is advantageous to the player is higher than the case where the effect result is disadvantageous to the player. The physical strength value is greatly reduced (the remaining physical strength value is set to 0) by pressing the player so that the effect is easily executed. In other words, the greater the physical strength value that can be decreased by the current gauge reduction effect, the higher the winning probability of the cancellation lottery. By configuring in this way, the production result of the gauge reduction production is an advantageous production result When the non-decrease period is set in the gauge reduction production, the production result of the gauge reduction production becomes a disadvantageous production result It is possible to make it easier to win the release lottery than when the non-decrease period is set in the gauge reduction effect, so even though the gauge decrease effect that can greatly reduce the physical strength value is executed, it does not decrease. It is possible to suppress the frequent occurrence of a situation where the period continues for a long time and the physical strength value cannot be reduced to a value that can be reduced by this gauge reduction effect.

In addition, in the twenty-sixth control example, an upper limit (limit) is set for the period during which the non-decrease period continues, and if the non-decrease period reaches the upper limit without winning the cancellation lottery, the non-decrease period is forced. configured to be released. With this configuration, even if the release lottery is used to randomize the timing at which the non-decrease period is released, the non-decrease period will not be won in the release lottery and the gauge decrease effect will end. is continued, and the production effect of the gauge decrease production is remarkably lowered.

Furthermore, in the twenty-sixth control example, when the non-decrease period is canceled and a decrease period in which the physical strength can be decreased is set, the physical strength is reduced according to the length of the set non-decrease period. It is configured to be able to execute the additional reduction performance to reduce. Specifically, when the non-decrease period is set with the effect result that the effect result of the current gauge decrease effect is advantageous to the player, or when the non-decrease period is set at the beginning of the gauge decrease effect, that is, , If the probability of winning the cancellation lottery is set high and the non-decrease period continues for a long time, the physical strength value can be greatly reduced by the additional reduction effect that is executed when the non-decrease period is canceled. configured to be possible.

By configuring in this way, even if the non-decrease period continues for a long time, the physical strength value can be greatly reduced by the additional decrease effect, so the game in which the non-decrease period continues for a long time. The player can also play the game while expecting that the performance result of the gauge reduction performance being executed will be a performance result that is advantageous to the player. In addition, it is possible to prevent frequent occurrence of a situation in which the physical strength value cannot be reduced to a value that can be reduced in the gauge reduction effect this time.

In addition, in the twenty-sixth control example, the effect pattern for decreasing the physical strength value is made different according to the operation method of the operation means of the player during the gauge reduction effect. Specifically, when the player continuously presses the operating means during the operation valid period in the gauge reduction effect (so-called long press operation), and when the player continuously presses the operating means (so-called , in the case of performing a continuous hit operation), and in the case of executing a long press operation, the effect pattern that allows setting of the above-mentioned non-decrease period is determined. , when the continuous hitting operation is executed, an effect pattern in which the above-described non-decrease period is not set (no rush lottery is executed) is determined.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the process of decreasing the physical strength value in the gauge decrease effect for showing the same effect result according to the operation method of the operating means. Therefore, since it is possible to make it easier for the player who wants to execute the gauge decrease effect in various effect patterns to operate the operation means by different operation methods, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced. can improve interest in

Further, in the twenty-sixth control example, the non-decrease period can be forcibly canceled by canceling the long-pressing operation on the operation means. In other words, during the gauge decrease effect prompting the player to operate (press down) the operation means, the player can be provided with an option to stop the operation of the operation means. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the options of operation methods for the operation means.

In addition, in the twenty-sixth control example, when a long press operation is executed for the gauge reduction effect, the effect scenario for decreasing the physical strength value progresses according to the duration of the long press operation, and the effect scenario is continued. It is configured such that the longer the time, the easier it is to set the effect scenario in which the physical strength value is likely to decrease. When the long-pressing operation in progress is canceled halfway, the update of the pressing duration is interrupted, and when the long-pressing operation is performed again, the interrupted pressing duration can be taken over and updated. are doing. Therefore, even if the long-pressing operation is interrupted in the middle, it is possible to make it easier to continue operating the operating means.

Further, as described above, when the non-decrease period can be forcibly canceled by canceling the long-pressing operation on the operation means, and when the long-pressing operation being executed is canceled in the middle, When the update of the pressing duration is interrupted and the long pressing operation is performed again, the interrupted pressing duration can be taken over and updated. By configuring in this way, the player who is executing the long-pressing operation during the gauge reduction effect is interrupted once in the middle of the long-pressing operation, rather than continuing to perform the long-pressing operation. When the long-pressing operation is performed again, the non-decrease period is shorter, and it is possible to provide a situation in which the physical strength value can be greatly decreased in the gauge decrease effect.

In addition, conventionally, by executing the variable production for showing the result of the special symbol lottery in various production modes, the period in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a lottery result other than the big win (lost) is long. There is a pachinko machine 10 that prevents a player from quickly getting bored with the game even if the game continues. In such a conventional type pachinko machine 10, the ratio of the selection ratio when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and the ratio of the selection when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot is adjusted. Various performance modes with different big hit winning expectations can be determined, and based on the result of a special pattern lottery corresponding to the variable performance and the performance lottery result for determining the performance mode of the variable performance. By constructing the performance mode so as to be determinable, even when a game in which the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is a lottery result other than the big win (loss) continues a plurality of times, the player's degree of expectation for the big win is increased. Since it is possible to execute various variable performances with different values, the player can play the game while having an appropriate sense of anticipation for a big win.

However, in the conventional pachinko machine 10, the effect mode of the variable effect for indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is lost is determined by lottery (lottery lottery), so depending on the case, it may take a long time. In the meantime, there is a problem that only the variable performance with low expectation of winning the jackpot is executed, and the player easily gets bored with the game. In addition, there is a problem that the player selects a plurality of times in a short period of time an effect mode in which the selection ratio is defined so as to increase the expectation of winning a big win, which gives the player a sense of distrust.

On the other hand, in the twenty-sixth control example, information (production history information) regarding the performance mode of the variable performance executed in the past and a variable performance (loss) for indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out Based on the information about the number of times the variable performance) is continuously executed (the number of consecutive failures), the performance mode of the variable performance can be determined.

Specifically, a specific counter value (the value of the execution effect counter) is added based on the increase in the number of times of consecutive failures, and when the value of the execution effect counter reaches a specific value (for example, 50), the variable effect As a data table referred to when determining the performance mode, a special performance mode selection table different from the data table normally referred to (normal performance mode selection table) is referred to, and the jackpot expectation degree is It is configured to make it easier to determine a high presentation mode than in normal times.

By configuring in this way, a variable performance in a performance mode with a high degree of expectation for a big win can be executed periodically, so that only the variable performance with a low degree of expectation for winning a big win is executed, and the player gets bored with the game. can be made difficult to occur.

Further, in the twenty-sixth control example, the process of subtracting the value of the execution effect counter described above can be executed. In this case, the value of the execution effect counter is decremented according to the determined effect mode. Concretely, when the performance mode with a relatively high degree of expectation for winning a jackpot is determined as the performance mode of the variable performance, the value of the execution performance counter is subtracted by 30.例文帳に追加

By configuring in this way, immediately after execution of the failure variation performance in the performance mode with high expectation of winning the big hit, the failure variation performance in which the performance mode is determined by referring to the special performance mode selection table is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustfulness due to the continuous execution of the deviating variable performance in a performance mode with a high expectation of winning the jackpot.

In addition, in the twenty-sixth control example, the value of the execution effect counter described above is configured to be able to execute the process of adding more than the number of executions of the special symbol variation. When the performance mode of the stage with the lowest expectation of winning is set as the performance mode of the chance-up performance in which the expectation of winning increases in stages, for example, the performance mode of the chance-up performance in which the expectation of winning increases in stages (the chance-up performance is executed) If the probability of winning is higher if the chance-up effect is not executed despite the fact that the It is constructed so that a large value of "2" is added to the execution performance counter.

By constructing in this way, the chance-up performance with a lower expectation of the big win (lower than the case where the chance-up performance is not executed) than the case where the special symbol variation is continued to be executed calmly without the chance-up performance being executed. is executed, it is possible to make it easier to execute the losing variation performance in a performance mode with a high expectation of winning the jackpot at a short interval.

In addition, in the twenty-sixth control example, when determining the effect mode with reference to the special effect mode selection table, the type of effect mode is determined based on the information regarding the effect mode of the previously executed deviating variable effect. are configured to be different. Specifically, it is structured so as to make it difficult to determine a performance mode with a high degree of expectation for winning a jackpot determined by referring to a normal performance mode selection table referred to in normal times by referring to a special performance mode selection table. ing. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to determine the same performance mode for the outlier fluctuation performance, so that the content is different from the normal time performance mode selection table in which the normal jackpot winning expectation is stipulated. Even if a performance mode can be determined by referring to a special performance mode selection table in which various performance modes are defined, it is possible to prevent the degree of expectation for winning a jackpot for a specific performance mode from remarkably lowering. .

<Regarding the production contents executed in the 26th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 800 to 809, the content of the characteristic effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-sixth control example will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 800 to 806, the contents of the battle effect executed during the time saving state will be described. This battle production is a variation production executed during a special symbol variation period for showing the result of one special symbol lottery. When the value (HP value) decreases to 0 (when the enemy character is defeated), the effect result of the effect mode (victory mode) indicating the winning of the jackpot is displayed, and finally the physical strength value (HP value) of the enemy character is displayed. is 1 or more, the effect is displayed in which the effect result of the effect mode (defeat mode) indicating a lost win is displayed.

In this battle production, it is possible to execute a preemptive attack production (first part production) in which allied characters attack enemy characters, and an attack production (second part production) in which allied characters directly attack enemy characters. When the battle effect is executed, the above-mentioned second part effect is always executed, and whether or not the above-described first part effect is executed is determined according to the determined effect pattern of the battle effect. It is configured as follows.

Then, the battle effect in which the first part effect is executed (the first part effect and the battle effect in which the second part effect is executed) is the battle effect in which the first part effect is not executed (only the second part effect is performed). It is configured to be more likely to be selected when a big win is won in a special symbol lottery rather than a battle performance to be executed). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the battle effect while expecting that the first part effect will be executed during the battle effect.

Further, when the battle effect in which the first part effect is executed is executed, the more the HP value of the enemy character is reduced in the first part effect, the higher the expectation of winning the jackpot. . By configuring in this way, when the first part performance is executed as the battle performance, that is, when the battle performance with a higher expectation of big win than the battle performance in which the first part performance is not executed is executed. , next, the amount of damage (the HP value to be reduced) given to the enemy character in the first part production can be made interesting.

Here, the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the battle effect is executed will be described. FIG. 800(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the battle effect is started. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of display contents displayed when the first part effect is executed).

As shown in FIG. 800(a), when the battle effect is started, a friendly character 801a imitating a hero is displayed in the main display area Dm formed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and then An enemy character 880a imitating a monster is displayed on the screen, and a display screen is displayed in which the ally character 801a and the enemy character 880a are facing each other. An HP gauge 890 is displayed as a display mode for indicating the physical strength value (HP value) corresponding to the displayed enemy character 880a. The characters "Defeat the enemy!" are displayed as a guidance mode. With this display, the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the effect being executed (battle effect) is intended to defeat the enemy character 880a.

Then, in the sub-display area Ds formed below the main display area Dm, there is a detailed guidance mode for explaining the content of the battle production in more detail. is displayed. In the twenty-sixth control example, similarly to the control examples described above, the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is divided into a display area (main display area Dm) in which a variable effect (battle effect) is executed, and a variable effect ( A display area (sub-display area Ds) in which the battle effect is not executed, and a detailed guidance mode in which the content of the effect being executed is explained in detail by characters is divided into a display area (sub-display area Ds) in which the variable effect (battle effect) is not executed ( It is configured to be displayed in the sub display area Ds).

By configuring in this way, the player is made to select and pay attention to the execution area of the variable effect executed using the moving image (animation) and the guidance notification executed using the still image (character). can be made easier.

As shown in FIG. 800(a), the upper right corner of the HP gauge 890 displays "MAX" indicating the upper limit of the HP of the enemy character 880a, and the upper left corner of the HP gauge 890 displays the HP of the enemy character 880a. "0" is displayed to indicate the lower limit of the HP of the enemy character 880a. It is shown occupying the entire area of gauge 890 .

In addition, in the twenty-sixth control example, as shown in FIG. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an index "50 %” index, or may be configured to display a more subdivided index.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to more clearly grasp the HP value of the enemy character 880a that decreases during the battle production. Also, by displaying not only the upper limit value and the lower limit value of the HP value, but also an index indicating values in between, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the degree of decrease in the remaining HP value indicated by the HP gauge 890 . Specifically, when the middle position of the HP gauge 890 displays a “50%” indicator indicating that the HP value is half of the upper limit, the entire area of the HP gauge 890 decreases. It is possible to make it easier for the player to predict that the HP value will decrease evenly.

In the twenty-sixth control example, the enemy character 880a to be confronted in the battle effect can be determined from different types, and the upper limit of the HP value is configured to differ according to the type of the selected enemy character 880a. are doing. Therefore, when the battle effect is executed, the enemy character 880a is made to appear while the ally character 801a in which the same character appears first is displayed first. By configuring in this way, it is possible to lengthen the period from the start of the battle effect until the type of the enemy character 880a to be confronted in the current battle effect is notified, so that the effect executed by the player can be lengthened. It is possible to suppress early boredom.

In addition, in the twenty-sixth control example, when reporting the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a using the HP gauge 890 for indicating the HP value of the enemy character 880a, the percentage (% ) is configured to be displayed. Therefore, even when an enemy character 880a having a different upper limit HP value is displayed, a battle effect can be executed without changing the display mode of the HP gauge 890. FIG. However, in this case, even if an enemy character 880a of a different type appears, the player cannot tell whether the enemy character 880a has a high upper limit HP value or a low upper limit HP value just by looking at the display mode of the HP gauge 890. Therefore, when an enemy character 880a with a high upper limit HP value is displayed as the type of enemy character 880a, an HP As a notification mode for notifying that the upper limit value of the value is the enemy character 880a that is higher than the other characters, it is preferable to display the characters "Formidable Enemy Appears". On the other hand, when an enemy character 880a whose upper limit HP value is lower than that of the other enemy character 880a is displayed, an enemy character 880a whose upper limit HP value is lower than the other enemy character 880a is displayed near the displayed enemy character 880a. It is preferable to display characters of "weak and small appearance" as a notification mode for notifying that it is. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily predict the effect result of the current battle effect when the enemy character 880a is displayed during the battle effect.

Furthermore, as another method for achieving the same effect, a numerical value indicating the upper limit of the HP value of the appearing enemy character 880a is displayed along with the "MAX" displayed on the HP gauge 890. Alternatively, all types of enemy characters 880a that may appear in the battle production may be displayed with a rank of ease of defeat (a rank that is likely to be selected when winning a jackpot). Also, the display mode (length) of the HP gauge 890 may be changed according to the upper limit of the HP value.

In the battle production, when the first part production (production in which a companion performs a preemptive attack on an enemy) is executed, as shown in FIG. An attack effect is executed, and the remaining HP value displayed on the HP gauge 890 is reduced according to the damage given to the enemy character 880a by the attack of the fellow character 801c. Specifically, the enemy character 880a displayed using the diagram 800 has a maximum HP value of "100", and since the companion character 801c preemptively attacked and dealt damage of "40", the remaining HP value is 890a. The display area is reduced to 60% of the HP gauge 890 as a whole. In a display area of the HP gauge 890 where the remaining HP value 890a is not displayed, a damage amount 890b indicating the reduced HP value of the enemy character 880a is displayed. That is, the display area of the HP gauge 890 is always configured to be either the remaining HP value 890a or the damage amount 890b.

By configuring in this way, the player can compare the amount of damage already dealt to the enemy character 880a with the remaining HP value. (Production contents) can be easily predicted.

Then, in the sub display area Ds, characters of "Preemptive attack!! The enemy was damaged!!" is displayed.

In the twenty-sixth control example, by configuring the damage amount 890b to be displayed continuously, it is possible to determine how much the HP value is compared to the case where the HP value is the upper limit value when the remaining HP value is decreased. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the damage amount 890b that has already been dealt may not be displayed. In this case, it is only necessary to display the display mode corresponding to the remaining HP value on the display screen. It is possible to simplify the control process for displaying information about.

Also, in the twenty-sixth control example, as shown in FIG. By notifying the player of the damage amount (remaining HP value) at the degree of decrease of 890, the display control for displaying a specific numerical value and the processing for calculating a specific numerical value are simplified. However, without being limited to this, the HP value (damage amount) of the enemy character 880a reduced by attacking the enemy character 880a may be displayed numerically.

After the first part effect is completed, the second part effect is executed in which the friendly character 801a directly attacks the enemy character 880a. In this second part effect, an effect of decreasing the remaining HP value 890a of the enemy character 880a is executed based on the operation of the effect button 22 by the player. Next, with reference to FIGS. 801 and 802, the display contents displayed during the second part effect in the battle effect will be described. FIG. 801(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the second part of the battle effect is started, and FIG. 801(b) is during the second part of the battle effect. FIG. 802 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when a continuous hitting operation is performed on the effect button 22. FIG. 802 shows a long press operation on the effect button 22 during the second part effect in the battle effect. is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when is executed.

As shown in FIG. 801(a), when the second part effect is executed, the effect in which the friendly character 801a directly fights the enemy character 880a is executed in the main display area Dm. Since this second part effect is performed after the first part effect described above with reference to FIG. 800 ends, the remaining HP value 890a displayed on the HP gauge 890 is The indicated value is displayed continuously.

On the left side of the display area Dm, a display effect button Sw6 imitating the effect button 22 and an operation effect are provided as a suggestion mode for suggesting the start of an operation effect for the player to operate the effect button 22. A validity period gauge ga4 for indicating the validity period (operation valid period) of is displayed. In addition, the characters "ready for repeated hits" are displayed as a guidance mode for guiding the operation content during the operation presentation. That is, by displaying the suggestive mode shown in FIG. 801(a) before the operation effect is actually started, the operation effect that requires the player to repeatedly press the effect button 22 is displayed. Since it is possible to notify the player that the game will be started soon in an easy-to-understand manner, the player can be made to prepare for the continuous hitting operation before the operation performance is started. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the operation effect is suddenly started and the effect button 22 cannot be operated in the initial stage of the effective period.

In addition, in the twenty-sixth control example, as shown in FIG. A countdown display may be performed to indicate the timing at which is started. By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player of the timing at which the operation effect is started in a more comprehensible manner.

Furthermore, subtraction of the effective period gauge is started in a manner including a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) before the effective period (operation effective period) in the operation effect is actually set (operation effect is started). to). That is, the operation performance is started earlier than the timing at which the effective period is actually set by the reaction time until the player who immediately grasps that the operation performance has started presses the performance button 22 for the first time ( It may be configured to start subtraction of the validity period gauge). With this configuration, the player can easily press the effect button 22 immediately after the effective period is set, so that the operation effect can be enjoyed to the maximum.

Here, as shown in FIG. 801(a), in the twenty-sixth control example, it is configured to execute an operation effect in which the effect button 22 is operated repeatedly. Here, in the pachinko machine 10 in recent years, instead of repeatedly hitting the operating means (the effect button 22), even if the long-pressing operation is performed, there is something that can internally execute the same pressing control as the repeated hitting operation. be. By configuring in this way, even for a player who has difficulty in executing repeated hitting operations that require multiple operations of the operating means in a short period of time, the repeated hitting operations can be performed simply by continuously pressing the operating means. Since it is possible to provide an effect similar to that in the case of , the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

However, if the long press operation is executed instead of the repeated hit operation, the player can perform the high speed repeat operation (for example, once every 0.5 seconds) during the period in which the long press operation continues. Since the same pressing control as in the situation in which the button is repeatedly pressed) is executed, based on the number of times the effect button 22 is pressed (number of repeated hits) during a predetermined effective period (for example, 10 seconds) In the operation effect that gradually destroys obstacles, the number of presses (number of repeated hits) increases in a short period of time when the long press operation is performed compared to the normal repeated hit operation. The effect result of the operation effect (the final destruction mode of the obstacle in the current operation effect) is likely to be displayed early, and a situation occurs in which the operation effect using the effective period to the full extent cannot be provided. was there. Further, if the interval at which the same pressing control as when the effect button 22 is pressed is extended as the pressing control for the long pressing operation, the effect result of the operation effect cannot be displayed within the valid period. There is a possibility that the problem of (the pressing control cannot be executed for the number of times required to display the final destruction mode of the obstacle in the current operation effect) occurs.

On the other hand, if the mode of destruction of obstacles in the repeated hitting operation presentation is determined based on the content of the depression control (pressing control during high-speed repeated hitting operation) executed when the long-pressing operation is executed, the normal repeated hitting operation will not be possible. It is not possible to display the effect result of the operation effect to the player who is executing the operation (for example, the continuous hitting operation of pressing the effect button 22 at intervals of once per second) (the failure in this operation effect There is a possibility that the pressing control cannot be executed for the number of times required to display the final destruction mode of the object.

In other words, it is possible to execute a continuous hitting operation performance for repeatedly hitting the performance button 22, and in addition to the continuous hitting operation to the performance button 22, the continuous hitting operation performance is advanced even when the long pressing operation to the performance button 22 is executed. In the pachinko machine 10 having a function capable of performing repeated hitting operations, if the same pressing control is executed when the effect button 22 is repeatedly hit and when the effect button 22 is long-pressed, the repeated hitting operation effect is being performed. However, there is a problem that it is difficult to provide a suitable effect (repeating operation effect) to both the player who repeatedly hits the effect button 22 and the player who presses and holds the effect button 22 for a long time.

On the other hand, in the twenty-sixth control example, when the effect button 22 is long-pressed during the continuous-hit operation effect, the effect scenario is determined according to the length of the period in which the long-press operation continues. , an effect is executed in which the effect mode (HP gauge) is varied (decreased) at predetermined intervals (for example, 0.5 second intervals), and a non-variable period (non-decrease period) in which the effect mode is not changed. is configured to be configurable.

By configuring in this way, the operation (pressing) of the effect button 22 by the player is effectively performed in the case of executing the long-pressing operation, which makes it easier to change the effect mode in a shorter period than in the case of executing the continuous hitting operation. It is possible to provide a period during which the effect mode does not change during the identifiable effective period (operation effective period). Therefore, even when a long-pressing operation is performed, it is possible to prevent the presentation result of the current operation presentation from being displayed with a large remaining period remaining, thereby reducing the presentation effect of the operation presentation. can be done.

In the twenty-sixth control example, as shown in FIG. 801(b), when the continuous hitting operation is executed in the second part effect of the battle effect, the physical strength of the enemy character 880a is increased according to the pressing operation of the selection button 22. An effect of decreasing the value (the display area of the remaining HP value 890a of the HP gauge 890 gradually becomes shorter) is executed. Specifically, in the twenty-sixth control example, an effective period of 3 seconds is set as a period during which the operation (pressing) of the effect button 22 by the player is determined to be valid during the period during which the second part effect is executed. When the effective period is set (when the player enters into the period during which the effect button 22 can be operated), a ``continuous hit preparation'' ( (See FIG. 801(a)).

Furthermore, the validity period gauge ga4 displayed below the display effect button Sw6 is variably displayed according to the passage of time. As shown in FIG. 801(b), the effective period gauge ga4 uses the size (length) of all display areas to indicate the length of the current effective period, and immediately after the effective period is set. , in a state where the remaining valid period has not decreased, the remaining valid period ga4a is displayed so as to occupy the entire area of the valid period gauge ga4 (see, for example, FIG. 801(a)), and then the valid period The display mode of the valid period gauge ga4 is variably displayed so that the display area of the remaining valid period ga4a gradually becomes smaller (shorter) from the right end to the left end of the gauge ga4. Of the display areas of the valid period gauge ga4, an elapsed time ga4b indicating the elapsed time since the valid period was set is displayed in a display area where the remaining valid period ga4a is not displayed.

That is, the longer the elapsed time after the effective period is set (the shorter the remaining period of the effective period), the smaller (shorter) the ratio of the remaining effective period ga4a to the display area of the effective period gauge ga4. , the effective period ga4a is variably displayed so that the elapsed time ga4b occupies a larger (longer) proportion.

With this configuration, the player can easily grasp the remaining time of the valid period in the current operation presentation only by confirming the display mode of the display of the valid period ga4. Furthermore, information corresponding to the length of the validity period set this time (display form of the validity period gauge ga4) and information indicating the already elapsed time (display form of the elapsed time ga4b) are displayed together. , the player can grasp the length of the remaining time of the validity period in more detail based on the length of time that has elapsed since the validity period was set.

In the twenty-sixth control example, as shown in FIG. By continuously displaying the corresponding information (the display mode of the valid period gauge ga4) and the information indicating the elapsed time (the display mode of the elapsed time ga4b) during the valid period, the valid period is displayed to the player. However, it is not limited to this, and only information indicating only the remaining time of the valid period (display mode of the remaining valid period ga4a) is variably displayed. Also good.

Note that the flow of decreasing the remaining HP value 890a of the HP gauge 890 in the case of executing the continuous hitting operation in the second part effect of the battle effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 802(a).

Next, with reference to FIG. 802, an example of a display screen when a long press operation is performed in the second part effect of the battle effect will be described. As shown in FIG. 802, when the long press operation is executed in the second part effect, the same effect screen as when the repeated hit operation is executed is displayed. It should be noted that only the display mode of the display effect button Sw6 is different from that during the continuous pressing operation, and in order to indicate that the current long-pressing operation is being performed, the display mode of the display effect button Sw6 is continuously pressed. A display mode indicating the state is displayed, and the letters "Continuous hits (during long press)" are displayed above to indicate that a long press operation is currently being performed (a state in which a long press operation is determined).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the long-pressing operation is normally determined in the second part effect, which is a repeated-hit operation effect. Therefore, the display mode of the HP gauge 890 does not change for a certain period of time even though the effect button 22 is long-pressed during the second part effect. It is possible to make the user easily understand that the long press operation is not determined to be invalid even if the operation is not performed.

Furthermore, in the twenty-sixth control example, when it is determined that the long-pressing operation is being performed, regardless of the result of the lottery for decreasing the remaining HP value 890a, the moving image ( animation) is displayed on the right side of the main display area Dm. In this way, it is possible to notify that the player is properly operating the production button 22 (continuous hitting operation or long-pressing operation) during the continuous hitting operation production, so that the production button 22 is properly operated. Since it is possible to provide a bonus image that will not be provided to a player who does not have it, the player can operate the operation means (the effect button 22 ) can be made easier to operate.

Therefore, for example, even if the effect result of the current battle effect is a effect result in which the enemy character 880a is defeated, that is, the effect result in which the remaining HP value 890a does not become 0, the operating means (effect button 22) can be operated. As a result, it is possible to provide the privilege video, so that it is possible to suppress the player's desire to operate the operation means from significantly declining.

In addition, as the information included in the privilege video, it is preferable to be configured to be able to provide information about the game of the pachinko machine 10. For example, it has a setting function that can set the probability of winning a jackpot by a special symbol lottery from a plurality of set values. If so, it is preferable to include information corresponding to the currently set value in the privilege video to be reproduced. By constructing in this way, it is possible not only to provide valuable images to the player, but also to acquire information useful for the game, so that the player is motivated to operate the operation means to watch the privilege image. be able to.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 803 and 804, the flow of change in the display mode of the HP gauge 890 in battle production will be described. FIG. 803 shows the flow of changes in the display mode of the HP gauge 890 when the performance button 22 is hit repeatedly. When the operation (pressing) to the production button 22 is determined in the state shown in FIG. A variable display is executed to reduce the display area of the remaining HP value 890a of the gauge 890 (display mode indicating that the remaining HP value has decreased by the decrease value “A”). A damage amount 890b is displayed where the display area of the remaining HP value 890a is reduced. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player how much damage has been done to the enemy character 880a in an easy-to-understand manner.

On the other hand, when the effect button 22 is long pressed, as shown in FIG. 804, the non-decrease period is set. When the long-pressing operation is performed in the state shown in FIG. 804(a) and the decrease value "A" and the non-decrease period are set, the display area of the remaining HP value 890a of the HP gauge 890 is reduced (remaining HP value is reduced by the decrement value "A"). Then, a non-decrease period 890c indicating that the non-decrease period is set is displayed in the area where the display area of the remaining HP value 890a is reduced (see FIG. 804(b)).

The non-decrease period is configured to be canceled when any one of the termination conditions of the cancellation lottery, the elapse of the upper limit period, or the cancellation of the long-press operation is satisfied, and the non-decrease period is the upper limit period (2 seconds), an effect is executed in which the display area of the non-decrease period 890c is reduced so as to indicate the remaining period. Then, at the timing when the non-decrease period is canceled, the display area of the HP gauge 890 is displayed with the remaining HP value 890a and the damage amount 890b.

The display area of the non-decrease period 890c is configured to evenly decrease corresponding to the remaining period until the non-decrease period reaches the upper limit period (2 seconds). Therefore, the player can predict the maximum remaining period during which the non-decrease period can continue based on the variable state of the display mode of the non-decrease period 890c. Further, when the termination condition other than the elapse of the upper limit period is satisfied, the display area of the non-decrease period 890c is hidden in 0.1 second regardless of the display mode (size of the display area) of the non-decrease period 890c. is executed, and the area where the non-decrease period 890c is displayed is switched to the display area of the damage amount 890b. With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the non-decrease period has been canceled in an easy-to-understand manner.

Then, when a specific termination condition (won a cancellation lottery, elapse of the upper limit period) is satisfied among a plurality of termination conditions for canceling the non-decrease period, without operating the production button 22, An additional reduction effect for reducing the remaining HP value is executed. Here, when the decrease value "B" is determined as the additional decrease effect, as shown in FIG. is reduced (a display mode indicating that the remaining HP value has decreased by the decrease value "B").

In the twenty-sixth control example, as the battle effect in the state where the non-decrease period 890c is displayed, the battle effect corresponding to the content of the attack at the timing when the non-decrease period 890c is set is continuously executed. However, without being limited to this, the battle during the non-decrease period 890c is performed in a production mode for indicating the remaining time until the non-decrease period 890c is canceled or the determination result of whether or not the cancellation condition is satisfied. You may determine the production|presentation mode of production|presentation.

In other words, as a condition for canceling the non-decrease period, if you win the cancellation lottery, you will have a production mode to indicate that you have won the cancellation lottery (for example, once the characters face each other, the interval between them will be widened, and the next attack will be It is preferable to make it possible to determine the presentation mode provided) and the presentation mode for indicating that the player did not win in the cancellation lottery (for example, the presentation mode in which the characters are stuck together). With this configuration, it is possible for the player to predict whether or not the non-decrease period is likely to end even by grasping the content of the battle effect executed in the main display area Dm. .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 805 to 808, the content of the subjugation ready-to-win effect will be described. FIG. 805(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed at the start of the subjugation reach production, and FIG. 805(b) is displayed when starting the first attack in the subjugation reach production. FIG. 806(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content displayed during the first attack in the subjugation reach production, and FIG. 806(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content displayed 807(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed when starting the second attack in the subjugation ready-to-win production, and FIG. 807(a) is displayed during the second attack in the subjugation reach production. FIG. 807(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content, and FIG. 807(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content displayed when starting the third attack in the subjugation reach effect, and FIG. , is a diagram showing an example of display contents displayed during the third attack in the subjugation ready-to-win effect.

When the subjugation reach is executed, a display area HR50 is formed in the main display area Dm, and a display mode for showing the history of three attack presentations executed during the subjugation reach is displayed. Since FIG. 805(a) is a display screen showing the stage before the execution of the first attack effect, it shows the first history HR50a indicating the first attack effect history and the second attack effect history. Neither the second history HR50b nor the third history HR50c indicating the history of the third attack effect are displayed in a display mode indicating the history.

Also, in subjugation reach, the effect of subjugating three enemy characters 880a to 880c is executed, and HP gauges 881a to 881c that indicate the physical strength (HP value) of each enemy character 880a to 880c are displayed on each enemy character 880a to 880c. displayed in close proximity. As an effect for determining the ally character to attack in the current attack effect, an ally character determination effect is displayed in which the first ally character 801a and the second ally character 801b are alternately enlarged. .

As the subjugation reach effect, a effect is executed in which various types of friendly characters 801a attack enemy characters 880a to 880c three times.

The types of the allied characters 801a are a first allied character 801a imitating a hero who can easily inflict great damage on one enemy character, and a second allied character 801a imitating a rabbit who can easily inflict damage on multiple enemy characters. The ally character 801b is configured to be selectable. In this way, by configuring the easy-to-execute attack content to differ according to the type of the allied character that executes the attack, the content of the attack that has already been executed (remaining HP value of each enemy character) during the subjugation reach effect ), it is possible to vary the degree of expectation for the type of friendly character that executes the attack.

In other words, when the friendly character 801b executes the first and second attacks in the subjugation reach effect, each of the enemy characters 880a to 880c tends to be in a state where the remaining HP value is low. ) is easier to defeat all enemy characters 880a to 880c than the allied character 801a. can do. Also, when the friendly character 801a executes the first and second attacks, it is easier to execute the third attack while two of the enemy characters 880a to 880c have been defeated. Therefore, when the type of the friendly character that executes the third attack is the friendly character 801a, the enemy characters 880a to 880c are more effective as a result of the subjugation reach effect than when the friendly character 801b is used. It is possible to make it easier to produce a performance result of defeating all of them.

FIG. 805(b) shows a display screen in which, as the first attack effect, an attack content determination effect for determining the attack content is executed after the first teammate character is determined. As shown in FIG. 805(b), when the first ally character 801a is determined, information indicating the number of attacks is displayed first, and then information indicating the amount of damage is displayed as the attack content determination effect. It is configured so that In FIG. 805(b), the number-of-attacks roulette HR51a formed in the display area HR51 is stopped at "1", and the damage amount roulette HR51b is "fluctuating".

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. A stop display is displayed, and the attack content presentation ends.

When the attack content presentation ends, next, the attack presentation shown in FIG. 806(a) is executed. In this attack effect, an attack corresponding to the effect result of the attack content effect is executed near the center of the main display area Dm. In FIG. 806(a), the attack number roulette HR51a formed in the display area HR51 is stopped at "1" and the damage amount roulette HR51b is stopped at "large". On the other hand, an attack production that deals a large amount of damage is displayed. Then, in order to guide the content of the attack this time, the sub-display area Ds displays the characters "Severe damage to monster A" as a guidance mode.

When executing the second and third attack effects, the same effects are displayed. In FIG. Indicates a determined state. When the second ally character 801b is determined, the information indicating the number of attacks is displayed later, and the information indicating the amount of damage is displayed first as the attack content determination effect. In other words, the order of the information notified to the player in the attack content presentation is changed according to the type of the attacking ally character. In FIG. 806(b), the attack number roulette HR51a formed in the display area HR51 is in the state of "varying", and the damage amount roulette HR51b is stopped at "medium".

When the second attack content presentation is completed, next, the attack presentation shown in FIG. 807(a) is executed. In this attack effect, an attack corresponding to the effect result of the attack content effect is executed near the center of the main display area Dm. In FIG. 807(a), the attack number roulette HR51a formed in the display area HR51 is stopped and displayed at "3", and the damage amount roulette HR51b is stopped and displayed at "medium". An attack effect that deals medium damage is displayed. Then, since the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a has become 0, the sub-display area Ds displays the text "1 enemy defeated, 2 remaining".

Furthermore, in the twenty-sixth control example, only when the first attacking character and the second attacking character are different, as the third attack effect, a double attack effect in which a plurality of allied characters attack can be executed. are doing.

FIG. 807(b) shows an attack content effect when a double attack effect is executed. This double attack effect is more likely to cause great damage to a large number of enemy characters than other attack effects. It is structured so that it is easy to As shown in FIG. 807(b), before the ally character determination effect ends, the effect result of the attack content effect is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 808, attacks are executed by a plurality of ally characters. be.

With this configuration, the player is interested in the order in which the information used in the attack presentation is displayed in the presentation (friend character determination presentation, attack content presentation) until the attack presentation is executed. Since it is possible to have a

As described above, if the display order of the attack content effect is specified for the determined ally character, a part of the effect pattern in which the attack content effect is displayed in a display order different from the normal display order will be executed. should be configured to By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict various production elements (type of ally character, number of attacks, amount of damage) used in the attack production. In addition, the production patterns in which the attack content productions are displayed in a display order different from normal are configured to be more likely to be selected when the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is a big win than when the result is a loss. good. As a result, the player who notices that the attack performance has been executed in a performance mode different from usual can enjoy the subjugation ready-to-win performance while having a feeling of anticipation for winning the jackpot.

In addition, in this subjugation reach effect, different attacks can be executed depending on the type of the friendly character that executes the attack. As the number of enemy characters (number of attacks), "1" is more likely to be selected than other numbers, and as the amount of damage to be inflicted on the attack target, "large damage" is different from other damage amounts (medium damage, small damage etc.). Therefore, when the ally character 801a is selected as the type of ally character that executes an attack, the player pays attention to the amount of damage rather than the number of attacks. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 805(b), when the ally character 801a is selected, "attack count" and "damage amount" are displayed as the display order of the suggestive modes for sequentially indicating the details of the current attack. Order is determined.

On the other hand, when the ally character 801b is selected, multiple numbers are more likely to be selected than a single number as the number of enemy characters to be attacked (the number of attacks). "Medium damage" is configured to be more likely to be selected than other damage amounts (large damage, small damage). Therefore, when the ally character 801b is selected as the type of ally character that executes an attack, the player pays attention to the number of attacks rather than the amount of damage. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 806(b), when the ally character 801b is selected, "damage amount" and "number of attacks" are displayed as the display order of the suggestive modes for sequentially indicating the details of the current attack. Order is determined.

As described above, in the subjugation reach effect executed in the twenty-sixth control example, it is possible to determine the type of allied character that is likely to select a different attack content as the type of allied character that executes the attack. The display order of the suggestion mode for indicating the content of the attack is configured to be different according to the type of the ally character. Specifically, it is possible to display each of the plurality of elements (the number of attacks, the amount of damage) that determine the content of the attack as a suggestive mode, and the display order of the plurality of suggested modes to be displayed is the determined ally character. It is configured so that the display order is determined such that the element that is good at the type is displayed after the other elements.

With this configuration, even when the type of any friendly character is determined, it is possible to delay the timing at which the suggestive mode that the player pays attention to is displayed. During, you can enjoy the subjugation reach production.

In the twenty-sixth control example, the display order of the suggestive modes is determined according to the type of the determined friendly character. Among the elements (the number of attacks, the amount of damage), the display order of the suggestive mode corresponding to the element for which the content advantageous to the player is determined is determined after the other elements, or the content of the attack is determined. Among the plurality of elements (the number of attacks, the amount of damage) to be displayed, the display order of the suggested mode corresponding to the element for which the content advantageous to the player is determined is determined before the other elements. It may be configured to By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting the content of the next displayed suggestion mode based on the content of the previously displayed suggestion mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 809, the contents of the chance announcement effect executed in the twenty-sixth control example will be described. FIG. 809 is a diagram showing an example of a target aspect of the chance notice effect. In the twenty-sixth control example, by varying the display mode of the target mode used in the variable presentation for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, it is possible to execute the chance notice presentation for suggesting the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot. are doing.

For example, as shown in FIG. 809, a chance notice effect that changes the display mode (comment display mode Ch1) of the comment display section HR52 in which various comments are displayed, and a display mode of the pending pattern hr0 during execution (execution pending It is configured to be able to execute a chance notice effect by varying the display mode Ch2), a chance notice effect by varying the display mode (character display mode Ch3) of the character 801 used for the variable display, and the like.

The display mode of each target mode can be changed to 4 stages including the initial mode (default). It is configured so that the degree of expectation for a big hit increases every time. For example, the comment display mode Ch1 (see FIG. 809), which is the target mode of the chance notice effect, is set so that the chance notice effect of variably displaying the background color of the comment display section HR52 is executed according to the set stage level. It is configured so that "LV1" has a background color of "white", "LV2" has a background color of "yellow", "LV3" has a background color of "red", and "LV4" has a background color of "rainbow color". It consists of

Furthermore, in the twenty-sixth control example, when the period in which the chance advance notice effect is not executed continues for a predetermined period, the chance advance notice effect can be executed forcibly.

Here, with reference to FIG. 810, the flow of forcibly executing the chance announcement effect will be described. FIG. 810 is a diagram showing the number of special symbol variations and the flow of the chance-up effect to be executed. In accordance with the execution of the special symbol variation, a lottery is executed as to whether or not to execute the chance advance notice performance when setting the performance mode of the variable performance. Then, when the execution lottery for the chance notice effect is not won, 1 is added to the effect execution counter 223aah (see FIGS. 810(a) and 810(b)). Then, when the value of the production execution counter 223aah after addition reaches 50, the chance announcement production is forcibly executed.

In addition, when the execution lottery for the chance notice effect is won and the decided effect mode of the chance notice effect is a mode (LV2) with a low degree of expectation for the big win, the value of the effect execution counter 223aah is changed to the usual value of "1." ” and the low-expectation mode “1” are added. That is, "2" is added to the value of the effect execution counter 223aah for one special symbol variation (see FIG. 810(b)). By constructing in this way, it is possible to make the update contents of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol fluctuation and the value of the production execution counter 223aah different, so that whether the chance advance notice production is forcibly executed or not is determined by the chance advance notice production lottery. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the chance notice effect was executed based on the fact that the prize was won.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 810(c), when the chance notice effect is executed based on the winning of the chance notice effect lottery, there is a high degree of expectation for the big win with respect to the loss fluctuation effect (LV4). is set, the value of the effect execution counter 223aah is subtracted (30 subtraction). By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress execution of the chance notice effect with an excessively high degree of expectation in the loss variation effect.

In addition, in the twenty-sixth control example, the value of the effect execution counter 223aah is configured to be added each time the special symbol lottery is executed. A management means for managing the variation pattern (variation time) of is provided, and the value of the effect execution counter 223aah may be added each time the special symbol variation is executed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds).

By configuring in this way, according to the contents of the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol variation to be executed, it is possible to change the number of additions of the effect execution counter 223aah for one special symbol lottery. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the chance advance notice performance is executed at this time or whether the chance advance notice performance is executed based on the winning of the chance advance notice performance lottery.

In addition, regardless of the number of executions of the special symbol lottery, it is possible to forcibly execute the chance notice effect at predetermined intervals (predetermined intervals for the game time when the special symbol variation is performed), so the chance notice effect is performed. It is possible to suppress the long continuation of the game time which is not executed.

Furthermore, the variation pattern of the determined special symbol variation is made different according to the set game state, for example, when the time saving state is set than when the normal state is set, To facilitate the setting of a short variable time and to forcibly execute a chance notice performance based on the value of a performance execution counter 223aah regardless of which game state is set. , the frequency of forcibly executing the chance notice effect can be varied according to the set game state. In this case, when a game state advantageous to the player is set, a variation pattern with a short variation time is more likely to be set than when a game state disadvantageous to the player is set. should be configured to By configuring in this way, when a game state disadvantageous to the player is set, it is possible to forcibly execute the chance notice effect with a small number of times of execution of the special symbol lottery. It is possible to prevent a person from getting bored with the game early.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 capable of storing the right to execute the special symbol lottery (special figure reservation), the fluctuation pattern of longer fluctuation time when the number of stored special figure reservations is smaller than when the number of stored special figure reservations is large. is configured to be easily selected, and when many special symbol reservations are not acquired, it is forced to execute fewer special symbol lotteries than when the game is played so as to acquire many special symbol reservations. It may be configured to make it easier to execute the chance notice effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early due to the special symbol lottery not being frequently executed.

Further, depending on the effect content of the variable effect executed in correspondence with the special symbol variation, the update contents of the value of the effect execution counter 223aah may be changed. For example, during one special symbol variation, the special symbol variation If the pachinko machine 10 is capable of executing a pseudo-variation effect of restarting after temporarily stopping the third symbol that is variably displayed corresponding to the , the variation of the third symbol is not the actual number of special symbol variations. It may be configured to update (add) the value of the effect execution counter 223aah based on the number of times (including restart). By configuring in this way, it is possible to forcibly change the frequency with which the chance notice effect is executed according to the effect contents of the variable effect to be executed.

Furthermore, in the twenty-sixth control example, every time the special symbol lottery is executed (every time the update condition for updating (adding) the value of the effect execution counter 223aah is established), the value of the counter is incremented by "1". However, without being limited to this, for example, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, compared to the case where the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the effect execution counter updated when the update condition is satisfied The value of 223aah may be different, and when the normal state is set, add "1" to the value of the effect execution counter 223aah when the update condition is satisfied, and when the time saving state is set may be configured to add "2" to the value of the effect execution counter 223aah when the update condition is satisfied. Further, when a variable probability state, which is a game state most advantageous to the player, is set, the value of the effect execution counter 223aah may be decremented by "1" when the update condition is satisfied.

By configuring in this way, the frequency of forcibly executing the chance notice effect can be varied according to the set game state. In addition, when a variable probability state is set in which it is easy to win a jackpot in a short period of time, it is possible to make it difficult to forcibly execute the chance notice effect, and the chance notice effect is executed unnecessarily for the player. It can be suppressed.

In addition, conditions other than the set game state may be provided as conditions for changing the value to be updated when the update condition for updating the value of the effect execution counter 223aah is satisfied. There are a plurality of production modes that can be switched and set, and when an update condition is established when one production mode is set and when another production mode different from the one production mode is set. The effect execution counter 223aah may be updated with different contents. By configuring in this way, when the performance mode in which a large value is added as the value of the performance execution counter 223aah is set, the chance notice performance is executed more than when other performance modes are set. easier to be Therefore, it is possible to easily change the content of the presentation provided to the player by switching the presentation mode, so that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

Further, in the twenty-sixth control example, when the update condition for updating the value of the effect execution counter 223aah is met, a predetermined value is added (subtracted). Without limitation, when the update condition is established, it may be configured to execute the process of determining the current update contents (addition value and subtraction value of the effect execution counter 223aah). With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the value of the effect execution counter 223aah. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether or not the chance notice effect is executed based on the fact that the notice effect lottery is won.

On the other hand, the value of the effect execution counter 223aah may be configured to be able to execute a suggestive effect that can suggest to the player. In this case, the first suggested effect suggesting the current value of the effect execution counter 223aah, or the remaining number until the execution condition of the chance notice effect is established (the value of the effect execution counter 223aah reaches 50) is suggested. Either or all of the second suggesting effect or the third suggesting effect suggesting remaining information until the chance notice effect is forcibly executed may be configured to be executable.

With this configuration, it is possible for the player to predict the timing at which the chance notice effect is forcibly executed. Since it is possible to make it easy to predict whether the performance has been executed or whether the chance foretelling performance has been executed based on the winning of the chance foretelling performance lottery, for example, it is predicted that the chance foretelling performance will be forcibly executed. When the chance notice effect is executed at a timing different from the timing when the chance notice effect is executed, it is possible to easily predict that the chance notice effect is executed based on the winning of the chance notice effect lottery, so that the chance notice effect is performed. The player can be interested in the timing of execution.

In this case, the above-described first to third suggestion effects are executed not for all the chance announcement effects that are forcibly executed based on the value of the effect execution counter 223aah, but for some of them. should be configured to By constructing in this way, it is possible to make it easy for the player to mix the chance forewarning performance with which the player can easily grasp which opportunity the chance forewarning performance is executed and the chance forewarning performance which is difficult to grasp. Therefore, the enjoyment of predicting can be increased.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the twenty-sixth control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 811, of the configuration of the ROM 222 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-sixth control example, the ROM 222 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-second control example Explain what is different.

The long-press effect scenario table 222aaa is data that defines a plurality of scenarios for decreasing the remaining HP value 890a of the HP gauge 890 when the player performs a long-press operation during the second part effect (continuous hit operation effect) of the battle effect. This table is referred to for determining a reduction scenario when it is determined that a long-pressing operation has been performed during the operation effective period during the second part production.

In the twenty-sixth control example, the remaining HP value 890a is reduced in different manners according to the details of the operation performed by the player on the operating means (effect button 22) in the repeated hitting operation effect, and during the repeated hitting operation effect. , the remaining HP value 890a decreases according to the length of the period during which the long press is determined. On the other hand, when the repeated hit operation is executed during the repeated hit operation effect, a lottery is executed to determine whether or not to decrease the remaining HP value 890a each time it is determined that the operation means (the effect button 22) has been pressed, It is configured to decrease the remaining HP value 890a when winning the lottery.

By constructing in this way, the process up to the display of the effect result of the repeated hitting operation effect to the player can be made different according to the operation method of the operation means executed by the player for the repeated hitting operation effect. becomes possible. Therefore, a player who wants to enjoy various processes can operate the operation means in different operation methods, thereby preventing the player from getting bored early.

Here, with reference to FIG. 813, the contents defined in the long press effect scenario table 222aaa will be described. FIG. 813 is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents specified in the long-press effect scenario table 222aaa. As shown in FIG. 813, in the long-press effect scenario table 222aaa, different scenario types are defined in association with the success/fail determination result and the acquired value of the first effect counter 223vf.

Scenarios are defined for each scenario type, in which the tendency of the HP value to decrease varies according to the length of the long-pressing period. Then, the decrease value of the HP value at each timing is determined based on the remaining HP value and the final HP value.

Specifically, the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the variable effect in which the current battle effect is executed (result of winning or not) is "win", and the value of the acquired first effect counter 223vf is "0 to For the range of 19", there is "winning scenario 1", for the range from "20 to 69", there is "winning scenario 2", and for the range from "70 to 98", there is "winning scenario 3". , and the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the variable effect in which the current battle effect is executed (result of determination of success or failure) is "miss", and the value of the acquired first effect counter 223vf is "0 ~ 19" range, "outlier scenario 1", "20 ~ 69" range, "outlier scenario 2", and "70 ~ 98" range, "outer scenario 3" is stipulated.

Here, detailed contents of various scenarios (effect scenarios) defined in the long-press effect scenario table 222aaa will be described. "Hit Scenario 1" and "Loss Scenario 1" are designed so that the remaining HP is more likely to decrease in the first half than in the second half of the elapsed time during which the long press operation is continuously performed. Scenario content (preceding type) is defined, and when the long press duration reaches 0.5 seconds, "Decrease: Medium", when the long press duration reaches 1 second, "Decrease: Medium", When the long-press duration reaches 1.5 seconds, "decrease: large" is defined, and when the long-press duration reaches 2 seconds, "upper limit" is defined. In other words, even though the maximum duration of the long press can be set to 3 seconds during the operation valid period, when the duration of the long press reaches 2 seconds, there is a scenario content that reduces the remaining HP value to the upper limit. stipulated.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to form a period in which the remaining HP value cannot be decreased even though the long-pressing operation is continued while the remaining time of the operation valid period remains. When the above-described non-decrease period is set, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the non-decrease period has been set or the remaining HP value has reached the upper limit. Therefore, even when the remaining HP value reaches the upper limit, the performance button 22 (operating means) can be continuously operated while expecting the possibility that the remaining HP value will decrease again.

"Hit Scenario 2" and "Loss Scenario 2" are defined in scenario content (balanced type) so that remaining HP tends to decrease on average during the elapsed time during which the long press operation is continuously performed. When the long-press duration reaches 0.5 seconds, "decrease: medium", when the long-press duration reaches 1 second, "decrease: medium", and the long-press duration is 1.5. "Decrease: Medium" when the duration of the long press reaches 2 seconds, "Decrease: Medium" when the duration of the long press reaches 2 seconds, "Decrease: Medium" when the duration of the long press reaches 2.5 seconds, An "upper limit" is defined when the long-press duration reaches 3 seconds. In other words, an effect is executed in which the remaining HP value gradually decreases according to the length of the long-press duration.

With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to decrease the remaining HP value to the upper limit unless the long-pressing operation is performed immediately after the operation effective period is set, so that the player is made to predict the success/failure determination result. can be made difficult.

The “hit scenario 3” and the “losing scenario 3” are scenarios in which the remaining HP is more easily reduced in the second half period than in the first half period during the elapsed time in which the long press operation is continuously performed. The content (second half type) is defined, and when the long-press duration reaches 0.5 seconds, "decrease: small", when the long-press duration reaches 1 second, "decrease: small", long "Decrease: Small" when the duration of the press reaches 1.5 seconds, "Decrease: Small" when the duration of the long press reaches 2 seconds, and when the duration of the long press reaches 2.5 seconds , the "decrease: large" is defined, and the "upper limit" is defined when the long-press duration reaches 3 seconds. In other words, an effect is executed in which the remaining HP value is gradually greatly reduced in accordance with the length of the long-press duration.

As described above, in the twenty-sixth control example, if a long press operation is performed within the operation valid period during the battle effect, when it is determined that the long press operation has been performed, the long press effect scenario The effect scenario is determined by referring to the table 222aaa, and the determined scenario is referred to, and the effect of decreasing the remaining HP value according to the duration of the long press is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to execute the effect of decreasing the remaining HP value with a different effect pattern from the case of executing the continuous hitting operation within the operation valid period during the battle effect. On the other hand, it is possible to easily provide the enjoyment of selecting the operation method for the effect button 22 (operation means).

Returning to FIG. 811, the description continues. The final HP selection table 222aab when out is a data table referred to when determining the final display mode (upper limit of HP value that can be decreased) of the HP gauge 890 of the enemy character 880a as the effect result of the battle effect. is.

Here, as described above, the battle effect is a effect of gradually decreasing the HP value of the enemy character 880a. If the effect result of defeating 880a (reducing the HP value to 0) is determined, and the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is a loss, the effect result is that the enemy character 880a cannot be defeated (the HP value is reduced to 0). It is configured so that the performance result is determined.

Furthermore, in the twenty-sixth control example, it is possible to determine one value out of a plurality of values as the HP value of the enemy character 880a that can be decreased when the loss effect result is displayed. . By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the HP value that can be reduced even when a battle effect resulting in a failure effect is executed.

In addition, in the twenty-sixth control example, it is possible to set a non-decrease period in which the HP value of the enemy character 880a cannot be decreased for a predetermined period (up to 2 seconds) when a long press operation is performed. are doing. Therefore, if a situation occurs in which the HP value of the enemy character 880a does not decrease even though the operation means is being operated during the battle production, the production result of the battle production being executed will not be the production result. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to understand whether the HP value cannot be decreased any more or the HP value 890a cannot be decreased because the non-decrease period is set. can.

Therefore, the player can be motivated to operate the operating means until the expiration of the effective period.

Here, with reference to FIG. 814(a), the contents of the final HP selection table 222aab when out will be described. FIG. 814(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the final HP selection table 222aab when out. As shown in FIG. 814(a), in the final HP selection table 222aab when out, various final HP values are defined in association with the acquired values of the first effect counter 223vf.

Specifically, when the obtained value of the first effect counter 223vf is in the range of “0 to 4”, the final HP value is set to “50”, and when the value of the acquired first effect counter 223vf is in the range of “5 to 14”, the final HP value is “50”. "30" as the value, "20" as the final HP value for the range of "15 to 24", and "10" as the final HP value for the range of "25 to 44". For the range of 45 to 98", a final HP value of 5 is defined respectively.

For example, when "50" is selected as the final HP value, even if the effect button 22 is operated during the second part effect of the battle effect, the remaining HP value does not fall below 50. An effect is executed in which 890a does not variably display (decrease display) from the display mode in which 890a indicates 50 (the display mode occupies an intermediate position between 0 and MAX). Therefore, depending on the final HP value selected, the situation in which the HP value cannot be decreased despite the fact that the effect button 22 is being operated during the second part effect can be changed at various timings (different remaining HP values). can be generated in

Therefore, when a small HP value is selected as the final HP value of the battle effect, the display area of the remaining HP value 890a of the HP gauge 890 is made smaller (shorter) than when a large HP value is selected as the final HP value. ), it is possible to make the player expect that the performance result of the battle performance being executed will be the performance result corresponding to the winning of the jackpot (the performance result in which the HP value becomes 0). .

Here, even if the effect result of the battle effect indicates that the result is other than the big win (lost win), that is, even if the battle effect in which a value other than "0" is selected as the final HP value is executed, The HP value that can be finally decreased (final HP value) can be set differently in order to make the user expect that the performance result corresponding to the winning of the jackpot (the performance result in which the HP value becomes 0) will be displayed. can be considered to be

In other words, in the case where the result of the battle production is a win, the HP value can be reduced to near "0" (a battle production in which a small value (such as "5") is set as the final HP value ) and a battle effect in which the HP value cannot be reduced to near “0” (a battle effect in which a large value (such as “50”) is set as the final HP value) can be executed. Compared to the case where a battle effect is executed that can always reduce the HP value to a certain HP value (for example, "5") when winning, it is possible to reduce the HP value to a predetermined HP value (for example, "5"). Since the battle performance that cannot be reduced is executed, the expectation of winning the jackpot can be increased when the HP value is decreased to a predetermined HP value (for example, "5") in the battle performance.

With this configuration, the player can be interested not only in whether the HP value becomes "0", but also in the process of decreasing the HP value, so that the battle effect is executed. For a long period of time, the player can be made to pay attention to the content of the effect that is executed.

As described above, in the case where the HP value (final HP value) that can be finally reduced can be set differently, at least the final HP value ( For example, it is necessary to execute a battle effect in which "50" etc.) is set. When a battle effect in which a large HP value is set as the final HP value is executed, the HP value reaches the final HP value at an earlier stage than the other battle effects, thereby As a result, there is a problem that the fact that the effect result of the battle effect being executed is an incorrect effect result is quickly grasped.

On the other hand, in the twenty-sixth control example, even though the operation means is operated during the operation effect period in which the HP value can be decreased based on the operation to the operation means, and the final HP value is A non-decrease period can be set as a period in which the HP value cannot be decreased (is difficult) even though the HP value has not reached the target.

By configuring the non-decrease period to be settable in this way, it is possible to stop decreasing the HP value while the non-decrease period is set even if the final HP value has not been reached. To make it difficult for a player to grasp whether the final HP value has been reached or a non-decrease period has been set, even if the HP value does not decrease despite the operation of an operating means during performance. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to expect that the HP value will be reduced again (the non-decrease period will be canceled) during the battle production, and the production effect can be enhanced.

As shown in FIG. 814(a), in the twenty-sixth control example, the final HP values of the battle effect (losing battle effect) indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is a lost win are "5" and "10". , ``20'', ``30'', and ``50'' can be determined, and a smaller final HP value is more likely to be selected than a larger final HP value. is executed, the final HP value will be "50" in about 5%, the final HP value will be "30" in about 10%, the final HP value will be "20" in about 10%, and the final HP value will be "20" in about 20%. 10" is configured to be selected at approximately 55% with a final HP value of "5".

Therefore, when the battle effect is executed, every time the HP value decreases to any of the HP values "50", "30", "20", "10", and "5", the HP value end of the decrease (whether it is the final HP value) and increase the expectation of winning a jackpot when the HP value continues to decrease. .

The entry lottery table 222aac has an operation valid period (valid period), the data table is referred to when executing a rush lottery for determining whether or not to set a non-variable period (non-decrease period) in which the performance mode is not changed, It is referred to when it is decided to decrease the HP value of the enemy character 880a based on the operation of the operation means by the player during the second part of the effect.

When the rush lottery executed with reference to the rush lottery table 222aac is won, a non-decrease period is set. During this non-decrease period, even if the player operates the operation means, the HP value is not reduced based on the operation. While the non-decrease period is set, a cancellation lottery for determining whether or not to cancel the non-decrease period is executed at predetermined intervals (0.5 second intervals). or when the upper limit period (3 seconds) of the predetermined non-decrease period has passed, the non-decrease period is canceled.

Here, the detailed contents of the entry lottery table 222aac will be described with reference to FIG. 814(b). FIG. 814(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the entry lottery table 222aac. As shown in FIG. 814(b), the entry lottery table 222aac is associated with the success/failure determination result (special symbol lottery result), the current remaining HP value, and the acquired value of the first effect counter 223vf, The result of rush lottery (winning, non-winning) is defined.

Specifically, when the success/failure determination result is "hit" and the remaining HP value is "100", the value of the obtained first effect counter 223vf can take the entire range "0 to 98", Rush lottery "non-winning" is stipulated. That is, when the remaining HP value is "100", that is, when the HP value of the enemy character 880a has not decreased, the non-decrease period is not set. With this configuration, even though the battle performance has been executed, the battle performance ends without reducing the HP value based on the operation of the operation means, and the player tries to operate the operation means. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the desire to operate.

Further, when the remaining HP value is in the range of "99 to 70", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223vf is in the range of "0 to 79", and "non-winning" is "80 to 98". , and the remaining HP value is in the range of "69 to 40", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223vf is in the range of "0 to 54" , the range of "55 to 98" is defined as "non-winning", and the range of "55 to 98" is defined to be "winning". "Non-winning" is defined for the range of "0 to 34", "winning" is defined for the range of "35 to 98", and the remaining HP value is within the range of "19 to 1" In some cases, rush lottery “winning” is defined for the entire range “0 to 98” that the acquired value of the first effect counter 223vf can take.

Similarly, when the success/failure determination result is "off" and the remaining HP value is "100", the entry lottery "Non-winning" is specified, and when the remaining HP value is in the range of "99 to 70", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223vf is in the range of "0 to 94". ” is defined as “winning” in the range of “95 to 98”, and the remaining HP value is in the range of “69 to 40”, the value of the acquired first effect counter 223vf is “ "Non-winning" is defined for the range of 0 to 79, "winning" is defined for the range of "80 to 98", and if the remaining HP value is within the range of "39 to 20" , "non-winning" is defined when the acquired value of the first effect counter 223vf is in the range of "0 to 54", and "winning" is defined in the range of "55 to 98", and the remaining HP value is If the value of the acquired first effect counter 223vf is in the range of "19 to 1", "non-winning" is in the range of "0 to 94", and " Election” is stipulated.

That is, in the twenty-sixth control example, the probability of winning the entry lottery increases as the remaining HP value decreases. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the non-decrease period from being set in a state in which the HP value is not reduced much even though the battle effect has been executed.

In addition, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot lottery, the winning probability of the rush lottery is higher than when the lottery is lost. In other words, when a battle effect (winning battle effect) in which the final HP value is set to "0" is executed, a battle effect (loss battle effect) in which a value other than "0" is set as the final HP value is executed. is configured to make it easier to set the non-decrease period than when is executed.

By configuring in this way, regardless of which effect result is set in the battle effect, at a predetermined timing before the HP value becomes "0", a period during which the HP value does not decrease (a non-decreasing period is set, the period after reaching the final HP value) can be easily set. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the effect result of the battle effect being executed when the period in which the HP value does not decrease is set.

Furthermore, even if a period in which the HP value does not decrease is set, there is still the possibility of another period in which the HP value decreases, so a period in which the HP value does not decrease has been set. After that, it is possible to continue the battle effect (continue to operate the operation means) while expecting the HP value to decrease again.

Further, although detailed description will be given later, in the twenty-sixth control example, only one non-decrease period can be set for one operation valid period (valid period). In other words, the entry lottery can be executed only during the operation valid period and in a state where the non-decrease period has never been set. Therefore, it is suppressed that the non-decrease period is set multiple times within one operation effective period, and the operation effective period elapses without almost setting the period in which the HP value can be reduced. be able to.

The cancellation lottery table 222aad is a data table referred to when executing a cancellation lottery for canceling the set non-decrease period. The cancellation lottery is executed at predetermined intervals (0.5 second intervals) while the non-decrease period is set, and the longer the elapsed time during the non-decrease period (the shorter the remaining operation valid period (approximately), so that the winning probability of the release lottery is high. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the non-decrease period from continuing unnecessarily long.

In the twenty-sixth control example, the duration of the non-decrease period is set to a period shorter than the valid operation period (5 seconds). It is configured so that the upper limit is reached and the non-decreasing period ends. In other words, even if a cancellation lottery is repeatedly executed without winning the cancellation lottery to cancel the non-decrease period, the non-decrease period can be terminated based on the passage of time. It consists of With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the non-decrease period from continuing unnecessarily long.

Further, when the remaining HP value at the time when the non-decrease period is set is large, the winning probability of the release lottery is higher than when the remaining HP value is small. By configuring in this way, when the non-decrease period is set in a state where the remaining HP value is large, the non-decrease period can be made difficult to continue for a long time.

The additional reduction value selection table 222aae is a data table that is referenced when determining the reduction value of the HP value to be granted when the non-decrease period is canceled, and is a data table for ending the non-decrease period ( It is referred to when the release lottery winning, time elapsed) is established. The pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-sixth control example has a non-decrease period in which the HP value is not decreased based on the operation of the operating means even when the remaining HP value has not reached the final HP value. It is configured to be configurable, and even if the remaining HP value does not decrease despite operating the operation means within the operation valid period during the battle production, the remaining HP value will be the final HP value. It is constructed so as to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether or not it has reached.

If a non-decrease period is set within the operation effective period, that is, even if the period during which the remaining HP value can be decreased based on the operation of the operation means becomes shorter, the operation effective period In order to make it easier for the remaining HP value to reach the final HP value within a certain period of time, at the time when the non-decrease period ends, an additional decrease performance for decreasing the remaining HP value can be executed without being based on the operation of the operating means. are doing. With this configuration, even if the non-decrease period is set, the remaining HP value can easily reach the final HP value during the operation valid period, so the final HP value is "0". The remaining HP value cannot be reduced to "0" within the operation valid period, It is possible to suppress the player's desire to use the operating means from being lowered.

Here, detailed contents defined in the additional reduction value selection table 222aae referred to when determining the HP value to be reduced in the additional reduction effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 816 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the additional decrement value selection table 222aae. As shown in FIG. 816, the additional decrease value selection table 222aae contains the difference HP indicating the difference between the final HP value and the remaining HP value and the adequacy determination result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the effect result of the battle effect being executed. Different decrease values are defined in correspondence with the value, the value of the non-decrease period counter 223aab for indicating the length of the period in which the non-decrease period continues, and the acquired value of the second effect counter 223vg.

Specifically, when the win/fail judgment result is “win”, the difference HP value is within the range of “1 to 19”, and the value of the non-decrease period counter 223aab is “1 to 500”, the obtained second A decrement value of "0" is defined for the range of the effect counter 223vg of "0-179", and a decrement value of "5" is defined for the range of "180-198". Further, when the value of the non-decrease period counter 223aab is "501 to 1500", the value of the obtained second effect counter 223vg is in the range of "0 to 99", and the decrease value "0" is "100 to 198". ], and the value of the non-decrease period counter 223aab is ``1501 to 2999'', the value of the acquired second effect counter 223vg is ``0 to 99''. A decrease value of "0" is defined for the range, a decrease value of "5" is defined for the range of "100 to 179", and a decrease value of "all differential HP" is defined for the range of "180 to 198". . Then, when the value of the non-decrease period counter 223aab reaches "3000", that is, the upper limit, the decrease value "all difference HP" is defined regardless of the acquired value of the second effect counter 223vg.

Here, the decrease value “all the difference HP” indicates the same value as the calculated difference HP value. That is, when "all HP difference" is selected as the HP value to be decreased in the additional decrease effect, the effect is executed to decrease the total HP value that can be decreased in the additional decrease effect. . For example, in a winning battle effect in which the final HP value is set to "0", when "all difference HP" is selected as the HP value to be decreased in the additional decrease effect, the enemy character 880a is defeated by the additional decrease effect. An effect (effect of decreasing the remaining HP value to 0) is executed. Thus, even if a non-decrease period is set in which the HP value cannot be decreased, depending on the effect mode of the additional decrease effect that is executed when the non-decrease period is canceled, the non-decrease period When the non-decrease period is set, the player can be notified of the effect result of the battle effect earlier than when the non-decrease period is set. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the desire to play the game.

On the other hand, in the out-of-battle effect in which the final HP value is set to a value other than "0", when the "all difference HP" is selected as the HP value to be decreased in the additional decrease effect, the enemy character 880a is reduced by the additional decrease effect. An effect of reducing the remaining HP value to the final HP value is executed. By configuring in this way, the HP value can be greatly reduced by the additional reduction effect, so that the remaining HP value can be reduced to "0" in the remaining period, and the player is willingly operated. You can operate the means.

Also, at the timing when the non-decrease period is canceled, an additional reduction effect is executed with the "all HP difference" as the reduction value, and the remaining HP value is reduced to the final HP value, so the additional reduction effect is executed. The HP value can be decreased both during the period before the additional decrease effect is executed (period of non-decrease) and the period after the additional decrease effect is executed (period after the remaining HP value reaches the final HP value). can be a period of time. With this configuration, in a state in which the player cannot decrease the HP value based on the operation of the operating means, the effect of decreasing the HP value is interrupted on the way. I can make you think it's possible. Therefore, even if the remaining HP value reaches the final HP value and the situation continues in which the remaining HP value cannot be decreased even if the operation means is operated, Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the battle effect while having the possibility that the remaining HP value decreases.

That is, in the twenty-sixth control example, when the differential HP value is within the same range, the longer the non-decrease period, the more the HP is decreased in the additional decrease effect executed when the non-decrease period is canceled. It is configured so that the HP value of the player can easily increase. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the HP value cannot be decreased to the final HP value in the battle effect due to the long non-decrease period being set.

In addition, when the value of the non-decrease period counter 223aab reaches the upper limit, that is, when the upper limit period of the non-decrease period is reached without winning the cancellation lottery executed during the non-decrease period, It is configured to make it easier to execute the additional reduction performance for greatly reducing the HP value than when the release lottery is won on the way. By configuring in this way, when the non-decrease period is set, a game in which the non-decrease period is desired to be canceled as soon as possible and a game in which the non-decrease period is desired to continue up to the upper limit are played. You can have someone do it.

Returning to FIG. 816, the contents defined in the additional decrement value selection table 222aae will be continued. If the success/failure determination result is "win", the difference HP value is within the range of "20 to 69", and the value of the non-decrease period counter 223aab is "1 to 500", the acquired value of the second effect counter 223vg Decrease value "0" for range "0-99", Decrease value "5" for range "100-179", Decrease value "10" for range "180-198" is stipulated. Further, when the value of the non-decrease period counter 223aab is "501 to 1500", the value of the obtained second effect counter 223vg is in the range of "0 to 99", and the decrease value "10" is "100 to 179". , and the decrement value "15" for the range "180 to 198". , the value of the acquired second effect counter 223vg is in the range of 0 to 99, the decrease value is 15, and the range of 100 to 179 is 10, 180 to 198 A reduction value "all differential HP" is defined for the range of . Then, when the value of the non-decrease period counter 223aab reaches "3000", that is, when it reaches the upper limit, the value of the acquired second effect counter 223vg is reduced to the range of "0 to 99" "all difference HP" However, a decrement value of "15" is defined for the range of "100-179", and a decrement value of "10" is defined for the range of "180-198".

If the success/failure determination result is "win", the difference HP value is within the range of "70 to 99", and the value of the non-decrease period counter 223aab is "1 to 500", the acquired value of the second effect counter 223vg A decrement value of "0" is defined for the range of "0-179", and a decrement value of "10" is defined for the range of "180-198". Further, when the value of the non-decrease period counter 223aab is "501 to 1500", the value of the obtained second effect counter 223vg is in the range of "0 to 99", and the decrease value "15" is "100 to 179". , a decrement value of "0" is defined for the range of "180 to 198", and a decrement value of "10" is defined for the range of "180 to 198". , the value of the acquired second effect counter 223vg is in the range of 0 to 99, the decrease value is 15, and the range of 100 to 179 is 20, A reduction value "all differential HP" is defined for the range of . Then, when the value of the non-decrease period counter 223aab reaches "3000", that is, when it reaches the upper limit, the value of the acquired second effect counter 223vg falls within the range of "0 to 99" and the decrease value "25" A reduction value of “all HP differences” is defined for the range of “100 to 179”, and a reduction value of “20” is defined for the range of “180 to 198”.

As described above, in the additional decrease value selection table 222aae, when the corresponding special symbol lottery result (validity determination result) is the same, and the value of the non-decrease period counter 223aab is in the same range When the difference is within the range, the larger the difference HP value at the time when the additional reduction performance is executed, the more likely a large value is selected as the HP value that can be reduced by the additional reduction performance. there is With this configuration, if the non-decrease period is set while the HP value is hardly reduced during the operation effective period of the battle effect, the non-decrease period is set while the HP value is reduced. Since the HP value can be greatly reduced by the additional reduction performance than when the additional reduction effect is set, even if the non-decrease period is set during the operation valid period, the non-decrease period does not cause the player to feel uncomfortable. It is possible to facilitate the continuation of the operation of the performance button 22 even after the release.

In addition, when the difference HP value is small, the ratio of selecting the difference HP value as the HP value (decrease value) to be decreased in the additional decrease effect is higher than when the difference HP value is large. With this configuration, when the non-decrease period is set in a state in which the difference HP value is large, that is, in a state in which the HP value has not been decreased since the battle effect was executed, the non-decrease period is canceled. It is possible to make it difficult for the HP value to be decreased to the final HP value by the additional decrease performance executed when the HP value is decreased. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unnecessary elimination of an opportunity to decrease the HP value based on the player's operation of the effect button 22 during the battle effect.

On the other hand, if the success/failure determination result is “off”, the difference HP value is within the range of “1 to 19”, and the value of the non-decrease period counter 223aab is “1 to 500”, the obtained second effect counter 223vg , that is, the decrement value "0" is defined for the entire range of "0 to 198" for the acquired value of the second effect counter 223vg. Further, when the value of the non-decrease period counter 223aab is "501 to 1500", the value of the obtained second effect counter 223vg is in the range of "0 to 179", and the decrease value "0" is "180 to 198". ”, and the value of the non-decrease period counter 223aab is “1501 to 2999”, the value of the acquired second effect counter 223vg is “0 to 99”. A decrement value of '0' is defined for the range, a decrement value of '5' for the range of '100-179', and a decrement value of '3' for the range of '180-198'. Then, when the value of the non-decrease period counter 223aab reaches "3000", that is, when it reaches the upper limit, the value of the acquired second effect counter 223vg decreases to the range of "0 to 99", A decrease value of "15" is defined for the range of "100 to 179", and a decrease value of "all differential HP" is defined for the range of "180 to 198".

In addition, when the result of the success/failure determination is “off”, the difference HP value is within the range of “20 to 69”, and the value of the non-decrease period counter 223aab is “1 to 500”, the acquired second effect counter 223vg A decrement value of “0” is defined for the range of “0 to 99”, and a decrement value of “5” is defined for the range of “100 to 198”. Further, when the value of the non-decrease period counter 223aab is "501 to 1500", the value of the obtained second effect counter 223vg is in the range of "0 to 99", and the decrease value "0" is "100 to 179". , and the decrement value "15" for the range "180 to 198". , the value of the obtained second effect counter 223vg is in the range of 0 to 99, the decrement value is 0, and the decrement value is 15 in the range of 100 to 179, A decrement value of "10" is defined for the range of . Then, when the value of the non-decrease period counter 223aab reaches "3000", that is, when it reaches the upper limit, the value of the acquired second effect counter 223vg decreases to the range of "0 to 99", A reduction value of "all HP differences" is defined for the range of "100 to 179", and a reduction value of "15" is defined for the range of "180 to 198".

If the success/failure determination result is "off", the difference HP value is within the range of "70 to 99", and the value of the non-decrease period counter 223aab is "1 to 500", the acquired value of the second effect counter 223vg A decrement value of "0" is defined for the range of "0-179", and a decrement value of "10" is defined for the range of "180-198". Further, when the value of the non-decrease period counter 223aab is "501 to 1500", the value of the obtained second effect counter 223vg is in the range of "0 to 99", and the decrease value "0" is "100 to 179". , and the decrement value "15" for the range "180 to 198". , the value of the obtained second effect counter 223vg is in the range of 0 to 99, the decrement value is 0, and the decrement value is 15 in the range of 100 to 179, A reduction value "all differential HP" is defined for the range of . Then, when the value of the non-decrease period counter 223aab reaches "3000", that is, when it reaches the upper limit, the value of the acquired second effect counter 223vg decreases to the range of "0 to 99", A decrease value “all differential HP” is defined for the range “100 to 198”.

As described above, when the battle effect being executed is the lost battle effect, it is configured so that the additional decrease effect for decreasing the HP value is less likely to be executed than in the case of the winning battle effect. . With this configuration, in the losing battle effect in which the final HP value is set to a value greater than that in the winning battle effect, the additional decrease effect causes the HP value to decrease, and the player presses the effect button 22 during the battle effect. It is possible to suppress unnecessary elimination of the opportunity to decrease the HP value based on the operation of .

In addition, in the twenty-sixth control example, as shown in FIG. 816, the HP value (decrease value) to be decreased in the additional decrease effect is configured to be selectable as "0". When the decrease value "0" is selected, only the effect indicating that the non-decrease period has been canceled is executed, and the effect mode in which the friend character 801a reduces the HP value of the enemy character 880a is not executed. It is configured so that With this configuration, even when the decrease value "0" is selected, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the non-decrease period has been cancelled.

It should be noted that another effect mode may be set as the effect mode of the additional decrease effect executed when the decrease value "0" is set. However, the enemy character 880a may be configured to be able to set an effect mode indicating that the HP value does not decrease when the enemy character 880a avoids the attack. With this configuration, when the additional reduction effect is executed, regardless of the selected reduction value, the effect of the friendly character 801a attacking the enemy character 880a is executed. You can make it hard to be noticed that you have been selected. Also, in this case, even in part of the effect for decreasing the HP value of the enemy character 880a based on the operation of the effect button 22, the effect mode is set such that the enemy character 880a avoids the attack of the allied character 801a. good to do By configuring in this way, since it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the decrease value "0" even in effects other than the additional decrease effect, the effect corresponding to the decrease value "0" is executed in the additional decrease effect. Even in the case where the game is played, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel a sense of discomfort.

The chance notice lottery table 222aaf is a data table referred to when determining whether or not to execute a chance-up performance for increasing the expectation of winning a big win in the variable performance for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery. . In the twenty-sixth control example, as in each control example described above, when a variation pattern command for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is output from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device At 113, a process of setting a display variation pattern (effect pattern of variation effect) corresponding to the received variation pattern command is executed.

The type of the display variation pattern is determined based on information included in the variation pattern command set by the main controller 110, and the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot differs according to the set type. is. Specifically, in the special symbol variation pattern selection process 22 (see F209 in FIG. 701) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 698) of the main controller 110, the variation pattern selection table 202vc (see FIG. 692 Reference) to select (determine) the variation pattern (see F403 ~ F405 in Figure 701) to execute the process (see F403 ~ F405 in Figure 701), the special figure variation pattern command for showing the selected variation pattern is set (of Figure 701 (see F406).

In the variation pattern selection table 202vc (see FIG. 692), different data tables are defined corresponding to the result of the special symbol lottery and the set game state, and different variation patterns (variation time ) is configured to select More specifically, in the same game state (for example, normal state), the variation pattern with a long variation time (90 seconds) as a variation pattern is out when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit. It is stipulated that it is easier to be selected than in the case of winning, and on the other hand, the fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time (7 seconds) is more likely to be lost than in the case of winning the jackpot as a result of the special symbol lottery. is defined to be easier to select. In other words, the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot is configured to differ depending on the selected variation pattern (variation time).

Here, the variation pattern for display (effect pattern of variation effect) set by the audio lamp control device 113 when receiving the variation pattern command (special figure variation pattern command) output from the main controller 110 is at least , the effect pattern corresponding to the length of the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is set. That is, when a variation pattern command indicating a variation pattern with a variation time of 90 seconds is received, an effect pattern (variation pattern) corresponding to the effect mode in which a variation effect of 90 seconds is executed is determined, and the determined effect It is configured such that a display variation pattern command corresponding to the pattern is set. Therefore, depending on the type of variation pattern (effect pattern) set by the sound ramp control device 113, the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot differs.

The chance notice lottery table 222aaf prescribes that the winning probability of the chance notice lottery is different for each variation pattern type set by the sound lamp control device 113. Variation patterns (long The production pattern corresponding to the special figure fluctuation of time) is configured so that the winning probability of the chance notice lottery is higher than the fluctuation pattern with low expectation of winning the jackpot (the production pattern corresponding to the short-time special figure fluctuation). are doing. By constructing in this manner, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation for winning a big win when the chance notice is executed, so that the chance notice performance is a performance mode for showing that the degree of expectation for winning a big win is high.

Here, with reference to FIG. 817(a), detailed contents of the chance advance notice lottery table 222aaf will be described. FIG. 817(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the chance advance notice lottery table 222aaf. As shown in FIG. 817 (a), the chance notice lottery table 222aaf contains the result of determination corresponding to this variable production (lottery result of special symbol lottery) and the variation pattern type of this variable production (production pattern type) and the acquired value of the first effect counter 223vf, the propriety of the chance advance notice lottery is defined.

Specifically, when the success/failure determination result is "hit" and the selected variation pattern type is "variation pattern 1", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223vf is "0 to 98". Chance notice lottery "winning" is defined for the entire range of . Further, when the variation pattern type is "variation pattern 2", the value of the obtained first effect counter 223vf is in the range of "0 to 94", and the chance notice lottery "winning" is "95 to 98". ”, the chance notice lottery “non-winning” is defined. Then, when the selected variation pattern type is the variation pattern type "variation pattern n", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223vf is in the range of "0 to 94", the chance notice lottery " A chance advance lottery "win" is stipulated for a range of "95-98" for non-win".

On the other hand, if the result of the judgment is "off" and the selected variation pattern type is "variation pattern 2", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223vf is within the range of "0 to 94". On the other hand, the chance advance notice lottery “won” is stipulated for the range of “95 to 98”, and the chance notice lottery “non-win” is defined. Then, when the selected variation pattern type is the variation pattern type "variation pattern n+1", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223vf is for the entire range of "0 to 98", the chance notice lottery "Non-election" is stipulated.

Here, the type of variation pattern (effect pattern) selectable by the sound lamp control device 113 is determined based on the information (information indicating the variation type) included in the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110. A variation effect corresponding to the determined variation pattern (effect pattern) is executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 .

In addition, in order to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early, in recent years, it has become mainstream to provide many types of variation patterns (effect patterns) determined by the sound ramp control device 113. . In this case, when a specific variation pattern command is output from the main controller 110, based on the specific information included in the specific variation pattern command and the effect random value randomly updated by the sound lamp control device 113 It is preferable to configure so that different types of variation patterns (effect patterns) can be selected.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily increase the types of variation patterns (effect patterns) set by the sound lamp control device 113 than the types of variation patterns set by the main controller 110. . Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of variable effects to be executed without increasing the number of variable types selected by the main controller 110 having a limited capacity.

In the chance advance notice lottery table 222aaf shown in FIG. 817(a), when the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, each variation pattern is more likely to be selected than when the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss. type is specified. Specifically, "variation pattern 1" is the variation pattern with the highest percentage of selection at the time of winning the jackpot (selected only at the time of winning the jackpot), and "variation pattern n+1" is the most selected at the time of winning the jackpot. It is a variation pattern with a low percentage (selected only when winning a losing prize).

Here, in the twenty-sixth control example, among the variation pattern types selected by the sound ramp control device 113, a variation pattern (variation pattern 1) selected only when the jackpot is won, and a variation pattern when the jackpot is not won It has a variation pattern (variation pattern n+1) that is selected only when In other words, the variation pattern type corresponding to the special symbol lottery that won the jackpot is selected from the range of "variation pattern 1" to "variation pattern n", and the variation pattern type corresponding to the special symbol lottery that was won out is "variation Pattern 2” to “variation pattern n+1” are selected.

Then, "variation pattern 2" to "variation pattern n" are the variation pattern types that can be selected regardless of whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot or a lost election, and are in ascending order from "variation pattern 2". It is configured so that the jackpot expectation is high.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a variation pattern for a confirmed big win and a variation pattern for a confirmed loss as the types of variation patterns to be selected. As compared with the case, the distribution at the time of selecting the variation pattern (performance pattern) is biased, and it is possible to make it difficult to execute the variation performance at a frequency different from the expected degree of winning the jackpot for the predetermined variation pattern type. .

The chance mode selection table 222aag is a data table that is referred to when selecting the performance mode of the chance prediction to be executed when the chance prediction lottery is won. In the twenty-sixth control example, a plurality of chance notices can be executed in one variable effect. For example, as described above with reference to FIG. Chance forewarning effect by varying the display mode (comment display mode ch1), chance forewarning effect by varying the display mode of the pending symbol hr0 in execution (execution pending display mode), and the display mode of the character 801 used for the variable display. It is configured to be able to execute a chance announcement effect that changes (character display mode ch3).

In the chance mode selection table 222aag, the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the variable performance to be executed and the acquired value of the second performance counter 223vg are associated with each other to determine which display mode is to be varied and how much. A mode change scenario (change scenario) including information indicating (level information after change) is defined. In addition, the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the variable performance to be executed and the acquired value of the second performance counter 223vg are made to correspond to the variable performance determined to forcibly execute the chance notice performance. , special change scenarios are defined.

Here, in the twenty-sixth control example, according to the number of executions of variation performance (loss variation performance) corresponding to multiple special symbol variations (loss variation) executed without winning a jackpot, and the execution content, forced It is configured so that the chance notice effect can be executed. For example, in the case where the loss variation performance is executed 50 times in a row without winning a jackpot, and the chance notice performance is never executed as the performance mode of the 50 times loss variation performance. is configured such that the performance mode including the chance notice performance is forcibly selected as the performance mode of the next variational performance.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the player's willingness to play, which is caused by the continuous execution of the missing variable performance in which the chance advance notice performance is not executed.

In addition, in the twenty-sixth control example, there is provided a storage means capable of storing information relating to the effect mode of the chance notice effect used in the variable effect executed in the past, and when the chance notice effect is forcibly executed A performance mode of the chance advance notice performance used for the determined variable performance can be selected based on the information stored in the storage means. For example, in a state in which information indicating that the performance mode (chance mode) of the chance notice performance with a high probability of winning the jackpot (high expectation of the jackpot) is lost and selected as the performance mode of the variable performance is stored in the storage means. , when the chance notice effect is forcibly selected, if the result of the change effect in which the chance notice effect is forcibly executed becomes the effect result indicating the winning of the jackpot (the winning change effect), it is stored. A performance mode included in the information stored in the means is configured to be selectable as a performance mode of the chance notice performance. By constructing in this way, the performance mode (chance mode) of the chance notice performance in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high (the degree of expectation for the big win is high) is set as the performance mode of the continuous loss fluctuation performance, and the player is distrusted. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation that gives a feeling.

On the other hand, in the case where the performance result of the variable performance forcibly executed is the performance result indicating the loss (is the loss variable performance), a performance mode other than the performance mode included in the information stored in the storage means is selected. The performance mode is configured to be selectable as the performance mode of the chance advance notice performance. By constructing in this way, the performance mode (chance mode) of the chance notice performance in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high (the degree of expectation for the big win is high) is set as the performance mode of the continuous loss fluctuation performance, and the player is distrusted. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation that gives an impression.

Furthermore, in the twenty-sixth control example, based on the information stored in the storage means, the effect mode of the chance notice effect used in the previous hit variation effect is read out, and the read effect mode is forcibly changed to the chance effect mode. It is configured so that it can be set as an effect mode of a non-variable effect in which the advance notice effect is executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress continued selection of a part of the performance modes of the chance notice performance only as the performance modes of the winning variation performance, thereby suppressing the chance notice performance. It is possible to appropriately maintain the degree of expectation for winning a big prize for each of a plurality of performance modes selectable as the performance mode of .

In addition, in the case of using a configuration that can set the performance mode of the chance notice performance set in the previous hit fluctuation performance as the performance mode of the loss fluctuation performance in which the chance notice performance is forcibly executed, for example, , When the performance mode of the chance notice performance set in the previous hit variation performance is stipulated to be selectable only for the hit variation performance, the performance mode may be removed as a special specification and used for the variation performance. good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a variable performance different from the predetermined contents, so that the variation of the variable performance to be executed can be increased. In addition, when the performance mode of the chance notice effect set in the previous hit change effect is stipulated to be selectable only for the hit change effect, the chance notice effect set in the hit change effect before the last time is specified. In order to be able to set the effect mode of (1) as the effect mode of the loss variation effect in which the chance notice effect is forcibly executed, the storage means may be configured to store a plurality of pieces of information.

Here, the detailed contents of the chance mode selection table 222aag will be described with reference to FIG. 817(b). FIG. 817(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the chance mode selection table 222aag. As shown in FIG. 817(b), the result of the special symbol lottery (result of judgment) is "hit (normal)", and the value of the acquired second effect counter 223vg is within the range of "0 to 99". "Change scenario 1" for the range "100-159", "Change scenario 2" for the range "160-189", "Change scenario 3" for the range "190-196" "Change scenario 4" is defined for the range of , and "Change scenario 5" is defined for the range of "197, 198". In addition, if the result of the special symbol lottery (result of judgment) is "off (normal)" and the value of the acquired second effect counter 223vg is in the range of "0 to 99", "variation scenario 6" is applied. , "change scenario 7" for the range "100 to 159", "change scenario 8" for the range "160 to 189", and "change scenario 8" for the range "190 to 195" Scenario 9” is defined, “Change scenario 10” is defined for the range of “196, 197”, and “Change scenario 11” is defined for the value of “198”.

Here, "hit (normal)" and "loss (normal)" of the special symbol lottery result (win/fail determination result) means winning the chance lottery executed with reference to the chance lottery lottery table 222aaf. It shows the normal pattern in which the chance notice effect is executed based on, and when selecting the effect mode of the chance notice effect when winning the chance notice lottery, the result of the special symbol lottery (result of judgment) The effect mode is selected from either "hit (normal)" or "loss (normal)".

Next, among the mode change scenarios defined in the chance mode selection table 222aag, mode change scenarios (“change scenario 1” to “change scenario 11”) are selected when the chance announcement effect is executed in a normal pattern. ) will be explained. This mode change scenario is a target mode (comment display part HR52, running pending symbol hr0, execution pending symbol hr0, Among the information for varying the display mode (comment display mode Ch1, in-execution suspension display mode Ch2, character display mode Ch3) of the character 810), at least the upper limit value of the step level that can be varied is defined. There is.

In the twenty-sixth control example, the display mode of each target mode is configured to be variably displayable in four stages including the initial mode (default). LV4", and is configured so that the expectation of a big hit increases as the level rises. For example, the comment display mode Ch1 (see FIG. 809), which is the target mode of the chance notice effect, is set so that the chance notice effect of variably displaying the background color of the comment display section HR52 is executed according to the set stage level. It is configured so that "LV1" has a background color of "white", "LV2" has a background color of "yellow", "LV3" has a background color of "red", and "LV4" has a background color of "rainbow color". It consists of

Note that the chance mode selection table 222aag shown in FIG. 817(b) describes the upper limit value of the variable stage level as information included in the mode change scenario. For example, the process for changing from the initial mode "LV1" to the step level of the upper limit (for example, "LV3") (the process of directly changing from "LV1" to "LV3", or "LV1", "LV2" , the process of changing in the order of "LV3", or the process of displaying "LV3" without displaying the initial mode "LV1", etc.) and the timing of changing the stage level (for example, when the target mode is displayed immediately after being displayed, or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after being displayed). Accordingly, by referring to the set change scenario, the display mode of each target mode can be appropriately variably displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 817(b), the chance mode selection table 222aag includes a normal data table to be referred to when winning the chance advance notice effect lottery, and an execution condition for forcibly executing the chance notice effect effect. and a compulsory data table referred to when is established, and different mode change scenarios are defined in correspondence with the result of success/failure determination and the acquired value of the second effect counter 223vg.

As shown in FIG. 817(b), the stage level "LV4" is a stage level determined only when a jackpot is won, and is configured to be difficult to be selected with respect to other stage levels. By constructing in this way, when the chance notice performance of the stage level 'LV4' is executed, the player is made to know that the big win is won before the special pattern variation is stopped and displayed. be able to.

Further, during the special symbol variation period, among the target modes (ch1 to ch3) of the chance notice effect executed in chronological order, the target mode (comment display mode ch1) executed first is executed later. The target mode (character display mode ch3) is configured so that the step level "LV4" is more likely to be determined. By constructing in this way, immediately after the execution of the special symbol variation, the chance notice performance of the stage level 'LV4' is executed, and the player is not interested in the variation performance being executed. can be suppressed.

Next, the contents of the forced data table included in the chance mode selection table 222aag will be described. When the result of the success/failure determination is "win", the acquired value of the second effect counter 223vg is "0 to 198", that is, the "special change scenario 1" is defined as the mode change scenario for the entire range. ing. Further, in the range of "0 to 99" in which the value of the acquired second effect counter 223vg is "out" and the result of the right/fail judgment is "off", "special change scenario 2" is defined as the mode change scenario, and "100 to In the range of "159", "special change scenario 3" is defined as a mode change scenario, and in the range of "160 to 198", "special change scenario 4" is defined as a mode change scenario.

Here, when "special change scenario 1" is set, that is, when the special symbol lottery in which the value of the effect execution counter 223aah reaches 50 is won, it is stored in the chance mode information storage area 223aag. A change scenario is determined that defines a high-level target aspect that is the same as the previous missing high-level target aspect.

In other words, in the jackpot fluctuation in which the chance notice effect is forcibly executed, the target used for the chance notice effect when the success judgment result is out despite the high level ("LV3") The aspect is forced to run. By constructing in this way, the higher the stage level of the chance notice performance executed by the pachinko machine 10, the higher the possibility of winning the jackpot.

As information stored in the chance mode information storage area 223aag that is referred to when "special change scenario 1" is set, the previously used high-level target mode wins the chance notice effect lottery and is executed. It is preferable to refer to what is executed in the forcibly executed chance forewarning effect, rather than the one that is just one. In other words, as described above, when the player wins the lottery for the chance notice effect lottery, the stage level of each target mode is determined by referring to the above-mentioned normal data table. is defined such that the higher the stage level, the higher the possibility of winning the jackpot.

However, in the case of forcibly executing the chance notice effect, even if the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, a high stage level is forcibly determined. It becomes easy to lose the balance between the level and the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot. Therefore, when the "special change scenario 1" is set, the pachinko machine 10 can be executed by adopting the target mode executed in the last time forcibly executed chance notice effect. The higher the stage level of the chance notice performance, the higher the possibility of winning the jackpot.

When "special change scenario 2" is set, one of "change scenario 8" to "change scenario 11" including a high level ("LV3") is determined by lottery. By configuring in this way, even when the chance notice effect is forcibly executed, the chance notice effect having the same content as the change scenario determined when winning the chance notice effect lottery can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the opportunity to execute the chance announcement effect.

When the "special change scenario 3" is set, the stage level of the target mode different from the previous high-level target mode stored in the chance mode information storage area 223aag is defined as high level (LV3). A change scenario is determined. By configuring in this way, the loss chance notice performance is executed by forcibly increasing the stage level only for the same target mode, and the balance between the stage level of the target mode and the possibility of winning the jackpot is greatly disturbed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of an accidental situation.

When "special change scenario 4" is set, the stage level of the same target mode as the previous high-level target mode stored in the chance mode information storage area 223aag is defined as high level (LV3). A change scenario is determined. By configuring in this way, the winning chance notice effect is frequently executed in which only the same target mode is forcibly set to a high stage level, and the balance between the stage level of the target mode and the possibility of winning the jackpot is large. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a collapse situation.

In the twenty-sixth control example, when "special change scenarios 1, 3, and 4" are set, the information used for the previous chance notice effect stored in the chance mode information storage area 223aag is referred to. However, without being limited to this, only the high-level object mode used for the previous chance notice effect stored in the chance mode information storage area 223aag is referred to, and individual may be configured to determine the step level for the target aspect of

In addition, the chance mode information storage area 223aag is made to store the information of the chance forewarning performance of a plurality of times in the past, and the performance mode can be determined based on the information regarding the chance forefrontiy performance executed two or more times before, not the last time. Alternatively, game information related to the set game state and effect mode may be associated and stored in the chance mode information storage area 223aag, and the same game state and effect mode at the time when the special change scenario is determined may be stored. It may be configured such that the mode of performance can be determined based on information relating to the chance forewarning performance performed in the past under the conditions. By configuring in this way, even if the degree of expectation of the chance notice effect and the type of the target mode are changed according to the game state and the effect mode, it is possible to forcibly correspond to the game state and the effect mode. can be made easier to execute the chance notice effect.

Furthermore, the history information stored in the chance mode information storage area 223aag may be configured to be erasable on condition that a predetermined time has elapsed (one hour has elapsed) or the standby screen is displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the chance notice effect from being forcibly executed in the effect mode influenced by the game histories of different players. Also, in this case, when the "special change scenario" is determined, the normal data table may be referenced to determine the mode of presentation.

Furthermore, in the twenty-sixth control example, when the value of the effect execution counter 223aah reaches a predetermined value and the chance notice effect is forcibly executed, the forced data table is referred to. Without limitation, each time a chance notice effect lottery is won, one of a plurality of chance mode selection tables 222aag defining different contents is determined, and the determined type of chance mode selection table 222aag is referred to, A data table (ordinary data table) for determining a performance mode by lottery and a specific performance mode forcibly are determined for a plurality of chance mode selection tables 222aag. The ratio of the data table (forced data table) to be used may be set differently.

By constructing in this way, when the chance notice performance is executed a predetermined number of times without using the structure of the performance execution counter 223aah, one of the performance modes of the chance notice performance is determined by referring to the forced data table. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a period in which the chance advance notice effect is not executed in the effect mode with a high stage level continues for a long time.

In addition, in the twenty-sixth control example, the technical concept of periodically executing the chance forewarning effect of the high-level effect mode is used, but the invention is not limited to this, and the chance forewarning effect of the low-level effect mode is used. may be applied to the technical concept of periodically executing. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily increase the number of times the chance notice effect of the effect mode with the lower stage level is executed, and as a result, the stage level of the target mode and the possibility of winning the jackpot are increased. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the balance is greatly collapsed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 812, the configuration of the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-sixth control example will be described. The RAM 223 of the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-sixth control example is different from the RAM 223 of the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-second control example described above in order to manage information for executing various effects during the battle effect. Medium flag 223aaa, non-decrease period counter 223aab, non-decrease period set flag 223aac, remaining HP storage area 223aad, long-press flag 223aae, long-press counter 223aaf, long-press scenario storage area 223i are added. The difference is that a chance mode information storage area 223aag and an effect execution counter 223aah are added in order to manage information for executing the chance prediction effect. Other elements are the same, and the same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The non-decrease period flag 223aaa is a flag for indicating that the non-decrease period is set during the operation valid period in the battle effect, and is set to ON when the non-decrease period is set. While the non-decreasing period flag 223aaa is set to ON, even if the long-pressing operation is continuously performed, the operation period is invalidated. That is, even during the operation valid period, the HP value of the enemy character 880a will not be subtracted based on the long press operation while the non-decrease period is set.

The non-decrease period is configured to end when any of the termination conditions (elapse of the predetermined period, winning the release lottery, discontinuation of the long-pressing operation) is satisfied, and the non-decrease period ends when the non-decrease period ends. During the decreasing period, the flag 223aaa is set off.

The non-decrease period counter 223aab is a counter for measuring the duration of the non-decrease period, and is set to "1" as the counter value when the non-decrease period is set. Then, when the value of the non-decrease period counter 223aab is "1" or more, the effect update process 26 is executed in the main process (see FIG. 717) of the sound lamp control device 113 which is executed every 1 millisecond. Every time (see F2171 in FIG. 826) is executed, "1" is added to the counter value (see F4713 in FIG. 827).

The value of the non-decrease period counter 223aab is referred to when determining whether or not the duration of the non-decrease period has reached the upper limit (3 seconds). Further, it is referred to when determining the decrease value of the HP value in the additional decrease effect executed when the non-decrease period ends (cancels).

The non-decrease period set flag 223aac is a flag for indicating that the non-decrease period has already been set in one battle effect, and is turned on when the set non-decrease period ends (cancels). is set to Then, it is referred to when determining whether or not the player performs a long-pressing operation during the operation valid period in the battle presentation and executes the entry lottery during the non-decrease period.

In the twenty-sixth control example, the non-decrease period is not set twice or more in one battle effect. In other words, when determining whether or not to execute the entry lottery for the non-decrease period, it is determined whether the non-decrease period set flag 223aac is set to ON, and if it is determined to be ON. It is configured so that rush lottery is not executed (process of F4707: No in FIG. 827).

By configuring in this way, the non-decrease period is set multiple times in one battle effect, and the chances of decreasing the HP value of the enemy character 880a based on the operation of the operation means (the effect button 22) are reduced. It is possible to prevent the player from losing the player's desire to operate the operation means. In addition, in the twenty-sixth control example, the non-decrease period is set so that the non-decrease period can be canceled by the player ending the long-pressing operation (releasing the effect button 22). In this case, a game aiming to reduce the HP value of the enemy based on the operation of the operating means by causing the player to end the long-pressing operation to end (cancel) the non-decrease period early, or a long-pressing operation. By continuing the push operation, the non-decrease period is continued until another end condition (winning the release lottery, the upper limit period has passed) is established, and the game aiming to execute the additional reduction effect can be selected. It becomes possible.

By configuring in this way, in the operation performance in which the long press operation is effective (during the operation effective period of the battle performance), the player is asked to continue the long press operation or temporarily interrupt and perform the long press operation again. It is possible to provide a novel game property that allows the user to select either. In addition, from the viewpoint of varying the presentation mode (the HP value of the enemy character 880a) based on the operation of the operating means, interrupting the long-pressing operation makes it easier to end the non-decrease period early. It is a game that is advantageous to

In the twenty-sixth control example, the upper limit of the number of times the non-decrease period is set in one battle effect is one, but the non-decrease period can be set two or more times without being limited to this. can be In this case, it is preferable to set different entry conditions and cancellation conditions for the first non-decrease period and the second non-decrease period. It is preferable that the second non-decrease period is set more easily in the case of a production result indicating a failure than in the case of a disadvantageous production result (a production result indicating a failure). By configuring in this way, the player expects that the period during which the HP value of the enemy character 880a does not decrease is set multiple times during the effective operation period of the battle effect. That is, conventionally, in the operation effect that makes the player expect that the effect mode (HP value) will be more varied (decreased) by operating the operation means, the effect mode is changed based on the operation to the operation means. It is possible to provide a novel game property that makes the player expect that the (HP value) will not decrease.

The remaining HP storage area 223aad is a storage area for storing the HP value of the enemy character 880a in the battle production. type) is stored to indicate the HP value (MAX value) (see F4207 in FIG. 819). Furthermore, information for indicating the final result of the executed battle presentation, that is, the final HP value of the enemy character that can be decreased is stored (see F4210 in FIG. 819). In addition, information about the HP value decrease value determined based on the player's operation of the operation means (continuous hit operation, long press operation), and information about the HP value decrease value determined by the additional decrease effect. is also stored.

By reading each information stored in the remaining HP storage area 223aad, it is possible to calculate the current remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a and the HP difference value (the difference value between the remaining HP value and the final HP value). .

The long-pressing flag 223aae is a flag for indicating that a long-pressing operation is being performed, and is information output when the player operates the operation means (effect button 22) (when the effect button 22 is pressed). It is set to ON when it is determined that a long-pressing operation is being performed based on an output signal or the like output by a detecting means capable of detecting that the button has been pressed. It should be noted that whether the player's operation on the effect button 22 is a pressing operation or a long pressing operation is determined based on the length of the period during which the effect button 22 is continuously pressed. Since the detailed contents have already been explained in the above control example, they are omitted. It should be noted that, even with methods other than those described in the control examples described above, a well-known and commonly used technique may be used to make it possible to distinguish between different operation methods.

The long-press counter 223aaf is a counter for measuring the duration of the long-press operation. "1" is set. Then, when the value of the long press counter 223aaf is "1" or more, the effect update process 26 ( 826), "1" is added to the counter value (see F4703 in FIG. 827).

The value of this long-press counter 223aaf is used to update the production scenario for decreasing the HP value of the enemy character 880a during the long-press operation. Then, it is cleared to 0 when the valid operation period expires.

In the twenty-sixth control example, even when the long-pressing flag 223aae is set to ON (a state in which the long-pressing operation continues), the long-pressing counter 223aaf is not updated (F4701 in FIG. 827: Yes). Further, even if the long-pressing operation is interrupted once, the value of the long-pressing counter 223aaf is not cleared until the operation valid period ends.

Therefore, even if the player releases the hand by mistake during the long-pressing operation, the performance executed based on the update of the performance scenario is continued by long-pressing the performance button 22 again. becomes possible. In this case, it is necessary to perform the long-press determination again for the operation of the effect button 22, so the effect scenario update period for the entire period during which the effect button 22 is pressed (the long-press operation is determined) ) is slightly shorter than when the long-pressing operation is never interrupted, but if the player accidentally releases the hand during the long-pressing operation, the value of the long-pressing counter 223aaf becomes 0. It is possible to make it easier to update the production scenario more reliably than the specification that is cleared immediately.

The long-press scenario storage area 223aai is a storage area for storing an effect scenario determined when it is determined that the operation method of the operation means by the player during the effective operation period of the battle effect is a long-press operation. be. While the long-pressing operation is being performed, the effect mode (HP value of the enemy character 880a) is variably displayed based on the effect scenario stored in the long-pressing scenario storage area 223aai.

In addition, in the twenty-sixth control example, the rendering mode (HP value) during the long-pressing operation is configured to vary based on the elapsed time (the value of the long-pressing counter 223aaf) during the execution of the long-pressing operation. However, without being limited to this, another method may be used to vary the effect mode (HP value) during the long-pressing operation.

For example, the number of times the effect button 22 is pseudo-pressed (pseudo-press count) is determined according to the length of the period during which the long-press operation is being performed, and the long-press operation is performed based on the pseudo-press count. It may also be configured to determine the variable mode of the performance mode (HP value) in .

The chance mode information storage area 223aag is for storing information (chance mode information) indicating the performance mode (chance mode) of the chance preview effect determined when the chance preview effect is executed as the effect mode of the variable effect. This is a storage area for storing chance mode information corresponding to variable performance. This chance mode is determined by the chance-up effect determination process 26 (see F3153 in FIG. 823) executed in the process for setting the effect mode of the variable effect (normal state effect mode determination process 26 (see F3053 in FIG. 821)). and stored in the chance mode selection table 222aag.

The chance mode information stored in the chance mode selection table 222aag is read out during the execution of the variable effect, and a display command for varying the display mode of the target mode is set when the timing for changing the target mode comes. be done. The chance mode information storage area 223aag has a past information area capable of storing a plurality (three pieces) of chance mode information set in the past. , the chance mode information corresponding to the variable performance performed in the past can also be stored for a predetermined period.

In the twenty-sixth control example, if the specific condition is satisfied when determining the chance mode, the chance mode can be determined by referring to the past information stored in the chance mode information storage area 223aag. are doing. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the fact that the same chance mode is continuously determined, and the chance notice effect with little variation is executed, and the effect of the effect is lowered.

The effect execution counter 223aah is a counter that is referred to when determining whether or not an execution condition for forcibly executing the chance notice effect is satisfied. 1”. Further, update processing is executed to add or subtract the counter value according to the effect mode of the variable effect to be executed, and when the counter value reaches "50", the chance notice effect is forcibly executed. is determined to be satisfied. Then, it is cleared to "0" when the effect mode for forcibly executing the chance notice effect is determined.

<Regarding control processing contents of the audio ramp control device 113 in the twenty-sixth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 818 to 827, the contents of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-sixth control example will be described as different from the twenty-second control example described above. Mainly explain. It should be noted that descriptions of the same processing contents as those of the twenty-second control example described above will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 818, the processing contents of the variable effect setting process 26 (F2959) will be described. FIG. 818 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the variable effect setting process 26 (F2959). As shown in FIG. 818, in the variable effect setting process 26 (F2959), the process contents ( F3051 to F3053) are different, and the others are the same.

When the variable effect setting process 26 (F2959) is executed, first, the same processes of F3001 to F3011 as the variable effect setting process 22 (see F2909 in FIG. 728) are executed. Then, in the process of F3011, if it is determined that the current gaming state is the time saving state (F3011: Yes), time saving state production mode determination processing for determining the production mode of the variable production executed during the time saving state 26 is executed (F3051), after that, a display variation pattern command indicating the determined effect mode is set (F3019), and this process is terminated. In addition, the detailed content of the time saving state production mode determination process 26 (F3051) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of F3011, if it is determined that it is not in the time saving state (F3011: No), then it is determined whether the current gaming state is a variable probability state (F3015), and if it is determined to be a variable probability state (F3015: Yes), to execute the variable probability state effect mode determination processing 26 for determining the effect mode of the variable effect to be executed during the variable probability state (F3052), then, to execute the process of F3019 described above, this End the process. In addition, the detailed contents of the variable probability state effect mode determination process 26 (F3052) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Also, in the process of F3015, if it is determined that it is not in the probability variable state (F3015: No), the current gaming state is not the time saving state and is not in the probability variable state, that is, when the normal state is set Therefore, the normal state effect mode determination process 26 for determining the effect mode of the variable effect to be executed during the normal state is executed (F3053), and then the process of F3019 described above is executed, and this process ends. do. Details of the normal state rendering mode determination process 26 (F3053) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the twenty-sixth control example, the game states that can be set in the pachinko machine 10 are the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), variable state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols). probability state), time-saving state (low probability state of special design, high probability state of normal design) can be set. Then, in a state in which a new special symbol lottery can be executed, one of the above-described three types of game states is always set. Therefore, in the variation effect setting process 26 (F2959) executed when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command indicating the execution of the special symbol lottery, it is determined that the current game state is neither the time saving state nor the probability variable state. If so (F3015: No), the normal state is set, so the normal state effect mode determination process 26 (F3053) is executed.

It should be noted that, in place of the processing content executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-sixth control example, when it is determined that the current game state is neither the time saving state nor the variable probability state (F3015: No), the current game state is It may be configured to execute a process for determining whether it is in the normal state, and to execute the normal state effect mode determination process 26 (F3053) when it is determined that it is in the normal state. In this case, when it is determined that the current game state is neither the time-saving state, the variable probability state, nor the normal state, an error command indicating that the current game state cannot be normally determined is set. , If the error command is set, without setting the effect mode of the variation effect corresponding to the special symbol change, the display mode indicating that the special symbol variation is being executed and the effect mode of the normal variation effect and a display mode indicating that the setting has not been made.

By configuring in this way, when the current game state cannot be determined normally, the effect mode of the variable effect executed in the game state different from the set game state is set, and the game is played. It is possible to suppress giving a sense of incongruity to the person.

Next, with reference to FIG. 819, in the fluctuation production setting process 26 (F2959), the time saving state production mode determination process 26 (F3051) executed when setting the fluctuation production when the time saving state is set. I will explain the details of the processing. FIG. 819 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the time saving state production mode determination process 26 (F3051).

This 26th control example is different from the 22nd control example described above in that the battle production reach (see FIGS. 800 to 802) is configured to be executable during the time saving state, and is shown in FIG. As it is, in the time saving state production mode determination process 26 (F3051), the process of determining the production mode of the battle production reach is executed.

Specifically, when the time saving state production mode determination process 26 (F3051) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 223vp is 1 (F4201), and if the value of the time saving counter 223vp is 1 If it is determined that there is (F4201: Yes), the performance mode of the time-saving end suggestion performance that the performance result of the variable performance is the end of the chance mode is determined (F4202), and this processing is terminated.

Here, in the twenty-sixth control example, as in the twenty-second control example described above, while the time saving state is set, the "chance mode" is set as a mode effect for suggesting the set gaming state. It is configured so that This "chance mode" is configured to be set even in part when the variable probability state is set. Then, in the variation performance corresponding to the last special symbol variation (time saving final variation) executed in the time saving state (variation performance corresponding to the 100th special symbol variation after the time saving state is set), the time saving state ends , the time-saving end-suggesting effect of the effect mode indicating that the "chance mode" ends is executed. On the other hand, when "chance mode" is set as the probability variation state, the variation effect corresponding to the 100th special symbol variation after the probability variation state is set, that is, even if the time saving state is set. For example, as a variable performance corresponding to the final variation of the time saving, a time saving end suggesting performance of a performance mode indicating that the "chance mode" is promoted to the "super chance mode" is executed.

Specifically, in the early stage of the time-saving end suggestive effect, a guidance mode (characters of "chance mode end") to guide the player that the "chance mode" will end due to the end of the variable effect being executed. Suggests that either a mode effect corresponding to the normal state (normal mode) or a mode effect corresponding to the variable probability state (super chance mode) is set as the mode effect after the "chance mode" ends. The display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is a suggestive mode (characters of "Throw a coin, and if heads come up, enter the super chance mode! If tails come out, it's a disappointing normal mode" and an animation of throwing a coin). to be displayed.

After that, if the time saving state is set, animation is executed in which the coin tossed is flipped by the effect mode determined in F4202 of the time saving state effect mode determination process 26 (see F3051 in FIG. 819), A variable effect is executed to indicate that the "chance mode" is shifted to the "normal mode". On the other hand, when the variable probability state is set, an animation in which the tossed coin turns face up is executed according to the effect mode determined in F4302 of the variable probability state effect mode determination process 26 (see F3052 in FIG. 820), which will be described later. Then, a variable effect is executed indicating that the "chance mode" is shifted to the "super chance mode".

By configuring in this way, when the time saving final variation or the special symbol variation corresponding to the time saving final variation is executed, the time saving end suggestion production can be started in the same production mode, so the "chance mode ”, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether the currently set game state is the time-saving state or the variable probability state.

In addition, in the twenty-sixth control example, the time saving end suggestion effect is configured to be executed using the period in which the final variation of the special symbol in the "chance mode" is executed, but it is not limited to this, at least It may be configured to execute the time-saving end suggesting effect using a plurality of special symbol variation periods including the final variation of the special symbol. In this case, for example, it is preferable that the time-saving end suggesting effect is executed using the three remaining fluctuation periods of the special symbol fluctuation in the "chance mode". That is, the number of special symbol variations smaller than the upper limit number of reserved storage of the second special symbol in which the special symbol variation is mainly executed during the ``chance mode'' is defined as the performance period in which the time-saving end suggesting performance is performed, and the time-saving is performed. It is determined that the number of retained memories of the acquired second special symbols is greater than the number of special symbol variations required until the end of the ``chance mode'' at the time when the second special symbol variation capable of starting the end-suggesting performance is executed. In this case, it is preferable to configure so as to execute a time-saving end suggestion effect.

By configuring in this way, when it is confirmed that the second special symbol variation is continuously executed multiple times from the start of the time saving end suggesting effect to the end of the "chance mode" Since the time-saving end suggesting effect can be configured to be executable, a situation occurs in which the special symbol variation is not executed while the time-saving end suggesting effect is being executed, and the time-saving end suggesting effect is delayed. can be suppressed.

In addition, the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol variation at which the time-saving end suggestion production starts and the variation pattern of the special symbol variation (variation time) and, because it is possible to determine the performance period of the time-saving end suggestion performance, the timing at which the "chance mode" ends, that is, the special symbol variation that will end the "chance mode" is stopped and displayed. It is possible to easily inform the player of the performance result of the time-saving end suggesting performance corresponding to the timing to do so.

In addition, a special symbol variation that includes at least a special symbol variation that ends the "chance mode" (for example, a special symbol variation that has a remaining number of 0 to 3 times until the special symbol variation that ends the chance mode is executed) ), when the result of the special symbol lottery is other than the jackpot, the same variation time (for example, 10 seconds) is set, so that the winning included in the second special symbol reservation already acquired. The performance period of the time-saving end suggesting performance may be determined without prefetching the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol variation to be executed later based on the information.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol variation in which the time-saving end suggestion production is executed is a jackpot, the result of the time-saving end suggestion production will be changed from "chance mode" to "jackpot game". A special performance mode indicating the shift to the player can be determined, and when the special performance mode is determined, the player determines whether the currently set game state is a time-saving state or a probability variable state. It may be constructed so as to make it difficult for the player to grasp it easily, or even when the variable probability state is set, it may be constructed so as to be able to decide the performance mode that makes the player think that he or she has won a jackpot during the time-saving state. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make the players think that they have won a jackpot in the time-saving state in which the low-probability state of the special symbol is set.

Returning to FIG. 819, the description continues. In the process of F4201, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223vp is not 1, that is, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223vp is greater than 1 (F4201: No), based on the acquired variation pattern Then, the variation pattern selection table 222va is referenced to determine the variation effect type (F4203). It should be noted that, based on the specific processing content executed in F4203, that is, the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110, the processing content for determining the type of variable effect (eg, reach type, etc.) is the same as the above-described control examples, so the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, it is determined whether or not the variable effect type determined in the process of F4203 is the battle effect reach (F4204), and when it is determined that the variable effect type is not the battle effect reach (F4204: No), the process of F4203 A production mode corresponding to the determined variable production type is determined (F4205), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of F4204, when it is determined that the variable production type is the battle production reach (F4204: Yes), the production mode of the battle production is determined by lottery (F4206). In the process of F4206, the type of the friendly character 801a, the type of the enemy character 880a, and the presence or absence of the first part effect (see FIG. 800(b)) in the battle effect are decided by lottery.

Here, the details of the presentation mode determined by the process of F4206 will be described. In the twenty-sixth control example, as the performance mode of the battle performance reach, it is possible to determine "win battle performance reach" and "loss battle performance reach" based on the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery. When the "winning battle production reach" is determined, the production result (victory production) in which the HP gauge 890 of the enemy character 880a (see FIG. 800) becomes "0" is executed, and the "losing battle production" is executed. When "Reach" is determined, a performance result (defeat performance) in which the HP gauge 890 of the enemy character 880a does not become "0" is executed.

Further, various display modes displayed during the period from the execution of the battle production ready-to-win until the display of the production result can be changed and determined according to the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery. there is Specifically, in the "winning battle presentation reach", it is easier to select a hero-like character as the ally character 801a than in the "losing battle presentation reach", and the first part presentation is easier to execute, and , the enemy character 880a with a small HP value is easily selected. By configuring in this way, when the battle production ready-to-win is executed, by grasping the production contents of the battle production ready-to-win to be executed, the game determines whether the current production result is the victory production or the defeat production. Since it is possible to make the player predict, in the performance period in which the battle performance is executed, the battle performance reach is expected to be displayed in a display mode that is easily selected in the win battle performance reach in which the victory performance is executed. can be watched.

In addition, in this battle production ready-to-win, various display modes determined according to the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery are not displayed at the same time, but displayed at staggered display timings. Specifically, after the start of the battle effect reach, the enemy character 880a is displayed after the ally character 801a is displayed first. After that, the first part effect is executed. In this way, the display mode in which the selection ratio of the mode displayed according to the result of the special symbol lottery is changed is displayed at different timings. During this period, it is possible to make it easier to make people interested in the contents of the battle production reach.

In addition, in the twenty-sixth control example, for each of the display modes that can display different modes according to the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery, the winning battle production reach is the losing battle production reach. However, it is not limited to this, and may be configured to vary the selection ratio of the combination of various display modes according to the result of the special symbol lottery, producing a winning battle. As a combination of various display modes that are more likely to be selected in the case of ready-to-win than in the case of off-battle production ready-to-win, as the type of display mode (ally character 801a) displayed first, as a single display mode, It is preferable to define a combination including the types of display modes that are more likely to be selected in the case of the winning battle presentation reach than in the case of the winning battle presentation reach. By configuring in this way, even if the type of the friendly character 801a that is displayed first after the start of the battle effect ready-to-win battle is any type, it is possible to continue to expect the winning battle effect ready-to-win battle. can be made

Next, specific contents of various display modes determined by the process of F4206 will be described. First, the type of the ally character 801a (see FIG. 800) will be described. In the battle production ready-to-win, either a first ally character imitating a hero (see FIG. 800(a)) or a second ally character imitating a rabbit (not shown) is displayed as the ally character 801a. It is structured in such a manner that the first ally character is more likely to be selected than the second ally character as the effect mode of the winning battle effect reach. On the other hand, it is configured such that the second ally character is more likely to be selected than the first ally character as the production mode of the out-of-battle production reach. Therefore, when the battle effect reach is started, it is possible to make the player interested in which character is first displayed as the type of the ally character 801a.

Here, when the first ally character imitating a hero is selected as the type of the ally character 801a, the HP value of the enemy character 880a is reduced more than the second ally character imitating a rabbit with one attack. is configured to be possible. In other words, the first ally character, which is likely to be selected in the hit battle production reach, is configured to be more likely to execute an attack that greatly reduces the HP value of the enemy character 880a. By configuring in this way, the less the HP gauge 890 (remaining HP value 890a) of the enemy character 880a in the battle production reach, the higher the possibility of the winning battle production reach. It is possible to make it easier for the player who is playing to recognize that the type of the selected ally character 801a is advantageous to the player (suggesting that the player has a winning battle effect reach).

In addition, in the twenty-sixth control example, both the first ally character and the second ally character are configured to be selected regardless of the type of battle effect reach (hitting battle effect reach, losing battle effect reach), and the selection is made. In addition to this, for example, it is possible to select a third ally character that can select only the winning battle production reach, or a fourth ally character that can only select the losing battle production reach. can be By configuring in this way, since it is possible for the player to grasp the production result (victory production, defeat production) immediately after the battle production ready-to-reach is started, a winning battle is performed every time the battle production ready-to-reach is executed. It is possible to suppress excessive expectation of the production reach.

In addition, since the timing at which the player grasps the effect result of the battle effect ready-to-win that is being executed can be varied according to the effect mode of the battle effect ready-to-win that is being executed, the effect result of the battle effect ready-to-win that is being executed can be quickly displayed. It is possible to make the player who wants to grasp the details of the effect of the battle effect reach to be executed more closely.

Next, the types of enemy characters 880a (see FIG. 800(a)) will be described. In the battle production reach, the enemy characters 880a are the enemy character A with the lowest HP value (see FIG. 800(a)), the enemy character B with the higher HP value than the enemy character A (not shown), and the highest HP value. It is constructed so that one of the enemy characters C (not shown) is displayed, and the enemy character A is more likely to be selected in the case of winning battle production reach than in the case of losing battle production reach. , the enemy character C is configured to be difficult to be selected.

Next, the display mode of the HP gauge 890 corresponding to the type of the displayed enemy character 880a will be described. In the battle effect reach executed in the twenty-sixth control example, as shown in FIG. 800(a), the HP value " It is configured to display an HP gauge 890 with only indicators indicating "0" and the HP value "MAX". Even if an enemy character 880a with a different HP value is displayed, the HP gauge 890 with the same length is displayed, and if the HP value does not decrease (“MAX” state), the remaining HP value The HP gauge 890 is configured to display a display mode (see FIG. 800(a)) in which the HP gauge 890 is entirely occupied.

That is, for example, when the HP value of enemy character A is "50" and the HP value of enemy character C is "150", the same type of enemy character 880a is displayed. The HP gauge 890 is displayed with a length of . Then, when the friendly character 801a attacks and inflicts "25" damage to the enemy character 880a, the remaining HP value becomes "25 (50-25)" when the enemy character A is selected. An effect is executed in which the remaining HP value 890a decreases to the position of 1/2 of the HP gauge 890, and when the enemy character C is selected, the remaining HP value becomes “125 (150-25)”. An effect in which the remaining HP value 890a decreases only up to the 5/6 position of the HP gauge 890 is executed.

By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make it difficult for a player who is experiencing the battle production reach for the first time to notice that the HP value set differs depending on the type of the enemy character 880a, and to make it difficult for the player to notice that the HP value is different depending on the type of the enemy character 880a. Since the degree of decrease of the remaining HP value 890a displayed on the HP gauge 890 can be varied when the character attacks, it is possible to provide an unexpected performance to the player. In addition, since the player who has experienced the battle effect reach many times can grasp the HP value at the time when the type of the enemy character 880a is displayed, the battle effect reach of this time is a hit battle effect. It is possible to quickly predict whether or not there is a high possibility of reach.

Next, the content of the determination regarding the first part effect (see FIG. 800(b)) will be described. In the process of F4206, in addition to the display mode types of the friend character 801a and the enemy character 880a described above, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the first part effect. Specifically, whether or not to execute the first part effect is determined based on the type of the friend character 801a determined by lottery, the type of the enemy character 880a, and the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery. For example, in the production mode of hit battle production reach, the friendly character 801a is the second friendly character (a type that makes it difficult to decrease the remaining HP value 890a of the enemy character 880a), and the enemy character 880a is the enemy character C (HP value is selected, that is, when the combination makes it more difficult than other combinations to set the HP value of the enemy character 880a to "0" during the battle production reach, the first part It is configured to determine execution of production.

By configuring in this way, even if the type of the friendly character 801a and the type of the enemy character 880a are individually selected, it is possible to execute the battle production reach without making the player feel uncomfortable. becomes.

More specifically, when the second ally character is selected, an effect that can reduce the HP value by up to 100 is executed during the battle effect, and the first ally character is selected. In this case, a performance capable of reducing the HP value by 150 at maximum is executed during the battle performance. That is, when the first ally character is selected, any type (enemy character A (HP value "50") to enemy character C (HP value "150")) is selected as the type of the enemy character 880a. Even in this case, the HP value of the enemy character 880a can be reduced to "0", and when the second ally character is selected, the type of the enemy character 880a is enemy character A or enemy character B. When selected, the HP value of the enemy character 880a can be reduced to "0", and when the enemy character C is selected, the HP value can be reduced to "0" by attacking only the second ally character. It is configured so that it cannot (is difficult) to be reduced to

Then, the type of the friendly character 801a and the type of the enemy character 880a are determined, and after determining the HP value to be reduced by the attack of the friendly character 801a (determining the attack mode), the HP value after reduction (remaining HP value ), determines whether the calculated remaining HP value indicates the production result (hit or miss), and indicates the production result (remaining HP value “0” if hit battle production reach, lose If it is a battle production reach, the remaining HP value is other than “0”), the first part production is not executed, and the production result is not shown (although it is a winning battle production reach, it is calculated. If the calculated remaining HP value is other than "0"), execution of the first part effect is determined to reduce the HP value of the enemy character 880a so that the calculated remaining HP value becomes "0". are doing.

Also, for example, if the calculated remaining HP value is "0" in spite of the outlier battle effect reach, the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a is increased or reduced by the recovery effect or the allied character 801a. The remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a is configured not to become "0" by executing the correction effect of reducing the HP value when the losing battle effect reach is executed.

By configuring in this way, the type of the friendly character 801a and the type of the enemy character 880a can be randomly determined, and the HP value of the enemy character 880a to be decreased by the attack of the friendly character 801a is determined. Even when a situation occurs that does not correspond to the performance result of the battle performance ready-to-win which is executed by determining based on the types of various characters, the performance result can be notified without giving a sense of incongruity to the player.

Here, if the configuration is such that the HP value of the enemy character 880a to be reduced by the attack of the allied character 801a is determined based on the performance result of the battle production reach, the battle production reach is determined only by the attack production executed by the allied character 801a. Since it is possible to reliably notify the effect result of , it is not necessary to execute the first part effect, the recovery effect, and the correction effect, and the processing for determining the effect mode can be reduced. , the HP value to be reduced by the attack of the allied character 801a will differ according to the effect result of the battle production reach. By grasping the attack mode, it becomes difficult for the player to predict the HP value that will decrease. As a result, the player loses interest in the performance mode (attack mode) of the battle performance ready-to-win, and the performance effect is reduced.

On the other hand, in the twenty-sixth control example, in the attack of the friendly character 801a, only the HP value corresponding to the selected attack mode is decreased, and the HP value after the decrease (remaining HP value) , and the remaining HP value indicating the effect result, different effects (first part effect, recovery effect) are executed. Therefore, it is possible to easily predict the remaining HP value 890a after the decrease before the remaining HP value 890a displayed on the HP gauge 890 decreases based on the effect content (attack mode) of the battle effect reach. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for a player who tries to perceive the effect result of the battle effect reach as soon as possible to pay attention to the effect contents of the battle effect reach which is being executed.

As described above, in the twenty-sixth control example, as the battle effect reach, the friendly character 801a and the enemy character Depending on the type of the character 880a, the player can predict whether the combination will easily bring the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a to "0". By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in what kind of combination the battle production reach progresses.

In the twenty-sixth control example, as described above, the maximum HP value of the enemy character 880a that can be decreased by the attack of the friendly character 801a depends on the type (brave or rabbit) of the selected friendly character 801a. By varying the value and varying the upper limit (MAX value) of the HP value according to the type (enemy character A to enemy character C) of the selected enemy character 880a, the enemy character is displayed based on the type of each character. It is configured so that the player can predict whether or not the remaining HP value of 880a is likely to be set to "0", but it is not limited to this, and the remaining HP value is reduced by the attack of the ally character 801a. It is possible to change the minimum HP value of the enemy character 880a, or to change the number of attacks (the number of times the HP value of the enemy character 880a is reduced) during one battle effect. Alternatively, the degree of decrease in the HP value (defense power) may differ depending on the type of enemy character 880a (enemy character A to enemy character C). Even in this configuration, the types of the friendly character 801a and the enemy character 880a that are displayed before the actual execution of the effect of decreasing the HP value of the enemy character 880a are displayed as the battle effect reach. , the player can predict whether or not the combination will easily bring the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a to "0". By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in what kind of combination the battle production reach progresses.

In addition, as the production mode of the battle production reach, each determined character type is a type that is advantageous to the player (a winning battle production reach is a type that is more likely to be selected than a losing battle production reach). In the case where the combination of each character type determined is a combination that is advantageous to the player (a winning battle production reach is a combination that is more likely to be selected than a losing battle production reach), an advantageous production mode is determined. It is preferable to display characters "chance up" on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 as a guidance mode for indicating that. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the effect mode of the current battle effect ready-to-win is the effect mode that is advantageous to the player.

The timing of displaying the guidance mode may be the same timing as the presentation mode advantageous to the player is displayed, or the guidance mode may be displayed after the presentation mode advantageous to the player is displayed. It may be configured to display. In this case, the player who can grasp that the presentation mode is advantageous only by confirming the displayed presentation mode, and the player who understands that the presentation mode is advantageous due to the guidance mode being displayed. It is possible to make the player realize that the effect executed this time is an advantageous effect to the player at an earlier stage.

On the other hand, it may be configured such that the characters "chance up", which is a guidance mode for indicating that an advantageous mode of presentation has been determined, are displayed at a time point before the corresponding mode of presentation is displayed. . By configuring in this way, it is possible to display an advantageous effect mode in a state in which the player is made aware in advance that an advantageous effect mode will be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in what kind of effect mode is displayed as an advantageous effect mode. Furthermore, if the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be capable of determining a plurality of performance modes with different degrees of advantage, the player is expected to display a performance mode with a higher degree of advantage, and the player is expected to watch the progressing performance. can be done.

Returning to FIG. 819, the description continues. The HP value (MAX value) corresponding to the determined type of the enemy character 880a among the various effects determined in the process of F4206 is stored in the remaining HP storage area 223aad (F4207). In other words, when "enemy character A" is determined as the type of the enemy character 880a in the process of F4206, information corresponding to the HP value "50" is stored in the remaining HP storage area 223aad and "enemy character B" is determined. In this case, information corresponding to the HP value "100" is stored in the remaining HP storage area 223aad, and information corresponding to the HP value "150" is stored in the remaining HP storage area 223aad when "enemy character C" is determined. do.

Next, in order to determine the final HP value in the current battle effect, first, it is determined whether the current variation effect is a hit change effect (F4208), and if it is determined to be a hit change effect (F4208: Yes ), "0" is determined as the final HP value (F4211), and the determined final HP value is stored in the remaining HP storage area 223aad (F4210).

On the other hand, in the processing of F4208, if it is determined that the current variation performance is not a hit variation performance (is a loss variation performance) (F4208: No), the final HP value is determined by referring to the final HP selection table 222aad when losing. It is determined (F4209), and the process moves to F4210. As described above, in the twenty-sixth control example, when determining the effect mode of the battle effect, the upper limit (MAX value) and lower limit (final HP value) of the HP value of the enemy character 880a are determined by different lotteries. configured to decide. By configuring in this way, compared to the case where the upper limit (MAX value) and lower limit (final HP value) of the HP value of the enemy character 880a are determined by one lottery, each lottery result can be combined. In the case where the same number of performance patterns can be executed, the amount of data of the performance patterns to be stored in advance can be reduced by the amount that the performance patterns can be generated.

In addition, in the battle effect in the twenty-sixth control example, the effect mode can be determined based on the differential HP value (the difference between the remaining HP value and the final HP value). is selected, and even if the remaining HP is the same, if the final HP value is different, the differential HP value will also be different. can let Therefore, it is possible to easily increase the variations of effects that are executed when the conditions are the same in terms of appearance.

When the process of F4210 is completed, next, the setting information of the operation effective period corresponding to the effect pattern is stored in the effect SW effective time storage area 223vp (F4212), and this process is ended. Here, the contents of the effect SW valid time storage area 223vp will be described. The effect SW effective time storage area 223vp contains setting information for indicating a period (start timing and end timing) for which an operation effective period is set for each effect type in which an operation effective period can be set, and an operation effective period. Preparation information indicating two seconds before the set period, valid period gauge ga4 (see FIG. 801 (a)) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and display effect button Sw6 (see FIG. 801 ( a) display information about the display mode of (see) can be stored.

Then, based on the preparation information stored in the effect SW effective time storage area 223vp, a preparation screen (see FIG. 801(a)) is displayed before the operation effective period is actually set. The display mode displayed on this preparation screen (see FIG. 801(a)) is set based on the display information stored in the effect SW valid time storage area 223vp.

Here, in the twenty-sixth control example, the length of the operation effective period set during the battle effect can be determined based on the effect result of the battle effect. It is configured such that a longer operation valid period is more likely to be set in the case of a performance result corresponding to winning (winning battle performance). By configuring in this way, the winning battle effect in which the final HP value is set to “0” is longer than the outlier battle effect in which the final HP value is set to a value larger than “0”. can be lengthened, it is possible to make it easier to execute an effect of decreasing the HP value based on the operation to the operation means.

In addition, in the twenty-sixth control example, the length of the operation valid period actually set and the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (valid period gauge ga4 (see FIG. 801(a)), , the display effect button Sw6 (see FIG. 801(a))) can be changed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from judging the effect result at an early stage based on the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 .

Next, referring to FIG. 820, in the variable production setting process 26 (F2959), the probability variable state production mode determination process 26 (F3052) executed when setting the variable production when the probability variable state is set I will explain the details of the processing. FIG. 820 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the variable probability state effect mode determination processing 26 (F3052).

In the twenty-sixth control example, it is possible to set a variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) after the end of the jackpot game. This probability variable state is set to a high probability that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery will win a jackpot than the normal state in which the low probability state of the special symbol is set, and the time saving state. This game state is more advantageous to the player than other game states in terms of the degree of expectation for winning a big win when the symbol lottery is executed. In addition, since it becomes easier to execute the special symbol lottery than the normal state in which the low probability state of the normal symbols is set, the game state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state in terms of the ease of execution of the special symbol lottery. becomes. Therefore, in the twenty-sixth control example, the variable probability state is the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

In the twenty-sixth control example, when a jackpot is won in a state where the variable probability state is set, or when a special symbol lottery of a specific number (120 times) is executed, the variable probability state is configured to end. there is Then, when the probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends, a "super chance mode" that can suggest (notify) that the probability variable state is set as a mode effect for suggesting the set game state Production", or a "chance mode production" that can suggest (notify) that the time saving state or the variable probability state is set is executed.

Specifically, when it is notified that the probability change state is set after the end of the big win game during the period from the start of the special symbol variation for winning the big win to the end of the big win game, that is, the probability change after the end of the big win game Effect for letting the player know that the state is set (variable probability promotion effect, stop display of the third symbol (for example, 777) corresponding to the big hit (variable probability big win) for which the variable probability state is set, etc.) is executed If so, a "super chance mode effect" is executed after the jackpot game ends.

On the other hand, during the period from the start of the special symbol variation for winning the jackpot to the end of the jackpot game, an effect is executed to make the player understand that the game state set after the jackpot game is a probability variable state. First, in at least a part of the case where it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the game state set after the end of the big win game is the probability variable state or the time saving state, the ``chance mode performance'' is executed after the end of the big win game.

By configuring in this way, when it is notified in advance that the variable probability state is set, the player can easily understand that the currently set game state is the variable probability state, so that the player can feel at ease. A game can be played, and if it is not notified in advance that the probability variable state is set, an effect (time saving state or probability variable state) that makes it difficult to grasp whether the probability variable state is set is set), even if the time saving state is set, the game can be played while expecting that the variable probability state is set.

Here, in the twenty-sixth control example, 100 special symbol variations are defined as the maximum period during which the time saving state continues, and 120 special symbol variations are defined as the maximum period during which the probability variable state continues. Therefore, when the "chance mode production" that makes it difficult to understand whether the time saving state is set or the probability variable state is set, the final period of the "chance mode production" (100th special symbol fluctuation period) , the time-saving end suggestion production is executed to guide the player that the “chance mode production” ends, and as the production result of the time-saving end suggestion production, the “super chance mode production” corresponding to the probability change state. An effect result indicating that the mode effect shifts (promotes) is executed.

That is, in the twenty-sixth control example, the timing of notifying the player that the variable probability state is set is determined by the type of mode effect set when the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is the variable probability state. configured to be different. By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player that the variable probability state is set after the end of the big win game at various timings, so that the player expects that the variable probability state is set after the end of the big win game. It is possible to allow the player to continue playing the game.

In addition, in the twenty-sixth control example, the timing of informing the player that the variable probability state is set is varied according to the type of mode effect set after the end of the jackpot game. Not limited to, for example, when the "chance mode effect" is executed in a state in which the probability variation state is set, the notification effect for notifying that the probability variation state is performed each time the special symbol lottery is executed It may be configured to execute a notification lottery that determines whether or not to execute a notification lottery, and to execute a notification effect that notifies that the probability variable state is set when the notification lottery is won. The above-described notification effect may be executed when it is determined that a predetermined operation has been performed on an operable operation means (frame button 22, etc.). Even in this case, it is possible to establish, at various timings, execution conditions for executing a notification effect for notifying that the variable probability state is set.

Furthermore, in this 26th control example, the period when the remaining number of special symbol fluctuation times (the number of lotteries) that can be executed during the probability variation state is 20 times or less, that is, 100 times of special symbol variation after the probability variation state is set The period after the (lottery) is executed (the second half of the probability variation period) and the period from the time the probability variation state is set until the 100th special symbol variation (lottery) is executed (the first half period of the probability variation), the special design. A notification mode for notifying the result of the lottery to the player is varied, and in the probability variable first half period, a variable performance for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is executed each time one special symbol lottery is executed, In the probability variation latter half period, the mode variation performance for showing the results of the special symbol lottery of a plurality of times is configured to be executed across a plurality of special symbol variations.

That is, the first situation in which the production result of one variable production is determined based on the lottery result of one special symbol lottery, and the production result of one variable production is determined based on the lottery results of a plurality of special symbol lotteries. It is configured to be able to create a second situation where With this configuration, in the first situation, the number of executions of the variable performance and the number of executions of the special symbol lottery can be synchronized, so that the player can easily grasp the number of executions of the special symbol lottery. be able to. On the other hand, in the second situation, the special symbol lottery can be executed more than the number of executions of the variable performance, so it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of executions of the special symbol lottery. In addition, since the result of the special symbol lottery can be reported a plurality of times using the effect result of one variable effect, the number of times of informing the player that the result of the special symbol lottery is other than a big hit (loss) can be reduced. , can be reduced compared to the case where the result of the special symbol lottery is notified each time the special symbol lottery is executed.

As shown in FIG. 820, in the variable probability state effect mode determination process 26 (F3052), the final variation of the chance mode, which is a mode effect for making it difficult for the player to understand whether it is a time saving state or a variable probability state, is executed. When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223vq is 1 (F4301: Yes), the production mode of the time saving end suggesting production that the production result of the variable production is promoted to the super chance mode is determined (F4302) ) and F4311, the same processing as in the twenty-second control example described above is executed.

In the variable probability state effect mode determination process 26 (F3052), for the process of determining the effect mode during the variable probability state in the above-described 22nd control example, according to the remaining period of the variable probability state (the value of the variable probability counter 223vr), It is different in that different mode effects are executed.

In this 26th control example, when the variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set after the end of the jackpot game, then a special symbol lottery is executed 120 times, or a special The variable probability state is continued until a big win is won before the symbol lottery is executed 120 times. Specifically, when the variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the value of the variable probability counter 223vr is set to "120". Then, the value of the during probability variation counter 223vr is subtracted by 1 based on the fact that the special symbol variation is executed while the value of the probability variation counter 223vr is "1" or more. Thus, by reading the value of the variable probability counter 223vr, it is possible to determine the remaining period of the variable probability state (the number of times of residual probability variation).

Then, in the twenty-sixth control example, when the number of remaining probability variations falls below 20 times, a mode effect is executed in which the player is notified of the results of the special symbol lottery for a plurality of times using the effect result of one period effect. Configure. By configuring in this way, it becomes difficult to execute a variable effect indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, and it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play. In addition, since one period performance can be executed across the period in which the special symbol lottery is executed a plurality of times, it is difficult for the player to grasp the remaining number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed during the variable probability state. can do.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 820, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223vp is not "1" (F4301: No), then the value of the variable probability counter 223vr is "20" (F4303), and if it is determined to be "20" (F4303: Yes), determine the production mode of the first mode variation production (F4304), and then correspond to the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command The effect mode to be played is determined (F4311), and this process ends.

Also, in the process of F4303, if it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 223vr is not "20" (F4303: No), then it is determined whether the value of the variable probability counter 223vr is "14" ( F4305), if it is determined to be "14" (F4305: Yes), determine the effect mode of the second mode variation effect (F4306), execute the above-described process of F4311, and then end this process. .

On the other hand, in the process of F4305, if it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 223vr is not "14" (F4305: No), then it is determined whether the value of the variable probability counter 223vr is "7" ( F4307), if it is determined to be "7" (F4307: Yes), the effect mode of the third mode variation effect is determined (F4308), then the above-described F4311 processing is executed, and this processing ends. .

In the process of F4307, if it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 223vr is not "7" (F4307: No), then it is determined whether the value of the variable probability counter 223vr is "1" (F4309) , When it is determined to be "1" (F4309: Yes), the effect mode for indicating the end of probability variation is determined (F4310), and then the process of F4311 is executed to end this process. Further, in the process of F4309, when it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 223vr is not "1", that is, the value of the variable probability counter 223vr is "1" or more, and "1", "7" , "14" and "20" (F4309: No), since it is not the situation to determine a new mode change effect (mode effect), the effect mode of various mode change effects is determined. , the processing of F4311 is skipped, and this processing ends.

In this 26th control example, by executing the processing of F4303 to F4310 in FIG. 820, the number of times of remaining probability variation is 20 times to 15 times. A first mode performance is executed as a period performance, and a second mode performance is executed as a period performance using a special symbol variation period showing the results of seven special symbol lotteries with the number of times of remaining probability variation being 14 to 8 times, A third mode performance is executed as a period performance using a special symbol variation period showing the results of 7 special symbol lotteries with the number of remaining probability variations ranging from 7 times to 1 time.

In addition, in the twenty-sixth control example, it is possible to determine the effect mode (result of effect) of each mode effect based on the newly obtained information (pending and stored winning information) while the mode effect is already being executed. Configure. More specifically, the information stored in the winning information storage area 223va (reserved storage information), and preliminarily determines (reads ahead) the result of the special symbol lottery based on the stored reserved memory information. As a result of the preliminary determination, when it is determined that the reserved memory information corresponding to the winning of the jackpot is acquired, the performance result of the first mode performance is rewritten to the performance result indicating the winning of the jackpot, and the first mode performance is performed. , the special symbol variation for winning the jackpot is extended until it is stopped and displayed.

In this way, based on the information acquired after executing the first mode production (period production), by variably configuring the number of special symbol lotteries targeted for the first mode production (period production), the probability variable state It is possible to make it difficult for a player to grasp the remaining number of executable special symbol lotteries.

In the twenty-sixth control example, the period during which one period effect is executed is made variable based on the look-ahead result. Alternatively, the player may select an arbitrary period. In addition, the timing of executing the look-ahead (preliminary determination) is not the timing at which the last special symbol variation in the target period of the predetermined mode production is started, but the timing at which the previous special symbol variation is started. Alternatively, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the last special symbol variation was started (a specific timing before the effect result is notified to the player). Furthermore, when performing pre-determination, all of the acquired pending storage information may be pre-determined, or only a specific range (for example, two items with the oldest order stored in the winning information storage area 223va) It may be configured to perform determination.

In addition, as a result of the preliminary determination, when it is determined that the reservation memory information corresponding to the winning of the jackpot is acquired, a lottery is executed as to whether or not to extend the period performance, and based on the lottery result, the period performance is determined. It may be configured to determine whether or not to rewrite the effect result of or to determine whether or not to extend the period effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 821, the details of the normal state effect mode determination processing 26 (F3053) for determining the effect mode of the variable effect executed in the state where the normal state is set will be described. FIG. 821 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the normal state rendering mode determination processing 26 (F3053). This normal state effect mode determination process 26 (F3053) is different from the above-described normal state effect mode determination process 22 (see F3018 in FIG. 729) when the determined variable effect type is subjugation reach (see FIG. 805). addition of subjugation reach effect determination processing 26 (F3152) to be executed in 1, and to determine the effect mode of the chance-up effect for suggesting to the player that the expectation of winning the jackpot is relatively high. The difference is that the chance-up effect determination process 26 (F3153) is added. Other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the normal state effect mode determination process 26 (F3053) is executed, first, the same processes of F3101 to F3106 as the normal state effect mode determination process 22 (see F3018 in FIG. 729) are executed. Then, in the process of F3104, if it is determined that the variable effect type determined this time is not the movie execution reach (F3104: No), then it is determined whether the variable effect type determined this time is the subjugation reach. (F3151) If it is determined that it is subjugation reach (F3151: Yes), subjugation reach effect determination processing 26 is executed (F3152), and the process proceeds to F3153. Details of the subjugation ready-to-win effect determination process 26 (F3152) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of F3151, if it is determined that the variable effect type determined this time is not the subjugation reach (F3151: No), the effect mode corresponding to the determined variable effect type is determined (F3107), Thereafter, the chance-up effect determination process 26 is executed (F3153), a display variation pattern command indicating the effect mode determined by each process is set (F3109), and this process ends.

The detailed contents of the chance-up effect determination process 26 (F3153) will be described later with reference to FIG. 823, so the detailed description is omitted here. For the same effect mode set when the variable effect type is determined, a process for giving additional information for making the player predict the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot is executed, For example, if the degree of expectation for winning a jackpot can be notified by changing the color of one display element included in the presentation mode, a process for determining the type of color to be changed is performed. In addition, there is a process for executing a chance-up effect that raises the expectation of winning a jackpot by additionally displaying a new effect mode including additional information with respect to the effect mode set corresponding to the variable effect type. done.

By configuring in this way, even when a variable performance with almost the same performance mode in terms of appearance is executed, only a part of the plurality of display elements constituting the variable performance can be changed or the variable performance can be changed. By adding a new display element to the plurality of display elements that constitute the , it is possible to make the player predict the degree of expectation of winning. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not there is any change in the plurality of display elements constituting the variable performance being executed, so that the performance effect of the variable performance can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 822, the contents of the subjugation ready-to-win effect determination process 26 (F3152) will be described. FIG. 822 is a flow chart showing the details of the subjugation reach effect determination process 26 (F3152). In this subjugation reach effect determination process 26 (F3152), a process for determining the effect mode of the subjugation reach effect is executed.

When the subjugation reach effect determination process 26 (F3152) is executed, first, based on the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol and the acquired value of the first effect counter 223vf, the effect mode (attack character, attack content) and the effect result of subjugation reach effect (F4401). A variation pattern command is set (F4403), and this process ends.

Here, the details determined by various processes of the subjugation reach effect determination process 26 (F3152) will be specifically described. First, various contents determined by the processing of F4401 will be described. In the twenty-sixth control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 805(a), an effect in which various types of friendly characters 801a attack enemy characters 880a to 880c three times is executed as a subjugation reach effect.

As for the types of the allied characters 801a, there are an allied character 801a modeled after a hero who can easily inflict a large amount of damage on one enemy character, and an allied character 801b modeled after a rabbit who can easily inflict damage on multiple enemy characters. , can be selected. In this way, by configuring the easy-to-execute attack content to differ according to the type of the allied character that executes the attack, the content of the attack that has already been executed (remaining HP value of each enemy character) during the subjugation reach effect ), it is possible to vary the degree of expectation for the type of friendly character that executes the attack.

In other words, when the friendly character 801b executes the first and second attacks in the subjugation reach effect, each of the enemy characters 880a to 880c tends to be in a state where the remaining HP value is low. ) is easier to defeat all enemy characters 880a to 880c than the allied character 801a. can do. Also, when the friendly character 801a executes the first and second attacks, it is easier to execute the third attack while two of the enemy characters 880a to 880c have been defeated. Therefore, when the type of the friendly character that executes the third attack is the friendly character 801a, the enemy characters 880a to 880c are more effective as a result of the subjugation reach effect than when the friendly character 801b is used. It is possible to make it easier to produce a performance result of defeating all of them.

In addition, in this subjugation reach effect, different attacks can be executed depending on the type of the friendly character that executes the attack. As the number of enemy characters (number of attacks), "1" is more likely to be selected than other numbers, and as the amount of damage to be inflicted on the attack target, "large damage" is different from other damage amounts (medium damage, small damage etc.). Therefore, when the ally character 801a is selected as the type of ally character that executes an attack, the player pays attention to the amount of damage rather than the number of attacks. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 805(b), when the ally character 801a is selected, "attack count" and "damage amount" are displayed as the display order of the suggestive modes for sequentially indicating the details of the current attack. Order is determined.

On the other hand, when the ally character 801b is selected, multiple numbers are more likely to be selected than a single number as the number of enemy characters to be attacked (the number of attacks). "Medium damage" is configured to be more likely to be selected than other damage amounts (large damage, small damage). Therefore, when the ally character 801b is selected as the type of ally character that executes an attack, the player pays attention to the number of attacks rather than the amount of damage. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 806(b), when the ally character 801b is selected, "damage amount" and "number of attacks" are displayed as the display order of the suggestive modes for sequentially indicating the details of the current attack. Order is determined.

As described above, in the subjugation reach effect executed in the twenty-sixth control example, it is possible to determine the type of allied character that is likely to select a different attack content as the type of allied character that executes the attack. The display order of the suggestion mode for indicating the content of the attack is configured to be different according to the type of the ally character. Specifically, it is possible to display each of the plurality of elements (the number of attacks, the amount of damage) that determine the content of the attack as a suggestive mode, and the display order of the plurality of suggested modes to be displayed is the determined ally character. It is configured so that the display order is determined such that the element that is good at the type is displayed after the other elements.

With this configuration, even when the type of any friendly character is determined, it is possible to delay the timing at which the suggestive mode that the player pays attention to is displayed. During, you can enjoy the subjugation reach production.

In the twenty-sixth control example, the display order of the suggestive modes is determined according to the type of the determined friendly character. Among the elements (the number of attacks, the amount of damage), the display order of the suggestive mode corresponding to the element for which the content advantageous to the player is determined is determined after the other elements, or the content of the attack is determined. Among the plurality of elements (the number of attacks, the amount of damage) to be displayed, the display order of the suggested mode corresponding to the element for which the content advantageous to the player is determined is determined before the other elements. It may be configured to By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting the content of the next displayed suggestion mode based on the content of the previously displayed suggestion mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 823, the processing contents of the chance-up effect determination processing 26 (F3153) will be described. FIG. 823 is a flow chart showing the details of the chance-up effect determination process 26 (F3153). In this chance up effect determination process 26 (F3153), a process of determining whether or not to execute the chance advance notice effect and a process of determining the effect mode in the case of execution are executed.

When the chance-up effect determination process 26 (F3153) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the effect execution counter 223aah is "50" (F4501). Yes), since the execution condition for forcibly executing the chance notice effect is established, the data table of the forced patterns included in the chance mode selection table 222aag is referred to, and the effect mode of the chance notice effect is determined. (F4502), and the value of the effect execution counter 223aah is cleared to "0" (F4503). After that, a display variation pattern command indicating the determined effect mode is set (F4510), and this process ends.

In addition, in the process of F4501, when it is determined that the value of the effect execution counter 223aah is not "50" (F4501: No), next, the chance notice lottery table 222aaf is referred to execute the chance notice lottery (F4504 ), it is determined whether or not the player has won the chance advance notice lottery executed in the process of F4504 (F4505). If it is determined in the processing of F4505 that the chance advance notice lottery is not won (F4505: No), the chance advance notice effect is not executed in the executed variable effect, so the value of the effect execution counter 223aah is updated (added) by 1. (F4506), the processing of F4510 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of F4505, if it is determined that the chance notice lottery is won (F4505: Yes), the normal pattern data table included in the chance mode selection table 222aag is referred to, and the chance notice effect effect mode is determined. (F4507), stores information indicating the determined presentation mode in the chance mode information storage area 223aag (F4508), and updates the value of the presentation execution counter 223aah in correspondence with the determined presentation mode of the chance notice presentation (F4509). ), the processing of F4510 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

Here, details of the processing executed in F4509 will be described. In the twenty-sixth control example, every time the variable effect is executed, a chance advance notice lottery for determining whether or not to execute the chance notice effect is executed. , The value of the production execution counter 223aah is updated based on the production mode of the continuously executed variable production, and the forced execution that is established when the value of the updated production execution counter 223aah reaches a predetermined value ("50") It is configured to be able to execute the chance announcement effect when any one of the conditions is satisfied.

The value of the effect execution counter 223aah is normally incremented by "1" each time the effect mode of the variable effect is determined. In other words, the forced execution condition is established based on the number of executions of the variable performance, and the chance notice performance is executed. However, if the value of the production execution counter 223aah that satisfies the forced execution condition is defined as "50" just by adding "1" to the value of the production execution counter 223aah each time the variable production is executed. The chance notice performance is forcibly executed every time the variable performance is executed 50 times, and the player is notified that the chance notice performance executed this time is forcibly executed. There was a problem that it was easily grasped.

On the other hand, in the twenty-sixth control example, the content of updating the value of the effect execution counter 223aah is configured to be different based on the contents set as the effect mode of the variable effect. Specifically, when a performance mode (LV1, LV2) with a low degree of expectation for a big win is set as a performance mode of the chance notice performance, the value of the performance execution counter 223aah is added by "2", When a performance mode (LV4) with a high degree of expectation for a big hit is set as the performance mode of the chance advance notice performance, the value of the performance execution counter 223aah is decremented by "30".

In this way, by configuring the value of the effect execution counter 223aah to increase or decrease irregularly according to the effect mode of the variable effect to be executed, the value of the effect execution counter 223aah reaches "50". It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the required number of executions of the variable performance. Therefore, when the chance notice effect is executed, the execution opportunity is based on winning the chance notice lottery, that is, it is established based on the result of the special symbol lottery, or the value of the effect execution counter 223aah. reaches a predetermined value, i.e., by making it difficult for the player to understand whether the event is established based on the execution history of the variable performance, the degree of expectation for the big win as the forcibly executed chance notice performance. Even when a performance mode with a high value is set, the performance effect can be enhanced by making the player think that it is the chance foretelling performance executed after winning the chance foretelling lottery.

In the twenty-sixth control example, when the value of the effect execution counter 223aah reaches "50", the forced execution condition is satisfied and the chance notice effect is executed. , the value of the effect execution counter 223aah that satisfies the forced execution condition may be configured to be variable. It may be configured to be determined from a plurality of values (“10”, “30”, “50”). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the timing at which the forced execution condition is satisfied.

Also, when the value of the performance execution counter 223aah reaches a predetermined value (for example, a multiple of 10), a lottery is executed to determine whether or not the forced execution condition is satisfied, and forced execution is performed when the lottery is won. It may be configured to satisfy the conditions. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the timing at which the forced execution condition is satisfied.

In addition, in the twenty-sixth control example, the content for updating the value of the effect execution counter 223aah is changed according to the number of executions of the variable effect and the effect mode of the executed chance notice effect. , the update contents of the production execution counter 223aah may be configured to be different based on other factors, for example, the update contents of the production execution counter 223aah according to the production mode of the variable production and the special symbol fluctuation period. can be different. Furthermore, the timing for establishing the next forced execution condition may be determined based on the elapsed time from the establishment of the forced execution condition instead of the number of executions in the variable performance.

In the twenty-sixth control example, the value of the effect execution counter 223aah is cleared to 0 when the forced execution condition is established. A subtraction process for subtracting a predetermined number from the value of the effect execution counter 223aah may be configured to be executable, and the value of the effect execution counter 223aah to be subtracted in the subtraction process may be determined from a plurality of values. Even when such a configuration is used, it is possible to easily vary the interval at which the forced execution condition is satisfied.

Next, referring to FIG. 824, the contents of the effect button operation process 26 (F3379) will be described. FIG. 824 is a flow chart showing the contents of the effect button operation process 26 (F3379). In this production button operation process 26 (F3379), various processes are executed based on the operation of the production button 22 by the player. However, the difference is that the content of processing executed when the effect button 22 is operated during the operation valid period set during the battle effect is added. Other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the effect button operation process 26 (F3379) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the effect button 22 is operated (F3451). In the process of F3451, it is determined whether or not the effect button 22 is being pressed. In the processing of F3451, if it is determined that the effect button 22 is not operated (not pressed) (F3451: No), then it is checked whether the during non-decrease period flag 223aaa is set to ON. If it is determined to be ON (F3452: Yes), the non-decrease period flag 223aaa is set to OFF, and the value of the non-decrease period counter 223aab is cleared to "0" ( F3453), sets the non-decrease period set flag 223aac to ON (F3454), then executes the same F3405 processing as the production button operation processing 22 described above (see F3319 in FIG. 733), and terminates this processing. .

Here, details of the processing from F3452 to F3454 will be described. In the twenty-sixth control example, when the friendly character 801a attacks the enemy character 880a in the battle effect ready-to-win mode, an operation effect is executed in which the player operates the effect button 22 (FIG. 801(b)). )reference). During this operation presentation, an operation valid period is set for validly determining that the player has operated the presentation button 22, and the player operates the presentation button 22 in the state in which the operation valid period is set. As a result, a gauge decrease effect for decreasing the HP value of the enemy character 880a is executed.

In the twenty-sixth control example, the gauge decrease that decreases the HP value of the enemy character 880a is performed even if the player repeatedly presses the production button 22 or long-presses the production button 22 within the operation valid period during the battle production reach. The performance is configured to be executable, and the performance mode of the gauge decrease performance is configured to be varied based on the operation contents of the performance button 22 executed during the operation effective period. Specifically, when a long-pressing operation is performed on the effect button 22 during the operation valid period, a gauge decrease effect scenario is performed in which the HP value of the enemy character 880a is decreased corresponding to the elapsed time of the long-pressing operation. A lottery is executed to determine whether or not to set a non-decrease period during which HP value reduction is interrupted for a predetermined period each time the HP value decreases. Then, when the non-decrease period is set, the during non-decrease period flag 223aaa is set to ON, and when the predetermined period has passed and the cancellation lottery for canceling the non-decrease period is won, a long press operation is performed. is terminated, the non-decreasing period is terminated.

In the process of F3452, since it is determined whether or not the non-decrease period flag 223aaa is set to ON while the effect button 22 is not operated (F3451: No), the non-decrease period is set. In this state, it is determined whether the player has finished the long-pressing operation (released the effect button 22). Therefore, in the process of F3452, if it is determined that the non-decrease period flag 223aaa is set to ON, that is, if the player releases the effect button 22 while the non-decrease period is set, , a process (F3453) for canceling the non-decrease period is executed. By configuring in this way, when the non-decreasing period is set based on the long-pressing operation of the effect button 22, the player is made to select whether or not to continue the long-pressing operation. can be provided.

In addition, in the twenty-sixth control example, when the non-decrease period is canceled, the non-decrease period setting flag 223aac is set to ON, whereby the non-decrease period is set multiple times during one operation valid period. It is configured so that there is no such thing as By configuring in this way, the non-decrease period is set a plurality of times during the operation valid period set during the battle production reach, and the player who has performed the long press operation on the production button 22, It is possible to make it difficult to cause a situation in which the battle effect ready-to-reach ends without almost decreasing the HP value of the enemy character 880a.

In the twenty-sixth control example, by setting a limit on the number of non-decrease periods that can be set within one operation valid period, the non-decrease period within one operation valid period is excessively occupied. However, another technique may be used to achieve the same effect. For example, a measuring means capable of measuring the length of the period in which the non-decreasing period is set is provided. , within the effective period of operation 1, the length of the period measured by the measuring means (the length of the already set non-decrease period) in order to prevent the setting of the non-decrease period longer than a predetermined period. Whether or not to set the non-decrease period may be determined based on the above.

In addition, in the twenty-sixth control example, the first operation (long press operation) in which a non-decrease period can be set during the operation valid period and the second operation (continuous hit operation) in which a non-decrease period is not set can be executed. It is configured so that the HP value of the enemy character 880 can be reduced regardless of which operation is performed. It may be configured such that the probability of setting the non-decrease period is different between when two operations are performed.

Furthermore, when the non-decrease period can be set based on the continuous hitting operation, for example, the probability of setting the non-decrease period is changed based on the number of times the effect button 22 is pressed during the operation valid period or the pressing interval. It should be configured as follows. By configuring in this way, in the case of performing repeated hit operations during the operation effective period, a situation in which the non-decrease period is likely to be set and a situation in which it is difficult to be set are created according to the interval and number of times of pressing the effect button 22. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the operation contents of the repeated hitting operation.

Also, in this case, it is preferable to provide notification means capable of informing the player of a situation in which the non-decrease period is likely to be set or a situation in which it is difficult to be set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the operation effect desired by the player (the effect during the effective period of the operation of the battle reach).

Returning to FIG. 824, the description continues. In the processing of F3451, if it is determined that the effect button 22 has not been operated (F3421: No), then it is determined whether the valid period of the SW for movie effect is valid (F3455), and the valid period of the SW for movie effect is determined. If it is determined that the effect button 22 has been operated during (F3455: Yes), the movie playback mode is determined (F3403), and the during movie flag is set to ON (see F3404 in FIG. 824).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F3455 that the SW for movie effect is not valid (F3455: No), then it is determined whether the SW for battle effect is valid (F3456). If it is determined to be within the effective period (F3456: Yes), then it is determined whether the long-pressing flag 223aae is set to ON (F3458), and the long-pressing flag 223aae is set to ON. If so (F3457: Yes), the long press operation is being continued, so the process of F3405 is executed as it is, and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of F3457, if it is determined that the long-pressing flag 223aae is not set to ON (F3457: No), the button operation mode is changed based on the information indicating the details of the operation performed on the effect button 22. (F3458), then it is determined whether the button operation mode determined in the process of F3458 is a long press operation (F3459), and if it is determined to be a long press operation (F3459: Yes), Long press effect setting process 26 for setting the effect mode during long press operation is executed (F3463), the process of F3405 described above is executed, and this process ends.

In addition, in the process of F3459, if it is determined that the button operation mode is not a long press operation, that is, if it is determined that it is a continuous hit operation (F3459: No), the HP value to be reduced by this button press is A decrease lottery for determination is executed (F3460), the remaining HP value is calculated based on the result of the decrease lottery executed in the process of F3460, and the calculated value is stored in the remaining HP storage area 223aad (F3461). , determines the effect mode corresponding to the lottery result of the decreasing lottery (F3462), executes the process of F3405, and terminates this process.

Here, the flow of decreasing the HP value of the enemy character 880a in the case of executing the continuous hit operation during the SW effective period (operation effective period) set during the battle production reach will be described in detail along the contents of the executed processing. give an explanation. When it is determined that the continuous hit operation is performed during the SW effective period (operation effective period) set during the battle effect reach, that is, the period in which the effect button 22 is continuously pressed is determined as the long press operation. If it is determined to be shorter than the determined period (F3459: No), a decrease lottery is executed to decrease the HP value of the enemy character 880a.

In this decrease lottery, a lottery is executed to determine any value from "0" to "5" as the HP value to be decreased (reduced HP value), based on a decrease value lottery table (not shown). to determine the reduced HP value. In the decrease value lottery table, different decrease HP values are defined corresponding to the obtained value of the first effect counter 223vf, the length of the remaining period of the SW valid period, and the remaining HP value.

Specifically, various HP reduction values are defined so that a large HP reduction value is more likely to be set when the remaining HP value is large than when the remaining HP value is small. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to predict the remaining HP value by grasping the tendency of the HP value of the enemy character 880a to decrease based on repeated hitting operations. As described above, in the twenty-sixth control example, the final HP value of the enemy character 880a in the battle production reach is determined based on the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery, and the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery. Because it is configured so that a smaller value is determined as the final HP value than when the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss when the is won, if the jackpot is won, the remaining The HP value (difference value between the current HP value and the final HP value) tends to increase.

In other words, by grasping the tendency of the HP value of the enemy character 880a to decrease based on the continuous hitting operation and predicting the remaining HP value to the player, it is possible to determine whether or not the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery will be a jackpot. Prediction becomes possible. Therefore, by making the player predict the remaining HP value willingly, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the content of the battle production ready-to-play, thereby enhancing the production effect.

Furthermore, in the decrease value lottery table, a larger value is determined as the decrease HP value when the remaining HP value is the same when the remaining period of the SW valid period in the battle production reach is shorter than when the remaining period is longer. It is stipulated to make it easier for By configuring in this way, when the player executes the continuous hitting operation within the SW effective period, the SW effective period elapses without the HP value of the enemy character 880a decreasing to the final HP value due to the continuous hitting operation. It is possible to prevent the situation from occurring.

In addition, the decrease value lottery table defines that the longer the remaining period of the SW valid period in the battle production ready-to-win, the easier it is to determine a smaller value as the decreased HP value than when the remaining period is short. . By configuring in this way, the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a reaches the final HP value in a state where the remaining period of the SW valid period remains sufficiently (that is, the remaining HP value is decreased further). (The effect of prompting the player to repeat the operation is executed for a long time by reaching a state in which it is impossible to do so at a relatively early stage), and the player's motivation to operate the effect button 22 is remarkably reduced. can be suppressed.

In addition, in the twenty-sixth control example, the reduced HP value to be determined at the time of repeated hit operation in the battle effect reach is configured to be determined by referring to the reduced value lottery table, but control processing other than this configuration is executed. may be configured to be able to determine the reduced HP value. For example, at least one predetermined index HP value (eg, 50) included between the HP value (eg, 100) of the enemy character 880a and the final HP value (eg, 0) is determined, and the remaining HP value is A regulation period may be set so that the HP is limited (regulated) so as not to become smaller than the index HP value.

More specifically, when 3 seconds is set as the SW valid period, by setting the first 2 seconds as the restriction period, the continuous hitting operation is performed earnestly after the SW valid period is set. However, the remaining HP value may not become smaller than the index HP value until two seconds have passed since the SW valid period was set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the remaining HP value from reaching the final HP value with a sufficient remaining period of the SW valid period left. Further, when the remaining HP value reaches the index HP value before the regulation period elapses, the remaining HP value does not decrease until the regulation period elapses, and after the regulation period elapses, the remaining HP value is reduced from the index HP value toward the final HP value. Since it is possible to create a situation in which the remaining HP value can decrease, even if the situation where the remaining HP value does not decrease based on the repeated hitting operation continues for a predetermined period, the player can continue to perform the repeated hitting operation. can be made easier to implement.

In this case, for example, if the player interrupts the continuous hitting operation in a state where the remaining HP value does not decrease until the index HP value is reached and the regulation period elapses, the regulation After the period has passed or just before the regulation period has passed, it is preferable to perform an effect for prompting the player to repeat the operation. In other words, the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a no longer decreases (in the situation before the remaining HP value reaches the index HP value, it becomes difficult for the remaining HP value to decrease based on repeated hitting operations). Therefore, it is preferable to notify the player that the remaining HP value has shifted to a state in which the remaining HP value can be relatively easily decreased based on the continuous hitting operation.

By configuring in this way, not only the player who continues to perform the continuous hit operation even after the remaining HP value reaches the index HP value before the regulation period elapses, but also the player who To make it easy for a player who has interrupted a repeated hitting operation due to the remaining HP value reaching an index HP value to execute a performance of decreasing the remaining HP value toward the final HP value after the lapse of a regulation period. can be done.

In the above example, a value of 1 is determined as the index HP value. In addition, in the case where two or more values can be determined as the index HP value, it is preferable to configure so that different regulation periods can be set for each value of the determined index HP value. By constructing in this manner, the remaining HP value is decreased step by step using the remaining range of the SW valid period, and the final HP value is obtained for the player who willingly executes the continuous hitting operation during the SW valid period. can be easily reached.

Further, even in the case where the index HP value is determined and the regulation period can be set in correspondence with the determined index HP value, the operation speed of the player's continuous hitting operation does not exceed the regulation period during the SW effective period. If the operation speed (relatively slow operation speed) is such that the index HP value cannot be reached (difficult to reach) during the regulation period, the index HP value will not be reached during the regulation period, and the entire SW valid period will be The HP value of the enemy character 880a continuously decreases until the remaining HP value reaches the final HP value. Therefore, depending on the operation speed of the player's continuous hit operation, whether the operation speed is such that the index HP value can be reached within the regulation period (for example, a relatively high operation speed with an operation interval of 0.5 seconds or less), Since the transition of the HP value when the HP value of the enemy character 880a decreases can be varied depending on whether the operating speed is unattainable (difficult to reach), the desired HP value can be set according to the operating speed. It is possible to realize a game feature in which the player himself/herself selects the mode of transition. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, based on the determined value of the index HP value and the length of the set regulation period, there is privilege information that is advantageous to the player, such as the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery and the currently set game state. can be configured to be notified. With this configuration, it is possible to motivate the player to execute repeated hitting operations so that the remaining HP value quickly decreases to the index HP value. Also, in this case, it is preferable that the same value as the final HP value that can be determined when the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is a loss can be determined as the value of the index HP value. By configuring in this way, when a state occurs in which the remaining HP value does not (is difficult to decrease) even though the continuous hit operation is being performed, the current HP value is the index HP value or the final HP value. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the presence.

Further, it may be configured such that a longer period is set as the regulation period more easily when the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is a jackpot winning than when the winning is a miss. By constructing in this manner, the longer the period from when the remaining HP value reaches the index HP value to when the regulation period elapses, the higher the possibility that the corresponding result of the special symbol lottery results in winning the jackpot. be able to. Therefore, even a player whose remaining HP value reaches the final HP value and cannot reduce the remaining HP value any more is made to think that a long regulation period is set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the effect result of the battle effect reach at an early stage.

On the other hand, when the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is a jackpot winning, it may be easier to set a shorter period as the regulating period than in the case of a losing winning. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the proportion of the regulation period in the entire SW effective period of the battle production reach, so that the remaining HP value can be easily reduced by repeated hitting operations.

In addition, in the twenty-sixth control example, when a continuous hit operation is performed during the battle production reach, a decrease lottery for decreasing the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a is executed at each pressing timing. However, without being limited to this, a pressing number measuring means for counting the number of times the effect button 22 is pressed by repeated hitting operations is provided, and the number of pressing times measured by the pressing number measuring means corresponds to a specific number (for example, the number of times corresponding to a multiple of 5). ), the decreasing lottery may be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the first pressing operation that can decrease the remaining HP value and the second pressing operation that makes it difficult to decrease the remaining HP value in the continuous hitting operation. , the player who presses the effect button 22 more often during the continuous hitting operation can make it easier for the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a to reach the final HP value.

Further, the process of decreasing the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a in the case of performing the continuous hit operation during the battle production reach may be determined based on a predetermined press scenario. In this case, at the timing when the execution of the battle effect ready-to-win is determined, one type of push scenario is determined from among the plurality of types of push scenarios, and the number of pushes is determined according to the content stipulated in the decided push scenario. The reduced HP value may be determined by referring to the number of presses counted by the measuring means. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the remaining HP value easily reach the final HP value using the entire SW valid period. In addition, as multiple types of press scenarios, for example, during a period when the number of presses of the effect button 22 is small (the beginning of the SW valid period), the reduced HP value is greater than during a period when the number of presses is large (the end of the SW valid period). In the first press scenario where It is preferable that one press scenario can be determined from among a plurality of press scenarios including at least the defined second press scenario.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily execute the battle effect ready-to-win battle, in which the process of decreasing the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a is clearly different depending on the type of the determined press-down scenario. It is possible to suppress early boredom.

Further, in the above-described example, the number of times the effect button 22 is pressed (the number of repeated hits) is used as a depression scenario for determining the process of decreasing the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a when the effect button 22 is repeatedly hit during the battle effect reach. In addition to or instead of this, the SW valid period of the battle effect reach is provided. A press scenario (third press scenario) may be provided in which a decreased HP value is defined in association with the remaining period of .

Then, in the third press scenario, a decrease HP value is defined in units of 0.05 seconds for the remaining period of the SW effective period, and when it is determined that the performance button 22 has been pressed (depression determination). It is preferable to determine the reduced HP value corresponding to the remaining period of the SW valid period in . By configuring in this way, when it is determined that the production button 22 is pressed in each period in which the reduced HP value is defined, the reduced HP value can be reduced more, so that the A player who performs repeated hitting operations (a player who presses the effect button 22 at short intervals) can make it easier to decrease the remaining HP value.

Furthermore, in this case, it is preferable to define the third pressing scenario so that the unit of the remaining period for which each decreased HP value is defined can be shorter than the interval at which the depression of the effect button 22 can be determined. In other words, even if the performance button 22 is repeatedly hit at the fastest speed during the SW valid period, it is preferable that all the reduced HP values specified in the third depression scenario are not determined. By constructing in this way, even for a player who willingly presses the performance button 22 repeatedly during the battle performance reach, a different reduced HP value is determined according to the pressing timing of the performance button 22 by the continuous hitting operation. Therefore, it is possible to vary the effect mode of the battle effect reach (decrease process of the remaining HP value). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect mode of the battle effect ready-to-win from becoming monotonous and the player's motivation to operate the effect button 22 to decrease.

Next, in the processing of F3462 in FIG. 824, in addition to the effect mode of varying (decreasing) the remaining HP value 890a of the HP gauge 890 shown in FIG. and a large damage notification presentation mode for informing the player that the reduced HP value determined by one reduction lottery is a value larger than usual (for example, "5"). Or, the remaining HP value becomes a specific value (for example, "33", "77", etc.), and the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is a jackpot winning. be.

Specifically, as the damage presentation modes, there is a first damage presentation mode for indicating that the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a has become 1/2 or less of the MAX value, and the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a is MAX. A second damage effect mode for indicating that the value has become 1/4 or less can be set. As the display mode of the enemy character 880a, the display mode of "broken horn" is displayed. Also, although not shown, when the second damage effect mode is set, the display mode of "whole body is injured" is displayed as the display mode of the enemy character 880a.

With this configuration, it is possible for the player to predict the remaining HP value not only by the variableness of the HP gauge 890 but also by the display mode of the enemy character 880a. Also, in this case, the timing at which the display mode of the HP gauge 890 changes and the timing at which the display mode of the enemy character 880a changes due to one attack in the battle production reach may be configured to be different. , the display mode of the enemy character 880a may be changed before the display mode of the HP gauge 890 is changed.

In other words, rather than the display mode of the HP gauge 890 for showing the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, it is easier for the player to grasp the variable contents of other display modes as soon as possible. It is preferable to configure so that the player can grasp that the value has reached a specific value. By configuring in this way, it is possible to grasp the relationship between the display mode of the enemy character 880a and the remaining HP value rather than the player who grasps the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a by checking the display mode of the HP gauge 890. However, a player who can grasp the remaining HP value based on the change in the display mode of the enemy character 880a can quickly grasp the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a after being attacked. In order to understand the relationship between the display mode of the enemy character 880a and the remaining HP value, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the contents of the battle effect reach.

In addition, as a large damage notification effect mode, when "5" is determined as the decrease HP value for decreasing the remaining HP value by the decrease lottery, a large value is determined as the decrease HP value on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. The text "Critical Hit" is displayed to indicate that it has been hit. By displaying the large damage notification effect mode in this way, it is possible to notify the player that the enemy character 880a has been dealt more damage than normal by the current attack. Therefore, even for a player who is playing the pachinko machine 10 for the first time, that is, a player who has a small number of experience of the battle production reach and relatively difficult to determine the HP value of the enemy character 880a to be decreased by one attack, It is possible to notify in an easy-to-understand manner that this attack is special.

Next, the jackpot notification effect mode will be described. In the twenty-sixth control example, when the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is a big win, the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a is a specific value (for example, "33", "77 It is configured to be easy to become a grid such as "". Then, when the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a reaches a specific value, at least part of the case where the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is a big win, the player is informed that the big win is won at that time. It is configured to be able to display on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 a jackpot notification effect mode for notification.

Specifically, when the execution condition for executing the jackpot notification effect mode is established, the display mode of the friend character 801a (see FIG. 801(a)) is changed to a special mode (for example, rainbow color ) is displayed, and an attack presentation in which the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a becomes "0" is executed by the ally character 801a in the special mode. In other words, when the condition for executing the big win notification effect mode is established, it is notified that the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a becomes "0" before the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a becomes "0". configured as possible.

By configuring in this way, in the battle production reach, in addition to the game aiming to reduce the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a to "0", a specific value (for example, "33", "77", etc.) Since it is possible to make the player play a game aiming at becoming, the production effect can be enhanced. In addition, since it is possible to grasp that the big win has been won before the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a becomes "0", it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect.

It should be noted that the execution conditions for the big win notification effect mode are the attacks of the friendly character 801a executed during the period from when the execution conditions for the big win notification effect mode are satisfied until the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a is set to "0". The attack based on the decreasing lottery may be continued to be executed in the same manner as in the case of failure. In this case, since the player can continue the continuous hitting operation while knowing that the final HP value of the enemy character 880a is "0", the effect button 22 can be operated without anxiety.

Further, when the conditions for execution of the big hit notification performance mode are established, the SW effective period may be discarded and a special attack may be executed regardless of the operation of the performance button 22.例文帳に追加By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a series of effects as a special effect from when the condition for executing the big win notification effect mode is established until the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a is set to "0". Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand presentation.

As described above, in the twenty-sixth control example, based on the operation content of the effect button 22 during the operation effective period during the battle effect, whether the repeated hitting operation (pressing operation) was executed or the long pressing operation was performed. It is configured such that a process for determining whether or not it is being executed is executed, and different processes for varying the effect mode of the battle effect are executed based on the result of the determination. Here, when it is determined that a repeated hit operation is being performed, a decrease lottery is executed to determine the decrease value of the HP value each time it is determined that the button is pressed.

Then, the decrease value corresponding to the lottery result of the decrease lottery is subtracted from the remaining HP value, the subtraction result is stored as the remaining HP value in the remaining HP storage area 223aad, and the HP value of the enemy character 880a is subtracted. , and an effect mode for varying the display mode of the HP gauge 890 are set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 825, the processing contents of the long press effect setting process 26 (F3463) executed in the effect button operation process 26 (see F3379 in FIG. 824) will be described. FIG. 825 is a flow chart showing the contents of the effect setting process 26 (F3463) for long press. In this long-press effect setting process 26 (F3463), a process for determining an effect scenario for decreasing the HP value based on the long-press operation and various processes for measuring the long-press operation period are executed. be.

In the twenty-sixth control example, the HP value of the enemy character 880a is reduced using different controls according to the method of operating the effect button 22 during the SW valid period of the battle effect reach. Then, as an operation method for the production button 22, it is configured to be capable of effectively distinguishing between a continuous hitting operation and a long pressing operation.

Specifically, when the repeated hit operation is executed, as described above, the reduced HP value is determined based on the lottery result of the decrease lottery executed when the effect button 22 is pressed as the repeated hit operation. An effect of decreasing the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a in correspondence with the decreased HP value is executed. On the other hand, when the long-pressing operation is performed, if it is determined that the long-pressing operation is performed during the SW effective period of the battle effect reach, the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a at the time of the long-pressing operation is decreased. A scenario (production scenario) in which a process is defined is determined, and while the long-pressing operation is continued, the content stipulated in the determined production scenario is referred to, and the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a is reduced. is executed.

That is, by making the player select which operation method to operate the production button 22 during the SW valid period of the battle production ready-to-win, it is possible to execute the battle production ready-to-win in different production modes. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to execute the battle production ready-to-win in different production modes, so that the production effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, in the twenty-sixth control example, as the effect mode of the battle effect ready-to-win, the effect scenario that determines the effect mode to be executed at the time of the long-pressing operation is executed not at the timing of executing the battle effect ready-to-reach, but the long-pressing operation. It is configured so that it can be determined at the timing. In other words, when the continuous hit operation is performed during the battle production reach, the battle production reach progresses without determining the production scenario at the time of the long press operation.

By configuring in this way, since it is not necessary to execute the process of predetermining the production data (the production scenario at the time of the long-pressing operation) that is not used in the actual production, the process for executing the battle production reach is eliminated. load can be reduced.

When the long-press effect setting process 26 (F3463) is executed, first, the long-press effect scenario table 222aaa is referred to determine a long-press effect scenario (F4601). Store in the storage area 223aai (F4602).

Then, the long-pressing flag 223aae is set to ON (F4603), the value of the long-pressing counter 223aaf is set to "1" (F4604), and this processing ends.

As described above, in the effect button operation process 26 (see F3379 in FIG. 824), the long press operation is executed during the operation effective period (battle effect SW effective period) set during battle effect reach. (F3459: Yes), in the long-press effect setting process 26 (F3463), a long-press operation effect scenario (a scenario for decreasing the HP value of the enemy character 880a) is determined. Therefore, if the player performs a continuous hit operation during the operation valid period during the battle production reach, the production scenario for the long press operation (scenario to decrease the HP value of the enemy character 880a) is set. never be done.

By being configured in this way, the pachinko machine is configured to be able to discriminate between a continuous hitting operation and a long pressing operation in one operation effective period, and to execute different modes of presentation according to the determined operation contents. In 10, regardless of the operation content actually executed by the player, the effect data to be referred to when the player performs a repeated hit operation and the effect data to be referred to when the player performs a long press operation, Processing load can be reduced by omitting processing for determining performance data (performance data for long-pressing operation) that may become unnecessary, compared to the case of determining the operation effective period at the set timing.

Note that in the twenty-sixth control example, the effect scenario referred to when the long-pressing operation is performed is not determined when the operation effective period is set, but the long-pressing operation is performed during the operation effective period. By structuring so as to be determined when the operation is actually executed, the trouble of determining an unnecessary production scenario is omitted. Triggered by the execution of processing to determine the effect scenario to be referred to during the long-press operation, the effect scenario to be referred to when the repeated hit operation is actually executed during the operation valid period is executed. It may be configured to be determinable. In addition, when each operation is actually executed, the production scenario to be used for each executed operation is determined without determining any production scenario when the operation effective period is set. may be configured.

In addition, in the twenty-sixth control example, processing is performed to determine the production scenario to be referred to when the long-pressing operation is performed, and until the operation effective period elapses, Even if the long press operation is interrupted, the same production scenario is referred to. When the long-press operation is interrupted, updating of the counter value for updating the effect scenario is also interrupted, and when the long-press operation is performed again, the interrupted update of the counter value is resumed. It is configured as follows.

By configuring in this way, even if the operation means (the production button 22) is erroneously operated and the hand is once released, the operation production can be continued by executing the long-pressing operation again. becomes.

Furthermore, in the twenty-sixth control example, while the long-pressing operation is performed during the SW effective period of the battle effect reach, and the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a is being decreased by referring to the determined effect scenario, When the long-pressing operation is interrupted and switched to the continuous-hitting operation, the reduced HP value can be determined by a decrease lottery based on the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a that was decreased during the long-pressing operation. In addition, if a continuous hit operation is performed during the SW valid period of the battle effect reach, and after the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a is decreased, a long press operation is performed, the effect determined at the time of the long press operation is performed. The reduced HP value can be determined based on the content of the scenario and the remaining HP value.

That is, even if the player switches the operation method of the effect button 22 during the SW valid period, the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a can be continuously decreased. By configuring in this way, the player is not only allowed to select the operation method of the effect button 22 to be executed during the SW effective period, but also can perform an operation to switch the operation method of the effect button 22 during the SW effective period. Since the effect mode during the battle effect ready-to-win mode can be greatly changed by setting the button 22, the player can be motivated to operate the effect button 22.例文帳に追加

In addition, in the twenty-sixth control example, as described above, the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a can be continuously decreased even when the selection button 22 is operated in a different manner during the SW valid period. However, without being limited to this, if the operation method of the selection button 22 is changed during the SW valid period, the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a is restored to the MAX value. Alternatively, the effect of decreasing the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a may be executed from the beginning. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to operate the effect button 22 in the same operation method in order to set the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a to "0". In addition, it is possible to cause a player who is dissatisfied with the effect mode of the battle effect ready-to-win that is being executed to redo the battle effect ready-to-win with another effect mode. In this case, the remaining period of the SW valid period may also be returned to the initial value, or may be configured to be longer than the remaining period at the time of switching the operation method by a predetermined period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to enjoy the battle production reach based on the operation method after switching.

As shown in FIG. 827, in the twenty-sixth control example, one effect scenario can be determined from a plurality of effect scenarios as the effect scenario to be referred to during the long-press operation, and the long-press counter is updated periodically. 223aaf, the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a is reduced by referring to the production scenario determined based on the value of 223aaf. You can make it different.

Specifically, the frequency of updating the value of the long-press counter 223aaf includes a first frequency that is normal, a second frequency that the value is updated faster than usual, and a third frequency that the value is updated later than usual. 825. In this case, the value of the long-press counter 223aaf may be updated based on the determined frequency. After finishing the processing of F4604, the processing for determining the update frequency of the long-press counter 223aaf is executed, the determined update frequency is temporarily stored in the storage means, and the long-press processing (see FIG. 827) is performed. (see F3551 of )) may be configured to differ based on the update frequency stored in the storage means. For example, when the first frequency is stored as the update frequency, the When "2" is stored as the value of the press counter 223aaf and the second frequency is stored as the update frequency, "3" is stored as the value of the long press counter 223aaf and the third frequency is stored as the update frequency. In this case, the process of adding "1" to the value of the long press counter 223aaf can be executed.

By configuring in this way, the value of the long-press counter 223aaf can be changed at different frequencies simply by changing the value to be updated (added) in the process of updating (adding) the value of the long-press counter 223aaf which is periodically executed. can be updated, even if the same production scenario is determined, the production mode of the battle production reach can be varied. In addition, instead of executing the process of determining the effect scenario and the process of determining the update frequency of the long-press counter 223aaf separately, the update frequency of the long-press counter 223aaf is defined for each effect scenario, The update frequency may be determined according to the determined production scenario.

Next, with reference to FIG. 826, the contents of the rendering update process 26 (F2171) will be described. FIG. 826 is a flow chart showing the contents of the rendering update process 26 (F2171). This effect update process 26 (F2171) is different from the above-described 22nd control example in that a process regarding the long press is added.

Here, the processing contents of the long pressing process 26 (F3551) executed in the effect update process 26 (F2171) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 827 is a flowchart showing the contents of the long-pressing process 26 (F3551). This long-pressing process 26 (F3551) includes processing for updating the period during which the long-pressing operation is continuously performed, and processing for determining whether or not to set a non-decreasing period during the long-pressing operation. , and a process for determining the effect mode of the additional decrease effect to be executed when the non-decrease period ends.

As described above, in the twenty-sixth control example, during a part of the operation effective period during which the gauge reduction effect (battle effect) is being executed, regardless of the result of the effect, the physical strength value is not decreased. Configured to be configurable. By configuring in this way, even if the reduction of the physical strength value is stopped in the middle of the gauge reduction effect (battle effect), it is possible to leave the possibility that the result of the effect will be advantageous to the player. Therefore, the player can enjoy the gauge reduction effect to the end.

Specifically, each time the physical strength value is decreased based on the operation of the operating means, a rush lottery is executed to determine whether or not to set a non-decrease period, and if the rush lottery is won, the non-decrease period is set. It is configured as follows. Then, when the non-decrease period is set, an effect in which the physical strength value is not decreased is executed until a predetermined time elapses or until the cancellation lottery for whether or not to cancel the non-decrease period is won. It is configured as follows. In this way, by adding processing for varying the degree of reduction of the physical strength value even while the gauge reduction effect is being executed, the player can perform the same operation on the operation means. Even in such a case, the reduction pattern of the physical strength value in the gauge decrease performance can be increased more easily than in the case of setting only based on the predetermined performance pattern when the gauge decrease performance is executed, so that the performance effect can be enhanced. can.

In addition, in the twenty-sixth control example, the winning probability of the cancellation lottery is configured to be different based on the remaining physical strength at the time when the non-decrease period is set and the effect result of the gauge decrease effect being executed. The higher the remaining physical strength value, the higher the winning probability of the release lottery. By configuring in this way, when the non-decrease period is set at the beginning of the gauge reduction effect, it is easier to win the release lottery than when the non-decrease period is set at the end of the gauge decrease effect. Therefore, even though the gauge decrease effect was executed, the immediately set non-decrease period continues for a long time, and the physical strength value is reduced to the value that can be decreased by this gauge decrease effect. It is possible to suppress the frequent occurrence of situations that cannot be caused.

Further, the winning probability of the release lottery is higher when the performance result of the gauge reduction performance being executed becomes an advantageous performance result than when the performance result becomes a disadvantageous performance result. Here, in the twenty-sixth control example, the case where the effect result of the gauge reduction effect is advantageous to the player is higher than the case where the effect result is disadvantageous to the player. The physical strength value is greatly reduced (the remaining physical strength value is set to 0) by pressing the player so that the effect is easily executed. In other words, the larger the physical strength value that can be reduced by the current gauge reduction effect, the higher the winning probability of the cancellation lottery. By configuring in this way, the production result of the gauge reduction production is an advantageous production result When the non-decrease period is set in the gauge reduction production, the production result of the gauge reduction production becomes a disadvantageous production result It is possible to make it easier to win the release lottery than when the non-decrease period is set in the gauge reduction effect, so even though the gauge decrease effect that can greatly reduce the physical strength value is executed, it does not decrease. It is possible to suppress the frequent occurrence of a situation where the period continues for a long time and the physical strength value cannot be reduced to a value that can be reduced by this gauge reduction effect.

In addition, in the twenty-sixth control example, an upper limit (limit) is set for the period during which the non-decrease period continues, and if the non-decrease period reaches the upper limit without winning the cancellation lottery, the non-decrease period is forced. configured to be released. By configuring in this way, even if the cancellation lottery is used to randomize the timing at which the non-decrease period is canceled, the non-decrease period ends without winning the cancellation lottery. is continued, and the production effect of the gauge decrease production is remarkably lowered.

Furthermore, in the twenty-sixth control example, when the non-decrease period is canceled and a decrease period in which the physical strength can be decreased is set, the physical strength is reduced according to the length of the set non-decrease period. It is configured to be able to execute the additional reduction performance to reduce. Specifically, when the non-decrease period is set with the effect result that the effect result of the current gauge decrease effect is advantageous to the player, or when the non-decrease period is set at the beginning of the gauge decrease effect, that is, , If the probability of winning the cancellation lottery is set high and the non-decrease period continues for a long time, the physical strength value can be greatly reduced by the additional reduction effect that is executed when the non-decrease period is canceled. configured to be possible.

By configuring in this way, even if the non-decrease period continues for a long time, the physical strength value can be greatly reduced by the additional decrease effect, so the game in which the non-decrease period continues for a long time. The player can also play the game while expecting that the performance result of the gauge reduction performance being executed will be a performance result that is advantageous to the player. In addition, it is possible to prevent frequent occurrence of a situation in which the physical strength value cannot be reduced to a value that can be reduced in the gauge reduction effect this time.

In addition, in the twenty-sixth control example, the effect pattern for decreasing the physical strength value is made different according to the operation method of the operation means of the player during the gauge reduction effect. Specifically, when the player continuously presses the operating means during the operation valid period in the gauge reduction effect (so-called long press operation), and when the player continuously presses the operating means (so-called , in the case of performing a continuous hit operation), and in the case of executing a long press operation, the effect pattern that allows setting of the above-mentioned non-decrease period is determined. , when the continuous hitting operation is executed, an effect pattern in which the above-described non-decrease period is not set (no rush lottery is executed) is determined.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the process of decreasing the physical strength value in the gauge decrease effect for showing the same effect result according to the operation method of the operating means. Therefore, since it is possible to make it easier for the player who wants to execute the gauge decrease effect in various effect patterns to operate the operation means by different operation methods, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced. can improve interest in

Furthermore, in the twenty-sixth control example, it is possible to suggest the effect result of the gauge decrease effect according to the length of the non-decrease period during which the physical strength value is not decreased. Specifically, during the non-decrease period, an effect (charging effect) is executed in which allied characters accumulate power. ing. The greater the power stored during the charging effect, the easier it is to execute the effect of greatly decreasing the physical strength value after the non-decrease period elapses.

By constructing in this way, even when the non-reduction period is set during the gauge reduction performance period, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the gauge reduction performance being executed early.

In addition, in the twenty-sixth control example, the gauge decrease effect can be ended without ending the charge effect in the gauge decrease effect in which the effect result is the effect result that is disadvantageous to the player. . In other words, it is possible to set an effect pattern in which the effect result of the gauge decrease effect is displayed without attacking the enemy character by using the power even though the power is accumulated in the charge effect. By configuring in this way, even if the effect result of the gauge decrease effect is disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the charge effect, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, in the twenty-sixth control example, the non-decrease period can be forcibly canceled by canceling the long-pressing operation on the operation means. In other words, during the gauge decrease effect prompting the player to operate (press down) the operation means, the player can be provided with an option to stop the operation of the operation means. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the options of operation methods for the operation means.

In addition, in the twenty-sixth control example, when the long press operation is executed for the gauge reduction effect, the effect scenario for decreasing the physical strength value progresses according to the duration of the long press operation. It is configured such that the longer the time, the easier it is to set a production scenario in which the physical strength value tends to decrease. When the long-pressing operation being executed is canceled in the middle, the update of the pressing duration is interrupted, and when the long-pressing operation is performed again, the interrupted pressing duration can be taken over and updated. are doing. Therefore, even if the long-pressing operation is interrupted in the middle, it is possible to make it easier to continue operating the operating means.

Further, as described above, when the non-decrease period can be forcibly canceled by canceling the long-pressing operation on the operation means, and when the long-pressing operation being executed is canceled in the middle, When the update of the pressing duration is interrupted and the long pressing operation is performed again, the interrupted pressing duration can be taken over and updated. By configuring in this way, the player who is executing the long-pressing operation during the gauge reduction effect is interrupted once in the middle of the long-pressing operation, rather than continuing to perform the long-pressing operation. When the long-pressing operation is performed again, the non-decrease period is shorter, and it is possible to provide a situation in which the physical strength value can be greatly decreased in the gauge decrease effect.

Further, in the twenty-sixth control example, during the execution period of the gauge reduction effect, the valid period (operation valid period) during which the player's operation to the operating means is effectively determined is displayed. The length of the displayed operation valid period is made different. Specifically, when the effect result of the gauge reduction effect is the effect result that is advantageous to the player, the display indicating the longer operation effective period is more likely to be executed than the effect result that is disadvantageous to the player. It consists of

By configuring in this way, before the physical strength value of the enemy character is reduced in the gauge decrease effect (at the time when the display mode indicating the effective period of operation is displayed), the player is made to predict the result of this effect. can be made easier. In addition, the effect of reducing the physical strength of the enemy character based on the operation (long press operation) on the operation means not only decreases the physical strength value (relationship between the elapsed time and the decreased value), but also decreases the physical strength value. Since the effect result is predicted in consideration of the length of the remaining time (remaining operation effective period) that can be performed, the effect result is predicted by increasing the element for making the player predict the effect result. It can be made difficult, and the effect of the effect (gauge reduction effect) to be executed can be enhanced.

Furthermore, in the twenty-sixth control example, the same effect scenario (operating means Decrease value of physical strength value according to the operation time to ) can be set, and the physical strength value that can be finally displayed can be changed according to the length of the set operation valid time. .

By configuring in this way, it is possible to create different effects results using the same effect scenario. The amount of performance data (performance scenario) relating to the gauge decrease performance can be reduced more than when only the performance scenario dedicated to the performance result that is unfavorable to the player and the performance scenario dedicated to the performance result that is disadvantageous to the player are used.

In addition, conventionally, by executing variable production for showing the result of the special symbol lottery in various production modes, the period in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a lottery result other than the big win (lost) is long. There is a pachinko machine 10 that prevents a player from quickly becoming bored with the game even if the game continues. In such a conventional type pachinko machine 10, the ratio of the selection ratio when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and the ratio of the selection when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot is adjusted. Various performance modes with different degrees of expectation for winning a big hit can be determined, and based on the result of a special symbol lottery corresponding to the variable performance and the result of the performance lottery for determining the performance mode of the variable performance. By constructing a performance mode to be determinable, even when a game in which the lottery result of a special pattern lottery is a lottery result other than (lost) a lottery win continues a plurality of times, the degree of expectation of a big win is given to a player. Since it is possible to execute various variable performances with different values, it is possible to make the player play the game while having a moderate sense of anticipation for the big win.

However, in the conventional pachinko machine 10, the effect mode of the variable effect for indicating that the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is lost is determined by lottery (lottery lottery). In the meantime, there is a problem that only the variable performance with low expectation of winning the jackpot is executed, and the player easily gets bored with the game. In addition, there is a problem that the player selects a plurality of times in a short period of time a performance mode in which the selection ratio is defined so as to increase the expectation of winning a big win, which gives the player a sense of distrust.

On the other hand, in the twenty-sixth control example, information (production history information) regarding the performance mode of the variable performance executed in the past, and a variable performance (loss) for indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery Based on the information about the number of times the variable performance) is continuously executed (the number of consecutive failures), the performance mode of the variable performance can be determined.

Specifically, a specific counter value (the value of the execution effect counter) is added based on the increase in the number of times of consecutive failures, and when the value of the execution effect counter reaches a specific value (for example, 100), the variable effect As a data table referred to when determining the performance mode, a special performance mode selection table different from the data table normally referred to (normal performance mode selection table) is referred to, and the jackpot expectation degree is It is configured to make it easier to determine a high presentation mode than in normal times.

By configuring in this way, a variable performance in a performance mode with a high degree of expectation for a big win can be executed periodically, so that only the variable performance with a low degree of expectation for winning a big win is executed, and the player gets bored with the game. can be made difficult to occur.

Furthermore, in the twenty-sixth control example, the process of subtracting the value of the execution effect counter described above is configured to be executable. In this case, the value of the execution effect counter is decremented according to the determined effect mode. Concretely, when the performance mode with a relatively high degree of expectation for winning a jackpot is determined as the performance mode of the variable performance, the value of the execution performance counter is subtracted by 30.例文帳に追加

By constructing in this way, immediately after the execution of the deviation variation performance in the performance mode with high expectation of winning the jackpot, the failure variation performance in which the performance mode is determined by referring to the special performance mode selection table is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustfulness caused by the continuous execution of the deviating variable performance in a performance mode with a high expectation of winning the jackpot.

In addition, in the twenty-sixth control example, when determining the effect mode with reference to the special effect mode selection table, the type of effect mode is determined based on the information regarding the effect mode of the previously executed deviating variable effect. are configured to be different. Specifically, it is structured so as to make it difficult to determine a performance mode with a high degree of expectation for winning a jackpot determined by referring to a normal performance mode selection table referred to in normal times by referring to a special performance mode selection table. ing. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to determine the same performance mode for the loss fluctuation performance, so that the content is different from the normal time performance mode selection table in which the normal jackpot winning expectation is stipulated. Even if a performance mode can be determined by referring to a special performance mode selection table in which various performance modes are defined, it is possible to prevent the degree of expectation for winning a jackpot for a specific performance mode from remarkably lowering. .

Conventionally, before executing one performance, a player is sequentially notified of a plurality of pieces of information (performance elements) used in the performance, thereby making the player predict the content of the performance to be executed later. There is something that runs Specifically, when executing a battle effect in which an enemy character is attacked, information indicating the type of the allied character used in the battle effect is reported, and then information indicating the type of weapon used by the allied character in the battle effect. There is one that executes a notification effect to notify and executes a battle effect using the effect element notified by the notification effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to gradually notify the player of the contents of the battle production to be executed later, so that the player can be executed later compared to the case where the battle production is executed without any foreshadowing. By providing a period (notification performance period) in which the content of the battle performance to be executed can be predicted, the period for making the player interested in the performance to be executed can be lengthened, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

However, in the conventional pachinko machine 10, the order in which the effect elements are notified by the notification effect is fixed. If the effect element is more likely to be selected than if the effect result is more advantageous to the player, the expectation for the battle effect to be executed later at that time is greatly reduced, and the desire to play the game is reduced. There was a problem that the .

On the other hand, in the twenty-sixth control example, it is possible to change the notification order of a plurality of pieces of information to be notified to the player in the notification effect in the subjugation ready-to-win effect. Specifically, among a plurality of pieces of information that can be notified by the notification effect, the information that makes the player more likely to predict the effect result of the attack effect to be executed later allows the player to predict the effect result of the attack effect. It is configured so that it is easier to notify later than difficult information.

Specifically, at least a first ally character and a second ally character can be determined as types of ally characters used in the attack effect, and the first ally character is the second effect element rather than the first effect element. The second ally character is configured so that the first effect element makes it easier to predict the effect result of the battle effect than the second effect element, When the first ally character is determined, the information regarding the first effect element is notified, and then the information regarding the second effect element is notified, and when the second ally character is determined, the information regarding the second effect element is notified. is configured to notify the information about the first effect element after the notification.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the expectation for the battle performance to be executed later is greatly reduced in the middle of the notification performance, and the willingness to play is reduced early. can be done.

Conventionally, the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the results of a plurality of special symbol lotteries executed during a specific period (for example, a period in which the special symbol lottery is executed 10 times) can be reported using one mode performance. , Execute the first mode production in the first specific period (for example, the 1st to 5th special pattern lottery), and the 2nd mode production in the second specific period (for example, the 6th to 10th special pattern lottery). there is something to do. In such a conventional type pachinko machine 10, the result of a plurality of special symbol lotteries can be notified by one mode performance, so that the player can be notified of the plurality of special symbol lotteries targeted for one mode performance. If an advantageous lottery result (for example, winning a jackpot) is included, it is possible to display an effect result that is advantageous to the player as the effect result of the mode effect. Therefore, compared to the case of executing an effect for indicating the lottery result for each special symbol lottery that is executed, the effect ( Since it is possible to reduce the number of times of execution of the losing effect), it is possible to reduce the player's willingness to play due to the frequent execution of the effect showing the lottery result that is disadvantageous to the player (losing effect). It could be suppressed.

However, in the conventional pachinko machine 10, the number of times of special symbol lottery that suggests the lottery result in each mode effect is fixed, so there is a probability that the effect result of each mode effect will be an effect result that is advantageous to the player. was always fixed. Therefore, among the mode effects, the mode effect with a large number of special symbol lotteries that affect the effect result is more advantageous to the player than the mode effect with a small number of special symbol lotteries that affect the effect result. Results are likely to be displayed, and it is easy to provide biased performances to the player who expects the display of performance results that are advantageous to the player in various mode performances, and the performance effect is reduced. There was a problem of hoarding.

On the other hand, in the twenty-sixth control example, when the number of times of remaining probability variation falls below 20 times, a mode effect is executed in which the player is notified of the results of the special symbol lottery for a plurality of times using the effect result of one period effect. It is configured as follows. By configuring in this way, it becomes difficult to execute the variable effect indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, and it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play. In addition, since one period performance can be executed across the period in which the special symbol lottery is executed a plurality of times, it is difficult for the player to grasp the remaining number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed during the variable probability state. can do.

Specifically, in the twenty-sixth control example, by executing the processing of F4303 to F4310 in FIG. 820, the special symbol showing the result of the special symbol lottery of 6 times from 20 times to 15 times. A first mode performance is executed as a period performance using the variable period, and a second mode as a period performance using the special symbol variation period showing the results of 7 special symbol lotteries with the number of remaining probability variations from 14 times to 8 times. A performance is executed, and a third mode performance is executed as a period performance using a special symbol variation period showing the results of 7 special symbol lotteries with a remaining probability variation frequency of 7 times to 1 time. .

In addition, in the twenty-sixth control example, it is possible to determine the effect mode (result of effect) of each mode effect based on the newly acquired information (pending and stored winning information) while the mode effect is already being executed. Configure. More specifically, the information stored in the winning information storage area 223va (reserved storage information), and preliminarily determines (reads ahead) the result of the special symbol lottery based on the stored reserved memory information. As a result of the preliminary determination, when it is determined that the reserved memory information corresponding to the winning of the jackpot is acquired, the performance result of the first mode performance is rewritten to the performance result indicating the winning of the jackpot, and the first mode performance is performed. , the special symbol variation for winning the jackpot is extended and executed until it is stopped and displayed.

In this way, based on the information acquired after executing the first mode production (period production), by variably configuring the number of special symbol lotteries targeted for the first mode production (period production), the probability variable state It is possible to make it difficult for a player to grasp the remaining number of executable special symbol lotteries.

In the twenty-sixth control example, the period during which one period effect is executed is made variable based on the look-ahead result. Alternatively, the player may select an arbitrary period. In addition, the timing of executing the look-ahead (preliminary determination) is not the timing at which the last special symbol variation in the target period of the predetermined mode production is started, but the timing at which the previous special symbol variation is started. Alternatively, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the last special symbol variation was started (a specific timing before the effect result is notified to the player). Furthermore, when performing pre-determination, all of the acquired pending storage information may be pre-determined, or only a specific range (for example, two items with the oldest order stored in the winning information storage area 223va) It may be configured to perform determination.

In addition, as a result of the preliminary determination, when it is determined that the reserved memory information corresponding to the winning of the jackpot is acquired, a lottery is executed as to whether or not to extend the period production, and based on the lottery result, the period production is performed. It may be configured to determine whether or not to rewrite the effect result of or to determine whether or not to extend the period effect.

Conventionally, an operation effect for allowing a player to operate the operation means (effect button 22) is configured to be executable, and when the operation effect is executed, the period during which the operation to the operation means is effectively determined (effective period) can be notified to the player. With this configuration, the player can easily grasp the remaining period of the effective period, and the effect result of the operation effect is obtained based on the effect mode of the operation effect and the remaining period of the effective period. could be predicted.

However, in the conventional pachinko machine 10, regardless of the performance result of the operation performance, the valid period of the same length is set as the period (valid period) during which the operation to the operating means is effectively determined. Informing the player of the current effective period makes it easier for the player to grasp the remaining period of the effective period, and based on the effect mode of the operation effect and the remaining period of the effective period, the effect result of this time is displayed to the player. There is a problem that it is determined early that the performance result is disadvantageous to the player, and the player's motivation to operate the operating means is reduced.

On the other hand, in the twenty-sixth control example, it is possible to vary the length of the effective period to be set according to the effect result of the operation effect. As the length of the notification period to be notified to the player, a period shorter than the valid period actually set can be notified.

In the twenty-sixth control example described above, as a method of setting the non-decrease period during the battle effect, a lottery is executed to determine whether or not the non-decrease period is determined when the condition for decreasing the remaining HP value is met. However, without being limited to this, it may be possible to determine whether or not to determine the non-decrease period based on the amount of the remaining HP value to be decreased.

In this case, for example, if the effect (strong attack effect) that greatly reduces the remaining HP value with one attack is determined, the effect (weak attack effect) that decreases the remaining HP value with one attack is better. The non-decrease period may be set more easily than when is determined.

In addition, as a method of setting the non-decrease period during the battle production, the non-decrease period is set each time when the condition for decreasing the remaining HP value is satisfied, and the length of the set non-decrease period is set. It may be configured to be different.

In addition, a non-decrease period may be set in accordance with the start timing of the operation valid period so that the HP value does not decrease unless the non-decrease period is canceled. In this case, it is preferable that the timing at which the non-decrease period is canceled (the timing at which it is likely to be canceled) is varied based on the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in when the decrease in the remaining HP value started.

Moreover, regardless of whether or not the condition for decreasing the remaining HP value is met, the non-decrease period may be set for a predetermined period at a specific timing in the valid operation period. Also, it may be configured such that two or more non-decreasing periods can be set for one operation effective period.

<27th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 828 to 861. FIG. In the 17th control example described above, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are configured to be executable at the same time (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous variation specification), and the type of time saving state Accordingly, the types of special symbols that are likely to be executed by lottery are differentiated. That is, in the second time-saving state A and the third time-saving state A, while forming a time-saving state in which the lottery of the first special symbol having a low degree of advantage is likely to be executed, in the second time-saving state B and the third time-saving state B is configured to form a time-saving state in which the lottery for the second special symbol having a high degree of advantage is easily executed.

On the other hand, in this 27th control example, by changing the lottery frequency of the first special symbol (tendency of the selected fluctuation time) according to the setting opportunity (jackpot type) of the time saving state, until the end of the time saving state The number of lotteries of the second special symbols to be executed at each time is made different. More specifically, as the time-saving end condition, the first end condition established by executing the lottery of the first special symbol for the first number of times (for example, 50 times), or the lottery of the first special symbol and the second A configuration is provided with a second end condition established by executing the lottery of special symbols a second number of times (for example, 100 times) larger than the first number of times in total, and a time saving state is basically provided according to the first end condition. configured to terminate. That is, basically, the period from when the time saving state is set to when the lottery for the first special symbol is completed for the first number of times is configured to be the time saving state. A plurality of time-saving states with different numbers of times of executing the lottery of the second special symbols are made different by configuring to vary the average fluctuation time of the first special symbol during the time-saving state according to the setting opportunity of the time-saving state. , substantially forming a plurality of time-saving states with different degrees of advantage (possibility of winning a jackpot during the time-saving state). As a result, when the time saving state is set, the game can be played while paying attention to which kind of time saving state is set, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. can.

In addition, in this 27th control example, it is configured so that a small win can be won only in the lottery of the second special symbol, and as in the above-described 17th control example, etc., a small win is won and a small win game is executed. By continuing to hit to the right during the game, it is possible to almost generate a V prize and execute a jackpot game. In other words, in the lottery of the second special symbol, not only when the big win is won, but also when the small win is won, the big win is substantially determined. In the twenty-seventh control example, in the normal state, basically, when the second special symbol lottery is executed, an extremely long variation time (for example, 10 minutes) is set so that the second While the lottery of the special pattern is made difficult to be executed, only the lottery of the second special pattern of a specific number of times after the end of the time saving state is constituted so that the fluctuation time is shortened. As a result, it is possible to secure a lottery opportunity for the second special symbols for the specific number of times after the time saving state is finished.

Here, conventionally, a plurality of special symbols with different degrees of advantage (a first special symbol and a second special symbol with a higher degree of advantage than the first special symbol) are provided, and during a disadvantageous game state, a first disadvantageous symbol is provided. Lottery of special symbols is easier to be executed (start winning of the second special symbols is less likely to occur), while the lottery of the second special symbols is easier to be executed when the game state is shifted to an advantageous game state ( A game machine that employs a control that makes it easier for the second special symbol to start winning is widely known. In such a conventional gaming machine, during execution of the last variation display in an advantageous gaming state, a second special symbol with a high degree of advantage is activated to start winning. Whether the lottery result corresponding to winning is included in the lottery result of the final lottery of the second special pattern and the lottery result of the ball of the second special pattern in an advantageous game state by accumulating the reserved balls of the special pattern. There are also those that execute an effect to notify whether or not. However, as in the twenty-seventh control example, when adopting a simultaneous variation specification that allows the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol to be performed at the same time (in parallel), in an advantageous gaming state, the second There is a possibility that the lottery for the first special symbol is executed multiple times during the execution of the variable display of the two special symbols, and a possibility that the lottery for the first special symbol is not executed at all during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol. Therefore, for example, when the number of times of time saving is in the state of one time remaining at the start of the lottery of the second special symbol, it is judged that there is a high possibility that the last second special symbol will be displayed in an advantageous game state. The lottery for the first special pattern is not executed during the variable display of the second special pattern and the time saving state is the next second special pattern lottery despite the execution of the performance for accumulating the reserved balls of the second special pattern. Or, conversely, for example, when the lottery for the second special symbol was started, the number of times of time saving remained relatively large (e.g., 8 times, etc.), so the production to accumulate the reserved balls was not executed. Nevertheless, during the variable display of the second special symbol, the variation of the first special symbol is frequently executed, and the advantageous game state ends before the variable display of the second special symbol ends. There is a possibility, and it may become difficult to execute the effect of storing the second special symbol reserved balls at an appropriate timing.

On the other hand, in the twenty-seventh control example, the second ball entrance 640 as a start winning opening that triggers the lottery of the second special symbols can be easily thrown into the game ball simply by hitting it to the right regardless of the game state. A second special symbol advantageous in a normal state is configured as a starting prize winning port that allows a ball to be entered, and is controlled so that the variation time of the second special symbol is basically set to an extremely long time in a normal state. While suppressing the execution of the lottery, only the lottery of the second special symbol of a specific number after the advantageous time saving state ends, by shortening the fluctuation time, the second executed immediately after the time saving state ends. 2 It is constructed so as to be able to execute the effect of accumulating the reserved balls in the variable display of the special symbols. By constructing in this way, the performance for accumulating the reserved balls can be reliably executed, and the series of performances indicating whether or not there is a win in the lottery of the second special symbols being executed and reserved is more reliable. Since it can be executed at any time, it is possible to suitably set the effect mode.

The pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-seventh control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the seventeenth control example described above in that the board configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is partially changed. The configuration of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main controller 110 is partially changed, the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the sound lamp controller 113 is partially changed, and the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 The only difference is that the control processing to be executed is partially changed, and the control processing to be executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in No. 17 control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the 17th control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 828, the board configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-seventh control example will be described. FIG. 828 is a front view of the game board 13 in the twenty-seventh control example. As shown in FIG. 828, in the game board 13 in the twenty-seventh control example, the game board 13 (see FIG. 548) in the seventeenth control example is provided directly below the first ball entrance 64 in the seventeenth control example. The difference is that the variable prize winning device 2650 for small hits that has been used is deleted. Further, as shown in FIG. 828, in the flow path formed on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in the front view, a through gate 67 that triggers a normal symbol lottery is arranged on the upstream side, and a through gate 67 is arranged on the downstream side of the through gate 67. A right first ball entrance 64r that is opened and closed by an electric accessory 64ra is provided. Like the first ball entrance 64r, the right first ball entrance 64r is configured as one of the start winning openings that trigger the lottery of the first special symbols. The electric accessory 64ra is normally maintained in a closed position where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the right first ball entrance 64r. It is configured to be displaced (variably) to an open position where a game ball can enter the ball entrance 64r.

For this reason, it is easy to hit the normal pattern (the probability of hitting the normal pattern is higher than in the normal state, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is shorter, and the opening time of the electric accessory 64ra at the time of hitting the normal pattern In the time-saving state, the game ball frequently enters the right first ball entrance 64r by continuing to hit to the right. Further, as shown in FIG. 828, a second ball entrance 640 through which game balls can be entered is provided directly below the right first ball entrance 64r. This second ball entrance 640 is configured as a starting prize winning opening that triggers the lottery of the second special symbol. Unlike the right first ball entrance 64r, the second ball entrance 640 does not have anything that prevents the ball from entering. It is possible to enter the ball easily. In addition, in the time-saving state, a state is formed in which the game ball is likely to enter the first ball entrance 64a on the upstream side every time the normal symbol is hit, so the game ball is the second entrance compared to the normal state. Although it becomes difficult to enter the opening 640, it is designed so that about 5 game balls enter during the second special symbol fluctuation time (fixed for 10 seconds in this 27th control example) in the time saving state. Therefore, when the player continuously hits to the right in the time saving state, the phenomenon that the second special symbol holding ball becomes 0 does not occur. Therefore, in the twenty-seventh control example, since game balls frequently enter both the right first ball entrance 64r and the second ball entrance 640 during the time saving state, the lottery for the first special symbol is also the second. A lottery for special symbols is also frequently executed.

In addition, in the twenty-seventh control example, the special symbol jackpot probability is set to 1/200, and the second special symbol jackpot probability is set to 1/20. For this reason, even if the lottery of the first special symbol that cannot win the small win is executed, the big win is won only with a probability of 1/200, whereas the special symbol lottery has a big win and a small win that substantially determines the big win. When the lottery for the second special symbol that can win any prize is executed, the jackpot will be won with a probability of substantially 11/200. Therefore, the more the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the time saving state, the higher the possibility of winning the jackpot. Therefore, the player can expect that the lottery of the second special symbol will be executed more often, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 828, in the twenty-seventh control example, a variable prize winning device 1065 that is opened during the jackpot game is disposed on the downstream side of the V prize winning device 650 . Since this variable winning device 1650 is the same as the variable winning device 1065 (see FIG. 406) provided in the above-described 12th control example and the like, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 829 to 833, a characteristic presentation mode in the twenty-seventh control example will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 829 and 830(a), an effect mode during execution of the big win game in the twenty-seventh control example will be described. Here, as described above, in the twenty-seventh control example, a plurality of time saving states having different average values of the number of times of lottery of the second special symbols executed until the end of the time saving state are provided. More specifically, since the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to an average of about 1.4 seconds, the first time saving end condition (first special The time-saving state (E rank rush) where the time-saving state ends when the symbol lottery 50 times) is established, and the fluctuation time of the first special design is set to an average of about 2 seconds, so after moving to the time-saving state Time-saving state (D rank rush) where the first time-saving end condition (lottery 50 times of the first special symbol) is established in an average of about 99.4 seconds and the time-saving state ends (D rank rush), and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol Since it is set to about 3.2 seconds on average, the first time-saving end condition (50 times of the first special symbol lottery) is established in about 155.3 seconds on average after shifting to the time-saving state, and the time-saving state ends. The time saving state (C rank rush) and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol are set to about 3.8 seconds on average, so the first time saving ends in about 186.2 seconds on average after moving to the time saving state Since the time-saving state (B rank rush) where the condition (lottery 50 times of the first special symbol) is satisfied and the time-saving state is terminated, and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to about 6.2 seconds on average, A time saving state (A rank crash) in which the first time saving end condition (50 times of the first special symbol lottery) is satisfied and the time saving state ends in about 302.3 seconds on average after moving to the time saving state, and a time saving state. (6) a time-saving state (S rank rush) in which only the lottery of the second special pattern can be executed during time-saving because the fluctuation time of the first special pattern in the state is always long (250 seconds); There are two time-saving states (Rush ranks). As mentioned above, in the twenty-seventh control example, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is fixed to 10 seconds, so the number of lotteries of the second special symbol in the time saving state is the first time saving end condition. The longer it takes to establish, the more. That is, the longer the period until the first time-saving end condition is satisfied, the higher the expectation of the big hit. In addition, when the first special symbol jackpot, the second special symbol jackpot, and the second special symbol jackpot are all taken into account, after the time saving state ends after the time saving state is started, the second of the specific number of times (5 times) The percentage of winning the jackpot before the special pattern lottery ends is about 59.8% for E-rank rush, about 66.6% for D-rank rush, about 75.6% for C-rank rush, and B-rank. Rush is about 79.5%, A-rank rush is about 89.4%, and S-rank rush is about 99.7%. Therefore, it is possible to play a game with the aim of providing a higher-ranked rush after the end of the big win. In the twenty-seventh control example, an effect (rank-up effect) for notifying in advance the rank of the time-saving state (rush) given after the big win is executed during the opening period of the big win.

FIG. 829(a) is a diagram showing an effect mode of a rank-up effect executed as an opening effect for a big win. When this rank-up effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 829(a), the third symbol stopped and displayed when announcing the big win is reduced in the small display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm. Is displayed. FIG. 829(a) illustrates a case where a big hit is notified by the third pattern matching imitating the number "4". In addition, in the small display area Dm2, characters "Right-handed" indicating the game method during execution of the jackpot game are displayed. Furthermore, in the main display area Dm, one small enemy character ZE appears from the cave DG inhabited by a large number of enemies, and the appearance of the small enemy character ZE and the adventurer character 801 fight. executed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 829(a), when the character 801 of the adventurer was able to defeat the small enemy character ZE, the character ZE of the subdued small enemy was given the character "RANK UP". An effect of dropping a rank-up image (rank-up icon) RG is executed. Also, an image indicating the number of rank-up images RG obtained so far is displayed in the display area HR3 formed in the information of the main display area Dm. FIG. 829(a) illustrates a case where the second rank-up image RG is acquired by the rank-up image RG dropped by the character ZE of the small enemy defeated this time. Furthermore, the text "Stock up rank every time you defeat an enemy!?" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that more rank-up images RG can be acquired (stocked) as the smaller enemy character ZE is subdued.

FIG. 829(b) is a diagram showing an example of an effect of increasing the rank by consuming the stocked rank-up images RG, which is executed after the end of the effect of fighting the small enemy character ZE. Here, in the twenty-seventh control example, there are provided two types of targets for increasing the rank using the rank-up image RG: the bonus rank and the rush rank. The bonus rank is linked to the number of rounds of the jackpot, and there are four ranks from A to D. Of the bonus ranks, A rank corresponds to 12 rounds, B rank corresponds to 8 rounds, C rank corresponds to 6 rounds, and D rank corresponds to 4 rounds. Also, as described above, there are six rush ranks from S to E.

As shown in FIG. 829(b), when the effect to raise the rank by consuming the rank-up image RG is executed, the number of rank-up images RG displayed in the display region HR3 is reduced by one, and the main An effect is executed in which the rank-up image RG is split in half in the display area Dm and an image indicating a bonus rank or a rush rank appears. FIG. 829(b) illustrates a case where a bonus rank image BRG with characters "BONUS RANK" appears from a rank-up image RG split in two. In this case, it means that the bonus rank is raised by one rank (stage) or more. A display area HR33 for displaying information indicating the current bonus rank and rush rank is formed on the right side of the main display area Dm. In the example of FIG. 829(b), the bonus rank image BRG acquired this time raises (ranks up) the bonus rank to C rank, while the rush rank remains at E rank. Further, a text saying "Consume stock to increase your bonus rank and rush rank!" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. With these display contents, it is possible to easily understand that the effects in which either the bonus rank or the rush rank is raised by one rank or more are executed by the number of stocked rank-up images RG.

It should be noted that the number of times of rank-up and to which rank each rank is ranked-up are determined in advance by the jackpot type. For example, in the case of a jackpot type (jackpot K28) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 6 rounds and the jackpot shifts to an A rank crash after the jackpot ends, 5 rank-up images are obtained in the first half of the opening production, and the bonus rank is 1 in the second half. An effect is set in which the rank rises to C rank, and the rush rank rises by 4 ranks to A rank. However, which rank is raised when each rank-up image RG is consumed is determined by lottery for each effect. For example, while the bonus rank and the rush rank have not risen to the rank corresponding to the type of jackpot this time, when the effect that consumes the rank-up image RG is executed, the bonus rank is distributed at a rate of 50%, and the rate is 50%. It is drawn by lottery so that it can be distributed to the rush rank. On the other hand, after one rank rises to the upper limit, it is always distributed to the ranks that have not yet reached the upper limit. As a result, randomness can be imparted to the rank-up, so that the game can be played while paying attention to which rank is raised. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, for a player who wants to win more prize balls with one jackpot, it is possible to make the player play while wishing that more rank-up images RG are consumed in the bonus rank than in the rush rank. On the other hand, for the player who thinks that it is better to increase the possibility of the occurrence of consecutive wins, the game is played while hoping that more rank-up images RG will be consumed in the rush rank than in the bonus rank. can be done. As a result, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the target to be expected to be ranked up is exactly the opposite according to the player's preference, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

FIG. 830(a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode after all stocked rank-up images RG are consumed. As shown in FIG. 830(a), when the rank-up image RG is consumed (the rank-up of the bonus rank and rush rank is completed), the adventurer character 801 raises his sword in the main display area Dm. At the same time, the text "Ranking up finished" is displayed in the display area HR3. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, the number of rounds of the jackpot corresponding to the bonus rank reported this time, and the continuation rate of the rush corresponding to the rush rank (until the lottery of the second special symbol five times after the end of the time saving is completed) information indicating the percentage of winning the jackpot) is displayed. FIG. 830(a) illustrates a case where a C rank corresponding to a 6-round jackpot is reported as a bonus rank, and a B rank corresponding to a continuation rate of 79.5% is reported as a rush rank. For Ds, the text "Bonus 6 rounds over, rush continuation rate 79% over confirmed!" is displayed. These display contents allow the player to easily understand the bonus rank and the rush rank.

In addition, in the twenty-seventh control example, as the bonus rank, the rank linked to the number of rounds of the current jackpot is simply notified, but it is not limited to this. For example, when there is a jackpot in the reserve, it may be configured to notify the rank in consideration of the number of rounds of the jackpot in the reserve. More specifically, for example, taking into account the big hits and pending balls this time, if the total number of rounds is 4 rounds, the E rank is reported, and if the total number of rounds is 6 rounds, the D rank is reported. , if the total number of rounds is 8 rounds, the C rank is reported; if the total number of rounds is 10 rounds, the B rank is reported; if the total number of rounds is 12 rounds, the A rank is reported; It may be configured to notify the S rank if it is a round or more. Further, for example, when there is simply a jackpot in the reserve, the S rank may be notified as the bonus rank. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute an effect mode that takes into consideration the presence or absence of the in-hold jackpot, so it is possible to diversify the effect mode. In addition, when the effect mode in which the on-hold jackpot is determined is executed, the player's interest in the game can be greatly improved, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the twenty-seventh control example, a rank-up image RG of 1 is acquired each time the effect of subjugating one small enemy character ZE is executed. A performance pattern may be provided in which a plurality of rank-up images RG are obtained when the character ZE of is defeated. In this case, an enemy type that is highly expected to obtain multiple rank-up images RG when subjugated, or an enemy type that is confirmed to be subjugated and obtain multiple rank-up images RG may be provided. . By configuring in this way, not only can the adventurer character 801 be able to subjugate the enemy, but also the type of the enemy that appears can be noticed during the game, so that the player's interest in the game can be enhanced. can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIG.830(b), FIG.831, and FIG.832, the characteristic production|presentation mode in the time saving state (rush) in this 27th control example is demonstrated. FIG. 830(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during the time saving state. As shown in FIG. 830(b), during the time-saving state, the characters "right-handed" are displayed in the small display area Dm2 in the main display area Dm, similarly to during the execution of the jackpot game. As a result, it is possible to more reliably execute right-handed hitting, which is a game method that is advantageous to the player, so that it is possible to suppress the loss of the player in the time-saving state. In addition, in a relatively wide area (central portion of the screen) in the main display area Dm, a variable display effect of the third symbol (the right symbol RD, the middle symbol CD, and the left symbol LD) indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is executed. do. In addition, information indicating the currently set rush rank is displayed in a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular small display area Dm3 formed in the lower right portion of the main display area Dm. FIG. 830(b) illustrates a case where "B rank" is set as the rush rank. Further, on the left side of the small display area Dm, a small display area Dm8a is formed for executing the variable display effect of the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol. As shown in FIG. 830(b), the small display area Dm8a is composed of a display area that is significantly smaller than the display area for executing the variable display effect corresponding to the second special symbol (hardly visible to the player). be done. This confirms the variable display effect corresponding to the second special symbol with a high expectation (advantage) of winning rather than the variable display effect corresponding to the first special symbol with a low expectation (advantage) of winning. This is because the majority of players are thought to want to play. Although not shown in the drawings, only when a big win is won in the lottery for the first special symbol, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in a larger display area than the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol. It is configured to be displayed by More specifically, for example, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is enlarged and displayed at the timing of one second before the fluctuation stop of the hit variation of the first special symbol, and the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed. is displayed in a reduced size, and the jackpot of the first special symbol is reported in a more conspicuous manner than the second special symbol. By constructing in this way, even if a big win is won in the lottery of the first special pattern with a low expectation of winning during the time saving state, the player can surely understand that the big win has occurred.

Also, as shown in FIG. 830(b), the small display area Dm includes a reserved symbol Dsa corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol being executed, and the reserved first to second special symbol reserved ball storage areas 203b2. A small display area Ds1 for displaying reserved symbols Dsb1 to Dsb4 corresponding to the reserved balls reserved in the fourth area, a small display area Ds2 for displaying information on the current rush (continuation rate information), It is divided into a small display area Ds3 for displaying reserved symbols Dsc1 to Dsc4 corresponding to reserved balls reserved in the first to fourth reserved areas of the first special reserved ball storage area 203b1. As shown in FIG. 830(b), the small display area Ds1 is configured as a larger display area than the small display area Ds3. This is because it is desired to check the reserved design corresponding to the second special design with a high expectation of winning (advantage) rather than the reserved design corresponding to the first special design with a low expectation of winning (advantage). This is because it is considered that the majority of the players think about it.

Further, in the small display area Dm2 in the main display area Dm, information (countdown display of seconds) indicating the remaining time until the time saving state ends is displayed. In FIG. 830(b), there is a possibility that the time-saving state will end after 47 seconds have passed, and the text "47:00 until the final judge" is displayed in the small display area Dm1. exemplified. Here, the final judge is the effect executed during the execution of the second special symbol variation display effect that is executed first after the time saving state is completed (and during the second special symbol pending digestion period). , and after urging to accumulate the second special symbol reserved ball by hitting to the right, hit in the lottery result of the second special symbol variation display in execution and the lottery result of the second special symbol being reserved. It refers to an effect that notifies whether (big hit or small hit) is included.

As described above, in the twenty-seventh control example, basically, the time saving end condition is satisfied and the time saving state is ended by executing the lottery for the first special symbol the first number of times (50 times). Therefore, in the twenty-seventh control example, after the time saving state is started, the first special symbol lottery is executed as a trigger, and the remaining time until the time saving state ends. Display the shortest time (1 second) x 49 times (first time - 1 time) in the variation time of the special pattern in the small display area Dm1 (that is, display the characters "49:00 until the final judge" ), and the remaining time is updated and displayed as time elapses. In other words, it is configured to display the minimum guaranteed time (guaranteed time) as the time saving state. Then, the deviation from the guaranteed time (remaining time displayed in the small display area Dm1) is measured (integrated) from the selected state of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, and when the deviation is integrated over a predetermined amount , and a configuration for executing an effect for adding the remaining time (remaining time adding effect) at a predetermined opportunity. Details of this remaining time addition effect will be described with reference to FIG. 831 .

Fig. 831(a) and Fig. 831(b) are diagrams showing an example of an effect mode when the remaining time extra effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 831(a), when it is decided to execute the additional effect for the remaining time, a special third pattern ( The variable display effect of the effect mode in which the additional symbol) is stopped and displayed is executed. Further, when the variation is stopped, the characters "addition occurrence" are displayed in the display area HR3. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the remaining time until the time saving state ends has been added.

After the added symbols are stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 831(b), an effect is executed in which the stopped added symbols are split in half and an image (icon) showing the number of seconds to be added appears. be. The example of FIG. 831(b) illustrates a case where an additional seconds icon with characters "+20" for notifying an additional 20 seconds appears. Further, when the additional seconds icon appears, the same number of seconds as the number of seconds indicated by the additional seconds icon is added to the remaining seconds until the end of the time saving state (until the final judge) displayed in the small display area Dm1. A production is executed. By these display contents, the remaining time until the end of the time saving state is added, and the player can easily understand that the chances of executing the lottery of the second special symbol are increased. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 832, the continuation rate increasing effect in the twenty-seventh control example will be described. This continuation rate increasing production is a production that may be executed especially when an extremely long fluctuation time that is selected with a low probability in the lottery of the first special symbol is selected, and the rush rank (continuation rate) It consists of a production that notifies that the will rise. Here, as described above, in the twenty-seventh control example, the continuation rate of each rank (the continuation rate displayed in the small display area Ds during the time saving state) is set by the average value of the variation time of the first special symbol. there is Therefore, when the fluctuation time significantly longer than the average value is selected as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, the substantial continuation rate increases with respect to the continuation rate calculated from the average value. Therefore, in the twenty-seventh control example, a long variation time is selected as the variation time of the first special symbol, and the continuation rate corresponding to the rank higher than the continuation rate corresponding to the currently set rush type (rank). When it becomes, it is configured to execute an effect (continuation rate increasing effect) for increasing the rank of the rush. By configuring in this way, it is possible to update and notify the substantial continuation rate according to the change in the situation during the time saving state (rush), so that the player can receive more accurate information (continuation rate) can be provided.

As shown in FIG. 832(a), when execution of the continuation rate increasing effect is determined, a special third pattern with characters "RANK UP" added as a medium pattern UG is displayed in the central portion of the main display area Dm. A variable display effect in which the (rank-up symbol) is stop-displayed is executed. In addition, when the variation is stopped, the characters "Ranked up" are displayed in the display area HR3. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the rush rank has increased (the rush continuation rate has increased).

After the rank-up pattern is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 832(b), an image (icon) showing the number of ranks (number of stages) to which the stopped rank-up pattern is divided into two to rank up is displayed. The production that appears is executed. The example of FIG. 832(b) illustrates a case where a rank-up icon RRG with characters "+1RANK" for notifying a one-level rank-up appears. Also, when the rank-up icon appears, an effect is executed in which the rank-up in the same number of stages as the number of stages indicated by the rank-up icon RRG is generated for the rush rank displayed in the small display area Dm3. By these display contents, the continuation rate of the time-saving state is increased, and the player can easily understand that the possibility of winning again during the rush is increased. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the twenty-seventh control example, the remaining time addition effect and the continuation rate increase effect are configured to be executed in synchronization with the variable display period of the variable display effect of the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol. , but may be configured to be executed in synchronization with the variable display period of the first special symbol. In this case, as in the case of winning the lottery for the first special symbol, the variable display effect of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is temporarily changed from the variable display effect corresponding to the second special symbol. may be configured to be executed in a conspicuous display mode (wide display area). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the additional effect for the remaining time has occurred.

Next, with reference to FIG. 833, the details of the final judge effect in the twenty-seventh control example will be described. As described above, this final judge production is a production that is executed over the variable display period of the second special symbol a specific number of times (five times) that is executed after the time saving state ends, and the second special symbol. After executing the performance prompting the player to hit to the right in order to accumulate the reserved balls, the lottery result of the second special symbol corresponding to the variable display being executed and the second special corresponding to the reserved ball of the second special symbol. This is an effect for notifying whether or not at least one win (big win or small win) is included in the lottery results of symbols.

As shown in FIG. 833 (a), the time saving state ends (that is, the remaining seconds until the final judge displayed in the small display area Dm1 becomes 0) When the final judge effect is executed, Five display areas HR34 to HR38 are formed on the right side of the adventurer character 801. FIG. Among these five display areas, the display area HR34 is a display area in which a key image corresponding to the lottery result of the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is displayed, and the display areas HR35 to HR38 , It is a display area where the image of the key of the mode corresponding to the lottery result of the reservation first to fourth areas of the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b is displayed. FIG. 833(a) exemplifies a situation in which the final judge effect is started in a state in which two reserved balls of the second special symbol are accumulated, and the image of the key is displayed in the display areas HR34 to HR36. On the other hand, the key image is not displayed in the display areas HR37 and HR38 corresponding to the third and fourth reserved areas in which the reserved data are not stored. In this final judge effect, every time the player hits to the right and the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and the number of reserved balls increases, a key image corresponding to the reserved ball is added. is displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 833(a), the characters "Pump right to save keys!!" are displayed in the display area HR3. With these display modes, the player can easily understand that the keys are accumulated in the display areas HR34 to HR38 by hitting the right hand. It should be noted that, as shown in FIG. 833(a), during execution of the final judge effect, the small display area Dm2 in which the character "Right shot" was displayed during the time saving state is erased. As a result, it is possible to suggest to the player that the time-saving state has ended and that the player has shifted (falled) to the normal state in which the degree of advantage in hitting to the right is low.

Here, the image of the key displayed in the display areas HR34 to HR38 has a plurality of modes. In the twenty-seventh embodiment, it is possible to suggest to the player the expected degree of winning by means of the mode of the key. More specifically, there are provided keys in the mode (normal mode) shown in the display areas HR34 and HR35 in FIG. Although not shown in the drawings, there are provided a mode with a key that is larger than the normal mode and a mode that is more tattered than the normal mode. As for the degree of expectation that will be a hit, the tattered aspect has the lowest expectation, followed by the normal aspect. Designed to raise expectations. Depending on the display mode of these keys, the player can predict whether or not the win will be notified by the final judge effect, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

When the effect of collecting the keys ends, the effect of the adventurer character 801 discovering the door TG is executed as shown in FIG. 833(b). In addition, the text "If you can break through the door with the stocked key, the continuation is confirmed!?" is displayed in the display area HR3. With these display modes, the player can easily understand that if the door can be opened with any of the stocked keys, a big win or a small win will occur and the rush will continue.

In addition, in this 27th control example, regardless of the lottery result, after the end of the time saving state, the fluctuation time related to the lottery of the first second special symbol is set to 30 seconds, and the second to fifth second special symbols is set to 10 seconds. Then, the player is made to store the reserved balls of the second special pattern by executing the performance of collecting the keys until 10 seconds have passed since the first variable display of the second special pattern is started. After 10 seconds have passed, the door TG is found, and the first key (the key displayed in the display area HR34) is used to break through the door TG. . If the first lottery result of the second special symbol is lost, the effect of failing to break through the door TG with the first key is executed, and thereafter, the variable display based on the second special symbol held ball is executed. Each time, during the variable time of 10 seconds, an effect is executed to attempt to break through the door TG using the corresponding key. Then, when a win (big win or small win) is won in the lottery of any of the second special symbols, the performance of breaking through the door TG is executed using the corresponding key, and the win is notified.

Thus, in the twenty-seventh control example, even in a disadvantageous normal state, the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 as a start winning opening that triggers an advantageous second special symbol lottery by hitting to the right. Assuming a board structure that can enter the ball, basically set the variation time of the second special symbol to an extremely long variation time in the normal state, and the second special of a specific number of times after the end of the time saving state Only in the lottery of symbols, a relatively short time (30 seconds or 10 seconds) is set as the variation time of the second special symbols. Then, in the first half 10 seconds of the first variable display performance of the second special symbol after the end of the time-saving state, the performance of urging the holding ball of the second special symbol to be accumulated by hitting to the right is executed, and the first second special symbol is executed. In the latter half of the variable display performance and the second to fifth variable display performance of the second special symbol after the end of the time saving state, the performance of notifying the success or failure is executed. In other words, generally, in a normal state composed of a game state in which hitting to the right is disadvantageous, an extremely special production mode of prompting to hit to the right and storing the second special symbol reserved balls is executed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the player's interest in the game. In addition, after the end of the time-saving state, the lottery of the second special symbol for a specific number of times is almost guaranteed (the player deliberately adopts a special game method such as not hitting the right hand despite being urged to hit the right hand. (unless you do) can be guaranteed.

Here, conventionally, a plurality of special symbols with different degrees of advantage (a first special symbol and a second special symbol with a higher degree of advantage than the first special symbol) are provided, and during a disadvantageous game state, a first disadvantageous symbol is provided. Lottery of special symbols is easier to be executed (start winning of the second special symbols is less likely to occur), while the lottery of the second special symbols is easier to be executed when the game state is shifted to an advantageous game state ( A game machine that employs a control that makes it easier for the second special symbol to start winning is widely known. In such a conventional gaming machine, during execution of the last variation display in an advantageous gaming state, a second special symbol with a high degree of advantage is activated to start winning. Whether the lottery result corresponding to winning is included in the lottery result of the final lottery of the second special pattern and the lottery result of the ball of the second special pattern in an advantageous game state by accumulating the reserved balls of the special pattern. There are also those that execute an effect to notify whether or not. However, as in the twenty-seventh control example, when adopting a simultaneous variation specification that allows the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol to be performed at the same time (in parallel), in an advantageous gaming state, the second There is a possibility that the lottery for the first special symbol is executed multiple times during the execution of the variable display of the two special symbols, and a possibility that the lottery for the first special symbol is not executed at all during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol. Therefore, for example, when the number of times of time saving is in the state of one time remaining at the start of the lottery of the second special symbol, it is judged that there is a high possibility that the last second special symbol will be displayed in an advantageous game state. The lottery for the first special pattern is not executed during the variable display of the second special pattern and the time saving state is the next second special pattern lottery despite the execution of the performance for accumulating the reserved balls of the second special pattern. Or, conversely, for example, when the lottery for the second special symbol was started, the number of times of time saving remained relatively large (e.g., 8 times, etc.), so the production to accumulate the reserved balls was not executed. Nevertheless, during the variable display of the second special symbol, the variation of the first special symbol is frequently executed, and the advantageous game state ends before the variable display of the second special symbol ends. There is a possibility, and it may become difficult to execute the effect of storing the second special symbol reserved balls at an appropriate timing.

On the other hand, in this 27th control example, after the end of the time saving state, the fluctuation time related to the first lottery of the second special symbol is fixed, so after the end of the time saving state, the reserved balls of the second special symbol are accumulated. You can secure the period. Therefore, by playing the game according to the contents of the performance, the player can surely store the upper limit number (four) of the reserved balls of the second special symbol, so that the final judge performance can be preferably executed. .

In addition, in this 27th control example, after the end of the time saving state (that is, immediately after the transition to the normal state), the execution of the final judge effect is set over the variable display period of the second special symbol five times, and the first time During the variable display period of the second special symbol, it was configured to execute an effect that suggests accumulating the reserved ball of the second special symbol by hitting to the right, but the start timing of the final judge effect and the execution period (second The number of fluctuations of special symbols) is not limited to this, and can be arbitrarily determined. Specifically, for example, it may be configured to execute the final judge effect in a shorter period (for example, during the variable display period of the second special symbol four times or two times after the end of the time saving state). , the configuration may be such that the final judge effect is executed in many periods. In other words, to change the lottery number of the second special symbol referring to the table 202dw8 for 1 fluctuation after the end of time saving (see FIG. 839 (b)) and the table 202dw9 for 2 to 5 fluctuations after the end of time saving (normal fluctuation pattern By changing the defined contents of the scenario table 202wa), the range (period) in which the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shortened in the normal state may be arbitrarily changed. By shortening the period, it is possible to reduce the possibility of winning a winning (big win or small win) in the advantageous second special symbol lottery after the end of the time-saving state, and by making the period longer, Since it is possible to increase the possibility of winning a win (big win or small win) in the lottery of the second special pattern, the continuation rate for each rank of the rush (the possibility of winning a big win before the final judge production ends) can be adjusted.

In addition, in the twenty-seventh control example, after the big win, during the execution of the variable display effect based on the first lottery for the second special symbol, it is suggested to the player to save the reserved balls of the second special symbol by striking to the right. However, before the time-saving state ends, it may be possible to execute an effect of accumulating the second special symbol reserved ball by striking to the right. Specifically, for example, from the lottery of the second special symbol executed after the number of remaining lotteries in the time saving state is within 10 times to the end of the time saving state, every second special symbol It is good also as a structure which performs the production|presentation which is urged to accumulate the holding|maintenance of the 2nd special design in the variable display (that is, the variable display of the some 2nd special design within the number of times of time saving). By constructing in this way, regardless of the end timing of the time-saving state, the effect of accumulating the second special symbol reserved balls is executed during the execution of the variable display effect of the second special symbol last executed in the time-saving state. can do. In addition, as in this specific example, when executing the same type of effect that urges the player to hit to the right over a plurality of times of variable display of the second special symbol, the number of reserved balls is kept at the upper limit. It may be a production content that prompts you to do so. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player play the game with caution so that the number of reserved balls is always the upper limit (4), so that the reserved ball can be placed in the middle of the production period of the final judge production. It is possible to prevent it from becoming 0.

Next, with reference to FIG. 834, the change over time of the presentation mode from the winning of the jackpot to the end of the rush in the twenty-seventh control example will be described. FIG. 834 is a time chart showing changes over time in the mode of presentation after winning the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 834, when the jackpot opening period starts with the start of the jackpot game, the rank-up effect (see FIGS. 829 and 830(a)) is executed as the opening effect. When the opening period ends after the bonus rank (number of rounds of the jackpot) and rush rank (continuation rate of the time-saving state after the jackpot ends) are announced by the rank-up production, the first round of the jackpot will start and the jackpot production will start. executed. Then, when the big win ends and the timing of starting the time saving state comes, the big win effect is ended and the during rush effect (see FIG. 830(b)) is started. In the time saving state (rush), there is a possibility that a remaining time addition effect (see Fig. 831), a continuation rate increase effect (see Fig. 832), etc. will occur depending on the selection situation of the variable time of the first special symbol. . Then, the end condition of the time saving state (the first end condition established when the 50th lottery of the first special symbol is executed without winning the winning (jackpot or small win) during the time saving state, and the first special A second end condition that is established when the symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are executed a total of 100 times, and either) is established, and was executed at the time of establishment (or the end condition When the variable display of the second special symbol (which triggered the establishment of ) ends, the production during the rush ends with the end of the time saving state, and the final judge production (see FIG. 833) starts. If the player does not win the lottery for the second special symbol five times during the final judge effect period, the effect is executed that the door TG cannot be broken through even if all the keys are used. be. Then, after the end of the time-saving state, when the lottery of the second special symbols is completed five times and the performance period of the final judge performance ends, the performance mode is switched to the performance mode for the normal state.

In addition, in the 27th control example, the number of rounds of the jackpot (bonus rank) and the degree of advantage of the time-saving state after the jackpot (rush rank) are notified, and the rank-up effect is executed during the opening period of the jackpot. , but not limited to these. For example, it may be executed during a jackpot round game or during an interval period. Also, the notification of the bonus rank and the notification of the rush rank do not necessarily have to be collectively notified by one rank-up effect, and may be configured to be notified by separate effects. More specifically, for example, the bonus rank (the number of rounds of the jackpot) is configured to be notified at any timing up to the fourth round of the jackpot, and the rush rank (the continuation rate of the time saving state) is the ending period of the jackpot or It is good also as a structure which notifies during the variable display production|presentation which concerns on the lottery of the 2nd special design of the specific number of times (for example, the 1st time or the 5th time) after shift to a time saving state (rush).

In the twenty-seventh control example, the bonus rank and the rush rank corresponding to the jackpot pattern are always notified by the rank-up effect, but a rank lower than the actual one may be notified at a predetermined rate. Then, when a rank lower than the actual rank is reported in the rank-up effect, the effect of increasing the rank to the actual rank may be executed at a predetermined notification timing. As the predetermined notification timing, for example, when the bonus rank is notified lower in the rank-up effect, the final round corresponding to the notified rank (8th round for B rank, 6th round for C rank) A configuration may be adopted in which an effect for increasing the rank to the actual rank is generated in the 4th round if the player is in the D rank). Also, for example, when the rush rank is reported to be low in the rank-up effect, the final round of the jackpot, the ending period of the jackpot, and the fluctuation display period of the second special symbol for the specified number of times (for example, the first time) after the end of the jackpot A configuration may be adopted in which an effect is generated in which the rank is increased to the actual rank in the middle. With this configuration, even if a low rank is reported in the rank-up performance, the player can expect a further rank-up after that, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. At the same time, it is possible to diversify the mode of presentation.

In the twenty-seventh control example, in the continuation rate increase effect (see FIG. 832), when notifying the occurrence of the rank up, the configuration of notifying the rank up to the corresponding rank in the variation display effect of the second special symbol of 1 However, it is not limited to this. For example, when notifying a rank-up in a plurality of steps, the rank-up may be notified step by step (for example, one step at a time for one variation) over a plurality of second special symbol fluctuation display effects. By configuring in this way, it is possible to keep the expectation of rising to a higher rank over a plurality of variable displays, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. In the case of stepwise notification, it is not always necessary to notify the rank over a plurality of fluctuations, and an effect may be executed in which the rank is raised step by step within one fluctuation. Specifically, for example, after executing an effect in which the rank-up image RG is split in half and a rank-up icon RRG indicating a rank-up to a rank lower than the original rank appears, the rank-up icon RRG is displayed. is split in half and a rank-up icon RRG indicating a higher rank appears. Thereafter, the rank-up icon RRG indicating a rank higher than the rank indicated by the rank-up icon RRG that appeared immediately before is displayed until the rank-up to the actual rank is reported. The rank may be notified step by step by repeating the effect that appears from the inside. By constructing in this way, it is possible to keep the expectation of rising to a higher rank continuously, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the twenty-seventh control example, in the continuation rate increase effect (see FIG. 832), the number of rank increases ( number of rank-ups), but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively or additionally, the type of rank-up icon RRG that appears can be suggested by the display mode (for example, color, size, etc.) of the rank-up image RG, how the rank-up image RG is split, or the like. may More specifically, for example, as types of rank-up images RG, a white rank-up image RG, a red rank-up image, and a red rank-up image having a size larger than normal are provided, and red rank-up is provided. It may be configured such that when the image is statically displayed, there is a higher possibility that the rank-up of multiple stages is notified than when the white rank-up image RG is statically displayed. Also, a red rank-up image having a size larger than usual may be configured to be selected only when a plurality of stages of rank-up is reported. In addition, as the method of breaking the rank-up image RG, in addition to the method of breaking into two, the method of breaking into four, and the method of breaking into pieces are provided. It may be configured such that the possibility of being notified of a rank-up in multiple stages is higher than the way of splitting into two. Also, in the case of a crack that shatters into pieces, it may be configured so that a rank increase to A rank or higher is determined. With this configuration, not only the type of the rank-up icon RRG but also the performance mode before the rank-up icon RRG appears can be focused on during the game, so that the player's interest in the game can be enhanced. can be improved.

<Electrical configuration in the twenty-seventh control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 835(a), details of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the twenty-seventh control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 835(a), the ROM 202 in the twenty-seventh control example replaces the first per random number 12 table 202ka with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the seventeenth control example (see FIG. 552). A win random number 27 table 202aw is provided, a jackpot type selection table 202bw is provided instead of the jackpot type selection 17 table 202qb, and a second win random number 27 table 202cw is provided instead of the second win random number 17 table 202qc. is provided, a small winning random number 27 table 202ew is provided instead of the small winning random number 17 table 202qe, and a normal state variation pattern scenario table 202wa is provided instead of the variation pattern scenario table 202qj They are different in that respect. In addition, it is also different in that the small per type selection 17 table 202qf, the open scenario 7 table 202fg, the time reduction per random number 17 table 202qh, and the time reduction per type selection table 202qi in the seventeenth control example are deleted. Since other configurations are the same as those of the 17th control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

First, with reference to FIG. 836(a), details of the first winning random number 27 table 202aw in the twenty-seventh control example will be described. This first winning random number 27 table 202aw is similar to the first winning random number 12 table 202ka and the like in the seventeenth control example described above, and is a random number determined to be a big hit when a special symbol lottery is executed (first winning Random number counter C1) is defined in this data table. FIG. 836(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first winning random number 27 table 202aw. As shown in FIG. 836(a), in the twenty-seventh control example, the random number (the value of the first winning random number counter C1) that is determined to be a big hit in the special symbol lottery is determined regardless of the type of special symbol. Five random numbers (counter values) from 0 to 4 are defined in association with each other. Since the first winning random number counter C1 in the twenty-seventh control example is composed of a loop counter that can take 1000 values of "0 to 999", the special symbol lottery was executed in the twenty-seventh control example. In this case, the probability of winning the jackpot directly is 1/200 (5/1000) in both the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol.

Next, with reference to FIG. 836(b), details of the second winning random number 27 table 202cw in the twenty-seventh control example will be described. This second winning random number 27 table 202cw is, like the second winning random number 17 table 202qc in the seventeenth control example described above, a random number determined to be a winning of a normal symbol when a lottery of a normal symbol is executed ( This is a data table that defines the value of the second winning random number counter C4).

As shown in FIG. 836(b), the second winning random number 27 table 202cw in the twenty-seventh control example includes a random number (second winning random number counter C4 counter value), only one "0" is associated and defined. Among the 300 random numbers (counter values) of ``0 to 299'' that can be taken by the second winning random number counter C4, the number of random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be normal symbol hits in the normal symbol low probability state. is one, the probability of winning the normal symbol in the low probability state of the normal symbol is 1/300. In addition, as shown in FIG. 836 (b), 299 random numbers (counter value of the second random number counter C4) that are determined to hit the normal symbol in the high probability state of the normal symbol are "0 to 298". A random value (counter value) is associated and defined. Among the 300 random numbers (counter values) of ``0 to 299'' that can be taken by the second random number counter C4, the number of random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be normal symbol hits in a normal symbol high probability state. is 299, the probability of winning the normal design in the high probability state of the normal design is 299/300. Thus, in the twenty-seventh control example, in the normal state set to the low probability state of the normal design, the winning of the normal design is rarely won, while in the time saving state set to the high probability state of the normal design, almost Since the winning of the normal pattern is won every time the lottery of the normal pattern is executed, the superiority in the time saving state can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 836(c), details of the small winning random number 27 table 202ew in the twenty-seventh control example will be described. This small hit random number 27 table 202ew, like the small hit random number 17 table 202qe in the above-described 17th control example, is a random number determined to be a small hit when a special symbol lottery is executed (first random number This is a data table that defines the value of the counter C1). As shown in FIG. 836 (c), in the twenty-seventh control example, the random number value (counter value) determined as a small hit is associated only with the second special symbol, and the value range is " 5 to 54”. Of the 1000 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 999" that can be taken by the first random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be small hits in the second special symbol lottery is "5 54”, the probability of winning a small prize in the second special symbol lottery is 1/20 (50/1000).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 836(d) and 837, details of the jackpot type selection 27 table 202bw in the twenty-seventh control example will be described. Although illustration is omitted, the jackpot type selection 27 table 202bw in the twenty-seventh control example includes a direct hit table 202bw1 and a small hit table 202bw1, which are referred to for specifying the jackpot type when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery. It comprises at least a V winning table 202bw2 that is referred to for specifying the jackpot type when winning a jackpot due to the occurrence of a V prize during execution of a winning game. First, with reference to FIG. 836(d), the details of the direct hit table 202bw1 will be described.

FIG. 836(d) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the direct hit table 202bw1 in the twenty-seventh control example. As shown in FIG. 836(d), in this direct hit table 202bw1, for each type of special symbol, the jackpot type that can be selected and the value range of the first hit type counter C2 are defined in association with each other. It is More specifically, as shown in FIG. 836(d), as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 corresponds to the range of "0 to 4", "jackpot A27". "Big win B27" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "5 to 99". "Jackpot A27" is a jackpot (12-round continuation rate S-rank jackpot) in which the number of rounds is set to 12 rounds and an S-rank time-saving state (rush) is set as a time-saving state after the end of the jackpot. In addition, "jackpot B27" is a jackpot (4-round continuation rate E-rank jackpot) in which the number of rounds is set to 4 and an E-rank time-saving state is set as a time-saving state after the end of the jackpot. Of the 100 random numbers "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, the random numbers associated with "jackpot A27" and "jackpot B27" are 5 and 95, respectively. , When the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the ratio of determining "jackpot A27" is 5% (5/100), and the percentage of determining "jackpot B27" is 95% (95/100). becomes. In other words, even if the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the jackpot type (jackpot B27) with the lowest number of rounds and the lowest continuation rate (rush rank) is determined, so the first special symbol The lottery is a lottery with a low degree of advantage for the player.

Also, as shown in FIG. 836 (d), as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 can take the entire range (range of "0 to 99"), "jackpot C27 ” are defined in association with each other. This "jackpot C27" is a jackpot (12-round continuation rate S-rank jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is set to 12 rounds and an S-rank time-reduction state (rush) is set as a time-reduction state after the end of the jackpot. In other words, when a big win is won in the second special symbol lottery, the jackpot type with the largest number of rounds and the highest continuation rate is always determined, so the second special symbol lottery is highly advantageous for the player. It is a lottery.

Next, with reference to FIG. 837, the details of the above V winning table 202bw2 will be described. FIG. 837 is a diagram showing the defined contents of this V-win table 202bw. As shown in FIG. 837, in this V winning table 202bw, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in association with 13 types of jackpot types, "jackpot D27" to "jackpot P27". there is

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 837, "jackpot D27" (12-round continuation rate S rank jackpot) is defined in association with the value "0" of the first hit type counter C2. "Jack E27" (12-round continuity rate A rank jackpot) is defined in association with the value of the hit type counter C2 in the range of "1 to 39", and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is set to "40 to 42” range is defined in association with “jackpot F27” (12-round continuity rate B rank jackpot), and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “43, 44” for the range of “jackpot G27" (12-round continuation rate C rank jackpot) is defined in association, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of '45 to 49', and 'jackpot H27' (12-round continuation rate D rank jackpot ) is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “50 to 52”, “jackpot I27” (8 round continuity rate A rank jackpot) is defined in correspondence, and the first The value of the hit type counter C2 is in the range of "53, 54", and the "jackpot J27" (8-round continuation rate B rank jackpot) is defined in correspondence, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "55 to 57” range is defined in association with “jackpot K27” (6-round continuation rate A rank jackpot), and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “58, 59” for the range of “jackpot L27" (6-round continuity rate B rank jackpot) is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "60 to 64", "jackpot M27" (4-round continuity rate A rank jackpot ) is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “65 to 69”, “jackpot N27” (4 round continuity rate B rank jackpot) is associated and defined, and the first The value of the hit type counter C2 is in the range of "70 to 79", and the "jackpot O27" (4 round continuity rate C rank jackpot) is defined in correspondence, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is set to "80 to 79". 99” is defined in association with “jackpot P27” (4-round continuation rate D-rank jackpot).

That is, of the 100 possible random numbers of the first hit type counter C2, the random number associated with the "jackpot D27" is one, and the random number associated with the "jackpot E27" is 39, 3 random numbers associated with "jackpot F27", 2 random numbers associated with "jackpot G27", and "jackpot H27" There are 5 random numbers, 3 random numbers associated with "jackpot I27", 2 random numbers associated with "jackpot J27", and "jackpot K27". The number of associated random numbers is 3, the number of random numbers associated with "jackpot L27" is 2, the number of random numbers associated with "jackpot M27" is 5, and the number of random numbers associated with "jackpot M27" is 5. There are 5 random numbers associated with the "jackpot N27", 10 random numbers associated with the "jackpot O27", and 20 random numbers associated with the "jackpot P27". is. Therefore, when a small win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol and a V prize is awarded, the percentage of determining the "jackpot D27" as the jackpot type is 1%, and the percentage of determining the "jackpot E27". 39%, the percentage of determining "jackpot F27" is 3%, the percentage of determining "jackpot G27" is 2%, the percentage of determining "jackpot H27" is 5%, The percentage of determining “jackpot I27” is 3%, the percentage of determining “jackpot J27” is 2%, the percentage of determining “jackpot K27” is 3%, and the percentage of “jackpot L27” is determined. The percentage of determination is 2%, the percentage of determination of "jackpot M27" is 5%, the percentage of determination of "jackpot N27" is 5%, and the percentage of determination of "jackpot O27" is 10%, and the rate at which the “jackpot P27” is determined is 20.

Thus, in the twenty-seventh control example, 13 types of jackpot types are provided as jackpot types determined when a V prize occurs in a small hit game, and combinations of the number of rounds and the rush continuation rate are diversified. Since it is crossed, when a small win is won in the lottery of the second special pattern in the time saving state and a V prize is generated, the big win type notified by the rank-up performance is predicted from the acquired number of the rank-up images RG. can be made difficult. Therefore, every time the effect of consuming the rank-up image RG is executed, the player can play the game while paying more attention to which rank, the bonus rank or the rush rank, is raised. Interest can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 838(a), details of the variation pattern 27 table 202dw in the twenty-seventh control example will be described. FIG. 838(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern 27 table 202dw in the twenty-seventh control example. As shown in FIG. 838(a), the variation pattern 27 table 202dw in the twenty-seventh control example is referenced to select a variation pattern (variation time) when a special symbol lottery is executed in a normal state. Normal table 202dw1, S rank table 202dw2 referred to for selecting a variation pattern (variation time) when special symbol lottery is executed in S rank rush (time saving state), A rank rush A table for A rank 202dw3 that is referenced to select a variation pattern (variation time) when a special symbol lottery is executed in (time saving state), and a special symbol lottery in B rank rush (time saving state) B rank table 202dw4 that is referenced to select a variation pattern (variation time) when executed, and a variation pattern (variation time ) and the S rank table 202dw5 referenced to select the D rank rush (time saving state) S referenced to select the variation pattern (variation time) when the special symbol lottery is executed A rank table 202dw6, an S rank table 202dw7 that is referenced to select a variation pattern (variation time) when a special symbol lottery is executed in an E rank rush (time saving state), and in a normal state, In addition, a table 202dw8 for one variation after the end of time saving, which is referred to for selecting a variation pattern (variation time) before the first lottery of the second special symbol is executed after the end of time saving, and in a normal state And to select a variation pattern (fluctuation time) from the end of the first lottery of the second special symbol after the end of the time saving to the execution of the fifth lottery of the second special symbol after the end of the time saving. It is composed of nine types of data tables, including a table 202dw9 for 2 to 5 fluctuations after the end of time saving, which is referred to. Of these, the normal table 202dw1 has the same defined contents as the normal state fluctuation pattern 12 table 202kd1 (see FIG. 414) in the above-described 17th control example (and 12th control example) (in the lottery for the first special symbol While the fluctuation time in the range of 7 seconds to 140 seconds is selected according to the lottery result, the regulation content that the fluctuation time of 600 seconds is always selected in the lottery of the second special symbol), so here A detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the details of the S rank table 202dw2 will be described with reference to FIG. 838(b). FIG. 838(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the S rank table 202dw2. As shown in FIG. 838(b), the S rank table 202dw2 defines a fixed variable time associated with both the first special symbol and the second special symbol regardless of the lottery result. It is Specifically, regarding the first special symbol, even if the lottery result is lost or a big hit, the fluctuation time is A 250000ms (250 seconds) variation pattern (missing long variation, winning long variation) is associated and defined. In addition, regarding the second special symbol, even if the lottery result is a loss or a big hit, the variation time is 10000 ms (10 Seconds) variation patterns (missing short variation, winning short variation) are defined in association with each other.

Due to these provisions, in the S-rank rush (time-saving state set after the end of the jackpot A27, C27, D27), every time the lottery of the first special symbol, which is disadvantageous (substantially low probability of winning), is executed While an extremely long variation time of 250 seconds is selected for the second special symbol lottery, a short variation time of 10 seconds is set compared to 250 seconds each time the advantageous second special symbol lottery is executed, so the first special It is possible to execute the lottery of the second special symbol which is advantageous (substantial winning probability is high) a plurality of times (around 25 times) during the long fluctuation time of the symbol. In other words, since the number of times of lottery of the second special symbols in the time saving state can be extremely increased, the degree of expectation for the big hit is increased until the lottery of the second special symbols of a specific number of times is executed after the time saving state and the time saving state are ended. Forms a very high state. Specifically, the rate (continuation rate) of winning a win (a jackpot or a small win that is substantially confirmed as a jackpot) in the S-rank rush is 99.7%. Therefore, when the S-rank rush is selected, the situation is almost the same as the next big win is decided, so when the S-rank time-saving state is set, the player's interest in the game is improved. can be made

Next, with reference to FIG. 839(a), details of the A rank table 202dw3 in the twenty-seventh control example will be described. As described above, the A rank table 202dw3 is a data table referred to when a special symbol lottery is executed in the time saving state (rush) of the A rank. As shown in FIG. 839 (a), in the A rank table 202dw3, as the variation pattern when the first special symbol is deviated, 6 types of variation patterns of deviated time-saving variation A to E and deviated long variation are defined. ing. Specifically, as a variation pattern when the first special symbol is out, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 139", and the variation time is 1000 ms (1 second). The value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in association with the range of "140 to 310", and the fluctuation time 3000 ms (3 seconds) is defined in association with the deviation B for short time fluctuation, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined. With respect to the range of "311 to 481", the fluctuation time of 5000 ms (5 seconds) is defined in association with the fluctuation C for short time fluctuation, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "482 to 742" , the fluctuation time 7000ms (7 seconds) off time-saving fluctuation D is defined in association, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "743 to 998", the fluctuation time is 10000ms (10 seconds) Outgoing time-saving fluctuation E is defined in correspondence, and outgoing long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 250000 ms (250 seconds) is defined in association with the value "999" of the fluctuation type counter CS1. On the other hand, as a variation pattern at the time of hitting the first special symbol, the variation time is 10000 ms (10 seconds ) is defined in association with the hit time-saving variation E. Moreover, regarding the variation time of the second special symbol, it is common to the S rank table 202dw2, and is set to 10 seconds regardless of the lottery result.

According to these provisions, if the first special symbol lottery is executed in the A rank rush and the probability is out of 199/200, the fluctuation time is 1 at a rate of 14.0% (140/1000). seconds, 17.1% (171/1000) set the variation time to 3 seconds, 17.1% (171/1000) set the variation time to 5 seconds, and set the variation time to 26.1 % (261/1000) set the variable time to 7 seconds, 25.6% (256/1000) set the variable time to 10 seconds, and 0.1% (1/10000) is set to 250 seconds. On the other hand, when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed and a jackpot with a probability of 1/200 is achieved, the variation time is always set to 10 seconds. When these are added up, the average value of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is 6.17 seconds, and the first end condition is satisfied (the 50th first special symbol lottery is executed after the time saving state is started. The average time until the For this reason, it is possible to execute the variable display of the second special symbol 30.2 times on average during the time saving state, so if the lottery of the second special symbol for the final judge effect is also taken into consideration, 35.2 times. A lottery for the second special symbol can be executed.

It should be noted that the B rank table 202dw4 to E rank table 202dw7 are different from the A rank table 202dw3 only in that the distribution of the time saving fluctuation A to the time saving fluctuation E is different. Therefore, the detailed description of the contents of the provisions is omitted, and with reference to FIG. Only the performance will be summarized and explained.

FIG. 840(b) is a diagram showing the rush performance of each rank. As shown in FIG. 840(b), in the S-rank rush in which the S-rank table 202dw2 is referred to, when the first special symbol lottery is executed, the fluctuation time is set for 250 seconds at a rate of 100%. Therefore, basically, the time saving state is ended by establishment of the second end condition (the condition that the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are executed 100 times in total). In the S rank rush, the variation time of the first special symbol is 250 seconds, and the variation time of the second special symbol is fixed at 10 seconds, so each special The number of fluctuations in the design is approximately 4 times for the first special design and 96 times for the second special design. Therefore, taking into account the lottery of the second special symbols for five times executable during the performance of the final judge, the lottery of the second special symbols can be executed 101 times before the final judge performance is finished. Therefore, the ratio of the occurrence of a big hit again before the final judge effect ends is 2.0% for the first special pattern (percentage of winning a 1/200 jackpot within 4 times) and 99% for the second special pattern. 7% (percentage of winning 11/200 jackpots or small wins in total within 101 times), and if the first special pattern and the second special pattern are added up, some hit will be won at a rate of 99.7%.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 840(b), in the A-rank rush in which the A-rank table 202dw3 is referred to, when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, the fluctuation of 1 second at a rate of 13.9% time was selected, 17% selected a variation time of 3 seconds, 17% selected a variation time of 5 seconds, 26% selected a variation time of 7 seconds, and 26% selected a variation time of 7 seconds. Since the A rank table 202dw3 is configured so that a variation time of 10 seconds is selected at a rate and a variation time of 250 seconds is selected at a rate of 0.1%, the average variation time of the first special symbol is 6.17 seconds, the average time until the 50th lottery of the first special symbol is executed (until the 49th fluctuation display of the first special symbol is completed) (that is, the first end condition is satisfied The average time to ) is 302.3 seconds (6.17 seconds x 49 times). Therefore, when the second special symbol lottery for five times that can be executed during the final judge production is also taken into account, the average number of times is 35.2 times (302.3 seconds / 10 seconds + 5 times) before the final judge production ends. Since it is possible to execute the lottery of 2 special symbols, the ratio of the occurrence of a big hit again by the time the final judge effect ends is 22.2% for the first special symbol (1/200 jackpot won within 50 times). ), the second special pattern is 86.4% (percentage of winning a total of 11/200 jackpots or small hits within 35.2 times), and when the first special pattern and the second special pattern are combined, 89 .4% chance of winning something.

Further, as shown in FIG. 840 (b), in the B rank rush in which the B rank table 202dw4 is referred to, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, the fluctuation of 1 second at a rate of 53.9% time was selected, 10% selected a variation time of 3 seconds, 10% selected a variation time of 5 seconds, 13% selected a variation time of 7 seconds, and 13% selected a variation time of 5 seconds. Since the B rank table 202dw4 is configured so that a variation time of 10 seconds is selected at a rate and a variation time of 250 seconds is selected at a rate of 0.1%, the average variation time of the first special symbol is 3.8 seconds, the average time until the 50th lottery of the first special symbol is executed (until the 49th fluctuation display of the first special symbol is completed) (that is, the first end condition is satisfied The average time to ) is 186.2 seconds (3.8 seconds x 49 times). Therefore, if the lottery of the second special symbols for five times that can be executed during the final judge production is also taken into account, the average number of 23.6 times (186.2 seconds / 10 seconds + 5 times) is Since it is possible to execute the lottery of 2 special symbols, the ratio of the occurrence of a big hit again by the time the final judge effect ends is 22.2% for the first special symbol (1/200 jackpot won within 50 times). ), the second special symbol is 73.7% (percentage of winning a total of 11/200 jackpots or small wins within 23.6 times), and when the first and second special symbols are combined, 79 .5% chance of winning something.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 840(b), in the C-rank rush in which the C-rank table 202dw5 is referred to, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, the fluctuation of 1 second at a rate of 65.9% time was selected, 7% selected a variation time of 3 seconds, 7% selected a variation time of 5 seconds, 10% selected a variation time of 7 seconds, 10% Since the C rank table 202dw5 is configured so that a variation time of 10 seconds is selected at a rate and a variation time of 250 seconds is selected at a rate of 0.1%, the average variation time of the first special symbol is 3.17 seconds, the average time until the 50th lottery of the 1st special symbol is executed (until the 49th variation display of the 1st special symbol ends) (that is, the first end condition is satisfied The average time until ) is 155.3 seconds (3.17 seconds x 49 times). Therefore, taking into account the lottery of the second special symbols for five times that can be executed during the final judge production, an average of 20.5 times (155.3 seconds / 10 seconds + 5 times) by the time the final judge production ends Since it is possible to execute the lottery of 2 special symbols, the ratio of the occurrence of a big hit again by the time the final judge effect ends is 22.2% for the first special symbol (1/200 jackpot won within 50 times). ), the second special pattern is 68.7% (percentage of winning a total of 11/200 jackpots or small hits within 20.5 times), and when the first and second special patterns are combined, 75 .6% chance of winning something.

Further, as shown in FIG. 840(b), in the D rank rush in which the D rank table 202dw6 is referred to, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, the fluctuation of 1 second at a rate of 85.9% 3% selected a variation time of 3 seconds, 3% selected a variation time of 5 seconds, 4% selected a variation time of 7 seconds, and 4% selected a variation time of 7 seconds. Since the D rank table 202dw6 is configured so that a variation time of 10 seconds is selected at a rate and a variation time of 250 seconds is selected at a rate of 0.1%, the average variation time of the first special symbol is 2.03 seconds, the average time until the 50th lottery of the first special symbol is executed (until the 49th variation display of the first special symbol is completed) (that is, the first end condition is satisfied The average time to ) is 99.4 seconds (2.03 seconds x 49 times). Therefore, taking into account the lottery of the second special symbols for five times that can be executed during the final judge production, an average of 14.9 times (99.4 seconds / 10 seconds + 5 times) by the time the final judge production ends Since it is possible to execute the lottery of 2 special symbols, the ratio of the occurrence of a big hit again by the time the final judge effect ends is 22.2% for the first special symbol (1/200 jackpot won within 50 times). ), the second special symbol is 57.1% (percentage of winning a total of 11/200 jackpots or small wins within 14.9 times), and when the first and second special symbols are combined, 66 .6% chance of winning something.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 840(b), in the E-rank rush in which the E-rank table 202dw7 is referred to, when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, the fluctuation of 1 second at a rate of 98.9% Time is selected, 0.5% selects a variation time of 3 seconds, 0.5% selects a variation time of 5 seconds, 0.5% selects a variation time of 7 seconds The E rank table 202dw7 is configured so that a variation time of 10 seconds is selected at a rate of 0.5% and a variation time of 250 seconds is selected at a rate of 0.1%. The average variation time of 1 special symbol is 1.36 seconds, and the average time until the 50th lottery of the 1st special symbol is executed (until the 49th variation display of the 1st special symbol is completed) (that is, The average time until the first end condition is satisfied is 66.8 seconds (1.36 seconds×49 times). Therefore, taking into account the lottery of the second special symbols for five times that can be executed during the final judge production, an average of 11.7 times (66.8 seconds / 10 seconds + 5 times) by the time the final judge production ends Since it is possible to execute the lottery of 2 special symbols, the ratio of the occurrence of a big hit again by the time the final judge effect ends is 22.2% for the first special symbol (1/200 jackpot won within 50 times). ratio), the second special symbol is 48.4% (percentage of winning a total of 11/200 jackpots or small wins within 11.7 times), and when the first and second special symbols are combined, 59 .8% chance of winning something.

Thus, in the twenty-seventh control example, by differentiating the variation pattern table to be referred to during the time saving state for each type of rush (time saving state) (jackpot type that triggered the setting of the time saving state), the first The selection ratio of each variable time when the special symbol is out is made different, and the average time until the time saving state ends is made different for each rush type. In other words, by varying the average value of the number of times of the second special symbol lottery that can be executed by the end of the rush (time saving state) for each rush type, some kind of hit (jackpot or The percentage of winning a small hit (rush continuation rate) is made different for each type of rush. As a result, it is possible to realize a plurality of rushes with different performances, so that the playability can be varied according to the type of rush. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

It should be noted that the ratio of winning some kind of hit until the end of the rush for each rank shown in FIG. 840(b), the ratio shown in FIG. That is, if left-handed hitting is continued, it becomes impossible (difficult) to enter the game ball into either the right first ball entrance 64r or the second right ball entrance 640, and the lottery for the special symbols is almost the first. A lottery for the first special symbol based on the entry of the ball into the entry hole 64 is made. Therefore, since the time-saving state is terminated based on the establishment of the first termination condition, the degree of expectation for a jackpot is 22.2% (percentage of winning a jackpot of 1/200 within 50 times) regardless of the rank. becomes. That is, compared to the case of hitting right, the game method is disadvantageous in that a jackpot can be won only at a very low rate.

Returning to FIG. 839, the description of the variation pattern 27 table 202dw is continued. FIG. 839(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the table 202dw8 for one change after the end of time saving. As described above, the table 202dw8 for one fluctuation after the end of time saving is a data table that is referred to in the normal state until the first lottery for the second special symbol is executed after the end of time saving. As shown in Figure 839 (b), when the table 202dw8 for 1 fluctuation after the end of this time saving is referred to, regardless of the type of special symbol and the lottery result, data so that the fluctuation time is fixed to 30 seconds is stipulated. That is, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is lost in the lottery, the variation time of 30 seconds is always selected and the middle variation is selected, and the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. In this case, the medium variation with a variation time of 30 seconds is always selected. As a result, when the second special symbol lottery is executed for the first time after the end of the time saving state, the fluctuation time of 30 seconds can be set without fail, so that the player is prompted to hit the right hand (Fig. 833) (a)) and the effect period for finding the door TG and using the first key (see FIG. 833(b)). can be done.

In addition, although omitted for illustration, in the normal state, and after the first lottery of the second special symbol after the end of the time saving ends until the fifth time the second special symbol lottery after the end of the time saving is executed In the table 202dw9 for 2 to 5 fluctuations after the end of time reduction, which is referred to for selecting a fluctuation pattern (variation time) during the period, the fluctuation time of the first special design is fixed for 30 seconds, and the fluctuation time of the second special design is fixed. The data are defined so that is fixed for 10 seconds. As a result, it is possible to secure an effect period for reliably executing the effect indicating whether or not the door TG can be broken through every time the reserved ball of the second special symbol is digested.

Next, with reference to FIG. 840(a), details of the normal state fluctuation pattern scenario table 202wa in the twenty-seventh control example will be described. This normal state variation pattern scenario table 202wa defines a variation pattern table to be referred to when a special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state for each number of variations of the second special symbol after the normal state is set. Data table. FIG. 840(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of this normal state fluctuation pattern scenario table 202wa.

As shown in FIG. 840 (a), the normal state for the variation pattern scenario table 202wa, any of the jackpot A27 ~ P27 ends, and as a variation pattern scenario after the time saving state ends, to the normal state A table 202dw8 for 1 fluctuation after the end of time saving is defined in correspondence with the period in which the number of times of lottery of the second special symbol after the shift is up to 1 time, and the number of times of lottery of the second special symbol is 2 times to 5 times. For the period, the table 202dw9 for 2 to 5 fluctuations after the end of the time saving is defined in correspondence, and the normal table 202dw1 is defined in association with the range where the number of lotteries of the second special symbol is 6 times or more. It is On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 840(a), the normal state (perfectly In the state where no prize is won), a scenario is set that is defined in association with the normal table 202dw1 regardless of the number of lotteries.

By selecting a variation pattern with reference to this normal state variation pattern scenario table 202wa, the variation time is longer than normal (600 seconds) only for the first to fifth second special symbol lotteries after the end of the time saving state. Since it can be shortened, it is possible to form a period in which the lottery for the second special symbol is likely to be executed immediately after the end of the time saving state, and to execute the final judge presentation. Therefore, even if the time-saving state ends, an advantageous state can be formed in which the lottery for the second special symbol with a high degree of expectation is executed a plurality of times, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 835(b), details of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the twenty-seventh control example will be described. FIG. 835(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the twenty-seventh control example. As shown in FIG. 835(b), the RAM 203 in the twenty-seventh control example is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the seventeenth control example described above (see FIG. The difference is that a counter 203wb, a special figure 2 variation counter 203wc, a small hit flag 203we, and a winning state storage area 203wf are added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the 17th control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

The rush type storage area 203wa is a storage area for storing information indicating the rush type. The initial value of this rush type storage area 203wa is set to "00H", and data indicating the rush type corresponding to the current jackpot type is stored at the end of the jackpot (at the time of transition to the rush) (Y11631 in FIG. 855). reference). More specifically, if the current rush is an S-rank rush, "01H" is stored in the rush type storage area 203wa, if an A-rank rush, "02H" is stored, and if a B-rank rush, "02H" is stored. If there is, "03H" is stored, if there is a C-rank crash, "04H" is stored, if there is a D-rank crash, "05H" is stored, and if there is an E-rank crash, "06H" is stored. On the other hand, the stored data is set to "00H" in a state other than the rush (normal state or during execution of a jackpot game). The rush type (time saving state type) is determined by the data stored in the rush type storage area 203wa, and the rush type (time saving type) is determined each time the lottery condition for the first special symbol is satisfied during the time saving state. A variation time (variation pattern) can be selected by reading a variation pattern corresponding to . Therefore, it is possible to reliably form a plurality of time saving states with different continuation rates.

Special figure 1 fluctuation counter 203wb is a counter for counting the number of lotteries of the first special symbol executed after the normal state or time saving state is set, and the second fluctuation counter 203wc is normal state or It is a counter for counting the number of lotteries of the first special symbols executed after the time saving state is set. In the normal state, one variation pattern table is identified from the normal state variation pattern scenario table 202wa by referring to the values of the special figure 1 variation counter 203wb and the special figure 2 variation counter 203wc.

The small hit flag 203we is a flag that is set to ON when the second special symbol lottery results in a small hit (see Y8061 in FIG. 850). This small hit flag 203we is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the small hit of the second special symbol (see Y971 in FIG. 854). While the small hit flag 203we is on and the variation display of the first special symbol is being executed, when the variation time of the variation display of the second special symbol ends, the first special symbol is removed and the symbol is forcibly stopped. 854 (see Y958 in FIG. 854). As a result, when the lottery for the first special symbol becomes a big win and the lottery for the second special symbol becomes a small win, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the small win and the big win are started at the same time. In addition, the win state storage area 203wf is a storage area for storing data indicating the game state when the big win is won.

Next, with reference to FIG. 841(a), details of the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the twenty-seventh control example will be described. FIG. 841(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the twenty-seventh control example. As shown in FIG. 841(a), the ROM 222 in the twenty-seventh control example has the configuration of the ROM 222 in the above-described seventeenth control example (and the seventh control example) (see FIG. The only difference is that the notification mode selection table 222fa is deleted and a rank-up effect table 222wa and a rank-up determination table 222wb are added. Other configurations are the same as those of the 17th control example (and the 7th control example) described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

FIG. 842(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the rank-up effect table 222wa described above. The rank-up effect table 222wa is a data table that defines the number of times the effect of acquiring the rank-up image RG occurs in the rank-up effect for each jackpot type. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 842(a), the jackpot A27 (12-round continuation rate S rank jackpot) is defined in association with the number of acquisitions of the rank-up image RG 5 times, and the jackpot B27 (4 The number of acquisition times 0 is defined in association with the round continuation rate E rank jackpot), jackpots C27, D27 (12 round continuation rate S rank jackpot), jackpot E27 (12 round continuation rate A rank jackpot), jackpot F27. (12-round continuation rate B rank jackpot), 5 wins are defined in association with the jackpot G27 (12-round continuation rate C rank jackpot), and for the jackpot H27 (12-round continuation rate D rank jackpot) , 4 acquisition times are defined in association with jackpot I27 (8-round continuity rate A rank jackpot), jackpot J27 (8-round continuity rate B-rank jackpot), and jackpot K27 (6-round continuity rate A rank jackpot). , the number of acquisitions of 5 times is defined in correspondence, and the number of acquisitions of 4 times is defined in association with the jackpot L27 (6-round continuation rate B rank jackpot) and the jackpot M27 (4-round continuation rate A rank jackpot), The number of wins of 3 times is defined in association with the jackpot N27 (continuation rate of 4 rounds B rank jackpot), and the number of times of acquisition of 2 times is defined in correspondence with the jackpot O27 (continuation rate of 4 rounds C rank jackpot). , and the number of wins of 1 is defined in association with the jackpot P27 (4-round continuation rate D rank jackpot).

In this way, by providing variations in the number of acquisitions of the rank-up image RG according to the type of jackpot, it is possible to diversify the mode of presentation, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, there are jackpot types with a number of ranks exceeding 5 ranks due to the rank-up effect (for example, jackpots A27, C27, and D27 rise by 8 ranks, jackpot E27 rises by 7 ranks, and jackpot F27 rises by 6 ranks). Nevertheless, by setting the upper limit of the number of acquisition times of the rank-up image RG to 5 times, it is made impossible to specify the type of jackpot by the number of times of acquisition of the rank-up image RG, and each rank is determined in the rank-up effect. It is possible to make the player perform the game while paying more attention to whether the player will rise to the rank. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

Next, the details of the rank-up determination table 222wb will be described with reference to FIG. 842(b). This rank-up determination table 222wb is a data table referred to when determining whether or not the rank-up effect (see FIG. 832) can be executed in the time saving state (rush). FIG. 842(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the rank-up determination table 222wb. As shown in FIG. 842(b), the rank-up determination table 222wb stores the remaining time on the display (the time indicated by the timer value of the guaranteed time timer 223wc) and the surplus time with respect to the minimum guaranteed time (surplus time storage area 223wd). The corresponding rank is defined in association with each range of values of the sum (T) with the time indicated by the data. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 842(b), the S rank is defined in association with the range where T is 850 seconds or more, and the range where T is 302.3 seconds or more and less than 850 seconds A rank is defined in correspondence, T is 186.2 seconds or more and B rank is defined in the range of less than 302.3 seconds, T is 155.3 seconds or more and less than 186.2 seconds C rank is defined in association with the range, D rank is defined in association with the range where T is 99.4 seconds or more and less than 155.3 seconds, and T is defined in the range of less than 99.4 seconds The E rank is defined in association with this.

In the twenty-seventh control example, the sum (T) of the value of the guaranteed time timer 223wc and the time indicated by the data in the surplus time storage area 223wd is calculated each time the second special symbol lottery is executed in the time saving state. , the rank corresponding to the calculated time T is identified by referring to the rank-up determination table 222wb. Then, when the identified rank is higher than the currently set rank, a rank-up effect (see FIG. 832) is executed. In other words, if a long variable time continues to be fortunately selected in the lottery of the first special symbol, there is a situation in which surplus time corresponding to a higher rank than the rank of the reduced working hours state that is actually set occurs. In such a case, an effect to rank up to the higher rank is executed. By configuring in this manner, the rush rank can be suitably updated in accordance with the game situation of the player (variation time selection situation), so that the effect mode can be suitably set. In addition, even if a low rank is reported, it is possible to expect the occurrence of a rank-up effect (see FIG. 832). can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 841(b), the details of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the twenty-seventh control example will be described. FIG. 841(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in the twenty-seventh control example. As shown in FIG. 841(b), the RAM 223 in the twenty-seventh control example has a winning type storage area 223wa and a rank-up count counter 223wb in comparison with the configuration of the RAM 223 in the seventeenth control example described above (see FIG. 558). , and a guaranteed time timer 223wc and a surplus time storage area 223wd are added. Another difference is that the add-on RUSH counter 223qa, the base number counter 223qb, and the add-on number counter 223qc are deleted.

The hit type storage area 223wa is a storage area for storing information indicating the jackpot type. Various information on the big win and during the rush is displayed according to the data stored in the win type storage area 223wa. For example, the ranks corresponding to the data stored in the win type storage area 223wa are notified as the bonus rank and the rush rank finally notified in the rank-up effect. Moreover, after shifting to the time saving state, the rush rank corresponding to the data stored in the hit type storage area 223wa is displayed.

The rank-up number counter 223wb is a counter in which a counter value indicating the remaining number of rank-up occurrences in the rank-up effect is set. The initial value of the rank-up frequency counter 223wb is set to 0, and when the jackpot starts, the rank-up frequency corresponding to the jackpot type is specified from the rank-up performance table 222wa, and the specified rank-up frequency is set. (S4761 in FIG. 859). In addition, the value is decremented by 1 and updated every time a rank-up effect is set in the rank-up effect (see S5422 in FIG. 856). By managing the number of times of rank-up by means of this rank-up number counter 223wb, it is possible to reliably generate the number of times of rank-up corresponding to the jackpot type.

Guaranteed time timer 223wc is a timer in which the minimum guaranteed period (displayed period) is set as the period until the time saving state ends. In this guarantee time timer 223wc, a timer value corresponding to 49 seconds (shortest variation time of the first special symbol 1 second x 49 times) is set when the first lottery of the first special symbol is executed in the time saving state. (see S9703A in FIG. 860), and the timer value is decremented as time elapses (see S21043 in FIG. 858). Further, when the remaining time added effect (see FIG. 831) is executed, the timer value corresponding to the number of seconds notified by the remaining time added effect is added.

The surplus time storage area 223wd is a storage area for storing data indicating deviation from the guaranteed time. Here, as described above, after entering the time saving state, the first guaranteed time displayed is the time (49 seconds) when it is assumed that the lottery of the first special symbols is all set to 1 second, which is the shortest variation time. is set. Therefore, if a variation time longer than 1 second is selected as the variation time of the first special symbol, the end timing of the actual time saving state is shifted (extended) with respect to the guaranteed time. In the twenty-seventh control example, every time the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, the deviation time from the shortest variation time of 1 second is added to the surplus time storage area 223wd (S9704A in FIG. 860). See), when the deviation is accumulated over a predetermined amount, the configuration is such that an effect for adding the remaining time (remaining time adding effect) is executed with a predetermined trigger. As a result, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the time-saving state does not know how long it will last. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the twenty-seventh control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the twenty-seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 843 to 855. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 843, details of the first special symbol variation start process 27 (Y261) in the twenty-seventh control example will be described. FIG. 843 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation start process 27 (Y261) in the twenty-seventh control example. This first special symbol variation start process 27 (Y261) is a process executed in place of the first special symbol variation start process 17 (see FIG. 560) in the seventeenth control example described above, and the first special symbol variation start process. Like the process 17 (see FIG. 560), it is a process for executing the lottery for the first special symbol and starting the variable display according to the lottery result.

Of the first special symbol variation start processing 27 (see FIG. 843) in the twenty-seventh control example, in each of the processes Y302 to Y306, the first special symbol variation start processing 17 (see FIG. 560) in the seventeenth control example The same processing as each of Y302 to Y306 is executed. Also, in the first special symbol variation start process 27 (see FIG. 843) in the twenty-seventh control example, when the process of S306 ends, instead of the first special symbol determination process 17 (see FIG. 561) in the seventeenth control example The first special symbol determination process 27 (Y341) is executed, and then the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 27 is executed instead of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 17 (see FIG. 563) in the seventeenth control example. (Y342). Next, instead of the game state update process 12 (see FIG. 422) in the seventeenth control example (and the twelfth control example), the first special symbol game state update process is executed (Y343), and this process ends. For details of these first special symbol determination processing 27 (Y341), first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 27 (Y342), and first special symbol game state update processing (Y343), see FIGS. and FIG. 846 below.

Next, with reference to FIG. 844, details of the first special symbol determination process 27 (Y341) will be described. FIG. 844 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol determination process 27 (Y341). This first special symbol determination process 27 (Y341) is a process executed instead of the first special symbol determination process 17 (see FIG. 561) in the seventeenth control example described above, and the first special symbol determination process 17 ( Figure 561 reference), it is the processing in order to execute the big hit decision of the 1st special design.

Among the first special symbol determination processing 27 (see FIG. 844) in the twenty-seventh control example, in each of the processes Y8001 to Y8006 and Y8011, the first special symbol determination processing 17 in the seventeenth control example (see FIG. 561) , Y8001 to Y8006, and Y8011 are executed. In addition, in the first special symbol determination process 27 (see FIG. 844) in the twenty-seventh control example, in the process of Y8003, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is not a big hit (Y8003: No), The first special symbol is set to the first symbol display device 37 (Y8021), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 845, details of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 27 (Y342) described above will be described. FIG. 845 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 27 (Y342). This first special symbol variation pattern selection process 27 (Y342) is a process executed instead of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 17 (see FIG. 563) in the seventeenth control example described above, and is the first special symbol. Similar to the variation pattern selection process 17 (see FIG. 563), it is a process for selecting the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol according to the lottery result of the first special symbol.

Of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 27 (see FIG. 845) in the twenty-seventh control example, in each process of Y501 to Y503, Y505 to Y508, and Y512, the first special symbol variation pattern in the seventeenth control example The same processes as Y501 to Y503, Y505 to Y508, and Y512 of selection process 17 (see FIG. 563) are executed. In addition, in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 27 (see FIG. 845) in the twenty-seventh control example, when the process of Y503 is completed, then the counter value of the first counter 203h1 during time saving is greater than 0 (1 or more value) (Y531), and if it is determined to be a value greater than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (Y531: Yes), the data stored in the rush type storage area 203wa is A variation pattern table corresponding to the indicated rush type (rush rank) is specified (Y532), and the process proceeds to Y512. On the other hand, in the process of Y531, when it is determined that the counter value of the first counter 203h1 during time saving is 0 (Y531: No), the value of the normal state variation pattern scenario table 202wa and the special figure 1 variation counter 203wb , and the corresponding variation pattern table is identified (Y533), and the process proceeds to Y512.

Next, with reference to FIG. 846, details of the special figure 1 game state update process (Y343) described above will be described. Figure 846 is a flow chart showing this special figure 1 game state update process (Y343). This special figure 1 game state update process (Y343) is a process executed instead of the game state update process 12 (see FIG. 422) in the seventeenth control example (and the twelfth control example), and the game state update process 12 (Refer to FIG. 422) Similarly, it is a process for determining whether the end condition of the time saving state has been established and shifting to the normal state when the end condition is established.

In this special figure 1 game state update process (see FIG. 846), first, add 1 to the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation counter 203wb and update (Y611), then the counter value of the first counter 203h1 during time saving It is determined whether or not the value is greater than 0 (value equal to or greater than 1) (Y612). In the process of Y612, if it is determined that the value of the first counter 203h1 during time saving is 0 (Y612: No), it means that it is not in the time saving state (normal state), so this process is terminated as it is. . On the other hand, in the process of Y612, if it is determined that the value of the first counter 203h1 during time saving is a value greater than 0 (value of 1 or more) (Y612: Yes), it means that the current time is a time saving state Then, the values of the first counter 203h1 during time saving and the second counter 203h2 during time saving are updated by subtracting 1 (Y613), and the values of the first counter 203h1 during time saving after updating and the second counter 203h2 during time saving (Y614).

When the process of Y614 is completed, it is then determined whether or not at least one of the counter values has been updated to 0 by the process of Y613 (Y615). This process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that at least one counter value has been updated to 0 in the process of Y615 (Y615: Yes), the state command indicating the transition to the normal state is set (Y616), and the first counter 203h1 during time saving , the second counter 203h2 during time saving, and the data of the rush type storage area 203wa are all cleared to 0 (Y617). Then, the value of the special figure 1 variation counter 203wb and the special figure 2 variation counter 203wc is reset to 1 (Y618), and the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 847, details of the first special symbol variation stop process 27 (Y262) in the twenty-seventh control example will be described. This first special symbol variation stop process 27 (Y262) is a process executed in place of the first special symbol variation stop process 17 (see FIG. 565) in the seventeenth control example described above, and the first special symbol variation stop process. Similar to processing 17 (see FIG. 565), this processing is for setting the stop display of the first special symbol when the variation time of the first special symbol has elapsed.

Of the first special symbol variation stop processing 27 (see FIG. 847) in the twenty-seventh control example, in each process of Y701, Y704 to Y707, Y721, and Y723 to Y726, the first special symbol variation in the seventeenth control example The same processes as Y701, Y704 to Y707, Y721, and Y723 to Y726 of stop process 17 (see FIG. 565) are executed. In addition, in the first special symbol variation stop processing 27 (see FIG. 847) in the twenty-seventh control example, when it is determined that the jackpot flag 203gb corresponding to the first special symbol is not ON in the processing of Y721 (Y721: No ), the special figure 1 confirmation command is set (Y732), the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is deviated and the variation is stopped by the symbol (Y733), and this processing is finished.

In addition, in the first special symbol variation stop process 27 (see FIG. 847) in the twenty-seventh control example, instead of the process of Y727, the jackpot flag 203gb corresponding to the first special symbol, the first counter 203h1 during time saving, and the time saving A process of resetting all the middle second counters 203h2 to initial values is executed (Y731), and the process proceeds to Y704.

Next, with reference to FIG. 848, details of the second special symbol variation start process 27 (Y263) in the twenty-seventh control example will be described. This second special symbol variation start process 27 (Y263) is a process executed instead of the second special symbol variation start process 17 (see FIG. 567) in the seventeenth control example described above, and the second special symbol variation start process Like the process 17 (see FIG. 567), it is a process for executing the lottery for the second special symbol and starting the variable display according to the lottery result.

Of the second special symbol variation start processing 27 (see FIG. 848) in the twenty-seventh control example, in each of the processes Y832 to Y836, Y851, and Y852, the second special symbol variation start processing 17 in the seventeenth control example ( 567) are executed. Also, in the second special symbol variation start process 27 (see FIG. 848) in the twenty-seventh control example, when the process of S836 ends, instead of the second special symbol determination process 17 (see FIG. 568) in the seventeenth control example The second special symbol determination process 27 (Y861) is executed, and then the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 27 is executed instead of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 17 (see FIG. 570) in the seventeenth control example. (Y862). Then, instead of the game state update process 12 (see FIG. 422) in the seventeenth control example (and the twelfth control example), the special figure 2 game state update process is executed (Y863), and this process ends. For details of these second special symbol determination processing 27 (Y861), second special symbol variation pattern selection processing 27 (Y862), and special figure 2 game state update processing (Y863), see FIGS. 849, 851, and This will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 849, details of the second special symbol determination process 27 (Y861) in the twenty-seventh control example will be described. FIG. 849 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol determination process 27 (Y861). This second special symbol determination process 27 (Y861) is a process executed in place of the second special symbol determination process 17 (see FIG. 568) in the seventeenth control example described above, and the second special symbol determination process 17 ( Figure 568 reference), it is the processing in order to execute the big hit decision of the 2nd special design.

Of the second special symbol determination processing 27 (see FIG. 849) in the twenty-seventh control example, in each of the processes Y8101 to Y8106 and Y8111, the second special symbol determination processing 17 in the seventeenth control example (see FIG. 568) , Y8101 to Y8106, and Y8111 are executed. In addition, in the second special symbol determination process 27 (see FIG. 849) in the twenty-seventh control example, in the process of Y8103, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a big hit (Y8103: No), A small winning lottery process 27 for lottery for the presence or absence of a small winning lottery is executed (Y8121), and this process ends. The details of this small winning lottery process will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 850 is a flow chart showing the small winning lottery process 27 (Y8121) in the twenty-seventh control example. In this small hit lottery process 27 (Y8121), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol this time is a small hit (Y8053), and if it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit ( Y8053: Yes), small hit flag 203we is set to ON (Y8061). When the process of Y8061 is finished, then, the lottery result of the second special design is set to the small hit (Y8062), and the small hit design of the second special design to be displayed on the first design display device 37 is set (Y8063). , the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of Y8053, if it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol this time is not a small hit (completely lost) (Y8053: No), the second symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 A special symbol is set (Y8064), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 851, the details of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 27 (Y862) described above will be described. FIG. 851 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 27 (Y862). This second special symbol variation pattern selection process 27 (Y862) is a process executed instead of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 17 (see FIG. 570) in the seventeenth control example described above, and is the second special symbol. Similar to the variation pattern selection process 17 (see FIG. 570), it is a process for selecting the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol according to the lottery result of the second special symbol.

Of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 27 (see FIG. 851) in the twenty-seventh control example, in each process of Y921 to Y923 and Y925 to Y928, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process in the seventeenth control example 17 (see FIG. 570) of Y921 to Y923 and Y925 to Y928. In addition, in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 27 (see FIG. 851) in the twenty-seventh control example, when the process of Y923 is completed, then the counter value of the second counter 203h2 during time saving is greater than 0 (1 or more value) (Y941), and if it is determined to be a value greater than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (Y941: Yes), the data stored in the rush type storage area 203wa A variation pattern table corresponding to the indicated rush type (rush rank) is identified (Y942), and the process proceeds to Y944. On the other hand, in the process of Y941, when it is determined that the counter value of the second counter 203h2 during time saving is 0 (Y941: No), the value of the normal state variation pattern scenario table 202wa and the special figure 2 variation counter 203wc , and the corresponding variation pattern table is identified (Y943), and the process proceeds to Y944. In the process of Y944, the variation pattern table specified in the process of Y942 or Y943 is read (Y944), and the process proceeds to Y925.

Next, with reference to FIG. 852, details of the above-described special figure 2 game state update process (Y863) will be described. Figure 852 is a flow chart showing this special figure 2 game state update process (Y863). This special figure 2 game state update process (Y863) is a process executed instead of the game state update process 12 (see FIG. 422) in the seventeenth control example (and the twelfth control example), and the game state update process 12 (Refer to FIG. 422) Similarly, it is a process for determining whether the end condition of the time saving state has been established and shifting to the normal state when the end condition is established.

In this special figure 2 game state update process (see FIG. 852), first, 1 is added to the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203wc and updated (Y621), then the counter value of the second counter 203h1 during time saving It is determined whether or not the value is greater than 0 (value equal to or greater than 1) (Y622). In the process of Y622, if it is determined that the value of the second counter 203h2 during time saving is 0 (Y622: No), it means that it is not in the time saving state (it is in the normal state), so this process is terminated as it is. . On the other hand, in the process of Y622, if it is determined that the value of the second counter 203h2 during time saving is a value greater than 0 (value of 1 or more) (Y622: Yes), it means that the current time is a time saving state Then, the value of the second counter 203h2 during time saving is updated by subtracting 1 (Y623), and the remaining time saving command indicating the value of the second counter 203h2 during time saving after updating is set (Y624).

When the process of Y624 is completed, it is then determined whether or not at least one of the counter values has been updated to 0 by the process of Y623 (Y625). This process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that at least one of the counter values has been updated to 0 in the process of Y625 (Y625: Yes), the state command indicating the transition to the normal state is set (Y626), and the first counter 203h1 during time saving , the second counter 203h2 during time saving, and the data of the rush type storage area 203wa are all cleared to 0 (Y627). Then, the value of the special figure 1 variation counter 203wb and the special figure 2 variation counter 203wc is reset to 1 (Y628), and the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 853, the details of the second special symbol variation stop process 27 (Y264) in the twenty-seventh control example will be described. This second special symbol variation stop process 27 (Y264) is a process executed in place of the second special symbol variation stop process 17 (see FIG. 571) in the seventeenth control example described above, and is a second special symbol variation stop process. Similar to the process 17 (see FIG. 571), this is a process for setting the stop display of the first special symbol when the variation time of the second special symbol has elapsed.

Of the second special symbol variation stop processing 27 (see FIG. 853) in the twenty-seventh control example, in each of Y1101, Y1102, Y1104, Y1105, Y1106, Y1108, Y1109, Y1110, and Y1111, each of the seventeenth control example The same processes as Y901, Y921, Y922, Y923, Y924, Y925, Y906, Y908, and Y909 of the second special symbol variation stop process 17 (see FIG. 571) are executed. In addition, in the second special symbol variation stop processing 27 (see FIG. 853) in the twenty-seventh control example, when it is determined that the jackpot flag 203gb corresponding to the second special symbol is not ON in the processing of Y1102 (Y1102: No ), the special figure 2 deviating stop processing 27 for stopping and displaying the deviating symbol of the second special symbol is executed (Y1103), and this processing is terminated. The details of this special figure 2 out stop processing 27 (Y1103) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In addition, in the second special symbol variation stop processing 27 (see FIG. 853) in the twenty-seventh control example, instead of the processing of Y925, the jackpot flag 203gb corresponding to the second special symbol, the first counter 203h1 during time saving, and the time saving A process of resetting all the middle second counters 203h2 to initial values is executed (Y1107), and the process proceeds to Y1108.

Next, with reference to FIG. 854, the details of the special figure 2 deviating stop processing 27 (Y1103) in the twenty-seventh control example will be described. FIG. 854 is a flow chart showing this special figure 2 deviating stop processing 27 (Y1103). This special figure 2 out stop processing 27 (Y1103) is similar to the special figure 2 out stop processing (see FIG. 573) in the above-described 17th control example, the lottery result of the second special symbol is out (completely out or small hit ), this is a process for setting a stop symbol.

Of the special figure 2 deviating stop processing 27 (see FIG. 854) in this 27th control example, in each process of Y952 to Y958, Y960, and Y961, the special figure 2 deviating stop processing in the 17th control example (see FIG. 573 ), Y952 to Y958, Y960, and Y961 are executed. In addition, when the special figure 2 out stop processing 27 (see FIG. 854) in the 27th control example is started, first, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 203we is on (Y971), and it is on If so (Y971), the process proceeds to Y952, while if it is determined to be off (Y971: No), the process proceeds to Y960. In addition, in the special figure 2 deviating stop processing 27 (see FIG. 854) in the twenty-seventh control example, when the processing of Y958 ends, the small hit flag 203we is set to OFF (Y972), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 855, the details of the jackpot control process 27 (Y1011) in the twenty-seventh control example will be described. FIG. 855 is a flow chart showing the jackpot control process 27 (Y1011) in the twenty-seventh control example. This jackpot control process 27 (Y1011) is similar to the jackpot control process 12 (see FIG. 436) in the seventeenth control example (and the twelfth control example) described above, for executing various controls during execution of the jackpot game. processing.

Of the jackpot control processing 27 (see FIG. 855) in the twenty-seventh control example, in each of the processes Y11601 to Y11612, Y11601 of the jackpot control processing 12 (see FIG. 436) in the seventeenth control example (and the twelfth control example) The same processing as each processing of Y11612 is executed. In addition, in the jackpot control process 27 (see FIG. 855) in the twenty-seventh control example, when it is determined that the end timing of the ending effect has come in the process of Y11612 (Y11612: Yes), then, it corresponds to the jackpot type of this time. Data indicating the rush type (rush rank) is stored in the rush type storage area 203wa (Y11631). In the process of Y11631, if the current jackpot is a jackpot type corresponding to an S-rank rush, "01H" is stored, and if it is a jackpot type corresponding to an A-rank rush, "02H" is stored, and a B-rank rush is stored. "03H" is stored for the corresponding jackpot type, "04H" is stored for the jackpot type corresponding to the C-rank rush, and "05H" is stored for the jackpot type corresponding to the D-rank rush, If the jackpot type corresponds to the E-rank crash, "06H" is stored.

When the process of Y11631 is completed, then, by setting the counter value of the first counter 203h1 during time saving to 50 and setting the counter value of the second counter 203h2 during time saving to 100, the first condition for ending the time saving state The end condition (end condition established when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed 50 times) and the second end condition (the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are executed a total of 100 times (Y11632). Next, a state command corresponding to the set gaming state is set (Y11633), the end of the jackpot is set (Y11634), the flag 203k during jackpot is set to OFF (Y11635), and this processing is finished.

<Regarding the control process of the audio ramp control device in the twenty-seventh control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the twenty-seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 856 to 861. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 856, details of the effect update process 27 (S4161) in the twenty-seventh control example will be described. This effect update process 27 (S4161) is executed instead of the effect update process (S4111) in the seventeenth control example (and first control example) in the main process (see FIG. 174) of the sound lamp control device 113. It is a process for periodically updating (at each execution interval of the main process) various effects modes being executed.

As shown in FIG. 856, when the effect update process 27 (FIG. 856) is executed, whether or not the value of the rank-up number counter 223wb is a value greater than 0 (that is, whether the rank-up effect is being executed) or not) is determined (S5411), and if it is determined that the value is not greater than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S5411: No), it means that the rank-up effect is not being executed. It is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving state (S5412). In the processing of S5412, when it is determined that the gaming state is not the time saving state (normal state) (S5412: No), the final judge production process for updating the production mode when the final judge production is being executed is executed (S5413), and the process ends. The details of this final judge rendering process (S5413) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S5412, if it is determined that the current gaming state is the time saving state (S5412: Yes), the time saving production setting process for updating the production during the time saving state is executed (S5414 ), the process ends. The details of the effect setting process (S5414) during this time saving will be described later with reference to FIG.

In addition, in the processing of S5411, when it is determined that the counter value of the rank-up number counter 223wb is a value greater than 0 (S5411: Yes), an effect of consuming the rank-up image RG (see FIG. 829(b)) is executed. It is determined whether or not it is time to generate (S5415), and if it is determined that it is not time to generate an effect (see FIG. 829(b)) that consumes the rank-up image RG (S5415: No), this processing is continued. finish. On the other hand, in the processing of S5415, if it is determined that it is time to generate an effect (see FIG. 829(b)) that consumes the rank-up image RG (S5415: Yes), then the value of the rank-up number counter 223wb is 1 (that is, it is time to consume the last rank-up image RG stocked) (S5416). (S5416: Yes), the bonus rank corresponding to the jackpot type of this time, the effect of the effect mode to rank up to the rush rank is set (S5417), and the process proceeds to S5422.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5416, if it is determined that the value of the rank-up number counter 223wb is not 1 (S5416: No), one of the bonus rank and the rush rank is up to the upper limit value corresponding to the current hit type. It is determined whether or not the rank has already increased (S5418), and if it is determined that one rank has already reached the upper limit (S5418: Yes), the rank of the side that has not reached the upper limit is changed to 1 The effect mode for increasing the rank is set (S5419), and the process proceeds to S5422. On the other hand, in the processing of S5418, if it is determined that neither the bonus rank nor the rush rank has reached the upper limit (S5418: No), it is determined whether the rank to be upgraded this time is the bonus rank or the rush rank. It is determined by lottery (S5420). This lottery is configured so that the ratio of the bonus rank and the rush rank are both 50%. As a result, when the effect of consuming the rank-up image RG is executed, it is possible to give randomness to the type of the rank that is actually upgraded, so that the player can feel the thrill of not knowing which rank will be raised. can be held against Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. When the processing of S5420 ends, the effect mode is set to raise the rank of the type determined by the processing of S5420 by one rank (S5421), and the processing proceeds to S5422. In the processing of S5422, which is executed after any one of S5417, S5419, and S5421 is finished, the value of the rank-up number counter 223wb is updated by subtracting 1 (S5422), and this processing is finished.

Next, with reference to FIG. 857, the details of the above-described final judge effect processing (S5413) will be described. When the final judge effect in progress processing (S5413) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the final judge effect is being executed (S21031). ), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S21031, if it is determined that the final judge effect is being executed (S21031: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command of the second special symbol is received (S21032), winning a prize If it is determined that the information command has been received (S21032: Yes), then it is determined whether the elapsed time from the start of the first variation display of the second special symbol in the final judge production is less than 10 seconds. (S21033). In the process of S21033, if it is determined that the elapsed time from the start of the first variation of the second special symbol is less than 10 seconds (S21033: Yes), the key of the mode according to the look-ahead result indicated by the winning information command An effect to be stocked is set (S21034), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S21033, if it is determined that the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the first second special symbol is not less than 10 seconds (10 seconds or more have passed) (S21033: No), the process is performed. The process proceeds to S21035.

On the other hand, in the process of S21032, if it is determined that the winning information command of the second special symbol has not been received (S21032: No), then 10 seconds have passed since the first fluctuation start of the second special symbol (S21035), and if it is determined that 10 seconds have passed (S21035: Yes), the variable display lottery currently being executed indicated by the data in the winning information storage area 223b. Based on the result, the effect mode of the remaining variation time (whether to execute the effect of successfully breaking through the door TG or to execute the effect of failing) is determined (S21036), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 858, details of the effect setting process during time reduction (S5414) described above will be described. FIG. 858 is a flow chart showing the effect setting process (S5414) during this time saving. When the time saving effect setting process (S5414) is executed, first, it is determined whether the timer value of the guaranteed time timer 223wc is a value greater than 0 (S21041). ) (S21041: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S21041, if it is determined that the value of the guaranteed time timer 223wc is greater than 0 (S21041: Yes), then the first special symbol variation is stopped to form a non-variation state It is determined whether or not (S21042). In the processing of S21042, when it is determined that the first special symbol forms a non-variable state (S21042: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S21402, if it is determined that the second special symbol does not form a non-fluctuation state (S21042: No), the value of the guaranteed time timer 223wc is updated (S21043), after the update According to the timer value, the display of the remaining time until the final judge effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is updated (S21044), and it is checked whether the timer value of the guaranteed time timer 223wc after the update has become 0. It discriminates (S21045). In the process of S21045, if it is determined that the timer value of the guaranteed time timer 223wc is not 0 (S21045: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S21045 that the timer value of the guaranteed time timer 223wc has been updated to 0 (S21045: Yes), then the data in the surplus time storage area 223wd is data indicating the number of seconds greater than 0. It is determined whether or not (S21046). In the process of S21046, if it is determined that data indicating the number of seconds greater than 0 is stored in the surplus time storage area 223wd (S21046: Yes), the value of the guaranteed time timer 223wd is set to the value of the surplus time storage area 223wc. The surplus time shown is added and updated (S21047), the effect mode in which the added surplus time is added to the display of the remaining time until the final judge effect is set (S21048), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S21046, if it is determined that the data in the surplus time storage area 223wd is data indicating 0 seconds (S21046: No), it means that the time saving state ends, so the final judge production A start is set (S21049), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 859, details of the jackpot related process 27 (S44321) in the twenty-seventh control example will be described. This jackpot-related process 27 (S44321) is a process executed in place of the jackpot-related process (see FIG. 180) in the seventeenth control example (and the first control example) described above, and is a jackpot-related process (see FIG. 180). Similarly, when a jackpot-related command is received from the main controller 110, it is a process for executing control according to the type of the received command.

Of the jackpot-related processing 27 (see FIG. 859) in the twenty-seventh control example, in each of the processing of S4701, S4709, S4710, and S4714, the jackpot-related processing (FIG. 180) in the seventeenth control example (and the first control example) ) are executed in steps S4701, S4709, S4710, and S4714. In addition, in the jackpot related processing 27 (see FIG. 859) in the twenty-seventh control example, when it is determined that the jackpot start command is received in the processing of S4701 (S4701: Yes), then the rank corresponding to this jackpot type The number of upgrades is specified by referring to the rank-up effect table 222wa (S4761), and the specified number of rank-ups is set as the value of the rank-up number counter 223wb (S4762). Next, the rank-up effect (see FIG. 829(a)) of the effect mode for acquiring the rank-up image for the set counter value is set (S4763), and the generation timing of the effect of consuming the rank-up image RG is set to S4762. (S4764), and this process ends.

Also, in the jackpot related process 27 (see FIG. 859) in the twenty-seventh control example, when it is determined that the ending command is received in the process of S4714 (S4714: Yes), the ending command for display is set (S4765 ), the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 860, the details of the special figure 1 effect mode setting process 27 (S5101A) in the twenty-seventh control example will be described. Figure 860 is a flowchart showing the special figure 1 effect mode setting process 27 (S5101A). The special figure 1 effect mode setting process 27 (S5101A) in the 27th control example is executed instead of the special figure 1 effect mode setting process (see FIG. 183) in the 17th control example (and the 1st control example) And, similar to the special figure 1 effect mode setting process (see FIG. 183), when the variation pattern command of the first special symbol is received from the main controller 110, the variation display according to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command This is a process for setting the effect mode of the effect.

As shown in FIG. 860, when the special figure 1 effect mode setting process 27 (see FIG. 860) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a time saving state (S9701A), and in a time saving state If it is determined that there is (S9701A: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the first special symbol is displayed for the first time in the time saving state (S9702A). In the processing of S9702A, when it is determined that the first special symbol is displayed for the first time (S9702A: Yes), a timer value corresponding to 49 seconds is set for the guaranteed time timer 223wc (S9703A), and processing is performed. to S9704A. On the other hand, in the process of S9702A, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not displayed in the first variable display (S9702A: No), the process of S9703A is skipped and the process proceeds to S9704A.

In the process of S9704A, the time obtained by subtracting 1 second from the current variation time is added to the data in the surplus time storage area 223wd for updating (S9704A), and the process proceeds to S9705A. On the other hand, in the processing of S9701A, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not the time saving state (normal state) (S9701A: No), the processing of S9702A to S9704A is skipped, and the processing is shifted to S9705A .

In the processing of S9705A, the effect mode corresponding to the received variation pattern command is determined (S9705A), the display variation pattern command indicating the determined effect mode is set (S9706A), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 861, the details of the special figure 2 effect mode setting process 27 (S5201A) in the twenty-seventh control example will be described. Figure 861 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 effect mode setting process 27 (S5201A). This special figure 2 effect mode setting process 27 (S5201A) is a process executed instead of the special figure 2 effect mode setting process (see FIG. 184) in the 17th control example (and the first control example) described above, Similar to the special figure 2 effect mode setting process (see FIG. 184), when the variation pattern command of the second special symbol is received from the main control device 110, the effect of the variation display effect according to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command This is the processing for setting the mode.

When this special figure 2 effect mode setting process 27 (see FIG. 861) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a time saving state (S9621A), and if it is determined that it is a time saving state (S9621A: Yes), then, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol of this time is completely lost (neither the big hit nor the small hit is won) (S9641A). In the processing of S9621A, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not the time saving state (normal state) (S9621A: No), and in the processing of S9641A, the lottery result of the second special symbol is not completely out (jackpot or It is a small hit) (S9641A: No), the production mode corresponding to the received variation pattern command is determined (S9622A), and the process proceeds to S9611.

On the other hand, in the processing of S9641A, if it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is completely out (S9641A: Yes), the data defined in the rank-up determination table 222wb (see FIG. 842 (b)) , the rank corresponding to the sum (T) of the time indicated by the current timer value of the guaranteed time timer 223wc and the time indicated by the data stored in the surplus time storage area 223wd is specified (S9642A). Next, it is determined whether or not the rank specified in the processing of S9642A is higher than the currently set rank (S9643A), and it is determined that a higher rank than the currently set rank has been specified. If so (S9643A: Yes), the effect mode with the rank-up effect to the specified rank is determined (S9644A), and the process proceeds to S9611.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9643A that a rank lower than the current rank is identified (S9643A: No), whether or not data indicating a surplus time of 10 seconds or more is stored in the surplus time storage area 223wd. (S9645A). In the processing of S9645A, when it is determined that data indicating the surplus time of 10 seconds or more is stored (S9645A: Yes), the time to add the remaining time by adding effect is determined by lottery (S9646A), and the determination result (S9647A), the added time is added to the guaranteed time timer 223wc and subtracted from the surplus time storage area 223wd (S9648A), and the process proceeds to S9611. In the process of S9646A, the ratio of determining not to execute the additional effect for the remaining time (determining the additional time to be 0 seconds) is set to 75%, and the remaining 25% is a multiple of 10 in the range below the surplus time. seconds are evenly distributed. For example, if the surplus time is 45 seconds, the remaining time addition effect is not executed at a rate of 75%, the addition of 10 seconds is determined at a rate of 6.25%, and the addition of 20 seconds is determined at a rate of 6.25%. Override is determined, and controlled to determine overtime of 30 seconds at a rate of 6.25% and overtime of 40 seconds at a rate of 6.25%.

On the other hand, in the processing of S9645A, if it is determined that the data indicating the surplus time of less than 10 seconds is stored in the surplus time storage area 223wd (S9645A: No), the processing of S9646A to S9648A is skipped and the processing is performed. to S9611. In the processing of S9611, a display variation pattern command indicating the determined effect mode is set (S9611), and this processing ends.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-seventh control example, by varying the lottery frequency of the first special symbol (the tendency of the variation time to be selected) according to the setting opportunity (jackpot type) of the time saving state, the time saving The number of lotteries of the second special symbols executed until the end of the state is made different. More specifically, by changing the variation pattern table to be referenced during the time saving state for each type of rush (time saving state) (jackpot type that triggered the setting of the time saving state), when the first special symbol is off , and the average time until the time saving state ends (the first end condition is satisfied by executing the first special symbol lottery 50 times) for each rush type It is configured to be different. In other words, by varying the average value of the number of times of the second special symbol lottery that can be executed by the end of the rush (time saving state) for each rush type, some kind of hit (jackpot or The percentage of winning a small hit (rush continuation rate) is made different for each type of rush. As a result, it is possible to realize a plurality of rushes with different performances, so that the playability can be varied according to the type of rush. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this 27th control example, it is configured so that a small win can be won only in the lottery of the second special symbols, and as in the above-described 17th control example, etc., a small win is won and a small win game is executed. By continuing to hit to the right during the game, it is possible to almost generate a V prize and execute a jackpot game. In other words, in the lottery for the second special symbol, the big win is substantially determined not only when the big win is won, but also when the small win is won. In the twenty-seventh control example, in the normal state, basically, when the second special symbol lottery is executed, an extremely long variation time (for example, 10 minutes) is set so that the second While the lottery of the special pattern is made difficult to be executed, only the lottery of the second special pattern of a specific number of times after the end of the time saving state is constituted so that the fluctuation time is shortened. As a result, it is possible to secure the lottery opportunities for the second special symbols for the specific number of times after the time saving state is finished.

Here, conventionally, a plurality of special symbols with different degrees of advantage (a first special symbol and a second special symbol with a higher degree of advantage than the first special symbol) are provided, and during a disadvantageous game state, a first disadvantageous symbol is provided. Lottery of special symbols is easier to be executed (start winning of the second special symbols is less likely to occur), while the lottery of the second special symbols is easier to be executed when the game state is shifted to an advantageous game state ( A gaming machine that employs a control that makes it easier for the second special symbol to start winning a prize is widely known. In such a conventional gaming machine, during execution of the last variation display in an advantageous gaming state, a second special symbol with a high degree of advantage is activated to start winning. Whether the lottery result corresponding to winning is included in the lottery result of the final lottery of the second special pattern and the lottery result of the ball of the second special pattern in an advantageous game state by accumulating the reserved balls of the special pattern. There are also those that execute an effect to notify whether or not. However, as in the twenty-seventh control example, when adopting a simultaneous variation specification that allows the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol to be performed at the same time (in parallel), in an advantageous gaming state, the second There is a possibility that the lottery for the first special symbol is executed multiple times during the execution of the variable display of the two special symbols, and a possibility that the lottery for the first special symbol is not executed at all during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol. Therefore, for example, when the number of times of time saving is in the state of one time remaining at the start of the lottery of the second special symbol, it is judged that there is a high possibility that the last second special symbol will be displayed in an advantageous game state. The lottery for the first special pattern is not executed during the variable display of the second special pattern and the time saving state is the next second special pattern lottery despite the execution of the performance for accumulating the reserved balls of the second special pattern. Or, conversely, for example, when the lottery for the second special symbol was started, the number of times of time saving remained relatively large (e.g., 8 times, etc.), so the production to accumulate the reserved balls was not executed. Nevertheless, during the variable display of the second special symbol, the variation of the first special symbol is frequently executed, and the advantageous game state ends before the variable display of the second special symbol ends. There is a possibility, and it may become difficult to execute the effect of accumulating the reserved balls of the second special symbol at an appropriate timing.

On the other hand, in the twenty-seventh control example, the second ball entrance 640 as a start winning opening that triggers the lottery of the second special symbols can be easily thrown into the game ball simply by hitting it to the right regardless of the game state. A second special symbol advantageous in a normal state is configured as a starting prize winning port that allows a ball to be entered, and is controlled so that the variation time of the second special symbol is basically set to an extremely long time in a normal state. While suppressing the execution of the lottery, only the lottery of the second special symbol of a specific number after the advantageous time saving state ends, by shortening the fluctuation time, the second executed immediately after the time saving state ends. 2 It is constructed so as to be able to execute the effect of accumulating the reserved balls in the variable display of the special symbols. By constructing in this way, the performance for accumulating the reserved balls can be reliably executed, and the series of performances indicating whether or not there is a win in the lottery of the second special symbols being executed and reserved is more reliable. Since it can be executed at any time, it is possible to suitably set the effect mode.

In addition, in the twenty-seventh control example, when many long fluctuation times are fortunately selected in the time saving state, there is a large margin with respect to the average time until the end of the time saving corresponding to the set rush type (rank). Under the situation that occurs, it is configured to be able to execute a rank-up effect that raises the rank of the rush. As a result, even if a low rush rank is reported, the player can play the game in anticipation of a rank-up occurring during the rush, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the 27th control example, the number of rounds of the jackpot (bonus rank) and the degree of advantage of the time-saving state after the jackpot (rush rank) are notified, and the rank-up effect is executed during the opening period of the jackpot. , but not limited to these. For example, it may be executed during a jackpot round game or during an interval period. Also, the notification of the bonus rank and the notification of the rush rank do not necessarily have to be collectively notified by one rank-up effect, and may be configured to be notified by separate effects. More specifically, for example, the bonus rank (the number of rounds of the jackpot) is configured to be notified at any timing up to the fourth round of the jackpot, and the rush rank (continuation rate of the time saving state) is the ending period of the jackpot or It is good also as a structure which notifies during the variable display production|presentation which concerns on the lottery of the 2nd special design of the specific number of times (for example, the 1st time or the 5th time) after shift to a time saving state (rush).

In the twenty-seventh control example, the bonus rank and the rush rank corresponding to the jackpot pattern are always notified by the rank-up effect, but a rank lower than the actual one may be notified at a predetermined rate. Then, when a rank lower than the actual rank is reported in the rank-up effect, the effect of increasing the rank to the actual rank may be executed at a predetermined notification timing. Specifically, for example, as a predetermined notification timing, for example, when the bonus rank is notified lower in the rank-up effect, the final round corresponding to the notified rank (8th round if B rank) , 6th round for C rank, and 4th round for D rank), an effect for increasing the rank to the actual rank may be generated. Also, for example, when the rush rank is reported to be low in the rank-up effect, the final round of the jackpot, the ending period of the jackpot, and the fluctuation display period of the second special symbol for the specified number of times (for example, the first time) after the end of the jackpot A configuration may be adopted in which an effect is generated in which the player ranks up to the actual rank moderately. With this configuration, even if a low rank is reported in the rank-up performance, the player can expect a further rank-up after that, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. At the same time, it is possible to diversify the mode of presentation.

In this 27th control example, after the end of the time saving, the table 202dw8 for 1 fluctuation (see FIG. 839 (b)) is changed from the end of the time saving state until the first lottery of the second special symbol is executed. Only referring to, after the end of the time saving, the table 202dw9 for 2 to 5 fluctuations was configured to refer only until the second to fifth second special symbol lottery was executed, but it is not limited to this. do not have. Instead of this, or in addition, even when the specific condition is established in the normal state, table 202dw8 for 1 fluctuation after the end of time saving (see FIG. 839 (b)) or table 202dw9 for 2 to 5 fluctuations after the end of time saving may be configured to refer to. Specifically, for example, in the lottery of the first special symbol, V winning cannot occur with a predetermined probability (for example, probability of 1/100) (or V winning occurs more than the small winning of the second special symbol) (difficult) is configured to win a small hit of the operating pattern, and with the small win as an opportunity, a table 202dw8 for 1 change after the end of time saving (see FIG. 839 (b)) and a table 202dw9 for 2 to 5 changes after the end of time saving Along with resetting the variation pattern scenario that refers to one or both of the above, the final judge production or a production similar to the final judge production (a production mode that encourages the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 by hitting to the right) It may be configured to execute at least a production including. That is, it may be possible to temporarily create a state in which, when a small win is won in the normal state, the advantageous second special symbol lottery can be executed a predetermined number of times. By constructing in this way, a game can be played in anticipation of winning a small win in addition to winning a big win in the normal state, so that the game in the disadvantageous normal state becomes monotonous. It can be suppressed. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, as a specific condition, for example, based on the fact that a special pattern lottery has been executed a specific number of times (for example, 500 times) without winning a big hit after the normal state is set, after the end of the time saving, 1 fluctuation time Table 202dw8 (see FIG. 839 (b)) and table 202dw9 for 2 to 5 fluctuations after the end of time saving, while forming a state that refers to one or both It may be configured to execute an effect including at least an effect mode prompting the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 . By constructing in this manner, even if the number of special symbol lotteries increases without winning the jackpot, the game can be played with the aim of reaching the specified number of times, thereby motivating the player to play the game. can be suppressed.

In this 27th control example, when setting the variable display effect according to the lottery result of the second special symbol in the time saving state, the value of the guaranteed time timer 223 wc (remaining time on the display until the end of the time saving) and the surplus time are stored The sum (T) of the time indicated by the data in the area 223wd (the time indicating the deviation from the minimum guaranteed time (remaining time until the end of the time saving assuming that the lottery of the first special symbol is all set to 1 second)) Calculated, the rank corresponding to the calculated time T is identified by referring to the rank-up determination table 222wb, and the identified rank (substantial If the rank) is higher than the currently set rank, the rank-up production that rises to the specified rank is executed, but the method of specifying the rank is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the actual rank is specified taking into account the time already spent, and whether or not the rank-up effect can be executed is determined. By configuring in this way, a higher rank can be easily identified when determining a substantial rank, so the frequency of occurrence of the rank-up effect can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to these, the lottery result of the variable display of the second special symbol to be newly started, and the lottery result of the first and second special symbols that are withheld are also taken into consideration, and the rank-up effect is performed. It is also possible to adopt a configuration that determines whether or not execution is possible. More specifically, for example, when a jackpot is included in the lottery results corresponding to the newly started second special symbol fluctuation display, or the suspended lottery results of the first and second special symbols. Additionally, the rank-up effect may be executed at a predetermined rate (for example, a rate of 1/4). By configuring in this way, the run-up effect not only suggests to the player that the possibility of winning the jackpot again is improved by the time the rush ends (the final judge effect ends), Since it is possible to make the player expect a big hit by the time the ball is consumed, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the performance mode until the reserved ball is completely consumed. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game. In this case, when the rank-up effect is executed as a effect for notifying that a big hit will occur before the reserved balls are completely consumed, control is performed so that a plurality of stages of rank-up are likely to occur. good too. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player have a stronger expectation of a big win when a plurality of stages of rank-up is reported. In addition, even if the player does not win the jackpot, it is a fact that the rank (continuation rate) has increased. can.

In this 27th control example, regardless of the type of the time saving state, the number of time saving times of commonization (50 first special symbol lotteries, or a total of 100 special symbol lotteries) is set as the number of time saving times. However, it is not necessary to share the number of working hours. It is also possible to provide a time saving state in which one or both of the number of lotteries of the first special symbol and the number of lotteries of the total special symbol are different. By increasing the number of lotteries of the first special pattern, the time until the time-saving state ends even if the rank is low, and the number of lotteries of the second special pattern increases, so that the possibility of winning a big hit is increased. be able to. Conversely, by reducing the number of lotteries for the first special symbol, it is possible to reduce the possibility of a big hit. The same applies to the sum of the number of lotteries for the first special symbol and the number of lotteries for the second special symbol. can be lowered.

In the twenty-seventh control example, in the continuation rate increase effect (see FIG. 832), when notifying the occurrence of the rank up, the configuration of notifying the rank up to the corresponding rank in the variation display effect of the second special symbol of 1 However, it is not limited to this. For example, when notifying a rank-up in a plurality of steps, the rank-up may be notified step by step (for example, one step at a time for one variation) over a plurality of second special symbol fluctuation display effects. By configuring in this way, it is possible to keep the expectation of rising to a higher rank over a plurality of variable displays, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. In the case of stepwise notification, it is not always necessary to notify the rank over a plurality of fluctuations, and an effect may be executed in which the rank is raised step by step within one fluctuation. Specifically, for example, after executing an effect in which the rank-up image RG is split in half and a rank-up icon RRG indicating a rank-up to a rank lower than the original rank appears, the rank-up icon RRG is displayed. is split in half and a rank-up icon RRG indicating a higher rank appears. Thereafter, the rank-up icon RRG indicating a rank higher than the rank indicated by the rank-up icon RRG that appeared immediately before is displayed until the rank-up to the actual rank is reported. The rank may be notified step by step by repeating the effect that appears from the inside. By constructing in this way, it is possible to keep the expectation of rising to a higher rank continuously, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the twenty-seventh control example, in the continuation rate increase effect (see FIG. 832), the number of rank increases ( number of rank-ups), but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively or additionally, the type of rank-up icon RRG that appears can be suggested by the display mode (for example, color, size, etc.) of the rank-up image RG, how the rank-up image RG is split, or the like. may More specifically, for example, as types of rank-up images RG, a white rank-up image RG, a red rank-up image, and a red rank-up image having a size larger than normal are provided, and red rank-up is provided. It may be configured such that when the image is statically displayed, there is a higher possibility that the rank-up of multiple stages is notified than when the white rank-up image RG is statically displayed. Also, a red rank-up image having a size larger than usual may be configured to be selected only when a plurality of stages of rank-up is reported. In addition, as the method of breaking the rank-up image RG, in addition to the method of breaking into two, the method of breaking into four, and the method of breaking into pieces are provided. It may be configured such that the possibility of being notified of a rank-up in multiple stages is higher than the way of splitting into two. In addition, in the case of a crack that shatters into pieces, it may be configured such that a rank increase to A rank or higher is determined. With this configuration, not only the type of the rank-up icon RRG but also the performance mode before the rank-up icon RRG appears can be focused on during the game, so that the player's interest in the game can be enhanced. can be improved.

In the twenty-seventh control example, even after the time-saving state ends and the state shifts to the normal state, the characters displayed in the display area HR3 ("Right stroke Collect the keys!”) was configured to encourage the player to hit the right hand in the same way as in the time saving state, but the production mode for making the same game as in the time saving state is It is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to this, an effect prompting right-handed hitting may be performed by voice, or a display prompting right-handed hitting is set in the small display area Dm2 as in the time-saving state. may be In addition, in the case of setting the display prompting the player to hit right in the small display area Dm2, the display may be exactly the same as in the time saving state (the characters “right hitting”), or the time saving state and the normal state may be displayed. The mode may be changed (for example, in the normal state, an image simulating a rightward arrow may be displayed).

<Modification of the twenty-seventh control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 904 to 910, various modifications in which time-saving design winning (lottery result of special design in which time-saving state is given without going through a jackpot) is combined with the above-described 27th control example. will be explained. First, with reference to FIG. 904, a first modification will be described in which only the lottery result of time-saving symbol winning is simply added to the above-described twenty-seventh control example.

<First Modification of Twenty-seventh Control Example>
When the lottery result of the time-saving pattern winning is simply added to the 27th control example, even if the time-saving pattern is won and the right hand is hit, the probability of winning the normal pattern in the normal pattern lottery is low. Therefore, the electric accessory 64ra is hardly opened, and a state is formed in which it is almost impossible to enter the game ball into the right first ball entrance 64r. In such a situation, when the variation pattern table for the time saving state (one of the S rank table 202dw2 to E rank table 202dw7) is referred to and the variation pattern is selected, 10 each time the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. Since a relatively short variation time of seconds is set, a very advantageous game state is formed in which only the lottery for the second special symbol is executed by hitting to the right. Temporarily, the end condition of the time saving state based on the time saving design winning is the same end condition as the time saving state set after the end of the jackpot (the first special design lottery is executed 50 times, or the special design lottery is executed 100 times ), an extremely advantageous state is formed in which the ratio of winning the jackpot is equal to or higher than the S-rank rush. It should be noted that since the winning of the normal symbols is rarely won, it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the right first ball entrance 64r, and a prize is paid out based on the ball entering the right first ball entrance 64r. Since it is almost impossible to acquire balls, the degree of advantage in terms of the number of prize balls paid out is lower than in the time saving state.

FIG. 904(a) is a diagram showing a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when time-saving symbol winning occurs during the normal state in this modification. As shown in FIG. 904(a), when time-saving symbol winning occurs in the normal state, in the center of the main display area Dm, the surroundings of the adventurer character 801 stand in a luminous state (wearing an aura). is set, and the text "Preparing for bonus" is displayed in the display area HR3. In addition, the characters "preparation state" are displayed in the small display area Ds2. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that he/she should hit right and that the big win is near (it is in the preparation stage for winning the big win). In addition, as described above, the probability of winning some hit (small hit or jackpot) in the lottery of the second special pattern is 11/200, so at a rate of more than 99%, the jackpot within the number of times based on the time-saving design winning be elected.

FIG. 904(b) is a diagram showing a display mode when time saving symbol winning occurs in the time saving state in this modified example. As shown in FIG. 904(b), when time-saving symbol winning occurs, a rank-up effect is generated, and the effect of rank-up to extra rank (EX RANK) is executed. By executing the effect of being ranked up to the extra rank, the player can easily understand that the state has shifted to a time-saving state in which the possibility of winning a jackpot is extremely high. In addition, by naming it extra rank, which is different from any of S rank to E rank, even if the electric accessory 64ra is hardly released by right-handed hitting, it is said that it is due to the transition to a special state called extra rank. can convince people. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling discomfort or distrust.

<Second Modification of Twenty-seventh Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 905 to 910, a description will be given of a second modification in which time-saving symbol winning is combined with the twenty-seventh control example. In the second modification, like the 17th control example described above, the time saving performance is substantially the same in the time saving state set when the time saving pattern winning occurs and the time saving state set after the jackpot ends. A case will be described in which the time saving state related to the time saving design winning is combined in such a manner that the probability of winning the normal design is substantially the same in the low probability state of the normal design and the time saving state of the normal design. . In this case, by setting a time saving pattern in which a time saving state in which a variation pattern is selected with reference to the S rank table 202dw2 to E rank table 202dw7 as the type of time saving pattern is provided respectively, Time saving in the time saving state It is possible to realize a game property in which state performance (rank of rush) is switched in the middle. Specifically, for example, when a time-saving pattern election in which a time-saving state is set in which the A-rank table 202dw3 is referred to during the B-rank rush, the rank of the time-saving state (rush) increases, and the number of time-saving times is reset (the number of times of time saving related to time saving symbol winning is set again), which is advantageous for the player. Also, for example, when a time-saving pattern election in which a time-saving state is set in which a time-saving state is set with reference to the D-rank table 202dw5 during the B-rank rush, the rank of the time-saving state (rush) is lowered, Since the number of times of time saving is reset, it may be advantageous for the player if it is just before the end of the time saving state.

First, with reference to FIG. 905, the presentation mode in this modified example will be described. FIG. 905 is a diagram showing an effect mode when time-saving symbol winning occurs in the time-saving state. As shown in FIG. 905(a), when the time saving pattern is won in the lottery of the second special pattern in the time saving state, a variable display effect is executed in which the reset pattern with the character "RESET" is stopped as a medium pattern. At the same time, the text "Reset Occurred!" is displayed in the display area HR3. Then, as shown in FIG. 905(b), in the main display area Dm, the reset symbol is enlarged and displayed to inform the reset of the time saving state, and the remaining time until the final judge displayed in the display area Dm. It is reset to 49 seconds (the state immediately after the end of the jackpot). Furthermore, the lash rank displayed in the small display area Dm3 is updated to "? RANK", and the continuation rate displayed in the small display area Ds2 is updated to "continuation rate?%over". . These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the time saving state including the rank has been reset. The state in which the rank and the continuation rate are concealed by the symbol "?" continues until the rank notification effect described later is executed. Henceforth, for simplification of explanation, the state where the rank and continuation rate which are set based on time-saving design election are concealed is called a concealment state.

Fig. 906 shows the effect mode of the rank notification effect for notifying the rank of the time saving state set (reset) based on the time saving pattern winning, which is executed when the predetermined execution lottery is won in the concealed state. It is a diagram. As shown in FIG. 906(a), when the rank notification effect is executed in the concealed state, first, the character "? RANK" is displayed as the variable display effect of the third symbol for indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol. A variable display effect is executed in which the rank notification pattern with is stopped and displayed as a medium pattern. Then, as shown in FIG. 906 (b), the stopped displayed medium pattern (rank notification pattern) is divided into two, and the rank with the letters corresponding to the rank set based on the time-saving design winning An effect in which a notification image (rank-up icon) RRG appears is executed. Also, an effect is executed in which the display contents of the small display areas Dm3 and Ds2 are updated according to the rank notified by the rank notification image RRG. In the example of FIG. 906 (b), the rank of the time saving state set (reset) based on the time saving symbol winning is A rank, and the notification image RRG with the letters "A RANK" appears. The rush rank displayed for the display area Dm3 is updated to "A RANK", and the continuity rate displayed for the small display area Ds2 is updated to "continuation rate 89% over" corresponding to the A-rank rush. exemplifies the case.

In addition, the rank notification effect is configured to occur only in the hidden state that is set when it is reset to a rank higher than the rank of the time-saving state that was set when the time-saving pattern was won, and was reset to a low rank by the time-saving pattern winning. In this case, the execution of the rank notification effect is prohibited (restricted). By configuring in this way, when the rank is lowered based on the time-saving pattern winning, the fact can be kept secret from the player, so that the player is not disappointed. can be suppressed.

<Electrical configuration in the second modification of the twenty-seventh control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 907, the details of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in this modified example will be described. FIG. 907 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in this modification. As shown in FIG. 907, the RAM 223 in this modification has a rush rank storage area 223we, a previous rank storage area 223wf, and a rank concealment flag, in contrast to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the twenty-seventh control example described above (see FIG. 841). 223wg and are different in that they are added.

The rush rank storage area 223we is a storage area for storing information indicating the rank of the currently set time saving state (rush), and the previous rank storage area 223wf is when time saving symbol winning occurs in the time saving state. , It is a storage area for storing information indicating the rank of the time saving state that was set before the time saving symbol winning occurred. In addition, the rank secrecy flag 223wg is a flag indicating whether or not the secrecy state is set based on the time-saving symbol winning. It means that it is not hidden.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the second modification of the twenty-seventh control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 908 to 910, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in this modified example will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 908, the details of the special figure 2 effect mode setting process 27A (S5201A) in this modified example will be described. This special figure 2 effect mode setting process 27A (S5201A) is a process executed instead of the special figure 2 effect mode setting process 27 (see FIG. 861) in the 27th control example described above, special figure 2 effect mode setting Similar to the process 27 (see FIG. 861), this is a process for setting a variable display mode according to the lottery result of the second special symbol. Figure 908 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 effect mode setting process 27A (S5201A).

Of the special figure 2 effect mode setting processing 27A (see FIG. 908) in this second modification, in each process of S9611, S9621A, S9622A, and S9641A, the special figure 2 effect mode setting in the 27th control example respectively described above The same processes as S9611, S9621A, S9622A, and S9641A of process 27 (see FIG. 861) are executed. Also, in the special figure 2 effect mode setting process 27A (see FIG. 908) in this modification, in the process of S9641A, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is not completely out (S9641A: No), then, It is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol is the time-saving design winning (S9671A), and when it is determined that the time-saving design is not winning (S9671A: No), the process proceeds to S9622A.

On the other hand, in the processing of S9671A, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol this time is the time saving symbol winning (S9671A: Yes), the effect mode of the variable display effect with the reset effect is specified (S9672A). . Next, the data in the rush rank storage area 223we is overwritten in the previous rank storage area 223wf, and the data indicating the rush rank corresponding to the winning time saving pattern is stored in the rush rank storage area 223we (S9673A), and the rank concealment flag 223wg is set. It is set to ON (S9674A), and this processing ends.

Also, in the special figure 2 effect mode setting process 27A (see FIG. 908) in this modification, in the process of S9641A, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is completely out (S9641A: Yes), then , determines whether or not the rank concealment flag 223wg is ON (S9675A), and if it is determined that the rank concealment flag 223wg is ON (S9675A: Yes), the An effect setting process during concealment is executed (S9676A), and the process proceeds to S9611. On the other hand, in the process of S9675A, when it is determined that the rank concealment flag 223wg is off (S9675A: No), the effect setting process during non-secrecy is executed (S9677A), and the process proceeds to S9611. Details of the effect setting processing during concealment (S9676A) and the effect setting processing during non-secrecy (S9677A) will be described with reference to FIGS. 909 and 910, respectively.

Next, with reference to FIG. 909, the details of the secrecy effect setting process (S9676A) will be described. FIG. 909 is a flow chart showing the secrecy effect setting process (S9676A). In this secrecy performance setting process (S9676A), first, the data in the surplus time storage area 223wd is referenced to determine whether or not there is surplus time of 10 seconds or more (S9681A), and there is surplus time of 10 seconds or more. If it is determined (S9681A: Yes), the variable display mode with the added effect of the effect mode that adds the time obtained by rounding down the fraction less than 10 seconds from the surplus time is determined (S9682A), and this processing ends. .

On the other hand, in the processing of S9681A, if it is determined that there is no surplus time of 10 seconds or more (S9681A: No), by comparing the data in the rush rank storage area 223we and the data in the previous rank storage area 223wf, It is determined whether or not the rush rank before the time saving state is reset (winning the time saving symbol) is higher than the currently set rank (S9683A). In the processing of S9683A, if it is determined that the rush rank before the time saving state is reset (winning the time saving pattern) is a higher rank than the currently set rank (S9683A: Yes), the rank notification effect Without lottery for execution, the effect mode corresponding to the received variation pattern command is determined (S9684A), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S9683A, if it is determined that the rush rank before the time saving state is reset (winning the time saving pattern) is a rank below the currently set rank (S9683A: No), rank notification effect (S9685A). In this lottery, the execution of the rank notification effect is determined with a probability of 1/20. Therefore, even if the rank notification performance is not executed in the variable display of the second special symbol a plurality of times, the player can be made to think that the player has simply missed the lottery and the rank has not been lowered. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from declining.

When the processing of S9685A is finished, it is then determined whether or not the lottery result corresponding to the execution of the rank notification effect is obtained (S9686A). : Yes), determine a variable display mode accompanied by a rank notification effect for notifying the current rank (S9687A), and terminate this process. On the other hand, in the process of S9686A, when it is determined that the lottery result corresponding to the execution of the rank notification effect is not obtained (S9686A: No), the process proceeds to S9684A.

Next, with reference to FIG. 910, details of the non-secrecy effect setting process (S9677A) will be described. FIG. 910 is a flow chart showing this non-secrecy effect setting process (S9677A). In this non-secrecy effect setting process (S9677A), first, the data defined in the rank-up determination table 222wb (see FIG. 842(b)) is referred to, and the time indicated by the timer value of the current guarantee time timer 223wc and the time indicated by the data stored in the surplus time storage area 223wd (S9691A). Next, it is determined whether or not the rank specified in the processing of S9691A is higher than the currently set rank (S9692A), and it is determined that a higher rank than the currently set rank has been specified. If so (S9692A: Yes), the effect mode with the rank-up effect to the specified rank is determined (S9697A), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9692A that a rank lower than the current rank has been identified (S9692A: No), whether or not data indicating a surplus time of 10 seconds or more is stored in the surplus time storage area 223wd. (S9693A). In the processing of S9693A, when it is determined that data indicating the surplus time of 10 seconds or more is stored (S9693A: Yes), the time to add the remaining time by adding effect is determined by lottery (S9694A), and the determination result (S9695A), the added time is added to the guaranteed time timer 223wc and subtracted from the surplus time storage area 223wd (S9696A), and this process ends. In the process of S9694A, the ratio of determining not to execute the additional effect for the remaining time (determining the additional time to be 0 seconds) is set to 75%, and the remaining 25% is a multiple of 10 in the range below the surplus time. seconds are evenly distributed. For example, if the surplus time is 45 seconds, the remaining time addition effect is not executed at a rate of 75%, the addition of 10 seconds is determined at a rate of 6.25%, and the addition of 20 seconds is determined at a rate of 6.25%. Override is determined, and controlled to determine overtime of 30 seconds at a rate of 6.25% and overtime of 40 seconds at a rate of 6.25%.

On the other hand, in the processing of S9693A, if it is determined that the data indicating the surplus time of less than 10 seconds is stored in the surplus time storage area 223wd (S9693A: No), the processing of S9694A to S9696A is skipped and left as it is. End this process.

As in this second modified example, by adding the specification of time-saving symbol winning to the star of the 27th control example, it is possible to generate a situation in which the rush rank is updated in the time-saving state. Therefore, when time-saving symbol winning occurs, it is possible to realize a novel game property that makes the player expect that the rank of the rush will rise.

<28th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-eighth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 862 to 882. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-seventh control example described above, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are configured to be executable at the same time (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous variation specification). By changing the lottery frequency of the first special symbol (tendency of the selected fluctuation time) according to the state setting opportunity (jackpot type), the number of lotteries of the second special symbol to be executed until the end of the time saving state is increased. It was configured to be different. In addition, there are only two types of game states, normal state and time-saving state, and it adopts a specification that wins a big hit by winning a special pattern lottery or winning a V prize as a small win. rice field.

On the other hand, in the 28th control example, on the premise of the simultaneous variation specification, in addition to the normal state and the time saving state as the game state, the probability of winning a big hit in the special symbol lottery increases, and the electric role is increased as in the time saving state. A variable probability state in which the object 640a is easily opened is provided, and a specification is adopted in which a big win is triggered only when a special symbol lottery results in a big win. In addition, in the above-described twenty-seventh control example, it was allowed to win a big hit in the lottery of the other special symbol even while one of the special symbol variations was being executed, but in the present twenty-eighth control example. , When the lottery of one special pattern becomes a big hit, it adopts a control that prohibits (suppresses) winning a big hit in the lottery of the other special pattern. In other words, during one big hit fluctuation, the other special symbol lottery is lost (including small hits) and is determined. Furthermore, in the twenty-eighth control example, when the first special symbol lottery results in a big hit, the ratio of setting the most advantageous probability variable state is low, while the second special symbol lottery results in a big hit. By configuring so that the ratio of setting the most advantageous probability state is high. It adopts a specification that makes it possible to strongly expect that it will be a big hit in the lottery of the second special pattern.

Based on such specifications, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twenty-eighth control example, the start winning opening (right first entrance 64r) as well as the start winning opening (second ball entrance 640) that triggers the lottery of the second special symbol. A game property that makes a player strongly expect not to win a jackpot is realized. Furthermore, in the twenty-eighth control example, it is configured to be a small hit in some cases when the lottery for the second special symbol is lost. Unlike the small win of the 27th control example, etc., this small win is a lottery result that only opens the variable winning device 1065 that is opened in the big win game for a short time (the possibility of winning the big win in the small win game There is no prize), so basically even if you win, it does not contribute to the player's degree of advantage. However, when a small win is won and the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed, control is executed to forcibly remove the other special pattern and stop and display the other special pattern in the same way as when the big winning pattern is stopped and displayed. In particular, it is possible to realize a game property that is advantageous to the player by winning a small win during the big win variation of the first special symbol that is disadvantageous. That is, in the variable probability state, when a normal jackpot to which the variable probability state is not given is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, and when the big win variation is executed, the variable probability state is highly likely to be terminated. During the big hit fluctuation of the disadvantageous first special pattern, a small prize is won in the lottery of the second special pattern, and when the small prize fluctuation is finished first, the first special pattern being displayed in fluctuation is forcibly stopped with the missing pattern. It is possible to continue the definite variable state by making sure that there is no big hit of the disadvantageous first special symbol. Therefore, basically, by winning a small hit that does not contribute to the player's advantage, under specific conditions (during the variable probability state and during the fluctuation of the first special symbol jackpot), Since it is possible to realize a novel game property that it is possible to avoid the occurrence of an extremely disadvantageous situation (a situation in which the variable probability state is ended), it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-seventh control example described above, when subtracting the number of times of time saving, the subtraction processing is uniformly performed at the start of fluctuation. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-eighth control example, basically, the subtraction process is executed when the variation stops, and only the last variation display in the time saving state is configured to perform the subtraction process when the variation starts. . In addition, if one special pattern is stopped and displayed with a winning (big hit or small) pattern, and the other special pattern is forcibly stopped and displayed with a lost pattern, the number of times of time reduction at the timing of the forced stop display It is configured to avoid execution of the subtraction process. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the loss of the number of times of time reduction due to the variable display that is forcibly changed to an out (that is, it is equal to that the winning is not drawn), so that the number of times of time reduction is more preferable. can be subtracted.

The pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-eighth control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-seventh control example described above in that the board configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is partially changed. The configuration of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main controller 110 is partially changed, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the sound lamp controller 113 is partially changed, and the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 executes The only difference is that the control process is partially changed, and the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the No. 27 control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the twenty-seventh control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 862, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the twenty-eighth control example will be described. FIG. 862 is a front view of the game board 13 in the twenty-eighth control example. As shown in FIG. 862, the game board 13 in the twenty-eighth control example differs from the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the twenty-seventh control example (see FIG. The position of the ball entrance 640 is reversed (the right first ball entrance 64r is provided downstream of the second ball entrance 640), and the second The point that an electric accessory 640a capable of opening and closing the ball entrance 640 is provided is accompanied by an electric accessory 64ra provided accompanying the right first ball entrance 64r in the twenty-seventh control example. A retractable member 64rb capable of retracting and retracting at a predetermined cycle while the pachinko machine 10 is powered on is provided directly above the right first ball entrance 64. They are different in that respect. This retractable member 64rb prevents the game ball from entering the right first ball inlet 64r by being displaced to a protruding position protruding to the front side in a front view, and by being immersed in the game board 13, the right first ball entering. A state is formed in which a game ball can enter the opening 64r. This haunting member 64rb, for example, in the game state (time saving state or probability variable state) in which the time saving state of the normal pattern is set, the game ball fired by hitting to the right is the right first entry at a rate of about 1 out of 25 The period of displacement to the retracted position and the length of the displacement period are determined so that the ball enters the ball opening 64r. In other words, rather than hitting the right in the normal state, the lottery frequency of the first special symbol is higher when hitting the left, and the first special in the time saving state and the variable state in which the time saving state of the normal pattern is set. The period of displacement to the retracted position and the length of the displacement period are determined so that the reserved ball of the symbol is unlikely to become 0. As a result, it is possible to perform the lottery for the first special symbol at a relatively high frequency in the time-saving state and the variable-probability state while suppressing the irregular game method of hitting to the right in the normal state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 862, the game board 13 in the present twenty-eighth control example does not have the variable winning device 1065 and the V winning device 650 provided in the game board 13 in the twenty-seventh control example described above. It is also different in that the variable winning device 65 provided on the game board 13 in the control example and the like is provided. This is because, in the twenty-eighth control example, as in the first control example, etc., a specification is adopted in which a game ball enters a specific area during execution of a jackpot game, and a variable probability state is given after the jackpot ends. By being there. In the twenty-eighth control example, when the second special symbol lottery results in a small hit, the variable winning device 65 opens and closes for a predetermined period (for example, 0.2 seconds). Therefore, it is almost impossible to obtain a prize ball in a small winning game. Also, in the small winning game (and the normal big winning), the game ball is controlled to be difficult (impossible) to pass through the specific area.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 863 and 864, the characteristic presentation mode in the twenty-eighth control example will be described. First, FIG. 863(a) is a diagram showing a display mode in the case of shifting to the variable probability state with the highest degree of advantage in the twenty-eighth control example. In the variable probability state, similarly to the time saving state in the twenty-seventh control example described above, the variable display effect of the third symbol for showing the lottery result of the second special symbol is executed in the main display area Dm, and the main display area. In a relatively narrow display area (small display area Dm8a) at the lower right of Dm, a variable display effect of the third symbol for showing the lottery result of the first special symbol is executed. In addition, in this 28th control example, once the variable probability state is reached, the variable probability state is not terminated until the next big hit is achieved. Therefore, the termination conditions (the number of remaining lotteries, the remaining time, etc.) are not displayed on the screen.

FIG. 863(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery in the variable probability state and the jackpot variation is started. Here, in the twenty-eighth control example, when the first special symbol lottery results in a big win, the normal jackpot is won with a high probability (90% ratio), while the second special symbol lottery wins the jackpot. always becomes a definite variable jackpot, and an advantageous definite variable state continues even after the jackpot ends. For this reason, in the variable probability state in which the ball can be entered into the right first ball entrance 64r and the second right ball entrance 640 by hitting to the right, the game property that makes a strong expectation of a big win in the lottery of the second special symbol. becomes. In other words, if the lottery for the first special symbol results in a big win, the player is likely to be in a disadvantageous situation.

As shown in FIG. 863(b), when the first special symbol jackpot variation is started in the variable probability state, an enemy character 811 appears in the main display area Dm and an effect is executed in which the adventurer's character 801 faces each other. be. In addition, the text "Kill the enemy and continue the RUSH!!" is displayed in the display area HR3. Furthermore, information indicating the remaining time until the probability changing state ends (that is, until the jackpot variation in the first special symbol ends) is displayed in the small display region Dm2 formed on the upper right of the main display region Dm. be. The example of FIG. 863(b) illustrates a case where the remaining variation time until the end of the variation is 28.05 seconds, and the text "28:05 until the end of RUSH" is displayed in the small display area Dm1. It is In addition, the characters "RUSH end pinch!" are displayed in the small display area Ds2. According to these display contents, if the enemy character 811 cannot be subjugated before the remaining time displayed in the small display area Dm1 elapses, there is a possibility that the variable probability state (rush) will end. It is easy for people to understand. As described above, in the twenty-eighth control example, even if a lottery for the other special symbol is executed after the big hit variation of one special symbol is started, the winning will not be drawn. In other words, since there is no possibility of winning the jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol during the jackpot fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed first, and the first special symbol of the jackpot is displayed. It is configured so that it cannot be converted to an outlier pattern. On the other hand, since the small hit is part of the loss, it is configured to be able to win even during the variable display of the first special symbol. Therefore, during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special pattern, by winning the small hit, the jackpot fluctuation can be forcibly stopped with the pattern out of the jackpot, avoiding the disadvantageous jackpot of the first special pattern and continuing the variable state. can be made

FIG. 864(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the fluctuation time has elapsed without winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery during the variable display of the first special symbol. As shown in FIG. 864(a), when the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation in the first special symbol has passed and the remaining time displayed in the small display area Dm reaches "00:00", the adventurer character 801 An effect of being defeated by being attacked by the enemy character 811 is executed. Also, the characters "Unfortunate..." are displayed in the display area HR3, and the characters "RUSH finished..." are displayed in the small display area Ds2. Also, a third symbol indicating the winning of the first special symbol is displayed in the small display area Dm8a. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that there is a high possibility that the variable probability state has ended.

Fig. 864(b) is a display in the case where a small win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, and the big winning variation of the first special symbol can be forcibly stopped with the symbol. An example of an aspect is shown. As shown in FIG. 864(b), when the small winning pattern is won during the big winning variation of the first special pattern and the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed first, the adventurer's character 801 attempts to defeat the enemy character 811. A successful rendition is performed. In addition, the characters "Victory!!" are displayed in the display area HR3, and the characters "RUSH continue!!" are displayed in the small display area Ds2. In addition, in the small display area Dm8a, the first special symbol is displayed (so-called random eyes). pattern) is displayed. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the variable probability state has continued.

<Electrical configuration in the 28th control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 865(a), details of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the twenty-eighth control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 865(a), the ROM 202 in the twenty-eighth control example has the configuration of the ROM 202 in the twenty-seventh control example described above (see FIG. 835(a)), instead of the first winning random number 27 table 202aw. , the first winning random number 28 table 202ax is provided, the jackpot type selection 28 table 202bx is provided instead of the jackpot type selection 27 table 202bw, the fluctuation pattern 28 table 202dx is provided instead of the fluctuation pattern 27 table 202dw is provided, and a small winning random number 28 table 202ex is provided instead of the small winning random number 27 table 202ew. Another difference is that the normal fluctuation pattern scenario table 202wa is deleted.

First, with reference to FIG. 866(a), the details of the first winning random number 28 table 202ax in the twenty-eighth control example will be described. This first winning random number 28 table 202ax is similar to the first winning random number 27 table 202aw in the twenty-seventh control example described above. This is a data table that defines the value of the counter C1). FIG. 866(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the first winning random number 28 table 202ax. As shown in FIG. 866(a), in the twenty-eighth control example, regardless of the type of special symbol, a random number determined to be a big hit in a special symbol lottery in a special symbol high probability state (first random number counter 40 random numbers (counter values) from "0 to 39" are associated and defined as the value of C1). Since the first winning random number counter C1 in the twenty-eighth control example is composed of a loop counter that can take 1000 values of "0 to 999", the special symbol lottery is executed in the special symbol high probability state. The probability of winning the jackpot is 1/25 (40/1000) in both the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 866(a), the first winning random number 28 table 202ax in the twenty-eighth control example has a jackpot in a special symbol lottery in a special symbol low probability state regardless of the special symbol type. Ten random numbers (counter values) from "0 to 9" are defined in association with each other as the determined random number (the value of the first random number counter C1). Since the first winning random number counter C1 in the twenty-eighth control example is composed of a loop counter that can take 1000 values of "0 to 999", the lottery for the special symbols is executed in the low probability state of the special symbols. The probability of winning the jackpot is 1/100 (10/1000) in both the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol.

Next, with reference to FIG. 866(b), details of the jackpot type selection 28 table 202bx in the twenty-eighth control example will be described. FIG. 866(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the jackpot type selection 28 table 202bx in the twenty-eighth control example. As shown in FIG. 866(b), this jackpot type selection 28 table 202bx is associated with the jackpot type that can be selected for each type of special symbol and the value range of the first hit type counter C2. stipulated. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 866(b), as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 corresponds to the range of "0 to 9", "jackpot A28". "Big win B28" is defined in association with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "10 to 99". The "jackpot A28" is a jackpot (4-round variable probability jackpot) in which the number of rounds is set to 4 and the most advantageous variable probability state for the player is set as the game state after the completion of the jackpot. In addition, "jackpot B28" is a jackpot (4-round normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds is set to 4 rounds and a time-saving state with a relatively low degree of advantage is set as the game state after the jackpot ends. Of the 100 random numbers "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, the random numbers associated with "jackpot A28" and "jackpot B28" are 10 and 90, respectively. , If the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the ratio of determining "jackpot A28" is 10% (10/100), and the percentage of determining "jackpot B28" is 90% (90/100). becomes. In other words, even if the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the jackpot type (jackpot B28) set in a time-saving state with the lowest number of rounds and a low degree of advantage is determined, so the first special symbol is a lottery with a low degree of advantage for the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 866(b), as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of "0 to 24" with "jackpot C28". , The value of the first per type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of "25 to 34" with "jackpot D28", and the value of the first per type counter C2 is in the range of "35 to 99" A "jackpot E28" is associated and defined. The "jackpot C28" is a jackpot (10 rounds variable probability jackpot) in which the number of rounds is set to 10 rounds and the most advantageous variable probability state for the player is set as the game state after the completion of the jackpot. In addition, "jackpot D28" is a jackpot (8-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds is set to 8 rounds, and the variable probability state most advantageous to the player is set as the game state after the completion of the jackpot. Furthermore, "jackpot E28" is a jackpot (4 rounds variable probability jackpot) in which the number of rounds is set to 4 and the most advantageous variable probability state for the player is set as the game state after the completion of the jackpot. Of the 100 random numbers "0 to 99" that the value of the first win type counter C2 can take, the random numbers associated with "jackpot C28", "jackpot D28", and "jackpot E28" are 25 each. Since there are 1, 10, and 65, the ratio of determining "jackpot C28" when winning the jackpot in the lottery of the second special pattern is 25% (25/100), and "jackpot D28" is decided. 10% (10/100), and the percentage at which the "jackpot E28" is determined is 65% (65/100). Therefore, when the second special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the majority is set to the minimum number of rounds (4 rounds), but the game state after the jackpot ends is advantageous regardless of which jackpot type is selected. is set to a high probability variable state, the lottery for the second special symbol can be said to be a lottery with a higher degree of advantage than the lottery for the first special symbol.

Next, with reference to FIG. 866(c), details of the small winning random number 28 table 202ex in the twenty-eighth control example will be described. This small winning random number 28 table 202ex, like the small winning random number 27 table 202ew in the above-described 27th control example, is a random value (first winning random number counter C1 value) is defined in the data table. As shown in FIG. 866(c), in this 28th control example, a random number value (counter value) determined as a small hit is associated only with the second special symbol, and the value range is " 40 to 49”. Of the 1000 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 999" that can be taken by the first random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) determined to be small hits in the second special symbol lottery is "40". 49”, the probability of winning a small prize in the second special symbol lottery is 1/100 (10/1000).

Next, with reference to FIG. 867(a), details of the variation pattern 28 table 202dx in the twenty-eighth control example will be described. FIG. 867(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern 28 table 202dx in the twenty-eighth control example. As shown in FIG. 867(a), the variation pattern 28 table 202dx in the twenty-eighth control example is a normal table 202dx1 that is referenced to select a variation pattern when a special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state. and a variable probability/time reduction table 202dx2 referred to for selecting a variation pattern when a special symbol lottery is executed in the variable probability state and the time reduction state. Regarding the normal table 202dx1, the same specified contents as the normal table 202dw1 in the above-described 27th control example (in the lottery of the first special symbol, the fluctuation time in the range of 7 seconds to 140 seconds is selected according to the lottery result. On the other hand, in the lottery of the second special symbol, the 600-second fluctuation time is always selected), so the detailed description is omitted here.

FIG. 867(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the probability variation/time reduction table 202dx2 that constitutes the variation pattern 28 table 202dx. This table 202dx2 for probability variation and time reduction is a data table referred to when a special symbol lottery is executed in the probability variation state and the time reduction state, as described above. As shown in FIG. 867(b), the table 202dx2 for probability variation/time reduction includes the entire range (range of "0 to 999") that the value of the variation type counter CS1 can take as a variation pattern when the first special symbol is removed. ) is associated with an out-short variation with a variation time of 10000 ms (10 seconds).

On the other hand, as the variation pattern at the time of the normal jackpot of the first special symbol, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 249", and the variation time is 30000 ms (30 seconds) per long variation as the variation pattern. A is defined in association with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "250 to 899", and a long fluctuation B with a fluctuation time of 60000 ms (60 seconds) is defined in association with the fluctuation type counter CS1. The value of is in the range of "900 to 999", and per long fluctuation C with a fluctuation time of 180000 ms (180 seconds) is defined in correspondence. For this reason, when the normal jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is selected at a rate of 25% (250/1000), and the fluctuation time of 60 seconds is selected at a rate of 65% (650/1000). A variation time is selected and a variation time of 10% (100/1000) is selected for 180 seconds. As the fluctuation time becomes longer, it becomes easier to execute lottery of the second special symbols during the fluctuation, so that the degree of expectation for winning the small prize also increases. Therefore, when winning a normal jackpot, selection of a longer variation time is more advantageous for the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 867 (b), as a variation pattern at the time of the probability variation jackpot of the first special symbol, the value of the variation type counter CS1 can take the entire range (range of "0 to 999"), variation An ultra-short variation per time of 500 ms (0.5 seconds) is associated and defined. The reason why the short fluctuation time is set when the probability variable jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special pattern is that the second special pattern small hit is stopped and displayed first, and the advantageous probability variable jackpot is forcibly converted into a loss. This is to prevent it from being put away as much as possible. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 867 (b), as a variation pattern of the second special symbol, even if it is out or hit, the whole range that the value of the variation type counter CS1 can take ("0 to 999" range) , a variation pattern (missing short variation, hit short variation) with a variation time of 6000 ms (6 seconds) is associated and defined. Therefore, in the probability variation state, the variation time of the second special symbol is fixed to 6 seconds.

In addition, when the normal jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special pattern and the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is set, the second special pattern is stopped and displayed a maximum of 5 times (30 seconds / 6 seconds) during the winning fluctuation. Therefore, the rate at which a small hit with a probability of 1/100 can convert a normal jackpot into a loss and continue the variable probability state is about 4.9%. Similarly, if a normal jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special pattern and a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is set, the second special pattern is stopped and displayed a maximum of 10 times (60 seconds / 6 seconds) during the winning fluctuation. Therefore, the ratio of converting a normal jackpot to a loss by a small hit and continuing the variable probability state is about 9.6%. Furthermore, when a normal jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special pattern and a fluctuation time of 180 seconds is set, the second special pattern is stopped and displayed a maximum of 30 times (180 seconds/6 seconds) during the winning fluctuation. Therefore, the ratio of converting a normal jackpot to a loss by a small hit and continuing the variable probability state is about 26%.

Thus, in the twenty-eighth control example, when the normal jackpot is won in the variable probability state, a relatively long (long enough to execute the second special symbol lottery multiple times) variation time is selected. Since it is constructed, when the big winning variation of the second special pattern is started, the expectation that the second special pattern will be a small winning and the normal big winning will be converted into a loss is generated by the lottery of the second special pattern a plurality of times. It can be crossed over and held by the player. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 865(b), details of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the twenty-eighth control example will be described. FIG. 865(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the twenty-eighth control example. As shown in FIG. 865(b), the RAM 203 in the twenty-eighth control example is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the twenty-seventh control example described above (see FIG. 835(b)). The difference is that a counter 203h is provided instead of the second counter 203h2. This change is accompanied by the change to the specification of only one termination condition for the time saving state (only the termination condition that is satisfied when the total number of lotteries of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number). It is a thing. In addition, a variable probability setting flag 203m, a variable probability passage counter 203n, a winning number counter 203o, a remaining ball timer flag 203p, a remaining ball timer 203q, a variable probability effective flag 203r, a variable probability effective timer 203s, and a discharge number counter 203t. , and the variable probability flag 203xa are added, which is also different from the twenty-seventh control example. As in the first control example, the addition of these configurations is that the game state after the jackpot game is set to the probability variable state by passing the game ball through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game. Since it is exactly the same as the configuration of the same name provided in the first control example except for the variable probability flag 203xa, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

Furthermore, it is different from the twenty-seventh control example in that the V passage jackpot type storage area 203fd, the V flag 203fe, and the V passage flag 203ff are deleted. It should be noted that the change to delete these configurations is due to abolishing the specification that a big win is generated by a V prize during a small win game.

The variable probability flag 203xa is a flag indicating whether or not the current gaming state is a variable probability state (variable probability gaming state). When the variable probability flag 203xa is set to ON, it indicates that the game state is a variable probability state, and when it is OFF, it indicates that it is a low probability game state (normal state or time saving state). In the twenty-eighth control example, when the variable probability setting flag 203m is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game, the variable probability flag 203xa is set to ON. On the other hand, it is set to OFF when a jackpot game is started. It should be noted that the setting of the pachinko machine 10 is set to OFF when the settings are initialized, and when a normal power failure occurs, the state immediately before the power failure is backed up.

Next, with reference to FIG. 868, the details of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the twenty-eighth control example will be described. FIG. 868 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in this twenty-eighth control example. As shown in FIG. 868, the RAM 223 in the twenty-eighth control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the twenty-seventh control example described above (see FIG. 841) in that an end time timer 223xa is added. . Another difference is that the rank-up number counter 223wb, the guaranteed time timer 223wc, and the surplus time storage area 223wd are deleted.

The end time timer 223xa is a timer that indicates the time until the normal jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol and the variable probability state is ended. The end time timer 223xa has an initial value set to 0, and when the normal jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol during the variable probability state, the timer value according to the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the normal jackpot. is set, and the number of seconds corresponding to the timer value is displayed as the remaining time until the end on the third symbol display device 81 (see S9714A and S9715A in FIG. 881). Also, the timer value is decremented and updated each time the main process is executed (see S5433 in FIG. 880).

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the twenty-eighth control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the twenty-eighth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 869 to 879. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 869, details of the first special symbol variation start process 28 (Y271) in the twenty-eighth control example will be described. FIG. 869 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation start process 28 (Y271) in the twenty-eighth control example. This first special symbol variation start process 28 (Y271) is a process executed instead of the first special symbol variation start process 27 (see FIG. 843) in the twenty-seventh control example described above, and is the first in the twenty-seventh control example. Like the 1 special symbol variation start process 27 (see FIG. 843), it is a process for executing the lottery for the first special symbol and starting the variation display according to the lottery result.

Of the first special symbol variation start processing 28 (see FIG. 869) in the twenty-eighth control example, in each of the processes Y302 to Y306, the first special symbol variation start processing 27 (see FIG. 843) in the twenty-seventh control example The same processing as each of Y302 to Y306 is executed. Also, in the first special symbol variation start process 28 (see FIG. 869) in the twenty-eighth control example, when the process of Y306 is completed, then to the first special symbol determination process 27 in the twenty-seventh control example (see FIG. 844) Instead, the first special symbol determination process 28 is executed (Y351), and then the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 28 is performed instead of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 27 (see FIG. 845) in the twenty-seventh control example. Execute (Y352). Then, instead of the special figure 1 game state update process (see FIG. 846) in the twenty-seventh control example, the update process at the start of fluctuation is executed (Y353), and this process ends. For details of these first special symbol determination processing 28 (Y351), first special symbol variation pattern selection processing 28 (Y352), and variation start update processing (Y353), see FIGS. 870, 871, and 872, respectively. will be described later with reference to

First, with reference to FIG. 870, details of the first special symbol determination process 28 (Y351) described above will be described. This first special symbol determination process 28 (Y351) is a process executed instead of the first special symbol determination process 27 (see FIG. 844) in the twenty-seventh control example described above, and the first special symbol determination process 27 ( Figure 844 reference), it is the processing in order to execute the big hit decision of the 1st special design. FIG. 870 is a flow chart showing this first special symbol determination process .

Among the first special symbol determination processing 28 (see FIG. 870), each of Y8001, Y8003 to Y8006, Y8011, and Y8021 of the first special symbol determination processing 27 (see FIG. 844) in the twenty-seventh control example. The same processes as Y8001, Y8003 to Y8006, Y8011 and Y8021 are executed. Also, when the first special symbol determination process 28 (see FIG. 870) in the twenty-eighth control example is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 203gb corresponding to the second special symbol is on (Y8031 ), if it is determined to be on (Y8031: Yes), it means that the second special symbol jackpot variation is already being executed, so by shifting the process to Y8021, the first special symbol holding ball Regardless of the data in the execution area of the storage area 203a, the lottery result is set to lose. On the other hand, in the process of S8031, when it is determined that the jackpot flag 203gb corresponding to the second special symbol is off (Y8031: No), the process proceeds to Y8001.

In addition, in the first special symbol determination processing 28 (see FIG. 870) in the twenty-eighth control example, when the processing of Y8001 is completed, it is then determined whether the probability variation flag 203xa is on (Y8032), and the probability variation flag 203xa is ON (that is, in a state of high probability of special symbols) (Y8032: Yes), refer to the first per random number 28 table 202ax for high probability, lottery of the first special symbol The result is obtained (Y8033), and the process proceeds to Y8003. On the other hand, in the process of Y8032, if it is determined that the probability variation flag 203xa is off (that is, the special symbol is in a low probability state) (Y8032: No), the first per random number 28 table for low probability 202ax is referred to acquire the lottery result of the first special symbol (Y8034), and the process proceeds to Y8003.

Next, with reference to FIG. 871, details of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 28 (Y352) in the twenty-eighth control example will be described. This first special symbol variation pattern selection process 28 (Y352) is a process executed in place of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 27 (see FIG. 845) in the twenty-seventh control example described above, and is the first special symbol. Similar to the variation pattern selection process 27 (see FIG. 845), it is a process for selecting a variation pattern (variation time) according to the lottery result of the first special symbol. FIG. 871 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol variation pattern selection process 28 (Y352).

Of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 28 (see FIG. 871) in the twenty-eighth control example, in each process of Y501 to Y503 and Y505 to Y508, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process in the twenty-seventh control example 27 (see FIG. 845) are executed. In addition, in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 28 (see FIG. 871) in the twenty-eighth control example, when the process of Y503 is completed, the variation pattern table corresponding to the game state is changed to the variation pattern 28 table 202dx (see FIG. 867 (a) )) (see table 202dx1 for normal use, table 202dx2 for variable/time saving) (Y541), and the process proceeds to Y505.

Next, with reference to FIG. 872, the details of the change start update process (Y353) in the twenty-eighth control example will be described. This update process at the start of fluctuation (Y353) is a process for updating the game state at the start of fluctuation. FIG. 872 is a flow chart showing this updating process at the start of fluctuation (Y353). Here, in the twenty-eighth control example, the number of remaining time reductions (counter value of the counter 203h during time reduction) is basically updated at the time of fluctuation stop, and under certain conditions (the number of remaining time reductions in the time reduction state is 1 Only when the lottery of special symbols is executed in the state), it is configured to be updated at the start of fluctuation. By configuring in this way, a general gaming machine (so-called simultaneous fluctuation It is possible to set a case where the timing at which the time reduction state ends can be delayed with respect to the timing of subtraction of the number of remaining time reductions adopted by the machine) (always at the start of the fluctuation), so it is possible to set up a case that can delay Therefore, the game in the time-saving state can be played more efficiently (without waste). The difference in time saving end timing with respect to the simultaneous variation machine adopting the subtraction method of the number of remaining time saving times of this conventional type will be described later with reference to FIG. 873 . In addition, in the twenty-eighth control example, when one special symbol is fluctuating, the other special symbol is stopped and displayed as a win (big hit or small win) symbol, so that the special symbol during variation is forced to come off. When it is stopped and displayed, it is configured to suppress the subtraction of the number of times of shortening of working hours by the special symbol stopped and displayed as the forcedly out symbol. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the loss of the number of times of time reduction for one time due to the variable display that is forcibly stop-displayed with the winning pattern (variable display that is useless for the player who cannot win). .

Here, with reference to FIG. 873, a description will be given of a case in which the time reduction end timing can be delayed with respect to a general simultaneous variation machine. As described above, in the twenty-eighth control example, basically, the remaining time reduction number is updated (subtracted) at the fluctuation end timing, and a new special symbol lottery is executed with the remaining time reduction number of times remaining. It is configured to subtract the remaining time reduction number at the start of fluctuation only when it is. For this reason, if the number of remaining time reductions is one remaining while the variable display of both special symbols is stopped, the same timing as the conventional subtraction timing of the remaining number of time reductions (the last variation display within the number of time reductions At the start timing of ), the number of times of working hours is updated to 0 and the working hours state is terminated.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 873 (a) and FIG. 873 (b), at the start of the last variable display in the time saving state (70 times or 30 times in this 28th control example) of the other special symbol When the variable display is in progress, the number of times of variable display is greater than the set number of times while ensuring the time-saving state for a longer period of time compared to the conventional subtraction timing of the number of times of time-saving. It is possible to suppress the continuation of the number of times of working hours reduction. In the example of Figure 873 (a) and Figure 873 (b), in the time saving state in which the number of time saving times is set to 70 times, when the second special symbol lottery is executed as the 70th special symbol fluctuation lottery It is a diagram showing the time-saving end timing when the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 873(a), after the time saving state is set (after the end of the jackpot), the variation display of the first special symbol based on the 69th special symbol lottery is executed. A lottery for the second special pattern is executed as the lottery for the special pattern of the 69th time, and the second special pattern based on the lottery for the 70th special pattern is displayed prior to the variable display of the first special pattern based on the lottery for the 69th special pattern. A case in which the variable display of is terminated will be described. In the example of FIG. 873(a), at the timing of time t1, the first special symbol lottery is executed as the 69th special symbol lottery, the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, and the variation of the first special symbol is executed. At time t2 during execution of the display, the lottery for the second special symbol is executed as the 70th lottery for the special symbol, and after the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the first special symbol is displayed at time t3. A case where the variable display of the second special symbol is started prior to the variable display and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed at time t4 as the 71st lottery of the special symbol after the end of the big win will be explained as an example.

In the case of the example shown in FIG. 873 (a), in the conventional simultaneous variation machine (always updating the number of reduced hours at the start of variation), the number of remaining reduced hours at time t1 (at the start of variation of the first special symbol) The time reduction state is ended when the number of remaining time reductions is subtracted and the remaining time is 0 at time t2. That is, since the time saving state ends at the timing when the last variable display in the time saving state starts, the time saving state is substantially reduced by one time (the amount during the fluctuation period of the last variable display).

On the other hand, in this 28th control example, the number of times of shortening of remaining time is basically updated at the time of stopping fluctuation until the number of times of shortening of remaining time reaches 1 time, and when the number of times of remaining time of shortening is 1, a new special symbol starts to fluctuate. Since it is configured to update the number of remaining time reductions at the start of fluctuation only when the timing is reached, the number of remaining time reductions is not updated at time t1 (at the start of the 69th fluctuation). Therefore, at time t2 (at the start of the 70th variation), the number of remaining time reductions is 2 times, so the number of remaining time reductions is not updated at time t2, and at time t3 (the 70th variation started When the display is stopped), the number of times of shortening remaining time is updated, and the number of times of shortening remaining time becomes a state of one time remaining. As a result, in the twenty-eighth control example, the time saving frequency becomes 0 at time t4 (at the start of the 71st fluctuation), and the time saving state ends. In other words, during the execution of the variable display started 69 times after the end of the jackpot, and before the start of the 71st variable display after the end of the jackpot, the time-saving state is terminated. The time saving state can be continued for a long time (T1) which is the difference between time t4 and time t2. In addition, since the time saving state is ended at the start of the 71st time change display after the end of the jackpot, it is suppressed that the number of times of change display exceeding the set number of times of time saving (70 times) is performed during the time saving state. can do. Therefore, the game in the time saving state can be played without waste. In addition, in this 28th control example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed before the variable display of the special symbol is started in the state of one remaining number of times of time saving, the number of times of time saving is subtracted by 1 as a rule. is configured to Therefore, in FIG. 873(a), the first special symbol variable display as the 71st special symbol variable display is not started, and the second special symbol variable display as the 69th special symbol variable display is performed first. is stopped, the number of remaining time reductions is updated to 0 at the stop display timing, and the time reduction state is terminated. In this case, since the time saving state can be ended after all the variable display periods for 70 times are finished, the time saving state can be continued longer than the time saving end timing in the conventional simultaneous change machine. Therefore, the game in the time saving state can be played without waste.

Next, with reference to FIG. 873(b), after the time saving state is set (after the end of the jackpot), the variable display of the first special symbol based on the 69th special symbol lottery is executed. The second special symbol lottery is executed as the 70th special symbol lottery, the first special symbol variation display based on the 69th special symbol lottery is completed, and the 71st special symbol variation display is performed. A case will be described where the variable display of the second special symbol based on the 70th special symbol lottery ends after the start of the lottery of one special symbol. In the case of the example shown in FIG. 873 (b), in the conventional simultaneous variation machine (always updating the number of reduced working hours at the start of variation), the number of remaining reduced time at time t5 (at the start of variation of the first special symbol) The time reduction state is terminated when the number of remaining time reductions is subtracted and the remaining time becomes 0 at time t6. That is, since the time saving state ends at the timing when the last variable display in the time saving state starts, the time saving state is substantially reduced by one time (the amount during the fluctuation period of the last variable display).

On the other hand, the control in this 28th control example (the number of times of shortening of remaining time is basically updated at the time of fluctuation stop until the number of times of shortening of remaining time reaches 1, and the number of times of shortening of remaining time is changed to 1) Only when the start timing is reached, the number of remaining time reductions is not updated at time t5 (when the fluctuation starts for the 69th time). Therefore, at time t6 (at the start of the 70th fluctuation), the number of remaining time reductions is 2 times, so the number of remaining time reductions is not updated at time t6, and at time t7 (the 69th fluctuation started When the display is stopped), the number of times of shortening remaining time is updated, and the number of times of shortening remaining time becomes a state of one time remaining. As a result, in the twenty-eighth control example, the time saving count becomes 0 at time t8 (at the start of the 71st fluctuation), and the time saving state ends. In other words, during the execution of the variable display that started 70 times after the end of the jackpot, and before the start of the 71st variable display after the end of the jackpot, the time saving state is terminated. The time saving state can be continued for a longer time (T2), which is the difference between time t8 and time t6. In addition, since the time saving state is terminated at the start of the 71st variable display after the end of the jackpot, it is suppressed that the number of variable displays exceeding the set number of times of time saving (70 times) is executed during the time saving state. can do. Therefore, the game in the time saving state can be played without waste.

Returning to FIG. 872, the description continues. As shown in FIG. 872, in the fluctuation start update process (see FIG. 872) in the twenty-eighth control example, first, it is determined whether the value of the counter 203h during time saving is 1 (Y631), and during the time saving counter If it is determined that the value of 203h is not 1 (Y631: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of Y631, when it is determined that the value of the counter 203h during time saving is 1 (Y631: Yes), the value of the counter 203h during time saving is subtracted by 1 and updated to 0 (Y632), and the normal state (Y633), and the process is terminated. By executing this update process at the time of fluctuation start (see FIG. 872), only the lottery of the last special symbol in the time saving state can subtract the number of time saving at the time of fluctuation start.

Next, with reference to FIG. 874, the details of the first special symbol variation stop process 28 (Y272) in the twenty-eighth control example will be described. This first special symbol variation stop process 28 (Y272) is a process executed in place of the first special symbol variation stop process 27 (see FIG. 847) in the twenty-seventh control example described above, and is the first special symbol variation stop process. Similar to the process 27 (see FIG. 847), this is a process for setting the stop display of the first special symbol when the variation of the first special symbol ends. FIG. 874 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation stop processing 28 (Y272).

Of the first special symbol variation stop processing 28 (see FIG. 874) in the twenty-eighth control example, in each of Y701, Y704-Y707, Y721, Y723-Y726, Y732, and Y733, the first in the twenty-seventh control example The same processes as Y701, Y704-Y707, Y721, Y723-Y726, Y732, and Y733 of 1 special symbol variation stop process 27 (see FIG. 847) are executed. Also, in the first special symbol variation stop processing 28 (see FIG. 874) in the twenty-eighth control example, in the processing of Y721, the jackpot flag 203gb corresponding to the first special symbol is off (that is, the first special (Y721: No), when it is determined that (Y721: No), the fluctuation stop time update process for updating the remaining short time number at the fluctuation stop timing is executed (Y741), and the process goes to Y732 Transition. The details of this updating process when fluctuation is stopped (Y741) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In addition, in the first special symbol variation stop processing 28 (see FIG. 874) in the twenty-eighth control example, it is determined that the special figure 2 variation time timer 203kb is 0 in the processing of Y723 (Y723: No) or Y726 When the process of is completed, the jackpot flag 203gb corresponding to the first special symbol, the time saving medium counter 203h, and the probability variation flag 203xa are all reset (Y742), and the process proceeds to Y704.

Next, with reference to FIG. 875, the details of the update process when fluctuation stops (Y741) will be described. This update process at the time of fluctuation stop (Y741) is a process for updating the number of time saving at the fluctuation stop timing when the game state is the time saving state. FIG. 875 is a flow chart showing this updating process when fluctuation stops (Y741). Here, as described above, in the twenty-eighth control example, the number of remaining time reductions (counter value of the counter 203h during time reduction) is updated basically at the time of fluctuation stop, and under specific conditions (number of remaining time reductions in the time reduction state is updated at the start of fluctuation only in the state of one time). Then, when one of the special symbols is fluctuating and the other special symbol is stopped and displayed as a win (big win or small win) symbol, the special symbol being fluctuated is forcibly lost and stopped and displayed as a symbol, It is configured to suppress the subtraction of the number of times of shortening of working hours by the special symbols that are stopped and displayed in the forced out symbols. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the loss of the number of times of time reduction for one time due to the variable display that is forcibly stop-displayed with the winning pattern (variable display that is useless for the player who cannot win). .

As shown in FIG. 875, the update process at the time of fluctuation stop (see FIG. 875), first, the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (value of 1 or more) It is determined (Y635), time saving If it is determined that the value of the middle counter 203h is 0 (Y635: No), it means that the current state is not the time-saving state, and this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of Y635, if it is determined that the counter value of the counter 203h during time saving is greater than 0 (Y635: Yes), the value of the counter 203h during time saving is updated by subtracting 1 (Y636), and then , It is determined whether or not the counter value of the time saving medium counter 203h after the subtraction has become 0 (Y637). In the processing of Y637, if it is determined that the counter value after subtraction has become 0 (Y637: Yes), a state command indicating transition to the normal state is set (Y638), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y637 that the counter value after the subtraction is not 0 (is a value of 1 or more) (Y637: No), the process of Y638 is skipped and the present process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 876, the second special symbol variation start process 28 (Y273) in the twenty-eighth control example will be described. This second special symbol variation start process 28 (Y273) is a process executed instead of the second special symbol variation start process 27 (see FIG. 848) in the twenty-seventh control example described above, and the second special symbol variation start process Like the process 27 (see FIG. 848), it is a process for executing the lottery for the second special symbol and starting the variable display of the second special symbol according to the lottery result. FIG. 876 is a flow chart showing this second special symbol variation start process 28 (Y273).

Of the second special symbol variation start processing 28 (see FIG. 876) in the twenty-eighth control example, in the respective processing of Y832 to Y836, Y851, and Y852, the second special symbol variation start processing 27 in the twenty-seventh control example ( 848) are executed. Also, in the second special symbol variation start process 28 (see FIG. 876) in the twenty-eighth control example, when the process of Y836 is completed, then to the second special symbol determination process 27 in the twenty-seventh control example (see FIG. 849) Instead, the second special symbol determination process 28 is executed (Y871), and then the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 28 is performed instead of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 27 (see FIG. 851) in the twenty-seventh control example. Execute (Y872). Then, instead of the special figure 2 game state update process (see FIG. 852) in the twenty-seventh control example, the update process at the start of fluctuation is executed (Y873), and this process ends. Details of the second special symbol determination process 28 (Y871) will be described later with reference to FIG. In addition, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 28 (Y872) is similar to the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 28 (see FIG. 871), and the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 27 (see FIG. 851). The only difference is that the variation pattern table corresponding to the game state is read when selecting the variation pattern, so detailed description thereof will be omitted here. In addition, the update process at the start of fluctuation (Y873) is exactly the same process as the update process at the start of fluctuation (see FIG. 872), which is one process in the first special symbol fluctuation start process 28 (see FIG. 869). Therefore, detailed description thereof is omitted here.

Next, with reference to FIG. 877, details of the second special symbol determination process 28 (Y871) in the twenty-eighth control example will be described. This second special symbol determination process 28 (Y871) is a process executed in place of the second special symbol determination process 27 (see FIG. 849) in the twenty-seventh control example described above, and the second special symbol determination process 27 ( FIG. 849 reference), it is the processing in order to execute the hit decision of the 2nd special design. FIG. 877 is a flow chart showing this second special symbol determination process 28 (Y871).

Of the second special symbol determination processing 28 (see FIG. 877) in the twenty-eighth control example, in each of the processes Y8101, Y8103 to Y8106, Y8111, and Y8121, the second special symbol determination processing 27 in the twenty-seventh control example ( 849), Y8101, Y8103 to Y8106, Y8111, and Y8121 are executed. In addition, when the second special symbol determination process 28 (see FIG. 877) in the twenty-eighth control example is executed, it is first determined whether or not the big hit flag 203gb corresponding to the first special symbol is on (Y8131 ), if it is determined to be on (Y8131: Yes), it means that the first special symbol jackpot variation is already being executed, so by shifting the process to Y8121, the first special symbol holding ball To avoid a lottery result becoming a big win regardless of the data in the execution area of a storage area 203a. On the other hand, in the process of Y8131, when it is determined that the jackpot flag 203gb corresponding to the second special symbol is off (Y8031: No), the process proceeds to Y8101.

In addition, in the second special symbol determination process 28 (see FIG. 877) in the present twenty-eighth control example, when the process of Y8101 is completed, it is then determined whether the probability variation flag 203xa is on (Y8132), and the probability variation flag 203xa is ON (that is, in a state of high probability of special symbols) (Y8132: Yes), refer to the first per random number 28 table 202ax for high probability, lottery of the first special symbol The result is obtained (Y8133), and the process proceeds to Y8103. On the other hand, in the process of Y8132, if it is determined that the probability variation flag 203xa is off (that is, the special symbol is in a low probability state) (Y8132: No), the first per random number 28 table for low probability 202ax is referred to acquire the lottery result of the first special symbol (Y8134), and the process proceeds to Y8103.

Next, with reference to FIG. 878, the details of the second special symbol variation stop process 28 (Y274) in the twenty-eighth control example will be described. This second special symbol variation stop processing 28 (Y274) is similar to the second special symbol variation stop processing 27 (see FIG. 853) in the twenty-seventh control example described above, and when the variation of the second special symbol ends, the first special symbol This is a process for setting the stop display of . FIG. 878 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation stop processing 28 (Y274).

Of the second special symbol variation stop processing 28 (see FIG. 878) in the twenty-eighth control example, in each of the processes Y1101 to Y1106 and Y1108 to Y1111, the second special symbol variation stop processing 27 in the twenty-seventh control example ( 853) are executed. In addition, in the second special symbol variation stop processing 28 (see FIG. 878) in the twenty-eighth control example, in the processing of Y1102, the jackpot flag 203gb corresponding to the second special symbol is off (that is, the current second special If it is determined that the lottery result of the symbol is lost (completely lost or a small hit) (Y1102: No), update processing at the time of fluctuation stop is executed to update the number of remaining time short times at the fluctuation stop timing (Y1121 ), and the process proceeds to Y1103. This update process at fluctuation stop (Y1121) is exactly the same process as the update process at fluctuation stop (see FIG. 875) executed in the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 28 (see FIG. 874).

In addition, in the second special symbol variation stop processing 28 (see FIG. 878) in the twenty-eighth control example, it is determined that the special figure 1 variation time timer 203ka is 0 in the processing of Y1104 (Y1104: No) or Y1106 When the process of is completed, the jackpot flag 203gb corresponding to the second special symbol, the time saving medium counter 203h, and the probability variation flag 203xa are all reset (Y1122), and the process proceeds to Y1108.

Next, with reference to FIG. 879, details of the jackpot control process 28 (Y1021) in the twenty-eighth control example will be described. The jackpot control process 28 (Y1021) in this twenty-eighth control example is a process executed in place of the jackpot control process 27 (see FIG. 855) in the twenty-seventh control example described above, and the jackpot control process 27 (see FIG. 855). Similarly, it is a process for executing various controls during execution of the jackpot game. FIG. 879 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process 28 (Y1021).

Among the jackpot control processing 28 (see FIG. 879) in the twenty-eighth control example, Y11601 to Y11612 and Y11633 to Y11635 of the jackpot control processing 27 in the twenty-seventh control example (see FIG. 855) Y11601 to Y11612 , and Y11633 to Y11635 are executed. In addition, in the jackpot control process 28 (see FIG. 879) in the twenty-eighth control example, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect in the process of Y11612 (Y11612: Yes), is the current jackpot a variable probability jackpot? It is determined whether or not (Y11641), and if it is determined that it is a probability variable jackpot (Y11641: Yes), the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a probability variable state by setting the probability variable flag 203xa to ON (Y11642) , the process proceeds to Y11633.

On the other hand, in the process of Y11641, if it is determined that the current jackpot is not a probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot) (Y11641: No), then it is determined whether the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state. Determined based on the data of the state storage area 203wf at the time of winning (Y11643), when it is determined that the normal state (Y11643: Yes), by setting 70 to the counter 203h during time saving, the game state after the end of the jackpot The number of times of time saving is set to the time saving state of 70 times (Y11644), and the process proceeds to Y11633. On the other hand, in the process of Y11643, if it is determined that the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning is not the normal state (time saving state or variable probability state) (Y11643: No), the jackpot is set to 30 in the time saving medium counter 203h The game state after the end is set to a time saving state in which the number of time saving times is 30 (Y11645), and the process proceeds to Y11633. Here, the reason why the number of times of time saving is changed according to the game state is that only the lottery of the first special symbol, which usually determines the jackpot, is executed at a rate of 90% when the jackpot is won in the normal state. This is because if the number of times of time saving is reduced, it is excessively disadvantageous for the player. On the other hand, the reason for reducing the number of times of saving time when it becomes a normal jackpot in a state other than the normal state is that the phenomenon of returning to the probability state by winning the jackpot again in the time saving state after the end of the probability state is excessive. This is to make it difficult to occur in In other words, it is intended to prevent the player from being overly advantageous to the player and unforeseen disadvantage to the hole when the state is once shifted to the variable probability state.

In addition, in the jackpot control process 28 (see FIG. 879) in the twenty-eighth control example, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the ending effect in the process of Y11612 (Y11612: No), then the winning to the specific winning opening 65a (S1911), abnormal processing for determining whether or not the ball that entered the specific winning hole 65a was discharged normally (S1912), and then End this process. These winning process (S1911) and abnormal process (S1912) are set in the probability variable state by passing the game ball through the specific area during execution of the jackpot game as in the 28th control example. Since this process is exactly the same as the winning process (see FIG. 171) and the abnormality process (see FIG. 172) that have been executed, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

<Regarding the control process of the sound lamp control device in the twenty-eighth control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the twenty-eighth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 880 to 882. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 880, the rendering update process 28 (S4171) in the twenty-eighth control example will be described. This effect update process 28 (S4171) is a process executed in place of the effect update process 27 (see FIG. 856) in the twenty-seventh control example described above, and is executed in the same manner as the effect update process 27 (see FIG. 856). It is a process for periodically updating (at each execution interval of the main process) various effects modes in the inside. FIG. 880 is a flow chart showing the effect update process 28 (S4171).

When the rendering update process 28 (see FIG. 880) in the twenty-eighth control example is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the timer value of the end time timer 223xa is greater than 0 (S5431), and greater than 0. If it is determined that it is not a value (that is, it is 0) (S5431: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5431, if it is determined that the timer value of the end time timer 223xa is a value greater than 0 (S5431: Yes), the normal jackpot variation of the first special symbol in the probability variation state is being executed Therefore, first, the value of the end time timer 223xa is updated by subtracting it (S5432), and then the variable probability state (RUSH) is terminated according to the updated timer value (that is, the normal jackpot starts (until it is completed) is updated (S5433).

When the process of S5433 is completed, next, in the process of S5432, it is determined whether or not the value of the end time timer 223xa has been updated to 0 (S5434), and if it is determined that it has been updated to 0 (S5434: Yes) , the adventurer character 801 is attacked by the enemy character 811 and defeated (S5435), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5434 that the value of the end time timer 223xa has not been updated to 0 (S5434: No), the process of S5435 is skipped and this process ends.

By executing this effect update processing 28 (see FIG. 880), when the normal jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery in the variable probability state, the remaining time until the normal jackpot starts is displayed on the third symbol display device. It can be displayed accurately at 81 . Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily understand how much time remains for the variable probability state to be continued by winning a small prize in the lottery of the second special symbols.

Next, with reference to FIG. 881, the details of the special figure 1 effect mode setting process 28 (S5111A) in the twenty-eighth control example will be described. This special figure 1 effect mode setting process 28 (S5111A) is a process executed instead of the special figure 1 effect mode setting process 27 (see FIG. 860) in the 27th control example described above, and special figure 1 effect mode setting Similar to the process 27 (see FIG. 860), this is a process for setting the effect mode of the variable display effect according to the lottery result of the first special symbol. FIG. 881 is a flow chart showing this special figure 1 effect mode setting process 28 (S5111A).

As shown in FIG. 881, when the special figure 1 effect mode setting process 28 (see FIG. 881) in the present 28th control example is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current game state is a variable probability state ( S9771A), when it is determined that it is not in the variable probability state (S9771A: No), the production mode corresponding to the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is determined (S9712A), and the process proceeds to S9706A. On the other hand, in the processing of S9711A, if it is determined that the gaming state is the variable probability state (S9711A: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol of this time is a normal jackpot (S9713A). .

In the process of S9713A, if it is determined that the current lottery result is a normal jackpot (S9713A: Yes), the fluctuation time of this normal jackpot is set to the timer value of the end time timer 223xa (S9714A), and the set timer A variable display mode with an end pinch effect (see FIG. 863(b)) with the value as the end time is determined (S9715A), and the process proceeds to S9706A. On the other hand, in the processing of S9713A, if it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol this time is not a normal jackpot (S9713A: No), the effect mode according to the received variation pattern command is determined (S9716A ), and the process proceeds to S9706A. In the processing of S9706A, a display variation pattern command indicating the determined effect mode is set (S9706A), and this processing ends.

By executing this special figure 1 production mode setting process 28 (see FIG. 881), when the normal jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the probability variation state, the probability variation state (RUSH) is in danger of ending. can be notified to the player by the effect mode executed by the third symbol display device 81, so that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

Next, with reference to FIG. 882, the details of the special figure 2 effect mode setting process 28 (S5201A) in the twenty-eighth control example will be described. This special figure 2 effect mode setting process 28 (S5201A) is a process executed instead of the special figure 2 effect mode setting process 27 (see FIG. 861) in the 27th control example described above, special figure 2 effect mode setting Similar to the process 27 (see FIG. 861), this process is executed to set the variable display mode according to the lottery result of the second special symbol. FIG. 882 is a flow chart showing this special figure 2 effect mode setting process 28 (S5201A).

Of the special figure 2 effect mode setting process 28 (see FIG. 882) in this 28th control example, in each process of S9611 and S9622A, the special figure 2 effect mode setting process 27 (see FIG. 861 See), the same processes as the processes of S9611 and S9622A are executed. In addition, when the special figure 2 effect mode setting process 28 (see FIG. 882) in the present 28th control example is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a probability variable state (S9651A), and the probability variable state If it is determined not (S9651A: No), the process proceeds to S9622A. On the other hand, in the process of S9651A, if it is determined that the game state is the variable probability state (S9651A: Yes), then the timer value of the end time timer 223xa is a value greater than 0 (that is, the current is the first special (S9652A), and when it is determined that the timer value of the end time timer 223xa is 0 (S9652A: No), the process proceeds to S9622A. . On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the end time timer 223xa is greater than 0 (S9652A: Yes), then the fluctuation time of the second special symbol this time is shorter than the time indicated by the value of the end time timer 223xa It is determined whether or not it is time (S9653A).

In the processing of S9653A, if it is determined that the fluctuation time of the second special symbol this time is shorter than the time indicated by the value of the end time timer 223xa (S9653A: Yes), the lottery result of the second special symbol is complete. It is determined whether or not it is out (S9654A), and if it is determined that it is completely out (S9654A: Yes), a variable display mode with an effect that the enemy character 811 can avoid an attack is determined (S9655A). , the process proceeds to S9611. On the other hand, in the processing of S9654A, if it is determined that the lottery result is not a complete loss (that is, a small win) (S9654A: No), the adventurer character 801 defeats the enemy character 811 (Fig. 864). (b)) is determined (S9656A), and the process proceeds to S9611. On the other hand, in the process of S9653A, if it is determined that the fluctuation time of the second special symbol of this time is longer than the time indicated by the value of the end time timer 223xa (S9653A: No), the second special symbol of this time It means that the variation display related to the lottery of the 2 special symbols is stopped and displayed with the completely missing symbol at the same time as the end of the normal jackpot variation of the 1st special symbol, and it is confirmed that the probability variation state cannot be continued. Therefore, each process of S9654A to S9656A is skipped, and the process proceeds to S9611.

As described above, once the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-eighth control example shifts to the most advantageous variable probability state, the variable probability state and the big win are repeated unless a disadvantageous normal jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery. It is configured to form an extremely advantageous state. That is, when winning the jackpot in the lottery of the first special pattern, a disadvantageous normal jackpot is won with a high probability (at a rate of 90%), while when winning the jackpot in the lottery of the second special pattern, an advantageous probability change. It is configured so that the jackpot is fixed and then the variable probability state is continued until the next jackpot is won. Further, in the twenty-eighth control example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are configured to be executable at the same time (in parallel), and the variable display of one of the special symbols is being executed. When the other special pattern is stop-displayed as a jackpot or a small-win pattern, the other special pattern during variable display is forced to come off and stop-displayed as a pattern. As a result, even if a normal jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special pattern that is disadvantageous, depending on the result of the lottery of the second special pattern, the fluctuation of the normal jackpot is forcibly stopped and displayed with the pattern, and the advantageous probability change state is normal. It is constituted so as to be able to suppress the end of the game due to a big hit. Furthermore, in the twenty-eighth control example, it is configured such that, while one special symbol is fluctuating, the other special symbol cannot win a big hit in the lottery of the other special symbol. As a result, when the first special pattern lottery turns into a disadvantageous normal jackpot in the variable probability state and the big hit variation starts, the jackpot cannot be won in the second special pattern lottery, so the small prize is won. It is possible to realize a novel game property in which the player wishes only to forcibly stop the game with a pattern that usually misses the jackpot.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-eighth control example is basically configured to execute update (subtraction) processing of a specific counter (counter value of the time saving counter 203h) at the time of stopping the fluctuation, and the final fluctuation in the time saving state Only the display is configured to be able to execute update (subtraction) processing of a specific counter (counter value of counter 203h during time saving) at the time of start of fluctuation. In addition, if one special pattern is stopped with a winning (big hit or small) pattern and the other special pattern is forcibly stopped and displayed with a lost pattern, the number of times of time reduction at the timing of the forced stop display It is configured to avoid execution of the subtraction process. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the loss of the number of times of time reduction due to the variable display that has been forcibly changed to an out (that is, equal to that the winning is not drawn), so that the number of times of time reduction is more preferable. can be subtracted.

Here, conventionally, a game machine (so-called simultaneous variation machine) equipped with control capable of simultaneously (in parallel) executing the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol has been widely and generally used. Are known. In such a conventional gaming machine, when a game state such as a time-saving state that continues only for a specific number of fluctuations after the end of a big win is set, the game state continues beyond the set number of times. In order to prevent this, it was common to employ control to update a counter value indicating the number of remaining fluctuations until the end of the game state at the start of the fluctuation. However, when adopting such control, whether or not the other winning (small winning or big winning) variation ends first (the other winning pattern is stopped and displayed first) during the variation is specified at the start of the variation. Since it is uncertain whether or not the change will be forcibly stopped and displayed with a lost symbol, it will be forcibly stopped and displayed with a lost symbol (useless for the player). Even if it is a variable display, there is a problem that the counter value indicating the number of remaining variations must be updated.

On the other hand, in this 28th control example, the update (subtraction) timing of a specific counter (counter 203h during time saving) indicating the number of remaining fluctuations in the time saving state is basically set at the time of stopping the fluctuation. Only by executing a relatively simple process of skipping the update (subtraction) processing of a specific counter (counter 203h during time saving) for the variable display that is forcibly stopped and displayed with the outlier pattern when the fluctuation is stopped, the outlier pattern is forced. Since it is possible to suppress the wasteful subtraction of the number of residual fluctuations when the fluctuation display is executed which is useless for the player who is stopped and displayed, the number of residual fluctuations which is actually set can be suppressed. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the number of execution times of the lottery that properly draws a big win. In addition, only when the number of remaining fluctuations is to start a new fluctuation display in the state of one remaining time, it is configured to update (decrease) a specific counter (counter 203h during time saving) at the start of fluctuation, so it is set It is also possible to prevent the gaming state from continuing beyond the number of remaining fluctuations. Therefore, a specific counter (counter 203h during time saving) can be updated more suitably.

In addition, in this 28th control example, as a specific counter, the update timing of the counter 203h during time saving is basically at the time of fluctuation stop, and only when the fluctuation start timing comes in a state where the number of remaining fluctuations is 1 , Adopting a control to update the counter value of the time saving medium counter 203h at the start of fluctuation, and skipping the updating process of the time saving medium counter 203h for the variable display that is forcibly stopped and displayed in the off pattern. The specific counter that is the target of this control is not limited to the counter 203h during the time saving. For example, in the specification that the probability variation state is terminated by executing a specific number of special symbol lotteries in the probability variation state, the counter for counting the number of executions of the special symbol lottery in the probability variation state is used as a specific counter. The configuration may be such that the same control as in the twenty-eighth control example is executed.

In the twenty-eighth control example, the value of the time saving counter 203h is updated (subtracted) at either the time when the fluctuation stops or the time when the fluctuation starts depending on the situation, but the number of times of time saving is the third symbol display device. 81, and the update timing of the number of times of reduced working hours displayed may be changed according to the situation. In this case, it may be linked with the update timing of the time saving medium counter 203h, or the update timing may be switched under another condition. Another condition is, for example, a special symbol lottery result. More specifically, for example, basically, the display of the number of times of working hours is configured to be updated at the start of fluctuation, and the update timing is delayed (updated after the start of fluctuation or updated at the time of stoppage of fluctuation) In addition, it may be configured to increase the possibility of winning a jackpot. By configuring in this way, the game can be played while paying attention to the number of time reductions on the display, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<29th control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 883, the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-ninth control example will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-eighth control example described above, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, a disadvantageous normal jackpot is won with a high probability, while when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery. is constructed so as to determine an advantageous probability variable jackpot, and is constructed so that the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel). Then, when the other special symbol is stopped and displayed as a big win or a small winning symbol during the execution of the variable display of one of the special symbols, the other special symbol during the variable display is forcibly removed and stopped and displayed as a symbol. In addition, it is configured so that, while one special pattern is fluctuating, it is impossible to win a big hit by lottery for the other special pattern. By constructing in this way, when a disadvantageous normal big win is started in the lottery of the first special symbol in the probability variable state and the big win fluctuation is started, only the winning of the small win in the lottery of the second special symbol is desired. Realized innovative playability.

In addition to this, in the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-ninth control example, in the variable probability state of 1, the state where the lottery of the first special symbol is difficult to be executed and the state where the lottery of the first special symbol is easily executed are switched. configured to More specifically, depending on the type of jackpot, after moving to the variable state, the lottery of the first special symbol is completed one to three times (specified number of times), the first special A variation pattern scenario is constructed so that the symbol variation time is long, and when the lottery of the first special symbol is completed for a specified number of times, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are performed until the jackpot is won. and are executed almost evenly. By constructing in this way, until the lottery of the first special symbols of the prescribed number of times is completed, it is an advantageous game state in which only the lottery of the second special symbols with a high probability variation ratio at the time of winning the big win can be biased and executed. On the other hand, after the specified number of times is completed, in order to form a relatively disadvantageous state in which the lottery of the disadvantageous first special symbol is likely to be executed, the game can be sharpened without changing the game state in the variable probability state. can be attached. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

The pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-ninth control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-eighth control example described above in that the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main controller 110 are partially changed. , the configuration of the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 The point is that the control processing executed by is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the No. 28 control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the twenty-eighth control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 883 and 884, the characteristic presentation mode in the twenty-ninth control example will be described. Fig. 883 (a) shows that the variable probability state is set in this 29th control example, and while the state in which the variation time of the first special symbol is significantly longer than the variation time of the second special symbol is set It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in. As shown in FIG. 883(a), in the state in which the variation time of the first special symbol is significantly longer than the variation time of the second special symbol, the display area HR3 is displayed with " The characters "probability change rate super UP zone" are displayed. Further, information indicating the remaining time until the over probability variation rate UP zone ends is displayed in the small display area Dm1. Here, as described above, in the twenty-ninth control example, after the transition to the variable probability state, the lottery of the first special symbol is executed one to three times (specified number of times), so that the first The lottery for the special symbols and the lottery for the second special symbols are almost evenly executed and the degree of advantage is relatively low. In other words, until the variable display of the first special symbol is completed for the specified number of times predetermined for each jackpot type, a very advantageous state is formed in which only the lottery of the second special symbol can be overemphasized and executed. do. Therefore, in the twenty-ninth control example, when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed within the specified number of times, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is displayed in the small display area Dm1 as the remaining time until the end of the zone. there is By constructing in this way, the player is asked how long the advantageous state in which only the lottery of the second special symbols, which is advantageous (the probability variable jackpot is determined when the jackpot is won) can be executed, will continue. It can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, the remaining time until the end of the zone is configured so that the fluctuation time of the first special symbol for one time (remaining fluctuation time in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during execution) is displayed regardless of the specified number of times. ing. Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol is completed in a state where the specified number of times remains, and when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed next time, an effect indicating zone continuation is executed. , to reset the remaining time until the end of the zone. By configuring in this way, the player can have a thrilling feeling of not knowing how long the probability variable rate super UP zone will last, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 883(b), a pinch effect that may be executed during the probability variation rate excess UP zone will be described. Here, in the twenty-ninth control example, similarly to the twenty-eighth control example described above, the second special symbol lottery is configured to win a small prize with a probability of 1/100. As described above, when winning a small hit, when the fluctuation display of the first special design is being executed at the stop display timing of the small hit, regardless of the remaining fluctuation time, the first special design at the same time as the small hit stop display It is also configured to be forcibly stopped by the off pattern. Therefore, if you win a small hit in the probability variable rate super UP zone, the zone will be terminated at the stop timing of the small hit regardless of the remaining time until the end of the zone (that is, the remaining variation time of the first special symbol). put away. FIG. 883(b) is a diagram showing a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the zone is terminated by the small hit of the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 883(b), when a small win is won in a special symbol lottery during the probability variable ratio super UP zone, an effect is executed in which an enemy character 811 appears directly below the small display area Dm1. . In addition, the text "Interfere with the enemy to avoid zone cutoff!!" is displayed in the display area HR3. In addition, the characters "Zone discontinued pinch!" are displayed in the small display area Ds2. By these display contents, it is possible to easily understand that if the enemy character 811 cannot be hindered, the high probability variable ratio UP zone will be terminated.

FIG. 884 is a diagram showing a display mode when a small winning symbol is stop-displayed during the probability variation rate exceeding UP zone (during long variation of the first special symbol). As shown in FIG. 884, when the stop display timing of the small winning pattern in the probability variable rate super UP zone comes, the adventurer character 801 fails to interfere with the enemy character 811, and the enemy character 811 spews out flames that cause a small hit. An effect of burning out the display area Dm1 is executed. In addition, a character "Exceeding probability variation ratio UP zone discontinued!" is displayed in the display area HR3. Furthermore, in the small display area Dm8a, the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination of disengagement (discrete eyes), and the second symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed in the small display area Dm8b. 3 symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination of small hits (matching different odd-numbered symbols). These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the over probability variable ratio UP zone has ended.

It should be noted that the effect mode in which the enemy character 811 appears directly below the small display area Dm1 (see FIG. 883(b)) has a predetermined probability ( For example, it is executed with a probability of 1/20). In the case of a complete miss, the adventurer character 801 attacks the enemy character 811 to succeed in obstruction, and an effect is executed to prevent the remaining time display in the small display area Dm1 from being burned. . As a result, it is possible to make the player easily understand that the over probability variable rate UP zone has continued.

<Electrical configuration in the 29th control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 885(a), details of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the twenty-ninth control example will be described. FIG. 885(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the twenty-ninth control example. As shown in FIG. 885 (a), the ROM 202 in the twenty-ninth control example replaces the jackpot type selection 28 table 202bx with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the twenty-eighth control example described above (see FIG. 865 (a)) The difference is that a jackpot type selection 29 table 202by is provided, a variation pattern 29 table 202dy is provided instead of the variation pattern 28 table 202dx, and a variation pattern scenario table 202ya is added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the twenty-eighth control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

First, with reference to FIG. 886, details of the jackpot type selection 29 table 202by in the twenty-ninth control example will be described. FIG. 886 is a diagram showing the defined contents of the jackpot type selection 29 table 202by in the twenty-ninth control example. As shown in FIG. 886, in this jackpot type selection 29 table 202by, for each type of special symbol, the jackpot type that can be selected and the value range of the first hit type counter C2 are defined in association with each other. there is More specifically, as shown in FIG. 886, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 49" in association with "jackpot A29". A "jackpot B29" is defined in association with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 from "50 to 99". "Jackpot A29" is a jackpot (4 rounds variable probability jackpot) in which the number of rounds is set to 4 rounds and the variable probability state most advantageous to the player is set as the game state after the end of the big win. In addition, "jackpot B29" is a jackpot (4-round normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds is set to 4 and a time-saving state with a relatively low degree of advantage is set as the game state after the jackpot. Of the 100 random numbers "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 50 random numbers (counter values) are associated with "jackpot A29" and "jackpot B29". Therefore, if the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the percentage of determining the “jackpot A29” is 50% (50/100), and the percentage of determining the “jackpot B29” is 50% (50/100). 100). In other words, when a big win is won in the lottery of the first special pattern, half of the players are set to a time-saving state with a low degree of advantage, so the lottery of the first special pattern becomes a lottery with a low degree of advantage for the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 886, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of "0 to 19" with "jackpot C29". "Big win D29" is defined in association with the value of the winning type counter C2 in the range of "20 to 23", and "Big winning E29" is associated with the value "24" of the first winning type counter C2. It is defined, the value of the first per type counter C2 is defined in the range of "25 to 29", and the value of the first per type counter C2 is in the range of "30 to 33". On the other hand, "jackpot G29" is defined in correspondence, "jackpot H29" is defined in correspondence with the value "34" of the first hit type counter C2, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "35 to "jackpot I29" is defined in association with the range of "89", and "jackpot J29" is defined in correspondence with the range of the value of the first winning type counter C2 of "90 to 96". A "jackpot K29" is defined in association with a range of "97 to 99" for the value of the win type counter C2.

'Big win C29' to 'Big win E29' are big wins (10-round definite variable big win) in which the number of rounds is set to 10 rounds and the most advantageous variable definite state for the player is set as the game state after the end of the big win. Then, in the "jackpot C29", the specified number of times of the probability variable rate exceeding UP zone (the number of lotteries of the first special symbol) is set to 1 time, and in the "jackpot D29", the specified number of times is set to 2 times, and the "jackpot E29". is a jackpot in which the specified number of times is set to 3 times. Therefore, although the number of rounds is the same, in terms of the degree of advantage of the probability variable state after winning, "jackpot E29" is the most advantageous for the player, followed by "jackpot D29", and "jackpot C29". ” has the lowest advantage.

In addition, "jackpot F29" to "jackpot H29" are jackpots (8-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds is set to 8 rounds and the most advantageous probability variable state for the player is set as the game state after the jackpot ends. . Then, in the "jackpot F29", the specified number of times of the probability variable rate super UP zone (the number of lotteries of the first special symbol) is set to 1 time, and in the "jackpot G29", the specified number of times is set to 2 times, and the "jackpot H29". is a jackpot in which the prescribed number of times is set to 3 times. Therefore, although the number of rounds is the same, in terms of the degree of advantage of the probability variable state after the winning, "jackpot H29" is the most advantageous for the player, followed by "jackpot G29" and "jackpot F29". ” has the lowest advantage.

Furthermore, "jackpot I29" to "jackpot K29" are jackpots (4 rounds variable probability jackpot) in which the number of rounds is set to 4 and the most advantageous variable probability state for the player is set as the game state after the completion of the jackpot. . Then, in the "jackpot I29", the specified number of times of the probability variable rate super UP zone (the number of lotteries of the first special symbol) is set to 1 time, and in the "jackpot J29", the specified number of times is set to 2 times, and the "jackpot K29". is a jackpot in which the prescribed number of times is set to 3 times. Therefore, although the number of rounds is the same, in terms of the degree of advantage of the variable probability state after the winning, the "jackpot K29" is the most advantageous for the player, followed by the "jackpot J29", and the "jackpot I29". ” has the lowest advantage.

Of the 100 random values ``0 to 99'' that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, ``jackpot C29'', ``jackpot D29'', ``jackpot E29'', ``jackpot F29'', ``jackpot G29'', ``jackpot H29”, “jackpot I29”, “jackpot J29”, and “jackpot K29” are associated with 20, 4, 1, 5, 4, 1, 55, and 7 random numbers, respectively. , and three, the ratio of determining "jackpot C29" when winning the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery is 20% (20/100), and the ratio of determining "jackpot D29" is 4% (4/100), the percentage of determining the "jackpot E29" is 1% (1/100), the percentage of determining the "jackpot F29" is 5% (5/100), and the "jackpot G29 ” is determined at 4% (4/100), the percentage at which “jackpot H29” is determined is 1% (1/100), and the percentage at which “jackpot I29” is determined is 55% (55/100). 100), the ratio of determining "jackpot J29" is 7% (7/100), and the percentage of determining "jackpot K29" is 3% (3/100).

In other words, the percentage of 10 round jackpots (jackpots C29 to E29) is 25% (20% + 4% + 1%), the percentage of 8 round jackpots (jackpots F29 to H29) is 10% (5% + 4% + 1%), The ratio of 4 round jackpots (jackpots I29 to K29) is 65% (55% + 7% + 3%). In addition, the ratio of the jackpot (jackpot C29, F29, I29) where the specified number of times until the end of the probability change rate UP zone is set to 1 time is 80% (20% + 5% + 55%), and the specified number of times is set to 2 times The ratio of the jackpots (jackets D29, G29, J29) is 15% (4% + 4% + 7%), and the ratio of the jackpots (jackets E29, H29, K29) where the specified number of times is set to 3 times is 5% ( 1% + 1% + 3%).

Thus, in this 29th control example, the number of rounds of the jackpot and the combination of the first special symbol lottery number (specified number of times) until the probability change ratio super UP zone ends in the probability change state set after the end of the jackpot Since it is configured to provide various jackpot types, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of predicting the specified number of times and the number of rounds. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 887(a), details of the variation pattern 29 table 202dy in the twenty-ninth control example will be described. FIG. 887(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of this fluctuation pattern 29 table 202dy. As shown in FIG. 887(a), the variation pattern 29 table 202dy in the twenty-ninth control example is a normal table 202dy1 that is referenced to select a variation pattern when a special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state. And, the zone table 202dy2 referred to for selecting the variation pattern when the lottery of the special symbol is executed in the probability variation state and the probability variation ratio super UP zone is set, and the probability variation state ( Limited to the situation where the probability change rate super UP zone is not set), and a probability change / time reduction table 202dy3 that is referred to for selecting a variation pattern when a special symbol lottery is executed in the time reduction state. It is Among these, the normal table 202dy1 has the same specified contents as the normal table 202dx1 of the variation pattern 28 table 202dx in the above-described 28th control example (in the lottery of the first special symbol, 7 seconds to 140 seconds depending on the lottery result While the fluctuation time in the range is selected, the second special symbol lottery has a regulation content in which a fluctuation time of 600 seconds is always selected), so detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

Next, details of the zone table 202dy2 described above will be described with reference to FIG. 887(b). FIG. 887(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the zone table 202dy2. This zone table 202dy2 is a table that is referred to in the probability variation state and in a situation where the probability variation rate exceeding UP zone is set. Here, the probability variation probability super UP zone is the first special symbol after the probability variation state is started (set) in the case of the probability variation state set based on winning one of the jackpots A29, C29, F29, and I29. is set until the fluctuation display ends once (until the second lottery for the first special symbol is executed), and is set based on winning any of the jackpots D29, G29, or J29. In the case of the definite variable state, the period from the start (set) of the definite variable state to the end of the variable display of the first special symbol twice (until the third first special symbol lottery is executed) , and in the case of the variable probability state set based on winning one of the big hits E29, H29, K29, the variable display of the first special symbol ends three times after the variable probability state is started (set). It is set until (until the third first special symbol lottery is executed).

As shown in FIG. 887(b), in the zone table 202dy2, as a variation pattern when the first special symbol is removed, the value of the variation type counter CS1 can take the entire range ("0 to 999" range) On the other hand, a deviation long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 60000 ms (60 seconds) is defined in correspondence. In addition, as a variation pattern at the time of the first special symbol jackpot, the variation type counter CS1 value can take the entire range (range of "0 to 999"), variation time 60000 ms (60 seconds) per long variation are defined in association with each other.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 887 (b), as a variation pattern when the second special symbol is out (completely out or small hit), the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 49" , and an outlier short-circuit variation A with a variation time of 1000 ms (1 second) is associated and defined, and an out-of-short variation with a variation time of 3000 ms (3 seconds) for the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the range of "50 to 949" B is defined in association with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and an out-of-short fluctuation C with a fluctuation time of 5000 ms (5 seconds) is defined in association with the range of "950 to 999" of the fluctuation type counter CS1. That is, 50 random numbers (counter values) are defined in association with the deviation short-circuit variation A with a variation time of 1 second, and 900 random values (counter values) are defined for the deviation short-circuit variation B with a variation time of 3 seconds. 50 random numbers (counter values) are defined in association with the deviation short fluctuation C whose fluctuation time is 5 seconds. Since the variation type counter CS1 can take 1000 values from "0 to 999", if the second special symbol is lost in the lottery, the rate of selecting the variation time of 1 second is 5% (50 /1000), the percentage of selecting a variation time of 3 seconds is 90% (900/1000), and the percentage of selecting a variation time of 5 seconds is 5% (50/1000). Therefore, the average fluctuation time when the second special symbol comes off is 3 seconds (1 second x 5% + 3 seconds x 90% + 5 seconds x 5%). In addition, as shown in FIG. 887 (b), as a variation pattern at the time of the second special symbol jackpot, the variation time is defined in association with a per-short variation of 3000 ms (3 seconds).

From these stipulations, when this zone table 202dy2 is referred to, the fluctuation time in the case where the lottery for the first special symbol is executed is fixed to 60 seconds, while the lottery for the second special symbol is executed. Since the fluctuation time is 3 seconds on average when the second special symbol is drawn, the second special symbol lottery can be performed 20 times on average while the first special symbol lottery is performed once. In other words, the lottery of the disadvantageous first special pattern in which the disadvantageous normal jackpot is determined at a rate of 50% when the jackpot is won is hardly performed, and the advantageous second special pattern in which the probability variable jackpot is determined when the jackpot is won. In order to form an extremely advantageous state in which the symbol lottery can be executed, when the zone table 202dy2 is referred to and a state in which a variation pattern is selected (probability variation rate exceeding UP zone) is set, the player can bring great joy to

Next, with reference to FIG.887(c), the detail of table 202dy3 for probability variation / time reduction mentioned above is demonstrated. FIG. 887(c) is a diagram showing the defined contents of this variable probability/time saving table 202dy3. As shown in FIG. 887 (c), the probability variation/time saving table 202dy3 defines the contents common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the defined contents are the zone table 202dy2 (Fig. 887(b) reference) is the same as the second special symbol. Therefore, when the probability variation/time reduction table 202dy3 is referred to, the variation time of the first special symbol and the variation time of the second special symbol are 3 seconds on average. That is, a state is formed in which the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are executed substantially equally. For this reason, compared to the state in which the zone table 202dy2 is referred to (probability variation rate exceeding UP zone), the possibility of winning a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol that is disadvantageous increases, so the degree of advantage for the player increases. lower.

Next, with reference to FIG. 888, details of the variation pattern scenario table 202ya in the twenty-ninth control example will be described. In this variation pattern scenario table 202ya, the type of variation pattern table referred to for selecting a variation pattern is defined in association with each combination of the type of the previously won big win and the number of variations of the special symbols after the end of the big win. ing. FIG. 888 is a diagram showing defined contents of the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ya in the twenty-ninth control example.

As shown in FIG. 888, as a variation pattern scenario after the jackpot A29, C29, F29, I29 is completed, for the period from when the variable display of the first special symbol is completed once after becoming a probability variable state , while the zone table 202dy2 (see FIG. 887(b)) is defined in association, after the first special symbol has been changed once (after the second lottery of the first special symbol) is defined in association with the table 202dy3 for probability variation/time reduction (see FIG. 887(c)) regardless of the number of fluctuations. In addition, as shown in FIG. 888, as a variation pattern scenario after the jackpot D29, G29, J29 ends, for the period between the time when the variation display of the first special symbol ends twice after becoming a probability variation state , while the zone table 202dy2 (see FIG. 887(b)) is defined in association, after the variable display of the first special symbol is completed twice (after the third lottery of the first special symbol) is defined in association with the table 202dy3 for probability variation/time reduction (see FIG. 887(c)) regardless of the number of fluctuations. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 888, as a variation pattern scenario after the end of the big hits E29, H29, K29, for the period from when the variable display of the first special symbol is completed three times after becoming a probability variable state , while the zone table 202dy2 (see FIG. 887(b)) is defined in association, after the variable display of the first special symbol is completed three times (after the fourth lottery of the first special symbol) is defined in association with the table 202dy3 for probability variation/time reduction (see FIG. 887(c)) regardless of the number of fluctuations.

According to these stipulations, when the jackpot A29, C29, F29, I29 is won, the probability variation rate super UP zone (state where only the lottery of the second special symbol is executed) is the first special symbol variable display once While it continues only for 60 seconds, which is the period, when the jackpot D29, G29, J29 is won, the probability variable rate super UP zone continues for 120 seconds, which is the period for two times of the variable display of the first special symbol, and the jackpot E29. , H29, K29, the probability variable rate super UP zone will continue over 180 seconds, which is a period corresponding to three variable displays of the first special symbol. Therefore, since the number of times of lottery of the second special symbols that can be executed in the probability variable rate super UP zone can be varied depending on the jackpot type, a common game state (variable probability state) is set as the game state after the end of the jackpot. Even so, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the degree of expectation of the variable probability big win is varied according to the kind of the big win. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

Also, as shown in FIG. 888, as a variation pattern scenario after the jackpot B29 (the game state after the jackpot is set to the time saving state) is completed, the lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol Until the total number of times reaches 100 times (that is, within the number of times of time saving), the table 202dy3 (see FIG. 887 (c)) is defined in association with the number of fluctuations, while the second A normal table 202dy1 is defined in association with a range in which the total number of lotteries of one special symbol and the second special symbol is 101 or more. Therefore, while the lottery of the first special symbol that is disadvantageous and the lottery of the second special symbol that is advantageous are equally executed within the number of times of time saving, the second special symbol is after the number of times of time saving passes and the state shifts to the normal state. Since the fluctuation time of is remarkably long (600 seconds), a state is formed in which only the first special symbol lottery is executed and the degree of advantage is low. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 888, after the settings of the pachinko machine 10 are initialized, in the normal state until the jackpot is won, regardless of the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, is defined in association with a disadvantageous normal table 202dy1. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being unduly disadvantaged when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, resulting in an excessive advantage for the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 889, details of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the twenty-ninth control example will be described. FIG. 889 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in this twenty-ninth control example. As shown in FIG. 889, the RAM 223 in the twenty-ninth control example differs from the RAM 223 in the twenty-eighth control example described above in that an in-zone timer 223ya is added. Another difference is that the end time timer 223xa in the twenty-eighth control example is deleted.

Timer 223ya in the zone is a timer indicating the period to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the remaining time until the probability variation ratio excess UP zone ends, while the probability variation ratio excess UP zone continues When the lottery for one special symbol is executed, a timer value corresponding to 60 seconds, which is the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, is set (see S9725A in FIG. 893). In addition, the value is subtracted and updated periodically (each time the effect update process 29 (see FIG. 892) is executed) according to the passage of time (see S5442 in FIG. 892). By displaying the remaining time corresponding to the zone counter 223ya on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to clearly show the player the time until the probability variation rate exceeding UP zone ends. can.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the twenty-ninth control example>
Next, various control processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the twenty-ninth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 890 and 891. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 890, details of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 29 (Y361) in the twenty-ninth control example will be described. This first special symbol variation pattern selection process 29 (Y361) is a process executed in place of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 28 (see FIG. 871) in the twenty-eighth control example described above, and is the first special symbol. Similar to the variation pattern selection process 28 (see FIG. 871), it is a process for selecting a variation pattern (variation time) according to the lottery result of the first special symbol. FIG. 890 is a flow chart showing this first special symbol variation pattern selection process 29 (Y361).

Of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 29 (see FIG. 890) in the twenty-ninth control example, in each process of Y501 to Y503 and Y505 to Y508, the first special symbol variation pattern in the twenty-eighth control example described above The same processes as Y501 to Y503 and Y505 to Y508 of selection process 28 (see FIG. 871) are executed. In addition, in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 29 (see FIG. 890) in the twenty-ninth control example, when the process of Y503 is completed, the variation pattern table corresponding to the variation pattern scenario table 202ya and the special figure 1 variation counter is specified (Y551), the specified variation pattern table is read out (Y552), and the process proceeds to Y505.

Although not shown, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 29 executed in place of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 28 (Y871) also includes the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 29 ( FIG. 890) is modified so that the variation pattern table is read out by the same processing as Y551 and Y552.

Next, with reference to FIG. 891, the details of the jackpot control process 29 (Y1031) in the twenty-ninth control example will be described. This jackpot control process 29 (Y1031) is a process that is executed instead of the jackpot control process 28 (see FIG. 879) in the twenty-eighth control example described above. This is a process for executing various controls during execution of a game. FIG. 891 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process 29 (Y1031).

Of the jackpot control processing 29 (see FIG. 891) in the twenty-ninth control example, in each of Y11601 to Y11612, Y11633 to Y11635, Y11641, Y11642, and Y11645, the jackpot control processing 28 in the twenty-eighth control example described above ( 879) are executed.

In addition, in the jackpot control process 29 (see FIG. 891) in the twenty-ninth control example, when the process of S11642 or S11645 ends, then the variation pattern scenario corresponding to the jackpot type of this time is specified (Y11651) and specified Information indicating the scenario is stored in the variation pattern scenario storage area 203ya (Y11652), and this processing is terminated.

<Regarding the control process of the sound lamp control device in the twenty-ninth control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the twenty-ninth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 892 to 894. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 892, details of effect update process 29 (S4181) in the twenty-ninth control example will be described. This effect update process 29 (S4181) is a process executed in place of the effect update process 28 (see FIG. 880) in the twenty-eighth control example described above, and is executed in the same manner as the effect update process 28 (see FIG. 880). It is a process for periodically updating (at each execution interval of the main process) various effects modes in the inside. FIG. 892 is a flow chart showing the effect update process 29 (S4181).

When this effect update process 29 (see FIG. 892) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the zone timer 223ya is greater than 0 (S5441), and is not greater than 0 (that is, 0) (S5441: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5441, if it is determined that the timer value of the timer 223ya in the zone is a value greater than 0 (S5441: Yes), since it means that the probability variation rate exceeding UP zone is set, Update by subtracting the value of the timer 223ya in the zone (S5442), and then update the remaining time display until the probability variation ratio excess UP zone ends according to the updated timer value (S5443).

After the processing of S5443 is completed, next, in the processing of S5442, it is determined whether or not the value of the in-zone timer 223ya has been updated to 0 (S5444), and if it is determined that it has been updated to 0 (S5444: Yes). , an effect indicating the end of the probability change rate excess UP zone is executed (S5445), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5444 that the value of the in-zone timer 223ya has not been updated to 0 (S5444: No), the process of S5445 is skipped and this process ends.

By executing this production update process 29 (see FIG. 892), when the probability variation rate super UP zone is set in the probability variation state, the remaining time until the zone ends is displayed accurately on the third symbol display device 81 can be made Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily understand how many advantageous states remain in which only the lottery for the second special symbol is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 893, the details of the special figure 1 effect mode setting process 29 (S5121A) in the twenty-ninth control example will be described. This special figure 1 effect mode setting process 29 (S5121A) is a process executed instead of the special figure 1 effect mode setting process 28 (see FIG. 881) in the 28th control example described above, and special figure 1 effect mode setting Similar to the process 28 (see FIG. 881), this is a process for setting the effect mode of the variable display effect for showing the lottery result of the first special symbol. FIG. 893 is a flowchart showing the special figure 1 effect mode setting process 29 (S5121A) in the twenty-ninth control example.

Of the special figure 1 effect mode setting processing 29 (see FIG. 893) in this 29th control example, in each process of S9706A, S9711A, and S9712A, the special figure 1 effect mode setting process 28 (see FIG. 881) in the 28th control example See), the same processes as those of S9706A, S9711A, and S9712A are executed. Also, in the special figure 1 effect mode setting process 29 (see FIG. 893) in the present 29th control example, when it is determined that the current game state is a variable probability state in the process of S9711A (S9711A: Yes), then this time It is determined whether or not the variation pattern of the first special symbol is a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds (S9721A).

In the process of S9721A, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is not a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds (S9721A: No), it means that the current probability variation rate is not in the UP zone, so the process is performed. The process proceeds to S9712A. On the other hand, in the process of S9721A, if it is determined that the variation time is a variation pattern of 60 seconds (S9721A: Yes), it means that it is in the probability variation rate exceeding UP zone, so the first time after the end of the jackpot Determining whether or not it is a variable display of the first special symbol (S9722A), and if it is the first variable display of the first special symbol (S9722A: Yes), an effect to notify the entry into the probability variation ratio super UP zone is determined (S9724A), and the process proceeds to S9725A. On the other hand, in the processing of S9722A, if it is determined that it is not the first variable display of the first special symbol (S9722A: No), the variable display mode with the effect of notifying the continuation of the probability variation rate exceeding UP zone is determined. (S9723A), the process proceeds to S9725A. In the process of S9725A, a timer value corresponding to 60 seconds is set for the timer value of the in-zone timer 223ya (S9725A), and the process proceeds to S9706.

Next, with reference to FIG. 894, the details of the special figure 2 effect mode setting process 29 (S5221A) in the twenty-ninth control example will be described. This special figure 2 effect mode setting process 29 (S5221A) is a process executed instead of the special figure 2 effect mode setting process 28 (see FIG. 882) in the 28th control example described above, special figure 2 effect mode setting Similar to the process 28 (see FIG. 882), this is a process for setting the effect mode of the variable display effect for showing the lottery result of the second special symbol.

Of the special figure 2 effect mode setting process 29 (see FIG. 894) in the 29th control example, in each process of S9611, S9622A, and S9651A, the special figure 2 effect mode setting process 28 in the 28th control example described above ( The same processes as those of S9611, S9622A, and S9651A in FIG. 882) are executed. Also, in the special figure 2 effect mode setting process 29 (see FIG. 894) in the present 29th control example, in the process of S9651A, when it is determined that the current game state is a variable probability state (S9651A: Yes), It is determined whether the value of the timer 223ya in the zone is a value greater than 0 (that is, in the probability variation rate exceeding UP zone) (S9661A), and the value of the timer 223ya in the zone is 0 (that is, the probability variation rate is not in the super UP zone) (S9661A: No), the process proceeds to S9622A.

On the other hand, in the process of S9661A, if it is determined that the value of the timer 223ya in the zone is a value greater than 0 (that is, in the probability variation rate exceeding UP zone) (S9661A: Yes), then this second special It is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the symbol is shorter than the value of the timer 223ya during the zone (S9662A), and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol this time is not shorter than the value of the timer 223ya during the zone ( long time) (S9662A: No), the process proceeds to S9622A. On the other hand, in the process of S9622A, if it is determined that the fluctuation time of the second special symbol this time is shorter than the value of the timer 223ya in the zone (S9662A: Yes), whether the lottery result is a small hit It is determined whether or not (S9663A), and when it is determined that it is a small hit (S9663A: Yes), the variable display mode with the discontinuation effect of the probability variation rate exceeding UP zone (see FIG. 883 (b) and FIG. 884) is determined. (S9664A), and the process proceeds to S9611. On the other hand, in the process of S9663A, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a small hit (S9663A: No), the process proceeds to S9622A.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-ninth control example, after the variable probability state is set, the variable display of the first special symbol (1 to 3 times) predetermined for each jackpot type ( A lottery of a second special symbol with a high degree of advantage is executed at a high frequency over the period until the end of the fluctuation display on the disadvantageous side (a lottery of the first special symbol that is disadvantageous is difficult to execute). It was configured to form a state (probability variable rate super UP zone). Specifically, a simultaneous variation specification that can execute the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol at the same time (in parallel) is adopted, and at least a specific number of times (1 The variation time of the first special symbol is set to be significantly longer than the variation time of the second special symbol until the variation display of the first special symbol is completed. In other words, it is configured to be able to execute the variable display of the second special symbol a plurality of times (around 20 times) during the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol. By configuring in this way, during the probability variation state of 1, only the lottery of the second special symbol with a high degree of advantage is executed, and the advantage degree is high (probability variation rate super UP zone) and the advantage degree is high. Since it is possible to set a state in which the execution frequency of the first special symbol having a lower advantage than the state is increased, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous during the variable probability state. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this 29th control example, the state of selecting a variation pattern with reference to the zone table 202dy2 (probability variation rate super UP zone) is shifted to the probability variation state, and the variation display of the first special symbol is a specific number of times ( 1 times to 3 times) was configured to be set only until the end, but the setting timing of the probability variation rate exceeding UP zone is not limited to this. For example, for the period from the transition to the time saving state to the end of the variation display of the first special symbol of the specific number of times, the probability variation ratio super UP zone is set (see the zone table 202dy2 for the variation pattern selected) configuration. By configuring in this way, even in a time-saving state with a low degree of advantage (disadvantageous), the game can be sharpened, so it is possible to further suppress the game from becoming monotonous. In addition, instead of immediately after the start of the probability variation state, from the middle of the probability variation state (for example, after the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol is completed 50 times in total) A probability variation ratio super UP zone is set. It may be configured as To make a player think that he/she does not want to win a big win until reaching a zone with a super probability variable ratio UP (want to win a big win after reaching a zone with a super probability variable ratio UP) by configuring in this way. Because it is possible, even though an advantageous variable state is set, it is expected that the special symbol lottery will continue to come off until the predetermined condition is satisfied (the number of lotteries in which the probability variable rate super UP zone is set). It is possible to realize novel playability.

In this 29th control example, the state of selecting a variation pattern with reference to the zone table 202dy2 (probability variation rate exceeding UP zone) is performed in the probability variation state of 1, and the variation display of the first special symbol is performed up to three times. Although it was configured to be limited to until, the number of fluctuations to set the probability variation rate exceeding UP zone is not limited to this, and can be arbitrarily determined. For example, in some jackpot types, it may be configured such that the probability variation rate exceeding UP zone continues until the variation display of the first special symbol 5 times or 10 times ends. Also, from the start of the probability variation state to the end, there may be provided a jackpot type in which the probability variation ratio super UP zone is always set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further diversify the variations of the higher probability variable ratio UP zone, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the twenty-ninth control example, similarly to the twenty-eighth control example described above, when one of the special symbols is in the process of executing the variable display corresponding to the big win, even if the other special symbol is drawn by lottery, the big win is won. However, it is not limited to this, and as in the 27th control example described above, even during the big hit fluctuation of one special symbol, the other It is configured to be able to draw a big hit with a special pattern, and the lottery of the special pattern on the side that was stopped and displayed with the first winning pattern (small hit or big hit pattern) becomes effective (the fluctuation display of the other special pattern is removed and the pattern is forced to stop. specification) may be adopted. By configuring in this way, in particular, the first special symbol in the probability variation probability super UP zone in which the variation time of the first special symbol is set to a significantly longer time (60 seconds) than the variation time of the second special symbol Even if the jackpot is won, it becomes a jackpot in the lottery of the second special pattern after that, and it is possible to forcibly stop the fluctuation of the jackpot of the first special pattern. 2 It is possible to further improve the rate of occurrence of the jackpot of the special symbol.

In this 29th control example, in the variable probability state, whether to refer to the zone table 202dy2 or to refer to the variable probability/time reduction table 202dy3 is determined based only on the number of executions of the first special symbol lottery. , but not limited to these. For example, by referring to both the number of lotteries of the first special symbol and the number of lotteries of the second special symbol, it is determined whether to refer to the zone table 202dy2 or to refer to the probability variation/time reduction table 202dy3. good too. More specifically, for example, in the variable probability state set after the end of the big hit A29, C29, F29, I29, the lottery of the first special symbol ends once (variation display of the first special symbol ends once ), or refer to the zone table 202dy2 until the lottery of the second special symbol is completed 30 times, and refer to the variable probability/time reduction table 202dy3 after any condition is met. Similarly, in the variable probability state set after the end of the big hits D29, G29, J29, the lottery of the first special symbol ends twice (the variable display of the first special symbol ends twice), or the second special symbol The zone table 202dy2 may be referenced until the lottery is completed 60 times, and the probability variable/time reduction table 202dy3 may be referenced after any condition is met. Furthermore, in the probability variable state set after the end of the big hits E29, H29, K29, the lottery of the first special symbol ends three times (the variable display of the first special symbol ends three times), or the second special symbol Until the lottery is completed 90 times, the zone table 202dy2 may be referred to, and after any condition is established, the variable probability/time reduction table 202dy3 may be referred to. In the case of such a configuration, after entering the variable probability state, the game ball does not enter the right first ball entrance 64r, but enters only the second ball entrance 640. Even so, it is possible to suppress the fact that the probability variable rate super UP zone continues too long (the lottery of the second special symbol with a high degree of advantage increases too much), so it is excessively advantageous to the player. can be suppressed.

<Thirtieth Control Example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirtieth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 895 to 903. FIG. In the twenty-ninth control example described above, after the variable probability state is set, over the period until the variable display of the first special symbol of the number of times predetermined for each jackpot type (variable display on the disadvantageous side) ends In addition, the lottery of the second special symbol having a high degree of advantage is frequently executed (the lottery of the disadvantageous first special symbol is difficult to be executed) to form an advantageous state (probability variable rate super UP zone). Specifically, a simultaneous variation specification that can execute the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol at the same time (in parallel) is adopted, and at least a specific number of times (1 The variation time of the first special symbol is set to be significantly longer than the variation time of the second special symbol until the variation display of the first special symbol is completed. In other words, during the execution of the variable display of one first special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed a plurality of times (around 20 times).

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the thirtieth control example, the types of special symbols that are likely to be executed are made different in the variable probability state and the time saving state set to the time saving state of normal symbols. That is, in the variable probability state, while controlling so that the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are executed substantially equally, in the time saving state, the probability variable ratio super UP zone in the 29th control example Similarly, it was configured to form an advantageous state in which only the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. In addition, in this thirtieth control example, when the lottery of the first number of special symbols predetermined in the variable probability state is completed, the specification that the variable probability state is terminated (so-called ST type probability variable state) is adopted. The number of times until the time-saving state of normal patterns ends (second number) than the number of times (first number) until the high probability probability state of special symbols ends after the probability state is set It consists of That is, when the variable probability state is set as the game state after the end of the big win, first, the variable probability state continues until the number of times of lottery of special symbols after the end of the big win reaches the first number (10 times), and the big win ends. The game state is set to a time-saving state by setting the low probability state of the special pattern by setting the number of times of lottery of the later special pattern to the first number, and after that, the number of times of lottery of the special pattern after the end of the big win is the second number. It is configured such that the time saving state continues until the number of times (50 times) is reached. In addition, when the lottery for the special symbols is executed 50 times, the time-saving state for the normal symbols is ended and the normal state is set. Therefore, in the thirtieth control example, when the probability variable jackpot ends, first, although the jackpot probability is higher than usual (1/25), the advantage degree (proportion of the probability variable jackpot) is low. A probability variable state is formed in which the second special symbol lottery with a high degree (percentage of probability variable jackpot) is executed almost equally (half and half), and the number of special symbol lotteries reaches the first number (10 times). Although the jackpot probability becomes a normal probability (1/100), it is configured to form a time-saving state in which only the lottery of the advantageous second special symbol is executed. As a result, it is possible to sequentially set the probability variable state and the time saving state that are configured to have different merits (big hit probability, frequency of the second special symbol lottery), so that the game characteristics are switched on the way (merit, demerit) are replaced), a novel operation can be realized. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The pachinko machine 10 in the thirtieth control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-ninth control example described above in that the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main controller 110 are partially changed. , the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the No. 29 control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the twenty-ninth control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 895, a characteristic presentation mode in the thirtieth control example will be described. Figure 895 (a) is a diagram showing an effect mode during the variable probability state in the present thirtieth control example, Figure 895 (b) is a diagram showing an effect mode of the time saving state in the present thirtieth control example be. Here, as described above, in the thirtieth control example, different merits (superiorities) are provided for both the variable probability state and the time saving state. Specifically, in the variable state, the probability of the jackpot is higher than in the short-time state, so that it is superior to the short-time state. It is configured to be superior to the probability variable state in that the ratio of For this reason, it cannot be generally determined which game state has a higher degree of advantage. Therefore, in the thirtieth control example, both the variable probability state and the time saving state are unified under the name of "chance time".

As shown in FIG. 895 (a), in the variable probability state in the thirtieth control example, the variation of the third symbol showing the lottery result of the first special symbol with a low degree of advantage relative to the substantially left half of the main display area Dm A left display area DmL for executing a display effect is formed, and a right display area for executing a variable display effect of a third symbol indicating a lottery result of a second special symbol having a high degree of advantage in the substantially right half. DmR is formed. An enemy character 811 is displayed in the left display area DmL to indicate that the degree of advantage is relatively low in the case of a big win, and the right display area DmR is relatively advantageous in the case of a big win. An adventurer character 801 is displayed to imply that the degree is high. These allow the player to easily understand in which display area it is more advantageous to report the big win.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 895(a), the characters "chance time A", the characters "high expectation of jackpot", and the characters " The text "Probability variation expectation medium" is displayed. To make a player easily understand that the currently set chance time is a chance time A (probability variable state) in which there is a high chance of winning a jackpot normally, though the probability of the jackpot is high, by these display contents. can be done. In addition, information indicating the number of remaining special symbol lotteries until the chance time ends (until the variable probability state and the time saving state after the variable probability state ends) is displayed in the display area Dm1. The example of FIG. 895(a) illustrates a state where the fifth variable display is started in the variable probability state, and characters such as "45 times remaining until the end of the chance time" are displayed. In addition, the characters "In Chance Time" are displayed in the small display area Ds2.

Next, with reference to FIG. 895(b), an effect mode in the time saving state will be described. As shown in FIG. 895 (b), in the time saving state, similar to the probability variation ratio super UP zone (see FIG. 883 (a)) in the 29th control example described above, the advantage degree in most of the main display area Dm The variable display of the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the high second special symbol is executed, and the variable display effect of the third symbol for indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol is formed in the lower right part of the main display area Dm. is displayed in a relatively inconspicuous (difficult to see) manner in the small display area Dm8a. As a result, it is possible to draw attention to the variable display effect of the third symbol corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol, which has a high degree of advantage and a high execution frequency.

Further, as shown in FIG. 895(b), the characters "chance time B", the characters "low expectation of jackpot", and the characters " The characters "Probability variation expectation high" are displayed. By these display contents, the player can easily understand that the currently set chance time is the chance time B (variable probability state) which has a low probability of winning the big win but has a very high possibility of winning the variable probability big win. be able to. In addition, for the display area Dm1, until the chance time ends (until the probability variable state and the time saving state after the probability variable state end) are displayed. The fact that the characters "during chance time" are displayed in the small display area Ds2 is common to the case where the variable probability state (chance time A) is set (see FIG. 895(a)).

<Electrical configuration in the thirtieth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 896(a), the details of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the thirtieth control example will be described. FIG. 896(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the thirtieth control example. As shown in FIG. 896(a), the ROM 202 in the thirtieth control example replaces the jackpot type selection 29 table 202by with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the twenty-ninth control example described above (see FIG. 885(a)). The difference is that the jackpot type selection 30 table 202bα is provided, the variation pattern 30 table 202dα is provided instead of the variation pattern 29 table 202dy, and the variation pattern scenario table 202ya is deleted. . Other configurations are the same as those of the ROM 202 in the twenty-ninth control example described above (see FIG. 885(a)), so detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

First, with reference to FIG. 897, details of the jackpot type selection 30 table 202bα in the thirtieth control example will be described. FIG. 897 is a diagram showing the defined contents of the jackpot type selection 30 table 202bα in the thirtieth control example. As shown in FIG. 897, in this jackpot type selection 30 table 202bα, the jackpot type that can be selected for each type of special symbol and the value range of the first hit type counter C2 are defined in association with each other. there is More specifically, as shown in FIG. 897, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 49" as associated with "jackpot A30". "Big win B30" is defined in association with the value of the first win type counter C2 in the range of "50 to 99". "Jackpot A30" is a jackpot (4-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds is set to 4 rounds and the probability variable state is set as the game state after the jackpot ends. In addition, "jackpot B30" is a jackpot (4 rounds normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds is set to 4 rounds and the time-saving state is set as the game state after the jackpot ends. Of the 100 random numbers "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 50 random numbers are associated with "jackpot A30" and "jackpot B30". When a jackpot is won in the lottery of one special symbol, the ratio of determining the "jackpot A30" and the percentage of deciding the "jackpot B30" are both 50% (50/100).

In addition, when the probability variable state is set as the probability variable jackpot, the probability variable number of times of 10 times and the time saving number of times of 50 times are set, so the lottery of special symbols is executed 10 times after the probability variable jackpot ends. Until then, it is set to a variable probability state, set to a time saving state within a range from 10 times to 50 times for the number of lotteries of special symbols, and then set to a normal state. On the other hand, when the time saving state is set as a normal jackpot, the number of times of time saving is set to 25 times. is set to the time-saving state, and then shifts to the normal state. In other words, when the probability variable jackpot is set, 10 times the probability variable state and 40 times the time saving state are set, while when the normal jackpot is set, only 25 times the time saving state is set, so the probability variable jackpot is better than the normal jackpot. higher advantage.

Further, as shown in FIG. 897, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of "0 to 24" with "jackpot C30". "Jackpot D30" is defined in association with the value of the hit type counter C2 in the range of "25 to 34", and "jackpot E30" is defined in the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 from "35 to 99". ” are defined in association with each other. The "jackpot C30" is a jackpot (10 rounds variable probability jackpot) in which the number of rounds is set to 10 rounds and the most advantageous variable probability state for the player is set as the game state after the completion of the jackpot. In addition, "jackpot D30" is a jackpot (8-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds is set to 8 rounds and the variable probability state most advantageous to the player is set as the game state after the completion of the jackpot. Furthermore, "jackpot E30" is a jackpot (4 rounds variable probability jackpot) in which the number of rounds is set to 4 and the most advantageous variable probability state for the player is set as the game state after the completion of the jackpot. Of the 100 random numbers "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 25 random numbers are associated with "jackpot C30", "jackpot D30", and "jackpot E30". Since there are 10 pieces and 65 pieces, the ratio of determining "jackpot C30" when winning the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery is 25% (25/100), and "jackpot D30" is determined. The ratio is 10% (10/100), and the ratio of determining the "jackpot E30" is 65% (65/100). Therefore, when the second special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the majority is set to the minimum number of rounds (4 rounds), but the game state after the jackpot ends is advantageous regardless of which jackpot type is selected. is set to a high probability variable state, the lottery for the second special symbol can be said to be a lottery with a higher degree of advantage than the lottery for the first special symbol.

Next, with reference to FIG. 898(a), the details of the variation pattern 30 table 202dα in the thirtieth control example will be described. FIG. 898(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern 30 table 202dα in the thirtieth control example. As shown in FIG. 898(a), the variation pattern 30 table 202dα in the thirtieth control example is a normal table 202dα1 that is referred to for selecting a variation pattern when a special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state. and a time saving table 202dα2 that is referred to for selecting a variation pattern when a special symbol lottery is executed in a time saving state, and a variation pattern when a special symbol lottery is executed in a variable probability state. and a probability variation table 202dα3 that is referred to at least. Among these, the normal table 202dα1 has the same specified contents as the normal table 202dy1 of the variation pattern 29 table 202dy in the 29th control example described above (in the lottery of the first special symbol, 7 seconds to 140 seconds depending on the lottery result While the fluctuation time in the range is selected, the second special symbol lottery has a regulation content in which a fluctuation time of 600 seconds is always selected), so detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

FIG. 898(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the time saving table 202dα2 in the thirtieth control example. As shown in Figure 898 (b), in the time saving table 202dα2, as a variation pattern when the first special symbol is removed, the value of the variation type counter CS1 can take the entire range ("0 to 999" range) On the other hand, a deviation long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 60000 ms (60 seconds) is defined in correspondence. In addition, as a variation pattern at the time of the first special symbol jackpot, the variation type counter CS1 value can take the entire range (range of "0 to 999"), variation time 60000 ms (60 seconds) per long variation are defined in association with each other.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 898 (b), as a variation pattern when the second special symbol is out (completely out or small hit), the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 49" for the range , and an outlier short-circuit variation A with a variation time of 1000 ms (1 second) is associated and defined, and an out-of-short variation with a variation time of 3000 ms (3 seconds) for the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the range of "50 to 949" B is defined in association with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and an out-of-short fluctuation C with a fluctuation time of 5000 ms (5 seconds) is defined in association with the range of "950 to 999" of the fluctuation type counter CS1. That is, 50 random numbers (counter values) are defined in association with the deviation short-circuit variation A with a variation time of 1 second, and 900 random values (counter values) are defined for the deviation short-circuit variation B with a variation time of 3 seconds. 50 random numbers (counter values) are defined in association with the deviation short fluctuation C whose fluctuation time is 5 seconds. Since the variation type counter CS1 can take 1000 values from "0 to 999", if the second special symbol is lost in the lottery, the rate of selecting the variation time of 1 second is 5% (50 /1000), the percentage of selecting a variation time of 3 seconds is 90% (900/1000), and the percentage of selecting a variation time of 5 seconds is 5% (50/1000). Therefore, the average fluctuation time when the second special symbol comes off is 3 seconds (1 second x 5% + 3 seconds x 90% + 5 seconds x 5%). In addition, as shown in FIG. 898 (b), as a variation pattern at the time of the second special symbol jackpot, the variation time is defined in association with a per-short variation of 3000 ms (3 seconds).

From these stipulations, when this time saving table 202dα2 is referred to, the fluctuation time in the case where the first special symbol lottery is executed is fixed to 60 seconds, while the second special symbol lottery is executed. Since the variation time is 3 seconds on average when the second special symbol is drawn, the second special symbol lottery can be performed 20 times on average while the first special symbol lottery is performed once. In other words, when the jackpot is won, the disadvantageous first special pattern lottery, in which the disadvantageous normal jackpot is determined at a rate of 50%, is hardly performed, and the advantageous second special pattern, in which the probability variable jackpot is determined when the jackpot is won. To form an advantageous state in which drawing of symbols can be executed. Therefore, the time saving state can be configured to have a higher degree of advantage than the variable probability state in terms of the rate at which the variable probability state is provided at the time of winning the jackpot.

Next, with reference to FIG. 898(c), details of the probability variation table 202dα3 will be described. FIG. 898(c) is a diagram showing the defined contents of this probability variation table 202dα3. As shown in FIG. 898 (c), in the probability variation table 202dα3, the contents common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol are defined, and the defined contents are the time saving table 202dα2 (Fig. 898 ( It is the same as the defined contents of the second special symbol in b) see). Therefore, when the probability variation table 202dα3 is referred to, the variation time of the first special symbol and the variation time of the second special symbol are 3 seconds on average. That is, a state is formed in which the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are executed substantially equally. Therefore, compared to the time saving state, the possibility of winning the jackpot of the first special symbol is increased in the probability changing state, so in terms of the game state set when the jackpot is won, the probability changing state is higher than the time saving state. method is less advantageous for the player.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the thirtieth control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the thirtieth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 899 to 902. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 899, details of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 30 (Y371) in the thirtieth control example will be described. This first special symbol variation pattern selection process 30 (Y371) is a process executed in place of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 29 (see FIG. 890) in the twenty-ninth control example described above, and is the first special symbol. Similar to the variation pattern selection process 29 (see FIG. 890), it is a process for selecting a variation pattern (variation time) according to the lottery result of the first special symbol. FIG. 899 is a flow chart showing this first special symbol variation pattern selection process 30 (Y371).

Of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 30 (see FIG. 899) in this thirtieth control example, in each process of Y501 to Y503, Y505 to Y508, and Y552, the first special symbol in the twenty-ninth control example described above The same processes as Y501 to Y503, Y505 to Y508, and Y552 of the variation pattern selection process 29 (see FIG. 890) are executed. In addition, in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 30 (see FIG. 899) in the present thirtieth control example, when the process of Y503 is completed, the variation pattern table corresponding to the current game state is identified (Y561), and processed. to Y552.

Although not shown, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 30 executed in place of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 29 also includes the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 30 (see FIG. 899). ) is modified so that the variation pattern table is read out by the same process as the process of Y561.

Next, with reference to FIG. 900, the details of the change start update process 30 (Y372) in the thirtieth control example will be described. This update process 30 at the start of fluctuation (Y372) is a process executed instead of the update process at the start of fluctuation (see FIG. 872) in the twenty-ninth control example (and the twenty-eighth control example). Similar to the process (see FIG. 872), this is a process for updating the game state at the fluctuation start timing. FIG. 900 is a flow chart showing this update process 30 (Y372) at the start of fluctuation.

Of the fluctuation start update process 30 (see FIG. 900) in the thirtieth control example, each process of Y631 to Y633 corresponds to the fluctuation start update process (FIG. 872) are executed. Further, when the fluctuation start update process 30 (see FIG. 900) in the thirtieth control example is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the probability change counter 203αa is 1 (Y641), and the probability change counter When it is determined that the value of 203αa is 1 (Y641: Yes), the value of the variable probability counter 203αa is decremented by 1 and updated to 0 (Y642), and a state command indicating transition to the time saving state is set. (Y643), the process proceeds to Y631. On the other hand, in the process of Y641, if it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203αa is not 1 (Y641: No), it means that it is not time to subtract the number of variable probability, so the processing of Y642 and Y643 is skipped. Then, the process shifts to Y631.

Next, with reference to FIG. 901, the details of the update process 30 (Y751) at the time of fluctuation stop in the thirtieth control example will be described. This update process 30 at fluctuation stop (Y751) is a process executed instead of the update process at fluctuation stop (see FIG. 875) in the twenty-ninth control example (and twenty-eighth control example). Similar to the process (see FIG. 875), this process is executed to update the gaming state when the special symbols are stopped from fluctuating. FIG. 901 is a flow chart showing this updating process 30 (Y751) at the time of fluctuation stop.

In each of the processes Y635 to Y638 in the fluctuation stop update process 30 (see FIG. 901) in the thirtieth control example, the fluctuation stop update process (Fig. 875) are executed. Further, when the update process 30 (see FIG. 901) at the time of fluctuation stop in the thirtieth control example is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable probability counter 203αa is a value greater than 0 (Y645), When it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203αa is greater than 0 (Y645: Yes), the value of the variable probability counter 203αa is updated by subtracting 1 (Y646), and the value of the variable probability counter 203αa after subtraction. has become 0 (Y647). In the process of Y647, if it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203αa after subtraction has become 0 (Y647: Yes), set the state command indicating the transition to the time saving state (Y648), and proceed to Y635 and migrate. On the other hand, in the process of Y647, if it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203αa after subtraction is not 0 (is a value of 1 or more) (Y647: No), the process of Y648 is skipped. , the process proceeds to Y635. Also, in the process of Y645, if it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203αa is not greater than 0 (that is, it is 0) (Y645: No), it means that it is not time to subtract the number of variable probability. Therefore, each process of Y646 to Y648 is skipped and the process proceeds to Y635.

Next, with reference to FIG. 902, details of the jackpot control process 30 (Y1041) in the thirtieth control example will be described. This jackpot control process 30 (Y1041) is a process that is executed instead of the jackpot control process 29 (see FIG. 879) in the twenty-ninth control example described above. It is a process for executing various controls during execution of a game. FIG. 902 is a flow chart showing the jackpot control process 30 (Y1041) in this thirtieth control example.

Of the jackpot control processing 30 (see FIG. 902) in the thirtieth control example, in each of Y11601 to Y11612, Y11633 to Y11635, and Y11641, the jackpot control processing 29 (see FIG. 879) in the twenty-ninth control example described above Y11601 to Y11612, Y11633 to Y11635, and Y11641 of Y11601 to Y11635 are executed. In addition, in the jackpot control process 30 (see FIG. 902) in the present thirtieth control example, when it is determined that the current jackpot is a probability variable jackpot in the process of Y11641 (Y11641: Yes), the counter value of the probability variable counter 203αa 10 is set to 50 in the counter value of the counter 203h during time saving (Y11661), and the process proceeds to Y11633. On the other hand, in the process of Y11641, if it is determined that the current jackpot is not a probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot) (Y11641: No), set 25 to the counter value of the counter 203h during time saving (Y11662) , the process proceeds to Y11633.

<Regarding the control process of the sound lamp control device in the thirtieth control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the thirtieth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 903 is a flow chart showing the state command reception processing 30 in the thirtieth control example. This state command reception process 30 (S4231A) is a process executed in place of the state command reception process 5 (see FIG. 263) in the twenty-ninth control example (and the fifth control example). 263), this is a process for performing control according to the information indicating the game state notified by the main controller 110 by the state command.

In each of the processes of S9001, S9003, S9005, and S9009 of the state command reception process 30 (see FIG. 903) in the thirtieth control example, the state command reception process 5 in the twenty-ninth control example (and the fifth control example) is executed. The same processes as those of S9001, S9003, S9005, and S9009 (see FIG. 263) are executed. In addition, in the state command reception processing 30 (see FIG. 903) in the thirtieth control example, if it is determined in the processing of S9003 that a state command indicating a change to the normal state has been received (S9003: Yes), is set (S9021A), and this process is terminated.

In addition, in the state command reception processing 30 (see FIG. 903) in the thirtieth control example, if it is determined in the processing of S9005 that a state command indicating that the gaming state has been changed to the time saving state is received (S9005: Yes), set the presentation mode indicating the entry into the chance time B (S9022A), and terminate this process. Furthermore, in the state command reception processing 30 (see FIG. 903) in the thirtieth control example, if it is determined in the processing of S9009 that a state command indicating that the gaming state has been changed to the variable probability state is received (S9009: Yes), set the effect mode indicating the entry into the chance time A (S9023A), and end this process.

By executing this state command reception process 30 (see FIG. 903), it is possible to set a production mode (see FIG. 895) according to the type of chance time. It is possible to easily understand the playability.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the thirtieth control example, in the probability variable state and the time saving state set to the time saving state of the normal symbols, by making the types of special symbols that are likely to be executed different, both It is configured such that merits different from each other are imparted to the game state. Specifically, in the variable probability state, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are controlled to be executed almost evenly, while in the time saving state, only the lottery for the second special symbol is performed. was configured to form an advantageous condition in which In addition, in this thirtieth control example, when the lottery of the first number of special symbols predetermined in the variable probability state is completed, the specification that the variable probability state is terminated (so-called ST type probability variable state) is adopted. The number of times until the time-saving state of normal patterns ends (second number) than the number of times (first number) until the high probability probability state of special symbols ends after the probability state is set It consists of That is, when the variable probability state is set as the game state after the end of the big win, first, the variable probability state continues until the number of times of lottery of special symbols after the end of the big win reaches the first number (10 times), and the big win ends. The game state is set to a time-saving state by setting the low probability state of the special pattern by setting the number of times of lottery of the later special pattern to the first number, and after that, the number of times of lottery of the special pattern after the end of the big win is the second number. It is configured so that the time saving state continues until the number of times (50 times) is reached. In addition, when the lottery for the special symbols is executed 50 times, the time-saving state for the normal symbols is terminated and the normal state is set. Therefore, in the thirtieth control example, when the probability variable jackpot ends, first, although the jackpot probability is higher than usual (1/25), the advantage degree (proportion of the probability variable jackpot) is low. A probability variable state is formed in which the second special symbol lottery with a high degree (percentage of probability variable jackpot) is executed almost equally (half and half), and the number of special symbol lotteries reaches the first number (10 times). Although the jackpot probability becomes a normal probability (1/100), it is configured to form a time-saving state in which only the lottery of the advantageous second special symbol is executed. As a result, it is possible to sequentially set the probability variable state and the time saving state that are configured to have different merits (big hit probability, frequency of the second special symbol lottery), so that the game characteristics are switched on the way (merit, demerit) are replaced), a novel operation can be realized. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the thirtieth control example, similarly to the twenty-eighth control example and the twenty-ninth control example described above, when one special symbol is executing a variable display corresponding to a big hit, the other special symbol is drawn by lottery. Although a specification was adopted in which a jackpot could not be won even if it was executed (only a complete loss or a small win could be won) was adopted, but not limited to this, as in the above-mentioned 27th control example, etc., one special symbol Even if the big hit fluctuates, the other special pattern is configured to be able to draw a big hit, and the lottery of the special pattern on the side stopped and displayed with the first winning pattern (small hit or big hit pattern) becomes effective (fluctuation of the other special pattern The display may come off and be forcibly stopped by the pattern) specification may be adopted. By configuring in this way, especially in the time-saving state in which the variation time of the first special symbol is set to a significantly longer time (60 seconds) than the variation time of the second special symbol, the first special symbol is a big hit. Even if it wins the lottery, it becomes a big win in the lottery of the second special pattern after that, and the big win fluctuation of the first special pattern can be forced to stop without being out of order, so that the big win of the second special pattern advantageous in the time-saving state can be obtained. The occurrence rate can be further improved.

In this thirtieth control example, while the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are executed substantially equally in the variable probability state, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is the second special in the time saving state. It was constructed so that only the lottery of the second special pattern with a high degree of advantage is executed by greatly lengthening the fluctuation time of the pattern, but conversely, in the time-saving state, the lottery of the first special pattern is executed. While the lottery of the second special symbol is executed almost evenly, the degree of advantage is high by significantly lengthening the variation time of the first special symbol with respect to the variation time of the second special symbol in the variable probability state. It may be configured such that only the lottery of 2 special symbols is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further enhance the superiority in the variable probability state, so that it is possible to make the player more strongly expect to win the jackpot during the variable probability state. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

In this thirtieth control example, by differentiating the variation time of the first special symbol in the variable probability state and the time saving state (differentiating the variation pattern table to be referred to), the lottery frequency of the first special symbol with a low degree of advantage is different. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the variation pattern table to be referred to in the first half and the second half of the variable probability state may be different, and the game characteristics may be different between the first half and the second half of the variable probability state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous in the variable probability state.

In the thirtieth control example, the first number of times (10 times) special symbol lottery is executed in the variable probability state to shift to the time saving state, and the second number of times (40 times) after shifting to the time saving state. Although it was configured to shift to the normal state by executing the lottery of the special symbols, the number of times the variable probability state continues does not have to be fixed. For example, every time a special pattern lottery is executed in a variable probability state, a lottery (falling lottery) is performed to determine whether or not to fall from a high probability state of a special pattern to a low probability state of a special pattern (falling lottery). It may be constructed so that the variation time of the first special symbol becomes longer (the lottery frequency of the first special symbol with a lower degree of advantage becomes lower) when the player is elected to the time-saving state. By constructing in this way, the lottery frequency of the second special pattern having a high degree of advantage is increased when a generally unpleasant situation such as falling from the high probability state of the special pattern to the low probability state occurs. can alleviate the player's disappointment. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from declining.

<First Effect Modification of 26th Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 911 to 913, a modification of the battle effect (see FIG. 800) executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-sixth control example described above will be described. In the twenty-sixth control example described above, when a predetermined operation (continuous hit operation or long press operation) is performed on the effect button 22 (operating means) operable by the player, the remaining enemy character 880a is displayed. A battle effect (operation effect) that decreases (variable) the HP value (level information) is configured to be executable, and as a result of the battle effect, the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a is "0". When an advantageous performance result) is displayed, the player can be notified of the fact that the player has won a jackpot in a special symbol lottery (that the player is given a benefit advantageous to the player).

Furthermore, during the production period during which the battle production is executed, during the preparation period before the SW valid period (operation valid period) in which the player can effectively operate the production button 22 is set, the enemy character 880a remains. A preemptive attack effect (see FIG. 800(b)) that reduces the HP value in advance is configured to be executable, and the effect of the current battle effect is highly likely to be advantageous to the player. The player is made to operate the performance button 22 willingly by letting the player grasp the setting before the is set.

However, in the twenty-sixth control example described above, when the SW valid period is set without executing the preemptive attack effect (without previously decreasing the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a), the same SW valid period is set. There is a problem that the player's motivation to operate the effect button 22 gradually decreases because the battle effect is only executed to reduce the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a toward "0" within the period. rice field.

On the other hand, in this modified example, the length of the SW valid period set in the battle production reach can be changed, and the effect result advantageous to the player is displayed as the production result of the battle production reach. When possible (when the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is a big hit), rather than when a disadvantageous production result is displayed for the player (when the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is lost) It is configured to facilitate the setting of a long SW valid period.

With this configuration, even if the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a has not been decreased in advance, it is possible to decrease the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a based on the operation of the effect button 22. By varying the length of the period (SW effective period), it is possible for the player to predict that the effect result of the current battle effect is highly likely to be an effect advantageous to the player.

In addition, when it is possible to display a performance result advantageous to the player as the performance result of the battle performance (a performance result in which the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a is "0"), a long SW effective period is configured to be easily set. Therefore, the period required to reduce the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a to "0" can be lengthened, and the player can easily enjoy operating the performance button 22 for a long time.

Furthermore, in this modification, when the SW valid period (5 seconds) longer than the normal SW valid period (3 seconds) is set, the player is informed that the long SW valid period is set (has been set). A plurality of notification timings can be set as notification timings to be notified. Specifically, before the SW valid period is actually set, the first notification timing capable of informing the player that a long SW valid period is set and the actual SW valid period are set. a second notification timing capable of informing the player that a long SW valid period has been set after the SW effective period is set.

By configuring in this way, the player can enjoy the battle production reach while expecting that a long SW effective period is set (has been set), and the production effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in this modification, as a notification mode for informing the player that the SW valid period (5 seconds) longer than the normal SW valid period (3 seconds) is set (has been set), the normal After displaying the validity period gauge ga4 corresponding to the SW validity period (3 seconds), the display form corresponding to the SW validity period (2 seconds), which is the difference, can be displayed. In other words, it is configured so that the player can recognize that a long SW valid period has been set after making the player think that a normal SW valid period has been set.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide an unexpected effect to the player who is watching the battle effect reach while expecting a long SW valid period to be set. In addition, compared to the case where the display mode corresponding to the long SW valid period (5 seconds) is displayed from the beginning, it is possible to visually grasp how much longer the SW valid period is set compared to normal. Therefore, it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

<Regarding the contents of the effect in the first modification of the twenty-sixth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 911, among the various effects executed in the first modification of the twenty-sixth control example, the characteristic effect contents will be described. This first effect modification example differs from the above-described twenty-sixth control example in that the content of the effect executed in the battle effect is different, but the rest is the same. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

In the first modified example of effect, as in the twenty-sixth control example described above, in the battle effect, the first part effect (effect executed before the SW valid period is set) and the second part effect (the effect of decreasing the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a based on the operation of the effect button 22), and the content of the effect executed during the first part effect is made different. there is

Here, with reference to FIG. 911, description will be given of the effect contents of the first part effect in the battle effect ready-to-win which is executed by the pachinko machine 10 in this first effect modification. FIG. 911(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when an effect of powering up the ally character 801a is executed as the first part effect. As shown in FIG. 911(a), when the first part effect is executed, a friendly character 801a and an enemy character 880a are displayed in the same manner as the display screen of the twenty-sixth control example (see FIG. 800(a)). are displayed, and an HP gauge 890 for indicating the HP value of the enemy character 880a is displayed. Among the various display modes displayed on the display screen shown in FIG. 911(a), the same display modes as those of the twenty-sixth control example described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. .

In this first modified example of production, as the production of the first part, in addition to the preemptive attack production that reduces the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a, an attack assistance production that powers up the ally character 801a is configured to be executable. When the attack assistance effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 911(a), a character 801d imitating an angel is displayed, and the effect of powering up the ally character 801a by the character 801d is executed.

Then, as a display mode for informing the player that the friendly character 801a has been powered up by the attack assist effect, an aura 801a1 is displayed around the friendly character 801a, and "Blessed by an angel" is displayed in the secondary display area Ds. Power up" comment is displayed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player of the content of the effect executed as the first part effect (attack assistance effect) in an easy-to-understand manner. The state in which the display screen shown in FIG. 911(a) is displayed is the state in which the player is notified that the ally character 801a has been powered up by the attack assistance effect. It is configured so that the player cannot grasp whether the is given. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the production effect given by the attack assistance production.

Next, an example of the display screen displayed during the second part effect executed after the display of FIG. 911(a) will be described with reference to FIG. 911(b). FIG. 911(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen notifying that a long SW valid period will be set during the second part rendering.

As shown in FIG. 911(b), in the second part production, the display mode of the friendly character 801a displayed in the first part production executed before the second part production (the friendly character wearing the aura 801a1 801a) is displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the second part effect is being executed according to the effect result of the first part effect. In FIG. 911(b), a longer than normal SW valid period is set as the length of the SW valid period set during the second part production as the production result of the first part production (the production effect of the attack assist production). A display mode is displayed for informing the player that the game will be played.

Specifically, "Long button is occurring!" A display mode corresponding to a long SW effective period (5 seconds) is displayed. Then, as the additional period gauge ga4c indicating the difference (2 seconds) from the normal SW effective period (3 seconds), a display mode with a special effect (a mode indicating light emission is displayed in the drawing) is displayed.

In the state shown in FIG. 911(b), the second part is being produced and the SW effective period is not set, so the SW effective period is set above the display effect button Sw6b. The letters "ready for repeated hits" are displayed to indicate that it is before the game is played (preparation period). That is, when the display mode shown in FIG. 911(b) is displayed, the SW valid period set this time is longer than the normal SW valid period at a stage before the SW valid period is actually set. The player is informed that it is the period. Therefore, it is possible to make the player willingly operate the production button 22 to reduce the remaining HP value of the enemy character 880a to "0".

In addition, by applying a special effect to the additional period gauge ga4c that indicates the difference from the normal SW valid period, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the current SW valid period is longer than usual. It is possible to make it easier for the player to visually grasp the length of the additional period.

Next, with reference to FIG. 912, each display mode for notifying the player of the length of the SW effective period in the battle effect reach of the first modification will be described. FIG. 911(b) described above is an example of a case in which the player is notified that a long SW effective period is set at a timing (first notification timing) before the timing at which the SW effective period is actually set. , and the display pattern for displaying the effective period gauge ga4 indicating the long SW effective period at the first notification timing has been described.

In this way, by notifying that a long SW effective period is set at the first notification timing, the player is informed that the long SW effective period is set before the SW effective period is actually set. Since the notification can be made, the player can be motivated to operate the performance button 22 while knowing that the situation is likely to result in an advantageous performance result.

However, in the example described above with reference to FIG. Since the length of the SW valid period is determined to be the normal length (3 seconds), there is a problem that the presentation effect is lowered.

On the other hand, in the present modified example of effect, as shown in FIG. The effective period gauge ga4 indicating the period is displayed, and then the additional period gauge ga4c is displayed (see FIG. 912(b)). In other words, unlike the effect mode shown in FIG. 911(b), the timing of notifying that the SW effective period is set is different from the timing of notifying that the long SW effective period is set. It is configured to be able to notify at the first notification timing that a long SW effective period is set in the mode.

By configuring in this way, when the effect of notifying that the long SW valid period is set is executed at the first notification timing, the player is notified that the long SW valid period is set. It is possible to expect it for a longer period of time. Also, even if the long SW valid period is not set, at the time when FIG. Since it is possible to leave the character, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the executed battle production reach at an early stage.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 912(a) and 912(b), specific display contents of the time difference effect mode executed at the first notification timing will be described. FIG. 912(a) is a diagram showing a part of the display screen displayed in the first half period when the time difference effect mode is set as a long button display indicating that a long SW effective period is set, FIG. 912(b) is a diagram showing part of the display screen in the second half period when the time difference rendering mode is set.

When the time lag effect mode is set as the second part effect of the battle effect ready-to-reach, as shown in FIG. Then, the same display mode as the normal display mode (see FIG. 801(a)) for notifying that the SW valid period is set is displayed. Note that the display mode shown in FIG. 912(a) is the same as FIG. Detailed description is omitted.

Then, when the first half period has passed, as shown in FIG. 912(b), the effective period gauge ga4 is displayed as a display mode for informing the player that the currently set SW effective period is a long SW effective period. An additional period gauge ga4c is additionally displayed, and a display mode with a flame Sw6a is displayed on the display effect button Sw6b as a long button display mode indicating that a long SW effective period is set. Then, the characters "Generate long button!!" and the characters "Extension of period!!" are displayed, and the player is informed that the effective period of the SW that allows continuous hitting operation is longer than usual.

The timing at which the display screen shown in FIG. 912(b) is displayed is the timing before the SW effective period is set, and the remaining effective period ga4a indicated using the effective period gauge ga4 decreases. Since it is in a state where it has not been completed, the additional period gauge ga4c is displayed on the right side of the valid period gauge ga4. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the length of the remaining valid period ga4a has been extended by the additional period gauge ga4c.

Further, the display mode (display color) of the additional period gauge ga4c is configured to be the same as the display mode (display color) of the remaining valid period ga4a. With this configuration, when the additional period gauge ga4c is displayed, it is possible for the player to be notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the remaining valid period ga4a has increased. The display mode (display color) of the additional period gauge ga4c may be displayed in a display mode (display color) different from that of the remaining valid period ga4a. With this configuration, it is possible to determine how much the remaining effective period ga4a has increased during the period from when the additional period gauge ga4c is displayed until when the SW effective period is actually set. The prediction can be facilitated by comparing the length with the length of the additional period gauge ga4c.

In addition, in the first modified example of effect, similarly to the twenty-sixth control example described above, the length of the gauge indicating the remaining valid period ga4a and the degree of decrease of the gauge are used to play the remaining period of the SW valid period. Although a configuration is used in which the operator can grasp the values, the present invention is not limited to this, and specific numerical values may be used for display. In this case, a numerical value corresponding to the length indicated by the additional period gauge ga4c may be added to the numerical value indicating the remaining effective period ga4a.

Furthermore, if the display mode of the remaining valid period ga4a is configured to vary according to the length of the remaining valid period, for example, when the remaining valid period ga4a has not decreased, the color is blue, and the remaining valid period If the display mode is configured to be variable such that "yellow" is displayed when ga4a has decreased by 50% or more, and "red" is displayed when the remaining valid period ga4a has decreased by 90% or more, additional When "white" is displayed as the display mode of the period gauge ga4c and the remaining period of time additionally displayed on the additional period gauge ga4c is reduced (the remaining period of validity ga4a before the additional period gauge ga4c is displayed It is good to configure it so that it is displayed in "blue" when the period is reached). By configuring in this way, the relationship between the remaining length of the remaining effective period ga4a and the variable mode of the display mode can be unified between when the additional period gauge ga4c is displayed and when it is not displayed. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the process of setting the display mode for indicating the remaining valid period.

In addition, without being limited to this, even when the additional period gauge ga4c is displayed, the display mode can be changed in the order of "blue", "yellow", and "red" according to the decrease rate of the remaining valid period ga4a. It may be configured to By configuring in this way, the relationship between the elapsed time after the SW valid period is set and the remaining valid period of the SW valid period, depending on whether the additional period gauge ga4c is displayed or not is displayed. Since the nature (ratio) can be notified to the player in the same display mode, it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

As described above with reference to FIGS. 912(a) and 912(b), in the effect mode in which the length of the SW effective period is notified at the first notification timing, the SW effective period is actually set. Since the effect mode was to notify the player of the length of the SW valid period to be set before, the player is not expected to set a long SW valid period until the SW valid period is actually set. Although it was expected, it was understood that a short SW valid period was set because the length of the current SW valid period was grasped by the player when the SW valid period was actually set. There is a risk that the player will not intentionally operate the effect button 22 during the SW valid period.

On the other hand, in the present modified example of effect, in addition to the above-described first notification timing, that is, the timing before the SW effective period is actually set, the predetermined timing after the SW effective period is actually set Also at the timing (second notification timing), the additional period gauge ga4c is configured to be displayable. Here, with reference to FIGS. 912(c) and (d), display contents when the additional period gauge ga4c is displayed at the second notification timing will be described.

FIG. 912(c) is a display screen displayed during the first half of the SW effective period when the long button display is executed at the second notification timing as a long button display indicating that a long SW effective period is set. Fig. 912(d) is a diagram showing a part of the display screen in the latter half of the SW effective period when the long button display is executed at the second notification timing. .

As shown in FIG. 912(c), when the additional period gauge ga4c is displayed at the second notification timing, after the SW effective period is set, that is, during the period in which the player is performing the continuous hit operation, Also, the valid period gauge ga4 of normal length is continuously displayed, and variable display is executed in which the remaining valid period ga4a decreases according to the elapsed time. In other words, a display mode in which the player has difficulty in understanding that a long SW effective period is set on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 even though a long SW effective period is actually set. is displayed.

After that, when the remaining effective period ga4a decreases to 50% or less, the additional period gauge ga4c is displayed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 912(d), the SW valid period has already been set and the elapsed time ga4b is being displayed. ga4c is displayed to connect to the left of validity period gauge ga4.

With this configuration, even when the additional period gauge ga4c is displayed after the SW valid period is set (the player is notified that the long SW valid period is set at the second notification timing). However, since the additional period gauge ga4c and the remaining valid period ga4a can be continuously displayed, the player can easily understand that the remaining valid period ga4a has increased. be able to.

In addition, in the first modified example of effect, when informing the player that a long SW effective period is set at the second notification timing (timing after the SW effective period is set), the effective period Since the additional period gauge ga4c is displayed near (on the left side) of the gauge ga4, the length of the SW valid period set this time (the first displayed valid period gauge ga4 and the additional period gauge ga4c ) can be easily grasped by the player in the state where the SW valid period is set, but other configurations may be used, for example, the additional period gauge ga4c (2 seconds, which is the difference between the normal length of the SW valid period (3 seconds) and the long SW valid period (5 seconds)), the remaining valid period It may be displayed so as to increase ga4a (in FIG. 912(c), the right end line of the remaining valid period ga4a is moved rightward). By configuring in this way, the remaining valid period ga4a that decreases with the passage of time (in FIG. 912(c), the right end line of the remaining valid period ga4a is moved leftward) increases. is displayed, the player can easily grasp that the remaining period of the SW valid period has increased.

Further, in this case, as the display mode of the remaining valid period ga4a, the remaining period of the SW valid period displayed on the display surface is made different between the display mode before the remaining period is increased and the display mode after the increase. For example, the display color of the remaining valid period ga4a is set to "yellow" as the display mode before the remaining period is increased, and the display color of the remaining valid period ga4a is set as "white" as the display mode before the remaining period is increased. should be configured to With such a configuration, the player can grasp the display mode of the remaining valid period ga4a, thereby easily grasping whether or not the remaining valid period ga4a indicating the remaining period of the SW valid period can increase. can be made

In addition, in the first modified example of effect, when the length of the SW effective period actually set is notified at the second notification timing, the display mode indicating the length of the SW effective period is additionally displayed only once. Although the configuration is described, the length of the remaining period of the SW valid period may be divided into a plurality of times and additionally displayed. With this configuration, even when the length of the remaining SW valid period is additionally displayed at the second notification timing, the length of the remaining SW valid period can be additionally displayed. Therefore, the player can easily play the game while expecting that a longer SW valid period is set.

In addition, in this first modified example of effect, as the length of the SW valid period that can be set, either the normal SW valid period (3 seconds) or the long SW valid period (5 seconds) can be set. However, one SW valid period may be selected and set from three or more SW valid periods having different lengths.

With this configuration, when the length of the SW valid period already displayed is increased in the middle, that is, when the SW valid period of length 1 is displayed, the length of 1 is When SW effective periods with different lengths (longer than the length of 1) are displayed, a situation is created in which the SW effective period having a length different from the length of 1 differs from the actually set SW effective period. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily play the game while anticipating that a longer SW valid period is set.

In addition, in the present modification of the first effect, the length of the SW valid period set for execution and the length of the SW valid period notified to the player (the length of the displayed valid period gauge ga4). As a configuration for differentiating , a length shorter than the length of the actually set SW valid period (the length of the period including at least part of the actually set SW valid period) is notified to the player. However, without being limited to this, a period (pseudo period) longer than the actually set length of the SW valid period may be displayed as the length of the SW valid period.

By configuring in this way, a situation is created in which the length of the SW valid period displayed to the player (the length of the pseudo period) is longer than the actually set length of the SW valid period. Therefore, when the display mode (effective period gauge ga4) indicating the length of the SW effective period is displayed, the length of the SW effective period indicated by the effective period gauge ga4 is the actually set SW effective period. Considering the possibility that the period is longer than the length of the period, the performance button 22 can be motivated to operate before the actually set SW effective period elapses.

Note that if a period (pseudo period) longer than the length of the SW valid period that is actually set can be displayed as the length of the SW valid period, the length of the displayed pseudo period may differ from the actual length. In order to match the length of the SW valid period set in the , it is preferable to configure to be able to execute a shortened display effect that shortens the length of the displayed pseudo period. For example, the valid period displayed as the pseudo period By constructing the gauge ga4 so that the remaining valid period ga4a decreases faster than the actual SW valid period decreases, at least the actual remaining valid period of the SW becomes zero. It is preferable that the length of the remaining valid period of the SW valid period indicated by the pseudo period matches the length of the actual SW valid period.

With this configuration, when the valid period gauge ga4 is displayed as the pseudo period, the length of the SW valid period actually set on the premise that the remaining valid period ga4a decreases at a normal decreasing speed is From the state in which the player is made to think that a very long SW valid period is set, an effect is executed in which the remaining valid period ga4a is decreased and displayed at a speed of decrease faster than usual. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the decreasing speed of the remaining valid period ga4a.

Also, as a shortened display effect, by executing an effect of hiding (deleting) a partial area of the remaining effective period ga4a that has already been displayed, the effective period gauge ga4 that indicates the pseudo period is actually set. It may be configured to variably display to a display mode corresponding to the length of the SW valid period. With this configuration, the valid period gauge ga4 indicating the pseudo period is changed to the valid period gauge ga4 indicating the actually set SW valid period without changing the decreasing speed of the remaining valid period ga4a. becomes possible. Therefore, since it is not necessary to perform control for varying the speed of decrease of the remaining valid period ga4a, it is possible to simplify the display control processing for the remaining valid period ga4a.

<Regarding the control processing contents of the first modified example of effect in the twenty-sixth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 913, among the control processes executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the present modified example of production, the contents of the control processes different from the control process executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-sixth control example described above. give an explanation.

This first production modification differs from the above-described twenty-sixth control example in that the production content (production mode) of the battle production is different. The content of processing is different. Specifically, for the 26th control example described above, instead of the time saving state production mode determination processing 26 (see F3051 in FIG. 819) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, time saving state production mode determination The difference is that process 26a (see F3051a in FIG. 913) is executed. Other processing contents are the same, and detailed description of the same contents is omitted.

Figure 913 is the flowchart which shows the processing contents of time saving state production feature decision processing 26a (F3051a). This time saving state production mode determination process 26a (F3051a) is a production mode of various variable productions for showing the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state, and a suggesting production for suggesting that the time saving state ends. is determined, and a process for setting a display command for displaying various effects corresponding to the determined effect mode on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is executed. With respect to the time saving state production mode determination process 26 (see F3051 in FIG. 819) in the 26th control example, the processing content of the process (see F4206) for determining the production mode of the battle production is changed, and during the battle production The difference is that processing (F4201a to F4203a) for determining the set SW valid time (operation valid period) is added. Other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the time saving state production mode determination process 26a (F3051a) is executed, first, the same F4201 to F4211 processes as the time saving state production mode determination process 26 (see F3051 in FIG. 819) in the 26th control example described above are executed. . When the process of F4210 is finished, next, the setting information of the operation effective period corresponding to the effect pattern is determined (F4201a), and whether the determined setting information is the setting information corresponding to the long operation effective period or not. is determined (F4202a).

In the process of F4202a, if it is determined that the setting information indicates that the operation effective period is not long, that is, that it is normal length (F4202a: No), the process of F4212 is executed as it is, and this process ends. do.

On the other hand, in the process of F4202a, if it is determined that it is a long time, that is, if it is determined that the setting information indicates an operation valid period longer than usual (F4202a: Yes), the notification timing of the long button is decided by lottery. It is determined (F4203a), the process of F4212 is executed, and this process ends.

As described above, in this first production modification, in the process of determining the variable production (time reduction state production mode determination processing 26a (see F3051a in FIG. 913)), it is configured to determine the operation effective period. However, without being limited to this, for example, it may be possible to execute a process of determining whether or not to increase the operation valid period based on the details of the operation executed during the operation valid period. With this configuration, it is possible to motivate the player to operate the operation means so that more operation effective periods are set.

Also, in this case, a privilege that can be given to the player only based on the operation of the operation means during the increased operation valid period may be provided. , ``Enemy escape'' can be set, and if the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, ``defeat'', and if the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win, ``win'', Alternatively, it is configured so that "enemy flees" is determined. In addition, when "winning" is determined as the detection result, not only the privilege indicating the winning of the jackpot, but also the jackpot game in which the content of the jackpot game is advantageous to the player (jackpot game with a large number of rounds) and the jackpot game A second privilege indicating that an advantageous game state (probability variable state) advantageous to the player is set is also notified after the end.

When the operation means is operated during the increased operation effective period, "victory" is more likely to be determined as the production result of the battle production than when the operation means is operated only during the operation effective period before the increase. It is better to configure it so that With this configuration, the player can be motivated to operate the operating means.

In addition, based on the operation of the operation means during the increased effective period of operation, it is possible to switch the content of the already determined jackpot game to content advantageous to the player (for example, increase the number of rounds of the jackpot game or set the variable probability state after the jackpot game ends).

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10, which predefines a variable scenario that changes the effect mode according to the lapse of the operation duration during the operation valid period, the part (operation Scenario contents corresponding to operation continuation time that can be continued only when the effective period is extended) can be configured to set a scenario that defines the contents of changing the performance mode to a specific mode indicating winning of a jackpot. However, based on the result of the special symbol lottery, it may be configured to determine whether or not to extend the valid period of operation.

By configuring in this way, the same scenario can be used when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win and when it is a loss, and the processing load of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

<Second Modification of Effect in Twenty-sixth Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 914 to 919, the jackpot game effects executed during the jackpot game will be described as the second modified example of effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-sixth control example described above.

In this second effect modification, as in the above-described 18th control example, as a jackpot game effect, the content of the jackpot game being executed and the prefetching of the already acquired special symbol reservation (winning information used for the special symbol lottery) Based on the results, it is possible to execute an additional effect of notifying the payout number of prize balls that can be obtained in the running jackpot game, and a pending continuous effect of notifying that the jackpot game is continuously executed. It consists of

Furthermore, in this second effect modification, when it is determined that there is a special symbol reservation for winning a jackpot as a result of pre-reading of the special symbol reservation acquired at the time the jackpot game is started, the next execution is performed. Including the content of the jackpot game to be played, it is configured to be able to execute an additional performance to the jackpot game being executed. Specifically, the jackpot game being executed is a 4R jackpot game in which the round game is executed four times, and a 6R jackpot game in which the round game is executed six times is executed in the pre-read special symbol reserve. When winning information as a lottery result of a special pattern lottery is included, a pseudo-additional performance for pseudo-notifying the number of payouts corresponding to a 10R jackpot game in which a round game is executed 10 times can be executed. there is

By configuring in this way, the number of times of execution of the jackpot game actually executed, the number of rounds of the jackpot game executed in one jackpot game, and the jackpot game notified to the player as the jackpot game effect. content can be different.

In addition, in this second production modification, the number of executions of the jackpot game actually executed, the number of rounds of the jackpot game executed in one jackpot game, and the jackpot reported to the player as the jackpot game production As a technique for differentiating the content of the game, it is configured to be able to execute a pseudo holding continuous effect (pseudo holding continuous effect) during the period in which one jackpot game is being executed.

In addition, in this second effect modification, a game state (probability variable state) advantageous to the player is set as the game state set after the end of the jackpot game according to the type (number of rounds) of the jackpot game to be executed. The ratio is different, and the number of payouts (number of rounds) notified in the pseudo-additional effect and the contents of the latter jackpot game (number of rounds) executed in the pseudo-holding continuous effect are set after the end of the jackpot game. It is configured so that it can be determined based on the game state to be played.

For example, if the variable probability state is always set after the end of the 10R jackpot game, the setting condition of the effect mode in which the number of payouts for 10 rounds is displayed as a pseudo-addition effect is the jackpot game. (after the end of the second jackpot game) is established when the variable probability state is set.

In other words, in the case of pseudo-executing a jackpot game effect that differs from the content of the jackpot game that is actually executed, the content of the jackpot game effect that is pseudo-executed and the game state that is set after the jackpot game ends. It is configured so that there is no contradiction in the relationship between By configuring in this way, even when a jackpot game effect with contents different from the contents of the jackpot game actually executed is pseudo-executed, the player can understand the contents of the jackpot game effect that is pseudo-executed. can make it difficult to feel uncomfortable.

<Regarding the content of the effect in the second modification of the twenty-sixth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 914 to 916, the contents of the big win game effect executed in the second modified example of effect will be described. FIG. 914(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed in an additional effect that is part of the jackpot game effect, and FIG. 914(b) shows the effect result of the additional effect. It is the figure which showed an example of a display screen. Among the display screens for the jackpot game effects, the display elements that are the same as those displayed in the jackpot game effects (see FIG. 607(a)) of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighteenth control example described above are the same. Reference numerals are attached and description thereof is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 914(a), in the small display area Dm8, a display mode indicating that the special symbol has won the jackpot is displayed so that the player can recognize that the special symbol has won the jackpot. there is In addition, the small display area Dm4 displays "Right-handed" so that the player can easily understand the game method in the jackpot game.

In the small display area Dm14, the number of consecutive wins in the jackpot game is displayed. It should be noted that the number of consecutive chances displayed in the small display area Dm14 is not the actual number of times of the jackpot game, but the number of times the jackpot game effect is executed (the number of consecutive chances of the jackpot game). By configuring in this way, by executing the pseudo-additional effect or the pseudo-holding continuous effect, even if the number of times of the actually executed jackpot game and the number of times of the executed jackpot game effect are different. Also, since the number of consecutive wins displayed in the small display area Dm14 can be updated in correspondence with the number of times of the executed big winning game performance, the big winning game performance can be executed without causing a sense of incongruity to the player.

Further, the number of rounds corresponding to the jackpot game effect being executed is displayed in the small display area Dm15. That is, when the pseudo-additional effect is executed and the jackpot game effect is executed over a plurality of times of the jackpot game, the number of rounds corresponding to the pseudo-additional effect is displayed in the small display area Dm15. are doing. By configuring in this way, when the pseudo-additional effect is executed across a plurality of jackpot games, the number of rounds displayed in the small display area Dm15 each time a new jackpot game is started after the second time. "Round 1" is not displayed as , and it is possible to execute a jackpot game performance that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

A display area HR60 is formed on the upper right side of the display screen. The display area HR60 is composed of a display area HR60a for displaying the total number of prize balls that can be paid out during the jackpot game, and a display area HR60b for displaying the number of prize balls that have already been paid out. The player can be notified in advance how many prize balls can be obtained in the jackpot game.

It should be noted that the various values displayed in the display area HR60 are not based on the content of the actual jackpot game, but on the execution of the game, as in the display modes displayed in the small display area Dm14 and the small display area Dm15. It is constructed so that a value corresponding to the middle jackpot game effect is displayed. That is, when the pseudo-additional effect is executed and the jackpot game effect is executed over a plurality of times of the jackpot game, the total number of prize balls that can be paid out notified by the pseudo-additional effect is displayed in the display area HR60a. , and the number of winning balls obtained during the jackpot game effect being executed is displayed in the display area HR60b. By constructing in this way, a value associated with the contents of the executed big win game performance can be displayed in the display area HR60, so that the player can execute the big win game performance without any sense of incongruity.

FIG. 914(a) is a display displayed in the additional effect executed in the first round of the 10R jackpot game executed based on the fact that the jackpot was won in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state. A diagram showing an example of the screen, in which characters "Right-handed" are displayed in the small display area Dm4 for guiding the player that the game method to be executed during the jackpot game is the right-handed game, "444" is displayed in the small display area Dm8 as the stop display mode (combination of symbols) of the third symbol stopped and displayed when the jackpot is won.

In addition, "jackpot x 1" for indicating that it is a jackpot game (first jackpot game) based on winning a jackpot in the normal state is displayed in the small display area Dm14, and the present is the first round game ( The letters "Round 1" are displayed in the small display area Dm15 to indicate that it is the first round. In addition, a value of "600" is displayed in the display area HR60a as the total number of prize balls that can be paid out to the player in the minimum number of rounds (4 rounds) of the jackpot game that can be executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the second modified example of effect. A value of "60" is displayed in the display area HR60b as the number of prize balls already obtained during the first round of the game being displayed.

Here, detailed contents are omitted because they are the same as the eighteenth control example described above. 15 prize balls are paid out in response to the fact that one game ball wins at the end of the round game period. It is configured so that the end condition of one round game is established when seconds have passed.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 914(a), the display area HR60a displays 40 prizes and 15 prize balls that can be awarded to the specific prize winning port 65a in the round game of 4 rounds. "600P" corresponding to the multiplied value is displayed. Also, since it shows a state in which four game balls enter the specific winning hole 65a during the first round of the game, it corresponds to a value obtained by multiplying the number of winnings by four and the number of winning balls by 15. "60P" is displayed in the display area HR60b.

Then, in the central part of the main display area Dm, an additional effect is executed to increase (add) the total number of prize balls that can be acquired during the running jackpot game (the value displayed in the display area HR60a). A display area HR61 to be displayed is formed, and in the sub-display area Ds, characters of "chance to add the number of payouts" are displayed to indicate that the additional effect has been executed.

When the additional effect is executed, a plurality of numerical information including numerical information for indicating an increased value (P) with respect to the value (P) displayed in the display region HR60a is dynamically displayed in the display region HR61, An effect is executed in which a value corresponding to the numerical information that is stopped and displayed is additionally displayed in the display region HR60a.

Here, the plurality of numerical information dynamically displayed in the display area HR61 is numerical information corresponding to the type (number of rounds) of the jackpot game that can actually be executed, for example, corresponding to the jackpot game of 6 rounds. As numerical information, "300P" corresponding to the value obtained by dividing the total number of prize balls for 4 rounds from the total number of prize balls for 6 rounds, that is, the total number of prize balls corresponding to the value already displayed in the display area HR60a. , the total number of prize balls for 4 rounds, that is, the total number of prize balls corresponding to the value already displayed in the display area HR60a is subtracted from the total number of prize balls for 8 rounds as numerical information corresponding to the jackpot game of 8 rounds. "600P" corresponding to the value is already displayed in the display area HR60a, which is the total number of prize balls for 10 rounds from the total number of prize balls for 6 rounds as numerical information corresponding to the jackpot game of 6 rounds. "900P" corresponding to the value obtained by dividing the total number of prize balls corresponding to the value, and "0P" as numerical information corresponding to the 4-round jackpot game are displayed dynamically at a speed that is visible to the player. is displayed.

By configuring in this way, the total number of prize balls (the value displayed in the display area HR60a) after the execution of the additional production becomes a value corresponding to each type of jackpot game, so that the additional production can be performed during execution. It is possible to easily make the player think that the type (number of rounds) of the jackpot game is notified.

Therefore, even when the pseudo-additional effect is executed over a plurality of times of the jackpot game, it is easy for the player to think that the jackpot game with a large number of rounds is executed as one jackpot game. can do.

When the additional effect displayed in FIG. 914(a) ends and the effect result is displayed in the display area HR61, the effect result display screen of the additional effect shown in FIG. 914(b) is displayed. In FIG. 914(b), since the jackpot game being executed is the 10-round jackpot game, "+900P" is displayed in the display area HR61 as the effect result of the additional effect, and "900P" is added as the value of the display area HR60a. "1500P" is displayed.

Then, as a display mode for indicating that the present production result is the most advantageous production result for the player (the production result indicating that the maximum number of rounds that can be executed is a jackpot game (MAX jackpot game)), "MAX ' is displayed in the lower vicinity of the display area HR61, and the characters 'Congratulations on exceeding the limit' are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to easily grasp that the current effect result is an advantageous effect result.

Next, referring to FIG. 915, display contents in the case where a jackpot game effect (pseudo MAX jackpot effect) corresponding to the MAX jackpot game is executed by a pseudo-additional effect when the condition for the occurrence of the pending series is established. give an explanation. FIG. 915(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the first jackpot game out of two jackpot games in which the pseudo MAX jackpot effect is straddled, and FIG. 915(b). is a display displayed during a special symbol variation period for showing the result of a special symbol lottery in which the second big winning game is executed out of two big winning games executed across the pseudo MAX jackpot effect. It is the figure which showed an example of a screen.

As shown in FIG. 915 (a), as a result of the look-ahead executed at a predetermined timing (including the start timing) during the jackpot game, a state in which reserved symbols that can win a jackpot are acquired (in the figure, double circles indicate display), it is configured to execute an additional effect based on the pre-read information.

In the example shown in FIG. 915 (a), as a result of the pre-reading, it is a 6-round jackpot game, and after the jackpot game ends, it is determined that the winning prize information for winning the jackpot in which the variable probability state is set is stored. An additional performance is performed so that one jackpot game performance is executed across the jackpot game being executed (4-round jackpot game) and the next jackpot game (6-round jackpot game). executed.

The additional performance executed in the final round (fourth round) of the first jackpot game is during the special symbol fluctuation (jackpot fluctuation) that causes the second jackpot game to be executed after the first jackpot game is completed. , the effect result is displayed (see FIG. 915(b)).

In this case, since the one-time jackpot game effect is executed straddling the first jackpot game and the second jackpot game, even when the second jackpot game is executed, the small display area is displayed. The value described in Dm14 is not updated (retains the jackpot×1), and the display mode indicating the final round number of the first jackpot game is continuously updated (added) in the small display area Dm15. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 916, the effect contents of the pseudo-holding continuous effect that makes it appear that a plurality of jackpot games are executed using the round game executed in one jackpot game will be described. FIG. 916(a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect screen in which it is pseudo-notified that the first jackpot game has ended as a pseudo-holding continuous effect, and FIG. 916(b) is a pseudo-holding continuous effect. It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation screen in which the 2nd big-hit winning was notified as an effect|presentation.

In Figure 916 (a) and (b), during the game period of the 10 rounds of the jackpot game, two times of the jackpot game (4 rounds of jackpot games and 6 rounds of jackpot games) pseudo-holding to appear to have been executed It shows a production screen for continuous production.

First, the same effect as in the display area HR61 of FIG. 914(a) is executed, and an additional effect is executed for the player. As a result, as shown in FIG. 916(a), as a result of the additional effect, "0P" is displayed in the display area HR61, indicating that there is no additional prize balls that can be paid out. A 4-round jackpot is announced. In addition, "V" is displayed in the display area HR62 as a display mode indicating that there is a jackpot pending in the reserve as the effect result of the additional effect.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the same effect screen as the effect screen shown in FIG. A display mode is displayed.

Then, in the sub display area Ds, characters of "Congratulations on getting V" are displayed as a guidance mode for guiding the holding replay. With this configuration, a 10-round jackpot game is actually being executed, but as a result of the additional performance, the jackpot game being executed is a 4-round jackpot game. It is possible to pseudo-notify that the user is on hold and that the user is on hold.

Therefore, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the holding continuous effect in which the execution condition is difficult to be satisfied, and to enhance the effect of the effect.

Then, in the interval period set between the fourth and fifth rounds of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 916(b), the display area HR63 is formed, and the pseudo symbols stop in the display mode indicating that the jackpot has been won. It is displayed to inform the player that he or she has newly won a jackpot. Then, in the display area Dm14, the number of consecutive big wins (number of consecutive wins) is added and "big win x 2" is displayed in the same manner as when a new big win is won. Then, when the fifth round of the game is actually started, Dm15 displays "Round 1" indicating that the first round of the new jackpot game has been executed.

By configuring in this way, all the information related to the jackpot game displayed on the display screen can be displayed in correspondence with the pseudo-hold continuous effect, so that the player can receive the information in one jackpot game. Using the executed round game, it is possible to improve the accuracy of the pseudo-retaining continuous effect that makes it appear as if the jackpot game is executed a plurality of times.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, information indicating that the pseudo-holding continuous effect is executed and information indicating the number of pseudo-rounds displayed in the pseudo-holding continuous effect are managed, and during the OP period or The execution timing of various performances executed during the ED period or the round period is configured to correspond to the contents of the second jackpot game that is pseudo-executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the accuracy of the pseudo-hold continuous effect that makes it appear to the player that a plurality of jackpot games are executed using the round game that is executed in one jackpot game.

In addition, in this second effect modification, when the 10-round jackpot game is executed as the jackpot game, the above-described pseudo-holding continuous effect can be executed, and the fourth round and the fourth round of the 10-round jackpot game. A long interval period is set in advance during the fifth round. Therefore, the effect shown in FIG. 916(b) can be reliably executed. In addition, in the 10-round jackpot game in which the pseudo-holding continuous effect is not executed, the interval period set between the 4th round and the 5th round is used to execute the additional effect shown in FIG. 914. there is By constructing in this way, even when the pseudo-holding continuous performance is not executed, the interval period set between the fourth round and the fifth round can be effectively utilized, and the game period of the jackpot game can be effectively utilized. is unnecessarily slowed down, and the player's desire to play can be suppressed.

As described above, in this second production modification, as the jackpot game production executed during the jackpot game, the additional production, the holding continuous production, the pseudo-additional production, and the pseudo holding continuous production can be executed. 914(a), the effect is started in the same specific effect mode (see display area HR61 in FIG. 914(a)).

By constructing in this way, it is possible for the player to have the pleasure of predicting what kind of privilege will be granted (which performance will be executed) when the specific performance mode is displayed during the jackpot game. can provide.

In addition, since it is configured to be able to execute a pseudo-additional effect and a pseudo-holding continuous effect, execution conditions such as an additional effect (MAX jackpot effect) and a pending continuous effect indicating that a jackpot game with the maximum number of rounds is being executed It is possible to make it easy for the player to experience the performance of the same contents as the performance in which is difficult to be realized. As a result, the state in which benefits (maximum jackpot, holding series) advantageous to the player are not granted (state in which the effect indicating that the benefit is provided to the player is not executed) continues, and the player's willingness to play decreases. You can prevent it from happening.

In addition, in the present second modification, the above-mentioned various effects (additional effects, holding continuous effects, pseudo-additional effects, pseudo-holding continuous effects) are executed during the execution of the jackpot game. For example, the above-described various effects may be configured to be executable during the special symbol jackpot fluctuation period (the period until the jackpot round game is started).

In this case, regardless of which effect is executed, there is a privilege of informing the player that the big win game is being executed. It is preferable that the content of the additional privilege to be granted is different, for example, when the additional effect (pseudo-additional effect) is executed, the jackpot game to be executed later when the additional effect (pseudo-additional effect) is executed. is a round game other than the minimum number of rounds, and according to the result of the additional effect (pseudo-additional effect), an additional benefit that suggests a specific round game is given. When the pseudo-holding continuous effect) is executed, there is a high possibility that the jackpot game will be executed again after the jackpot game to be executed later (there is a jackpot reservation in the reservation, or A variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game) can be provided to the player as an additional benefit.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in which effect will be executed. Also, in this case, the additional effect (pseudo-additional effect) and the holding continuous effect (pseudo holding continuous effect) may be configured to be executable during the fluctuation of one jackpot, and in this case, the execution timing of each effect They may be duplicated, or they may be executed separately.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 using a configuration capable of displaying information on the accumulated number of winning balls obtained during the advantageous game period in which the game state (probability variable state, time-saving state, jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player continues. , As the additional effect, instead of the effect of adding the total number of prize balls obtainable during the jackpot game, the effect of adding the total number of prize balls obtainable during the advantageous game period may be executed. good.

In this case, for example, in a situation where you have the right to execute multiple jackpot games, the maximum number of prize balls that can be obtained in one jackpot game (in this second production modification, 10 round jackpot The number of prize balls larger than the corresponding 1500 pieces) can be added by one additional performance. Therefore, when the additional performance is executed, the upper limit number of benefits (the number of prize balls) that can be given to the player as a result of the performance of the additional performance increases, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second production modification>
Next, referring to FIG. 917, of the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 of the second modification, the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-sixth control example described above Contents different from those of the RAM 223 will be explained. FIG. 917 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in this second modified example of effect.

As shown in FIG. 917, this second effect modification example differs from the above-described twenty-sixth control example in that a pseudo-addition effect flag 223aaaa is added, and the rest is the same. Descriptions of the same contents are omitted.

The flag 223aaaa during pseudo add-on effect is a flag for indicating a state in which the pseudo add-on effect is being executed, and is set to ON when the pseudo add-on effect is being executed. Then, it is set to OFF when it is determined that the second big win game included in the pseudo add-on performance is executed. In the state where the flag 223aaaa during the pseudo-additional effect is set to ON, the processing for determining the variation performance of the special symbol variation is skipped, and the processing for continuously executing the pseudo-additional effect is executed.

<Regarding the control process of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second modified example of effect>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 918 and 919, control processing of the sound ramp control device 113 in the second modified example of effect will be described. In the second modification of the production, in place of the 26th control example described above, the fluctuation production setting process 26a (F2959a in FIG. 918) is replaced with the jackpot related process 26 (F2216). The difference is that the jackpot-related process 26a (F2216a) is executed instead, and the rest is the same. Descriptions of the same contents are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 918, the contents of the variable effect setting process 26a (F2959a) will be described. FIG. 918 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the variable effect setting process 26a (F2959a). When the variable effect setting process 26a (F2959a) is executed, first, it is determined whether the flag 223aaaa during the pseudo-additional effect is set to ON (F3001a). When the jackpot game effect continues until the jackpot game is started, the continuation of the pseudo-additional effect is determined (F3002a), and the process proceeds to F3019. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the execution of the special symbol variation effect during the pseudo-additional effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 919, the contents of the jackpot related process 26a (F2216a) will be described. FIG. 919 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot related process 26a (F2216a). This jackpot related process 26a (F2216a) differs from the above-described jackpot related process 26 (F2216) in that a process for executing a pseudo-additional effect or a pseudo-retained consecutive effect during the jackpot game is added. ing.

When the jackpot related process 26a (F2216a) is executed, first, the process of F2701 is executed, and when it is determined that the jackpot start command is received (F2701: Yes), the flag 223aaaa during the pseudo-additional effect is set to ON. (F2701a), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (F2701a: Yes), the flag 223aaaa during the pseudo-addition effect is set to OFF (F2702a), skipping the processing of F2702 and F2703a, It shifts to the process of F2704a. That is, in the state where the flag 223aaaa during the pseudo-additional effect is set, since the big win game effect executed in the previous big win game continues, the display (opening display) when the new big win game is executed ) is skipped.

On the other hand, in the processing of F2701a, if it is determined that the flag 223aaaa during the pseudo-additional effect is not set to ON (F2701a: No), the command for starting the jackpot for display is set (F2702), and the payout corresponding to the minimum number of rounds A display command indicating the number is set (F2703a), and the process proceeds to F2704a.

In the process of F2704a, the winning information is read from the winning information storage area 223va (F2704a), and then it is determined whether or not the read winning information includes information indicating winning of a jackpot (F2705a), and it is determined that there is information indicating winning of a jackpot. If so (F2705a: Yes), the number of rounds of the jackpot game this time and the number of rounds of the jackpot game in the hold are added (F2706a), and it is determined whether the total number of rounds is 10 (10 rounds) ( F2707a).

If it is determined that the total number of rounds is 10 (10 rounds) (F2707a: Yes), then it is determined whether the pending jackpot is a variable jackpot (F2708a), and if it is determined to be a variable jackpot (F2708a: Yes), since the execution conditions for the pseudo-additional effect are established, the effect mode of the pseudo-MAX jackpot effect is determined as the pseudo-additional effect (F2709a), and the flag 223aaaa during the pseudo-additional effect is set to ON ( F2710a), set a display command indicating the determined effect mode (F2711a), and terminate this process.

On the other hand, when it is determined No in the process of F2707a or the process of F2708a, the conditions for executing the pseudo-additional effect are not established, so the processes of F2709a to F2711a are skipped, and this process ends.

In the processing of F2705a, when it is determined that there is no information indicating the winning of the jackpot (F2705a: No), it is determined whether the number of rounds of the jackpot game this time is 10 rounds (F2712a), and it is determined that there are 10 rounds. If (F2712a: Yes), the execution lottery of the pseudo-holding consecutive effect is executed (F2713a), and if the lottery result corresponding to the execution of the pseudo-holding consecutive effect is obtained (F2713: Yes), the execution of the pseudo-holding consecutive effect Since the condition is established, the effect mode of the pseudo-hold continuous effect is determined (F2714a), and the process proceeds to F2711a.

On the other hand, if No is determined in the process of F2712a or the process of F2713a, the execution condition of the pseudo-hold continuous effect is not established, so the process proceeds to F2708.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the jackpot related process 26 (F2216a), depending on the content of the jackpot game effect being executed, when the round number command is received, or when the ending command is received The production mode to be determined is made different. Concretely, when the pseudo holding continuous performance is executed, the performance mode in each round period is determined corresponding to the performance contents of the pseudo holding continuous performance being executed.

As described above, in this second production modification, similar to the above-described 18th control example, as the jackpot game production, the content of the jackpot game being executed and the special Based on the look-ahead result for the winning information used), an additional effect that informs the payout number of prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game being executed, and a hold that informs that the jackpot game will be executed continuously A continuous performance is configured to be executable.

Furthermore, in this second effect modification, when it is determined that there is a special symbol reservation for winning a jackpot as a result of pre-reading of the special symbol reservation acquired at the time the jackpot game is started, the next execution is performed. Including the content of the jackpot game to be played, it is configured to be able to execute an additional performance to the jackpot game being executed. Specifically, the jackpot game being executed is a 4R jackpot game in which the round game is executed four times, and a 6R jackpot game in which the round game is executed six times is executed in the pre-read special symbol reserve. When winning information as a lottery result of a special pattern lottery is included, a pseudo-additional performance for pseudo-notifying the number of payouts corresponding to a 10R jackpot game in which a round game is executed 10 times can be executed. there is

By configuring in this way, the number of times of execution of the jackpot game actually executed, the number of rounds of the jackpot game executed in one jackpot game, and the jackpot game notified to the player as the jackpot game effect. content can be different.

In addition, in this second production modification, the number of executions of the jackpot game actually executed, the number of rounds of the jackpot game executed in one jackpot game, and the jackpot reported to the player as the jackpot game production As a technique for differentiating the content of the game, it is configured to be able to execute a pseudo holding continuous effect (pseudo holding continuous effect) during the period in which one jackpot game is being executed.

In addition, in this second effect modification, a game state (probability variable state) advantageous to the player is set as the game state set after the end of the jackpot game according to the type (number of rounds) of the jackpot game to be executed. The ratio is different, and the number of payouts (number of rounds) notified in the pseudo-additional effect and the contents of the latter jackpot game (number of rounds) executed in the pseudo-holding continuous effect are set after the end of the jackpot game. It is configured so that it can be determined based on the game state to be played.

For example, if the variable probability state is always set after the end of the 10R jackpot game, the setting condition of the effect mode in which the number of payouts for 10 rounds is displayed as a pseudo-addition effect is the jackpot game. (after the end of the second jackpot game) is established when the variable probability state is set.

In other words, in the case of pseudo-executing a jackpot game effect that differs from the content of the jackpot game that is actually executed, the content of the jackpot game effect that is pseudo-executed and the game state that is set after the jackpot game ends. It is configured so that there is no contradiction in the relationship between By configuring in this way, even when a jackpot game effect with contents different from the contents of the jackpot game actually executed is pseudo-executed, the player can understand the contents of the jackpot game effect that is pseudo-executed. can make it difficult to feel uncomfortable.

As described above, in this second effect modification, as a jackpot game effect executed during the jackpot game, an additional effect indicating the content (number of rounds) of the jackpot game being executed, and the presence or absence of a pending series are indicated. The number of jackpot games actually executed and the number of jackpot game performances are executed by constructing the holding continuous performance so as to be executable, and further by configuring the pseudo-additional performance and the pseudo-holding continuous performance so as to be executable. The number of times the Ideas can be applied.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 in the eighteenth control example described above is part of the case where the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is not a jackpot winning (symbol jackpot winning) (missing), as in the seventh control example described above. , it is possible to win a small win, and a big win game (V big win game) can be executed by entering a game ball into a specific area during a small win game executed based on the winning of a small win. It consists of Then, when the jackpot game executed based on the winning of the symbol jackpot or the V jackpot game is executed, as the jackpot game effect executed during the jackpot game, the acquired special pattern reservation (special pattern reservation ) is configured to be able to execute a holding continuous effect capable of notifying that the winning information indicating the winning of a jackpot is included in the ( As a result of pre-determining (pre-reading) the lottery result of the special figure 2 pending stored), the pre-determination result indicating that the small winning game in which the small winning game that can execute the V big winning game is executed is won. If there is a special figure 2 reservation (V reservation) or a special figure 2 reservation (jackpot reservation) that wins a jackpot in the second special symbol lottery, that is, after the jackpot game being executed is completed, a new jackpot When the player has an execution right for executing a game, an effect (reservation continuous effect) for notifying that there is a V reservation or a big win reservation can be executed.

Combining the technical idea of the second production modification described above with the pachinko machine 10 in the eighteenth control example configured in this way, when there is a V reservation in the acquired special figure 2 reservation, a pseudo-addition It may be configured to be able to execute effects and pseudo-holding consecutive effects. In this case, it is not based on the contents of the small winning game executed based on the result of the special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery), but based on entering the game ball into the specific area during the small winning game being executed. Based on the content (number of rounds) of the jackpot game (V jackpot game) to be executed, the content of the pseudo-additional performance or the pseudo-holding consecutive performance may be determined, or the content of the small win game and the V jackpot game It may be configured to determine the contents of the pseudo-additional effect or the pseudo-holding continuous effect, including the contents.

In this way, not only the jackpot game that is determined to be executed (jackpot game based on winning the symbol jackpot), but also the jackpot game that has the right to execute (V jackpot game) is simulated based on the contents. By determining the performance contents of the additional performance and the pseudo-holding continuous performance, the motivation to enter the game ball into the specific area during the small winning game can be enhanced based on the performance contents to be executed.

Furthermore, the technical idea of the second modified example of effect may be applied to the first modified example of the eighteenth control example described above. Here, as described above with reference to FIGS. 607 and 608, the pachinko machine 10 in the first modified example of the eighteenth control example described above, during the jackpot game against the pachinko machine 10 in the eighteenth control example When a plurality of V reservations are acquired and the total number of rounds obtained by totaling the contents (number of rounds) of a plurality of jackpot games executed corresponding to each of the plurality of V reservations satisfies a predetermined condition, A V-icon acquisition effect (holding continuous effect) of a specific effect mode is configured to be executable.

The pachinko machine 10 in the first modification of the 18th control example configured in this way is combined with the technical idea of the second effect modification described above, and the contents of the jackpot game being executed and the acquired special figure 2 are reserved. , or the content of the jackpot game to be executed corresponding to the jackpot hold, or the content of the pseudo-additional performance or the pseudo-hold continuous performance may be determined. .

That is, in the second effect modification of the twenty-sixth control example described above, the game contents (the number of rounds) of the jackpot game being executed and the game contents of the jackpot game executed corresponding to one jackpot reservation that has already been obtained (number of rounds) and, based on, the description has been made of a configuration that can determine the content of the pseudo-additional production and pseudo-holding continuous production, but not limited to this, the game content of the jackpot game being executed (number of rounds) And, based on the game contents (number of rounds) of the jackpot game a plurality of times in the state of having the execution right, the effect contents of the pseudo-additional effect and the pseudo-hold continuous effect may be determined.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine the effect mode of the pseudo-additional effect and the effect mode of the pseudo-holding continuous effect by combining the game contents (number of rounds) of three or more jackpot games. It becomes possible to execute more various effects for the pachinko machine 10 in the 2-effect modification.

In addition, as in the second effect modification of the twenty-sixth control example described above, the number of round games executed in one jackpot game (the number of rounds) is the maximum number (10 rounds) of the jackpot game (MAX When the jackpot game performance (additional performance) corresponding to the jackpot game) is executed as a pseudo-additional performance, it is possible to combine the game contents (number of rounds) of three or more jackpot games, so that the MAX jackpot game It is possible to make it easier to execute the corresponding additional effect in a pseudo fashion (as the pseudo additional effect, it is possible to make it easier to establish an execution condition for executing the MAX jackpot effect).

In addition, based on the game content (number of rounds) of the jackpot game being executed and the game content (number of rounds) of multiple jackpot games in the state of having the right to execute, pseudo-addition production and pseudo-holding series When the effect content of the effect is configured to be determinable, the game period of the jackpot game being executed, the plurality of V reservations included in the acquired special figure 2 reservation, or the special symbol first among the jackpot reservations One jackpot game performance is executed across the game period of the jackpot game executed corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation in which the lottery is executed, and included in the acquired special figure 2 reservation. A plurality of V suspensions or jackpot suspensions may be configured so as to be able to execute the suspension continuous effect for the jackpot game executed corresponding to the special figure 2 suspension in which the special symbol lottery is executed later. Alternatively, one jackpot game effect may be executed across a game period in which three or more executable jackpot games are executed.

In this case, as an effect period in which one jackpot game effect (for example, a pseudo-additional effect) is executed, a plurality of effects (number of rounds) corresponding to the effect contents (number of rounds) notified to the player in the executed jackpot game effect It suffices to include at least a part of each game period in which the jackpot game is executed, for example, the pseudo-additional effect is started in the final round of the jackpot game executed first, and executed later. It may be configured so as to be able to notify the performance result of the pseudo-additional performance during the opening period of the jackpot game.

By constructing in this way, even if the length of the performance period in which the pseudo-additional performance is executed is fixed to a specific period, the pseudo-additional performance can be easily executed across the periods in which a plurality of jackpot games are executed. can be done.

In addition, the period from the end of the previously executed jackpot game to the start of the next executed jackpot game, that is, the special symbol in which the next jackpot game can be executed after the jackpot game ends. Depending on the length of the period until the lottery is stopped and displayed (the total period of the special design fluctuation period in which the lottery result is out and the special design fluctuation period in which the lottery result is a hit (jackpot, small hit)), A game period of a plurality of jackpot games (a jackpot game to be executed first and a jackpot game to be executed later) and a performance period during which a pseudo-additional performance is executed may be configured to have different overlapping periods, The length of the performance period of the pseudo-additional performance may be adjusted according to the length of the period from the end of the first executed jackpot game to the start of the next executed jackpot game. .

<Thirty-first control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 920 to 923. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the 31st control example has a predetermined number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed during the variable probability state, that is, the remaining period of the variable probability state, in contrast to the pachinko machine 10 in the 26th control example described above. It explains in detail the effect content of the variable effect executed when the number of times (20 times) is reached.

In the twenty-sixth control example described above, the number of executions of the special symbol lottery is set to 120 times as the period during which the variable probability state continues, and the remaining period of the period during which the variable probability state continues is 20 times of execution of the special symbol lottery. When reaching the time, it is configured to execute a series of variation performance (mode variation performance) across the variation period of the special symbol variation of a plurality of times.

Specifically, the value of the variable probability counter 223vr executes the first mode variation effect in the range of "20 to 15", executes the second mode variation effect in the range of "14 to 8", to 1” is configured to execute the third mode variation effect (see FIG. 820).

By configuring in this way, when an advantageous game state (probability variable state) that is advantageous to the player is set, it is difficult for the player to grasp the number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed during the advantageous game state. Therefore, the player can play the game while anticipating that the advantageous game state will continue for a long time.

In this 31st control example, the contents of the mode variation effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the 26th control example described above will be described in detail. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as those of the twenty-sixth control example described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the effect content in the 31st control example>
First, with reference to FIG. 920, the characteristic content of the effect contents executed during the mode change effect in the thirty-first control example will be described. In this 31st control example, as in the 26th control example described above, the special symbol lottery can be executed 120 times during the variable probability state, and the "101" to "106" special symbols during the variable probability state. The lottery result of the special symbol lottery executed in the range of ``20 to 15'' of the variable probability counter 223vr is notified to the player by using the performance result of the first mode variable performance, and the variable probability state is established. In the "107" to "113" special symbol lottery, that is, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery executed in the range of "14 to 8" during the variable probability counter 223vr, the second mode variation effect The player is notified using the effect result, and the special symbol lottery of "114" to "120" times during the probability variation state, that is, the value of the probability variation counter 223vr is a special executed in the range of "7 to 1" The lottery result of the symbol lottery is notified to the player by using the performance result of the third mode variation performance.

FIG. 920(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the special symbol lottery that can be executed during the variable probability state reaches the remaining 20 rotations. In this 31st control example, as in the 22nd control example described above, in a part of the case where the variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the "chance mode" which is the same effect mode as when the time saving state is set ”, and when the special symbol lottery reaches 100 times with the “chance mode” set, that is, if the time saving state is set, the time saving state A ``super chance mode'' capable of executing a mode variation performance for notifying the player that the currently set game state is a variable probability state is set when the end condition is established. there is

Then, when the "chance mode" is set, a special symbol lottery that can be executed until the "chance mode" ends (until the time saving end condition is satisfied) is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. (for example, see FIG. 128(a)), and when the "chance mode" ends and the "super chance mode" is set, the "super chance mode" It is configured to display the remaining period (remaining time) until the "super chance mode" ends, not the remaining number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed until the end.

By configuring in this way, even if the player is notified that the variable probability state is set in a state where the number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed during the variable probability state is greatly reduced, the variable probability state It is possible to make it difficult for the player to clearly grasp the remaining number of executable special symbol lotteries until the end of the game. In addition, by making the player grasp the remaining time until the "super chance mode", which is a production mode for indicating that the probability change state is set, ends, the remaining period until the probability change state ends Since the game can be easily grasped by the player, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied due to sudden termination of the variable probability state.

Specifically, when the remaining number of special symbol lotteries executed during the variable probability state is 20, that is, when the "chance mode" ends and the "super chance mode" is set, FIG. As shown in (a), the normal background display screen is displayed as the first mode variable effect, and the effect in which the rabbit-like character 801 runs around is executed. Then, as a guide display for showing the effect content of the first mode variable effect, the sub-display area Ds displays characters "find the treasure within the time limit". In addition, on the upper side of the main display area Dm, characters of "first stage" are displayed as a mode variation effect type display mode indicating that the first mode variation effect is being executed.

Here, in this 31st control example, according to the number of executions of the special symbol lottery executed during the "super chance mode", three types of mode variation effects can be executed continuously. In the first mode variation effect to be executed, as shown in FIG. 920(a), "normal background (first stage)" is displayed, and in the second mode variation effect to be executed next, "space background (first stage)" is displayed. 2nd stage)” is displayed, and in the third mode variation effect executed last, “heaven background (third stage)” (see FIG. 920(b)) is displayed.

In other words, when all the lottery results of the special symbol lottery executed during the "super chance mode" are lost, the character 801 imitating a rabbit is displayed with the backgrounds of "normal", "outer space", and "heaven". At each stage displayed, a treasure hunting effect is executed, and the effect result that the treasure cannot be finally found (the effect result indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is out) is displayed. mode" is configured to end.

When the "super chance mode" is set, the remaining period until the "super chance mode" ends is displayed in the display area Dm7 by subtracting it based on the passage of time. In this 31st control example, it is configured such that "60 seconds" is set as the effect period during which the all-mode variable effect is executed, and in the example shown in FIG. Since it is shown immediately after the setting, the display area Dm7 displays "60 seconds left" as a display mode indicating that the remaining period of the "super chance mode" is "60 seconds".

With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player of the remaining period of the "super chance mode" in an easy-to-understand manner only by visually recognizing the display mode of the subtraction display in the display area Dm7. In addition, even if the player is notified that the variable probability state is set in a state where the number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed during the variable probability state is greatly reduced, it will be executed before the variable probability state ends. To make it difficult for a player to clearly grasp the remaining number of possible special symbol lotteries.

Furthermore, a display area Dm32 is formed on the right side of the main display area Dm, and the number and types of mode variation effects that can be executed during the "super chance mode" are displayed as a guide mode for notifying the player of "normal → The display mode of "outer space→heaven" is displayed. A mark (indicated by a circle in the figure) for notifying the player of the type of mode variation effect currently being executed is attached to the display mode indicating the type of mode variation effect being executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player of the type of mode variation effect executed during the "super chance mode" and the state of transition in an easy-to-understand manner.

In this 31st control example, when the type of mode variation effect is switched, the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery can be collectively notified, so that the effect period of each mode variation effect is "20 seconds". It consists of Specifically, the special symbol lottery for the "101" to "106" times during the variable probability state, that is, the value of the counter 223vr during the variable probability is in the range of "20 to 15". If all are out, the effect result of the mode variation effect executed for 20 seconds is that the treasure cannot be found in the first stage and the effect shifts to the second stage. On the other hand, the special symbol lottery of "101" to "106" times during the variable probability state, that is, the value of the counter 223vr during the variable probability is executed in the range of "20 to 15". When the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win, the effect result of finding a treasure in the first stage is displayed as the effect result of the mode variation effect executed for 20 seconds.

Although detailed description will be given later, in this 31st control example, the variation pattern (fluctuation time) for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol lottery executed during the "super chance mode" is set to the number of executions of the special symbol lottery. It is configured to be determined differently depending on the probability, and even if the jackpot is won in any of the ``101'' to ``106'' special symbol lotteries in the variable state, the ``101'' special symbol variation. is started (after the first mode variation effect is executed) and the period until the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed is "20 seconds". Also, even if the results of the "101" to "106" special symbol lottery during the probability variation state are all out, after the "101" special symbol variation starts (the first mode variation effect is executed ), and the period until the "106th" special symbol variation is stopped and displayed is "20 seconds".

Therefore, it is possible to execute the first mode variation effect without making the player feel uncomfortable, targeting the "101" to "106" times of the special symbol lottery during the variable probability state. In addition, even if the results of the special symbol lottery for the "101" to "106" times during the variable state are all out, the effect result that is disadvantageous to the player as the effect result of the first mode variation effect (special symbol lottery ) is displayed only once. Since it is possible to reduce the number of displayed performance results that are disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to lose his desire to play.

In addition, even if the jackpot is won in any of the "101" to "106" special symbol lotteries during the variable probability state, the effect result (special symbol Since the performance result indicating that the jackpot has been won in the lottery is displayed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp how many times the special symbol lottery has won the jackpot.

In this 31st control example, as described above, "20 seconds" is set as the effect period of each mode variation effect, and using the effect result of each mode variation effect, the lottery result of the target special symbol lottery is displayed to the player. is configured to notify In other words, the results of 20 special symbol lotteries executed from the setting of the "super chance mode" to the end of the "super chance mode" are divided into three stages and notified to the player. ing. Then, as shown in FIG. 920(a), the display screen is configured to display the remaining period until the "super chance mode" ends, not the remaining period until each mode variation effect ends. are doing.

In other words, by configuring to display only the remaining time until the end of the "super chance mode" instead of the remaining time until the end of each mode change effect, to determine the effect result of each mode change effect Even if the timing for stop-displaying the lottery result of the special pattern lottery referred to is slightly different, it is only necessary to execute processing for correcting the end timing of each mode variation performance, and the player does not feel uncomfortable. It is possible to make it easier to provide a variable performance.

In addition, without being limited to this, instead of the remaining time until the "super chance mode" ends, the player may be notified of the remaining time until each mode variation effect ends. As in the 31st control example, the remaining time until the end of the "super chance mode" is notified by counting down the numerical value so that the player can clearly grasp it, and the remaining time until the end of each mode variation effect. may be configured to allow the player to vaguely grasp the state of the effect mode (for example, the movement state of the character 801). In this way, as a notification mode for notifying the remaining time, the first notification mode (countdown notification, timer notification, etc.) in which the player can clearly grasp the remaining time, and the first notification mode in which the player can vaguely grasp the remaining time. By using this in combination with the second notification mode (variable state of performance mode, etc.), it is possible for the player to easily comprehend various performances to be executed during the "super chance mode".

Next, with reference to FIG. 920(b), the contents of the effect indicating the winning of the jackpot in the "super chance mode" will be described. FIG. 920(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery in which the remaining number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed during the variable probability state is two.

As shown in FIG. 920(b), when the remaining number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed during the variable probability state is two, the third mode variation effect is executed as the mode variation effect, and the main display area Dm As the background image, a "heaven background" corresponding to the third mode variation effect is displayed. In the main display area Dm, an effect image is displayed in which the character 801 opens the treasure box 810 and discovers the treasure 810a.

In the example shown in FIG. 920(b), an effect result advantageous to the player is displayed as the effect result of the third mode variable effect, so the remaining period of the "super chance mode" is displayed in the display area Dm7. ``Remaining ? seconds'' is displayed as a display mode indicating that it has reached 0 seconds, and ``Heaven ' is attached to the characters, and the player is notified that this is the last mode variation effect to be executed during the 'super chance mode'. Further, on the upper side of the main display area Dm, "third stage" is displayed as a display mode for indicating that the mode variation effect being executed is the third (third stage) mode variation effect. Then, in the sub display area Ds, characters of "Congratulations on the big win" are displayed as a guidance mode for guiding that the effect result of this time is the effect result that is advantageous to the player.

In the thirty-first control example, as shown in FIG. 920(b), when the "60 seconds" set when the "super chance mode" has elapsed, the "super chance mode" is immediately activated. Instead of ending immediately, the display mode displayed in the display area Dm7 is variably displayed as "3 seconds remaining", "1 second remaining", and "? seconds remaining". Then, based on the display of the effect result of the mode variation effect being executed (the third mode variation effect), the display mode of the display area Dm7 is variably displayed from "seconds remaining" to "end". , is configured to end the "super chance mode".

With this configuration, it is possible for the player to understand in an easy-to-understand manner that the state in which "? seconds remaining" is displayed is a state in which the "super chance mode" can end at any time. At the same time, even if there is a slight error between the contents of the remaining time display displayed in the display area Dm7 and the timing at which the effect result of the third mode variable effect is displayed, the message “Remaining??” continues. Since only the length of time displayed is different, the effect can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

In addition, in the thirty-first control example, the predetermined effect period of the "super chance mode" is set to 60 seconds, the display area Dm7 executes the subtraction display of 60 seconds, and the display area Dm7 displays the subtraction. Seconds remaining” is displayed at the timing when the display mode indicates “0 seconds”. seconds) is displayed in the display area Dm7 in a subtractive manner, and when the display mode displayed in the display area Dm7 in a subtractive manner indicates "0 seconds", "remainder? ? seconds” may be displayed.

By configuring in this way, the end timing of the final mode variation effect (third mode variation effect) executed during the "super chance mode" is earlier than the predetermined effect period (for example, 61 seconds). (for example, 60.8 seconds), it is possible to end the "super chance mode" while "remaining ? seconds" is displayed, so the display area Dm7 displays a subtraction. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the "super chance mode" ending with the number of seconds remaining.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the 31st control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 921 and 922, the electrical configuration in the thirty-first control example will be described. In this 31st control example, for the 26th control example described above, the variation pattern selection table 202vc (see FIG. 692) of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 is referred to during the probability variation variation pattern 31 table 202aba is added, and the effect mode storage area 223aba is added to the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113. Other than that, they are the same, and the description of the same content is omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 921, the probability variation variation pattern 31 table 202aba will be described. FIG. 921 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the probability variation variation pattern 31 table 202aba. As shown in FIG. 921, the probability variation variation pattern 31 table 202aba is configured to determine different variation patterns based on the number of special symbol variations after the probability variation state is set.

Specifically, for the range of "1 to 100" for the number of special symbol variations (number of variations) after the probability variation state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the lottery result and the acquired variation type counter CS1 Various variation patterns are defined in which variation times of 2 seconds to 60 seconds are defined in association with values.

Then, for the number of fluctuations "101", if the lottery result is "loss", regardless of the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1, if a short loss of "2 seconds" is a "jackpot" , regardless of the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, "20 seconds" is defined as a variation pattern, and for the number of variations "102", if the lottery result is "loss" , regardless of the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, if a short loss of "2 seconds" is a "jackpot", regardless of the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, the variation pattern is a hit of "18 seconds" For the number of fluctuations "103", if the lottery result is "loss", regardless of the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1, a short loss of "2 seconds" is a "jackpot ”, regardless of the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, the hit of “16 seconds” is defined as the variation pattern, and the lottery result is “loss” for the number of variations “104”. In some cases, regardless of the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, if a short loss of "2 seconds" is a "jackpot", regardless of the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, "14 seconds" Hit is defined as a variation pattern, and for the number of variations "105", if the lottery result is "loss", a short loss of "2 seconds" regardless of the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 However, in the case of a "jackpot", regardless of the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, the winning of "12 seconds" is defined as the variation pattern, and for the number of variations "106", the lottery result is If it is a "loss", regardless of the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, if the loss of "10 seconds" is a "jackpot", regardless of the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, "10 Seconds hit is defined as a variation pattern.

In other words, in the range of the number of fluctuations "101" to "106", if all the special symbol lotteries are out, or if any special symbol lottery wins a jackpot, continue On the premise that the special symbol variation is executed, each variation pattern is defined so that the lottery result is announced 20 seconds after the 101st special symbol variation is started.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily display the effect result of the first mode variable effect executed targeting the range of the number of times of change from "101" to "106" at a specific timing.

In addition, in the present 31st control example, as described above, if all the special symbol lotteries are lost, or if any of the special symbol lottery wins the jackpot, the special symbol fluctuation continues. On the premise that is executed, the lottery result is notified 20 seconds after the 101st special symbol variation is started, but not limited to this, some jackpot winnings As the variation pattern to be selected from time to time, it may be possible to select variation patterns with different lengths of variation time. By configuring in this way, normally, the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed at the timing when 20 seconds have passed, and the effect result of the first mode variation effect is displayed, whereas, for example, the first mode To provide a player with a sense of incongruity that special symbol variation is stopped before the performance result of the variable performance is displayed or that the special symbol variation is continued while the performance result of the first mode variable performance is displayed. can do.

Next, for the number of fluctuations "107, 108", if the lottery result is "loss", the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0.2" for the range "0 to 99" If the ultra-short deviation of “seconds” is “100 to 198” and the deviation of “2 seconds” is “jackpot”, the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is “0 to 169” A super-short hit of "0.2 seconds" for the range and a hit of "20 seconds" for the range of "170 to 198" are defined as variation patterns.

Here, when a variation pattern with a short variation time (0.2 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern with the number of variations "107, 108", the period until the special symbol variation is stopped, the first mode It is configured to continuously display the variable production.

By configuring in this way, the number of special symbol lotteries referred to as the effect result of the first mode variable effect can be varied according to the type of the selected variation pattern.

In addition, in the range of the number of fluctuations "109" to "111", that is, in the range targeted for the second mode fluctuation production, all the special symbols are the same as each fluctuation targeted for the first mode fluctuation production described above. Even if the lottery is lost or if a big hit is won in any special symbol lottery, the 107th special symbol variation is performed on the premise that the special symbol variation is continuously executed. Each variation pattern is defined so that the result of the lottery is announced 20 seconds after the start.

Similarly, as shown in FIG. 921, even in the range of the number of times of variation "112" to "120", even in the range subject to the third mode variation performance, the above-described first mode variation performance is targeted. As with each variation, if all the special symbol lotteries are lost, or if any special symbol lottery wins a jackpot, the special symbol variation is continuously executed. As a premise, each variation pattern is defined so that the lottery result is announced 20 seconds after the 120th special symbol variation is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 922, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the thirty-first control example will be described. FIG. 922 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the thirty-first control example. As shown in FIG. 922, the thirty-first control example is different from the twenty-sixth control example described above in that an effect mode storage area 223aba is added to the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 .

The effect mode storage area 223aba is a storage means for storing the type of the mode change effect being executed, and when the mode change effect is determined in the variable probability state effect mode determination process 31 (see F3092 in FIG. 923). , information corresponding to the determined type of mode variation effect is stored. Then, each time the special symbol variation is executed, the type of the stored mode variation effect is referred to, and the corresponding effect mode is determined.

Furthermore, the production mode storage area 223aba is configured to be able to store an extension state for temporarily extending the mode variation production, and when the extension state is stored, a new mode variation production type is determined. configured to prevent By configuring in this way, by selecting the ultra-short variation (variation of 0.2 seconds), it is possible to smoothly execute the effect control without switching the type of the mode variation effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 923, the contents of the control processing in the thirty-first control example will be described. The 31st control example is different from the 26th control example described above in that the processing for determining the effect mode of the variable effect executed during the variable probability state is different. Specifically, the difference is that the variable probability state effect mode determination process 31 (see F3092 in FIG. 923) is executed instead of the variable probability state effect mode determination process 26 (see F3052 in FIG. 820). Since the other processing contents are the same, the description thereof is omitted.

FIG. 923 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the variable probability state effect mode determination processing 31 (see F3092). As shown in FIG. 923, in the variable probability state effect mode determination processing 31 (see F3092), the mode variation effect being executed continues (extended ) is different in that a control process is added. Other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.

When the probability changing state effect mode determination process 26 (see F3052 in FIG. 820) is executed, first, the same F4301 to F4310 processes as the above-described probability changing state effect mode determination process 26 (see F3052 in FIG. 820) are executed. After executing the processes of F4304, F4306, and F4308, the determined type of mode change effect is stored in the mode effect storage area 223aba (F4351), and the process proceeds to F4356.

On the other hand, after completing the process of F4309 or the process of F4310, the type stored in the mode effect storage area 223aba is read (F4352) and used in the next mode (mode change effect to be set next). It is determined based on the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223va whether the special figure reservation is stored. Then, if it is determined that there is a special figure hold in the next mode (F4353: Yes), the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation to be executed in the special figure hold of the target is pre-determined (look ahead), ultra-short fluctuation (0 .2 second fluctuation) (F4354), and if it is determined to be an ultra-short fluctuation (F4354: Yes), determine the continuation of the current mode production until the special figure fluctuation period related to the next mode special figure hold Then, the effect mode corresponding to the variation pattern command is determined (F4355), and the process proceeds to F4356.

On the other hand, in the processing of F4353, if it is determined that there is no special figure suspension in the next mode (F4353: No), or in the processing of F4354, if it is determined that the next mode special figure suspension is not an ultra-short variation (F4354 : No), determine the effect mode corresponding to the variation pattern command (F4356), and terminate this process.

That is, for example, when determining the variation performance corresponding to the special symbol variation of the number of times of variation "106", which is the final variation of the first mode variation performance, if the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is lost and won. , The number of times of variation "107", "108" It is determined whether it has a special symbol reservation used for the special symbol variation (F4353). It is determined in advance whether the "108" special symbol variation is a super-short variation (F4354). When it is pre-determined that it is an ultra-short variation, the lottery result of the special symbol variation that is an ultra-short variation is pre-determined, and when the pre-determination result is a jackpot winning, the first mode variation performance is performed. As a result, a performance result indicating winning of a jackpot is determined, and when the preliminary determination result is a loss, a performance result indicating failure is determined as a performance result of the first mode variation performance, and a performance corresponding to the determined performance result. A mode is determined (F4356). In addition, the determined effect mode is a process of continuously displaying until the corresponding special symbol variation (special symbol variation that is an ultra-short variation among the special symbol variations of the number of times of variation "107" and "108") is stopped and displayed. is executed.

In addition, the range in which the process of F4356 is executed is only the range in which the ultra-short variation is set as the special symbol variation of the number of variations "107" and "108". Variation, if the "108" time is an ultra-short variation, the range is until the "108" special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, the number of variations "107" is an ultra-short variation, and the "108" time is normal In the case of fluctuation, the range is until the "107" special symbol fluctuation is stopped and displayed, and if the fluctuation number "107" is a normal fluctuation, and if the fluctuation number "108" is an ultra-short fluctuation. Even so, the process of F4356 is not executed.

Therefore, when the number of fluctuations "107" is normal fluctuation and "108" is ultra-short fluctuation, the second mode fluctuation effect is executed within the range including the fluctuation time of ultra-short fluctuation, and normal There will be a difference between the variation (2 seconds) and the ultra-short variation (0.2 seconds). However, in the thirty-first control example, as shown in FIG. 920(a), an effect suggesting the end timing of each mode variation effect is not executed. Each mode variation performance can be executed smoothly without any trouble.

In this case, as the second mode variation effect, the timing at which the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed when all target special symbol lotteries are lost and when a jackpot is won in any special symbol lottery. However, by configuring the length of the period during which the effect result of the second mode variable effect is stopped and displayed (the effect result finalizing period) to be longer than the above-described difference (1.8 seconds), the player can It is possible to execute a production that does not give a sense of incongruity.

As described above, in the 31st control example, when the remaining period of the advantageous gaming state (probability variable state) that is advantageous to the player satisfies the predetermined condition (remaining 20 times), multiple special symbol lotteries It is constructed so that one variable effect (mode variable effect) is executed across the period in which is executed. By configuring in this way, when an advantageous game state (probability variable state) that is advantageous to the player is set, it is difficult for the player to grasp the number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed during the advantageous game state. Therefore, the player can play the game while anticipating that the advantageous game state will continue for a long time.

In addition, in this 31st control example, it is configured so that the range of the special symbol lottery referred to for determining the effect result of one mode variation effect can be varied. Specifically, as the range of the special symbol lottery referred to for determining the effect result of the first mode variable effect, the range of "the value of the probability variable counter 223vr is "20 to 15"" is defined in advance, The variation time is short as the variation pattern of the special symbol lottery executed a plurality of times after the first mode variation effect is completed, that is, the value of the probability variable counter 223vr corresponds to the range of "14, 13". When the variation pattern (ultra-short variation) is selected, the first mode variation effect is executed using the period until the special symbol variation corresponding to the special symbol lottery in which the ultra-short variation is selected is completed. It is configured as follows.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the number of special symbol lotteries referred to for determining the performance result of one mode variation performance, so that one mode variation performance is provided to the player. It is possible to differentiate the possibility of determining the effect result (the effect result indicating the winning of the jackpot) that is advantageous to the player as the effect result of .

In addition, in the thirty-first control example, as described above, when the predetermined condition is established, the number of times of the special symbol lottery referred to determine the effect result of the one mode variation effect is the predetermined number of times. Although the configuration has been described that can be increased more than 1, it is sufficient if the number of special symbol lotteries referred to for determining the effect result of one mode variation effect can be varied. A configuration may be used in which the number of special symbol lotteries referred to for determining the performance result can be reduced below a predetermined number of times.

In this case, for example, as the range of the special symbol lottery referred to for determining the effect result of the first mode variable effect, the range of "the value of the probability variable counter 223vr is '20 to 15'" is defined in advance, When a long variation pattern in which a longer variation time than usual is set is determined as a variation pattern of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the range of "16, 15" for the value of the probability variation counter 223vr, the special of the long variation pattern It may be configured to perform control for forcibly ending the first mode variation performance so that the range in which the first mode variation performance is performed is up to the special symbol lottery immediately before the symbol variation is performed.

In addition, as described above, when the control to forcibly terminate the first mode variable effect is executed, the effect period of the first mode variable effect becomes shorter than when the normal first mode variable effect is executed. Therefore, for example, as a fluctuation pattern of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the range of "16, 15" for the value of the variable probability counter 223vr, the case where the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery wins the jackpot wins. It is preferable to configure such that the long fluctuation pattern is more likely to be determined than when there is no such device. With this configuration, the first mode variation performance is forcibly terminated, and when the performance period is shorter than usual, the special symbol variation for winning the jackpot is executed after the first mode variation performance is completed. Therefore, the first mode variation executed to feel discomfort when the first mode variation effect ends (uncomfortable due to the end of the first mode variation effect earlier than usual) You can keep an eye on the performance.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-first control example is configured to determine the type of mode variation performance to be executed and the performance period of the mode variation performance to be executed based on the number of executions of the special symbol lottery. However, another configuration may be used without being limited to this. For example, when the remaining period of the probability variation state (the number of remaining special symbol lotteries that can be executed during the probability variation state) satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, 20 times), the mode variation effect is started, and the mode variation effect is executed. When a specific time (for example, 60 seconds) elapses after the game is played, the performance result of the mode variation performance is notified in a display mode showing the result of the special symbol lottery executed at that time. can be

In this case, according to the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol variation executed during the performance period during which the mode variation performance is performed, the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the specific time is different, so the mode variation performance It is possible to easily vary the number of special symbol lotteries referred to for determining the effect result of .

Also, as described above, when the effect period of the mode variation effect is set not by the number of executions of the special symbol lottery but by the elapsed time, the special symbol lottery is not executed during the mode variation effect by the player stopping the game. An incident is likely to occur. In this case, for example, a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has passed since the last special symbol variation was stop-displayed with the lottery result indicating the failure, and the display condition for displaying the standby screen of the pachinko machine 10 has been established. Based on this, the effect result indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is out is determined as the effect result of the mode change effect being executed, and the mode change effect is terminated.

<Thirty-Second Control Example>
The thirty-second control example will be described below with reference to FIGS. 924 to 1001. FIG. FIG. 924 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-second control example, FIG. 925 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 927 to 930 are schematic diagrams showing the structure of the V winning device 650 provided on the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 931 is an enlarged view of various buttons provided on the pachinko machine 10 932 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 924, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and a and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12 in the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 924). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 925) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is performed by causing balls (game balls) to flow down the front surface (game area) of the game board 13 . In addition, the inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 950) that shoots a game ball to the front area (game area) of the game board 13 and a ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front of the game board 13. A launch rail (not shown) or the like is attached to guide the player to the area (game area).

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see Fig. 924). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls which protrudes forward and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 924), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball shooting unit 112a. A frame button 22 that can be operated by the player and a selection button 600 (not shown) are provided on the upper surface of the upper tray 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player in order to change the effect mode of various effects executed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 925) and the like. A button 22a is provided. The pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-second control example is configured to be able to execute an operation effect in which the effect mode is varied based on the operation of the effect button 22a by the player. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the willingness of the player to participate in the game.

The selection buttons 600 are operated by the player to determine the game environment of the pachinko machine 10. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 600d and a left button 600e are provided. In the pachinko machine 10 in this 32nd control example, as the game environment of the pachinko machine 10, the volume level of the sound output from the sound output device 226 (see FIG. 950) and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 925) A backlight (not shown) that illuminates the displayed display screen and the light amount level of the decorative LED attached to the pachinko machine 10 are configured so that the player can adjust them. Further, the player can select one effect mode from a plurality of effect modes having different effect patterns of various display effects executed by the third symbol display device 81 . By constructing in this way, even if various players with different tastes play the pachinko machine 10, each player can select (determine) a game environment suitable for his taste. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

Note that the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-second control example includes, as operating means that can be operated by the player, the frame button 22 that is operated during the operation presentation and the selection button 600 that is operated when selecting the game environment. have. In other words, although a plurality of operation means are provided for different uses, they are not limited to this, and the frame button 22 can be operated when selecting a game environment, or the selection button 600 can be operated as an operation effect. It may be configured to

In addition, in this 32nd control example, as the operation means (frame button 22) operated during the operation effect, a configuration having one effect button 22a is used. It may be configured to have two or more operating means.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-second control example, as the operation means that can be operated by the player, a button configuration that can determine that the operation means has been operated by detecting that the player has pressed it is used. However, any configuration other than the button configuration may be used as long as it can detect the operation by the player. An operation means having a detection means capable of detecting that the user is performing a pulling action (for example, a pulling action) may be used. In addition, instead of the player directly touching the operation means, a non-contact device that can detect the presence of a part of the player's body (such as a hand) in a predetermined space area (detection range of the sensor) A type of operation detection means (sensor, etc.) may be used. In this case, instead of simply detecting a part of the player's body (for example, a hand, etc.), the player's body is detected within a predetermined space area. is preferably moved according to a predetermined rule. By configuring in this way, for example, when the player leaves the seat to temporarily suspend the game of the pachinko machine 10, a part of the player's body (for example, the head) is erroneously operated. Even if it enters into the detection range of the means, it is possible to suppress the execution of the operation presentation triggered by it.

The front frame 14 is provided with light-emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED or the like and capable of displaying when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error has occurred is provided at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 924).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 925) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chromium, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to create more splendor.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to hit the ball in front of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit in front of the game board 13 with a flying distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extracting lever 52 is provided at the front lower portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when the game balls stored in the lower tray 50 are ejected downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. Game balls naturally fall from the bottom opening and are discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 for receiving the game balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 925, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 which is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front. Ball mouth 63, first ball entrance 64, second ball entrance 640, first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device (V winning device) 650, normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, variable display device It is configured by assembling the unit 80 and the like, and its peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 924). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general ball entrance 63, the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, the first variable prize winning device 65, the second variable prize winning device (V winning device) 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are based on router processing. It is arranged in a through hole formed in the plate 60 and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 924) of the front frame 14. FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 925, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

In front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 924). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and a shot is fired). This is the area where the game ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the game ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 950) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 925) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 925) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

On the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side when viewed from the front in FIG. 925), a display corresponding to the first special symbol is provided as a first symbol display device 37 having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display. A device 37a and a display device 37b corresponding to the second special symbol are provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays a display corresponding to each control performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 950), and mainly displays the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this 32nd control example, the first symbol display device 37 is configured to be used properly according to whether the game ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. It is Specifically, when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the display device 37a operates, and on the other hand, when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, A display device 37b is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display device 37 lights and displays an LED (status LED) capable of notifying the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 by the lighting state, and the stop symbol is a pattern corresponding to the short-time jackpot or the normal jackpot. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the number of rounds during the big hit and the error are displayed by the 7-segment display device. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and depending on the combination of the emission colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is conducted when a ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the type of the big win when the result of the determination is a big win. As the types of jackpots determined here, 6R short-time jackpots (jackpot A), 6R normal jackpots (jackpot B), and 9R short-time jackpots (jackpot C) are prepared. The first pattern display device 37 not only indicates whether or not the result of the lottery is a big win as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also shows a pattern corresponding to the type of the big win in the case of a big win.

Here, "6R short time jackpot" is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) after a jackpot game with a maximum number of rounds of 6 rounds. It is a jackpot type (jackpot A) that shifts to a time-saving state (low probability state of special patterns, high probability state of normal patterns), and “6R normal jackpot” is a jackpot game with a maximum number of rounds of 6 rounds. It is a jackpot type (jackpot B) that shifts to a normal state after . In addition, "9R time-saving jackpot" is a jackpot type (jackpot C) that shifts to a time-saving state after a jackpot game with a maximum number of rounds of 9 rounds.

Here, the game flow of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-second control example will be briefly described. In the pachinko machine 10 in the 32nd control example, the first symbol in which the lottery is executed when the execution condition is satisfied based on the fact that the game ball launched into the game area enters the first ball entrance 64. (first special symbol), and a first symbol (second special symbol) in which a lottery is executed when an execution condition is established based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640. there is Then, as a result of lottery for each first symbol (special symbol), it is configured to determine whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss.

When a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, the opening/closing door 65b (see FIG. 925) of the first variable prize winning device 65 is opened, making it easier for the game ball to enter the specific winning port 65a (see FIG. 925). It is constructed so that a jackpot game is executed. When a game ball enters the specific winning hole 65a, 11 prize balls are paid out for one winning game ball. Therefore, in order to obtain many prize balls in the game on the pachinko machine 10, the player can play the game with enthusiasm with the aim of winning a jackpot in the lottery of the special symbols.

Furthermore, when a small hit is won in the lottery of special symbols, the opening/closing door 650f (see FIG. 925) of the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 is opened, leading to the V winning opening 650a (see FIG. 925). And it is configured to execute a small winning game that makes it easier to win a game ball. When a game ball enters the V winning hole 650a, 11 prize balls are paid out for one winning game ball.

In addition, in this 32nd control example, when the game ball that has entered the V winning opening 650a passes through the specific area (V area) 650e4 provided in the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 , the jackpot game can be executed by opening the opening/closing door 65b of the first variable winning device 65 after the small prize game is finished.

That is, in the 32nd control example, the execution trigger for executing the jackpot game is the first jackpot trigger that is established when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, and the game ball is in the specific area (V area) during the small hit game. ) and a second jackpot opportunity that is established when passing through 650e4. By configuring in this way, since it is possible to execute the jackpot game at various opportunities, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-second control example is configured to be able to execute a big winning game and a small winning game as winning games that can award prize balls to the player. The contents of each winning game are determined in advance so that more prize balls can be given to the player (more game balls can be won) during the jackpot game than during the game. . That is, the big winning game is a winning game that is more advantageous to the player than the small winning game in terms of the number of winning balls that the player can acquire.

Further, when the jackpot game is executed, the game state corresponding to the jackpot type can be set after the jackpot game ends, whereas the small win game starts after the jackpot game ends. It is configured so that the game state that was set at the time of being set is set again. That is, for example, when the jackpot game is executed in a state where the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set, based on the jackpot type of the jackpot game, the jackpot game A game state (time saving state) different from the normal state can be set after the end, and when the small winning game is executed in the state where the normal state is set, the normal state is set after the small winning game is completed. It consists of

Therefore, for a player who is playing a game expecting that a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the currently set game state is set, a new game state can be set. becomes a winning game more advantageous than the small winning game.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-second control example is configured to be able to execute a lottery of normal symbols (second symbol) in addition to the above-described special symbol lottery (special symbol lottery). When the execution condition is satisfied based on the passage (entering) of the game ball to the through gate 67, the lottery of the normal symbol is executed. Then, as a result of the lottery for the normal symbol (second symbol), it is configured to determine whether it is hit or lost. When winning the normal pattern lottery, by activating the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 925), a normal pattern winning game that makes it easier to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 is executed. be.

That is, by executing the game per normal pattern, it is possible to make it easier to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 than when the game per normal pattern is not executed. Therefore, for the player, by entering the game ball into the first ball entrance 64, the first special symbol lottery is executed to aim for a big hit game, and the game ball is entered into the through gate 67 ( pass), execute the normal symbol lottery, and enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 to execute the second special symbol lottery and aim for a big hit game. , the player can be provided with a variety of games, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, although a detailed description will be given later, the pachinko machine 10 in the 32nd control example is configured to be able to set a "low probability state" and a "high probability state" as the normal symbol probability state. When the low probability state of the pattern is set, the game ball is put into the second ball entrance 640 based on the result of one normal pattern lottery than when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set. It is configured so that the expectation that it will be possible to enter the ball is low.

Specifically, the "normal pattern high probability state" means that the winning probability of the normal pattern (second pattern) lottery is increased, and the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is opened. Changed and set to a longer time than normal. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the number of game balls entering the second ball entrance 640 is higher than when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy to enter the ball. Therefore, during the high-probability state of normal symbols, game balls are likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, and the number of times the special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery) is performed can be increased.

In addition, instead of lengthening the opening time of the electric accessary 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640, or in addition to lengthening the opening time, as a normal pattern winning game during the high probability state of the normal symbol Then, the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened in one normal pattern per game may be changed to be increased more than the normal pattern per game executed during the low probability state of the normal pattern. In addition, during the high probability state of normal symbols, the winning probability of normal symbols (second symbol) is not changed, and the time and one normal symbol that the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is opened. At least one of the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened in a winning game may be changed. In addition, during the normal pattern high probability state, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened in one game per normal pattern cannot be changed. Instead, only the winning probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) may be changed so as to be increased as compared with the low probability state of the normal symbol.

In addition, in this 32nd control example, as described above, the probability state of normal symbols is configured to be changeable between "low probability state" and "high probability state", and the probability state of special symbols is configured not to be changed. However, without being limited to this, the probability state of the special symbol may be configured to be changeable to "low probability state" and "high probability state" in the same manner as the probability state of the normal symbol described above. In this case, when the high probability state of the special design is set, than when the low probability state of the special design is set, so as to increase the probability that the lottery result of the special design will be a big hit (jackpot probability). Good to configure. In addition to the big win probability, it may be constructed so as to increase the probability that the lottery result of the special pattern becomes a small win (small win probability), or it may be constituted so as to increase both the big win probability and the small win probability. Good, when the high probability state of the special design is set, than when the low probability state of the special design is set, so that the probability that the lottery result of the special design is out (loss probability) is low can be configured to

The game area is provided with a plurality of general ball entrances 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when game balls enter. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the winning (starting winning) of the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is used as a trigger, and while synchronizing with the variable display on the first pattern display device 37, the decorative second A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that performs variable display of three symbols, and a game ball passing through a normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs for variably displaying two symbols (normal symbols) is provided. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 950), for example, left, middle and right three patterns. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are vertically scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the thirty-second control example, the first symbol display device 37 displays special symbols under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 950). A decorative display according to the display of the pattern display device 37 is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be constructed using a reel or the like.

The second symbol display device displays a symbol "○" and a symbol "x" as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) each time the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67. A variable display is performed by alternately lighting up for a predetermined period of time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that a ball has passed through a normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this control example), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is displayed at a predetermined value. It is configured to be activated (released) only for a period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second pattern (normal pattern) is shorter in the time-saving state (high probability state in normal patterns) than in the normal state (low probability state in normal patterns). set. As a result, the variable display of the second pattern (normal pattern) is performed in a short time during the time saving state, so that the number of execution times of the normal pattern lottery per unit period can be increased more than in the normal state. Therefore, since the chances of winning the result of the normal symbol lottery increase, the player is given more opportunities to open the electric accessary 640a of the second ball entrance 640 (opportunity to execute the normal symbol winning game). be able to. Therefore, during the time-saving state (high-probability state of normal symbols), the game ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 640 .

The normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the right region of the variable display unit 80, and the game balls launched to the game board 13 flow down the right side of the game board 13. A part of the sphere is configured to be passable. When the game ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, a lottery for the second symbol (normal symbol) is performed. After the normal symbol lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the normal symbol lottery is a hit, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the normal symbol lottery is displayed. If it is out of line, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the game ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is suspended up to 4 times in total, and the number of suspended balls (normal symbol suspension number) is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37. A second symbol holding lamp (not shown) is also illuminated. Four second pattern holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

The variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device, as in the 32nd control example. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . In addition, the maximum number of held balls for the passage of the game ball through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to 4 times, but may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). May be set. In addition, the number of normal symbol starting openings (through gates) 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the mounting position of the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side (right side area) of the variable display device unit 80. For example, the left side (left side area) of the variable display device unit 80 good. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reserved lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 through which game balls can enter is arranged. When a game ball enters the first ball inlet 64, a first ball inlet switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball inlet switch is turned on. Then, a special symbol lottery is performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 950), and the display device 37a of the first symbol display device 37 shows a display corresponding to the lottery result.

On the other hand, below the right side area of the game board 13, a second ball entrance 640 through which game balls can enter is arranged. When a game ball enters the second ball inlet 640, a second ball inlet switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second ball inlet switch is turned on. Then, a special symbol lottery is performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 950), and the display device 37b of the first symbol display device 37 shows the display corresponding to the lottery result.

Also, when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, four game balls are paid out as prize balls, and when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, one ball becomes a prize ball. It is configured to be paid out. In other words, the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 have both the role of a start winning opening for executing the special symbol lottery and the role of a winning opening for paying out prize balls. In the thirty-second control example, the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 The number of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and the same number, for example, the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 is 1, and when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, it is paid out. It may be configured to be the same as the number of prize balls.

The second ball entrance 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. This electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (embedded state), making it difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. . On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory is displayed. 640a is in an open state (protruding state), and the game ball is easily entered into the second ball inlet 640. As shown in FIG.

As described above, during the time saving state, the probability of hitting the second symbol (normal symbol) is higher than during the normal state, and the time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol (normal symbol) (Normal figure fluctuation time) Since the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is displayed in a variable display, the "o" symbol is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (protruding state) increases. Furthermore, during the time saving state, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is released is also longer than during the normal state. Therefore, during the time-saving state, it is possible to create a state in which the game ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 than during the normal state.

More specifically, in the normal state in which the normal symbol low probability state is set, the player executes a right-handed game in which the game ball is shot toward the right side area of the game board 13, and the through gate 67 is entered. Even if the normal game is executed by passing the game ball, the game ball can hardly enter the second ball entrance 640, and the game ball is directed to the left area of the game board 13. It is constructed so that more special symbol lotteries can be executed by executing a left-handed game of shooting and entering a game ball into the first ball entrance 64.例文帳に追加.

On the other hand, in the time-saving state in which the normal symbol high probability state is set, the player executes a right-handed game in which the game ball is shot toward the right side area of the game board 13, and the game ball is sent to the through gate 67. When a game per normal pattern is executed by passing, the game ball can be easily entered into the second ball entrance 640, and the game ball can be launched toward the left area of the game board 13. More special symbol lotteries can be executed than when a hitting game is executed and a game ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64.例文帳に追加

That is, in the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-second control example, when the normal state is set, the left-handed game is more advantageous than the right-handed game from the viewpoint of executing the special symbol lottery, When the time-saving state is set, the right-handed game is more advantageous to the player than the left-handed game from the viewpoint of executing the special symbol lottery. As described above, in the thirty-second control example, since the game method that is advantageous to the player is changed according to the set game state, the game method for the player who has been playing the game for a long time can be changed. can be played while changing , and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

Here, a first special symbol lottery executed when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and a second special lottery executed when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 The pattern lottery is configured so that the probability that the lottery result is a big hit is the same (about 1/300). However, as the type of jackpot selected when the jackpot is won, the probability that the number of round games executed during the jackpot game will be the maximum 9 rounds (R) is the second special symbol lottery. It is set higher than the pattern lottery. In addition, the probability of setting a time-saving state advantageous to the player as the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is set higher in the second special symbol lottery than in the first special symbol lottery. On the other hand, unlike the second ball entrance 640, the first ball entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory 640a, and is in a state in which game balls can be entered at all times.

Therefore, in the normal state, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is often closed, and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. A game ball is shot so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80 toward the first ball entrance 64 without a ball (so-called "left hitting"), and the ball enters the first ball entrance 64. It is advantageous for the player to obtain many opportunities for the first special symbol lottery and aim for a big hit.

On the other hand, during the time saving state, by passing the ball through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state, and the second ball entrance 640 Since it is in a state where it is easy to enter the ball, the game ball is shot toward the second ball entrance 640 so that the ball passes through the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right hit"), and the normal symbol is started. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for a big win by passing through the opening (through gate) 67 to open the electric accessory 640a and entering the second ball entrance 640. - 特許庁

Then, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the 32nd control example, the jackpot winning in the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot winning in the first special symbol lottery. A game (jackpot game with a large number of rounds) is configured to be easily executed, and a time-saving state advantageous to the player is easily set after the jackpot game is finished. Therefore, the time-saving state in which the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed is a game state more advantageous to the player than the normal state in which the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the 32nd control example instructs the player how to shoot balls according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the time-saving state or in the normal state). can be changed to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

Here, the ball flow to the second ball entrance 640 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 925 and 926. FIG. In the 32nd control example, as shown in FIG. 925, the variable display device unit 80 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area of the game board 13, and the game area is set to the left side of the variable display unit 80 (left-handed area). and the right side (right hitting area), and by adjusting the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 by the player, the destination of the shot ball can be divided into the right hitting area and the left hitting area. configured as possible. Hereinafter, a game in which the player operates the operation handle 51 to shoot a ball into the left-handed area of the game area is called a left-handed game, and a game in which the player shoots a ball into the right-handed area is called a right-handed game.

As shown in FIG. 925, the second ball entrance 640, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640, and the normal symbol start that triggers the lottery as to whether or not to operate the electric accessory 640a. A mouth (through gate) 67 is arranged in the right hitting area, and when the time saving state is set as the game state, the right hitting game is performed.

A nail is planted under the variable display device unit 80 so that the ball fired by the left-handed game does not enter the second ball entrance 640, and the second ball is entered during the left-handed game. It is configured so that the ball does not enter the mouth 640. - 特許庁By configuring in this way, in the left-handed game, the game ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 in order to execute the lottery of the first special symbol, and in the right-handed game, the second special symbol is performed. A game can be played in which game balls are entered into the second ball entrance 640 in order to execute the lottery, and different game properties can be appropriately provided according to the game method.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-second control example, as shown in FIG. 925, in the right-handed area, the through gate 67, the second variable winning device 650, the electric accessory 640a, and the first variable winning device 65 are arranged in this order from the upstream side. Each mechanism is arranged in order, and a plurality of nails planted on the upstream side of the through gate 67 in the right area irregularly vary the flow speed and direction of the game balls flowing down the right area. , about 2/3 of the game balls flowing down the right side area pass through the through gate 67 . The game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 reaches the second variable winning device 650 while being guided upstream of the second variable winning device 650 by a plurality of nails planted below the through gate 67. It is configured to

On the other hand, the game ball that reaches the second variable winning device 650 without passing through the through gate 67 (flowing down the channel formed on the left side of the through gate 67) is more likely than the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 Also reaches the downstream side of the second variable winning device 650, or to the electric role product 640a disposed downstream of the second variable winning device 650 without reaching the second variable winning device 650 It is configured to reach

As shown in FIG. 925, the second variable prize winning device 650 is disposed on the game board 13 so that its upper surface forms a ball path that slopes downward to the left (lower left when viewed from the front in FIG. 925). The game ball flowing down the upper surface of the second variable prize winning device 650 (the upper surface of the open/close door 650f1 in the closed state) is configured to flow down toward the electric accessory 640a. Although the details will be described later, the second variable winning device 650 is opened and closed by a small winning game executed when a small winning prize is won in a special symbol lottery, and a state in which a small winning game is not executed. , the opening of the V winning port 650a of the second variable winning device 650 is covered by the open/close door 650f1 in a closed state, and most of the game balls that reach the second variable winning device 650 enter the V winning port 650a. It is discharged toward the downstream side without

On the other hand, while the small winning game is being executed, the opening and closing operation in which the opening and closing door 650f1 is repeatedly switched between the open state and the closed state is executed, so that the game ball reaching the upstream side of the second variable winning device 650 ( A game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is easily entered into the V winning opening 650a. That is, in the right area, there are a first flow path (a flow path in which game balls that have passed through the through gate 67 flow down) that facilitates the game ball to enter the second variable winning device 650 during the small winning game, and a second variable A second flow path (a flow path through which game balls that do not pass through the through gate 67 flow down) is formed to make it difficult for the winning device 650 to win a prize. Therefore, when a small winning game is executed, while expecting that the ratio of the number of winnings to the second variable winning device 650 with respect to the number of fired game balls increases, pay attention to the behavior of the game balls flowing down the right side area. can be made

As described above, in the 32nd control example, about 2/3 of the game balls launched by the right-handed game pass through the through gate 67 and flow down toward the upstream side of the second variable winning device 650, The remaining 1/2 is configured to flow down toward the second variable winning device 650 without passing through the through gate 67 . Then, while the small winning game is not being executed, all the game balls that are shot by the right-handed game and flowed down the right side area do not enter the V winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650. The character 640a is reached.

Then, when the electric accessory 640a is located in the retracted state (buried state), the game ball flows down toward the first variable winning device 65 through the retracted electric accessory 640a. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 640a is positioned in the protruding state, the game ball that reaches the electric accessory 640a moves the upper surface of the protruding electric accessory 640a to the lower right direction (lower right direction in the front view of FIG. 925). ). Then, the ball that reaches the right end of the electric accessory 640a enters the second ball entrance 640, and when the electric accessory 640a changes to the retracted state before reaching the right end of the electric accessory 640a, the electric It is constructed such that the ball enters the general winning hole 63 arranged below the accessory 640a.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a transparent cover member 655 so as to cover the electric accessory 640a, the second ball entrance 640, and the general prize winning opening 63 described above. The surface of the cover member 655 is cut to diffusely reflect incident light. By providing this cover member 655, the inside of the cover member 655 is made visible to the player by various lights emitted from the light emitting means (LED etc.) provided in the pachinko machine 10 and the third pattern display device 81 during the game. can be made difficult. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the act of performing a right-handed game by planning the operation timing of the electric accessory 640a.

In addition, when a game is not being played (when the power of the gaming machine is turned off), the light incident on the cover member is suppressed, so that the inside of the cover member 655 can be easily visually recognized. Maintenance of the machine 10 can be easily performed. In the case where the cover member 655 is used to vary the visibility of the interior in this manner, the light emitting means can be shared by configuring the light emitting means for emitting light for decoration as described above. , and the number of parts constituting the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In addition, the inside of the cover member 655 may be made invisible for a predetermined period including the period during which the electric accessory 640a is operated. For example, when it is determined that the electric accessory 640a is operated (that is, controlling the light emitting means so that characters (e.g., "open") notifying that the electric accessory 640a operates on the surface of the cover member 655 (when winning a prize by lottery of normal symbols) are displayed; The displayed characters may be configured to make the inside of the cover member 655 difficult to see. As a result, it is possible to make the player understand that the electric accessory 640a is moving, and make it difficult for the player to comprehend the detailed operation timing.

Here, with reference to FIG. 926, the configuration of the electric accessory 640a provided in the right-handed area of the pachinko machine 10 will be described in more detail. As shown in FIG. 926, among the balls launched by the right-handed game, the game balls flowing down from the second variable winning device 650 flow down toward the area where the electric accessory 640a is arranged. Specifically, the electric accessory 640a has a length of 50 mm, and is composed of a plate-like member on the upper surface of which a ball can flow down. is arranged on the game board 13 so as to be downwardly inclined toward . Then, the game ball flowing down from the second variable winning device 650 flows down to the area a (see FIG. 926) corresponding to the range of 20 mm from the left end of the electric accessory 640a.

The game ball that has reached the area a passes through the electric accessory 640a and flows down toward the first variable winning device 65 when the electric accessory 640a is in the retracted state. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 640a is positioned in the projecting state, the game ball flows down with the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a directed to the right end side. Then, when the electric accessory 640a is changed to the retracted state with the ball reaching the area b (the area corresponding to 20 mm to 40 mm from the left end of the electric accessory 640a), it is provided below the electric accessory 640a. It is configured so that the game balls flow down toward the general winning opening 63. Finally, when the ball reaches area c (the area corresponding to 10 mm from the right end of electric accessory 640 a ), the ball enters second ball entrance 640 .

In addition, in the 32nd control example, the period during which the electric accessory 640a continues to protrude differs depending on the game state (probability state of normal symbols). probability state) is set, the electric accessory 640a operates (performs a normal game), the game ball flowing down on the electric accessory 640a positioned in the projecting state is in the area b (Fig. 926), the electric accessory 640a is changed to the retreat state, and in a state where the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) is set, the game ball flowing down on the electric accessory 640a is in the area c (see FIG. 926), the electric accessory 640a is configured to continue the projecting state for a sufficient period of time.

Specifically, the operation period of the electric accessory 640a (the period in which the electric accessory 640a is continuously in the projecting state) is configured to be 2 seconds during the short working hours state and 0.2 seconds during the normal state. Then, the electric accessory 640a is designed so that the flow period for the ball to flow down the area (range from area a to area c) shown in FIG. 926 is longer than 0.2 seconds and shorter than 2 seconds. (0.8 seconds in the 32nd control example). With this configuration, even if a right-handed game is played in the normal state, winning the normal symbol, and the game ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a in operation. , The operation of the electric accessory 640a is completed before the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a reaches the second ball entrance 640, and the second special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state. can be suppressed.

In addition, during the time saving state, the electric accessory 640a protrudes for a period longer than the period (0.8 seconds) in which the game ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and the ball reaches the second ball entrance 640. In order to continue the state, the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a in the projecting state can be made easier to reach the second ball entrance 640, and the lottery for the second special symbol can be easily executed.

Furthermore, during the time saving state, for example, the game ball that reaches the electric accessory 640a 1.5 seconds after the operation of the electric accessory 640a flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a, and at the timing when it reaches the area b The operation of the electric accessory 640a is completed (two seconds have passed since the electric accessory 640a was activated). As shown in FIG. 926, such game balls enter the general prize winning slot 63 arranged below the electric accessory 640a, and 10 balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when a right-handed game is played in the time saving state, a different ball entrance (second ball entrance) is generated depending on the operation timing of the electric accessory 640a and the arrival timing of the game ball to the electric accessory 640a. 640 or the general winning hole 63) can be configured to guide the game ball, it is possible to allow the player to continuously play the right-handed game during the time-saving state.

In addition, in the present 32nd control example, the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 reservation) is configured to be able to hold (reserve storage) at most one. That is, even if the execution condition for executing a new special symbol lottery is not established, the special figure 2 reservation is acquired by entering the game ball into the second ball entrance 640, When the execution condition for executing the special symbol lottery is established in the state of acquiring the FIG. 2 reservation, the second special symbol lottery can be executed using the special figure 2 reservation. ing.

Therefore, in the state where the time saving state is set, if the execution conditions for executing the special symbol lottery are not satisfied, for example, even if the special symbol variation is being executed, the special figure 2 hold A player can be motivated to play a right-handed game in order to win.

Furthermore, even in the state where the maximum number (one) of the special figure 2 reservation has already been acquired, the general winning prize provided below the second ball entrance 640 by performing the right-handed game during the time saving state Since the game ball can be easily made to enter the mouth 63, the player who wants to win many prize balls during the time-saving state can be made to willingly play the right-handed game.

In addition, in this 32nd control example, the number of prize balls provided below the second ball entrance 640 is greater than the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 (one). In addition to the game aiming to acquire the special figure 2 reservation during the time saving state, It is structured so as to provide a player with a game aiming to acquire many prize balls. By configuring in this way, the player can play a game with a different purpose according to the game situation in the time-saving state, so that the player can be prevented from becoming bored with the game early. .

In the 32nd control example, as described above, during the time saving state, as a game different from the game aiming to acquire the special figure 2 reservation, it is possible to execute the game aiming to acquire many prize balls. However, without being limited to this, for example, based on the entry of a game ball into the general winning hole 63, it may be configured to provide the player with a privilege different from the prize ball, or the general winning Instead of the mouth 63, it is configured to provide a winning mouth capable of acquiring the execution right of the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 reservation) and a winning mouth capable of acquiring the execution right of the normal symbol lottery (ordinary figure reservation). You can

As described above, the configuration is such that the number of prize balls corresponding to entering the general winning hole 63 is 10, and the number of prize balls corresponding to entering the second ball inlet 640 is 1. Therefore, if the execution conditions for the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery) are satisfied, the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 to the general winning mouth 63. It is possible to provide a privilege (that is, special figure 2 lottery and one prize ball) that is more advantageous to the player than the ball entering, and the execution condition of the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery) is established. If not, and if the number of conditions for holding the special figure 2 is obtained, it is more advantageous for the player to enter the game ball into the general winning port 63 than the second ball entrance 640 ( That is, it is configured so that 10 prize balls can be awarded.

As a result, depending on the game situation (whether or not there is a change in special symbols), the player can change the ball entrance that the player wants to enter (the ball entrance where many benefits can be obtained), which saves time. The player can enjoy the right-handed game during the state. In addition, in order to enter the ball into both the second ball entry hole 640 and the general winning hole 63 during one motion of the electric accessory 640a, it is necessary to continuously execute the right-handed game. Therefore, it is possible to increase the operation of the game.

In the thirty-second control example, the operation period of the electric accessory 640a during the time saving state is longer than the period (0.8 seconds) during which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reaches the second ball entrance 640. A sufficiently long period (2 seconds) is set to ensure that the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 when the electric accessory 640a operates. The operation period of the electric accessory 640a during the time saving state is slightly longer than the period (0.8 seconds) in which the game ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reaches the second ball entrance 640 (for example, , 0.9 seconds). By configuring in this way, after the game ball is passed through the through gate 67 in the time saving state, the game ball is stopped from being launched, and after confirming that the electric accessory 640a has been operated, the game ball is started to be launched again. Since it is possible to suppress the action (so-called stop hitting), it is possible to improve the operation of the game by continuing the right hitting game during the time saving state.

A first variable prize winning device 65 is arranged on the lower right side of the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally elongated rectangular special prize winning port (large opening) 65a is provided in the substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses when the result of the special symbol lottery performed due to the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 is a jackpot winning. After that, the first symbol display device 37 lights up and displays the special symbol so as to become a stop symbol for indicating the winning of the big win, and the third symbol corresponding to the winning of the big win is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加, the player is notified of the jackpot winning.

Then, a jackpot game is executed in which the game balls are likely to enter the first variable winning device 65.例文帳に追加In the special game state in which the jackpot game is being executed, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed (during the non-jackpot game) is closed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds, or 10 balls). (until you win a prize).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closure, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 9 times (9 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Specifically, the first variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing door 65b covering the opening of the specific winning opening 65a, and opening/closing the opening/closing door 65b in the front-rear direction (the depth direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 925). It has a specific winning opening solenoid 209a (see FIG. 950) for driving. The specific winning port 65a is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot win or is difficult to win, specifically, a closed state in which the opening/closing door 65b protrudes forward (front side from the viewpoint of FIG. 925). , the opening of the specific prize winning port 65a is covered with the opening/closing door 65b in the closed state. In addition, when the open/close door 65b is positioned in the closed state, a flow path is formed on the upper surface of the open/close door 65b so that the game ball can flow down, and the game ball flows to the first variable winning device 65 in the closed state. When it reaches, it flows down the ball flow path formed on the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65b, flows down to the downstream side of the first variable winning device 65 without winning into the specific winning opening 65a, and the game board 13 A ball enters an out port 66 provided on the lower side of the game area and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

Then, when the jackpot game is executed, the specific winning opening solenoid 209a is driven to operate the opening/closing door 65b to the back side (the back side in the view point of FIG. 925), so that the game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a. An easy open state is temporarily formed, and the open state and the closed state are alternately repeated.

In addition, the special game state (contents of the jackpot game) is not limited to the configuration described above. When a special symbol indicating winning is displayed, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening 65a is opened when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. Alternatively, a game state in which a large opening provided separately is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times may be formed as a special game state. In addition, the number of specific winning holes 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged. It is not limited to the lower left side of the entrance 64, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80.

Specifically, the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing door 650f1 that covers the opening of the V winning opening 650a, and the opening/closing door 650f1 that extends forward and backward (in the depth direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 925). direction) and a V winning opening solenoid 209b (see FIG. 950) for opening and closing drive. The V winning port 650a is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. , the opening of the V prize opening 650a is covered with the opening/closing door 650f1 in the closed state. In addition, when the opening/closing door 650f1 is positioned in the closed state, a flow path is formed on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 650f1 so that the game ball can flow down, and the game ball flows to the second variable winning device 650 in the closed state. When it reaches, it flows down the ball flow path formed on the upper surface of the opening and closing door 650f1, and flows down to the downstream side of the second variable winning device 650 without winning to the V winning opening 650a, and the second variable winning It flows down toward the electric accessory 640a provided downstream of the device 650 in the right area.

Then, when the small winning game is executed, the V winning opening solenoid 209b is driven to operate the open/close door 650f1 to the back side (the back side in the viewpoint of FIG. 925), so that the game ball wins the V winning opening 650a. It temporarily forms an open state in which it is easy to break, and operates so as to alternately repeat the open state and the closed state. The detailed structure of the second variable winning device 650 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 927 to 930. FIG.

Here, the configuration of the V winning device 650 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 927 to 930. FIG. First, as shown in FIG. 925, when the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is in the closed state closing the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a, the upper surface of the opening/closing door 650f1 in the closed state is played. A game ball that reaches the V winning device 650 while the V winning device 650 is closed is directed toward the lower left side (the lower left side in the front view of FIG. 925) above the opening/closing door 650f1. It flows down and flows out toward the through gate 67 . On the other hand, when the V winning device 650 is in the open state (that is, during the small winning game), the game ball enters the V winning device 650 .

In this 32nd control example, as the opening operation of the V winning device 650 during the small winning game, after the closed state (opening period) for 2 seconds, the open state (0.1 seconds), the closed state (0.4 seconds) , open state (0.1 sec), closed state (0.4 sec), open state (0.1 sec), closed state (0.4 sec), open state (0.1 sec), closed state (0 .4 sec), open state (0.1 sec), closed state (1.5 sec), open state (0.1 sec), closed state (1.5 sec), open state (0.2 sec), An open period (round game period) of closed state (4.8 seconds), open state (0.8 seconds), and closed state (9 seconds) is executed.

In this way, the period during which one open state (open period) continues is set as short as 0.1 seconds at the shortest, but at the timing when the V winning device 650 opens, it flows down on the opening and closing door 650f1. This period is sufficient for the game ball to enter the V winning device 650 . A game ball that has won a prize in the V winning device 650 is arranged to flow down toward the detection port 650a1 (see FIG. 929(a)) while flowing down on the first or second regulating member. . With this configuration, even if the ball flowing down on the opening/closing door 650f1 enters the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a of the V winning device 650 from any position on the opening/closing door 650f1, the ball can be smoothly released. can flow down.

In the 32nd control example, the shortest period of the period in which the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is continuously opened is set to 0.1 seconds. Any other period may be set as long as the game ball flowing down can enter the V winning device 650 . In addition, in the 32nd control example, the number of times the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is opened in one small winning game is eight times, but other times may be set.

Details will be described later, but in this 32nd control example, the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is opened once in the small winning game. A longer closing period is set after the fifth opening operation than up to the fifth opening operation. This is to make it easier for the V winning device 650 to win the game ball during the period when the small winning game is being played. Specifically, when it is determined that the specific area (V switch) 650e3 does not detect the ball at the time when the fifth opening operation is completed during the small hit game, the right-handed game is emphasized to the player. The third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a game guide display prompting the player to play the game.

Then, even when the right-handed game is started by grasping the game guide display displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the interval between opening is set so that the game ball can enter the V winning device 650 Set a long period.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for a player who does not play an appropriate game during a small winning game (a player who does not play a right-handed game) to perform an appropriate game. In this way, during the specific game (small winning game) in which the opening action is executed multiple times, when it is determined that the interval period between opening is set longer than the other and it is determined that the appropriate game is not performed By making it possible to display a game guidance display for prompting proper game contents, a player who is playing a wrong game can be made to play the game without anxiety.

In addition, since the closing period is set to be short (0.4 seconds) until the fifth opening operation executed during the small winning game, the right hitting game is executed immediately after the small winning game is executed. until the fifth opening operation is completed for the player who is in the game, a predetermined number (10) of game balls are awarded to the V prize winning device 650, thereby establishing the end condition of the small winning game. , the small winning game can be easily ended before the long closing period is set. Therefore, compared with the case where a long closing period is set after the end of the first opening operation executed during the small winning game, the small winning game period becomes unnecessarily long and the game is executed properly. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's willingness to play.

Next, the structure of the V winning device 650 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 927 is an exploded perspective view of this V winning device 650. FIG. As shown in FIG. 927, the V winning device 650 is an opening forming member 650b arranged to protrude from the front side of the game board 13, and is combined with the rear side of the opening forming member 650b to form the V winning device 650. A base member 650c for screwing to the game board 13, and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 650c for lighting the front side of the pachinko machine 10 from the back side of the base member 650c. The arranged LED board 650d, the back cover body 650e sandwiching the LED board 650d with the base member 650c, and the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a formed in the opening forming member 650b. An opening/closing unit 650f having an opening/closing door 650f1, a flow path cover body 650g combined with the back side of the back cover body 650e to form a flow path, and a flow path formed by the back cover body 650e and the flow path cover body 650g. A switching member 650h that protrudes into the path and switches the flow path of the game ball, a link member 650i that is engaged with the switching member 650h, a rear surface cover body 650j that is arranged on the rear side of the flow path cover body 650g, and its rear surface. A channel solenoid 650k fixed to the back side of the cover body 650j to operate the link member 650i, and a fixing cover body 650m for covering the channel solenoid 650k from the back side and fixing it to the back cover body 650j with screws. It consists of

928 is a sectional view of the V winning device 650. FIG. FIG. 928(c) is a top view of the V winning device 650, and FIG. 928(b) is a cross-sectional view of the V winning device 650 along the line Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 928(b), the V winning device 650 is formed with a specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a, which is an opening into which a game ball can enter. The specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a has a substantially rectangular opening above the pachinko machine 10, and the game balls passing through the opening are guided leftward in FIG. 928(b). A bottom surface that is inclined downward to the left is formed. A detection port 650a1 composed of a magnetic sensor (ball detection switch) 650c1 for detecting the winning of a game ball is arranged at the left end of the bottom surface. A game ball that has passed through the detection port 650a1 is guided to a sorting channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 650e shown in FIG. 929(a).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 928(b), the opening of the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is opened so that the game ball can be entered by an opening/closing door 650f1 configured with a shutter mechanism that can be retracted from the game board 13 side. It can be changed between a state and a closed state in which it is impossible to enter the ball (difficult to enter the ball). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered with the opening/closing door 650f1, and the game ball can roll on the upper portion of the opening/closing door. In the open state, the opening/closing door 650f1 is retracted inside the base member 650c (inside the game board 13) to be retracted from the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a.

By constructing in this way, the right-handed game can be played continuously during the time-saving game, during the big win game, and during the small win game, thereby reducing the trouble of changing the game method according to the game state. be able to. Therefore, the game can be played more easily.

In addition, in the open state of the opening/closing door 650f1, the plane perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball flows down can be configured as the opening of the V winning device 650, so that the game ball can efficiently enter the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. can be made Therefore, the time required for the small winning game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

FIG. 928(a) is a cross-sectional view along La-La shown in FIG. 928(b). As shown in FIG. 928(a), the magnetic sensor 650c1 having the detection port 650a1 is fixed to the base member 650c so that the detection port 650a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 650e.

Next, with reference to FIG. 929, a description will be given of a configuration for distributing game balls guided to distribution channels of the back cover body 650e to a normal discharge channel 650e1 and a special discharge channel 650e2, which will be described later.

FIG. 929(a) is a back view of the back cover body 650e showing a state in which the switching member 650h is operated so that game balls are distributed to the special discharge channel 650e2. As shown in FIG. 929(a), the switching member 650h has a locking hole 650h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 650i is inserted and a guiding piece 650h2 for guiding the game ball. is rotatably supported from the rear side. Here, the channel cover 650g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 650h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 650h can be rotated into the distribution channel from the back side of the channel cover 650g. It is configured so that it can be arranged as much as possible.

As shown in FIG. 929(a), the game ball guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 650a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guiding piece 650h2 arranged diagonally to the left and guided to the special discharge channel 650e2. be. A game ball that has passed through the special discharge channel 650e2 is detected by a V switch 650e3 that is configured by a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a game ball provided in the special discharge channel 650e2, and is discharged out of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. be done.

Here, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 32nd control example, the game ball passes through the V switch (specific area) 650e3 described above during the small winning game, so that the big winning game is started after the small winning game. Start is set. That is, the V switch (specific area) 650e3 is configured as a trigger for starting a big winning game. In addition, the switching member 650h is a flow path (special discharge flow path 650e2) in which the game ball that has won the V winning device 650 during the small winning game can pass through the V switch 650e3, or cannot pass through the V switch 650e3 (difficult). (ordinary discharge flow path 650e1), and when the flow path solenoid 650k is turned on, the winning ball in the V winning device 650 flows down the special discharge flow path 650e2. 929(b)).

In the pachinko machine 10 used in the 32nd control example, the channel solenoid 650k is set to be OFF while the game is played normally, and the game ball that has won the V winning device 650 flows down the normal discharge channel 650e1. It is configured to Then, when a small win is won, the passage solenoid 650k is set to ON in accordance with the contents defined in the open scenario table 202g, which will be described later with reference to FIG. The discharge channel 650e2 is configured to be able to flow down. In this way, when the channel solenoid 650k is set to be off, the state is maintained for a long period of time in the pachinko machine 10, that is, the game ball that has won the V winning device 650 flows down the normal discharge channel 650e1. The power consumption of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by providing a state in which the switching member 650h is maintained (see FIG. 929(a)).

In this way, the game state set after the small winning game is changed by the flow-down route of the game ball winning the V winning device 650 during the small winning game, so that the interest of the player is improved even during the small winning game. be able to. The time required to pass from the opening (specific winning opening) of the V winning device 650 to the entrance of the special discharge channel 650e2 (opening surface closed by the guide piece 650h2 of the switching member 650h) is 1 second at the shortest. consists of By configuring in this way, even if the switching member 650h switches the flow-down route of the ball after detecting that the opening/closing door 650f1 has been opened in spite of not winning a small prize, the ball will surely flow. It is possible to prevent the water from flowing down the special discharge channel 650e2.

In addition, a discharge confirmation switch 650e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting passage of a game ball is provided at the downstream end of the normal discharge channel 650e1. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that entered the V winning device 650 have been discharged from the total number of detections of the discharge confirmation switch 650e4 and the V switch 650e3. In addition, the end timing of the small winning game (condition for ending the small winning game (when the V winning device 650 wins a predetermined number (10 pieces), or when the opening scenario of the V winning device 650 ends) is established When all the game balls that have entered the V winning device 650 are not discharged at the timing after the small winning ending period has passed, it is determined that there is an abnormality inside the V winning device 650, and it is sent to the outside. It is preferable to configure so as to notify the abnormality or stop the game so that the jackpot game or the normal game is not started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from progressing in a state in which a part of the pachinko machine 10 has an abnormality, thereby preventing a secondary abnormality from occurring.

In this way, the game ball that has entered the V winning port 650a of the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 is detected by the magnetic sensor 650c1. ) can be paid out. In addition, it is possible to sort whether or not the game ball passes through the V switch 650e4 by using the game ball after it is detected, so that it can be sorted whether or not the big win game is executed after the small win game is finished. can. Therefore, there is no need to provide a dedicated prize winning port (specific area) for awarding a jackpot game separately from the V winning device 650, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

In addition, in this 32nd control example, when a small hit is won in a special symbol lottery, one small hit type (small hits A to C) can be set from among a plurality of types of small hit types, and any small hit can be set. Even when a small winning game in which the winning type is set is executed, the flow path solenoid 650k is set to ON so that the game ball can enter the specific area during the small winning game. Although it is configured, it is not limited to this, and the probability that the game ball that has won the V winning device 650 during the small winning game passes through the specific area (V switch 650e3) can be changed according to the set small winning type. It may be configured to allow

For example, according to the small hit type (small hit A to C) set when the small hit is won in the special symbol lottery, a small hit game with different periods and timings for setting the flow path solenoid 650k to ON is executed. The degree of expectation (V prize expectation) for the ball to pass through the V switch 650e3 during the small winning game is varied according to the contents of the small winning game executed when winning the small winning. good to do By constructing in this way, the player can play the game while expecting not only to win a small prize, but also to execute a small prize game with a high V winning expectation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 930, the structure of the ball flow lower surface of the opening/closing door 650f1 that opens and closes the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 will be described. FIG. 930(a) is a schematic plan view showing a state in which the opening/closing door 650f1 closes the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650. FIG. In the opening/closing door 650f1 of the thirty-second control example, as shown in FIG. It is configured such that the left upper surface 650y2 flows down from the right upper surface 650y1 of the prize winning device 650 through the upper surface of the opening/closing door 650f1 and flows toward the variable prize winning device 65. FIG.

A first delay member 650fa, a second delay member 650fb, and a third delay member 650fc are provided on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 650f1 as delay members for delaying the falling of game balls. It is configured so that the period of time for flowing down the upper surface is 0.6 seconds. This flowing period (0.6 seconds) is longer than the interval (closing period (0.4 seconds)) when the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a of the V winning device 650 is opened multiple times by the small winning game. configured to be long. With this configuration, the game ball flowing down on the opening/closing door 650f1 is configured to surely win when the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is opened by the small winning game. .

In the state shown in FIG. 930(a), when the small winning game is executed and the door 650f1 is changed to the open state, the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. 930(b). FIG. 930(b) is a schematic plan view showing a state in which the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 is open. As shown in FIG. 930(b), when the opening/closing door 650f1 is in an open state, it moves so as to retreat inside the game board 13, and the ball flowing down the right upper surface 650y1 enters the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. The specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is opened so that winning is possible. In addition, the ball flowing down on the opening/closing door 650f1 also enters the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a when the opening/closing door 650f1 is positioned at the retracted position.

In addition, the V winning device 650 is equipped with a third mechanism for smoothing the flow of the ball after winning regardless of the position from which the ball flowing down on the opening and closing door 650f1 enters the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. A 1 regulating member 651 and a 2nd regulating member 652 are provided. After aligning in a line through, it is configured to flow down toward the detection port 650a1, which is a passage width for one game ball. By providing the first regulating member 651 and the second regulating member 652 in this way, even if the detection opening 650a1 is provided below the first regulation member, a game ball that has won a prize vigorously from the open/close door 650f1 is directly detected through the detection opening. Since collision with 650a1 can be prevented, failure of ball detection switch 650c1 provided in detection port 650a1 can be suppressed. In addition, a flow path for aligning the game balls until the game balls pass through the detection port 650a1 having a passage width of one game ball (a flow path flowing down on the first regulation member 651 and the second regulation member 652 ) can be ensured, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the balls are clogged in the V winning device 650 and the game is hindered.

As described above, in this 32nd control example, the privilege game (small winning game) executed when the discrimination result of the discrimination means (the result of the lottery of the special symbols) is the predetermined discrimination result (small winning) The falling period (0.6 seconds) required for the ball to flow down on the variable member (opening/closing door 650f1) is longer than the interval period (0.4 seconds) between opening of the variable member (opening/closing door 650f1) that operates in Since it is configured to be longer, the game ball flowing down on the variable member during the opening interval (timing when the open/close door 650f1 is closed) during the small winning game is surely released at the next opening timing. can win a prize.

In addition, only the game balls flowing down on the variable member are allowed to enter the V winning device 650 during the small winning game so that a predetermined number (10) can be won during the small winning game. Since the number of opening operations (8 times) in the small winning game is set, even if one opening period (0.1 second) is set short, a sufficient number of prizes can be secured. In addition, by setting one open period to be long, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which an excessive number of balls are awarded to the V winning device 650 during the small winning game.

Returning to FIG. 924, the description continues. An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13. 35 (see FIG. 925).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 66 . Game balls that flow down the game area and do not enter any of the winning openings (entrance ball openings) 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a pass through the out opening 66 in the drawing. It is guided to the ball ejection path that does not. The out port 66 is arranged below the first ball entrance port 64 .

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills. These various members function as adjusting means for varying the flowing direction and the flowing speed of the game ball flowing down the game area.

As shown in FIG. 932, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 which is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 950). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 950) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 933 . The display surface of the third design display device 81 is configured to display the third design corresponding to the special design (the first special design or the second special design). It is configured to display a display mode including 10 types of main symbols imitating numbers "0" to "9". In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-second control example, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 (to be described later) is a jackpot, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbols are arranged (for example, "777"). It is configured such that a jackpot is generated after the end of the variable display.

This third pattern is variably displayed in the same manner as the fluctuating special pattern during the special pattern fluctuation period for showing the result of the special pattern lottery, and the special pattern is stopped and displayed in a display mode showing the result of the special pattern lottery. When it is displayed, it is configured to be stop-displayed in a display mode corresponding to the stop-displayed special symbol. In other words, the player predicts the result of the special symbol lottery while watching the variation display (variation effect) of the third symbol displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, and then the third symbol that is stopped and displayed. By visually recognizing, it is configured to grasp the result of the special symbol lottery.

Here, the content of the variable display of the third symbol executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 will be described. In the thirty-second control example, a plurality of third symbols can be variably displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, and the display mode (combination) of the plurality of third symbols stopped and displayed. By, it is configured to notify the result of the special symbol lottery. Specifically, the main display area Dm displays three pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right, respectively. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled from top to bottom for variable display.

Also, in the main display area Dm, a third symbol is stop-displayed on the activated line L1. When the third symbols are stopped on the activated line in a combination of big winning symbols (in this embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols), a big winning moving image is displayed as a big winning.

In addition, the mode of the variable display of the symbols in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the one described above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbols can be changed as appropriate. Also, the patterns displayed in a variable manner on the third pattern display device 81 are not limited to the above.

A small display area Dm4 is formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front. This small display area Dm4 is configured to allow the variable display of the third pattern to be displayed in a simple manner. Here, when the variable display is executed in the small display area Dm4, for example, a display effect such as an effect in which a predetermined character takes an action or an effect to prompt the user to press the frame button 22 is executed in the main display region Dm. is the case. During execution of the display effect, by displaying the effect in a larger main display area Dm, it is possible to provide a more comprehensible effect. Further, by simply displaying the variable display of the third pattern in the small display area Dm4 during execution of the display effect, it is easy for the player to know that the variable display of the third pattern is continuing. can be understood.

As shown in FIG. 933(a), a sub-display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm. As shown in FIG. 933(b), this sub-display area Ds displays a reserved symbol consisting of a black circle. As described above, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball enters the predetermined number (first Entry 64 is reserved 4 times, and second entry 640 is reserved 1 time. The number of reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds is the same as the number of reserved ball entries. In this control example, the maximum value of the number of reserved balls is set to 4 for the first special symbol and 1 for the second special symbol. Since the special figure 1 reserved design) is configured to be displayable, a maximum of 4 reserved designs (special figure 1 reserved design) are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. In addition, FIG. 933(b) shows an example of displaying a reserved design (special figure 1 reserved design) in the sub display area Ds, but the display position of the reserved design is not limited to this, and the main display area Ds It may be configured to display reserved symbols in a partial area.

In addition, it is not necessary to display all the reserved patterns that are reserved and stored. is to display only the reserved design of the second special design (special design 2 reserved design), and when the low probability state (normal state) of the normal design is set, the reserved design of the first special design (special design 1 reserved pattern) may be displayed, or the degree of recognition of the reserved pattern corresponding to each special pattern type may be changed according to the game state, for example, the high probability state of the normal pattern. When (time saving state) is set, the special figure 2 reserved pattern is displayed so that it is easier for the player to visually recognize it than the special figure 1 reserved pattern, and the low probability state (normal state) of the normal pattern is set. If it is, the special figure 1 reserved pattern may be displayed so as to be easier for the player to visually recognize than the special figure 2 reserved pattern. By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player of the special symbol type mainly executed according to the set game state in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the thirty-second control example, the number of reserved symbols is varied in correspondence with the number of reserved balls, but the method of displaying the number of reserved balls is not limited to this. For example, the number of held balls may be displayed numerically. In addition, the display mode of the reserved design is changed according to the special design type so that the player can identify whether the displayed reserved design is the special design 1 reserved design or the special design 2 reserved design. Alternatively, in order to make it difficult for the player to understand how many reserved symbols correspond to which special symbol type, each reservation is made in the same display mode (idea including completely the same display mode) It may be configured to display a pattern.

<Regarding the effect content in the 32nd control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 934 to 948, various effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-second control example will be described.

The pachinko machine 10 in the 32nd control example is configured to set the normal state or the time-saving state as the game state after the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot winning in the first special symbol lottery. there is Then, the game state set after the end of the big win game is changed by the big win game performance executed during the big win game executed when the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state wins the big win (first win). It is configured to notify the player. By constructing in this way, during the jackpot game which is a monotonous game of only winning prize balls, it is possible to execute a performance that the player is strongly interested in, and the player gets tired of the game early. can be suppressed.

In this 32nd control example, as a jackpot game effect for notifying the game state set after the jackpot game ends, it is configured to be able to execute a subjugation effect in which a predetermined number of enemies are subjugated by a ally character by attacking multiple times. are doing. In this subjugation effect, when the number of enemies becomes 0 as a result of the effect, it is informed that a time-saving state advantageous to the player is set after the jackpot game being executed is completed, and the number of enemies is increased as a result of the effect. When the number of bodies is other than 0 (for example, 12 bodies), it is notified that a normal state disadvantageous to the player will be set after the jackpot game being executed is finished.

Here, conventionally, an effect is executed in which the displayed predetermined value is subtracted multiple times by operating an operation means that the player can operate. There is one that executes an operation subtraction effect that notifies that an advantageous privilege is given to.

In this conventional operation subtraction effect, a predetermined value to be displayed first and a value to be finally displayed are determined in advance, and each effect for subtracting the value is repeated multiple times within the determined range. Generally, it is configured to be executed, and when the player operates the operation means in a short period of time, the value to be finally displayed is displayed immediately after the operation subtraction effect is started. Since the period during which the value is not subtracted based on the operation of the operation means continues for a long time, the player's desire to operate the operation device is lowered.

In the subjugation effect executed in this 32nd control example, the number of executions of the attack effect that reduces the number of enemies based on the operation of the effect button 22a, and the individual execution opportunities of the attack effect can be subtracted (subjugated). The number of subjugated enemies (the number of remaining enemies) can be determined in advance. While each attack effect is executed, the number of remaining enemies determined in advance can be displayed as the effect result of the attack effect by operating the operation means by the player, and the player can perform the attack effect in each attack effect. does not operate the operation means, or if the number of remaining enemies displayed is greater than the predetermined number of remaining enemies despite operating the operation means, the number of enemies actually displayed It is possible to execute an additional attack production that reduces the number of remaining enemies by an additional attack.

Further, when the additional attack effect is executed, the first attack effect that reduces the number of enemies to a predetermined number of remaining enemies, the number of remaining enemies that is actually displayed, and the number of remaining enemies that are determined in advance. and a second attack effect in which the number of enemies is reduced to a specific number of remaining enemies within the range of the number of enemies. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the effect result of the additional attack effect from always becoming the predetermined number of remaining enemies.

Furthermore, in the 32nd control example, in addition to the case where all the enemies have been subjugated (when the number of remaining enemies is 0), the number of remaining enemies is a specific number (for example, "111" etc.) during the subjugation production. By being displayed in the square eyes), it is possible to notify that the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game before the subjugation effect ends. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player who wants to quickly perceive the game state set after the end of the jackpot game to pay attention to the production contents of the subjugation production (the production result of each attack production). You can increase the effect.

In addition, in this 32nd control example, the setting of the time saving state after the end of the big win game is set as the specific number of the number of remaining enemies that can be notified before the end of the subjugation effect, and the third control example for indicating the big win win. In addition to a common specific number regardless of the type of pattern (type of jackpot pattern), a unique specific number corresponding to a third pattern type (type of jackpot pattern) for indicating jackpot winning can be set. .

By configuring the unique specific number to be settable in this way, the number of remaining enemies expected to be displayed during the subjugation performance can be varied according to the type of the third pattern displayed when the jackpot is won. It is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the subjugation performance.

Furthermore, in the thirty-second control example, a specific number of remaining enemies can be determined as the effect result of the above-described second attack effect. In other words, instead of reducing the displayed number of remaining enemies to the predetermined number of remaining enemies in one attack effect, the predetermined number of remaining enemies is displayed in one attack effect. When the number of remaining enemies is not reduced, a specific number is included in the range between the displayed number of remaining enemies and the predetermined number of remaining enemies, and the specific number of remaining enemies When the display condition for displaying the number is satisfied, the number of remaining enemies of a specific number is displayed as the effect result of the second attack effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of selecting whether or not to operate the operating means (the effect button 22a) in each attack effect.

In addition, grasp the number of remaining enemies displayed at the start of the attack production, and predict the number of remaining enemies (predetermined number of remaining enemies) that can be reduced in this attack production. Then, it is predicted whether a specific number is included within the range of the number of enemies that can be reduced in this attack production, and based on the prediction result, operation means (production button 22a) in each attack production Since it is possible to select whether to operate or not, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect.

In addition, by making it possible to set a unique specific number in addition to a common specific number as the number of remaining enemies that will be a specific number, a specific number will be included within the range of the number of enemies that can be reduced in this attack production. Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict whether or not the attack is performed, it is possible to suppress monotonous selection results as to whether or not to operate the operation means (the effect button 22a) in each attack effect. .

In addition, in the 32nd control example, as a unique specific number corresponding to the third symbol type (type of jackpot symbol) for indicating jackpot winning, a number attached to the third symbol for indicating jackpot winning (for example, When the third symbol of "444" is stop-displayed, a part of the number of remaining enemies including at least "4") can be set. Then, the greater the number of numbers attached to the third symbol for indicating the winning of the jackpot, the easier it is to be set as the unique specific number. Specifically, in the subjugation effect during the jackpot game executed based on the stop display of the third symbol of "444", "444" is most likely to be set as the unique specific number, followed by the last two digits. is "44", the number of remaining enemies with two numbers of "4", and the number of remaining enemies with the last digit of "4". With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting which number of remaining enemies is set as the unique specific number.

In addition, when any one of a plurality of types of remaining enemy numbers including the number attached to the third pattern for indicating the winning of the jackpot is displayed, the displayed remaining enemy number is expected to be a unique specific number. Therefore, the subjugation effect can be executed without getting tired of the player.

In addition, in the thirty-second control example, the unique specific number can be determined by lottery. A specific number may be determined in advance. Also, only one specific number may be determined, or three or more may be determined.

In addition, while the subjugation effect is being executed, a unique specific number suggesting effect including information for making it easy for the player to predict the unique specific number set this time may be executed. By constructing in this manner, every time the number of remaining enemies including the number attached to the third pattern for indicating the winning of the jackpot is displayed, the player is unnecessarily expected to be the unique specific number. can be suppressed.

First, with reference to FIGS. 934 to 937, the content of the effect executed during the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 934(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when a subjugation effect is executed as an effect for informing the player of the game state set after the end of the jackpot game. Here, the subjugation effect is a part of the big win game effect that is executed during the big win game, and is a effect in which the allied character subjugates a predetermined number of enemies. In this case, after the jackpot game being executed is finished, it is notified that a time-saving state advantageous to the player is set, and when the number of enemies becomes other than 0 (for example, 12) as a result of the performance. , to notify that a normal state disadvantageous to the player will be set after the jackpot game being executed is finished.

Specifically, in the first round game (1st round) of the jackpot game, the number of enemies in this subjugation production is displayed, and the subsequent round games (2nd round to Every sixth round), an attack presentation for defeating the enemy is executed, and the number of enemies displayed after the last attack presentation is completed is displayed as the presentation result of this subjugation presentation.

FIG. 934(a) is a display screen showing the first round of the jackpot game, and on the upper right of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, there is a third symbol for showing the result of the first special symbol lottery. In the display area Dm1 where the symbols are displayed, "444" is stopped and displayed as the stopped display mode of the third symbol for indicating the winning of the jackpot. In addition, in FIG. 934(a), in order to show the display screen during the jackpot game, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the display area Dm1 in a manner recognizable by the player. The third symbol may be stopped and displayed in such a manner that it is difficult for the player to identify it, or the third symbol may not be stopped and displayed during the jackpot game. Furthermore, instead of the identification information (third pattern) for indicating the result of the special pattern lottery, a special pattern imitating "V" is displayed in the main display area as identification information (special pattern) for indicating that the jackpot has been won. Dm1 may be configured to stop display.

In addition, a display area Dm4 is formed on the upper left side of the main display area Dm to display a guidance display mode for guiding the game method to the player, and guides the game method to be executed by the player during the jackpot game. As a display mode for playing, characters of "Right-handed" for guiding the right-handed game are displayed. Further, below the display area Dm4, "Round 1" indicating the number of round games being executed is displayed as a jackpot game status display mode for informing the player of the progress of the jackpot game.

In the lower right side of the main display area Dm, a display area is displayed in which a point display mode is displayed for indicating information corresponding to the total number of winning balls won during a period in which the game state is favorable to the player. Dm6 is formed. FIG. 934(a) shows the display screen of the first round of the jackpot game that is executed based on the winning of the jackpot (first hit) in the normal state. "33P" is displayed as information corresponding to the number of prize balls already obtained. That is, in the thirty-second control example, when the jackpot game is executed, the first variable winning device 65 is opened and closed, and when the game ball enters the specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65, 11 934(a) shows that 3 game balls enter the specific winning hole 65a in the round game of the first round, and a total of 33 prizes are awarded. It shows the display screen when the ball is paid out.

A display area HR1 for displaying the total number of enemies to be subjugated in the current subjugation effect is formed in the center of the main display area Dm, and the characters "500 remaining" are displayed. In other words, it is notified that the present subjugation presentation is a presentation mode for subjugating 500 enemies.

Here, in this 32nd control example, a different value can be determined as the total number of enemies in the subjugation effect. is determined, and when the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game, it is easier to determine “1000 bodies” than when the time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game. ``500 bodies'' is more likely to be determined when the time-saving state is set after the end of the big win game than when the normal state is set after the end of the big win game. Also, the total number of enemies "777 bodies" is configured to be determined only when the time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game.

By configuring in this way, the performance result of the subjugation performance is displayed by grasping the total number of enemies displayed in the display area HR1 immediately after the subjugation performance is started (first round of the jackpot game). A player can predict the game state to be set after the end of the jackpot game before the start of the game, and the performance effect can be enhanced. Furthermore, when the total number of enemies ``777 bodies'' is displayed, it is possible for the player to grasp that the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game at the start of the subjugation presentation. Therefore, during the production period in which the subjugation production is executed, it is possible to notify that the time saving state is set at various timings. During the production period in which the subjugation production is executed, the production can be continuously watched.

In addition, a display area Dm7 is formed in the upper right side of the main display area, in which a plurality of button icons Pu1 to Pu5 imitating the effect button 22a are displayed. In this display area Dm7, there are information suggesting the number of times an attack presentation for reducing the total number of enemies in this subjugation presentation is executed and the number of enemies to be reduced in one attack presentation (the number of subjugations). A plurality of button icons Pu1 to Pu5 are displayed in a display mode determined based on .

In the example shown in FIG. 934(a), the first button icon Pu1, the second button icon Pu2, the third button icon Pu3, the fourth button icon Pu4, and the fifth button icon Pu5 are displayed in order from the left. In the subjugation effect, the player is informed that the attack effect using the effect button 22a will be executed five times. Also, the first button icon Pu1, the third button icon Pu3, the fourth button icon Pu4, and the fifth button icon Pu5 are displayed in a normal display mode suggesting that a normal attack effect is executed, and the second button icon Pu2 is displayed in a strong display mode (in the drawing, it is displayed in a display mode that is thicker than usual) suggesting that a strong attack effect will be executed.

By configuring in this way, the number of attack productions to be executed in the current subjugation production and the production contents of each attack production are executed from the execution of the subjugation production to the execution of the first attack production. Since it is possible to make the player easily predict , it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand presentation.

Further, in the thirty-second control example, the first attack effect corresponds to the first button icon Pu1, and the second attack effect corresponds to the second button icon Pu2. The attack effect corresponding to the third button icon Pu3 in the attack effect, the attack effect corresponding to the fourth button icon Pu4 in the fourth attack effect, and the fifth button icon Pu5 in the fifth attack effect. It is configured so that an attack production is executed. In other words, the plurality of button icons displayed in the display area Dm7 are configured to be able to suggest not only the number of times of attack effects executed in the subjugation effects, but also the effect mode of each attack effect. By configuring in this way, the player can predict in advance how many times the attack effect in the subjugation effect will result in a effect that greatly reduces the number of remaining enemies. The number of enemies) and the display mode of the remaining button icons displayed in the display area Dm7 can be expected to change the remaining number of enemies to a unique specific number or a common specific number.

In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, characters of "If all enemies are defeated, a rush will start!" By configuring in this way, when the subjugation effect is executed, the player can easily grasp that some kind of privilege will be granted by changing the displayed value of the remaining 500 bodies to 0, so that the subjugation effect You can enjoy the process of decreasing the number of remaining enemies during the execution of.

When the first attack effect in the subjugation effect is executed, the display screen shown in FIG. 934(b) is displayed. FIG. 934(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the first attack effect in the subjugation effect. In this 32nd control example, as described above, the attack effect in the subjugation effect is executed from the 2nd round to the 6th round of the jackpot game, and the first attack effect is executed in the 2nd round. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 934(b), "Round 2" indicating that the second round is being played is displayed in the display area Dm5.

Then, the display area HR1, which was formed in the center of the main display area Dm at the start of the subjugation effect, is reduced and formed above the center of the display area Dm. On the other hand, the first button icon Pu1, the display mode indicating the pressing direction (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure), and the operation of the effect button 22a in the first attack effect are effective as the display mode for prompting the pressing of the effect button 22a. A time gauge ga1 is displayed as a display mode indicating the period (SW effective period) determined by .

In the thirty-second control example, 3 seconds is set as the SW valid period corresponding to one attack effect, and the display mode of the time gauge ga1 is the remaining period display ga1a for indicating the remaining period. and an elapsed period display ga1b for indicating the elapsed period. Every time a period elapses after the SW valid period is set, the ratio occupied by the elapsed period display ga1b increases, and the remaining period display ga1a becomes The display mode of the time gauge ga1 is configured to be variable so as to decrease the occupied ratio. Note that the example shown in FIG. 934(b) shows the point in time when 1 second has passed since the SW effective period was set, and the elapsed A state is displayed in which the period display ga1b indicates a range of 1 second and the remaining period display ga1a indicates a range of 2 seconds.

By configuring in this way, the player can visually grasp the remaining period until the SW effective period elapses, so that the player will not forget to operate the production button 22a during the attack production. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, a character 801a imitating a rabbit is displayed as a display mode for suggesting the contents of the effect to be executed in the current attack effect. In the thirty-second control example, the player selects the display mode for showing the friendly characters used in the effect of reducing the number of remaining enemies executed based on the pressing of the effect button 22a during the attack effect. is configured to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device before pressing (after the SW effective period is set).

In the attack presentation, the range of the number of remaining enemies that can be reduced is made different according to the type of the friendly character and the type of attack to be executed. Specifically, as the types of friendly characters, a rabbit-like character 801a (see FIG. 934(b)) and a hero-like character 801b (see FIG. 935(a)) having higher attack power than the character 801a. and can be set so that each character can execute a normal attack and a strong attack that tends to reduce the number of enemies more than the normal attack. Therefore, the normal attack by the character 801a is the combination of attack effects that makes it difficult to reduce the number of remaining enemies, and the strong attack by the character 801b is the combination that makes it the easiest to reduce the number of remaining enemies.

In this way, the range of the number of remaining enemies that can be reduced in one attack effect can be notified to the player in advance by at least a part of the plurality of constituent elements forming the effect mode of the attack effect. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier for the player to predict the effect result of the attack effect to be executed this time.

In addition, in the thirty-second control example, two types of allied characters are used in the attack effect, but the number of types of allied characters may be one, or three or more. Also, the types of attacks that can be executed by the ally character may be set to three or more types, or the type of attack executed may be varied according to the type of the ally character. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player more interested in which type is selected as the type of the ally character used in the attack production.

The first button icon Pu1 displayed during the attack effect is configured to be displayed in the same display mode as the first button icon Pu1 displayed in the display area Dm7 at the start of the subjugation effect. Specifically, when the attack effect is started, a button icon movement effect is executed in which the first button icon Pu1 displayed in the display area Dm7 is enlarged and moved to the center of the main display area Dm. be done. With this configuration, it is possible to create an effect in which the attack effect is executed by actually using each button icon displayed in the display area Dm7 at the start of the subjugation effect. It is possible to make the player interested in the display mode displayed in .

Since the first button icon Pu1 was used for the attack effect, only the unused second button icon Pu2 to fifth button icon Pu5 are displayed in the display area Dm7, and the first button icon Pu1 was displayed in the past. A display mode (indicated by "-" in the figure) is displayed in the area that was used to indicate that it was used for the attack effect.

With this configuration, by checking each button icon displayed in the display area Dm7, the number of attack effects already executed during the subjugation effect and the remaining number of attack effects can be easily determined. can grasp.

When the player presses the effect button 22a in the state shown in FIG. 934(b), a effect is executed in which the character 801a attacks the enemy, and the number of remaining enemies after the attack is displayed. Next, with reference to FIG. 935(a), the contents of the effect during the interval period after the round game of the second round in which the first attack effect is executed will be described. FIG. 935(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the interval after the end of the second round. In the interval period set between the round games of the 2nd round to the 6th round, the display mode showing the production result (number of remaining enemies) of the attack production executed in the previous round game, and in the next round game A display mode indicating the effect content of the attack effect to be executed is displayed.

In the thirty-second control example, the interval period is set to 1.5 seconds, and the effect button 22a is pressed during the attack effect executed in the previous round game (during the SW valid period). If not, the effect result (the number of remaining enemies) of the attack effect executed in the previous round game is displayed using the interval period. On the other hand, when the effect button 22a is pressed during the attack effect executed in the previous round game (while the SW is valid), the effect in which the ally character attacks is executed immediately after pressing the effect button 22a. After that, the production result (number of remaining enemies) of this attack production is displayed and it shifts to the interval period, and the production result (number of remaining enemies) of the attack production is displayed and executed in the next round game A display mode indicating the content of the attack effect is displayed.

More specifically, in this 32nd control example, the first end condition established when 10 game balls win the first variable prize winning device 65 as the end condition of the round game executed during the jackpot game. and a second end condition that is satisfied when 30 seconds have passed without the first end condition being satisfied since the round game was started. Here, as described above with reference to FIG. 925, the pachinko machine 10 in the present thirty-second control example executes the right-handed game during the jackpot game, and most of the game balls shot by the right-handed game are the first variable The game board 13 is configured to reach the winning device 65 .

Since the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to shoot 100 game balls in one minute (60 seconds), when the game balls are continuously shot during the jackpot game, a round game starts. After about 6 seconds, the first end condition is satisfied and the round game ends. Then, as the round game effect executed during the round game, an attack effect in which the SW effective time of 3 seconds is set is executed after 3 seconds from the start of the round game.

In other words, the length of the SW effective time (3 seconds) in the attack effect executed during the round game is configured to be shorter than the length of the round game period (about 6 seconds) that continues in the normal game. are doing. By configuring in this way, even if the game ball efficiently wins the first variable winning device 65 during the round game, the round game ends while the SW valid time is set. Since it is possible to suppress the closing of the effect button 22a, the player who tries to operate the effect button 22a within the SW effective time will not operate the effect button 22a because the round game ends before the effect button 22a is operated. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the desire to operate.

In addition, in the 32nd control example, the SW effective time set during the round game is defined in advance so as to be shorter than the round game period (about 6 seconds) that can be continued when the normal game is being executed. Then, by executing the attack performance so that the SW effective time elapses before the round game period (about 6 seconds) elapses, the player tries to operate the effect button 22a within the SW effective time. On the other hand, it is suppressed that the round game ends before the production button 22a is operated and the motivation to operate the production button 22a is reduced, but not limited to this, for example, the round game The length of the SW effective time set inside may be configured to be variable according to the number of game balls that have won the first variable prize winning device 65 during the round game.

Specifically, as the SW valid time set during the round game, the same length (30 seconds) as the period in which the second end condition (30 seconds elapsed) for ending the round game based on the elapsed time is satisfied After that, every time one game ball wins to the first variable winning device 65 during the round game, the remaining period of the SW effective time is subtracted by 3 seconds. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reliably end the SW effective time before the round game ends. In addition, during the round game, it is possible to provide a long SW effective time (up to 30 seconds) to the player who interrupts the shooting of the game ball and tries to operate the effect button 22a. As a result, the SW effective time elapses before the player operates the effect button 22a, and the player's motivation to operate the effect button 22a decreases. It can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 935(a), the description is continued. As shown in FIG. 935(a), during the interval period after the end of the second round, the effect result of the attack effect (see FIG. 934(b)) executed in the second round is shown in the display area HR1 as "remaining 385 bodies." ” is displayed. In addition, as a display mode for suggesting the content of the attack effect to be executed in the third round, a character 801b imitating a hero is displayed on the left side of the main display area Dm, and the following characters are displayed in the display area Dm7: The second button icon Pu2 corresponding to the attack effect is displayed in the high display mode. In the sub-display area Ds, a display mode of "4 remaining" is displayed for guiding the remaining number of attack effects in the current subjugation effect and that the next attack effect is an attack effect that significantly reduces the number of remaining enemies. times!! Next is a chance for mass subjugation!!" is displayed.

Therefore, a player who sees the display screen shown in FIG. You can enjoy the attack production of the third round while expecting the remaining number of enemies to become 0.

In addition, in the thirty-second control example, as shown in FIG. , comments in the sub-display area Ds). These display elements are not displayed in all interval periods, and at least one display element may be used to suggest the effect content of the attack effect to be executed in the next round game.

In this case, the greater the number of display elements used among the three display elements described above, the higher the possibility that the next attack effect will greatly reduce the number of remaining enemies. If there is a contradiction in the contents of the attack effects suggested by the elements, it is preferable to increase the possibility that the next attack effect will greatly reduce the number of remaining enemies. By configuring in this manner, the player can be interested in various display modes displayed during the interval period, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, in the thirty-second control example, of the three display elements described above, only the display mode Dm7 is displayed in advance, and the interval period is set for the remaining two display elements. Although it is configured to be displayed at the same time as the display mode showing the effect content of the effect is displayed, it is not limited to this and suggests the character used in the attack effect executed in the next round game. The display timing of the display mode (first display element) and the display timing of the comment display (second display element) in the sub-display area Ds may be different.

In this case, for example, the display timing of each display element may be set so that the display element whose display mode is determined to be advantageous to the player is displayed later. By configuring in this way, it is possible to lengthen the period in which the player watches the display contents displayed during the interval period, thereby preventing the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

Further, the display timing of each display element may be set so that the display element whose display mode is determined to be advantageous to the player is displayed first. With this configuration, when the display element displayed first is in a display mode advantageous to the player, it is possible to leave the possibility that both of the two display elements are in a display mode advantageous to the player. Therefore, the player can be made to pay attention to display elements that will be displayed later.

In the thirty-second control example, the types of button icons used in each attack effect (strong display mode, normal display mode) are displayed to the player in advance at the start of the subjugation effect (Fig. 934 ( a) See), but not limited to this, for example, when the subjugation production is started, the number of button icons corresponding to the number of attack productions to be executed in the current subjugation production is displayed. , the type of only the first button icon Pu1 is determined according to the effect content of the first attack effect, and the remaining second button icon Pu2 to fifth button icon Pu5 are displayed in the normal display mode, and the subjugation effect is performed. At the time of starting, a display mode is displayed to notify the player of only the number of attack effects to be executed in this subjugation effect and the effect contents of the first attack effect, and during the interval period from the second round onwards. Alternatively, the display mode of the second button icon Pu2 to the fifth button icon Pu5 may be variably displayed in accordance with the effect content of the corresponding attack effect.

With this configuration, in the process of determining the display timing of each display element displayed during the interval period, in addition to the above-described first display element and second display element, the variable display mode of the button icon It is preferable that the display timing is determined including the display timing of (the third display element).

Further, when using a configuration in which the display modes of the second button icon Pu2 to the fifth button icon Pu5 are varied during the interval period from the second round onwards, the content of each attack effect executed in the subjugation effect can be changed. , Instead of being determined in advance before the subjugation presentation starts, it may be configured to be determined during the interval period, or the content of the attack presentation determined in advance at the start of the subjugation presentation is It may be configured to be variable according to the effect result of the attack effect executed before (operation status of the effect button 22a).

In this way, even if the production content of the remaining attack production (the number of remaining enemies to be reduced) is configured to be variable while the subjugation production is being executed, the display corresponding to the production content of the attack production after the change is made. Since the button icons can be displayed in different modes, it is possible to prevent the execution of effects that make the player feel uncomfortable.

Then, when all the enemies are subdued in the final attack presentation (6th round attack presentation) executed in the subjugation presentation, the display screen shown in FIG. 935(b) is displayed. FIG. 935(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when all the enemies have been subdued in the subjugation effect.

As shown in FIG. 935(b), "0 remaining" is displayed as a display mode indicating the number of remaining enemies displayed in the display area HR1, and the characters 801a and 801b used in the attack production congratulate. A presentation mode is displayed in the main display area Dm. In addition, in the display area Dm7, as a display mode that enables the user to grasp the number of times the attack effects have been executed in the subjugation effect, a consumed icon (indicated by "-" in the figure) is displayed, indicating the number of times the attack effects have been executed. 5 are displayed corresponding to .

In the sub-display area Ds, characters of "Punishment completed!! Rush!" By constructing in this manner, the player is notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the performance result of the subjugation performance is a successful performance advantageous to the player and that a time-saving state (rush) is set after the end of the jackpot game. can be done.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 936 and 937(a), the display contents of the display screen displayed according to whether or not the effect button 22a is operated during the attack effect executed in the subjugation effect will be described. do. FIG. 936(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the third round attack effect executed after the interval period shown in FIG. 935(a) has passed, and FIG. 936(b) 936(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the player operates (presses) the effect button 22a within the SW valid time of the attack effect displayed in FIG. 936(a), and FIG. a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the player does not operate (press) the effect button 22a within the SW valid time of the attack effect displayed in FIG. 936(a).

In this 32nd control example, the number of remaining enemies is common in order to show that the effect result of the subjugation effect is the effect result that is advantageous to the player (the effect result that notifies that the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends). It is configured so that it is possible to determine the mode of production for a specific number (0 bodies). Furthermore, before the number of remaining enemies becomes a common specific number (0 bodies) in the subjugation production that is an advantageous production result for the player, a unique specific number (for example, 333 or a jackpot) is set as the number of remaining enemies. The value corresponding to the symbol) is displayed so that the player can be notified of the performance result of the current subjugation performance during the subjugation performance.

In addition, according to the operation status (whether pressed or not) of the effect button 22a in each attack effect, the effect result of each attack effect is changed. For example, the effect button 22a is pressed during the attack effect , the effect result (number of remaining enemies) of each predetermined attack effect is displayed, and if the effect button 22a is not pressed during the attack effect, the predetermined effect result (number of remaining enemies) is displayed. ) is configured to be able to display a larger number of remaining enemies. In other words, the production result of the attack production is determined in advance, and a plurality of numbers of remaining enemies can be displayed up to the upper limit of the number of remaining enemies indicated by the production result predetermined according to the conditions established during the attack production. ing.

By configuring in this way, by prescribing the total number of enemies that can be reduced in each attack production executed in the subjugation production, the number of remaining enemies can be disproportionately distributed during the production period of the subjugation production. In addition to suppressing the decrease in the number of remaining enemies, variation can be given to the number of remaining enemies that is decreased in each attack production.

Further, a state in which a unique specific number is included between the number of remaining enemies determined in advance as the effect result of the attack effect and the number of remaining enemies displayed at the start of the attack effect, and the attack effect When the player does not operate (depress) the effect button 22a during the game, an additional attack effect can be executed in which the number of remaining enemies is a unique specific number. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of selecting whether or not to operate the effect button 22a during the attack effect.

In addition, as described above, the unique specific number is configured to be determined according to the number included in the jackpot pattern, and is configured not to inform the player of the number of remaining enemies determined as the unique specific number. Therefore, every time the attack effect is executed, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting whether or not the unique specific number is included in the range of the number of remaining enemies that is reduced in the current attack effect. .

In addition, by notifying the player of the size of the number of remaining enemies that will be reduced in the next attack production, it is possible to provide hints for predicting the number of remaining enemies that will be reduced during the attack production to be executed. , it is possible to make it easier to predict the range of the number of remaining enemies that will be reduced in this attack production.

As shown in FIG. 936(a), when the third round attack effect is executed, the character 801b displayed on the display screen during the interval period after the end of the second round (see FIG. 935(b)) is the main player. Displayed in the display area Dm, a second button icon Pu2 in a strong display mode is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm, and a time gauge ga1 for indicating the SW valid time set in the current attack effect is displayed. Is displayed. Similar to the time gauge ga1 shown in FIG. 934(b), this time gauge ga1 is displayed with a remaining period display ga1a and an elapsed period display ga1b so as to indicate the elapsed time of the SW valid time of 3 seconds. .

In addition, since the attack effect using the second button icon Pu2 is executed in the third round attack effect, the third button icon Pu3 to the fifth button icon Pu5 are displayed in the display area Dm7, and the display area HR1 "Remaining 385 bodies" indicating the number of remaining enemies, which is the effect result of the attack effect in the second round, is displayed. In this way, the display mode of the button icon suggesting the number of remaining enemies that can be reduced by the current attack effect during the period (within the effective SW time of the attack effect) during which the player operates the effect button 22a. , and the current number of remaining enemies, the player can easily decide whether or not to operate the effect button 22a for the attack effect being executed.

When the effect button 22a is pressed during the third round attack effect, the display screen shown in FIG. 936(b) is displayed. FIG. 936(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the effect button 22a is operated (depressed) during the attack effect of the third round. As shown in FIG. 936(b), when the effect button 22a is operated (depressed) during the attack effect, the effect is executed in which the ally character 801b executes the attack action without waiting for the end of the round game. As a display mode for showing the effect result of the attack effect, characters of "99 bodies remaining" are displayed in the display area HR1.

That is, in the example shown in FIG. 936(b), the total number of enemies "500" is determined as the mode of subjugation mode, and the attack mode (second attack mode) is performed in the third round. As a result, "remaining 99 bodies" are determined in advance, and the effect result is displayed in which the number of remaining enemies is reduced to the predetermined number of remaining enemies by the second attack effect. The display area HR1 indicating the number of remaining enemies is configured so that the display mode (background) can be variably set according to the number of remaining enemies displayed. A display mode (cracked background) is displayed to indicate that (number of remaining enemies) is 100 or less. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "Just a little more!!" are displayed as a guidance display mode for informing the player that the number of remaining enemies is 100 or less.

In this 32nd control example, the display mode of the display area where the number of remaining enemies is displayed is configured to be variable according to the number of remaining enemies. Conditions may be set, and if the ratio of the current number of remaining enemies to the total number of enemies in the subjugation effect (the number of remaining enemies initially displayed in the display area HR1) is less than a predetermined ratio (for example, 1000 The condition for changing the display mode may be established when the number of remaining enemies reaches 100 (10% or less of the total number of enemies) in the subjugation effect of subjugating the enemies.

With this configuration, it is possible to change the display mode of the display area HR1 not by the number of remaining enemies but by the degree of decrease in the number of enemies with respect to the total number of enemies in the subjugation effect. It is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp whether the game has been completed.

Next, when the effect button 22a is not pressed during the third round attack effect, the display screen shown in FIG. 937(a) is displayed. Fig. 937(a) shows the display screen displayed during the interval period after the end of the third round when the third round ends without operating the effect button 22a from the state shown in Fig. 936(a). It is the figure which showed an example.

In the state shown in FIG. 936(a) (the number of remaining enemies is "385"), when the SW effective time elapses without operating the effect button 22a, the remaining period display ga1a of the time gauge ga1 decreases, and the SW Validity period expires. When the round game of the third round ends in that state, the interval period set after the round game of the third round ends, and an additional attack effect executed when the effect button 22a is not operated is executed. , "Remaining 333 bodies" is displayed in the display area HR1 as the effect result of the additional attack effect.

That is, in the diagram shown in FIG. 937(a), the jackpot game of this time is a jackpot game in which the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, and "333" as the unique specific number of the subjugation production in which the successful production is executed. is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the subjugation effect set is being executed.

Then, as the effect result of the attack effect to be executed in the third round, the number of remaining enemies "99 bodies" is determined, and when the player operates the effect button 22a, the effect shown in FIG. 936(b) is displayed. As you can see, the effect result that the number of remaining enemies is reduced from "385 bodies" to "99 bodies" is displayed. On the other hand, if the player does not operate the effect button 22a, an additional attack effect is executed to reduce the number of remaining enemies from "385" by a predetermined number. When the condition for executing this additional attack presentation is established, the presentation mode (result of presentation) of the additional attack presentation is determined by a special lottery.

Specifically, when the SW effective time elapses without operating the effect button 22a, the condition for executing the additional attack effect is satisfied, and the current number of remaining enemies (for example, "385 bodies") and the attack effect Whether the unique specific number (eg, "333") determined in this subjugation rendering is included between the number of remaining enemies (eg, "99") determined in advance as a result of the production is determined, and if it is determined that the unique specific number is not included, the number of remaining enemies (for example, "99 bodies") that was previously determined as a result of the attack production at a rate of 70%. The mode is determined, and the production mode is determined to reduce to the first pseudo remnant number (eg, "104 bodies") in which the last digit is the number of jackpot symbols (eg, "4") at a rate of 20%, A performance mode is determined in which the last two digits are reduced to a second pseudo number of remaining enemies (eg, "144 bodies") in which the last two digits are the number of jackpot symbols (eg, "4") at a rate of 10%.

On the other hand, if it is determined that a unique specific number is included, there is a production mode that reduces the number of remaining enemies (for example, "99 bodies") that was previously determined as the production result of the attack production at a rate of 40%. is determined, and a production mode is determined that reduces the number to a unique specific number (eg, "333 bodies") at a rate of 30%, and the last digit is the number of jackpot patterns (eg, "4") at a rate of 10%. A production mode that reduces the number of first pseudo remnants (for example, "104 bodies") is determined, and the second pseudo remnants in which the last two digits are the number of jackpot symbols (for example, "4") at a rate of 20% A presentation mode is determined to reduce the number (for example, "144 bodies").

Then, an additional attack effect is executed according to the determined effect mode. By constructing in this way, the effect result of one attack effect can be made different between when the effect button 22a is operated during the attack effect and when it is not operated, so that variations of the attack effect can be increased. can be done. In addition, even if the unique specific number is not included in the range of reduction of the number of remaining enemies, the number of enemies will be reduced to the number of remaining enemies (pseudo number of remaining enemies) related to the number included in the jackpot pattern. Since it is made easy, it is possible to easily make the player think that the effect result of the additional attack effect is the unique specific number.

Furthermore, if a unique specific number is included within the range of decreasing the number of remaining enemies, that is, the subjugation production that is being executed is a successful subjugation production ), compared to the case where the unique specific number is not included in the decreasing range of the number of remaining enemies, the pseudo number of remaining enemies is more likely to be determined. Therefore, even if the number of remaining enemies cannot be reduced to the unique specific number, in the subjugation effect of 1, the game is performed so that the additional attack effect is executed multiple times, and the number of pseudo remaining enemies is increased. By being displayed a plurality of times, it is possible for the player to predict that the current subjugation presentation will be a success presentation.

Also, as shown in FIG. 937(a), when the number of remaining enemies of the unique specific number ("333") is displayed in the display area HR1, that is, before the number of remaining enemies becomes "0" When it is notified to the player that a success effect (subjugation effect that notifies that the time saving state is set) will be executed, the display mode of the display area HR1 is different from the normal display mode (in the figure The button icons (the third button icon Pu3 to the fifth button icon Pu5) displayed in the display area Dm7 are changed so that the number of remaining enemies is finally "0". It is displayed in a special display mode (displayed in a shining mode in the drawing) to indicate that the rest of the attack effects are to be executed.

In this 32nd control example, even if a unique specific number is displayed as the number of remaining enemies during the subjugation presentation, the rest of the attack presentation is executed according to the predetermined content. In other words, even after the unique specific number is displayed, an attack effect is executed to reduce the number of remaining enemies until the number of remaining enemies reaches zero. Therefore, even when the unique specific number of remaining enemies is displayed once, the number of remaining enemies different from the unique specific number is displayed in the display area HR1 when the subjugation effect progresses. Therefore, the display mode of the button icon displayed in the display area Dm7 and the display mode of the display area HR1 can be displayed in a display mode for notifying that the unique specific number has been displayed, so that the subjugation effect can be achieved. It is possible to make it easy for the player to grasp that the unique specific number is displayed as the number of remaining enemies at an intermediate stage continuously over the remaining period of the subjugation presentation.

In this 32nd control example, as described above, even if a unique specific number is displayed as the number of remaining enemies during the subjugation presentation, the rest of the attack presentation is configured to be executed according to the predetermined contents. This suppresses an increase in the load of the control processing for executing the subjugation effect. In other words, when the player already knows that the success effect is being executed, the player's interest in the degree of decrease in the number of remaining enemies in each attack effect decreases, so the unique specific number is displayed. Even if it is possible to set a dedicated presentation mode (for example, a presentation mode in which the number of remaining enemies is all aligned as a result of each attack presentation) as the presentation mode of the attack presentation to be executed after the attack, the presentation effect will still be effective. Since it is difficult to increase the target performance effectively, the control processing load for executing the subjugation performance is prevented from increasing excessively by using the performance mode of the attack performance determined in advance as it is. can do.

It should be noted that, without being limited to the configuration used in the 32nd control example, in the case where a unique specific number is displayed as the number of remaining enemies during the subjugation presentation, instead of the presentation mode of the attack presentation determined in advance, , it may be configured to execute a dedicated effect mode, for example, when the next attack effect is executed in a state in which a unique specific number is displayed as the number of remaining enemies, the attack effect in the subjugation effect Configured to execute an attack production in which the number of remaining enemies is ``0'' regardless of the remaining number of times, and then use the remaining period until the subjugation production ends (time after confirmation) to perform the remaining attack production. It may be configured to execute a blessing effect for congratulating the player without executing it, or another privilege (for example, , presence/absence of a holding series) may be executed. By configuring in this way, when the subjugation effect that becomes a successful effect is executed, depending on the progress of the effect until the effect result is displayed (whether or not the unique specific number is displayed) Since different benefits can be provided by each player, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of selecting whether or not to press the performance button 22a during the period during which the subjugation performance is executed.

In addition, it is possible to set a special effect mode (for example, the effect mode in which the number of remaining enemies is all aligned as a result of each attack effect effect) as the effect mode of the attack effect that is executed after the unique specific number is displayed. may be configured. With this configuration, the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the unique specific number has been displayed only by grasping the number of remaining enemies displayed in the display area HR1. There is no need to prepare display data for displaying a dedicated display mode (eg, shining mode) as the display mode of the display element (eg, button icon) displayed in the display area (eg, display area Dm7). .

FIG. 937(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the unique specific number is displayed in the last attack effect in the subjugation effect. In this 32nd control example, in the subjugation effect that is a successful effect, as the effect result of the last attack effect, the number of remaining enemies is not "0", but a unique specific number (for example, "44") is displayed. A resurrection effect that sets the number of remaining enemies to "0" can be executed by an attack effect.

In other words, the number of remaining enemies other than "0" is displayed as the effect result of the final attack effect while letting the player know that the attack effect to be executed this time is the final attack effect in the subjugation effect. , After making the player think that a failure performance (a performance notifying that the time saving state is not set after the jackpot game is over) is executed, a resurrection performance is executed and the number of remaining enemies is variably displayed to "0". configured as possible. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player expect that the success effect is executed until the end of the subjugation effect.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 937(b), "remaining 44 bodies" is displayed in the display area HR1 as a display mode for showing the effect result of the last attack effect during the sixth round of the round game. In the example shown in FIG. 937(b), "44" using the number "4" included in the jackpot symbol is determined as the unique specific number, and "44 bodies" displayed in the display area HR1 is It becomes a unique specific number. Then, in the main display area Dm, the character 801c corresponding to the resurrection effect attacks the display area HR1, and a resurrection effect (additional attack effect) is executed in which the unique specific number once displayed is further decreased.

When this resurrection effect is completed, similarly to the display screen shown in FIG. 935(b), "remaining 0 bodies" is displayed in the display area HR1 as a display mode for indicating the success effect, and the success effect is given to the player. is executed. Although illustration is omitted, in this 32nd control example, when the performance result of the subjugation performance is a failure performance, the number of remaining enemies other than the unique specific number is randomly determined as the performance result of the final attack performance. Instead, it is configured so that the number of pseudo remnants using the numbers included in the jackpot symbols can be easily determined.

In other words, in the subjugation effect when the jackpot is won with "444", the number "4" is attached to the display area HR1 of the display screen for showing the effect result of the failure effect (the display screen showing the result of the last attack effect). It is configured so that the pseudo number of remaining enemies (for example, "14 bodies" or "4 bodies"), which is the number of remaining enemies determined and is not determined as a unique specific number, is easily displayed. By configuring in this way, when the performance result of the failure performance is displayed, the performance result of the failure performance can be displayed while leaving the possibility of executing the resurrection performance.

As described above, in the 32nd control example, it is possible to notify in advance that the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game using the effect result of the subjugation effect executed during the first jackpot game. had configured. Furthermore, by making it possible to report the performance result of the subjugation performance before the performance result of the subjugation performance (the performance result of the last attack performance) is displayed, the game state set after the end of the big win game can be quickly changed. It is configured so that a player who wants to perceive is likely to be interested not only in the performance result of the subjugation performance but also in the performance process of the subjugation performance (the performance result of each attack performance).

Specifically, by displaying a specific number (common specific number, unique specific number) as the production result of each attack production, the production result of the subjugation production is the production result for indicating that the time saving state is set ( It was configured to be able to notify in advance that the number of remaining enemies 0 display) will be displayed.

That is, in the present 32nd control example, when a specific number is displayed as the subjugation effect, and when the effect result (remaining enemy number 0 display) for indicating that the time saving state is set is displayed, It is configured to be able to notify that the same privilege is given at different notification timings. It should be noted that the content of the privilege given to the player when the specific number is displayed and the content given to the player when the effect result of the subjugation effect is displayed may be different. Well, for example, as a privilege given by displaying the production result of the subjugation production, set a privilege indicating that the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, and given when a specific number is displayed As a privilege, it may be configured to give a privilege indicating that the next big winning game will be executed immediately after the big winning game is finished (retained).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to give a plurality of benefits to the player by the subjugation production, so that the player can receive not only the production result of the subjugation production but also the production process. It can be made easier to pay attention.

Next, with reference to FIG. 938, the effect contents of the variable effect executed during the time saving state (rush) will be described. The pachinko machine 10 of the 32nd control example has a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) and a time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) as game states. and can be set, and the second special symbol lottery advantageous to the player is more likely to be executed when the time saving state is set than when the normal state is set. It consists of

The second special symbol lottery is stipulated to win a small win with a high probability (probability of 1/2), and the second variable is opened during a small win game executed when a small win is won. A winning device (V winning device) 650 is configured so that a game ball that has won a prize can pass through a specific area, and a jackpot (V jackpot) game is executed based on the game ball passing through the specific area. ing.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the 32nd control example, the variation time of the second special symbol variation for indicating the result of the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state is a short variation (for example, 1 second). By configuring the time to be settable and shortening the period from the end of one big winning game to the execution of the next big winning game, the number of times the big winning game is executed per unit time can be easily increased. Configure.

In the pachinko machine 10 constructed in this manner, the variable performance executed during the normal state, that is, the lottery result is shown as the variable performance for showing the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state. After variably displaying a plurality of symbols contained in a plurality of symbol columns (eg, left column, middle column, right column) including at least the third symbol for, some symbol columns (eg, left column, right column) ) are stop-displayed in a combination indicating the winning of the jackpot, and the stop-display mode of the third symbols variably displayed in the remaining pattern rows (for example, the middle row) is created. It is constructed so as to execute a variable performance dedicated to the time-saving state without executing a ready-to-win performance to amuse the player while predicting it.

In other words, the ready-to-win production described above is a variable production that gradually increases the expectation of winning a big hit using the fluctuation period in which the special symbol fluctuation is executed, and the special symbol lottery is frequently executed. Even if a long fluctuation time (for example, 60 seconds) is set to prevent the In addition, when the special symbol variation with a short variation time (for example, 1 second) is configured to be easily executed during the time saving state, even if the ready-to-win production is performed using the variation time of one special symbol variation Therefore, there is a problem that the time spent from creating the ready-to-win state to stopping and displaying the result of the special symbol lottery is shortened, thereby providing the player with an effect that is difficult to understand.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present 32nd control example, in the rush period in which the time saving state is set, the remaining number of second special symbol fluctuations (the number of remaining special figure 2 fluctuations) that can be executed during the time saving state is counted down. The effect is mainly executed, and when the result of the second special symbol lottery is winning, the display mode of the third symbol for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is displayed in place of the countdown displayed numbers. It consists of

By constructing in this way, in a time-saving state in which special symbol variations with short variation times are continuously executed, a player wins and wins a special symbol lottery while informing a player of the period during which the time-saving state continues in an easy-to-understand manner. can be reported in an easy-to-understand manner.

FIG. 938(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed while the first second special symbol variation is being executed after the time saving state (three times of time saving) is set. As shown in FIG. 938(a), during the rush which is the production mode during the time saving state, the production that the character 801 is charging the attack is executed, and the front side shows the number of remaining special figures 2 fluctuations. A number icon 808 is displayed as a display mode. In the diagram shown in FIG. 938(a), since the first second special symbol variation is being executed, the second special symbol variation is executed three times including the second special symbol variation being executed. A number icon 808 is displayed in a display mode of "3" indicating that the number is displayed.

In addition, on the right side of the main display area Dm, a display area Dm8 for displaying a duration display for indicating the period during which the time saving state (rush) continues is formed, and the duration of the time saving state (rush) period is displayed. A display mode of "00:02:44" is displayed as the display mode shown. This "00:02:44" indicates that two seconds have passed since the time saving state was set.

Specifically, the duration display displayed in the display area Dm8 is configured to be able to display a maximum period of 99 minutes and 59 seconds. The area on the right side of the area where the time in seconds (two-digit area in the middle) (the two-digit area on the right, where "44" is displayed in FIG. 938(a)) is It is formed as a pseudo elapsed time display area, and is configured to be able to display values from "00" at the minimum to "99" at the maximum. The value can be updated from the minimum value to the maximum value until one second elapses, and after reaching the maximum value, the minimum value is displayed again and the value is repeatedly updated. there is

In other words, the pseudo elapsed time display area is a display area where the value appears to be updated in units of 1/100 second. In addition, if the time saving state continues beyond the maximum value (99 minutes 59 seconds) of the duration display displayed in the display area Dm8, the time saving state will not be displayed for a longer duration and the time saving state will continue for a long time. It is configured to display a blessing display (for example, a display of "excellent!!") to show that it has been done. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a special effect.

In addition, in the present 32nd control example, the period during which the time saving state continues (including the period of the jackpot game or the small winning game executed in the middle), regardless of the presence or absence of the game, the display of the duration period Since it is configured to be updated, for example, when the game is interrupted for a long time during the time saving state, the duration display easily reaches the maximum value. Therefore, as conditions for executing the above-mentioned blessing display, in addition to reaching the maximum duration display, the condition that is satisfied when the number of prize balls obtained during the rush period exceeds a predetermined number, The condition for executing the blessing display may be that the number of times of the jackpot game executed during the time saving state or the number of times of the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state exceeds a predetermined number of times.

By constructing in this way, only the player who has executed many games (special symbol lottery) during the rush period can display the blessing display, so that the satisfaction of the player to whom the blessing display is displayed can be enhanced. can be done. In this case, when the duration display reaches the maximum value while the conditions for executing the blessing display are not satisfied, the maximum duration display is continuously displayed. It is preferable that the congratulatory display is executed when the condition for executing the congratulatory display is satisfied while the period display is continuing.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to motivate a player whose rush period continues for a long time to play a game to perform the blessing display.

In the sub-display area Ds, characters of "destroy the screen before the countdown reaches 0" are displayed as a guidance display mode for indicating the content of the variable presentation to be executed during the rush period (time-saving state). there is By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to easily understand that a privilege (win) is given when the character 801 attacks and destroys the screen.

Then, when the player wins in the second special symbol lottery executed during the rush period, the display screen shown in FIG. 938(b) is displayed. FIG. 938(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the winning special symbol variation during the rush period is stopped and displayed. When the winning second special symbol variation is executed, the character 801 charging the attack destroys the screen, destroying the screen and hiding the number icon 808 that had been displayed as a countdown. , instead, the third symbol ("555" in the figure) is displayed in the display area HR2 in a combination indicating winning.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 939 and 940, the effect contents during the small winning game executed when the special symbol lottery wins the small winning will be described. Figure 939 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed immediately after the start of the small winning game, Figure 939 (b) is a game within 4 seconds after the start of the small winning game FIG. 940 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when a ball is entered into a specific area (V area), and FIG. It is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when four seconds have passed since the start of the small winning game with the ball entered into the area (V area).

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in this 32nd control example, in order to increase the number of executions of the jackpot game executed per unit time, the second special symbol variation executed during the time saving state (rush period) It shortens the change time. Furthermore, the period from when the small winning is won until the small winning game is executed, and the period from when the small winning game is executed until the game ball can enter the specific area (V area) is also short.

Here, conventionally, a pachinko machine 10 acquires the right to execute the big winning game by entering a game ball into a specific area (V area) during the small winning game, and executes the big winning game after finishing the small winning game. It has been known. In this conventional type pachinko machine 10, in order to enter a game ball into a specific area within a limited period during which a small winning game is executed, a small winning is made as a result of a special symbol lottery. The game content to be executed during the small winning game using the period until the game is started or the period during which the game ball can be entered into the specific area after the small winning game is started ( For example, it is configured to execute a game guidance notification to notify the player in advance of the display of "Aim for V by hitting right".

In the conventional type pachinko machine 10 constructed in this way, the period from when the result of the special symbol lottery is the winning of the small winning game to the start of the small winning game, or after the small winning game is started, the game ball is played. can be entered into the specific area, by setting the length of the game guidance notification described above to the extent that it can be repeatedly executed, the game to be executed during the small winning game for the player It was configured to allow the player to grasp the content.

In the conventional pachinko machine 10 in which the game guidance notification is repeatedly executed until the game ball can enter the specific area, the game ball cannot enter the specific area. To repeatedly execute the game guidance notification even in a state where it is possible, stop the game guidance notification based on the fact that the game ball has entered the specific area, and notify that the game ball has entered the specific area (for example, "V" get) is displayed so that the player can easily understand that a proper game has been played.

However, in the above-described conventional pachinko machine 10, when a game ball enters the specific area during a small winning game, the game guide notification is stopped, and it is notified that the game ball has entered the specific area. Since it is configured to display a display mode for notification (for example, "V" get), the game guidance notification is repeated until the game ball can be entered into the specific area. It is necessary to provide a period for execution, and the period from when a small win is won until a state in which a game ball can be entered into a specific area is set is prolonged, and the number of big win games per unit time is increased. There is a problem that it is difficult to increase the number of executions.

In addition, the period from the start of the small winning game to the state in which the game ball can be entered into the specific area is set short, and the game is started before the end of the initial game guide notification period. When it is possible to make a ball enter a specific area, it is possible to easily increase the number of jackpot game executions per unit time. There is a problem that the game guidance notification ends before the player grasps the content, and the player is puzzled over the game to be executed after the game ball enters the specific area.

On the other hand, in this 32nd control example, the length of the period from the start of the small winning game to the state in which it is possible to enter the game ball into the specific area is the first game guidance When the game ball is configured to be shorter than the notification period (4 seconds), and the game ball enters the specific area before the first game guidance notification period (4 seconds) elapses, After the first game guide notification has passed, a display mode (for example, "V Get") for notifying that a game ball has entered a specific area is displayed. Then, when a game ball enters the specific area during the period in which the second and subsequent game guidance notifications are executed after the first game guidance notification has passed, the game guidance notification being executed is executed. is stopped, and a display mode (for example, "V get") for notifying that the game ball has entered the specific area is displayed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily increase the number of executions of the jackpot game per unit time, and to guide the player to the contents of the game to be executed after the game ball enters the specific area. It is possible to reliably secure the notification period for the game (game guide notification period for the first time).

As shown in FIG. 939(a), when the small winning game is executed, the game ball is entered toward the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 provided in the right area of the game board 13. As a guidance notification for guiding the player to execute the right-handed game, "Right-handed" is displayed in the display area Dm4, and the second variable An image showing the vicinity of the game area where the second variable prize winning device 650 is arranged is displayed so that the player can easily grasp the position of the prize winning device 650 . Furthermore, as a game content during the small winning game, a first arrow 810 is displayed in the main display area Dm.

The first arrow 810 is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in a display mode indicating the direction (right direction) in which the second variable winning device 650 is arranged. Aim" characters are attached. The first arrow 810 is displayed so as to move in the horizontal direction of the display surface, and the first arrow 810 is displayed so as to reciprocate in the horizontal direction twice during one game guide notification period of 4 seconds. be. Further, in the sub-display area Ds1, as a guide mode for guiding the game method during the small winning game, characters of "Right hit and let the V attacker win a prize! Win a V prize and get a big win!" are displayed.

Also, the first arrow 810 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the voice output device 226 outputs the voice "Aim right" twice in four seconds. In the 32nd control example, as the game guidance notification for guiding the game method of the small winning game, the game guidance notification is configured such that the notification period of one time is 4 seconds. When one game guidance notification is completed, it is determined whether or not to continue the game guidance notification, and if it is determined that it is necessary to continue the game guidance notification, the same game guidance notification can be repeatedly executed a plurality of times. It consists of

By configuring in this way, in the state where the small winning game is executed, the game ball is entered into the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 by the right-handed game, thereby executing the big winning game. It is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that it is possible to

Furthermore, below the first arrow 810 displayed in the main display area Dm, the remaining time of the period (round game period) in which the game ball can enter the second variable winning device 650 in the small winning game A second time gauge ga2 for indicating is displayed. The display mode of the second time gauge ga2 is composed of a remaining period display ga2a for indicating the remaining period of the round game period of the small winning game and an elapsed period display ga2b for indicating the elapsed period. The display mode of the second time gauge ga2 is variable so that the ratio of the elapsed period display ga2b increases and the ratio of the remaining period display ga2a decreases every time the time elapses after the round game of the game is executed. It is configured to

In the 32nd control example, when the small winning game is started, the round game is executed for a maximum of 20 seconds after the opening period of 2 seconds has passed, and then the ending period of 2 seconds is set. are doing. The opening period is a period during which the second variable prize winning device (V prize winning device) 650 is not opened, that is, a period during which game balls cannot enter the second variable prize winning device 650, and a special symbol lottery is won. This is a period for notifying the player who is playing the game that the second variable prize winning device 650 will be opened based on the winning of the small prize. When the opening period is set, a display mode for guiding the start of the small winning game (for example, "small winning game start") is displayed, and as the first game guidance notification, shown in FIG. 939 (a) A first arrow 810 is displayed for four seconds.

That is, in the 32nd control example, the game guidance notification for guiding the game content during the small winning game is configured to be executed from the stage (opening period) before the round game is executed. . By configuring in this way, even if a player who understands the game during the small winning game by grasping the contents of the game guidance notification executes the right-handed game from the stage when he understands the game during the small winning game. , the game ball can be easily entered into the second variable winning device 650 immediately after the round game is started.

During the round game of the small winning game, the open state in which the game ball can be won to the second variable prize winning device 650 and the open state in which it is difficult to win the game ball (not closed) and the opening/closing door 650f1 is variably operated. Specifically, open state (0.1 sec), closed state (0.4 sec), open state (0.1 sec), closed state (0.4 sec), open state (0.1 sec), Closed state (0.4 sec), open state (0.1 sec), closed state (0.4 sec), open state (0.1 sec), closed state (1.5 sec), open state (0.5 sec) 1 second), closed state (1.5 seconds), open state (0.2 seconds), closed state (4.8 seconds), open state (0.8 seconds), closed state (9 seconds) , the opening/closing door 650f1 is variably controlled.

Here, in the small winning game in the present 32nd control example, when the above-described 20-second variable control ends, or during the round game, a predetermined number (10) of game balls are sent to the second variable winning device 650. When a prize is won, the end condition of the round game is satisfied and the round game is ended. Then, as the variable control contents of the open/close door 650f1 executed during the round game, the first half period of the round game is configured so that the open state period occupies a higher proportion than the second half period. Then, when the right-handed game is continuously executed during the small winning game, the number of winnings to the second variable winning device 650 is set to 10 at the timing of the fifth open state. there is

That is, after the small winning game is executed (after the opening period is set), when the right-handed game is continuously executed, the game period of the round game tends to be 2.1 seconds, and during the round game When the right hitting game is not executed continuously, the game period of the round game is configured to be 20 seconds at maximum. By configuring in this way, a player who wants to increase the number of executions of the big winning game per unit time can be motivated to play the right-handed game immediately after the small winning game is started.

In addition, as the round game progresses, the period during which the opening/closing door 650f1 is closed becomes longer, so the round game is terminated by causing the second variable winning device 650 to win a predetermined number (10) of game balls. Even in this case, the length of the round game period can be greatly varied depending on the timing of winning the tenth game ball. Therefore, since the number of times the big winning game is executed per unit time varies depending on the game situation during the small winning game, the player can be interested in the game situation during the small winning game.

In addition, a long closed state (closed state of 9 seconds) set in the latter half of the round game, that is, during the small hit game, when the right-handed game is normally executed, it is difficult to set the closed state When the state is set, for example, since it is possible that the right-handed game is not executed without noticing that the small winning game is being executed, the game ball is already entered into the specific area. If it is determined whether or not the game ball is in the specific area, and if it is determined that the game ball is not entered into the specific area, the player is instructed to emphasize and guide the right-handed game. It consists of By constructing in this way, the game ball is not allowed to enter the specific area even though the small winning game is executed, and the small winning game ends without acquiring the right to execute the big winning game. can be suppressed.

In addition, during the round game of the small winning game, in the first half period, 0.1 seconds are repeatedly set as the period in which the opening and closing door 650f1 is opened, and in the second half period, a period longer than the first half period (0.2 seconds, 0 .8 seconds) is set to be open. By configuring in this way, a game can be reliably played for a player who could not finish the small winning game in a short time, for example, a player who did not notice until the middle of the execution of the small winning game. The opportunity to land the ball into the second variable winning device 650 can remain.

In addition, in this 32nd control example, the variable control during the round game is executed so that the ratio of the open state period is higher in the first half period of the round game than in the second half period. It is possible to finish the round game in a short time, but the content of the variable control during the round game is not limited to this, and the ratio of the open state period to the entire period of the round game is equal. It may be configured to be

In addition, in this 32nd control example, the open/close door 650f1 is variably controlled so that the time during which one open state continues is longer in the second half period of the round game than in the first half period. Although it is configured to suppress the end of the round game without allowing the game ball to enter the second variable prize winning device 650, the first half of the round game is not limited to this. , the opening/closing door 650f1 may be variably controlled so that the time during which one open state continues is longer than the second half period. By configuring in this way, game balls can be easily entered into the second variable winning device 650 during the first half of the round game, so the round game can be easily finished in a short time. On the other hand, a small winning game in which a short open state and a long closed state are repeated is executed for a player who could not finish the round game in the first half of the round game. The period can be lengthened unnecessarily. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player who executes the small winning game to actively perform the right-handed game for winning the game ball to the second variable winning device 650 immediately after the round game is started. can.

Also, the ending period of the small winning game is the period during which the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 is not opened, that is, the game ball enters the second variable winning device 650, similarly to the opening period described above. A display mode based on the game contents executed during the round game of the small winning game is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 during the period in which the game cannot be performed.

Specifically, when the game ball is entered into a specific area during the round game of the small winning game and the right to execute the big winning game is acquired, information for indicating that the small winning game has ended and information for indicating that the big winning game will be executed after the small winning game is finished. On the other hand, when the game ball cannot enter the specific area during the round game of the small winning game, the big winning game is not executed after the small winning game ends, so that the small winning game ends. and information for indicating that the state will be shifted to the normal state after the end of the small winning game.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 939(a), when 3 seconds have passed since the start of the small winning game, that is, the opening period of 2 seconds has ended, and 1 second has elapsed since the round game was executed. A first arrow 810 is displayed in the main display area Dm as the first game guide notification, and the elapsed time is shown with respect to the round game period (20 seconds) indicated by the entire time gauge ga2. A state is displayed in which the period display ga2b indicates a range of 1 second and the remaining period display ga2a indicates a range of 19 seconds.

Then, when the game ball that has won the second variable prize winning device 650 passes through the specific area (V gate) during the period when the first game guide notification is executed (when V wins), that is, the round game If the game ball wins V within 2 seconds after the start, as shown in FIG. Guidance information (first arrow 810) is continuously displayed, and in the secondary display area Ds, for guiding the game method during the small winning game, ``Rit right and let the V attacker win! !” continues to be displayed.

By configuring in this way, even if the game ball wins V immediately after the round game of the small winning game is started, the game content executed after winning V (the big winning game is executed) It is possible to make the player easily understand the game content).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 939(b), when the game ball wins V during the initial game guidance notification period (4 seconds), the main display area Dm where the initial game guidance notification is executed A V-winning icon 811 is displayed in the empty area to indicate that a V-winning has already been made. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to grasp whether or not the game ball has won a V prize during the initial game guide notification period.

In the thirty-second control example, the V winning icon 811 is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, so that the player can determine whether or not the V winning has occurred even during the initial game guidance notification period. Although it is configured to be possible, it may be configured to notify that it is in a V winning state other than the third symbol display device 81, for example, light emitting means (LED, etc.) provided in the pachinko machine ) may be made to emit light to notify that the V prize has been won. By configuring in this way, the display screen during the first game guide notification period can be unified regardless of whether or not there is a V win, so the display control for the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is simplified. be able to.

Then, when the first game guidance notification period has passed in the state of V winning, as shown in FIG. "V Get" is displayed using the V winning icon 811 enlarged and displayed in the upper part. In the sub-display area Ds, characters of "Lucky Jackpot!!" are displayed to indicate that a jackpot game will be executed based on the V win.

In other words, a player who wins a V prize with a game ball during the period of the first game guidance notification grasps the content of the game guidance notification until the first game guidance notification is completed, and wins a jackpot after making a V prize. The game after the V win is executed with the understanding that the game will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

As described above, in the 32nd control example, during the small winning game so that the small winning game does not end during the initial game guidance notification period (4 seconds) executed during the small winning game Although the contents of the opening operation of the opening and closing door 650f1 of the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 are defined, for example, in order to shorten the execution period of the small winning game, the first game The contents of the opening operation of the opening/closing door 650f1 of the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 during the small winning game are defined so that the small winning game can be finished before the guidance notification period (4 seconds) elapses. You can

In this case, for example, the opening period of the small winning game is 0.5 seconds, and the opening operation content of the opening and closing door 650f1 after the small winning game is started is 0.2 seconds opening and 0.3 seconds closing. By setting the content of the repeated opening operation, and by configuring so that the small winning game end condition is satisfied when three game balls enter the second variable winning device 650, the initial game guide notification period (4 Seconds), three game balls enter the second variable winning device 650 and the small winning game ends. Then, when the game ball that has won the second variable winning device 650 enters the specific area (V gate) during the small winning game, the big winning game is started after the small winning game ends. When the technical idea of the 32nd control example for reliably executing the first game guide notification regardless of the progress of the game is applied to the pachinko machine 10 configured in this manner, execution of the jackpot game. There is a possibility that the first game guide notification will be executed during the period as well.

In such a case, the display timing of the various display modes may be delayed so that the various display modes to be executed during the jackpot game are displayed after the initial game guidance notification is completed, By shortening the period during which various display modes executed during the jackpot game are displayed, a process of gradually reducing the width of the deviation may be executed, for example, at the time when the initial game guidance notification is completed. discriminating the game situation of the jackpot game, and based on the discriminated game situation, the difference between the timing of displaying a specific display mode in the normal jackpot game and the timing of displaying the specific display mode with a delay. Calculate Then, in order to eliminate the calculated difference, it is preferable to configure so that a shortening process for shortening the display period of various display modes can be executed. With this configuration, even when the initial game guidance notification is executed for a fixed period (4 seconds) regardless of the progress of the game, the game can be continued while all the various display modes to be executed later are displayed. It is possible to make it easier to display a display mode according to the progress.

Also, for example, the game status of the jackpot game at the time when the first game guidance notification is completed is determined, and among the various display modes that are normally displayed, a display mode with a low priority (for example, display during the opening period) By executing the process of canceling the display of the display mode), even if the first game guidance notification is executed for a fixed period (4 seconds) regardless of the progress of the game, various displays to be executed later It may be configured to make it easier to display the display mode according to the progress of the game while displaying all the modes.

As described above, even if there is a discrepancy between the actual game situation and the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot game, the third symbol display device It is preferable that only some of the display modes displayed on the display surface of 81 are displayed in correspondence with the actual game situation.

In addition, in the thirty-second control example, when the game ball is entered into the specific area (V win) during the initial game guidance notification period (4 seconds), as shown in FIG. When the game guidance notification period has passed, it is determined whether or not there is a V prize, and when it is determined that the V prize has been won, the V performance is executed. When a timer is set (for example, set to 4 seconds) for a period until the V effect is executed when a V prize is won during the notification period (4 seconds), and the timer determines that 4 seconds have passed. may be configured to execute the V effect. In other words, the value set in the timer is changed according to the timing of the V winning, and when the V winning occurs during the first game guide notification period, a delay value (for example, 4 seconds) is set in the timer. However, when a V prize is won after the lapse of the first game guidance notification period, a V performance is executed after the V prize is won by setting an immediate effect value (for example, 0.1 second) in the timer. The length of the period from the execution of the small winning game to the V winning may be varied depending on the length of the period required.

By configuring in this way, even if the V prize is won at any timing, the processing contents executed for executing the V effect can be unified. Processing can be simplified.

Next, with reference to Drawing 941 (a), the contents of the change production performed during the final change in the time saving state will be described. FIG. 941(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the last second special symbol variation executed in the time saving state (during rush) is a deviation variation. In this 32nd control example, as shown in FIG. 938(a), a short variation time (1 second) is set as the variation time of the second special symbol variation executed during the time saving state, and during the variation period, A variable performance for indicating the remaining number of times of the second special symbol lottery that can be executed during the time saving state and the result of the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the variation can be executed.

Specifically, when the second special symbol lottery is executed continuously during the time saving state, and if the lottery results are all out, the second special symbol lottery that can be executed during the time saving state A countdown display that changes the display mode of the number icon 808 to ``3'', ``2'', ``1'' at intervals of 1 second corresponding to the remaining number of times is executed, and the final fluctuation of the second special symbol fluctuation in the time saving state is executed. It is configured so that On the other hand, before the final variation of the second special symbol variation in the time saving state is executed, in the case of winning, the number icon 808 displayed as a countdown is destroyed, and a display mode indicating winning is displayed. (see FIG. 938(b)).

In the final variation of the second special symbol variation during the time saving state, it is constructed so that a different variation time can be determined based on the result of the special symbol lottery. In part, it is configured such that a variation pattern with a variation time of 1 second is determined. When this variation pattern is determined, the effect that the number icon 808 is counted down continues until the final variation, and the number icon 808 indicating "0" is destroyed to display a display mode indicating a small win. Variation production is executed.

In addition, when the lottery result is partly winning a small prize or winning a big prize, a variation pattern with a variation time of 20 seconds is determined. When this 20-second variation pattern was determined, the number icon 808 was countdown displayed, and after the number icon 808 indicating "0" was displayed, the number icon 808 was not destroyed during the countdown display. A display mode (for example, "END") indicating that is displayed until 10 seconds have elapsed since the start of the final variation. After that, by terminating the time-saving state with the special figure 2 reservation acquired, a guidance performance (retraction guidance performance) that guides the player that it is possible to execute the second special symbol lottery in the normal state. is executed, and a display mode for showing that the result of the second special symbol lottery being executed is winning (small winning or big winning) is displayed in the middle of the guidance presentation.

Finally, when the result of the second special symbol lottery, which is the final variation of the time saving state, is out, the variation pattern of 30 seconds is determined. When this 30-second variation pattern is determined, similarly to the 20-second variation pattern described above, a countdown display of the number icon 808 is executed, and after the number icon 808 indicating "0" is displayed, the countdown is performed. A display mode (for example, "END") indicating that the number icon 808 was not destroyed during display is displayed until 10 seconds have passed since the final change was started. After that, by terminating the time-saving state with the special figure 2 reservation acquired, a guidance performance (retraction guidance performance) that guides the player that it is possible to execute the second special symbol lottery in the normal state. is executed. Then, after the guidance effect is completed, a reserved ball acquisition effect (FINAL charge effect) for guiding the acquisition of the special figure 2 reserve is executed.

FIG. 941(a) is a display screen displayed when the FINAL charge effect is being executed, and is displayed when the upper limit number (1) of the special figure 2 hold is obtained during the FINAL charge effect. It is the figure which showed an example of a screen. As shown in FIG. 941(a), when the FINAL charge effect is executed, a display region HR11 is formed near the center of the main display region Dm, and "FINAL CHARGE" is displayed to indicate that the FINAL charge effect is being executed. "Medium" is displayed. In the display area Dm10, in order to guide the entry of a game ball into the second ball entrance 640, the vicinity of the game board 13 where the second ball entrance 640 is arranged is simulated. An image is displayed. The image displayed in the display area Dm10 is intended to allow the player to visually grasp that the game ball is currently in a state where it is easy to enter the game ball into the second ball entry port 640 (normal pattern high probability state). , an image (luminous display in the figure) emphasizing that the electric accessory 640a is in the guided state is displayed.

Further, in the sub-display area Ds, characters of "accumulate charges within time" are displayed as a guidance mode for guiding the player to the game method during the FINAL charge effect. Further, a third time gauge ga3 is displayed below the display area HR10 to indicate the remaining period of the effect period during which the FINAL charge effect is executed. The display mode of the third time gauge ga3 is composed of a remaining period display ga3a for indicating the remaining period and an elapsed period display ga3b for indicating the elapsed period. The display mode of the third time gauge ga3 is configured to vary so that the proportion of the elapsed time display ga3b increases and the proportion of the remaining time display ga3a decreases with the passage of time.

In addition, the example shown in FIG. 941(a) shows the point in time when 3 seconds have passed since the FINAL charge effect was executed. A state is displayed in which the elapsed period display ga3b indicates a range of 3 seconds, and the remaining period display ga3a indicates a range of 4 seconds.

A status display mode for indicating the game status during the FINAL charge effect is displayed on the lower side of the main display area Dm. The diagram shown in FIG. 941 (a) is a state in which 3 seconds have passed since the FINAL charge effect was executed, and the game ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640, and the special figure 2 hold is the upper limit. Since it is in a state where the number has been obtained, the characters "charging complete" are displayed as the status display mode.

Here, the display contents of the status display mode displayed on the lower side of the main display area Dm will be described. In this situation display mode, when the FINAL charge effect is executed, if the special figure 2 hold has not been acquired to the upper limit, the characters "uncharged state" are displayed, and the player is informed that the current state is It is configured to be able to notify in an easy-to-understand manner that the special figure 2 reservation has not been acquired to the upper limit number.

The display of this "uncharged state" is always displayed until a predetermined period (1 second) elapses after the FINAL charge effect is executed. In other words, even if 0.5 seconds have passed since the FINAL charge effect was executed, even if the special figure 2 hold is acquired to the upper limit, the "uncharged state" will be displayed continuously for 1 second. Configure. After the "uncharged state" is continuously displayed for one second, the characters "charging completed" indicating that the special figure 2 hold has been acquired up to the upper limit number are displayed. On the other hand, when 1 second has passed since the FINAL charge effect was executed, if the special figure 2 hold has not been acquired to the upper limit, the display of "uncharged state" until the special figure 2 hold reaches the upper limit is continued, and the characters "charge complete" are displayed when the special figure 2 hold is acquired to the upper limit.

In addition, since this FINAL charge effect is executed when 20 seconds or more have passed since the final variation of the second special symbol variation in the time saving state started, the special figure 2 suspension has already been acquired to the upper limit number. In some cases, the FINAL charge effect is executed while the character is present. Even in this case, the characters "uncharged" are displayed until one second elapses after the FINAL charge effect is executed, and then the characters "charged" are displayed.

In this way, even if the special figure 2 suspension is acquired to the maximum number, the special figure 2 suspension is acquired to the maximum number from the state where the special figure 2 suspension is not acquired to the maximum number during the FINAL charge production It is possible to notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the player has acquired the special figure 2 hold up to the upper limit number by configuring the display mode to be able to display the display mode that pseudo-shows that the state has shifted to the can.

In addition, in this 32nd control example, regardless of the acquisition status of the special figure 2 reservation, it is configured to execute the FINAL charge effect during the final change of the time saving state, but not limited to this, the FINAL charge effect At the execution timing of , when the special figure 2 suspension has already been acquired up to the upper limit number, it may be configured not to execute the FINAL charge effect. By configuring in this way, the FINAL charge performance is executed in a state in which a new special figure 2 reservation cannot be obtained, and the player is prevented from executing a right-handed game unnecessarily. can be done.

In addition, it may be configured to vary the effect mode during the FINAL charge effect according to the acquisition status of the special figure 2 pending at the timing when the FINAL charge effect is executed, for example, the timing when the FINAL charge effect is executed. , if the special figure 2 reservation has not been acquired to the upper limit number, as described above, it is configured to execute the FINAL charge production in the production mode for acquiring the special figure 2 reservation to the upper limit number, and the FINAL At the timing when the charge effect is executed, if the special figure 2 hold is acquired up to the upper limit number, the game ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 during the FINAL charge effect, so that it has been acquired. It may be configured to execute the FINAL charge effect in an effect mode that can suggest the prefetch result of the special figure 2 hold of 1 to the player.

By configuring in this way, even if the FINAL charge effect is executed in a state where it is not possible to acquire a new special figure 2 reservation, the second executed based on the acquired special figure 2 reservation In order to quickly perceive the result of the 2 special symbol lottery, it is possible to motivate the player to enter a game ball into the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to improve the operation of the game.

In addition, as in the 32nd control example, even if it is configured to execute the FINAL charge effect in the effect mode for acquiring the special figure 2 reservation up to the upper limit number, the special figure 2 reservation is up to the upper limit number After winning, when the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 (so-called, when over winning), FINAL charge in a production mode that can suggest to the player the look-ahead result of the acquired special figure 2 hold. You may comprise so that production may be performed. With this configuration, the player can be motivated to enter a game ball into the second ball entrance 640 while the FINAL charge effect is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the operation of the game. In addition, it is possible to execute the FINAL charge effect that overlaps the effect mode for acquiring the special figure 2 suspension up to the upper limit number and the effect mode that can suggest the prefetch result of the acquired special figure 2 suspension to the player. may be configured.

As described above, in this 32nd control example, when the result of the corresponding second special symbol lottery is a small hit as the variation pattern of the final variation of the second special symbol variation executed during the time saving state is configured to be able to set a variation pattern with a relatively short variation time (1 second) and a variation pattern with a long variation time (20 seconds). In other words, as the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation that has been won during the time saving state, the second special symbol variation that is the final variation of the time saving state rather than the second special symbol variation that does not become the final variation of the time saving state is configured to facilitate setting of a longer fluctuation time. By constructing in this way, when the small winning is won in the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state, the number of execution times of the big winning game per unit time is greatly varied according to the variation frequency of winning the small winning. be able to.

Therefore, for the player, in order not only to aim for the small winning in the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state, but also to increase the number of times the big winning game is executed per unit time, the number of fluctuations is as small as possible. It is possible to play a game aiming at winning by winning.

In addition, in this 32nd control example, the second special symbol variation which is the final variation of the time saving state and the final variation of the time saving state are used as the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation that is executed during the time saving state. By making it easy to set a longer variation time than the second special symbol variation that does not occur, the previous big winning game is completed according to the number of second special symbol variations executed until the small winning is won. The period required until the next small winning game is started is designed to greatly diverge from , but without being limited to this, as a variation pattern of the second special symbol variation that is executed during the time saving state and wins the small winning It may be configured such that the same variation time (for example, 1 second) is set. Even in this case, the period from the end of the previous big win game to the start of the next small win game is lengthened as the number of second special symbol variations executed during the time saving state increases. Therefore, in order to increase the number of times the big winning game is executed per unit time, the player can be made to play a game aiming at winning a small winning with as few variation times as possible.

Furthermore, in this 32nd control example, in a part of the case where the second special symbol variation that is the final variation of the time saving state is the second special symbol variation that has won the small hit, it is the same as the other second special symbol variation is configured to select a variation pattern in which a short variation time (1 second) is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a variation effect (countdown display) using a variation pattern of a short variation time, targeting up to the final variation of the time saving state.

In addition, when a small hit is won in the final fluctuation of the time saving state, it takes from the end of the previous big hit game to the start of the next small hit game according to the type of the set fluctuation pattern. Since the period can be greatly different, not only the result of the second special symbol lottery executed in the final fluctuation of the time saving state, but also Variation patterns can also be of interest.

In addition, in the second special symbol variation, which is the final variation of the time saving state, as the variation pattern set when the small hit is won, a variation pattern with a different variation time is configured to be selectable, so the second special symbol By grasping the fluctuation time of the fluctuation, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether or not the small winning is won.

That is, when only the variation pattern of a short variation time (for example, 1 second) can be set for the second special symbol variation (special figure 2 final variation) that is the final variation of the time saving state, special figure 2 Until the player grasps that the special figure 2 final variation being executed has not won a small hit at the time when the variation time of the final variation has passed 1 second, and the special figure 2 final variation is stopped and displayed. However, as in the 32nd control example, a variation pattern with a different variation time can be set as the variation pattern of the special figure 2 final variation in which the small hit is won. By doing so, it is possible to provide a plurality of timings at which it is possible to grasp whether or not a small prize has been won, so it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether or not a small prize has been won.

As described above, in the 32nd control example, as the variation pattern set to the special figure 2 final variation, the variation pattern set in the case of winning is the longest variation time (30 seconds) variation It is configured so that a pattern is set. Then, using the remaining 10 seconds for the variation pattern (30 seconds variation) of the special figure 2 final variation that has been lost and won, the right to execute the second special symbol lottery for the player (special figure 2 reserved ) is executed (FINAL charge effect).

By configuring in this way, when the winning game is executed after the special figure 2 final variation is stopped and displayed (when the special figure 2 final variation is a small hit variation or a big hit variation), the hit When the time saving state is set again after the game is over, that is, when a period (time saving state) in which a new special figure 2 reservation can be acquired later is set, the FINAL charge effect is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the useless right-handed game for acquiring the special figure 2 reservation.

In addition, without being limited to the configuration in the 32nd control example, for example, when the special figure 2 final variation is a per variation, the variation time (30 seconds) of the same length as when it is an off variation, or off It may be configured such that a variation pattern with a longer variation time (for example, 40 seconds) can be set.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a winning variation to the player who is prepared that the special figure 2 final variation is an off variation, so that a game with unexpectedness can be provided. Also, in this case, the FINAL charge effect may be executed even during the winning variation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier to execute a jackpot game in a state where the special figure 2 reservation is acquired, so that the prefetch result (preliminary determination result) for the acquired special figure 2 reservation is suggested to the player. It is possible to make it easy to execute an effect for (holding consecutive effect) during a jackpot game.

Then, the second special symbol variation, which is the final variation in the time saving state, is stopped and displayed, and after the normal state is set, the second special symbol variation based on the special figure 2 hold acquired during the time saving state is started. Then, the pull-back effect shown in FIG. 941(b) is executed. FIG. 941(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the pullback effect.

Since the pull-back effect shown in FIG. 941(b) is a variable effect executed during the normal state, the display area Dm4 in which the guidance mode for guiding the game method to the player is displayed is not displayed. Become. As a result, it is possible to suppress the continuation of the right-handed game that has been executed during the time-saving state during the pulling-back performance that is executed after the time-saving state ends.

In addition, the second special symbol lottery corresponding to this pull-back effect (the second special symbol lottery executed in the normal state) has the same probability as the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state (about 1/2 ), so that the winning game (small winning game, big winning game) is executed after the pullback production, so that there is a high possibility that the player will play the right-handed game, so the normal state is set, the guidance information for switching the game method to the left-handed game is not executed.

By configuring in this way, the player who changes the game method according to the guidance information of the game method to be executed is prevented from losing the desire to play due to frequently switching between the right-handed game and the left-handed game. can do.

In the thirty-second control example, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is configured so as not to display the guidance information for guiding the game method to the player while the pull-back effect is being executed. However, without being limited to this, it is configured to display the guidance notification indicating "right hitting" in a display mode different from the display mode of "right hitting" which is the guidance notification executed during the time saving state. Alternatively, for example, instead of the guidance notification executed during the time saving state, the guidance notification may be executed in a display mode that is difficult for the player to identify, and the right-handed game may be executed again after the pullback effect is completed. It may be configured so that the player can be notified that the probability is high.

Furthermore, as a guidance notification displayed while the pullback effect is being executed, a display mode (for example, a display of "Please stop launching the game ball") is displayed to guide the game method for interrupting the shooting of the game ball. Further, a display mode (for example, display of ``right-handed game for successful pull-back, left-handed game for unsuccessful pull-back'') is displayed in which a game method corresponding to the performance result of the pull-back performance can be guided in advance. It should be configured as follows. By configuring in this manner, the game method to be executed next can be guided in advance to the player based on the performance result of the pullback performance, so that the game can be provided to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, based on the result of the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the pull-back effect, the display mode of the guidance information executed during the pull-back effect may be changed. When the result of the 2 special symbol lottery is winning, it is preferable to emphasize the display mode of "right hitting" for guiding the right hitting game rather than the case of losing. By configuring in this way, based on the display mode of the guidance notification executed during the pull-back performance, the game situation in which the case where the right-handed game is continued is more advantageous than the case where it is not continued, that is, the pull-back performance It is possible to notify in an easy-to-understand manner that the game situation is such that a winning game is executed after the end of .

When the pull-back effect is executed, a button Pu simulating the effect button 22a is displayed in the main display area Dm, and an effect for making the player press the effect button 22a (in the figure, prompts the player to press the button Pu). showing a downward arrow) is executed. Below the button Pu, a time gauge ga1 is displayed for indicating the length of the operation effective period during which the player's pressing operation on the effect button 22a can be effectively determined. Note that the display mode of the time gauge ga1 shown in FIG. 941(b) and the variable contents of the display mode are the same as those of the time gauge ga1 shown in FIG. 934(b) described above. is omitted.

In addition, in the diagram shown in FIG. 941(b), the button Pu is displayed in the normal display mode, but the display mode of the button Pu or the Alternatively, the presentation mode of the pull-back presentation, such as the display mode of the presentation (indicated by an arrow in the figure) for making the player press the presentation button 22a, may be varied. As a presentation mode that is more likely to be selected than when it is out, the display mode of the button Pu is a special display mode (for example, a display mode that imitates a button with a thickness or a display in which the color of the button Pu is red). mode), and the display mode of the displayed arrow is a special display mode (a display mode in which the size of the arrow is larger than usual, or a display mode in which the color of the arrow is red). It should be configured as possible.

By configuring in this way, the effect result of the pull-back effect (lottery result of the corresponding special pattern lottery) is predicted at a stage before the player presses the effect button 22a during the period when the pull-back effect is being executed. It becomes possible to do so, and the production effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, the display area Dm8 in which the duration display for indicating the duration of the time saving state (rush) is displayed is hidden. In this 32nd control example, if there is a special figure 2 hold when the time saving state ends and the normal state is set, that is, if the pullback effect is executed, the counter used for the duration display ( When the value of the rush period measuring counter 223m) is continuously updated without being cleared, and is won in the second special symbol lottery in which the pullback performance is executed, and the time saving state is restored. , the duration display is also configured to continue.

In this way, even if the value of the counter (the rush period measuring counter 223m) used for the duration display is continuously updated, the duration display is not executed while the pullback effect is being executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp that the time saving state (rush) has ended, so compared to the case where the continuous period display is continued even during the execution period of the withdrawal effect , it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp that a game is being executed to enter the time saving state (rush) again from the state in which the time saving state (rush) has ended. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to pay attention to the effect content of the pull-back effect.

Then, when the player presses the performance button 22a during the pullback performance, the performance result based on the result of the corresponding second special symbol lottery is displayed. Specifically, when the result of the corresponding second special symbol lottery is winning, a display mode (for example, display of "V") for indicating winning is displayed immediately after pressing the production button 22a. After that, a display screen similar to the display screen (see FIG. 938(b)) at the time of winning a small hit during the time saving state is displayed.

Next, the contents of the effect when the result of the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the pullback effect is lost will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 942(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when a failure effect corresponding to a case where the result of the corresponding second special symbol lottery is a loss is executed as a pullback effect. 942(b) is a diagram showing an example of the game result display screen displayed after the failure effect is executed as the withdrawal effect.

When the player presses the effect button 22a in the pull-back effect in which the result of the corresponding second special symbol lottery is lost, as shown in FIG. V”) is not displayed, and the standing character 801 is displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, characters of "Unfortunately! Rush is over!" are displayed as a guidance mode for indicating that the rush period (time saving state) is over.

The display screen shown in FIG. 942(a) is displayed, and when the pull-back effect that is a failure effect ends, the game result display screen shown in FIG. 942(b) is displayed. On this game result display screen, as a result of the game executed during the time saving state (rush), an acquired point display k1 indicating a value corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the time saving state (rush), and a time saving A duration display k2 indicating the period during which the state (rush) continued, a rush continuation number display k3 indicating the number of times the time saving state (rush) was set (reset) through a jackpot game, and a time saving state period of 1 ( A jackpot number display k4 indicating the number of jackpot games executed during the rush period) is displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 942(b), "total 660 points" is displayed as the acquired point display k1, "00:36:44" is displayed as the duration display k2, and "1 rush" is displayed as the rush duration display k3. ” is displayed, and “bonus 0 times” is displayed as the number of big wins display k4. That is, in the time-saving state (rush) executed this time, the time-saving jackpot game of six rounds executed based on the jackpot winning in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state is executed once, and the jackpot is executed. A game result in which no jackpot game was executed in the time saving state (rush) set after the end of the game is displayed, and it is displayed that 36 seconds have elapsed since the time saving state was set. ing.

Then, of the display mode indicating the period during which the time saving state (rush) continued indicated by the duration display k2, the value k2a in the two digits from the right, which corresponds to a unit smaller than the unit of seconds, is regardless of the actual elapsed period. Instead, it is configured to be determined based on the result of the second special symbol lottery, which is the target of the pull-back effect, and when the result of the lottery is a win, the value k2a is displayed in a "zorome" display mode. is displayed, and when the result of the lottery is a loss, the value k2a is displayed in the display mode of "random".

In the diagram shown in FIG. 942(b), "44" is displayed as the value k2a displayed as the duration display k2. That is, the display screen shown in FIG. 942(b) is displayed when the result of the second special symbol lottery being executed is winning and the failure effect is set in the pullback effect. In this way, in a part of the case where the result of the second special symbol lottery targeted for the pull-back production is winning, the failure production is executed as the pull-back production, and after the game result display screen is displayed, the winning is made. Even after the failure effect is displayed in the pullback effect, the player can play the game while expecting to win the prize by configuring the revival effect to notify the player of the fact that the player is in a state of being able to execute the resurrection effect. can.

Here, in this 32nd control example, although the result of the second special symbol lottery, which is the target of the pull-back effect, is a win, the target of the pull-back effect is the condition for executing the above-described resurrection effect. A condition is established when a specific lottery result is obtained in the lottery for determining the performance mode of the variable performance executed at the timing when the second special symbol variation is started, but it is not limited to this, It may be possible to set conditions to be established based on the timing at which the player presses the effect button 22a in the pull-back effect. In this case, for example, when the effect button 22a is pressed in a state in which the remaining period of the operation valid period set during the pullback effect is longer than the predetermined period, that is, the remaining variation time of the second special symbol variation being executed When the effect button 22a is pressed with a large amount remaining, it is preferable that the resurrection effect is executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the success effect from continuing for a long time and the effect of the effect from deteriorating when the effect button 22a is pressed early during the pull-back effect.

In addition, since the game result display screen is a display mode for indicating to the player that the time saving state has ended, a display area Dm4 is formed to guide the left-handed game, which is an appropriate game method during the normal state. "Left hit" for is displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, characters of "Thank you for your hard work" are displayed as a guidance mode for guiding that the time-saving state (rush) has ended. With this configuration, when the display screen shown in FIG. 942(b) is displayed, it is possible to make the player strongly think that the game period advantageous to the player has ended, so the resurrection effect is executed. The unexpectedness of the case can be strengthened.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 943 to 946, the effect contents of the jackpot game effect executed during the jackpot game in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-second control example will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the 32nd control example, during the execution period of the jackpot game (jackpot game during the rush) executed based on the jackpot winning in the second special symbol lottery during the time saving state (during the rush), the jackpot A jackpot game performance (promoting performance) for announcing the game contents (number of rounds) of the game and a jackpot for informing that the second special symbol lottery executed after the jackpot game is won (small win) is won. A game effect (holding continuous effect) is executable, and the effect screen of the same mode is displayed regardless of whether the promotion effect or the holding continuous effect is executed. there is By configuring in this way, when the jackpot game production is executed, the production result of the jackpot game executed this time becomes the production result indicating the game contents (number of rounds) of the jackpot game, or after the jackpot game is finished. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict whether the effect result indicating that the possibility of executing the big win game again is high (holding consecutive state). Therefore, it is possible to easily make the player interested in the performance contents of the jackpot game performance to be executed.

In addition, in this 32nd control example, when the holding continuous production is executed as the jackpot game production, as the jackpot game production of the big winning game based on the special figure reservation which is the production target of the executed holding continuous production. , is configured to facilitate execution of the holding consecutive effect again. In other words, as a condition for executing the holding consecutive production as a jackpot game production, the special figure reservation that has been acquired by the predetermined timing of the jackpot game (for example, the start timing of the final round game) is a special symbol lottery. FIG. 1 is a first condition that is satisfied when the suspension is established, and when the first condition is satisfied, execution of the suspension continuous performance is performed in the processing for determining whether or not to execute the suspension continuous performance as the jackpot game performance. A second condition that is established when the decision is made and a second condition that is established when both are established, the holding consecutive production is executed, and a state in which the holding consecutive production is being executed (a jackpot game notified by the holding consecutive production) (during a jackpot game in which the execution right was acquired during the small winning game notified by the pending continuous effect), the second condition is satisfied than when the pending continuous effect is not executed. It is designed to be easy. That is, when the first condition is established, the possibility of execution of the holding continuous effect being determined is increased.

By constructing in this way, the player who once executed the holding consecutive effect can play the game with a desire to continuously execute the holding consecutive effect. Furthermore, in the 32nd control example, when the holding continuous effect is continuously executed, the information indicating the game content of the jackpot game is accumulated, and the display mode indicating the accumulated information can be displayed. It consists of Specifically, the display mode for displaying the number of round games executed during the jackpot game is configured to display cumulatively. By configuring in this way, when the holding continuous effect is executed continuously, the display mode in which the number of round games executed in the jackpot game is accumulated is displayed as the display mode of the number of round games. will be By configuring in this way, the player can be motivated to play the game with the aim of displaying a display mode corresponding to a larger number of rounds as the display mode of the number of rounds played.

In addition, in this 32nd control example, when the information regarding the game content of the jackpot game accumulated in the case where the holding consecutive effects are executed continuously satisfies a predetermined condition, the privilege effect can be executed. ing. Specifically, as the display mode of the number of round games, when the display mode corresponding to the number of rounds larger than the maximum number of round games that can be executed in one jackpot game (for example, 9 rounds) is displayed. , a congratulatory performance for congratulating the player for the consecutive execution of the holding consecutive performances can be executed.

By constructing in this way, not only the player who is playing the game but also the players around him can be informed that the holding continuous effect is continuously being executed. , the game can be played with a sense of superiority.

In addition, in this 32nd control example, the number of round games is accumulated when the holding consecutive effects are continuously executed. In the pachinko machine 10 configured to be played back, the number of consecutive executions of holding consecutive performances may be accumulated, and music to be played back may be switched according to the accumulated number of times, or a big win may be achieved. If the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the player can select a piece of music to be played back during the game from among a plurality of pieces of music, the player selects the piece according to the cumulative number of successive executions of the holding consecutive performance. It may be configured to increase the types of possible music. In addition, when the cumulative number of successive executions of the holding consecutive effects reaches a specific number (for example, 5 times), a specific congratulatory music is played without the player's selection. You can

By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide music that cannot be reproduced unless the suspension continuous effect is continuously executed a predetermined number of times. It is possible to motivate the player to play the game in order to execute the continuous performance. In addition, in the above-described example, the music played during the jackpot game is taken as an example, but without being limited to this, the above-described technical concept can be applied to still images and moving images displayed during the jackpot game. Alternatively, the technical concept described above may be applied to the effect mode itself of the holding consecutive effect.

FIG. 943(a) is a view showing a display screen displayed when the NEXT effect is executed as a jackpot game effect, and FIG. 943(b) shows the effect result of the NEXT effect added to the player. FIG. 944(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed in the case of a production result in which no privilege is awarded. FIG. FIG. 944(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the effect result is that an additional benefit for indicating an increase is granted, and FIG. 944(b) shows that the effect result of the NEXT effect is is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the effect result is that an additional privilege for indicating that is executed. In addition, among the display elements displayed in each figure (the display elements displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot game), the same display elements as described in the above-described control examples Contents are given the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

When the second round game of the jackpot game (3-round jackpot game or 9-round jackpot game) executed during the rush period is executed, as shown in FIG. Characters of NEXT indicating that the NEXT effect is started are displayed in the central part, and the effect result is displayed in a display area Dm9 formed below the character and for displaying the effect result of the NEXT effect. is displayed (an arrow in the figure). Then, in the sub-display area Ds, characters of "What is the additional privilege?" are displayed as a guidance mode for guiding the player that the NEXT effect has been executed.

In this 32nd control example, among the jackpot games executed during the time saving state, the final round game (third round round game) in the 3-round jackpot game in which the minimum number of round games are executed is the round before one A NEXT effect is started in a game (second round round game), and in a round game (third round round game) to be executed after the round game (second round round game) in which the NEXT effect is executed. It is configured so that the effect result of the NEXT effect is displayed. That is, the number of rounds in which the NEXT effect is executed is the specific number of rounds (second round) regardless of the number of rounds of the jackpot game executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the timing (the number of rounds) at which the NEXT effect is executed during the jackpot game.

Then, when the round game (third round round game) in which the effect result of the NEXT effect is displayed is started, a display mode for indicating the effect result of the NEXT effect is displayed. Here, when the jackpot game being executed is a 3-round jackpot game and there is no special figure 2 reservation indicating winning in the special figure 2 reservation acquired at the time when the round game of the 3rd round is started 943(b), because neither the display condition for determining the effect result indicating the round promotion nor the display condition for determining the effect result indicating the holding group as the effect result of the NEXT effect is satisfied. As you can see, in the display area Dm9, the characters "continue rush" are displayed as the effect result of the NEXT effect.

In this 32nd control example, after the jackpot game executed during the rush period is completed, the time saving state is always set (the rush is configured to continue). As shown in 943(b), when neither the display condition for determining the effect result indicating promotion to the round nor the display condition for determining the effect result indicating the holding group is satisfied, that is, an additional privilege is given to the player. Even if (round promotion, pending group) is not given, the display mode (“continue rush”) for showing basic information (setting of time saving state) that is advantageous to the player as a result of the NEXT production configured to be displayed.

By configuring in this way, an additional privilege that the rush period continues is given to the player who does not understand that the time saving state is always set after the end of the jackpot game executed during the rush period. I can make you think. Also, as shown in FIG. 943(b), when "continue rush" is displayed as the effect result of the NEXT effect, the sub display area Ds displays the game method corresponding to the current effect result to the player. As a guidance mode for guidance, characters of "Rush back the win" are displayed.

In the diagram shown in FIG. 943(b), "final round" is displayed in the display area Dm5, but this display is displayed after the effect result of the NEXT effect is displayed in the display area Dm9. It consists of Although detailed illustration is omitted, when "continue rush" is displayed as the effect result of the NEXT effect, when the third round game is started, the display area Dm5 shows the third round game. "Round 3" is displayed as a display mode for indicating that the has started. Then, after the display mode ("continue rush") for indicating the effect result is displayed in the display area Dm9 where the effect mode (arrow in the figure) is displayed until the effect result is displayed, the display area Dm5 is displayed. , is configured to be switched from "Round 3" to "Last Round".

With this configuration, the player can understand that the current jackpot game is a 3-round jackpot game by the display mode displayed in the display area Dm5 before the effect result of the NEXT effect is displayed. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the performance effect of the NEXT presentation. Furthermore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp that the round game being executed is the final round, compared to the case where "Round 3" is continuously displayed even after the effect result of the NEXT effect is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the abrupt end of the jackpot game.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to display "last round" in the display area Dm5 from the start of the third round. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to grasp that the jackpot game being executed is a three-round jackpot game before the effect result of the NEXT effect is displayed. A player can predict while limiting the options of the effect result that can be displayed as the effect result of the effect. Therefore, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting the effect result of the NEXT effect using display elements other than the NEXT effect.

In this case, for example, as an effect mode for displaying the effect result of the NEXT effect, a plurality of display modes that can be the effect result of the NEXT effect are displayed, and one of the display modes is displayed as the final effect. Aspects should be configured to be executable. By configuring in this way, the content of the privilege indicated by the plurality of display modes that can be the result of the effect displayed in the middle of the NEXT effect and the information indicating the content of the current jackpot game (three-round jackpot game) are displayed. By performing a composite analysis, it is possible for the player to quickly identify the display mode to be displayed as the effect result of the NEXT effect, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect.

Further, among the additional benefits shown as the effect result of the NEXT effect, any information related to the effect other than the content of the jackpot game (the number of round games played) can be notified before the effect result of the NEXT effect is displayed. Also good.

On the other hand, when an effect result for indicating that the number of rounds of the jackpot game is other than 3 rounds (9 rounds) is displayed as the effect result of the NEXT effect (when the promotion effect is executed), FIG. As shown in a), the display area Dm9 displays "Rush promotion" as the effect result for indicating that the content of the jackpot game is not a 3-round game, and the sub-display area Ds displays "Rush promotion". Characters of "Congratulations on the promotion to the 9th round jackpot" are displayed as a guidance mode for guiding the game content when the effect result is displayed.

In this case, since the third round game in which the effect result of the NEXT effect is displayed is in the middle of the jackpot game (9-round jackpot game) being executed, even after the effect result of the NEXT effect is displayed. , "Round 3" is continuously displayed in the display area Dm5.

Also, as the effect result of the NEXT effect, the effect result (when the pending continuous effect is executed) for indicating that the special figure 2 reservation for indicating the winning is included in the special figure 2 reservation that has already been acquired As shown in FIG. 944(b), the display area Dm9 displays "Bonus" as a result of rendering indicating that the player is on hold, and the sub-display area Ds displays the result of "Bonus" rendering. The characters "Congratulations on the continuous bonus" are displayed as a guidance mode for guiding the game content when the game is played.

Here, the example shown in FIG. 944(b) shows the display screen displayed when the holding continuous effect is executed as the effect result of the NEXT effect executed during the 3-round jackpot game. Therefore, the round game in which the effect result of the NEXT effect is displayed is the final round game in the jackpot game being executed. However, in this 32nd control example, when the holding continuous effect is executed, the display mode (the number of rounds displayed in the display area Dm5) indicating the game content of the jackpot game being executed is handed over to the next jackpot game. It is configured to display in Therefore, "round 3" is displayed in the display area Dm5, and "final round" indicating the final round of the jackpot game being executed is not displayed.

By configuring in this way, when the holding consecutive production is executed, the jackpot game being executed and the jackpot game to be executed next (the winning game targeted for the holding consecutive production) are one jackpot game. You can make it easier to think that it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 945, the effect contents after execution of the holding consecutive effect will be described. FIG. 945(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during a small winning game, which is the target of the holding continuous effect, when the holding continuous effect is executed during the jackpot game, FIG. 945(b) shows an example of the display screen displayed when the holding consecutive effect is executed again (when the holding consecutive effect is executed continuously) during the jackpot game targeted for the holding continuous effect. FIG. 946 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during a special effect that is executed based on continuous execution of holding consecutive effects.

When the jackpot game in which the holding consecutive effect shown in FIG. 944(b) is executed ends, the second special symbol lottery based on the special figure 2 holding already acquired is executed. In this 32nd control example, since it is configured to be able to store at most one special figure 2 hold, when the hold continuous effect is executed, the first second special symbol lottery after the end of the jackpot game is performed. Winning (small winning, jackpot winning) will be won. The period (special symbol fluctuation period) until the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed is configured to be a short period (1 second), and during the special symbol fluctuation period, the figure 944 ( The display screen shown in b) continues to be displayed.

Then, after the end of the jackpot game, the first second special symbol lottery is stop-displayed in a display mode indicating that the jackpot is won, and when the jackpot game is started, the display screen shown in FIG. 945(a) is displayed. . As shown in FIG. 945(a), the display screen displayed during the normal small winning game which is not the object of the holding consecutive production during the small winning game targeted for the holding consecutive production (see FIG. 939(a)) It is configured so that a different display screen is displayed.

Specifically, the display mode "Round 4" for indicating the number of rounds obtained by adding 1 to the number of rounds displayed in the previous jackpot game is displayed in the display area Dm5. Also, normally, the arrow 810 with the characters "Aim right" displayed large in the center of the main display area Dm is not displayed, and instead, "Aim V" is displayed in the display area Dm11. characters are displayed. In the center of the main display area Dm, a character 801a for indicating that the jackpot game is continuing, that is, the display displayed during the previous jackpot game as shown in FIG. The character 801a, which is the mode, is continuously displayed.

In this way, by continuing to display at least a part of the display modes displayed during the previous big win game, even when the big win game is executed a plurality of times, one To make it easy for a player to think that big winning games are continuously executed.

In addition, by changing the display mode ("Aim right", "Aim for V") indicating the content of the game during the small winning game, it is possible to tell that the present is not a small winning game but a part of the big winning game. It is possible to make it easy for the player to think. In addition, in this 32nd control example, the display screen (see FIG. 939 (a)) that is displayed during the normal small winning game that is not the target of the holding continuous production, and the small winning game that is the target of the holding continuous production The displayed display screen (see FIG. 945 (a)) and the display mode showing the game content during the small winning game (“Aim right”, “Aim V”) are different. Without limitation, for example, the arrow 810 may be displayed in a smaller size during a small winning game to be the target of the holding continuous effect than during other small winning games.

By entering the game ball into the specific area (V gate) 650e3 during the small winning game shown in FIG. 945 (a), when the big winning game is executed after the small winning game ends, FIG. As shown in b), in the display area Dm5, a display mode is displayed in which the number of rounds of the previous big winning game and the number of round games executed in the previous small winning game are accumulated. .

The display screen shown in FIG. 945(b) is a display screen showing the final round (3rd round) of the 3-round big winning game, in which the 3-round big winning game is executed after the end of the small winning game targeted for the holding continuous effect. is. Therefore, "Round 7" is displayed in the display area Dm5. Then, as the effect result of the NEXT effect, it is in a state where the holding continuous effect is being executed. When the holding consecutive effects are executed continuously, "Round 8" is displayed in the display area Dm9 as the effect result of the NEXT production, and a character corresponding to the number of consecutive holding continuous effects is displayed. 801a and 801b are displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 946, the display mode of the display area Dm5 displayed during the jackpot game is changed to the maximum number of rounds (9 rounds) in one jackpot game due to the continuous execution of the holding consecutive effects. When the special display mode ("Round 10") indicating the number of rounds larger than "MAX over" is displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, characters of "How long will this jackpot last?" are displayed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the jackpot game is being continuously executed. In the 32nd control example, as a condition for displaying the special display mode, the accumulated value of the number of round games during the period in which the holding continuous effect is continuously executed is executed in one jackpot game. There is a condition that is established when the upper limit of the number of round games to be obtained is exceeded, but without being limited to this, the cumulative value of the number of round games during the period in which the continuous suspension continuous effect is being executed is a specific number ( For example, a multiple of 10), or when the number of consecutive executions of the holding consecutive effect exceeds a specific number (for example, 5 times), or a display showing the number of prize balls acquired during the rush period A condition may be provided that is established when the number of points displayed in the area Dm6 reaches a specific number (for example, 10000P).

In addition, as a special display mode, a plurality of display modes can be displayed step by step, and the condition for displaying each display mode is set to , the number of consecutive executions of the holding streak effect is a specific number, and the point display displayed in the display area Dm6 indicating the number of prize balls obtained during the rush period is stepped with respect to the specific number. , and a different display mode may be displayed step by step each time the display condition provided step by step is established.

By configuring in this way, the player can be motivated to play the game in order to display more diverse special display modes.

Next, with reference to FIG. 947, the display screen displayed when setting the game environment in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-second control example will be described. In this 32nd control example, as an operation for changing the game environment of the pachinko machine 10, a volume level selection operation that allows selection of the volume level of the sound output from the audio output device 226 from four levels, A light amount level operation that can select the light amount level of the backlight of the LED for decorative light emission and the liquid crystal display provided in the third pattern display device 81 from four levels, and the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 and a mode type selection operation for changing the frequency of switching the type of presentation mode (stage type) to be displayed.

When the pachinko machine 10 is not being played (standby state), the display screen shown in FIG. 947(a) is displayed. FIG. 947(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the standby state. As shown in FIG. 947(a), during the standby state, the currently set stage type ("rabbit stage" in the figure) is displayed in the display area Dm5, and the currently set mode type ( "Normal mode" in the figure) is displayed, and in the display area Dm1, a display mode ("316" in the figure) showing the result of the last executed special symbol lottery is displayed as a display mode indicating that the game is not currently in progress. ) is displayed.

A display area HR1 for volume adjustment, a display area HR2 for light amount adjustment, and a display area HR3 for mode type selection are formed below the main display area Dm. In the display area HR1, a display mode indicating a selectable range (LV1 to LV4 (MAX)) as the volume level and a display mode indicating the currently set volume level (displayed in black in the figure) are displayed. , and below it, as a display mode for showing the operation method for changing the volume level, it is indicated that the volume level can be changed by operating the right button 600c or the left button 600e of the selection buttons 600. For purposes of illustration, a right button icon Sw2 corresponding to the right button 600c and a left button icon Sw4 corresponding to the left button 600e are displayed.

In addition, in the display area HR2, there are a display mode showing a selectable range (LV1 to LV4 (MAX)) as the light intensity level and a display mode showing the currently set light intensity level (displayed in black in the drawing). The light amount level can be changed by operating the upper button 600b or the lower button 600d of the selection buttons 600 as a display mode for indicating the operation method for changing the light amount level below it. To indicate this, an up button icon Sw5 corresponding to the up button 600b and a down button icon Sw3 corresponding to the down button 600d are displayed.

In the display area HR3, a middle button corresponding to the decision button (middle button) 600a of the selection buttons 600 is displayed as a display mode for showing an operation method for displaying a selection screen (menu) for selecting the mode type. A button icon Sw1 is displayed.

With the display screen shown in FIG. 947(a) being displayed, the player presses the right button 600c to raise the volume level by one step, and presses the left button 600e to raise the volume level by one. step down. Further, pressing the upper button 600b raises the light amount level by one step, and pressing the lower button 600d lowers the light amount level by one step. Then, the volume level and light amount level selected based on the operation of the selection button 600 by the player are stored in the game environment storage area 223u, which will be described later.

When the player presses the decision button (middle button) 600a while the display screen shown in FIG. 947(a) is being displayed, the display screen shown in FIG. 947(b) is displayed. FIG. 947(b) is a diagram schematically showing an effect mode selection screen on which the effect mode can be selected. As shown in FIG. 947(b), when the effect mode selection screen is displayed, pressing the up button 600b or the down button 600d causes the arrow icon ya1 indicating the selected mode type to move up and down. By moving and pressing the effect button 22a, a display mode showing an operation method that can determine the mode type indicated by the arrow icon ya1 is displayed in the display area Dm8.

In addition, in the main display area Dm, as a display mode for indicating that the effect mode selection screen is currently being displayed, the display area Dm7 displays "effect mode selection screen", selectable mode types, The contents of each mode type are displayed.

Specifically, in this 32nd control example, "normal mode", "active mode", and "fixed mode" are selectable as mode types, and normal mode M1, Active mode M2 and fixed mode M3 are displayed side by side in the vertical direction. Under the fixed mode M3, a return icon M4 is displayed as a display mode selected when ending the effect mode selection screen without changing the mode type. The content of each mode type will be described later.

As described above, in the thirty-second control example, the game environment can be selected while the player is not playing a game. A game can be started in this state.

In the thirty-second control example, the player cannot select the stage type (rabbit stage, hero stage). may be configured to be selectable.

Next, with reference to FIG. 948(b), a game environment changing operation that can be executed during special symbol variation will be described. FIG. 948(b) is a diagram showing the display screen when the fixed mode is set during the special symbol variation. In this 32nd control example, even during execution of the special symbol variation, by pressing the enter button (middle button) 600a, the currently set stage type can be fixed. .

In other words, it is difficult for a player who is playing the pachinko machine 10 for the first time to select the fixed mode in order to prevent the stage type that suits his/her preference from being switched to another stage type during the standby state. rice field. On the other hand, in a state in which the game is executed and the outline of the effects to be executed in each stage type is grasped, it is possible to determine the stage type that suits one's taste among the stage types.

In this case, there is a problem that if the operation of setting the fixed mode is executed after the game is temporarily interrupted and put into a standby state, the operation of the game is lowered. Therefore, in this 32nd control example, even during the special symbol fluctuation, the mode type can be switched to the fixed mode by the player executing a predetermined operation (depression of the determination button 600a). Configure.

With this configuration, the fixed mode can be set immediately after the player finds the stage type that he/she likes during the game. In addition, since the fixed mode can be set with a simpler operation than the simple operation of pressing the enter button 600a, that is, the operation for setting the fixed mode in the standby state, Therefore, there is no need to bother setting the fixed mode.

When the fixed mode is set during the special symbol variation, as shown in FIG. 948(b), an icon resembling a key is displayed in the display area Dm5 as a display mode for indicating that the stage type is not changed. be. Accordingly, it is possible to notify in an easy-to-understand manner that the fixed mode has been set. Although the detailed explanation is omitted, the fixed mode is canceled when the player presses the enter button 600a again while the fixed mode is set.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the thirty-second control example, the stage type is switched each time a predetermined period (for example, one minute) elapses during which the standby state continues. That is, it is configured such that the stage type is more easily switched when the standby state is set than when the special symbol variation is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to facilitate selection of the stage type when setting the fixed mode during the standby state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 948(a), the effect contents of the variable effect executed in the thirty-second control example will be described. FIG. 948(a) is a diagram showing an effect screen when a stage transition effect is executed during special symbol variation. As shown in FIG. 948(a), in this 32nd control example, when the transition condition of the stage type (the condition established based on the number of special symbol fluctuations and the special symbol lottery result) is satisfied, the third symbol display device A transition suggesting effect is executed in which shutters st1 and st2 covering the display surface of 81 are displayed, after which the shutters st1 and st2 are hidden and a display mode corresponding to the type of stage after transition is displayed. ing. Furthermore, by using this transition suggestion production, it is configured to be able to execute a variable production other than the transition of the stage type. In this case, it is possible to perform a stage change performance that increases the possibility of winning the special symbol lottery that is being executed.

When this stage change effect is executed, the shutters st1 and st2 are displayed as shown in FIG. As a display mode, guide display areas st1a and st1b are formed, and the characters "Stage change!?" are displayed. Then, in the sub display area Ds, characters of "Big chance if the stage does not change" are displayed as a guide mode for guiding the player to the contents of the stage change effect.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to use the shift suggestion effect for suggesting that the stage type shifts as part of the effect (stage change effect) that indicates the player's expectation of winning the jackpot (stage change effect). When the shutters st1 and st2 for changing the type are displayed, it is possible to provide a novel game feature in which the player expects that the stage type will not change.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the stage change effect including this transition suggesting effect may be executed during the fixed mode. For example, when the transition suggesting effect is executed during the fixed mode, the secondary display It is preferable to display a guidance mode of "a chance when the stage changes" in the area Ds. Here, in this 32nd control example, even when the fixed mode is set, the stage type can be changed during the special symbol variation in which the jackpot is won. Therefore, when the stage change effect is executed during the fixed mode and the stage type shifts as a result of the effect, it is possible to notify the winning of the jackpot.

Also, the above-described stage change effect may be configured to be executable not only during the period of the special symbol variation but also during the jackpot game period. In this case, for example, the jackpot game is executed in a state where the fixed mode is set, and the stage change effect is executed during the ending period of the jackpot game. The stage type set after the end of the jackpot game is made different from the stage type set before the jackpot game, so that the player is notified of the pending series.

With this configuration, it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the stage types set before and after the jackpot game, that is, the stage types displayed across the execution period of the jackpot game effect are the same or different. Therefore, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting whether or not the holding series will be executed after the effect result of the stage change effect (the stage type after the shutters st1 and st2 are not displayed) is displayed.

<Regarding the game state transition in the 32nd control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 949, the game contents (transition contents of each game state) in the thirty-second control example will be described. FIG. 949 is a game flow showing the transition contents of the game state. As shown in FIG. 949, in this 32nd control example, the normal state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol low probability state) and the time saving state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol high Probability state) and can be set, and it is configured so that the left-handed game in the normal state and the right-handed game in the time-saving state are advantageous to the player.

As the initial state of the pachinko machine 10, a normal state is set in a state in which special figure 1 suspension and special figure 2 suspension are not obtained. In this normal state, a game for entering a game ball into the first ball entrance 64 by a left-handed game is performed. In this normal state, since the low probability state of special symbols is set, the first special symbol lottery that wins a jackpot with a probability of 208/65536 (about 1/300) and wins a small win with a probability of 1/65536 is performed. executed.

Here, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, "jackpot A" or "jackpot B" is set as the jackpot type, and after the jackpot game in which the jackpot type "jackpot A" is set, After the jackpot game in which the time-saving state is set to "jackpot B" is finished, the normal state is set. The ratio of the jackpot type to be set when the jackpot is won is predetermined, and when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery in the normal state, the "jackpot A" has a probability of 60% and the "jackpot A" has a probability of 40%. A "jackpot B" is set with a probability.

Further, when a small win is won in the first special symbol lottery, a small win game in which "small win A" is set as a small win type is executed. This "small win A" specifies the game ball by executing a normal game (right-handed game) for winning the game ball to the second variable winning device 650 that is opened during the small win game. This is a small winning game in which a ball can be entered into an area (V winning), and in the case of V winning, a big winning game in which "big winning C" is set is executed after finishing the small winning game.

When the jackpot games of "jackpot A" and "jackpot C" are completed, a time saving state is set. On the other hand, when the "jackpot B" jackpot game ends, or when the small win game ends without V winning during the small win game (in the case of non-V winning), the normal state returns after the jackpot game ends. set.

Next, the contents of the time-saving state in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-second control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 949, in this 32nd control example, a special symbol low probability state and a normal symbol high probability state are set during the time saving state. A game state is entered in which the game ball is easily entered into the second ball entrance 640 . This time-saving state is configured to end when a predetermined end condition is satisfied, and specifically, as the time-saving end condition, the second special symbol variation (special figure 2 variation) is executed three times. (The third special figure 2 variation is stopped and displayed) When the special symbol indicating that the small hit is stopped is displayed, the first special symbol variation (special figure 1 variation) and the special figure 2 variation There is provided a time-saving end condition that is established when any of the conditions when the total number of times reaches 10 times (the 10th special figure fluctuation is stopped and displayed) is met.

During the time saving state, the ball is passed through the through gate 67 by the right hitting game, the normal pattern lottery is executed, and the ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 during the normal pattern winning game. Then, when the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, a small win is won with a probability of 1/2, and a big win is won with a probability of 208/65536 (approximately 1/300). A lottery is carried out.

That is, when the time-saving state is set, a game aiming at winning a small win or a big win before the second special symbol lottery is executed three times is performed. In this 32nd control example, when the second special symbol lottery is executed during the time saving state, it is configured to win a big win or a small win at a higher probability than the first special symbol lottery. , When the small winning game is executed, by executing the game (right-handed game) normally during the small winning game, the execution right of the big winning game (the game ball to the specific area (V gate) 650e3 Entering ball) is configured so that it can be acquired.

'Small win B' and 'Small win C' can be set as the small win types set when the small win is won in the special figure 2 lottery during the time saving state. Then, regardless of which kind of small winning is set, a small winning game capable of winning a V prize is executed, and a big winning game having different contents of the big winning game executed based on the V winning is executed. . In addition, even if any small hit type is set, the time saving state is set after the end of the big hit game.

That is, in the present 32nd control example, as long as a small hit that is elected with a probability of 1/2 is won in any of the three second special symbol lotteries that can be executed during the time saving state, continuously during the time saving state game can be executed.

On the other hand, when the second special symbol variation that satisfies the time saving end condition is stopped and displayed, if the special figure 2 reservation is acquired, the second special symbol lottery is set in the normal state as the game state is executed (pull-back game). During this pull-back game, the pull-back effect shown in FIG. 941(b) is executed.

When the second special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state (pull-back game), the second special symbol lottery is executed with the same probability (1/2) as during the time saving state. Then, the small hit type is selected at the same selection ratio as the second special symbol lottery during the time saving state.

In addition, in this 32nd control example, the selection ratio of the small hit type in the normal state and the selection ratio of the small hit type in the time saving state are set to be the same, but not limited to this, one game state may be configured so that it is easier for the player to select a small win type that is more advantageous to the player than in the other game state. It is preferable to make it easy to select the winning type (small winning C). By constructing in this way, the second special symbol lottery executed during the normal state is more advantageous to the player than the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state. Become. Therefore, it is possible to increase the advantageous degree of ending the time saving state in the state of acquiring the special figure 2 reservation.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the 32nd control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 950, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 950 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the setting of the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display results of the second symbol display device. to run.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controller by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the operation of the sub-controller such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In the main control device 110, a lottery for special symbols, a lottery for normal symbols, display settings in the first symbol display device 37, display settings in the second symbol display device, and display settings in the third symbol display device 81 Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 951, counters and the like provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 951 is a schematic diagram schematically showing counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. FIG. These counters, etc. are the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the setting of the display on the first symbol display device 37, the setting of the display on the second symbol display device, the setting of the display on the third symbol display device 81, and the like. is used in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 to perform

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol jackpot type. The first hit type counter C2 used for , the small hit type counter C5 used to select the small hit type of the special design, and the stop type selection counter C3 used to select the stop type of the off in the special design , an initial value random number counter CINI1 used for initial value setting of the first hit random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used.

Also, the second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 963), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 978). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . The RAM 203 has a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a corresponding to the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 consisting of four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas), and one reserved area (reserved number 1). 1 area), and a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is provided. Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the small hit type counter C5, and the variation type counter CS1 is stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball into the ball mouth 64. , In the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, in accordance with the timing of entering the second ball entrance 640, a first winning random number counter C1, a first winning type counter C2, a stop type selection counter C3, a small winning Each value of the type counter C5 and the variation type counter CS1 is stored.

Then, when the special symbol starting condition (fluctuation condition) is satisfied, various values stored in the first reserved area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b Of the various values stored in the reserved first area, the special symbol information corresponding to the special symbol type for which the next lottery is executed is shifted to the special symbol execution area, and based on the stored various values A special symbol variation (special symbol lottery) is started.

In addition, in this 32nd control example, the type of special design uses the configuration of two types (first special design, second special design), but without being limited to this, even if the type of special design is one type good. Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the first special symbol or the start condition (variation condition) of the second special symbol is satisfied, the first reserved area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area of the corresponding special symbol type. The various values stored in the area may be shifted to the special symbol execution area, and the special symbol variation based on the stored various values may be started. By configuring in this way, even in the pachinko machine 10 using a plurality of special symbol types, each special symbol variation can be executed smoothly.

Furthermore, in this 32nd control example, when the execution condition of the special symbol lottery (starting condition of the special symbol variation) is established, the second special The information stored in the symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is preferentially read out. In other words, the second special symbol lottery can be prioritized over the first special symbol lottery. Also, the second special symbol lottery is constructed so that a lottery more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery is executed. By configuring in this way, when the execution condition for the special symbol lottery is established in a state where information is stored in both the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. Even if there is, a special symbol lottery advantageous to the player can be preferentially executed.

In addition, as in the 32nd control example, if the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of special symbol types (first special symbol, second special symbol), the lottery for one of the special symbol types may Storage order storage capable of storing the order in which information is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b instead of being executed with priority over the lottery of the symbol type. Means may be provided so that the special symbol lottery can be executed based on the order (winning order) stored in the storage order storage means. Furthermore, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol may be executed simultaneously (in parallel). In this case, each special symbol reserved ball storage area (first special symbol reserved ball The storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b) may each have a special symbol execution area. Thereby, when the starting condition of each special symbol is satisfied, the next special symbol variation can be quickly executed.

In addition, in this 32nd control example, the lottery result of the special symbol is configured to be a big win, a small win, and a loss. Specifically, in some cases where the result of the lottery of the special symbols is a loss, it is possible to win a small win that can give the player a smaller benefit (a different privilege from the one when the big win is won) than when the big win is won. can be configured to With this configuration, even if the player does not win the jackpot, an opportunity to give the player a privilege can be provided, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In this 32nd control example, the normal state is set and the set winning type is set when the special symbol for indicating the result of the lottery is stopped and displayed, regardless of whether the special symbol lottery wins the big win or the small win wins. (Big hit type, small hit type) corresponding to the game (big hit game, small hit game) is configured to be executed in the normal state. Then, after the jackpot game is over, the game state is set according to the set jackpot type, whereas after the small hit game is over, the normal state continues (the game is played according to the small hit type) It does not have a function to set the state). In other words, in the big win (first privilege) and the small win (second privilege) given to the player based on the lottery result of the special symbol lottery, not only the content of the winning game executed but also the transition of the game state The content is also structured differently. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily provide variations in the types of benefits given to the player based on the result of the special symbol lottery.

In addition, as a method for making the transition contents of the game state different between when a big win is won and when a small win is won, a method other than the method used in the 32nd control example may be used. The game state is shifted to the normal state at the start of the jackpot game, and further, based on the set jackpot type, a new game state can be set after the jackpot game ends, whereas when the small win is won. Alternatively, the small winning game may be executed while maintaining the game state at the time of winning the small winning, and the game state may not be shifted even after the small winning game is finished.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the presence or absence of the transition of the game state and the content of the transition according to the winning type (big win, small win), so that it is possible to provide a game rich in variations. can.

Furthermore, the RAM 203 of the 32nd control example is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c corresponding to the entry (passage of the ball) into the through gate 67 consisting of four reserved areas (first reserved area). In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, each value of the second winning random number counter C4 and the normal symbol variation type counter (not shown) is stored in accordance with the timing of entering the through gate 67. .

Then, when the normal symbol start condition (fluctuation condition) is established, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c are shifted to the normal symbol execution area, and the stored various values are shifted to the normal symbol execution area. Normal design variation based on the value is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 951, each counter will be described in detail. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535), and after reaching the maximum value (for example, 65535 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 65535), 0 It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 65,535, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 65,535. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 963) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 978).

The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and at the timing when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the first It is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. - 特許庁The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by the first winning random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is the first winning random number table. If it matches the value of the random number set by 202a as a big hit, it is determined as a special symbol big hit. In addition, the value of the random number that becomes the special symbol small hit is set by the first winning random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is the first winning random number. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes a small hit set by the table 202a, it is determined as a special symbol small hit.

Here, with reference to FIG. 953, the first winning random number table 202a will be described. FIG. 953(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first winning random number table 202a. This first winning random number table 202a is a table in which random numbers (judgment values) determined to be a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol lottery are specified, and are used for the special symbol lottery. It has a data table in which different random values (determined values) are defined according to the conditions.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 953(a), the first winning random number table 202a has a special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 and a special symbol 2 random number table 202a2. This special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 is a data table that is referred to for determining the lottery result when the first special symbol lottery is executed, and the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 is a data table that is used when the second special symbol lottery is performed. It is a data table that is referenced to determine the lottery result when executed.

Next, the contents of the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 will be described with reference to FIG. 953(b). FIG. 953(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1. The special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 defines a judgment value (value of the first winning random number counter C1) that is judged to be a big hit and a judgment value (value of the first random number counter C1) that is judged to be a small hit. ing.

Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 defines the jackpot determination value for determining that the jackpot winning is in the range of "0 to 207", and the value of the first random number counter C1 is "65535". It defines a small hit judgment value for winning a small hit. In other words, the update range of the first winning random number counter C1 is "0 to 65535", and the possible values of the first winning random number counter C1 are 65536 in total, of which 208 are big winning determination values, and 208 are small winning values. Since the judgment value is defined as one, the probability that it will be judged as a big hit when the first special symbol lottery is executed is 208/65536 (about 1/300), and the probability that it will be judged as a small hit is , 1/65536.

Therefore, when the first special symbol lottery is executed, the probability of winning the big win is higher than the probability of winning the small win, so the normal state in which the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed is set. If so, the first special symbol lottery is executed, and a game aiming at winning a jackpot is performed.

Next, the contents of the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 will be described with reference to FIG. 953(c). FIG. 953(c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2. In the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2, a determination value (value of the first winning random number counter C1) determined as a big hit and a determination value (value of the first winning random number counter C1) determined as a small hit are defined. ing.

Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 defines the jackpot determination value for judging that the jackpot winning is in the range of "0 to 207", and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is "32768 to 65535". It defines a small hit determination value for determining that a small hit is won for the range of. In other words, the update range of the first winning random number counter C1 is "0 to 65535", and the possible values of the first winning random number counter C1 are 65536 in total, of which 208 are big winning determination values, and 208 are small winning values. Since the determination value is defined as 32768 pieces, the probability of being determined as a big hit when the second special symbol lottery is executed is 208/65536 (about 1/300), and the probability of being determined as a small hit is , 32768/65536 (about 1/2).

Therefore, when the second special symbol lottery is executed, the probability of winning a small win is higher than the probability of winning a big win, so a time-saving state in which the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed is set. If so, a second special symbol lottery is executed, and a game aiming at winning a small prize is played.

As described above, in this 32nd control example, the type of privilege (big win, small win) that is likely to be given based on the special symbol lottery is made different according to the special symbol type. By configuring in this way, different benefits are likely to be given when the first special symbol lottery is executed and when the second special symbol lottery is executed, so that the player gets bored with the game early. can be suppressed.

In addition, in this 32nd control example, it is configured to vary the special symbol type that facilitates execution of the special symbol lottery according to the set game state. Specifically, the normal state is set. When there is, the first special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than the second special symbol lottery, and when the time saving state is set, the second special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than the first special symbol lottery. It is configured as follows. In addition, when the condition for executing the jackpot game is satisfied during the jackpot game executed when the small hit is won (by winning the game ball into the specific area (V area)), after the small hit game is completed A jackpot game can be executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily vary the process for executing the big winning game according to the set game state. Specifically, when the normal state is set, the jackpot game execution condition (first execution condition) is established based on the jackpot winning in the first special symbol lottery, and the jackpot game is executed. When the player is mainly made to play the game aiming at and the time-saving state is set, the small winning game is executed based on the winning of the small winning in the second special symbol lottery, and during the small winning game. A game ball is entered into a specific area (V area) at a time to establish a jackpot game execution condition (second execution condition) to make a player mainly play a game for the purpose of executing a jackpot game. It is configured as follows. By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the execution conditions of the jackpot game that are likely to be established according to the set game state, so that the jackpot game can be executed based on the establishment of various execution conditions. , the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in this 32nd control example, the execution condition for executing the jackpot game is more likely to be established when the second special symbol lottery is executed than when the first special symbol lottery is executed (the 2 execution conditions are easily established), and the second special symbol lottery is more easily executed in the time saving state than in the normal state. Also, the time saving state is configured to be set after the jackpot game ends.

By constructing in this way, the player who is playing the game in the normal state first aims at winning the jackpot in which the time saving state is set after the jackpot game is finished in the first special symbol lottery, and then the time saving. In order to execute a game aiming at winning a small prize in the second special symbol lottery in the state, that is, a game that is most advantageous to the player, the game can be played in stages, so that the player can It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 10 that does not quickly get bored with games.

In addition, in this 32nd control example, depending on the set game state (normal state, time saving state), it is configured so that the big hit determination value does not change, but it is not limited to this, depending on the game state may be configured to vary the big hit determination value. In this case, for example, a game state in which a low probability state of special symbols is set and a game state in which a high probability state of special symbols is set can be set as the game state, and from the low probability state of special symbols. Also, it is preferable that the high-probability state of the special symbol is configured to increase the jackpot determination value. Also, the high probability state of the special symbol may be configured to be set after the end of the jackpot game when a specific jackpot type is set.

By constructing in this way, even if the game state is one in which the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed, the probability of winning the jackpot can be varied according to the set probability state of the special symbols. , it is possible to set a plurality of game states with different degrees of advantage to the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game by having the player play the game in a game state with various degrees of advantage.

In addition, in this 32nd control example, according to the set game state (normal state, time saving state), it is configured so that the small hit determination value does not change, but it is not limited to this, depending on the game state It may be configured to vary the small hit determination value accordingly. In this case, for example, a game state in which a low probability state of special symbols is set and a game state in which a high probability state of special symbols is set can be set as the game state, and from the low probability state of special symbols. Also, it is preferable to configure so that the high probability state of the special symbol increases the small hit determination value. Also, the high probability state of the special symbol may be configured to be set after the end of the jackpot game when a specific jackpot type is set.

By configuring in this way, even if the game state is such that the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed, the probability of winning a small hit can be varied according to the set probability state of the special symbols. Therefore, it is possible to set a plurality of game states with different degrees of advantage for the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game by having the player play the game in a game state with various degrees of advantage.

In addition, when a special symbol high probability state and a special symbol low probability state can be set as special symbol probability states, when the special symbol high probability state is set, special Both the probability of winning a big win and the probability of winning a small win may be higher than when the low probability state of the pattern is set, or only one of them may be higher than the low probability state of the special pattern. can be configured to In this case, for example, a first high probability state, a second high probability state, and a third high probability state can be set as the high probability state of the special symbol, and when the first high probability state is set, The odds of winning a big win and the odds of winning a small win are set higher than when the low probability state of the special pattern is set, and when the second high probability state is set, the low probability state of the special pattern is set. is set, only the jackpot winning probability is set higher, and when the third high-probability state is set, the probability is lower than when the low-probability state of special symbols is set. It is preferable to configure so that only the winning probability is high.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to set a more diverse state as the probability state of the special symbol, so that it is possible to further suppress the player from becoming bored with the game. Moreover, as the probability state of the special symbol, it may be configured such that three or more kinds of the big winning probability and the small winning probability can be set. In this case, for example, the special symbol jackpot probability may be changed for each of up to four game states set by combining the special symbol state and the normal symbol state, Three or more types of special pattern states, such as a high-probability state, a normal-probability state, and a low-probability state, can be simply set, and a different big win probability or small win probability is set for each state. Also good.

In this 32nd control example, as shown in FIGS. 953(b) and 953(c), the jackpot probability in the first special symbol lottery and the jackpot probability in the second special symbol lottery are the same. However, without being limited to this, the probability of winning a jackpot may be varied according to the type of special symbol lottery to be executed (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery).

Also, in this 32nd control example, as shown in FIGS. 953(b) and 953(c), the small hit probability in the first special symbol lottery and the small hit probability in the second special symbol lottery must be different. However, without being limited to this, the small winning probability of the first special symbol lottery and the small winning probability of the second special symbol lottery may be configured to be the same. Furthermore, in this 32nd control example, although the winning probabilities are different, it is configured so that a small hit can be won in both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, but it is not limited to this, and any A special symbol lottery in which only one of the special symbol types can win a small hit may be configured to be executable.

The first win type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol lottery results in a big win, and is one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). It is incremented and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this 32nd control example), and is updated in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64. is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing of entering the second ball entrance 640 in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-second control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. In this control example, the obtained value of the first hit type counter C2 is used to refer to the jackpot type selection table 202b to determine the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. Here, the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 954(a).

FIG. 954(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the jackpot type selection table 202b. As shown in FIG. 954(a), this jackpot type selection table 202b includes information to be referred to when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, and when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol. Information to be referred to and are specified.

Specifically, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the value of the first hit type counter C2 (update range "0 to 99") is in the range of "0 to 59". As a type, "jackpot A" is associated and defined. This "jackpot A" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 6 rounds, and a time saving state is set after the jackpot game is finished. "1" is set to the value of the winning counter 203s, and "3" is set to the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t.

Detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG. 954 (b), but in the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-second control example, multiple time-saving end conditions can be set simultaneously as time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state. It is configured to end the time saving state when any one of the set time saving end conditions is satisfied. The time saving counter 203h, the small hit counter 203s, and the special figure 2 counter 203t mentioned above are counters referred to when determining whether different time saving end conditions are satisfied, and are executed during the time saving state. It is configured so that the corresponding counter value is updated based on the pattern lottery. By configuring in this way, different time-saving end conditions are established according to the contents of the special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state, and the time-saving state can be ended, so that the game is advantageous to the player. In the state in which the time saving state is set, intentionally inappropriate games (for example, not the right-handed game for executing the second special symbol lottery, but the left-handed game for executing the first special symbol lottery Since the time saving state can be ended even when the game) is executed, it is possible to suppress the time saving state from continuing for an excessively long time.

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 60 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot A", so the first special symbol lottery. , the ratio of determining "jackpot A" is 60% (60/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 954(b), "jackpot B" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "60 to 99". This "jackpot B" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 6 and the normal jackpot game is executed after the jackpot game is finished, and the value of the time-saving counter 203h after the jackpot game is finished. "0" is set to "0", "0" is set to the value of the small hit counter 203s, and "0" is set to the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t.

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 40 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot B", so the first special symbol lottery. , the ratio of determining "jackpot B" is 40% (40/100).

That is, the two jackpot types (jackpot A, jackpot B) that can be set when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery have the same number of rounds of the jackpot game, but the game state is set after the jackpot game ends. 'jackpot A' is more advantageous than 'jackpot B' because a game state (time-saving state) advantageous to the player is set after the completion of the jackpot game.

On the other hand, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the entire range of "0 to 99" with "jackpot C" as the jackpot type. It is This "jackpot C" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 9 rounds, and a time-reduction jackpot game is executed in which a time-reduction state is set after the jackpot game is finished, and the value of the time-reduction counter 203h after the jackpot game is finished. "10" is a big hit type in which "1" is set to the value of the small hit counter 203s and "3" is set to the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t.

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 100 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot C", so the second special symbol lottery. , the ratio of determining "jackpot C" is 100% (30/100).

That is, when a big win is won in the second special pattern lottery, a specific big win type (jackpot C) is always set, and the "jackpot C" is a big win in the first special pattern lottery. The number of rounds of the jackpot game is configured to be larger than the jackpot types (jackpot A, jackpot B) set in the case. Also, the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is configured so as to set a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, similarly to the "jackpot A".

Therefore, the "jackpot C" set when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player, and then the "jackpot C" is set when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery. Jackpot A" is a jackpot type advantageous to the player. Then, the "jackpot B" is the jackpot type that is most disadvantageous to the player.

Here, in the 32nd control example, when the second special symbol lottery is executed, the small winning is won with a probability of about 1/2, and during the small winning game executed based on the small winning. The conditions for executing the big winning game are easily established, and the game is mainly executed in which the big winning game is executed after the small winning game is finished. In addition, the time saving state in which the second special symbol lottery is likely to be executed is configured so that the time saving end condition is established based on the small hit winning of a predetermined number of times (once). That is, in order to win a big win in the second special symbol lottery, it is necessary to win a big win with a probability of about 1/300 without winning a small win with a probability of about 1/2.

In this way, it is possible to execute a jackpot game, and addition of winning a jackpot set to a lower probability than the winning probability of the jackpot rather than a jackpot that can be won with a high probability. In order to give value to the player, the "jackpot C" is configured to be the most advantageous jackpot type for the player. By configuring in this way, it is possible to give added value to the player who wins the jackpot during the time saving state, so that the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state is more successful than the small win. It is possible to suppress the decline of the player's willingness to play, who has previously won the jackpot.

As described above, when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the time-saving jackpot game is always executed, so the time-saving jackpot game is executed at a rate of 60%. In terms of the game state set after the end of the jackpot game, it becomes an advantageous special symbol lottery. In addition, in terms of the number of round games executed during the jackpot game, that is, the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game, the second special symbol is the maximum number, the minimum number, and the average number that can be obtained. It is stipulated that the lottery will be more frequent.

In this control example, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbols, the same number of rounds of the jackpot game is executed for all the jackpots, and the jackpot game period is set to be the same. Configure. Then, using the same jackpot game period, a jackpot game effect (subjugation effect) for suggesting in advance a game state to be set after the jackpot game ends is executed. By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the game state set after the end of the big winning game based on the game contents of the big winning game to be executed, and the subjugation performance executed during the big winning game. It is possible to make it easier for the player to be interested in.

In addition, without being limited to this, according to the selected jackpot type, a different number of round games may be configured to be executable. In this case, the performance period of the subjugation performance is configured to correspond to the jackpot game period in which a small number of round games are performed, and in the big win game in which a large number of round games are performed, the performance period of the subjugation performance elapses. After that, it is preferable to execute a jackpot game effect corresponding to the number of remaining rounds. By constructing in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the game state set after the big winning game based on the game contents of the big winning game at least during the performance period of the subjugation performance. Also, in this case, the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game in which a small number of round games are executed is more likely to set the time saving state after the jackpot game is completed than the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game in which a large number of round games are performed. It is preferable to define the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202b as follows.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to set the time saving state immediately after the production result (success production) indicating that the time saving state is set as the production result of the subjugation production is displayed. Easy game can be provided. Also, the jackpot game in which the game state advantageous to the player is set reduces the number of prize balls that the player can obtain during the jackpot game, as compared to the jackpot game in which the game state disadvantageous to the player is set. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player receives an excessive number of prize balls. In addition, a player who is set to a disadvantageous game state (normal state) after the end of the big win game is more likely to receive one big win than a player who is set to the advantageous game state (time saving state) after the end of the big win game. Since a large number of prize balls can be obtained in the game, it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from declining due to a shift to a normal state only by obtaining a small number of prize balls despite the execution of the jackpot game. can be suppressed.

In addition, in this 32nd control example, when the time saving state is set, the time saving state is configured to be set for the same period (time saving number of times 3 times), but without being limited to this, time saving according to the jackpot type You may comprise so that the frequency|count (time saving end conditions) may be changed.

Returning to FIG. 951, the description continues. The small hit type counter C5 is, for example, incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 99, and is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). The value of the small hit type counter C5 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this 32nd control example), and stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64. It is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

The value of the small hit type counter C5 in the pachinko machine 10 of the 32nd control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. In this control example, using the value of the obtained small hit type counter C5, it is configured to determine the small hit type when the small hit is won with reference to the small hit type selection table 202f. Here, the contents of the small hit type selection table 202f will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 955 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small hit type selection table 202f. As shown in Figure 955, this small hit type selection table 202f is information to be referred to when a small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, and when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol. Information to be referred to and are specified.

Specifically, as the small hit type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the value of the small hit type counter C5 (update range "0 to 99") is for the entire range of "0 to 99", As a small hit type, "small hit A" is associated and defined. This "small hit A" is a small hit type in which a small hit game that can easily enter a game ball into a specific area (V area) during a small hit game is executed, and a specific area ( It is a small hit type in which the big hit type "jackpot C" is set based on the entry of the game ball into the V area).

On the other hand, as the small hit type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the value of the small hit type counter C5 (update range "0 to 99") is in the range of "0 to 79", as a small hit type "Small hit B" is defined in correspondence, and "small hit C" is defined in association with the range of "80 to 99" as a small hit type. This "small hit B" is a small hit type in which a small hit game that can easily enter a game ball into a specific area (V area) during a small hit game is executed, and a specific area ( It is a small hit type in which a big hit type “jackpot D” is set based on the entry of a game ball into the V area). In addition, "small hit C" is a small hit type in which a small hit game that can easily enter a game ball into a specific area (V area) during a small hit game is executed, and is a specific area It is a small hit type in which the big hit type "jackpot C" is set based on the entry of the game ball to (V area).

In other words, when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, among the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, the random value associated with the "small hit A" ( Since the counter value) is 100, when the lottery for the first special symbol results in a small win, the ratio of determining the "small win A" is 100% (100/100). On the other hand, when the small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, among the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, the random value associated with the "small hit B" ( Since the counter value) is 80, when the second special symbol lottery results in a small win, the ratio of determining the "small win B" is 80% (80/100). In addition, since the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "small hit C" is 20, the "small hit C" is determined when the second special symbol lottery results in a small hit. The proportion is 20% (20/100).

Here, the big hit type that can be set based on the execution of each small hit game will be described. In this 32nd control example, a specific area (V area) is provided in the game ball flow path through which the winning game ball can pass to the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 which is opened during the small winning game. When a game ball passes through a specific area (V area) during a small winning game, the execution condition (V condition) of the big winning game is established, and the big winning game can be executed after the small winning game is finished. there is The contents of the big win game executed when the V condition is established are determined in advance according to the small win type set when the small win is won.

That is, the small winning type set when the small winning is won defines the big winning type related to the big winning game executed based on the establishment of the V condition. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 955, for "small hit A" and "small hit C", the jackpot type of "jackpot C" is defined, and for "small hit B" , a jackpot type of “jackpot D” is defined.

Here, when the "jackpot C" is set, the same jackpot game as the jackpot game (jackpot game in which the "jackpot C" is set) executed when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, that is, , the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 9 rounds, and a time-saving jackpot game is executed in which a time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends. On the other hand, "jackpot D" is a jackpot type that is not set when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, the number of rounds of the jackpot game is three, and a time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends. A jackpot type in which a time-saving jackpot game is executed, and after the jackpot game ends, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is "10", the value of the small hit counter 203s is "1", and the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t is "3". ” is the jackpot type that is set.

That is, in the 32nd control example, the pachinko machine 10 as a whole is configured to be able to set four types of jackpot types (jackpot A to jackpot D), and "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" are special symbol lotteries. "Jack C" is a jackpot type that can be set only when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery and when a small win is won in a special symbol lottery, and "jackpot D". is a big hit type that can be set only when a small hit is won in a special symbol lottery.

In this way, a jackpot game can be executed for a player by making it possible to execute a jackpot game of a different jackpot type according to an execution condition established among a plurality of execution conditions for executing a jackpot game. The game can be played with motivation to establish various execution conditions in order to make it possible.

In addition, in this 32nd control example, a part of the case where the special symbol lottery wins the jackpot and a part of the case where the V condition is satisfied during the small win game are the same contents of the jackpot game (based on "jackpot C" However, it is not limited to this, and different contents of the jackpot game are executed depending on whether the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery or when the V condition is satisfied during the jackpot game. It may be configured as follows. By configuring in this way, in the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of execution conditions for executing a jackpot game, jackpot games with different contents can be executed according to the established execution conditions.

Returning to FIG. 951, the description continues. The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A rough display mode (fluctuation time) such as so-called short time out, long time out, normal reach, super reach is determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Determination of the display mode is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. be. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 978), which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. It should be noted that the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 956(a)) storing a random number for determining one variation time of pattern variation from the value (random number) of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. located inside.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 956(a). FIG. 956(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d. As shown in FIG. 956(a), the variation pattern selection table 202d includes a normal variation pattern table 202d1 used in a state where the normal state is set as the game state, and a state where the time saving state is set. A time saving variation pattern table 202d2, a special time saving variation pattern table 202d3, and a time saving final variation pattern table 202d4 are defined. Although details will be described later, in this control example, the type of the variation pattern selection table 202d referred to when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol variation is determined according to the contents defined in the variation pattern scenario table 202h. It consists of

With this configuration, even if the same game state is set, the special symbol can be obtained by referring to different types of variation pattern selection tables based on the contents defined in the variation pattern scenario table 202h. It becomes possible to determine the variation pattern of variation.

Returning to FIG. 951, the description continues. The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by 1 in the range of 0 to 299, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 299). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 963), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start opening (through gate) 67. It is acquired at the same time and stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM203.

Then, the value of the random number that becomes the winning of the normal symbol is defined by the second winning random number table 202c stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is the value of the second winning random number table 202c. If it matches the value of the random number set as a hit, it is determined as a hit of the normal pattern (second pattern) (per normal pattern). In addition, this second winning random number table 202c is divided into two types, one for when the probability is low for normal symbols and one for when probability of winning is higher for normal symbols than when the probability is low, and included in each. The number of random numbers to be a jackpot is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be winning different, the probability of winning is changed between when the probability of normal symbols is low and when the probability of normal symbols is high.

Details of the contents defined in this second winning random number table 202c will be described in detail. When the figure hit is defined and the normal pattern is in a high probability state, the acquired second hit random number counter C4 is defined in the range of "0 to 149".

That is, in the 32nd control example, when the low probability state of normal symbols is set, the probability (1/100) of winning in the lottery of normal symbols is set to a low probability. As a result, in the present embodiment in which the same game method (left-handed game) is executed in the normal state, which is a low probability state of normal symbols, and the time-saving state, which is a high probability state of normal symbols, during the normal state Since it is possible to make it difficult to win the normal game, it is possible to make it difficult for the normal game to be executed during the normal state and the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the high probability state of normal symbols is set, the probability (1/2) of winning in the lottery of normal symbols is set to a high probability. As a result, it is possible to facilitate execution of the normal pattern winning game based on the normal pattern winning during the time saving state.

In addition, in this 32nd control example, it is configured such that the variation time of different length is set as the variation time of the normal symbol variation for indicating the result of the normal symbol lottery according to the set game state. A longer variation time (for example, 10 seconds) is set when the normal pattern low probability state is set than when the normal pattern high probability state is set. In this way, by varying the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery and the length of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation according to the game state, winning in the normal symbol lottery and entering the second ball entrance 640. A game state (time-saving state) in which it is easy to enter a ball can be easily set.

Furthermore, in the 32nd control example, when winning the normal symbol lottery executed in the state where the normal symbol low probability state is set, the ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640. It is configured to execute a normal figure winning game in which the electric accessory 640a is opened in a difficult operation mode (short open). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the second ball entrance 640 even if the normal symbol lottery wins in the game state (normal state) in which it is difficult to win in the normal symbol lottery. Therefore, when the normal state is set, a right-handed game aiming at executing the second special symbol lottery is executed instead of a left-handed game aiming at executing the first special symbol lottery. can be suppressed.

In addition, in the 32nd control example, in order to make it difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 in the game state (normal state) in which the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the normal symbol is displayed. During the low probability state, it is made difficult to win in the normal pattern lottery compared to the high probability state of the normal pattern, and even if the normal pattern lottery wins (wins in the normal pattern), the second Although it is configured to operate the electric accessory 640a in an operation mode in which it is difficult to enter the game ball into the ball entrance 640, the game is not limited to this, for example A right-handed area (the left side of the variable display unit 80) through which the game ball fired by the left-handed game can pass through the through gate 67 so that the normal symbol lottery can be executed even while the left-handed game is being executed. provided in the game area), and in a part of the case where the winning is won by the normal symbol lottery executed during the normal state, the operation mode that allows the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 It may be configured to be executable per normal game (long normal per game) in which the electric accessary 640a is operated in (long open). By configuring in this way, even in a game state (normal state) in which it is difficult to win in the normal symbol lottery, it is possible to temporarily make it easier to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640. The possibility of execution of the second special symbol lottery can be left for the player regardless of what game state is set, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Also, in this case, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation (fluctuation time per long normal pattern) to indicate that the game per long normal pattern has been won per normal pattern is longer than the fluctuation time of other normal patterns It is configured to be longer, and during the fluctuation time per long normal pattern, information for indicating to the player that the game per long normal pattern is executed, and switching the game method to the right-handed game. It is preferable to configure so as to execute a normal drawing performance including at least information for guiding. By configuring in this way, in the normal state, for the player who is executing the left-handed game, the game ball to the second ball entrance 640 when the long normal figure per game is executed. can be made easier to enter the ball.

Further, the normal pattern winning probability is set to an extremely low probability (for example, 1/65536) during the normal pattern low probability state, and the normal pattern lottery executed during the normal pattern low probability state is successful. In the case of doing, it may be configured so that the long normal figure per game is always executed. Also, in this case, it is preferable to configure so that the second special symbol lottery is executed a plurality of times with one long normal pattern per game as a trigger.

Specifically, as the operation pattern of the game per long normal figure, the operation pattern is determined so that the game ball can enter the second ball entrance 640 multiple times at intervals of the first period, and the second It is preferable that the variation time of the 2 special symbol variation is configured to be a second period shorter than the first period. By configuring in this way, every time a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 during a long normal game, it is possible to make it easier to execute a new second special symbol variation. It is possible to make it easy to execute the second special symbol lottery a plurality of times in the wake of the long normal pattern winning game of the time.

By configuring in this way, a time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) is provided to a player who is playing a game in a normal state (low probability state of normal symbols) based on the lottery result of a special symbol lottery. The second special pattern lottery is executed by executing the long normal pattern winning game based on the first game aiming to execute the second special pattern lottery by setting and the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery. can be executed in parallel with the second game aiming at .

In addition, in this case, the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery that can be executed by one game per long normal pattern is greater than the number of times of execution of the second special symbol lottery that can be executed during the time saving state. can be configured to In other words, the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery that can be executed in the period from the time saving state that makes it easier to execute the second special symbol lottery is set until the time saving end condition of the time saving state is satisfied (this 32nd control example 3 times), there are many second special symbols when the normal symbol lottery executed during the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol is won and the long normal symbol game is executed. It may be configured such that a lottery can be executed.

By configuring in this way, as a transition opportunity to a state that facilitates execution of the second special symbol lottery, the case where the transition opportunity that is difficult to be established is established is more than the case where the transition opportunity that is easy to be established is established. Since it is possible to facilitate the execution of the second special symbol lottery, an added value can be given to the player who establishes the transition opportunity that is difficult to establish.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 299), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see Fig. 963). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 978).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main controller 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 950, the description continues. The ROM 202 has various data tables defined corresponding to various counters shown in FIG. Here, with reference to FIG. 952(a), the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-second control example will be described. FIG. 952(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-second control example.

As shown in FIG. 952(a), the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-second control example includes the first winning random number table 202a, the jackpot type selection table 202b, the second winning random number table 202c, the variation pattern It has at least a selection table 202d, a time reduction grant table 202e, a small hit type selection table 202f, an open scenario table 202g, and a variation pattern scenario table 202h. In addition, the first per random number table 202a, the jackpot type selection table 202b, the second per random number table 202c, and the small per type selection table 202f were described above when describing the various counters shown in FIG. 951, so the description is omitted. do.

As shown in FIG. 956(a), the variation pattern selection table 202d includes a normal variation pattern table 202d1 used in a state where the normal state is set as the game state, and a state where the time saving state is set. A time saving variation pattern table 202d2, a special time saving variation pattern table 202d3, and a time saving final variation pattern table 202d4 are defined. Although details will be described later, in this control example, the type of the variation pattern selection table 202d referred to when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol variation is determined according to the contents defined in the variation pattern scenario table 202h. It consists of

The normal variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table that is referred to when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol lottery that is executed when the normal state is set as the gaming state. Here, with reference to FIG. 956(b), the contents defined in the normal variation pattern table 202d1 will be described. FIG. 956(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal fluctuation pattern table 202d1.

As shown in FIG. 956(b), the normal variation pattern table 202d1 includes the special symbol type used for the special symbol lottery to be executed, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery to be executed, and the acquired variation type counter CS1. Different variation patterns (variation times) are defined corresponding to the values of . In other words, it is possible to determine a variation pattern of different variation times according to the special symbol type and the lottery result.

Specifically, when the special symbol type is "special symbol 1 (first special symbol)" and the lottery result is "out", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 139". For the range of "150 to 179", "out of" with a variation time of 7 seconds as a variation pattern, and "150 to 179" with a variation time of 20 seconds as a variation pattern for the range of "140 to 149" For the range of ", "various types of normal reach" with a fluctuation time of 40 seconds are defined as the fluctuation pattern, and for the range of "180 to 198", "super reach" with a fluctuation time of 80 seconds is defined as the fluctuation pattern. there is

In addition, when the special symbol type is "special symbol 1 (first special symbol)" and the lottery result is "jackpot", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is within the range of "0 to 29" On the other hand, as a variation pattern, "various normal reach" with a variation time of 40 seconds is in the range of "30 to 189", and "super reach" with a variation time of 80 seconds as a variation pattern is "190 to 198". A "special reach" with a variation time of 140 seconds is defined as a variation pattern for the range.

Furthermore, when the special symbol type is "special symbol 1 (first special symbol)" and the lottery result is "small hit", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198". For the range, as a variation pattern, a "long and small hit" with a variation time of 90 seconds is defined.

In other words, in the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, the fluctuation of the fluctuation time is shorter when the lottery result is a loss than when the lottery result is other than a loss (big win or small win). The pattern is configured to be easily determined, and the possibility that the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win or a small win is higher when a variation pattern with a longer variation time is determined. are doing. By constructing in this way, the special symbol variation in which the lottery results are out of order continues for a long time for the player who is playing the game in the normal state, and the special symbol lottery executed per unit time is not performed. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's desire to play due to an extremely small number of executions.

In addition, when the number of executions of the special symbol lottery executed per unit time is reduced, that is, when the special symbol variation is executed for a long period of time, the winning (big win, small win) is won. Since the sense of anticipation can be heightened, it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from declining.

Furthermore, among the variation patterns that can be determined as the first special symbol variation in the normal state, the variation pattern that has a variation time (90 seconds, 140 seconds) longer than the predetermined time (80 seconds) is excluded from the result of the special symbol lottery. Since it is configured to be able to determine when it is other than, when the special symbol variation is executed in a variation pattern with an excessively long variation time, before the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, the player It is possible to grasp the result of the special symbol lottery. Therefore, even if the special symbol variation is executed in an excessively long variation time, the player's willingness to play can be enhanced.

In addition, at least part of the case where the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss and at least part of the case where the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, the same variation time (40 seconds, 80 seconds) is set. It configures the pattern to be determinable. By configuring in this way, even if the fluctuation time of the special symbol variation being executed is grasped before the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol variation being executed is executed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the result.

Here, when the variation pattern is determined by referring to the normal variation pattern table 202d1, the variation pattern command for indicating the determined variation pattern is set, and the main processing of main controller 110 (see FIG. 978) output to the audio lamp control device 113 by the external output processing (see S1801 in FIG. 978) executed by Then, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command, based on the information (lottery result, variation time, etc.) included in the received variation pattern command, it is executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 A process of determining the effect mode of the variable effect is executed.

On the other hand, when the special symbol type is "special symbol 2 (second special symbol)" and the lottery result is "out", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is the entire range of "0 to 198" , "off" with a variation time of 20 seconds is defined as a variation pattern, the special symbol type is "special figure 2 (first special symbol)", and the lottery results are "big hit" and "small hit". , the variation pattern is defined as “hit” with a variation time of 20 seconds for the entire range of “0 to 198” for the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1.

In the thirty-second control example, when the normal state is set, various mechanisms are arranged on the game board 13 so that it is difficult (impossible) for the game ball to enter the second ball inlet 640. Even if the right-handed game is executed during the normal state and the normal pattern winning game is executed, the second special symbol lottery is hardly executed. In addition, the execution right (special figure 2 reservation) of the second special symbol lottery can be acquired at maximum one.

Therefore, as a game situation in which the second special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state, the special figure 2 reservation is acquired during the time saving state in which the second special symbol lottery can be easily executed, and the acquired special figure 2 The state of holding the reservation shifts from the time-saving state to the normal state, and after the normal state is set, a game situation is entered in which the second special symbol lottery based on the held special figure 2 reservation is executed.

In other words, the time-saving state in which the second special symbol lottery can be easily executed ends, and the second special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state as the last second special symbol lottery executed with the time-saving state as a trigger. will be Therefore, in this 32nd control example, as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol variation for indicating the result of the second special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, a constant length (20 seconds) regardless of the lottery result is configured to determine a variation pattern in which the variation time of is set. And it is configured to execute the pullback effect (see FIG. 941 (b)) after the end of the time saving state using this variable time.

In this way, when a special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery) of a specific special symbol type (second special symbol) is executed in a specific gaming state (normal state), the same lottery result is obtained regardless of the lottery result. By determining the variation pattern in which the length variation time is set, the performance period of the specific performance executed during the special symbol variation can be unified regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery.

Next, the contents of the time reduction variation pattern table 202d2 will be described with reference to FIG. 957(a). FIG. 957(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the time reduction variation pattern table 202d2. This time-saving variation pattern table 202d2 is a data table that is mainly referred to when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol variation for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state, and is used during the time-saving state. It is a data table that is referred to more frequently than other referenced data tables (special working hours fluctuation pattern table 202d3, working hours final fluctuation pattern table 202d4).

Specifically, this time-saving variation pattern table 202d2 shows the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation for indicating the result of the first special symbol lottery of the 1st to 4th execution times after the time-saving state is set. It is referred to when determining, or when determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation for indicating the result of the second special symbol lottery for which the number of executions after the time saving state is set is 1 or 2.

In this 32nd control example, when the time-saving state is set, the normal pattern winning game (long normal pattern) is operated in an operation mode that makes it easy to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 when winning in the normal pattern lottery. Winning game) is configured to be executed. Therefore, while the time-saving state is set, a game aiming at execution of the second special symbol lottery is performed by performing a right-handed game.

Here, for example, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, and the time saving state is set after the jackpot game is executed, the right to execute the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 The time-saving state will be set in the state of acquiring the second special symbol lottery, and the first special symbol lottery will be executed until the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 reservation) is acquired. there was a case. The pachinko machine 10 in this 32nd control example shortens the variation time set in the second special symbol variation executed during the time saving state in order to increase the number of times the jackpot game is executed per unit time. However, when the first special symbol lottery is executed before the second special symbol lottery is executed in the time saving state, the second for showing the result of the executed first special symbol lottery. Until the 1 special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, the second special symbol lottery cannot be executed, and as a result, the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery per period in which the time saving state is set is reduced. I had a problem.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the 32nd control example is configured to be able to store a maximum of one special figure 2 hold, and a short time ( 1 second) is set. In other words, during the time saving state, the second special symbol lottery using the special figure 2 hold is frequently executed, so depending on the flow situation of the game ball fired by the right-handed game, the special figure 2 hold is acquired. A non-existent situation can occur. In such a state, when the special figure 1 reservation is acquired, the first special symbol lottery is executed, so even if the special figure 2 reservation is newly acquired, the first special symbol is changing at that time. In some cases, the second special symbol variation based on the newly acquired special figure 2 reservation cannot be immediately executed, and as a result, the execution of the second special symbol lottery per unit time in which the time saving state is set. There was a problem that the number of times decreased.

On the other hand, in this 32nd control example, as the variation time of the first special symbol variation executed during the time saving state, it is configured to be able to determine a short variation time, and the special figure 2 reservation is not acquired, When the time saving state is set in a state where only the special figure 1 reservation is acquired, the special figure 1 reservation is digested in a short time. By configuring in this way, the special figure 2 reservation is acquired while the special figure 1 reservation is acquired, and the second special symbol lottery is executed by the first special symbol variation executed based on the special figure 1 reservation. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the efficiency to be applied.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 957 (a), the special symbol type is "special figure 1 (first special symbol)", and when the lottery result is "off", the acquired variation type counter For the entire range of values of CS1 "0 to 198", "super short deviation" with a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is defined as a fluctuation pattern, and when the lottery result is "big hit", the acquired fluctuation A "short and big win" with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is specified as a fluctuation pattern for the entire range of "0 to 198" for the value of the type counter CS1, and when the lottery result is a "small win", the acquired fluctuation For the entire range of "0 to 198" for the value of the type counter CS1, a "long and small win" with a variation time of 90 seconds is defined as a variation pattern.

On the other hand, when the special symbol type is "special symbol 2 (second special symbol)" and the lottery result is "off", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is within the entire range of "0 to 198" On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern is defined as "short out" with a fluctuation time of 1 second, and the lottery result is "big hit", the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198" for the entire range Then, as the variation pattern, a variation time of 1 second is defined as "super short and big win", and when the lottery result is "small win", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the entire range of "0 to 198". On the other hand, as a variation pattern, "ultra-short hit" with a variation time of 1 second is defined.

As described above, the 1st to 4th first special symbol variation in which the variation pattern is determined with reference to the time saving variation pattern table 202d2, that is, the upper limit number (4 pieces) that can be acquired as a special figure 1 reservation The number of fluctuations that corresponds to the number of times that can be executed during the time saving state based on the special figure 1 hold acquired during the normal state. , a variation pattern with a variation time of 0.5 seconds is set. By configuring in this way, even if the time saving state is set in the state where the special figure 1 reservation is obtained, until the special figure 2 reservation is obtained (normal pattern lottery executed during the time saving state) Until the game ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 by the normal figure winning game based on the winning), it is possible to make it easy to digest all the acquired special figure 1 reservations.

In addition, when the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state is not winning (big win, small win), a variable time is set to the extent that the player can grasp the lottery result, and the time saving. A dedicated performance is executed for notifying the player of the winning in the first special symbol lottery executed during the state. By constructing in this way, the player can easily understand the details of the execution of the winning game before the execution of the second special symbol lottery despite the fact that the time saving state is set. In addition, if a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery during the time saving state, the same variation pattern (90 seconds) will be determined as in the case of a small hit in the first special symbol lottery during the normal state. It consists of Then, during the special symbol variation corresponding to the small winning, the same variation performance is executed regardless of the game state.

In addition, in the first and second second special symbol variations in which the variation pattern is determined with reference to the time-saving variation pattern table 202d2, a variation pattern with a variation time of 1 second is determined regardless of the lottery result. During this period, a countdown effect (see FIG. 938(a)) is executed. By configuring in this way, the number icon 808 (see FIG. 938(a)) for indicating the number of times of remaining short time is variably displayed by the countdown effect, and the number icon 808 is hidden to indicate winning. Since the timing of stopping and displaying the three patterns can be easily matched, the third pattern indicating winning can be stopped and displayed as part of the countdown performance, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to Drawing 957 (b), the contents of fluctuation pattern table 202d3 for special time saving are explained. FIG. 957(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special time saving variation pattern table 202d3. This special time-saving variation pattern table 202d3 is a data table referred to when determining the variation time of some first special symbol variations executed during the time-saving state. It is referred to when determining the variation time of the 10th first special symbol variation.

As shown in Figure 957 (b), in the special time saving variation pattern table 202d3, only the variation pattern corresponding to the first special symbol is defined as the special symbol type, and if the lottery result is "off" , The value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is specified for the entire range of "0 to 198", the variation pattern is defined as "out" with a variation time of 20 seconds, and if the lottery result is a "jackpot", the acquired For the entire range of ``0 to 198'' for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 obtained, ``winning'' with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is defined as a fluctuation pattern, and when the lottery result is ``small winning'', the acquired For the entire range of "0 to 198" for the value of the variation type counter CS1, a "long and small hit" with a variation time of 90 seconds is defined as a variation pattern.

In this 32nd control example, as the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, the time saving end condition established when the number of times of the second special symbol fluctuation executed during the time saving state reaches three times, and the time saving end condition during the time saving state It has at least a time-saving end condition that is established when the total number of times of the first special symbol variation and the number of second special symbol variations executed in 1 reaches 10 times.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 in this control example executes the second special symbol lottery three times while the time saving state that makes it easier to execute the second special symbol lottery is set, and in any second special symbol lottery By winning a win (small win, big win) with a probability of about 1/2, the time saving state is repeated through the big win game, and winning is won in the second special pattern lottery executed three times during the time saving state. If not, the time saving state ends, and if the second special pattern lottery (1 time) using the remaining special pattern 2 reservation does not win, it will move to the normal state (continuous chang state is terminated) has a playability.

Here, as the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, when only the time saving end condition that is satisfied when the number of times of the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state reaches three times, the first Even when the special pattern lottery is executed three times, the time saving end condition is satisfied, and the time saving state ends without the second special pattern lottery being executed despite the time saving state being set. There was a possibility that such a situation could occur. That is, in this 32nd control example, the right to execute the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 reservation) is configured to be able to acquire a maximum of 4 pieces, for example, 4 special figure 1 reservations, special figure 2 reservations When the time-saving state is set in a state in which 0 pieces have been acquired, the first special symbol variation is executed prior to the second special symbol variation. In this case, the time saving end condition is satisfied before the second special symbol lottery is executed three times, and the time saving state ends without exhibiting the original game property, and the player's willingness to play. There was a problem that the

In addition, even in a state where four special 1 reserves are acquired when the time saving state is set, in order to execute the second special symbol variation three times during the time saving state, for example, a special symbol lottery When the time-saving end condition is established when the number of executions reaches 7 times, when the time-saving state is set without acquiring the special figure 1 reservation, the second special symbol variation It becomes possible to execute the game more than three times, and there is a problem that a game that is excessively advantageous to the player is provided to the original game property.

Therefore, in this 32nd control example, the time saving end condition established based only on the number of executions of the second special symbol variation, and the time saving established based on the total number of times of the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation End conditions are set, and the time saving state is ended when any of the time saving end conditions are satisfied. By configuring in this way, regardless of the acquisition status of the special figure 1 reservation, it is possible to execute the second special symbol variation of the predetermined number of times, and when the second special symbol variation of the predetermined number of times is performed You can definitely end the time saving state.

Furthermore, in this 32nd control example, in order to efficiently execute the second special symbol lottery during the time saving state, the first special symbol variation corresponding to the upper limit number (4 pieces) of the special figure 1 reservation, that is, the time saving state is set until the fourth special symbol variation is executed, a short time (0.5 seconds) variation time is It is configured to be set, and for the subsequent first special symbol variation, a variation time of 20 seconds is set. In other words, even though the time saving state is set, when the player who does not understand the game method in the time saving state performs a left-handed game, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol fluctuation executed during the time saving state If the fluctuation time of a short time (0.5 seconds) is always set, new first special symbol fluctuations will be executed one after another, and the first special symbol fluctuation and the second special symbol fluctuation will be added up. There was a possibility that the time-saving end condition, which is established based on the number of times, may be established.

On the other hand, in this 32nd control example, only when the first special symbol variation after the fifth time executed after the time saving state is set, that is, when the special figure 1 suspension is newly acquired during the time saving state For the first special symbol variation to be executed, a long (20 seconds) variation time is set, and the period required until one first special symbol variation is completed is lengthened. , it is configured to allow the player to secure a period for grasping the game method during the time-saving state. In other words, it is configured to suppress the establishment of the time saving end condition which is established based on the total number of times of the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation.

Furthermore, when the first special symbol variation is executed five times or more during the time saving state, the right to execute the second special symbol lottery by the right-handed game (special figure 2 reserved) as a variation effect of the first special symbol variation ) is configured to be executed, including an effect mode that prompts the player to acquire By configuring in this way, a player who does not know the game method to be executed during the time-saving state can grasp the correct game method more easily.

It should be noted that the fifth and subsequent first special symbol variations during the time-saving state described above cannot be executed when performing a normal game, that is, a game in which a right-handed game is executed continuously from the jackpot game. Since it becomes the first special pattern variation, even if it is configured to set a long variation time (20 seconds), the game efficiency during the time saving state is reduced for the player who is playing a normal game. isn't it.

Next, with reference to FIG. 957(c), the contents of the time saving final variation pattern table 202d4 will be described. FIG. 957(c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the time saving final variation pattern table 202d4. This time saving final variation pattern table 202d4 is the second special symbol variation that satisfies the time saving end condition, that is, the variation pattern that is set when the second special symbol variation is executed for the third time after the time saving state is set. It is a data table referred to when determining , and only the variation pattern for the second special symbol is defined as the special symbol type.

Specifically, in the time saving final variation pattern table 202d4, only the variation pattern corresponding to the second special symbol is defined as the special symbol type, and when the lottery result is "out", the acquired variation type counter For the entire range of CS1 value "0 to 198", "out" with a variation time of 30 seconds is defined as a variation pattern, and when the lottery result is "small win", the acquired variation type counter CS1 For the range of "0 to 99", the variation pattern is defined as "super short and small" with a variation time of 1 second, and for the range of "100 to 198", the variation pattern is a variation time of 20 A second "small hit" is defined. Then, when the lottery result is a "big win", a "big win" with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is defined as the fluctuation pattern for the entire range of the obtained fluctuation type counter CS1 value of "0 to 198". there is

That is, during the variation period of the second special symbol variation, which is the final variation of the time saving, after displaying the final result of the countdown production executed during the time saving state (“0” display of the number icon 808), the time saving state ends. It is configured to execute a charge effect (see FIG. 941 (a)) for prompting acquisition of special figure 2 pending until it is done. Therefore, since the time saving state is set, the third (final) second special symbol variation is longer than the first or second second special symbol variation to ensure the effect period of the charge effect. It is configured so that the time is set.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier to end the time saving state in the state of acquiring the special figure 2 reservation. Also, even in the case of winning in the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state, the case of winning in the first or second second special symbol lottery, and the third second special symbol Since the time efficiency (the number of times of the second special symbol lottery executed per unit time in the time saving state) can be greatly different from the case of winning the lottery, the player can receive the second lottery during the time saving state. It is possible to make the player interested in not only whether or not he/she wins in the special symbol lottery, but also how many times the second special symbol lottery wins in the time-saving state.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 957(c), when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery which is the time saving final variation (third time), two types of variation time can be set. Here, when "ultra-short win" with a variation time of 1 second is set as the variation pattern, the screen is destroyed while the number icon 808 "1" is displayed as a result of the countdown effect. , Effect of stop-displaying the 3rd symbol indicating winning, that is, variation effect indicating small winning by using the same performance mode as when small winning is won in the first and second second special symbol lotteries. is configured to run.

Then, when a "small win" with a variation time of 20 seconds is set as the variation pattern, the countdown is terminated from the state where "1" of the number icon 808 is displayed as the result of the countdown presentation. is displayed, the display screen is destroyed when switching to the charging effect, and the third symbol indicating winning is stopped and displayed.

In this way, when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery of the time saving final variation (third time), the variation pattern of stopping and displaying the third symbol indicating the small winning in a short time (1 second) and a long A second special symbol lottery for a time-saving final variation (third time) is provided to a player by configuring a variation pattern for stopping and displaying a third symbol indicating small winning in a time period (20 seconds). Since it is possible to notify that the small winning is won at various timings, the production effect of the countdown production can be enhanced. In addition, when a long (20 seconds) variation time is set, a countdown performance is executed in a performance mode to indicate that the second special symbol lottery for the final variation of time saving (third time) has been lost. Afterwards, the effect result indicating the winning of the small prize is displayed, so that it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 957 (c), when the second special symbol lottery of the time saving final variation (third time) is out, that is, after the second special symbol variation being executed is stopped and displayed When the state is set, when the second special symbol lottery of the time saving final variation (third time) is a hit, that is, after the second special symbol variation being executed is stopped and displayed, the winning game is executed. It is configured to set a variation pattern with a longer variation time than when it is set, and it is configured to be able to execute a charge performance that prompts the player to acquire the special figure 2 reservation by using the difference variation time. . Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to end the time saving state while acquiring the special figure 2 hold, and if there is a high possibility that the time saving state will continue and when the time saving state is set again after the jackpot game ends), by eliminating the period in which the charging performance is executed even during the fluctuation period of the final time saving fluctuation (third time), It is possible to make it easier to increase the number of executions of the jackpot game to be executed.

Returning to FIG. 952(a), the description is continued. The time saving grant table 202e is a data table that is referred to when setting the game state after the end of the jackpot game, and corresponds to the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game being executed (jackpot type set at the time of winning the jackpot). A game state (time saving end condition) is defined.

Here, with reference to FIG.954(b), the content of the time reduction provision table 202e is demonstrated. FIG.954(b) is the figure which showed typically the content prescribed|regulated by the time reduction provision table 202e. As shown in FIG. 954(b), the time saving provision table 202e defines the value of each counter referred to when determining whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied in association with each jackpot type.

Specifically, for the jackpot types "jackpot A", "jackpot C", and "jackpot D", the value of the short-time counter 203h is set to "10", the value of the small hit counter 203s is set to "1". "3" is defined in the value of the counter 203t in FIG. In the figure, "-" indicates)" is defined.

Although detailed description will be described later, the information is defined in the time saving grant table 202e, the time saving counter 203h, the small hit counter 203s, and the special figure 2 counter 203t are all updated during the time saving state. Then, when the value of the counter is updated to a value that satisfies a predetermined condition, it is determined that the time saving end condition is met, and processing for ending the time saving state is executed.

The time saving counter 203h is a counter for measuring the number of special symbol variations executed during the time saving state, based on the execution of the first special symbol variation or the second special symbol variation during the time saving state. The counter value is updated (decremented). In other words, the time saving counter 203h determines whether the time saving end condition is established based on the total number of special symbols obtained by summing the first special symbol variation frequency and the second special symbol variation frequency executed during the time saving state. This is a counter used for

The small winning counter 203s is a counter for measuring the number of executions of the small winning game executed during the time saving state, and when the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state is a small winning. The counter value is updated (decremented). That is, the small hit counter 203s is a counter used to determine whether the time saving end condition is established based on the number of small hitting games executed during the time saving state.

The special figure 2 counter 203t is a counter for measuring the number of times of the second special symbol variation executed during the time saving state, and the counter value is updated based on the fact that the second special symbol variation is performed during the time saving state. (subtracted). In other words, the special figure 2 counter 203t is a counter used to determine whether or not the time saving end condition is established based on the second special symbol variation count executed during the time saving state.

As shown in FIG. 954(b), when the jackpot type "jackpot A" is set, when setting the game state after the jackpot game ends, the value of the time reduction counter 203h is set to "10". "1" is set to the value of the hit counter 203s, and "3" is set to the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t. Therefore, the time saving state set based on the jackpot type "jackpot A" is "10 times" for the total number of special fluctuations, "1 time" for the number of winnings for the small hit, and "3 times" for the number of second special symbol fluctuations. When any one of the conditions is satisfied, it becomes a time saving state in which the time saving end condition is satisfied.

In this 32nd control example, when the value of each counter mentioned above is 1 or more, it comprises so that it may discriminate|determine that it is in a time-saving state. Therefore, when the jackpot type "jackpot B" is set, the contents of the time saving grant table 202e are defined so that the values of each counter are not set, so that after the jackpot game ends, the time saving state None, and the normal state is set.

In addition, in this 32nd control example, the value of each counter when the time saving state is set regardless of the set jackpot type is unified as the contents defined in the time saving grant table 202e. Without limitation, depending on the jackpot type, it may be configured to vary the value of each counter (especially the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t). By configuring in this way, it is possible to set time-saving end conditions with different contents according to the set jackpot type. In this case, for example, the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t that defines the contents of the time saving end condition based on the second special symbol fluctuation frequency executed during the time saving state may be changed according to the jackpot type, 1 jackpot type is set, the number of second special symbol variations that can be executed during the time saving state can be increased more than when other jackpot types are set. By configuring in this way, the game can be played while expecting that the player will set an advantageous time-saving state after the jackpot game ends.

In addition, it may be configured to have different values other than the special figure 2 counter 203t, for example, when a specific jackpot type is set, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to "4" which is less than "10" ” may be set. In this case, the second special symbol variation that can be executed during the time saving state by setting the time saving state in a state where the special figure 1 reservation is obtained and the special figure 2 reservation is not obtained The number of times will decrease (before the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t satisfies the predetermined condition and the time saving end condition is established, the value of the time saving counter 203h satisfies the predetermined condition and the time saving end condition is established Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of second special symbol fluctuations that can be executed during the time saving state. Furthermore, you may comprise so that "90" more than "10" may be set as a value of the time saving counter 203h. In this case, even if the left-handed game is continuously executed during the time-saving state, the time-saving end condition becomes difficult to be satisfied, so the first special symbol lottery is dared to be executed during the time-saving state, and a game aiming at winning a jackpot is played. It is possible to have a person do it. In this case, the case of winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state is more advantageous to the player than the case of winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state. For example, it is preferable to provide a privilege such as increasing the probability that the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, or increasing the number of round games executed during the jackpot game. By constructing in this way, the player is provided with the pleasure of having the player select whether to play the left-handed game for executing the first special symbol lottery or the right-handed game for the execution of the second special symbol lottery during the time-saving state. can do.

As shown in FIG. 954 (b), in this 32nd control example, three types of time saving end conditions are set for any jackpot type in which the time saving state is set, Without being limited to this, according to the jackpot type, it may be configured so that the type of the time saving end condition to be set is different, for example, the second that can be executed during the time saving state than other jackpot types When a special jackpot type capable of providing a time-saving state advantageous to the player by extremely increasing the number of 2 special symbol variations is set, without setting a numerical value to the special figure 2 counter 203t, You may comprise so that "1000" may be set to the value of the time saving counter 203h. In addition, by providing a big winning type in which no numerical value is set for the small winning counter 203s, the time saving state is continued even if V is not won during the small winning game executed after winning the small winning in the time saving state. You can

Furthermore, in this 32nd control example, the number of executions of the special symbol variation (the number of executions of the second special symbol variation) and the number of small hits are used as the elements that satisfy the time saving end condition. You may comprise so that time saving end conditions may be materialized using another element, without restricting to this. For example, a counter (special figure 2 reservation acquisition number counter) for measuring the acquisition number of the second special symbol lottery execution right (special figure 2 reservation) that is easier to acquire during the time saving state is provided, and special figure 2 reservation acquisition When the value of the number counter satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, "4"), the time saving end condition may be established, or the special figure 2 during the second special symbol fluctuation period of the specific number of times You may comprise so that time saving end conditions may be materialized triggered by the number of reservations having reached the upper limit. In addition, a time measuring means for measuring the elapsed time after the time saving state is set is provided, and when the elapsed time measured by the time measuring means satisfies a predetermined condition, the time saving end condition is established. Alternatively, every time a special pattern lottery is executed, an end lottery for determining whether or not to establish the time saving end condition is executed, and when the end lottery is won, the time saving end condition is established. You can

In this way, by configuring it so that various time saving end conditions can be established, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the period during which the time saving state continues, so that the game can be played during the time saving state. In order to prevent the time saving state from ending in a state where the special figure 2 suspension is not acquired (a state in which a small special figure 2 suspension is acquired) for the player who is becomes the upper limit number, the game can be played enthusiastically, and the operation of the game can be easily improved.

In addition, in the present 32nd control example, every time the second special symbol variation is executed, the value of the time reduction counter 203h and the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t are subtracted by a fixed number ("1"). However, for example, when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a specific loss result, the value of the time saving counter 203h and the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t may be configured not to be subtracted. In other words, even if the result of the special symbol lottery to be executed is the same, according to the value of the first per random number counter C1 obtained, the value of various counters referred to determine whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied. may be configured to have different update contents.

By configuring in this way, even if the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state is grasped, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the timing when the time saving state ends.

In addition, the value of the time saving counter 203h may be decremented when an end condition that can be satisfied depending on the processing contents of the various processes executed by the main controller 110 is satisfied. Specifically, when the lottery result of each symbol lottery executed in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set becomes a predetermined lottery result (for example, special winning election), or the normal symbol lottery Even when the result is a predetermined lottery result (for example, winning per special normal figure), the value of the time saving counter 203h may be subtracted.

In addition, in this control example, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is configured to be subtracted by 1, but according to the type of the end condition that has been established, a plurality of values of the time-saving counter 203h are collectively (for example, 2) It may be configured to be subtracted, or may be configured to be subtracted so that the value of the time saving counter 203h becomes "0" regardless of the current value of the time saving counter 203h. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the time saving state will continue, and it is possible to make the player interested in the game during the time saving state.

Furthermore, the conditions for ending the time saving state may be varied according to the contents of establishment of the conditions for which the time saving state is set (jackpot type). As a result, not only the execution of the jackpot game but also the jackpot type corresponding to the executed jackpot game can be made interesting to the player, and the interest in the game can be improved. .

The open scenario table 202g is a data table that defines operation modes for various mechanisms (the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the electric accessory 640a) whose operation is controlled by the main controller 110. , is referred to when setting the release scenario corresponding to the operation control to be executed when the operation conditions for operating the various mechanisms described above are established.

The variation pattern scenario table 202h defines a data table referred to when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol variation to be executed in correspondence with the game state and the number of special symbol variations after the end of the jackpot game. is.

Here, with reference to FIG. 958, the contents of the variation pattern scenario table 202h will be described. FIG. 958 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202h. As shown in Figure 958, in the variation pattern scenario table 202h, the number of variations after the end of the jackpot game (number of special figure 1 variations, number of special figure 2 variations, total number of times), and various variation pattern tables for the game state is stipulated.

By configuring in this way, even during the time saving state in which a plurality of time saving end conditions are set, for example, regardless of the number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 fluctuation, to the special figure 2 fluctuation that will be the final fluctuation of the time saving state The variation pattern can be determined by referring to the variation pattern table for time saving final variation.

Without being limited to this, it may be configured such that different variation pattern tables can be determined under the same conditions. For example, the variation pattern scenario table to be determined may be determined by lottery.

Returning to FIG. 950, the description continues. The RAM 203 stores the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 in addition to the various counters shown in FIG. and a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 978) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 977) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 976) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

Also, as shown in FIG. 952(b), the RAM 203 stores a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a number of first special symbol reserved balls. Counter 203d, second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, game state storage area 203g, time saving counter 203h, jackpot start flag 203j, jackpot middle flag 203k, small hit type storage area 203m, small hit It has a start flag 203n, a small hit medium flag 203o, a V passage big hit type storage area 203p, a V flag 203q, a V passage flag 203r, a small hit counter 203s, a special figure 2 counter 203t, and a memory area 203z.

The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area) as shown in FIG. is winning information (first winning random number counter C1, first winning type counter C2, small winning type counter C5, stop type selection counter C3 , values of the variation type counter CS1) are stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), each value of each counter C1 to C5 and CS1 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four Among the vacant areas of the reservation areas (first reservation area to fourth reservation area), the area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in ascending order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest start winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main controller 110, each value (winning information) is shifted (moved) to the execution area, and based on the values of the counters C1 to C5 and CS1 stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in the other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to the reservation area with the area number 1 smaller (first reservation area to third reservation area). done. In this control example, in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which the start winning data is stored.

The second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b stores the counter value acquired for the start winning to the second ball entrance 640 for the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, and The only difference is that the number of reserved areas is changed to one, and the rest of the configuration is the same, so detailed description will be omitted.

Like the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each of these areas stores a second winning random number counter C4.

More specifically, at the timing when the game ball passes through the normal starting opening (through gate) 67, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the four holding areas (holding first area to reserved fourth area) are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the first special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning (normal drawing winning information) is stored while the order of starting winning is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when the winning lottery for the normal symbol is performed, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is set in the execution area. Based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4 that is shifted (moved) to the execution area and stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes empty. Shift processing is performed to pack the winning information data into a reserve area with an area number smaller by one. Further, the data shift is performed only for the reserved area in which the winning information data is stored.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display of the first special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) ( It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of waiting times) of variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero. is incremented by 1 (see S804 in FIG. 970). On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed (see S212 in FIG. 964).

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N of holding the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the first special symbol reserved ball number command (S213 in FIG. 964, FIG. 970 S805). The first special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 is held by the main controller 110 by the first special symbol reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110 every time the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is changed. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of held balls itself in the variable display. As a result, the number of holding balls of variable display managed by the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed to the actual holding ball of variable display that was held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next pending ball number command received.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of pending balls based on the number of pending balls command, and every time the number of pending balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of pending balls. Send a pitch command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls pattern (reserved pattern) of the third pattern display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the number of reserved balls command for display.

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e starts winning the second ball entrance 640 with respect to the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, and the number of reserved balls (special figure 2 reserved) is Since they are different in that they are stored, a detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, when the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the second special symbol reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is the normal symbol (second symbol) variable display held ball number (standby number of times) up to four times. The initial value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time the game ball passes through the normal starting port (through gate) 67 and the number of reserved balls of variable display increases. 1 is added up to (see S1204 in FIG. 973). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S1105 in FIG. 972).

When the game ball passes through the normal starting port (through gate) 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times M of change display in the normal symbol is reserved) is less than 4, the second hit random number counter The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (see S1206 in FIG. 973). On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the normal starting opening (through gate) 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. (S1203 in FIG. 973: No).

The game state storage area 203g is a storage area for temporarily storing the currently set game state, and the game state set after the end of the jackpot game (the setting state of the time reduction counter 203h, the small win counter 203s The game state corresponding to the setting situation, the setting situation of the special figure 2 counter 203t) is stored. Specifically, the normal state is stored when the value of the time saving counter 203h, the small hitting counter 203s, and the special figure 2 counter 203t is 0, and the time saving counter 203h, the small hitting counter 203s, the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t When a value greater than 0 is set, the time saving state is stored.

Furthermore, when the jackpot game is being executed, there is also a jackpot game state (jackpot state) indicating that the jackpot game is being executed, and type information indicating the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game being executed. A small winning game state (small winning state) indicating that the small winning game is being executed in a state in which the small winning game is being executed, and a small winning state being executed. It is configured to also store type information (type information on the corresponding big hit type) indicating the small hit type corresponding to the small hit game. In addition, it is configured to also store per-universal figure per game information indicating that the per-universal figure game is being executed.

A state command is set based on the information stored (memorized) in the game state storage area 203g, and the state command is output to the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. The voice lamp control device 113 receives the output state command, and temporarily stores information about the current game state in the secondary game state storage area 223g.

The information stored in the game state storage area 203g is configured to be able to hold the information even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and is executed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. In the start-up process (see FIG. 977), a state command corresponding to the information stored in the game state storage area 203g is set.

As a result, even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, the current game state can be determined by the sound lamp control device 113 side.

The time-saving counter 203h is a counter for indicating a state in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set, and a value corresponding to a case in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set is set. In this time-saving counter 203h, in the jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 979) executed by the main controller 110, when it is determined that the ending period ends (S1913 in FIG. 979: Yes), execution A value corresponding to the jackpot type of the middle jackpot game is set (see S1915 in FIG. 979). Then, when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed (see S220 in FIG. 964), or because the high probability state of the normal pattern is not set during the jackpot game, excessive benefits are given to the player during the jackpot game. can be suppressed.

In addition, in this 32nd control example, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set, based on the special symbol lottery (variation), the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted, and the time saving When the value of the counter 203h becomes 0, the high-probability state of the normal design ends, and the state shifts to the low-probability state of the normal design. Also, if the value of the small hit counter 203s described later becomes 0 (S703 of FIG. 969: Yes), if the value of the special figure 2 counter becomes 0 (S611 of FIG. 968: Yes), that is, other It is also cleared to 0 when the time saving end condition is satisfied. By configuring in this way, a value greater than 0 is held as the value of the time saving counter 203h when the time saving end condition of 1 is satisfied, and although the normal state is set, the time saving end condition can be suppressed.

In addition, in this 32nd control example, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state, the normal state is set before the jackpot game is started. Without being limited to this, for example, until the next big win game is executed (until the big win is won), the normal symbol high probability state may be configured to continue. By configuring in this way, the high probability state of the normal symbol can be continued even during the jackpot game, so that the game ball is entered into the first variable winning device 65 by the right-handed game, and the second winning game. A game of entering a game ball into the ball opening 640 can be executed in parallel.

In addition, in the 32nd control example, when a small win is won in the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state, the normal state is set before the small win game is started. However, without being limited to this, for example, the high probability state of normal symbols may be continued until the small winning game ends. By configuring in this way, the high probability state of the normal symbol can be continued even during the small winning game, so that the game ball is entered into the second variable winning device 650 by the right-handed game, and the second A game in which a game ball is entered into the ball entrance 640 can be executed in parallel. Therefore, even if the small winning game is started before acquiring the new special figure 2 reservation after the time saving state is set, it is possible to acquire the new special figure 2 reservation during the small winning game. becomes possible.

The jackpot start flag 203j is a flag indicating whether or not to start a jackpot. If the big win start flag 203j is ON, it means that it is time to start a big win, and if it is OFF, it means that it is not time to start a big win. This jackpot start flag 203j is set to ON when the end timing of the variation display indicating the jackpot has come (see S219 in FIG. 964). Also, the jackpot start flag 203j is set to OFF when the jackpot start is set (see S1903 in FIG. 979).

The jackpot flag 203k is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot game (special game state) is in progress. If the big winning flag 203k is ON, it means that the big winning game is in progress, and if it is OFF, it means that the big winning game is not in progress. The jackpot middle flag 203k is set to ON when a jackpot is won by a special symbol lottery and a jackpot game (special game state) is started (see S1904 in FIG. 979). In addition, it is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot game (special game state) (see S1919 in FIG. 979). Then, in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 964), this during-big-hit flag 203k is referenced to determine whether or not the game is in the middle of a big-hit (see S201 in FIG. 964).

The small hit type storage area 203m is a storage area for temporarily storing the small hit type set to the won small hit, and when it is determined that the small hit is won (S409 in FIG. 966: Yes ), the acquired small hit type is temporarily stored. Then, in the small winning start setting process (see S223 in FIG. 967) executed to start the small winning game, the stored small winning type is read, and the opening scenario corresponding to the read small winning type is set. (See S501 in FIG. 967). Also, the big hit type corresponding to the read small hit type is stored in the V passage big hit type storage area 203p (see S502 in FIG. 967).

The small winning start flag 203n is a flag indicating that it is the start timing of the small winning game. The lottery result of the special symbol lottery is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol that is the small hit is stopped (see S504 in FIG. 967). It is determined that the small hit start flag 203n is ON, and when it is determined that it is the start timing of the small hit game, it is set to OFF (see S2003 in FIG. 980). This small winning start flag 203n is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power failure or the like occurs, it is held by backing up the state immediately before the power failure or the like occurs. configured to be

The small hit medium flag 203o is a flag indicating that the small hit game is in progress. The lottery result of the special symbol lottery is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol that is the small hit is stopped (see S504 in FIG. 967). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit (when it is determined that the game of the set number of rounds of the small hit has ended), it is set to OFF (see S2018 in FIG. 980). This small hit medium flag 203o is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when power failure etc. occurs, it is held by backing up the state immediately before power failure etc. configured to be

The V passing jackpot type storage area 203p is stored when a game ball that has won a prize in the second variable prize device (V prize device) 650 is detected by a specific region (V switch 650e3) while a small prize game is being executed. This is a storage area in which data for determining the set jackpot type is stored. The V passage big win type storage area 203p stores the data value corresponding to the big win type corresponding to the judged small win type when the special symbol lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a small win winning and the fluctuation of the special symbol stops. (see S502 in FIG. 967). When the ball flows down the special discharge channel 650e2 in the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 and the game ball is detected by the specific area (V switch 650e3), it is stored in the V passing jackpot type storage area 203p. The V flag 203q corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the data value is set to ON. At the end of the small winning game, the data value stored in the V passing big winning type storage area 203p is cleared. This V pass jackpot type storage area 203p is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power failure occurs, the state immediately before the power failure occurs is backed up. is configured to be held by

The V flag 203q is set when the game ball flows down the special discharge channel 650e2 in the second variable prize winning device (V prize winning device) 650 during the small winning game and the game ball is detected by the specific area (V switch 650e3). In addition, a flag corresponding to the big win type corresponding to the type of the small winning game being executed is set to ON. At the end of the small hit game, it is determined whether this V flag 203q is on (see S2013 in FIG. 980), and when it is determined that the V flag 203q is on (S2013 in FIG. 980: Yes), it is turned on The jackpot type to be executed is determined from the set flag, and the start of the corresponding jackpot game is set (see S2015 in FIG. 9807). This V flag 203q is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as when the RAM is cleared. is configured as

The V passage flag 203r is a flag used for determining the state in which the V flag 203q is set to ON during the small winning game, and is set to ON when the V flag 203q is set to ON. be done. In the 32nd control example, most of the game balls that have won the second variable winning device (V winning device 650) during the small winning game are configured to flow down the special discharge channel 650e2. It is set to ON in the V passing process (see S109 in FIG. 975) corresponding to the game ball that first wins (see S1407 in FIG. 975).

Then, in the V passage processing (see S109 in FIG. 975), it is determined whether the V passage flag 203r is set to ON (S1401 in FIG. 975). : Yes), and the processing of S1402 to S1409 in the V passing processing (see S109 in FIG. 975) is skipped. As a result, even when the prescribed area (V switch 650e3) detects a plurality of game balls during one small winning game, only the V passing process corresponding to the first detected game ball is executed. It will be. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the processing executed during the small winning game, and the V passing command is transmitted to the voice ramp control device 113 a plurality of times, and the V passing management on the side of the voice ramp control device 113 is complicated. can be prevented from becoming

The small win counter 203s is a counter for measuring the number of times a small win is won in a special pattern lottery executed during the time saving state, and determines whether or not a time saving end condition is established based on the number of times the small win wins. referred to when In the small hit counter 203s, in the jackpot control process (S1804 in FIG. 979), when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending period (end timing of the jackpot game) (S1913 in FIG. 979: Yes), time saving grant A value defined in the table 202e is set (S1915 in FIG. 979).

And, in the small winning time saving update process (see S615 in Figure 969) executed in the time saving update process (see S224 in Figure 968) of the special symbol variation process (S104 in Figure 964), it was determined that the small hit was won. If so (S701 in FIG. 969: Yes), the value of the counter is decremented by one. When it is determined that the value of the small hit counter 203s after the subtraction is 0 (S703 in FIG. 969: Yes), the time saving end condition is established, so the normal state is set as the game state (S704 in FIG. 969 ). In addition, the 32nd control example sets a plurality of time saving end conditions for ending the time saving state, and even if any of the time saving end conditions are satisfied (for example, time saving end based on the number of special symbol fluctuations Even if the condition is established), the value of the small winning counter 203s is set to 0 (reset) (S606 in FIG. 968). Thus, among the plurality of time saving end conditions, even if the time saving end condition other than the time saving end condition referring to the value of the small hit counter 203 s is met, the value of the small hit counter 203 s is set to 0 (reset ), it is possible to suppress the situation where the process of subtracting the value of the small winning counter 203s is continued even though the time saving state has ended. In addition, even if any of the time-saving end conditions are satisfied, the values of various counters used to determine whether the time-saving end condition is satisfied when ending the time-saving state are set to the initial value (0). Since it is configured as described above, it is possible to prevent the process from becoming complicated after the time saving state is ended.

The special figure 2 counter 203t is a counter for measuring the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state, and whether or not the time saving end condition established based on the number of second special symbol fluctuations is established. Referred when making a decision. In this special figure 2 counter 203t, in the jackpot control process (S1804 in FIG. 979), when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending period (end timing of the jackpot game) (S1913 in FIG. 979: Yes), time saving A value defined in the grant table 202e is set (S1915 in FIG. 979).

Then, in the time saving update process (see S224 in Figure 968) of the special symbol variation process (S104 in Figure 964), when it is determined that the type of the special symbol variation executed this time is the second special symbol variation (Figure 968 S608: Yes), the value of the counter is decremented by one. When it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t after subtraction is 0 (S611 of FIG. 968: Yes), since the time saving end condition is established, the normal state is set as the game state (of FIG. 968 S612). In addition, the 32nd control example sets a plurality of time saving end conditions for ending the time saving state, and even if any of the time saving end conditions are satisfied (for example, time saving end based on the number of special symbol fluctuations Even if the condition is established), the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t is set to 0 (reset) (S606 in FIG. 968). Thus, among the plurality of time saving end conditions, even if the time saving end condition other than the time saving end condition referring to the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t is established, the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t is set to 0 Since it is (reset), it is possible to suppress the situation where the process of subtracting the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t is continued even though the time saving state has ended. In addition, even if any of the time-saving end conditions are satisfied, the values of various counters used to determine whether the time-saving end condition is satisfied when ending the time-saving state are set to the initial value (0). Since it is configured as described above, it is possible to prevent the process from becoming complicated after the time saving state is terminated.

The other memory area 203z is set (stored) with other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, and the like.

Returning to FIG. 950, the description continues. The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, the selection button 600, and the like. The other devices 228 include various drive motors for operating drive accessories for presentation provided in the pachinko machine 10 .

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.).

In addition, the frame button 22 connected to the sound lamp control device 113 has a production button 22a. The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the production button 22a, When operated, the display control device 114 is instructed to change the stage displayed on the third pattern display device 81 or change the contents of the effect at the time of super reach. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the rear image is an image displayed on the rear side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

When the effect button 22a is operated by the player, an accessory drive command is transmitted to the other device 228 in order to drive an accessory for effect (not shown), or a command corresponding to the operation content of the effect button 22a is sent. A sound output command for outputting sound to the sound output device 226 is set, and a lamp output command for causing the lamp display device 227 to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the operation content of the production button 22a is set. can be configured to

Furthermore, the selection button 600 connected to the audio lamp control device 113 has a middle button 600a, an up button 600b, a right button 600c, a down button 600d, and a left button 600e, as shown in FIG. The lamp control device 113 monitors input from each button included in the selection button 600, executes processing for changing the game environment according to the content of the input, and displays a display for changing the game environment. The display control device 114 is instructed on the content and the display content for showing the game environment after the change.

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the error type. Send to device 114 . The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

Here, the contents defined in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the thirty-second control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 959(a), the ROM 222 of the voice ramp control device 113 contains a variation pattern selection table 222a, a subjugation number selection table 222b, a subjugation performance mode selection table 222c, an additional reduction value selection table 222d, At least an effect stage data table 222e and a game environment data table 222f are stored.

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, a variation pattern of each variation pattern type (out of range, out of reach, various types of reach, etc.) is set to a counter value for selecting a variation pattern (not shown). The sound ramp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, the result of the suitability determination, and the acquired counter value for selection. This allows the audio ramp control device 113 to select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the variation time and the type of variation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode from being displayed frequently, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early.

The subjugation number selection table 222b is a data table that is referred to when determining the total number of enemies in the initial stage of the subjugation performance executed during the jackpot game, and is a data table that is used to determine the total number of enemies in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state. It is referred to during the opening period of the jackpot game (first jackpot game) executed when winning (see S3803 in FIG. 989).

Here, the details defined in the subjugation number selection table 222b will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 960(a). FIG. 960(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the subjugation number selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 960(a), the kill count selection table 222b has different kill counts corresponding to the jackpot type set in the jackpot game to be executed and the acquired value of the first effect counter 223f1. stipulated.

Specifically, the jackpot type is "jackpot A, jackpot C" corresponding to the short-time jackpot, and the value of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 is in the range of "0 to 44", and the number of kills is "1000". , the number of defeats "777" is defined for the range of "45-89", and the number of defeats "500" is defined for the range of "90-99". In addition, when the jackpot type is "jackpot B" corresponding to a normal jackpot, and the value of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 is in the range of "0 to 79", the number of kills "1000" is "80 to The subjugation number "500" is defined for each range of "99".

In other words, when the number of subjugations (total number of enemies) displayed when the subjugation production is started is "1000", the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, rather than when it is "500". The ratio of each subjugation number is stipulated so that the probability is high. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible for the player to predict the game state that will be set after the jackpot game ends when the subjugation effect is started.

In addition, only when the jackpot type corresponding to the time-saving jackpot is set, the number of defeats "777" can be determined. When the performance mode of subjugation is determined, the player can be informed that the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game without waiting for the end of the subjugation performance. In this way, in the case of executing an effect (subjugation effect) for notifying the player of the game state set after the end of the big win game before the end of the big win game, the player is given time saving after the end of the big win game. The timing of notifying that a state (game state advantageous to the player) is set arrives at various timings, so that the player can always watch the subjugation performance executed during the jackpot game. Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced.

The subjugation performance mode selection table 222c is a data table referred to when determining the performance scenario in the subjugation performance, and is a jackpot game executed when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state. It is referred to during the opening period of (first time jackpot game) (see S3803 in FIG. 989).

Here, the contents defined in the subjugation effect mode selection table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. 960(b). FIG. 960(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the subjugation effect mode selection table 222c. As shown in FIG. 960(b), the subjugation effect mode selection table 222c is associated with the jackpot type, the subjugation number determined by referring to the subjugation number selection table 222b, and the acquired value of the second effect counter 223f2. , different scenario types are defined. Each scenario type includes, as a subjugation production scenario, the upper limit of the number of enemies (number of remaining enemies) that can be reduced in each of the five attack productions executed during the subjugation production, and the production of the subjugation production. and the minimum number of remaining enemies that can be displayed as a result.

Specifically, the jackpot type is "jackpot A, jackpot C" corresponding to the time-saving jackpot, the number of subjugations is "1000", and the value of the acquired second effect counter 223f2 is in the range of "0 to 49" Then, "scenario type 1" as the subjugation production scenario, for the range of "50 to 79", "scenario type 2" as the subjugation production scenario, for the range of "80 to 99", as the subjugation production scenario "Scenario type 3" is defined. Further, when the defeat number is "777", "scenario type 4" is defined as the defeat effect scenario for the entire range of "0 to 99" for the acquired value of the second effect counter 223f2. Then, the subjugation number is "500", the acquired value of the second production counter 223f2 is in the range of "0 to 49", and the subjugation production scenario "scenario type 5" is applied to the range of "50 to 79". "Scenario type 6" is defined as the subjugation effect scenario, and "Scenario type 7" is defined as the subjugation effect scenario for the range of "80 to 99".

On the other hand, the jackpot type is "jackpot B" corresponding to the normal jackpot, the number of defeats is "1000", and the value of the acquired second effect counter 223f2 is in the range of "0 to 59". "Scenario type 8" is "scenario type 9" as subjugation production scenario for the range of "60 to 89", and "scenario type 10" is subjugation production scenario for the range of "90 to 99". stipulated. The subjugation number is "500", the value of the acquired second effect counter 223f2 is in the range of "0 to 59", and the subjugation effect scenario "scenario type 11" is in the range of "60 to 79". "Scenario type 12" is defined as the subjugation effect scenario, and "Scenario type 13" is defined as the subjugation effect scenario for the range of "80 to 99".

Here, as described above with reference to FIGS. 934 to 937, when the subjugation effect is executed, the attack effect is executed five times. is configured to execute an effect that reduces the Further, in each attack effect, if the player does not press the effect button 22a, an additional attack effect for reducing the number of enemies is performed during an interval period set after the end of the attack effect (after the end of the round game). is configured to be executable.

In this 32nd control example, the upper limit of the number of enemies (the number of remaining enemies) that can be reduced in each attack presentation executed during the subjugation presentation is configured to be determined in advance based on the subjugation presentation scenario. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the execution of a subjugation effect in which the degree of decrease in the number of enemies is biased, thereby reducing the effect of the effect.

In addition, instead of scenario management of the number of remaining enemies displayed after each attack production is finished, scenario management is performed on only the minimum number of remaining enemies that can be displayed after each attack production is completed, and the number of remaining enemies actually displayed is calculated. Since the numbers are configured to have a range, the subjugation performance can be executed with more performance patterns than the predetermined number of scenario types, so the performance effect can be enhanced.

Further, in the thirty-second control example, the effect mode for reducing the number of enemies is configured and executed to vary depending on whether or not the player presses the effect button 22a during the attack effect. The number of enemies displayed as the number of remaining enemies after the attack is configured to differ depending on the presentation mode. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of selecting whether or not to press the effect button 22a during the attack effect.

The additional decrease value selection table 222d is a data table that is referred to when an additional attack effect is executed during an interval period without the player pressing the effect button 22a in each attack effect in the subjugation effect, It is referred to in the effect processing during the first interval (see S3809 in FIG. 992). By referring to this additional reduction value selection table 222d, the number of enemies to be reduced in the additional attack effect is determined.

Here, the contents defined in the additional decrease value selection table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 961 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the additional decrement value selection table 222d. As shown in FIG. 961, the additional reduction value selection table 222d contains the scenario type determined with reference to the subjugation mode selection table 222c, the current number of remaining enemies (the value of the remaining subjugation number counter 223j), and the subjugation The number of differences from the number of enemies stipulated in the production scenario, the presence or absence of a specific number (unique specific number, common specific number) in the range of the difference, and the acquired value of the first production counter 223f1 are associated with each other. , The number of enemies (additional reduction value) to be reduced in the additional attack production is specified.

Specifically, when the scenario type is "scenario type 1, 8", the number of differences is "401 or more", and the specific number is "present", the acquired value of the first effect counter 223f1 is "0 to 99”, the additional decrement value is defined as “decrease to a specific number”, and when the specific number is “none”, the acquired value of the first effect counter 223f1 is “0 to 99”. For the entire range of , "decrease to determined value" is specified as an additional reduction value. Further, when the number of differences is "101 to 400" and the specific number is "yes", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 is in the range of "0 to 49", and the additional decrease value is "specific number "Current status -50" is defined as an additional reduction value for the range of "50 to 99". On the other hand, when the specific number is "none", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 is defined as "current state -50" as the additional decrease value for the range of "0 to 49", and "50 to 99”, an additional reduction value of “decrease to decision value” is defined.

Then, if the number of differences is "100 or less" and the specific number is "present", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 is in the range of "0 to 29", and the additional decrease value is "up to the specific number "Decrease" is specified, and "Decrease to a determined value" is specified as an additional decrease value for the range of "30 to 99". On the other hand, when the specific number is "none", the value of the obtained first effect counter 223f1 is defined as "determined value + 10" as the additional decrease value for the range of "0 to 29", and "30 to 99”, an additional reduction value of “decrease to decision value” is defined.

When the scenario type is "scenario type 2, 3, 9, 10", the number of differences is "51 or more", and the specific number is "present", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 is "0 to 49 ”, the additional decrement value is defined as “decrease to a specific number”, and the additional decrement value is defined as “current state-20” for the range of “50 to 99”. On the other hand, when the specific number is "none", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 is defined as "current state -20" as an additional decrease value for the range of "0 to 49", and "50 to 99”, an additional reduction value of “decrease to decision value” is defined.

Then, if the number of differences is "50 or less" and the specific number is "present", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 is in the range of "0 to 29", and the additional decrement value is "up to the specific number". "Decrease" is specified, and "Decrease to a determined value" is specified as an additional decrease value for the range of "30 to 99". On the other hand, when the specific number is "none", the value of the obtained first effect counter 223f1 is defined as "determined value + 10" as the additional decrease value for the range of "0 to 29", and "30 to 99”, an additional reduction value of “decrease to decision value” is defined.

When the scenario type is "scenario type 5, 11, 12", the number of differences is "21 or more", and the specific number is "yes", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 is between "0 to 49". For the range, "decrease to a specific number" is specified as an additional decrement value, and for the range of "50 to 99", "current state -5" is specified as an additional decrement value. On the other hand, when the specific number is "none", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 is set to "0 to 49", and "current status -5" is specified as the additional decrease value, and "50 to 99”, an additional reduction value of “decrease to decision value” is defined.

Then, if the number of differences is “20 or less” and the specific number is “present”, the value of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 is “determined value” for the entire range of “0 to 99”. If the specific number is "None", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 is reduced to the entire range of "0 to 99", and the additional decrement value is "decrease to the determined value. ” is stipulated.

When the scenario type is "scenario type 6, 7, 13", regardless of the number of differences, when the specific number is "yes", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 is "0 to 99". For the entire range, "decrease to a specific number" is specified as an additional decrease value, and if the specific number is "none", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 falls within the range of "0 to 19". On the other hand, "no decrease" is specified as the additional decrease value, and "decrease to the determined value" is specified as the additional decrease value for the range of "20 to 99". Finally, when the scenario type is "scenario type 4", the value of the acquired first effect counter 223f1 is for the entire range of "0 to 99" regardless of the number of differences and the presence or absence of the specific number. Therefore, "decrease to determined value" is specified as an additional decrease value.

The effect stage data table 222e is a data table in which information about the effect stage that can be set as the background type is defined in advance. Then, transition conditions for each stage type (rabbit stage, hero stage) are defined. In the thirty-second control example, it is determined based on the game progress and the set mode type whether or not the transition condition for the stage type is satisfied, and the stage is changed.

Here, the contents defined in the effect stage data table 222e will be described with reference to FIG. 962(a). FIG. 962(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the production stage data table 222e. As shown in FIG. 962(a), the effect stage data table 222e defines mode types and transition conditions for the stage types in association with the stage types, and roughly speaking, the active mode is set. When the transition condition of the stage type is most likely to be satisfied, when the normal mode is set, the transition condition is less likely to be satisfied than in the active mode, and when the fixed mode is set, the transition condition is not satisfied. Each content is specified.

Specifically, if the mode type is "normal" and the stage type is "rabbit", the transition condition for the stage type is "special figure fluctuation 50 times" or "part of the jackpot fluctuation start ( Low probability)” is stipulated, and for the stage type “brave”, as a transition condition for the stage type, “50 special fluctuations” or “part of the start of the jackpot fluctuation (low probability)” stipulated. In addition, if the mode type is "active" and the stage type is "rabbit", the transition condition for the stage type is "special figure fluctuation 20 times" or "part of the jackpot fluctuation start (high probability) ”, “5 seconds after the start of the special figure fluctuation when the special figure transition condition is established” is defined, and for the stage type “brave”, the stage type transition condition is 20 special figure fluctuations ”, Or "a part of the start of jackpot fluctuation (high probability)" is defined. For the mode type "fixed", transition conditions are not defined regardless of the stage type.

Here, each transition condition will be explained. "Special figure variation 50 times" is a transition condition (special figure variation transition condition) that is established when the number of executions of special symbol variation executed after the stage type is set reaches 50 times. That is, when the normal mode is set, every time the special symbol variation is executed 50 times, the stage change effect for changing the stage type is executed. It should be noted that, in the present 32nd control example, as a special figure fluctuation transition condition, for the mode type that is set, the fixed number of times is defined in advance, but not limited to this, special figure fluctuation within a predetermined range A means for determining the number of times (for example, 10 times to 50 times) by lottery may be provided, and the special figure fluctuation number determined by the means may be configured to be settable as a special figure fluctuation transition condition. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict at what timing the stage change effect will be executed.

Also, in this case, it is configured to vary the number of special figure fluctuations determined by lottery according to the mode type that is set, and mode types (for example, "normal mode") in which transition conditions are difficult to hold However, different data tables are set according to the mode type that is set so that the number of special figure fluctuations that is greater than the mode type in which the transition condition is likely to be established (for example, "active mode") is more likely to be determined by lottery. It is preferable to configure so that the lottery used is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the stage change effect at intervals corresponding to the mode type (the frequency of execution of the stage change effect) arbitrarily set by the player.

One of the transition conditions, "a part of the start of the variation of the jackpot", is a variation effect setting process for setting the variation display of the third symbol set based on the start of the special symbol variation (see S4304 in Fig. 995). ), it is a transition condition (hit variation transition condition) established when a performance mode with a stage change performance is determined as a performance mode of a variable performance corresponding to a special symbol variation for winning a big hit. Although detailed description is omitted, in the thirty-second control example, in the processing of S4404 in FIG. The mode type in which the transition condition is difficult to satisfy (for example, "normal mode") is more likely to satisfy the transition condition (for example, "active mode"). Rather, it is configured to make it more difficult to determine an effect mode involving a stage change effect.

By configuring in this way, even in a state where the special figure fluctuation transition condition is not established, the stage change effect can be executed by the establishment of the hit fluctuation transition condition, so that the player is unexpected. A stage change effect can be executed at a certain timing, for example, two special symbol variations executed continuously. Furthermore, since the win fluctuation transition condition is established only when the big win is won, the degree of expectation for the big win can be increased when the stage change performance is executed at unexpected timing.

In the 32nd control example, since the predetermined number of times is set as the special figure fluctuation transition condition, the player can easily grasp the interval at which the stage change performance is executed according to the special figure fluctuation transition condition. Therefore, it is possible to easily comprehend the stage change effect to be executed based on the establishment of the hit variation transition condition. Therefore, it is possible to motivate a player who wants to quickly perceive the winning of the jackpot to play the game to grasp the interval at which the special figure fluctuation transition condition is satisfied.

Furthermore, one of the transition conditions "5 seconds after the start of the special pattern fluctuation when the special pattern transition condition is established" is for setting the fluctuation display of the third pattern that is set based on the start of the special pattern fluctuation In the fluctuation production setting process (see S4304 in FIG. 995), as the production form of the fluctuation production of the third symbol, the transition condition established when the production form to execute the stage change production during the special figure fluctuation is determined (special Figure transition condition).

In the thirty-second control example, the three transition conditions described above are defined as the conditions for executing the stage change effect, but other transition conditions may be set, and the special symbol variation is executed. In this state, the player may operate the operating means (the frame button 22 and the selection button 600) to execute the stage change effect.

Further, as described above, in the thirty-second control example, even in the same mode type, different transition conditions are defined according to the set stage type. The "rabbit stage" is configured so that the transition condition is more likely to be satisfied than the "brave stage". By configuring in this way, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of predicting which transition condition will be satisfied when the stage change effect is executed based on the set stage type.

The game environment data table 222f is a data table in which the contents of each game environment are defined in advance, and when a game environment is selected by the player, data corresponding to the selected game environment is read out, It is stored in the game environment storage area 223u.

Furthermore, when the fixed mode is set, the stage change effect is executed only partly when the first special symbol variation is started after the end of the jackpot game in the state where the holding train is confirmed. It consists of In other words, when the stage change effect is executed in spite of the fixed mode being set, the player is notified of the winning of the big win. Therefore, even for a player who selects the fixed mode, that is, a player who desires that the stage change effect is not executed, the stage change effect is executed on the condition that the privilege of winning the jackpot is granted. can be increased, and discomfort caused by the execution of the stage change effect can be reduced.

Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 959(b). As shown in FIG. 959(b), the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, a fluctuation start flag 223d, a stop Type selection flag 223e, effect counter 223f (first effect counter 223f1, second effect counter 223f2), secondary game state storage area 223g, time saving information update area 223h, subjugation number counter 223i, remaining subjugation number counter 223j, specific number displayed Flag 223k, Rush period measurement counter 223m, Prize ball counter 223n, Retained consecutive flag 223o, Round number counter 223p, SW effective time counter 223q, Right hitting flag 223r, V winning flag 223s, Effect fixed flag 223t, Game environment storage At least an area 223u and another memory area 223z are provided.

The winning information storage area 223a includes one execution area, four areas (first area for special figure 1 to fourth area for special figure 1) corresponding to the first special symbol, and one area corresponding to the second special symbol. It has two areas (first area for special figure 2), and each of these areas stores winning information output from the main controller 110, respectively. Based on the information (winning information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the lottery results based on the winning information are pre-determined (read ahead) by the voice lamp control device 113 before the special symbol lottery is executed. In the winning information storage area 223a, when it is determined that a winning information command has been received (S3209 in FIG. 983: Yes) in the command determination processing of the sound lamp control device 113 (see S3113 in FIG. 983), the main control The first area corresponding to the special symbol type included in the winning information based on the winning information command (winning command) transmitted from the device 110 is stored in order. The winning information command (winning command) transmitted from main controller 110 is set when the prefetching process of main controller 110 (see S807 in FIG. 971) is executed, and the main process of main controller 110 ( 978), is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S1801 in FIG. 978).

Each winning information stored in each area of this winning information storage area 223a is shifted by one (second area ) is transferred to the first area. As a result, when the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information command transmitted from the main control device 110 is executed, the sound lamp control device 113 side can surely grasp.

In addition, since it is possible to shift the winning information (special symbol prefetch information) transmitted by the winning information command to the execution area (area corresponding to the special symbol variation currently being executed), for example, winning Based on the reception of the information command, the effect using the period from the start timing of the special symbol variation to be executed next to the timing until the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information command ends (so-called look-ahead continuous effect), the winning information corresponding to the winning information command can be held until the above-described look-ahead continuous effect ends.

In addition, in the 32nd control example, since up to four pieces of winning information related to the first special symbol (information that can be obtained when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64) can be retained and stored, the winning information The storage area 223a is configured to have first to fourth areas in addition to the execution area. If up to four pieces of prize winning information related to special symbols can be retained and stored, the winning prize information storage area 223a includes, in addition to the execution area, four areas for the first special symbol (reserved information area) and the second It may be configured to provide four areas (holding information areas) for two special symbols.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, like the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, is the special symbol variation performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). This is a counter that counts up to four times the number of pending storage of execution rights. That is, the number of special figure 1 reservations corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110 .

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110 and cannot acquire the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b counts the reserved balls of the first special symbol. It is designed to manage numbers.

Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the number of reserved storage (special figure 1 reserved number) of the execution right of the first special symbol lottery is added by entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) Or, when the first special symbol lottery is executed in the main control device 110 and the special figure 1 reserved number is subtracted, the reserved ball indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or after subtraction A number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) is sent to the audio lamp control device 113 .

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the pending ball number command (special figure 1 pending ball number command) transmitted from the main control device 110, from the pending ball number command (special figure 1 pending ball number command), the main control The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the device 110 is acquired and stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S3301 in FIG. 984). Thus, in the voice lamp control device 113, according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, since the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is updated, the first special symbol reservation of the main controller 110 The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number-of-balls counter 203d.

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used when determining the reserved symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (display mode for indicating the special symbol 1 reserved ball number). That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the special symbol 1 reservation number indicated by the command in response to the reception of the reservation ball number command in the special symbol 1 reservation ball number counter 223b, and the special symbol 1 reservation after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the number of balls counter 223b, a command for the number of reserved balls for display is transmitted to the display control device 114. FIG.

When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the special figure 1 reserved number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 The drawing of the image is controlled so that the reserved design is displayed on the third design display device 81. - 特許庁As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

The information contained in the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main controller 110 may be the actual number of reserved balls, that is, the information indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, or the first special Information indicating that the value of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203d has been incremented by 1 or decremented by 1 may be used. In addition, when transmitting information indicating that the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 1 added or subtracted by 1 as the reserved ball number command, the reserved ball number command received by the voice lamp control device 113 It is sufficient to provide a calculation means for calculating and managing the current number of reserved balls based on the information contained in.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c changes the object to be counted from the above-mentioned special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b to the execution right (special figure 2 reserved) of the second special symbol lottery included in the reserved ball number command. However, since the other points are the same, the detailed description will be omitted. In this 32nd control example, since the upper limit number of the special symbol 2 reservation is set to 1, the upper limit number of the value measured by the special symbol 2 reservation ball number counter 223c is also 1.

The value measured by the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is used to determine the reserved symbol (display mode for indicating the special symbol 2 reserved ball number) displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the special symbol 2 reservation number indicated by the command in response to the reception of the reservation ball number command in the special symbol 2 reservation ball number counter 223c, and the special design 2 reservation after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the number of balls counter 223c, a command for the number of reserved balls for display is transmitted to the display control device 114. FIG.

When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the special figure 2 reserved number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 The drawing of the image is controlled so that the reserved design is displayed on the third design display device 81. - 特許庁As described above, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is changed while synchronizing with the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

Furthermore, in this 32nd control example, during the final variation period of the second special symbol in the time saving state, a charge effect for encouraging the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 (Fig. 941 (a) ), and while this charge effect is being executed, a new special figure 2 based on receiving a pending ball number command indicating the upper limit number of special figure 2 pending A display mode (“charging complete”) for indicating that a hold cannot be obtained is configured to be displayable. In other words, based on the reception of the pending ball number command, it is configured not only to display the acquired special figure 2 pending number, but also to switch the effect mode of the effect being executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to switch the presentation mode according to various conditions, so that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

The fluctuation start flag 223d is set to ON when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S3202 in FIG. 983), and when the fluctuation display in the third symbol display device 81 is set It is set to off (see S4302 in FIG. 994). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, a fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output processing (S3102 in FIG. 982) of the main processing (see FIG. 982) executed by the MPU 221 Inside, it is sent to the display controller 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S3205 in FIG. 983), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (see S4307 in FIG. 994). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type for display is set based on the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command (see S4309 in FIG. 994).

The effect counter 223f is a counter used for lottery when determining the effect contents of various effects to be executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and although not shown, the sound lamp control device 113 is updated each time the main process (see FIG. 982) executed by the MPU 221 of is executed. In the 32nd control example, the effect counter 223f has a plurality of loop counters (for example, a counter that is repeatedly updated within a range of 0 to 99) (first effect counter 223f1, second effect counter 223f2, etc.). The value of the performance counter is configured to be updated without synchronization.

Specifically, for example, a plurality of counters with different values updated each time the main process (see FIG. 982) is executed are provided so that the updated values of the counters are not synchronized. Furthermore, another value may be calculated by calculating the value of each counter, and the calculated value may be used as a value used in lottery when determining the content of various effects. By configuring in this way, when determining at the same timing (within one main process) the effect mode of a plurality of effects executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, it is determined at the same timing. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the performance modes of a plurality of performances are synchronized and the performances cannot be executed in various combinations.

The secondary game state storage area 223g is an area for storing the game state corresponding to the state command when a state command regarding the game state is received from the main control device 110. FIG. By referring to the information (game state) stored in the secondary game state storage area 223g, the current game state can be identified on the sound lamp control device 113 side.

In the 32nd control example, the data in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is erased when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. The stored information indicating the current game state is also erased. However, in the 32nd control example, since the state command is set in the start-up process (see FIG. 977) of the main controller 110 executed after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on (see S1712 in FIG. 977), the power is restored. Immediately after that, the information indicating the game state set before the power shutdown is stored in the sub-game state storage area 223g. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the game state can always be identified on the sound lamp control device 113 side. Also, when the game state is variably set in the main controller 110, a state command indicating the game state after variably set is set (see S1917 of FIG. 979, etc.).

The time saving information update area 223h includes a plurality of time saving end conditions for ending the time saving state and the progress status for each time saving end condition (game elements subject to the time saving end conditions (for example, special symbol fluctuations, small hits, and big hits This is a data area for storing the number of times winning) has been executed. The display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is selected based on the information (time saving end condition and progress) stored in the time saving information update area 223h. This time saving information update area 223h is a time saving setting information command including information about the content of the time saving state set from the main control device 110, that is, the main control device 110 jackpot control processing (S1804 in FIG. 979) of the ending period When determining the end timing (S1913 in FIG. 979: Yes), and when the time saving end condition is set (S1916 in FIG. 979) when receiving the set time saving setting information command, for ending this time saving state A time saving end condition is set (see S3412 in FIG. 985).

Then, in the time saving update process of the main controller 110 (see S224 in FIG. 968), update information for updating the time saving information (variation information for indicating that a special symbol variation has been executed, and winning a small hit When it is determined that a short remaining time command has been set to indicate a small hit information), and it is determined that the short remaining time command has been received, it corresponds to the update information included in the received short remaining time command. Various information included in the time saving information update area 223h is updated. By configuring in this way, on the audio lamp control device 113 side, not only whether the current gaming state is the time saving state, but also when the time saving state is set, until the remaining time saving end condition is satisfied It is possible to grasp the remaining status of each time saving end condition.

To specifically explain the data area in the time saving information update area 223h, in the time saving information update area 223h, each item that can be the end condition of the time saving state (for example, the number of times of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the second special Information corresponding to the number of fluctuations in the design, the total number of fluctuations obtained by adding the number of fluctuations in the first special design and the number of fluctuations in the second special design, and the number of winnings of the small hit (the number of times the operation of the V winning device 600 is started) is temporarily stored. For each item, time saving setting information (the number of times the conditions for ending the time saving state are satisfied) and updating of each item during the period when the time saving state is set continuously information (information indicating the number of times actually executed) and are stored respectively.

In this 32nd control example, among the update information stored in the time saving information update area 223h, the main production during the time saving state based on the update information regarding the time saving end condition established based on the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol It is configured to determine the aspect. In this 32nd control example, when the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times during the time saving state, or when the result of the executed special symbol lottery is a win, the time saving state is terminated. are doing. Here, when the time-saving state ends based on winning, the player is provided with a privilege by executing the winning game, and the time-saving state is easily set again after the big win game ends. ing. On the other hand, when the time-saving state ends based on the execution of the special symbol lottery a predetermined number of times, the normal state is set without giving the player a privilege.

Therefore, the player who is playing the game during the time saving state is not the time saving end condition that is established based on the winning winning, but the remaining time until the time saving end condition that is established based on the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed is satisfied. We request that you provide information regarding the period. Furthermore, in this 32nd control example, the time saving end condition that is established based on the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed is established based on the total number of times that the first special symbol variation frequency and the second special symbol variation frequency are added. and a special figure 2 fluctuation time reduction end condition established based only on the second special symbol fluctuation frequency. Then, when an appropriate game (right-handed game) is executed in the time saving state, the special figure 2 fluctuation time saving end condition is more likely to be satisfied than the total change time saving end condition.

In other words, when the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state is not won, the special figure 2 fluctuation time saving end condition is most likely to be established. Therefore, while the time saving state is set, based on the update information on the special figure 2 fluctuation time saving end condition (information about the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t updated by the main controller 110) By executing an effect (countdown effect) to indicate the remaining period until the time-saving state ends, the player can receive an accurate remaining period until the time-saving state ends (executable during the time-saving state The remaining number of second special symbol variations) can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in the present 32nd control example, as described above, when an appropriate game (right-handed game) is executed in the time saving state, the most likely time saving end condition (special figure 2 fluctuation time saving end condition) is established. Although it is configured to execute an effect for letting the player grasp the remaining period until, without being limited to this, for example, depending on the game content executed during the time saving state, other time saving end conditions is likely to be established, it may be configured to switch the type of the time saving end condition used for the effect for indicating the remaining period until the time saving state ends, or a plurality of time saving end conditions You may comprise so that the production|presentation which can notify the remaining period until each time saving end condition is satisfied may be performed with respect to each.

In addition, in this 32nd control example, as a countdown effect indicating the remaining period until the time saving end condition (special figure 2 fluctuation time saving end condition) is satisfied, the second special symbol variation that can be executed during the time saving state Although it is configured to execute an effect that indicates the remaining number of times by a numerical value, it is not limited to this, for example, the remaining number of second special symbol fluctuations that can be executed during the time saving state is a mode other than the numerical value ( For example, an animation that changes the mode every time the remaining number of second special symbol fluctuations that can be executed during the time saving state is subtracted), that is, for the player, it can be executed before the time saving state ends The number of times of the second special symbol lottery may not be concrete, but may be configured to execute the effect in a manner that can be reported abstractly. Also, in this case, it is preferable to configure the time saving state in which the second special symbol fluctuation frequency required until the special figure 2 fluctuation time saving end condition is satisfied is set so as to be different. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the number of Toku-zu 2 fluctuations that can be executed before the time saving state ends.

Furthermore, using the time saving setting information and update information stored in the time saving information update area 223h, for example, the ratio of the value indicated by the update information to the value indicating the end condition of each item included in the time saving setting information is calculated, It may be configured to display the progress degree of time saving by a numerical value (for example, percentage).

In addition, in the 32nd control example, as the information stored in the time saving information update area 223h, it is configured to store update information (information indicating the number of times it has already been executed (number of fluctuations, number of winnings)), Without being limited to this, the remaining number of times until the end condition of the time saving state (time saving end condition) is satisfied may be calculated, and information indicating the calculated remaining number of times may be stored in the time saving information update area 223h. .

The subjugation number counter 223i is a counter for managing the number of attack effects (the number of subjugations) set as the subjugation effects executed during the jackpot game, and is used for determining the subjugation effects mode. In the determination process (see S3803 of FIG. 990), the value of "5" is set (S3907 of FIG. 990). Then, the value of the counter is decremented in the first-time jackpot round production process (see S3807 in FIG. 991) executed when a new round game is started in the jackpot game in which the subjugation production is executed (FIG. 991 S4009).

The value of this subjugation number counter 223i is referred to when determining the display mode (the number of button icons displayed in the display area Dm7) for indicating the number of times of the attack presentation executed during the subjugation presentation. In addition, based on the subjugation production scenario that has been set, it is referred to when determining the production mode of the attack production to be executed in each round game.

In addition, in this 32nd control example, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, six rounds of the jackpot game are always executed, and a subjugation is performed during the jackpot game. It is configured to execute a production. Then, during the 1st round game period, the content of the subjugation production (number of remaining enemies, number of attack productions, etc.) to be executed this time is announced, and the attack production is performed during each round game period of the 2nd to 6th rounds. configured to run. In other words, when the subjugation effect is executed, the attack effect is always executed a fixed number of times (five times). Therefore, although the subjugation number counter 223i is set to a value of "5" as an initial value, it is not limited to this. It may be configured to be different.

For example, as a jackpot game to be executed when a jackpot is won in a first special symbol lottery executed in a normal state, a jackpot game with a different number of round games can be executed, and the number of rounds of the jackpot game to be executed. Depending on the situation, the number of times of the attack presentation executed during the subjugation presentation may be varied. In this case, at least, as the types of jackpot games, a standard jackpot game in which the number of round games is a standard number of rounds (for example, 6 rounds) and a specification in which the number of round games is larger than the standard jackpot game (for example, 8 rounds) A jackpot game is configured to be executable, and the number of attack performances executed during the subjugation performance is increased when the specific jackpot game is executed than when the standard jackpot game is executed. Good to configure.

Further, it is preferable to make it easier to set the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game when the specific jackpot game (8-round jackpot game) is executed rather than the standard jackpot game (6-round jackpot game). Specifically, as a jackpot type corresponding to the standard jackpot game, a first jackpot type in which a normal state is set after the jackpot game ends, and a second jackpot type in which a time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends can be set. and, as jackpot types corresponding to the specific jackpot game, a third jackpot type in which a normal state is set after the jackpot game is finished, and a fourth jackpot type in which a time-saving state is set after the jackpot game is finished are set. configure as possible.

Then, the selection ratio of the fourth jackpot type in the case of winning the jackpot in which the specific jackpot game is executed is higher than the selection ratio of the second jackpot type in the case of winning the jackpot in which the standard jackpot game is executed. It should be configured as follows.

By configuring in this way, as the number of attack effects executed during the subjugation effect increases, it becomes easier to display the effect result (result of successful subjugation) advantageous to the player as the effect result of the subjugation effect. Therefore, the player can play the game while anticipating that many attack effects will be executed in the subjugation effect.

In addition, the greater the number of rounds of the jackpot game, the easier it is to increase the number of executions of the attack effect. As a result, it is possible to easily display a production result that is advantageous to the player (a production result that succeeds in subjugation), so that the player can be provided with a plurality of benefits at once. It can increase motivation.

In this 32nd control example, the number of attack effects to be executed during the subjugation effect is determined in correspondence with the number of round games to be executed during the jackpot game, but the present invention is not limited to this. The number of round games to be executed may be set as the maximum number, and the number of times of the attack performance to be executed during the subjugation performance may be determined by lottery.

In this case, no matter which number of rounds is set in the jackpot game, the case where the time saving state is set after the jackpot game is over than the case where the normal state is set after the jackpot game is over. It is preferable to configure so that a large number of times can be easily determined as the number of times of presentation. By configuring in this way, when the subjugation performance is executed during the jackpot game, the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed and the number of attack performances to be executed are grasped, and the execution is performed after the jackpot game is finished. It is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting the game state to be played.

In addition, in this 32nd control example, when a jackpot game in which a subjugation effect is executed is executed, during the game period of the round game (first round game) to be executed first, the subjugation to be executed this time An initial display mode is displayed to notify the player of the effect content of the effect, and the attack effect is executed a plurality of times using the remaining game period of the round game, but it is not limited to this. As the round game in which the initial display mode of the subjugation effect is displayed, a round game different from the first round game (round game of the first round) may be set.

Specifically, a management means for managing the number of rounds of the jackpot game to be executed this time and a management means for managing the number of times of the attack performance to be executed during the subjugation performance to be executed this time are provided. It is preferable to provide means for determining the number of rounds for displaying the initial display mode of the subjugation effect within a range where the number of rounds for the number of attack effects can be secured. By configuring in this way, when the subjugation production is started in a short time after the start of the jackpot game (when the initial display mode of the subjugation production is displayed), more attack productions are executed. Since it is possible to increase the possibility that the game will be executed, the player can be interested in the execution timing of the subjugation effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the example described above, according to the number of attack productions executed during the subjugation production, the result of the production of the subjugation production can be suggested. , As the effect result of the subjugation effect, an example of making it easy to display the effect result that is advantageous to the player (the effect result of successful subjugation) has been shown, but not limited to this, the attack effect executed during the subjugation effect The smaller the number of times of or the more specific times (for example, 3 times) the attack performance is executed, the more advantageous the player is as the performance result of the subjugation performance (the performance result of successful subjugation) is displayed. It may be configured to make it easier to In addition, when a small number of rounds is set in the jackpot game in which the subjugation effect is executed, it is easier to set the time saving state after the jackpot game is finished than when a large number of rounds is set. can be

The remaining subjugation number counter 223j is a counter for measuring the number of enemies subtracted by the attack presentation executed in the subjugation presentation, and corresponds to the total number of enemies as an initial value when the subjugation presentation is performed. A value is set, and then subtracted to a value corresponding to the effect result of the executed attack effect each time the attack effect is executed.

Specifically, when it is determined that the opening command of the jackpot game (first jackpot game) executed in the normal state is received (S3801 of FIG. 989: Yes), the subjugation effect mode determination process (of FIG. 990 In S3803), a value corresponding to the determined total number of enemies is set (see S3902 in FIG. 990), and when it is determined that an interval command for indicating an interval period to be set after the end of the round game is received (see FIG. 989). (S3808: Yes)) during the first interval effect processing (S3809 in FIG. 992), the content of the subjugation production scenario and the value of the remaining subjugation number counter 223j are referred to when executing determination of whether or not they match. (S4102).

Here, in this 32nd control example, scenario management is performed for the presentation mode of the subjugation presentation. Specifically, when determining the production mode of the subjugation production, the total number of enemies to be defeated in this subjugation production, the number of times the attack production is executed, and the number of enemies that can be reduced in each attack production (remaining number of subjugation) and subjugation presentation scenarios are configured so that one subjugation presentation scenario can be determined from among a plurality of subjugation presentation scenarios having different stipulated contents.

Then, during the effect period of the attack effect (round game period), the SW effective time is set as a period during which the operation of the effect button 22a by the player can be effectively determined, and during the SW effective time. When the player operates the performance button 22a at the beginning, the performance for reducing the number of enemies is executed based on the content defined in the determined subjugation performance scenario. On the other hand, if the player does not operate the effect button 22a during the SW effective time, the effect of reducing the number of enemies is not executed during the round game period.

That is, the number of enemies displayed at the end of the round game period differs depending on whether or not the effect button 22a is operated during the round game. Here, in this 32nd control example, the number of enemies decreased by the attack effect is managed by the value of the remaining defeat number counter 223j. It is determined whether the value of the subjugation number counter 223j matches the contents of the determined subjugation effect scenario (S4102 in FIG. 992). It is configured to execute an effect (additional attack effect) for reducing the number of enemies using the interval period.

By configuring in this manner, regardless of whether or not the player operates the performance button 22a, it is possible to easily determine the degree of reduction in the number of enemies according to the content of the determined subjugation performance scenario. . Furthermore, in this 32nd control example, in addition to the basic production mode of reducing the number of displayed enemies to the number of enemies stipulated in the subjugation production scenario, as the production mode of the additional attack production, the production of this subjugation production is performed. A special performance mode for reducing the number of enemies to a specific number for notifying that the result is a performance result that is advantageous to the player can be determined.

Specifically, when the number of enemies specified in the subjugation scenario (for example, 99) differs from the number of enemies actually displayed (for example, 385), the difference (99 ~ 385 bodies), in some cases where a unique specific number (for example, 333 bodies) is set, as a production mode of the additional attack production, a special that reduces the number of enemies to a specific number (for example, 333 bodies) It is configured so that the mode of presentation can be set. That is, during the round game period in which the attack effect is executed, if the effect button 22a is operated and the number of enemies is not reduced to the number of enemies specified in the subjugation effect scenario (for example, 99), the special effect mode By executing the additional attack effect by , it is configured to be able to quickly notify the player of the effect result of this subjugation effect.

By configuring in this way, depending on whether or not the production button 22a is operated (pressed) during the attack production executed as the subjugation production, the timing at which the performance result of the subjugation production can be grasped can be changed. It is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of deciding whether or not to operate the effect button 22a.

In addition, in the thirty-second control example, when the player does not operate the effect button 22a, the effect mode (special effect mode) in which the result of the subjugation effect can be grasped at an earlier timing than when the effect button 22a is operated. ) is determinable. That is, in the subjugation production, if the operation method to be selected is not selected when the objective is to reduce the number of enemies to zero, the subjugation production is performed before the number of enemies is reduced to zero. It is configured to be able to display a specific number (for example, 333 bodies) capable of grasping the effect result. Therefore, since the operation method for the effect button 22a can be selected corresponding to the content of the effect that the player aims for, the operation method selected by the player is less likely to be biased.

In addition, in the thirty-second control example, it is possible to change the timing of notifying that the effect result of the subjugation effect being executed is the effect result that is advantageous to the player, depending on the selection method selected by the player. are doing. Then, as the timing of notifying that the effect result of the subjugation effect being executed is the effect result that is advantageous to the player, the timing is earlier than when the operation method 1 is operated (the operation of pressing the effect button 22a). In the case of operation by another operation method that can be notified (operation without pressing the effect button 22a), not only the operation method, but also the number of enemies displayed and the number of enemies specified in the subjugation effect scenario Only when the notification condition is satisfied, the number of remaining enemies is set to a specific number (for example, 333) as an effect mode for indicating that the effect result of the subjugation effect being executed is the effect result that is advantageous to the player. It is configured so that an additional attack production is executed.

That is, when an operation of not pressing the effect button 22a is executed in a state in which the notification condition cannot be satisfied, the additional attack effect in which the number of remaining enemies is a specific number (for example, 333) is not executed, and , an additional attack effect can be executed in which the number of remaining enemies is greater than the number of enemies specified in the subjugation effect scenario. In this way, when the operation method capable of informing the player that the effect result of the subjugation effect that is being executed is the effect result that is advantageous to the player is executed, the effect result of the subjugation effect that is being executed will be displayed to the player. Since there is a possibility that an advantageous performance result will not be notified, the player can more enjoyably decide which operation method to select.

In the thirty-second control example, regardless of which operation method the effect button 22a is operated, the privilege given to the player (the game state (time saving state) advantageous to the player after the jackpot game ends) However, without being limited to this, when the operation method 1 is selected, the above-mentioned privilege can be obtained. In addition, another first privilege (for example, a privilege to notify in advance whether there is a special figure reservation to be won in the acquired special figure reservation) can be granted, and is different from the operation method of 1 If another operation method is selected, in addition to the above-mentioned benefits, a second benefit different from the first benefit (for example, a benefit of notifying in advance the number of remaining round games to be executed during the jackpot game) is given. It may be configured as possible.

By configuring in this way, different benefits can be given to the player according to the game method selected by the player, so that it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of selecting the operation method. Further, in the above-described example, the second privilege (advance notification of the number of round games) can be granted as a privilege that can be granted according to the operation method of the production button 22a during the attack production in the subjugation production executed during the jackpot game. However, in this case, for example, every time the number of round games executed during the jackpot game increases, the number of remaining rounds decreases, so the merit of giving the second privilege is lower.

Therefore, according to the progress of the round game during the jackpot game, it is possible for the player to switch the operation method to be selected during one subjugation performance, so that more meritorious benefits are given. The performance effect can be further enhanced for the player who watches the subjugation performance while anticipating it.

In the thirty-second control example, the player can select an operation method regardless of which attack effect is executed. The method may be configured to be able to execute an attack effect that the player cannot select. For example, by executing an attack effect in which the SW valid time is not set, the operation method of pressing the effect button 22a can be selected. Alternatively, an extremely short SW effective time may be set as the SW effective time to make it difficult to press the effect button 22a.

Furthermore, in the thirty-second control example, as the operation method for the effect button 22a, a configuration is used in which the player selects from two types of operation, namely, an operation of pressing the effect button 22a and an operation of not pressing the effect button 22a. , Without being limited to this, an operation method (so-called continuous hitting operation) of operating the production button 22a a plurality of times (for example, two or more times) within a predetermined period (for example, within 1 second), or operating the production button 22a for a predetermined period ( For example, it may be configured such that the player can select an operation method (a so-called long-pressing operation) of continuously pressing the button for one second.

In addition, when the player is allowed to select a plurality of operation methods in this way, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 displays the operation methods that can be selected by the player and the operation methods that can be given when each operation method is selected. It is preferable to display the content of special benefits and a display mode in which information can be provided. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to determine the operation method to be selected.

The specific number displayed flag 223k is a flag for indicating that the effect mode indicating the specific number is displayed as the effect mode of the subjugation effect, and is set to ON when the effect mode indicating the specific number is displayed. be done. In this 32nd control example, the number of enemies to be reduced in the subjugation production is to indicate the production result of the subjugation production being executed before the production result of the subjugation production is displayed when a specific condition is met. A specific number of enemies (for example, 333) can be displayed. Then, when a specific number of enemies (for example, 333) are displayed, the result of the subjugation production is notified according to the display mode. A dedicated effect (blessing effect) indicating that a specific number of enemies has been displayed is executed during the remaining period until the result is displayed.

In other words, by making it possible to determine that a specific number of enemies have been displayed based on the setting status of the specific number of displayed flag 223k, an attack that reduces the number of enemies even after the specific number of enemies has been displayed. Even when the production is continued, the blessing production can be continuously executed based on the display of the specific number.

In the thirty-second control example, even after the specific number displayed flag 223k is set to ON, the attack effect is executed based on the content specified in the subjugation effect scenario that has been set. . In other words, regardless of whether or not the specific number of enemies is displayed, the attack effect is continuously executed. Then, when the specific number displayed flag 223k is set to ON, in addition to the attack effect, the blessing effect is executed. In other words, regardless of whether or not a specific number of enemies are displayed, the content of the main production in the subjugation production (the production mode of the attack production) is shared, and only when the specific number of enemies is displayed, the third Some of the display elements displayed on the display surface of the pattern display device 81 (for example, button icons displayed in the display area Dm7, comments displayed in the sub-display area Ds, etc.) are used to display a specific number of enemies. is configured to execute a blessing effect for indicating that is displayed.

By configuring in this way, when a specific number of enemies are displayed, the processing load for executing the subjugation effect is reduced compared to the case where a special effect can be executed instead of the attack effect. In addition, it is possible to reduce the production data used for the subjugation production.

Here, in this 32nd control example, when the subjugation presentation is executed, whether or not the number of enemies of a specific number is displayed is determined by the player's presentation button 22a in the attack presentation executed during the subjugation presentation. It is configured to be determined according to the operation content of. Furthermore, the timing at which a specific number of enemies can be displayed differs depending on the content of the subjugation scenario set and the number of enemies actually displayed (number of remaining enemies). there is

More specifically, within the range of the number of enemies that can be reduced in the first attack production executed during the second round round game, the unique specific number determined for this subjugation production is included, the interval period set after the end of the 2nd round game is the timing at which the specific number of enemies can be displayed, and it is executed during the 4th round game. If the number of enemies that can be reduced in the third attack effect includes the unique specific number determined for this subjugation effect, after the second round round game ends The set interval period is the timing at which a specific number of enemies can be displayed.

In addition, the unique specific number is configured to be determined each time the subjugation effect is executed based on the numerical value included in the third symbol displayed when the jackpot is won. For example, 1 enemy) to 3-digit enemy numbers (e.g. 999 enemies). The interval period can be varied for each jackpot game. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the performance content of the subjugation performance from becoming monotonous and prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

However, the timing at which the unique specific number can be displayed can be made different, and whether or not the unique specific number is displayed is determined according to the operation method of the effect button 22a by the player. By configuring, the remaining period of the subjugation production after the unique specific number is displayed is different, so if the unique specific number is not displayed between the display of the unique specific number and the end of the subjugation production In the case of constructing so as to execute a completely different dedicated performance, it is necessary to prepare dedicated performance data corresponding to each remaining period, and there is a problem that the capacity of the performance data increases.

Furthermore, even if the timing (interval period) at which the unique specific number can be displayed is specified based on the effect content determined when executing the subjugation effect, the operation content of the effect button 22a performed by the player Depending on whether or not the unique specific number is actually displayed, it is not possible to set the effect data in advance on the premise that the unique specific number will be displayed, and the unique specific number is displayed. , and until the subjugation effect is completed, if a special effect that is completely different from the case where the unique specific number is not displayed is executed, the process of setting the effect data becomes complicated. I had a problem with it.

On the other hand, in the thirty-second control example, even if the unique specific number is displayed, the attack effect is continuously executed in the same manner as when the unique specific number is not displayed. Therefore, between the time the unique specific number is displayed and the subjugation production is completed, the production related to the subjugation production is compared to the case where the specific production is completely different from when the unique specific number is not displayed. Data capacity can be reduced.

In addition, even if the attack effect is continuously executed and the total number of displayed enemies is less than the specific number, a partial area of the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 can be used to Since the blessing effect for indicating that the specific number has been displayed is executed, it is possible to make it easy for the player to trace back and grasp that the unique specific number has been displayed.

The rush period measuring counter 223m is a counter for measuring a period (rush period) during which a game state advantageous to the player continues, and the value of the counter is referred to when displaying the rush period. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-second control example executes a jackpot game with a high probability when the time saving state, which is a game state that is advantageous to the player, is set, and after the jackpot game ends, again It is configured so that the time saving state is set. Furthermore, it is configured so that a short variation time can be easily determined as the variation time of the second special symbol variation executed during the time saving state, and after the small winning game is executed, the game ball can win a V prize. By configuring so that the period until the transition is also shortened, it is configured to make it easier to increase the number of jackpot games per unit time.

Then, the number of times the jackpot game is executed per unit time (the number of prize balls won per unit time) is displayed together with the display mode for indicating the measurement period of the rush period (see FIG. 941(a)). , the player can easily grasp the number of prize balls per unit time when the rush period continues. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to determine the content of the game to be executed during the rush period in order to increase the number of winning balls that can be obtained per unit time.

Specifically, a value of "1" is set when a game state (time saving state) advantageous to the player is set (see S3414 in FIG. 985). Then, in the main process (see FIG. 982) executed periodically (every 1 ms) in the sound lamp control device 113, when the effect update process (see S3112 in FIG. 997) is executed, the counter value is incremented by 1 ( updated) (S4604 in FIG. 997). Then, a display command for indicating the value of the rush period measuring counter 223m after addition is set (S4605 in FIG. 997).

The display command set in the process of S4605 in FIG. 997 is a command output executed every 1 millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 982) of the sound lamp control device 113, like other display commands. By the processing (S3102), it is output to the display control device 114, and the effect mode (display data, etc.) to be displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is determined. A time-saving state (rush period) is displayed in an effect mode according to the determined display data.

Then, when it is determined that the normal state is set as the game state and there is no unused special figure 2 hold, the value of the rush period measuring counter 223m is cleared. Specifically, in the state command process (see S3212 in FIG. 985), when it is determined that the information for indicating that the normal state has been set is received (S3402 in FIG. 985: Yes), special figure 2 Whether or not there is a hold is determined (see S3405 in FIG. 985), and when it is determined that there is no special figure 2 hold, the value of the rush period measurement counter 223m is cleared (see S3406 in FIG. 985).

Here, in this 32nd control example, after the time saving state is completed and the normal state is set, the second special symbol lottery based on the special figure 2 hold acquired during the time saving state can be executed a predetermined number of times (once). , and the period until the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed becomes a rush period advantageous to the player. In other words, the period in which the time-saving state advantageous to the player is set as the game state, plus a part of the period in which the normal state is set, is the advantageous period in which the game advantageous to the player is executed ( rush period).

By configuring in this manner, the timing at which the game state is switched can be made different from the timing at which the advantageous period in which the game advantageous to the player is executed ends, so that the player is surprised. Games can be provided.

The prize ball number counter 223n is a counter for holding at least the number of prize balls acquired during the rush period (jackpot game, time saving state), and is awarded when prize balls are awarded during the rush period. A value corresponding to the number of awarded balls is added (see S3217 in FIG. 983). The value of the counter is referred to when determining the point display mode to be displayed in the display area Dm6 formed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 during the rush period. Then, the normal state is set as the game state, and when it is determined that there is no unused special figure 2 reservation, the value of the prize ball number counter 223n is cleared. Specifically, in the state command process (see S3212 in FIG. 985), when it is determined that the information for indicating that the normal state has been set is received (S3402 in FIG. 985: Yes), special figure 2 Presence or absence of suspension is determined (see S3405 in FIG. 985), and when it is determined that there is no special figure 2 suspension, the value of the prize ball number counter 223n is cleared (see S3407 in FIG. 985).

By configuring in this way, during the rush period (time reduction state, jackpot game state, normal state (retraction game state) in which the special figure 2 hold acquired during the time reduction state is digested during the continuous period) Award won Only the number of balls can be accumulated.

In the thirty-second control example, the value of the rush period measuring counter 223m for measuring the rush period is set to 1 when the time saving state is first set, and the value of the rush period measuring counter 223m is set to 1. is 1 or more, the value of the winning ball counter 223n is incremented based on the received winning ball number command. The value of the prize ball number counter 223n is configured to be incrementable, and when a jackpot game in which the time saving state is set is executed, the value of the rush period measurement counter 223m including the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot game is increased. It may be configured to accumulate. In this way, the display mode (continuation period display displayed in the display area Dm8) for indicating the length of time that the specific period (rush period) continues, and the prize balls won during the specific period (rush period) In a configuration that can display a display mode for indicating the number (point display mode displayed in the display area Dm6), and a period before the specific period (execution period of the jackpot game that triggers setting of the specific period) A display mode (point display mode displayed in the display area Dm6) for indicating the number of prize balls won during a specific period (rush period) including the number of won prize balls can be displayed. The number of prize balls obtained during the period can be shown to the player more than the number of prize balls actually obtained during the specific period. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In this case, since the display mode corresponding to the number of prize balls actually provided (provided) to the player is displayed in the display area Dm6, the display mode (point display) displayed in the display area Dm6 mode) and the number of prize balls actually won, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the point display mode displayed in the display area Dm6.

In addition, in the 32nd control example, the elapsed time after the time saving state is first set can be measured using the rush period measurement counter 223m, but the jackpot game starts without being limited to this. The elapsed time after the rush period measurement counter 223m may be used to measure the elapsed time. In this case, when a jackpot game is executed based on winning a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery executed in a normal state, the rush period is measured regardless of the type of jackpot game to be executed (jackpot type). When the value of the counter 223m is set to 1 and the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the value of the rush period measuring counter 223m is cleared at that time, and the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game. In this case, the value of the rush period measuring counter 223m may be continuously updated.

Furthermore, even during the period during which the value of the rush period measuring counter 223m is updated, the period during which the jackpot game is executed (first time The jackpot game period) should be configured so that the elapsed time is not displayed. By configuring in this way, when the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game, that is, when the rush game is not started, it is possible to prevent the elapsed time from being displayed unnecessarily.

In this way, even during the period in which the value of the rush period measuring counter 223m is being updated, the control not to display the display mode (continuation period display) indicating the elapsed period on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is performed as described above. For example, during the rush period, the display mode indicating that the winning (small winning, jackpot winning) is displayed, or during the small winning game. On the other hand, the period during which the game content (game result) needs to be notified using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, such as the period during which the guidance display mode for guiding the game method is displayed, is displayed for the duration. It may be configured to execute control to hide. With this configuration, it is possible to expand the display area for displaying the game content (game result) to be notified to the player, thereby providing the player with an easy-to-understand game.

Further, in order to achieve the same purpose, the size of the display area Dm6 in which the duration display is displayed is reduced, or the display area Dm6 is formed, instead of the control to hide the display mode of the display of the duration. By changing the positions of the buttons, the display mode showing the game content (game results) to be notified to the player may be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

In addition, in the thirty-second control example, while the rush period is set, the value of the rush period measurement counter 223m is continuously updated. During the period, during the interruption period during which the player is interrupting the game, specifically during the period during which the demo screen is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the value of the rush period measurement counter 223m is updated. Instead, the process of updating the value of the rush period measuring counter 223m may be resumed when the game is restarted. By configuring in this way, only the period during which the player is actually playing the game can be accumulated and displayed as the continuous period display in the rush period, so the number of prize balls per unit time in the rush period can be made easier for the player to grasp.

Furthermore, during the rush period, the period during which the player cannot proceed with the game, specifically, the first waiting period (symbol confirmation period) from when the small win is won until the small win game is executed, After the winning game is executed, the second waiting period (opening period of the small winning game) until it becomes possible to win the V prize, and the third waiting period (small winning game (ending period of ) may also be configured to perform control in which the value of the rush period measuring counter 223m is not updated.

By configuring in this manner, the rush period measuring counter 223m is used only during the period during which the player can actively proceed with the game, and during the period during which the player is actually playing the game. Since it can be measured, the number of prize balls per unit time during the rush period can be provided to the player with improved accuracy.

The holding consecutive flag 223o is a flag for indicating that the holding consecutive production has been executed, and is set to ON when the holding consecutive production is executed during the jackpot game. The holding consecutive performance is a performance for indicating that an advantageous privilege is given to the player executed during the jackpot game, and is a special figure 2 that has been acquired at the time the final round of the jackpot game is executed. If it is determined that the winning information indicating winning is included in the reservation, and if it is determined that the winning information indicating winning is included (If it is determined that there is a winning special figure 2 reservation ).

In other words, by executing the holding continuous effect, the player is notified in advance that an execution opportunity (small winning) for executing the next big winning game is established during the period in which the big winning game is being executed. Therefore, even if the time-saving state set after the end of the jackpot game is short, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In this 32nd control example, when the holding continuous performance is executed during the jackpot game, the holding continuous performance is performed in the state of having the winning special figure 2 suspension compared to the case where the holding continuous performance is not executed. is configured to facilitate execution. Specifically, when the holding consecutive flag 223o is not set to ON, when it is determined that the final round of the jackpot game is started (S3701 in FIG. 988: Yes), hit holding (hitting special figure 2 holding ) (see S3703 in FIG. 988), and if it is determined that there is a hit hold (S3703 in FIG. 988: Yes), that is, it is determined that the right to execute a hold consecutive effect is acquired. If so, an execution lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the holding consecutive effect, and if the execution lottery is won (S3707 in FIG. 988: Yes), the holding consecutive flag 223o is set to ON (see S3709), and then , to determine the execution of the holding consecutive effect (see S3705 in FIG. 988).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the right to execute the holding consecutive effect is obtained while the holding consecutive flag 223o is set to ON (S3704 in FIG. 988: Yes), the execution lottery is not performed. , to determine the execution of the holding consecutive effect (see S3705 in FIG. 988).

In other words, when the holding continuous effect is executed, the holding continuous effect is always executed in a state where the right to execute the holding continuous effect is obtained. By configuring in this way, for the player who wants to continuously execute the holding consecutive effect, the player can actively right during the time saving state so that the jackpot game is executed while the special figure 2 holding is acquired. A beating game can be played.

Here, in the 32nd control example, when the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the second special symbol lottery can be executed three times with an extremely short variation time (1 second) as the variation time. And, the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 reservation) is configured to be obtainable at most one. Furthermore, the winning information included in the special figure 2 reservation acquired at the timing of the start of the final round of the jackpot game is read in advance, and as a result of the look-ahead, winning (small winning, jackpot winning) per special figure 2 pending When it is determined that the information is included, the final round of the jackpot game is used to show that the second special pattern lottery using the acquired special figure 2 reservation is won. (See FIG. 944(b)).

In this case, in this 32nd control example in which the maximum acquisition number of the special figure 2 suspension is 1, it is notified by the suspension continuous effect that the winning is won in the second special symbol lottery executed after the end of the big winning game. Become. In other words, the player understands that a small win will be won one second after the end of the big win game. In this 32nd control example, the normal state is set during the jackpot game, and when the special symbol indicating the small winning is stopped and displayed in the time saving state, the time saving end condition is established and the normal state is set. Therefore, after the jackpot game in which the continuous suspension performance is executed is finished, the period during which the time saving state continues becomes 1 second. Therefore, when the normal pattern lottery is executed immediately before the end of the jackpot game in the normal state, time is spent until the result of the normal pattern lottery executed in the normal state is displayed. The player predicts that it will be difficult to obtain a new special figure 2 reserve during the state, and the player shoots a game ball from the end of the big win game to the start of the next small win game. There is a risk that the game (right-handed game) to be played will be interrupted, and the operation of the game will be lowered.

In addition, when the jackpot game ends and the time saving state is set and then the right-handed game is performed, it takes at least a predetermined period of time (0.5 second), even if the normal pattern lottery in the time saving state is executed immediately after passing through the through gate 67, the normal state is set before the normal pattern per game is executed, and a new Since it is difficult to obtain the special figure 2 reservation, the game in which the player shoots the game ball (right-handed game) is interrupted from the end of the big hit game to the start of the next small hit game. There was a possibility that the operation of the game would be lowered.

On the other hand, in this 32nd control example, as described above, after the holding continuous effect is executed, when the right to execute the holding continuous effect is acquired, the holding continuous effect is always executed. there is By constructing in this way, the player who intends to continue execution of the holding continuous effect is motivated to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 during a short time-saving state. Since the right-handed game can be made to be played, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the operation of the game.

In addition, in the 32nd control example, in the state where the holding consecutive flag 223o is set to ON, the conditions under which the holding consecutive effect can be executed It is configured so that the holding consecutive effect is always executed when the condition that is established when the holding consecutive flag 223o is set to ON. However, it may be configured such that the probability of execution of the holding consecutive effect is higher than when the holding consecutive effect is not set to ON.

In addition, in the thirty-second control example, the holding consecutive flag 223o is set to ON when the holding consecutive effect is executed. The processing may be configured to be executable. For example, when the cumulative number of prize balls obtained during the rush period exceeds a specific number (for example, 10,000), the pending flag 223o may be set to ON, or the number of prize balls obtained during the rush period may be set to ON. During the period when a specific display mode is displayed as a display mode for indicating the cumulative value of (a point display mode displayed in the display area Dm6 in FIG. 944(a)), the holding run flag 223o is set to ON. configuration may be used.

Furthermore, a configuration may be used in which the holding consecutive flag 223o is set to ON based on the length of the period during which the rush state continues (rush duration). In this case, if the rush duration exceeds a predetermined period (for example, 100 seconds), the holding consecutive flag 223o may be set to ON, or the holding consecutive flag 223o may be set ON only when the rush duration is within a predetermined range. The configuration may be such that the flag 223o is set to ON.

In addition, a measuring means for measuring the cumulative number of execution times of the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state is provided, and the number of times of the second special symbol lottery executed during the rush continuation period exceeds a predetermined number. In this case, the holding consecutive flag 223o may be set to ON, and when the big winning game is executed based on the second special symbol lottery executed in the state where the holding consecutive flag 223o is OFF, the big winning game is executed. A discriminating means capable of discriminating how many times the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery for winning a small prize) is the second special figure lottery (special figure 2 lottery for winning a small hit) after the time saving state is set is provided, and the discrimination means determines 1.例文帳に追加The third special figure 2 lottery (special figure 2 that will be the final change in the time saving state) than the third special figure 2 lottery A lottery) may be configured so that the pending consecutive flag 223o is more likely to be set to ON.

In addition, in the thirty-second control example, when the condition for setting the holding consecutive flag 223o to ON is established, the holding consecutive flag 223o is always set to ON, but this is not limitative. A lottery means capable of determining whether or not to set the reserved consecutive flag 223o to ON when a condition for setting the reserved consecutive flag 223o to ON is satisfied is provided, and the result of the lottery by the lottery means is set to ON. If it is determined that this is the case, it may be configured such that the holding continuation flag 223o is set to ON. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict whether or not the pending flag 223o is set to ON based on the game situation. Therefore, it is possible to provide an unexpected game in which a small winning is won in the second special symbol lottery based on the special figure 2 reservation, which is the target of the holding consecutive production, although the holding consecutive production is not executed. .

The round number counter 223p is a counter for measuring the number of rounds of the jackpot game, and the counter value is updated when a new round game is executed. to be displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner as to which round the round game being executed is.

Here, in the 32nd control example, when the above-described holding continuous effect is executed, the number of rounds of the next big winning game can be displayed in the display area Dm5 by inheriting the number of rounds of the previous big winning game. Configure.

That is, normally, the process of clearing the value of the round number counter 223p at the end timing of the jackpot game (see S3612 in FIG. 987) is executed. S3611 in FIG. 987: Yes), configured so that the process of clearing the value of the round number counter 223p is skipped, and when the winning game targeted for the holding continuous effect is executed, as the number of rounds of the big winning game , the number of rounds added to the value of the round number counter 223p measured in the previous jackpot game is displayed in the display area Dm5. By configuring in this way, the number of rounds displayed in the display area Dm5 increases as the holding consecutive effects continue, so that added value is provided to the player who continues the holding consecutive effects. can provide.

Further, in the thirty-second control example, when the number of rounds displayed in the display area Dm5 becomes larger than the maximum number of rounds that can be executed in one jackpot game, a special effect (see FIG. 946) is executed. It is configured to By constructing in this way, it is possible to give more added value to the player who continues the holding consecutive effect.

The SW effective time counter 223q is a counter for measuring the operation effective period during which the effect button 22a is determined to be effective, and the operation effect is made such that the effect mode can be changed by having the player operate the effect button 22a. When it is executed, a production scenario is set that defines the timing for setting the operation effective period, and when it is determined that it is the start timing of the operation effective period based on the set production scenario, the predetermined operation is performed. A value corresponding to the length of the validity period is set.

The value set in the SW effective time counter 223q is subtracted by the effect update process (see S3112 in FIG. 997) executed in the main process (see FIG. 982) of the audio lamp control device 113 executed in 1 millisecond cycles. (See S4607 in FIG. 997). Then, a display command for showing a display mode corresponding to the value of the SW valid time counter 223q that has been subtracted is set (see S4608 in FIG. 997). The display command set here is output to the display control device 114 by the command output processing (S3102 in FIG. 982) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 982) of the sound lamp control device 113, and output. Based on the fact that the display command is received by the display control device 114, a time gauge ga1 (see FIG. 934(b)) for indicating the remaining time of the valid operation period is displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. It is displayed by changing the display mode.

The right-handed flag 223r is a flag for indicating that a game state (hitting game state, time-saving state) for executing a right-handed game is set for the player, and the right-handed game is started from the main control device 110. It is set to ON when a command is output to indicate that the game state to be executed has been set. Then, it is set to OFF when a state command for indicating that the normal state has been set is output. In the state where the right-handed flag 223r is set to ON, the guide display of "right-handed" is performed in the display area Dm4 of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. FIG.

The V winning flag 223s is a flag for indicating that the game ball has passed through a specific area (V winning) within a predetermined period (within 4 seconds) after the start of the small winning game, and It is set to ON when the game ball passes through the specific area within a predetermined period (within 4 seconds) after the start of the game (see S4213 in FIG. 993). Then, when it is determined that a predetermined period of time (4 seconds) has passed since the start of the small winning game (S4701 in FIG. 998: Yes), the setting status of the V winning flag 223s is determined (S4702 in FIG. 998 (see S4703 in FIG. 998), when it is determined that it is set to ON (S4702 in FIG. 998: Yes), a V effect command for display is set to indicate that the V prize has been won (see S4703 in FIG. 998), and then OFF (see S4704 in FIG. 998).

In the 32nd control example, when the small winning game is started, the game guidance information for a specific period (4 seconds) can be repeatedly executed as a display mode for guiding the game method during the small winning game. (See FIG. 939(a)). And, during the period (four seconds after the start of the small winning game) during which the first game guide information is executed, the V winning is possible.

Specifically, an opening period is set in which the second variable prize winning device (V prize winning device) 650 is not opened for two seconds after the start of the small winning game, and after the opening period ends, the second variable prize winning device is set. A round game is executed in which the device (V winning device) 650 is opened. Then, 0.5 seconds after the start of the round game, the switching member 650h operates (see FIG. 929(a)) so that the game ball can enter the specific area 650e3 (V win possible). Configure.

In other words, the pachinko machine 10 in the 32nd control example is configured to allow the game ball to win V prizes during the period from the start of the small winning game to the end of the first game guidance notification. Since the period from the start of the small winning game to the execution of the big winning game triggered by the V prize is shortened, it is possible to easily increase the number of times the big winning game is executed per unit time. Thus, even a player who has a limited playing time can be motivated to play the game.

Furthermore, in the 32nd control example, the execution timing of the V effect for informing the player that the game ball has won the V prize is varied according to the timing when the game ball has won the V prize during the small winning game. Configure. Specifically, when the game ball wins V while the initial game guidance notification is being executed, the V effect is executed after the initial game guidance notification is completed, and the initial game guidance notification is completed. When the game ball wins the V prize later (while the game guidance information is being executed for the second and subsequent times), the V performance is executed in accordance with the timing of the V prize winning.

With this configuration, even if the game ball wins V while the initial game guidance notification is being executed, it is possible to prevent the initial game guidance notification from ending in the middle. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand. In addition, when the game ball is made to win a V prize after the first game guidance notification is completed, the V performance can be executed immediately, so that the game ball can be made to win a V prize during the small winning game. can be reliably reported.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 32nd control example, the game period of the small winning game (the period during which the game ball can win a V prize) continues longer than the timing at which the initial game guidance notification ends. Configure. In other words, even if a right-handed game is played after the first game guidance notification is completed, the game ball can win a V prize. By constructing in this way, a skilled player can be made to play a right-handed game immediately after the small winning game is started, and a game aimed at winning a V prize in a short time can be made, and a beginner can be made to play. The player can be made to play a game aimed at winning a V prize even if he is made to play a right-handed game after having him understand the game method during the small winning game notified by the game guide notification. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately play a game according to the skill level of the player.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-second control example, the elapsed time when the player finishes the small winning game in the shortest time (shortest small winning game time) is the period during which the first game guidance notification is performed (4 seconds). Specifically, the period required from the start of the round game of the small winning game until the winning number (10) of game balls satisfying the end condition of the round game wins the second variable winning device 650 , 5 seconds at the shortest.

By configuring in this way, the right-handed game is continuously executed before the small winning game is started, and the game ball is sent to the second variable winning device 650 immediately after the round game of the small winning game is started. Even if a winning situation occurs, it is possible to prevent the end of the small win game before the end of the first game guide notification, so that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand game.

The effect fixed flag 223t is a flag for indicating that the fixed mode is set as the effect mode of the pachinko machine 10, and is set to ON when the fixed mode is set. The game environment storage area 223u is a storage area for temporarily storing information about the game environment selected by the player, and is used to indicate the contents of each game environment selected by referring to the game environment data table 222f. information is stored.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main controller in the 32nd control example>
Next, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 963 to 980. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 ms in this control example). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.

In this 32nd control example, as described above, the right to execute the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 reserved) and the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 reserved) are both stored. In, it is configured to preferentially execute the second special symbol lottery. Also, in both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, the lottery result is configured to be capable of judging the small winning in some of the outliers in addition to the big winning winning. Then, during the small winning game that is executed when the small winning is won, by passing the game ball through the specific area (V area) 650e3 arranged in the second variable winning device 650 (V winning), V A condition for executing a jackpot game (V jackpot game) based on winning is established, and the jackpot game can be executed after the small prize game is finished.

In addition, as a game state, a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) and a time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) can be set, A time-saving state can be set after part of a jackpot game (symbol jackpot game) executed when a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery, or after a V jackpot game executed based on a small jackpot win. .

When the time-saving state is set, the second special symbol lottery is made easier to execute than when the normal state is set, and the second special symbol lottery is performed more than the first special symbol lottery. Also, by stipulating that the probability of winning the small winning is high, the second special symbol lottery makes it easier to execute the big winning game (symbol big winning game, V big winning game) than the first special symbol lottery. It is configured as follows.

A plurality of time-saving end conditions can be set as time-saving end conditions for ending the set time-saving state, and unnecessary execution of many first special symbol lotteries during the time-saving state is suppressed. In addition, it is configured to facilitate execution of the second special symbol lottery of the number of times (three times) specified during the time saving state. In addition, the right to execute the second special symbol lottery, which is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery, can be obtained up to a predetermined number (one), and the time-saving state ends and the normal state returns. Even after being set, the second special symbol lottery based on the special figure 2 reservation obtained during the time saving state can be executed a predetermined number of times (once).

In the pachinko machine 10 in the 32nd control example configured as described above, in the normal state which is the initial state, the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery by the left-handed game for executing the first special symbol lottery, and the symbol jackpot is won. When a game aiming at execution of the game is performed and a time-saving state is set after the completion of the symbol jackpot game, a second special symbol lottery is executed by a right-handed game, and a V jackpot is won based on the small win. A game aiming to be executed is played. Also, even if the conditions for ending the time saving state are satisfied and the normal state (initial state) is set, in order to end the time saving state with the special figure 2 pending, just before the time saving state ends A right-handed game is performed continuously until.

963 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. FIG. Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (65536 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second per random number counter C4, and the small per type counter C5 are each added by 1, and their counter values are maximum. When the values (65535, 99, 99, 299 and 99 respectively in this control example) are reached, they are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1, C2, C3, C4 and C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, a start winning process associated with entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) or entering the second ball entrance 640 (start winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process (S104) and the starting winning process (S105) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After executing the start winning process (S105), the normal symbol variation process, which is the process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67. Through gate passage processing associated with is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process (S106) and the through gate passage process (S107) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 972 and 973. After executing the through gate passage processing (S107), the V entrance passage processing is executed (S108), and then the V passage processing (S109) is executed. Details of the V entrance passage processing (S108) and the V passage processing (S109) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 974 and 975. FIG.

After executing the V-passing process (S109), the firing control process is executed (S110), and further, other processes that should be periodically executed are executed (S111), and the timer interrupt process ends. Note that the firing control process (S110) is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51 and that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. , is the process of determining on/off of ball launch. Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 964, the special symbol variation process (S104), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 964 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). Special symbol variation processing (see S104 in FIG. 964) performs various determinations (appropriateness determination) and determination based on each counter value acquired, and the first symbol display is performed in the determined variable display mode by predetermined control. To control the device 37 to enable variable display, to execute transition management control of the set game state, and to make the third pattern display device 81 execute the variable display effect of the third and fourth patterns. , and stop display in a display mode showing the determination result (validity determination result). The special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 964) will be described below.

In the special symbol variation process (S104), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol big hit (during the big win game) is currently in progress (S201). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot middle flag 203k is on. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol jackpot is in progress (jackpot game is in progress) (S201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

In the processing of S201, if it is determined that the special symbols are not being hit (during the jackpot game) (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is fluctuating (S202). ), if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not fluctuating (S202: No), that is, if a new special symbol lottery (variation) can be executed, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter Obtain the value of 203d (the number of holdings of variation display based on the first special symbol lottery N1) and the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e (the number of holdings of variation display based on the lottery of the second special symbol N2). (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the sound lamp control device 113 during the external output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. sent. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the RAM 223. store in

After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the first reserved area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side, and the process proceeds to S209.

In addition, in this 32nd control example, since the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 reservation) is configured to be obtainable up to one, the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b is: Although it has only a reservation first area for storing data (each counter value) related to one special figure 2 reservation, it is possible to acquire more than one special figure 2 reservation (for example, 4) If it is configured, it is sufficient to provide a number of reservation areas (reservation 1st area to reservation 4th area) according to the number that can acquire special figure 2 reservation, in this case, reservation 1st area → execution The data in each area can be shifted in the order of area, reserved second area→first reserved area, third reserved area→second reserved area, fourth reserved area→third reserved area.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, when the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d acquired in the process of S203 It is determined whether (N1) is greater than 0 (S211).

In the process of S211, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S211: No), the data capable of newly executing the special symbol lottery is held. Since it is in a state in which it has not On the other hand, in the process of S211, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (that is, is 1 or more) (S211: Yes), the first special symbol reserved ball number 1 is subtracted from the value (N1) of the counter 203d (S212), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d changed by calculation is set (S213). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the sound lamp control device 113 during the external output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. sent. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. store in

After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of S212, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted by the same method as the processing of S207 (S214), and the processing is changed to the processing of S209. to move to. In the process of S209 executed after the process of S207 or S214, a special design determination process is executed (S209), then a special design variation pattern selection process is executed (S210), and then this process is terminated. Details of the special symbol determination process (S209) and the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S210) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the change time has elapsed (S215). If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S215: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S216), and then this process is terminated. In the process of S216, the value of the variable time counter for measuring the variable time of the special symbol is updated, and the display of the first symbol display device 81 is updated in correspondence with the updated value of the variable time counter. A value indicating the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern selected in the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S210) is set in the variation time counter at the start timing of the special symbol variation, and then the process of S216 is executed. It is updated (decremented) each time.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the variable time has elapsed in the process of S215 (S215: Yes), that is, if the value of the variable time counter updated in the process of S216 is 0, the first symbol display device 37 A display mode corresponding to the stop symbol is set (S217). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S210). When this special symbol variation pattern selection process (S210) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1, it is determined whether the result of this special symbol lottery is a big win, a small win, or a loss, and when the lottery result is a big win. , one of jackpot A to jackpot C is determined as the jackpot type according to the value of the first hit type counter C2. Further, when the lottery result is a small hit, one of the small hits A to C is determined as the small hit type according to the value of the small hit type counter C5.

In this 32nd control example, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win with the big win A set, the first symbol display device 37 turns on the blue LED and the big win with the big win B set. If , the red LED is lit, and if the jackpot C is a set jackpot, the green LED is lit. Further, when the small win A is set, the red LED and the blue LED are turned on in the first pattern display device 37, and when the small win B is set. , The first pattern display device 37 lights the blue LED and the green LED, and when the small hit C is the set small hit, the red LED and the green LED in the first pattern display device 37 is turned on, and if it is out, the red LED, the blue LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped.

That is, the first symbol display device 37, as a display mode for showing the result of the special symbol lottery, not only the results of the special symbol lottery (big win, small win, loss), but also hit winning (big win winning, small winning winning) It is configured to display different display modes according to the hit type (big hit type, small hit type) set when it is done. By configuring in this way, by grasping the display mode displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the result of the special symbol lottery can be grasped in detail.

As described above, this 32nd control example is configured so that it is difficult for the player to associate the display mode displayed on the first symbol display device 37 with the result of the special symbol lottery. . In other words, it is configured to display the result of the special symbol lottery by combining the displayed display modes (lighting modes of the LEDs) regardless of the lottery result. In addition, in the first symbol display device 37, while the special symbol variation for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is being executed, each LED is simply blinked to indicate the result of the special symbol lottery of this time. It is configured so that the suggestion mode for the special symbol variation is not displayed until the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed. In addition, since the display mode for showing the result of the special symbol lottery is displayed (lighting display of each LED) at the timing when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, the display mode for showing the lottery result is configured to display for a short period of time.

With this configuration, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the result of the special symbol lottery based on the display mode of the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 on which the variation effect based on the symbol variation is executed.

In addition, in the 32nd control example, as a display mode for indicating the lottery result displayed on the first symbol display device 37, a combination of lighting states of LEDs having a plurality of luminescent colors is used, but this is not the only option. Instead, a plurality of LEDs that light up in the same color may be provided, and the result of the special symbol lottery executed by the combination of the LEDs that light up and the winning type may be displayed.

After the process of S217 is completed, when the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether it is a special symbol jackpot (S218). When it is determined that the lottery result of this time is a special symbol jackpot (S218: Yes), the jackpot start flag 203j is set to ON (S219), and the value of the time reduction counter 203h is cleared (set to 0) (S220). ), set a special figure determination command for indicating that the current special symbol variation has been stopped and displayed (S221), and terminate this process. On the other hand, in the process of S218, if it is determined that there is no special pattern jackpot (S218: No), then it is determined whether the lottery result of this time is a special pattern small hit (S222). If it is determined that there is (S222: Yes), the small hit start setting process is executed (S223), then the time saving update process is executed (S224), the above-described S221 process is executed, and this process ends . In addition, in the processing of S222, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not a small hit (S222: No), the processing of S223 is skipped and the time saving update processing is executed (S224), and the processing of S221 is performed. . In addition, the detailed contents of the small hitting start setting process (S223) executed in the process of S223 will be described later with reference to FIG. will be described later with reference to FIG.

The special figure confirmation command set by the process of S221 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the main process external output process (see S1801 in FIG. , and is transmitted to the audio lamp controller 113 . The voice lamp control device 113, when receiving the special figure confirmation command, executes a process for stopping and displaying the variation performance (third symbol variation) being executed. By configuring in this way, for example, based on the reception of the variation pattern command, power to the pachinko machine 10 is supplied after executing the variation performance corresponding to the variation time of the special symbol variation included in the variation pattern command. Even if the supply is interrupted (power failure etc.) and the voice lamp control device 113 side can no longer manage the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation, by receiving the special figure confirmation command output after power restoration , the third symbol variation being executed can be reliably stopped and displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 965, the processing contents of the special symbol determination processing (S209) will be described. FIG. 965 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the special symbol determination processing (S209). In this special symbol determination process (S209), the hit determination (big hit determination, small hit determination) in the special symbol lottery is executed.

When the special symbol determination process (S209) is executed, first, the data of the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area is acquired (S301), and the lottery result is acquired based on the first winning random number table 202a (S302). , When it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (S303: Yes), the lottery result of the special symbol is set to a big hit (S304), and based on the value of the acquired winning type counter (first winning type counter C2) , sets the jackpot symbol of the special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S305), and terminates this process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery result is not a big hit (S303: No), then it is determined whether the lottery result is a small hit (S306), and if it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit ( S306: Yes), the special symbol lottery result is set to a small hit (S307), and the special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 based on the value of the acquired winning type counter (first winning type counter C2). is set (S308), and the process ends. Also, if it is determined in the process of S306 that it is not a small hit, that is, if the result of the special symbol lottery this time is a loss (S306: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 966, the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S210), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 964), will be described. FIG. 966 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation pattern selection process (S210).

In the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S210), first, in the special symbol determination process (see S209 in FIG. 965), whether or not the special symbol lottery result is a big win, that is, whether a special symbol big win is set. It is determined whether or not (S401).

In the process of S401, when it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is set (S401: Yes), based on the jackpot type selection table 202b and the value of the first hit type counter C2 that has been acquired , determine the jackpot type (S402). Next, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the special symbol execution area is acquired (S403), and the current game state (normal state, time saving state) corresponding to the information stored in the game state storage area 203g. The corresponding variation pattern selection table 202d is read (S404).

Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 acquired in the process of S403 and the variation pattern selection table 202d read in the process of S404 (S405), and based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S405 , to set the special figure variation pattern command (S406). The special figure variation pattern command set here includes the lottery result of the special symbol lottery, the information indicating the variation time of the special symbol, and the external output process of the main process of the main controller 110 (S1801 in FIG. 978 ) to the audio lamp controller 113 .

Next, a special symbol stop type command indicating a special symbol stop symbol is set (S407), the first symbol display device 37 sets the start of special symbol fluctuation (S408), and the process ends. The special symbol stop type command set in the process of S407 includes information indicating the type of stop symbol indicating the result of this special symbol variation, that is, a rough type such as reach out or non-reach out. It is output to the sound lamp controller 113 in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 978) of the main process (FIG. 978) of the main controller 110.

On the other hand, in the process of S401, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery result is not a big hit (S401: No), next, it is determined whether the special symbol lottery result is a small hit (S409), and a small hit is made. If it is determined to be winning (S409: Yes), the small hit type is determined based on the small hit type selection table 202f and the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2 (S410). Then, the process proceeds to the process of S403 described above. Also, in the process of S409, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery result is not a small hit (no) (S409: No), the process of S410 is skipped and the process proceeds to S403.

Next, with reference to FIG. 967, the small hit start setting process (S223) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 967 is a flow chart showing the small winning start setting process (S223). This small hit start setting process (S223) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 964) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 963), and the small hit type (small hit A, B, C), the start of the small winning game is set, and processing for updating the time saving information according to the winning small winning (update processing for the winning number end condition) is executed.

Here, when the small winning game is started, the pachinko machine 10 changes the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 to an open state in which the game ball can win (easy), and the V winning device 650 By passing the winning ball through a specific area (V winning switch (V switch) 650e3), the big winning game is executed (set) after the small winning game is finished.

That is, the game state in which the small winning game is executed is an advantageous state in which the ball can enter the V winning device 650 (a prize ball can be obtained), and the big winning game is executed as compared with the normal game state. It is configured to be in an advantageous state with a high probability. Although the details will be described later, in this 32nd control example, different small winning games are executed corresponding to the small winning types (small winning A, B, C) set when winning the small winning. It is constructed so that the possibility of the ball passing through the specific area during the small winning game differs according to each small winning type.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the possibility (expectation) of executing (setting) the big winning game (per two types) by the small winning game to be executed, so that the small winning game for the player Since it is possible to make the player interested not only in whether or not the player wins the prize, but also in the type of the small prize won, the amusement of the game can be improved.

When the small winning start setting process (S223) is executed, first, the opening scenario corresponding to the small winning type is set (S501). After that, a big hit type corresponding to the small hit type is set in the V passage big hit type storage area 203p (S502). More specifically, based on the small hit type and the small hit type selection table 202f, the V passing big hit type (jackpot game set (executed) when the ball passes through the specific area during the small hit game) is determined. do. As described above, if the small hit type is A, it is determined to be a big hit A (6 rounds with short time), and if the small hit type is B, it is a big hit B (6 rounds with no short time). discriminate.

In this way, when two types of winning are obtained, a jackpot type is set, and a process of starting a jackpot game based on the set jackpot type is executed, thereby winning one type and two types. The processing related to the jackpot game can be shared between the case of winning and the processing, and the processing load of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

In addition, without being limited to the configuration of the 32nd control example, it may be possible to set a jackpot game that can be executed only when one type is won or only when two types are won, It may be configured to execute different jackpot game processing for one kind and for two kinds.

Returning to FIG. 967, the description continues. When the processing of S502 is completed, the start of the small hit is then set based on the small hit type (S503), and the small hit start flag 203n and the small hit medium flag 203o are set to ON (S504). After that, this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 968, the time saving update process (S224) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 968 is a flowchart showing the time saving update process (S224). This time saving update process (S224) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 964) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 963). This is a process for setting the state.

In the time saving update process (S224), first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0, that is, whether the current time is in the time saving (S601). In the process of S601, when the value of the time saving counter 203h is not larger than 0 (is 0), that is, when it is determined that it is not in the time saving (S601: No), this process is finished as it is. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0, that is, if it is determined that the time saving is in progress (S601: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted by 1 (S602), and the process proceeds to S603.

In the process of S603, the remaining time reduction command which shows the value of the time reduction counter 203h changed by calculation (1 subtracted) is set (S603). The remaining time reduction command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1801) of the main processing (see FIG. 978) described later, the voice lamp control device 113.

After that, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 (S604). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 (S604: Yes), the game state is set to the normal state (S605), and the values of the small hit counter 203s and the special figure 2 counter 203t are set to 0 ( S606). Next, a state command indicating that the current game state is the normal state is set (S607), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S604, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not 0 (S604: No), it is determined whether the special symbol variation executed this time is the special symbol variation 2 (second special symbol variation). Determined (S608), if it is determined that it is a special figure 2 fluctuation (S608: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t (S609), and the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t after subtraction is shown Set the remaining time short command (S610), it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t after subtraction is 0 (S611).

In the process of S611, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t is 0 (S611: Yes), the game state is set to the normal state (S612), and the values of the time reduction counter 203h and the small hit counter 203s 0 is set (S613). Next, a state command indicating that the current game state is the normal state is set (S614), and this process is terminated.

Also, in the process of S608, if it is determined that the special symbol variation executed this time is not the special figure 2 variation (second special symbol variation) (S608: No), or in the process of S611, the special figure after the subtraction When it is determined that the value of the 2 counter 203t is not 0 (S611: No), the small winning time saving update process is executed (S615), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 969, the small winning time saving update process (S615) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. Figure 969 is the flowchart which shows the contents of small hitting time saving renewal processing (S615). This small winning time saving update process (S615) is a process executed in the time saving update process (see S224 of Figure 968) of the special symbol variation process (see S104 of Figure 964) of the timer interrupt process (see Figure 963) It is a process for updating the time saving information based on the winning small hit, and updating the game state from the time saving state to the normal state when the time saving end condition is satisfied.

In the small winning time saving update process (S615), first, it is determined whether or not the small winning has been won (S701), and when it is determined that the small winning has not been won (S701: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S701, when it is determined that the small hit is elected (S701: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the small hit counter 203s (S702), and whether the value of the small hit counter 203s is 0 Determine (S703). In the process of S703, when it is determined that the value of the small hit counter 203s is 0 (S703: Yes), the game state is set to the normal state (S704), the value of the time reduction counter 203h and the special figure 2 counter 203t is set to 0 (S705). Next, a state command indicating that the current game state is the normal state is set (S706), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S703, if it is determined that the value of the small hit counter 203s is not 0 (S703: No), the time saving end condition based on the number of times of winning the small hit is not established, so S704 described above. This processing ends without executing the processing of S706.

In addition, in the present 32nd control example, among the plurality of time saving end conditions, when any end condition is satisfied, the value of various counters for updating the time saving information corresponding to each of the plurality of time saving end conditions Since it is only configured to be set to 0 (a value indicating that the time saving end condition is satisfied), after the time saving state ends, it is determined which time saving end condition was satisfied and ended in the previous time saving state. Although it is not possible, for example, a storage means that can store the satisfied time saving end conditions may be provided, and the type of time saving end conditions that have been met in the past and the number of times they have been met may be determined.

By configuring in this way, for example, the time-saving end condition that is likely to be established is determined based on the calculation result calculated from the design value and the actual number of establishments, and the player is established based on the determined content. It can be configured to suggest (notify) an easy time-saving end condition. Furthermore, the update status of the time saving information corresponding to the other time saving end conditions when the time saving end condition of 1 is satisfied (for example, the small hit counter 203s at the time when the value of the time saving counter 203h becomes 0, the special figure 2 counter 203t (each value of ) can be stored, and the time-saving end condition that is most difficult to be satisfied, that is, at the time when one time-saving end condition is satisfied among a plurality of time-saving end conditions, time-saving end having the largest value of time-saving information It may be configured to determine the conditions.

As described above, in the 32nd control example, whether or not the time saving end condition (change number end condition) established based on the number of fluctuations in the special symbol is satisfied is determined by the time saving update process (see FIG. 968), Whether or not the time-saving end condition (winning times end condition) established based on the number of winning times of the special symbol winning is configured to be determined by the small-time saving update process (see FIG. 969). Then, in any process, if one of the multiple set time-saving end conditions is met, the values of various counters for indicating the update status of time-saving information corresponding to the other time-saving end conditions It is configured to be set to a value (0) for indicating a state in which the time saving end condition is satisfied. Therefore, even when any time saving end condition is satisfied, it is possible to unify the processing contents for ending the time saving state.

In addition, in this 32nd control example, in order to indicate the update status of the time saving information corresponding to each time saving end condition, the value indicating each time saving end condition is set to various counters at the timing when the time saving state is set, and each When the time saving information corresponding to the time saving end condition is determined, the value of various counters is subtracted, and when the subtracted value becomes 0, the corresponding time saving end condition is satisfied. , In addition, when the time saving state is set, the value of various counters is set to 0, and when the corresponding time saving information is determined, the value of the counter is added by 1, and the value of the counter after addition is time saving You may comprise so that a time saving state may be complete|finished when it discriminate|determines that it is the value which shows end conditions. In other words, means for determining whether or not the time-saving end condition is established, and in the state where the time-saving state is set, time-saving information corresponding to various time-saving end conditions (the number of special symbol fluctuations, the number of small winnings, etc.) is updated. It is sufficient if the configuration is provided with updating means.

Next, with reference to FIG. 970, the start winning process (S105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 963) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 970 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S105). In the start winning process (S105), it is determined whether the game ball has entered (start winning) into either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. Up to the number (maximum 4 for the first ball entrance 64, maximum 1 for the second ball entrance 640), each acquired counter value is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b.

Further, when each counter value obtained based on the reserved ball is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Or, based on each counter value stored in each of the second special symbol reserved ball storage areas 203b, a process (so-called pre-reading process) of predicting the result of determination in advance, the variation pattern to be selected, etc. is executed. . The starting winning process (S105 in FIG. 970) will be described below.

In the starting winning process (S105), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered (starting winning) the first ball entrance 64, which is the first starting opening (S801). Here, the entry of a ball into a ball detection switch (not shown) provided in the first ball entrance 64 is detected. When it is determined that the ball entered the first ball entrance 64 (there was a starting prize) (S801: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S802). , determines whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S803).

In other words, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls for the first ball entrance 64 at this time is less than the upper limit of 4 (that is, whether or not the number of reserved balls is stored up to the upper limit). When it is determined that the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S803: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (S804), and the voice lamp control device 113 , a reserved ball number command for notifying the reserved number of the first ball entrance 64 (lottery right reserved number of the first special symbol) is set (S805).

Then, each value of various counter values (first hit random number counter C1, first hit type counter C2, variation type counter CS1) is read out (acquired) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol reserved ball storage area of RAM 203 Each is reserved (stored) in the corresponding reserved ball number storage area of 203a (S806), the prefetching process is executed (S807), and the process proceeds to S808.

Also, if it is determined in the process of S801 that the ball has not entered the first ball entrance 64 (S801: No), or in the process of S803, the number of currently held balls for the first ball entrance 64 is the upper limit. If it is determined to be a value (S803: No), the process of adding the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is skipped, and the process proceeds to S808.

Next, each process from S808 to S814 is the same as the process performed for the winning of the ball into the first starting hole (first ball entrance 64) executed in each process from S801 to S807. The only difference is that the processing of 1 is executed for the second ball entrance 640, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The look-ahead processing (S807, S814) will be described later with reference to FIG. A process of determining the determination result, the determined variation pattern, the stop type, and the like is executed. In addition, in this control example, it is configured to execute the process of determining the result of the determination, the determined variation pattern, the stop type, etc. based on the newly stored counter values, but it is limited to this. For example, when there is a new start winning prize, the validity of all the reserved memories stored (stored) in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b It may be configured to execute processing for determining the determination result, the determined variation pattern, the stop type, and the like.

Further, in this control example, when new information (winning information) is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, that is, the special symbol lottery right is newly acquired. However, it is not limited to this, for example, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, or when the lottery result of the normal symbol is determined. Accordingly, the content of the special symbol lottery right (winning information) may be determined in advance.

As described above, in this control example, when the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d or the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is added, information about the added prize Although it is configured to execute the prefetching process (S813) based on (winning information), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to If it is determined to be the upper limit number (4) (S803: No), that is, if the ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 in a state where the number of reserved balls of the special symbol has reached the upper limit, look ahead. It may be configured so that the process (S813) can be executed. As a result, even in a state where the number of reserved balls of special symbols has reached the upper limit, the player can continue to play the game in order to execute the look-ahead process. In addition, since added value can be given when a ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 in a state where the number of reserved balls of special symbols has reached the upper limit, the number of reserved balls of special symbols is the upper limit. When the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 in the state of reaching , it is possible to suppress the decrease in motivation to play.

Next, with reference to FIG. 971, the look-ahead process (S807), which is one process of the starting winning process (S105 in FIG. 970), will be described. FIG. 971 is a flow chart showing this prefetching process (S807).

In the look-ahead process (S807), first, a first hit random number counter C1, which is various counter values from the storage area newly stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, Each value of the first hit type counter C2 and the variation type counter CS1 is read (S901). Then, the read data is stored in the area with the lowest winning order among the vacant storage areas in the prefetching reserve storage area.

Next, based on each counter value newly stored in the prefetching reservation storage area, the result of determination is determined. In addition, here, both the right/wrong determination when the special symbol is in a low probability state and the right/wrong determination when the special symbol is in a high probability state are discriminated. This is the timing when a new reserved memory is generated (the timing when a new reserved (winning information) is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b) Since there is a time lag between the timing at which the jackpot judgment is executed based on the withheld winning information, the game state ( This is because it is difficult to predict the special symbol probability state).

Next, it is determined whether or not the winning determination result is a jackpot (S902). When it is determined that the determination result is a jackpot (S902: Yes), based on the read various counter values, a winning command including information that can identify the jackpot type and variation pattern is set (S903), After that, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the determination result in the processing of S902 is not a big hit (S902: No), it is determined whether the result of the determination is a small hit based on the read various counter values (S904), Based on the winning/failing determination result, a prize winning command including information capable of specifying the winning of the winning prize, the winning of the small winning prize, and the variation pattern is set (S905, S906), and then the process is terminated.

Here, the prize winning command set in the processing of S903, S905 or S906 is the information for indicating the result of winning/failure determination (information that has a different meaning based on the result of winning/failure determination) as well as the common information of S901. is set including information for indicating the values of various counter values read out by the processing of . Then, the winning command set in this process is output to the sound lamp controller 113 by the external output process (S1801) executed in the main process (see FIG. 978) of the main controller 110. FIG.

On the voice lamp control device 113 side, when the winning command is received, the display mode of the pending ball is varied based on various information included in the winning command (for example, the color of the pending ball is changed to a color different from usual). It is possible to execute an effect (pre-reading effect) in which a notice pattern or the like is displayed before the start of the fluctuation to suggest the result of the determination to the player.

In addition, in this control example, since there is only one probability state of the special design (low probability state of the special design), information to be set in the winning command (results of winning or not determination) can be set regardless of the game state. , For example, in a gaming machine having a plurality of probability states of special symbols (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of special symbols), the determination result in the case of the high probability state of special symbols and the low probability of special symbols It may be configured to determine the success or failure determination result in the case of the state and set the winning command based on the result of each determination, or even if the special symbol is in a high probability state or a low probability state A judgment value (value of the first winning random number counter C1) for judging a big win may be defined, and a winning command indicating a special symbol big win may be set only when the judgment value is read.

By configuring in this way, only when it is determined in advance that it is a specific jackpot to the audio lamp control device 113 side, a winning command indicating a jackpot is output, so a special symbol that does not execute a look-ahead effect It is possible to give a feeling of expectation of winning a jackpot against the fluctuation.

Furthermore, the game state when the special symbol lottery is performed based on the retention memory (winning information) stored (memorized) in the first special symbol retention ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol retention ball storage area 203b , and the winning/losing determination may be executed based on the game state. In this case, instead of changing the selection of the variation pattern depending on the number of retained balls, it is possible to determine by selecting a constant variation pattern regardless of the number of retained balls at the start of variation. When the look-ahead is executed, the game state at the time of start of variation can be determined by determining the variation order until the variation of the retained ball starts based on the information retained and stored.

Further, in this control example, when new reserved storage (winning information) is stored (stored) in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, it is based on the winning information. A configuration is used in which prefetching processing is executed and the success/failure determination is predicted in advance in the prefetching processing. Or set information indicating the content (each counter value) of the winning information (holding memory) newly stored (stored) in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b as a winning command, and received at the voice lamp control device 113 side It may be configured to predict the result of winning/failure determination based on the information included in the winning command.

With this configuration, the processing load on main controller 110 can be reduced. In addition, on the audio lamp control device 113 side, a process for determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect is executed, and when it is determined to execute the look-ahead effect, the information included in the winning command received from the main control device 110 It is preferable to configure it so as to perform analysis (prediction of acceptance/rejection determination result). As a result, when the look-ahead performance is not performed, the specific look-ahead processing (prediction of the success/failure determination result) is not performed, so that the Pachinko machine 10 can be prevented from performing useless control. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from illegally obtaining the result of the prefetching process executed without a title.

Next, with reference to FIG. 972, the normal symbol variation process (S106), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 972 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is a process for controlling the variable display of the second symbol (normal symbol), the opening time of the electric accessory 640a, etc., and various processes related to the normal symbol variation (lottery). (Processing for executing normal design variation, processing for setting variation mode (variation time) of normal design variation to be performed, processing for updating normal design variation during execution, processing for stopping normal design variation, result of normal design lottery Processing to determine the game content of the normal figure per game executed when is a hit) is executed.

In the normal symbol variation process (S106), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S1101). During the winning of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a is performed after the second symbol display device 83 displays the winning (after the winning symbol is stopped and displayed). Until the middle (until the winning game is completed) is included. When it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of winning (S1101: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hitting (S1101: No), it is determined whether or not the normal symbol of the second symbol display device 83 is being variably displayed (S1102). If it is determined that the normal symbol variation is not being displayed, that is, if it is determined that a new normal symbol variation (lottery) is currently executable (S1102: No), then the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f A value (M) is obtained (S1103), and it is determined whether the value is greater than 0 (S1104).

When it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 in the processing of S1104 (S1104: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S1104: Yes), the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S1105). That is, when it is determined that the condition for executing a new normal symbol variation (that winning information for use in the normal symbol variation is retained and stored) is satisfied in the processing of S1104, the retained and stored 1 is subtracted from the value of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f in order to execute the normal design variation using the winning information.

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S1106). In the process of S1106, the data stored in the normal design reservation 1 to the normal design reservation 4 of the normal design reservation ball storage area 203c are shifted to the execution area side in order. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of normal symbol reservation 1→execution area. After shifting the data, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S1107).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0, that is, whether or not the current state is the high probability state of normal symbols (during time saving) (S1108), and the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0. If it is determined to be large (S1108: Yes), the winning judgment result (lottery result) is acquired based on the winning judgment value of the second winning random number table 202c for high probability (S1109), and the process proceeds to S1111. . On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S1108: No), based on the hit determination value of the second hit random number table 202c for low probability time, the success or failure determination A result is obtained (S1110), and the process proceeds to S1111.

In the process of S1111, it is determined whether the current normal symbol variation (lottery) is a hit (S1111), and if it is determined to be a hit (S1111: Yes), the display mode of "○" at the time of the hit is displayed. The display mode is set (S1112), and the process proceeds to S1114. On the other hand, in the process of S1111, if it is determined that the current normal symbol variation (lottery) is not a win (no) (S1111: No), the display mode of "x" is set as the display mode when losing (S1113), and the process proceeds to S1114.

In the process of S1114, the variation time of the normal symbol is set to 3 seconds, and this process ends.

In addition, in this control example, as described above, depending on the set probability state of the normal design, the variation time of the normal design is varied. , 3 seconds may be set as the variable time. By configuring in this way, at the timing when the game state is switched, specifically, from the normal state (normal pattern low probability state) in which a long variation time is easily set, a short variation time is easily set Short time. At the timing of the end of the jackpot game when the game state switches to the state (high probability state of the normal pattern), the normal pattern fluctuation of the long fluctuation time is executed, and the time saving state is set. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the normal symbol lottery is not executed.

In addition, regarding the setting method of the fluctuation time of the normal pattern, without being limited to the configuration of this control example, the fluctuation time can be changed according to the game state, or the fluctuation time can be changed according to the number of normal pattern pending balls, The variation time may be varied according to the acquired predetermined value. For example, in this control example, the variation time of the normal symbol variation is set to the normal symbol probability state (high probability state, low probability state ) and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of normal pattern reserved balls). Further, it may be configured such that the ease with which a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 varies depending on the set fluctuation time of the normal symbol.

In this way, by configuring the state of the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 to be variable according to the length of the fluctuation time of the set normal symbol, the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 can be Since the easiness of ball entry can be easily changed according to the game state, various game characteristics can be created.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1102, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner (S1102: Yes), the variation time of the normal symbol being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S1115), and if it is determined that the variation time has not passed (S1115: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has passed in the process of S1115 (S1115: Yes), next, stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S1116). In the process of S1116, when the normal symbol lottery of this time is a win, the second symbol display device 83 is set to stop display (illuminate display) the "O" symbol. On the other hand, when the lottery for the normal symbol is lost, the second symbol display device 83 stops displaying (lights up) the "x" symbol. That is, a setting is made to stop and display the display mode set in the processing of S1112 or S1113 described above.

When the stop display is set by the process of S1116, the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed as the second symbol in the display mode set by the process of S1112 or the process of S1113. The symbol display device 83 stops displaying (lighting display).

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current normal symbol is a hit (S1117). When it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol is not winning (no) (S1117: No), this process is finished as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of the current normal symbol is a win (S1117: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203h is checked to see if the current game state is in the time saving mode (normal symbol high probability state). Refer to and discriminate (S1118), when it is determined that it is in the time saving (high probability state of the normal pattern) (S1118: Yes), as the game contents of the game per normal pattern, the scenario action per normal pattern for time saving, specific Specifically, the game content (opening action) is set such that the opening time of the electric accessary 640a is 1 second×2 times (S1120), and the process proceeds to S1121.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1118, if it is determined that it is not in the time saving (normal high probability state of the symbol) (S1118: No), as the game content of the game per normal pattern, scenario operation per normal pattern, specifically , the game content (opening operation) is set such that the opening time of the electric accessory 640a is 5 seconds×1 time (S1119), and the process proceeds to S1121.

In the process of S1121, based on the scenario set in the process of S1119 or S1120, the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set (S1121), and this process ends.

Next, the opening/closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a in this control example will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, based on the normal symbol probability state (high probability state, low probability state) set at the timing of determining whether the normal symbol is correct (timing of processing S1108 to S1111) Probability of normal symbols set at the timing (timing determined that the fluctuation time has passed in the process of S1115) to set the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a by executing the judgment of normal symbols. It is configured to set the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a based on the state (high probability state, low probability state).

That is, in this control example, the variation processing (lottery processing) regarding normal symbols and the variation processing (lottery processing) regarding special symbols are configured to be executed independently, and further, the variation processing regarding special symbols ( Lottery processing) based on the result of normal design probability state (high probability state, low probability state) is configured to vary. Therefore, depending on the result of the variation processing (lottery processing) regarding the special symbols that is executed in parallel during the period when the variation processing (lottery processing) regarding the normal symbols is performed, the normal symbols are usually at the timing of judging whether the symbols is set, and at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a, there is a case where the normal symbol low probability state is set.

In such a situation, for example, based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol that is set at the timing of determining whether the normal symbol is appropriate, the opening control mode (open pattern) is set, the electric accessory 640a is long open in a state where the normal symbol low probability state is set (an open pattern executed when the normal symbol high probability state is set ) was a problem.

Therefore, in this control example, the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a is determined, and based on the determination result, the electric role It is configured to set the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the object 640a. Thereby, the electric accessory 640a can be opened in an opening pattern according to the set game state.

In addition, in this control example, the normal design success/failure determination is executed based on the probability state of the normal symbol at the timing of performing the success/failure determination of the normal symbol, and the opening control mode of the electric accessory 640a to be moved in the winning game of the normal symbol. Although it is configured to set the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a based on the probability state of the normal symbol at the timing of setting (opening pattern), it is not limited to this, for example, the normal symbol is determined. A high-probability state of normal symbols is set at the timing, and a high-probability state of normal symbols is also set at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a to be moved in the winning game of the normal symbols. The electric accessory 640a may be configured to open for a long time only when the electric accessory 640a is open. It may be configured to set

In addition, although detailed description is omitted, various information (normal symbol lottery results, normal symbol fluctuation fluctuation time, normal pattern per scenario, etc.) determined in the normal symbol fluctuation process (see S106) A command indicating the content of the information is set and output to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output processing of the main processing of the main control device 110 .

Next, the contents of the through gate passage processing (S107) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 973 is a flow chart showing the contents of the through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing, and determines whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67. When the ball has passed, the second This is a process for acquiring the value indicated by the hit random number counter C4 and storing it in the execution area. In addition, using the value of the acquired normal random number counter C5, before the actual propriety determination is executed (normally before the propriety determination (see S1111) is executed in the symbol variation process), This is a process for obtaining the lottery results (results of winning/failing determination) in advance.

In the through gate passing process (S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S1201). Here, passage of the ball through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (S1201: Yes), then the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is acquired (S1202), and then , determines whether the value (M) of the acquired normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 4 (whether the normal symbol reserved ball number has reached the upper limit) (S1203).

In the process of S1203, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 4 (the upper limit is 4) (S1203: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not greater than 4 (S1203: Yes), 1 is added to the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (S1204 ), set a normal pattern reserved ball number command for indicating the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f after addition (S1205), and store the value of the second winning random number counter C4 in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S1206), and the process ends. Although detailed description is omitted, in this control example, in the same way as when acquiring a special symbol reservation ball (special figure reservation), when acquiring a normal symbol reservation (general figure reservation), the acquisition The second winning random number counter C4 included in the general pattern reservation is configured so that the lottery result can be obtained in advance by referring to the second winning random number table 202c (the general pattern prediction can be executed). . And, it is configured to be able to set the winning prize information command for general figure including information indicating the result of general figure prefetching.

The general figure winning information command set here is notified to the audio lamp control device 113 by the same processing as the winning information command indicating the preliminary determination result of the special symbol set in each control example described above. By constructing in this way, the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery corresponding to the reserved and stored normal pattern lottery right can be discriminated in advance, and the performance can be executed based on the preliminary discrimination result.

Next, the contents of the V entrance passage processing (S108) and the V passage processing (S109) will be described with reference to FIGS. 974 and 975. FIG. The V entrance passage processing (S108) and V passage processing (S109) shown in FIGS. 974 and 975 are the same as the V entrance passage processing and V passage processing described in the control example described above. Therefore, detailed description thereof is omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 976, NMI interrupt processing will be described. 976 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. FIG. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as power-off occurrence information setting (S1601), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout launch control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 977, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 977 is a flow chart showing this startup process.

This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 977), first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1701). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this control example) is executed. (S1702). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1703).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S1704), and if it is turned on (S1704: Yes), the process proceeds to S1715. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S1704: No), it is further determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1705), and if not stored (S1705: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1705: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1706). If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power-off, the backed-up data has been destroyed. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203 . Instead of the RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be judged based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the processing of S1715, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1715). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing of RAM 203 (S1716, S1717).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM 203 is initialized (S1716, S1717).

Also, if power failure occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization processing (S1716, S1717) is executed in the same way. . In the RAM initialization process (S1716, S1717), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1716), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1717). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1710.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S1704: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S1705: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S1707: Yes), while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is retained, the power failure occurrence information is cleared (S1708). Next, the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) transmits a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning to the game state at the time of drive power interruption (S1709), and the process proceeds to S1710. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S1710). After that, the value of the time saving counter is read (S1711), the state command based on the read value is set (S1712), the flow path solenoid is set to OFF (S1713), the interrupt is permitted (S1714), and the main Go to processing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 978, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the startup processing described above will be described. FIG. 978 is a flow chart showing this main process. This main process is roughly divided into a counter update process and a power-off process.

In the main process (see FIG. 978), first, output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 in the timer interrupt process is transmitted to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device). ) is executed (S1801). Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process in the timer interrupt process is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of winning balls is transmitted to the payout control device 111. . In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process and the start winning process. Furthermore, by this external output processing (S1801), various commands set by various processing of the main control device 110 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (variation information for setting effects, decorative effects, etc.). Also, the opening command, round number command, and ending command set in the jackpot control process are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . Further, various commands set in other control processing are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . In addition, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112 when the ball is to be launched.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1802). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1803), and then in the case of a special symbol jackpot state, the voice lamp control device 113 A command setting for executing a jackpot effect and a jackpot control process for opening the specific prize winning port 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 are executed (S1804).

Details of the jackpot control processing (S1804) will be described later with reference to FIG. ) is opened, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the winning opening (specific winning opening 65a) has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have entered the winning opening (specific winning opening 65a). Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the prize winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a) is closed. The opening and closing of the winning opening (specific winning opening 65a) are repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In this control example, the jackpot control process (S1804) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, a small winning control process (S1805) in which various operation controls related to a small winning game are executed is executed, and the process proceeds to S1806.

Next, an electric accessory opening/closing process for controlling opening/closing of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is executed (S1806). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary product is set by the processing of S1121 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 972), the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product is started. The open/close control of the electric accessary product is continued until the period set by the processing of S1119 and the processing of S1120 in the normal symbol variation processing ends.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S1807). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S210 in FIG. 966), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Start. In this control example, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on. If the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the special symbol variation pattern selection process ends, the variation display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is terminated. Then, in the display mode set in S407 of the special symbol variation pattern selection process, stop symbols are displayed (lighted up) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B.

Furthermore, in this control example, when one of the special symbols is stopped and displayed in a display mode (jackpot pattern) indicating a big win, the other special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode (outgoing pattern) indicating an omission. A stop display for that purpose is also performed.

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1808). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the normal symbol variation process, the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. As a result, in the second pattern display device, a variable display is performed in which the second pattern "O" pattern and the "X" pattern are alternately lit. In addition, in the second symbol display update process (S1808), when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the normal symbol variation process, the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device is ended, and the normal In the display mode set by the symbol variation process, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device.

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1809). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this control example) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S1810). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1810: Yes), the process proceeds to S1801, and the above-described processes after S1801 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (S1810: No), during the time until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing, the second The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1811, S1812).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1811). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (999, 999 in this control example), they are cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1811 (S1812). In addition, in the process of this S1812, the value of the normal figure fluctuation classification counter CS2 is updated similarly to the value of the fluctuation classification counter CS1.

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1801 to S1808 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first per random number counter C1, the initial value of the second per random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and the values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the general figure fluctuation type counter CS2 are also randomly updated. can do. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the processing contents for updating the judgment value related to the lottery of special symbols and normal symbols, and it is possible to prevent the execution of fraudulent games aiming at the timing when the judgment value corresponding to the win is acquired. can be suppressed.

In addition, in the processing of S1809, if information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1809: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 976 has been executed, so the processing at power-off from S1813 is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (S1813), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 111 and sound lamp control device 113) power off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S1814). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1815), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1816), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area backed up in the RAM 203 .

It should be noted that the process of S1809 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in S1801 to S1808, or at the time of the end of one cycle of the processes of S1811 and S1812 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S1801. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1801, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the processing at power-off, the initial setting processing (FIG. 977, S1701) By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1801 can be started. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, with reference to FIG. 979, the contents of the jackpot control process (S1804) will be described. FIG. 979 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot control process (S1804). This jackpot control process (S1804) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 978) of the main controller 110, and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with special symbols, various It is a process for executing an effect and opening or closing the specific winning opening 65a. Since the detailed contents are the same as those of the control examples described above, the detailed description will be omitted.

In this 32nd control example, when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, the jackpot type selection table 202b is used to execute the process of determining the jackpot type, and the ending period corresponding to the determined jackpot type is set. It consists of Therefore, in the processing of S1912, the ending command for display corresponding to the length of the ending period determined corresponding to the jackpot type is set. In addition, unlike the 32nd control example, the length of the ending period is not set when the jackpot is won, but the presence or absence of V winning during the jackpot game (whether or not the ball passes through the specific area (V gate 650e3)) The length of the ending period of the jackpot game may be determined in accordance with .

Specifically, in the jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 979), when it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending period (the end timing of the final round), the game content executed during this jackpot game is determined, The length of the ending period of the jackpot game may be determined based on the determination result, and in particular, it is possible to vary the game state set after the jackpot game ends based on the result of the game executed during the jackpot game. In the pachinko machine 10, when the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is advantageous to the player, the length of the ending period may be longer than in other cases. .

By configuring in this way, in the pachinko machine 10 capable of changing the game state set after the end of the jackpot game according to the game result during the jackpot game, the ending corresponding to the game state actually set. A period can be set.

In addition, in the case of using the configuration in which the ending period of the jackpot game is changed according to the game result during the jackpot game, any time between the determination of the game result during the jackpot game and the start of the ending period It may be configured to determine the ending period of the jackpot game at that timing. later), the presence or absence of V winning is determined, and based on the determination result, the ending period of the jackpot game may be set during the period in which the round games of the second round to the final round are being executed. good.

Furthermore, in the above-described example, the length of the ending period is set based on the presence or absence of a V prize during the jackpot game. An ending period of a jackpot game is set, specifically, an ending period of 17 seconds is set in advance when winning a probability variable jackpot, and 15 seconds when a normal jackpot is won, and the ending period is set in advance during the jackpot game. If it becomes necessary to vary the length of the ending period based on the game result of , that is, if the V prize cannot be won during the jackpot game even though the probability variable jackpot game is executed, It may be configured such that the length of the set ending period is variable. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the frequency of setting the length of the ending period during the jackpot game.

On the other hand, in the process of S1911, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the currently executed ending period (S1911: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1913). Here, the end timing of the jackpot indicates a case where the execution period of the ending effect has passed. In the process of S1913, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1913: Yes), the jackpot type being executed is read (S1914), and based on the read jackpot type, the corresponding time reduction using the time reduction grant table 202e Set the end condition (S1915), set the time saving setting information command corresponding to the setting content set by the processing of S1915 (S1916), set the state command corresponding to the game state after the end of the jackpot (S1917), The end of the jackpot is set (S1918), the flag 203k during the jackpot is set to OFF (S1919), and the process is finished.

Next, with reference to FIG. 980, the processing contents of the small hit control processing (S1805) will be described. FIG. 980 is a flow chart showing the details of the small hit control process (S1805). It should be noted that the small winning control processing (S1805) executed in the present 32nd control example is the same as the small winning control processing in each control example described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding control processing executed by the sound ramp control device in the 32nd control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 981 to 1001, each control process executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into startup processing that is activated upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 981, start-up processing executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 981 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S3001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing in S3118 (see FIG. ) is started during execution (S3002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 982, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives information on the occurrence of power failure from the main controller 110 (see S3115 in FIG. 982), it executes power failure processing in S3118. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S3118 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S3002: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S3118. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3003).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S3006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S3003: Yes), it will transfer to S3004 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S3008.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S3004. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S3118 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the operation is started with the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S3003: No), and the process proceeds to S3008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S3002: Yes), the startup processing this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during execution of the power-off processing in S3118, the sound lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S3004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S3004, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S3004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S3005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S3006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S3005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S3007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the process of S3008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S3008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off processing of S3118 is executed (see S3117 in FIG. 982). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S3118 is executed. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S3118 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S3008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S3009), and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S3010), an interrupt Permission is set (S3011), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S3008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the current start-up process was started after, for example, the power supply was completely shut off. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S3008: No), S3009, which is processing for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3010 to set the initial value of the RAM 223 (S3010).

The reason why the clearing process of S3009 is skipped is that when the process of S3008 is reached from S3004 through the process of S3006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S3004, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, referring to FIG. 982, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 982 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has passed since the main process was started or since the process of S3101 was last executed (S3101). If not (S3101: No), the process proceeds to S3113 without performing the processes of S3102 to S3112. In the processing of S3101, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has passed because S3102 to S3112 are processing related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). , S3113 and the variable display setting process of S3114 are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the process of S3113 in a short period, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S3113 in a short period, the command received by the command determination process Based on this, the setting regarding the variable display effect can be performed without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S3101 (S3101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S3103 to S3114 are sent to the display control device 114. Output processing is executed (S3102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S3108 described later (S3103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S3104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S3105 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S3105, a customer waiting effect is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S3106). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed. 114.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S3107). In this frame button input monitoring/rendering process, input as to whether or not various buttons such as the frame button 22 (rendering button 22a) and the selection button 600 operated by the player in order to enhance the performance effect are monitored. This is a process of setting so as to perform corresponding effects and game environment settings when input of various buttons is confirmed. In this process, when the player's operation of various buttons (frame button 22, select button 600) is detected, the display control device 114 is notified that the various buttons (frame button 22, select button 600) have been operated. Set the frame button operation command to be notified. The details of this frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S3107) will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is finished, the lamp editing processing is executed (S3108), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S3109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S3109, liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S3110), and then various counter updating processing is executed (S3111). Thereafter, effect update processing is executed (S3112). After executing the process of S3112, the process proceeds to S3113. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. Lamp edit processing of S3108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring processing. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S3109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

After the processing of S3112, command determination processing (S3113) for performing processing according to the command received from the main controller 110 is executed, and the processing shifts to S3114. Details of this command determination process (S3113) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S3114, in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a variable pattern command for display is generated based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110, and the command is sent to the display controller 114. Executes a variable display setting process, which is a process for setting to transmit to. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S3114 is completed, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S3115). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S3115 (S3115: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S3117), and the power-off processing is executed (S3118). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off (S3119), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S3115 (S3115: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S3116), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S3116: No), the process returns to S3101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3116: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinitely looped, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination processing (S3113) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 983 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S3113). This command determination process (S3113) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 982) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. . Details of the command determination process (S3113) will be described below.

When the command determination process (S3113) is executed, it is first determined whether a variation pattern command has been received (S3201), and if it is determined that it has been received (S3201: Yes), the variation start corresponding to the received variation pattern command The flag 223d is set to ON (S3202), and the variation pattern command is extracted from the received command (S3203). Then, the process ends.

If it is determined that the special figure variation pattern command has not been received in the process of S3201 (S3201: No), then it is determined whether the stop type command has been received (S3204), and if it is determined that it has been received ( S3204: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e corresponding to the received stop type command is set to ON (S3205), and the stop type is extracted from the received command (S3206). Then, this processing ends.

If it is determined in the process of S3204 that the stop type command has not been received (S3204: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S3207). Here, if it is determined that the pending ball number command has been received (S3207: Yes), pending information related processing is executed (S3208), and then this processing ends. In the reservation information related process, the number of reserved balls is extracted from the received number of reserved balls command, and the corresponding value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c. Processing is performed to determine the mode of presentation based on the acquisition of the ball. A detailed description of the pending information related process (S3208) will be given later with reference to FIG.

Also, in the process of S3207, if it is determined that the pending ball number command has not been received (S3207: No), it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S3209). In the process of S3209, if it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S3209: Yes), the process of storing the winning information based on the received winning information command in the winning information storage area 223a is executed (S3210). End the process. Specifically, in the process of S3210, the symbol type (special symbol, normal symbol) corresponding to the winning information included in the received winning information command is analyzed, and the storage area corresponding to the analysis result (voice lamp control device 113 223a) in the RAM 223, and processing for executing an effect (prefetching effect) based on the received prize information.

In the processing of S3209, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S3209: No), then it is determined whether or not the status command has been received (S3211). Yes), the status command process is executed (S3212), and this process ends. This state command processing (S3212) receives the state command indicating the current game state, sets the mode effect mode according to the game state, and displays the corresponding effect mode ( For example, a display command for displaying a rear image) is set. The details of this state command processing (S3212) will be described later with reference to FIG.

If it is determined that the status command has not been received in the process of S3211 (S3211: No), then it is determined whether a hit-related command has been received (S3213), and if it is determined that it has been received (S3213: Yes ), the hit-related process is executed (S3214), and then the process ends. A detailed description of the hit-related process (S3214) will be given later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received (S3213: No), it is determined whether the command for the number of prize balls has been received (S3215), and if it is determined that the command for the number of prize balls has been received (S3215 : Yes), it is determined whether the value of the rush period measuring counter 223m is 1 or more, that is, whether the current period (rush period) is for measuring the total number of prize balls (S3216), and the rush period measuring counter 223m is greater than or equal to 1 (S3216: Yes), the value corresponding to the number of prize balls included in the number of prize balls command received this time is added to the value of the number of prize balls counter 223n (S3217), End this process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3216 that the value of the rush period measuring counter 223m is not 1, then the present process is not in the rush period, so the process of S3217 is skipped and this process ends.

The pachinko machine 10 in this 32nd control example starts a game from a state in which the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set as the game state, and the first entry is made by the left-handed game. A game for executing a first special symbol lottery is performed by entering a game ball into the ball opening 64.例文帳に追加Then, when a winning game (big winning game, small winning game) executed when winning (big winning, small winning) is started in the first special symbol lottery, a winning device (variable A right-handed game is performed in order to win the game ball to the winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650).

If the time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set after the end of the winning game, the game ball fired by the right-handed game is entered than when the normal state is set. A second ball entrance 640 is arranged so as to make it easier to throw a ball, and by entering a game ball into the second ball entrance 640, a game for executing a second special symbol lottery is performed.

Here, the second special symbol lottery is constructed so that the probability of winning a winning prize (probability of winning a small winning prize) is higher than that of the first special symbol lottery, and when the second special symbol lottery wins a prize. , it is configured so that the time saving state is more likely to be set after the winning game is finished than in the case of winning in the first special symbol lottery. Therefore, once the time-saving state is set, it is configured to facilitate execution of the time-saving state game for a long period of time while performing a plurality of winning games.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example configured in this way, the game period including at least the period in which the right-handed game is continuously executed (the winning game period, the period in which the time saving state is set) is given to the player. In order to inform the player that it is an advantageous playing period, a rush state is set as a game state in terms of presentation. In this way, by executing a common effect (rush effect) while the advantageous game period that is advantageous to the player continues, the player is informed that the advantageous game period continues. It can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

Then, in the thirty-second control example, the point display mode for showing the information corresponding to the total value of the benefits (the number of prize balls) acquired by the player during the advantageous game period is displayed in the display area Dm6. (see display area Dm6 in FIG. 934(a)). In the process of S3216, by referring to the value of the rush period measuring counter 223m, it is determined whether the current period is an advantageous game period. The value of the rush period measuring counter 223m is configured to be set to 1 when the time saving state is set as the game state. Then, when the special figure 2 suspension is not acquired in the normal state, the value of the rush period measurement counter 223m is cleared.

With this configuration, the value of the rush period measuring counter 223m can be updated (cleared) in correspondence with the timing at which the advantageous game period starts and the timing at which the advantageous game period ends. An appropriate value corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the period can be added to the prize ball number counter 223n.

If it is determined in the processing of S3215 that the number-of-balls command has not been received (S3215: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S3218), and this processing ends. Here, a part of detailed processing contents executed in the processing of S3218 will be described. In the process of S3218, for example, a process based on the reception of the special figure confirmation command output when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed is executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the symbol determination command has been received, and if it is determined that the symbol determination command has been received, the stop display of the third symbol is set, and this processing is terminated. By executing this process, the timing at which the main controller 110 stopped displaying the special symbol variation can be reliably determined by the audio lamp control device 113 side. Even if the voice lamp control device 113 side cannot determine the remaining variation time of the special symbol variation after the power is restored due to the power being cut off during the game, it is made to correspond to the stop display timing of the special symbol variation. can determine the stop display timing of the variable effect.

Furthermore, in the process of S3218, various processes relating to the normal symbol lottery are also executed. Specifically, when the normal symbol reserved ball number command is received, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f of the main control device 110 included in the reserved ball number command (that is, the normal symbol variable display is reserved The number of balls) is extracted, and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is updated according to the extracted counter value.

Here, the reserved ball number command is that a game ball enters (starts winning) into various ball entrances (first ball entrance 64, second ball entrance 640, through gate 67), and various reserved ball number counters When the value is added, or when executing various fluctuation start processing, when the value of the various reserved ball number counters is subtracted, it is transmitted from the main controller 110, so when starting winning or fluctuation Each time the display is set, the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, and the normal symbol reserved ball number counter (not shown) of the voice lamp control device 113 are It is possible to match the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, and the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f.

Therefore, due to the influence of noise, etc., the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, and the normal symbol reserved ball number counter (not shown) of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 are Even if the values of the various reserved ball counters 203d, 203e, and 203f of the main controller 110 deviate, the reserved ball number command will is notified, the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, and the normal symbol reserved ball number counter (not shown) of the voice lamp control device 113 are corrected, and the main control device It is possible to match the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, and the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f of 110.

Next, with reference to FIG. 984, the hold information related process (S3208) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 984 is a flow chart showing the contents of the pending information related process (S3208). This pending information related process (S3208) is executed in the command determination process (see S3113 in FIG. 983) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and Based on the processing for managing the number of reserved balls (special figure reserved number) of special symbols on the audio lamp control device 113 side, and for setting the production mode in the case of acquiring special figure 2 reserved in the time saving state It executes the process. Details of the pending information related process (S3208) will be described below.

When the pending information related process (S3208) is executed, first, the special symbol type and the number of pending balls are extracted from the received pending ball number command, and the special symbol pending ball number counter corresponding to the pending ball number command received this time. (Special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c) (S3301), stored special symbol reserved ball number counter (special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, special symbol 2 reserved ball number A display command corresponding to the value of the counter 223c) is set (S3302). The display command set by the process of S3302 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, and is executed by the command output process (see FIG. 982) of the main process executed by the MPU 221. 982), it is transmitted to the display control device 114. Display control device 114, when receiving the display command set by the processing of S3302, displays on the third symbol display device 81 a display mode for indicating the special figure pending number included in the received display command.

Next, it is determined whether the pending ball number command received this time is a pending ball number command (command indicating special figure 2 suspension) related to the second special symbol (S3303), and it is determined that it is not a command indicating special figure 2 suspension If so (S3303: No), the process proceeds to S3310. On the other hand, in the processing of S3303, if it is determined that the command indicates special figure 2 hold (S3303: Yes), then read the current time saving situation from the time saving information update area 223h (S3304). Here, the time saving information update area 223h is configured to store various game contents to be executed during the time saving state, and for example, indicates whether or not the special symbol variation is being executed. It is configured to store information and information indicating updated contents of elements (for example, information on small winnings and information on the number of special symbol fluctuations) for establishing each time saving end condition.

Therefore, by reading the information stored in the time saving information update area 223h, not only whether the present is the time saving state, but also whether it is during the special symbol fluctuation period, and the final fluctuation of the time saving state For example, even if the second special symbol variation in the time saving state is executed, the second special symbol variation is the final variation in the time saving state. Different effects can be determined depending on whether or not there is.

When the processing of S3304 is finished, next, it is determined whether the current is during the final fluctuation in the time saving state (during the special symbol fluctuation of the number of fluctuations in which the time saving end condition is satisfied) (S3305), and it is during the final fluctuation If so (S3305: Yes), a display command for indicating completion of charging is set (S3306), and the process proceeds to S3310. In other words, when receiving the pending ball number command indicating the acquisition of special figure 2 suspension during the final fluctuation in the time saving state, after the time saving state is completed and the normal state is set, the second based on the acquired special figure 2 suspension Since it is possible to execute the 2 special symbol lottery, a display command indicating that the time saving state ends in the state where the special figure 2 reservation is acquired is set by the processing of S3306. The display command set by the process of S3306 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, and is executed by the command output process (see FIG. 982) of the main process executed by the MPU 221. 982), it is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display command set by the process of S3306 is received, the display control device 114 displays the display mode for indicating the completion of charging included in the received display command on the third symbol display device 81 (Fig. 941 ( a) see).

Here, in this 32nd control example, among the special symbol final fluctuations (special figure 2 final fluctuation) in the time saving state, out of the fluctuation period of the special figure 2 final fluctuation for indicating that the lottery result is out, Using a partial period, the player is configured to be able to execute an effect (FINAL charge effect) that prompts the player to acquire special figure 2 reservation (Fig. 941 (a)). Then, immediately after the FINAL charge performance is executed (within 1 second), when the special figure 2 suspension is acquired, the special figure 2 suspension is obtained after the FINAL charge performance has passed for 1 second. (“Charging completed” display) is configured to be executed.

Therefore, when the display control device 114 receives the display command set by the processing of S3306, the current time is the charge completion display standby period (the period from the start of the FINAL charge effect to the elapse of one second). ), and if it is not the waiting period, display mode for notifying that charging is completed in a mode corresponding to the effect currently executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. indicate. On the other hand, if it is the standby period, only the process of temporarily storing the reception of the display command indicating the completion of charging (the process of setting a dedicated standby flag to ON) is executed, and the completion of charging is indicated. The display of the display mode for notification is made to stand by. Then, when it is determined that the waiting period has passed, it is determined whether the standby flag is set to ON, that is, whether the display of the display mode for notifying the completion of charging is waiting. When it is determined that the battery is on standby, a display mode is displayed to indicate that charging is completed, and the standby flag is turned off.

In the processing of S3305, if it is determined that it is not in the time saving final variation (S3305: No), then it is determined whether the current special symbol variation (during special figure variation) (S3307), special figure variation If it is determined to be in the middle (S3307: Yes), it is determined whether or not the pending consecutive flag 223o is set to ON (S3308), and if it is determined that the pending consecutive flag 223o is set to ON, If the first special symbol variation after the time saving state is set is a special symbol variation that wins and is a special symbol variation that corresponds to the winning that has already been notified in the holding continuous production (S3308 : Yes), set a display command for indicating the effect mode suggesting the next holding group (S3309), and shift to the processing of S3310. On the other hand, in the process of S3307, when it is determined that the present is not in the special figure fluctuation (S3307: No), the process of S3308 and S3309 is skipped, the process of S3310 is executed, and this process ends.

Next, the state command processing (S3212) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 985 is a flow chart showing this state command processing (S3212). This state command processing (S3212) is executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 983) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is executed according to the set game state. A process for setting different display modes to be displayed on the three-symbol display device 81 is executed. Details of the state command processing (S3212) will be described below.

When the state command process (S3212) is executed, first, information for indicating the current game state included in the state command received this time is stored in the subsidiary game state storage area 223g (S3401). Then, it is determined whether the game state has shifted to the normal state (S3402), and if it is determined that the state has shifted to the normal state (S3402: Yes), the right-handed flag 223r is set to OFF (S3403), and time saving The information stored in the information update area 223h is cleared (S3404). Concretely, it clears the information (the number of small hits, the number of special symbol variations, the number of second special symbol variations) for determining whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied. By configuring in this way, although the normal state is set, the production based on the information stored in the time saving information update area 223h is executed, and the production that makes the player feel uncomfortable is executed. It can be suppressed. After that, it is determined whether there is a second special symbol pending memory (special figure 2 pending) (S3405), and if it is determined that there is a special figure 2 pending (S3405: Yes), a display command indicating that it is being pulled back Set (S3410), and terminate this process. A display mode (see FIG. 941(b)) indicating that the current is being pulled back is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by the display command set in the process of S3410. On the other hand, in the process of S3405, if it is determined that there is no special figure 2 reservation, that is, if it is determined that the normal state is set in a state where the special figure 2 reservation is not acquired (S3405: No), rush period measurement The value of the counter 223m is cleared to 0 (S3407), a display command indicating the normal state (normal state) is set (S3408), a display command for guiding left-handed hitting is set (S3409), and this processing ends. do. That is, in this control example, the duration of the rush period, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is not limited only to the time when the time saving state is set, but the second special symbol lottery based on the special figure 2 hold is executed. It is configured so that the measurement can be continued even in the normal state. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the game period is advantageous to the player regardless of the set game state. Also, in the processing of S3402, if it is determined that the game state has not shifted to the normal state (S3402), then it is determined whether the state has shifted to the time saving state (S3411), and the state has shifted to the time saving state If it is determined (value 3411 of the SW effective time counter 223q: Yes), the time saving information included in the received status command is stored in the time saving information update area 223h (S3412), and a display command indicating that the rush is in progress is set. (S3413), the value of the rush period measuring counter 223m is set to 1 (S3414), and this processing ends. Moreover, in the process of S3411, when it discriminate|determines not having shifted to a time saving state (S3411:No), this process is complete|finished as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 986, the processing contents of the win-related processing (S3214) will be described. FIG. 986 is a flow chart showing the details of the win-related process (S3214). This hit-related process (S3214) is a process that is executed when a command related to the big win game or the small win game is received, and determines the effect mode of the effect (hit game effect) that is executed during each win game. process is executed.

When the hit related process (S3214) is executed, first, it is determined whether the jackpot start command is received (S3501), and if it is determined that the jackpot start command is received (S3501: Yes), the jackpot start command for display is set (S3502), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S3501: No), then it is determined whether a jackpot related command (opening command, interval command, ending command, etc.) has been received (S3503), and the jackpot When it is determined that the related command has been received (S3503: Yes), the jackpot related process is executed (S3504), and then the process ends.

In the processing of S3503, if it is determined that the jackpot related command is not received (S3503: No), then it is determined whether the small hit start command is received (S3505), and the small hit start command is received When it is determined (S3505: Yes), a small hit start command for display is set (S3506), and this process ends. In the process of S3505, if it is determined that the small hit start command is not received (S3505: No), then receive the small hit related command (small hit start command, small hit end command, V passing command, etc.) It is determined whether (S3507), and if it is determined that the small hit related command is received (S3507: Yes), the small hit related process is executed (S3508), and this process ends. Moreover, in the process of S3507, when it determines with not having received the small hitting related command (S3507:No), this process is complete|finished as it is. The detailed contents of the small hit related process (S3508) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 987, the processing contents of the jackpot related processing (S3504) will be described. FIG. 987 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot related process (S3504). In this jackpot-related processing (S3504), the jackpot game (initial jackpot game) executed when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery in the normal state and the jackpot game other than the jackpot game are determined. processing is executed. When the jackpot related process (S3504) is executed, first, it is determined whether the jackpot game to be executed this time is the jackpot game (initial jackpot game) to be executed when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery in the normal state. It is determined (S3601), and when it is determined that it is the first jackpot game (S3601: Yes), first jackpot related processing is executed (S3602), and the process proceeds to S3614. Also, if it is determined that it is not the first big hit game in the process of S3601 (S3601: No), then it is determined whether an opening command has been received (S3603), and if it is determined that an opening command has been received (S3603 : Yes), sets an opening command for display (S3604), and proceeds to the processing of S3614.

In the processing of S3603, if it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S3603: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S3605). Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S3606), the round number command for display is set (S3607), the value of the round number counter 223p is incremented by 1 (S3608), and the during-round effect processing is executed. (S3609), and the process proceeds to S3614.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3605 that the round number command has not been received (S3605: No), then it is determined whether an ending command has been received (S3610), and if it is determined that it has been received (S3610 : Yes), it is determined whether the pending flag 223o is set to ON (S3611), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (S3611: No), the value of the round number counter is cleared (S3612) , the ending command for display is set (S3613), and the process proceeds to S3614. Also, when it is determined in the process of S3611 that the pending flag 223o is set to ON (S3611: Yes), the process of S3612 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3613.

In other words, when the pending consecutive flag 223o is set to ON, the value of the round number counter for accumulating the number of rounds of the big winning game is not cleared when the big winning game ends. Therefore, when the second big winning game (the big winning game targeted for the holding continuous production) is executed after the holding consecutive production is executed, the display indicating the number of rounds of the big winning game is the number of the previous big winning game. It will be displayed taking over the number of rounds. By configuring in this way, when the holding continuous performance is executed, it becomes easy to execute a series of performances over a plurality of times of the jackpot game, so that it is possible to easily provide a performance with a sense of unity. .

In addition, when the holding continuous effect is continuously executed, the display mode for displaying the number of rounds of the jackpot game becomes a display mode corresponding to a large number of rounds. It is possible to display a display mode corresponding to the number of rounds exceeding the possible number of rounds. By configuring in this way, a jackpot game is played in a state where a special figure 2 hold is acquired, with the aim of continuously executing the holding series production for the player in order to display a larger number of rounds. It is possible to make it easier to play a right-handed game aiming to execute.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3610 that the ending command has not been received (S3610: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S3614), and then this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 988, the processing contents of the during-round effect processing (S3609) executed in the jackpot related processing (see S3504 in FIG. 987) will be described. FIG. 988 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the during-round effect processing (S3609). In this round production process (S3609), other than the first time jackpot game, that is, among the jackpot productions in the jackpot game executed during the rush period including the time saving state, the production mode executed during the round game (holding continuous production) A process for determining the effect mode) is executed.

When the round production process (S3609) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the round number command received this time is a command indicating the final round of the jackpot game (S3701), and it is determined that it is not a command indicating the final round. If so (S3701: No), the process corresponding to other commands for determining the effect mode corresponding to the received round number is executed (S3708), and this process ends.

In the processing of S3701, if it is determined that the command indicates the final round (S3701: Yes), then read the special figure 2 pending winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S3702), read It is determined whether or not winning information (hitting pending) for winning (minor winning, big winning) is included in the winning information (S3703). In the process of S3703, if it is determined that the hit hold is included (S3703: Yes), it is determined whether the hold run flag 223o is set to ON (S3704), and it is determined that it is set to ON. If so (S3704: Yes), an effect mode (holding continuous effect) for indicating the holding continuous effect is determined (S3705), and the process proceeds to S3708.

In addition, in the processing of S3704, if it is determined that the holding consecutive effect is not set to ON (S3704: No), whether or not to execute the holding consecutive effect is determined by lottery (S3706), and the execution of the holding consecutive effect is executed. If determined (S3707: Yes), the pending flag 223o is set to ON (S3709), and the process proceeds to S3705. In the process of S3707, when it is determined that the holding continuous effect is not executed (S3707: No), the process relating to the holding continuous effect is skipped and the process proceeds to S3708. On the other hand, in the processing of S3703, if it is determined that the winning suspension is not included (S3703: No), it is determined whether the suspension consecutive flag 223o is set to ON (S3710), and if it is set to ON If so (S3710: Yes), the pending flag 223o is set to OFF (S3712), and the process proceeds to S3708. If it is determined in the process of S3710 that the pending flag 223o is not set to ON (S3710: No), the process of S3712 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3708.

Next, with reference to FIG. 989, the processing contents of the first-time jackpot-related processing (S3602) executed in the jackpot-related processing (see S3504 in FIG. 987) will be described. FIG. 989 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the first-time jackpot-related processing (S3602). In this first-time jackpot-related processing (S3602), a process for determining various production modes of the jackpot production in the first-time jackpot game (production mode of the subjugation production) is executed.

When the first jackpot related process (S3602) is executed, it is first determined whether an opening command has been received (S3801), and if it is determined that an opening command has been received (S3801: Yes), an opening command for display is set. Then (S3802), the subjugation effect mode determination process is executed (S3803), the process of S3812 is executed, and this process ends. In the processing of S3801, if it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S3801: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S3804), and if it is determined that the round number command has been received (S3804: Yes), extracts the number of rounds from the received command (S3805), sets the number-of-rounds command for display (S3806), executes the first-time jackpot round production process (S3807), and proceeds to S3812. .

In the process of S3804, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S3804: No), then it is determined whether an interval command has been received (S3808). Yes), effect processing during the first interval is executed (S3809), and the process proceeds to S3812. If it is determined in the process of S3808 that the interval command has not been received (S3808: No), it is determined whether the ending command has been received (S3810), and if it is determined that it has been received (S3810: Yes). , sets an ending command for display (S3811), shifts to the process of S3812, and when it is determined in the process of S3810 that the ending command has not been received (S3812: No), shifts to S3812.

Next, with reference to FIG. 990, the details of the subjugation effect mode determination process (S3803) will be described. FIG. 990 is a flow chart showing the details of the subjugation presentation mode determination process (S3803). In this subjugation performance mode determination process (S3803), a process for determining the performance mode of the subjugation performance to be executed during the initial jackpot game is executed.

When the subjugation effect mode determination process (S3803) is executed, first, based on the jackpot type set this time and the value of the first effect counter 223f1, the defeat number selection table 222b is referred to, and the total number of enemies is determined. It determines (S3901), and sets a value corresponding to the determined total number of enemies to the number-of-remains-defeated counter 223j (S3902). After that, it is determined whether the total number of enemies determined this time (the value set in the number of remaining subjugation counter 223j) is "777" (S3903). The number displayed flag 223k is set to ON (S3905), the special subjugation effect scenario is determined from the subjugation effect mode selection table 222c (S3906), the value of the subjugation number counter 223i is set to "5" (S3907), and this End the process.

On the other hand, in the process of S3903, if it is determined that the total number of enemies is not "777" ("1000" or "500") (S3903: No), the determined total number of enemies, the jackpot type, and the acquired Based on the value of the second effect counter 223f2, the subjugation effect mode selection table 222c is referred to determine the subjugation effect scenario (S3904), and the process proceeds to S3907.

The production scenario determined in the processing of S3904 and S3906 is temporarily stored in the storage area of the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and the subjugation production executed this time ends. It is configured to be readable until

Next, with reference to FIG. 991, the processing contents of the effect processing (S3807) during the first big winning round will be described. FIG. 991 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the effect processing during the first big hit round (S3807). In this first-time jackpot round production process (S3807), a process for determining the production mode of the attack production executed during the round game of the first-time jackpot game in which the subjugation production is executed is executed.

When the effect processing during the first big hit round (S3807) is executed, first, it is determined whether the round number command received this time is the command indicating the first round (S4001), and it is determined that it is the command indicating the first round. If so (S4001: Yes), set a display command to indicate the total number of enemies corresponding to the value of the number of remaining defeated counter 223j (S4002), and then check whether the specific number displayed flag 223k is set to ON. (S4003), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (S4003: No), the timing of occurrence of the hard attack effect specified by referring to the determined subjugation production scenario and the value of the subjugation number counter 223i Based on this, the display mode of the button icon is determined (S4005), a display command for indicating the determined display mode of the button icon is set (S4006), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4003, if it is determined that the specific number displayed flag 223k is set to ON (S4003: Yes), the button icon displayed in a special display mode based on the value of the subjugation number counter 223i is determined (S4004), a display command for indicating the display mode of the determined button icon is set (S4006), and this processing ends. That is, when the specific number displayed flag 223k is set to ON, since the player has already been informed that the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, using the display mode of the button icon A special display mode is determined for informing the player that the time saving state is set without suggesting the performance contents of the subjugation performance. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of contradiction in the performance modes of the plurality of performances for suggesting the game state set after the end of the big win game, and to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand. can do.

In the processing of S4001, if it is determined that the command does not indicate the first round (S4001: No), then it is determined whether or not a round number command indicating the second to sixth rounds has been received (S4007). If it is determined that the round number command indicating the sixth round has been received (S4007: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the subjugation number counter 223i is greater than 0 (S4008), and is not greater than 0 ( 0) (S4008: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S4008, if it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S4008: Yes), the value of the subjugation number counter 223i is subtracted by 1 (S4009), and the attack presentation is performed based on the content of the subjugation presentation scenario that has been determined. is determined (S4010), the operation effective time corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the SW effective time counter 223q (S4011), the display command corresponding to the determined effect mode is set (S4012), End this process.

Also, in the process of S4007, if it is determined that the round number command indicating the second to sixth rounds has not been received (S4007: No), the process corresponding to other commands (S4013) is executed, and this process is executed. finish.

Next, with reference to FIG. 992, the processing contents of the effect processing during the first interval (S3809) will be described. FIG. 992 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the effect processing during the first interval (S3809). In the first interval effect processing (S3809), during the jackpot game in which the subjugation effect is executed, when the interval period is set, the effect mode according to the effect result of the attack effect executed during the previous round game. is executed.

When the effect processing during the first interval (S3809) is executed, first, the value of the remaining subjugation number counter 223j is read out (S4101), and whether or not it matches the content of the subjugation effect scenario that has been set (same as the determined value). (S4102), and if it is determined that they are the same (S4102: Yes), the normal interval effect mode during the subjugation effect is determined (S4103), and a display command corresponding to each determined effect mode is set. (S4111), this processing ends. That is, when the interval effect mode is determined by the process of S4103, the additional attack effect is not executed.

If it is determined in the process of S4102 that they are not the same (S4102: No), then the additional decrease value is determined by referring to the additional decrease value selection table 222d (S4104), and the determined additional decrease value is specified. It is determined whether it is a decrease value (a specific number) (S4105), and if it is determined that it is not a specific decrease value (S4105: No), an interval effect mode (additional attack effect Mode) is determined (S4106), the value of the remaining defeat number counter 223j is updated to a value corresponding to the additional decrease value (S4107), and the process proceeds to S4111.

In addition, in the processing of S4105, if it is determined that it is a specific reduction value (S4105: Yes), the specific number displayed flag 223k is set to ON (S4108), and rewriting to a special subjugation effect scenario is determined (S4109 ), determines the effect mode corresponding to the special subjugation effect scenario (S4110), and shifts to the process of S4111. Next, the processing contents of the small hit related processing (S3508) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 993 is a flow chart showing the details of the small hit related process (S3508). This small winning related process (S3508) is a process executed during a small winning game like the small winning related process (see FIG. 540) executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth control example described above. , When the small hit start command for display is set at the timing when the small hit game is started (S4201: Yes) (S4202), and the right hitting flag 223r is not set to ON (S4203: No), the right The hitting flag 223r is set to ON (S4204), and processing (S4205) of setting a display command for guiding a right-handed game is executed. Also, at the end timing of the small hit game, if it is determined that the small hit caution flag (flag indicating that V is not won during the small hit game) is set to ON (S4207: Yes), the small (S4210) indicating that the jackpot game is not executed after the end of the winning game (indicating that the punctured) display small winning end command is set (S4210), or when it is determined that the small winning attention flag is not ON (S4207: No) , a small winning end command for display is set to indicate that the big winning game is started (S4208). Furthermore, when the V passing command is received during the small hitting game (S4211: Yes), it is determined whether the timing of receiving the V passing command is 4 seconds after the start of the small hitting (S4212), 4 seconds If it has passed (S4212: Yes), a display V effect command for informing the player of the V prize is set (S4214), and a process relating to a small hit caution flag is executed. Also, if the timing of receiving the V passing command is within 4 seconds from the start of the small hit, that is, if it is determined that the first guidance notification in the small hit game has not been completed (S4212: No ), the V winning flag 223s is set to ON without setting the display V effect command (S4213), and this processing is terminated. By configuring in this way, the execution timing of the V effect for informing the player of the V winning can be varied according to the timing of the V winning of the game ball during the small winning game.

Next, the contents of the variable display setting process (S3114) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 994 is a flow chart showing the contents of the variable display setting process (S3114). As shown in FIG. 994, the variable display setting process (S3114) executes the same process as the variable display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182) in the first control example described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. . Next, with reference to FIG. 995, the processing contents of the variable effect setting process (S4304) will be described. FIG. 995 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the variable effect setting process (S4304). This variable effect setting process (S4304) is a process executed in the variable display setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 994), and is for determining the effect mode of the variable effect of the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol variation. process is executed.

When the variable effect setting process (S4304) is executed, first, the current game state is read out from the sub-game state storage area 223g (S4401), and it is determined whether the current game state is the normal state (S4402). If it is determined to be in the state (S4402: Yes), it is determined whether the special symbol variation to be executed is the second special symbol variation (special figure 2 variation) (S4403), and it is determined that it is a special figure 2 variation. If so (S4403: Yes), based on the lottery result of the variation and the extracted variation pattern, the effect mode for the pullback mode (for the pullback effect) is determined (S4409), and this process ends.

In the process of S4403, when it is determined that it is not a special figure 2 variation (it is a first special symbol variation) (S4403: No), it is determined whether the effect fixed flag 223t is set to ON (S4404), ON (S4404: Yes) Based on the lottery result of the fluctuation and the extracted fluctuation pattern, the production mode of the fluctuation production is determined (S4405), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4404, if it is determined that the effect fixing flag 223t is not set to ON, that is, it is possible to change the stage transition (S4404: No), the effect stage data table 222e is referred to. Whether or not the transition condition is satisfied is specified (S4406), and then it is determined whether the stage transition condition is satisfied (S4407). If it is determined (S4408), the process proceeds to S4405, and if it is determined in the process of S4407 that the transition condition for stage transition is not satisfied (S4407: No), the process of S4408 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4405. do. Also, in the process of S4402, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not the normal state (it is a time saving state) (S4402: No), time saving production for determining the production mode of the variable production during the time saving state Setting processing (S4410) is executed, and this processing ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 996, the processing contents of the effect setting processing for time saving (S4410) will be described. FIG. 996 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the effect setting process for time saving (S4410). In this time saving effect setting process (S4410), the process for determining the effect mode of the variable effect during the time saving state, and the time saving final change among the variable effects corresponding to the special figure 2 fluctuation executed during the time saving state A process for setting a display mode for prompting acquisition of special figure 2 reservation is executed.

When the time saving production setting process (S4410) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure fluctuation of this time is the special figure 2 (special figure 2 fluctuation) (S4501), and it is determined that it is the special figure 2 fluctuation In the case (S4501: Yes), then it is determined whether it is a time saving final variation (S4502), and if it is determined that it is a time saving final variation (S4502: Yes), then the lottery result is out is determined (S4503).

In the process of S4503, if it is determined that the lottery result is out (S4503: Yes), that is, if the special symbol fluctuation of this time is the final special figure 2 deviation fluctuation in the time saving state, special figure 2 hold is set (S4504), the effect mode of the variation effect is determined based on the lottery result of the variation and the extracted variation pattern (S4505), and the process ends. Also, S4501: No, S4502: No, or S4503: If the processing of No is executed, the conditions for setting the display command for prompting acquisition of special figure 2 pending are not met, so the processing of S4505 as it is to

Next, with reference to FIG. 997, the processing contents of the rendering update processing (S3112) will be described. FIG. 997 is a flow chart showing the contents of the rendering update process (S3112). This production update process (S3112) is a process that is executed periodically (2 milliseconds). Then, a process for determining the mode of presentation is executed.

When the performance update process (S3112) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the small hit game is currently in progress (S4601), and when it is determined that the small hit game is in progress (S4601: Yes), the small hit game Medium update processing is executed (S4602), and the process proceeds to S4603. On the other hand, in the process of S4602, if it is determined that the small winning game is not in progress (S4601: No), next, the value of the rush period measuring counter 223m is greater than 1, that is, the current rush state. (S4603), and if it is greater than 1 (S4603: Yes), the value of the rush period measuring counter 223m is updated (S4604) to correspond to the updated value of the rush period measuring counter 223m. A display command for indicating the rush period to be displayed is set (S4605), and the process proceeds to S4606.

In the process of S4606, it is determined whether the value of the SW valid time counter 223q is greater than 1, that is, whether the operation valid period (SW valid time) is currently in progress (S4606). (S4606: Yes), update the value of the SW valid time counter 223q (S4607), set a display command for indicating the period corresponding to the updated value of the SW valid time counter 223q (S4608), S4609 to process.

In the processing of S4606, if it is determined that the value of the SW effective time counter 223q is not greater than 1 (S4606: No), or if the processing of S4608 is completed, other effect update processing is executed (S4609), End this process. Here, in the processing of S4609, processing for updating the values of various counters (not shown in FIG. 997) is executed, and an effect mode is determined according to the update result.

Next, with reference to FIG. 998, the processing contents of the update processing during small winning game (S4602) executed in the effect update processing (see S3112 in FIG. 997) will be described. FIG. 998 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the update processing during small winning game (S4602). In this update process during the small winning game (S4602), a process for setting the display of the display mode displayed based on the passage of time during the small winning game is executed.

When the update process during the small hit game (S4602) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the present is the timing when 4 seconds have passed since the start of the small hit game (S4701). That is, in the processing of S4701, it is determined whether or not the notification period of the initial game guidance notification executed during the small winning game has ended. In the process of S4701, if it is determined that the timing has passed 4 seconds (S4701: Yes), then it is determined whether the V winning flag 223s is set to ON (S4702), and if it is set to ON. If it is determined that the player has won the game (S4702: Yes), the V effect command for display is set (S4703), the V winning flag 223s is set to OFF (S4704), and the process ends.

That is, in the process of S4703, the game ball entered the specific area (V gate) during the notification period of the initial game guide notification, and in a state where the player is waiting for the execution of the V effect, A process for executing the V effect is executed based on the fulfillment of the condition for executing the V effect. By configuring in this manner, the V effect can be executed immediately after the notification period of the initial game guidance notification has passed.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4701, if it is determined that it is not the timing when 4 seconds have passed (S4701: No), then it is determined whether the small hit caution flag is set to ON (S4705) and set to ON If it is determined that it is not (S4705: No), then 5 seconds have passed since the start of the winning game (whether 5 seconds have passed since the round game in the small winning game started) is determined (S4706 ), if it is determined that 5 seconds have elapsed (S4706: Yes), it is determined whether V has passed (whether the game ball has already entered the specific area) (S4707), and V has passed If it is determined that it is not (S4707: No), set the small hit caution flag to ON (S4708), set the display caution command for prompting V winning (S4709), and end this process do.

Also, if it is determined that the small hit caution flag is set to ON in the process of S4705 (S4705: Yes), in the process of S4706, if it is determined that 5 seconds have not elapsed (S4706: No), S4707 In the processing of , when it is determined that there is V passage (the game ball has already entered the specific area) (S4707: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 999, frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S3107) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 999 is a flow chart showing this frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S3107). This frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S3107) is executed in the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and the third symbol display device 81 is operated by the player to enhance the effect. A process for generating and setting a display command based on the operation of the frame button 22 or the selection button 600 is executed in order to execute an effect corresponding to the .

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S3107) is executed, first, the volume adjustment button (up button 600b or down button 600d) or the light amount adjustment button (right button 600c or left button 600e) is pressed. It is determined whether or not there is an operation (S4801). If it is determined that there has been an operation (S4801: Yes), it is determined whether the current state is standby (demonstration screen is being displayed) (S4802). ), the environment information corresponding to the game environment storage area 223u is updated in correspondence with the contents of the button operation (S4803), the aspect corresponding to the updated environment information is determined (S4804), and the determined aspect is corresponded. A display command to be displayed is set (S4816), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4802 that it is not in the standby state (S4802: No), then it is determined whether it is in the mode selection state (S4805), and if it is determined that it is in the mode selection state (S4805) : Yes), the display position of the selection cursor is determined in accordance with the button operation content (S4806), and the process proceeds to S4816. By the process of S4806, the position of the arrow ya1 is switched on the effect mode selection screen which is the mode selection state described above with reference to FIG. 947(b). In the process of S4805, if it is determined that the mode is not selected (S4805: No), the process proceeds directly to S4816.

If it is determined in the process of S4801 that the volume adjustment button (up button 600b or down button 600d) or light amount adjustment button (right button 600c or left button 600e) has not been operated (S4801: No), then it is determined whether or not the decision button 600a has been operated (S4807), and if it is determined that there has been an operation (S4807: Yes), it is determined whether the current state is standby (demonstration screen is being displayed). Then (S4808), if it is determined that it is in the standby state (S4808: Yes), display of the mode selection state is determined (S4809), and the process proceeds to S4816.

On the other hand, in the process of S4808, if it is determined that it is not in the standby state (S4808: No), then it is determined whether it is in the mode selection state (S4810), and if it is determined that it is in the mode selection state (S4810) : Yes), the effect mode being selected is stored in the game environment storage area 223u (S4811), then it is determined whether the selected effect mode is the fixed mode (S4812), and if it is determined to be the fixed mode (S4812: Yes), the fixed mode setting process is executed (S4813), and the process proceeds to S4816.

In the process of S4812, when it is determined that the fixed mode is not set (S4812: No), the fixed effect flag 223t is set to OFF (S4814), and the process proceeds to S4816. Also, in the process of S4807, if it is determined that the decision button 600a is not operated (S4807: No), then the effect button operation process is executed (S4815), and then the process proceeds to S4816.

Here, the processing contents of the fixed mode setting processing (S4813) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1000 is a flow chart showing the contents of the fixed mode setting process (S4813). This fixed mode setting process (S4813) is performed when the fixed mode is selected. In the thirty-second control example, the fixed mode is configured to be arbitrarily selectable by the player, and when this fixed mode is set, the stage change effect is not executed. However, there is a case where an effect mode including a stage change effect is set as the effect mode of the look-ahead effect for suggesting the result of the special symbol lottery to be executed later. In this case, when the fixed mode is selected while the look-ahead effect of the effect mode including the stage change effect is being executed, the stage change effect is executed even though the fixed mode is set. There was a problem.

In addition, when the special 1 suspension is obtained in a state where another production mode is selected in which the stage change production is executed when the number of special symbol fluctuations reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times), In some cases, a look-ahead effect accompanied by a stage change effect may be set for the special figure 1 suspension in which the special symbol lottery is executed after the stage change effect is executed, and even in this case, the effect including the stage change effect When the fixed mode is selected while the look-ahead effect of the mode is being executed, there is a problem that the stage change effect is executed in spite of the fixed mode being set.

On the other hand, in the 32nd control example, when the fixed mode is selected while the stage change effect is waiting, the presence or absence of the stage change effect and the effect mode of the stage change effect can be variably set. It consists of

Specifically, when the fixed mode setting process (S4813) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the stage is waiting for change (S4901), and if it is determined that the stage is not waiting for change (S4901: No) Since it is not in a state where it has been decided that the stage change effect is to be executed, the effect fixed flag 223t is set to ON (S4902), and this processing ends.

In the processing of S4901, if it is determined that the stage is waiting for change (S4901: Yes), then it is determined whether it is during the look-ahead effect (waiting for the stage change based on the look-ahead effect) (S4903), and the look-ahead effect If it is determined that it is in the middle (S4903: Yes), the special symbol lottery result of the next change (result of the special symbol lottery to be read ahead) is pre-determined (S4904), suggesting that the stage change effect will be executed. 948(a)) is executed (S4905), and next, it is determined whether or not a win is made (S4906), and when it is determined that a win is made (S4906: Yes), the stage change mode is determined as it is (S4909), the process of S4902 is executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4903, if it is determined that the present is not in the pre-reading effect, that is, it is in the standby state of the stage change effect that is executed based on the number of special symbol changes (S4903: No), the stage change effect The effect information is cleared (S4907), the effect mode in which the stage change is not executed is determined instead (S4908), and the process proceeds to S4902. By constructing in this way, after the fixed mode is set, the stage change performance executed as the lively performance is executed instead of the look-ahead performance for suggesting the result of the special symbol lottery in advance. can be suppressed, it is possible to easily provide an effect desired by the player.

Also, in the processing of S4906, if it is determined that the win has not been made, that is, in a state where the stage change effect is determined as the pre-reading effect based on the pre-determination result (pre-reading result), and the pre-reading effect is targeted. If the result of the special symbol lottery (preliminary determination result) is out (S4906: No), the processing of S4907 and S4908 described above is executed, then the processing of S4902 is executed, and this processing ends .

In other words, even if the stage change effect is determined as the look-ahead effect, if the result of the look-ahead effect (lottery result of the target special symbol lottery) is out, the stage change effect is executed. It is configured to determine a new performance mode so as not to By configuring in this manner, it is possible to prevent a player who has arbitrarily selected the fixed mode from being less motivated to play due to the execution of the stage change effect.

As described above, in the thirty-second control example, when the player selects the fixed mode, the stage change effect is determined as the effect mode of the effect (prefetch effect) to be executed later. Also, it is configured to be able to additionally execute processing for determining a performance mode so that the stage change performance is not executed except when the performance result of the look-ahead performance for which the stage change performance is executed is the performance result indicating the winning of the jackpot. are doing.

By configuring in this way, when the stage change effect is executed after the player arbitrarily selects the fixed mode, that is, when the effect contradicting the mode type selected by the player is executed Since the privilege can be given to the player, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the desire to play due to the execution of an undesired performance.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1001, the processing contents of the production button operation processing (S4815) will be described. FIG. 1001 is a flow chart showing the contents of the effect button operation process (S4815). In this effect button operation process (S4815), the game contents at the time when the effect button 22a is pressed are determined, and the process for determining the effect mode according to the game contents being executed is executed.

When the effect button operation process (S4815) is executed, first, it is determined whether the present is during the effective period of the effect SW, that is, whether the pressing operation to the effect button 22a can be effectively determined (S5001), If it is determined that it is the effect SW effective period (S5001: Yes), then it is determined whether the pull-back effect is currently being performed (S5002), and if it is determined that the pull-back effect is being performed (S5002: Yes) , determines an effect mode for indicating the effect result determined as the effect result of the pullback effect (S5003), and shifts to the processing of S5008.

On the other hand, in the process of S5002, if it is determined that it is not in the pullback effect (S5002: No), then it is determined whether it is in the subjugation effect (S5004), and if it is determined that it is in the subjugation effect ( S5004: Yes), with the determined value as the upper limit, the number of enemy reductions this time is determined by lottery (S5005), the presentation mode corresponding to the determined number of enemy reductions is determined (S5006), and the determined number of enemy reductions is determined. Then, the value of the counter for the number of remaining defeats is updated (S5007), and the process proceeds to S5008.

If it is determined in the process of S5001 that the effective SW for effect is not valid (S5001: No), or if it is determined in the process of S5004 that the subjugation effect is not in progress (S5004: No), the process of S5008 is performed. Move to In the process of S5008, various effects modes to be executed when the effect button 22a is pressed are determined, and this process ends.

By executing the processes of S5005 to S5007, the number of enemies to be reduced when the effect button 22a is pressed during the attack effect is determined. Here, the number of enemy reductions determined in the processing of S5005 is configured so that prohibition processing is executed, and the number of remaining enemies corresponds to a specific number during the attack production that is executed during the normal jackpot game. Constraint processing is performed so that the number of enemy reductions that would result in a value that would be By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the display of a specific number as the effect result of the attack effect executed during the normal jackpot game.

<Thirty-third control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1002 to 103. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-third control example is different from the thirty-second control example in that the timing at which the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state is established is different. The pachinko machine 10 in the above-described 32nd control example, when a small hit is won in the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state, is time saving at the timing when the special symbol (small winning symbol) indicating the small winning is stopped and displayed. It was configured so that the termination condition was met and the normal state was set. In other words, it is configured to be in a normal state during the execution period of the small winning game.

By configuring in this way, the game balls that have not won the second variable winning device 650 out of the game balls shot by the right-handed game that is executed during the small winning game are transferred to the second ball entrance 640. It is possible to suppress the entry of balls into the ball and suppress the excessive provision of prize balls to the player during the small winning game.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 in the 33rd control example is different from the 32nd control example described above in that the establishment timing of the time saving end condition based on the winning of the small prize is different. Specifically, the difference is that the time-saving end condition is established at the timing when the small winning game ends, not at the timing when the special symbol (small winning symbol) indicating the winning of the small winning is stopped and displayed. ing. By configuring in this way, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 even during the small winning game, so the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 reservation) It is possible to make it easy to execute a jackpot game in the state of winning.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described thirty-second control example ends the time saving state at the timing when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed. In the case of winning, the time saving state is set only for the variation time (1 second) of the second special symbol lottery that wins the small winning, and it is difficult to acquire a new special figure 2 hold during that time saving state. There was a problem that such an event would occur. In addition, during the jackpot game, a reservation continuous effect, that is, an effect for showing that winning information indicating winning (small winning, jackpot winning) is included in the acquired special figure 2 reservation is executed. In this case, the player can grasp that the next winning game (small winning game, big winning game) will be executed without executing the right-handed game for acquiring a new special figure 2 reservation, There is a possibility that the player interrupts the right-handed game during the period from execution of the holding continuous effect to the start of the next winning game.

In this way, when the right-handed game is interrupted, at the time when the jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery informed in advance that the winning will be won by the one-time reservation continuous effect. Since the special figure 2 suspension has not been obtained, there is a problem that the condition for continuously executing a plurality of suspension consecutive effects is difficult to be established. Furthermore, as in the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described 32nd control example, in a state where the holding continuous effect has been executed once, the condition for executing the holding continuous effect is satisfied ( By structuring so that the holding consecutive performance can be easily executed when the special figure 2 holding that wins the winning is acquired), the holding consecutive production can be biased (continuously) and the performance effect is enhanced. In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, a game in which the execution condition of the holding continuous effect is difficult to be satisfied There is a problem in that the execution of the "pull out game" reduces the chances of successive holding consecutive effects being executed, making it impossible to enhance the effect of the performance.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 33rd control example, since the time saving state can be continued until the small winning game ends, the right-handed game executed during the small winning game is fired. It is possible to make it easier for the game balls that have not won the second variable winning device 650 to enter the second ball entrance 640 out of the game balls that have entered. Therefore, as in the 32nd control example described above, when the time saving state is established at the timing when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed (when the time saving end condition is established before the small winning game is executed), The period in which the time saving state continues can be lengthened, and the jackpot game can be easily executed in the state that the special figure 2 reservation is acquired.

Also, unlike the pachinko machine 10 in the 32nd control example described above, during the small winning game period, that is, the period during which the right-handed game for passing the game ball to the specific area (V gate) 650e3 is executed is shortened. state, even if the holding continuous effect is executed, the player can reliably play the right-handed game (play the game ball in a specific area (V gate ) 650e3 (Right-handed game for passing (V winning)) can be performed, so it is possible to make it easier to acquire special figure 2 reservation.

That is, in this 33rd control example, during the period of the right-handed game for acquiring the first privilege (V prize), it is configured so that the second privilege (special figure 2 hold) can also be acquired. This control example differs from the above-described 32nd control example in that By configuring in this way, even if the player does not execute the right-handed game only for the purpose of acquiring the second privilege (special figure 2 reservation), the first privilege is acquired. Since the second privilege can be acquired during the right-handed game aiming to play, the player can play the game efficiently.

It should be noted that, as in the 33rd control example, in the case where multiple benefits can be acquired in duplicate, the period during which only one benefit can be acquired may be set short. The right-handed game for obtaining the privilege (V prize) is the right-handed game during the small winning game, and the right-handed game for obtaining the second privilege (special figure 2 reservation) is the right hand in the time saving state. In the case of a hitting game, if it is configured so that part of the game balls fired by the right-handed game during the small winning game can easily enter the second ball entrance 640, the small A short-time (0.5 second) variation time may be determined as the variation time of the special symbol variation for winning.

In other words, as the fluctuation time of the special symbol variation that won the small hit during the time saving state (the period during which the right-handed game is executed to acquire the second privilege (special figure 2 reservation)), the game ball is the second ball Even if a short period is set in which it is difficult to enter the ball into the mouth 640, a small winning game period (first Since the period during which a right-handed game is executed to obtain a privilege (V prize) is also a period during which the game ball can be easily entered into the second ball entrance 640, the game ball is placed in the second It is possible to make it easier to enter the ball into the ball entrance 640 .

In this case, it corresponds to the special symbol variation that is performed as the variation time of the special symbol variation that is performed during the time saving state (right-handed game period for acquiring the second privilege (special figure 2 reservation)) Regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery, a uniform short variation time (for example, 0.1 second) is set, and the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 according to the result of the special symbol lottery. You may vary the ease of hitting the ball. That is, when the special symbol variation corresponding to the lost winning is executed, the period during which the time saving state continues for the execution period of the small winning game is longer than when the special symbol variation corresponding to the small winning winning is executed. By configuring to be short, the time until the next special symbol variation is started is longer in the case where the special symbol variation in which the winning is lost is performed than in the case where the special symbol variation in which the small win is won is performed. It may be configured to make it difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the ease with which a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 during the time saving state according to the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the result of the special symbol lottery not only in terms of whether or not the winning game is executed, but also in terms of whether or not the special figure 2 reservation can be obtained. can.

In addition, a special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol variation that is performed as the variation time of the special symbol variation that is performed during the time saving state (right-handed game period for acquiring the second privilege (special figure 2 reservation)) In this case, it corresponds to a small winning winning state in which the time saving state continues even during the small winning game period (period A (for example, 3 seconds)). For the special symbol variation, the variation time is B period (0.5 seconds), and for the special symbol variation corresponding to the lost winning, the variation time is 3.5 seconds C period (A (3 seconds) + B (0 .5 seconds)) can be set.

By configuring in this way, regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery, the length of the time saving state that can be continued based on one special symbol lottery can be unified, so regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery, You can get a special figure 2 hold.

In addition, in the above-described example, as elements included in the period in which the time saving state continues, the period during which the special symbol variation is executed and the period during which the small winning game is executed, but in detail , The period during which the special symbol fluctuation is stopped and displayed (symbol fixed period) is also included. Therefore, the above-described technical concept may be applied by varying the length of the design fixing period instead of the variation time of the special symbol variation according to the result of the special symbol lottery.

<Regarding the effect content in the 33rd control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 1002, among the various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-third control example, the contents of the characteristic effects different from those in the thirty-second control example described above will be described. This 33rd control example is different from the 32nd control example described above in that the time saving state continues even during the small winning game, and the content of the display screen displayed during the small winning game (during the small winning game The content of the performance to be executed) is also made different correspondingly.

FIG. 1002(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the small winning game to be the object of the holding consecutive effect, and FIG. 1002(b) is the display shown in FIG. 1002(a). It is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when special figure 2 pending is acquired in a state where the screen is displayed.

The display screen of FIG. 1002(a) is during the small winning game notified by the holding consecutive effect with respect to the display screen during the small winning game (see FIG. 939(a)) in the 32nd control example described above. The difference is that a display mode is displayed to indicate that a game ball is to be entered into the second ball entrance 640, and that a game guide notification is displayed to guide the player to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640. there is Other display contents are the same, and the same display contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 1002(a), when the holding continuous effect is executed during the previous jackpot game, after the jackpot game ends, the main display is continued until the next jackpot game is executed. On the upper side of the area Dm, characters of "holding consecutive effect high probability" are displayed as an effect state display mode for indicating that the holding consecutive effect is executed with a high probability.

That is, in the 33rd control example, similarly to the 32nd control example described above, a state in which the holding continuous effect is being executed during the previous jackpot game, and the final round of the jackpot game to be executed next starts. If there is winning information indicating that the special figure 2 reservation that has already been acquired has been won (if the conditions for executing the holding consecutive production are satisfied), the holding consecutive production will be executed without fail. It is configured as follows. Therefore, by displaying the characters ``high probability of holding continuous effect'' on the display screen, the player is motivated to move the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 to continuously execute the holding continuous effect. It is possible to play a game (acquire a special figure 2 hold) to enter the ball.

Then, in order to guide the player that the time saving state continues even during the small winning game period being executed and that it is easy to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640, game guidance notification is provided. , in addition to the first arrow 810 that guides the game aiming at the V prize, the second arrow 810a that guides the game aiming at entering the second ball entrance 640 (acquisition of the special figure 2 reservation) is displayed. . In addition, FIG. 1002(a) displays the display screen during the small hit game when the special figure 2 reservation is not acquired when the small hit game is started.

By configuring in this way, a game aiming at the V prize indicated by the first arrow 810 and a game aiming at acquiring the special figure 2 reservation indicated by the second arrow 810a by the right hitting game executed during the small winning game , can be easily understood by the player.

As shown in FIG. 1002(a), when a plurality of game guide notifications are displayed at the same time, the display mode is set according to the game content notified by each game guide notification. Specifically, the V winning, which is the execution opportunity for executing the jackpot game, has a higher priority as the game content than the acquisition of the special figure 2 hold that is required to continue the holding continuous effect. The first arrow 810 is displayed larger than the second arrow 810a because it is higher (because the loss is greater if it cannot be obtained). With this configuration, even when a plurality of game guidance notifications for guiding different game contents are executed, the game can be executed based on the game guidance notification displayed in the largest size. It is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game for a person.

In the thirty-third control example, the first arrow 810 is always displayed larger than the second arrow 810a. Depending on the situation, the notification mode (display mode) of each game guide notification may be configured to be variable. For example, the first arrow 810 is displayed larger than the second arrow 810a between the execution of the small winning game and the V winning of the game ball, and the small winning game is executed after the V winning of the game ball. If it is a period until, and the special figure 2 reservation is not acquired, the second arrow 810a may be displayed larger than the first arrow 810. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand by the notification mode (display mode) of each game guide notification displayed on the display screen.

In addition, in the 33rd control example, when a small winning game is executed, the display mode (each arrow) of each game guide notification described above is displayed, but the display timing is limited to this. It is sufficient that a player who has grasped the contents notified by each game guidance notification can execute the game notified by each game guidance notification, for example, before the small winning game is started. Each display mode may be displayed. Also, each display mode may be displayed when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the small winning game was executed.

Furthermore, in the thirty-third control example, the first arrow 810 and the second arrow 810a are configured to be displayed at the same time, but the display timing of each arrow is not limited to this, and the small winning game can be Immediately after the start, only the first arrow 810 may be displayed, and after a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, the second arrow 810a may be displayed. By configuring in this way, immediately after the small winning game is started, only the first arrow 810 can be displayed, so that the player can see the main game to be executed during the small winning game ( A game aimed at winning a V prize) can be easily understood.

In addition, it may be configured to display the second arrow 810a before the first arrow 810, in this case, the second arrow 810a based on the fact that the time saving state is set, that is, the special figure 2 pending It is only necessary to execute the game guidance notification for guiding the game aiming at winning, and to continue to display the second arrow 810a even after the small winning game is executed.

In the state shown in FIG. 1002(a), when the special figure 2 reservation is obtained before the game ball wins V, the display screen shown in FIG. 1002(b) is displayed. FIG. 1002(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed when the special figure 2 reservation is acquired in a small winning game and in a state where V is not won.

As shown in FIG. 1002 (b), when the special figure 2 reservation is acquired, since it is not possible to acquire the special figure 2 reservation any more, the game guidance notification for aiming to acquire the special figure 2 reservation The second arrow 810a is hidden, the area around the second ball entrance 640 disappears from the image displayed in the display area Dm10, and the area around the second variable winning device 650 is enlarged and displayed. Then, based on the acquisition of the special figure 2 hold, the display mode of the remaining period display ga2a for indicating the remaining period of the small hit game among the small hit time gauges ga2 is different from the normal display mode (in the figure, light-emitting display), and in the sub-display area Ds, while continuing the display of "Right hit and let the V attacker win!"

By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the game aiming to acquire the special figure 2 reservation has been completed among the games executed during the small winning game. In addition, in FIG. 1002(b), before the game ball is V winning, the display screen when the special figure 2 reservation is acquired is shown. When the game ball is V-won, different display screens are displayed depending on the timing.

Specifically, before acquiring the special figure 2 reservation, the game ball was made to win V during the period during which the first game guidance notification was performed (4 seconds after the small winning game was started) 1002(a), that is, the display screen on which the first arrow 810 and the second arrow 810a are displayed, is displayed until the first game guidance notification is completed. After completion of the game guidance notification, a V effect screen indicating that the V prize has been won is displayed, and a display screen continuously displaying the second arrow 810a is displayed. In addition, when the game ball wins the V prize after the first game guidance notification is completed (while the second and subsequent game guidance notifications are executed), the V performance screen is displayed immediately after the V winning. At the same time, a display screen continuously displaying the second arrow 810a is displayed.

On the other hand, if the special figure 2 hold is obtained during the period in which the first game guidance notification is executed (4 seconds after the start of the small winning game), wait for the end timing of the first game guidance notification. Without doing so, the second arrow 810a is hidden, and the display screen shown in FIG. 1002(b) is displayed. In other words, among the plurality of game guidance notifications that can be displayed during the small winning game, the first game guidance notification for guiding the game aiming for V winning is a certain period of notification period regardless of whether there is a V winning. The second game guide notification for guiding the game aiming at acquisition of the special figure 2 reservation by constructing it so as to be secured ends at the time when the special figure 2 reservation is acquired regardless of the length of the notified period. It is configured as follows. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to grasp the contents of the main game to be executed during the small winning game in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, if the special figure 2 reservation has been acquired at the time when the small hitting game is started, the display screen displayed in FIG. 1002 (b) immediately after the small hitting game is started, That is, the display mode (second arrow 810a) of the game guide notification for aiming to acquire the special figure 2 reservation is hidden, and the display mode for indicating that the special figure 2 reservation has already been acquired is displayed. It is configured as follows. By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player of the game contents to be executed during the small winning game in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, when the special figure 2 reservation has been acquired at the time the small winning game is started, a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the small winning game is started, specifically, the game ball is V winning The second arrow 810a is displayed in the period until the round game is executed, and the display screen displayed in FIG. The display mode (second arrow 810a) of the game guide notification for aiming at acquisition may be hidden, and the display mode for indicating that the special figure 2 reservation has already been acquired may be displayed. . In this way, by configuring the effect for indicating that the special figure 2 suspension has been obtained in a pseudo-executable manner, compared to the case where the second arrow 810a is hidden from the beginning, the special figure 2 suspension It is possible to inform the player of the acquisition in an easy-to-understand manner.

<Regarding control processing of main controller 110 in the thirty-third control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1003 to 1005, among the control processes executed by the main controller 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-third control example, the main control in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-second control example described above Contents different from the control processing executed by the device 110 will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in the 33rd control example is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the 32nd control example described above in that the establishment timing of the time-saving end condition that is established when a small hit is won is different. The contents of the control processing for updating various information regarding the establishment of the time saving end condition for ending the state are varied.

Specifically, for the 32nd control example described above, the time saving update process 2 (see S274 in FIG. 1003) instead of the time saving update process (see S224 in FIG. 968), the small hit control process (S1805 in FIG. 980 The difference is that small hit control processing 2 (see S1855 in FIG. 1004) is executed instead of (see). Other control processing contents are the same, and detailed descriptions of the same processing contents are omitted.

Figure 1003 is part of the special symbol time variation process (see S104 in Figure 964) executed within the timer interrupt process (see Figure 963) that is executed every 2 milliseconds in the main controller 110 Time saving update FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of process 2 (S274); FIG. As shown in FIG. 1003, the time saving update process 2 (S274) is, for the time saving update process (see S224 in FIG. 968) of the 32nd control example described above, the small hit time saving update process ( S615 in FIG. 968) is deleted, and the rest is the same.

That is, in the above-described 32nd control example, the time-saving end condition established based on the winning of the small hit is established when the special symbol (small winning symbol) for indicating the winning of the small win is stopped and displayed. It was configured so that the small winning time saving update process was executed. On the other hand, in the 33rd control example, the time saving end condition is not satisfied at the timing when the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed, and the time saving end condition is satisfied at the timing when the small winning game is finished. there is Therefore, in the time-saving update process 2 (S274) executed at the timing when the special symbols are stopped and displayed, the time-saving update process (small-hit time-saving update process) based on the small win winning is not executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the establishment of the time saving end condition based on the stop display of the small winning symbol.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 1003, the time saving update process 2 (S274) is only different from the time saving update process (S224) in that the time saving update process based on the small hit winning is not executed, and other time saving ends The processing timing regarding the establishment of the conditions is the same. Therefore, for example, if the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the number of executions of the special symbol lottery (variation), that is, if the small hit is won in the final variation in the time saving state, the stop display timing of the special symbol variation (time saving update At the timing when processing 2 is executed), the time saving update process based on the small hit winning is not executed, but since the time saving update process based on the special symbol lottery (variation) is executed, it is time saving at the stop display timing of the special symbol variation. state will end. Therefore, the normal state is set during the small winning game executed based on the winning of the small winning in the final variation in the time saving state.

In addition, in the present 33rd control example, as in the 32nd control example described above, the second special symbol variation that is the final variation of the time saving state is longer than the other second special symbol variation during the time saving state It is configured so that the variation time (20 seconds to 30 seconds) can be easily set, and when a small hit is won in the second special symbol variation, which is the final variation in the time saving state, the special symbol variation is executed. Since it is possible to sufficiently secure a period during which the game ball can be entered into the second ball entrance 640 during the period, even if a small winning game in which the normal state is set at the start is executed Even if there is, it is possible to prevent the player from playing an excessively disadvantageous game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1004, the contents of the small winning control process 2 (S1855) will be described. FIG. 1004 is a flow chart showing the detailed contents of the small hit control process 2 (S1855). This small hit control process 2 (S1855) is, for the small hit control process (S1805 in FIG. 980) described above, to update the information on the elements for establishing the time-saving end condition at the end timing of the small hit game The difference is that the processing of is added, and the rest is the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

When the small hit control process 2 (S1855) is executed, first, the same S2001 to S2018 processes as the small hit control process described above (see S1805 in FIG. 980) are executed. And, when the processing of S2018 is finished, the small winning time saving update processing 2 is executed (S2051), and this processing is finished. In the small hit time saving update process 2 (S2051), when the process for subtracting the value of the small hit counter 203s is executed at the end timing of the small hit game, and the value of the small hit counter 203s after the subtraction becomes 0 Then, a process for ending the time saving state and setting the normal state is executed.

Here, with reference to Drawing 1005, processing contents of small hit time saving update processing 2 (S2051) are explained. Figure 1005 is the flowchart which shows the processing contents of small hitting time saving renewal processing 2 (S2051). In this small winning time saving update process 2 (S2051), a process for establishing a time saving end condition based on the fact that the small winning game has ended is executed. In addition, in the 32nd control example described above, the small winning time saving update process (see S615 in FIG. 969) for establishing the time saving end condition based on the small winning winning is performed as a special symbol (small winning symbol ) is executed at the timing when is stopped and displayed, in this 33rd control example, at the timing when the small winning game is finished, the processing for establishing the time saving termination condition based on the winning of the small winning is executed. However, among the processing contents to be executed, the same processing contents are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the small hit time saving update process 2 (S2051) is executed, first, 1 is subtracted from the value of the small hit counter 203s (S702), and it is determined whether the value of the small hit counter 203s after the subtraction is 0 (S703 ). In the process of S703, when it is determined that the value of the small hit counter 203s is 0 (S703: Yes), the game state is set to the normal state (S704), the value of the time reduction counter 203h and the special figure 2 counter 203t is set to 0 (S705), a state command indicating the normal state is set (S706), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the small hit counter 203s is not 0 in the process of S703 (S703: No), the various processes of S704 to S706 for ending the time saving state are skipped and the process ends.

As described above, in the 33rd control example, the time-saving end condition established based on the winning of the small winning can be established at the timing when the small winning game ends. By configuring in this way, when the small winning is won during the time saving state, the small winning game can be executed in the time saving state, so the time from setting the time saving state to executing the small winning game Even if the period is short and the new special figure 2 reservation cannot be obtained, the new special figure 2 reservation can be obtained during the small winning game. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the performance effect of the pachinko machine 10 is lowered because the jackpot game is easily started in a state in which the special figure 2 suspension is not obtained, making it difficult to execute the suspension continuous performance. can.

In addition, in this 33rd control example, as in the 32nd control example described above, it is configured so that the time saving end condition is established based on the fact that the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state has won a small hit once. Therefore, the time saving state will end after the first small winning game is completed in the time saving state, but it is not limited to this, and the time saving end condition is established based on two or more small winnings. Alternatively, it may be configured so that the time-saving end condition is satisfied based on the fact that a specific number of times a small win for which a specific small win type is set is won. Furthermore, it may be possible to set a time-saving end condition that associates the number of special symbol fluctuations executed during the time-saving state with the result of the special symbol lottery. If the result of the second special symbol lottery is a specific lottery result (for example, a small win), the time-saving end condition is established based on the small win, and the result of the third special symbol lottery is a specific lottery. In the case of a result (for example, loss), it may be configured so that the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the loss winning. Moreover, when the special symbol lottery that results in a specific lottery result (for example, loss) continues for a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times), the time saving end condition may be established.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp at what timing the time saving end condition is satisfied. Therefore, since the player can be made to pay more attention to whether or not the time saving state continues than the pachinko machine 10 in which the number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed until the time saving end condition is satisfied is fixed, the time saving state is achieved. It is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and the player getting bored with the game.

In addition, in this 33rd control example, by configuring so as to end the time saving state at the timing when the small winning game ends, the second ball entrance 640 using the small winning game period in which the right hitting game is executed Although it is configured to make it easier for the game ball to enter the ball, it may be configured to be able to set a different timing as the timing to end the time saving state in order to achieve the same purpose. It may be configured to establish the time saving end condition at the timing when the round game is started. Even in this case, compared to the case where the time saving end condition is satisfied at the timing when the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed, the time saving state can be set during the opening period of the small winning game, so the second ball entrance It is possible to make it easier to enter a game ball into 640. - 特許庁In particular, during the opening period of the small winning game, the second variable winning device 650 is not operated to the winning state even though the game guidance notification for aiming at the V winning is being executed. Therefore, the game ball fired by the right-handed game does not enter the second variable winning device 650, and reaches the electric accessory 640a provided downstream of the second variable winning device 650. As a result, the game ball can be efficiently reached to the second ball entrance 640, and the game ball shot by the right-handed game executed prior to the start of the round game can be effectively utilized. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful of the timing at which the game guide announcement for aiming for the V prize is executed.

In addition, the player is motivated to execute a right-handed game to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 before the round game is started and to acquire the special figure 2 reservation. As a result, since it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to win V immediately after the round game is started, the game ball cannot win V during the round game, and the player's motivation to play remarkably decreases. It is possible to prevent this from being put away and to facilitate increasing the number of jackpot games executed per unit time.

In the 33rd control example, when the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state is a small winning, the small winning game in which the time saving state continues and the small winning game in which the time saving state does not continue are reduced. Although it is configured to be able to be determined according to the number of special symbol fluctuations in the special symbol lottery that wins the winning prize, it is not limited to this, and for example, the timing at which the time saving end condition is satisfied can be changed according to the type of small winning to be set. For example, when the time saving end condition is established based on the small winning winning in which the first small winning type is set, the time saving state is terminated after the small winning game ends, and the first small winning type is different. When the time-saving end condition is established based on the small-hit winning in which the second small-hit type is set, the time-saving state is terminated at the stop display timing of the small-hit pattern (or the start timing of the small-hit game) can be configured to

By constructing in this way, when the small win game that ends the time saving state is executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict whether or not the time saving state will continue even during the small win game. Therefore, in order to acquire the special figure 2 reservation during the opening period of the small winning game, the game ball fired by the right-handed game continuously from the timing when the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed is the second variable winning device 650 or A situation can be created in which it is difficult to enter the second ball entrance 640 .

Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of selecting whether or not to continue the right-handed game when a small hit is won during the time-saving state. In this case, the opening operation of the second variable winning device 650 is set so as to make it difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the round game of the small winning game, It is preferable that the opening period of the winning game is the period in which the game ball is most likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 .

Furthermore, when the right-handed game is performed after grasping whether the time saving state continues during the small winning game, the fired game ball reaches the second variable winning device 650 during the opening period. It is preferable to configure the game board 13 so as to make it difficult to play. By configuring in this way, in order to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 during the opening period of the small winning game, the right-handed game is continuously played before the small winning game is started. Since it is necessary to do so, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the subsequent game situation and selecting a game method.

<Regarding the processing contents of the audio ramp control device in the 33rd control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1006 to 1009, among the control processing executed by the sound ramp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-third control example, processing contents different from those of the thirty-second control example described above will be described. do. In this 33rd control example, in contrast to the 32nd control example described above, among the time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state, the establishment timing of the time-saving end condition established based on the small winning is the end of the small winning game. It is different in that the time saving state is continued even during the small winning game by configuring the timing. And also in the control processing executed by the sound lamp control device 113, there is a difference in that the content of the effect executed during the small winning game is different.

Specifically, in the thirty-third control example, in place of the pending information-related process (see S3208 in FIG. 984) in the thirty-second control example described above, the pending information-related process 2 (see S3258 in FIG. 1006) is The difference is that the small hit related process 2 (see S3558 of FIG. 1008) is executed instead of the small hit related process (see S3508 of FIG. 993), and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same control processing contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 1006, the contents of the pending information related process 2 (S3258) will be described. FIG. 1006 is a flow chart showing the contents of the pending information related process 2 (S3258). This pending information related process 2 (S3258) is different from the pending information related process (S3208 in FIG. 984) of the 32nd control example described above. A point of determining whether or not it is in a winning game, a point of executing a reservation acquisition process during a small winning when a reserved ball number command indicating acquisition of a special figure 2 reservation is received during a small winning game, are different, and otherwise identical. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the hold information related process 2 (S3258) is executed, first, the same processes of S3301 to S3310 as the hold information related process (S3208 in FIG. 984) of the thirty-second control example described above are executed. Then, in the process of S3307, when it is determined that it is not during the special figure fluctuation (S3307: No), it is determined whether or not the small hit game is currently in progress (S3351). In addition, in the process of S3351, the information stored in the secondary game state storage area 223g, that is, the information for indicating the current game state stored based on the state command output from the main controller 110 is used. It is determined whether or not a small winning game is in progress.

In the process of S3351, when it is determined that it is during the small hit game (S3351: Yes), the small hit during reservation acquisition process for determining the effect mode when the special figure 2 reservation is acquired during the small hit game Execute (S3352), and then proceed to the processing of S3310. On the other hand, in the process of S3351, when it is determined that the small winning game is not currently in progress (S3351: No), the process proceeds to S3310 without executing the process of S3352.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1007, the processing contents of the small hit during reservation acquisition processing (S3352) executed in the reservation information related processing 2 (see S3258 in FIG. 1006) will be described. FIG. 1007 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the small hit pending acquisition process (S3352). In this small hit pending acquisition process (S3352), when the special figure 2 suspension is acquired during the small winning game which is the target of the holding continuous production, that is, the holding continuous production is performed in a state where the special figure 2 suspension is not acquired. In the state where the target small hit game is executed and the display screen of FIG. 1002(a) is displayed, the processing for determining the effect mode that can be done when the special figure 2 reservation is acquired is executed.

When the small winning pending acquisition process (S3352) is executed, first, it is determined whether the pending flag 223o is set to ON (S5101), and if it is determined to be ON (S5101: Yes ), determines the effect mode for indicating that the special figure 2 reservation has been acquired during the small hit game, sets the display command corresponding to the determined effect mode (S5102), and ends this processing. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5101 that the pending flag 223o is not set to ON (S5101: No), the processing of S5102 is skipped and the present processing ends.

The display command set by the processing of S5102 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, and is executed by the command output processing (see FIG. 982) of the main processing executed by the MPU 221. 982), it is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display command set by the processing of S5102, the display mode indicating that the special figure 2 hold has been acquired is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 1002(b)). .

Next, with reference to FIG. 1008, the processing contents of the small winning related processing 2 (S3558) will be described. FIG. 1008 is a flow chart showing the details of the small hit related process 2 (S3558). In this small hit related process 2 (S3558), when a small hit start command is received with respect to the small hit related process (see S3508 in FIG. 993) in the 32nd control example described above, a special figure during the small hit game 2. The difference is that a small hit middle guide mode setting process for setting the game guide notification for prompting the acquisition of 2 reservations is executed, and the other process contents are the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same processing contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the small hitting related process 2 (S3558) is executed, first, similarly to the small hitting related process (see S3508 in FIG. 993) of the 32nd control example described above, it is determined whether a small hitting start command has been received ( S4201), When it is determined that the small hit start command is received (S4201: Yes), the small hit start command for display is set (S4202). The small hit start command for display set by the processing of S4202 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113, and the command of the main processing (see FIG. 982) executed by the MPU 221 It is transmitted to the display control device 114 during the output process (see S3102 in FIG. 982). When the display control device 114 receives the small winning start command for display, in addition to the display mode for indicating that the small winning game has started, V as a game guide notification for guiding the game method during the small winning game. A display mode (first arrow 810) for aiming at winning is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 1002(a)).

When the processing of S4202 is finished, then it is determined whether the right-handed flag is set to ON (S4203), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S4203: Yes), special during the small hit game FIG. 2 Executes a guide mode setting process during a small hit for setting a game guide notification for prompting acquisition of a hold (S4251), and ends this process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the right-handed flag is not set to ON in the processing of S4203 (S4203: No), the right-handed flag is set to ON (S4204), and a display command for guiding the right-handed game is set. (S4205), then the process of S4251 is executed, and this process ends. Here, in the processing of S4203, if it is determined that the right-handed flag is not set to ON, it is a case where the small hit is won in a state where the normal state is set, specifically, in the normal state If you win a small hit (winning probability 1/65536) in the first special symbol lottery that is mainly executed in the second special symbol lottery that is executed during the normal state using the special figure 2 hold acquired during the time saving state This is a case where a small hit is won (winning probability 1/2).

In the process of S4201, if it is determined that the small hit start command is not received (S4201: No), the small hit control process of the 32nd control example (see S3508 in FIG. 993) and the same S4206 to S4216 Execute the process and terminate this process.

Next, the processing contents of the guide mode setting process (S4251) during the small hit executed in the small hit related process 2 (see S3558 in FIG. 1008) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1009 is a flow chart showing the contents of the guide mode setting process (S4251) during the small hit. In this small hit guide mode setting process (S4251), a process for determining the effect mode when the small hit game is executed in a state where the special figure 2 reservation is not acquired is executed.

When the small hit guidance mode setting process (S4251) is executed, first, whether the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is 0, that is, whether the special figure 2 reservation is acquired It is determined (S5201), and if it is determined that the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is 0 (S5201: Yes), then it is determined whether the reserved consecutive flag 223o is set to ON (S5202 ). In the processing of S5202, if it is determined that the holding consecutive flag 223o is set to ON (S5202: Yes), that is, when the small winning game that is the target of the holding consecutive production is executed, the special figure 2 reservation is acquired. If it is not in the state, set the display command indicating the guidance mode for guiding the acquisition of the special figure 2 reservation (S5204), and terminate this process.

The display command set by the process of S5204 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, and is executed by the command output process (see FIG. 982) of the main process executed by the MPU 221. 982), it is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display command set by the processing of S5204, the display mode (second arrow 810a, display 1002(a)).

On the other hand, in the processing of S5202, if it is determined that the pending flag 223o is not set to ON (S5202: No), a display command is set to indicate that the time saving state continues (S5203 ), the process ends.

The display command set by the processing of S5203 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, and the command output processing (see FIG. 982) of the main processing executed by the MPU 221 ( 982), it is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display command set by the process of S5203, the display mode for indicating that the time saving state continues during the small winning game (the second 1002(a)).

As described above, in this 33rd control example, the display mode during the small hit game executed during the time saving state is based on the setting situation of the holding consecutive flag 223o and the acquisition situation of special figure 2 holding When the holding consecutive flag 223o is set to ON, that is, when the holding consecutive effect is likely to be executed continuously, the holding consecutive flag 223o is not set to ON. Rather, it is configured to make it easier to acquire the special figure 2 reservation during the small winning game. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress that the jackpot game is executed in a state where the special figure 2 reservation is not acquired.

<34th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1010 to 1025. FIG. In the 34th control example, in contrast to the 32nd control example described above, the effect mode of the special figure 1 reserved symbol for showing the player the right to execute the acquired first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 reserved) They are different in that they are different. Other configurations are the same, and detailed descriptions of the same configurations are omitted.

The pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-fourth control example is configured so as to facilitate acquisition of the right to execute the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 reservation) in the normal state, as in the thirty-second control example described above, and The special figure 1 reservation is configured to be obtainable up to 4 pieces. And, on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the special figure 1 reserved pattern is displayed as a display mode for letting the player grasp the number of acquired special figure 1 reserved patterns. By configuring in this way, to make it easier for the player to grasp whether it is possible to acquire a new special figure 1 reservation (whether the number of acquired special figure 1 reservations has reached the upper limit) Therefore, if it is possible to acquire a new special figure 1 reservation (the number of acquired special figure 1 reservations has not reached the upper limit), a new special figure 1 reservation In addition to being able to play games willingly to acquire , if it is a situation where it is not possible to acquire a new special figure 1 reservation (the number of special figure 1 reservations that have already been acquired has reached the upper limit), By interrupting the game for obtaining the FIG. 1 hold, it is possible to suppress the shooting of useless game balls.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-fourth control example is configured to be able to execute a pending change effect using the special figure 1 pending symbol displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 . This hold change production is a production for suggesting to the player the preliminary determination result (prefetch result) of the prize information included in the acquired special figure 1 hold, and after acquiring the special figure 1 hold, the acquisition It is executed using the period (prefetching period) until the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery) based on the special figure 1 reservation is executed.

In other words, if the execution of the pending change effect is decided when the third special figure 1 suspension is acquired out of the special figure 1 suspension that can be acquired up to 4, the third special figure 1 suspension After the special figure 1 reserved design corresponding to is displayed on the display surface of the 3rd design display device 81, the remaining variation time of the special symbol variation being executed, the first and second special figure 1 reservation Over the period in which the special symbol variation based on is executed, a reservation change performance is executed for suggesting the preliminary determination result (prefetch result) of the winning information included in the third special symbol 1 reservation.

By configuring in this way, when the game is played while continuing the state in which a lot of special figure 1 reservations are acquired, the number of acquisitions of special figure 1 reservations is small (not acquired). It becomes easier to predict the result of the special symbol lottery in advance by the holding change performance than when playing a game. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game in order to acquire more special figure 1 reserves.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-fourth control example, in order to enhance the effect of displaying the special figure 1 reserved pattern, the special figure 1 reserved pattern other than the special figure 1 reserved pattern in which the reserved change effect is performed It is configured to be displayed in a display mode accompanied by a predetermined action. Specifically, each special figure 1 reserved design is displayed in a display mode (reference display mode) that sways in the vertical direction within a range that does not deviate from the display area (reserved display area) where each special figure 1 reserved design is displayed It consists of

By configuring in this way, the player has expectations that the pending change effect will be executed even for the special figure 1 pending pattern displayed in the standard display mode, not the object of the pending change effect. can be made easier.

Here, as described above, when the display mode with a predetermined action can be displayed as the reference display mode of the special figure 1 reserved symbol, a plurality of symbols displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 There was a problem that it was difficult to synchronize the display mode of the special figure 1 reserved design (up to 4 pieces).

In other words, it is configured so that the special figure 1 reserved pattern is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 based on the acquisition of the special figure 1 reserved, and in a display mode with a predetermined action from the display timing. When configured so that the special figure 1 reserved pattern is displayed, the special figure 1 reserved pattern is displayed according to the acquisition timing of the special figure 1 reservation, that is, the timing of entering the game ball into the first ball entrance 64. Since the timing is different, the special figure 1 reserved design already displayed is displayed as a predetermined action, and a new special figure 1 reserved design is displayed at the initial position while being displayed at a position different from the initial position. When a predetermined action is executed, the action contents of the two special 1 reserved patterns are shifted, and a plurality of special 1 reserved patterns are displayed in a display mode without a sense of unity, and the production effect is reduced. I had a problem with it.

On the other hand, in this 34th control example, it is configured to be able to execute a synchronization process for synchronizing the display mode of the special figure 1 reserved design that has already been displayed. Specifically, when it is determined that it is time to execute a new effect, such as the timing at which a new special symbol variation is started, or the timing at which the stage is shifted, all the displayed special figures 1 reserved symbols , a process for executing a predetermined action from the initial position is executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to synchronize the display mode of each special figure 1 reserved pattern which has been executed separately based on the displayed timing, so that the display mode of the special figure 1 reserved pattern has a sense of unity. It can be held, and the production effect can be enhanced. In addition, unify the control for displaying the special figure 1 suspension to indicate that the special figure 1 suspension has been acquired, and the control for executing a predetermined action for the displayed special figure 1 suspension Since it is possible, it is possible to simplify the control contents for displaying the special figure 1 reserved design.

In addition, in this 34th control example, regardless of the display timing of the special figure 1 reserved design, the same action is configured to be executed, and even if the display contents (action contents) of each special figure 1 reserved design are shifted Even if there is, it is configured to unify the display contents (action contents) of each special figure 1 reserved design by the synchronization process executed later, but not limited to this, for example, in the main controller 110, A special figure is provided based on the fact that the display timing is specified by the specifying means when the special figure 1 reservation is obtained by providing a specifying means that can specify the display timing for displaying the special figure 1 reserved pattern in the standard display mode. It may be constructed such that one reserved symbol is displayed in the standard display mode.

By configuring in this way, the timing at which the special figure 1 reservation is actually acquired and the timing at which the special figure 1 reservation pattern is displayed are slightly shifted, but the display mode of the plurality of special figure 1 reservation patterns Since (action content) can always be synchronized and displayed, it is possible to omit the process of synchronizing the display mode of a plurality of special-figure 1 reserved symbols that are displayed in a shifted manner.

Furthermore, at the timing of acquiring the special figure 1 reservation, a new special figure 1 reserved design is displayed in a still image, and then based on the display timing being specified by the specifying means, the special that was displayed in the still image The FIG. 1 reserved pattern may be configured to be displayed in a standard display mode. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible for the player to immediately grasp the acquisition status of the special figure 1 reservation, and it is possible to prevent the action contents of a plurality of special figure 1 reservation patterns from being displayed in a shifted manner. be able to.

Further, in the thirty-fourth control example, a plurality of stage types (rabbit stage, hero stage) can be determined as the type of effect executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. It is configured so that the stage can be switched at the timing when the special pattern variation is started. With this configuration, even if the special symbol lottery continues for a long time in which the lottery result is lost, the player can quickly get tired of the game by executing different effects by switching the stage type. It can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the thirty-fourth control example, as described above, since it is configured so that the pending change effect is executed across the period in which a plurality of special symbol variations are executed, during the execution period of the pending change effect An event that changes the stage type may occur. Then, the effect mode of the pending change effect is varied according to the stage type. That is, when the stage type is switched while the pending change effect is being executed, a process for switching the effect mode of the pending change effect in the middle is executed.

In the thirty-fourth control example, even when the stage type is switched, the special figure 1 reserved pattern is configured to continue to be visible to the player. A part of the display mode of the stage switching effect executed when switching is performed before switching the stage type by displaying the display area where the special figure 1 reserved pattern is displayed so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it. The display mode (contents of action) of the special figure 1 reserved pattern that was previously switched to the display mode (contents of action) corresponding to the stage type after switching is configured to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the display content. Also good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to switch the effect mode of the pending change effect based on the switching of the stage type without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-fourth control example, a synchronous period in which the display contents (action contents) of the special figure 1 reserved pattern are synchronized and an asynchronous period in which they are not synchronized are generated. When the stage type is switched during the synchronization period, the pending change effect that inherits the effect content of the pending change effect that was executed before switching is executed in correspondence with the stage type after switching. are doing. On the other hand, if the stage type is switched during the asynchronous period, a process for re-determining the effect mode of the pending change effect is executed when the stage type is switched, and the stage type after switching is performed based on the determined effect mode. It is configured to execute a pending change performance.

In other words, depending on the switching timing of the stage type, the performance mode of the pending change performance that has been executed before switching the stage type is changed so that it can be executed corresponding to the stage type after switching. By enabling the stage type to be switched in this way, it is possible not only to provide the player with a variety of effects, but also to provide information on the game given to the player at the timing of switching the stage type (holding change effect). (effect result) can be varied, it is possible to make the player interested in the timing at which the stage type is switched.

Furthermore, in the thirty-fourth control example, when the pending change effect corresponding to winning is being executed, the case where the stage type is switched during the asynchronous period is more favorable than the case where the stage type is switched during the synchronous period. However, it is configured such that a performance mode with a high expectation of winning is easily determined as a performance mode of the pending change performance corresponding to the stage type after switching.

<Regarding the effect contents in the 34th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1010 to 1014, among the various effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-fourth control example, the special figure 1 reserved symbol displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 I will explain the details of the production content related to. Note that elements (display elements displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81) that are the same as the effect contents executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-second control example described above are assigned the same reference numerals. , the detailed description of which will be omitted.

FIG. 1010(a) is displayed when the right to execute the third special symbol lottery (third special symbol 1 reservation) is acquired during the execution of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) variation. It is the figure which showed an example of a display screen. As shown in FIG. 1010(a), in the sub-display area Ds formed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the right to execute the acquired first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 reserved) is displayed. 1st sub-display area Ds1 which is a reserved design display area for, and a second sub-display area Ds2 which is an active reserved design display area for displaying the active reserved design corresponding to the special design lottery being executed, is formed.

In the first sub-display area Ds1, a first pedestal m1, a second pedestal m2, a third pedestal m3, a third When the 4 pedestals m4 are displayed and the special figure 1 reservation is acquired, the special figure 1 reserved designs are displayed at the corresponding positions in order from the first pedestal m1. Then, when a new special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery) is executed, the special figure 1 reserved (first special FIG. 1 pending) hr1 is rendered to move to a position corresponding to the 0th pedestal m0 displayed in the second sub-display area Ds2.

In other words, the display mode that was displayed as the special figure 1 reserved symbol is not the period until the corresponding special symbol lottery is executed, but the period after the corresponding special symbol lottery is executed (the corresponding special symbol variation is The period until it is stopped and displayed) is also configured to be visible to the player. By configuring in this way, the special figure 1 reserved pattern whose display mode is changed by the reserved change effect is displayed in the second sub-display area Ds2 as an in-execution reserved pattern even during the execution period of the corresponding special pattern variation. Since it is possible to do so, it is possible to determine the variable performance of the special symbol fluctuation with the content of the preliminary determination result notified to the player by the pending change performance (result of the pending change performance). It is possible to provide an easy-to-understand performance for the person.

In addition, in this 34th control example, it is constructed so as to continue to display the pending symbols during execution until the special symbol variation is completed. It may be configured to display the suspended design during execution for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) from , and then not to display the suspended design during execution.

The diagram shown in FIG. 1010(a) shows that in the state where the rabbit stage is set as the stage type, the first special symbol variation is being executed, the third special figure 1 hold is obtained, and the third It shows the time point when the special figure 1 reserved design is displayed, and in the display area Dm4, the first special symbol variation is displayed in a display mode (three arrows are displayed in the figure) indicating that the first special symbol variation is being executed. 3 patterns are displayed in a variable manner. In the display area Dm5, "rabbit stage" is displayed as a display mode for indicating that the current stage type is the rabbit stage. In the main display area Dm, as a variable effect executed during the rabbit stage, a variable effect is executed in a production mode using a character 801 imitating a rabbit (a production mode dedicated to the rabbit stage).

Also, in the first sub-display area Ds1 formed in the sub-display area Ds, the first pedestal m1 to the fourth pedestal m4 are displayed, and the already obtained first special figure 1 reserved symbol hr1 is displayed on the first pedestal m1. It is displayed at the corresponding position, and the second special figure 1 reserved design hr2 is displayed at the position corresponding to the second pedestal m2. The first special figure 1 reserved design hr1 and the second special figure 1 reserved design hr2 are displayed in a normal display mode (indicated by a circle in the figure) indicating that they are not subject to the reservation change effect, Each of the reserved symbols is oscillatingly displayed on the corresponding pedestals m1 and m2 in synchronization with the vertical direction.

Then, based on the acquisition of the third special figure 1 reservation, the third special figure 1 reserved design hr3 is displayed to move to a position corresponding to the third pedestal m3. The third special figure 1 reserved design hr3 is a special figure 1 reserved design to be subjected to a reserved change effect, and is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the reserved change effect.

Here, the content of the pending change effect that is executed in a state where the rabbit stage is set as the stage type will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 in this 34th control example, the display mode of the corresponding special figure 1 reserved pattern can be changed in three stages by the reserved change effect, and the special figure 1 reserved corresponding to the reserved change effect Based on the pre-determination result (prefetch result) based on the winning information included in, the display mode (stage) to be finally displayed in the pending change effect is determined. Specifically, as the display mode of the special figure 1 reserved design, the first stage, the second stage, and the third stage are configured to be determinable. However, it is constructed so that the display mode of the third stage is more likely to be determined than in the case of other than winning. In addition, when the preliminary determination result (prefetching result) is a winning result, the display mode of the third stage is easier to determine than the display mode of the first stage. It is configured so that the display mode of the first stage can be tied more easily than in the case of .

In other words, when the production result of the pending change production is the first stage display mode, the third stage display mode is the target of the holding change production special figure 1 suspension Winning a prize indicating winning You can increase the likelihood that the information is included.

The display mode of the 3rd special figure 1 reserved design shown in FIG. 1010(a) is a display mode of the first stage in the pending change production, and is a display mode corresponding to the rabbit stage, imitating a rabbit silhouette. displayed in the form. In the thirty-fourth control example, as the pending change effect, it is configured to execute the effect of changing the display mode of the target special figure 1 reserved pattern in stages, and the display shown in FIG. 1010 (a) Since the mode is the display mode of the first stage executed in the rabbit stage, "1" indicating the number of stages is attached to the third special figure 1 reserved design hr3. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player of the number of steps displayed in the pending effect being executed in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, in the thirty-fourth control example, it is configured to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand by displaying the current stage number in the display mode that is variably displayed by the pending change effect. For example, it may be configured to display the total number of stages whose display mode can be changed by the pending change effect and the current number of stages, instead of the current number of stages, It may be configured to display the number of times the display mode is changed by the pending change effect of this time.

When the production progresses from the state shown in FIG. 1010(a) and the third special figure 1 reserved design hr3 is displayed at the position corresponding to the third pedestal m3, the display screen shown in FIG. 1010(b) is displayed. be done. Figure 1010 (b), from the first special figure 1 reserved design (first special figure 1 reserved design hr1) to the third special figure 1 reserved design (third special figure 1 reserved design hr3), each FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed in a state of being displayed at a position corresponding to the pedestal;

In this 34th control example, when the special figure 1 reserved design (for example, the first special figure 1 reserved design hr1) is positioned at a location corresponding to the display position (for example, the first pedestal m1), a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) action motion (after a 0.5 second rising motion, a 0.5 second falling motion followed by a rocking motion to the initial position) is repeatedly executed. there is Here, the special figure 1 reserved pattern is a game ball entering the first ball entrance 64, and a reserved ball number command indicating that a new special figure 1 reservation has been acquired is voice lamp control from the main controller 110 It is configured to be output to the device 113 and to be displayed based on the reception of the reserved ball number command by the voice lamp control device 113 .

In other words, regardless of the display mode of the special figure 1 reserved pattern corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation that has already been acquired (whether it is the aspect during the rising operation or the aspect during the descending operation), the new special figure 1 reservation It is configured so that a new special figure 1 reserved design is displayed to show that it has been acquired. Therefore, in the second sub-display area Ds2, the content of the action operation is the same, but a plurality of special figure 1 reserved symbols with different start timings of the action operation are displayed, and the production without unity continues. As a result, there is a problem that the performance effect is lowered.

Also in this 34th control example, the newly displayed special figure 1 reserved pattern is configured to start the action operation at its own timing regardless of the action operation timing of the already displayed special figure 1 reserved pattern. are doing.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1010(b), the already displayed first special figure 1 reserved design hr1 and second special figure 1 reserved design hr2 synchronize the action operation. Then, the newly displayed third special figure 1 reserved design hr3 starts the action operation at different timing from the first special figure 1 reserved design hr1 and the second special figure 1 reserved design hr2.

However, in the thirty-fourth control example, when a new special symbol variation is started, for each special symbol 1 reserved symbol being displayed, a synchronization process for synchronizing the action operation is configured to be executed. are doing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1011 (a), at the timing when the special symbol variation being executed is stopped and displayed, the action operation of each special figure 1 reserved symbol is stopped, and each special figure 1 reserved symbol is initial Execute the process to stop and display at the position. Then, as shown in FIG. 1011 (b), the timing at which a new special symbol variation is started, that is, each special figure at the same timing in accordance with the display timing at which the display position of each special figure 1 reserved symbol is shifted It is configured so that the action operation of one reserved symbol is started.

In this way, for each special figure 1 reserved pattern that has started the action operation in accordance with the display timing, when a predetermined synchronization condition is satisfied (when a new special symbol variation is started), each special figure By synchronizing the action motions of the 1-reserved patterns, it is possible to prevent the continuous display of a plurality of 1-reserved special patterns with different start timings of the action motions, thereby reducing the performance effect. can do.

In addition, in this 34th control example, when a new special symbol variation is executed, since it is configured to synchronize the action operation of each special symbol 1 reserved symbol, 1 special symbol variation is executed The special figure 1 reserved design corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation acquired while the The action operation is executed at a timing different from the special figure 1 reserved design corresponding to 1 reserved. Therefore, by visually recognizing the display mode of each special figure 1 reserved design displayed in the second sub-display area Ds2, this special design variation (1 special design variation) acquired during the period being executed It is possible to grasp the number of special figures 1 pending.

Here, with reference to FIG. 1012, the effect mode of the pending change effect executed in the thirty-fourth control example will be described in detail. FIG. 1012(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the display mode of the first stage is displayed in the pending change effect, and FIG. 1012(c) shows an example of the display screen displayed when the display mode of is switched to the second stage display mode, and FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when switching to a staged display mode;

In this 34th control example, as a pending change effect, using the effect period including at least the period (prefetching period) until the special symbol lottery based on the target special figure 1 suspension is executed, the special figure 1 reserved symbol An effect of switching the display mode in up to three stages is executed in a mode corresponding to the set stage type. FIGS. 1012(a) to (c) show the pending change effect executed when the rabbit stage is set.

As shown in FIG. 1012 (a), when the pending change effect is executed, a display simulating a rabbit silhouette as a display mode different from the normal special figure 1 reserved design (first special figure 1 reserved design hr1) A special figure 1 reserved design (second special figure 1 reserved design hr2) is displayed in the mode. This display mode simulating the silhouette of a rabbit shows the display mode of the first stage in the pending change effect of the rabbit stage. In this way, by making the display mode of the special figure 1 reserved pattern that is the target of the pending change production different from the display mode of the special figure 1 reserved pattern that is not the target of the reserved change production, it is possible to display a maximum of 4 It is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner which special figure 1 reserved pattern is the object of the reserved change performance among the possible special figure 1 reserved patterns.

In addition, in the 34th control example, by synchronizing the contents of the action operation with the special figure 1 reserved pattern that is the target of the reserved change production and the special figure 1 reserved pattern that is not the target of the reserved change production, a sense of unity While executing a certain performance, by making the display mode of the special figure 1 reserved pattern different, it is configured to make it easy for the player to grasp which special figure 1 reserved pattern is the target of the reserved change performance. Without being limited to this, for example, without changing the display mode of the special figure 1 reserved pattern, the content of the action operation is changed to grasp the special figure 1 reserved pattern that is the target of the reserved change performance for the player. It may be configured to allow

In this case, when a new special figure 1 reserved pattern is displayed, the action operation is configured to be executed based on the unique timing as in the 34th control example, and when the synchronization condition is established, It is preferable to configure so that the action operation is executed in a manner different from the other special figure 1 reserved symbols for the special figure 1 reserved pattern which is the target of the reserved change production. By configuring in this way, immediately after the special figure 1 reserved pattern is displayed, the action operation is executed at different timings, so that all the special figure 1 reserved patterns are subject to the reserved change effect. It can give you a sense of hope. In addition, if a plurality of (three or more) special figure 1 reserved patterns are not displayed, specify the special figure 1 reserved pattern in which the action operation is executed in a manner different from the other special figure 1 reserved patterns Since it is difficult to do so, it is possible to motivate the player watching the pending change performance to play the game continuously in a state where many special figure 1 pending patterns are displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 1012 (a), the first special figure 1 reserved design hr1 and the second special figure 1 reserved design hr2 are synchronously executing an action operation, and are subject to the reservation change effect. When the display mode of the second special figure 1 reserved design hr2 switches from the first stage to the second stage, as shown in FIG. 1012(b), a dedicated action operation is executed. Specifically, normally, an action motion for 1 second (after a 0.5 second rising motion, a 0.5 second falling motion to return to the initial position) is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, when the display mode is changed by the pending change effect, as a dedicated action motion for 2 seconds, after the rising motion for 0.5 seconds, the additional rising motion for 0.2 seconds and the display mode for 0.6 seconds It is configured to perform a switching display, an additional descending motion for 0.2 seconds, and a descending motion for 0.5 seconds.

In this way, by enlarging the area in which the special figure 1 reserved pattern moves more than the normal action operation, the player can easily grasp the special figure 1 reserved pattern whose display mode is changed by the reserved change performance. be able to. Also, the execution period length (2 seconds) of the dedicated action operation for changing the display mode in the pending change effect is twice the execution period length (1 second) of the normal action operation. Since it is configured, the action operation of the special figure 1 reserved pattern in which the exclusive action operation is completed and the other special figure 1 reserved pattern can be continuously synchronized, and the performance with a sense of unity can be executed. .

Further, as shown in FIG. 1012(c), in the pending change effect, the display mode is configured to be variable not only during the special symbol variation period but also at the timing when a new special symbol variation is started. In FIG. 1012(c), when the first special figure 1 reserved design hr1 showing the display mode of the second stage in the holding change effect shifts to the running pedestal m0 showing the running reserved design, the third stage The display screen when switching to the display mode is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 1012 (c), when shifting the display position of the special figure 1 reserved pattern, from the second stage display mode imitating the rabbit's face to the third stage display mode imitating the rabbit whole body , and is displayed as an in-execution pending design hr0. After that, the suspended pattern hr0 during execution displayed in the display mode of the third stage is displayed at the position corresponding to the pedestal m0 during execution.

By configuring in this way, various timings can be set as the timing at which the display mode of the special figure 1 reserved pattern is changed by the pending change effect, so that the player gets tired of the effect performed early. It can be suppressed.

In addition, in this 34th control example, the contents of the operation when the display position of the special figure 1 reserved design shifts to another display position are the special figure 1 reserved design that is the target of the reserved change production and the reserved change production Although it is the same as the special figure 1 reserved pattern that is not targeted, it is not limited to this, depending on the operation content when shifting the special figure 1 reserved pattern, whether the player is subject to the reserved change effect It may be configured to grasp whether or not, for example, using a period longer than the period used for normal shift movement, a special operation to shift the special figure 1 reserved pattern can be configured to be executable and reserved It is preferable that the special figure 1 reserved pattern which is the target of the change performance is more easily shift-moved by the special action than the special figure 1 reserved pattern which is not the target of the reserved change performance.

By configuring in this way, when a new special symbol variation is started, it is possible to make the player interested in how the special figure 1 reserved symbol is shifted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1013, the contents of the effect when the stage type is switched during the period during which the pending change effect is executed will be described in detail. The pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-fourth control example, like the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-second control example described above, has a plurality of stage types in order to vary the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. By determining one stage type from among them and displaying the display mode corresponding to the determined stage type (executing the stage change effect), various effects are provided to the player and the effect of the effect is enhanced. It consists of

The stage change effect is executed based on the number of times the special symbol variation is executed, or is executed based on the operation of the selection button 600 by the player, and whether or not the pending change effect is executed. Regardless, the stage change production is configured to be executable. Furthermore, in order to enhance the effect of production, it is configured to vary the production mode of the pending change production according to the set stage type. In addition, when the stage change effect is executed during the execution period of the pending change effect, while synchronizing the action operation of each special figure 1 reserved pattern, the pending change effect in the effect mode according to the stage type after switching is configured to continue

FIG. 1013(a) shows a part of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in a state in which action actions of all special 1 reserved symbols are synchronized and a rabbit stage is displayed. FIG. 1013(b) is a state in which the display screen shown in FIG. 1013(a) is displayed, and a part of the display screen after the stage change effect is executed and the hero stage is set. It is a figure showing. As shown in FIG. 1013(a), while the rabbit stage is set, "rabbit stage" is displayed in the display area Dm5, and the third special figure 1 reserved pattern hr3 which is the target of the reserved change effect is displayed in the first stage display mode (display mode imitating a rabbit silhouette). Then, the action operation of the first special figure 1 reserved design hr1 to the third special figure 1 reserved design hr3 is synchronized.

That is, in the state shown in FIG. 1013(a), the special figure 1 reserved design displayed as the 4th special figure 1 reserved design hr4 during the special design variation period executed before is the object of the reserved change effect. After that, at the timing when the next special symbol variation is started, each special figure 1 reserved symbol shifts and moves, and shows the state after executing the synchronization process for synchronizing the action operation. In this way, when the stage change production is executed in a state in which the action actions of all the special figure 1 reserved patterns are synchronized, all the special figure 1 reserved patterns are aligned with the timing at the initial position, It is configured to be changed to the display mode of the special figure 1 reserved design after switching.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1013(b), a display mode imitating a sword corresponding to the hero stage is displayed as the display mode of the third special figure 1 reserved pattern hr3 that is the target of the pending change effect. . Then, from the state of being positioned at the initial position, all the special figure 1 reserved symbols are operated by an action motion corresponding to the hero stage. In this way, when the action actions of all the displayed special 1 reserved patterns are synchronized, all the special 1 reserved patterns are positioned at the initial position, corresponding to the stage type after switching By configuring to switch to the display mode that has been set, it is possible to continue the pending change effect without giving the player a sense of incompatibility.

On the other hand, in the thirty-fourth control example, there is an asynchronous period before synchronizing the action operation of the displayed special figure 1 reserved design. In other words, after the new special figure 1 reserved design is displayed, the timing at which each special figure 1 reserved design starts the action operation is not synchronized and is scattered until the next special design fluctuation is started. At the timing of each special figure 1 reserved design is the period during which the action operation is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1014, the contents of the effect when the stage change effect is executed during the asynchronous period in which the action operation of each special figure 1 reserved design is not synchronized will be described. FIG. 1014(a) is a state in which the action action of the special figure 1 reserved symbol is not synchronized, and a diagram showing a part of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the rabbit stage is displayed. FIG. 1014(b) is a state in which the display screen shown in FIG. 1014(a) is displayed. FIG. 1014(c) is a diagram showing the action operation of the pending change effect after the transition to the hero stage. As shown in FIG. 1014(a), while the rabbit stage is set, "rabbit stage" is displayed in the display area Dm5, and the third special figure 1 reserved pattern hr3 which is the target of the reserved change effect is displayed in the first stage display mode (display mode imitating a rabbit silhouette).

And, in the state where the action action of the first special figure 1 reserved design hr1 and the second special figure 1 reserved design hr2 are synchronized, only the third special figure 1 reserved design hr3, the other special figure 1 reserved An action motion is executed at a timing different from the pattern. That is, the state shown in FIG. 1014(a) is the state in which only the third special figure 1 reserved design hr3 is not synchronized, that is, the first special figure 1 reserved design hr1 and the second special figure 1 reserved design hr2 is a special symbol 1 reserved symbol that has been displayed before the start of the special symbol variation that is currently being executed, and the synchronization process is being performed at the timing of the start of this special symbol variation. And, the third special figure 1 reserved design hr3 is displayed during the special design fluctuation period currently being executed.

In the state shown in FIG. 1014 (a), when the stage change effect is executed, that is, when the stage change effect is executed in a state where all the special figure 1 reserved symbols are not synchronized, the stage change effect Triggered by the execution of, synchronous processing for synchronizing the action action of each special figure 1 reserved pattern is executed, and an additional lottery is executed to change the production mode of the pending change production, and based on the result of the additional lottery It is configured to execute the pending change effect after the stage type is switched.

Specifically, as a part of the stage change production, as shown in FIG. 1014 (b), the display mode for making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the display mode of the special figure 1 reserved design to be the target of the pending change production (In the figure, a display mode simulating smoke) is displayed, and an effect is executed that suggests that the stage indicated by the display mode of the special figure 1 reserved pattern that is the target of the pending change effect can be promoted.

After that, as shown in FIG. 1014 (c), the display mode of the third special figure 1 reserved pattern hr3 to be the target of the pending change effect is a display mode imitating a sword corresponding to the hero stage, and the second stage is displayed. That is, in the diagram shown in FIG. 1014 (c), as a result of the additional lottery, a display mode with an increased number of stages is determined as the pending change effect, and was displayed before the stage change effect was executed. A display mode with a higher level (second level) than the number of levels of the display mode (see FIG. 1014(a)) is displayed.

In this way, when the stage change production is executed in a state where the action operation of the special figure 1 reserved design that is the target of the pending change production is not synchronized with the action operation of the other special figure 1 reserved design, It is possible to make it difficult to see the display mode of the special figure 1 reserved pattern which is the target of the pending change production, and to vary (increase) the number of steps indicated by the display mode of the special figure 1 reserved pattern which is the target of the pending change production. By structuring as possible, even if the process of synchronizing the action motion of each special figure 1 reserved pattern is executed based on the execution of the stage change performance, it is possible to suppress giving the player a sense of incongruity. can be done.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the thirty-fourth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1015 to 1017. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-fourth control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-second control example in that the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed. are doing. Other than that, the electrical configuration is the same, and the description of the same content is omitted.

In this 34th control example, the number of acquisitions of the right to execute the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 reservation) is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in contrast to the above-described 32nd control example. It is different in that it is configured so that it can be displayed as a pattern. And, as the electrical configuration of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, it is different in that various data tables and various flags used for executing the processing for displaying the special figure 1 reserved design are provided.

First, referring to FIG. 1015, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-fourth control example will be described. FIG. 1015 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 1015, the ROM 222 of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-fourth control example stores the pending action data table 222aa in the ROM 222 (see FIG. 959(a)) of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-second control example described above. They are different in that they are added, and the other elements are the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The reserved action data table 222aa displays the special figure 1 reserved design (first special figure 1 reserved design hr1 to fourth special figure 1 reserved design hr4) in the first sub-display area Ds1 of the display surface of the third design display device 81. This is a data table that is referenced when In this 34th control example, the special figure 1 reserved pattern is configured to be displayed with a predetermined action (up and down movement), and when a new special figure 1 reserved is displayed, A special figure 1 reserved design is displayed with a predetermined action from the display timing, and when a predetermined synchronization condition (for example, a condition that is established when a new special symbol variation is started) is established, it is displayed. It is configured so that the action actions of a plurality of special figure 1 reserved designs are synchronized.

By configuring in this way, when the synchronization condition is established when a new special symbol variation is started, the special figure 1 obtained during the period in which the 1 special symbol variation is executed It is possible to grasp the number of reservations by the action operation contents (action operation gap) of a plurality of acquired special figure 1 reserved designs. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for a player who tries to acquire many special figure 1 reserves during one special symbol variation to grasp the acquisition result of the special figure 1 reserves.

Here, with reference to FIG. 1016, the contents defined in the pending action data table 222aa will be described. FIG. 1016 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the pending action data table 222aa. As shown in FIG. 1016, in the pending action data table 222aa, the set stage type, the type of pending pattern to execute the action action (holding type), the type of the action action to be executed (action type), , an action display scenario (action content) with a 1-second cycle or a 2-second cycle is defined. Each special figure 1 reserved pattern displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is configured to be displayed in a display mode corresponding to any of the action display scenarios defined in the reserved action data table 222aa. ing.

Specifically, when the stage type is "Rabbit Stage", the hold type is "Normal Hold", and the action type is "Normal Time", the action display scenario is "0 seconds to 0.5 seconds rising display, falling display of 0.5 seconds to 1 second” is stipulated. That is, in the winning command process 3 (see S3271 in FIG. 1019), when displaying the special figure 1 reserved design based on the newly received winning information command, for the special figure 1 reserved design in which the reservation change notice was not set In this case, the action display scenario is defined such that a one-second period display mode in which the rising display is performed for 0.5 seconds and then the falling display is performed for 0.5 seconds is repeatedly displayed.

In addition, when the stage type is "rabbit stage", the hold type is "change object hold", and the action type is "normal time", the action display scenario is "display rising from 0 to 0.5 seconds." , 0.5 seconds to 1 second" is stipulated, and when the action type is "at the time of change", the action display scenario is "0 seconds to 0.5 seconds of rising display, 0.5 seconds to 0.5 seconds. 5 seconds to 1.5 seconds of changing action display and 1.5 seconds to 2 seconds of falling display” are stipulated. Here, in the winning command process 3 (see S3271 in FIG. 1019), when displaying the special figure 1 reserved design based on the newly received winning information command, for the special figure 1 reserved design in which the reservation change notice is set In this case, the timing to execute the pending change effect (the timing at which the change action is set) is determined, and during the period when the pending change effect is not executed, the "normal" action display is executed, and the period during which the pending change effect is executed is configured to execute an action indication "at the time of change". In addition, as shown in FIG. 1014, for the special figure 1 reserved design in which the reservation change notice is determined, a display mode different from the normal special figure 1 reserved design is configured to be displayed.

As described above, when the "rabbit stage" is set, the "normal" action display is stipulated in the action display scenario for 1 second, and the "change" action display is stipulated in the action display scenario for 2 seconds. Because it is defined in, the action operation timing of the normal special figure 1 reserved design and the special figure 1 reserved design to be changed is synchronized, so that the action display at normal time is synchronized Of course, That is, even after executing the action display of "at the time of change" for the special figure 1 reserved pattern to be changed, the action operation can be synchronized. Therefore, since it is possible to synchronize and display the action actions of the plurality of special 1 reserved patterns displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, the production effect is achieved by executing the production with a sense of unity. can increase

On the other hand, if the stage type is "brave stage", the hold type is "normal hold", and the action type is "normal time", the action display scenario is "rising display for 0 to 1 second, 1 second ~ 2 seconds descending display” is stipulated. That is, in the winning command process 3 (see S3271 in FIG. 1019), when displaying the special figure 1 reserved design based on the newly received winning information command, for the special figure 1 reserved design in which the reservation change notice was not set In this case, the action display scenario is defined such that a display mode of a 2-second cycle, in which the rising display is performed for 1 second and then the falling display is performed for 1 second, is repeatedly displayed.

In addition, when the stage type is "brave stage", the hold type is "change target hold", and the action type is "normal time", the action display scenario is "rising display for 0 to 1 second, 1 seconds to 2 seconds" is stipulated, and when the action type is "at the time of change", the action display scenario is "0 seconds to 0.5 seconds rising display, 0.5 seconds to 1 second .5 second changing action display, 1.5 to 2 second descending display” is stipulated.

As described above, in the thirty-fourth control example, the length of the period used for one action operation during normal operation of the special figure 1 reserved design is changed according to the set stage type. Configure. By configuring in this way, only by switching the stage type, the action operation mode of the special figure 1 reserved pattern can be changed, so that the production effect by switching the stage type can be enhanced.

In addition, since it is configured so that the length of the period used for one action action is different from the action action at normal time and the action action at the time of change, the action action content of the special figure 1 reserved pattern By watching, it is possible to easily predict whether or not the pending change effect will be executed.

In addition, compared to the rabbit stage, in the brave stage, the length of the period used for the normal action action is increased, and it is the same as the period used for the action action when the suspension change effect is executed in the rabbit stage. A period (2 seconds) is used to perform normal action motions. By configuring in this way, it is possible for a player who has been playing a game in the rabbit stage to play while expecting that many pending change effects will be executed by switching to the hero stage. can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1017, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-fourth control example will be described. FIG. 1017 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 1017, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-fourth control example is different from the thirty-second control example in that an asynchronous flag 223aa is provided. They are different and otherwise identical. Identical contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The asynchronous flag 223aa is a flag for indicating that there is a special figure 1 reserved design in which the action operation display is not synchronized among the special figure 1 reserved designs displayed on the display surface of the third design display device 81. And, it is set to ON when the special figure 1 reserved design that executes the action operation display without synchronizing with other special figure 1 reserved designs is displayed (see S5304 in FIG. 1019). Then, when the synchronization condition for synchronizing the action operation display of the special figure 1 reserved design is established, the setting status of the asynchronous flag 223aa is referred to (see S5402 and S5407 in FIG. 1021), and if it is set to ON When it is determined, synchronization processing for synchronizing the action motion display is executed, and then the setting is turned off (see S5406 in FIG. 1021).

In this 34th control example, various effects can be executed based on the action operation status of the special figure 1 reserved pattern and the execution timing of the stage change effect. When the stage change performance is executed, the performance mode of the pending change performance is set so that the pending change performance that is more advantageous to the player than the performance result of the pending change performance being executed is executed. The rewriting process is configured to be executable. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a novel game feature of paying attention to the timing at which the stage change effect is executed.

In addition, in order to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early, the stage change effect, which was only for the purpose of switching the effect mode of the decorative effect (background display, etc.), Since it is possible to add the purpose of changing the effect result of the effect (suspended change effect) for suggesting the game result in advance, the effect of the effect can be further enhanced.

<Regarding control processing in the thirty-fourth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1018 to 1025, among the various control processes executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-fourth control example, the content of the control process different from that of the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-second control example described above. explain about In the pachinko machine 10 of the 34th control example, the acquisition number (special figure 1 reservation number) of the execution right (special figure 1 reservation) of the first special symbol lottery is set for the pachinko machine 10 of the 32nd control example described above It is greatly different in that it is configured to display the special figure 1 reserved pattern for showing on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, and the control processing for determining the effect mode regarding this special figure 1 reserved pattern The difference is that they are added. Therefore, in the thirty-fourth control example, part of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is different from that in the thirty-second control example described above, and other processing contents are the same. The description of the same processing contents is omitted.

First, the contents of the command determination process 3 (S3173) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1018 is a flow chart showing the contents of the command determination process 3 (S3173). As shown in FIG. 1018, the command determination process 3 (S3173) replaces the command determination process (S3113) of the thirty-second control example described above with the winning command process 3 (S3271) when the winning information command is received. They are different in terms of execution and are otherwise identical. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.

Next, the details of the winning command process 3 (S3271) executed in the command determination process 3 (S3173) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1019 is a flow chart showing the details of the winning command process 3 (S3271). This winning command process 3 (S3271) is a process executed based on the reception of the winning information command from the main control device 110, and is based on the information included in the received winning information command. A process for determining the display mode of is executed.

When the winning command process 3 (S3271) is executed, first, the winning information based on the received winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area (S5301). ). If it is determined that there is a pending change notice (S5302: Yes), the effect mode of the pending change notice is determined as the effect mode of the special figure 1 pending pattern corresponding to the winning information command received this time (S5303), and during asynchronous The flag 223aa is set to ON (S5304), the pending action data table 222aa is referred to, the start of the pending action operation is set (S5305), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5302 that there is no pending change notice (S5302: No), the process of S5303 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5304.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1020, the processing contents of the variable effect setting process 3 (S4374) will be described. FIG. 1020 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the variable effect setting process 3 (S4374). This variable effect setting process 3 (S4374) is different from the variable effect setting process (S4304) of the 32nd control example described above. They are different in that respect. Other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

When the variable effect setting process 3 (S4374) is executed, the same processes of S4401 to S4410 as the variable effect setting process (S4304) of the 32nd control example described above are executed. After completing the processing of S4408, the processing of S4405 is not performed, and the pending mode determination processing 3 is executed (S4471), and then the processing of S4405 is performed.

In the reservation mode determination process 3 (S4471) executed by the process of S4471, based on the action operation contents of the special figure 1 reserved design being executed at the timing when the special design variation is started, the special design after the start of the special design variation A process for setting an action operation of one reserved symbol is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 1021, the processing contents of the holding mode determination processing 3 (S4471) will be described. FIG. 1021 is a flow chart showing the contents of the hold mode determination process 3 (S4471). When the hold state determination process 3 (S4471) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the change notice of the hold is currently being made (S5401). First, it is determined whether the asynchronous flag 223aa is set to ON (S5402).

In the processing of S5402, when it is determined that the asynchronous flag 223aa is set to ON (S5402: Yes), the promotion lottery of the performance mode of the hold change notice is executed (S5403), and a new hold based on the promotion lottery is executed. The effect mode of change notice is determined (S5404), synchronous processing is executed for each reserved design to start the reserved design action from the initial position (S5405), and the asynchronous flag 223aa is set to off (S5406). ), the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5401, if it is determined that the hold change notice is not in progress (S5401: No), it is determined whether the asynchronous flag 223aa is set to ON (S5407), and it is determined that it is set to ON. If so (S5407: Yes), the process proceeds to S5405. If it is determined in the process of S5402 that the asynchronous flag 223aa is not set to ON (S5402: No), or if it is determined that the asynchronous flag 223aa is not set to ON in the process of S5407 (S5407 : No), since there is no need to correct (synchronize) the action operation display of the already displayed special figure 1 reserved symbol at the start timing of the special symbol variation, the process ends as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1022, the processing contents of the rendering update processing 3 (S3172) will be described. FIG. 1022 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of effect update processing 3 (S3172). This effect update process 3 (S3172) is different from the effect update process (S3112) of the above-described 32nd control example, when it is determined that the special figure 1 reserved symbol is displayed, and when the special symbol fluctuation The difference is that dedicated processing is executed when it is determined that the stage transition condition is met during execution. Other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

When the effect update process 3 (S3172) is executed, first, the same processes of S4601 to S4608 as the effect update process (S3112) of the thirty-second control example described above are executed. Then, in the processing of S4606, if it is determined that the value of the SW valid time counter 223q is not 1 or more (S4606: No), or if the processing of S4608 is completed, the reserved display (display of the special figure 1 reserved design ) is determined (S4671), and if it is determined that there is a pending display (display of special figure 1 pending pattern) (S4671: Yes), the pending effect update process is executed (S4672), to the process of S4673 Transition.

On the other hand, in the process of S4671, if it is determined that there is no reserved display (display of special figure 1 reserved design) (S4671: No), then it is determined whether the condition for transitioning to the stage during fluctuation is satisfied (S4673), If it is determined that this is established (S4673: Yes), the changing stage transition processing is executed (S4674), and thereafter, the processing of S4609, which is the same as the effect update processing (S3112) of the 32nd control example described above, is executed, End this process. Also, in the process of S4673, if it is determined that the changing stage transition condition is not satisfied (S4673: No), the process of S4674 is skipped, the process proceeds to S4609, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1023, the content of the pending effect update process (S4672) executed in the effect update process 3 (see S3172 in FIG. 1022) will be described. FIG. 1023 is a flow chart showing the contents of the pending effect update process (S4672). In this pending effect update process (S4672), for each special figure 1 reserved design displayed on the display surface of the third design display device 81, the display content determined when displaying the special figure 1 reserved design A process for determining a display mode based on is executed.

When the pending effect update process (S4672) is executed, first, it is determined whether there is a special figure 1 reserved design that is the start timing of the change effect (S5501), and the special figure 1 reserved design that is the start timing of the change effect is If it is determined that there is (S5501: Yes), the reserved action data table 222aa is referred to for the special figure 1 reserved pattern to be changed, and the production mode corresponding to the content of change is determined (S5502), S5503 to process. In the processing of S5501, when it is determined that there is no special figure 1 reserved design that is the start timing of the change effect (S5501: No), the processing of S5502 is skipped and the processing of S5503 is performed.

Next, in the process of S5503, it is determined whether the asynchronous flag 223aa is on (S5503), and if it is determined that the asynchronous flag 223aa is on (S5503: Yes), asynchronous special figure 1 pending For the symbol, the pending action data table 222aa is referred to determine the presentation mode (S5504), and the process proceeds to S5505. If it is determined in the process of S5503 that the asynchronous flag 223aa is not ON (S5503: No), the process of S5504 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5505.

In the process of S5505, other special figure 1 reserved design, that is, the effect mode is determined with reference to the reserved action data table 222aa for the synchronized special figure 1 reserved design in which the normal action operation is executed (S5505 ), the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1024, the contents of the changing stage transition process (S4674) executed in the effect update process 3 (see S3172 in FIG. 1022) will be described. FIG. 1024 is a flow chart showing the contents of the changing stage transition process (S4674). In this variable stage transition process (S4674), a process for determining the display mode of the special figure 1 reserved symbol is performed when the stage change effect is performed while the special symbol variation is being performed. .

When the changing stage transition process (S4674) is executed, first, it is determined whether the asynchronous flag 223aa is set to ON (S5601), and if it is determined to be set to ON (S5601: Yes) , Specify whether the type of special figure 1 reserved design during asynchronization is usually reserved, or whether it is change target reserved (S5602). Then, it is determined whether the asynchronous special figure 1 reserved design is subject to change (S5603), and if it is determined that it is subject to change (S5603: Yes), special mode determination processing is executed (S5604), and this End the process.

In the process of S5603, if it is determined that the asynchronous special figure 1 reserved symbol is not a change target (S5603: No), the production mode for performing the stage transition is determined (S5605), and the asynchronous flag 223aa is turned off. (S5606), and the process ends. If it is determined in the process of S5601 that the asynchronous flag 223aa is not set to ON (S5601: No), this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 1025, processing contents of the special mode determination processing (S5604) executed in the changing stage transition processing (see S4674 in FIG. 1024) in the effect update processing 3 (see S3172 in FIG. 1022) give an explanation. FIG. 1025 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the special mode determination processing (S5604). In this special mode determination process (S5604), while the special figure 1 reserved pattern for which the pending change notice is determined is performing an action operation in an asynchronous state, the special figure 1 reserved pattern in the case where the stage change effect is executed A process for determining an effect mode is executed.

When the special mode determination process (S5604) is executed, first, the operation status of the target special figure 1 reserved design (change target reservation, special figure 1 reserved design in which the action operation is asynchronous) is specified ( S5701), it is determined whether the action operation status is the initial position (S5702), and if it is determined that it is the initial position (S5702: Yes), with respect to other reserved symbols, at a timing shifted by 0.5 seconds The normal action operation is set (S5703), the asynchronous flag 223aa is set to off (S5708), and the process ends.

In the processing of S5702, if it is determined that it is not the initial position (S5702: No), then the state before the change effect, that is, the display of the special figure 1 pending design set when the pending change notice is determined As content, it is determined whether the action display scenario based on the action type at the time of change has not been determined (S5704). The corresponding display mode is displayed, and then the special effect mode for executing the change effect in the remaining period of the action operation period is determined (S5705), and the process proceeds to S5708.

Also, in the process of S5704, if it is determined that it is not before the change effect (S5704: No), it is determined whether the change effect is in progress, that is, whether the action display scenario based on the action type at the time of change is determined. Then (S5706), if it is determined that the change effect is being performed (S5706: Yes), after displaying the blindfold mode, the effect is to display the display mode corresponding to the stage after the change, which is the number of stages after the change. The mode is determined (S5707), and the process proceeds to S5708. In the processing of S5708, the asynchronous flag 223aa is set to OFF, and this processing ends.

As described above, in the thirty-fourth control example, while the special figure 1 pending symbol for which the pending change notice is determined is performing an action action in an asynchronous state, when the stage change effect is executed, the pending A different presentation mode can be determined as a special mode according to the action operation situation of the special figure 1 reserved pattern for which the change notice has been determined. Specifically, when the special figure 1 reserved pattern that is the target of the pending change notice is in an asynchronous state and is performing normal action, after the stage change, the timing of intentionally shifting the action configured to run in By configuring in this way, even after the stage change, it is possible to allow the player to easily grasp the special figure 1 reserved pattern that is the target of the reserved change notice.

In addition, it is configured so that the player can easily grasp the special figure 1 reserved pattern that is the target of the reserved change notice even after the stage change only by changing the execution timing of the action operation at the normal time. Therefore, when the stage is changed while the special figure 1 reserved pattern, which is the target of the pending change notice, is displayed, there is no need to use the display data for executing the special action operation, and the special figure 1 reserved pattern The data capacity for displaying can be reduced.

Furthermore, even at normal times, until the synchronization process is executed, the action operation of each special figure 1 reserved pattern is configured to be shifted depending on the timing of receiving the winning information command. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether the special figure 1 reserved pattern which is absent is displayed or the special figure 1 reserved pattern which is the target of the reservation change notice is displayed.

In addition, when the stage change production is executed before the special figure 1 reserved design subject to the reservation change notice executes the change production, the display mode of the special figure 1 reserved design after the stage change Since it is configured to execute a change performance that can be displayed in the remaining time, even if the stage change performance is executed, the player grasps the contents of the change performance of the special figure 1 reserved pattern. can be made easier. In addition, in this 34th control example, as a condition for synchronizing the action of each special figure 1 reserved design, the start of a new special figure fluctuation and the start of stage change production were provided, but not limited to this, A condition may be provided that is established when the processing after power-on of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. For example, after the power supply is interrupted while a plurality of special figure 1 reserved symbols are displayed, a command regarding winning information is transmitted in the start-up process executed when the power supply is restored. In other words, regardless of the timing of starting winning, it is configured to transmit a command related to winning information related to a plurality of special figure 1 reservations at the timing when the start-up process is executed. By configuring in this way, the audio lamp control device 113 side receives the winning information on a plurality of special figures 1 reservation at the same timing, so that the action operation of each special figure 1 reservation pattern can be synchronized. . In addition, if the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to include information indicating execution of the pending change effect in the command related to the winning information output in the start-up process of the main controller 110, special In the pending symbol display process of FIG. 1, the effect mode of the pending change effect may be determined again. By configuring in this way, the effect information related to the display mode (production mode) of the special figure 1 reserved design is cleared by temporarily cutting off the power supply while the special figure 1 reserved design is displayed. Even if it is done, it is possible to determine the performance mode of the pending change performance again. In addition, in this 34th control example, the number of stages in which the special figure 1 reserved design is variable is the same according to the stage type, but the number of stages in which the special figure 1 reserved design can be varied is made different according to the stage type can be configured to In this case, when the stage type is changed, it is preferable to display the special figure 1 reserved pattern corresponding to the stage type after the change in the number of stages in which the degree of expectation is relatively higher than before the change. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress that the value of the display mode of the special figure 1 reserved design is lowered due to the switching of the stage type. Furthermore, when the stage type is switched while the special figure 1 reserved pattern in which the pending change effect is executed is displayed, after the stage type is switched, the special figure 1 reserved pattern is temporarily displayed in the initial state. After that, it is preferable to execute the pending change effect after the stage type is switched.

<Thirty-fifth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1026 to 1064. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 according to the thirty-fifth control example is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirty-second control example described above, and is equipped with a decorative movable accessory that is used as part of the variable performance that is executed during the variable display of the special symbols. , is different in that it adds a new variable production using the decorative movable accessory.

Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine 10 that executes an effect using a decorative movable accessory as part of a variable effect that is executed during variable display of special symbols. In such a pachinko machine 10, when the movable accessory for decoration moves at a predetermined timing of the variable performance, it indicates that the expectation of winning the jackpot is relatively high, and when the movable accessory for decoration does not move. By executing an effect indicating that the degree of expectation for winning a big hit is relatively low, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the lottery result of the special symbols.

However, in such a pachinko machine 10, if an effect using a movable decorative accessory is set in a state in which the movable decorative accessory cannot be moved normally due to defects such as deterioration over time or failure of the electrical system, the effect will be lost. There is a risk that the decorative movable accessory does not perform the action specified in the action scenario at a predetermined timing, and incorrect game information is provided to the player.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-fifth control example, when performing an effect using the movable decorative accessory, it is determined whether the movable decorative accessory can execute the action specified in the action scenario. , when it is determined that it cannot be executed, it is configured so that it can be switched to an alternative performance by a liquid crystal display that does not use the decorative movable accessory. By configuring in this way, appropriate game information can be provided to the player.

Further, conventionally, a plurality (eg, three) of symbol rows formed by a plurality of special symbols (eg, special symbols with numbers 1 to 9) are used in the display area of the third symbol display device 81. In some cases, symbol variation display is executed, and the success/failure determination result is notified by a combination of special symbols stopped and displayed on the activated line set in the display area. In such a pachinko machine 10, the player is interested in the special symbols stopped and displayed on the activated line set in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and plays the game. However, in the conventional pachinko machine 10, at the time when the special symbols of the two symbol rows are stopped and displayed on the activated line, it must be in a mode (so-called ready-to-win mode) showing a part of the specific combination indicating the winning of the jackpot. There is a problem that the player loses interest in the middle of the symbol variation display because the player can predict that the big winning is not won before the special symbols of the remaining symbol rows are stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, in the thirty-fifth control example, the board surface decoration applied to the game board surface, the decorative movable accessory, and some of the special symbols displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 A valid line is formed, and it is configured so as to be able to notify the result of the determination of success or failure.

Specifically, the special symbols in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-fifth control example include numerical symbols with numbers "1" to "8" and letters related to the theme of the pachinko machine 10. 1040 (see FIG. 1040), and although the details will be described later, this logo character pattern is located on the effective line. and when the "sea" pattern D4, the "thing" pattern D7, and the "word" pattern D10 are stopped and displayed in order from the left on the active line (i.e., When a character string of "sea story" is formed on the activated line), it is configured to indicate that a special pattern jackpot is won.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1026, a logo lamp Rg1 incorporating an LED is installed at the upper central portion of the variable display device unit 80 of the game board when viewed from the front. The surface of this logo lamp Rg1 is decorated with a character design of "sea".

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 is equipped with a logo accessory 902 as a movable accessory for decoration. It is housed on the rear side of the display device unit 80 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1032(a)). This logo accessory 902 is composed of a bar accessory 902a that drives up and down, and a rotating body accessory 902b on which a character design of "thing" is written (see FIG. 1032(a)). Details will be described later, but when this logo accessory 902 is used as part of the variable effect, the bar accessory 902a descends to the lower limit (see FIG. 1032(b)), and the third symbol display device 81 The rotator accessory 902b moves left and right while rotating based on the action scenario on the front side in the front view, and stops at the position specified in the action scenario.

In the thirty-fifth control example, as shown in FIG. 1041(a), after the third symbol display device 81 is temporarily stopped by a combination indicating that the special symbol is out of line L1, the logo accessory 902 is lowered to the lower limit. (see FIG. 1041(b)), and the rotating body accessory 902b stops at the position indicated by the up arrow 802, so that the logo lamp Rg1 is decorated with the “sea” pattern and the rotating body accessory 902b is decorated. The character string "Sea Story", which is a mode for notifying the winning of the jackpot, is vertically formed by the "thing" design and the "word" design of the middle and lower design Z2c (see FIG. 1042(a)).

By configuring in this way, even if the special pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 does not become the ready-to-win mode, it is expected that an effective line with the logo decoration Rg1 will be formed. is possible, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest before the special symbols of the remaining symbol rows are stopped and displayed.

The pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-fifth control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-second control example described above in that it is equipped with a decorative movable accessory, the ROM 222 in the sound lamp control device 113 and the The points are that the configuration of the RAM 223 is partially changed, and that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the 32 control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the 32nd control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-fifth control example>
First, the structure of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1026 to 1031. FIG. FIG. 1026 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-fifth control example, and FIG. 1028 to 1031 are schematic diagrams schematically showing the structure of the V winning device 650 provided on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-fifth control example.

As shown in FIG. 1026, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 which is cut into a substantially square shape in a front view. It is constructed by assembling a port 63, a first ball entry port 64, a second ball entry port 640, a first variable winning device 65, a V winning device 650, a normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, a variable display device unit 80, and the like. , and its peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first ball opening 64, the second ball opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the V winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 1026, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

In front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member connecting the rails (a prize winning opening is provided and a shot is played). area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 1043) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 1026) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 1026) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37a and 37b having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged in the upper right part of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right part in FIG. 1026). The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 1043), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the thirty-fifth control example, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. there is Specifically, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37a operates, while when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, The first symbol display device 37b is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving mode or the normal mode by the lighting state, indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable display mode by the lighting state, or stop the display. The pattern is a pattern corresponding to the time-saving jackpot (a jackpot in which the time-saving state is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends) or a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot (a jackpot in which the normal state is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends) or a missing pattern The number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the number of rounds during the big hit and the error are displayed by the 7-segment display device. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and depending on the combination of the emission colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

Incidentally, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is conducted when a prize is won in the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. As the types of jackpots determined here, the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 9 rounds, and after the jackpot ends, the time saving state is given 9R time saving jackpot (9R time saving jackpot), and the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 6 rounds and after the jackpot ends. 6R time-saving jackpot (6R time-saving jackpot) that gives a time-saving state, 3R time-saving jackpot (3R time-saving jackpot) that gives a time-saving state after the jackpot ends in 3 rounds of the jackpot game, and the number of rounds of the jackpot game There is a 6R normal jackpot (6R no time saving jackpot) that does not give a time saving state after the 6R jackpot ends.

In addition, in some cases where it is determined that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is not the above-mentioned jackpot but a loss, the player is given less benefits than the above-mentioned jackpot (for example, the V winning device 650 is opened only for one round). Privilege to let) A small hit is prepared. In the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, not only is it indicated whether the lottery result is a big win (whether it is a small win or not) as a stop symbol after the end of the variable display, but also if it is a big win. A pattern corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed.

Here, the “9R time-saving jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a time-saving state after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 9 rounds, and the “6R time-saving jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 6 rounds. It is a jackpot that shifts to a time-saving state after that, and the “3R time-saving jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a time-saving state after a jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 3 rounds. In addition, the “6R time-saving no jackpot” is a jackpot in which the number of maximum rounds does not shift to the time-saving state after the jackpot of 6 rounds, but shifts to the normal state.

In addition, in the 35th control example, the privilege given to the player according to the number of rounds of the jackpot game (the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game) and the content of the game state set after the jackpot game ends Although the size is defined, it is not limited to this, and the size of the benefits given to the player may be defined using conditions other than the above conditions, and different benefits may be defined without defining the size of the benefits. It is also possible to simply change the content of the jackpot game so as to be granted.

In addition, the “time-saving state” is a game in which the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 as an added value (privilege) given to the player after the big win, although the probability of the big win is the same as in the normal state. state. In order to make it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, in the thirty-fifth control example, the fluctuation time of the second symbol is set shorter than in the normal state, and the lottery result of the second symbol is a win. The operation mode of the electric accessory 640a to be operated in the case is set so that the period during which the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 is longer than in the normal state. It should be noted that other configurations may be used to set the game state in which the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, only a part of the setting contents described above may be used, or the contents described above may be used. Besides, the winning probability of the second symbol may be set higher than that in the normal state.

In addition, in the 35th control example, a specific area is provided in the V winning device 650 that is opened during the small winning game, and the ball passes through the specific area during the small winning game (special discharge channel which is the specific area The V switch 650e3 provided in the 650e2 detects the ball), so that a big hit (so-called 2 types of hits) is achieved.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 from which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by the winning of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), and while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, A third symbol display device 81 configured by a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that performs variable display of the third symbol, and the passage of the ball to the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 are used as triggers. A second pattern display device (not shown) composed of LEDs for variably displaying two patterns is provided. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch large-sized liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 1043) so that, for example, left, middle, and right three patterns are displayed. One symbol row is displayed (see FIG. 1040). Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are vertically scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the thirty-fifth control example, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 1043) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the 1-symbol display devices 37a and 37b.

That is, the third pattern is variably displayed ( The third pattern is displayed as a special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the timing when the first symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing the lottery result of the special symbol on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b. The symbols are stopped and displayed in a display mode according to the lottery result of the symbols.

That is, the determination is performed by the determination means (the lottery for the special symbol is executed) based on the establishment of the determination condition (the winning of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640), and the predetermined After the identification information (special pattern) is dynamically displayed (variable display) until the dynamic display period elapses, the display mode (combination of patterns) showing the discrimination result (lottery result of the special pattern) of the discrimination means, Identification information (third symbol) is stopped and displayed. As a result, the player can grasp the lottery result of the special symbol by grasping the third design displayed on the third design display device 81 . Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In addition, the third symbol stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be a display mode according to the lottery result of the special symbol, and a part of the lottery result of the special symbol It may be a display mode corresponding to the success/failure determination result only), or it may be a display mode corresponding to the details of the special symbol lottery result (for example, the type of the winning jackpot). In addition, when there are four types of lottery results (for example, big hits, small hits, misses, and time saving) as the lottery results of special symbols, the above-mentioned three types of lottery results of special symbols are used as the display mode of the third symbol. It is also possible to use a display mode that indicates one of two specific types of lottery results (for example, a big win or a small win). In addition, in the case of duplicate winning determination (for example, jackpot determination, time saving determination), a display mode for indicating duplicate winning may be used, or based on duplicate winning If the content of the game to be executed based on the winning of the jackpot is the same as the content of the game to be executed based only on winning the jackpot, the same display mode may be used.

Further, instead of the display device used in the thirty-fifth control example, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third pattern display device 81, or the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with a plurality of display devices. .

In this 35th control example, when winning the second symbol (normal symbol) during the time-saving state, the electric accessory 640a is higher than when winning the second symbol (normal symbol) during the normal state. The operation period (the period during which the electric accessory 640a is protruded to make it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640) is configured to be longer. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the time saving state.

In addition, the configuration for making it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the time-saving state is not limited to the above-described content. A configuration such as increasing the opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a may be used. In addition, when the time saving state is made to be a state where the ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 640 by changing the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is irrespective of the game state. It may be constant. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than during the normal time during the time saving, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the game state, and the electric role for one winning The opening time and number of openings of the object 640a may be fixed regardless of the game state.

Furthermore, when the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is varied according to the set game state, and the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a are varied, the variable display of the second symbol is started. The variable display time of the second symbol is determined according to the game state set at the time point, the variable display of the second symbol is stopped, and the timing at which the second symbol indicating the win is displayed (the timing of the display of the second symbol) It may be configured to determine the opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a according to the game state set in the winning game, that is, the timing of activating the electric accessory 640a. By configuring in this way, for example, when the second pattern that starts to change during the time saving state is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing the win during the normal state, the corresponding electric accessory 640a during the normal state It can be operated in an actuation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to more accurately associate the set game state with the operation pattern of the electric accessory to be executed.

The relationship between the game state, the variation time of the second symbol, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a may be specified other than the contents described above. When it is determined that the time saving state is set as the game state at either timing of the start timing, an operation pattern advantageous to the player as the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a (executed during the time saving state operation pattern) may be set.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 through which a ball can enter is provided. When a ball enters the first ball inlet 64, a first ball inlet switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball inlet switch is turned on. A big win lottery is performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 1043), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37a.

As shown in FIG. 1026, the first ball entrance 64 is played on the left side of the variable display unit 80 so that the ball flows down (so-called left-handed game). A nail is planted on the game board 13 so that the ball can enter the game more easily than in a game in which the ball flows down (so-called right-handed game). Therefore, when a game state (normal state) in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the second ball inlet 640 is set, a left-handed game is executed to allow the ball to enter the first ball inlet 64. be.

On the other hand, a second ball entrance 640 through which a ball can enter is provided on the right side of the first ball entrance 64 in front view. When the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, a second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second ball entrance switch is turned on. A lottery for a big win is performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 1043), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the first symbol display device 37b.

In addition, the first ball entry hole 64 and the second ball entry hole 640 are also one of winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In the thirty-fifth control example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 are set to be the same. However, the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 are different numbers, for example, the first The number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the ball entrance 64 may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 may be five.

In addition, in the thirty-fifth control example, switches (first ball entrance switch, second ball entrance switch) for detecting balls that will trigger a special symbol lottery (lottery opportunity for a big win) are provided in the ball entrance. , While it is configured to acquire a special symbol lottery opportunity and win a prize ball, other configurations may be used. When a switch (detection means) for detecting a ball passing through detects the passage of the ball, it may be configured to obtain a special symbol lottery opportunity. In this case, at least some of the balls that have passed through the area (gate) that can trigger the lottery of the special symbols can enter, and when the balls enter, a predetermined number (for example, 5) of prize balls will be paid out. It is good to provide an entrance. By configuring in this way, the number of acquisition times of the special symbol lottery opportunity and the number of winning ball acquisition times can be made different, so that various game characteristics can be provided.

The second ball entrance 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. This electric accessory 640a can be changed between a protruding state (allowed state) protruding from the game board 13 to the front side (the front side in the view point of FIG. 1026) and a retracted state (restricted state) to the game board 13 side. Normally (when the second symbol is not won), the electric accessory 640a is in a retracted state (restricted state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. It has become. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, that is, the second symbol When winning the lottery with two symbols, the electric accessary 640a is in a protruding state (allowed state), and the ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加

Here, the ball flow to the second ball entrance 640 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-fifth control example will be described. In the thirty-fifth control example, as shown in FIG. 1026, the variable display device unit 80 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area of the game board 13, and the game area is set to the left side of the variable display unit 80 (left-handed area). and the right side (right hitting area), and by adjusting the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 by the player, the destination of the shot ball can be divided into the right hitting area and the left hitting area. configured as possible. Hereinafter, a game in which the player operates the operation handle 51 to shoot a ball into the left-handed area of the game area is called a left-handed game, and a game in which the player shoots a ball into the right-handed area is called a right-handed game.

In the thirty-fifth control example, as shown in FIG. 1026, the second ball entrance 640, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640, and the lottery to determine whether or not to operate the electric accessory 640a. A normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 serving as a trigger is arranged in a right hitting area, and when a time saving state is set as a game state, a right hitting game is performed.

A nail is planted under the variable display device unit 80 so that a ball shot in a left-handed game does not enter the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加By configuring in this way, in the left-handed game, the ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 in order to vary the first special symbol, and in the right-handed game, the second special symbol is varied. Therefore, it is possible to perform a game in which the ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640, and it is possible to appropriately provide different game characteristics according to the game method.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-fifth control example, as shown in FIG. 1026, in the right-handed area, the upper surface of the V winning device 650 is inclined downward to the left (lower left when viewed from the front in FIG. 1026). is arranged, and each mechanism is arranged so that the ball flowing down the upper surface of the V winning device 650 passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 and flows down toward the electric accessory 640a.

When the electric accessory 640a is in the retracted state, the ball flows down toward the variable winning device 65 through the retracted electric accessory 640a. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 640a is positioned in the projecting state, the ball that reaches the electric accessory 640a flows down in the lower right direction (the lower right direction in the front view of FIG. 1026). Then, the ball that reaches the right end of the electric accessory 640a enters the second ball entrance 640, and when the electric accessory 640a changes to the retracted state before reaching the right end of the electric accessory 640a, the electric It is constructed such that the ball enters the general winning hole 63 arranged below the accessory 640a.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a transparent cover member 655 so as to cover the electric accessory 640a, the second ball entrance 640, and the general prize winning opening 63 described above. The surface of the cover member 655 is cut to diffusely reflect incident light. By providing this cover member 655, the inside of the cover member 655 is made visible to the player by various lights emitted from the light emitting means (LED etc.) provided in the pachinko machine 10 and the third pattern display device 81 during the game. can be made difficult. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the act of performing a right-handed game by planning the operation timing of the electric accessory 640a.

In addition, when a game is not being played (when the power of the gaming machine is turned off), the light incident on the cover member is suppressed, so that the inside of the cover member 655 can be easily visually recognized. Maintenance of the machine 10 can be easily performed. In the case where the cover member 655 is used to vary the visibility of the interior in this manner, the light emitting means can be shared by configuring the light emitting means for emitting light for decoration as described above. , and the number of parts constituting the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In addition, the inside of the cover member 655 may be made invisible for a predetermined period including the period during which the electric accessory 640a is operated. For example, when it is determined that the electric accessory 640a is operated (that is, controlling the light emitting means so that characters (e.g., "open") notifying that the electric accessory 640a operates on the surface of the cover member 655 (when winning a prize by lottery of normal symbols) are displayed; The displayed characters may be configured to make the inside of the cover member 655 difficult to see. As a result, it is possible to make the player understand that the electric accessory 640a is moving, and make it difficult for the player to comprehend the detailed operation timing.

Here, with reference to FIG. 1027, the configuration of the right-handed area of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. As shown in FIG. 1027, among the balls launched in the right-handed game, the balls that have passed through the through gate 67 flow down toward the area where the electric accessory 640a is arranged. Specifically, the electric accessory 640a has a length of 50 mm, and is composed of a plate-like member on the upper surface of which a ball can flow down, and is directed downward (lower right in front view of FIG. 1027). is arranged on the game board 13 so as to be downwardly inclined toward . After passing through the through gate 67, the ball flows down to a region a (see FIG. 1027) corresponding to a range of 20 mm from the left end of the electric accessory 640a.

The ball that has reached the area a passes through the electric accessory 640a and flows down toward the variable winning device 65 when the electric accessory 640a is in the retracted state. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 640a is positioned at the projecting position, the ball flows down with the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a facing the right end position. Then, when the electric accessory 640a is changed to the retracted state with the ball reaching the area b (the area corresponding to 20 mm to 40 mm from the left end of the electric accessory 640a), it is provided below the electric accessory 640a. It is configured such that the ball flows down toward the general winning hole 63 that is opened. Finally, when the ball reaches the area c (the area corresponding to 20 mm from the right end of the electric accessory 640a), the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. As shown in FIG.

In addition, in the 35th control example, the periods during which the electric accessory 640a continuously operates are different in the game state (probability state of normal symbols). state) is set and the electric accessory 640a operates, the electric accessory In the state where the 640a is changed to the standby state and the time-saving state is set, the electric accessory is held for a period of time sufficient for the ball flowing down on the electric accessory 640a to reach the area c (see FIG. 1027). 640a is configured to be positioned at the projecting position.

Specifically, the operation period of the electric accessory 640a (the period during which it is continuously positioned in the projecting state) is configured to be 2 seconds during the short working hours state and 0.2 seconds during the normal state. Then, the electric accessory 640a is designed so that the falling period for the ball to flow down the area (range from area a to area c) shown in FIG. 1027 is longer than 0.2 seconds and shorter than 2 seconds. (0.8 seconds in the 35th control example). By configuring in this way, even if a right-handed game is played in the normal state, winning the normal symbol, and the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a in operation, Since the operation of the electric accessory 640a ends before the ball flowing down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a reaches the second ball entrance 640, it is ensured that the lottery for the second special symbol is executed in the normal state. can be prevented.

In addition, during the time saving state, the electric accessory 640a is operated for a period longer than the period (0.4 seconds) in which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reaches the second ball entrance 640. , the ball flowing down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a in the guided state (protruding state) can easily reach the second ball entrance 640, and the lottery for the second special symbol can be easily executed.

Furthermore, during the time saving state, for example, the ball that reaches the electric accessory 640a 1.5 seconds after the operation of the electric accessory 640a flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a, and at the timing when it reaches the area b The operation of the accessory 640a is completed (two seconds have passed since the electric accessory 640a was activated). As shown in FIG. 1027, such balls enter the general prize winning slot 63 arranged below the electric accessory 640a, and 10 balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when a right-handed game is played in the time saving state, different ball entrances (second ball entrance 640 Alternatively, by configuring it so that the ball can be guided to the general winning hole 63), the player can be made to continuously play the right-handed game during the time saving state.

As described above, the configuration is such that the number of prize balls corresponding to entering the general winning hole 63 is 10, and the number of prize balls corresponding to entering the second ball inlet 640 is 5. Therefore, if the lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be executed, it is better for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 than for the ball to enter the general winning opening 63. Advantageous benefits (i.e. special figure 2 lottery and 5 prize balls) can be given, and the second special symbol (special figure 2) lottery cannot be executed (during special symbol fluctuation) If there is, it is configured so that the ball entering the general winning hole 63 rather than the second ball entering hole 640 can give the player a more advantageous privilege (that is, 10 prize balls).

As a result, depending on the game situation (whether or not there is a change in special symbols), the player can change the ball entrance that the player wants to enter (the ball entrance where many benefits can be obtained), which saves time. The player can enjoy the right-handed game during the state. In addition, in order to enter the ball into both the second ball entry hole 640 and the general winning hole 63 during one motion of the electric accessory 640a, it is necessary to continuously execute the right-handed game. Therefore, it is possible to increase the operation of the game.

In the thirty-fifth control example, the operation period of the electric accessory 640a during the time saving state is sufficiently longer than the period (0.8 seconds) during which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reaches the second ball entrance 640. is set to a long period (2 seconds), and the ball is surely entered into the second ball entrance 640 when the electric accessory 640a is operated. The operation period of the electric accessory 640a inside is slightly longer than the period (0.8 seconds) during which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reaches the second ball entrance 640 (for example, 0.8 seconds). 9 seconds). By configuring in this way, after the ball is passed through the through gate 67 in the time saving state, the act of stopping the ball from being launched and starting to launch the ball again after confirming that the electric accessory 640a has been operated ( Since it is possible to suppress so-called stop hitting), it is possible to improve the operation of the game by continuing the right hitting game during the time saving state.

Returning to FIG. 1026, the description continues. As described above with reference to FIG. 1027, the ball launched by the right-handed game first reaches the V winning device 650. Next, the configuration of the V winning device 650 will be described. The V winning device 650 is configured to be variable between an open state in which a ball can win a prize and a closed state in which it is difficult to win a prize. The opening/closing door 650f1 of the device 650 is operated to change to an open state in which a ball can win in the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a.

In addition, in some of the "big wins" of the special symbols, the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 may be configured to operate in the same manner as in the case of winning the "minor wins" described above. As a result, when the open/close door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 operates, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether the special symbol "big win" or "small win" is won.

Here, the configuration of the V winning device 650 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 1027 to 1031. FIG. First, as shown in FIG. 1027, when the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is in a closed state that closes the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a, the upper surface of the opening/closing door 650f1 in the closed state is sphered. can flow down, and the ball that reaches the V winning device 650 while the V winning device 650 is closed flows down toward the lower left side (lower left side in front view of FIG. 1027) on the open/close door 650f1. , to the through gate 67 . On the other hand, when the V winning device 650 is open (that is, during the small winning game), the ball enters the V winning device 650 .

In the thirty-fifth control example, the opening period of the V winning device 650 during the small winning game is configured to be 0.1 seconds×12 times, and at the timing when the V winning device 650 opens, it flows down on the open/close door 650f1. The ball that is doing wins a prize to the V winning device 650. - 特許庁Balls that have won a prize in the V winning device 650 are arranged to flow down toward the detection port 650a1 (see FIG. 1030(a)) while flowing down on the first regulating member 651 or the second regulating member 652. there is With this configuration, even if the ball flowing down on the opening/closing door 650f1 enters the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a of the V winning device 650 from any position on the opening/closing door 650f1, the ball can be smoothly released. can flow down.

In the thirty-fifth control example, the period during which the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is continuously opened is set to 0.1 seconds, but during the opening period of the opening/closing door 650f1, Any other period may be set as long as it is a period during which the ball can enter the V winning device 650 . Further, in the thirty-fifth control example, the number of times the open/close door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is opened in one small winning game is set to 12 times, but other times may be set.

In the 35th control example, the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is opened once in the small winning game and then opened next time (interval period between opening), the fifth time and the tenth time during the small winning game Five seconds are set after the opening operation, and 0.5 seconds are set at other timings. This is for making it easier for the V winning device 650 to win the ball during the period in which the small winning game is being played. Specifically, when it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has not detected the ball at the time when the fifth opening operation is completed during the small winning game, during the interval period between opening after the fifth opening operation is completed In addition, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a game guide display for emphasizing and prompting the player to play the game to the right.

Then, even when a right-handed game is started by grasping the game guide display displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the interval period between openings is set so that the ball can enter the V winning device 650 is set longer than usual. Also, when it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has not detected the ball when the tenth opening operation during the small winning game is completed, the same control processing is executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for a player who does not play an appropriate game during a small winning game (a player who does not play a right-handed game) to perform an appropriate game. In this way, during the specific game (small winning game) in which the opening action is executed multiple times, when it is determined that the interval period between opening is set longer than the other and it is determined that the appropriate game is not performed By making it possible to display a game guidance display for prompting proper game contents, a player who is playing a wrong game can be made to play the game without anxiety.

In the thirty-fifth control example, after the fifth and tenth opening operations during the small winning game, a longer special opening interval period than the others is set. In this way, by providing a plurality of timings for displaying the game guidance display to the player during one small winning game, it is possible to make the player more likely to play an appropriate game. If the game guide display is displayed multiple times, at least the second and subsequent notification timings should be set to timings that the player who is playing the game normally cannot reach. That is, as in the 32nd control example described above, in the 35th control example, by continuing to play the right-handed game during the small winning game, at least 1 Since it is configured so that 1 balls can be entered, if a normal game (continuous right-handed game) is performed, the number of prizes that will be the termination condition of the small winning game during the 10th opening operation (10 pieces) is reached, and the small winning game is ended.

That is, the inter-opening interval period executed after the 10th opening operation during the small winning game is a timing that cannot be reached when a normal game (continuous right-handed game) is performed. Therefore, by setting the timing for displaying the game guidance display using this timing, the interval period between special openings that is unnecessarily long for the player who is playing a normal game (continuously playing a right-handed game) It is no longer executed, and the small winning game can be smoothly executed.

It should be noted that, as in the 35th control example, when the first special opening interval period is set to the timing (after the fifth opening operation ends) reached even if a normal game (continued right-handed game) is performed is the timing at which the first inter-special opening interval period starts (fifth opening operation end timing), or the timing at which a predetermined period has elapsed since the first inter-special opening interval period started (fifth opening It is determined whether the V switch 650e3 detects the ball at the timing when the period required for the ball entered during the operation to be discharged from the V prize winning device 650 has passed, and the V switch 650e3 detects the ball. If it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has not detected a ball, a game guide is displayed as described above. should be configured to display As a result, the interval period between special openings set during the small winning game can be effectively used according to the game contents.

Furthermore, during the second special opening interval period, it is preferable to display the game guidance display even when the V switch 650e3 has already detected the ball. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the small winning game ends without causing the predetermined number (10) of balls to enter the V winning device 650 during the small winning game.

Next, the structure of the V winning device 650 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 1028 is an exploded perspective view of this V winning device 650. FIG. The V winning device 650, as shown in FIG. A base member 650c for screwing to the game board 13, and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 650c for lighting the front side of the pachinko machine 10 from the back side of the base member 650c. The arranged LED board 650d, the back cover body 650e sandwiching the LED board 650d with the base member 650c, and the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a formed in the opening forming member 650b. An opening/closing unit 650f having an opening/closing door 650f1, a flow path cover body 650g combined with the back side of the back cover body 650e to form a flow path, and a flow path formed by the back cover body 650e and the flow path cover body 650g. A switching member 650h that protrudes into the path and switches the flow path of the game ball, a link member 650i that is engaged with the switching member 650h, a rear surface cover body 650j that is arranged on the rear side of the flow path cover body 650g, and its rear surface. A channel solenoid 650k fixed to the back side of the cover body 650j to operate the link member 650i, and a fixing cover body 650m for covering the channel solenoid 650k from the back side and fixing it to the back cover body 650j with screws. It consists of

FIG. 1029 is a sectional view of the V winning device 650. FIG. FIG. 1029(c) is a top view of the V winning device 650, and FIG. 1029(b) is a cross-sectional view of the V winning device 650 taken along the line Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 1029(b), the V winning device 650 is formed with a specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a, which is an opening into which a game ball can enter. The specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a has a substantially rectangular opening above the pachinko machine 10, and the game balls passing through the opening are guided leftward in FIG. 1029(b). A bottom surface that is inclined downward to the left is formed. A detection port 650a1 composed of a magnetic sensor (ball detection switch) 650c1 for detecting the winning of a game ball is arranged at the left end of the bottom surface. A game ball that has passed through the detection port 650a1 is guided to a sorting channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 650e.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 1029(b), the opening of the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is opened so that the game ball can be entered by an opening/closing door 650f1 configured with a shutter mechanism that can appear from the game board 13 side. It can be changed between a state and a closed state in which it is impossible to enter the ball (difficult to enter the ball). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered with the opening/closing door 650f1, and the game ball can roll on the upper portion of the opening/closing door. In the open state, the opening/closing door 650f1 is retracted inside the base member 650c (inside the game board 13) to be retracted from the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a.

By constructing in this way, the right-handed game can be played continuously during the time-saving game, during the big win game, and during the small win game, thereby reducing the trouble of changing the game method according to the game state. be able to. Therefore, the game can be played more easily.

In addition, in the open state of the opening/closing door 650f1, the plane perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball flows down can be configured as the opening of the V winning device 650, so that the game ball can efficiently enter the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. can be made Therefore, the time required for the small winning game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

FIG. 1029(a) is a cross-sectional view along La-La shown in FIG. 1029(b). As shown in FIG. 1029(a), the magnetic sensor 650c1 having the detection port 650a1 is fixed to the base member 650c so that the detection port 650a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 650e.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1030, a description will be given of a configuration for distributing game balls guided to distribution channels of the back cover body 650e to a normal discharge channel 650e1 and a special discharge channel 650e2, which will be described later.

FIG. 1030(a) is a rear view of the back cover body 650e showing a state in which the switching member 650h is actuated so that game balls are distributed to the special discharge channel 650e2. As shown in FIG. 1030(a), the switching member 650h has a locking hole 650h1 into which the projection of the link member 650i is inserted and a guiding piece 650h2 for guiding the game ball. is rotatably supported from the rear side. Here, the channel cover 650g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 650h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 650h2 is rotated into the distribution channel from the rear side of the channel cover 650g. It is configured so that it can be arranged as much as possible.

As shown in FIG. 1030(a), the game ball guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 650a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 650h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge channel 650e2. be. A game ball that has passed through the special discharge channel 650e2 is detected by a V switch 650e3 that is configured by a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a game ball provided in the special discharge channel 650e2, and is discharged out of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. be done.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-fifth control example, the game ball passes through the V switch 650e3 described above during the small winning game, so that the big winning game is set after the small winning game. That is, the V switch 650e3 is configured as a trigger for starting a big winning game. In addition, the switching member 650h is a flow path (special discharge flow path 650e2) in which the ball that has won the V winning device 650 during the small win can pass through the V switch 650e3, or a flow path that cannot (difficultly) pass through the V switch 650e3. By turning on the flow path solenoid 650k, the winning ball in the V winning device 650 flows down the special discharge flow path 650e2. (see FIG. 1030(b)).

In the pachinko machine 10 used in the thirty-fifth control example, the channel solenoid 650k is set to be OFF while the game is played normally, and the winning ball of the V winning device 650 flows down the normal discharge channel 650e1. It is configured as follows. Then, when a small prize is won, the channel solenoid 650k is set to ON according to the contents stipulated in the above-mentioned open scenario table 202g, and the winning ball of the V winning device 650 can flow down the special discharge channel 650e2. It is configured to be In this way, when the channel solenoid 650k is set to be off, the state is maintained for a long period of time in the pachinko machine 10, that is, the winning ball of the V winning device 650 flows down the normal discharge channel 650e1. The power consumption of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by providing a state (see FIG. 1030(a)) in which the switching member 650h is maintained.

In this way, the game state set after the small winning game is changed by the flow-down route of the game ball winning the V winning device 650 during the small winning game, so that the interest of the player is improved even during the small winning game. be able to. The time required to pass from the opening (specific winning opening) of the V winning device 650 to the entrance of the special discharge channel 650e2 (opening surface closed by the guide piece 650h2 of the switching member 650h) is 1 second at the shortest. consists of By configuring in this way, even if the switching member 650h switches the flow-down route of the ball after detecting that the opening/closing door 650f1 has been opened in spite of not winning a small prize, the ball will surely flow. It is possible to prevent the water from flowing down the special discharge channel 650e2.

In addition, a discharge confirmation switch 650e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting passage of a ball is provided at the end of the normal discharge passage 650e1. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have entered the V winning device 650 have been discharged from the sum of the output of the discharge confirmation switch 650e4 and the V switch 650e3. In addition, the end timing of the small winning game (condition for ending the small winning game (when the V winning device 650 wins a predetermined number (10 pieces), or when the opening scenario of the V winning device 650 ends) is established When all the game balls that have entered the V winning device 650 are not discharged at the timing after the small winning ending period has passed, it is determined that there is an abnormality inside the V winning device 650, and it is sent to the outside. It is preferable to configure so as to notify the abnormality or stop the game so that the jackpot game or the normal game is not started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from progressing in a state in which a part of the pachinko machine 10 has an abnormality, thereby preventing a secondary abnormality from occurring.

In this way, the game ball that has won the specific winning hole (V winning hole) 650a of the V winning device 650 is detected by the magnetic sensor 650c1, and based on this, the player receives a prize ball (one ball in the 35th control example) as a privilege. 10 prize balls) can be paid out for winning a prize. In addition, by using the game ball after being detected, it can be sorted whether or not it passes through the V switch 650e3, so that it can be sorted whether or not the big win game is executed after the small win game is finished. can be done. Therefore, there is no need to provide a dedicated prize winning port (specific area) for awarding a jackpot game separately from the V winning device 650, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

Furthermore, in the 35th control example, according to the small winning type (small winning A, B, C) set when winning a small winning, the period and timing for setting the flow path solenoid 650 k to ON are different small winning It is configured so that games can be played. By constructing in this way, the degree of expectation (V prize expectation) for the ball to pass through the V switch 650e3 during the small winning game is made different depending on the content of the small winning game executed when winning the small winning. be able to. Therefore, the player can not only win a small prize, but also play a game while expecting that a small prize game with a high V winning expectation will be executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1031, the structure of the ball flow lower surface of the opening/closing door 650f1 that opens and closes the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 will be described. FIG. 1031(a) is a schematic plan view showing a state in which the opening/closing door 650f1 closes the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650. FIG. In the opening/closing door 650f1 of the thirty-fifth control example, as shown in FIG. It is configured to flow down from the right upper surface 650 y 1 of the device 650 to the left upper surface 650 y 2 via the upper surface of the opening/closing door 650 f 1 and flow toward the variable winning device 65 .

A first delay member 650fa, a second delay member 650fb, and a third delay member 650fc are provided on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 650f1 as delay members for delaying the falling of the ball. is configured so that the period of time during which the water flows down is 0.6 seconds. This flowing period (0.6 seconds) is longer than the interval (closing period (0.5 seconds)) when the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a of the V winning device 650 is opened multiple times by the small winning game. configured to be long. By configuring in this way, the ball flowing down on the opening/closing door 650f1 is configured to surely win when the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is opened by the small winning game.

In the state shown in FIG. 1031(a), a small winning game is executed, and when the opening/closing door 650f1 is changed to the open state, the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. 1031(b). FIG. 1031(b) is a schematic plan view showing a state in which the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 is open. As shown in FIG. 1031(b), when the opening/closing door 650f1 is in an open state, it moves so as to retreat inside the game board 13, and the ball flowing down the right upper surface 650y1 enters the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. The specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is opened so that winning is possible. In addition, the ball flowing down on the opening/closing door 650f1 also enters the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a when the opening/closing door 650f1 is positioned at the retracted position.

In addition, the V winning device 650 is equipped with a third mechanism for smoothing the flow of the ball after winning regardless of the position from which the ball flowing down on the opening and closing door 650f1 enters the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. A 1 regulating member 651 and a 2nd regulating member 652 are provided (see FIG. 1026). After being aligned in a line via the 2 regulating members 652, it is configured to flow down toward the detection port 650a1 having a passage width of one ball. By providing the first regulating member 651 and the second regulating member 652 in this way, even if the detection opening 650a1 is provided below the first regulating member, the ball that has won with great force from the opening/closing door 650f1 is directly detected through the detection opening 650a1. Therefore, it is possible to suppress failure of the ball detection switch 650c1 provided in the detection port 650a1. In addition, a flow path (a flow path flowing down on the first restricting member 651 and the second restricting member 652) for aligning the balls until the balls pass through the detection port 650a1 having a passage width corresponding to one ball is secured. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the balls are clogged in the V winning device 650 and the game is hindered.

Returning to FIG. 1026, the description continues. A logo character Rg2 indicating the title of the animation or drama that is the model of the pachinko machine 10 is decorated on the upper center side of the game board when viewed from the front, and the model of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed on the upper center of the variable display unit 80. A decorative structure (logo decoration Rg1) that imitates the logo mark of an anime or drama that has become popular is arranged. This logo decoration Rg1 has a built-in LED and can perform light emission and blinking in accordance with the variable effect. Incidentally, the logo decoration Rg1 is fixed to the game board 13, and its position is not changed.

Note that the position of the logo decoration Rg1 is not limited to the position shown in FIG. For example, the logo decoration Rg1 may be placed outside the variable display unit 80 in the lower right area in front view or in the lower left area in front view.

<Regarding the decorative movable accessory in the 35th control example>
Next, the decorative movable accessory (logo accessory 902) provided in the thirty-fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1032 to 1039. FIG. FIG. 1032(a) is a diagram schematically showing the state (storage position) in which the logo accessory 902 is stored. As shown in FIG. 1032(a), this logo accessory 902 is composed of a bar accessory 902a, a rotating body accessory 902b, and left and right lifting mechanisms 902c and 902d. The configuration of the logo accessory 902 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 1034 to 1039 as appropriate.

The bar accessory 902a has lifting mechanisms 902c and 902d at both left and right ends. The lifting mechanisms 902c and 902d are symmetrical and have substantially the same shape. Therefore, in the left raising mechanism 902c, the description of the right raising mechanism 902d will be omitted for the same components as those described above.

The left lifting mechanism 902c has a two-stage rack composed of an upper rack 902c1 and a boot-shaped lower rack 902c2. It is connected to the rack 902c1. The height of the two-stage rack is variable by rotating the upper drive cam 902c3 to change the position of the cylindrical pin 902c3p provided on the upper drive cam 902c3.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 1034 to 1037, the detailed structure of the left raising mechanism 902c will be described. Figures 1034 and 1036 are exploded perspective views of lift mechanisms 902c and 902d, and Figures 1035 and 1037 are exploded rear perspective views of lift mechanisms 902c and 902d. As shown in FIG. 1034, the left raising mechanism 902c is provided with a bar accessory motor 902c7, which is a stepping motor for upward driving. The bar accessory motor 902c7 is provided with an upper drive gear 902c4 that engages with the upper drive cam 902c3. The bar accessory motor 902c7 operates to rotate the upper driving gear 902c4, thereby rotating the upper driving cam 902c3. A cylinder pin 902c3p is provided on the upper drive cam 902c3, and the position of the cylinder pin 902c3p is varied by rotating the upper drive cam 903c3.

The cylindrical pin 902c3p protrudes forward in a front view, and when the bar accessory 902a is in the storage position, the bottom of the lower rack 902c2 is supported from below by the cylindrical pin 902c3p. By moving the cylindrical pin 902c3p clockwise (counterclockwise in the case of the right lifting mechanism 902d) from the position shown in FIG. Cylinder pin 902c3p loses support. The bar function 902a is supported by a stopper 902c5 (see FIG. 1035), and when the stopper 902c5 is in a locked state, the bar function 902a falls even if the lower rack 902c2 loses the support of the cylindrical pin 902c3p. do not.

This stopper 902c5 slides the arm member 902c6 connected to the upper driving cam 902c3 by rotating the bar accessory motor 902c7 by a predetermined number of steps (25 steps in the thirty-fifth control example). By moving the connecting link member 902c5L up and down, it can be changed between the locked state and the unlocked state. When the stopper 902c5 is in the released state and the cylindrical pin 902c3p does not enter the lower portion of the lower rack 902c2, the lower rack 902c2 drops due to its own weight. At this time, the connecting gear 902c8a that connects the lower rack 902c2 and the upper rack 902c1 is engaged with the lower protruding piece 902c8c provided on the column portion of the lifting mechanism 902c and rotates counterclockwise. The connecting gear 902c8a is also engaged with an upper projecting piece 902c8b (see FIG. 1035) provided on the upper rack 902c1, and the connecting gear 902c8a rotates counterclockwise to lower the upper rack 902c1. As a result, the bar accessory 902a falls to the lower limit.

Only the right raising mechanism 902d is provided with a right halfway stop solenoid 902d9 shown in FIG. 1032(a). When the right midway stop solenoid 902d9 is ON, the valve protrudes toward the back side in the front view, and the bar accessory 902a falling under its own weight can be stopped at the position shown in FIG. 1033(a). . On the other hand, when the right midway stop solenoid 902d9 is turned off, the valve retracts and the bar accessory 902a falls to the lower limit.

Here, in the thirty-fifth control example, two types of falling patterns can be set as the falling pattern of the bar accessory 902a. First, the first drop pattern is a right intermediate one-sided drop state in which the left stopper 902c5 remains locked, only the right stopper 902d5 is released, and the right halfway stop solenoid 902d9 is turned ON (see FIG. 1033(a)). After that, the left stopper 902c5 is released from the right middle one-sided drop state, and the left end of the bar accessory 902a is dropped to the lower limit (see FIG. 1033(b)), which is the left one-sided drop state (see FIG. 1033(b)). This is the first drop pattern in which the stop solenoid 902d9 is turned off and the right end of the bar accessory 902a is also dropped to the lower limit (the position shown in FIG. 1032(b)).

The second drop pattern is the second drop pattern in which the left and right stoppers 902c5 and 902d5 are simultaneously released and the right halfway stop solenoid 902d9 is turned off, so that the bar accessory 902a drops to its lower limit at once under its own weight. .

In this way, even with the structure in which the bar accessory 902a is dropped by its own weight, it is possible to set various drop patterns by varying the release timings of the right halfway stop solenoid 902d9 and the left and right stoppers 902c5 and 902d5.

Returning to FIG. 1034, the description continues. When the bar accessory 902a is at the lower limit (in the state shown in FIG. 1032(b)), the upper driving cam 902c3 rotates clockwise (counterclockwise in the right raising mechanism 902d) to 902c3p moves clockwise from the position shown in FIG. 1032(b), enters the bottom of the lower rack 902c2, and pushes up the lower rack 902c2. When the lower rack 902c2 is pushed up by the cylindrical pin 902c3p, the connecting gear 902c8a (see FIG. 1035) engages with the lower protruding piece 902c8c (see FIG. 1035) provided on the supporting column of the lifting mechanism 902c, and the connecting gear 902c8a Rotate clockwise. This connecting gear 902c8a is also engaged with an upper projecting piece 902c8b (see FIG. 1035) provided on the upper rack 902c1, and the connecting gear 902c8a rotates clockwise to raise the upper rack 902c1.

In this way, the two-stage rack of the upper rack 902c1 and the lower rack 902c2 enables vertical driving with a stroke longer than the diameter of the upper drive cam 902c3, so that the weight of the upper drive cam 902c3 can be reduced. , the output of the stepping motor for driving can be suppressed and driven. Therefore, power consumption of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 1036 to 1039, the structure of the rotary accessory 902b will be described. FIG. 1036 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating body accessory 902b and the bar accessory 902a, and FIG. 1037 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating body accessory 902b and the bar accessory 902a. Also, FIG. 1038 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotary accessory 902b, and FIG. 1039 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotary accessory. The rotating body 902b1 is a member whose surface is decorated, and in the thirty-fifth control example, is decorated with the character "object" related to the theme of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1032(a)). A rotating body motor 902b2, which is a stepping motor for rotational driving, and a roller slider 902b6 are provided on the back side of the rotating body 902b1 (see FIG. 1037). When the rotating body motor 902b2 is driven based on the operation data set by the sound lamp control device 113, the rotating gear 902b7 rotates, and the rotation of the rotating gear 902b7 causes the rotating body 902b1 to rotate.

The rotor motor 902b2 can rotate clockwise or counterclockwise based on the operation data set by the sound lamp control device 113, and the rotation direction of the rotor 902b1 corresponds to the rotation direction of the rotor motor 902b2. is variable.

In addition, the rotation speed of the rotor motor 902b2 can be set in four stages based on the operation data set by the sound lamp control device 113, and the rotation speed of the rotor 902b1 can also be adjusted in accordance with the rotation speed of the rotor motor 902b2. Variable.

As shown in FIG. 1036, a roller slider 902b6 provided on the rotating body accessory 902b is configured so that a ball screw 902b5 can be inserted therethrough. The ball screw 902b5 is provided with a lateral driving gear 902b4 and a lateral driving stepping motor 902b3 at the left end in a front view. It rotates and the ball screw 902b5 rotates. When the ball screw 902b5 rotates, the roller slider 902b6 moves left and right. As a result, the rotary accessory 902b can be moved left and right.

Here, with reference to FIG. 1032(b), the right and left movable range of the rotary accessory 902b will be described. The rotating body accessory 902b is configured to be able to move left and right on the front side of the bar accessory 902a in a front view within a range from the left range of motion limit Pt2 to the right range of motion limit Pt3. A reference position Pt1 is set between the left and right movable range limits Pt2 and Pt3, and is configured to stop at the reference position Pt1 when the bar accessory 902a is at the retracted position.

The lateral movement motor-902b3 can rotate clockwise or counterclockwise according to the operation data set by the audio ramp control device 113, and when the lateral movement motor 902b3 rotates clockwise, the rotator accessory 902b moves to the right when viewed from the front, and rotates counterclockwise, the rotary accessory 902b moves to the left when viewed from the front.

The bar accessory 902a is provided with sensors (not shown) at positions corresponding to the reference position Pt1, the left range of motion limit Pt2, and the right range of motion limit Pt3, so that the left and right positions of the rotating body accessory 902b can be detected. Configure.

In addition, the rotation speed of the lateral movement motor 902b3 can be set in four stages based on the operation data set by the sound ramp control device 113, and the rotating accessory 902b moves according to the rotation speed of the lateral movement motor 902b3. The speed is also variable.

<Regarding the effect content in the 35th control example>
With reference to FIGS. 1040 to 1042, description will be given of the characteristic effects executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-fifth control example. FIG. 1041(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the special symbol (third symbol) is temporarily stopped on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. In the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, left, middle and right three pattern rows (Z1 to Z3) are displayed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 1040(a), the configuration of the symbol sequence in the thirty-fifth control example will be described. FIG. 1040(a) is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the third symbol in the thirty-fifth control example. The third design displayed on the display screen of the third design display device 81 (decorative design that fluctuates corresponding to the fluctuation display of the first special design (special design 1) or the second special design (special design 2)) is There are eight types of main patterns with identification information imitating numbers "1" to "8" and identification information imitating characters "sea", "things" and "words" related to the theme of the pachinko machine 10. Each is composed of three types of attached main patterns. These third symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbols are variably displayed (dynamically displayed) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 .

Each number pattern is a state in which three of the same number patterns are aligned on the activated line L1 (for example, 7 patterns D9 are stopped and displayed in the left middle pattern Z1b, the middle middle pattern Z2b, and the right middle pattern Z3b). state), it indicates that a special symbol jackpot is won.

On the other hand, the character pattern is a state in which three identical character patterns are aligned on the activated line L1 (for example, a state in which the left middle pattern Z1b, the middle middle pattern Z2b, and the right middle pattern Z3b are each stopped and displayed with the "sea" pattern D4). ), and when the "sea" symbol D4 is displayed in the middle left symbol Z1b, the "object" symbol D7 is displayed in the middle middle symbol Z2b, and the "word" symbol D10 is displayed in the middle right symbol Z3b. It is configured to indicate that the jackpot is won.

FIGS. 1040(b) to (e) are diagrams showing an example of the stopping pattern of the rotary accessory 902b. The normal rotation state shown in FIG. 1040(b) is the orientation when the rotor motor 902b2 is at the origin position. (c) to (e) are diagrams showing an example of a case other than the origin position.

Returning to FIG. 1041(a), the description is continued. As shown in FIG. 1041(a), a small display area Dm1 is formed on the upper left of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front. This small display area Dm1 is an area where identification information (fourth symbol) for indicating the special symbol lottery situation (whether the lottery is in progress (fluctuating) and the lottery result) is displayed, 4th design (special 1 4th design) for indicating the lottery status of the 1st special design (special 1), or 4th design for indicating the lottery status of the 2nd special design (special 2) ( Special figure 2 fourth pattern) is configured to be displayed in the small display area Dm1. In the example shown in FIG. 1041(a), the fourth symbol is displayed in the small display area Dm1 in a display mode indicating that the fourth symbol is being variably displayed.

In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three stages of upper, middle and lower stages for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the activated line L1, and the third symbols stop on the activated line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1→right symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if a combination of big winning symbols are aligned on the effective line L1, a big winning notification performance is executed as a big winning.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 1041(a), the upper and lower third symbols are displayed in a half-hidden state. This indicates that no effective line is set in the upper and lower stages.

In the example shown in FIG. 1041(a), 1 symbol D1 as the middle left symbol Z1b, 8 symbols D11 as the middle middle symbol Z2b, and a nautical pattern D4 as the right middle symbol Z3b are stopped and displayed in a swaying state. The state in which the main symbols are shaken is a state in which the special symbol variation time has not elapsed, and when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the main symbol is completely stopped.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1041(a), a sub-display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm. The sub-display area Ds is configured to display reserved symbols corresponding to the number of acquired special symbol lottery rights (reserved storage). As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-fifth control example performs a new special symbol lottery when variable display is performed on the first symbol display device 37 or when a winning game is being performed. When the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 in such a state that the ball cannot be entered, the number of times the ball enters each entrance is reserved up to four times. The number of reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds is the same as the number of reserved ball entries. In the thirty-fifth control example, the maximum number of held balls stored for a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is four, and a ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is Since the maximum value of the number of reserved balls to be stored is set to 4, a maximum of 8 reserved symbols are displayed in the sub-table display area Ds.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1041(a), the sub-display area Ds is divided into a special figure 1 holding ball waiting area Ds1, a running area Ds2, and a special figure 2 holding ball waiting area Ds3. be done. The special figure 1 reserved ball waiting area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, and corresponds to the upper limit number (4) that can be reserved and stored. Four pedestals m1 to m4 are displayed in order from the right. Then, when the reserved ball of the first special symbol is obtained, the reserved symbol is displayed on the pedestal of the lowest number among the four pedestals m1 to m4 on which the reserved symbol is not displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 1041 (a), two holding balls of the first special symbol are held and stored. Two reserved patterns (hr1 to hr2) of the display mode (white circle mark) corresponding to (special figure 1 reserved ball) are displayed on the first pedestal m1 and the second pedestal m2.

In addition, the special figure 2 reserved ball waiting area Ds3 is an area for displaying the number of reserved patterns corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern, and the upper limit number (4) that can be reserved and stored Four corresponding pedestals m5 to m8 are displayed in order from the left. Then, when the reserved ball of the second special pattern is acquired, the reserved pattern is displayed on the pedestal of the lowest number among the four pedestals m5 to m8 on which the reserved pattern is not displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 1041 (a), since it is a state in which no one reserved ball of the second special symbol is retained and stored, even one reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 2 retained ball waiting area Ds3. not

The running area Ds2 is a display area in which the pending symbols displayed corresponding to the currently running special symbol variation are shifted and displayed, and the running pending symbols hr0 are displayed on the running pedestal m0. be. That is, when a new special symbol variation is started, the reserved symbol hr1 displayed on the pedestal m1 of the special figure 1 reserved ball waiting area Ds1 is shifted to the pedestal m0 of the active area Ds2 and displayed. be done. By configuring in this way, for example, for the reserved symbols displayed in the special figure 1 reserved ball waiting area Ds1, a notice effect indicating the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot (for example, an effect that changes the display mode of the reserved symbols ) is executed, the player can easily discriminate that the special symbol variation corresponding to the reserved symbol for which the notice performance is executed is being executed.

In addition, by making it possible to display the reserved design (executing design) corresponding to the special design variation being executed, the effect of changing the display mode of the reserved design (executing design) corresponds to the special design variation being executed Since it can be executed also for the reserved design (executing design), the display mode of the reserved design is variable for a longer time than when the reserved design corresponding to the special design variation being executed is not displayed. The game can be played while making the player anticipate it.

In addition, when the reserved design is displayed on the pedestal m5 of the special figure 2 reserved ball waiting area Ds3, it is prioritized over the reserved design hr1 displayed on the pedestal m1 of the special figure 1 reserved ball waiting area Ds1. is shifted to the pedestal m0 of the in-execution area Ds2 and displayed.

Thus, in this 35th control example, the display area of the special figure 1 reserved design and the display area of the special figure 2 reserved design are configured to be displayed separately, so that the displayed reserved design The player can identify whether it is a reserved design (special figure 1 reserved design) indicating the reserved ball of the first special design or a reserved design (special figure 2 reserved design) indicating the reserved ball of the second special design. It consists of As a result, it is possible for the player to grasp the current number of reserved balls for each type of special symbol, so that the number of balls to enter the first ball entrance 64 based on the display contents of the reserved symbols is determined. It is possible to facilitate the determination of whether or not to continue the game.

FIG. 1041(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen at the start of the relief chance presentation. This relief chance effect is a kind of effect (so-called resurrection effect) in which the display mode indicating that the lottery result is lost is displayed, and then the display mode is changed to indicate that a big win or a small win is won. When the rotary accessory 902b stops in the forward rotation state (see FIG. 1040(b)) on the line connecting the "word" pattern D10 displayed in the main display area Dm of the three-pattern display device 81, the jackpot is won. This is an effect in which the winning is announced. The details of the relief chance presentation will be described below.

When the relief chance presentation is started, the logo accessory 902 starts to operate based on the operation scenario preset by the sound lamp control device 113 . Specifically, the bar accessory 902a falls to the lower limit, and the rotating body accessory 902b starts to move left and right and rotate.

As shown in FIG. 1042(b), when the relief chance effect is started, the bar accessory 902a is positioned in front of the temporarily stopped third symbol on the activated line L1, so that the player sees it as effective. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the third pattern on the line L1. This is because, when the third pattern, which is entirely displayed on the line connecting the logo lamp Rg1 and the "word" pattern D7, can be visually recognized, the production succeeds and the character string of "sea story" is formed. Even so, it may be difficult for the player to understand that the character string "Sea Story" has been formed due to the existence of the other third symbols on the line in a visible state. Therefore, the third pattern on the effective line L1 is covered by the bar symbol 902a so that there is no unnecessary third pattern on the line of the logo lamp Rg1, the rotating body symbol 902b, and the "word" symbol D10. It consists of

A display area HR1 is formed in the upper center area of the main display area Dm, and an up arrow 802 is displayed in the lower center area of the main display area Dm to indicate the stop position of the rotating body accessory 902b where the production is successful. . In the display area HR1, a guidance mode for notifying success conditions of the relief chance presentation is displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to recognize the content of the relief chance presentation in an easy-to-understand manner.

The rotator role object 902b continues to move left and right and rotate for about 6 seconds based on an operation scenario preset by the sound lamp control device 113, and then stops at a stop position for announcing the success/failure determination result. .

FIG. 1042(a) is a diagram showing the contents of the effect when the rescue chance effect is successful. When the operation scenario of the success pattern of the rescue chance effect is set (that is, when the result of the winning/failure determination is a jackpot winning), when the operation scenario stop timing comes, the rotary accessory 902b reaches the winning notification position (Fig. In the example shown in 1042(a), it stops in the forward rotation state at the position of the intersection of the activated line L1 and the middle symbol row Z2. When it is confirmed that the rotary accessory 902b has stopped at the hit notification position, the middle pattern row Z2 returns by half a frame, and the middle and lower pattern Z2c displayed in a half-hidden state rises to the position of the rising line L2. , the entire middle and lower pattern Z2c is displayed. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the middle and lower pattern Z2c is a constituent element forming the character string of "Sea Story" with the logo lamp Rg1 and the rotary accessory 902b. It should be noted that the character string of "sea story" is a form indicating that the jackpot has been won.

In addition, as the middle pattern row Z2 moves back by half a frame, the bar accessory 902a also rises to a corresponding position, thereby covering the middle middle row pattern Z2b. As a result, there is no unnecessary third pattern on the line of the logo lamp Rg1, the rotary accessory 902b, and the "word" pattern D10, and the character string of "sea story" is completed for the player. can make things easier to understand.

Furthermore, in response to the completion of the character string "Sea Story", the logo lamp Rg1 and the LEDs built in the rotating body accessory 902b are caused to emit light, thereby causing the logo lamp Rg1 and the rotating body accessory 902b to emit light. The formation of a line with the middle and lower pattern Z2c is emphasized to prevent the player from overlooking it.

In addition, in the display area HR1, the characters "Congratulations" are displayed as a guide mode for notifying that the relief chance presentation has been successful. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the relief chance presentation has succeeded.

On the other hand, in the case of failure of the relief chance rendering (that is, in the case of the success/failure determination result), the failure notification position (in the example shown in FIG. 1042(b), the position of the intersection of the valid line L1 and the right symbol row Z3) , the rotary accessory 902b stops. In the example shown in FIG. 1042(b), an example in which the rotary accessory 902b stops at the intersection of the activated line L1 and the right symbol column Z3 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. Any position outside the line connecting the "word" pattern D10 displayed on the three-pattern display device 81 is acceptable.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-fifth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 1043, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-fifth control example will be described. FIG. 1043 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-fifth control example. In the thirty-fifth control example, part of the configuration of the ROM 222 possessed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 and part of the configuration of the RAM 223 are changed from the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-second control example described above. The difference is that a drive motor for the logo accessory 902 is added, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same contents, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and outputs a logo accessory 902. It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the output of the drive control data and the variable effect (variable display). The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, the drive motor group 770, and the right halfway stop solenoid 775, respectively. Here, the drive motor group 770 includes drive sources (motors) for driving various decorative movable members (variable members) that can be controlled by the sound lamp control device 113. Specifically, It has bar accessory motors 902c7 and 902d7, a rotor motor 902b2, a lateral movement motor 902b3, and other motors 771.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the error type. Send to device 114 . The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

Here, with reference to FIG. 1044(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the thirty-fifth control example will be described. FIG. 1044(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the thirty-fifth control example. The difference is that a variation pattern selection 4 table 222xa is provided in place of the variation pattern selection table 222a and a new operation scenario selection table 222xb is added to the ROM 222 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the thirty-second control example described above. there is

In the variation pattern selection 4 table 222xa, the variation pattern of each variation pattern type (outgoing, false out, various types of reach, etc.) is set in the counter value for variation pattern selection. The sound ramp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, the result of the suitability determination, and the acquired counter value for selection. This allows the audio ramp control device 113 to select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the variation time and the type of variation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode from being displayed frequently, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early.

In addition, in the thirty-fifth control example, a variation effect is performed in which the third symbol is variably displayed by vertical scrolling on the third symbol display device 81 in correspondence with the executed special symbol variation. In this variation effect, the detailed variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the success/failure determination result, and the acquired counter value for selection. A game (special symbol game) can be performed while predicting whether or not the special symbol variation of this time is a big hit by visually recognizing the variation performance executed by the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

The operation scenario selection table 222xb is a table for setting an operation scenario for each drive motor that constitutes the logo accessory 902. FIG. In the action scenario selection table 222xb, the action scenario corresponding to the result of the suitability determination is set to the scenario selection counter value. The sound lamp control device 113 selects the action scenario of the logo accessory 902 based on the success/failure determination result and the acquired counter value for scenario selection when execution of the relief chance presentation described above is determined as the variation mode. .

Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection 4 table 222xa will be described with reference to FIGS. 1045 and 1046. FIG. FIG. 1045(a) is a block diagram schematically showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection 4 table 222xa. As shown in FIG. 1045 (a), the variation pattern selection 4 table 222xa includes a normal variation pattern selection 4 table 222xa1, a time saving variation pattern selection 4 table 222xa2, a special time saving variation pattern selection 4 table 222xa3, A time saving final variation pattern selection 4 table 222xa4 is defined.

FIG. 1045(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal variation pattern selection 4 table 222xa1. The normal variation pattern selection 4 table 222xa1 is a table referred to when the special symbol variation display is performed in the normal state (normal symbol low probability state). A variation pattern for display is set based on the special figure type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, the result of the determination, the variation pattern type, and the value of the first effect counter CS1. As shown in FIG. 1045(b), in the thirty-fifth control example, execution/non-execution of the relief chance effect is defined for each display variation pattern.

Specifically, the special figure type is "first special symbol (special figure 1)", the success/failure determination result is "off", and the variation pattern type is "off". "0 to 199" is defined in association with "fluctuation pattern A" and no relief chance effect.

In addition, when the variation pattern type is "out", the relief chance effect is not set. This is because the rendering time of the relief chance rendering is 12 seconds, and the relief chance rendering does not end within the variable time.

Special figure type is "1st special pattern (special figure 1)", the result of success or failure is "out", and the variation pattern type is "out of guess", the value of the first production counter CS1 is "0 to 179" "Variation pattern B" and no relief chance effect are associated with each other, and "Variation pattern C" and relief chance effect are associated with the value of the first effect counter CS1 of "180 to 199". stipulated. That is, when the variation pattern type is "false", the relief chance presentation is set at a rate of 10%.

Special figure type is "1st special pattern (special figure 1)", success judgment result is "off", variation pattern type is "normal reach", the value of the first production counter CS1 is set to "0 to 179" On the other hand, "fluctuation pattern D" and no relief chance effect are defined in correspondence, and "variation pattern E" and relief chance effect are defined in correspondence when the value of the first effect counter CS1 is "180 to 199". It is That is, when the result of the judgment is "miss" and the variation pattern type is "normal reach", the relief chance presentation is set at a rate of 10%.

Special figure type is "first special pattern (special figure 1)", success judgment result is "off", variation pattern type is "super reach", the value of the first production counter CS1 is "0 to 149" "Variation pattern F" and no relief chance effect are associated with each other, and "Variation pattern G" and relief chance effect are associated with the value of the first effect counter CS1 of "150 to 199". stipulated. That is, when the result of the determination is "miss" and the variation pattern type is "super reach", the relief chance presentation is set at a rate of 25%.

Special figure type is "first special pattern (special figure 1)", success judgment result is "jackpot", variation pattern type is "normal reach", the value of the first production counter CS1 is set to "0 to 149" On the other hand, "fluctuation pattern H" and no relief chance effect are defined in correspondence, and "variation pattern I" and relief chance effect are defined in correspondence with the value of the first effect counter CS1 of "150 to 199". It is That is, when the success/failure determination result is "big hit" and the variation pattern type is "normal reach", the relief chance presentation is set at a rate of 25%.

Special figure type is "first special pattern (special figure 1)", success judgment result is "big hit", variation pattern type is "super reach", the value of the first production counter CS1 is "0 to 129" "Variation pattern J" and no relief chance effect are associated with each other, and "Variation pattern K" and relief chance effect are associated with the value of the first effect counter CS1 of "130 to 199". stipulated. That is, when the success/failure determination result is "big win" and the variation pattern type is "super reach", the relief chance presentation is set at a rate of 35%.

It should be noted that, if the success/failure determination result is "big win" and the variation pattern type is "normal reach", and if the rescue chance effect is executed, the third symbol will not be in the reach state and will be temporarily stopped in a combination that indicates an outfall, and then relief. Chance production is started.

On the other hand, if the success/failure determination result is "jackpot" and the variation pattern type is "super reach", and if the rescue chance effect is executed, the third pattern becomes the reach state, and after the reach effect is executed, a combination indicating a failure. is temporarily stopped, and the relief chance presentation is started.

In addition, if the variation pattern type is "Normal Reach" or "Super Reach", the ease of setting the rescue chance effect will differ depending on whether the result of the success/fail judgment is "miss" or "jackpot". In the case of "jackpot", it is easier to set the relief chance presentation than in the case of "loss".

As a result, even when the third symbol does not reach the ready-to-win state, the player expects that the relief chance presentation will be executed, and the player has a feeling of anticipation for winning the jackpot until the last moment when the variable display ends. It is possible to let

Special figure type is "first special pattern (special figure 1)", success judgment result is "jackpot", variation pattern type is "special reach", the value of the first production counter CS1 is "0 to 199" , "fluctuation pattern L" and no relief chance effect are defined in association with each other. That is, when the result of the win/fail judgment is "big hit" and the variation pattern type is "special reach", the relief chance effect is not set. This is because, in the thirty-fifth control example, "special reach" is set as the variation pattern type only when the success/failure determination result is "jackpot". This is because, since it is possible to recognize that the player has won the jackpot, even if the relief chance presentation is executed, the presentation effect is low.

Special figure type is "first special symbol (special figure 1)", success judgment result is "small hit", variation pattern type is "long and small hit", the value of the first production counter CS1 is "0 to 199”, “variation pattern M” and no relief chance effect are defined in association with each other. That is, when the result of the win/loss determination is "small hit" and the variation pattern type is "long hit", the relief chance effect is not set.

The special figure type is "second special symbol (special figure 2)", the success judgment result is "off", and the variation pattern type is "off". On the other hand, "fluctuation pattern N" and no relief chance effect are defined in correspondence, and "variation pattern P" and relief chance effect are defined in correspondence when the value of the first effect counter CS1 is "180 to 199". It is That is, when the result of the determination is "miss" and the variation pattern type is "miss", the relief chance presentation is set at a rate of 10%.

The special figure type is "second special symbol (special figure 2)", the success/failure determination result is "big hit" or "small hit", and the variation pattern type is "hit". ``Variation pattern Q'' and no relief chance presentation are defined in association with ``0 to 149'', and ``variation pattern R'' and relief chance presentation are defined for values of the first presentation counter CS1 of ``150 to 199''. There is associated and defined. That is, when the success/failure determination result is "big win" or "small win" and the variation pattern type is "win", the relief chance presentation is set at a rate of 25%.

FIG. 1046(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the time reduction variation pattern selection 4 table 222xa2. The variable pattern selection 4 table 222xa2 for time saving is a table referred to when the variable display of special symbols is executed in the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols). Similar to the normal variation pattern selection 4 table 222xa1, based on the special figure type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, the success or failure determination result, the variation pattern type, and the value of the first production counter CS1 This is for setting the display variation pattern.

Specifically, the value of the first production counter CS1 "0 to 199" is defined in association with "fluctuation pattern S" and no relief chance effect.

Special figure type is "first special pattern (special figure 1)", success judgment result is "jackpot", variation pattern type is "short jackpot", the value of the first production counter CS1 is "0 to 199" , "fluctuation pattern T" and no relief chance effect are defined in association with each other.

Special figure type is "first special symbol (special figure 1)", success judgment result is "small hit", variation pattern type is "long and small hit", the value of the first production counter CS1 is "0 to 189”, “variation pattern U” and no relief chance effect are defined in association, the special figure type is “first special symbol (special figure 1)”, the success/failure determination result is “small hit”, the variation pattern type is defined for the "long and small hit", and the value of the first effect counter CS1 is "190 to 199", and the "fluctuation pattern V" and the presence of the relief chance effect are defined in association with each other. That is, when the result of the judgment is "small hit" and the variation pattern type is "long hit", the relief chance presentation is set at a rate of 5%.

The special figure type is "second special symbol (special figure 2)", the success/failure determination result is "out", and the variation pattern type is "short out", the value of the first production counter CS1 is "0 to 199". , "fluctuation pattern W" and no relief chance effect are defined in association with each other.

Special figure type is "second special pattern (special figure 2)", success judgment result is "jackpot", variation pattern type is "super short jackpot", the value of the first production counter CS1 is "0 to 199 ', 'fluctuation pattern X' and no relief chance effect are defined in association with each other.

Special figure type is "second special pattern (special figure 2)", success judgment result is "small hit", variation pattern type is "super short and small hit", the value of the first production counter CS1 is "0 to "199" is defined in association with "fluctuation pattern Y" and no relief chance effect.

Thus, in the time-saving state, the relief chance effect is not set except for the case where the variation pattern type of the first special symbol is "long and small winning". This is because, in the time saving state, the variation time is set to 2 seconds or less except for the case where the variation pattern type is "long and small win", which is shorter than the presentation time of the relief chance presentation.

Drawing 1046 (b) is a figure showing typically the contents of variation pattern selection 4 table 222xa3 for special time saving. Special time saving variation pattern selection 4 table 222xa3 is a table referred to when the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is the variation pattern type set in the special time saving state.

Here, in the 35th control example, as in the 32nd control example described above, as the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, the second special symbol variation number executed during the time saving state reaches three times. A time saving end condition that is established when the time saving end condition is established, and the time saving end condition that is established when the total number of times of the first special symbol fluctuation number executed during the time saving state and the second special symbol fluctuation number reaches 10 times, have at least

That is, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-fifth control example executes the second special symbol lottery three times while the time saving state that makes it easier to execute the second special symbol lottery is set, and any second special symbol is selected. By winning a win (small win, big win) with a probability of about 1/2 in the lottery, the time saving state is repeated through the big win game, and in the second special symbol lottery executed three times during the time saving state. If you do not win, the time-saving state ends, and if you do not win even in the second special symbol lottery (once) using the remaining special figure 2 reservation, move to the normal state ( It has a game property that the continuous chan state ends).

Here, as the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, when only the time saving end condition that is satisfied when the number of times of the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state reaches three times, the first Even when the special pattern lottery is executed three times, the time saving end condition is satisfied, and the time saving state ends without the second special pattern lottery being executed despite the time saving state being set. There was a possibility that such a situation could occur. That is, in this 35th control example, the right to execute the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 reservation) is configured to be able to acquire up to 4 pieces, for example, 4 special figure 1 reservations, special figure 2 reservations When the time-saving state is set in a state in which 0 pieces have been acquired, the first special symbol variation is executed prior to the second special symbol variation. In this case, the time saving end condition is satisfied before the second special symbol lottery is executed three times, and the time saving state ends without exhibiting the original game property, and the player's willingness to play. There was a problem that the

In addition, even in a state where four special 1 reserves are acquired when the time saving state is set, in order to execute the second special symbol variation three times during the time saving state, for example, a special symbol lottery When the time-saving end condition is established when the number of executions reaches 7 times, when the time-saving state is set without acquiring the special figure 1 reservation, the second special symbol variation It becomes possible to execute the game more than three times, and there is a problem that a game that is excessively advantageous to the player is provided to the original game property.

Therefore, in this 35th control example, the time saving end condition established based only on the number of executions of the second special symbol variation, and the time saving established based on the total number of times of the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation End conditions are set, and the time saving state is ended when any of the time saving end conditions are satisfied. By configuring in this way, regardless of the acquisition status of the special figure 1 reservation, it is possible to execute the second special symbol variation of the predetermined number of times, and when the second special symbol variation of the predetermined number of times is performed You can definitely end the time saving state.

Furthermore, in this 35th control example, in order to efficiently execute the second special symbol lottery during the time saving state, the first special symbol variation corresponding to the upper limit number (4 pieces) of the special figure 1 reservation, that is, the time saving state is set until the fourth special symbol variation is executed, a short time (0.5 seconds) variation time is It is configured to be set, and for the subsequent first special symbol variation, a variation time of 20 seconds is set. In other words, even though the time saving state is set, when the player who does not understand the game method in the time saving state performs a left-handed game, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol fluctuation executed during the time saving state If the fluctuation time of a short time (0.5 seconds) is always set, new first special symbol fluctuations will be executed one after another, and the first special symbol fluctuation and the second special symbol fluctuation will be added up. There was a possibility that the time-saving end condition, which is established based on the number of times, may be established.

On the other hand, in this 32nd control example, only when the first special symbol variation after the fifth time executed after the time saving state is set, that is, when the special figure 1 suspension is newly acquired during the time saving state For the first special symbol variation to be executed, a long (20 seconds) variation time is set, and the period required until one first special symbol variation is completed is lengthened. , By ensuring a period for the player to grasp the game method in the time saving state, the time saving end condition established based on the total number of times of the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation is established It is configured so as to prevent it from happening.

In addition, in the special time-saving state (state in which the first special symbol variation is executed five times or more during the time-saving state), as a variation effect of the first special symbol variation, the right to execute the second special symbol lottery by the right-handed game ( It is configured to execute a variable performance including a performance mode prompting to acquire special figure 2 reservation). By configuring in this way, a player who does not know the game method to be executed during the time-saving state can grasp the correct game method more easily.

Drawing 1046 (c) is a figure showing typically the contents of time saving final fluctuation pattern selection 4 table 222xa4. Time saving final variation pattern selection 4 table 222xa4 is a table referred to when the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from main controller 110 is the variation pattern type set in the time saving final variation.

In this 35th control example, as in the 32nd control example described above, during the fluctuation period of the second special symbol fluctuation that is the time saving final fluctuation, the final result of the countdown effect executed during the time saving state (number icon 808 '0' display) is displayed, and the charge effect (see FIG. 941 (a)) is configured to prompt the acquisition of the special figure 2 pending until the time saving state ends. . Therefore, since the time saving state is set, the third (final) second special symbol variation is longer than the first or second second special symbol variation to ensure the effect period of the charge effect. It is configured so that the time is set.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier to end the time saving state in the state of acquiring the special figure 2 reservation. Also, even in the case of winning in the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state, the case of winning in the first or second second special symbol lottery, and the third second special symbol Since the time efficiency (the number of times of the second special symbol lottery executed per unit time in the time saving state) can be greatly different from the case of winning the lottery, the player can receive the second lottery during the time saving state. It is possible to make the player interested in not only whether or not he/she wins in the special symbol lottery, but also how many times the second special symbol lottery wins in the time-saving state.

Next, referring to FIG. 1047, the contents of operation scenario selection table 222xb will be described. FIG. 1047 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the action scenario selection table 222xb. As shown in FIG. 1047, in the action scenario selection table 222xb, the action scenarios corresponding to the respective success/failure determination results are set in the value of the second effect counter, which is the scenario selection counter.

Specifically, when the success/failure determination result is “miss”, “action scenario A” is defined for the value of the second effect counter CS2 of “0 to 19”. Here, with reference to FIG. 1048, the contents of operation scenario A will be described. FIG. 1048(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of an action scenario related to the vertical drive of the bar accessory 902a in the action scenario A of the logo accessory 902. FIG. As shown in FIG. 1048(a), in the operation scenario A for vertical drive of the bar accessory 902a, the left bar accessory motor 902c7, the right bar accessory motor 902d7 and the right midway stop solenoid The action data (action content) of 902d9 are specified, and the position (state) of the bar role 902a and the states of the left and right bar role stoppers 902c5 and 902d5 at that stage are shown.

The scenario counter 223xh is a counter provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, and is used to set operation data for each driving motor of the logo accessory 902 at predetermined timings. The counter value of the scenario counter 223xh is incremented by 1 in the relief chance effect execution process (S3159) of the liquid crystal effect execution management process 4 (see FIG. 1061), which will be described later. Although the details will be described later, this liquid crystal effect execution management process 4 is a process executed every 1 ms in the main process of the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 1056). Therefore, the counter value of the scenario counter 223xh is incremented by 1 every 1 ms.

In the thirty-fifth control example, the sound lamp control device 113 starts counting the scenario counter 223xh when it is time to start the relief chance presentation preset in the display variation pattern, and the value of the scenario counter 223xh is the operation scenario. When the specified value is reached, the corresponding operation data is set.

As shown in FIG. 1048(a), the scenario counter value indicates the counter value of the scenario counter 223xh. 1 is added in the processing during production execution (S3159). Although the details will be described later, this liquid crystal effect execution management process 4 is a process executed every 1 ms in the main process of the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 1056). Therefore, the counter value of the scenario counter 223xh is incremented by 1 every 1 ms.

The number of steps of the left bar accessory motor operation data and the right bar accessory motor operation data indicates the number of rotation steps of the left bar accessory motor 902c7 and the right bar accessory motor 902d7, and the speed is the left bar role. The speed for operating the stepping motors of the object motor 902c7 and the right bar accessory motor 902d7 is defined.

The "+ (forward direction)" and "- (reverse direction)" of the number of steps indicate the direction in which the motor rotates. In the reverse direction, the motor is rotated in the direction in which the step counter is decremented and updated. The left bar accessory motor 902c7 in the thirty-fifth control example rotates clockwise when the forward direction is set, and rotates counterclockwise when the reverse direction is set. The right bar accessory motor 902d7 rotates counterclockwise when the forward direction is set, and rotates clockwise when the reverse direction is set.

In the thirty-fifth control example, when the speed is 1, the stepping motor is excited every 1 ms (high speed), and when the speed is 2, the stepping motor is excited every 2 ms. When the speed is 3, the stepping motor is excited every 3 ms (medium low speed), and when the speed is 4, the stepping motor is excited every 4 ms. speed (low speed). In other words, speed 1 is set as the fastest speed, speed 2 is 1/2 of speed 1, speed 3 is 1/3 of speed 1, and speed 4 is 1/1 of speed 1. It has 4 speeds.

Also, the bar role object position indicates the position (state) of the bar role object 902a at the time of setting the action data corresponding to the value of the scenario counter 223xh.

When the start timing of the relief chance presentation set in the display variation pattern comes, the scenario counter 223xh starts counting. Then, when the value of the scenario counter 223xh becomes "1", the number of steps +25 and the speed 4 are set as the motor operation data for the right bar accessory. As a result, the right bar accessory motor 902d7 starts rotating counterclockwise at a speed of 4 until the step counter value reaches 25. In the thirty-fifth control example, the stepping motors of the left and right bar accessory motors 902c7 and 902d7 are configured to rotate once in 100 steps, and the position where the step counter value is 0 (origin position) is the retracted position, and the step counter is is 25, the left and right bar accessory stoppers 902c5 and 902d5 are in a released state (OFF state), and the bar accessory 902a falls to the lower limit. In the thirty-fifth control example, the time required to drive the step counters from 0 to 25 at speed 4 is set to 500 ms.

When the value of the scenario counter 223xh becomes "500", the number of steps +25 and the speed 2 are set as the motor operation data for the left bar accessory. As a result, the left bar accessory motor 902c7 rotates clockwise at a speed of 2 until the step counter value reaches 25. If the value of the scenario counter 223xh is "500", it means that 500 ms have passed since the start of the action scenario, so the right bar accessory motor 902d7 has rotated to the step counter value of 25. . As described above, when the step counter value reaches the position of 25, the right bar accessory stopper 902d5 is released (OFF state), and the right end of the bar accessory 902a in front view starts falling under its own weight. Since it is in the ON state, it is stopped at the position shown in FIG.

Then, when 250 ms have passed since the scenario counter value of 500 and the value of the scenario counter 223xh reaches "750", the left bar accessory motor 902c7 has rotated to the position of the step counter value of 25, and the left bar accessory. Since the stopper 902d5 is in a released state (OFF state), the left end of the bar accessory 902a in a front view falls under its own weight. In addition, since the left lifting mechanism 902c is not provided with a solenoid for stopping halfway, the left end of the bar accessory 902a in front view falls to the lowering limit, resulting in the state shown in FIG. one-sided state). After that, when the value of the scenario counter 223xh becomes "1000", the right midway stop solenoid 902d9 is set to OFF state, and the right end of the bar accessory 902a also drops to the lower limit (see FIG. 1032(b)).

When the value of the scenario counter 223xh becomes "11250", the number of steps +75 and the speed 2 are set as the motor operation data for the left bar accessory and the motor operation data for the right bar accessory. At this time, the step counter values of the left and right bar accessory motors are 25, so the left and right bar accessory motors 902c7 and 902d7 are driven in opposite directions until the step counter values reach 100. Rotate at speed 2. In the thirty-fifth control example, when the step counter value is 60, the cylindrical pins 902c3p and 902d3p start pushing up the lower racks 902c2 and 902d2, respectively, and when the step counter value is 100, the bar accessory 902a is in the retracted position.

Therefore, after 750 ms have elapsed since the operation data corresponding to the scenario counter value of 11250 was set, that is, at the time of the scenario counter value of 12000, the bar accessory 902a reaches the retracted position. Since the scenario counter value "12000" is the end time of operation scenario A, END data is defined. By defining the END data, it is possible to easily determine whether or not it is time to end the operation scenario.

FIG. 1048(b) is a diagram schematically showing the content of an action scenario related to left-right driving and rotational driving of the rotary body accessory 902b in the action scenario A of the logo accessory 902. FIG. As shown in FIG. 1048(b), similar to the operation scenario for vertical drive of the bar accessory 902a, the operation data of the lateral movement motor 902b3 and the operation data of the rotating body motor 902b2 are defined for the value of the scenario counter 223xh. It is The position and direction of the rotator role show the position and direction (state) of the rotator role 902b when it operates according to the scenario. Further, when the origin sensor data is set to ON, it is set to operate until the origin sensor (not shown) for the rotating body motor provided in the rotating body accessory 902b is turned on. indicates that there is

In operation scenario A, speed 3 and "+rotation" are set as the operation data of the rotor motor 902b2 with respect to the counter value 500 of the scenario counter 223xh. This "+rotation" is motion data that continues to rotate in the forward direction until the next motion data is set. Therefore, in this case, the rotator accessory 902b2 starts rotating in the forward direction at speed 3.

For the counter value 1000 of the scenario counter 223xh, the number of steps -100 and the speed 4 are set as the operation data of the lateral movement motor 902b3. The lateral movement motor 902b3 in the thirty-fifth control example is a stepping motor with a total number of steps of 200. 0 is the left range of motion limit Pt2, and 200 steps is the right range of motion limit Pt3. Therefore, in this case, the rotating accessory 902b starts moving at speed 4 toward the left movable range limit Pt2.

Speed 3 and "-rotation" are set as rotating body motor operation data. This "-rotation" is motion data that continues to rotate in the opposite direction until the next motion data is set. Therefore, in this case, the rotary accessory 902b starts to rotate in the opposite direction at speed 3.

For the counter value 3000 of the scenario counter 223xh, the number of steps +100 and the speed 4 are set as the operation data of the lateral movement motor 902b3. At this point, the lateral movement motor 902b3 has finished driving 100 steps in the reverse direction (that is, the step counter value is 0), so the position of the rotary accessory 902b is the left movable range limit Pt2. (See FIG. 1032(b)). Therefore, according to the action data set by the scenario counter value 3000, the rotary accessory 902b starts moving at speed 4 to the reference position Pt1 (see FIG. 1032(b)). In addition, speed 3 and "+rotation" are set as rotating body motor operation data. As a result, the rotator accessory 902b starts rotating in the forward direction at speed 3.

For the counter value 5000 of the scenario counter 223xh, the number of steps +100 and speed 4 are set as the operation data of the lateral movement motor 902b3. At this point, the lateral movement motor 902b3 has finished driving 100 steps in the forward direction (that is, the step counter value is 100), so the position of the rotary accessory 902b is the reference position Pt1 (Fig. 1032(b)). Therefore, according to the action data set by the scenario counter value 5000, the rotary accessory 902b starts moving at speed 4 to the right movable range limit position Pt3 (see FIG. 1032(b)).

At the counter value 7000 of the scenario counter 223xh, rotation stop is set as the rotor motor operation data. As a result, the rotor motor 902b2 stops rotating. At this point, the lateral movement motor 902b3 has finished driving 100 steps in the forward direction (that is, the step counter value is 200), so the position of the rotary accessory 902b is the right movable range limit Pt3. (See FIG. 1032(b)). In addition, since the rotating body motor 902b2 continues to rotate without setting the number of steps, the orientation becomes undefined when the operation data for stopping rotation is set.

Note that the scenario counter value of 7000 is the timing at which the success/failure determination result notification effect is executed in the operation scenario A of the relief chance effect. Therefore, information indicating that it is time to execute the out-notification effect is defined. This makes it possible for the sound lamp control device 113 to easily determine that it is time to notify the success/failure determination result.

In the scenario counter value of 11250, the number of steps -50 and speed 1 are set as the lateral movement motor operation data. At this point, the position of the rotary accessory 902b is the right range of motion limit Pt3 (see FIG. 1032(b)), and the step counter value is 200. , the rotary accessory 902b starts moving at speed 1 to the reference position Pt1. In addition, speed 1 and "-rotation" are set as the operation data of the rotor motor 902b2, and the rotor motor origin sensor data is set to ON. As a result, the rotating body motor 902b2 rotates until it reaches the origin position, so that the rotating body accessory 902b can return to the storage position in the forward rotation state.

As described above, in the operation scenario A, the fall pattern (the first drop pattern) in which the bar accessory 902a falls in stages to the lower limit is executed, and the horizontal movement pattern of the rotating body accessory 902b is initially Then, a movement pattern (first movement pattern) from the reference position Pt1 toward the left movable range limit Pt2 is executed.

In addition, in the thirty-fifth control example, there is an operation scenario E in addition to the operation scenario A as an operation scenario in which the first drop pattern and the first movement pattern are executed. As shown in FIG. 1047, this operation scenario E is an operation scenario that is set when the result of the success/failure determination is "win" and the value of the second effect counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 79". is.

Here, with reference to FIG. 1052, the contents of operation scenario E will be described. FIG. 1052(a) is a diagram schematically showing the content of an action scenario related to vertical driving of the bar accessory 902a in the action scenario E of the logo accessory 902. FIG. Until the scenario counter value reaches 6700, the motion of the first drop pattern is executed in the same manner as in the motion scenario A.

When the scenario counter value reaches 6700, the number of steps +40 and speed 2 are set as the left and right bar accessory motor operation data. At this point, the bar accessory 902a is at the lower limit position (that is, the position of the step counter value of 25), and the action data set by the scenario counter value of 6700 causes the bar accessory 902a to start the hit notification effect. After 100 ms has elapsed from the start position, the hit notification position shown in FIG. 1042(a) is reached.

After that, when the scenario counter value reaches 11300, the number of steps +35 and the speed 4 are set as the left and right bar accessory motor operation data. Since the step counter values of the left and right bar accessory motors are 65 at this point, the left and right bar accessory motors 902c7 and 902d7 are driven in the positive direction until the step counter values reach 100. It rotates at speed 4, and at the position of the step counter value of 100, the bar accessory 902a is in the retracted position.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1052(b), the contents of the action scenario related to the rotational drive and left-right drive of the rotary body accessory 902b in the action scenario E of the logo accessory 902 will be described. FIG. 1052(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the action scenario related to the rotational drive and left-right drive of the rotary body accessory 902b in the action scenario E of the logo accessory 902. FIG. As shown in FIG. 1052(b), up to the scenario counter value of 5000, the motion scenario of the first movement pattern (the pattern of first moving from the reference position Pt1 to the left range of motion limit Pt2) is executed in the same manner as the motion scenario A described above. executed. When the scenario counter value reaches 5000, the number of steps +100 and speed 2 are set as the lateral movement motor operation data. At this point, the rotating body accessory 902b is rotating at the reference position, and by setting this motion data, the rotating body accessory 902b starts moving at speed 2 to the right range of motion limit Pt3. In the thirty-fifth control example, the time required to drive 100 steps at speed 2 is set to 1000 ms.

When the scenario counter value reaches 6000, step number -100 and speed 2 are set as the lateral movement motor operation data, and speed 3 and "-rotation" are set as the rotor motor operation data. Since the rotator motor origin sensor data is set to ON, the rotator accessory 902b stops rotating in a forward rotation state when it rotates to the origin position. Also, at this point, the rotary accessory 902b is rotating at the position of the right range of motion limit Pt3, so by setting this motion data, the rotary accessory 902b moves at speed 2 to the reference position Pt1. to start.

Then, when the scenario counter value reaches 7000, the rotary accessory 902 stops in the normal rotation state at the reference position Pt1. Note that the scenario counter value 7000 is the timing for executing the notification effect of the success/failure determination result in the operation scenario E of the relief chance effect, and the jackpot winning is achieved by stopping the rotary accessory 902b in the forward rotation state at the reference position Pt1. Inform the player of something.

As described above, in the operation scenario E, the same operation pattern (first fall pattern and first movement pattern) as in the operation scenario A is performed for a predetermined period from the start of the relief chance presentation, and the player rotates at the start of the hit notification presentation. A scenario is executed in which the body object 902b stops in the normal rotation state at the position indicated by the up arrow 802 in FIG. 1041(b) (that is, the reference position Pt1).

Here, as described above, the operation scenario A is a scenario that is set when the value of the second effect counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 19" in the case where the result of judging whether the special symbol is right or wrong is "miss". Operation scenario E is an operation scenario that is set when the value of the second effect counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 79" when the result of judging whether the special symbol is "win". Since the second effect counter CS2 is a counter that is repeatedly updated within the range of "0 to 199", the operation scenario A is set at a rate of 10% of the case where the success/failure judgment result is "miss", and the operation scenario E It is set at a ratio of 40% when the success/failure determination result is "hit". In other words, the motion scenarios of the first falling pattern and the first moving pattern are more likely to be selected when the result of the decision is "hit" than when the result is "miss". In this way, the setting probabilities of the action scenarios of the first falling pattern and the first moving pattern are set differently depending on whether the result of the success/failure determination is "miss" or "hit". The person can easily predict the result of the judgment based on the operation pattern of the logo accessory 902 .

Next, the contents of operation scenario B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1049(a) is a diagram schematically showing the content of an action scenario related to vertical driving of the bar accessory 902a in the action scenario B of the logo accessory 902. FIG. This operation scenario B is an operation scenario that is set when the success/failure determination result is "miss" and the value of the second effect counter CS2 is in the range of "20 to 99". This is an operation scenario of the second drop pattern, which is a drop pattern in which the bar accessory 902a drops all at once from the storage position to the descent limit. In the second drop pattern, once the bar accessory 902a has fallen to the lower limit, the operation of confirming the origin of the rotating accessory 902b is executed. When it is determined that is confirmed, the operation of falling to the descent limit is performed again. This is because, in the second drop pattern, the bar object 902a drops to the lower limit at once, so that the width of the drop at one time of the bar object 902a is larger than in the first drop pattern, and especially the impact of the drop causes an abnormality in the origin sensor. This is because there is a risk of occurrence. In addition, as shown in FIG. 1036, the rotator accessory 902b of the logo accessory 902 in the thirty-fifth control example is angular rather than circular. Since there is a risk of interference with other structures provided in the base, the origin confirmation operation is performed at a position that does not interfere with other structures. When the origin position cannot be confirmed in the origin confirming operation, the second drop is stopped, and processing is executed to switch to an alternative relief chance presentation by the liquid crystal display.

As shown in FIG. 1049(a), when the value of the scenario counter 223xh becomes "1", the number of steps +25 and the speed 2 are set as the left and right bar accessory motor operation data. As a result, the left bar accessory motor 902c7 starts rotating clockwise at speed 2 until the step counter value reaches 25, and the right bar accessory motor 902d7 rotates counterclockwise until the step counter value reaches 25. , start rotating at the speed of speed 2. Then, when the scenario counter value is 250, the left and right bar accessory motors 902c7 and 902d7 are rotated to the step counter value of 25, and the left and right bar accessory stoppers 902c5 and 902d5 are released (OFF state). Therefore, the bar accessory 902a starts falling under its own weight to the lower limit.

After 2000 ms have passed since the ball fell to the lower limit, that is, when the scenario counter value reaches 2250, the number of steps +75 and the speed 2 are set as the left and right bar accessory motor operation data. As a result, the bar accessory 902a starts moving to the storage position. It should be noted that the origin confirmation operation of the rotary accessory 902b is executed in a period of 2000 ms after it falls to the lower limit.

When 750 ms have passed since the scenario counter value of 2250 and the scenario counter value reaches 3000, the bar accessory 902a is in the retracted position. Here, when the origin position can be confirmed in the origin confirming operation of the rotating body accessory 902b, the number of steps +25 and the speed 4 are set as the operation data of the left and right bar accessory motors 902c7 and 902d7, and the scenario counter value is set. At the time point 3500, the left and right bar accessory motors 902c7 and 902d7 are rotated to the step counter value of 25, and the left and right bar accessory stoppers 902c5 and 902d5 are released (OFF state). 902a starts to drop under its own weight to the lower limit.

Then, when the scenario counter value reaches 11250, the number of steps +75 and the speed 2 are set as the left and right bar accessory motor operation data. As a result, the bar accessory 902a starts moving to the storage position.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1049(b), the contents of the action scenario related to the left-right drive and the rotational drive of the rotary accessory 902b among the action scenarios B will be described. FIG. 1049(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of an action scenario related to left-right driving and rotational driving of the rotary accessory 902b in the action scenario B. FIG. The operation scenario B is an operation scenario in which the operation of confirming the origin of the rotary accessory 902b and the operation of the first movement pattern are executed.

When the scenario counter value reaches 250, the number of steps +100 and speed 2 are set as the lateral movement motor operation data, and speed 3 and +rotation are set as the rotor motor operation data. Also, the rotating body motor origin sensor data is set to ON. As a result, the rotator accessory 902b rotates clockwise to start moving to the right movable range limit Pt3, and the origin confirmation operation of the rotator motor 902b2 is started.

In the origin confirmation operation, when the rotator motor origin sensor detects the origin position of the rotator motor 902b, the origin flag 223xk is set to ON in the audio lamp controller 113. FIG. By setting the origin flag 223xk to ON, the continuation of the action scenario being executed is determined in the special scenario executing process (see FIG. 1063) to be described later, and the origin flag 223xk is set to ON by the end of the origin confirming operation. If not (that is, if the rotator motor origin sensor cannot detect the origin position), it is decided to stop the operation scenario being executed, and an alternative relief chance presentation is set by the liquid crystal display.

When the scenario counter value reaches 1250, the number of steps -100 and speed 2 are set as the lateral movement motor operation data, and the speed 3 and "-rotation" are set as the rotor motor operation data. At this point, the rotating body accessory 902b is positioned at the right range of motion limit Pt3, so that movement to the reference position Pt1 is started by setting this action data.

After 2000 ms have elapsed from the start of the origin confirming operation, that is, when the scenario counter value reaches 2250, rotation stop is set as the rotating body motor operation data. As a result, even if the rotator motor origin sensor fails to detect the origin position of the rotator motor 902b2, the rotator 902b stops rotating. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the rotary accessory 902b from continuing to rotate even at the retracted position. Since the scenario counter value 2250 is the timing of the end of the origin confirmation operation, information indicating the timing of the end of the origin confirmation operation is defined. As a result, the audio ramp control device 113 can determine that it is time to end the origin confirming operation.

After the origin confirming operation is completed and the bar object 902a falls to the descent limit again, the operation of the first movement pattern (the operation pattern of moving from the reference position Pt1 to the left movable range limit Pt2 first) similar to the operation scenario A. is executed.

In the operation scenario B, there is a difference in the scenario counter value in which the operation data is defined by the execution of the origin confirming operation with respect to the operation scenario A. By shortening the performance time of the notification performance, the time required until the action scenario ends is adjusted. By configuring in this manner, the time required to complete the action scenario is constant regardless of whether or not the origin confirmation action is performed, and regardless of which action scenario is selected, the action scenario is executed within the special pattern variation time. can be terminated.

In the thirty-fifth control example, the length of time required for the end of the action scenario is adjusted by shortening the effect time of the notification effect of the success/failure determination result. A configuration may be adopted in which the time required for movement of the rotating body accessory 902b is shortened by increasing the moving speed of the accessory 902b.

As described above, in the operation scenario B, the movement of the second falling pattern (the pattern of falling all at once from the storage position to the lower limit) is executed as the falling pattern of the bar accessory 902a, and the movement pattern of the rotating body accessory 902b is the second falling pattern. One movement pattern (a pattern in which the robot first moves from the reference position Pt1 to the left movable range limit Pt2) is set.

Note that, in the thirty-fifth control example, there is an operation scenario F in addition to the operation scenario B as an operation scenario in which the second fall pattern and the first movement pattern are executed. As shown in FIG. 1047, this operation scenario F is set when the result of the success/failure determination is "winning" and the value of the second effect counter CS2 is in the range of "80 to 99". is.

Now, with reference to FIG. 1053, the contents of operation scenario F will be described. FIG. 1053(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of an action scenario related to vertical driving of the bar accessory 902a among the action scenario F of the logo accessory 902. FIG. Until the scenario counter value reaches 9200, the motion of the second drop pattern is executed in the same manner as in the motion scenario B.

When the scenario counter value reaches 9200, the number of steps +40 and speed 2 are set as the left and right bar accessory motor operation data. At this point, the bar accessory 902a is at the lower limit position (that is, the position of the step counter value 25), and the action data set by the scenario counter value 9200 causes the bar accessory 902a to start the hit notification effect. After 100 ms has elapsed from the start position, the hit notification position shown in FIG. 1042(a) is reached.

After that, when the scenario counter value reaches 11300, the number of steps +35 and the speed 4 are set as the left and right bar accessory motor operation data. Since the step counter values of the left and right bar accessory motors are 65 at this point, the left and right bar accessory motors 902c7 and 902d7 are driven in the positive direction until the step counter values reach 100. It rotates at speed 2, and when the step counter value is 100, the bar accessory 902a is in the retracted position.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1053(b), the contents of the action scenario F related to the rotational drive and left-right drive of the rotary body accessory 902b in the action scenario F of the logo accessory 902 will be described. FIG. 1053(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of an action scenario related to rotational driving and left-right driving of the rotary body accessory 902b among the action scenario F of the logo accessory 902. FIG. As shown in FIG. 1053(b), until the scenario counter value reaches 2250, the origin confirmation operation is executed in the same manner as in the operation scenario B described above. After that, unlike the motion scenario B described above, the motion scenario of the second movement pattern is executed in which the robot first moves from the reference position Pt1 toward the right range of motion limit Pt3. Specifically, when the scenario counter value reaches 3500, the number of steps +100 and speed 4 are set as the lateral movement motor operation data, and the rotation body motor operation data is set to speed 3 and +rotation. Then, when the scenario counter value reaches 5500, the rotator accessory 902b rotates at the right movable range limit Pt3, and the number of steps -100 and speed 4 are set as the lateral movement motor operation data, and the rotator motor operates. At speed 3 as data - rotation is set. Then, when the scenario counter value reaches 7500, the motion scenario of the first movement pattern (the pattern of first moving from the reference position Pt1 to the left movable range limit Pt2) is executed. When the scenario counter value reaches 7500, the rotating accessory 902b is rotating at the reference position at this time. start moving to In addition, the rotating body accessory 902b is positioned at the left movable range limit Pt2.

When the scenario counter value reaches 8500, the number of steps +100 and speed 2 are set as the lateral movement motor operation data, and the speed 3 and + rotation are set as the rotor motor operation data. Since the rotator motor origin sensor data is set to ON, the rotator accessory 902b stops rotating in a forward rotation state when it rotates to the origin position. Also, at this point, the rotating body accessory 902b is rotating at the position of the left movable range limit Pt2, so by setting this motion data, the rotating body accessory 902b moves at speed 2 to the reference position Pt1. to start.

Then, when the scenario counter value reaches 9500, the rotary accessory 902 stops in the normal rotation state at the reference position Pt1. Note that the scenario counter value 7000 is the timing for executing the notification effect of the success/failure determination result in the operation scenario F of the relief chance effect, and the jackpot winning is achieved by stopping the rotary accessory 902b in the forward rotation state at the reference position Pt1. Inform the player of something.

As described above, in the operation scenario F, the same operation pattern (the second fall pattern and the first movement pattern) as in the operation scenario B is performed for a predetermined period (the period up to the scenario counter value of 2250) from the start of the relief chance presentation. , a scenario is executed in which the rotary accessory 902b stops in the normal rotation state at the position indicated by the up arrow 802 in FIG.

Here, as described above, the action scenario B is a scenario that is set when the value of the second effect counter CS2 is in the range of "20 to 99" in the case where the result of judging whether the special symbol is right or wrong is "miss". Operation scenario F is an operation scenario that is set when the value of the second effect counter CS2 is in the range of "80 to 99" when the result of judging whether the special symbol is "win". Since the second effect counter CS2 is a counter that is repeatedly updated in the range of "0 to 199", the action scenario B is set at a rate of 40% of the case where the result of the success/failure judgment is "miss", and the action scenario F is It is set at a rate of 10% when the success/failure determination result is "hit". In other words, the operation scenario of the second falling pattern and the first moving pattern is more likely to be selected when the result of the judgment is "miss" than when the result is "hit".

Next, the contents of operation scenario C will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1050(a) is a diagram schematically showing the content of an action scenario related to vertical driving of the bar accessory 902a in the action scenario C of the logo accessory 902. FIG. This operation scenario C is an operation scenario that is set when the result of the success/failure determination is "miss" and the value of the second effect counter CS2 is in the range of "100 to 139". As shown in FIG. 1050(a), similarly to the operation scenario A described above, the first drop pattern (the pattern in which the bar accessory 902a drops from the storage position to the lower limit step by step) as the drop pattern of the bar accessory 902a. is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1050(b), the contents of the action scenario related to the rotational drive and left-right drive of the rotary body accessory 902b in the action scenario C of the logo accessory 902 will be described. FIG. 1050(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the action scenario related to the rotational drive and left-right drive of the rotary body accessory 902b in the action scenario C of the logo accessory 902. FIG. As shown in FIG. 1050(b), unlike the motion scenario A described above, the motion scenario of the second movement pattern in which the robot first moves from the reference position Pt1 toward the right range of motion limit Pt3 is executed. It should be noted that this operation scenario differs from operation scenario A in that the rotation direction of the operation data specified in each scenario counter value is reversed, and the rest is the same.

In addition, in the thirty-fifth control example, there is an operation scenario G in addition to the operation scenario C as an operation scenario in which the first drop pattern and the second movement pattern are executed. As shown in FIG. 1047, this operation scenario G is an operation scenario that is set when the result of the success/failure determination is "win" and the value of the second effect counter CS2 is in the range of "100 to 159". is.

Here, with reference to FIG. 1054, the contents of the action scenario G of the logo accessory 902 will be described. FIG. 1054(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of an action scenario related to vertical driving of the bar accessory 902a among the action scenario G of the logo accessory 902. FIG. As shown in FIG. 1054(a), until the scenario counter value reaches 6700, the motion of the first fall pattern is executed in the same manner as in the motion scenario C.

When the scenario counter value reaches 6700, the number of steps +40 and speed 2 are set as the left and right bar accessory motor operation data. At this point, the bar accessory 902a is at the lower limit position (that is, the position of the step counter value of 25), and the action data set by the scenario counter value of 6700 causes the bar accessory 902a to start the hit notification effect. After 100 ms has elapsed from the start position, the hit notification position shown in FIG. 1042(a) is reached.

After that, when the scenario counter value reaches 11300, the number of steps +35 and the speed 4 are set as the left and right bar accessory motor operation data. Since the step counter values of the left and right bar accessory motors are 65 at this point, the left and right bar accessory motors 902c7 and 902d7 are driven in the positive direction until the step counter values reach 100. It rotates at speed 4, and at the position of the step counter value of 100, the bar accessory 902a is in the retracted position.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1054(b), the contents of the action scenario related to the rotational drive and left-right drive of the rotary body accessory 902b among the action scenarios G of the logo accessory 902 will be described. FIG. 1054(b) is a diagram schematically showing the content of an action scenario related to rotational driving and left-right driving of the rotary body accessory 902b in the action scenario G of the logo accessory 902. FIG. As shown in FIG. 1054(b), up to the scenario counter value of 5000, the motion scenario of the second movement pattern (the pattern of first moving from the reference position Pt1 to the right range of motion limit Pt3) is the same as the motion scenario C described above. executed. When the scenario counter value reaches 5000, step number -100 and speed 2 are set as the lateral movement motor operation data. At this point, the rotating body accessory 902b is rotating at the reference position, and by setting this motion data, the rotating body accessory 902b starts moving at speed 2 to the left movable range limit Pt2.

When the scenario counter value reaches 6000, the number of steps +100 and speed 2 are set as the lateral movement motor operation data, and the speed 3 and + rotation are set as the rotating body motor operation data. Since the rotator motor origin sensor data is set to ON, the rotator accessory 902b stops rotating in a forward rotation state when it rotates to the origin position. Also, at this point, the rotating body accessory 902b is rotating at the position of the left movable range limit Pt2, so by setting this motion data, the rotating body accessory 902b moves at speed 2 to the reference position Pt1. to start.

Then, when the scenario counter value reaches 7000, the rotary accessory 902 stops in the normal rotation state at the reference position Pt1. The scenario counter value of 7000 is the timing for executing the notification effect of the success/failure determination result in the operation scenario G of the relief chance effect. Inform the player of something.

As described above, in the operation scenario G, the same operation pattern (the first fall pattern and the second movement pattern) as in the operation scenario C is performed for a predetermined period from the start of the relief chance presentation, and the player rotates at the start of the hit notification presentation. A scenario is executed in which the body object 902b stops in the normal rotation state at the position indicated by the up arrow 802 in FIG. 1041(b) (that is, the reference position Pt1).

Here, as described above, the operation scenario C is a scenario that is set when the value of the second effect counter CS2 is in the range of "100 to 139" in the case where the result of judging whether the special symbol is right or wrong is "miss". , and the operation scenario G is an operation scenario set when the value of the second effect counter CS2 is in the range of "100 to 159" in the case where the result of judging whether the special symbol is "win". Since the second effect counter CS2 is a counter that is repeatedly updated within the range of "0 to 199", the operation scenario C is set at a rate of 20% of the case where the success/failure judgment result is "miss", and the operation scenario G It is set at a rate of 30% when the success/failure determination result is "hit". In other words, the operation scenarios of the first drop pattern and the second movement pattern are more likely to be selected when the result of the hit/fail determination is "hit" than when the result is "miss".

Next, the contents of operation scenario D will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1051(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of an action scenario related to vertical driving of the bar accessory 902a in the action scenario D of the logo accessory 902. FIG. This operation scenario D is an operation scenario that is set when the result of the win/loss determination is "miss" and the value of the second effect counter CS2 is in the range of "140 to 199". As shown in FIG. 1051(a), similar to the operation scenario B described above, the second drop pattern (the pattern in which the bar accessory 902a drops from the storage position to the lower limit at once) is performed as the drop pattern of the bar accessory 902a. is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1051(b), the contents of the action scenario related to the rotational drive and left-right drive of the rotary body accessory 902b in the action scenario D of the logo accessory 902 will be described. FIG. 1051(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the motion scenario related to the rotational drive and left-right drive of the rotary body accessory 902b in the motion scenario D of the logo accessory 902. FIG. As shown in FIG. 1051(b), unlike the motion scenario B described above, the motion scenario of the second movement pattern in which the robot first moves from the reference position Pt1 toward the right range of motion limit Pt3 is executed. It should be noted that this operation scenario differs from operation scenario B in that the rotation direction of the operation data specified in each scenario counter value is reversed, and the rest is the same.

Note that, in the thirty-fifth control example, there is an operation scenario H in addition to the operation scenario D as an operation scenario in which the second fall pattern and the second movement pattern are executed. As shown in FIG. 1047, this action scenario H is set when the result of the win/fail judgment is "win" and the value of the second effect counter CS2 is in the range of "160 to 199". is.

Here, with reference to FIG. 1055, the contents of the action scenario H of the logo accessory 902 will be described. FIG. 1055(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of an action scenario related to vertical driving of the bar accessory 902a among the action scenario H of the logo accessory 902. FIG. Until the scenario counter value reaches 9200, the motion of the second drop pattern is executed in the same manner as in the motion scenario D.

When the scenario counter value reaches 9200, the number of steps +40 and speed 2 are set as the left and right bar accessory motor operation data. At this point, the bar accessory 902a is at the lower limit position (that is, the position of the step counter value 25), and the action data set by the scenario counter value 9200 causes the bar accessory 902a to start the hit notification effect. After 100 ms has elapsed from the start position, the hit notification position shown in FIG. 1042(a) is reached.

After that, when the scenario counter value reaches 11300, the number of steps +35 and the speed 4 are set as the left and right bar accessory motor operation data. Since the step counter values of the left and right bar accessory motors are 65 at this point, the left and right bar accessory motors 902c7 and 902d7 are driven in the positive direction until the step counter values reach 100. It rotates at speed 2, and when the step counter value is 100, the bar accessory 902a is in the retracted position.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1055(b), of the action scenario H of the logo accessory 902, the contents of the action scenario related to the rotational drive and left-right drive of the rotating body accessory 902b will be described. FIG. 1055(b) is a diagram schematically showing the content of an action scenario related to rotational driving and left-right driving of the rotary body accessory 902b in the action scenario H of the logo accessory 902. FIG. As shown in FIG. 1055(b), up to the scenario counter value of 7500, the motion scenario of the second movement pattern (the pattern of first moving from the reference position Pt1 to the right range of motion limit Pt3) is the same as the motion scenario B described above. executed. When the scenario counter value reaches 7500, the number of steps +100 and speed 2 are set as the lateral movement motor operation data. At this point, the rotating body accessory 902b is rotating at the reference position, so by setting this motion data, the rotating body accessory 902b starts moving to the right range of motion limit Pt3 at speed 2. .

When the scenario counter value reaches 8500, the number of steps -100 and speed 2 are set as the lateral movement motor operation data, and the speed 3 and -rotation are set as the rotor motor operation data. Since the rotator motor origin sensor data is set to ON, the rotator accessory 902b stops rotating in a forward rotation state when it rotates to the origin position. Also, at this point, the rotary accessory 902b is rotating at the position of the right range of motion limit Pt3, so by setting this motion data, the rotary accessory 902b moves at speed 2 to the reference position Pt1. to start.

Then, when the scenario counter value reaches 9500, the rotary accessory 902 stops in the normal rotation state at the reference position Pt1. The scenario counter value of 7000 is the timing for executing the notification effect of the success/failure determination result in the operation scenario H of the rescue chance effect, and the jackpot is won by stopping the rotary accessory 902b in the normal rotation state at the reference position Pt1. Inform the player of something.

Thus, in action scenario H, the same action pattern (second fall pattern and second movement pattern) as in action scenario D is performed for a predetermined period from the start of the relief chance presentation, and the player rotates at the start of the hit notification presentation. A scenario is executed in which the body object 902b stops in the normal rotation state at the position indicated by the up arrow 802 in FIG. 1041(b) (that is, the reference position Pt1).

Here, as described above, the operation scenario D is a scenario that is set when the value of the second effect counter CS2 is in the range of "140 to 199" in the case where the result of the judgment of whether the special symbols are right or wrong is "miss". Operation scenario H is an operation scenario that is set when the value of the second effect counter CS2 is in the range of "160 to 199" when the result of judging the suitability of the special symbol is "win". Since the second effect counter CS2 is a counter that is repeatedly updated within the range of "0 to 199", the action scenario D is set at a rate of 30% of the case where the success/failure judgment result is "miss", and the action scenario H is It is set at a rate of 20% when the success/failure determination result is "win". In other words, the action scenarios of the second falling pattern and the second moving pattern are more likely to be selected when the result of the decision is "miss" than when the result is "hit".

Thus, in the thirty-fifth control example, when the result of the success/failure determination is “miss”, the operation scenario B (second drop pattern, first movement pattern), the operation scenario D (second drop pattern, second movement pattern), action scenario C (first fall pattern, second movement pattern), and action scenario A (first fall pattern, first movement pattern). are motion scenario E (first fall pattern, first movement pattern), motion scenario G (first fall pattern, second motion pattern), motion scenario H (second fall pattern, second motion pattern), motion scenario F (Second drop pattern, first movement pattern) are configured to be easily selected in this order. That is, the possibility of winning the jackpot is higher when the action of the first pattern is performed than when the action of the second falling pattern is performed, and the first movement is more likely than when the action of the second movement pattern is performed. The possibility of winning the jackpot is higher when the pattern action is executed, and the player can predict whether or not the jackpot will be won based on the action pattern of the logo accessory 902. Therefore, the interest in the game. can be improved.

In the thirty-fifth control example, the origin confirmation operation is performed only in the case of the second drop pattern (the pattern in which the bar accessory 902a drops from the storage position to the lower limit at once), but the configuration is not limited to this. The origin confirmation operation may also be performed in the first drop pattern (the pattern in which the bar accessory 902a drops step by step from the storage position). In this case, when the bar accessory 902a is in the right middle one-sided state (see FIG. 1033(a)), the origin confirmation operation is performed, and if the origin position cannot be confirmed, the bar accessory 902a is moved to the storage position. It is preferable to set the return operation data. In addition, in the thirty-fifth control example, various operation scenarios are defined by only rotating the various motors (left bar accessory motor, right bar accessory motor) in the direction in which the number of steps is added. However, without being limited to this, various motors may be specified to rotate in the direction in which the number of steps is reduced. In addition, instead of prescribing the rotation instruction contents for various motors, when the conditions for driving various motors are satisfied, the status of various accessories to be driven is determined, and based on the determination result, various It may be configured to determine the content of rotation instruction (rotation direction) to the motor, or to vary the content of rotation instruction to various motors based on the result of the target special symbol lottery. In this case, for example, only when the result of the special symbol lottery is a specific jackpot, at least one of the various motors may be driven in a rotating direction different from the normal one. With this configuration, the player is interested not only in the details of movement of various accessories (details of falling and details of horizontal movement), but also in the rotation directions of various motors for moving various accessories. can let

In the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113, in addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the thirty-second control example described above, a first effect counter xa, a second effect counter xb, and a character standby flag xc , an action scenario storage area 223xd, a moving accessory flag xe, a fluctuating flag xf, a fluctuating time counter 223xg, a scenario counter xh, each step counter xi, a special scenario flag 223xj, and an origin flag 223xk. , and a memory area 223z.

The first effect counter 223xa is a counter used for selecting a display variation pattern, and is repeatedly updated within the range of "0 to 199". It should be noted that it is updated by being incremented by one each time the main process is executed.

The second effect counter 223xb is a counter used for selecting the action scenario of the logo accessory 902, and is repeatedly updated within the range of "0 to 199". It should be noted that it is updated by being incremented by one each time the main process is executed.

The character object standby flag 223xc is a flag for indicating that the action scenario of the logo character object 902 is stored in the action scenario storage area 223xd. A change pattern for display with relief chance effect is set as the pattern, and it is set to ON when the determined action scenario is stored in the action scenario storage area 223xd (see S4536 in FIG. 1060). Then, when it is time to start the relief chance presentation and the action scenario is read out from the action scenario storage area 223xd in the relief chance presentation start process (see S3155 in FIG. 1062), it is set to OFF (see S3235 in FIG. 1062). .

The action scenario storage area 223xd is an area for storing the action scenario of the logo accessory 902 determined in the effect mode setting process 4 (see S4311A in FIG. 1060). The information (action scenario) stored in this action scenario storage area 223xd is read when the relief chance presentation is started (see S3232 in FIG. 1062).

The character object movable flag 223xe is a flag for indicating that the action scenario of the logo character object 902 is being set. It is set to ON (see S3236 in FIG. 1062). Then, when the value of the scenario counter 223xh is the end value (see S4653 in FIG. 1064), or when the operation scenario is set to stop (see S4362 in FIG. 1063), it is set to OFF.

During fluctuation flag 223xf is a flag for indicating that it is a fluctuation display period of special symbols, and fluctuation time counter 223xg is a counter for measuring the fluctuation time of special symbols. In the thirty-fifth control example, when the fluctuating flag 223xf is set to ON, the value of the fluctuating time counter 223xg is updated in the liquid crystal effect execution management process 4 (see S3120 in FIG. 1061).

The scenario counter 223xh is a counter for setting operation data defined in the operation scenario according to the elapse of the special symbol variation time. The scenario counter 223xh is incremented by 1 each time the special scenario execution process (S3157) or the relief chance effect execution process (S3159) in the liquid crystal effect execution management process 4 (see S3120 in FIG. 1061) is executed. The liquid crystal effect execution management process 4 (S3120) is a process that is executed each time 1 ms elapses in the main process of the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 1056). Therefore, the scenario counter is updated every 1 ms like the variable time counter 223xg.

The step counter xi is a counter for counting the number of steps of each stepping motor of the left bar accessory motor 902c7, the right bar accessory motor 902d7, the lateral movement motor 902b3, and the rotator motor 902b2.

The special scenario flag 223xj is a flag that is referred to for determining whether one of action scenarios B, D, F, and H is set as the action scenario of the logo accessory 902 in the rescue chance presentation. Although the details will be described later, in these operation scenarios, the operation of the second drop pattern (the operation pattern in which the bar accessory 902a drops from the storage position to the lower limit at once) is executed, so the special scenario flag 223xj is turned on. If there is, a special scenario executing process (see FIG. 1063) for controlling origin confirmation operation is executed. The special scenario flag 223xj is set to OFF when the origin confirmation operation is completed.

The origin flag 223xk is a flag that is set to ON when the rotator motor origin sensor detects the origin position of the rotator motor, and this origin flag 223xk is set to ON in the origin confirmation operation of the rotator accessory 902b. As a result, it is decided to continue the action scenario being executed, and if the origin flag 223xk is not set to ON in the origin confirming action, it is decided to stop the action scenario being executed.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area as a memory area 223z for temporarily storing a command received from the main controller 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing of the sound ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read, and the command is analyzed by the command determination processing. Then, the processing corresponding to the command is performed.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 performs variable display (variation production) is controlled. The details of the display control device 114 are already known and therefore omitted.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 976).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

<Regarding control processing executed by the sound ramp control device in the thirty-fifth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1056 to 1064, each control process executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described.

First, referring to FIG. 1056, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 1056 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has passed since the main process was started or since the process of S3101 was last executed (S3101). If the time has not elapsed (S3101: No), the process proceeds to S3121 without performing the processes of S3102 to S3112. In the processing of S3101, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has passed because S3102 to S3112 are processing related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). , and command determination processing 4 in S3121 and variable display setting processing 4 in S3122 are preferably executed in short cycles. By executing the process of S3121 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S3121 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Based on this, the setting regarding the variable display effect can be performed without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S3101 (S3101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S3103 to S3112 are sent to the display control device 114. Output processing is executed (S3102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S3108 described later (S3103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S3104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S3105 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S3105, a customer waiting effect is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S3106). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed. 114.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S3107). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed is monitored in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is the process of setting to perform production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is finished, the lamp editing processing is executed (S3108), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S3109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S3109, liquid crystal effect execution management processing 4 is executed (S3120), then various counter update processing is executed (S3111), and effect update processing is executed (S3112). After executing the process of S3112, the process proceeds to S3121. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process 4, the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is set. The lamp editing process of S3108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process 4. FIG. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S3109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The details of this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process 4 will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the processing of S3112, command determination processing 4 (S3121) for performing processing according to the command received from the main controller 110 is executed, and the processing proceeds to S3122. The details of this command determination process 4 (S3121) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S3122, in order to display a variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a variable pattern command for display is generated based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110, and the command is sent to the display controller 114. A variable display setting process 4, which is a process for setting for transmission to the . The details of this variable display setting process 4 will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S3122 is completed, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S3115). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S3115 (S3115: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S3117), and the power-off processing is executed (S3118). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off (S3119), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S3115 (S3115: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S3116), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S3116: No), the process returns to S3101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3116: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinitely looped, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, command determination processing 4 (S3121) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1057 is a flow chart showing this command determination process 4 (S3121). As shown in FIG. 1057, the command determination process 4 (S3121) is different from the command determination process (see S3113 in FIG. 983) in the thirty-second control example described above. S3218: Yes), the difference is that the symbol confirmation command process 4 (see S3219 in FIG. 1058) is executed. Other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 1058, the contents of the symbol determination command process 4 (see S3219) executed in the command determination process 4 (see S3121 in FIG. 1057) will be described. FIG. 1058 is a flow chart showing the details of the pattern confirmation command process 4 (S3219). This symbol confirmation command process 4 (S3219) is a process executed when a symbol confirmation command (stop command) set when the fluctuation time of the special symbol is over is received from the main controller 110. FIG.

When the symbol determination command process 4 (S3219) is executed, first, a display stop command for stopping the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S3651). The display stop command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed during the command output processing (S3102) of the main processing (see FIG. 1056) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent towards the controller 114 . When the display pattern confirmation command is received, the display control device 114 ends the variable display of the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81 . When the processing of S3651 ends, the variable flag xf is set to OFF (S3652), and the value of the variable time counter xg is reset (S3653).

Next, referring to FIG. 1059, the contents of the variable display setting process 4 (S3122) will be described. FIG. 1059 is a flow chart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 4 (S3122). This variable display setting process 4 (S3122) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 1056) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is executed in the third symbol display device 81 to execute the variable effect. , based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, generates and sets a variation pattern command for display.

In the variable display setting process 4 (S3122), first, it is determined whether the variable start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S4301). Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S4301: No), since the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, the process proceeds to S4306. do. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is ON (S4301: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is set to OFF (S4302), the extracted fluctuation pattern is obtained (S4303), and then the display control device 114 Execute the production mode setting process 4 for generating the display variation pattern command for notification based on the acquired variation pattern type (S4311), and display for showing the production mode set by the process of S4311 A variation pattern command is set (S4305), the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223a is shifted (S4312), and the fluctuating flag 223xf is set to ON (S4313). The details of the rendering mode setting process 4 (S4311) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S4306, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S4306). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S4306: No), it means that the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this processing is continued. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is ON (S4306: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is set to OFF (S4307), and then displayed based on the stop type extracted from the command in the processing of S4308. A stop type command is set (S4309), and then this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1060, the contents of the rendering mode setting process 4 (S4311) will be described. FIG. 1060 is a flow chart showing the details of the rendering mode setting process 4 (S4311). In this production mode setting process 4 (S4311), the process for setting the production mode of the variable production corresponding to the special symbol variation is executed, and the result of the special symbol lottery for which the production mode is set. Alternatively, processing for setting various effects is executed according to the game state that has been set. Further, when execution of the performance using the logo accessory 902 is determined as the variable performance, the operation scenario of the logo accessory 902 corresponding to the result of the target special symbol lottery is determined.

When the production mode setting process 4 (S4311) is executed, first, the counter values of the first production counter 223xa and the second production counter xb are acquired (S4531), and the obtained counter value of the first production counter 223xa and the fluctuation Based on the variation pattern type of the variation pattern extracted in the processing of S4303 in the display setting processing 4 (S3121 in FIG. 1059), the variation pattern for display is determined from the variation pattern selection 4 table 222xa (S4532).

Next, it is determined whether the display variation pattern determined in the process of S4532 is a display variation pattern with a relief chance effect (S4533). If it is determined to be a display variation pattern with a relief chance effect (S4533: Yes), the operation scenario selection table 222xb determines whether the special symbol lottery result for which the effect mode is to be set and the second effect. The operation scenario is determined based on the counter value of the counter 223xb (S4534), the determined operation scenario is stored in the operation scenario storage area 223xd (S4535), the role item standby flag 223xc is set to ON (S4536), and this End the process.

On the other hand, in the process of S4533, if it is determined that the display variation pattern does not include a relief chance effect (S4533: No), this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1061, the contents of the liquid crystal effect execution management process 4 (S3120) will be described. FIG. 1061 is a flow chart showing the contents of the liquid crystal effect execution management process 4 (S3120). This liquid crystal effect execution management process 4 (S3120) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 1056) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. Then, a process of updating the value of the variable time counter 223xg, which is set to a value synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81, is executed, and the effect mode corresponding to the updated value is determined. process is executed.

When the liquid crystal effect execution management process 4 (S3120) is executed, first, it is determined whether the fluctuating flag 223xf is ON (S3151). If it is determined that the fluctuating flag 223xf is not ON (that is, the special symbol fluctuating display is not executed) (S3151: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the fluctuating flag 223xf is ON (that is, when the special symbol fluctuating display is being executed) (S3151: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the fluctuation time counter 223xg (S3152).

When the processing of S3152 ends, it is determined whether or not the character product standby flag 223xc is on (S3153). (S3153: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the variable time counter 223xg updated in the process of S3152 is the start time of the relief chance presentation (S3154). If it is determined that it is not the time to start the relief chance effect (S3154: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S3154, when it is determined that it is time to start the relief chance presentation (S3154: Yes), the relief chance presentation start processing is executed (S3155). After that, this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 1062, the contents of the relief chance presentation start process (S3155) will be described. FIG. 1062 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the relief chance presentation start processing (S3155). This relief chance presentation start process (S3155) executes a process for starting the action scenario of the logo accessory 902 in accordance with the start of the relief chance presentation.

When the rescue chance effect start processing (S3155) is started, first, a display command is set for displaying a notification mode (display in the display area HR1 in FIG. 1041(b)) for reporting the start of the rescue chance effect. (S3231), the action scenario stored in the action scenario storage area 223xd is set (S3232).

When the processing of S3232 ends, it is determined whether the set operation scenario is one of operation scenarios B, D, G, and H (S3233). If it is determined to be one of operation scenarios B, D, G, or H (S3233: Yes), the special scenario flag 223xj is set to ON (S3234), and the process of S3235 is performed. On the other hand, in the processing of S3233, if it is determined that none of the operation scenarios B, D, G, or H is determined (that is, if the set operation scenario is any one of the operation scenarios A, C, E, or F), (S3233: No), the process of S3237 is skipped and the process of S3235 is performed.

In the processing of S3235, the role product standby flag 223xc is set to OFF (S3235), the role product movable flag 223xe is set to ON (S3236), and this processing ends.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to start the action scenario of the logo accessory 902 when a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) has elapsed since the special symbol variation was executed.

Returning to FIG. 1061, the description is continued. In the process of S3153, if it is determined that the character product standby flag 223xc is not on (S3153: No), it is determined whether the special scenario flag 223xj is on (S3156). If it is determined that the special scenario flag 223xj is ON (S3156: Yes), special scenario execution processing (S3157) is performed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 1063, the contents of the special scenario execution process (S3157) will be described. FIG. 1063 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the special scenario execution process. This special scenario executing process (S3157) is a process that is executed when any one of the action scenarios B, D, G, and H is set. This is a process for stopping the operation scenario of the logo accessory 902 and switching to an alternative relief chance presentation by liquid crystal display when the origin position cannot be detected by the confirmation operation.

When the special scenario execution process (S3157) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the scenario counter 223xh is the origin confirmation end value (S4351). If it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 223xh is not the value indicating the completion of origin confirmation (S4351: No), it is determined whether or not the origin flag 223xk is on (S4352). If it is determined that the origin flag 223xk is not on (that is, if the origin position cannot be detected) (S4352: No), it is determined whether or not the origin sensor (not shown) is on ( S4353). This origin sensor is a sensor for detecting the origin position of the rotator accessory 902b, and is turned on when the rotator accessory 902b is at the origin position. In the process of S4353, if it is determined that the origin sensor is ON (S4353: Yes), the origin flag 223xk is set to ON (S4354), and the process proceeds to S4355. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4353 that the origin sensor 223xk is not ON (S4353: No), the process of S4354 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S4355.

In the process of S4352, when it is determined that the origin flag 223xk is ON (S4352: Yes), the processes of S4353 and S4354 are skipped and the process proceeds to S4355.

In the process of S4355, the scenario counter value of the scenario counter 223xh is incremented by 1 (S4355), the action data corresponding to the updated scenario counter value is set (S4356), and this process ends.

In the process of S4351, if it is determined that the scenario counter value is the value indicating the completion of origin confirmation (S4351: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the origin flag 223xk is ON (S4357). If it is determined that the origin flag 223xk is on (S4357: Yes), the origin flag 223xk is set off (S4358), the special scenario flag 223xj is set off (S4359), and the process proceeds to S4355. do.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4357 that the origin flag 223xk is not ON (that is, if the origin position cannot be detected in the origin confirming operation) (S4357: No), the set operation scenario is canceled. is set (S4360), the counter value of the scenario counter 223xh is reset (S4361), and the accessory movable flag 223xf is set to OFF (S4362). After that, a display command for displaying an alternative relief chance presentation corresponding to the success/failure determination result is set (S4363), and this processing is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 1061, the description is continued. In the processing of S3156, if it is determined that the special scenario flag 223xj is not on (S3156: No), then it is determined whether or not the accessory movable flag 223xe is on (S3158). When it is determined that the accessory movable flag 223xe is not ON (that is, when the rescue chance effect is not being executed) (S3158: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S3158, when it is determined that the character product movable flag 223xe is ON (S3158: Yes), the rescue chance effect in-execution process is executed (S3159). After that, this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 1064, the contents of the relief chance presentation in-execution process (S3159) will be described. FIG. 1064 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the relief chance presentation in-execution processing (S3159). This relief chance effect in-execution process (S3159) is a process for setting operation data corresponding to the scenario counter value of the scenario counter 223xh.

When the relief chance effect in-execution process (S3159) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the scenario counter 223xh is a value indicating the end of the scenario (that is, END information) (S4651). If it is determined to be the end value of the scenario (S4651: Yes), the counter value of the scenario counter 223xh is reset (S4652), the accessory movable flag 223xe is set to off (S4653), and this processing is terminated. do.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 223xh is not the end value (S4651: No), then it is determined whether the counter value of the scenario counter 223xh is a value indicating the timing of the notification effect. (S4654). If it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 223xh does not indicate the timing of the notification effect (S4654: No), 1 is added to the scenario counter 223xh (S4659), and the updated scenario counter 223xh is updated. Operation data corresponding to the counter value is set (S4660), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4654, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 223xh is a value indicating that it is the timing of the notification effect (S4654: Yes), next, the result of the determination of whether the special symbol is a win. It is determined whether there is (S4655). If it is determined that the success/failure determination result is not hit (that is, if the success/failure determination result is out) (S4655: No), the stop position of the rotary accessory 902b is the hit notification position (Fig. 1041(b)). position indicated by the up arrow 802) (S4656). If it is determined to be the hit notification position (S4656: Yes), the lateral movement motor 902b3 is set to 30 steps (S4657), and the notification mode indicating failure (display of display area HR in FIG. 1042(b)) is displayed. A display failure notification command for display is set (S4658), and the process proceeds to S4659.

On the other hand, in the process of S4656, when it is determined that the stop position of the rotary accessory 902b is not the hit notification position (S4656: No), the process of S4657 is skipped and the process of S4658 is performed.

With this configuration, even if the rotary accessory 902b stops at the hit notification position despite being out of step due to a problem caused by a step-out or failure, additional operation data is set. By moving from the winning notification position, it is possible to prevent incorrect game information from being provided to the player.

In the process of S4655, when it is determined that the result of the determination is a hit (S4655: Yes), it is determined whether the stop position of the rotary accessory 902b is the hit notification position (S4661). When it is determined that the stop position of the rotary accessory 902b is the hit notification position (S4661: Yes), a display symbol movement command is set (S4662). This display symbol movement command moves the middle symbol row shown in FIG. 1041(b) by half a frame, and as shown in FIG. This is a command for displaying the entire pattern (middle-lower pattern Z2c shown in FIG. 1042(a)).

When the processing of S4662 ends, a success notification command for display is set (S4663) for displaying the notification mode (display of the display area HR shown in FIG. 1042(a)) indicating the success of the relief chance effect (S4663), and the processing of S4659 is performed. transition to

On the other hand, in the processing of S4661, when it is determined that the stop position of the rotary accessory 902b is not the winning notification position (S4661: No), the big winning is won after the notification mode indicating the failure is displayed on the liquid crystal display. A display resurrection notification command for displaying an effect (so-called resurrection effect) for displaying a notification mode indicating that is set (S4664), and the process proceeds to S4659.

By configuring in this way, the player can experience a strange effect such as displaying a notification mode indicating that the relief chance effect has succeeded even though the rotary accessory 902b has not stopped at the winning notification position. can be suppressed from executing on

As described above, in the thirty-fifth control example, the decoration of the game board surface, the decorative movable accessory (logo accessory 902), and part of the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 are combined. An effect of forming an effective line is executed. As a result, it is possible to make the player interested in the positional relationship between the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and the decoration of the game board surface, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In the thirty-fifth control example, the configuration is such that the effective line is formed by the decoration of the game board surface, the decorative movable accessory, and the third symbol. , the reserved symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may form an activated line.

Here, with reference to FIG. 1065, a modification of the thirty-fifth control example will be described. In the modification of the thirty-fifth control example, the activated line is formed by the decoration of the game board surface, the third symbol, and the reserved symbol, without using the movable accessory for decoration. As shown in FIG. 1065(a), when the relief chance effect is started, a character 801 is displayed, which is a mode suggesting that the display mode of the pending pattern hr0 during execution is changed, and the pending pattern hr0 is displayed. Change the mode to indicate that the mode is being changed. Then, in HR1 displayed in the upper center of the main display area Dm, there is displayed a guidance mode for guiding the effect success condition of ``Rescue chance! Jackpot if reserved pattern changes to ``word''''.

After a predetermined period of time (three seconds) has passed, as shown in FIG. 1065(b), the in-execution pending symbol hr0 is displayed in a preset display mode. FIG. 1065(b) is a diagram showing the case of success of the production, and by changing the execution pending pattern hr0 to the "word" pending pattern, the logo decoration Rg1, the middle/middle row pattern Z2b, and the execution pending pattern are displayed. A character string of "sea story" is formed vertically by hr0, the LED built in the logo decoration Rg1 blinks to indicate that the effective line is formed, and an effect is applied to emphasize the middle and middle pattern Z2b. be done.

By configuring in this way, even in a game machine in which no decorative movable accessory is mounted, it is possible to execute an effect combining the decoration of the game board surface and the third pattern.

In the thirty-fifth control example, the character string "Sea Story" is formed as a mode for notifying that the jackpot has been won, but the configuration is not limited to this, and another character string is formed. You can

<Thirty-sixth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1066 to 1114. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-sixth control example is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-fifth control example described above. (3 pieces) are installed, and the difference is that a new variable effect is added using the plurality of decorative movable accessories.

In the thirty-fifth control example described above, the effect (relief chance effect) using the decorative movable accessory is executed after the third symbol indicating the failure is displayed. On the other hand, in the thirty-sixth control example, a new effect using the decorative movable accessory is executed during the period before the third symbol is stop-displayed in a manner indicating the result of the winning/failing determination.

Here, conventionally, there is known a pachinko machine 10 that executes an effect using a decorative movable accessory as a part of a variable effect for notifying the result of judging the suitability of a special symbol. In such a pachinko machine 10, advance notice effects using decorative movable accessories are executed at various timings during the fluctuation period.

By the way, since the movable accessory for decoration in the pachinko machine 10 is movable on the front side of the display screen when viewed from the front, the display area overlapping the movable accessory for decoration on the display screen is visually recognized by the player while the movable accessory for decoration is moving. Difficulties are common.

Therefore, at the timing when the performance using the decorative movable accessory is executed, when another performance (for example, the ready-to-win mode of the third symbol) for providing the game information is displayed on the display screen, If it overlaps with the decorative movable accessory, it cannot be visually recognized by the player, and the composite effect is a troublesome effect for the player who expects that the third symbol indicating the winning of the jackpot will be stopped and displayed. There is a risk that the performance effect will be reduced.

On the other hand, in the thirty-sixth control example, the same performance result ("Gekiatsu" in FIG. Formation of mode for notifying high value), and by varying the type of element used to create and the content of control for each element, it is possible to execute a composite effect without interfering with the variable effect of the third symbol. are doing. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a suitable effect to the player regardless of when the composite effect is executed. In addition, since it is possible to change the effect mode of the compound effect showing the same effect result corresponding to the content of the variable effect displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, the compound effect is executed at various timings. It is possible to make it possible to increase the production effect.

The pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-sixth control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-fifth control example described above in that a plurality of decorative movable accessories are mounted, and the ROM 222 in the sound lamp control device 113 Also, the configuration of the RAM 223 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the 35 control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the thirty-fifth control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the decorative movable accessory of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-sixth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1066 to 1088, the configuration of the decorative movable accessory of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-sixth control example will be described. FIG. 1066 is a diagram showing the configuration of the game board surface of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-sixth control example. Compared to the 35th control example described above, the difference is that a plurality of decorative movable accessories are mounted, and the arrangement of the variable prize winning device 650, the specific prize winning port 65a, and the second ball entrance 640 is changed. are doing. Note that the structure of the variable winning device 650 is the same as that of the thirty-fifth control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-sixth control example, three movable decorative accessories, ie, a logo accessory 902, an "a" accessory 903, and a shutter accessory 904 are mounted as movable decorative accessories. As shown in FIG. 1066, normally, the logo component 902 is stored in the upper part of the third pattern display device 81, the "A" component 903 is stored in the lower center of the third pattern display device 81, and the shutter component 904 is stored. are housed on the left and right sides of the third pattern display device 81 . The detailed configuration of each decorative movable accessory will be described below.

FIG. 1067 is a front view of the action units of the logo character 902 and the "a" character 903. FIG. The logo accessory 902 is composed of a bar accessory 902a and a rotating accessory 902b, and the surface of the rotating accessory 902b is decorated with the character "ki". This logo accessory 902b incorporates an LED and can be illuminated by a command from the audio lamp control device 113. FIG.

The "a" accessory 903 is a decorative movable accessory decorated with the character "a" on its surface. Although details will be described later, in the thirty-sixth control example, the logo accessory 902, the "a" accessory 903, the "ge" character decoration 904a4 (see FIG. 1069) decorated on the shutter accessory 904, and the game board surface An effect of forming a character string "GEKIATSU" indicating that the expectation of winning the jackpot is high is executed by "tsu" character decoration 905 (see FIG. 1090).

FIG. 1068(a) is a diagram schematically showing the action units of the logo accessory 902. FIG. The configuration of this logo accessory 902 differs from the logo accessory 902 in the thirty-fifth control example described above only in the decoration applied to the surface, and the other configurations are the same.

As shown in FIG. 1068(a), this logo accessory 902 is composed of a bar accessory 902a, a rotating body accessory 902b, and left and right lifting mechanisms 902c and 902d. The configuration of the logo accessory 902 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 1076 to 1081 as appropriate.

The bar accessory 902a has lifting mechanisms 902c and 902d at both left and right ends. The lifting mechanisms 902c and 902d are symmetrical and have substantially the same shape. Therefore, in the left raising mechanism 902c, the description of the right raising mechanism 902d will be omitted for the same components as those described above.

The left lifting mechanism 902c has a two-stage rack composed of an upper rack 902c1 and a boot-shaped lower rack 902c2. It is connected to the rack 902c1. The height of the two-stage rack is variable by rotating the upper drive cam 902c3 to change the position of the cylindrical pin 902c3p provided on the upper drive cam 902c3.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 1076 and 1077, the detailed structure of the left raising mechanism 902c will be described. FIG. 1076 is an exploded front perspective view of lift mechanisms 902c and 902d, and FIG. 1077 is an exploded rear perspective view of lift mechanisms 902c and 902d. As shown in FIG. 1076, the left raising mechanism 902c is provided with a bar accessory motor 902c7 which is a stepping motor for upward driving. The bar accessory motor 902c7 is provided with an upper drive gear 902c4 that engages with the upper drive cam 902c3. The bar accessory motor 902c7 operates to rotate the upper driving gear 902c4, thereby rotating the upper driving cam 902c3. A cylinder pin 902c3p is provided on the upper drive cam 902c3, and the position of the cylinder pin 902c3p is varied by rotating the upper drive cam 903c3.

The cylindrical pin 902c3p protrudes forward in a front view, and when the bar accessory 902a is in the storage position, the bottom of the lower rack 902c2 is supported from below by the cylindrical pin 902c3p. By moving the cylindrical pin 902c3p clockwise (counterclockwise in the case of the right lifting mechanism 902d) from the position shown in FIG. Cylinder pin 902c3p loses support. The bar function 902a is supported by a stopper 902c5 (see FIG. 1077), and when the stopper 902c5 is locked, the bar function 902a falls even if the lower rack 902c2 loses the support of the cylindrical pin 902c3p. do not.

This stopper 902c5 slides the arm member 902c6 connected to the upper driving cam 902c3 by rotating the bar accessory motor 902c7 by a predetermined number of steps (25 steps in the thirty-fifth control example). By moving the connecting link member 902c5L up and down, it can be changed between the locked state and the unlocked state. When the stopper 902c5 is in the released state and the cylindrical pin 902c3p does not enter the lower portion of the lower rack 902c2, the lower rack 902c2 drops due to its own weight. At this time, the connecting gear 902c8a that connects the lower rack 902c2 and the upper rack 902c1 is engaged with the lower protruding piece 902c8c provided on the column portion of the lifting mechanism 902c and rotates counterclockwise. The connecting gear 902c8a is also engaged with an upper projecting piece 902c8b (see FIG. 1077) provided on the upper rack 902c1, and the connecting gear 902c8a rotates counterclockwise to lower the upper rack 902c1. As a result, the bar accessory 902a falls to the lower limit.

Only the right raising mechanism 902d is provided with a right halfway stop solenoid 902d9 shown in FIG. 1032(a). When the right midway stop solenoid 902d9 is ON, the valve protrudes toward the back side in the front view, and the bar accessory 902a falling under its own weight can be stopped at the position shown in FIG. 1033(a). . On the other hand, when the right midway stop solenoid 902d9 is turned off, the valve retracts and the bar accessory 902a falls to the lower limit.

Here, in the thirty-fifth control example, two types of falling patterns can be set as the falling pattern of the bar accessory 902a. First, the first drop pattern is a right intermediate one-sided drop state in which the left stopper 902c5 remains locked, only the right stopper 902d5 is released, and the right halfway stop solenoid 902d9 is turned ON (see FIG. 1033(a)). After that, the left stopper 902c5 is released from the right middle one-sided drop state, and the left end of the bar accessory 902a is dropped to the lower limit (see FIG. 1033(b)), which is the left one-sided drop state (see FIG. 1033(b)). This is the first drop pattern in which the stop solenoid 902d9 is turned off and the right end of the bar accessory 902a is also dropped to the lower limit (the position shown in FIG. 1032(b)).

The second drop pattern is the second drop pattern in which the left and right stoppers 902c5 and 902d5 are simultaneously released and the right halfway stop solenoid 902d9 is turned off, so that the bar accessory 902a drops to its lower limit at once under its own weight. .

In this way, even with the structure in which the bar accessory 902a is dropped by its own weight, it is possible to set various drop patterns by varying the release timings of the right halfway stop solenoid 902d9 and the left and right stoppers 902c5 and 902d5.

Returning to FIG. 1076, the description continues. When the bar accessory 902a is at the lower limit (in the state shown in FIG. 1070), the upper driving cam 902c3 rotates clockwise (counterclockwise in the right raising mechanism 902d), so that the cylindrical pin 902c3p It moves clockwise from the position shown in 1032(b), enters the bottom of the lower rack 902c2, and pushes up the lower rack 902c2. When the lower rack 902c2 is pushed up by the cylindrical pin 902c3p, the connecting gear 902c8a (see FIG. 1077) engages with the lower protruding piece 902c8c (see FIG. 1077) provided on the supporting column of the lifting mechanism 902c, and the connecting gear 902c8a Rotate clockwise. This connecting gear 902c8a is also engaged with an upper projecting piece 902c8b (see FIG. 1077) provided on the upper rack 902c1, and the connecting gear 902c8a rotates clockwise to raise the upper rack 902c1.

In this way, the two-stage rack of the upper rack 902c1 and the lower rack 902c2 enables vertical driving with a stroke longer than the diameter of the upper drive cam 902c3, so that the weight of the upper drive cam 902c3 can be reduced. , the output of the stepping motor for driving can be suppressed and driven. Therefore, power consumption of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 1080 and 1081, the structure of the rotary accessory 902b will be described. FIG. 1080 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating body accessory 902b and the bar accessory 902a, and FIG. 1081 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating body accessory 902b and the bar accessory 902a. The rotating body 902b1 is a member whose surface is decorated, and in the thirty-fifth control example, the character "object" related to the theme of the pachinko machine 10 is decorated (see FIG. 1070). A rotating body motor 902b2, which is a stepping motor for rotational driving, and a roller slider 902b6 are provided on the back side of the rotating body 902b1 (see FIG. 1079). When the rotating body motor 902b2 is driven based on the operation data set by the sound lamp control device 113, the rotating gear 902b7 rotates, and the rotation of the rotating gear 902b7 causes the rotating body 902b1 to rotate.

The rotor motor 902b2 can rotate clockwise or counterclockwise based on the operation data set by the sound lamp control device 113, and the rotor 902b1 rotates corresponding to the rotation direction of the rotor motor 902b2. Direction is variable.

In addition, the rotation speed of the rotor motor 902b2 can be set in four stages based on the operation data set by the sound lamp control device 113, and the rotation speed of the rotor 902b1 can also be adjusted in accordance with the rotation speed of the rotor motor 902b2. Variable.

As shown in FIG. 1078, a roller slider 902b6 provided on the rotating body accessory 902b is configured so that a ball screw 902b5 can be inserted therethrough. The ball screw 902b5 is provided with a lateral driving gear 902b4 and a lateral driving stepping motor 902b3 on the left end in front view, and the lateral driving gear is rotated by driving the lateral moving motor 902b3. Then, the ball screw 902b5 rotates. When the ball screw 902b5 rotates, the roller slider 902b6 moves left and right. As a result, the rotary accessory 902b can be moved left and right.

Here, with reference to FIG. 1090(a), the right and left movable range of the rotary accessory 902b will be described. The rotating body accessory 902b can move left and right on the front side of the bar accessory 902a in a front view within a range from the left range of motion limit Pt2 to the right range of motion limit Pt3. Also, a reference position Pt1 is set between the left and right movable range limits Pt2 and Pt3, and when the bar accessory 902a is at the retracted position, it stops at the reference position Pt1.

The lateral movement motor-902b3 can rotate clockwise or counterclockwise according to the operation data set by the audio ramp control device 113, and when the lateral movement motor 902b3 rotates clockwise, the rotator accessory 902b moves to the right when viewed from the front, and rotates counterclockwise, the rotary accessory 902b moves to the left when viewed from the front.

The bar accessory 902a is provided with sensors (not shown) at positions corresponding to the reference position Pt1, the left range of motion limit Pt2, and the right range of motion limit Pt3, so that the left and right positions of the rotating body accessory 902b can be detected. Configure.

In addition, the rotation speed of the lateral movement motor 902b3 can be set in four stages based on the operation data set by the sound ramp control device 113, and the rotating accessory 902b moves according to the rotation speed of the lateral movement motor 902b3. The speed is also variable.

Returning to FIG. 1068(b), the description is continued. FIG. 1068(b) is a diagram schematically showing the action unit of the "A" role product 903, showing a state where the "A" role product 903 has risen to the upper limit. Hereinafter, the detailed structure of the "a" character will be described with reference to FIGS. 1082 to 1085 as appropriate.

1082 and 1084 are exploded front perspective views of the "a" accessory 903, and FIGS. 1083 and 1085 are exploded rear perspective views of the "a" accessory 903. FIG. As shown in FIG. 1082, the "A" role item 903 is composed of an ascending role item 903a and an ascending rail 903b.

As shown in FIG. 1084, the ascending accessory 903a is provided with an accessory motor 903a3 which is a stepping motor for vertical driving. A gear 903a2 attached to an arm member is connected to the accessory motor 903a3, and when the accessory motor 903a3 is driven clockwise, the arm member rises and is driven counterclockwise. to descend. As this arm member moves up and down, the height of the rising accessory 903a is variable.

FIG. 1069 is a diagram schematically showing the operation unit of the shutter accessory 904, showing the case where the shutter accessory 904 is in the closed state. As shown in FIG. 1069, when the shutter accessory 904 is closed, a "ge" character decoration 904a4 is formed across the first left shutter door 904a1 and the left shutter door 904a2. The detailed structure of the shutter function 904 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 1086 and 1087 as appropriate.

FIG. 1086 is a front perspective view showing the operation unit when the shutter accessory 904 is in the open state. The shutter accessory 904 in the open state is stored in a state in which three shutter doors 904a1 to 904a3 and 904b1 to 904b3 provided on each side are overlapped. A rail mechanism 904c having a shutter accessory motor, which is a stepping motor for opening and closing the shutter door, is provided above the shutter door.

The rail mechanism 904c is provided with a left shutter accessory motor 904c1 for driving the opening and closing of the left shutter doors 904a1 to 904a3 and a right shutter accessory motor 904c5 for driving the opening and closing of the right shutter doors 904b1 to 904b3. By driving the shutter accessory motors 904c1 and 904c5 clockwise, the slide gears 904c4a and 904c4b respectively connected to the shutter accessory motors 904c1 and 904c5 slide in the closing direction. Shutter gears 904c3a and 904c3b connected to the slide gears 904c4a and 904c4b, respectively, also slide in conjunction with each other, thereby forming a third left shutter door 904a3 connected to the shutter gear 904c3a and a third right shutter door connected to the shutter gear 904c3b. 904b3 slides in the closing direction. The left shutter doors 904a1-904a3 are connected by connecting members, and the right shutter doors 904b1-904b3 are also connected by connecting members. Therefore, when the left and right third shutter doors 904a3 and 904b3 slide in the closing direction, the shutter doors 904a1, 904a2, 904b1 and 904b2 also slide together. In addition, the shutter accessory 904 can be opened by driving the left and right shutter accessory motors 904c1 and 904c5 counterclockwise.

FIG. 1070 shows a state in which the logo accessory 902 is at the lower limit position, FIG. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing a case where the logo accessory 902 is in a state where the right middle part falls and the left part falls. Also, FIG. 1073 is a diagram showing a state in which the "a" accessory 903 has risen to the upper limit.

FIG. 1074 is a diagram showing a case where the shutter accessory 904 is closed. As shown in FIG. 1074, the shutter accessory 904 is composed of a plurality of shutter doors 904a1 to 904a3 and 904b1 to 904b3. When the shutter accessory 904 is in a closed state, the entire display area of the third pattern display device 81 is covered, so that the player cannot visually recognize the effect displayed in the display area.

FIG. 1075 is a diagram showing a case where all decorative movable accessories are in a movable state. As shown in FIG. 1075, all the decorative movable accessories are moved and stopped at predetermined positions to form a character string "GEKIATSU" in combination with the "tsu" character decoration 905 on the game board surface.

<Regarding the effect contents in the 36th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1089 to 1096, the characteristic presentation contents executed in the thirty-sixth control example will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-sixth control example, a composite effect (character effect) in which all the decorative movable accessories are used to form a character string "Gekiatsu" is performed as a effect suggesting that the expectation of winning the jackpot is high. Execute. In the thirty-sixth control example, this composite effect is executed at various timings during the variable display period of the special symbols. Specifically, the execution timing is defined for each set variation pattern, and there are cases where it is executed during the pre-reach performance period of the special symbol and during the ready-hiz performance period.

By making the execution timing of the composite effect different depending on the variation pattern in this way, it becomes difficult for the player to predict the execution timing of the composite effect. It becomes possible.

First, with reference to FIGS. 1089 to 1090(a) and FIG. 1094, the composite effect of the normal pattern will be described. The composite effect of the normal pattern is a pattern of the composite effect executed during the pre-reach effect period of the variable display period of the special symbols. The pre-reach production period is a period from when the variable display of the third pattern is started in the third pattern display device 81 until the third pattern becomes a ready-to-win mode, and in addition to the composite production, the result of the winning/failure determination is announced. Various foretelling effects are executed for the purpose. In the normal pattern composite effect, all the decorative movable accessories are used to form the character string "Gekiatsu".

Here, with reference to FIG. 1094, the relationship between the special symbol variation, the effect display of the third symbol display device 81, and each decorative movable accessory when the normal pattern composite effect is executed will be described. FIG. 1094 is a timing chart showing the state of the special symbol variation, the effect display of the third symbol display device 81, and each decorative movable accessory when the normal pattern composite effect is executed.

In FIG. 1094, the case where "super reach (variation time 80 s)" is set as the variation pattern type of the special symbol will be described as an example. As shown in FIG. 1094, in the "super reach" variation pattern, the pre-reach effect period is 40 seconds, and the reach effect period is 40 seconds. When the variable display of the special symbols is started, in the third symbol display device 81, a liquid crystal effect including an advance notice effect for announcing the success/failure determination result is executed for 20 seconds. During this period, each decorative movable accessory is in the retracted state, so the player can visually recognize the effect displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 .

When 20 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, a 20-second composite effect is started. Although the details will be described later, in the thirty-sixth control example, it is determined whether or not it is the ready-to-win effect period at the start timing of the composite effect, and the operation scenario of the decorative movable accessory is set according to the determination result. (See Figure 1111). In the example shown in FIG. 1094, since it is the pre-reach effect period, a normal pattern operation scenario is set. In the operation scenario of the normal pattern, when the composite effect is started, the logo accessory 902 falls to the lower limit, and the rotary accessory 902b rotates and moves to the right range of motion limit Pt3. FIG. 1089(a) is a diagram schematically showing the display state of the third pattern display device 81 and the state of each decorative movable accessory at the time when three seconds have passed since the start of the composite effect.

As shown in FIG. 1089(a), the third pattern is variably displayed in each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81. Since the object 902 is positioned on the near side, it cannot be visually recognized by the player. The rotating body accessory 902b has moved from the reference position Pt1 to the right movable range limit Pt3. After that, the rotator accessory 902b starts moving toward the left range of motion limit Pt2 while rotating counterclockwise. At this point, the "a" role 903 and the shutter role 904 are in a stored state.

Returning to FIG. 1094, the description continues. When 5 seconds have passed since the start of the composite effect, the shutter accessory 904 is closed. FIG. 1089(b) is a diagram schematically showing the display state of the third symbol display device 81 and the state of each decorative movable accessory at the point where 5 seconds have passed since the start of the composite effect. The shutter accessory 904 is in a closed state and a "ge" character decoration 904a4 is formed. The portion of the shutter accessory 904 decorated with the "ge" character decoration 904a4 is composed of a member that can be seen through the back, and by displaying the effect in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, It is possible to make it look as if the portion of the "ge" character decoration 904a4 is emitting light. In the thirty-sixth control example, as a mode for indicating that each decorative accessory is positioned at the final stop position in the composite effect, the decorative movable accessory at the final stop position is made to emit light.

Note that the rotary accessory 902b is in the process of moving from the right range of motion limit Pt3 toward the left range of motion limit Pt2.

Returning to FIG. 1094, the description continues. After 7 seconds have passed since the start of the composite effect, the "a" accessory 903 is in an elevated state. FIG. 1090(a) is a diagram simply showing the display state of the third pattern display device 81 and the state of each decorative movable accessory when seven seconds have passed since the start of the composite effect. In response to the rotator accessory 902b arriving at the left movable range limit Pt2, which is the final stop position, the LED built in the rotator accessory 902b is in a state of emitting light. In addition, when the "A" role object 903 has ascended to the final stop position, that is, the upper limit, the LED built in the "A" role object 903 emits light. Then, in response to all the decorative movable accessories stopping at the final stop position, the LED attached to the "tsu" character decoration 905 on the game board surface emits light, so that "Gekiatsu" appears on the production line EL1. The player can easily recognize that the character string is formed.

Returning to FIG. 1094, the description continues. Each decorative movable accessory that has entered a movable state returns to the stored state at the timing specified in the action scenario before the end of the composite production period. The role item is stored. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ready-to-reach mode of the third symbol from becoming invisible due to the decorative movable accessory.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 1090(b) to 1093, 1095 and 1096, an example of a case where the composite effect is executed during the ready-to-win effect period will be described. First, the alternate pattern 1 of the composite effect executed during the ready-to-win effect period will be described. The alternative pattern 1 of the composite effect is an alternative pattern of the composite effect executed when the reach line displaying the reach state of the third symbol is other than the middle line L2. As described above, by closing the shutter accessory 904, the player cannot visually recognize the third symbol in the reach state displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and the player cannot see the reach state. Since it may give a misunderstanding that the effect has ended, in the alternative pattern 1, the shutter function 904 is not closed, and the liquid crystal display is used to display the character "ge" at a position that does not overlap with the third symbol of the reach mode. display.

Here, with reference to FIG. 1095, the relationship between the special symbol variation, the effect display of the third symbol display device 81, and each decorative movable accessory when the composite effect of the alternative pattern 1 is executed will be described. FIG. 1095 is a timing chart showing the special symbol variation, the effect display of the third symbol display device 81, and the state of each decorative movable accessory when the normal pattern composite effect is executed. In addition, as in the example shown in FIG. 1094, the case where "super reach" is set as the variation pattern type will be described as an example.

After the liquid crystal performance is executed in the pre-ready performance period of 40 seconds from the start of the variation of the special symbols, the third pattern is stopped on the effective line in the ready-to-win mode. In the example shown in FIG. 1095, it becomes the start timing of the composite effect at the same time as the start of the ready-to-win effect period. Here, if it is determined that it is during the ready-to-win effect period, it is determined whether or not the effective line displaying the ready-to-win state of the third symbol is the middle line L2 (see FIG. 1092(a)), When it is determined that it is not the middle line L2, the operation scenario of the alternative pattern 1 is set.

FIG. 1090(b) is a diagram simply showing the display state of the third pattern display device 81 and the state of each decorative movable accessory at the time when three seconds have passed since the start of the composite effect of the alternative pattern 1. FIG. Unlike the example shown in FIG. 1089(a), the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2 is being variably displayed. In addition, a third symbol with the same number is stopped and displayed on the upward left line L5, and is in a reach state. A guidance mode is displayed to notify that the mode is in effect. In addition, as shown in FIG. 1090(b), the left middle pattern z1b and the right middle pattern z3b displayed on the middle line L2 are located behind the logo accessory 902. becomes invisible.

Then, when five seconds have passed since the start of the composite effect of the alternative pattern 1, unlike the composite effect of the normal pattern, the shutter accessory 904 does not enter the closed state, and the upper line L1 of the main display area Dm and the middle pattern Z2 are displayed. A "ge" character display 810 is displayed at the intersection. Also, the rotary accessory 902b stops at the reference position Pt1. This is because when the rotary accessory 902b stops at the left movable range limit Pt2, the upper left pattern z1a forming the reach mode appears on the extension of the line connecting the "tsu" character decoration 905 and the rotary accessory 902b. Since it is displayed, the "ge" character display 810 cannot be displayed, and the character string "gekiatsu" cannot be formed on the line connecting the "tsu" character decoration 905 and the rotary accessory 902b and its extension line. is.

After that, when 7 seconds have passed since the start of the composite effect of the alternative pattern 1, instead of the "a" character 903 not rising to the upper limit, the intersection of the second special line tL2 and the lower line L3 in the main display area Dm ” character display 811 is displayed. When the "a" character display 811 is displayed in the main display area Dm, the "ge" character display 810 moves from the intersection of the middle symbol row Z2 and the upper line L1 to the intersection of the first special line tL1 and the upper line L1. displayed. As a result, a character string of "gekiatsu" is formed on the line connecting the "tsu" character decoration 905 and the rotary accessory 902b and its extension line. Then, when the character string "gekiatsu" is formed, the "ge" character display 810 and the "a" character display 811 forming the character string "gekiatsu" emit light by the effect, and the rotary accessory 902b The LEDs incorporated in the "tsu" character decoration 905 emit light. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize that the character string "Gekiatsu" is formed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 1092 to 1093 and 1096, an example in which the alternative pattern 2 composite effect is executed during the ready-to-win effect period will be described. The composite effect of the alternative pattern 2 is executed when the third symbol is in the ready-to-win state on the middle line L2. In this case, if the logo accessory 902 is dropped to the lower limit, it will cover the third pattern in the reach mode. The "tsu" character decoration 905 forms the "gekiatsu" character string.

Here, with reference to FIG. 1096, the relationship between the special symbol variation, the effect display of the third symbol display device 81, and each decorative movable accessory when the composite effect of the alternative pattern 2 is executed will be described. FIG. 1096 is a timing chart showing the special symbol variation, the effect display of the third symbol display device 81, and the state of each decorative movable accessory when the composite effect of the alternative pattern 2 is executed.

In FIG. 1096, the case where "super reach (variation time 80 s)" is set as the variation pattern type of the special symbol will be described as an example. As shown in FIG. 1096, the example of the case where the composite effect of the alternative pattern 1 described above is executed is that all the decorative movable accessories remain in the retracted state during the effect period of the composite effect. They are different and otherwise the same.

FIG. 1092(a) is a diagram simply showing the display state of the third pattern display device 81 and the state of each decorative movable accessory when three seconds have passed since the start of the composite effect of the alternative pattern 2. FIG. be. A third pattern is stopped and displayed in each of the left pattern row Z1 and the right pattern row Z3, and the third pattern is displayed in a ready-to-win mode on the upper line L1, the middle line L2 and the lower line L3. Also, in the central part of the main display area Dm, a "ki" character display 812 is displayed as a substitute for the rotary accessory 902b.

When 5 seconds have passed since the start of the composite effect of the alternative pattern 2, the shutter accessory 904 does not enter the closed state as in the alternative pattern 1, and the intersection of the upper line L1 of the main display area Dm and the middle pattern Z2 shows a "g". A character representation 810 is displayed.

After that, when 7 seconds have passed since the start of the composite effect of the alternative pattern 2, similarly to the alternative pattern 1, instead of the "a" character 903 not rising to the upper limit, the second special line tL2 and the lower stage of the main display area Dm A character display 811 is displayed at the intersection of the line L3. When the "a" character display 811 is displayed in the main display area Dm, the "ge" character display 810 moves from the intersection of the middle symbol row Z2 and the upper line L1 to the intersection of the first special line tL1 and the upper line L1. displayed. As a result, a character string of "gekiatsu" is formed on the line connecting the "tsu" character decoration 905 and the rotary accessory 902b and its extension line. Then, when the character string "gekiatsu" is formed, the "ge" character display 810 and the "a" character display 811 forming the character string "gekiatsu" emit light by the effect, and the rotary accessory 902b The LEDs incorporated in the "tsu" character decoration 905 emit light. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize that the character string "Gekiatsu" is formed.

Thus, in the thirty-sixth control example, at the timing when the composite effect is started, it is determined whether or not the reach state of the third symbol is displayed and the display position of the reach line, and the operation of the decorative movable accessory is determined. By setting the scenario, it is possible to prevent the reach mode of the third pattern from being visually recognized by the player due to the decorative movable accessory, and give the player the misunderstanding that the reach performance has ended. It is configured so that

In the thirty-sixth control example, the operation scenario is set depending on whether or not the ready-to-win state of the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. A configuration may be adopted in which priority is given to the announcement effects to be executed, and the operation scenario of the decorative movable accessory is set depending on whether or not the announcement effects with the higher priority are being executed.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-sixth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 1097, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-sixth control example will be described. FIG. 1097 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-sixth control example. In the thirty-sixth control example, part of the configuration of the ROM 222 possessed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 and part of the configuration of the RAM 223 are changed from the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-fifth control example described above. The difference is that a drive motor for the shutter accessory 903 and a drive motor for the shutter accessory 904 are added, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same contents, and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-sixth control example via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 includes the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, the bar accessory motors 902c7 and 902d7, the rotating body motor 902b2, the lateral movement motor 902b3, An accessory motor 903a3, left and right shutter accessory motors 904c1 and 904c5, and a right midway stop solenoid 902d9 are connected respectively.

Next, referring to FIG. 1098(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 included in the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the thirty-sixth control example will be described. FIG. 1098(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the thirty-sixth control example. A variation pattern selection 5 table 222xc is provided in place of the variation pattern selection 4 table 222xa for the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the above-described 35th control example, and a composite effect operation scenario table 222xd and a first alternative operation are newly added. The difference is that a scenario table 222xe and a second alternative operation scenario table 222xf are added.

In the variation pattern selection 5 table 222xc, the variation pattern of each variation pattern type (outgoing, false out, various types of reach, etc.) is set in the counter value for variation pattern selection. The sound ramp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, the result of the suitability determination, and the acquired counter value for selection. This allows the audio ramp control device 113 to select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the variation time and the type of variation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode from being displayed frequently, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early.

In addition, in the thirty-sixth control example, a variation effect is executed in which the third symbol is variably displayed by vertical scrolling on the third symbol display device 81 in correspondence with the executed special symbol variation. In this variation effect, the detailed variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the success/failure determination result, and the acquired counter value for selection. A game (special symbol game) can be performed while predicting whether or not the special symbol variation of this time is a big hit by visually recognizing the variation performance executed by the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

The composite effect operation scenario table 222xd is a table for setting the operation scenario of the driving motor of each decorative movable accessory when the normal pattern composite effect is executed. Operation data for each drive motor is specified for the scenario counter value, and predetermined operation data is set when the scenario counter value reaches the specified value.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection 5 table 222xc will be described with reference to FIGS. 1099 to 1100. FIG. FIG. 1099(a) is a block diagram schematically showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection 5 table 222xc. As shown in FIG. 1099 (a), the variation pattern selection 5 table 222xc includes a normal variation pattern selection 5 table 222xc1, a time saving variation pattern selection 5 table 222xc2, a special time saving variation pattern selection 5 table 222xc3, A time saving final variation pattern selection 5 table 222xc4 is defined.

FIG. 1099(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal variation pattern selection 5 table 222xc1. The normal variation pattern selection 5 table 222xc1 is a table referred to when the special symbol variation display is performed in the normal state (normal symbol low probability state). A variation pattern for display is set based on the special figure type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, the result of the determination, the variation pattern type, and the value of the first effect counter CS1. As shown in FIG. 1099(b), in the thirty-sixth control example, execution/non-execution of the above-described composite effect is defined for each display variation pattern.

Specifically, the special figure type is "first special symbol (special figure 1)", the success/failure determination result is "off", and the variation pattern type is "off". "0 to 199" is defined in association with "variation pattern Aa" and no composite effect. That is, when the variation pattern type is "off", the composite effect is not set.

Special figure type is "1st special pattern (special figure 1)", the result of success or failure is "out", and the variation pattern type is "out of guess", the value of the first production counter CS1 is "0 to 199". , "fluctuation pattern Ba" and no composite effect are defined in association with each other. In other words, when the variation pattern type is "false", the composite effect is not set.

Special figure type is "1st special pattern (special figure 1)", success judgment result is "off", variation pattern type is "normal reach", the value of the first production counter CS1 is set to "0 to 179" On the other hand, "variation pattern Da" and no composite effect are defined in correspondence, and "variation pattern Ea" and composite effect are defined in correspondence with the value of the first effect counter CS1 of "180 to 199". there is That is, when the result of the determination is "out" and the variation pattern type is "normal reach", the composite effect is set at a rate of 10%.

Special figure type is "first special pattern (special figure 1)", success judgment result is "off", variation pattern type is "super reach", the value of the first production counter CS1 is "0 to 149" "Variation pattern Fa" and no composite effect are defined in association with each other, and "Variation pattern Ga" and composite effect are defined in association with the value of the first effect counter CS1 of "150 to 199". ing. That is, when the result of the judgment is "out" and the variation pattern type is "super reach", the composite effect is set at a rate of 25%.

Special figure type is "first special pattern (special figure 1)", success judgment result is "jackpot", variation pattern type is "normal reach", the value of the first production counter CS1 is set to "0 to 149" On the other hand, "variation pattern Ha" and no composite effect are defined in correspondence, and "variation pattern Ia" and composite effect are defined in correspondence with the value of the first effect counter CS1 of "150 to 199". there is That is, when the success/failure determination result is "big hit" and the variation pattern type is "normal reach", the composite effect is set at a rate of 25%.

Special figure type is "first special pattern (special figure 1)", success judgment result is "big hit", variation pattern type is "super reach", the value of the first production counter CS1 is "0 to 129" "Variation pattern Ja" and no composite effect are defined in association with each other, and "Variation pattern Ka" and composite effect are defined in association with the value of the first effect counter CS1 of "130 to 199". ing. That is, when the success/failure determination result is "big hit" and the variation pattern type is "super reach", the composite effect is set at a rate of 35%.

Special figure type is "first special pattern (special figure 1)", success judgment result is "jackpot", variation pattern type is "special reach", the value of the first production counter CS1 is "0 to 199" , "fluctuation pattern La" and the presence of composite effects are defined in association with each other. That is, when the success/failure determination result is "big hit" and the variation pattern type is "special reach", the composite effect is always set.

Special figure type is "first special symbol (special figure 1)", success judgment result is "small hit", variation pattern type is "long and small hit", the value of the first production counter CS1 is "0 to 199” is defined in association with “fluctuation pattern Ma” and no composite effect. That is, when the success/failure determination result is "small win" and the variation pattern type is "long and small win", the composite effect is not set.

The special figure type is "second special symbol (special figure 2)", the success judgment result is "off", and the variation pattern type is "off". On the other hand, "variation pattern Na" and no composite effect are defined in correspondence, and "variation pattern Pa" and composite effect are defined in correspondence with the value of the first effect counter CS1 of "180 to 199". there is In other words, when the result of the judgment is "off" and the variation pattern type is "off", the composite effect is set at a rate of 10%.

The special figure type is "second special symbol (special figure 2)", the success/failure determination result is "big hit" or "small hit", and the variation pattern type is "hit". "0 to 149" is associated with "variation pattern Qa" and no composite effect is defined, and the value of the first effect counter CS1 is "150 to 199" with "variation pattern Ra" and composite effect. are defined in association with each other. That is, when the success/failure determination result is "big win" or "small win" and the variation pattern type is "win", the composite effect is set at a rate of 25%.

FIG. 1100(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the fifth variation pattern selection table 222xc2 for time reduction. The time saving variation pattern selection 5 table 222xc2 is a table referred to when the special symbol variation display is executed in the time saving state (normal symbol high probability state). Similar to the normal variation pattern selection 5 table 222xc1, based on the special figure type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the success or failure determination result, the variation pattern type, and the value of the first production counter CS1 This is for setting the display variation pattern.

Specifically, the value of the first production counter CS1 "0 to 199" is defined in association with "fluctuation pattern Sa" and no composite effect.

Special figure type is "first special pattern (special figure 1)", success judgment result is "jackpot", variation pattern type is "short jackpot", the value of the first production counter CS1 is "0 to 199" , "fluctuation pattern Ta" and no composite effect are defined in association with each other.

Special figure type is "first special symbol (special figure 1)", success judgment result is "small hit", variation pattern type is "long and small hit", the value of the first production counter CS1 is "0 to 189” is defined in association with “variation pattern Ua” and no composite effect, the special figure type is “first special symbol (special figure 1)”, the success/failure determination result is “small hit”, and the variation pattern type is As the stipulated content for the "long and small hit", the value of the first effect counter CS1 is defined as "190 to 199" in association with the "variation pattern Va" and the presence of the composite effect. That is, when the success/failure determination result is "small win" and the variation pattern type is "long and small win", the composite effect is set at a rate of 5%.

The special figure type is "second special symbol (special figure 2)", the success/failure determination result is "out", and the variation pattern type is "short out", the value of the first production counter CS1 is "0 to 199". , "fluctuation pattern Wa" and no composite effect are defined in association with each other.

Special figure type is "second special pattern (special figure 2)", success judgment result is "jackpot", variation pattern type is "super short jackpot", the value of the first production counter CS1 is "0 to 199 ” is defined in association with “variation pattern Xa” and no composite effect.

Special figure type is "second special pattern (special figure 2)", success judgment result is "small hit", variation pattern type is "super short and small hit", the value of the first production counter CS1 is "0 to 199” is defined in association with “fluctuation pattern Ya” and no composite effect.

Thus, in the time-saving state, the configuration is such that the composite effect is not set except for the case where the variation pattern type of the first special symbol is "long and small winning". This is because, in the time saving state, the variation time is set to 2 seconds or less except for the case where the variation pattern type is "long and small win", which is shorter than the presentation time of the composite presentation.

Drawing 1100 (b) is a figure showing typically the contents of variation pattern selection 5 table 222xc3 for special time saving. Special time saving variation pattern selection 5 table 222xc3 is a table referred to when the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is the variation pattern type set in the special time saving state.

Here, in the thirty-sixth control example, as in the thirty-fifth control example described above, as the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state, the second special symbol variation count executed during the time-saving state reaches three times. A time saving end condition that is established when the time saving end condition is established, and the time saving end condition that is established when the total number of times of the first special symbol fluctuation number executed during the time saving state and the second special symbol fluctuation number reaches 10 times, have at least

In other words, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-sixth control example executes the second special symbol lottery three times while the time saving state that makes it easier to execute the second special symbol lottery is set, and any second special symbol is selected. By winning a win (small win, big win) with a probability of about 1/2 in the lottery, the time saving state is repeated through the big win game, and in the second special symbol lottery executed three times during the time saving state. If you do not win, the time-saving state ends, and if you do not win even in the second special symbol lottery (once) using the remaining special figure 2 reservation, move to the normal state ( It has a game property that the continuous chan state ends).

Here, as the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, when only the time saving end condition that is satisfied when the number of times of the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state reaches three times, the first Even when the special pattern lottery is executed three times, the time saving end condition is satisfied, and the time saving state ends without the second special pattern lottery being executed despite the time saving state being set. There was a possibility that such a situation could occur. That is, in this 35th control example, the right to execute the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 reservation) is configured to be able to acquire up to 4 pieces, for example, 4 special figure 1 reservations, special figure 2 reservations When the time-saving state is set in a state in which 0 pieces have been acquired, the first special symbol variation is executed prior to the second special symbol variation. In this case, the time saving end condition is satisfied before the second special symbol lottery is executed three times, and the time saving state ends without exhibiting the original game property, and the player's willingness to play. There was a problem that the

In addition, even in a state where four special 1 reserves are acquired when the time saving state is set, in order to execute the second special symbol variation three times during the time saving state, for example, a special symbol lottery When the time-saving end condition is established when the number of executions reaches 7 times, when the time-saving state is set without acquiring the special figure 1 reservation, the second special symbol variation It becomes possible to execute the game more than three times, and there is a problem that a game that is excessively advantageous to the player is provided to the original game property.

Therefore, in this 36th control example, the time saving end condition established based only on the number of executions of the second special symbol variation, and the time saving established based on the total number of times of the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation End conditions are set, and the time saving state is ended when any of the time saving end conditions are satisfied. By configuring in this way, regardless of the acquisition status of the special figure 1 reservation, it is possible to execute the second special symbol variation of the predetermined number of times, and when the second special symbol variation of the predetermined number of times is performed You can definitely end the time saving state.

Furthermore, in this 36th control example, in order to efficiently execute the second special symbol lottery during the time saving state, the first special symbol variation corresponding to the upper limit number (4 pieces) of the special figure 1 reservation, that is, the time saving state is set until the fourth special symbol variation is executed, a short time (0.5 seconds) variation time is It is configured to be set, and for the subsequent first special symbol variation, a variation time of 20 seconds is set. In other words, even though the time saving state is set, when the player who does not understand the game method in the time saving state performs a left-handed game, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol fluctuation executed during the time saving state If the fluctuation time of a short time (0.5 seconds) is always set, new first special symbol fluctuations will be executed one after another, and the first special symbol fluctuation and the second special symbol fluctuation will be added up. There was a possibility that the time-saving end condition, which is established based on the number of times, may be established.

On the other hand, in this 36th control example, only when the first special symbol variation after the fifth time executed after the time saving state is set, that is, when the special figure 1 suspension is newly acquired during the time saving state For the first special symbol variation to be executed, a long (20 seconds) variation time is set, and the period required until one first special symbol variation is completed is lengthened. , By ensuring a period for the player to grasp the game method in the time saving state, the time saving end condition established based on the total number of times of the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation is established It is configured so as to prevent it from happening.

In addition, in the special time-saving state (state in which the first special symbol variation is executed five times or more during the time-saving state), as a variation effect of the first special symbol variation, the right to execute the second special symbol lottery by the right-handed game ( It is configured to execute a variable performance including a performance mode prompting to acquire special figure 2 reservation). By configuring in this way, a player who does not know the game method to be executed during the time-saving state can grasp the correct game method more easily.

Drawing 1100 (c) is a figure showing typically the contents of time saving final variation pattern selection 5 table 222xc4. The time saving final variation pattern selection 5 table 222xc4 is a table referred to when the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is the variation pattern type set in the time saving final variation.

In the thirty-sixth control example, as in the thirty-fifth control example described above, during the variation period of the second special symbol variation, which is the time-saving final variation, the final result of the countdown effect executed during the time-saving state (number icon 808 '0' display) is displayed, and a charge effect (see FIG. 18(a)) is executed to encourage the acquisition of special figure 2 pending until the time saving state ends. . Therefore, since the time saving state is set, the third (final) second special symbol variation is longer than the first or second second special symbol variation to ensure the effect period of the charge effect. It is configured so that the time is set.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier to end the time saving state in the state of acquiring the special figure 2 reservation. Also, even in the case of winning in the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state, the case of winning in the first or second second special symbol lottery, and the third second special symbol Since the time efficiency (the number of times of the second special symbol lottery executed per unit time in the time saving state) can be greatly different from the case of winning the lottery, the player can receive the second lottery during the time saving state. It is possible to make the player interested in not only whether or not he/she wins in the special symbol lottery, but also how many times the second special symbol lottery wins in the time-saving state.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 1101 and 1102, the contents of the composite effect motion scenario table 222xd will be described. FIG. 1101(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the action scenario related to the vertical drive of the bar accessory 902a in the composite effect action scenario table 222xd. As shown in FIG. 1101(a), the operation data (operation details) of the left bar accessory motor 902c7, the right bar accessory motor 902d7, and the right halfway stop solenoid 902d9 are defined for the value of the scenario counter 223xh. In addition, the position (state) of the bar function 902a and the states of the left and right bar function stoppers 902c5 and 902d5 at that stage are shown.

The scenario counter 223xh is a counter provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, and is used to set operation data for each driving motor of the logo accessory 902 at predetermined timings. The counter value of the scenario counter 223xh is incremented by 1 in the first action process (S3161), the second action process (S3163), and the movable character process (S3165) of the liquid crystal effect execution management process 5 (see FIG. 1110), which will be described later. be done. This liquid crystal effect execution management process 5 is a process executed every 1 ms in the main process of the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 1107). Therefore, the counter value of the scenario counter 223xh is incremented by 1 every 1 ms.

In the thirty-sixth control example, the scenario counter 223xh starts counting by the sound lamp control device 113 when the timing for starting the composite effect preset in the display variation pattern has come, and the value of the scenario counter 223xh corresponds to the operating scenario. When the specified value is obtained, the corresponding operation data is set.

As shown in FIG. 1101(a), the scenario counter value indicates the counter value of the scenario counter 223xh. 1 is added in (S3161), the second action process (S3163), and the process during the movement of the role object (S3165).

The number of steps of the left bar accessory motor operation data and the right bar accessory motor operation data indicates the number of rotation steps of the left bar accessory motor 902c7 and the right bar accessory motor 902d7, and the speed is the left bar role. The speed for operating the stepping motors of the object motor 902c7 and the right bar accessory motor 902d7 is defined.

The "+ (forward direction)" and "- (reverse direction)" of the number of steps indicate the direction in which the motor rotates. In the reverse direction, the motor is rotated in the direction in which the step counter is decremented and updated. The left bar accessory motor 902c7 in the thirty-fifth control example rotates clockwise when the forward direction is set, and rotates counterclockwise when the reverse direction is set. The right bar accessory motor 902d7 rotates counterclockwise when the forward direction is set, and rotates clockwise when the reverse direction is set.

In the thirty-sixth control example, when the speed is 1, the stepping motor is excited every 1 ms (high speed), and when the speed is 2, the stepping motor is excited every 2 ms. When the speed is 3, the stepping motor is excited every 3 ms (medium low speed), and when the speed is 4, the stepping motor is excited every 4 ms. speed (low speed). In other words, speed 1 is set as the fastest speed, speed 2 is 1/2 of speed 1, speed 3 is 1/3 of speed 1, and speed 4 is 1/1 of speed 1. It has 4 speeds.

Also, the bar role object position indicates the position (state) of the bar role object 902a at the time of setting the action data corresponding to the value of the scenario counter 223xh.

When the start timing of the composite effect set in the display variation pattern comes, the scenario counter 223xh starts counting. Then, when the value of the scenario counter 223xh becomes "1", the number of steps +25 and the speed 2 are set as the left and right bar accessory motor operation data. As a result, the left bar accessory motor 902c7 starts rotating clockwise and the right bar accessory motor 902d7 rotates counterclockwise at a speed of 4 until the step counter value reaches 25. In the thirty-sixth control example, the stepping motors of the left and right bar accessory motors 902c7 and 902d7 are configured to rotate once in 100 steps, and the position where the step counter value is 0 (origin position) is the storage position, and the step counter is is 25, the left and right bar accessory stoppers 902c5 and 902d5 are in a released state (OFF state), and the bar accessory 902a falls to the lower limit. In the thirty-sixth control example, the time required to drive step counters 0 to 25 at speed 2 is set to 250 ms.

When the value of the scenario counter 223xh reaches "250", the left and right bar function motors 902c7 and 902d7 are rotated to the step counter value of 25, and the left and right bar function stoppers 902c5 and 902d5 are released ( OFF state), the bar accessory 902a drops by its own weight to the lower limit.

After that, when the value of the scenario counter 223xh becomes "19250", the number of steps +75 and the speed 2 are set as the motor operation data for the left bar accessory and the motor operation data for the right bar accessory. At this time, the step counter values of the left and right bar accessory motors are 25, so the left and right bar accessory motors 902c7 and 902d7 are driven in opposite directions until the step counter values reach 100. Rotate at speed 2. In the thirty-sixth control example, the cylindrical pins 902c3p and 902d3p start pushing up the lower racks 902c2 and 902d2, respectively, at the step counter value of 60, and the bar accessory 902a reaches the storage position at the step counter value of 100.

Therefore, after 750 ms have elapsed since the operation data corresponding to the scenario counter value of 19250 was set, that is, when the scenario counter value is 20000, the bar accessory 902a is in the retracted position. Since the scenario counter value "20000" is the end time of the composite effect operation scenario, END data is defined. By defining the END data, it is possible to easily determine whether or not it is time to end the operation scenario.

FIG. 1101(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of an action scenario related to left-right driving and rotational driving of the rotating body accessory 902b among the combined effect action scenarios of the logo accessory 902. FIG. As shown in FIG. 1101(b), similarly to the operation scenario for driving the bar accessory 902a up and down, the operation data of the lateral movement motor 902b3 and the operation data of the rotating body motor 902b2 are defined with respect to the value of the scenario counter 223xh. It is The position and direction of the rotator role show the position and direction (state) of the rotator role 902b when it operates according to the scenario. Further, when the origin sensor data is set to ON, it is set to operate until the origin sensor (not shown) for the rotating body motor provided in the rotating body accessory 902b is turned on. indicates that there is

In the composite effect motion scenario, the number of steps +100 and the speed 4 are set as the motion data of the lateral movement motor 902b3 with respect to the counter value 250 of the scenario counter 223xh. The lateral movement motor 902b3 in the thirty-sixth control example is a stepping motor with a total number of steps of 200, and is configured so that the position of 100 steps is the reference stop position Pt1 (see FIG. 1089(b)). 0 is the left range of motion limit Pt2, and 200 steps is the right range of motion limit Pt3. Therefore, in this case, the rotating accessory 902b starts moving at speed 4 toward the right range of motion limit Pt3.

Speed 3 and "+rotation" are set as rotating body motor operation data. This "+rotation" is motion data that continues to rotate in the forward direction until the next motion data is set. Therefore, in this case, the rotator accessory 902b starts rotating in the positive direction at speed 3.

In the counter value 2250 of the scenario counter 223xh, "+rotation" and speed 3 are set as the operation data of the rotating accessory 902b, and the rotating body motor origin sensor data is set to ON. As a result, the rotator accessory 902b rotates in the forward direction until it reaches the origin position (forward rotation state), and stops rotating when it reaches the origin position (forward rotation state). At this point, the lateral movement motor 902b3 has finished driving 100 steps in the forward direction (that is, the step counter value is 200), so the position of the rotary accessory 902b is the right movable range limit Pt3. (See FIG. 1089(a)).

In the counter value 4000 of the scenario counter 223xh, the number of steps -100 and speed 2 are set as the operation data of the lateral movement motor 902b3, and "-rotation" and speed 3 are set as the operation data of the rotor motor 902b2. As a result, the rotary accessory 902b starts moving at speed 2 to the reference position Pt1 (see FIG. 1089(b)).

In the counter value 5000 of the scenario counter 223xh, the number of steps -100 and speed 2 are set as the operation data of the lateral movement motor 902b3, and "-rotation" and speed 3 are set as the operation data of the rotor motor 902b2. Also, the rotating body motor origin sensor data is set to ON. As a result, the rotator accessory 902b starts moving at speed 2 to the left movable range limit Pt2 (see FIG. 1089(a)). stops rotating.

With the scenario counter value of 6000, rotation stop is set as the operation data of the rotor motor 902b2. At this time, the position of the rotary accessory 902b is the left movable range limit Pt2 (see FIG. 1090(a)). Note that this scenario counter value of 6000 is the timing at which the rotary accessory 902b comes to the final stop position in the normal pattern composite effect.

After that, when the scenario counter value reaches 18250, operation data for returning to the reference position Pt1 is set, and the rotating body accessory 902b stops in the normal rotation state at the reference position Pt1 before the bar accessory 902a reaches the retracted position.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1102(a), the contents of the action scenario related to the vertical drive of the "a" accessory 903 in the composite effect action scenario table 222xd will be described. FIG. 1102(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the action scenario related to the vertical drive of the "a" accessory 903 in the composite effect action scenario table 222xd. As shown in FIG. 1102(a), the accessory motor operation data is defined for the value of the scenario counter 223xh. The role item position indicates the position of the role item 903 when it operates according to the scenario.

When the scenario counter value reaches 6500, +100 and speed 1 are set as the accessory motor operation data. As a result, the accessory 903 rises from the storage position, and after 500 ms elapses, that is, when the scenario counter value reaches 7000, it moves to the upper limit (see FIG. 1090(a)). After that, when the scenario counter value reaches 18250, action data for returning to the retracted position is set, and the accessory 903 enters the retracted state by the end of the effect time of the composite effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1102(b), the contents of the operation scenario related to the left and right driving of the left and right shutter accessory motors 904c1 and 904c5 in the composite effect operation scenario table 222xd will be described. FIG. 1102(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the action scenario related to the lateral drive of the shutter accessory motors 904c1 and 904c5 in the composite effect action scenario table 222xd. As shown in FIG. 1102(b), left and right shutter accessory motor operation data are defined for the value of the scenario counter 223xh. The shutter accessory position indicates the open/closed state of the shutter accessory 904 when operating according to the scenario.

When the scenario counter value reaches 4500, operation data for closing the shutter accessory 904 is set as left and right shutter accessory operation data, and when the scenario counter value reaches 18750, the shutter accessory 904 is opened. When the scenario counter value reaches 19750, the shutter accessory 904 is opened.

Next, the contents of the first alternative operation scenario 223xe will be described with reference to FIGS. 1103 and 1104. FIG. This first alternative action scenario 223xe is an action scenario set when the alternative pattern 1 composite effect is executed.

FIG. 1103(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the action scenario related to the vertical drive of the left and right bar accessory motors 902c7 and 902d7 in the first alternative action scenario table 222xe. As shown in FIG. 1103(a), the action scenario of the bar accessory 902a of the first alternative action scenario 223xe is the same as the above-described normal pattern combined effect action scenario.

FIG. 1103(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of action scenarios related to left-right driving and rotational driving of the rotary accessory 902b in the first alternative action scenario table 222xe. As shown in FIG. 1103(b), the motion scenario of the rotating body accessory 902b of the first alternative motion scenario 223xe is the same up to a scenario counter value of 5000 as the normal pattern composite effect motion scenario described above. When the scenario counter value reaches 5000, "-rotation" and speed 3 are set as the rotating body motor operation data, and the rotating body motor origin sensor data is set to ON. On the other hand, the traverse motor operating data is not set. As a result, the rotary accessory 902b rotates counterclockwise until it reaches the origin position (normal rotation state) at the reference position Pt1.

After that, when the scenario counter value reaches 6000, rotation stop is set as the rotor motor operation data. As a result, even when the scenario counter value is 6000, if the rotary accessory 902b is rotating, the rotation is stopped.

In the first alternative action scenario 223xe, the final stop position for forming the character string "Gekiatsu" is the reference position Pt1, so unlike the normal pattern composite effect action scenario table 222xd, the character moves to the reference position Pt1. No operational data is set for

Next, referring to FIGS. 1104(a) and 1104(b), the first alternative operation scenario table 222xe shows an operation scenario related to the vertical drive of the shutter component 903 and a horizontal drive related to the shutter component 904. The contents of the operation scenario to be performed will be explained. As described above, the combined production of the alternative pattern 1 is a production that does not use the a role 903 and the shutter role 904, so as shown in FIGS. 1104(a) and 1104(b) Motor operation data and left and right shutter accessory motor operation data are not specified.

Next, referring to FIGS. 1105(a) and (b), in the second alternative action scenario table 222xf, actions related to vertical drive of the bar accessory 902a and horizontal drive and rotational drive of the rotating body accessory 902b are shown. Describe the contents of the scenario. This second alternative action scenario table 222xf is an action scenario set when the alternative pattern 2 composite effect is executed. As described above, since the composite effect of alternative pattern 2 is a effect that does not use any decorative movable accessories, the left and right bar accessory motor operation data are shown in FIGS. and rotating body motor operating data are not specified.

Next, referring to FIGS. 1106(a) and 1106(b), the second alternative operation scenario table 222xf shows an operation scenario related to the vertical drive of the shutter component 903 and a motion scenario related to the horizontal drive of the shutter component 904. The contents of the operation scenario to be performed will be explained. As described above, the composite effect of the alternative pattern 2 is a effect that does not use any decorative movable accessories, so as shown in FIGS. , Left and right shutter accessory motor operation data are not defined.

Thus, in the thirty-sixth control example, the operation scenario of the drive motor of each decorative movable accessory corresponding to each pattern of the composite effect is defined, and is set at the start timing of the composite effect. . As a result, it is possible to set an operation scenario suitable for the display situation of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing when the composite effect is started, and it is possible to execute a suitable composite effect for the player.

<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device in the thirty-sixth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1107 to 1114, among the control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the thirty-sixth control example, points that differ from the thirty-fifth control example described above will be described. . In the control processing executed by the audio ramp control device 113 in the thirty-sixth control example, the control processing executed by the audio ramp control device 113 in the above-described thirty-fifth control example is executed in the main processing. The difference is that the liquid crystal effect execution management process 5 (S3123) is executed instead of the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S3110), and the variable display setting process 5 (S4124) is executed instead of the variable display setting process 4. are identical. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same control processes, and the description thereof is omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 1107, the processing contents of the main processing in the thirty-sixth control example will be described. FIG. 1107 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the main processing in the thirty-sixth control example. In the main process of the thirty-sixth control example, instead of the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S3110), the liquid crystal effect execution management process 5 (S3123) is executed, and instead of the variable display setting process 4, the variable display setting process 5 (S4124) is executed. ) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 1108, the contents of the variable display setting process 5 (S4124) executed in the main process (see FIG. 1107) in the thirty-sixth control example will be described. FIG. 1108 is a flow chart showing the details of the variable display setting process 5 (S4124). As shown in FIG. 1108, in this variable display setting process 5 (S4124), in contrast to the variable display setting process 4 (see S4122 in FIG. S4311), the difference is that the production mode setting process 5 (S4314) is executed, and the rest is the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1109, the processing contents of the rendering mode setting processing 5 (S4314) will be described. FIG. 1109 is a flow chart showing the details of the production mode setting process 5 (S4314). This production mode setting process 5 (S4314) is different from the above-described production mode setting process 4 (see S4311 in FIG. 1060) in that the processing contents when the composite production is selected are added. .

Specifically, when the effect mode setting process 5 (S4314) is executed, first, the values of the first effect counter 223xa and the second effect counter 223xb are acquired (S4531), and the type of the extracted variation pattern, Based on the acquired value of the first effect counter 223xa, the variation pattern selection 5 table 222xc is referenced to determine the variation pattern for display (S4532).

Then, it is determined whether the display variation pattern determined by the processing of S4532 includes a composite effect (S4537), and if it is determined that the composite effect is included (S4537: Yes), the role standby The flag 223xc is set to ON (S4536), and this processing ends. Also, in the process of S4537, when it is determined that the composite effect is not included (S4537: No), this process is terminated without setting the role standby flag 223xc to ON.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1110, the contents of the liquid crystal effect execution management process 5 (S3123) will be described. FIG. 1110 is a flow chart showing the contents of the liquid crystal effect execution management process 5 (S3123). In this liquid crystal effect execution management process 5 (S3123), a process for executing different operation processes at different timings for each character is executed according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variable effect being executed.

When the liquid crystal effect execution management process 5 (S3123) is executed, first, it is determined whether the fluctuating flag 223xf is set to ON (S3151), and the fluctuating flag 223xf is not set to ON. If it is determined that is not during the special symbol fluctuation (S3151: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S3151, if it is determined that the fluctuating flag 223xf is set to ON (S3151: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the fluctuating time counter 223xg (S3152), and then the character product standby It is determined whether the flag 223xc is set to ON (S3153). Here, when it is determined that the role item standby flag 223xc is set to ON (S3153: Yes), the value of the variable time counter 223xg is referred to determine whether it is the production start time (S3154), When it is determined that it is the production start time (S3154: Yes), a composite production start process is executed (S3166), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S3154, if it is determined that it is not the production start time, that is, the role standby flag 223xc is set to ON (a variation pattern in which a composite production using a role is executed is set ), but if the timing for executing the effect has not come (S3154: No), this process ends.

That is, when the variable effect is executed in the variation pattern in which the compound effect is executed, the processing of S3151 to S3254 is repeatedly executed until the start timing of the compound effect is reached. Then, when the start timing of the composite effect is reached, a composite effect start process (S3166) is executed as a process for starting the composite effect.

Here, with reference to FIG. 1111, the processing contents of the composite effect start process (S3166) executed in the liquid crystal effect execution management process 5 (see S3123 in FIG. 1110) will be described. FIG. 1111 is a flow chart showing the details of the composite effect start process (S3166). This composite effect start process (S3166) is a process executed when the start timing of the composite effect arrives, and is a process for determining different effect control according to the execution timing of the composite effect.

In the thirty-sixth control example, a plurality of display variation patterns with different execution timings of the composite effect can be determined by referring to the variation pattern selection 5 table 222xc. Specifically, it is configured to be able to determine a display variation pattern to be executed while the composite effect is in reach and a display variation pattern to be executed during non-reach.

In the thirty-sixth control example, the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is used to execute the variation performance of the third symbol, and the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is highly likely to be a big hit. It is configured to be able to execute a composite effect (“Gekiatsu” display using characters and liquid crystal display) for the purpose. Then, when executing this composite effect, the player's attention is better when the composite effect is executed using various elements (liquid crystal display, decorative movable accessories 90, 903, 904, decoration 905). Since it is possible to increase the degree of performance, it is conceivable to execute a composite effect using more modes.

However, as described above with reference to FIGS. 1089 to 1093, this composite effect is executed so as to cover the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, so the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 Depending on the content of the variable performance of the third pattern being executed, a part of the variable performance is hidden (becomes difficult to see) by the combined performance, so that the player watching the variable performance of the third pattern feels uncomfortable. I had a problem with it.

In particular, using the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, when the ready-to-win effect is executed as a variable effect for indicating that the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery is highly likely to be a big hit, complex Execution of the effect makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the type of the third symbol displayed in the ready-to-win state, and the player who expects that the third symbol indicating the winning of the jackpot is stopped and displayed, There is a problem that the composite effect becomes a troublesome effect and the effect of the effect is lowered.

On the other hand, in the thirty-sixth control example, the types of elements used to create the same effect result ("Gekiatsu display") and the control details for each element are changed depending on the timing at which the composite effect is executed. By making them different, it is possible to execute a composite effect without interfering with the variable effect of the third symbol. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a suitable effect to the player regardless of when the composite effect is executed. In addition, since it is possible to change the effect mode of the compound effect showing the same effect result corresponding to the content of the variable effect displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, the compound effect is executed at various timings. It is possible to make it possible to increase the production effect.

When the composite effect start process (S3166) is executed, first, a display command for displaying the notification mode for notifying the start of the composite effect is set (S3231), and the current variable effect effect mode is in reach. (S3237), and when it is determined that it is not in the reach state (S3237: No), the display mode that the player pays particular attention to is not displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, action data for executing a composite effect using all the movable accessories for decoration is set by referring to the composite effect action scenario table 222xd (S3238), and the movable role flag 223xe is set to ON ( S3239), sets the role product standby flag 223xc to off (S3245), and terminates this process. Based on the action data set by the process of S3238, the normal pattern composite effect described above with reference to FIG. 1089 is executed.

In the processing of S3237, if it is determined that the reach is in progress (S3237: Yes), then it is determined whether the reach type being executed is medium line reach (S3240), and it is determined that it is medium line reach. If so (S3240: Yes), the second alternative action scenario table 222xf is referenced to set the action data (S3241), the second action flag 223xy is set to ON (S3242), and the process proceeds to S3245.

That is, when the middle line reach is in progress, as described above with reference to FIG. 1092, the movable position of the decorative movable accessory 902a overlaps with a part of the reach line (the effective line L2) in the middle line reach. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to identify the type of the third symbol displayed on the reach line L2. An effect mode that does not use the accessory 902a is set, and the composite effect of the mode shown in FIG. 1092 is executed.

By configuring in this way, even when the middle line (effective line L2) is in the reach state, it is possible to execute the composite effect without impairing the effect of the variable effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S3240, if it is determined that the reach is other than the middle line reach (S3240: No), the first alternative action scenario table 222xe is referred to set the action data (S3243), and the first action is set. The flag 223xx is set to ON (S3244), and the process proceeds to S3245.

That is, when the ready-to-win effect is being executed on an effective line other than the middle line (effective line L2), even if the decorative movable accessory 902a is moved to the movable position that overlaps with the middle line, the decorative movable accessory 902a is moved to the movable position overlapping the middle line. Since the accessory 902a does not cover the effective line in the ready-to-reach state, action data for executing a composite effect using the decorative movable accessory 902a is set by the processing of S3243.

As shown in FIG. 1091(a), when the effective line L5 is in the ready-to-win state, the effective line L5 is partially covered when the decorative movable accessory 902a is moved. Since the movable accessory for decoration 902a is moved to the position, in the process of S3243, among the movable accessories for decoration, the operation data for moving the movable accessory for decoration other than the movable accessory for decoration 902a is set. configured to prevent

That is, in the thirty-sixth control example, in the case of executing the composite effect during the ready-to-win state, it is determined whether the ready-to-win effect using a specific effective line (effective line L5) is being executed (executed), When the ready-to-win effect using the specific effective line is executed, the composite effect is executed in the effect mode without using the decorative movable accessory (decorative movable accessory 902a) that covers the specific effective line. However, when the ready-to-win effect is executed (performed) without using a specific effective line (effective line L5), a decorative movable movable to cover only the specific effective line (effective line L5). It is configured so as to execute a combined production in a production mode using the accessory (decorative movable accessory 902a).

By constructing in this way, the composite performance can be executed without lowering the performance effect of the ready-to-win performance even if the performance mode of the composite performance is not set in a pattern corresponding to all the performance modes of the ready-to-win performance. can be done.

Next, the processing contents of the first operation processing (S3161) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1112 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the first operation processing (S3161). This first action process (S3161) is a process executed in the liquid crystal effect execution management process 5 (see S3123 in FIG. 1110), and is executed when the first action flag 223xx is set to ON.

When the first action process (S3161) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the scenario counter 223xh is the end value (S4751). 3, the scenario counter 223xh is reset (S4752), the first operation flag 223xx is set to OFF (S4753), and this process ends. Also, in the process of S4751, if it is determined that the value of the scenario counter 223xh is not the end value (S4751: No), then it is determined whether it is time to stop the rotating accessory 902b (S4754), and the stop timing If it is determined that it is not (S4754: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4754, if it is determined that it is time to stop the rotary accessory 902b (S4754: Yes), the "ge" displayed on the liquid crystal display is moved to the specified position (see FIG. 1091(b)). The display command to be displayed is set (S4755), the scenario counter 223xh is incremented by 1 (S4756), the operation data corresponding to the value of the scenario counter 223xh is set (S4757), and this processing ends.

As described above, in the first action process described with reference to S206, when the rotating accessory 902b is stopped, the position corresponding to the stop position of the rotating accessory 902b Among the composite effects, the display positions of the elements (“ge”, “a”) expressed by the liquid crystal display are set, so that the liquid crystal display is moved to the position corresponding to the rotating character 902b. It is possible to display elements (“ge”, “a”) represented by

Next, the processing contents of the second operation processing (S3163) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1113 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the second operation processing (S3163). This second action process (S3163) is a process executed in the liquid crystal effect execution management process 5 (see S3123 in FIG. 1110), and is executed when the second action flag 223xy is set to ON.

When the second action process (S3163) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the scenario counter 223xh is the end value (S4851). In order to end the operation process in , the scenario counter 223xh is reset (S4852), the second operation flag 223xx is set to off (S4853), and this process ends. If it is determined in the processing of S4851 that the value of the scenario counter 223xh is not the end value (S4851: No), then the display command of the second operation display table is set (S4854), and the value of the scenario counter 223xh is set. The value is incremented by 1 (S4855), action data corresponding to the value of the scenario counter 223xh is set (S4856), and this processing is terminated.

As described above, in the second operation process (S3163), as the effect mode of the combined effect, the effect mode using only the liquid crystal display and the decoration 905, that is, the effect mode without using each decorative movable accessory (Fig. 1092) is determined, the action data for operating the decorative movable accessory is not set as a composite effect. It should be noted that even when the second operation process (S3163) is executed, the timing of displaying the patterns of "ge", "ki", and "a" displayed on the liquid crystal display is the same as for other composite effects. Good to set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the same composite effect is being executed with different elements.

In addition, without being limited to this, as the effect mode of the compound effect, it is possible to determine the effect mode in which the order of displaying the patterns of "ge", "ki", and "a" displayed on the liquid crystal is different. It may be constructed so that the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot is higher when the patterns are displayed in the same order as the composite performance of (1) than when the patterns are displayed in a different order. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily increase the variation of the contents of the effect only for the composite effect that does not require setting the operation data of the decorative movable accessory, compared to the other composite effects.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1114, the processing contents of the process during the movement of the role product (S3165) will be described. FIG. 1114 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the processing during the movement of the accessory (S3165). This process during movable role (S3165) is a process executed in the liquid crystal effect execution management process 5 (see S3123 in FIG. 1110), and is executed when the during movable role flag 223xe is set to ON. be.

When the role object movable process (S3165) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the scenario counter 223xh is the end value (S4951). In order to end the action processing in the effect, the scenario counter 223xh is reset (S4952), the movable character object flag 223xe is set to OFF (S4953), and this processing ends. Also, in the process of S4951, if it is determined that the value of the scenario counter 223xh is not the end value (S4951: No), 1 is added to the value of the scenario counter 223xh (S4954), and the Operation data is set (S4955), and this processing ends.

As described above, in the thirty-sixth control example, the variation pattern in which the compound effect is executed at various timings is configured to be determinable, and the variable effect content (reach content), it is possible to execute a composite effect using different elements. . In addition, since it is possible to change the effect mode of the compound effect showing the same effect result corresponding to the content of the variable effect displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, the compound effect is executed at various timings. It is possible to make it possible to increase the production effect.

In addition, in the thirty-sixth control example, an example is shown in which the timing at which the composite effect is executed is determined in advance based on the determined variation pattern. The timing may be configured to be arbitrarily selectable by the player. In this case, for example, the operation effective period (SW effective time) in which the operation to the operation means (the effect button 22a) that the player can operate is effectively determined is at least set as the variable effect of the third symbol, and the ready-to-win state is It is configured to be settable within a range from the period before creation to the period after reaching the ready-to-win state, and based on the player's operation of the operation means during the effective operation period, the composite effect is produced. Configure it to start. Then, the performance contents of the variable performance of the third pattern when the composite performance is started, or the elapsed time and remaining time of the operation effective period are determined, and the performance mode that does not overlap with the performance mode of the variable performance being executed is determined. Then, it is preferable to configure so as to execute a composite effect corresponding to the determined effect mode.

With this configuration, the player can arbitrarily select the timing for executing the composite effect, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced.

In addition, when each decorative movable accessory is configured to be usable for purposes other than the composite performance, the movable state of each decorative movable accessory at the time when the conditions for executing the composite performance are satisfied is determined, and the composite performance is determined. A specifying means is provided for specifying a decorative movable accessory that can be used as a decoration, a performance mode that can be performed within the range of the decorative movable accessory specified by the specifying means is determined, and the determined performance mode is used to perform a composite The production may be configured to be executable. By configuring in this way, even if the execution period of various effects other than the variable effect of the third pattern (effect using the decorative movable accessory) and the composite effect overlap, the player can It is possible to provide a suitable production for

Furthermore, in the thirty-sixth control example, the configuration is shown in which the composite effect is executed in an executable effect mode without shifting the execution timing of the composite effect from the timing determined in advance. The execution timing of the composite effect may be configured so as to be capable of being corrected before or after a predetermined execution timing.

In this case, when the ready-to-win effect is executed when the remaining period until the end of the composite effect is 1 second, the execution timing of the composite effect is advanced by 1 second, and the normal pattern composite effect ( 1089) can be executed. Thus, by providing the correction process for correcting the execution timing of the composite effect, it is possible to provide the player with more diverse effects.

Further, when the ready-to-win effect is started during the execution period of the composite effect, the start of the ready-to-win effect may be delayed until the end of the composite effect.

In addition, in the thirty-sixth control example, by arranging the movable accessory for decoration on the front side of the three-symbol display device 81 (the front side from the player's line of sight), the liquid crystal display on the back side of the movable accessory for decoration is displayed. Since (the third pattern and other advance notice effects) cannot be visually recognized by the player, the technical concept of controlling the liquid crystal display, which is highly important as game information, and the decorative movable accessory not to overlap has been explained.

Here, by applying this technical idea, a modification will be described in which one decorative movable accessory and another decorative movable accessory can be moved so as to overlap each other. A first modification of the thirty-sixth control example will be described below with reference to FIGS. 1115 to 1117. FIG.

In the first modified example of the thirty-sixth control example, a character presentation combining the decorative movable accessory and the liquid crystal display and a character presentation using the character accessory (rabbit accessory) are executed. The character effect is one of the advance notice effects executed during the variable display period of the special symbols, and the characters ``ge'' 815 and the characters ``a'' displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 are displayed. 816, a decorative movable accessory 815 decorated with the character "ki", and a character "tsu" 817b that is a part of the characters "Katsutsuzo" decorated on the game board surface bn. By combining the characters to form the character string "Gekiatsu", it is an effect that informs that the expectation of winning the jackpot of the special symbol during the variable display is high.

Here, with reference to FIG. 1115(b), the display contents of the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 during execution of the character effect will be described. During execution of the character rendering, as shown in FIG. 1115(b), the main display area Dm contains the characters "ge" 814 and "a" 816, which are components of the character rendering, and a background image. A picture of the sun is displayed. By arranging the key character 815 on the line connecting the character 814 of "ge" and the character 816 of "a", the character string of "gekia" is formed and decorated on the game board bn. By being combined with the character 817b of "tsu", the character string of "gekiatsu" is formed.

Returning to FIG. 1115(a), the description is continued. The game board surface bn is decorated with characters of "win!". Each character decoration 817a to 817c of "Katsutsuzo" on the game board surface bn has an LED built in, and normally all the LEDs of the character decorations 817a to 817c of "Katsutsuzo" are lit. It's becoming As for the LEDs of this character decoration portion, when the character string "GEKIATSU" is formed in the character presentation, the LEDs for the character "WIN" 817a and the character "ZO" 817c are turned off, and only the character "TSU" 817b is turned off. lights up. This makes it easier for the player to understand that the character string 817b of "tsu" has been switched from the element constituting the character string "Katsutsuzo" to the element constituting the character string "Gekiatsu".

The key character 815 used in the character effect is stored outside the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (for example, the left side of the third symbol display device when viewed from the front), except for the execution period of the character effect. is started, it moves to be placed at the position shown in FIG. 1116(b).

The character effect start timing in the first modified example of the thirty-sixth control example is randomly determined by lottery in the liquid crystal effect execution management process in the sound lamp control device 113 . By constructing in this manner, the timing of starting the character presentation is determined in advance by the player according to the variation type of the special pattern, etc., and the decrease in interest in the game is suppressed, and the character presentation is performed at unexpected timing. can be executed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The character effect is an advance notice effect in which a character object decorated with a rabbit character (rabbit object 813 ) moves on the front side of the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 . The character role product 813 is housed outside the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (for example, the upper side of the third pattern display device when viewed from the front) except for the execution period of the character production, and the character production is started. and the third pattern display device 81 so as to be arranged on the front side of the main display area. An LED is built in the flame decoration portion surrounding the rabbit character of the character role 813, and the color of the flame decoration portion can be changed by light emission of the LED. The color of the decorative portion of the flame is used to suggest the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot. For example, if the decorative part of the flame emits blue light, it suggests that the expectation of winning the jackpot is relatively low, and if it emits light of red, it suggests that the expectation of winning the jackpot is relatively high.

This character accessory 813 is configured to be movable vertically and horizontally on the front side of the main display area Dm. In the first modified example of the thirty-sixth control example, as described above, the character effect start timing is determined by lottery. If they overlap, there is a risk that the movable key role 815 and the character role 813 will interfere with each other.

In order to solve this problem, the key object 815 in the thirty-sixth control example is configured so that the front and rear positions can be set. Specifically, a first position where the key role 815 is arranged on the front side of the character role 813 (the front side of the player's line of sight), and a position where the key role 815 is on the back side of the character role 813 (the game It is configured to be able to set a second position that is arranged on the back side of the person's line of sight. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the key role 815 and the character role 813 from interfering with each other.

In addition, in the first modification of the thirty-sixth control example, the effect result of the character effect is variable depending on the front and rear positions of the key role 815 and the character role 813 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1117(a), when the character presentation is executed and the key role 815 is movable at the second position, the character role (rabbit role) 813 moves to the key role 815. , the key role 815 is hidden by the character role 813 . Then, in the third pattern display device 81, the character 814 of ``ge'' is not displayed, and the character string of ``Atsu'' is changed so that the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot is lowered compared to the case where the character string of ``Gekiatsu'' is formed. .

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1117(b), when the character effect is executed and the key role 815 is movable at the first position, the character role (rabbit role) 813 is placed on the key role 815. When it reaches the position where it is located, the key role 815 is arranged on the front side of the character role 813, and the character role 813 is hidden by the key role 815. - 特許庁In this case, as shown in FIG. 1117(b), since the character role 813 is larger in size than the key role 815, a part of the character role 813 (flame decoration part) is visible to the player. As a result, from the player's point of view, the key role 815 appears to be decorated with flames. The character string "Gekiatsu" composed of the kiyakumono 815 with the flame decoration has a higher expectation of winning the jackpot than the case where the normal character string "Gekiatsu" (see FIG. 1115(a)) is formed. has been ranked up. That is, when the character presentation and the character presentation are performed at the same timing, the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot suggested by the character presentation varies depending on the positional relationship between the character role 813 and the key role 815.例文帳に追加By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify various effect results in the character effect according to the positional relationship between the character role 813 and the key role 815, and it is possible to suppress the character effect from becoming monotonous. .

In addition, in the first modified example of the thirty-sixth control example, only the front and rear positions of the character role 813 can be varied, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the front and rear positions of the character role 813 are also variable. It may be configured as possible.

It should be noted that the position where the character string of "gekiatsu" is formed is not fixed, and the position where the character string of "gekiatsu" is formed may be variable according to the state of the liquid crystal display. For example, when an error display is displayed in the main display area Dm, the characters "ge" 814 and "a" 816 are displayed while avoiding the position where the error display is displayed. A key character 815 is arranged on a line connecting a character 814 of "ge" and a character 816 of "a". In this case, since the position of the character "tsu" 817b, which is the decoration of the game board surface bn, is fixed, the line connecting the character "ge" 814 and the character "tsu" 817b is based on the character "tsu" 817b. It is preferable to display the letter 816 of "a" on the top.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to suppress the problem that the error display is hidden by the character presentation and the occurrence of the error is not recognized by the player or the administrator of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

In the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-sixth control example, the character rendering (composite rendering) is performed using the decorative movable accessories. It is good also as composition which performs production. A control example in the case of executing a character presentation only on the liquid crystal display will be described below. Note that the control example for executing the character presentation only on the liquid crystal display is the second modified example of the thirty-sixth control example.

In the pachinko machine 10 in the second modified example of the thirty-sixth control example, a plurality of display layers are arranged to display the display mode on the third symbol display device 81 . A reserved pattern layer ry1, a first effect layer ry2a, a second effect layer ry2b, a third effect layer ry2c, a special pattern layer ry3, and a background layer ry4 are arranged from the front side of the display surface. , background, etc. can be displayed, and by overlapping and displaying, a display effect with a sense of depth can be displayed.

The reserved pattern layer ry1 is a layer in which a display mode such as a reserved pattern that needs to be displayed in the foreground is displayed. The display mode displayed on the reserved pattern layer ry1 is configured so that it can always be displayed in the foreground because no layer is set on the front side. The first effect layer ry2a is a layer that is set one behind the reserved pattern layer ry1, and is a layer in which mainly notice effects and character effects are set. As the layers in which the notice effect and character effect are set, the second effect layer ry2b arranged one behind the first effect layer ry2a and the third effect layer ry2b arranged one behind the second effect layer ry2b. Rendering layers ry2c are set respectively.

The special pattern layer ry3 is a layer in which a special pattern (third pattern) is displayed, and since it is arranged on the front side of the background layer ry4, the special pattern can always be displayed on the front side of the background image. can. The background layer ry4 is a layer in which a background image is displayed, is a layer set in the backmost layer, and is set with a background image during movement, standby, and the like.

The character presentation in the second modification of the thirty-sixth control example is performed by displaying a combination of a plurality of characters to form an arbitrary word during the special symbol variation period (dynamic display period). It is a production that is made possible to suggest the result of the judgment of the special symbol inside (notify the degree of expectation that is a hit). Here, in the special pattern layer ry3, a special pattern is displayed, and when a ready-to-win effect or the like is displayed, the special pattern forming the ready-to-win pattern is hidden by the characters in the character effect, thereby reducing the reach. A problem arises in that it is difficult to determine whether or not they are formed. In addition, the character effect is displayed in a variation pattern of the special symbols so as to prevent the player from losing interest due to the fact that the execution timing of the character effect is determined in advance by the variation type of the special symbol. It is set so that the execution timing is randomly selected by lottery within the period during which the character effect can be executed, and the character effect is executed. By configuring in this way, the execution timing of the character presentation can be made at random, and while it is possible to give the player an unexpectedness, it is difficult to correspond to the contents of the variable display of the executed special symbols. As a result, there may be problems such as obstructing the player's visual recognition of the special symbols that must be visually recognized by the player, or concealing the advance notice effect or the like. Below, a description will be given of a configuration in which the character effects in the present control example correspond to the problems described above so as to be able to be resolved.

For example, in the character effect set in the first effect layer ry2a, the character "ge" is arranged at the position where the upper line L1 and the left pattern row z1 intersect, and The character "ki" is arranged, the character "a" is arranged at the position where the lower line L3 and the middle pattern row z2 intersect, and the character "tsu" is arranged at the position where the lower line L3 and the right symbol row z3 intersect. Display controlled to be arranged. A character effect set in the first effect layer ry2a is called a first character effect.

In this first character effect, characters are not arranged on the upward right line L4, so the ready-to-win effect is executed at the timing before the ready-to-win effect is executed at the execution timing of the character effect and on the upward right line L4. It is controlled to be executed when and when

In addition, the character effect set in the second effect layer ry2b is such that the character "ge" is placed at the intersection of the upper line L1 and the middle symbol row z2, and The character "ki" is arranged, the character "a" is arranged at the position where the lower line L3 and the middle pattern row z2 intersect, and the character "tsu" is arranged at the position where the lower line L3 and the right symbol row z3 intersect. Display controlled to be arranged. The character effect set in the second effect layer ry2a is called a second character effect.

In this second character effect, characters are not arranged at the position where the left symbol row z1 and the middle line L2 intersect and the position where the right symbol row z3 and the middle row line L2 intersect, and the third symbol in the reach state is placed on the middle row L2. is displayed, the characters in the character effect do not overlap, so control is performed mainly when the reach line is the middle line L2. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the problem that the character in the character presentation hides the ready-to-win pattern during the ready-to-win presentation, making it difficult to understand whether or not the ready-to-win game is in progress.

In addition, the character effect set in the third effect layer ry2c is such that the character "ge" is placed at the intersection of the upper line L1 and the right symbol row z3, and The character "ki" is arranged, the character "a" is arranged at the position where the lower line L3 and the middle pattern row z2 intersect, and the character "tsu" is arranged at the position where the lower line L3 and the right symbol row z2 intersect. Display controlled to be arranged. The character effect set in the third effect layer ry2c is called a third character effect.

This third character effect is controlled so as not to be used at the timing after the ready-to-win effect is executed because the characters are arranged on the right symbol row z3. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the problem that the character in the character presentation hides the ready-to-win pattern during the ready-to-win presentation, making it difficult to understand whether or not the ready-to-win game is in progress.

Here, for example, when the third symbol is stop-displayed on the middle line L2 in the ready-to-win state, if the character effect using the first effect layer ry2a is executed, the character "ki" constituting the character effect The third pattern is hidden, and the player cannot recognize the ready-to-win mode. On the other hand, if the character effect is executed using the second effect layer ry2b instead of the first effect layer ry2a, the character effect can be executed without hiding the third pattern.

In this manner, a suitable character effect can be executed by switching the display layer for drawing the character effect image depending on the display state of the third symbol at the time when the character effect is started.

As the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 for executing the above-described character effect only by the liquid crystal display, the following configuration is conceivable.

First, as an electrical configuration of the display control device 114, a character effect flag 233xa and a character effect in-execution flag 233xb are provided in the work RAM 233 for the thirty-sixth control example described above, and a character effect flag 233xb is provided in the NAND flash memory 234a in the character ROM. A display data selection table 234xa is newly defined. Other processing is the same as the thirty-sixth control example (and the first control example) described above.

The character effect flag 233xa is a flag that is set to ON when information indicating execution of character effect is included in the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113, and the character effect flag 233xa is turned on. If set, character effect processing is executed in display setting processing 6 . The character effect flag 233xa set to ON is set to OFF when a fluctuation stop command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. Details of the character effect processing will be described later.

The character rendering in-execution flag 233xb is a flag that is set to ON when a character display table for character rendering is set in the character rendering process. In the process, a character rendering in-execution process is executed. The character effect execution flag 233xb set to ON is set to OFF when the address indicated by the character pointer in the character effect execution process becomes the END data of the character display data). The details of the character effect execution process will be described later.

The character effect display data selection table 234xa is a table in which character effect display data is defined with respect to the adequacy determination result of the special symbol and the value of the display effect counter CS3. Specifically, if the result of the right/fail judgment is out, if the value of the display effect counter CS3 is in the range of "0 to 199, 500 to 899", "no character effect" is selected, and "200 to 299, 900 If it is in the range of "999", "first effect layer display data" is selected, if it is in the range of "300 to 399", "second effect layer display data" is selected, and if it is in the range of "400 to 499", the "second effect layer display data" is selected. For example, "third effect layer display data" is selected.

When the result of winning/failure determination is a big hit, if the value of the display effect counter CS3 is within the range of "0 to 99, 800 to 899", "no character effect" is selected, and the range of "200 to 299, 900 to 999" is selected. If so, the "first effect layer display data" is selected, if the range is "300 to 399", the "second effect layer display data" is selected, and if the range is "100 to 199, 500 to 799", "Third effect layer display data" is selected.

Here, the first effect layer display data is a display data table for drawing a character effect image on the first effect layer ry2a among the character effect display data, and the second effect layer display data is the second effect layer display data. This is a display data table for drawing a character effect image on the second effect layer ry2b, and the third effect layer display data is a display data table for drawing a character effect image on the third effect layer ry2c. Each display data table is associated with an address representing the time (in this control example, 20 milliseconds) during which one frame of image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and is displayed at that time. The content of an image for one frame (drawing content) to be drawn is specified in detail.

Also, "no character effect" indicates that display data for character effect is not set at the present time, that is, it is not an execution value for character effect. In the second modification of the thirty-sixth control example, as described above, when the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113 includes information indicating execution of character rendering, the display control device 114 , an execution timing is randomly selected by lottery within a period in which the character presentation can be executed, and the character presentation is executed. Specifically, when the value of the display effect counter CS3 becomes the character effect execution value in the character effect process, the character effect display data table is set and the character effect is started.

In addition, since the value of the display effect counter CS3 is in the range of "0 to 999", if the result of the success/failure judgment is out, 60% of the time, "no character effect" is selected, and 20% of the time, "no character effect" is selected. "First effect layer display data" is selected, "second effect layer display data" is selected at a rate of 10%, and "third effect layer display data" is selected at a rate of 10%. That is, when the result of the judgment is "out", the ratio of the execution value of the character effect is 40%.

On the other hand, if the result of the hit/fail judgment is a big hit, 20% of the selection is for "no text effect", 20% is for selecting the "first effect layer display data", and 20% is for " "Second effect layer display data" is selected, and "third effect layer display data" is selected at a rate of 40%. That is, when the result of the hit/fail judgment is a jackpot, the ratio of the execution value of the character effect is 80%. Therefore, the execution value of the character effect is more likely to be selected and the character effect is more likely to be executed in the case of a big win than in the case of the result of the win/loss determination. In addition, since the ratio of selecting the "second effect layer display data" and the "third effect layer display data" is higher in the case of a big hit than in the case of a hit/fail judgment result, the character effect display is performed. The mode (arrangement of the characters "Gekiatsu") also makes it easier to predict the success/failure determination result, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Next, control processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second modification of the thirty-sixth control example will be described. The control processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second modified example of the thirty-sixth control example is different from the control processing of the display control device 114 in the above-described thirty-sixth control example (and the first control example). The point of executing the fluctuation pattern command process 6 instead of the fluctuation pattern command process (see FIG. 1097(a)), the point of executing the fluctuation stop command process 6 instead of the fluctuation stop command process (see FIG. 1100(a)), The difference is that the display setting process 6 is executed instead of the display setting process (see FIG. 1102), and the character effect process, the character effect in-execution process, and the ready-to-win effect process are additionally executed. differ. Other processing is the same as the thirty-sixth control example (and the first control example) described above.

First, details of the variation pattern command process 6 (S6431) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second modification of the thirty-sixth control example will be described. Variation pattern command processing 6 (S6431) in the second modification of the thirty-sixth control example is executed instead of the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 1097) of the thirty-sixth control example (and the first control example) described above. processing.

In the variation pattern command process 6 (S6431), first, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113 includes execution information for character rendering (S6506). If it is determined that there is character effect execution information (S6506: Yes), the character effect flag 233xa is set to ON (S6506), and the process proceeds to S6501. Then, the processing of S6501 to S6505 described above is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S6506, if it is determined that there is no character effect execution information (S6506: No), the above-described process of S6507 is skipped and the process proceeds to S6501. Then, the processing of S6501 to S6505 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, details of the change stop command process 6 (S6432) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second modification of the thirty-sixth control example will be described. The fluctuation stop command process 6 (S6432) in the second modification of the thirty-sixth control example is executed instead of the fluctuation stop command process (see FIG. 1100) in the thirty-sixth control example (and the first control example). processing.

In the fluctuation stop command 6 process (S6432), first, it is determined whether or not the character effect flag 233xa is set to ON (S6936). When it is determined that the character effect flag 233xa is set to ON (S6936: Yes), the character effect flag 233xa is set to OFF (S6937), and the process proceeds to S6931. Then, the processing of S6931 to S6935 described above is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S6936, when it is determined that the character effect flag 233xa is not set to ON (S6936: No), the process of S6937 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S6931. Then, the processing of S6931 to S6935 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, details of the display setting process 6 (S6331) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second modified example of the thirty-sixth control example will be described. The display setting process 6 (S6331) in the second modification of the thirty-sixth control example is executed instead of the display setting process (see FIG. 1102) in the thirty-sixth control example (and the first control example). be.

In the display setting process 6 (S6331), first, the processes of S7201 to S7205 described above are executed, and then it is determined whether or not the character effect flag 233xa is set to ON (S7222). If it is determined that the character effect flag 233xa is set to ON (S7222: Yes), character effect processing (S7223) is executed, and the process proceeds to S7206 described above. A detailed description of the character rendering process (S7223) will be given later. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S7222 that the character effect flag 233xa is not set to ON (S7222: No), the process of S7223 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S7206.

Next, the character rendering process (S7223) executed in the display setting process 6 (S6331) in the second modified example of the thirty-sixth control example will be described. In the character effect processing (S7223), first, it is determined whether or not the character effect execution flag 233xb is set to ON (S7251). If it is determined that the character effect in-execution flag 233xb is set to ON (S7251: Yes), the character effect in-execution process (S7252) is executed, and this process ends. A detailed description of the character rendering in-execution process (S7252) will be given later. On the other hand, in the process of S7251, if it is determined that the character effect execution flag 233xb is not set to ON (S7251: No), it is determined whether it is the character effect executable period (S7253). If it is determined that it is not the character effect executable period (S7253: No), this process is terminated. Determination of whether or not it is the character rendering executable period is made by determining whether the value of the clock counter 233h is greater than the value corresponding to the character rendering period (5 seconds in the second modified example of the thirty-sixth control example). It is determined by That is, when the value of the clock counter 233h is less than the value corresponding to 5 seconds, the character effect cannot be finished within the variable display period of the special symbols, so the character effect is not executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S7253, when it is determined that it is the character effect executable period, the value of the display effect counter CS3 is obtained (S7254). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the display effect counter CS3 acquired in the process of S7254 is the character effect execution value (S7255). If it is determined that the obtained value of the display effect counter CS3 is not the execution value of the character effect (S7255: No), this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S7255, when it is determined that the acquired value of the display effect counter CS3 is the execution value of the character effect (S7255: Yes), it is determined whether or not reach is in progress (S7256). When it is determined that it is in reach (S7256: Yes), reach effect processing (S7257) is executed, and this processing ends. A detailed description of the ready-to-win effect processing (S7257) will be given later. On the other hand, in the process of S7256, if it is determined that the reach is not in progress (S7256: No), the character effect display data corresponding to the acquired display effect counter CS3 is set in the character display data table buffer (S7258), and the character The effect executing flag 233xb is set to ON (S7259), and this process is terminated.

Next, a description will be given of the processing during character presentation execution (S7252) executed within the character presentation processing (S7223) in the second modification of the thirty-sixth control example. In the character rendering in-execution process (S7252), first, 1 is added to the character pointer (S7351). Next, it is determined whether or not the drawing contents of the address indicated by the character pointer after addition are END data (S7352). If it is determined that the drawing content at the address indicated by the character pointer after the addition is END data (S7352: Yes), the value of the character pointer is initialized (S7353), and the character effect execution flag 233xb is set to off. (S7354), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7352 that the drawing content at the address indicated by the character pointer after addition is not END data (S7352: No), the address indicated by the character pointer in the character display data table buffer is obtained (S7355), and the process ends.

Next, the process of the ready-to-win effect process (S7257) executed in the character effect process (S7223) in the second modified example of the thirty-sixth control example will be described. In the reach effect processing (S7257), first, it is determined whether or not the current reach is the middle row (x2 lines) reach (S7451). If it is determined that the current reach is not the middle row (x2 lines) reach (S7451: No), it is determined whether it is the right-up row (x2 lines) reach (S7452). When it is determined to be the right-up row (Z2 line) reach (S7452: Yes), the character display data of the first effect layer ry2a is set in the character display data table buffer (S7453), and the character effect execution flag 233xb. is set to ON (S7455), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S7451, if it is determined that the current reach is the middle row (x2 lines) reach (S7451: Yes), the character display data of the second effect layer ry2b is set in the character display data table buffer. (S7454), the character effect executing flag 233xb is set to ON (S7455), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the second modified example of the thirty-sixth control example, in each layer for displaying the display mode on the third pattern display device 81, by switching the effect layer for displaying the character effect, the optimum character is displayed. The production is configured to be executable.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems such as hindering the visual recognition of special symbols by character effects and concealing other advance notice effects, and executing character effects while providing appropriate game information to players. can do.

In addition, in the second modification of the thirty-sixth control example, when the third symbol is displayed in the ready-to-win mode, by switching the display layer in which the character effect is displayed, the third symbol and the character effect are displayed. However, the configuration is not limited to this. For example, when the ready-to-win effect period is reached during execution of the character effect, the timing of stopping and displaying the third symbol in the ready-to-win mode may be shifted (delayed), or the ready-to-win line may be displayed during execution. The reach line may be changed to a reach line that does not overlap with the character presentation.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 in the second modified example of the thirty-sixth control example, by displaying a character effect (a combination of a plurality of characters to form an arbitrary word (for example, the character "Gekiatsu"), It has a plurality (three) of effect layers with different character arrangements in the effect that suggests the result of determination of whether the special symbol is changing, and is used according to the display situation of the third symbol at the timing when the character effect is started. By switching the effect layer, the third pattern of the ready-to-win state and the characters constituting the character effect are prevented from overlapping, and the configuration for executing the optimum character effect has been described.

However, in the character effect of the second modified example of the thirty-sixth control example, all the characters are drawn in one effect layer, so the character effect cannot have a sense of depth. Therefore, the thirty-sixth control is an example of control in the case where different characters are drawn in a plurality of effect layers, and character effects with a sense of depth can be displayed by superimposing and displaying all the effect layers. A third modification of the example will be described.

A characteristic effect executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the third modified example of the thirty-sixth control example will be described. As effects for giving advance notice of the result of determination of suitability of the special symbol, two effects, a character effect and a character effect, are executed. The character effect is an effect that foretells that the expectation of winning the jackpot of the special symbol being changed is high by displaying the character line "Gekiatsu" in the display area of the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

The character effect is a effect that foretells the degree of expectation for winning a jackpot by the display mode of the character 813 imitating a rabbit. Specifically, the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot differs depending on the color of the effect displayed surrounding the character 813 and the size of the effect. For example, when the blue effect is displayed, the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot is lowest. Then, the probability of winning the jackpot increases in the order of the red effect and the gold effect.

Whether or not the character effect and the character effect are executed is defined in the display variation pattern set by the voice lamp control device 113, and both the character effect and the character effect are performed during the variable display period of one special pattern. There are a variation pattern in which no effect is performed, a variation pattern in which only one of the effects is performed, and a variation pattern in which both effects are performed. Further, the display variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command specifies the start timing of the character presentation, but does not specify the start timing of the character presentation. determined by lottery. For this reason, the effect execution period of the character effect and the effect execution period of the character effect may overlap.

Here, an example of the display screen when the effect period of the character effect and the effect period of the character effect overlap will be described. In the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, there are a background image, characters ``ge'' 814, characters ``ki'' 815, and characters ``a'' 816, which are constituent elements of the character presentation. A character 813, which is a component of the character presentation, is displayed.

The sub display area Ds includes an active pending symbol display area Ds1 which is a display area for displaying an active pending symbol hr0 indicating a pending ball corresponding to the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner, and an active pending symbol display area Ds1 for displaying the pending pending symbol. A message in which characters 817a of "win", characters 817b of "tsu", and characters 817c of "zo" are displayed regardless of the determination result of special symbols and the type of display fluctuation pattern. display area Ds3. It should be noted that the display of the characters "win!" is displayed even during a period in which the special symbols are not displayed in a variable manner, and does not give advance notice of the result of determination of whether or not the special symbols are appropriate, but is merely a message to the player. is displayed. In addition, in the third modified example of the thirty-sixth control example, a message to the player is displayed in the message display area Ds3, but the configuration is not limited to this. If it is a normal state, the display of "Usual") may be displayed, or the stage name of the currently set background stage may be displayed.

Here, the flow of character rendering in the third modified example of the thirty-sixth control example will be described. When it comes to the start timing of the character effect specified in the set display variation pattern, first the character 815 of "ge" is displayed at the position shown in FIG. 219, then the character 814 of "ge" is displayed. , and the character "A" 816 is displayed. Then, when the character 816 of "a" is displayed, the characters 817a of "win" and the characters 817c of "win" of the characters of "win" displayed in the message display area Ds3 are hidden. , and only the character "tsu" 817b is displayed. By configuring in this way, the player can easily recognize that the character "tsu" 817b has become a constituent element forming the character string "gekiatsu" in the character presentation from the constituent element of the message.

The display position of the character 813 in the character effect differs depending on the set display variation pattern, and is displayed at various positions in the main display area Dm. Specifically, in the third modification of the thirty-sixth control example, a plurality of display data tables for character presentation are provided, and the variation pattern type included in the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113 A display data table for one character effect is set according to . This display data table for character presentation is associated with an address that expresses the time (20 milliseconds in this control example) for which one frame of image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of the image for one frame to be displayed at that time. The drawing content defines drawing information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to draw the character 813, such as the display position of the character 813, the color and size of the effect surrounding the character 813, and display data for character production. Different drawing information is defined for each table. With this configuration, it becomes difficult for the player to predict where the character 813 will be displayed, and the enjoyment of searching for the character 813 displayed in the main display area Dm can be provided.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the third modification of the thirty-sixth control example, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the second modification of the thirty-sixth control example, displays the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a plurality of ways. In this configuration, the images displayed on the display layer are combined and displayed. As for the display layers, the reserved pattern layer ry1 is on the forefront side (on the player's line of sight), followed by the first effect layer ry2a, the second effect layer ry2b, the third effect layer ry2c, the special pattern layer ry3, and the background layer ry4. It is configured to be arranged in the order of

Specifically, as described in the drawing list described above with reference to FIG. effect 1, effect 2, . . . ), characters (character 1, character 2, . Layers are formed. As for the portion where the display images overlap, the display image displayed in the front layer (layer) is preferentially visible.

In the reserved pattern layer ry1, there are mainly held patterns hr0 during execution in the sub-display area Ds, reserved patterns displayed in the standby reserved pattern display area Ds2, and character images of "winning" displayed in the message display area Ds3. is drawn.

A character 816 and an image of a character 813 are displayed on the first rendering layer ry2a. The second effect layer ry2b displays an image of the character "ki" 815, the third effect layer ry2c displays an image of the character "ge" 814, and the background layer ry4 displays a background image. be done.

In this way, the images of the characters 814 to 816 and 817b, which are the constituent elements of the character presentation, are displayed in different display layers, respectively, thereby creating a three-dimensional presentation with depth, giving the player a realistic presentation. can provide.

Note that the display layer for drawing the character 813 in the character presentation is defined by the type of display data table for character presentation. For example, when the effect surrounding the character 813 is blue (that is, when it is in a mode suggesting that the probability of winning the jackpot is relatively low (for example, 5%)), the importance of the game information provided to the player is is low, and it is better to display other advance notice effects preferentially, so the character 813 is drawn on the third effect layer ry2c, which is arranged on the rearmost side among the effect layers. On the other hand, when the effect surrounding the character 813 is gold (that is, when it is in a mode suggesting that the probability of winning the jackpot is relatively high (for example, 60%)), the importance of the game information provided to the player is The character 813 is drawn on the first effect layer ry2a, which is arranged on the frontmost side among the effect layers, because it is preferable to display it preferentially over the other notice effects.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the game information, which is highly important for the player, from being hidden by being overlapped with other advance notice effects. Since the display position of 813 is not fixed, for example, the character 813 surrounded by a gold effect is one of the constituent elements of the character string "gekiatsu" (the characters "ge", "ki", and "a") in the character presentation. , character 815 is displayed at the display position, the character 813 and the character 815, which is a constituent element of the character effect, are displayed overlapping each other. . In this case, the character 813 is drawn on the first effect layer ry2a, and the character "ki" 815 is drawn on the second effect layer ry2b. The character 813 displayed is preferentially displayed. Therefore, a part of the character 815 (the part overlapping the character 813) is hidden from the player by the display of the character 813, and the character string "gekiatsu" is formed. It is difficult to understand whether or not the character "ki" 815 is displayed from the screen, and there is a possibility that the effect of the character effect is lowered. It should be noted that, when the character effect is executed, it suggests that the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot is extremely high (for example, 80%), and is the notice effect with the highest importance of the game information to be provided to the player.

Therefore, in the third modified example of the thirty-sixth control example, it is determined whether or not the character rendering is being executed at the timing when the characters (for example, the character 815 of "ki") constituting the character rendering are drawn on the display layer. If it is determined and overlaps with the effect execution period of the character effect, the display layer for drawing the character "ki" 815 can be changed from the second effect layer ry2b to the reserved pattern layer ry1. By configuring in this way, since the reserved pattern layer ry1 is the display layer arranged on the frontmost side (on the player's line of sight) among the display layers, the characters drawn on the first effect layer ry2a The character “ki” 815 is displayed on the front side of the character 813 , so that the player can easily visually recognize the character “ki” 815 without changing the display position of the first effect layer 813 .

Control for executing the above-described character rendering will be described below. First, the contents of the character effect display data table of the pachinko machine 10 in the third modified example of the thirty-sixth control example will be described. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a character effect display data table; The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this control example, 20 milliseconds) for which one frame of image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content of an image (drawing content) for one frame.

The drawing content defines the position where each character in the character rendering is to be displayed and information indicating the display layer to be drawn. In the character effect display data table, drawing contents are defined for character pointer values. The character pointer value "0" defines Start data indicating the start of the character presentation. The character pointer value “1000” defines the drawing instruction of the character “ki” 815 and the information indicating the display layer to be drawn. The character pointer value "1500" defines the drawing instruction of the character 814 of "ge" and the information indicating the display layer to be drawn. The character pointer value "2000" defines the drawing instruction of the character "A" 816 and the information indicating the display layer to be drawn. The character pointer value "2500" defines a drawing instruction to hide the "win" character 817a and the "zo" character 817c displayed in the message display area Ds3, and information indicating the display layer for drawing. . The character pointer value "5000" defines END data indicating the end of the character presentation. Thus, the display control device 114 determines that the character effect has ended.

In addition, in the third modification of the thirty-sixth control example, the character string "gekiatsu" is always formed when the character effect is executed, but the character string "gekiatsu" is not limited to this. It is also possible to provide a pattern (so-called ghost pattern) in which the character presentation ends without the formation of the .

In addition, in the third modification of the thirty-sixth control example, the character string "Gekiatsu" is formed in the character rendering, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other character strings may be formed. , a pattern may be formed instead of a character string.

Next, control processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the third modified example of the thirty-sixth control example will be described. The control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the third modified example of the thirty-sixth control example is different from the control process of the display control device 114 in the second modified example of the thirty-sixth control example. Display setting process 7 (S6351) is executed instead of process 6, character effect process 2 (S7224) is executed instead of character effect process, and character effect process 2 (S7224) is executed instead of character effect process in progress. S7552) is executed. Other processing is the same.

First, the display setting process 7 (S6351) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the third modified example of the thirty-sixth control example will be described. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of display setting processing 7 (S6351). The display setting process 7 (S6351) in the third modified example of the thirty-sixth control example is different from the display setting process 6 in the second modified example of the thirty-sixth control example described above, instead of the character rendering process (S7223). The difference is that effect processing 2 (S7224) is executed. Other processing is the same.

Next, the character rendering process 2 (S7224) executed within the display setting process 7 (S6351) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the third modified example of the thirty-sixth control example will be described.

In the character effect processing 2 (S7224), first, it is determined whether or not the character effect execution flag 233xb is set to ON (S7551). When it is determined that the character effect in-execution flag 233xb is set to ON (S7551: Yes), the character effect in-execution process 2 (S7552) is executed, and this process ends. A detailed description of the character rendering in-execution process 2 (S7552) will be given later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S7551, if it is determined that the character effect execution flag 233xb is not set to ON (S7551: No), it is determined whether it is the character effect executable period (S7553). If it is determined that it is not the character effect executable period (S7553: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S7553 that it is the character effect executable period, the value of the display effect counter CS3 is obtained (S7554). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the display effect counter CS3 acquired in the process of S7554 is the character effect execution value (S7555). If it is determined that the acquired value of the display effect counter CS3 is not the execution value (S7555: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S7555, when it is determined that the acquired value of the display effect counter CS3 is the character effect execution value (S7555: Yes), the character effect executing flag 223xc is set to ON (S7556), A character effect data table is set (S7557), and this process ends.

Next, the process of the character effect execution process 2 (S7552) executed in the character effect process 2 (S7224) in the third modified example of the thirty-sixth control example will be described. In the character rendering in-execution process 2 (S7552), first, 1 is added to the character pointer (S7651). Next, it is determined whether or not the drawing contents of the address indicated by the character pointer after addition are END data (S7654). If it is determined that the drawing content at the address indicated by the character pointer after the addition is END data (S7654: Yes), the value of the character pointer is initialized (S7652), and the character effect execution flag 233xb is turned off. (S7653), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S7654, if it is determined that the drawing content at the address indicated by the character pointer after addition is not END data (S7654: No), the address indicated by the character pointer in the character display data table buffer is acquired (S7655), and it is determined whether the acquired data of the content of drawing is the data of the content of drawing indicating the character "ki" (S7656).

In the processing of S7656, if it is determined that the acquired drawing content data is the drawing content data indicating the character “ki” (S7656: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the announcement effect is being executed. (S7657). When it is determined that the advance notice effect is being executed (S7657: Yes), the display layer is changed to the reserved symbol layer ry1 (S7658), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S7657, when it is determined that the advance notice effect is not being executed (S7657: No), the process of S7658 is skipped and the process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S7656, if it is determined that the acquired drawing content data is not the drawing content data of the character “ki” (S7656: No), the above-described S7657 processing is skipped, and the display layer is changed to the reserved symbol layer ry1 (S7658), and the process is terminated.

As described above, in the third modified example of the thirty-sixth control example, different characters are drawn in a plurality of effect layers, and all the effect layers are superimposed and displayed to create characters with a sense of depth. It is configured so that the production can be displayed.

In addition, when the rendering period of the character rendering and other advance notice rendering overlaps and there is a risk that the constituent elements (characters) of the character rendering may be hidden by the other notice rendering, a display that renders the constituent elements (characters) of the character rendering. By switching the layer to the display layer (reserved pattern layer ry1) arranged in the foreground, it is configured to be displayed on the front side rather than other notice effects.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to solve the problem that the character effect is hidden by other notice effects, and the character effect looks like it is not being executed from the player's point of view.

In addition, in the third modification of the thirty-sixth control example, when the character effect and the effect period of the character effect overlap, the character effect is hidden by the character effect by switching the drawing of the character effect to the display layer arranged on the front side. Although the configuration for suppressing the above has been described, a part of the character presentation may be hidden by the character presentation, and an presentation may be executed in which the content of the game information provided by the character presentation is varied. Specifically, the character 813 is displayed so as to hide the part where "Geki" is displayed among the characters "Gekiatsu" displayed by the character presentation, and the jackpot is won more than when "Gekiatsu" is displayed. You may perform the production|presentation which displays the character "hot" which ranks down expectation. In this case, for example, it is preferable to execute an effect that encourages the change of the display position of the character 813 or the switching of the display layer. By configuring in this way, when the character 813 does not overlap the character presentation or is displayed on the back side of the character presentation, the character "Atsu" is promoted to the character "Gekiatsu". It is possible to make the player interested in the movement of the character 813, thereby improving the interest in the game.

<37th control example>
Conventionally, the number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed per unit time is determined by determining different variation patterns (variation times) based on the set game state and the result of the special symbol lottery. to be varied according to the game state, and ambitiously aiming to set a game state in which the number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed per unit time increases for the player. There is a pachinko machine 10 for playing games.

In addition, by making it easier to determine a variation pattern with a longer variation time when the result of the special symbol lottery is a win than when the result is a loss, the special symbol lottery can be adjusted according to the length of the special symbol variation during execution. There is a pachinko machine 10 capable of allowing a player to predict the result of a special symbol lottery corresponding to a special symbol variation being executed before the variation is stopped and displayed.

Further, even during a period in which the same game state continues, a different variation pattern (variation time) is determined based on the number of special symbol variations executed after the end of the big winning game. In some cases, a player who has been playing the game for a long time in the same game state can play the game without getting tired of it. Specifically, when the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game, every time the special symbol variation is executed 100 times, the variation pattern table referred to when determining the variation pattern is switched. There is a configuration in which a variation pattern (variation time) can be set.

According to the conventional pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, even if the same game state continues for a long time, a completely different variation pattern can be set according to the number of executions of the special symbol variation. Therefore, it was possible to suppress the player from getting bored with the game, but as the specified content (variation pattern selection scenario) for switching the variation pattern table according to the number of times the special symbol variation is executed, a huge amount of Therefore, it is necessary to define data corresponding to the number of special symbol fluctuations, which may increase the processing load of the main controller 110 .

Also, if the number of executions of the special symbol variation and the variation pattern table to be referred to are completely associated, the player will easily predict which variation pattern is likely to be selected at what timing. , It is desirable to diversify the combination of the number of executions of the special symbol variation and the variation pattern table to be referred to, and to make it difficult for the player to predict which variation pattern is likely to be selected at what timing. When such a configuration is used, there is a problem that the specified contents of the variation pattern selection scenario become more diversified and the processing load of the main controller 110 is further increased.

On the other hand, in the thirty-seventh control example, the same game state is managed by the state table whose minimum unit is the range in which the referenced variation pattern table is the same. Specifically, for the same game state, a plurality of state tables with different reference variation pattern tables are provided, and when the transition condition in each state table is satisfied, it is configured to shift to a different state table. are doing.

By configuring in this way, since there is no need to measure the number of special symbol variations after the last big winning game is finished, there is an effect that the processing load of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the thirty-seventh control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1118 to 1126. FIG. In the thirty-seventh control example, the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 are partially different from those of the thirty-second control example described above. Other configurations are the same, so description thereof is omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 1118, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-seventh control example will be described. FIG. 1118 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-seventh control example. As shown in FIG. 1118, in this 37th control example, a variation pattern selection table 202ha is provided instead of the variation pattern selection table 202d for the 32nd control example described above, and further, a state transition table 202hb and a jackpot transition The difference is that a setting table 202hc is added.

Here, with reference to FIG. 1120, the variation pattern selection table 202ha will be described. FIG. 1120(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection table 202ha. As shown in FIG. 1120 (a), the variation pattern selection table 202ha includes three variation pattern tables that are referred to when the normal state is set, and three that are referred to when the time saving state is set. Two fluctuation pattern tables are defined, and different fluctuation pattern tables are read out according to the type of set status status (ST).

The normal variation pattern 1 table 202ha1 is a variation pattern table referred to when ST1 is set as the state status. "ST1" is a state status set when the pachinko machine 10 executes initialization processing or after the rush period ends, and is a state that continues until the special symbol variation is executed 20 times.

Here, with reference to FIG. 1120(b), the contents defined in the normal variation pattern 1 table 202ha1 will be described. FIG. 1120(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal variation pattern 1 table 202ha1. As shown in FIG. 1120(b), the content described in the normal variation pattern 1 table 202ha1 is the second special symbol lottery for the normal variation pattern table 202d1 in the 32nd control example described above. The difference is that the content of the variation pattern to be selected is different, and the rest is the same. Descriptions of the same contents are omitted.

As described above, the state in which the normal variation pattern 1 table 202ha1 is referenced is set after the rush period ends (after the second special symbol variation based on the special figure 2 hold acquired during the time saving state ends). Therefore, the second special symbol variation whose variation pattern is determined by referring to the normal variation pattern 1 table 202ha1 is the second special symbol variation that cannot occur when the normal game is executed. becomes. Therefore, by defining a variation pattern so that a long variation with a variation time of 100 seconds is executed, an inappropriate game (a right-handed game for executing the second special symbol lottery during the normal state) is executed. The progress of the game can be delayed with respect to the player who is playing.

In addition, when a determination means capable of determining that the second special symbol variation is executed in a state where the state status "ST1" is set is provided, and the determination means determines that the second special symbol variation is performed. In addition, notification means capable of informing the outside of the pachinko machine 10 that an illegal game has been executed may be provided.

The normal variation pattern 2 table 202ha2 is a variation pattern table referred to when ST2 is set as the state status. "ST2" is a state status that is set when the transition condition of "ST1" is satisfied, and is a state that continues until the special symbol variation is executed 80 times.

Here, with reference to FIG. 1121(a), the contents defined in the normal variation pattern 2 table 202ha2 will be described. FIG. 1121(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal variation pattern 2 table 202ha2. As shown in FIG. 1121 (a), the normal variation pattern 2 table 202ha2 is the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation for the normal variation pattern 1 table 202ha1 (see FIG. 1120 (b)). The difference is that it is defined so that "Normal Reach" is not selected, and the rest is the same. Descriptions of the same contents are omitted.

As described above, the contents defined in the normal variation pattern 2 table 202ha2 are different from the normal variation pattern 1 table 202ha1 in the type of variation pattern that can be selected. Based on the variation pattern of symbol variation, it is possible for the player to predict the currently set state status.

In addition, even if the same game state is set, the selection contents of the variation pattern can be changed according to the set state status, so the game can be played for a long time in the same game state. It is possible to prevent the player who is playing the game from getting tired of the game early. Specifically, when "ST2" is set as the state status than when "ST1" is set, it is configured so that the variation pattern corresponding to super reach is more likely to be selected. there is

The normal variation pattern 3 table 202ha3 is a variation pattern table referred to when ST3 is set as the state status. "ST3" is a state status set when the transition condition is established in a state in which the state status "ST6" corresponding to the final variation in the time saving state is set, and the special symbol variation is executed once. It is a state that continues until

Here, with reference to FIG. 1121(b), the contents defined in the normal variation pattern 3 table 202ha3 will be described. FIG. 1121(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal variation pattern 3 table 202ha3. As shown in FIG. 1121(b), the normal variation pattern 3 table 202ha3 selects a variation pattern with a variation time of 20 seconds regardless of the special symbol type and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. Configure. This normal variation pattern 3 table 202ha3 is usually referred to when executing the second special symbol variation in the normal state during the rush period (the second special symbol variation based on the special figure 2 hold acquired during the time saving state). It is a thing.

The variation pattern 1 table for time saving 202ha4 is a variation pattern table referred to when ST4 is set as the state status. "ST4" is a state status that is set after the time-saving jackpots (jackpots A, C, and D) are completed. In other words, it is a state status corresponding to at least the first special symbol variation executed during the time saving state.

Here, with reference to FIG. 1122(a), the contents defined in the working hours variation pattern 1 table 202ha4 will be described. FIG. 1122(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the working hours variation pattern 1 table 202ha4. As shown in FIG. 1122(a), the time saving variation pattern 1 table 202ha4 has the same contents as the time saving variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 957(a)) in the 32nd control example described above. .

The variation pattern 2 table for time saving 202ha5 is a variation pattern table referred to when ST5 is set as the state status. "ST5" is a state status that is set when a transition condition is satisfied in a state where "ST4" is set as the state status.

Here, with reference to FIG. 1122(b), the contents defined in the working hours variation pattern 2 table 202ha5 will be described. FIG. 1122(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the working hours variation pattern 2 table 202ha5. As shown in FIG. 1122(b), in the time saving variation pattern 2 table 202ha5, for the first special symbol variation, the special time saving variation pattern table 202d3 in the above-described 32nd control example (FIG. 957(b) ), the same contents as the time saving variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 957(a)) in the 32nd control example described above are defined for the second special symbol variation.

Next, the time saving variation pattern 3 table 202ha6 is a variation pattern table referred to when ST6 is set as the state status. "ST6" is a state status that is set when a transition condition is satisfied in a state where "ST5" is set as the state status.

Here, with reference to FIG. 1123, the contents defined in the working hours variation pattern 3 table 202ha6 will be described. FIG. 1123 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the working hours variation pattern 3 table 202ha6. As shown in FIG. 1123, in the time saving variation pattern 3 table 202ha6, for the first special symbol variation, the special time saving variation pattern table 202d3 in the above-described 32nd control example (see FIG. 957 (b)) and The same contents are defined for the second special symbol variation as the time saving final variation pattern table 202d4 (see FIG. 957(c)) in the thirty-second control example described above.

The state transition table 202hb is a data table in which the content of the state status set in the pachinko machine 10 is defined in advance. Here, the contents defined in the state transition table 202hb will be described with reference to FIG. 1124(a). FIG. 1124(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the state transition table 202hb. As shown in FIG. 1124(a), the state transition table 202hb stores six types of state transition tables. Each state transition table defines the type of variation pattern table to be referenced, the transition condition to a different state status, and the state status of the transition destination when the transition condition is satisfied, and varies depending on the progress of the game It is configured to transition to the state transition table. By configuring in this way, it is possible to select various variation patterns according to the game state and the number of times of special symbol variation only by executing management regarding the transition conditions for shifting the state transition table.

The state transition 1 table 202hb1 is a state status set when the pachinko machine 10 executes initialization processing or after the rush period ends. That is, when the initialized pachinko machine 10 is started up, first, a variation pattern is selected with reference to the state transition 1 table 202hb1.

Here, the contents of the state transition 1 table 202hb1 will be described with reference to FIG. 1124(b). FIG. 1124(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the state transition 1 table 202hb1. As shown in FIG. 1124 (b), the state transition 1 table 202hb1 includes the type of the variation pattern table to be referred to "normal 1 (normal variation pattern 1 table 202ha1)", the transition condition "special figure variation 20 times", The state status "ST2" of the transition destination when the transition condition is satisfied is defined.

Next, the contents of the state transition 2 table 202hb2 will be described with reference to FIG. 1124(c). FIG. 1124(c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the state transition 2 table 202hb2. As shown in FIG. 1124 (c), the state transition 2 table 202hb2 includes the type of the variation pattern table to be referred to "normal 2 (normal variation pattern 2 table 202ha2)", the transition condition "special figure variation 80 times", The state status "ST1" of the transition destination when the transition condition is satisfied is defined.

Next, the contents of the state transition 3 table 202hb3 will be described with reference to FIG. 1124(d). FIG. 1124(d) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the state transition 3 table 202hb3. As shown in FIG. 1124 (d), the state transition 3 table 202hb3 includes the type of the variation pattern table to be referred to "normal 3 (normal variation pattern 3 table 202ha3)", the transition condition "special figure variation 1 time", The state status "ST1" of the transition destination when the transition condition is satisfied is defined.

Next, the contents of the state transition 4 table 202hb4 will be described with reference to FIG. 1125(a). FIG. 1125(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the state transition 4 table 202hb4. As shown in FIG. 1125 (a), the state transition 4 table 202hb4 includes the type of the variation pattern table to be referred to "time saving 1 (time saving variation pattern 1 table 202ha4)", as a transition condition, transition condition 1 "special figure 1 fluctuation 4 times or special figure 2 fluctuation 1 time", transition condition 2 "small winning" is the state status of the transition destination when the transition condition is satisfied, "ST5" when the transition condition 1 is satisfied, transition condition If 2 is established, "ST3" is defined.

Next, the contents of the state transition 5 table 202hb5 will be described with reference to FIG. 1125(b). FIG. 1125(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the state transition 5 table 202hb5. As shown in FIG. 1125 (b), the state transition 5 table 202hb5 includes the type of the variation pattern table to be referred to "time reduction 2 (time reduction variation pattern 2 table 202ha5)", as a transition condition, transition condition 1 "special figure 1 fluctuation 1 time or special figure 2 fluctuation 1 time", transition condition 2 "small winning" is the state status of the transition destination when the transition condition is satisfied, "ST6" when the transition condition 1 is satisfied, transition condition If 2 is established, "ST3" is defined.

Next, the contents of the state transition 6 table 202hb6 will be described with reference to FIG. 1125(c). FIG. 1125(c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the state transition 6 table 202hb6. As shown in FIG. 1125 (c), the state transition 6 table 202hb6 includes the type of the variation pattern table to be referred to "time saving 3 (time saving variation pattern 3 table 202ha6)", as a transition condition, transition condition 1 "special figure 1 variation 5 times or special figure 2 variation 1 time” is defined as “ST3” when the transition condition 1 is satisfied as the state status of the transition destination when the transition condition is satisfied.

The jackpot shift setting table 202hc is a data table that stores the type of state status set after the jackpot game is finished, and is referred to when the jackpot game is finished, and is a state corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game being executed. A status (ST1 or ST4) is set.

Here, with reference to FIG. 1126, the contents defined in the jackpot transition setting table 202hc will be described. FIG. 1126 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the jackpot transition setting table 202hc. As shown in FIG. 1126, the jackpot transfer setting table 202hc defines the state status (transfer destination ST) of the transfer destination corresponding to the jackpot type. Specifically, for "jackets A, C, D" in which the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, "ST4", which is the first state status in the time saving state, is defined as the transition destination ST, "ST1", which is the first state status in the normal state, is stipulated as the shift destination ST for the "jackpot B" in which the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 in the thirty-seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1119 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the thirty-seventh control example. As shown in FIG. 1119, the configuration of the RAM 203 in the thirty-seventh control example differs from the RAM 203 in the thirty-second control example in that a state status 203ha and a specified number of times counter 203hb are added. are otherwise identical.

The state status 203ha is a storage area for storing the type of state transition table currently being referred to among various state transition tables defined in the state transition table 202hb.

The specified number of times counter 203hb is a counter for measuring the number of times (the number of special symbol fluctuations in the normal state) until the transition condition for shifting the state transition table is established.

<Regarding control processing in the thirty-seventh control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1127 to 1129, among the contents of the control processing in the thirty-seventh control example, points that differ from the thirty-second control example described above will be described. In the thirty-seventh control example, the contents of the control process for selecting the variation pattern for the special symbol variation are different from those in the thirty-second control example described above.

First, with reference to FIG. 1127, the contents of the special symbol variation process 8 (S184) will be described. FIG. 1127 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of special symbol variation processing 8 (S184). This special symbol variation process 8 (S184) replaces the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S210) with respect to the special symbol variation process (S104) in the thirty-second control example described above, and special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 ( S290) and after finishing the time saving update process (S224), it is different in the point of executing the fluctuation number of times subtraction process (S291), other than that is the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1128, the processing contents of the special symbol variation pattern selection processing 8 (S290) will be described. FIG. 1128 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S290). As shown in FIG. 1128, when the special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S290) is executed, the same S401 to S403 processes as the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S210) of the 32nd control example described above are executed. After that, the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the current state status is read (S484), and the processes of S405 to S410 are executed.

Next, the processing contents of the fluctuation count subtraction processing (S291) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1129 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the change count subtraction processing (S291). In this change number subtraction process (S291), a process for updating (subtracting) various elements used for determining whether or not the state status transition condition is satisfied is executed.

When the variation count subtraction process (S291) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the specified number counter 203hb is greater than 0 (S681). is subtracted by 1 (S682), and it is determined whether the status transition condition is met (S683). In the process of S683, when it is determined that the status transition condition is satisfied (S683: Yes), the state transition is performed according to the state transition table 202hb, the corresponding state command is set (S684), and the state transition after transition is performed. The transition condition according to the table is set to the specified number counter 203hb, the special figure 2 counter 203q, the time saving counter 203h, and the small hit counter 203r (S685), and the process is terminated. By configuring in this way, the variation pattern can be determined by referring to the state transition table of the transition destination from the special symbol variation to be executed next.

<38th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-eighth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1130 to 1136. FIG. In the thirty-second control example described above, when determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol variation, the variation pattern selection table 202b is referred to, and the variation pattern defined in the variation pattern selection table 202b is determined. configured to run. When configured in this way, in order to determine the variation patterns of various variation times, it is necessary to predefine variation patterns corresponding to various variation times in the variation pattern selection table 202b, and the types of variation patterns are increased. There is a problem that the capacity of the storage area for storing the specified contents of the variation pattern selection table 202b increases as the number of the variation pattern selection table 202b increases.

On the other hand, in the thirty-eighth control example, the first element (main fluctuation time) and the second element (additional fluctuation time) for determining the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) can be determined independently. The total fluctuation time calculated by the summing process of summing the first element and the second element can be determined as the fluctuation pattern. By configuring in this way, more types of fluctuation patterns (fluctuation time after summation) than the number of data of predetermined fluctuation patterns (part of fluctuation patterns) are determined by combining multiple elements. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the capacity of the storage area for storing the specified contents of the variation pattern selection table 202b increases when the types of variation patterns are increased. It becomes possible.

Furthermore, in the thirty-eighth control example, the method of storing the determined variation pattern differs depending on whether the length of the variation time indicated by the total variation time is longer than the predetermined time (65536×2 milliseconds) or when it is shorter. It is configured so that

Specifically, a variable time counter for storing the length of variable time is configured with a capacity of 2 bytes, and is configured to be able to set up to 65536 values. The value of the variable time counter 203ib can be updated (decremented) by timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 963) of the main controller 110, which is executed in units of 2 milliseconds. That is, when the length of the variable time indicated by the total variable time is shorter than the predetermined time (65536×2 milliseconds), the value corresponding to the variable time can be stored by setting the value of the variable time counter 203ib. Configure.

On the other hand, when the length of the variable time indicated by the total variable time is longer than the predetermined time (65536×2 milliseconds), the overflow flag 203ia for indicating that the variable time counter 203ib overflows the settable value. is turned on, and a value obtained by subtracting a predetermined time (65536×2 milliseconds) from the total variable time is set in the variable time counter 203ib. Then, when the value of the variable time counter 203ib becomes 0, it is determined whether the overflow flag 203ia is set to ON. is configured to reset the

By configuring in this way, assuming that the length of the variable time indicated by the total variable time is longer than the predetermined time (65536×2 milliseconds), the variable time counter 203ib is configured with a 3-byte capacity. Since it is no longer necessary, the processing capacity for managing variable time can be reduced.

In addition, in the thirty-eighth control example, the overflow flag 203ia is provided using the free space (1 bit of boredom) of the control data used in other processing. No data capacity is used.

For example, the overflow flag 203ia may be provided by using an area that is not used when subtracting the variable time from the 2-byte data capacity used by the variable time counter 203ib.

Further, in this control example, the value of the variable time counter 203ib is configured to be updated by timer interrupt processing (every 2 milliseconds) periodically executed by the main controller 110 . Here, in the pachinko machine 10, it is necessary to execute loop processing at short timings in order to detect winning of game balls and to output set commands to other control devices. It is configured so that timer interrupt processing is executed in units of seconds.

Therefore, for example, by executing loop processing so as to update the value of the variable time counter 203ib in units of, for example, one second, a maximum variable time of 65536 seconds can be obtained using a data capacity of 2 bytes. It becomes measurable. However, if the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 is set to 1 second in correspondence with the update interval of the variable time counter 203ia, the control processing related to other games will be greatly affected. A problem arises. On the other hand, while the timer interrupt processing is executed at intervals of 2 milliseconds, the update processing of the variable time counter 203ia is executed not at intervals of 2 milliseconds but at intervals equal to that (for example, at intervals of 20 milliseconds). Then, using a data capacity of 2 bytes, it is possible to measure a fluctuation time of 65536×20 milliseconds at maximum. However, when such a configuration is used, dedicated processing is required to update the variable time counter 203ia when the timer interrupt processing has been executed a predetermined number of times (10 times). Therefore, there is a problem that the processing load of the main controller 110 increases as a whole process for managing the fluctuation time. On the other hand, in the thirty-eighth control example, when the fluctuation time is determined to be larger than the fluctuation time that can be managed with the data capacity of 2 bytes, the process of setting the overflow flag 203ib to ON is executed. It is good, and the processing capacity for managing variable time can be reduced.

Also, when outputting information about the fluctuation time as a command, 2-byte data and 1-bit information (“0”=off, “1”=on) for indicating the setting information of the overflow flag 203ib are output. It is only necessary to output, and the amount of data to be output as a command (the number of bits included in the data) can be reduced compared to, for example, the case of managing variable time using 3-byte data.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the thirty-eighth control example>
First, with reference to FIGS. 1130 to 1133, the electrical configuration in this thirty-eighth control example will be described. This 38th control example differs from the 32nd control example described above in that a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 is changed, and the rest is the same. . A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

FIG. 1130(a) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection 9 table 202ia. As shown in FIG. 1130 (a), the variation pattern selection 9 table 202ia includes a normal main variation pattern table 202ia1 for selecting the main variation time in the normal state, and for selecting the main variation time in the time saving state A time saving main fluctuation pattern table 202ia2 and a normal addition fluctuation pattern table 202ia3 for selecting the addition fluctuation time in the normal state are provided. In addition, in this 38th control example, the game state (normal state) in which the variation time is determined using the main variation time and the addition variation time, and the game state (shortening state) in which the variation time is determined only by the main variation time ) and are configurable. Therefore, the data table for selecting the addition fluctuation time is not provided for the time saving state.

In addition, without being limited to this, even in the time saving state, the variable time may be configured to be determined using the main variable time and the additional variable time. Further, the variation pattern in the time saving state may be configured to be determined using only the normal addition variation pattern table 202ia3 for selecting the addition variation time in the normal state.

Here, the normal main fluctuation pattern table 202ia1 will be described with reference to FIG. 1130(b). FIG. 1130(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal main fluctuation pattern table 202ia1. As shown in FIG. 1130 (b), the normal main fluctuation pattern table 202ia1 has the same fluctuation pattern as the normal fluctuation pattern 1 table 202ha1 (see FIG. 1120 (b)) in the 37th control example described above. A variable time value (a value set in the variable time counter 203ib) corresponding to the specified variation pattern (variation time) is specified.

Next, the time saving main fluctuation pattern table 202ia2 will be described with reference to FIG. 1131(a). FIG. 1131(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the time saving main fluctuation pattern table 202ia2. As shown in FIG. 1131 (a), the time saving main fluctuation pattern table 202ia2 has the same fluctuation pattern as the time saving fluctuation pattern 1 table 202ha4 (see FIG. 1122 (a)) in the 37th control example described above. A variable time value (a value set in the variable time counter 203ib) corresponding to the specified variation pattern (variation time) is specified.

Next, the normal addition fluctuation pattern table 202ia3 will be described with reference to FIG. 1131(b). FIG. 1131(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal addition fluctuation pattern table 202ia3. As shown in FIG. 1131(b), the normal addition variation pattern table 202ia3 contains the addition variation time corresponding to the type of effect to be executed (corresponding effect), the symbol type (special symbol type), the lottery result (special symbol Lottery result) is defined according to the acquired second variation type counter CS11. 20-second addition variation time, 30-second addition variation time corresponding to "pseudo-run 3 times", and 40-second addition variation time corresponding to "pseudo-run 4 times" can be selected.

By configuring in this way, since the variable time corresponding to the corresponding performance to be executed can be added to the main variable time, the performance effect can be enhanced. In addition, in this 38th control example, when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery (winning probability 1/65536), the addition fluctuation time is not selected. That is, when a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, a special special effect (for example, freeze effect) is executed as the main variation time, and immediately after the special symbol variation starts, a small It is configured so as to notify that the player has won a prize. In this way, when a variation pattern that enables the player to quickly determine the result of the special symbol lottery is selected as the main variation time, the addition variation time is not determined. It is possible to prevent a useless effect (for example, a pseudo-continuation) from being executed and the effect of the effect from deteriorating.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1132, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the thirty-eighth control example will be described. FIG. 1132 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the thirty-eighth control example. As shown in FIG. 1132, the thirty-eighth control example is different from the thirty-second control example described above in that an overflow flag 203ia and a variable time counter 203ib are added, and the rest is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted.

The overflow flag 203ia is a flag for indicating that the value indicating the total variable time obtained by summing the main variable time and the additional variable time exceeds the upper limit value (65536) that can be set in the variable time counter 203ib. is set to ON when the upper limit (65536) is exceeded (see S404a in FIG. 1135). When it is determined that the value of the variable time counter 203ib has become 1 (S502a in FIG. 1136: Yes), reference is made (see S503a in FIG. 1136), and it is determined that the variable time counter 203ib is set to 65536. is set to off (see S504a in FIG. 1136).

The fluctuation time counter 203ib is a counter for indicating the fluctuation time of the determined special symbol fluctuation, and a value corresponding to the total fluctuation time obtained by summing the main fluctuation time and the addition fluctuation time is set (Fig. 1135 (see S405a and S409a of ). And, while the special symbol variation is being executed, it is subtracted every 2 milliseconds (S501a in FIG. 1136). Then, when the value indicated by the variation time counter 203ib becomes 0, processing for stopping and displaying the special symbol variation is executed.

As shown in FIG. 1133, this variable time counter 203ib is a 2-byte (16-bit) data area, and binary information can be written to each bit. That is, 65536 (2 to the 16th power) types of information from "0000000000000000" to "1111111111111111" can be written into the variable time counter 203ib.

<Regarding control processing in the thirty-eighth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1134 to 1136, among the control processing in the thirty-eighth control example, the content of the control processing different from that in the thirty-second control example described above will be described. In the thirty-eighth control example, as described above, the contents of the processing for determining the variation time of the special symbol variation and the processing for managing the determined variation time are different. Specifically, the difference is that the special symbol variation process 9 (S104a) is executed instead of the special symbol variation process (S104). Other processing contents are the same, and the description thereof is omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 1134, the processing contents of the special symbol variation processing 9 (S104a) will be described. FIG. 1134 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 9 (S104a). As shown in FIG. 1134, the special symbol variation process 9 (S104a) replaces the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S210) with respect to the above-described special symbol variation process (S104). (S210a) is performed, and when it is determined that the variation time of the special symbol has not passed (S215: No), the variation time update process (S216a) is performed. be. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

Here, the processing contents of the special symbol variation pattern selection processing 9 (S210a) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1135 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the special symbol variation pattern selection process 9 (S210a). In the special symbol variation pattern selection process 9 (S210a), as the variation pattern of the special symbol variation, a process of determining the main variation time as the first element of the variation time and the addition variation time as the second element; A process of calculating a total variable time by adding together the determined main variable time and the additional variable time, and a process of storing the variable time according to the length of the total variable time are executed.

Specifically, when the special symbol variation pattern selection process 9 (S210a) is executed, the same S401 to S404 processes as the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S210) of the 32nd control example described above are executed, and then , from the read table, select the fluctuation pattern (main fluctuation time) and the addition time (addition fluctuation time) corresponding to the value of each fluctuation type counter (the value 401a of the SW effective time counter 223q), the main fluctuation time and the addition fluctuation time (additional time) are summed up (S402a).

Then, it is determined whether or not the sum value indicating the summed sum fluctuation time is greater than 65536 (S403a), and if it is determined to be greater (S403a: Yes), the overflow flag 203ia is set to ON (S404a). , the value obtained by subtracting 65536 from the total value is stored (set) in the variable time counter 203ib (S405a), and then the same processing of S406 to S408 as in the thirty-second control example described above is executed, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S403a that the total value is not greater than 65536 (S403a: No), the total value is stored (set) in the fluctuation time counter 203ib as it is, and the process proceeds to S406.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1136, the contents of the variable time update process (S216a) will be described. FIG. 1136 is a flow chart showing the contents of the variable time update process (S216a). In this variable time update process (S216a), a process for updating the variable time is executed.

When the variable time update process (S216a) is executed, first, 1 is subtracted from the value of the variable time counter 203ib (S501a), and it is determined whether the value of the variable time counter 203ib after the subtraction is 1 (S502a). If it is determined by the process of S502a that the value of the variable time counter 203ib is 1 (S502a: Yes), then it is determined whether the overflow flag 203ia is set to ON (S503a). (S503a: Yes), the overflow flag 203ia is set to OFF (S504a), the value of the variable time counter 203ib is set to 65536 (S505a), and the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated. (S506a), and the process ends.

If it is determined in the process of S502a that the value of the variable time counter 203ib is not 1 (S502a: No), or if it is determined in the process of S503a that the overflow flag 203ia is not set to ON (S503a : No) skips the processes of S504a and S505a and proceeds to the process of S506a.

<Thirty-ninth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirty-ninth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1137 to 1143. FIG. In each control example described above, by executing a variable performance using the third symbol as a variable performance for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, the special symbol variation starts and ends for the player. During the period until (special symbol fluctuation period), it was configured so as not to get bored with the game. In particular, in the thirty-fifth control example described above, the third pattern displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 and the variable performance using the decorative movable accessory provided near the third pattern display device 81 A technique was used that enhanced the production effect by executing

However, in any of the control examples, since the fixed display mode is used as the display mode of the third symbol displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the player who is playing the game for a long time There is a problem that it is easy to get bored with the game.

On the other hand, in the thirty-ninth control example, the display mode of the third pattern displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is changed in a complicated manner, so that the player does not quickly become bored with the game. It is configured as follows. Specifically, the third pattern is configured by combining a number pattern and a box pattern, and each pattern is configured to be capable of determining the effect mode of the variable effect.

By configuring in this manner, the display mode of the third pattern displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is a combination of the presentation mode of the number pattern and the presentation mode of the box pattern. Therefore, it is possible to create a more complicated production mode of the third symbol.

<Regarding the effect content in the 39th control example>
Here, with reference to FIGS. 1137 and 1138, among the various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-ninth control example, a characteristic effect content different from that of the thirty-second control example described above will be described. do. FIG. 1137(a) is a diagram showing the display screen during the third symbol variation.

As shown in FIG. 1137(a), in the thirty-ninth control example, three third patterns (left third symbol Z1, middle third symbol Z2, and right third symbol Z3) are configured to be variably displayed, and when three third symbols are displayed in a specific combination (for example, a combination of the same numbers). In addition, the player can be notified that the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win.

As shown in FIG. 1137(a), each third design is formed from a box design ZA and a number design ZB. Normally, the box design ZA and the number design ZB are the same variation mode ( It is configured to be variably displayed in a variable mode rotating from the back side to the front side). Therefore, in the variation effect of the third symbol at the normal time, as shown in FIG. 1137(a), the variation such that the third symbol of one united with the box symbol ZA and the number symbol ZB is variably displayed. A performance is performed.

However, in the thirty-ninth control example, since the box pattern ZA and the number pattern ZB are configured to be able to execute the variation effect with different variation patterns, the variation effect shown in FIG. The third pattern can be variably displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1137(b) and FIG. 1138, the effect mode of the variable effect of the third symbol that can be executed in the thirty-ninth control example will be described. FIG. 1137(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen that is displayed when the delayed effect is started. As shown in FIG. 1137(b), when the delayed effect is started, only the box patterns ZA1 to ZA3 are variably displayed first while the number patterns ZB1 to ZB3 are stopped and displayed.

After that, when 0.2 seconds have passed, the number symbols ZB1 to ZB3 which have been stopped and displayed start to be variably displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the mode at the start of the variation of the third symbol different from the normal time, so that it is possible to execute an effect that gives the player a sense of discomfort. In addition, since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether or not the delay effect has been executed at the time when each number pattern ZB starts to be variably displayed, the variable display of the third pattern is started for the player. It is possible to make it easier for the user to pay attention to the timing of

Next, with reference to FIG. 1138(a), the development effect will be described. FIG. 1138(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the development effect. In the development effect, the result of the special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed using only the specific third symbol (Z2) among the three third symbols (Z1 to Z3) variably displayed on the activated line L1. It is a variable performance.

Specifically, it is a variation pattern of 60 seconds, and is an effect executed when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, and until 56 seconds have passed since the start of the variation, three A variable effect using the third symbols (Z1 to Z3) is executed. Then, after the three third symbols (Z1 to Z3) are stopped and displayed in a combination (for example, "2.5.7") indicating a winning result, the left third symbol Z1 and the right third symbol Z3 are A display mode is displayed in which only the middle third symbol Z2 is positioned on the activated line L1 after moving from the activated line L1, and then constitutes a part of the middle third symbol Z2 as shown in FIG. 1138(a). The left side ZAa and the right side ZAb are displayed. 5” are used, three “5”s are stop-displayed on the activated line L1, and a combination indicating a jackpot winning is displayed.

By configuring in this way, even when the display mode using the three third symbols (Z1 to Z3) is displaced and stop-displayed in the display mode indicating winning, the expectation of winning the jackpot can be left. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the variable performance until the end. In the diagram shown in FIG. 1138(a), the left third pattern Z1 and the right third pattern Z3 moved from the active line L1 are displayed in the corners of the main display area Dm, but this is not the case. It may be omitted or hidden.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1138(b), the effect contents of the horizontal rotation effect will be described. FIG. 1138(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the horizontal rotation effect.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the thirty-ninth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1139 and 1140, the electrical configuration of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the thirty-ninth control example will be described. FIG. 1139 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the thirty-ninth control example. As shown in FIG. 1139, the thirty-ninth control example differs from the above-described thirty-second control example in that a chance mode selection table 222ja is added to the ROM 222 of the thirty-second control example. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same elements, and the description thereof is omitted.

The chance mode selection table 222ja is a data table that is referred to when determining the performance mode of the variable performance, and is referred to when a variation pattern command corresponding to a variation time of 60 seconds is received from the main controller 110. (See S4503a in FIG. 1142). In the chance mode selection table 222ja, an additional performance mode is defined for each of the box pattern ZA and the number pattern ZB forming the third pattern, and the chance mode selection table 222ja is referred to. When the mode is determined, different display commands are determined for the box design ZA and the number design ZB.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1140, when the hit/fail judgment is “hit” and the acquired value of the second effect counter 223f2 is in the range of “0 to 49”, the mode type of the additional effect mode "Delay" is defined as the range of "50 to 69", "development" is defined as the mode type of the additional effect mode for the range of "70 to 74", "Reversal" is specified as the mode type of the additional effect mode, "horizontal rotation" is specified as the mode type of the additional effect mode for the range of "75 to 79", and "80 to 99". In the range of , the additional effect mode "none" is defined.

Also, for the value of the acquired second effect counter 223f2 in the range of "0 to 29" when the success/failure determination is "off", "delay" is defined as the mode type of the additional effect mode, For the range of "30 to 32", "reversal" is specified as the mode type of the additional effect mode, and for the range of "33, 34", "horizontal rotation" is specified as the mode type of the additional effect mode. ” is defined, and for the range of “35 to 99”, the additional effect mode “none” is defined.

<Regarding control processing in the thirty-ninth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1141 to 1143, among the control processes executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the thirty-ninth control example, the contents of the control process different from the thirty-second control example described above will be described. . In the thirty-ninth control example, part of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 and part of the control processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are performed in contrast to the thirty-second control example described above. , and are otherwise the same. The description of the same processing contents is omitted.

Specifically, instead of the variable effect setting process (S4304) as the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, the variable effect setting process 10 (S4304a) is executed, and the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 The difference is that the variation pattern command processing 10 (S6405a) is performed instead of the variation pattern command processing (S6405) as the control processing executed by .

Here, with reference to FIG. 1141, the processing contents of the variable effect setting process 10 (S4304a) will be described. FIG. 1141 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the variable effect setting process 10 (S4304a). As shown in FIG. 1141, the variation performance setting process 10 (S4304a) is different from the above-described variation performance setting process (S4304) in that the variation performance of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol variation executed in the normal state The processing for determining the effect mode of is different.

Specifically, the processing of S4401 to S4408, which is the same as the variable effect setting process (S4304) described above, is executed, and in the process of S4404, when it is determined that the fixed effect flag 223t is set to ON (S4404: Yes ), or when the process of S4408 is finished, the normal effect setting process is executed (S4401a), and this process is finished.

Here, with reference to FIG. 1142, the processing contents of the normal effect setting processing (S4401a) will be described. FIG. 1142 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of normal effect setting processing (S4401a). In this normal effect setting process (S4401a), the process for determining the chance effect mode is executed as the variation effect corresponding to the first special symbol variation in the normal state.

When the normal effect setting process (S4401a) is executed, first, the effect mode of the variable effect is determined based on the lottery result of the variation and the extracted change pattern (S4501a), and the determined effect mode is the chance effect. It is determined whether it is a mode (S4502a). In the thirty-ninth control example, when a variation pattern command for indicating a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds (super reach) as a variation pattern is output from the main controller 110, it is determined to be the chance presentation mode.

In the processing of S4502a, when it is determined that the chance effect mode is selected (S4502a: Yes), the chance mode selection table 222ja is referred to determine the effect mode (S4503a), and then the determined effect mode (additional effect mode) determines whether it is a number pattern delay (delay) (S4504a), and when it is determined that it is a number pattern delay (delay) (S4504a: Yes), the delay time corresponding to the determined production mode ( 0.2 seconds) is set (S4505a), and the process ends.

Also, in the processing of S4504a, if it is determined that there is no number pattern delay (delay) (S4504a: No), next, whether the determined effect mode (additional effect mode) is box symbol development (development) is determined (S4506a), and if it is determined that it is box design development (development) (S4506a: Yes), set a display composite design command according to the determined effect mode (S4507a), and end this process do.

In the processing of S4506a, if it is determined that the determined effect mode (additional effect mode) is not the box pattern expansion (development) (S4506a: No), the number pattern ZB, A display command for showing the effect mode of the box pattern ZA is set (S4508a), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1143, the contents of the variation pattern command process 10 (S6405a) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 1143 is a flow chart showing the contents of the variation pattern command process 10 (S6405a). In this variation pattern command process 10 (S6405a), for the variation pattern command process (S6405) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 of the thirty-second control example described above, the display command set in the chance production mode is received, the information corresponding to the received display command is set in the display data table.

When the variation pattern command process 10 (S6405a) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the number pattern delay command has been received (S6501a), and if it is determined that it has been received (S6501a: Yes), variation display data regarding the number pattern Information corresponding to the delay time is set in the table (S6502a). This processing makes it possible to delay the timing at which the drawing information for variably displaying the number pattern ZB is set in the display data table by the delay time (0.2 seconds). In other words, a process of shifting (delaying) the timing of setting drawing information for variably displaying the number pattern ZB without using a display command indicating a variable effect dedicated to the delayed effect and a display data table dedicated to the delayed effect is performed. Only by executing it, the delay effect shown in FIG. 1137(b) can be executed.

After completing S6502a, it is next determined whether or not a reverse rotation command has been received (S6503a), and if it is determined that it has been received (S6503a: Yes), the command corresponding to the received command is stored in the variation display data table for the box design ZA. Information is set (S6504a), and the process proceeds to S6505a.

In the processing of S6505a, it is determined whether or not a horizontal rotation command has been received (S6505a), and if it is determined that it has been received (S6505a: Yes), the variation information included in the display variation pattern command (the effect mode of the variation effect is displayed) information for causing the horizontal rotation) to be erased, and the variation information corresponding to the horizontal rotation effect is set in the variation display data table (S6506a), and S6501 to S6506, which are the same as the variation pattern command processing (S6405) of the 32nd control example described above, are performed. Execute the process and terminate this process.

<Modification of the thirty-ninth control example>
Next, a modification of the thirty-ninth control example described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 1144 to 1147. FIG. In the thirty-ninth control example described above, the third symbols Z1 to Z3 displayed corresponding to the special symbols are formed by a box symbol ZA imitating a box and a number symbol ZB imitating a number. , and the number patterns ZB, different variation patterns can be determined, so that variations of the variation pattern (performance mode) of the third pattern formed by combining the box pattern ZA and the number pattern ZB can be realized. was rich.

However, in the above-described thirty-ninth control example, the degree of freedom of the variation pattern (performance mode) of the third symbol is too high, and the player is asked to confirm the variation state of the third symbol. There is a problem that it becomes difficult to predict the third symbol to be displayed.

On the other hand, in this modified example, the variation mode of the box pattern ZA and the variation mode of the number pattern ZB are related to each other. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to predict the type of the third symbol to be stop-displayed during the variable display of the third symbol.

This modification differs from the above-described thirty-ninth control example in that the contents of the box design ZA and the number design ZB are different, and that the content of the effect to be executed is different. is. Descriptions of the same contents are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 1144, the box design ZA used in this modification will be described. FIG. 1144 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the expansion of the box design ZA. As shown in FIG. 1144, the box design ZA is formed in the shape of a hexahedral dice, and each surface (first surface ZAa, second surface ZAb, third surface ZAc, fourth surface ZAd, fifth surface ZAe, Each of the sixth planes ZAf) is configured to be displayable on the display plane of the third pattern display device 81 .

Here, in this modified example, the operation pattern of the rotation operation of the box pattern ZA is defined in advance, and the display surfaces are repeated in the order of the fourth surface ZAd, the third surface ZAc, the second surface ZAb, and the first surface ZAa. A first rotation operation (main rotation operation) that is rotated and displayed, and a second rotation operation (sub-rotation operation) that rotates and displays the display surfaces repeatedly in the order of the sixth surface ZAf, the second surface ZAb, the fifth surface ZAe, and the fourth surface ZAd. a first rolling motion of switching the rotating motion of the box pattern ZA from the main rotating motion to the sub-rotating motion; and a second rolling motion of switching from the sub-rotating motion to the main rotating motion. ing.

Then, as shown in FIG. 1145(a), the first number pattern row ZBA is formed on the display surface rotated and displayed by the first rotation operation, and the display surface rotated and displayed by the second rotation operation. , a second number pattern row ZBB is formed, and display or non-display of each number pattern row can be determined according to the type of rotating motion being executed. .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1145(b), only the first number pattern row ZBA is displayed during the main rotation motion, and only the second number pattern row ZBB is displayed during the sub-rotation motion. Configure.

Here, with reference to FIG. 1146, the patterns of the symbol data displayed in each numerical symbol row will be described. As described above, in this modified example, the first number pattern row ZBA and the second number pattern row ZBB are formed so as to be orthogonal to the box pattern ZA, and both are configured so that the number patterns can be variably displayed. . The number pattern data displayed in each number pattern row can be determined according to the variation performance to be executed.

Specifically, four kinds of number patterns (nautical pattern D0, one pattern D1, two patterns D2, three patterns D3) are provided for the first number pattern row ZBA, and four patterns are provided for the second number pattern row ZBB. The first symbol data (see FIG. 1146(a)) to which different number symbols (4 symbols D4, 5 symbols D5, 6 symbols D6, 7 symbols D7) are given, and the first number symbol row ZBA, 8 There are 4 types of number patterns (sea pattern D0, 1 pattern D1, 2 patterns D2, 3 patterns D3, 4 patterns D4, 5 patterns D5, 6 patterns D6, 7 patterns D7) for the second number pattern row ZBB. 2nd pattern data (see FIG. 1146(b)) to which different types of number patterns (1 pattern D1, 3 patterns D3, 7 patterns D7, nautical pattern D0) are given, and a plurality of number pattern data including at least According to the variation effect to be executed, the number pattern data used for the current third pattern variation is determined, and the third pattern display combined with the box pattern ZA can be executed.

For example, in the third symbol in which the first symbol data is set, when the box symbol ZA performs the main rotation motion, the number symbols "Sea.1.2.3" are associated with each of the four displayable faces When the variable display marked with is executed, the main rotation movement is followed by the first rollover movement, and then the sub-rotation movement is executed, "4 .5, 6, 7" will be displayed.

By constructing in this way, during one variable effect, the third pattern can be variably displayed in a state in which each face of the box pattern ZA and the number pattern are associated with each other, so that the player is stopped and displayed. The type of the third symbol to be displayed can be easily predicted at a stage before the third symbol is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the third pattern in which the second pattern data is set, the box pattern ZA is basically rotated and all the number patterns of "1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7. sea" are variably displayed. . In the meantime, the number patterns of "1.3.7. sea" are controlled to fluctuate in the second number pattern row ZBB corresponding to the sub-rotation operation in a non-display state. The four kinds of number patterns (1, 3, 7, sea) corresponding to this second number pattern ZBB are the types of number patterns that are likely to be displayed when the player wins a big win advantageous to the player.

Here, with reference to FIG. 1147, the effect contents of the variable effect using the second symbol data will be described. FIG. 1147(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the third symbol is displayed in a combination indicating a winning win in the middle of the variable effect, and FIG. 1147(b) shows a combination indicating a winning miss After the third symbol is stop-displayed in , a diagram showing an example of the display screen in the case where a horizontal rotation effect is executed to rotate the box symbol ZA.

A combination ( The third symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) at the split stitch). In this state, since the special symbols are fluctuating, the variation control of the numerical symbols is continuously executed in the second numerical symbols ZBB which are not displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 1147(b), each third symbol is rolled over, and the second number symbol ZBB is displayed. Then, when the second number pattern row ZBB is completely displayed, that is, the box pattern ZA is displayed in such a state that the side of the box pattern ZA that is displayed when the sub-rotation operation is performed can be viewed from the front. Then, the result of the special design lottery is displayed using the number design.

By configuring in this way, the variation time of the special symbol variation, the number symbols attached to the display surface of the box symbol ZA displayed at the start timing of the special symbol variation, and the number finally stopped and displayed. Based on the type of the pattern, a performance pattern for displaying the number patterns that are finally stopped and displayed only by the main rotation motion, and a performance pattern for displaying the number patterns that are finally stopped and displayed by also using the sub-rotation motion, can be set, for example, in order to stop and display an arbitrary number pattern, it is possible to suppress the complicated execution of the process of changing the rotation speed of the box pattern ZA and the variable display speed of the number pattern. can be done.

<Modification of the 32nd control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 1148, the effect screen when the stage change effect is executed during the fixed mode will be described. FIG. 1148 shows the display screen when the stage change effect is executed at the end of the jackpot game. Regarding this stage change effect, only the differences from the stage change effect (see FIG. 948) in the thirty-second control example described above will be explained, and the same contents will be omitted.

When a jackpot game is executed in a state where the fixed mode is set, and a stage change effect is executed during the ending period of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. If it changes, the guidance mode of "chance" is displayed. Here, in this modification, even if the fixed mode is set, the stage type set after the jackpot game is different from the stage type set before the jackpot game. It is configured to be able to notify the player of what to do.

With this configuration, it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the stage types set before and after the jackpot game, that is, the stage types displayed across the execution period of the jackpot game effect are the same or different. Therefore, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting whether or not the holding series will be executed after the effect result of the stage change effect (the stage type after the shutters st1 and st2 are not displayed) is displayed.

<Fortieth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the 40th control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1149 to 1180. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described 32nd control example, the game state is a normal state in which the second special symbol lottery is hard to be executed and the ordinary symbol low probability state is set, and the second special symbol lottery is likely to be executed. It is configured to provide two types of game states, ie, a time-saving state set to a high probability state of normal patterns, and a lottery of a second special pattern is so much more advantageous than a lottery of a first special pattern. , the time-saving state is set as a game state advantageous to the player, and the normal state is set as a game state disadvantageous to the player. More specifically, in the lottery for the first special symbol, a jackpot is won with a probability of about 1/300, and a small win is substantially confirmed with a probability of 1/65536. In the lottery of special symbols, a big win is won with a probability of about 1/300, and a small win with a probability of about 1/2 is substantially determined. In other words, in the lottery for the first special symbol, the substantial jackpot probability is about 1/300, while in the lottery for the second special symbol, it is about 1/2. Further, when the first special symbol lottery results in a big win, the game state after the big win is set to a disadvantageous normal state at a rate of 40%, while the second special symbol lottery directly wins the big win. In the case of winning, and in the case of detecting the entry of the game ball into the specific area (V gate) 650e3 as a small hit and winning the jackpot, the game state after the jackpot ends is a game at a rate of 100%. It was configured to set a time-saving state that is advantageous to workers. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described thirty-second control example is configured to be able to achieve well-balanced game characteristics by making the game characteristics greatly different between the disadvantageous normal state and the advantageous time-saving condition.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 40th control example, a normal state as a game state disadvantageous to the player and a time-saving state as a game state advantageous to the player are provided in the 32nd control. Although it is common to the example, it is different in that it is configured to provide a plurality of advantageous time-saving states with different degrees of advantage. Specifically, a first time-saving state with a high substantial jackpot probability and a substantial jackpot probability lower than the first time-saving state and higher than the normal state (lower advantage than the first time-saving state and a second time-saving state in which the degree of advantage is higher than that in the normal state). Here, the first time-saving state is a game state that can be set as a game state after the end of the big hit, and the second time-saving state is the same as the above-described fifth control example, etc., and is elected to a time-saving design in a special design lottery. It is a game state that can be set when the lottery result is changed to the time saving state without going through the jackpot. Although the details will be described later, in this 40th control example, when the second special symbol lottery is executed, at a rate of 100%, either a big win or a small win that substantially determines the big win Instead of winning the lottery in the time saving state, the second special symbol lottery is never executed in the time saving state and the end condition of the time saving state can be established. More specifically, as a time-saving end condition that triggers the end of the time-saving state, the number of fluctuations in the sum of the first special symbol variation (special figure 1 variation) and the second special symbol variation (special figure 2 variation) is specified. The first end condition that is established when the number of times (any of 10 to 1000 times) is reached (the specified number of special figure fluctuations are stopped and displayed), and the special symbol indicating that the small hit has been won is displayed stopped. In addition to the second end condition that is established when the winning game is executed, the third end condition that is established based on the number of executions of the normal symbol winning game reaching a specified number of times (1 to 1000 times) is set. ing. Due to the presence of the third end condition, even if the player continues to hit to the right in the advantageous first time-saving state, there is a possibility that the time-saving state will end without the second special symbol lottery being executed even once. . In addition, in this 40th control example, in any of the normal state, the first time saving state, and the second time saving state, when the lottery of the normal symbols is executed, it is configured to hit the normal design at a rate of 100%. , The selection ratio of the displacement pattern set for the electric accessory 640a when the normal symbol hits is made different for each game state. Specifically, in the normal state, there is always a first displacement pattern in which it is extremely difficult (impossible) to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640, which is an advantageous second special symbol lottery opportunity. Set, in the first time-saving state, the first displacement pattern is set at a rate of 20%, and the game ball can be easily entered into the second ball inlet 640 at a rate of 80%. Two displacement patterns are set, and in the second time saving state, the first displacement pattern is set at a rate of about 97% and the second displacement pattern is set at a rate of about 3%. Therefore, when the second displacement pattern is set in the case of a win in the lottery of the normal symbols, the lottery of the second special symbol that substantially determines the big win can be executed. Winning a win corresponding to the second displacement pattern is substantially synonymous with winning a big win, which makes it possible to realize a very novel game feature.

In addition, in the 40th control example, the game ball entering the first ball entrance 64, which triggers the first special symbol lottery, always passes before entering the first ball entrance 64. A central through gate 67c, which triggers the drawing of normal symbols, is arranged at a position (above the first entrance 64), and the drawing of normal symbols starts before the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. It is configured so that the period from when it is done until the winning of the normal symbol based on the lottery of the normal symbol is completed is shorter. In other words, every time the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, the lottery for the normal symbol is also executed almost at the same time (immediately before the lottery for the first special symbol is executed). In addition, a right through gate 67r is separately provided at a position through which a game ball can pass when hit to the right, which triggers a normal pattern lottery. The ratio of passing through the gate 67c and the ratio of passing through the right through gate 67r of the game ball shot by hitting to the right are substantially the same. As a result, especially in the second time-saving state, it is better to execute the lottery of the normal symbols and the lottery of the first special symbols almost simultaneously by hitting the left rather than executing only the lottery of the normal symbols by hitting the right. The possibility of winning the jackpot during the time saving state increases. That is, if you hit right in the second time-saving state, you will get a big hit only when you win the second displacement pattern that wins at a rate of about 3% in the normal pattern lottery (substantially, the big win is confirmed. 2 special symbol lottery can be executed) On the other hand, when hitting left, in addition to winning the second displacement pattern in the normal symbol lottery, the first special symbol lottery Since there is a possibility of winning a jackpot with , the game can be played by hitting left in the second time-saving state. Then, as described above, when hitting left, the game ball that has passed through the central through gate 67c always enters the first ball entrance 64, and the lottery for the normal symbol and the lottery for the first special symbol are almost simultaneously performed. Since it is executed, the substantial jackpot probability per lottery of the first special symbol increases (substantially, the probability of the first special symbol jackpot is about 1/320, and the second displacement pattern is It is possible to realize an extremely novel game property that the total probability is about 1/33, which is the probability of winning the set normal symbol. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The pachinko machine 10 in the 40th control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the 32nd control example described above in that the board configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is partially changed. The configuration of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main controller 110 is partially changed, the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the sound lamp controller 113 is partially changed, and the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 The only difference is that the control processing to be executed is partially changed, and the control processing to be executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the 32 control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the 32nd control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 1149, the board configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 40th control example will be described. FIG. 1149 is a front view of the game board 13 in the 40th control example. As shown in FIG. 1149, the game board 13 in the 40th control example is normally located above the first ball entrance 64 in contrast to the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the 32nd control example (see FIG. 925). The difference is that a central through gate 67c, which triggers the lottery of symbols, is arranged. As a result, a game ball that is shot left-handed and enters the first ball entrance 64 always passes through the central through gate 67 c immediately before entering the first ball entrance 64 . In other words, when the player continues to hit to the left, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the normal symbol are likely to be executed substantially at the same time. In particular, in the second time-saving state, after the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the lottery of the normal symbol are started, the first displacement pattern (It is impossible to enter the game ball into the second entrance 640 ( Since it is controlled so that the period until the winning of the normal symbol corresponding to the displacement pattern of the electric accessory 640a that becomes difficult) is the same, the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the normal symbol are both It can be constructed such that when left-handed hitting is performed in the state of 0, a lottery for a normal symbol is started almost at the same time every time a lottery for the first special symbol is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1149, in the game board 13 in the 40th control example, the front view of the variable display device unit 80 is different from the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the 32nd control example (see FIG. 925). It is also different in that the configuration of the flow path on the right side (right-handed flow path) has been changed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 1149, the second ball entrance 640, which triggers the lottery for the second special symbol, is moved upstream of the right through gate 67r in the right-handed flow path, The second entrance 640 is decorated to resemble the letter "V". By arranging the second ball inlet 640 on the upstream side of the right-handed flow path and relatively shortening the distance from the return ball prevention member 68 to the second ball inlet 640, the game ball can be pushed into the second ball inlet. 640. When winning the normal pattern in which the second displacement pattern that can enter the ball to 640 is set, after hitting the right, it is displaced to the protruding state (open state) along with the hitting of the normal pattern. It is possible to shorten the time to reach the electric accessory 640a. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 during the period (open period) in which the electric accessory 640a is set to the protruded state (open state). In the time-saving state or the second time-saving state, although the normal symbol lottery corresponding to the second displacement pattern in which the big win is substantially determined is won in the normal symbol lottery, the second during the opening period of the electric accessory 640a. For a player who cannot enter a game ball into the second ball entrance 640 and loses the opportunity to win a big win (opportunity to execute a lottery for the second special symbol that substantially confirms the big win). It is possible to suppress the occurrence of extremely disadvantageous events.

In addition, in this 40th control example, the winning of the normal symbols is terminated based on the entry of one game ball into the second ball entrance 640 during execution of the winning game of the normal symbols. . In addition, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is configured to be only one, like the 32nd control example described above. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a plurality of game balls from entering the second ball entrance 640 during the opening period of one second displacement pattern, and even if a plurality of game balls It can be constructed so that even if a ball is entered, the number of held balls is increased by only one. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a plurality of reserved balls of the second special symbol, which substantially determine a big win, are obtained at once, which is excessively advantageous to the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1149, in the 40th control example, instead of the through gate 67 in the 32nd control example, there is provided a right through gate 67r decorated to resemble the character "GO". . In addition, the arrangement of the game nail on the left side of the right through gate 67r in front view is also changed from the game board 13 (see FIG. 925) in the 32nd control example. It is configured so that it is relatively difficult for a game ball to enter the right through gate 67r. More specifically, the game ball that is shot to the right and has passed through the front side of the closed state (buried state) electric accessory 640a collides with the game nail group YK1 or the game nail group YK2. , from the gap between the game nail group YK1 and the game nail group YK2 to the downstream side (the direction in which it cannot pass through the right through gate 67r). In order for the game ball that has collided with the game nail group YK1 to pass through the right through gate 67r, it bounces to the right in front view and collides with the game nail group YK2, and bounces to the right in front view due to the impact of the collision. It needs to collide with the game nail YK3, bounce to the right side in the front view due to the impact of the collision, collide with the game nail YK4, and further bounce to the right side in the front view due to the collision. When a game nail collides with one of the game nails, if the flight distance is insufficient or the rebound direction is the left side when viewed from the front, the gap between the game nail group YK1 and the game nail group YK2, or the gap between the game nail group YK2 and the game nail group YK2. It flows downstream from the gap between the game nail group YK3 and the gap between the game nail YK3 and the game nail YK4, making it impossible to pass through the right through gate 67r.

Similarly, the game ball that first collides with the game nail group YK2 also bounces to the right side in front view and collides with the game nail YK3, and bounces to the right side in front view due to the impact of the collision and hits the game nail YK4. Further, when it bounces to the right side in the front view due to the collision, it can pass through the right through gate 67r, and the gap between the game nail group YK2 and the game nail group YK3, and the gap between the game nail YK3 and the game nail YK4 If it flows downstream from the gap between, it becomes impossible to pass through the right through gate 67r. By adopting this board configuration, the ratio of game balls launched by right hitting to pass through the right through gate 67r is substantially the same as the ratio of game balls launched by left hitting passing through the center through gate 67 (approximately The rate is about 1 pass for every 10 to 15 balls fired).

In this 40th control example, the ratio of game balls passing through the through gate (central through gate 67c or right through gate 67r) is substantially the same for left-handed and right-handed players, but this is not the only option. It is not something that can be done. For example, the percentage of game balls shot to the right that pass through the right through gate 67r is higher than the percentage of game balls shot to the left that pass the left through gate 67c (for example, two ball shots to the right). , one game ball passes through the right through gate 67r every time one game ball is shot). When configured in this way, it is possible to realize a game property that allows the player to select a game method in the first time saving state or the second time saving state. In other words, when left-handed in the time-saving state, the frequency of executing the lottery of normal symbols is low (every 10 to 15 game balls are fired by left-handed, the frequency is about once). Since the lottery for the first special symbol is executed each time the lottery for the normal symbol is executed, not only the normal symbol corresponding to the second displacement pattern is won in the lottery for the normal symbol, but also the first special It can be expected that a lottery of patterns will result in a big hit. On the other hand, when hitting to the right in the time saving state, the frequency of executing the lottery of normal symbols increases (the frequency is about to be executed once every time two game balls are fired by hitting to the right), While the lottery efficiency of the normal symbols in the time saving state can be enhanced, the lottery of the first special pattern is not executed, so that the possibility of winning the jackpot during the time saving state can be realized. . Therefore, depending on the game method in the time saving state (whether to hit left or right), the possibility that the player will win a big hit during the time saving state is relatively high, but the lottery efficiency of normal symbols is poor. (It takes a relatively long time to digest the time-saving state, and a relatively large number of waste balls are generated.) The playability and the lottery efficiency of normal patterns are improved, but there is a possibility of a big hit during the time-saving state. It is possible to realize a very novel game property that allows the user to select a relatively low game property (the degree of expectation for a big win is reduced by the amount of 1/320, which is the probability of a big win for the first special symbol). Therefore, since each player can select a game property that matches his or her taste, a game property that matches the tastes of more players can be realized, and the interest of the player in the game is further improved. can be made

Also, as shown in FIG. 1149, on the downstream side of the right thru gate 67r, a plurality of game nails are formed to slope downward from the upper left direction in front view to the lower right direction. All game balls that have not entered the second ball entrance 640 can be guided to the upstream side of the second variable winning device 650 . With this configuration, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed and a small win is won, and the opening/closing door 650f1 of the second variable winning device 650 is opened, the right-handed game ball is placed in the second position. Since the ball can be surely entered into the V winning opening 650a of the variable winning device 650, the V winning opening can be opened during the opening period of the opening/closing door 650f1 even though the small winning which substantially determines the big winning is won. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of an extremely disadvantageous event for the player such that the game ball cannot be entered into the 650a and the player loses the chance of winning the jackpot.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 1150 to 1155, a characteristic effect in the 40th control example will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 1150(a), description will be given of the effect mode in the case where the time saving symbol winning is generated in the lottery of the first special symbol (the lottery result of giving the time saving state directly without going through the jackpot). Here, as described above, the second time saving state is the second state in which it is possible to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 at a rate of about 3% when the normal symbol lottery is executed. It is a game state in which the electric accessary 640a is released in the displacement pattern (normal figure winning B). That is, compared to the normal state that can not be elected to the normal pattern B (can only be elected to the first displacement pattern (per normal pattern A) that cannot enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640) This is a game state in which the degree of advantage is increased by executing the lottery of the second special symbol that at least substantially determines the big win. In the normal state, the probability of winning a jackpot when a left-handed game is performed is about 1/320 each time the lottery of the first special symbol is executed once, and the first time-saving state is the game state after the jackpot. Since the set ratio is set to 50%, the possibility of shifting to the first time saving state every time the first special symbol lottery is executed is about 1/500 in total. On the other hand, in the second time-saving state, when a left-handed game is played, the probability of winning a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery is about 1/320, and the normal symbol lottery leads to the second ball entrance 640. The probability of winning the normal pattern B that can enter the ball is about 1/33, and the lottery of the normal pattern is executed every time the lottery of the first special pattern is executed, so the lottery of the first special pattern is performed. The actual jackpot probability for each execution is about 1/29.8. In addition, when the jackpot is won during the time saving state, even if the jackpot of the first special symbol is won, the game state after the jackpot is set to the first time saving state, so the first time in the second time saving state The possibility of shifting to the first time saving state each time the special symbol lottery is executed is about 1/29.8 in total. For this reason, the second time saving state forms an advantageous state in which the possibility of shifting to the first time saving state increases significantly compared to the normal state.

As shown in FIG. 1150 (a), when the variable display effect corresponding to the time-saving design winning is executed, a special third A variable display effect in which the symbols are stopped and displayed is executed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 1150(a), after the third symbol simulating the same number is stopped and displayed in the left symbol column and the right symbol column to generate the ready-to-win effect, A variable display performance is executed in which a special symbol with the characters "chance time" attached to the symbol row is stopped and displayed. Also, at the fluctuation stop timing, the characters "Chance time GET!!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. By these display contents, the player is informed that a state more advantageous than the normal state (substantial jackpot probability and the second time saving state in which the rate of transition to the first time saving state is both significantly increased) is set. can be easily understood.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 1150 (a), in the upper right part of the third symbol display device 81, the special symbol lottery situation (whether it is during lottery (during fluctuation) and the lottery result) A small area for displaying the identification information (4th pattern) of the 4th pattern (special 1 4th pattern) for indicating the lottery status of the 1st special pattern (special 1) A display area Dm1 is formed. Also, a small display area Dm9 for displaying a reserved symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is formed in the lower right portion of the sub-display area Ds.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1150(b), the chance time waiting effect to be executed after the time saving symbol winning is reported (after the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed) will be described. This chance time waiting effect is mainly executed for notifying the number of times of time saving according to the type of the time saving pattern that has been won. In this chance time standby effect, a character 801 imitating a rabbit is displayed in the lower left of the seed display area Dm, and above it, the number of special symbol lotteries until the second time saving state set this time ends (normal symbol Symbols 811a to 811d suggesting the number of times the winning game is executed are rotated and displayed. Further above it, the characters "~waiting for chance time~" are displayed. In addition, the text "Determine the number of chance times!" is displayed in the small display area Ds. These display contents can make the player think as if the number of times of time saving in the second time saving state has not yet been set. In other words, the player can be made to feel as if the second time saving state has not yet started (waiting). In fact, at the start of this chance time standby production, it has transitioned to the second time saving state, and the first special that was suspended at the end of the variable display accompanying the winning of the time saving pattern (stop display of the time saving pattern) Variation display of symbols is executed. The variable display based on the remaining hold at the time of winning the time saving symbol is executed in a small display area Dm1 formed in the upper right part of the main display area Dm in a manner (narrow display area) that is relatively difficult for the player to visually recognize. . In addition, reserved symbols are also executed in the small display area Dm9 that is relatively difficult for the player to visually recognize (the display area is narrow). In other words, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the lottery of the first special symbol is being executed (that the second time saving state has already started) based on the reserved ball of the first special symbol. This is to prevent the player from starting a left-handed stroke by judging that the second time-saving state has already started.

Here, after shifting to the second time saving state, if the player hits left while the reserved ball of the first special symbol that was already reserved before the transition still remains, the remaining There is a possibility that a ball will pass through the central through gate 67c and enter the first ball entrance 64 during execution of the variable display of the first special symbol based on the hold. In this case, although the normal symbol lottery is immediately started, the first special symbol lottery based on the new starting winnings for the first ball entrance 64 is not started until all the reserved balls are consumed, so the first special There is a possibility that the fluctuation display period of the symbols and the fluctuation display period of the normal symbols (and the winning game period of the normal symbols) are shifted. As described above, in the second time saving state, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the normal symbol are started substantially at the same time each time, so that the substantial jackpot probability when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed. , It is configured higher than the normal state, and as a production mode, in the variable display production of the first special symbol, the lottery result of the normal symbol that started substantially at the same time as the lottery of the first special symbol (started immediately before) It is configured to set the production that takes into account. That is, when the lottery of the first special pattern is a big hit, or the lottery result of the normal pattern is the lottery result corresponding to the normal pattern B, the 3rd pattern imitating (attached) the same number is aligned. A variable display effect of the effect mode is executed, and when the lottery of the first special pattern is lost and the lottery result of the normal pattern is a normal pattern A, the effect of stopping and displaying the combination of the third pattern is lost. It is configured to execute the variable display effect of the mode. Under such circumstances, if the lottery start timing of the first special symbol and the lottery start timing of the normal symbol deviate, a variable display effect based on the lottery result of the normal symbol is executed in the variable display period of the first special symbol. It may become difficult to do so. Therefore, in the 40th control example, by executing the chance time standby effect, it is assumed that the second time saving state has not started, thereby forming a situation in which it is difficult for the player to shoot the game ball, It is configured to establish a situation in which the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol becomes 0 during the execution of this chance time standby performance. By configuring in this way, in the second time-saving state, after the holding ball of the first special symbol becomes a fluctuation stop state of 0, it is possible to make it easier to start hitting left, so in the second time-saving state, It is possible to suppress the deviation between the lottery start timing of the first special symbol and the lottery start timing of the normal symbol. Therefore, in the variable display performance of the first special pattern, the variable display mode can be surely set in consideration of the lottery result of the normal pattern executed immediately before the lottery of the first special pattern is executed.

In addition, in this 40th control example, among the end conditions of the second time saving state, the end condition (first end condition) established based on the fact that the number of lotteries of special symbols has reached the specified number of times, and the hit of the normal symbol The stipulated number of times is made different between the end condition (third end condition) established based on the number of game executions reaching the stipulated number of times. Specifically, the specified number of times for the first termination condition is four times greater than the specified number of times for the third termination condition. By configuring in this way, when the second time-saving state is set, regardless of whether the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is any number from 0 to 4, when the jackpot is not won, the normal symbol is displayed. The second time saving state can be reliably continued until the number of times the winning game is executed reaches the specified number of times. In other words, even if a plurality of reserved balls of the first special symbol are digested during the chance time standby performance, the number of lotteries of normal symbols that can be executed during the second time saving state is not reduced, so it is practical. The number of executions of the normal pattern lottery, which has a significantly higher possibility of leading to a big win than the lottery of the first special pattern, can be made common regardless of the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern, and in the second time-saving state. It is possible to suppress the drop in the degree of expectation for a big win. In the following description, when the number of times of time saving in the second time saving state is mentioned, it means the number of times of execution of the winning game of normal symbols in which the fourth end condition is satisfied.

Returning to FIG. 1150(b), the description continues. The symbol (icon) rotated and displayed in the chance time standby effect is, for example, a suggestive symbol (icon) 811a with the characters "10 times" indicating that the number of times of time saving has been given at least 10 times. , Suggestion pattern (icon) 811b with the letters “30 times” indicating that the number of times of time saving has been given at least 30 times, and the letters “Continue” suggesting that the chance time standby effect will continue. It is composed of a suggestive pattern (icon) 811c attached thereto and a suggestive pattern (icon) 811d with the character "celebration" indicating a big win. In addition to this, a suggestive pattern (icon) with the letters “100 times” indicating that the number of times of time saving has been granted more than 100 times, and that the second time saving state will continue until the next big hit. A suggestive pattern (icon) with the character "∞" suggesting is also provided. Depending on the type of winning time-saving design (number of times of time-saving design), the number of pending balls of the first special design, and the lottery result of the first special design, any type of suggestive design as suggestive designs (icons) 811a to 811d. (Icon) is determined by lottery.

When a specific period (for example, 5 seconds) has passed since the start of the chance time standby effect, as shown in FIG. A performance of hitting is executed, and it is reported that the suggestive content indicated by the suggestive design of the hitting is obtained. The example of FIG. 1151(a) illustrates a case where an effect is executed in which the suggestive symbol 811a to which the character "10 times" is attached is beaten. In this case, in the sub-display area Ds, by displaying the characters "10 times GET!! Left strike!!" It can be easily understood by a player.

Also, FIG. 1151(b) is a diagram showing an effect mode in the case of winning a jackpot in the lottery for the first special symbol during execution of the chance time standby effect. In other words, it is a diagram showing a performance mode when a jackpot is included in the reserved ball of the first special symbol that has already been reserved when the time-saving symbol is stop-displayed. As shown in FIG. 1151(b), when the jackpot is won with the first special symbol remaining reserved, the rabbit character 801 hits the suggestive symbol (icon) 811d with the word "celebration". executed. In addition, the characters "Get a jackpot!!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that he/she has won the jackpot.

In addition, in the present 40th control example, the variation time of the first special symbol in the second time saving state is fixed to 5 seconds. In accordance with this, the effect of selecting one suggested symbol (the rabbit character 801 strikes) in the chance time standby effect is also fixed to 5 seconds. Then, when there are one or more reserved balls of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the special symbol is lost, a 5-second production to always select the suggestive symbol with the word "continue" is executed. Then, in the next variation, a new combination of four suggestive patterns is displayed, and one suggestive pattern is selected from among these four suggestive patterns. Then, if the lottery result of the special pattern based on the remaining reservation is lost and the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern is 0, 1 suggestion that suggests the number of times of time saving according to the type of this time saving pattern A 5-second effect for selecting a symbol is executed, and the start of the second time-saving state (chance time) is notified. In addition, even at the start of the second time saving state when the reserved ball of the first special symbol is 0 at the time of winning the time saving pattern, similarly, 1 suggestive pattern that suggests the number of times of time saving in this second time saving state is executed for 5 seconds. By constructing in this way, the player who wants to know the number of times of time saving this time can be made to pay attention to the contents of the chance time standby performance, so that until the chance time standby performance is finished, It is possible to create a situation in which it is difficult for a game ball to be shot. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the execution timing of the lottery for the first special symbol and the execution timing of the lottery for the normal symbol from being deviated.

Here, in this 40th control example, when the game ball is not fired during the chance time standby effect and all the reserved balls of the first special symbol are consumed and then left hitting is started, and when the chance time standby effect is started. The degree of advantage is almost the same as when you start hitting left immediately after and accumulate a new reserved ball with the first special pattern while the reserved ball with the first special pattern is digested (those who waited for the reserved digestion However, the number of lotteries for the first special symbol that is executed during the time saving state increases, and is slightly advantageous). That is, in this 40th control example, as described above, it is configured to provide an end condition (third end condition) that is established based on the number of executions of the normal symbol winning game reaching the specified number of times, and the chance time ( In the second time-saving state), the end condition (first It is configured such that the third termination condition is satisfied prior to the termination condition). That is, the lottery number of special symbols until the first end condition is satisfied is the number of times corresponding to the number of reserved balls (4 pieces) of the upper limit number, and the normal symbol winning game until the third end condition is satisfied. is configured to be executed more times than the By configuring in this way, even if left-handed hitting is started after all the reserved balls of the first special symbol are digested in the second time-saving state, left-handed hitting is started immediately after the second time-saving state is set. Also, since the time-saving state can be continued until the number of normal symbol winning games corresponding to the third end condition is executed, the number of times of normal symbol winning games having a substantially high jackpot probability is lost. , it is possible to prevent the player from being extremely disadvantageous. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the loss of the player who continues to pay attention to the chance time standby effect without shooting the game ball, so that a suitable effect mode can be realized.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 1152 to 1154 (a), in the chance time (second time saving state), the effect when winning the normal symbol corresponding to the second displacement pattern in which the big win is substantially determined Aspects will be described. First, in FIG. 1152 (a), the lottery of the normal symbol and the lottery of the first special symbol are executed almost simultaneously in the chance time (second time saving state), and the second displacement pattern (second entering ball) is usually executed in the lottery of the symbol It is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when winning the normal symbol corresponding to the long open that allows the ball to enter the mouth 640.

Here, in the 40th control example, when the transition to the chance time (second time saving state) occurs, a character 801 imitating a rabbit in the main display area Dm moves above the clouds in the same manner as the chance time in the other control examples. is executed, and thereafter until the chance time ends, an effect is executed in which the character 801 performs various actions on the cloud. Further, as shown in FIG. 1152(a), in the chance time (second time saving state) in the fortieth control example, the variable display effect of the third symbol is executed in the central portion of the main display area Dm, and the main In the small display area Dm1 formed in the upper right of the display area Dm, the variable display effect of the fourth symbol is executed. The variable display effect of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol executed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, but the variable display of the third symbol is not necessarily the variable display of the special symbol. They are not executed synchronously. That is, in the 40th control example, when winning the normal symbol lottery during the chance time in the normal symbol lottery B set to the long open (second displacement pattern), the normal symbol is displayed by the variable display of the third symbol. It is configured to be able to show the lottery result. In this case, the variation display of the third symbol is executed in accordance with the variation time of the normal symbol.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 1152(a), the characters "~high probability medium~" are displayed in the upper center of the main display area Dm, and a small display area is formed on the upper left side of the main display area Dm. For Dm4, the characters "left-handed" are displayed. Further, a display content suggesting the remaining number of lotteries until the chance time (second time saving state) ends is displayed in a small display area Dm7 formed below the small display area Dm4. By these display contents, the player can easily understand that the game should be played by the game method of entering the game ball into the first ball entrance 64 by striking to the left even in an advantageous chance time. be able to. In addition, in the chance time (second time reduction state), it is possible to make the player grasp that the substantial jackpot probability increases and how long the substantial jackpot probability will continue. can.

In the chance time, when winning the normal design winning (normal design winning B) set to long open (second displacement pattern) in the normal design lottery, first, the normal design fluctuation corresponding to the normal design winning B As a variable display effect executed in the third symbol display device 81 in synchronization with the variable display period of the first special symbol started almost at the same time as the display (immediately after the start of the variable display corresponding to the normal pattern B), As shown in 1152(a), a variable display effect is executed in which the third symbol imitating the same number is stopped and displayed for the right symbol row, the middle symbol row, and the left symbol row. Also, when the symbols are stopped, as shown in FIG. 1152(a), the characters "bonus confirmed" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. In other words, the pseudo-win performance of the variable display mode for announcing the normal pattern win B is executed in a manner that is difficult to distinguish (same as) from the variable display performance executed when a big win is won in the lottery of the special symbols.

In addition, in this pseudo winning effect, the third symbol imitating the even-numbered symbol is always stop-displayed. This is because, at the time of winning the general pattern B, it is possible to execute the lottery of the second special pattern in which the jackpot is substantially determined (the electric accessory 640a can be operated for a relatively long time (for example, 2. 5 seconds) open state) is only confirmed, and the type of jackpot to be won cannot be specified (the second ball entry means 640 that triggers the lottery of the second special symbol). This is because there is no ball entry). Therefore, if you execute a variable display effect in a production mode in which numbers (for example, "7") that are generally used with a high degree of advantage are aligned, then a type with a low degree of advantage in the second special symbol lottery There is a possibility that the player may be confused when winning a big win or a small win. Therefore, in the 40th control example, a variable display effect is executed in which the third patterns imitating even-numbered numbers, which are generally used with a meaning of a relatively low degree of advantage, are aligned in the pseudo-win effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

When the pseudo-hit effect is completed and the open period of the normal hit B is started, then, during the open period of the electric accessory 640a based on the normal hit B, the game is played to the second ball entrance 640 by hitting to the right. A first suggesting performance capable of suggesting to the player that the ball should be entered is executed. The effect mode of the first suggestive effect will be described with reference to FIG. 1152(b). FIG. 1152(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 during execution of the first suggestion effect. As shown in FIG. 1152(b), when the first suggestion effect is executed, the display content of the small display area Dm4 formed on the upper left side of the third symbol display device 81 is switched to the characters "Right shot". . In addition, the third symbol that has been determined and displayed in the previous variable display effect (pseudo win effect) is reduced and displayed in the display area HR10. In addition, an arrow image YG resembling a rightward arrow is formed below the display area HR10, and the text "Aim right" is displayed on the arrow image YG. Furthermore, below the arrow image YG, there is a time gauge ga2 for indicating the remaining time of the period (long open period) during which the game ball can be entered into the second ball entrance 640 in the normal hit B. is displayed. The display mode of this time gauge ga2 is formed from a remaining period display ga2a for indicating the remaining period of the open period of B per normal pattern, and an elapsed period display ga2b for indicating the elapsed period. The time gauge ga2 is variably displayed according to the passage of time so that the ratio of the elapsed period display ga2b increases and the ratio of the remaining period display ga2a decreases every time the time elapses after the round game is executed. be done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1152(b), while the first suggestive effect is being executed, the second ball entrance 640 and its surrounding area on the game board 13 are simulated in the lower right part of the main display area Dm. A horizontally elongated substantially rectangular small display area Dm6 in which the captured image is displayed is formed, and the characters "Aim for the upper V with a right shot" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. According to these display contents, while the remaining period display ga2a remains, the upstream side of the second ball entrance 640 and the second variable prize winning device 650, which are decorated to resemble the letter "V", The player can easily understand that a big win can be obtained by hitting the game ball rightward into the second ball inlet 640 provided in the .

In addition, in the 40th control example, the first suggestion effect is executed in synchronization with the open period of B per normal pattern, but it is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to start the first suggestion effect from a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) before the start of the open period. Since the player can start hitting to the right before the start of the open period based on , the game ball can be made to reach the electric accessory 640a more reliably during the open period, and more reliably. A game ball can be entered into the second ball entrance 640 at this time.

When the player hits to the right in the first suggestion performance (performance suggesting aiming for the upper V), the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and the lottery for the second special symbol is executed. Then, for example, a promotion effect as shown in FIG. 1153 is executed as a variation display effect of the second special symbol for indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol. In this promotion effect, as shown in FIG. 1153(a), first, in the main display area Dm, the third pattern (in the example of FIG. A third symbol imitating "2") is displayed again, and an effect is executed in which a third symbol imitating the number "7" descends from above the third symbol. In addition, the text "Promote your symbol!" is displayed in the display area HR10, and the text "Chance for promotion!" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. According to these display contents, the third pattern imitating an even number is replaced (promoted) with the third pattern imitating the pattern of "7" for the player, so that an advantageous jackpot type jackpot game is played. It is possible to make the player easily understand that it will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to realize an effect mode that is easy for the player to understand.

In addition, as described above, when the lottery of the second special pattern is executed, it is possible to win either a small hit or a big hit, and when the small hit is won, just continue to hit the right during the small win game. Since the game ball can be easily entered into the specific area 650e3, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, the big hit is substantially decided. Then, when the lottery result of the second special symbol becomes a big hit, and when it becomes a small hit and the small hit type is determined to be a small hit A40, and the game ball passes through the specific area 650e3 in the small hit A40, A jackpot C40 having the largest number of rounds (10 rounds) is determined as the jackpot type. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit and the small hit type is determined to be a small hit B40, and the game ball passes through the specific area 650e3 in the small hit B40, the number of rounds is determined as the big hit type. The fewest (three rounds) jackpot D40 is determined. In the promotion effect, if the lottery result of the second special pattern is a big hit or a small hit A40, the promotion is successful (the third pattern imitating an even number becomes the third pattern imitating "7" On the other hand, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit B, the promotion mode is set to fail in promotion.

FIG. 1153(b) is a diagram showing an effect mode when the promotion effect of the effect mode in which promotion is successful is executed. As shown in FIG. 1153(b), in the promotion effect of the effect mode in which the promotion is successful, the third pattern imitating the number “7” descending from above the third pattern imitating the even number A third pattern simulating the number of 1 is flipped away, and an effect of replacing it with a third pattern simulating the number "7" is executed. Also, the characters "Successfully promoted!!" are displayed in the display area HR10. With these display contents, the player can easily understand that he/she has won the jackpot with the largest number of rounds (either the jackpot or jackpot A40 has been won in the lottery of the second special symbols). can.

It should be noted that, although not shown in the drawings, the degree of advantage is low in the lottery of the second special symbol (when the game ball passes through the specific area 650e3, the jackpot D40 with the smallest number of rounds is won) When winning a small hit B40 , the third pattern simulating ``7'' is rebounded without being able to repel the third pattern simulating an even number, and a performance mode of blowing upward is executed. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand that promotion has failed (winning the jackpot D40 with a low degree of advantage).

If a small win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, then the game ball is hit to the V winning opening 650a by striking to the right during the opening period of the open/close door 650f1 of the second variable winning device 650 based on the small win. A second suggestive effect is executed that can suggest to the player that the player should enter the ball. The effect mode of the second suggestive effect will be described with reference to FIG. 1154(a). FIG. 1154(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 during execution of the second suggestion effect. As shown in FIG. 1154(a), when the second suggestive effect is executed, the third symbol confirmed and displayed in the previous variable display effect (promotion effect) is reduced and displayed in the display area HR10. Further, in the same manner as in the first suggestive effect (aim for the upper V effect), an arrow image YG imitating a rightward arrow is formed below the display region HR10, and the arrow image YG is displayed with the message "Aim right. Aim" is displayed. Further, below the arrow image YG, a time gauge ga2 is displayed for indicating the remaining time of the period during which the game ball can be entered into the V winning opening 650a in the small win. The display mode of the time gauge ga2 is composed of a remaining period display ga2a for indicating the remaining period of the small winning opening period and an elapsed period display ga2b for indicating the elapsed period, and the small winning game is started. The time gauge ga2 is variably displayed according to the passage of time so that the ratio of the elapsed period display ga2b increases and the ratio of the remaining period display ga2a decreases as time passes.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1154(a), while the second suggestive effect is being executed, the second variable winning device 650 and its surrounding area on the game board 13 are simulated in the lower right portion of the main display area Dm. A horizontally elongated substantially rectangular small display area Dm6 in which the captured image is displayed is formed, and a character saying "Aim for the lower V by hitting right" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. Due to these display contents, while the remaining period display ga2a remains, the downstream side of the second ball entrance 640 and the second variable prize winning device 650, which are decorated to resemble the letter "V", The player can easily understand that a big win can be obtained by hitting the game ball rightward into the second variable prize winning device 650 provided in the .

Here, taking into account the production mode (production mode described with reference to FIGS. 1150 to 1154 (a)) in the chance time (second time saving state) described so far, chance time (second time saving state) will be described. FIG. 1156 is a time chart showing the transition of the effect mode from before the transition to chance time to after winning the jackpot.

As shown in Figure 1156, when the time-saving design (suddenly time-saving) is elected in the lottery of the first special design in the normal state, the time-saving design variation for 80 seconds with super reach is executed, and finally for the medium design row. 1150(a), a special symbol with the characters "chance time" is stopped and displayed. When the stop display period (determined display period) of this time saving pattern variation ends, the game state is changed from the normal state to the second time saving state. When the game shifts to the second time saving state, first, a chance time standby effect (see FIGS. 1151(b) and 1152) is executed. This chance time standby production is a production that is executed for a minimum of 5 seconds and a maximum of 20 seconds. By executing the effect that notifies the specified third end condition), the player's attention is focused on the effect content and the game (shooting of the game ball) is stopped, and already at the time of transition to the second time saving state It is executed to digest the reserved ball of the first special symbol that has been reserved.

By extinguishing the reserved ball of the first special symbol during execution of the chance time standby performance, the reserved ball of the first special symbol can be set to 0 at the end of the chance time standby performance, and thereafter. When the player hits left and enters the game ball into the first ball entrance 64 to execute the lottery for the first special symbol, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the normal symbol are performed each time. It is possible to realize an operation that starts almost at the same time (the lottery for the first special symbol is started immediately after the lottery for the normal symbol is started). Therefore, in the variable display effect of the first special symbol, it is possible to set the effect mode in consideration of the lottery result of the normal symbol that was started immediately before. As described above, in the second time-saving state, the ratio of B, which is advantageous when the normal pattern is hit (substantially confirms the jackpot), is higher than the normal state (0% → 3%), the behavior can be substantially equivalent to drawing a big win at a rate of more than 3% each time the drawing of one first special symbol is executed. That is, in the chance time (second time-saving state), as in the normal state, the game progresses by executing the lottery of the first special symbol by striking to the left, but the apparent jackpot probability is high. An advantageous game state is formed that dramatically increases (substantial jackpot probability rises from about 1/320 to about 1/30).

As shown in FIG. 1156, when the chance time standby effect is completed, the rabbit character 801 performs various actions on the cloud, and the variable display of the third pattern is executed, thereby effecting the effect mode suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win. Switches to the production during the chance time when is executed. In the chance time production, if the first special pattern lottery hits a big hit, and if the normal pattern lottery started just before the first special pattern lottery hits B, the same number. A variable display effect in which the 3rd pattern imitating the When the figure hits A, a variable display performance is executed in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed in combination with the winning combination.

Here, the correspondence relationship between the variation time in the variation display of the first special symbols and the variation time in the variation display of the normal symbols in the chance time will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1157 shows that the game ball almost enters the through gate 67 and the first ball entrance 64 in a state where neither the variable display of the first special symbol nor the variable display of the normal symbol (the variable display of the second special symbol) is executed. It is the figure which showed the correspondence of the fluctuation|variation time of a 1st special design, and the fluctuation|variation time of a normal design at the time of entering a ball simultaneously. FIG. 1157(a) shows the correspondence relationship when the lottery result of the normal pattern wins the normal pattern B (the normal pattern hit of the short open that is difficult to enter the second entrance 640), and FIG. (b) shows the correspondence relationship when the lottery result of the normal symbol wins the normal pattern A (long open normal pattern winning that allows the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 easily).

As shown in the upper part of FIG. 1157(a), when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed in the chance time (second time saving state), a variation pattern with a variation time of 5 seconds is set. This five-second variable time is set as a fixed variable time regardless of whether the lottery result is a big hit or a loss. On the other hand, as shown in the middle part of FIG. 1157(a), the variation time of the normal symbols started almost simultaneously with the variation display of the first special symbol in the chance time is set to 1 second. In addition, in FIG. 1157(a), for simplification of explanation, it is illustrated as if the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol are started at exactly the same time, but in reality The variable display of normal symbols is started slightly (for example, around 0.05 seconds) earlier. Since the lottery for the normal symbol is executed slightly before the start timing of the lottery for the first special symbol (the central through gate 67c is arranged on the upstream side of the first entrance 64), the first special symbol is selected. As the pattern variable display performance, a performance mode (variable display mode) is set in consideration of the result of the lottery of the normal symbols executed immediately before. FIG. 1157(a) illustrates the case where the ball is difficult to enter the second entrance 640, and the normal pattern is won. As a variable display effect showing the drawing result of the pattern, a variable display mode is set in which the third pattern is stopped and displayed in combination with the missing pattern. A variable display mode in which the third symbols imitating the same number are aligned is set as the variable display mode indicating .

As shown in the lower part of FIG. 1157(a), when the fluctuation time (1 second) of the normal pattern elapses, A per normal pattern is started. When A per normal figure is started, an opening period of 1.5 seconds (closing period of the electric accessory 640a) is set, then an opening period of 0.1 seconds is set, and thereafter 2.4 seconds. ending period (closing period of the electric accessory 640a) is set. As a result, the ending period of the normal pattern A is ended almost at the same time as the timing when the variable display of the first special symbol ends. In other words, almost at the same time when a new lottery for the first special symbol can be started, a new lottery for the normal symbol can be started. The lottery of patterns is started almost at the same time, and the performance mode of the variable display performance of the first special symbol can be set in consideration of the lottery result of the normal symbol. In other words, a novel performance mode is realized in which the variable display performance each time executed in the chance time can be set to a variable display mode taking into consideration both the lottery result of the normal symbols and the lottery result of the first special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to realize a more suitable presentation mode. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1157(b), the correspondence relationship between the variation time of the first special symbol and the variation time of the normal symbol when the lottery result of the normal symbol is B per normal symbol will be described. As shown in the upper and middle stages of FIG. 1157(b), the variation time of the first special symbol and the variation time of the normal symbol are common to the case of A per normal symbol (see FIG. 1157(a)). That is, the variation display of the first special symbol is set to a variation pattern with a variation time of 5 seconds, and the variation time of the normal symbol that was started almost simultaneously (immediately before) with the variation display of the first special symbol is 1 second. set. In addition, in the example of FIG. 1157 (b), in the lottery of normal symbols, since it illustrates the case of winning the general pattern B that substantially determines the jackpot, synchronizing with the fluctuation display of the first special symbol As the variable display effect of the third symbols to be executed, a variable display mode is set in which the third symbols imitating the same number are arranged regardless of the lottery result of the first special symbols.

As shown in the lower part of FIG. 1157(b), when the fluctuation time (1 second) of the normal pattern elapses, B per normal pattern is started. When the normal game B is started, an opening period of 2.5 seconds is set after an opening period of 1.5 seconds (closing period of the electric accessory 640a) is set, and the ending period is almost 0. It is set and the normal pattern B is ended. As a result, the general pattern winning B is ended almost at the same time as the timing when the variable display of the first special symbol ends. In other words, regardless of whether it is a normal pattern A or a normal pattern B, a new drawing of the normal pattern can be started almost at the same time that a new drawing of the first special pattern can be started. Therefore, even in the lottery of the first special pattern after the next time, the lottery of the normal pattern is started almost at the same time, and the result of the lottery of the normal pattern is taken into account as the production mode of the variable display performance of the first special pattern. Aspects can be set. In other words, a novel performance mode is realized in which the variable display performance each time executed in the chance time can be set to a variable display mode taking into consideration both the lottery result of the normal symbols and the lottery result of the first special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to realize a more suitable presentation mode. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this 40th control example, in the chance time, even when winning the general pattern per B that substantially determines the jackpot, the period from the start of the normal pattern variation to the end of the general pattern per B , the variation time of the first special symbol is matched (5 seconds), but it is not limited to this. For example, in the case of B per normal pattern, by lengthening the fluctuation time of the normal pattern (for example, 3.5 seconds) or by lengthening the opening period (for example, 4 seconds), 5 seconds It may be configured so that the open period of the normal symbol is started after the lapse. By configuring in this way, the variable display effect can be executed using the entire 5-second variable period, so that the effect mode can be further diversified. To be more specific, in the configuration of the 40th control example described above, when the general pattern per B is won, after about 2.5 seconds have passed after the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol, the open period based on the general pattern per B starts. As a result, only 2.5 seconds can be substantially secured as the effect period of the variable display effect. In other words, regardless of the result of the lottery for the normal symbols, the control for ending the winning of the normal symbols almost at the same time as the end of the variable display of the first special symbol was adopted. This means that even if the game ball does not enter the second ball entrance 640 because the player did not hit right in the normal game B, and the normal game B is finished, the remaining This is the result of consideration so as to surely realize the game property in which the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the normal symbol are executed almost simultaneously again at the chance time. In other words, while the lottery of the first special symbol ends in 5 seconds, when the normal pattern per B continues for 5 seconds or more, the fluctuation display of the next first special symbol is started during the execution of the general pattern per B. After that, it is intended to prevent the phenomenon that it becomes difficult to execute the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the normal symbol at almost the same time. However, since it is thought that there is almost no player who ignores the suggested content of the first suggestion effect (see FIG. 1152(b)) and continues to hit left even though he or she has won B per normal pattern, in practice , Only during the period from the start of the normal pattern fluctuation based on the normal pattern A to the end of the normal pattern per A, if it matches the fluctuation time of the first special pattern, no big problem will occur. You might also say that. Therefore, the open period of B per normal pattern is configured to be started after at least 5 seconds have passed since the start of fluctuation of the normal pattern, so that 5 seconds, which is the fluctuation time of the first special pattern, is fully used. It may be configured to execute an effect suggesting whether or not it becomes a normal figure hit B (whether the electric accessory 640a opens long) or not. As a result, the mode of presentation can be set more appropriately.

Returning to FIG. 1156, the description continues. In the chance time (second time-saving state), if you win the normal pattern B (per normal pattern in which a long opening of 2.5 seconds is set for the electric accessory 640a), the normal pattern corresponding to the normal pattern B As a variation display mode in the variation display of the first special symbol that is started immediately after the start of the variation display of , a pseudo hit variation effect (see FIG. 1152(a)) is executed. As described above, this pseudo-hit variation effect is the same as when a special symbol lottery results in a big win, and the third symbols imitating the same number are stopped in the right symbol row, the middle symbol row, and the left symbol row, respectively. This is the presentation of the presentation mode to be displayed. In other words, it is a production mode that is difficult to distinguish from the case of winning a jackpot in a lottery of special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 1156, when the pseudo hit variation effect is completed, an effect to aim for the upper V (first suggestive effect, see FIG. 1152(b)) is executed, and the player is hit for the first time to the right. Prompted (suggested). Aim for the upper V by hitting right during execution of the effect (first suggestive effect), so that the game ball can reach the electric accessory 640a set in the open state (protruding state). A game ball can be entered into the second ball entrance 640 by the electric accessory 640a. Aim for the upper V effect (see FIG. 1152(b)) ends when the ball entering the second ball hole 640 is detected or when the normal hit B ends. When the entry of the ball into the second ball opening 640 is detected (the held ball of the second special symbol is acquired), the production of the production mode that informs that the ball has been successfully entered into the upper V is the first. While it is executed during the period until the end of the variable display of the special symbol, if the ball does not enter the second ball entrance 640 due to not hitting the right hand, etc., the upper V is displayed at the end of the winning of the normal symbol. A short-time (for example, 1 second) effect is executed to indicate that the ball has failed to enter the upper V.

In addition, the same applies if you win a normal pattern lottery B (a normal pattern per which a jackpot is virtually determined) and win a jackpot in the first special pattern lottery that is executed immediately after. Then, the effect of aiming for the upper V is executed. In this case, when the variation time of the first special symbol ends, the effect of aiming for the upper V is terminated, and the first special symbol jackpot is started. In other words, the promotion effect and the effect of aiming for the lower V do not occur, and the big win effect suddenly starts. This can bring great surprise and joy to the player. After the jackpot of the first special symbol is finished, if the ball with the second special symbol is held by hitting right in the aim of the upper V effect, the fluctuation display based on the held ball with the second special symbol will be displayed. Then, a big winning game or a small winning game in which the big winning is substantially decided is executed. In other words, an extremely advantageous situation is established in which the jackpot of the first special symbol and the jackpot of the second special symbol continue.

As shown in FIG. 1156, the ball entering the second ball opening 640 was detected during execution of the upper V aiming effect (first suggestion effect, see FIG. 1152(b)) (second special symbol ), the promotion effect (see FIG. 1153) is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol. As described above, this promotion effect is a production mode (Fig. 1153 (b) reference), it is set to a production mode in which promotion fails when a lottery result corresponding to a small winning number of rounds is obtained (small winning B is won).

If a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 1156, the effect of aiming for the lower V (second suggestive effect, see FIG. 1154 (a)) is executed, and the player A second right stroke is prompted (suggested). Aim for the lower V by hitting right during execution of the effect (second suggestive effect), the game ball can enter the V winning opening 650a set in the open state, and enter the specific area 650e3. and a game ball can be entered. Aim for the lower V effect (see FIG. 1154(a)) is ended by detecting the ball entering the specific area 650e3 or by ending the small winning game. When the entry into the specific area 650e3 is detected (the big win is confirmed), the production of the production mode notifying that the ball has been successfully entered into the lower V is executed during the period until the end timing of the small winning game. On the other hand, if the game ball does not enter the specific area 650e3 due to, for example, not hitting to the right, aim for the lower V at the end of the open period of the small winning game. A short-time (for example, one second) effect is executed to indicate that the ball has failed to enter the V.

As shown in FIG. 1156, when the ball entering the specific area 650e3 is detected during execution of the "Aim for the lower V" effect, the big win is started and the big win effect is executed. In addition, when a big win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the big win game is started at the end of the big win variation of the second special symbol without executing the effect of aiming for the lower V, and the big win effect is performed. is executed.

Next, with reference to Drawing 1154 (b) and Drawing 1155, the production mode of the 1st time saving state in this 40th example of control is explained. As described above, the first time saving state is a gaming state that can be set as a gaming state after the end of the jackpot. More specifically, while it is set at a rate of 50% when the big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state, the first time in the time saving state (first time saving state or second time saving state) This is a game state set at a rate of 100% when a big win is achieved in the special symbol lottery or when a big win is achieved in the second special symbol lottery either directly or via a small win. In this first time-saving state, the jackpot is won at a rate of 80%, and when the jackpot is won, the first time-saving state is set again after the jackpot ends (the first time-saving state is looped). Therefore, once transferred, a very advantageous state is formed in which the first time saving state and the jackpot are repeated at a rate of 80%.

As described above, in the first time saving state, as the third end condition, the number of executions of the normal symbol winning game is set to one. And, since the ratio of winning the normal pattern B, which substantially determines the jackpot in the normal pattern lottery, is 80%. The loop of the time saving state will be confirmed. For this reason, in the first time saving state in the 40th control example, when the lottery of normal symbols is executed, as a configuration to set the effect mode of pseudo-notifying the player whether or not it will be a big hit there is

FIG. 1154(b) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode in the first time saving state (rush state). In the first time-saving state (rush state), a character 801 imitating a rabbit discovers a plurality of treasure boxes 810a to 810c in the main display area Dm under the condition that neither the special pattern lottery nor the normal pattern lottery is executed. Then, an effect for examining which treasure box to open is executed. In addition, the characters "Right shot" are displayed in the small display area Dm4 formed in the upper left part of the main display area Dm. In the display area HR10, the text "Bonus when V appears from the selected box!?" be done. According to these display contents, the rabbit character 801 is caused to select one of the treasure chests by hitting the right hand to pass through the right through gate 67r decorated with the character "GO". It can be easily understood that

Drawing 1155 (a) is a figure showing an example of an effect mode when a game ball passes right through gate 67r in the 1st time saving state. As shown in FIG. 1155(a), when the game ball passes through the right through gate 67r in the first time-saving state, an effect that the rabbit character 801 selects one treasure box according to the lottery result of the normal pattern based on the passage. is executed. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 1155(a), an effect is executed in which the rabbit character 801 selects the treasure box 810b, and at the same time, "Selection complete!!" characters are displayed. In addition, the display area HR10 continues to display the text "Bonus when V appears from the selected box!?" With these display contents, the player can easily understand that the appearance of "V" from the selected treasure box will result in a big win.

As shown in FIGS. 1154(b) and 1155(a), there are multiple variations of treasure chests. That is, there are three types of treasure chests: a shining treasure chest 810a, a normal treasure chest 810b, and a small treasure chest 810c. Depending on the type of treasure box selected by the rabbit character 801, it is configured to suggest to the player the degree of expectation that B is won in the normal pattern. Specifically, when winning per normal pattern B, the selection ratio of treasure box 810a is higher than when winning per normal pattern A, while the selection ratio of treasure box c is higher than per normal pattern A. It is configured to be lower than if you are elected. As a result, when the game ball passes through the right through gate 67r, the game can be played while paying attention to the type of treasure box selected by the character 801, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. Note that the example of FIG. 1155(a) illustrates the case where the rabbit character 801 selects the treasure box 810b.

FIG. 1155(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the winning of the general pattern B, which substantially determines the jackpot, is notified. As shown in FIG. 1155(b), in the case of notifying that the winner of the normal game B is selected, the character "V" is attached to the treasure box selected by the rabbit character 801 in the main display area Dm. An effect in which the icon 810ba appears is executed. Also, the characters "Bonus confirmed!!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. These display contents make it possible for the player to easily understand that the big win has been confirmed (the winning of the normal pattern B, which substantially confirms the winning of the big win). It should be noted that, after this, as in the case of winning the normal game B during the chance time, first, after the effect of aiming for the upper V occurs, the lottery result based on the start winning to the second entrance 640 If the lottery of the second special symbol is a big win, the big win game is started as it is, while if it is a small win, aim for the lower V through the performance to the specific area 650e3. A jackpot game is started on the condition that a ball is entered.

Next, referring to FIG. 1158, a transition method between states in the 40th control example will be described. Here, in the 40th control example, three game states are provided. That is, a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player, a first time-saving state that is most advantageous to the player, and a second time-saving state that is more advantageous than the normal state and lower than the first time-saving state. Different game states are provided. In the normal state, there is no possibility of determining the normal pattern hit B that allows the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 in the normal pattern lottery, and in the first time saving state, the normal pattern lottery. In the second time-saving state, it is a game state in which the normal pattern B is elected at a rate of about 3% in the normal pattern lottery.

First, with reference to the upper part of FIG. 1158, a game state transition method in a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player will be described. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 1158, there is a possibility of shifting from the normal state (normal mode) to another state when a big hit is won in a special symbol lottery or when a time-saving symbol is won. More specifically, when the jackpot A40 determined (selected) at a rate of 50% is determined (selected) at a rate of 50% in the case of a jackpot with a probability of about 1/320 in the special symbol lottery, the jackpot is determined as the jackpot type. A first time saving state is set as the game state after the end. In addition, when a special pattern lottery is won with a probability of about 1/200 for a time saving pattern (sudden time saving), the second time saving state is set directly. On the other hand, when the jackpot B40, which is determined (selected) at a rate of 50% when the jackpot is won, is determined as the jackpot type, the game state after the jackpot ends is again set to the normal state. For this reason, in the normal state, by winning a jackpot in a special pattern lottery or winning a time-saving pattern, the game state will shift to a game state with a high degree of advantage, so we expect these lottery results. It becomes a game property to play a game.

In addition, as shown in the lower left side of FIG. 1158, from the first time saving state to another game state, it is possible to shift only when the end condition of the time saving state (one of the first to third end conditions) is satisfied have a nature. That is, the first special symbol variation (special figure 1 variation) and the second special symbol variation (special figure 2 variation) The first end condition is established when the total number of fluctuations is 10 times, or a small The second end condition established by winning once per hit is established, or the third end condition established by the number of executions of the winning game of the normal symbol (the number of times of operation of the normal electric accessory 640a) becomes one. is established, the game state is set to a disadvantageous normal state. On the other hand, if a normal pattern winning B (long open normal pattern winning) winning at a rate of 80% is won when the normal pattern lottery is executed in the first time saving state, a big win is substantially determined. In other words, it is possible to obtain the right to execute the lottery of the second special symbol that wins either the big win or the small win that is substantially confirmed, and after the big win ends, the first time-saving state is set again ( Loop the first time-saving state).

Here, in fact, when the normal pattern B is started, the number of times of operation of the electric accessory 640a reaches one, which is the specified number of times, and the time saving state is ended (the third end condition is satisfied ), but in FIG. 1158, in order to make the explanation easier to understand, the second special symbol hit (jackpot or small hit) generated by winning the general pattern B is treated as a hit in the first time saving state. ing.

Also, as shown in the lower right side of FIG. 1158, from the second time-saving state to another game state, when a jackpot is won, and when a normal pattern lottery is won, a normal pattern per B (long open per normal pattern) is elected. may migrate if More specifically, as shown on the lower right side of FIG. 1158, in the case of a jackpot that is won with a probability of about 1/320 in the special symbol lottery, regardless of the jackpot type, the gaming state after the jackpot ends. However, it is always set to the first time saving state with a high degree of advantage. In addition, even when winning the normal pattern B, which substantially determines the big win, by continuing to hit the right according to the suggested contents of the production, the lottery of the second special pattern can be executed, and the big win or substantially Since it is possible to win a small win that determines the big win, the game state after the end of the big win is set to an advantageous first time-saving state.

Thus, in this 40th dead fish control example, it is configured to provide three game states, and in each game state, by differentiating the winning ratio of the normal figure per B that substantially determines the jackpot, the degree of advantage It realizes innovative gameplay that makes a difference. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Electrical configuration of the 40th control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 1159(a), details of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the 40th control example will be described. FIG. 1159(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the 40th control example. As shown in FIG. 1159(a), the ROM 202 in the 40th control example has a A first winning random number table 202aj is provided, a jackpot type selection table 202bj is provided instead of the jackpot type selection table 202b, and a second winning random number table 202cj is provided instead of the second winning random number table 202c. point, the point that the variation pattern selection table 202dj is provided instead of the variation pattern selection table 202d, the point that the time reduction grant table 202ej is provided instead of the time reduction grant table 202e, the small hit type selection table 202f Instead, the small hit type selection table 202fj is provided, the time saving type selection table 202ja is added, the per normal figure type selection table 202jb is added, and the variation pattern scenario table 202h is deleted. The difference is that Since other configurations are the same as those of the ROM 202 in the thirty-second control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

First, details of the first winning random number table 202aj in the 40th control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1160(a) and 1160(b). Here, the first winning random number table 202aj in the 40th control example is referred to in the lottery for the first special symbol in the same manner as the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 953(a)) in the 32nd control example described above. and a special symbol 2 random number table 202aj2 referred to in the lottery for the second special symbol. First, the details of the special symbol 1 random number table 202aj1 will be described with reference to FIG. 1160(a). FIG. 1160(a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special symbol 1 random number table 202aj1.

As shown in FIG. 1160(a), the special symbol 1 random number table 202aj1 in the 40th control example has a range of random numbers (the value of the first winning random number counter C1) determined as a big hit, "0 to 204 205 random numbers (counter values) are defined in association with each other, and 328 random numbers (counter values) of "205 to 532" are defined as the range of random numbers (counter values) determined to be time-saving symbol winning. is defined in association with the range of On the other hand, the random number determined to be a small hit is not associated.

Of the 65536 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 65535" that can be taken by the first winning random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) determined to be a big hit is 205, so the first special The probability of winning the jackpot in the symbol lottery is about 1/320 (205/65536). Also, out of the 65536 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first per random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be time-saving symbol winning is 328, so the first special symbol The probability of winning the time-saving symbol in the lottery is about 1/200 (328/65536).

Next, with reference to FIG. 1160(b), the details of the special symbol 2 random number table 202aj2 will be described. FIG. 1160(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special symbol 2 random number table 202aj2. As shown in FIG. 1160(b), the special symbol 2 random number table 202aj2 in the 40th control example has "0 to 204 "205 random numbers (counter values) are defined in association with each other, and the range of random numbers (counter values) determined as small hits is 65331 random numbers (counter values) of "205 to 65535". A range is associated and defined. On the other hand, the random number determined as time-saving symbol winning is not associated.

Of the 65536 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) judged to be a big win is 205, so a big win is achieved in the lottery of the second special symbol. The probability of winning is about 1/320 (205/65536) as in the lottery for the first special symbol. In addition, since the number of random numbers (counter values) determined to be a small hit is 65331 out of 65536 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning random number counter C1, the lottery for the second special symbol The probability of winning a small prize is about 319/320 (65331/65536).

Next, with reference to FIG. 1160(c), details of the jackpot type selection table 202bj in the 40th control example will be described. FIG. 1160(c) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the jackpot type selection table 202bj in the 40th control example. This jackpot type selection table 202bj is similar to the jackpot type selection table 202b (see FIG. 954(a)) in the thirty-second control example described above, in order to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery. is a data table referenced by As shown in FIG. 1160(c), in the jackpot type selection table 202bj in the 40th control example, two types of jackpot A40 and jackpot B40 are defined as the jackpot types of the first special symbol. One type of jackpot C40 is defined as the jackpot type of the special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 1160 (c), as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", and "jackpot A40" is defined in correspondence, "Big win B40" is defined in association with the value of the first win type counter C2 in the range of "50 to 99". "Jackpot A40" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 4 and the first time-saving state is set in which the number of times of time-saving (prescribed number of times of normal symbol wins) is once after the jackpot ends. In addition, "jackpot B40" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 4, and basically the time-saving state is not set (set to the normal state) after the jackpot ends. Therefore, in terms of the number of rounds, there is no difference between the "jackpot A40" and the "jackpot B40", but in terms of the game state after the jackpot ends, the "jackpot A40" is more advantageous than the "jackpot B40". get higher

Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 99" that the value of the first hit type counter C2 can take, random numbers (counter values) associated with "jackpot A40" and "jackpot B40" are 50 each, the ratio of winning ``jackpot A40'' and ``jackpot B40'' when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery is 50% each. Therefore, when a big hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbols in the normal state, the game is shifted to the most advantageous first time-saving state only at a rate of 50%. In addition, when a jackpot is won in the time saving state, even if the jackpot type is "jackpot B40", the state shifts to the first time saving state. That is, in the first time-saving state and the second time-saving state, by winning a jackpot, an advantageous game state is formed in which the game always shifts to the most advantageous first time-saving state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 1160 (c), as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 can take the entire range (range of "0 to 99"), "jackpot C40 ” are defined in association with each other. This "jackpot C40" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 10 and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the first time-saving state in which the game state is advantageous regardless of the game state at the time of winning. Since the ``big win C40'' is associated with the whole range of possible values of the first win type counter C2, the ``big win C40'' is always determined when the big win is won in the lottery of the second special pattern.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1161(a), details of the second winning random number table 202cj in the 40th control example will be described. This second winning random number table 202cj is a data table that is referred to for determining whether or not a normal symbol is appropriate when a lottery for a normal symbol is executed. As shown in FIG. 1161(a), in the second winning random number table 202cj in the 40th control example, regardless of the gaming state, the range of the random number (counter value) determined to be the winning of the normal symbol is set to the second The entire range of possible values of the winning random number counter C4 (range of "0 to 299") is associated. Therefore, in the 40th control example, regardless of the game state, when the lottery for the normal symbol is executed, the winning of the normal symbol is always won. In addition, as described above, the selection ratio of the winning type of the normal symbol executed when winning the winning of the normal symbol differs according to the game state. Although the details will be described later, in the normal state, the normal pattern per B that can enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 is not selected, and the ratio of 80% in the first time saving mode B per normal pattern is selected, and in the second time saving state, B per normal pattern is selected at a rate of 3%. As a result, the degree of advantage between game states is greatly different.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1161(b), the details of the variation pattern selection table 202dj in the 40th control example will be described. This variation pattern selection table 202dj, similar to the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 956(a)) in the 32nd control example, is a variation pattern (variation time ) is a data table referenced to select FIG. 1161(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of this fluctuation pattern selection table 202dj.

As shown in FIG. 1161(b), the variation pattern selection table 202dj in the 40th control example is referred to to select a variation pattern (variation time) when a special symbol lottery is executed in a normal state. A normal table 202dj1, a time saving table 202dj2 that is referred to for selecting a variation pattern (variation time) when a special symbol lottery is executed in a time saving state (first time saving state, second time saving state), consists of at least First, the details of the normal table 202dj1 will be described with reference to FIG. 1161(c).

FIG. 1161(c) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the normal table 202dj1 in the 40th control example. As shown in FIG. 1161(c), the normal table 202dj1 includes the special symbol type used for the special symbol lottery to be executed, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery to be executed, and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. , and different variation patterns (variation times) are defined correspondingly. In other words, it is possible to determine a variation pattern of different variation times according to the special symbol type and the lottery result. Specifically, when the special symbol type is "special symbol 1 (first special symbol)" and the lottery result is "out", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 139". For the range of "150 to 179", "out of" with a variation time of 7 seconds as a variation pattern, and "150 to 179" with a variation time of 20 seconds as a variation pattern for the range of "140 to 149" For the range of ", "various types of normal reach" with a fluctuation time of 40 seconds are defined as the fluctuation pattern, and for the range of "180 to 198", "super reach" with a fluctuation time of 80 seconds is defined as the fluctuation pattern. there is

In addition, when the special symbol type is "special symbol 1 (first special symbol)" and the lottery result is "jackpot", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is within the range of "0 to 29" On the other hand, as a variation pattern, "various normal reach" with a variation time of 40 seconds is in the range of "30 to 189", and "super reach" with a variation time of 80 seconds as a variation pattern is "190 to 198". A "special reach" with a variation time of 140 seconds is defined as a variation pattern for the range.

Furthermore, when the special symbol type is "special symbol 1 (first special symbol)" and the lottery result is "time saving symbol", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198". A "super reach" with a variation time of 80 seconds is defined as a variation pattern for the range.

In other words, in the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, when the lottery result is out, the variation of the short variation time is shorter than when the lottery result is other than (big hit or time saving pattern). It is configured so that the pattern can be easily determined, and when a variation pattern with a longer variation time is determined, the result of the special symbol lottery is likely to be a big hit or a time-saving symbol. are doing. By constructing in this way, the special symbol variation in which the lottery results are out of order continues for a long time for the player who is playing the game in the normal state, and the special symbol lottery executed per unit time is not performed. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's desire to play due to an extremely small number of executions.

In addition, when the number of executions of the special symbol lottery executed per unit time is reduced, that is, when the special symbol variation for a long time is executed, the winning (jackpot, time saving symbol) is elected. Since it is possible to increase the expectation of the game, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play.

On the other hand, when the special symbol type is "special symbol 2 (second special symbol)" and the lottery result is "jackpot", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is the entire range of "0 to 198" On the other hand, as the variation pattern, "hit" with a variation time of 10 seconds is defined, the special symbol type is "special figure 2 (first special symbol)", and the lottery result is "small hit" , the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 is specified for the entire range of “0 to 198”, as a variation pattern “small win” with a variation time of 10 seconds. In addition, as described above, in this 40th control example, as a lottery result of the second special symbol, only either the big win or the small win can be won. Outliers no longer exist. Therefore, the normal table 202dj1 also defines only the lottery results of "big hit" and "small hit".

As described above, in the 40th control example, even if the normal symbol lottery is executed in the normal state and the normal symbol win is won, the game ball is sent to the second ball entrance 640 as the normal symbol win. Since the normal pattern hit A in which the opening and closing pattern (first displacement pattern) of the electric accessory 640a that is impossible (difficult) to enter is set is always executed, the normal pattern lottery is executed in the normal state. Even so, the game ball cannot enter the second ball entrance 640 . In the 40th control example, as a situation where the second special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state, the second entrance is elected in the normal symbol in the time saving state (first time saving state or second time saving state) The normal pattern hit B that can easily enter the game ball to 640 is determined, and the time saving end condition (third end condition) is established first by the operation of the electric accessory 640a by the normal pattern hit B. After the time saving state is terminated, the game ball enters the second ball inlet 640 during the open period of the normal pattern hit B being executed. In particular, this situation is a situation that is likely to be established in the first time-saving state in which the prescribed number of times per normal pattern is set to once as the third end condition. That is, if you win the normal figure per B after moving to the first time saving state, the start of the general figure per B will be almost certainly ahead of the entry to the second entrance 640. , When the lottery for the second special symbol is executed after the first time-saving state is set, the lottery for the second special symbol is started after temporarily shifting (falling) to the normal state. Therefore, in this 40th control example, as the variation time of the second special symbol variation for showing the result of the second special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, a constant length (10 seconds) regardless of the lottery result is configured to determine a variation pattern in which the variation time of is set. And it is configured to execute the promotion effect (see FIG. 1153) using this variable time.

In this way, when a special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery) of a specific special symbol type (second special symbol) is executed in a specific gaming state (normal state), the same lottery result is obtained regardless of the lottery result. By determining the variation pattern in which the length variation time is set, the performance period of the specific performance executed during the special symbol variation can be unified regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1162(a), details of the time saving table 202j2 will be described. FIG. 1162(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of this time saving table 202j2. As shown in FIG. 1162 (a), in the time saving table 202dj2, if the special symbol type is "special symbol 1 (first special symbol)" and the lottery result is "out", the acquired If the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined as a variation pattern of ``short deviation'' with a variation time of 5 seconds for the entire range of ``0 to 198'', and the lottery result is a ``jackpot'', the acquired For the entire range of "0 to 198" for the value of the variation type counter CS1, "short hit" with a variation time of 5 seconds is defined as the variation pattern, and if the lottery result is "short time pattern", obtain For the entire range of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 obtained from "0 to 198", a "short collision" with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds is defined as the fluctuation pattern.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1162(a), the stipulated contents for the second special symbol are common to the normal table 202dj1 (see FIG. 1161(c)). That is, when the special symbol type is "special figure 2 (second special symbol)" and the lottery result is "jackpot", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is the entire range of "0 to 198" On the other hand, as the variation pattern, "hit" with a variation time of 10 seconds is defined, the special symbol type is "special figure 2 (first special symbol)", and the lottery result is "small hit" , the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 is specified for the entire range of “0 to 198”, as a variation pattern “small win” with a variation time of 10 seconds.

According to these regulations, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the time saving state can be fixed to 5 seconds, and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol can be fixed to 10 seconds. Therefore, as described above in FIG. 1157, in the chance time (second time saving state), the variation of the first special symbol and the variation of the normal symbol can be started almost simultaneously, and the variation end timing of the first special symbol It is possible to substantially match the winning end timing of the normal symbol. Therefore, as the variable display effect of the first special symbol every time in the chance time, it is possible to set a variable display mode in consideration of the lottery result of the normal symbol. Further, by fixing the variation time of the second special symbol, the effect period of the promotion effect can be fixed each time.

Next, with reference to Drawing 1162 (b), the details of time reduction grant table 202ej in this 40th example of control are explained. This time saving grant table 202ej is similar to the time saving grant table 202e (see FIG. 954 (b)) in the 32nd control example described above, when setting the time saving state, the time saving state corresponding to the setting opportunity of the time saving state It is a data table referred to for setting end conditions. FIG. 1162(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the time reduction provision table 202ej.

As shown in FIG. 1162 (b), in the time saving grant table 202ej in the 40th control example, each jackpot type, and time saving pattern type and the value of each counter referred to when determining whether the time saving end condition is satisfied and are defined in association with each other. It should be noted that, as shown in FIG. 1162 (b), in the present 40th control example, as a counter for determining whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied, the time saving counter 203h, the small winning counter 203s, and the normal electric operation counter 203ja , are provided. The time saving counter 203h is a counter for determining whether or not an end condition (first end condition) corresponding to the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the time saving state is set is established (determines), and is a small winning counter. 203s is a counter for determining (determining) whether or not an end condition (second end condition) corresponding to the number of small winning games executed after the time-saving state is set is satisfied (determines); is a counter for determining whether or not an end condition (third end condition) corresponding to the number of hits of normal symbols executed after the time saving state is set is established.

As shown in FIG. 1162 (b), in this 40th control example, four types of "jackpot A40" to "jackpot D40" are provided as the jackpot types, and "time reduction patterns A40" to " Four types of time saving pattern E40" are provided, and the time saving table 202ej has the values of the time saving counter 203h, the small winning counter 203s, and the general electric operation counter 203ja for each jackpot type and each time saving pattern type (i.e. , first to third end conditions) are defined in association with each other.

As shown in FIG. 1162(b), for "jackpot A40", "jackpot C40", and "jackpot D40" as the jackpot types, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is "10". , the value "1" of the small hit counter 203s, and the value "1" of the normal electric operation counter 203ja are defined. Therefore, when one of the "jackpot A40", "jackpot C40", and "jackpot D40" is won, the number of times the special symbol changes is set to 10 times as the first end condition, and the second end condition is a small number of times. One execution frequency of the winning game is set, and one winning frequency of the normal symbol is set as the third end condition. Since the first time-saving state is set after the end of these jackpots, the time-saving end condition is established by the establishment of the third end condition, which is established by executing the normal symbol winning game once. If the normal pattern winning game is a normal pattern winning B, the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied, but the second special in which the game ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 and the jackpot is substantially confirmed. Since the lottery of symbols can be executed, the state can be shifted to the first time saving state again. On the other hand, if the normal pattern hit is A, the electric accessory 640a is displaced in the first displacement pattern in which it is impossible (difficult) to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640. Therefore, it becomes impossible to execute the lottery for the second special symbol. Therefore, in the first time-saving state set after the end of "jackpot A40", "jackpot C40", and "jackpot D40", it becomes a game property that strongly expects to win the normal pattern B. In addition, the ratio of winning the normal pattern B in the first time saving state is 80% of the normal pattern lottery.

Also, as shown in FIG. 1162(b), for the "jackpot B40", when the game state at the time of winning is the normal state, the value of the time reduction counter 203h, the value of the small win counter 203s, and the "No value (indicated by "-" in the figure)" is defined for each value of the operation counter 203ja. Therefore, when "jackpot B40" is won in the normal state, the state after the jackpot is not set to the time-saving state, but is set to the normal state. Therefore, the "jackpot B40" is the jackpot type that is the most disadvantageous in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot ends. In addition, when the gaming state at the time of winning is the time-saving state, the same termination conditions as other jackpot types (“jackpot A40”, “jackpot C40”, and “jackpot D40”) are defined. Since the details are as described above, the description thereof is omitted here.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1162(b), for the "time saving pattern A40", the value "14" of the time saving counter 203h and the small hit counter 203s for the case where the game state at the time of winning is the normal state and a value of "10" of the normal electric operation counter 203ja are defined. Therefore, when the "time saving pattern A40" is won in the normal state, the number of fluctuations of the special pattern is set to 14 times as the first end condition, and the number of execution times of the small winning game is set to 1 time as the second end condition. , As the third end condition, the number of normal symbol hits of 10 is set. Therefore, the second time-saving state set based on the winning of "time-saving design A40" is executed 14 times of special design lottery, 1 time of small winning game, or winning of normal design. is executed 10 times. Here, as described above, the second time-saving state is a game state in which the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the normal symbol are executed almost simultaneously each time when hitting to the left, and substantially a big hit. Because the winning percentage of B per normal pattern that is determined is a gaming state in which the ratio of 3% per lottery of normal patterns is taken into consideration, the 1st special pattern Each time a lottery is executed, an advantageous game state is formed in which a jackpot is won with a probability of substantially about 1/30. The possibility of winning a total of about 1/30 jackpot by lottery of 10 times of special symbols and normal symbols at almost the same time is about 28.5%, so the second based on winning the "time saving pattern A40" The jackpot expectation in the two-hour short state is about 28.5%.

In addition, the first end condition (end condition based on the number of fluctuations of special symbols) is set four times more than the third end condition (end condition based on the number of hits of normal symbols), which is the winning of the time saving symbol This is to allow the game to be played in the second time-saving state without impairing the number of hits of the normal symbols, regardless of the value of the number of balls held at the time of playing. More specifically, when the first end condition and the third end condition are matched, when the second time saving state is started and the reserved ball of the first special symbol exists, the lottery of the normal symbol is not executed, the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, and the value of the time reduction frequency 203h corresponding to the first end condition is subtracted. In other words, there is a possibility that the first end condition will be satisfied before the third end condition is satisfied, and the more the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, the more substantial the lottery of the first special symbol will be. There is a risk of losing the number of lotteries for normal symbols with a high possibility of a big win. Therefore, in this 40th control example, even if the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol at the time of transition to the second time saving state is any of 0 to 4, the first before the third end condition In order to make it extremely difficult for the termination condition to be satisfied, the first termination condition is set to a number larger than the third termination condition by the maximum number of held balls (that is, four times). By configuring in this way, even if left-handed hitting is started after all the reserved balls of the first special pattern are digested in the second time saving state, the winning game of the normal pattern is executed the number of times corresponding to the third end condition. To prevent a player from being extremely disadvantageous by losing the number of winning games of normal patterns having a substantially high probability of big winning because the time saving state can be continued until the game is played. can be done.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1162 (b), if the game state at the time of winning is the time saving state, the value of the time saving counter 203h "1004", the value of the small hit counter 203s "1", and the normal electric operation counter 203ja A value of "1000" is defined for each. Therefore, when "time saving pattern A40" is won in the time saving state, the number of fluctuations of the special pattern is set to 1004 times as the first end condition, and the execution number of times of the small winning game is set to 1 time as the second end condition. , As the third end condition, the number of normal symbol wins of 1000 is set. The possibility of winning a jackpot of about 1/30 in total by the lottery of 1000 special patterns and normal patterns at almost the same time is almost 100%. The second time-saving state set by is substantially a time-saving state in which a jackpot is determined.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1162(b), for the "time saving pattern B40", when the game state at the time of winning is the normal state, the value of the time saving counter 203h "34" and the value of the small hit counter 203s "1" and the value "30" of the normal electric operation counter 203ja are defined respectively. Therefore, when the "time saving pattern B40" is won in the normal state, the number of fluctuations of the special pattern is set to 34 times as the first end condition, and the number of execution times of the small winning game is set to 1 time as the second end condition. , As the third end condition, 30 hits of normal symbols are set. Therefore, the second time-saving state set based on the winning of the "time-saving design B40" is executed 34 times of the lottery of the special design, or the small winning game is executed once, or the winning of the normal design. is executed 30 times. The possibility of winning a jackpot of about 1/30 in total by lottery of 30 times of special symbols and normal symbols at almost the same time is about 63.5%, so the second based on winning the "time saving pattern B40" The jackpot expectation in the two-hour short state is about 63.5%. It should be noted that, if the game state at the time of winning is a time saving state, similarly to "time saving pattern A40", the value of the time saving counter 203h "1004", the value of the small hit counter 203s "1", and the normal electric operation counter 203ja Since the value "1000" is associated and defined, the second time-saving state in which the jackpot is substantially determined is set.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 1162 (b), for the "time saving pattern C40", the value of the time saving counter 203h "54", the value of the small hit counter 203s "1", and the value of the general electric operation counter 203ja " 50” are defined respectively. Therefore, when the "time saving symbol C40" is won, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is set to 54 times as the first end condition, the execution number of times of the small winning game is set to 1 time as the second end condition, and the third condition is set. As a termination condition, the number of normal symbol hits of 50 is set. Therefore, the second time-saving state set based on the winning of the "time-saving design C40" is executed 54 times of the lottery of the special design, or the execution of the small winning game once, or the winning of the normal design. is executed 50 times. The possibility of winning a jackpot of about 1/30 in total by lottery of 50 times of special symbols and normal symbols at almost the same time is about 81.3%, so the second based on winning the "time saving symbol C40" The jackpot expectation in the two-hour short state is about 81.3%. It should be noted that, if the gaming state at the time of winning is a time saving state, like "time saving pattern A40" and "time saving state B40", the value of the time saving counter 203h "1004", the value of the small hit counter 203s "1", and Since the value "1000" of the normal electric operation counter 203ja is associated and defined, the second time-saving state in which the jackpot is substantially determined is set.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 1162 (b), for the "time saving pattern D40", the value of the time saving counter 203h "104", the value of the small hit counter 203s "1", and the value of the normal electric operation counter 203ja " 100” are defined respectively. Therefore, when the "time saving pattern D40" is won, the number of fluctuations of the special pattern is set to 104 times as the first end condition, the number of execution times of the small winning game is set to 1 time as the second end condition, and the third condition is set. As a termination condition, the normal number of winning times of 100 symbols is set. Therefore, the second time-saving state set based on the winning of the "time-saving design D40" is executed 104 times of the lottery of the special design, or the execution of the small winning game once, or the winning of the normal design. is executed 100 times. The probability of winning a jackpot of about 1/30 in total by lottery of 100 times of special symbols and normal symbols at almost the same time is about 96.5%, so the second based on winning the "time saving symbol D40" The jackpot expectation in the two-hour short state is about 96.5%. It should be noted that, if the gaming state at the time of winning is a time saving state, similarly to "time saving pattern A40" ~ "time saving pattern C40", the value of the time saving counter 203h "1004", the value of the small hit counter 203s "1", and Since the value "1000" of the general electric operation counter 203ja is associated and defined, the second time-saving state in which the jackpot is substantially determined is set.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 1162 (b), for the "time saving pattern E40", regardless of the game state at the time of winning, the value of the time saving counter 203h "1004", the value of the small hit counter 203s "1", and the value "1000" of the normal electric operation counter 203ja are respectively defined. Therefore, when "time saving pattern E40" is won, the number of fluctuations of the special pattern is set to 1004 times as the first end condition regardless of the game state, and the number of executions of the small winning game is 1 time as the second end condition. is set, and as the third end condition, 1000 normal symbol hits are set. Therefore, the second time-saving state set based on the winning of the "time-saving design E40" is executed 1004 times of the lottery of the special design, or the execution of the small winning game once, or the winning of the normal design. is executed 1000 times. The possibility of winning a jackpot of about 1/30 in total by lottery of 1000 special patterns and normal patterns at almost the same time is almost 100%. The state is a time-saving state in which the jackpot is substantially determined.

In this way, in the 40th control example, the degree of expectation for a big hit for each type of time-saving design is made different by differentiating the end condition of the second time-saving state provided according to the type of time-saving design. In other words, the possibility of winning a big win is made different by changing the number of execution times of winning games of normal symbols until the second time saving state is completed according to the type of time saving symbols. By constructing in this way, when the time-saving pattern is won, the game can be played while paying attention to the type of the time-saving pattern, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, with reference to Drawing 1163 (a), details of small hit classification selection table 202fj in this 40th example of control are explained. Drawing 1163 (a) is a figure showing the contents of regulation of this small hit classification selection table 202fj. As shown in FIG. 1163 (a), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in the range of "0 to 79", "small hit A40" is associated with the small hit type, and the small hit type "Small hit B40" is defined as a small hit type in association with the range of "80 to 99" for the value of the counter C5. Here, both "small win A40" and "small win B40" can easily enter the game ball into the specific area 650e3 simply by continuing to hit right during execution of the small win game. It is a type, and when the game ball enters the specific area 650e3 in "small hit A40", while winning the jackpot C40 (10 round jackpot), the game ball moves to the specific area 650e3 in "small hit B40". It is configured to win a jackpot D40 (three-round jackpot) when a ball is entered. Even if any jackpot is won, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the first time-saving state, so only in terms of the number of rounds when the jackpot is won ” It is a small hit type with a higher degree of advantage. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, the random number (counter value) associated with "small hit A40" and "small hit B40" Since they are 80 pieces and 20 pieces, respectively, the ratio of determining "small prize A40" and "small prize B40" when winning the small prize in the second special symbol lottery is 80% (80/100). and 20% (20/100).

Next, with reference to Drawing 1163 (b), the details of time saving classification selection table 202ja in this 40th example of control are explained. This time-saving type selection table 202ja is a data table referred to for determining the type of time-saving design when the time-saving design is won in the special design lottery. As shown in FIG. 1163 (b), in the time saving type selection table 202ja, for each of the five types of time saving design types of "time saving design A40" to "time saving design E40", the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the range of

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1163 (b), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 89", "time saving pattern A40" is associated with the time saving pattern type. ing. As described above, this "time saving pattern A40" is a time saving pattern type corresponding to the second time saving state in which the third end condition (time saving end condition based on the number of executions of the normal pattern winning game) is set to 10 times. . Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first per type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "time saving pattern A40" is 90. Therefore, the rate at which "time saving design A40" is determined when the time saving design is won in the lottery of the first special design is 90% (90/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 1163(b), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "90 to 94" in association with "time saving pattern B40" as the time saving pattern type. As described above, this "time saving pattern B40" is a time saving pattern type corresponding to the second time saving state in which the third end condition (time saving end condition based on the number of executions of the normal symbol winning game) is set to 30 times. . Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first per type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "time saving pattern B40" is five. Therefore, the ratio of "time saving design B40" to be determined when the time saving design is won in the lottery of the first special design is 5% (5/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 1163(b), the value of the first per type counter C2 is defined in the range of "95 to 97" in association with "time saving pattern C40" as the time saving pattern type. As described above, this "time saving design C40" is a time saving design type corresponding to the second time saving state in which the third end condition (time saving end condition based on the number of executions of the normal symbol winning game) is set to 50 times. . Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first per type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "time saving pattern C40" is 3. Therefore, the ratio of "time saving design C40" to be determined when the time saving design is won in the lottery of the first special design is 3% (3/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 1163(b), the value "98" of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in association with "time saving pattern D40" as the time saving pattern type. As described above, this "time saving pattern D40" is a time saving pattern type corresponding to the second time saving state in which the third end condition (time saving end condition based on the number of executions of the normal symbol winning game) is set to 100 times. . Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first per type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "time saving pattern D40" is one. Therefore, the ratio of "time saving design D40" to be determined when the time saving design is won in the lottery of the first special design is 1% (1/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 1163(b), the value "99" of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in association with "time saving pattern E40" as the time saving pattern type. As described above, this "time saving pattern E40" is a time saving pattern type corresponding to the second time saving state in which the third end condition (time saving end condition based on the number of executions of the normal pattern winning game) is set to 1000 times. . Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first per type counter C2, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "time saving pattern E40" is one. Therefore, the ratio of "time saving design E40" to be determined when the time saving design is won in the lottery of the first special design is 1% (1/100).

Next, with reference to FIG. 1163(c), the general/universal figure per type selection table 202jb in the 40th control example will be described. This normal pattern winning type selection table 202jb is a data table that is referred to for selecting (determining) the normal pattern winning type when the normal pattern is a winning in the normal design lottery. As shown in FIG. 1163(c), in this general pattern per type selection table 202jb, the normal per pattern per type and the value range of the second per type counter C6 are defined in association with each other for each game state. ing.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1163 (c), when the game state at the time of the normal symbol lottery is the normal state, the entire range of the value of the second hit type counter C6 ("0 to 99" Range) is defined in association with A per normal pattern as a type per normal pattern. As described above, this normal game hit A is an opening and closing pattern (first displacement pattern) that makes it impossible (difficult) to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640. The electric accessory 640a opens and closes (displaces ) is a general map per type.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1163 (c), when the game state at the time of the lottery of normal symbols is the first time saving state, the value of the second per type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 19" "Per normal map A" is defined in association, and the value of the second per type counter C6 is defined in association with the range of "20 to 99" per normal pattern B". As described above, in the normal figure hit B, the electric accessory 640a is opened and closed (displaced) in an opening and closing pattern (second displacement pattern) that allows the game ball to easily enter the second ball entrance 640. It is a general map of the type. And, since the lottery of the second special symbol is a lottery in which the big hit is substantially determined, the general pattern hit B can be said to be a general pattern hit of the type in which the big hit is substantially determined. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 99" that the value of the second per type counter C6 can take, random numbers (counter values) associated with A per normal pattern and B per normal pattern (counter value) Since the number of is 20 and 80, respectively, the ratio of determining A per normal pattern and B per normal pattern when winning the normal pattern in the first time saving state is 20% (20/100 ) and 80% (80/100). Since the first time-saving state is a game state that ends when the normal symbol winning game is executed once (it falls to the normal state), in the first time-saving state, substantially at a rate of 80% While the jackpot game is executed by winning the normal game B where the jackpot is fixed, the game ball cannot be entered into the second ball inlet 640 at a rate of 20%, and the normal state is entered as it is. A game state in which the player falls is formed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1163 (c), when the game state at the time of the lottery of normal symbols is the second time saving state, the value of the second hit type counter C2 is for the range of "0 to 96" "Per normal map A" is defined in association, and the value of the second per type counter C6 "97 to 99" is defined in association with "per normal pattern B". Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 99" that the value of the second per type counter C6 can take, the random numbers (counter values) associated with A per normal pattern and B per normal pattern (counter value) Since the number of is 97 and 3, respectively, the ratio of determining A per normal pattern and B per normal pattern when winning the normal pattern in the first time saving state is 97% (97/100 ) and 3% (3/100). In the second time-saving state, since the game state is ended by executing any number of times of 10 times, 30 times, 50 times, 100 times, and 1000 times of normal symbol hits, in the second time-saving state is a game property aiming to win 3% normal pattern B before reaching the number of times of normal pattern winning games.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1159(b), the details of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 of the 40th control example will be described. FIG. 1159(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the 40th control example. As shown in FIG. 1159(b), the RAM 203 in the 40th control example replaces the special figure 2 counter 203t with respect to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the 32nd control example described above (see FIG. 952(b)). The only difference is that an electrically operated counter 203ja is provided. This normal electric operation counter 203ja, as described above, is for determining whether or not the end condition (third end condition) corresponding to the number of normal symbol hits executed after the time saving state is set is established (determines). It is a counter, and a counter value corresponding to the jackpot type or the time saving type is set when the jackpot ends or when the time saving pattern is stopped (see S226A in FIG. 1166). In addition, the normal electric operation counter 203ja is updated by subtracting 1 from the value each time the start timing of the normal symbol winning game is reached (see S2332A in FIG. 1173(b)). Based on the value of the general electric operation counter 203ja, it is determined whether or not the third end condition (time reduction end condition based on the number of executions of the normal symbol winning game) is established.

In addition, as one of the time-saving end conditions in the 40th control example, the end condition (third end condition) based on the number of times the game is executed per normal pattern is defined. 1. Because it has a board structure capable of executing only the lottery of normal symbols without executing the lottery of 1 special symbols, and has a game property that a big win is substantially determined by winning a normal pattern B. , If only the end condition (first end condition) based on the number of lotteries of special symbols and the end condition (second end condition) based on the number of executions of small winning games are specified as time saving end conditions, the first time saving state or the second This is because if the player continues to hit to the right after transitioning to the time-saving state, a problem arises that the time-saving state continues until the winning of the normal pattern B, in which the jackpot is substantially determined. Therefore, in this 40th control example, as the time saving end condition, the end condition (third end condition) based on the number of executions of the normal symbol winning game is defined, and the right hitting is continued in the time saving state, and the special symbol is executed. Even if the lottery is not performed at all, the time-saving state is terminated by executing the regular pattern winning game over the prescribed number of times. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the problem that the time saving state always continues until the normal drawing B is won.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1164(a), the details of the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the 40th control example will be described. FIG. 1164(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the 40th control example. As shown in FIG. 1164(a), the ROM 222 in the 40th control example has a waiting effect selection table 222ja added to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the 32nd control example (see FIG. 959(a)). The difference is that the defeat number selection table 222b, the defeat effect mode selection table 222c, the additional reduction value selection table 222d, the effect stage data table 222e, and the game environment data table 222f are deleted. The standby effect selection table 222ja is a data table referred to for determining the effect mode of the chance time standby effect (see FIGS. 1150(b) and 1151). Details of this standby effect selection table 222ja will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 1165 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the standby effect selection table 222ja. As shown in FIG. 1165, this standby effect selection table 222ja is a combination of icon (suggestion pattern) and the first effect for each combination of the number of times of time saving corresponding to the type of time saving pattern won this time, and the situation at the start of the effect. A correspondence relationship with the range of values of the counter 223f1 is defined. Here, as described above, the chance time standby effect (see FIG. 1150 (b) and FIG. 1151) is from the end of the variable display corresponding to the time saving symbol to the end of all the reserved balls of the first special symbol ( If the number of pending balls is 0, it is an effect that is executed using the period of 5 seconds after the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed), and the variable display based on the suspended ball of the first special symbol is being executed. This effect is executed to prevent the game ball from entering (passing through) the first ball entrance 64 (and the central through gate 67c). Therefore, after the time saving pattern is stop-displayed and the transition is made to the second time saving state, the variable display effect can be continuously executed up to four times (the upper limit number of the balls held in the first special pattern). composed of performances.

As shown in FIG. 1165, as a situation when executing a new production within the production period of the chance time standby production, for the situation at the start of the jackpot fluctuation, regardless of the number of times of shortening (third end condition) , the icon with the characters "10 times", the icon with the characters "30 times", and the characters "continue" for the range of the value of the first effect counter 223f1 from "0 to 49". A combination of an icon with the character "congratulation" and an icon with the character "congratulation" is displayed. A notification effect A) is associated and defined. Similarly, when the value of the first effect counter 223f1 is in the range of "50 to 89", an icon with the characters "100 times", an icon with the characters "∞", and the characters "continue" are displayed. A combination of an icon with the character "congratulation" and an icon with the character "congratulation" is displayed. The notification effect B) is defined in association with the first effect counter 223f1 value in the range of "90 to 99", two icons with the characters "∞" and the character "Congratulations". A combination of the two icons shown above is displayed, and an effect (hit report effect C) is defined in association with the rabbit character 801 striking the icon with the word "celebration". there is

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the first effect counter 223f1, the random values associated with the winning notification effect A, the winning reporting effect B, and the winning reporting effect C counter value) are 50, 40, and 10, respectively, so that when the winning variation is started within the performance period of the chance time standby performance, the winning notification performance A, the winning reporting performance B, and the winning reporting are performed. The ratios at which production C is determined are 50% (50/100), 40% (40/100), and 10% (10/100), respectively. In addition, the combination of the icons (suggestion patterns) displayed first in the hit notification effect A is a combination that is determined at a relatively high rate even when notifying a small number of times of time saving (10 times of time saving times). This is positioned as a mode of presentation with a low degree of expectation in which a relatively advantageous notification is given to the player. In addition, the combination of icons (suggestion patterns) that are first displayed in the hit notification effect B is a combination that is selected even when a relatively large number of times of time reduction (100 times or 1000 times) is set. It is positioned as an effect mode with a high degree of expectation that a notice advantageous to the target player is made. Furthermore, the combination of icons (suggestion patterns) displayed first in the winning notification effect C is a combination that can be selected only in a situation where 1000 time-saving times, which is substantially equivalent to continuing until a big win, is reported, It is positioned as an extremely advantageous performance mode in which it is determined that either a win or a 1000 time reduction state in which a jackpot is substantially determined at the stage when the combination of icons is displayed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 1165, the number of times of time saving (third end condition) is set to the time saving state of 10 times, and in the state of 0 pending fluctuation is started or the fluctuation is stopped state (that is, the execution start timing of the last chance time standby effect in the effect period), the value of the first effect counter 223f1 is in the range of “0 to 79”. A combination of an icon with the characters "10 times", an icon with the characters "30 times", an icon with the characters "Continue", and an icon with the characters "Congratulations" is displayed. Ultimately, an effect (10 times notification effect A) in which the rabbit character 801 hits an icon to which the characters “10 times” are added is associated and defined, and the value of the first effect counter 223f1 is defined as “10 times”. 80 to 98”, an icon with the characters “10 times”, an icon with the characters “30 times”, an icon with the characters “50 times”, and an icon with the characters “Continue” A combination of icons with letters attached is displayed, and finally an effect (10 times notification effect B) is associated with the rabbit character 801 striking the icon with the letters “10 times” attached. An icon with the characters "10 times", an icon with the characters "100 times", and the characters "∞" are added to the value "99" of the first effect counter 223f1. A combination of an icon and an icon with the word "continue" is displayed, and finally an effect in which the rabbit character 801 strikes the icon with the word "10 times" (10 times notification effect). C) is associated and defined.

On the other hand, in a situation where the number of times of time saving (third end condition) is set to a time saving state of 10 times, and the situation where the number of pending balls is 1 or more and the fluctuation starts (that is, in the production period Execution start timing of the chance time standby effect executed other than the last time), the value of the first effect counter 223f1 is in the range of "0 to 94", and the character "10 times" is attached. A combination of one icon and one icon with the characters "Continue" is displayed, and finally the icon with the characters "Continue" is hit by the rabbit character 801 to give notification. (Continuous notification effect A) is defined in association with the value of the first effect counter 223f1 in the range of "95 to 99", an icon with the characters "10 times" and the characters "30 times". An icon with the characters "50 times" and an icon with the characters "Continued" are displayed. An effect (continuous notification effect B) for notifying by the character 801 striking is associated and defined. As a result, when the second time saving state of 10 times of time saving is set, as a chance time standby effect, the continuous notification effect A is executed at a high rate while the number of pending balls is 1 or more, and the number of pending balls is executed. becomes 0, the notification effect A is executed 10 times at a high rate.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 1165, the number of times of time saving (third end condition) is set to the time saving state of 30 times, and in the state of 0 pending fluctuation is started, or fluctuation stop state (that is, the execution start timing of the last chance time standby effect in the effect period), the value of the first effect counter 223f1 is in the range of “0 to 39”. A combination of two icons with characters "10 times", one icon with characters "30 times", and one icon with characters "Continue" is displayed, and finally "30 times" is displayed. An effect (30 times notification effect A) in which the rabbit character 801 hits an icon to which the characters "three times" is attached is associated and defined, and the value of the first effect counter 223f1 is "40 to 98". For the range, an icon with the characters "10 times", an icon with the characters "30 times", an icon with the characters "50 times", and an icon with the characters "Continue" A combination of icons is displayed, and finally an effect (30 times notification effect B) in which the rabbit character 801 hits an icon to which the letters "30 times" are attached is associated and defined. For the value "99" of the production counter 223f1, an icon with the characters "30", an icon with the characters "∞", an icon with the characters "continuation", and an icon with the characters "celebration" are displayed. A combination of icons with letters attached is displayed, and finally an effect (30 times report effect C) is associated with the rabbit character 801 beating the icon with the letters “30 times” attached. stipulated.

On the other hand, in a situation where the number of times of time saving (third end condition) is set to a time saving state of 30 times, and the situation where the number of pending balls is 1 or more and the fluctuation is started (that is, in the production period Execution start timing of the chance time standby effect executed other than the last time), the value of the first effect counter 223f1 is in the range of "0 to 94", and the character "10 times" is attached. A combination of one icon and one icon with the characters "Continue" is displayed, and finally the icon with the characters "Continue" is hit by the rabbit character 801 to give notification. (Continuous notification effect A) is defined in association with the value of the first effect counter 223f1 in the range of "95 to 98", an icon with the characters "10 times" and the characters "30 times". An icon with the characters "50 times" and an icon with the characters "Continued" are displayed. An effect (continuous notification effect B) that is notified by the character 801 striking is defined in association with the value of the first effect counter 223f1, which is "99," and an icon with the characters "30 times" attached. A combination of an icon with the characters "100 times", an icon with the characters "continued", and an icon with the characters "celebration" was displayed, and finally the characters "continued" were added. An effect (continuous notification effect C) in which the icon is hit by the rabbit character 801 is defined in association with it. As a result, when the second time saving state with the number of time saving times of 30 times is set, as a chance time standby effect, the rate of continuous notification effect A while the number of pending balls is 1 or more is higher than when the number of time saving times is 10 times As it becomes lower, the ratio of the continuous notification effect B becomes higher. Further, there is a possibility that the continuous notification effect C, which cannot be selected with ten times of time saving, is selected. Further, when the number of pending balls becomes 0, the notification effect B is executed 30 times at a relatively high rate.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 1165, the number of times of time saving (third end condition) is set to the time saving state of 50 times, and in the state of 0 pending fluctuation is started, or fluctuation stop state (that is, the execution start timing of the chance time standby effect that is executed last in the effect period), the value of the first effect counter 223f1 is in the range of “0 to 9”. A combination of an icon with the characters "10 times", an icon with the characters "30 times", an icon with the characters "Continue", and an icon with the characters "Congratulations" is displayed. Ultimately, an effect (30 times notification effect D) in which the rabbit character 801 hits an icon to which the characters "30 times" are added is associated and defined, and the value of the first effect counter 223f1 is defined as " 10 to 12”, an icon with the characters “10 times”, an icon with the characters “30 times”, an icon with the characters “50 times”, and an icon with the characters “Continue” A combination of icons with letters attached is displayed, and finally an effect (30 times report effect B) is associated with the rabbit character 801 hitting an icon with letters "30 times" attached. An icon with the character "30 times", an icon with the character "∞", and the character "Continue" for the specified range of values of the first effect counter 223f1 of "13, 14". A combination of an icon marked with and an icon marked with the word “congratulations” is displayed, and finally the icon marked with the word “30 times” is hit by the rabbit character 801 to notify the effect ( 30 times notification effect C) is defined in association with the value of the first effect counter 223f1 in the range of "15 to 89", the icon with the characters "10 times" and the characters "30 times". A combination of an icon with the characters "50 times" and an icon with the characters "Continue" is displayed, and finally an icon with the characters "50 times" is displayed. The effect (50 times notification effect A) that is notified by the character 801 hitting is defined in association with the value of the first effect counter 223f1 in the range of “90 to 99”, the character “50 times” , an icon with the characters "100 times", an icon with the characters "∞", and an icon with the characters "celebration" are displayed in combination, and finally "50". An effect (50-times notification effect B) is defined in association with the rabbit character 801 striking an icon with the characters "times" attached.

That is, when the number of times of time saving is 50 times, it is configured so that there is a possibility that the number of times of time saving (30 times) less than the actual number is notified. Therefore, even if a small number of times of time saving (30 times) is notified, the player can expect that there is a possibility that a larger number of times of time saving is set. When the number of times of time saving that is smaller than the actual number is notified, when the number of times of time saving on the display becomes 0, an effect of adding the remaining number of times of time saving that has not been notified is executed. Similarly, when the number of times of time saving is increased by winning the time saving pattern during the chance time, when the number of times of time saving on the display becomes 0, the performance of adding the remaining number of times of time saving is executed. By configuring in this way, even if the number of times of time saving on the display is reduced, the game can be played in anticipation that the number of times of time saving will be added, so that the player's interest in the game is further improved. can be made

In addition, as shown in FIG. 1165, in the situation that the number of times of time saving (third end condition) is set to the time saving state of 50 times, and the number of pending balls is 1 or more in a state in which the deviation is started (That is, the execution start timing of the chance time standby effect that is executed other than the last in the effect period), the value of the first effect counter 223f1 is set to "10 times" for the range of "0 to 79". A combination of three icons with letters and one icon with letters "Continue" is displayed, and finally the icon with letters "Continue" is beaten by the rabbit character 801. The effect (continuous notification effect A) to be notified by doing is defined in association, and the value of the first effect counter 223f1 is in the range of "80 to 94", the icon with the characters "10 times" attached, A combination of an icon with the characters "30 times", an icon with the characters "50 times", and an icon with the characters "Continued" is displayed, and finally the characters "Continued" are added. An effect (continuous notification effect B) is defined in association with the rabbit character 801 striking the selected icon to notify that the value of the first effect counter 223f1 is in the range of "95 to 99", and "30 A combination of an icon with the characters "times", an icon with the characters "100 times", an icon with the characters "continue", and an icon with the characters "celebration" is displayed. An effect (continuation notification effect C) in which the rabbit character 801 hits an icon to which the character "continue" is attached is associated and defined. As a result, when the second time saving state of 50 times of time saving is set, as a chance time standby production, the rate of continuous notification production A is 10 times or 30 times of time saving while the number of pending balls is 1 or more It becomes lower than the case, and the ratio of the continuous information effect B and the continuous information effect C becomes high. Further, when the number of held balls becomes 0, the 50-time notification effect A is executed at a relatively high rate.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 1165, in a situation in which the number of times of time saving (third end condition) is set to 100 times of time saving state, and in the state of 0 hold off fluctuation is started or fluctuation stop state (that is, the execution start timing of the last chance time standby effect in the effect period), the value of the first effect counter 223f1 is in the range of “0 to 14”. A combination of an icon with the characters "10 times", an icon with the characters "30 times", an icon with the characters "50 times", and an icon with the characters "Continue" is displayed. , and finally, an effect (50 times notification effect A) in which the rabbit character 801 hits an icon to which the characters "50 times" are added is associated and defined, and the value of the first effect counter 223f1 is defined. For the range of "15 to 24", an icon with the characters "50 times", an icon with the characters "100 times", an icon with the characters "∞", and an icon with the characters "Continue" A combination of icons with letters attached is displayed, and finally an effect (50 times notification effect B) is associated with the rabbit character 801 beating the icon with the letters “50 times” attached. An icon with the character "10 times", an icon with the character "100 times", and an icon with the character "∞" are defined for the range of the value of the first effect counter 223f1 from "25 to 69". A combination of an icon with letters and an icon with letters "Continue" is displayed, and finally an icon with letters "100 times" is hit by the rabbit character 801 to give notification. (100 times notification effect A) is associated and defined, and the value of the first effect counter 223f1 is in the range of "70 to 99", the icon with the characters "50 times", and the icon "100 times". A combination of an icon with a letter, an icon with the letter "∞", and an icon with the letter "continue" is displayed, and finally an icon with the letter "100 times" is displayed. A performance (100-time reporting performance B) for notifying by hitting by the character 801 of is associated with and defined.

That is, even when the number of times of time saving is 100 times, similarly to the case of 50 times, the number of times of time saving (50 times) less than the actual number may be notified. Therefore, even if a small number of times of time saving (50 times) is notified, the player can expect that there is a possibility that a larger number of times of time saving is set.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 1165, in the situation that the number of times of time saving (third end condition) is set to the time saving state of 100 times, and the state that the number of pending balls is 1 or more and the deviation is started (That is, the execution start timing of the chance time standby effect executed other than the last in the effect period) is set to "10 times" for the range of the value of the first effect counter 223f1 from "0 to 49". A combination of three icons with letters and one icon with letters "Continue" is displayed, and finally the icon with letters "Continue" is beaten by the rabbit character 801. The effect (continuous notification effect A) to be notified by doing is defined in association, and the value of the first effect counter 223f1 is in the range of "50 to 89", the icon with the characters "10 times" attached, A combination of an icon with the characters "30 times", an icon with the characters "50 times", and an icon with the characters "Continued" is displayed, and finally the characters "Continued" are added. An effect (continuous notification effect B) in which the rabbit character 801 hits the selected icon is associated with and defined, and the value of the first effect counter 223f1 is set to "30 A combination of an icon with the characters "times", an icon with the characters "100 times", an icon with the characters "continue", and an icon with the characters "celebration" is displayed. An effect (continuation notification effect C) in which the rabbit character 801 hits an icon to which the word “continue” is attached to the icon is associated with and defined, and the value “99” of the first effect counter 223f1 is defined. , an icon with the characters "100 times", an icon with the characters "∞", an icon with the characters "Continue", and an icon with the characters "Congratulations" are displayed. Finally, an effect (continuation notification effect D) is defined in association with the rabbit character 801 striking an icon to which the characters “continue” are added. With these, if the second time saving state of 100 times of time saving is set, as a chance time standby production, the rate of continuous notification production A is 10 times to 50 times of time saving while the number of pending balls is 1 or more It becomes lower than the case, and the ratio of the continuous information effect B and the continuous information effect C becomes high. Moreover, when the number of times of time saving is 10 times to 50 times, there is a possibility that the continuous notification effect D that cannot be selected is selected.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1165, in a situation where the number of times of time saving (third end condition) is set to the time saving state of 1000 times, and in the state of 0 pending fluctuation is started or fluctuation stop state (that is, the execution start timing of the last chance time standby effect in the effect period), the value of the first effect counter 223f1 is in the range of “0 to 49”. A combination of an icon with the characters "50 times", an icon with the characters "100 times", an icon with the characters "∞", and an icon with the characters "continue" is displayed. Ultimately, an effect (100 times notification effect B) in which the rabbit character 801 hits an icon to which the characters “100 times” are added is associated and defined, and the value of the first effect counter 223f1 is set to “100 times”. 50 to 64”, an icon with the characters “10 times”, an icon with the characters “100 times”, an icon with the characters “∞”, and the characters “Continue” A combination of icons marked with is displayed, and finally an effect (∞ notification effect A) is defined in association with the rabbit character 801 striking an icon marked with the letter “∞”, An icon with the characters "50 times", an icon with the characters "100 times", and an icon with the characters "∞" are added to the range of the value of the first effect counter 223f1 from "65 to 98". and an icon with the character "continue" are displayed, and finally the icon with the character "∞" is hit by the rabbit character 801 to give notification (∞ notification effect). B) is defined in association with the first effect counter 223f1 value of "99", two icons with the characters "∞" and two icons with the characters "celebration". A combination with an icon is displayed, and an effect (∞ notification effect C) is defined in association with the rabbit character 801 striking the icon with the letter "∞".

That is, even when the number of times of time saving is 1000 times, similarly to the case of 50 times or 100 times, the number of times of time saving (100 times) less than the actual number may be notified. Therefore, even if a small number of times of time saving (100 times) is notified, the player can expect that there is a possibility that a larger number of times of time saving is set.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 1165, in the situation that the number of times of time saving (third end condition) is set to the time saving state of 1000 times, and the number of pending balls is 1 or more in a state in which the deviation is started (That is, the execution start timing of the chance time standby effect executed other than the last in the effect period) is set to "10 times" for the range of the value of the first effect counter 223f1 from "0 to 49". A combination of three icons with letters and one icon with letters "Continue" is displayed, and finally the icon with letters "Continue" is beaten by the rabbit character 801. The effect (continuous notification effect A) to be notified by doing is defined in association, and the value of the first effect counter 223f1 is in the range of "50 to 74", the icon with the characters "10 times" attached, A combination of an icon with the characters "30 times", an icon with the characters "50 times", and an icon with the characters "Continued" is displayed, and finally the characters "Continued" are added. An effect (continuous notification effect B) in which the rabbit character 801 hits the selected icon is associated with and defined, and the value of the first effect counter 223f1 is set to "30 A combination of an icon with the characters "times", an icon with the characters "100 times", an icon with the characters "continue", and an icon with the characters "celebration" is displayed. An effect (continuation notification effect C) in which the rabbit character 801 hits an icon to which the characters “continued” are attached is associated and defined, and the value of the first effect counter 223f1 is set to “95 to 99”. ”, an icon with the characters “100 times”, an icon with the characters “∞”, an icon with the characters “continue”, and the characters “celebration” A combination of icons is displayed, and finally, an effect (continuation notification effect D) is defined in association with the rabbit character 801 striking an icon to which the word "continue" is added. As a result, if the second time saving state of 1000 times of time saving is set, as a chance time standby production, the rate of continuous notification production A is 10 times to 50 times of time saving while the ball is held 1 or more. It becomes lower than the case, and the ratio of the continuous information effect B and the continuous information effect C becomes high. Further, the possibility of selecting the continuous notification effect D, which cannot be selected when the number of times of time saving is 10 times to 50 times, is higher than when the number of times of time saving is 100 times.

Thus, in the 40th control example, the chance time standby effect is configured to execute the effect of notifying the number of times of time saving, and the selection ratio of the combination of icons displayed first in the notification effect is set to the number of times of time saving. By differentiating the icon accordingly, it is possible to realize a playability in which the number of times of time saving is predicted by the combination of the icons. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game during execution of the chance time standby effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1164(b), the details of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the 40th control example will be described. FIG. 1164(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in the 40th control example. As shown in FIG. 1164(b), the RAM 223 in the 40th control example has a standby effect flag 223ja and the number of times of standby effect The difference is that a counter 223jb and a waiting period timer 223jd are added. In addition, a subjugation number counter 223i, a remaining subjugation number counter 223j, a specific number of surface completed flag 223k, a rush period measurement counter 223m, a prize ball number counter 223n, a pending ream flag 223o, a round number counter 223p, and SW It is also different in that the effective time counter 223q, the right-handed flag 223r, the V-winning flag 223s, the effect fixed flag 223t, and the game environment storage area 223u are deleted.

The standby effect flag 223ja is a flag indicating whether or not the chance time standby effect (see FIGS. 1150(b) and 1151) is being executed. If it is ON, it indicates that the chance time standby effect is being executed. If it is off, it means that the chance time standby effect is not being executed. This standby effect flag 223ja is set to ON when a state command indicating that the transition to the second time saving state is received from the main controller 110 (see S3451A in FIG. 1176), at the end timing of the chance time standby effect It is set to OFF (see S5712A in FIG. 1181 and S4617A in FIG. 1182). When a new variable display effect is started while this standby effect flag 223ja is on, the above-described standby effect selection table 222ja (see FIG. 1165) is referred to to change the variable display mode accompanied by a new chance time standby effect. A display effect is set.

The standby effect frequency counter 223jb is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations during the execution period of the chance time standby effect (see FIGS. 1150(b) and 1151). The initial value of this waiting effect count counter 223jb is set to 0, and the value is updated by adding 1 each time a new effect mode is executed during the execution period of one chance time waiting effect (Fig. 1176). (see S3455A in FIG. 1181 and S5710A in FIG. 1181). In the chance time standby performance, when the standby performance frequency counter 223jb reaches 4, the performance is terminated and the normal chance time performance is started. This means that if an irregular game method is executed in which the player continues to hit to the left while the chance time waiting effect is being executed and the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is maintained at 1 or more, then the chances are endless. This is intended to prevent the time standby effect from continuing.

The waiting period timer 223jc is a timer that measures the elapsed time after the lottery of normal symbols is started in the chance time (second time saving state). The initial value of this waiting period timer 223jc is set to 0, and a timer value corresponding to 0.2 seconds is set each time a normal symbol lottery is executed after the chance time waiting effect is completed (Fig. 1179 S5608A reference), the value is subtracted and updated every time the effect update process 40 (see FIG. 1182) is executed. When this standby period timer 223jc is updated to 0, it is determined that the lottery timing of the normal symbol and the timing of the lottery start of the first special symbol are significantly different, and the normal symbol that was started 0.2 seconds before. A pseudo variation display effect for informing the lottery result of figure variation is started (see S4614A in FIG. 1182). As a result, even if the lottery timing of the first special pattern and the lottery timing of the normal pattern are deviated, the variable display effect can be executed based on the lottery result of the normal pattern with a substantially higher expectation for the big win. , a suitable presentation mode can be realized.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the 40th control example>
Next, details of various control processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the fortieth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1166 to 1173. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 1166, the details of the special symbol variation process 40 (S104A) in the 40th control example will be described. FIG. 1166 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process 40 (S104A). This special symbol variation process 40 (S104A) is similar to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 964) in the thirty-second control example described above, and the display setting of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b during the variable display of the special symbol. This is a process for performing

In each of S201 to S207 and S211 to S223 of the variable display setting process 40 (see FIG. 1166) in the fortieth control example, the variable display setting process (see FIG. 964) in the above-described thirty-second control example is performed. The same processes as those of S201 to S207 and S211 to S223 are executed. In addition, in the variable display setting process 40 (see FIG. 1166) in the 40th control example, when the process of S207 or the process of S214 ends, the special pattern determination process (see FIG. 965) in the 32nd control example The symbol determination process 40 is executed (S209A), and then the special symbol variation pattern selection process 40 is executed instead of the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 966) in the 32nd control example (S210A), and this process is performed. finish. Details of these special symbol determination processing 40 (S209A) and special symbol variation pattern selection processing 40 (S210A) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 1167 and 1168, and FIGS.

Also, in the special symbol variation process 40 (see FIG. 1166) in the 40th control example, in the process of S218, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery result of this time is not a big hit (S218: No), then, It is determined whether or not the lottery result of this time is a time-saving design winning (S225A), and if it is a time-saving design winning (S225A: Yes), the time-saving end condition corresponding to the type of time-saving design won this time is set to a time-saving counter. 223f, the small hit counter s, and the normal electric operation counter 223ja (S226A), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S225A, when it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol this time is not the time saving symbol winning (S225A: No), the process proceeds to S222.

In addition, in the special symbol variation processing 40 (see FIG. 1166) in the present 40th control example, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery result of this time is not a small hit in the processing of S222 (S222: No), or the S223 processing is When finished, instead of the time saving update process (see FIG. 968) in the thirty-second control example described above, the time saving update process 40 is executed (S224A), and this process ends. The details of this time saving update process 40 (S224A) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1167, details of the special symbol determination process 40 (S209A) described above will be described. This special symbol determination process 40 (S209A) is a process executed instead of the special symbol determination process (see FIG. 965) in the 32nd control example, and is the special symbol determination process (see FIG. 965) in the 32nd control example. Similarly, it is a process for executing a special symbol lottery. Of the special symbol determination process 40 (S209A) in this 40th control example, in each process of S301 to S305, each process of S301 to S305 of the special symbol determination process (see FIG. 965) in the 32nd control example Processing is performed.

Also, in the special symbol determination process 40 (see FIG. 1167) in the 40th control example, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery result is not a big hit in the process of S303 (S303: No), The out-of-time processing 40 for executing control is executed (S311A), and this processing ends. The details of this out-of-time processing 40 (S311A) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 1168 is a flow chart showing this process 40 (S311A) when out. In this off time process 40 (S311A), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this special symbol is a time saving design winning (S2101A), and if it is determined that the lottery result is a time saving design winning (S2101A : Yes), the time-saving design type corresponding to the value of the first winning type counter C2 is set as the time-saving design to be displayed on the first design display devices 37a and 37b (S2102A), and the process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2101A, if it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol this time is not the time-saving symbol winning (S2101A: No), then it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol of this time is a small hit. Then (S2103A), when it is determined that it is a small hit (S2103A: Yes), the lottery result of the special symbol is set to a small hit (S2104A), and the small hit type corresponding to the value of the small hit type counter C5 is It is set as a small hit symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b (S2105A), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S2103A, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery result of this time is not a small hit (S2103A: No), the processing of S2104A and S2105A is skipped and the processing is terminated as it is.

By executing this loss time process 40 (see FIG. 1168), when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss (other than a big hit), it is possible to suitably set the display of the first symbol according to the lottery result. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 1169, the details of the special symbol variation pattern selection process 40 (S210A) in the 40th control example will be described. FIG. 1169 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation pattern selection process 40 (S210A). This special symbol variation pattern selection process 40 (S210A) is similar to the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 966) in the 32nd control example described above, and selects the variation pattern of the first symbol according to the lottery result of the special symbol. This is a process for selection.

Of the special symbol variation pattern selection process 40 (see FIG. 1169) in this 40th control example, in each process of S401 to S408, each of S401 to S408 of the variation pattern selection process in the 32nd control example (see FIG. 966) The same processing as the processing is executed. In addition, in the variation pattern selection process 40 (see FIG. 1169) in the 40th control example, in the process of S401, when it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol is not a big hit (S401: No), the deviation (small hit, (Including time saving symbol winning) Outgoing time type determination processing 40 for selecting a variation pattern is executed (S421A), and the process proceeds to S403. Details of the out-of-time type determination processing 40 (S421A) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 1170 is a flow chart showing this out-time type determination processing (S421A). In the out time type determination process (S421A), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is the time saving design winning (S2201A), and if it is determined that the time saving design is winning (S2201A: Yes), time saving The type selection table 202ja (see FIG. 1163(b)) is referred to determine the type of time saving design (S2202A), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2201A, if it is determined that the special symbol lottery result is not the time-saving symbol winning (S2201A: No), then it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result is a small hit (S2203A). , If it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S2203A: Yes), the small hit type is determined by referring to the small hit type selection table 202fj (see FIG. 1163 (a)) (S2204A), and this process is performed. finish. On the other hand, in the process of S2203A, if it is determined that the lottery result of this special symbol is not a small hit (that is, normal loss (complete loss)) (S2203A: No), the process of S2204A is skipped. and terminate this process.

By executing this off time type determination processing 40 (see FIG. 1170), when the lottery result of the special symbol is a time reduction symbol winning or a small hit, it is possible to suitably determine the time reduction symbol type or the small hit type. can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1171, the details of the time saving update process 40 (S224A) in the 40th control example will be described. This time saving update process 40 (S224A) is a process executed in place of the time saving update process (see FIG. 968) in the 32nd control example. It is a process for ending the time saving state when it is determined that the time saving end condition is satisfied while updating the various counter values for doing.

Of the time saving update process 40 (see FIG. 1171) in this 40th control example, in each process of S601 to S605 and S607, respectively S601 to S605 of the time saving update process (see FIG. 968) in the 32nd control example described above, and the same processing as each processing of S607 is executed.

In addition, in the time saving update process 40 (see FIG. 1171) in the present 40th control example, when the process of S605 ends, the values of the small hit counter 203s and the normal electric operation counter 203ja are reset (set) to 0 (S621A) , the process proceeds to S607. The processing of this S621A is executed instead of S606 of the time saving update processing (see FIG. 968) in the 32nd control example is simply the special figure 2 counter for determining the third end condition in the 32nd control example In place of 203t, this 40th control example is modified by providing a general electric operation counter 203ja. That is, in the 32nd control example, a time saving end condition was established when the number of lotteries of the second special symbol reached the specified number of times, but in the 40th control example, instead of this, the normal symbol hit This is a change due to the provision of a time-saving end condition that is established when the number of game executions reaches a specified number of times.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1171, in the time saving update process 40 (see FIG. 1171) in the present 40th control example, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not decremented to 0 in the process of S604 (S604 : No), then, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the variation display that is the current variation stop timing is a small hit (S622A), and if it is determined that it is not a small hit (S622A: No ), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S622A, if it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the current fluctuation display is a small hit (S622A: Yes), first, to set the start of the small hit game The small hit start flag 203n is set to ON (S623A), and then the value of the small hit counter 203s is subtracted by 1 (S624A).

When the processing of S624A ends, then it is determined whether or not the value of the small hit counter 203s is decremented to 0 (S625A), and if it is determined that the value of the small hit counter 203s is decremented to 0 (S625A: Yes ), which means that the time saving end condition (second end condition) based on the fact that the number of small hits has reached the specified number of times has been established, so that each process of S626A to S628A for ending the time saving state is executed. More specifically, the game state is set to the normal state by updating the data in the game state storage area 203g to the data corresponding to the normal state (S626A), and each value of the time reduction counter 203h and the general electric operation counter 203ja is changed. By resetting (setting) to 0, the time saving end condition is cleared (S627A). Next, a state command indicating a normal state is set (S628A), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S625, if it is determined that the value of the small hit counter 203s is not subtracted to 0 (S625A: No), it means that the second end condition is not satisfied, so S626A This process is terminated by skipping the processes from S628A.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1172, the normal symbol variation process 40 (S106A) in the 40th control example will be described. This normal design variation process 40 (S106A) is a process executed in place of the normal design variation process (see FIG. 972) in the 32nd control example described above, and is similar to the normal design variation process (see FIG. 972). This is a process for executing the lottery for normal symbols and setting the opening/closing control of the electric accessary 640a when the normal symbols are won. FIG. 1172 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process 40 (S106A).

Of the normal symbol variation processing 40 (see FIG. 1772) in this 40th control example, in each of the processes of S1101 to S1108, S1111, S1115 to S1117, and S1121, the normal symbol variation processing in the 32nd control example described above (Figure 972) are executed.

In addition, in the normal symbol variation process 40 (see FIG. 1172) in the 40th control example, in the process of S1108, the value of the time reduction counter 203h is a value greater than 0 (that is, the current game state is the first or second (S1108: Yes), the second per random number table 202cj for the time saving state (see FIG. 1161 (a)) to obtain the lottery result of the normal symbol (S1131A), The process proceeds to S1111. On the other hand, in the processing of S1108, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not a value greater than 0 (that is, the current game state is the normal state) (S1108: No), the normal state for the With reference to the random number table 202cj (see FIG. 1161(a)) per 2, the lottery result of the normal symbol is obtained (S1132A), and the process proceeds to S1111.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1172, in the normal symbol variation process 40 (see FIG. 1172) in the 40th control example, in the process of S1111, when it is determined that the current normal symbol lottery result is a normal symbol win To (S1111: Yes), the normal pattern hit type is specified and the normal pattern hit time process for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the hit type is executed (S1133A), and the process proceeds to S1134A. The details of the processing (S1133A) at the time of this general pattern will be described later with reference to FIG. 1173(a). In the process of S1133A or the process of S1134A executed after the process of S1113 is completed, the variation time is set to 1 second (S1134A), and this process is terminated.

In addition, in the normal symbol variation process 40 (see FIG. 1172) in the present 40th control example, in the process of S1117, when it is determined that the current normal symbol lottery result is the normal symbol lottery result, first, A third end condition determination process for determining whether or not a time saving end condition (third end condition) is established based on the number of hits of normal symbols is executed (S1135A). Details of the third termination condition determination process (S1135A) will be described later with reference to FIG. 1173(b). When the processing of S1135A is completed, it is then determined whether or not the normal pattern hit of this time is the normal pattern hit A (S1136A), and if it is determined that the normal pattern hit of this time is the normal pattern hit A (S1136A: Yes), the displacement pattern of the electric accessary 640a is set to the first displacement pattern for A per normal figure (that is, the displacement pattern that makes it impossible to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640). After setting (S1137A), the process proceeds to S1121. On the other hand, in the processing of S1136, if it is determined that the hit of the normal symbol this time is not the normal pattern hit A (that is, the normal pattern hit B) (S1136A: No), the displacement pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set to the second displacement pattern for the normal figure B (that is, the displacement pattern that allows the game ball to be easily entered into the second ball entrance 640 and substantially determines the jackpot winning). (S1138A), the process proceeds to S1121.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1173(a), the details of the process (S1133A) at the time of the above-described general pattern will be described. FIG. 1173(a) is a flow chart showing the process (S1133A) at the time of this general pattern. When this general pattern hit time process (S1133A) is executed, first, with reference to the general pattern per type selection table 202jb (see FIG. 1163 (c)), the general pattern per type according to the current game state is determined (S2301A), and then set a command per general pattern for notifying the determined per general pattern type to the audio lamp control device 113 (S2302A). Per normal figure command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 201, transmitted toward the audio lamp control device 113 be done. The voice lamp control device 113, when receiving the general pattern per command, specifies the normal pattern per type from the general pattern per command, and performs effect control in consideration of the specified per type. In particular, in a time-saving state in which it is possible to win a normal pattern win B in which a big win is substantially determined, a performance indicating whether or not a normal pattern win B is executed every time a lottery of normal patterns is executed. After the processing of S2302A ends, the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 for indicating the normal pattern hit is set (S2303A), and this processing ends.

By executing this normal figure per time process (see FIG. 1173 (a)), it is possible to determine the normal figure per type at a rate corresponding to the game state (normal state, first time saving state, second time saving state) can. That is, since the probability of the normal pattern hit B in which the big win is substantially determined can be varied according to the game state, it is possible to form a game state with different substantial big win probabilities.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1173(b), details of the above-described third termination condition determination process (S1135A) will be described. FIG. 1173(b) is a flow chart showing this third termination condition determination process (S1135A). As shown in FIG. 1173(b), when the third end condition determination process (S1135A) is executed, first, whether the counter value of the normal electric operation counter 203ja is greater than 0 (1 or more) Yes) or not (S2331A), and if it is determined that the counter value of the general electric operation counter 203j is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S2331A: No), the current gaming state is the normal state , which means that there is no need to determine whether the third termination condition is satisfied or not, so the processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2331A, if it is determined that the value of the general electric operation counter 203ja is a value greater than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (S2331A: Yes), the current gaming state is a time saving state (first time saving state or second time saving state), then the value of the normal electric operation counter 203ja is updated by subtracting 1 (S2332A), and the value of the normal electric operation counter 203ja after the subtraction is updated to 0. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S2333A). In the processing of S2333A, when it is determined that the counter value of the normal electric operation counter 203ja has been updated to 0 (S2333A: Yes), it is determined that the third end condition is satisfied, and S2334 to S2336 for ending the time saving state Execute each process of Specifically, the game state is set to the normal state by updating the data in the game state storage area 203g to the data corresponding to the normal state (S2334A), and then the values of the time reduction counter 203h and the small hit counter 203s are set together. It is reset to 0 (S2335A). Next, a state command indicating a normal state is set (S2336A), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S2333A, if it is determined that the counter value of the general electric operation counter 203ja after subtraction has not been updated to 0 (updated to a value of 1 or more) (S2333A: No), the third It is determined that the end condition is not satisfied, the processes of S2334A to S2336A are skipped, and the present process is ended.

By executing this third end condition determination process (see FIG. 1173(b)), the time saving state can be terminated when the number of executions of the normal symbol winning game reaches the prescribed number of times. As a result, even if the player continues to hit to the right in which the lottery of the first special symbol cannot be executed in the time saving state, the time saving state can be terminated by executing the normal symbol winning game of the prescribed number of times. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of the problem that the time saving state continues until the normal hit B is achieved without fail even if the player continuously hits to the right.

<Regarding the control process of the audio ramp control device in the 40th control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1174 to 1182, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the 40th control example will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 1174, details of the command determination process 40 (S3113A) in the 40th control example will be described. This command determination process 40 (S3113A) is a process executed instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 983) in the thirty-second control example described above. This is processing for executing control according to the types of various commands received from 110 .

In the processes of S3201 to S3211, S3213, and S3218 of the command determination process 40 (see FIG. 1174) in the 40th control example, S3201 to S3211, S3211 and S3211 of the command determination process (see FIG. 983) in the 32nd control example, respectively. The same processing as each processing of S3213 and S3218 is executed. Further, in the command determination processing 40 (see FIG. 1174) in the 40th control example, if it is determined in the processing of S3211 that a state command has been received (S3211: Yes), the state command processing in the 32nd control example (see FIG. 985), the status command process 40 is executed (S3231A), and this process ends. The details of this state command processing 40 (S3231A) will be described later with reference to time 1175 and FIG.

Also, in the command determination process 40 (see FIG. 1174) in the 40th control example, when it is determined that a hit-related command has been received in the process of S3213 (S3213: Yes), the hit-related process in the 32nd control example (See FIG. 986) instead, the hit-related process 40 is executed (S3232A), and this process ends. Although illustration is omitted, in this winning related process 40 (S3232A), the big winning related process 40 (S3504) is replaced with the winning related process (see FIG. 986) in the thirty-second control example. S3504A) is executed, and the only difference is that the small hit related process 40 (S3508A) is executed instead of the small hit related process (S3508). Details of these jackpot related processing 40 (S3504A) and small winning related processing 40 (S3508A) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 1177 and 1178, respectively.

On the other hand, in the process of S3213, if it is determined that the command received from the main controller 110 does not include a hit-related command (S3213: No), then the command received from the main controller 110 It is determined whether or not the command per normal pattern is included (S3233A), and if it is determined that the command per normal pattern is included (S3233A: Yes), the control according to the type per normal pattern that is notified Execute command processing per normal figure for performing (S3234A), and terminate this processing. On the other hand, in the process of S3233A, if it is determined that the command received from the main controller 110 does not include the general pattern hit command (S3233A: No), the process proceeds to S3218.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1175, details of the state command process 40 (S3231A) described above will be described. This state command process 40 (S3231A) is, as described above, a process executed instead of the state command process (see FIG. 985) in the thirty-second control example. This is a process for performing control according to the game state notified by the command.

In the state command processing 40 (see FIG. 1175) in the 40th control example, the processing of S3401 and S3402 is the processing of S3401 and S3402 of the state command processing (see FIG. 985) in the 32nd control example. The same processing is performed. In the state command processing 40 (see FIG. 1175) in the 40th control example, when it is determined in the processing of S3402 that the state command received this time is a state command for notifying transition to the normal state (S3402: Yes), set the display back image command for setting the back image for the normal state (S3421A), clear the information stored in the time saving information update area 223h (S3422A), and end this process. . If the transition timing to the normal state is the start timing of B per normal pattern, the first suggestion effect based on winning per normal pattern B (Aim for V above, see FIG. 1152 (b)) Since the back image is set in the layer on the front side of the back image, the back image for the normal state becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize, and the player can be made to pay attention to the first suggestive effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S3402, if it is determined that the state command received this time is not a state command that notifies the transition to the normal state (S3402: No), then the state command indicating the transition to the first time saving state It is determined whether there is (S3423A), and if it is determined that it is a state command indicating the transition to the first time saving state (S3423A: Yes), the time saving information included in the received state command is stored in the time saving information storage area 223h (S3424A), sets a display command indicating that the rush is in progress (S3425A), and terminates this process. On the other hand, in the process of S3423A, if it is determined that the state command received this time is not a state command that notifies the transition to the first time saving state (S3423A: No), then the received state command is the second time saving Determining whether it is a state command that notifies the transition to the state (S3426A), and if it is determined that it is a state command that notifies the transition to the second time saving state (S3426A: Yes), the received state command is stored in the time saving information storage area 223h (S3424A), and a display command indicating the rear image for the chance time standby effect is set (S3428A). Next, a standby effect setting process for setting the effect mode of the chance time standby effect is executed (S3429A), and this process ends. The details of this standby effect setting process (S3429A) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S3426A, if it is determined that the received state command is not a state command to notify the transition to the second time saving state (S3426A: No), the processing of S3427A ~ S3429A is skipped, and this process is carried out as it is. finish.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1176, the details of the standby effect setting process (S3429A) described above will be described. FIG. 1176 is a flow chart showing this standby effect setting process (S3429A). In this standby effect setting process (S3429A), first, the standby effect flag 223ja is set to ON (S3451A), and then it is determined whether or not the number of pending balls of the first special symbol is 0 (S3452A). In the process of S3452A, if it is determined that the number of pending balls of the first special symbol is 0 (S3452A: Yes), the effect mode corresponding to the current time saving type (time saving number of times) is set to the standby effect selection table 222ja (Fig. 1165 reference) is specified (S3453A), and execution of the standby effect of the specified effect mode is set (S3454A). Next, 1 is set to the value of the standby effect number counter 223jb (S3455A), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S3452A, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is not 0 (1 or more) (S3452A), the processing of S3453A to S3455A is skipped, and this processing is performed as it is. finish. When there is a ball on hold, it is sufficient to set the standby effect as the effect mode of the variable display effect to be executed in synchronism with the variable display of the first special symbol based on the ball on hold, and the effect mode is set in this process. This is because there is no need to

By executing this standby effect setting process (see FIG. 1176), when the transition to the second time saving state in a situation where the holding ball of the first special symbol does not exist, depending on the second time saving state type (time saving number of times) It is possible to execute the chance time standby effect of the effect mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1177, the details of the jackpot related process 40 (S3504A) described above will be described. This jackpot-related process 40 (S3504A) is a process executed instead of the jackpot-related process (see FIG. 987) in the thirty-second control example described above. This is a process for performing control according to the type of the received command when various commands are received.

The jackpot-related processing 40 (see FIG. 1177) in the 40th control example is different from the jackpot-related processing (see FIG. 987) in the 32nd control example, but the processing of S3601, S3602, S3608, S3609, S3611, and S3612 is deleted. The only difference is that This is because various effects during the jackpot are deleted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1178, details of the small hit related process 40 (S3508A) in the 40th control example will be described. This small hit related process 40 (S3508A) is a process executed instead of the small hit related process 40 (see FIG. 989) in the thirty-second control example described above. FIG. 1178 is a flow chart showing this small hit related process 40 (S3508A).

Of the small hit related processing 40 (see FIG. 1178) in this 40th control example, in each process of S4201, S4206, and S4211, S4201, The same processing as each processing of S4206 and S4211 is executed. In addition, in the small hit related process 40 (see FIG. 1178) in the 40th control example, in the process of S4201, when it is determined that the small hit start command is received (S4201: Yes), the lower V is aimed at production ( The start of the second suggestive effect (see FIG. 1154(a)) is set (S4221A), and this process ends. By executing the effect of aiming for the lower V (second suggestive effect), the player can shoot the game ball aiming at the V winning device 650 by striking to the right during execution of the small winning game. During the open period of the open/close door 650f1 in the small winning game, the game ball can be reliably entered into the V winning device 650 and entered into the specific area 650e3.

In addition, in the small hit related process 40 (see FIG. 1178) in the 40th control example, when it is determined that the small hit end command is received in the process of S4206 (S4206: Yes), the small hit this time is the first A small hit game executed in the time saving state (strictly speaking, after the normal pattern B is started in the first time saving state and falls to the normal state, the second entrance during the opening period of the normal pattern B 640 (S4222A). In the process of S4222A, if it is determined that it is a small winning game executed in the first time saving state (S4222A: Yes), despite winning a small winning in the first time saving state (rush), the player It means that the game ball did not pass through the specific area 650e3 during the small winning game due to not hitting right, etc., and since it will shift to the normal state, it is necessary to execute the effect indicating the end of the rush. A small hit end command for display is set (S4223A), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S4222A, it was determined that it is not a small winning game executed in the first time saving state (it is a small winning game executed based on winning the normal figure B in the second time saving state) In the case (S4222A: No), the game ball passes through the specific area 650e3 during the small winning game due to the fact that the player did not hit to the right even though the small winning was won in the first time saving state (rush). It means that it did not, and since it will shift to the normal state, a display small winning end command for executing an effect indicating the end of the chance tim is set (S4224A), and this processing is ended. .

In addition, in the small hit related process in the 40th control example, when it is determined that the V passing command is received in the process of S4211 (S4211: Yes), a display command for executing an effect indicating the winning of the big hit After setting (S4225A), this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1179, the details of the general pattern per command process (S3234A) in the 40th control example will be described. As described above, this general pattern per command process (S3234A) is a process for performing control according to the normal pattern per type notified by the general pattern per command. FIG. 1179 is a flow chart showing this general pattern per command process (S3234A).

As shown in Figure 1179, in the general pattern per command process (S3234A), first, it is determined whether the current game state is the first time saving state based on the data stored in the secondary game state storage area 223g. Then (S5601A), if it is determined that it is in the first time saving state (S5601A: Yes), then according to the general figure per type notified by the general figure per command, the rabbit character 801 selects the type of treasure box 1154(b), 155), the type of treasure box to be selected is determined by lottery (S5602A). Execute (S5603A). In addition, in the lottery by the processing of this S5602A, for example, when the lottery result of this time is A, the normal treasure box 810b is selected at a rate of 80%, and the small treasure box 810c is selected at a rate of 20%. On the other hand, in the case of a normal hit B, a lottery is performed so that a shining treasure box is selected at a rate of 35%, a normal treasure box 810b is selected at a rate of 55%, and a small treasure box 810c is selected at a rate of 10%. Content is specified. As a result, when the shining treasure box 810a is selected, it is determined that the winning of the general pattern B that substantially determines the jackpot, while when the small treasure box 810c is selected, it is a disadvantageous general pattern. Since the possibility of A increases, it is possible to make the game more focused on the type of treasure box selected by the rabbit character 801 . Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5601A, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not the first time saving state (S5601A: No), then it is determined whether the current gaming state is the second time saving state (S5604A ), If it is determined that it is not in the second time-saving state (S5604A: No), it means that you have won the normal pattern in the normal state where you cannot win the normal pattern B, and the production based on the fluctuation of the normal pattern Since it means that it is a game state that does not need to be set, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S5604A, if it is determined that the current gaming state is the second time saving state (S5604A: Yes), whether the standby production flag 223ja is on (that is, the execution period of the chance time standby production It is determined whether or not (S5605A), and if it is determined that the standby effect flag 223ja is ON (that is, it is during the execution period of the chance time standby effect) (S5605A: Yes), then this time It is determined whether or not the lottery result is a normal pattern B (S5606A), and if it is determined that it is a normal pattern B (S5606A: Yes), the result of the chance time standby effect being executed is “celebration ” (suggestive pattern) is rewritten and set to a selected effect mode (S5607A), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S5606A, if it is determined that the normal pattern per this time is not per normal pattern B (that is, per normal pattern A) (S5606A: No), the process of S5607A is skipped, and this End the process.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5605A, if it is determined that the standby effect flag 223ja is off (that is, it is not during the execution period of the chance time standby effect) (S5605A: No), 0.2 is set to the standby period timer 223jc. A timer value corresponding to seconds is set (S5608A), and this processing ends. By executing this general pattern per command process (see FIG. 1179), it is possible to set the effect mode according to the lottery result of the normal pattern.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1180, the details of the variable effect setting process 40 (S4304A) in the 40th control example will be described. This variable effect setting process 40 (S4304A) is a process executed in place of the variable effect setting process (see FIG. 995) in the thirty-second control example described above, and is similar to the variable effect setting process (see FIG. 995). This is a process for setting the effect mode of the variable display effect of the third symbol to be executed in the third symbol display device 81 in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol.

Of the variable effect setting process 40 (see FIG. 1180) in this 40th control example, in each process of S4401 and S4403, in each of S4401 and S4403 of the variable effect setting process (see FIG. 995) in the 32nd control example The same processing as the processing is executed. In addition, in the fluctuation effect setting process 40 (see FIG. 1180) in the present 40th control example, in the process of S4403, the fluctuation display effect to be started based on the fluctuation pattern command received this time is based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. When it is determined that it is a variable display effect (S4403: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit B40 (S4412A). That is, it is determined whether or not it is a small hit type in which a 3-round big hit with a small number of rounds (disadvantageous) is executed when the game ball enters the specific area 650e3 (S4412A), and the second special symbol If it is determined that the lottery result is not a small hit B40 (that is, the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit A40, and in any case, the advantageous 10-round big win is executed) ( S4412A: No), as the variable display effect of the second special symbol, determine the variable display mode accompanied by the promotion effect (see Figure 1153) of the effect mode that succeeds in promotion (S4413A), and finish this process. On the other hand, in the processing of S4412A, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is a disadvantageous small hit B40 (S4412A: Yes), as the second special symbol fluctuation display effect, the effect mode of failing in promotion A variable display mode accompanied by a promotion effect is determined (S4414A), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4403, if it is determined that the variable display effect to be started based on the variation pattern command received this time is not the variable display effect based on the variable display of the second special symbol (S4403: No), Next, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a normal state (S4415A), and if it is determined to be a normal state (S4415A: Yes), the lottery result notified by the variation pattern command received this time, Based on the variation pattern extracted from the variation pattern command, the variation display mode of the variation display effect is determined (S4416A), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S4415A, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not the normal state (S4415A: No), at the start timing of the variable display effect of the first special symbol during the chance time (second time saving state) Since it means that there is, a chance time effect setting process for setting the effect mode during the chance time is executed (S4417A), and this process ends. Details of the effect setting process (S4417A) during chance time will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 1181 is a flow chart showing the effect setting process during chance time (S4417A). As shown in FIG. 1181, when this chance time effect setting process (S4417A) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the standby effect flag 223ja is ON (S5701A), and the standby effect flag 223ja is OFF. If it is determined that there is (S5701A: No), it means that the chance time standby effect (see FIGS. 1150(b) and 1151) is not being executed, and the normal symbol lottery and the first special symbol lottery are not performed. Since there is a high possibility of forming a state in which they are executed almost simultaneously, it is determined whether the value of the waiting period timer 223jc is greater than 0 (S5702A), and the value of the waiting period timer 223jc is greater than 0. If it is determined that it is not a value (that is, 0) (S5702A: No), although the chance time has already entered, the lottery timing of the general pattern and the first special symbol is a relatively long time (at least 0.2 seconds or more), and means that a pseudo variable display effect for showing the lottery result of normal symbols is preferentially executed as a variable display effect, First, it is determined whether or not the normal pattern corresponding to the normal pattern B is currently being displayed in a variable display (S5703A). ), Since a pseudo-performing variation effect for showing the normal pattern B should already be set, without setting (overwriting) the variable display effect for indicating the lottery result of this special symbol, This process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5703, if it is determined that the normal symbol corresponding to the normal pattern B is not currently displayed in a variable display (S5703A: No), a pseudo-off variation effect for showing the normal pattern per A Since there is a high possibility that is being executed, next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this special symbol is a big hit (S5704A). (S5705A), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S5704A, when it is determined that the lottery result of this special symbol is out (S5704A: No), the process of S5705A is skipped and the process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5702A, if it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer 223jc is greater than 0 (S5702A: Yes), immediately after the normal symbol lottery is started (within 0.2 seconds) Since it means that the lottery of the first special symbol has been started and that it is a normal operation in the chance time, then, the lottery result of the normal symbol corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol being executed and The effect mode corresponding to the lottery result of the first special symbol this time is determined (S5706A), the value of the waiting period timer 223jc is reset to 0 (S5707A), and this process is terminated. By the processing of S5706A, it is possible to set a variable display mode that takes into consideration the lottery result of the normal symbol, and whether the normal symbol B per lot determined at a rate of 3% in the normal symbol lottery is determined or 1/320. If the jackpot of the probability special pattern is won, the variable display mode is set in which the same third patterns are arranged as in the case of the jackpot, so that the apparent probability of the first special pattern is high in the chance time. It is possible to realize a novel behavior as if it had become. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the processing of S5701A, when it is determined that the standby effect flag 223ja is ON (S5701A: Yes), with reference to the standby effect selection table 222ja (see FIG. 1165), the lottery result of this time is set. The number of time reductions in the second time reduction state and the number of reserved balls of the current first special symbol are determined (S5708A), and the value of the standby performance number counter 223jb is updated by adding 1 (S5709A). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the waiting effect number counter 223jb after the addition has reached 4 (S5710A), and if it is determined that it has become 4 (S5710: Yes), the waiting effect flag 223ja is set to OFF. (S5711A), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5710A, when it is determined that the value of the waiting effect number counter 223jb after addition is not 4 (S5710A: No), the process of S5711A is skipped and the process ends as it is. By executing the processes of S5710A and S5711A, the number of fluctuations in the chance time standby effect can be limited to four times at maximum, so that the player hits left during the chance time standby effect to hold the first special symbol. Even if the ball does not break, it is possible to prevent the chance time standby effect from continuing endlessly.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1182, details of the rendering update process 40 (S3112A) in the 40th control example will be described. This effect update process 40 (S3112A) is a process executed in place of the effect update process (see FIG. 997) in the thirty-second control example described above. This is a process for updating.

In effect update processing 40 (see FIG. 1182) in this 40th control example, first, it is determined whether or not the timer value of the waiting period timer 223jc is greater than 0 (S4611A), and the timer value of the waiting period timer 223jc is determined. is greater than 0 (S4611A: Yes), then the value of the waiting period timer is updated by subtracting it (S4612A), and the timer value of the waiting period timer 223jc after the update is 0. (S4613A). In the processing of S4613A, if it is determined that the value of the waiting period timer 223jc has been updated to 0 (S4613A: Yes), even if a predetermined period (0.2 seconds) has passed since the normal symbol lottery was executed, the first It means that the lottery for the 1 special symbol has not started, and the lottery for the normal symbol and the lottery for the 1st special symbol are performed almost at the same time. The pseudo-variation performance of the performance mode according to the lottery result of the normal pattern fluctuation is executed in the period until the end of the normal pattern winning based on the fluctuation display of the normal pattern being executed (S4614A), and this processing is finished. On the other hand, in the process of S4613A, when it is determined that the value of the waiting period timer 223jc after updating is not 0 (S4613A: No), the lottery for the normal symbol and the lottery for the first special symbol are performed almost simultaneously. Since it cannot be determined whether or not the motion is out of the basic motion of the chance time, the processing of S4614A is skipped and the present processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4611A, if it is determined that the value of the waiting period timer 223jc is 0 (S4611A: No), it is determined whether or not it is time to end the chance time standby effect (S4615A). If it is determined that it is time to end the time standby effect (S4615A: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current state is the fluctuation stop state (S4616A). In the processing of S4616A, when it is determined that the fluctuation is stopped (S4616A: Yes), when the time-saving symbol is won, the chance time standby effect is executed for 5 seconds with the first special symbol reserved ball being 0, and the reserved ball is executed. Since this means that the chance time standby effect has ended while the number remains 0, the standby effect flag 223ja is set to OFF (S4617A), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S4615A, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the standby effect (S4615A: No), and if it is determined that it is not in the fluctuation stop state in the processing of S4616A (S4616A: No), the processing of S4617A is skipped, and the present process is terminated as it is.

By executing this effect update process 40 (see FIG. 1182), the operation deviates from the basic operation that the lottery for the normal symbol and the lottery for the first special symbol are executed almost simultaneously in the chance time. In the case, a normal pattern with a substantial jackpot probability (per normal pattern B determination ratio) of 3%, preferentially over the variable display effect for showing the lottery result of the first special pattern with a jackpot probability of 1/320. Since it is possible to execute a pseudo-fluctuation effect for indicating the result of the lottery, a more suitable effect mode can be realized.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 40th control example, as a time saving state more advantageous than the normal state, the first time saving state with a high substantial jackpot probability and the substantial jackpot probability are higher than the first time saving state It is configured to be able to form a second time saving state that is low and higher than the normal state (the advantage is lower than the first time saving state and the advantage is higher than the normal state). More specifically, as one type of game state after the end of the jackpot, while the first time-saving state can be set, when the time-saving pattern is won in the special symbol lottery, the second time-saving state is set. It consists of In addition, in this 40th control example, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, at a rate of 100%, either a big win or a small win in which the big win is substantially confirmed is won (second special When the lottery of the pattern is executed, the jackpot is substantially confirmed), while depending on the type of the time saving state, the second special symbol lottery opportunity is set until the time saving state ends. The configuration is such that the possibility of entering a ball into the second ball entrance 640 is made different. That is, in the 40th control example, when the normal symbol lottery is executed, the normal symbol is won at a rate of 100% regardless of the game state, and then the second ball entrance 640 is entered. It is possible to enter the game ball (that is, the jackpot is substantially determined) per normal pattern (per normal pattern B) is determined. , High probability (80% ratio) in the first time saving state, by setting the probability (3% ratio) between the first time saving state and the normal state in the second time saving state, Normal design for each game state It is configured to vary the jackpot probability when the lottery is executed. As a result, the degree of expectation for a big win in the case where the lottery of normal symbols is executed can be varied for each game state, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the 40th control example, the game ball entering the first ball entrance 64, which triggers the first special symbol lottery, always passes before entering the first ball entrance 64. A central through gate 67c, which triggers the drawing of normal symbols, is arranged at a position (above the first entrance 64), and the drawing of normal symbols starts before the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. It is configured so that the period from when it is done until the winning of the normal symbol based on the lottery of the normal symbol is completed is shorter. In other words, every time the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, the lottery for the normal symbol is also executed almost at the same time (immediately before the lottery for the first special symbol is executed). In addition, a right through gate 67r is separately provided at a position through which a game ball can pass when hit to the right, which triggers a normal pattern lottery. The ratio of passing through the gate 67c and the ratio of passing through the right through gate 67r of the game ball shot by hitting to the right are substantially the same. As a result, especially in the second time-saving state, it is better to execute the lottery of the normal symbols and the lottery of the first special symbols almost simultaneously by hitting the left rather than executing only the lottery of the normal symbols by hitting the right. It is constructed so as to increase the possibility of winning a jackpot during the time-saving state. Specifically, when hitting to the right in the second time-saving state, the normal pattern lottery is about 3% per normal pattern B (game ball can enter the second ball entrance 640 The jackpot is only achieved when the electric accessory 640a is displaced in the second displacement pattern (normal pattern hit) (it is possible to execute the lottery of the second special pattern that substantially confirms the jackpot). , In the case of left-handed, in addition to the possibility of winning the normal symbol lottery B (performed by displacing the electric accessory 640a in the second displacement pattern) in the normal symbol lottery, in addition to the possibility of winning the first special symbol lottery Since there is a possibility of winning a jackpot, the game can be played by hitting to the left in the second time-saving state. Then, as described above, when hitting left, the game ball that has passed through the central through gate 67c always enters the first ball entrance 64, and the lottery for the normal symbol and the lottery for the first special symbol are almost simultaneously performed. Since it is executed, the substantial jackpot probability per lottery of the first special symbol increases (substantially, the probability of the first special symbol jackpot is about 1/320, and the second displacement pattern is It becomes about 1/30 which is the combined probability with about 1/33 which is the probability of winning the set normal symbols, which is about 1/30, which is a very novel game property. In other words, a plurality of game states (normal state, and the second time-saving state), it is possible to realize a novel game property that the substantial jackpot probability can be changed, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this 40th control example, as one of the time saving end conditions, the end condition (third end condition) based on the number of executions of the game per normal pattern is defined. More specifically, in the first time-saving state, the time-saving state is terminated by executing the winning game of the normal symbol once, and in the second time-saving state, the type of the winning time-saving symbol. It is configured so that the time-saving state ends when the normal symbol winning game is executed 10 times to 1000 times. The reason for this is that, in the 40th control example, the board structure allows only the normal symbol lottery to be executed without executing the first special symbol lottery by hitting to the right, and Since it is a game property that the jackpot is substantially confirmed by winning the normal pattern B, the end condition (first end condition) based on the number of special symbol lotteries and the end condition (first end condition) based on the number of times the small winning game is executed (second 2 end condition) is specified as the time saving end condition, if you continue to hit the right after moving to the first time saving state or the second time saving state, the jackpot will be substantially confirmed until you win the normal pattern B This is because there is a problem that the time saving state continues. Therefore, in this 40th control example, as the time saving end condition, the end condition (third end condition) based on the number of executions of the normal symbol winning game is defined, and the right hitting is continued in the time saving state, and the special symbol is executed. Even if the lottery is not performed at all, the time-saving state is terminated by executing the regular pattern winning game over the prescribed number of times. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the problem that the time-saving state always continues until the normal drawing B is won (that is, substantially until the jackpot is won).

In addition, in this 40th control example, in the second time saving state, when executing the variable display effect for showing the lottery result of the first special symbol, the effect that takes into account the lottery result of the normal symbol executed immediately before that. It is configured to set the mode. That is, when the normal pattern lottery wins the normal pattern winning B that substantially determines the jackpot, even if the lottery result of the first special pattern is out, it is difficult to distinguish from the variable display mode that notifies the jackpot. It is configured to execute a variable display effect of a different effect mode. By constructing in this way, the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the normal symbol can be notified collectively by one variable display performance, so the apparent probability of big win in the one variable display performance. can make the player think as if the Therefore, it is possible to further improve the player's interest in the game, and to realize a suitable presentation mode. Furthermore, in the second time saving state in the 40th control example, the operation deviated from the basic operation that the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the normal symbol are executed almost simultaneously (the timing of the lottery of the first special symbol is the normal symbol (Operation deviated from the lottery timing of at least 0.2 seconds), the lottery result of the normal symbol is preferentially notified rather than the lottery result of the first special symbol by the variable display effect. . In other words, a pseudo-variation display effect is executed based on the execution of the lottery of the normal symbols, and when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed during the execution of the pseudo-variation display effect, the first Variation to notify that the lottery result of 1 special symbol is a big hit and the pseudo variation display effect being executed is off (a normal symbol hit A that is impossible (difficult) to enter the second ball entrance 640) Only in the case of the display effect, it is configured to set the effect mode in which the lottery result (jackpot) of the first special symbol is notified. By constructing in this way, the lottery result of the normal pattern with a substantial high probability of big win can be reported preferentially over the result of the lottery of the first special pattern with a low probability of substantial big win, which is more preferable. It is possible to realize a production mode.

In this 40th control example, the ratio of game balls passing through the through gate (central through gate 67c or right through gate 67r) is substantially the same for left-handed and right-handed players, but this is not the only option. It is not something that can be done. For example, the percentage of game balls shot to the right that pass through the right through gate 67r is higher than the percentage of game balls shot to the left that pass the left through gate 67c (for example, two ball shots to the right). , one game ball passes through the right through gate 67r every time one game ball is shot). When configured in this way, it is possible to realize a game property that allows the player to select a game method in the first time saving state or the second time saving state. In other words, when left-handed in the time-saving state, the frequency of executing the lottery of normal symbols is low (every 10 to 15 game balls are fired by left-handed, the frequency is about once). Since the lottery for the first special symbol is executed each time the lottery for the normal symbol is executed, not only the normal symbol corresponding to the second displacement pattern is won in the lottery for the normal symbol, but also the first special It can be expected that it will be a big hit in the lottery of the pattern. On the other hand, when hitting to the right in the time saving state, the frequency of executing the lottery of normal symbols increases (the frequency is about to be executed once every time two game balls are fired by hitting to the right), While the lottery efficiency of the normal symbols in the time saving state can be enhanced, the lottery of the first special pattern is not executed, so that the possibility of winning the jackpot during the time saving state can be realized. . Therefore, depending on the game method in the time saving state (whether to hit left or right), the possibility that the player will win a big hit during the time saving state is relatively high, but the lottery efficiency of normal symbols is poor. (It takes a relatively long time to digest the time-saving state, and a relatively large number of waste balls are generated.) The playability and the lottery efficiency of normal patterns are improved, but there is a possibility of a big hit during the time-saving state. It is possible to realize a very novel game property that allows the user to select a relatively low game property (the degree of expectation for a big win is reduced by the amount of 1/320, which is the probability of a big win for the first special symbol). Therefore, since each player can select a game property that matches his or her taste, a game property that matches the tastes of more players can be realized, and the interest of the player in the game is further improved. can be made

In this 40th control example, the first time-saving state is configured as a game state that can be set as a game state after the end of the big hit, and the second time-saving state is configured as a game state that is set when a time-saving pattern is won. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the first time-saving state may be set in part or all when the time-saving pattern is won, or the second time-saving state may be set as the game state after the end of the big win. may

In this 40th control example, the first time saving state and the second time saving state, by differentiating the ratio of determining the general figure hit B that substantially determines the jackpot, the normal state and the first time saving state , and the second time-saving state, the substantial jackpot probabilities are made different from each other, but the method of making the substantial jackpot probabilities different is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to provide three types of states with different jackpot probabilities of special symbols. That is, the normal state in which the special pattern jackpot probability is about 1/320, the first time-saving state in which the special pattern jackpot probability is about 1/1.25, and the special pattern jackpot probability is about 1/30. A second time saving state may be formed. With this configuration, at least the central through gate 67c can be eliminated, so that the board configuration can be simplified.

In the 40th control example, while the right-handed hitting is notified in the first time-saving state, the left-handed hitting is notified in the second time-saving state. good. That is, even in the second time-saving state, if left-handed hitting is performed, the possibility of winning a big hit increases as much as the lottery of the first special symbol can be executed, so the left-handed hitting slightly increases the degree of advantage. . Therefore, the player's advantage degree can be improved by informing the left-handed hit in the second time-saving state.

In this 40th control example, as the time saving end condition, the first end condition established based on the total number of times of lottery of special symbols becoming the specified number of times, and the number of small hit winnings based on the specified number of times , and the third end condition, which is established when the number of executions of the winning game of the normal symbol reaches the specified number. It is also possible to impose a fourth termination condition that is satisfied when the number of times the symbol lottery result becomes a predetermined lottery result (for example, a small win that cannot win a V prize) reaches a specified number of times. By configuring in this way, especially in the second time saving state, the second time saving state can be ended before the number of times of execution of the normal symbol winning game reaches the specified number of times. In the 2-hour saving state, even when there is a margin in the number of times of working hours (the number of execution times of normal symbol winning games), the player can be made to play the game while having a sense of tension. In this case, as a variable display effect when a predetermined lottery result is obtained, a fixed effect is executed so that the player can grasp that a predetermined lottery result has been obtained (for example, out of reach effect). execution) configuration. By constructing in this manner, it is possible to realize a game property in which the remaining number of times up to the specified number of times of the predetermined lottery result can be grasped from the number of executions of the fixed performance, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. .

In this 40th control example, the ceiling function (function to set the second time-saving state when the number of lotteries of special symbols after the end of the jackpot reaches the ceiling lottery number) was not provided, but the ceiling function is installed. good too. In this case, the second time saving state set based on reaching the ceiling lottery number is the same advantage as the second time saving state set based on the time saving pattern winning (substantially at a rate of about 3% It may be set to the distribution of the general pattern to be elected to the general pattern per B in which the jackpot is determined, or may be set to a different degree of advantage. The ceiling It is possible to make people expect to reach the number of lotteries more strongly, and the degree of advantage is lower than the second time-saving state based on the time-saving pattern winning (for example, at a rate of about 1%, the jackpot is substantially confirmed. By setting it to "distribution per normal figure that wins 2", the game is played aiming at the ceiling lottery number from a small number of lotteries, and it is possible to suppress the player's excessive immersion in the game. In any case, by providing a ceiling function, even if a so-called addiction occurs, the game can be played with the goal of reaching the ceiling lottery number of times, so the player's motivation for the game can be increased. It is possible to suppress the decrease.

In the 40th control example, when the electric accessory 640a is open, the game ball can be guided to the second ball entrance 640, but it is not limited to this. For example, it may be combined with the ninth control example described above. That is, it is opened and closed by a so-called non-electric accessory (first non-electric accessory), and is opened and closed by a first start port that triggers the lottery of the first special symbol, and a non-electric accessory (second non-electric accessory), A second starting port that triggers the lottery of the second special symbol is provided. Furthermore, a first non-electrically actuated gate that opens the first non-electrical accessory when the game ball passes through, and a second non-electrically operated gate that opens the second non-electrical accessory when the game ball passes through, A prize-winning device provided with a distribution function for distributing a game ball entered inside the device to either a first non-electrically operated gate or a second non-electrically operated gate is provided, and a normal pattern wins. An electric accessory may be provided at a position where the prize winning device is opened in the event of an accident. Then, based on the winning of the normal symbol, the distribution accessory is displaced by a fixed displacement operation, and the distribution accessory is distributed to the first non-electrically operated gate by the distribution accessory as the type of winning of the normal symbol. There is a general pattern per A in which the winning device is opened in between, and a general pattern per B in which the prize device is opened between the arrangements distributed to the second non-electrically operated gate, and the general pattern per B is selected. Like the 40th control example described above, the ratio may be different between the normal state, the first time saving state, and the second time saving state. With this configuration, the same behavior as in the fortieth control example described above can be realized.

In this 40th control example, when the transition to the second time-saving state occurs, while the reserved ball of the first special symbol is digested, the reserved ball of the first special symbol is executed by executing the chance time standby effect. It is configured to make it easier to hit left after setting 0 pieces, and to make it difficult to deviate from the basic operation in which the lottery for the normal pattern and the lottery for the first special pattern are executed almost simultaneously, but during the chance time. The method of making it difficult to deviate from the basic operation (the operation in which the lottery for the normal symbol and the lottery for the first special symbol are executed almost simultaneously) is not limited to this. Instead of this, or in addition, for example, when the number of held balls of the first special symbol is 1 or more in the chance time (second time saving state), the variation time of the first special symbol is extremely short variation time ( For example, it may be configured to be set to 0.1 second). By configuring in this way, it is possible to digest the reserved ball of the first special symbol in a relatively short time after shifting to the chance time, so that the operation during the chance time is the basic operation (normal symbol lottery) It is possible to make it more difficult to deviate from the operation in which the lottery of the first special symbol is executed almost simultaneously. Also, for example, the first special symbol and the normal symbol pending storage function may be abolished. By constructing in this manner, when the time saving pattern is stop-displayed and shifts to the chance time (second time saving state), both the first special pattern and the normal pattern can be brought into the fluctuation stop state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operation from deviating from the basic operation (the operation in which the lottery for the normal symbol and the lottery for the first special symbol are executed almost simultaneously).

In this 40th control example, when the time-saving symbol winning occurs and the chance time is entered, until the variable display based on the holding ball of the first special symbol is terminated (or after the chance time is entered, a specific period elapses) ), the chance time standby effect is executed, and the effect mode is set as if the chance time has not started, but the effect mode is not limited to the chance time standby effect. . For example, the variable display effect based on the time-saving symbol winning is continuously executed until all the reserved balls of the first special symbol are consumed, thereby making the player think that the chance time has not started. Alternatively, the stop display period of the third symbol indicating winning of the time-saving symbol may be continuously executed until all the reserved balls of the first special symbol are consumed even after the chance time is entered. In addition, after the variable display effect based on the time-saving design winning is completed (after the third design indicating the time-saving design winning is stopped and displayed), the transition to the chance time is made until the reserved ball of the first special design is digested. is determined, and based on detecting the entry of the game ball into the first ball entrance 64 (and the central through gate 67c) after the reserved ball is digested, the chance time You may perform the production|presentation which notifies clearly that is started. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player think that the chance time (second time saving state) has not started, so the player left while the reserved ball of the first special symbol exists. It is possible to suppress the deviation of the start timing of the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation start timing of the normal symbol due to the start of beating. Namely, by the variable display performance, the performance result in consideration of both the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the normal symbol executed almost simultaneously (immediately before) with the lottery of the first special symbol is reported. Since the playability can be realized more reliably, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In this 40th control example, the ratio of B per normal pattern in the normal state is 0%, the ratio of B per normal pattern in the first time saving state is 80%, and the B per normal pattern in the second time saving state Although the ratio at which is determined is set to 3%, it is not limited to this, and can be set to any ratio. For example, by configuring so that the normal pattern per B can be determined in the normal state (for example, determined at a rate of 0.1%), even in the normal state, the first special pattern lottery will be a big hit. In addition to this, it is possible to make the player expect to win a normal pattern B in the normal pattern lottery, so it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous in the normal state. In addition, by increasing the determination ratio of B per normal figure in the second time saving state, it is possible to improve the substantial jackpot expectation degree for each variable display effect in the second time saving state, and by reducing it, It is possible to reduce the degree of expectation for a big hit in the two-hour short state. Furthermore, by increasing the determination ratio of B per normal figure in the first time saving state, it is possible to improve the expectation of winning the jackpot (continuous chance occurrence rate) when moving to the first time saving state, and per normal figure By lowering the decision ratio of B, it is possible to lower the expectation of winning the jackpot in the case of shifting to the first time saving state.

In the 40th control example, when the lottery for normal symbols is executed, the probability of winning the normal symbols is set to 1/1 (100%) regardless of the game state, but it is limited to this. It can be set to any probability, not one. As in other control examples, a low probability state of normal symbols and a high probability state of normal symbols are provided. The state may be configured to be treated as a high probability state of normal symbols. In this case, the probability of winning the normal design is set to 1/1.25 (80%) in the high probability state of the normal design, and 3/100 (3%) in the low probability state of the normal design, and the time saving state (First time-saving state, second time-saving state) When the hit of the normal pattern is always set to B (the electric accessory 640a is displaced in the second displacement pattern), the normal state In the case of hitting the normal pattern, it is always set to the normal pattern hit A (the electric accessory 640a is displaced in the first displacement pattern). In other words, in the first time-saving state, which is set in the high probability state of the normal pattern, the normal pattern hit B, which is the hit of the pattern that hits the normal pattern at a rate of 80% in the lottery of the normal pattern, is always determined. In the second time-saving state, which is set to the low probability state of the normal pattern, the normal pattern hit B, which substantially determines the jackpot, is always determined by the normal pattern lottery at a rate of 3%. , In the normal state, the normal pattern lottery wins the normal pattern at a rate of 3%, but since the normal pattern hit A is always determined, it is impossible to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640. It may be configured to be possible (difficult). By configuring in this way, when the normal pattern hits, the normal pattern hit B is determined in the time saving state, and the normal pattern hit A is determined in the normal state, which is a relatively simple control. Therefore, the same operation as the above-described 40th control example can be realized, so that the processing load after winning the normal symbol can be reduced.

In this 40th control example, regardless of whether it is a normal pattern hit A or a normal pattern hit B, after the normal pattern lottery is started in the second time saving state, the normal pattern hit ends and the next normal pattern The length of the period until the symbol lottery can be executed is configured to be the same period as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol when the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is not detected. So, during the second time-saving state, the lottery of the normal pattern and the lottery of the first special pattern are configured to be able to maintain the game property that is executed almost at the same time, but at least in the normal pattern winning B, the normal pattern winning. The period until the end of the game does not necessarily have to match the variation time of the first special symbol. For example, when winning B per normal pattern, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is 1 second, the opening period of the normal pattern is 7 seconds, and the opening period of the electric accessory 640a is a maximum of 2 seconds, so that the total is 10 seconds. may be configured. By constructing in this way, a longer performance period can be ensured in the case of a normal game winning B (that is, in the case of executing a big win performance), so that the performance mode can be set more favorably.

In the 40th control example, by winning the time saving pattern in the normal state, it is configured to directly shift to the second time saving state without going through the jackpot, but the combination of the game state is not limited to this. . Instead of this, or in addition, for example, when the time saving pattern is elected in the second time saving state, the first time saving state (or the second time saving state that becomes the determination ratio of B per normal pattern equivalent to the first time saving state It may be configured to shift to B). By configuring in this way, in addition to winning the jackpot in the second time saving state, it is extremely advantageous to repeat (loop) the time saving state and the jackpot at a rate of 80% even when the time saving pattern winning occurs. Since the state can be formed, the player's interest in the game can be improved. Also, for example, when time-saving symbol winning occurs in the first time-saving state, the game state with a low winning rate of B per normal pattern (for example, the second time-saving state, or the second time-saving state B You may comprise so that it may transfer to the 1st time saving state B) used as a determination ratio. By constructing in this way, when hitting to the left in the first time-saving state, the lottery for the first special pattern and the lottery for the normal pattern can be executed almost simultaneously, thereby winning the jackpot of the first special pattern. As much as possible, there is an advantage that the expectation of the jackpot is high, but when a time-saving pattern winning occurs, the advantage of the time-saving state itself is reduced. It is possible to realize a novel game property that allows the player to select a game method. In addition, the game state is not limited to the time saving state and the normal state, for example, a special symbol high probability state with a special symbol lottery probability higher than usual is provided, and the game state set to the special symbol low probability state (normal state, the first time-saving state, the second time-saving state) is set to a high probability state of special symbols (high probability state, non-time-saving state, high probability state, and first time-saving state, high probability state , and the second time-saving state) may be configured so as to be able to shift directly without going through the jackpot. Conversely, the game state set to the high probability state may be configured to be directly transitionable to the game state set to the low probability state without going through the big win, or the game set to the high probability state It may be configured such that the state can be directly shifted to another game state set to the high-probability state without going through the jackpot. Also, in all the above cases, the conditions for changing the gaming state without going through the jackpot are not limited to time-saving symbol winning. Triggered by winning a small win (non-V small win) set in the opening pattern of the door 650f1, the game state may be changed, or the total number of lotteries of special symbols has reached a specified number. It may be configured to change the game state based on, it may be configured to change the game state based on the total number of lottery times of the second special symbol has reached the specified number of times, or the normal symbol winning game A configuration may be adopted in which the game state is changed based on the number of times of execution reaching a specified number of times. As a result, it is possible to diversify the playability, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Forty-first control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1183 to 1211. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the fortieth control example described above, in the time-saving state, the ease of entering the second ball opening 640 (the second ball By providing a plurality of time-saving states (first time-saving state, second time-saving state) with different ratios of winning in B per normal pattern that allows game balls to enter the mouth 640, special symbols are provided. Although the lottery probability is common, a plurality of game states having different substantial jackpot probabilities are provided.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-first control example, as in the fortieth control example described above, there is a substantial jackpot probability (substantial jackpot probability) in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. However, it is different from the 40th control example in that the lottery result of complete failure is provided in the lottery of the second special symbol. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-first control example, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, the substantial big win probability (the sum of the probability of a big win and the probability of a small win in the special symbol lottery) The difference from the 40th control example is that the probability is about 1/3 (probability of failure is about 2/3). In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present 40th control example, although the number of times of time saving is common, the second special symbol based on all the starting winnings detected during the time saving state after shifting to the time saving state It is different in that a plurality of time-saving states are provided in which the number of substantial lottery times of the second special symbol is different until the lottery is finished. More specifically, a time-saving state A in which the special symbol lottery can be executed substantially twice and a time-saving state B in which the special symbol lottery can be substantially executed four times are provided. Here, in the 40th control example, as the end condition of the time saving state, the number of lotteries of special symbols (the total number of lotteries of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is established based on the specified number of times A first end condition to be established, a second end condition established based on the number of executions of the small winning game becoming a specified number of times, and a second end condition established based on the number of lotteries of the second special symbol becoming a specified number of times. In addition to the third termination condition, there is provided a fourth termination condition that is established based on the fact that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol has reached a prescribed number during execution of the time-saving final variation. The time saving state A and the time saving state B share the first to third end conditions, and differ only in the fourth end condition, thereby making the substantial number of lotteries of the second special symbols different.

Further, in the 41st control example, in addition to the time-saving states A and B, a time-saving state C is provided in which a time-saving end condition that almost certainly continues until the next big hit is set. In addition, in the 41st control example, the number of consecutive times of the time saving state (the number of repetitions of the time saving state and the jackpot are repeated without going through the normal state) is limited (the time saving limit number of times is set). When a jackpot is won during the time-saving state C, the game state after the big win is set to the time-saving state C again unless the time-saving limit number of times is reached. That is, once the time-saving state C is set, the time-saving state C and the big win are repeated until the time-saving limit number of times is reached (the jackpot winning for the time-saving limit number of times is almost decided). and By configuring in this way, the player can be strongly expected to shift to the time saving state C, so that the player's interest in the game can be enhanced.

Furthermore, in the 41st control example, in the time saving state C, by setting the fluctuation time of the normal symbols, the fluctuation time of the special symbols, and the release pattern of the normal symbols so that the reserved balls can be easily stored up to the upper limit number. When the time-saving state C and the big hit are repeated until the time-saving limit number of times is reached and the state shifts to the normal state, the upper limit number (four times) of the second special symbol reserved balls are likely to be held. are doing. As a result, even after falling to the normal state, the player can be given an opportunity to execute the lottery of the second special pattern with a jackpot probability of about 1/3 four times, so that the time-saving limit number of times is reached. The degree of advantage afterward can be set to be greater than or equal to the degree of advantage in other time-saving states. Specifically, the expectation of a big hit is higher than the time-saving state A in which the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed substantially twice, and the time-saving state in which the lottery of the second special symbol can be substantially executed four times. It is possible to form an advantageous state with a jackpot expectation equivalent to B. Therefore, even when the time-saving limit number of times is reached, the player can have a great expectation for the big win, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in the 41st control example, when the second special symbol small winning game is started in the time saving state A or the time saving state B, the second end condition is satisfied at the time of the small winning start (the small winning counter 203s is subtracted On the other hand, when the small hit game of the second special symbol is started in the time saving state C, the second end condition is established after the game ball passes through the specific area 650e3 (small hit decrement the counter 203s). By configuring in this way, when a small hit is won after shifting to the time saving state A or the time saving state B, the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state or during the time saving state The game state at the time when the game ball passes through the specific area 650e3 regardless of whether it is a lottery of the second special symbol started after the transition to the normal state based on the second special symbol reserved ball held in Can be set to normal state. Therefore, regardless of whether it is the second special symbol lottery started during the time saving state or the second special symbol lottery started after shifting to the normal state, the degree of advantage at the time of winning the jackpot is determined. Can be shared. In addition, in the time saving state C, when a small win is won, the game state at the time of winning can be fixed to the time saving state, so the repetition of the time saving state C and the big win continues beyond the time saving limit number of times. Conversely, it is possible to suppress the repetition of the time saving state C and the jackpot from ending before reaching the time saving limit number of times.

The pachinko machine 10 in the forty-first control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the fortieth control example described above in that the board configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is partially changed. The configuration of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main controller 110 is partially changed, the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the sound lamp controller 113 is partially changed, and the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 The only difference is that the control process to be executed is partially changed, and the control process to be executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the 40 control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the 40th control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 1183, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the forty-first control example will be described. FIG. 1183 is a front view of the game board 13 in the forty-first control example. As shown in FIG. 1183, the game board 13 in the forty-first control example is provided above the first ball entrance 64 in contrast to the board configuration of the game board 13 in the fortieth control example (see FIG. 1149). The difference is that a single through gate 67 is provided on the upstream side of the V winning device 650 instead of the through gate 67c provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 and the right through gate 67r provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80. there is As shown in FIG. 1183, this through gate 67 is launched into the flow path on the right side of the variable display unit 80 in the front view by hitting to the right, and game balls that do not enter the second ball entrance 640 always pass through. It is set in a position where In other words, in the forty-first control example, the normal symbol lottery is not executed unless the right-handed hit is performed, and the electric accessory 640a is not opened. Instead, the right-handed hit is performed. The difference is that the board has a board structure in which the rate of passage through the through gate 67 is high.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 1184 to 1186, the characteristic presentation mode in the 41st control example will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 1184, in the time saving state A that is set at a high rate (95% rate) after the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state (so-called first hit) A presentation mode will be described. First, FIG. 1184(a) is a diagram showing an effect mode from when the time saving state A is started until the lottery for the second special symbol is started.

As shown in FIG. 1184(a), when the time-saving state A is entered after the first hit, an effect in which the adventurer character 801 and the monster character 821 face each other is executed in the main display area Dm. In addition, a character saying "Stock attack icons with right-handed strokes!" In addition, a small display area Dm4 displaying characters "Right-handed" is formed in the upper left of the main display area Dm, and an attack icon display for displaying an attack icon, which will be described later, is formed in the lower left of the main display area Dm. Areas AI1 and AI2 are formed. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, the text "If you defeat the enemy, rush into RUSH!?" is displayed. With these display contents, it is possible to acquire (stock) an attack icon by hitting the right hand, and if the adventurer character 811 can defeat the monster character 821, the rush mode (time saving state more advantageous than time saving state A) It is possible to make the player easily understand that the game will enter B).

In addition, FIG. 1184(b) is a display in the case where one game ball fired by hitting to the right in the time saving state A enters the second ball entrance 640 and the variable display of the second special symbol is started. It is the figure which showed an example of the aspect. As shown in FIG. 1184(b), when the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and the variable display of the second special symbol is started, a relatively narrow (difficult to see by the player) small In the display area Dm8, variable display of the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is started. Also, a time gauge ga3 is displayed between the adventurer character 811 and the monster character 821 . This time gauge ga3 is displayed in a state where the remaining time display ga3a occupies the entire time gauge ga3 at the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol, and as time passes, the right end of the remaining time display ga3a moves leftward when viewed from the front. It is configured so that the area of the elapsed time display ga3b increases as it moves and the area narrows, and the right end of the remaining time display ga3a 10 seconds after the start of the variable display of the second special symbol. reaches the left end of the time gauge ga3, the area of the remaining time display ga3a becomes zero, and the entire time gauge ga3 is occupied by the elapsed time display ga3b. When the time gauge ga3 becomes 0, it is determined whether or not the effect of defeating the monster character 821 is executed according to the lottery result of the change and the prefetch result of the remaining reservation of the second special symbol.

Furthermore, based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640, an attack icon of a type corresponding to the current lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed in the attack icon display area AI1. The example in FIG. 1184(b) illustrates a case where an icon with the characters "slashing" is acquired. These display contents suggest that an attack icon is obtained based on the starting prize of the second special symbol, and that the type of the attack icon suggests the degree of expectation of winning (defeating the monster character 821). can be intuitively understood by the player. In addition, in the 40th control example, four types of icons are provided: "punch", "kick", "slash", and "killer move". The "punch" icon is configured to be more likely to be selected in the case of a miss and less likely to be selected in the case of a big or small win, and the "kick" icon is more likely to be selected in the time-saving state B than in other cases. , and the "slashing" icon is configured to be difficult to select in the case of a miss. In addition, the "special move" icon can be selected only in the case of a big hit or a small hit, and the selection rate is higher when moving to the advantageous time saving state C than when moving to the time saving state B after the big hit. configured to be high. With these selection ratios, it is possible to realize the game property of predicting the lottery result of the second special symbol according to the type of the attack icon, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1185 (a), display when the number of times of time saving (prescribed lottery number of times of the second special symbol) is 1 in the time saving state A and the first second special symbol reserved ball is acquired. Aspects will be described. As shown in FIG. 1185 (a), the first second special symbol holding ball is acquired, and the fourth end condition (the number of holding balls of the second special symbol is the specified number in the time saving final fluctuation (time saving state A In the case of 1, it is a diagram showing a situation where the time saving end condition) is established and the time saving state A is ended. As shown in FIG. 1185 (a), in the first variation (final variation) of the time saving state A, the second special symbol holding ball becomes one, and when the fourth end condition is satisfied, the second attack icon display area An attack icon corresponding to the result of prefetching of the second special symbol reserved ball acquired this time is displayed for AI2. The example of FIG. 1185(a) illustrates the case where the "kick" icon is acquired. In addition, the characters "preparation completed" are displayed on the time gauge ga3. By these display contents, the player can easily understand that all the reserve balls of the second special symbol that can be obtained in the time saving state A have been obtained. In addition, the player is informed that the type of each attack icon corresponds to the lottery results corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol being executed and the newly obtained held balls of the second special symbol. can be easily understood.

Although not shown in the figure, after the second special symbol holding ball is accumulated and the time saving state is ended, the adventurer character 811 consumes the attack icon and attacks the monster character 821. executed. That is, the attack icon displayed in the attack icon display area AI1 (in the example of FIG. 1185 (a) , and “last attack” icon) are used to launch an attack on the monster character 821 . If the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big win or a small win, an effect of defeating the monster character 821 is executed. A performance is performed. When the monster character 821 cannot be defeated, the variable display of the second special symbol using the held ball of the second special symbol acquired in the time saving state A is started and displayed in the attack icon display area AI2. 1185(a), a "kick" icon is used to launch an attack on the monster character 821 is executed. If the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big win or a small win, an effect of defeating the monster character 821 is executed. A performance is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1185(b), when a jackpot is won in the time saving state A (so-called consecutive chances occur), the effect mode in the time saving state B that can shift after the consecutive chances hit will be described. . As shown in FIG. 1185(b), the display content of the main display area Dm is similar to the rendering mode in the time saving state A, only in that the number of attack icon display areas is changed from 2 to 4. are different. In the time saving state B, as the fourth end condition (time saving end condition established when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol reaches the specified number in the time saving final fluctuation), the number of reserved balls is set to 3 It corresponds to what is being done. That is, one second special symbol lottery executed in the time saving state B, and three second special symbol lotteries based on the three second special symbol holding balls that can be obtained during the time saving state B. , in that four display areas are formed for displaying attack icons corresponding to each of the second special symbols for a total of four times. Moreover, the time saving state A and the time saving state B are different also about the display content of the sub-display area Ds. That is, in the time-saving state B, characters such as "Bonus if the attack hits! MAX if the enemy is defeated!?" are displayed. By means of these display contents, the player can easily understand that if the attack hits the monster character 821 alone, it will be a big hit, and if the effect of defeating the monster character 821 is executed, the MAX bonus will be fixed. be able to. In addition, the MAX bonus means that after the end of the jackpot, the state shifts to the most advantageous time-saving state C (substantially continued until the next jackpot). In other words, the jackpot and the time-saving state C mean a transition to a state in which the time-saving limit number of times (three times) is reached, forming an extremely advantageous state in which four jackpots are guaranteed in total. It is shown that. In this 41st control example, 4 rounds of jackpot games are executed as the jackpot of the second special symbol, and 600 or more prize balls are paid out per jackpot, so an effect to defeat the monster character 821 is executed. By doing so, it is possible to receive the same benefit as winning a jackpot of 16 rounds (2400 or more prize balls are paid out). Therefore, it is possible to give the player an opportunity to win a large number of prize balls at once, despite the fact that only 4 rounds of jackpots are installed, so that it is possible to realize well-balanced playability. .

FIG. 1186(a) is a diagram showing a production mode when the winning of the jackpot (MAX bonus) corresponding to the time saving state C is confirmed (the second special symbol lottery wins the jackpot or small hit A41). be. As shown in FIG. 1186(a), when the MAX bonus is won, an effect in which the adventurer character 811 defeats the monster character 821 is executed in the main display area Dm, and the number "7" is displayed. An effect in which the simulated third symbols are aligned is executed. Also, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "MAX BONUS FINAL!!" are displayed. These display contents make it possible for the player to easily understand that the player has won the MAX bonus.

Next, with reference to Drawing 1186 (b), the production mode in each time saving state C until reaching the time saving limit number of times after winning the MAX bonus will be described. Here, in the 41st control example, the 4-round jackpot and the time saving state C are repeated until the time saving limit number of times is reached after winning the jackpot corresponding to the time saving state C for the first time (MAX bonus mode). The performance mode during the winning is set to a performance mode as if one big win continues. That is, in the first time-saving state C after the end of the first jackpot, the production is performed as if it is in the interval production after the end of the 4th round (5 rounds before), and the second 4th round jackpot in the MAX bonus mode. Then, the effect is executed as if it is the 5th to 8th round of the jackpot, and in the second time-saving state C, it is assumed that the interval effect after the end of the 8th round (before the 9th round) is being performed. In the 3rd 4th round jackpot in the MAX bonus mode, the 9th to 12th rounds of the jackpot are simulated, and the 3rd time (the last in the time reduction limit ), in the time-saving state C, after the end of 12 rounds (before 13 rounds), an effect is performed as if it is in an interval effect, and in the 4th round jackpot in the MAX bonus mode, 13 rounds of a pseudo jackpot. It is configured to execute an effect as if it is the 16th round from the eye. With this configuration, the player can be made to think that four big wins are one big win. , the number of rounds is extremely large, and it is possible to make it seem as if one has won a jackpot that can win a large number of prize balls. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

FIG. 1186(b) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode of time saving state C between jackpots in the MAX bonus mode. As shown in FIG. 1186(b), in the short time state C between the jackpots in the MAX bonus mode, a pseudo interval performance is executed as if it were during the interval period. That is, an effect is executed in which the adventurer character 811 is pleased with the large amount of gold coins that have appeared from the treasure box 810, and the characters "5 rounds" indicating the next pseudo number of rounds are displayed in the small display area Dm9. is displayed. In the small consul area Dm2, characters (800) indicating the number of prize balls already paid out in the MAX mode and characters (2400) indicating the total number of prize balls to be paid out in the MAX bonus mode are displayed. be done. Further, in the small display area Dm8, the variable display effect of the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is executed in a relatively unnoticeable manner. Further, the characters "MAX BONUS ON" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. With these display contents, the player can be made to feel as if a big win of 16 rounds is being executed, so that a more suitable presentation mode can be realized. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1187, the transition of the presentation mode in the case of shifting to the time saving state A after the occurrence of the first hit in the forty-first control example will be described. Fig. 1187 is a production mode in the period from the end of the first hit won in the normal mode in the 41st control example to the end of the time saving state A, digesting the second special symbol holding ball, and returning to the normal mode. is a diagram showing changes over time. As shown in FIG. 1187, when the first hit ends, first, an effect (holding charge effect, see FIG. 1184 and FIG. 1185(a)) prompting to acquire a hold ball (attack icon) by hitting right is executed. . The pending charge effect is executed until 10 seconds elapse after the first variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state A is started. In addition, by continuing right-handed hitting during the variable display effect of the second special symbol, when the start winning prize corresponding to the second special symbol occurs and the number of pending balls becomes 1, the time saving state A is terminated and the normal state to move to.

As shown in FIG. 1187, during a period of 20 seconds from the end of the pending charge effect to the end of the first variable display of the second special symbol, the first attack is made on the monster character 821. An effect of attempting an attack corresponding to the icon (attack icon displayed in the attack icon display area AI1) is executed, and the result of the effect is notified during the fixed display period (1 second) of the pattern. FIG. 1187 illustrates a case where a performance result indicating that the subjugation of the monster character 821 is unsuccessful is reported. A variable display effect based on the ball with 2 special symbols on hold) is started, a effect of attempting an attack corresponding to the second attack icon (attack icon displayed in the attack icon display area AI2) is executed, and the symbol is confirmed and displayed. A performance result is reported in a period (one second). FIG. 1187 illustrates a case where a performance result indicating that the subjugation of the monster character 821 has failed even in the second attack is reported, and after the reporting period ends, the performance mode is switched to the normal mode.

In this way, in the period from the transition to the time-saving state A to the digestion of all the second special symbol holding balls acquired during the time-saving state A, a series of productions with continuity (story) Since it is possible to notify whether or not to enter the rush mode (time saving state B) or the MAX bonus mode, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1188, the effects in the MAX bonus mode will be described. FIG. 1188 is a diagram showing the change over time of the effect mode from winning the jackpot that shifts to the time saving state C to reaching the time saving limit number of times in the 41st control example. As shown in FIG. 1188, when the 4 round jackpot (jackpot A41 to jackpot C41) of the type that shifts to the time saving state C in the time saving state is executed, first, the 1st to 4th rounds in the MAX bonus mode After the 4th round is finished, a pseudo interval effect is executed. Then, during the first time-saving state C, the pseudo interval production is continued, and when the 4-round jackpot (any of the jackpots A41 to D42) is won, in the 1st to 4th rounds of the 4-round jackpot, the pseudo-interval production is continued. A performance as if it were the 5th to 8th rounds is executed immediately, and when the pseudo 8th round ends, the pseudo interval performance is executed again. Then, during the second time-saving state C, the pseudo interval production is continued, and when the 4-round jackpot (any of the jackpots A41 to D42) is won, in the 1st to 4th rounds of the 4-round jackpot, the pseudo-interval production is continued. 9th to 12th rounds are performed, and when the pseudo 12th round ends, the pseudo interval presentation is performed again. Then, during the third time (time saving limit number) time saving state C, the pseudo interval production is continued, and when the 4 round jackpot (any of the jackpots A41 to D42) is won, the 1st round to 4 of the 4 round jackpot In the 13th round, a pseudo effect is executed as if it were the 13th to 16th rounds, and when the pseudo 16th round ends and the ending period begins, the ending period is suspended at the beginning of the ending period. The effect of acquiring the attack icon is executed by the number of the second special symbol holding balls (almost four if the ball is continuously hit to the right during execution of the pseudo interval effect). After the jackpot is over, the attack icon acquired in the ending period is consumed to launch an attack on the monster character 821, which is performed up to four times. That is, the production of the same number of times as in the time saving state B is executed.

Thus, in this 41st control example, when the time-saving state C is set after the end of the big win, four big-hit games and three times between the start of the first big win and the time-saving limit number of times are reached. During the time saving state C, since it is configured to execute a novel performance mode as if one jackpot game is continuously executed, a large amount of prize balls can be obtained for the player at one opportunity. It is possible to make the player think as if the player were playing a game, and to add sharpness to the game. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the player's interest in the game, and to realize a suitable presentation mode.

Next, referring to FIG. 1189, a transition method between states in the forty-first control example will be described. Here, as shown in FIG. 1189, in the forty-first control example, mainly five types of states (modes) are provided. That is, it is set to the normal state of normal symbols (low probability state of normal symbols, no variation shortening, no open extension), and the game progresses by making the first special symbol lottery by hitting left (second special It is set to the normal state A (normal mode), which is an impossible (difficult) state to execute the lottery of symbols, and the time-saving state of normal symbols (high probability state of normal symbols, with fluctuation reduction, with open extension). Time-saving state A (chance mode), time-saving state B (time-saving mode), and time-saving state C (MAX bonus mode), which are states in which the game is progressed by making the second special symbol lottery by hitting, and normal symbols It is set to a normal state (low probability state of normal symbols, no variation shortening, no open extension), and a state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is preferentially executed by the presence of one or more reserved balls of the second special symbol. A normal state B (retraction mode) is provided at least.

Here, the time-saving states A to C are different in that different time-saving end conditions are set, and the easiness of entering the second ball entrance 640 is common. More specifically, in the time-saving state A, the first end condition is satisfied by executing the variable display of the special symbols a total of 10 times, and the second end condition is satisfied by executing the small winning game once. Then, the third end condition is satisfied by executing the variable display of the second special symbol once, and the fourth end condition is satisfied by accumulating one or more reserved balls of the second special symbol in the time-saving final variation. . Therefore, in the time-saving state A, if the player continues to hit to the right according to the suggestion of the production, the lottery for the second special symbol is executed based on the first entry into the second ball entrance 640, and the time-saving final variation is started. During the time saving final variation, the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 again, so that the second special symbol reserved ball becomes one and the time saving state is completed. there is After the time saving state is ended, it becomes impossible (extremely difficult) to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 even if it hits the normal symbol, so two or more second special It is also impossible to acquire the holding ball of the design. In addition, in the normal pattern hit in the 41st control example, the end condition is established by detecting the entry of one game ball, and the electric accessory 640a is immediately closed (immersed), so the time saving state Only one game ball is allowed to enter (two or more game balls are excluded) during the opening period of the electric accessory 640a based on one normal symbol hit in ing. Therefore, when shifting to the time saving state A, it is possible to obtain a total of two opportunities for the advantageous second special symbol lottery.

In addition, the time saving state B is different from the time saving state A in that the first to third end conditions are common to the time saving state A, but the fourth end condition is set to three. Therefore, when the right-handed hitting is continued in the time saving state B, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed based on the first entry into the second ball entrance 640, the time saving final variation is started, and the time saving is started. It is configured such that the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 three times during the final variation, and thus the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes three and the time saving state is terminated. Thereby, when it shifts to the time saving state B, it is possible to obtain a total of four opportunities for the advantageous second special symbol lottery. Furthermore, in the time-saving state C, the first end condition is satisfied by performing the variable display of the special symbols a total of 100 times, the second end condition is satisfied by performing the small winning game once, and the second end condition is satisfied. The third end condition is satisfied by executing the variable display of the special symbol 100 times, and the fourth end condition is satisfied by accumulating 65535 or more reserved balls of the second special symbol in the time saving final variation. That is, when neither the big win nor the small win is won, the time-saving state continues until the lottery for the special symbols is executed 100 times. Here, in this 41st control example, since the probability of winning a big win or a small win in the lottery of the second special symbols is set to about 1/3, the jackpot can be won over 100 special symbol lotteries. The event of not winning even a jackpot has a very low probability (approximately 2/3 to the 100th power) that does not occur. Therefore, the time-saving state C is positioned as a time-saving state that continues until the next jackpot is determined substantially.

First, referring to the upper part of FIG. 1189, a method of shifting from normal state A (normal mode) to another state will be described. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 1189, there is a possibility of shifting from normal state A (normal mode) to another state only when a big win is won. That is, as shown in FIG. 1189, in the normal state A, the lottery of the first special symbol becomes a jackpot with a probability of about 1/320, and when the jackpot B41 determined at a rate of 95% is determined, the jackpot ends. The later game state is set to the time saving state A. On the other hand, when a jackpot A41 determined at a rate of 5% is determined when a jackpot is won in the normal state A, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the time saving state B.例文帳に追加As described above, the time saving state B is more advantageous than the time saving state A (substantial jackpot probability is higher than the lottery of the first special symbol) Because it is possible to acquire many lottery opportunities for the second special symbol When a jackpot is won in the normal state A, the game can be played with a stronger expectation that the jackpot type is the jackpot A41. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to the middle left side of FIG. 1189, a method of shifting from the time saving state A (chance mode) to another state will be described. As shown in the middle left side of Fig. 1189, from the time-saving state A (chance mode) to another state, when a big hit is won, when a small hit is won, and when all the reserved balls of the second special symbol are consumed. may move to More specifically, as shown on the middle left side of FIG. 1189, if a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery in the time saving state A, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the time saving state C regardless of the jackpot type. be done. Also, as shown on the middle left side of FIG. 1189, in the time-saving state A, if it becomes a small hit with a probability of about 1/3 in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is determined at a rate of 54% as a small hit type. When it becomes a small hit A41, the game state after the big win is set to the time saving state C on the condition that the big win is won by passing through the specific area 650e3 in the small win A41. On the other hand, when a small hit is won and a small hit B41 is determined at a rate of 46% as a small hit type, the condition is that the big hit is won by passing through the specific area 650e3 in the small hit B41. , the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to the time saving state B. As described above, the time saving state C is an advantageous gaming state that substantially continues until the next big hit, while the time saving state B is a gaming state in which the advantageous second special symbol lottery opportunity is given only four times in total. is. That is, since the time saving state C is more advantageous than the time saving state B, when a small hit is won in the time saving state A, it is strongly expected that the small hit A41 is won and the time saving state C is set. be able to. On the other hand, when all the held balls of the second special symbol acquired in the time saving state A are digested, the state after digestion becomes the normal state A. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game property that makes a player strongly expect to win a big win or a small win with a probability of about 1/3 between two lottery opportunities for the second special symbols, so that the player's interest in the game can be realized. can be improved. It should be noted that, strictly speaking, when the holding ball of the first second special symbol is acquired in the time saving state A, the state is shifted to the normal state, but in FIG. 1189, the second special The period until all the holding balls of the pattern are digested is called the time saving state A.

Next, with reference to the middle right side of FIG. 1189, a method of shifting from the time saving state B (time saving mode) to another state will be described. As shown in the middle right side of Fig. 1189, when the time-saving state B (time-saving mode) is changed to another state, when a big hit is won, when a small hit is won, and when all the reserved balls of the second special symbol are consumed. may move to More specifically, as shown in the middle right side of FIG. 1189, if a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery in the time saving state B, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the time saving state C regardless of the jackpot type. be done. Also, as shown on the middle right side of FIG. 1189, if the second special symbol lottery in the time saving state B becomes a small hit with a probability of about 1/3, it is determined at a rate of 54% as a small hit type. When the small win A41 is reached, the game state after the big win is set to the time saving state C on the condition that the big win is won by passing through the specific area 650e3 in the small win A41. Further, when all the second special symbol holding balls acquired in the time saving state B are digested, the state after digestion becomes the normal state A. On the other hand, when a small win is won and a small win B41 is determined at a rate of 46% as a small win type, the small win B41 passes through the specific area 650e3 and wins the big win. As a condition, the game state after the end of the jackpot is again set to the time saving state B (the time saving state B is looped). As a result, in the time-saving state B, as in the time-saving state A, it is strongly hoped that the ball of the second special symbol acquired during the time-saving state will win a small hit or a big hit with a probability of about 1/3. When a small win is won, the game characteristic is such that the player strongly desires to be set to a more advantageous time saving state C, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, with reference to the second row from the bottom in FIG. 1189, a method of shifting from the time saving state C (MAX bonus mode) to another state will be described. As shown in the second row from the bottom of FIG. 1189, there is a possibility of shifting from the time saving state C (MAX bonus mode) to another state only when the time saving limit number of times is reached. More specifically, as shown in the second row from the bottom of FIG. The state is set to normal state B. On the other hand, as shown in the second row from the bottom of FIG. 1189, in the time saving state C, about 1/3 probability of winning the jackpot or small hit, and if the time saving limit number of times has not been reached, the jackpot ends The later game state is again set to the time saving state C (the time saving state is looped). For this reason, once it shifts to the time saving state C, a very advantageous state is formed in which the time saving state C and the big win are repeated until the time saving limit number of times is reached. In addition, as described above, in the 41st control example, the number of rounds of the big hit is all 4 rounds, and the number of times of the time saving limit is set to 3 times. Big wins are guaranteed. In other words, an advantageous state is formed in which prize balls for 16 rounds can be obtained almost at once, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to the lower part of FIG. 1189, a method of shifting from normal state B (pull-back mode) to another state will be described. As shown in the lower part of FIG. 1189, from the normal state B (retraction mode) to another state, when winning a big hit, when winning a small hit, and the second special held during the time saving state C There is a possibility of migration when all the holding balls of the design are digested. More specifically, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 1189, when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery in the normal state B, regardless of the jackpot type, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the time saving state C. be. In addition, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 1189, in the normal state B, if the second special symbol lottery results in a small hit with a probability of about 1/3, the small hit type is determined at a rate of 54%. When the small win A41 is reached, the game state after the big win is set to the time saving state C on the condition that the big win is won by passing through the specific area 650e3 in the small win A41. On the other hand, when a small hit is won and a small hit B41 is determined at a rate of 46% as a small hit type, the condition is that the big hit is won by passing through the specific area 650e3 in the small hit B41. , the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to the time saving state B. As described above, since the time saving state C is more advantageous than the time saving state B, when the small hit is won in the normal state B, it is stronger that the small hit A41 is elected and the time saving state C is set. can be expected. On the other hand, when all the reserved balls of the second special symbol are digested in the normal state B (all are removed), the state after digestion becomes the normal state A.

Thus, in the 41st control example, in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the normal state B, when winning a small win with a high probability of about 1/3, the small win type is a small win A41 or the small win B41, the profit obtained by the player is largely different. Therefore, it wins the small win A41 and shifts to the time saving state C, and whether it is possible to acquire a large amount of prize balls (balls for 16 rounds) at once, wins the small win B41 and shifts to the time saving state B Since it is possible to make the player play the game while paying more attention to the situation, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Electrical configuration of the forty-first control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 1190(a), the details of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the forty-first control example will be described. FIG. 1190(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the forty-first control example. As shown in FIG. 1190(a), the ROM 202 in the forty-first control example replaces the first winning random number table 202aj with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the fortieth control example (see FIG. 1159(a)). A first win random number table 202ak is provided, a jackpot type selection table 202bk is provided instead of the jackpot type selection table 202bj, and a second win random number table 202ck is provided instead of the second win random number table 202cj. point, the point that the variation pattern selection table 202dk is provided instead of the variation pattern selection table 202dj, the point that the time reduction grant table 202ek is provided instead of the time reduction grant table 202ej, the small hit type selection table 202fj Instead, it is different in that a small hit type selection table 202fk is provided, a time saving type selection table 202ja, and a normal pattern type selection table 202jb are deleted. Since other configurations are the same as those of the ROM 202 in the fortieth control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

First, with reference to FIGS. 1191(a) and (b), the details of the special symbol 1 random number table 202ak1 and the special symbol 2 random number table 202ak2 that constitute the first winning random number table 202ak in the 41st control example will be described. . Figure 1191 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special symbol 1 random number table 202ak1 in the 41st control example, Figure 1191 (b) is the specification of the special symbol 2 random number table 202ak2 in the 41st control example It is a figure showing the contents. First, with reference to FIG. 1191(a), the details of the special symbol 1 random number table 202ak1 referred to when the first special symbol lottery is executed in the forty-first control example will be described.

As shown in FIG. 1191(a), in the special symbol 1 random number table 202ak1 in the 41st control example, the range of random numbers (the value of the first winning random number counter C1) determined as a jackpot is set to "0 to 204 ” are defined in association with 205 random numbers (counter values), but random numbers determined as small hits are not associated. Of the 65536 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 65535" that can be taken by the first winning random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) determined to be a big hit is 205, so the first special The probability of winning the jackpot in the symbol lottery is about 1/320 (205/65536).

Next, with reference to FIG. 1191(b), the details of the special symbol 2 random number table 202ak2 referred to when the second special symbol lottery is executed in the forty-first control example will be described. FIG. 1191(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special symbol 2 random number table 202ak2. As shown in FIG. 1191(b), in the special symbol 2 random number table 202ak2 in the 41st control example, the range of random numbers (the value of the first winning random number counter C1) determined as a jackpot is set to "0 to 204 205 random numbers (counter values) are defined in association with each other, and the range of random numbers (counter values) determined as small hits is 21845 random numbers (counter values) of "205 to 22049". A range is associated and defined.

Of the 65536 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) judged to be a big win is 205, so a big win is achieved in the lottery of the second special symbol. The probability of winning is about 1/320 (205/65536) as in the lottery for the first special symbol. Also, out of 65536 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) determined to be small hits is 21845, so the second special symbol lottery. The probability of winning a small prize is about 1/3 (21845/65536).

Thus, in the forty-first control example, the random number value determined as the special symbol jackpot is shared between the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery (that is, the jackpot probability is shared). ) On the other hand, the random number determined to be a small hit is provided only in the lottery of the second special symbol. Then, the small hit in the present 41st control example, just like the small hits in the 40th control example, the 32nd control example, etc. described above, can almost certainly be made in the specific region 650e3 by simply continuing to hit to the right during the small win game. Since it is constructed so that a game ball can pass through and it is possible to win a big win, it is a lottery result that substantially confirms the winning of a big win. Therefore, the substantial jackpot probability (probability of sum of jackpot and small hit) is about 1/320 in the lottery of the first special symbol, while it is about 1/3 in the lottery of the second special symbol. Therefore, the degree of advantage of the lottery of the second special symbol can be made extremely high with respect to the lottery of the first special symbol. Therefore, since it is possible to realize well-balanced playability, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1191(c), details of the jackpot type selection table 202bk in the forty-first control example will be described. FIG. 1191(c) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the jackpot type selection table 202bk in the forty-first control example. This jackpot type selection table 202bk is similar to the jackpot type selection table 202j (see FIG. 1159(c)) in the above-described 40th control example. is a data table referenced by As shown in FIG. 1191 (c), in the jackpot type selection table 202bk in the forty-first control example, two types of jackpot A41 and jackpot B41 are defined as the jackpot types of the first special symbol. One type of jackpot C41 is defined as the jackpot type of the special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 1191 (c), as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 4" with "jackpot A41" associated with it, A "jackpot B41" is defined in association with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 from "5 to 99". "Jackpot A41" has four rounds, and basically, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the time saving state B (the time saving state in which the second special symbol lottery opportunity is given four times in total). It is a type. In addition, "jackpot B41" has 4 rounds, and basically, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the time saving state A (time saving state in which the lottery opportunity of the second special symbol is given twice in total). It is a jackpot type. Therefore, there is no difference between the ``jackpot A41'' and the ``jackpot B41'' in terms of the number of rounds, but the ``jackpot A41'' is more advantageous in terms of the game state after the completion of the jackpot. is given twice more than the "jackpot B41", the "jackpot A41" is a jackpot type with a higher degree of advantage than the "jackpot B41".

Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 99" that the value of the first hit type counter C2 can take, random numbers (counter values) associated with "jackpot A41" and "jackpot B41" are 5 and 95, respectively, the ratios of winning ``jackpot A41'' and ``jackpot B41'' when winning a jackpot in the lottery of the first special pattern are 5% and 95%, respectively. Therefore, if you win a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state, a time-saving state B with a relatively low probability (5% rate) and a high degree of advantage is set, and a relatively high probability (95% rate) ), a time-saving state A with a low advantageous degree is set. In addition, this is a story limited to the normal state, and if you win the "jackpot A41" or "jackpot B41" in the time-saving state (the jackpot is started), the number of times of the time-saving limit has not been reached. , the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to the time saving state C.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 1191 (c), as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 can take the entire range (range of "0 to 99"), "jackpot C41 ” are defined in association with each other. Since the ``big win C41'' is associated with the whole range that the value of the first win type counter C2 can take, the ``big win C41'' is always decided when the big win is won in the lottery of the second special pattern. This "jackpot C41" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 4 and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the time-saving state C. The number of rounds is the same as that of other jackpots, but since the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to the time-saving state C with the highest degree of advantage, it is the most advantageous jackpot type among all the jackpot types.

In addition to these "big win A41" to "big win C41", "big win D41" is also provided in the 41st control example. This "jackpot D41" is a jackpot type that is won when a small win is won, a small win B41 is determined as a small win type, and the specific area 650e3 is passed during the small win B41 game. The game state after the end is basically a 4-round jackpot set to the time-saving state B. In addition, when "jackpot D41" is won in the time-saving state, the time-saving state C is set on the condition that the time-saving limit number of times is not reached in the same manner as other jackpot types.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1192(a), details of the second winning random number table 202ck in the forty-first control example will be described. This second winning random number table 202ck is a data table that is referred to for determining whether or not a normal symbol is appropriate when a normal symbol lottery is executed. As shown in FIG. 1192(a), in the second winning random number table 202ck in the 41st control example, "0" is set as a random number value (counter value) determined to be a winning of the normal design in the normal state of the normal design. are mapped. On the other hand, as a random number value (counter value) that is determined to be a hit of a normal pattern in the time saving state of the normal pattern, the whole range of values that the second hit random number counter C4 can take ("0 to 299" range) corresponds. attached. For this reason, in this 41st control example, even if you hit right in the normal state of the normal design, you will win the normal design only with a low probability (probability of 1/300), while in the time saving state of the normal design , the player wins the normal symbol every time the lottery of the normal symbol is executed. Therefore, in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, the game ball can be easily entered into the second ball entrance 640 by hitting to the right.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1192(b), details of the variation pattern selection table 202dk in the forty-first control example will be described. This variation pattern selection table 202dk is similar to the variation pattern selection table 202dj (see FIG. 1161 (b)) in the above-described 40th control example, when the special symbol lottery is executed, the variation pattern ( It is a data table referred to for selecting the variable time). FIG. 1192(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of this fluctuation pattern selection table 202dk.

As shown in FIG. 1192(b), the variation pattern selection table 202dk in the forty-first control example is referred to to select a variation pattern (variation time) when a special symbol lottery is executed in a normal state. A normal table 202dk1, a time saving table 202dk2 referred to for selecting a variation pattern (variation time) when a special symbol lottery is executed in the time saving states A and B, and a time saving state C (MAX bonus mode) and a MAX bonus table 202dk3 that is referenced to select a variation pattern when a special symbol lottery is executed in . First, the details of the normal table 202dk1 will be described with reference to FIG. 1192(c).

FIG. 1192(c) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the normal table 202dk1 in the forty-first control example. As shown in FIG. 1192(c), the normal table 202dk1 includes the special symbol type used for the special symbol lottery to be executed, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery to be executed, and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. , and different variation patterns (variation times) are defined correspondingly. In other words, it is possible to determine a variation pattern of different variation times according to the special symbol type and the lottery result. Specifically, when the special symbol type is "special symbol 1 (first special symbol)" and the lottery result is "out", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 139". For the range of "150 to 179", "out of" with a variation time of 7 seconds as a variation pattern, and "150 to 179" with a variation time of 20 seconds as a variation pattern for the range of "140 to 149" For the range of ", "various types of normal reach" with a fluctuation time of 40 seconds are defined as the fluctuation pattern, and for the range of "180 to 198", "super reach" with a fluctuation time of 80 seconds is defined as the fluctuation pattern. there is

In addition, when the special symbol type is "special symbol 1 (first special symbol)" and the lottery result is "jackpot", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is within the range of "0 to 29" On the other hand, as a variation pattern, "various normal reach" with a variation time of 40 seconds is in the range of "30 to 189", and "super reach" with a variation time of 80 seconds as a variation pattern is "190 to 198". A "special reach" with a variation time of 140 seconds is defined as a variation pattern for the range.

In other words, in the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, when the lottery result is a loss, the variation pattern with a short variation time is more likely to be determined than when the lottery result is a big hit. It is configured so that the possibility of the result of the special symbol lottery being a big win is higher when a variation pattern with a longer variation time is determined. By constructing in this way, the special symbol variation that the lottery result is wrong continues for a long time for the player who is playing the game in the normal state, and the special symbol lottery executed per unit time is not performed. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's desire to play due to an extremely small number of executions.

In addition, when the number of execution times of the special symbol lottery executed per unit time is reduced, that is, when the special symbol variation is executed for a long period of time, the expectation for winning the big prize is heightened. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play.

On the other hand, when the special symbol type is "special symbol 2 (second special symbol)" and the lottery result is "out", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is the entire range of "0 to 198" On the other hand, as a variation pattern, "gull out" with a variation time of 20 seconds is defined, the special symbol type is "special figure 2 (second special symbol)", and the lottery result is "jackpot" , the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 is defined as "hit" with a variation time of 20 seconds as a variation pattern for the entire range of "0 to 198", and the special symbol type is "special figure 2 (first Special symbol)” and the lottery result is “small hit”, the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is 20 seconds as a variation pattern for the entire range of “0 to 198” "Small hit" is stipulated.

In addition, in the 41st control example, even if the lottery for the normal symbol is executed in the normal state and the winning of the normal symbol is won, the game ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 as the winning of the normal symbol. Since the opening and closing pattern (short open for 0.1 seconds) of the electric accessory 640a is set, which makes it impossible (difficult) to open the second ball entrance 640 even if the normal pattern lottery is executed in the normal state. and game balls cannot be entered. In this 41st control example, as a situation in which the second special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state, one or more holding balls of the second special symbol are hit to the right in the time saving state (any of the time saving states A to C). It is a case where the time saving end condition is satisfied and the time saving state is ended before digesting the reserved ball after acquiring it. That is, after the fourth end condition is satisfied by continuing to hit right in time saving state A or time saving state B, and in the state where the reserved ball is acquired by continuing to hit right in time saving state C This is the case where the normal state B is reached after reaching the time saving limit number of times. In both cases, the second special symbol variable display period is a period during which the adventurer character 811 attacks the monster character 821 using the attack icon. By fixing the fluctuation time to 20 seconds regardless of the result, the presentation period can be secured. Therefore, it is possible to realize a more suitable presentation mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1193(a), details of the time saving table 202dk2 described above will be described. FIG. 1193(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of this time saving table 202dk2. As shown in FIG. 1193 (a), in the time saving table 202dk2, the special symbol type is "special symbol 1 (first special symbol)", and if the lottery result is "out", the acquired If the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is defined as "super short out" with a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds as a fluctuation pattern for the entire range of "0 to 198", and the lottery result is "big hit" , "super short winning" with a variation time of 0.5 seconds is defined as a variation pattern for the entire range of "0 to 198" for the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. That is, regardless of the result of the lottery, the variable time period for a short period of time (0.5 seconds) ends. When one or more reserved balls of the first special symbol are held and the state shifts to a time-saving state in which the lottery of the second special symbol having a high degree of advantage can be executed, the first ball based on the reserved ball of the first special symbol is selected. To prevent a player from getting impatient due to a long continuation of the variable display performance of special symbols (a period during which the lottery of a second special symbol with a high substantial expectation for a big win cannot be executed).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1193 (a), as the specified contents for the second special symbol, the special symbol type is "special symbol 2 (second special symbol)", and the lottery result is "out" In, the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 is defined as "long out" with a variation time of 30 seconds as a variation pattern for the entire range of "0 to 198", and the special symbol type is "special figure 2 ( 2nd special symbol)”, and when the lottery result is “big win”, the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is 30 as a variation pattern for the entire range of “0 to 198”. Second "long win" is defined, the special symbol type is "special figure 2 (first special symbol)", and the lottery result is "small hit", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 A "long small win" with a variation time of 30 seconds is defined as a variation pattern for the entire range of "0 to 198". That is, regardless of the lottery result, the variation time of the second special symbol can be fixed to 30 seconds. Therefore, 10 seconds, which is the presentation period of the pending charge presentation (see FIGS. 1184(b) and 1185(b)), and the presentation in which the adventurer character 811 attacks the monster character 821 corresponding to the attack icon. 20 seconds, which is the effect period of , can be secured regardless of the lottery result.

Next, details of the MAX bonus table 202dk3 described above will be described with reference to FIG. 1193(b). FIG. 1193(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of this MAX bonus table 202dk3. As shown in FIG. 1193 (b), in the MAX bonus table 202dk3, the special symbol type is "special symbol 1 (first special symbol)" in the same way as the time saving table 202dk2, and the lottery result is "off ”, the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 is defined as “ultra-short out” with a variation time of 0.5 seconds as a variation pattern for the entire range of “0 to 198”, and the lottery result is a "jackpot", the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 is defined as a "super short hit" with a variation time of 0.5 seconds for the entire range of "0 to 198". ing. That is, regardless of the result of the lottery, the variable time period for a short period of time (0.5 seconds) ends. This is similar to the case of referring to the time saving table 202dk2, when moving to the time saving state C while holding one or more reserved balls of the first special symbol, the first special symbol based on the reserved ball of the first special symbol It is intended to prevent a player from becoming impatient due to a long continuation of the fluctuation display performance of patterns (a period during which the lottery of the second special patterns with a high substantial expectation for a big win cannot be executed).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1193 (b), as the specified contents for the second special symbol, the special symbol type is "special symbol 2 (second special symbol)", and when the lottery result is "out" , the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is defined as "short out" with a variation time of 5 seconds as a variation pattern for the entire range of "0 to 198", and the special symbol type is "special figure 2 (second 2 special symbol)” and the lottery result is “big hit”, the variation time is 5 seconds as the variation pattern for the entire range of the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 “0 to 198”. If the "short hit" is defined, the special symbol type is "special figure 2 (first special symbol)", and the lottery result is "small hit", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is For the entire range of '0 to 198', a 'small hit' with a variation time of 5 seconds is defined as a variation pattern. That is, regardless of the lottery result, the variation time of the second special symbol can be fixed to 5 seconds. The reason why the variable time is shorter than the time saving table 202dk2 is that, as described above, while the time saving state C is set, an effect mode (pseudo interval effect) as if a jackpot game is in progress is set. This is because the period during which the big win and the time-saving state C are repeated until the time-saving limit number of times is reached is a performance operation that makes the player think that one big win is continuing. . In other words, if the fluctuation time is made too long, the effect period of the pseudo-interval effect becomes too long, and there is a possibility that the player will feel distrust and the game in the time-saving state C will be prolonged. , by setting a relatively short period of 5 seconds as the variation time, the variation time of each time is kept short, and the performance period of the pseudo interval performance is minimized. On the other hand, if each variation time is shortened too much, it will be difficult for the ball to accumulate to the upper limit when the time limit is reached, and the chance of drawing the second special symbol in the normal state B will decrease. Since there is a possibility that the fluctuation time may be over, it is configured to avoid an extremely short fluctuation time such as 0.1 second or 0.5 second. As a result, it is possible to make it possible for the player to easily think that the time until reaching the time-saving limit number of times is 1 jackpot while appropriately storing the second special pattern reserved balls in the time-saving state C.例文帳に追加Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to Drawing 1194 (a), the details of time reduction grant table 202ek in the 41st example of control are explained. This time saving grant table 202ek is similar to the time saving grant table 202ek (see FIG. 1162 (b)) in the above-described 40th control example, when setting the time saving state, the time saving state according to the setting opportunity of the time saving state It is a data table referred to for setting end conditions. FIG. 1194(a) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the time reduction provision table 202ek.

As shown in FIG. 1194 (a), the time saving grant table 202ek in the 41st control example is associated with the value of each counter referred to when determining whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied for each jackpot type. are stipulated. Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 1194 (a), in this 41st control example, as a counter for determining whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied, the time saving counter 203h, the small hit counter 203s, and the special figure 2 counter 203t , and a prescribed reserved ball number counter 203ka are provided. The time saving counter 203h is a counter for judging whether or not an end condition (first end condition) corresponding to the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the time saving state is set is established (judgment), and is a small hit counter. 203s is a counter for determining whether or not the end condition (second end condition) corresponding to the number of small winning games executed after the time saving state is established (determines), and a special figure 2 counter 203t is a counter for determining (determining) whether or not the end condition (third end condition) corresponding to the number of lotteries of the second special symbol executed after the time-saving state is set, and the prescribed number of pending balls The counter 203ka is a counter for judging whether or not an end condition (fourth end condition) corresponding to the number of held balls of the second special symbol accumulated during execution of the final variable display of the time saving state is established. be.

As shown in FIG. 1194 (a), in this 41st control example, four types of "jackpot A41" to "jackpot D41" are provided as the jackpot types, and the time reduction grant table 202ek has for each jackpot type Then, the values of the time saving counter 203h, the small hit counter 203s, the east head 2 counter 203t, and the values of the prescribed reserved ball number counter 203ka (that is, the first to fourth end conditions) are defined in association with each other.

As shown in FIG. 1194 (a), for "jackpot A41" as the jackpot type, when the game state at the time of winning is the normal state, the value of the time reduction counter 203h "10", the value of the small hit counter 203s "1", the value "1" of the special figure 2 counter 203t, and the value "3" of the prescribed reserved ball number counter 203ka are defined respectively. Therefore, when "jackpot A41" is won in the normal state, the number of variations of the special symbols is set to 10 times as the first end condition, and the number of execution times of the small winning game is set to 1 time as the second end condition. As the third termination condition, the number of lotteries of the second special symbol is set to 1, and as the fourth termination condition, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol in the time-saving final variation is set to 3. That is, the time saving state B is set. When the player continuously hits to the right in this time-saving state B, the fourth end condition is almost satisfied and the time-saving state is terminated. In other words, after shifting to the time saving state B, the fourth end condition is established by acquiring three second special symbol holding balls during the execution of the first second special symbol variation display (time saving final variation). In most cases, when shifting to the time saving state B, it is possible to obtain a lottery opportunity for the second special symbol four times.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1194 (a), when the game state at the time of winning "jackpot A41" is a time saving state, the value of the time saving counter 203h "100", the value of the small hitting counter 203s "1", the special figure The value "100" of the 2 counter 203t and the value "65536" of the prescribed reserved ball number counter 203ka are defined respectively. Therefore, when "jackpot A41" is won in the time-saving state, the number of variations of the special symbols is set to 100 times as the first end condition, and the number of execution times of the small winning game is set to 1 time as the second end condition, As the third termination condition, the number of lotteries of the second special symbol is set to 100 times, and as the fourth termination condition, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol in the time-saving final variation is set to 65536. That is, the time saving state C is set. In the time-saving state C, a jackpot or a small win that is substantially determined is won with a probability of about 1/3, so there is almost no possibility that the time-saving state will continue until the final change of the time-saving state, and the second end condition, Alternatively, the time saving state is ended based on the jackpot winning.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 1194 (a), for "jackpot B41" as the jackpot type, when the game state at the time of winning is the normal state, the value of the time reduction counter 203h "10", the small hit counter 203s The value "1", the value "1" of the special figure 2 counter 203t, and the value "1" of the specified reserved ball number counter 203ka are defined respectively. Therefore, when the "jackpot B41" is won in the normal state, the number of variations of the special symbols is set to 10 times as the first end condition, and the number of execution times of the small winning game is set to 1 time as the second end condition. As the third end condition, one lottery number of the second special symbol is set, and as the fourth end condition, the number of the second special symbol reserved balls in the time-saving final variation is set as one. That is, the time saving state A is set. When the player continuously hits to the right in this time saving state A, the fourth end condition is almost satisfied and the time saving state is ended. That is, after shifting to the time saving state A, the fourth end condition is established by acquiring one second special symbol reserved ball during the execution of the first second special symbol variation display (time saving final variation). In most cases, when shifting to the time saving state B, it is possible to obtain a lottery opportunity of the second special symbol twice.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1194 (a), when the gaming state at the time of winning "jackpot B41" is a time saving state, the value of the time saving counter 203h "100", the value of the small hitting counter 203s "1", the special figure The value "100" of the 2 counter 203t and the value "65536" of the prescribed reserved ball number counter 203ka are defined respectively. That is, the time saving state C is set in the same manner as the "jackpot A41".

In addition, as shown in FIG. 1194 (a), for "jackpot C41" as the jackpot type, regardless of the game state at the time of winning, the value of the time reduction counter 203h "100", the value of the small hit counter 203s "1 ", the value "100" of the special figure 2 counter 203t, and the value "65536" of the prescribed reserved ball number counter 203ka are defined respectively. That is, the time-saving state C is set in the same way as when "jackpot A41" or "jackpot B41" is won in the time-saving state.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 1194 (a), for "jackpot D41" as the jackpot type, when the game state at the time of winning is the normal state, the value of the time reduction counter 203h "10", the small hit counter 203s The value of "1", the value of special figure 2 counter 203t "1", and the value of specified reserved ball number counter 203ka "3" are defined respectively. Therefore, when the "jackpot D41" is won in the normal state, the number of variations of the special symbols is set to 10 times as the first end condition, and the number of execution times of the small winning game is set to 1 time as the second end condition. As the third termination condition, the number of lotteries of the second special symbol is set to 1, and as the fourth termination condition, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol in the time-saving final variation is set to 3. That is, it is set to the time-saving state B, and the lottery opportunity of the second special symbol can be obtained almost four times.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1194 (a), when the game state at the time of winning "big hit D41" is a time saving state, the value of the time saving counter 203h "100", the value of the small hitting counter 203s "1", the special figure The value "100" of the 2 counter 203t and the value "65536" of the prescribed reserved ball number counter 203ka are defined respectively. That is, the time saving state C is set in the same manner as the "jackpot A41".

Thus, in the 41st control example, when the jackpot is won in the normal state, one of the time saving states A to C is set according to the jackpot type, while when the jackpot is won in the time saving state , the game state after the end of the big win is set to the most advantageous time-saving state C regardless of the kind of the big win. As a result, when a big win is won directly or via a small win in the normal state, the game can be played while paying attention to the type of the big win. In addition, when a jackpot is won in the time saving state, the game can be played while giving a sense of security that the most advantageous time saving state C has been established. In addition, as described above, even if the jackpot is won in the time saving state C, if the time saving limit number of times is reached, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the normal state.

Here, in the forty-first control example, when the special symbol lottery results in a big win, the game state when the big win symbols are stopped and displayed is determined as the game state when the big win is won, while the special symbol lottery is determined. When the big win is won based on the game ball passing through the specific area 650e3 as a result of a small win, the game state at the time of passing through the specific area 650e3 is determined as the game state at the time of winning the big win. there is And, as described above, in the time-saving state A and the time-saving state B, as long as the normal game method (the game method that continues to hit the right continuously) is performed, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol for the first time is almost During the execution of , the fourth termination condition is established and the time saving state is terminated. In other words, since the time saving state is terminated before the timing of stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol for the first time, even if the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, A game state at the time of winning a jackpot can be handled as a normal state. That is, in the time-saving state A or the time-saving state B, if the lottery result of the first second special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit, the lottery result of the first second special symbol will be out, and it will shift to the normal state. The degree of advantage can be the same in the case where the lottery result of the second special symbol based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol executed from 1 is a big win or a small win. In other words, even if it becomes a big hit or a small hit in the first second special symbol lottery, it does not become a big hit in the time saving state (the transition to the time saving state C is not confirmed), so the first time to be executed in the time saving state The lottery for the second special pattern and the lottery for the second special pattern for the second shift executed after shifting to the normal state can make the player have the same expectation. Therefore, even if the first lottery for the second special symbol is lost, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling excessive disappointment.

In addition, if the game is played so that the fourth end condition is not satisfied in the time saving state A or the time saving state B (the game is played so that the number of reserved balls is less than the specified number), 1 started in the time saving state The time-saving state can be continued until the second special symbol fluctuation stop timing, but in the case of this game method, the substantial jackpot probability is extremely high (approximately 1/3 probability). A lottery opportunity for the second special symbol. will be lost more than once. In addition, since the second end condition is satisfied at the start of the small hit, the transition to the normal state is completed before the game ball passes through the specific area 650e3, so the big win can be started in the time-saving state. Only if you win a jackpot in a special drawing lottery. Furthermore, in this case, it is treated as a jackpot in the time saving state, and the remaining number of times for the time saving limit number is subtracted by 1, so compared to the case of shifting to the time saving state C in the normal game method, the set number of times of the time saving state C is reduced by one, resulting in one loss of the number of jackpots. For this reason, the risk is high (the number of lotteries for the second special symbol is lost one or more times), but the return is small (set to time saving state C, but the number of jackpots is one less than usual). , it is possible to make it difficult for the player to try to execute an irregular game method in which the game is played so that the fourth end condition is not satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to suppress irregular game methods.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1194(b), details of the small hit type selection table 202fk in the forty-first control example will be described. This small hit type selection table 202fk, similar to the small hit type selection table 202fj (see FIG. 1163 (a)) in the above-described 40th control example, selects the small hit type when it becomes a small hit in the special symbol lottery. It is a data table referred to for determination. Figure 1194 (b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of this small hit type selection table 202fk. As shown in FIG. 1194 (b), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in the range of "0 to 53", "small hit A41" is associated with the small hit type, and the small hit type "Small hit B41" is defined as a small hit type in association with the range of "54 to 99" for the value of the counter C5. Here, both the "small hit A41" and the "small hit B41" can easily enter the game ball into the specific area 650e3 simply by continuing to hit to the right during execution of the small win game. It is a type, and when the game ball enters the specific area 650e3 in "small hit A41", it wins the big hit C41, while when the game ball enters the specific area 650e3 in "small hit B41" It is configured to win the jackpot D41. As described above, the jackpot C41 is a jackpot type in which the game state after the jackpot is set to the time-saving state C regardless of the game state when the jackpot is won, and the jackpot D41 ends when the jackpot is won in the normal state. It is a jackpot type in which the later game state is set to the time saving state B, and the game state after the big win is set to the time saving state C when winning in the time saving state. In addition, the number of rounds for each jackpot is 4 rounds. Therefore, since the big win C41 has a higher degree of advantage than the big win B41, the small win A41 is a small win type with a higher degree of advantage than the small win B41.

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 99" that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, the random number (counter value) associated with "small hit A41" and "small hit B41" Since they are 54 and 46, respectively, the ratio of determining "small hit A41" and "small hit B41" when winning the small prize in the second special symbol lottery is 54% (54/100). and 46% (46/100).

Next, with reference to FIG. 1190(b), the details of the RAM 203 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the forty-first control example will be described. FIG. 1190(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the forty-first control example. As shown in FIG. 1190 (b), the RAM 203 in this 41st control example is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the 40th control example described above (see FIG. 1159 (b)). The difference is that a number-of-balls counter 203ka, a time-saving limit counter 203kb, a subtraction waiting flag 203kc, and a winning state storage area 203kd are added. Another difference is that the general electric operation counter 203ja is omitted.

The special figure 2 counter 203t is a counter used for determining whether or not the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol executed during the time saving state has reached the specified number of times. The initial value of this special figure 2 counter 203t is set to 0, and a counter value corresponding to the jackpot type is set at the end of the jackpot. In addition, this special figure 2 counter 203t is updated by subtracting 1 from the counter value each time the fluctuation stop timing of the second special symbol is reached in the time saving state (see S634A in FIG. 1199), and the value is updated to 0. By doing so, it is determined that the third end condition of the time saving state is established, and the game state is set to the normal state (see S637A in FIG. 1199).

The prescribed reserved ball number counter 203ka is a counter used for determining whether or not the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol reaches the prescribed number in the final variation in the time saving state. The initial value of the specified reserved ball number counter 203ka is set to 0, and a counter value corresponding to the type of the big win is set when the big win ends. In the final variation of the time-saving state, each time a start winning prize of a new second special symbol is detected, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol has exceeded the value of the prescribed number of reserved balls counter 203ka (Fig. 1202). S852A), when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol exceeds the value of the prescribed reserved ball number counter 203ka, it is determined that the fourth end condition is satisfied, and the game state is set to the normal state ( See S853A in FIG. 1202).

The time saving limit counter 203kb is a counter used for determining whether or not the time saving limit number of times has been reached. The initial value of the time saving limit counter 203kb is set to 0, and the value is set to 3 when a big win is won in the normal state and the game state after the big win is set to the time saving state. In addition, this time saving limit counter 203kb is updated by subtracting 1 each time a jackpot is won in the time saving state (see S2409A in FIG. 1206), and when the value is updated to 0, regardless of the jackpot type , the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to the normal state. Thereby, the number of consecutive times of the time saving state can be limited to a fixed number of times.

The subtraction standby flag 203kc is a flag indicating whether or not the subtraction of the small hit counter 203s is made to wait when the small hit is won. If this subtraction standby flag 203kc is on, it means that the subtraction of the small hit counter 203s was waited (the small hit counter 203kc was not subtracted at the small hit winning timing), and if it is off, the subtraction is waited. It means not let. This subtraction standby flag 203kc is set to ON when the state at the time of winning the small hit is the time saving state C (MAX bonus mode) (see S712A in FIG. 1200). When the entry of the game ball into the specific area 650e3 is detected during the small winning game, when the state of the subtraction standby flag 203kc is ON, the subtraction processing of the small winning counter 203s which has been waiting is executed. (see S1413A in FIG. 1204). By configuring in this way, even if a small win is won in the time saving state C, the small win counter 203s can be subtracted after the game ball enters the specific area 650e3 instead of when the small win starts. The game state when the game ball enters the area 650e3 can be reliably set to the time-saving state.

The winning state storage area 203kd is a storage area for storing data indicating the gaming state when a big win is won. In the winning state storage area 203kd, data indicating the game state at the stop timing of the jackpot symbols is stored when the lottery result of the special symbols is a jackpot. In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a small hit, data indicating the game state at the timing when the game ball enters the specific area 650e3 in the small hit game is stored (see S1411A in FIG. 1204). At the end of the jackpot, the data stored in the state storage area 203kd at the time of winning, and the game state (time saving end condition) corresponding to the jackpot type is read from the time saving giving table 202ek (see FIG. 1194 (a)). set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1195(a), details of the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the forty-first control example will be described. FIG. 1195(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the forty-first control example. As shown in FIG. 1195(a), the ROM 222 in the 41st control example has an attack icon selection table 222ka added to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the 40th control example (see FIG. 1164(a)). , and that the standby effect selection table 222kj is deleted.

The attack icon selection table 222ka is a data table referred to in order to select the type of attack icon acquired in the battle production executed in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the normal state B. Details of the attack icon selection table 222ka will be described with reference to FIG. 1195(b).

FIG. 1195(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the attack icon selection table 222ka. As shown in FIG. 1195(b), this attack icon selection table 222ka defines the value range of the first effect counter 223f1 and the attack icon type in association with each second special symbol lottery result. It is More specifically, as shown in FIG. 1195(b), when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit A41, the value of the first effect counter 223f1 is within the range of "0 to 19". On the other hand, a "special move" icon is defined in association with the value of the first effect counter 223f1 in the range of "20 to 89", and a "cutting attack" icon is defined in correspondence with the value of the first effect counter 223f1. A "kick" icon is defined in association with the range of "90 to 99" for the value of 223f1. Therefore, when the lottery result is a big win or a small win A41 (that is, when the transition to the advantageous time-saving state C) is made, the "slashing" icon is selected at a relatively high rate, and the "kicking" icon is selected at a low rate. is selected.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1195 (b), when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit B41 (when the advantage shifts to the time saving state B lower than the time saving state C), the first production If the value of the counter 223f1 ranges from "0 to 4", the "deathblow" icon is defined in association with the value of the first effect counter 223f1. " icon is defined in association with the value of the first effect counter 223f1 in the range of "50 to 84", the "kick" icon is defined in association with the value of the first effect counter 223f1 in the range of "85 to 84". 99” is defined in association with a “punch” icon. Therefore, if the lottery result is a small hit B41 (that is, if the advantage is shifted to the relatively low time-saving state B), than the case of moving to the time-saving state C As the selection ratio of the “hit” icon decreases, the selection ratio of the “kick” icon increases. Moreover, the selection rate of the "punch" icon which is not selected when shifting to the time saving state C is set to 15%.

Also, as shown in FIG. 1195(b), when the lottery result of the second special symbol is out, the value of the first effect counter 223f1 is in the range of "0 to 9". is defined in association with the value of the first effect counter 223f1 in the range of "10 to 49", the "kick" icon is defined in association with the value of the first effect counter 223f1 in the range of "50 to 99". A "punch" icon is defined in association with the range of . Therefore, when the lottery result is a loss, the "special move" icon is not selected. That is, when the "special move" icon appears, a big win or a small win is confirmed. In addition, the selection ratio of the "punch" icon is greatly increased as compared with the case of winning a big win or a small win.

In this way, according to the lottery result of the second special symbol, since it is configured to vary the selection ratio for each type of attack icon, start to the second ball entrance 640 in the time saving state A or time saving state B Each time a prize is detected, the game can be played while paying attention to the type of the displayed attack icon. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1196, the details of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the forty-first control example will be described. FIG. 1196 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in the forty-first control example. As shown in FIG. 1196, the RAM 223 in the forty-first control example has an icon information storage area 223ka and a remaining win count counter 223kb in contrast to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the fortieth control example (see FIG. 1164(b)). and are added, and the standby effect flag 223ja, the standby effect count counter 223jb, and the standby period timer 223jc are deleted.

The icon information storage area 223ka is a storage area for storing data indicating the type of attack icon selected with reference to the attack icon selection table 222ka (see FIG. 1195(b)). In the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the normal state B, with reference to the data stored in the attack icon storage area 223ka, until the second special symbol holding ball becomes 0 (or until the jackpot is won). The content of the attack to be made to the adventurer character 811 in the variable display effect of each second special symbol is set (see S4424A in FIG. 1211). As a result, it is possible to prevent setting an effect for performing an attack that differs from the type of attack icon acquired in the pending charge effect (see FIGS. 1184(b) and 1185(b)). A more suitable presentation mode can be realized.

The remaining hit number counter 223kb is a counter indicating the number of remaining jackpots until reaching the time saving limit number of times in the case of shifting to the time saving state C. The initial value of the remaining hit number counter 223kb is set to 0, and the value is set to 4 when winning a jackpot that shifts to the time saving state C (see S3623A in FIG. 1209). In addition, the value of the remaining value number counter 223kb is updated by subtracting 1 each time the ending period of the jackpot is reached. In this 41st control example, the value of the remaining hit count counter 223 kb is referred to, and the number of rounds in each jackpot until reaching the time reduction limit count is displayed as if one jackpot game continues. set to display.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the 41st control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the forty-first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1197 to 1206. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 1197, the details of the special symbol determination process 41 (S231A) in the forty-first control example will be described. This special symbol determination process 41 (S231A) is a process executed in place of the special symbol determination process 40 (see FIG. 1167) in the above-described 40th control example, and is similar to the special symbol determination process 40 (see FIG. 1167). Second, it is a process for executing a special symbol lottery.

Of the special symbol determination processing 41 (see FIG. 1197) in this 41st control example, in each processing of S301 to S305, each of S301 to S305 of the special symbol determination processing 40 in the 40th control example (see FIG. 1197) The same processing as is performed. Also, in the special symbol determination process 41 (see FIG. 1197) in the 41st control example, in the process of S303, when it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol this time is not a big hit (S303: No), then this time It is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit (S321A), and when it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S321A: Yes), the lottery result of the special symbol is set to a small hit (S322A ), the small winning symbol indicating the small winning type corresponding to the value of the small winning type counter C5 is set as the small winning symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b (S323A), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S321A, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small win (S321A: No), the processes of S322A and S323A are skipped and the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1198, the details of the special symbol variation pattern selection process 41 (S232A) in the forty-first control example will be described. This special symbol variation pattern selection process 41 (S232A) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation pattern selection process 40 (see FIG. 1169) in the above-described 40th control example, and the special symbol variation pattern selection process 40 ( Figure 1169 reference), it is the processing in order to select the fluctuation pattern of the 1st design which responds to the lottery result of the special design. FIG. 1198 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation pattern selection process 41 (S232A).

Of the special symbol variation pattern selection process 41 (see FIG. 1198) in this 41st control example, in each process of S401 to S408, the special symbol variation pattern selection process 40 (see FIG. 1169) in the above-described 40th control example The same processing as each processing of S401 to S408 is executed. In addition, in the special symbol variation pattern selection process 41 (see FIG. 1198) in the forty-first control example, in the process of S401, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery result of this time is not a big hit (S401: No), then , It is determined whether or not the lottery result of this special symbol is a small hit (S431A), and if it is determined to be a small hit (S431A: Yes), a small hit type selection table 202fk (Fig. See) to determine the type of small hit (S432A), and the process proceeds to S403. On the other hand, in the processing of S431A, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery result of this time is not a small hit (S431A: No), the processing of S432A is skipped and the processing proceeds to S403.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1199, details of the time saving update process 41 (S233A) in the forty-first control example will be described. This time saving update process 41 (S233A) is a process executed in place of the time saving update process 40 (see FIG. 1171) in the fortieth control example described above. It is a process for terminating the time saving state when it is determined that the time saving end condition is satisfied while updating various counter values for determining the end condition.

Of the time saving update process 41 (see FIG. 1199) in this 41st control example, in each process of S601 to S605 and S607, S601 to S605 of the time saving update process 40 (see FIG. 1171) in the above-described 40th control example , and S607 are executed. In addition, in the time saving update process 41 (see FIG. 1199) in the 41st control example, when the process of S605 ends, the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t, the small hit counter 203s, and the specified number of reserved ball counter 203ka are all set to 0 It is reset (S631A), and the process proceeds to S607. In the processing of this S631A, as various counters for determining the time saving end condition, the normal electric operation counter 203ka is deleted from the 40th control example, and the special figure 2 counter 203t and the specified reserved ball number counter 203ka are added. This is a change that accompanies the fact that

In addition, in the time saving update process 41 (see FIG. 1199) in the present 41st control example, in the process of S604, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not 0 (S604: No), then a small hit is won A small hitting time saving update process 41 for determining whether or not the time saving end condition (second end condition) based on the number of times is established is executed (S632A). The details of this small winning time saving update process 41 (S632A) will be described later with reference to FIG. When the processing of S632A is completed, it is then determined whether or not the variable display of the special symbol for which the stop display is set this time is the variable display of the second special symbol (S633A), and it is not the variable display of the second special symbol ( (S633A: No), since there is no possibility that the time-saving end condition is satisfied, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S633A, if it is determined that the second special symbol is a variable display (S633A: Yes), the counter value of the special figure 2 counter 203t is updated by subtracting 1 (S634A), and the special after subtraction A remaining time reduction command indicating the counter value of the counter 203t in FIG. 2 is set (S635A).

When the processing of S635A ends, then it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t after subtraction is 0 (S636A), and the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t after subtraction is 0. In the case (S636A: Yes), each process of S637A to S639A for ending the time saving state and setting to the normal state is executed. Specifically, the game state is set to the normal state by storing data indicating the normal state in the game state storage area 203g (S637A), and the time reduction counter 203h, the small hit counter 203s, and the specified number of reserved balls counter By resetting all the values of 203ka to 0, the time saving end condition is cleared (S638A). Next, a state command indicating the normal state is set (S639A), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S636A, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t after subtraction is not 0 (S636A: No), because it means that the time saving state continues, S637A ~ S639A Each process is skipped and the present process is ended as it is.

Next, with reference to Drawing 1200, the details of small hit time saving update processing 41 (S632A) mentioned above are explained. Drawing 1200 is a flow chart which shows this small hit time saving update processing 41 (S632A). When this small hit time saving update process 41 (S632) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this special symbol is a small hit (S701), and if it is determined that it is not a small hit ( S701: No), since the time-saving end condition (second end condition) based on the number of winning small wins cannot be established, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S701, if it is determined that the lottery result of this special symbol is a small hit (S701: Yes), then it is determined whether the current state is the MAX bonus mode (time saving state C). Determine (S711A).

In the process of S711A, if it is determined that the current state is the MAX bonus mode (time saving state C) (S711A: Yes), wait for the subtraction of the small hit counter 203s by setting the subtraction waiting flag 203kc to ON ( delay) (S712A), and the process ends. In the time-saving state C, by waiting for the subtraction of the small hit counter 203s, the time-saving state can be continued until the generation timing of V winning (entering the game ball into the specific area 650e3). That is, when a small prize is won in the time saving state C and a V prize is generated during the small prize game and a big prize is won, the game state at the time of winning the big prize can be set to the time saving state. That is, when a jackpot is won in the time saving state C, the time saving state C can be set regardless of the jackpot type. Therefore, once shifting to the time-saving state C, an extremely advantageous situation in which the time-saving state C and the big win are repeated until the time-saving limit number of times is reached can be surely established, so that the player's interest in the game is improved. be able to.

On the other hand, in the processing of S711A, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not the MAX bonus mode (time saving state C) (S711A: No), the counter value of the small hit counter 203s is updated by subtracting 1 (S702) , and determines whether or not the counter value after the subtraction has reached 0 (S703). In the process of S703, when it is determined that the value of the small win counter 203s has been updated to 0 (S703), each process of S704, S713A, and S706 for ending the time saving state and setting to the normal state is executed. . Specifically, the game state is set to the normal state by storing data indicating the normal state in the game state storage area 203g (S704), and the time reduction counter 203h, the special figure 2 counter 203t, and the prescribed number of reserved balls By resetting all the values of the counter 203ka to 0, the time saving end condition is cleared (S713A). Next, a state command indicating a normal state is set (S706), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S703A, if it is determined that the value of the small hit counter 203s after subtraction is not 0 (S703A: No), it means that the time saving state continues, so S704, S713A, and Each process of S706 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1201, details of the starting winning process 41 (S112A) will be described. This start winning process 41 (S112A) is a process executed in place of the starting winning process (see FIG. 970) in the above-described 40th control example (and 32nd control example). Similarly, when a game ball enters either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), each counter value obtained according to the entrance is is stored in a storage area (first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b) according to the type of the detected ball entrance. FIG. 1201 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process 41 (S112A).

In each of the processes of S801 to S809 and S811 to S813 of the starting winning process 41 (see FIG. 1201) in the forty-first control example, the starting winning process in the forty-first control example (and thirty-second control example) ( 970) are executed. In addition, in the starting winning process 41 (see FIG. 1201) in the 41st control example, when the process of S809 ends, the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is a value smaller than 4 or not. is determined (S821A), and if it is determined that the value is not less than 4 (that is, it is the upper limit value of 4) (S821A: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S821A, if it is determined that the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than 4 (S821A: Yes), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (N2 ) is updated by adding 1 (S811), and then the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e after updating is reserved for determining whether or not the time saving end condition (fourth end condition) is satisfied. A number-of-balls determination process is executed (S822A), and the process proceeds to S812. The details of this pending ball number determination process (S822A) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Thus, in the forty-first control example, the upper limit number of the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is set to four as in the case of the first special symbol. As a result, variation can be given to the number of remaining reserved balls of the second special symbol when the time-saving state is terminated and the state returns to the normal state, so that the number of substantial second special symbols according to the type of the time-saving state can be given. Since the lottery opportunities can be made different and the possibility of winning a big win can also be made different, it is possible to further improve the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1202, details of the above-described pending ball number determination processing (S822A) will be described. FIG. 1202 is a flowchart showing the pending ball count determination process (S822A). In the pending ball number determination process (S822A), first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t is 1 (S851A), and if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t is not 1 ( S851A: No), which means that it is not the final change in the time saving state, and means that the time saving state cannot be ended regardless of the number of balls held (or it is not the time saving state in the first place), so this process ends as it is do.

On the other hand, in the process of S851A, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t is 1 (S851: Yes), then the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (N2) is the specified reserved ball It is determined whether or not the value is equal to or greater than the counter value of the number counter 203ka (S852A), and if the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than the counter value of the prescribed reserved ball number counter 203ka If (S852A: No), it means that the end condition (fourth end condition) of the time saving state is not satisfied, so this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S852A, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is equal to or greater than the counter value of the specified reserved ball number counter 203ka (S852A: Yes), the fourth Since it means that the end condition is satisfied, each process of S852A to S855A for ending the time saving state is executed. Specifically, the game state is set to the normal state by storing data indicating the normal state in the game state storage area 203g (S853A), the time reduction counter 203h, the small hit counter 203s, the special figure 2 counter 203t, And the time saving end condition is cleared by resetting all the values of the specified reserved ball number counter 203ka to 0 (S854A). Next, a state command indicating the normal state is set (S855A), and this processing ends.

By executing this pending ball number determination process (see FIG. 1202), the time saving state can be ended based on the number of pending balls reaching the specified number in the final variation of the time saving state. Therefore, in the time saving state A and the time saving state B, although the number of times of time saving is the same (the number of times of lottery of the second special symbol is once), the number of times of lottery of the substantial second special symbol can be made different. can. That is, in the time saving state A, the lottery for the second special symbol can be executed only twice at most from the time when the time saving state is shifted to the time saving state until all the reserved balls of the second special symbol are digested, while the time saving state. In B, since it is possible to execute the lottery of the second special symbol a maximum of four times from the time the state is shifted to the time-saving state to the time when all the reserved balls of the second special symbol are digested, it is advantageous for each type of the time-saving state. The degree can vary greatly. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1203, the details of the normal symbol variation process 41 (S113A) in the 41st control example will be described. This normal symbol variation process 41 (S113A) executes a lottery for normal symbols in the same manner as the normal symbol variation process 40 (see FIG. 1172) in the 40th control example described above, and when the normal symbol wins, This is a process for setting the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a. FIG. 1203 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process 41 (S113A).

Of the normal symbol variation processing 41 (see FIG. 1203) in the 41st control example, in each of the processes of S1101 to S1111, S1113, S1115 to S1117, and S1121, the normal symbol variation processing 40 in the 40th control example ( 1172) are executed. Also, in the normal symbol variation process 40 (see FIG. 1203) in the 41st control example, in the process of S1111, when it is determined that the current normal symbol lottery result is a normal symbol hit (S1111: Yes), The display mode of the second symbol display device 84 for winning the normal symbol is set (S1112), and the process proceeds to S1131A. In the process of S1131A, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving state (S1131A), and when it is determined that it is the time saving state (S1131A: Yes), the normal symbol fluctuation time is set to 1 second. (S1132A), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1131A, if it is determined that it is not in the time-saving state (normal state) (S1131A: No), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to 10 seconds (S1133A), and this process is terminated. do.

Also, in the normal symbol variation process 41 (see FIG. 1203) in the 41st control example, in the process of S1117, when it is determined that the current normal symbol lottery result is a normal symbol win (S1117: Yes), Next, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a time saving state (S1134A), and if it is determined that it is not a time saving state (normal state) (S1134A: No), the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a ( The displacement pattern) is set to an open pattern (displacement pattern) that is opened only once for 0.1 seconds, which makes it impossible (difficult) for a game ball to enter the second ball inlet 640 (S1135A). ), and the process proceeds to S1121. On the other hand, in the process of S1134A, when it is determined that the current game state is the time saving state (S1134A: Yes), the opening pattern (displacement pattern) of the electric accessory 640a is moved to the second ball entrance 640. An open pattern (displacement pattern) of 2 seconds×1 time that allows the ball to enter is set (S1136A), and the process proceeds to S1121.

Thus, in this 41st control example, in the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols), the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is shorter than the normal state (low probability state of normal symbols), and the normal symbol hit The opening time of the time conduction accessory 640a is lengthened. That is, in the time-saving state, the winning probability of normal symbols is increased, the variation reduction function is activated, and the opening extension function is activated. Thereby, in the time-saving state, the game ball can enter the second ball entrance 640 more efficiently.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1204, the details of the V passage processing 41 (S114A) in the 41st control example will be described. This V passing process 41 (S114A) is a process executed in place of the V passing process (see FIG. 975) in the above-described 40th control example (and 32nd control example). Similarly, this is a process for monitoring the passage of the game ball with respect to the V prize switch (specific area) 650e3 of the V prize device 650 and performing control corresponding to the passage of the game ball.

In each of the processes of S1401 to S1407 and S1409 of the V passing process 41 (see FIG. 1204) in this 41st control example, the V passing process (FIG. 975) in the above-described 40th control example (and 32nd control example) See), the same processes as those of S1401 to S1407 and S1409 are executed. In addition, in the V passing process 41 (see FIG. 1204) in the 41st control example, when the process of S1407 is finished, next, the data indicating the current game state is stored in the winning state storage area 203kd (S1411A), and subtraction is performed. It is determined whether or not the standby flag 203kc is on (S1412A). In the processing of S1412A, if it is determined that the subtraction standby flag 203kc is off (S1412A: No), the small hit counter 203s has already been updated at the start of the small hit, and the value of the small hit counter 203s is updated any more. Since it means that it is not necessary, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1412A, if it is determined that the subtraction standby flag 203kc is ON (S1412A: Yes), by winning the small hit in the time saving state C, the small hit counter 203s at the start of the small hit Since it means that the update is waiting (delayed), the value of the small hit counter 203s is updated by subtracting 1 (S1413A), and it is determined whether the value of the small hit counter 203s after the subtraction has become 0. (S1414A). In the processing of S1414A, if it is determined that the value of the small hit counter 203s has become 0 (S1414A: Yes), it means that the number of executions of the small hit game has reached the specified number of times and the second end condition has been established. Therefore, each process of S1414A to S1417A for ending the time saving state is executed. Specifically, the game state is set to the normal state by storing data indicating the normal state in the game state storage area 203g (S1415A), and the time reduction counter 203h, the special figure 2 counter 203t, and the prescribed number of reserved balls By resetting all the values of the counter 203ka to 0, the time saving end condition is cleared (S1416A). Next, a state command indicating the normal state is set (S1417A), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1414A, if it is determined that the value of the small hit counter 203s after subtraction is not 0 (S1414A: No), it means that the second end condition is not satisfied, so the time saving state This processing ends without skipping each processing of S1414A to S1417A for ending.

By executing this V passing process 41 (see FIG. 1204), when a small hit is won in the time saving state C, the update process of the small hit counter 203s that was kept waiting at the start of the small hit is performed by V winning (specified It can be executed after the ball entering the area 650e3) occurs. That is, after the data corresponding to the time-saving state is stored in the winning state storage area 203kd as the data indicating the game state when the big win is won, the time-saving state can be ended, so the game state after the big win is set. When doing so, it is possible to set a game state when a jackpot is won during the time saving state. In other words, since the time saving state C can be set regardless of the type of big win, when shifting to the time saving state C, the time saving state C and the big win can be reliably repeated until reaching the time saving limit number of times. Therefore, when shifting to the time-saving state C, the player can be made to feel as if he/she has won a jackpot of 16 rounds, so that a well-balanced game can be realized. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1205, the details of the jackpot control process 41 (S1821A) in the forty-first control example will be described. This jackpot control process 41 (S1821A) is a process executed in place of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 979) in the above-described 40th control example (and the 32nd control example), and is a process executed in place of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 979). Similarly, it is a process for performing various controls during the execution of the jackpot game.

Of the jackpot control processing 41 (see FIG. 1205) in this 41st control example, in each processing of S1901 to S1913, the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 979) in the above-described 40th control example (and 32nd control example) The same processing as each processing of S1901 to S1913 is executed. In addition, in the jackpot control process 41 (see FIG. 1205) in the 41st control example, in the process of S1913, if it is determined that it is the ending timing of the ending period (S1913: Yes), the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set. To do so, the process 41 at the end of the jackpot is executed (S1921A), and this process ends. The details of this jackpot end processing 41 (S1921A) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 1206 is a flow chart showing the jackpot ending process 41 (S1921A). In the jackpot end processing 41 (S1921A), first, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the time saving limit counter 203kb is greater than 0 (S2401A), and the counter value of the time saving limit counter 203kb is a value greater than 0. If so (S2401A: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the data stored in the winning state storage area 203kd is data corresponding to the normal state (S2402A). In the processing of S2402A, if it is determined that the data stored in the winning state storage area 203kd is data corresponding to the normal state (S2402A: Yes), the value of the time reduction limit counter 203kb is cleared to 0 (S2403A ), and the process proceeds to S2404A. On the other hand, in the processing of S2401A, if it is determined that the value of the time saving limit counter 203kb is not greater than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S2401A: No), each processing of S2402A and S2403A is skipped, The process moves to S2404A.

In the process of S2404A, the jackpot type being executed is read out (S2404A), and the time-saving end condition is set according to the read-out jackpot type and the game state corresponding to the data stored in the winning state storage area 203kd. Provided table 202ek (see FIG. 1194 (a)) specified from the data specified (S2405A), the specified time-saving end conditions (various counter values) time-saving counter 203h, small hit counter 203s, special figure 2 counter 203t, and the specified reserved ball number counter 203ka (S2406A). When the processing of S2405A ends, it is determined whether or not the time saving state is set (S2407A), and if it is determined that the time saving state is set (S2407A: Yes), 3 is set to the value of the time saving limit counter 203kb. (S2408A), the process proceeds to S2414A. On the other hand, in the process of S2407A, when it is determined that the time saving state is set and within (S2407A: No), the process of S2408A is skipped and the process proceeds to S2414A.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2402A, if it is determined that the data stored in the winning state storage area 203kd is not data corresponding to the normal state (data corresponding to the time saving state) (S2402A: No) , the value of the time saving limit counter 203kb is updated by subtracting 1 (S2409A), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving limit counter 203kb after the subtraction has become 0 (S2410A). In the processing of S2410A, if it is determined that the value of the reduced time limit counter 203kb after subtraction is not 0 (S2410A: No), the jackpot type being executed is read (S2411A), and the read jackpot type and winning state The game state corresponding to the data stored in the storage area 203kd and the time-saving end condition corresponding thereto are specified from the data defined in the time-saving provision table 202ek (see FIG. 1194(a)) (S2412A). Then, set the specified time-saving end conditions (various counter values) to each of the time-saving counter 203h, the small hit counter 203s, the special figure 2 counter 203t, and the prescribed reserved ball number counter 203ka (S2413A), and the process proceeds to S2414A and migrate.

In the processing of S2414A, the time-saving upper command indicating each place of the time-saving counter 203h, the small hit counter 203s, the special figure 2 counter 203t, and the specified reserved ball number counter 203ka is set (S2414A), and then corresponds to the state after the big hit ends. A state command is set (S2415A). Then, the end of the big win is set (S2416A), the flag 203k during the big win is set to OFF (S2417A), and this process is finished.

By executing this jackpot end processing 41 (see FIG. 1206), the game state after the jackpot ends can be preferably set in consideration of the time reduction limit number of times.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the forty-first control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the forty-first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1207 to 1211. FIG. First, details of the command determination process 41 (S3121A) in the forty-first control example will be described with reference to FIG. This command determination process 41 (S3121A) is a process executed in place of the command determination process 40 (see FIG. 1174) in the above-described 40th control example. This is processing for performing control according to the types of various commands received from the control device 110 .

Of the command determination processing 41 (see FIG. 1207) in the forty-first control example, each processing of S3201 to S3209, S3211, S3213, S3218, and S3231A performs the command determination processing 40 (see FIG. 1174) in the fortieth control example described above. ), S3201 to S3209, S3211, S3213, S3218, and S3231A are executed.

Further, in the command determination process 41 (see FIG. 1207) in the forty-first control example, when it is determined in the process of S3209 that the command received from the main controller 110 includes the winning information command (S3209 : Yes), the winning information command process 41 for performing control according to the prefetch result notified by the received winning information command is executed (S3241A), and the process proceeds to S3218. The details of this winning information command process 41 (S3241A) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, in the command determination process 41 (see FIG. 1207) in the forty-first control example, when it is determined in the process of S3213 that the command received from the main controller 110 includes a hit-related command (S3213 : Yes), instead of the win-related process 40 (S3232A) in the 40th control example, the win-related process 41 is executed (S3242A), and the process proceeds to S3218. Although not shown, in this hit-related processing 41 (S3242A), the jackpot-related processing 40 (see FIG. 1177) is replaced with the jackpot-related processing 40 (see FIG. 1177) for the hit-related processing (S3232A) in the 40th control example. The only difference is that (S3511A) is executed. The details of this jackpot related process 41 (S3511A) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1208, details of the winning information command process 41 (S3241A) will be described. FIG. 1208 is a flow chart showing this winning information command process 41 (S3241A). In the winning information command process 41 (S3241A), first, the winning information notified by the winning information command received from the main controller 110 is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S5801A). (Working time saving state A) or chance mode (working time saving state B) is determined by referring to the data in the sub-game state storage area 223g (S5802A). In the processing of S5802A, if it is determined that it is the time saving mode (time saving state A) or chance mode (time saving state B) (S5802A: Yes), the attack icon selection table 222ka (see FIG. 1195 (b)) is read ( S5803A), from the read attack icon selection table 222ka, determine the attack icon type according to the lottery result corresponding to the winning information notified by the winning information command and the counter value of the first effect counter 223f1 (S5804A) . Then, the execution of a notification effect for notifying the determined attack icon type (displayed in one of the attack icon display areas AI1 to AI4) is set (S5805A), and the icon information storage area is set according to the determined attack icon type. 223ka information is updated (S5806A), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5802A, if it is determined that the current gaming state is neither the time saving mode nor the chance mode (S5802A: No), the winning information command received this time is the winning information command based on the starting winning of the first special symbol. (S5807A), and if it is determined to be the winning information command based on the starting winning of the first special symbol (S5807: Yes), then the current gaming state is the normal mode (normal state , and there is no reserved ball of the second special symbol) (S5808A), and when it is determined that it is in the normal mode (S5808A: Yes), a lottery as to whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect is performed (S5809A) ). Next, the display of the reserved number of balls symbol in the display mode according to the lottery result is set (S5810A), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S5807A, if it is determined that the start winning of the second special symbol is detected (S5807A: No), and in the processing of S5808A, if it is determined that it is not the normal mode (S5808A: No), look-ahead effect This processing is terminated as it is without performing a lottery as to whether or not the execution of is possible. As a result, while the remaining hold of the second special symbol acquired in the time-saving state A or the time-saving state B is digested, even if the start winning of the first special symbol is detected, the pre-reading effect is not set. It is possible to draw attention to the battle production based on the remaining reservation of the 2 special symbols. In addition, in the time saving state C, it is possible to suppress the fact that the look-ahead performance is executed during the execution of the pseudo interval performance, and the player perceives that the interval game for a big win is not being performed. Therefore, it is possible to realize a more suitable presentation mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1209, the details of the jackpot related process 41 (S3511A) in the forty-first control example will be described. This jackpot related process 41 (S3511A) is a process executed instead of the jackpot related process 40 (see FIG. 1177) in the above-described 40th control example. This is a process for performing control according to the type of the received command when a jackpot-related command is received from the control device 110 . FIG. 1209 is a flow chart showing this jackpot related process 41 (S3511A).

Of the jackpot-related processing 41 (see FIG. 1209) in this 41st control example, in each of the processing of S3603, S3605, S3606, S3610, and S3614, the jackpot-related processing (see FIG. 1177) in the above-described 40th control example. The same processes as those of S3603, S3605, S3606, S3610, and S3614 are executed. In addition, in the jackpot related processing 41 (see FIG. 1209) in the forty-first control example, in the processing of S3603, when it is determined that the opening command is received from the main controller 110 (S3603: Yes), the jackpot type and remaining hit The opening performance is determined according to the value of the number counter 223kb (S3621A). That is, in the process of S3621A, if the value of the remaining hit count counter 223 kb is 0, the opening effect indicating the start of the MAX bonus is determined when the jackpot type is the jackpot C41, while the jackpot type other than the jackpot C41 is determined. If there is, determine the opening effect for the 4-round jackpot. Further, when the value of the remaining hit number counter 223 kb is 1 or more, it means that the jackpot is in the MAX bonus mode, and means that the effect is being executed to make a jackpot appear to be one jackpot for a plurality of jackpots. Therefore, the opening performance of the performance mode in which the pseudo interval performance continues from the time saving state C before winning the jackpot is determined.

When the processing of S3621A ends, the display opening command corresponding to the determined effect mode is set (S3622A), and it is determined whether or not this big win is the first big win in the MAX bonus mode (S3623A). In the processing of S3623A, when it is determined that the first jackpot in the MAX bonus mode (S3623A: Yes), 4 is set to the remaining winning number counter 223kb (S3624A), and the processing proceeds to S3614. On the other hand, in the processing of S3623A, when it is determined that the current jackpot is not the first jackpot of the MAX bonus mode (S3623A: No), the processing of S3624A is skipped and the processing proceeds to S3614.

In addition, in the jackpot related process 41 (see FIG. 1209) in the present 41st control example, when the process of S3606 ends, the number of rounds extracted in the process of S3606 and the number of rounds corresponding to the value of the remaining number counter 223 kb A command for the number of rounds for display is set (S3625A), and this process ends. In the processing of S3625A, when the value of the remaining hit number counter 223b is 0 or 4, the actual number of rounds is set, and when the value of the remaining hit number counter 223b is 3, the actual number of rounds is increased by 4. When the number of rounds is set to be more than the number of rounds and the value of the remaining number of hits counter 223b is 2, the number of rounds is set to be 8 rounds more than the actual number of rounds and the value of the number of remaining hits counter 223b is 1. In this case, the number of rounds is set to be 12 rounds larger than the actual number of rounds. As a result, in the four jackpots in the MAX bonus mode, the number of rounds can be inherited and displayed from the previous jackpot without resetting the number of rounds, so the number of times of short time limit is reached after shifting to MAX bonus mode. In between, the player can be made to feel as if the 1 16-round jackpot continues. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

Also, in the jackpot related process 41 (see FIG. 1209) in the forty-first control example, in the process of S3610, when it is determined that the ending command is received from the main controller 110 (S3610: Yes), the ending effect is set. Ending command processing 41 for the purpose is executed (S3626A), and this processing ends. The details of this ending command process 41 (S3626A) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 1210 is a flowchart showing ending command processing 41 (S3626A) described above. As shown in FIG. 1210, in the ending command process 41 (S3626A) in the 41st control example, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining hit count counter 223 kb is greater than 0 (S5901A). If it is determined that the counter value of the number counter 223 kb is not greater than 0 (that is, 0) (S5901A: No), it means that it is not a jackpot in the MAX bonus mode. A display ending command indicating an ending effect is set (S5902A), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5901A, if it is determined that the value of the remaining number counter 223kb is greater than 0 (value of 1 or more) (S5901A: Yes), subtract 1 from the value of the remaining number counter 223kb It is updated (S5903A), and it is determined whether or not the counter value after subtraction has become 0 (S5904A). In the processing of S5904A, if it is determined that the value of the remaining hit number counter 223 kb after subtraction has not been updated to 0 (S5904A: No), it means that the MAX bonus mode continues even after the end of the jackpot, so ending As the effect, the start of the ending effect in which the pseudo interval effect is executed is set (S5905A), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5904A, if it is determined that the value of the remaining winning number counter 223kb after subtraction has become 0 (S5904A: Yes), each data of the winning information storage area 223a is read (S5906A), and the most The attack icon corresponding to the old prize information is determined by referring to the attack icon selection table 222ka (S5907A), and the data in the icon information storage area 223ka is updated according to the determined attack icon (S5908A). When the processing of S5908A is finished, next, the attack icon corresponding to the prize winning information that is newer than the prize winning information that was referred to in the determination for determining the attack icon type last time is determined by referring to the attack icon selection table 222ka (S5909A). ), the data in the icon information storage area 223ka is updated according to the determined attack icon (S5910A).

When the processing of S5910A ends, it is determined whether or not the attack icon types corresponding to all winning information have been determined (S5911A), and it is determined that the attack icon types corresponding to all winning information have not been determined. If so (S5911A: No), by returning the process to S5909, each of S5909 to S5911A is performed until the attack icon type corresponding to all winning information is determined and reflected in the data of the icon information storage area 223ka. Execute the process repeatedly. Then, in the process of S5911A, if it is determined that the types of attack icons corresponding to all winning information have been determined (S5911A: Yes), each attack icon corresponding to each data stored in the icon information storage area 223ka is set (S5912A), and the process ends.

By the processing of S5912A, it is used in the normal state B when reaching the time saving limit number of times and ending the MAX bonus mode and shifting to the normal state B in which a maximum of 4 second special symbol holding balls are digested. It is possible to realize a novel performance mode in which the player is notified in advance of the types of up to four attack icons by the ending performance. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1211, details of the variable effect setting process 41 (S4311A) in the forty-first control example will be described. This variable effect setting process 41 (S4311A) is a process executed in place of the variable effect setting process 40 (see FIG. 1180) in the above-described 40th control example, and is similar to the variable effect setting process 40 (see FIG. 1180). Second, it is a process for setting the effect mode of the variable display effect of the third symbol to be executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. FIG. 1211 is a flow chart showing this variable effect setting process 41 (S4311A).

In the processes of S4401 and S4403 of the variable effect setting process 41 (see FIG. 1211) in the forty-first control example, S4401 of the variable effect setting process 40 (see FIG. 1180) in the fortieth control example described above, and The same processing as each processing of S4403 is executed. Also, in the variation effect setting process 41 (see FIG. 1211) in the 41st control example, in the process of S4403, when it is determined that the variation pattern command received this time is not a variation pattern command corresponding to the second special symbol ( S4403: No), based on the lottery result of the variation notified by the variation pattern command and the variation pattern extracted from the variation pattern command, the effect mode of the variation display effect is determined (S4421A), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4403, if it is determined that the variation pattern command received this time is the variation pattern command corresponding to the second special symbol (S4403: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current is the MAX bonus mode. (S4422A), if it is determined that the mode is not the MAX bonus mode (S4422A: No), the oldest data among the data in the icon information storage area 223ka is read (S4423A), and the read data and the current lottery result are combined. The production mode of the variable production corresponding to is set (S4424A). For example, the data in the icon information storage area 223ka is the data corresponding to the remaining attack icon, and if the result of the lottery for the second special symbol is lost, the monster character 821 is attacked by the remaining attack corresponding to the remaining attack icon. A performance mode is determined in which the counterattack is set, the last attack is avoided, and the failure is notified. When the process of S4424A ends, the data read this time is deleted from the icon information storage area 223ka (S4425A), and this process ends. The attack corresponding to the same attack icon as the attack icon previously stored in the icon information storage area 223ka and displayed in the attack icon display areas AI1 to AI4 can be reliably carried out at the start winning. Therefore, it is possible to realize a more suitable presentation mode.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4422A, if it is determined that the current gaming state is the MAX bonus mode (S4422A: Yes), the variable display mode during execution of the pseudo interval effect (that is, most of the main display area Dm A pseudo interval effect is performed in the area, and a variable display effect is performed in a relatively inconspicuous manner in the small display area Dm8) is set (S4426A), and this processing ends.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 41st control example, even though the number of times of saving time (specified number of times of the total number of times of lottery of special symbols, specified number of times of total number of times of lottery of second special symbols) is common Regardless, after moving to the time saving state until the lottery of the second special symbol based on all the start winning prizes detected during the time saving state is completed, the number of times of lottery of the substantial second special symbol is different. We have set up a short-time state. More specifically, a time-saving state A in which the special symbol lottery can be executed substantially twice and a time-saving state B in which the special symbol lottery can be substantially executed four times are provided. Here, in this 40th control example, as the end condition of the time saving state, the number of lotteries of special symbols (the total number of lotteries of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) has reached a specified number of times. A first end condition to be established, a second end condition established based on the fact that the number of executions of the small winning game has reached a specified number of times, and a second end condition established based on the fact that the number of lotteries of the second special symbol has reached the specified number of times. In addition to the third termination condition, a fourth termination condition established based on the fact that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol reaches a specified number during execution of the time saving final variation is provided. The time saving state A and the time saving state B share the first to third end conditions, and differ only in the fourth end condition, thereby making the substantial number of lotteries of the second special symbols different. That is, in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state is terminated when the number of pending balls of the second special symbol becomes one during the variable display of the last second special symbol of the time-saving state, while in the time-saving state B , By constructing the time saving state to end when the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern reaches 3 during the variable display of the last second special pattern in the time saving state, the substantial advantage degree is increased. It is configured to be different. As a result, it is possible to diversify the playability, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the 41st control example, in addition to the time-saving states A and B, a time-saving state C in which a time-saving end condition that will almost certainly continue until the next big hit is set is provided, and the number of consecutive times of the time-saving state (The number of repetitions of the time saving state and the jackpot are repeated without going through the normal state) is set to a limit (the time saving limit number of times is set). Then, if the execution condition of the jackpot game is satisfied during the time saving state (execution of the jackpot game is set), as long as the time saving limit number of times has not been reached, the game state after the jackpot ends is the time saving state C configured to be set. That is, once the time-saving state C is set, the time-saving state C and the big win are repeated until the time-saving limit number of times is reached (the jackpot winning for the time-saving limit number of times is almost decided). and By configuring in this way, the player can be strongly expected to shift to the time saving state C, so that the player's interest in the game can be enhanced. In addition, in this 41st control example, 1 jackpot game is performed as an effect mode from the transition to the time saving state C until the time saving limit number of times is reached (while the big hit and the time saving state C are repeated). Since it is configured to set a series of presentation modes as if they are continuing, even though the jackpot of four rounds is actually won four times, one jackpot win is worth of prize balls for 16 rounds. can be made to make the player feel as if he or she has won In other words, it is possible to make the player feel as if an extremely lucky situation has occurred in which a relatively large amount of prize balls can be obtained at one time, so that the player's interest in the game can be further enhanced.

Furthermore, in the 41st control example, in the time saving state C, by setting the fluctuation time of the normal symbols, the fluctuation time of the special symbols, and the release pattern of the normal symbols so that the reserved balls can be easily stored up to the upper limit number. When the time-saving state C and the big hit are repeated until the time-saving limit number of times is reached and the state shifts to the normal state, the upper limit number (four times) of the second special symbol reserved balls are likely to be held. are doing. As a result, even after falling to the normal state, the degree of advantage is high (the combined probability of the big and small wins is about 1/3, and the most advantageous with a relatively high rate when winning the big or small win Since it is possible to give the player the opportunity to execute the lottery of the second special symbol four times (which is set in the time saving state C), the degree of advantage after reaching the time saving limit number of times can be compared with other time saving states. It can be more than advantageous. Specifically, the expectation of a big hit is higher than the time-saving state A in which the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed substantially twice, and the time-saving state in which the lottery of the second special symbol can be substantially executed four times. It is possible to form an advantageous state with a jackpot expectation equivalent to B. That is, the normal state B set based on having reached|attained the time-saving limit frequency|count in the time-saving state C can be substantially made into the advantage degree equivalent to the time-saving state B. In this 41st control example, the game state after the end of the jackpot is always one of the time saving state B, the time saving state C, and the normal state B except for the first hit. In other words, from the player's point of view, the game state after the big win is configured to be either the time saving state B or the normal state B (while the time saving state C and the big win are repeated, the game state is 1 (Set to look as if the jackpot continues), so if a jackpot occurs during the time-saving state, the second special symbol lottery opportunity given after the jackpot ends will be given the same number of times (4 times). can be Therefore, when the time saving limit number of times is reached, the degree of advantage is suppressed from being lowered, and when winning a jackpot (MAX bonus) that shifts to the time saving state C, the player is given great joy. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the 40th control example, when the small winning game of the second special symbol is started in the time saving state A or the time saving state B, the second end condition is satisfied at the start of the small winning (the small winning counter 203s On the other hand, when the small winning game of the second special symbol is started in the time saving state C, the second end condition is established after the game ball passes through the specific area 650e3 (small decrement the winning counter 203s). By configuring in this way, when a small hit is won after shifting to the time saving state A or the time saving state B, the second special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state or during the time saving state Regardless of whether it is a lottery of the second special symbol started after the transition to the normal state based on the second special symbol retained ball retained in the game state at the time when the game ball passes through the specific area 650e3 ( The game state at the time when the execution of the jackpot game is set) can be set to the normal state. Therefore, regardless of whether it is the second special symbol lottery started during the time saving state or the second special symbol lottery started after shifting to the normal state, the degree of advantage at the time of winning the jackpot is determined. Can be shared. In addition, in the time saving state C, when a small win is won, the game state at the time of winning (the game state at the time when the execution of the big win game is set) can be fixed to the time saving state, so the time saving limit number of times can be set. It is possible to suppress the continuation of the repetition of the time saving state C and the big win after exceeding the limit, or conversely, the end of the repetition of the time saving state C and the big win before reaching the time saving limit number of times.

In addition, in this 41st control example, although it was set as the structure which sets the time-saving limit frequency to 3 times, it is not restricted to this and the time-saving limit frequency can be arbitrarily determined. If the number of time reduction limits is increased, the number of winnings of the jackpot in the MAX bonus mode can be increased, so that the degree of advantage can be increased when the mode is shifted to the MAX bonus mode. Also, if you reduce the number of times of the time saving limit, it is possible to reduce the number of times of the time saving state C set in the MAX bonus mode. It is possible to make it difficult to cause the phenomenon that the performance period of the interval performance becomes long and the game in the MAX bonus mode is delayed.

<First modification of the forty-first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1212 to 1215, a first modification of the above-described 40th control example will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-first control example described above, in the final fluctuation of the time-saving state, a time-saving end condition (fourth end condition) is established when the number of retained balls reaches a specified number, and the fourth end condition is established. By providing variations in the specified number of times until the game is played, it is configured to provide a plurality of time-saving states with different performances (jackpot winning rates).

On the other hand, in the first modified example, the control is made simpler by abolishing the fourth end condition, and a game property similar to that of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described 41st control example is realized. First, referring to FIG. 1212, a transition method between states in the first modified example will be described. As shown in FIG. 1212, in the first modified example, mainly four types of states (modes) are provided. That is, the normal state A, the normal state B, and the time saving state C in the forty-first control example described above are provided. Further, the time saving states A and B are deleted, and the time saving state D is newly established. In the time-saving state D, the first end condition is satisfied by executing the variable display of the special symbols a total of 10 times, the second end condition is satisfied by executing the small winning game once, and the second special symbol. This is a game state in which the third end condition is satisfied by executing the variable display of . Therefore, when the right-hand shot is continued in the time-saving state A, the number of reserved balls accumulates up to the upper limit (four pieces), and the time-saving state is ended at the fluctuation stop timing of the second special symbol. Even in such a configuration, when the small winning is won, the value of the small winning counter 203s is subtracted at the start of the small winning, so the time saving state should be terminated before passing through the specific area 650e3. can be done. Therefore, based on the case where a small hit is won in one lottery of the second special symbol executed in the time saving state D, and the held ball held during the variable display of the second special symbol executed in the time saving state D The game state at the time of winning can be set to the normal state both in the case of winning a small win in the lottery of the second special symbols executed up to four times after the shift to the normal state. Therefore, regardless of whether it is the second special symbol lottery that started during the time saving state or the second special symbol lottery that started after the time saving state is ended, expect to go to the MAX bonus mode degree can be shared. Therefore, in the lottery of each second special symbol until all the reserved balls of the second special symbol are digested after shifting to the time saving state D, it is possible to make the player have substantially the same expectation. can.

First, with reference to the upper part of FIG. 1212, a method of shifting from the normal state A (normal mode) to another state in the first modified example will be described. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 1212, there is a possibility of shifting from normal state A (normal mode) to another state only when a big win is won. That is, as shown in FIG. 1212, in the normal state A, the lottery of the first special symbol becomes a jackpot with a probability of about 1/320, and when the jackpot A41 determined at a rate of 50% is determined, the jackpot ends. The subsequent game state is set to the time saving state D. On the other hand, when a jackpot B41 determined at a rate of 50% is determined when a jackpot is won in the normal state A, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the normal state A again. Therefore, when a big win is won in the special symbol lottery in the normal state A, it is possible to strongly expect a big win A41.

Next, with reference to the second row from the top of FIG. 1212, a method of shifting from the time saving state D (time saving mode) to another state will be described. As shown in the second row from the top of FIG. 1212, from the time-saving state D (time-saving mode) to another state, when winning a big hit, when winning a small hit, and all the reserved balls of the second special symbol May migrate if ingested. More specifically, as shown in the second row from the top of FIG. 1212, if the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery in the time saving state D, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is the time saving state regardless of the jackpot type. set to C. Also, as shown in the second row from the top of FIG. %, the game state after the end of the big win is set to the time saving state C on the condition that the big win is won by passing through the specific area 650e3 in the small win A41. be. On the other hand, when a small hit is won and a small hit B41 is determined at a rate of 46% as a small hit type, the condition is that the big hit is won by passing through the specific area 650e3 in the small hit B41. , the game state after the end of the jackpot is again set to the time-saving state D (the time-saving state D is looped). In the first modification, as in the 41st control example described above, since the time saving state C is more advantageous than the time saving state B, when a small hit is won in the time saving state D, the small hit A41 It is possible to make the player expect more strongly that the time-saving state C will be set by winning the election. On the other hand, when all the held balls of the second special symbol acquired in the time saving state A are digested, the state after digestion becomes the normal state A. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game property that makes the player strongly expect to win a big win or a small win with a probability of about 1/3.5 during the five times of lottery opportunities of the second special symbols. can improve interest in

Next, with reference to the second row from the bottom of FIG. 1212, a method of shifting from the time saving state C (MAX bonus mode) to another state will be described. As shown in the second row from the bottom of FIG. 1212, there is a possibility of shifting from the time saving state C (MAX bonus mode) to another state only when the time saving limit number of times is reached. More specifically, as shown in the second row from the bottom of FIG. , the game state is set to the normal state B. On the other hand, as shown in the second row from the bottom of FIG. The game state after the end of the jackpot is again set to the time-saving state C (the time-saving state is looped). For this reason, once it shifts to the time saving state C, a very advantageous state is formed in which the time saving state C and the jackpot are repeated until the time saving limit number of times is reached. In addition, as in the forty-first control example described above, in the first modification, the number of rounds of the jackpot is all 4 rounds, and the number of times of the time saving limit is set to 3 times. 4 jackpots are guaranteed, including the jackpot that has become. In other words, an advantageous state is formed in which prize balls for 16 rounds can be obtained almost at once, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to the lower part of FIG. 1212, a method of shifting from normal state B (retraction mode) to another state will be described. As shown in the lower part of FIG. 1212, from the normal state B (retraction mode) to another state, when winning a big hit, when winning a small hit, and the second special held during the time saving state C There is a possibility of migration when all the holding balls of the design are digested. More specifically, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 1212, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery in the normal state B, regardless of the jackpot type, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the time saving state C. be. In addition, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 1212, in the normal state B, when it becomes a small hit that is elected with a probability of about 1/3.5 in the lottery of the second special symbol, at a rate of 54% as a small hit type When the determined small win A41 is reached, the game state after the big win is set to the time saving state C on condition that the big win is won by passing through the specific area 650e3 in the small win A41. On the other hand, when a small hit is won and a small hit B41 is determined at a rate of 46% as a small hit type, the condition is that the big hit is won by passing through the specific area 650e3 in the small hit B41. , the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to the time saving state D. As described above, since the time saving state C is more advantageous than the time saving state B, when the small hit is won in the normal state B, it is stronger that the small hit A41 is elected and the time saving state C is set. can be expected. On the other hand, when all the reserved balls of the second special symbol are digested in the normal state B (all are removed), the state after digestion becomes the normal state A.

Thus, in the first modification, in the time-saving state D and the normal state B, when a small hit that wins with a high probability of about 1/3.5 is won, the small hit type is a small hit A41 It is configured such that the profit obtained by the player is largely different depending on whether it is decided or the small win B41. Therefore, it wins the small win A41 and shifts to the time saving state C, and whether it is possible to acquire a large amount of prize balls (balls for 16 rounds) at once, wins the small win B41 and shifts to the time saving state B Since it is possible to make the player play the game while paying more attention to the situation, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Electrical configuration in the first modification of the forty-first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1214 and 1215, details of ROM 202 provided in main controller 110 in the first modified example will be described. Here, in the ROM 202 in the first modified example, the specified contents of the special symbol 2 random number table 202ak2 constituting the first winning random number table 202ak are partially changed from the ROM 202 in the above-described 41st control example. The difference is that there is a partial change in the specified content of the jackpot type selection table 202bk, and that the specified content of the time reduction grant table 202ek is partially changed. First, with reference to FIG. 1214(a), the details of the special symbol 2 random number table 202ak2 in the first modified example will be described. FIG. 1214(a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special symbol 2 random number table 202ak2. As shown in FIG. 1214 (a), in the special symbol 2 random number table 202ak2 in the first modification, as a range of random numbers (value of the first per random number counter C1) determined as a big hit, the above-mentioned 205 random numbers (counter values) from "0 to 204" are defined in association with each other. On the other hand, in the first modification, the range of 18725 random numbers (counter values) of "205 to 18929" is defined in association with the range of random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be small hits. This control example is modified from the 41st control example in that

Of the 65536 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) judged to be a big win is 205, so a big win is made in the lottery of the second special symbol. The probability of winning is about 1/320 (205/65536) as in the 41st control example. In addition, since the number of random numbers (counter values) determined as small hits is 18725 out of 65536 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning random number counter C1, the lottery for the second special symbol The probability of winning a small prize is about 1/3.5 (18725/65536).

Thus, in the first modified example, the above-described 41st control example is modified so that the probability of a small hit is lowered. Since this is set to the game state in which the second special symbol lottery opportunity is given five times as the time saving state D, the probability that the small hit probability remains in the 41st control example (about 1/3), the game This is because there is a risk that it will be excessively advantageous for the person.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1214(b), details of the jackpot type selection table 202bk in the first modified example will be described. FIG. 1214(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the jackpot type selection table 202bk in the first modified example. This jackpot type selection table 202bk differs from the jackpot type selection table 202k (FIG. 1191(c)) in the above-described 41st control example only in that the determination ratio of jackpot A41 and jackpot B41 is changed. ing. That is, as shown in FIG. 1214 (b), as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", and "jackpot A41" is defined in correspondence. A "jackpot B41" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "50 to 99". That is, in the first modification, 50 random numbers (counter values) are distributed to each of the "jackpot A41" and the "jackpot B41". It is configured such that "jackpot A41" and "jackpot B41" are determined at a ratio of 50:50. This is due to the change so that the normal state A is set as the game state after the end of the big win B41. This is intended to prevent excessive disadvantages for those involved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1215, the details of the time reduction provision table 202ek in the first modified example will be described. As shown in FIG. 1215, in the first modification, the counter value of the specified reserved ball number counter 203ka is deleted from the time saving grant table 202ek (see FIG. 1194(a)) in the 41st control example. They are different in that respect. In addition, the game state after the jackpot A41 and jackpot D41 won in the normal state is changed to the time-saving state D. - 特許庁That is, the difference is that the value "10" of the time saving counter 203h, the value "1" of the small hit counter 203s, and the value "1" of the special figure 2 counter 203t are defined in association with each other. Further, the game state is changed to the normal state A after the jackpot B41 won in the normal state. That is, the difference is that the value "0" of the time saving counter 203h, the value "0" of the small hit counter 203s, and the value "0" of the special figure 2 counter 203t are defined in association with each other. Other specified contents are the same as those of the forty-first control example described above, and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1213, the details of RAM 203 provided in main controller 110 in the first modified example will be described. FIG. 1213 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first modified example. As shown in FIG. 1213, the RAM 203 in the first modified example is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the above-described 41st control example (see FIG. 1190(b)) in that the normal electric operation number counter 203ka is deleted. They differ only in respect. This is because the fourth end condition in the above-described 41st control example (end condition established when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol in the final time-saving fluctuation becomes the specified number) is abolished as the time-saving end condition. attributed to Since other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-first control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the first modification, by abolishing the time-saving end condition (fourth end condition) that is established when the number of reserved balls reaches the specified number, the above-described 41st control A simpler control than the pachinko machine 10 in the example is realized, and a game property similar to that of the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-first control example described above is realized.

<Second modification of the forty-first control example>
Next, a second modification of the forty-first control example described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 1216 to 1231. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described 41st control example, as the end condition of the time saving state, the fourth end established based on the number of pending balls of the second special symbol in the last variation display of the time saving state becoming the specified number By introducing conditions, it is configured so that the number of reserved balls does not accumulate to the upper limit number in the time saving state B, the lottery opportunity of the second special symbol after shifting to the time saving state B, and after shifting to the time saving state C. The lottery opportunity for the second special pattern in the normal state B, which is shifted when the time-saving limit number of times is reached, is made the same number of times, and it is configured to suppress the reduction of the big win expectation when the time-saving limit number of times is reached. . In addition, it is configured such that the degree of expectation for a big hit between the time saving state B and the normal state B is substantially the same.

On the other hand, in the second modification, without adopting the fourth end condition in the 41st control example described above, the second special symbol lottery opportunity after shifting to a predetermined time saving state, and the time saving limit number of times Novel control is realized to equalize the lottery opportunity of the second special symbol after arrival. More specifically, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed in the normal state, it is configured to win any one of the big win, the small win, or the time-saving symbol, and the upper limit of the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol. Set the value to 1. Then, after reaching the time-saving limit number of times and setting the normal state B, the time-saving pattern is won in the lottery based on the remaining reservation of the second special pattern, and the second special pattern lottery until the second time-saving state ends. The number of lotteries is configured to be the same as the number of lotteries in the time saving state B.例文帳に追加By configuring in this way, even if the relatively complicated process of monitoring the number of pending balls in the time saving final fluctuation and determining whether the time saving state ends or not is not performed, when the time saving state B is set and the time saving limit After reaching the number of times, the lottery opportunity for the second special symbol can be made common.

First, with reference to FIG. 1216 and FIG. 1217, a characteristic presentation mode in the second modified example will be described. Drawing 1216 (a) is a figure showing an example of the production mode of time saving state A which shifts with a comparatively high probability after the first hit occurs in this 2nd modification. Here, in the time saving state A in the second modification, the lottery opportunity of the second special symbol is given five times. That is, the time saving state A is ended based on the fact that the number of lotteries of the second special symbols has reached five times. Also, during the time saving state, it is configured to be impossible (difficult) to obtain the second special symbol reserved ball. That is, the period from the start of the variation of the normal symbols to the end of the winning of the normal symbols is surely longer than the variation time of the second special symbols. As a result, the number of lotteries for the second special symbols in the time saving state A can be fixed every time, so that the big hit expectation degree in the time saving state A can be made common every time.

As shown in FIG. 1216(a), when the game shifts to the time-saving state A, an effect in which the adventurer character 811 and the monster character 821 stare at each other is executed. In addition, the text "Hit the attack within 5 times!!" is displayed in the display area HR10. In addition, the characters "Right shot" are displayed in the small display area Dm4, and the characters indicating the remaining number of times of time saving are displayed in the small display area Dm5 (in the example of FIG. 1216 (a), "5 times remaining") character) is displayed. Furthermore, the characters "breakthrough challenge" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. According to these display contents, if the adventurer character 811 can hit the monster character 821 by the time the variable display of the second special symbol is completed five times, the big hit is confirmed and the rush (time saving mode) is performed. ) can be easily understood by the player.

FIG. 1216(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is started in the time saving state A. FIG. As shown in FIG. 1216(b), when the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 in the time saving state A and the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the variable display of the third symbol is started. At the same time, an effect is executed in which the adventurer character 811 attacks the monster character 821 . In this presentation, if the monster character 821 can be hit with an attack, it is reported that a big win (or a small win in which a big win is substantially confirmed) has been won, and if the attack is avoided, a loss is reported. be.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1217 (a), the display mode at the start of the time saving mode (time saving state B) or the pullback mode (normal state B, second time saving state) in the second modification will be described. . As shown in FIG. 1217(a), the number of times of time saving is set to 11 times in the time saving mode and the pullback mode in the second modified example. Along with this, as shown in FIG. 1217(a), the number of remaining time reductions displayed in the small display area Dm5 is set to "11 remaining times". In addition, the text "Hit an attack within 11 times!" is displayed in the display area HR10. These display contents make it possible for the player to easily understand that in the time-saving mode and the pullback mode, 11 second special symbol lottery opportunities are given.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1217 (b), in the case of winning a big hit or a small hit in the time saving state C at the end of the MAX bonus mode (time saving limit number of times) in the second modification A presentation mode will be described. In the second modification, as in the 41st control example described above, the period from the start of the first jackpot in which the time saving state C is set until the time saving limit number of times is reached, 1 of 16 It is configured to execute a series of effects as if the round jackpot continues. Then, in the pullback mode that shifts after reaching the time-saving limit number of times, on the premise that one second special design ball is reserved, the time-saving design is selected in the first second special design lottery in the normal state. By winning the lottery and shifting to the second time saving state, the total number of lotteries of the second special symbols is set to 11 in common in the time saving mode and the withdrawal mode. Conversely, if the second special symbol holding ball is not acquired when the time saving limit number of times is reached, the pullback mode is not established, and the disadvantageous normal state A (normal mode ), an extremely unfavorable situation may arise. For this reason, in the second modified example, an effect is executed to prompt the player to store the reserved balls in the final hit variation in the MAX bonus mode. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1217(b), a rightward arrow image YG accompanied by characters "Aim right" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during execution of the pseudo interval effect. be. In addition, the time gauge ga3 notifies the remaining fluctuation time. As a result, the player can easily understand that the game ball should be entered into the second ball entrance 640 while the remaining time display ga3a of the time gauge ga3 remains. .

Although illustration is omitted, when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, an icon indicating the degree of expectation for a big win or a small win according to the prediction result based on the entering ball is displayed in a treasure box. An effect appearing from 810 is executed. As a result, the player can be made to think that there is an advantage in hitting to the right, so that the reserved balls of the second special pattern are surely stored during the hit variation in the time saving state C for the number of times of the time saving limit. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the establishment of an extremely disadvantageous situation in which the state shifts to the normal state A immediately after reaching the time saving limit number of times.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1218, the corresponding relationship between the variable display of the second special symbol and the variable display of the normal symbol during the time saving state in the second modification will be described. As shown in FIG. 1218, when the state is shifted to the time-saving state and the player continues to hit to the right, first, the through gate 67 is passed and the lottery of normal symbols is performed, and the variable display of the normal symbols is executed. be. In the time saving state, as shown in FIG. 1218, the variation time of normal symbols is fixed to 1 second. Then, when the variation time of the normal symbols ends and the lottery result of the normal symbols is winning, the variation of the normal symbols stops and the winning of the normal symbols starts. That is, the electric accessory 640a is opened until two seconds have passed or one or more game balls have entered the second ball entrance 640, and two seconds have passed or one or more game balls have entered. The electric accessory 640a is closed based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640. - 特許庁When the electric accessory 640a is closed, an ending period of 6 seconds is set, and then the normal symbol winning game is terminated.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1218, the variable display of the second special symbol indicates that the game ball has entered the second ball entrance 640 during the opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with the win of the normal symbol. It is started as an opportunity. In the time saving state, the variation period of the second special symbol is fixed to 5 seconds, so the variable display of the special symbol is finished before the ending period of the winning game of the normal symbol is finished. Therefore, when the next normal pattern starts to fluctuate, the special pattern fluctuation display is already finished, and it is impossible to additionally generate the start winning of the second special pattern during the special pattern fluctuation display. (Difficult). That is, since it is configured so that it is impossible to acquire the second special symbol holding ball, basically, in the time saving state, it is terminated with the set time saving number of times, and the second special There is no carrying over the holding ball of the design. Exceptionally, only in the time saving state C, when a big hit or a small hit is won, the length (15 seconds) of the fluctuation time that can store the second special symbol holding ball is set, so only during this time , it is possible to store the ball on hold. That is, when the time-saving limit number of times is reached, it is possible to bring one holding ball of the second special symbol into possession, and in the normal state B, the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed. As a result, in the normal state B, when the second special pattern is left reserved and the small win is not won even in the big win, the time saving pattern can be won and the second time saving state can be set, and the time saving mode and the pullback mode. , the lottery opportunity for the second special symbol can be substantially the same.

Next, referring to FIG. 1219, a transition method between states in the second modified example will be described. Here, as shown in FIG. 1219, in the second modification, mainly six types of states (five types of modes) are provided. That is, normal states A and B, time saving states A to C, and a second time saving state are provided. The normal state A is set to the normal state of the normal symbol (low probability state of the normal symbol, no variation shortening, no open extension) similarly to the 41st control example described above, and the first special symbol lottery is performed by hitting left. It is a state in which the game is progressed by making it play. In addition, the time saving states A to C are set to the time saving state of the normal pattern (high probability state of the normal pattern, with fluctuation reduction, with open extension) in the same way as the 41st control example described above, and the second special by hitting to the right. It is a state in which the game proceeds by drawing lots for symbols. In addition, about time saving end conditions, the 1st end condition and the 3rd end condition are changed from the 41st control example. In addition, the fourth end condition (end condition that is established when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol in the time saving final fluctuation becomes the specified number) is abolished. That is, in the time-saving state A, the first end condition is satisfied when the number of special symbol lotteries is 10 times in total, and the third end condition is satisfied when the number of times of the second special symbol lottery is 5 times. is configured to In addition, in the time saving state B, the first end condition is established when the number of lotteries of the special symbols is 20 times in total, and the third end condition is established when the number of times of the lottery of the second special symbols is 11 times. is configured to On the other hand, in the time saving state C, the first to third end conditions are all common to the 41st control example, and the fourth end condition is not imposed on the time saving state C in the 41st control example. are doing. As described above, in the second modification, the execution interval of the normal symbol winning game is set to the second special symbol so that the number of held balls of the second special symbol is less likely to increase during the variable display of the second special symbol. is longer than the fluctuation time of In other words, the period from the end of the open period based on the win of the normal symbol to the start of the open period of the next normal symbol win is set to 7 seconds at the shortest, while the second It is configured to fix the variation time of the special symbol to 5 seconds. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress execution of the lottery for the second special symbol after the time-saving end condition is established in the time-saving state A or the time-saving state B and the state is shifted to the normal state. That is, it is possible to prevent the lottery of the second special symbol from being executed in a normal state other than the normal state B after reaching the time saving limit number of times, and to suppress the shift to the second time saving state.

In addition, the second time-saving state, which was not provided in the 41st control example, is set to the time-saving state of the normal pattern (low probability state of the normal pattern, with fluctuation reduction, with open extension), and the second special by hitting to the right It is a state in which the game is progressed by drawing lots for symbols. Unlike the time saving states A to C, this second time saving state is a game state set to a low probability state of normal symbols. Since the winning probability of normal symbols is substantially the same in the probability state (300/300 in the high probability state of the normal symbols and 299/300 in the low probability state), it is difficult for the player to perceive the difference. can. Therefore, the player can be made to think that the second time-saving state is a time-saving state having the same performance as the time-saving states A to C.

A method of shifting from normal state A (normal mode) to another state will be described with reference to the upper part of FIG. 1219 . As shown in the upper part of FIG. 1219, there is a possibility of shifting from normal state A (normal mode) to another state only when a big win is won. That is, as shown in FIG. 1219, in the normal state A, the lottery of the first special symbol becomes a jackpot with a probability of about 1/320, and when the jackpot B41 determined at a rate of 95% is determined, the jackpot ends. The later game state is set to the time saving state A. On the other hand, when a jackpot A41 determined at a rate of 5% is determined when a jackpot is won in the normal state A, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the time saving state B.例文帳に追加As described above, the time saving state B is more advantageous than the time saving state A (substantial jackpot probability is higher than the lottery of the first special symbol) Because it is possible to acquire many lottery opportunities for the second special symbol If a jackpot win is won in the normal state A, the game can be played with a strong expectation that the jackpot type will be the jackpot A41. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to the left side of the second row from the top of FIG. 1219, a method of shifting from the time saving state A (chance mode) to another state will be described. As shown on the left side of the second row from the top of FIG. 1219, from the time saving state A (chance mode) to another state, when winning a big hit, when winning a small hit, and when the number of times of time saving is consumed (second 1 or the 3rd termination condition is met). More specifically, as shown on the left side of the second row from the top of FIG. It is set to the time saving state C. Also, as shown on the left side of the second row from the top of FIG. When it becomes a small hit A41 determined at a rate of 54% as a condition, the game state after the jackpot ends is changed to the time saving state C on the condition that the jackpot is won by passing through the specific area 650e3 in the small hit A41. set. On the other hand, when a small hit is won and a small hit B41 is determined at a rate of 46% as a small hit type, the condition is that the big hit is won by passing through the specific area 650e3 in the small hit B41. , the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to the time saving state B. As described above, since the time saving state C is more advantageous than the time saving state B, when a small hit is won in the time saving state A, it is stronger that the small hit A41 is elected and the time saving state C is set. can be expected. On the other hand, when the number of times of time saving has passed in the time saving state A, the state after digestion becomes the normal state A. Therefore, game characteristics that strongly expect to win a big win with a probability of 1/320 or a small win with a probability of about 1/7.4 during the five second special symbol lottery opportunities given in the time saving state A. can be realized, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to the right side of the second row from the top of FIG. 1219, a method of shifting from the time saving state B (time saving mode) to another state will be described. As shown on the right side of the second row from the top of FIG. 1219, from the time saving state B (time saving mode) to another state, when winning a big hit, when winning a small hit, and when the number of times of time saving is consumed May migrate. More specifically, as shown on the right side of the second row from the top of FIG. It is set to the time saving state C. Also, as shown on the right side of the second row from the top of FIG. When it becomes a small hit A41 determined at a rate of 54% as a condition, the game state after the jackpot ends is changed to the time saving state C on the condition that the jackpot is won by passing through the specific area 650e3 in the small hit A41. set. Further, when all the second special symbol holding balls acquired in the time saving state B are digested, the state after digestion becomes the normal state A. On the other hand, when a small win is won and a small win B41 is determined at a rate of 46% as a small win type, the small win B41 passes through the specific area 650e3 and wins the big win. As a condition, the game state after the end of the jackpot is again set to the time saving state B (the time saving state B is looped). As a result, in the time-saving state B, as in the time-saving state A, the holding ball of the second special pattern acquired during the time-saving state is a jackpot with a probability of about 1/320 or a small probability of about 1/7.4. To further improve a player's interest in the game, because the player strongly desires to win a prize and, when winning a small prize, strongly desires to be set to a more advantageous time-saving state C.例文帳に追加be able to.

Next, with reference to the second row from the bottom of FIG. 1219, a method of shifting from the time saving state C (MAX bonus mode) to another state will be described. As shown in the second row from the bottom of FIG. 1219, there is a possibility of shifting from the time saving state C (MAX bonus mode) to another state only when the time saving limit number of times is reached. More specifically, as shown in the second row from the bottom of FIG. 1219, in the time saving state C, a total of about 1/7.2 probability of winning a jackpot or a small hit was reached, and the number of time saving limits was reached. , the game state is set to the normal state B. On the other hand, as shown in the second row from the bottom of FIG. , the game state after the end of the jackpot is again set to the time saving state C (the time saving state is looped). For this reason, once it shifts to the time saving state C, a very advantageous state is formed in which the time saving state C and the big win are repeated until the time saving limit number of times is reached. It should be noted that, in the same manner as the above-described 41st control example and the 1st modification of the 41st control example, even in this 2nd modification, the number of rounds of the jackpot is all 4 rounds, and the number of time reduction limits is set to 3 times. ing. Therefore, four big wins are guaranteed, including the big win that triggered the transition to the time saving state. In other words, an advantageous state is formed in which prize balls for 16 rounds can be obtained almost at once, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to the lower part of FIG. 1219, the method of shifting from the pullback mode (normal state B and second time saving state) to another state will be described. Here, as shown in FIG. 1219, the pull-back mode in the second modification is the normal state B, and in the normal state B, the time-saving design is elected by lottery based on the remaining reservation of the second special design (also for the jackpot It is composed of a second time-saving state that transitions by not even hitting a small hit. In the second time-saving state, the number of times of time-saving (the number of lotteries of the second special pattern) is set to 10 times, so it is suspended when the time-saving limit number of times is reached, and one second special symbol that is digested in the normal state B is reserved. Combined with one ball-based second special symbol drawing, the player may be given eleven second special symbol drawing opportunities in the pullback mode. In other words, it is possible to provide the same number of times of lottery opportunities for the second special symbols as in the time saving state B, and to form a state of substantially the same performance as in the time saving state B.

As shown in the lower part of FIG. 1219, from the pullback mode (normal state B or the second time saving state) to another state, when winning the jackpot, when winning the small hit, and the number of time saving times in the second time saving state may migrate when digested. More specifically, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 1219, when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery in the pullback mode, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the time saving state C regardless of the jackpot type. . Also, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 1219, in the pullback mode, if the second special symbol lottery is a small hit with a probability of about 1/7.4, it is determined at a rate of 54% as a small hit type. When the small win A41 is reached, the game state after the big win is set to the time saving state C on the condition that the big win is won by passing through the specific area 650e3 in the small win A41. On the other hand, when a small hit is won and a small hit B41 is determined at a rate of 46% as a small hit type, the condition is that the big hit is won by passing through the specific area 650e3 in the small hit B41. , the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to the time saving state B. As described above, since the time saving state C is more advantageous than the time saving state B, when the small hit is won in the normal state B, it is stronger that the small hit A41 is elected and the time saving state C is set. can be expected. On the other hand, when the time reduction number of times is digested in pullback mode, the state after digestion will be the normal state A.

Thus, in the second modification, when the second special symbol holding ball is digested in the normal normal state B, which shifts when the time reduction limit number of times is reached, both the small hit and the big hit are won. If not, it is configured so that time-saving design winning always occurs. And when the time saving pattern winning occurs, since it is configured to shift to the second time saving state in which the number of time saving times is 10 times, the lottery of the second special pattern is 11 times in total in the normal state B and the second time saving state. Opportunities can be given to players. That is, since the advantage degree can be substantially the same in the time saving state B and the pullback mode, when the time saving limit number of times is reached after shifting to the time saving state C, it is suppressed that the advantage degree decreases. be able to. Therefore, when shifting to the time saving state C, it is possible to make the player feel a great joy without a single dissatisfaction, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Electrical configuration in the second modification of the forty-first control example>
Next, details of ROM 202 provided in main controller 110 in the second modified example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1220 to 1223. FIG. Here, in the ROM 202 in the second modified example, the prescribed contents of the special symbol 2 random number table 202ak2 constituting the first winning random number table 202ak are partially changed from the ROM 202 in the above-described 41st control example. There is a point, the content of the second random number table 202ck is partially changed, the content of the table that constitutes the variation pattern selection table 202dk is partially changed, and the time saving grant table 202ek The difference is that the content of the provisions has been partially changed. Other configurations are the same as those of the forty-first control example described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 1220(a), the details of the special symbol 2 random number table 202ak2 in the first modified example will be described. FIG. 1220(a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the special symbol 2 random number table 202ak2. As shown in FIG. 1220 (a), in the special symbol 2 random number table 202ak2 in the second modification, as the range of random numbers (value of the first per random number counter C1) determined to be a big hit, the above-mentioned 205 random numbers (counter values) from "0 to 204" are defined in association with each other. On the other hand, in the second modification, the range of 8856 random numbers (counter values) of "205 to 9060" is defined in association with the range of random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be small hits. This control example is modified from the 41st control example in that In addition, as shown in FIG. 1220(a), the special symbol 2 random number table 202ak2 in the second modification has a range of random numbers (the value of the first per random number counter C1) that is determined to be time-saving symbol winning. Added. That is, the range of 56474 random numbers (counter values) from "9061 to 65535" is defined in association with the range of random numbers (counter values) determined as time-saving symbol winning.

Of the 65536 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) judged to be a big win is 205, so a big win is achieved in the lottery of the second special symbol. The probability of winning is about 1/320 (205/65536) as in the 41st control example. In addition, since the number of random numbers (counter values) determined as small hits is 8856 out of 65536 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning random number counter C1, the lottery for the second special symbol The probability of winning a small prize is about 1/7.4 (8856/65536). Furthermore, among the 65536 random numbers that can be taken by the first per random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) determined to be time-saving design winning is 56474, so the time-saving design in the second special design lottery. The probability of winning is approximately 1/1.16 (56474/65536).

Thus, in the first modified example, the above-described 41st control example is modified so that the probability of a small hit is lowered. This balances with increasing the number of lotteries for the second special symbols in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the pullback mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1220(b), details of the second winning random number table 202ck in the second modified example will be described. As shown in FIG. 1220(b), in the second modification, the second per random number table 202ck (see FIG. 1192(a)) in the 41st control example is normally in the low probability state of the design. The difference is that the range of the random number (the counter value of the second winning random number counter C4) that is determined as a hit is changed. That is, in the second modification, the range of "0 to 298" is defined in association with the range of random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be hits in normal symbols in the low probability state of normal symbols. . That is, in the second modification, even in the low probability state of the normal design, the range of the random number (counter value) that is determined to be the hit of the normal design is the high probability state of the normal design and one random number (counter value). Since it is configured so that it differs by only a minute, the winning probability of the normal design is almost the same between the low probability state of the normal design and the high probability state of the normal design. This is when the second time saving state (low probability state of normal pattern, variable reduction, open extension) set based on time saving symbol winning is set, other time saving state (time saving state A to C) It is a modification for realizing the same ease of entering the second ball entrance 640 as.

Next, details of the variation pattern selection table 202dk in the second modified example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1221 and 1222. FIG. Figure 1221 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the normal table 202dk1 out of the normal table 202dk1, the time saving table 202dk2, and the MAX bonus table 202dk3 that constitute the variation pattern selection table 202dk in the second modification. FIG. 1222(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the time saving table 202dk2, and FIG. 1222(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the MAX table 202dk3. First, details of the normal table 202dk1 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 1221 is a diagram showing the defined contents of the normal table 202dk1 in the second modified example. This normal table 202dk1 is a data table referred to for selecting a variation pattern (variation time) when executing a special symbol lottery in normal state A or normal state B. Here, as shown in FIG. 1221, in the normal table 202dk1 in the second modification, the special design type is "special design 1 (first special design)" Since it is the same as the normal table 202dk1 (see FIG. 1192(c)) in the No.41 control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1221, when the special symbol type is "special figure 2 (second special symbol)" and the lottery result is "jackpot", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is " For the entire range of 0 to 198", the variation pattern is defined as "hit" with a variation time of 5 seconds, the special symbol type is "special symbol 2 (first special symbol)", and the lottery result is " If the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198", a "small hit" with a variation time of 5 seconds is defined as a variation pattern, and a special symbol type is "special figure 2 (first special symbol)", and if the lottery result is "time saving symbol", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198" for the entire range, As a variation pattern, a “sudden time” with a variation time of 5 seconds is defined. That is, regardless of the result of the lottery, the variation time is set to 5 seconds.

It should be noted that, in the second modified example, as in the above-described 41st control example, even if the normal symbol lottery is executed in the normal state and the normal symbol win is won, the normal symbol win is the second ball entry. Since the opening/closing pattern (short open for 0.1 seconds) of the electric accessary 640a that makes it impossible (difficult) to enter the game ball into the opening 640 is set, the lottery of normal symbols is executed in the normal state. Even if it does, the game ball cannot enter the second ball entrance 640 . In the second modification, as a situation in which the second special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state, the jackpot is started in a state in which one reserved ball of the second special symbol is acquired by hitting to the right in the time saving state C, This is the case where the gaming state after the jackpot reaches the time-saving limit number of times and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the normal state B.例文帳に追加The reason why the variation time is fixed to 5 seconds regardless of the lottery result is to match the variation time in the time saving states A and B. That is, in the time-saving state A and the time-saving state B, the opening interval of the electric accessory 640a based on the win of the normal design is shorter than the variation time of the second special design, so that the second special design is reserved. In order to maintain the state of zero balls, the variation time is fixed to 5 seconds regardless of the lottery result. By setting both the variation time of the second special pattern in the time saving states A and B and the variation time of the second special pattern in the normal state B to 5 seconds, the variation time when shifting to the pullback mode and the time saving state B. The fluctuation time when shifting to , can be made common, and the player can be made to think that the time saving state B and the pullback mode are the same game state. Therefore, it is possible to realize a more suitable presentation mode. It should be noted that even if the winning of the normal symbol is started in the normal state B, the opening and closing operation of the electric accessory 640a that makes it difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 is set. If the action of the object 640a is noticed, the player may perceive that the pullback mode is a state different from the time saving state B.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1222(a), details of the time saving table 202dk2 in the second modified example will be described. This time saving table 202dk2 is a data table referred to for selecting a variation pattern (variation time) when executing a special symbol lottery in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, or the second time saving state. FIG. 1222(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of this time saving table 202dk2. As shown in FIG. 1222 (a), among the time saving table 202dk2 in the second modification, the special symbol type is the specified content corresponding to "special figure 1 (first special symbol)" It is the same as the time saving table 202dk2 (see FIG. 1193(a)) in the No. 41 control example. That is, regardless of the result of the lottery, the variable time period for a short period of time (0.5 seconds) ends. This is the same as the 41st control example, in the state where one or more reserved balls of the first special symbol are held and the second special symbol lottery with a high degree of advantage can be executed in a time saving state, the first special symbol To prevent a player from getting frustrated by continuing a variable display performance of a first special symbol based on a reserved ball of the symbol (a period in which a lottery of a second special symbol having a high substantial expectation of a big win cannot be executed) continues for a long time. It is intended to prevent this.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1222(a), the stipulated contents for the second special symbol are common to the normal table 202dk1 (see FIG. 1221). That is, regardless of the lottery result, the variation time is fixed at 5 seconds. Therefore, since the variable display of the second special symbol can be completed in a period shorter than the opening interval of the electric accessory 640a, in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the second time saving state, the second special symbol holding ball can be prevented from obtaining In the time saving state, when the time saving pattern is won by lottery for the second special pattern, the time saving state for the time saving pattern winning is invalidated without being overwritten or added. In other words, the time-saving symbol winning in the time-saving state is substantially positioned as a lottery result equivalent to the complete loss in other control examples.

Next, details of the MAX bonus table 202dk3 will be described with reference to FIG. 1222(b). This MAX bonus table 202dk3 is a data table referred to for selecting a variation pattern (variation time) when executing a special symbol lottery in the time saving state C. FIG. 1222(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of this MAX bonus table 202dk3. As shown in FIG. 1222 (b), in the MAX bonus table 202dk3, the special symbol type is "special symbol 1 (first special symbol)" in the same way as the time saving table 202dk2, and the lottery result is "off ”, the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 is defined as “ultra-short out” with a variation time of 0.5 seconds as a variation pattern for the entire range of “0 to 198”, and the lottery result is a "jackpot", the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 is defined as a "super short hit" with a variation time of 0.5 seconds for the entire range of "0 to 198". ing. That is, regardless of the result of the lottery, the variable time period for a short period of time (0.5 seconds) ends. This is similar to the case of referring to the time saving table 202dk2, when moving to the time saving state C while holding one or more reserved balls of the first special symbol, the first special symbol based on the reserved ball of the first special symbol It is intended to prevent a player from becoming impatient due to a long continuation of the fluctuation display performance of patterns (a period in which the lottery of the second special patterns with high substantial expectation for big wins cannot be executed).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1222 (b), as the specified contents for the second special symbol, when the special symbol type is "special symbol 2 (second special symbol)" and the lottery result is "jackpot" , the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 is defined as "long per" with a variation time of 15 seconds as a variation pattern for the entire range of "0 to 198", and the special symbol type is "special figure 2 (second 2 special symbol)” and the lottery result is “small hit”, the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is the entire range of “0 to 198”, and the variation time is 15 as the variation pattern. When the second "long and small hit" is defined, the special symbol type is "special symbol 2 (first special symbol)", and the lottery result is "short time symbol", the acquired variation type counter CS1 For the entire range of values "0 to 198", "sudden" with a variation time of 5 seconds is defined as the variation pattern. In other words, when a big win or a substantively fixed big win is won, the variable time is set to 15 seconds, while when a time-saving pattern win occurs, the variable time is set to 5 seconds.

The fluctuation time of 15 seconds set in the big hit or the small hit is a fluctuation time of a length in which the normal symbol winning game can be executed twice or so during the fluctuation. That is, when a big win or a small win is won in the time saving state C, it becomes possible to store the reserved balls of the second special pattern, and when the time saving pattern win occurs, it becomes difficult to save the reserved balls. As a result, when the player continuously hits to the right during the time-saving state C, the second special pattern holding balls (in the second modification, the upper limit number is one) are accumulated at the start of the big win. can be done. That is, when the number of time reduction limit is reached and the state is shifted to the normal state B, the second special symbol reserved ball can be accumulated, and in the normal state B, the second special symbol reserved ball is used. A lottery for 2 special symbols can be executed, and a transition to a second time-saving state can be made on the condition that neither a small win nor a big win is made. That is, it is possible to form a pullback mode in which a total of 11 second special symbol lottery opportunities can be obtained in the normal state B and the second time saving state. Therefore, the operation when reaching the time saving limit number of times can be made substantially the same as the operation when shifting to the time saving state B, so when shifting to the time saving state C, the player is dissatisfied with one point. It can make you feel great joy without feeling it. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1223, the details of the time reduction provision table 202ek in the second modified example will be described. As shown in FIG. 1223, in the second modification, the counter value of the prescribed reserved ball number counter 203ka is deleted from the time saving grant table 202ek (see FIG. 1194(a)) in the 41st control example. They are different in that respect. In addition, with the change from the 41st control example of the end conditions of the time saving state A and the time saving state B, various counter values associated with the jackpot A41, jackpot B41, and jackpot D41 won in the normal state has changed. That is, the value "20" of the time-saving counter 203h, the value "1" of the small winning counter 203s, and the value "11" of the special figure 2 counter 203t are associated with the big hits A41 and D41 won in the normal state. It is In addition, with respect to the big hit B41 won in the normal state, the value "10" of the time saving counter 203h, the value "1" of the small hit counter 203s, and the value "5" of the special figure 2 counter 203t are defined in association with each other. there is

Moreover, as shown in FIG. 1223, the time saving provision table 202ek in the second modified example is also different in that the time saving providing content for the time saving design is added. Specifically, the value of the time saving counter 203h "20", the value of the small hit counter 203s "1", and the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t "10" are associated with the time saving pattern won in the normal state. stipulated. On the other hand, with respect to the time saving pattern won in the time saving state, the value "0" of the time saving counter 203h, the value "0" of the small hit counter 203s, and the value "0" of the special figure 2 counter 203t are defined in association with each other. there is In the second modification, when the time saving provision condition is satisfied, the time saving state is provided by adding each counter value specified in the present time saving provision table 202ek to various counters. When the time saving pattern is won in the time saving state, 0 is added to each counter value. In other words, when time-saving symbol winning occurs during the time-saving state, it is configured so as not to substantially affect the number of times of time-saving. As a result, when the time saving pattern winning occurs in the normal state B, while configuring it so that the second time saving state can be set, when the time saving pattern winning occurs in the time saving state, complete in another control example A behavior equivalent to detachment can be realized. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the second modification of the forty-first control example>
Next, various control processes executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the second modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 1224 to 1229. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 1224, the special symbol variation processing 41B (S104B) in the second modification will be described. This special symbol variation process 41B (S104B) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation process 41 (S111A) in the above-described 41st control example. This is a process for performing display settings and the like of the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b during the variable display. In addition, the special symbol variation processing 41 (S111A) in the 41st control example replaces the special symbol determination processing 40 (see FIG. 1167) with respect to the special symbol variation processing 40 (see FIG. 1166) in the 40th control example. Only at the point that the symbol determination process 41 (see FIG. 1197) is executed and the special symbol variation pattern selection process 41 (see FIG. 1198) is executed instead of the special symbol variation pattern selection process 40 (see FIG. 1169) 1166), the special symbol variation processing 41B (S104B) in the present second modification will be described here in comparison with the special symbol variation processing 40 (see FIG. 1166).

Of the special symbol variation processing 41B (see FIG. 1224) in this second modification, in each of S201 to S207, S211 to S223, and S225A, the special symbol variation processing 40 (FIG. 1166) in the above-described 40th control example See), the same processes as the processes of S201 to S207, 211 to S223, and S225A are executed. Also, in the special symbol variation processing 41B (see FIG. 1224) in the second modification, when either the processing of S207 or the processing of S214 ends, the special symbol determination processing 40 (see FIG. 1167) is replaced with a special The symbol determination process 41B is executed (S231B), then the special symbol variation pattern selection process 41B is executed instead of the special symbol variation pattern selection process 40 (see FIG. 1169) (S232B), and this process ends. Details of these special symbol determination processing 41B (S231B) and special symbol variation pattern selection processing 41B (S232B) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 1225 and 1226 and FIGS.

In addition, in the special symbol variation processing 41B (see FIG. 1224) in the second modification, in the processing of S225A, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is the time saving symbol election (S225A: Yes), then the present (S233B), and if the current game state is the time saving state (S233B: Yes), the process proceeds to S233A. On the other hand, in the process of S233B, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not the time saving state (normal state) (S233B: No), the time saving end condition corresponding to the current time saving pattern type (counter value of various counters ) is read from the time saving provision table 202ek, and the read end condition is updated by adding it to the current various counters (S234B), and the process is finished. That is, the second time-saving state is set only when the time-saving pattern is won in the normal state, and when the time-saving pattern is won in the time-saving state, the time-saving state is controlled so as not to be substantially changed. As a result, it is possible to move to the second time-saving state by lottery of the second special pattern that is executed when the MAX bonus mode ends and the state shifts to the normal state B. When it occurs, an operation similar to complete disconnection can be realized.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1225, details of the special symbol determination processing 41B (S231B) described above will be described. This special symbol determination process 41B (S231B) is a process executed in place of the special symbol determination process 41 (see FIG. 1197) in the 41st control example, and the special symbol determination process 41 (see FIG. 1197) in the 41st control example. ), it is a process for executing a special symbol lottery. Of the special symbol determination processing 41B (S231B) in this second modification, in each of the processing of S301 to S305, each of the processing of S301 to S305 of the special symbol determination processing 41 in the 41st control example (see FIG. 1197) The same processing is performed.

Also, in the special symbol determination process 41B (see FIG. 1225) in the second modification, when it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol is not a big hit in the process of S303 (S303: No), according to the type of out Then, the process 41B at the time of deviation is executed (S321B), and the process ends. Details of the out-of-time processing 41B (S321B) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 1226 is a flow chart showing the process 41B (S321B) at the time of deviation. In this off time processing 41B (S321B), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this special symbol is a time-saving design winning (S2101A). : Yes), the time-saving design type corresponding to the value of the first winning type counter C2 is set as the time-saving design to be displayed on the first design display devices 37a and 37b (S2102A), and the process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2101A, if it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol this time is not the time-saving symbol winning (S2101A: No), then it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol of this time is a small hit. Then (S2103A), if it is determined to be a small hit (S2103A: Yes), the lottery result of the special symbol is set to a small hit (S2104A), and the small hit type corresponding to the value of the small hit type counter C5 is It is set as a small hit symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b (S2105A), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2103A, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery result of this time is not a small hit (S2103A: No), the processes of S2104A and S2105A are skipped and the process is finished as it is.

By executing this loss time process 41B (see FIG. 1226), when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss (other than a big hit), it is possible to suitably set the display of the first symbol according to the lottery result. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 1227, the details of the special symbol variation pattern selection process 41B (S232B) in the second modification will be described. FIG. 1227 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation pattern selection process 41B (S232B). This special symbol variation pattern selection process 41B (S232B) is similar to the special symbol variation pattern selection process 41 (see FIG. 1198) in the forty-first control example described above, and the first symbol variation pattern according to the special symbol lottery result. This is a process for selecting .

Of the special symbol variation pattern selection process 41B (see FIG. 1227) in this second modification, in each process of S401 to S408, S401 to S408 of the variation pattern selection process 41 in the 41st control example (see FIG. 1198) are executed. Also, in the variation pattern selection process 41B (see FIG. 1227) in the second modification, when it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol is not a big hit in the process of S401 (S401: No), the deviation (small hit , including time-saving symbol winning), the type determination process 41B for selecting the variation pattern at the time is executed (S421B), and the process proceeds to S403. Details of the out-of-time type determination processing 41B (S421B) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 1228 is a flow chart showing this out-time type determination processing (S421B). In the out time type determination process (S421B), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is the time saving design winning (S2201A), and if it is determined that the time saving design is winning (S2201A: Yes), time saving The type of the symbol is determined as the time saving symbol A (S2202B), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2201A, if it is determined that the special symbol lottery result is not the time-saving symbol winning (S2201A: No), then it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result is a small hit (S2203A). , If it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit (S2203A: Yes), the small hit type is determined by referring to the small hit type selection table 202fk (see FIG. 1194 (b)) (S2204A), and this process is performed. finish. On the other hand, in the process of S2203A, if it is determined that the lottery result of this special symbol is not a small hit (that is, normal loss (complete loss)) (S2203A: No), the process of S2204A is skipped. and terminate this process.

By executing this off time type determination processing 41B (see FIG. 1228), when the lottery result of the special pattern is a time saving pattern winning or a small hit, it is possible to suitably determine the time saving pattern type or the small hit type. can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1229, details of the normal symbol variation process 41B (S113B) in the second modification will be described. This normal design variation processing 41B (S113B), like the normal design variation processing 41 (see FIG. 1203) in the above-described 41st control example, performs a normal design lottery, and when the normal design wins, This is a process for setting the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a. FIG. 1229 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process 41B (S113B).

Of the normal symbol variation processing 41B (see FIG. 1229) in this second modification, in each of the processes of S1101 to S1113, S1115 to S1117, S1221, and S1132A to S1136A, the normal symbol variation in the forty-first control example described above, respectively The same processes as S1101 to S1113, S1115 to S1117, S1221, and S1132A to S1136A of process 41 (see FIG. 1203) are executed. In addition, in the normal symbol variation processing 41B (see FIG. 1229) in the second modification, the value of the time saving counter 203h is a value greater than 0 in the processing of S1108 (that is, the present time is in the time saving state). In (S1108: Yes), then, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the second time saving state (S1131B). In the process of S1131B, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the second time saving state (S1131B: Yes), while the process proceeds to S1110, it is determined that the current gaming state is not the second time saving state If so (S1131B: No), the process proceeds to S1109. Thereby, in the present second modification, when the second time saving state is set, the second per random number table 202ck (see FIG. 1220 (b)) for normal design low probability time normal design lottery can be carried out. That is, the second time saving state can be set to a low probability state of normal symbols.

<Control processing of the sound ramp control device in the second modification of the forty-first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1230 and 1231, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the second modified example will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 1230, details of the variation effect setting process 41B (S4311B) in the second modified example will be described. This variable effect setting process 41B (S4311B) is a process executed instead of the variable effect setting process 41 (see FIG. 1211) in the forty-first control example described above, and is similar to the variable effect setting process 41 (see FIG. 1211). Secondly, it is a process for setting the effect mode of the variable display effect of the third symbol to be executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. FIG. 1230 is a flow chart showing this variable effect setting process 41B (S4311B).

In each of S4401, S4403, S4421A, and S4422A among the variable effect setting process 41B (see FIG. 1230) in the second modification, the variable effect setting process 41 (see FIG. 1211) in the above-described 41st control example ) are executed in steps S4401, S4403, S4421A, and S4422A. In addition, in the variable effect setting process 41B (see FIG. 1230) in the second modification, in the process of S4422A, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the MAX bonus mode (time saving state C) (S4422A: No) , determines the effect mode of the variable effect according to the lottery result of this time (S4431B), and ends this process. Specifically, if the lottery result is a big win or a small win, the monster character 821 is hit with an attack and a hit is announced for 5 seconds. A 5-second effect is executed in which the character 821 of .

On the other hand, in the process of S4422A, if it is determined that the current gaming state is the MAX bonus mode (S4432B: Yes), the variable display mode in the small display area Dm8 is determined according to the lottery result (S4432B), It is determined whether or not the pseudo interval presentation before the pseudo 13th round is in progress (S4433B). In the processing of S4433B, if it is determined that the pseudo interval effect before the pseudo 13th round is being executed (S4433B: Yes), then it is determined whether the current lottery result is either a big win or a small win. Then (S4434B), if it is determined that the current lottery result is either a big win or a small win (S4434B: Yes), the execution of the pseudo interval effect aiming for the right (see FIG. 1217(b)) is set. (S4435B), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S4333B, if it is determined that the present is not in the pseudo interval rendering of the pseudo 13th round before (S4333B: No), and in the processing of S4434B, it is determined that the current lottery result is neither a big win nor a small win. If so (S4334B: No), the process of S4435B is skipped and this process ends.

By executing this fluctuation production setting process 41B (see FIG. 1230), during the execution of the big hit fluctuation or the small hit fluctuation just before reaching the time saving limit number of times, the right aim production (see FIG. 1217 (b)) is executed Then, it is possible to store the second special symbol reserved ball. Therefore, when the time-saving limit number of times is reached and the state shifts to the normal state B, a lottery based on the reserved ball of the second special pattern is executed, the time-saving pattern is won, and the state is shifted to the second time-saving state. Therefore, the time-saving state B and the pullback mode can be made into a state of substantially the same performance (big hit expectation).

Next, with reference to FIG. 1231, details of the rendering update process 41B (S3121B) in the second modified example will be described. FIG. 1231 is a process executed in place of the effect update process 40 (see FIG. 1182) in the above-described 41st control example (and 40th control example). This is a process for updating the presentation mode.

In this effect update process 41B (see FIG. 1231), first, it is determined whether or not it is during the execution period of the aim right effect (see FIG. 1217(b)) (S4621B). If it is determined that there is no (S4621B: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S4621B, if it is determined that the current is during the execution period of the effect aiming to the right (S4621B: Yes), then the start winning of the new second special symbol is detected (the winning information command is received It is determined whether or not (S4622B), and if it is determined that the start winning of the new second special symbol is detected (the winning information command is received) (S4622B: Yes), the prefetch result of the detected start winning In response, the type of notification icon to appear from the treasure box 810 is determined by lottery (S4623B), and execution of the notification effect in which the determined type of notification icon appears from the treasure box 810 is set (S4624B). Then, the end of the aim to the right effect is set (S4626B), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4622B that a new starting prize has not been detected (S4622B: No), it is determined whether or not the effect period of the aim to the right effect has passed (S4625B), and the effect period is If it is determined that the period has elapsed (S4625B: Yes), the process proceeds to S4626B. That is, the effect of aiming to the right ends without causing the notification icon to appear. On the other hand, in the process of S4625B, if it is determined that the effect period of the aim right effect has not passed (S4625B: No), this process ends.

By executing this effect update processing 41B (see FIG. 1231), only when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol increases by hitting right during the execution of the effect aiming for the right, the hit expectation degree of the reserved ball Since the notification icon indicating is notified, the player can be made to actively hit to the right during the execution of the effect of aiming for the right.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the second modification of the 41st control example, the fourth end condition in the 41st control example (the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol in the final fluctuation of time saving reaches the specified number A lottery opportunity for the second special symbol after shifting to a predetermined time-saving state (time-saving state B) without adopting the time-saving end condition established based on the fact that it was done, and the second special symbol after reaching the time-saving limit number of times. It realizes a novel control that equalizes the lottery opportunity of In other words, even when the advantageous first gaming state (time saving state B) is set based on the establishment of the first setting condition, the establishment of the second setting condition (reaching the time saving limit number of times) based on Also, when the second game state (normal state B), which is less advantageous than the first game state (it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640), the second special symbol is set. 2nd special symbol lottery opportunities are given the same number of times (11 times) until the transition to the normal state A in which the lottery cannot be executed (is difficult to execute). More specifically, in the time saving state B, the fluctuation time of the special design, the fluctuation time of the normal design, and the opening and closing pattern per normal pattern ( Displacement pattern) is set, and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes zero when the termination condition (third termination condition) based on the number of lotteries of the second special symbol is established. In other words, the lottery opportunity for the second special symbol in the case of shifting to the time saving state B is configured to be the maximum number of lotteries (11 times) until the third end condition is satisfied. Then, the lottery results of the second special symbols are limited to only three kinds of big hits, small wins, and time-saving symbols, and the upper limit value of the number of reserved balls of the second special symbols is set to one. Then, after reaching the time saving limit number of times and setting the normal state B, winning the time saving pattern by lottery based on the remaining reservation (1 piece) of the second special pattern, the second until the second time saving state ends The number of lotteries for special symbols is set to be the same as the maximum number of lotteries in time-saving state B (that is, 11 times, which is the number of lotteries until transition to normal state A without winning either a big win or a small win). configured to By configuring in this way, even if the relatively complicated process of monitoring the number of pending balls in the time saving final fluctuation and determining whether the time saving state ends or not, the time saving state B is set and the time saving limit After reaching the number of times, the lottery opportunity for the second special symbol can be made common.

In addition, in the second modification, the lottery opportunity of the second special symbol after shifting to the time saving state B and the normal state B was configured to be 11 times at maximum, but the lottery opportunity is arbitrary. can be set to the number of By increasing the number of lotteries, it is possible to make the game easier to enjoy for a longer period of time from the transition to the time-saving state B and the normal state B to the transition to the normal state A, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. Interest can be improved. In addition, when the number of times of lottery is reduced, the period from shifting to the time saving state B or normal state B to winning a big hit or shifting to the time saving state A can be shortened, so the game time can be shortened. Efficiency can be improved.

In the second modification, the lottery result of the second special pattern was configured to be either a jackpot, a small hit, or a short-time pattern winning (there is no complete loss), but a complete loss is provided. may be configured. In this case, when the second special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state B after reaching the time saving limit number of times, it becomes impossible to shift to the second time saving state by being completely out, so in the normal state B In the variable display effect of the second special symbol, it may be configured to execute a judge effect for indicating whether or not to enter the pullback mode (time-saving symbol winning occurs). By configuring in this way, the player can have a sense of tension that the withdrawal mode is not always entered, so that a large amount of prize balls can be obtained when the mode is shifted to the MAX bonus mode. However, on the other hand, if you win a 4-round jackpot that shifts to the time-saving state B, the number of prize balls will decrease, but the jackpot will be. As the game state after the game ends, the game property guarantees a fixed number of times (11 times) of lottery opportunities for the second special symbols, so the game property can be greatly varied depending on the type of jackpot to be won. As a result, the player's interest in the game can be further enhanced.

In the second modification, the maximum number of lotteries of the second special symbol in the time saving state B and the pullback mode (normal state B and the second time saving state) (the number of lotteries until shifting to normal state A) , but this is not the only option, and the number of lotteries may be varied. By increasing the number of lotteries in the withdrawal mode than in the time-saving state B, the degree of advantage in shifting to the MAX bonus mode can be increased, and the satisfaction of shifting to the MAX bonus mode can be increased. be able to. In addition, by making the number of lotteries in the pullback mode smaller than in the time-saving state B, it is possible to prevent the player from being too advantageous to Kajo when shifting to the MAX bonus mode. In addition, when shifting to the MAX bonus mode, although a large amount of prize balls can be obtained, the degree of advantage of the pullback mode that shifts after that is lower than the time saving state B. When the four-round jackpot to be transferred is won, the number of prize balls is reduced, but the number of lotteries increases as a game state after the end of the jackpot. can be done. As a result, the player's interest in the game can be further enhanced.

In the second modification, the number of times of time saving in the second time saving state given when the time saving symbol winning occurs in the normal state B (the specified number of times of the lottery of the second special symbols) is fixed to 10 times. However, as time-saving patterns, a plurality of time-saving patterns with different numbers of time-saving patterns are provided, and when a time-saving design election occurs, one of the multiple time-saving design types is configured to be determined as a time-saving design. You may By configuring in this way, it is possible to realize a game property in which the degree of advantage of the pullback mode varies according to the type of the time saving pattern. In other words, depending on the lottery result of the second special symbol executed in the normal state B (type of time saving pattern to be selected), the degree of advantage (time saving number of times) common to the time saving state B or higher than the time saving state B Since it is possible to change whether the degree of advantage is low or the degree of advantage is higher than that of the time-saving state, the game can be played while paying attention to the first lottery result of the second special symbol in the pull-back mode. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

In the above-described 41st control example and its various modifications, a so-called one-kind-two-mixer specification without a probability variation function is used, but the specification may be applied to a specification equipped with a probability variation function. In other words, instead of the time-saving limit number of times, applying the probability variable limit number of times, during the period from the transition to the predetermined probability variable state to reaching the probability variable limit number of times, as if one jackpot game continues. It is good also as composition which performs a series of productions. By constructing in this manner, the pachinko machine 10 equipped with the probability variation function is also provided with only the jackpots of a small number of rounds, and the jackpots of an extremely large number of rounds are won with the winning of one jackpot as a trigger. It is possible to realize novel game characteristics that can make the player think like this. Further, in this case, when the probability variation limit number of times is reached, only the probability variation function may be deactivated, and the time saving state may be provided. By configuring in this way, even if the ball of the second special pattern is not reserved at the time when the variable probability limit number of times is reached, the lottery of the second special pattern is performed by shifting to the time saving state after reaching the probability variable limit number of times. A state that is easy to execute can be formed.

In the above-described 41st control example and its various modifications, when a small hit is won in the time saving state C, the small hit counter 203s after V winning (entering the game ball into the specific area 650e3) occurs By configuring the value to be subtracted, if a big win is won based on the V winning during execution of the small winning game in the time saving state C, the game state at the time of winning the big win (execution of the big winning game is set) The game state at the time when the game was played) was always configured to be fixed to the time saving state, but it is not limited to this. For example, in some small hit types (specific small hits), the small hit counter 203s may be subtracted at the start of the small hit game regardless of the type of the time saving state. That is, when a specific small hit is won in the time saving state C, the time saving state can be terminated before the occurrence of the V prize (the timing at which the execution of the jackpot game is set), and the remaining number of times up to the time saving limit number Since it can be reset, it is possible to provide the possibility that the MAX bonus mode will continue longer than usual (4 big wins), or conversely, the number of times it will continue is less. In particular, when a V prize occurs, the game state after the end of the big win is set to the time-saving state C regardless of the game state. To realize an operation as if the MAX bonus mode was reset with a big win based on the specific small win as a chance to continue the MAX bonus mode while resetting the time-saving limit number of times when the win is set. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the MAX bonus mode does not know how long it will continue. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

In the above-described 41st control example and its various modifications, if a small hit is won in the time saving state C, the counter value of the small hitting counter 203s is updated after the V winning occurs, while other time saving states Then, although it was set as the structure which updates the counter value of the small hit counter 203s at the time of a small hit start, it is not restricted to this. In the time saving state C, while the small hit counter 203s is updated after the V winning (the timing at which the execution of the big winning game is set), in the time saving states other than the time saving state C, the small win is made before the V winning. It is sufficient if the win counter 203s can be controlled to be updated. For example, if a small win is won in the time saving state C, the timing when the small win opening period ends or the small win ends (at the start of the big win based on the V prize). It may be configured to update the counter value of the small hit counter 203s. Also, if you win a small hit other than the time saving state C, a small win will be made at the timing of stopping the small win pattern, at the start of the opening period of the opening and closing door 650f1 based on the small win, at the start of the variable display corresponding to the small win, etc. The configuration may be such that the win counter 203s is updated.

In the above-described 41st control example and its various modifications, the condition for updating the small hit counter 203 s is satisfied depending on whether it is the time saving state C or the time saving state other than the time saving state C (second special symbol ), the update timing of the small winning counter 203s is made different. That is, according to the setting opportunity of the time saving state, it was configured to vary the timing of updating the small winning counter 203s during the time saving state, but this control is not limited to the small winning counter 203s. Other counters may be applied as long as they are counters that can be updated at least in the time-saving state. More specifically, for example, it may be applied to the time saving counter 203h. That is, when a big win is won in the lottery of special symbols in the time saving state C, the time saving counter is set after the data indicating the game state at the time of winning the big win is stored in the winning state storage area 203kd (execution of the big win game is set). While updating 203h, in the time saving state other than the time saving state C, before (for example , at the start of fluctuation) may be configured to update the number of times of reduction in working hours 203h. By configuring in this way, in the time saving state C, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot (game state when setting the execution of the jackpot game) is more easily handled as the time saving state, while the time saving other than the time saving state C In the state, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot (the game state when setting the execution of the jackpot game) can be configured to be handled more easily as a normal state. Further, in addition to the time saving counter 203h, it is also possible to adopt a control that changes the update timing of the specified reserved ball number counter 203ka and the update timing of the special figure 2 counter 203t according to the timing of setting the time saving state. Furthermore, it is not limited to the counter value for determining the end condition of the time saving state, for example, the probability variation function is installed, and the number of times of continuation of the probability variation state (ST number) is predetermined In the specification, the end condition of the probability variation state The update timing for updating the counter value for determining may be configured to vary depending on the trigger set to the variable probability state. Furthermore, counters related to lottery of special symbols (first random number counter C1, first per type counter C2, stop type counter C3, fluctuation type counter CS1, second per random number counter C4, etc.) and counters for production (production lottery counter 223f1, 223f2, etc.).

In the above-described 41st control example and its various modifications, the ceiling function (the function of setting the second time saving state when the number of lotteries of special symbols after the end of the jackpot reaches the number of ceiling lotteries) was not provided. , may be equipped with a ceiling function. In this case, the time saving state set based on reaching the ceiling lottery number of times may be set to a second time saving state with a degree of advantage substantially equivalent to the MAX bonus mode, or equivalent to the time saving mode It may be set to the second time saving state, or may be set to the second time saving state having a different degree of advantage from any of the time saving states started after the end of the big win (and when winning the time saving symbol). By configuring in this way, even if a so-called addiction occurs, the game can be played with the goal of reaching the ceiling lottery number of times, so that the player's motivation for playing the game is suppressed. can do.

In the above-described 41st control example and its various modifications, a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery executed in the time saving state C, and V winning (entering the specific area 650e3) in the small hit When a jackpot is won by generating a prize, the value of the small prize counter 203s is subtracted after the occurrence of the V prize, and a small prize is won in the lottery of the second special pattern executed in another time-saving state. controlled to end the time saving state before the V winning occurs by subtracting the value of the small winning counter 203s at the start of the small winning. That is, in the time saving state C, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot (game state at the time of setting the execution of the jackpot game) is treated as a time saving state (time saving end corresponding to the case of winning in the time saving state from the time saving grant table 202ek Conditions are read and set) On the other hand, in the other time saving state, the game state at the time of jackpot winning (game state at the time of setting the execution of the jackpot game) is treated as a normal state (time saving grant table 202ek The time-saving end condition corresponding to the case of winning in the normal state is read out and set from ), so that when a small win is won in the second special symbol lottery executed in the time-saving state C Unless it reaches the time saving limit number of times, it will always shift to the time saving state C, and if you win a small win in a time saving state other than the time saving state C, the same distribution as when you win a small win in the normal state. Either the time-saving state B or the time-saving state C is set, but in the lottery of the second special symbol executed in the time-saving state, regardless of the type of the time-saving state, the game at the time of winning the jackpot. You may comprise so that a state may be handled as a time saving state. More specifically, for example, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot may be set to the game state at the time when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed. That is, when a special symbol lottery results in a big hit or a small hit, at that time (at the time when the special symbol fluctuation start is set), the data indicating the time saving state is stored in the winning state storage area 203kd. good too. By configuring in this way, in the above-described 41st control example and the first modification of the 41st control example, a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol that is executed first in the time saving state other than the time saving state C If you win, the transition to the most advantageous time saving state C (MAX bonus mode) is confirmed, while if you win a small hit with the remaining reservation of the second special pattern after the time saving ends, time saving state C Since it can be configured so that there is a possibility of shifting to a time-saving state other than the time-saving state (the time-saving state in which the next big hit is not confirmed), the first special pattern is given while the lottery opportunity of the second special pattern is given multiple times. It is possible to realize a novel game property that makes the player strongly expect to win a big win or a small win in the lottery. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game. Further, in the first modification and the second modification of the forty-first control example described above, the game state at the time of winning the big win is set to the game state at the time when the second special symbol lottery results in a big win or a small win. In addition to the method, regardless of the type of the time-saving state, a V prize is generated and the execution of the jackpot game is set (data indicating the time-saving state is set as the game state when the jackpot is won in the winning state storage area 203kd). You may control so that the small hit counter 203s may be updated later. By configuring in this way, when the V prize is not generated in the small winning game, the control for storing the data indicating the game state in the game state storage area 203kd can be skipped, so that the game is played in vain. It is possible to prevent the processing load from increasing due to the processing of storing data in the state storage area 203kd.

<Forty-Second Control Example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1232 to 1252. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the second modification of the forty-first control example described above, as the time saving end condition, the time saving state is ended based on the fact that any one of the plurality of end conditions is met. had configured. That is, the first end condition established when the number of lotteries of special symbols reaches the prescribed number of times, the second end condition established when the number of executions of the small winning game reaches the prescribed number of times, and the second special symbol. Of the third end conditions that are satisfied when the number of lotteries reaches the specified number of times, any one of the end conditions is satisfied, so that the time saving state is ended regardless of the situation of the other end conditions. had configured.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 42nd control example, as the time-saving end condition, a termination condition that is satisfied when all of a plurality of different conditions are satisfied is provided. More specifically, as the small hit type, in addition to the V small hit that substantially determines the big hit, even if the game ball is entered, the game ball cannot be guided to the specific area 650e3 (switching member 650h The open/close door 650f1 is opened only during the period in which it is arranged to guide the game ball to the normal discharge flow path 650e1 side). That is, a first small win, a second small win, and a third small win are provided. In this 42nd control example, after shifting to the time saving state, a first condition that is established when the first number of times predetermined for the first small hit (first lottery result) is won in the special symbol lottery, A second condition that is established when the second small hit (second lottery result) is predetermined for the second number of times, and a predetermined third number of times for the third small hit (third lottery result). It is configured to provide a time saving termination condition (third termination condition) that is satisfied only when all the third conditions are satisfied. With this configuration, even if one or more of the first condition, the second condition, and the third condition are satisfied and the plate is formed, the plate will Since novel control that allows the advantageous time-saving state to be continued can be realized, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The pachinko machine 10 in this 42nd control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the second modified example of the 41st control example described above in that the configuration of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main controller 110 is partially The points that are changed, the point that the configuration of the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed, the point that the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the sound The point is that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the second modification of the 41 control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the second modification of the fortieth control example are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 1232 to 1237, the characteristic presentation mode in the 42nd control example will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 1232(a), the details of the remaining machine stock effect executed during the execution period of the jackpot game in the forty-second control example will be described. Here, as described above, in this 42nd control example, the first to third small hits are considered as impossible (difficult) small hits to enter the game ball into the specific area 650e3 (generate V winning). It is configured to provide a hit. In addition, in the 42nd control example, the number of winning times for each of the first to third small wins is configured so that the time saving state can continue until it reaches the specified number of times that is predetermined for each type of time saving state. It is That is, other time-saving end conditions (the first end condition that is established when the total number of lotteries of special symbols reaches the specified number of times, the number of executions of V small hits that can generate V winnings reaches the specified number of times The second end condition established by doing, and the third end condition established when the number of lotteries of the second special symbol reaches the specified number) are not established, the first to third small hits As long as the number of winnings of at least one of the small hits has not reached the prescribed number of times (first to third times), the time saving state is continued. In the 42nd control example, it is possible to indicate the predetermined number of winning times of the first to third small wins by means of the presentation mode. More specifically, when winning a jackpot in which a time saving state is granted after the jackpot ends, a number that suggests the prescribed number of times corresponding to each of the first to third small wins in the time saving state set after the jackpot ends The effect (remaining machine stock effect) for notifying (remaining machine) is configured to be executable. After shifting to the time saving state, the number of remaining machines reported during the big win is continuously displayed, and the corresponding number of remaining machines is subtracted each time the first to third small wins are won. Then, an effect is executed to suggest to the player whether or not each small win has reached a specified number of times.

FIG. 1232(a) is a diagram showing an effect mode when the remaining machine stock effect is started during execution of the jackpot game. This remaining machine stock effect is executed, for example, as an effect mode during the opening period of the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 1232(a), when the remaining machine stock effect is executed, an adventurer character 811a is first displayed in the main display area Ds. Then, in the display area HR10 formed above the adventurer character 811a, the text "Push to stock the remaining lives!" , a display area HR11 is formed in which a push button image PB imitating the frame button 22 and a gauge indicating the effective period of operation of the frame button 22 are displayed. In addition, display areas Dm6a to Dm6d are formed on the right side of the adventurer character 811a when viewed from the front for displaying an image suggesting the prescribed number of small wins. In the display area Dm6a, the characters "remaining life" are displayed, and in the display areas Dm6b to Dm6d, the face image of the adventurer character, the face image of the rabbit character, and the face of the gunman character are displayed. A partial image is displayed. Further, the text "remaining machine stock chance" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. According to these display contents, by pressing the frame button 22, out of the adventurer character 811a, the rabbit character 811b, and the gunman character 811c, the adventurer character 811a is notified of the remaining lives. It is easy for people to understand. Note that the remaining lives of the adventurer character 811a correspond to the specified number of times of the first small win (the number of wins of the first small win required until the first condition is satisfied), and the rabbit character 811b corresponds to the second small win. Corresponding to the specified number of hits (the number of wins of the second small win required until the second condition is satisfied), the gunman character 811c is the specified number of times of the second small win (the number of times required until the third condition is satisfied). It corresponds to the winning number of times per 3 small).

FIG. 1232(b) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when the player presses the frame button 22 in the remaining machine stock chance effect. As shown in FIG. 1232(b), when it is detected that the frame button 22 has been pressed in the remaining machine stock effect, the displayed character will display the remaining machine (corresponding small A specified number of hits) is executed. FIG. 1232(b) illustrates a situation in which "5" is notified as the remaining lives of the adventurer character 811a. In this case, as shown in FIG. 1232(b), an effect in which the adventurer character 811a shouts "5" is executed (a balloon image SG displaying the character "5" is formed). In addition, in the display area Dm6b for indicating the remaining lives of the adventurer character 811a, a number "x5" is displayed on the right side of the image of the face portion of the adventurer character 811a. Further, the text "5 planes in stock!!" is displayed in the display area HR10. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the adventurer character 811a has five remaining lives. When the notification of the remaining lives of the adventurer character 811a ends, the remaining lives of the rabbit character 811b and the gunman character 811c are also notified in the same manner. As a result, the number (remaining machine) indicating the prescribed number of times of each small hit in the time saving state set after the end of the big win can be notified to the player during the execution of the big win game, so the number of times of time saving can be notified. It is possible to realize a novel presentation mode in which a player is suggested in advance as to whether the game will continue for as long as possible. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

After shifting to the time-saving state, each time one of the first to third small hits is won, the corresponding character's remaining machine is reduced, and the remaining machine of all characters becomes 0. This ends the time-saving state. A series of presentation modes in this time-saving state will be described with reference to FIGS. 1233 to 1236. FIG.

FIG. 1233(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the time saving state (rush) is started. In FIG. 1233, the adventurer character 811a, the rabbit character 811b, and the gunman character 811c are reported to have 5, 3, and 1 remaining lives in the jackpot, respectively. Rush) is shown as an example. As shown in FIG. 1233(a), when the time-saving state (rush) is started, an adventurer character 811a, a rabbit character 811b, a gunman character 811c, and an enemy monster appear in the main display area Dm. An effect in which the character 821 glares at each other is executed. In addition, the text "Kill the target before you run out of lives!!" is displayed in the display area HR10. In addition, the display areas Dm6a to Dm6d continue to be displayed at the right end of the main display area Dm during execution of the jackpot game. Furthermore, the characters "RUSH start" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. From these display contents, the player is intuitively informed that the time-saving state will continue as long as each character has a remaining machine, and that defeating the monster character 821, which is an enemy, will result in a big win. can be understood effectively.

Drawing 1233 (b) is a figure showing a display mode when reach occurs during a time saving state. Here, in the forty-second control example, when the second special symbol lottery results in a big win or a small win, a variable display mode accompanied by a ready-to-win effect is set as the variable display effect. That is, at the time reach occurs, it is determined that it is one of the big hit, the V small hit that substantially determines the big hit, and the first to third small hits. In other words, when a ready-to-win hit occurs, either a big win or the number of executions of any of the first to third small wins is increased by 1 (remaining lives of the corresponding character are subtracted). Therefore, in the time-saving state in the forty-second control example, after the occurrence of the reach, the character defeated by defeating the monster character 821, which is the enemy, becomes a big hit. The effect of subtracting 1 from the remaining machine is executed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 1233(b), when reach occurs, an effect is executed in which one of the three characters is selected. The example of FIG. 1233(b) illustrates a case where a rabbit character 811b is selected, and the surroundings of the rabbit character 811b are set to emit light, and other characters are displayed in black silhouettes. set. That is, the rabbit character 811b is displayed more emphasized than the other characters. In addition, the characters "Competitor Determined!!" are displayed in the display area HR10. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the rabbit character 811b has been selected as the character to battle with the monster character 821 .

Basically, when the lottery results in the first small win, the adventurer character 811a is determined as the opponent, and in the case of the second small win, the rabbit character 811b is determined. , when the third small win is obtained, the gunman character 811c is determined. On the other hand, in the case of a big win or a V small win with a substantially confirmed big win, the selection ratio is set so that the selection ratio of the gunman character becomes relatively high and the selection ratio of the adventurer character 811a becomes relatively low. are distributed. Specifically, for example, if a big win or V small win is won with all characters having one or more lives remaining, the selection rate of the adventurer character 811a is 25%, and the selection rate of the rabbit character 811b is 25%. 30%, and the selection ratio of the gunman character 811c is 45%. If there are one or more characters with 0 remaining lives, the character with 1 remaining life is selected from the characters with 1 or more remaining lives. In this case as well, the selection ratio is distributed so that the selection ratio of the gunman character 811c is relatively high and the selection ratio of the adventurer character 811a is relatively low. Therefore, since it is possible to play a game while paying attention to the character selected when reach occurs, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1234(a), description will be given of the mode of presentation in the case of winning a non-V small win (any of the first to third small wins) in which V winning is impossible. FIG. 1234(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a second small win corresponding to the rabbit character 811b is won as a non-V small win. If the rabbit character 811b wins the second small prize while the rabbit character 811b has one or more remaining lives, the rabbit character 811b is determined as the opponent when the reach occurs (see FIG. 1233(b)). , as shown in FIG. 1234(a), an effect is executed in which the rabbit character 811b is finally defeated in the battle. Also, an effect is executed in which the remaining life of the rabbit character 811b is reduced by one. FIG. 1234(a) exemplifies a situation in which the rabbit character 811b's remaining lives (that is, the remaining number of times until the number of winnings of the second small win reaches the specified number of times) has decreased from 3 to 2, and is displayed. The number of remaining lives of the rabbit character 811b displayed in the area Dm6c is reduced from three to two.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1234(b), description will be given of the mode of presentation when the number of wins for the first to third small hits reaches the specified number of times and the time saving end condition is established. In this case, the basic production flow is the same as the production in which a non-V small win is won and the remaining lives are reduced (see FIGS. 1233(b) and 1234(a)), but the player is defeated by the monster character 821. 1234(b), the remaining life corresponding to the defeated character (the rabbit character 811b in the example of FIG. 1234(b)) is updated to 0, and the text "RUSH finished..." is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. is displayed. As a result, the player can easily understand that the time-saving state (rush state) has ended in conjunction with the fact that the remaining lives of all the characters have become 0.例文帳に追加Therefore, since it is possible to realize an effect mode that is easy for the player to understand, it is possible to realize a suitable effect mode.

In addition, in the variable display effect that is executed based on winning the last non-V small hit in the time saving state, the effect mode that takes into account the look-ahead result of the second special symbol held ball that was held at the time of the start of the fluctuation. set. In other words, even if the non-V small hit is won and the time saving end condition is satisfied, if the lottery result corresponding to the big hit or V small hit is reserved in the second special symbol holding ball, the normal state Immediately after shifting to, you will be elected to the jackpot and shift to the time saving state. In this case, the completion of the time-saving state (rush) is not notified, but the effect of subjugating the monster character 821 is executed as the variation display effect of the time-saving final variation to notify the jackpot. On the other hand, when all the reserved balls of the second special symbol are neither the big hit nor the V small hit, as shown in FIG. 1234(b), the rush end effect is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to improve the degree of expectation for a big hit in the time-saving final variation. That is, there is an effect in which a character with one character has one remaining life and another character has zero remaining life, and the character with one remaining life and the monster character 821 battle each other. When it is started, if at least 1 big win (or V small win) is included in the variation and the remaining reserve of the second special symbol, the effect of winning against the monster character 821 is executed. The degree of expectation of a battle performance started with a character's remaining life of 1 and other characters' remaining lives of 0 can be made higher than the expectation of a battle performance performed at other timings. Therefore, it is possible to realize well-balanced playability.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1235, the remaining machine recovery effect that may be executed during the time saving state in the 42nd control example will be described. In this 42nd control example, similarly to the second modification of the 41st control example described above, there is a possibility that a time-saving symbol winning will occur in the lottery for the second special symbol. In this 42nd control example, when time saving symbol winning occurs in the time saving state, the prescribed number of first to third small hits is added. That is, since the time saving end condition (second end condition) becomes difficult to be established, it is possible to please the player when the time saving symbol winning occurs. As shown in FIG. 1235(a), when the time-saving symbol is won in the time-saving state (rush state) and the remaining machine increasing condition is established, a ready-to-win effect is generated and a treasure box 810 is displayed. In addition, the text "Treasure box appears! Get recovery medicine!" is displayed in the display area HR10. These display contents allow the player to intuitively understand that if the treasure box 810 that has appeared contains a recovery medicine, it will be advantageous to the player.

Then, as shown in FIG. 1235(b), when an effect is executed in which the recovery medicine 810d appears from the treasure box 810, characters "remaining machine recovery" are displayed in the display area HR10. In addition, an effect is executed in which 10, 7, and 3 aircraft are added to the remaining lives of the adventurer character 811a, the rabbit character 811b, and the gunman character 811c, respectively. A chance symbol indicating winning of a time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed as 3 symbols. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the remaining machines have recovered based on the winning of the time-saving graphic pattern.

In addition, in the forty-second control example, there is also provided a false remaining machine recovery effect in which the content of the treasure box 810 is empty and the remaining lives are not recovered. This false remaining life recovery effect is executed when a non-V small win of a type corresponding to a character whose remaining life has already been reduced to 0 is won. By configuring in this way, in the variable display performance corresponding to the non-V small hits that have already reached the prescribed number of times, it is possible to prevent the content of the variable display from becoming incoherent, in which the character whose remaining life has become 0 is further battled. At the same time, it is possible to make the player expect recovery of remaining machines. Therefore, it is possible to realize a more suitable presentation mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1236, the result effect executed during the period from the notification of the end of the time saving state (rush state) until all the reserved balls of the second special symbol are digested will be described. FIG. 1236(a) is a diagram showing a display mode when the result effect is being executed. As shown in FIG. 1236(a), when the result effect is executed, the number of jackpots won and the number of times of the winnings are displayed on the display area HR10 formed in the center of the main display area Dm before the time saving state ends. Characters indicating the number of awarded balls and . FIG. 1236 (ba) illustrates a case where 5850 prize balls are paid out by winning six jackpots before the time saving state ends. ” and the characters “total 5850pt” are displayed. These display contents allow the player to confirm the game result in the current time-saving state, so that convenience for the player can be improved. Also, in the small display area Dm8, a variable display effect corresponding to the remaining hold of the second special symbol is executed in a relatively inconspicuous display mode (narrow display area). Further, the characters "RUSH finished..." are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the time saving state has ended. In addition, in this 42nd control example, the variation time of the second special symbol in the normal state is set to 0.5 seconds. Therefore, even if the upper limit number (4) of the second special symbol reserved balls are reserved, the remaining reserved balls are digested in about 2 seconds.

FIG. 1236(b) is a diagram showing the production mode at the time of winning and holding digestion in the case where the holding ball of the second special symbol increased after the start of the time saving final fluctuation is a win (big win or V small win). . Here, as described above, in the 42nd control example, in the time saving final variation, it is configured to set the effect result that takes into account the second special symbol holding ball, but after the time saving final variation is started (that is, The second special symbol reserved ball increased (after the variable display effect is started) cannot be reflected in the effect. Therefore, if the second special symbol holding ball that increased after the start of the time saving final fluctuation was a hit, when the fluctuation display corresponding to the hit hold was started in the result production, for a short time (0.5 seconds ) is configured to be executable. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1236(b), when the winning variation is executed during the result effect, the third symbol of the winning combination (the same 3) descends, and an effect of pushing away the display area HR10 is executed, and a symbol indicating a big win or a small win is stopped and displayed in the small display area Dm8. More specifically, three identical numbers are stop-displayed in the case of a big win, and three different odd numbers are stop-displayed in the case of a small win. Furthermore, the characters "Bonus confirmed!!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. By these display contents, it is possible to make the player easily understand that a big win or a small V win has been won with the second special symbols remaining reserved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1237, the invincible mode, which is a type of time-saving state in the 42nd control example, will be described. This invincible mode is a first time-saving state C that shifts in some cases when a big win is won in the lottery of the second special pattern and a part of when a small win is won, and a second state that shifts when the ceiling lottery number of times is reached. Two types of time saving state A and , are provided, and are almost composed of a game state in which the time saving state (first time saving state C or second time saving state A) continues until the next big win is won. As shown in FIG. 1237, when the invincible mode is set, all remaining lives of each character are displayed as "∞". In addition, in the secondary display area Ds, the characters "invincible mode" are displayed. Due to these display contents, the player has an infinite number of remaining machines for each character, and until the monster character 821 is defeated. It can be easily understood that the time saving state will always continue. In addition, actually, the specified number of first to third small hits in the invincible mode are all set to 100 times.

Next, referring to FIG. 1238, a transition method between states in the forty-second control example will be described. Here, in the forty-second control example, four modes are mainly provided. That is, a normal mode (normal state A) that is disadvantageous to the player, a chance mode (first time-saving state A) that has the lowest degree of advantage in the time-saving state (hard to win a big hit), and a relatively high degree of advantage. (Relatively easy to win a jackpot) Rush mode (1st time saving state B, 2nd time saving state B) and the most advantageous (almost continuing until the next jackpot) invincible mode (1st time saving state C, A second time saving state A) is provided. Like the time saving mode in the first modification of the 41st control example described above, the chance mode is set to one time saving time, and the upper limit number (4 ), it is possible to accumulate reserved balls of the second special symbol, so that it is a game state in which a special symbol lottery opportunity for five times is practically given. In addition, the rush mode is mainly a state in which the time saving state ends when the number of winnings of the first to third small hits described above reaches the specified number of times, and it is hoped that the remaining machines of each character will not run out. It is a game state with a novel game property in which a game can be played while playing. In addition, the invincible mode is the most advantageous game state that is substantially continued until the next big win.

First, with reference to the upper part of FIG. 1238, the game state transition method in the normal mode (normal state A) that is disadvantageous to the player will be described. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 1238, there is a possibility that normal state A (normal mode) shifts to another state when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery or when the ceiling lottery number of times is reached. More specifically, when the jackpot A42, which is determined (selected) at a rate of 5% when a jackpot of winning with a probability of about 1/320 is determined in the lottery of special symbols, is determined as the jackpot type. A first time-saving state B (a kind of rush mode) is set as a game state after the end. In addition, when the jackpot B42, which is determined at a rate of 95% when the jackpot hits, is determined as the jackpot type, the first time-saving state A (chance mode) is set as the game state after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, when the number of lotteries for special symbols reaches the ceiling number of lotteries (950 times) without winning the jackpot in the normal state A, the second time-saving state A (a kind of invincible mode) is set. For this reason, in the normal state, the game is played in anticipation of winning a big win in a special symbol lottery or reaching the number of ceiling lotteries. In addition, since the invincible mode is the most advantageous game state, especially after a certain number of special symbol lotteries (for example, 600 times), it is not possible to win a jackpot. , it can be expected that the loss will continue until the ceiling lottery number. Therefore, even if a so-called addiction occurs, the player's motivation for the game can be maintained.

In addition, as shown in the interruption of FIG. 1238, from the first time-saving state A (chance mode) to other game states, when winning a big hit, when winning a small hit, when winning a time-saving symbol, and time-saving state is established and all the reserved balls of the second special symbol are digested. More specifically, as shown in the middle of FIG. 1238, when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, regardless of the jackpot type, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is the first time-saving state C (invincible mode ) is set. In addition, if the second special symbol lottery has a small hit with a probability of about 1/10, if the small hit A42 is determined at a rate of 5% as the small hit type, the small hit On the condition that the jackpot is won by passing through the specific area 650e3 in the hit A42, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the first time-saving state C (a kind of invincible mode). On the other hand, when a small win is won, when one of the small wins B42 to H42 determined at a rate of 95% as a small win type, the big win is won by passing through the specific area 650e3 in the small win. As a condition, the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to the first time-saving state B (a kind of rush mode). Also, in the first time-saving state A (chance mode), if a time-saving design winning occurs with a probability of 1/500 in the second special symbol lottery, the game state is the second time-saving state B (a kind of rush mode ). Furthermore, when all the reserved balls of the second special symbol reserved in the chance mode are consumed (all are lost), the game shifts to the normal mode which is disadvantageous to the player.

Next, with reference to the lower left side of FIG. 1238, the transition method from rush mode (the 1st time saving state B, the 2nd time saving state B) to another state is demonstrated. As shown in the lower left part of FIG. 1238, from the rush mode to another state, when the jackpot is won, when the small win is won, and when the end condition of the time-saving state is satisfied, the second special symbol is held. There is a possibility that it will migrate when it is all digested. More specifically, as shown on the lower left side of FIG. 1238, if the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, regardless of the jackpot type, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is the first time-saving state C (invincible mode). In addition, if the second special symbol lottery has a small hit with a probability of about 1/10, if the small hit A42 is determined at a rate of 5% as the small hit type, the small hit On the condition that the jackpot is won by passing through the specific area 650e3 in the hit A42, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the first time-saving state C (a kind of invincible mode). In addition, when the time-saving end condition is established (mainly when the number of wins of the first to third small hits all reach the specified number of times), the normal mode disadvantageous to the player is set. On the other hand, when winning a small win, when it becomes one of the small wins B42 to H42 determined at a rate of 95% as a small win type, the small win passes through the specific area 650e3 and wins the big win. On the condition that it has been done, the game state after the end of the jackpot is again set to the first time saving state B (a kind of rush mode) (loop the rush mode). In addition, although omitted for illustration, when the time saving symbol winning occurs, it is set to the second time saving state B (a kind of rush mode) (loops the rush mode).

Next, with reference to the lower right side of FIG. 1238, a method of shifting from the invincible mode to another state will be described. As shown on the lower right side of FIG. 1238, the invincible mode may shift to another state when a small win is won. More specifically, as shown on the lower right side of FIG. 1238, when the small hit is won with a probability of 1/10 in the invincible mode, the small hit B42 determined at a rate of 95% as the small hit type ~H42, on the condition that the jackpot is won by passing through the specific area 650e3 in the small hit, the game state after the jackpot ends again, the first time-saving state B (a kind of rush mode) is set to On the other hand, when a big win is won in the invincible mode, when a small win A42 is determined, and when a time-saving symbol win occurs, the invincible mode is looped.

In this way, in the 42nd control example, as modes advantageous to the player, three modes with greatly different game characteristics (chance mode, rush mode, and invincible mode) are provided. That is, a game-like chance mode in which players expect to win a big win or a small win in a fixed number of times, and a game-like rush mode in which the number of continuous time-saving states changes fluidly according to the winning status of the first to third small wins. , and an invincible mode that lasts substantially until the next big win. Therefore, since the playability can be greatly changed depending on the mode to be set, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Electrical configuration of the 42nd control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 1239(a), the details of the ROM 202 provided in the main controller 110 in the 42nd control example will be described. FIG. 1239(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 of main controller 110 in the forty-second control example. As shown in FIG. 1239(a), the ROM 202 in the forty-second control example has the configuration of the ROM 202 in the second modification (and the forty-first control example) of the forty-first control example (see FIG. 1190(a)). In contrast, the first winning random number table 202am is provided instead of the first winning random number table 202ak, the jackpot type selection table 202bm is provided instead of the jackpot type selection table 202bk, and the variation pattern selection table A point that a variation pattern selection table 202dm is provided instead of 202dk, a point that a time reduction grant table 202em is provided instead of the time reduction grant table 202ek, and a small hit type selection table 202fm instead of the small hit type selection table 202fk. is provided. Other configurations are the same as those of the ROM 202 in the second modification (and the forty-first control example) of the forty-first control example described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

First, details of the first winning random number table 202am in the 42nd control example will be described. Here, when the first winning random number table 202am in the present 42nd control example draws the second special symbol for the first winning random number table 202ak in the second modified example of the 41st control example described above, The only difference is that the contents of the referenced data table are changed. With reference to FIG. 1240(a), the details of the special symbol 2 random number table 202am2 referred to when performing the lottery for the second special symbol in the forty-second control example will be described. FIG. 1240(a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of this special symbol 2 random number table 202am2. As shown in FIG. 1240(a), the special symbol 2 random number table 202am2 in the 42nd control example includes the 41st As in the first modification of the control example, 205 random numbers (counter values) from "0 to 204" are associated and defined. On the other hand, in the 42nd control example, the range of 48066 random numbers (counter values) of "205 to 48270" is defined in association with the range of random numbers (counter values) determined to be a small hit. . It should be noted that the small hit here includes all of the V small win and the first to third small wins. In addition, as shown in FIG. 1240 (a), the special symbol 2 random number table 202am2 in the 42nd control example includes, as a range of random numbers (the value of the first per random number counter C1) determined as time-saving symbol election, A range of 131 random numbers (counter values) from "48271 to 48401" is associated and defined.

Of the 65536 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) judged to be a big win is 205, so a big win is achieved in the lottery of the second special symbol. The odds of winning are approximately 1/320 (205/65536). In addition, among 65536 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the first winning random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) determined as small hits is 48066, so the lottery for the second special symbol. The probability of winning a small prize is about 1/1.36 (48066/65536). Furthermore, among the 65536 random numbers that can be taken by the first per random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (counter values) determined to be time-saving design winning is 131, so the time-saving design is selected by lottery for the second special design. The probability of winning is approximately 1/500 (131/65536).

Thus, in this 42nd control example, as compared with the second modification of the 41st control example described above, the probability of a small hit is greatly increased, and the probability of a time-saving pattern is modified to be reduced. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 1240(b), details of the jackpot type selection table 202bm in the forty-second control example will be described. FIG. 1240(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the jackpot type selection table 202bm in the forty-second control example. As shown in FIG. 1240(b), in the jackpot type selection table 202bm in the forty-second control example, two types of jackpot A42 and jackpot B42 are defined as the jackpot types of the first special symbol. One type of jackpot C42 is defined as the jackpot type of the special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 1240 (b), as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 4", and "jackpot A42" is defined in correspondence, A "jackpot B42" is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "5 to 99". "Jackpot A42" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 10 and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the rush mode (first time-saving state B). In addition, "jackpot B42" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 4 and the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the chance mode (first time-saving state A). Therefore, the "jackpot A42" is more advantageous than the "jackpot B42" in terms of the number of rounds and the gaming state after the jackpot.

Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 99" that the value of the first hit type counter C2 can take, random numbers (counter values) associated with "jackpot A42" and "jackpot B42" are 5 and 95, respectively, the ratios of winning ``jackpot A42'' and ``jackpot B42'' when winning a jackpot in the lottery of the first special pattern are 5% and 95%, respectively. Therefore, if you win a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery in the normal state, the first time-saving state B, which has a relatively low probability (5% rate) and a high degree of advantage, is set, and a relatively high probability (95% A first time saving state A with a low advantage is set. In addition, this is a story limited to the normal state, and if you win the "jackpot A42" or "jackpot B42" in the time saving state (the jackpot is started), the game state after the jackpot ends is invincible mode (time saving state C).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 1240 (b), as the jackpot type of the second special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 can take the entire range (range of "0 to 99"), "jackpot C42 ” are defined in association with each other. This "jackpot C42" has 10 rounds, and is a jackpot type set to an invincible mode (first time-saving state C) in which the game state after the jackpot ends is advantageous regardless of the game state at the time of winning. . Since the ``big win C42'' is associated with the whole range of possible values of the first win type counter C2, the ``big win C42'' is always determined when the big win is won in the lottery of the second special symbols. This "jackpot C42" is the most advantageous jackpot type among all the jackpot types.

In addition to these "jackpot A42" to "jackpot C42", "jackpot D42" to "jackpot J42" are also provided in the 42nd control example. These "jackets D42" to "jackpots J42" are jackpot types that are won when a small win is won, a small win A42 to H42 is determined as a small win type, and the specific area 650e3 is passed between the small wins. The game state after the end of the jackpot is basically a jackpot set to the rush mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1241(a), the details of the variation pattern selection table 202dm in the forty-second control example will be described. FIG. 1241(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of this variation pattern selection table 202dm. As shown in FIG. 1241(a), the variation pattern selection table 202dm in the 42nd control example is a normal table 202dm1 that is referenced to select a variation pattern when a special symbol lottery is executed in a normal state. A time saving table 202dm2 that is referenced to select a variation pattern when a special symbol lottery is executed in the time saving state, and a variation pattern when a special symbol lottery is performed in the final variation of the time saving state. It is configured at least with a time saving final variation table 202dm3 that is referred to for selection. First, the details of the normal table 202dm1 will be described with reference to FIG. 1241(b).

FIG. 1241(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the normal table 202dm1 in the forty-second control example. Here, as shown in FIG. 1241, in the normal table 202dm1 in the 42nd control example, the specified contents when the special symbol type is "special symbol 1 (first special symbol)" Since it is the same as the normal table 202dk1 (see FIG. 1221) in the second modification of the control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1241, the special symbol type is "special figure 2 (second special symbol)", and when the lottery result is "completely lost", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is For the entire range of "0 to 198", "super short deviation" with a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is defined as a variation pattern, and the special symbol type is "special figure 2 (second special symbol)" , If the lottery result is "big win", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198" for the entire range, and the variation pattern is "super short win" with a variation time of 0.5 seconds. is defined, and the special symbol type is "special figure 2 (first special symbol)", and when the lottery result is "small hit", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198" For the entire range of the variation pattern, "ultra-short and small per" with a variation time of 0.5 seconds is defined, the special symbol type is "special figure 2 (first special symbol)", and the lottery result is " In the case of "time saving pattern", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198" for the entire range, the variation time is 0.5 seconds "ultra-short collision" is defined as the variation pattern. ing. That is, regardless of the result of the lottery, the variation time is set to 0.5 seconds.

In addition, in this 42nd control example, as in the second modification of the 41st control example described above, even if the normal symbol lottery is executed in the normal state and the winning of the normal symbol is won, the normal symbol is selected. Since the opening and closing pattern (short open for 0.1 second) of the electric accessory 640a is set to make it impossible (difficult) to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 as a win, the normal state is normal. Even if the symbol lottery is executed, the game ball cannot enter the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加In the 42nd control example, as a situation in which the second special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state, in the time-saving final variation in the chance mode or rush mode, the second special symbol holding ball is acquired by hitting to the right in the time-saving final This is the case when the change ends and the state shifts to the normal state. In addition, the reason why the fluctuation time is fixed at 0.5 seconds regardless of the lottery result is that when setting the 1 production mode based on the remaining pending lottery result in the time saving final fluctuation, the number of pending balls is produced. This is intended to prevent a significant shift in the period.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1242(a), details of the time saving table 202dm2 in the forty-second control example will be described. FIG. 1242(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the time saving table 202dm2 in the forty-second control example. This time saving table 202dm2 is in chance mode (first time saving state A), rush mode (first time saving state B, second time saving state B), or invincible mode (first time saving state C, second time saving state A) It is a data table referred to in order to select a variation pattern (variation time) when executing a special symbol lottery. FIG. 1242(a) is a diagram showing the defined contents of this time saving table 202dm2. As shown in FIG. 1242 (a), among the time saving table 202dm2 in the 42nd control example, the special symbol type corresponds to "special figure 1 (first special symbol)" It is the same as the time saving table 202dk2 (see FIG. 1222(a)) in the second modification of the control example. That is, regardless of the result of the lottery, the variable time period for a short period of time (0.5 seconds) ends. As in the second modification of the forty-first control example, this shifts to a time-saving state in which the lottery for the second special symbol with a high degree of advantage can be executed while holding one or more reserved balls of the first special symbol. In this case, the variable display performance of the first special symbol based on the reserved ball of the first special symbol (the period during which the second special symbol lottery with a high substantial expectation of a big hit cannot be executed) continues for a long time, and the player is dissuaded. This is intended to prevent frustration.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1242 (a), as the specified content for the second special symbol, when the lottery result is "completely out", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is within the range of "0 to 178" , "out" with a variation time of 5 seconds is defined as a variation pattern, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "179 to 198", and a variation time of 15 seconds is specified as a variation pattern. ” is stipulated. Also, when the special symbol type is "special symbol 2 (second special symbol)" and the lottery result is "jackpot", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is the entire range of "0 to 198" On the other hand, when "long hit" with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds is defined as a variation pattern, the special symbol type is "special figure 2 (first special symbol)", and the lottery result is "small hit" In, the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is specified for the entire range of "0 to 198", "long and small per" with a variation time of 15 seconds as a variation pattern, and the special symbol type is "special figure 2 (first special symbol)", and when the lottery result is "time saving symbol", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198" for the entire range, variation time as a variation pattern is stipulated as a "long collision" of 15 seconds.

That is, in the forty-second control example, when the lottery results are other than complete failure, the variation pattern for 15 seconds is always selected. During this 15-second variable time, a battle effect (see FIGS. 1233(b) and 1234) in which a monster character 821 battles, or a remaining machine recovery effect (see FIG. 1235) is executed. In addition, since it is configured to set a relatively long variation time (15 seconds) regardless of the type of small hit in the case of a small hit, in the rush mode (first time saving state B, second time saving state B) the first to When the third small win is won and a time-saving end condition (third end condition) is established, the second special pattern reserved balls are easily stored up to the upper limit number by continuing to hit to the right while the small win fluctuates. be able to. Therefore, in a situation where one character has one remaining life and another character has zero remaining life, reach occurs, and the character with one remaining life and the monster character 821 battle. When it develops into a production, it is possible to make the degree of expectation for the battle production higher than usual. In other words, even when a big win or a small V win is included in the reserved balls of the second special symbol, the effect of winning the battle is selected, so that the actual winning percentage can be improved more than usual. . Therefore, in a situation where one character has one remaining life and the remaining lives of other characters are zero, the player can have a great sense of expectation, so that the game can be played until the end of the rush mode. can keep people motivated.

Next, with reference to Drawing 1242 (b), the details of table 202dm3 for a final change in working hours are explained. In this time saving final variation table 202dm3, in the time saving state (chance mode, rush mode, invincible mode), when the number of times of time saving (the number of times of lottery until reaching the prescribed number of times of the number of times of lottery of the second special symbol) remains 1 , and is a data table that is referenced only in the chance mode in which the number of times of time saving is one. FIG. 1242(b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of this time-saving final variation table 202dm3. As shown in FIG. 1242(b), the contents of regulation for the first special symbol are common to the table 202dm2 for time reduction described above (see FIG. 1242(a)). That is, regardless of the result of the lottery, a variation pattern with a variation time of 0.5 seconds is set.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1242 (b), as the specified contents for the second special symbol, the special symbol type is "special symbol 2 (second special symbol)", and the lottery result is "completely lost". In the case, the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is specified for the entire range of "0 to 198", the variation time is 15 seconds "out of guess" as a variation pattern, and the special symbol type is "special figure 2 (Second special symbol)” and the lottery result is “big hit”, the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is “0 to 198” for the entire range, the variation time as the variation pattern 15 seconds of "long hit" is defined, the special symbol type is "special figure 2 (first special symbol)", and the lottery result is "small hit", the acquired variation type counter CS1 For the entire range of values "0 to 198", "long and small hit" with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds is defined as a variation pattern, and the special symbol type is "special figure 2 (first special symbol)" , If the lottery result is "time saving pattern", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198" for the entire range, the variation time is 15 seconds as a variation pattern "long collision" stipulated. That is, regardless of the lottery result, a variation pattern of 15 seconds with a relatively long variation time is set. As a result, when the player continues to hit to the right in the time-saving final variation, it is possible to easily accumulate the second special symbol reserved balls up to the upper limit regardless of the lottery result.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1243, the details of the time reduction provision table 202em in the 42nd control example will be described. This time saving grant table 202em is similar to the time saving grant table 202ek (see FIG. 1223) in the modified example of the 41st control example described above, when setting the time saving state, the time saving state according to the setting opportunity of the time saving state It is a data table referred to for setting end conditions.

As shown in FIG. 1243, the time saving grant table 202em in the present 42nd control example determines whether or not the time saving end condition is established for each of the time saving state grant opportunities (jackpot type, time saving pattern winning, or reaching the ceiling lottery number of times). The values of each counter referred to when performing are defined in association with each other. Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 1243, in the present 42nd control example, as a counter for determining whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied, the time saving counter 203h, the V small hitting counter 203s1, the first small hitting counter 203s2, Six of the second small hit counter 203s3, the third small hit counter 203s4, and the special figure 2 counter 203t are provided. About time saving counter 203h and special figure 2 counter 203t, since it is the same as the counter of the same name in the 2nd modification of the 41st example of control mentioned above, it omits about the detailed explanation here.

V small hit counter 203s1 is a counter for determining whether or not the end condition (second end condition) corresponding to the number of winning times of the V small hit executed after the time saving state is set is satisfied, and the above-described second It is a counter having the same function as the small hit counter 203s in the second modification of the 41 control example. In addition, the first small hit counter 203s2, the second small hit counter 203s3, and the third small hit counter 203s4 end based on the winning times of the first to third small hits executed after the time saving state is set. A counter for determining whether or not a condition (third end condition) is satisfied. Here, as described above, in this 42nd control example, all the winning times of the first to third small per reach the specified number of times set at the start of time saving, time saving end condition (third end condition ) is established. That is, until all of the first small winning counter 203s2, the second small winning counter 203s3, and the third small winning counter 203s4 are updated to 0 in the time saving state, the second end condition is not satisfied.

As shown in FIG. 1243, in this 42nd control example, 10 types of "jackpot A42" to "jackpot J42" are provided as jackpot types, and time saving pattern winning and time saving opportunity based on ceiling lottery number reaching is also provided. In the time reduction grant table 202em in the 42nd control example, for each time reduction grant opportunity, the time reduction counter 203h, the V small hit counter 203s1, the first small hit counter 203s2, the second small hit counter 203s3, and the third small hit counter 203s4 , And the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t (that is, the first to fourth end conditions) are defined in association.

As shown in FIG. 1243, the game state at the time of winning is the normal state for "jackpot A42" determined at a rate of 5% when the jackpot type is a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol. In the case, the value of the short time counter 203h "100", the value of the V small per counter 203s1 "1", the value of the first small per counter 203s2 "5", the value of the second small per counter 203s3 "3", the third small The value "1" of the hit counter 203s4 and the value "100" of the special figure 2 counter 203t are defined respectively. Therefore, when "jackpot A42" is won in the normal state, the number of variations of the special symbols is set to 100 times as the first end condition, and the number of execution times of the V small winning game is set to 1 time as the second end condition. Then, as the third end condition, the number of executions of the first small winning game is set to 5 times, the number of times of executing the second small winning game is 3 times, and the number of times of executing the third small winning game is set to 1 time. As the end condition, the number of times of variation of the second special symbol is set to 100 times. The probability of winning the first small hit (small hit I42), the second small hit (small hit J42), and the third small hit (small hit K42) in the lottery of the second special pattern is about 1/3, about Since it is set to 1/5 and about 1/10, in the time saving state (first time saving state B) set by winning the "jackpot A42" in the normal state, almost the first and fourth end conditions is not established, and the time saving state is ended by the second end condition, the third end condition, or the jackpot winning. In addition, the probability that the second end condition is met (the V small win (small win A42 to H42) is won) is about 1/10. On the other hand, since the average number of special symbol lotteries required until the third end condition is satisfied is 15 times, the time saving state (first time saving state B) set after the end of "jackpot A42" The percentage of winning a big win or a small win before the end condition is met is about 80.4%.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1243, when the jackpot type "jackpot A42" and the game state at the time of winning are the time saving state, the value of the time saving counter 203h "100", the value of the V small hitting counter 203s1 "1", the Value of 1 small per counter 203s2 "100", value of second small per counter 203s3 "100", value of third small per counter 203s4 "100", and value of special figure 2 counter 203t "100" are defined respectively. ing. That is, the first time-saving state C (invincible mode) is set in which the time-saving state is not terminated until the number of lotteries of the special symbols reaches 100 times, the V small win is won, or the big win is won. The probability of winning a total of about 1/10 of the jackpot or small hit in the lottery of special symbols within 100 times is almost 100%, so if you win the jackpot A42 during the time saving state, the next big hit will be virtually A time-saving state that continues until is set.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 1243, the game state at the time of winning is the normal state for "jackpot B42", which is determined at a rate of 95% when the jackpot type is a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol. In the case, the value of the time saving counter 203h "5", the value of the V small per counter 203s1 "1", the value of the first small per counter 203s2 "100", the value of the second small per counter 203s3 "100", the The value "100" of the 3 small per counter 203s4 and the value "1" of the special figure 2 counter 203t are defined respectively. Therefore, when the "jackpot B42" is won in the normal state, the number of variations of the special symbols is set to 5 times as the first end condition, and the number of execution times of the V small winning game is set to 1 time as the second end condition. As the third end condition, the number of executions of the first small winning game 100 times, the number of times of executing the second small winning game 100 times, and the number of times of executing the third small winning game 100 times are set. As the end condition, the number of times of variation of the second special symbol is set to 1. Therefore, when the ``jackpot B42'' is won in the normal state, the drawing of the second special pattern is executed once, the V small prize is won, or the time saving state continues until the jackpot is won. It is possible to acquire the upper limit number (4) of the second special symbol reserved balls by continuously hitting to the right while the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed once in the time saving state. Therefore, it becomes a game property aiming to win a big hit or a V small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol five times. In addition, the ratio of winning about 1/10 total jackpot or V small hit in the lottery of the second special symbols within 5 times is about 41%. Winning a big win or V small win shifts to an invincible mode or a rush mode, so that a game is played with a strong expectation of winning a big win or a small win in the lottery of the second special symbols five times. can be done. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 1243, when the jackpot type "jackpot B42" and the game state at the time of winning are the time saving state, the value of the time saving counter 203h "100", the value of the V small hitting counter 203s1 "1", the Value of 1 small per counter 203s2 "100", value of second small per counter 203s3 "100", value of third small per counter 203s4 "100", and value of special figure 2 counter 203t "100" are defined respectively. ing. That is, it is set to the first time-saving state C (invincible mode) similarly to the case of winning the ``jackpot A42'' during the time-saving state, forming an advantageous state in which the time-saving state is substantially continued until the next big win.

Also, as shown in FIG. 1243, as the jackpot type, a jackpot is determined by lottery of the second special symbol, or a "jackpot C42" determined when a V win occurs in a small hit A42, which is a kind of V small hit. For, regardless of the game state at the time of winning, the value of the time reduction counter 203h "100", the value of the V small hit counter 203s1 "1", the value of the first small hit counter 203s2 "100", the second small hit The value "100" of the counter 203s3, the value "100" of the third small hit counter 203s4, and the value "100" of the special figure 2 counter 203t are defined respectively. That is, the 1st time saving state (invincible mode) is matched and prescribed|regulated. Therefore, when the second special pattern lottery results in a big win, an advantageous state is formed in which the time saving state is continued substantially until the next big win.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 1243, as a jackpot type, "jackpot D42" determined when a V prize occurs in a small win B42, which is a kind of V small win, depends on the game state at the time of winning. First, the value of the time saving counter 203h "100", the value of the V small hit counter 203s1 "1", the value of the first small hit counter 203s2 "5", the value of the second small hit counter 203s3 "3", the third small hit The value "1" of the counter 203s4 and the value "100" of the special figure 2 counter 203t are defined respectively. In other words, since the same termination conditions as in the case of winning the ``jackpot A42'' in the normal state are stipulated, when the ``jackpot D42'' is won, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed 15 times on average. A time-saving state (a time-saving state in which the jackpot winning ratio is about 80.4%) is set in which the third end condition is satisfied.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 1243, as a jackpot type, "jackpot E42" determined when a V prize occurs in a small win C42, which is a kind of V small win, depends on the game state at the time of winning. First, the value of the time saving counter 203h "100", the value of the V small hit counter 203s1 "1", the value of the first small hit counter 203s2 "7", the value of the second small hit counter 203s3 "5", the third small hit The value "2" of the counter 203s4 and the value "100" of the special figure 2 counter 203t are defined respectively. Therefore, when the "jackpot E42" is won, the number of variations of the special symbols is set to 100 times as the first end condition, and the number of execution times of the V small winning game is set to 1 time as the second end condition. As the 3 end condition, the number of times of execution of the first small winning game is set to 7 times, the number of times of executing the second small winning game is 5 times, and the number of times of executing the third small winning game is set to 2 times, and as the fourth end condition , 100 times of variation of the second special symbol is set. As described above, the probability of winning the first small hit (small hit I42), the second small hit (small hit J42), and the third small hit (small hit K42) in the second special symbol lottery is about 1. /3, about 1/5, and about 1/10, the average number of special symbol lotteries required until the third end condition is satisfied is 25 times. Therefore, the ratio of winning a total of about 1/10 jackpot or small hit before the second end condition is satisfied in the time saving state (first time saving state B) set after the end of “jackpot E42” is about 93.4%.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 1243, as a jackpot type, "jackpot F42" determined when a V prize occurs in a small win D42, which is a kind of V small win, depends on the game state at the time of winning. First, the value of the time saving counter 203h "100", the value of the V small hit counter 203s1 "1", the value of the first small hit counter 203s2 "10", the value of the second small hit counter 203s3 "7", the third small hit The value "3" of the counter 203s4 and the value "100" of the special figure 2 counter 203t are defined respectively. Therefore, when the "jackpot F42" is won, the number of variations of the special symbols is set to 100 times as the first end condition, and the number of execution times of the V small winning game is set to 1 time as the second end condition. 3 As the end condition, the number of executions of the first small winning game is set to 10 times, the number of times of execution of the second small winning game is 7 times, and the number of times of execution of the third small winning game is set to 3 times, and as the fourth end condition , 100 times of variation of the second special symbol is set. As described above, the probability of winning the first small hit (small hit I42), the second small hit (small hit J42), and the third small hit (small hit K42) in the second special symbol lottery is about 1. /3, about 1/5, and about 1/10, the average number of special symbol lotteries required until the third end condition is satisfied is 50 times. Therefore, the ratio of winning a total of about 1/10 jackpot or small hit before the second end condition is satisfied in the time saving state (first time saving state B) set after the end of “jackpot F42” is about 99.6%.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 1243, as a jackpot type, "jackpot G42" determined when a V prize occurs in a small hit E42, which is a kind of V small win, depends on the game state at the time of winning. First, the value of the time saving counter 203h "100", the value of the V small hit counter 203s1 "1", the value of the first small hit counter 203s2 "3", the value of the second small hit counter 203s3 "2", the third small hit The value "1" of the counter 203s4 and the value "100" of the special figure 2 counter 203t are defined respectively. Therefore, when the "jackpot G42" is won, the number of variations of the special symbols is set to 100 times as the first end condition, and the number of execution times of the V small winning game is set to 1 time as the second end condition. 3 As the end condition, the number of executions of the first small winning game is set to 3 times, the number of times of execution of the second small winning game is 2 times, and the number of times of execution of the 3rd small winning game is set to 1 time, and as the fourth end condition , 100 times the number of variations of the second special symbol is set. As described above, the probability of winning the first small hit (small hit I42), the second small hit (small hit J42), and the third small hit (small hit K42) in the second special symbol lottery is about 1. /3, about 1/5, and about 1/10, the average number of special symbol lotteries required until the third end condition is satisfied is 10 times. Therefore, the ratio of winning a total of about 1/10 jackpot or small hit before the second end condition is satisfied in the time saving state (first time saving state B) set after the end of "jackpot G42" is about 66.4%.

As shown in FIG. 1243, the "jackpot H42" determined when a V prize occurs in the small win F42, which is a type of V small win, has exactly the same termination conditions as the above-described "jackpot D42". stipulated. Similarly, the "jackpot I42", which is determined when a V prize is won in the small win G42, which is a kind of V small win, has exactly the same ending conditions as the above-mentioned "jackpot E42". "Jack J42" determined when a V prize is won in a small hit H42, which is a kind of small hit, and the time-saving pattern winning are completely the same end conditions as the above-mentioned "jack F42". , the detailed description of which is omitted here.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 1243, when the time saving opportunity is the ceiling lottery number of times reached, "jackpot A42" in the time saving state, "jackpot B42" winning, "jackpot C42" time saving opportunity by winning The same end conditions are associated. That is, an end condition corresponding to the invincible mode is associated.

Thus, in the 42nd control example, variations are provided for the third end condition (combination of initial values of remaining lives of each character). Since the possibility of winning can be made different, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1244, details of the small hit type selection table 202fm in the 42nd control example will be described. FIG. 1244 is a diagram showing the defined contents of the small hit type selection table 202fm. As shown in FIG. 1244, in the small hit type selection table 202fm in the 42nd control example, 11 types of small hit types of "small hit A42" to "small hit J42" are provided as small hit types. . Among these, "small win A42" to "small win H42" are V small wins, and "small win I42" to "small win K42" are small wins in which V winning is impossible.

As shown in FIG. 1244, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with the "small hit A42" as the small hit type with respect to the range of "0 to 447". This "small win A42" is a kind of V small win, and is a small win of a type that wins a big win C42 (10 round big win) when a V winning occurs. Of the 65536 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 65535" that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "small hit A42" is "0 to 447 ”, the ratio of determining “small hit A42” as the small hit type is about 0.7% (448/65536).

Further, as shown in FIG. 1244, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with the "small hit B42" as the small hit type with respect to the range of "448 to 3130". This "small win B42" is a kind of V small win, and is a small win of the type that wins a big win D42 (10-round big win) when a V winning occurs. Of the 65536 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 65535" that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "small hit B42" is "448 to 3130 ”, the ratio of determining “small hit B42” as the small hit type is about 4.1% (2683/65536).

Further, as shown in FIG. 1244, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with the "small hit C42" as the small hit type with respect to the range of "3131 to 4740". This "small win C42" is a kind of V small win, and is a small win of the type that wins a big win E42 (10 round big win) when a V win occurs. Of the 65536 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 65535" that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with the "small hit C42" is "3131 to 4740 ”, the rate at which “small hit C42” is determined as the small hit type is about 2.5% (1610/65536).

Further, as shown in FIG. 1244, the value of the small hit type counter C5 corresponds to the range of "4741 to 4919", and "small hit D42" is defined as the small hit type. This "small win D42" is a kind of V small win, and is a small win of the type that wins a big win F42 (10-round big win) when a V winning occurs. Of the 65536 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 65535" that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "small hit D42" is "4741 to 4919 ”, the ratio of determining “small hit C42” as the small hit type is about 0.3% (179/65536).

Further, as shown in FIG. 1244, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with the "small hit E42" as the small hit type with respect to the range of "4920 to 7937". This "small win E42" is a kind of V small win, and is a small win of the type that wins a big win G42 (3-round big win) when a V winning occurs. Of the 65536 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 65535" that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "small hit E42" is "4920 to 7937 ”, the ratio of determining “small hit C42” as the small hit type is about 4.6% (3018/65536).

Further, as shown in FIG. 1244, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with the "small hit F42" as the small hit type with respect to the range of "7938 to 8742". This "small win F42" is a kind of V small win, and is a small win of the type that wins a big win H42 (3-round big win) when a V win occurs. Of the 65536 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 65535" that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "small hit F42" is "7938 to 8742 ”, the rate at which “small hit F42” is determined as the small hit type is about 1.2% (805/65536).

Further, as shown in FIG. 1244, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with the "small hit G42" as the small hit type with respect to the range of "8743 to 8903". This "small win G42" is a kind of V small win, and is a small win of the type that wins a big win I42 (3-round big win) when a V win occurs. Of the 65536 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 65535" that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "small hit G42" is "8743 to 8903 ”, the rate at which “small hit F42” is determined as the small hit type is about 0.2% (161/65536).

Further, as shown in FIG. 1244, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with the "small hit H42" as the small hit type with respect to the range of "8904 to 8943". This "small win H42" is a kind of V small win, and is a small win of the type that wins a big win J42 (3-round big win) when a V win occurs. Of the 65536 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 65535" that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "small hit H42" is "8904 to 8943 ”, the ratio of determining “small hit H42” as the small hit type is about 0.1% (40/65536).

Further, as shown in FIG. 1244, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with the "small hit I42" as the small hit type with respect to the range of "8944 to 38728". This "small win I42" is a kind of small win in which it is impossible (difficult) to win a V prize. It is also a small hit type (first small hit) that triggers the subtraction. Of the 65536 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 65535" that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "small hit I42" is "8944 to 38728 ”, the ratio of determining “small hit H42” as the small hit type is about 45.4% (29785/65536). Since the probability of winning the small prize in the second special symbol lottery is about 1/1.36, the probability of winning the first small prize (small prize I42) in the second special symbol lottery is about 1/3. (45.4%×1/1.36).

Further, as shown in FIG. 1244, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with the "small hit J42" as the small hit type with respect to the range of "38729 to 56599". This "small win J42" is a kind of small win in which it is impossible (difficult) to win a V prize. It is also a small hit type (second small hit) that serves as a trigger for subtraction. Of the 65536 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 65535" that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "small hit J42" is "38729 to 56599 ”, the ratio of determining “small hit J42” as the small hit type is about 27.3% (17871/65536). Since the probability of winning the small hit in the second special symbol lottery is about 1/1.36, the probability of winning the second small hit (small hit J42) in the second special symbol lottery is about 1/5. (27.3%×1/1.36).

Further, as shown in FIG. 1244, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in the range of "56600 to 65535" in association with "small hit K42" as the small hit type. This "small win K42" is a kind of small win in which it is impossible (difficult) to win a V prize. It is also a small hit type (second small hit) that serves as a trigger for subtraction. Of the 65536 random numbers (counter values) of "0 to 65535" that can be taken by the small hit type counter C5, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with "small hit K42" is "56600 to 65535 ”, the ratio of determining “small hit K42” as the small hit type is about 13.6% (8936/65536). Since the probability of winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery is about 1/1.36, the probability of winning the second small hit (small hit K42) in the second special symbol lottery is about 1/10. (13.6% x 1/1.36).

Next, with reference to FIG. 1239(b), details of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the forty-second control example will be described. FIG. 1239(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in this 42nd control example. As shown in FIG. 1239(b), the RAM 203 in the forty-second control example is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the second modification (and the first modification) of the forty-first control example (see FIG. 1213). Then, instead of the small winning counter 203s, a V small winning counter 203s1, a first small winning counter 203s2, a second small hitting counter 203s3, and a third small hitting counter 203s4 are provided, and a special drawing lottery counter 203ma It is different in that it is provided, and that the time saving limit counter 203kb and the subtraction waiting flag 203kc are deleted.

The V small winning counter 203s1 is a counter that is referred to for determining whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the number of winnings of the small winning that can be won in the time saving state, and the first small winning counter 203s2 is the time saving state. It is a counter that is referred to for determining whether the number of winning times of the first small hit has reached the specified number of times, and the second small hitting counter 203s3 is the number of winning times of the second small hit in the time saving state to the specified number of times. It is a counter that is referenced to determine whether or not it has reached, and the third small hit counter 203s4 refers to determine whether or not the number of winning times of the third small hit has reached a specified number in the time saving state. is a counter that These V small winning counters 203s1, 1st small winning counter 203s2, 2nd small winning counter 203s3, and 3rd small winning counter 203s4 have a counter value according to the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot at the end of the jackpot. is read from the time reduction grant table 202em (see FIG. 1243) and set.

The special figure lottery counter 203ma is a counter referred to for determining whether or not the ceiling lottery number of times has been reached. This special figure lottery counter 203ma has an initial value set to 0, and each time a special symbol lottery is executed, the value is updated by adding 1 (see S651A in FIG. 1248), and the value is changed when the jackpot is won. Reset to 0. When the value of this special figure lottery counter 203ma reaches 950, it is determined that the ceiling lottery number of times has been reached, and the second time saving state A, which is a kind of invincible mode, is set. That is, a time-saving state is set to continue substantially until the next big hit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1245, the details of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the forty-second control example will be described. FIG. 1245 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in this 42nd control example. As shown in FIG. 1245, the RAM 223 in the forty-second control example has an end condition It differs in that a storage area 223ma and a final variation effect counter 223mb are added. It is also different in that the icon information storage area 223ka and the remaining win count counter 223kb are deleted.

The termination condition storage area 223ma is a storage area for storing data indicating the time saving termination condition. According to the data stored in the end condition storage area 223ma, display setting of remaining lives of each character, subtraction display of remaining lives, and the like are executed.

The final variation production counter 223mb is a counter in which a counter value indicating the number of fluctuations in which the battle production started based on the start of the time saving final variation continues is set. In this final variation effect counter 223mb, the number of balls held in the second special symbol that is suspended at the start of the final variation is set (see S4453A in FIG. 1252), and each time the variation display of the second special symbol is executed The value is decremented by 1 (see S4444A in FIG. 1251).

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the 42nd control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the forty-second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1246 to 1249. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 1246, the details of the special symbol variation pattern selection process 42 (S241A) in the forty-second control example will be described. This special symbol variation pattern selection process 42 (S241A) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation pattern selection process 41B (see FIG. 1227) in the second modification of the forty-first control example described above, and is a special symbol. Similar to the variation pattern selection process 41B (see FIG. 1227), this is a process for selecting the variation pattern of the first symbol according to the lottery result of the special symbol.

In the special symbol variation pattern selection process 42 (see FIG. 1246) in this 42nd control example, in each process of S401 to S403, S405 to S408, and S421B, in the second modification of the 41st control example described above The same processes as S401-S403, S405-S408, and S421B of the special symbol variation pattern selection process 41B (see FIG. 1227) are executed.

In addition, in the special symbol variation pattern selection process 42 (see FIG. 1246) in the 42nd control example, when the process of S403 ends, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t is 1 (S431A), If it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t is 1 (S431A: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current special symbol lottery is the second special symbol lottery (S432A). In the process of S432A, if it is determined that the lottery for the special symbol this time is the lottery for the second special symbol (S432A: Yes), the time-saving state ends by ending the variable display of the second special symbol to be started this time. (This change display is the final time saving change), so the time saving final change table 202dm3 (see FIG. 1242(b)) is read (S433A), and the process proceeds to S405.

On the other hand, in the processing of S431A, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t is not 1 (S431A: No), and in the processing of S432A, the lottery for this special symbol is not the lottery for the second special symbol ( (S432A: No), the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the game state is read out (S434A), and the process proceeds to S405. In the process of S434A, if the gaming state is the normal state, the normal table 202dm1 (see FIG. 1241(b)) is read, while if the time saving state, the time saving table 202dm2 (see FIG. 1242(a)) is read.

By executing this special symbol variation pattern selection process 42 (see FIG. 1246), it is possible to switch the variation pattern selection table depending on whether it is the time saving final variation, so it is possible to set the variation pattern more preferably. can be done.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1247, details of the time saving update process 42 (S242) in the 42nd control example will be described. This time saving update process 42 is a process executed instead of the time saving update process 41 (see FIG. 1199) in the second modification (and the 41st control example) of the 41st control example described above, and the time saving update process 41 (See FIG. 1199) Similarly, it is a process for updating the various counter values for determining the time saving end condition and determining whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied.

In the processing of S601 to S605, S633A to S637A, and S639A among the time saving update processing 42 (see FIG. 1247) in this 42nd control example, the second modification of the 41st control example described above (and the 41st The same processing as S601 to S605, S633A to S637A, and S639A of time saving update processing 41 (see FIG. 1199) in control example) is executed.

In addition, when the time saving update process 42 (see FIG. 1247) in the 42nd control example is started, first, the ceiling determination process 42 for determining whether or not the ceiling lottery number of times has been reached is executed (S641A), and the process is performed. The process proceeds to S601. The details of this ceiling determination process 42 (S641A) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In addition, in the time saving update process 42 (see FIG. 1247) in the 42nd control example, when the process of S605 ends, the special figure 2 counter 203t, various small hit counters (V small hit counter 203s1, first small hit counter 203s2, The values of the second small hit counter 203s3 and the third small hit counter 203s4) are all reset to 0 (S641A), and the process proceeds to S607. In the processing of S641A, as various counters for determining the time saving end condition, instead of the small hitting counter 203s, the V small hitting counter 203s1, the first small hitting counter 203s2, the second This is a change accompanying the provision of the 2 small winning counter 203s3 and the 3rd small winning counter 203s4.

In addition, in the time saving update process 42 (see FIG. 1247) in the present 42nd control example, when the process of S604 ends, the second modification of the 41st control example (and the 41st control example) Small winning time saving update process 41 (Refer to FIG. 1200) Instead, the small winning time saving update process 42 is executed (S642A), and the process proceeds to S633A. The details of this small winning time saving update process 42 (S642A) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Furthermore, in the time saving update process 42 (see FIG. 1247) in the 42nd control example, when the process of S637A is completed, the time saving counter 203h and various small hitting counters (V small hitting counter 203s1, first small hitting counter 203s2, The values of the 2nd small hit counter 203s3 and the 3rd small hit counter 203s4) are all reset to 0 (S643A), and the process proceeds to S639A. As with the processing of S641A, the processing of S643A is performed as various counters for determining the time saving end condition, for the modified example of the 41st control example, instead of the small winning counter 203s, the V small winning counter 203s1, the It is a change accompanying the provision of the 1 small per counter 203s2, the second small per counter 203s3, and the third small per counter 203s4.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1248, the details of the ceiling determination process 42 (S641A) in the 42nd control example will be described. FIG. 1248 is a flowchart showing this ceiling determination process 42 (S641A). In this ceiling determination process 42 (S641A), first, the value of the special figure lottery counter 203ma is updated by adding 1 (S651A), and it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure lottery counter 203ma after the addition has reached 950. (S652A). In the process of S652A, if it is determined that the value of the special figure lottery counter 203ma has become 950 (S652A: Yes), it is determined that the ceiling lottery number of times has been reached, S653A for setting the second time saving state A ~ Each process of S655A is executed. That is, the game state is set to the second time saving state (S653A), and the time saving end condition with the arrival of the ceiling lottery number as a time saving opportunity is read from the time saving grant table 202em (see FIG. 1243) and various counters (time saving counter 203h, V Small hit counter 203s1, first small hit counter 203s2, second small hit counter 203s3, third small hit counter 203s4, special figure 2 counter 203t) and update (S654A), state command indicating the second time saving state is set (S655A), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S652A, if it is determined that the value of the special figure lottery counter 203ma after addition is not 950 (S652A: No), it is determined that the ceiling lottery number of times has not been reached, S653A ~ Each process of S655A is skipped, and the present process ends.

By executing this ceiling determination processing 42 (see FIG. 1248), the number of lotteries of special symbols reaches 950 times without winning the jackpot, thereby shifting to the advantageous second time-saving state A (invincible mode). Therefore, especially after the number of times of lottery (for example, 600 times) of special symbols is continuously lost, the number of times of loss continues to the ceiling lottery rather than winning the jackpot. can be expected. Therefore, even if a so-called addiction occurs, the player's motivation for the game can be maintained.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1249, the details of the above-described small winning time saving update process 42 (S642A) will be described. This small hit time saving update process 42 (S642A) is a process executed instead of the small hit time saving update process 41 (see FIG. 1200) in the second modification (and the 41st control example) of the above-described 41st control example And, similarly to the small hit time saving update process 41 (see FIG. 1200), it is a process for determining whether or not the time saving end condition based on the small hit winning is established. FIG. 1249 is a flow chart showing this small winning time saving update process 42 (S642A).

Among the small winning time saving update process 42 (see FIG. 1249) in this 42nd control example, in each process of S701, S704, and S706, the second modification of the 41st control example (and the 41st control example ) in the small winning time saving update process 41 (see FIG. 1200) S701, S704, and the same process as each process of S706 is executed. In addition, in the small hit time saving update process 42 (see FIG. 1249) in the present 42nd control example, in the process of S701, when it is determined that the lottery result of this special symbol is a small hit (S701: Yes), then , It is determined whether the type of this small hit is a V small hit (any of the small hits A42 to H42) (S721A).

In the processing of S721A, if it is determined that the current small hit is a V small hit (any of the small hits A42 to H42) (S721A: Yes), the value of the V small hit counter 203s1 is subtracted by 1 It is updated (S722A), and it is determined whether or not the value of the V small hit counter 203s1 after the subtraction has become 0 (S723A). In the process of S723A, if it is determined that the value of the V small hit counter 203s1 after subtraction has been updated to 0 (S723A: Yes), it means that the end condition (second end condition) of the time saving state has been met. , S704, S724A, and S706 for ending the time saving state are executed. That is, the game state is set to the normal state (S704), the time reduction counter 203h, the special figure 2 counter 203t, and all the small hit counters (V small hit counter 203s1, first small hit counter 203s2, second small hit counter 203s3 , the counter value of the third small winning counter 203s4) is reset to 0 (S724A). Next, a state command indicating the normal state is set (S706A), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S723A, if it is determined that the value of the V small hit counter 203s1 after subtraction is not 0 (S723A: No), it means that the end condition of the time saving state is not satisfied. Therefore, the processing of S704, S724A, and S706 is skipped, and the present processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S721A, if it is determined that the small hit of this time is not the V small hit (S721A: No), the small hit of this time is any of the first to third small hits (small hit I42 to K42) Since it means that it is, the value of the small hit counter corresponding to the small hit type of this time is updated by subtracting 1 (S725A). In the process of S725A, if the current small win is the first small win (small win I42), the first small win counter 203s2 is updated by subtracting 1, and if the second small win (small win J42), The second small hit counter 203s3 is updated by subtracting 1, and if it is the third small hit (small hit K42), the third small hit counter 203s4 is updated by subtracting 1.

When the processing of S725A ends, then, it is determined whether or not the counter values of the first small hit counter 203s2, the second small hit counter 203s3, and the third small hit counter 203s4 have all become 0 (S726A), and the first When it is determined that the counter values of the small hit counter 203s2, the second small hit counter 203s3, and the third small hit counter 203s4 have all become 0 (S726A: Yes), the time saving end condition (third end condition) has been established. In order to mean that, each process of S704, S724A, and S706 for ending the time saving state is executed, and this process is ended. On the other hand, in the processing of S726A, if it is determined that any one of the first small hit counter 203s2, the second small hit counter 203s3, and the third small hit counter 203s4 is not 0 (S726A: No) , It means that the end condition (third end condition) of the time saving state is not satisfied, so that the processing of S704, S724A, S706 for ending the time saving state is skipped, and this processing is ended as it is.

By executing this small winning time saving update process 42 (see FIG. 1249), a novel game property can be realized in which the time saving state can be continued until the winning times of the first to third small wins all reach a prescribed number of times. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Regarding the control process of the sound ramp control device in the forty-second control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the forty-second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 1250 to 1252. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 1250, details of the variable effect setting process 42 (S4321A) in the 42nd control example will be described. This variable effect setting process 42 (S4321A) is a process that is executed in place of the variable effect setting process 41B (see FIG. 1230) in the second modification of the forty-first control example described above, and the variable effect setting process 41B ( 1230), this is a process for setting the effect mode of the variable display effect of the third symbol to be executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. FIG. 1250 is a flow chart showing this variable effect setting process 42 (S4321A).

In the processes of S4401, S4403, and S4421A of the variable effect setting process 42 (see FIG. 1250) in the forty-second control example, the variable effect setting process 41B ( 1230) are executed. In addition, in the variable effect setting process 42 (see FIG. 1250) in the 42nd control example, when the process of S4401 is completed, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving state (S4441A), and the time saving state is determined. If it is determined (S4441A: Yes), the effect setting process 42 during time saving is executed for setting the effect mode of the variable display effect in the time saving state (S4442A), and this process ends. The details of the effect setting process 42 (S4442A) during this time reduction will be described later with reference to FIG.

In addition, in the fluctuation effect setting process 42 (see FIG. 1250) in the present 42nd control example, in the process of S4403, when it is determined that the current special symbol lottery is the second special symbol lottery (S4403: Yes) , It is determined whether the value of the final variation production counter 223mb is a value greater than 0 (S4443A), and when it is determined that the value of the final variation production counter 223mb is a value greater than 0 (S4443A: Yes), The value of the final fluctuation production counter 223mb is updated by subtracting 1 (S4444A), and the process proceeds to S4447A. On the other hand, in the processing of S4443A, if it is determined that the value of the final variation effect counter 223mb is not a value greater than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S4443A: No), then the lottery result is completely out or non-V small It is determined whether it is a hit or not (S4445A), and the lottery result of this special pattern is neither a complete loss nor a non-V small hit (that is, either a big hit, a small V hit, or a short-time pattern winning). If so (S4446A), the process proceeds to S4447A.

On the other hand, in the process of S4445A, when it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol this time is a complete loss or a non-V small hit (S4445A), the process of S4446A is skipped and the process proceeds to S4447A. In the process of S4447A, the variable display mode in the small display area Dm8 is set according to the result of the lottery (S4447A), and the process ends.

Next, with reference to Drawing 1251, the details of production setting processing 42 (S4442A) during time saving mentioned above are explained. FIG. 1251 is a flow chart showing the effect setting process 42 (S4442A) during this time saving. When the production setting process 42 (S4442A) during this time saving is executed, first, whether it is the final variation in the time saving state (that is, the value of the special figure 2 counter 203t corresponds to the second special symbol in the state of 1 Whether or not the variation pattern command is received) is determined (S4451A), and if it is determined that it is the final variation in the time saving state (S4451A: Yes), the variation display mode is set in consideration of the look-ahead result of the second special symbol (S4452A). That is, if there is a big hit or a V small hit in the lottery result of the special symbol this time and in the reserved balls of the second special symbol, the variable display of the effect mode to notify the win (win the monster character 821). While setting the mode, if it is determined that the lottery result of this special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol are all completely lost or non-V small hits, the failure is notified (defeated by the monster character 821 ) Set the variable display mode of the production mode. When the processing of S4452A ends, the counter value indicating the number of times of variation until the second special symbol to be notified is set to the final variation effect counter 223mb (S4453A), and this processing ends. In the processing of S4453A, in the case of the production mode of notifying the loss, the counter value corresponding to the current number of held balls is set, while in the case of the production mode of notifying the hit, the number of held balls up to the winning ball is set. Set the corresponding counter value.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4451A, if it is determined that the time saving final variation is within (S4451A: No), it is determined whether the lottery result of this special symbol is either a big hit or a V small hit (S4454A ), if it is determined that the lottery result is either a big win or a V small win (S4454A: Yes), the production mode of the variable production according to the lottery result this time is determined (S4456A), and this process is terminated. do. On the other hand, in the process of S4454A, if it is determined that the lottery result of this time is neither a big win nor a V small win (S4454A: No), next, whether the lottery result of this time is a complete deviation fluctuation of the fluctuation time of 5 seconds It is determined whether or not (S4455A), and if the result of the lottery is a change completely out of the change time of 5 seconds (S4455A: Yes), the process proceeds to S4456A.

On the other hand, in the process of S4455A, if it is determined that the lottery result is not a complete deviation of the variation time of 5 seconds (S4455A: No), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this time is a time-saving design winning. (S4457A), if the time saving pattern winning (S4457A: Yes), 10 times, 7 times, and 3 times are added to the specified number of times corresponding to the 1st to 3rd small hits in the end condition storage area 223ma and updated. (S4458A), the execution of the remaining machine recovery effect (see FIG. 1235) is set (S4459A), and this processing ends.

Also, in the process of S4457A, if it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not a time-saving symbol winning (S4457A: No), it is determined whether the lottery result is a non-V small hit (S4460A), and the lottery result is If it is a non-V small hit (S4460A: Yes), a non-V small-hit time process for setting the effect mode at the time of the non-V small-hit is executed (S4461A), and this process ends. The details of this non-V small hit time process (S4461A) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S4460A, if it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not a non-V small win (S4460A: No), it means that the lottery result of this time is a complete deviation fluctuation of the fluctuation time of 15 seconds. 1235), the treasure box 810 appears, but the recovery medicine 810d does not appear and the remaining lives are not recovered. S4462A), this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 1252, the details of the above-described non-V small winning process (S4461A) will be described. FIG. 1252 is a flow chart showing this non-V small winning process (S4461A). As shown in FIG. 1252, when the non-V small hit time process (S4461A) is executed, first, the data of the end condition storage area 223ma is read (S4471A), and the specified number of times corresponding to this non-V small hit is It is determined whether or not it is already 0 (S4473A). In the processing of S4473A, when it is determined that the prescribed number of times corresponding to the non-V small win of this time is already 0 (S4473A: Yes), the execution of the counterfeit remaining machine recovery effect is set (S4472A), and this processing is executed. finish.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4473A, if it is determined that the specified number of times corresponding to this non-V small hit is not 0 (S4473A: No), the specified number of times corresponding to this non-V small hit is updated by subtracting 1 Then (S4474A), it is determined whether or not the prescribed number of all non-V small hits has become 0 by this subtraction (S4475A). In the processing of S4475A, if it is determined that the prescribed number of all non-V small hits is not 0 (S4475A: No), the remaining machine reduction effect corresponding to this non-V small win (Fig. 1234 (a )) is set (S4476A), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4475A, if it is determined that the specified number of times for all non-V small hits has become 0 (S4475A: Yes), a variable display mode is set that also takes into account the look-ahead result of the held ball of the second special symbol. (S4477A). That is, if there is a big hit or a V small hit in the lottery result of the special symbol this time and in the reserved balls of the second special symbol, the variable display of the effect mode to notify the win (win the monster character 821). While setting the mode, if it is determined that the lottery result of this special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol are all completely out or non-V small hits, the end of the rush is notified (monster character 821 Set the variable display mode of the production mode (defeat). When the processing of S4477A ends, the counter value indicating the number of fluctuations until the fluctuation display of the second special symbol to be notified is set to the final fluctuation production counter 223mb (S4478A), and this processing is ended. In the processing of S4478A, in the case of the production mode of notifying the loss, the counter value corresponding to the current number of held balls is set, while in the case of the production mode of notifying the hit, the number of held balls up to the winning ball is set. Set the corresponding counter value.

By executing this non-V small winning time processing, if the corresponding character has a remaining machine left, when winning a non-V small winning, it is possible to execute an effect of reducing the remaining machine of the corresponding character. If the remaining life of the corresponding character is already 0, the fake remaining life recovery effect can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the character with 0 remaining lives from being defeated by the monster character 821, which is a contradictory effect, so that the effect mode can be set more appropriately.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the forty-second control example is configured to provide an end condition that is satisfied when all of a plurality of different conditions are satisfied as the time saving end condition. More specifically, as the small hit type, in addition to the V small hit that substantially determines the big hit, even if the game ball is entered, the game ball cannot be guided to the specific area 650e3 (switching member 650h The opening and closing door 650f1 is opened only during the period in which the is arranged to guide the game ball to the normal discharge flow path 650e1 side. ), and after shifting to the time saving state, the first condition that is established when the first number of times predetermined for the first small hit (first lottery result) is won in the special symbol lottery, and the second A second condition that is established when a small win (second lottery result) is won a predetermined number of times, and a third small win (third lottery result) is won a predetermined number of times. It is configured to provide a time saving end condition (third end condition) that is established only when the third condition that is established in and is all established. With this configuration, even if one or more of the first condition, the second condition, and the third condition are satisfied and the plate is formed, the plate will Since novel control that allows the advantageous time-saving state to be continued can be realized, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this 42nd control example, when the setting condition of the time saving state is satisfied, the specified number of winning times for each of the first to third small hits is set, and the first to third small hits are set in the time saving state When the number of winning times reaches the specified number of times, the third end condition is satisfied and the time saving state is terminated, while at least the number of winning times of at least 1 has not reached the specified number of times, at least Although it was configured so that the third end condition was not satisfied (other end conditions could be satisfied), the type of small win to be judged for the third end condition is not limited to this. There may be more or less than the three types in the control example. By reducing the types of small hits, the game property in the time saving state can be simplified, so that the game property that is easy for the player to understand can be realized. Conversely, by increasing the types of small wins, it is possible to increase the types of characters that may battle with the monster character 821 during the time saving state, thereby diversifying the mode of presentation. can.

In this 42nd control example, when the setting condition of the time saving state is established, the specified number of winning times for each of the first to third small hits is set, and the first to third small hits are won in the time saving state. When all the number of times reaches the specified number of times, the third end condition is satisfied and the time saving state is terminated, while at least the number of winnings of at least one small win has not reached the specified number of times, at least the third Although the termination condition is not satisfied (other termination conditions may be satisfied), the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to terminate the time saving state when the number of winnings of any one of the first to third small hits reaches a specified number of times. That is, the time saving state may be terminated when the remaining lives of one character among a plurality of characters that may battle with the monster character 821 in the time saving state become zero. By constructing in this manner, it is possible to realize a game property in which a character with as many remaining lives as possible is determined by the opponent when a ready-to-win situation occurs. be able to.

In this 42nd control example, the prescribed number of winning times for each of the 1st to 3rd small hits in the time saving state is fixed until the time saving state of 1 ends, but depending on the situation It may be configured such that the prescribed number of times is variable. That is, if the number of winnings for the first small win is less than the specified number of times, the number of winnings for the first small win reaches the first number, which is the number of times less than the specified number of times, and the number of winnings for the second small win reaches the second number. The time-saving state is terminated based on the fact that the number of times has been reached and the number of wins for the third small hit has reached the third number (the third end condition is met), while the number of wins for the first small win is specified. If the number of wins is equal to or more than the number of times, the number of winning times of the first small hit reaches the fourth time, which is the number of times equal to or more than the specific number of times, and the number of winning times of the second small win reaches the fifth time, which is higher than the second number. , The time saving state may be terminated (the third termination condition is satisfied) based on the fact that the number of winnings of the third small hit reaches the sixth number, which is greater than the third number. More specifically, for example, within the range of less than 10 wins for the first small win in the time saving state, the number of wins for the first small win is 5 times or more, and the number of wins for the second small win is 3. times or more, and the third end condition is established based on the fact that the number of times the third small win has been won is 1 or more, while the number of times the first small win has been won is 10 times or more, the first The third end condition is established based on the fact that the number of winnings of the small win is 15 times or more, the number of times of winning the second small win is 6 times or more, and the number of times of winning the third small win is 2 times or more. can be configured to By constructing in this way, in the beginning of the time-saving state, the number of winning times of the first small win is expected not to increase, while the number of winning times of the first small win exceeds 5 times. After the player's character 811a has 0 remaining machines, it is possible to realize a game property that makes the player expect to win more first small wins and win more than 10 times. In other words, depending on whether the number of times the first small win is won is less than the first number (5 times) or is greater than or equal to the first number of times, it is possible to realize completely opposite novel game characteristics. interest in the game can be further improved. In addition, as another example of a configuration that varies the number of times of time saving according to the situation, in the range where the number of times of lottery of the second special symbol in the time saving state is less than the specific number of times of lottery, the number of winning times of the first small per is the first number of times The time-saving state is ended based on the fact that the number of winning times for the second small hit reaches the second number and the number of winning times for the third small hit reaches the third number (the third end condition is established ) On the other hand, when the number of lotteries for the second special symbol is a specific number of lotteries or more, the number of winnings for the first small hit reaches the fourth number, which is greater than the first number, and the second small win is won. The number of times reaches the 5th number, which is higher than the 2nd number, and the time saving state is terminated based on the fact that the number of winnings for the 3rd small hit reaches the 6th number, which is higher than the 3rd number (3rd end condition holds). By configuring in this way, unless the third end condition is satisfied until the number of times of lottery of the second special symbol reaches the specific number, the third end condition is difficult to be satisfied, so the lottery of the second special symbol. A game can be played by paying attention to the number of times. In these cases, when the condition for increasing the prescribed number of times of the first to third small hits is established, as in the case where the time saving symbol winning occurs, the remaining machine recovery effect (see FIG. 1235) is executed. good too. By constructing in this manner, the player can easily understand that the specified number of times has increased and the third end condition has become difficult to be satisfied, so that the player's interest in the game is improved. be able to. It should be noted that, in the above modification, the case of increasing the prescribed number of winning times of the first to third small hits by establishing a predetermined condition was exemplified, but on the contrary, some or all of the small hits may be configured to reduce the specified number of times. By constructing in this way, it is possible to realize a game property that makes players expect to win a big win or a V small win at an early stage.

In this 42nd control example, by displaying the number of remaining lives of the characters 811a to 811c in the time saving state, the third end condition established based on the fact that all the first to third small wins have reached the prescribed number of times is established. Although the game player is configured to be able to easily grasp the remaining number of wins for each small win until it is established, it is not limited to this. For example, the character type may be kept secret, and an effect may be executed to notify only that the number of remaining lives of any character has decreased (the remaining number of times up to a specified number of small wins has decreased). . By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to accurately grasp the number of winning times remaining for each small win until the third end condition is satisfied, so that the game property of not knowing how long the time-saving state will continue can be provided. can be realized. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

In this 42nd control example, the number of wins for the first to third small wins that are difficult to generate V prizes in the time saving state reaches the prescribed number of times, so that the third end condition is satisfied and the time saving state ends. However, the lottery result that satisfies the third end condition is not limited to a small prize that makes it difficult to generate a V prize, but can be determined arbitrarily. For example, a specified number of times is set for the lost lottery result set in the first period, the lost lottery result set in the second period, and the lost lottery result set in the third period, and all the lost lottery results are set. It may be configured such that the time saving state is ended when the number of winning times is the specified number of times. Also, the number of times of winning a big win or winning a small V win may be included in the third end condition. Specifically, for example, if you win five small wins that cannot win a V prize, win one V small win, and win a big win in a special symbol lottery, the third end condition is It may be configured to be established. In particular, this control can realize novel game characteristics that have never existed before, in specifications that are more advantageous to set the execution of the jackpot game in the normal state than in the time-saving state. In other words, when winning the V small prize, the player dares to avoid the V prize, and after that, when the jackpot is won after the number of times of winning the small prize that cannot win the V reaches the prescribed number of times, the big prize is won. Since it is possible to raise the degree of advantage by establishing time-saving end conditions at the time of winning, the degree of advantage is lowered when the V small prize is won during the time-saving state, but the V prize is generated to surely play the jackpot game. , or there is a risk of reaching the time-saving number of times without winning the jackpot and ending the time-saving state, but avoiding V prizes and aiming for a jackpot winning with a high degree of advantage It is possible to realize a novel game property that allows the player to select . Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game. Moreover, the condition that can satisfy the third termination condition is not limited to the lottery result, and other conditions may be employed. Specifically, for example, the total number of lotteries for special symbols or the number of lotteries for second special symbols may be employed as part or all of the conditions that can satisfy the third end condition. Specifically, for example, the number of winning times of the first to third small hits is 1 or more, and the number of lotteries of the second special symbol is 10 or more so that the third end condition is established. may be configured. By configuring in this way, the minimum number of special symbol lotteries until the third end condition is satisfied can be fixed to 10 times. In other words, even if the specified number of times of the first to third small hits is reached early, the continuation of the time saving state is guaranteed until the specified number of times of the lottery of the second special symbol is satisfied. It can be discouraging and difficult. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

In this 42nd control example, the number of remaining machines of each character in the time saving state is calculated as the number of winnings remaining with respect to the specified number of times of the first to third small hits (first small hit counter 203s2, second small hit counter 203s3, third The counter value of the small winning counter 203s4) has been configured to match, but it is not limited to this. Although the counter value is not actually decremented (for example, winning a small win corresponding to a character who is completely out of play or whose remaining lives have already become 0), the effect of decreasing the remaining lives is executed at a predetermined rate. may be configured to be Further, for example, as the number of remaining lives reported in the remaining lives stock effect, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of remaining lives less than the prescribed number of actual wins for the first to third small wins can be reported. In other words, the effect operation may be such that the number of remaining lives is less than the actual counter value. In this case, when the number of remaining lives is reported to be less than the actual counter value, predetermined notification conditions (for example, the timing when the number of remaining lives of all characters becomes 0, or the lottery of special symbols for a specific number of times) is executed), an effect may be executed to inform the actual number of remaining lives by adding the number of remaining lives. By constructing in this way, even if the number of remaining lives of each character is reduced, it is possible to make the player expect the production to increase the number of remaining lives, so that the player's interest in the game is improved. be able to.

In addition, the number of remaining machines of each character and the number of winnings remaining for the specified number of times of the first to third small hits (counter values of the first small hit counter 203s2, the second small hit counter 203s3, and the third small hit counter 203s4) As another example of the effect control that allows the mismatch between the characters, for example, the character corresponding to the type of small win actually won under a predetermined condition so that the number of remaining lives of each character is unlikely to become 0 It may be configured such that the remaining life of a character different from the character can be reduced. More specifically, for example, in a situation where both the adventurer character 811a and the gunman character 811c have 1 remaining life, and the rabbit character 811b has 4 remaining lives, the first small win (for the adventurer character 811a (corresponding small win) or the third small win (small win corresponding to the gunman character 811c), that is, the remaining life of the corresponding character is reduced to 0 by reducing the remaining life of the corresponding character. In this case, an effect may be executed to reduce the remaining lives of a character (a rabbit character 811b) who has a spare life (two or more lives remaining). In other words, in a situation where some characters (first character) have a specific number of remaining lives (one character), the number of remaining lives of a character (second character) that has a margin of remaining lives is set as a corresponding number. Instead of notifying the number of remaining lives that is less than the value of the small winning counter, avoids the effect of reducing the remaining lives of the first character whose remaining lives are less than a specific number (the value of the corresponding small winning counter is less than It may be configured to notify the number of remaining lives with a large number). Then, in a state in which the number of remaining lives of the second character, which has been reported to be less than the actual number of remaining lives, is below a predetermined number (for example, two or less), a small prize corresponding to the second character is won. In this case, the balance is balanced by executing an effect of subtracting the number of remaining lives of the first character instead of the number of remaining lives of the second character, and the timing at which the third end condition is finally satisfied, and all may be configured to coincide with the timing when the remaining life of the character becomes 0. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the remaining lives of each character to become 0, so that the player can easily feel a sense of security with respect to the remaining lives of a plurality of characters. Therefore, the game can be played in the time-saving state with more peace of mind. Conversely, it may be configured such that some characters are more likely to have more remaining lives. In other words, when winning a small prize corresponding to some characters (specific characters) with a predetermined number or more of remaining lives (for example, 5 or more), instead of the number of remaining lives of the first character, , the number of remaining lives of other characters whose number of remaining lives is 1 or more may be reduced. Then, in a state in which the number of remaining lives of other characters appears to be 0 (a state in which only the remaining lives are displayed as 0 even though the value of the corresponding small hit counter is 1 or more), another character is displayed. When a small win corresponding to a character is won, a performance for reducing the remaining lives of a specific character is executed to balance the balance, and finally, the timing when a third end condition is satisfied and the remaining lives of all characters. may be configured to coincide with the timing when becomes 0. By configuring in this way, the state in which the number of remaining lives of the specific character is large can be continued for a longer time, so whether the time saving state will continue unless the small hit of the type corresponding to the specific character continues to be won. , and the player can be made to think that the time saving state is likely to continue for a longer time. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game.

In the 42nd control example, only one type of character (monster character 821) is provided as an enemy character that fights (battles) with allied characters (characters 811a to 811c) when the ready-to-win effect develops in the time saving state. Although it is configured, the enemy character may be configured to have a plurality of types. By configuring in this way, it is possible to diversify the presentation mode, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. In this case, the number of remaining lives to be reduced when the ally character is defeated may be changed according to the type of the selected enemy character. Specifically, for example, first to third enemy characters are provided as enemy characters, and when the first enemy character is defeated, the number of remaining lives of the friendly character determined as the opponent is reduced by one. However, if the character is defeated by the second enemy character, the number of remaining lives of the ally character determined as the opponent is reduced by a maximum of 2 (if the number of remaining lives is 1 or less, the number of remaining lives is reduced to 0). , when defeated by the third enemy character, the number of remaining lives of the ally character determined as the opponent is reduced by a maximum of 3 (if the number of remaining lives is 2 or less, the number of remaining lives is reduced to 0). can be configured to In this case, a case is provided in which the number of remaining machines is reported more than the actual number in the remaining machine stock chance production (or even if the small winning counter value corresponding to the first to third small winnings is not 0, it is false at a predetermined rate. A case where the number of remaining lives becomes larger than the actual number is provided by executing the remaining machine recovery presentation), and a production of being defeated by the second enemy character or the third enemy character is carried out at a predetermined opportunity to give more notification. You can reduce the number of remaining lives by reducing the number of remaining lives to balance the balance of remaining lives, or on the contrary, execute a performance of losing to the second enemy character or the second enemy character to make the counter value of the small hit counter smaller than the actual value of the small hit counter. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the number of remaining lives is notified, and then an effect operation to balance the balance is performed by adding the remaining lives effect or the like. By configuring in this way, it is possible to diversify the manner in which the number of remaining machines is reduced, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. Further, in this case, the ratio of selection at the time of winning the big win or V small win may be configured so that the third enemy character is the highest and the first enemy character is the lowest. By configuring in this way, when the third enemy character is selected, the expectation of a big win or a V small win is high, but if the character is defeated, the number of remaining lives is reduced. When the first character is selected, the expectation of a big win or a small V win is low, but even if defeated, the remaining life is reduced by only 1, resulting in a low-risk, low-return battle production, and the second enemy character. is a battle effect of these intermediate risks and returns, so that the game can be played while paying more attention to the type of the determined enemy character. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest in the game. Further, for example, it may be possible to suggest the degree of expectation for a big win (or V small win) depending on the combination of a friend character and an enemy character. Specifically, for example, basically, when the adventurer character 811a performs a battle (competition), the second enemy character has a higher expectation of a big win than the first enemy character (first small The third enemy character is more likely to be selected for the big win than the second enemy character (becomes less likely to be selected for the first small win), while the rabbit When the character 811b of (1) battles, the second enemy character may have the highest expectation for a big win, and the first enemy character may have the lowest expectation for a big win. In addition, when the gunman character 811c battles, the selection of the first enemy character confirms the winning of a big win or a small win (cannot be selected in the third small win), and moreover than the third small win. It may also be configured such that the degree of expectation for the big win is higher for the second small win. With such a configuration, the player can play the game while paying attention to the combination of the ally character and the enemy character, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In this 42nd control example, when time saving pattern winning occurs in the time saving state, the counter value corresponding to the time saving pattern is added to various counters. In other words, when time-saving symbol winning occurs, the advantageous degree is always high, but it is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of types of time-saving patterns with different time-saving end conditions may be provided, and when a time-saving pattern winning occurs in the time-saving state, the corresponding time-saving end conditions may be overwritten on various counter values. By configuring in this way, when the time-saving symbol winning occurs, the game can be played by paying attention to the set time-saving end condition (remaining machine of each character), so that the player's interest in the game can be enhanced. can be improved.

In this 42nd control example, as the time saving end condition, it is configured to provide a third end condition that is satisfied when all of a plurality of different conditions are satisfied, and while any one condition is not satisfied, the other end conditions Although it is configured such that the time saving state is maintained (the degree of advantage is maintained) on the condition that it is not established, it is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that the advantageous degree of the time saving state varies each time each condition constituting the end condition is established in the time saving state. Specifically, for example, it is configured to provide first to third conditions as conditions constituting the end condition, and when the first condition is satisfied, a fluctuation pattern table with a long fluctuation time is referred to and a fluctuation pattern is selected. By switching to the control and establishing the second condition, the ratio of selection of the open pattern that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the electric accessary 640a when winning the normal symbol increases, and the third condition is established. By doing so, it may be controlled so that the variation time of the normal symbol becomes longer. The time saving state may be terminated when all of the first to third conditions are met. By constructing in this way, it is possible to realize a game property in which the degree of advantage of the time-saving state is lowered each time the conditions are met, so that a big win or a small win is won before each condition is met. You can have high hopes. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. Moreover, conversely, it may be configured such that the advantage degree of the time saving state increases as the number of satisfied conditions increases. In this case, it is possible to realize novel gameplay that makes the player expect that any of the conditions will be met early and that all the conditions will not be met, so that the player's interest in the game can be enhanced. can be improved. Further, a configuration may be provided in which a condition for increasing the advantageous degree of the time saving state and a condition for decreasing the advantageous degree are provided, or the advantageous degree may be configured to vary depending on the order in which it is established. By configuring in this way, while the time saving state continues, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the game is performed while paying attention to the type and the order of establishment of the conditions established, so that the player's interest in the game can be realized. can be further improved. In addition, the control is not limited to changing the degree of advantage of the same time-saving state. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the state shifts to a disadvantageous normal state when the condition of is satisfied. Specifically, for example, a first advantageous state, a second advantageous state, and a third advantageous state are provided as advantageous states, and when the first condition is satisfied in the first advantageous state, the second advantageous state is entered. When the second condition is satisfied in the first advantageous state, the state transitions to the third advantageous state, and the second condition is satisfied in the second advantageous state, or the first condition is satisfied in the third advantageous state. By doing so, it may be configured to shift to the normal state. In addition, the conditions in these cases are not limited to the number of times the first to third small wins are won, but the number of special symbol lotteries, the V small win, the number of times the normal symbol winning game is executed, and the second special. Arbitrary conditions can be set, such as the number of reserved balls in the design, and winning a jackpot of a predetermined type.

<Other information>
Conventionally, during a specific game period (for example, a jackpot game period), a song is played and lyrics corresponding to the song played on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 are displayed. There are things that improve interest in games.

However, in the above-described conventional pachinko machine 10, there is a problem that the song being reproduced and the displayed lyrics are out of sync. Specifically, when the jackpot game is executed and the timing for reproducing the music arrives, the audio lamp control device 113 instructs the audio output device 226 to reproduce (output) the audio data of the corresponding music. Since it is configured to output a command and output to the display control device 114 a command indicating the display content to be displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 according to the progress of the jackpot game. , it is possible to match the start timings of music reproduction and lyrics display, but after that, the music reproduction state and the lyrics display state cannot be synchronized, and music reproduction processing, or In addition, there is a problem that the song being reproduced and the displayed lyrics are out of sync when the process of displaying the lyrics stagnates.

Moreover, there is a pachinko machine 10 that has a configuration in which the lyrics are not displayed from the beginning, out of concern that the displayed lyrics may be out of sync with the music being reproduced. is not displayed, the player cannot comprehend the meaning of the music, and the production effect is lowered.

On the other hand, like the conventional pachinko machine 10, the lyrics are displayed in time with the reproduction timing of the music, and the lyrics are displayed only when there is a discrepancy between the music being reproduced and the displayed lyrics. is configured to be hidden. Then, when a situation occurs in which the lyrics are not displayed, it is preferable to display information (information different from the lyrics) about the music being reproduced instead of the lyrics.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the performance effect due to the misalignment between the song being reproduced and the displayed lyrics, and even if the lyrics are hidden. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the production effect.

<Summary of described technology>
<Summary A> (Hacking period of button operation effect)
Operation means (production button 22) that can be operated by the player and operation effective period setting means (special symbol in the second part production in the battle production) that can set the operation effective period in which the operation to the operation means is effectively determined a process of determining an operation valid period according to the result of a lottery), and determining that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means during the operation valid period set by the operation valid period setting means. Possible operation determination means (process for determining a long press operation) and based on the operation determination means determining that the predetermined operation has been performed, the effect mode (HP value) is changed from the first mode to Effect variable means (processing for varying the display mode of the HP gauge 890 according to the decrease in the HP value) capable of stepwise varying to a plurality of modes including a second mode different from the first mode; A game machine having a specific effect executing means (a process for executing a processing effect when the remaining HP value becomes 0) capable of executing a specific effect when the effect mode is changed to the second mode. , a first period (a period in which no non-decreasing period is set) in which the production mode can be varied, and a second period (a non-decreasing period) in which it is more difficult to vary the production mode period) can be determined based on the predetermined operation (long-pressing operation) executed in a state in which the effect mode can be varied (a state in which the remaining HP value is not the final HP value). A game machine A1 characterized by having (a rush lottery during a non-decrease period).

<Summary B> (In the long-press operation effect, it is easier to proceed with the long-press cancellation)
Operation means operable by a player, operation valid period setting means capable of setting an operation valid period during which an operation to the operation means is determined to be valid, and during the operation valid period set by the operation valid period setting means an operation determining means capable of determining that a continuous operation is being performed for the operating means continuously for a predetermined period; and the operation determining means determining that the continuous operation is being performed. production variable means capable of stepwise changing a production mode from a first mode to a plurality of modes including a second mode different from the first mode; In a gaming machine having a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect when changed to the two modes, the continuous operation is more likely to be executed during the first period than during the first period. A first effect control (HP based on a long press operation when a non-decrease period is not set) that makes it easier to change the effect mode to the second mode than when the continuous operation is terminated in a second period that is shorter than the second period. control to decrease the value) and the case where the continuous operation is terminated in a second period shorter than the first period than the case where the continuous operation is continuously performed for the first period. Effect control means capable of executing a second effect control (control to cancel the non-decrease period by interrupting the long-pressing operation in the state where the non-decrease period is set) to easily change to the second mode A gaming machine B1 characterized by having:

<Summary C> (During the continuous hit effect, different effect control is performed depending on whether the continuous hit operation is performed or the long press operation is performed)
Operation means operable by a player, signal output means for outputting a signal based on the operation of the operation means, signal determination means for determining the signal output by the signal output means, and the signal determination When the determination result by the means satisfies a predetermined execution condition, the performance mode can be changed stepwise from the first mode to a plurality of modes including a second mode different from the first mode. A performance variable means, and a final mode determining means (a process for determining a final HP value) capable of determining a final mode in which the performance mode can be varied by the performance variable means from among the plurality of modes. In the gaming machine, the effect variable means sets, as the predetermined execution conditions, a case where a first execution condition is satisfied (when it is determined that a pressing operation is performed), and a second execution condition different from the first execution condition. is established (when it is determined to be a long-pressing operation), the performance mode is changed to the final mode in a different variable mode.

<Summary D> (Forced chance production execution control)
discrimination means capable of executing discrimination; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means on a display means; and displaying a specific discrimination result on the display means. a privilege granting means capable of imparting a privilege when the identification information for is displayed, a performance executing means capable of executing a performance during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed; and the performance As an effect mode, a first effect is more likely to be selected when the determination result corresponding to the dynamically displayed identification information is the specific determination result than when it is not the specific determination result. effect mode determining means capable of determining one effect mode from among a plurality of effect modes including at least modes; updating means capable of updating effect values based on information relating to the effect executed by the effect executing means; The effect mode determination means is a first decision for determining the effect mode based on the determination result by the determination means (based on winning a lottery for determining whether or not to execute the chance notice effect) and determining the effect mode of the chance advance notice effect by the updating means, and when the effect value updated by the updating means satisfies the execution condition, the first effect mode is set as the effect mode regardless of the determination result by the determining means. A gaming machine D1 capable of executing a second determination (forcibly determining the performance mode of the chance notice performance based on the value of the performance execution counter 223aah).

<Summary E> (Execute the super-hot notice that was removed in the jackpot production after the occurrence of the super-hot notice)
discrimination means capable of executing discrimination; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means on a display means; and displaying a specific discrimination result on the display means. a privilege granting means capable of imparting a privilege when the identification information for is displayed, a performance executing means capable of executing a performance during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed; and the performance As an effect mode, a first effect is more likely to be selected when the determination result corresponding to the dynamically displayed identification information is the specific determination result than when it is not the specific determination result. performance mode determination means capable of determining one performance mode from a plurality of performance modes including at least one mode, and identification information for indicating the determination result other than the specific determination result are dynamically displayed storage means capable of storing determination information indicating that the first effect mode has been determined as the effect mode of the effect to be performed for a predetermined period of time; and a first decision for determining the performance mode based on the determination result stored in the storage means as the performance mode of the performance to be executed during a period in which the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is dynamically displayed a second decision for determining the first effect mode when the information is stored (a process of using the effect mode used for the losing effect stored in the chance mode information storage area 223aag for the win effect); A gaming machine E1 characterized by being executable.

<Summary F> (Long button display with a longer operation valid period than usual)
Determining means capable of executing determination, privilege providing means capable of granting a privilege to a player based on the fact that the result of the determination by the determining means is a specific determination result, and operating means operable by the player. , operation determination means capable of determining that the operation means has been operated, effective period setting means for setting a valid period during which the operation to the operation means is determined to be valid by the operation determining means, and setting of the effective period valid period informing means capable of informing the player of at least a part of the valid period set by means; and an operation effect execution means capable of executing an operation effect for indicating the result of the determination by the determination means based on the determination of the operation of the valid period setting means, As the valid period, a first valid period and a second valid period longer than the first valid period can be set, and the determination result obtained by the determination means is the specific determination result. The game machine F1 is characterized in that it is easier to set the second validity period than in the case of no specific determination result.

<Summary G> (Kizuna 60 Second Mission)
Acquisition means for acquiring acquisition information based on satisfaction of an acquisition condition; Storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of pieces of information acquired by the acquisition means; Determination means for performing determination based on the acquired information stored in the storage means, and a privilege game for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the result of the determination by the determination means is a specific determination result. A game having execution means, a first game state in which the acquisition means can easily acquire the acquisition information, a second game state in which acquisition is more difficult than the first game state, and a settable game state setting means. In the machine, a period effect execution means capable of executing a period effect in which the effect mode is determined based on information about the results of the multiple determinations performed by the determination means (executed after the number of times of residual probability change is 20 means for executing each mode effect), and the gaming machine varies the range of the determination included in the information referred to when determining the effect mode of the period effect (targeting the look-ahead result A game machine G1 characterized in that it is possible to determine whether or not to play, and to select a range by the player.

<Summary of technical ideas 1>
Next, each technical concept described in each control example described above will be briefly described. First, in the fifth control example described above, as an opportunity for shifting the probability state of the normal symbols from the low probability state to the high probability state, an opportunity other than the special symbol lottery jackpot winning is provided, and the special symbol lottery In a part of the lottery result (lost) different from the jackpot winning, the opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern is established.

In other words, it is configured so that a privilege different from the big winning game can be given even to the player who did not win the big winning in the special symbol lottery. By constructing in this way, in one special symbol lottery, the player is provided separately with the lottery result in which the jackpot game is executed and the lottery result in which the time-saving state (high-probability state of normal symbols) is set. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the types of lottery results that are advantageous to the player.

Furthermore, in the above-described fifth control example, depending on the set game state, the easiness of establishment of the opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal symbol is varied. Specifically, the game If the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set as the state, in addition to whether or not the jackpot is won when the special symbol lottery is executed, short-time winning (normal high probability (whether or not there is an opportunity to set the probability state), and when a game state other than the normal state is set, only the presence or absence of a big win when the special symbol lottery is executed. can be determined.

By configuring in this way, in the state where the normal state is set, as an opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern, it is possible to establish a jackpot winning or a short time winning in the special symbol lottery, other than the normal state. In the game state of (2), as an opportunity for setting a high probability state of normal symbols, a jackpot election in a special symbol lottery can be established. That is, the normal state in which the presence/absence of time-saving winning can be determined is more likely to establish the opportunity for setting the high-probability state of normal symbols than in the game state other than the normal state. Therefore, each symbol (special symbol, normal symbol) is set to a low probability state, and the normal state, which is the most difficult game state to win in each symbol lottery (game state that is disadvantageous to the player), is better than the other. A high-probability state of normal symbols can be set more easily than the game state of (1), and the player's willingness to play the game in the normal state can be enhanced.

In addition, in the fifth control example described above, the game state (probability variable state, time saving state) in which the high probability state of normal symbols is set is the game state in which the low probability state of normal symbols is set (normal state , Second probability variable state) is configured to make it easier to execute the second special symbol lottery, and the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 reservation) is set to a predetermined number (4 pieces) It is configured to be storable to the upper limit (possible to hold storage). And it is configured so that the second special symbol lottery is easier to win the time saving than the first special symbol lottery.

In other words, when the game state shifts from any game state (variable probability state, time saving state) in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set to the normal state (from the game state advantageous to the player to the disadvantageous game state In the case of transitioning), during the normal state after the transition, the second special design based on the second special design lottery execution right (special design 2 reservation) held and stored in the high probability state of the normal design before the transition It is configured to make it easier to win a time-saving election when a lottery is executed.

By constructing in this way, the player can receive a special symbol lottery that facilitates the return to the game state that is advantageous to the player for a predetermined period even when the game state is changed from the game state that is advantageous to the player to the game state that is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from significantly declining when the normal state, which is a game state that is disadvantageous to the player, is set. In addition, in order to execute more second special symbol lottery during the normal state, the upper limit number (4 pieces) of the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 reservation) is acquired, and the normal symbol high probability state to end the game for obtaining the special figure 2 reservation until the last moment when the high probability state of the normal pattern ends.

In the fifth control example described above, in addition to the case of winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery, the high probability state of the normal symbol can be set even when the short-time winning is won in the special symbol lottery, and is set based on the jackpot winning. End condition for ending the high probability state of the normal design with the high probability state of the normal design (first short time) and the high probability state of the normal design (second short time) set based on the short time winning are different in the ease with which they are established.

Specifically, it is configured so that the number of times of time saving set as the end condition of the second time saving is more likely than the number of times of time saving set as the end condition of the first time saving. In this way, when the high probability state of the normal design is set, the high probability state of the normal design in which the degree of advantage is varied according to the setting opportunity (the establishment opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal design) By making it possible to set, not only whether the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, but also the process of the game such as what trigger the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. Since it is possible to make the player interested, it is possible to make it easier for the player to continue playing the game.

In addition, in the fifth control example described above, in order to vary the degree of advantage of the privilege given to the player in the high-probability state of normal symbols, the ease of establishment of the time-saving end condition (the number of times of time-saving) is varied. However, without being limited to this, for example, when the first time saving is set and when the second time saving is set, the ease of acquiring the pending memory of the second special symbol lottery (electric role product 640a), or the degree of advantage of benefits given when a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery during a high probability state of normal patterns (for example, the number of prize balls given during the jackpot game, the jackpot The type of game state set after the end of the game may be changed.

Next, the first modification of the fifth control example described above is configured so that even the first special symbol lottery executed when the normal state is set can be elected. It is different from the control example.

In the fifth control example described above, the game for executing the second special symbol lottery is performed in a state where the normal symbol high probability state (probability variable state, time saving state) is set, and the second special symbol lottery is performed during the normal symbol high probability state. It was configured to be able to acquire the execution right (special figure 2 reservation) of 2 special symbol lottery. Then, when the second special symbol lottery based on the special symbol 2 reservation acquired during the high probability state of the normal symbol is executed in the normal state in which the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, in addition to the big winning lottery, the short-time lottery is performed. By configuring it so that it is also executed, for a player who has experienced a game (advantageous game) in a high probability state with normal symbols that is advantageous to the player, after the advantageous game is completed, more than usual It is possible to execute a game (pull-back game) that easily returns to an advantageous game with a high probability.

However, in the fifth control example described above, a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery) executed in the normal state, and the game (advantageous game) in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set is not executed. As long as there is no benefit from the time-saving lottery, there is a problem that the player gets bored with the game without receiving the benefit of the time-saving lottery.

On the other hand, in the first modification of the fifth control example described above, since it is configured so that the time saving can be won even in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, the time saving for the player It is possible to make it easier to receive the benefits of the lottery.

Furthermore, in the fifth control example described above, based on the time-saving winning in the special symbol lottery, rather than the normal symbol high-probability state (probability variable state, time-saving state) set based on the jackpot winning in the special symbol lottery The high probability state (time saving state) of the normal pattern set by , is configured so that the period during which the high probability state of the normal pattern continues (normal pattern high probability period) tends to be longer. In other words, when the special pattern lottery wins the short-time win, the player can be given a privilege of facilitating the continuation of the normal pattern high probability period until the next big win win.

On the other hand, in the first modification of the fifth control example described above, when the time reduction is won in the first special symbol lottery, the time reduction state for a short period (for example, the number of times of time reduction once) can be set. , During the period in which the short-term time saving state is set (ordinary pattern high probability period), it is configured to be able to execute a game to acquire the right to execute the second special symbol lottery. That is, in the first modified example, the pull-back game in the fifth control example described above can be executed without winning a jackpot. By constructing in this way, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the second special symbol lottery during the normal state without winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state.

Furthermore, in the first modified example of the fifth control example described above, a plurality of variable times can be selected as the variable pattern of the first special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state. In this first modification, when the time reduction is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, the first special symbol is displayed in a display mode (time reduction symbol) for indicating the time reduction election after the fluctuation of the predetermined variation time. is stopped and displayed, a time saving state (time saving number of times) is set, and the time saving state continues until the special symbol variation to be executed next is stopped and displayed.

That is, the length of the period during which the time saving state continues is determined corresponding to the variation time of the special symbol variation executed during the time saving state. Therefore, the longer the variation time of the special pattern variation executed during the time saving state, the easier it is to acquire many special figures 2 reserves during the time saving state, so that the time saving state advantageous to the player can be obtained.

Next, in the second modification of the fifth control example described above, in order to aim for further interest improvement with respect to the fifth control example described above, it is executed in a state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set The contents of a privilege given when a big win is won in a special pattern lottery are constituted so as to be different according to the occasion (first time reduction or second time reduction) when a high probability state of normal patterns is set. In other words, the contents of the privilege given when the same jackpot type is set are different between when the big win is won during the first time saving and when the big win is won during the second time saving. By configuring in this way, when the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal pattern is set, it is possible to make the player interested in which opportunity the time saving state was set, so that the game It is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

Furthermore, in the second modified example of the fifth control example described above, a jackpot game with a small number of rounds and a short game time of one round game is a jackpot game that is executed when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery. (2R jackpot) is executable, and after the 2R jackpot game is executed, the time saving state is set. By configuring in this way, when the time saving state is set based on the jackpot winning in the special symbol lottery, that is, when the first time saving is set, the time saving state is set without executing the jackpot game. When set, that is, when the second time reduction is set, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the difference in the contents of the game to be executed.

In addition, in the second modification of the fifth control example described above, the variable production executed in the process of setting the first time reduction and the variation production executed in the process of setting the second time reduction are the same. It is configured to be executable in the production mode of. Specifically, after the special symbol variation for indicating that the jackpot winning (2R jackpot winning) in which the first short time is set is started, the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, and then the 2R jackpot game ends. The first period until the second time reduction is set and the second period, which is the variation time of the special symbol variation to indicate that the second time reduction is set, is set to be approximately the same period. It is configured to execute an effect in a common effect mode using.

By configuring in this way, when the first time saving is set and when the second time saving is set, the period from the start of the special symbol variation to the setting of the time saving state is common. Since the performance of the performance mode can be executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand when the time saving state is set.

Next, in the sixth control example described above, it is greatly different from the fifth control example described above in that it is configured so that a time-saving election can be made in a special symbol lottery even in a state where a game state other than the normal state is set. are different.

By configuring in this way, for example, in the state in which the time saving state is set, when newly winning the time saving state, it is possible to update the remaining period in which the time saving state continues. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp how long the time saving state continues.

Also, when updating the remaining period of the time saving state, if it is updated so that the period of the time saving state continues longer than the current remaining period (advantageous update), or if it is updated to be shorter (unfavorable update) ) is configured to occur. In other words, depending on the timing of winning the time-saving lottery and the number of times of time-saving (short-time) set when winning the time-saving lottery, there are cases where the time-saving lottery is an advantageous benefit for the player and a case where it is a disadvantageous benefit. It is configured to By constructing in this way, it is possible to provide a novel game property that includes a game property that expects time-saving winning and a game property that does not expect time-saving winning.

Furthermore, in the sixth control example described above, it is configured such that the more consecutive time-saving winnings are made, the easier it is to set a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player without winning a jackpot. Specifically, a plurality of time-saving classifications with different degrees of advantage for the player are defined, and the more advantageous time-saving classifications are set as the time-saving winning is made in the time-saving state, the easier it is to set. By configuring in this way, the longer the period during which the player does not win the jackpot, the easier it is to give the player an advantageous benefit.

In addition, when the time-saving type most advantageous to the player is set, it is easier to shift to the time-saving type disadvantageous to the player than when the time-saving type more disadvantageous than the time-saving type is set. It is configured to be In other words, it has multiple stages of time-saving types with different degrees of advantage, and based on the time-saving election, a time-saving type with a high degree of advantage is gradually set, and when the highest level of time-saving type is reached, the lowest level It is configured to make it easier to fall into the time-saving type. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the time saving type advantageous to the player from continuing for an excessively long period of time.

In addition, as in the sixth control example described above, the pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to execute the time saving lottery in the state where the time saving state is set, that is, the setting of the new time saving state in the state where the time saving state is set As the processing content when the condition is satisfied, regardless of the content of the already set working hours state (short time remaining), it may be configured to execute the processing of setting a new working hours state, or it may be already set The content of the time saving state that has been set (short time remaining) and the content of the time saving state for which the setting conditions are newly established (short time) are discriminated, and based on the discrimination result, whether to set a new time saving state Alternatively, the difference between the content of the time saving state that has already been set and the content of the time saving state in which the setting condition is newly established is calculated, and the difference is handled. It may be configured to perform a process of adding (subtracting) the information (time period) to the remaining time period of the time saving state that has already been set.

Moreover, you may comprise executable the process which waits that the time-saving state which newly set the setting condition is satisfied until the time-saving state already set is complete|finished. In this case, if a plurality of setting conditions for the time saving state are satisfied before the time saving state that has already been set is completed, all the time saving states for which the setting conditions are satisfied may be set in order. Alternatively, it may be possible to store up to a predetermined number of time-saving states advantageous to the player among the time-saving states during standby, and to set only the stored time-saving states in order.

Of course, the technical ideas described in the sixth control example described above may be applied to the respective control examples described above, and the technical ideas described in the thirteenth control example described above are used as the conditions for setting the time saving state. In other words, the technical concept of setting the time saving state as the ceiling privilege may be applied to the sixth control example described above.

Next, in the above-described seventh control example, it is configured to be able to determine both the jackpot winning and the short-time winning in one special symbol lottery. In addition, in the seventh control example described above, it is configured to execute the determination of the time-saving election before the determination of the jackpot election is executed, and when the time-saving election is made, the judgment of the jackpot election is made in the special symbol lottery. Set the time-saving state before it is executed, execute the determination of the jackpot winning in the special symbol lottery with the time-saving state set, and show the lottery result of the special symbol lottery. It is configured so that the time saving state can be terminated at the timing of execution.

Specifically, in the case of short-time winning in the first special symbol lottery in the normal state, as described above, for a short period of time including the timing at which the big hit determination is performed in the special symbol lottery, so as to be in a short-time state. Configure. That is, in the above-described fifth control example, a game advantageous to the player toward the next big win (a game that makes it easy to execute a special symbol lottery) is executed for a predetermined period (up to 10000 times) without going through the big win game. In order to make it possible, a function (a short time setting function) is provided in the special symbol lottery, whereas in the above-described seventh control example, in addition to the above-described short time setting function, in the normal state, a special Time is reduced in the middle of a game (left-handed game) executed in a normal state by structuring such that the timing of execution of big win determination by a special pattern lottery is in a time-saving state without facilitating the execution of the pattern lottery. A function (special lottery function) is provided to enable execution of the jackpot determination of the special symbol lottery in the state.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to execute a big hit determination of the special symbol lottery in the time saving state while making it difficult for the player to grasp that the special symbol lottery has won the time saving, so that the result of the special symbol lottery. As a result, it is possible to inform the unexpected lottery result.

Also, in the above-described seventh control example, the benefits given when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery are different depending on whether the jackpot is won in the normal state or in the time-saving state. It is configured such that when a jackpot is won in the time-saving state rather than in the normal state, a privilege (for example, a jackpot game with a large number of rounds) that is more advantageous to the player is given. In other words, in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, when both the short-time winning and the big win are won at the same time, a more advantageous privilege is given than when only the big win is won.

In addition, in the above-described seventh control example, as the production mode of the variable production for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, a suggestion mode (notification mode) that can suggest the presence or absence of the short-time winning and the presence or absence of the jackpot winning can be suggested. and a suggestive mode (notification mode) can be set.

In other words, by grasping the performance mode of the variable performance to be executed, it is possible for the player to predict the result of the big hit judgment executed for the special symbol lottery being executed and the result of the short-time winning judgment. Configure. Furthermore, as a variable effect, the timing of notifying the presence or absence of the short-time winning and the timing of notifying the presence or absence of the big win are configured to be different. By configuring in this way, in the pachinko machine 10 capable of executing determination for providing a plurality of different benefits for one special symbol lottery, in a state in which at least one determination result is grasped (predicted), It is possible to comprehend a suggestion mode for suggesting another determination result.

In addition, in the above-described seventh control example, it is better if the production result of the production (time reduction production) including the suggestion mode that can suggest the presence or absence of the time reduction winning is the production result including the suggestion mode that suggests the time reduction non-winning. , is configured so that the expectation of winning the jackpot is higher than when the time-saving performance is not executed. In this way, in a pachinko machine 10 using a configuration capable of awarding a plurality of privileges with different award judgments in one special symbol lottery, a judgment result suggestive presentation capable of suggesting the award judgment result for one privilege. is executed, the production result of the judgment result suggestion production is a production result that suggests that the privilege of 1 is not given, and other benefits are compared to the case where the judgment result suggestion production is not executed. By configuring so that the degree of expectation to be given is high, at the time when the judgment result suggesting performance is executed, compared to the case where the judgment result suggesting performance is not executed, it is easier to grant any privilege. A player can be notified of something.

As in the seventh control example described above, it is of course possible to apply a configuration in which a plurality of benefits can be given in duplicate based on the execution of one special symbol lottery. For example, based on the fact that one special symbol lottery is executed, the technical idea of making it possible to win the jackpot lottery and the short-time lottery is applied to the above-described 13th control example to the 16th control example. Alternatively, the technical concept regarding the ceiling privilege used in the thirteenth to eighteenth control examples described above may be applied to the fifth to eighth control examples described above.

For example, when the technical concept of the ceiling privilege is added to the seventh control example, a maximum of three different privileges (jackpot winning, time saving winning, ceiling privilege) are executed by executing one special symbol lottery. can be given to the player, and the player can be interested in the result of the special symbol lottery. Further, in this case, it may be configured to be able to provide all three privileges that can be given, or it may be configured to discard at least one privilege. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which excessively advantageous benefits are provided to the player.

Next, the eighth control example described above is configured to be able to execute determination of time-saving winning (time-saving lottery) in both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, and has a high probability. It is constituted so that short working hours are won in (most of lost winnings), and the short working hours state (second short working hours) set based on the winning of short working hours is a game state more disadvantageous to the player than the normal state. are doing.

In addition, in the eighth control example described above, the game board 13 is configured so that the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are likely to be alternately executed, and the above-described second time saving end condition , is configured to set an end condition that is established when one type of special symbol lottery is executed continuously.

In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described eighth control example configured in this way, when the special symbol lottery executed in the state where the normal state is set does not win the jackpot (jackpot probability 1/300) , the second time saving is set by winning the time saving with a high probability (298/300). Then, the special symbol lottery is executed in the second time saving until the end condition of the second time saving is established.

In addition, as the end condition of the second time saving, the first time saving end condition that is established when the total number of special symbol lotteries executed during the second time saving reaches a specific number (100 times), and special in a predetermined order It is configured to set a second time saving end condition that is established when the pattern lottery is executed, and the second time saving end condition is established before the first time saving end condition is established. It consists of

Therefore, when the second time saving is set, the player can be motivated to play the game to satisfy the second time saving end condition in order to finish the second time saving as soon as possible.

In addition, according to the type of the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, the degree of advantage to the player is made different, and when a big win is won in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state. It is configured so that it is easier to set an advantageous game state after the end of the big win game than when the big win is won in the second special symbol lottery executed in the normal state.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in the type of the special symbol lottery executed after the second time saving is finished.

In addition, in the eighth control example described above, when the type of special symbol lottery executed immediately after the time saving state is set satisfies the specific condition (the same type as the special symbol in which the time saving state is set), immediately after that Although it is configured to establish the time saving end condition by the special symbol lottery to be executed (the shortening time saving end condition is established), the configuration for establishing the shortening time saving end condition is not limited to this, for example , Even in the state where the time saving state is set, the time saving lottery can be executed, and when the time saving lottery is won during the time saving state, the time saving state with the contents of the newly won time saving state is set. You can

In the eighth control example described above, if the disadvantageous time-saving election is won in the second special symbol lottery, even in the first special symbol lottery until the disadvantageous time-saving state ends, a special symbol that is more disadvantageous than the normal state A lottery is configured to be executed. In other words, according to the result of one special symbol lottery, a penalty can be imposed on other special symbol lotteries.

As a game method for imposing such a penalty, for example, as in the twelfth control example described above, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time (in parallel) (so-called , Simultaneous variation specifications), when the second special symbol lottery is executed by executing an inappropriate game in a specific game state (normal state), a disadvantageous time-saving state is set and disadvantageous While the time saving state is set, a special symbol lottery that is more disadvantageous to the player than the normal state may be executed in the first special symbol lottery.

Next, the twelfth control example described above is configured so that the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be performed simultaneously (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous variation specification). By configuring in this way, lottery games with more special symbols can be executed within a predetermined period of time, and the probability that a player will receive a big win within a predetermined period of time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

In addition, in the above-described 12th control example, when both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are configured to be able to execute the time saving lottery, and only one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol wins the time saving lottery. Rather, it is constructed so that one special pattern is won in a short time and a privilege advantageous to the player is given when the other special pattern is also won in a short time during the period until the variable display of the special pattern stops. ing.

In the 12th control example described above, the time saving A state is set when the first special symbol or the second special symbol wins the time saving in the normal state. On the other hand, when the first special symbol is elected in the normal state, a long time (300 seconds) variation time is set (time reduction winning variation state), until the variation of the first special symbol is completed (that is, time reduction When the second special symbol wins the time-saving during the period until the first special symbol indicating the winning is stopped and displayed, the time-saving B state more advantageous to the player than the time-saving A state is set. Configure.

By configuring in this way, when one special pattern wins short time, the other special pattern also wins short time, so that a privilege advantageous to the player is given, so that one special pattern wins short time, By making the player think that the other special symbol also wants to win the short time win while the special symbol showing the time short win is fluctuating, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game and improve the amusement of the game. can.

In addition, even if a jackpot of a jackpot type in which a time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) can be set after the jackpot game ends, the normal state (low probability state of normal symbols) is set after the jackpot game ends. It is configured to execute processing for

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous due to the game state (time-saving state) advantageous to the player continuing for a long period of time, and to improve the gambling spirit of the player. can be suppressed.

In addition, in a game machine with simultaneous variation specifications, when a big win (or a small win) is won in one special symbol lottery, the other special symbol's variable display is forcibly stopped (discarded), or temporarily It is common to have a specification to execute only one of stopping (interrupting), but in the above-described twelfth control example, the other special symbol fluctuation display is performed depending on the jackpot type (or small hit type). It is configured to determine whether to forcibly stop or temporarily stop. In other words, a big hit type for forcibly stopping (discarding) the fluctuation of the other special symbol and a big hitting type for temporarily stopping (interrupting) the fluctuation display of the other special symbol are defined.

By configuring in this way, when a game state disadvantageous to the player can be set by stopping and displaying one of the special symbols in a state in which a game state advantageous to the player is set, the other special symbol can be set. When winning the jackpot of the jackpot type that can cancel the fluctuation of the special pattern, it is possible to prevent a disadvantageous game state from being set, but the jackpot of the jackpot type that interrupts other special patterns is won. In such a case, a situation in which a disadvantageous game state can be set continues, so that when a big win is won, the player can be interested in whether or not the variation of the other special symbols can be discarded, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. can be improved.

Of course, the playability of the twelfth control example described above, that is, the playability of the simultaneous variation specifications may be applied to each of the control examples described above. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the simultaneous variation specification, the result of the other special symbol lottery is discarded based on one special symbol lottery, for example, based on the execution of one special symbol lottery, time is reduced. A configuration may be used in which the other special symbol lottery (fluctuation) being executed is discarded when the prize is won or when the ceiling privilege is awarded.

<Summary of technical ideas 2>
Next, each technical concept described in each control example described above will be briefly described. First, when the number of executions of the special figure 2 lottery using the special figure 2 reservation acquired during the time saving exceeds a predetermined number of times, the technical idea that the probability that an advantageous privilege will be given by the special figure 2 lottery increases According to the pachinko machine 10 of the 5 control examples, when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, it has means for acquiring the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (information can be acquired possible acquisition means) and the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 reservation) up to the upper limit (4 pieces) (the information acquired by the acquisition means can be stored possible storage means). Then, the second special symbol lottery is executed based on the reserved and stored second special symbol lottery execution right (special figure 2 reservation) (determination is performed based on the information stored in the storage means discriminating means). Then, a jackpot game (specific game) is executed based on the fact that the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery is jackpot winning (first determination result). Then, after the jackpot game ends, the high probability state (specific setting) of the normal pattern that makes it easier to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 is the end for ending the high probability state of the normal pattern. It continues until the condition (time saving end condition) is satisfied. In addition, in the second special symbol lottery, it is configured to be able to execute time-saving winning judgment separately from the jackpot winning judgment, and if it is determined that time-saving winning is determined in the time-saving winning judgment (it is the second determination result If it is done), it is possible to set a high probability state (specific setting) of normal symbols without executing a jackpot game. Furthermore, in the fifth control example described above, a plurality of game states can be set, but only in the state where the normal state (specific period) is set, it is possible to execute the time-saving winning determination. be.

By configuring in this way, when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set based on the fact that the second special pattern lottery is won, it is not the stop timing of the special pattern fluctuation but the end timing of the jackpot game. When the high probability state of the normal design is set and the high probability state of the normal design is set based on the time saving winning in the second special design lottery, the high probability state of the normal design at the stop timing of the special design fluctuation is set. Therefore, the timing at which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set can be varied according to the timing of setting the time saving state.

In addition, since it is possible to set a period during which time-saving winning judgment can be performed (a period in which the normal state is set) and a period in which it cannot be performed (a period in which the normal state is not set), special symbol lottery The duration of execution can also be of interest to the player. In addition, in the fifth control example described above, it is configured to execute the time-saving winning judgment only in the normal state, but it is sufficient to provide a period in which the time-saving winning judgment can be executed and a period in which it is not executed. , In the game state (normal state, second probability variable state) in which the low probability state of the normal pattern is set, it is possible to execute the time-saving winning judgment, and the game state in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set (time-saving state, probability variable It may be configured not to execute the time saving winning determination in the state).

Furthermore, instead of switching depending on the game state where the execution of the time saving success/failure determination is set, the probability of winning the time saving in the time saving success/failure determination may be changed according to the game state, for example, the normal state is set It may be configured so that the time saving win is won with a probability of 1/6 in the time saving propriety determination in the case where it is set, and the time saving win is won with a probability of 1/200 in other game states. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set a game state in which it is easy to win a time saving and a game state in which it is difficult to win a time saving, so that the same effect as the technical idea described above, that is, a special symbol lottery is executed. The time period can also be of interest to the player.

Furthermore, in the above-described fifth control example, the first ball entrance 64 (first ball entrance means for allowing the game ball to enter) that can trigger the execution of the first special symbol lottery by the entrance of the game ball. , A second ball entrance 640 (second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means) that can trigger the execution of the second special symbol lottery is provided, and the time-saving winning determination is the second special symbol lottery. It is configured to be executable only in

That is, in the first special symbol lottery, no matter what game state is set, time-saving winning judgment is not executed, and in the second special symbol lottery, time-saving winning judgment can be executed in a specific period (normal state). By configuring in this way, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, and eventually the game ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and the game ball entering the second ball entrance 640. , the amount of value given to the player later can be greatly different.

In addition, in the fifth control example described above, the first special symbol lottery does not execute the time-saving winning determination, and the second special symbol lottery is configured to be able to execute the time-saving winning determination during a specific period (normal state). , Without being limited to this, for example, in the first specific period (normal state), only the second special symbol lottery executes time saving winning judgment, and in the second specific period (second probability variable state) different from the first specific period may be configured so that only the first special symbol lottery can execute the time-saving winning determination. By configuring in this way, the entry of a game ball into the first ball entrance 64 is more advantageous to the player than the entry of a game ball into the second ball entrance 640 depending on the set period. and a situation in which entering a game ball into the second ball entrance 640 is more likely to impart an advantageous value to the player than entering the game ball into the first ball entrance 64; It becomes possible to create Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play a game in which a more advantageous value is likely to be awarded.

Furthermore, in this case, as in the modification shown in FIG. 329, even if any game state is set, It is preferable to configure the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 so that the degree of entry of the game ball into the ball hole 640 is the same. With such a configuration, the player can select which ball entrance the game ball is to enter, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as described in each control example, rather than the time saving state (first time saving) set based on the jackpot winning, the time saving state (second time saving) set based on the time saving winning by the time saving winning judgment It is configured such that a time saving state advantageous to the player, that is, a time saving state in which the time saving end condition is difficult to be established is easily set. That is, according to the setting opportunity of a time saving state, it comprises so that the advantageous degree of the set time saving state may be varied. As a result, it is possible to vary the period (time saving end condition) for which the time saving state (specific setting) is set depending on the determination result (setting trigger), so the game can be diversified and the interest can be increased. There is an effect that it can be improved.

In this case, depending on the game state before the time saving state is set, the second time saving is more advantageous to the player than the first time saving, and the first time saving is better than the second time saving. It is better to provide a case where it becomes a time saving state that is advantageous to the person. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in which situation the time saving state was set.

More specifically, for example, when the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the end of the previous jackpot game (the number of times of addiction) exceeds a predetermined number, the time saving state is more advantageous than when it does not exceed the predetermined number. It may be configured so that it becomes easy to become

Next, in the above-described seventh control example, in one special symbol lottery, it is configured to be able to win both the jackpot winning and the short-time winning (see FIG. 315). As a result, the jackpot winning (first discrimination result) and the short-time winning (second discrimination result) can be determined in duplicate, so that in one special symbol lottery, the jackpot winning and the short-time winning. , you can expect to win both a big hit and a short time, and various lottery results. Furthermore, in the seventh control example, when the time-saving winning and the jackpot winning overlap, a jackpot game more advantageous to the player than when the winning is not duplicated is executed (Fig. 306). (b)). Therefore, since a specific game of a type advantageous to the player is likely to be executed due to duplicate determination, the game can be diversified by providing the player with benefits corresponding to various determination results. has the effect of

It should be noted that, as a configuration for giving a privilege that is more advantageous to the player in the case of double winning than in the case of not winning multiple times, a configuration other than the above-described seventh control example may be used. The game state to be set after the game is finished may be configured to be able to set a game state (for example, variable probability state, time saving state, etc.) that is more advantageous in the case of double winning than in the case of non-overlapping winning.

In addition, in the seventh control example described above, after executing the time-saving winning determination (determining whether or not the second determination result), the jackpot determination (determining whether or not the first determination result) is performed In one special symbol lottery, when a time-saving lottery is won, the jackpot determination in the special symbol lottery can be executed in a time-saving state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the advantageous degree of the privilege game executed in the case of duplicate winning and the advantage degree of the privilege game executed in the case of non-multiple winning different.

Next, in the second modification of the fifth control example described above, the normal symbol high probability state (first time reduction) set based on the special symbol lottery jackpot winning, and the special symbol lottery time reduction winning The type of privilege given to the player when the jackpot is won in the state where the high probability state of the normal pattern is set based on the high probability state (second time reduction) and the high probability state of the normal pattern is set (jackpot The number of time reductions given after the end of the game) is different (see FIG. 280(b)). Therefore, since the selection ratio in the type of privilege game (the content of the jackpot game and the number of times of time reduction given) is variable according to the setting type (first time reduction, second time reduction), the same normal pattern high probability state ( The effect that the privilege given to the player can be made different even in the second game state) and the enjoyment of the game can be improved by diversifying the game without setting many game states. There is

In addition, in the second modification of the fifth control example described above, a difference is provided in the number of times of time saving to be given according to the setting type (first time saving and second time saving), but not limited to this, execution The contents of the jackpot game to be played (for example, the number of round games) may be configured to be different.

Furthermore, in the second modification of the fifth control example described above, when the second time saving is set rather than the first time saving, that is, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set without the jackpot game being executed is configured to facilitate setting of a high probability state of normal symbols in which the end condition is difficult to be established. In other words, when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set without winning the prize balls during the jackpot game, that is, the benefit given before the high probability state of the normal pattern is set than the first time reduction Since the less second time saving can lengthen the high probability state of the normal symbol, there is an effect that the privilege can be imparted fairly to the player.

Furthermore, in the second modification of the fifth control example described above, similarly to the first modification of the fifth control example and the fifth control example described above, time-saving winning determination only in the normal state (discrimination of the second determination result) is configured to be executable. In other words, except for the normal state, execution of the time-saving winning determination is regulated. Therefore, since the time-saving winning determination is not executed according to the game state, it is possible to make the player more interested in the set game state and expect the setting of the game state in which the second determination result can be determined. has the effect of

In addition, in the second modification of the fifth control example described above, to show the result of the special symbol lottery so as to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the first time saving is set or the second time saving is set (see FIGS. 278 and 279). That is, when the first time reduction is set, the specific effect (see FIG. 278 (a)) is executed for the first period obtained by adding the special symbol fluctuation time and the subsequent jackpot game period, and the second When time saving is set, it is configured to execute a specific effect (see FIG. 278(b)) for the second period which is the special symbol variation time (including fixed time).

More specifically, the fluctuation time and the jackpot game period are defined in advance corresponding to each special symbol lottery result so that the first period and the second period are substantially the same period, and the specific performance is performed. It is configured so that the performance period of is the same. By configuring in this way, as the effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the high probability state of the normal symbol is shown after the specific effect with the same effect period and the same effect mode is executed. A performance will be performed. Therefore, it is made difficult for the player watching the performance executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 to discriminate in which setting opportunity the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. can be done.

Next, in the sixth control example described above, it is configured to be able to execute the time saving winning determination even during the time saving state (second game state). , It is configured to be able to set the time saving state (second game state) of the time saving type in which the time saving end condition is difficult to be satisfied (the number of time saving times is large or the time saving winning probability is high).

Thus, the longer the period in which the time saving state is set, the easier it is to set the time saving state of the time saving type in which the time saving end condition is less likely to be satisfied, so that the privilege game can be easily executed.

In addition, in the sixth control example described above, as shown in FIG. 286(a), the time saving winning probability is changed according to the set game state, but even if the time saving winning probability is defined to be the same good. In addition, although the time-saving winning probability is varied according to the game state, the time-saving winning probability may be changed according to the number of special symbol lotteries after the last big win game is executed. In this case, when the number of special symbol lotteries after the last big winning game is executed exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 200 times), the time saving winning probability should be increased. By constructing in this way, a player who has not won a big win for a long time in the special symbol lottery can be easily provided with the privilege of short-time winning, which is different from the big win game. It goes without saying that this technical concept can be applied to other control examples.

As the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 used in each embodiment or each control example described above, the following configuration may be used.

<Regarding the high-probability state of normal symbols>
In each of the above-described embodiments, in a part of the case where the special symbol lottery wins the jackpot, the high probability state of the normal symbol can be set after the jackpot game ends, but the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. As a setting opportunity for this, a setting opportunity other than the jackpot winning of the special symbol lottery may be provided, for example, the number of executions of the special symbol variation is a predetermined number without winning the jackpot A setting opportunity for setting a high-probability state of normal symbols may be established when the value of the denominator of the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery to be drawn reaches twice.

By configuring in this way, when a situation occurs in which a special symbol lottery (fluctuation) that does not win a jackpot is repeatedly executed, that is, a situation in which the player's willingness to play tends to decrease, a privilege (normal Since the high-probability state of the symbol can be given, it is possible to suppress the player's willingness to play from significantly declining.

In addition, the number of executions of the special symbol variation, which is an element for establishing the above-described setting opportunity, may be configured to be variable according to the game situation. It may be configured to vary the number of executions of the special symbol variation that establishes the setting opportunity for setting the high probability state. Specifically, when the normal state (low probability state of special design, low probability state of normal design) is set, the second probability variable state (high probability state of special design, low probability state of normal design) If it is set, that is, according to the type of game state in which the low probability state of normal symbols is set, the number of executions of the special symbol variation that establishes the setting opportunity may be varied. By configuring in this way, the degree of expectation that the high probability state of the normal symbol is set can be varied according to the set game state.

In this case, the second probability variable state in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set is easier to win the jackpot in the special symbol lottery than the normal state in which the low probability state of the special symbol is set (special Because the pattern lottery jackpot probability is high), when the second probability variation state is set, the high probability state of the normal design is set with fewer special design variations than when the normal state is set. It is preferable to configure so that the setting opportunity for performing is established. By configuring in this way, even if any game state is set, it is possible to make the ease of establishment of the setting opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the same degree. becomes.

On the other hand, when the normal state is set rather than when the second probability variable state is set, the setting opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal design with a smaller number of executions of the special design variation is established. It can be configured as follows. That is, in the normal state (the most disadvantageous game state for the player) in which the low probability state disadvantageous to the player is set even in the probability state of the special symbol, the setting opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal symbol Since it can be made easier to establish, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to play games that are excessively disadvantageous. In addition, since it becomes easy to set the high probability state of the normal design based on the setting opportunity that is established when the number of executions of the special design fluctuation reaches the predetermined number of times, the high probability state of the normal design is set without winning the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to easily provide the player with a game with unexpectedness.

Furthermore, in the case where the setting opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal symbol is configured to be different according to the set game state, in a part of the set game state, the high probability of the normal symbol It is possible to provide a game state in which the setting opportunity for setting the state cannot be established (difficult to do), for example, as a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols). , normal AA, normal AB) can be set, and a high probability state of normal symbols is set when the game state of normal AB is set rather than when the game state of normal AA is set. The configuration may be such that the setting opportunity for performing is likely to be established.

By configuring in this way, at what timing is the high-probability state of the normal symbol set for the player playing the game on the gaming machine in which the normal state is set? Or, is it a game state in which a setting opportunity for setting a high probability state of normal symbols can be established? Since the game can be played while predicting the game, it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game. In this case, it is possible for the player to predict whether or not the currently set game state (game state for each type) is a game state in which the setting opportunity of the high probability state of the normal symbol is likely to be established. It is preferable to construct such a production so as to be executable.

Furthermore, the game state in which the normal pattern high probability state is set is a privilege given to the player when a big win is won in the special pattern lottery than the game state in which the normal pattern low probability state is set. In a gaming machine having a game specification that is likely to be advantageous to the player (jackpot game content and game state set to end the jackpot game), the remaining time until the establishment of the setting opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal symbol is established. Information indicating the period (number of remaining special symbol fluctuations) and information for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol lottery (or information to indicate the pre-discrimination result (forecast result) that determined the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in advance) ), and it is preferable to configure so as to be able to execute an effect in which the mode of effect is changed based on the above.

For example, when a special pattern lottery wins a jackpot, a high-probability state of a normal pattern is set when determining the direction of a direction (for example, a ready-to-win effect) that is more likely to be executed than when it is not won. With reference to the remaining period (number of remaining special symbol fluctuations) until the setting opportunity is established, if the number of remaining special symbol fluctuations is small, that is, the first situation in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is soon set, and the remaining When the number of times of special pattern fluctuation is large, that is, when the high probability state of normal patterns is not set for a while, a different presentation mode is determined, and the first situation is better than the second situation. It is preferable to determine the presentation mode of the ready-to-win presentation so that the ready-to-win presentation can be easily executed in a presentation mode in which it is possible to inform the player that the situation is more advantageous than the situation.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the ready-to-win performance of different performance modes depending on the timing of executing the ready-to-win performance for suggesting winning the jackpot and the timing of setting the high probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, the ready-to-win effect can be executed in various effects modes, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In addition, based on the effect mode of the ready-to-win effect to be executed, the degree of advantage of the timing when the ready-to-win effect is executed (whether it is immediately before the high probability state of the normal symbol is set or not) is made known to the player. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel production that makes the player expect that the production result of the ready-to-win production being executed will be lost (a production result indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss). can.

In addition, when the normal symbol low probability state is set and the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times without winning the jackpot, the normal symbol high probability state is set. In addition, the high probability state of normal symbols is more likely to be set after the end of the jackpot game when the jackpot is won during the high probability state of the normal symbols than when the jackpot is won during the low probability state of the normal symbols. In the gaming machine configured as above, as a variable effect for showing the result of the special symbol lottery, a specific effect (for example, reach and, as the performance mode of the specific performance, a first performance mode suggesting that the jackpot is won in which a high-probability state of normal symbols is set after the end of the jackpot game, and a simple jackpot. A second performance mode suggesting winning can be determined, and the frequency of execution of the specific performance of the first performance mode is determined regardless of the remaining number of special symbol fluctuations until the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. It may be fixed, and the frequency at which the specific effect of the second effect mode is executed may be made lower as the remaining number of special symbol fluctuations until the high probability state of the normal symbol is set decreases.

By configuring in this way, the closer to the number of special symbol fluctuations in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the higher the selection ratio of the first effect mode in the case where the specific effect is executed. When the specific effect is executed in a state close to the number of special symbol fluctuations in which the high probability state of the symbol is set (for example, the number of special symbol fluctuations after the end of the previous jackpot game is between 90 and 99 times) However, it is possible to make the player interested in the performance result of the specific performance without discouraging the player.

In addition, a frequency lottery means for determining the number of execution times of the special symbol variation for establishing the setting opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal symbol is provided, and the setting opportunity is established based on the lottery result of the frequency lottery means. You may determine the execution frequency of a special design variation. In this case, for example, as the range of the number of executions that can be determined by the number-of-times lottery means, the number of executions of the special symbol variation may be determined to be "0" as the number of executions at which the setting opportunity is most likely to be established.

By configuring in this way, even when a jackpot type in which a low-probability state of normal symbols is set is set, substantially the same game state as when a high-probability state of normal symbols is set is set. It becomes possible to

In other words, even when the same jackpot type (jackpot type in which a low-probability state of normal symbols is set) is set in the same gaming state, based on the lottery result of the number-of-times lottery means, The game state (probability state of normal symbols) set after the end of the jackpot game (until the first special symbol variation is executed) can be varied.

Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the game state to be set after the end of the jackpot game, and to provide the player with an unexpected game.

In addition, the timing at which the above-mentioned number-of-times lottery means is executed may be appropriately set, for example, it may be the timing at which the big win game ends, and the number-of-times lottery means is executed each time the special symbol variation is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times). It may be configured to be executable. In this case, when the number of execution times of the special symbol variation determined as the lottery result of the frequency lottery means has already passed, the normal symbol high probability state is set immediately after the lottery by the frequency lottery means is executed. It should be configured as follows.

In this way, by constructing the number-of-times lottery means to be executable each time the special symbol variation is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times), during the period in which the special symbol variation is executed a plurality of times without winning the jackpot, It is possible to vary the contents of the setting opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal design (the number of special design fluctuations in which the setting opportunity is established). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict at what timing the high-probability state of the normal symbol is set. In this case, the range of the number of executions of the special symbol variation determined by the lottery must be different based on the number of times the lottery is executed by the lottery means after the end of the jackpot game until the next jackpot is won. More specifically, the higher the number of execution times of the lottery, the easier it is to set the high-probability state of the normal symbol. By constructing in this way, as the number of special symbol fluctuations executed between big hits increases, it is possible to easily set a high probability state of normal symbols, so that the player's willingness to play is remarkably lowered. can be suppressed.

In addition, in the number-of-times lottery means described above, the lottery for determining the number of times of special symbol fluctuations that establishes the setting opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal symbol is executed, but this is not the case. Instead, the contents of the number-of-times lottery means may be configured to determine the number of times of special symbol fluctuation required until the normal symbol high-probability state is set after the number-of-times lottery means is executed.

In addition, the number of times lottery means is executed each time the special symbol variation is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times), that is, the number of times lottery means can be executed when a predetermined lottery condition is established based on the execution of the special symbol variation. In the game machine configured as above, instead of the above-mentioned frequency lottery means, a normal pattern high probability lottery means is provided, and when winning the normal pattern high probability lottery means, a high probability state of normal patterns is set. You can

In addition, another setting opportunity may be provided as a setting opportunity for the high probability state of the normal design, for example, the number of times that the result of the special symbol lottery is a specific lottery result other than the jackpot winning (eg, small winning) is provided, and when the measurement result of the measurement means is a predetermined measurement result, a setting opportunity for setting a high probability state of the normal symbol may be established, or the previous big hit When the game result (increase or decrease in the number of paid balls) after the end of the game exceeds a predetermined range (for example, when the degree of decrease in the number of paid balls is extremely large), a setting opportunity for setting a high probability state of normal symbols is established. It can be configured as follows.

Furthermore, the degree of establishment (easiness of establishment) of the setting opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal symbol may be varied according to the past game results. When the game is biased toward a disadvantageous jackpot, that is, when a game disadvantageous to the player continues for a predetermined period, the setting opportunity for setting the high-probability state of the normal symbol may be easily established. Alternatively, when a game that is advantageous to the player continues for a predetermined period of time, it may be configured such that the setting opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal symbol is difficult to materialize. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a player who has been playing for a long time from continuing to play an excessively disadvantageous game or an excessively advantageous game.

In each embodiment described above, when the time saving end condition is satisfied in a state in which the time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set, the normal state (low probability state of special symbols , Low probability state of normal symbols) is configured to be set. Then, as the time-saving end condition, a time-saving end condition that is established when the number of times of special symbol variation is executed (performed) a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) is set.

In addition, the content of the time saving end condition is not limited to this, for example, different time saving end conditions may be set according to the type of special symbol, specifically, the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol is the first number When executed, when the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is executed the second number of times, or when the total number of times of fluctuation of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is executed the third number of times You may comprise so that time saving end conditions may be materialized by etc.

In addition, when setting the time-saving end condition to be established based on the number of execution times of the special symbol variation, various times may be settable as the number of times of special symbol variation for which the time-saving end condition is established. As shown in each embodiment, except when the number of special symbol variations reaches 100 times, the time saving end condition is established when the number of special symbol variations is greater than 100 times (for example, 200 times). Alternatively, it may be configured so that the time-saving end condition is satisfied when it is executed less than 100 times (for example, 50 times). Furthermore, the content of the time saving end condition may be changed according to the setting opportunity (such as the type of jackpot and the number of special symbol fluctuations) established to set the time saving state. It is preferable to reduce the number of times of special symbol fluctuations in which the time-saving end condition is satisfied so that the time-saving end condition is more likely to be satisfied when another setting opportunity is satisfied. By configuring in this way, when the time saving state is set, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the time saving state ends, and the time saving state is based on which setting opportunity is established. is set, the player can be interested.

In addition, an element other than the number of executions of the special symbol variation may be used as an element to establish the time saving end condition, for example, the number of times that the result of the special symbol lottery is a specific lottery result (small hit) is a predetermined number of times. You may comprise so that time saving end conditions may be materialized when it reaches|attains.

In addition, the timing of ending the time saving state based on the establishment of the time saving end condition may be the start timing of the corresponding special symbol variation (lottery), the stop timing of the corresponding special symbol variation, or the corresponding special symbol variation. It may be a specific timing until the special symbol lottery next to the special symbol variation is executed. Furthermore, the time saving state may be terminated at the start timing and end timing of the winning game (jackpot game, small winning game), the start timing and stop timing of normal pattern fluctuation, the start timing and end timing of normal pattern per game You can end the time saving state with .

In this case, even if any of the time-saving end conditions are satisfied, the time-saving state may be configured to end at the same timing, or the time-saving state at different timings according to the type of the time-saving end condition that is satisfied may be configured to end, for example, when the time saving end condition is established based on the number of executions of the special symbol variation, the time saving state is terminated at a predetermined timing related to the special symbol variation, and the special symbol lottery If the time-saving end condition is established based on the result (small hit winning etc.), the time-saving state is terminated at a predetermined timing related to the winning game (small winning game, big winning game) executed based on the lottery result should be configured to By configuring in this way, the timing of ending the time saving state can be changed according to the type of the established time saving end condition, so it is possible to make it more difficult to understand how long the time saving state continues.

In each of the above-described embodiments, when the second probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set as the gaming state, the number of balls is increased without winning the jackpot. It is configured so that the game is executed with a game property (a game property that can increase the number of balls by small winning games that occur frequently), but the number of balls is increased without winning a big win. By using different game characteristics as possible game characteristics, it may be possible to increase the number of payout balls even in a state in which another game state is set.

For example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters a ball entrance (for example, the right first ball entrance 64b2) that makes it easier for the ball to enter when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set By setting a large number of winning balls, it may be possible to increase the number of balls to be paid out without winning a big hit when a high probability state of normal symbols is set. By constructing in this way, the player can play the game aiming at the special symbol jackpot winning and the game aiming at the normal symbol winning, so that the player's interest in the game is improved. can do.

Furthermore, in order to differentiate the number of balls to be played per unit time between the first game state (time saving state) in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set and the second game state (probability variable state), the normal symbol fluctuation time is set. The length of the period during which the ball can be actually entered into the right first ball entrance 64b2 in the game period of the normal pattern winning game executed when the normal pattern is won is varied. It may be configured to be able to vary the depth, and may be configured to be able to obtain more balls per unit time in the first game state than in the second game state.

In addition, in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set for the gaming machine having the performance that can increase the number of balls released without winning the jackpot. It is preferable to provide the above-described setting opportunity (setting opportunity established based on the number of special symbol fluctuations) as the setting opportunity. As a result, a high probability state of normal symbols is set for a player who is executing a special pattern variation (lottery) for a long time without winning a jackpot in the normal state, which is a low probability state of normal symbols. , it is possible to execute a game (relief game) for increasing the number of balls to be paid out. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the execution of a game that results in an excessively disadvantageous game result for the player.

As described above, as a configuration that can increase the number of balls by a game that is executed without winning a jackpot in a time-saving state (low-probability state of special symbols, high-probability state of normal symbols), for example, during the time-saving state The number of prize balls to be paid out may be equal to or slightly greater (in the range of about 1 to 1.2 times the number of shot balls) with respect to the number of balls to be continuously shot. By configuring in this way, the game specification during the time saving state tends to be long Even in a game machine with a game specification in which a variable time is set, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play the game during a time-saving state that continues for a long time.

As mentioned above, although the structure regarding the high probability state of a normal design was demonstrated, you may apply the same content as a structure regarding the high probability state of a special design. In this case, the element corresponding to the normal design of the content described above may be applied to the configuration of the content changed to the special design. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at which timing the probability state of the special pattern (low probability state, high probability state) is set, and the interest in the game is improved. can let you Furthermore, the configuration described above may be used for both normal symbols and special symbols.

<About the configuration regarding the high probability state of special symbols>
In each of the above-described embodiments, according to the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, the ratio of setting the high probability state of the special pattern after the jackpot game is finished is the jackpot corresponding to the first special pattern. Although a configuration is used in which the same ratio is defined in advance for the type and the jackpot type corresponding to the second special pattern, it is not limited to this, for example, a high probability state of the special pattern after the jackpot game ends. A jackpot game is played by passing a ball through a specific area during a jackpot game in a state in which a settable jackpot type is set (a state in which the right to set a high-probability state of special symbols is acquired). A high probability state of special symbols is set after completion, and a big winning game is executed based on the winning of the first special symbol lottery, and a big winning game is executed based on the winning of the second special symbol lottery. The execution ratio of an advantageous jackpot game in which the ball can pass through the specific area during the jackpot game and a disadvantageous jackpot game in which the ball is difficult to pass through the specific area during the jackpot game are made different. may be configured.

By configuring in this way, the ratio of setting the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the big winning game is the same for the big winning type corresponding to the first special symbol and the big winning type corresponding to the second special symbol. Even if the ratio is stipulated in advance, the ratio at which the high probability state of the special symbol is actually set is the case of winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery and the case of winning the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery. and can be made different.

In addition, other configurations may be used, for example, a high probability state of special symbols is set after the jackpot game ends with the jackpot type corresponding to the first special pattern and the jackpot type corresponding to the second special pattern. It may also be configured to prescribe different ratios. In this case, furthermore, according to the game state (game state at the time of winning) at the time of winning the jackpot, the ratio of setting the high probability state of the special pattern after the jackpot game is set to be different for the same special pattern type. may be configured to be defined in advance.

In addition, a predetermined set lottery can be executed, and based on the result of the set lottery, it is determined whether or not a high probability state of special symbols is set after the jackpot game is finished for each special symbol jackpot type. It may be configured to give information to be used. That is, for a predetermined jackpot type, the type of game state set when the jackpot type is set may be configured to differ according to the game state. In this case, the game status includes, for example, the jackpot winning status within a predetermined period, the number of special symbol variations executed during the jackpot game, the amount of balls the player has won, and the like. When the result is a determination result disadvantageous to the player, it is preferable to set the high probability state of the special symbol more easily than when the determination result is advantageous to the player. As a result, it is possible to suppress the execution of a game that results in an excessively disadvantageous game result for the player.

Similarly, when a jackpot is won in a state in which a high probability state of special symbols is set, the above-described content is also applied to the ratio of setting a low probability state of special symbols after the end of the jackpot game. can be configured as

In each of the above-described embodiments, a low probability state of special symbols is set after the end of the jackpot game according to the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery in the state where the high probability state of the special symbols is set. As a ratio to be played, the jackpot type corresponding to the first special symbol and the jackpot type corresponding to the second special symbol have the same ratio defined in advance. For example, after the end of the jackpot game, in a state in which a jackpot type capable of setting a high probability state of special symbols is set (a state in which the right to set a high probability state of special symbols is acquired), during the jackpot game a jackpot game configured to set a low-probability state of a special pattern after the jackpot game ends due to the ball not passing through the specific area, and executed based on the jackpot winning of a first special pattern lottery; A jackpot game executed based on the jackpot winning of a special pattern lottery, an advantageous jackpot game capable of passing a ball through a specific area during the jackpot game, and a ball passing through a specific area during the jackpot game. It may be configured such that the execution ratios of the difficult disadvantageous jackpot game and the execution ratio are different.

By configuring in this way, the ratio of setting the low probability state of the special symbol after the end of the big winning game is the same for the big winning type corresponding to the first special symbol and the big winning type corresponding to the second special symbol. Even if the ratio is stipulated in advance, the ratio of actually setting the low probability state of the special symbol is the case of winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery and the case of winning the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery. and can be made different.

In addition, other configurations may be used, for example, the jackpot type corresponding to the first special pattern and the jackpot type corresponding to the second special pattern are selected during the high probability state of the special pattern, and the jackpot game ends. It may be configured so as to predefine by varying the rate of setting the low probability state of the special symbol later. In this case, furthermore, according to the game state (game state at the time of winning) at the time of winning the big win, the ratio of setting the low probability state of the special symbol after the end of the big win game is made different for the same special symbol type. may be configured to be defined in advance.

In addition, a predetermined set lottery can be executed, and based on the result of the set lottery, it is determined whether or not the low probability state of the special symbols is set after the jackpot game is finished for the jackpot type of each special symbol. It may be configured to give information to be used. That is, for a predetermined jackpot type, the type of game state set when the jackpot type is set may be configured to differ according to the game state. In this case, the game status includes, for example, the jackpot winning status within a predetermined period, the number of special symbol variations executed during the jackpot game, the amount of balls the player has won, and the like. It is preferable that the low-probability state of special symbols is set more easily when the result is a determination result that is advantageous to the player than when the result is a determination result that is disadvantageous to the player. As a result, it is possible to suppress the execution of a game that results in an excessively advantageous game result for the player.

Furthermore, in each of the above-described embodiments, as the end condition for ending the high probability state of the special symbol, it is configured to be able to set the end condition based on the special symbol lottery jackpot winning, and the high probability state of the special symbol is In the case of setting, the high probability state of the special symbol is continued until the next jackpot is won. The configuration used as the time-saving end condition for ending the high-probability state may be used as the end condition for ending the high-probability state of the special symbol.

Specifically, the end condition may be established when the number of special symbol variations after the special symbol high probability state is set reaches a specific number (for example, 150 times). As a result, the high-probability state of the special symbols having a high probability of winning the jackpot can be terminated without winning the jackpot, so that the game playing the game state in which the high-probability state of the special symbols is set. It is possible to motivate a person to play a game so as to win a big win before a termination condition is satisfied.

In addition, the above-mentioned end condition and the time saving end condition may be configured to have both the gaming machine, in this case, the number of executions of the special symbol variation set as the end condition and the time saving end condition are set. It is preferable that the number of times of execution of the special symbol variation and the number of times of execution are different. By configuring in this way, it is possible to switch the game state each time each end condition is satisfied, so that it is possible to provide the player with a game that does not get boring.

Furthermore, as the special symbol variation frequency set as the end condition, one special symbol variation frequency out of a plurality of variation frequencies including at least a first variation frequency and a second variation frequency different from the first variation frequency. should be configurable. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the end condition is satisfied.

In addition, for a gaming machine configured to be able to vary the number of special symbol fluctuations set as the end condition, if the end condition related to the number of special symbol fluctuations can be set, it can be set as the end condition. Of the special symbol variation frequencies, the first variation frequency is set to be the variation frequency smaller than the special symbol variation frequency that satisfies the time saving end condition, and the second variation frequency that is different from the first variation frequency is used to satisfy the time saving end condition. It is preferable to configure so that the number of fluctuations is greater than the number of special symbol fluctuations. By comprising in this way, the conditions satisfied first can be varied among termination conditions and time saving termination conditions according to the termination conditions set.

Therefore, for example, in a situation where the first probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set, the game state to be set next is the second probability variable state) (high probability of special symbols State, low probability state of normal design) or time saving state (low probability state of special design, high probability state of normal design) can be changed according to the contents of the set end conditions Therefore, it is possible to play a game that predicts the game state to be set next while keeping the player interested in the content of the set end condition, thereby improving the interest in the game. can.

In addition, in a gaming machine configured to be able to set different contents as end conditions and time-saving end conditions in this way, information for indicating the contents of each condition currently set can be notified to the player. should be configured to be executable. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with information for predicting the timing at which each condition can be satisfied and the content of each set condition. It is possible to make the user interested in the performance and enhance the performance effect.

As described above, as the termination condition for ending the special symbol high probability state, the termination condition established based on the number of executions of the special symbol variation has been described, but not limited to this, for example, the special symbol high probability state A lottery (falling lottery) for shifting to a low probability state is configured to be executable separately from the special pattern jackpot lottery (special pattern lottery), and when the falling lottery is won, the end condition is established. can be configured to Even in this case, the winning probability of the fall lottery and the number of executions of the fall lottery during the period in which the special pattern lottery is executed once can be changed so that the ending condition during the high probability state of the special pattern can be determined. You may comprise so that the easiness of establishment may be made different. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the end condition is established after the high probability state of the special symbol is set.

<Regarding the function (limit function) that sets the upper limit for the period in which the high probability state can be set continuously>
A high-probability state and a low-probability state can be set as the probability state of the special pattern, and a high-probability state and a low-probability state can be set as the probability state of the normal pattern, and the degree of advantage is different according to the set probability state. In a game machine capable of setting a state, an upper limit is set for the number of times a probability state (for example, a high probability state) advantageous to a player is continuously set, and when the upper limit is reached, the player is favored. A game state advantageous to a player is provided by providing a function (limit function) for forcibly setting a probability state (e.g., high probability state) to a probability state (e.g., low probability state) more disadvantageous than the probability state. is excessively set, and execution of a game that is excessively advantageous to the player can be suppressed.

In a gaming machine having such a limit function, the conditions for activating the limit function may be varied according to the established limit setting conditions. Based on the type, any activation condition is selected and set from a first activation condition under which the limit function is likely to be activated and a second activation condition under which activation is more difficult than the first activation condition. You can

Specifically, a gaming machine with a probability variable limit function that sets an upper limit on the number of times that the high probability state of special symbols is set continuously, and forcibly sets the low probability state of special symbols when the upper limit is reached. , the upper limit until the probability variable limit function is activated can be set differently depending on the jackpot type, and when the first jackpot type is set, the upper limit is "5 times", and the first jackpot type and When a different second jackpot type is set, it is preferable that the activation condition can be set so that the upper limit is "three times".

By configuring in this way, according to the value set as the activation condition, the length of the advantageous game period in which the game can be continued and executed in a game state advantageous to the player is determined based on the set jackpot type. can be different.

In the above example, the limit function (probability variable limit function) for the high probability state of the special design was explained, but without limiting to this, the limit function (time saving limit function) for the high probability state of the normal design The contents described above may be applied, or the contents below may be combined and applied to each limit. Furthermore, as the symbol type probability state, for a gaming machine with a game specification in which the low probability state can be a game state more advantageous to the player than the high probability state, the number of times the low probability state is set continuously On the other hand, a limit function may be provided that sets an upper limit and forcibly sets a high probability state when the upper limit is reached.

In addition, in the above-described example, the above-described limit function is used for the purpose of suppressing the execution of a game that is excessively advantageous to the player, but the limit function may be used for other purposes, such as An upper limit is set for the number of times a game state (low-probability state) disadvantageous to the player is set in succession, and when the upper limit is reached, a game state (high-probability state) advantageous to the player is forcibly set. A limit function may be provided. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the execution of a game that is excessively disadvantageous to the player.

<Regarding a configuration that can execute a winning game based on the ball passing through a specific area>
In each of the above-described embodiments, the jackpot game can be executed when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery. Another execution opportunity may be provided as an execution opportunity for a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player. A variable means that is opened in a variable pattern that is variable between a first state and a second state different from the first state when a condition is established, and the variable means is changed to the first state. a second ball entering means through which the ball can enter more easily than when the ball is changed to the second state, a specific area through which the ball entering the second ball entering means can pass, and the specific area and a jackpot game executing means capable of executing a jackpot game based on the ball passing through a specific area, that is, a constitution in which a trigger for executing the jackpot game is established based on the ball passing through the specific area. A gaming machine (so-called two-type specification) may be used. With this configuration, whether or not the big win game is executed is determined by the behavior of the ball entering the second ball entering means, so that the player can enjoy the behavior of the ball. can be done.

In such a two-type game machine, the operation condition may be established based on the ball entering the ball entering means described above, or the ball entering the ball entering means may be configured to satisfy the operating condition. An operation lottery may be executed based on the entry of the ball, and the operation condition may be established when the operation lottery is won. In the former case, the ball has entered the ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the player interested in the behavior of the ball. On the other hand, in the latter case, even if a ball enters the ball-entering means, the operation condition is not satisfied unless the ball is won in the operation lottery.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine with the above-mentioned two types of specifications, as the flow path for the ball that enters the second ball entering means, there is a first flow path that can pass through the specific area, and a specific area that is wider than the first flow path. A plurality of flow paths including at least a second flow path that is difficult to pass through are provided, and a distribution means capable of distributing a ball that has entered the second ball entering means to any of the plurality of flow paths is provided. Alternatively, the rate at which a ball hit by the second ball-entering means passes through the specific area may be varied according to the sorting situation of the sorting means.

With this configuration, the degree of establishment of the trigger for the execution of the jackpot game can be varied depending on the distribution situation of the distribution means. You can make them interested in how they arrive at the means.

As described above, in a gaming machine having a configuration in which the degree of establishment of a trigger for execution of a jackpot game can be varied depending on the distribution status of the distribution means, the pachinko machine 10 has a It may be configured so that a constant operation is always executed after the power is turned on, or the entry of the ball into the ball entry means, the establishment of the operating condition, or the entry of the ball into the second ball entry means. Based on which of the spheres, it may be configured such that a constant action is always performed.

Furthermore, the content of the sorting operation of the sorting means may be varied according to the establishment conditions. For example, the first sorting operation in which the ball is likely to pass through the specific area according to the winning type in the case of winning the motion lottery. Any one of a plurality of distribution operation contents including at least a content and a second distribution operation content in which the ball is more difficult to pass through a specific area than the first distribution operation content is determined, and distribution is performed. You may comprise so that a means may be operated.

In addition, a game machine configured so that a chance to execute a big win game can be established both when a special pattern lottery wins a big win and when a ball passes through a specific area (so-called one type and two types mixed specifications). , the execution period of the jackpot game being executed can be extended by passing the ball through a specific area during the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot winning in the special pattern lottery, in other words, the special pattern lottery. A ball may pass through a specific area during a jackpot game executed based on winning a jackpot in , so that the jackpot game being executed can be continued without ending midway. That is, if the ball does not pass through the specific area during the jackpot game that is executed based on the jackpot winning in the special symbol lottery, the jackpot game that is being executed is not extended (forcibly terminated). It can be configured as follows.

By configuring in this way, the player can be interested in both the result of the special symbol lottery and the behavior of the ball flowing down toward the specific area.

<Regarding the configuration for changing the falling direction of the ball>
The nail member used in each of the above-described embodiments as a configuration for changing the flow direction (drop direction) of the ball flowing down the game area formed on the game board 13 formed in the pachinko machine 10, that is, In addition to the member that can change the downward direction of the ball within a range that does not oppose the direction of gravity, a means for moving the ball in a direction different from the direction of gravity (for example, upward direction) is provided. For example, by using an electric drive source or using the movement energy of another ball, the ball can be moved in a direction different from the direction of gravity (for example, the upward direction) (for example, the upward direction). It is also possible to provide a moving means for

By configuring in this way, the movement direction of the ball flowing down the game area can be set in various directions including directions different from the direction of gravity. It can provide flexible ball movement. In addition, it is possible to move (raise) the ball that has reached the vicinity of the most downstream side of the game area, that is, the ball that has not entered the ball entrance where a privilege is given to the player, to the upstream side of the game area. Since it is possible, the player can have expectations for the behavior of one ball until the end.

Furthermore, for example, in a gaming machine configured so that a gate member through which a ball can pass is provided in the game area and a predetermined privilege can be granted when the ball passes through the gate member, the ball that has passed through the gate member reaches It is preferable that moving means be provided in the area to be obtained so that the balls are ejected above the gate member by the moving means. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a novel game property in which a plurality of benefits can be given to the player with one ball.

Further, the moving means described above may be provided in an area (for example, an internal area of the winning device that is opened during a winning game) in which a ball is likely to enter during a winning game (big winning game, small winning game). With this configuration, it is possible to raise the ball inside the prize-winning device, so that, for example, a privilege advantageous to the player can be provided by allowing the ball to pass through a specific area during a specific round of a jackpot game. In a game machine configured to be awarded, balls that have won a prize in a prize winning device in a round prior to a specific round are raised by a moving means to stay for a predetermined period, and the held balls are discharged. Depending on the timing, it is possible to configure the specific area to be passable during the specific round.

Thus, a moving means may be used to cause the sphere to stay within a specific area for a predetermined period of time. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the ball will be ejected from within the specific area.

<Regarding the structure that acts on the entrance of the ball to the ball entrance to open another ball entrance>
A first working hole into which a game ball can enter, and a first state in which the game ball enters the first working hole to make it easier for the game ball to enter the first working hole. A first operating member that operates is provided, and the first operating member acts on the fact that a predetermined number (for example, two) of game balls enter the first operating port, and the first state than the first state It is constructed so as to operate to a second state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the first operating hole.

Acting on the fact that the game ball entering the first working hole enters the specific area, the game ball enters a third state in which the game ball can enter the second working hole different from the first working hole. A second actuating member is provided for actuating with. This second operating member is a fourth state in which, when a predetermined number (for example, one) of game balls enter the second operating port, the game ball is less likely to enter the second operating port than in the third state. Configure to operate into a state.

By configuring in this way, the second operating member operates to the third state based on the game ball entering the first operating port, thereby allowing the game ball to enter the second operating port. In this state, the second operating member operates to the fourth state by inserting one game ball into the second operating port. Then, by entering the game ball again into the first operating port in which the first operating member is in the first state, the second operating member is operated again to the third state, and the game is played to the second operating port. It is possible to enter the ball.

More specifically, when the game ball is entered into the first operating port in a state where the first operating member is in the second state, up to four balls are operated through the operating port (first operating port, first 2 operation opening). Furthermore, the game ball entered into the second operating port executes the first winning lottery (lottery of the first normal symbol) based on the entering ball into the second specific area, and the result of the first winning lottery. is a winning (probability of winning about 1/2), the first normal electric accessory capable of regulating the entry of the game ball into the first variable ball entry means is set to the first closing condition (for example, 5.8 The opening operation (changes the entry of game balls into the first variable entry means to a permissible state) is performed until seconds elapse or four wins are established. Then, based on the fact that the game ball that has entered the first variable ball entry means has entered the third specific area that can be entered, a second winning lottery (second normal symbol lottery) is executed, and a second lottery is performed. If the result of the lottery is winning (probability of winning about 1/1), the second normal electric accessory capable of regulating the entry of the game ball into the second variable ball entry means is set to the second closing condition (for example, , 5.8 seconds have passed, or until 4 wins) are established, the opening operation (changes the entry of the game ball into the second variable entry means to an allowable state). Then, based on the fact that the game ball that has entered the second variable ball entry means has entered the fourth specific area that can be entered, a third winning lottery (third normal symbol lottery) is executed, and a third lottery is executed. If the result of the lottery is winning (probability of winning about 1/1), the third ordinary electric accessory capable of regulating the entry of the game ball into the third variable ball entry means is set to the third closing condition (for example , 5.8 seconds have passed, or 10 prizes have been won.

In this case, the maximum winning number of game balls that can be entered into each operating port based on the entry (winning) of the game ball into the first operating port is In the winning number "2", the maximum winning number to the second operating opening that can be won every time the game ball enters the first operating opening with respect to the maximum winning number (2) to the first operating opening It may be calculated as "4" by adding the value "2" multiplied by (1), or a winning game that is executed based on entering (winning) the game ball to the first operation opening The number of game balls that can be entered into each operation port during the period until (a winning game using a plurality of normal electric accessories) is executed is the maximum number of winnings, that is, one winning game is executed. It may be calculated as the number of winnings required until the start (“2” obtained by adding the number of balls entering the first operating port “1” to the number of balls entering the second operating port “1”). Then, every time a game ball enters the first operating port for the maximum number of winnings to the first operating port, the number of winnings to the second operating port becomes possible. The maximum winning number may be obtained by adding the value obtained by dividing the maximum winning number.

Then, when the maximum winning number reaches a predetermined limit number, the winning game is ended, and based on the satisfaction of the switching condition, it is calculated when determining whether or not the limit number has been reached. The value of the maximum number of prizes to be won may be switched and referred to among the values (maximum number of prizes) calculated by the various calculation formulas described above. If the switched value has not reached the limit number, the winning game may be extended until the maximum winning number after switching reaches the limit number.

In other words, using various calculation formulas that can vary the value after calculation, when the game ball enters the first operating hole, it is possible to win a plurality of operating holes in a series of game flows. The maximum number of prizes to be awarded to each operating port is defined so that the number of possible game balls is limited, and the calculation formula for determining the maximum number of prizes is changed according to the conditions. It may be configured to execute a winning game based on the maximum number of winnings to each operation port defined in correspondence with the calculation formula.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the content of the winning game (total number of wins to each operation port and each variable ball entry means) according to the specified calculation formula.

Also, the value of the maximum number of prizes described above may be configured to vary according to the conditions. When the number is changed to "3" and a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, the maximum number of winnings to the first operation port is changed from "2" to "1". Also good. By configuring in this way, depending on the conditions to be established, the winning game executed when the game ball enters the first operation opening (each operation opening, the game ball to the variable ball entry means Since the contents of the game to enter the ball can be changed, an advantageous establishment condition that is advantageous to the player (establishment condition that the total number of prize balls awarded during the winning game is set to increase) is established. , and a game can be played while expecting that a winning game will be executed in a state where an advantageous establishment condition is established.

<Regarding game machines that can set multiple levels of settings>
It may be implemented as a pachinko machine in which a plurality of combinations of probabilities (commonly referred to as settings) relating to the jackpot lottery are provided in multiple stages, and the settings can be changed on the gaming parlor side.

In addition, as a pachinko machine with multiple stages of settings, the combination of jackpot probability (a combination of the jackpot probability in the low probability state and the jackpot probability in the variable probability state) can be set in multiple stages (for example, 6 stages) can be set as a representative example, but is not limited to this. In place of or in addition to combinations of jackpot probabilities, for example, a pachinko machine capable of varying the ratio of each jackpot pattern (each jackpot type) determined in the event of a jackpot according to settings. may That is, depending on the setting, the rate at which a jackpot type advantageous to the player is determined may be varied, or the rate at which a jackpot type disadvantageous to the player is determined may be varied. More specifically, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot with a large number of rounds (eg, 16 rounds) is varied according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of rounds (eg, 2 rounds) is determined. A configuration may be adopted in which the degree of advantage for each setting can be varied by varying the ratio of each setting according to the setting. In addition, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot with a large number of times of time reduction (for example, 100 times) after the end of the jackpot is varied according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of times of time reduction (for example, 0 times) may be varied according to the setting. Furthermore, after the end of the jackpot, the rate at which the jackpot that transitions to (or easily transitions to) an advantageous game state (eg, variable probability state) is determined can be changed according to settings, or a disadvantageous game state (eg, normal state) can be set. ) (or easily shifted) may be changed according to the setting. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which provides a big-hit classification in which the ratio determined only by specific setting increases significantly (almost never determined by other settings). Specifically, for example, six settings from 1 to 6 can be set, and setting 6 is the most advantageous setting. In setting 6, when a jackpot is won, a jackpot of 6 rounds is determined at a rate of 2%, while in other settings, a jackpot of 6 rounds is determined only at a rate of 0.01%. may be configured. By constructing in this way, when the big win ends in 6 rounds, the possibility that the setting is the most advantageous setting 6 is extremely high, so that the player is made to play the game paying attention to the number of rounds of the big win. be able to. Alternatively or in addition, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type in which 66 times of time saving is given after the jackpot ends may be higher than other settings. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game by paying attention to the number of times the time saving state ends. Alternatively, or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which the jackpot (or accessories inside the jackpot, etc.) operates in an operation pattern different from other jackpot types during execution of the jackpot game. It may be configured such that the jackpot type is easily determined by a specific setting (the rate of determination is increased). In addition, in the case of varying the combination of the probability of the big win according to the setting, in the low probability state, the setting is more advantageous to the player, the higher the probability of the big win, while in the variable probability state, the setting is disadvantageous to the player. It is good also as a structure which makes a jackpot probability high so that it is. This configuration is particularly of the type that tends to increase the number of balls held as the number of special symbol lotteries increases (the number of prize balls paid out tends to be greater than the number of game balls fired), especially in the variable probability state. Effective in game machines. More specifically, for example, it is a configuration that continues until the next big hit is won in the variable probability state, and by applying it to a game machine of the type that becomes a small hit with a high probability in the variable probability state, the high setting advantage You can increase your sexuality. That is, if the probability of winning a big win in the variable probability state is low, the number of lottery times until the next big win tends to increase, so the chances of getting a small win and winning balls also increase. Therefore, when the variable probability state occurs, it becomes easier for the player to win more prize balls until the next big win, which is advantageous for the player.

In addition, in a pachinko machine having multiple stages of set values, by changing the set set values, the probability of winning (big win, small win, etc.) by a special symbol lottery can be changed. The configuration may be used, for example, the first game state (low probability state of special symbols) in which the first probability is set as the probability of winning in the special symbol lottery, and the probability of winning is higher than the first probability. A gaming machine capable of setting a second game state in which a high second probability is set (high probability state of special symbols), and a specific period as a period in which the second game state continues, for example, a special symbol lottery When the period until the number of executions reaches a predetermined number of times or the period until winning a predetermined end lottery (so-called drop lottery) is set, the length of the specific period is set according to the set value. It may be configured to be different, for example, the second game state continues when a set value that is advantageous to the player is set rather than when a set value that is disadvantageous to the player is set. It may be configured such that the period is likely to be longer.

By configuring in this way, even if the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is not changed according to the set value, the length of the second game state continues can be varied to achieve the set value. Accordingly, it is possible to vary the frequency of winning by the special symbol lottery.

In the above example, in a pachinko machine provided with set values in a plurality of stages, set values that are advantageous to the player and set values that are disadvantageous to the player can be set regardless of the game situation. Although shown, without being limited to this, various game states set in the pachinko machine 10 (for example, among a plurality of types of game states set by a combination of a special symbol probability state and a normal symbol probability state, A setting that is advantageous to the player in at least one of the game situation in which a specific game state is set, the game situation in which a big winning game is executed, and the game situation in which a small winning game is executed. A value and a setting value that is disadvantageous to the player may be configured to be settable, and when a specific setting value is set, a predetermined setting value other than the specific setting value is set. It is more advantageous for the player in a specific game situation than when a specific setting value is set, and when a predetermined setting value other than a specific setting value is set, it is more advantageous than when a specific setting value is set. The contents of the game set corresponding to each setting value may be defined so as to be advantageous to the player in a predetermined game situation other than the game situation.

By configuring in this way, absolute advantages and disadvantages are eliminated with respect to the set values, and it is possible to switch the relative advantage of each set value according to the game situation to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game regardless of what setting values are set.

In addition, it is possible to allow a player who has grasped the set set values to play while expecting a game in a game situation in which the set set values are relatively more advantageous than other set values. can. In other words, it is possible to set a different game situation as the game situation desired by the player according to the set value. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that does not cause the player to quickly become bored.

In the above-described example, the configuration aimed at varying the degree of advantage of the player according to the set value has been described, but the configuration is such that multiple levels of set values are provided for other purposes. For example, without changing the degree of advantage to the player, the game process until the privilege corresponding to the degree of advantage is given to the player may be configured to differ according to the set value. For example, in a pachinko machine 10 having different jackpot probabilities of special symbols according to set values, the probability (expectation) of winning a jackpot within a predetermined period does not differ (not greatly differ) depending on the set values. In addition, the length of the predetermined period may be varied according to the set value, for example, when the set value "1" is set, during the specific period until the special symbol lottery is executed 10 times, A game in which the probability of winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery is 1/10 (probability of winning a jackpot during a specific period is about 65%) can be executed, and when a set value "6" is set, a special symbol is executed. A game in which the probability of winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery is 1/9 (probability of winning a jackpot during a specific period is about 65%) can be executed during a specified period until the lottery is executed 9 times. good.

By configuring in this way, even if the special symbol lottery jackpot probability is changed according to each set value, it is possible to change only the game content without significantly changing the degree of advantage to the player. becomes. Therefore, the player can be allowed to play various games.

Moreover, it is preferable to configure (change) the above-described set values in multiple stages as part of the processing (initial setting processing) based on power-on of the pachinko machine. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting values from being changed while the pachinko machine is powered on. Unfair play can be made difficult.

It should be noted that other timing may be used as the timing at which the set value can be set (changed). The value obtained by subtracting the number of balls used in the game) is changed from the currently set value to a different set value (a set value that is disadvantageous to the player) based on the payout exceeding the upper limit number, Based on the fact that the number of balls paid out (the number of balls paid out from the pachinko machine minus the number of balls used in the game on the pachinko machine) did not exceed the minimum number, It may be configured to change to a different set value (a set value that is advantageous to the player). By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the execution of a game that is excessively advantageous or disadvantageous to the player.

In each of the above embodiments, each time the value (AN) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b in the main controller 110 is updated (that is, each time it increases or decreases), the reserved ball number command is issued. Although the case of transmitting from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (AN) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203 b in the main controller 110 increases, the main controller 110 transmits the reserved number command to the sound lamp controller 113 . In addition, in the voice lamp control device 113, when receiving the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, it is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 by one. As a result, the number of times master controller 110 transmits a hold number command to audible lamp controller 113 and the number of times audible lamp controller 113 receives a hold number command can be reduced. The control load of the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the number of winnings in the first ball entrance 64 is suspended up to four times, and the passage through the through gate 67 is suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of suspended balls is limited to this. However, the number of times may be set to 3 times or less or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of pending balls for variable display based on the winning to the first ball entrance 64 is displayed numerically in a part of the third pattern display device 81, or the area divided into four is displayed by the number of pending balls. It may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light-emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first pattern display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light-emitting member. can be configured to

Further, as shown in each of the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertically scrolling the pattern as identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. The pattern may be moved and displayed in the vertical direction or along a predetermined path such as an AL shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. It also includes the production display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol. Further, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the display mode of the dynamic display of the third symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol and the display mode of the dynamic display of the decorative symbol for indicating the lottery result of the normal symbol. For example, each display mode may be set using common image data that the display control device 114 has.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the third symbol display for showing the lottery result of each symbol to the player is performed by one display means (third symbol display device 81), but other configurations are used. For example, among the third symbols, different display means may be provided for displaying the main symbol to be displayed in an emphasized manner to the player and for displaying the sub-symbols. Also, as the configuration of the display means, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the target area (game area) of the game board 13 is configured to be different according to the game state, but the game state (time saving) that is advantageous to the player is not limited to this. state) and a game state (normal state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the time-saving state, a left-handed game aiming at the left area of the game board 13 may be executed. . Also, a left-handed game may be executed during the time saving state, and a right-handed game may be executed during the normal state.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the frame button 22 is used as the operation means that can be operated by the player. may be used, and an operation means configured in a lever shape that can determine whether the player has operated it by tilting it left or right or front and back, or can determine whether it has been operated by the player touching or approaching it. A touch sensor type operating means, or a wireless operating means that can determine that an operation has been performed by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like may be used. In addition, the frame button 22 is electrically connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and the frame button 22 is used to change the performance mode of the performance executed by the pachinko machine 10 based on the player's operation. However, it is only necessary to be able to change the effect mode of various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 based on the player's operation of the frame button 22. For example, the frame button 22 is displayed. It may be electrically connected to the control device 114, or an output signal from the operation means (the frame button 22) can be input, and the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113, the sound output device 226, the lamp display A control device capable of generating an effect setting signal that can be output to the device 227 may be provided. By configuring in this way, even when a plurality of operation means for effect are provided, the output signals (operation signals) output from the operation means for effect can be centrally managed. It is possible to smoothly set the effect mode for the player's operation to the means.

Distribution (percentage) of jackpot types, number of time reductions and variable numbers of times after the jackpot (ASAT number), probability of jackpots and small hits, probability of winning normal patterns, number of prize balls for winning in each winning slot, and variable limit Numerical values (probabilities) relating to game specifications such as the number of times are not limited to the numerical values in the above embodiments, and can be changed arbitrarily without changing the gist of the embodiments. By increasing the ratio of advantageous jackpot types, increasing the number of times of time saving and ASAT, increasing the probability of jackpots and small hits, increasing the number of prize balls, and increasing the number of variable limits It is possible to increase the degree of advantage of the person. Also, on the contrary, reduce the ratio of advantageous jackpot types, reduce the number of times of time saving and ASAT, reduce the probability of big hits and small hits, reduce the number of prize balls, and reduce the number of variable limits. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area after the big winning pattern is displayed. Also, a pachinko machine having a winning device having a special area such as an AV zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. In addition, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine in which a plurality of combinations of probabilities (commonly referred to as settings) relating to the jackpot lottery are provided, and the settings can be changed on the gaming parlor side. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined may be implemented.

In addition, as a pachinko machine with multiple stages of settings, the combination of jackpot probability (a combination of the jackpot probability in the low probability state and the jackpot probability in the variable probability state) can be set in multiple stages (for example, 6 stages) can be set as a representative example, but is not limited to this. In place of or in addition to combinations of jackpot probabilities, for example, a pachinko machine capable of varying the ratio of each jackpot pattern (each jackpot type) determined in the event of a jackpot according to settings. may That is, depending on the setting, the rate at which a jackpot type advantageous to the player is determined may be varied, or the rate at which a jackpot type disadvantageous to the player is determined may be varied. More specifically, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot with a large number of rounds (eg, 16 rounds) is varied according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of rounds (eg, 2 rounds) is determined. A configuration may be adopted in which the degree of advantage for each setting can be varied by varying the ratio of each setting according to the setting. In addition, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot with a large number of times of time reduction (for example, 100 times) after the end of the jackpot is varied according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of times of time reduction (for example, 0 times) may be varied according to the setting. Furthermore, after the end of the jackpot, the rate at which the jackpot that transitions to (or easily transitions to) an advantageous game state (eg, variable probability state) is determined can be changed according to settings, or a disadvantageous game state (eg, normal state) can be set. ) (or easily shifted) may be changed according to the setting. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which provides a big-hit classification in which the ratio determined only by specific setting increases significantly (almost never determined by other settings). Specifically, for example, six settings from 1 to 6 can be set, and setting 6 is the most advantageous setting. In setting 6, when a jackpot is won, a jackpot of 6 rounds is determined at a rate of 2%, while in other settings, a jackpot of 6 rounds is determined only at a rate of 0.01%. may be configured. By constructing in this way, when the big win ends in 6 rounds, the possibility that the setting is the most advantageous setting 6 is extremely high, so that the player is made to play the game paying attention to the number of rounds of the big win. be able to. Alternatively or in addition, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type in which 66 times of time saving is given after the jackpot ends may be higher than other settings. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game while paying attention to the number of times the time saving state ends. Alternatively, or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which the jackpot (or accessories inside the jackpot, etc.) operates in an operation pattern different from other jackpot types during execution of the jackpot game. It may be configured such that the jackpot type is easily determined by a specific setting (the rate of determination is increased). In addition, in the case of varying the combination of the probability of a big win according to the setting, in the low probability state, the higher the probability of the big win, the more advantageous the setting is for the player, while in the variable probability state, the setting is disadvantageous to the player. It is good also as a structure which makes a jackpot probability high so that it is. This configuration is particularly of the type in which, in the variable probability state, it is easier to increase the number of balls held as the number of special symbol lotteries increases (the number of prize balls paid out tends to be greater than the number of game balls fired). Effective in gaming machines. More specifically, for example, it is a configuration that continues until the next big hit is won in the variable probability state, and by applying it to a game machine of a type that becomes a small hit with a high probability in the variable probability state, the high setting advantage You can increase your sexuality. That is, if the probability of winning a big win in the variable probability state is low, the number of lottery times until the next big win tends to increase, so the chances of getting a small win and winning balls also increase. Therefore, when the probability variable state occurs, it becomes easier for the player to win more prize balls until the next big win, which is advantageous for the player.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 that can be set in multiple stages, the type of the variation pattern selection table 202b that is referred to when selecting the variation pattern by the main controller 110 based on the set value that has been set It is made different, the type of the variation pattern selection table 222a referred to when selecting the variation pattern (variation effect) of the third symbol in the sound lamp control device 113 is different, or the detailed effect executed as the variation effect It is preferable to configure so that the types of various selection tables referred to when selecting a mode are made different. By configuring in this way, it is possible to predict the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10 according to the content of the variable performance to be executed, so that the variable performance that the player is interested in is executed. be able to.

In addition, when the data table referred to when selecting the effect mode of the operation effect is changed based on the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10, the set setting is used as the effect mode of the operation effect. The effect mode of "suggest setting" for suggesting a value is defined so that the selection ratio is the same in each data table used for each setting value, and the effect mode of "suggest setting" is executed. It is preferable to configure the content of the operation presentation to be different according to each set value, and to vary the selection ratio of other presentation modes according to the set value. By configuring in this way, when the operation effect of "setting suggestion" directly suggesting the setting value is executed, the content of the effect is displayed, and when the other operation effect is executed, each effect mode is displayed. Since it is possible to predict the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10 by comprehensively grasping the selection ratio of the pachinko machine 10, the player is interested in various operation effects to be executed. be able to.

Furthermore, as described above, since the selection ratio of each effect mode in the operation effect is configured to vary according to the set game state, In a pachinko machine 10 in which set values can be set in six stages up to setting "6" which is advantageous to a player, the first game is set to the settings "1" to "3" and is advantageous to the player. The selection ratio of the operation effect selected when the state (variable probability state) is set, the setting "4" to "6" are set, and the second game state is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state The pachinko machine 10 having setting values disadvantageous to the player is played by making the selection ratio of the operation presentation to be selected when the 2-game state (time-saving state) is set to be the same. The player can be made to think that the setting value that is advantageous to the player is set.

In this way, the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10 and other game situations (lottery result of jackpot, set game state, selected variation pattern (variation time)) By configuring the selection ratio to be variable, it is possible to prevent the setting values set in the pachinko machine 10 from being easily discriminated by the player.

In slot machines, for example, when a coin is inserted to determine a valid symbol line, the symbol is changed by operating an operation lever, and the symbol is stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

All or part of each of the above-described embodiments may be combined.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the game machine of the present invention are shown.

<Points where the sphere passing through the path constructing means blinds the passed means>
A path construction means configured to allow a game ball to flow down, and a passed means configured to allow a game ball that has flowed down the path construction means to pass through, wherein the path construction means is configured to allow the game ball to pass through the path construction means. Displaceable means that can be arranged at a position overlapping at least a part of the first game ball on the upstream side of the passage means and in front of the first game ball flowing down the path construction means is characterized. A game machine AA1 to play.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a big winning component 300 capable of constructing a plurality of types of flow-down paths of game balls directed to a ball detection hole 431, and the vicinity of the ball detection hole 431 is configured by a decorative plate 302 to make it difficult to recognize. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-185021). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the decorative plate 302 makes it difficult to recognize the ball detection hole 431 at all times, it is possible to confirm the entry of the ball into the ball detection hole 431 and continue or stop the shooting of the game ball. There was a possibility that the player could feel dissatisfied with the game mode of playing. In other words, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in the portion related to the shooting operation of the game ball.

On the other hand, according to the game machine AA1, since the means for reducing the visibility of the first game ball in the path construction means is the predetermined displaceable means, it is possible to construct a state in which the first game ball is easily visible. be done. Therefore, in a state in which the first game ball is easily visible, it is easy to determine whether the shooting operation of the game ball should be continued or stopped by confirming the flow of the first game ball. Relevant parts can be improved.

In addition, the mode of the predetermined displaceable means is not limited at all. For example, another game ball may be used, or a decorative member configured to be displaceable between the downflow path of the game ball and the glass unit may be used.

In addition, the aspect of the means to be passed is not limited at all. For example, it may be an opening that constitutes a specific area, a ball entrance (for example, a starting hole) related to a lottery of patterns, a prize ball hole related to the payout of prize balls, or other items through which game balls can pass. means is also good.

In the game machine AA1, the displaceable means is a second game ball that flows down the upstream side of the first game ball.

According to the game machine AA2, in addition to the effects of the game machine AA1, the visibility of the first game ball can be changed by using the game ball guided toward the means to be passed. Material cost and design cost can be reduced as compared with the case of preparing other decorative members.

A gaming machine AA3 in the gaming machine AA2, characterized in that the path forming means comprises a front-rear direction path formed with a front-rear width length capable of arranging the second game ball on the front side of the first game ball. .

According to the gaming machine AA3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AA2, the front-rear direction path is configured so that the second game ball can be arranged on the front side of the first game ball. At least part of the first game ball can be hidden by the second game ball.

In the game machine AA3, the forward-backward direction path is defined as the second game ball when the first game ball and the second game ball flow down the path construction means at a shooting interval set in the shooting device. A game machine AA4 characterized in that a game ball is configured to hide at least part of the first game ball.

According to the game machine AA4, in addition to the effects of the game machine AA3, when a plurality of game balls flow down the path construction means while maintaining the firing interval, it is difficult to recognize the first game ball as the second game ball. It is possible to achieve the effect of This makes it possible to create a situation that is difficult to recognize even in normal times.

In the game machine AA3 or AA4, the game machine AA5 is characterized in that the front-side component of the front-back direction path is arranged closer to the center of the game area than the back-side component.

According to the gaming machine AA5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AA3 or AA4, the back-and-forth direction path can be configured as a path having an inclination along the line of sight of the player who sees the means to be passed. is hidden behind the second game ball. That is, the blindfold effect can be improved.

In the gaming machine AA5, the gaming machine AA6 is characterized in that the front side component is arranged on the line of sight of the player who sees the means to be passed.

According to the gaming machine AA6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AA5, a similar blinding effect is produced regardless of the length of the interval between the first game ball and the second game ball arranged in the forward-backward direction path. be able to.

That is, normally, it is considered that the closer the first game ball and the second game ball are, the more the blindfold effect can be improved. When the number of game balls is arranged, the influence of the length of the interval can be eliminated.

In any one of the game machines AA2 to AA6, the path construction means includes a front-rear direction path formed with a front-rear width length that allows the second game ball to be arranged on the front side of the first game ball, and a back-and-forth direction path. A gaming machine AA7 characterized by comprising a left-right direction path formed with a left-right width that allows a game ball to flow down in the left-right direction on the upstream side of the path.

According to the gaming machine AA7, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines AA2 to AA6, the player's line of sight can be blocked by the game balls flowing down the left-right direction path, so that the player can use the means to be passed. On the other hand, the blindfold effect can be produced not only when the passed means is visually recognized with a line of sight that does not shift left and right, but also when the line of sight shifts left and right and looks into the means. In other words, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the manner in which the ball enters the passed means regardless of the direction of the player's line of sight (a blinding effect can be produced in all directions).

This action is remarkably produced by sealing the left and right sides of the flow path extending in the front-rear direction with a wall portion. That is, in a configuration in which one of the left and right sides is closed by the wall, the wall serves as a blindfold on the left and right sides, so that it is easy to construct a state in which the passing means is not visible.

In any one of the gaming machines AA1 to AA7, the path constructing means includes a first flow-down path through which game balls pass through the passed means in a first mode, and a second flow path through which game balls pass in a second mode. and a flow-down route of the first game ball, regardless of which flow-down route of the route configuration means, at least a part of which is covered by the predetermined displaceable means and can be visually recognized A gaming machine AA8 characterized by being configured as follows.

According to the game machine AA8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines AA1 to AA7, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the flowing state of the game ball flowing down the path construction means regardless of whether or not the passing means has passed. , it is possible to improve the attention to the game ball flowing down the path construction means.

Note that the first mode and the second mode are not limited at all. For example, a mode in which the ball flows in a different direction, or a mode in which the detection sensor through which the ball passes may be different.

In any one of the game machines AA1 to AA8, branching means for dividing the flowing direction of the game ball on the upstream side of the passing means is provided, the branching means comprises switching means for switching the flowing direction of the received game ball, The game machine AA9 is characterized in that the path constructing means is configured such that the game balls whose flowing paths are divided by the branching means, and the game balls that have reached the switching means flow down the same path for a predetermined section.

According to the game machine AA9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines AA1 to AA8, the game ball that reaches the switching means flows down the same route for a predetermined section, so the game ball that reaches the switching means immediately afterward. Comprehension of the flow down of the game ball can be made more difficult than in the case of the flow mode corresponding to the flow path of . As a result, the player's attention to the game ball can be improved.

In the game machine AA9, the path construction means includes a projecting part projecting toward the flowing game ball, and the projecting part acts on the branching of the game ball in the branching means. Machine AA10.

According to the gaming machine AA10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AA9, the projecting portion can act to branch the game ball. durability can be improved.

In the gaming machine AA10, the projecting portion includes a first projecting portion extending in a predetermined direction and a second projecting portion extending in a direction different from the first projecting portion. and a projection amount of the second projecting portion are different from each other.

According to the gaming machine AA11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AA10, the influence of the first projecting portion on the game ball and the influence of the second projecting portion on the game ball are determined according to the flow of the game ball. can be different. As a result, while using the fixed first projecting portion and the second projecting portion, it is possible to cause the action of branching the game ball according to a predetermined rule according to the flow-down mode of the game ball.

<Points where the sphere passing through the path constructing means appeals to the introduction to the passed means>
A path configuring means configured to allow a game ball to flow down, and a passed means configured to allow a game ball that has flowed down the path configuring means to pass through, and the path configuring means is more likely than the passed means to pass. A gaming machine AB1 comprising a predetermined portion forming an upstream side, the predetermined portion being arranged on a more conspicuous side than said means to be passed and capable of guiding a game ball to said means to be passed.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a big winning component 300 capable of forming a plurality of types of flow-down paths of game balls toward a ball detection hole 431, and the vicinity of the ball detection hole 431 is configured by a decorative plate 302 so that it is difficult to recognize. Depending on the state of the winning part 300, there are gaming machines in which the game ball falls off the decorative plate 302 or is hidden behind the decorative plate 302 (for example, special See Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-185021). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, a game ball with good visibility that falls off the decorative plate 302 is configured to rather deviate from the ball detection hole 431 and flow down, and is hidden behind the decorative plate 302. Since part of the falling game ball is guided to the ball detection hole 431, the visibility of the game ball does not correspond to the amount of profit that the player can obtain, so the focus is on the game ball. There is a possibility that the player will feel dissatisfied because it is likely to be wasted. That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of making the manner in which the game ball flows after attracting attention worthy of attention.

On the other hand, according to the game machine AB1, since the game ball flowing down the predetermined portion arranged on the conspicuous side is configured to be guided to the means to be passed, the degree of improvement in attention to the game ball and It can be associated with the game ball passing through the means to be passed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the possibility that the game ball that has flowed down the predetermined portion will pass through the means to be passed.

In addition, by configuring in this way, it is possible to easily guide the player's line of sight with the game ball flowing down the predetermined part, and the possibility of the player missing that the game ball is heading toward the means to be passed is reduced. be able to.

In addition, the aspect of the means to be passed is not limited at all. For example, it may be an opening that constitutes a specific area, a ball entrance (for example, a starting hole) related to a lottery of patterns, a prize ball hole related to the payout of prize balls, or other items through which game balls can pass. means is also good.

In addition, the aspect of the conspicuous side is not limited at all. For example, it may be on the side of the display device that is easy to catch the player's eye, the side of the winning opening, the side of the starting opening, the front side (front side) that is easy for the player to visually recognize, or the side of the specific ball entrance. The stage (mainly, the lower edge of the frame formed by the center frame where game balls temporarily stay) is a place where the probability of entering a ball is remarkably high, and it is directly connected to winning a big hit. The V winning opening side, the ball lending device side as the operation target, the effect operation button side, the range where the game ball that deviates from the entrance ball flowing down (the range where the player is frustrated and follows with his eyes) side, , the bright side or the other side may be used for switching between light and dark in the light emitting means. In addition, the inconspicuous side may be intentionally formed so as to be relatively conspicuous.

In the gaming machine AB1, the path configuration means includes a second predetermined portion that makes a game ball that has entered the path configuration means less conspicuous than when the game ball entered the path configuration means, and the predetermined portion is more conspicuous than the second predetermined portion. The gaming machine AB2 is characterized by being arranged on the conspicuous side.

According to the gaming machine AB2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AB1, before the game ball that entered the path configuring means flows down the predetermined portion, by reducing the attention force in the second predetermined portion, it flows down the predetermined portion. It is possible to emphasize the attention of the game ball when playing.

A gaming machine AB3, in the gaming machine AB1 or AB2, characterized in that the predetermined portion comprises sections in which game balls flow at different velocities.

According to the game machine AB3, in addition to the effect of the game machine AB1 or AB2, the effect of attracting the player's line of sight can be improved compared to the case where there is no difference in the flow speed of the game balls.

The game machine AB3 is characterized in that the second flow speed of the game ball flowing down the second predetermined portion is faster than the first flow speed of the game ball flowing down the predetermined portion. Gaming machine AB4.

According to the gaming machine AB4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AB3, it is possible to shorten the period until the game ball entering the path forming means reaches the predetermined portion.

A gaming machine AB5 in any one of the gaming machines AB1 to AB4, wherein the predetermined portion includes a section in which the game ball is displaced at different speeds when viewed from a predetermined direction.

According to the game machine AB5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines AB1 to AB4, regardless of the actual flow speed of the game ball, a section in which the apparent displacement speed of the game ball when viewed in a predetermined direction is different. Therefore, by reducing the displacement speed of the game ball when viewed in a predetermined direction at any predetermined location, the player's line of sight can be easily focused on the predetermined location and the player's eyes can be diverted from other portions. .

It should be noted that the manner in which the displacement speed of the apparent game ball is varied is not limited at all. For example, the case of displacement on a straight line arranged on a plane perpendicular to the front-rear direction in a front view may be different from the case of displacement on a straight line having a front-back direction component. The difference may be in the case of curvilinear or meandering displacement, or other differences.

In any one of the game machines AB1 to AB5, an introducing means configured to allow game balls to be introduced into the path configuring means is provided, and the predetermined portion is arranged outside the introducing means when viewed from a predetermined direction. Characterized game machine AB6.

According to the game machine AB6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines AB1 to AB5, the visibility of the introduction means can be ensured. Therefore, it is possible to ensure both the visibility of the introducing means and the improvement of the attention of the game ball which is highly likely to pass through the passing means.

Any one of the game machines AB1 to AB6 is characterized by comprising an avoidance means configured so that the game ball on the front side of the path construction means flows down to avoid the line of sight directed to the passed means or the predetermined part. Gaming machine AB7.

According to the gaming machine AB7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AB1 to AB6, the game ball is configured to flow down on the front side of the path configuring means, and the line of sight of the downflow path of the game ball directed to the passing means. Since the avoidance means is provided for avoiding the above, it is possible to ensure both the size of the game area and the visibility of the game ball toward the means to be passed.

It should be noted that the manner in which the game ball is flowed under the influence of the avoidance means is not limited at all. For example, the game ball may flow down while avoiding the front position of the means to be passed, or may flow down while avoiding the straight line connecting the means to be passed and the position of the player's eyes, or the game ball may flow toward the means to be passed. With the last position that the player can see as a reference, the ball may flow down avoiding the front position of that position, or it may flow down avoiding the straight line connecting the above-mentioned final position and the position of the player's eyes. Good, or something else.

In the gaming machine AB7, the path configuration means includes acceptance state changing means configured to be capable of changing between a receiving state in which the falling game balls can be received and a non-receiving state in which the falling game balls cannot be received, and the receiving state changing means is a gaming machine AB8, characterized in that, in the state change from the receiving state to the non-receiving state, a game ball that has reached the receiving state changing means in the receiving state can be guided to the side of the path forming means. .

According to the game machine AB8, in addition to the effect of the game machine AB7, the game ball that flows down after reaching the receiving state changing means so as to be bridged can be prevented from blocking the line of sight directed to the passed means. can be done.

The gaming machine AB7 or AB8 is provided with partitioning means disposed above the passing means in a front view and partitioning a game area, and the partitioning means is configured to allow game balls to flow down the left and right outer sides. Characterized game machine AB9.

According to the game machine AB9, in addition to the effects of the game machine AB7 or AB8, the partitioning means can prevent the game ball from flowing down the front position of the means to be passed, so that the field of view toward the means to be passed can be improved. can be easily secured.

In addition, as a mode of a division means, it is not limited at all. For example, it may be a plate-like portion that constitutes a flow-down surface of a game ball, or it may be a ball entrance constituting means that allows a game ball to enter. Further, the dividing means may be a means having a fixed shape (appearance) or a means having a variable shape (appearance).

In the gaming machine AB9, the path configuring means includes a receiving state changing means capable of changing the state between a receiving state in which the falling game balls can be received and a non-receiving state in which the falling game balls cannot be received. The game machine AB10 is characterized in that the portion on the side of the state changing means is configured to easily guide a game ball to the side of the receiving state changing means.

According to the game machine AB10, in addition to the effects of the game machine AB9, it is possible to configure such that game balls in the process of being received by the receiving state changing means are pushed into the receiving state changing means by the dividing means. As a result, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball slipping sideways while being received deviates from the receiving state changing means and falls on the front side of the passed means.

For example, as the receiving state changing means, a special prize winning device having an opening and closing plate that tilts and displaces on a lateral axis is assumed, and as the partitioning means, the first prize winning port arranged above the special prize winning port of the special prize winning device is assumed. . A game ball that reaches the special winning slot just before the opening/closing plate closes is often sandwiched between the rotating tip of the opening/closing plate and the edge of the opening covered by the opening/closing plate, and the formation direction of the edge ( sideways in the direction of the rotation axis of the opening/closing plate).

Since the game ball after skidding can reach any position in the formation range of the turning tip of the opening/closing plate, when at least a part of the opening/closing plate is arranged above the means to be passed, the game ball skids. There is a possibility that the subsequent game ball will pass the front position of the means to be passed after falling to the front side, and the game ball after skidding should not be dropped to the front side.

When it is not possible to prevent the game ball from falling to the front side after skidding, it is necessary to arrange the opening/closing plate so as to avoid the position of the passing means in the front view, so that the degree of freedom in designing the opening/closing plate is reduced. become.

On the other hand, according to the game machine AB10, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball from falling to the front side of the opening/closing plate after skidding, thereby improving the degree of freedom in designing the opening/closing plate.

In any one of the game machines AB7 to AB10, the game balls flowing down the path constructing means and the game balls flowing down the front side of the path constructing means are configured to flow down in a similar manner. Gaming machine AB11.

According to the game machine AB11, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines AB7 to AB10, the game ball that may flow down the path configuration means and pass through the means to be passed, and the front side of the path configuration means By making it difficult to distinguish game balls that do not pass through the passing means, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish the number of game balls that flow down the path forming means.

In other words, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish from the game balls flowing down near the path construction means whether the game balls are likely to enter the path construction means or difficult to enter.

The game machine AB12 is characterized in that in any one of the game machines AB1 to AB11, the game machine AB12 is characterized by comprising light emitting means for emitting light from the rear side of the ball flowing down the predetermined portion.

According to the game machine AB12, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines AB1 to AB11, the front side of the ball flowing down the predetermined portion is reflected by light, and it is possible to easily avoid the ball becoming difficult to see.

<Points for securing the length of the path to the V-door in a space-saving manner>
Path construction means configured to allow game balls to flow down; Passed means configured to allow game balls flowing down the path construction means to pass through; and a first state in which game balls can flow down to the passed means. state switching means configured to be switchable between the first state and a second state different from the first state, wherein the path configuration means includes delay means for delaying the vertical displacement of the game ball, and the delay means A game machine AC1 is characterized in that it is configured so that a game ball can flow down toward the passing means.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a distributing part 75 configured to be movable left and right is arranged in a flow-down path of a game ball that enters the second big prize hole 12, and the distributing part 75 arranges the game ball. There is a game machine that is configured to be able to change the flow direction of (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-155538). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the short-term operation of the distribution unit 75 is essential to prevent erroneous winning in the specific area 73 and the ball being caught by the distribution unit 75. In some cases, the behavior of the segment 75 is felt as distrust, and the game cannot be continued without anxiety.

As an example of means for solving this problem, it is assumed that the length of the flow path from the second big prize opening 12 to the distribution section 75 is lengthened. For example, by changing the arrangement of the distribution part 75 from directly below the second big winning hole 12 to a position near the left and right central part of the game area (near the first big winning hole 10), from the second big winning hole 12 It is possible to secure a long channel length up to the distribution section 75 . As a result, it is considered that the possibility of erroneous winning in the specific area 73 can be reduced.

On the other hand, when this means is executed, it becomes necessary to secure the visibility of the game ball flowing-down path over a wide range from the second big winning hole 12 to the first big winning hole 10, and the game area can be freely designed within this range. degree is limited. In other words, there is a problem that the degree of freedom in designing the game area is restricted in a wide range in order to avoid erroneous winning in the specific area 73 .

In other words, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of avoiding erroneous entry of a game ball while maintaining a high degree of freedom in designing the game area.

On the other hand, according to the game machine AC1, since the path construction means is provided with the predetermined delay means, even when the vertical length of the path construction means in the front view is shortened to save space, the path construction means can be It is possible to secure a long time that elapses until the game ball hit passes through the means to be passed.

Therefore, the timing at which it is necessary to operate the state switching means in order to switch whether or not the game ball enters the passing means can be set to a predetermined time after the game ball enters the path forming means. False wins can be avoided without operating for a short period of time an opening/closing device for switching whether or not a ball can enter a constituent means. Therefore, it is possible to avoid giving the player the impression that the opening/closing means is operating hastily. As a result, it is possible to avoid erroneous entry of a game ball while maintaining a high degree of freedom in designing the game area.

Note that the form of the delay means is not limited at all. For example, there may be a mode in which a convex portion for deceleration is configured in the flow-down path, or a mode in which a predetermined flow-down path for causing the game ball to flow down along the flow-down path having a forward-backward direction component may be provided.

In the gaming machine AC1, the delay means has a plurality of predetermined flow-down paths, and among the predetermined flow-down paths, the flow-down path toward the front side is more likely to flow down than the flow-down path toward the back side. A game machine AC2 characterized in that it is configured so that the acceleration of the game machine AC2 increases.

According to the gaming machine AC2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AC1, it is possible to secure a longer period of time for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the predetermined flow path.

It should be noted that the cause of the difference in acceleration of the game ball is not limited at all. For example, the magnitude of the slope of the predetermined flow-down path with respect to the horizontal plane may be used, or the surface shape of the predetermined flow-down path on the game ball side may be designed.

In the gaming machine AC1 or AC2, the delay means has a plurality of predetermined flow-down routes, and among the predetermined flow-down routes, the flow-down route toward the front side is compared to the flow-down route that maintains the front-back position and flows down. A game machine AC3 characterized in that it is constructed so that the acceleration of a game ball flowing down is increased.

According to the gaming machine AC3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AC1 or AC2, it is possible to secure a longer period of time for the player to visually recognize the game balls flowing on the near side. As a result, it is possible to easily improve the player's attention to the game ball flowing down the predetermined flow path.

It should be noted that the cause of the difference in acceleration of the game ball is not limited at all. For example, the magnitude of the slope of the predetermined flow-down path with respect to the horizontal plane may be used, or the surface shape of the predetermined flow-down path on the game ball side may be designed.

In any one of the game machines AC1 to AC3, the delay means has a plurality of predetermined flow-down paths, and the predetermined flow-down paths are arranged in front of the means to be passed when viewed from a predetermined direction. A game machine AC4 characterized in that it is configured to pass through.

According to the game machine AC4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines AC1 to AC3, when the game ball is arranged at the front position, visibility in the vicinity of the means to be passed can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to improve attention to the range in the vicinity of the means to be passed.

A game machine AC5 is characterized in that, in the game machine AC4, a plurality of the front positions can be configured.

According to the gaming machine AC5, by arranging the game balls at a plurality of front positions, at least part of the game balls on the back side can be hidden by the game balls on the front side. Since the means to be passed is arranged on the rear side rather than the game balls on the back side, the field of view toward the means to be passed can be blocked by a plurality of game balls, and the visibility of the means to be passed can be reduced. .

In this case, when the ball entry interval of the game ball into the predetermined flow-down path is short, it is possible to construct a state in which the game ball is always placed at one of the front positions, so that the passing means is invisible. It becomes possible.

In any one of game machines AC1 to AC5, game machine AC6 is characterized in that the path configuring means is formed so as to be visually recognized in a swirling manner when viewed from above.

According to the game machine AC6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines AC1 to AC5, the vertical width required for arranging the path constructing means of the same length can be shortened.

In addition, since it is not necessary to reduce the thickness of the path wall compared to the case where the folded path is formed, the strength of the path can be improved, and compared to the folded path that is folded back at 180 degrees, the Possibility of clogging of balls or the like can be reduced.

In any one of game machines AC1 to AC6, game machine AC7 is characterized in that the path constructing means comprises a front-rear flow path portion extending in the front-rear direction.

According to the game machine AC7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines AC1 to AC6, the left-right width of the route forming means can be suppressed, so that the pair of left-right symmetrical route forming means can be configured with a suppressed left-right width. can be done.

Game machine AC8 is characterized in that, in any one of game machines AC1 to AC7, the passing means is arranged obliquely downward and rearward with respect to the ball receiving portion of the path forming means.

According to the game machine AC8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines AC1 to AC7, it is possible to make it easier to fit the passing means and the ball receiving portion of the path forming means within the field of view of the player viewed from the front side. .

In any one of game machines AC1 to AC8, the path configuring means includes first receiving means configured to be able to receive game balls, and means different from the first receiving means and configured to be able to receive game balls. and a second receiving means configured to change the profit obtained by the player depending on the manner in which the game balls are received by the first receiving means and the second receiving means. Machine AC9.

According to the game machine AC9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines AC1 to AC8, the first receiving means and the second receiving means are configured to be capable of receiving game balls at all times, and the first receiving means and Since the profit obtained by the player changes depending on the receiving mode of the game ball of the second receiving means, it is possible to improve the attention to the game ball.

It should be noted that the manner of receiving game balls is not limited at all. For example, it may be a mode in which game balls are accepted only by the first receiving means, a mode in which game balls are accepted by being limited to the second receiving means, or a predetermined number of game balls are accepted by the first receiving means and then second receiving means. A mode in which a predetermined number of pieces can be received in the means may be used. Further, it is also possible to adopt a mode in which the frequency of ball entry to each receiving means is different, or a mode in which ball entry positions are different.

In the gaming machine AC9, the change in the profit that the player can obtain depends on whether the game ball is accepted only by one of the first receiving means or the second receiving means, or by the first receiving means and the second receiving means. A game machine AC10 characterized in that it occurs depending on whether a game ball is received in both of the.

According to the gaming machine AC10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AC9, it is possible for the player to easily launch the game ball in a predetermined shooting mode by setting the size of the profit that the player can obtain. .

It should be noted that the profit that the player can obtain is not limited at all. For example, it may be the ease of recognizing the flowing game ball, or the profit related to the game obtained by the flowing game ball (payout of the prize ball, winning of the jackpot, change of the game state after the jackpot, The game state may be changed to a normal state (falling down, etc.).

A gaming machine AC11 in the gaming machine AC9 or AC10, wherein the path forming means is bilaterally symmetrical from the first receiving means and the second receiving means to the passed means.

According to the gaming machine AC11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AC9 or AC10, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player suffers a disadvantage regardless of whether the game ball is mainly shot from the left or right.

In any one of the game machines AC9 to AC11, the path configuring means comprises a receiving state changing means capable of changing the state between a receiving state in which the falling game balls can be received and a non-receiving state in which the flowing game balls cannot be received, The gaming machine AC12 is characterized in that the receiving state changes according to the shape of the receiving state changing means or the state changing state.

According to the game machine AC12, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines AC9 to AC11, the receiving mode changes depending on the shape of the receiving state changing means or the state change mode, so that the player's skill in shooting the game ball is enhanced. It is possible to reduce the influence of the skill level on the profit that the player can obtain.

A gaming machine AC13 characterized in that, in the gaming machine AC12, the mode of state change of said acceptance state changing means is composed of a plurality of types.

According to the gaming machine AC13, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AC12, even when the game ball is shot in a fixed shooting mode, the receiving mode of the game ball to the first receiving means and the second receiving means can be changed. As a result, it is possible to adjust the profit that the player can obtain from the mode of state change of the acceptance state changing means.

<Points regarding the opening and closing member that moves parallel to the flowing direction of the sphere>
a path constructing means configured to allow the game ball to flow down; a passed means configured to allow the game ball that has flowed down the path configuring means to pass through; an introduction state in which the game ball can be introduced into the path configuring means; a state switching means configured to be able to change the state between a non-introduction state in which a game ball cannot be introduced into the path configuration means, and a state switching means configured such that the direction of displacement caused by the state change is the direction in which the game ball flows down. A gaming machine XAA1 characterized in that it is configured along a direction.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes a big winning component 300 capable of forming a plurality of types of flow-down paths for game balls toward ball detection holes 431 (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-185021). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the downward direction of the game ball and the opening/closing direction of the opening/closing plate of the big winning part 300 are substantially perpendicular, and the opening/closing operation is completed without being involved in the rolling of the game ball. Therefore, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in the role of the opening/closing plate (state switching means).

On the other hand, according to the game machine XAA1, since the direction of displacement of the state switching means is configured to be along the flowing direction of the game ball, the state is changed while the game ball is in proximity to or in contact with the state switching means. By causing the displacement of the switching means, it is possible to affect to change the rolling mode of the game ball. This makes it possible to improve the role of the state switching means.

For example, when the game ball is flowing down to the left, by sliding the state switching means to the right while the game ball is on top, Since a rotating load is applied, the game ball can be accelerated.

Conversely, when the game ball is flowing down to the left, the state switching means is slid to the left while the game ball is on top of it, thereby rolling and rotating the game ball. Since a load for rotating in the opposite direction is applied, the rotation of the game ball can be delayed.

Further, when the state switching means slides so as to skim the lower end of the rolling game ball, a load having not only the rolling direction of the game ball but also a component in the direction orthogonal to the rolling direction is applied to the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to cause a complicated and irregular change in the flow of the game ball.

Due to the effect on the flow of the game ball, the flow of the ball on the state switching means can be changed variously during the opening and closing operation of the state switching means, so that the player who visually recognizes the game ball gets bored. You can concentrate on the game without worrying about it.

Also, the positional relationship between the opening/closing operation of the state switching means and the game ball is not limited at all. For example, it may be arranged to rub against the side of the game ball, or may be arranged to collide against the game ball in the flowing direction.

In the state switching means displaced in a manner of colliding with the game ball, the direction of the closing operation is not limited at all. For example, the closing operation may be performed in the direction opposite to the flowing direction of the game ball so that the game ball can be bounced back, or the closing operation may be performed in the forward direction of the flowing direction of the game ball, and the subsequent introduction of the game ball. can be regulated with less resistance.

In the game machine XAA1, the state change of the state switching means can be executed while the state switching means and the game ball are in contact with each other.

According to the gaming machine XAA2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine XAA1, the state change of the state switching means can cause the game ball to rotate.

In the game machine XAA1 or XAA2, the state switching means comprises change means for changing the direction of the load in a direction intersecting with the direction of displacement.

According to the game machine XAA3, in addition to the effects of the game machine XAA1 or XAA2, the load applied from the game ball during the displacement of the state switching means can be released, and the load applied to the state switching means can be reduced. .

<Points regarding the opening/closing member that allows the ball to flow in the first direction when open and in the second direction when closed>
A path constructing means configured to allow the game ball to flow down; a passed means configured to allow the game ball flowing down the path configuring means to pass through; an introduction state in which the game ball can be introduced to the passed means; a state switching means configured to be able to change between a non-introduction state in which a game ball cannot be introduced into the passing means and a non-introduction state, wherein the state switching means can guide the game ball in the first direction in the introduction state. and a game ball can be guided in the second direction in the non-introduction state.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes a big winning component 300 capable of forming a plurality of types of flow-down paths for game balls toward ball detection holes 431 (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-185021). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the lower movable body 371 guides the game ball to the right when it protrudes forward, but when it retracts to the rear, it does not come into contact with the game ball and falls freely. I will not guide you. In other words, the lower movable body 371 does not affect the flow of the game ball. Therefore, in the state of retreating to the rear side, it is necessary to prepare a portion (frame portion, etc.) that guides the downflow of the game ball other than the lower movable body 371. There is a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of reducing the number of components (members).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine XAB1, the state switching means is configured to guide the game ball in different directions depending on whether it is in the introduced state or the non-introduced state. Since members can be eliminated, the number of required configurations (members) can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to diversify the flow direction of game balls in a limited space.

Note that the relationship between the first direction and the second direction is not limited at all. For example, the angle between directions may be an acute angle, a right angle, or an obtuse angle. For example, in the case of a right angle, the first direction may be set downward and the second direction may be set laterally with respect to the game ball flowing down along the front-rear direction. In this case, when viewed from the front, only a slight displacement of the game ball is recognized before being guided by the state switching means, while maximizing the difference in the direction after the guidance by the state switching means is started. can be achieved.

The arrangement of the guiding portion that causes the guiding action of the state switching means is not limited at all. For example, the guide portion may be arranged in a movable member provided in the state switching means, or the guide portion may be arranged in a non-movable portion around the state switching means, and the game ball is moved to the guide portion by the operation of the movable member. It may be configured such that it can be switched to a state of close proximity or easy contact.

When the guide part is arranged on the movable member, it is designed not only to provide guidance after the state switching between the introduced state and the non-introduced state is completed, but also to consider the influence on the game ball during the state switching operation. preferably.

For example, when the state switching means is provided with a movable member that is displaced in a direction opposite to the flowing direction of the game ball, a surface inclined to the flowing direction (plane, curved surface, etc.) is used rather than providing a planar wall portion orthogonal to the flowing direction. ), it is possible to easily avoid the situation where the load generated when the movable member collides with the game ball increases in the direction in which the game ball flows backward. This makes it easier to avoid backflow of game balls.

In the game machine XAB1, the state change of the state switching means is caused by displacement in a third direction, and the third direction is orthogonal to the first direction and the second direction. .

According to the gaming machine XAB2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine XAB1, it is possible to reduce the possibility of malfunction of the state switching means caused by the load given by the guided game balls.

In the gaming machine XAB1 or XAB2, the path construction means includes a pair of left and right paths, the state switching means includes a pair of guide portions capable of receiving game balls from the pair of left and right paths, and the pair of guides 2. A gaming machine XAB3, wherein the first direction and the second direction are configured symmetrically in the part.

According to the game machine XAB3, in addition to the effects of the game machine XAB1 or XAB2, it is possible to complicate the path along which game balls flow. In addition, since the first direction and the second direction of the pair of guide portions are symmetrical, the displacement received by the state switching means due to the load received by the pair of guide portions from the game ball is symmetrical. be able to.

As a result, for example, when substantially equal numbers of game balls enter a pair of left and right paths, it is possible to easily uniform the arrangement of the state switching means according to the load received by the guide portion from the game balls.

The gaming machine XAB4 in the gaming machine XAB3 is characterized in that the state switching means comprises an overhanging portion formed so as to overhang in a direction intersecting with the third direction.

According to the game machine XAB4, in addition to the effects of the game machine XAB3, the projecting portion can reduce the contact area with other members, and the displacement resistance of the state switching means can be reduced.

In the gaming machine XAB3 or XAB4, an abutting means configured to be capable of abutting in the introduced state or the non-introduced state of the state switching means is provided, and by abutting with the abutting means, the state switching means moves in the left-right direction. A gaming machine XAB5 characterized by being configured to be able to correct displacement.

According to the game machine XAB5, in addition to the effects of the game machine XAB3 or XAB4, the load from the game ball can be received from either the left or right direction, so that the displacement of the state switching means, which tends to be disorderly, can be reduced to the contact state. It can be returned to orderly by the action of the means.

<Separation, reversal, combination, and rotation are a series of actions>
Displacement means configured to be displaceable so as to change the visually recognized surface is provided, the displacement means comprises a first displacement member and a second displacement member, and in displacement in a predetermined manner, the first displacement A game machine AD1 characterized in that the member and the second displacement member are configured to be relatively displaced.

Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine configured such that a rotating base 214 disposed at the tip of a base arm 220 can be rotated multiple times (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-116782). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, although the rotation base 214 is rotationally displaced, the surface seen by the player is the same.

On the other hand, according to the game machine AD1, since the visually recognized surface of the displacement means is configured to be changeable along with the displacement, attention to the displacement means can be maintained.

Moreover, since the appearance of the displacement means can be changed by relatively displacing the first displacement member and the second displacement member, attention to the displacement means can be improved.

In the gaming machine AD1, the displacement in the predetermined mode includes a first displacement in which the first displacement member and the second displacement member are moved toward and away from each other on the basis of a collective portion in which the first displacement member and the second displacement member are collectively arranged; A game machine AD2 characterized by comprising at least a second displacement member in which a second displacement member rotates with respect to the gathering portion.

According to the gaming machine AD2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AD1, it is possible to facilitate dynamic relative movement between the first displacement member and the second displacement member. That is, if only the first displacement is used as the displacement with respect to the gathering portion, the displacement of the first displacement member and the second displacement member at the end portion where the distance from the gathering portion is the shortest or the longest is likely to be reduced. The 1st displacement member and the 2nd displacement member may appear to stop and the performance effect may be lowered, but by mixing the 2nd displacement, it is possible to generate displacement in the rotational direction even at the terminal end. Therefore, the production effect can be improved.

In the game machine AD1 or AD2, the game machine AD3 is characterized in that the displacement in the predetermined mode includes at least a third displacement in which the visible surface of the displacement means is reversed.

According to the game machine AD3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AD1 or AD2, by reversing the side visually recognized by the third displacement, the decoration visually recognized by the player before and after the third displacement is significantly different. can let

In any one of the game machines AD1 to AD3, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are configured to be fixable by adsorption or adhesion, and the load associated with the fixation is the first displacement member and the second displacement member. The game machine AD4 is characterized in that it acts in a direction that limits the displacement of the member.

According to the gaming machine AD4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AD1 to AD3, the load related to fixing acts in a direction that limits the displacement of the first displacement member and the second displacement member, so the load related to fixing , the displacements of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be designed.

For example, in the case of transmission of driving force by a gear, if deformation of the shape is not taken into account, mechanical displacement occurs, but if the load related to fixing is taken into account, the elastic change of the member due to the load becomes apparent. By doing so, it is possible to cause a delay in the displacement timing of the member.

Also, the degree of fixation may be different depending on the visually recognized surfaces of the first displacement member and the second displacement member.

In this case, since the effect of fixation differs depending on the side viewed by the player, the strength of the fixation on the side viewed by the player can be set.

As a result, for example, with respect to the reversed surfaces of the same displacement means, one surface is tightly united to make it easier to see as one, and the other surface is loosely united to make it easier to see in a state where relative displacement is easy to occur. can be done.

Further, for example, by configuring the degree of adsorption of the first displacement member and the degree of attraction of the second displacement member to differ for each fixed position, it is possible to constitute a state in which the degree of fixation of the first displacement member and the degree of fixation of the second displacement member differ. can.

In addition, the aspect which enables adsorption|suction is not limited at all. For example, it may be adhered with an adhesive tape, or may utilize the attractive force between a magnet and a metal portion. Further, the first reversing member and the second reversing member may be designed so as to use fixing screws, screws, or the like, for example, as the metal portion to be attracted to the magnet.

In any one of the game machines AD1 to AD4, the displacement means is configured to be displaceable in forward and reverse directions, and in a predetermined state, displaces in the forward direction in the first displacement mode and in the reverse direction in the first displacement mode. A gaming machine AD5 characterized in that it is displaced in a second displacement mode different from the displacement mode, wherein the second displacement mode is configured such that it is displaced in the first displacement mode after being displaced in a predetermined mode.

According to the game machine AD5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines AD1 to AD4, the displacement mode of the displacement means is configured to be different in the forward and reverse directions, and the second displacement mode is before the first displacement mode. Since it is configured as a displacement mode to which the predetermined mode is added, it is possible to reduce the amount of displacement required for the displacement means when retracting the displacement means. As a result, it is possible to reduce the attention to the displacing means at the time of retraction, so that it is possible to relatively increase the attention to the displacing means displaced at the performance position.

In the conventional machine, since the mode of rotation is the same in the forward and reverse directions, after the performance position (the position on the front side of the liquid crystal display area) is projected, it is necessary to retreat to the retracted position (outside the liquid crystal display area). It had to rotate multiple times again in the opposite direction. In this case, there is a possibility that the line of sight tends to be drawn to the member retreating from the rendering position, which may be regarded as a problem.

Note that the displacement mode is not limited at all. For example, rotational displacement or linear displacement may be used. Further, the displacement may be on a plane, across a plurality of planes, or three-dimensional.

In the game machine AD5, the game machine AD6 is characterized in that the displacement means comprises release means configured to release the load transmission when the movement resistance becomes greater than a predetermined amount.

According to the gaming machine AD6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AD5, it is possible to change the displacement mode of the displacement means depending on the magnitude of the movement resistance of the internal configuration of the displacement means.

In any one of the game machines AD1 to AD6, light emitting means for irradiating light toward the displacement means is provided, the displacement means is provided with the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are provided. The game machine AD7 is characterized in that the second displacement member is configured to be able to change the visual recognition state of the light from the light emitting means depending on whether the visually recognized surface is one side or the other side.

According to the game machine AD7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines AD1 to AD6, the appearance of the displacement means with respect to the light from the light emitting means corresponds to the visually recognized surfaces of the first displacement member and the second displacement member. can be changed by

For example, a case where the first displacement member and the second displacement member are visually recognized as emitting light individually, and a case where the first displacement member and the second displacement member are visually recognized as integrally emitting light. can be changed with

Any one of the game machines AD1 to AD7 is provided with detection means for detecting the arrangement of the displacement means, and the detection means is configured to be able to detect whether or not the displacement of the displacement means is in an allowable state. Characterized game machine AD8.

According to the game machine AD8, in any one of the game machines AD1 to AD7, the detection means can detect the state in which the displacement of the displacement means is permissible. can be avoided.

Further, since the displacement means can be displaced while detecting the displaceable section of the displacement means by the detection means, the displacement mode including enlargement/reduction is performed after displacing from the effect position toward the retracted position to some extent. By controlling the displacement from the performance position to the retracted position, it is possible to suppress an increase in attention to the displacement means compared to the case of displacing in a displacement mode including enlargement and reduction from the start of the displacement. .

Any one of the game machines AD1 to AD7 is characterized by comprising detecting means for detecting the state of the displacement means, the detecting means being capable of detecting two or more numerical values for the displacement of the displacement means. game machine AD9.

According to the gaming machine AD9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines AD1 to AD7, it is possible to reduce the number of detection means provided. Various modes are exemplified as the types of numerical values for the displacement of the displacement means. For example, it may be a numerical value regarding the arrangement or posture of each of the different movable members, or a numerical value related to the change in the motion mode when the motion mode changes at a predetermined timing.

Moreover, the arrangement of the detection means is not limited at all. For example, by arranging the detection means on the displacement base end side of the displacement means, it is easy to configure a structure for detecting the arrangement and attitude of the second displacement means connected to the displacement tip side of the displacement means.

In any one of the game machines AD1 to AD9, the displacement means includes the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member have one side facing the player side. When the first displacement member and the second displacement member are configured to be capable of reversing between a facing posture and a facing posture on the other side, the first displacing member and the second displacing member turn one face toward the player side. While the displacement member and the second displacement member are distinguishable, when the other side of the first displacement member and the second displacement member faces the player side, the first displacement member and the second displacement member A gaming machine AD10 characterized in that it is configured such that it is indistinguishable from

According to the game machine AD10, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines AD1 to AD9, the reversal operation is performed regardless of the state of the first displacement member and the second displacement member when one side is directed toward the player side. It is possible to keep the player's expectation high for the occurrence of .

<Points for changing easily visible surfaces by arranging displacing means having a plurality of visible surfaces>
Displacement means comprising a first visible surface and a second visible surface configured to be visible is provided, and the displacement means has a first state in which the first visible surface is easily visible, and the A game machine AE1 characterized in that it is configured to be switchable between a second state in which the second visible surface is easy to recognize and a second state.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes a reversible reversing operation unit 71 and is configured to change the appearance visually recognized by the player by changing the visually recognized surface (for example, , see JP-A-2016-153095). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the reversal of the reversing operation unit 71 is performed in a fixed position, so the player's line of sight cannot be changed by changing the viewed surface. That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of efficiently changing the line of sight of the player.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine AE1, the displacing means switches between a state in which the first visible surface is easy to recognize and a state in which the second visible surface is easy to recognize. The line of sight of the player who wants to see the visible surface or the second visible surface can be changed in a manner along the route of the change in the arrangement of the displacement means.

The gaming machine AE2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AE1, an opening is provided for opening the displacement means so that the displacement means can be visually recognized, and the displacement means is configured so that the opening side is easily visible.

According to the gaming machine AE2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AE1, a player who views the back side through the opening can easily visually recognize the first visible surface or the second visible surface of the displacement means.

A gaming machine AE3 characterized in that, in the gaming machine AE2, the displacing means is arranged closer to the back side when it is arranged on the edge side of the opening than when it is arranged on the center side of the opening. .

According to the game machine AE3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AE2, when the displacement means is arranged on the central side of the open portion, the displacement means can be visually recognized on the front side, and the displacement means can be seen on the edge side of the open portion. The movement of the line of sight when looking at the displacing means when arranged can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to achieve both visibility of the displacement means and suppression of fatigue of the player who follows the displacement means with his/her eyes.

In any one of the game machines AE1 to AE3, the displacement means includes a plurality of sets of the first visible surface and the second visible surface, and one set of the first visible surface and the second visible surface. The gaming machine AE4 is characterized in that the first visible surface and the second visible surface of the other set are configured to be difficult to visually recognize when the surfaces are visible.

According to the game machine AE4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines AE1 to AE3, different characters and figures are applied to the first visible surface and the second visible surface for each set, thereby displacing the displacement means. To allow a player who visually recognizes different characters and figures to be visually recognized, and to make it difficult to visually recognize a set of the first visible surface and the second visible surface that are not intended to be visually recognized. , it is possible to avoid the appearance of the displacing means from becoming unsightly.

For example, in the first set, characters and figures indicating that the lottery result is a big win and the expectation is low are displayed on the first visible surface and the second visible surface, and in the second set, the lottery result is displayed. is displayed on the first visible surface and the second visible surface, the expectation of a big win is expressed through the displacement means regardless of the arrangement of the displacement means. You can check the height. In this case, even after the displacement means has retreated from the front side of the display area of the display device, the display of the expectation of the big win by the displacement means can be maintained. Also, it is possible to continue visually recognizing the display of the expectation of the big win.

In addition, the aspect which comprises hard to visually recognize is not limited at all. For example, it may be arranged on a side different from the player's side (rear side, left and right outer side, etc.), or it may be structured so as to reduce visibility by shielding with shielding means.

In the gaming machine AE4, the action of switching the set of the visible first visible surface and the second visible surface is performed so that the first visible surface and the second visible surface are difficult to recognize during operation. A gaming machine AE5 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine AE5, in the gaming machine AE4, the first visible surface displayed on the player side during the operation of switching the set of the visible first visible surface and the second visible surface (before confirmation) and the second set of visible surfaces can be easily avoided from being predicted. Thereby, attention to the displacement means can be improved.

It should be noted that there is no limitation on the aspect configured so that the first visible surface and the second visible surface are difficult to recognize during the switching operation described above. For example, the displacement means may be rotated at high speed to make it difficult to recognize, or a part of the first visible surface (second visible surface) and other parts may be configured to be detachable from each other. It may be difficult to recognize by operating the part and other parts separately, or it may be difficult to recognize by creating a relatively dark part by setting the brightness of the light emitting means.

In this case, the mode of the separated state is not limited at all. For example, during the above-described switching operation, only one of the first visible surface (second visible surface) and the other portion is visible, and the other is turned toward the back so that it is not visible. Alternatively, it may be configured to operate in such a state that some of them and other parts can be visually recognized at the same time, but are visually recognized in a displaced arrangement.

The gaming machine AE5 is characterized in that an opening portion is provided for opening the displacement means so as to be visually recognizable, and the switching operation is performed in a state in which the displacement means is arranged on the center side of the opening portion. Game machine AE6.

According to the gaming machine AE6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AE5, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the switching action, and to improve the attention to the switching action.

In the game machine AE5 or AE6, during the switching operation, one of the part of the first visible surface and the other part faces the front side, and the other faces the side different from the front side. Game machine AE7 to play.

According to the gaming machine AE7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AE5 or AE6, by making a part of the first visible surface visible during operation and making the whole invisible, the first visible surface is made visible during operation. Possible faces can be made difficult to perceive.

In any one of the game machines AE1 to AE7, a second displacement means configured to be able to block at least part of a line of sight to the second visible surface is provided, and the displacement means is configured to be capable of shielding at least a part of the line of sight to the second visible surface, and the displacement means, together with the second displacement means, A game machine AE8 characterized in that it is configured to be switchable to a third state for visually recognizing the first visible side.

According to the game machine AE8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines AE1 to AE7, by configuring at least a part of the second visible surface by the second displacement means to make it difficult to see, the effect position of the displacement means can be changed. Design freedom can be improved.

In any one of the game machines AE1 to AE8, the displacement means is configured to change a surface visually recognized in a predetermined direction between a first visible surface and a second visible surface with displacement. A gaming machine AE9 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine AE9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AE1 to AE8, the surface visually recognized when viewed from a predetermined direction changes between the first visible surface and the second visible surface. It is possible to arbitrarily change the easily visible surface without depending on the amount of change in the line of sight of the person.

A gaming machine AE10 characterized in that, in the gaming machine AE9, the attitude of the displacement means changes between the first state and the second state.

According to the game machine AE10, in addition to the effects of the game machine AE9, the difference between the appearance of the displacement means in the first state and the appearance of the displacement means in the second state can be increased by changing the attitude of the displacement means. can.

In the game machine AE9 or AE10, an auxiliary means configured to be arranged close to the displacement means is provided, the displacement means is arranged close to the auxiliary means in the first state, and the displacement means is arranged in the second state. is arranged apart from the auxiliary means.

According to the game machine AE11, in addition to the effects of the game machine AE9 or AE10, a state in which the auxiliary means is arranged close to the displacement means and visually recognized integrally, and a state in which the auxiliary means and the displacement means are separated and visually recognized are available. It is possible to configure a plurality of impressions that the displacing means gives to the player.

In addition, the aspect of an auxiliary means is not limited at all. For example, it may be means whose arrangement is fixed, or movable means.

In the gaming machine AE11, the auxiliary means can switch between a state in which the auxiliary means is visually recognized integrally with the displacement means and a state in which the auxiliary means is visually recognized separately from the displacement means. .

According to the game machine AE12, in addition to the effects of the game machine AE11, it is possible to switch whether the displacement means and the auxiliary means are visually recognized integrally or separately, so that there is a variation in the visible mode with respect to the number of members. can be increased.

<Points where the ratio of the amount of displacement of the displacing means and the amount of displacement of the arranging means at the same point in time differs between sections>
Displacing means configured to be displaceable, disposing means for disposing the first portion on the displacing means, and supporting means for supporting the second portion of the disposing means, the supporting means A game machine AF1, characterized in that the arrangement of said second portion with reference to said first portion during displacement of said displacement means is controllable.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a base arm 220 that can be tilted and displaced, a rotating accessory 211 rotatably attached to the tilting tip side of the base arm 220, and the rotating accessory 211 are rotated. and a driving motor 222 that generates a driving force for the rotation of the base arm 220, and the rotation accessory 211 can be rotated independently of the displacement of the base arm 220. (see Gazette). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the rotating accessory 211 tends to wobble at the tip of the base arm 220, and if the rotating accessory 211 is rotated while the base arm 220 is being tilted and displaced, there is a possibility that the mechanism will malfunction. As a result, since it is assumed that the rotational movement of the rotational accessory 211 is performed while the base arm 220 is stopped, the degree of freedom of displacement is low.

That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of increasing the degree of freedom in designing the displacement of the displaceable portion.

On the other hand, according to the game machine AF1, the arrangement means is supported by the displacement means and the support means at least at two points, and the two support points are relatively displaced during the displacement of the displacement means. Since the supporting means can control the placement of the second portion with respect to the first portion, the disposing means can be displaced while the displacing means is being displaced while stably supporting the disposing means. can be done. Thereby, the degree of freedom in designing the displacement of the disposing means (displaceable portion) can be increased.

In addition, the aspect of a support means is not limited at all. For example, it may be supported by a guide groove formed in a fixed base means so as to restrict its displacement, or may be supported by being connected to a displaceable second displacement means. Control by the support means is not limited to electronic control, but includes mechanical control such as regulating (guiding) the displacement of the second portion by the wall.

In the game machine AF1, the displacement means is configured to be able to displace the first section and the second section, and the support means displaces the second section when the displacement means displaces the first section. and a second range supporting the second portion when the displacement means displaces the second section, wherein the second portion is displaced in the first range A gaming machine AF2 is characterized in that the direction is different from the direction in which the second portion is displaced in the second range.

According to the game machine AF2, in addition to the effects of the game machine AF1, even when the displacement speed of the displacement means is constant, the displacement speed of the arrangement means can be varied, and the support means can be the second Since it is configured to allow a change in the direction of displacement of the second portion, even if the direction of displacement of the second portion changes irregularly, the displacement of the disposing means can be smoothed.

In the game machine AF1 or AF2, the game machine AF3 is characterized in that the support means comprises a restricting portion for restricting the displacement of the second portion.

According to the game machine AF3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AF1 or AF2, the displacement of the second portion can be limited at the boundary position (restriction portion) between the first range and the second range. When displacing the portion from the large displacement side to the small displacement side, the second portion can be easily stopped at the boundary position (restriction portion) between the first range and the second range.

The form of the load required for the displacement of the second portion with respect to the first portion is not limited at all. For example, a mode in which the second portion is pulled or a mode in which the second portion is pushed may be used.

It should be noted that the mode of the restricting section is not limited at all. For example, it may be configured to increase or decrease the displacement resistance of the second portion, or it may be configured to switch the direction of displacement of the second portion.

In the gaming machine AF2 or AF3, the first section is arranged closer to the end of the displacement range of the displacement means than the second section, and an arrangement means based on the displacement means in the second section is configured to be smaller than the relative displacement amount of the disposing means with respect to the displacing means in the first section.

According to the game machine AF4, in addition to the effects of the game machine AF2 or AF3, it is possible to construct a section in which the amount of relative displacement of the arrangement means with respect to the displacement means becomes small at the mid-displacement position of the displacement means. Therefore, in addition to the displacement end position of the displacing means, it is possible to provide a position where the displacing means and the arranging means can be easily visually recognized as an integral unit. Easy position can be increased.

A gaming machine AF5, wherein in any one of the gaming machines AF1 to AF4, the displacement speed (ratio) of the second portion with respect to the displacement speed of the first portion is variable.

According to the game machine AF5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines AF1 to AF4, even if the displacement speed of the displacement means is constant, the displacement speed of the second portion of the disposing means on the support means side is increased. can be changed, it is possible to construct an action presentation in which the displacement speed of the disposing means is made variable by simple drive control (constant speed drive) of the drive means.

In any one of the game machines AF1 to AF5, the game machine AF6 is characterized in that the support means is configured to reduce the displacement speed at the end of displacement of the second portion.

According to the game machine AF6, in addition to the effects of the game machines AF1 to AF5, it is possible to prevent the second portion from rebounding, and to facilitate early stopping of the arrangement means at the end of the displacement.

Note that the technique for preventing the second portion from rebounding is not limited at all. For example, a method of reducing the displacement speed of the second portion at the end of the displacement (for example, the amount of displacement of the second portion when the first portion is displaced by a predetermined unit length) may be used. It is also possible to restrict the displacement of the second portion by designing a wall in the displacement direction of the second portion while the first portion is stationary.

Further, the method is not limited to reducing the amount of displacement of the second portion, and the method of increasing the displacement resistance of the second portion may be employed. For example, a magnetic force or the like may be applied at the end of the displacement of the second portion to improve the displacement resistance of the second portion, or an urging force such as a coil spring may be used to improve the displacement resistance. good.

In the amusement machine AF6, the support means includes a displacement trajectory of the displacement of the second portion accompanying the displacement of the first portion, and a displacement trajectory of the second portion when the first portion stops at the end of the displacement. A gaming machine AF7 characterized in that the displacement trajectory of the displacement is configured to intersect with the displacement trajectory.

According to the game machine AF7, in addition to the effects of the game machine AF6, the support means having the function of guiding the displacement of the second part accompanying the displacement of the first part, when the first part stops 2 can reduce the return displacement (bounce).

In any one of the game machines AF1 to AF7, a supported means displaceably supported by the disposing means is provided, and the supported means is adapted to a relative displacement amount of the disposing means with respect to the displacing means. A game machine AF8 characterized in that it is configured to be displaced by a corresponding displacement amount.

According to the game machine AF8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines AF1 to AF7, a complicated performance can be executed by the supported means displaced jointly with the arrangement means.

The mode of displacement of the supported means is not limited at all. For example, the arranging means may be displaced so as to run parallel to the arranging means on a predetermined plane on which the arranging means is displaced. , sliding displacement on a predetermined plane) may be different (for example, rotational displacement about a predetermined axis).

It should be noted that the mode of displacement of the arranging means related to the amount of displacement of the arranging means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a posture change, or a displacement while maintaining the posture.

In the game machine AF8, while the first portion is displaced in a predetermined direction, the second portion has a section capable of reciprocating displacement in a direction intersecting the displacement trajectory of the first portion. Amusement machine AF9.

According to the game machine AF9, in addition to the effects of the game machine AF8, while the first part is being displaced, the amount of relative displacement of the second part with respect to the first part returns and changes (for example, after increasing Therefore, it is possible to realize a displacement mode in which the amount of displacement of the supported means is increased while the arrangement of the second portion is maintained.

In the game machine AF8 or AF9, the displacement speed of the (relative) rotation of the supported means with respect to the arrangement means is configured to be equal to the displacement speed of the displacement means. AF10.

According to the game machine AF10, in addition to the effects of the game machine AF8 or AF9, the displacement mode of the supported means can be made equivalent to the displacement means with the disposing means interposed therebetween. This makes it possible for the player to have the illusion that the supported means is being displaced by its own driving means.

In any one of the game machines AF1 to AF10, the disposing means includes attitude changing means for changing the attitude so as to switch the side facing the player side between the first side and the second side according to the displacement of the disposing means. A game characterized in that the posture changing means is configured so that the first face or the second face faces the player side in a state where the second portion is arranged at the end of displacement. Machine AF11.

According to the game machine AF11, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines AF1 to AF10, the first surface or the second surface of the posture changing means is directed toward the player side, so that the second portion is at the end of the displacement. Since the player can grasp the arrival, it is possible to comprehend the final stage of the performance action by the displacement means.

In any one of game machines AF1 to AF11, an electric wiring is configured to be inserted through the second portion and into the disposing means, and the electric wiring is arranged inside and fixed to the second portion. locating means, said locating means comprising an opening through which said electrical wire can pass, said opening being displaceable to avoid contact of said electrical wire with a peripheral portion formed therearound; A gaming machine AF12 characterized by:

According to the game machine AF12, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines AF1 to AF11, it is possible to avoid contact of the electric wiring with the surrounding portion.

The arranging means may be configured as a means for uniting the plurality of members when the second portion is composed of a plurality of members, or may be configured as a means for combining the plurality of members when the second portion is provided with a separate member. It may be configured as means for preventing the separate member from falling off from the second portion.

<Characteristic BA group>
a first information acquiring means capable of acquiring first information based on the establishment of a first information acquiring condition; and a first information acquiring means capable of executing a first determination based on the first information acquired by the first information acquiring means. 1 discriminating means, first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying, on a display means, first identification information for indicating a first discrimination result by the first discriminating means, and the first dynamic display means a first dynamic display mode determining means capable of determining a first dynamic display mode of the first identification information to be dynamically displayed by a second information based on establishment of a second information acquisition condition; second information acquisition means, second information storage means for storing the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means, and based on the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying, on the display means, second identification information for indicating a second determination result by the second determination means, and second determination means capable of executing the second determination; display means; second dynamic display mode determination means capable of determining a second dynamic display mode of the second identification information dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means; When the first identification information for indicating the first determination result or the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player can be executed. a special game executing means, wherein the effect mode executing means capable of executing the effect mode during the dynamic display period of the second identification information, and the effect mode executed by the effect mode executing means; a selectable presentation mode selection means, wherein the presentation mode selection means selects the presentation mode based on at least the number of the second information stored in the second information storage means. A gaming machine BA1 characterized by:

A game machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with an effect mode for notifying the result of a lottery based on the result of a lottery, etc., as an effect for indicating the result of a lottery that is performed based on the winning of a game ball into a starting prize-winning hole. There is a game that aims to increase interest in a game by determining and executing the determined effect mode (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the player quickly becomes bored with the game due to the content of the presentation mode.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to the game machine BA1, since the effect mode executed during the dynamic display period of the second identification information is varied depending on the number of the stored second information, it can be executed after that. It is possible to execute the performance corresponding to the number of times of dynamic display of the second identification information, and even if the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is not displayed, the subsequent game is continued. By making the player interested in the game, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets bored with the game early.

In the game machine BA1, the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed with priority over the dynamic display of the first identification information, and the effect mode executing means is configured to execute the specific second dynamic display. A gaming machine BA2 characterized in that the performance mode is executed when the target display mode is being executed.

According to the gaming machine BA2, by executing the specific second dynamic display mode, it is possible to motivate the player to store the second information, thereby increasing the interest of the player. .

In the gaming machine BA1 or BA2, the presentation mode is continuously executed after the period of the second dynamic display mode being executed corresponding to the number of stored second information ends. The gaming machine BA3 is characterized in that it is set in a period spanning the dynamic display of the next second identification information.

According to the game machine BA3, in addition to the effects of the game machine BA1 or BA2, the effect mode is configured to be executable over the dynamic display period of the second identification information that is continuously executed a plurality of times. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest can be improved by displaying the second dynamic display mode a plurality of times as if it were one dynamic display.

In any one of the gaming machines BA1 to BA3, a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a game ball entering the second ball entering means. a variable member that can be changed between a first state in which a ball can be entered and a second state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than in the first state; to a first state until a predetermined condition is established; The game machine BA4 is characterized in that the effect mode selection means is configured to be able to select a specific effect mode based on at least the result of the preliminary determination means.

According to the game machine BA4, in addition to the effects produced by the game machines BA1 to BA3, a specific presentation mode is selected based on the result of preliminarily determining whether the specific condition that triggers the acquisition of the second information is likely to be satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that expectations can be given to acquisition of the second information.

<Feature BB group> (Effect variable depending on the number of special figures 2 pending during the execution of the variation pattern)
a first information acquiring means capable of acquiring first information based on the establishment of a first information acquiring condition; and a first information acquiring means capable of executing a first determination based on the first information acquired by the first information acquiring means. 1 discriminating means, first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying, on a display means, first identification information for indicating a first discrimination result by the first discriminating means, and the first dynamic display means a first dynamic display mode determining means capable of determining a first dynamic display mode of the first identification information to be dynamically displayed by a second information based on establishment of a second information acquisition condition; second information acquisition means, second information storage means for storing the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means, and based on the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying, on the display means, second identification information for indicating a second determination result by the second determination means, and second determination means capable of executing the second determination; display means; second dynamic display mode determination means capable of determining a second dynamic display mode of the second identification information dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means; When the first identification information for indicating the first determination result or the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player can be executed. and a special game execution means, wherein a performance mode execution means capable of executing a performance mode during the dynamic display period of the first identification information, and a performance mode executed by the performance mode execution means a selectable presentation mode selection means, wherein the presentation mode selection means selects the presentation mode based on at least the number of the second information stored in the second information storage means. A gaming machine BB1 characterized by:

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery result is displayed based on the lottery result etc. as an effect for indicating the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the game ball into the start winning opening. There is a game that aims to increase interest in a game by determining a performance mode and executing the determined performance mode (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the player quickly becomes bored with the game due to the content of the presentation mode.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to the gaming machine BB1, the second information stores the presentation mode to be executed during the period during which the first identification information is dynamically displayed in the first dynamic display mode determined at the start of the dynamic display. Since it is determined based on the number, not only the result of the first determination, but also information about whether the second determination can be executed can be determined from the presentation mode, and the player can quickly start playing the game. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem of getting tired.

In the gaming machine BB1, the presentation mode selecting means selects the presentation mode based on at least the number of the second information and the dynamic display mode of the first identification information dynamically displayed. A gaming machine BB2 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine BB2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine BB1, the presentation mode is selected according to the number of the first dynamic display mode being executed and the second information being stored during the execution thereof, so that various effects can be achieved. There is an effect that it is possible to execute various production modes.

In the gaming machine BB1 or BB2, the dynamic display of the second identification information is configured to be executed with priority over the dynamic display of the first identification information, and the effect mode is executed after that. A game machine BB3 characterized in that an effect related to the dynamic display mode of the second identification information is executed.

According to the gaming machine BB3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BB1 or BB2, when the second information is stored, after the first identification information being executed is completed, the second identification information is activated. target display is started, and the effect mode related to the second dynamic display mode can be executed before the dynamic display of the second identification information is started. There is an effect that the player can be made to recognize at an early stage that the dynamic display of the identification information will start.

In any one of the gaming machines BB1 to BB3, a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a game ball entering the second ball entering means. a variable member that can be changed between a first state in which a ball can be entered and a second state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than in the first state; to a first state until a predetermined condition is established; The game machine BB4 is characterized in that the effect mode selection means is configured to be able to select a specific effect mode based on at least the result of the preliminary determination means.

According to the game machine BB4, in addition to the effects produced by the game machines BB1 to BB3, a specific presentation mode is selected based on the result of preliminarily determining whether the specific condition that triggers the acquisition of the second information is likely to be satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that expectations can be given to acquisition of the second information.

<Feature BC group> (Use special figure 1 variation effect as a pseudo effect of special figure 2 variation)
A first determination means for executing a first determination based on the establishment of a first determination condition, and a second determination for executing a second determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition. means, a first bonus game executing means for executing a first bonus game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the first determination means becoming a predetermined first determination result; 2 second privilege game execution means for executing a first privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a predetermined second determination result; and the first determination is executed. First effect execution means for executing a first effect for indicating the determination result of the first determination based on the fact that the determination result of the second determination is performed, and based on the execution of the second determination, the determination result of the second determination and a second effect executing means for executing a second effect different from the first effect as an effect for indicating, and the second effect executing means executes at least a predetermined specific condition when Second, the game machine BC1 is configured to be able to execute the second effect of the effect mode including at least a specific effect mode that is likely to be executed during the effect period of the first effect.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with an effect mode for notifying the result of a lottery based on the result of a lottery, etc., as an effect for indicating the result of a lottery that is performed based on the winning of a game ball into a starting prize-winning hole. There is a game that aims to increase interest in a game by determining and executing the determined effect mode (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the player quickly becomes bored with the game due to the content of the presentation mode.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to the gaming machine BC1, since the first effect can be executed as the effect for indicating the determination result of the second determination, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BC1, the second effect executing means is capable of executing the second effect in a effect mode including at least a display mode showing the result of the first determination as the effect mode of the first effect. A gaming machine BC2 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine BC2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BC1, it is possible to execute the second effect using the display mode showing the determination result of the first determination, so that the interest in the game can be improved. effective.

In the game machine BC2, the second effect execution means executes a second effect mode for indicating the determination result of the second determination and the effect mode within one effect indicating the determination result of the second determination. A gaming machine BC3 characterized by:

According to the game machine BC3, in addition to the effects of the game machine BC2, there is an effect that a more unexpected effect can be executed.

<Characteristic BD group> (Double display including probability variation even for normal hits)
a first discrimination means capable of executing a first discrimination; and displaying a first discrimination result by the first discrimination means after dynamically displaying a plurality of first identification patterns on the display means in a predetermined dynamic display mode. a first dynamic display means capable of statically displaying a combination of; a second determination means capable of performing a second determination; second dynamic display means capable of stopping display in combination for showing the second determination result by the second determination means after display, and for displaying the specific first determination result on the display means When the first identification pattern is stop-displayed in a specific combination of or when the second identification pattern is stop-displayed in a specific combination for indicating the specific second determination result on the display means, the game and a privilege granting means capable of granting a benefit advantageous to a player, wherein the privilege granting means is stop-displayed with a combination of identification patterns corresponding to a first specific combination among the specific combinations. In this case, a first privilege can be given as the privilege, and when a combination of identification symbols corresponding to a second specific combination different from the first specific combination is stopped and displayed, it is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege. The gaming machine has a determination means capable of determining the type of the privilege to be granted by the privilege granting means, and the first dynamic display means has a specific period of time When it is set, it is possible for the remaining identification symbols to be one of the first specific combination and the second specific combination in a state in which one first identification pattern is dynamically displayed. A game machine BD1 characterized in that after displaying a plurality of ready-to-win display modes that are stopped and displayed in combination, the first identification symbols are displayed in the specific combination.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a starting prize-winning slot is notified by a combination of a plurality of symbols, it is given after that according to the type of displayed symbols. There is a game designed to improve the interest of the game by providing different benefits (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, some of the symbols that make up a combination that does not give a privilege lower than the privilege desired by the player are displayed in a stationary manner, thereby increasing interest in the game before the result is announced. There was a problem that the

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player.

According to the game machine BD1, when identification patterns are displayed in a specific combination during a specific period, the specific combination is displayed through a plurality of reach display modes, so the combination corresponding to the first privilege and the second privilege are supported. There is an effect that it is possible to have a long expectation that both of the combined combinations will be displayed, and that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BD1, the determining means determines the first privilege when the specific first determination result is obtained in the specific period.

According to the gaming machine BD2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BD1, even during the specific period in which the first privilege is determined by the determining means, the specific combination is displayed through the multiple reach display mode. There is an effect that even when the first determination is executed in the first step, it is possible to easily have a sense of expectation for the second privilege to be given.

In the gaming machine BD2, the determination means determines the second privilege when the specific second determination result is obtained in the specific period, and the second dynamic display means has the specific period set. If so, while one second identification pattern is dynamically displayed, the rest of the identification patterns are stopped in a combination that can be one of the two or more different second specific combinations. A game machine BD3 characterized in that the second identification pattern is displayed in the specific combination after displaying the special multiple ready-to-win display mode.

According to the gaming machine BD3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BD2, the player can be quickly recognized that the second privilege advantageous to the player is always given in the specific period when the specific second determination result is obtained. has the effect of being able to

<Characteristic BE group> (Puncture ED control at probability variable hit)
Determination means capable of executing determination, privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result, and execution by the privilege game execution means. A privilege game type determining means capable of determining the type of the privilege game from a plurality of types, a specific area through which the game ball can pass when the specific privilege game is executed, and a game ball passing through the specific area a setting means capable of setting an advantageous game state that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game state as a game state to be set after execution of the privilege game when passing through until an end condition is satisfied; a suggesting mode executing means for executing a suggesting mode capable of suggesting the gaming state set after execution of the bonus game when the game ends, wherein the suggesting mode includes a first suggesting mode and a suggesting mode. The second suggesting mode is combined with the second suggesting mode, and the second suggesting mode for suggesting the normal gaming state and the second suggesting mode for suggesting the advantageous gaming state are configured in the same period. A game machine BE1 characterized in that it is configured in a suggestive mode.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning opening is a win, and different winning games are executed depending on the winning type, and during the winning game of a specific type is a state in which a game ball can be entered and a state in which it is difficult to enter. In some cases, the interest in the game is enhanced by creating a game state that is advantageous to the player (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, even if a specific type of winning game is executed, there are cases where the game ball does not enter the variable ball entry area, and the control load in the notification control in that case increases. I had a problem with it.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the control load.

According to the gaming machine BE1, by setting the second suggestion mode to the same period, it is possible to set the mode suggested by the state of the ball entering the specific area while suppressing the period during which the suggestion mode is displayed from varying. There is an effect that it is possible to facilitate the notification control of the suggestion mode at the end of the privilege game and reduce the control load.

In the gaming machine BE1, when the privilege game is executed, suggestion mode setting means for setting the suggestion mode executed by the suggestion mode execution means corresponding to the type of the privilege game to be executed; Switching the second suggestion mode among the suggestion modes set when the game ball does not enter the specific area during the privilege game to a second suggestion mode corresponding to a game other than the specific privilege game. A gaming machine BE2 characterized by comprising a switching means capable of

According to the gaming machine BE2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BE1, the suggestion mode is displayed even when the suggestion mode is set at the start so as to suppress the concentration of the control load at the end of the privilege game. Since it is possible to suggest by switching to the suggestion mode corresponding to the normal game state without changing the period for playing, there is an effect that the control load can be suppressed and the correct suggestion can be executed.

<Characteristic BF group> (provide ED periods of different lengths depending on the type of jackpot)
Determination means capable of executing determination, privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on the fact that the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result, and the privilege game execution means A privilege game type determination means capable of determining the type of the privilege game to be executed from a plurality of types, and determining the end of the privilege game based on the establishment of a predetermined termination condition during the execution of the privilege game. and period setting means for setting a period of length corresponding to the type of the privilege game being executed as the period for indicating the value of the bonus game.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with an effect mode for notifying the result of a lottery based on the result of a lottery, etc., as an effect for indicating the result of a lottery that is performed based on the winning of a game ball into a starting prize-winning hole. There is a game that aims to increase interest in a game by determining and executing the determined effect mode (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the player quickly becomes bored with the game due to the content of the presentation mode.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to the gaming machine BF1, different periods can be set according to the type of privilege game, so there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

The game machine BF2 is characterized in that the game machine BF1 is provided with a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect using the period set by the period setting means.

According to the gaming machine BF2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BF1, it is possible to execute a specific effect in a different period set according to the type of privilege game, so that the interest in the game can be improved. effective.

The gaming machine BF1 or BF2 is provided with period switching means capable of switching the length of the period set by the period setting means to a different length when a variable condition is established during execution of the privilege game. Characteristic game machine BF3.

According to the game machine BF3, in addition to the effect of the game machine BF1 or BF2, the length of the period can be changed even when the variable condition is established during the execution of the privilege game, so that the interest of the game is improved. It has the effect of being able to

<Characteristic BG group> (The ED period is variable depending on whether or not there is a V prize)
Determination means capable of executing determination, privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result, and the privilege game being executed. A game capable of setting an advantageous game state that is advantageous to a player based on a specific area through which a game ball can pass during execution of the privilege game and the game ball passing through the specific area during execution of the privilege game. state setting means; and specific period setting means for setting a specific period for indicating the end of the privilege game based on satisfaction of a predetermined termination condition during execution of the privilege game, The specific period setting means is configured to be able to set different lengths of the specific period depending on whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area during execution of the privilege game. Gaming machine BG1.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with an effect mode for notifying the result of a lottery based on the result of a lottery, etc., as an effect for indicating the result of a lottery that is performed based on the winning of a game ball into a starting prize-winning hole. There is a game that aims to increase interest in a game by determining and executing the determined effect mode (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the player quickly becomes bored with the game due to the content of the presentation mode.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to the game machine BG1, it is possible to set specific periods of different lengths depending on whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area during execution of the privilege game, thereby improving the interest of the game. can be made

The game machine BG2 is characterized in that the game machine BG1 has specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect during the specific period.

According to the gaming machine BG2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BG1, the specific effect can be executed within the specific period, so there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine BG2, the specific effect includes at least a notification mode for notifying the passing state of the game ball to the specific area during the privilege game.

According to the gaming machine BG3, since the notification mode is included in the specific effect, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

<Characteristic BH group> (Restriction control of button operation)
display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means; and displaying a specific determination result on the display means. In a gaming machine having privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege advantageous to a player when identification information for indicating is stopped and displayed, an operation means operable by the player and the operation means are operated by the player. setting execution means capable of executing settings corresponding to the operation based on the operation; and operation of the operation means when a specific condition is satisfied during the dynamic display period of the identification information. and a regulation means for regulating the execution of the setting based on the game machine BH1.

Conventionally, when a special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is notified (stopped display) through a special symbol fluctuation period of a predetermined period, and after the special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is displayed. Many devices are devised so that the player does not get tired of the game early by executing various effects (variation effects) using the period until the stop display (special symbol fluctuation period). Among them, there is a configuration in which a plurality of performance modes are prepared in advance, and the mode of the variation performance executed during the special symbol variation period is varied for each performance mode.

In the gaming machine configured in this manner, the player can be provided with different variable performances by switching the performance mode, so that the player gets tired of the game early because only the same variable performances are provided. It can be suppressed. Furthermore, there is also a gaming machine in which the player can arbitrarily switch the production mode by operating an operable operation means (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2012-249877). In such a gaming machine, since the player himself/herself can select the most interesting presentation mode from among a plurality of presentation modes, the variable presentation with low interest is executed and the player gets bored with the game early. can be suppressed. In addition, since the player himself/herself needs to operate the operation means in order to switch the production mode, the interest in the game can be improved.

However, as described above, when the effect mode can be switched at any timing by the player operating the operation means, for example, immediately before the result of the special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed, the special symbol When a short-time fluctuation period is set as the fluctuation period, the switching of the production mode makes it difficult for the player to grasp the result of the special symbol lottery, so that the desire to operate the operation means is reduced. I had a problem with it.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the motivation of players to play games.

According to the game machine BH1, it is possible to restrict the execution of the setting based on the operation of the operation means when the specific condition is satisfied during the dynamic display period of the identification information. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems.

In the gaming machine BH1, dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and determination by the dynamic display period determination means until an end condition is satisfied. a game state setting means capable of setting a short game state in which a short dynamic display period is easily determined as the dynamic display period to be displayed; A game machine BH2 characterized in that it is set as one.

According to the game machine BH2, in addition to the effects of the game machine BH1, it is possible to restrict the execution of the setting based on the operation of the operation means during the short game state, so that the setting execution means is executed. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty in grasping the discrimination result of the discriminating means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In the gaming machine BH1 or BH2, an effect mode setting means capable of setting at least a first effect mode and a second effect mode different from the first effect mode based on the setting executed by the setting executing means. A gaming machine BH3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine BH3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BH1 or BH2, different presentation modes can be set based on the operation of the operation means, so that the player does not get tired of the game early. has the effect of being able to suppress

Any one of the game machines BH1 to BH3 has specific setting means capable of executing specific settings, and the regulation means controls the setting execution means based on the operation of the operation means when the specific conditions are set. BH4, wherein the specific setting can be executed by the specific setting means without executing the setting by the BH4.

According to the game machine BH4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines BH1 to BH3, the specific setting can be performed even when the execution of the setting is restricted by operating the operation means while the specific condition is satisfied. is executed, there is an effect that the operation of the operating means can be made into a meaningful action by providing the player who has operated the operating means with an action due to the operation of the operating means.

A game machine BH4 having a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect capable of suggesting the information of the identification information stopped and displayed before the identification information is stop-displayed based on the specific setting. A gaming machine BH5 characterized by:

According to the game machine BH5, in addition to the effects of the game machine BH4, when the specific condition is satisfied, the information of the identification information stopped and displayed becomes identifiable before the stop display due to the suggestion effect, and the specific condition is satisfied. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets bored early by executing various effects by operating when the game is established.

<Feature BI group> (Information of advantageous period across multiple game states)
determining means capable of executing determination; privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the determination result by the determining means is a specific determination result; and a first game state as a game state; At least a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state and a third game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state and different from the second game state can be set. and a game state setting means, wherein the game state setting means is capable of setting the second game state after the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means is finished, and The third game state can be set when the first set condition is satisfied in the state where the second game state is set, and the state where the third game state is set is different from the first set condition. The first game state can be set when a second set condition is satisfied, and a period until the second set condition is satisfied when the second game state is set by the game state setting means. and an informing means capable of informing the advantageous period decided by the advantageous period deciding means.

Conventionally, when an advantageous game state (for example, time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player is set, the player is notified of the period during which the advantageous game state continues (the number of special symbol fluctuations). Specifically, "100 times" is displayed as the remaining period display mode indicating the period during which the advantageous gaming state continues, and the value of the remaining period display mode is displayed by subtracting 1 each time a special symbol lottery is executed. be. This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp how many more special symbol lotteries can be executed during the currently set advantageous game state.

In addition, in recent gaming machines, there are some that can set a plurality of state types as advantageous gaming states that are advantageous to the player. A second advantageous gaming state (for example, probability variable state) that is more advantageous than the first advantageous gaming state can be set.

In the gaming machine configured in this way, for example, when the first advantageous gaming state (for example, time saving state) is set, the period (remaining period) during which the first advantageous gaming state continues is notified to the player. However, there is a problem that it is not possible to notify which game state is to be set after the first advantageous game state ends. In other words, when the first advantageous gaming state ends, the player is asked if a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous gaming state is set, or is it more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous gaming state? There is a problem that it is difficult to understand what the game should be aimed at during the first advantageous game state, and the desire to play is lowered.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game by increasing the motivation of the player to play the game. .

According to the game machine BI1, when the second game state more advantageous than the first game state is set, the notifying means determines the advantageous period based on the period until the first game state is set again. is reported, even in a gaming machine having a plurality of game states more advantageous to the player than the first game state, it is possible to grasp the period during which the game state more advantageous than the first game state is set. can. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BI1, in a state in which the notifying means informs that it is the advantageous period, a suggestive effect execution capable of executing a suggestive effect for suggesting the game state set by the game state setting means. A gaming machine BI2 characterized by having means.

According to the game machine BI2, while notifying the player of the advantageous period until the first game state is set, the currently set game state can be suggested. There is an effect that it is possible to make the player interested in the game and improve the amusement of the game.

In the game machine BI2, the suggestive effect execution means provides a past suggestion for suggesting the game state set by the game state setting means in a state in which the notifying means has notified that the advantage period is reached. The game machine BI3 is characterized by being able to execute an effect.

According to the game machine BI3, it is possible to suggest to the player the game state set in the past by the suggestion effect executing means. Therefore, it is possible to predict the current game state based on the content of the past suggestive performance, or analyze the past game content during the advantageous period, so that there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved. .

In the gaming machine BI2 or BI3, the notification means can display a remaining period display mode for indicating the remaining period of the advantageous period on the display means, and the suggestive effect execution means varies the remaining period display mode. Thus, the game machine BI4 is characterized in that it is possible to suggest the currently set game state or the game state set in the past.

According to the gaming machine BI4, by varying the remaining period display mode for indicating the remaining period of the advantageous period, a suggestive effect regarding the game state is executed. There is an effect that the suggestive presentation can be executed in an easy-to-understand manner and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

Any one of the game machines BI1 to BI4 has a second suggestive effect means capable of suggesting the timing at which the first set condition can be satisfied in a state in which the notifying means informs that it is the advantageous period. A game machine BI5 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine BI5, since the player can predict the timing at which the game state will switch during the advantageous period, it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game during the advantageous period. There is

Any one of the game machines BI1 to BI5 has an advantage informing means capable of informing the player of the game state that is advantageous to the player, out of the second game state and the third game state. Game machine BI6 characterized.

According to the gaming machine BI 6, the player can grasp the superiority or inferiority of a plurality of game states set during the advantageous period. can have

<Characteristic BJ group> (1 symbol row is variably displayed by a plurality of symbol display controls)
display means for displaying suggestive information capable of suggesting a determination result; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the suggestive information displayed on the display means; and displaying a specific determination result on the display means. and a privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege advantageous to a player when a specific display mode for indicating is displayed, wherein the suggestive information is composed of a symbol row composed of a plurality of symbols. and a second symbol row composed of a plurality of symbol rows different from the first symbol row are set, and the dynamic display means comprises the first wherein the second symbol row can be dynamically displayed in a second direction different from the first direction while the symbol row is dynamically displayed in the first direction; Characteristic gaming machine BJ1.

Conventionally, as identification information for indicating the result of a special symbol lottery, there has been a technique in which a third symbol is variably displayed (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417). In addition, various productions (variation productions) are executed during the variable display of the third symbol, and the result of the special symbol lottery is suggested to the player, thereby allowing the player to play while expecting a big win. There was something I could do. Further, in a general gaming machine, a plurality of third symbols (eg, third symbols with numbers 1 to 9) constitute one symbol row, and a plurality of (eg, three) symbol rows are formed. When the symbol variation display used is executed, and a predetermined third symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position in the symbol rows other than the first symbol row, a production that increases the expectation of winning the jackpot (for example, Reach production) is executed. In this way, while the third pattern is variably displayed using a plurality of pattern rows, a variable effect is executed to indicate whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win, thereby making the player win a big win. Since the degree of expectation for winning can be gradually increased, the amusement of the game can be improved.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, the third symbol is only variably displayed for each symbol row without changing the order of the symbols forming the symbol row. There are only variations such as varying the direction of variation of each symbol row, and varying the size of each symbol row to be displayed, and the effect of the variable production using the variable display of the symbol row is more enhanced. There is a problem that further enhancement of interest in the game is demanded by raising it.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

According to the game machine BJ1, the first pattern row and the second pattern row are dynamically displayed in directions different from each other, so that the first pattern row and the second pattern row can be easily distinguished, and the discrimination result is discriminated from the suggestive information. There is an effect that it can be done easily.

The gaming machine BJ1 has dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period in which the suggestive information can be dynamically displayed, and the first symbol sequence is displayed at the start of the dynamic display period. The second symbol row is configured to be dynamically displayed in the first direction based on the establishment of a specific condition, and the symbols dynamically displayed in the first symbol row in the second direction based on the establishment of a specific condition. The gaming machine BJ2 is characterized in that the symbols forming the second symbol row are dynamically displayed in the second direction at least at positions where some of the symbols constitute the second symbol row.

According to the gaming machine BJ2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BJ1, dynamic display is performed at the position where the first symbol row and the second symbol row are overlapped, so that it is possible to execute an effect that effectively uses the display area. It has the effect of being able to

The game machine BJ2 has dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period in which the suggestive information can be dynamically displayed, and the first symbol row and the second symbol row A game machine BJ3 characterized in that it is configured to be dynamically displayed in the first direction and the second direction based on the start of the target display period.

According to the gaming machine BJ3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BJ2, the first symbol row and the second symbol row are dynamically displayed in the first direction and the second direction, respectively, based on the start of the dynamic display period. Since it is displayed, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Any one of the gaming machines BJ1 to BJ3 has display control means capable of controlling the display of the suggestive information, and the display control means displays the determination result in the display mode of the first symbol row. A gaming machine BJ4 characterized in that it is possible to display and control one symbol row.

According to the game machine BJ4, in addition to the effects of the game machine BJ3, the display mode of the first symbol row is used to display the determination result. It is possible to freely set the display mode of the dynamic display of the second symbol row. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the production effect in the dynamic display of the suggestive information, and to improve the amusement of the game.

A gaming machine BJ4 has a first display layer capable of dynamically displaying the first symbol row and a second display layer capable of dynamically displaying the second symbol row, wherein the gaming machine comprises: At least a portion of a first display area on the first display layer and a second display area on the second display layer are configured to overlap, and the first display area and the second display area overlap each other. The game machine BJ5 is characterized in that the first symbol row can be displayed with priority over the second symbol row in a place where the two display areas overlap so that it can be visually recognized by the player.

According to the gaming machine BJ5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BJ4, when the first symbol row and the second symbol row overlap, the first symbol row is displayed so as to be visible to the player. be. Therefore, there is an effect that the display mode for showing the determination result can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player while performing an effect that makes effective use of the display area.

In the gaming machine BJ4 or BJ5, the display control means controls the addition of the plurality of symbols constituting the first symbol row and the plurality of symbols constituting the second symbol row arranged in a predetermined order. The game machine BJ6 is characterized in that the display control of the first symbol row and the second symbol row can be performed so as to be constituted by the symbol rows.

According to the gaming machine BJ6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BJ4 or BJ5, the first symbol row and the second symbol row can be dynamically displayed as a total symbol row, so that the total symbol row can be displayed to the player. It can make you think that the columns are composed. Among them, the first symbol row and the second symbol row can be dynamically displayed in opposite directions, so that the player can be provided with an unexpected performance, and the performance effect can be enhanced. effective.

In the gaming machine BJ6, the display control means preferably combines the first symbol row and the above-mentioned symbol row as the combined symbol row when the determination result is other than the specific determination result rather than when the determination result is the specific determination result. A game machine BJ7 characterized in that display control is possible so as to facilitate dynamic display of the second symbol row.

According to the gaming machine BJ7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BJ6, dynamic display of the first symbol row and the second symbol row as the combined symbol row is made more difficult when the discrimination result is a specific discrimination result. be able to. Therefore, when the dynamic display of the first symbol row and the dynamic display of the second symbol row are in different modes, it is possible to heighten expectations for a specific determination result, and to enhance the production effect. It has the effect of being able to

<Characteristic BK group> (executes the tongue control of the V chance based on the number of attackers entering the ball)
A privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to a player, and when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means, a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state from a first state. A game machine having variable ball entry means that can be changed to a second state in which a ball is easily entered, a first specific area through which a game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can pass, and the first specific area. A first detection means capable of detecting that a game ball has passed through the area, a second specific area through which the game ball having passed through the first specific area can pass, and that the game ball has passed through the second specific area. a guideway capable of guiding a game ball that has passed through the first specific area to the second specific area; and an allowable state in which the game ball can pass through the second specific area. and variable means capable of changing between a regulated state in which passage is difficult and a variable means, wherein the variable means changes from the regulated state to the allowed state based on the detection of a predetermined number of game balls by the first detection means. A game machine BK1 characterized in that it is configured to be variable until a variable condition is established.

Conventionally, a game machine that provides a specific area in an attacker that is opened during a jackpot game, and sets a probability variable state after the jackpot game ends when a game ball passes through the specific area during a jackpot game (so-called V probability machine) ) was (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-119807). In such a gaming machine, by setting the first state in which the game ball is likely to pass through the specific area for a predetermined period based on the elapsed time from the start of the jackpot game, the rate at which the variable probability state is set is defined in advance. configured as possible.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, the first state is set based on the elapsed time from the execution of the jackpot game. There is a problem that the predetermined period of time during which the first state is set passes while the situation in which the game cannot be played occurs, and the player's desire to play decreases.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game by increasing the motivation of the player to play the game. .

According to the gaming machine BK1, the variable means is changed to the allowable state based on the measurement result of the game balls that have entered the variable ball entering means, so the second specific area is determined by the number of balls entering the variable ball entering means. It is possible to let the game ball pass through, and there is an effect that the interest of the player in the number of balls entered by the variable ball entry means can be improved, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BK1, the variable means changes the first specific region to the allowable state in a period during which the predetermined number of game balls can reach the variable means in the state of being changed to the allowable state. A game machine BK2 characterized in that

According to the gaming machine BK2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BK1, it is possible to allow the predetermined number of game balls that have passed through the first specific area to enter the second specific area and pass through the second specific area. There is an effect that the number of balls entering the second specific area can be limited by controlling the game balls.

a period discriminating means capable of discriminating a period until the game ball is detected by the second detecting means after the predetermined number of game balls pass through the first specific area in the game machine BK1 or BK2; , and abnormality processing means capable of executing abnormality processing based on the determination result of the period determination means.

According to the game machine BK3, in addition to the effects of the game machine BK1 or BK2, problems such as when a predetermined number of game balls pass through the first specific area but remain on the guideway can be quickly resolved. There is an effect that it can be discovered.

In any one of the game machines BK1 to BK3, the end condition is that a period shorter than a period in which the next game ball reaches the variable means after the game ball of the predetermined number is detected by the second detection means. A game machine BK4 characterized in that it is set so as to be established when it has passed.

According to the game machine BK4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines BK1 to BK3, there is an effect that a predetermined number of game balls can be reliably entered into the second specific area.

Any one of the gaming machines BK1 to BK4 is characterized by having privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege advantageous to the player based on the detection of the game ball by the second detecting means. Game machine BK5 to play.

According to the gaming machine BK5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines BK1 to BK4, even when a privilege game is executed, it is possible to motivate the player to enter the game ball into the second specific area. This has the effect of suppressing the problem that the privilege game becomes boring.

<Characteristic BL group> (Some patterns in the pattern row are switched by changing the pattern row)
discrimination means capable of executing discrimination; display means for displaying an identification pattern for indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means; and dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification pattern on the display means. a benefit granting means capable of granting a benefit advantageous to a player when the identification pattern for indicating the specific determination result is displayed after the identification pattern is dynamically displayed; and the privilege granting means. and a privilege type determining means capable of determining the privilege type to be given by means, wherein a dynamic display period including at least a period during which the identification pattern is dynamically displayed can be dynamically determined. In the first period of the display period determination means and the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means, the first identification pattern is displayed as the identification pattern for indicating the first result, and the second identification pattern is displayed. a setting means for indicating a second result different from the first result in the period, and capable of being set so that at least a second identification pattern different from the first identification pattern is displayed. A gaming machine BL1 characterized by having:

Conventionally, as identification information for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, there has been a technique in which the third symbol is variably displayed. In addition, various productions (variation productions) are executed during the variable display of the third symbol, and the result of the special symbol lottery is suggested to the player, thereby allowing the player to play while expecting a big win. There was something I could do. Further, in a general gaming machine, a plurality of third symbols (eg, third symbols with numbers 1 to 9) constitute one symbol row, and a plurality of (eg, three) symbol rows are formed. When the symbol variation display used is executed, and a predetermined third symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position in the symbol rows other than the first symbol row, a production that increases the expectation of winning the jackpot (for example, Reach production) is executed. In this way, while the third pattern is variably displayed using a plurality of pattern rows, a variable effect is executed to indicate whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win, thereby making the player win a big win. Since the degree of expectation for winning can be gradually increased, the amusement of the game can be improved.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, only the third symbol for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery changes during the variation period from the start of the third symbol variation to the stop display. During the period from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable display, the player becomes bored with the game and loses motivation to play.

DISCLOSURE OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in order to solve the problems exemplified above, and is a gaming machine capable of improving the amusement of a game by suppressing the decline in the desire to play during the period of the third symbol variation. is intended to provide

According to the gaming machine BL1, of the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means, the first identification symbol dynamically displayed in the first period and the second identification symbol dynamically displayed in the second period. Since it is possible to show a different result depending on the identification pattern, the player can continue to be interested in the identification pattern dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's desire to play during the dynamic display period, and to improve the interest in the game.

In the gaming machine BL1, the dynamic display means can stop and display the first identification symbol at the end of the first period, and the second period is a period after at least the first period has passed. A gaming machine BL2 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine BL2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BL1, the end of the first period and the start of the second period can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, so that the performance effect can be enhanced. effective.

In the game machine BL2, the dynamic display means can display the first identification pattern for indicating that the determination result of the determination means is the specific determination result as the first result. A game machine BL3 characterized by.

According to the game machine BL3, in addition to the effects of the game machine BL2, the determination result of the determination means is notified to the player before the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means elapses. Therefore, it is possible to make the player, who is trying to grasp the determination result of the determination means as soon as possible, pay attention to the dynamic display of the identification symbols executed by the dynamic display means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine BL3, the dynamic display means can display the second identification pattern for indicating the privilege type determined by the privilege type determination means as the second result. Game machine BL4.

According to the gaming machine BL4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BL3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is possible to display the identification pattern for indicating the type of privilege after the end of the second period. That is, the privilege type determined by the privilege type determination means can be displayed after displaying the determination result of the determination means. Therefore, after notifying the player that the determination result of the determining means is a specific determination result, the privilege type determined by the privilege type determining means can be notified to the player, so that at least the privilege game is executed. There is an effect that the dynamic display of the second period can be executed in a state where a sense of security is given to the user.

In the gaming machine BL4, the privilege type determination means selects any one of a plurality of privilege types including at least a first privilege type and a second privilege type that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege type. The second identification pattern determines the type of privilege, and the second identification pattern is displayed in a display mode containing at least information for indicating the type of privilege determined by the means for determining the privilege type. Characteristic game machine BL5.

According to the game machine BL5, in addition to the effects of the game machine BL4, the display mode of the second identification pattern indicates the privilege type determined by the privilege type determination means, so the second identification pattern is dynamically displayed. There is an effect that the player can predict the determined privilege means even during the period, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

The game machine BL5 has symbol row setting means capable of setting a symbol row in which the plurality of identification symbols dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means are displayed in a predetermined order, and the dynamic display means includes: The identification symbols can be dynamically displayed based on the symbol row set by the symbol row setting means, and the symbol row setting means selects at least part of the first symbol row set during the first period. A game machine BL6 characterized in that a second symbol row in which the first identification symbols to be formed are switched to the second identification symbols can be set.

According to the gaming machine BL6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BL5, the second symbol row is set by switching the first identification symbols forming at least a part of the first symbol row to the second identification symbols. The number of identification symbols possessed by the first symbol row can be the same as the number of identification symbols possessed by the second symbol row. Therefore, it is not necessary to change the dynamic display mode of the identification pattern executed by the dynamic display means according to the type of the set pattern sequence, so that the processing load for dynamically displaying the identification pattern can be reduced. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine BL6, the symbol row setting means is capable of forming the first symbol row in which the first identification symbols for indicating the same discrimination result of the discrimination means are overlapped, and sets the second symbol row. A gaming machine BL7 characterized in that, when doing so, any one of the overlapping first identification symbols can be switched to the second identification symbol.

According to the gaming machine BL7, since the first identification symbols included in the first symbol row are switched to the second identification symbols, even during the second period, the dynamic display executed during the first period It becomes possible to confirm each first identification pattern that has been displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

<Characteristic BM group> (Release restriction by another operation during restriction control of button operation)
display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means; and displaying a specific determination result on the display means. In a game machine having privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege advantageous to a player when the identification information for indicating is stopped and displayed, the operable operation means and the type of operation for the operation means a first operation and a second operation that is different from the first operation; and restriction means for restricting execution of the first setting by the setting execution means when the operation determination means determines that the first operation is performed, wherein the setting execution means is configured to perform the restriction. The game machine BM1 is characterized in that the first setting can be executed when the second operation is determined by the operation determining means during the regulation by the means.

Conventionally, when a special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is notified (stopped display) through a special symbol fluctuation period of a predetermined period, and after the special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result is displayed. Many devices are devised so that the player does not get tired of the game early by executing various effects (variation effects) using the period until the stop display (special symbol fluctuation period). Among them, a plurality of production modes are prepared in advance, and there are some that are configured to vary the aspect of the fluctuation production executed during the special symbol fluctuation period for each production mode (for example, patent Document 1: JP-A-2012-249877).

In the gaming machine configured in this manner, the player can be provided with different variable performances by switching the performance mode, so that the player gets tired of the game early because only the same variable performances are provided. It can be suppressed. Furthermore, there is also a gaming machine in which the player can arbitrarily switch the presentation mode by operating an operable operation means. In such a gaming machine, since the player himself/herself can select the most interesting presentation mode from among a plurality of presentation modes, the variable presentation with low interest is executed and the player gets bored with the game early. can be suppressed. In addition, since the player himself/herself needs to operate the operation means in order to switch the production mode, the interest in the game can be improved.

However, as described above, when the effect mode can be switched at any timing by the player operating the operation means, for example, immediately before the result of the special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed, the special symbol When a short-time fluctuation period is set as the fluctuation period, the switching of the production mode makes it difficult for the player to grasp the result of the special symbol lottery, so that the desire to operate the operation means is reduced. I had a problem with it.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the motivation of players to play games.

According to the game machine BM1, even in a state where the first setting based on the first operation is restricted, the first setting can be performed by performing the second operation. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to operate the operation means to perform various operations.

In the gaming machine BM1, the setting executing means can execute a second setting different from the first setting when the first operation is determined by the operation determining means during the restriction by the restricting means. A gaming machine BM2 characterized by:

According to the game machine BM2, in addition to the effects of the game machine BM1, when the first operation is executed during regulation, the second setting is executed. can be suppressed from doing nothing. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to operate the operating means.

In the gaming machine BM1 or BM2, dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the dynamic display period determination means until an end condition is satisfied. a game state setting means capable of setting a short game state in which a short dynamic display period is likely to be determined as the dynamic display period determined by the regulating means, the state in which the short game state is set; The gaming machine BM3 is characterized in that it can restrict execution of the first setting by the setting executing means when the operation determining means determines that the operation is the first operation.

According to the gaming machine BM3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BM1 or BM2, it is possible to restrict the execution of setting based on the operation of the operation means during the short game state, so that the setting execution means is executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty in grasping the determination result of the determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

The game machine BM3 has a performance mode setting means capable of setting at least a first performance mode and a second performance mode different from the first performance mode based on the setting executed by the setting execution means. A game machine BM4 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine BM4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BM3, different performance modes can be set based on the operation of the operating means, thereby preventing the player from quickly becoming bored with the game. It has the effect of being able to

In any one of game machines BM1 to BM4, the operation means includes a first operation unit for executing the first operation and a second operation different from the first operation unit for executing the second operation. A game machine BM5 characterized by having a part.

According to the gaming machine BM5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines BM1 to BM4, different operation units are operated when executing the first operation and when executing the second operation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from mistakenly performing the first operation and the second operation. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

The gaming machine BM6 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine BM5, the second operating section is provided at a position where it is more difficult for the player during the game to operate than the first operating section.

According to the game machine BM6, in addition to the effects of the game machine BM5, by making the ease of operation of each operation part different, the first operation using the first operation part is the normal operation, and the second operation part is operated. It is possible to make the second operation using , an emergency operation. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from worrying about which operation to perform.

<Characteristic BN group> (execution of other contents by operation during restriction control of button operation)
display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means; and displaying a specific determination result on the display means. In a gaming machine having privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege advantageous to a player when identification information for indicating is stopped and displayed, an operation means operable by the player and the operation means are operated by the player. first setting execution means capable of executing a first setting corresponding to the operation based on the operation; and regulation means for regulating execution of the first setting based on the operation of the operation means. and second setting executing means for executing a second setting different from the first setting when the operating means is operated in a state in which execution of the first setting is restricted by the restricting means. A gaming machine BN1 characterized by:

Conventionally, as identification information for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, there has been a technique in which the third symbol is variably displayed. In addition, various productions (variation productions) are executed during the variable display of the third symbol, and the result of the special symbol lottery is suggested to the player, thereby allowing the player to play while expecting a big win. There was something I could do. Further, in a general gaming machine, a plurality of third symbols (eg, third symbols with numbers 1 to 9) constitute one symbol row, and a plurality of (eg, three) symbol rows are formed. When the symbol variation display used is executed, and a predetermined third symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position in the symbol rows other than the first symbol row, a production that increases the expectation of winning the jackpot (for example, Reach production) is executed. In this way, while the third pattern is variably displayed using a plurality of pattern rows, a variable effect is executed to indicate whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win, thereby making the player win a big win. Since the degree of expectation for winning can be gradually increased, the amusement of the game can be improved.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, only the third symbol for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery changes during the variation period from the start of the third symbol variation to the stop display. During the period from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable display, the player becomes bored with the game and loses motivation to play.

DISCLOSURE OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in order to solve the problems exemplified above, and is a gaming machine capable of improving the amusement of a game by suppressing the decline in the desire to play during the period of the third symbol variation. is intended to provide

According to the gaming machine BN1, of the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means, the first identification symbol dynamically displayed in the first period and the second identification symbol dynamically displayed in the second period. Since it is possible to show a different result depending on the identification pattern, the player can continue to be interested in the identification pattern dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's desire to play during the dynamic display period, and to improve the interest in the game.

According to the game machine BN1, when the operation means is operated in a state where the first setting is restricted, the second setting is executed, so that the operation means is operated but nothing is executed. can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to operate the operating means.

In the game machine BN1, the game machine BN2 is characterized in that the regulation means can regulate execution of the first setting when a specific condition is satisfied during the dynamic display period of the identification information.

According to the gaming machine BN2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BN1, the first setting is performed because the restricting means restricts the execution of the first setting while the dynamic display of the identification information is being performed. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty in grasping the dynamic display result of the identification information.

In the gaming machine BN2, dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and determination by the dynamic display period determination means until an end condition is satisfied. a game state setting means capable of setting a short game state in which a short dynamic display period is easily determined as the dynamic display period to be displayed, and the regulation means is a state in which the short game state is set. The game machine BN3 is characterized in that it can restrict execution of the first setting by the setting executing means when the operation determining means determines that the operation is the first operation.

According to the gaming machine BN3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BN1 or BN2, it is possible to regulate the execution of the setting based on the operation of the operation means during the short game state, so that the setting execution means is executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty in grasping the determination result of the determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In a game machine BN3, an effect mode setting means capable of setting at least a first effect mode and a second effect mode different from the first effect mode based on the first setting executed by the setting executing means. A gaming machine BN4 characterized by having:

According to the gaming machine BN4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BN3, different presentation modes can be set based on the operation of the operating means, thereby preventing the player from quickly becoming bored with the game. It has the effect of being able to

In any one of game machines BN1 to BN4, the operating means includes a first operating section for executing a first operation and a first operating section for executing a second operation different from the first operation. and a second operation unit different from the game machine BM5.

According to the gaming machine BN5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines BN1 to BN4, different operation units are operated when executing the first operation and when executing the second operation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from mistakenly performing the first operation and the second operation. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In the gaming machine BN5, the second operating section is provided at a location that is more difficult for the player during the game to operate than the first operating section.

According to the game machine BN6, in addition to the effects of the game machine BN5, by making each operation part different in ease of operation, the first operation using the first operation part is set to the normal operation, and the second operation part is operated. It is possible to make the second operation using , an emergency operation. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from worrying about which operation to perform.

<Characteristic BO group> (If you change the stage in a state where it is difficult to change the stage, you have a chance)
display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means; and displaying a specific determination result on the display means. In a gaming machine having privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege advantageous to a player when identification information for indicating is stopped and displayed, an operation means operable by the player and the operation means are operated by the player. A performance mode setting means capable of setting at least a first performance mode as a performance mode and a second performance mode different from the first performance mode based on the operation, and the performance by the performance mode setting means. a period setting means capable of setting a first period in which mode setting can be performed and a second period in which setting of the production mode is more difficult than in the first period; The game machine BO1 is characterized in that the setting of the performance mode during the second period can provide more advantageous information to the player than the setting during the first period.

Conventionally, as identification information for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, there has been a technique in which the third symbol is variably displayed. In addition, various productions (variation productions) are executed during the variable display of the third symbol, and the result of the special symbol lottery is suggested to the player, thereby allowing the player to play while expecting a big win. There was something I could do. Further, in a general gaming machine, a plurality of third symbols (eg, third symbols with numbers 1 to 9) constitute one symbol row, and a plurality of (eg, three) symbol rows are formed. When the symbol variation display used is executed, and a predetermined third symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position in the symbol rows other than the first symbol row, a production that increases the expectation of winning the jackpot (for example, Reach production) is executed. In this way, while the third pattern is variably displayed using a plurality of pattern rows, a variable effect is executed to indicate whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win, thereby making the player win a big win. Since the degree of expectation for winning can be gradually increased, the amusement of the game can be improved.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, only the third symbol for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery changes during the variation period from the start of the third symbol variation to the stop display. During the period from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable display, the player becomes bored with the game and loses motivation to play.

DISCLOSURE OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in order to solve the problems exemplified above, and is a gaming machine capable of improving the amusement of a game by suppressing the decline in the desire to play during the period of the third symbol variation. is intended to provide

According to the gaming machine BO1, of the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means, the first identification symbol dynamically displayed during the first period and the second identification symbol dynamically displayed during the second period. Since it is possible to show a different result depending on the identification pattern, the player can continue to be interested in the identification pattern dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's desire to play during the dynamic display period, and to improve the interest in the game.

According to the gaming machine BO1, when the effect mode is set in the second period in which the effect mode is difficult to set, it is possible to provide advantageous information to the player, so the effect mode is set during the second period. It is possible to make the player play the game while expecting that the game will be played. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to operate the operating means, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BO1, the production mode setting means sets a third production mode different from the first production mode and the second production mode when setting the production mode during the second period. A gaming machine BO2 characterized in that

According to the game machine BO2, in addition to the effects of the game machine BO1, by setting the third effect mode, it is possible to inform the player that the effect mode has been set during the second period, There is an effect that it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means in any one of the game machines BO1 to BO3; a game state setting means capable of setting a short game state in which a short dynamic display period is easily determined as the dynamic display period determined by the period determination means, wherein the period setting means sets the short game state. The gaming machine BO4 is characterized in that the second period can be set when the second period is set.

According to the game machine BO4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines BO1 to BO3, it is possible to make it difficult to set the production mode during the short game state. It is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty in grasping the determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

Any one of the game machines BO1 to BO4 has a notification means capable of informing the player that the second period is set by the period setting means before the second period is set. Characteristic game machine BO5.

According to the gaming machine BO5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines BO1 to BO4, the player can be made to know in advance that the second period will be set, so a desired presentation mode is set. In this state, the second period can be set. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the second period from being set in the performance mode that the player does not desire and the player's willingness to play is lowered.

<Characteristic BP group> (Variable ease of stage change by looking ahead)
information acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of information acquisition conditions; information storage means for storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means; and based on the information stored in the information storage means a determination means capable of performing determination; a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the result of the determination by the determination means on a display means; a bonus game executing means capable of executing a bonus game advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating the determination result of the above is stop-displayed on the display means, a pre-determining means capable of pre-determining the information stored in the information storage means before the determination by the determining means based on the information is performed; and a switching means capable of switching the effect mode from the first effect mode to a second effect mode different from the first effect mode, and the switching condition is that the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination means is the first preliminary determination result The game machine BP1 is characterized in that the case of the second preliminary determination result different from the first preliminary determination result is more likely to be established than the case of .

Conventionally, as identification information for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, there has been a technique in which the third symbol is variably displayed. In addition, various productions (variation productions) are executed during the variable display of the third symbol, and the result of the special symbol lottery is suggested to the player, thereby allowing the player to play while expecting a big win. There was something I could do. Further, in a general gaming machine, a plurality of third symbols (eg, third symbols with numbers 1 to 9) constitute one symbol row, and a plurality of (eg, three) symbol rows are formed. When the symbol variation display used is executed, and a predetermined third symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position in the symbol rows other than the first symbol row, a production that increases the expectation of winning the jackpot (for example, Reach production) is executed. In this way, while the third pattern is variably displayed using a plurality of pattern rows, a variable effect is executed to indicate whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win, thereby making the player win a big win. Since the degree of expectation for winning can be gradually increased, the amusement of the game can be improved.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, only the third symbol for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery changes during the variation period from the start of the third symbol variation to the stop display. During the period from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable display, the player becomes bored with the game and loses motivation to play.

DISCLOSURE OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in order to solve the problems exemplified above, and is a gaming machine capable of improving the amusement of a game by suppressing the decline in the desire to play during the period of the third symbol variation. is intended to provide

According to the gaming machine BP1, of the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means, the first identification symbol dynamically displayed during the first period and the second identification symbol dynamically displayed during the second period. Since it is possible to show a different result depending on the identification pattern, the player can continue to be interested in the identification pattern dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's desire to play during the dynamic display period, and to improve the interest in the game.

According to the gaming machine BP1, the ease with which the switching condition is established can be varied according to the result of preliminary determination by the preliminary determination means. There is an effect that it is possible to make the user predict the game and improve the amusement of the game.

The gaming machine BP1 has operation means that can be operated by a player and operation determination means that can determine an operation for the operation means, and the switching condition is when the operation is determined by the operation determination means. A game machine BP2 characterized in that it can be established in

According to the gaming machine BP2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BP1, the switching condition can be established even when the player operates the operation means, so that the player is motivated to operate the operation means. This has the effect of preventing the player from getting bored with the game early.

In the gaming machine BP2, the switching means switches from the first effect mode to a third effect mode different from the second effect mode when the determination result of the preliminary determination means is the second preliminary determination result. A gaming machine BP3 characterized by being switchable.

According to the gaming machine BP3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BP2, by setting the third performance mode, the player is informed that the result of the preliminary determination by the preliminary determination means is the second preliminary determination result. becomes possible. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

In any one of the gaming machines BP1 to BP3, dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means; A game state setting means capable of setting a short game state in which a short dynamic display period is easily determined as the dynamic display period determined by the period determination means, wherein the switching condition is set to the short game state. A game machine BP4 characterized in that the short game state is less likely to be established when the short game state is set than when the short game state is not set.

According to the game machine BP4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines BP1 to BP3, it is possible to make it difficult to switch the production mode during the short game state. It is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty in grasping the determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

Any one of the game machines BP1 to BP4 has an informing means capable of informing the player that the short game state is set by the game state setting means before the short game state is set. A game machine BP5 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine BP5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines BP1 to BP4, the short gaming state can be set because the player can grasp in advance that the short gaming state will be set. The operation means can be operated intentionally to satisfy the switching condition before the switching condition is established. As a result, since it is possible to easily set the short game state in a state in which the desired performance mode is set, the short game state is set in the performance mode that the player does not desire, and the player's willingness to play is reduced. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress that it will be lost.

<5066 Series>
<Characteristic CA group> (If the number of executions of the special figure 2 lottery using the special figure 2 hold acquired during the time saving exceeds a predetermined number, the probability that advantageous benefits will be given by the special figure 2 lottery increases)
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and performing determination based on the information stored in the storage means a specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game based on the fact that the result of the decision by the decision means is the first decision result; and a specific setting after the specific game is executed. and a setting means that can be set until an end condition is satisfied, and the specific game when the determining means determines that the second determination result is different from the first determination result. setting control means capable of setting the specific setting by the setting means without executing the above, and the determination means can determine the second determination result when a specific period is set. The gaming machine CA1 is characterized in that it is configured to be able to

According to the game machine CA1, when the specific period is set, it can be determined as the second determination result. Therefore, when the specific period is set, the second determination result is determined. By setting the specific setting, the specific setting will be set at a different timing than usual, and not only the specific game will be executed, but also the period in which the specific period is set will raise expectations. There is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A configuration has been proposed in which a privilege game is executed, and an advantageous state is set in which the winning lottery of the game is likely to be executed after the completion of the privilege game (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, since the advantageous state was not set unless the privilege game was executed, there was a problem that the game became monotonous for the player who continued the game for a long time in which the result of the lottery of the game did not win. there were. It is an object of the present invention to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a game from becoming monotonous.

In the gaming machine CA1, a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball and a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means are provided, and the acquisition means is the first ball entering means. first information can be acquired as the information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means, and second information can be acquired as the information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means. A gaming machine CA2, wherein said determining means is configured to be capable of determining said second determination result based on said second information.

According to the game machine CA2, in addition to the effect of the game machine CA1, the second determination result can be determined by making the ball enter the second ball entering means. The ball entry means can change the value of the game ball entry, and when a specific period is set, the game can be played as if the second information is stored, thereby diversifying the game. By doing so, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine CA1 or CA2, the specific setting set based on the determination of the second determination result can be set for a longer period than the specific setting set after execution of the specific game. A game machine CA3 characterized in that it is a game machine CA3.

According to the game machine CA3, in addition to the effects of the game machine CA1 or CA2, the period in which the specific setting is set can be changed according to the determined result, so that the game can be diversified and the interest can be increased. There is an effect that it is possible to further improve the

<Characteristic CB group> (If you win a big hit and a short time in one special lottery, benefits and grants that are more advantageous than if you win either one)
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and performing determination based on the information stored in the storage means , a specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game based on the fact that the result of the determination by the determination means is the first determination result, and a specific condition after the specific game is executed and a setting means capable of setting a specific setting until a termination condition is satisfied based on the establishment of the second determination result different from the first determination result by the determination means. It has a setting control means capable of setting the specific setting by the setting means without executing the specific game when it is determined that the determination means is the first determination result and the first A gaming machine CB1 characterized in that it is configured so as to be capable of overlapping discrimination with 2 discrimination results.

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A configuration has been proposed in which a privilege game is executed, and an advantageous state is set in which the winning lottery of the game is likely to be executed after the completion of the privilege game (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, since the advantageous state was not set unless the privilege game was executed, there was a problem that the game became monotonous for the player who continued the game for a long time in which the result of the lottery of the game did not win. there were. It is an object of the present invention to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a game from becoming monotonous.

According to the gaming machine CB1, since the first determination result and the second determination result can be redundantly determined, the specific setting can be set even when the specific condition is not satisfied. can be made possible, and by diversifying the timing at which the specific setting is made, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the game machine CB1, when the first determination result and the second determination result are redundantly determined by the determination means, it is more advantageous to the player than when the specific game is not redundantly determined. A game machine CB2 characterized in that the type of the specific game is made to be easily executed.

According to the gaming machine CB2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine CB1, a specific game of a type that is advantageous to the player is likely to be executed due to overlapping discrimination, so that various discrimination results for the player are supported. There is an effect that the game can be diversified by providing the privilege.

In the game machine CB1 or CB2, the setting control means can set the specific setting in a period for determining whether it is the first determination result after the determination means determines the second determination result. A game machine CB3 characterized in that it is configured.

According to the gaming machine CB3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine CB1 or CB2, when it is determined as the second determination result, it is determined whether it is the first determination result executed after that. is performed, it is possible to determine whether or not the result is the first determination result in a state in which the specific setting is made, and there is an effect that determination can be performed in various states.

<Characteristic CC group> (Different degree of advantage when winning a time saving jackpot during a time saving state according to the opportunity for time saving establishment)
Determination means capable of executing determination, privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game based on the fact that the result of the determination performed by the determination means is a specific first determination result, and from the first game state and game state setting means capable of setting a second game state in which the determination by the determination means is likely to be executed, wherein the game state setting means is configured to set the second game state. As types, a first setting capable of setting the second game state after the end of the privilege game executing means and a second determination result different from the first determination result executed by the determination means. and a second setting capable of setting the second game state without executing the privilege game based on a certain condition, and the gaming machine can perform the second setting according to the setting type. It is possible to vary the selection ratio of the type of the privilege game to be executed based on the result of the determination by the determination means executed during the game state being the first determination result. game machine CC1.

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A configuration has been proposed in which a privilege game is executed, and an advantageous state is set in which the winning lottery of the game is likely to be executed after the completion of the privilege game (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, when the advantageous state is set, there is an effect that the game success or failure lottery is likely to be executed. There is a problem that the game becomes monotonous because it is provided. It is an object of the present invention to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a game from becoming monotonous.

According to the gaming machine CC1, since the selection ratio in the type of the privilege game is varied according to the setting type, it is possible to make the same second game state different, without setting many game states. There is an effect that the game can be diversified and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine CC1, the second game state is continuously set until the end condition is satisfied, and when the privilege game is executed when the second setting is set, The game machine CC2 is characterized in that it is easy to set such that the period until the end condition is satisfied after the privilege game is executed can be extended.

According to the gaming machine CC2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine CC1, the second setting makes it possible to lengthen the period during which the second gaming state is set. There is an effect that it is possible to make the player more interested in the period until the end condition is set when the privilege game is executed.

A gaming machine CC3 characterized in that in the gaming machine CC1 or CC2, the discrimination means is restricted from discriminating the second discrimination result depending on the game state.

According to the gaming machine CC3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine CC1 or CC2, since the second determination result is not determined by the game state, the user is more interested in the set game state, and the second determination result can be determined. There is an effect that it is possible to make the player expect that the game state is set.

<Characteristic CD group> (The more addicted it is, the easier it is to set advantageous time saving when time saving is established)
Discrimination means capable of executing discrimination, privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game based on the fact that the discrimination result executed by the discrimination means is a specific first discrimination result, and execution by the privilege game execution means a game state setting means capable of setting a second game state in which the discrimination by the discrimination means is more likely to be executed than the first game state after the end of the privilege game, wherein The game state setting means is capable of setting the first game state based on satisfaction of a predetermined end condition while the second game state is set, and the game machine sets the game state. A setting information determining means capable of determining setting information that can be set when the second game state is set by the means, and is set after the first setting information is set by the setting information determining means. A game machine CD1 characterized in that it is possible to set the second game state in which the end condition is difficult to be satisfied after the end of the privilege game when the second setting information to be played is discriminated.

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A configuration has been proposed in which a privilege game is executed, and an advantageous state is set in which the winning lottery of the game is likely to be executed after the completion of the privilege game (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, since the advantageous state was not set unless the privilege game was executed, there was a problem that the game became monotonous for the player who continued the game for a long time in which the result of the lottery of the game did not win. there were. It is an object of the present invention to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a game from becoming monotonous.

According to the gaming machine CD1, the longer the period in which the second game state is set, the more difficult it is for the end condition to be satisfied when the privilege game is executed. The expected period and the period during which the privilege game is not expected to be executed can be switched and set, and there is an effect that the game can be diversified and the interest of the game can be further improved.

The gaming machine CD1 has setting information setting means capable of setting the setting information based on a specific second determination result different from the specific first determination result and the determination by the determination means. 2. A gaming machine CD2, wherein said setting information setting means is configured to be capable of setting setting information corresponding to a type of set setting information.

According to the gaming machine CD2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine CD1, the setting information set according to the history of the setting information can be varied regularly, so that the period during which the second game state is set can be easily changed. There is an effect that it is possible to discriminate

In the game machine CD1 or CD2, the game machine CD3 is characterized in that the discrimination means is restricted from discriminating the second discrimination result depending on the game state.

According to the game machine CD3, in addition to the effects of the game machine CD1 or CD2, since the second determination result is not determined by the game state, the user is more interested in the set game state, and the second determination result can be determined. There is an effect that it is possible to make the player expect that the game state is set.

<Feature CE group> (Special figure 1 that can execute jackpot lottery + short-time lottery, and special figure 2 that can execute jackpot lottery + small lottery)
A first determination means capable of executing a first determination, and a first privilege can be given based on the fact that the result of the first determination performed by the first determination means is the first determination result, a first privilege granting means capable of imparting a second privilege different from the first privilege based on the result of the first discrimination being a second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result. in the machine, a second determination means capable of executing a second determination different from the first determination, and the result of the second determination performed by the second determination means is a third determination result Based on the fact that the first privilege can be granted and the result of the second determination is a fourth determination result different from the third determination result, a third benefit different from the first privilege and the second privilege a second privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege, wherein the gaming machine does not grant the third privilege based on the first determination performed by the first discrimination means; and , a gaming machine CE1 characterized in that the second privilege is not provided based on the second determination performed by the second determination means.

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. As a lottery for whether or not to grant a privilege, a configuration capable of executing a first lottery and a second lottery has been proposed (prior art document: JP 2012- 217766).

However, when the first lottery is executed and when the second lottery is executed, the privilege given when winning is the same, so there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of preventing games from becoming monotonous.

According to the gaming machine CE1, different benefits can be granted depending on whether the first determination is performed or the second determination is performed, so different determinations are performed for the player. It is possible to motivate the player to play the game, thereby preventing the game from becoming monotonous.

<Characteristic CF Group> (Specific advantageous state can be set when the second advantageous condition is established between the establishment of the first advantageous condition and the setting of the first advantageous condition)
a first determining means capable of executing a first determination for determining that a first condition is satisfied; and a first advantageous state based on determination that the first condition is satisfied by the first determining means. , second determination means capable of executing a second determination for determining whether a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, and the second determination means by the second determination means a second state setting means capable of setting a second advantageous state based on the determination that two conditions are satisfied, wherein the first determination means determines that the first condition is satisfied. After the first advantageous state is set by the first state setting means, the first advantageous state is determined based on the determination that the second condition is satisfied by the second determining means. A gaming machine CF1 characterized by having third state setting means capable of setting a state and a third advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the second advantageous state.

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. As a lottery for whether or not to grant a privilege, a configuration capable of executing a first lottery and a second lottery has been proposed (prior art document: JP 2012- 217766).

However, both when the first lottery is executed and when the second lottery is executed, when the lottery result is a lottery result in which a privilege is given, the privilege corresponding to each is only awarded. , there was a problem that the game becomes monotonous. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of preventing games from becoming monotonous.

According to the gaming machine CF1, the first advantageous state is set based on the establishment of the first condition, and the second advantageous state is set based on the establishment of the second condition. If the second condition is met after the first condition is met and before the first advantageous state is set, it is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state. A third advantageous state is set. Therefore, since the player can be interested in the timing at which the first condition is established and the timing at which the second condition is established, the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous. .

<Characteristic CG group> (executing an advantageous lottery at a specific period)
Determination means capable of executing determination, privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game based on the fact that the result of the determination by the determination means is a first determination result, a first game state, and the first game game state setting means capable of setting one game state from among a plurality of game states including at least a second game state different from the game state, wherein the game state setting means is configured to set the game state to the first game state; It is possible to set the second game state based on the result of the determination by the determination means executed in the state where the game state is set is a second determination result different from the first determination result, The first game state can be set based on the establishment of the end condition in the state in which the second game state is set, and the determination means executed in the state in which the first game state is set. is a third determination result different from the first determination result and the second determination result, a third game state that is more advantageous to the player than the second game state can be set. A gaming machine CG1 characterized by:

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A configuration has been proposed in which a privilege game is executed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).

However, there is a problem that the lottery with the same contents is always executed, and the game becomes monotonous. It is an object of the present invention to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a game from becoming monotonous.

According to the gaming machine CG1, it is possible to make it difficult to set the third game state while the second game state is set. Aim for the set game. Therefore, since it is possible to execute a game with different degrees of advantage according to the game situation, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In the game machine CG1, the determination means can execute the determination so that the probability that the result of the determination will be the third determination result is lower than the probability that the result of the determination will be the second determination result. Game machine CG2 to play.

According to the game machine CG2, in addition to the effects of the game machine CG1, the second determination result is more likely than the third determination result. A game aimed at setting the third game state can be played while avoiding the transition of the game state to the second game state in which the third game state is difficult to be set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine CG1 or CG2, a first condition that can be established based on the fact that the number of times of the determination by the determination means that is executed in the state where the second game state is set as the end condition reaches a predetermined number of times. A game machine CG3 characterized by having end condition setting means capable of setting at least end conditions.

According to the gaming machine CG3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine CG1 or CG2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the second game state can be terminated when the number of determinations executed during the second game state reaches a predetermined number of times, the determination by the determination means in the first game state is performed at least in a specific cycle. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine CG3, the end condition setting means can set a second end condition that can be established based on the result of the determination by the determination means being a specific determination result. .

According to the game machine CG4, in addition to the effects of the game machine CG3, the second game state can be ended at an interval shorter than the specific period by satisfying the second end condition. There is an effect that a game with unexpectedness can be provided.

In any one of the game machines CG1 to CG4, the determination means is executed during the second game state with a probability that the result of the determination executed during the first game state is the third determination result. The game machine CG5 is characterized in that the determination can be executed so that the probability that the result of the determination becomes the third determination result is lower.

According to the game machine CG5, in addition to the effects of the game machines CG1 to CG4, the following effects are produced. That is, since the third game state is more likely to be set in the first game state than in the second game state, the game is played while expecting that the discrimination will be executed in a situation where the second game state is not set. It has the effect of being able to

<Characteristic CH group> (It is possible to set the time saving that it is better to finish and the time saving that it is better not to finish)
Determination means capable of executing determination, privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game based on the fact that the result of the determination performed by the determination means is a specific first determination result, and a first game state. and game state setting means capable of setting one game state out of a plurality of game states including at least a second game state different from the first game state, wherein the game state setting means. As a setting type for setting the second game state by, a first setting that can set the second game state after the end of the privilege game execution means, and a result of the determination performed by the determination means are the A type setting means capable of setting at least a second setting capable of setting the second game state without executing the privilege game based on the fact that the second determination result is different from the first determination result. The game state setting means selects an advantageous second game state that is more advantageous than the first game state and a game state that is more disadvantageous than the first game state according to the setting type set by the type setting means. A game machine CH1 characterized by being able to set a disadvantageous second game state.

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A configuration has been proposed in which a privilege game is executed, and an advantageous state is set in which the winning lottery of the game is likely to be executed after the completion of the privilege game (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, there is a problem that the advantageous state is only set after the privilege game is executed, and the game becomes monotonous. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of preventing games from becoming monotonous.

According to the gaming machine CH1, it is possible to set a game state more advantageous than the first game state and a game state more disadvantageous than the first game state, thereby preventing the game from becoming monotonous. It has the effect of being able to

<Technical concept of 5068>
<Feature DA group> (If the number of executions of the special figure 2 lottery using the special figure 2 hold acquired during the time saving exceeds a predetermined number, the probability that advantageous benefits will be given by the special figure 2 lottery increases)
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and performing determination based on the information stored in the storage means a specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game based on the fact that the result of the decision by the decision means is the first decision result; and a specific setting after the specific game is executed. and a setting means capable of setting until an end condition is satisfied, in the game machine, when the determination means determines that the second determination result is different from the first determination result, the specific game setting control means capable of setting the specific setting by the setting means without executing the above, and the determination means can determine the second determination result when a specific period is set. A gaming machine DA1 characterized in that it is configured to be able to

According to the game machine DA1, when the specific period is set, it can be determined as the second determination result. By setting the specific setting, the specific setting will be set at a different timing than usual, and not only the specific game will be executed, but also the period in which the specific period is set will raise expectations. There is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A configuration has been proposed in which a privilege game is executed, and an advantageous state is set in which the winning lottery of the game is likely to be executed after the completion of the privilege game (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, since the advantageous state was not set unless the privilege game was executed, there was a problem that the game became monotonous for the player who continued the game for a long time in which the result of the lottery of the game did not win. there were. It is an object of the present invention to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a game from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine DA1 has a first ball entering means for entering a game ball and a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, wherein the obtaining means is the first ball entering means. first information can be acquired as the information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means, and second information can be acquired as the information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means. The game machine DA2 is characterized in that the discrimination means is configured to be able to discriminate the second discrimination result based on the second information.

According to the gaming machine DA2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine DA1, the second determination result can be determined by making the ball enter the second ball entering means. The ball entry means can change the value of the game ball entry, and when a specific period is set, the game can be played as if the second information is stored, thereby diversifying the game. By doing so, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine DA1 or DA2, the specific setting set based on the determination of the second determination result can be set for a longer period than the specific setting set after execution of the specific game. A gaming machine DA3 characterized in that the game machine DA3 is

According to the gaming machine DA3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine DA1 or DA2, the period during which the specific setting is set can be changed according to the discrimination result, so that the game can be diversified and interesting. There is an effect that it is possible to further improve the

<Feature DB group> (If you win both a big hit and a short time in one special lottery, benefits and grants that are more advantageous than if you win either one)
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and performing determination based on the information stored in the storage means , a specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game based on the fact that the result of the determination by the determination means is the first determination result, and a specific condition after the specific game is executed and a setting means capable of setting a specific setting until a termination condition is satisfied based on the establishment of the second determination result different from the first determination result by the determination means. It has a setting control means capable of setting the specific setting by the setting means without executing the specific game when it is determined that the determination means is the first determination result and the first 2. A game machine DB 1 characterized in that it is configured so as to be capable of overlapping discrimination with 2 discrimination results.

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A configuration has been proposed in which a privilege game is executed, and an advantageous state is set in which the winning lottery of the game is likely to be executed after the completion of the privilege game (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, since the advantageous state was not set unless the privilege game was executed, there was a problem that the game became monotonous for the player who continued the game for a long time in which the result of the lottery of the game did not win. there were. It is an object of the present invention to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a game from becoming monotonous.

According to the gaming machine DB 1, since the first determination result and the second determination result can be redundantly determined, the specific setting can be set even when the specific condition is not satisfied. can be made possible, and by diversifying the timing at which the specific setting is made, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine DB 1, when the first determination result and the second determination result are redundantly determined by the determination means, it is more advantageous to the player than when the specific game is not redundantly determined. A game machine DB 2 characterized in that the type of the specific game is one that is easy to execute.

According to the gaming machine DB2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine DB1, a specific game of a type that is advantageous to the player is likely to be executed due to overlapping discrimination, so that various discrimination results for the player are supported. There is an effect that the game can be diversified by providing the privilege.

In the gaming machine DB1 or DB2, the setting control means can set the specific setting in a period of time to determine whether the first determination result is obtained after the determination means determines the second determination result. A gaming machine DB 4 characterized by being configured.

According to the gaming machine DB4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine DB1 or DB2, when the second determination result is determined, it is specifically set to the period during which it is determined whether the first determination result is executed after that. is performed, it is possible to determine whether or not the result is the first determination result in a state in which the specific setting is made, and there is an effect that determination can be performed in various states.

<Characteristic DC group> (Different degree of advantage when short-time jackpot is elected during short-time state, depending on the opportunity for short-time establishment)
Determination means capable of executing determination, privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game based on the fact that the result of the determination performed by the determination means is a specific first determination result, and from the first game state and game state setting means capable of setting a second game state in which the determination by the determination means is likely to be executed, wherein the game state setting means is configured to set the second game state. As types, a first setting capable of setting the second game state after the end of the privilege game executing means and a second determination result different from the first determination result executed by the determination means. and a second setting capable of setting the second game state without executing the privilege game based on a certain condition, and the gaming machine can perform the second setting according to the setting type. It is possible to vary the selection ratio of the type of the privilege game to be executed based on the result of the determination by the determination means executed during the game state being the first determination result. game machine DC1.

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A configuration has been proposed in which a privilege game is executed, and an advantageous state is set in which the winning lottery of the game is likely to be executed after the completion of the privilege game (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, when the advantageous state is set, there is an effect that the game success or failure lottery is likely to be executed. There is a problem that the game becomes monotonous because it is provided. It is an object of the present invention to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a game from becoming monotonous.

According to the gaming machine DC1, since the selection ratio in the type of privilege game is varied according to the setting type, it is possible to make the same second game state different, without setting a large number of game states. There is an effect that the game can be diversified and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine DC1, the second game state is continuously set until the end condition is satisfied, and when the privilege game is executed when the second setting is set, The game machine DC2 is characterized in that it is easy to set such that the period until the end condition is satisfied after the privilege game is executed can be extended.

According to the gaming machine DC2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine DC1, the second setting makes it possible to lengthen the period during which the second gaming state is set. There is an effect that it is possible to make the player more interested in the period until the end condition is set when the privilege game is executed.

In the game machine DC1 or DC2, the game machine DC3 is characterized in that the discrimination means is restricted from discriminating the second discrimination result depending on the game state.

According to the game machine DC3, in addition to the effects of the game machine DC1 or DC2, since the second determination result is not determined by the game state, the user is more interested in the set game state, and the second determination result can be determined. There is an effect that it is possible to make the player expect that the game state is set.

<Characteristic DD group> (The more addicted you are, the easier it is to set advantageous time saving when time saving is established)
Discrimination means capable of executing discrimination, privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game based on the fact that the discrimination result executed by the discrimination means is a specific first discrimination result, and execution by the privilege game execution means a game state setting means capable of setting a second game state in which the discrimination by the discrimination means is more likely to be executed than the first game state after the end of the privilege game, wherein The game state setting means is capable of setting the first game state based on satisfaction of a predetermined end condition while the second game state is set, and the game machine sets the game state. It has a setting information determination means capable of determining setting information that can be set when the second game state is set by the means, and is set after the first setting information by the setting information determination means. A gaming machine DD1 is characterized in that it is possible to set the second game state in which the end condition is unlikely to be satisfied after the end of the privilege game when the second setting information to be played is determined.

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A configuration has been proposed in which a privilege game is executed, and an advantageous state is set in which the winning lottery of the game is likely to be executed after the completion of the privilege game (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, since the advantageous state was not set unless the privilege game was executed, there was a problem that the game became monotonous for the player who continued the game for a long time in which the result of the lottery of the game did not win. there were. It is an object of the present invention to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a game from becoming monotonous.

According to the gaming machine DD1, the longer the period in which the second game state is set, the more difficult it is for the end condition to be met when the privilege game is executed. The expected period and the period during which the privilege game is not expected to be executed can be switched and set, and there is an effect that the game can be diversified and the interest of the game can be further improved.

The game machine DD1 has setting information setting means capable of setting the setting information based on the determination by the determination means of a specific second determination result different from the specific first determination result. 2. A gaming machine DD2, wherein said setting information setting means is configured to be capable of setting setting information corresponding to a type of set setting information.

According to the gaming machine DD2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine DD1, the setting information set according to the history of the setting information can be varied regularly, so that the period during which the second game state is set can be easily changed. There is an effect that it is possible to discriminate

In the game machine DD1 or DD2, the game machine DD3 is characterized in that the discrimination means is restricted from discriminating the second discrimination result depending on the game state.

According to the game machine DD3, in addition to the effects of the game machine DD1 or DD2, since the second determination result is not determined by the game state, the user is more interested in the set game state, and the second determination result can be determined. There is an effect that it is possible to make the player expect that the game state is set.

<Feature DE group> (Special figure 1 that can execute jackpot lottery + short-time lottery, and special figure 2 that can execute jackpot lottery + small lottery)
A first determination means capable of executing a first determination, and a first privilege can be given based on the fact that the result of the first determination performed by the first determination means is the first determination result, a first privilege granting means capable of granting a second privilege different from the first privilege based on the fact that the result of the first discrimination is the second discrimination result, wherein the first discrimination and the is a second determination means capable of executing a different second determination, and the first privilege is given based on the result of the second determination performed by the second determination means being a specific second determination result possible, and based on the fact that the result of the second determination is a fourth determination result different from the third determination result, a third benefit that is different from the first benefit and the second benefit can be granted 2 privilege granting means, wherein the gaming machine does not grant the third privilege based on the first discrimination performed by the first discrimination means, and the second discrimination means The gaming machine DE1 is configured so that the second privilege is not given based on the second determination executed by the game machine DE1.

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. As a lottery for whether or not to grant a privilege, a configuration capable of executing a first lottery and a second lottery has been proposed (prior art document: JP 2012- 217766).

However, when the first lottery is executed and when the second lottery is executed, the privilege given when winning is the same, so there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of preventing games from becoming monotonous.

According to the gaming machine DE1, different benefits can be granted depending on whether the first determination is performed or the second determination is performed, so different determinations are performed for the player. It is possible to motivate the player to play the game, thereby preventing the game from becoming monotonous.

<Characteristic DF Group> (When a second advantageous condition is established between the establishment of the first advantageous condition and the setting of the first advantageous condition, a specific advantageous condition can be set.)
a first determination means capable of executing a first determination for determining that a first condition is satisfied; and a display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a first determination result by the first determination means. a first dynamic display means capable of statically displaying the first identification information in a manner indicating the first determination result after dynamically displaying the first identification information; a second determination means capable of performing a second determination; A second motion capable of statically displaying the second identification information for indicating the second determination result by the second determination means on the display means and then statically displaying the second determination result. and a target display means for setting a specific game state when dynamic display of the first identification information for setting an advantageous game state that can be advantageous to the player is started. When the game state setting means and the specific game state are set, the second determination result which is advantageous to the player can be easily determined by the second determination means. A game machine DF1.

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. As a lottery for whether or not to grant a privilege, a configuration capable of executing a first lottery and a second lottery has been proposed (prior art document: JP 2012- 217766).

However, when the first lottery is executed and the second lottery is executed, if the lottery result is that a privilege is awarded, the corresponding privilege is only awarded, and the game is not performed. There was a problem of monotony. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of preventing games from becoming monotonous.

According to the gaming machine DF1, the first advantageous state is set based on the establishment of the first condition, and the second advantageous state is set based on the establishment of the second condition. If the second condition is met after the first condition is met and before the first advantageous state is set, it is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state. A third advantageous state is set. Therefore, since the player can be interested in the timing at which the first condition is established and the timing at which the second condition is established, the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous. .

In the gaming machine DF1, in the dynamic display of the first identification information in which the advantageous gaming state is set, the dynamic display of the second identification information executed in the specific game state is longer than the period during which the dynamic display can be executed multiple times. The dynamic display of the period is controlled to be selected from the dynamic display mode group in which the dynamic display of the period is likely to be selected, and when the specific game state is set, the dynamic display of the second identification information A dynamic display mode is selected from a dynamic display mode group in which a dynamic display mode configured with a dynamic display period shorter than that of a normal game state is likely to be selected. game machine DF2.

According to the gaming machine DF2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine DF1, the specific game state can be set long by selecting a long dynamic display period as the dynamic display period of the first identification information. By setting the dynamic display period of the second identification information to be short, the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed many times, so that the player can dynamically display the second identification information more often. There is an effect that it is easy to motivate the player, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine DF1 or DF2, when the specific game state is set, it is possible to set a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the advantageous game state based on the specific second determination result. A game machine DF3, characterized in that the game machine DF3 is

According to the game machine DF3, in addition to the effects of the game machine DF1 or DF2, when the second identification information becomes a specific second determination result, a game state more advantageous than the advantageous game state is set in the specific game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the privilege given to the player can be changed according to the remaining period of the specific game state, and the game can be diversified.

In any one of the game machines DF1 to DF3, the dynamic display of the second identification information is stopped and displayed, and the dynamic display of the first identification information dynamically displayed due to the establishment of a specific condition is changed to the The game machine DF4 is characterized in that it is constructed so as to be able to forcibly stop display so that an advantageous game state is not set.

According to the gaming machine DF4, in any of the gaming machines DF1 to DF3, the advantageous gaming state that should be set by the dynamic display of the second identification information can be forcibly discarded, thus diversifying the games. It has the effect of being able to

In any one of the gaming machines DF1 to DF4, when the specific game state is set and the dynamic display of the second identification information ends to execute the privilege game, dynamic display is performed. The game machine DF5 is configured so as to be capable of interrupting the dynamic display period of the first identification information, and resuming the dynamic display after execution of the privilege game is completed.

According to the gaming machine DF5, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines DF1 to DF4, during the period when the privilege game is played, after the dynamic display of the first identification information is interrupted, after the privilege game ends Since the game is resumed, the privilege game is executed, thereby reducing the expectation for the advantageous game state, thereby suppressing the problem of lowering the value of the privilege game.

In any one of the gaming machines DF1 to DF5, the advantageous gaming state is set when the first identification information is dynamically displayed in which a privilege game to be executed after the dynamic display of the first identification information is performed. and a second setting condition that is set when the first identification information is dynamically displayed so that the privilege game is not executed. A gaming machine DF6 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine DF6, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines DF1 to DF5, the advantageous gaming state is set even if the privilege game is not executed, so that the timing at which the advantageous gaming state is set. can be made difficult to predict, and there is an effect that the game can be given a freshness.

<Characteristic DG group> (executing advantageous lottery at a specific period)
Determination means capable of executing determination, privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game based on the fact that the result of the determination by the determination means is a first determination result, a first game state, and the first game game state setting means capable of setting one game state from among a plurality of game states including at least a second game state different from the game state, wherein the game state setting means is capable of setting the game state to the first game state; It is possible to set the second game state based on the result of the determination by the determination means executed in the state where the game state is set is a second determination result different from the first determination result, The first game state can be set based on the establishment of the end condition in the state in which the second game state is set, and the determination means executed in the state in which the first game state is set. is a third determination result different from the first determination result and the second determination result, a third game state that is more advantageous to the player than the second game state can be set. A gaming machine DG1 characterized by:

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A configuration has been proposed in which a privilege game is executed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).

However, there is a problem that the lottery with the same contents is always executed, and the game becomes monotonous. It is an object of the present invention to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a game from becoming monotonous.

According to the gaming machine DG1, it is possible to make it difficult to set the third game state while the second game state is set. Aim for the set game. Therefore, since it is possible to execute a game with different degrees of advantage according to the game situation, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In the game machine DG1, the determination means can execute the determination so that the probability that the result of the determination will be the third determination result is lower than the probability that the result of the determination will be the second determination result. Gaming machine DG2.

According to the gaming machine DG2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine DG1, the second discrimination result is more likely than the third discrimination result. A game aimed at setting the third game state can be played while avoiding the transition of the game state to the second game state in which the third game state is difficult to be set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine DG1 or DG2, a first condition that can be established based on the fact that the number of times of the discrimination by the discrimination means executed in the state where the second game state is set as the end condition reaches a predetermined number of times. A game machine DG3 characterized by having an end condition setting means capable of setting at least an end condition.

According to the gaming machine DG3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine DG1 or DG2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the second game state can be terminated when the number of determinations executed during the second game state reaches a predetermined number of times, the determination by the determination means in the first game state is performed at least in a specific cycle. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine DG3, the end condition setting means can set a second end condition that can be established based on the result of the determination by the determination means being a specific determination result. .

According to the gaming machine DG4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine DG3, the second game state can be terminated at an interval shorter than the specific period by satisfying the second end condition. There is an effect that a game with unexpectedness can be provided.

In any one of the game machines DG1 to DG4, the determination means is executed during the second game state with a higher probability that the result of the determination executed during the first game state becomes the third determination result. The game machine DG5 is characterized in that the discrimination can be executed so that the probability that the result of the discrimination becomes the third discrimination result is lower.

According to the game machine DG5, in addition to the effects of the game machines DG1 to DG4, the following effects are produced. That is, since the third game state is more likely to be set in the first game state than in the second game state, the game is played while expecting that the discrimination will be executed in a situation where the second game state is not set. It has the effect of being able to

<Characteristic DH group> (It is possible to set the time saving that is better to end and the time saving that is better not to end)
A case in which a determining means capable of performing determination, a display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determining means, and identification information for indicating a specific determination result are displayed. One game state can be set from among a plurality of game states including at least a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game, a first game state, and a second game state different from the first game state. a game state setting means, wherein a first state in which a game state advantageous to a player is set by satisfying a termination condition for terminating the setting of a second game state; and the termination condition. The game machine DH1 is characterized in that it has a state setting means capable of setting a second state in which a game state is set which is more playable than the case where the game is terminated when the game is not established.

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. A configuration has been proposed in which a privilege game is executed, and an advantageous state is set in which the winning lottery of the game is likely to be executed after the completion of the privilege game (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, there is a problem that the advantageous state is only set after the privilege game is executed, and the game becomes monotonous. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of preventing games from becoming monotonous.

According to the gaming machine DH1, when the second game state is set, it is possible to vary the degree of expectation for the satisfaction of the end condition by setting the first state and the second state. There is an effect that the enjoyment of the game can be improved by changing the enjoyment caused by the end of the state.

In the gaming machine DH1, the first game state is set by satisfying the end condition when the first state is set, and the second game state is changed from the state in which the first game state is set. The game machine DH2 is characterized in that the second state is set based on the setting.

According to the gaming machine DH2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine DH1, after the first state is set, the second gaming state is set through the first gaming state, and the second gaming state is set. Advantageous game states are set according to the order in which the states are set, and there is an effect that the game can be easily continued while the degree of expectation is gradually increased.

In the gaming machine DH1 or DH2, the second game state includes a first condition that can be set when the identification information for executing the privilege game is dynamically displayed, and the privilege game is executed. and a second condition that can be set when the dynamic display of the identification information that is not displayed is performed.

According to the game machine DH3, in addition to the effects of the game machine DH1 or DH2, the timing at which the second game state is set can be diversified, and there is an effect that a fresh game can be provided.

<Feature DI group> (If special figure 2 lottery is executed in normal state, penalty for special figure 1 lottery for a predetermined period)
In a game machine having a first determination means capable of executing a first determination and a second determination means capable of performing a second determination different from the first determination, the first determination means and the second determination a first setting that can be set if the means are determined in a first order; and a second setting that can be set if the means are determined in a second order different from the first order. A gaming machine DI1 characterized by having a setting means capable of setting .

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, determination of a win or the like is executed in a predetermined order by a plurality of triggers, and a player is notified based on the determination result, and when a specific notification such as a win is given. A configuration has been proposed in which a privilege that is advantageous to a player is given (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).

However, even if the order in which the determination of winning or the like is executed is different, the game is only executed based on the individual determination result, and the game with different game characteristics is executed by changing the order. There is a problem that the game becomes monotonous because there is no such thing. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of preventing games from becoming monotonous.

According to the game machine DI1, since different settings are made according to the execution order of the first discrimination and the second discrimination, it is possible to make the player interested in the order in which the discrimination is executed, and to improve the amusement of the game. effective.

The game machine DI1 has game state setting means capable of setting a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, and the game state setting means is configured to perform the first determination. The game machine DI2 is characterized in that the second game state can be set based on the fact that the first determination is made, and the first game state can be set based on the execution of the first determination.

According to the game machine DI2, in addition to the effects of the game machine DI1, the first game state can be set periodically, and the game state can be changed in a constant cycle to improve the interest of the game. .

In the gaming machine DI2, the game state setting means can set the second game state based on the execution of the second determination, and then set the game state based on the execution of the second determination. A gaming machine DI3 characterized by being able to set a first gaming state.

By alternately executing the first discrimination and the second discrimination, the first game state can be continuously set, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved by making the order of discrimination interesting. .

In any one of the game machines DI1 to DI3, the first setting executes the first privilege game based on the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result, and the second setting performs the specific A gaming machine DI4 characterized in that a second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game is executed based on the first discrimination result or the specific second discrimination result.

According to the game machine DI4, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the game machines DI1 to DI3, the second setting can be made advantageous to the player, and the interest in the game can be varied in the order of discrimination. has the effect of being able to

In any one of the game machines DI2 to DI4, the game state setting means, when the second determination is executed next to the first determination that triggered the setting of the second game state, a plurality of The game machine DI5 is characterized in that the first game state can be set based on the establishment of a setting condition that can be established by executing at least the first determination of times.

<Characteristic DJ group> (Three game states can be set: normal state, advantageous state, and super advantageous state. From the normal state, it is possible to shift to either the advantageous state or the super advantageous state. Playability that makes it difficult to transition to a state)
Determination means capable of executing determination, privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game based on the fact that the result of the determination performed by the determination means is a first determination result, and a game rather than a first game state One game state can be set from a plurality of game states including a second game state advantageous to the player and a third game state more advantageous to the player than the second game state. , wherein the game state setting means is capable of setting the second game state after the privilege game ends, and the game is executed in the state in which the first game state is set. The third game state can be set based on the result of the determination by the determination means being a second determination result different from the first determination result, and the determination means sets the first game state. It is easier to determine the second determination result in the determination performed in the state where the second game state is set than in the determination performed in the state where the second game state is set. , the third game state is better when the determination is performed when the first game state is set than when the determination is performed when the second game state is set. A game machine DJ1 characterized in that it is configured so that is easy to set.

Conventionally, a game machine such as a pachinko machine is configured to allow a player to switch between various game states by setting a plurality of game states and switching the game state when conditions such as winning are satisfied. Therefore, a configuration has been proposed to increase the motivation to play (prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

Further, the game state can be set to have different degrees of advantage for the player as a plurality of game states. There is a game that maintains a high desire to play by aiming to switch to a more advantageous game state than the current one.

However, in the above-described conventional type gaming machine, when the game state is periodically switched, the player does not get tired of the game early and can continue to have a high desire to play. If a game state with a low degree of advantage continues for a long time without switching, there is a problem that the player's desire to play the game is remarkably lowered. It is intended to solve the problems exemplified above, and to provide a game machine capable of improving interest.

According to the gaming machine DJ1, the first game state is more disadvantageous to the player than the second game state, and the third game state is more advantageous to the player than the second game state. Easy-to-set discrimination is performed. Therefore, for a player who has been set to the first game state, a game aiming to set the second game state after the privilege game is executed, and a game aiming to set the third game state. , can be executed in parallel, and there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine that prevents the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

Further, by continuing the first game state for a long time without switching the game state to the second game state, it is possible to increase the possibility of the game state being switched to the third game state, which is disadvantageous to the player. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play from decreasing even when the first game state continues.

In the game machine DJ1, the determination means can execute a first determination based on the establishment of a first determination condition, and execute a second determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition. In the first game state and the second game state, establishment of the second determination condition is restricted, and in the third game state, establishment of the second determination condition is permitted. A game machine DJ2 characterized in that it is set to

According to the game machine DJ2, in addition to the effects of the game machine DJ1, the ease with which the determination condition is satisfied is changed for each type depending on the game state, so that the game method can be varied, and the game can be given a freshness. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine DJ1 or DJ2, the game state setting means can set the second game state when the third game state is set and a specific determination result is determined by the second determination. A game machine DJ3 characterized in that it is configured as follows.

According to the game machine DJ3, in addition to the effects of the game machine DJ1 or DJ2, it is possible to shift to the second game state, which is an advantageous game state, even after the third game state, thereby making the state more advantageous to the player. There is an effect that it can be continued for a long period of time.

<Characteristic DK group> (Accumulate pending during time saving)
A ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means, and the information acquired by the acquisition means A storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of up to a predetermined number; a determination means capable of executing determination based on the information stored in the storage means; 1 privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game based on the determination result, and capable of discriminating the information stored in the storage means prior to the discrimination by the discrimination means. a prior determination means, a first game state, and a second game state capable of making it easier for a game ball to enter the ball-entering means than in the first game state are established based on the information. and game state setting means that can be set based on possible conditions, wherein when the second game state is set, the first condition is set based on the preliminary determination result by the preliminary determination means. A game machine DK1 characterized by having a specific effect executing means configured to execute a specific effect that is not executed in the first game state by being established.

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, information such as a random number is acquired when a game ball enters a starting hole, etc., and a lottery is executed based on the random number. A configuration has been proposed that determines whether or not to grant an advantageous privilege (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).

Furthermore, the acquired information can be stored up to a predetermined number as the upper limit, and the game state includes a first game state in which it is difficult to enter the game ball into the starting hole or the like, and a second game state. A configuration has been proposed in which it is possible to set a second game state in which a game ball is easier to enter than in the first game state.

In such a conventional gaming machine, ending the second game state in a state in which more information is stored tends to be the most advantageous game for the player. A game was played by a player to enter a large number of game balls.

However, depending on the content of the lottery based on the information already acquired, there are cases where the right to set the second game state again has been acquired even after the currently set second game state has ended. There is a risk that the player will unnecessarily enter a game ball into the starting hole or the like to play a game. Also, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous just before the second game state ends, and the interest in the game decreases. It is an object of the present invention to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine DK1, it is possible to early identify that the first condition is established by executing the specific effect based on the result of the preliminary determination during the second game state, and the second game. There is an effect that it is possible to increase the value of the setting of the state and improve the amusement of the game.

In the gaming machine DK1, a first ball-entering means and a second ball-entering means different from the first ball-entering means are arranged as the ball-entering means, and the discrimination means is the first ball-entering means. performing a first determination based on the ball hitting means, and performing a second determination that is more advantageous than the first determination based on the second ball hitting means; The game machine DK2 is characterized in that the second game state facilitates the variable means from the first state to the second state.

According to the gaming machine DK2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine DK1, in the second game state, there is an effect that the second ball-entering means can increase the frequency of ball entry, thereby increasing the interest of the player.

In the gaming machine DK1 or DK2, a first termination condition and a second termination condition more advantageous to the player than the first termination condition can be set as termination conditions of the second game state. The gaming machine DK3 is characterized in that the first condition can be satisfied based on the determination that the second end condition can be satisfied by the prior determination.

According to the game machine DK3, in addition to the effects of the game machine DK1 or DK2, the satisfaction of the first condition makes it possible to store more information and execute more advantageous second determinations. By executing the specific effect, it can be determined early that the second determination will be executed more often, and there is an effect that expectations for the game can be increased in advance.

<Technical concept of 5072>
<Characteristic EA group> (Different states (ceiling and production) can be set)
When a determination means capable of performing determination, a display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means and a privilege imparting means capable of imparting a privilege advantageous to a player, wherein a first setting can be set based on establishment of a specific condition when a first game state is set. and setting means capable of setting a second setting different from the first setting based on establishment of the specific condition when a second game state different from the first game state is set. A gaming machine EA1 characterized by:

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and symbols for informing the result of the lottery are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time. After that, the symbols are stop-displayed in a manner indicating the result of the lottery, and when the result of the lottery indicating the failure is notified, the variable display of the symbols for indicating the result of the next lottery is started. When the result of the lottery is a win, after a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed, the game state is changed to a game state advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A configuration capable of achieving this has been proposed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that further enhances the enjoyment of games.

According to the gaming machine EA1, since the setting type differs between the first game state and the second game state when the specific condition is satisfied, the game setting can be varied in various ways, and the specific condition can be set in the first game state. is satisfied or the specific condition is satisfied in the second game state, the interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine EA1, the specific condition is set to be satisfied when a condition corresponding to the number of times the identification information is dynamically displayed is satisfied. 2. The gaming machine EA2 according to claim 1, wherein the counted value is maintained even after transitioning to a game state.

According to the gaming machine EA2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine EA1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the count value of the number of times is maintained even when the game state changes, there is an effect that the number of times until the specific condition is satisfied can be reached while the game state is varied in various ways.

In the gaming machine EA1 or EA2, the first setting can set an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player in a first period, and the second setting is a second period longer than the first period. The game machine EA3 is characterized in that it is possible to set the advantageous state with .

According to the gaming machine EA3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine EA1 or EA2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the advantage state can be set for a long period of time by setting the second setting, there is an effect that the enjoyment of the game can be improved by varying the degree of advantage according to the establishment of the specific condition.

In any one of the game machines EA1 to EA3, when the determination result by the determination means is a first determination result different from the specific determination result, dynamic display of the identification information is started in the second game state. The game machine EA4 is characterized in that it is configured to be able to be set before starting.

According to the game machine EA4, in addition to the effects of the game machines EA1 to EA3, the following effects are produced. That is, when the first determination result is obtained, the game state is shifted to the second game state, so that there is an effect that the game state can be varied in various ways.

In any of the game machines EA1 to EA4, when the second game state is set, the first game state is changed based on the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information a predetermined number of times. A game machine EA5 characterized by being configured to be settable.

According to the game machine EA5, in addition to the effects of the game machines EA1 to EA4, the following effects are produced. That is, the first game state and the second game state can be shifted to each other before the number of times until the specific condition is satisfied is counted, and the period until the number of times until the specific condition is satisfied has passed. There is an effect that it can be diversified.

A game machine EA6 characterized in that any one of the game machines EA1 to EA5 has a suggestive effect executing means capable of suggesting that the second game state is set before the specific condition is satisfied. .

According to the game machine EA6, in addition to the effects of the game machines EA1 to EA5, the following effects are produced. That is, since it is possible for the player to grasp that the second game state has been set, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the game state that will be set at the time when the specific condition is established. be.

Any one of the gaming machines EA3 to EA6 has at least advantageous state setting means capable of setting the advantageous state for the second period based on the determination result by the determination means being the specific determination result. A gaming machine EA7 characterized by:

According to the game machine EA7, in addition to the effects of the game machines EA3 to EA6, the following effects are produced. That is, since it is possible to set the advantageous state for the second period based on the fact that the result of determination by the determining means is a specific determination result, the player is notified of the second period before the specific condition is established. can provide the advantage of Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that various conditions are set as the specific conditions, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In the game machine EA7, the advantageous state of the second period can be set based on the determination result by the determination means being a first determination result different from the specific determination result. Machine EA8.

According to the gaming machine EA8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine EA7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, even if the determination result does not give a privilege, the advantageous state for the second period can be set. It is possible to make it easy for the player to think that it has been done. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that various conditions are set as the specific conditions, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In any one of the game machines EA1 to EA8, a third setting executing means capable of executing a third setting that is more advantageous to the player than the second setting when the period during which the specific condition is not satisfied continues for a specific period. A gaming machine EA9 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine EA9, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines EA1 to EA8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a period in which the specific condition is not established continues for a long period of time, the third setting that is advantageous to the player can be executed, so there is an effect that damage to the player can be suppressed.

<Characteristic EB group> (Randomize the number of activations)
Determination means capable of performing determination, display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and identification information for indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means. and a first privilege giving means capable of giving a first privilege that is advantageous to the player if the game machine is equipped with a first discrimination, wherein the determination result by the discrimination means is different from the specific discrimination result. a first setting means capable of executing a first setting when the result is a result; and a canceling means capable of canceling the first setting when the first setting is executed, and a second setting different from the first setting when a specific condition is satisfied. 2 setting means; and a game machine EB1.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and symbols for informing the result of the lottery are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time. After that, the symbols are stop-displayed in a manner indicating the result of the lottery, and when the result of the lottery indicating the failure is notified, the variable display of the symbols for indicating the result of the next lottery is started. When the result of the lottery is a win, after a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed, the game state is changed to a game state advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A configuration capable of achieving this has been proposed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that further enhances the enjoyment of games.

According to the gaming machine EB1, the number of times the identification information is dynamically displayed until the second setting is executed can be made random, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be further improved.

The game machine EB2 is characterized in that when the first setting is executed in the game machine EB1, the first setting is not set after the first privilege is awarded.

According to the gaming machine EB2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine EB1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the first setting is canceled when the privilege is granted, the second setting can be executed when the privilege is not granted for a long period of time. There is an effect that it can be made to feel advantageous to

The game machine EB1 or EB2 has a means capable of making a state more advantageous to the player than when the first setting is set by executing the second setting. Characteristic game machine EB3.

According to the game machine EB3, in addition to the effects of the game machine EB1 or EB2, the following effects are produced. That is, by executing the second setting, a state advantageous to the player can be obtained, so that there is an effect that damage to the player can be suppressed even if a state in which benefits are not given for a long period of time occurs.

In any one of the game machines EB1 to EB3, a third setting executing means capable of executing a third setting that is more advantageous to the player than the second setting when the period in which the specific condition is not satisfied continues for a specific period. A gaming machine EB4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine EB4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines EB1 to EB3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a period in which the specific condition is not established continues for a long period of time, the third setting that is advantageous to the player can be executed, so there is an effect that damage to the player can be suppressed.

<Characteristic EC group> (randomization 2)
Determination means capable of performing determination, display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and identification information for indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means. and a first privilege giving means capable of giving a first privilege that is advantageous to the player if the game machine is equipped with a first discrimination, wherein the determination result by the discrimination means is different from the specific discrimination result. a first setting means capable of executing a first setting when the result is a result; and a second setting capable of executing the second setting based on the satisfaction of the first condition when the first setting is canceled by the canceling means. 2 setting means; and a gaming machine EEC1.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and symbols for informing the result of the lottery are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time. After that, the symbols are stop-displayed in a manner indicating the result of the lottery, and when the result of the lottery indicating the failure is notified, the variable display of the symbols for indicating the result of the next lottery is started. When the result of the lottery is a win, after a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed, the game state is changed to a game state advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A configuration capable of achieving this has been proposed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that further enhances the enjoyment of games.

According to the gaming machine EC1, it is possible to randomize the number of dynamic display times of the identification information until the second setting is executed, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine EC1, the second setting means is configured to be able to execute the second setting based on the fact that the dynamic display of the identification information has been executed a predetermined specific number of times. Characterized game machine EC2.

According to the gaming machine EC2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine EC1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, there is an effect that the number of times of dynamic display until the second setting is executed can be randomized.

In the game machine EC1 or EC2, the second setting means can execute the second setting when the determination result by the determination means is a second determination result different from the first determination result. Gaming machine EC3.

According to the gaming machine EC3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine EC2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the second setting is executed according to a plurality of conditions, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the trigger of the execution of the second setting, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be further improved.

<Feature ED group> (randomization 3)
Determination means capable of performing determination, display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and identification information for indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means. and a privilege providing means capable of awarding a privilege advantageous to a player in a case where the determination result by the determination means is a first determination result different from the specific determination result a first setting means capable of executing a first setting; and when the first setting is set, the dynamic display of the identification information is performed a predetermined number of times. a release means capable of canceling the setting; and a second setting means capable of executing a second setting based on the fact that the dynamic display of the identification information has been executed a predetermined number of times; The gaming machine is characterized in that a count value for counting the specific number of times is not updated when dynamic display of the identification information is started while the first setting is being executed. Gaming machine ED1.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and symbols for informing the result of the lottery are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time. After that, the symbols are stop-displayed in a manner indicating the result of the lottery, and when the result of the lottery indicating the failure is notified, the variable display of the symbols for indicating the result of the next lottery is started. When the result of the lottery is a win, after a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed, the game state is changed to a game state advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A configuration capable of achieving this has been proposed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that further enhances the enjoyment of games.

According to the gaming machine ED1, it is possible to randomize the number of dynamic display times of the identification information until the second setting is executed, so that there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine ED1, the gaming machine ED2 is characterized in that the second setting is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first setting.

According to the gaming machine ED2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ED1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the period until the setting advantageous to the player is given by setting the second setting by executing the dynamic display a specific number of times while the first setting is not set is set at random. There is an effect that it is possible to provide a game with unexpectedness to the player.

A gaming machine ED3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine ED1 or ED2, when the privilege is awarded to the player, a count value for counting the specific number of times is updated to an initial value.

According to the gaming machine ED3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ED1 or ED2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the game becomes too advantageous to the player because the count value for counting the specific number of times is updated to the initial value when the privilege is given.

In any one of the gaming machines ED1 to ED3, when the dynamic display for indicating that the determination means has determined the first determination result is executed and the specific number of times has been reached, the first determination result is displayed. The game machine ED4 is characterized in that the setting is not set and the second setting is set.

According to the game machine ED4, in addition to the effects of the game machines ED1 to ED3, the following effects are produced. That is, the second setting, which is more advantageous than the first setting, is preferentially set, thereby providing an advantageous game to the player.

Any one of the game machines ED1 to ED4 has a first measuring means for measuring the number of dynamic display times of the identification information, and a second measuring means for measuring the count value, wherein the first A game machine ED5, characterized by having an effect executing means capable of executing an effect based on the first measurement result by the measuring means and the second measurement result by the second measuring means.

According to the gaming machine ED5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines ED1 to ED4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the effect executed by the effect executing means, it is possible to easily predict the remaining number of times until the value measured by the second measuring means reaches the specific number of times, so that the second setting is provided to the player. There is an effect that the remaining period until execution can be easily predicted.

<Characteristic EE group> (lottery control at the time of state transition)
A determination means capable of performing determination, a display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means. A game machine having a privilege granting means capable of imparting a privilege that is advantageous to a player when a game is played, in which a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state can be set. The setting means and the game machine shift to the second game state in a state in which the information set in the first game state is stored, and cancel the second game state in a state in which the information is stored. and means for facilitating the granting of an advantageous period to the player.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and symbols for informing the result of the lottery are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time. After that, the symbols are stop-displayed in a manner indicating the result of the lottery, and when the result of the lottery indicating the failure is notified, the variable display of the symbols for indicating the result of the next lottery is started. When the result of the lottery is a win, after a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed, the game state is changed to a game state advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A configuration capable of achieving this has been proposed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that further enhances the enjoyment of games.

According to the gaming machine EE1, since the information is maintained in the stored state even after the game state shifts, it is easy for the player to be given a period of time advantageous to the player. There is an effect that the game state can be changed and the interest in the change of the game state can be improved.

The gaming machine EE1 has acquisition means capable of acquiring the information and storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the first identification information is dynamically displayed as the identification information. The gaming machine EE2 is characterized in that the information stored in the storage means is maintained during the period.

According to the gaming machine EE2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine EE1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since information storage is maintained by continuing the dynamic display of the first identification information, the game can be played with anticipation of the dynamic display of the first identification information, and the amusement of the game can be further improved. has the effect of

The game machine EE1 or EE2 has first information acquisition means capable of acquiring first information, and first storage means for storing the first information acquired by the first information acquisition means, The gaming machine EE3 is characterized in that the first identification information is information for executing dynamic display when the determination is performed by the determination means based on the first information.

According to the gaming machine EE3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine EE1 or EE2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since it is possible to expect that the first information is obtained so that the memory of the information is maintained, it is possible to increase the expectation of obtaining the first information until the second game state is canceled. There is an effect that the value at which one piece of information is acquired can be changed depending on the period.

<Characteristic EF group> (V icon control 1)
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, determination means capable of determining the information stored in the storage means, and determination determined by the determination means A display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a result, and a privilege grant capable of giving a privilege advantageous to a player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means. , in a gaming machine comprising: a pre-determination means capable of performing a determination before the determination means based on information stored in the storage means; determining means capable of determining execution of a specific effect when it is determined that the information determined as the determination result is stored; and dynamic identification information corresponding to the information stored in the storage means. A game machine EF1 characterized by comprising a setting means capable of setting execution timing of the specific effect in a display period.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and symbols for informing the result of the lottery are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time. After that, the symbols are stop-displayed in a manner indicating the result of the lottery, and when the result of the lottery indicating the failure is notified, the variable display of the symbols for indicating the result of the next lottery is started. When the result of the lottery is a win, after a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed, the game state is changed to a game state advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A configuration capable of achieving this has been proposed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that further enhances the enjoyment of games.

According to the game machine EF1, by setting the timing for executing the specific effect, it is possible to make it difficult to understand which identification information corresponds to the information serving as the specific determination result, thereby improving the interest of the game. be.

In the gaming machine EF1, when execution of the specific effect is determined by the determining means, a specific suggestion mode for indicating that execution of the specific effect is determined can be executed. A gaming machine EF2 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine EF2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine EF1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the player can recognize in advance that a specific determination result will be obtained by executing the specific suggestion mode, the player is allowed to play the game looking forward to in which dynamic display the specific determination result is reported. It has the effect of being able to

In the game machine EF1 or EF2, when the storage means stores a plurality of pieces of information serving as the specific determination result, the setting means sets the identification number corresponding to the information for which dynamic display is started later. The gaming machine EF3 is characterized in that the execution timing of the specific performance is set during the information dynamic display period.

According to the gaming machine EF3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine EF1 or EF2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, even though a specific determination result is notified and a dynamic display in which a privilege is given is executed, execution of a specific effect is not started, so that the subsequent dynamic display may result in a specific determination result. can be recognized by the player, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be further improved.

<Feature EFa group> (V icon control 1)
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, determination means capable of determining the information stored in the storage means, and determination determined by the determination means A display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a result, and a privilege grant capable of giving a privilege advantageous to a player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means. , in a gaming machine comprising: a pre-determination means capable of performing a determination before the determination means based on information stored in the storage means; determining means capable of determining execution of a specific effect when it is determined that the information determined as the determination result is stored; and dynamic identification information corresponding to the information stored in the storage means. A game machine EFa1, characterized by comprising setting means capable of setting execution timing of the specific effect in a display period.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and symbols for informing the result of the lottery are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time. After that, the symbols are stop-displayed in a manner indicating the result of the lottery, and when the result of the lottery indicating the failure is notified, the variable display of the symbols for indicating the result of the next lottery is started. When the result of the lottery is a win, after a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed, the game state is changed to a game state advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A configuration capable of achieving this has been proposed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that further enhances the enjoyment of games.

According to the gaming machine EFa1, by setting the timing for executing the specific effect, it is possible to make it difficult to understand which identification information corresponds to the information serving as the specific determination result, thereby improving the interest of the game. be.

In the gaming machine EFa1, when execution of the specific effect is determined by the determining means, the execution of the specific effect is on standby during a waiting period until the execution timing of the specific effect. A game machine EFa2 characterized by being able to display the notification mode of.

According to the gaming machine EFa2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine EFa1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the player can easily recognize that the execution of the specific effect is waiting by displaying the notification mode, the specific effect is executed even though the execution of the specific effect is determined. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the game before the specific effect is executed without noticing that the specific effect is executed.

In the gaming machine EFa2, when the specific condition is satisfied, the specific effect is displayed during the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the information determined as the specific determination result in the state where the notification mode is displayed. A gaming machine EFa3 characterized in that it is possible to prevent the execution of

According to the gaming machine EFa3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine EFa2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, even if the specific effect is not executed during the period in which the notification mode indicating that the execution of the specific effect is waiting is displayed, the identification information indicating the specific determination result is displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game with unexpectedness to the player.

In any one of the game machines EFa1 to EFa3, when the determination means determines execution of the specific effect in a state in which the storage means stores a plurality of pieces of information that are determined as the specific determination result, a dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the information determined as the specific determination result executed later; and a dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the information determined as the specific determination result executed later. It is characterized in that the game player has a selection means which allows the player to select in advance in which of the dynamic display period the execution timing of the specific performance is likely to be set by the setting means. Gaming machine EFa4.

According to the gaming machine EFa4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines EFa1 to EFa3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the specific effect is executed for the player who has selected in advance the setting in which the specific effect is likely to be executed in the dynamic display period of the identification symbol corresponding to the specific determination result and the information to be executed first. It is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting whether or not there is information that will be determined as a specific determination result in the information remaining in the storage means at the time of execution, and will be determined as a specific determination result that will be executed later. For a player who has previously selected a setting in which a specific effect is likely to be executed during the dynamic display period of the identification pattern corresponding to the information, the specific effect is not executed during the dynamic display period of the identification information. Since it is possible to provide an unexpected game in which identification information for indicating a specific determination result is displayed, it is possible to provide a game that matches the preferences of the player.

<Characteristic EG group> (ratio variable control)
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, determination means capable of determining the information stored in the storage means, and determination determined by the determination means A display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a result, and a privilege grant capable of giving a privilege advantageous to a player when the identification information for indicating the specific discrimination result is displayed on the display means. , in a gaming machine comprising: a prior determination means capable of performing determination prior to the determination means based on information stored in the storage means; and determination means capable of determining execution of a specific performance based on the number information of the information stored in the storage means when it is determined that the information determined as the determination result is stored. A gaming machine EG1 characterized by:

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and symbols for informing the result of the lottery are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time. After that, the symbols are stop-displayed in a manner indicating the result of the lottery, and when the result of the lottery indicating the failure is notified, the variable display of the symbols for indicating the result of the next lottery is started. When the result of the lottery is a win, after a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed, the game state is changed to a game state advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A configuration capable of achieving this has been proposed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that further enhances the enjoyment of games.

According to the gaming machine EG1, by setting the timing for executing the specific effect, it is possible to make it difficult to understand which identification information corresponds to the information serving as the specific determination result, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. be.

The game machine EG1 has a setting means capable of setting the execution timing of the specific effect during the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the information stored in the storage means. Characteristic game machine EG2.

According to the gaming machine EG2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine EG1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the execution timing of the specific effect can be set at random, there is an effect that the player's degree of expectation for receiving the privilege can be changed depending on the timing at which the specific effect is executed.

In the gaming machine EG1 or EG2, the determining means is set to be able to vary the probability of determining execution of the specific effect based on the number information corresponding to the number of the information stored in a predetermined period. A gaming machine EG3 characterized by:

According to the game machine EG3, in addition to the effects of the game machine EG1 or EG2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the determination probability varies depending on the number of pieces of information stored in a predetermined period, the timing at which the specific effect is executed is controlled in accordance with the number of pieces of information stored, thereby increasing interest. be.

In any one of the game machines EG1 to EG3, when execution of the specific effect is determined by the determining means, a specific suggestion mode for indicating that execution of the specific effect is determined can be executed. A gaming machine EG4 characterized in that the game machine EG4 is

According to the gaming machine EG4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines EG1 to EG3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the player can recognize in advance that a specific determination result will be obtained by executing the specific suggestion mode, the player is allowed to play the game looking forward to in which dynamic display the specific determination result is reported. It has the effect of being able to

In any one of the gaming machines EG1 to EG4, when the storage means stores a plurality of pieces of information as the specific determination result, the setting means corresponds to the information for which dynamic display is started later. The game machine EG5 is characterized in that the execution timing of the specific performance is set during the dynamic display period of the identification information.

According to the gaming machine EG5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines EG1 to EG4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, even though a specific determination result is notified and a dynamic display in which a privilege is given is executed, execution of a specific effect is not started, so that the subsequent dynamic display may result in a specific determination result. can be recognized by the player, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be further improved.

<Characteristic EGa Group> (Proportion variable control)
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, determination means capable of determining the information stored in the storage means, and determination determined by the determination means A display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a result, and a privilege grant capable of giving a privilege advantageous to a player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means. , in a gaming machine comprising: a pre-determination means capable of performing a determination before the determination means based on information stored in the storage means; A determination means capable of determining execution of a specific performance when it is determined that the information determined as a determination result is stored, and a specific condition is established after the determination means determines execution of the specific performance. a setting means capable of setting the execution timing of the specific effect based on the information stored in the storage means until the game machine EGa1.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and symbols for informing the result of the lottery are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time. After that, the symbols are stop-displayed in a manner indicating the result of the lottery, and when the result of the lottery indicating the failure is notified, the variable display of the symbols for indicating the result of the next lottery is started. When the result of the lottery is a win, after a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed, the game state is changed to a game state advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A configuration capable of achieving this has been proposed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that further enhances the enjoyment of games.

According to the gaming machine EGa1, by setting the timing for executing the specific effect, it is possible to make it difficult to understand which identification information corresponds to the information serving as the specific determination result, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. be.

In the gaming machine EGa1, the determining means may update the stored information until dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the information determined as the specific determination result stored in the storage means is executed. The gaming machine EGa2 is characterized in that the greater the number of the information that can be stored in the means, the easier it is to decide to execute the specific performance.

According to the gaming machine EGa2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine EGa1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the number of pieces of information that can be newly stored in the storage means is large until the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the information determined as the specific determination result stored in the storage means is executed. Since execution of the specific effect is more likely to be determined by the determining means, the information stored in the storage means at the time when the specific effect is executed is determined by the preliminary determination means at the time when the execution of the specific effect is decided. The number of information that has not been discriminated tends to increase, making it difficult for a player to predict the discrimination result of the information remaining in the storage means after the execution of the specific performance, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In the game machine EGa1 or EGa2, when the number of the information stored in the storage means is a predetermined number, the information stored in the storage means is determined as the specific determination result. It is easier for the determining means to determine execution of the specific performance when there are a plurality of information determined as the specific determination result than when the number of the information is one. Characteristic game machine EGa3.

According to the gaming machine EGa3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine EGa1 or EGa2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a plurality of pieces of information discriminated as a specific determination result exist in the storage means, execution of the specific performance is likely to be determined by the determination means. By making the player expect that the game will be played, the desire to play can be improved.

<Characteristic EH group> (determination of usage location)
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, determination means capable of determining the information stored in the storage means, and determination determined by the determination means A display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a result, and a privilege grant capable of giving a privilege advantageous to a player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means. , in a gaming machine comprising: a pre-determination means capable of performing a determination before the determination means based on information stored in the storage means; Determination means capable of determining execution of a specific performance when it is determined that the information determined as the determination result is stored; and execution means capable of executing a specific suggestion mode.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and symbols for informing the result of the lottery are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time. After that, the symbols are stop-displayed in a manner indicating the result of the lottery, and when the result of the lottery indicating the failure is notified, the variable display of the symbols for indicating the result of the next lottery is started. When the result of the lottery is a win, after a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed, the game state is changed to a game state advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A configuration capable of achieving this has been proposed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that further enhances the enjoyment of games.

According to the gaming machine EH1, by executing the specific suggesting mode, the player can be made to recognize at an early stage that information that will result in a specific determination result is stored, thereby increasing the interest in the game. There is Moreover, by setting the timing for executing the specific effect, it is possible to make it difficult to understand which identification information corresponds to the information that becomes the specific determination result, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Execution determination capable of determining execution of the determined specific effect when dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the information stored in the storage means is executed in the gaming machine EH1 A gaming machine EH2 characterized by having means.

According to the gaming machine EH2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine EH1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the execution determination means determines whether or not the dynamic display of the identification information for executing the specific effect can be determined at the start of each dynamic display. There is an effect that it can be set.

In either gaming machine EH1 or EH2, when the determination means determines execution of the specific effect, a specific suggestion mode for indicating that execution of the specific effect is determined can be executed. The game machine EH3 is characterized by being

According to the gaming machine EH3, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines EH1 to EH2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the player can recognize in advance that a specific determination result will be obtained by executing the specific suggestion mode, the player is allowed to play the game looking forward to in which dynamic display the specific determination result is reported. It has the effect of being able to

In any one of the game machines EH1 to EH3, the setting means corresponds to the information for which the dynamic display is started later when the storage means stores a plurality of information serving as the specific determination result. The gaming machine EH4 is characterized in that the execution timing of the specific performance is set during the dynamic display period of the identification information.

According to the gaming machine EH4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines EH1 to EH3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, even though a specific determination result is notified and a dynamic display in which a privilege is given is executed, execution of a specific effect is not started, so that the subsequent dynamic display may result in a specific determination result. can be recognized by the player, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be further improved.

<Characteristic EI group> (variable frequency of use)
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, determination means capable of determining the information stored in the storage means, and determination determined by the determination means A display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a result, and a privilege grant capable of giving a privilege advantageous to a player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means. a dynamic display mode determining means capable of determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information; and based on the type of the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. and determination means capable of determining execution of a specific effect for indicating that the information stored in the storage means is determined to be the specific determination result. A gaming machine EI1 characterized by:

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and symbols for informing the result of the lottery are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time. After that, the symbols are stop-displayed in a manner indicating the result of the lottery, and when the result of the lottery indicating the failure is notified, the variable display of the symbols for indicating the result of the next lottery is started. When the result of the lottery is a win, after a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed, the game state is changed to a game state advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A configuration capable of achieving this has been proposed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that further enhances the enjoyment of games.

According to the gaming machine EI1, by setting the timing for executing the specific effect, it is possible to make it difficult to understand which identification information corresponds to the information serving as the specific determination result, thereby improving the interest of the game. be.

The game machine EI1 has a setting means capable of setting the execution timing of the specific effect during the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the information stored in the storage means. Characterized game machine EI2.

According to the gaming machine EI2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine EI1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the execution timing of the specific effect can be set at random, there is an effect that the player's degree of expectation for receiving the privilege can be changed depending on the timing at which the specific effect is executed.

In the game machine EI1 or EI2, when the determination means determines execution of the specific effect, a specific suggestion mode for indicating that execution of the specific effect is determined can be executed. A game machine EI3 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine EI3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine EI1 or EI2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the player can recognize in advance that a specific determination result will be obtained by executing the specific suggestion mode, the player is allowed to play the game looking forward to in which dynamic display the specific determination result is reported. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine EI2 or EI3, when the storage means stores a plurality of pieces of information serving as the specific determination result, the setting means sets the identification number corresponding to the information for which dynamic display is started later. The game machine EI4 is characterized in that the execution timing of the specific performance is set during the information dynamic display period.

According to the gaming machine EI4, in addition to the effects of either the gaming machine EI2 or EI3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, even though a specific determination result is notified and a dynamic display in which a privilege is given is executed, execution of a specific effect is not started, so that the subsequent dynamic display may result in a specific determination result. can be recognized by the player, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be further improved.

<Characteristic EJ group> (controlled by round)
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, determination means capable of determining the information stored in the storage means, and determination determined by the determination means A display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a result, and a privilege grant capable of giving a privilege advantageous to a player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means. a privilege type determining means capable of determining a privilege to be granted by the privilege granting means from a plurality of privilege types; and the privilege granting based on the stored information. that the information stored in the storage means is determined to be the specific determination result based on the determination information corresponding to the fact that the type of privilege granted by the means is determined in advance; A game machine EJ1 characterized in that it has a determining means capable of determining execution of a specific effect for indicating.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and symbols for informing the result of the lottery are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time. After that, the symbols are stop-displayed in a manner indicating the result of the lottery, and when the result of the lottery indicating the failure is notified, the variable display of the symbols for indicating the result of the next lottery is started. When the result of the lottery is a win, after a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed, the game state is changed to a game state advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A configuration capable of achieving this has been proposed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that further enhances the enjoyment of games.

According to the gaming machine EJ1, by setting the timing for executing the specific effect, it is possible to make it difficult to understand which identification information corresponds to the information serving as the specific determination result, thereby improving the interest of the game. be.

The game machine EJ1 has a setting means capable of setting the execution timing of the specific effect during the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the information stored in the storage means. Characterized game machine EJ2.

According to the gaming machine EJ2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine EJ1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the execution timing of the specific effect can be set at random, there is an effect that the player's degree of expectation for receiving the privilege can be changed depending on the timing at which the specific effect is executed.

In the gaming machine EJ1 or EJ2, the privilege is that the privilege game is executed a number of times corresponding to the type of the privilege, and the determination means determines that the privilege game is executed a predetermined number of times or more as the determination information. is determined, the game machine EJ3 is characterized in that it is configured to be able to determine execution of the specific effect.

According to the gaming machine EJ3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine EJ1 or EJ2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the execution of the specific effect is determined when the execution of the privilege game is determined for a predetermined number of times or more, the player, when the privilege game ends after the privilege game is executed less than the predetermined number of times, After that, it is possible to easily recognize that a specific determination result will be obtained, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

A gaming machine EJ4 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines EJ1 to EJ3, the predetermined number of times is set to be greater than the number of privilege games to be executed when the privilege is given a plurality of times. .

According to the gaming machine EJ4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines EJ1 to EJ3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, there is an effect that the player can expect the number of times the privilege is given by executing the specific effect, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In any one of the game machines EJ1 to EJ4, when the specific performance is executed, the mode of the specific performance being executed during the execution of the privilege game indicates the number of times the remaining privilege game is executed. A game machine EJ5 characterized in that it has a means capable of varying the .

According to the gaming machine EJ5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines EJ1 to EJ4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, by executing the privilege game, the number of remaining privilege games to be played can be suggested in a specific manner, and there is an effect that the player can play the game while expecting a greater number of remaining privilege games. .

In any one of game machines EJ1 to EJ5, when execution of the specific performance is determined by the determination means, a specific suggestion mode for indicating that execution of the specific performance is determined can be executed. A game machine EJ6 characterized in that the game machine EJ6 is

According to the gaming machine EJ6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines EJ1 to EJ5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the player can recognize in advance that a specific determination result will be obtained by executing the specific suggestion mode, the player is allowed to play the game looking forward to in which dynamic display the specific determination result is reported. It has the effect of being able to

In any one of gaming machines EJ2 to EJ5, when the storage means stores a plurality of information serving as the specific determination result, the setting means corresponds to the information for which dynamic display is started later. The game machine EJ7 is characterized in that the execution timing of the specific effect is set during the dynamic display period of the identification information.

According to the gaming machine EJ7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines EJ2 to EJ6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, even though a specific determination result is notified and a dynamic display in which a privilege is given is executed, execution of a specific effect is not started, so that the subsequent dynamic display may result in a specific determination result. can be recognized by the player, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be further improved.

<Characteristic group of 5071 series>
<Feature FA group> (Different degree of advantage between the advantageous state set after the end of the special figure lottery of a predetermined number of times and the advantageous state set at another opportunity)
A discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and a privilege game for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a predetermined first discrimination result. One of a plurality of states including at least a first state and a second state in which the determination condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first state can be set based on the executing means and the establishment of a predetermined set condition. and a second determination result different from the first determination result over a predetermined specific number of times after a predetermined specific condition is satisfied. a second setting means for setting a third state in which the determination condition is more likely to be satisfied than in the first state and in which the degree of advantage is different from that in the second state, based on the Characteristic gaming machine FA1.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface to draw a lottery for the game, and if the lottery result is a win, the game is played. There is a game in which a winning game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Furthermore, among such gaming machines, there are also those in which a time-saving game is executed for a predetermined period in which a lottery is likely to be performed after the execution of a winning game (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, the advantage of the time-saving game is the same regardless of the conditions under which the time-saving game is set.

On the other hand, according to the game machine FA1, when the period in which the privilege game is not executed continues, the state is changed to the third state and the determination condition is easily satisfied. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the decrease in the motivation of the person to play the game.

In the gaming machine FA1, a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter, and discrimination information capable of acquiring the discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means based on the fact that the game ball entered the ball entering means. obtaining means; a variable means capable of changing between a first position where a game ball can enter the ball entering means; and a second position where a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position; Based on the establishment of the variable condition, a first variable control of the variable means, and a second variable control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the ball entering means than the first variable control. and variable control means capable of executing variable control of, wherein the second state is configured in a state in which the variable means is more easily controlled by the second variable control than in the first state. game machine FA2.

According to the gaming machine FA2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FA1, it is easier for the game ball to enter the ball-entering means in the second state than in the first state. In addition, there is an effect that the game can be played with a stronger expectation that the second state will be set.

In the gaming machine FA2, the third state is a state in which the variable means is more likely to be controlled by the second variable control than in the first state, and the predetermined variable condition is less likely to be established than in the second state. A game machine FA3 characterized by being configured in the following states.

According to the game machine FA3, in addition to the effect of the game machine FA2, there is an effect that the second state can be configured as a state in which the determination by the determination means is easier to execute than in the third state.

In a gaming machine FA2 or FA3, a second ball entering means configured to allow a game ball to enter and provided at a position different from the above ball entering means, and a game ball entering the second ball entering means. and a second determination information acquisition means capable of acquiring the determination information based on the determination, wherein the determination means performs the determination using the determination information acquired by the determination information acquisition means, rather than the determination using the determination information. 2. The determination using the determination information acquired by the determination information acquisition means is more likely to be advantageous to the player, and the third state is more likely to be the second determination than the second state. The gaming machine FA4 is characterized in that the game machine FA4 is configured in such a manner that determination using the determination information acquired by the information acquisition means is facilitated.

According to the game machine FA4, in addition to the effects of the game machine FA2 or FA3, in the third state, determination with a high degree of advantage using the determination information acquired by the second determination information acquisition means is likely to be executed. There is an effect that the game can be played with a stronger expectation of transition to the third state than the second state.

In the game machine FA4, a game ball can be shot at least in a first direction in which a game ball can reach the ball entering means and the second ball entering means, and a second direction different from the first direction. and a shooting means and a position where a game ball shot in the second direction by the shooting means can enter and a position where the game ball shot in the first direction is difficult to enter. and a third ball entering means, wherein the discrimination information acquisition means acquires the discrimination information when a game ball enters the ball entering means and when a game ball enters the third ball entering means. In the first state, shooting the game ball in the second direction is more effective for discrimination by the discrimination means than shooting the game ball in the first direction. The execution frequency is likely to be high, and the second state and the third state shoot the game ball in the first direction rather than shooting the game ball in the second direction. The game machine FA5 is characterized in that the execution frequency of the determination by the determination means tends to increase when the game machine FA5 is set.

According to the game machine FA5, in addition to the effects of the game machine FA4, the shooting direction of the game ball can be changed between the first state, the second state and the third state, so that the game can be sharpened. has the effect of being able to

Any one of the game machines FA1 to FA5 is provided with initialization means for initializing the settings of the game machine, and the specific condition is satisfied at least when the settings of the game machine are initialized by the initialization means. A gaming machine FA6 characterized by:

According to the game machine FA6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines FA1 to FA5, it is possible to realize novel behavior in which the advantageous third state is set even if the privilege game is never executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the game machine FA6, the specific conditions are a first specific condition that is established based on the initialization of the settings of the game machine by the initialization means, and the determination result of the determination means is the first determination result. and a second specific condition that is established based on the fact that the game machine FA7 is characterized by comprising at least:

According to the game machine FA7, in addition to the effect of the game machine FA6, there is an effect that the game can be played by paying attention to the number of determinations after initialization or after execution of the privilege game.

In the game machine FA7, the specific conditions are composed of at least the first specific condition, the second specific condition, and the third specific condition established based on the setting of the third state. A gaming machine FA8 characterized by:

According to the game machine FA8, in addition to the effects of the game machine FA7, even after the third state is set, if the second determination result is obtained continuously in the determination of a specific number of times, the third state is set again. Therefore, even if the third state is once terminated, there is an effect that the game can be played in anticipation that the third state will be set again.

<Feature FB group> (Suppresses the execution of the look-ahead effect for the reserved ball that is digested after the end of the special lottery of a predetermined number of times)
discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition; discrimination means for performing discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition; privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a predetermined first determination result; and the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means. with a predetermined number of information as the upper limit, using a discrimination information storage means that can be stored until it is used for discrimination by the discrimination means, and the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means, the discrimination information is stored in the discrimination Pre-specifying means for specifying the discrimination result of the discriminating means before being used for discriminating the means, and specific performance for executing a specified performance based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discriminating means is specified by the pre-specifying means. Execution means, first game state setting means for setting a first game state based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition, and establishment of a predetermined second condition in the first game state. a second game state setting means for setting a second game state different from the first game state based on; and suppressing means for suppressing execution of the specific effect in a predetermined effect mode by the specific effect executing means based on the information obtained in the above.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby providing a winning game advantageous to the player. In addition, various images such as characters and scenery are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: 2003-325886).

In addition, in such conventional gaming machines, it is possible to suggest an effect indicating the possibility of winning a winning game from before the start of the variable display of symbols (for example, when a start winning is detected). There are also those that try to improve the interest of the player by executing a suggestive effect.

However, if the suggestive effect is unconditionally executed, there is a possibility that a problem may occur. Therefore, it may become difficult to suitably set the effect mode.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine FB1, the player can play the game while paying more attention to the fact that the second condition is satisfied and the second game state is set, so the effect mode is preferably set. It has the effect of being able to

In the game machine FB1, the second condition is a second determination result that is different from the first determination result continuously over a predetermined specific number of determinations by the determination means in the first game state. A gaming machine FB2 characterized in that it is configured with a condition that is at least satisfied when it becomes true.

According to the gaming machine FB2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FB1, even if the first determination result is not obtained in the first gaming state, the second gaming state with a different degree of advantage is set, so that the game becomes monotonous. There is an effect that it can be suppressed that it becomes.

In the gaming machine FB1 or FB2, as the effect mode of the specific effect executed by the specific effect execution means, a first effect mode and the first determination result by the prior specifying means rather than the first effect mode and a second performance mode that is likely to be determined when the performance mode is set, and a performance mode determination means for determining one of a plurality of performance modes including at least a second performance mode, and the suppressing means is capable of suppressing execution of at least the second performance mode. A gaming machine FB3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine FB3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FB1 or FB2, the game can be played by paying attention to the performance mode of the specific performance, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. effective.

In the gaming machine FB3, the effect mode determination means includes the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the third effect mode that is more likely to be determined when the second condition is satisfied than the first effect mode. and the suppressing means is configured to be capable of suppressing execution of at least the second presentation mode and the third presentation mode. A gaming machine FB4 characterized in that

According to the gaming machine FB4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FB3, it is possible to suggest both the possibility of the first determination result and the possibility of the second condition being satisfied depending on the effect mode of the specific effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the mode of presentation can be set more appropriately.

In any one of the game machines FB1 to FB4, an end means is provided for ending the second game state based on the establishment of a predetermined third condition in the second game state, and obtained in the first game state The determination information corresponding to the first determination result, which is the determined determination information, is used for determination of the determination means during the second game state, and the second game state is the end. The game machine FB5 is characterized in that the degree of advantage is likely to be higher than when the game is used for discrimination by the discriminating means after being terminated by the means.

According to the gaming machine FB5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines FB1 to FB4, the discrimination information acquired before the second condition is satisfied and used after the transition to the second gaming state is the first Since it is possible to make it difficult to comprehend whether the possibility of the discrimination result is high from the performance mode of the specific performance, the lottery is entered during the second game state only when the possibility of the first discrimination result is high. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which the order of use of discrimination information is adjusted so that it is used.

The gaming machine FB6 is characterized in that the gaming machine FB5 is configured to be set to the first gaming state based on the termination of the second gaming state by the ending means.

According to the gaming machine FB6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FB5, the game can be played with a strong expectation that the first determination result will be obtained before the second game state ends. There is an effect that the interest in the game of the player can be further improved.

In the game machine FB5 or FB6, the determination information corresponding to the deviation determination result different from the first determination result, which is the determination information acquired in the first game state, is obtained during the second game state. It is characterized in that, rather than being used for discrimination by the discrimination means, the degree of advantage tends to be higher when used for discrimination by the discrimination means after the second game state is terminated by the end means. A game machine FB7.

According to the gaming machine FB7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FB5 or FB6, the discrimination information acquired before the second condition is satisfied and used after the transition to the second gaming state is used as the first discrimination result. Since it is possible to make it difficult to grasp from the performance mode of the specific performance whether or not there is a high possibility of becoming, when the possibility of becoming the first determination result is low, it is used for the lottery after the second game state is completed. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress an irregular game method that adjusts the order of use of the identification information so that it can be used.

In any one of gaming machines FB5 to FB7, a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a game ball entering the second ball entering means and a second position where it is more difficult for a game ball to enter than the first position, wherein the determination information acquisition means is configured to change the first position First discrimination information is acquired as the discrimination information based on the game ball entering the ball entering means, and second discrimination information is acquired as the discrimination information based on the gaming ball entering the second ball entering means. 2 discrimination information can be acquired, and the discrimination means makes discrimination using the second discrimination information more favorable to the player than discrimination using the first discrimination information. The degree of advantage is easily increased, and the second game state is characterized in that the variable means is more easily changed to the first position than the first game state. A game machine FB8.

According to the gaming machine FB8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines FB5 to FB7, the degree of advantage of the second gaming state can be increased, so the setting of the second gaming state is strongly expected. There is an effect that the game can be played by

<Characteristic FC Group> (When shifting to the first state and when shifting to the second state, signals with different output modes are output from the same channel at the outer end)
a signal output unit configured with a plurality of signal output terminals capable of outputting a predetermined signal to a predetermined device; a first signal control means for controlling a signal in a predetermined first output mode to be output from a predetermined specific signal output terminal; and a second output different from the first output condition. a second signal control means for controlling a signal in a predetermined second output mode to be output from the specific signal output terminal based on the establishment of a condition; Machine FC1.

2. Description of the Related Art Some game machines, such as pachinko machines, output game-related information to a predetermined device (for example, a hall computer, etc.) according to the game situation. In such a gaming machine, it is possible to allow a predetermined device to grasp the state of the game being played in the gaming machine based on the output information about the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 3848105).

However, in the conventional game machine described above, if the amount of information to be output to a predetermined device increases, there is a possibility that the number of signal output terminals for outputting signals will increase. Therefore, it may become difficult to suitably output the signal to the predetermined device.

On the other hand, according to the game machine FC1, when the first output condition is satisfied and when the second output condition is satisfied, the signal output mode is changed from the same signal output terminal to the predetermined device. , the number of signal output terminals can be reduced.

In the game machine FC1, a determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined specific determination result. privilege game executing means for executing; first game state setting means for setting a predetermined first game state based on establishment of a predetermined first setting condition; and in the first game state a second game state setting means for setting a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state based on the establishment of a predetermined second setting condition; The condition is satisfied when the determination result of the determination means is the specific determination result, and the second condition is satisfied when the second setting condition is satisfied. Characterized game machine FC2.

According to the gaming machine FC2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FC1, a signal indicating that a privilege game is to be executed and a signal indicating that an advantageous second gaming state is set are output from a common signal output terminal. Since the signal can be output, there is an effect that the number of signal output terminals can be reduced.

In the game machine FC2, the second setting condition is constituted by a condition at least different from the determination result of the determination means being the specific determination result.

According to the gaming machine FC3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FC2, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which a game state with a high degree of advantage is set even if a specific determination result is not obtained. There is an effect that the interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine FC3, the second setting condition is that the specific determination result is continuously obtained over a predetermined specific number of determinations by the determination means executed after the predetermined specific condition is established. A game machine FC4 characterized in that it is constituted so as to be established when a result of discriminating the deviation is different from the above.

According to the game machine FC4, in addition to the effects of the game machine FC3, it is possible to realize a novel game property that makes one expect that the result of the determination of failure is continuous, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine FC3 or FC4, a third game state setting means capable of setting a third game state more advantageous than the first game state as a game state after execution of the privilege game is finished; and the second game. During the period from when either the state or the third game state is set until the set second game state or the third game state is terminated, the first signal output terminal different from the specific signal output terminal a third signal output control means for controlling so that a signal of a third output mode is output from the signal output terminal of the third signal output control means; and fourth signal output control for controlling to output a signal in a fourth output mode from the specific signal output terminal based on the second game state being determined by the game state determining means. A gaming machine FC5 characterized by comprising means.

According to the gaming machine FC5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FC3 or FC4, the fourth game state is determined whether the gaming state at the time when the gaming machine is turned on is the second gaming state or the third gaming state. There is an effect that a predetermined device can be easily discriminated by the presence or absence of the signal of the output mode.

In the gaming machine FC4, a consecutive number of times identifying means for identifying the number of consecutive times that the out-of-range determination result continues after the specific condition is established based on the fact that the game machine is turned on, and the consecutive number of times identifying means. and fifth signal output control means for controlling such that a signal having an output mode corresponding to the consecutive number of times specified by is output from a predetermined signal output terminal.

According to the game machine FC6, in addition to the effect of the game machine FC4, there is an effect that the predetermined device can grasp the number of consecutive times of the failure determination result at the time when the power of the game machine is turned on.

In the game machine FC6, a continuous interruption number specifying means for specifying the number of consecutive times that the failure determination result continues after the specific condition is established based on the power supply interruption of the gaming machine, and the interruption continuous number of times. a sixth signal output control means for controlling such that a signal having an output mode corresponding to the consecutive number of times specified by the specifying means is output from the predetermined signal output terminal.

According to the game machine FC7, in addition to the effects of the game machine FC6, the predetermined device can grasp the number of consecutive times of failure determination results when the power is cut off and the number of consecutive times when the power is turned on. Therefore, if there is a discrepancy between the number of consecutive times when the power is cut off and the number of consecutive times when the power is turned on next time, the predetermined device can determine the possibility of fraudulent acts on the gaming machine. can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts.

<Feature FD group> (output the number of times of addiction from the outer end)
In a gaming machine having a signal output unit capable of outputting a predetermined signal to a predetermined device, a first discriminating means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of a discriminating condition, and a predetermined discrimination result of the discriminating means. a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of (1); and a signal for outputting a signal corresponding to the number of times counted by the counting means from the signal output unit based on the fact that the game machine is powered on. A gaming machine FD1 comprising: a control means;

2. Description of the Related Art Some game machines, such as pachinko machines, output game-related information to a predetermined device (for example, a hall computer, etc.) according to the game situation. In such a gaming machine, it is possible to allow a predetermined device to grasp the state of the game being played in the gaming machine based on the output information about the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 3848105).

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a limit to the information that can be output to the predetermined device, so there is a possibility that it may be difficult to output the signal to the predetermined device.

On the other hand, according to the game machine FD1, there is an effect that when the game machine is powered on, the predetermined device can grasp the count value of the counting means.

In the game machine FD1, after the specific game state is set, the determination result of the determination means is the second determination result continuously over a predetermined specific number of times. The game machine FD2 is characterized by comprising an advantageous game state setting means capable of setting an advantageous game state more advantageous to the player than a specific game state.

According to the game machine FD2, in addition to the effects of the game machine FD1, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the second determination result is expected to continue, so that the player's interest in the game is further improved. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine FD1 or FD2, the signal control means can cause the signal output section to output a signal corresponding to the number of times counted by the counting means when the power of the gaming machine is cut off. A gaming machine FD3 characterized by:

According to the game machine FD3, in addition to the effect of the game machine FD1 or FD2, there is an effect that the predetermined device can grasp the count value of the counting means when the power is cut off.

In the game machine FD3, the predetermined device sends information according to the number of times counted by the counting means output from the signal output unit when the power of the game machine is cut off, to at least the game machine as follows: A gaming machine FD4 is characterized by comprising storage means capable of storing information until information corresponding to the number of times counted by said counting means is received after the power is turned on.

According to the gaming machine FD4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FD3, when the number of times counted by the counting means is rewritten while the gaming machine is powered off, There is an effect that the fraudulent act can be easily grasped on the side of the predetermined device when the power is turned on next time.

<Characteristic FE Group> (When outputting a predetermined signal to another device different from the display for displaying the effect, execute the predetermined effect on the display)
A signal output means for outputting a signal to a specific device for which a visual recognition mode according to the type of the received signal is set, a determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and a determination result of the determination means. privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the specific determination result; and at least the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined specific determination result. a signal control means for controlling the specific device to output to the specific device a signal of a specific type that allows the specific device to be set to a specific visual recognition mode; a first effect execution means for executing a first effect configured in a performance mode that makes it easier for the player to confirm that the specific device is in the specific visual recognition mode, based on the fact that the specific device is in the specific visual mode; A gaming machine FE1 characterized by comprising:

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby providing a winning game advantageous to the player. In addition, various images such as characters and scenery are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: 2003-325886).

However, there is a demand for a more novel presentation mode as an entertainment presentation executed in a gaming machine. In other words, there is a demand for further enhancing the interest of players in games.

On the other hand, according to the game machine FE1, a novel presentation mode is realized that makes the player feel as if the specific device and the game machine are interlocking to inform the execution of the privilege game. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine FE1, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the determination result of the determination means has become the specific determination result until at least the first effect is executed. A game machine FE2 characterized by comprising a second effect executing means for executing a second effect to cause a player to play.

According to the game machine FE2, in addition to the effects of the game machine FE1, the first effect and the specific visual recognition mode can make the player feel as if a specific determination result has suddenly been notified. There is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

a variable means capable of changing between a first position in which the visual recognition mode of the specific device is visible and a second position in which the visual recognition mode of the specific device is more difficult to view than the first position in the gaming machine FE2; and variable control means for variably controlling the variable means, wherein the variable means is varied to the second position at least while the second effect is being executed, and the first effect is executed. A game machine FE3 characterized in that it is configured to be variable to the first position based on.

According to the game machine FE3, in addition to the effects of the game machine FE2, it is physically difficult to visually confirm whether or not the specific device is set to the specific visual mode during execution of the second effect. To make it difficult for a player to perceive that a specific judgment result will be obtained during the execution of the second performance, even if the player visually recognizes the specific device before the execution of the first performance. has the effect of being able to

first game state setting means for setting a first game state disadvantageous to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined first setting condition in any one of the game machines FE1 to FE3; second game state setting means for setting a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state based on the fact that a predetermined second condition is established in the state; The means outputs to the specific device a first type of signal capable of setting the specific device to a first visual mode different from the specific visual mode based on the establishment of the second condition. and the first effect executing means is configured to be able to execute the first effect when the second condition is satisfied. FE4.

According to the gaming machine FE4, in addition to the effect produced by one of the gaming machines FE1 to FE3, the specific device and the gaming machine not only execute the privilege game but also set the second gaming state. Since the notification can be made by an effect as if they are interlocked, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine FE4, a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, and a discrimination information acquisition capable of acquiring discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entering means. means, variable means capable of changing between a first position at which a game ball can enter the ball entering means, and a second position at which a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position; and variable control means for varying the variable means from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of the variable condition, wherein the second game state is different from the first game state is also constructed in a game state in which the predetermined variable condition is likely to be satisfied, and the first effect executing means is configured such that after the second condition is satisfied, the variable means is controlled by the variable control means to generate the first effect. If it is determined before the second condition is satisfied that the period until the position is changed to a predetermined specific period or longer, the first game state is set after the second game state is set. The game machine FE5 is characterized in that the first effect can be executed based on the fact that the variable means is variable to the first position.

According to the gaming machine FE5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FE4, the second gaming state can be notified after the game ball can actually enter the ball-entering means. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the wasteful shooting of game balls.

A game machine FE6 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines FE1 to FE5, the specific visual recognition mode is constituted by a visual recognition mode capable of informing the player that the privilege game is being executed.

According to the game machine FE6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines FE1 to FE5, there is an effect that it is possible to clearly notify that the privilege game is being executed by the specific device.

In any one of the game machines FE1 to FE6, the signal control means is configured to be controllable so that a second type signal is output to the specific device based on the execution of the determination by the determination means. According to the number of times the signal of the second type output from the signal output means, the specifying device can set a visual recognition mode capable of suggesting to the player the number of executions of determination by the determination means. A gaming machine FE7 characterized in that it is configured as follows.

According to the game machine FE7, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines FE1 to FE6, the number of determinations executed by the visual recognition mode of the specific device can be confirmed, so that the convenience of the player is improved. has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine FE7, the specific device is capable of setting a visual mode capable of suggesting to the player the number of times the privilege game has been executed according to the number of times the signal of the specific type output from the signal output means. A gaming machine FE8 characterized by:

According to the game machine FE8, in addition to the effect of the game machine FE7, the number of times the privilege game has been executed can be confirmed by the visual recognition mode of the specific device, so the effect that the convenience of the player can be improved. There is

<Characteristic FF group> (Regardless of whether or not the RAM is cleared, the number of lotteries after winning will be a specific number of lotteries to activate the ceiling time reduction)
Display means capable of displaying identification information, determination means capable of executing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means on the display means. dynamic display means, and privilege granting means capable of imparting advantageous benefits to the player based on the display of identification information for indicating a specific determination result on the display means. a dynamic display mode determining means capable of determining a dynamic display mode in the dynamic display of the identification information; and a plurality of different dynamic display modes that can be determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. stipulated information storage means storing a plurality of specified stipulated information; stipulated information selection means capable of selecting one stipulated information for determining the dynamic display mode from the specified information storage means; an operation means that can be operated by a player, and a setting of the game machine in advance based on the fact that the power is turned on to the game machine in a state in which the operation means is operated with a predetermined operation content. Initialization means capable of initializing to predetermined initial settings, and suppression of changing information for selecting the prescribed information when the initialization is performed by the initialization means A gaming machine FF1 characterized by comprising means.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, by dynamically displaying a plurality of symbols on display means such as a liquid crystal display, the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning opening is notified. There is In such a gaming machine, when a plurality of dynamically displayed symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined specific combination, the game machine shifts to a so-called win state that is advantageous to the player (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2003-230714).

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, it may be difficult to determine the dynamic display mode in a suitable manner.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine FF1, the information for selecting the stipulated information is suppressed so as not to be changed even if it is initialized, so that the stipulated information can be preferably selected even after the initialization. has the effect of

In the gaming machine FF1, a specific game state advantageous to the player is established based on the execution of the determination by the determining means for a predetermined specific number of times without the award of the privilege after the award of the privilege is completed. A game machine FF2 characterized by comprising setting means capable of setting information for setting the .

According to the game machine FF2, in addition to the effects of the game machine FF1, even if the discrimination by the discrimination means does not result in a specific discrimination result, an advantageous specific game state is set by executing discrimination a specified number of times. Therefore, even if a specific determination result is not obtained for a long period of time, the player's motivation for playing the game can be prevented from decreasing.

In the gaming machine FF2, counting means for counting the number of times the discrimination by the discrimination means is executed without the privilege being granted, and counting by the counting means when the initialization is performed by the initialization means. A second suppressing means for suppressing the initialization of the value is provided, and the setting means changes the specific game state based on the count value of the counting means becoming a count value corresponding to the specific number of times. A gaming machine FF3 characterized by being configured to be able to set information for setting.

According to the game machine FF3, in addition to the effects of the game machine FF2, the count value of the counting means is maintained even if the game machine is initialized, so even if the game machine is initialized, the specific game state is set. It is possible to suppress an increase in the number of determinations made by the determining means up to when the power is turned off. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from avoiding playing a game on the initialized gaming machine.

In the game machine FF3, the stipulated information selection means is configured to be able to select the stipulated information based on at least the count value of the counting means.

According to the gaming machine FF4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FF3, even when reading the number of determinations of the determination means for determining whether or not to set the specific game state, the determination means is used to select the stipulated information. The count value of the counting means can be used in common even when reading out the number of times of discrimination, and the possibility of the two being out of sync can be eliminated, so the effect that the stipulated information can be preferably selected. There is

In any one of the game machines FF2 to FF4, after the specific game state is set, the specific game state is changed based on the fact that the determination by the determination means is performed the specific number of times without the privilege being given. A game machine FF5 characterized by comprising a second setting means capable of setting information for setting.

According to the gaming machine FF5, even after the specific game state is once set, if the privilege is not provided, the specific game state is set again when the number of determinations reaches the specific number of times, so the privilege is not provided. Also, there is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the degree of advantage increases periodically.

In the game machine FF5, the game machine FF6 is characterized by comprising second initialization means capable of initializing the count value of the count means based on the setting of the specific game state.

According to the game machine FF6, in addition to the effects of the game machine FF5, the count value can be initialized when the specific game state is set, so even if the specific game state is not yet set. , even in a situation after the specific game state is set once, it is possible to determine whether or not to set the specific game state by whether or not the count value corresponding to the specific number of times has been reached. There is an effect that the control can be shared by the two setting means.

In any one of the gaming machines FF2 to FF6, the gaming machine is characterized by comprising a third initialization means for initializing the count value of the counting means based on completion of the granting of the privilege by the privilege granting means. FF7.

According to the game machine FF7, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines FF2 to FF6, the count value of the counting means is initialized each time the grant of the privilege is completed, so regardless of the timing at which the privilege is granted , there is an effect that a specific game state can be set when the number of times of determination by the determination means reaches a specific number after the granting of the privilege is completed.

<Characteristic FG group> (When a predetermined lottery result different from winning is obtained in the first lottery after clearing the RAM, the variation pattern scenario is set, and the scenario setting is avoided in the predetermined lottery result after the second time)
A gaming machine comprising control means for performing predetermined control relating to a game, specific control setting means for setting a predetermined specific control to be performed by the control means based on establishment of a predetermined set condition; and suppressing means for suppressing the setting of the specific control setting means when a predetermined specific condition is satisfied at the time when the predetermined setting condition is satisfied.

Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with control means for controlling games. In such a gaming machine, when the state of the game changes, such as when shifting to a win state, predetermined control such as setting of set values is set to be executed by the control means (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2001-276365).

However, in such a game machine, it may be difficult to cause the control means to perform suitable control.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine FG1, it is possible to avoid performing the specific control under the establishment of the specific condition, so there is an effect that the control can be performed more preferably.

In the game machine FG1, a determining means for performing determination based on the establishment of a determining condition, and a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the determination result of the determining means is a predetermined specific determination result. privilege game executing means to be executed, display means capable of displaying identification information, and the identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means on the display means based on the execution of determination by the determination means. dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying, dynamic display period information as information for determining a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display means, and the determination means a defined information storage means for storing a plurality of defined information defining at least a corresponding relationship between the number of determinations, which is the number of times that the determination results differ from the specific determination result, and the determination condition being satisfied dynamic display period information identification for identifying the dynamic display period information corresponding to the number of determinations according to one of the plurality of defined information stored in the defined information storage means based on and dynamic display period determining means for determining the dynamic display period according to the dynamic display period information specified by the dynamic display period information specifying means, wherein the control setting means comprises the 1 for use in identifying the dynamic display period information by the dynamic display period information identifying means from among the plurality of the stipulation information stored in the stipulation information storage means based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition; The game machine FG2 is characterized in that the control for specifying the prescribed information of the game machine FG2 can be set so as to be performed by the control means as the specified control.

According to the game machine FG2, there is an effect that the dynamic display period can be preferably determined.

In the game machine FG2, the predetermined setting condition is a condition that is satisfied when the determination result of the determination means is a first determination result that is at least different from the specific determination result. FG3.

According to the gaming machine FG3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FG2, it is possible to specify the stipulated information when the first determination result is obtained. There is an effect that the tendency of the period can be made different.

In the gaming machine FG3, when the power is turned on to the gaming machine in a state in which the operating means operable by the operator and the operating means are operated with predetermined operation contents, the above-mentioned initialization means capable of initializing the settings of the game machine to predetermined initial settings, wherein the determination means determines whether the determination result is the specific determination result or the first determination result. A game machine FG4 characterized in that it is configured as follows.

According to the game machine FG4, in addition to the effects of the game machine FG3, the discrimination of the discrimination means is executed after the initialization of the game machine, and if a specific discrimination result is not obtained, the specified information can be specified. , the stipulated information can be identified by executing determination by the determination means once after initialization of the game machine. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent a state in which the prescribed information is not specified from continuing for a long time.

In the game machine FG4, the specific condition is a condition that is met when the first determination result is obtained for the first time after the setting of the game machine is initialized to the initial setting by the initialization means. A gaming machine FG5 characterized by:

According to the game machine FG5, in addition to the effect of the game machine FG4, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the repetitive identification of the regulation information each time the first determination result is obtained.

In the game machine FG4 or FG5, the control means initializes the setting of the game machine to the initial setting by the initialization means as the specific control, and the determination result of the determination means is the first determination result. Performing at least a first specific control for specifying one of the stipulated information based on the fact that the special game has been completed, and a second specific control for specifying the one of the stipulated information based on the completion of the execution of the privilege game. A game machine FG6 characterized by being configured to be able to

According to the gaming machine FG5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FG4 or FG5, it is possible to specify the stipulated information even when the execution of the privilege game is completed. It is possible to make the trend of the display period different. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In any one of game machines FG4 to FG6, a game is played based on the number of times of discrimination after the settings of the game machine are initialized to the initial settings by the initialization means. an advantageous gaming state setting means for setting an advantageous gaming state advantageous to a player, and the specific control includes at least the number of determinations until the specific number of times is reached, and the dynamic display period information; A gaming machine FG7 characterized in that it is constituted by control specifying the prescribed information defining the correspondence relationship.

According to the game machine FG7, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines FG4 to FG6, the game machine is initialized and the determination result specified by the determination means is the first determination result. Since the information can be continuously used until the advantageous game state is set, there is no need to perform control for switching the specified information until the advantageous game state is set, and the processing load of the game machine is reduced. It has the effect of being able to

In any one of the game machines FG4 to FG7, the game machine is initialized by the initialization means, and an effect execution for executing a specific effect based on the determination result of the determination means becoming the first determination result. A gaming machine FG8 characterized by comprising means.

According to the game machine FG8, in addition to the effects of the game machines FG4 to FG7, there is an effect that the player can understand that the specific condition is established when the specific effect is executed.

In the game machine FG8, the effect execution means executes the specific effect when the power is turned on to the game machine and the setting of the game machine is not initialized to the initial setting by the initialization means. A gaming machine FG9 characterized in that it is configured to be able to suppress the

According to the gaming machine FG9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FG8, the player can understand whether or not the gaming machine has been initialized depending on whether or not the specific effect is executed. When the power is turned on, the player can be made to want to play the game at least until the specific condition is satisfied and determine whether or not initialization is performed. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation rate of the gaming machine can be improved especially immediately after the opening of the hall where the gaming machine is installed.

In any one of gaming machines FG2 to FG9, the dynamic display period information is composed of information defining at least a plurality of different periods that can be determined as the dynamic display period. FG10.

According to the gaming machine FG10, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines FG2 to FG9, by diversifying the dynamic display period, it is possible to provide variation in the period until the determination result of the determination means is displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Feature FH group> (reset the fluctuation pattern scenario triggered by reaching the ceiling lottery number)
Display means capable of displaying identification information, determination means capable of executing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means on the display means. dynamic display means capable of providing a privilege that is advantageous to the player based on the display of the identification information for indicating a predetermined specific determination result on the display means; in the gaming machine having the above, after the granting of the privilege is completed, the discrimination by the discrimination means is performed a predetermined specific number of times without the privilege being granted, which is advantageous to the player a setting means capable of setting information for setting a specific game state; a dynamic display mode determination means capable of determining a dynamic display mode in the dynamic display of the identification information; and a dynamic display mode thereof. provision information storage means for storing a plurality of provision information defining a plurality of different dynamic display modes that can be determined by the determination means; and selection that is information for selecting one provision information from the provision information storage means. Selected information identifying means for identifying one piece of selected information out of a plurality of different selected information as information, and the dynamic display mode is selected from the specified information storage means according to the selected information identified by the selected information identified means. and provision information selection means capable of selecting one provision information for determination, wherein the selection information specifying means selects the above-mentioned information without providing the privilege after the provision of the privilege is completed. A gaming machine FH1 is characterized in that it is configured such that one of the selection information can be identified based on the fact that the determination by the determination means has been performed a predetermined number of times.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, by dynamically displaying a plurality of symbols on display means such as a liquid crystal display, the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a start winning opening is notified. There is In such a gaming machine, when a plurality of dynamically displayed symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined specific combination, the game machine shifts to a so-called win state that is advantageous to the player (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2003-230714).

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, it may be difficult to determine the dynamic display mode in a suitable manner.

On the other hand, according to the game machine FH1, there is an effect that the selection information can be preferably specified.

In the gaming machine FH1, the selection information specifying means specifies the first selection information as the selection information based on the provision of the privilege, and the privilege is provided after the provision of the privilege is completed. The second selection information different from the first selection information can be identified based on the fact that the determination by the determination means has been performed a predetermined number of times. Machine FH2.

According to the gaming machine FH2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FH1, it is possible to specify different selection information depending on whether the provision of the privilege is completed or when the specific gaming state is set. There is an effect that the tendency of information can be diversified.

In the gaming machine FH1 or FH2, after the specific game state is set, the setting means determines the specific game based on the fact that the determination by the determination means is performed the specific number of times without the privilege being given. A game machine FH3 characterized by being configured to be able to set information for setting a state.

According to the gaming machine FH3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FH1 or FH2, even after the specific game state is set once, if the special game state is not given, the special game state is set again, so the special game state is given. There is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the specific game state is set periodically even if there is no special game state.

In the gaming machine FH3, the selection information specified based on the fact that the determination by the determining means is performed a predetermined specific number of times without the privilege being granted after the awarding of the privilege is completed, The number of determinations by the determination means is less than the first number of times, which is less than the specific number of times. A gaming machine FH4 characterized in that it is composed of information that allows selection of prescribed information.

According to the gaming machine FH4, when the discrimination is performed the first number of times after the specific game state is set, the tendency of the determined dynamic display mode can be varied. There is an effect that the change in tendency makes the player feel that the specific number of times is approaching.

In the gaming machine FH4, the selection information specified based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means is performed a predetermined specific number of times without giving the privilege is such that the number of discriminations by the discrimination means is greater than the specified number of times. the second number of times is smaller than the first number of times, the second number of times of determination is made to be selected by the second number of times of determination by the determination means, and the number of times of discrimination by the determination means is greater than the first number of times A game machine FH5, characterized in that the game machine FH5 is composed of information that allows the first regulation information to be selected in a range less than the second number of times.

According to the gaming machine FH5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FH4, when the number of determinations of the determination means executed after setting the specific game state reaches the first number and the second number of times, other Since the tendency of the determined dynamic display mode can be made different from the case of the number of times, each time the tendency of the dynamic display mode changes, the player feels that the specific number of times is approaching step by step. It has the effect of being able to

In any of the gaming machines FH3 to FH5, the specific game state initially set after the grant of the privilege is finished, and after the specific game state is set, the privilege is not granted and the The gaming machine FH6 is characterized by comprising an advantage level varying means capable of varying an advantage level between the specified game state set based on the execution of the determination by the determination means for the specified number of times.

According to the gaming machine FH6, even in the same specific game state, the degree of advantage can be varied depending on the set timing, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine FH6, the advantage degree varying means provides the privilege after the specific game state is set rather than the specific game state initially set after the award of the privilege ends. The degree of advantage is variable so that the degree of advantage is higher in the specific game state set based on the fact that the determination by the determination means is performed the specific number of times. Game machine FH7.

According to the gaming machine FH7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FH6, the special game state set in a state in which no privilege is granted for a longer period of time can increase the degree of advantage, so no privilege is granted. There is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel game property that makes us expect.

<Characteristic FI group> (It is assumed that the predetermined control was not executed when a predetermined control interrupt with a high priority occurred during the periodic control that periodically varied the control and the predetermined control was terminated. restart periodic control from the control position when
A first control is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined first execution condition, and the first control is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined second execution condition during execution of the first control. is different from the first control and the second control based on the fact that a predetermined third execution condition is satisfied during execution of at least the first control. third control setting means for setting the third control to be executed by the control means; and termination means for terminating the third control when a predetermined termination condition is met during the execution of the third control. and setting the second control to be executed by the control means when a predetermined specific condition is satisfied at the time when the third control is terminated by the terminating means, and the specific condition is a post-completion control setting means for setting the first control to be executed by the control means when the first control is not established.

Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with control means for controlling games. In such a gaming machine, when the state of the game changes, such as when shifting to a win state, predetermined control such as setting of set values is set to be executed by the control means (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2001-276365).

However, in such a game machine, it may be difficult to cause the control means to perform suitable control.

On the other hand, according to the game machine FI1, it is possible to switch between executing the first control and executing the second control after the end of the third control depending on whether or not the specific condition is satisfied at the end of the third control. Therefore, there is an effect that more suitable control can be realized.

In the gaming machine FI1, the post-end control setting means sets the second control to be under execution at the time when the end condition is satisfied on the assumption that the third execution condition is not satisfied during the execution of the first control. , the second control is set to be executed by the control means, and the first control is executed by the control means if the first control is being executed when the termination condition is satisfied. The game machine FI2 is characterized in that it is configured to be able to set as follows.

According to the gaming machine FI2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FI1, when the third control is ended, it is possible to set the control details on the assumption that the third control has not been executed, which is more preferable. There is an effect that it is possible to realize a smooth control.

In the game machine FI1 or FI2, a discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and a discrimination result advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means being a predetermined first discrimination result. and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game, wherein the second execution condition is that the determination result of the determination means is different from the first determination result after the first execution condition is satisfied. The gaming machine FI3 is characterized in that the condition is established when the number of times that the discrimination result of 2 is obtained reaches a predetermined specific number of times.

According to the game machine FI3, in addition to the effect of the game machine FI1 or FI2, the number of times the second determination result is obtained becomes a specific number of times, so that it is possible to switch to a different control, so an advantageous privilege game is not executed. It is possible to prevent the first control from being continuously executed under certain circumstances. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In the gaming machine FI3, the post-termination setting means determines, at the time when the termination condition is satisfied, that the number of times the second determination result has been obtained after the previous first execution condition is satisfied is equal to or greater than the specific number of times. The second control can be set to be executed by the control means, and the first control can be set to be executed when the number of times the second determination result is obtained is less than a specific number of times. A gaming machine FI4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine FI4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FI3, it is possible to switch the control content after the third control is finished according to the number of times of the second determination result, so that more suitable control can be realized. has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine FI3 or FI4, display means capable of displaying identification information, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means on the display means, and the dynamic display means dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information according to; , and second regulating information different from the first regulating information; and controlling the dynamic display period determining means to determine the dynamic display period using the second control as the second control to determine the dynamic display period using the second regulation information. A game machine FI5, characterized in that it is configured to be able to control target display period determining means.

According to the game machine FI5, the tendency of the dynamic display period determined by whether the first control is executed or the second control is executed can be made different, so the determination result of the determination means is displayed. The trend of the period to can also be made different. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any one of game machines FI3 to FI5, first game state setting means for setting a first game state based on establishment of a predetermined specific setting condition; It is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discriminating means has continuously become the second discrimination result over a predetermined first number of times greater than the specific number of times. and a second game state setting means for setting a second game state, wherein the first execution condition is constituted by a condition that is established when the specific setting condition is established. Game machine FI6.

According to the game machine FI6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines FI3 to FI5, the second game state is set because the first control can be switched to the second control during the first game state. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous.

In the gaming machine FI6, based on the determination result of the determination means being a third determination result that is different from the first determination result and is a part of the second determination result, a third game state setting means for setting a third game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state; A game machine FI7 characterized by being constituted by a condition that is established when the condition is satisfied.

According to the game machine FI7, in addition to the effects of the game machine FI6, control can be switched when the first game state is switched to the third game state, so that control can be executed according to the game state. has the effect of

In the gaming machine FI7, the first game state setting means continuously sets the determination result of the determination means executed after the third determination result is obtained for a predetermined second number of times. 2, the game state can be set to the first game state, and the end condition is executed after the third determination result is obtained. The gaming machine FI8 is characterized by a condition that is established when the discrimination result of the discriminating means is the second discrimination result consecutively over a predetermined second number of times.

According to the game machine FI8, when returning to the first game state after finishing the third game state, switching between executing the first control and executing the second control according to the number of times of the second determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that more suitable control can be realized.

<Feature FJ group> (When it is determined that the conditions for setting an advantageous state are satisfied again during the advantageous state at the time when the setting conditions for an advantageous state are satisfied, the degree of advantage taking into account the advantageous state to be set later is determined. report)
First game state setting means for setting a first game state based on establishment of a predetermined specific setting condition; a second game state setting means for setting a second game state more advantageous to the player than the game state; a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect suggesting to the player a degree of advantage taking into account the set conditions to be set, at least before the second game state is set. FJ1.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby providing a winning game advantageous to the player. In addition, various images such as characters and scenery are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: 2003-325886).

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of interest.

In addition, in such conventional gaming machines, it is known that a plurality of game states with different degrees of advantage are provided, and when shifting to a game state with a high degree of advantage, display effects, etc. There are also those that report the degree.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, since only the degree of advantage of the most recently set advantage state is determined and the degree of advantage is reported, there is a discrepancy between the actual degree of advantage and the reported degree of advantage. may occur.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine FJ1, it is known in advance that the second game state is set and that the setting condition for setting the second game state again during the second game state is established. In this case, it is possible to realize a novel performance mode that suggests to the player the degree of advantage that takes into consideration the overlapping setting of the second game state before the second game state is set. , there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine FJ1, a determining means for performing determination based on the establishment of a determining condition, and a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the determination result of the determining means is a predetermined first determination result. and the determination result of the determination means executed after the second game state is set is different from the first determination result over a predetermined specific number of times. and a termination means for terminating the second game state based on the determination result of , wherein the specific effect is performed by the determination means until the second game state is terminated by the termination means. The game machine FJ2 is characterized in that it is composed of an effect capable of suggesting the number of determinations.

According to the game machine FJ2, in addition to the effect of the game machine FJ1, the number of determinations until the second game state ends can be suggested by the specific effect, so there is an effect that the specific effect can be noticed. .

In the gaming machine FJ2, the number of determinations by the determination means until the second game state is terminated by the termination means based on the establishment of the predetermined set condition is a first number and a number greater than the first number. A gaming machine FJ3, characterized by comprising end number determination means for determining one number of times out of a plurality of numbers including at least a large second number of times.

According to the game machine FJ3, since a plurality of times can be determined by the end times determination means, there is an effect that the game can be played while paying attention to the number of times suggested by the specific effect.

In the game machine FJ2 or FJ3, the predetermined setting condition is a third determination result that is a determination result different from the first determination result of the determination means and is included in the second determination result. and a second setting condition different from the first setting condition.

According to the game machine FJ4, in addition to the effects of the game machine FJ2 or FJ3, a plurality of conditions are provided as conditions for setting an advantageous game state, so it can be expected to shift to the second game state. You can do more scenes. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the game machine FJ4, the second setting condition is that the determination result of the determination means executed after the first game state is set is set to the second determination result for a predetermined third number of times. The game machine FJ5 is characterized in that it is constituted by a condition that is established when .

According to the game machine FJ5, in addition to the effects of the game machine FJ4, even if the first determination result is not obtained in the first game state with a low degree of advantage, the determination by the determination means is performed the second number of times over the third number of times. Since the second game state with a high degree of advantage is set by obtaining the discrimination result, even if the period in which the first discrimination result is not obtained in the first game state continues for a long time, the player's motivation for playing the game decreases. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the storage.

In the gaming machine FJ5, the specific effect executing means, as the effect mode of the specific effect, satisfies the first setting condition and performs the specific effect in the second game state set based on the establishment of the first setting condition. When the number of determinations by the determination means reaches the third number of times before the determination by the determination means is executed for the number of times, the determination result of the determination means reaches the third number after the first set condition is established. A game machine FJ6 is characterized in that it is configured to be able to set an effect mode according to the number of determinations that can be executed until the second game state that is set based on reaching the number of times is completed.

According to the gaming machine FJ6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FJ5, it is possible to set a performance mode according to the number of determinations until the second game state is actually ended as the performance mode of the specific performance. There is an effect that a game can be played while paying more attention to the specific performance.

In the game machine FJ6, when the first determination result is not obtained in the second game state set as the effect mode of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means, the determination can be performed at least a fourth number of times. and a second effect mode indicating that the discrimination can be performed a fifth number of times, which is larger than the fourth number of times, is determined. A performance mode determination means is provided, and the performance mode determination means has a first number or more of determinations that can be executed when the first determination result is not obtained in the set second game state, and The game machine FJ7 is characterized in that the first effect mode can be determined when the number of times is less than two.

According to the game machine FJ7, in addition to the effects of the game machine FJ6, when the number of determinations until the end of the second game state is the first number of times or more and less than the second number of times, the first performance mode is uniformly applied. can be determined, there is an effect that the processing load of the gaming machine can be reduced.

In the game machine FJ7, a display means capable of displaying an effect mode, and the number of determinations that can be executed until the set second game state is terminated based on the setting of the second game state. display control means for causing the display means to display, as information indicating, information indicating the number of determinations according to the effect mode of the specific effect executed before the second game state is set; and the second game updating means for updating the information indicating the number of times of determination displayed on the display means to information indicating the number of times of determination one less each time the determination means performs determination in a state. FJ8.

According to the game machine FJ8, in addition to the effects of the game machine FJ7, the number of determinations until the end of the second game state is displayed on the display means, so that the player can understand how long the second game state will continue. There is an effect that it can be configured easily.

<Characteristic FK group> (update the counter within a predetermined range, and update the counter value to the second counter value when the counter value reaches the first counter value)
updating means capable of updating a counter value of a specific counter to a value of 1 within a predetermined range based on the establishment of a specific predetermined update condition; specific control execution means for executing a predetermined specific control based on the counter value being updated to a predetermined first counter value; Based on the fact that the counter value has been updated to the first counter value, the counter value of the specific counter is set to a second counter value that is within the predetermined range and is different from the first counter value. a game machine FK1 characterized by comprising counter value setting means for setting a counter value.

Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with control means for controlling games. In such a gaming machine, when the state of the game changes, such as when shifting to a win state, predetermined control such as setting of set values is set to be executed by the control means (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2001-276365).

However, there is a need for better control.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine FK1, when a specific counter value is updated to the first counter value, it can be updated to the second counter value, so that the counter value can be preferably updated. can. Therefore, there is an effect that specific control can be executed more preferably.

In the gaming machine FK1, the first counter value is configured with a value larger than the second counter value, and the updating means makes the counter value of the specific counter larger than before updating. A game machine FK2 characterized by being configured to be able to update to a counter value.

According to the game machine FK2, in addition to the effects of the game machine FK1, the counter value can be updated to the first counter value again by repeating the update of the counter value after being updated to the second counter value. There is an effect that the player can expect that is executed again.

In the game machine FK1 or FK2, display means capable of displaying identification information, determination means capable of performing determination based on the establishment of determination conditions, and the identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means are displayed on the display means. a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying a dynamic display, and based on the display of the identification information for indicating a predetermined specific determination result on the display means, a privilege advantageous to the player is presented. It is advantageous to the player based on the privilege granting means that can be granted and the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means is performed a predetermined specific number of times without the privilege being granted after the granting of the privilege is completed. a setting means capable of setting information for setting a specific game state; a dynamic display mode determination means capable of determining a dynamic display mode in the dynamic display of the identification information; and a dynamic display mode thereof. Defined information storage means for storing a plurality of defined information defining a plurality of different dynamic display modes that can be determined by the determination means, and one definition for determining the dynamic display mode from the defined information storage means defined information selection means capable of selecting information, the update condition is configured to be established based on establishment of the determination condition, and the specific control execution means selects information as the specific control , predetermined specific selection information among a plurality of pieces of selection information previously defined as selection information for causing the definition information selection means to select one definition information from the definition information storage means; wherein the prescribed information selection means selects one prescribed information according to the counter value of the specific counter and the specified selection information A gaming machine FK3 characterized by being configured to be able to

According to the game machine FK3, there is an effect that the selection information can be preferably specified.

A gaming machine FK4 characterized in that, in the gaming machine FK3, first selection information different from the specific selection information can be specified as the selection information based on the provision of the privilege. .

According to the gaming machine FK4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FK3, the selection information can be specified even when a privilege is given, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved. .

In the gaming machine FK3 or FK4, after the specific game state is set, the setting means determines the specific game based on the fact that the determination by the determination means is performed the specific number of times without the privilege being given. A gaming machine FK5 characterized by being configured to be able to set information for setting a state.

According to the game machine FK5, in addition to the effects of the game machine FK3 or FK4, even after the specific game state is set once, if the special game state is not given, the special game state is set again, so the special game state is given. There is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the specific game state is set periodically even if there is no special game state.

<Characteristic FL Group> (When a first control interrupt with a high priority occurs during periodic control that periodically varies control, and the first control is terminated, a second control different from periodic control control)
A first control is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined first execution condition, and the first control is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined second execution condition during execution of the first control. is different from the first control and the second control based on the fact that a predetermined third execution condition is satisfied during execution of at least the first control. third control setting means for setting the third control to be executed by the control means; and termination means for terminating the third control when a predetermined termination condition is met during the execution of the third control. and post-termination control for setting the fourth control different from the first control and the second control to be executed by the control means based on the termination of the third control by the termination means A gaming machine FL1 comprising: setting means;

Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with control means for controlling games. In such a gaming machine, when the state of the game changes, such as when shifting to a win state, predetermined control such as setting of set values is set to be executed by the control means (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2001-276365).

However, in such a game machine, it may be difficult to cause the control means to perform suitable control.

On the other hand, according to the game machine FL1, when the third control ends, the fourth control can be executed, so there is an effect that more suitable control can be realized.

In the game machine FL1, the game machine FL2 is characterized in that the first execution condition is composed of a condition that can be satisfied at least during the execution of the fourth control.

Since the first control is executed again when the first execution condition is satisfied during execution of the fourth control, it is possible to expect that the first execution condition is satisfied during execution of the fourth control. has the effect of

In the game machine FL1 or FL2, a discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and an advantage for the player based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a predetermined first discrimination result. and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game, wherein the second execution condition is that the determination result of the determination means is different from the first determination result after the first execution condition is satisfied. The game machine FL3 is characterized in that the condition is established when the number of times that the discrimination result of 2 is obtained reaches a predetermined specific number of times.

According to the game machine FL3, in addition to the effects of the game machine FL1 or FL2, the number of times the second determination result is obtained becomes a specific number of times, so that it is possible to switch to a different control, so an advantageous privilege game is not executed. It is possible to prevent the first control from being continuously executed under certain circumstances. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In the gaming machine FL3, display means capable of displaying identification information, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means on the display means, and dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period in dynamic display of identification information; first stipulation information as predetermined stipulation information that defines information for determining the dynamic display period; defining information storage means for storing a plurality of defining information including at least second defining information different from the first defining information; and the controlling means uses the first defining information as the first control. and controlling the dynamic display period determination means to determine the dynamic display period by using the second control as the dynamic display period to determine the dynamic display period using the second regulation information. A gaming machine FL4 characterized in that it is configured so as to be able to control period determining means.

In the game machine FL4, when the determination result of the determination means is a third determination result different from the first determination result and included in the second determination result, A specific game state setting means for setting an advantageous specific game state is provided, and the third execution condition is constituted by a condition established based on the determination result of the determination means becoming the third determination result. and the third control causes the dynamic display period determination means to determine the dynamic display period using third definition information different from the first definition information and the second definition information. A game machine FL5 characterized in that it is configured with a control for.

According to the gaming machine FL5, since the tendency of the dynamic display period determined when the specific game state is set can be changed, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous. be.

<Feature group of 5073 (base) system>
<Characteristic βA group>
discrimination means capable of executing discrimination; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means on a display means; and displaying a specific discrimination result on the display means. a privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege when the identification information for is displayed, a performance mode display means capable of displaying a plurality of performance modes on the display means; variable display means capable of varying the effect mode displayed on the means; notification means capable of arranging the notification mode at the position where the effect mode is displayed; and the plurality of effect modes being displayed. and suggesting control means capable of suggesting the variable presentation mode by arranging the notification mode when the game machine βA1 is in the state of the game machine βA1.

Conventionally, a game machine such as a pachinko machine has been proposed in which, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and an effect is executed to notify the result of the determination. It had been. (Prior art document: Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2012-217766) However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

According to the gaming machine βA1, since the notification mode is arranged to make it easier for the player to recognize the variable performance mode, it is possible to suppress the problem of overlooking the variable performance mode, thereby improving the amusement of the game. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine βA1, an acquiring means capable of acquiring information that can be discriminated by the discriminating means, and a storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquiring means, wherein the effect mode display The gaming machine βA2 is characterized in that the means is capable of displaying the effect mode when the information is stored in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine βA2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine βA1, the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means can be determined by the number of presentation modes displayed, and the number of times that can be determined can be predicted. has the effect of being able to

The gaming machine βA2 has preliminary determination means capable of performing determination before the information stored in the storage means is determined by the determination means, and the variable display means A game machine βA3 characterized in that it is constructed so as to be variable based on the discrimination result of the discriminating means.

According to the gaming machine βA3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine βA1 or βA2, the performance mode is varied based on the determination result by the preliminary determination means, so that the determination result can be predicted by varying the performance mode. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic βB group>
reporting means capable of reporting a predetermined reporting mode; operating means operable by the player; setting means capable of setting information for varying settings based on the operation of the operating means; a presentation execution means capable of executing a presentation mode corresponding to the setting; and a display means capable of displaying an identification mode corresponding to the set information when the operation means is operated. identification mode display means; setting means capable of setting a specific period during which the identification mode is more difficult to see than a normal period; a mode executing means for executing a second mode different from the first mode for suggesting the identification mode when the means is operated.

Conventionally, a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, draws a lottery to determine whether the game is successful or not, executes an effect to notify the judgment result, and is provided in the game machine. A game machine has been proposed in which a game mode can be changed by operating an operation means that can be operated by a player who has received the game. (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766) However, when the operation means is operated, it may be difficult to determine whether the mode of the game has been changed, and the problem is that the interest in the game is reduced. was there. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

According to the gaming machine βB1, when the identification mode is in the specific period when the identification mode is difficult to see, the second mode for suggesting the identification mode is executed. By using the means, it is possible to suggest the identification mode to the player, and the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine βB1, a determination means capable of executing determination, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means on a display means, and a specific and a privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the determination result is displayed, and the effect executing means dynamically displays the identification information. Based on the setting changed by the operation of the operation means during the period when the identification information is not displayed, the effect can be executed by changing it during the dynamic display period of the identification information executed thereafter. A game machine βB2 characterized in that it has a

According to the gaming machine βB2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine βB1, the contents of the operation during the period when the dynamic display is not performed are also reflected during the dynamic display period executed thereafter. There is an effect that the production can be enjoyed together with the target display.

In the game machine βB1 or βB2, the mode executing means is configured to be able to move to a position where the identification mode was displayed and execute it during the specific period. Gaming machine βB3.

According to the game machine βB3, in addition to the effects of the game machine βB1 or βB2, the mode executing means is moved to the position where the identification mode was displayed and executed, so the second mode is executed instead of the identification mode. There is an effect that it is possible to make it easy to understand that the game is being played, and that the interest in the game can be improved.

<Feature βC group> (Door opening/closing)
discrimination means capable of executing discrimination; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means on a display means; and displaying a specific discrimination result on the display means. a privilege granting means capable of imparting a privilege when the identification information for is displayed, a performance executing means capable of executing a performance during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed; and the performance and variable means capable of varying the form of the identification information based on the establishment of a specific condition during the period during which the identification information and determining means capable of determining by varying the number of times a condition is satisfied.

Conventionally, a game machine such as a pachinko machine draws a lottery as to whether a game is successful or not when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, and dynamically displays a plurality of patterns as an effect to notify the judgment result. A gaming machine has been proposed in which symbols are stopped and displayed in combination to notify the result of the lottery after the symbols have been drawn. (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766) However, the dynamic display mode of the symbols tends to be monotonous. There was a problem that the SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

According to the gaming machine βC1, since the identification information is changed each time the specific condition is satisfied, it is possible to expect that the identification information will be changed to the mode indicating the specific determination result each time the specific condition is satisfied. There is an effect that the number of times determined by the determination means can be made interesting, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine βC1, the dynamic display of the identification information includes a temporary stop mode in which at least part of the identification information is temporarily stopped in a mode that allows the identification information to be displayed in a mode that indicates the specific determination result. A gaming machine βC2 characterized in that it is configured to be executable, and the specific condition is configured to be established during the period in which the temporary stop mode is being performed.

According to the gaming machine βC2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine βC1, a specific condition is satisfied during the temporary stop period, and the form of the identification information is changed, so that the change can be easily recognized. has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine βC1 or βC2, the identification information can be configured to indicate the specific determination result by displaying a combination of a plurality of symbols, and the variable means varies the combination of symbols. A gaming machine βC3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine βC3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine βC1 or βC2, the combination of symbols can be changed each time a specific condition is established, and the effect of increasing expectations for a specific determination result can be obtained. be.

<Characteristic βD group>
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance, a benefit granting means capable of granting a privilege advantageous to a player when a specific performance is executed by the performance execution means, an operation means operable by the player, In a gaming machine having setting means capable of varying game settings based on the operation of the operating means, the operating means is operated during the period in which the performance is being executed. A gaming machine βD1 capable of executing an effect based on the game setting changed during the execution period of the effect.

Conventionally, game machines such as pachinko machines draw lots when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, and the contents of the effect are determined by lottery as an effect to notify the judgment result. A gaming machine has been proposed in which the degree of expectation for the success/failure determination is executed as an advance notice effect before the lottery result is notified. (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766) However, there is a problem that the frequency of determining the contents of the effect mode to be executed tends to be constant and the interest in the game decreases. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

According to the gaming machine βD1, game settings can be varied by operating the operation means during the performance of the performance, and the performance can be executed based on the changed settings during the execution of the performance. There is an effect that the game can be played at an early stage in a state corresponding to the setting corresponding to the demand of the player, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The game machine βD2 is characterized in that the game machine βD1 has an effect setting means capable of setting an effect mode corresponding to a plurality of settings when the effect is executed.

According to the gaming machine βD2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine βD1, when an effect is executed, an effect mode corresponding to a plurality of settings is set, so that the effect mode can be easily changed during the execution of the effect. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine βD1 or βD2, a special effect can be executed based on the operation of the operation means and the setting being varied during the period during which the specific effect is executed. A game machine βD3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine βD3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine βD1 or βD2, by varying the settings, it is possible to quickly identify that a specific effect will be executed, and the interest in the game can be further improved. has the effect of

<Characteristic βE group>
discrimination means capable of executing discrimination; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means on a display means; and displaying a specific discrimination result on the display means. and a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege when the identification information for is displayed, wherein the identification information is composed of a plurality of symbols, and the symbols are stopped and displayed 2, the game machine βE1 is characterized in that it has an effect executing means capable of executing a effect mode corresponding to the symbol type to be stopped.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not. A gaming machine has been proposed in which, after being displayed, a combination of symbols indicating a lottery result is stopped and displayed. (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766) However, there is a problem that simply repeating the dynamic display and stop of the symbols makes the game monotonous and reduces the interest in the game. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

According to the gaming machine βE1, since an effect mode corresponding to the type of the stopped symbol is executed, there is an effect that the type of the stopped symbol can be easily recognized and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine βE1, the identification information is configured by adding an identification mode to each of the plurality of symbols, and the identification mode is determined and added without corresponding to the type of the symbols. A gaming machine βE2 characterized by:

According to the game machine βE2, in addition to the effect of the game machine βE1, since the identification mode is added to the symbols without corresponding to the type, there is an effect that the variation of the identification information can be diversified.

A gaming machine βE3, wherein in the gaming machine βE1 or βE2, the mode for indicating the specific determination result is configured by displaying the identification mode in a specific combination.

According to the gaming machine βE3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine βE1 or βE2, a specific determination result is notified by combining identification modes regardless of the type of symbols, so symbols are flexibly combined with identification modes and reported. It has the effect of being able to

<Feature βF group> (Suggestion of expectation by action pattern at the time of reserved pattern shift)
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information, determination means capable of executing determination based on the information based on the establishment of determination conditions, and identification information for indicating determination results by the determination means are moved. display means capable of displaying a target; storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means; and identification patterns for indicating the number of the information stored in the storage means; and an identification pattern display means that can be displayed on the display means, and when the identification information for indicating a specific determination result is displayed on the display means, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player can be executed. In a gaming machine having a privilege game execution means, when the number of the information stored in the storage means changes, the display position of the identification pattern is changed to a display position corresponding to the new number of the information. and operation mode setting means capable of setting an operation mode of the identification pattern when the display position of the identification pattern is changed by the display position change means. Machine βF1.

Conventionally, a game machine such as a pachinko machine has been proposed in which, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and an effect is executed to notify the result of the determination. It had been. (Prior art document: Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2012-217766) However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

According to the gaming machine βF1, since the action mode when the display position of the identification pattern is changed can be set by the action mode setting means, it is possible to execute an effect using the action mode of the identification pattern, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. has the effect of being able to improve

In the gaming machine βF1, the operation mode setting means can set a specific operation mode when the identification information corresponding to the identification pattern is the identification information for indicating the specific determination result. Characteristic game machine βF2.

According to the gaming machine βF2, when the identification pattern changes its display position, the identification information corresponding to the identification pattern is identification information for indicating a specific determination result by operating in a specific operation mode. Since it is possible to recognize that there is something else, it is possible to make the player interested in the action mode of the identification symbol, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

<Feature βG group> (Production that hides reserved patterns other than the relevant reserved pattern during reach production)
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information, determination means capable of performing determination based on the information based on the establishment of determination conditions, and identification information for indicating determination results by the determination means are moved. display means capable of displaying a target, effect mode display means capable of displaying a plurality of effect modes on the display means, and when the identification information for indicating a specific determination result is displayed on the display means and a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to a player, a blocking means capable of making the display means difficult to see, and a blocking means thereof. a gaming machine βG1, characterized in that it has a range setting means capable of setting a range in which a state is difficult to be visually recognized.

Conventionally, a game machine such as a pachinko machine has been proposed in which, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and an effect is executed to notify the result of the determination. It had been. (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766) However, when a plurality of effects are executed simultaneously, the player does not know which effect to pay attention to, and there is a risk that the effects of the effects are reduced. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

According to the gaming machine βG1, the range is set by the range setting means, and the range is blocked by the blocking means, making it difficult for the player to see. There is an effect of being able to attract the attention of the person.

The gaming machine βG1 has storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the presentation mode display means, when the information is stored in the storage means, displays the A game machine βG2 characterized in that it is possible to display an effect mode.

According to the gaming machine βG2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine βG1, the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means can be determined by the number of presentation modes displayed, and the number of times that can be determined can be predicted. has the effect of being able to

The gaming machine βG3, wherein the storage means can store the information up to a specific number in the gaming machine βG2.

According to the gaming machine βG3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine βG2, it is possible to set an upper limit on the number of stored information used for determination by the determination means, thereby suppressing execution of excessive determinations. It has the effect of being able to

<Characteristic βH group> (symbol stock reach)
A discrimination means capable of carrying out discrimination; a display means for displaying an identification pattern composed of a plurality of pattern rows for indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means; display control means for stop-displaying the identification pattern in a display mode for indicating the discrimination result; and a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player, the stop display mode for indicating the specific determination result is that the plurality of symbol rows are of the specific symbols. The display control means selects at least two or more of the plurality of symbol rows as a combination of symbols to be part of the combination for indicating the specific determination result. It is configured to be able to be displayed in a ready-to-win display mode in which the ready-to-win display mode is stopped or temporarily stopped, and the identification symbols stopped and displayed in the symbol row dynamically displayed while the ready-to-win display mode is displayed. A suggestive effect for suggesting a display mode can be executed, and the gaming machine changes the display mode of the identification symbol indicating the ready-to-win display mode based on the display mode of the identification symbol suggested by the suggestive effect. A gaming machine βH1 characterized by being variable.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and symbols for informing the result of the lottery are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time. After that, the symbols are stop-displayed in a manner indicating the result of the lottery, and when the result of the lottery indicating the failure is notified, the variable display of the symbols for indicating the result of the next lottery is started. When the result of the lottery is a win, after a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed, the game state is changed to a game state advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A configuration capable of achieving this has been proposed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766). However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that further enhances the enjoyment of games.

According to the gaming machine βH1, the identification pattern indicating the ready-to-win display mode is changed while suggesting the stop display mode of the identification pattern during dynamic display by the suggestive effect executed in the state where the ready-to-win display mode is displayed. It is also possible to let Therefore, according to the content of the suggestive effect, the identification pattern indicating the ready-to-win display mode does not change, and the identification pattern indicating the ready-to-win display mode is different from the game in which the identification pattern during dynamic display is expected to be stopped and displayed. It is possible to execute a game that expects to change. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine βH1, the suggestive effect is, after displaying a plurality of decorative symbols having information corresponding to the display mode of the identification pattern, a predetermined number of the displayed decorative symbols to indicate the result of the effect. A game machine βH2 characterized in that it displays the decorative pattern of .

According to the game machine βH2, by displaying a plurality of decorative patterns including decorative patterns for indicating the effect result of the suggestive effect, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting the effect result of the suggestive effect. In addition, by grasping the information possessed by the plurality of decorative symbols to be displayed, it is possible to stop and display the identification symbols during dynamic display without changing the identification symbols indicating the ready-to-win display mode by this suggestive effect. It is possible to execute a game to expect and a game to expect that the identification pattern indicating the ready-to-win display mode is variable. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine βH2, the suggestive effect is to display the plurality of decorative symbols in order, and the decorative symbols having information other than the information corresponding to the identification symbols displayed in the ready-to-win display mode are displayed first. A gaming machine βH3 characterized in that it displays.

According to the gaming machine βH3, the decorative pattern that is displayed first in the state where the ready-to-win display mode is displayed is a decorative pattern having information other than the information corresponding to the identification pattern displayed in the ready-to-win display mode. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that an identification symbol for indicating a specific determination result is stopped and displayed.

<Features βI group> (screen press notice)
Determination means capable of executing determination, display image creation means capable of creating a display image for showing the determination result by the determination means, and displaying the display image created by the display image creation means in a predetermined display area and image control means capable of variably controlling the display image created by the display image creation means, wherein the display image creation means superimposes a plurality of layers to The gaming machine βI1 is characterized in that the display image can be created, and the image control means can variably control the display image in units of the layers.

Conventionally, there is a display device such as a liquid crystal display device that executes a variable effect for indicating the determination result of the determination means, and in order to enhance the effect by executing a variety of variable effects, a liquid crystal display is used. A gaming machine has been proposed that displays various display images on the display screen of the device (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766). However, as the number of types of variable effects increases, the amount of display data used to create display images increases, causing the problem of putting pressure on manufacturing costs. There has been a demand for a gaming machine capable of increasing the effect of performance and enhancing the interest of the player in the game by executing various variable performances while suppressing the increase in the number of players. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that further enhances the enjoyment of games.

According to the gaming machine βI1, the display image can be variably controlled in units of a plurality of layers forming the display image created by the display image creation means, so that various display modes can be achieved using the same display image. It can be displayed in the display area. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to execute various variable effects while suppressing an increase in the amount of display data for creating a display image.

In the gaming machine βI1, the image creating means can create a display image of the identification information for indicating the determination result of the determining means on a specific first layer among the plurality of layers, and the image control A gaming machine βI2, characterized by comprising correction means capable of executing correction control for making the identification information difficult to see when the first layer is variably controlled by the means.

According to the gaming machine βI2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine βI1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the display image of the identification information is variably controlled by the image control means, the display image of the identification information variably controlled by the correction means can be made difficult for the player to see. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing the provided identification information.

In the gaming machine βI2, the plurality of images include at least a second layer on the front side of the first layer, and the image control means is the same for the first layer and the first layer. The correction means executes specific variable control of content, and the correcting means corrects the content displayed on the first layer by the display image displayed on the second layer when the specific variable control is executed. A gaming machine βI3 characterized in that the display image of the identification information is made difficult to see.

According to the gaming machine βI3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine βI2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in order to make it difficult to see the display image for showing the variably controlled identification information, the first layer on which the display image of the identification information is created and the second layer on which the same specific variable control is executed. Since the display image displayed on the layer is used, the display image of the second layer can be easily displayed without deviation from the display position of the display image of the identification information even if any variable control is executed. It has the effect of being able to

<Characteristic βJ group>
discrimination means capable of executing discrimination; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means on a display means; and displaying a specific discrimination result on the display means. a privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege when the identification information for is displayed, a performance mode display means capable of displaying a plurality of performance modes on the display means; It has variable display means capable of varying the performance mode displayed on the means, and display mode determination means capable of determining the display mode corresponding to the position where the plurality of performance modes are displayed. A gaming machine βJ1 characterized by:

Conventionally, a game machine such as a pachinko machine has been proposed in which, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and an effect is executed to notify the result of the determination. It had been. (Prior art document: Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2012-217766) However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

According to the gaming machine βJ1, since the notification mode is arranged to make it easier for the player to recognize the variable performance mode, it is possible to suppress the problem of overlooking the variable performance mode, thereby improving the amusement of the game. It has the effect of being able to

The gaming machine βJ2 in the gaming machine βJ1 is characterized in that the variable display means can vary the degree of variation of the presentation mode according to the display mode determined by the display mode determining means.

According to the game machine βJ2, in addition to the effects of the game machine J1, the variable degree of the presentation mode can be varied according to the determined display mode, so that the displayed display mode can be easily made interesting. has the effect of being able to

In the game machine βJ2, a notification means capable of arranging the notification mode at the position where the production mode is displayed, and when the plurality of production modes are displayed, the notification mode can be changed by arranging the notification mode. and suggestion control means capable of suggesting the possible effect modes.

According to the gaming machine βJ3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine βJ2, the variable rendering mode can be easily recognized by the player by arranging the notification mode, so there is a problem that the variable rendering mode is overlooked. can be suppressed, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic βK group>
reporting means capable of reporting a predetermined reporting mode; operating means operable by the player; setting means capable of setting information for varying settings based on the operation of the operating means; and effect execution means capable of executing a performance mode corresponding to the setting, in the gaming machine, benefit giving means capable of giving a benefit based on the setting of the information by the setting means. A gaming machine βK1 characterized by having:

Conventionally, a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, draws a lottery to determine whether the game is successful or not, executes an effect to notify the judgment result, and is provided in the game machine. A game machine has been proposed in which a game mode can be changed by operating an operation means that can be operated by a player who has received the game. (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766) However, when the operation means is operated, it may be difficult to determine whether the mode of the game has been changed, and the problem is that the interest in the game is reduced. was there. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

According to the gaming machine βK1, since a privilege is given based on setting information, the player can be made to operate the operation means in order to request the provision of the privilege. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine βK1 has a determination means capable of executing determination, and a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game when the result of the determination performed by the determination means is a specific determination result, The gaming machine K2 is characterized in that the privilege providing means informs that the result of the determining means is the specific determination result before the privilege game is executed.

According to the gaming machine βK2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine βK1, the privilege providing means can promptly notify the player that the privilege game will be executed. can be operated. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine βK2, the privilege granting means can grant the privilege when the information is set by the setting means while the identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means is dynamically displayed. A gaming machine βK3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine βK3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K2, it is possible to allow the player to operate the operation means in order to obtain a privilege even during the dynamic display period of the identification information. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Feature group of 5073 (additional) system>
<Characteristic GA group> (Catch period of button operation effect)
Operation means operable by a player, operation valid period setting means capable of setting an operation valid period during which an operation to the operation means is determined to be valid, and during the operation valid period set by the operation valid period setting means an effect variable means capable of stepwise changing an effect mode from a first mode to a second mode different from the first mode, based on the fact that the operation is executed on the second stage; and the effect mode specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect when is varied to the second mode, wherein the operation effective period is set to the first state and the effect It has a state setting means capable of setting a second state in which it is difficult to change the mode, and the state setting means detects that the operation means is operated while the first state is set. A gaming machine GA1 characterized in that the second state can be set based on.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a game machine such as a pachinko machine capable of executing an operation presentation based on the operation content of an operation means (frame button 22, etc.) that a player can operate. Then, as a production mode of the operation production, a production mode of reducing the physical strength of the enemy character (hereinafter referred to as a gauge reduction production) is provided, and when a privilege advantageous to the player can be given, the production result of the gauge reduction production is A gaming machine has been proposed in which an effect is executed in which the physical strength value of an enemy character becomes 0 (prior art document: JP-A-2009-233171).

However, in the conventional gauge reduction effect, the physical strength value that can be finally reduced is determined according to whether or not the privilege can be given, so the player does not have to operate the operation means. Therefore, if the reduction of the physical strength value stops in the middle of the gauge reduction effect, the effect result of this time will be a result of the effect that is disadvantageous to the player. There is a problem that it is easily predicted before is displayed, and the presentation effect cannot be enhanced.

DISCLOSURE OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above. By setting the period of suspension, even if the reduction of the physical strength value is stopped for a predetermined period during the gauge reduction performance, the player expects the physical strength value to be further reduced, thereby further improving the interest of the game. The purpose is to provide a gaming machine that allows

According to the game machine GA1, since the second state can be set based on the operation to the operation means executed during the first state, it is difficult to change the effect mode even if the predetermined operation is executed. In this case, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict whether the effect mode will not change to the second mode or whether the second state is merely set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to operate the operating means until the valid period of operation elapses.

In the game machine GA1, the game machine GA2 is characterized by having a state switching means capable of setting the first state when a release condition is satisfied while the second state is set.

According to the game machine GA2, in addition to the effects of the game machine GA1, the following effects are produced. That is, even when the second state is set in which it is difficult to change the effect mode, the first state in which the effect mode can be changed is set by establishing the cancellation condition. It is possible to make it easier to change the presentation mode. Therefore, even when the second state is set, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a significant decrease in the player's willingness to play the game to change the presentation mode to the second state.

A game machine GA3 characterized in that, in the game machine GA2, the cancellation condition can be established based on the predetermined operation executed during the second state.

According to the gaming machine GA3, the cancellation condition can be satisfied by executing a predetermined operation during the second state. It is possible to continue the execution, and there is an effect that the player's desire to operate the operation means can be enhanced.

<Characteristic GB group> (In the long-press operation effect, it is easier to proceed with the long-press cancellation)
An operation means that can be operated by a player, an operation determination means that can determine whether the predetermined operation is continuously performed on the operation means, and a predetermined period of time that the predetermined operation is performed by the operation determination means. a performance variable means capable of varying a performance mode from a first mode to a second mode different from the first mode on the basis of determination that the performance is continuously executed; a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect when the mode is changed to the second mode, in a state in which the predetermined operation continues for a second period shorter than the specific period. The gaming machine GB1 is characterized by having effect control means capable of executing effect control capable of changing the effect mode to the second mode when a predetermined condition is established.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a game machine such as a pachinko machine capable of executing an operation presentation based on the operation content of an operation means (frame button 22, etc.) that a player can operate. Then, as a production mode of the operation production, a production mode of reducing the physical strength of the enemy character (hereinafter referred to as a gauge reduction production) is provided, and when a privilege advantageous to the player can be given, the production result of the gauge reduction production is A gaming machine has been proposed in which an effect is executed in which the physical strength value of an enemy character becomes 0 (prior art document: JP-A-2009-233171).

In addition, instead of repeatedly pressing the operation means (continuous hitting operation), by continuously pressing the operating means (long-pressing), it has a function that allows the gauge decrease effect to proceed in the same manner as in the case of repeated pressing operations. A game machine has also been proposed.

However, in the gauge decrease effect executed based on the long press operation, the effect is generally configured to progress (the gauge decreases) as the long press operation continues. There is a problem that the method of operating the operating means becomes monotonous and the player gets bored with the game.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from becoming bored with the game.

According to the gaming machine GB1, the performance mode can be changed to the second mode before the period during which the predetermined operation is continued reaches the specific period, so the predetermined operation is continuously performed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp at what timing the specific performance is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game.

A gaming machine GB2 characterized in that, in the gaming machine GB1, it has an informing means capable of informing that the production control is being executed by the production control means.

According to the gaming machine GB2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine GB1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the notifying means can notify the player that the effect control is being executed, the effect is that the player can easily understand that the predetermined condition can be established. There is

In gaming machine GB1 or GB2, the predetermined condition is satisfied when the predetermined operation is completed in a second period shorter than the first period than when the predetermined operation is continuously performed for the first period. The game machine GB3 is characterized by being able to

According to the gaming machine GB3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine GB1 or GB2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since a predetermined condition is established when a predetermined operation that is continuously executed is terminated, a novel game feature is provided in which the player is made to select whether or not to continue the predetermined operation. can do Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to operate the operating means can be improved.

The game machine GB3 has an operation effective period setting means capable of setting an operation effective period during which the operation to the operation means is determined to be valid, and the effect control means controls the operation during a first period during the operation effective period. The game machine GB4 is characterized by having second effect variable means capable of executing effect control and capable of varying the effect mode based on the passage of the first period.

According to the gaming machine GB4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine GB3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, even when the first period during which the effect control is executed has passed, it is possible to vary the effect mode by the second effect variable means. Therefore, even if the predetermined operation is continued while the effect control is being executed, the effect mode can be changed later, so that the player is instructed to finish the continuing predetermined operation. There is an effect that it is possible to provide a novel game property that allows the player to choose whether or not to play.

In the game machine GB4, determination means capable of executing determination, benefit giving means capable of providing a benefit based on the fact that the result of the determination by the determination means is a specific determination result, and the effect control are executed. a period determination means capable of determining one period from a plurality of periods including a normal period and a special period longer than the normal period as the first period, and the specific effect execution means is The specific effect can be executed when the result of the determination by the determination means is the specific determination result, and the period determination means determines whether the determination result by the determination means is the specific determination result. The gaming machine GB5 is characterized in that it is easier to determine the special period in a certain case than in the case of a discrimination result other than the specific discrimination result.

According to the gaming machine GB5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine GB4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a special period is set as the period during which the effect control is executed, it is possible to increase the possibility that the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result, so when the effect control is executed, The player can be made to select the timing for ending the predetermined operation depending on whether or not the length of the period during which the effect control continues is grasped. That is, a player who wants to grasp the length of the period during which the effect control is executed will continue the predetermined operation at least until the normal period elapses, and grasp that the special period is set as the current effect control. Immediately after the performance control is executed, the player who does not need to grasp the length of the period during which the performance control is executed is instructed to select whether or not to continue the predetermined operation. A game of selecting whether or not to continue a predetermined operation can be played.

Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with a novel game feature of allowing the player to select the timing for ending the continuing predetermined operation.

<Characteristic GC group> (During the continuous hit effect, different effect control is performed depending on whether the continuous hit operation is performed or the long press operation is performed)
Operation means operable by a player, signal output means for outputting a signal based on the operation of the operation means, signal determination means for determining the signal output by the signal output means, and the signal determination an effect variable means capable of stepwise changing the effect mode from a first mode to a final mode different from the first mode when the result of the determination by the means satisfies a predetermined execution condition; , as the final mode, a final mode determining means capable of determining one mode from a plurality of modes including the second mode; and capable of executing a specific performance when the performance mode is changed to the second mode. and a specific effect execution means, wherein the effect variable means has, as the predetermined execution condition, a case where a first execution condition is established, and a second execution condition different from the first execution condition. The game machine GC1 is characterized in that the performance mode can be changed to the final mode with a different variable pattern depending on whether the game is established or not.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a game machine such as a pachinko machine capable of executing an operation presentation based on the operation content of an operation means (frame button 22, etc.) that a player can operate. Then, as a production mode of the operation production, a production mode of reducing the physical strength of the enemy character (hereinafter referred to as a gauge reduction production) is provided, and when a privilege advantageous to the player can be given, the production result of the gauge reduction production is A gaming machine has been proposed in which an effect is executed in which the physical strength value of an enemy character becomes 0 (prior art document: JP-A-2009-233171).

In addition, instead of repeatedly pressing the operation means (continuous hitting operation), by continuously pressing the operating means (long-pressing), it has a function that allows the gauge decrease effect to proceed in the same manner as in the case of repeated pressing operations. A game machine has also been proposed.

However, in conventional gaming machines, when a long-pressing operation is performed on the operation means, it is common to perform a gauge decrease effect in the same effect mode as when a repeated hitting operation is performed. there were. In other words, even when a long-pressing operation is performed on the operation means in the sense of game support for a player who has difficulty executing a repeated hitting operation, the gauge reduction effect is executed in the same effect mode as when executing the repeated hitting operation. It is common to have the technical idea of making it possible.

In such a conventional game machine, it is possible to execute a gauge reduction effect in the same effect mode as when performing a repeated hitting operation, simply by executing a simple long-pressing operation on the player. Therefore, the player can easily enjoy the gauge decrease effect, but the gauge decrease effect is executed depending on whether the repeated hitting operation is performed or the long press operation is performed. Since the modes are similar, it is not possible to provide the player with the pleasure of selecting the operation method for the operating means, and there is a problem that the player quickly becomes bored with the operation presentation.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from becoming bored with the game.

According to the gaming machine GC1, it is possible to change the performance mode to the final mode with different variable patterns according to the type of execution condition to be established. That is, when different operations are performed on the operation means, different effects can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of selecting the operation to be performed on the operating means, thereby preventing the player from quickly becoming tired of operating the operating means. .

In the gaming machine GC1, a variable mode determination means capable of determining the variable mode of the performance mode to be varied by the performance variable means based on the satisfaction of the first execution condition; and the second execution condition is satisfied. a period discriminating means capable of discriminating a continuation period, wherein the effect variable means includes a first variable that changes the effect mode to the variable mode determined by the variable mode determining means; A gaming machine GC2 characterized by being able to execute a second variable of varying the performance mode according to the duration discriminated by the period discriminating means.

According to the gaming machine GC2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine GC1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first execution condition is satisfied, the effect mode is changed to the variable mode determined based on the satisfaction of the first execution condition, and when the second execution condition is satisfied, the second The mode of presentation varies according to the length of the continuation period in which the execution condition is established. In other words, the trigger for changing the effect mode is changed according to the type of execution condition that is established. Therefore, it is possible to change the performance mode in different variable modes according to the operation method of the operating means, and to vary the timing of changing the performance mode. As a result, it is possible to greatly vary the variable aspect of the rendering mode according to the type of execution condition that is established, and there is an effect that the rendering effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine GC1 or GC2, both the first execution condition and the second execution condition can be satisfied within one operation valid period during which the determination by the signal determination means is valid. A gaming machine GC3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine GC3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine GC1 or GC2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is possible to satisfy both the first execution condition and the second execution condition during one operation valid period. That is, it is possible to change the types of execution conditions that are established by switching the operation method for the operation means during one operation valid period. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with a novel game property of switching the operation method to another operation method while operating the operation means.

<Characteristic GD group> (Forced chance production execution control)
discrimination means capable of executing discrimination; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means on a display means; and displaying a specific discrimination result on the display means. a privilege granting means capable of imparting a privilege when the identification information for is displayed, a performance executing means capable of executing a performance during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed; and the performance As an effect mode, a first effect is more likely to be selected when the determination result corresponding to the dynamically displayed identification information is the specific determination result than when it is not the specific determination result. effect mode determining means capable of determining one effect mode from among a plurality of effect modes including at least modes; updating means capable of updating effect values based on information relating to the effect executed by the effect executing means; The effect mode determination means has a first decision to determine the effect mode based on the determination result by the determination means, and when the effect value updated by the update means satisfies an execution condition A gaming machine GD1 capable of executing a second determination of determining the first effect mode as the effect mode regardless of the determination result by the determination means.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and patterns for informing the result of the lottery are variably displayed for a predetermined period of time. After that, the symbols are stop-displayed in a manner indicating the result of the lottery, and before the stop-display of the symbols, a notification effect is executed to notify the player of the suggestion mode for suggesting the result of the lottery. A possible configuration has been proposed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).

Furthermore, as the types of suggestive modes, there is a first type in which the lottery result is likely to be a lottery result (for example, winning) that is advantageous to the player, and a lottery result in which the lottery result is more advantageous to the player than the first type. One type can be determined from a plurality of types including at least a second type having a low possibility of being a lottery result (for example, winning), and the type of suggestion mode notified by the lottery can be determined. By structuring, diversity is given to the notification performance to be executed, and the performance effect is improved.

However, in conventional gaming machines, since the type of suggestive mode is determined by lottery, there may occur situations in which the notification effect is not executed for a long period of time, or a specific type of suggestive mode is not determined. Therefore, there is a problem that the player becomes bored with the game by the time the player is provided with various effects prepared in advance.

In particular, the first type, which has a high possibility that the lottery result is a lottery result that is advantageous to the player (for example, win), is not advantageous to the player (for example, a loss) if the lottery result is not advantageous. Since it is more difficult to determine than the second type, there is a problem that the player becomes bored with the game before the notification effect including the suggested mode in which the first type is determined is executed.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from becoming bored with the game.

According to the gaming machine GD1, when the performance value updated based on the information regarding the performance executed by the performance execution means satisfies the execution condition, the performance of the first performance mode is performed regardless of the determination result of the determination means. Since it can be executed, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player gets bored with the game before the performance of the first performance mode is executed.

In the gaming machine GD1, the updating means varies the effect value to be updated according to the type of the effect mode of the effect executed by the effect executing means.

According to the gaming machine GD2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine GD1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the effect value updated by the updating means can be changed according to the effect mode of the effect to be executed, the number of determinations by the determining means executed until the effect value satisfies the execution condition can be varied. becomes possible. Therefore, when the effect of the first effect mode is executed, is the effect of the first effect mode executed based on the first decision, or is the effect of the first effect mode executed based on the second decision? can be made difficult for the player to comprehend, even if the performance of the first performance mode is executed based on the second determination, the determination result of the corresponding determination means is a specific determination result. There is an effect that it is possible to make it easier to expect.

In the gaming machine GD2, the effect mode determining means selects, as the effect mode of the effect, the specific determination result when the determination result corresponding to the identification information dynamically displayed is the specific determination result. and a third effect mode that is different from the first effect mode and the second effect mode. When the performance in which the second performance mode is determined is executed, the performance value and the execution condition are more likely to be satisfied than when the performance in which the third performance mode is determined is executed. A game machine GD3 characterized in that it can be updated so that

According to the gaming machine GD3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine GD2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when an effect with a low possibility of awarding a privilege is executed, the effect of the first effect mode based on the second determination is executed rather than when an effect with a low possibility of being granted a privilege is not executed. can be made easier. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the continuous execution of only an effect with a low possibility of being granted a privilege.

In the gaming machine GD3, the updating means determines that the effect in which the first effect mode is determined is executed when the effect in which the second effect mode and the third effect mode are determined is executed. The game machine GD4 is characterized in that the performance value can be updated so that the execution condition is more likely to be established than in the case of the game machine GD4.

According to the gaming machine GD4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine GD3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the performance with a low possibility of granting the privilege is executed, the first performance mode is changed based on the second determination in a short period of time, compared to the performance with a high possibility of the privilege being granted. It is possible to make it easier to execute the production of. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress frequent execution of the effect of the first effect mode.

<Feature GE group> (executing the super-hot notice that was removed by the big hit effect after the occurrence of the super-hot notice)
A determination means capable of executing determination, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means on a display means, and a specific determination result displayed on the display means. a privilege granting means capable of imparting a privilege when the identification information for is displayed, a performance execution means capable of executing a performance during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed; and the performance As an effect mode, a first effect is more likely to be selected when the determination result corresponding to the dynamically displayed identification information is the specific determination result than when it is not the specific determination result. performance mode determination means capable of determining one performance mode from among a plurality of performance modes including at least one mode; and identification information for indicating the determination result other than the specific determination result are dynamically displayed storage means capable of storing decision information indicating that the first effect mode has been determined as the effect mode of the effect to be performed for a predetermined period of time; and a second determination of determining the first presentation mode based on the decision information stored in the storage means. Gaming machine GE1.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and patterns for informing the result of the lottery are variably displayed for a predetermined period of time. After that, the symbols are stop-displayed in a manner indicating the result of the lottery, and before the stop-display of the symbols, a notification effect is executed to notify the player of the suggestion mode for suggesting the result of the lottery. A possible configuration has been proposed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).

Furthermore, as the types of suggestive modes, there is a first type in which the lottery result is likely to be a lottery result (for example, winning) that is advantageous to the player, and a lottery result in which the lottery result is more advantageous to the player than the first type. One type can be determined from a plurality of types including at least a second type having a low possibility of being a lottery result (for example, winning), and the type of suggestion mode notified by the lottery can be determined. By structuring, diversity is given to the notification performance to be executed, and the performance effect is improved.

However, in conventional gaming machines, the type of suggested mode is determined by lottery. As a result, there is a risk that the notification effect including the suggestion mode of the first type will become a suggestion mode with a low possibility that the lottery result will be a lottery result (for example, winning) that is advantageous to the player. rice field.

Here, conventionally, the effect mode of the effect that the lottery result is likely to be a lottery result (for example, winning) that is advantageous to the player is a lottery result that is advantageous to the player (for example, winning). It is general that a flashy presentation mode is defined to make the player pay attention rather than a presentation mode with a low possibility of being. Therefore, in the configuration in which the type of suggestive mode is determined by lottery, the performance executed in the flashy performance mode is continuously executed when the lottery result is wrong, and the performance effect is remarkably lowered. There was a problem.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player in a game by enhancing the performance effect.

According to the gaming machine GE1, the specific determination result is more likely to be the specific determination result as the effect mode of the effect executed during the period in which the identification information for indicating the determination result other than the specific determination result is dynamically displayed. When the first performance mode is determined which is easier to determine than the determination result other than the determination result, the information is stored, and then the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is dynamically displayed. When determining the effect mode of the effect to be executed during the period, the first effect mode is determined based on the information stored in the storage means. It is possible to prevent the identification information indicating the discrimination result other than the discrimination result from being continuously executed as an effect executed during the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed.

Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to execute the performance mode of the performance executed for indicating the determination result of the determination means according to the predetermined rule, and it is possible to suppress the dramatic deterioration of the performance effect. effective.

In the gaming machine GE1, the effect mode determination means stores in the storage means, The gaming machine GE2 is characterized in that a third decision for deciding a mode other than the first performance mode can be executed when the decision information is stored.

According to the gaming machine GE2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine GE1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, while the determination information is stored in the storage means, the first effect is used as the effect mode of the effect executed during the period in which the identification information for indicating the determination result other than the specific determination result is dynamically displayed. Aspects can be hard to determine. In other words, it is possible to make it difficult for the first performance mode to be continuously determined as the performance mode of the performance executed during the period in which the identification information for indicating the determination result other than the specific determination result is dynamically displayed. Therefore, the effect mode of the effect executed to indicate the determination result of the determining means can be easily executed according to a predetermined rule, and when the effect of the first effect mode is continuously executed, Since it is possible to increase the possibility of a specific determination result, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player easily pay attention to the effect mode of the effect to be executed.

A game machine GE3, characterized in that the gaming machine GE1 or GE2 has an erasing means capable of erasing the determination information stored in the storage means when the determination by the determination means is executed a predetermined number of times.

According to the gaming machine GE3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine GE1 or GE2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the determination information stored in the storage means is erased based on the number of determinations performed by the determination means, it is possible to set a limit on the period during which the second determination is performed. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to determine the performance mode based on the first determination, and there is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced by providing a variety of performances to the player.

<Characteristic GF group> (Long button display with operation valid period longer than usual)
Determining means capable of executing determination, privilege providing means capable of granting a privilege to a player based on the fact that the result of the determination by the determining means is a specific determination result, and operating means operable by the player. , operation determination means capable of determining that the operation means has been operated, effective period setting means for setting a valid period during which the operation to the operation means is determined to be valid by the operation determining means, and setting of the effective period valid period informing means capable of informing the player of at least a part of the valid period set by means; and an operation effect execution means capable of executing an operation effect for indicating the result of the determination by the determination means based on the determination of the operation of the valid period setting means, As the validity period, a first validity period and a second validity period longer than the first validity period can be set. The game machine GF1 is characterized in that it is easier to set the second validity period than in the case of no specific determination result.

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, an effective period is set for a certain period in which the operation of the operation means (frame button 22, etc.) that the player can operate can be effectively determined, and the operation is performed during the effective period. There is a game machine capable of executing an operation effect based on the operation contents of the operation means. Then, when the validity period is set, by displaying a display mode (validity period gauge) for notifying the player that the valid period has been set and the length of the set valid period. , a configuration has been proposed that makes it easier for the player to operate the operating means during the valid period (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-233171).

However, in conventional gaming machines, since the length of the effective period set as the period during which the operation effect can be executed is always constant, the length of the displayed effective period is always constant, so the effective period When is displayed, it is difficult to provide high and low willingness for the player to operate the operating means.

Therefore, since a performance result that is disadvantageous to the player is set as the performance result of the operation performance, the performance result that is advantageous to the player is not displayed or the game is played even though the player has intentionally operated the operation means. In spite of the fact that the performance result that is advantageous to the player is set, the operation of the operation means is neglected, and a situation occurs in which the performance result that is advantageous to the player is not displayed. However, there is a problem that the player gets tired of the operation performance.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from becoming bored with operation effects and enhancing the interest in the game of the player. and

According to the gaming machine GF1, the second valid period is set as the length of the valid period during which the operation to the operating means is effectively determined when the result of determination by the determination means is a specific determination result. The player is notified of at least a partial period of the set validity period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the player of the set effective period with different lengths, so that the player can It is possible to provide high and low willingness to operate the operating means.

Therefore, every time the validity period is set, regardless of the result of determination by the corresponding determination means, compared to the conventional game machine that operates the operation means with the same desire to operate, Since the desire to operate the operation means can be varied, a performance result that is disadvantageous to the player is set, so that the performance result that is advantageous to the player is displayed despite the player's willingness to operate the operation means. Or, even though the effect result that is advantageous to the player is set, the operation of the operation means is neglected, and a situation occurs in which the effect result that is advantageous to the player is not displayed. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the operation presentation.

The gaming machine GF1 has valid period determining means capable of determining one valid period from among a plurality of valid periods including at least the first valid period and the second valid period as the valid period, The valid period setting means can set the valid period determined by the valid period determining means, and the valid period setting means can set information indicating the length of the valid period determined by the valid period determining means. A gaming machine GF2 characterized by having valid period advance notification means capable of notifying the determined valid period by the time the determined valid period is set.

According to the gaming machine GF2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine GF1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the information indicating the length of the validity period set by the advance notification means can be notified before the validity period is set. Therefore, since the valid period can be set in a state in which the player predicts the length of the valid period to be set this time, the operating means can be operated from the beginning of the valid period with the willingness to operate corresponding to the content notified by the advance notification means. Since it is possible to operate, there is an effect that it is possible to facilitate the execution of an operation effect according to the player's willingness to operate.

In the gaming machine GF1 or GF2, the effective period notification means provides first notification for stepwise notification of the effective period set by the effective period setting means and the effective period set by the effective period setting means. A gaming machine GF3 characterized by being able to execute a second notification that is notified at once.

According to the gaming machine GF3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine GF1 or GF2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the second notification can be executed to increase the length of the valid period notified by the valid period notifying means, the length of the valid period set this time can be notified to the player. It can be difficult to comprehend. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily operate the operating means during the valid period while making the player expect that the valid period which is actually set is long.

<Characteristic GG group> (Kizuna 60 seconds mission)
Storage means capable of storing determination information up to a predetermined number, determination means capable of performing determination based on the determination information stored in the storage means when a predetermined determination condition is satisfied, and the determination means. a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the result of the discrimination by is a specific discrimination result; a pre-discrimination means capable of making a preliminary decision before the decision is made based on the pre-discrimination means; and an effect mode determination means capable of determining the effect mode of the preliminary effect to be executed by the pre-effect execution means, wherein the effect mode determination means determines the discrimination stored in the storage means. Based on the result of the preliminary determination for the plurality of determination information included in the first range, the first effect mode is set to the plurality of the information included in the second range after the first range. It is possible to determine a second effect mode based on the result of the pre-determination for the determination information, and the gaming machine, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, performs the plurality of determinations included in the second range. A gaming machine GG1 characterized in that at least part of the information can be included in the first range.

Conventionally, a game machine such as a pachinko machine acquires lottery information based on the fact that a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, and the winning or not of the game is determined by lottery based on the acquired lottery information. After the symbols for notifying the result of the lottery are variably displayed for a predetermined period, the symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating the result of the lottery, and if the result of the lottery is a win, the privilege game is advantageous to the player. is executed, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied after the end of the privilege game, a configuration has been proposed in which an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player can be set for a predetermined period of time as the game state (prior art document: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

Further, a storage means capable of storing the obtained lottery information up to a predetermined number is provided, the lottery information stored in the storage means is discriminated in advance before the lottery is executed, and the lottery to be executed from now on is provided. A configuration has also been proposed in which a pre-suggestion production capable of pre-suggesting the result of is possible.

Furthermore, a configuration has also been proposed in which the result of preliminary determination for a plurality of pieces of lottery information can be suggested in advance using one prior suggestion effect.

In the above-described conventional gaming machine, the results of pre-discrimination for a plurality of lottery information can be suggested using one pre-suggestion effect. In the case of , it suffices to notify the player of the performance result indicating the failure as the performance result of the preliminary suggestive performance of 1, and in the case of notifying that the lottery result is the failure each time the lottery is executed. Compared to this, it is possible to reduce the number of times of execution of the effect for notifying that the lottery result is lost. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player's willingness to play is lowered due to the continuous display of the effect result indicating that the lottery result is lost as the effect result of the effect to be executed. there were.

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the range of the plurality of lottery information included in the pre-suggestion effect is constant, the effect result of the pre-suggestion effect is not suitable for the player who has been playing for a long time. , there is a problem that it is easy to grasp how many lottery results are collectively displayed.

In addition, as a pre-suggestion production, the ratio of executing the pre-suggestion production of the production result that indicates the hit and the ratio of executing the pre-suggestion production of the production result that shows the loss are always constant, so the pre-suggestion production There is a problem that it is difficult to enhance the performance effect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player in a game by enhancing the performance effect.

According to the gaming machine GG1, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the second range normally used for determining the second effect mode is used as the discrimination information used when determining the first effect mode. Since the identification information included can also be used, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the number of identification information used when determining the presentation mode of the first presentation mode. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping the content of the game to be executed later, and from lowering the player's willingness to play.

Further, when the number of determination information used when determining the first effect mode increases, it becomes easier to determine the effect mode for indicating a preliminary determination result that can be a specific determination result as the first effect mode, As the second effect mode, it is possible to make it difficult to determine the effect mode for indicating a preliminary determination result that can be a specific determination result. Therefore, different performance modes can be easily determined for a plurality of consecutively executed preliminary performances, so that various performances can be provided to the player, and performance effects can be enhanced. has the effect of

In the gaming machine GG1, a first game state in which the discrimination information is easily acquired, a second game state in which it is more difficult to acquire than the first game state, a settable game state setting means, and the first game state are set. a termination means capable of terminating the first game state when the number of times of determination performed by the determination means satisfies a termination condition in the state where the pre-rendering is executed; The means is capable of executing the preliminary performance of the first performance mode when the remaining number of determinations until the end condition is satisfied in a state where the first game state is set reaches a specific number of times. A gaming machine GG2 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine GG2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine GG1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, among the determinations executed during the first game state, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the remaining number of determinations in which the determination result is not suggested to the player by the pre-suggestion effect, so that it is executed later. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping the content of the game and lowering the player's desire to play.

In addition, even if a performance mode indicating a performance result corresponding to a determination result other than a specific determination result is determined as the performance mode of the pre-suggestion performance, the determination result is not suggested to the player by the pre-suggestion performance. By making it difficult for the player to grasp the remaining number of determinations that have not been made, the effect is that the player can be motivated to play the game while expecting that more determinations will be made during the first game state. be.

In the gaming machine GG2, the preliminary effect executing means executes the second effect mode using the preliminary determination results corresponding to the multiple determinations performed in the state where the first game state is set. A gaming machine GG3 characterized by being capable of executing the preliminary performance.

According to the gaming machine GG3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine GG2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the preliminary performance of the second performance mode executed after the preliminary performance of the first performance mode is also executed based on the preliminary determination result corresponding to the determination performed in the state where the first game state is set. . That is, when the remaining number of determinations until the end condition reaches a specific number in a state in which the first game state is set, the preliminary performance of the first performance mode and the preliminary performance of the second performance mode are consecutively performed. A production is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the remaining number of determinations that can be performed in the state where the first game state is set.

In any one of the game machines GG1 to GG3, as the discrimination information, the result of the preliminary discrimination corresponding to the specific discrimination information for which the discrimination is executed next to the discrimination information included in the first range is the specified A game machine GG4 characterized in that the predetermined condition can be established when the determination result is for indicating the determination result of .

According to the gaming machine GG4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines GG1 to GG3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the result of preliminary discrimination corresponding to the specific discrimination information for which discrimination is executed next to the discrimination information included in the first range is a discrimination result for indicating the specific discrimination result, it corresponds to the specific discrimination information. Since the first performance mode can be determined by using the result of the preliminary determination, it is possible to suppress unnecessary extension of the performance period in which the preliminary performance of the first performance mode is executed, and the player can There is an effect that it is possible to execute an effect that does not give a sense of incongruity to the user.

In addition, compared to the case of notifying that the determination information for which determination is performed first among the determination information included in the second range will result in a specific determination result using the preliminary effect of the second effect mode, Since it is possible to ensure a long performance period from the execution of the performance to the notification of the result of the performance, there is an effect that it is possible to easily execute the pre-performance that is easy for the player to understand.

In any one of the game machines GG1 to GG4, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result of the determination means on a display means, and a dynamic display means on the display means. dynamic display period determination means capable of determining a dynamic display period of the identification information to be dynamically displayed, wherein the dynamic display period determination means indicates the determination result based on the specific determination information. At least a first dynamic display period and a second dynamic display period longer than the first dynamic display period can be determined as dynamic display periods of the identification information for the game machine, A game characterized in that the predetermined condition can be established when the first dynamic display period is determined as the dynamic display period of the identification information for indicating the result of the determination based on the specific determination information. Machine GG5.

According to the gaming machine GG5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines GG1 to GG4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a short dynamic display period is determined as the dynamic display period of the identification information for indicating the result of determination based on the specific determination information, the result of preliminary determination corresponding to the specific determination information is used to perform the first presentation. Since the mode can be determined, it is possible to suppress unnecessary extension of the performance period in which the preliminary performance of the first performance mode is executed, and the performance is executed without making the player feel uncomfortable. It has the effect of being able to

<Characteristic GH Group> (Determines the effect mode of the jackpot effect based on the number of payouts during the jackpot game and the presence or absence of the holding group)
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, determination means capable of performing determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and the determination means As a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the result of the determination by is a specific determination result, and the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, Benefit type determination means capable of determining one benefit type from a plurality of privilege types to which different benefits can be imparted, and privilege performance execution means capable of executing a privilege performance for notifying that the privilege game is to be executed. and, in a gaming machine having, pre-determination means capable of performing determination prior to the determination means based on information stored in the storage means, and the privilege effect execution means. and a performance mode determination means capable of determining a performance mode of the privilege performance, wherein the performance mode determination means determines whether the privilege game for which the particular privilege type is determined is executed, and the particular privilege. When it is determined that the privilege game in which the privilege type different from the type is determined is executed, and the information determined as the specific determination result by the preliminary determination means is stored, A gaming machine GH1 characterized in that it is possible to determine the same specific performance mode.

Conventionally, a game machine such as a pachinko machine acquires lottery information based on the fact that a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, and the winning or not of the game is determined by lottery based on the acquired lottery information. After the symbols for notifying the result of the lottery are variably displayed for a predetermined period, the symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating the result of the lottery, and if the result of the lottery is a win, the privilege game is advantageous to the player. As such, there has been proposed a configuration in which one of privilege games with different degrees of advantage is executed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766).

In addition, by notifying the player of the content of the privilege given during the privilege game after the privilege game is executed, compared to the case where the content of the privilege is notified before the privilege game is executed. , a configuration has been proposed in which the user can continue to have a sense of expectation for the provision of a more advantageous privilege.

A storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of obtained lottery information is provided, and the lottery information stored in the storage means is pre-determined before the lottery is executed, for example, during a privilege game. , a configuration capable of notifying the player that the stored lottery information contains the lottery information that results in winning the lottery has also been proposed.

In the above-described conventional gaming machine, while the privilege game is being executed, the player is notified of the details of the privilege to be granted by the privilege game being executed and the possibility of another privilege game being newly executed. Since the effect can be executed, the player during the privilege game can be made to pay attention to the executed effect, and the player's early boredom with the game can be suppressed.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, the content of the privilege given by the privilege game being executed and the fact that another privilege game is newly executed are notified by different effects, so that the player can be notified later. Since the content of the game to be executed is easily grasped, depending on the content of the performance to be executed during the privilege game, there is a problem that the player who has grasped the content of the performance loses his or her willingness to play the game. there were.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player in playing a game.

According to the gaming machine GH1, when a privilege game for which a specific privilege type is determined is executed, and when a privilege game for which a privilege type different from the specific privilege type is determined is executed, and specified by the advance determination means Since the same specific performance mode can be determined as the performance mode of the privilege performance in the case where it is determined that the determination result and the information to be determined are stored, the game that grasps the performance contents of the privilege performance Since it is possible to provide players with the pleasure of predicting the content of the game to be executed later, it is possible to suppress the decline in the desire to play the game of the player who has grasped the content of the privilege presentation. effective.

In the gaming machine GH1, the privilege effect executing means can execute the privilege effect by setting at least part of a period during which the privilege game is executed a plurality of times as the effect period.

According to the gaming machine GH2, since the privilege effect can be executed across a plurality of privilege games, the case where the privilege game in which the specific privilege type is determined is executed and the specific privilege type are different. A privilege game in which a different privilege type is determined is executed, and a privilege performance is executed in the same performance mode when it is determined that information to be determined as a specific determination result is stored by a preliminary determination means. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of discomfort even in the case of such a situation.

The game machine GH1 or GH2 has game state setting means capable of setting a first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state after the bonus game is completed. and, in the gaming machine, the privilege game for which the specific privilege type is determined is more likely than the privilege game for which the privilege type other than the specific privilege type is determined after the end of the privilege game. 2 game state is configured to be easily set, the privilege effect execution means executes the privilege game in which the privilege type different from the specific privilege type is determined, and the specific privilege type is determined by the pre-determining means When it is determined that the information determined as the determination result is stored, the second game state is changed after the privilege game executed based on the information stored in the storage means is completed. The gaming machine GH3 is characterized in that the privilege effect of the specific effect mode can be executed when set.

According to the game machine GH3, in addition to the effects of the game machine GH1 or GH2, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the privilege effect of a specific effect mode is executed corresponding to a plurality of privilege games, the second game state is set after the corresponding privilege game is finished, so the privilege effect of the specific effect mode is set. is executed, there is an effect that the degree of expectation that the second game state is set can be increased.

<Characteristic GI group> (Switching the order of individually notifying each effect element used for composite effect according to the establishment condition)
discrimination means capable of executing discrimination; benefit granting means capable of granting a benefit advantageous to the player based on the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result; and the discrimination by the discrimination means and effect execution means capable of executing effects for indicating the result of (1), wherein the effect execution means comprises effect information reporting means capable of informing a plurality of effect information in order, wherein the effect execution means, as the effect, It is possible to execute a composite effect including an effect mode corresponding to the effect information notified by the effect information notifying means, and the game machine changes the order of the effect information notified by the effect information notifying means. A gaming machine GI1 characterized by being capable of

Conventionally, a game machine such as a pachinko machine draws a lottery based on the fact that a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, and a pattern for notifying the lottery result is displayed for a predetermined period. After being variably displayed, the symbols are stop-displayed in a manner indicating the result of the lottery, and when the result of the lottery is a win, a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed and the result of the lottery is displayed. There has been proposed a configuration that allows a player to predict the lottery result by executing an effect for the purpose (prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-208557).

Furthermore, by notifying the player of at least part of the performance information indicating the performance mode used for the performance before the performance is executed, the player is made to predict in advance the contents of the performance to be executed from now on. A configuration has been proposed that makes it possible to provide enjoyment.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the effect information is notified in a specific order, for example, the effect information notified earlier (first effect information) is the effect information notified later (first effect information). 2 effect information), the lottery result will be predicted early for the player, and the game will not be played against the content of the effect information notified later. There was a problem that people lost interest.

Further, by constructing the second effect information so as to make it easier for the player to predict the lottery result than the first effect information, even when the effect information is announced in a specific order. , it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the result of the lottery until the second performance information is notified. There is a problem that it is not possible to enhance the performance effect of notifying in order.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player in a game by enhancing the performance effect.

According to the game machine GI1, the notification order of a plurality of performance information corresponding to the performance mode included in the composite performance can be varied, so that the enjoyment of having the player predict the performance contents of the composite performance can be easily continued. There is an effect that it is possible to enhance the production effect.

In the gaming machine GI1, an effect type determination means capable of determining one type from a plurality of types including a first type and a second type different from the first type as the type of the composite effect; and a type notifying means capable of notifying the type determined by the effect type determining means, wherein the type notifying means is capable of notifying the determined type before the effect information is notified. wherein the gaming machine is capable of changing the order of the performance information notified by the performance information notifying means according to the type of the composite performance determined by the performance type determining means; The second performance information notified later than the first performance information notified earlier than the first performance information notified by the means makes it easier to determine the performance information that makes it easier to predict the discrimination result of the discriminating means. A gaming machine GI2 characterized by:

According to the game machine GI2, in addition to the effects of the game machine GI1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the order of notification of the performance information can be changed according to the type of the determined composite performance, and the performance information that makes it easy to predict the determination result of the determination means is determined as the second performance information. There is an effect that the game can be played while expecting that the discrimination result of the discriminating means is a specific discrimination result during the period in which a plurality of performance information are notified by.

In the gaming machine GI2, the effect type determination means can determine a third type different from the first type and the second type, and the type notification means determines that the third type is the type of the composite effect. When it is determined, the determined type can be notified after the performance information is notified, and the game machine is more likely to perform the above when the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result. The game machine GI3 is characterized in that the third type is more likely to be determined as the type of the composite effect than when the determination result is a result other than a specific determination result.

According to the gaming machine GI3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine GI2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the timing of notifying the type of the composite effect can be varied according to the type of the determined composite effect, various effects can be provided to the player during the period until the composite effect is executed. There is an effect that it can be made easier.

<Characteristic GJ group> (In a battle production in which multiple battles are executed, it is possible to limit the production result when a specific attack pattern is executed in the final battle depending on the attack pattern executed before the final battle)
discrimination means capable of executing discrimination; benefit granting means capable of granting a benefit advantageous to the player based on the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result; and the discrimination by the discrimination means and an effect execution means capable of executing an effect for indicating the result of (1), wherein the effect execution means at least continuously executes a first specific effect and a second specific effect as the effects. and has an effect mode determination means capable of determining one effect mode from among a plurality of effect modes including the first specific effect mode as the effect mode of the first specific effect, wherein the gaming machine comprises: The result of the determination can be notified by the effect result of the second specific effect, and the case where the first specific effect of the first specific effect mode is executed is the effect mode other than the first specific effect mode. It is possible to make it easier for a player to predict the effect result when a second specific effect mode is determined as the effect mode of the second specific effect than when the first specific effect is executed. A gaming machine GJ1 characterized by:

Conventionally, a game machine such as a pachinko machine draws a lottery based on the fact that a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board surface, and a pattern for notifying the lottery result is displayed for a predetermined period. After being variably displayed, the symbols are stop-displayed in a manner indicating the result of the lottery, and when the result of the lottery is a win, a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed and the result of the lottery is displayed. There has been proposed a configuration that allows a player to predict the lottery result by executing an effect for the purpose (prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-208557).

Furthermore, by executing the performance of the same mode a plurality of times and informing the player of the result of the lottery according to the result of the last performance, the performance executed until the result of the lottery is notified is diversified. A configuration designed to improve the effect has been proposed.

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, it was possible to diversify the effects by executing the effects multiple times, but the lottery result was notified based on the result of the effect executed last. Therefore, there is a problem that the player is not interested in the details of the effects executed other than the last of the multiple effects, and the effects of the effects are lowered.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player in a game by enhancing the performance effect.

According to the gaming machine GJ1, the ease of predicting the effect result of the second specific effect in the case where the second specific effect is executed in the second specific effect mode can be varied depending on the effect mode of the first specific effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of the first specific effect can be made interesting and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Further, the effect executed while making the player who grasps that the first specific effect has been executed in the first specific effect mode expect that the second specific effect will be executed in the specific second effect mode. There is an effect that the user can pay attention to the contents.

In the gaming machine GJ1, the performance mode determining means, when the result of the determination by the determining means is the specific determination result, is higher than the determination result other than the specific determination result. 1. A game machine GJ2 characterized in that it is easy to determine a specific performance mode.

In the game machine GJ2, as a result of the effects executed by the effect executing means, a first effect result advantageous to the player, a second effect result disadvantageous to the player, and a game is played from the second effect result. The game machine has a performance result determining means capable of determining either the third performance result that is advantageous to the player, and the game machine determines a performance result other than the second performance result as the performance result of the second specific performance. is determined, the second specific effect mode can be determined as the effect mode of the second specific effect to be executed after the first specific effect in which the first specific effect mode is determined is executed. A gaming machine GJ3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine GJ3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine GJ2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when an effect result other than the second effect result that is disadvantageous to the player is determined as the effect result of the effect executed to indicate the determination result of the determining means, the first specific effect mode of the first specific effect mode is determined. Since the effect and the second specific effect of the second specific effect mode can be executed continuously, the player who grasps that the first specific effect has been executed in the first specific effect mode, There is an effect that it is possible to make the player pay attention to the content of the effect to be executed while expecting the second specific effect to be executed in the specific second effect mode.

<Characteristic group of 5075 series>
<Characteristic HA group> (Variable continuation rate while setting a common termination condition in a specific game state)
A privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined specific execution condition; A first game state setting means capable of setting a game state, and a second game state having a lower advantage than the first game state based on establishment of a predetermined specific condition in the first game state. A second game state setting means for setting, and a first control in which the ratio of the establishment of the specific execution condition from the setting of the first game state to the establishment of the specific condition is a first ratio. and a second rate in which the rate of fulfillment of the specific execution condition between the time when the first game state is set and the time when the specific condition is satisfied is a second rate higher than the first rate. and setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of games including at least two controlled games.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a winning game that is advantageous to the player is executed when the result of a lottery performed based on the entry of a game ball into a starting winning hole is a winning. . Among such gaming machines, there are some that aim to improve the interest of the player in the game by enabling the setting of a plurality of states with different degrees of advantage for the player (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2001). -038007).

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of interest.

In addition, in such conventional gaming machines, a plurality of termination conditions for a specific game state with a high degree of advantage (for example, a time-saving game state) are provided, and the specific game state is set. By setting end conditions, even in the same specific game state, there are some games in which the degree of advantage is varied according to the setting trigger.

However, in such conventional gaming machines, it is necessary to predefine end conditions for each setting opportunity in a storage device such as a ROM, so the memory capacity of the gaming machine increases as the number of ending conditions increases. There is a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine HA1, a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined specific execution condition, and a a first game state setting means capable of setting a first game state advantageous to the player as a game state; a second game state setting means for setting a second game state having a lower degree of advantage than the second game state; A game in which a first control is performed in which is the first ratio, and a ratio in which the specific execution condition is satisfied between the time when the first game state is set and the specific condition is satisfied is the first A setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of games including at least a game in which a second control is performed at a second rate higher than the rate.

As a result, even in the same first game state, the possibility of the privilege game being executed can be changed depending on whether the first control is executed or the second control is executed, so that the player's game There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest in.

In the game machine HA1, the first control is a control in which the specific condition is more likely to be established than the second control, the game machine HA2.

According to the game machine HA2, in addition to the effects of the game machine HA1, the first control is the first control because the specific condition is more likely to be established than the second control. or the second control, the ease with which the specific condition is established can be varied. Therefore, there is an effect that the possibility that the specific execution condition is satisfied before the specific condition is satisfied can be made different.

In the game machine HA1 or HA2, a first determination means for executing a first determination based on establishment of a predetermined first determination condition, and establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition. wherein the specific execution condition is determined in advance by either the result of the first determination or the result of the second determination and the specific condition is the number of executions of the first determination at least after the first game state is set. is a predetermined specific number of times.

According to the game machine HA3, in addition to the effects of the game machine HA1 or HA2, the first determination means for executing the first determination based on the establishment of a predetermined first determination condition; and a second determination means for executing a second determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the condition, wherein the specific execution condition is the determination result of the first determination and the second determination. It is composed of a condition that is established based on whether one of the determination result of determination and the determination result becomes a predetermined specific determination result, and the specific condition is at least the first game state is set. It is constituted by a condition that is established based on the number of executions of the first discrimination after the above-mentioned determination reaches a predetermined specific number of times.

As a result, the first game state is maintained in a range in which the number of executions of the first discrimination is less than the specified number of times, so the effect is that the execution of the first discrimination of the specified number of times can be guaranteed in the first game state. There is

In the gaming machine HA3, the first control is executed during a period from when the first game state is set to when the first determination is performed the specific number of times, rather than the second control. The game machine HA4 is characterized in that it is constituted by a control that tends to reduce the number of executions of determination 2.

According to the game machine HA4, in addition to the effects of the game machine HA3, the first control executes the first determination the specific number of times after the first game state is set, rather than the second control. Since the number of executions of the second determination to be executed until the second game state is set tends to be a small number of times, the number of executions of the second determination to be executed until the second game state is set. are different, it is possible to substantially differ the ratio of establishment of a specific execution condition.

In the game machine HA3 or HA4, the specific conditions include a first specific condition that is established based on the number of executions of the first determination after the setting of the first gaming state reaches the specific number of times; The second established based on the fact that the sum of the number of executions of the first determination and the number of executions of the second determination after the first game state is set becomes the first number of times greater than the specific number of times and 2 specific conditions, and the first control and the second control are configured such that the first specific condition is likely to be satisfied before the second specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine HA5 is characterized in that the period required for the first specific condition to be satisfied is likely to be shorter in the first control than in the second control.

According to the game machine HA5, in addition to the effects of the game machine HA3 or HA4, the specific condition is that the number of executions of the first determination after the first game state is set has reached the specific number of times. A first specific condition established based on a total of the number of executions of the first determination and the number of executions of the second determination after the first game state is set is greater than the specific number of times and a second specific condition that is established based on the number of times being reached, and the first control and the second control are performed before the second specific condition is established. It is configured such that the specific condition is easily established, and the first control is configured such that the period required until the first specific condition is established is likely to be shorter than the second control.

As a result, by varying the length of the period required until the first specific condition is satisfied, the number of times the second determination is performed is varied, thereby varying the rate at which the specific execution condition is satisfied. can do. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine HA5, display means capable of displaying identification information; first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the determination result of the first determination on the display means; second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the determination result of the determination on the display means; and dynamic display of the first identification information by the first dynamic display means dynamic display period setting means for setting a display period; and a first dynamic display period and a second dynamic display period longer than the first dynamic display period as the dynamic display period set by the dynamic display period setting means. and a period selection means for selecting one of a plurality of periods including at least two dynamic display periods, wherein the first control is a ratio of selection of the first dynamic display period by the period selection means. is higher than the second control.

According to the game machine HA6, in addition to the effects of the game machine HA5, the display means capable of displaying the identification information and the first identification information indicating the determination result of the first determination are dynamically displayed on the display means. a first dynamic display means; a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating the determination result of the second determination on the display means; 1 dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of identification information; and a first dynamic display period as the dynamic display period set by the dynamic display period setting means; a second dynamic display period that is longer than the first dynamic display period; The control is configured such that the ratio of selection of the first dynamic display period is higher than that of the second control.

Thereby, the tendency of the dynamic display period selected by the period selection means is made different between the first control and the second control, so that the length of the period required until the first specific condition is substantially satisfied can be made different. It has the effect of being able to

In the game machine HA6, the first dynamic display means dynamically displays the first identification information while the second dynamic display means dynamically displays the second identification information. A gaming machine HA7 characterized by being configured to be able to start.

According to the game machine HA7, in addition to the effects of the game machine HA6, the first dynamic display means displays the second identification information while the second dynamic display means is dynamically displaying Since the dynamic display of the first identification information can be started, the dynamic display of the first identification information can be started regardless of the dynamic display of the second identification information. . Therefore, there is an effect that the first determination can be executed with high reliability.

In the gaming machine HA7, the second dynamic display means dynamically displays the second identification information while the first dynamic display means dynamically displays the first identification information. A gaming machine HA8 characterized by being configured to be able to start.

According to the game machine HA8, in addition to the effects of the game machine HA7, the second dynamic display means displays the dynamic display of the first identification information by the first dynamic display means. Since the dynamic display of the second identification information can be started, the dynamic display of the second identification information can be started regardless of the dynamic display of the first identification information. . Therefore, there is an effect that the second determination can be executed with high reliability.

The game machine HA9 is characterized in that, in any one of the game machines HA3 to HA8, the second determination is made up of a determination with a higher degree of advantage than the first determination.

According to the game machine HA9, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines HA3 to HA8, the second determination is made up of a determination with a higher degree of advantage than the first determination. The game can be played with a strong expectation that the second determination will be performed rather than the determination. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Characteristic HB group> (Performs an effect indicating the possibility of winning a big win during the time saving state of 1, and updates the possibility indicated by the effect mode according to the game situation)
A determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition, and a privilege for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a predetermined specific determination result. A game execution means, a first game state setting means for setting a first game state based on the establishment of a predetermined first setting condition, and a second setting predetermined in the first game state. Second game state setting means for setting a second game state different from the first game state based on the establishment of a condition; and establishment of a predetermined specific execution condition in the first game state. and a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect based on the specific determination result and the specific determination result before the second set condition is satisfied as the effect mode of the specific effect executed by the specific effect execution means. A first performance mode is determined in the case of a predetermined first situation with a low possibility of becoming, and the specific determination result is obtained before the second set condition is satisfied than the first situation. A gaming machine HB1, comprising a performance mode determining means capable of determining a second performance mode in a second situation with a high possibility.

Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed, thereby providing a winning game advantageous to the player. In addition, various images such as characters and scenery are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: 2003-325886).

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of interest.

In addition, among such conventional gaming machines, there is also one that is configured to be able to execute an interest effect indicating the degree of expectation that the winning game will be executed within a predetermined period (for example, until all the reserved balls are consumed). There exist not only variable displays during execution, but also those constructed so as to continuously give a feeling of anticipation that a winning game will be executed over a plurality of variable displays.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, it is difficult to improve interest because it is possible to execute an effect indicating the degree of expectation that a winning game will be executed only for a relatively small number of variable displays. there were.

On the other hand, according to the game machine HB1, there is provided a determining means for performing determination based on the establishment of a predetermined determining condition, and when the determination result of the determining means becomes a predetermined specific determination result, bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player; first game state setting means for setting a first game state based on establishment of a predetermined first setting condition; second game state setting means for setting a second game state different from the first game state based on the establishment of a predetermined second setting condition in the game state; A specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect based on the establishment of a specified specific execution condition, and the second set condition being satisfied as a effect mode of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means. A first effect mode is determined in the case of a predetermined first situation that is unlikely to result in the specific determination result before the first situation, and the second setting condition is set more than the first situation. and an effect mode determination means capable of determining a second effect mode when the second situation is likely to result in the specific determination result before being established.

As a result, it is possible to show the player the possibility of obtaining a specific determination result during the first game state according to the effect mode of the specific effect, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved. .

In the gaming machine HB1, the specific effect execution means executes the specific effect of the second effect mode based on the fact that the second situation occurs during the execution of the specific effect of the first effect mode. A gaming machine HB2 characterized in that it is configured to allow

According to the gaming machine HB2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HB1, the specific effect executing means, based on the fact that the second situation occurs during execution of the specific effect of the first effect mode, Since the specific performance of the second performance mode can be executed, when the situation changes in the first game state, the performance mode of the specific performance can be switched according to the changed situation. Therefore, there is an effect that an accurate situation can be shown to the player by the specific effect.

In the gaming machine HB1 or HB2, a first effect execution means for executing a predetermined first effect during execution of the privilege game, and the effect mode of the first effect executed by the first effect execution means are: determining a third effect mode corresponding to the first effect mode when the first game state corresponding to the first situation is set as a game state after the privilege game being executed is finished; a performance mode determining means configured to determine a fourth performance mode corresponding to the second performance mode when the first game state corresponding to the second situation is set. A game machine HB3 characterized by.

According to the game machine HB3, in addition to the effects of the game machine HB1 or HB2, the first effect executing means for executing a predetermined first effect during the execution of the privilege game, and the first effect executing means. When the first game state corresponding to the first situation is set as the game state after the end of the privilege game being executed is set as the effect mode of the first effect to be performed, the first effect mode is set. A corresponding third effect mode is determined, and when the first game state corresponding to the second situation is set, a fourth effect mode corresponding to the second effect mode can be determined. and a performance mode determining means.

As a result, during execution of the privilege game, the possibility of a specific determination result in the first game state after the completion of the privilege game can be shown to the player by the first effect. There is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

In any one of the gaming machines HB1 to HB3, the second situation is different from the first situation in that the specific determination result is not obtained after the first game state is set, and the second setting condition is satisfied. The game machine HB4 is characterized in that it is constructed in a situation in which the number of determinations by the determination means executed until is established tends to increase.

According to the gaming machine HB4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines HB1 to HB3, in the second situation, the specific determination is made after the first gaming state is set, rather than in the first situation. Since it is configured in a situation in which the number of determinations by the determination means executed until the second set condition is satisfied without obtaining a result tends to increase, the chances of obtaining a specific determination result are increased. can be obtained. Therefore, there is an effect that the execution of the specific effect of the second effect mode can be strongly expected.

In the gaming machine HB4, the determination means comprises first determination means for performing determination based on the satisfaction of a predetermined first determination condition, and satisfaction of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition. and a second determination means for performing determination based on, and the second setting condition is that the number of executions of the first determination after at least the first game state is set is the number of times the first determination is performed. A gaming machine HB5 characterized by comprising a condition that is established based on a common predetermined specific number of times being reached in the first situation and the second situation.

According to the game machine HB5, in addition to the effects of the game machine HB4, the determination means includes the first determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a predetermined first determination condition, and the first determination means. and a second determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the condition, and the second setting condition is at least the above-mentioned after the first game state is set. The condition is established when the number of executions of the first determination reaches a predetermined specific number common to the first situation and the second situation.

As a result, in both the first situation and the second situation, the second setting condition is satisfied and the second game state is set when the number of executions of the first determination reaches the specific number. , there is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel control that can make the possibility of a specific determination result different between the first situation and the second situation.

In the gaming machine HB5, the second setting condition is a first setting condition that is satisfied when the number of executions of the first determination after the first game state is set reaches the specific number of times. and, the sum of the number of executions of the first determination and the number of executions of the second determination after the first game state is set is a number greater than the specific number of times, and the first situation and and a second setting condition that is established based on reaching a predetermined second number of times, which is the number of times common to the second situation.

According to the game machine HB6, in addition to the effects of the game machine HB5, the second setting condition is that the number of executions of the first determination after the first game state is set is the specific number of times. and the total number of executions of the first determination and the number of executions of the second determination after the first game state is set is greater than the specific number of times and a second setting condition that is established based on a predetermined second number of times that is a large number of times and is common to the first situation and the second situation. Therefore, even though a common setting condition that does not depend on the first situation and the second situation is set as the second setting condition, the possibility of obtaining a specific determination result differs depending on the situation. There is an effect that novel control can be realized.

In the gaming machine HB5 or HB6, display means capable of displaying identification information; second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the determination result of the second determination means on the display means; and dynamic display of the first identification information by the first dynamic display means dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period; and a first dynamic display period as the dynamic display period set by the dynamic display period setting means; and a period selection means for selecting one of a plurality of periods including at least a second dynamic display period, wherein the first situation is selected by the first dynamic display period by the period selection means. A gaming machine HB7 characterized in that the ratio of winning is higher than in the second situation.

According to the game machine HB7, in addition to the effects of the game machine HB5 or HB6, the display means capable of displaying the identification information and the first identification information indicating the determination result of the first determination means are displayed dynamically on the display means. a first dynamic display means for displaying; a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the determination result of the second determination means on the display means; and the first dynamic display means dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period in dynamic display of the first identification information; and a first dynamic display period as the dynamic display period set by the dynamic display period setting means and a second dynamic display period that is longer than the first dynamic display period, and a period selection means for selecting one of a plurality of periods, wherein the first situation is the period selection A ratio of selecting the first dynamic display period by means is higher than in the second situation.

Thus, by making the tendency of the dynamic display period selected by the period selection means different between the first situation and the second situation, the length of the period required until the first setting condition is substantially satisfied. can be made different, and the number of executions of judgment by the second judgment means that can be executed until the first set condition is satisfied can be made different.

In the gaming machine HB7, the first dynamic display means dynamically displays the first identification information while the second dynamic display means dynamically displays the second identification information. A gaming machine HB8 characterized by being configured to be able to start.

According to the gaming machine HB8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HB7, the first dynamic display means displays the second identification information while the second dynamic display means dynamically displays the Since the dynamic display of the first identification information can be started, the dynamic display of the first identification information can be started regardless of the dynamic display of the second identification information. . Therefore, there is an effect that the first determination can be executed with high reliability.

In the gaming machine HB8, the second dynamic display means dynamically displays the second identification information while the first dynamic display means dynamically displays the first identification information. A gaming machine HB9 characterized by being configured to be able to start.

According to the gaming machine HB9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HB8, the second dynamic display means displays the dynamic display of the first identification information by the first dynamic display means. Since the dynamic display of the second identification information can be started, the dynamic display of the second identification information can be started regardless of the dynamic display of the first identification information. . Therefore, there is an effect that the second determination can be executed with high reliability.

In any one of the game machines HB5 to HB9, the game machine HB10 is characterized in that the discrimination by the second discrimination means is constituted by discrimination with a higher degree of advantage than the discrimination by the first discrimination means.

According to the gaming machine HB10, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines HB5 to HB9, the discrimination by the second discrimination means is constituted by discrimination with a higher degree of advantage than the discrimination by the first discrimination means. , the game can be played with a strong expectation that the determination by the second determination means will be performed rather than the determination by the first determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Characteristic HC group> (executing an effect that prompts the player to adopt a game method that allows the holding of the advantageous side to accumulate after the advantageous state ends)
a shooting means configured to shoot game balls in at least a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction; a first state setting means for setting a first state in which the degree of advantage is likely to be higher when the game ball is shot in the first direction rather than in the second direction; Second state setting for setting a second state in which the degree of advantage tends to be higher when the game ball is shot in the second direction than in the first direction, based on the establishment of the setting condition 2. means and at least an effect mode capable of suggesting to the player that the game ball is to be shot in the first direction based on the establishment of a predetermined specific execution condition in the first state. and at least an effect mode capable of suggesting to the player the same game suggested by the first effect for a predetermined period in the second state. a second effect executing means for executing a second effect composed of: a game machine HC1;

Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed, thereby providing a winning game advantageous to the player. In addition, various images such as characters and scenery are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: 2003-325886).

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of interest.

In addition, among such conventional gaming machines, by changing the game method (shooting direction of the game ball) that is advantageous for the player for each game state, it is possible to enjoy changing the game method according to the game state. There are also things that are configured so that they can be given to people.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, the game method corresponding to the game state is generally notified regardless of the game situation in each game state, so the degree of advantage may decrease depending on the situation. There is a problem that it is possible.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine HC1, a shooting means configured to shoot game balls in at least a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction, and a predetermined first a first state setting means for setting a first state in which a game ball is more likely to be shot in the first direction than in the second direction based on the establishment of a set condition; , based on the fact that a predetermined second setting condition is satisfied in the first state, the advantage degree tends to be higher when the game ball is shot in the second direction rather than in the first direction. second state setting means for setting the second state, and the player is instructed to shoot the game ball in the first direction based on the establishment of a predetermined specific execution condition in the first state. and a first effect executing means for executing a first effect configured to include at least an effect mode suggestible to the player; A second performance executing means for executing a second performance including at least a performance mode that can be suggested to a player.

As a result, in the second state where the degree of advantage tends to increase if the game ball is shot in the second direction, a novel presentation mode is realized that suggests to the player the game method of shooting the game ball in the first direction. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine HC1, in the second state, while a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the degree of advantage tends to be higher when the game ball is shot in the first direction rather than in the second direction. The gaming machine HC2 is characterized in that the second effect executing means is configured to be able to execute the second effect at least while the specific condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine HC2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HC1, the second state is such that the game ball is moved in the first direction rather than in the second direction while a predetermined specific condition is satisfied. It is constructed so that the degree of advantage tends to increase when the ball is shot, and the second performance execution means is constructed so as to be able to execute the second performance at least while the specific condition is satisfied.

As a result, in the second state in which it is basically advantageous to shoot the game ball in the second direction, a specific condition is established and it becomes advantageous to shoot the game ball in the first direction. In this case, it is possible to suggest to the player that the game ball is to be shot in the first direction by the second effect, so there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the loss of the player.

In the game machine HC2, the game machine HC3 is characterized in that the specific condition is constituted by a condition that is established based on the establishment of the second set condition.

According to the gaming machine HC3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HC2, the specific condition is a condition that is established based on the establishment of the second setting condition, so the first state is started. After that, the game method of shooting the game ball in the first direction can be continuously suggested by the first and second effects until the state shifts to the second state and the specific condition is not established. Therefore, even after the first state is terminated, the player can be made to think that the first state is in the first state until the specific condition is not established, so the first state continues longer than it actually is. There is an effect that it can make you think as if you were there.

In any one of the gaming machines HC1 to HC3, provided at a position where a game ball launched in the first direction can enter and a position where a game ball launched in the second direction is difficult to enter. A first ball entering means, a first determination means capable of executing a first determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering means, and a game ball launched in the second direction A second ball entering means provided at a position where the ball can be entered but is difficult for the game ball shot in the first direction to enter, and the game ball enters the second ball entering means. a second determination means for executing a second determination based on the above, and a player based on a predetermined specific determination result of either the first determination or the second determination. and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the second state, wherein the first state is determined by the first determination means when the game ball is shot in the second direction rather than the second state. is more likely to be executed, and the second state is determined by the first determination means when the game ball is shot in the second direction during the predetermined period more than during a period other than the predetermined period. game machine HC4 characterized in that it is configured in a state in which is easy to execute.

According to the gaming machine HC4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines HC1 to HC3, the game ball launched in the second direction is positioned at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction can enter. a first ball entering means provided at a position where it is difficult to enter a ball; a first discrimination means capable of executing a first discrimination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering means; a second ball-entering means provided at a position where the game ball launched in the second direction can enter and where the game ball launched in the first direction is difficult to enter; A second determination means for executing a second determination based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entering means, and a predetermined specific determination between the first determination and the second determination and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result, wherein the first state causes the game ball to move in the second direction more than the second state. It is configured in a state in which the determination of the first determination means is easily executed when the game ball is shot, and the second state is the predetermined period in which the game ball is moved in the second direction more than the period other than the predetermined period. It is configured in such a state that the discrimination by the first discriminating means can be easily executed when the missile is fired.

As a result, even in the second state where the degree of advantage is low, for a predetermined period of time, as in the first state, the determination by the first determination means can be easily performed. be.

In the gaming machine HC4, the first state is such that when game balls are continuously shot in the first direction, the shot game balls enter the first ball entering means at a first rate. In the second state, when game balls are continuously shot in the first direction, the shot game balls enter the first ball entering means at a rate equal to or higher than the first rate. The predetermined period is configured such that the period from when the determination by the first determination means is executed until the determination result of the determination is indicated is shorter than the period other than the predetermined period. A gaming machine HC5 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine HC5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HC4, the first state is that when game balls are continuously shot in the first direction, the shot game balls are shot at the first rate. It is configured to enter a ball into the first ball entering means, and the second state is that when the game ball is continuously launched in the first direction, the number of the launched game balls exceeds the first ratio. The ball enters the first ball entering means at a rate, and the predetermined period is the period from when the determination by the first determination means is performed to when the determination result of the determination is indicated. It is configured to be shorter than the period other than the period.

As a result, even in the second state, the game ball enters the first ball entering means at a rate equal to or higher than the first rate, so that the player who shoots the game ball in the first direction during execution of the second effect There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the loss.

In the gaming machine HC4 or HC5, discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information for use in the first discrimination based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means, and discrimination information acquisition means thereof a determination information storage means capable of storing the determination information acquired by the method until the determination information is used for the first determination, with a specific number of information as an upper limit, and the predetermined period is a determination of the specific number of information Determination of the first determination using the last determination information in the specific number of information after one of the determination information is used for the first determination while the information is stored in the determination information storage means. A gaming machine HC6 characterized by comprising at least a period until a result is shown.

According to the game machine HC6, in addition to the effects of the game machine HC4 or HC5, the discrimination information for use in the first discrimination is acquired based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means. a discrimination information acquisition means; and a discrimination information storage means capable of storing the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, up to a specific number of pieces of information, until the discrimination information is used for the first discrimination, For a predetermined period of time, the last determination in the specific number of pieces of information after one piece of determination information is used for the first determination while the determination information of the specific number of pieces of information is stored in the determination information storage means. It is configured at least by a period until the determination result of the first determination using the information is indicated.

As a result, when the predetermined period is set, the execution of the first discrimination for the specific number of pieces of information is guaranteed, so there is an effect that the player can be pleased when the predetermined period is set. .

In the game machine HC6, the predetermined period is a period set based on the establishment of the second set condition.

According to the gaming machine HC7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HC6, the predetermined period is configured based on the establishment of the second setting condition, so that the second period having a low advantage degree There is an effect that it is possible to guarantee the execution of the first discrimination for at least a specific number of pieces of information immediately after setting the two states.

The gaming machine HC8, wherein the first discrimination is constituted by discrimination having a higher degree of advantage than the second discrimination in any one of the gaming machines HC4 to HC7.

According to the gaming machine HC8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines HC4 to HC7, the first determination is made up of determinations with a higher degree of advantage than the second determination. You can increase your advantage. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played with a stronger expectation that the predetermined period is set.

<Characteristic HD group> (In the time saving state of 1, the subtraction timing of the number of time saving is variable under predetermined conditions)
counter means capable of storing a counter value; counter value setting means for setting a predetermined first counter value to the counter means based on establishment of a predetermined setting condition; Updating means for updating the counter value of the counter means during a period from when a condition is established until a second condition different from the first condition is established, and the counter value of the counter means is predetermined by the updating means. specific control execution means for executing a predetermined specific control based on the update to the second counter value, wherein the update means performs the a first update control for updating the counter value at a first timing until a second condition is satisfied; and a second update control for updating the counter value at a second timing different from the first timing. A gaming machine HD1 characterized in that the counter value can be updated by either one.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine sets a predetermined initial value to a predetermined counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of times the time is saved) at a predetermined timing, and performs update processing until the counter value reaches a specific value. exists (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

However, there has been a demand for a more suitable counter value update method.

In addition, in such a conventional gaming machine, a plurality of special symbols (for example, a first special symbol and a second special symbol) are provided, and the variable display indicating the lottery result of each special symbol is displayed independently of each other. Some are configured to be executable. In a gaming machine with such specifications, in order to avoid overlapping execution of winning games with different special symbols, for example, when the variable display indicating one winning game ends, the variable display of other special symbols is performed. A control or the like that forcibly stops and displays a pattern different from the hit is adopted.

However, in such a game machine, the counter value of the predetermined counter is updated even if the variable display is stopped and displayed with a pattern different from the winning pattern, so there is a phenomenon that the number of times of lottery is substantially lost. There are problems that can arise.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine HD1, there is provided a counter means capable of storing a counter value and a counter for setting a predetermined first counter value to the counter means based on establishment of a predetermined setting condition. value setting means; updating means for updating the counter value of the counter means after a predetermined first condition is established until a second condition different from the first condition is established; specific control execution means for executing a predetermined specific control based on the fact that the counter value of the counter means is updated to a predetermined second counter value by the means, wherein the updating means is a first update control for updating the counter value at a first timing between when the first condition is satisfied and when the second condition is satisfied; and the counter value is updated at a second timing different from the first timing. The counter value can be updated by either a second update control for updating the value.

As a result, a plurality of different timings can be set as timings for updating the counter value, so there is an effect that the counter value can be updated more favorably.

In the game machine HD1, a determining means for performing determination based on the establishment of a determining condition, and a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the determination result of the determining means is a predetermined specific determination result. privilege game execution means for executing; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means; and game state setting means for setting one of a plurality of game states including at least a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the game state, wherein the counter value setting means is the game state setting means. The first counter value can be set for the counter means based on the setting of the second game state by the first condition, and the first condition is that the determination condition is established. The second condition is satisfied when the dynamic display of the identification information is completed, and the specific control changes the game state from the second game state to the first game state. The game machine HD2 is characterized by being configured by a control that changes the game state.

According to the game machine HD2, in addition to the effects of the game machine HD1, the determination means that performs determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined specific determination result. a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on; a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means; game state setting means for setting one of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state; The counter value setting means is configured to be able to set the first counter value for the counter means based on the setting of the second game state by the game state setting means. The first condition is satisfied when the discrimination condition is satisfied, the second condition is satisfied when the dynamic display of the identification information is finished, and the specific control is performed by It is constituted by control for changing the state from the second game state to the first game state.

As a result, the update timing of the counter means can be varied during the period from when the determination condition is satisfied until the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination is completed, thereby enabling the second game state. is set until it is changed to the first game state, the counter means can be preferably updated.

In the game machine HD2, the first timing is satisfied when the first condition is satisfied, and the second timing is satisfied when the second condition is satisfied. .

According to the gaming machine HD3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HD2, the first timing is met when the first condition is met, and the second timing is met when the second condition is met. It is.

As a result, the update timing of the counter means can be set to either the timing at which the determination condition is satisfied or the timing at which the dynamic display of the identification information is completed according to the situation, so that the counter means can be updated more preferably. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine HD2 or HD3, the updating means can update the counter means at the first timing under a situation where the number of remaining updates of the counter means before changing to the first game state is one. The game machine HD4 is constructed so as to be able to update the counter means at the second timing in a situation where the number of remaining updates of the counter means is two or more.

According to the gaming machine HD4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HD2 or HD3, the updating means updates the counter means under the condition that the number of remaining updates of the counter means before changing to the first gaming state is one. The counter means can be updated at the first timing, and the counter means can be updated at the second timing when the number of remaining updates of the counter means is two or more.

As a result, the last update before changing to the first game state can be performed at the first timing, and other updates can be performed at the second timing, so that the counter means can be updated more preferably. There is

In any one of the game machines HD2 to HD4, the determination means comprises first determination means for performing determination based on the satisfaction of a first determination condition, and satisfaction of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition. and the dynamic display means dynamically displays the first identification information for indicating the determination result of the first dynamic display means. Display means, and second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying second identification information for indicating the determination result of the second determination means, wherein the first dynamic display means The dynamic display means can start dynamic display of the first identification information while the dynamic display of the second identification information is being performed, and the second dynamic display means can start the dynamic display of the first identification information. The game machine HD5 is constructed such that dynamic display of the second identification information can be started while dynamic display of the first identification information is being performed by target display means.

According to the gaming machine HD5, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines HD2 to HD4, the determination means includes a first determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a first determination condition, and the first determination means. and a second determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the condition, wherein the dynamic display means displays a first determination result of the first determination means. comprising at least a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information and a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result of the second determination means; The first dynamic display means is configured to be capable of starting dynamic display of the first identification information while the second dynamic display means is dynamically displaying the second identification information, and 2 The dynamic display means is configured to be capable of starting dynamic display of the second identification information while the first dynamic display means is dynamically displaying the first identification information.

As a result, the dynamic display of the first identification information and the dynamic display of the second identification information can be performed in parallel, so there is an effect that the determination by the determination means can be performed more efficiently.

In the gaming machine HD5, the first identification information is dynamically displayed at the end of the dynamic display of the second identification information executed based on the determination result of the second determination means becoming the specific determination result. stopping displaying the first identification information with the deviation identification information for indicating the deviation determination result different from the specific determination result, regardless of the dynamic display state of the first identification information when the first identification information is dynamically displayed. A gaming machine HD6 characterized by comprising display means.

According to the game machine HD6, in addition to the effects of the game machine HD5, dynamic display of the second identification information executed based on the determination result of the second determination means becoming the specific determination result. When the first identification information is dynamically displayed at the time of termination, regardless of the state of the dynamic display of the first identification information, a deviation determination result different from the specific determination result is obtained for the first identification information. Since the stop display means for stop-displaying with the discrepancy identification information for indicating is provided, even if the determination by the first determination means and the determination by the second determination means overlap and result in a specific determination result, the privilege game is duplicated. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress execution by

In the gaming machine HD6, a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position in which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a game ball from the first position to the ball entry means. a second position at which it is difficult to enter the ball; and variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time, and the stop display means displays the determination result of the second determination means. When the first identification information is dynamically displayed at the end of the dynamic display of the second identification information executed based on the first determination result, the dynamic display of the first identification information A game machine HD7 characterized in that the first identification information can be stopped and displayed with the loss identification information for indicating the result of the loss determination regardless of the state of the target display.

According to the gaming machine HD7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HD6, a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position into which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and the first position a second position at which a game ball is more difficult to enter into said ball entering means; variable game executing means for executing a variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the first determination result, and the stop display; The means dynamically displays the first identification information at the end of the dynamic display of the second identification information executed based on the determination result of the second determination means becoming the first determination result. When the first identification information is present, the first identification information can be stop-displayed with the missing identification information indicating the result of the missing determination regardless of the dynamic display status of the first identification information.

As a result, when the specific determination result and the first determination result overlap, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the overlapping execution of the privilege game and the variable game.

In the gaming machine HD6 or HD7, the update means is configured to be capable of suppressing updating of the counter means during dynamic display of the first identification information stopped and displayed by the stop display means with the missing identification information. A gaming machine HD8 characterized by:

According to the game machine HD8, in addition to the effects of the game machine HD6 or HD7, the updating means can be set by the counter means in the dynamic display of the first identification information stopped and displayed by the stop display means with the missing identification information. can be suppressed from being updated, it is possible to suppress updating of the counter means triggered by useless determination for the player stopped and displayed with the missing identification information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively disadvantaged.

<Characteristic HE group> (The degree of advantage tends to be higher when winning a small prize after winning a prize rather than winning a prize after winning a small prize)
A discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and a privilege game for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a predetermined first discrimination result. execution means, game state setting means capable of setting a specific game state as a game state after the execution of the privilege game is completed, ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, and the ball entry means. A privilege granting means for imparting a predetermined privilege based on the entrance of a game ball, a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entering means, and a game ball entering the ball entering means. a second position that is difficult; and a variable means that can be changed to a predetermined position based on the fact that the determination result of the determination means is a second determination result different from the first determination result. variable game execution means for executing a variable game that is variable from the second position to the first position for a period of time, and the specific game state is the first game state after the first determination result is obtained; The degree of advantage is likely to be higher when a first situation that can be established when the determination result of 2 is established is established than when a second situation different from the first situation is established. A gaming machine HE1 characterized in that

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the result of a lottery performed based on the entry of a game ball into a start winning hole is a win, a win that is advantageous to the player is executed. Among such gaming machines, there are some that are provided with a plurality of types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some that aim to improve interest during winning by varying the game value that can be obtained (for example, , Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of interest.

In addition, among such conventional gaming machines, there is a jackpot game in which the game state after the end of the winning game is set to a game state corresponding to the type of winning, and a game state after the end of the winning game. There is also a game provided with a small winning game in which the game state at the time of winning is maintained. However, even if the small winning game is executed, the game state is not changed regardless of the timing of execution, so it is relatively difficult to improve the interest by executing the small winning game.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine HE1, a determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition and a game based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a predetermined first determination result. bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to players; game state setting means capable of setting a specific game state as a game state after the execution of the bonus game is completed; a ball-entering means, a privilege granting means for imparting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball-entering means, a first position at which a game ball can enter the ball-entering means; a second position at which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the ball-entering means; and variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time, and the specific game state is the first game state. The first situation that can be established when the second judgment result is obtained after the judgment result of 1 is established is better than the case where the second situation different from the first situation is established. Also, it is configured to easily increase the degree of advantage.

As a result, the player can strongly expect the second determination result after the first determination result has been obtained, and thus the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine HE1, the second situation is constituted by a situation that can be established when the first determination result is obtained after the second determination result is obtained. HE2.

According to the gaming machine HE2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HE1, the second situation is a situation that can be established when the first determination result is obtained after the second determination result is obtained. Since it is configured, in a specific game state, the degree of advantage varies depending on whether the second determination result is obtained before the first determination result is obtained or the second determination result is obtained later. Playability can be realized. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine HE1 or HE2, the determination means comprises a first determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a predetermined first determination condition, and a second determination condition different from the first determination condition. and a second determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of, and the specific game state is determined after the first determination result is obtained in the determination of the first determination means. The second determination result in the second determination is the second determination result in the second determination after the first determination result in the determination by the first determination means. The game machine HE3 is characterized in that it is configured such that the degree of advantage is likely to be higher than in the case where it is not.

According to the game machine HE3, in addition to the effects of the game machine HE1 or HE2, the determination means includes first determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a predetermined first determination condition, and the first determination means. and a second determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the determination condition of (1), wherein the specific game state is determined by the first determination means. After the first determination result is obtained in the second determination, the second determination result is obtained after the first determination result is obtained in the determination by the first determination means. The degree of advantage is likely to be higher than when the second determination does not result in the second determination result.

As a result, when the discrimination by the first discriminating means results in the first discriminative result in a specific game state, the discrimination by the second discriminating means is expected to result in the second discriminating result. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine HE3, display means capable of displaying identification information; a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying second identification information for indicating the determination result of the second determination means on the display means, wherein the second dynamic display means is equivalent to the first dynamic display means; The dynamic display of the second identification information can be started while the dynamic display of the first identification information is being performed by the When the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the second determination result is started during the execution of the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the determination result, the second determination result The gaming machine HE4 is characterized in that it is configured such that the degree of advantage tends to be higher than when the dynamic display of the corresponding second identification information is not started.

According to the game machine HE4, in addition to the effects of the game machine HE3, the display means capable of displaying the identification information and the first identification information for indicating the determination result of the first determination means are dynamically displayed on the display means. and a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying, on the display means, second identification information for indicating the determination result of the second determination means, wherein the second dynamic The display means is configured to be capable of starting dynamic display of the second identification information while the first dynamic display means is dynamically displaying the first identification information, In the specific game state, the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the second determination result is started while the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the first determination result is being performed. In this case, the degree of advantage tends to be higher than in the case where the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the second determination result is not started.

As a result, it is possible to realize a novel playability that makes one expect that the identification information corresponding to the second determination result is displayed by the dynamic display of the second identification information while the dynamic display of the first identification information is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the game machine HE4, while the dynamic display of the first identification information is being performed, the second identification information indicating the second determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means a stop control means for controlling the display means to stop and display first identification information indicating a discriminated result different from the first discriminated result and the second discriminated result; The means selects one of a plurality of game states including at least the specific game state and a first game state having a lower degree of advantage than the specific game state as game states after execution of the bonus game is completed. The state can be set, and the determination of the first determination means is more likely than the determination of the second determination means. The game machine HE5 is characterized by being configured so that the setting ratio of the game state is high.

According to the game machine HE5, in addition to the effects of the game machine HE4, while the dynamic display of the first identification information is being performed, the second identification information indicating the second determination result is displayed by the display means. control so that the first identification information indicating the deviation determination result different from the first determination result and the second determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means based on the stop display of the and the game state setting means selects the specific game state and a first game state having a lower degree of advantage than the specific game state as game states after the execution of the privilege game is completed. and one of a plurality of game states including at least and can be set. Secondly, the setting ratio of the first game state is increased by the game state setting means.

As a result, even if the first determination result is obtained in the determination of the first determination means and the possibility of setting the first gaming state with a low degree of advantage is high, the first identification indicating the first determination result is obtained. By stop-displaying the second identification information indicating the second discrimination result before the stop-display of the information, the discrimination result of the first discriminating means is rewritten to the deviation discrimination result instead of the first discrimination result. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the end of the advantageous specific game state and the transition to the first game state with a low degree of advantage. Therefore, when the determination result of the first determination means is the first determination result in the first game state, the second identification information indicating the second determination result is expected to be stopped and displayed first. There is an effect that it is possible to realize sexuality.

In any one of the game machines HE3 to HE5, when the second determination is executed during the dynamic display period of the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the first determination result, the The game machine HE6 is characterized in that a determination result of 1 is suppressed.

According to the gaming machine HE6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines HE3 to HE5, during the dynamic display period of the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the first determination result, the second When the determination is executed, the first determination result is suppressed. Therefore, after the first determination result is obtained in the determination of the first determination means, the second determination result is determined by the second determination means. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the determination result is 1 and the privilege game is executed redundantly.

In any one of game machines HE4 to HE6, first dynamic display time setting means for setting a dynamic display time in dynamic display of the first identification information by the first dynamic display means; a second dynamic display time setting means for setting a dynamic display time in dynamic display of the second identification information by the display means, wherein the first dynamic display time setting means is set in the specific game state , wherein a dynamic display period of a length that enables dynamic display of the second identification information to be executed multiple times is selected as the dynamic display time corresponding to the first determination result. A gaming machine HE7.

According to the game machine HE7, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines HE4 to HE6, the first dynamic display time for setting the dynamic display time in the dynamic display of the first identification information by the first dynamic display means display time setting means; and second dynamic display time setting means for setting a dynamic display time in dynamic display of the second identification information by the second dynamic display means, wherein the first dynamic display The time setting means sets a dynamic display period of a length that allows the dynamic display of the second identification information to be executed multiple times as the dynamic display time corresponding to the first determination result in the specific game state. configured to select.

As a result, the dynamic display of the second identification information during the execution of the dynamic display of the first identification information can provide a plurality of opportunities for static display of the identification information corresponding to the second determination result. be.

The game machine HE8 is characterized in that, in any one of the game machines HE1 to HE7, the specific game state can be continued until the next privilege game is executed.

According to the gaming machine HE8, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines HE1 to HE7, the specific game state is configured to be able to continue until the privilege game is executed next time. By entering the state, the next privilege game is also substantially determined. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played with a strong expectation that a specific game state will be set.

In any one of the gaming machines HE1 to HE8, the variable game is configured such that the game state at the time when the second determination result is obtained is maintained even after the variable game is finished. game machine HE9.

According to the gaming machine HE9, in addition to the effect produced by one of the gaming machines HE1 to HE8, the variable game maintains the gaming state at the time when the second determination result is obtained even after the variable game ends. Since it is configured in such a manner, even if the second determination result is obtained in a specific game state, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the transition to another game state.

<Characteristic HF group> (The other special figure switches between a state where it is easy to turn and a state where it is difficult to turn according to the number of fluctuations of one special figure)
A first determination means for executing a first determination based on the establishment of a predetermined first determination condition, and a second determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition. and when either the determination result of the first determination or the determination result of the second determination becomes a predetermined specific determination result, the player is instructed to Privilege game execution means for executing an advantageous privilege game, first identification information for indicating the determination result of the first determination, and second identification information for indicating the determination result of the second determination. display means capable of displaying at least; first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information on the display means based on execution of the first determination; and the second determination. second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information on the display means based on the execution; a game state setting means for setting a specific game state; and under a situation in which a predetermined specific condition is established in the specific game state, the frequency of dynamic display of the first identification information is higher than the frequency of the dynamic display of the second identification information. A first control in which the frequency of dynamic display of identification information tends to be higher is executed, and under a situation where the specific condition is not satisfied in the specific game state, the first identification information is displayed rather than the first control. and control means capable of executing a second control in which the frequency of dynamic display of the game machine HF1 is likely to increase.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a winning game that is advantageous to the player is executed when the result of a lottery performed based on the entry of a game ball into a starting winning hole is a winning. . Among such gaming machines, there are some that aim to improve the interest of the player in the game by enabling the setting of a plurality of states with different degrees of advantage for the player (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2001). -038007).

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of interest.

In addition, among such conventional gaming machines, there are those that are provided with a plurality of starting winning openings and execute a lottery of different special symbols according to the type of starting winning opening that detects winning. In such a gaming machine, the types of starting winning holes that are likely to win a prize are differentiated for each game state, thereby varying the degree of advantage for each game state, thereby improving interest.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, the types of special symbols that are likely to be drawn for each game state are fixed, so if the same game state continues for a long time, the game becomes monotonous. there is a point

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine HF1, a first determination means for executing a first determination based on the establishment of a predetermined first determination condition, and a second determination means different from the first determination condition. a second determination means for executing a second determination based on the establishment of a determination condition; and a specific determination result in which either the determination result of the first determination or the determination result of the second determination is predetermined. Based on the result, privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player, first identification information for indicating the determination result of the first determination, and the determination result of the second determination a display means capable of displaying at least second identification information for indicating a; second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information on the display means based on execution of the second determination; and a predetermined specific setting condition. game state setting means for setting a predetermined specific game state based on the fact that the first identification information is established; executing the first control in which the frequency of dynamic display of the second identification information tends to be higher than the frequency of dynamic display of the second identification information, and under a situation where the specific condition is not satisfied in the specific game state, a control means capable of executing a second control in which the frequency of dynamic display of the first identification information tends to be higher than that of the first control.

As a result, the frequency of dynamic display of the first identification information can be varied depending on whether or not the specific condition is established, so it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous in a specific game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine HF1, the control means executes the first control until the dynamic display of the first identification information is executed a predetermined specific number of times after the specific game state is set, The game machine HF2 is characterized in that the second control can be executed after the dynamic display of the first identification information is executed a specific number of times.

According to the game machine HF2, in addition to the effects of the game machine HF1, the control means executes dynamic display of the first identification information a predetermined specific number of times after the specific game state is set. Since it is configured to be able to execute the second control after the first control is executed until the dynamic display of the first identification information is executed for the specific number of times, a specific game state is set, the first control and the second control are switched according to the number of dynamic displays of the first identification information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous in a specific game state.

In the gaming machine HF2, the specific setting condition is composed of at least a first setting condition and a second setting condition different from the first setting condition, and the specific number of times is When the specific game state is set based on the establishment of the first set condition, it is set to a predetermined first specific number of times, and the specific game state is set based on the establishment of the second set condition. is set, a second specific number of times greater than the first specific number of times is set.

According to the gaming machine HF3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HF2, the specific setting conditions are composed of at least a first setting condition and a second setting condition different from the first setting condition. The specific number of times is set to a predetermined first specific number of times when the specific game state is set based on the establishment of the first setting condition, and the second setting is performed. It is configured such that when the specific game state is set based on the establishment of the condition, a second specific number of times greater than the first specific number of times is set.

As a result, the number of times the first control is executed varies depending on the specific game state setting trigger, so there is an effect that the player can play the game while paying attention to the specific game state setting trigger.

In the gaming machine HF3, as the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means, one of a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game and a second privilege game different from the first privilege game. The first setting condition is established based on the completion of the execution of the first privilege game, and the second setting condition is the second privilege game game machine HF4, characterized in that it is established based on the completion of the execution of .

According to the gaming machine HF4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HF3, a first privilege game and a second privilege game different from the first privilege game are provided as the types of the privilege games executed by the privilege game execution means. and a type determination means for determining one type out of a plurality of at least, wherein the first setting condition is established based on the completion of execution of the first privilege game, and the first The setting condition 2 is established based on the completion of execution of the second privilege game.

As a result, the degree of advantage in a specific game state set according to the type of privilege game can be varied, so that there is an effect that the player can play the game while paying more attention to the type of privilege game.

In any one of game machines HF1 to HF4, a dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period in dynamic display of the first identification information by the first dynamic display means is provided, and the second dynamic display is provided. The means is configured to be capable of starting dynamic display of the second identification information while the first dynamic display means is dynamically displaying the first identification information, and the first control includes: , a game machine HF5 characterized in that the control is such that a longer dynamic display period is more likely to be set by the dynamic display period setting means than the second control.

According to the game machine HF5, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the game machines HF1 to HF4, a dynamic display period for setting the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information by the first dynamic display means A setting means is provided, and the second dynamic display means can start dynamic display of the second identification information while the first dynamic display means is dynamically displaying the first identification information. The first control is configured to make it easier for the dynamic display period setting means to set a longer dynamic display period than the second control.

As a result, while the first control is being executed, a long dynamic display period is likely to be selected as the dynamic display period in dynamic display of the first identification information, thereby increasing the frequency of dynamic display of the second identification information. can be increased.

In a game machine HF5, a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter, a first position for allowing a game ball to enter the ball entry means, and a game ball difficult to enter the ball entry means. a second position, a variable means that can be varied, and one of the determination result of the first determination and the determination result of the second determination is a first determination result different from the specific determination result. Based on this, variable game executing means for executing a variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time, and dynamic display of the first identification information is performed. when the second identification information indicating the first determination result is stopped and displayed while the first identification information is displayed according to the specific determination result a stop display means for stop-displaying with the first identification information indicating a discrepancy determination result different from the first discrimination result.

According to the gaming machine HF6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HF5, a ball entering means for allowing a game ball to enter, a first position for allowing a game ball to enter the ball entering means, and the entering means a second position at which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the means; variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time based on a first determination result different from the result; When the second identification information indicating the first determination result is stopped while the dynamic display of the first identification information is being performed, regardless of the dynamic display of the first identification information, and static display means for statically displaying the first identification information with the first identification information indicating a deviation determination result different from the specific determination result and the first determination result.

As a result, when the second identification information indicating the first determination result is stopped and displayed, the dynamic display of the first identification information ends with the determination result. In some circumstances, the frequency of dynamic display of the first identification may become high. Therefore, while the first control is being executed, there is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel game feature that strongly expects that the determination result of the second determination will not be the first determination result.

In the gaming machine HF6, when the second determination performed while the first control is being executed results in the first determination result, the first determination result is displayed. 2. A gaming machine HF7 characterized by comprising a first effect execution means for executing a first effect during a dynamic display period in dynamic display of identification information.

According to the gaming machine HF7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HF6, when the second determination performed while the first control is performed results in the first determination result, the Since the first effect execution means is provided for executing the first effect during the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the second identification information for indicating the first determination result, when the first effect is executed It is possible to make the player understand that the first determination result has been obtained. Therefore, the player can determine whether or not the first determination result is obtained without paying attention to the variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that convenience for the player can be improved.

In the gaming machine HF7, when the second determination performed while the first control is performed results in the out-of-order determination result, the second identification information for indicating the out-of-line determination result. A game machine HF8 characterized by comprising a second effect executing means capable of executing a second effect including a specific effect mode that is difficult to distinguish from the first effect during a dynamic display period in dynamic display.

According to the gaming machine HF8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HF7, when the second determination performed while the first control is executed results in the deviation determination result, the deviation determination a second effect executing means capable of executing a second effect including a specific effect mode that is difficult to distinguish from the first effect during the dynamic display period of the dynamic display of the second identification information for indicating the result Since it is provided, it is possible to strongly expect that the second effect is being executed when the specific effect mode is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Characteristic HG group> (The state of the electric sapo is common, but the execution frequency of the advantageous special figure 2 lottery is different from each other.)
a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball; a first determining means capable of executing a first determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering means; a second ball entering means different from the ball means; a second discrimination means capable of executing a second discrimination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entering means; a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on whether one of the discrimination result and the discrimination result of the second discrimination becomes a predetermined specific discrimination result; 2 Displacement means capable of displacing between a first position where a game ball can be entered into the ball entry means and a second position where a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position, and a predetermined displacement condition. a displacement control means for displacing the displacement means from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of a first state and the first state based on the establishment of a predetermined set condition and a state setting means for setting one of a plurality of states including at least a second state in which the ease with which a game ball enters the second ball entering means is different, and the game ball is set to the first state. A first game state and a second game state in which the execution frequency of determination by the first determination means tends to be higher than in the first game state are provided as game states to be played. Game machine HG1.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a winning game that is advantageous to the player is executed when the result of a lottery performed based on the entry of a game ball into a starting winning hole is a winning. . Among such gaming machines, there are some that aim to improve the interest of the player in the game by enabling the setting of a plurality of states with different degrees of advantage for the player (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2001). -038007).

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of interest.

In addition, among such conventional gaming machines, there are those that are provided with a plurality of starting winning openings and execute a lottery of different special symbols according to the type of starting winning opening that detects winning. In such a gaming machine, by switching between a non-time-saving state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter a specific start winning opening and a time-saving state in which a game ball is easy to enter into a specific starting winning opening, There are also games that are designed to be more interesting by differentiating the types of starting prize-winning openings that are easy to win.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, the type of special symbol that is likely to be drawn depending on whether it is in a non-time-saving state or a time-saving state is fixed, so if the same state continues for a long time, the game is monotonous.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine HG1, it is possible to execute the first discrimination based on the first ball entering means into which the game ball can enter and the game ball entering the first ball entering means. a first discriminating means, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a second discrimination capable of executing a second discrimination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entering means 2. A privilege game advantageous to a player, based on the judgment means and either the judgment result of the first judgment or the judgment result of the second judgment becoming a predetermined specific judgment result. a first position where a game ball can be entered into the second ball entry means; and a second position where a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. displacement means capable of displacement; displacement control means for displacing the displacement means from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time based on establishment of a predetermined displacement condition; and displacement control means based on establishment of a predetermined set condition. state setting means for setting one of a plurality of states including at least a first state and a second state in which the ease with which a game ball enters the second ball entering means is different from the first state; and, as game states set in the first state, a first game state, and a second game state in which the execution frequency of the determination by the first determination means is likely to be higher than in the first game state; is provided at least.

As a result, a novel control is realized in which the execution frequency of discrimination by the first discriminating means varies between the first game state and the second game state in which the ease with which the game ball enters the second ball entering means is common. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine HG1, the game machine HG2 is characterized in that the second determination is made up of a determination with a higher degree of advantage than the first determination.

According to the gaming machine HG2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HG1, the second determination is made up of determinations with a higher degree of advantage than the first determination. In the gaming state, there is an effect that the execution frequency of the first determination, which has a low degree of advantage, can be reduced.

In the game machine HG1 or HG2, the game machine HG3 is characterized in that the first game state is constituted by a game state in which the probability of the specific determination result is higher than that of the second game state.

According to the game machine HG3, in addition to the effects of the game machine HG1 or HG2, the first game state is configured in a game state with a higher probability of the specific determination result than the second game state. On the other hand, in the first game state, the execution frequency of discrimination by the first discrimination means with a low degree of advantage is relatively high, but on the other hand, the probability of obtaining a specific discrimination result is high, and in the second game state, While the execution frequency of discrimination by the first discrimination means having a low degree of advantage is relatively low, the probability of obtaining a specific discrimination result is low. Therefore, even in the game state set to the same first state, the playability can be reversed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In any one of the game machines HG1 to HG3, a display means capable of displaying identification information and a first dynamic display for dynamically displaying the first identification information for indicating the determination result of the first determination means on the display means means, second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information for indicating the determination result of the second determination means on the display means, and the first identification information by the first dynamic display means. and dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period in dynamic display, wherein the second dynamic display means dynamically displays the first identification information by the first dynamic display means. dynamic display of the second identification information can be started while the second identification information is in the second game state, and the dynamic display period setting means sets the dynamic display period to be longer in the second game state than in the first game state. A gaming machine HG4 characterized in that it is configured so that the display period can be easily set.

According to the game machine HG4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines HG1 to HG3, the display means capable of displaying the identification information and the first identification information for indicating the determination result of the first determination means are displayed. a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying in the means; a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information for indicating the determination result of the second determination means on the display means; dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period in dynamic display of the first identification information by the dynamic display means, wherein the second dynamic display means causes the first dynamic display means to Dynamic display of the second identification information can be started while the first identification information is being dynamically displayed, and the dynamic display period setting means is configured to set the dynamic display period before the first game state. The second game state is configured such that it is easier to set a long dynamic display period.

As a result, by varying the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the first identification information for each gaming state, the motion of the second identification information that can be executed while the dynamic display of the first identification information is being performed is performed. There is an effect that the frequency of execution of the first discrimination can be varied by varying the number of target display times.

In any one of the game machines HG1 to HG4, after the first game state is set, the sum of the number of executions of the first discrimination and the number of executions of the second discrimination is a predetermined first number. A game machine HG5 characterized by comprising a second game state setting means for setting the second game state based on the occurrence of the game.

According to the gaming machine HG5, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines HG1 to HG4, after the first game state is set, the number of executions of the first determination and the number of executions of the second determination are determined. Since the second game state setting means for setting the second game state is provided based on the total of becoming a predetermined first number of times, the first game with a high execution frequency of determination by the first determination means A state and a second game state in which the execution frequency of determination by the first determination means is low are set continuously. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine HG5, after the second game state is set, the sum of the number of executions of the first discrimination and the number of executions of the second discrimination reaches a predetermined second number. A gaming machine HG6 characterized by comprising third game state setting means for setting a third game state to be set to the second state based on the above.

According to the game machine HG6, in addition to the effects of the game machine HG5, after the second game state is set, the sum of the number of executions of the first determination and the number of executions of the second determination is set in advance. Since the third game state setting means is provided for setting the third game state to be set to the second state on the basis of reaching the predetermined second number of times, the first game state, the second game state and the third game state are provided. 3 game states are continuously set. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In any one of the gaming machines HG1 to HG6, the second state is characterized in that the game ball is more difficult to enter the second ball entering means than the first state. Game machine HG7.

According to the gaming machine HG7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines HG1 to HG6, the second state makes it more difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means than the first state. Therefore, the first determination means discriminates between the first game state and the second game state in which the first state in which the game ball is relatively easy to enter the second ball entering means is set. can be run at different frequencies. Therefore, there is an effect that the game characteristics can be varied in a relatively advantageous game state.

<Characteristic HH group> (variable continuation rate in a specific game state)
A privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined specific execution condition; A first game state setting means capable of setting a game state; 2 game state setting means, and a game in which a first control is performed in which a rate at which the specific execution condition is satisfied from when the first game state is set to when the specific condition is satisfied is a first rate; Then, a second control is performed in which the rate at which the specific execution condition is met during the period from when the first game state is set until the specific condition is met is a second rate different from the first rate. and setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of games including at least a game to be played.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a winning game that is advantageous to the player is executed when the result of a lottery performed based on the entry of a game ball into a starting winning hole is a winning. . Among such gaming machines, there are some that aim to improve the interest of the player in the game by enabling the setting of a plurality of states with different degrees of advantage for the player (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2001). -038007).

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of interest.

In addition, in such conventional gaming machines, a plurality of termination conditions for a specific game state with a high degree of advantage (for example, a time-saving game state) are provided, and the specific game state is set. By setting end conditions, even in the same specific game state, there are some games in which the degree of advantage is varied according to the setting trigger.

However, in such conventional gaming machines, it is necessary to predefine end conditions for each setting opportunity in a storage device such as a ROM, so the memory capacity of the gaming machine increases as the number of ending conditions increases. There is a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine HH1, a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined specific execution condition, and a a first game state setting means capable of setting a first game state advantageous to the player as a game state; a second game state setting means for setting a second game state different from the second game state; and the first rate is the rate at which the specific execution condition is satisfied after the first game state is set until the specific condition is satisfied. and a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of games including at least a game in which a second control is performed with a different second ratio.

As a result, even in the same first game state, the possibility of the privilege game being executed can be changed depending on whether the first control is executed or the second control is executed, so that the player's game There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest in.

The gaming machine HH2 is characterized in that the first control in the gaming machine HH1 is configured such that the specific condition is more likely to be established than the second control.

According to the gaming machine HH2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HH1, the first control is configured to make the specific condition more likely to be established than the second control, so the specific condition is established. There is an effect that the possibility that a specific execution condition is satisfied before is made different.

In the game machine HH1 or HH2, a first determination means for executing a first determination based on establishment of a predetermined first determination condition, and establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition. wherein the specific execution condition is determined in advance by either the result of the first determination or the result of the second determination and the specific condition is the number of executions of the first determination at least after the first game state is set. A gaming machine HH3 characterized in that it is constituted by a condition that is established based on the number of times reaching a predetermined specific number of times.

According to the game machine HH3, in addition to the effects of the game machine HH1 or HH2, the first determination means for executing the first determination based on the establishment of a predetermined first determination condition; and a second determination means for executing a second determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the condition, wherein the specific execution condition is the determination result of the first determination and the second determination. It is composed of a condition that is established based on whether one of the determination result of determination and the determination result becomes a predetermined specific determination result, and the specific condition is at least the first game state is set. It is constituted by a condition that is established based on the number of executions of the first discrimination after the above-mentioned determination reaches a predetermined specific number of times.

As a result, the first game state is maintained in a range in which the number of executions of the first discrimination is less than the specified number of times, so the effect is that the execution of the first discrimination of the specified number of times can be guaranteed in the first game state. There is

In the gaming machine HH3, the first control is executed during the period from when the first game state is set to when the first determination is performed the specific number of times, rather than the second control. The game machine HH4 is characterized in that the game machine HH4 is characterized in that the number of executions of determination 2 is likely to be small.

According to the game machine HH4, in addition to the effects of the game machine HH3, the first control executes the first determination the specific number of times after the first game state is set, rather than the second control. Since the number of executions of the second determination to be executed until the second game state is set tends to be a small number of times, the number of executions of the second determination to be executed until the second game state is set. are different, it is possible to substantially differ the ratio of establishment of a specific execution condition.

In the gaming machine HH3 or HH4, the specific conditions include a first specific condition that is established based on the number of executions of the first determination after the setting of the first gaming state reaches the specific number of times; The second established based on the fact that the sum of the number of executions of the first determination and the number of executions of the second determination after the first game state is set becomes the first number of times greater than the specific number of times and 2 specific conditions, and the first control and the second control are configured such that the first specific condition is likely to be satisfied before the second specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine HH5 is characterized in that the period required for the first specific condition to be satisfied is likely to be shorter in the first control than in the second control.

According to the game machine HH5, in addition to the effects of the game machine HH3 or HH4, the specific condition is that the number of executions of the first determination after the first game state is set becomes the specific number of times. A first specific condition established based on a total of the number of executions of the first determination and the number of executions of the second determination after the first game state is set is greater than the specific number of times and a second specific condition that is established based on the number of times being reached, and the first control and the second control are performed before the second specific condition is established. It is configured such that the specific condition is easily established, and the first control is configured such that the period required until the first specific condition is established is likely to be shorter than the second control.

As a result, by varying the length of the period required until the first specific condition is satisfied, the number of times the second determination is performed is varied, thereby varying the rate at which the specific execution condition is satisfied. can do. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic HI Group> (Performs an effect indicating the possibility of winning a jackpot until the game state of 1 ends)
A determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition, and a privilege for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a predetermined specific determination result. A game execution means, a first game state setting means for setting a first game state based on the establishment of a predetermined first setting condition, and a second setting predetermined in the first game state. Second game state setting means for setting a second game state different from the first game state based on the establishment of a condition; and establishment of a predetermined specific execution condition in the first game state. A specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect based on and a first effect mode is determined in the case of a predetermined first situation as the effect mode of the specific effect executed by the specific effect execution means. and rendering mode determining means capable of determining a second rendering mode when the second situation is more likely to result in the specific determination result than the first situation. A game machine HI1 to play.

Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed, thereby providing a winning game advantageous to the player. In addition, various images such as characters and scenery are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: 2003-325886).

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of interest.

In addition, among such conventional gaming machines, there is also one that is configured to be able to execute an interest effect indicating the degree of expectation that the winning game will be executed within a predetermined period (for example, until all the reserved balls are consumed). There exist not only variable displays during execution, but also those constructed so as to continuously give a feeling of anticipation that a winning game will be executed over a plurality of variable displays.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, it is difficult to improve interest because it is possible to execute an effect indicating the degree of expectation that a winning game will be executed only for a relatively small number of variable displays. there were.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine HI1, a determining means for executing determination based on the establishment of a predetermined determining condition, and based on the determination result of the determining means becoming a predetermined specific determination result, bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player; first game state setting means for setting a first game state based on establishment of a predetermined first setting condition; second game state setting means for setting a second game state different from the first game state based on the establishment of a predetermined second setting condition in the game state; A specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect based on the establishment of a specific predetermined execution condition, and a predetermined first situation as the effect mode of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means. , and the second performance mode can be determined in a second situation in which the possibility of the specific determination result is higher than in the first situation. and mode determining means.

As a result, it is possible to show the player the possibility of obtaining a specific determination result during the first game state according to the effect mode of the specific effect, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved. .

The gaming machine HI1 is characterized in that the first situation is a situation in which the possibility of obtaining the specific determination result before the second setting condition is satisfied is lower than that in the second situation. Game machine HI2.

According to the game machine HI2, in addition to the effects of the game machine HI1, the first situation is more likely than the second situation to become the specific determination result before the second set condition is satisfied. Since the probability is low, it is possible to suggest the possibility of a specific determination result before the second set condition is satisfied by the specific effect mode. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine HI1 or HI2, the specific effect execution means executes the specific effect of the second effect mode based on the fact that the second situation occurs during the execution of the specific effect of the first effect mode. A gaming machine HI3 characterized by being configured to be able to execute

According to the gaming machine HI3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HI1 or HI2, the specific effect executing means is based on the fact that the second situation occurs during the execution of the specific effect of the first effect mode. Since it is configured to be able to execute the specific performance of the second performance mode, when the situation changes in the first game state, the performance mode of the specific performance can be switched according to the changed situation. Therefore, there is an effect that an accurate situation can be shown to the player by the specific effect.

In any one of the game machines HI1 to HI3, a first effect executing means for executing a predetermined first effect during execution of the privilege game, and an effect of the first effect executed by the first effect executing means. As a mode, when the first game state corresponding to the first situation is set as the game state after the privilege game being executed is finished, the third performance mode corresponding to the first performance mode is determined. an effect mode determining means configured to determine a fourth effect mode corresponding to the second effect mode when the first game state corresponding to the second situation is set; A gaming machine HI4 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine HI4, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines HI1 to HI3, a first attraction execution means for executing a predetermined first attraction during execution of the privilege game, and the execution of the first attraction. When the first game state corresponding to the first situation is set as the game state after the privilege game being executed is finished as the effect mode of the first effect executed by the means. It is possible to determine a third performance mode corresponding to the performance mode, and to determine a fourth performance mode corresponding to the second performance mode when the first game state corresponding to the second situation is set. and an effect mode determining means configured as follows.

As a result, during execution of the privilege game, the possibility of a specific determination result in the first game state after the completion of the privilege game can be shown to the player by the first effect. There is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

In any one of the game machines HI1 to HI4, the second situation is different from the first situation in that the specific determination result is not obtained after the first game state is set, and the second setting condition is satisfied. The gaming machine HI5 is characterized in that the game machine HI5 is constructed in a situation in which the number of determinations by the determination means executed until the condition is satisfied tends to increase.

According to the gaming machine HI5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines HI1 to HI4, the second situation is more likely to cause the specific discrimination after the first gaming state is set than the first situation. Since the number of determinations by the determining means that are executed until the second setting condition is satisfied without producing a result is likely to increase, the second situation is different from the first situation. Since the number of determinations by the determination means is greater than that of the conventional method, it is possible to obtain more chances of obtaining a specific determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that the execution of the specific effect of the second effect mode can be strongly expected.

<Characteristic HJ Group> (executes an effect that prompts the player to use a game method that allows the holding of the advantageous side to accumulate after the advantageous state ends)
a shooting means configured to shoot game balls in at least a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction; a first state setting means for setting a first state in which the degree of advantage tends to be higher when the game ball is shot in the first direction than in the second direction; A second state setting for setting a second state in which the degree of advantage when the game ball is shot in the first direction is likely to be lower than the first state based on the establishment of the setting condition 2. means, and at least an effect mode capable of suggesting to the player that the game ball is to be shot in the first direction based on the establishment of a predetermined specific execution condition in the first state. and a performance mode capable of suggesting to the player the same game suggested by the first effect for a predetermined period in the second state. A gaming machine HJ1 characterized by comprising a second effect execution means for executing a second effect composed of:

Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed, thereby providing a winning game advantageous to the player. In addition, various images such as characters and scenery are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: 2003-325886).

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of interest.

In addition, among such conventional gaming machines, by changing the game method (shooting direction of the game ball) that is advantageous for the player for each game state, it is possible to enjoy changing the game method according to the game state. There are also things that are configured so that they can be given to people.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, the game method corresponding to the game state is generally notified regardless of the game situation in each game state, so the degree of advantage may decrease depending on the situation. There is a problem that it is possible.

On the other hand, according to the game machine HJ1, a shooting means configured to shoot game balls in at least a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction, and a predetermined first a first state setting means for setting a first state in which a game ball is more likely to be shot in the first direction than in the second direction based on the establishment of a set condition; , based on the establishment of a second set condition different from the first set condition, the advantage degree when the game ball is shot in the first direction tends to be lower than the first state. second state setting means for setting the second state, and the player is instructed to shoot the game ball in the first direction based on the establishment of a predetermined specific execution condition in the first state. and a first effect executing means for executing a first effect configured to include at least an effect mode suggestible to the player; A second performance executing means for executing a second performance including at least a performance mode that can be suggested to a player.

Thus, in the second state where even if the game ball is shot in the first direction, the degree of advantage is not as high as in the first state, a novel performance is suggested to the player of the game method of shooting the game ball in the first direction. Since the aspect can be realized, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine HJ2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine HJ1, the second set condition is a condition that can be established in the first state.

According to the gaming machine HJ2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HJ1, the second set condition is a condition that can be satisfied in the first state. Even after the state is set, the same game as suggested by the first effect can be suggested. Therefore, it can be made to think that the 1st state is continuing. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine HJ1 or HJ2, in the second state, while a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, it is more advantageous to shoot the game ball in the first direction than in the second direction. The game machine HJ3 is characterized in that the second effect executing means is configured to be able to execute the second effect at least while the specific condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine HJ3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine HJ1 or HJ2, the second state is such that the game is played in the first direction rather than the second direction while a predetermined specific condition is satisfied. The second effect executing means is configured to be able to execute the second effect at least while the specific condition is satisfied. there is

As a result, in the second state in which it is basically advantageous to shoot the game ball in the second direction, a specific condition is established and it becomes advantageous to shoot the game ball in the first direction. In this case, it is possible to suggest to the player that the game ball is to be shot in the first direction by the second effect, so there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the loss of the player.

The game machine HJ4 is characterized in that, in the game machine HJ3, the specific condition is constituted by a condition that is established based on the establishment of the second setting condition.

According to the game machine HJ4, in addition to the effects of the game machine HJ3, the specific condition is a condition that is established based on the establishment of the second setting condition, so the first state is started. After that, the game method of shooting the game ball in the first direction can be continuously suggested by the first and second effects until the state shifts to the second state and the specific condition is not established. Therefore, even after the first state is terminated, the player can be made to think that the first state is in the first state until the specific condition is not established, so the first state continues longer than it actually is. There is an effect that it can make you think as if you were there.

In any one of the game machines HJ1 to HJ4, provided at a position where a game ball launched in the first direction can enter and a position where a game ball launched in the second direction is difficult to enter. A first ball entering means, a first determination means capable of executing a first determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering means, and a game ball launched in the second direction A second ball entering means provided at a position where the ball can be entered but is difficult for the game ball shot in the first direction to enter, and the game ball enters the second ball entering means. a second determination means for executing a second determination based on the above, and a player based on a predetermined specific determination result of either the first determination or the second determination. and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the second state, wherein the first state is determined by the first determination means when the game ball is shot in the second direction rather than the second state. is more likely to be executed, and the second state is determined by the first determination means when the game ball is shot in the second direction during the predetermined period more than during a period other than the predetermined period. A game machine HJ5 characterized in that it is configured in a state in which is easy to execute.

According to the game machine HJ5, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines HJ1 to HJ4, a game ball launched in the second direction at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction can enter. a first ball entering means provided at a position where it is difficult to enter a ball; a first discrimination means capable of executing a first discrimination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering means; a second ball-entering means provided at a position where the game ball launched in the second direction can enter and where the game ball launched in the first direction is difficult to enter; A second determination means for executing a second determination based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entering means, and a predetermined specific determination between the first determination and the second determination and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result, wherein the first state causes the game ball to move in the second direction more than the second state. It is configured in a state in which the determination of the first determination means is easily executed when the game ball is shot, and the second state is the predetermined period in which the game ball is moved in the second direction more than the period other than the predetermined period. It is configured in such a state that the discrimination by the first discriminating means can be easily executed when the missile is fired.

As a result, even in the second state where the degree of advantage is low, for a predetermined period of time, as in the first state, the determination by the first determination means can be easily performed. be.

<5076 Series>
<Characteristic IA group>
A game machine having variable performance execution means capable of executing a variable performance that varies a performance mode, comprising a determining means capable of determining the number of times the performance mode can be varied in the variable performance, The gaming machine IA1 is characterized in that the gaming machine has additional performance execution means capable of executing an additional performance for varying the performance mode in a specific mode.

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, an effect mode is changed by executing an operation effect a plurality of times to change the effect mode based on the operation content of an operation means (frame button 22, etc.) that a player can operate. There are some that can execute a period effect that is changed in stages. Then, a gaming machine has been proposed in which, as a result of the effect of the period effect, a privilege advantageous to the player is given when the effect mode is changed to a specific stage (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-233171. ). However, in conventional gaming machines, only the effect result of the period effect is determined in advance, and the effect result of each operation effect is not predetermined. is not used, the performance mode is changed up to the stage corresponding to the performance result of the period performance, and the performance result of the period performance is deteriorated. Also, the performance result of each operation performance is determined in advance, and regardless of the operation contents of the operation means during each operation performance, when each operation performance is completed, the stage corresponding to the predetermined performance result is reached. A gaming machine configured to change the mode of presentation has also been proposed. However, in such a game machine, regardless of the operation content of the operation means during the operation effect, the effect result determined in advance is displayed as the effect result of the operation effect, so the player tries to operate the operation means. There was a problem that the desire to do so would decrease. Furthermore, since a predetermined effect result is always displayed for each operation effect, in order to execute the period effect in a variety of effect modes, it is necessary to change the effect result of each operation effect. effect data must be prepared in advance, and there is a problem that the amount of effect data for executing the period effect increases. This is done to solve the problems exemplified above, and each operation effect is executed with a different effect result according to the operation content of the operation means in each operation effect executed in the period effect. To provide a game machine capable of enhancing the player's desire to operate an operation means during an operation presentation and improving the interest in a game by constructing the game machine. In addition, by making it possible to execute a period performance with a richer variety than the types of the performance mode of the period performance determined in advance, the performance effect of the period performance is enhanced, thereby further enhancing the player's interest in the game. The purpose is to provide a gaming machine that

According to the game machine IA1, even after the variable performance is executed for the determined number of times, the additional performance for varying the performance mode in a specific mode is executed, so that the performance is varied beyond the set number of times. Thus, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine IA1, acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and determination means capable of executing determination based on the information stored in the storage means dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a result of determination by the determination means on a display means; a privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege advantageous to the player when displayed; The gaming machine IA2 is characterized in that the performance mode can be changed to a predetermined notification mode when the determination means determines the specific determination result.

According to the gaming machine IA2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine IA1, the effect mode is changed to the notification mode, so that the player can recognize in advance that a specific determination result will be obtained, so that the effect can be changed. There is an effect that it can make people interested.

The game machine IA1 or IA2 has operation means that can be operated by a player, and the performance mode can be varied based on the operation of the operation means. Characterized game machine IA3.

According to the game machine IA3, in addition to the effects of the game machine IA1 or IA2, the contents to be notified can be varied depending on the timing of the player's operation, so that the player's operation makes it seem as if the contents to be notified are variable. has the effect of being able to

In any one of the game machines IA1 to IA3, the variation of the effect mode is executed in a plurality of stages, and the additional effect executing means performs the determined operation after the variable of the effect for the number of times is completed. A game machine IA4 characterized in that the additional effect is executed based on the number of times the game is played and information on the variable timing of the plurality of stages.

According to the game machine IA4, in any one of the game machines IA1 to IA3, the additional effect is executed based on the number of times and the information on the variable timing of a plurality of stages. There is an effect that the performance can be executed.

<Characteristic IB group>
An effect executing means capable of executing an effect, an effect type determining means capable of determining the type of the effect to be executed by the effect executing means, and a different type of the effect based on the satisfaction of a transition condition. A game machine having a performance type transition means capable of transitioning, a state setting means capable of setting a first state and a second state in which the transition condition is less likely to be established than in the first state. 3, the gaming machine is characterized in that, in the state where the second state is set, the transition condition can be established when a granting condition for granting a privilege advantageous to the player is established. Gaming machine IB1.

Conventionally, a game machine such as a pachinko machine is configured so that a plurality of performance stages are switched, and a performance mode of a variable performance for showing the result of a jackpot lottery is determined corresponding to the set performance stage. Therefore, a gaming machine has been proposed that can suppress monotonous variation effects (prior art document: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-233171). In addition, the game machine is configured so that the performance stage is automatically switched when the transition condition of the performance stage is satisfied by executing the jackpot lottery for a predetermined number of times, and the player is prevented from becoming bored with the game early. is also proposed. However, in a conventional game machine that automatically switches the production stage, the production stage is switched regardless of the player's intention. There is a problem that the player's motivation to play is remarkably lowered when the game is switched to the stage. In addition, when the player is configured to be able to arbitrarily set the production stages, there will be players who play the game only in a specific production stage without experiencing all the production stages. However, there has been a problem that a situation occurs in which the player cannot sufficiently provide the effect content that the player has in advance. This is done in order to solve the problems exemplified above, and even if the production stage is fixed, it should be possible to switch to another production stage so that the player's desire to play does not decrease. To improve a player's interest in a game by providing the player with various performances while suppressing the player's desire to play.

According to the gaming machine IB1, the ease with which the transition condition is satisfied can be varied by the state setting means, and when the transition condition is satisfied in a state in which the second state in which the transition condition is unlikely to be satisfied is set, Since a privilege is provided, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game.

In the gaming machine IB1, it is possible to distinguish between an acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of information acquired by the acquisition means, and the information stored in the storage means. discrimination means, benefit giving means capable of granting a benefit that is advantageous to the player when the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result, and transition condition setting means for setting the transition condition. and the transition condition setting means can set at least a first transition condition that is satisfied when the number of times of the determination performed by the determination means reaches a specific number of times, and stored in the storage means It has a subsequent performance executing means capable of executing a transition suggesting performance for indicating that the first transition condition can be satisfied before the first transition condition is satisfied based on the stored information. A gaming machine IB2 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine IB2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine IB1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the transition suggesting effect can be executed before the first transition condition is satisfied, there is an effect that the player can easily predict the timing when the transition condition is satisfied.

A gaming machine IB1 or IB2, characterized in that it has operation means operable by the player, and the state setting means can set the second state based on the operation of the operation means. Machine IB3.

According to the gaming machine IB3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine IB1 or IB2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the player can set the second state at any timing, the player is allowed to select and execute a game in which it is possible to confirm whether or not the transition condition is satisfied in the state in which the second state is set. There is an effect that it can be made easier.

In the gaming machine IB3, when the second state is set while the transition suggesting effect is being executed, the result of the determination by the determining means satisfying the first transition condition is the specific The gaming machine IB4 is characterized in that the first transition condition is satisfied when the determination result is obtained, and the first transition condition is not satisfied when the determination result is not the specific determination result.

According to the gaming machine IB4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine IB3, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the second state is set while the transition suggestive effect is being executed, the first transition condition is established and the effect is produced only when the determination result of the target determining means is a specific determination result. can be of different types. That is, even when the second state is set, the transition suggesting effect can be executed as it is, so there is an effect that the processing load for controlling the effect to be executed can be reduced.

<Characteristic IC group>
acquisition means capable of acquiring information; storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means; determination means capable of determining the information stored in the storage means; display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a determination result; and privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game when identification information for indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means. and a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect for indicating predetermined game information, wherein the specific effect is executed when the specific condition is satisfied. The game machine IC1 is characterized in that it is easier to execute than when is not established.

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a winning lottery of the game is executed, and a winning game is played based on the fact that the lottery result is winning. is executed. The execution rights for executing the winning lottery of the game can be reserved and stored up to a predetermined number as the upper limit, and the execution rights that can be won are included in the execution rights that are reserved and stored during the winning game. A gaming machine has been proposed that can perform a continuous winning effect that notifies the player of the next winning in advance by using the winning game effect that is executed during the winning game (prior art document: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).

In such a conventional type game machine, when the execution right to win a winning prize is reserved and stored during a winning game, if the continuous winning performance is executed with a high probability, the continuous winning performance is performed during the winning game. is not executed, there is a high possibility that the reserved execution rights do not include execution rights that can be won. As in the above example, there is a problem that the player's willingness to play is lowered due to the fact that the ease with which the effects are executed is always the same. To provide a game machine capable of improving a player's interest in a game.

According to the game machine IC1, since the specific effect is easily executed when the specific condition is established, the frequency of informing the game information to the player can be changed, and the effect of improving the interest of the game is obtained. .

The gaming machine IC1 has preliminary determination means capable of executing preliminary determination based on information stored in the storage means before the determination by the determination means is executed, and the specific effect execution means is The specific performance can be executed when the preliminary determination means determines that the information determined as the specific determination result is stored, and the specific condition is that the specific performance is executed. The game machine IC2 is characterized in that it is established by

According to the game machine IC2, in addition to the effects of the game machine IC1, the specific condition is satisfied by executing the specific effect, so that once the specific effect is executed, the specific effect continues thereafter. There is an effect that it is possible to easily execute the specific performance, and the player can enjoy the continuous performance of the specific performance.

A game machine IC3 characterized in that, in the game machine IC1 or IC2, the period during which the privilege game is executed can be set based on the result of the determination using the information that triggered the execution of the specific effect. .

According to the game machine IC3, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1 or C2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since it is possible to set the execution period of the privilege game whose execution is notified in advance by the specific performance, when the specific performance is once executed, the specific performance can be easily executed continuously. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to motivate the player to play the game so as to continuously execute the specific performance.

In any one of the game machines IC1 to IC3, a privilege performance executing means capable of executing a privilege performance for indicating the contents of the privilege game being executed by using the period during which the privilege game is being executed, and executing the privilege performance. a performance mode determination means capable of determining a performance mode of the privilege performance to be executed by means, wherein the performance mode determination means determines, when the specific performance is continuously executed, the previously executed The game machine IC4 is characterized in that it is possible to determine a performance mode that takes over the contents of the privilege game.

According to the gaming machine IC4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines IC1 to IC3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the specific performance is continuously executed, the content of the privilege performance can be determined across a plurality of privilege games, so let the player continuously execute the specific performance. There is an effect that the game can be played more motivatedly.

In the gaming machine IC4, the privilege game executing means selects, as the privilege game, a first privilege game or a second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game. A game can be executed, and the content of the privilege performance executed by the privilege performance executing means is more advantageous to the player than the content of the privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the second privilege game. A game machine IC5 characterized by having a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect when the condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine IC5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine IC4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when specific effects are successively executed and the content of the privilege effect obtained by accumulating the contents of a plurality of privilege games becomes more advantageous to the player than the content of the second privilege game of one time, a special effect is obtained. Since the performance is executed, there is an effect that the game can be motivated to perform the game in order to execute the special performance.

<Feature ID group>
A specific area into which a game ball can enter, a privilege granting means capable of imparting a privilege based on the fact that the game ball has entered the specified area, and a game ball capable of entering the specified area. In a gaming machine having a notification execution means capable of executing guidance notification for shooting a game ball into an area, the gaming machine starts an effect to be executed next after the guidance notification is executed. A gaming machine ID1 characterized in that it is possible to vary the period until the game is played.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and symbols for informing the result of the lottery are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time. After that, the symbols are stop-displayed in a manner indicating the result of the lottery, and when the result of the lottery indicating the failure is notified, the variable display of the symbols for indicating the result of the next lottery is started. When the result of the lottery is a win, after a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed, the game state is changed to a game state advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A configuration capable of achieving this has been proposed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766). However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games. It is intended to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and to provide a gaming machine that further enhances the interest of the game.

According to the game machine ID 1, since the period from the execution of the guidance notification to the start of the next performance can be varied, the guidance notification can be executed in an optimum period, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. There is an effect that it can be improved.

In gaming machine ID 1, the next effect is a effect for indicating that a game ball has entered the specific area when the game ball has entered the specific area, and a first period has elapsed since the guidance notification was executed. Until now, the game machine ID2 is characterized in that the execution of the next effect is restricted even when a game ball enters the specific area.

According to the gaming machine ID2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ID1, even if the game ball enters the specific area immediately after the guidance notification is executed, the guidance notification ends during the first period. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the end of the guidance notification without the player being able to grasp the contents of the guidance notification.

In the gaming machine ID2, when the first period has passed since the guidance notification was executed, the guidance notification is terminated based on the game ball entering the specific area. Gaming machine ID3.

According to the gaming machine ID3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ID2, when the first period elapses, the guidance notification ends based on the game ball entering the specific area, so that the player can On the other hand, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress execution of guidance information for an unnecessarily long period.

The gaming machine ID2 or ID3 is characterized by having specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect using a remaining period from when the game ball enters the specific area until the first period elapses. Gaming machine ID 4.

According to the gaming machine ID4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ID2 or ID3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the player can be motivated to enter the game ball into the specific area in order to execute the specific effect, the player's interest in the game can be improved. be.

<Characteristic IE group>
discrimination means capable of executing discrimination; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means on a display means; and dynamic display by the dynamic display means dynamic display period group storage means for pre-storing a plurality of dynamic display period groups in which different dynamic display periods are defined in advance as dynamic display periods of the identification information to be displayed; and the dynamic display period groups. dynamic display period group determination means capable of determining one dynamic display period group from among the dynamic display period groups stored in the storage means; and dynamic display period determination means capable of determining the dynamic display period of the identification information using the dynamic display period group, wherein the dynamic display period group determination means is determined by the determination means When a transition condition is satisfied based on the information about the executed determination, the dynamic display period group different from the currently determined dynamic display period group can be determined, and the dynamic display period group is defined in advance as information indicating the dynamic display period group of the transition destination.

Conventionally, the number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed per unit time is determined by determining different variation patterns (variation times) based on the set game state and the result of the special symbol lottery. to be varied according to the game state, and ambitiously aiming to set a game state in which the number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed per unit time increases for the player. A gaming machine has been proposed in which a game is played at a time, and a different variation pattern (variation time) is determined based on the number of special symbol variations executed after the end of the jackpot game. There is a gaming machine that is configured to allow a player who is playing a game for a long time in the same game state to play a game without getting bored (prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). . Specifically, when the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game, every time the special symbol variation is executed 100 times, the variation pattern table referred to when determining the variation pattern is switched. There is a configuration in which a variation pattern (variation time) can be set. According to the conventional gaming machine configured in this way, even if the same game state continues for a long time, it is possible to set a completely different variation pattern according to the number of executions of the special symbol variation. , It was possible to suppress the player from getting bored with the game, but as a regulation content (variation pattern selection scenario) for switching the variation pattern table according to the number of times the special symbol variation is executed, a huge amount of It is necessary to define data corresponding to the number of special symbol fluctuations, and there is a risk of increasing the processing load of the gaming machine. Also, if the number of executions of the special symbol variation and the variation pattern table to be referred to are completely associated, the player will easily predict which variation pattern is likely to be selected at what timing. , It is desirable to diversify the combination of the number of executions of the special symbol variation and the variation pattern table to be referred to, and to make it difficult for the player to predict which variation pattern is likely to be selected at what timing. When such a configuration is used, there is a risk that the contents of the variation pattern selection scenario will become more diversified and that the processing load of the gaming machine will increase. This is done to solve the above-mentioned problems, etc., and it is possible to determine a variation pattern by referring to a different variation pattern table based on the number of times the special symbol variation is executed without increasing the processing load of the gaming machine. To provide a game machine capable of improving a player's interest in a game by

According to the gaming machine IE1, when the transition condition is established based on the determination executed in a state in which one dynamic display period group is determined by the dynamic display period group determination, the predefined dynamic Since it is possible to shift to the display period group, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load of the gaming machine.

In the gaming machine IE1, for at least two dynamic display period groups among the dynamic display period groups stored in the dynamic display period group storage means, the transition destination dynamic display period group A game machine IE2 characterized in that information indicating the same dynamic display period group as is defined in advance.

According to the gaming machine IE2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine IE1, the following effects are achieved. That is, even in a state in which different dynamic display period groups have been determined, if the transition condition is satisfied, the transition can be made to the same dynamic display period group. It becomes possible to switch between period groups. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine IE1 or IE2, at least one of the dynamic display period groups stored in the dynamic display period group storage means has a plurality of transition conditions. A game machine IE3.

According to the game machine IE3, in addition to the effects of the game machine IE1 or IE2, the following effects are achieved. That is, by providing a plurality of transition conditions for the dynamic display period group, it becomes possible to switch the dynamic display period group under various conditions, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. has the effect of

A game machine IE4 characterized in that, in the game machine IE3, it is possible to shift to a different dynamic display period group according to the transition condition that is established.

According to the gaming machine IE4, a transition to a different dynamic display period group is made depending on which transition condition is established, so it is possible to make the player interested in which transition condition is established. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic IF group>
discrimination means capable of executing discrimination; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means on a display means; and dynamic display by the dynamic display means dynamic display period determination means capable of determining a dynamic display period of the identification information to be displayed; storage means capable of storing the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means; A gaming machine having privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege to a player when the identification information indicating the result of the specific determination is stopped and displayed, based on the result of the determination by the determination means. and a secondary active display different from the active display period based on the result of determination by the determination means. and a secondary dynamic display period determination means capable of determining a period, wherein the dynamic display period determination means is a total dynamic display period obtained by adding the primary display period and the secondary dynamic display period. can be determined as the dynamic display period, and when the total dynamic display period is shorter than the first period, the gaming machine stores information indicating the total dynamic display period to the storage means. and, when the period is equal to or longer than the first period, post-process information obtained by executing special processing on the information indicating the total dynamic display period is stored in the storage means. Machine IF1.

Conventionally, the number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed per unit time is determined by determining different variation patterns (variation times) based on the set game state and the result of the special symbol lottery. to be varied according to the game state, and ambitiously aiming to set a game state in which the number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed per unit time increases for the player. A gaming machine has been proposed in which a game is played at a time, and a different variation pattern (variation time) is determined based on the number of special symbol variations executed after the end of the jackpot game. There is a gaming machine that is configured to allow a player who is playing a game for a long time in the same game state to play a game without getting bored (prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). . In such a conventional gaming machine, in order to determine various variation patterns (variation times), it is possible to determine a plurality of information related to variation times, and the variation times included in the plurality of determined information are summed up. There is a gaming machine configured to determine a variation pattern by In such a gaming machine, various variation patterns can be determined by combining a plurality of variation times, and it is possible for the player to play a game without getting bored. If long fluctuation times are determined for each of the plurality of fluctuation times, the long fluctuation pattern will be decided as the fluctuation pattern after the summation. It is necessary to secure a large data area so as to store information about the fluctuation time corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, and there is a problem that the data area of the gaming machine is compressed. It is intended to solve the above-mentioned problems, etc., and to provide a game machine capable of suppressing pressure on the data area of the game machine.

According to the game machine IF1, when the length of the dynamic display period after the addition is equal to or longer than the first period, a special process is performed on the information indicating the length of the dynamic display period. Since the post information can be stored in the storage means, it is possible to simplify the information to be stored in the storage means even when the length of the first period or longer is determined as the dynamic display period. becomes. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the data area of the gaming machine is compressed.

The gaming machine IF1 has second storage means capable of storing excess information indicating that the total dynamic display period exceeds the first period, and the dynamic display means When the period exceeds the first period, the identification information is dynamically updated based on the processing information stored in the storage means and the excess information stored in the second storage means. A game machine IF2 characterized by being able to display.

According to the gaming machine IF2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine IF1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the identification information can be dynamically displayed based on the excess information indicating that the total dynamic display period exceeds the first period and the processing information, the dynamic display period determination means determines There is an effect that the identification information can be reliably dynamically displayed corresponding to the dynamic display period.

The gaming machine IF3, wherein the special processing in the gaming machine IF1 or IF2 is to calculate a subtraction value obtained by subtracting the first period from the total dynamic display period.

According to the gaming machine IF3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine IF1 or IF2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the subtracted value obtained by subtracting the first period from the total dynamic display period is stored in the storage means, it is possible to prevent information indicating a period longer than the first period from being stored in the storage means. It has the effect of being able to

In gaming machine IF3, the gaming machine is configured such that an upper limit of a period that can be calculated as the total dynamic display period does not exceed twice the first period. IF4.

According to the game machine IF4, in addition to the effects of the game machine IF3, the following effects are produced. That is, since the total dynamic display period is shorter than the period obtained by doubling the first period, only the excess information indicating that the total dynamic display period exceeds the first period is stored in the second storage means. , there is an effect that the total dynamic display period can be accurately reproduced.

A gaming machine IF5 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines IF1 to IF4, the active display period determined by the active display period determining means is shorter than the first period.

According to the gaming machine IF5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines IF1 to IF4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, only the active display period is set, and a dynamic display period longer than the first period is not set. Therefore, there is an effect that the frequency with which special processing is executed can be suppressed.

<Characteristic IG group>
Storage means capable of storing determination information up to a predetermined number, determination means capable of performing determination based on the determination information stored in the storage means when a predetermined determination condition is satisfied, and the determination means. a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the result of the discrimination by is a specific discrimination result; A discrimination information display means capable of displaying the first pattern on the display means in a predetermined dynamic manner, an effect executing means capable of executing an effect, and a type of the effect executed by the effect executing means being capable of deciding. A game having performance type determining means and said performance type shifting means capable of shifting the type of said performance executed by said performance executing means to a different type based on establishment of a transition condition. In the machine, the determination information number notifying means, when the transition condition is satisfied in a state in which the first symbol is displayed in the specific dynamic display mode, displays a special motion different from the specific dynamic display mode. A game machine IG1, characterized in that the first symbol can be displayed in a positive manner.

Conventionally, game machines such as pachinko machines can acquire lottery information based on the entry of a game ball into a starting hole provided on the game board, and can store the acquired lottery information up to a predetermined number. A lottery is drawn based on the stored lottery information to determine whether a game is successful or not, and after symbols for informing the result of the lottery are variably displayed for a predetermined period, the symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating the result of the lottery, and the lottery is performed. A configuration has been proposed in which if the result is a hit, a privilege game is executed that is advantageous to the player. Further, there has been proposed a configuration capable of displaying reserved symbols for informing the player of the number of stored lottery information (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766). In the above-described conventional type gaming machine, the display mode of reserved symbols for informing the player of the number of stored lottery information is monotonous, and there is a problem that the presentation effect cannot be enhanced. It is intended to solve the problems exemplified above, and to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the performance effect using reserved symbols.

According to the gaming machine IG1, the dynamic mode of the first symbol after the transition condition is satisfied can be changed according to the timing of establishment of the transition condition and the display timing of the dynamic mode of the first symbol. There is an effect that the production effect of production using the dynamic mode of the first pattern can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine IG1, a pre-determination means capable of pre-determining the determination information stored in the storage means before the determination information is used for the determination by the determination means; and a dynamic mode determination means capable of determining the dynamic mode of the first symbol based on the result of the prior determination, wherein the dynamic mode determination means determines the specific determination by the prior determination means. A case where it is determined that the determination information that results in the result is stored is more likely than a case where the prior determination means determines that the determination information that results in the specific determination result is not stored. a first dynamic mode that is easy to move can be determined, and the gaming machine, when the transition condition is established in a state where the first symbol is displayed in the first dynamic mode, the special dynamic mode A game machine IG2 characterized in that the first symbol can be displayed at .

According to the gaming machine IG2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine IG1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first symbol is displayed in the special dynamic mode, it is possible to increase the possibility that the privilege game will be executed. You can play games. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be more interested in the timing at which the transition condition is satisfied.

In the gaming machine IG2, the first dynamic mode includes at least a first period during which the first symbol is dynamically displayed in one display mode and a period after the first period, wherein the and a second period in which the display mode is changed to another display mode different from the first display mode. The first pattern can be dynamically displayed in different dynamic modes depending on whether the transition condition is satisfied during the first period or when the transition condition is satisfied during the second period. The game machine IG3.

According to the gaming machine IG3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine IG2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the dynamic mode after the transition condition is satisfied can be changed according to the progress of the period during which the first symbol is dynamically displayed in the first dynamic mode, the timing at which the transition condition is satisfied. , there is an effect that it is possible to make the player more interested.

In the gaming machine IG3, the second period is set to be shorter than the first period, and the dynamic mode determination means determines that the transition condition is satisfied in the second period more than in the first period. The case where the transition condition is satisfied is the case where it is determined that the determination information that becomes the specific determination result is stored as the dynamic mode of the first symbol by the prior determination means. However, it is easier to determine a special first dynamic mode that is easier to determine than when it is determined by the prior determination means that the determination information that becomes the specific determination result is not stored. Machine IG4.

According to the gaming machine IG4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine IG3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the transition condition is satisfied during the second period, which is a short period, the special first dynamic mode is likely to be determined, so that the player is more interested in the timing when the transition condition is satisfied. has the effect of being able to

<Characteristic IH group>
discrimination means capable of performing discrimination; display means for displaying an identification pattern composed of a plurality of pattern rows for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means; and after dynamically displaying the identification pattern on the display means, display control means for stop-displaying the identification pattern in a display mode for indicating the discrimination result; wherein the identification pattern is formed by combining a first pattern and a second pattern different from the first pattern. The game machine IH1 is characterized in that the display control means can execute first display control for the first symbol and first display control for the second symbol differently.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and symbols for informing the result of the lottery are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time. After that, the symbols are stop-displayed in a manner indicating the result of the lottery, and when the result of the lottery indicating the failure is notified, the variable display of the symbols for indicating the result of the next lottery is started. When the result of the lottery is a win, after a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed, the game state is changed to a game state advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A configuration capable of achieving this has been proposed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766). However, the conventional gaming machine has a problem that the patterns displayed are monotonous and the player quickly becomes bored with the game. This is done to solve the above-mentioned problems, etc., and by enabling the display of patterns in various modes, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early, and to improve the player's interest in the game. To provide a gaming machine with improved interest.

According to the gaming machine IH1, it is possible to display the determination result of the determining means using the identification pattern formed by combining the first pattern and the second pattern. Since separate display control can be executed for the symbols, the identification symbols displayed on the display means can be displayed in a variety of display modes, thereby preventing the player from quickly becoming bored with the game. There is an effect that it can be suppressed and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine IH1, the display control means can dynamically display the second pattern by the second display control with a delay from the timing at which the first pattern is dynamically displayed by the first display control. A gaming machine IH2 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine IH2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine IH1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, of the first pattern and the second pattern forming the identification pattern, the timing at which the second pattern is dynamically displayed can be delayed. can make people pay attention. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine IH1 or IH2, the display control means is capable of executing normal first display control and specific first display control as the first display control, and normal second display control as the second display control. Display control and specific second display control can be executed, and at least when the normal first display control is executed, the gaming machine performs the normal second display control as the second display control. and a specific display in which the specific second display control is executed.

According to the game machine IH3, in addition to the effects of the game machine IH1 or IH2, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the normal first display control is performed for the first symbol, the normal display for performing the normal second display control for the second symbol and the specific display for performing the specific second display control are performed. Since it is executable, by combining the dynamic display of the first pattern and the dynamic display of the second pattern, the dynamic display of the identification pattern rich in variation can be executed, and the performance effect is enhanced. It has the effect of being able to

In any one of the game machines IH1 to IH3, the display control means can notify the determination result of the determination means only by the first symbol without using the second symbol when a specific condition is established. A gaming machine IH4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine IH4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines IH1 to IH3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the specific condition is satisfied, the discrimination result of the discrimination means can be notified only by the first pattern, so that there is an effect that an unexpected performance can be provided to the player.

<Characteristic group II>
Determining means capable of executing determination, display means capable of displaying identification information based on the determination result of the determining means, and giving a benefit advantageous to the player when the determination result is a specific determination result. and a privilege granting means capable of arranging an identification pattern in a visible state in an area where the identification information can be displayed during the period in which the identification information is displayed. and dynamic display pattern determination means capable of determining a dynamic display pattern of the identification pattern, wherein the dynamic display pattern determination means determines the dynamic display pattern during the period in which the identification information is displayed. It is possible to determine a dynamic display pattern capable of regulating a specific positional relationship between the identification information and the arranged identification pattern by the timing of dynamically displaying the identification pattern. A gaming machine II1 characterized by:

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and symbols for informing the result of the lottery are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time. After that, the symbols are stop-displayed in a manner indicating the result of the lottery, and when the result of the lottery indicating the failure is notified, the variable display of the symbols for indicating the result of the next lottery is started. When the result of the lottery is a win, after a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed, the game state is changed to a game state advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A configuration capable of achieving this has been proposed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766). However, the conventional gaming machine has a problem that the patterns displayed are monotonous and the player quickly becomes bored with the game. This is done to solve the above-mentioned problems, etc., and by enabling the display of patterns in various modes, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early, and to improve the player's interest in the game. To provide a gaming machine with improved interest.

According to the game machine II1, it is determined by the dynamic display start timing of the identification pattern, and the dynamic display pattern is determined according to the timing, thereby regulating the specific positional relationship. Inconvenient positional relationships can be suppressed, and the dynamic display timing of identification symbols can be flexibly determined, so that there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be further improved.

In gaming machine II1, the dynamic display pattern determining means is capable of determining a dynamic display pattern for dynamically displaying a plurality of identification symbols. II2.

According to the game machine II2, in addition to the effects of the game machine II1, it is possible to dynamically display a plurality of identification symbols by the dynamic display pattern, so the control load for dynamically displaying the identification symbols can be reduced. There is an effect that it can be reduced.

In the game machine II1 or II2, an allowable period for determining the timing of starting dynamic display of the identification pattern is set in advance among the periods in which the identification information is displayed. II3.

According to the gaming machine II3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine II1 or II2, the period during which the identification information is displayed is extended by limiting the timing of dynamically displaying the identification symbols in the period during which the identification information is displayed. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the identification pattern is not arranged at the predetermined position even after the completion.

<Characteristic IJ group>
In a game machine having a determination means capable of performing determination and a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means on a display means, the identification information is a special pattern setting means configured by combining a plurality of identification patterns, and capable of setting a special pattern different from the identification pattern to be arranged at a predetermined position based on establishment of a specific condition; , in a first period, a first effect based on the determination result is executed by stopping and displaying the plurality of identification symbols in a specific combination, and in a second period different from the first period, the special a performance executing means capable of executing a second performance based on the determination result by arranging the special symbols in a specific combination mode including at least the symbols. .

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and symbols for informing the result of the lottery are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time. After that, the symbols are stop-displayed in a manner indicating the result of the lottery, and when the result of the lottery indicating the failure is notified, the variable display of the symbols for indicating the result of the next lottery is started. When the result of the lottery is a win, after a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed, the game state is changed to a game state advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A configuration capable of achieving this has been proposed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766). However, the conventional gaming machine has a problem that the patterns displayed are monotonous and the player quickly becomes bored with the game. This is done to solve the above-mentioned problems, etc., and by enabling the display of patterns in various modes, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early, and to improve the player's interest in the game. To provide a gaming machine with improved interest.

According to the gaming machine IJ1, it is possible to switch and set a period for executing an effect based on the determination result with only the identification pattern and a period for executing the effect based on the determination result with a combination including the special symbol. There is an effect that the player can change the expectations for the discrimination result between the performance and the second performance, suppress the problem that the game becomes monotonous, and improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine IJ1, when a first condition is satisfied, a valid line is formed on which a combination including the special symbol is formed, and when a second condition is satisfied, a combination including the special symbol is formed. The gaming machine IJ2 is characterized in that the activated line is different from the activated line.

According to the gaming machine IJ2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine IJ1, the effect is varied depending on the conditions under which the activated line is established. There is an effect that interest can be improved more.

The game machine IJ1 or IJ2 has a variable means capable of changing the identification pattern, which is not combined with the special pattern, to a state more difficult to see than the normal state during the period in which the special pattern is arranged. A gaming machine IJ3 characterized by:

According to the game machine IJ3, in addition to the effect of the game machine IJ1 or IJ2, the identification patterns that are not combined with the special patterns are changed to be difficult to see, so that the player can easily determine the combination of the special patterns. There is

<Feature IK group>
In a game machine having a determination means capable of performing determination and a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means on a display means, the identification information is dynamically displayed. first driving means capable of driving on the front side of the display means during a period in which the first driving means can be driven; identification means for identifying a predetermined position of the first driving means; and a drive pattern means capable of driving with the drive pattern of, the drive pattern means executes based on the fact that the predetermined position is not identified at a predetermined timing when the drive pattern is driven. A gaming machine IK1 characterized in that part of the driving patterns is not executed.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and symbols for informing the result of the lottery are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time. After that, the symbols are stop-displayed in a manner indicating the result of the lottery, and when the result of the lottery indicating the failure is notified, the variable display of the symbols for indicating the result of the next lottery is started. When the result of the lottery is a win, after a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed, the game state is changed to a game state advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A configuration capable of achieving this has been proposed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766). However, the conventional gaming machine has a problem that the patterns displayed are monotonous and the player quickly becomes bored with the game. This is done to solve the above-mentioned problems, etc., and by enabling the display of patterns in various modes, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early, and to improve the player's interest in the game. To provide a gaming machine with improved interest.

According to the gaming machine IK1, when the first drive means is driven by the drive pattern, if the predetermined position cannot be identified, part of the drive pattern is not driven so that the first drive means There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem of contacting other structures and the like and being damaged.

In the gaming machine IK1, the first drive means has a rotatable rotating means, and the identification means can identify the origin position of the rotating means as the predetermined position. A gaming machine IK2 characterized by:

According to the game machine IK2, when the origin position of the rotating means cannot be identified, part of the drive pattern is not executed, so that the rotating means cannot stop rotating at the regular position, and the first driving means is operated. It has the effect of suppressing the problem that the used performance is not properly transmitted to the player.

In the game machine IK2, the game machine IK3 is characterized in that character information indicating that the origin position is a regular position is attached to the front side of the rotating means.

According to the gaming machine IK3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine IK2, the addition of character information allows the player to easily identify the character information when placed at the origin position. There is

<Characteristic IL group>
In a game machine having an operation means operable by a player and a variable performance execution means capable of executing a variable performance for varying a performance mode based on the operation of the operation means, the above operation of 1 is provided. The game machine IL1 is characterized in that the performance mode changed by the variable performance based on the variable performance can notify that a privilege advantageous to two or more different players is given.

Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, an effect mode is changed by executing an operation effect a plurality of times to change the effect mode based on the operation content of an operation means (frame button 22, etc.) that a player can operate. There are some that can execute a period effect that is changed in stages. Then, a gaming machine has been proposed in which, as a result of the effect of the period effect, a privilege advantageous to the player is given when the effect mode is changed to a specific stage (Prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-233171. ). However, in conventional gaming machines, only the effect result of the period effect is determined in advance, and the effect result of each operation effect is not predetermined. is not used, the performance mode is changed up to the stage corresponding to the performance result of the period performance, and the performance result of the period performance is deteriorated. It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine which enhances the player's desire to operate the operating means during presentation and enhances the player's interest in the game.

According to the gaming machine IL1, a privilege that is advantageous to two or more players can be notified based on one operation, so that it is possible to increase the privilege by operating the operating means, and enjoy the game. has the effect of being able to improve

In the gaming machine IL1, acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and discrimination means capable of performing discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a result of determination by the determination means on a display means; a privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege advantageous to the player when displayed; The gaming machine IL2 is characterized in that the performance mode can be changed to a predetermined notification mode when the determining means determines that the specific determination result is obtained.

According to the gaming machine IL2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine IL1, by changing the presentation mode to the notification mode, the player can recognize in advance that a specific determination result will be obtained. There is an effect that it can make people interested.

In either the game machine IL1 or IL2, the variation of the effect mode is executed in a plurality of stages, and after the variation of the effect in the above-mentioned number of times is completed, based on the information in the variable timing of the multiple stages A game machine IL3 is characterized in that it is configured to be able to add an additional performance.

According to the game machine IL3, in any one of the game machines IL1 to IL3, the additional effect is executed based on the information on the variable timing in a plurality of stages, so the effect corresponding to the variable effect mode can be executed. has the effect of

<Characteristic IM group>
discrimination means capable of executing discrimination; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means on display means; and a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege to a player when the identification information indicating the result is stopped and displayed. When a specific condition is satisfied based on: 1 information value determining means, second information value determining means capable of determining a second information value necessary for game control, and the first information value and the second information value and special processing execution means capable of executing special processing in the game machine IM1.

Conventionally, the number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed per unit time is determined by determining different variation patterns (variation times) based on the set game state and the result of the special symbol lottery. to be varied according to the game state, and ambitiously aiming to set a game state in which the number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed per unit time increases for the player. A gaming machine has been proposed in which a game is played at a time, and a different variation pattern (variation time) is determined based on the number of special symbol variations executed after the end of the jackpot game. There is a gaming machine that is configured to allow a player who is playing a game for a long time in the same game state to play a game without getting bored (prior art document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). . In such a conventional gaming machine, in order to determine various variation patterns (variation times), it is possible to determine a plurality of information related to variation times, and the variation times included in the plurality of determined information are summed up. There is a gaming machine configured to determine a variation pattern by In such a gaming machine, various variation patterns can be determined by combining a plurality of variation times, and it is possible for the player to play a game without getting bored. If long fluctuation times are determined for each of the plurality of fluctuation times, the long fluctuation pattern will be decided as the fluctuation pattern after the summation. It is necessary to secure a large data area so as to store information about the fluctuation time corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, and there is a problem that the data area of the gaming machine is compressed. It is intended to solve the problems exemplified above, etc., and to provide a game machine that can reduce the control load even when executing control based on information values that are flexibly determined. and

According to the gaming machine IM1, the special processing is executed when the specific condition is satisfied based on the first information value and the second information value, thereby reducing the frequency of execution of the special processing. There is an effect that the control load can be reduced.

In the game machine IM1, the specific condition is established when the sum of the first information value and the second information value is equal to or greater than a specific value.

According to the gaming machine IM2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine IM1, special processing is executed when the sum of the first information value and the second information value is equal to or greater than a specific value. There is an effect that special processing can be executed for a large number of objects.

In the gaming machine IM2, the special processing is processing for adding information indicating that the added value is equal to or greater than a specific value, and setting information indicating a value obtained by subtracting the specific value from the added value. A gaming machine IM3 characterized by:

According to the game machine IM3, in addition to the effects of the game machine IM2, information indicating that the value is equal to or greater than a specific value is given by special processing. There is an effect that the added value can be determined by the amount.

<Characteristic IN group>
storage means capable of storing information up to a predetermined number; determination means capable of performing determination based on the information stored in the storage means when a predetermined determination condition is satisfied; A privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result being a specific determination result, and an identification pattern corresponding to the number of the information stored in the storage means. in a predetermined mode on the display means, wherein the information display means changes at least one mode of the identification symbols based on predetermined lottery information. When the setting is made to display the identification pattern in the state before it is changed, it is changed again based on the predetermined lottery information. The game machine IN1 is characterized in that the identification pattern can be changed and displayed.

Conventionally, game machines such as pachinko machines can acquire lottery information based on the entry of a game ball into a starting hole provided on the game board, and can store the acquired lottery information up to a predetermined number. A lottery is drawn based on the stored lottery information to determine whether a game is successful or not, and after symbols for informing the result of the lottery are variably displayed for a predetermined period, the symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating the result of the lottery, and the lottery is performed. A configuration has been proposed in which if the result is a hit, a privilege game is executed that is advantageous to the player. Further, there has been proposed a configuration capable of displaying reserved symbols for informing the player of the number of stored lottery information (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766). In the above-described conventional type gaming machine, the display mode of reserved symbols for informing the player of the number of stored lottery information is monotonous, and there is a problem that the presentation effect cannot be enhanced. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing deterioration of the performance effect.

According to the gaming machine IN1, even if the identification pattern is displayed in the initial state due to an accident such as power failure, it is set so that it can be displayed in a variable manner again. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the decrease of

In the gaming machine IN1, the information display means initializes the changed identification symbols when the power is turned off and then the power is supplied again in a state where the identification symbols are changed and displayed. The game machine IN2 is characterized in that after displaying the identification pattern in the state, the identification pattern can be changed and displayed based on establishment of a variable condition.

According to the gaming machine IN2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine IN1, the identification symbols can be changed again after the power is restored, so that the player continues to be interested in the variable identification symbols. It has the effect of being able to hold

In the gaming machine IN1 or IN2, the identification symbols are dynamically displayed in a specific cycle, and the identification symbols that are changed and displayed are different motions from the identification symbols before being changed. The game machine IN3 is characterized by being displayed in a typical display mode.

According to the game machine IN3, in addition to the effect of the game machine IN1 or IN2, the player can easily identify the variable identification pattern from the dynamic display mode, and the effect of suppressing the problem overlooked by the player. There is

<Characteristic IO group>
A specific area into which a game ball can enter, a privilege granting means capable of imparting a privilege based on the fact that the game ball has entered the specified area, and a game ball capable of entering the specified area. In a gaming machine having a notification execution means capable of executing guidance notification for shooting a game ball to an area, the gaming machine provides an effect executed according to an execution condition established after the guidance notification is executed. A gaming machine IO1 characterized in that it is possible to delay the period until the start of IO1.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and symbols for informing the result of the lottery are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time. After that, the symbols are stop-displayed in a manner indicating the result of the lottery, and when the result of the lottery indicating the failure is notified, the variable display of the symbols for indicating the result of the next lottery is started. When the result of the lottery is a win, after a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed, the game state is changed to a game state advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A configuration capable of achieving this has been proposed (prior art document: JP-A-2012-217766). However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games. It is intended to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and to provide a gaming machine that further enhances the interest of the game.

According to the game machine IO1, since the period from the execution of the guidance notification to the start of the effect whose start has been established can be delayed, the guidance notification can be executed in an optimum period, and the enjoyment of the game. have the effect of improving

<Characteristic group of 5077 series>
<Characteristic group A> (When a specific lottery result is obtained in a disadvantageous first game state, a second game state is set in which the substantial jackpot probability is higher than the first game state without winning)
Determination means for performing determination based on establishment of determination conditions, and privilege game execution for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined specific determination result. means, first game state setting means for setting a first game state based on the establishment of a first set condition, and the privilege game based on the establishment of a second set condition in the first game state. a second game state setting means for setting a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state without intervening the game machine A1.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a winning game that is advantageous to the player is executed when the result of a lottery performed based on the entry of a game ball into a starting winning hole is a winning. . Among such gaming machines, there are some that aim to increase the player's interest in the game by setting a game state with a high degree of advantage for the player after the end of the winning game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2001-038007).

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of interest.

In addition, in such a conventional gaming machine, a plurality of game states with different degrees of advantage are provided as the game state that is set after the execution of the winning game is completed. There are also games that realize game characteristics that make one expect that a game state with a higher degree of advantage is set as the game state.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, when a game state with a relatively low degree of advantage is set, unless a winning game is executed, there is no possibility of shifting to a game state with a higher degree of advantage. There is a problem that the game becomes monotonous because the game is expected only to be executed.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, in the first game state, the second game state with a high degree of advantage is set without involving the privilege game. It is possible to realize a novel game property that can be expected even if the setting condition 2 is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

A gaming machine A2 characterized in that in the gaming machine A1, the second set condition is a condition that is established when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a first discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result. .

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, when the discrimination by the discrimination means is executed, in addition to the specific discrimination result for the player, the first discrimination result is obtained. Since it is possible to realize a novel game property that can be expected even by the players, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

The gaming machine A1 or A2 comprises display control means capable of displaying, in the second game state, a specific display capable of suggesting a game method in the second game state to the player, wherein the first game The state is a gaming state in which the rate at which the privilege game is executed is the first rate per determination by the determining means, and the second gaming state is at least the gaming method suggested by the specific display. A gaming machine A3 characterized by being in a gaming state in which the privilege game can be executed at a second rate higher than the first rate when a game is played.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1 or A2, it has a very novel game property that the privilege game is shifted from a game state in which it is relatively difficult to perform to a game state in which it is easy to perform the privilege game without intervention of the privilege game. can be realized, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine A3, the determination means includes first determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a predetermined first determination condition as the determination condition, and the first determination condition as the determination condition. and a second determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the above, and when the determination by the first determination means is performed, the first ratio A gaming machine A4 characterized in that, when the privilege game is executed in and the discrimination by the second discrimination means is executed, the privilege game is executed at a rate substantially higher than the first rate.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3, the rate at which the privilege game is executed differs depending on whether the determination by the first determination means is performed or the determination by the second determination means is performed. , the game can be played with a stronger expectation that the determination by the second determination means will be executed.

In the gaming machine A4, the first game state is a game state in which the second determination condition is difficult to be established, and the second game state is a game state in which a game is played in a game method suggested by the specific display. A gaming machine A5 characterized by a gaming state in which the privilege game is executed at the second ratio by a specific ratio of the established judgment conditions becoming the second judgment condition.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A4, it is possible to vary the rate at which the second determination condition is satisfied depending on the gaming state, and to vary the rate at which the privilege game is executed for each gaming state. effective.

In a gaming machine A5, a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a game ball entering the first ball entering means. a first information acquiring means capable of acquiring the first discrimination information used for discrimination of the first discriminating means based on; a second information acquiring means capable of acquiring second discrimination information used for discrimination, a first position at which a game ball can enter the second ball entering means, and a game ball entering from the first position; A second position where the ball becomes difficult, a variable means that can be changed, a passing means that allows the game ball to pass, and a specific determination means that performs a specific determination based on the passing of the game ball through the passing means. , variable game execution in which the variable means executes a variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the determination result of the specific determination means becoming a predetermined determination result. As the type of the variable game executed by means and the variable game execution means, the period during which the game ball is changed to the first position is the first period during which the game ball can be entered into the second ball entering means. One of a plurality of types including at least a first variable game to be set and a second variable game to be set in a second period in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means is determined. and a type determination means, wherein the first game state is a game state in which the second variable game cannot be determined, and the second game state is a game in which the second variable game is determined at a predetermined rate. A gaming machine A6 characterized by being in a state.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A5, whether or not the game ball can be entered into the second ball entering means depending on whether it is in the first game state or the second game state. Since the degree is variable, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine A6, the gaming machine A7 is characterized in that the first ball entering means is provided at a position where the game ball that has passed through the passing means can enter.

According to the gaming machine A7, there is an effect that the discrimination by the specific discriminating means and the discrimination by the first discriminating means can be executed almost simultaneously each time.

In the game machine A7, the second ratio is a ratio of a specific determination result in the determination by the first determination means and a predetermined determination result in the determination by the specific determination means. A variable game is determined, and the privilege game is executed by the determination of the second determining means performed based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means during the execution of the first variable game. A gaming machine A8, characterized in that it is the sum of the ratio of

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A7, in the second gaming state, similarly to the first gaming state, by shooting a game ball aiming at the first ball entering means, the first discriminating means A privilege game can be expected to be executed by the discrimination, the first variable game is executed, the game ball enters the second ball entering means, and the privilege game is executed by the discrimination of the second discrimination means. Since a special Yunoki state is formed in which the above can be expected, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further enhanced.

<Feature B group> (In the time saving state set in the first opportunity, the number of time saving times is updated at the first timing, and in the time saving state set in the second opportunity, it is updated at the second timing)
A first game state advantageous to the player is established based on establishment of either a predetermined first set condition or a second set condition different from the first set condition. update means for updating a specific counter value according to a predetermined update rule based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the first game state; and update means for the a second game state setting means for setting a second game state different from the first game state based on the fact that the specific counter value is updated to a predetermined specific value by In the first game state set by the establishment of the setting condition 1, the specific counter value can be updated by the updating means at least based on the establishment of the first update condition as the update condition. and in the first game state set with the establishment of the second setting condition as a trigger, at least based on the establishment of a second update condition different from the first update condition as the update condition The gaming machine B1 is characterized in that the specific counter value can be updated by the updating means.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a predetermined initial value is set for a predetermined counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of times of saving time) at a predetermined opportunity, and update processing is performed until the counter value reaches a specific value. (For example, Patent Document 1: JP-A-2012-217766).

However, there has been a demand for a more suitable counter value update method.

In addition, among such conventional type gaming machines, there are those configured to be able to vary the degree of advantage of the game state after the winning game is completed according to the game state when setting the execution of the winning game. also exist.

However, in such a gaming machine, when execution of the same winning game is set in the same gaming state, the same gaming state is always set as the gaming state after the winning game ends. As a game state advantageous to the game, when a plurality of states with different execution possibilities of the winning game are provided in the same game state by different end conditions, the degree of advantage other than the possibility of executing the winning game There is a problem that it becomes difficult to make a difference.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, it is possible to change the update timing of the specific counter value according to the occasion when the first game state is set, so that the specific counter value can be updated more favorably. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine B1, a determining means for performing determination based on the establishment of a determining condition, and a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the determination result of the determining means is a predetermined specific determination result. a privilege game execution means to be executed; and a type determination means for determining one of a plurality of types including at least a first privilege game as the type of the privilege game to be executed by the privilege game execution means; It is possible to differentiate the degree of advantage between when the execution of the first privilege game is set in the first game state and when the execution of the first privilege game is set in the second game state. A game machine B2 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, the degree of advantage varies depending on whether the timing at which the execution of the first privilege game is set is the first gaming state or the second gaming state. There is an effect that the game can be played by paying attention to the timing at which the first privilege game is executed.

In the gaming machine B2, in the first game state set with the establishment of the first set condition as a trigger, the first game state is set with the establishment of the second set condition as a trigger. The game machine B3 is characterized in that it is difficult to set the execution of the first privilege game in the 1 game state.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effects of the game machine B2, the first game state is set when the first set condition is met, or the second game state is set when the second set condition is met. Since the ease of execution of the first privilege game during the first game state can be varied depending on whether it is in the first game state, the degree of advantage of the first game state can be varied according to the set conditions. has the effect of

In the gaming machine B2 or B3, the first update condition is a condition that can be satisfied at a predetermined first timing after the determination condition is satisfied until a new determination condition can be satisfied. and the second update condition is satisfied at a second timing, which is a timing after the first timing, during a period from when the determination condition is satisfied until a new determination condition can be satisfied. wherein the privilege game can be set to be executed at a third timing which is a timing after the first timing and a timing before the second timing. Game machine B4 to play.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2 or B3, when the execution of the privilege game is set in the first gaming state, the specific counter value is updated at the second timing. If so, it is possible to set the execution of the privilege game before the specific counter value is updated, so it is easy to set the execution of the privilege game during the first game state, while the specific counter value is updated at the first timing. In the first game state in which the counter value is updated, the execution of the privilege game is set after the specific counter value is updated, so the execution of the privilege game is comparatively set during the first game state. It has the effect of making it harder.

In a gaming machine B4, a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position in which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a game ball to enter the ball entry means from the first position. a second position where it is difficult to enter the ball; , variable game execution means for executing a variable game that is variable from the second position to the first position; and privilege game execution setting means for setting the execution of the privilege game.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B4, when a game ball enters the ball entry means during execution of the variable game, execution of the privilege game is set, so that the ball entry means is set. There is an effect that a game can be played by paying attention to whether or not a game ball enters the ball.

In the gaming machine B5, the first timing is a timing from when the determination result of the determination means becomes the first determination result to when the variable means is varied to the first position, and The second timing is at least after the timing at which the game ball enters the ball entry means in the variable game executed based on the determination result of the determination means becoming the first determination result. A gaming machine B6 characterized by timing.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B5, when the variable game is executed with the first determination result in the first gaming state, the specific counter value is updated at the second timing. In the first game state, it is possible to set the execution of the privilege game before the specific counter value is updated. If it is the first game state in which the specific counter value is updated at the timing, the privilege game is set to be executed after the specific counter value is updated, so that the privilege game is executed during the first game state. This has the effect of making the setting relatively difficult.

A game machine B7 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines B1 to B6, the first game state is a game state with a higher degree of advantage than the second game state.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines B1 to B6, the first game state is a game state with a higher degree of advantage than the second game state, so the specific counter value is specified. This has the effect of making the player wish that the value is not updated.

<Characteristic group C> (An disadvantageous second set the game state)
a first game state setting means for setting a first game state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined set condition; a predetermined first condition after the first game state is set; Second game state setting means for setting a second game state having a lower advantage than the first game state based on the establishment of a plurality of conditions including at least a second condition different from the first condition. and a gaming machine C1 characterized by comprising:

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a winning game that is advantageous to the player is executed when the result of a lottery performed based on the entry of a game ball into a starting winning hole is a winning. . Among such gaming machines, there are some that aim to increase the player's interest in the game by setting a game state with a high degree of advantage for the player after the end of the winning game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2001-038007).

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of interest.

In addition, in such conventional gaming machines, an advantageous game state is created when one of a plurality of predetermined end conditions is satisfied under a situation in which a game state with a high degree of advantage is set. There are also those that are terminated and shift to a disadvantageous game state.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, an advantageous game state ends when one end condition out of a plurality of end conditions is satisfied, regardless of whether other conditions are satisfied. To make a player feel unreasonable by terminating an advantageous game state just by meeting the end condition 1 in spite of the fact that there is a relatively long margin until the condition is met. there is a possibility.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, since the first game state with a high degree of advantage continues until a plurality of conditions are satisfied, it is possible to realize novel game characteristics in which attention is paid to the establishment of the plurality of conditions. . Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine C1, a discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a predetermined first discrimination result. and the first condition is a condition that can be satisfied when the determination result of the determination means is a second determination result different from the first determination result. A gaming machine C2 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, it is possible to expect that the first determination result will be obtained and that the second determination result will not be obtained in the first game state. There is an effect that it is possible to play a game while paying attention to the determination result of .

In the gaming machine C2, the second condition is a condition that can be satisfied when the determination result of the determination means is a third determination result different from the first determination result and the second determination result. A gaming machine C3 characterized by:

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effects of the game machine C2, it is possible to strongly expect that the third determination result will not be obtained after the first condition is established first. To realize a novel game property capable of making the player want to avoid different discrimination results depending on the order of establishment of the conditions, since the user can strongly expect that the second discrimination result will not be obtained when the conditions are established. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the game machine C3, the first condition is a condition that is satisfied when the second determination result is obtained a predetermined first number of times after the first game state is set. The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the condition is satisfied when the second determination result is obtained a predetermined second number of times after the first game state is set.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C3, the number of times the second determination result is obtained and the number of times the third determination result are obtained can be paid attention to during the game. There is an effect that the interest in the game of the player can be further improved.

In any of the game machines C1 to C4, after the first game state is set, regardless of the order in which the plurality of conditions are satisfied, at least one of the plurality of conditions is not satisfied. The game machine C5 is characterized in that the first game state can be maintained for a certain period of time.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the game machines C1 to C4, while at least one condition is not met, the advantageous first game state is maintained regardless of the order in which the conditions are met. There is an effect that it is possible to realize novel game characteristics that make one strongly expect that all the conditions will not be satisfied.

In the gaming machine C4, when the first condition is satisfied after the first game state is set and the second condition is not satisfied, the number of times of the second determination result is the first number of times. Changing means for changing such that the second condition is satisfied when the number of times of the third determination result becomes a fourth number different from the second number of times based on the third number of times greater than A gaming machine C6 characterized by comprising:

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effects of the game machine C4, when the second determination result continues to be the second determination result even after the first condition is satisfied and the number of times of the second determination result reaches the third number of times, the second determination result is obtained. Since the number of times of the third determination result for satisfying the condition can be varied, it is important to pay attention to whether or not the number of times of the second determination result reaches the third number after the first condition is satisfied. You can play games by Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the game machine C6, the game machine C7 is characterized in that the fourth number of times is larger than the second number of times.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C6, when the number of times of the second determination result reaches the third number, the specified number of times of the third determination result required to satisfy the second condition is reached. increases, making it easier for the first game state to continue for a long time. It can be a game property that makes you expect that the determination result will be. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C7, the second game state setting means, based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition different from any of the plurality of conditions in the first game state, The game machine C8 is characterized in that the second game state can be set regardless of whether the conditions are satisfied.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines C1 to C7, when a specific condition is satisfied in the first game state, the second game state is forcibly entered regardless of whether a plurality of conditions are satisfied. Since it is set, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the first game state from continuing for an extremely long time and becoming excessively advantageous to the player.

In the game machine C8, a discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a predetermined first discrimination result. wherein the specific condition is established based on the execution of a predetermined specific number of times without the determination result of the determination means not becoming the first determination result. A gaming machine C9 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine C9, the first game state can be ended within the specified number of times of determination, so there is an effect that it is possible to suppress excessive advantages for the player.

<Characteristic group D> (A production that suggests the possibility that the first condition that can terminate the time saving state and a production that suggests the possibility that the second condition will be met can be executed independently)
A first game state setting means for setting a first game state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined set condition, and a first condition for determining whether the first condition for ending the first game state is established. determining means; second condition determining means for determining whether a second condition, which is a condition for ending the first game state and is different from the first condition, is met; and whether the first condition is met. A game machine D1 comprising a performance execution means capable of executing at least a first performance capable of suggesting the possibility and a second performance capable of suggesting the possibility that the second condition is satisfied.

Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed, thereby providing a winning game advantageous to the player. In addition, various images such as characters and scenery are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: 2003-325886).

However, it has been desired to realize a more suitable mode of presentation.

Further, some of such conventional gaming machines are configured so as to be capable of executing a production mode corresponding to each of a plurality of game states with different degrees of advantage, and at least a part of the game state with a high degree of advantage. , there is also one that is configured to be able to perform notification indicating the possibility (the number of games played) of the completion condition of the game state.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, even if a plurality of end conditions are provided, it is normal to notify only the possibility of fulfillment of one end condition that is most likely to be fulfilled. There is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the establishment possibility.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, by confirming the first effect and the second effect, the player can more accurately grasp the possibility of ending the first game state. , there is an effect that a suitable presentation mode can be realized.

The game machine D1 comprises a determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and the first condition is based on the fact that the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined first determination result. It is a condition that can be satisfied, and the second condition is a condition that can be satisfied based on the determination result of the determination means being a second determination result different from the first determination result. A game machine D2.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effects of the game machine D1, in the first game state, the player can play the game while paying attention to the discrimination result of the discrimination means, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine D2, the first condition is a condition that is satisfied when the first determination result is obtained a predetermined first number of times in the first game state of 1, and the second condition is a condition that is satisfied when the second determination result is obtained a predetermined number of times in the first game state of 1;

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D2, in the first game state, the number of times of the first discrimination result and the number of times of the second discrimination result can be paid attention to and played. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine D3, the first effect is a effect in which the effect mode can be varied according to the number of times the first determination result has been obtained in the first game state of 1, and the second effect is the effect of 1. The gaming machine D4 is characterized in that an effect mode is variable according to the number of times the second determination result is obtained in the first game state.

According to the gaming machine D4, by confirming the first effect and the second effect, it is possible to estimate the number of times the first determination result and the second determination result are obtained. There is an effect that convenience can be improved.

In the gaming machine D3 or D4, as the first game state, at least one of the first number of times and the second number of times is set to a different number of times, and the first game state is set. a suggestive effect executing means for executing a suggestive effect capable of suggesting to the player at least one of the first number of times and the second number of times set in the first game state before the game is played. Characterized game machine D5.

According to the gaming machine D5, since variations can be provided in the first game state, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Any one of the game machines D3 to D5, comprising privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a predetermined specific discrimination result, A gaming machine D6, wherein both the first determination result and the second determination result are determination results that are at least different from the specific determination result.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines D3 to D5, the first determination result and the second determination result are different conditions from the specific determination result, so in the first game state There is an effect that it is possible to strongly expect a specific determination result.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D6, the first game state is constituted by a game state in which even if one of the first condition and the second condition is met, the game can be continued while the other is not met. A gaming machine D7 characterized by:

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines D1 to D6, novel game characteristics are realized in which the first game state can be continued until both the first condition and the second condition are satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Characteristic group E> (When the first game state is set and when the second game state with a different number of times of time reduction is set, the number of lotteries of special figure 2 is made common )
discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition; discrimination means for performing discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition; a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a predetermined specific discrimination result; a first state forming means for forming a state; a second state forming means for forming a second state different from the first state based on establishment of a second forming condition different from the first forming condition; a first specific state forming means for forming a specific state in which the acquisition condition is unlikely to be satisfied based on the fact that a predetermined first condition is satisfied after the first state is formed; and the second state is formed. a second specific state forming means for forming the specific state based on the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition after the first condition is set, and after the first state is set, the The number of determinations by the determination means until determination using all of the determination information acquired before the formation of the specific state is completed, after the second state is set, the specific state The game machine E1 is characterized in that it can match the number of determinations of the determination means until the determination using all the determination information acquired before the formation of the is completed.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a winning game that is advantageous to the player is executed when the result of a lottery performed based on the entry of a game ball into a starting winning hole is a winning. . Among such gaming machines, there are some that aim to increase the player's interest in the game by setting a game state with a high degree of advantage for the player after the end of the winning game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2001-038007).

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of interest.

In addition, among such conventional gaming machines, there are a first start opening for executing a lottery with a relatively low degree of advantage and a second start opening for executing a lottery with a relatively high degree of advantage as a starting prize opening. and are provided to form a disadvantageous game state in which the second special symbol lottery executed based on the winning in the second start port is difficult to be executed, and a game state in which the second special symbol lottery is likely to be executed. There are also those that are configured to be possible. In such a conventional type gaming machine, when the number of times of lottery of the second special symbols executed after transitioning to an advantageous game state reaches a specified number of times, the advantageous game state is ended and the game state is changed to a disadvantageous game state. What is set is normal.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, in a plurality of states with a high degree of advantage, it is difficult to share the second special symbol lottery opportunity until the end condition is satisfied and the game state is set to be disadvantageous. There is a possibility that

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, it is possible to execute the determination the same number of times regardless of the different states, so there is an effect that the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

In the gaming machine E1, a game in which one of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state can be set based on the establishment of a predetermined set condition. State setting means is provided, wherein the first state is a state that can be formed based on the setting of the first game state, and the second state is based on the setting of the second game state. A gaming machine E2 characterized by being in a state that can be formed by

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, it is possible to share the number of determinations of the determination means between the first state and the second state even though different game states are set. has the effect of

In the gaming machine E2, a third game state different from the first game state and the second game state can be set based on the first number of determinations by the determination means in the first game state. A third game state setting means is provided, wherein the second game state is a game state in which the discrimination by the discrimination means can be executed a second number of times larger than the first number of times, and the third game state is the The game machine E3 is in a game state in which the discrimination by the discrimination means can be executed a third number of times, which is less than two times.

According to the gaming machine E3, when the second state is formed, it is possible to perform the determination of the third number of times in the third game state after performing the determination of the first number of times in the second state of the game. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress monotony.

In the gaming machine E3, the first condition is a condition that can be satisfied when the determination by the determination means is performed the third number of times in the third game state, and the second condition is the second game. A condition that can be satisfied when the discrimination by the discrimination means is executed the second number of times in the state, and the second number of times is equal to the sum of the first number of times and the third number of times. Gaming machine E4 to play.

According to the game machine E4, there is an effect that the number of determinations of the determination means can be reliably matched between the first state and the second state.

In the game machine E3 or E4, the discrimination information acquisition means acquires the first discrimination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and acquires the first discrimination information upon the establishment of the second acquisition condition different from the first acquisition condition. second determination information can be obtained based on the determination, and the determination means is a first determination means for performing determination using the first determination information based on the establishment of a first determination condition; and a second determination means for performing determination using the second determination information based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition, wherein the second determination means is configured to have a higher degree of advantage than the determination by the first determination means, and the third game state setting means performs the first number of determinations by the second determination means in the first game state. Based on that, the third game state can be set, the second game state is a game state in which the determination by the second determination means can be executed the second number of times, and the third game state is a gaming machine E5, characterized in that the gaming machine E5 is in a game state in which the discrimination by the second discrimination means can be executed for the third number of times.

According to the gaming machine E5, it is possible to realize novel game characteristics in which the number of determinations of the second determining means, which has a high degree of advantage, can be shared between the first state and the second state. There is an effect that the interest in the game can be further improved.

The gaming machine E5 comprises discrimination information storage means capable of storing the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means until discrimination by the discrimination means using the discrimination information is executed, and the specific state is: The game machine E6 is in the first game state in which the second discrimination information is not stored in the discrimination information storage means.

According to the gaming machine E6, if the first game state is set in a state in which the second determination information is stored, the third game state in which the second determination can be executed can be set. If the information is not stored, a disadvantageous specific state is formed, so there is an effect that the number of stored second discrimination information at the time when the first game state is set can be noticed.

In the gaming machine E6, when the first formation condition is established, the second discrimination information is likely to be stored in the discrimination information storage means at least before the first game state is set. The game machine E7 is characterized by comprising an effect executing means capable of executing a notification effect for notifying a game method.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E6, the notification performance can be executed before the first game state is set, and the second discrimination information can be stored in the discrimination information storage means. Therefore, it is possible to reliably perform the determination by the second determining means in the first game state. Therefore, there is an effect that the number of times of determination by the second determining means can be reliably matched between the first state and the second state.

<Feature F group> (Return after reaching the limit with 1 type 2 types of time saving limit machine)
A first determination means for executing a first determination based on the establishment of a first determination condition, and an advantage over the first determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition A second determination means that performs a second determination with a high degree, and either the determination result of the first determination or the determination result of the second determination is a predetermined specific determination result. a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the above; a game state setting means, and a second game state setting means for setting a second game state having a lower advantage than the first game state based on the establishment of a second set condition in the first game state; , wherein a specific state in which the second determination is likely to be executed can be formed from when the second game state is set until the specific condition is established.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a winning game that is advantageous to the player is executed when the result of a lottery performed based on the entry of a game ball into a starting winning hole is a winning. . Among such gaming machines, there are some that aim to increase the player's interest in the game by setting a game state with a high degree of advantage for the player after the end of the winning game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2001-038007).

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of interest.

In addition, in such conventional gaming machines, after a specific game state with a high degree of advantage is continuously set for a specified number of times as a game state that is set after execution of a winning game is completed, Furthermore, even if a winning game corresponding to a specific game state is executed, there is also a game that employs a control that forcibly sets a game state with a low degree of advantage.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, when a game state with a low degree of advantage is set, the degree of expectation for winning is greatly reduced, and the player's motivation for playing the game is greatly reduced. There is

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, it is possible to create a state in which the second determination with a high degree of advantage is likely to be executed even though the second game state with a low degree of advantage is set. It is possible to reduce the feeling of disappointment that the game state has been set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine F1, an obtaining means for obtaining discrimination information to be used for discrimination by the second discrimination means based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition; and a determination information storage means capable of storing up to a specific number of information as an upper limit until being used for determination by the second determination means, wherein the specific state is at least the determination of the number of information larger than the specific number of information. A gaming machine F2 characterized by being in a state capable of executing the second determination using information.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, the formation of the specific state causes the second determination to be executed a relatively large number of times. has the effect of being able to please

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, game state determination means for determining one of a plurality of game states including at least the first game state and the second game state as the game state after the bonus game is completed. In addition, the first game state is set by the game state determination means to the first game state rather than the second game state when the specific determination result is obtained in a state where a predetermined first condition is not satisfied. The game state becomes easier to determine, and when the specific determination result is obtained in a state where the first condition is satisfied, the game state determining means determines the above-mentioned rather than the state where the first condition is not satisfied. The game machine F3 is characterized by being in a game state in which the second game state is easily determined.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effects of the game machine F1 or F2, the player can expect a specific determination result while the first condition is not satisfied in the first game state. There is an effect that the interest in the game can be further improved.

In the gaming machine F3, the first condition can be satisfied based on the fact that the first game state is determined by the game state determination means continuously over a predetermined specific number of times of the privilege game. A gaming machine F4 characterized by a condition.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F3, when the first game state is set, it is very advantageous that the advantageous first game state is likely to be set continuously over a specific number of privilege games. Therefore, when the first game state is set, there is an effect that the player can feel a great sense of satisfaction.

A third game state for setting a third game state in which the second determination condition is likely to be satisfied based on the fact that a predetermined second condition is satisfied in the second game state in any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4. A game state setting means is provided, and in the second game state set based on the establishment of the second setting condition, the second game state set based on the establishment of a setting condition different from the second setting condition is provided. The game machine F5 is characterized in that the second condition is more likely to be satisfied than in the game state.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the degree of advantage of the second gaming state set based on the establishment of the second setting condition is set at another opportunity. There is an effect that it is possible to realize novel game characteristics that can be higher than in the second game state.

In the gaming machine F5, the second condition is a condition that is satisfied based on the first determination result different from the specific determination result in the determination of the second determination means in the second game state. A game machine F6 characterized by.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effect of the game machine F5, when the second determination means performs the determination in the second game state, the game can be played while paying attention to the determination result. be.

In the game machine F6, the determination by the first determination means is a determination that cannot result in the first determination result.

According to the game machine F7, in addition to the effects of the game machine F6, even if the determination by the first determination means is executed, the first determination result is not obtained, so the determination by the second determination means is executed in the second game state. There is an effect that it can be made to expect things more strongly.

In the game machine F6 or F7, the game machine F8 is characterized in that the execution of the privilege game is substantially determined when the determination by the second determination means does not result in the first determination result.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F6 or F7, when the determination by the second determination means is executed in the second game state, the privilege game is executed or the third game state is executed. Since it is either one of the following, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further enhanced.

In the gaming machine F8, there are a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position in which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a second position in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. and a variable means that can be varied between two positions, and when the determination result of the second determination means becomes a predetermined second determination result, the variable means is changed from the second position to the Variable game execution means for executing a variable game that is variable to a first position, and second game execution means for executing the privilege game based on the fact that a game ball enters the ball entry means during execution of the variable game. and a privilege game execution means, wherein the determination by the first determination means is a determination that cannot result in the second determination result, and the determination by the second determination means is the specific determination result and the first determination result. and the second determination result.

According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F8, when the determination by the second determination means is executed in the second game state, a specific determination result is obtained and the privilege game is executed or the first Since the third game state is set as a determination result or the variable game is executed as a second determination result, the first determination that cannot be either the first determination result or the second determination result. The degree of advantage can be increased significantly compared to the determination of the means. Therefore, when the discrimination by the second discrimination means is executed, the player can have a great sense of anticipation, so that there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Characteristic group G> (Predetermined effects are executed during the period from when the game state is changed until the reserved balls acquired in the game state before the change are consumed)
A first game state setting means for setting a first game state advantageous to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined set condition, and a first effect can be executed based on the setting of the first game state. A first effect execution means and a performance mode in which the player can recognize the first game state based on the establishment of a predetermined specific execution condition during the execution of the first effect. A gaming machine G1 characterized by comprising a second effect execution means for executing the configured second effect.

Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed, thereby providing a winning game advantageous to the player. In addition, various images such as characters and scenery are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: 2003-325886).

However, it has been desired to realize a more suitable mode of presentation.

In addition, among such conventional gaming machines, there are also those that are configured to be capable of providing a plurality of game states with different degrees of advantage, and executing an effect in a corresponding effect mode for each game state.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, an effect corresponding to the set game state is executed at the same time when one game state is completed and set, and a game of a game method corresponding to the set game state is played. If the player starts immediately, it may be difficult to set the effect appropriately.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, by confirming the second effect, the player can be made to recognize that the first game state has been set, so that the effect can be preferably set. It has the effect of being able to

In the game machine G1, discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, discrimination means for executing discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, and the discrimination A privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the means becoming a predetermined specific determination result, and the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means. , a determination information storage means that can store a predetermined number of information as an upper limit until it is used for determination of the determination means, and the specific execution condition is set to the determination at the time when the first game state is set. The game machine G2 is characterized by a condition that can be established after the discrimination using all the discrimination information stored in the information storage means is completed.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1, the second effect can be executed after the discrimination using all the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means is completed. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game corresponding to the first game state from being started while the discrimination information is stored in the information storage means.

The gaming machine G2 comprises display means capable of displaying identification information, and dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means on the display means. The condition is a condition that can be established after the dynamic display of the identification information based on the discrimination using all the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means at the time the first game state is set. A gaming machine G3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G2, during the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information based on the discrimination information acquired before the first gaming state is set, the player can There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the start of a game corresponding to the game state.

In the gaming machine G2 or G3, a first termination condition is satisfied when the number of determinations by the determination means executed after the first game state is set reaches a predetermined specific number. Based on that, a first ending means for ending the first game state and setting a second game state having a lower advantage than the first game state, and the first end condition in the first game state a second end means for ending the first game state and setting the second game state based on the establishment of a second end condition different from the A case where a game is played by a game method corresponding to the first game state immediately after the first game state is set, and all stored in the discrimination information storage means at the time when the first game state is set. After the determination using the determination information is completed, the second game is performed before the first end condition is satisfied in both the case where the game is played in the game method corresponding to the first game state. The game machine G4 is characterized in that the end condition is likely to be satisfied.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G2 or G3, during the first presentation, the player continues to check the first presentation without playing a game, and the first presentation is performed based on the start of the second presentation. Even if the game is played in a game method corresponding to the game state, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the loss of the player.

The game machine G5 is characterized in that, in any one of the game machines G1 to G4, the first effect is constructed in a performance mode that makes the player think that the first game state is not set.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the player can be made to think that the first gaming state is not set until the second effect is executed. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from starting a game corresponding to the first game state before a specific execution condition is satisfied.

<Characteristic H Group> (Production that suggests the possibility that a specific condition that can end a predetermined game state is established)
A first game state setting means for setting a first game state advantageous to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined set condition, and a condition determination means for determining whether a first condition capable of ending the first game state is satisfied. and effect executing means capable of executing at least a first effect capable of suggesting the possibility that the first condition is satisfied.

Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed, thereby providing a winning game advantageous to the player. In addition, various images such as characters and scenery are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: 2003-325886).

However, it has been desired to realize a more suitable mode of presentation.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, by confirming the first effect, it is possible for the player to grasp the possibility that the first game state will end, so that a suitable effect mode can be realized. It has the effect of being able to

The game machine H1 comprises a determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a determination condition, and the first condition is based on the fact that the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined first determination result. A game machine H2 characterized by being a condition that can be established.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1, in the first game state, the game can be played while paying attention to the discrimination result of the discrimination means, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. has the effect of being able to

The game machine H2 is characterized in that the first condition is a condition that is established based on the first determination result being obtained a predetermined first number of times in the first game state of 1. Game machine H3.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H2, in the first gaming state, the game can be played by paying attention to the number of first determination results, so that the player's interest in the game can be enhanced. There is an effect that it can be improved.

In the gaming machine H3, a second condition determining means capable of determining whether a second condition different from the first condition, which is a condition for ending the first game state, has been established; and a second effect execution means capable of executing a second effect capable of suggesting a sexuality, wherein the second condition is a predetermined second number of times the determination result of the determination means in the first game state of 1. , a gaming machine H4 characterized in that the condition is established based on a second determination result different from the first determination result.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effects of the game machine H3, in the first game state, it is possible to focus on both the number of times of the first discrimination result and the number of times of the second discrimination result. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the game machine H4, the first effect is a effect in which the effect mode can be changed according to the number of times the first determination result is obtained in the first game state of 1, and the second effect is a effect of 1. The game machine H5 is characterized in that the effect mode is variable depending on the number of times the second determination result is obtained in the first game state.

According to the gaming machine H5, by confirming the first effect and the second effect, it is possible to estimate the number of times the first determination result and the second determination result are obtained. There is an effect that convenience can be improved.

<Characteristic group I> (predetermined effects are executed in a predetermined period after the game state is changed)
A first game state setting means for setting a first game state based on the establishment of a predetermined set condition; and a first effect execution capable of executing a first effect based on the setting of the first game state. means, a second effect execution means for executing a second effect in a different effect mode from the first effect based on the establishment of a predetermined specific execution condition during the execution of the first effect, A gaming machine I1 characterized by comprising:

Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed, thereby providing a winning game advantageous to the player. In addition, various images such as characters and scenery are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: 2003-325886).

However, it has been desired to realize a more suitable mode of presentation.

In addition, among such conventional gaming machines, there are also those that are configured to be capable of providing a plurality of game states with different degrees of advantage, and executing an effect in a corresponding effect mode for each game state.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, an effect corresponding to the set game state is executed at the same time when one game state is completed and set, and a game of a game method corresponding to the set game state is played. If the player starts immediately, it may be difficult to set the effect appropriately.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, there is an effect that the effect can be preferably set.

In the gaming machine I1, the gaming machine I2 is characterized in that the second presentation is constructed in a presentation mode in which the player can recognize that the game state is the first gaming state.

According to the game machine I2, in addition to the effect of the game machine I1, there is an effect that the player can recognize that the first game state has been set by confirming the second effect.

In the gaming machine I1 or I2, discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition; discrimination means for executing discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means; A privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a predetermined specific discrimination result; and the discrimination obtained by the discrimination information acquisition means. a determination information storage means capable of storing information up to a predetermined number of information until it is used for determination by the determination means, and the specific execution condition is set at the time when the first game state is set A game machine I3 characterized by a condition that can be satisfied after the determination using all the determination information stored in the determination information storage means is completed.

According to the game machine I3, in addition to the effects of the game machine I1 or I2, the second effect can be executed after the discrimination using all the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means is completed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game corresponding to the first game state from being started while the discrimination information is stored in the discrimination information storage means.

The gaming machine I3 comprises display means capable of displaying identification information, and dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means on the display means. The condition is a condition that can be established after the dynamic display of the identification information based on the discrimination using all the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means at the time the first game state is set. A gaming machine I4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I3, during the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information based on the identification information acquired before the first gaming state is set, the player can There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the start of a game corresponding to the game state.

In the gaming machine I3 or I4, a first termination condition is satisfied when the number of determinations by the determination means executed after the first game state is set reaches a predetermined specific number. Based on that, a first ending means for ending the first game state and setting a second game state having a lower advantage than the first game state, and the first end condition in the first game state a second end means for ending the first game state and setting the second game state based on the establishment of a second end condition different from the A case where a game is played by a game method corresponding to the first game state immediately after the first game state is set, and all stored in the discrimination information storage means at the time when the first game state is set. After the determination using the determination information is completed, the second game is performed before the first end condition is satisfied in both the case where the game is played in the game method corresponding to the first game state. The game machine I5 is characterized in that the end condition is likely to be established.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I3 or I4, during the first presentation, the player continues to confirm the first presentation without playing a game, and the first presentation is performed based on the start of the second presentation. Even if the game is played in a game method corresponding to the game state, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the loss of the player.

A gaming machine Z1 characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine in any one of the gaming machines described above. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after the lapse of a predetermined time, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

A gaming machine Z2 characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of the gaming machines described above. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

A gaming machine Z3 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines execute a winning game that is advantageous to a player when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball into a starting winning hole is a winning. Among such gaming machines, there are some that aim to increase the player's interest in the game by setting a game state with a high degree of advantage for the player after the end of the winning game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2001-038007).
However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of interest.
The present technical idea was made in order to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of the player in the game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to technical idea 1 comprises a first determination means for executing a first determination based on the establishment of a first determination condition, and a second determination means different from the first determination condition. A second determination means for executing a second determination having a higher degree of advantage than the first determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, and a determination result of the first determination and a determination result of the second determination. A privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the fact that either one of the above results in a predetermined specific determination result, and based on the establishment of the first setting condition, the second A first game state setting means for setting a first game state in which the determination condition of is likely to be satisfied, and a degree of advantage over the first game state based on the fact that the second set condition is satisfied in the first game state. a second game state setting means for setting a second game state in which the second game state is low, and a specific state in which the second determination is likely to be executed during a period from the setting of the second game state to the establishment of the specific condition. can be formed.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, comprising an acquiring means for acquiring discrimination information to be used for discrimination by the second discriminating means based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition; a determination information storage means capable of storing the determination information acquired by the means, up to a predetermined number of specific information, until the determination information is used for determination by the second determination means, wherein the specific state is It is a state in which the second determination using at least the number of pieces of information of the determination information greater than the number of pieces of the specific information can be executed.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the gaming machine includes at least the first gaming state and the second gaming state as the gaming state after the privilege game ends. provided with a game state determining means for determining one of the game states, wherein the first game state is the game state when the specific determination result is obtained in a state where a predetermined first condition is not satisfied; The first game state is more likely to be determined than the second game state by the state determination means, and the first condition is satisfied when the specific determination result is obtained in the state in which the first condition is satisfied. This is a game state in which the second game state is more likely to be determined by the game state determining means than in a state in which the second game state is not played.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 3, wherein the first condition is continuously determined by the gaming state determining means over a predetermined specific number of privilege games. This is a condition that can be established based on the determination of the 1 game state.
The gaming machine according to Technical Idea 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of Technical Ideas 1 to 4, wherein the second condition is satisfied in the second gaming state. A third game state setting means for setting a third game state in which a discrimination condition is likely to be satisfied is provided, and in the second game state set based on the establishment of the second set condition, the second set condition and the is a configuration in which the second condition is more likely to be established than the second game state set based on the establishment of different set conditions.
<effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, a first determination means for executing a first determination based on the establishment of a first determination condition, and a second determination condition different from the first determination condition. A second determination means for executing a second determination having a higher degree of advantage than the first determination based on the establishment, and either the determination result of the first determination or the determination result of the second determination. Bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on a predetermined specific determination result, and the second determination condition based on the establishment of the first set condition. A first game state setting means for setting a first game state that is likely to be established; a second game state setting means for setting a game state, and during a period from when the second game state is set until when a specific condition is established, a specific state in which the second determination is likely to be executed can be formed. be.
As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, discrimination information for use in discrimination by the second discrimination means is acquired based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. and a determination information storage means capable of storing the discrimination information acquired by the acquisition means, up to a predetermined specific number of information, until the discrimination information is used for discrimination by the second discrimination means. In addition, the specific state is a state in which the second determination using at least the number of pieces of the determination information greater than the number of the specific pieces of information can be executed.
As a result, when the specific state is formed, the second determination is executed a relatively large number of times, so there is an effect that the player can be pleased when the specific state is formed.
According to the gaming machine according to Technical Thought 3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to Technical Thought 1 or 2, the first gaming state and the second gaming state are provided as the gaming state after the privilege game ends. and a game state determining means for determining one of a plurality of game states including at least a state, wherein the first game state is determined by the specific determination result and the specific determination result in a state where a predetermined first condition is not satisfied. In this case, the first game state is more likely to be determined than the second game state by the game state determination means, and when the specific determination result is obtained in the state where the first condition is satisfied. , is a game state in which the second game state is more likely to be determined by the game state determining means than in a state in which the first condition is not satisfied.
As a result, it is possible to expect a specific determination result while the first condition is not satisfied in the first game state, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved. .
According to the gaming machine according to Technical Thought 4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to Technical Thought 3, the first condition is continuously over a predetermined specific number of privilege games, Since it is a condition that can be established based on the determination of the first game state by the game state determination means, when the first game state is set, the advantageous first game state is continuously played over a specific number of privilege games. To form an extremely advantageous situation in which it is easy to be set to a game state. Therefore, when the first game state is set, there is an effect that the player can feel a great sense of satisfaction.
According to the gaming machine according to Technical Idea 5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to any one of Technical Ideas 1 to 4, when the predetermined second condition is established in the second gaming state, A third game state setting means is provided for setting a third game state in which the second determination condition is likely to be established based on the second game state, and in the second game state set based on the establishment of the second setting condition, The second condition is more likely to be established than the second game state set based on the establishment of a setting condition different from the second setting condition.
As a result, the degree of advantage of the second game state set based on the establishment of the second set condition can be made higher than that of the second game state set by another opportunity, thereby realizing novel game characteristics. It has the effect of being able to

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)

Claims (1)

a shooting means capable of shooting game balls into a game area;
a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball launched by the launching means;
Acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information when a first condition that can be established based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means is satisfied;
a storage means capable of storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means;
A game machine having a determination means capable of performing determination based on the predetermined information stored in the storage means when a first execution condition is satisfied,
means capable of generating a specific game state based on the result of the determination by the determination means being a specific determination result;
a second ball-entering means capable of entering a game ball launched by the launching means and different from the first ball-entering means;
A first position that allows a game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and a second position that makes it more difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means than the first position. a displacement means displaceable between
a first displacement control for displacing the displacement means positioned at the second position to the first position; and a second displacement control for displacing the displacement means positioned at the first position to the second position. displacement control, and displacement control means capable of at least
The displacement control means executes the first displacement control based on the establishment of a first condition that can be established in the specific game state, and the displacement means is positioned at the first position by the first displacement control. configured to execute the second displacement control based on the establishment of a second condition that can be established in a situation where the
The game machine is
A predetermined value is awarded to a player when a game ball enters at least the first ball entering means,
A first mode based on the execution of the determination by the determination means, a second mode based on the occurrence of the specific game state, and a third mode based on the predetermined ball entering the second ball entry means. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so that at least

Images